Add pages that were produced for the POSIX.1-2008 TC 1 release

1144 files changed, 249303 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/Makefile b/man-pages-posix-2013/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7e71ec0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+# Do "make screen" first, if you want to protect already installed,
+# more up-to-date manual pages than the ones included in this package.
+# Do "make install" to copy the pages to their destination.
+# Do "make gz" or "make bz2" first if you use compressed source pages.
+
+DESTDIR=
+prefix?=/usr
+MANDIR=$(prefix)/share/man
+
+GZIP=gzip -9
+BZIP2=bzip2 -9
+
+all: screen remove install
+
+allgz: gz all
+
+allbz: bz2 all
+
+screen:
+	-mkdir not_installed
+	for i in man?p/*; do \
+		if [ $(MANDIR)/"$$i" -nt "$$i" ]; then \
+			cmp -s $(MANDIR)/"$$i" "$$i" > /dev/null 2>&1; \
+			if [ "$$?" != 0 ]; then mv "$$i" not_installed; fi; \
+		fi; \
+	done
+
+remove:
+	for i in man?p/*; do \
+		rm -f $(MANDIR)/"$$i" $(MANDIR)/"$$i".gz $(MANDIR)/"$$i".bz2; \
+	done
+
+gz:
+	for i in man?p; do $(GZIP) "$$i"/*; done
+
+bz2:
+	for i in man?p; do $(BZIP2) "$$i"/*; done
+
+# Use with
+#  make HTDIR=/some/dir HTOPTS=whatever html
+# The sed removes the lines "Content-type: text/html\n\n"
+html:
+	@if [ x$(HTDIR) = x ]; then echo "You must set HTDIR."; else \
+	for i in man?p; do \
+		[ -d $(HTDIR)/"$$i" ] || mkdir -p $(HTDIR)/"$$i"; \
+		find "$$i/" -type f | while read f; do \
+			(cd "$$i"; man2html $(HTOPTS) `basename $$f`) | \
+			sed -e '1,2d' > $(HTDIR)/"$$i"/`basename $$f`.html; \
+		done; \
+	done; fi
+
+install:
+	for i in man?p; do \
+		install -d -m 755 $(DESTDIR)$(MANDIR)/"$$i" || exit $$?; \
+		install -m 644 "$$i"/* $(DESTDIR)$(MANDIR)/"$$i" || exit $$?; \
+	done; \
+
+# someone might also want to look at /var/catman/cat2 or so ...
+# a problem is that the location of cat pages varies a lot
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/POSIX-COPYRIGHT b/man-pages-posix-2013/POSIX-COPYRIGHT
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3097301
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/POSIX-COPYRIGHT
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) and
+The Open Group, have given us permission to reprint portions of
+their documentation.
+
+In the following statement, the phrase ``this text'' refers to
+portions of the system documentation.
+
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of Electri-
+cal and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.  (This is
+POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document.  The original Standard can be obtained online
+at http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+This notice shall appear on any product containing this material.
+
+Redistribution of this material is permitted so long as this notice and
+the corresponding notices within each POSIX manual page are retained on
+any distribution, and the nroff source is included. Modifications to
+the text are permitted so long as any conflicts with the standard
+are clearly marked as such in the text.
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/README b/man-pages-posix-2013/README
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8e1ccb8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/README
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+These are pages from POSIX.1-2008, Technical Corrigendum 1.
+Since TC1 appeared in 2013, it is also known as POSIX.1-2013.
+
+This package contains the POSIX man pages (pages in sections
+except 0p, 1p, and 3p). Some more information is given in the
+`Announce' file.  Some background on UNIX standards, including
+POSIX, can be found in the standards(7) page provide as part
+of the separate Linux man-pages package.
+
+Install by copying to your favourite location.
+"make install" will just copy them to /usr/share/man/man[013]p.
+"make" will move the pages from this package that are older than
+the already installed ones to a subdirectory `not_installed',
+then remove old versions (compressed or not),
+compress the pages, and copy them to /usr/share/man/man[013]p.
+
+Note that you may have to remove preformatted pages.
+
+Copyrights: see the file POSIX-COPYRIGHT.
+
+If you have corrections and additions to suggest, then visit
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man-pages-posix-2013-a.Announce b/man-pages-posix-2013/man-pages-posix-2013-a.Announce
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6b16e78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man-pages-posix-2013-a.Announce
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+RELEASE
+The Linux man-pages maintainer proudly announces. . .
+
+    man-pages-posix-2013-a.tar.gz - POSIX man pages
+
+For further information, visit http://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/
+
+POSIX
+This release contains a copy of the POSIX 1003.1-2013 man pages.
+The directories man0p, man1p, man3p contain descriptions of the
+headers, the utilities, and the functions documented in that standard.
+For the copyright notice, see the file POSIX-COPYRIGHT.
+
+In order to use this, put in {/usr/share/misc/}man.conf{ig} or so
+your favourite order of looking at these pages, for example,
+MANSECT         1p:1:8:0p:3p:2:3:4:5:6:7:9:tcl:n:l:p:o
+or set the MANSECT environment variable.
+
+Here is a breakdown of what this distribution contains:
+
+    Section 0p = POSIX headers
+    Section 1p = POSIX utilities
+    Section 3p = POSIX functions
+
+Copyright information:
+
+    For the POSIX pages permission to distribute was given by IEEE
+    and the Open Group, see POSIX-COPYRIGHT.
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man-pages-posix-2013-a.lsm b/man-pages-posix-2013/man-pages-posix-2013-a.lsm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d9bfaa6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man-pages-posix-2013-a.lsm
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+Begin3
+Title:          Section 0p, 1p, and 3p man pages (the POSIX.1-2013 man-pages) for Linux
+Version:        2013-a
+Entered-date:   2014-01-19
+Description:    POSIX manual pages
+Keywords:       man pages
+Author:         The Open Group
+Maintained-by:  Michael Kerrisk <mtk.manpages@gmail.com>
+Primary-site:   https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/docs/man-pages/man-pages-posix/
+                1499k man-pages-posix-2013-a.tar.gz
+Copying-policy: See the file POSIX-COPYRIGHT;
+End
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/aio.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/aio.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0a5c829
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/aio.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,174 @@
+'\" et
+.TH aio.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+aio.h
+\(em asynchronous input and output
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <aio.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <aio.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR aiocb
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int             aio_fildes     \fRFile descriptor.\fR
+off_t           aio_offset     \fRFile offset.\fR
+volatile void  *aio_buf        \fRLocation of buffer.\fR
+size_t          aio_nbytes     \fRLength of transfer.\fR
+int             aio_reqprio    \fRRequest priority offset.\fR
+struct sigevent aio_sigevent   \fRSignal number and value.\fR
+int             aio_lio_opcode \fROperation to be performed.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <aio.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR off_t ,
+.BR pthread_attr_t ,
+.BR size_t ,
+and
+.BR ssize_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <aio.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR "struct timespec"
+structure as described in
+.IR <time.h> .
+.P
+The tag
+.BR sigevent
+shall be declared as naming an incomplete structure type, the contents
+of which are described in the
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header.
+.P
+The
+.IR <aio.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants:
+.IP AIO_ALLDONE 14
+A return value indicating that none of the requested operations could
+be canceled since they are already complete.
+.IP AIO_CANCELED 14
+A return value indicating that all requested operations have been
+canceled.
+.IP AIO_NOTCANCELED 14
+.br
+A return value indicating that some of the requested operations could
+not be canceled since they are in progress.
+.IP LIO_NOP 14
+A
+\fIlio_listio\fR()
+element operation option indicating that no transfer is requested.
+.IP LIO_NOWAIT 14
+A
+\fIlio_listio\fR()
+synchronization operation indicating that the calling thread is to
+continue execution while the
+\fIlio_listio\fR()
+operation is being performed, and no notification is given when the
+operation is complete.
+.IP LIO_READ 14
+A
+\fIlio_listio\fR()
+element operation option requesting a read.
+.IP LIO_WAIT 14
+A
+\fIlio_listio\fR()
+synchronization operation indicating that the calling thread is to
+suspend until the
+\fIlio_listio\fR()
+operation is complete.
+.IP LIO_WRITE 14
+A
+\fIlio_listio\fR()
+element operation option requesting a write.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int      aio_cancel(int, struct aiocb *);
+int      aio_error(const struct aiocb *);
+int      aio_fsync(int, struct aiocb *);
+int      aio_read(struct aiocb *);
+ssize_t  aio_return(struct aiocb *);
+int      aio_suspend(const struct aiocb *const [], int,
+             const struct timespec *);
+int      aio_write(struct aiocb *);
+int      lio_listio(int, struct aiocb *restrict const [restrict], int,
+             struct sigevent *restrict);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <aio.h> 
+header may make visible symbols defined in the headers
+.IR <fcntl.h> ,
+.IR <signal.h> ,
+and
+.IR <time.h> .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<fcntl.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIaio_cancel\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_error\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_fsync\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_read\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_return\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_suspend\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_write\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfsync\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlio_listio\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlseek\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/arpa_inet.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/arpa_inet.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6c4bdbe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/arpa_inet.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
+'\" et
+.TH arpa_inet.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+arpa/inet.h
+\(em definitions for internet operations
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <arpa/inet.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <arpa/inet.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR in_port_t
+and
+.BR in_addr_t
+types as described in
+.IR <netinet/in.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <arpa/inet.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR in_addr
+structure as described in
+.IR <netinet/in.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <arpa/inet.h> 
+header shall define the INET_ADDRSTRLEN
+and INET6_ADDRSTRLEN
+macros as described in
+.IR <netinet/in.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions, or defined as macros,
+or both. If functions are declared, function prototypes shall be
+provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+uint32_t htonl(uint32_t);
+uint16_t htons(uint16_t);
+uint32_t ntohl(uint32_t);
+uint16_t ntohs(uint16_t);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <arpa/inet.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR uint32_t
+and
+.BR uint16_t
+types as described in
+.IR <inttypes.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+in_addr_t    inet_addr(const char *);
+char        *inet_ntoa(struct in_addr);
+const char  *inet_ntop(int, const void *restrict, char *restrict,
+                 socklen_t);
+int          inet_pton(int, const char *restrict, void *restrict);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <arpa/inet.h> 
+header may also make visible all symbols from
+.IR <netinet/in.h> 
+and
+.IR <inttypes.h> .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<inttypes.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<netinet_in.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIhtonl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIinet_addr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIinet_ntop\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/assert.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/assert.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2957f9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/assert.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+'\" et
+.TH assert.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+assert.h
+\(em verify program assertion
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <assert.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+.IR <assert.h> 
+header shall define the
+\fIassert\fR()
+macro. It refers to the macro NDEBUG
+which is not defined in the header. If NDEBUG is defined as a macro
+name before the inclusion of this header, the
+\fIassert\fR()
+macro shall be defined simply as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#define assert(ignore)((void) 0)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Otherwise, the macro behaves as described in
+\fIassert\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIassert\fR()
+macro shall be redefined according to the current state of NDEBUG each
+time
+.IR <assert.h> 
+is included.
+.P
+The
+\fIassert\fR()
+macro shall be implemented as a macro, not as a function. If the macro
+definition is suppressed in order to access an actual function, the
+behavior is undefined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIassert\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/complex.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/complex.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..517ecf4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/complex.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,254 @@
+'\" et
+.TH complex.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+complex.h
+\(em complex arithmetic
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+.IR <complex.h> 
+header shall define the following macros:
+.IP complex 12
+Expands to
+.BR _Complex .
+.IP _Complex_I 12
+Expands to a constant expression of type
+.BR "const float _Complex" ,
+with the value of the imaginary unit (that is, a number
+.IR i
+such that \fIi\fR\s-3\u2\d\s+3=\(mi1).
+.IP imaginary 12
+Expands to
+.BR _Imaginary .
+.IP _Imaginary_I 12
+Expands to a constant expression of type
+.BR "const float _Imaginary"
+with the value of the imaginary unit.
+.IP I 12
+Expands to either _Imaginary_I or _Complex_I. If _Imaginary_I is not
+defined, I expands to _Complex_I.
+.P
+The macros imaginary and _Imaginary_I shall be defined if and only if
+the implementation supports imaginary types.
+.P
+An application may undefine and then, perhaps, redefine the complex,
+imaginary, and I macros.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+double               cabs(double complex);
+float                cabsf(float complex);
+long double          cabsl(long double complex);
+double complex       cacos(double complex);
+float complex        cacosf(float complex);
+double complex       cacosh(double complex);
+float complex        cacoshf(float complex);
+long double complex  cacoshl(long double complex);
+long double complex  cacosl(long double complex);
+double               carg(double complex);
+float                cargf(float complex);
+long double          cargl(long double complex);
+double complex       casin(double complex);
+float complex        casinf(float complex);
+double complex       casinh(double complex);
+float complex        casinhf(float complex);
+long double complex  casinhl(long double complex);
+long double complex  casinl(long double complex);
+double complex       catan(double complex);
+float complex        catanf(float complex);
+double complex       catanh(double complex);
+float complex        catanhf(float complex);
+long double complex  catanhl(long double complex);
+long double complex  catanl(long double complex);
+double complex       ccos(double complex);
+float complex        ccosf(float complex);
+double complex       ccosh(double complex);
+float complex        ccoshf(float complex);
+long double complex  ccoshl(long double complex);
+long double complex  ccosl(long double complex);
+double complex       cexp(double complex);
+float complex        cexpf(float complex);
+long double complex  cexpl(long double complex);
+double               cimag(double complex);
+float                cimagf(float complex);
+long double          cimagl(long double complex);
+double complex       clog(double complex);
+float complex        clogf(float complex);
+long double complex  clogl(long double complex);
+double complex       conj(double complex);
+float complex        conjf(float complex);
+long double complex  conjl(long double complex);
+double complex       cpow(double complex, double complex);
+float complex        cpowf(float complex, float complex);
+long double complex  cpowl(long double complex, long double complex);
+double complex       cproj(double complex);
+float complex        cprojf(float complex);
+long double complex  cprojl(long double complex);
+double               creal(double complex);
+float                crealf(float complex);
+long double          creall(long double complex);
+double complex       csin(double complex);
+float complex        csinf(float complex);
+double complex       csinh(double complex);
+float complex        csinhf(float complex);
+long double complex  csinhl(long double complex);
+long double complex  csinl(long double complex);
+double complex       csqrt(double complex);
+float complex        csqrtf(float complex);
+long double complex  csqrtl(long double complex);
+double complex       ctan(double complex);
+float complex        ctanf(float complex);
+double complex       ctanh(double complex);
+float complex        ctanhf(float complex);
+long double complex  ctanhl(long double complex);
+long double complex  ctanl(long double complex);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Values are interpreted as radians, not degrees.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The choice of
+.IR I
+instead of
+.IR i
+for the imaginary unit concedes to the widespread use of the identifier
+.IR i
+for other purposes. The application can use a different identifier, say
+.IR j ,
+for the imaginary unit by following the inclusion of the
+.IR <complex.h> 
+header with:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#undef I
+#define j _Imaginary_I
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+An
+.IR I
+suffix to designate imaginary constants is not required, as
+multiplication by
+.IR I
+provides a sufficiently convenient and more generally useful notation
+for imaginary terms. The corresponding real type for the imaginary unit
+is
+.BR float ,
+so that use of
+.IR I
+for algorithmic or notational convenience will not result in
+widening types.
+.P
+On systems with imaginary types, the application has the ability to
+control whether use of the macro I introduces an imaginary type, by
+explicitly defining I to be _Imaginary_I or _Complex_I. Disallowing
+imaginary types is useful for some applications intended to run on
+implementations without support for such types.
+.P
+The macro _Imaginary_I provides a test for whether imaginary types are
+supported.
+.P
+The
+\fIcis\fR()
+function (\fIcos\fR(\fIx\fR) + \fII\fR*\fIsin\fR(\fIx\fR)) was
+considered but rejected because its implementation is easy and
+straightforward, even though some implementations could compute sine
+and cosine more efficiently in tandem.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The following function names and the same names suffixed with
+.IR f
+or
+.IR l
+are reserved for future use, and may be added to the declarations
+in the
+.IR <complex.h> 
+header.
+.sp
+.RS
+.TS
+tab(!);
+l l l.
+T{
+.nf
+\fIcerf\fR()
+\fIcerfc\fR()
+\fIcexp2\fR()
+T}!T{
+.nf
+\fIcexpm1\fR()
+\fIclog10\fR()
+\fIclog1p\fR()
+T}!T{
+.nf
+\fIclog2\fR()
+\fIclgamma\fR()
+\fIctgamma\fR()
+.fi
+T}
+.TE
+.RE
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIcabs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcacos\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcacosh\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcarg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcasin\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcasinh\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcatan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcatanh\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIccos\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIccosh\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcexp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcimag\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclog\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIconj\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcpow\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcproj\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcreal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcsin\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcsinh\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcsqrt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIctan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIctanh\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/cpio.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/cpio.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f3727ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/cpio.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+'\" et
+.TH cpio.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cpio.h
+\(em cpio archive values
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <cpio.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <cpio.h> 
+header shall define the symbolic constants needed by the
+.IR c_mode
+field of the
+.IR cpio
+archive format, with the names and values given in the following table:
+.TS
+box center tab(@);
+cB| cB |cB
+l| l |c.
+Name@Description@Value (Octal)
+_
+C_IRUSR@Read by owner.@0000400
+C_IWUSR@Write by owner.@0000200
+C_IXUSR@Execute by owner.@0000100
+C_IRGRP@Read by group.@0000040
+C_IWGRP@Write by group.@0000020
+C_IXGRP@Execute by group.@0000010
+C_IROTH@Read by others.@0000004
+C_IWOTH@Write by others.@0000002
+C_IXOTH@Execute by others.@0000001
+C_ISUID@Set user ID.@0004000
+C_ISGID@Set group ID.@0002000
+C_ISVTX@On directories, restricted deletion flag.@0001000
+C_ISDIR@Directory.@0040000
+C_ISFIFO@FIFO.@0010000
+C_ISREG@Regular file.@0100000
+C_ISBLK@Block special.@0060000
+C_ISCHR@Character special.@0020000
+C_ISCTG@Reserved.@0110000
+C_ISLNK@Symbolic link.@0120000
+C_ISSOCK@Socket.@0140000
+.TE
+.P
+The
+.IR <cpio.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant as a string:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+MAGIC    "070707"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIpax\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/ctype.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/ctype.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a85b241
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/ctype.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,138 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ctype.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ctype.h
+\(em character types
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ctype.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Some of the functionality described on this reference page extends the
+ISO\ C standard. Applications shall define the appropriate feature test macro
+(see the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment")
+to enable the visibility of these symbols in this header.
+.P
+The
+.IR <ctype.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR locale_t
+type as described in
+.IR <locale.h> ,
+representing a locale object.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided for use with ISO\ C standard
+compilers.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int   isalnum(int);
+int   isalnum_l(int, locale_t);
+int   isalpha(int);
+int   isalpha_l(int, locale_t);
+int   isascii(int);
+int   isblank(int);
+int   isblank_l(int, locale_t);
+int   iscntrl(int);
+int   iscntrl_l(int, locale_t);
+int   isdigit(int);
+int   isdigit_l(int, locale_t);
+int   isgraph(int);
+int   isgraph_l(int, locale_t);
+int   islower(int);
+int   islower_l(int, locale_t);
+int   isprint(int);
+int   isprint_l(int, locale_t);
+int   ispunct(int);
+int   ispunct_l(int, locale_t);
+int   isspace(int);
+int   isspace_l(int, locale_t);
+int   isupper(int);
+int   isupper_l(int, locale_t);
+int   isxdigit(int);
+int   isxdigit_l(int, locale_t);
+int   toascii(int);
+int   tolower(int);
+int   tolower_l(int, locale_t);
+int   toupper(int);
+int   toupper_l(int, locale_t);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <ctype.h> 
+header shall define the following as macros:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int   _toupper(int);
+int   _tolower(int);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment",
+.IR "\fIisalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisascii\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisblank\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiscntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIispunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImblen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbstowcs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbtowc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItoascii\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItolower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fI_tolower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItoupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fI_toupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcstombs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwctomb\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/dirent.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/dirent.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3df87ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/dirent.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+'\" et
+.TH dirent.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+dirent.h
+\(em format of directory entries
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <dirent.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The internal format of directories is unspecified.
+.P
+The
+.IR <dirent.h> 
+header shall define the following type:
+.IP "\fBDIR\fR" 8
+A type representing a directory stream. The
+.BR DIR
+type may be an incomplete type.
+.P
+It shall also define the structure
+.BR dirent
+which shall include the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ino_t  d_ino       \fRFile serial number.\fR
+char   d_name[]    \fRFilename string of entry.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <dirent.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR ino_t
+type as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The array
+.IR d_name
+is of unspecified size, but shall contain a filename of at most
+{NAME_MAX}
+bytes followed by a terminating null byte.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int            alphasort(const struct dirent **, const struct dirent **);
+int            closedir(DIR *);
+int            dirfd(DIR *);
+DIR           *fdopendir(int);
+DIR           *opendir(const char *);
+struct dirent *readdir(DIR *);
+int            readdir_r(DIR *restrict, struct dirent *restrict,
+                   struct dirent **restrict);
+void           rewinddir(DIR *);
+int            scandir(const char *, struct dirent ***,
+                   int (*)(const struct dirent *),
+                   int (*)(const struct dirent **,
+                   const struct dirent **));
+void           seekdir(DIR *, long);
+long           telldir(DIR *);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Information similar to that in the
+.IR <dirent.h> 
+header is contained in a file
+.IR <sys/dir.h> 
+in 4.2 BSD and 4.3 BSD. The equivalent in these implementations of
+.BR "struct dirent"
+from this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 is
+.BR "struct direct" .
+The filename was changed because the name
+.IR <sys/dir.h> 
+was also used in earlier implementations to refer to definitions
+related to the older access method; this produced name conflicts. The
+name of the structure was changed because this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not completely
+define what is in the structure, so it could be different on some
+implementations from
+.BR "struct direct" .
+.P
+The name of an array of
+.BR char
+of an unspecified size should not be used as an lvalue. Use of:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sizeof(d_name)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+is incorrect; use:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+strlen(d_name)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+instead.
+.P
+The array of
+.BR char
+.IR d_name
+is not a fixed size. Implementations may need to declare
+.BR "struct dirent"
+with an array size for
+.IR d_name
+of 1, but the actual number of bytes provided matches (or only slightly
+exceeds) the length of the filename string.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIalphasort\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclosedir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdirfd\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfdopendir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIreaddir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrewinddir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIseekdir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItelldir\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/dlfcn.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/dlfcn.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a33c254
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/dlfcn.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+'\" et
+.TH dlfcn.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+dlfcn.h
+\(em dynamic linking
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <dlfcn.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <dlfcn.h> 
+header shall define at least the following symbolic constants for use
+in the construction of a
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+.IR mode
+argument:
+.IP RTLD_LAZY 14
+Relocations are performed at an implementation-defined time.
+.IP RTLD_NOW 14
+Relocations are performed when the object is loaded.
+.IP RTLD_GLOBAL 14
+All symbols are available for relocation processing of other modules.
+.IP RTLD_LOCAL 14
+All symbols are not made available for relocation processing by other
+modules.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int    dlclose(void *);
+char  *dlerror(void);
+void  *dlopen(const char *, int);
+void  *dlsym(void *restrict, const char *restrict);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIdlclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdlerror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdlopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdlsym\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/errno.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/errno.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..856ae5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/errno.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,333 @@
+'\" et
+.TH errno.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+errno.h
+\(em system error numbers
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <errno.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Some of the functionality described on this reference page extends
+the ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here
+and the ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The ISO\ C standard only requires the symbols
+.BR [EDOM] ,
+.BR [EILSEQ] ,
+and
+.BR [ERANGE] 
+to be defined.
+.P
+The
+.IR <errno.h> 
+header shall provide a declaration or definition for
+.IR errno .
+The symbol
+.IR errno
+shall expand to a modifiable lvalue of type
+.BR int .
+It is unspecified whether
+.IR errno
+is a macro or an identifier declared with external linkage. If a macro
+definition is suppressed in order to access an actual object, or a
+program defines an identifier with the name
+.IR errno ,
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The
+.IR <errno.h> 
+header shall define the following macros which shall expand to
+integer constant expressions with type
+.BR int ,
+distinct positive values (except as noted below), and which shall be
+suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives:
+.TP
+.BR E2BIG
+Argument list too long.
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Permission denied.
+.TP
+.BR EADDRINUSE
+Address in use.
+.TP
+.BR EADDRNOTAVAIL
+Address not available.
+.TP
+.BR EAFNOSUPPORT
+Address family not supported.
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+Resource unavailable, try again (may be the same value as
+.BR [EWOULDBLOCK] ).
+.TP
+.BR EALREADY
+Connection already in progress.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+Bad file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EBADMSG
+Bad message.
+.TP
+.BR EBUSY
+Device or resource busy.
+.TP
+.BR ECANCELED
+Operation canceled.
+.TP
+.BR ECHILD
+No child processes.
+.TP
+.BR ECONNABORTED
+Connection aborted.
+.TP
+.BR ECONNREFUSED
+Connection refused.
+.TP
+.BR ECONNRESET
+Connection reset.
+.TP
+.BR EDEADLK
+Resource deadlock would occur.
+.TP
+.BR EDESTADDRREQ
+Destination address required.
+.TP
+.BR EDOM
+Mathematics argument out of domain of function.
+.TP
+.BR EDQUOT
+Reserved.
+.TP
+.BR EEXIST
+File exists.
+.TP
+.BR EFAULT
+Bad address.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+File too large.
+.TP
+.BR EHOSTUNREACH
+Host is unreachable.
+.TP
+.BR EIDRM
+Identifier removed.
+.TP
+.BR EILSEQ
+Illegal byte sequence.
+.TP
+.BR EINPROGRESS
+Operation in progress.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+Interrupted function.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+Invalid argument.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+I/O error.
+.TP
+.BR EISCONN
+Socket is connected.
+.TP
+.BR EISDIR
+Is a directory.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+Too many levels of symbolic links.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+File descriptor value too large.
+.TP
+.BR EMLINK
+Too many links.
+.TP
+.BR EMSGSIZE
+Message too large.
+.TP
+.BR EMULTIHOP
+Reserved.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+Filename too long.
+.TP
+.BR ENETDOWN
+Network is down.
+.TP
+.BR ENETRESET
+Connection aborted by network.
+.TP
+.BR ENETUNREACH
+Network unreachable.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+Too many files open in system.
+.TP
+.BR ENOBUFS
+No buffer space available.
+.TP
+.BR ENODATA
+No message is available on the STREAM head read queue.
+.TP
+.BR ENODEV
+No such device.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+No such file or directory.
+.TP
+.BR ENOEXEC
+Executable file format error.
+.TP
+.BR ENOLCK
+No locks available.
+.TP
+.BR ENOLINK
+Reserved.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Not enough space.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMSG
+No message of the desired type.
+.TP
+.BR ENOPROTOOPT
+Protocol not available.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+No space left on device.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSR
+No STREAM resources.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSTR
+Not a STREAM.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSYS
+Function not supported.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTCONN
+The socket is not connected.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+Not a directory or a symbolic link to a directory.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTEMPTY
+Directory not empty.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTRECOVERABLE
+.br
+State not recoverable.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSOCK
+Not a socket.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSUP
+Not supported (may be the same value as
+.BR [EOPNOTSUPP] ).
+.TP
+.BR ENOTTY
+Inappropriate I/O control operation.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+No such device or address.
+.TP
+.BR EOPNOTSUPP
+Operation not supported on socket (may be the same value as
+.BR [ENOTSUP] ).
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+Value too large to be stored in data type.
+.TP
+.BR EOWNERDEAD
+Previous owner died.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+Operation not permitted.
+.TP
+.BR EPIPE
+Broken pipe.
+.TP
+.BR EPROTO
+Protocol error.
+.TP
+.BR EPROTONOSUPPORT
+.br
+Protocol not supported.
+.TP
+.BR EPROTOTYPE
+Protocol wrong type for socket.
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+Result too large.
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+Read-only file system.
+.TP
+.BR ESPIPE
+Invalid seek.
+.TP
+.BR ESRCH
+No such process.
+.TP
+.BR ESTALE
+Reserved.
+.TP
+.BR ETIME
+Stream
+\fIioctl\fR()
+timeout.
+.TP
+.BR ETIMEDOUT
+Connection timed out.
+.TP
+.BR ETXTBSY
+Text file busy.
+.TP
+.BR EWOULDBLOCK
+Operation would block (may be the same value as
+.BR [EAGAIN] ).
+.TP
+.BR EXDEV
+Cross-device link.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Additional error numbers may be defined on conforming systems; see
+the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.3" ", " "Error Numbers"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/fcntl.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/fcntl.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6848144
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/fcntl.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,375 @@
+'\" et
+.TH fcntl.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fcntl.h
+\(em file control options
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <fcntl.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for the
+.IR cmd
+argument used by
+\fIfcntl\fR().
+The values shall be unique and shall be suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives.
+.IP F_DUPFD 12
+Duplicate file descriptor.
+.IP F_DUPFD_CLOEXEC 12
+.br
+Duplicate file descriptor with the close-on-\c
+.IR exec
+flag FD_CLOEXEC set.
+.IP F_GETFD 12
+Get file descriptor flags.
+.IP F_SETFD 12
+Set file descriptor flags.
+.IP F_GETFL 12
+Get file status flags and file access modes.
+.IP F_SETFL 12
+Set file status flags.
+.IP F_GETLK 12
+Get record locking information.
+.IP F_SETLK 12
+Set record locking information.
+.IP F_SETLKW 12
+Set record locking information; wait if blocked.
+.IP F_GETOWN 12
+Get process or process group ID to receive SIGURG signals.
+.IP F_SETOWN 12
+Set process or process group ID to receive SIGURG signals.
+.P
+The
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant used for the
+\fIfcntl\fR()
+file descriptor flags, which shall be suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives.
+.IP FD_CLOEXEC 12
+Close the file descriptor upon execution of an
+.IR exec
+family function.
+.P
+The
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+header shall also define the following symbolic constants for the
+.IR l_type
+argument used for record locking with
+\fIfcntl\fR().
+The values shall be unique and shall be suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives.
+.IP F_RDLCK 12
+Shared or read lock.
+.IP F_UNLCK 12
+Unlock.
+.IP F_WRLCK 12
+Exclusive or write lock.
+.P
+The
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+header shall define the values used for
+.IR l_whence ,
+SEEK_SET, SEEK_CUR, and SEEK_END
+as described in
+.IR <stdio.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants as file creation
+flags for use in the
+.IR oflag
+value to
+\fIopen\fR()
+and
+\fIopenat\fR().
+The values shall be bitwise-distinct and shall be suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives.
+.IP O_CLOEXEC 12
+The FD_CLOEXEC flag associated with the new descriptor shall be
+set to close the file descriptor upon execution of an
+.IR exec
+family function.
+.IP O_CREAT 12
+Create file if it does not exist.
+.IP O_DIRECTORY 12
+Fail if not a directory.
+.IP O_EXCL 12
+Exclusive use flag.
+.IP O_NOCTTY 12
+Do not assign controlling terminal.
+.IP O_NOFOLLOW 12
+Do not follow symbolic links.
+.IP O_TRUNC 12
+Truncate flag.
+.IP O_TTY_INIT 12
+Set the
+.BR termios
+structure terminal parameters to a state that provides conforming
+behavior; see
+.IR "Section 11.2" ", " "Parameters that Can be Set".
+.P
+The O_TTY_INIT flag can have the value zero and in this case it need
+not be bitwise-distinct from the other flags.
+.P
+The
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use as
+file status flags for
+\fIopen\fR(),
+\fIopenat\fR(),
+and
+\fIfcntl\fR().
+The values shall be suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives.
+.IP O_APPEND 12
+Set append mode.
+.IP O_DSYNC 12
+Write according to synchronized I/O data integrity completion.
+.IP O_NONBLOCK 12
+Non-blocking mode.
+.IP O_RSYNC 12
+Synchronized read I/O operations.
+.IP O_SYNC 12
+Write according to synchronized I/O file integrity completion.
+.P
+The
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant for use as the mask
+for file access modes. The value shall be suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives.
+.IP O_ACCMODE 12
+Mask for file access modes.
+.P
+The
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use as
+the file access modes for
+\fIopen\fR(),
+\fIopenat\fR(),
+and
+\fIfcntl\fR().
+The values shall be unique, except that O_EXEC and O_SEARCH may have
+equal values. The values shall be suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives.
+.IP O_EXEC 12
+Open for execute only (non-directory files). The result is unspecified
+if this flag is applied to a directory.
+.IP O_RDONLY 12
+Open for reading only.
+.IP O_RDWR 12
+Open for reading and writing.
+.IP O_SEARCH 12
+Open directory for search only. The result is unspecified if this flag
+is applied to a non-directory file.
+.IP O_WRONLY 12
+Open for writing only.
+.P
+The
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+header shall define the symbolic constants for file modes for use as
+values of
+.BR mode_t
+as described in
+.IR <sys/stat.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant as a special value
+used in place of a file descriptor for the
+.IR *at (\|)
+functions which take a directory file descriptor as a parameter:
+.IP AT_FDCWD 12
+Use the current working directory to determine the target of relative
+file paths.
+.P
+The
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant as a value for the
+.IR flag
+used by
+\fIfaccessat\fR():
+.IP AT_EACCESS 12
+Check access using effective user and group ID.
+.P
+The
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant as a value for the
+.IR flag
+used by
+\fIfstatat\fR(),
+\fIfchmodat\fR(),
+\fIfchownat\fR(),
+and
+\fIutimensat\fR():
+.IP AT_SYMLINK_NOFOLLOW 12
+.br
+Do not follow symbolic links.
+.P
+The
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant as a value for
+the flag used by
+\fIlinkat\fR():
+.IP AT_SYMLINK_FOLLOW 12
+.br
+Follow symbolic link.
+.br
+.P
+The
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant as a value
+for the flag used by
+\fIunlinkat\fR():
+.IP AT_REMOVEDIR 12
+.br
+Remove directory instead of file.
+.P
+The
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for the
+.IR advice
+argument used by
+\fIposix_fadvise\fR():
+.IP POSIX_FADV_DONTNEED 6
+.br
+The application expects that it will not access the specified data in
+the near future.
+.IP POSIX_FADV_NOREUSE 6
+.br
+The application expects to access the specified data once and then not
+reuse it thereafter.
+.IP POSIX_FADV_NORMAL 6
+.br
+The application has no advice to give on its behavior with respect to
+the specified data. It is the default characteristic if no advice is
+given for an open file.
+.IP POSIX_FADV_RANDOM 6
+.br
+The application expects to access the specified data in a random
+order.
+.IP POSIX_FADV_SEQUENTIAL 6
+.br
+The application expects to access the specified data sequentially from
+lower offsets to higher offsets.
+.IP POSIX_FADV_WILLNEED 6
+.br
+The application expects to access the specified data in the near
+future.
+.P
+The
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR flock
+structure describing a file lock. It shall include the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+short  l_type   \fRType of lock; F_RDLCK, F_WRLCK, F_UNLCK.\fR
+short  l_whence \fRFlag for starting offset.\fR
+off_t  l_start  \fRRelative offset in bytes.\fR
+off_t  l_len    \fRSize; if 0 then until EOF.\fR
+pid_t  l_pid    \fRProcess ID of the process holding the lock; returned with F_GETLK.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR mode_t ,
+.BR off_t ,
+and
+.BR pid_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int  creat(const char *, mode_t);
+int  fcntl(int, int, ...);
+int  open(const char *, int, ...);
+int  openat(int, const char *, int, ...);
+int  posix_fadvise(int, off_t, off_t, int);
+int  posix_fallocate(int, off_t, off_t);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+header may also make visible all symbols from
+.IR <sys/stat.h> 
+and
+.IR <unistd.h> .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Although no existing implementation defines AT_SYMLINK_FOLLOW and
+AT_SYMLINK_NOFOLLOW as the same numeric value, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not prohibit
+that as the two constants are not used with the same interfaces.
+.SH RATIONALE
+While many of the symbolic constants introduced in the
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+header do not strictly need to be used in
+.BR #if
+preprocessor directives, widespread historic practice has defined
+them as macros that are usable in such constructs, and examination
+of existing applications has shown that they are occasionally used in
+such a way. Therefore it was decided to retain this requirement on an
+implementation in POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIcreat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfutimens\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_fadvise\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_fallocate\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_madvise\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/fenv.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/fenv.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b0b014d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/fenv.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,285 @@
+'\" et
+.TH fenv.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fenv.h
+\(em floating-point environment
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <fenv.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+.IR <fenv.h> 
+header shall define the following data types through
+.BR typedef :
+.IP "\fBfenv_t\fR" 10
+Represents the entire floating-point environment. The floating-point
+environment refers collectively to any floating-point status flags and
+control modes supported by the implementation.
+.IP "\fBfexcept_t\fR" 10
+Represents the floating-point status flags collectively, including any
+status the implementation associates with the flags. A floating-point
+status flag is a system variable whose value is set (but never cleared)
+when a floating-point exception is raised, which occurs as a side-effect
+of exceptional floating-point arithmetic to provide auxiliary
+information. A floating-point control mode is a system variable whose
+value may be set by the user to affect the subsequent behavior of
+floating-point arithmetic.
+.P
+The
+.IR <fenv.h> 
+header shall define each of the following macros if and only if the
+implementation supports the floating-point exception by means of the
+floating-point functions
+\fIfeclearexcept\fR(),
+\fIfegetexceptflag\fR(),
+\fIferaiseexcept\fR(),
+\fIfesetexceptflag\fR(),
+and
+\fIfetestexcept\fR().
+The defined macros shall expand to integer constant expressions with
+values that are bitwise-distinct.
+.sp
+.RS
+FE_DIVBYZERO
+FE_INEXACT
+FE_INVALID
+FE_OVERFLOW
+FE_UNDERFLOW
+.RE
+.P
+If the implementation supports the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option, all
+five macros shall be defined.
+Additional implementation-defined floating-point exceptions with
+macros beginning with FE_ and an uppercase letter may also be
+specified by the implementation.
+.P
+The
+.IR <fenv.h> 
+header shall define the macro FE_ALL_EXCEPT as the bitwise-inclusive
+OR of all floating-point exception macros defined by the
+implementation, if any. If no such macros are defined, then the
+macro FE_ALL_EXCEPT shall be defined as zero.
+.P
+The
+.IR <fenv.h> 
+header shall define each of the following macros if and only if the
+implementation supports getting and setting the represented rounding
+direction by means of the
+\fIfegetround\fR()
+and
+\fIfesetround\fR()
+functions. The defined macros shall expand to integer constant
+expressions whose values are distinct non-negative values.
+.sp
+.RS
+FE_DOWNWARD
+FE_TONEAREST
+FE_TOWARDZERO
+FE_UPWARD
+.RE
+.P
+If the implementation supports the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option, all
+four macros shall be defined.
+Additional implementation-defined rounding directions with macros
+beginning with FE_ and an uppercase letter may also be specified by the
+implementation.
+.P
+The
+.IR <fenv.h> 
+header shall define the following macro, which represents the
+default floating-point environment (that is, the one installed at
+program startup) and has type pointer to const-qualified
+.BR fenv_t .
+It can be used as an argument to the functions within the
+.IR <fenv.h> 
+header that manage the floating-point environment.
+.sp
+.RS
+FE_DFL_ENV
+.RE
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int  feclearexcept(int);
+int  fegetenv(fenv_t *);
+int  fegetexceptflag(fexcept_t *, int);
+int  fegetround(void);
+int  feholdexcept(fenv_t *);
+int  feraiseexcept(int);
+int  fesetenv(const fenv_t *);
+int  fesetexceptflag(const fexcept_t *, int);
+int  fesetround(int);
+int  fetestexcept(int);
+int  feupdateenv(const fenv_t *);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The FENV_ACCESS pragma provides a means to inform the implementation
+when an application might access the floating-point environment to test
+floating-point status flags or run under non-default floating-point
+control modes. The pragma shall occur either outside external
+declarations or preceding all explicit declarations and statements
+inside a compound statement. When outside external declarations, the
+pragma takes effect from its occurrence until another FENV_ACCESS
+pragma is encountered, or until the end of the translation unit. When
+inside a compound statement, the pragma takes effect from its
+occurrence until another FENV_ACCESS pragma is encountered (including
+within a nested compound statement), or until the end of the compound
+statement; at the end of a compound statement the state for the pragma
+is restored to its condition just before the compound statement. If
+this pragma is used in any other context, the behavior is undefined. If
+part of an application tests floating-point status flags, sets
+floating-point control modes, or runs under non-default mode settings,
+but was translated with the state for the FENV_ACCESS pragma off, the
+behavior is undefined. The default state (on or off) for the pragma is
+implementation-defined. (When execution passes from a part of the
+application translated with FENV_ACCESS off to a part translated with
+FENV_ACCESS on, the state of the floating-point status flags is
+unspecified and the floating-point control modes have their default
+settings.)
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+This header is designed to support the floating-point exception status
+flags and directed-rounding control modes required by the IEC\ 60559:\|1989 standard, and
+other similar floating-point state information. Also it is designed to
+facilitate code portability among all systems.
+.P
+Certain application programming conventions support the intended model
+of use for the floating-point environment:
+.IP " *" 4
+A function call does not alter its caller's floating-point control
+modes, clear its caller's floating-point status flags, nor depend on
+the state of its caller's floating-point status flags unless the
+function is so documented.
+.IP " *" 4
+A function call is assumed to require default floating-point control
+modes, unless its documentation promises otherwise.
+.IP " *" 4
+A function call is assumed to have the potential for raising
+floating-point exceptions, unless its documentation promises otherwise.
+.P
+With these conventions, an application can safely assume default
+floating-point control modes (or be unaware of them). The
+responsibilities associated with accessing the floating-point
+environment fall on the application that does so explicitly.
+.P
+Even though the rounding direction macros may expand to constants
+corresponding to the values of FLT_ROUNDS, they are not required to do
+so.
+.P
+For example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <fenv.h>
+void f(double x)
+{
+    #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
+    void g(double);
+    void h(double);
+    /* ... */
+    g(x + 1);
+    h(x + 1);
+    /* ... */
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the function
+\fIg\fR()
+might depend on status flags set as a side-effect of the first
+.IR x +1,
+or if the second
+.IR x +1
+might depend on control modes set as a side-effect of the call to
+function
+\fIg\fR(),
+then the application shall contain an appropriately placed invocation
+as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+.SS "The fexcept_t Type"
+.P
+.BR fexcept_t
+does not have to be an integer type. Its values must be obtained by a
+call to
+\fIfegetexceptflag\fR(),
+and cannot be created by logical operations from the exception macros.
+An implementation might simply implement
+.BR fexcept_t
+as an
+.BR int
+and use the representations reflected by the exception macros, but is
+not required to; other representations might contain extra information
+about the exceptions.
+.BR fexcept_t
+might be a
+.BR struct
+with a member for each exception (that might hold the address of the
+first or last floating-point instruction that caused that exception).
+The ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1999 standard makes no claims about the internals of an
+.BR fexcept_t ,
+and so the user cannot inspect it.
+.SS "Exception and Rounding Macros"
+.P
+Macros corresponding to unsupported modes and rounding directions are
+not defined by the implementation and must not be defined by the
+application. An application might use
+.BR #ifdef
+to test for this.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfegetenv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfegetexceptflag\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfegetround\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeholdexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIferaiseexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeupdateenv\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/float.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/float.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f63b661
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/float.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,364 @@
+'\" et
+.TH float.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.EQ
+delim $$
+.EN
+.SH NAME
+float.h
+\(em floating types
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <float.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The characteristics of floating types are defined in terms of a model
+that describes a representation of floating-point numbers and values
+that provide information about an implementation's floating-point
+arithmetic.
+.P
+The following parameters are used to define the model for each
+floating-point type:
+.IP "\fIs\fP" 6
+Sign (\(+-1).
+.IP "\fIb\fP" 6
+Base or radix of exponent representation (an integer >1).
+.IP "\fIe\fP" 6
+Exponent (an integer between a minimum $e_ min$ and a maximum
+$e_ max$).
+.IP "\fIp\fP" 6
+Precision (the number of base\(mi\fIb\fP digits in the significand).
+.IP "$f_ k$" 6
+Non-negative integers less than
+.IR b
+(the significand digits).
+.P
+A floating-point number
+.IR x
+is defined by the following model:
+.P
+.EQ
+x  " "  =  " "  sb"^" e" "  " "  sum from k=1 to p^  " "  f_ k" "  " "  b"^" " "-k ,
+     " "  e_ min" "  " "  <=  " "  e  " "  <=  " "  e_ max" "
+.EN
+.P
+In addition to normalized floating-point numbers ($f_ 1$>0 if
+.IR x \(!=0),
+floating types may be able to contain other kinds of floating-point
+numbers, such as subnormal floating-point numbers (\c
+.IR x \(!=0,
+.IR e =\c
+$e_ min$, $f_ 1$=0) and unnormalized floating-point numbers (\c
+.IR x \(!=0,
+.IR e >\c
+$e_ min$, $f_ 1$=0), and values that are not floating-point
+numbers, such as infinities and NaNs. A
+.IR NaN
+is an encoding signifying Not-a-Number. A
+.IR "quiet NaN"
+propagates through almost every arithmetic operation without raising a
+floating-point exception; a
+.IR "signaling NaN"
+generally raises a floating-point exception when occurring as an
+arithmetic operand.
+.P
+An implementation may give zero and non-numeric values, such as
+infinities and NaNs, a sign, or may leave them unsigned. Wherever such
+values are unsigned, any requirement in POSIX.1\(hy2008 to retrieve the
+sign shall produce an unspecified sign and any requirement to set the
+sign shall be ignored.
+.P
+The accuracy of the floating-point operations (\c
+.BR '+' ,
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+.BR '*' ,
+.BR '/' )
+and of the functions in
+.IR <math.h> 
+and
+.IR <complex.h> 
+that return floating-point results is implementation-defined, as is the
+accuracy of the conversion between floating-point internal
+representations and string representations performed by the functions
+in
+.IR <stdio.h> ,
+.IR <stdlib.h> ,
+and
+.IR <wchar.h> .
+The implementation may state that the accuracy is unknown.
+.P
+All integer values in the
+.IR <float.h> 
+header, except FLT_ROUNDS, shall be constant expressions suitable for
+use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives; all floating values shall be constant
+expressions. All except DECIMAL_DIG, FLT_EVAL_METHOD, FLT_RADIX, and
+FLT_ROUNDS have separate names for all three floating-point types. The
+floating-point model representation is provided for all values except
+FLT_EVAL_METHOD and FLT_ROUNDS.
+.P
+The rounding mode for floating-point addition is characterized by the
+implementation-defined value of FLT_ROUNDS:
+.IP "\(mi1" 6
+Indeterminable.
+.IP "\00" 6
+Toward zero.
+.IP "\01" 6
+To nearest.
+.IP "\02" 6
+Toward positive infinity.
+.IP "\03" 6
+Toward negative infinity.
+.P
+All other values for FLT_ROUNDS characterize implementation-defined
+rounding behavior.
+.P
+The values of operations with floating operands and values subject to
+the usual arithmetic conversions and of floating constants are
+evaluated to a format whose range and precision may be greater than
+required by the type. The use of evaluation formats is characterized by
+the implementation-defined value of FLT_EVAL_METHOD:
+.IP "\(mi1" 6
+Indeterminable.
+.IP "\00" 6
+Evaluate all operations and constants just to the range and
+precision of the type.
+.IP "\01" 6
+Evaluate operations and constants of type
+.BR float
+and
+.BR double
+to the range and precision of the
+.BR double
+type; evaluate
+.BR "long double"
+operations and constants to the range and precision of the
+.BR "long double"
+type.
+.IP "\02" 6
+Evaluate all operations and constants to the range and precision of the
+.BR "long double"
+type.
+.P
+All other negative values for FLT_EVAL_METHOD characterize
+implementation-defined behavior.
+.P
+The
+.IR <float.h> 
+header shall define the following values as constant expressions with
+implementation-defined values that are greater or equal in magnitude
+(absolute value) to those shown, with the same sign.
+.IP " *" 4
+Radix of exponent representation,
+.IR b .
+.RS 4 
+.IP FLT_RADIX 14
+2
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Number of base-FLT_RADIX digits in the floating-point significand,
+.IR p .
+.RS 4 
+.IP FLT_MANT_DIG 14
+.IP DBL_MANT_DIG 14
+.IP LDBL_MANT_DIG 14
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Number of decimal digits,
+.IR n ,
+such that any floating-point number in the widest supported floating
+type with $p_ max$ radix
+.IR b
+digits can be rounded to a floating-point number with
+.IR n
+decimal digits and back again without change to the value.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+.EQ
+lpile { p_ max" "  " "  log_ 10" "  " "  b above
+left ceiling  " "  1  " "  +  " "  p_ max" "  " "  log_ 10" "  " "  b right ceiling }
+ " "   " "  lpile {if " " b " " is " " a " " power " " of " " 10 above otherwise}
+.EN
+.IP DECIMAL_DIG 14
+10
+.RE
+.br
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Number of decimal digits,
+.IR q ,
+such that any floating-point number with
+.IR q
+decimal digits can be rounded into a floating-point number with
+.IR p
+radix
+.IR b
+digits and back again without change to the
+.IR q
+decimal digits.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+.EQ
+lpile { p  " "  log_ 10" "  " "  b above
+left floor  " "  (p  " "  -  " "  1)  " "  log_ 10" "  " "  b  " "  right floor }
+ " "   " "  lpile {if " " b " " is " " a " " power " " of " " 10 above otherwise}
+.EN
+.IP FLT_DIG 14
+6
+.IP DBL_DIG 14
+10
+.IP LDBL_DIG 14
+10
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Minimum negative integer such that FLT_RADIX raised to that power
+minus 1 is a normalized floating-point number, $e_ min$.
+.RS 4 
+.IP FLT_MIN_EXP 14
+.IP DBL_MIN_EXP 14
+.IP LDBL_MIN_EXP 14
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Minimum negative integer such that 10 raised to that power is in
+the range of normalized floating-point numbers.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+.EQ
+left ceiling  " "  log_ 10" "  " "  b"^" " "{ e_ min" "  " " "^" " "-1 } ^  " "  right ceiling
+.EN
+.IP FLT_MIN_10_EXP 14
+\(mi37
+.IP DBL_MIN_10_EXP 14
+\(mi37
+.IP LDBL_MIN_10_EXP 14
+\(mi37
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Maximum integer such that FLT_RADIX raised to that power
+minus 1 is a representable finite floating-point number, $e_ max$.
+.RS 4 
+.IP FLT_MAX_EXP 14
+.IP DBL_MAX_EXP 14
+.IP LDBL_MAX_EXP 14
+.P
+Additionally, FLT_MAX_EXP shall be at least as large as FLT_MANT_DIG,
+DBL_MAX_EXP shall be at least as large as DBL_MANT_DIG, and LDBL_MAX_EXP
+shall be at least as large as LDBL_MANT_DIG; which has the effect that
+FLT_MAX, DBL_MAX, and LDBL_MAX are integral.
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Maximum integer such that 10 raised to that power is in the range
+of representable finite floating-point numbers.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+.EQ
+left floor  " "  log_ 10" " ( ( 1  " "  -  " "  b"^" " "-p )  " " 
+    b"^" e" "_ max" "^ )  " "  right floor
+.EN
+.IP FLT_MAX_10_EXP 14
++37
+.IP DBL_MAX_10_EXP 14
++37
+.IP LDBL_MAX_10_EXP 14
++37
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <float.h> 
+header shall define the following values as constant expressions with
+implementation-defined values that are greater than or equal to those
+shown:
+.IP " *" 4
+Maximum representable finite floating-point number.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+.EQ
+(1  " "  -  " "  b"^" " "-p^)  " "  b"^" e" "_ max" "
+.EN
+.IP FLT_MAX 14
+1E+37
+.IP DBL_MAX 14
+1E+37
+.IP LDBL_MAX 14
+1E+37
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <float.h> 
+header shall define the following values as constant expressions with
+implementation-defined (positive) values that are less than or equal to
+those shown:
+.IP " *" 4
+The difference between 1 and the least value greater than 1
+that is representable in the given floating-point type, $b"^" " "{1 " " - " " p}$.
+.RS 4 
+.IP FLT_EPSILON 14
+1E\(mi5
+.IP DBL_EPSILON 14
+1E\(mi9
+.IP LDBL_EPSILON 14
+1E\(mi9
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Minimum normalized positive floating-point number,
+$b"^" " "{ e_ min" "  " " "^" " "-1 }$.
+.RS 4 
+.IP FLT_MIN 14
+1E\(mi37
+.IP DBL_MIN 14
+1E\(mi37
+.IP LDBL_MIN 14
+1E\(mi37
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+All known hardware floating-point formats satisfy the property that the
+exponent range is larger than the number of mantissa digits. The ISO\ C standard
+permits a floating-point format where this property is not true, such that
+the largest finite value would not be integral; however, it is unlikely
+that there will ever be hardware support for such a floating-point format,
+and it introduces boundary cases that portable programs should not have
+to be concerned with (for example, a non-integral DBL_MAX means that
+\fIceil\fR()
+would have to worry about overflow). Therefore, this standard imposes
+an additional requirement that the largest representable finite value
+is integral.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/fmtmsg.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/fmtmsg.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..396e812
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/fmtmsg.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+'\" et
+.TH fmtmsg.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fmtmsg.h
+\(em message display structures
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <fmtmsg.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <fmtmsg.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants:
+.IP MM_HARD 14
+Source of the condition is hardware.
+.IP MM_SOFT 14
+Source of the condition is software.
+.IP MM_FIRM 14
+Source of the condition is firmware.
+.IP MM_APPL 14
+Condition detected by application.
+.IP MM_UTIL 14
+Condition detected by utility.
+.IP MM_OPSYS 14
+Condition detected by operating system.
+.IP MM_RECOVER 14
+Recoverable error.
+.IP MM_NRECOV 14
+Non-recoverable error.
+.IP MM_HALT 14
+Error causing application to halt.
+.IP MM_ERROR 14
+Application has encountered a non-fatal fault.
+.IP MM_WARNING 14
+Application has detected unusual non-error condition.
+.IP MM_INFO 14
+Informative message.
+.IP MM_NOSEV 14
+No severity level provided for the message.
+.IP MM_PRINT 14
+Display message on standard error.
+.IP MM_CONSOLE 14
+Display message on system console.
+.P
+The table below indicates the null values and identifiers for
+\fIfmtmsg\fR()
+arguments. The
+.IR <fmtmsg.h> 
+header shall define the symbolic constants in the
+.BR Identifier
+column, which shall have the type indicated in the
+.BR Type
+column:
+.TS
+box tab(!) center;
+cB | cB | cB | cB
+lI | lB | l | l.
+Argument!Type!Null-Value!Identifier
+_
+label!char *!(\fBchar\fR*)0!MM_NULLLBL
+severity!int!0!MM_NULLSEV
+class!long!\fB0L\fR!MM_NULLMC
+text!char *!(\fBchar\fR*)0!MM_NULLTXT
+action!char *!(\fBchar\fR*)0!MM_NULLACT
+tag!char *!(\fBchar\fR*)0!MM_NULLTAG
+.TE
+.P
+The
+.IR <fmtmsg.h> 
+header shall also define the following symbolic constants for use
+as return values for
+\fIfmtmsg\fR():
+.IP MM_OK 14
+The function succeeded.
+.IP MM_NOTOK 14
+The function failed completely.
+.IP MM_NOMSG 14
+The function was unable to generate a message on standard error, but
+otherwise succeeded.
+.IP MM_NOCON 14
+The function was unable to generate a console message, but otherwise
+succeeded.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as a function and may also be defined
+as a macro. A function prototype shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int fmtmsg(long, const char *, int,
+    const char *, const char *, const char *);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIfmtmsg\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/fnmatch.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/fnmatch.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..793945e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/fnmatch.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+'\" et
+.TH fnmatch.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fnmatch.h
+\(em filename-matching types
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <fnmatch.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <fnmatch.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants:
+.IP FNM_NOMATCH 14
+The string does not match the specified pattern.
+.IP FNM_PATHNAME 14
+<slash>
+in
+.IR string
+only matches
+<slash>
+in
+.IR pattern .
+.IP FNM_PERIOD 14
+Leading
+<period>
+in
+.IR string
+must be exactly matched by
+<period>
+in
+.IR pattern .
+.IP FNM_NOESCAPE 14
+Disable backslash escaping.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as a function and may also be defined
+as a macro. A function prototype shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int fnmatch(const char *, const char *, int);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIfnmatch\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/ftw.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/ftw.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ecd9c88
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/ftw.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ftw.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ftw.h
+\(em file tree traversal
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ftw.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <ftw.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR FTW
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int  base
+int  level
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <ftw.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use as values
+of the third argument to the application-supplied function that is
+passed as the second argument to
+\fIftw\fR()
+and
+\fInftw\fR():
+.IP FTW_F 14
+Non-directory file.
+.IP FTW_D 14
+Directory.
+.IP FTW_DNR 14
+Directory without read permission.
+.IP FTW_DP 14
+Directory with subdirectories visited.
+.IP FTW_NS 14
+Unknown type;
+\fIstat\fR()
+failed.
+.IP FTW_SL 14
+Symbolic link.
+.IP FTW_SLN 14
+Symbolic link that names a nonexistent file.
+.P
+The
+.IR <ftw.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use as
+values of the fourth argument to
+\fInftw\fR():
+.IP FTW_PHYS 14
+Physical walk, does not follow symbolic links. Otherwise,
+\fInftw\fR()
+follows links but does not walk down any path that crosses itself.
+.IP FTW_MOUNT 14
+The walk does not cross a mount point.
+.IP FTW_DEPTH 14
+All subdirectories are visited before the directory itself.
+.IP FTW_CHDIR 14
+The walk changes to each directory before reading it.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int ftw(const char *, int (*)(const char *, const struct stat *,
+    int), int);
+int nftw(const char *, int (*)(const char *, const struct stat *,
+    int, struct FTW *), int, int);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <ftw.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR stat
+structure and the symbolic names for
+.IR st_mode
+and the file type test macros as described in
+.IR <sys/stat.h> .
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <ftw.h> 
+header may also make visible all symbols from
+.IR <sys/stat.h> .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIftw\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fInftw\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/glob.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/glob.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c6eac83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/glob.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+'\" et
+.TH glob.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+glob.h
+\(em pathname pattern-matching types
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <glob.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <glob.h> 
+header shall define the structures and symbolic constants used by the
+\fIglob\fR()
+function.
+.P
+The
+.IR <glob.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR glob_t
+structure type, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+size_t   gl_pathc \fRCount of paths matched by \fIpattern.\fR
+char   **gl_pathv \fRPointer to a list of matched pathnames.\fR
+size_t   gl_offs  \fRSlots to reserve at the beginning of \fIgl_pathv.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <glob.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR size_t
+type as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <glob.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants as values for the
+.IR flags
+argument:
+.IP GLOB_APPEND 14
+Append generated pathnames to those previously obtained.
+.IP GLOB_DOOFFS 14
+Specify how many null pointers to add to the beginning of
+.IR gl_pathv .
+.IP GLOB_ERR 14
+Cause
+\fIglob\fR()
+to return on error.
+.IP GLOB_MARK 14
+Each pathname that is a directory that matches
+.IR pattern
+has a
+<slash>
+appended.
+.IP GLOB_NOCHECK 14
+If
+.IR pattern
+does not match any pathname, then return a list consisting of only
+.IR pattern .
+.IP GLOB_NOESCAPE 14
+Disable backslash escaping.
+.IP GLOB_NOSORT 14
+Do not sort the pathnames returned.
+.P
+The
+.IR <glob.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants as error
+return values:
+.IP GLOB_ABORTED 14
+The scan was stopped because GLOB_ERR was set or (*\fIerrfunc\fP)(\|)
+returned non-zero.
+.IP GLOB_NOMATCH 14
+The pattern does not match any existing pathname, and GLOB_NOCHECK was
+not set in
+.IR flags .
+.IP GLOB_NOSPACE 14
+An attempt to allocate memory failed.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int  glob(const char *restrict, int, int(*)(const char *, int),
+         glob_t *restrict);
+void globfree(glob_t *);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIglob\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/grp.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/grp.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..02033ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/grp.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+'\" et
+.TH grp.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+grp.h
+\(em group structure
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <grp.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <grp.h> 
+header shall declare the
+.BR group
+structure, which shall include the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+char   *gr_name \fRThe name of the group.\fR
+gid_t   gr_gid  \fRNumerical group ID.\fR
+char  **gr_mem  \fRPointer to a null-terminated array of character\fR
+                \fRpointers to member names.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <grp.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR gid_t
+and
+.BR size_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void           endgrent(void);
+struct group  *getgrent(void);
+struct group  *getgrgid(gid_t);
+int            getgrgid_r(gid_t, struct group *, char *,
+                   size_t, struct group **);
+struct group  *getgrnam(const char *);
+int            getgrnam_r(const char *, struct group *, char *,
+                   size_t , struct group **);
+void           setgrent(void);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIendgrent\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetgrgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetgrnam\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/iconv.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/iconv.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0552017
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/iconv.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+'\" et
+.TH iconv.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+iconv.h
+\(em codeset conversion facility
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <iconv.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <iconv.h> 
+header shall define the following types:
+.IP "\fBiconv_t\fP" 12
+Identifies the conversion from one codeset to another.
+.IP "\fBsize_t\fP" 12
+As described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+size_t  iconv(iconv_t, char **restrict, size_t *restrict,
+            char **restrict, size_t *restrict);
+int     iconv_close(iconv_t);
+iconv_t iconv_open(const char *, const char *);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIiconv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiconv_close\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiconv_open\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/inttypes.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/inttypes.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4c8ab75
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/inttypes.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,242 @@
+'\" et
+.TH inttypes.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+inttypes.h
+\(em fixed size integer types
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <inttypes.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Some of the functionality described on this reference page extends the
+ISO\ C standard. Applications shall define the appropriate feature test macro
+(see the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment")
+to enable the visibility of these symbols in this header.
+.P
+The
+.IR <inttypes.h> 
+header shall include the
+.IR <stdint.h> 
+header.
+.P
+The
+.IR <inttypes.h> 
+header shall define at least the following types:
+.IP "\fBimaxdiv_t\fR" 12
+Structure type that is the type of the value returned by the
+\fIimaxdiv\fR()
+function.
+.IP "\fBwchar_t\fR" 12
+As described in
+.IR <stddef.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <inttypes.h> 
+header shall define the following macros. Each expands to a
+character string literal containing a conversion specifier, possibly
+modified by a length modifier, suitable for use within the
+.IR format
+argument of a formatted input/output function when converting the
+corresponding integer type. These macros have the general form of
+PRI (character string literals for the
+\fIfprintf\fR()
+and
+\fIfwprintf\fR()
+family of functions) or SCN (character string literals for the
+\fIfscanf\fR()
+and
+\fIfwscanf\fR()
+family of functions), followed by the conversion specifier, followed by
+a name corresponding to a similar type name in
+.IR <stdint.h> .
+In these names,
+.IR N
+represents the width of the type as described in
+.IR <stdint.h> .
+For example,
+.IR PRIdFAST32
+can be used in a format string to print the value of an integer of type
+.BR int_fast32_t .
+.P
+The
+\fIfprintf\fR()
+macros for signed integers are:
+.sp
+.RS
+.TS
+tab(!);
+le le le le le.
+PRId\fIN\fR!PRIdLEAST\fIN\fR!PRIdFAST\fIN\fR!PRIdMAX!PRIdPTR
+PRIi\fIN\fR!PRIiLEAST\fIN\fR!PRIiFAST\fIN\fR!PRIiMAX!PRIiPTR
+.TE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+\fIfprintf\fR()
+macros for unsigned integers are:
+.sp
+.RS
+.TS
+tab(!);
+le le le le le.
+PRIo\fIN\fR!PRIoLEAST\fIN\fR!PRIoFAST\fIN\fR!PRIoMAX!PRIoPTR
+PRIu\fIN\fR!PRIuLEAST\fIN\fR!PRIuFAST\fIN\fR!PRIuMAX!PRIuPTR
+PRIx\fIN\fR!PRIxLEAST\fIN\fR!PRIxFAST\fIN\fR!PRIxMAX!PRIxPTR
+PRIX\fIN\fR!PRIXLEAST\fIN\fR!PRIXFAST\fIN\fR!PRIXMAX!PRIXPTR
+.TE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+\fIfscanf\fR()
+macros for signed integers are:
+.sp
+.RS
+.TS
+tab(!);
+le le le le le.
+SCNd\fIN\fR!SCNdLEAST\fIN\fR!SCNdFAST\fIN\fR!SCNdMAX!SCNdPTR
+SCNi\fIN\fR!SCNiLEAST\fIN\fR!SCNiFAST\fIN\fR!SCNiMAX!SCNiPTR
+.TE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+\fIfscanf\fR()
+macros for unsigned integers are:
+.sp
+.RS
+.TS
+tab(!);
+le le le le le.
+SCNo\fIN\fR!SCNoLEAST\fIN\fR!SCNoFAST\fIN\fR!SCNoMAX!SCNoPTR
+SCNu\fIN\fR!SCNuLEAST\fIN\fR!SCNuFAST\fIN\fR!SCNuMAX!SCNuPTR
+SCNx\fIN\fR!SCNxLEAST\fIN\fR!SCNxFAST\fIN\fR!SCNxMAX!SCNxPTR
+.TE
+.RE
+.P
+For each type that the implementation provides in
+.IR <stdint.h> ,
+the corresponding
+\fIfprintf\fR()
+and
+\fIfwprintf\fR()
+macros shall be defined and the corresponding
+\fIfscanf\fR()
+and
+\fIfwscanf\fR()
+macros shall be defined unless the implementation does not have a
+suitable modifier for the type.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+intmax_t  imaxabs(intmax_t);
+imaxdiv_t imaxdiv(intmax_t, intmax_t);
+intmax_t  strtoimax(const char *restrict, char **restrict, int);
+uintmax_t strtoumax(const char *restrict, char **restrict, int);
+intmax_t  wcstoimax(const wchar_t *restrict, wchar_t **restrict, int);
+uintmax_t wcstoumax(const wchar_t *restrict, wchar_t **restrict, int);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <inttypes.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+    uintmax_t i = UINTMAX_MAX; // This type always exists.
+    wprintf(L"The largest integer value is %020"
+        PRIxMAX "\en", i);
+    return 0;
+}
+.fi
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The purpose of
+.IR <inttypes.h> 
+is to provide a set of integer types whose definitions are consistent
+across machines and independent of operating systems and other
+implementation idiosyncrasies. It defines, through
+.BR typedef ,
+integer types of various sizes. Implementations are free to
+.BR typedef
+them as ISO\ C standard integer types or extensions that they support. Consistent
+use of this header will greatly increase the portability of applications
+across platforms.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1990 standard specified that the language should support four signed and
+unsigned integer data types\(em\c
+.BR char ,
+.BR short ,
+.BR int ,
+and
+.BR long \(em\c
+but placed very little requirement on their size other than that
+.BR int
+and
+.BR short
+be at least 16 bits and
+.BR long
+be at least as long as
+.BR int
+and not smaller than 32 bits. For 16-bit systems, most implementations
+assigned 8, 16, 16, and 32 bits to
+.BR char ,
+.BR short ,
+.BR int ,
+and
+.BR long ,
+respectively. For 32-bit systems, the common practice has been to
+assign 8, 16, 32, and 32 bits to these types. This difference in
+.BR int
+size can create some problems for users who migrate from one system to
+another which assigns different sizes to integer types, because the
+ISO\ C standard integer promotion rule can produce silent changes unexpectedly.
+The need for defining an extended integer type increased with the
+introduction of 64-bit systems.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+Macro names beginning with PRI or SCN followed by any lowercase letter
+or
+.BR 'X' 
+may be added to the macros defined in the
+.IR <inttypes.h> 
+header.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<stddef.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment",
+.IR "\fIimaxabs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIimaxdiv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrtoimax\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcstoimax\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/iso646.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/iso646.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..63d1006
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/iso646.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+'\" et
+.TH iso646.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+iso646.h
+\(em alternative spellings
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <iso646.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+.IR <iso646.h> 
+header shall define the following eleven macros (on the left) that
+expand to the corresponding tokens (on the right):
+.IP and 10
+\&\fR&&\fR
+.IP and_eq 10
+\&\fR&=\fR
+.IP bitand 10
+\&\fR&\fR
+.IP bitor 10
+\&\fR|\fR
+.IP compl 10
+\&\fR~\fR
+.IP not 10
+\&\fR!\fR
+.IP not_eq 10
+\&\fR!=\fR
+.IP or 10
+\&\fR||\fR
+.IP or_eq 10
+\&\fR|=\fR
+.IP xor 10
+\&\fR^\fR
+.IP xor_eq 10
+\&\fR^=\fR
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+None.
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/langinfo.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/langinfo.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aaf2461
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/langinfo.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,195 @@
+'\" et
+.TH langinfo.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+langinfo.h
+\(em language information constants
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <langinfo.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <langinfo.h> 
+header shall define the symbolic constants used to identify items of
+.IR langinfo
+data (see
+\fInl_langinfo\fR()).
+.P
+The
+.IR <langinfo.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR locale_t
+type as described in
+.IR <locale.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <langinfo.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR nl_item
+type as described in
+.IR <nl_types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <langinfo.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants with type
+.BR nl_item .
+The entries under
+.BR Category
+indicate in which
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+category each item is defined.
+.TS
+box center tab(!);
+cB | cB | cB
+l1 | lI1 | l.
+Constant!Category!Meaning
+_
+CODESET!LC_CTYPE!Codeset name.
+D_T_FMT!LC_TIME!String for formatting date and time.
+D_FMT!LC_TIME!Date format string.
+T_FMT!LC_TIME!Time format string.
+T_FMT_AMPM!LC_TIME!a.m. or p.m. time format string.
+AM_STR!LC_TIME!Ante-meridiem affix.
+PM_STR!LC_TIME!Post-meridiem affix.
+DAY_1!LC_TIME!Name of the first day of the week (for example, Sunday).
+DAY_2!LC_TIME!Name of the second day of the week (for example, Monday).
+DAY_3!LC_TIME!Name of the third day of the week (for example, Tuesday).
+DAY_4!LC_TIME!Name of the fourth day of the week
+ !!(for example, Wednesday).
+DAY_5!LC_TIME!Name of the fifth day of the week (for example, Thursday).
+DAY_6!LC_TIME!Name of the sixth day of the week (for example, Friday).
+DAY_7!LC_TIME!Name of the seventh day of the week
+ !!(for example, Saturday).
+ABDAY_1!LC_TIME!Abbreviated name of the first day of the week.
+ABDAY_2!LC_TIME!Abbreviated name of the second day of the week.
+ABDAY_3!LC_TIME!Abbreviated name of the third day of the week.
+ABDAY_4!LC_TIME!Abbreviated name of the fourth day of the week.
+ABDAY_5!LC_TIME!Abbreviated name of the fifth day of the week.
+ABDAY_6!LC_TIME!Abbreviated name of the sixth day of the week.
+ABDAY_7!LC_TIME!Abbreviated name of the seventh day of the week.
+MON_1!LC_TIME!Name of the first month of the year.
+MON_2!LC_TIME!Name of the second month.
+MON_3!LC_TIME!Name of the third month.
+MON_4!LC_TIME!Name of the fourth month.
+MON_5!LC_TIME!Name of the fifth month.
+MON_6!LC_TIME!Name of the sixth month.
+MON_7!LC_TIME!Name of the seventh month.
+MON_8!LC_TIME!Name of the eighth month.
+MON_9!LC_TIME!Name of the ninth month.
+MON_10!LC_TIME!Name of the tenth month.
+MON_11!LC_TIME!Name of the eleventh month.
+MON_12!LC_TIME!Name of the twelfth month.
+ABMON_1!LC_TIME!Abbreviated name of the first month.
+ABMON_2!LC_TIME!Abbreviated name of the second month.
+ABMON_3!LC_TIME!Abbreviated name of the third month.
+ABMON_4!LC_TIME!Abbreviated name of the fourth month.
+ABMON_5!LC_TIME!Abbreviated name of the fifth month.
+ABMON_6!LC_TIME!Abbreviated name of the sixth month.
+ABMON_7!LC_TIME!Abbreviated name of the seventh month.
+ABMON_8!LC_TIME!Abbreviated name of the eighth month.
+ABMON_9!LC_TIME!Abbreviated name of the ninth month.
+ABMON_10!LC_TIME!Abbreviated name of the tenth month.
+ABMON_11!LC_TIME!Abbreviated name of the eleventh month.
+ABMON_12!LC_TIME!Abbreviated name of the twelfth month.
+ERA!LC_TIME!Era description segments.
+ERA_D_FMT!LC_TIME!Era date format string.
+ERA_D_T_FMT!LC_TIME!Era date and time format string.
+ERA_T_FMT!LC_TIME!Era time format string.
+ALT_DIGITS!LC_TIME!Alternative symbols for digits.
+RADIXCHAR!LC_NUMERIC!Radix character.
+THOUSEP!LC_NUMERIC!Separator for thousands.
+YESEXPR!LC_MESSAGES!Affirmative response expression.
+NOEXPR!LC_MESSAGES!Negative response expression.
+CRNCYSTR!LC_MONETARY!T{
+Local currency symbol, preceded by
+.BR '\(mi' 
+if the symbol should appear before the value,
+.BR '+' 
+if the symbol should appear after the value, or
+.BR '.' 
+if the symbol should replace the radix character. If the local
+currency symbol is the empty string, implementations may return
+the empty string (\c
+.BR \(dq\&\(dq ).
+T}
+.TE
+.P
+If the locale's values for
+.BR p_cs_precedes
+and
+.BR n_cs_precedes
+do not match, the value of
+.IR nl_langinfo (CRNCYSTR)
+and
+.IR nl_langinfo_l (CRNCYSTR,loc)
+is unspecified.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as a function and may also be defined
+as a macro. A function prototype shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+char *nl_langinfo(nl_item);
+char *nl_langinfo_l(nl_item, locale_t);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <langinfo.h> 
+header may also make visible all symbols from
+.IR <nl_types.h> .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Wherever possible, users are advised to use functions compatible with
+those in the ISO\ C standard to access items of
+.IR langinfo
+data. In particular, the
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+function should be used to access date and time information defined in
+category
+.IR LC_TIME .
+The
+\fIlocaleconv\fR()
+function should be used to access information corresponding to
+RADIXCHAR, THOUSEP, and CRNCYSTR.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<nl_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fInl_langinfo\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlocaleconv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrfmon\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrftime\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/libgen.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/libgen.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..43a020c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/libgen.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+'\" et
+.TH libgen.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+libgen.h
+\(em definitions for pattern matching functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <libgen.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+char  *basename(char *);
+char  *dirname(char *);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIbasename\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdirname\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/limits.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/limits.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6f126d5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/limits.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,1179 @@
+'\" et
+.TH limits.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+limits.h
+\(em implementation-defined constants
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <limits.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Some of the functionality described on this reference page extends the
+ISO\ C standard. Applications shall define the appropriate feature test macro
+(see the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment")
+to enable the visibility of these symbols in this header.
+.P
+Many of the symbols listed here are not defined by the ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1999 standard. Such symbols
+are not shown as CX shaded, except under the heading ``Numerical Limits''.
+.P
+The
+.IR <limits.h> 
+header shall define macros and symbolic constants for various limits.
+Different categories of limits are described below, representing various
+limits on resources that the implementation imposes on applications.
+All macros and symbolic constants defined in this header shall be
+suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives.
+.P
+Implementations may choose any appropriate value for each limit,
+provided it is not more restrictive than the Minimum Acceptable Values
+listed below. Symbolic constant names beginning with _POSIX may be
+found in
+.IR <unistd.h> .
+.P
+Applications should not assume any particular value for a limit. To
+achieve maximum portability, an application should not require more
+resource than the Minimum Acceptable Value quantity. However, an
+application wishing to avail itself of the full amount of a resource
+available on an implementation may make use of the value given in
+.IR <limits.h> 
+on that particular implementation, by using the macros and symbolic
+constants listed below. It should be noted, however, that many of the
+listed limits are not invariant, and at runtime, the value of the limit
+may differ from those given in this header, for the following reasons:
+.IP " *" 4
+The limit is pathname-dependent.
+.IP " *" 4
+The limit differs between the compile and runtime machines.
+.P
+For these reasons, an application may use the
+\fIfpathconf\fR(),
+\fIpathconf\fR(),
+and
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+functions to determine the actual value of a limit at runtime.
+.P
+The items in the list ending in _MIN give the most negative values that
+the mathematical types are guaranteed to be capable of representing.
+Numbers of a more negative value may be supported on some
+implementations, as indicated by the
+.IR <limits.h> 
+header on the implementation, but applications requiring such numbers
+are not guaranteed to be portable to all implementations. For positive
+constants ending in _MIN, this indicates the minimum acceptable value.
+.SS "Runtime Invariant Values (Possibly Indeterminate)"
+.P
+A definition of one of the symbolic constants in the following list
+shall be omitted from
+.IR <limits.h> 
+on specific implementations where the corresponding value is equal to
+or greater than the stated minimum, but is unspecified.
+.P
+This indetermination might depend on the amount of available memory
+space on a specific instance of a specific implementation. The actual
+value supported by a specific instance shall be provided by the
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+function.
+.IP {AIO_LISTIO_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of I/O operations in a single list I/O call supported by
+the implementation.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_AIO_LISTIO_MAX}
+.IP {AIO_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of outstanding asynchronous I/O operations supported by
+the implementation.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_AIO_MAX}
+.IP {AIO_PRIO_DELTA_MAX} 6
+.br
+The maximum amount by which a process can decrease its asynchronous I/O
+priority level from its own scheduling priority.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: 0
+.IP {ARG_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum length of argument to the
+.IR exec
+functions including environment data.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_ARG_MAX}
+.IP {ATEXIT_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of functions that may be registered with
+\fIatexit\fR().
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: 32
+.IP {CHILD_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of simultaneous processes per real user ID.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_CHILD_MAX}
+.IP {DELAYTIMER_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of timer expiration overruns.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_DELAYTIMER_MAX}
+.IP {HOST_NAME_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum length of a host name (not including the terminating null)
+as returned from the
+\fIgethostname\fR()
+function.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_HOST_NAME_MAX}
+.IP {IOV_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of
+.BR iovec
+structures that one process has available for use with
+\fIreadv\fR()
+or
+\fIwritev\fR().
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_XOPEN_IOV_MAX}
+.IP {LOGIN_NAME_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum length of a login name.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_LOGIN_NAME_MAX}
+.IP {MQ_OPEN_MAX} 6
+.br
+The maximum number of open message queue descriptors a process may
+hold.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_MQ_OPEN_MAX}
+.IP {MQ_PRIO_MAX} 6
+.br
+The maximum number of message priorities supported by the implementation.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_MQ_PRIO_MAX}
+.IP {OPEN_MAX} 6
+.br
+A value one greater than the maximum value that the system may
+assign to a newly-created file descriptor.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_OPEN_MAX}
+.IP {PAGESIZE} 6
+.br
+Size in bytes of a page.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: 1
+.IP {PAGE_SIZE} 6
+.br
+Equivalent to
+{PAGESIZE}.
+If either
+{PAGESIZE}
+or
+{PAGE_SIZE}
+is defined, the other is defined with the same value.
+.IP {PTHREAD_DESTRUCTOR_ITERATIONS} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of attempts made to destroy a thread's thread-specific
+data values on thread exit.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_THREAD_DESTRUCTOR_ITERATIONS}
+.IP {PTHREAD_KEYS_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of data keys that can be created by a process.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_THREAD_KEYS_MAX}
+.IP {PTHREAD_STACK_MIN} 6
+.br
+Minimum size in bytes of thread stack storage.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: 0
+.IP {PTHREAD_THREADS_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of threads that can be created per process.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_THREAD_THREADS_MAX}
+.IP {RE_DUP_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of repeated occurrences of a BRE or ERE interval
+expression; see
+.IR "Section 9.3.6" ", " "BREs Matching Multiple Characters"
+and
+.IR "Section 9.4.6" ", " "EREs Matching Multiple Characters".
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX2_RE_DUP_MAX}
+.IP {RTSIG_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of realtime signals reserved for application use in this
+implementation.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_RTSIG_MAX}
+.IP {SEM_NSEMS_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of semaphores that a process may have.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_SEM_NSEMS_MAX}
+.IP {SEM_VALUE_MAX} 6
+.br
+The maximum value a semaphore may have.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_SEM_VALUE_MAX}
+.IP {SIGQUEUE_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of queued signals that a process may send and have
+pending at the receiver(s) at any time.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_SIGQUEUE_MAX}
+.IP {SS_REPL_MAX} 6
+.br
+The maximum number of replenishment operations that may be simultaneously
+pending for a particular sporadic server scheduler.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_SS_REPL_MAX}
+.IP {STREAM_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of streams that one process can have open at one time.
+If defined, it has the same value as
+{FOPEN_MAX}
+(see
+.IR <stdio.h> ).
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_STREAM_MAX}
+.IP {SYMLOOP_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of symbolic links that can be reliably traversed in the
+resolution of a pathname in the absence of a loop.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_SYMLOOP_MAX}
+.IP {TIMER_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of timers per process supported by the implementation.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_TIMER_MAX}
+.IP {TRACE_EVENT_NAME_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum length of the trace event name (not including the terminating null).
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_TRACE_EVENT_NAME_MAX}
+.IP {TRACE_NAME_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum length of the trace generation version string or of the
+trace stream name (not including the terminating null).
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_TRACE_NAME_MAX}
+.IP {TRACE_SYS_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of trace streams that may simultaneously exist in
+the system.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_TRACE_SYS_MAX}
+.IP {TRACE_USER_EVENT_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of user trace event type identifiers that may
+simultaneously exist in a traced process, including the predefined
+user trace event POSIX_TRACE_UNNAMED_USER_EVENT.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_TRACE_USER_EVENT_MAX}
+.IP {TTY_NAME_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum length of terminal device name.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_TTY_NAME_MAX}
+.IP {TZNAME_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of bytes supported for the name of a timezone (not of
+the
+.IR TZ
+variable).
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_TZNAME_MAX}
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+The length given by
+{TZNAME_MAX}
+does not include the quoting characters mentioned in
+.IR "Section 8.3" ", " "Other Environment Variables".
+.P
+.SS "Pathname Variable Values"
+.P
+The values in the following list may be constants within an
+implementation or may vary from one pathname to another. For example,
+file systems or directories may have different characteristics.
+.P
+A definition of one of the symbolic constants in the following list
+shall be omitted from the
+.IR <limits.h> 
+header on specific implementations where the corresponding value is
+equal to or greater than the stated minimum, but where the value can
+vary depending on the file to which it is applied. The actual value
+supported for a specific pathname shall be provided by the
+\fIpathconf\fR()
+function.
+.IP {FILESIZEBITS} 6
+.br
+Minimum number of bits needed to represent, as a signed integer value,
+the maximum size of a regular file allowed in the specified directory.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: 32
+.IP {LINK_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of links to a single file.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_LINK_MAX}
+.IP {MAX_CANON} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of bytes in a terminal canonical input line.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_MAX_CANON}
+.IP {MAX_INPUT} 6
+.br
+Minimum number of bytes for which space is available in a terminal
+input queue; therefore, the maximum number of bytes a conforming
+application may require to be typed as input before reading them.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_MAX_INPUT}
+.IP {NAME_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of bytes in a filename (not including the terminating
+null of a filename string).
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_NAME_MAX}
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_XOPEN_NAME_MAX}
+.IP {PATH_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of bytes the implementation will store as a pathname in
+a user-supplied buffer of unspecified size, including the terminating
+null character. Minimum number the implementation will accept as the
+maximum number of bytes in a pathname.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_PATH_MAX}
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_XOPEN_PATH_MAX}
+.IP {PIPE_BUF} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of bytes that is guaranteed to be atomic when writing to
+a pipe.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_PIPE_BUF}
+.IP {POSIX_ALLOC_SIZE_MIN} 6
+.br
+Minimum number of bytes of storage actually allocated for any portion
+of a file.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: Not specified.
+.IP {POSIX_REC_INCR_XFER_SIZE} 6
+.br
+Recommended increment for file transfer sizes between the
+{POSIX_REC_MIN_XFER_SIZE}
+and
+{POSIX_REC_MAX_XFER_SIZE}
+values.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: Not specified.
+.IP {POSIX_REC_MAX_XFER_SIZE} 6
+.br
+Maximum recommended file transfer size.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: Not specified.
+.IP {POSIX_REC_MIN_XFER_SIZE} 6
+.br
+Minimum recommended file transfer size.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: Not specified.
+.IP {POSIX_REC_XFER_ALIGN} 6
+.br
+Recommended file transfer buffer alignment.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: Not specified.
+.IP {SYMLINK_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of bytes in a symbolic link.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_SYMLINK_MAX}
+.SS "Runtime Increasable Values"
+.P
+The magnitude limitations in the following list shall be fixed by
+specific implementations. An application should assume that the value
+of the symbolic constant defined by
+.IR <limits.h> 
+in a specific implementation is the minimum that pertains whenever the
+application is run under that implementation. A specific instance of a
+specific implementation may increase the value relative to that
+supplied by
+.IR <limits.h> 
+for that implementation. The actual value supported by a specific
+instance shall be provided by the
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+function.
+.IP {BC_BASE_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum
+.IR obase
+values allowed by the
+.IR bc
+utility.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX2_BC_BASE_MAX}
+.IP {BC_DIM_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of elements permitted in an array by the
+.IR bc
+utility.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX2_BC_DIM_MAX}
+.IP {BC_SCALE_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum
+.IR scale
+value allowed by the
+.IR bc
+utility.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX2_BC_SCALE_MAX}
+.IP {BC_STRING_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum length of a string constant accepted by the
+.IR bc
+utility.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX2_BC_STRING_MAX}
+.IP {CHARCLASS_NAME_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of bytes in a character class name.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX2_CHARCLASS_NAME_MAX}
+.IP {COLL_WEIGHTS_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of weights that can be assigned to an entry of the
+.IR LC_COLLATE
+.BR order
+keyword in the locale definition file; see
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX2_COLL_WEIGHTS_MAX}
+.IP {EXPR_NEST_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of expressions that can be nested within parentheses by
+the
+.IR expr
+utility.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX2_EXPR_NEST_MAX}
+.IP {LINE_MAX} 6
+.br
+Unless otherwise noted, the maximum length, in bytes, of a utility's
+input line (either standard input or another file), when the utility is
+described as processing text files. The length includes room for the
+trailing
+<newline>.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX2_LINE_MAX}
+.IP {NGROUPS_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of simultaneous supplementary group IDs per process.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_NGROUPS_MAX}
+.IP {RE_DUP_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of repeated occurrences of a regular expression
+permitted when using the interval notation \e{\fIm\fP,\fIn\fP\e}; see
+.IR "Chapter 9" ", " "Regular Expressions".
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX2_RE_DUP_MAX}
+.SS "Maximum Values"
+.P
+The
+.IR <limits.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants with the values
+shown. These are the most restrictive values for certain features on
+an implementation. A conforming implementation shall provide values no
+larger than these values. A conforming application must not require a
+smaller value for correct operation.
+.IP {_POSIX_CLOCKRES_MIN} 6
+.br
+The resolution of the CLOCK_REALTIME clock, in nanoseconds.
+.br
+Value: 20 000 000
+.RS 6 
+.P
+If the Monotonic Clock option is supported, the resolution of the
+CLOCK_MONOTONIC clock, in nanoseconds, is represented by
+{_POSIX_CLOCKRES_MIN}.
+.RE
+.SS "Minimum Values"
+.P
+The
+.IR <limits.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants with the values
+shown. These are the most restrictive values for certain features on
+an implementation conforming to this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. Related symbolic constants are
+defined elsewhere in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 which reflect the actual implementation and
+which need not be as restrictive. For each of these limits, a conforming
+implementation shall provide a value at least this large or shall have
+no limit. A strictly conforming application must not require a larger
+value for correct operation.
+.IP {_POSIX_AIO_LISTIO_MAX} 6
+.br
+The number of I/O operations that can be specified in a list I/O call.
+.br
+Value: 2
+.IP {_POSIX_AIO_MAX} 6
+.br
+The number of outstanding asynchronous I/O operations.
+.br
+Value: 1
+.IP {_POSIX_ARG_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum length of argument to the
+.IR exec
+functions including environment data.
+.br
+Value: 4 096
+.IP {_POSIX_CHILD_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of simultaneous processes per real user ID.
+.br
+Value: 25
+.IP {_POSIX_DELAYTIMER_MAX} 6
+.br
+The number of timer expiration overruns.
+.br
+Value: 32
+.IP {_POSIX_HOST_NAME_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum length of a host name (not including the terminating null)
+as returned from the
+\fIgethostname\fR()
+function.
+.br
+Value: 255
+.IP {_POSIX_LINK_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of links to a single file.
+.br
+Value: 8
+.IP {_POSIX_LOGIN_NAME_MAX} 6
+.br
+The size of the storage required for a login name, in bytes
+(including the terminating null).
+.br
+Value: 9
+.IP {_POSIX_MAX_CANON} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of bytes in a terminal canonical input queue.
+.br
+Value: 255
+.IP {_POSIX_MAX_INPUT} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of bytes allowed in a terminal input queue.
+.br
+Value: 255
+.IP {_POSIX_MQ_OPEN_MAX} 6
+.br
+The number of message queues that can be open for a single process.
+.br
+Value: 8
+.IP {_POSIX_MQ_PRIO_MAX} 6
+.br
+The maximum number of message priorities supported by the implementation.
+.br
+Value: 32
+.IP {_POSIX_NAME_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of bytes in a filename (not including the terminating
+null of a filename string).
+.br
+Value: 14
+.IP {_POSIX_NGROUPS_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of simultaneous supplementary group IDs per process.
+.br
+Value: 8
+.IP {_POSIX_OPEN_MAX} 6
+.br
+A value one greater than the maximum value that the system may assign
+to a newly-created file descriptor.
+.br
+Value: 20
+.IP {_POSIX_PATH_MAX} 6
+.br
+Minimum number the implementation will accept as the maximum number of
+bytes in a pathname.
+.br
+Value: 256
+.IP {_POSIX_PIPE_BUF} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of bytes that is guaranteed to be atomic when writing to
+a pipe.
+.br
+Value: 512
+.IP {_POSIX_RE_DUP_MAX} 6
+.br
+The number of repeated occurrences of a BRE permitted by the
+\fIregexec\fR()
+and
+\fIregcomp\fR()
+functions when using the interval notation {\e(\fIm\fR,\fIn\fR\e}; see
+.IR "Section 9.3.6" ", " "BREs Matching Multiple Characters".
+.br
+Value: 255
+.IP {_POSIX_RTSIG_MAX} 6
+.br
+The number of realtime signal numbers reserved for application use.
+.br
+Value: 8
+.IP {_POSIX_SEM_NSEMS_MAX} 6
+.br
+The number of semaphores that a process may have.
+.br
+Value: 256
+.IP {_POSIX_SEM_VALUE_MAX} 6
+.br
+The maximum value a semaphore may have.
+.br
+Value: 32 767
+.IP {_POSIX_SIGQUEUE_MAX} 6
+.br
+The number of queued signals that a process may send and have pending
+at the receiver(s) at any time.
+.br
+Value: 32
+.IP {_POSIX_SSIZE_MAX} 6
+.br
+The value that can be stored in an object of type
+.BR ssize_t .
+.br
+Value: 32 767
+.IP {_POSIX_SS_REPL_MAX} 6
+.br
+The number of replenishment operations that may be simultaneously
+pending for a particular sporadic server scheduler.
+.br
+Value: 4
+.IP {_POSIX_STREAM_MAX} 6
+.br
+The number of streams that one process can have open at one time.
+.br
+Value: 8
+.IP {_POSIX_SYMLINK_MAX} 6
+.br
+The number of bytes in a symbolic link.
+.br
+Value: 255
+.IP {_POSIX_SYMLOOP_MAX} 6
+.br
+The number of symbolic links that can be traversed in the resolution of
+a pathname in the absence of a loop.
+.br
+Value: 8
+.IP {_POSIX_THREAD_DESTRUCTOR_ITERATIONS} 6
+.br
+The number of attempts made to destroy a thread's thread-specific data
+values on thread exit.
+.br
+Value: 4
+.IP {_POSIX_THREAD_KEYS_MAX} 6
+.br
+The number of data keys per process.
+.br
+Value: 128
+.IP {_POSIX_THREAD_THREADS_MAX} 6
+.br
+The number of threads per process.
+.br
+Value: 64
+.IP {_POSIX_TIMER_MAX} 6
+.br
+The per-process number of timers.
+.br
+Value: 32
+.IP {_POSIX_TRACE_EVENT_NAME_MAX} 6
+.br
+The length in bytes of a trace event name (not including the terminating null).
+.br
+Value: 30
+.IP {_POSIX_TRACE_NAME_MAX} 6
+.br
+The length in bytes of a trace generation version string or a trace
+stream name (not including the terminating null).
+.br
+Value: 8
+.IP {_POSIX_TRACE_SYS_MAX} 6
+.br
+The number of trace streams that may simultaneously exist in the system.
+.br
+Value: 8
+.IP {_POSIX_TRACE_USER_EVENT_MAX} 6
+.br
+The number of user trace event type identifiers that may simultaneously
+exist in a traced process, including the predefined user trace event
+POSIX_TRACE_UNNAMED_USER_EVENT.
+.br
+Value: 32
+.IP {_POSIX_TTY_NAME_MAX} 6
+.br
+The size of the storage required for a terminal device name, in bytes
+(including the terminating null).
+.br
+Value: 9
+.IP {_POSIX_TZNAME_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of bytes supported for the name of a timezone (not of
+the
+.IR TZ
+variable).
+.br
+Value: 6
+.RS 6 
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+The length given by
+{_POSIX_TZNAME_MAX}
+does not include the quoting characters mentioned in
+.IR "Section 8.3" ", " "Other Environment Variables".
+.P
+.RE
+.IP {_POSIX2_BC_BASE_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum
+.IR obase
+values allowed by the
+.IR bc
+utility.
+.br
+Value: 99
+.IP {_POSIX2_BC_DIM_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of elements permitted in an array by the
+.IR bc
+utility.
+.br
+Value: 2 048
+.IP {_POSIX2_BC_SCALE_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum
+.IR scale
+value allowed by the
+.IR bc
+utility.
+.br
+Value: 99
+.IP {_POSIX2_BC_STRING_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum length of a string constant accepted by the
+.IR bc
+utility.
+.br
+Value: 1 000
+.IP {_POSIX2_CHARCLASS_NAME_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of bytes in a character class name.
+.br
+Value: 14
+.IP {_POSIX2_COLL_WEIGHTS_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of weights that can be assigned to an entry of the
+.IR LC_COLLATE
+.BR order
+keyword in the locale definition file; see
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.br
+Value: 2
+.IP {_POSIX2_EXPR_NEST_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of expressions that can be nested within parentheses by
+the
+.IR expr
+utility.
+.br
+Value: 32
+.IP {_POSIX2_LINE_MAX} 6
+.br
+Unless otherwise noted, the maximum length, in bytes, of a utility's
+input line (either standard input or another file), when the utility is
+described as processing text files. The length includes room for the
+trailing
+<newline>.
+.br
+Value: 2 048
+.IP {_POSIX2_RE_DUP_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of repeated occurrences of a regular expression
+permitted when using the interval notation \e{\fIm\fP,\fIn\fP\e}; see
+.IR "Chapter 9" ", " "Regular Expressions".
+.br
+Value: 255
+.IP {_XOPEN_IOV_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of
+.BR iovec
+structures that one process has available for use with
+\fIreadv\fR()
+or
+\fIwritev\fR().
+.br
+Value: 16
+.IP {_XOPEN_NAME_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of bytes in a filename (not including the terminating
+null of a filename string).
+.br
+Value: 255
+.IP {_XOPEN_PATH_MAX} 6
+.br
+Minimum number the implementation will accept as the maximum number of
+bytes in a pathname.
+.br
+Value: 1\|024
+.SS "Numerical Limits"
+.P
+The
+.IR <limits.h> 
+header shall define the following macros and, except for
+{CHAR_BIT},
+{LONG_BIT},
+{MB_LEN_MAX},
+and
+{WORD_BIT},
+they shall be replaced by expressions that have the same type as
+would an expression that is an object of the corresponding type
+converted according to the integer promotions.
+.P
+If the value of an object of type
+.BR char
+is treated as a signed integer when used in an expression, the value of
+{CHAR_MIN}
+is the same as that of
+{SCHAR_MIN}
+and the value of
+{CHAR_MAX}
+is the same as that of
+{SCHAR_MAX}.
+Otherwise, the value of
+{CHAR_MIN}
+is 0 and the value of
+{CHAR_MAX}
+is the same as that of
+{UCHAR_MAX}.
+.IP {CHAR_BIT} 6
+.br
+Number of bits in a type
+.BR char .
+.br
+Value: 8
+.IP {CHAR_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum value for an object of type
+.BR char .
+.br
+Value:
+{UCHAR_MAX}
+or
+{SCHAR_MAX}
+.IP {CHAR_MIN} 6
+.br
+Minimum value for an object of type
+.BR char .
+.br
+Value:
+{SCHAR_MIN}
+or 0
+.IP {INT_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum value for an object of type
+.BR int .
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: 2 147 483 647
+.IP {INT_MIN} 6
+.br
+Minimum value for an object of type
+.BR int .
+.br
+Maximum Acceptable Value: \(mi2 147 483 647
+.IP {LLONG_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum value for an object of type
+.BR "long long" .
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: +9\|223\|372\|036\|854\|775\|807
+.IP {LLONG_MIN} 6
+.br
+Minimum value for an object of type
+.BR "long long" .
+.br
+Maximum Acceptable Value: \(mi9\|223\|372\|036\|854\|775\|807
+.IP {LONG_BIT} 6
+.br
+Number of bits in an object of type
+.BR long .
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: 32
+.IP {LONG_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum value for an object of type
+.BR long .
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: +2 147 483 647
+.IP {LONG_MIN} 6
+.br
+Minimum value for an object of type
+.BR long .
+.br
+Maximum Acceptable Value: \(mi2 147 483 647
+.IP {MB_LEN_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of bytes in a character, for any supported locale.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: 1
+.IP {SCHAR_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum value for an object of type
+.BR "signed char" .
+.br
+Value: +127
+.IP {SCHAR_MIN} 6
+.br
+Minimum value for an object of type
+.BR "signed char" .
+.br
+Value: \(mi128
+.IP {SHRT_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum value for an object of type
+.BR short .
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: +32 767
+.IP {SHRT_MIN} 6
+.br
+Minimum value for an object of type
+.BR short .
+.br
+Maximum Acceptable Value: \(mi32 767
+.IP {SSIZE_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum value for an object of type
+.BR ssize_t .
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX_SSIZE_MAX}
+.IP {UCHAR_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum value for an object of type
+.BR "unsigned char" .
+.br
+Value: 255
+.IP {UINT_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum value for an object of type
+.BR unsigned .
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: 4 294 967 295
+.IP {ULLONG_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum value for an object of type
+.BR "unsigned long long" .
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: 18\|446\|744\|073\|709\|551\|615
+.IP {ULONG_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum value for an object of type
+.BR "unsigned long" .
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: 4 294 967 295
+.IP {USHRT_MAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum value for an object of type
+.BR "unsigned short" .
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: 65 535
+.IP {WORD_BIT} 6
+.br
+Number of bits in an object of type
+.BR int .
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: 32
+.SS "Other Invariant Values"
+.P
+The
+.IR <limits.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants:
+.IP {NL_ARGMAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum value of
+.IR n
+in conversion specifications using the \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR
+sequence in calls to the
+\fIprintf\fR()
+and
+\fIscanf\fR()
+families of functions.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: 9
+.IP {NL_LANGMAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of bytes in a
+.IR LANG
+name.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: 14
+.IP {NL_MSGMAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum message number.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: 32 767
+.IP {NL_SETMAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum set number.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: 255
+.IP {NL_TEXTMAX} 6
+.br
+Maximum number of bytes in a message string.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value:
+{_POSIX2_LINE_MAX}
+.IP {NZERO} 6
+.br
+Default process priority.
+.br
+Minimum Acceptable Value: 20
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+A request was made to reduce the value of
+{_POSIX_LINK_MAX}
+from the value of 8 specified for it in the POSIX.1\(hy1990 standard to 2. The
+standard developers decided to deny this request for several reasons:
+.IP " *" 4
+They wanted to avoid making any changes to the standard that could
+break conforming applications, and the requested change could have that
+effect.
+.IP " *" 4
+The use of multiple hard links to a file cannot always be replaced with
+use of symbolic links. Symbolic links are semantically different from
+hard links in that they associate a pathname with another pathname
+rather than a pathname with a file. This has implications for access
+control, file permanence, and transparency.
+.IP " *" 4
+The original standard developers had considered the issue of allowing
+for implementations that did not in general support hard links, and
+decided that this would reduce consensus on the standard.
+.P
+Systems that support historical versions of the development option of
+the ISO\ POSIX\(hy2 standard retain the name
+{_POSIX2_RE_DUP_MAX}
+as an alias for
+{_POSIX_RE_DUP_MAX}.
+.IP {PATH_MAX} 6
+.br
+IEEE PASC Interpretation 1003.1 #15 addressed the inconsistency in the
+standard with the definition of pathname and the description of
+{PATH_MAX},
+allowing application developers to allocate either
+{PATH_MAX}
+or
+{PATH_MAX}+1
+bytes. The inconsistency has been removed by correction to the
+{PATH_MAX}
+definition to include the null character. With this change,
+applications that previously allocated
+{PATH_MAX}
+bytes will continue to succeed.
+.IP {SYMLINK_MAX} 6
+.br
+This symbol refers to space for data that is stored in the file system,
+as opposed to
+{PATH_MAX}
+which is the length of a name that can be passed to a function. In some
+existing implementations, the pathnames pointed to by symbolic links
+are stored in the
+.IR inode s
+of the links, so it is important that
+{SYMLINK_MAX}
+not be constrained to be as large as
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment",
+.IR "\fIfpathconf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/locale.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/locale.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..202a878
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/locale.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,177 @@
+'\" et
+.TH locale.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+locale.h
+\(em category macros
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <locale.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Some of the functionality described on this reference page extends the
+ISO\ C standard. Applications shall define the appropriate feature test macro
+(see the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment")
+to enable the visibility of these symbols in this header.
+.P
+The
+.IR <locale.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR lconv
+structure, which shall include at least the following members.
+(See the definitions of
+.IR LC_MONETARY
+in
+.IR "Section 7.3.3" ", " "LC_MONETARY"
+and
+.IR "Section 7.3.4" ", " "LC_NUMERIC".)
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+char    *currency_symbol
+char    *decimal_point
+char     frac_digits
+char    *grouping
+char    *int_curr_symbol
+char     int_frac_digits
+char     int_n_cs_precedes
+char     int_n_sep_by_space
+char     int_n_sign_posn
+char     int_p_cs_precedes
+char     int_p_sep_by_space
+char     int_p_sign_posn
+char    *mon_decimal_point
+char    *mon_grouping
+char    *mon_thousands_sep
+char    *negative_sign
+char     n_cs_precedes
+char     n_sep_by_space
+char     n_sign_posn
+char    *positive_sign
+char     p_cs_precedes
+char     p_sep_by_space
+char     p_sign_posn
+char    *thousands_sep
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <locale.h> 
+header shall define NULL (as described in
+.IR <stddef.h> )
+and at least the following as macros:
+.P
+.nf
+LC_ALL
+LC_COLLATE
+LC_CTYPE
+LC_MESSAGES
+LC_MONETARY
+LC_NUMERIC
+LC_TIME
+.fi
+.P
+which shall expand to integer constant expressions with distinct
+values for use as the first argument to the
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+function.
+.P
+Implementations may add additional masks using the form
+.IR LC_*
+and an uppercase letter.
+.P
+The
+.IR <locale.h> 
+header shall contain at least the following macros representing
+bitmasks for use with the
+\fInewlocale\fR()
+function for each supported locale category:
+LC_COLLATE_MASK
+LC_CTYPE_MASK
+LC_MESSAGES_MASK
+LC_MONETARY_MASK
+LC_NUMERIC_MASK
+LC_TIME_MASK
+.P
+Implementations may add additional masks using the form LC_*_MASK.
+.P
+In addition, a macro to set the bits for all categories set shall be
+defined:
+LC_ALL_MASK
+.P
+The
+.IR <locale.h> 
+header shall define LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE, a special locale object descriptor
+used by the
+\fIduplocale\fR()
+and
+\fIuselocale\fR()
+functions.
+.P
+The
+.IR <locale.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR locale_t
+type, representing a locale object.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided for use with ISO\ C standard
+compilers.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+locale_t      duplocale(locale_t);
+void          freelocale(locale_t);
+struct lconv *localeconv(void);
+locale_t      newlocale(int, const char *, locale_t);
+char         *setlocale(int, const char *);
+locale_t      uselocale (locale_t);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "\fB<stddef.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIduplocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfreelocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlocaleconv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fInewlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/math.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/math.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c8cf2cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/math.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,582 @@
+'\" et
+.TH math.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.EQ
+delim $$
+.EN
+.SH NAME
+math.h
+\(em mathematical declarations
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Some of the functionality described on this reference page extends the
+ISO\ C standard. Applications shall define the appropriate feature test macro
+(see the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment")
+to enable the visibility of these symbols in this header.
+.P
+The
+.IR <math.h> 
+header shall define at least the following types:
+.IP "\fBfloat_t\fR" 12
+A real-floating type at least as wide as
+.BR float .
+.IP "\fBdouble_t\fR" 12
+A real-floating type at least as wide as
+.BR double ,
+and at least as wide as
+.BR float_t .
+.P
+If FLT_EVAL_METHOD equals 0,
+.BR float_t
+and
+.BR double_t
+shall be
+.BR float
+and
+.BR double ,
+respectively; if FLT_EVAL_METHOD equals 1, they shall both be
+.BR double ;
+if FLT_EVAL_METHOD equals 2, they shall both be
+.BR "long double" ;
+for other values of FLT_EVAL_METHOD, they are otherwise
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+The
+.IR <math.h> 
+header shall define the following macros, where real-floating indicates
+that the argument shall be an expression of real-floating type:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int fpclassify(real-floating x);
+int isfinite(real-floating x);
+int isgreater(real-floating x, real-floating y);
+int isgreaterequal(real-floating x, real-floating y);
+int isinf(real-floating x);
+int isless(real-floating x, real-floating y);
+int islessequal(real-floating x, real-floating y);
+int islessgreater(real-floating x, real-floating y);
+int isnan(real-floating x);
+int isnormal(real-floating x);
+int isunordered(real-floating x, real-floating y);
+int signbit(real-floating x);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <math.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants. The values
+shall have type
+.BR double
+and shall be accurate within the precision of the
+.BR double
+type.
+.IP M_E 12
+Value of $e$
+.IP M_LOG2E 12
+Value of $log_ 2" " e$
+.IP M_LOG10E 12
+Value of $log_ 10" " e$
+.IP M_LN2 12
+Value of $log_ e" " 2$
+.IP M_LN10 12
+Value of $log_ e" " 10$
+.IP M_PI 12
+Value of $pi$
+.IP M_PI_2 12
+Value of $pi /2$
+.IP M_PI_4 12
+Value of $pi /4$
+.IP M_1_PI 12
+Value of $1/ pi$
+.IP M_2_PI 12
+Value of $2/ pi$
+.IP M_2_SQRTPI 12
+Value of $2/ sqrt pi$
+.IP M_SQRT2 12
+Value of $sqrt 2$
+.IP M_SQRT1_2 12
+Value of $1/ sqrt 2$
+.P
+The
+.IR <math.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant:
+.IP MAXFLOAT 12
+Same value as FLT_MAX in
+.IR <float.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <math.h> 
+header shall define the following macros:
+.IP HUGE_VAL 12
+A positive
+.BR double
+constant expression, not necessarily representable as a
+.BR float .
+Used as an error value returned by the mathematics library. HUGE_VAL
+evaluates to +infinity on systems supporting IEEE\ Std\ 754\(hy1985.
+.IP HUGE_VALF 12
+A positive
+.BR float
+constant expression. Used as an error value returned by the mathematics
+library. HUGE_VALF evaluates to +infinity on systems supporting IEEE\ Std\ 754\(hy1985.
+.IP HUGE_VALL 12
+A positive
+.BR "long double"
+constant expression. Used as an error value returned by the mathematics
+library. HUGE_VALL evaluates to +infinity on systems supporting IEEE\ Std\ 754\(hy1985.
+.IP INFINITY 12
+A constant expression of type
+.BR float
+representing positive or unsigned infinity, if available; else a
+positive constant of type
+.BR float
+that overflows at translation time.
+.IP NAN 12
+A constant expression of type
+.BR float
+representing a quiet NaN. This macro is only defined if the
+implementation supports quiet NaNs for the
+.BR float
+type.
+.P
+The following macros shall be defined for number classification. They
+represent the mutually-exclusive kinds of floating-point values. They
+expand to integer constant expressions with distinct values. Additional
+implementation-defined floating-point classifications, with macro
+definitions beginning with FP_ and an uppercase letter, may also be
+specified by the implementation.
+.sp
+.RS
+FP_INFINITE
+FP_NAN
+FP_NORMAL
+FP_SUBNORMAL
+FP_ZERO
+.RE
+.P
+The following optional macros indicate whether the
+\fIfma\fR()
+family of functions are fast compared with direct code:
+.sp
+.RS
+FP_FAST_FMA
+FP_FAST_FMAF
+FP_FAST_FMAL
+.RE
+.P
+If defined, the FP_FAST_FMA macro shall expand to the integer constant
+1 and shall indicate that the
+\fIfma\fR()
+function generally executes about as fast as, or faster than, a
+multiply and an add of
+.BR double
+operands. If undefined, the speed of execution is unspecified. The
+other macros have the equivalent meaning for the
+.BR float
+and
+.BR "long double"
+versions.
+.P
+The following macros shall expand to integer constant expressions whose
+values are returned by
+.IR ilogb (\c
+.IR x )
+if
+.IR x
+is zero or NaN, respectively. The value of FP_ILOGB0 shall be either
+{INT_MIN}
+or \(mi\c
+{INT_MAX}.
+The value of FP_ILOGBNAN shall be either
+{INT_MAX}
+or
+{INT_MIN}.
+.sp
+.RS
+FP_ILOGB0
+FP_ILOGBNAN
+.RE
+.P
+The following macros shall expand to the integer constants 1 and 2,
+respectively;
+.sp
+.RS
+MATH_ERRNO
+MATH_ERREXCEPT
+.RE
+.P
+The following macro shall expand to an expression that has type
+.BR int
+and the value MATH_ERRNO, MATH_ERREXCEPT, or the bitwise-inclusive OR
+of both:
+.sp
+.RS
+math_errhandling
+.RE
+.P
+The value of math_errhandling is constant for the duration of the
+program. It is unspecified whether math_errhandling is a macro or an
+identifier with external linkage. If a macro definition is suppressed
+or a program defines an identifier with the name math_errhandling , the
+behavior is undefined. If the expression (math_errhandling &
+MATH_ERREXCEPT) can be non-zero, the implementation shall define the
+macros FE_DIVBYZERO, FE_INVALID, and FE_OVERFLOW in
+.IR <fenv.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+double      acos(double);
+float       acosf(float);
+double      acosh(double);
+float       acoshf(float);
+long double acoshl(long double);
+long double acosl(long double);
+double      asin(double);
+float       asinf(float);
+double      asinh(double);
+float       asinhf(float);
+long double asinhl(long double);
+long double asinl(long double);
+double      atan(double);
+double      atan2(double, double);
+float       atan2f(float, float);
+long double atan2l(long double, long double);
+float       atanf(float);
+double      atanh(double);
+float       atanhf(float);
+long double atanhl(long double);
+long double atanl(long double);
+double      cbrt(double);
+float       cbrtf(float);
+long double cbrtl(long double);
+double      ceil(double);
+float       ceilf(float);
+long double ceill(long double);
+double      copysign(double, double);
+float       copysignf(float, float);
+long double copysignl(long double, long double);
+double      cos(double);
+float       cosf(float);
+double      cosh(double);
+float       coshf(float);
+long double coshl(long double);
+long double cosl(long double);
+double      erf(double);
+double      erfc(double);
+float       erfcf(float);
+long double erfcl(long double);
+float       erff(float);
+long double erfl(long double);
+double      exp(double);
+double      exp2(double);
+float       exp2f(float);
+long double exp2l(long double);
+float       expf(float);
+long double expl(long double);
+double      expm1(double);
+float       expm1f(float);
+long double expm1l(long double);
+double      fabs(double);
+float       fabsf(float);
+long double fabsl(long double);
+double      fdim(double, double);
+float       fdimf(float, float);
+long double fdiml(long double, long double);
+double      floor(double);
+float       floorf(float);
+long double floorl(long double);
+double      fma(double, double, double);
+float       fmaf(float, float, float);
+long double fmal(long double, long double, long double);
+double      fmax(double, double);
+float       fmaxf(float, float);
+long double fmaxl(long double, long double);
+double      fmin(double, double);
+float       fminf(float, float);
+long double fminl(long double, long double);
+double      fmod(double, double);
+float       fmodf(float, float);
+long double fmodl(long double, long double);
+double      frexp(double, int *);
+float       frexpf(float, int *);
+long double frexpl(long double, int *);
+double      hypot(double, double);
+float       hypotf(float, float);
+long double hypotl(long double, long double);
+int         ilogb(double);
+int         ilogbf(float);
+int         ilogbl(long double);
+double      j0(double);
+double      j1(double);
+double      jn(int, double);
+double      ldexp(double, int);
+float       ldexpf(float, int);
+long double ldexpl(long double, int);
+double      lgamma(double);
+float       lgammaf(float);
+long double lgammal(long double);
+long long   llrint(double);
+long long   llrintf(float);
+long long   llrintl(long double);
+long long   llround(double);
+long long   llroundf(float);
+long long   llroundl(long double);
+double      log(double);
+double      log10(double);
+float       log10f(float);
+long double log10l(long double);
+double      log1p(double);
+float       log1pf(float);
+long double log1pl(long double);
+double      log2(double);
+float       log2f(float);
+long double log2l(long double);
+double      logb(double);
+float       logbf(float);
+long double logbl(long double);
+float       logf(float);
+long double logl(long double);
+long        lrint(double);
+long        lrintf(float);
+long        lrintl(long double);
+long        lround(double);
+long        lroundf(float);
+long        lroundl(long double);
+double      modf(double, double *);
+float       modff(float, float *);
+long double modfl(long double, long double *);
+double      nan(const char *);
+float       nanf(const char *);
+long double nanl(const char *);
+double      nearbyint(double);
+float       nearbyintf(float);
+long double nearbyintl(long double);
+double      nextafter(double, double);
+float       nextafterf(float, float);
+long double nextafterl(long double, long double);
+double      nexttoward(double, long double);
+float       nexttowardf(float, long double);
+long double nexttowardl(long double, long double);
+double      pow(double, double);
+float       powf(float, float);
+long double powl(long double, long double);
+double      remainder(double, double);
+float       remainderf(float, float);
+long double remainderl(long double, long double);
+double      remquo(double, double, int *);
+float       remquof(float, float, int *);
+long double remquol(long double, long double, int *);
+double      rint(double);
+float       rintf(float);
+long double rintl(long double);
+double      round(double);
+float       roundf(float);
+long double roundl(long double);
+double      scalbln(double, long);
+float       scalblnf(float, long);
+long double scalblnl(long double, long);
+double      scalbn(double, int);
+float       scalbnf(float, int);
+long double scalbnl(long double, int);
+double      sin(double);
+float       sinf(float);
+double      sinh(double);
+float       sinhf(float);
+long double sinhl(long double);
+long double sinl(long double);
+double      sqrt(double);
+float       sqrtf(float);
+long double sqrtl(long double);
+double      tan(double);
+float       tanf(float);
+double      tanh(double);
+float       tanhf(float);
+long double tanhl(long double);
+long double tanl(long double);
+double      tgamma(double);
+float       tgammaf(float);
+long double tgammal(long double);
+double      trunc(double);
+float       truncf(float);
+long double truncl(long double);
+double      y0(double);
+double      y1(double);
+double      yn(int, double);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following external variable shall be defined:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+extern int signgam;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The behavior of each of the functions defined in
+.IR <math.h> 
+is specified in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 for all representable values of its input
+arguments, except where stated otherwise. Each function shall execute
+as if it were a single operation without generating any externally
+visible exceptional conditions.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The FP_CONTRACT pragma can be used to allow (if the state is on) or
+disallow (if the state is off) the implementation to contract
+expressions. Each pragma can occur either outside external declarations
+or preceding all explicit declarations and statements inside a compound
+statement. When outside external declarations, the pragma takes effect
+from its occurrence until another FP_CONTRACT pragma is encountered, or
+until the end of the translation unit. When inside a compound
+statement, the pragma takes effect from its occurrence until another
+FP_CONTRACT pragma is encountered (including within a nested compound
+statement), or until the end of the compound statement; at the end of a
+compound statement the state for the pragma is restored to its
+condition just before the compound statement. If this pragma is used in
+any other context, the behavior is undefined. The default state (on or
+off) for the pragma is implementation-defined.
+.P
+Applications should use FLT_MAX as described in the
+.IR <float.h> 
+header instead of the obsolescent MAXFLOAT.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Before the ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1999 standard, the math library was defined only for the floating
+type
+.BR double .
+All the names formed by appending
+.BR 'f' 
+or
+.BR 'l' 
+to a name in
+.IR <math.h> 
+were reserved to allow for the definition of
+.BR float
+and
+.BR "long double"
+libraries; and the ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1999 standard provides for all three versions of math
+functions.
+.P
+The functions
+.IR ecvt (\|),
+.IR fcvt (\|),
+and
+.IR gcvt (\|)
+have been dropped from the ISO\ C standard since their capability is available
+through
+\fIsprintf\fR().
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<float.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stddef.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment",
+.IR "\fIacos\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIacosh\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIasin\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIasinh\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIatan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIatan2\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIatanh\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcbrt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIceil\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcopysign\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcos\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcosh\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIerf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIerfc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexp2\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexpm1\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfabs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfdim\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfloor\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfma\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfmax\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfmin\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfmod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfpclassify\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfrexp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIhypot\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIilogb\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisfinite\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisgreater\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisgreaterequal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisinf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisless\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislessequal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislessgreater\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnormal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisunordered\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIj0\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIldexp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlgamma\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIllrint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIllround\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlog\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlog10\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlog1p\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlog2\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlogb\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlrint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlround\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImodf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fInan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fInearbyint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fInextafter\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpow\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIremainder\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIremquo\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIround\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIscalbln\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsignbit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsin\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsinh\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsqrt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItanh\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItgamma\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItrunc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIy0\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/monetary.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/monetary.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e377655
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/monetary.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+'\" et
+.TH monetary.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+monetary.h
+\(em monetary types
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <monetary.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <monetary.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR locale_t
+type as described in
+.IR <locale.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <monetary.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR size_t
+type as described in
+.IR <stddef.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <monetary.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR ssize_t
+type as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided for use with ISO\ C standard
+compilers.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ssize_t  strfmon(char *restrict, size_t, const char *restrict, ...);
+ssize_t  strfmon_l(char *restrict, size_t, locale_t,
+             const char *restrict, ...);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stddef.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIstrfmon\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/mqueue.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/mqueue.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c551a6a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/mqueue.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+'\" et
+.TH mqueue.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mqueue.h
+\(em message queues
+(\fBREALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <mqueue.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <mqueue.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR mqd_t
+type, which is used for message queue descriptors. This is not an
+array type.
+.P
+The
+.IR <mqueue.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR pthread_attr_t ,
+.BR size_t ,
+and
+.BR ssize_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <mqueue.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR "struct timespec"
+structure as described in
+.IR <time.h> .
+.P
+The tag
+.BR sigevent
+shall be declared as naming an incomplete structure type, the contents
+of which are described in the
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header.
+.P
+The
+.IR <mqueue.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR mq_attr
+structure, which is used in getting and setting the attributes of a
+message queue. Attributes are initially set when the message queue is
+created. An
+.BR mq_attr
+structure shall have at least the following fields:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+long    mq_flags    \fRMessage queue flags.\fP
+long    mq_maxmsg   \fRMaximum number of messages.\fP
+long    mq_msgsize  \fRMaximum message size.\fP
+long    mq_curmsgs  \fRNumber of messages currently queued.\fP
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int      mq_close(mqd_t);
+int      mq_getattr(mqd_t, struct mq_attr *);
+int      mq_notify(mqd_t, const struct sigevent *);
+mqd_t    mq_open(const char *, int, ...);
+ssize_t  mq_receive(mqd_t, char *, size_t, unsigned *);
+int      mq_send(mqd_t, const char *, size_t, unsigned);
+int      mq_setattr(mqd_t, const struct mq_attr *restrict,
+             struct mq_attr *restrict);
+ssize_t  mq_timedreceive(mqd_t, char *restrict, size_t,
+             unsigned *restrict, const struct timespec *restrict);
+int      mq_timedsend(mqd_t, const char *, size_t, unsigned,
+             const struct timespec *);
+int      mq_unlink(const char *);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <mqueue.h> 
+header may make visible symbols defined in the headers
+.IR <fcntl.h> ,
+.IR <signal.h> ,
+and
+.IR <time.h> .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<fcntl.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fImq_close\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_getattr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_notify\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_receive\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_send\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_setattr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_unlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/ndbm.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/ndbm.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8037aeb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/ndbm.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ndbm.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ndbm.h
+\(em definitions for ndbm database operations
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ndbm.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <ndbm.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR datum
+type as a structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void   *dptr  \fRA pointer to the application's data.\fR
+size_t  dsize \fRThe size of the object pointed to by \fIdptr.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <ndbm.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR size_t
+type as described in
+.IR <stddef.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <ndbm.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR DBM
+type.
+.P
+The
+.IR <ndbm.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants as possible
+values for the
+.IR store_mode
+argument to
+\fIdbm_store\fR():
+.IP DBM_INSERT 14
+Insertion of new entries only.
+.IP DBM_REPLACE 14
+Allow replacing existing entries.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int     dbm_clearerr(DBM *);
+void    dbm_close(DBM *);
+int     dbm_delete(DBM *, datum);
+int     dbm_error(DBM *);
+datum   dbm_fetch(DBM *, datum);
+datum   dbm_firstkey(DBM *);
+datum   dbm_nextkey(DBM *);
+DBM    *dbm_open(const char *, int, mode_t);
+int     dbm_store(DBM *, datum, datum, int);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <ndbm.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR mode_t
+type through
+.BR typedef ,
+as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<stddef.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIdbm_clearerr\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/net_if.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/net_if.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fb150dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/net_if.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+'\" et
+.TH net_if.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+net/if.h
+\(em sockets local interfaces
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <net/if.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <net/if.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR if_nameindex
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+unsigned  if_index  \fRNumeric index of the interface.\fR
+char     *if_name   \fRNull-terminated name of the interface.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <net/if.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant for the length of
+a buffer containing an interface name (including the terminating NULL
+character):
+.IP IF_NAMESIZE 12
+Interface name length.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void                  if_freenameindex(struct if_nameindex *);
+char                 *if_indextoname(unsigned, char *);
+struct if_nameindex  *if_nameindex(void);
+unsigned              if_nametoindex(const char *);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIif_freenameindex\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIif_indextoname\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIif_nameindex\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIif_nametoindex\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/netdb.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/netdb.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..41d1376
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/netdb.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,325 @@
+'\" et
+.TH netdb.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+netdb.h
+\(em definitions for network database operations
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <netdb.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <netdb.h> 
+header may define the
+.BR in_port_t
+type and the
+.BR in_addr_t
+type as described in
+.IR <netinet/in.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <netdb.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR hostent
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+char   *h_name       \fROfficial name of the host.\fR
+char  **h_aliases    \fRA pointer to an array of pointers to\fR
+                     \fRalternative host names, terminated by a\fR
+                     \fRnull pointer.\fR
+int     h_addrtype   \fRAddress type.\fR
+int     h_length     \fRThe length, in bytes, of the address.\fR
+char  **h_addr_list  \fRA pointer to an array of pointers to network\fR
+                     \fRaddresses (in network byte order) for the host,\fR
+                     \fRterminated by a null pointer.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <netdb.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR netent
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+char     *n_name      \fROfficial, fully-qualified (including the\fR
+                      \fRdomain) name of the host.\fR
+char    **n_aliases   \fRA pointer to an array of pointers to\fR
+                      \fRalternative network names, terminated by a\fR
+                      \fRnull pointer.\fR
+int       n_addrtype  \fRThe address type of the network.\fR
+uint32_t  n_net       \fRThe network number, in host byte order.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <netdb.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR uint32_t
+type as described in
+.IR <inttypes.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <netdb.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR protoent
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+char   *p_name     \fROfficial name of the protocol.\fR
+char  **p_aliases  \fRA pointer to an array of pointers to\fR
+                   \fRalternative protocol names, terminated by\fR
+                   \fRa null pointer.\fR
+int     p_proto    \fRThe protocol number.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <netdb.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR servent
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+char   *s_name     \fROfficial name of the service.\fR
+char  **s_aliases  \fRA pointer to an array of pointers to\fR
+                   \fRalternative service names, terminated by\fR
+                   \fRa null pointer.\fR
+int     s_port     \fRA value which, when converted to uint16_t,\fR
+                   \fRyields the port number in network byte order\fR
+                   \fRat which the service resides.\fR
+char   *s_proto    \fRThe name of the protocol to use when\fR
+                   \fRcontacting the service.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <netdb.h> 
+header shall define the IPPORT_RESERVED symbolic constant with the
+value of the highest reserved Internet port number.
+.SS "Address Information Structure"
+.P
+The
+.IR <netdb.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR addrinfo
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int               ai_flags      \fRInput flags.\fR
+int               ai_family     \fRAddress family of socket.\fR
+int               ai_socktype   \fRSocket type.\fR
+int               ai_protocol   \fRProtocol of socket.\fR
+socklen_t         ai_addrlen    \fRLength of socket address.\fR
+struct sockaddr  *ai_addr       \fRSocket address of socket.\fR
+char             *ai_canonname  \fRCanonical name of service location.\fR
+struct addrinfo  *ai_next       \fRPointer to next in list.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <netdb.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants that evaluate to
+bitwise-distinct integer constants for use in the
+.IR flags
+field of the
+.BR addrinfo
+structure:
+.IP AI_PASSIVE 14
+Socket address is intended for
+\fIbind\fR().
+.IP AI_CANONNAME 14
+Request for canonical name.
+.IP AI_NUMERICHOST 14
+Return numeric host address as name.
+.IP AI_NUMERICSERV 14
+Inhibit service name resolution.
+.IP AI_V4MAPPED 14
+If no IPv6 addresses are found, query for IPv4 addresses and return
+them to the caller as IPv4-mapped IPv6 addresses.
+.IP AI_ALL 14
+Query for both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
+.IP AI_ADDRCONFIG 14
+Query for IPv4 addresses only when an IPv4 address is configured;
+query for IPv6 addresses only when an IPv6 address is configured.
+.P
+The
+.IR <netdb.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants that evaluate
+to bitwise-distinct integer constants for use in the
+.IR flags
+argument to
+\fIgetnameinfo\fR():
+.IP NI_NOFQDN 14
+Only the nodename portion of the FQDN is returned for local hosts.
+.IP NI_NUMERICHOST 14
+The numeric form of the node's address is returned instead of its
+name.
+.IP NI_NAMEREQD 14
+Return an error if the node's name cannot be located in the database.
+.IP NI_NUMERICSERV 14
+The numeric form of the service address is returned instead of its name.
+.IP NI_NUMERICSCOPE 14
+.br
+For IPv6 addresses, the numeric form of the scope identifier is
+returned instead of its name.
+.IP NI_DGRAM 14
+Indicates that the service is a datagram service (SOCK_DGRAM).
+.SS "Address Information Errors"
+.P
+The
+.IR <netdb.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use as
+error values for
+\fIgetaddrinfo\fR()
+and
+\fIgetnameinfo\fR().
+The values shall be suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives.
+.IP EAI_AGAIN 14
+The name could not be resolved at this time. Future attempts may
+succeed.
+.IP EAI_BADFLAGS 14
+The flags had an invalid value.
+.IP EAI_FAIL 14
+A non-recoverable error occurred.
+.IP EAI_FAMILY 14
+The address family was not recognized or the address length was invalid
+for the specified family.
+.IP EAI_MEMORY 14
+There was a memory allocation failure.
+.IP EAI_NONAME 14
+The name does not resolve for the supplied parameters.
+.RS 14 
+.P
+NI_NAMEREQD is set and the host's name cannot be located, or both
+.IR nodename
+and
+.IR servname
+were null.
+.RE
+.IP EAI_SERVICE 14
+The service passed was not recognized for the specified socket type.
+.IP EAI_SOCKTYPE 14
+The intended socket type was not recognized.
+.IP EAI_SYSTEM 14
+A system error occurred. The error code can be found in
+.IR errno .
+.IP EAI_OVERFLOW 14
+An argument buffer overflowed.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void              endhostent(void);
+void              endnetent(void);
+void              endprotoent(void);
+void              endservent(void);
+void              freeaddrinfo(struct addrinfo *);
+const char       *gai_strerror(int);
+int               getaddrinfo(const char *restrict, const char *restrict,
+                      const struct addrinfo *restrict,
+                      struct addrinfo **restrict);
+struct hostent   *gethostent(void);
+int               getnameinfo(const struct sockaddr *restrict, socklen_t,
+                      char *restrict, socklen_t, char *restrict,
+                      socklen_t, int);
+struct netent    *getnetbyaddr(uint32_t, int);
+struct netent    *getnetbyname(const char *);
+struct netent    *getnetent(void);
+struct protoent  *getprotobyname(const char *);
+struct protoent  *getprotobynumber(int);
+struct protoent  *getprotoent(void);
+struct servent   *getservbyname(const char *, const char *);
+struct servent   *getservbyport(int, const char *);
+struct servent   *getservent(void);
+void              sethostent(int);
+void              setnetent(int);
+void              setprotoent(int);
+void              setservent(int);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <netdb.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR socklen_t
+type through
+.BR typedef ,
+as described in
+.IR <sys/socket.h> .
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <netdb.h> 
+header may also make visible all symbols from
+.IR <netinet/in.h> ,
+.IR <sys/socket.h> ,
+and
+.IR <inttypes.h> .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<inttypes.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<netinet_in.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIbind\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIendhostent\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIendnetent\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIendprotoent\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIendservent\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfreeaddrinfo\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgai_strerror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetnameinfo\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/netinet_in.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/netinet_in.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..039a116
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/netinet_in.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,391 @@
+'\" et
+.TH netinet_in.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+netinet/in.h
+\(em Internet address family
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <netinet/in.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <netinet/in.h> 
+header shall define the following types:
+.IP "\fBin_port_t\fP" 10
+Equivalent to the type
+.BR uint16_t
+as described in
+.IR <inttypes.h> .
+.IP "\fBin_addr_t\fP" 10
+Equivalent to the type
+.BR uint32_t
+as described in
+.IR <inttypes.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <netinet_in.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR sa_family_t
+type as described in
+.IR <sys/socket.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <netinet_in.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR uint8_t
+and
+.BR uint32_t
+types as described in
+.IR <inttypes.h> .
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <netinet/in.h> 
+header may also make visible all symbols from
+.IR <inttypes.h> 
+and
+.IR <sys/socket.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <netinet/in.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR in_addr
+structure, which shall include at least the following member:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+in_addr_t  s_addr
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <netinet/in.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR sockaddr_in
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sa_family_t     sin_family   \fRAF_INET.\fR
+in_port_t       sin_port     \fRPort number.\fR
+struct in_addr  sin_addr     \fRIP address.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR sin_port
+and
+.IR sin_addr
+members shall be in network byte order.
+.P
+The
+.BR sockaddr_in
+structure is used to store addresses for the Internet address family.
+Pointers to this type shall be cast by applications to
+.BR "struct sockaddr *"
+for use with socket functions.
+.P
+The
+.IR <netinet/in.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR in6_addr
+structure, which shall include at least the following member:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+uint8_t s6_addr[16]
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This array is used to contain a 128-bit IPv6 address, stored in network
+byte order.
+.P
+The
+.IR <netinet/in.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR sockaddr_in6
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sa_family_t      sin6_family    \fRAF_INET6.\fR
+in_port_t        sin6_port      \fRPort number.\fR
+uint32_t         sin6_flowinfo  \fRIPv6 traffic class and flow information.\fR
+struct in6_addr  sin6_addr      \fRIPv6 address.\fR
+uint32_t         sin6_scope_id  \fRSet of interfaces for a scope.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR sin6_port
+and
+.IR sin6_addr
+members shall be in network byte order.
+.P
+The
+.BR sockaddr_in6
+structure shall be set to zero by an application prior to using it,
+since implementations are free to have additional,
+implementation-defined fields in
+.BR sockaddr_in6 .
+.P
+The
+.IR sin6_scope_id
+field is a 32-bit integer that identifies a set of interfaces as
+appropriate for the scope of the address carried in the
+.IR sin6_addr
+field. For a link scope
+.IR sin6_addr ,
+the application shall ensure that
+.IR sin6_scope_id
+is a link index. For a site scope
+.IR sin6_addr ,
+the application shall ensure that
+.IR sin6_scope_id
+is a site index. The mapping of
+.IR sin6_scope_id
+to an interface or set of interfaces is implementation-defined.
+.P
+The
+.IR <netinet/in.h> 
+header shall declare the following external variable:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+const struct in6_addr in6addr_any
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This variable is initialized by the system to contain the wildcard IPv6
+address. The
+.IR <netinet/in.h> 
+header also defines the IN6ADDR_ANY_INIT macro. This macro must be
+constant at compile time and can be used to initialize a variable of
+type
+.BR "struct in6_addr"
+to the IPv6 wildcard address.
+.P
+The
+.IR <netinet/in.h> 
+header shall declare the following external variable:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+const struct in6_addr in6addr_loopback
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This variable is initialized by the system to contain the loopback IPv6
+address. The
+.IR <netinet/in.h> 
+header also defines the IN6ADDR_LOOPBACK_INIT macro. This macro must be
+constant at compile time and can be used to initialize a variable of
+type
+.BR "struct in6_addr"
+to the IPv6 loopback address.
+.P
+The
+.IR <netinet/in.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR ipv6_mreq
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+struct in6_addr  ipv6mr_multiaddr  \fRIPv6 multicast address.\fR
+unsigned         ipv6mr_interface  \fRInterface index.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <netinet/in.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use as
+values of the
+.IR level
+argument of
+\fIgetsockopt\fR()
+and
+\fIsetsockopt\fR():
+.IP IPPROTO_IP 16
+Internet protocol.
+.IP IPPROTO_IPV6 16
+Internet Protocol Version 6.
+.IP IPPROTO_ICMP 16
+Control message protocol.
+.IP IPPROTO_RAW 16
+Raw IP Packets Protocol.
+.IP IPPROTO_TCP 16
+Transmission control protocol.
+.IP IPPROTO_UDP 16
+User datagram protocol.
+.P
+The
+.IR <netinet/in.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use as
+destination addresses for
+\fIconnect\fR(),
+\fIsendmsg\fR(),
+and
+\fIsendto\fR():
+.IP INADDR_ANY 16
+IPv4 local host address.
+.IP INADDR_BROADCAST 16
+IPv4 broadcast address.
+.P
+The
+.IR <netinet/in.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant, with the value
+specified, to help applications declare buffers of the proper size
+to store IPv4 addresses in string form:
+.IP INET_ADDRSTRLEN 16
+16. Length of the string form for IP.
+.P
+The
+\fIhtonl\fR(),
+\fIhtons\fR(),
+\fIntohl\fR(),
+and
+\fIntohs\fR()
+functions shall be available as described in
+.IR <arpa/inet.h> .
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <netinet/in.h> 
+header may also make visible all symbols from
+.IR <arpa/inet.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <netinet/in.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant, with the value
+specified, to help applications declare buffers of the proper size
+to store IPv6 addresses in string form:
+.IP INET6_ADDRSTRLEN 16
+46. Length of the string form for IPv6.
+.br
+.P
+The
+.IR <netinet/in.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants, with distinct
+integer values, for use in the
+.IR option_name
+argument in the
+\fIgetsockopt\fR()
+or
+\fIsetsockopt\fR()
+functions at protocol level IPPROTO_IPV6:
+.IP IPV6_JOIN_GROUP 16
+Join a multicast group.
+.IP IPV6_LEAVE_GROUP 16
+Quit a multicast group.
+.IP IPV6_MULTICAST_HOPS 16
+.br
+Multicast hop limit.
+.IP IPV6_MULTICAST_IF 16
+Interface to use for outgoing multicast packets.
+.IP IPV6_MULTICAST_LOOP 16
+.br
+Multicast packets are delivered back to the local application.
+.IP IPV6_UNICAST_HOPS 16
+Unicast hop limit.
+.IP IPV6_V6ONLY 16
+Restrict AF_INET6 socket to IPv6 communications only.
+.P
+The
+.IR <netinet/in.h> 
+header shall define the following macros that test for special IPv6
+addresses. Each macro is of type
+.BR int
+and takes a single argument of type
+.BR "const struct in6_addr *" :
+.IP IN6_IS_ADDR_UNSPECIFIED 6
+.br
+Unspecified address.
+.IP IN6_IS_ADDR_LOOPBACK 6
+.br
+Loopback address.
+.IP IN6_IS_ADDR_MULTICAST 6
+.br
+Multicast address.
+.IP IN6_IS_ADDR_LINKLOCAL 6
+.br
+Unicast link-local address.
+.IP IN6_IS_ADDR_SITELOCAL 6
+.br
+Unicast site-local address.
+.IP IN6_IS_ADDR_V4MAPPED 6
+.br
+IPv4 mapped address.
+.IP IN6_IS_ADDR_V4COMPAT 6
+.br
+IPv4-compatible address.
+.IP IN6_IS_ADDR_MC_NODELOCAL 6
+.br
+Multicast node-local address.
+.IP IN6_IS_ADDR_MC_LINKLOCAL 6
+.br
+Multicast link-local address.
+.IP IN6_IS_ADDR_MC_SITELOCAL 6
+.br
+Multicast site-local address.
+.IP IN6_IS_ADDR_MC_ORGLOCAL 6
+.br
+Multicast organization-local address.
+.IP IN6_IS_ADDR_MC_GLOBAL 6
+.br
+Multicast global address.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 4.9" ", " "Host and Network Byte Orders",
+.IR "\fB<arpa_inet.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<inttypes.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIconnect\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetsockopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIhtonl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsendmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsendto\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsockopt\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/netinet_tcp.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/netinet_tcp.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b04e7c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/netinet_tcp.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+'\" et
+.TH netinet_tcp.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+netinet/tcp.h
+\(em definitions for the Internet Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <netinet/tcp.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <netinet/tcp.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant for use as a
+socket option at the IPPROTO_TCP level:
+.IP TCP_NODELAY 12
+Avoid coalescing of small segments.
+.P
+The implementation need not allow the value of the option to be set via
+\fIsetsockopt\fR()
+or retrieved via
+\fIgetsockopt\fR().
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIgetsockopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsockopt\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/nl_types.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/nl_types.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f0ef942
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/nl_types.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+'\" et
+.TH nl_types.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+nl_types.h
+\(em data types
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <nl_types.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <nl_types.h> 
+header shall define at least the following types:
+.IP "\fBnl_catd\fP" 14
+Used by the message catalog functions
+\fIcatopen\fR(),
+\fIcatgets\fR(),
+and
+\fIcatclose\fR()
+to identify a catalog descriptor.
+.IP "\fBnl_item\fP" 14
+Used by
+\fInl_langinfo\fR()
+to identify items of
+.IR langinfo
+data. Values of objects of type
+.BR nl_item
+are defined in
+.IR <langinfo.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <nl_types.h> 
+header shall define at least the following symbolic constants:
+.IP NL_SETD 14
+Used by
+.IR gencat
+when no $\fIset\fP directive is specified in a message text source
+file. This constant can be passed as the value of
+.IR set_id
+on subsequent calls to
+\fIcatgets\fR()
+(that is, to retrieve messages from the default message set). The
+value of NL_SETD is implementation-defined.
+.IP NL_CAT_LOCALE 14
+Value that must be passed as the
+.IR oflag
+argument to
+\fIcatopen\fR()
+to ensure that message catalog selection depends on the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+locale category, rather than directly on the
+.IR LANG
+environment variable.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int       catclose(nl_catd);
+char     *catgets(nl_catd, int, int, const char *);
+nl_catd   catopen(const char *, int);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<langinfo.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIcatclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcatgets\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcatopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fInl_langinfo\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIgencat\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/poll.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/poll.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..82680aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/poll.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+'\" et
+.TH poll.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+poll.h
+\(em definitions for the poll(\|) function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <poll.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <poll.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR pollfd
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int    fd       \fRThe following descriptor being polled.\fP
+short  events   \fRThe input event flags (see below).\fP
+short  revents  \fRThe output event flags (see below).\fP
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <poll.h> 
+header shall define the following type through
+.BR typedef :
+.IP "\fBnfds_t\fR" 14
+An unsigned integer type used for the number of file descriptors.
+.P
+The implementation shall support one or more programming environments
+in which the width of
+.BR nfds_t
+is no greater than the width of type
+.BR long .
+The names of these programming environments can be obtained using the
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+function or the
+.IR getconf
+utility.
+.P
+The
+.IR <poll.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants, zero or more of
+which may be OR'ed together to form the
+.IR events
+or
+.IR revents
+members in the
+.BR pollfd
+structure:
+.IP POLLIN 14
+Data other than high-priority data may be read without blocking.
+.IP POLLRDNORM 14
+Normal data may be read without blocking.
+.IP POLLRDBAND 14
+Priority data may be read without blocking.
+.IP POLLPRI 14
+High priority data may be read without blocking.
+.IP POLLOUT 14
+Normal data may be written without blocking.
+.IP POLLWRNORM 14
+Equivalent to POLLOUT.
+.IP POLLWRBAND 14
+Priority data may be written.
+.IP POLLERR 14
+An error has occurred (\c
+.IR revents
+only).
+.IP POLLHUP 14
+Device has been disconnected (\c
+.IR revents
+only).
+.IP POLLNVAL 14
+Invalid
+.IR fd
+member (\c
+.IR revents
+only).
+.P
+The significance and semantics of normal, priority, and high-priority
+data are file and device-specific.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as a function and may also be defined
+as a macro. A function prototype shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int   poll(struct pollfd [], nfds_t, int);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIconfstr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpoll\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIgetconf\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/pthread.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/pthread.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e8e1bce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/pthread.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,325 @@
+'\" et
+.TH pthread.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread.h
+\(em threads
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <pthread.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants:
+.P
+.nf
+PTHREAD_BARRIER_SERIAL_THREAD
+PTHREAD_CANCEL_ASYNCHRONOUS
+PTHREAD_CANCEL_ENABLE
+PTHREAD_CANCEL_DEFERRED
+PTHREAD_CANCEL_DISABLE
+PTHREAD_CANCELED
+PTHREAD_CREATE_DETACHED
+PTHREAD_CREATE_JOINABLE
+PTHREAD_EXPLICIT_SCHED
+PTHREAD_INHERIT_SCHED
+PTHREAD_MUTEX_DEFAULT
+PTHREAD_MUTEX_ERRORCHECK
+PTHREAD_MUTEX_NORMAL
+PTHREAD_MUTEX_RECURSIVE
+PTHREAD_MUTEX_ROBUST
+PTHREAD_MUTEX_STALLED
+PTHREAD_ONCE_INIT
+PTHREAD_PRIO_INHERIT
+PTHREAD_PRIO_NONE
+PTHREAD_PRIO_PROTECT
+PTHREAD_PROCESS_SHARED
+PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE
+PTHREAD_SCOPE_PROCESS
+PTHREAD_SCOPE_SYSTEM
+.fi
+.P
+The
+.IR <pthread.h> 
+header shall define the following compile-time constant
+expressions valid as initializers for the following types:
+.TS
+tab(!) center box;
+cB | cB
+l | lB.
+Name!Initializer for Type
+_
+PTHREAD_COND_INITIALIZER!pthread_cond_t
+PTHREAD_MUTEX_INITIALIZER!pthread_mutex_t
+PTHREAD_RWLOCK_INITIALIZER!pthread_rwlock_t
+.TE
+.P
+The
+.IR <pthread.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR pthread_attr_t ,
+.BR pthread_barrier_t ,
+.BR pthread_barrierattr_t ,
+.BR pthread_cond_t ,
+.BR pthread_condattr_t ,
+.BR pthread_key_t ,
+.BR pthread_mutex_t ,
+.BR pthread_mutexattr_t ,
+.BR pthread_once_t ,
+.BR pthread_rwlock_t ,
+.BR pthread_rwlockattr_t ,
+.BR pthread_spinlock_t ,
+and
+.BR pthread_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int   pthread_atfork(void (*)(void), void (*)(void),
+          void(*)(void));
+int   pthread_attr_destroy(pthread_attr_t *);
+int   pthread_attr_getdetachstate(const pthread_attr_t *, int *);
+int   pthread_attr_getguardsize(const pthread_attr_t *restrict,
+          size_t *restrict);
+int   pthread_attr_getinheritsched(const pthread_attr_t *restrict,
+          int *restrict);
+int   pthread_attr_getschedparam(const pthread_attr_t *restrict,
+          struct sched_param *restrict);
+int   pthread_attr_getschedpolicy(const pthread_attr_t *restrict,
+          int *restrict);
+int   pthread_attr_getscope(const pthread_attr_t *restrict,
+          int *restrict);
+int   pthread_attr_getstack(const pthread_attr_t *restrict,
+          void **restrict, size_t *restrict);
+int   pthread_attr_getstacksize(const pthread_attr_t *restrict,
+          size_t *restrict);
+int   pthread_attr_init(pthread_attr_t *);
+int   pthread_attr_setdetachstate(pthread_attr_t *, int);
+int   pthread_attr_setguardsize(pthread_attr_t *, size_t);
+int   pthread_attr_setinheritsched(pthread_attr_t *, int);
+int   pthread_attr_setschedparam(pthread_attr_t *restrict,
+          const struct sched_param *restrict);
+int   pthread_attr_setschedpolicy(pthread_attr_t *, int);
+int   pthread_attr_setscope(pthread_attr_t *, int);
+int   pthread_attr_setstack(pthread_attr_t *, void *, size_t);
+int   pthread_attr_setstacksize(pthread_attr_t *, size_t);
+int   pthread_barrier_destroy(pthread_barrier_t *);
+int   pthread_barrier_init(pthread_barrier_t *restrict,
+          const pthread_barrierattr_t *restrict, unsigned);
+int   pthread_barrier_wait(pthread_barrier_t *);
+int   pthread_barrierattr_destroy(pthread_barrierattr_t *);
+int   pthread_barrierattr_getpshared(
+          const pthread_barrierattr_t *restrict, int *restrict);
+int   pthread_barrierattr_init(pthread_barrierattr_t *);
+int   pthread_barrierattr_setpshared(pthread_barrierattr_t *, int);
+int   pthread_cancel(pthread_t);
+void  pthread_cleanup_pop(int);
+void  pthread_cleanup_push(void (*)(void*), void *);
+int   pthread_cond_broadcast(pthread_cond_t *);
+int   pthread_cond_destroy(pthread_cond_t *);
+int   pthread_cond_init(pthread_cond_t *restrict,
+          const pthread_condattr_t *restrict);
+int   pthread_cond_signal(pthread_cond_t *);
+int   pthread_cond_timedwait(pthread_cond_t *restrict,
+          pthread_mutex_t *restrict, const struct timespec *restrict);
+int   pthread_cond_wait(pthread_cond_t *restrict,
+          pthread_mutex_t *restrict);
+int   pthread_condattr_destroy(pthread_condattr_t *);
+int   pthread_condattr_getclock(const pthread_condattr_t *restrict,
+          clockid_t *restrict);
+int   pthread_condattr_getpshared(const pthread_condattr_t *restrict,
+          int *restrict);
+int   pthread_condattr_init(pthread_condattr_t *);
+int   pthread_condattr_setclock(pthread_condattr_t *, clockid_t);
+int   pthread_condattr_setpshared(pthread_condattr_t *, int);
+int   pthread_create(pthread_t *restrict, const pthread_attr_t *restrict,
+          void *(*)(void*), void *restrict);
+int   pthread_detach(pthread_t);
+int   pthread_equal(pthread_t, pthread_t);
+void  pthread_exit(void *);
+int   pthread_getconcurrency(void);
+int   pthread_getcpuclockid(pthread_t, clockid_t *);
+int   pthread_getschedparam(pthread_t, int *restrict,
+          struct sched_param *restrict);
+void *pthread_getspecific(pthread_key_t);
+int   pthread_join(pthread_t, void **);
+int   pthread_key_create(pthread_key_t *, void (*)(void*));
+int   pthread_key_delete(pthread_key_t);
+int   pthread_mutex_consistent(pthread_mutex_t *);
+int   pthread_mutex_destroy(pthread_mutex_t *);
+int   pthread_mutex_getprioceiling(const pthread_mutex_t *restrict,
+          int *restrict);
+int   pthread_mutex_init(pthread_mutex_t *restrict,
+          const pthread_mutexattr_t *restrict);
+int   pthread_mutex_lock(pthread_mutex_t *);
+int   pthread_mutex_setprioceiling(pthread_mutex_t *restrict, int,
+          int *restrict);
+int   pthread_mutex_timedlock(pthread_mutex_t *restrict,
+          const struct timespec *restrict);
+int   pthread_mutex_trylock(pthread_mutex_t *);
+int   pthread_mutex_unlock(pthread_mutex_t *);
+int   pthread_mutexattr_destroy(pthread_mutexattr_t *);
+int   pthread_mutexattr_getprioceiling(
+          const pthread_mutexattr_t *restrict, int *restrict);
+int   pthread_mutexattr_getprotocol(const pthread_mutexattr_t *restrict,
+          int *restrict);
+int   pthread_mutexattr_getpshared(const pthread_mutexattr_t *restrict,
+          int *restrict);
+int   pthread_mutexattr_getrobust(const pthread_mutexattr_t *restrict,
+          int *restrict);
+int   pthread_mutexattr_gettype(const pthread_mutexattr_t *restrict,
+          int *restrict);
+int   pthread_mutexattr_init(pthread_mutexattr_t *);
+int   pthread_mutexattr_setprioceiling(pthread_mutexattr_t *, int);
+int   pthread_mutexattr_setprotocol(pthread_mutexattr_t *, int);
+int   pthread_mutexattr_setpshared(pthread_mutexattr_t *, int);
+int   pthread_mutexattr_setrobust(pthread_mutexattr_t *, int);
+int   pthread_mutexattr_settype(pthread_mutexattr_t *, int);
+int   pthread_once(pthread_once_t *, void (*)(void));
+int   pthread_rwlock_destroy(pthread_rwlock_t *);
+int   pthread_rwlock_init(pthread_rwlock_t *restrict,
+          const pthread_rwlockattr_t *restrict);
+int   pthread_rwlock_rdlock(pthread_rwlock_t *);
+int   pthread_rwlock_timedrdlock(pthread_rwlock_t *restrict,
+          const struct timespec *restrict);
+int   pthread_rwlock_timedwrlock(pthread_rwlock_t *restrict,
+          const struct timespec *restrict);
+int   pthread_rwlock_tryrdlock(pthread_rwlock_t *);
+int   pthread_rwlock_trywrlock(pthread_rwlock_t *);
+int   pthread_rwlock_unlock(pthread_rwlock_t *);
+int   pthread_rwlock_wrlock(pthread_rwlock_t *);
+int   pthread_rwlockattr_destroy(pthread_rwlockattr_t *);
+int   pthread_rwlockattr_getpshared(
+          const pthread_rwlockattr_t *restrict, int *restrict);
+int   pthread_rwlockattr_init(pthread_rwlockattr_t *);
+int   pthread_rwlockattr_setpshared(pthread_rwlockattr_t *, int);
+pthread_t
+      pthread_self(void);
+int   pthread_setcancelstate(int, int *);
+int   pthread_setcanceltype(int, int *);
+int   pthread_setconcurrency(int);
+int   pthread_setschedparam(pthread_t, int,
+          const struct sched_param *);
+int   pthread_setschedprio(pthread_t, int);
+int   pthread_setspecific(pthread_key_t, const void *);
+int   pthread_spin_destroy(pthread_spinlock_t *);
+int   pthread_spin_init(pthread_spinlock_t *, int);
+int   pthread_spin_lock(pthread_spinlock_t *);
+int   pthread_spin_trylock(pthread_spinlock_t *);
+int   pthread_spin_unlock(pthread_spinlock_t *);
+void  pthread_testcancel(void);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <pthread.h> 
+header shall make symbols defined in the headers
+.IR <sched.h> 
+and
+.IR <time.h> 
+visible.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sched.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.P
+.ad l
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIpthread_atfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getdetachstate\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getguardsize\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getinheritsched\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getschedparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getschedpolicy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getscope\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getstack\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getstacksize\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_barrier_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_barrier_wait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_barrierattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_barrierattr_getpshared\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_cancel\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_cleanup_pop\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_cond_broadcast\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_cond_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_condattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_condattr_getclock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_condattr_getpshared\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_detach\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_equal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_exit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_getconcurrency\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_getcpuclockid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_getschedparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_getspecific\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_join\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_key_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_key_delete\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_consistent\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_getprioceiling\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_timedlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutexattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutexattr_getprioceiling\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutexattr_getprotocol\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutexattr_getpshared\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutexattr_getrobust\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutexattr_gettype\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_once\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_rdlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_timedrdlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_timedwrlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_trywrlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_unlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlockattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlockattr_getpshared\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_self\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_setcancelstate\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_setschedprio\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_spin_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_spin_lock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_spin_unlock\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/pwd.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/pwd.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f57166c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/pwd.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+'\" et
+.TH pwd.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pwd.h
+\(em password structure
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pwd.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <pwd.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR "struct passwd" ,
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+char    *pw_name   \fRUser's login name.\fP
+uid_t    pw_uid    \fRNumerical user ID.\fP
+gid_t    pw_gid    \fRNumerical group ID.\fP
+char    *pw_dir    \fRInitial working directory.\fP
+char    *pw_shell  \fRProgram to use as shell.\fP
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <pwd.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR gid_t ,
+.BR uid_t ,
+and
+.BR size_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void           endpwent(void);
+struct passwd *getpwent(void);
+struct passwd *getpwnam(const char *);
+int            getpwnam_r(const char *, struct passwd *, char *,
+                   size_t, struct passwd **);
+struct passwd *getpwuid(uid_t);
+int            getpwuid_r(uid_t, struct passwd *, char *,
+                   size_t, struct passwd **);
+void           setpwent(void);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIendpwent\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpwnam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpwuid\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/regex.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/regex.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5d0caa5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/regex.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,209 @@
+'\" et
+.TH regex.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+regex.h
+\(em regular expression matching types
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <regex.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <regex.h> 
+header shall define the structures and symbolic constants used by the
+\fIregcomp\fR(),
+\fIregexec\fR(),
+\fIregerror\fR(),
+and
+\fIregfree\fR()
+functions.
+.P
+The
+.IR <regex.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR regex_t
+structure type, which shall include at least the following member:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+size_t    re_nsub    \fRNumber of parenthesized subexpressions.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <regex.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR size_t
+type as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <regex.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR regoff_t
+type as a signed integer type that can hold
+the largest value that can be stored in either a
+.BR ptrdiff_t
+type or a
+.BR ssize_t
+type.
+.P
+The
+.IR <regex.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR regmatch_t
+structure type, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+regoff_t    rm_so    \fRByte offset from start of string\fR
+                     \fRto start of substring.\fR
+regoff_t    rm_eo    \fRByte offset from start of string of the\fR
+                     \fRfirst character after the end of substring.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <regex.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for the
+.IR cflags
+parameter to the
+\fIregcomp\fR()
+function:
+.IP REG_EXTENDED 14
+Use Extended Regular Expressions.
+.IP REG_ICASE 14
+Ignore case in match.
+.IP REG_NOSUB 14
+Report only success or fail in
+\fIregexec\fR().
+.IP REG_NEWLINE 14
+Change the handling of
+<newline>.
+.P
+The
+.IR <regex.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for the
+.IR eflags
+parameter to the
+\fIregexec\fR()
+function:
+.IP REG_NOTBOL 14
+The
+<circumflex>
+character (\c
+.BR '^' ),
+when taken as a special character, does not match the beginning of
+.IR string .
+.IP REG_NOTEOL 14
+The
+<dollar-sign>
+(\c
+.BR '$' ),
+when taken as a special character, does not match the end of
+.IR string .
+.P
+The
+.IR <regex.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants as error
+return values:
+.IP REG_NOMATCH 14
+\fIregexec\fR()
+failed to match.
+.IP REG_BADPAT 14
+Invalid regular expression.
+.IP REG_ECOLLATE 14
+Invalid collating element referenced.
+.IP REG_ECTYPE 14
+Invalid character class type referenced.
+.IP REG_EESCAPE 14
+Trailing
+<backslash>
+character in pattern.
+.IP REG_ESUBREG 14
+Number in \e\fIdigit\fP invalid or in error.
+.IP REG_EBRACK 14
+.BR \(dq[]\(dq 
+imbalance.
+.IP REG_EPAREN 14
+.BR \(dq\e(\e)\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dq()\(dq 
+imbalance.
+.IP REG_EBRACE 14
+.BR \(dq\e{\e}\(dq 
+imbalance.
+.IP REG_BADBR 14
+Content of
+.BR \(dq\e{\e}\(dq 
+invalid: not a number, number too large, more than two numbers, first
+larger than second.
+.IP REG_ERANGE 14
+Invalid endpoint in range expression.
+.IP REG_ESPACE 14
+Out of memory.
+.IP REG_BADRPT 14
+.BR '?' ,
+.BR '*' ,
+or
+.BR '+' 
+not preceded by valid regular expression.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int    regcomp(regex_t *restrict, const char *restrict, int);
+size_t regerror(int, const regex_t *restrict, char *restrict, size_t);
+int    regexec(const regex_t *restrict, const char *restrict, size_t,
+           regmatch_t [restrict], int);
+void   regfree(regex_t *);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The implementation may define additional macros or constants using
+names beginning with REG_.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIregcomp\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sched.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sched.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..488ffd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sched.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,155 @@
+'\" et
+.TH sched.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sched.h
+\(em execution scheduling
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sched.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <sched.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR pid_t
+type as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <sched.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR time_t
+type as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <sched.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR timespec
+structure as described in
+.IR <time.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <sched.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR sched_param
+structure, which shall include the scheduling parameters required for
+implementation of each supported scheduling policy. This structure
+shall include at least the following member:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int       sched_priority        \fRProcess or thread execution scheduling priority.\fP
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR sched_param
+structure defined in
+.IR <sched.h> 
+shall include the following members in addition to those specified
+above:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int             sched_ss_low_priority \fRLow scheduling priority for\fR
+                                      \fRsporadic server.\fR
+struct timespec sched_ss_repl_period  \fRReplenishment period for\fR
+                                      \fRsporadic server.\fR
+struct timespec sched_ss_init_budget  \fRInitial budget for sporadic server.\fR
+int             sched_ss_max_repl     \fRMaximum pending replenishments for\fR
+                                      \fRsporadic server.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Each process or thread is controlled by an associated scheduling policy
+and priority. Associated with each policy is a priority range. Each
+policy definition specifies the minimum priority range for that
+policy. The priority ranges for each policy may overlap the priority
+ranges of other policies.
+.P
+Four scheduling policies are defined; others may be defined by the
+implementation. The four standard policies are indicated by the
+values of the following symbolic constants:
+.IP SCHED_FIFO 14
+First in-first out (FIFO) scheduling policy.
+.IP SCHED_RR 14
+Round robin scheduling policy.
+.IP SCHED_SPORADIC 14
+Sporadic server scheduling policy.
+.IP SCHED_OTHER 14
+Another scheduling policy.
+.P
+The values of these constants are distinct.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int    sched_get_priority_max(int);
+int    sched_get_priority_min(int);
+int    sched_getparam(pid_t, struct sched_param *);
+int    sched_getscheduler(pid_t);
+int    sched_rr_get_interval(pid_t, struct timespec *);
+int    sched_setparam(pid_t, const struct sched_param *);
+int    sched_setscheduler(pid_t, int, const struct sched_param *);
+int    sched_yield(void);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <sched.h> 
+header may make visible all symbols from the
+.IR <time.h> 
+header.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIsched_get_priority_max\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_getparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_getscheduler\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_rr_get_interval\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_setparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_setscheduler\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_yield\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/search.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/search.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fca8acf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/search.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+'\" et
+.TH search.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+search.h
+\(em search tables
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <search.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <search.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR ENTRY
+type for structure
+.BR entry
+which shall include the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+char    *key
+void    *data
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and shall define
+.BR ACTION
+and
+.BR VISIT
+as enumeration data types through type definitions as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+enum { FIND, ENTER } ACTION;
+enum { preorder, postorder, endorder, leaf } VISIT;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <search.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR size_t
+type as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int    hcreate(size_t);
+void   hdestroy(void);
+ENTRY *hsearch(ENTRY, ACTION);
+void   insque(void *, void *);
+void  *lfind(const void *, const void *, size_t *,
+          size_t, int (*)(const void *, const void *));
+void  *lsearch(const void *, void *, size_t *,
+          size_t, int (*)(const void *, const void *));
+void   remque(void *);
+void  *tdelete(const void *restrict, void **restrict,
+          int(*)(const void *, const void *));
+void  *tfind(const void *, void *const *,
+          int(*)(const void *, const void *));
+void  *tsearch(const void *, void **,
+          int(*)(const void *, const void *));
+void   twalk(const void *,
+          void (*)(const void *, VISIT, int ));
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIhcreate\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIinsque\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlsearch\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItdelete\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/semaphore.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/semaphore.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3f277f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/semaphore.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+'\" et
+.TH semaphore.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+semaphore.h
+\(em semaphores
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <semaphore.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <semaphore.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR sem_t
+type, used in performing semaphore operations. The semaphore may be
+implemented using a file descriptor, in which case applications are
+able to open up at least a total of
+{OPEN_MAX}
+files and semaphores.
+.P
+The
+.IR <semaphore.h> 
+header shall define the symbolic constant SEM_FAILED which shall
+have type
+.BR "sem_t *" .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int    sem_close(sem_t *);
+int    sem_destroy(sem_t *);
+int    sem_getvalue(sem_t *restrict, int *restrict);
+int    sem_init(sem_t *, int, unsigned);
+sem_t *sem_open(const char *, int, ...);
+int    sem_post(sem_t *);
+int    sem_timedwait(sem_t *restrict, const struct timespec *restrict);
+int    sem_trywait(sem_t *);
+int    sem_unlink(const char *);
+int    sem_wait(sem_t *);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <semaphore.h> 
+header may make visible symbols defined in the
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+and
+.IR <time.h> 
+headers.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<fcntl.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIsem_close\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_getvalue\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_init\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_post\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_timedwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_trywait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_unlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/setjmp.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/setjmp.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c090cc7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/setjmp.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+'\" et
+.TH setjmp.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setjmp.h
+\(em stack environment declarations
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <setjmp.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Some of the functionality described on this reference page extends the
+ISO\ C standard. Applications shall define the appropriate feature test macro
+(see the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment")
+to enable the visibility of these symbols in this header.
+.P
+The
+.IR <setjmp.h> 
+header shall define the array types
+.BR jmp_buf
+and
+.BR sigjmp_buf .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void   _longjmp(jmp_buf, int);
+void   longjmp(jmp_buf, int);
+void   siglongjmp(sigjmp_buf, int);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following may be declared as functions, or defined as macros, or
+both. If functions are declared, function prototypes shall be
+provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int    _setjmp(jmp_buf);
+int    setjmp(jmp_buf);
+int    sigsetjmp(sigjmp_buf, int);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment",
+.IR "\fI_longjmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlongjmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetjmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsiglongjmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigsetjmp\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/signal.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/signal.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c3b579c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/signal.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,582 @@
+'\" et
+.TH signal.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+signal.h
+\(em signals
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Some of the functionality described on this reference page extends the
+ISO\ C standard. Applications shall define the appropriate feature test macro
+(see the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment")
+to enable the visibility of these symbols in this header.
+.P
+The
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header shall define the following macros, which shall expand to constant
+expressions with distinct values that have a type compatible with the
+second argument to, and the return value of, the
+\fIsignal\fR()
+function, and whose values shall compare unequal to the address of any
+declarable function.
+.IP SIG_DFL 14
+Request for default signal handling.
+.IP SIG_ERR 14
+Return value from
+\fIsignal\fR()
+in case of error.
+.IP SIG_HOLD 14
+Request that signal be held.
+.IP SIG_IGN 14
+Request that signal be ignored.
+.P
+The
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR pthread_t ,
+.BR size_t ,
+and
+.BR uid_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR timespec
+structure as described in
+.IR <time.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header shall define the following data types:
+.IP "\fBsig_atomic_t\fP" 14
+Possibly volatile-qualified integer type of an object that can be
+accessed as an atomic entity, even in the presence of asynchronous
+interrupts.
+.IP "\fBsigset_t\fP" 14
+Integer or structure type of an object used to represent sets of
+signals.
+.IP "\fBpid_t\fP" 14
+As described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR pthread_attr_t
+type as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR sigevent
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int              sigev_notify            \fRNotification type.\fP
+int              sigev_signo             \fRSignal number.\fP
+union sigval     sigev_value             \fRSignal value.\fP
+void           (*sigev_notify_function)(union sigval)
+                                         \fRNotification function.\fP
+pthread_attr_t *sigev_notify_attributes  \fRNotification attributes.\fP
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for the values of
+.IR sigev_notify :
+.IP SIGEV_NONE 14
+No asynchronous notification is delivered when the event of interest
+occurs.
+.IP SIGEV_SIGNAL 14
+A queued signal, with an application-defined value, is generated when
+the event of interest occurs.
+.IP SIGEV_THREAD 14
+A notification function is called to perform notification.
+.br
+.P
+The
+.BR sigval
+union shall be defined as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int    sival_int    \fRInteger signal value.\fP
+void  *sival_ptr    \fRPointer signal value.\fP
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header shall declare the SIGRTMIN and SIGRTMAX macros,
+which shall expand to positive integer expressions with type
+.BR int ,
+but which need not be constant expressions. These macros specify a
+range of signal numbers that are reserved for application use and for
+which the realtime signal behavior specified in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 is supported. The
+signal numbers in this range do not overlap any of the signals specified
+in the following table.
+.P
+The range SIGRTMIN through SIGRTMAX inclusive shall include at least
+{RTSIG_MAX}
+signal numbers.
+.P
+It is implementation-defined whether realtime signal behavior is
+supported for other signals.
+.P
+The
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header shall define the following macros that are used to refer to the
+signals that occur in the system. Signals defined here begin with the
+letters SIG followed by an uppercase letter. The macros shall expand to
+positive integer constant expressions with type
+.BR int
+and distinct values. The value 0 is reserved for use as the null signal
+(see
+\fIkill\fR()).
+Additional implementation-defined signals may occur in the system.
+.P
+The ISO\ C standard only requires the signal names SIGABRT, SIGFPE, SIGILL,
+SIGINT, SIGSEGV, and SIGTERM to be defined.
+.P
+The following signals shall be supported on all implementations
+(default actions are explained below the table):
+.TS
+box center tab(!);
+cB | cB | cB
+l | n | lw(3.6i).
+Signal!Default Action!Description
+_
+SIGABRT!A!Process abort signal.
+SIGALRM!T!Alarm clock.
+SIGBUS!A!Access to an undefined portion of a memory object.
+SIGCHLD!I!Child process terminated, stopped,
+!!or continued.
+SIGCONT!C!Continue executing, if stopped.
+SIGFPE!A!Erroneous arithmetic operation.
+SIGHUP!T!Hangup.
+SIGILL!A!Illegal instruction.
+SIGINT!T!Terminal interrupt signal.
+SIGKILL!T!Kill (cannot be caught or ignored).
+SIGPIPE!T!Write on a pipe with no one to read it.
+SIGQUIT!A!Terminal quit signal.
+SIGSEGV!A!Invalid memory reference.
+SIGSTOP!S!Stop executing (cannot be caught or ignored).
+SIGTERM!T!Termination signal.
+SIGTSTP!S!Terminal stop signal.
+SIGTTIN!S!Background process attempting read.
+SIGTTOU!S!Background process attempting write.
+SIGUSR1!T!User-defined signal 1.
+SIGUSR2!T!User-defined signal 2.
+SIGPOLL!T!Pollable event.
+SIGPROF!T!Profiling timer expired.
+SIGSYS!A!Bad system call.
+SIGTRAP!A!Trace/breakpoint trap.
+SIGURG!I!High bandwidth data is available at a socket.
+SIGVTALRM!T!Virtual timer expired.
+SIGXCPU!A!CPU time limit exceeded.
+SIGXFSZ!A!File size limit exceeded.
+.sp
+.TE
+.br
+.P
+The default actions are as follows:
+.IP T 6
+Abnormal termination of the process.
+.IP A 6
+Abnormal termination of the process
+with additional actions.
+.IP I 6
+Ignore the signal.
+.IP S 6
+Stop the process.
+.IP C 6
+Continue the process, if it is stopped; otherwise, ignore the signal.
+.P
+The effects on the process in each case are described in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.4.3" ", " "Signal Actions".
+.P
+The
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header shall declare the
+.BR sigaction
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void   (*sa_handler)(int)  \fRPointer to a signal-catching function\fR
+                           \fRor one of the SIG_IGN or SIG_DFL.\fR
+sigset_t sa_mask           \fRSet of signals to be blocked during execution\fR
+                           \fRof the signal handling function.\fR
+int      sa_flags          \fRSpecial flags.\fR
+void   (*sa_sigaction)(int, siginfo_t *, void *)
+                           \fRPointer to a signal-catching function.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The storage occupied by
+.IR sa_handler
+and
+.IR sa_sigaction
+may overlap, and a conforming application shall not use both
+simultaneously.
+.P
+The
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header shall define the following macros which shall expand to
+integer constant expressions that need not be usable in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives:
+.IP SIG_BLOCK 14
+The resulting set is the union of the current set and the signal set
+pointed to by the argument
+.IR set .
+.IP SIG_UNBLOCK 14
+The resulting set is the intersection of the current set and the
+complement of the signal set pointed to by the argument
+.IR set .
+.IP SIG_SETMASK 14
+The resulting set is the signal set pointed to by the argument
+.IR set .
+.P
+The
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header shall also define the following symbolic constants:
+.IP SA_NOCLDSTOP 14
+Do not generate SIGCHLD when children stop
+.br
+or stopped children continue.
+.IP SA_ONSTACK 14
+Causes signal delivery to occur on an alternate stack.
+.IP SA_RESETHAND 14
+Causes signal dispositions to be set to SIG_DFL on entry to signal
+handlers.
+.IP SA_RESTART 14
+Causes certain functions to become restartable.
+.IP SA_SIGINFO 14
+Causes extra information to be passed to signal handlers at the time of
+receipt of a signal.
+.IP SA_NOCLDWAIT 14
+Causes implementations not to create zombie processes on child death.
+.IP SA_NODEFER 14
+Causes signal not to be automatically blocked on entry to signal handler.
+.IP SS_ONSTACK 14
+Process is executing on an alternate signal stack.
+.IP SS_DISABLE 14
+Alternate signal stack is disabled.
+.IP MINSIGSTKSZ 14
+Minimum stack size for a signal handler.
+.IP SIGSTKSZ 14
+Default size in bytes for the alternate signal stack.
+.P
+The
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR mcontext_t
+type through
+.BR typedef .
+.P
+The
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR ucontext_t
+type as a structure that shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ucontext_t *uc_link     \fRPointer to the context that is resumed\fR
+                        \fRwhen this context returns.\fR
+sigset_t    uc_sigmask  \fRThe set of signals that are blocked when this\fR
+                        \fRcontext is active.\fR
+stack_t     uc_stack    \fRThe stack used by this context.\fR
+mcontext_t  uc_mcontext \fRA machine-specific representation of the saved\fR
+                        \fRcontext.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR stack_t
+type as a structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void     *ss_sp       \fRStack base or pointer.\fR
+size_t    ss_size     \fRStack size.\fR
+int       ss_flags    \fRFlags.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR siginfo_t
+type as a structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int           si_signo  \fRSignal number.\fR
+int           si_code   \fRSignal code.\fR
+int           si_errno  \fRIf non-zero, an \fIerrno\fR value associated with\fR
+                        \fRthis signal, as described in \fB<errno.h>\fR.\fR
+pid_t         si_pid    \fRSending process ID.\fR
+uid_t         si_uid    \fRReal user ID of sending process.\fR
+void         *si_addr   \fRAddress of faulting instruction.\fR
+int           si_status \fRExit value or signal.\fR
+long          si_band   \fRBand event for SIGPOLL.\fR
+union sigval  si_value  \fRSignal value.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header shall define the symbolic constants in the
+.BR Code
+column of the following table for use as values of
+.IR si_code
+that are signal-specific or non-signal-specific reasons why the
+signal was generated.
+.TS
+box center tab(!);
+cB | cB | cB
+l1 | l1 | l.
+Signal!Code!Reason
+_
+SIGILL!ILL_ILLOPC!Illegal opcode.
+!ILL_ILLOPN!Illegal operand.
+!ILL_ILLADR!Illegal addressing mode.
+!ILL_ILLTRP!Illegal trap.
+!ILL_PRVOPC!Privileged opcode.
+!ILL_PRVREG!Privileged register.
+!ILL_COPROC!Coprocessor error.
+!ILL_BADSTK!Internal stack error.
+_
+SIGFPE!FPE_INTDIV!Integer divide by zero.
+!FPE_INTOVF!Integer overflow.
+!FPE_FLTDIV!Floating-point divide by zero.
+!FPE_FLTOVF!Floating-point overflow.
+!FPE_FLTUND!Floating-point underflow.
+!FPE_FLTRES!Floating-point inexact result.
+!FPE_FLTINV!Invalid floating-point operation.
+!FPE_FLTSUB!Subscript out of range.
+_
+SIGSEGV!SEGV_MAPERR!Address not mapped to object.
+!SEGV_ACCERR!Invalid permissions for mapped object.
+_
+SIGBUS!BUS_ADRALN!Invalid address alignment.
+!BUS_ADRERR!Nonexistent physical address.
+!BUS_OBJERR!Object-specific hardware error.
+_
+SIGTRAP!TRAP_BRKPT!Process breakpoint.
+!TRAP_TRACE!Process trace trap.
+_
+SIGCHLD!CLD_EXITED!Child has exited.
+!CLD_KILLED!Child has terminated abnormally and did not create a \fBcore\fP file.
+!CLD_DUMPED!Child has terminated abnormally and created a \fBcore\fP file.
+!CLD_TRAPPED!Traced child has trapped.
+!CLD_STOPPED!Child has stopped.
+!CLD_CONTINUED!Stopped child has continued.
+_
+SIGPOLL!POLL_IN!Data input available.
+!POLL_OUT!Output buffers available.
+!POLL_MSG!Input message available.
+!POLL_ERR!I/O error.
+!POLL_PRI!High priority input available.
+!POLL_HUP!Device disconnected.
+_
+Any!SI_USER!Signal sent by \fIkill\fP\^(\|).
+!SI_QUEUE!Signal sent by \fIsigqueue\fP\^(\|).
+!SI_TIMER!Signal generated by expiration of a timer set by \fItimer_settime\fP\^(\|).
+!SI_ASYNCIO!Signal generated by completion of an asynchronous I/O
+!!request.
+!SI_MESGQ!Signal generated by arrival of a message on an empty message
+!!queue.
+.TE
+.P
+Implementations may support additional
+.IR si_code
+values not included in this list, may generate values included in this
+list under circumstances other than those described in this list, and
+may contain extensions or limitations that prevent some values from
+being generated. Implementations do not generate a different value from
+the ones described in this list for circumstances described in this
+list.
+.br
+.P
+In addition, the following signal-specific information shall be
+available:
+.TS
+box center tab(!);
+cB | cB | cB
+l | lB | lw(3.9i).
+Signal!Member!Value
+_
+SIGILL!void * \fIsi_addr\fP!Address of faulting instruction.
+SIGFPE
+_
+SIGSEGV!void * \fIsi_addr\fP!Address of faulting memory reference.
+SIGBUS
+_
+SIGCHLD!pid_t \fIsi_pid\fP!Child process ID.
+!int \fIsi_status\fP!Exit value or signal.
+!uid_t \fIsi_uid\fP!Real user ID of the process that sent the signal.
+_
+SIGPOLL!long \fIsi_band\fP!Band event for POLL_IN, POLL_OUT, or POLL_MSG.
+.TE
+.P
+For some implementations, the value of \fIsi_addr\fR may be inaccurate.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int    kill(pid_t, int);
+int    killpg(pid_t, int);
+void   psiginfo(const siginfo_t *, const char *);
+void   psignal(int, const char *);
+int    pthread_kill(pthread_t, int);
+int    pthread_sigmask(int, const sigset_t *restrict,
+           sigset_t *restrict);
+int    raise(int);
+int    sigaction(int, const struct sigaction *restrict,
+           struct sigaction *restrict);
+int    sigaddset(sigset_t *, int);
+int    sigaltstack(const stack_t *restrict, stack_t *restrict);
+int    sigdelset(sigset_t *, int);
+int    sigemptyset(sigset_t *);
+int    sigfillset(sigset_t *);
+int    sighold(int);
+int    sigignore(int);
+int    siginterrupt(int, int);
+int    sigismember(const sigset_t *, int);
+void (*signal(int, void (*)(int)))(int);
+int    sigpause(int);
+int    sigpending(sigset_t *);
+int    sigprocmask(int, const sigset_t *restrict, sigset_t *restrict);
+int    sigqueue(pid_t, int, const union sigval);
+int    sigrelse(int);
+void (*sigset(int, void (*)(int)))(int);
+int    sigsuspend(const sigset_t *);
+int    sigtimedwait(const sigset_t *restrict, siginfo_t *restrict,
+           const struct timespec *restrict);
+int    sigwait(const sigset_t *restrict, int *restrict);
+int    sigwaitinfo(const sigset_t *restrict, siginfo_t *restrict);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header may make visible all symbols from the
+.IR <time.h> 
+header.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On systems not supporting the XSI option, the
+.IR si_pid
+and
+.IR si_uid
+members of
+.BR siginfo_t
+are only required to be valid when
+.IR si_code
+is SI_USER or SI_QUEUE. On XSI-conforming systems, they are also
+valid for all
+.IR si_code
+values less than or equal to 0; however, it is unspecified whether
+SI_USER and SI_QUEUE have values less than or equal to zero, and
+therefore XSI applications should check whether
+.IR si_code
+has the value SI_USER or SI_QUEUE or is less than or equal to 0
+to tell whether
+.IR si_pid
+and
+.IR si_uid
+are valid.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The SIGPOLL and SIGPROF signals may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<errno.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stropts.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.P
+.ad l
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment",
+.IR "\fIalarm\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIioctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIkillpg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpsiginfo\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_kill\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_sigmask\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIraise\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaddset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaltstack\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigdelset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigemptyset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigfillset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsighold\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsiginterrupt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigismember\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsignal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigpending\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigqueue\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigsuspend\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigtimedwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItimer_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwaitid\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/spawn.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/spawn.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1fe6495
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/spawn.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,168 @@
+'\" et
+.TH spawn.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+spawn.h
+\(em spawn (\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <spawn.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <spawn.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR posix_spawnattr_t
+and
+.BR posix_spawn_file_actions_t
+types used in performing spawn operations.
+.P
+The
+.IR <spawn.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR mode_t
+and
+.BR pid_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <spawn.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR sigset_t
+type as described in
+.IR <signal.h> .
+.P
+The tag
+.BR sched_param
+shall be declared as naming an incomplete structure type, the contents
+of which are described in the
+.IR <sched.h> 
+header.
+.P
+The
+.IR <spawn.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use as the
+flags that may be set in a
+.BR posix_spawnattr_t
+object using the
+\fIposix_spawnattr_setflags\fR()
+function:
+.P
+.nf
+POSIX_SPAWN_RESETIDS
+POSIX_SPAWN_SETPGROUP
+POSIX_SPAWN_SETSCHEDPARAM
+POSIX_SPAWN_SETSCHEDULER
+POSIX_SPAWN_SETSIGDEF
+POSIX_SPAWN_SETSIGMASK
+.fi
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int   posix_spawn(pid_t *restrict, const char *restrict,
+          const posix_spawn_file_actions_t *,
+          const posix_spawnattr_t *restrict, char *const [restrict],
+          char *const [restrict]);
+int   posix_spawn_file_actions_addclose(posix_spawn_file_actions_t *,
+          int);
+int   posix_spawn_file_actions_adddup2(posix_spawn_file_actions_t *,
+          int, int);
+int   posix_spawn_file_actions_addopen(posix_spawn_file_actions_t *restrict,
+          int, const char *restrict, int, mode_t);
+int   posix_spawn_file_actions_destroy(posix_spawn_file_actions_t *);
+int   posix_spawn_file_actions_init(posix_spawn_file_actions_t *);
+int   posix_spawnattr_destroy(posix_spawnattr_t *);
+int   posix_spawnattr_getflags(const posix_spawnattr_t *restrict,
+          short *restrict);
+int   posix_spawnattr_getpgroup(const posix_spawnattr_t *restrict,
+          pid_t *restrict);
+int   posix_spawnattr_getschedparam(const posix_spawnattr_t *restrict,
+          struct sched_param *restrict);
+int   posix_spawnattr_getschedpolicy(const posix_spawnattr_t *restrict,
+          int *restrict);
+int   posix_spawnattr_getsigdefault(const posix_spawnattr_t *restrict,
+          sigset_t *restrict);
+int   posix_spawnattr_getsigmask(const posix_spawnattr_t *restrict,
+          sigset_t *restrict);
+int   posix_spawnattr_init(posix_spawnattr_t *);
+int   posix_spawnattr_setflags(posix_spawnattr_t *, short);
+int   posix_spawnattr_setpgroup(posix_spawnattr_t *, pid_t);
+.br
+int   posix_spawnattr_setschedparam(posix_spawnattr_t *restrict,
+          const struct sched_param *restrict);
+int   posix_spawnattr_setschedpolicy(posix_spawnattr_t *, int);
+int   posix_spawnattr_setsigdefault(posix_spawnattr_t *restrict,
+          const sigset_t *restrict);
+int   posix_spawnattr_setsigmask(posix_spawnattr_t *restrict,
+          const sigset_t *restrict);
+int   posix_spawnp(pid_t *restrict, const char *restrict,
+          const posix_spawn_file_actions_t *,
+          const posix_spawnattr_t *restrict,
+          char *const [restrict], char *const [restrict]);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <spawn.h> 
+header may make visible symbols defined in the
+.IR <sched.h> 
+and
+.IR <signal.h> 
+headers.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sched.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<semaphore.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+.ad l
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_addclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_adddup2\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getflags\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getpgroup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedpolicy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigdefault\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigmask\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/stdarg.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/stdarg.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bfd5979
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/stdarg.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,224 @@
+'\" et
+.TH stdarg.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+stdarg.h
+\(em handle variable argument list
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdarg.h>
+.P
+void va_start(va_list \fIap\fP, \fIargN\fP);
+void va_copy(va_list \fIdest\fP, va_list \fIsrc\fP);
+\fItype\fP va_arg(va_list \fIap\fP, \fItype\fP);
+void va_end(va_list \fIap\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stdarg.h> 
+header shall contain a set of macros which allows portable functions
+that accept variable argument lists to be written. Functions that have
+variable argument lists (such as
+\fIprintf\fR())
+but do not use these macros are inherently non-portable, as different
+systems use different argument-passing conventions.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stdarg.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR va_list
+type for variables used to traverse the list.
+.P
+The
+\fIva_start\fR()
+macro is invoked to initialize
+.IR ap
+to the beginning of the list before any calls to
+\fIva_arg\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIva_copy\fR()
+macro initializes
+.IR dest
+as a copy of
+.IR src ,
+as if the
+\fIva_start\fR()
+macro had been applied to
+.IR dest
+followed by the same sequence of uses of the
+\fIva_arg\fR()
+macro as had previously been used to reach the present state of
+.IR src .
+Neither the
+\fIva_copy\fR()
+nor
+\fIva_start\fR()
+macro shall be invoked to reinitialize
+.IR dest
+without an intervening invocation of the
+\fIva_end\fR()
+macro for the same
+.IR dest .
+.P
+The object
+.IR ap
+may be passed as an argument to another function; if that function
+invokes the
+\fIva_arg\fR()
+macro with parameter
+.IR ap ,
+the value of
+.IR ap
+in the calling function is unspecified and shall be passed to the
+\fIva_end\fR()
+macro prior to any further reference to
+.IR ap .
+The parameter
+.IR argN
+is the identifier of the rightmost parameter in the variable parameter
+list in the function definition (the one just before the .\|.\|.). If
+the parameter
+.IR argN
+is declared with the
+.BR register
+storage class, with a function type or array type, or with a type that
+is not compatible with the type that results after application of the
+default argument promotions, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The
+\fIva_arg\fR()
+macro shall return the next argument in the list pointed to by
+.IR ap .
+Each invocation of
+\fIva_arg\fR()
+modifies
+.IR ap
+so that the values of successive arguments are returned in turn. The
+.IR type
+parameter shall be a type name specified such that the type of a
+pointer to an object that has the specified type can be obtained simply
+by postfixing a
+.BR '*' 
+to type. If there is no actual next argument, or if
+.IR type
+is not compatible with the type of the actual next argument (as
+promoted according to the default argument promotions), the behavior is
+undefined, except for the following cases:
+.IP " *" 4
+One type is a signed integer type, the other type is the corresponding
+unsigned integer type, and the value is representable in both types.
+.IP " *" 4
+One type is a pointer to
+.BR void
+and the other is a pointer to a character type.
+.IP " *" 4
+Both types are pointers.
+.P
+Different types can be mixed, but it is up to the routine to
+know what type of argument is expected.
+.P
+The
+\fIva_end\fR()
+macro is used to clean up; it invalidates
+.IR ap
+for use (unless
+\fIva_start\fR()
+or
+\fIva_copy\fR()
+is invoked again).
+.P
+Each invocation of the
+\fIva_start\fR()
+and
+\fIva_copy\fR()
+macros shall be matched by a corresponding invocation of the
+\fIva_end\fR()
+macro in the same function.
+.P
+Multiple traversals, each bracketed by
+\fIva_start\fR()
+\&.\|.\|.
+\fIva_end\fR(),
+are possible.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+This example is a possible implementation of
+\fIexecl\fR():
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdarg.h>
+.P
+#define  MAXARGS     31
+.P
+/*
+ * execl is called by
+ * execl(file, arg1, arg2, ..., (char *)(0));
+ */
+int execl(const char *file, const char *args, ...)
+{
+    va_list ap;
+    char *array[MAXARGS +1];
+    int argno = 0;
+.P
+    va_start(ap, args);
+    while (args != 0 && argno < MAXARGS)
+    {
+        array[argno++] = args;
+        args = va_arg(ap, const char *);
+    }
+    array[argno] = (char *) 0;
+    va_end(ap);
+    return execv(file, array);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+It is up to the calling routine to communicate to the called routine
+how many arguments there are, since it is not always possible for the
+called routine to determine this in any other way. For example,
+\fIexecl\fR()
+is passed a null pointer to signal the end of the list. The
+\fIprintf\fR()
+function can tell how many arguments are there by the
+.IR format
+argument.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfprintf\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/stdbool.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/stdbool.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..746124b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/stdbool.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+'\" et
+.TH stdbool.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+stdbool.h
+\(em boolean type and values
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdbool.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stdbool.h> 
+header shall define the following macros:
+.IP bool 8
+Expands to
+.BR _Bool .
+.IP true 8
+Expands to the integer constant 1.
+.IP false 8
+Expands to the integer constant 0.
+.IP "_\|_bool_true_false_are_defined" 8
+.br
+Expands to the integer constant 1.
+.P
+An application may undefine and then possibly redefine the macros bool,
+true, and false.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The ability to undefine and redefine the macros bool, true, and false
+is an obsolescent feature and may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+None.
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/stddef.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/stddef.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..48a629d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/stddef.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+'\" et
+.TH stddef.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+stddef.h
+\(em standard type definitions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stddef.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stddef.h> 
+header shall define the following macros:
+.IP NULL 10
+Null pointer constant.
+The macro shall expand to an integer constant expression with the
+value 0 cast to type
+.BR "void *" .
+.IP "offsetof(\fItype\fP, \fImember-designator\fP)" 10
+.br
+Integer constant expression of type
+.BR size_t ,
+the value of which is the offset in bytes to the structure member
+(\fImember-designator\fP), from the beginning of its structure
+(\fItype\fP).
+.P
+The
+.IR <stddef.h> 
+header shall define the following types:
+.IP "\fBptrdiff_t\fP" 10
+Signed integer type of the result of subtracting two pointers.
+.IP "\fBwchar_t\fP" 10
+Integer type whose range of values can represent distinct codes for
+all members of the largest extended character set specified among the
+supported locales; the null character shall have the code value zero. Each
+member of the basic character set shall have a code value equal to its
+value when used as the lone character in an integer character constant
+if an implementation does not define _\|_STDC_MB_MIGHT_NEQ_WC_\|_.
+.IP "\fBsize_t\fP" 10
+Unsigned integer type of the result of the
+.IR sizeof
+operator.
+.P
+The implementation shall support one or more programming environments
+in which the widths of
+.BR ptrdiff_t ,
+.BR size_t ,
+and
+.BR wchar_t
+are no greater than the width of type
+.BR long .
+The names of these programming environments can be obtained using the
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+function or the
+.IR getconf
+utility.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The ISO\ C standard does not require the NULL macro to include the cast to type
+.BR "void *"
+and specifies that the NULL macro be implementation-defined. POSIX.1\(hy2008
+requires the cast and therefore need not be implementation-defined.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIconfstr\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIgetconf\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/stdint.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/stdint.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..96a0428
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/stdint.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,644 @@
+'\" et
+.TH stdint.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.EQ
+delim $$
+.EN
+.SH NAME
+stdint.h
+\(em integer types
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdint.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Some of the functionality described on this reference page extends the
+ISO\ C standard. Applications shall define the appropriate feature test macro
+(see the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment")
+to enable the visibility of these symbols in this header.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stdint.h> 
+header shall declare sets of integer types having specified widths, and
+shall define corresponding sets of macros. It shall also define macros
+that specify limits of integer types corresponding to types defined in
+other standard headers.
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+The ``width'' of an integer type is the number of bits used to store
+its value in a pure binary system; the actual type may use more bits
+than that (for example, a 28-bit type could be stored in 32 bits of
+actual storage). An
+.IR N -bit
+signed type has values in the range \(mi2\s-3\u\fIN\fR\(mi1\d\s+3 or
+1\(mi2\s-3\u\fIN\fR\(mi1\d\s+3 to 2\s-3\u\fIN\fR\(mi1\d\s+3\(mi1, while
+an
+.IR N -bit
+unsigned type has values in the range 0 to 2\s-3\u\fIN\fR\d\s+3\(mi1.
+.P
+.P
+Types are defined in the following categories:
+.IP " *" 4
+Integer types having certain exact widths
+.IP " *" 4
+Integer types having at least certain specified widths
+.IP " *" 4
+Fastest integer types having at least certain specified widths
+.IP " *" 4
+Integer types wide enough to hold pointers to objects
+.IP " *" 4
+Integer types having greatest width
+.P
+(Some of these types may denote the same type.)
+.P
+Corresponding macros specify limits of the declared types and construct
+suitable constants.
+.P
+For each type described herein that the implementation provides, the
+.IR <stdint.h> 
+header shall declare that
+.BR typedef
+name and define the associated macros. Conversely, for each type
+described herein that the implementation does not provide, the
+.IR <stdint.h> 
+header shall not declare that
+.BR typedef
+name, nor shall it define the associated macros. An implementation
+shall provide those types described as required, but need not provide
+any of the others (described as optional).
+.SS "Integer Types"
+.P
+When
+.BR typedef
+names differing only in the absence or presence of the initial
+.IR u
+are defined, they shall denote corresponding signed and unsigned types
+as described in the ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1999 standard, Section 6.2.5; an implementation providing
+one of these corresponding types shall also provide the other.
+.P
+In the following descriptions, the symbol
+.IR N
+represents an unsigned decimal integer with no leading zeros (for
+example, 8 or 24, but not 04 or 048).
+.IP " *" 4
+Exact-width integer types
+.RS 4 
+.P
+The
+.BR typedef
+name
+.BR int \c
+.IR N \c
+.BR _t
+designates a signed integer type with width
+.IR N ,
+no padding bits, and a two's-complement representation. Thus,
+.BR int8_t
+denotes a signed integer type with a width of exactly 8 bits.
+.P
+The
+.BR typedef
+name
+.BR uint \c
+.IR N \c
+.BR _t
+designates an unsigned integer type with width
+.IR N .
+Thus,
+.BR uint24_t
+denotes an unsigned integer type with a width of exactly 24 bits.
+.P
+The following types are required:
+.P
+.nf
+.BR int8_t
+.BR int16_t
+.BR int32_t
+.BR uint8_t
+.BR uint16_t
+.BR uint32_t
+.fi
+.P
+If an implementation provides integer types with width 64 that
+meet these requirements, then the following types are required:
+.BR int64_t
+.BR uint64_t
+.P
+In particular, this will be the case if any of the following are
+true:
+.IP -- 4
+The implementation supports the _POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG programming
+environment and the application is being built in the
+_POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG programming environment (see the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR c99 ,
+Programming Environments).
+.IP -- 4
+The implementation supports the _POSIX_V7_LP64_OFF64 programming
+environment and the application is being built in the
+_POSIX_V7_LP64_OFF64 programming environment.
+.IP -- 4
+The implementation supports the _POSIX_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG programming
+environment and the application is being built in the
+_POSIX_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG programming environment.
+.P
+All other types of this form are optional.
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Minimum-width integer types
+.RS 4 
+.P
+The
+.BR typedef
+name
+.BR int_least \c
+.IR N \c
+.BR _t
+designates a signed integer type with a width of at least
+.IR N ,
+such that no signed integer type with lesser size has at least the
+specified width. Thus,
+.BR int_least32_t
+denotes a signed integer type with a width of at least 32 bits.
+.P
+The
+.BR typedef
+name
+.BR uint_least \c
+.IR N \c
+.BR _t
+designates an unsigned integer type with a width of at least
+.IR N ,
+such that no unsigned integer type with lesser size has at least the
+specified width. Thus,
+.BR uint_least16_t
+denotes an unsigned integer type with a width of at least 16 bits.
+.P
+The following types are required:
+.BR int_least8_t
+.BR int_least16_t
+.BR int_least32_t
+.BR int_least64_t
+.BR uint_least8_t
+.BR uint_least16_t
+.BR uint_least32_t
+.BR uint_least64_t
+.P
+All other types of this form are optional.
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Fastest minimum-width integer types
+.RS 4 
+.P
+Each of the following types designates an integer type that is usually
+fastest to operate with among all integer types that have at least the
+specified width.
+.P
+The designated type is not guaranteed to be fastest for all purposes;
+if the implementation has no clear grounds for choosing one type over
+another, it will simply pick some integer type satisfying the
+signedness and width requirements.
+.P
+The
+.BR typedef
+name
+.BR int_fast \c
+.IR N \c
+.BR _t
+designates the fastest signed integer type with a width of at least
+.IR N .
+The
+.BR typedef
+name
+.BR uint_fast \c
+.IR N \c
+.BR _t
+designates the fastest unsigned integer type with a width of at least
+.IR N .
+.P
+The following types are required:
+.BR int_fast8_t
+.BR int_fast16_t
+.BR int_fast32_t
+.BR int_fast64_t
+.BR uint_fast8_t
+.BR uint_fast16_t
+.BR uint_fast32_t
+.BR uint_fast64_t
+.P
+All other types of this form are optional.
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Integer types capable of holding object pointers
+.RS 4 
+.P
+The following type designates a signed integer type with the property
+that any valid pointer to
+.BR void
+can be converted to this type, then converted back to a pointer to
+.BR void ,
+and the result will compare equal to the original pointer:
+.BR intptr_t
+.P
+The following type designates an unsigned integer type with the
+property that any valid pointer to
+.BR void
+can be converted to this type, then converted back to a pointer to
+.BR void ,
+and the result will compare equal to the original pointer:
+.BR uintptr_t
+.P
+On XSI-conformant systems, the
+.BR intptr_t
+and
+.BR uintptr_t
+types are required;
+otherwise, they are optional.
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Greatest-width integer types
+.RS 4 
+.P
+The following type designates a signed integer type capable of
+representing any value of any signed integer type:
+.BR intmax_t
+.P
+The following type designates an unsigned integer type capable of
+representing any value of any unsigned integer type:
+.BR uintmax_t
+.P
+These types are required.
+.RE
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+Applications can test for optional types by using the corresponding
+limit macro from
+.IR "Limits of Specified-Width Integer Types".
+.P
+.SS "Limits of Specified-Width Integer Types"
+.P
+The following macros specify the minimum and maximum limits of the
+types declared in the
+.IR <stdint.h> 
+header. Each macro name corresponds to a similar type name in
+.IR "Integer Types".
+.P
+Each instance of any defined macro shall be replaced by a constant
+expression suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives, and this expression shall have the same type
+as would an expression that is an object of the corresponding type
+converted according to the integer promotions. Its
+implementation-defined value shall be equal to or greater in magnitude
+(absolute value) than the corresponding value given below, with the
+same sign, except where stated to be exactly the given value.
+.IP " *" 4
+Limits of exact-width integer types
+.RS 4 
+.IP -- 4
+Minimum values of exact-width signed integer types:
+.RS 4 
+.IP "{INT\fIN\fR_MIN}" 16
+Exactly \(mi($2"^" N\(mi1$)
+.RE
+.IP -- 4
+Maximum values of exact-width signed integer types:
+.RS 4 
+.IP "{INT\fIN\fR_MAX}" 16
+Exactly $2"^" N\(mi1$ \(mi1
+.RE
+.IP -- 4
+Maximum values of exact-width unsigned integer types:
+.RS 4 
+.IP "{UINT\fIN\fR_MAX}" 16
+Exactly $2"^" N$ \(mi1
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Limits of minimum-width integer types
+.RS 4 
+.IP -- 4
+Minimum values of minimum-width signed integer types:
+.RS 4 
+.IP "{INT_LEAST\fIN\fR_MIN}" 16
+\(mi($2"^" N\(mi1$ \(mi1)
+.RE
+.IP -- 4
+Maximum values of minimum-width signed integer types:
+.RS 4 
+.IP "{INT_LEAST\fIN\fR_MAX}" 16
+$2"^" N\(mi1$ \(mi1
+.RE
+.IP -- 4
+Maximum values of minimum-width unsigned integer types:
+.RS 4 
+.IP "{UINT_LEAST\fIN\fR_MAX}" 16
+$2"^" N$ \(mi1
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Limits of fastest minimum-width integer types
+.RS 4 
+.IP -- 4
+Minimum values of fastest minimum-width signed integer types:
+.RS 4 
+.IP "{INT_FAST\fIN\fR_MIN}" 16
+\(mi($2"^" N\(mi1$ \(mi1)
+.RE
+.IP -- 4
+Maximum values of fastest minimum-width signed integer types:
+.RS 4 
+.IP "{INT_FAST\fIN\fR_MAX}" 16
+$2"^" N\(mi1$ \(mi1
+.RE
+.IP -- 4
+Maximum values of fastest minimum-width unsigned integer types:
+.RS 4 
+.IP "{UINT_FAST\fIN\fR_MAX}" 16
+$2"^" N$ \(mi1
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Limits of integer types capable of holding object pointers
+.RS 4 
+.IP -- 4
+Minimum value of pointer-holding signed integer type:
+.RS 4 
+.IP {INTPTR_MIN} 16
+\(mi($2"^" 15$ \(mi1)
+.RE
+.IP -- 4
+Maximum value of pointer-holding signed integer type:
+.RS 4 
+.IP {INTPTR_MAX} 16
+$2"^" 15$ \(mi1
+.RE
+.IP -- 4
+Maximum value of pointer-holding unsigned integer type:
+.RS 4 
+.IP {UINTPTR_MAX} 16
+$2"^" 16$ \(mi1
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Limits of greatest-width integer types
+.RS 4 
+.IP -- 4
+Minimum value of greatest-width signed integer type:
+.RS 4 
+.IP {INTMAX_MIN} 16
+\(mi($2"^" 63$ \(mi1)
+.RE
+.IP -- 4
+Maximum value of greatest-width signed integer type:
+.RS 4 
+.IP {INTMAX_MAX} 16
+$2"^" 63$ \(mi1
+.RE
+.IP -- 4
+Maximum value of greatest-width unsigned integer type:
+.RS 4 
+.IP {UINTMAX_MAX} 16
+$2"^" 64$ \(mi1
+.RE
+.RE
+.SS "Limits of Other Integer Types"
+.P
+The following macros specify the minimum and maximum limits of integer
+types corresponding to types defined in other standard headers.
+.P
+Each instance of these macros shall be replaced by a constant
+expression suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives, and this expression shall have the same type
+as would an expression that is an object of the corresponding type
+converted according to the integer promotions. Its
+implementation-defined value shall be equal to or greater in magnitude
+(absolute value) than the corresponding value given below, with the
+same sign.
+.IP " *" 4
+Limits of \fBptrdiff_t\fR:
+.RS 4 
+.IP {PTRDIFF_MIN} 16
+\(mi65\|535
+.IP {PTRDIFF_MAX} 16
++65\|535
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Limits of \fBsig_atomic_t\fR:
+.RS 4 
+.IP {SIG_ATOMIC_MIN} 16
+See below.
+.IP {SIG_ATOMIC_MAX} 16
+See below.
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Limit of \fBsize_t\fR:
+.RS 4 
+.IP {SIZE_MAX} 16
+65\|535
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Limits of \fBwchar_t\fR:
+.RS 4 
+.IP {WCHAR_MIN} 16
+See below.
+.IP {WCHAR_MAX} 16
+See below.
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Limits of \fBwint_t\fR:
+.RS 4 
+.IP {WINT_MIN} 16
+See below.
+.IP {WINT_MAX} 16
+See below.
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.BR sig_atomic_t
+(see the
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header) is defined as a signed integer type, the value of
+{SIG_ATOMIC_MIN}
+shall be no greater than \(mi127 and the value of
+{SIG_ATOMIC_MAX}
+shall be no less than 127; otherwise,
+.BR sig_atomic_t
+shall be defined as an unsigned integer type, and the value of
+{SIG_ATOMIC_MIN}
+shall be 0 and the value of
+{SIG_ATOMIC_MAX}
+shall be no less than 255.
+.P
+If
+.BR wchar_t
+(see the
+.IR <stddef.h> 
+header) is defined as a signed integer type, the value of
+{WCHAR_MIN}
+shall be no greater than \(mi127 and the value of
+{WCHAR_MAX}
+shall be no less than 127; otherwise,
+.BR wchar_t
+shall be defined as an unsigned integer type, and the value of
+{WCHAR_MIN}
+shall be 0 and the value of
+{WCHAR_MAX}
+shall be no less than 255.
+.P
+If
+.BR wint_t
+(see the
+.IR <wchar.h> 
+header) is defined as a signed integer type, the value of
+{WINT_MIN}
+shall be no greater than \(mi32\|767 and the value of
+{WINT_MAX}
+shall be no less than 32\|767; otherwise,
+.BR wint_t
+shall be defined as an unsigned integer type, and the value of
+{WINT_MIN}
+shall be 0 and the value of
+{WINT_MAX}
+shall be no less than 65\|535.
+.SS "Macros for Integer Constant Expressions"
+.P
+The following macros expand to integer constant expressions suitable for
+initializing objects that have integer types corresponding to types
+defined in the
+.IR <stdint.h> 
+header. Each macro name corresponds to a similar type name listed under
+\fIMinimum-width integer types\fR and \fIGreatest-width integer
+types\fR.
+.P
+Each invocation of one of these macros shall expand to an integer
+constant expression suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives. The type of the expression shall have the
+same type as would an expression that is an object of the corresponding
+type converted according to the integer promotions. The value of the
+expression shall be that of the argument.
+.P
+The argument in any instance of these macros shall be an unsuffixed
+integer constant with a value that does not exceed the limits for the
+corresponding type.
+.IP " *" 4
+Macros for minimum-width integer constant expressions
+.RS 4 
+.P
+The macro
+.IR INTN_C (\c
+.IR value )
+shall expand to an integer constant expression corresponding to the
+type
+.BR int_least \c
+.IR N \c
+.BR _t .
+The macro
+.IR UINTN_C (\c
+.IR value )
+shall expand to an integer constant expression corresponding to the
+type
+.BR uint_least \c
+.IR N \c
+.BR _t .
+For example, if
+.BR uint_least64_t
+is a name for the type
+.BR "unsigned long long" ,
+then
+.IR UINT64_C (0x123)
+might expand to the integer constant 0x123ULL.
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Macros for greatest-width integer constant expressions
+.RS 4 
+.P
+The following macro expands to an integer constant expression having
+the value specified by its argument and the type
+.BR intmax_t :
+INTMAX_C(\fIvalue\fR)
+.P
+The following macro expands to an integer constant expression having
+the value specified by its argument and the type
+.BR uintmax_t :
+UINTMAX_C(\fIvalue\fR)
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR <stdint.h> 
+header is a subset of the
+.IR <inttypes.h> 
+header more suitable for use in freestanding environments, which might
+not support the formatted I/O functions. In some environments, if the
+formatted conversion support is not wanted, using this header instead
+of the
+.IR <inttypes.h> 
+header avoids defining such a large number of macros.
+.br
+.P
+As a consequence of adding
+.BR int8_t ,
+the following are true:
+.IP " *" 4
+A byte is exactly 8 bits.
+.IP " *" 4
+{CHAR_BIT}
+has the value 8,
+{SCHAR_MAX}
+has the value 127,
+{SCHAR_MIN}
+has the value \(mi128, and
+{UCHAR_MAX}
+has the value 255.
+.P
+(The POSIX standard explicitly requires 8-bit char and
+two's-complement arithmetic.)
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+.BR typedef
+names beginning with
+.BR int
+or
+.BR uint
+and ending with _t may be added to the types defined in the
+.IR <stdint.h> 
+header. Macro names beginning with INT or UINT and ending with _MAX,
+_MIN, or _C may be added to the macros defined in the
+.IR <stdint.h> 
+header.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<inttypes.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stddef.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/stdio.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/stdio.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1954b79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/stdio.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,327 @@
+'\" et
+.TH stdio.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+stdio.h
+\(em standard buffered input/output
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Some of the functionality described on this reference page extends the
+ISO\ C standard. Applications shall define the appropriate feature test macro
+(see the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment")
+to enable the visibility of these symbols in this header.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stdio.h> 
+header shall define the following data types through
+.BR typedef :
+.IP "\fBFILE\fP" 14
+A structure containing information about a file.
+.IP "\fBfpos_t\fP" 14
+A non-array type containing all information needed to specify uniquely
+every position within a file.
+.IP "\fBoff_t\fP" 14
+As described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.IP "\fBsize_t\fP" 14
+As described in
+.IR <stddef.h> .
+.IP "\fBssize_t\fP" 14
+As described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.IP "\fBva_list\fP" 14
+As described in
+.IR <stdarg.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <stdio.h> 
+header shall define the following macros which shall expand to
+integer constant expressions:
+.IP BUFSIZ 14
+Size of
+.IR <stdio.h> 
+buffers.
+This shall expand to a positive value.
+.IP L_ctermid 14
+Maximum size of character array to hold
+\fIctermid\fR()
+output.
+.IP L_tmpnam 14
+Maximum size of character array to hold
+\fItmpnam\fR()
+output.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stdio.h> 
+header shall define the following macros which shall expand to
+integer constant expressions with distinct values:
+.IP _IOFBF 14
+Input/output fully buffered.
+.IP _IOLBF 14
+Input/output line buffered.
+.IP _IONBF 14
+Input/output unbuffered.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stdio.h> 
+header shall define the following macros which shall expand to
+integer constant expressions with distinct values:
+.IP SEEK_CUR 14
+Seek relative to current position.
+.IP SEEK_END 14
+Seek relative to end-of-file.
+.IP SEEK_SET 14
+Seek relative to start-of-file.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stdio.h> 
+header shall define the following macros which shall expand to
+integer constant expressions denoting implementation limits:
+.IP {FILENAME_MAX} 14
+Maximum size in bytes of the longest pathname that the implementation
+guarantees can be opened.
+.IP {FOPEN_MAX} 14
+Number of streams which the implementation guarantees can be open
+simultaneously. The value is at least eight.
+.IP {TMP_MAX} 14
+Minimum number of unique filenames generated by
+\fItmpnam\fR().
+Maximum number of times an application can call
+\fItmpnam\fR()
+reliably. The value of
+{TMP_MAX}
+is at least 25.
+.RS 14 
+.P
+On XSI-conformant systems, the value of
+{TMP_MAX}
+is at least 10\|000.
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <stdio.h> 
+header shall define the following macro which shall expand to an integer
+constant expression with type
+.BR int
+and a negative value:
+.IP EOF 14
+End-of-file return value.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stdio.h> 
+header shall define NULL as described in
+.IR <stddef.h> .
+.br
+.P
+The
+.IR <stdio.h> 
+header shall define the following macro which shall expand to a
+string constant:
+.IP P_tmpdir 14
+Default directory prefix for
+\fItempnam\fR().
+.P
+The
+.IR <stdio.h> 
+header shall define the following macros which shall expand to
+expressions of type ``pointer to
+.BR FILE ''
+that point to the
+.BR FILE
+objects associated, respectively, with the standard error, input, and
+output streams:
+.IP "\fIstderr\fR" 14
+Standard error output stream.
+.IP "\fIstdin\fR" 14
+Standard input stream.
+.IP "\fIstdout\fR" 14
+Standard output stream.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void     clearerr(FILE *);
+char    *ctermid(char *);
+int      dprintf(int, const char *restrict, ...)
+int      fclose(FILE *);
+FILE    *fdopen(int, const char *);
+int      feof(FILE *);
+int      ferror(FILE *);
+int      fflush(FILE *);
+int      fgetc(FILE *);
+int      fgetpos(FILE *restrict, fpos_t *restrict);
+char    *fgets(char *restrict, int, FILE *restrict);
+int      fileno(FILE *);
+void     flockfile(FILE *);
+FILE    *fmemopen(void *restrict, size_t, const char *restrict);
+FILE    *fopen(const char *restrict, const char *restrict);
+int      fprintf(FILE *restrict, const char *restrict, ...);
+int      fputc(int, FILE *);
+int      fputs(const char *restrict, FILE *restrict);
+size_t   fread(void *restrict, size_t, size_t, FILE *restrict);
+FILE    *freopen(const char *restrict, const char *restrict,
+             FILE *restrict);
+int      fscanf(FILE *restrict, const char *restrict, ...);
+int      fseek(FILE *, long, int);
+int      fseeko(FILE *, off_t, int);
+int      fsetpos(FILE *, const fpos_t *);
+long     ftell(FILE *);
+off_t    ftello(FILE *);
+int      ftrylockfile(FILE *);
+void     funlockfile(FILE *);
+size_t   fwrite(const void *restrict, size_t, size_t, FILE *restrict);
+int      getc(FILE *);
+int      getchar(void);
+int      getc_unlocked(FILE *);
+int      getchar_unlocked(void);
+ssize_t  getdelim(char **restrict, size_t *restrict, int,
+             FILE *restrict);
+ssize_t  getline(char **restrict, size_t *restrict, FILE *restrict);
+char    *gets(char *);
+FILE    *open_memstream(char **, size_t *);
+int      pclose(FILE *);
+void     perror(const char *);
+FILE    *popen(const char *, const char *);
+int      printf(const char *restrict, ...);
+int      putc(int, FILE *);
+int      putchar(int);
+int      putc_unlocked(int, FILE *);
+int      putchar_unlocked(int);
+int      puts(const char *);
+int      remove(const char *);
+int      rename(const char *, const char *);
+int      renameat(int, const char *, int, const char *);
+void     rewind(FILE *);
+int      scanf(const char *restrict, ...);
+void     setbuf(FILE *restrict, char *restrict);
+int      setvbuf(FILE *restrict, char *restrict, int, size_t);
+int      snprintf(char *restrict, size_t, const char *restrict, ...);
+int      sprintf(char *restrict, const char *restrict, ...);
+int      sscanf(const char *restrict, const char *restrict, ...);
+char    *tempnam(const char *, const char *);
+FILE    *tmpfile(void);
+char    *tmpnam(char *);
+int      ungetc(int, FILE *);
+int      vdprintf(int, const char *restrict, va_list);
+int      vfprintf(FILE *restrict, const char *restrict, va_list);
+int      vfscanf(FILE *restrict, const char *restrict, va_list);
+int      vprintf(const char *restrict, va_list);
+int      vscanf(const char *restrict, va_list);
+int      vsnprintf(char *restrict, size_t, const char *restrict,
+             va_list);
+int      vsprintf(char *restrict, const char *restrict, va_list);
+int      vsscanf(const char *restrict, const char *restrict, va_list);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <stdio.h> 
+header may also make visible all symbols from
+.IR <stddef.h> .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since standard I/O streams may use an underlying file descriptor to
+access the file associated with a stream, application developers need
+to be aware that
+{FOPEN_MAX}
+streams may not be available if file descriptors are being used to access
+files that are not associated with streams.
+.SH RATIONALE
+There is a conflict between the ISO\ C standard and the POSIX definition of the
+{TMP_MAX}
+macro that is addressed by ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1999 standard, Defect Report 336. The POSIX standard is
+in alignment with the public record of the response to the Defect Report.
+This change has not yet been published as part of the ISO\ C standard.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<stdarg.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stddef.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+.ad l
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment",
+.IR "\fIclearerr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIctermid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfdopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeof\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIferror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfflush\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfgetc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfgetpos\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfgets\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfileno\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIflockfile\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfmemopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfprintf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfputc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfputs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfreopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfscanf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfseek\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfsetpos\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIftell\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfwrite\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetchar\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetc_unlocked\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetdelim\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgets\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen_memstream\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIperror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputchar\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIremove\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrename\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrewind\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetbuf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetvbuf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstdin\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsystem\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItempnam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItmpfile\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItmpnam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIungetc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIvfprintf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIvfscanf\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/stdlib.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/stdlib.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8558574
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/stdlib.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,260 @@
+'\" et
+.TH stdlib.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+stdlib.h
+\(em standard library definitions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Some of the functionality described on this reference page extends the
+ISO\ C standard. Applications shall define the appropriate feature test macro
+(see the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment")
+to enable the visibility of these symbols in this header.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stdlib.h> 
+header shall define the following macros which shall expand to
+integer constant expressions:
+.IP EXIT_FAILURE 12
+Unsuccessful termination for
+\fIexit\fR();
+evaluates to a non-zero value.
+.IP EXIT_SUCCESS 12
+Successful termination for
+\fIexit\fR();
+evaluates to 0.
+.IP {RAND_MAX} 12
+Maximum value returned by
+\fIrand\fR();
+at least 32\|767.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stdlib.h> 
+header shall define the following macro which shall expand to a
+positive integer expression with type
+.BR size_t :
+.IP {MB_CUR_MAX} 12
+Maximum number of bytes in a character specified by the current
+locale (category
+.IR LC_CTYPE ).
+.P
+The
+.IR <stdlib.h> 
+header shall define NULL as described in
+.IR <stddef.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <stdlib.h> 
+header shall define the following data types through
+.BR typedef :
+.IP "\fBdiv_t\fP" 12
+Structure type returned by the
+\fIdiv\fR()
+function.
+.IP "\fBldiv_t\fP" 12
+Structure type returned by the
+\fIldiv\fR()
+function.
+.IP "\fBlldiv_t\fP" 12
+Structure type returned by the
+\fIlldiv\fR()
+function.
+.IP "\fBsize_t\fP" 12
+As described in
+.IR <stddef.h> .
+.IP "\fBwchar_t\fP" 12
+As described in
+.IR <stddef.h> .
+.P
+In addition, the
+.IR <stdlib.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants and macros
+as described in
+.IR <sys/wait.h> :
+.P
+.nf
+WEXITSTATUS
+WIFEXITED
+WIFSIGNALED
+WIFSTOPPED
+WNOHANG
+WSTOPSIG
+WTERMSIG
+WUNTRACED
+.fi
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void          _Exit(int);
+long          a64l(const char *);
+void          abort(void);
+int           abs(int);
+int           atexit(void (*)(void));
+double        atof(const char *);
+int           atoi(const char *);
+long          atol(const char *);
+long long     atoll(const char *);
+void         *bsearch(const void *, const void *, size_t, size_t,
+                  int (*)(const void *, const void *));
+void         *calloc(size_t, size_t);
+div_t         div(int, int);
+double        drand48(void);
+double        erand48(unsigned short [3]);
+void          exit(int);
+void          free(void *);
+char         *getenv(const char *);
+int           getsubopt(char **, char *const *, char **);
+int           grantpt(int);
+char         *initstate(unsigned, char *, size_t);
+long          jrand48(unsigned short [3]);
+char         *l64a(long);
+long          labs(long);
+void          lcong48(unsigned short [7]);
+ldiv_t        ldiv(long, long);
+long long     llabs(long long);
+lldiv_t       lldiv(long long, long long);
+long          lrand48(void);
+void         *malloc(size_t);
+int           mblen(const char *, size_t);
+size_t        mbstowcs(wchar_t *restrict, const char *restrict, size_t);
+int           mbtowc(wchar_t *restrict, const char *restrict, size_t);
+char         *mkdtemp(char *);
+int           mkstemp(char *);
+long          mrand48(void);
+long          nrand48(unsigned short [3]);
+int           posix_memalign(void **, size_t, size_t);
+int           posix_openpt(int);
+char         *ptsname(int);
+int           putenv(char *);
+void          qsort(void *, size_t, size_t, int (*)(const void *,
+                  const void *));
+int           rand(void);
+int           rand_r(unsigned *);
+long          random(void);
+void         *realloc(void *, size_t);
+char         *realpath(const char *restrict, char *restrict);
+unsigned short *seed48(unsigned short [3]);
+int           setenv(const char *, const char *, int);
+void          setkey(const char *);
+char         *setstate(char *);
+void          srand(unsigned);
+void          srand48(long);
+void          srandom(unsigned);
+double        strtod(const char *restrict, char **restrict);
+float         strtof(const char *restrict, char **restrict);
+long          strtol(const char *restrict, char **restrict, int);
+long double   strtold(const char *restrict, char **restrict);
+long long     strtoll(const char *restrict, char **restrict, int);
+unsigned long strtoul(const char *restrict, char **restrict, int);
+unsigned long long
+              strtoull(const char *restrict, char **restrict, int);
+int           system(const char *);
+int           unlockpt(int);
+int           unsetenv(const char *);
+size_t        wcstombs(char *restrict, const wchar_t *restrict, size_t);
+int           wctomb(char *, wchar_t);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <stdlib.h> 
+header may also make visible all symbols from
+.IR <stddef.h> ,
+.IR <limits.h> ,
+.IR <math.h> ,
+and
+.IR <sys/wait.h> .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<limits.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stddef.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_wait.h>\fP"
+.P
+.ad l
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment",
+.IR "\fI_Exit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIa64l\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIabort\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIabs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIatexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIatof\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIatoi\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIatol\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIbsearch\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcalloc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdiv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdrand48\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfree\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetenv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetsubopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgrantpt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIinitstate\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlabs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIldiv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImalloc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImblen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbstowcs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbtowc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImkdtemp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_memalign\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_openpt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIptsname\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputenv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIqsort\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrand\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrealloc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrealpath\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetenv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetkey\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrtod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrtol\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrtoul\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsystem\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunlockpt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunsetenv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcstombs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwctomb\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/string.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/string.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a178bc8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/string.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+'\" et
+.TH string.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+string.h
+\(em string operations
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Some of the functionality described on this reference page extends the
+ISO\ C standard. Applications shall define the appropriate feature test macro
+(see the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment")
+to enable the visibility of these symbols in this header.
+.P
+The
+.IR <string.h> 
+header shall define NULL and
+.BR size_t
+as described in
+.IR <stddef.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <string.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR locale_t
+type as described in
+.IR <locale.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided for use with ISO\ C standard
+compilers.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void    *memccpy(void *restrict, const void *restrict, int, size_t);
+void    *memchr(const void *, int, size_t);
+int      memcmp(const void *, const void *, size_t);
+void    *memcpy(void *restrict, const void *restrict, size_t);
+void    *memmove(void *, const void *, size_t);
+void    *memset(void *, int, size_t);
+char    *stpcpy(char *restrict, const char *restrict);
+char    *stpncpy(char *restrict, const char *restrict, size_t);
+char    *strcat(char *restrict, const char *restrict);
+char    *strchr(const char *, int);
+int      strcmp(const char *, const char *);
+int      strcoll(const char *, const char *);
+int      strcoll_l(const char *, const char *, locale_t);
+char    *strcpy(char *restrict, const char *restrict);
+size_t   strcspn(const char *, const char *);
+char    *strdup(const char *);
+char    *strerror(int);
+char    *strerror_l(int, locale_t);
+int      strerror_r(int, char *, size_t);
+size_t   strlen(const char *);
+char    *strncat(char *restrict, const char *restrict, size_t);
+int      strncmp(const char *, const char *, size_t);
+char    *strncpy(char *restrict, const char *restrict, size_t);
+char    *strndup(const char *, size_t);
+size_t   strnlen(const char *, size_t);
+char    *strpbrk(const char *, const char *);
+char    *strrchr(const char *, int);
+char    *strsignal(int);
+size_t   strspn(const char *, const char *);
+char    *strstr(const char *, const char *);
+char    *strtok(char *restrict, const char *restrict);
+char    *strtok_r(char *restrict, const char *restrict, char **restrict);
+size_t   strxfrm(char *restrict, const char *restrict, size_t);
+size_t   strxfrm_l(char *restrict, const char *restrict,
+             size_t, locale_t);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <string.h> 
+header may also make visible all symbols from
+.IR <stddef.h> .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stddef.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+.ad l
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment",
+.IR "\fImemccpy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImemchr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImemcmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImemcpy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImemmove\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImemset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrcat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrchr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrcmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrcoll\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrcpy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrcspn\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrdup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrerror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrlen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrncat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrncmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrncpy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrpbrk\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrrchr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrsignal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrspn\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrstr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrtok\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrxfrm\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/strings.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/strings.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f1f114c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/strings.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+'\" et
+.TH strings.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strings.h
+\(em string operations
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <strings.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided for use with ISO\ C standard
+compilers.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int    ffs(int);
+int    strcasecmp(const char *, const char *);
+int    strcasecmp_l(const char *, const char *, locale_t);
+int    strncasecmp(const char *, const char *, size_t);
+int    strncasecmp_l(const char *, const char *, size_t, locale_t);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <strings.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR locale_t
+type as described in
+.IR <locale.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <strings.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR size_t
+type as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIffs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrcasecmp\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/stropts.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/stropts.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..814bfb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/stropts.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,433 @@
+'\" et
+.TH stropts.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+stropts.h
+\(em STREAMS interface (\fBSTREAMS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stropts.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <stropts.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR bandinfo
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int            bi_flag  \fRFlushing type.\fR
+unsigned char  bi_pri   \fRPriority band.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <stropts.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR strpeek
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+struct strbuf  ctlbuf   \fRThe control portion of the message.\fR
+struct strbuf  databuf  \fRThe data portion of the message.\fR
+t_uscalar_t    flags    \fRRS_HIPRI or 0.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <stropts.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR strbuf
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+char  *buf     \fRPointer to buffer.\fP
+int    len     \fRLength of data.\fP
+int    maxlen  \fRMaximum buffer length.\fP
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <stropts.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR strfdinsert
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+struct strbuf  ctlbuf   \fRThe control portion of the message.\fR
+struct strbuf  databuf  \fRThe data portion of the message.\fR
+int            fildes   \fRFile descriptor of the other STREAM.\fR
+t_uscalar_t    flags    \fRRS_HIPRI or 0.\fR
+int            offset   \fRRelative location of the stored value.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <stropts.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR strioctl
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int    ic_cmd     \fIioctl\fR(\|) command.\fR
+char  *ic_dp      \fRPointer to buffer.\fR
+int    ic_len     \fRLength of data.\fR
+int    ic_timout  \fRTimeout for response.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <stropts.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR strrecvfd
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int    fd   \fRReceived file descriptor.\fR
+gid_t  gid  \fRGID of sender.\fR
+uid_t  uid  \fRUID of sender.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <stropts.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR uid_t
+and
+.BR gid_t
+types through
+.BR typedef ,
+as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <stropts.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR t_scalar_t
+and
+.BR t_uscalar_t
+types, respectively, as signed and unsigned opaque types of equal
+length of at least 32 bits.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stropts.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR str_list
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+struct str_mlist  *sl_modlist  \fRSTREAMS module names.\fR
+int                sl_nmods    \fRNumber of STREAMS module names.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <stropts.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR str_mlist
+structure, which shall include at least the following member:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+char  l_name[FMNAMESZ+1]  \fRA STREAMS module name.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <stropts.h> 
+header shall define at least the following symbolic constants for use
+as the
+.IR request
+argument to
+\fIioctl\fR():
+.IP I_ATMARK 12
+Is the top message ``marked''?
+.IP I_CANPUT 12
+Is a band writable?
+.IP I_CKBAND 12
+See if any messages exist in a band.
+.IP I_FDINSERT 12
+Send implementation-defined information about another STREAM.
+.IP I_FIND 12
+Look for a STREAMS module.
+.IP I_FLUSH 12
+Flush a STREAM.
+.IP I_FLUSHBAND 12
+Flush one band of a STREAM.
+.IP I_GETBAND 12
+Get the band of the top message on a STREAM.
+.IP I_GETCLTIME 12
+Get close time delay.
+.IP I_GETSIG 12
+Retrieve current notification signals.
+.IP I_GRDOPT 12
+Get the read mode.
+.IP I_GWROPT 12
+Get the write mode.
+.IP I_LINK 12
+Connect two STREAMs.
+.IP I_LIST 12
+Get all the module names on a STREAM.
+.IP I_LOOK 12
+Get the top module name.
+.IP I_NREAD 12
+Size the top message.
+.IP I_PEEK 12
+Peek at the top message on a STREAM.
+.IP I_PLINK 12
+Persistently connect two STREAMs.
+.IP I_POP 12
+Pop a STREAMS module.
+.IP I_PUNLINK 12
+Dismantle a persistent STREAMS link.
+.IP I_PUSH 12
+Push a STREAMS module.
+.IP I_RECVFD 12
+Get a file descriptor sent via I_SENDFD.
+.IP I_SENDFD 12
+Pass a file descriptor through a STREAMS pipe.
+.IP I_SETCLTIME 12
+Set close time delay.
+.IP I_SETSIG 12
+Ask for notification signals.
+.IP I_SRDOPT 12
+Set the read mode.
+.IP I_STR 12
+Send a STREAMS
+\fIioctl\fR().
+.IP I_SWROPT 12
+Set the write mode.
+.IP I_UNLINK 12
+Disconnect two STREAMs.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stropts.h> 
+header shall define at least the following symbolic constant for use
+with I_LOOK:
+.IP FMNAMESZ 12
+The minimum size in bytes of the buffer referred to by the
+.IR arg
+argument.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stropts.h> 
+header shall define at least the following symbolic constants for use
+with I_FLUSH:
+.IP FLUSHR 12
+Flush read queues.
+.IP FLUSHRW 12
+Flush read and write queues.
+.IP FLUSHW 12
+Flush write queues.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stropts.h> 
+header shall define at least the following symbolic constants for use
+with I_SETSIG:
+.IP S_BANDURG 12
+When used in conjunction with S_RDBAND, SIGURG is generated instead of
+SIGPOLL when a priority message reaches the front of the STREAM head
+read queue.
+.IP S_ERROR 12
+Notification of an error condition reaches the STREAM head.
+.IP S_HANGUP 12
+Notification of a hangup reaches the STREAM head.
+.IP S_HIPRI 12
+A high-priority message is present on a STREAM head read queue.
+.IP S_INPUT 12
+A message, other than a high-priority message, has arrived at the head
+of a STREAM head read queue.
+.IP S_MSG 12
+A STREAMS signal message that contains the SIGPOLL signal reaches the
+front of the STREAM head read queue.
+.IP S_OUTPUT 12
+The write queue for normal data (priority band 0) just below the STREAM
+head is no longer full. This notifies the process that there is room
+on the queue for sending (or writing) normal data downstream.
+.IP S_RDBAND 12
+A message with a non-zero priority band has arrived at the head of a
+STREAM head read queue.
+.IP S_RDNORM 12
+A normal (priority band set to 0) message has arrived at the head of a
+STREAM head read queue.
+.IP S_WRBAND 12
+The write queue for a non-zero priority band just below the STREAM head
+is no longer full.
+.IP S_WRNORM 12
+Equivalent to S_OUTPUT.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stropts.h> 
+header shall define at least the following symbolic constant for use
+with I_PEEK:
+.IP RS_HIPRI 12
+Only look for high-priority messages.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stropts.h> 
+header shall define at least the following symbolic constants for use
+with I_SRDOPT:
+.IP RMSGD 12
+Message-discard mode.
+.IP RMSGN 12
+Message-non-discard mode.
+.IP RNORM 12
+Byte-STREAM mode, the default.
+.IP RPROTDAT 12
+Deliver the control part of a message as data when a process issues a
+\fIread\fR().
+.IP RPROTDIS 12
+Discard the control part of a message, delivering any data part, when a
+process issues a
+\fIread\fR().
+.IP RPROTNORM 12
+Fail
+\fIread\fR()
+with
+.BR [EBADMSG] 
+if a message containing a control part is at the front of the STREAM
+head read queue.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stropts.h> 
+header shall define at least the following symbolic constant for use
+with I_SWOPT:
+.IP SNDZERO 12
+Send a zero-length message downstream when a
+\fIwrite\fR()
+of 0 bytes occurs.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stropts.h> 
+header shall define at least the following symbolic constants for use
+with I_ATMARK:
+.IP ANYMARK 12
+Check if the message is marked.
+.IP LASTMARK 12
+Check if the message is the last one marked on the queue.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stropts.h> 
+header shall define at least the following symbolic constant for use
+with I_UNLINK:
+.IP MUXID_ALL 12
+Unlink all STREAMs linked to the STREAM associated with
+.IR fildes .
+.P
+The
+.IR <stropts.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for
+\fIgetmsg\fR(),
+\fIgetpmsg\fR(),
+\fIputmsg\fR(),
+and
+\fIputpmsg\fR():
+.IP MORECTL 12
+More control information is left in message.
+.IP MOREDATA 12
+More data is left in message.
+.IP MSG_ANY 12
+Receive any message.
+.IP MSG_BAND 12
+Receive message from specified band.
+.IP MSG_HIPRI 12
+Send/receive high-priority message.
+.P
+The
+.IR <stropts.h> 
+header may make visible all of the symbols from
+.IR <unistd.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int    fattach(int, const char *);
+int    fdetach(const char *);
+int    getmsg(int, struct strbuf *restrict, struct strbuf *restrict,
+           int *restrict);
+int    getpmsg(int, struct strbuf *restrict, struct strbuf *restrict,
+           int *restrict, int *restrict);
+int    ioctl(int, int, ...);
+int    isastream(int);
+int    putmsg(int, const struct strbuf *, const struct strbuf *, int);
+int    putpmsg(int, const struct strbuf *, const struct strbuf *, int,
+           int);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfattach\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfdetach\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIioctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisastream\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpipe\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpoll\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsignal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_ipc.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_ipc.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6b8f259
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_ipc.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+'\" et
+.TH sys_ipc.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sys/ipc.h
+\(em XSI interprocess communication access structure
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/ipc.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <sys/ipc.h> 
+header is used by three mechanisms for XSI interprocess communication
+(IPC):
+messages, semaphores, and shared memory. All use a common structure
+type,
+.BR ipc_perm ,
+to pass information used in determining permission to perform an IPC
+operation.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/ipc.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR ipc_perm
+structure, which shall include the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+uid_t    uid    \fROwner's user ID.\fR
+gid_t    gid    \fROwner's group ID.\fR
+uid_t    cuid   \fRCreator's user ID.\fR
+gid_t    cgid   \fRCreator's group ID.\fR
+mode_t   mode   \fRRead/write permission.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/ipc.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR uid_t ,
+.BR gid_t ,
+.BR mode_t ,
+and
+.BR key_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/ipc.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants.
+.P
+Mode bits:
+.IP IPC_CREAT 12
+Create entry if key does not exist.
+.IP IPC_EXCL 12
+Fail if key exists.
+.IP IPC_NOWAIT 12
+Error if request must wait.
+.P
+Keys:
+.IP IPC_PRIVATE 12
+Private key.
+.P
+Control commands:
+.IP IPC_RMID 12
+Remove identifier.
+.IP IPC_SET 12
+Set options.
+.IP IPC_STAT 12
+Get options.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as a function and may also be defined
+as a macro. A function prototype shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+key_t  ftok(const char *, int);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIftok\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_mman.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_mman.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5b3dc15
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_mman.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,213 @@
+'\" et
+.TH sys_mman.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sys/mman.h
+\(em memory management declarations
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/mman.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <sys/mman.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use as
+protection options:
+.IP PROT_EXEC 14
+Page can be executed.
+.IP PROT_NONE 14
+Page cannot be accessed.
+.IP PROT_READ 14
+Page can be read.
+.IP PROT_WRITE 14
+Page can be written.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/mman.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use as
+flag options:
+.IP MAP_FIXED 14
+Interpret
+.IR addr
+exactly.
+.IP MAP_PRIVATE 14
+Changes are private.
+.IP MAP_SHARED 14
+Share changes.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/mman.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for the
+\fImsync\fR()
+function:
+.IP MS_ASYNC 14
+Perform asynchronous writes.
+.IP MS_INVALIDATE 14
+Invalidate mappings.
+.IP MS_SYNC 14
+Perform synchronous writes.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/mman.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for the
+\fImlockall\fR()
+function:
+.IP MCL_CURRENT 14
+Lock currently mapped pages.
+.IP MCL_FUTURE 14
+Lock pages that become mapped.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/mman.h> 
+header shall define the symbolic constant MAP_FAILED which shall
+have type
+.BR "void *"
+and shall be used to indicate a failure from the
+\fImmap\fR()
+function .
+.P
+If the Advisory Information option is supported, the
+.IR <sys/mman.h> 
+header shall define symbolic constants for the
+.IR advice
+argument to the
+\fIposix_madvise\fR()
+function as follows:
+.IP POSIX_MADV_DONTNEED 6
+.br
+The application expects that it will not access the specified range in
+the near future.
+.IP POSIX_MADV_NORMAL 6
+.br
+The application has no advice to give on its behavior with respect to
+the specified range. It is the default characteristic if no advice is
+given for a range of memory.
+.IP POSIX_MADV_RANDOM 6
+.br
+The application expects to access the specified range in a random
+order.
+.IP POSIX_MADV_SEQUENTIAL 6
+.br
+The application expects to access the specified range sequentially from
+lower addresses to higher addresses.
+.IP POSIX_MADV_WILLNEED 6
+.br
+The application expects to access the specified range in the near
+future.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/mman.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use as
+flags for the
+\fIposix_typed_mem_open\fR()
+function:
+.IP POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE 6
+.br
+Allocate on
+\fImmap\fR().
+.IP POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE_CONTIG 6
+.br
+Allocate contiguously on
+\fImmap\fR().
+.IP POSIX_TYPED_MEM_MAP_ALLOCATABLE 6
+.br
+Map on
+\fImmap\fR(),
+without affecting allocatability.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/mman.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR mode_t ,
+.BR off_t ,
+and
+.BR size_t
+types as described in
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP".
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/mman.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR posix_typed_mem_info
+structure, which shall include at least the following member:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+size_t  posix_tmi_length  \fRMaximum length which may be allocated\fR
+                          \fRfrom a typed memory object.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int    mlock(const void *, size_t);
+int    mlockall(int);
+void  *mmap(void *, size_t, int, int, int, off_t);
+int    mprotect(void *, size_t, int);
+int    msync(void *, size_t, int);
+int    munlock(const void *, size_t);
+int    munlockall(void);
+int    munmap(void *, size_t);
+int    posix_madvise(void *, size_t, int);
+int    posix_mem_offset(const void *restrict, size_t, off_t *restrict,
+           size_t *restrict, int *restrict);
+int    posix_typed_mem_get_info(int, struct posix_typed_mem_info *);
+int    posix_typed_mem_open(const char *, int, int);
+int    shm_open(const char *, int, mode_t);
+int    shm_unlink(const char *);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fImlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImlockall\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImmap\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImprotect\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsync\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImunmap\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_madvise\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_mem_offset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_typed_mem_get_info\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_typed_mem_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshm_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshm_unlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_msg.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_msg.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..032a23d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_msg.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,122 @@
+'\" et
+.TH sys_msg.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sys/msg.h
+\(em XSI message queue structures
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/msg.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <sys/msg.h> 
+header shall define the following data types through
+.BR typedef :
+.IP "\fBmsgqnum_t\fP" 14
+Used for the number of messages in the message queue.
+.IP "\fBmsglen_t\fP" 14
+Used for the number of bytes allowed in a message queue.
+.P
+These types shall be unsigned integer types that are able to store
+values at least as large as a type
+.BR "unsigned short" .
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/msg.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant as a message
+operation flag:
+.IP MSG_NOERROR 14
+No error if big message.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/msg.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR msqid_ds
+structure, which shall include the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+struct ipc_perm msg_perm   \fROperation permission structure.\fR
+msgqnum_t       msg_qnum   \fRNumber of messages currently on queue.\fR
+msglen_t        msg_qbytes \fRMaximum number of bytes allowed on queue.\fR
+pid_t           msg_lspid  \fRProcess ID of last \fImsgsnd\fP\^(\|).\fR
+pid_t           msg_lrpid  \fRProcess ID of last \fImsgrcv\fP\^(\|).\fR
+time_t          msg_stime  \fRTime of last \fImsgsnd\fP\^(\|).\fR
+time_t          msg_rtime  \fRTime of last \fImsgrcv\fP\^(\|).\fR
+time_t          msg_ctime  \fRTime of last change.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/msg.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR pid_t ,
+.BR size_t ,
+.BR ssize_t ,
+and
+.BR time_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int       msgctl(int, int, struct msqid_ds *);
+int       msgget(key_t, int);
+ssize_t   msgrcv(int, void *, size_t, long, int);
+int       msgsnd(int, const void *, size_t, int);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In addition, the
+.IR <sys/msg.h> 
+header shall include the
+.IR <sys/ipc.h> 
+header.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_ipc.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fImsgctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgrcv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgsnd\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_resource.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_resource.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9c30d1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_resource.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,207 @@
+'\" et
+.TH sys_resource.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sys/resource.h
+\(em definitions for XSI resource operations
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/resource.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <sys/resource.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants as possible values
+of the
+.IR which
+argument of
+\fIgetpriority\fR()
+and
+\fIsetpriority\fR():
+.IP PRIO_PROCESS 16
+Identifies the
+.IR who
+argument as a process ID.
+.IP PRIO_PGRP 16
+Identifies the
+.IR who
+argument as a process group ID.
+.IP PRIO_USER 16
+Identifies the
+.IR who
+argument as a user ID.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/resource.h> 
+header shall define the following type through
+.BR typedef :
+.IP "\fBrlim_t\fR" 16
+Unsigned integer type used for limit values.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/resource.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants, which shall have
+values suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives:
+.IP RLIM_INFINITY 16
+A value of
+.BR rlim_t
+indicating no limit.
+.IP RLIM_SAVED_MAX 16
+A value of type
+.BR rlim_t
+indicating an unrepresentable saved hard limit.
+.IP RLIM_SAVED_CUR 16
+A value of type
+.BR rlim_t
+indicating an unrepresentable saved soft limit.
+.P
+On implementations where all resource limits are representable in an
+object of type
+.BR rlim_t ,
+RLIM_SAVED_MAX and RLIM_SAVED_CUR need not be distinct from
+RLIM_INFINITY.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/resource.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants as possible values
+of the
+.IR who
+parameter of
+\fIgetrusage\fR():
+.IP RUSAGE_SELF 16
+Returns information about the current process.
+.IP RUSAGE_CHILDREN 16
+Returns information about children of the current process.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/resource.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR rlimit
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+rlim_t rlim_cur  \fRThe current (soft) limit.\fR
+rlim_t rlim_max  \fRThe hard limit.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/resource.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR rusage
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+struct timeval ru_utime  \fRUser time used.\fR
+struct timeval ru_stime  \fRSystem time used.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/resource.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR timeval
+structure as described in
+.IR <sys/time.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/resource.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants as possible values
+for the
+.IR resource
+argument of
+\fIgetrlimit\fR()
+and
+\fIsetrlimit\fR():
+.IP RLIMIT_CORE 16
+Limit on size of
+.BR core
+file.
+.IP RLIMIT_CPU 16
+Limit on CPU time per process.
+.IP RLIMIT_DATA 16
+Limit on data segment size.
+.IP RLIMIT_FSIZE 16
+Limit on file size.
+.IP RLIMIT_NOFILE 16
+Limit on number of open files.
+.IP RLIMIT_STACK 16
+Limit on stack size.
+.IP RLIMIT_AS 16
+Limit on address space size.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int  getpriority(int, id_t);
+int  getrlimit(int, struct rlimit *);
+int  getrusage(int, struct rusage *);
+int  setpriority(int, id_t, int);
+int  setrlimit(int, const struct rlimit *);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/resource.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR id_t
+type through
+.BR typedef ,
+as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <sys/resource.h> 
+header may also make visible all symbols from
+.IR <sys/time.h> .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_time.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIgetpriority\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetrlimit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetrusage\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_select.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_select.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..af643c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_select.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
+'\" et
+.TH sys_select.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sys/select.h
+\(em select types
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/select.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <sys/select.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR timeval
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+time_t         tv_sec      \fRSeconds.\fR
+suseconds_t    tv_usec     \fRMicroseconds.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/select.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR time_t
+and
+.BR suseconds_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/select.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR sigset_t
+type as described in
+.IR <signal.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/select.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR timespec
+structure as described in
+.IR <time.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/select.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR fd_set
+type as a structure.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/select.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant, which shall have
+a value suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives:
+.IP FD_SETSIZE 12
+Maximum number of file descriptors in an
+.BR fd_set
+structure.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions, defined as macros, or
+both. If functions are declared, function prototypes shall be
+provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void FD_CLR(int, fd_set *);
+int  FD_ISSET(int, fd_set *);
+void FD_SET(int, fd_set *);
+void FD_ZERO(fd_set *);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If implemented as macros, these may evaluate their arguments more than
+once, so applications should ensure that the arguments they supply are
+never expressions with side-effects.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int  pselect(int, fd_set *restrict, fd_set *restrict, fd_set *restrict,
+         const struct timespec *restrict, const sigset_t *restrict);
+int  select(int, fd_set *restrict, fd_set *restrict, fd_set *restrict,
+         struct timeval *restrict);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <sys/select.h> 
+header may make visible all symbols from the headers
+.IR <signal.h> 
+and
+.IR <time.h> .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_time.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIpselect\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_sem.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_sem.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..678771a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_sem.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,162 @@
+'\" et
+.TH sys_sem.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sys/sem.h
+\(em XSI semaphore facility
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/sem.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <sys/sem.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant for use as a
+semaphore operation flag:
+.IP SEM_UNDO 12
+Set up adjust on exit entry.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/sem.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use as
+commands for the
+\fIsemctl\fR()
+function:
+.IP GETNCNT 12
+Get
+.IR semncnt .
+.IP GETPID 12
+Get
+.IR sempid .
+.IP GETVAL 12
+Get
+.IR semval .
+.IP GETALL 12
+Get all cases of
+.IR semval .
+.IP GETZCNT 12
+Get
+.IR semzcnt .
+.IP SETVAL 12
+Set
+.IR semval .
+.IP SETALL 12
+Set all cases of
+.IR semval .
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/sem.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR semid_ds
+structure, which shall include the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+struct ipc_perm  sem_perm  \fROperation permission structure.\fR
+unsigned short   sem_nsems \fRNumber of semaphores in set.\fR
+time_t           sem_otime \fRLast \fIsemop\fP\^(\|) time.\fR
+time_t           sem_ctime \fRLast time changed by \fIsemctl\fP\^(\|).\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/sem.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR pid_t ,
+.BR size_t ,
+and
+.BR time_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+A semaphore shall be represented by an anonymous structure,
+which shall include the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+unsigned short  semval   \fRSemaphore value.\fR
+pid_t           sempid   \fRProcess ID of last operation.\fR
+unsigned short  semncnt  \fRNumber of processes waiting for \fIsemval\fR
+                         \fRto become greater than current value.\fR
+unsigned short  semzcnt  \fRNumber of processes waiting for \fIsemval\fR
+                         \fRto become 0.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/sem.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR sembuf
+structure, which shall include the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+unsigned short  sem_num   \fRSemaphore number.\fR
+short           sem_op    \fRSemaphore operation.\fR
+short           sem_flg   \fROperation flags.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int   semctl(int, int, int, ...);
+int   semget(key_t, int, int);
+int   semop(int, struct sembuf *, size_t);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In addition, the
+.IR <sys/sem.h> 
+header shall include the
+.IR <sys/ipc.h> 
+header.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_ipc.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIsemctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemop\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_shm.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_shm.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fcb74a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_shm.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+'\" et
+.TH sys_shm.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sys/shm.h
+\(em XSI shared memory facility
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/shm.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <sys/shm.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants:
+.IP SHM_RDONLY 12
+Attach read-only (else read-write).
+.IP SHM_RND 12
+Round attach address to SHMLBA.
+.IP SHMLBA 12
+Segment low boundary address multiple.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/shm.h> 
+header shall define the following data types through
+.BR typedef :
+.IP "\fBshmatt_t\fP" 12
+Unsigned integer used for the number of current attaches that must be
+able to store values at least as large as a type
+.BR "unsigned short" .
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/shm.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR shmid_ds
+structure, which shall include the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+struct ipc_perm shm_perm   \fROperation permission structure.\fR
+size_t          shm_segsz  \fRSize of segment in bytes.\fR
+pid_t           shm_lpid   \fRProcess ID of last shared memory operation.\fR
+pid_t           shm_cpid   \fRProcess ID of creator.\fR
+shmatt_t        shm_nattch \fRNumber of current attaches.\fR
+time_t          shm_atime  \fRTime of last \fIshmat\fP\^(\|).\fR
+time_t          shm_dtime  \fRTime of last \fIshmdt\fP\^(\|).\fR
+time_t          shm_ctime  \fRTime of last change by \fIshmctl\fP\^(\|).\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/shm.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR pid_t ,
+.BR size_t ,
+and
+.BR time_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void *shmat(int, const void *, int);
+int   shmctl(int, int, struct shmid_ds *);
+int   shmdt(const void *);
+int   shmget(key_t, size_t, int);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In addition, the
+.IR <sys/shm.h> 
+header shall include the
+.IR <sys/ipc.h> 
+header.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_ipc.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIshmat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmdt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmget\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_socket.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_socket.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1f0f18f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_socket.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,563 @@
+'\" et
+.TH sys_socket.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sys/socket.h
+\(em main sockets header
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <sys/socket.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR socklen_t
+type, which is an integer type of width of at least 32 bits;
+see APPLICATION USAGE.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/socket.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR sa_family_t
+unsigned integer type.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/socket.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR sockaddr
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sa_family_t  sa_family  \fRAddress family.\fR
+char         sa_data[]  \fRSocket address (variable-length data).\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR sockaddr
+structure is used to define a socket address which is used
+in the
+\fIbind\fR(),
+\fIconnect\fR(),
+\fIgetpeername\fR(),
+\fIgetsockname\fR(),
+\fIrecvfrom\fR(),
+and
+\fIsendto\fR()
+functions.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/socket.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR sockaddr_storage
+structure, which shall be:
+.IP " *" 4
+Large enough to accommodate all supported protocol-specific address
+structures
+.IP " *" 4
+Aligned at an appropriate boundary so that pointers to it can be cast
+as pointers to protocol-specific address structures and used to access
+the fields of those structures without alignment problems
+.P
+The
+.BR sockaddr_storage
+structure shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sa_family_t   ss_family
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+When a pointer to a
+.BR sockaddr_storage
+structure is cast as a pointer to a
+.BR sockaddr
+structure, the
+.IR ss_family
+field of the
+.BR sockaddr_storage
+structure shall map onto the
+.IR sa_family
+field of the
+.BR sockaddr
+structure. When a pointer to a
+.BR sockaddr_storage
+structure is cast as a pointer to a protocol-specific address structure,
+the
+.IR ss_family
+field shall map onto
+a field of that structure that is of type
+.BR sa_family_t
+and that identifies the protocol's address family.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/socket.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR msghdr
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void          *msg_name        \fROptional address.\fR
+socklen_t      msg_namelen     \fRSize of address.\fR
+struct iovec  *msg_iov         \fRScatter/gather array.\fR
+int            msg_iovlen      \fRMembers in \fImsg_iov\fR.\fR
+void          *msg_control     \fRAncillary data; see below.\fR
+socklen_t      msg_controllen  \fRAncillary data buffer \fIlen\fR.\fR
+int            msg_flags       \fRFlags on received message.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR msghdr
+structure is used to minimize the number of directly supplied
+parameters to the
+\fIrecvmsg\fR()
+and
+\fIsendmsg\fR()
+functions. This structure is used as a
+.IR value \(hy\c
+.IR result
+parameter in the
+\fIrecvmsg\fR()
+function and
+.IR value
+only for the
+\fIsendmsg\fR()
+function.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/socket.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR iovec
+structure as described in
+.IR <sys/uio.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/socket.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR cmsghdr
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+socklen_t  cmsg_len    \fRData byte count, including the \fBcmsghdr\fR.\fR
+int        cmsg_level  \fROriginating protocol.\fR
+int        cmsg_type   \fRProtocol-specific type.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR cmsghdr
+structure is used for storage of ancillary data object information.
+.P
+Ancillary data consists of a sequence of pairs, each consisting of a
+.BR cmsghdr
+structure followed by a data array. The data array contains the
+ancillary data message, and the
+.BR cmsghdr
+structure contains descriptive information that allows an application
+to correctly parse the data.
+.P
+The values for
+.IR cmsg_level
+shall be legal values for the
+.IR level
+argument to the
+\fIgetsockopt\fR()
+and
+\fIsetsockopt\fR()
+functions. The system documentation shall specify the
+.IR cmsg_type
+definitions for the supported protocols.
+.P
+Ancillary data is also possible at the socket level. The
+.IR <sys/socket.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant for use as the
+.IR cmsg_type
+value when
+.IR cmsg_level
+is SOL_SOCKET:
+.IP SCM_RIGHTS 14
+Indicates that the data array contains the access rights to be sent or
+received.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/socket.h> 
+header shall define the following macros to gain access to the data
+arrays in the ancillary data associated with a message header:
+.IP "CMSG_DATA(\fIcmsg\fP)" 6
+.br
+If the argument is a pointer to a
+.BR cmsghdr
+structure, this macro shall return an unsigned character pointer
+to the data array associated with the
+.BR cmsghdr
+structure.
+.IP "CMSG_NXTHDR(\fImhdr,cmsg\fP)" 6
+.br
+If the first argument is a pointer to a
+.BR msghdr
+structure and the second argument is a pointer to a
+.BR cmsghdr
+structure in the ancillary data pointed to by the
+.IR msg_control
+field of that
+.BR msghdr
+structure, this macro shall return a pointer to the next
+.BR cmsghdr
+structure, or a null pointer if this structure is the last
+.BR cmsghdr
+in the ancillary data.
+.IP "CMSG_FIRSTHDR(\fImhdr\fP)" 6
+.br
+If the argument is a pointer to a
+.BR msghdr
+structure, this macro shall return a pointer to the first
+.BR cmsghdr
+structure in the ancillary data associated with this
+.BR msghdr
+structure, or a null pointer if there is no ancillary data associated
+with the
+.BR msghdr
+structure.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/socket.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR linger
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int  l_onoff   \fRIndicates whether linger option is enabled.\fR
+int  l_linger  \fRLinger time, in seconds.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/socket.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants with distinct values:
+.IP SOCK_DGRAM 14
+Datagram socket.
+.IP SOCK_RAW 14
+Raw Protocol Interface.
+.IP SOCK_SEQPACKET 14
+Sequenced-packet socket.
+.IP SOCK_STREAM 14
+Byte-stream socket.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/socket.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant for use as the
+.IR level
+argument of
+\fIsetsockopt\fR()
+and
+\fIgetsockopt\fR().
+.IP SOL_SOCKET 14
+Options to be accessed at socket level, not protocol level.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/socket.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants with distinct values
+for use as the
+.IR option_name
+argument in
+\fIgetsockopt\fR()
+or
+\fIsetsockopt\fR()
+calls (see the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.10.16" ", " "Use of Options"):
+.IP SO_ACCEPTCONN 14
+Socket is accepting connections.
+.IP SO_BROADCAST 14
+Transmission of broadcast messages is supported.
+.IP SO_DEBUG 14
+Debugging information is being recorded.
+.IP SO_DONTROUTE 14
+Bypass normal routing.
+.IP SO_ERROR 14
+Socket error status.
+.IP SO_KEEPALIVE 14
+Connections are kept alive with periodic messages.
+.IP SO_LINGER 14
+Socket lingers on close.
+.IP SO_OOBINLINE 14
+Out-of-band data is transmitted in line.
+.IP SO_RCVBUF 14
+Receive buffer size.
+.IP SO_RCVLOWAT 14
+Receive ``low water mark''.
+.IP SO_RCVTIMEO 14
+Receive timeout.
+.IP SO_REUSEADDR 14
+Reuse of local addresses is supported.
+.IP SO_SNDBUF 14
+Send buffer size.
+.IP SO_SNDLOWAT 14
+Send ``low water mark''.
+.IP SO_SNDTIMEO 14
+Send timeout.
+.IP SO_TYPE 14
+Socket type.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/socket.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant for use as the maximum
+.IR backlog
+queue length which may be specified by the
+.IR backlog
+field of the
+\fIlisten\fR()
+function:
+.IP SOMAXCONN 14
+The maximum
+.IR backlog
+queue length.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/socket.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants with distinct values
+for use as the valid values for the
+.IR msg_flags
+field in the
+.BR msghdr
+structure, or the
+.IR flags
+parameter in
+\fIrecv\fR(),
+\fIrecvfrom\fR(),
+\fIrecvmsg\fR(),
+\fIsend\fR(),
+\fIsendmsg\fR(),
+or
+\fIsendto\fR()
+calls:
+.IP MSG_CTRUNC 14
+Control data truncated.
+.IP MSG_DONTROUTE 14
+Send without using routing tables.
+.IP MSG_EOR 14
+Terminates a record (if supported by the protocol).
+.IP MSG_OOB 14
+Out-of-band data.
+.IP MSG_NOSIGNAL 14
+No SIGPIPE generated when an attempt to send is made on a
+stream-oriented socket that is no longer connected.
+.IP MSG_PEEK 14
+Leave received data in queue.
+.IP MSG_TRUNC 14
+Normal data truncated.
+.IP MSG_WAITALL 14
+Attempt to fill the read buffer.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/socket.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants with distinct values:
+.IP AF_INET 14
+Internet domain sockets for use with IPv4 addresses.
+.IP AF_INET6 14
+Internet domain sockets for use with IPv6 addresses.
+.IP AF_UNIX 14
+UNIX domain sockets.
+.IP AF_UNSPEC 14
+Unspecified.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/socket.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants with distinct values:
+.IP SHUT_RD 14
+Disables further receive operations.
+.IP SHUT_RDWR 14
+Disables further send and receive operations.
+.IP SHUT_WR 14
+Disables further send operations.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/socket.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR size_t
+and
+.BR ssize_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int     accept(int, struct sockaddr *restrict, socklen_t *restrict);
+int     bind(int, const struct sockaddr *, socklen_t);
+int     connect(int, const struct sockaddr *, socklen_t);
+int     getpeername(int, struct sockaddr *restrict, socklen_t *restrict);
+int     getsockname(int, struct sockaddr *restrict, socklen_t *restrict);
+int     getsockopt(int, int, int, void *restrict, socklen_t *restrict);
+int     listen(int, int);
+ssize_t recv(int, void *, size_t, int);
+ssize_t recvfrom(int, void *restrict, size_t, int,
+        struct sockaddr *restrict, socklen_t *restrict);
+ssize_t recvmsg(int, struct msghdr *, int);
+ssize_t send(int, const void *, size_t, int);
+ssize_t sendmsg(int, const struct msghdr *, int);
+ssize_t sendto(int, const void *, size_t, int, const struct sockaddr *,
+        socklen_t);
+int     setsockopt(int, int, int, const void *, socklen_t);
+int     shutdown(int, int);
+int     sockatmark(int);
+int     socket(int, int, int);
+int     socketpair(int, int, int, int [2]);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Inclusion of
+.IR <sys/socket.h> 
+may also make visible all symbols from
+.IR <sys/uio.h> .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To forestall portability problems, it is recommended that applications
+not use values larger than 2\u\s-331\s+3\d \(mi1 for the
+.BR socklen_t
+type.
+.P
+The
+.BR sockaddr_storage
+structure solves the problem of declaring storage for automatic
+variables which is both large enough and aligned enough for storing the
+socket address data structure of any family. For example, code with a
+file descriptor and without the context of the address family can pass
+a pointer to a variable of this type, where a pointer to a socket
+address structure is expected in calls such as
+\fIgetpeername\fR(),
+and determine the address family by accessing the received content
+after the call.
+.P
+The example below illustrates a data structure which aligns on a 64-bit
+boundary. An implementation-defined field
+.IR _ss_align
+following
+.IR _ss_pad1
+is used to force a 64-bit alignment which covers proper alignment good
+enough for needs of at least
+.BR sockaddr_in6
+(IPv6) and
+.BR sockaddr_in
+(IPv4) address data structures. The size of padding field
+.IR _ss_pad1
+depends on the chosen alignment boundary. The size of padding field
+.IR _ss_pad2
+depends on the value of overall size chosen for the total size of the
+structure. This size and alignment are represented in the above example
+by implementation-defined (not required) constants _SS_MAXSIZE
+(chosen value 128) and _SS_ALIGNMENT (with chosen value 8). Constants
+_SS_PAD1SIZE (derived value 6) and _SS_PAD2SIZE (derived value 112) are
+also for illustration and not required. The implementation-defined
+definitions and structure field names above start with an
+<underscore>
+to denote implementation private name space. Portable code is not expected
+to access or reference those fields or constants.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+/*
+ *  Desired design of maximum size and alignment.
+ */
+#define _SS_MAXSIZE 128
+    /* Implementation-defined maximum size. */
+#define _SS_ALIGNSIZE (sizeof(int64_t))
+    /* Implementation-defined desired alignment. */
+.P
+/*
+ *  Definitions used for sockaddr_storage structure paddings design.
+ */
+#define _SS_PAD1SIZE (_SS_ALIGNSIZE \(mi sizeof(sa_family_t))
+#define _SS_PAD2SIZE (_SS_MAXSIZE \(mi (sizeof(sa_family_t)+ \e
+                      _SS_PAD1SIZE + _SS_ALIGNSIZE))
+struct sockaddr_storage {
+    sa_family_t  ss_family;  /* Address family. */
+/*
+ *  Following fields are implementation-defined.
+ */
+    char _ss_pad1[_SS_PAD1SIZE];
+        /* 6-byte pad; this is to make implementation-defined
+           pad up to alignment field that follows explicit in
+           the data structure. */
+    int64_t _ss_align;  /* Field to force desired structure
+                           storage alignment. */
+    char _ss_pad2[_SS_PAD2SIZE];
+        /* 112-byte pad to achieve desired size,
+           _SS_MAXSIZE value minus size of ss_family
+           __ss_pad1, __ss_align fields is 112. */
+};
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_uio.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIaccept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIbind\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIconnect\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpeername\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetsockname\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetsockopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlisten\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecvfrom\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecvmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsend\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsendmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsendto\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsockopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshutdown\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsockatmark\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocketpair\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_stat.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_stat.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d8cabe9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_stat.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,406 @@
+'\" et
+.TH sys_stat.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sys/stat.h
+\(em data returned by the stat(\|) function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <sys/stat.h> 
+header shall define the structure of the data returned by the
+\fIfstat\fR(),
+\fIlstat\fR(),
+and
+\fIstat\fR()
+functions.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/stat.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR stat
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+dev_t st_dev            \fRDevice ID of device containing file.\fR
+ino_t st_ino            \fRFile serial number.\fR
+mode_t st_mode          \fRMode of file (see below).\fR
+nlink_t st_nlink        \fRNumber of hard links to the file.\fR
+uid_t st_uid            \fRUser ID of file.\fR
+gid_t st_gid            \fRGroup ID of file.\fR
+dev_t st_rdev           \fRDevice ID (if file is character or block special).\fR
+off_t st_size           \fRFor regular files, the file size in bytes.\fR
+                        \fRFor symbolic links, the length in bytes of the\fR
+                        \fRpathname contained in the symbolic link.\fR
+                        \fRFor a shared memory object, the length in bytes.\fR
+                        \fRFor a typed memory object, the length in bytes.\fR
+                        \fRFor other file types, the use of this field is\fR
+                        \fRunspecified.\fR
+struct timespec st_atim \fRLast data access timestamp.\fR
+struct timespec st_mtim \fRLast data modification timestamp.\fR
+struct timespec st_ctim \fRLast file status change timestamp.\fR
+blksize_t st_blksize    \fRA file system-specific preferred I/O block size\fR
+                        \fRfor this object. In some file system types, this\fR
+                        \fRmay vary from file to file.\fR
+blkcnt_t st_blocks      \fRNumber of blocks allocated for this object.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR st_ino
+and
+.IR st_dev
+fields taken together uniquely identify the file within the system.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/stat.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR blkcnt_t ,
+.BR blksize_t ,
+.BR dev_t ,
+.BR ino_t ,
+.BR mode_t ,
+.BR nlink_t ,
+.BR uid_t ,
+.BR gid_t ,
+.BR off_t ,
+and
+.BR time_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/stat.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR timespec
+structure as described in
+.IR <time.h> .
+Times shall be given in seconds since the Epoch.
+.P
+Which structure members have meaningful values depends on the
+type of file. For further information, see the descriptions of
+\fIfstat\fR(),
+\fIlstat\fR(),
+and
+\fIstat\fR()
+in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+For compatibility with earlier versions of this standard, the
+.IR st_atime
+macro shall be defined with the value
+.IR st_atim.tv_sec .
+Similarly,
+.IR st_ctime
+and
+.IR st_mtime
+shall be defined as macros with the values
+.IR st_ctim.tv_sec
+and
+.IR st_mtim.tv_sec ,
+respectively.
+.br
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/stat.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for the
+file types encoded in type
+.BR mode_t .
+The values shall be suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives:
+.IP S_IFMT 12
+Type of file.
+.RS 12 
+.IP S_IFBLK 12
+Block special.
+.IP S_IFCHR 12
+Character special.
+.IP S_IFIFO 12
+FIFO special.
+.IP S_IFREG 12
+Regular.
+.IP S_IFDIR 12
+Directory.
+.IP S_IFLNK 12
+Symbolic link.
+.IP S_IFSOCK 12
+Socket.
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/stat.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for the file mode
+bits encoded in type
+.BR mode_t ,
+with the indicated numeric values. These macros shall expand to an
+expression which has a type that allows them to be used, either singly
+or OR'ed together, as the third argument to
+\fIopen\fR()
+without the need for a
+.BR mode_t
+cast. The values shall be suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives.
+.TS
+center box tab(@);
+cB | cB | cB
+l | n | l.
+Name@Numeric Value@Description
+_
+S_IRWXU@0700@Read, write, execute/search by owner.
+S_IRUSR@0400@Read permission, owner.
+S_IWUSR@0200@Write permission, owner.
+S_IXUSR@0100@Execute/search permission, owner.
+_
+S_IRWXG@070@Read, write, execute/search by group.
+S_IRGRP@040@Read permission, group.
+S_IWGRP@020@Write permission, group.
+S_IXGRP@010@Execute/search permission, group.
+_
+S_IRWXO@07@Read, write, execute/search by others.
+S_IROTH@04@Read permission, others.
+S_IWOTH@02@Write permission, others.
+S_IXOTH@01@Execute/search permission, others.
+_
+S_ISUID@04000@Set-user-ID on execution.
+S_ISGID@02000@Set-group-ID on execution.
+\*!S_ISVTX@01000@On directories, restricted deletion flag.\0\0\0\*?
+.TE
+.P
+The following macros shall be provided to test whether a file is of the
+specified type. The value
+.IR m
+supplied to the macros is the value of
+.IR st_mode
+from a
+.BR stat
+structure. The macro shall evaluate to a non-zero value if the test is
+true; 0 if the test is false.
+.IP "S_ISBLK(\fIm\fP)" 14
+Test for a block special file.
+.IP "S_ISCHR(\fIm\fP)" 14
+Test for a character special file.
+.IP "S_ISDIR(\fIm\fP)" 14
+Test for a directory.
+.IP "S_ISFIFO(\fIm\fP)" 14
+Test for a pipe or FIFO special file.
+.IP "S_ISREG(\fIm\fP)" 14
+Test for a regular file.
+.IP "S_ISLNK(\fIm\fP)" 14
+Test for a symbolic link.
+.IP "S_ISSOCK(\fIm\fP)" 14
+Test for a socket.
+.P
+The implementation may implement message queues, semaphores, or shared
+memory objects as distinct file types. The following macros shall be
+provided to test whether a file is of the specified type. The value of
+the
+.IR buf
+argument supplied to the macros is a pointer to a
+.BR stat
+structure. The macro shall evaluate to a non-zero value if the
+specified object is implemented as a distinct file type and the
+specified file type is contained in the
+.BR stat
+structure referenced by
+.IR buf .
+Otherwise, the macro shall evaluate to zero.
+.IP "S_TYPEISMQ(\fIbuf\fP)" 14
+Test for a message queue.
+.IP "S_TYPEISSEM(\fIbuf\fP)" 14
+Test for a semaphore.
+.IP "S_TYPEISSHM(\fIbuf\fP)" 14
+Test for a shared memory object.
+.P
+The implementation may implement typed memory objects as distinct
+file types, and the following macro shall test whether a file is of the
+specified type. The value of the
+.IR buf
+argument supplied to the macros is a pointer to a
+.BR stat
+structure. The macro shall evaluate to a non-zero value if the
+specified object is implemented as a distinct file type and the
+specified file type is contained in the
+.BR stat
+structure referenced by
+.IR buf .
+Otherwise, the macro shall evaluate to zero.
+.IP "S_TYPEISTMO(\fIbuf\fP)" 14
+Test macro for a typed memory object.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/stat.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants as distinct
+integer values outside of the range [0,999\|999\|999],
+for use with the
+\fIfutimens\fR()
+and
+\fIutimensat\fR()
+functions:
+UTIME_NOW
+UTIME_OMIT
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int    chmod(const char *, mode_t);
+int    fchmod(int, mode_t);
+int    fchmodat(int, const char *, mode_t, int);
+int    fstat(int, struct stat *);
+int    fstatat(int, const char *restrict, struct stat *restrict, int);
+int    futimens(int, const struct timespec [2]);
+int    lstat(const char *restrict, struct stat *restrict);
+int    mkdir(const char *, mode_t);
+int    mkdirat(int, const char *, mode_t);
+int    mkfifo(const char *, mode_t);
+int    mkfifoat(int, const char *, mode_t);
+int    mknod(const char *, mode_t, dev_t);
+int    mknodat(int, const char *, mode_t, dev_t);
+int    stat(const char *restrict, struct stat *restrict);
+mode_t umask(mode_t);
+int    utimensat(int, const char *, const struct timespec [2], int);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Use of the macros is recommended for determining the type of a file.
+.SH RATIONALE
+A conforming C-language application must include
+.IR <sys/stat.h> 
+for functions that have arguments or return values of type
+.BR mode_t ,
+so that symbolic values for that type can be used. An alternative
+would be to require that these constants are also defined by including
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The S_ISUID and S_ISGID
+bits may be cleared on any write, not just on
+\fIopen\fR(),
+as some historical implementations do.
+.P
+System calls that update the time entry fields in the
+.BR stat
+structure must be documented by the implementors. POSIX-conforming
+systems should not update the time entry fields for functions listed in
+the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 unless the standard requires that they do, except in the case
+of documented extensions to the standard.
+.P
+Upon assignment, file timestamps are immediately converted to the
+resolution of the file system by truncation (i.e., the recorded time
+can be older than the actual time). For example, if the file system
+resolution is 1 microsecond, then a conforming
+\fIstat\fR()
+must always return an
+.IR st_mtim.tv_nsec
+that is a multiple of 1000. Some older implementations returned
+higher-resolution timestamps while the
+.IR inode
+information was cached, and then spontaneously truncated the
+.IR tv_nsec
+fields when they were stored to and retrieved from disk, but this behavior
+does not conform.
+.P
+Note that
+.IR st_dev
+must be unique within a Local Area Network (LAN) in a ``system'' made
+up of multiple computers' file systems connected by a LAN.
+.P
+Networked implementations of a POSIX-conforming system must guarantee
+that all files visible within the file tree (including parts of the
+tree that may be remotely mounted from other machines on the network)
+on each individual processor are uniquely identified by the combination
+of the
+.IR st_ino
+and
+.IR st_dev
+fields.
+.P
+The unit for the
+.IR st_blocks
+member of the
+.BR stat
+structure is not defined within POSIX.1\(hy2008. In some implementations
+it is 512 bytes. It may differ on a file system basis. There is no
+correlation between values of the
+.IR st_blocks
+and
+.IR st_blksize ,
+and the
+.IR f_bsize
+(from
+.IR <sys/statvfs.h> )
+structure members.
+.P
+Traditionally, some implementations defined the multiplier for
+.IR st_blocks
+in
+.IR <sys/param.h> 
+as the symbol DEV_BSIZE.
+.P
+Some earlier versions of this standard did not specify values for the
+file mode bit macros. The expectation was that some implementors might
+choose to use a different encoding for these bits than the traditional
+one, and that new applications would use symbolic file modes instead of
+numeric. This version of the standard specifies the traditional encoding,
+in recognition that nearly 20 years after the first publication of this
+standard numeric file modes are still in widespread use by application
+developers, and that all conforming implementations still use the
+traditional encoding.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+No new S_IFMT symbolic names for the file type values of
+.BR mode_t
+will be defined by POSIX.1\(hy2008; if new file types are required, they will
+only be testable through
+.IR S_ISxx (\|)
+or
+.IR S_TYPEISxxx (\|)
+macros instead.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_statvfs.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfchmod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfstat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfstatat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfutimens\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImkdir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImkfifo\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImknod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIumask\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_statvfs.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_statvfs.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ca53935
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_statvfs.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+'\" et
+.TH sys_statvfs.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sys/statvfs.h
+\(em VFS File System information structure
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/statvfs.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <sys/statvfs.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR statvfs
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+unsigned long f_bsize    \fRFile system block size.\fR
+unsigned long f_frsize   \fRFundamental file system block size.\fR
+fsblkcnt_t    f_blocks   \fRTotal number of blocks on file system in units of \fIf_frsize.\fR
+fsblkcnt_t    f_bfree    \fRTotal number of free blocks.\fR
+fsblkcnt_t    f_bavail   \fRNumber of free blocks available to\fR
+                         \fRnon-privileged process.\fR
+fsfilcnt_t    f_files    \fRTotal number of file serial numbers.\fR
+fsfilcnt_t    f_ffree    \fRTotal number of free file serial numbers.\fR
+fsfilcnt_t    f_favail   \fRNumber of file serial numbers available to\fR
+                         \fRnon-privileged process.\fR
+unsigned long f_fsid     \fRFile system ID.\fR
+unsigned long f_flag     \fRBit mask of \fIf_flag\fR values.\fR
+unsigned long f_namemax  \fRMaximum filename length.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/statvfs.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR fsblkcnt_t
+and
+.BR fsfilcnt_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/statvfs.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for the
+.IR f_flag
+member:
+.IP ST_RDONLY 12
+Read-only file system.
+.IP ST_NOSUID 12
+Does not support the semantics of the ST_ISUID and ST_ISGID file mode
+bits.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int fstatvfs(int, struct statvfs *);
+int statvfs(const char *restrict, struct statvfs *restrict);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIfstatvfs\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_time.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_time.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..30d38ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_time.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+'\" et
+.TH sys_time.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sys/time.h
+\(em time types
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/time.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <sys/time.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR timeval
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+time_t         tv_sec      \fRSeconds.\fR
+suseconds_t    tv_usec     \fRMicroseconds.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/time.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR itimerval
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+struct timeval it_interval \fRTimer interval.\fR
+struct timeval it_value    \fRCurrent value.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/time.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR time_t
+and
+.BR suseconds_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/time.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR fd_set
+type as described in
+.IR <sys/select.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/time.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for the
+.IR which
+argument of
+\fIgetitimer\fR()
+and
+\fIsetitimer\fR():
+.IP ITIMER_REAL 14
+Decrements in real time.
+.IP ITIMER_VIRTUAL 14
+Decrements in process virtual time.
+.IP ITIMER_PROF 14
+Decrements both in process virtual time and when the system is running
+on behalf of the process.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/time.h> 
+header shall define the following as described in
+.IR <sys/select.h> :
+\fIFD_CLR\fR()
+\fIFD_ISSET\fR()
+\fIFD_SET\fR()
+\fIFD_ZERO\fR()
+FD_SETSIZE
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int   getitimer(int, struct itimerval *);
+int   gettimeofday(struct timeval *restrict, void *restrict);
+int   setitimer(int, const struct itimerval *restrict,
+          struct itimerval *restrict);
+int   select(int, fd_set *restrict, fd_set *restrict, fd_set *restrict,
+          struct timeval *restrict);
+int   utimes(const char *, const struct timeval [2]);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <sys/time.h> 
+header may make visible all symbols from the
+.IR <sys/select.h> 
+header.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_select.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIfutimens\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetitimer\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgettimeofday\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpselect\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_times.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_times.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..28367a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_times.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+'\" et
+.TH sys_times.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sys/times.h
+\(em file access and modification times structure
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/times.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <sys/times.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR tms
+structure, which is returned by
+\fItimes\fR()
+and shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+clock_t  tms_utime  \fRUser CPU time.\fR
+clock_t  tms_stime  \fRSystem CPU time.\fR
+clock_t  tms_cutime \fRUser CPU time of terminated child processes.\fR
+clock_t  tms_cstime \fRSystem CPU time of terminated child processes.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/times.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR clock_t
+type as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as a function and may also be defined
+as a macro. A function prototype shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+clock_t times(struct tms *);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fItimes\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_types.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_types.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1eb0d65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_types.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,241 @@
+'\" et
+.TH sys_types.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sys/types.h
+\(em data types
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/types.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <sys/types.h> 
+header shall define at least the following types:
+.IP "\fBblkcnt_t\fP" 16
+Used for file block counts.
+.IP "\fBblksize_t\fP" 16
+Used for block sizes.
+.IP "\fBclock_t\fP" 16
+Used for system times in clock ticks or CLOCKS_PER_SEC; see
+.IR <time.h> .
+.IP "\fBclockid_t\fP" 16
+Used for clock ID type in the clock and timer functions.
+.IP "\fBdev_t\fP" 16
+Used for device IDs.
+.IP "\fBfsblkcnt_t\fP" 16
+Used for file system block counts.
+.IP "\fBfsfilcnt_t\fP" 16
+Used for file system file counts.
+.IP "\fBgid_t\fP" 16
+Used for group IDs.
+.IP "\fBid_t\fP" 16
+Used as a general identifier; can be used to contain at least a
+.BR pid_t ,
+.BR uid_t ,
+or
+.BR gid_t .
+.IP "\fBino_t\fP" 16
+Used for file serial numbers.
+.IP "\fBkey_t\fP" 16
+Used for XSI interprocess communication.
+.IP "\fBmode_t\fP" 16
+Used for some file attributes.
+.IP "\fBnlink_t\fP" 16
+Used for link counts.
+.IP "\fBoff_t\fP" 16
+Used for file sizes.
+.IP "\fBpid_t\fP" 16
+Used for process IDs and process group IDs.
+.IP "\fBpthread_attr_t\fP" 16
+Used to identify a thread attribute object.
+.IP "\fBpthread_barrier_t\fP" 16
+Used to identify a barrier.
+.IP "\fBpthread_barrierattr_t\fP" 16
+Used to define a barrier attributes object.
+.IP "\fBpthread_cond_t\fP" 16
+Used for condition variables.
+.IP "\fBpthread_condattr_t\fP" 16
+Used to identify a condition attribute object.
+.IP "\fBpthread_key_t\fP" 16
+Used for thread-specific data keys.
+.IP "\fBpthread_mutex_t\fP" 16
+Used for mutexes.
+.IP "\fBpthread_mutexattr_t\fP" 16
+Used to identify a mutex attribute object.
+.IP "\fBpthread_once_t\fP" 16
+Used for dynamic package initialization.
+.IP "\fBpthread_rwlock_t\fP" 16
+Used for read-write locks.
+.IP "\fBpthread_rwlockattr_t\fP" 16
+Used for read-write lock attributes.
+.IP "\fBpthread_spinlock_t\fP" 16
+Used to identify a spin lock.
+.IP "\fBpthread_t\fP" 16
+Used to identify a thread.
+.IP "\fBsize_t\fP" 16
+Used for sizes of objects.
+.IP "\fBssize_t\fP" 16
+Used for a count of bytes or an error indication.
+.IP "\fBsuseconds_t\fP" 16
+Used for time in microseconds.
+.IP "\fBtime_t\fP" 16
+Used for time in seconds.
+.IP "\fBtimer_t\fP" 16
+Used for timer ID returned by
+\fItimer_create\fR().
+.IP "\fBtrace_attr_t\fP" 16
+Used to identify a trace stream attributes object
+.IP "\fBtrace_event_id_t\fP" 16
+Used to identify a trace event type.
+.IP "\fBtrace_event_set_t\fP" 16
+Used to identify a trace event type set.
+.IP "\fBtrace_id_t\fP" 16
+Used to identify a trace stream.
+.IP "\fBuid_t\fP" 16
+Used for user IDs.
+.P
+All of the types shall be defined as arithmetic types of an appropriate
+length, with the following exceptions:
+.P
+.nf
+.BR pthread_attr_t
+.BR pthread_barrier_t
+.BR pthread_barrierattr_t
+.BR pthread_cond_t
+.BR pthread_condattr_t
+.BR pthread_key_t
+.BR pthread_mutex_t
+.BR pthread_mutexattr_t
+.BR pthread_once_t
+.BR pthread_rwlock_t
+.BR pthread_rwlockattr_t
+.BR pthread_spinlock_t
+.BR pthread_t
+.BR trace_attr_t
+.BR trace_event_id_t
+.BR trace_event_set_t
+.BR trace_id_t
+.fi
+.P
+Additionally:
+.IP " *" 4
+.BR mode_t
+shall be an integer type.
+.IP " *" 4
+.BR dev_t
+shall be an integer type.
+.IP " *" 4
+.BR nlink_t ,
+.BR uid_t ,
+.BR gid_t ,
+and
+.BR id_t
+shall be integer types.
+.IP " *" 4
+.BR blkcnt_t
+and
+.BR off_t
+shall be signed integer types.
+.IP " *" 4
+.BR fsblkcnt_t ,
+.BR fsfilcnt_t ,
+and
+.BR ino_t
+shall be defined as unsigned integer types.
+.IP " *" 4
+.BR size_t
+shall be an unsigned integer type.
+.IP " *" 4
+.BR blksize_t ,
+.BR pid_t ,
+and
+.BR ssize_t
+shall be signed integer types.
+.IP " *" 4
+.BR clock_t
+shall be an integer or real-floating type.
+.BR time_t
+shall be an integer type.
+.P
+The type
+.BR ssize_t
+shall be capable of storing values at least in the range
+[\(mi1,\ {SSIZE_MAX}].
+.P
+The type
+.BR suseconds_t
+shall be a signed integer type capable of storing values at least in
+the range [\(mi1,\ 1\|000\|000].
+.P
+The implementation shall support one or more programming environments
+in which the widths of
+.BR blksize_t ,
+.BR pid_t ,
+.BR size_t ,
+.BR ssize_t ,
+and
+.BR suseconds_t
+are no greater than the width of type
+.BR long .
+The names of these programming environments can be obtained using the
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+function or the
+.IR getconf
+utility.
+.P
+There are no defined comparison or assignment operators for the
+following types:
+.P
+.nf
+.BR pthread_attr_t
+.BR pthread_barrier_t
+.BR pthread_barrierattr_t
+.BR pthread_cond_t
+.BR pthread_condattr_t
+.BR pthread_mutex_t
+.BR pthread_mutexattr_t
+.BR pthread_rwlock_t
+.BR pthread_rwlockattr_t
+.BR pthread_spinlock_t
+.BR trace_attr_t
+.fi
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIconfstr\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIgetconf\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_uio.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_uio.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d91d39f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_uio.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+'\" et
+.TH sys_uio.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sys/uio.h
+\(em definitions for vector I/O operations
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/uio.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <sys/uio.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR iovec
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void   *iov_base  \fRBase address of a memory region for input or output.\fR
+size_t  iov_len   \fRThe size of the memory pointed to by \fIiov_base.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/uio.h> 
+header uses the
+.BR iovec
+structure for scatter/gather I/O.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/uio.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR ssize_t
+and
+.BR size_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ssize_t readv(int, const struct iovec *, int);
+ssize_t writev(int, const struct iovec *, int);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The implementation can put a limit on the number of scatter/gather
+elements which can be processed in one call. The symbol
+{IOV_MAX}
+defined in
+.IR <limits.h> 
+should always be used to learn about the limits instead of assuming a
+fixed value.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Traditionally, the maximum number of scatter/gather elements the system
+can process in one call were described by the symbolic value
+{UIO_MAXIOV}.
+In IEEE\ Std\ 1003.1\(hy2001 this value is replaced by the constant
+{IOV_MAX}
+which can be found in
+.IR <limits.h> .
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<limits.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIreadv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwritev\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_un.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_un.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bb7bce6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_un.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+'\" et
+.TH sys_un.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sys/un.h
+\(em definitions for UNIX domain sockets
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/un.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <sys/un.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR sockaddr_un
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sa_family_t  sun_family  \fRAddress family.\fR
+char         sun_path[]  \fRSocket pathname.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR sockaddr_un
+structure is used to store addresses for UNIX domain sockets.
+Pointers to this type shall be cast by applications to
+.BR "struct sockaddr *"
+for use with socket functions.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/un.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR sa_family_t
+type as described in
+.IR <sys/socket.h> .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The size of
+.IR sun_path
+has intentionally been left undefined. This is because different
+implementations use different sizes. For example, 4.3 BSD uses a size of
+108, and 4.4 BSD uses a size of 104. Since most implementations
+originate from BSD versions, the size is typically in the range 92 to
+108.
+.P
+Applications should not assume a particular length for
+.IR sun_path
+or assume that it can hold
+{_POSIX_PATH_MAX}
+bytes (256).
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIbind\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocketpair\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_utsname.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_utsname.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dabaec3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_utsname.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+'\" et
+.TH sys_utsname.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sys/utsname.h
+\(em system name structure
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/utsname.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <sys/utsname.h> 
+header shall define the structure
+.BR utsname
+which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+char  sysname[]  \fRName of this implementation of the operating system.\fR
+char  nodename[] \fRName of this node within the communications\fR
+                 \fRnetwork to which this node is attached, if any.\fR
+char  release[]  \fRCurrent release level of this implementation.\fR
+char  version[]  \fRCurrent version level of this release.\fR
+char  machine[]  \fRName of the hardware type on which the system is running.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The character arrays are of unspecified size, but the data stored in
+them shall be terminated by a null byte.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as a function and may also be defined
+as a macro:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int uname(struct utsname *);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIuname\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_wait.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_wait.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cf88bc8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/sys_wait.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+'\" et
+.TH sys_wait.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sys/wait.h
+\(em declarations for waiting
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/wait.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <sys/wait.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use with
+\fIwaitpid\fR():
+.IP WCONTINUED 14
+Report status of continued child process.
+.IP WNOHANG 14
+Do not hang if no status is available; return immediately.
+.IP WUNTRACED 14
+Report status of stopped child process.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/wait.h> 
+header shall define the following macros for analysis of process status
+values:
+.IP WEXITSTATUS 14
+Return exit status.
+.IP WIFCONTINUED 14
+True if child has been continued.
+.IP WIFEXITED 14
+True if child exited normally.
+.IP WIFSIGNALED 14
+True if child exited due to uncaught signal.
+.IP WIFSTOPPED 14
+True if child is currently stopped.
+.IP WSTOPSIG 14
+Return signal number that caused process to stop.
+.IP WTERMSIG 14
+Return signal number that caused process to terminate.
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/wait.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants as possible values
+for the
+.IR options
+argument to
+\fIwaitid\fR():
+.IP WEXITED 14
+Wait for processes that have exited.
+.IP WNOWAIT 14
+Keep the process whose status is returned in
+.IR infop
+in a waitable state.
+.IP WSTOPPED 14
+Status is returned for any child that has stopped upon receipt of a
+signal.
+.P
+The
+WCONTINUED
+and WNOHANG constants, described above for
+\fIwaitpid\fR(),
+can also be used with
+\fIwaitid\fR().
+.P
+The type
+.BR idtype_t
+shall be defined as an enumeration type whose possible values shall
+include at least the following:
+P_ALL
+P_PGID
+P_PID
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/wait.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR id_t
+and
+.BR pid_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <sys/wait.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR siginfo_t
+type as described in
+.IR <signal.h> .
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <sys/wait.h> 
+header may also make visible
+all symbols from
+.IR <signal.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+pid_t  wait(int *);
+int    waitid(idtype_t, id_t, siginfo_t *, int);
+pid_t  waitpid(pid_t, int *, int);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwaitid\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/syslog.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/syslog.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8793f9d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/syslog.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+'\" et
+.TH syslog.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+syslog.h
+\(em definitions for system error logging
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <syslog.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <syslog.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants, zero or more
+of which may be OR'ed together to form the
+.IR logopt
+option of
+\fIopenlog\fR():
+.IP LOG_PID 14
+Log the process ID with each message.
+.IP LOG_CONS 14
+Log to the system console on error.
+.IP LOG_NDELAY 14
+Connect to syslog daemon immediately.
+.IP LOG_ODELAY 14
+Delay open until
+\fIsyslog\fR()
+is called.
+.IP LOG_NOWAIT 14
+Do not wait for child processes.
+.P
+The
+.IR <syslog.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use as the
+.IR facility
+argument to
+\fIopenlog\fR():
+.IP LOG_KERN 14
+Reserved for message generated by the system.
+.IP LOG_USER 14
+Message generated by a process.
+.IP LOG_MAIL 14
+Reserved for message generated by mail system.
+.IP LOG_NEWS 14
+Reserved for message generated by news system.
+.IP LOG_UUCP 14
+Reserved for message generated by UUCP system.
+.IP LOG_DAEMON 14
+Reserved for message generated by system daemon.
+.IP LOG_AUTH 14
+Reserved for message generated by authorization daemon.
+.IP LOG_CRON 14
+Reserved for message generated by clock daemon.
+.IP LOG_LPR 14
+Reserved for message generated by printer system.
+.IP LOG_LOCAL0 14
+Reserved for local use.
+.IP LOG_LOCAL1 14
+Reserved for local use.
+.IP LOG_LOCAL2 14
+Reserved for local use.
+.IP LOG_LOCAL3 14
+Reserved for local use.
+.IP LOG_LOCAL4 14
+Reserved for local use.
+.IP LOG_LOCAL5 14
+Reserved for local use.
+.IP LOG_LOCAL6 14
+Reserved for local use.
+.IP LOG_LOCAL7 14
+Reserved for local use.
+.P
+The
+.IR <syslog.h> 
+header shall define the following macros for constructing the
+.IR maskpri
+argument to
+\fIsetlogmask\fR().
+The following macros expand to an expression of type
+.BR int
+when the argument
+.IR pri
+is an expression of type
+.BR int :
+.IP "LOG_MASK(\fIpri\fR)" 14
+A mask for priority
+.IR pri .
+.P
+The
+.IR <syslog.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use as the
+.IR priority
+argument of
+\fIsyslog\fR():
+.IP LOG_EMERG 14
+A panic condition was reported to all processes.
+.IP LOG_ALERT 14
+A condition that should be corrected immediately.
+.IP LOG_CRIT 14
+A critical condition.
+.IP LOG_ERR 14
+An error message.
+.IP LOG_WARNING 14
+A warning message.
+.IP LOG_NOTICE 14
+A condition requiring special handling.
+.IP LOG_INFO 14
+A general information message.
+.IP LOG_DEBUG 14
+A message useful for debugging programs.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void  closelog(void);
+void  openlog(const char *, int, int);
+int   setlogmask(int);
+void  syslog(int, const char *, ...);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIcloselog\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/tar.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/tar.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..499fc05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/tar.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+'\" et
+.TH tar.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tar.h
+\(em extended tar definitions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <tar.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <tar.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants with the
+indicated values.
+.P
+General definitions:
+.TS
+center box tab(@);
+cB | cB | cB
+lw(15) | cf5w(15) | lw(40).
+Name@Value@Description
+_
+TMAGIC@"ustar"@ustar plus null byte.
+TMAGLEN@6@Length of the above.
+TVERSION@"00"@00 without a null byte.
+TVERSLEN@2@Length of the above.
+.TE
+.P
+.IR Typeflag
+field definitions:
+.TS
+center box tab(@);
+cB | cB | cB
+lw(15) | cf5w(15) | lw(40).
+Name@Value@Description
+_
+REGTYPE@'0'@Regular file.
+AREGTYPE@'\e0'@Regular file.
+LNKTYPE@'1'@Link.
+SYMTYPE@'2'@Symbolic link.
+CHRTYPE@'3'@Character special.
+BLKTYPE@'4'@Block special.
+DIRTYPE@'5'@Directory.
+FIFOTYPE@'6'@FIFO special.
+CONTTYPE@'7'@Reserved.
+.TE
+.P
+\fIMode\fP field bit definitions (octal):
+.TS
+center box tab(@);
+cB | cB | cB
+lw(15) | cw(15) | lw(40).
+Name@Value@Description
+_
+TSUID@04000@Set UID on execution.
+TSGID@02000@Set GID on execution.
+TSVTX@01000@\*!On directories, restricted deletion flag.\0\0\0\*?
+TUREAD@00400@Read by owner.
+TUWRITE@00200@Write by owner special.
+TUEXEC@00100@Execute/search by owner.
+TGREAD@00040@Read by group.
+TGWRITE@00020@Write by group.
+TGEXEC@00010@Execute/search by group.
+TOREAD@00004@Read by other.
+TOWRITE@00002@Write by other.
+TOEXEC@00001@Execute/search by other.
+.TE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIpax\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/termios.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/termios.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a76d631
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/termios.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,457 @@
+'\" et
+.TH termios.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+termios.h
+\(em define values for termios
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <termios.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <termios.h> 
+header shall contain the definitions used by the terminal I/O
+interfaces (see
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface"
+for the structures and names defined).
+.SS "The termios Structure"
+.P
+The
+.IR <termios.h> 
+header shall define the following data types through
+.BR typedef :
+.IP "\fBcc_t\fP" 12
+Used for terminal special characters.
+.IP "\fBspeed_t\fP" 12
+Used for terminal baud rates.
+.IP "\fBtcflag_t\fP" 12
+Used for terminal modes.
+.P
+The above types shall be all unsigned integer types.
+.P
+The implementation shall support one or more programming environments
+in which the widths of
+.BR cc_t ,
+.BR speed_t ,
+and
+.BR tcflag_t
+are no greater than the width of type
+.BR long .
+The names of these programming environments can be obtained using the
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+function or the
+.IR getconf
+utility.
+.P
+The
+.IR <termios.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR termios
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+tcflag_t  c_iflag     \fRInput modes.\fR
+tcflag_t  c_oflag     \fROutput modes.\fR
+tcflag_t  c_cflag     \fRControl modes.\fR
+tcflag_t  c_lflag     \fRLocal modes.\fR
+cc_t      c_cc[NCCS]  \fRControl characters.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <termios.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant:
+.IP NCCS 12
+Size of the array
+.IR c_cc
+for control characters.
+.P
+The
+.IR <termios.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use as
+subscripts for the array
+.IR c_cc :
+.TS
+box center tab(!);
+cb s | l
+cb cb | cb
+l | l | l.
+Subscript Usage
+Canonical Mode!Non-Canonical Mode!Description
+_
+VEOF!!EOF character.
+VEOL!!EOL character.
+VERASE!!ERASE character.
+VINTR!VINTR!INTR character.
+VKILL!!KILL character.
+\&!VMIN!MIN value.
+VQUIT!VQUIT!QUIT character.
+VSTART!VSTART!START character.
+VSTOP!VSTOP!STOP character.
+VSUSP!VSUSP!SUSP character.
+\&!VTIME!TIME value.
+.TE
+.P
+The subscript values shall be suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives and shall be distinct, except that the VMIN
+and VTIME subscripts may have the same values as the VEOF and
+VEOL subscripts, respectively.
+.SS "Input Modes"
+.P
+The
+.IR <termios.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use as flags
+in the
+.IR c_iflag
+field. The
+.IR c_iflag
+field describes the basic terminal input control.
+.IP BRKINT 12
+Signal interrupt on break.
+.IP ICRNL 12
+Map CR to NL on input.
+.IP IGNBRK 12
+Ignore break condition.
+.IP IGNCR 12
+Ignore CR.
+.IP IGNPAR 12
+Ignore characters with parity errors.
+.IP INLCR 12
+Map NL to CR on input.
+.IP INPCK 12
+Enable input parity check.
+.IP ISTRIP 12
+Strip character.
+.IP IXANY 12
+Enable any character to restart output.
+.IP IXOFF 12
+Enable start/stop input control.
+.IP IXON 12
+Enable start/stop output control.
+.IP PARMRK 12
+Mark parity errors.
+.SS "Output Modes"
+.P
+The
+.IR <termios.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use as flags
+in the
+.IR c_oflag
+field. The
+.IR c_oflag
+field specifies the system treatment of output.
+.IP OPOST 12
+Post-process output.
+.IP ONLCR 12
+Map NL to CR-NL on output.
+.IP OCRNL 12
+Map CR to NL on output.
+.IP ONOCR 12
+No CR output at column 0.
+.IP ONLRET 12
+NL performs CR function.
+.IP OFDEL 12
+Fill is DEL.
+.IP OFILL 12
+Use fill characters for delay.
+.IP NLDLY 12
+Select newline delays:
+.RS 12 
+.IP NL0 8
+Newline type 0.
+.IP NL1 8
+Newline type 1.
+.RE
+.IP CRDLY 12
+Select carriage-return delays:
+.RS 12 
+.IP CR0 8
+Carriage-return delay type 0.
+.IP CR1 8
+Carriage-return delay type 1.
+.IP CR2 8
+Carriage-return delay type 2.
+.IP CR3 8
+Carriage-return delay type 3.
+.RE
+.IP TABDLY 12
+Select horizontal-tab delays:
+.RS 12 
+.IP TAB0 8
+Horizontal-tab delay type 0.
+.IP TAB1 8
+Horizontal-tab delay type 1.
+.IP TAB2 8
+Horizontal-tab delay type 2.
+.IP TAB3 8
+Expand tabs to spaces.
+.RE
+.IP BSDLY 12
+Select backspace delays:
+.RS 12 
+.IP BS0 8
+Backspace-delay type 0.
+.IP BS1 8
+Backspace-delay type 1.
+.RE
+.IP VTDLY 12
+Select vertical-tab delays:
+.RS 12 
+.IP VT0 8
+Vertical-tab delay type 0.
+.IP VT1 8
+Vertical-tab delay type 1.
+.RE
+.IP FFDLY 12
+Select form-feed delays:
+.RS 12 
+.IP FF0 8
+Form-feed delay type 0.
+.IP FF1 8
+Form-feed delay type 1.
+.RE
+.SS "Baud Rate Selection"
+.P
+The
+.IR <termios.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use as values
+of objects of type
+.BR speed_t .
+.P
+The input and output baud rates are stored in the
+.BR termios
+structure. These are the valid values for objects of type
+.BR speed_t .
+Not all baud rates need be supported by the underlying hardware.
+.IP B0 12
+Hang up
+.IP B50 12
+50 baud
+.IP B75 12
+75 baud
+.IP B110 12
+110 baud
+.IP B134 12
+134.5 baud
+.IP B150 12
+150 baud
+.IP B200 12
+200 baud
+.IP B300 12
+300 baud
+.IP B600 12
+600 baud
+.IP B1200 12
+1\|200 baud
+.IP B1800 12
+1\|800 baud
+.IP B2400 12
+2\|400 baud
+.IP B4800 12
+4\|800 baud
+.IP B9600 12
+9\|600 baud
+.IP B19200 12
+19\|200 baud
+.IP B38400 12
+38\|400 baud
+.SS "Control Modes"
+.P
+The
+.IR <termios.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use as flags
+in the
+.IR c_cflag
+field. The
+.IR c_cflag
+field describes the hardware control of the terminal; not all values
+specified are required to be supported by the underlying hardware.
+.IP CSIZE 12
+Character size:
+.RS 12 
+.IP CS5 8
+5 bits
+.IP CS6 8
+6 bits
+.IP CS7 8
+7 bits
+.IP CS8 8
+8 bits
+.RE
+.IP CSTOPB 12
+Send two stop bits, else one.
+.IP CREAD 12
+Enable receiver.
+.IP PARENB 12
+Parity enable.
+.IP PARODD 12
+Odd parity, else even.
+.IP HUPCL 12
+Hang up on last close.
+.IP CLOCAL 12
+Ignore modem status lines.
+.P
+The implementation shall support the functionality associated with the
+symbols CS7, CS8, CSTOPB, PARODD, and PARENB.
+.SS "Local Modes"
+.P
+The
+.IR <termios.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use as flags
+in the
+.IR c_lflag
+field. The
+.IR c_lflag
+field of the argument structure is used to control various terminal
+functions.
+.IP ECHO 12
+Enable echo.
+.IP ECHOE 12
+Echo erase character as error-correcting backspace.
+.IP ECHOK 12
+Echo KILL.
+.IP ECHONL 12
+Echo NL.
+.IP ICANON 12
+Canonical input (erase and kill processing).
+.IP IEXTEN 12
+Enable extended input character processing.
+.IP ISIG 12
+Enable signals.
+.IP NOFLSH 12
+Disable flush after interrupt or quit.
+.IP TOSTOP 12
+Send SIGTTOU for background output.
+.SS "Attribute Selection"
+.P
+The
+.IR <termios.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use with
+\fItcsetattr\fR():
+.IP TCSANOW 12
+Change attributes immediately.
+.IP TCSADRAIN 12
+Change attributes when output has drained.
+.IP TCSAFLUSH 12
+Change attributes when output has drained; also flush pending input.
+.SS "Line Control"
+.P
+The
+.IR <termios.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use with
+\fItcflush\fR():
+.IP TCIFLUSH 12
+Flush pending input.
+.IP TCIOFLUSH 12
+Flush both pending input and untransmitted output.
+.IP TCOFLUSH 12
+Flush untransmitted output.
+.P
+The
+.IR <termios.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use with
+\fItcflow\fR():
+.IP TCIOFF 12
+Transmit a STOP character, intended to suspend input data.
+.IP TCION 12
+Transmit a START character, intended to restart input data.
+.IP TCOOFF 12
+Suspend output.
+.IP TCOON 12
+Restart output.
+.P
+The
+.IR <termios.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR pid_t
+type as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+speed_t cfgetispeed(const struct termios *);
+speed_t cfgetospeed(const struct termios *);
+int     cfsetispeed(struct termios *, speed_t);
+int     cfsetospeed(struct termios *, speed_t);
+int     tcdrain(int);
+int     tcflow(int, int);
+int     tcflush(int, int);
+int     tcgetattr(int, struct termios *);
+pid_t   tcgetsid(int);
+int     tcsendbreak(int, int);
+int     tcsetattr(int, int, const struct termios *);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The following names are reserved for XSI-conformant systems to use as
+an extension to the above; therefore strictly conforming applications
+shall not use them:
+.TS
+tab(@);
+le le le.
+CBAUD@EXTB@VDSUSP
+DEFECHO@FLUSHO@VLNEXT
+ECHOCTL@LOBLK@VREPRINT
+ECHOKE@PENDIN@VSTATUS
+ECHOPRT@SWTCH@VWERASE
+EXTA@VDISCARD
+.TE
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIcfgetispeed\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcfgetospeed\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcfsetispeed\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcfsetospeed\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIconfstr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItcdrain\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItcflow\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItcflush\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItcgetattr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItcgetsid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItcsendbreak\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItcsetattr\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+.IR "\fIgetconf\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/tgmath.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/tgmath.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8ebfa52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/tgmath.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,396 @@
+'\" et
+.TH tgmath.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tgmath.h
+\(em type-generic macros
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <tgmath.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+.IR <tgmath.h> 
+header shall include the headers
+.IR <math.h> 
+and
+.IR <complex.h> 
+and shall define several type-generic macros.
+.P
+Of the functions contained within the
+.IR <math.h> 
+and
+.IR <complex.h> 
+headers without an
+.IR f
+(\c
+.BR float )
+or
+.IR l
+(\c
+.BR "long double" )
+suffix, several have one or more parameters whose corresponding real
+type is
+.BR double .
+For each such function, except
+\fImodf\fR(),
+\fIj0\fR(),
+\fIj1\fR(),
+\fIjn\fR(),
+\fIy0\fR(),
+\fIy1\fR(),
+and
+\fIyn\fR(),
+there shall be a corresponding type-generic macro. The parameters
+whose corresponding real type is
+.BR double
+in the function synopsis are generic parameters. Use of the macro
+invokes a function whose corresponding real type and type domain are
+determined by the arguments for the generic parameters.
+.P
+Use of the macro invokes a function whose generic parameters have the
+corresponding real type determined as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+First, if any argument for generic parameters has type
+.BR "long double" ,
+the type determined is
+.BR "long double" .
+.IP " *" 4
+Otherwise, if any argument for generic parameters has type
+.BR double
+or is of integer type, the type determined is
+.BR double .
+.IP " *" 4
+Otherwise, the type determined is
+.BR float .
+.P
+For each unsuffixed function in the
+.IR <math.h> 
+header for which there is a function in the
+.IR <complex.h> 
+header with the same name except for a
+.IR c
+prefix, the corresponding type-generic macro (for both functions) has
+the same name as the function in the
+.IR <math.h> 
+header. The corresponding type-generic macro for
+\fIfabs\fR()
+and
+\fIcabs\fR()
+is
+\fIfabs\fR().
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB | cB
+l | l | l.
+<math.h> Function!<complex.h> Function!Type-Generic Macro
+_
+\fIacos\fR\^(\|)!\fIcacos\fR\^(\|)!\fIacos\fR\^(\|)
+\fIasin\fR\^(\|)!\fIcasin\fR\^(\|)!\fIasin\fR\^(\|)
+\fIatan\fR\^(\|)!\fIcatan\fR\^(\|)!\fIatan\fR\^(\|)
+\fIacosh\fR\^(\|)!\fIcacosh\fR\^(\|)!\fIacosh\fR\^(\|)
+\fIasinh\fR\^(\|)!\fIcasinh\fR\^(\|)!\fIasinh\fR\^(\|)
+\fIatanh\fR\^(\|)!\fIcatanh\fR\^(\|)!\fIatanh\fR\^(\|)
+\fIcos\fR\^(\|)!\fIccos\fR\^(\|)!\fIcos\fR\^(\|)
+\fIsin\fR\^(\|)!\fIcsin\fR\^(\|)!\fIsin\fR\^(\|)
+\fItan\fR\^(\|)!\fIctan\fR\^(\|)!\fItan\fR\^(\|)
+\fIcosh\fR\^(\|)!\fIccosh\fR\^(\|)!\fIcosh\fR\^(\|)
+\fIsinh\fR\^(\|)!\fIcsinh\fR\^(\|)!\fIsinh\fR\^(\|)
+\fItanh\fR\^(\|)!\fIctanh\fR\^(\|)!\fItanh\fR\^(\|)
+\fIexp\fR\^(\|)!\fIcexp\fR\^(\|)!\fIexp\fR\^(\|)
+\fIlog\fR\^(\|)!\fIclog\fR\^(\|)!\fIlog\fR\^(\|)
+\fIpow\fR\^(\|)!\fIcpow\fR\^(\|)!\fIpow\fR\^(\|)
+\fIsqrt\fR\^(\|)!\fIcsqrt\fR\^(\|)!\fIsqrt\fR\^(\|)
+\fIfabs\fR\^(\|)!\fIcabs\fR\^(\|)!\fIfabs\fR\^(\|)
+.TE
+.P
+If at least one argument for a generic parameter is complex, then use
+of the macro invokes a complex function; otherwise, use of the macro
+invokes a real function.
+.P
+For each unsuffixed function in the
+.IR <math.h> 
+header without a
+.IR c -prefixed
+counterpart in the
+.IR <complex.h> 
+header, except for
+\fImodf\fR(),
+\fIj0\fR(),
+\fIj1\fR(),
+\fIjn\fR(),
+\fIy0\fR(),
+\fIy1\fR(),
+and
+\fIyn\fR(),
+the corresponding type-generic macro has the same name as the function.
+These type-generic macros are:
+.sp
+.RS
+.TS
+tab(!);
+l l l l.
+T{
+.nf
+\fIatan2\fR()
+\fIcbrt\fR()
+\fIceil\fR()
+\fIcopysign\fR()
+\fIerf\fR()
+\fIerfc\fR()
+\fIexp2\fR()
+\fIexpm1\fR()
+\fIfdim\fR()
+\fIfloor\fR()
+T}!T{
+.nf
+\fIfma\fR()
+\fIfmax\fR()
+\fIfmin\fR()
+\fIfmod\fR()
+\fIfrexp\fR()
+\fIhypot\fR()
+\fIilogb\fR()
+\fIldexp\fR()
+\fIlgamma\fR()
+\fIllrint\fR()
+T}!T{
+.nf
+\fIllround\fR()
+\fIlog10\fR()
+\fIlog1p\fR()
+\fIlog2\fR()
+\fIlogb\fR()
+\fIlrint\fR()
+\fIlround\fR()
+\fInearbyint\fR()
+\fInextafter\fR()
+\fInexttoward\fR()
+T}!T{
+.nf
+\fIremainder\fR()
+\fIremquo\fR()
+\fIrint\fR()
+\fIround\fR()
+\fIscalbln\fR()
+\fIscalbn\fR()
+\fItgamma\fR()
+\fItrunc\fR()
+.fi
+T}
+.TE
+.RE
+.P
+If all arguments for generic parameters are real, then use of the macro
+invokes a real function; otherwise, use of the macro results in
+undefined behavior.
+.P
+For each unsuffixed function in the
+.IR <complex.h> 
+header that is not a
+.IR c -prefixed
+counterpart to a function in the
+.IR <math.h> 
+header, the corresponding type-generic macro has the same name as the
+function. These type-generic macros are:
+.sp
+.RS
+\fIcarg\fR()
+\fIcimag\fR()
+\fIconj\fR()
+\fIcproj\fR()
+\fIcreal\fR()
+.RE
+.P
+Use of the macro with any real or complex argument invokes a complex
+function.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+With the declarations:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <tgmath.h>
+int n;
+float f;
+double d;
+long double ld;
+float complex fc;
+double complex dc;
+long double complex ldc;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+functions invoked by use of type-generic macros are shown in the
+following table:
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB
+l | l.
+Macro!Use Invokes
+_
+\fIexp\fR(\fIn\fR)!\fIexp\fR(\fIn\fR), the function
+\fIacosh\fR(\fIf\fR)!\fIacoshf\fR(\fIf\fR)
+\fIsin\fR(\fId\fR)!\fIsin\fR(\fId\fR), the function
+\fIatan\fR(\fIld\fR)!\fIatanl\fR(\fIld\fR)
+\fIlog\fR(\fIfc\fR)!\fIclogf\fR(\fIfc\fR)
+\fIsqrt\fR(\fIdc\fR)!\fIcsqrt\fR(\fIdc\fR)
+\fIpow\fR(\fIldc,f\fR)!\fIcpowl\fR(\fIldc, f\fR)
+\fIremainder\fR(\fIn,n\fR)!\fIremainder\fR(\fIn, n\fR), the function
+\fInextafter\fR(\fId,f\fR)!\fInextafter\fR(\fId, f\fR), the function
+\fInexttoward\fR(\fIf,ld\fR)!\fInexttowardf\fR(\fIf, ld\fR)
+\fIcopysign\fR(\fIn,ld\fR)!\fIcopysignl\fR(\fIn, ld\fR)
+\fIceil\fR(\fIfc\fR)!Undefined behavior
+\fIrint\fR(\fIdc\fR)!Undefined behavior
+\fIfmax\fR(\fIldc,ld\fR)!Undefined behavior
+\fIcarg\fR(\fIn\fR)!\fIcarg\fR(\fIn\fR), the function
+\fIcproj\fR(\fIf\fR)!\fIcprojf\fR(\fIf\fR)
+\fIcreal\fR(\fId\fR)!\fIcreal\fR(\fId\fR), the function
+\fIcimag\fR(\fIld\fR)!\fIcimagl\fR(\fIld\fR)
+\fIcabs\fR(\fIfc\fR)!\fIcabsf\fR(\fIfc\fR)
+\fIcarg\fR(\fIdc\fR)!\fIcarg\fR(\fIdc\fR), the function
+\fIcproj\fR(\fIldc\fR)!\fIcprojl\fR(\fIldc\fR)
+.TE
+.SH RATIONALE
+Type-generic macros allow calling a function whose type is determined
+by the argument type, as is the case for C operators such as
+.BR '+' 
+and
+.BR '*' .
+For example, with a type-generic
+\fIcos\fR()
+macro, the expression
+.IR cos ((\c
+.BR float )\c
+.IR x )
+will have type
+.BR float .
+This feature enables writing more portably efficient code and
+alleviates need for awkward casting and suffixing in the process of
+porting or adjusting precision. Generic math functions are a widely
+appreciated feature of Fortran.
+.P
+The only arguments that affect the type resolution are the arguments
+corresponding to the parameters that have type
+.BR double
+in the synopsis. Hence the type of a type-generic call to
+\fInexttoward\fR(),
+whose second parameter is
+.BR "long double"
+in the synopsis, is determined solely by the type of the first
+argument.
+.P
+The term ``type-generic'' was chosen over the proposed alternatives of
+intrinsic and overloading. The term is more specific than intrinsic,
+which already is widely used with a more general meaning, and reflects
+a closer match to Fortran's generic functions than to C++ overloading.
+.P
+The macros are placed in their own header in order not to silently
+break old programs that include the
+.IR <math.h> 
+header; for example, with:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+printf ("%e", sin(x))
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+.IR modf (\c
+.BR double ,
+.BR "double *" )
+is excluded because no way was seen to make it safe without
+complicating the type resolution.
+.P
+The implementation might, as an extension, endow appropriate ones of
+the macros that POSIX.1\(hy2008 specifies only for real arguments with the
+ability to invoke the complex functions.
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not prescribe any particular implementation mechanism
+for generic macros. It could be implemented simply with built-in
+macros. The generic macro for
+\fIsqrt\fR(),
+for example, could be implemented with:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#undef sqrt
+#define sqrt(x) __BUILTIN_GENERIC_sqrt(x)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Generic macros are designed for a useful level of consistency with C++
+overloaded math functions.
+.P
+The great majority of existing C programs are expected to be unaffected
+when the
+.IR <tgmath.h> 
+header is included instead of the
+.IR <math.h> 
+or
+.IR <complex.h> 
+headers. Generic macros are similar to the ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1999 standard library masking
+macros, though the semantic types of return values differ.
+.P
+The ability to overload on integer as well as floating types would have
+been useful for some functions; for example,
+\fIcopysign\fR().
+Overloading with different numbers of arguments would have allowed
+reusing names; for example,
+\fIremainder\fR()
+for
+\fIremquo\fR().
+However, these facilities would have complicated the specification; and
+their natural consistent use, such as for a floating
+\fIabs\fR()
+or a two-argument
+\fIatan\fR(),
+would have introduced further inconsistencies with the ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1999 standard for
+insufficient benefit.
+.P
+The ISO\ C standard in no way limits the implementation's options for efficiency,
+including inlining library functions.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIcabs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfabs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImodf\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/time.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/time.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..81f63b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/time.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,331 @@
+'\" et
+.TH time.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+time.h
+\(em time types
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Some of the functionality described on this reference page extends the
+ISO\ C standard. Applications shall define the appropriate feature test macro
+(see the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment")
+to enable the visibility of these symbols in this header.
+.P
+The
+.IR <time.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR clock_t ,
+.BR size_t ,
+.BR time_t ,
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <time.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR clockid_t
+and
+.BR timer_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <time.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR locale_t
+type as described in
+.IR <locale.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <time.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR pid_t
+type as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The tag
+.BR sigevent
+shall be declared as naming an incomplete structure type, the contents
+of which are described in the
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header.
+.P
+The
+.IR <time.h> 
+header shall declare the
+.BR tm
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int    tm_sec   \fRSeconds [0,60].\fR
+int    tm_min   \fRMinutes [0,59].\fR
+int    tm_hour  \fRHour [0,23].\fR
+int    tm_mday  \fRDay of month [1,31].\fR
+int    tm_mon   \fRMonth of year [0,11].\fR
+int    tm_year  \fRYears since 1900.\fR
+int    tm_wday  \fRDay of week [0,6] (Sunday =0).\fR
+int    tm_yday  \fRDay of year [0,365].\fR
+int    tm_isdst \fRDaylight Savings flag.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The value of
+.IR tm_isdst
+shall be positive if Daylight Savings Time is in effect, 0 if Daylight
+Savings Time is not in effect, and negative if the information is not
+available.
+.P
+The
+.IR <time.h> 
+header shall declare the
+.BR timespec
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+time_t  tv_sec    \fRSeconds.\fR
+long    tv_nsec   \fRNanoseconds.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <time.h> 
+header shall also declare the
+.BR itimerspec
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+struct timespec  it_interval  \fRTimer period.\fR
+struct timespec  it_value     \fRTimer expiration.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <time.h> 
+header shall define the following macros:
+.IP NULL 14
+As described in
+.IR <stddef.h> .
+.IP CLOCKS_PER_SEC 14
+A number used to convert the value returned by the
+\fIclock\fR()
+function into seconds. The value shall be an expression with type
+.BR clock_t .
+The value of CLOCKS_PER_SEC shall be 1 million
+on XSI-conformant systems. However, it may be variable on other systems,
+and it should not be assumed that CLOCKS_PER_SEC is a compile-time
+constant.
+.P
+The
+.IR <time.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants. The values shall
+have a type that is assignment-compatible with
+.BR clockid_t .
+.IP CLOCK_MONOTONIC 14
+.br
+The identifier for the system-wide monotonic clock, which is defined as
+a clock measuring real time, whose value cannot be set via
+\fIclock_settime\fR()
+and which cannot have negative clock jumps. The maximum possible clock
+jump shall be implementation-defined.
+.IP CLOCK_PROCESS_CPUTIME_ID 14
+.br
+The identifier of the CPU-time clock associated with the process
+making a
+\fIclock\fR()
+or
+.IR timer* (\|)
+function call.
+.IP CLOCK_REALTIME 14
+The identifier of the system-wide clock measuring real time.
+.IP CLOCK_THREAD_CPUTIME_ID 14
+.br
+The identifier of the CPU-time clock associated with the thread making a
+\fIclock\fR()
+or
+.IR timer* (\|)
+function call.
+.P
+The
+.IR <time.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant:
+.IP TIMER_ABSTIME 14
+Flag indicating time is absolute. For functions taking timer objects,
+this refers to the clock associated with the timer.
+.P
+The
+.IR <time.h> 
+header shall provide a declaration or definition for
+.IR getdate_err .
+The
+.IR getdate_err
+symbol shall expand to an expression of type
+.BR int .
+It is unspecified whether
+.IR getdate_err
+is a macro or an identifier declared with external linkage, and whether or
+not it is a modifiable lvalue. If a macro definition is suppressed in
+order to access an actual object, or a program defines an identifier
+with the name
+.IR getdate_err ,
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+char      *asctime(const struct tm *);
+char      *asctime_r(const struct tm *restrict, char *restrict);
+clock_t    clock(void);
+int        clock_getcpuclockid(pid_t, clockid_t *);
+int        clock_getres(clockid_t, struct timespec *);
+int        clock_gettime(clockid_t, struct timespec *);
+int        clock_nanosleep(clockid_t, int, const struct timespec *,
+               struct timespec *);
+int        clock_settime(clockid_t, const struct timespec *);
+char      *ctime(const time_t *);
+char      *ctime_r(const time_t *, char *);
+double     difftime(time_t, time_t);
+struct tm *getdate(const char *);
+struct tm *gmtime(const time_t *);
+struct tm *gmtime_r(const time_t *restrict, struct tm *restrict);
+struct tm *localtime(const time_t *);
+struct tm *localtime_r(const time_t *restrict, struct tm *restrict);
+time_t     mktime(struct tm *);
+int        nanosleep(const struct timespec *, struct timespec *);
+size_t     strftime(char *restrict, size_t, const char *restrict,
+           const struct tm *restrict);
+size_t     strftime_l(char *restrict, size_t, const char *restrict,
+               const struct tm *restrict, locale_t);
+char      *strptime(const char *restrict, const char *restrict,
+               struct tm *restrict);
+time_t     time(time_t *);
+int        timer_create(clockid_t, struct sigevent *restrict,
+               timer_t *restrict);
+int        timer_delete(timer_t);
+int        timer_getoverrun(timer_t);
+int        timer_gettime(timer_t, struct itimerspec *);
+int        timer_settime(timer_t, int, const struct itimerspec *restrict,
+               struct itimerspec *restrict);
+void       tzset(void);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.br
+.P
+The
+.IR <time.h> 
+header shall declare the following as variables:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+extern int    daylight;
+extern long   timezone;
+extern char  *tzname[];
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <time.h> 
+header may make visible all symbols from the
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The range [0,60] for
+.IR tm_sec
+allows for the occasional leap second.
+.P
+.IR tm_year
+is a signed value; therefore, years before 1900 may be represented.
+.P
+To obtain the number of clock ticks per second returned by the
+\fItimes\fR()
+function, applications should call
+.IR sysconf (_SC_CLK_TCK).
+.SH RATIONALE
+The range [0,60] seconds allows for positive or negative leap seconds.
+The formal definition of UTC does not permit double leap seconds, so
+all mention of double leap seconds has been removed, and the range
+shortened from the former [0,61] seconds seen in earlier versions of
+this standard.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stddef.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+.ad l
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment",
+.IR "\fIasctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclock_getcpuclockid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclock_getres\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclock_nanosleep\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdifftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetdate\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgmtime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlocaltime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImktime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_receive\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_send\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fInanosleep\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_getcpuclockid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_timedlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_timedrdlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_timedwrlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_timedwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrptime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItimer_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItimer_delete\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItimer_getoverrun\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItzset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIutime\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/trace.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/trace.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4e0555f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/trace.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,236 @@
+'\" et
+.TH trace.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+trace.h
+\(em tracing
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <trace.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <trace.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR posix_trace_event_info
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+trace_event_id_t  posix_event_id
+pid_t             posix_pid
+void             *posix_prog_address
+pthread_t         posix_thread_id
+struct timespec   posix_timestamp
+int               posix_truncation_status
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <trace.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR posix_trace_status_info
+structure, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int     posix_stream_full_status
+int     posix_stream_overrun_status
+int     posix_stream_status
+int     posix_log_full_status
+int     posix_log_overrun_status
+int     posix_stream_flush_error
+int     posix_stream_flush_status
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <trace.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants:
+.P
+.nf
+POSIX_TRACE_ALL_EVENTS
+POSIX_TRACE_APPEND
+POSIX_TRACE_CLOSE_FOR_CHILD
+POSIX_TRACE_FILTER
+POSIX_TRACE_FLUSH
+POSIX_TRACE_FLUSH_START
+POSIX_TRACE_FLUSH_STOP
+POSIX_TRACE_FLUSHING
+POSIX_TRACE_FULL
+POSIX_TRACE_LOOP
+POSIX_TRACE_NO_OVERRUN
+POSIX_TRACE_NOT_FLUSHING
+POSIX_TRACE_NOT_FULL
+POSIX_TRACE_INHERITED
+POSIX_TRACE_NOT_TRUNCATED
+POSIX_TRACE_OVERFLOW
+POSIX_TRACE_OVERRUN
+POSIX_TRACE_RESUME
+POSIX_TRACE_RUNNING
+POSIX_TRACE_START
+POSIX_TRACE_STOP
+POSIX_TRACE_SUSPENDED
+POSIX_TRACE_SYSTEM_EVENTS
+POSIX_TRACE_TRUNCATED_READ
+POSIX_TRACE_TRUNCATED_RECORD
+POSIX_TRACE_UNNAMED_USER_EVENT
+POSIX_TRACE_UNTIL_FULL
+POSIX_TRACE_WOPID_EVENTS
+.fi
+.P
+The
+.IR <trace.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR size_t ,
+.BR trace_attr_t ,
+.BR trace_event_id_t ,
+.BR trace_event_set_t ,
+and
+.BR trace_id_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int  posix_trace_attr_destroy(trace_attr_t *);
+int  posix_trace_attr_getclockres(const trace_attr_t *,
+         struct timespec *);
+int  posix_trace_attr_getcreatetime(const trace_attr_t *,
+         struct timespec *);
+int  posix_trace_attr_getgenversion(const trace_attr_t *, char *);
+int  posix_trace_attr_getinherited(const trace_attr_t *restrict,
+         int *restrict);
+int  posix_trace_attr_getlogfullpolicy(const trace_attr_t *restrict,
+         int *restrict);
+int  posix_trace_attr_getlogsize(const trace_attr_t *restrict,
+         size_t *restrict);
+int  posix_trace_attr_getmaxdatasize(const trace_attr_t *restrict,
+         size_t *restrict);
+int  posix_trace_attr_getmaxsystemeventsize(const trace_attr_t *restrict,
+         size_t *restrict);
+int  posix_trace_attr_getmaxusereventsize(const trace_attr_t *restrict,
+         size_t, size_t *restrict);
+int  posix_trace_attr_getname(const trace_attr_t *, char *);
+int  posix_trace_attr_getstreamfullpolicy(const trace_attr_t *restrict,
+         int *restrict);
+int  posix_trace_attr_getstreamsize(const trace_attr_t *restrict,
+         size_t *restrict);
+int  posix_trace_attr_init(trace_attr_t *);
+int  posix_trace_attr_setinherited(trace_attr_t *, int);
+int  posix_trace_attr_setlogfullpolicy(trace_attr_t *, int);
+int  posix_trace_attr_setlogsize(trace_attr_t *, size_t);
+int  posix_trace_attr_setmaxdatasize(trace_attr_t *, size_t);
+int  posix_trace_attr_setname(trace_attr_t *, const char *);
+int  posix_trace_attr_setstreamfullpolicy(trace_attr_t *, int);
+int  posix_trace_attr_setstreamsize(trace_attr_t *, size_t);
+int  posix_trace_clear(trace_id_t);
+int  posix_trace_close(trace_id_t);
+int  posix_trace_create(pid_t, const trace_attr_t *restrict,
+         trace_id_t *restrict);
+int  posix_trace_create_withlog(pid_t, const trace_attr_t *restrict,
+         int, trace_id_t *restrict);
+void posix_trace_event(trace_event_id_t, const void *restrict, size_t);
+int  posix_trace_eventid_equal(trace_id_t, trace_event_id_t,
+         trace_event_id_t);
+int  posix_trace_eventid_get_name(trace_id_t, trace_event_id_t, char *);
+int  posix_trace_eventid_open(const char *restrict,
+         trace_event_id_t *restrict);
+int  posix_trace_eventset_add(trace_event_id_t, trace_event_set_t *);
+int  posix_trace_eventset_del(trace_event_id_t, trace_event_set_t *);
+int  posix_trace_eventset_empty(trace_event_set_t *);
+int  posix_trace_eventset_fill(trace_event_set_t *, int);
+int  posix_trace_eventset_ismember(trace_event_id_t,
+         const trace_event_set_t *restrict, int *restrict);
+int  posix_trace_eventtypelist_getnext_id(trace_id_t,
+         trace_event_id_t *restrict, int *restrict);
+int  posix_trace_eventtypelist_rewind(trace_id_t);
+int  posix_trace_flush(trace_id_t);
+int  posix_trace_get_attr(trace_id_t, trace_attr_t *);
+int  posix_trace_get_filter(trace_id_t, trace_event_set_t *);
+int  posix_trace_get_status(trace_id_t,
+         struct posix_trace_status_info *);
+int  posix_trace_getnext_event(trace_id_t,
+         struct posix_trace_event_info *restrict, void *restrict,
+         size_t, size_t *restrict, int *restrict);
+int  posix_trace_open(int, trace_id_t *);
+int  posix_trace_rewind(trace_id_t);
+int  posix_trace_set_filter(trace_id_t, const trace_event_set_t *, int);
+int  posix_trace_shutdown(trace_id_t);
+int  posix_trace_start(trace_id_t);
+int  posix_trace_stop(trace_id_t);
+int  posix_trace_timedgetnext_event(trace_id_t,
+         struct posix_trace_event_info *restrict, void *restrict,
+         size_t, size_t *restrict, int *restrict,
+         const struct timespec *restrict);
+int  posix_trace_trid_eventid_open(trace_id_t, const char *restrict,
+         trace_event_id_t *restrict);
+int  posix_trace_trygetnext_event(trace_id_t,
+         struct posix_trace_event_info *restrict, void *restrict, size_t,
+         size_t *restrict, int *restrict);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+.IR <trace.h> 
+header may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+.ad l
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.11" ", " "Tracing",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_attr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_attr_getclockres\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_attr_getinherited\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_attr_getlogsize\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_clear\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_close\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_event\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_eventid_equal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_eventset_add\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_eventtypelist_getnext_id\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_get_attr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_get_filter\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_getnext_event\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_start\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/ulimit.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/ulimit.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..284107b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/ulimit.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ulimit.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ulimit.h
+\(em ulimit commands
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ulimit.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <ulimit.h> 
+header shall define the symbolic constants used by the
+\fIulimit\fR()
+function.
+.P
+Symbolic constants:
+.IP UL_GETFSIZE 12
+Get maximum file size.
+.IP UL_SETFSIZE 12
+Set maximum file size.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as a function and may also be defined
+as a macro. A function prototype shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+long ulimit(int, ...);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+See
+\fIulimit\fR().
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIulimit\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/unistd.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/unistd.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a2a9b7c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/unistd.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,1621 @@
+'\" et
+.TH unistd.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+unistd.h
+\(em standard symbolic constants and types
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+header defines miscellaneous symbolic constants and types, and declares
+miscellaneous functions. The actual values of the constants are
+unspecified except as shown. The contents of this header are shown
+below.
+.SS "Version Test Macros"
+.P
+The
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants. The values shall
+be suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives.
+.IP _POSIX_VERSION 6
+.br
+Integer value indicating version of this standard (C-language
+binding) to which the implementation conforms. For implementations
+conforming to POSIX.1\(hy2008, the value shall be 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX2_VERSION 6
+.br
+Integer value indicating version of the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1 to which the implementation
+conforms. For implementations conforming to POSIX.1\(hy2008, the value shall
+be 200809L. For profile implementations that define _POSIX_SUBPROFILE
+(see
+.IR "Section 2.1.5.1" ", " "Subprofiling Considerations")
+in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+POSIX2_VERSION may be left undefined or be defined with the value \(mi1
+to indicate that the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1 is not supported. In this case, a call to
+.IR sysconf(_SC_2_VERSION)
+shall return either 200809L or \(mi1 indicating that the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1 is or is
+not, respectively, supported at runtime.
+.P
+The
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant only if
+the implementation supports the XSI option; see
+.IR "Section 2.1.4" ", " "XSI Conformance".
+If defined, its value shall be suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives.
+.IP _XOPEN_VERSION 6
+.br
+Integer value indicating version of the X/Open Portability Guide
+to which the implementation conforms. The value shall be 700.
+.SS "Constants for Options and Option Groups"
+.P
+The following symbolic constants, if defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+shall have a value of \(mi1, 0, or greater, unless otherwise specified
+below. For profile implementations that define _POSIX_SUBPROFILE (see
+.IR "Section 2.1.5.1" ", " "Subprofiling Considerations")
+in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+constants described below as always having a value greater than zero need
+not be defined and, if defined, may have a value of \(mi1, 0, or greater.
+The values shall be suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives.
+.P
+If a symbolic constant is not defined or is defined with the value
+\(mi1, the option is not supported for compilation. If it is defined
+with a value greater than zero, the option shall always be supported
+when the application is executed. If it is defined with the value zero,
+the option shall be supported for compilation and might or might not be
+supported at runtime. See
+.IR "Section 2.1.6" ", " "Options"
+for further information about the conformance requirements of these
+three categories of support.
+.IP _POSIX_ADVISORY_INFO 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Advisory Information option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_ASYNCHRONOUS_IO 6
+.br
+The implementation supports asynchronous input and output.
+This symbol shall always be set to the value 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_BARRIERS 6
+.br
+The implementation supports barriers.
+This symbol shall always be set to the value 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_CHOWN_RESTRICTED 6
+.br
+The use of
+\fIchown\fR()
+and
+\fIfchown\fR()
+is restricted to a process with appropriate privileges, and to changing
+the group ID of a file only to the effective group ID of the process or
+to one of its supplementary group IDs. This symbol shall be defined
+with a value other than \(mi1.
+.IP _POSIX_CLOCK_SELECTION 6
+.br
+The implementation supports clock selection.
+This symbol shall always be set to the value 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_CPUTIME 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Process CPU-Time Clocks option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_FSYNC 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the File Synchronization option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_IPV6 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the IPv6 option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_JOB_CONTROL 6
+.br
+The implementation supports job control. This symbol shall always be
+set to a value greater than zero.
+.IP _POSIX_MAPPED_FILES 6
+.br
+The implementation supports memory mapped Files.
+This symbol shall always be set to the value 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_MEMLOCK 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Process Memory Locking option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_MEMLOCK_RANGE 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Range Memory Locking option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_MEMORY_PROTECTION 6
+.br
+The implementation supports memory protection.
+This symbol shall always be set to the value 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_MESSAGE_PASSING 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Message Passing option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_MONOTONIC_CLOCK 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Monotonic Clock option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_NO_TRUNC 6
+.br
+Pathname components longer than
+{NAME_MAX}
+generate an error. This symbol shall be defined with a value
+other than \(mi1.
+.IP _POSIX_PRIORITIZED_IO 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Prioritized Input and Output option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_PRIORITY_SCHEDULING 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Process Scheduling option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_RAW_SOCKETS 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Raw Sockets option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_READER_WRITER_LOCKS 6
+.br
+The implementation supports read-write locks.
+This symbol shall always be set to the value 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_REALTIME_SIGNALS 6
+.br
+The implementation supports realtime signals.
+This symbol shall always be set to the value 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_REGEXP 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Regular Expression Handling option.
+This symbol shall always be set to a value greater than zero.
+.IP _POSIX_SAVED_IDS 6
+.br
+Each process has a saved set-user-ID and a saved set-group-ID.
+This symbol shall always be set to a value greater than zero.
+.IP _POSIX_SEMAPHORES 6
+.br
+The implementation supports semaphores.
+This symbol shall always be set to the value 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_SHARED_MEMORY_OBJECTS 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Shared Memory Objects option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_SHELL 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the POSIX shell. This symbol shall always
+be set to a value greater than zero.
+.IP _POSIX_SPAWN 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Spawn option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_SPIN_LOCKS 6
+.br
+The implementation supports spin locks.
+This symbol shall always be set to the value 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_SPORADIC_SERVER 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Process Sporadic Server option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_SYNCHRONIZED_IO 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Synchronized Input and Output option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_THREAD_ATTR_STACKADDR 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Thread Stack Address Attribute option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_THREAD_ATTR_STACKSIZE 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Thread Stack Size Attribute option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_THREAD_CPUTIME 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Thread CPU-Time Clocks option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_THREAD_PRIO_INHERIT 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Non-Robust Mutex Priority
+Inheritance option. If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_THREAD_PRIO_PROTECT 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Non-Robust Mutex Priority
+Protection option. If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_THREAD_PRIORITY_SCHEDULING 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Thread Execution Scheduling option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_THREAD_PROCESS_SHARED 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Thread Process-Shared Synchronization
+option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_THREAD_ROBUST_PRIO_INHERIT 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Robust Mutex Priority Inheritance
+option. If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_THREAD_ROBUST_PRIO_PROTECT 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Robust Mutex Priority Protection
+option. If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_THREAD_SAFE_FUNCTIONS 6
+.br
+The implementation supports thread-safe functions.
+This symbol shall always be set to the value 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_THREAD_SPORADIC_SERVER 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Thread Sporadic Server option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_THREADS 6
+.br
+The implementation supports threads.
+This symbol shall always be set to the value 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_TIMEOUTS 6
+.br
+The implementation supports timeouts.
+This symbol shall always be set to the value 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_TIMERS 6
+.br
+The implementation supports timers.
+This symbol shall always be set to the value 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_TRACE 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Trace option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_TRACE_EVENT_FILTER 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Trace Event Filter option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_TRACE_INHERIT 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Trace Inherit option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_TRACE_LOG 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Trace Log option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_TYPED_MEMORY_OBJECTS 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Typed Memory Objects option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX_V6_ILP32_OFF32 6
+.br
+The implementation provides a C-language compilation environment with
+32-bit
+.BR int ,
+.BR long ,
+.BR pointer ,
+and
+.BR off_t
+types.
+.IP _POSIX_V6_ILP32_OFFBIG 6
+.br
+The implementation provides a C-language compilation environment with
+32-bit
+.BR int ,
+.BR long ,
+and
+.BR pointer
+types and an
+.BR off_t
+type using at least 64 bits.
+.IP _POSIX_V6_LP64_OFF64 6
+.br
+The implementation provides a C-language compilation environment with
+32-bit
+.BR int
+and 64-bit
+.BR long ,
+.BR pointer ,
+and
+.BR off_t
+types.
+.IP _POSIX_V6_LPBIG_OFFBIG 6
+.br
+The implementation provides a C-language compilation environment with
+an
+.BR int
+type using at least 32 bits and
+.BR long ,
+.BR pointer ,
+and
+.BR off_t
+types using at least 64 bits.
+.IP _POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFF32 6
+.br
+The implementation provides a C-language compilation environment with
+32-bit
+.BR int ,
+.BR long ,
+.BR pointer ,
+and
+.BR off_t
+types.
+.IP _POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG 6
+.br
+The implementation provides a C-language compilation environment with
+32-bit
+.BR int ,
+.BR long ,
+and
+.BR pointer
+types and an
+.BR off_t
+type using at least 64 bits.
+.IP _POSIX_V7_LP64_OFF64 6
+.br
+The implementation provides a C-language compilation environment with
+32-bit
+.BR int
+and 64-bit
+.BR long ,
+.BR pointer ,
+and
+.BR off_t
+types.
+.IP _POSIX_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG 6
+.br
+The implementation provides a C-language compilation environment with
+an
+.BR int
+type using at least 32 bits and
+.BR long ,
+.BR pointer ,
+and
+.BR off_t
+types using at least 64 bits.
+.IP _POSIX2_C_BIND 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the C-Language Binding option. This
+symbol shall always have the value 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX2_C_DEV 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the C-Language Development Utilities option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX2_CHAR_TERM 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Terminal Characteristics option.
+The value of this symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or a value greater than zero.
+.IP _POSIX2_FORT_DEV 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the FORTRAN Development Utilities option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX2_FORT_RUN 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the FORTRAN Runtime Utilities option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX2_LOCALEDEF 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the creation of locales by the
+.IR localedef
+utility.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX2_PBS 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Batch Environment Services and
+Utilities option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX2_PBS_ACCOUNTING 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Batch Accounting option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX2_PBS_CHECKPOINT 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Batch Checkpoint/Restart option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX2_PBS_LOCATE 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Locate Batch Job Request option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX2_PBS_MESSAGE 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Batch Job Message Request option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX2_PBS_TRACK 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Track Batch Job Request option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX2_SW_DEV 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Software Development Utilities option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _POSIX2_UPE 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the User Portability Utilities option.
+If this symbol is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this
+symbol reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall either be \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.IP _XOPEN_CRYPT 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the X/Open Encryption Option Group.
+.IP _XOPEN_ENH_I18N 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Issue 4, Version 2 Enhanced
+Internationalization Option Group. This symbol shall always be set
+to a value other than \(mi1.
+.IP _XOPEN_REALTIME 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the X/Open Realtime Option Group.
+.IP _XOPEN_REALTIME_THREADS 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the X/Open Realtime Threads Option Group.
+.IP _XOPEN_SHM 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the Issue 4, Version 2 Shared Memory Option
+Group. This symbol shall always be set to a value other than \(mi1.
+.IP _XOPEN_STREAMS 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the XSI STREAMS Option Group.
+.IP _XOPEN_UNIX 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the XSI option.
+.IP _XOPEN_UUCP 6
+.br
+The implementation supports the UUCP Utilities option. If this symbol
+is defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+it shall be defined to be \(mi1, 0, or 200809L. The value of this symbol
+reported by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall be either \(mi1 or 200809L.
+.SS "Execution-Time Symbolic Constants"
+.P
+If any of the following symbolic constants are not defined in the
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+header, the value shall vary depending on the file to which it
+is applied. If defined, they shall have values suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives.
+.P
+If any of the following symbolic constants are defined to have value
+\(mi1 in the
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+header, the implementation shall not provide the option on any file; if
+any are defined to have a value other than \(mi1 in the
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+header, the implementation shall provide the option on all applicable
+files.
+.P
+All of the following values, whether defined as symbolic constants in
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+or not, may be queried with respect to a specific file using the
+\fIpathconf\fR()
+or
+\fIfpathconf\fR()
+functions:
+.IP _POSIX_ASYNC_IO 6
+.br
+Asynchronous input or output operations may be performed for the
+associated file.
+.IP _POSIX_PRIO_IO 6
+.br
+Prioritized input or output operations may be performed for the
+associated file.
+.IP _POSIX_SYNC_IO 6
+.br
+Synchronized input or output operations may be performed for the
+associated file.
+.P
+If the following symbolic constants are defined in the
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+header, they apply to files and all paths in all file systems on
+the implementation:
+.IP _POSIX_TIMESTAMP_RESOLUTION 6
+.br
+The resolution in nanoseconds for all file timestamps.
+.IP _POSIX2_SYMLINKS 6
+.br
+Symbolic links can be created.
+.SS "Constants for Functions"
+.P
+The
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+header shall define NULL as described in
+.IR <stddef.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use with the
+\fIaccess\fR()
+function. The values shall be suitable for use in
+.BR #if
+preprocessing directives.
+.IP F_OK 12
+Test for existence of file.
+.IP R_OK 12
+Test for read permission.
+.IP W_OK 12
+Test for write permission.
+.IP X_OK 12
+Test for execute (search) permission.
+.P
+The constants F_OK, R_OK, W_OK, and X_OK and the expressions
+\fIR_OK\fP|\fIW_OK\fP, \fIR_OK\fP|\fIX_OK\fP, and
+\fIR_OK\fP|\fIW_OK\fP|\fIX_OK\fP shall all have distinct values.
+.P
+The
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for the
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+function:
+.IP _CS_PATH 6
+.br
+This is the value for the
+.IR PATH
+environment variable that finds all standard utilities.
+.IP _CS_POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFF32_CFLAGS 6
+.br
+If \fIsysconf\fP(_SC_V7_ILP32_OFF32) returns \(mi1, the meaning of
+this value is unspecified. Otherwise, this value is the set of initial
+options to be given to the
+.IR c99
+utility to build an application using a programming model with 32-bit
+.BR int ,
+.BR long ,
+.BR pointer ,
+and
+.BR off_t
+types.
+.IP _CS_POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFF32_LDFLAGS 6
+.br
+If \fIsysconf\fP(_SC_V7_ILP32_OFF32) returns \(mi1, the meaning of
+this value is unspecified. Otherwise, this value is the set of final
+options to be given to the
+.IR c99
+utility to build an application using a programming model with 32-bit
+.BR int ,
+.BR long ,
+.BR pointer ,
+and
+.BR off_t
+types.
+.IP _CS_POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFF32_LIBS 6
+.br
+If \fIsysconf\fP(_SC_V7_ILP32_OFF32) returns \(mi1, the meaning of
+this value is unspecified. Otherwise, this value is the set of
+libraries to be given to the
+.IR c99
+utility to build an application using a programming model with 32-bit
+.BR int ,
+.BR long ,
+.BR pointer ,
+and
+.BR off_t
+types.
+.IP _CS_POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG_CFLAGS 6
+.br
+If \fIsysconf\fP(_SC_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG) returns \(mi1, the meaning of
+this value is unspecified. Otherwise, this value is the set of initial
+options to be given to the
+.IR c99
+utility to build an application using a programming model with 32-bit
+.BR int ,
+.BR long ,
+and
+.BR pointer
+types, and an
+.BR off_t
+type using at least 64 bits.
+.IP _CS_POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG_LDFLAGS 6
+.br
+If \fIsysconf\fP(_SC_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG) returns \(mi1, the meaning of
+this value is unspecified. Otherwise, this value is the set of final
+options to be given to the
+.IR c99
+utility to build an application using a programming model with 32-bit
+.BR int ,
+.BR long ,
+and
+.BR pointer
+types, and an
+.BR off_t
+type using at least 64 bits.
+.IP _CS_POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG_LIBS 6
+.br
+If \fIsysconf\fP(_SC_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG) returns \(mi1, the meaning of
+this value is unspecified. Otherwise, this value is the set of
+libraries to be given to the
+.IR c99
+utility to build an application using a programming model with 32-bit
+.BR int ,
+.BR long ,
+and
+.BR pointer
+types, and an
+.BR off_t
+type using at least 64 bits.
+.IP _CS_POSIX_V7_LP64_OFF64_CFLAGS 6
+.br
+If \fIsysconf\fP(_SC_V7_LP64_OFF64) returns \(mi1, the meaning of
+this value is unspecified. Otherwise, this value is the set of initial
+options to be given to the
+.IR c99
+utility to build an application using a programming model with 32-bit
+.BR int
+and 64-bit
+.BR long ,
+.BR pointer ,
+and
+.BR off_t
+types.
+.IP _CS_POSIX_V7_LP64_OFF64_LDFLAGS 6
+.br
+If \fIsysconf\fP(_SC_V7_LP64_OFF64) returns \(mi1, the meaning of
+this value is unspecified. Otherwise, this value is the set of final
+options to be given to the
+.IR c99
+utility to build an application using a programming model with 32-bit
+.BR int
+and 64-bit
+.BR long ,
+.BR pointer ,
+and
+.BR off_t
+types.
+.IP _CS_POSIX_V7_LP64_OFF64_LIBS 6
+.br
+If \fIsysconf\fP(_SC_V7_LP64_OFF64) returns \(mi1, the meaning of
+this value is unspecified. Otherwise, this value is the set of
+libraries to be given to the
+.IR c99
+utility to build an application using a programming model with 32-bit
+.BR int
+and 64-bit
+.BR long ,
+.BR pointer ,
+and
+.BR off_t
+types.
+.IP _CS_POSIX_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG_CFLAGS 6
+.br
+If \fIsysconf\fP(_SC_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG) returns \(mi1, the meaning of
+this value is unspecified. Otherwise, this value is the set of initial
+options to be given to the
+.IR c99
+utility to build an application using a programming model with an
+.BR int
+type using at least 32 bits and
+.BR long ,
+.BR pointer ,
+and
+.BR off_t
+types using at least 64 bits.
+.IP _CS_POSIX_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG_LDFLAGS 6
+.br
+If \fIsysconf\fP(_SC_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG) returns \(mi1, the meaning of
+this value is unspecified. Otherwise, this value is the set of final
+options to be given to the
+.IR c99
+utility to build an application using a programming model with an
+.BR int
+type using at least 32 bits and
+.BR long ,
+.BR pointer ,
+and
+.BR off_t
+types using at least 64 bits.
+.IP _CS_POSIX_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG_LIBS 6
+.br
+If \fIsysconf\fP(_SC_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG) returns \(mi1, the meaning of
+this value is unspecified. Otherwise, this value is the set of
+libraries to be given to the
+.IR c99
+utility to build an application using a programming model with an
+.BR int
+type using at least 32 bits and
+.BR long ,
+.BR pointer ,
+and
+.BR off_t
+types using at least 64 bits.
+.IP _CS_POSIX_V7_THREADS_CFLAGS 6
+.br
+If
+.IR sysconf (_SC_POSIX_THREADS)
+returns \(mi1, the meaning of this value is unspecified. Otherwise,
+this value is the set of initial options to be given to the
+.IR c99
+utility to build a multi-threaded application. These flags are in addition
+to those associated with any of the other _CS_POSIX_V7_*_CFLAGS values
+used to specify particular type size programing environments.
+.IP _CS_POSIX_V7_THREADS_LDFLAGS 6
+.br
+If
+.IR sysconf (_SC_POSIX_THREADS)
+returns \(mi1, the meaning of this value is unspecified. Otherwise,
+this value is the set of final options to be given to the
+.IR c99
+utility to build a multi-threaded application. These flags are in addition
+to those associated with any of the other _CS_POSIX_V7_*_LDFLAGS values
+used to specify particular type size programing environments.
+.IP _CS_POSIX_V7_WIDTH_RESTRICTED_ENVS 6
+.br
+This value is a
+<newline>-separated
+list of names of programming environments supported by the
+implementation in which the widths of the
+.BR blksize_t ,
+.BR cc_t ,
+.BR mode_t ,
+.BR nfds_t ,
+.BR pid_t ,
+.BR ptrdiff_t ,
+.BR size_t ,
+.BR speed_t ,
+.BR ssize_t ,
+.BR suseconds_t ,
+.BR tcflag_t ,
+.BR wchar_t ,
+and
+.BR wint_t
+types are no greater than the width of type
+.BR long .
+The format of each name shall be suitable for use with the
+.IR getconf
+.BR \(miv
+option.
+.IP _CS_V7_ENV 6
+.br
+This is the value that provides the environment variable information
+(other than that provided by _CS_PATH) that is required by the
+implementation to create a conforming environment, as described in the
+implementation's conformance documentation.
+.br
+.P
+The following symbolic constants are reserved for compatibility
+with Issue 6:
+.P
+.nf
+_CS_POSIX_V6_ILP32_OFF32_CFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_ILP32_OFF32_LDFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_ILP32_OFF32_LIBS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_ILP32_OFFBIG_CFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_ILP32_OFFBIG_LDFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_ILP32_OFFBIG_LIBS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_LP64_OFF64_CFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_LP64_OFF64_LDFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_LP64_OFF64_LIBS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_LPBIG_OFFBIG_CFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_LPBIG_OFFBIG_LDFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_LPBIG_OFFBIG_LIBS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_WIDTH_RESTRICTED_ENVS
+_CS_V6_ENV
+.fi
+.P
+The
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+header shall define SEEK_CUR, SEEK_END, and SEEK_SET as described in
+.IR <stdio.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants as possible
+values for the
+.IR function
+argument to the
+\fIlockf\fR()
+function:
+.IP F_LOCK 12
+Lock a section for exclusive use.
+.IP F_TEST 12
+Test section for locks by other processes.
+.IP F_TLOCK 12
+Test and lock a section for exclusive use.
+.IP F_ULOCK 12
+Unlock locked sections.
+.P
+The
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for
+\fIpathconf\fR():
+.P
+.nf
+_PC_2_SYMLINKS
+_PC_ALLOC_SIZE_MIN
+_PC_ASYNC_IO
+_PC_CHOWN_RESTRICTED
+_PC_FILESIZEBITS
+_PC_LINK_MAX
+_PC_MAX_CANON
+_PC_MAX_INPUT
+_PC_NAME_MAX
+_PC_NO_TRUNC
+_PC_PATH_MAX
+_PC_PIPE_BUF
+_PC_PRIO_IO
+_PC_REC_INCR_XFER_SIZE
+_PC_REC_MAX_XFER_SIZE
+_PC_REC_MIN_XFER_SIZE
+_PC_REC_XFER_ALIGN
+_PC_SYMLINK_MAX
+_PC_SYNC_IO
+_PC_TIMESTAMP_RESOLUTION
+_PC_VDISABLE
+.fi
+.P
+The
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for
+\fIsysconf\fR():
+.P
+.nf
+_SC_2_C_BIND
+_SC_2_C_DEV
+_SC_2_CHAR_TERM
+_SC_2_FORT_DEV
+_SC_2_FORT_RUN
+_SC_2_LOCALEDEF
+_SC_2_PBS
+_SC_2_PBS_ACCOUNTING
+_SC_2_PBS_CHECKPOINT
+_SC_2_PBS_LOCATE
+_SC_2_PBS_MESSAGE
+_SC_2_PBS_TRACK
+_SC_2_SW_DEV
+_SC_2_UPE
+_SC_2_VERSION
+_SC_ADVISORY_INFO
+_SC_AIO_LISTIO_MAX
+_SC_AIO_MAX
+_SC_AIO_PRIO_DELTA_MAX
+_SC_ARG_MAX
+_SC_ASYNCHRONOUS_IO
+_SC_ATEXIT_MAX
+_SC_BARRIERS
+_SC_BC_BASE_MAX
+_SC_BC_DIM_MAX
+_SC_BC_SCALE_MAX
+_SC_BC_STRING_MAX
+_SC_CHILD_MAX
+_SC_CLK_TCK
+_SC_CLOCK_SELECTION
+_SC_COLL_WEIGHTS_MAX
+_SC_CPUTIME
+_SC_DELAYTIMER_MAX
+_SC_EXPR_NEST_MAX
+_SC_FSYNC
+_SC_GETGR_R_SIZE_MAX
+_SC_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX
+_SC_HOST_NAME_MAX
+_SC_IOV_MAX
+_SC_IPV6
+_SC_JOB_CONTROL
+_SC_LINE_MAX
+_SC_LOGIN_NAME_MAX
+_SC_MAPPED_FILES
+_SC_MEMLOCK
+_SC_MEMLOCK_RANGE
+_SC_MEMORY_PROTECTION
+_SC_MESSAGE_PASSING
+_SC_MONOTONIC_CLOCK
+_SC_MQ_OPEN_MAX
+_SC_MQ_PRIO_MAX
+_SC_NGROUPS_MAX
+_SC_OPEN_MAX
+_SC_PAGE_SIZE
+_SC_PAGESIZE
+_SC_PRIORITIZED_IO
+_SC_PRIORITY_SCHEDULING
+_SC_RAW_SOCKETS
+_SC_RE_DUP_MAX
+_SC_READER_WRITER_LOCKS
+_SC_REALTIME_SIGNALS
+_SC_REGEXP
+_SC_RTSIG_MAX
+_SC_SAVED_IDS
+_SC_SEM_NSEMS_MAX
+_SC_SEM_VALUE_MAX
+_SC_SEMAPHORES
+_SC_SHARED_MEMORY_OBJECTS
+_SC_SHELL
+_SC_SIGQUEUE_MAX
+_SC_SPAWN
+_SC_SPIN_LOCKS
+_SC_SPORADIC_SERVER
+_SC_SS_REPL_MAX
+_SC_STREAM_MAX
+_SC_SYMLOOP_MAX
+_SC_SYNCHRONIZED_IO
+_SC_THREAD_ATTR_STACKADDR
+_SC_THREAD_ATTR_STACKSIZE
+_SC_THREAD_CPUTIME
+_SC_THREAD_DESTRUCTOR_ITERATIONS
+_SC_THREAD_KEYS_MAX
+_SC_THREAD_PRIO_INHERIT
+_SC_THREAD_PRIO_PROTECT
+_SC_THREAD_PRIORITY_SCHEDULING
+_SC_THREAD_PROCESS_SHARED
+_SC_THREAD_ROBUST_PRIO_INHERIT
+_SC_THREAD_ROBUST_PRIO_PROTECT
+_SC_THREAD_SAFE_FUNCTIONS
+_SC_THREAD_SPORADIC_SERVER
+_SC_THREAD_STACK_MIN
+_SC_THREAD_THREADS_MAX
+_SC_THREADS
+_SC_TIMEOUTS
+_SC_TIMER_MAX
+_SC_TIMERS
+_SC_TRACE
+_SC_TRACE_EVENT_FILTER
+_SC_TRACE_EVENT_NAME_MAX
+_SC_TRACE_INHERIT
+_SC_TRACE_LOG
+_SC_TRACE_NAME_MAX
+_SC_TRACE_SYS_MAX
+_SC_TRACE_USER_EVENT_MAX
+_SC_TTY_NAME_MAX
+_SC_TYPED_MEMORY_OBJECTS
+_SC_TZNAME_MAX
+_SC_V7_ILP32_OFF32
+_SC_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG
+_SC_V7_LP64_OFF64
+_SC_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG
+_SC_V6_ILP32_OFF32
+_SC_V6_ILP32_OFFBIG
+_SC_V6_LP64_OFF64
+_SC_V6_LPBIG_OFFBIG
+_SC_VERSION
+_SC_XOPEN_CRYPT
+_SC_XOPEN_ENH_I18N
+_SC_XOPEN_REALTIME
+_SC_XOPEN_REALTIME_THREADS
+_SC_XOPEN_SHM
+_SC_XOPEN_STREAMS
+_SC_XOPEN_UNIX
+_SC_XOPEN_UUCP
+_SC_XOPEN_VERSION
+.fi
+.P
+The two constants _SC_PAGESIZE and _SC_PAGE_SIZE may be defined to
+have the same value.
+.P
+The
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for file streams:
+.IP STDERR_FILENO 14
+File number of
+.IR stderr ;
+2.
+.IP STDIN_FILENO 14
+File number of
+.IR stdin ;
+0.
+.IP STDOUT_FILENO 14
+File number of
+.IR stdout ;
+1.
+.P
+The
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constant for terminal
+special character handling:
+.IP _POSIX_VDISABLE 14
+This symbol shall be defined to be the value of a character that shall
+disable terminal special character handling as described in
+.IR "Section 11.2.6" ", " "Special Control Characters".
+This symbol shall always be set to a value other than \(mi1.
+.SS "Type Definitions"
+.P
+The
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR size_t ,
+.BR ssize_t ,
+.BR uid_t ,
+.BR gid_t ,
+.BR off_t ,
+and
+.BR pid_t
+types as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR intptr_t
+type as described in
+.IR <inttypes.h> .
+.SS "Declarations"
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int          access(const char *, int);
+unsigned     alarm(unsigned);
+int          chdir(const char *);
+int          chown(const char *, uid_t, gid_t);
+int          close(int);
+size_t       confstr(int, char *, size_t);
+char        *crypt(const char *, const char *);
+int          dup(int);
+.br
+int          dup2(int, int);
+void         _exit(int);
+void         encrypt(char [64], int);
+int          execl(const char *, const char *, ...);
+int          execle(const char *, const char *, ...);
+int          execlp(const char *, const char *, ...);
+int          execv(const char *, char *const []);
+int          execve(const char *, char *const [], char *const []);
+int          execvp(const char *, char *const []);
+int          faccessat(int, const char *, int, int);
+int          fchdir(int);
+int          fchown(int, uid_t, gid_t);
+int          fchownat(int, const char *, uid_t, gid_t, int);
+int          fdatasync(int);
+int          fexecve(int, char *const [], char *const []);
+pid_t        fork(void);
+long         fpathconf(int, int);
+int          fsync(int);
+int          ftruncate(int, off_t);
+char        *getcwd(char *, size_t);
+gid_t        getegid(void);
+uid_t        geteuid(void);
+gid_t        getgid(void);
+int          getgroups(int, gid_t []);
+long         gethostid(void);
+int          gethostname(char *, size_t);
+char        *getlogin(void);
+int          getlogin_r(char *, size_t);
+int          getopt(int, char * const [], const char *);
+pid_t        getpgid(pid_t);
+pid_t        getpgrp(void);
+pid_t        getpid(void);
+pid_t        getppid(void);
+pid_t        getsid(pid_t);
+uid_t        getuid(void);
+int          isatty(int);
+int          lchown(const char *, uid_t, gid_t);
+int          link(const char *, const char *);
+int          linkat(int, const char *, int, const char *, int);
+int          lockf(int, int, off_t);
+off_t        lseek(int, off_t, int);
+int          nice(int);
+long         pathconf(const char *, int);
+int          pause(void);
+int          pipe(int [2]);
+ssize_t      pread(int, void *, size_t, off_t);
+ssize_t      pwrite(int, const void *, size_t, off_t);
+ssize_t      read(int, void *, size_t);
+ssize_t      readlink(const char *restrict, char *restrict, size_t);
+ssize_t      readlinkat(int, const char *restrict, char *restrict, size_t);
+int          rmdir(const char *);
+int          setegid(gid_t);
+int          seteuid(uid_t);
+int          setgid(gid_t);
+.br
+int          setpgid(pid_t, pid_t);
+pid_t        setpgrp(void);
+int          setregid(gid_t, gid_t);
+int          setreuid(uid_t, uid_t);
+pid_t        setsid(void);
+int          setuid(uid_t);
+unsigned     sleep(unsigned);
+void         swab(const void *restrict, void *restrict, ssize_t);
+int          symlink(const char *, const char *);
+int          symlinkat(const char *, int, const char *);
+void         sync(void);
+long         sysconf(int);
+pid_t        tcgetpgrp(int);
+int          tcsetpgrp(int, pid_t);
+int          truncate(const char *, off_t);
+char        *ttyname(int);
+int          ttyname_r(int, char *, size_t);
+int          unlink(const char *);
+int          unlinkat(int, const char *, int);
+ssize_t      write(int, const void *, size_t);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Implementations may also include the
+\fIpthread_atfork\fR()
+prototype as defined in
+.IR <pthread.h> .
+Implementations may also include the
+\fIctermid\fR()
+prototype as defined in
+.IR <stdio.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+header shall declare the following external variables:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+extern char  *optarg;
+extern int    opterr, optind, optopt;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 only describes the behavior of systems that claim conformance to
+it. However, application developers who want to write applications that
+adapt to other versions of this standard (or to systems that do not
+conform to any POSIX standard) may find it useful to code them so as to
+conditionally compile different code depending on the value of
+_POSIX_VERSION, for example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#if _POSIX_VERSION >= 200112L
+/* Use the newer function that copes with large files. */
+off_t pos=ftello(fp);
+#else
+/* Either this is an old version of POSIX, or _POSIX_VERSION is
+   not even defined, so use the traditional function. */
+long pos=ftell(fp);
+#endif
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Earlier versions of POSIX.1\(hy2008 and of the Single UNIX Specification
+can be identified by the following macros:
+.IP "POSIX.1\(hy1988 standard" 6
+.br
+_POSIX_VERSION\|=\^=\|198808L
+.IP "POSIX.1\(hy1990 standard" 6
+.br
+_POSIX_VERSION\|=\^=\|199009L
+.IP "ISO\ POSIX\(hy1:\|1996 standard" 6
+.br
+_POSIX_VERSION\|=\^=\|199506L
+.IP "Single UNIX Specification, Version 1" 6
+.br
+_XOPEN_UNIX and _XOPEN_VERSION\|=\^=\|4
+.IP "Single UNIX Specification, Version 2" 6
+.br
+_XOPEN_UNIX and _XOPEN_VERSION\|=\^=\|500
+.IP "ISO POSIX\(hy1:\|2001 and Single UNIX Specification, Version 3" 6
+.br
+_POSIX_VERSION\|=\^=\|200112L, plus (if the XSI option is supported)
+_XOPEN_UNIX and _XOPEN_VERSION\|=\^=\|600
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not make any attempt to define application binary
+interaction with the underlying operating system. However, application
+developers may find it useful to query _SC_VERSION at runtime via
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+to determine whether the current version of the operating system
+supports the necessary functionality as in the following program
+fragment:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+if (sysconf(_SC_VERSION) < 200809L) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "POSIX.1-2008 system required, terminating \en");
+    exit(1);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+New applications should not use _XOPEN_SHM or _XOPEN_ENH_I18N.
+.SH RATIONALE
+As POSIX.1\(hy2008 evolved, certain options became sufficiently standardized that
+it was concluded that simply requiring one of the option choices was
+simpler than retaining the option. However, for backwards-compatibility,
+the option flags (with required constant values) are retained.
+.SS "Version Test Macros"
+.P
+The standard developers considered altering the definition of
+_POSIX_VERSION and removing _SC_VERSION from the specification of
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+since the utility to an application was deemed by some to be minimal,
+and since the implementation of the functionality is potentially
+problematic. However, they recognized that support for existing
+application binaries is a concern to manufacturers, application
+developers, and the users of implementations conforming to POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+While the example using _SC_VERSION in the APPLICATION USAGE section
+does not provide the greatest degree of imaginable utility to the
+application developer or user, it is arguably better than a
+.BR core
+file or some other equally obscure result. (It is also possible for
+implementations to encode and recognize application binaries compiled
+in various POSIX.1-conforming environments, and modify the semantics of
+the underlying system to conform to the expectations of the
+application.) For the reasons outlined in the preceding paragraphs and
+in the APPLICATION USAGE section, the standard developers elected to
+retain the _POSIX_VERSION and _SC_VERSION functionality.
+.SS "Compile-Time Symbolic Constants for System-Wide Options"
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 includes support in certain areas for the newly adopted
+policy governing options and stubs.
+.P
+This policy provides flexibility for implementations in how they
+support options. It also specifies how conforming applications can
+adapt to different implementations that support different sets of
+options. It allows the following:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If an implementation has no interest in supporting an option, it does
+not have to provide anything associated with that option beyond the
+announcement that it does not support it.
+.IP " 2." 4
+An implementation can support a partial or incompatible version of an
+option (as a non-standard extension) as long as it does not claim to
+support the option.
+.IP " 3." 4
+An application can determine whether the option is supported. A
+strictly conforming application must check this announcement mechanism
+before first using anything associated with the option.
+.P
+There is an important implication of this policy. POSIX.1\(hy2008 cannot
+dictate the behavior of interfaces associated with an option when the
+implementation does not claim to support the option. In particular, it
+cannot require that a function associated with an unsupported option
+will fail if it does not perform as specified. However, this policy
+does not prevent a standard from requiring certain functions to always
+be present, but that they shall always fail on some implementations.
+The
+\fIsetpgid\fR()
+function in the POSIX.1\(hy1990 standard, for example, is considered appropriate.
+.P
+The POSIX standards include various options, and the C-language
+binding support for an option implies that the implementation must
+supply data types and function interfaces. An application must be able
+to discover whether the implementation supports each option.
+.P
+Any application must consider the following three cases for each
+option:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Option never supported.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+The implementation advertises at compile time that the option will
+never be supported. In this case, it is not necessary for the
+implementation to supply any of the data types or function interfaces
+that are provided only as part of the option. The implementation might
+provide data types and functions that are similar to those defined by
+POSIX.1\(hy2008, but there is no guarantee for any particular behavior.
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+Option always supported.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+The implementation advertises at compile time that the option will
+always be supported. In this case, all data types and function
+interfaces shall be available and shall operate as specified.
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+Option might or might not be supported.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+Some implementations might not provide a mechanism to specify support
+of options at compile time. In addition, the implementation might be
+unable or unwilling to specify support or non-support at compile time.
+In either case, any application that might use the option at runtime
+must be able to compile and execute. The implementation must provide,
+at compile time, all data types and function interfaces that are
+necessary to allow this. In this situation, there must be a mechanism
+that allows the application to query, at runtime, whether the option is
+supported. If the application attempts to use the option when it is not
+supported, the result is unspecified unless explicitly specified
+otherwise in POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.RE
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<inttypes.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<limits.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stddef.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<termios.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wctype.h>\fP"
+.P
+.ad l
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIaccess\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIalarm\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIchown\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIconfstr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcrypt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIctermid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fI_Exit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIencrypt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfchdir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfchown\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfdatasync\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfpathconf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfsync\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIftruncate\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetcwd\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetegid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgeteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetgroups\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgethostid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgethostname\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetlogin\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpgrp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetppid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetsid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisatty\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlchown\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlockf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlseek\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fInice\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpause\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpipe\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIreadlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrmdir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetegid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIseteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetpgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetpgrp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetregid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetreuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsleep\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIswab\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsymlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsync\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItcgetpgrp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItcsetpgrp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItruncate\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIttyname\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/utime.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/utime.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9474f4f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/utime.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+'\" et
+.TH utime.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+utime.h
+\(em access and modification times structure
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <utime.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <utime.h> 
+header shall declare the
+.BR utimbuf
+structure, which shall include the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+time_t    actime    \fRAccess time.\fR
+time_t    modtime   \fRModification time.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The times shall be measured in seconds since the Epoch.
+.P
+The
+.IR <utime.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR time_t
+type as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as a function and may also be defined
+as a macro. A function prototype shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int utime(const char *, const struct utimbuf *);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIutime\fR()
+function only allows setting file timestamps to the nearest second.
+Applications should use the
+\fIutimensat\fR()
+function instead. See
+.IR <sys/stat.h> .
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+.IR <utime.h> 
+header may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIfutimens\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIutime\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/utmpx.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/utmpx.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8b14cd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/utmpx.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+'\" et
+.TH utmpx.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+utmpx.h
+\(em user accounting database definitions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <utmpx.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <utmpx.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR utmpx
+structure that shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+char            ut_user[]  \fRUser login name.\fR
+char            ut_id[]    \fRUnspecified initialization process identifier.\fR
+char            ut_line[]  \fRDevice name.\fR
+pid_t           ut_pid     \fRProcess ID.\fR
+short           ut_type    \fRType of entry.\fR
+struct timeval  ut_tv      \fRTime entry was made.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <utmpx.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR pid_t
+type through
+.BR typedef ,
+as described in
+.IR <sys/types.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <utmpx.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR timeval
+structure as described in
+.IR <sys/time.h> .
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <utmpx.h> 
+header may also make visible all symbols from
+.IR <sys/time.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <utmpx.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants as possible values
+for the
+.IR ut_type
+member of the
+.BR utmpx
+structure:
+.IP EMPTY 14
+No valid user accounting information.
+.IP BOOT_TIME 14
+Identifies time of system boot.
+.IP OLD_TIME 14
+Identifies time when system clock changed.
+.IP NEW_TIME 14
+Identifies time after system clock changed.
+.IP USER_PROCESS 14
+Identifies a process.
+.IP INIT_PROCESS 14
+Identifies a process spawned by the init process.
+.IP LOGIN_PROCESS 14
+Identifies the session leader of a logged-in user.
+.IP DEAD_PROCESS 14
+Identifies a session leader who has exited.
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void          endutxent(void);
+struct utmpx *getutxent(void);
+struct utmpx *getutxid(const struct utmpx *);
+struct utmpx *getutxline(const struct utmpx *);
+struct utmpx *pututxline(const struct utmpx *);
+void          setutxent(void);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<sys_time.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIendutxent\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/wchar.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/wchar.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c202a3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/wchar.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,353 @@
+'\" et
+.TH wchar.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wchar.h
+\(em wide-character handling
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Some of the functionality described on this reference page extends the
+ISO\ C standard. Applications shall define the appropriate feature test macro
+(see the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment")
+to enable the visibility of these symbols in this header.
+.P
+The
+.IR <wchar.h> 
+header shall define the following types:
+.IP "\fBFILE\fP" 12
+As described in
+.IR <stdio.h> .
+.IP "\fBlocale_t\fP" 12
+As described in
+.IR <locale.h> .
+.IP "\fBmbstate_t\fP" 12
+An object type other than an array type that can hold the conversion
+state information necessary to convert between sequences of (possibly
+multi-byte) characters and wide characters.
+If a codeset is being used such that an
+.BR mbstate_t
+needs to preserve more than two levels of reserved state, the
+results are unspecified.
+.IP "\fBsize_t\fP" 12
+As described in
+.IR <stddef.h> .
+.IP "\fBva_list\fP" 12
+As described in
+.IR <stdarg.h> .
+.IP "\fBwchar_t\fP" 12
+As described in
+.IR <stddef.h> .
+.IP "\fBwctype_t\fP" 12
+A scalar type of a data object that can hold values which represent
+locale-specific character classification.
+.IP "\fBwint_t\fP" 12
+An integer type capable of storing any valid value of
+.BR wchar_t
+or WEOF.
+.P
+The tag
+.BR tm
+shall be declared as naming an incomplete structure type, the contents
+of which are described in the
+.IR <time.h> 
+header.
+.P
+The implementation shall support one or more programming environments
+in which the width of
+.BR wint_t
+is no greater than the width of type
+.BR long .
+The names of these programming environments can be obtained using the
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+function or the
+.IR getconf
+utility.
+.P
+The
+.IR <wchar.h> 
+header shall define the following macros:
+.IP WCHAR_MAX 12
+As described in
+.IR <stdint.h> .
+.IP WCHAR_MIN 12
+As described in
+.IR <stdint.h> .
+.IP WEOF 12
+Constant expression of type
+.BR wint_t
+that is returned by several WP functions to indicate end-of-file.
+.IP NULL 12
+As described in
+.IR <stddef.h> .
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <wchar.h> 
+header may make visible all symbols from the headers
+.IR <ctype.h> ,
+.IR <string.h> ,
+.IR <stdarg.h> ,
+.IR <stddef.h> ,
+.IR <stdio.h> ,
+.IR <stdlib.h> ,
+and
+.IR <time.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined
+as macros. Function prototypes shall be provided for use with ISO\ C standard
+compilers.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+wint_t        btowc(int);
+wint_t        fgetwc(FILE *);
+wchar_t      *fgetws(wchar_t *restrict, int, FILE *restrict);
+wint_t        fputwc(wchar_t, FILE *);
+int           fputws(const wchar_t *restrict, FILE *restrict);
+int           fwide(FILE *, int);
+int           fwprintf(FILE *restrict, const wchar_t *restrict, ...);
+int           fwscanf(FILE *restrict, const wchar_t *restrict, ...);
+wint_t        getwc(FILE *);
+wint_t        getwchar(void);
+int           iswalnum(wint_t);
+int           iswalpha(wint_t);
+int           iswcntrl(wint_t);
+int           iswctype(wint_t, wctype_t);
+int           iswdigit(wint_t);
+int           iswgraph(wint_t);
+int           iswlower(wint_t);
+int           iswprint(wint_t);
+int           iswpunct(wint_t);
+int           iswspace(wint_t);
+int           iswupper(wint_t);
+int           iswxdigit(wint_t);
+size_t        mbrlen(const char *restrict, size_t, mbstate_t *restrict);
+size_t        mbrtowc(wchar_t *restrict, const char *restrict, size_t,
+                  mbstate_t *restrict);
+int           mbsinit(const mbstate_t *);
+size_t        mbsnrtowcs(wchar_t *restrict, const char **restrict,
+                  size_t, size_t, mbstate_t *restrict);
+size_t        mbsrtowcs(wchar_t *restrict, const char **restrict, size_t,
+                  mbstate_t *restrict);
+FILE         *open_wmemstream(wchar_t **, size_t *);
+wint_t        putwc(wchar_t, FILE *);
+wint_t        putwchar(wchar_t);
+int           swprintf(wchar_t *restrict, size_t,
+                  const wchar_t *restrict, ...);
+int           swscanf(const wchar_t *restrict,
+                  const wchar_t *restrict, ...);
+wint_t        towlower(wint_t);
+wint_t        towupper(wint_t);
+wint_t        ungetwc(wint_t, FILE *);
+int           vfwprintf(FILE *restrict, const wchar_t *restrict, va_list);
+int           vfwscanf(FILE *restrict, const wchar_t *restrict, va_list);
+int           vswprintf(wchar_t *restrict, size_t,
+                  const wchar_t *restrict, va_list);
+int           vswscanf(const wchar_t *restrict, const wchar_t *restrict,
+                  va_list);
+int           vwprintf(const wchar_t *restrict, va_list);
+int           vwscanf(const wchar_t *restrict, va_list);
+wchar_t      *wcpcpy(wchar_t *restrict, const wchar_t *restrict);
+wchar_t      *wcpncpy(wchar_t *restrict, const wchar_t *restrict, size_t);
+size_t        wcrtomb(char *restrict, wchar_t, mbstate_t *restrict);
+int           wcscasecmp(const wchar_t *, const wchar_t *);
+int           wcscasecmp_l(const wchar_t *, const wchar_t *, locale_t);
+wchar_t      *wcscat(wchar_t *restrict, const wchar_t *restrict);
+wchar_t      *wcschr(const wchar_t *, wchar_t);
+int           wcscmp(const wchar_t *, const wchar_t *);
+int           wcscoll(const wchar_t *, const wchar_t *);
+int           wcscoll_l(const wchar_t *, const wchar_t *, locale_t);
+wchar_t      *wcscpy(wchar_t *restrict, const wchar_t *restrict);
+size_t        wcscspn(const wchar_t *, const wchar_t *);
+wchar_t      *wcsdup(const wchar_t *);
+size_t        wcsftime(wchar_t *restrict, size_t,
+                  const wchar_t *restrict, const struct tm *restrict);
+size_t        wcslen(const wchar_t *);
+int           wcsncasecmp(const wchar_t *, const wchar_t *, size_t);
+int           wcsncasecmp_l(const wchar_t *, const wchar_t *, size_t,
+                  locale_t);
+wchar_t      *wcsncat(wchar_t *restrict, const wchar_t *restrict, size_t);
+int           wcsncmp(const wchar_t *, const wchar_t *, size_t);
+wchar_t      *wcsncpy(wchar_t *restrict, const wchar_t *restrict, size_t);
+size_t        wcsnlen(const wchar_t *, size_t);
+size_t        wcsnrtombs(char *restrict, const wchar_t **restrict, size_t,
+                  size_t, mbstate_t *restrict);
+wchar_t      *wcspbrk(const wchar_t *, const wchar_t *);
+wchar_t      *wcsrchr(const wchar_t *, wchar_t);
+size_t        wcsrtombs(char *restrict, const wchar_t **restrict,
+                  size_t, mbstate_t *restrict);
+size_t        wcsspn(const wchar_t *, const wchar_t *);
+wchar_t      *wcsstr(const wchar_t *restrict, const wchar_t *restrict);
+double        wcstod(const wchar_t *restrict, wchar_t **restrict);
+float         wcstof(const wchar_t *restrict, wchar_t **restrict);
+wchar_t      *wcstok(wchar_t *restrict, const wchar_t *restrict,
+                  wchar_t **restrict);
+long          wcstol(const wchar_t *restrict, wchar_t **restrict, int);
+long double   wcstold(const wchar_t *restrict, wchar_t **restrict);
+long long     wcstoll(const wchar_t *restrict, wchar_t **restrict, int);
+unsigned long wcstoul(const wchar_t *restrict, wchar_t **restrict, int);
+unsigned long long
+              wcstoull(const wchar_t *restrict, wchar_t **restrict, int);
+int           wcswidth(const wchar_t *, size_t);
+size_t        wcsxfrm(wchar_t *restrict, const wchar_t *restrict, size_t);
+size_t        wcsxfrm_l(wchar_t *restrict, const wchar_t *restrict,
+                  size_t, locale_t);
+int           wctob(wint_t);
+wctype_t      wctype(const char *);
+int           wcwidth(wchar_t);
+wchar_t      *wmemchr(const wchar_t *, wchar_t, size_t);
+int           wmemcmp(const wchar_t *, const wchar_t *, size_t);
+wchar_t      *wmemcpy(wchar_t *restrict, const wchar_t *restrict, size_t);
+wchar_t      *wmemmove(wchar_t *, const wchar_t *, size_t);
+wchar_t      *wmemset(wchar_t *, wchar_t, size_t);
+int           wprintf(const wchar_t *restrict, ...);
+int           wscanf(const wchar_t *restrict, ...);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIiswblank\fR()
+function was a late addition to the ISO\ C standard and was introduced at the same
+time as the ISO\ C standard introduced
+.IR <wctype.h> ,
+which contains all of the
+.IR isw* (\|)
+functions. The Open Group Base Specifications had previously aligned
+with the MSE working draft and had introduced the rest of the
+.IR isw* (\|)
+functions into
+.IR <wchar.h> .
+For backwards-compatibility, the original set of
+.IR isw* (\|)
+functions, without
+\fIiswblank\fR(),
+are permitted (as part of the XSI option) in
+.IR <wchar.h> .
+For maximum portability, applications should include
+.IR <wctype.h> 
+in order to obtain declarations for the
+.IR isw* (\|)
+functions. This compatibility has been made obsolescent.
+.SH RATIONALE
+In the ISO\ C standard, the symbols referenced as XSI extensions are in
+.IR <wctype.h> .
+Their presence here is thus an extension.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<ctype.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdarg.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stddef.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdint.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wctype.h>\fP"
+.P
+.ad l
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment",
+.IR "\fIbtowc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIconfstr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfgetwc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfgetws\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfputwc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfputws\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfwide\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfwprintf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfwscanf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetwc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetwchar\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswcntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswctype\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswlower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswpunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbrlen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbrtowc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbsinit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbsrtowcs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen_memstream\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputwc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputwchar\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItowlower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItowupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIungetwc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIvfwprintf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIvfwscanf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcrtomb\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcscasecmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcscat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcschr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcscmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcscoll\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcscpy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcscspn\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcsdup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcsftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcslen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcsncat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcsncmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcsncpy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcspbrk\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcsrchr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcsrtombs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcsspn\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcsstr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcstod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcstok\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcstol\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcstoul\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcswidth\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcsxfrm\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwctob\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwctype\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcwidth\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwmemchr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwmemcmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwmemcpy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwmemmove\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwmemset\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIgetconf\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/wctype.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/wctype.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3d2e1c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/wctype.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,178 @@
+'\" et
+.TH wctype.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wctype.h
+\(em wide-character classification and mapping utilities
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wctype.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Some of the functionality described on this reference page extends the
+ISO\ C standard. Applications shall define the appropriate feature test macro
+(see the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment")
+to enable the visibility of these symbols in this header.
+.P
+The
+.IR <wctype.h> 
+header shall define the following types:
+.IP "\fBwint_t\fP" 12
+As described in
+.IR <wchar.h> .
+.IP "\fBwctrans_t\fP" 12
+A scalar type that can hold values which represent locale-specific
+character mappings.
+.IP "\fBwctype_t\fP" 12
+As described in
+.IR <wchar.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <wctype.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR locale_t
+type as described in
+.IR <locale.h> .
+.P
+The
+.IR <wctype.h> 
+header shall define the following macro:
+.IP WEOF 12
+As described in
+.IR <wchar.h> .
+.P
+For all functions described in this header that accept an argument of
+type
+.BR wint_t ,
+the value is representable as a
+.BR wchar_t
+or equals the value of WEOF. If this argument has any other value, the
+behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior of these functions shall be affected by the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category of the current locale.
+.P
+Inclusion of the
+.IR <wctype.h> 
+header may make visible all symbols from the headers
+.IR <ctype.h> ,
+.IR <stdarg.h> ,
+.IR <stddef.h> ,
+.IR <stdio.h> ,
+.IR <stdlib.h> ,
+.IR <string.h> ,
+.IR <time.h> ,
+and
+.IR <wchar.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided for use with ISO\ C standard
+compilers.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int       iswalnum(wint_t);
+int       iswalnum_l(wint_t, locale_t);
+int       iswalpha(wint_t);
+int       iswalpha_l(wint_t, locale_t);
+int       iswblank(wint_t);
+int       iswblank_l(wint_t, locale_t);
+int       iswcntrl(wint_t);
+int       iswcntrl_l(wint_t, locale_t);
+int       iswctype(wint_t, wctype_t);
+int       iswctype_l(wint_t, wctype_t, locale_t);
+int       iswdigit(wint_t);
+int       iswdigit_l(wint_t, locale_t);
+int       iswgraph(wint_t);
+int       iswgraph_l(wint_t, locale_t);
+int       iswlower(wint_t);
+int       iswlower_l(wint_t, locale_t);
+int       iswprint(wint_t);
+int       iswprint_l(wint_t, locale_t);
+int       iswpunct(wint_t);
+int       iswpunct_l(wint_t, locale_t);
+int       iswspace(wint_t);
+int       iswspace_l(wint_t, locale_t);
+int       iswupper(wint_t);
+int       iswupper_l(wint_t, locale_t);
+int       iswxdigit(wint_t);
+int       iswxdigit_l(wint_t, locale_t);
+wint_t    towctrans(wint_t, wctrans_t);
+wint_t    towctrans_l(wint_t, wctrans_t, locale_t);
+wint_t    towlower(wint_t);
+wint_t    towlower_l(wint_t, locale_t);
+wint_t    towupper(wint_t);
+wint_t    towupper_l(wint_t, locale_t);
+wctrans_t wctrans(const char *);
+wctrans_t wctrans_l(const char *, locale_t);
+wctype_t  wctype(const char *);
+wctype_t  wctype_l(const char *, locale_t);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<ctype.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdarg.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stddef.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "The Compilation Environment",
+.IR "\fIiswalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswblank\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswcntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswctype\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswlower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswpunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItowctrans\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItowlower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItowupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwctrans\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwctype\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/wordexp.h.0p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/wordexp.h.0p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c036cbd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man0p/wordexp.h.0p
@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+'\" et
+.TH wordexp.h "0P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wordexp.h
+\(em word-expansion types
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wordexp.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR <wordexp.h> 
+header shall define the structures and symbolic constants used by the
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+and
+\fIwordfree\fR()
+functions.
+.P
+The
+.IR <wordexp.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR wordexp_t
+structure type, which shall include at least the following members:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+size_t   we_wordc  \fRCount of words matched by \fIwords.\fR
+char   **we_wordv  \fRPointer to list of expanded words.\fR
+size_t   we_offs   \fRSlots to reserve at the beginning of \fIwe_wordv.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR <wordexp.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants for use as flags
+for the
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+function:
+.IP WRDE_APPEND 14
+Append words to those previously generated.
+.IP WRDE_DOOFFS 14
+Number of null pointers to prepend to
+.IR we_wordv .
+.IP WRDE_NOCMD 14
+Fail if command substitution is requested.
+.IP WRDE_REUSE 14
+The
+.IR pwordexp
+argument was passed to a previous successful call to
+\fIwordexp\fR(),
+and has not been passed to
+\fIwordfree\fR().
+The result is the same as if the application had called
+\fIwordfree\fR()
+and then called
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+without WRDE_REUSE.
+.IP WRDE_SHOWERR 14
+Do not redirect
+.IR stderr
+to
+.BR /dev/null .
+.IP WRDE_UNDEF 14
+Report error on an attempt to expand an undefined shell variable.
+.P
+The
+.IR <wordexp.h> 
+header shall define the following symbolic constants as error
+return values:
+.IP WRDE_BADCHAR 14
+One of the unquoted characters\(em\c
+<newline>,
+.BR '|' ,
+.BR '&' ,
+.BR ';' ,
+.BR '<' ,
+.BR '>' ,
+.BR '(' ,
+.BR ')' ,
+.BR '{' ,
+.BR '}' \(em\c
+appears in
+.IR words
+in an inappropriate context.
+.IP WRDE_BADVAL 14
+Reference to undefined shell variable when WRDE_UNDEF is set in
+.IR flags .
+.IP WRDE_CMDSUB 14
+Command substitution requested when WRDE_NOCMD was set in
+.IR flags .
+.IP WRDE_NOSPACE 14
+Attempt to allocate memory failed.
+.IP WRDE_SYNTAX 14
+Shell syntax error, such as unbalanced parentheses or unterminated string.
+.P
+The
+.IR <wordexp.h> 
+header shall define the
+.BR size_t
+type as described in
+.IR <stddef.h> .
+.P
+The following shall be declared as functions and may also be defined as
+macros. Function prototypes shall be provided.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int  wordexp(const char *restrict, wordexp_t *restrict, int);
+void wordfree(wordexp_t *);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fB<stddef.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.6" ", " "Word Expansions"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/admin.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/admin.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..485769e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/admin.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,510 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ADMIN "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+admin
+\(em create and administer SCCS files (\fBDEVELOPMENT\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+admin \(mii\fB[\fIname\fB] [\fR\(min\fB] [\fR\(mia \fIlogin\fB] [\fR\(mid \fIflag\fB] [\fR\(mie \fIlogin\fB] [\fR\(mif \fIflag\fB]
+    [\fR\(mim \fImrlist\fB] [\fR\(mir \fIrel\fB] [\fR\(mit\fB[\fIname\fB] [\fR\(miy\fB[\fIcomment\fB]] \fInewfile\fR
+.P
+admin \(min\fB [\fR\(mia \fIlogin\fB] [\fR\(mid \fIflag\fB] [\fR\(mie \fIlogin\fB] [\fR\(mif \fIflag\fB] [\fR\(mim \fImrlist\fB]
+    [\fR\(mit\fB[\fIname\fB]] [\fR\(miy\fB[\fIcomment\fB]] \fInewfile\fR...
+.P
+admin \fB[\fR\(mia \fIlogin\fB] [\fR\(mid \fIflag\fB] [\fR\(mim \fImrlist\fB] [\fR\(mir \fIrel\fB] [\fR\(mit\fB[\fIname\fB]]\fR \fIfile\fR...
+.P
+admin \(mih \fIfile\fR...
+.P
+admin \(miz \fIfile\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR admin
+utility shall create new SCCS files or change parameters of existing
+ones. If a named file does not exist, it shall be created, and its
+parameters shall be initialized according to the specified options.
+Parameters not initialized by an option shall be assigned a default
+value. If a named file does exist, parameters corresponding to
+specified options shall be changed, and other parameters shall be left
+as is.
+.P
+All SCCS filenames supplied by the application shall be of the form
+s.\fIfilename\fP. New SCCS files shall be given read-only permission
+mode. Write permission in the parent directory is required to create a
+file. All writing done by
+.IR admin
+shall be to a temporary
+.IR x-file ,
+named x.\fIfilename\fP (see
+.IR "\fIget\fR\^")
+created with read-only mode if
+.IR admin
+is creating a new SCCS file, or created with the same mode as that of
+the SCCS file if the file already exists. After successful execution of
+.IR admin ,
+the SCCS file shall be removed (if it exists), and the
+.IR x-file
+shall be renamed with the name of the SCCS file. This ensures that
+changes are made to the SCCS file only if no errors occur.
+.P
+The
+.IR admin
+utility shall also use a transient lock file (named z.\fIfilename\fP),
+which is used to prevent simultaneous updates to the SCCS file; see
+.IR "\fIget\fR\^".
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR admin
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except that the
+.BR \(mii ,
+.BR \(mit ,
+and
+.BR \(miy
+options have optional option-arguments. These optional option-arguments
+shall not be presented as separate arguments. The following options are
+supported:
+.IP "\fB\(min\fP" 10
+Create a new SCCS file. When
+.BR \(min
+is used without
+.BR \(mii ,
+the SCCS file shall be created with control information but without any
+file data.
+.IP "\fB\(mii[\fIname\fB]\fR" 10
+Specify the
+.IR name
+of a file from which the text for a new SCCS file shall be taken. The
+text constitutes the first delta of the file (see the
+.BR \(mir
+option for the delta numbering scheme). If the
+.BR \(mii
+option is used, but the
+.IR name
+option-argument is omitted, the text shall be obtained by reading the
+standard input. If this option is omitted, the SCCS file shall be
+created with control information but without any file data. The
+.BR \(mii
+option implies the
+.BR \(min
+option.
+.IP "\fB\(mir\ \fISID\fR" 10
+Specify the SID of the initial delta to be inserted. This SID shall be
+a trunk SID; that is, the branch and sequence numbers shall be zero or
+missing. The level number is optional, and defaults to 1.
+.IP "\fB\(mit[\fIname\fB]\fR" 10
+Specify the
+.IR name
+of a file from which descriptive text for the SCCS file shall be taken.
+In the case of existing SCCS files (neither
+.BR \(mii
+nor
+.BR \(min
+is specified):
+.RS 10 
+.IP " *" 4
+A
+.BR \(mit
+option without a
+.IR name
+option-argument shall cause the removal of descriptive text (if any)
+currently in the SCCS file.
+.IP " *" 4
+A
+.BR \(mit
+option with a
+.IR name
+option-argument shall cause the text (if any) in the named file to
+replace the descriptive text (if any) currently in the SCCS file.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mif\ \fIflag\fR" 10
+Specify a
+.IR flag ,
+and, possibly, a value for the
+.IR flag ,
+to be placed in the SCCS file. Several
+.BR \(mif
+options may be supplied on a single
+.IR admin
+command line. Implementations shall recognize the following flags
+and associated values:
+.RS 10 
+.IP "\fBb\fP" 8
+Allow use of the
+.BR \(mib
+option on a
+.IR get
+command to create branch deltas.
+.IP "\fBc\fIceil\fR" 8
+Specify the highest release (that is, ceiling), a number less than or
+equal to 9\|999, which may be retrieved by a
+.IR get
+command for editing. The default value for an unspecified
+.BR c
+flag shall be 9\|999.
+.IP "\fBf\fIfloor\fR" 8
+Specify the lowest release (that is, floor), a number greater than 0
+but less than 9\|999, which may be retrieved by a
+.IR get
+command for editing. The default value for an unspecified
+.BR f
+flag shall be 1.
+.IP "\fBd\fISID\fR" 8
+Specify the default delta number (SID) to be used by a
+.IR get
+command.
+.IP "\fBi\fIstr\fR" 8
+Treat the ``No ID keywords'' message issued by
+.IR get
+or
+.IR delta
+as a fatal error. In the absence of this flag, the message is only a
+warning. The message is issued if no SCCS identification keywords (see
+.IR "\fIget\fR\^")
+are found in the text retrieved or stored in the SCCS file. If a value
+is supplied, the application shall ensure that the keywords exactly
+match the given string; however, the string shall contain a keyword,
+and no embedded
+<newline>
+characters.
+.IP "\fBj\fP" 8
+Allow concurrent
+.IR get
+commands for editing on the same SID of an SCCS file. This allows
+multiple concurrent updates to the same version of the SCCS file.
+.IP "\fBl\fIlist\fR" 8
+Specify a
+.IR list
+of releases to which deltas can no longer be made (that is,
+.IR get
+.BR \(mie
+against one of these locked releases fails). Conforming applications
+shall use the following syntax to specify a
+.IR list .
+Implementations may accept additional forms as an extension:
+.RS 8 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<list> ::= a | <range-list>
+<range-list> ::= <range> | <range-list>, <range>
+<range> ::= <SID>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The character
+.IR a
+in the
+.IR list
+shall be equivalent to specifying all releases for the named SCCS file.
+The non-terminal <\fISID\fP> in range shall be the delta number of an
+existing delta associated with the SCCS file.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBn\fP" 8
+Cause
+.IR delta
+to create a null delta in each of those releases (if any) being skipped
+when a delta is made in a new release (for example, in making delta 5.1
+after delta 2.7, releases 3 and 4 are skipped). These null deltas shall
+serve as anchor points so that branch deltas may later be created from
+them. The absence of this flag shall cause skipped releases to be
+nonexistent in the SCCS file, preventing branch deltas from being
+created from them in the future. During the initial creation of an SCCS
+file, the
+.BR n
+flag may be ignored; that is, if the
+.BR \(mir
+option is used to set the release number of the initial SID to a value
+greater than 1, null deltas need not be created for the ``skipped''
+releases.
+.IP "\fBq\fItext\fR" 8
+Substitute user-definable
+.IR text
+for all occurrences of the %\fBQ\fP% keyword in the SCCS file text
+retrieved by
+.IR get .
+.IP "\fBm\fImod\fR" 8
+Specify the module name of the SCCS file substituted for all
+occurrences of the %\fBM\fP% keyword in the SCCS file text retrieved by
+.IR get .
+If the
+.BR m
+flag is not specified, the value assigned shall be the name of the SCCS
+file with the leading
+.BR '.' 
+removed.
+.IP "\fBt\fItype\fR" 8
+Specify the
+.IR type
+of module in the SCCS file substituted for all occurrences of the
+%\fBY\fP% keyword in the SCCS file text retrieved by
+.IR get .
+.IP "\fBv\fIpgm\fR" 8
+Cause
+.IR delta
+to prompt for modification request (MR) numbers as the reason for
+creating a delta. The optional value specifies the name of an MR
+number validation program. (If this flag is set when creating an SCCS
+file, the application shall ensure that the
+.BR m
+option is also used even if its value is null.)
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mid\ \fIflag\fR" 10
+Remove (delete) the specified
+.IR flag
+from an SCCS file. Several
+.BR \(mid
+options may be supplied on a single
+.IR admin
+command. See the
+.BR \(mif
+option for allowable
+.IR flag
+names. (The
+.BR l \c
+.IR list
+flag gives a
+.IR list
+of releases to be unlocked. See the
+.BR \(mif
+option for further description of the
+.BR l
+flag and the syntax of a
+.IR list .)
+.IP "\fB\(mia\ \fIlogin\fR" 10
+Specify a
+.IR login
+name, or numerical group ID, to be added to the list of users who may
+make deltas (changes) to the SCCS file. A group ID shall be equivalent
+to specifying all
+.IR login
+names common to that group ID. Several
+.BR \(mia
+options may be used on a single
+.IR admin
+command line. As many
+.IR login s,
+or numerical group IDs, as desired may be on the list simultaneously.
+If the list of users is empty, then anyone may add deltas. If
+.IR login
+or group ID is preceded by a
+.BR '!' ,
+the users so specified shall be denied permission to make deltas.
+.IP "\fB\(mie\ \fIlogin\fR" 10
+Specify a
+.IR login
+name, or numerical group ID, to be erased from the list of users
+allowed to make deltas (changes) to the SCCS file. Specifying a group
+ID is equivalent to specifying all
+.IR login
+names common to that group ID. Several
+.BR \(mie
+options may be used on a single
+.IR admin
+command line.
+.IP "\fB\(miy[\fIcomment\fB]\fR" 10
+Insert the
+.IR comment
+text into the SCCS file as a comment for the initial delta in a manner
+identical to that of
+.IR delta .
+In the POSIX locale, omission of the
+.BR \(miy
+option shall result in a default comment line being inserted in
+the form:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"date and time created %s %s by %s", <\fIdate\fR>, <\fItime\fR>, <\fIlogin\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fIdate\fP> is expressed in the format of the
+.IR date
+utility's
+.BR %y /\c
+.BR %m /\c
+.BR %d
+conversion specification, <\fItime\fP> in the format of the
+.IR date
+utility's
+.BR %T
+conversion specification format, and <\fIlogin\fP> is the login name of
+the user creating the file.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mim\ \fImrlist\fR" 10
+Insert the list of modification request (MR) numbers into the SCCS
+file as the reason for creating the initial delta in a manner identical to
+.IR delta .
+The application shall ensure that the
+.BR v
+flag is set and the MR numbers are validated if the
+.BR v
+flag has a value (the name of an MR number validation program).
+A diagnostic message shall be written if the
+.BR v
+flag is not set or MR validation fails.
+.IP "\fB\(mih\fP" 10
+Check the structure of the SCCS file and compare the newly computed
+checksum with the checksum that is stored in the SCCS file. If the
+newly computed checksum does not match the checksum in the SCCS file, a
+diagnostic message shall be written.
+.IP "\fB\(miz\fR" 10
+Recompute the SCCS file checksum and store it in the first line of the
+SCCS file (see the
+.BR \(mih
+option above). Note that use of this option on a truly corrupted
+file may prevent future detection of the corruption.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of an existing SCCS file or a directory. If
+.IR file
+is a directory, the
+.IR admin
+utility shall behave as though each file in the directory were
+specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files (last component
+of the pathname does not begin with
+.BR s. )
+and unreadable files shall be silently ignored.
+.IP "\fInewfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of an SCCS file to be created.
+.P
+If exactly one
+.IR file
+or
+.IR newfile
+operand appears, and it is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be read; each line of the standard input shall
+be taken to be the name of an SCCS file to be processed. Non-SCCS files
+and unreadable files shall be silently ignored.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be a text file used only if
+.BR \(mii
+is specified without an option-argument or if a
+.IR file
+or
+.IR newfile
+operand is specified as
+.BR '\(mi' .
+If the first character of any standard input line is
+<SOH>
+in the POSIX locale, the results are unspecified.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The existing SCCS files shall be text files of an unspecified format.
+.P
+The application shall ensure that the file named by the
+.BR \(mii
+option's
+.IR name
+option-argument shall be a text file; if the first character of any
+line in this file is
+<SOH>
+in the POSIX locale, the results are unspecified. If this file contains
+more than 99\|999 lines, the number of lines recorded in the header for
+this file shall be 99\|999 for this delta.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR admin :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error and the
+contents of the default
+.BR \(miy
+comment.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+Any SCCS files created shall be text files of an unspecified format.
+During processing of a
+.IR file ,
+a locking
+.IR z-file ,
+as described in
+.IR "\fIget\fR\^",
+may be created and deleted.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+It is recommended that directories containing SCCS files be writable by
+the owner only, and that SCCS files themselves be read-only. The mode
+of the directories should allow only the owner to modify SCCS files
+contained in the directories. The mode of the SCCS files prevents any
+modification at all except by SCCS commands.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIdelta\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIget\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIprs\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIwhat\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/alias.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/alias.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bf15887
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/alias.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,222 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ALIAS "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+alias
+\(em define or display aliases
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+alias \fB[\fIalias-name\fB[\fR=\fIstring\fB]\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR alias
+utility shall create or redefine alias definitions or write the values
+of existing alias definitions to standard output. An alias definition
+provides a string value that shall replace a command name when it is
+encountered; see
+.IR "Section 2.3.1" ", " "Alias Substitution".
+.P
+An alias definition shall affect the current shell execution
+environment and the execution environments of the subshells of the
+current shell. When used as specified by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, the alias definition
+shall not affect the parent process of the current shell nor any
+utility environment invoked by the shell; see
+.IR "Section 2.12" ", " "Shell Execution Environment".
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIalias-name\fR" 10
+Write the alias definition to standard output.
+.IP "\fIalias-name\fP=\fIstring\fR" 10
+.br
+Assign the value of
+.IR string
+to the alias
+.IR alias-name .
+.P
+If no operands are given, all alias definitions shall be written to
+standard output.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR alias :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The format for displaying aliases (when no operands or only
+.IR name
+operands are specified) shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s=%s\en", \fIname\fR, \fIvalue\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR value
+string shall be written with appropriate quoting so that it is suitable
+for reinput to the shell. See the description of shell quoting in
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "Quoting".
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+One of the
+.IR name
+operands specified did not have an alias definition, or an error
+occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+Create a short alias for a commonly used
+.IR ls
+command:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+alias lf="ls \(miCF"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+Create a simple ``redo'' command to repeat previous entries in the
+command history file:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+alias r='fc \(mis'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+Use 1K units for
+.IR du :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+alias du=du\e \(mik
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+Set up
+.IR nohup
+so that it can deal with an argument that is itself an alias name:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+alias nohup="nohup "
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR alias
+description is based on historical KornShell implementations. Known
+differences exist between that and the C shell. The KornShell version
+was adopted to be consistent with all the other KornShell features in
+\&this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, such as command line editing.
+.P
+Since
+.IR alias
+affects the current shell execution environment, it is generally
+provided as a shell regular built-in.
+.P
+Historical versions of the KornShell have allowed aliases to be
+exported to scripts that are invoked by the same shell. This is
+triggered by the
+.IR alias
+.BR \(mix
+flag; it is allowed by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 only when an explicit extension such as
+.BR \(mix
+is used. The standard developers considered that aliases were of use
+primarily to interactive users and that they should normally not affect
+shell scripts called by those users; functions are available to such
+scripts.
+.P
+Historical versions of the KornShell had not written aliases in a
+quoted manner suitable for reentry to the shell, but this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 has made
+this a requirement for all similar output. Therefore, consistency was
+chosen over this detail of historical practice.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.9.5" ", " "Function Definition Command"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ar.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ar.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..760dd6f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ar.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,727 @@
+'\" et
+.TH AR "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ar
+\(em create and maintain library archives
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+ar \(mid \fB[\fR\(miv\fB] \fIarchive file\fR...
+.P
+ar \(mim \fB[\fR\(miv\fB] \fIarchive file\fR...
+ar \(mim \(mia \fB[\fR\(miv\fB] \fIposname archive file\fR...
+ar \(mim \(mib \fB[\fR\(miv\fB] \fIposname archive file\fR...
+ar \(mim \(mii \fB[\fR\(miv\fB] \fIposname archive file\fR...
+.P
+ar \(mip \fB[\fR\(miv\fB] [\fR\(mis\fB] \fIarchive\fB [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+ar \(miq \fB[\fR\(micv\fB] \fIarchive file\fR...
+.P
+ar \(mir \fB[\fR\(micuv\fB] \fIarchive file\fR...
+.P
+ar \(mir \(mia \fB[\fR\(micuv\fB] \fIposname archive file\fR...
+ar \(mir \(mib \fB[\fR\(micuv\fB] \fIposname archive file\fR...
+ar \(mir \(mii \fB[\fR\(micuv\fB] \fIposname archive file\fR...
+.P
+ar \(mit \fB[\fR\(miv\fB] [\fR\(mis\fB] \fIarchive \fB[\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+ar \(mix \fB[\fR\(miv\fB] [\fR\(misCT\fB] \fIarchive \fB[\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.P
+The
+.IR ar
+utility is part of the Software Development Utilities option.
+.P
+The
+.IR ar
+utility can be used to create and maintain groups of files combined
+into an archive. Once an archive has been created, new files can be
+added, and existing files in an archive can be extracted, deleted, or
+replaced. When an archive consists entirely of valid object files, the
+implementation shall format the archive so that it is usable as a
+library for link editing (see
+.IR c99
+and
+.IR fort77 ).
+When some of the archived files are not valid object files, the
+suitability of the archive for library use is undefined.
+If an archive consists entirely of printable files, the entire
+archive shall be printable.
+.P
+When
+.IR ar
+creates an archive, it creates administrative information indicating
+whether a symbol table is present in the archive. When there is at
+least one object file that
+.IR ar
+recognizes as such in the archive, an archive symbol table shall be
+created in the archive and maintained by
+.IR ar ;
+it is used by the link editor to search the archive. Whenever the
+.IR ar
+utility is used to create or update the contents of such an archive,
+the symbol table shall be rebuilt. The
+.BR \(mis
+option shall force the symbol table to be rebuilt.
+.P
+All
+.IR file
+operands can be pathnames. However, files within archives shall be
+named by a filename, which is the last component of the pathname used
+when the file was entered into the archive. The comparison of
+.IR file
+operands to the names of files in archives shall be performed by
+comparing the last component of the operand to the name of the file
+in the archive.
+.P
+It is unspecified whether multiple files in the archive may be
+identically named. In the case of such files, however, each
+.IR file
+and
+.IR posname
+operand shall match only the first file in the archive having a name
+that is the same as the last component of the operand.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR ar
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except for Guideline 9.
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mia\fP" 10
+Position new files in the archive after the file named by the
+.IR posname
+operand.
+.IP "\fB\(mib\fP" 10
+Position new files in the archive before the file named by the
+.IR posname
+operand.
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Suppress the diagnostic message that is written to standard error by
+default when the archive
+.IR archive
+is created.
+.IP "\fB\(miC\fP" 10
+Prevent extracted files from replacing like-named files in the
+file system. This option is useful when
+.BR \(miT
+is also used, to prevent truncated filenames from replacing files with
+the same prefix.
+.IP "\fB\(mid\fP" 10
+Delete one or more
+.IR file s
+from
+.IR archive .
+.IP "\fB\(mii\fP" 10
+Position new files in the archive before the file in the archive
+named by the
+.IR posname
+operand (equivalent to
+.BR \(mib ).
+.IP "\fB\(mim\fP" 10
+Move the named files in the archive. The
+.BR \(mia ,
+.BR \(mib ,
+or
+.BR \(mii
+options with the
+.IR posname
+operand indicate the position; otherwise, move the names files in the
+archive to the end of the archive.
+.IP "\fB\(mip\fP" 10
+Write the contents of the
+.IR file s
+in the archive named by
+.IR file
+operands from
+.IR archive
+to the standard output. If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, the contents of all files in the archive shall
+be written in the order of the archive.
+.IP "\fB\(miq\fP" 10
+Append the named files to the end of the archive. In this case
+.IR ar
+does not check whether the added files are already in the archive.
+This is useful to bypass the searching otherwise done when creating a
+large archive piece by piece.
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+Replace or add
+.IR file s
+to
+.IR archive .
+If the archive named by
+.IR archive
+does not exist, a new archive shall be created and a diagnostic message
+shall be written to standard error (unless the
+.BR \(mic
+option is specified). If no
+.IR file s
+are specified and the
+.IR archive
+exists, the results are undefined. Files that replace existing files in
+the archive shall not change the order of the archive. Files that do
+not replace existing files in the archive shall be appended to the
+archive
+unless a
+.BR \(mia ,
+.BR \(mib ,
+or
+.BR \(mii
+option specifies another position.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Force the regeneration of the archive symbol table even if
+.IR ar
+is not invoked with an option that modifies the archive contents. This
+option is useful to restore the archive symbol table after it has been
+stripped; see
+.IR strip .
+.IP "\fB\(mit\fP" 10
+Write a table of contents of
+.IR archive
+to the standard output. Only the files specified by the
+.IR file
+operands shall be included in the written list. If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, all files in
+.IR archive
+shall be included in the order of the archive.
+.IP "\fB\(miT\fP" 10
+Allow filename truncation of extracted files whose archive names are
+longer than the file system can support. By default, extracting a file
+with a name that is too long shall be an error; a diagnostic message
+shall be written and the file shall not be extracted.
+.IP "\fB\(miu\fP" 10
+Update older files in the archive. When used with the
+.BR \(mir
+option, files in the archive shall be replaced only if the
+corresponding
+.IR file
+has a modification time that is at least as new as the modification
+time of the file in the archive.
+.IP "\fB\(miv\fP" 10
+Give verbose output. When used with the option characters
+.BR \(mid ,
+.BR \(mir ,
+or
+.BR \(mix ,
+write a detailed file-by-file description of the archive creation and
+maintenance activity, as described in the STDOUT section.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+When used with
+.BR \(mip ,
+write the name of the file in the archive to the standard output before
+writing the file in the archive itself to the standard output, as
+described in the STDOUT section.
+.P
+When used with
+.BR \(mit ,
+include a long listing of information about the files in the archive,
+as described in the STDOUT section.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mix\fP" 10
+Extract the files in the archive named by the
+.IR file
+operands from
+.IR archive .
+The contents of the archive shall not be changed. If no
+.IR file
+operands are given, all files in the archive shall be extracted. The
+modification time of each file extracted shall be set to the time the
+file is extracted from the archive.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIarchive\fR" 10
+A pathname of the archive.
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname. Only the last component shall be used when comparing
+against the names of files in the archive. If two or more
+.IR file
+operands have the same last pathname component (basename), the results
+are unspecified. The implementation's archive format shall not truncate
+valid filenames of files added to or replaced in the archive.
+.IP "\fIposname\fR" 10
+The name of a file in the archive, used for relative positioning; see
+options
+.BR \(mim
+and
+.BR \(mir .
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The archive named by
+.IR archive
+shall be a file in the format created by
+.IR ar
+.BR \(mir .
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR ar :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILC_TIME\fP" 10
+Determine the format and content for date and time strings written by
+.IR ar
+.BR \(mitv .
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fITMPDIR\fP" 10
+Determine the pathname that overrides the default directory for
+temporary files, if any.
+.IP "\fITZ\fP" 10
+Determine the timezone used to calculate date and time strings written
+by
+.IR ar
+.BR \(mitv .
+If
+.IR TZ
+is unset or null, an unspecified default timezone shall be used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+If the
+.BR \(mid
+option is used with the
+.BR \(miv
+option, the standard output format shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"d \(mi %s\en", <\fIfile\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR file
+is the operand specified on the command line.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mip
+option is used with the
+.BR \(miv
+option,
+.IR ar
+shall precede the contents of each file with:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"\en<%s>\en\en", <\fIfile\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR file
+is the operand specified on the command line, if
+.IR file
+operands were specified, and the name of the file in the archive if
+they were not.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mir
+option is used with the
+.BR \(miv
+option:
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR file
+is already in the archive, the standard output format shall be:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"r \(mi %s\en", <\fIfile\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fIfile\fP> is the operand specified on the command line.
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR file
+is not already in the archive, the standard output format shall be:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"a \(mi %s\en", <\fIfile\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fIfile\fP> is the operand specified on the command line.
+.RE
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mit
+option is used,
+.IR ar
+shall write the names of the files in the archive to the standard
+output in the format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIfile\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR file
+is the operand specified on the command line, if
+.IR file
+operands were specified, or the name of the file in the archive if they
+were not.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mit
+option is used with the
+.BR \(miv
+option, the standard output format shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s %u/%u %u %s %d %d:%d %d %s\en", <\fImember mode\fR>, <\fIuser ID\fR>,
+    <\fIgroup ID\fR>, <\fInumber of bytes in member\fR>,
+    <\fIabbreviated month\fR>, <\fIday-of-month\fR>, <\fIhour\fR>,
+    <\fIminute\fR>, <\fIyear\fR>, <\fIfile\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where:
+.IP "<\fIfile\fR>" 10
+Shall be the operand specified on the command line, if
+.IR file
+operands were specified, or the name of the file in the archive if they
+were not.
+.IP "<\fImember\ mode\fR>" 10
+.br
+Shall be formatted the same as the <\fIfile\ mode\fR> string defined in
+the STDOUT section of
+.IR ls ,
+except that the first character, the <\fIentry\ type\fR>, is not used;
+the string represents the file mode of the file in the archive at the
+time it was added to or replaced in the archive.
+.br
+.P
+The following represent the last-modification time of a file when it
+was most recently added to or replaced in the archive:
+.IP "<\fIabbreviated\ month\fR>" 10
+.br
+Equivalent to the format of the
+.BR %b
+conversion specification format in
+.IR date .
+.IP "<\fIday-of-month\fR>" 10
+.br
+Equivalent to the format of the
+.BR %e
+conversion specification format in
+.IR date .
+.IP "<\fIhour\fR>" 10
+Equivalent to the format of the
+.BR %H
+conversion specification format in
+.IR date .
+.IP "<\fIminute\fR>" 10
+Equivalent to the format of the
+.BR %M
+conversion specification format in
+.IR date .
+.IP "<\fIyear\fR>" 10
+Equivalent to the format of the
+.BR %Y
+conversion specification format in
+.IR date .
+.P
+When
+.IR LC_TIME
+does not specify the POSIX locale, a different format and order of
+presentation of these fields relative to each other may be used in a
+format appropriate in the specified locale.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mix
+option is used with the
+.BR \(miv
+option, the standard output format shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"x \(mi %s\en", <\fIfile\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR file
+is the operand specified on the command line, if
+.IR file
+operands were specified, or the name of the file in the archive if they
+were not.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+The diagnostic message about creating a new archive when
+.BR \(mic
+is not specified shall not modify the exit status.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+Archives are files with unspecified formats.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The archive format is not described. It is recognized that there are
+several known
+.IR ar
+formats, which are not compatible. The
+.IR ar
+utility is included, however, to allow creation of archives that
+are intended for use only on one machine. The archive is
+specified as a file, and it can be moved as a file. This does allow an
+archive to be moved from one machine to another machine that uses the
+same implementation of
+.IR ar .
+.P
+Utilities such as
+.IR pax
+(and its forebears
+.IR tar
+and
+.IR cpio )
+also provide portable ``archives''. This is a not a duplication; the
+.IR ar
+utility is included to provide an interface primarily for
+.IR make
+and the compilers, based on a historical model.
+.P
+In historical implementations, the
+.BR \(miq
+option (available on XSI-conforming systems) is known to execute
+quickly because
+.IR ar
+does not check on whether the added members are already in the
+archive. This is useful to bypass the searching otherwise done when
+creating a large archive piece-by-piece. These remarks may but need not
+remain true for a brand new implementation of this utility; hence,
+these remarks have been moved into the RATIONALE.
+.P
+BSD implementations historically required applications to provide the
+.BR \(mis
+option whenever the archive was supposed to contain a symbol table.
+As in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, System V historically creates or updates an archive symbol
+table whenever an object file is removed from, added to, or updated
+in the archive.
+.P
+The OPERANDS section requires what might seem to be true without
+specifying it: the archive cannot truncate the filenames below
+{NAME_MAX}.
+Some historical implementations do so, however, causing unexpected
+results for the application. Therefore, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 makes the requirement
+explicit to avoid misunderstandings.
+.P
+According to the System V documentation, the options
+.BR \(midmpqrtx
+are not required to begin with a
+<hyphen>
+(\c
+.BR '\(mi' ).
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that a conforming application use the leading
+<hyphen>.
+.P
+The archive format used by the 4.4 BSD implementation is documented in
+this RATIONALE as an example:
+.sp
+.RS
+A file created by
+.IR ar
+begins with the ``magic'' string
+.BR \(dq!<arch>\en\(dq .
+The rest of the archive is made up of objects, each of which is
+composed of a header for a file, a possible filename, and the file
+contents. The header is portable between machine architectures, and, if
+the file contents are printable, the archive is itself printable.
+.P
+The header is made up of six ASCII fields, followed by a two-character
+trailer. The fields are the object name (16 characters), the file last
+modification time (12 characters), the user and group IDs (each 6
+characters), the file mode (8 characters), and the file size (10
+characters). All numeric fields are in decimal, except for the file
+mode, which is in octal.
+.P
+The modification time is the file
+.IR st_mtime
+field. The user and group IDs are the file
+.IR st_uid
+and
+.IR st_gid
+fields. The file mode is the file
+.IR st_mode
+field. The file size is the file
+.IR st_size
+field. The two-byte trailer is the string
+.BR \(dq`<newline>\(dq .
+.P
+Only the name field has any provision for overflow. If any filename is
+more than 16 characters in length or contains an embedded space, the
+string
+.BR \(dq#1/\(dq 
+followed by the ASCII length of the name is written in the name field.
+The file size (stored in the archive header) is incremented by the
+length of the name. The name is then written immediately following the
+archive header.
+.P
+Any unused characters in any of these fields are written as
+<space>
+characters. If any fields are their particular maximum number of
+characters in length, there is no separation between the fields.
+.P
+Objects in the archive are always an even number of bytes long; files
+that are an odd number of bytes long are padded with a
+<newline>,
+although the size in the header does not reflect this.
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR ar
+utility description requires that (when all its members are valid
+object files)
+.IR ar
+produce an object code library, which the linkage editor can use to
+extract object modules. If the linkage editor needs a symbol table to
+permit random access to the archive,
+.IR ar
+must provide it; however,
+.IR ar
+does not require a symbol table.
+.P
+The BSD
+.BR \(mio
+option was omitted. It is a rare conforming application that uses
+.IR ar
+to extract object code from a library with concern for its modification
+time, since this can only be of importance to
+.IR make .
+Hence, since this functionality is not deemed important for
+applications portability, the modification time of the extracted files
+is set to the current time.
+.P
+There is at least one known implementation (for a small computer) that
+can accommodate only object files for that system, disallowing mixed
+object and other files. The ability to handle any type of file is not
+only historical practice for most implementations, but is also a
+reasonable expectation.
+.P
+Consideration was given to changing the output format of
+.IR ar
+.BR \(mitv
+to the same format as the output of
+.IR ls
+.BR \(mil .
+This would have made parsing the output of
+.IR ar
+the same as that of
+.IR ls .
+This was rejected in part because the current
+.IR ar
+format is commonly used and changes would break historical usage.
+Second,
+.IR ar
+gives the user ID and group ID in numeric format separated by a
+<slash>.
+Changing this to be the user name and group name would not be correct
+if the archive were moved to a machine that contained a different user
+database. Since
+.IR ar
+cannot know whether the archive was generated on the same machine,
+it cannot tell what to report.
+.P
+The text on the
+.BR \(miur
+option combination is historical practice\(emsince one filename can
+easily represent two different files (for example,
+.BR /a/foo
+and
+.BR /b/foo ),
+it is reasonable to replace the file in the archive even when the
+modification time in the archive is identical to that in the file
+system.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIc99\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIdate\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfort77\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIpax\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIstrip\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP",
+description of
+{POSIX_NO_TRUNC}
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/asa.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/asa.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2f75607
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/asa.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,212 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ASA "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+asa
+\(em interpret carriage-control characters
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+asa \fB[\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR asa
+utility shall write its input files to standard output, mapping
+carriage-control characters from the text files to line-printer control
+sequences in an implementation-defined manner.
+.P
+The first character of every line shall be removed from the input, and
+the following actions are performed.
+.P
+If the character removed is:
+.IP <space> 10
+The rest of the line is output without change.
+.IP 0 10
+A
+<newline>
+is output, then the rest of the input line.
+.IP 1 10
+One or more implementation-defined characters that causes an advance
+to the next page shall be output, followed by the rest of the input
+line.
+.IP "\fR+\fP" 10
+The
+<newline>
+of the previous line shall be replaced with one or more
+implementation-defined characters that causes printing to return to
+column position 1, followed by the rest of the input line. If the
+.BR '\(pl' 
+is the first character in the input, it shall be equivalent to
+<space>.
+.P
+The action of the
+.IR asa
+utility is unspecified upon encountering any character other than those
+listed above as the first character in a line.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a text file used for input. If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, the standard input shall be used.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used if no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, and shall be used if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' 
+and the implementation treats the
+.BR '\(mi' 
+as meaning standard input.
+Otherwise, the standard input shall not be used.
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files shall be text files.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR asa :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall be the text from the input file modified as
+described in the DESCRIPTION section.
+.SH STDERR
+None.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+All input files were output successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+The following command:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+asa \fIfile\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+permits the viewing of
+.IR file
+(created by a program using FORTRAN-style carriage-control characters)
+on a terminal.
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+The following command:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+a.out | asa | lp
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+formats the FORTRAN output of
+.BR a.out
+and directs it to the printer.
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR asa
+utility is needed to map ``standard'' FORTRAN 77 output into a form
+acceptable to contemporary printers. Usually,
+.IR asa
+is used to pipe data to the
+.IR lp
+utility; see
+.IR lp .
+.P
+This utility is generally used only by FORTRAN programs. The
+standard developers decided to retain
+.IR asa
+to avoid breaking the historical large base of FORTRAN applications
+that put carriage-control characters in their output files. There is no
+requirement that a system have a FORTRAN compiler in order to run
+applications that need
+.IR asa .
+.P
+Historical implementations have used an ASCII
+<form-feed>
+in response to a 1 and an ASCII
+<carriage-return>
+in response to a
+.BR '\(pl' .
+It is suggested that implementations treat characters other than 0, 1,
+and
+.BR '\(pl' 
+as
+<space>
+in the absence of any compelling reason to do otherwise. However, the
+action is listed here as ``unspecified'', permitting an implementation
+to provide extensions to access fast multiple-line slewing and channel
+seeking in a non-portable manner.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfort77\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIlp\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/at.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/at.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fab231c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/at.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,798 @@
+'\" et
+.TH AT "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+at
+\(em execute commands at a later time
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+at \fB[\fR\(mim\fB] [\fR\(mif \fIfile\fB] [\fR\(miq \fIqueuename\fB] \fR\(mit \fItime_arg\fR
+.P
+at \fB[\fR\(mim\fB] [\fR\(mif \fIfile\fB] [\fR\(miq \fIqueuename\fB] \fItimespec\fR...
+.P
+at \(mir \fIat_job_id\fR...
+.P
+at \(mil \(miq \fIqueuename\fR
+.P
+at \(mil \fB[\fIat_job_id\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR at
+utility shall read commands from standard input and group them together
+as an
+.IR at-job ,
+to be executed at a later time.
+.P
+The at-job shall be executed in a separate invocation of the shell,
+running in a separate process group with no controlling terminal,
+except that the environment variables, current working directory,
+file creation mask, and other implementation-defined execution-time
+attributes in effect when the
+.IR at
+utility is executed shall be retained and used when the at-job is
+executed.
+.P
+When the at-job is submitted, the
+.IR at_job_id
+and scheduled time shall be written to standard error. The
+.IR at_job_id
+is an identifier that shall be a string consisting solely of
+alphanumeric characters and the
+<period>
+character. The
+.IR at_job_id
+shall be assigned by the system when the job is scheduled such that it
+uniquely identifies a particular job.
+.P
+User notification and the processing of the job's standard output and
+standard error are described under the
+.BR \(mim
+option.
+.P
+Users shall be permitted to use
+.IR at
+if their name appears in the file
+.BR at.allow
+which is located in an implementation-defined directory.
+If that file does not exist, the file
+.BR at.deny ,
+which is located in an implementation-defined directory,
+shall be checked to determine whether the user shall be denied access to
+.IR at .
+If neither file exists, only a process with appropriate privileges
+shall be allowed to submit a job. If only
+.BR at.deny
+exists and is empty, global usage shall be permitted. The
+.BR at.allow
+and
+.BR at.deny
+files shall consist of one user name per line.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR at
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mif\ \fIfile\fR" 10
+Specify the pathname of a file to be used as the source of the at-job,
+instead of standard input.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\fP" 10
+(The letter ell.) Report all jobs scheduled for the invoking user if no
+.IR at_job_id
+operands are specified. If
+.IR at_job_id s
+are specified, report only information for these jobs. The output shall
+be written to standard output.
+.IP "\fB\(mim\fP" 10
+Send mail to the invoking user after the at-job has run, announcing its
+completion. Standard output and standard error produced by the at-job
+shall be mailed to the user as well, unless redirected elsewhere. Mail
+shall be sent even if the job produces no output.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If
+.BR \(mim
+is not used, the job's standard output and standard error shall be
+provided to the user by means of mail, unless they are redirected
+elsewhere; if there is no such output to provide, the implementation
+need not notify the user of the job's completion.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miq\ \fIqueuename\fR" 10
+.br
+Specify in which queue to schedule a job for submission. When used with
+the
+.BR \(mil
+option, limit the search to that particular queue. By default, at-jobs
+shall be scheduled in queue
+.IR a .
+In contrast, queue
+.IR b
+shall be reserved for batch jobs; see
+.IR batch .
+The meanings of all other
+.IR queuename s
+are implementation-defined. If
+.BR \(miq
+is specified along with either of the
+.BR \(mit
+.IR time_arg
+or
+.IR timespec
+arguments, the results are unspecified.
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+Remove the jobs with the specified
+.IR at_job_id
+operands that were previously scheduled by the
+.IR at
+utility.
+.IP "\fB\(mit\ \fItime_arg\fR" 10
+Submit the job to be run at the time specified by the
+.IR time
+option-argument, which the application shall ensure has the format as
+specified by the
+.IR touch
+.BR \(mit
+.IR time
+utility.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIat_job_id\fR" 10
+The name reported by a previous invocation of the
+.IR at
+utility at the time the job was scheduled.
+.IP "\fItimespec\fR" 10
+Submit the job to be run at the date and time specified. All of the
+.IR timespec
+operands are interpreted as if they were separated by
+<space>
+characters and concatenated, and shall be parsed as described in the
+grammar at the end of this section. The date and time shall be interpreted
+as being in the timezone of the user (as determined by the
+.IR TZ
+variable), unless a timezone name appears as part of
+.IR time ,
+below.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+In the POSIX locale, the following describes the three parts of the
+time specification string. All of the values from the
+.IR LC_TIME
+categories in the POSIX locale shall be recognized in a
+case-insensitive manner.
+.IP "\fItime\fR" 10
+The time can be specified as one, two, or four digits. One-digit and
+two-digit numbers shall be taken to be hours; four-digit numbers to be
+hours and minutes. The time can alternatively be specified as two
+numbers separated by a
+<colon>,
+meaning \fIhour\fP:\fIminute\fR. An AM/PM indication (one of the values
+from the
+.BR am_pm
+keywords in the
+.IR LC_TIME
+locale category) can follow the time; otherwise, a 24-hour clock time
+shall be understood. A timezone name can also follow to further qualify
+the time. The acceptable timezone names are implementation-defined,
+except that they shall be case-insensitive and the string
+.BR utc
+is supported to indicate the time is in Coordinated Universal Time.
+In the POSIX locale, the
+.IR time
+field can also be one of the following tokens:
+.RS 10 
+.IP "\fBmidnight\fR" 10
+Indicates the time 12:00 am (00:00).
+.IP "\fBnoon\fR" 10
+Indicates the time 12:00 pm.
+.IP "\fBnow\fR" 10
+Indicates the current day and time. Invoking
+.IR at
+<\fBnow\fR> shall submit an at-job for potentially immediate execution
+(that is, subject only to unspecified scheduling delays).
+.RE
+.IP "\fIdate\fR" 10
+An optional
+.IR date
+can be specified as either a month name (one of the values from the
+.BR mon
+or
+.BR abmon
+keywords in the
+.IR LC_TIME
+locale category) followed by a day number (and possibly year number
+preceded by a comma), or a day of the week (one of the values from the
+.BR day
+or
+.BR abday
+keywords in the
+.IR LC_TIME
+locale category). In the POSIX locale, two special days shall be
+recognized:
+.RS 10 
+.IP "\fBtoday\fR" 10
+Indicates the current day.
+.IP "\fBtomorrow\fR" 10
+Indicates the day following the current day.
+.P
+If no
+.IR date
+is given,
+.BR today
+shall be assumed if the given time is greater than the current time,
+and
+.BR tomorrow
+shall be assumed if it is less. If the given month is less than the
+current month (and no year is given), next year shall be assumed.
+.RE
+.IP "\fIincrement\fR" 10
+The optional
+.IR increment
+shall be a number preceded by a
+<plus-sign>
+(\c
+.BR '\(pl' )
+and suffixed by one of the following:
+.BR minutes ,
+.BR hours ,
+.BR days ,
+.BR weeks ,
+.BR months ,
+or
+.BR years .
+(The singular forms shall also be accepted.) The keyword
+.BR next
+shall be equivalent to an increment number of +1. For example, the
+following are equivalent commands:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+at 2pm + 1 week
+at 2pm next week
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The following grammar describes the precise format of
+.IR timespec
+in the POSIX locale. The general conventions for this style of grammar
+are described in
+.IR "Section 1.3" ", " "Grammar Conventions".
+This formal syntax shall take precedence over the preceding text syntax
+description. The longest possible token or delimiter shall be
+recognized at a given point. When used in a
+.IR timespec ,
+white space shall also delimit tokens.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+%token hr24clock_hr_min
+%token hr24clock_hour
+/*
+  An hr24clock_hr_min is a one, two, or four-digit number. A one-digit
+  or two-digit number constitutes an hr24clock_hour. An hr24clock_hour
+  may be any of the single digits [0,9], or may be double digits, ranging
+  from [00,23]. If an hr24clock_hr_min is a four-digit number, the
+  first two digits shall be a valid hr24clock_hour, while the last two
+  represent the number of minutes, from [00,59].
+*/
+.P
+%token wallclock_hr_min
+%token wallclock_hour
+/*
+  A wallclock_hr_min is a one, two-digit, or four-digit number.
+  A one-digit or two-digit number constitutes a wallclock_hour.
+  A wallclock_hour may be any of the single digits [1,9], or may
+  be double digits, ranging from [01,12]. If a wallclock_hr_min
+  is a four-digit number, the first two digits shall be a valid
+  wallclock_hour, while the last two represent the number of
+  minutes, from [00,59].
+*/
+.P
+%token minute
+/*
+  A minute is a one or two-digit number whose value can be [0,9]
+  or [00,59].
+*/
+.P
+%token day_number
+/*
+  A day_number is a number in the range appropriate for the particular
+  month and year specified by month_name and year_number, respectively.
+  If no year_number is given, the current year is assumed if the given
+  date and time are later this year. If no year_number is given and
+  the date and time have already occurred this year and the month is
+  not the current month, next year is the assumed year.
+*/
+.P
+%token year_number
+/*
+  A year_number is a four-digit number representing the year A.D., in
+  which the at_job is to be run.
+*/
+.P
+%token inc_number
+/*
+  The inc_number is the number of times the succeeding increment
+  period is to be added to the specified date and time.
+*/
+.P
+%token timezone_name
+/*
+  The name of an optional timezone suffix to the time field, in an
+  implementation-defined format.
+*/
+.P
+%token month_name
+/*
+  One of the values from the mon or abmon keywords in the LC_TIME
+  locale category.
+*/
+.P
+%token day_of_week
+/*
+  One of the values from the day or abday keywords in the LC_TIME
+  locale category.
+*/
+.P
+%token am_pm
+/*
+  One of the values from the am_pm keyword in the LC_TIME locale
+  category.
+*/
+.P
+%start timespec
+%%
+timespec    : time
+            | time date
+            | time increment
+            | time date increment
+            | nowspec
+            ;
+.P
+nowspec     : "now"
+            | "now" increment
+            ;
+.P
+time        : hr24clock_hr_min
+            | hr24clock_hr_min timezone_name
+            | hr24clock_hour ":" minute
+            | hr24clock_hour ":" minute timezone_name
+            | wallclock_hr_min am_pm
+            | wallclock_hr_min am_pm timezone_name
+            | wallclock_hour ":" minute am_pm
+            | wallclock_hour ":" minute am_pm timezone_name
+            | "noon"
+            | "midnight"
+            ;
+.P
+date        : month_name day_number
+            | month_name day_number "," year_number
+            | day_of_week
+            | "today"
+            | "tomorrow"
+            ;
+.P
+increment   : "+" inc_number inc_period
+            | "next" inc_period
+            ;
+.P
+inc_period  : "minute" | "minutes"
+            | "hour" | "hours"
+            | "day" | "days"
+            | "week" | "weeks"
+            | "month" | "months"
+            | "year" | "years"
+            ;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be a text file consisting of commands
+acceptable to the shell command language described in
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language".
+The standard input shall only be used if no
+.BR \(mif
+.IR file
+option is specified.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+See the STDIN section.
+.P
+The text files
+.BR at.allow
+and
+.BR at.deny ,
+which are located in an implementation-defined directory,
+shall contain zero or more user names, one per line, of users who are,
+respectively, authorized or denied access to the
+.IR at
+and
+.IR batch
+utilities.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR at :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fILC_TIME\fP" 10
+Determine the format and contents for date and time strings written and
+accepted by
+.IR at .
+.IP "\fISHELL\fP" 10
+Determine a name of a command interpreter to be used to invoke the
+at-job. If the variable is unset or null,
+.IR sh
+shall be used. If it is set to a value other than a name for
+.IR sh ,
+the implementation shall do one of the following: use that shell; use
+.IR sh ;
+use the login shell from the user database; or any of the preceding
+accompanied by a warning diagnostic about which was chosen.
+.IP "\fITZ\fP" 10
+Determine the timezone. The job shall be submitted for execution at the
+time specified by
+.IR timespec
+or
+.BR \(mit
+.IR time
+relative to the timezone specified by the
+.IR TZ
+variable. If
+.IR timespec
+specifies a timezone, it shall override
+.IR TZ .
+If
+.IR timespec
+does not specify a timezone and
+.IR TZ
+is unset or null, an unspecified default timezone shall be used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+When standard input is a terminal, prompts of unspecified format for
+each line of the user input described in the STDIN section may be
+written to standard output.
+.P
+In the POSIX locale, the following shall be written to the standard
+output for each job when jobs are listed in response to the
+.BR \(mil
+option:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\et%s\en", \fIat_job_id\fR, <\fIdate\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR date
+shall be equivalent in format to the output of:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+date +"%a %b %e %T %Y"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The date and time written shall be adjusted so that they appear in the
+timezone of the user (as determined by the
+.IR TZ
+variable).
+.SH STDERR
+In the POSIX locale, the following shall be written to standard error
+when a job has been successfully submitted:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"job %s at %s\en", \fIat_job_id\fR, <\fIdate\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR date
+has the same format as that described in the STDOUT section. Neither
+this, nor warning messages concerning the selection of the command
+interpreter, shall be considered a diagnostic that changes the exit
+status.
+.P
+Diagnostic messages, if any, shall be written to standard error.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+The
+.IR at
+utility successfully submitted, removed, or listed a job or jobs.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+The job shall not be scheduled, removed, or listed.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The format of the
+.IR at
+command line shown here is guaranteed only for the POSIX locale. Other
+cultures may be supported with substantially different interfaces,
+although implementations are encouraged to provide comparable levels of
+functionality.
+.P
+Since the commands run in a separate shell invocation, running in a
+separate process group with no controlling terminal, open file
+descriptors, traps, and priority inherited from the invoking
+environment are lost.
+.P
+Some implementations do not allow substitution of different shells
+using
+.IR SHELL .
+System V systems, for example, have used the login shell value for the
+user in
+.BR /etc/passwd .
+To select reliably another command interpreter, the user must include
+it as part of the script, such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB$\fR at 1800
+myshell myscript
+EOT
+\fBjob ... at ...
+\fB$\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+This sequence can be used at a terminal:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+at \(mim 0730 tomorrow
+sort < file >outfile
+EOT
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+This sequence, which demonstrates redirecting standard error to a pipe,
+is useful in a command procedure (the sequence of output redirection
+specifications is significant):
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+at now + 1 hour <<!
+diff file1 file2 2>&1 >outfile | mailx mygroup
+!
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+To have a job reschedule itself,
+.IR at
+can be invoked from within the at-job. For example, this daily
+processing script named
+.BR my.daily
+runs every day (although
+.IR crontab
+is a more appropriate vehicle for such work):
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+# my.daily runs every day
+\fIdaily processing\fR
+at now tomorrow < my.daily
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+The spacing of the three portions of the POSIX locale
+.IR timespec
+is quite flexible as long as there are no ambiguities. Examples of
+various times and operand presentation include:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+at 0815am Jan 24
+at 8 :15amjan24
+at now "+ 1day"
+at 5 pm FRIday
+at '17
+    utc+
+    30minutes'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR at
+utility reads from standard input the commands to be executed at a
+later time. It may be useful to redirect standard output and standard
+error within the specified commands.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mit
+.IR time
+option was added as a new capability to support an internationalized
+way of specifying a time for execution of the submitted job.
+.P
+Early proposals added a ``jobname'' concept as a way of giving
+submitted jobs names that are meaningful to the user submitting them.
+The historical, system-specified
+.IR at_job_id
+gives no indication of what the job is. Upon further reflection, it was
+decided that the benefit of this was not worth the change in historical
+interface. The
+.IR at
+functionality is useful in simple environments, but in large or complex
+situations, the functionality provided by the Batch Services option is
+more suitable.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miq
+option historically has been an undocumented option, used mainly by the
+.IR batch
+utility.
+.P
+The System V
+.BR \(mim
+option was added to provide a method for informing users that an at-job
+had completed. Otherwise, users are only informed when output to
+standard error or standard output are not redirected.
+.P
+The behavior of
+.IR at
+<\fBnow\fP> was changed in an early proposal from being unspecified to
+submitting a job for potentially immediate execution. Historical BSD
+.IR at
+implementations support this. Historical System V implementations give
+an error in that case, but a change to the System V versions should
+have no backwards-compatibility ramifications.
+.P
+On BSD-based systems, a
+.BR \(miu
+.IR user
+option has allowed those with appropriate privileges to access the work
+of other users. Since this is primarily a system administration feature
+and is not universally implemented, it has been omitted. Similarly, a
+specification for the output format for a user with appropriate
+privileges viewing the queues of other users has been omitted.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mif
+.IR file
+option from System V is used instead of the BSD method of using the
+last operand as the pathname. The BSD method is ambiguous\(emdoes:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+at 1200 friday
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+mean the same thing if there is a file named
+.BR friday
+in the current directory?
+.P
+The
+.IR at_job_id
+is composed of a limited character set in historical practice, and it
+is mandated here to invalidate systems that might try using characters
+that require shell quoting or that could not be easily parsed by shell
+scripts.
+.P
+The
+.IR at
+utility varies between System V and BSD systems in the way timezones
+are used. On System V systems, the
+.IR TZ
+variable affects the at-job submission times and the times displayed
+for the user. On BSD systems,
+.IR TZ
+is not taken into account. The BSD behavior is easily achieved with
+the current specification. If the user wishes to have the timezone
+default to that of the system, they merely need to issue the
+.IR at
+command immediately following an unsetting or null assignment to
+.IR TZ .
+For example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+TZ= at noon ...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+gives the desired BSD result.
+.P
+While the
+.IR yacc -like
+grammar specified in the OPERANDS section is lexically unambiguous with
+respect to the digit strings, a lexical analyzer would probably be
+written to look for and return digit strings in those cases. The parser
+could then check whether the digit string returned is a valid
+.IR day_number ,
+.IR year_number ,
+and so on, based on the context.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIbatch\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIcrontab\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/awk.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/awk.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8a67a2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/awk.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,3966 @@
+'\" et
+.TH AWK "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+awk
+\(em pattern scanning and processing language
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+awk \fB[\fR\(miF \fIsepstring\fB] [\fR\(miv \fIassignment\fB]\fR... \fIprogram\fB [\fIargument\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+awk \fB[\fR\(miF \fIsepstring\fB] \fR\(mif \fIprogfile \fB[\fR\(mif \fIprogfile\fB]\fR... \fB[\fR\(miv \fIassignment\fB]\fR...
+     \fB[\fIargument\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR awk
+utility shall execute programs written in the
+.IR awk
+programming language, which is specialized for textual data
+manipulation. An
+.IR awk
+program is a sequence of patterns and corresponding actions. When
+input is read that matches a pattern, the action associated with that
+pattern is carried out.
+.P
+Input shall be interpreted as a sequence of records. By default, a
+record is a line, less its terminating
+<newline>,
+but this can be changed by using the
+.BR RS
+built-in variable. Each record of input shall be matched in turn
+against each pattern in the program. For each pattern matched, the
+associated action shall be executed.
+.P
+The
+.IR awk
+utility shall interpret each input record as a sequence of fields
+where, by default, a field is a string of non-\c
+<blank>
+non-\c
+<newline>
+characters. This default
+<blank>
+and
+<newline>
+field delimiter can be changed by using the
+.BR FS
+built-in variable or the
+.BR \(miF
+.IR sepstring
+option. The
+.IR awk
+utility shall denote the first field in a record $1, the second $2, and
+so on. The symbol $0 shall refer to the entire record; setting any
+other field causes the re-evaluation of $0. Assigning to $0 shall reset
+the values of all other fields and the
+.BR NF
+built-in variable.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR awk
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(miF\ \fIsepstring\fR" 10
+Define the input field separator. This option shall be equivalent to:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+-v FS=\fIsepstring
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+except that if
+.BR \(miF
+.IR sepstring
+and
+.BR \(miv
+.IR \fRFS=\fPsepstring\fR
+are both used, it is unspecified whether the
+.BR FS
+assignment resulting from
+.BR \(miF
+.IR sepstring
+is processed in command line order or is processed after the last
+.BR \(miv
+.IR \fRFS=\fPsepstring\fR .
+See the description of the
+.BR FS
+built-in variable, and how it is used, in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION
+section.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mif\ \fIprogfile\fR" 10
+Specify the pathname of the file
+.IR progfile
+containing an
+.IR awk
+program. A pathname of
+.BR '\(mi' 
+shall denote the standard input. If multiple instances of this option
+are specified, the concatenation of the files specified as
+.IR progfile
+in the order specified shall be the
+.IR awk
+program. The
+.IR awk
+program can alternatively be specified in the command line as a single
+argument.
+.IP "\fB\(miv\ \fIassignment\fR" 10
+.br
+The application shall ensure that the
+.IR assignment
+argument is in the same form as an
+.IR assignment
+operand. The specified variable assignment shall occur prior to
+executing the
+.IR awk
+program, including the actions associated with
+.BR BEGIN
+patterns (if any). Multiple occurrences of this option can be
+specified.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIprogram\fR" 10
+If no
+.BR \(mif
+option is specified, the first operand to
+.IR awk
+shall be the text of the
+.IR awk
+program. The application shall supply the
+.IR program
+operand as a single argument to
+.IR awk .
+If the text does not end in a
+<newline>,
+.IR awk
+shall interpret the text as if it did.
+.IP "\fIargument\fR" 10
+Either of the following two types of
+.IR argument
+can be intermixed:
+.RS 10 
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file that contains the input to be read, which is
+matched against the set of patterns in the program. If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, or if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be used.
+.IP "\fIassignment\fR" 10
+An operand that begins with an
+<underscore>
+or alphabetic character from the portable character set (see the table
+in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set"),
+followed by a sequence of underscores, digits, and alphabetics from the
+portable character set, followed by the
+.BR '=' 
+character, shall specify a variable assignment rather than a pathname.
+The characters before the
+.BR '=' 
+represent the name of an
+.IR awk
+variable; if that name is an
+.IR awk
+reserved word (see
+.IR "Grammar")
+the behavior is undefined. The characters following the
+<equals-sign>
+shall be interpreted as if they appeared in the
+.IR awk
+program preceded and followed by a double-quote (\c
+.BR '\&"' )
+character, as a
+.BR STRING
+token (see
+.IR "Grammar"),
+except that if the last character is an unescaped
+<backslash>,
+it shall be interpreted as a literal
+<backslash>
+rather than as the first character of the sequence
+.BR \(dq\e"\(dq .
+The variable shall be assigned the value of that
+.BR STRING
+token and, if appropriate, shall be considered a
+.IR "numeric string"
+(see
+.IR "Expressions in awk"),
+the variable shall also be assigned its numeric value. Each such
+variable assignment shall occur just prior to the processing of the
+following
+.IR file ,
+if any. Thus, an assignment before the first
+.IR file
+argument shall be executed after the
+.BR BEGIN
+actions (if any), while an assignment after the last
+.IR file
+argument shall occur before the
+.BR END
+actions (if any). If there are no
+.IR file
+arguments, assignments shall be executed before processing the standard
+input.
+.RE
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used only if no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, or if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+or if a
+.IR progfile
+option-argument is
+.BR '\(mi' ;
+see the INPUT FILES section. If the
+.IR awk
+program contains no actions and no patterns, but is otherwise a valid
+.IR awk
+program, standard input and any
+.IR file
+operands shall not be read and
+.IR awk
+shall exit with a return status of zero.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+Input files to the
+.IR awk
+program from any of the following sources shall be text files:
+.IP " *" 4
+Any
+.IR file
+operands or their equivalents, achieved by modifying the
+.IR awk
+variables
+.BR ARGV
+and
+.BR ARGC
+.IP " *" 4
+Standard input in the absence of any
+.IR file
+operands
+.IP " *" 4
+Arguments to the
+.BR getline
+function
+.P
+Whether the variable
+.BR RS
+is set to a value other than a
+<newline>
+or not, for these files, implementations shall support records
+terminated with the specified separator up to
+{LINE_MAX}
+bytes and may support longer records.
+.P
+If
+.BR \(mif
+.IR progfile
+is specified, the application shall ensure that the files named by each
+of the
+.IR progfile
+option-arguments are text files and their concatenation, in the same
+order as they appear in the arguments, is an
+.IR awk
+program.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR awk :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, equivalence classes,
+and multi-character collating elements within regular expressions and
+in comparisons of string values.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files), the behavior of
+character classes within regular expressions, the identification of
+characters as letters, and the mapping of uppercase and lowercase
+characters for the
+.BR toupper
+and
+.BR tolower
+functions.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILC_NUMERIC\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the radix character used when interpreting numeric input,
+performing conversions between numeric and string values, and
+formatting numeric output. Regardless of locale, the
+<period>
+character (the decimal-point character of the POSIX locale) is the
+decimal-point character recognized in processing
+.IR awk
+programs (including assignments in command line arguments).
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fIPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the search path when looking for commands executed by
+\fIsystem\fR(\fIexpr\fR), or input and output pipes; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables".
+.P
+In addition, all environment variables shall be visible via the
+.IR awk
+variable
+.BR ENVIRON .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The nature of the output files depends on the
+.IR awk
+program.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+The nature of the output files depends on the
+.IR awk
+program.
+.br
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+.SS "Overall Program Structure"
+.P
+An
+.IR awk
+program is composed of pairs of the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIpattern\fR { \fIaction\fR }
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Either the pattern or the action (including the enclosing brace
+characters) can be omitted.
+.P
+A missing pattern shall match any record of input, and a missing action
+shall be equivalent to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+{ print }
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Execution of the
+.IR awk
+program shall start by first executing the actions associated with all
+.BR BEGIN
+patterns in the order they occur in the program. Then each
+.IR file
+operand (or standard input if no files were specified) shall be
+processed in turn by reading data from the file until a record
+separator is seen (\c
+<newline>
+by default). Before the first reference to a field in the record is
+evaluated, the record shall be split into fields, according to the
+rules in
+.IR "Regular Expressions",
+using the value of
+.BR FS
+that was current at the time the record was read. Each pattern in the
+program then shall be evaluated in the order of occurrence, and the
+action associated with each pattern that matches the current record
+executed. The action for a matching pattern shall be executed before
+evaluating subsequent patterns. Finally, the actions associated with
+all
+.BR END
+patterns shall be executed in the order they occur in the program.
+.SS "Expressions in awk"
+.P
+Expressions describe computations used in
+.IR patterns
+and
+.IR actions .
+In the following table, valid expression operations are given in groups
+from highest precedence first to lowest precedence last, with
+equal-precedence operators grouped between horizontal lines. In
+expression evaluation, where the grammar is formally ambiguous, higher
+precedence operators shall be evaluated before lower precedence
+operators. In this table
+.IR expr ,
+.IR expr1 ,
+.IR expr2 ,
+and
+.IR expr3
+represent any expression, while lvalue represents any entity that can
+be assigned to (that is, on the left side of an assignment operator).
+The precise syntax of expressions is given in
+.IR "Grammar".
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable 4-1: Expressions in Decreasing Precedence in \fIawk\fP\fR
+.TS
+box tab(@) center;
+cB | cB | cB | cB
+l1f5 | l1 | l1 | l.
+Syntax@Name@Type of Result@Associativity
+_
+( \fIexpr\fP )@Grouping@Type of \fIexpr\fP@N/A
+_
+$\fIexpr\fP@Field reference@String@N/A
+_
+lvalue ++@Post-increment@Numeric@N/A
+lvalue \(mi\|\(mi@Post-decrement@Numeric@N/A
+_
+++ lvalue@Pre-increment@Numeric@N/A
+\(mi\|\(mi lvalue@Pre-decrement@Numeric@N/A
+_
+\fIexpr\fP ^ \fIexpr\fP@Exponentiation@Numeric@Right
+_
+! \fIexpr\fP@Logical not@Numeric@N/A
++ \fIexpr\fP@Unary plus@Numeric@N/A
+\(mi \fIexpr\fP@Unary minus@Numeric@N/A
+_
+\fIexpr\fP * \fIexpr\fP@Multiplication@Numeric@Left
+\fIexpr\fP / \fIexpr\fP@Division@Numeric@Left
+\fIexpr\fP % \fIexpr\fP@Modulus@Numeric@Left
+_
+\fIexpr\fP + \fIexpr\fP@Addition@Numeric@Left
+\fIexpr\fP \(mi \fIexpr\fP@Subtraction@Numeric@Left
+_
+\fIexpr\fP \fIexpr\fP@String concatenation@String@Left
+_
+\fIexpr\fP < \fIexpr\fP@Less than@Numeric@None
+\fIexpr\fP <= \fIexpr\fP@Less than or equal to@Numeric@None
+\fIexpr\fP != \fIexpr\fP@Not equal to@Numeric@None
+\fIexpr\fP == \fIexpr\fP@Equal to@Numeric@None
+\fIexpr\fP > \fIexpr\fP@Greater than@Numeric@None
+\fIexpr\fP >= \fIexpr\fP@Greater than or equal to@Numeric@None
+_
+\fIexpr\fP ~ \fIexpr\fP@ERE match@Numeric@None
+\fIexpr\fP !~ \fIexpr\fP@ERE non-match@Numeric@None
+_
+\fIexpr\fP in array@Array membership@Numeric@Left
+( \fIindex\fP ) in \fIarray\fP@Multi-dimension array@Numeric@Left
+@membership
+_
+\fIexpr\fP && \fIexpr\fP@Logical AND@Numeric@Left
+_
+\fIexpr\fP || \fIexpr\fP@Logical OR@Numeric@Left
+_
+\fIexpr1\fP ? \fIexpr2\fP : \fIexpr3\fP@Conditional expression@Type of selected@Right
+@@\fIexpr2\fP or \fIexpr3\fP
+_
+lvalue ^= \fIexpr\fP@Exponentiation assignment@Numeric@Right
+lvalue %= \fIexpr\fP@Modulus assignment@Numeric@Right
+lvalue *= \fIexpr\fP@Multiplication assignment@Numeric@Right
+lvalue /= \fIexpr\fP@Division assignment@Numeric@Right
+lvalue += \fIexpr\fP@Addition assignment@Numeric@Right
+lvalue \(mi= \fIexpr\fP@Subtraction assignment@Numeric@Right
+lvalue = \fIexpr\fP@Assignment@Type of \fIexpr\fP@Right
+.TE
+.P
+Each expression shall have either a string value, a numeric value, or
+both. Except as stated for specific contexts, the value of an expression
+shall be implicitly converted to the type needed for the context in which
+it is used. A string value shall be converted to a numeric value either by
+the equivalent of the following calls to functions defined by the ISO\ C standard:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+setlocale(LC_NUMERIC, "");
+\fInumeric_value\fR = atof(\fIstring_value\fR);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+or by converting the initial portion of the string to type
+.BR double
+representation as follows:
+.sp
+.RS
+The input string is decomposed into two parts: an initial, possibly empty,
+sequence of white-space characters (as specified by
+\fIisspace\fR())
+and a subject sequence interpreted as a floating-point constant.
+.P
+The expected form of the subject sequence is an optional
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+sign, then a non-empty sequence of digits optionally containing a
+<period>,
+then an optional exponent part. An exponent part consists of
+.BR 'e' 
+or
+.BR 'E' ,
+followed by an optional sign, followed by one or more decimal digits.
+.P
+The sequence starting with the first digit or the
+<period>
+(whichever occurs first) is interpreted as a floating constant of the
+C language, and if neither an exponent part nor a
+<period>
+appears, a
+<period>
+is assumed to follow the last digit in the string. If the subject
+sequence begins with a minus-sign, the value resulting from the conversion
+is negated.
+.RE
+.P
+A numeric value that is exactly equal to the value of an integer (see
+.IR "Section 1.1.2" ", " "Concepts Derived from the ISO C Standard")
+shall be converted to a string by the equivalent of a call to the
+.BR sprintf
+function (see
+.IR "String Functions")
+with the string
+.BR \(dq%d\(dq 
+as the
+.IR fmt
+argument and the numeric value being converted as the first and only
+.IR expr
+argument. Any other numeric value shall be converted to a string by the
+equivalent of a call to the
+.BR sprintf
+function with the value of the variable
+.BR CONVFMT
+as the
+.IR fmt
+argument and the numeric value being converted as the first and only
+.IR expr
+argument. The result of the conversion is unspecified if the value of
+.BR CONVFMT
+is not a floating-point format specification. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 specifies no
+explicit conversions between numbers and strings. An application can
+force an expression to be treated as a number by adding zero to it, or
+can force it to be treated as a string by concatenating the null string
+(\c
+.BR \(dq\^\(dq )
+to it.
+.P
+A string value shall be considered a
+.IR "numeric string"
+if it comes from one of the following:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Field variables
+.IP " 2." 4
+Input from the
+\fIgetline\fR()
+function
+.IP " 3." 4
+.BR FILENAME
+.IP " 4." 4
+.BR ARGV
+array elements
+.IP " 5." 4
+.BR ENVIRON
+array elements
+.IP " 6." 4
+Array elements created by the
+\fIsplit\fR()
+function
+.IP " 7." 4
+A command line variable assignment
+.IP " 8." 4
+Variable assignment from another numeric string variable
+.P
+and an implementation-dependent condition corresponding to either
+case (a) or (b) below is met.
+.IP " a." 4
+After the equivalent of the following calls to functions defined by
+the ISO\ C standard,
+.IR string_value_end
+would differ from
+.IR string_value ,
+and any characters before the terminating null character in
+.IR string_value_end
+would be
+<blank>
+characters:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+char *string_value_end;
+setlocale(LC_NUMERIC, "");
+numeric_value = strtod (string_value, &string_value_end);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " b." 4
+After all the following conversions have been applied, the resulting
+string would lexically be recognized as a
+.BR NUMBER
+token as described by the lexical conventions in
+.IR "Grammar":
+.RS 4 
+.IP -- 4
+All leading and trailing
+<blank>
+characters are discarded.
+.IP -- 4
+If the first non-\c
+<blank>
+is
+.BR '\(pl' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+it is discarded.
+.IP -- 4
+Each occurrence of the decimal point character from the current locale
+is changed to a
+<period>.
+.RE
+In case (a) the numeric value of the
+.IR "numeric string"
+shall be the value that would be returned by the
+\fIstrtod\fR()
+call. In case (b) if the first non-\c
+<blank>
+is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the numeric value of the
+.IR "numeric string"
+shall be the negation of the numeric value of the recognized
+.BR NUMBER
+token; otherwise, the numeric value of the
+.IR "numeric string"
+shall be the numeric value of the recognized
+.BR NUMBER
+token. Whether or not a string is a
+.IR "numeric string"
+shall be relevant only in contexts where that term is used in this
+section.
+.P
+When an expression is used in a Boolean context, if it has a numeric
+value, a value of zero shall be treated as false and any other value
+shall be treated as true. Otherwise, a string value of the null string
+shall be treated as false and any other value shall be treated as true.
+A Boolean context shall be one of the following:
+.IP " *" 4
+The first subexpression of a conditional expression
+.IP " *" 4
+An expression operated on by logical NOT, logical AND, or logical OR
+.IP " *" 4
+The second expression of a
+.BR for
+statement
+.IP " *" 4
+The expression of an
+.BR if
+statement
+.IP " *" 4
+The expression of the
+.BR while
+clause in either a
+.BR while
+or
+.BR do .\|.\|.\c
+.BR while
+statement
+.IP " *" 4
+An expression used as a pattern (as in Overall Program Structure)
+.P
+All arithmetic shall follow the semantics of floating-point arithmetic as
+specified by the ISO\ C standard (see
+.IR "Section 1.1.2" ", " "Concepts Derived from the ISO C Standard").
+.P
+The value of the expression:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIexpr1\fR ^ \fIexpr2\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+shall be equivalent to the value returned by the ISO\ C standard function call:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fRpow(\fIexpr1\fR, \fIexpr2\fR)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The expression:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+lvalue ^= \fIexpr\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+shall be equivalent to the ISO\ C standard expression:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+lvalue = pow(lvalue, \fIexpr\fR)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+except that lvalue shall be evaluated only once. The value of the
+expression:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIexpr1\fR % \fIexpr2\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+shall be equivalent to the value returned by the ISO\ C standard function call:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fmod(\fIexpr1\fR, \fIexpr2\fR)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The expression:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+lvalue %= \fIexpr\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+shall be equivalent to the ISO\ C standard expression:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+lvalue = fmod(lvalue, \fIexpr\fR)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+except that lvalue shall be evaluated only once.
+.P
+Variables and fields shall be set by the assignment statement:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+lvalue = \fIexpression\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and the type of
+.IR expression
+shall determine the resulting variable type. The assignment includes
+the arithmetic assignments (\c
+.BR \(dq+=\(dq ,
+.BR \(dq\(mi=\(dq ,
+.BR \(dq*=\(dq ,
+.BR \(dq/=\(dq ,
+.BR \(dq%=\(dq ,
+.BR \(dq^=\(dq ,
+.BR \(dq++\(dq ,
+.BR \(dq\(mi\|\(mi\(dq )
+all of which shall produce a numeric result. The left-hand side of an
+assignment and the target of increment and decrement operators can be
+one of a variable, an array with index, or a field selector.
+.P
+The
+.IR awk
+language supplies arrays that are used for storing numbers or strings.
+Arrays need not be declared. They shall initially be empty, and their
+sizes shall change dynamically. The subscripts, or element identifiers,
+are strings, providing a type of associative array capability. An array
+name followed by a subscript within square brackets can be used as an
+lvalue and thus as an expression, as described in the grammar; see
+.IR "Grammar".
+Unsubscripted array names can be used in only the following contexts:
+.IP " *" 4
+A parameter in a function definition or function call
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+.BR NAME
+token following any use of the keyword
+.BR in
+as specified in the grammar (see
+.IR "Grammar");
+if the name used in this context is not an array name, the behavior is
+undefined
+.P
+A valid array
+.IR index
+shall consist of one or more
+<comma>-separated
+expressions, similar to the way in which multi-dimensional arrays are
+indexed in some programming languages. Because
+.IR awk
+arrays are really one-dimensional, such a
+<comma>-separated
+list shall be converted to a single string by concatenating the string
+values of the separate expressions, each separated from the other by
+the value of the
+.BR SUBSEP
+variable. Thus, the following two index operations shall be
+equivalent:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIvar\fB[\fIexpr1\fR, \fIexpr2\fR, ... \fIexprn\fB]
+.P
+\fIvar\fB[\fIexpr1\fR SUBSEP \fIexpr2\fR SUBSEP ... \fRSUBSEP \fIexprn\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The application shall ensure that a multi-dimensioned
+.IR index
+used with the
+.BR in
+operator is parenthesized. The
+.BR in
+operator, which tests for the existence of a particular array element,
+shall not cause that element to exist. Any other reference to a
+nonexistent array element shall automatically create it.
+.P
+Comparisons (with the
+.BR '<' ,
+.BR \(dq<=\(dq ,
+.BR \(dq!=\(dq ,
+.BR \(dq==\(dq ,
+.BR '>' ,
+and
+.BR \(dq>=\(dq 
+operators) shall be made numerically if both operands are numeric, if
+one is numeric and the other has a string value that is a numeric
+string, or if one is numeric and the other has the uninitialized value.
+Otherwise, operands shall be converted to strings as required and a
+string comparison shall be made using the locale-specific collation
+sequence. The value of the comparison expression shall be 1 if the
+relation is true, or 0 if the relation is false.
+.SS "Variables and Special Variables"
+.P
+Variables can be used in an
+.IR awk
+program by referencing them. With the exception of function parameters
+(see
+.IR "User-Defined Functions"),
+they are not explicitly declared. Function parameter names shall be
+local to the function; all other variable names shall be global. The
+same name shall not be used as both a function parameter name and as
+the name of a function or a special
+.IR awk
+variable. The same name shall not be used both as a variable name with
+global scope and as the name of a function. The same name shall not be
+used within the same scope both as a scalar variable and as an array.
+Uninitialized variables, including scalar variables, array elements,
+and field variables, shall have an uninitialized value. An
+uninitialized value shall have both a numeric value of zero and a
+string value of the empty string. Evaluation of variables with an
+uninitialized value, to either string or numeric, shall be determined
+by the context in which they are used.
+.P
+Field variables shall be designated by a
+.BR '$' 
+followed by a number or numerical expression. The effect of the field
+number
+.IR expression
+evaluating to anything other than a non-negative integer is
+unspecified; uninitialized variables or string values need not be
+converted to numeric values in this context. New field variables can be
+created by assigning a value to them. References to nonexistent fields
+(that is, fields after $\fBNF\fP), shall evaluate to the uninitialized
+value. Such references shall not create new fields. However, assigning
+to a nonexistent field (for example, $(\fBNF\fP+2)=5) shall increase
+the value of
+.BR NF ;
+create any intervening fields with the uninitialized value; and cause
+the value of $0 to be recomputed, with the fields being separated by
+the value of
+.BR OFS .
+Each field variable shall have a string value or an uninitialized value
+when created. Field variables shall have the uninitialized value when
+created from $0 using
+.BR FS
+and the variable does not contain any characters. If appropriate, the
+field variable shall be considered a numeric string (see
+.IR "Expressions in awk").
+.P
+Implementations shall support the following other special variables
+that are set by
+.IR awk :
+.IP "\fBARGC\fR" 10
+The number of elements in the
+.BR ARGV
+array.
+.IP "\fBARGV\fR" 10
+An array of command line arguments, excluding options and the
+.IR program
+argument, numbered from zero to
+.BR ARGC \(mi1.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The arguments in
+.BR ARGV
+can be modified or added to;
+.BR ARGC
+can be altered. As each input file ends,
+.IR awk
+shall treat the next non-null element of
+.BR ARGV ,
+up to the current value of
+.BR ARGC \(mi1,
+inclusive, as the name of the next input file. Thus, setting an element
+of
+.BR ARGV
+to null means that it shall not be treated as an input file. The name
+.BR '\(mi' 
+indicates the standard input. If an argument matches the format of an
+.IR assignment
+operand, this argument shall be treated as an
+.IR assignment
+rather than a
+.IR file
+argument.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBCONVFMT\fR" 10
+The
+.BR printf
+format for converting numbers to strings (except for output statements,
+where
+.BR OFMT
+is used);
+.BR \(dq%.6g\(dq 
+by default.
+.IP "\fBENVIRON\fR" 10
+An array representing the value of the environment, as described in the
+.IR exec
+functions defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. The indices of the array shall be
+strings consisting of the names of the environment variables, and the
+value of each array element shall be a string consisting of the value
+of that variable. If appropriate, the environment variable shall be
+considered a
+.IR "numeric string"
+(see
+.IR "Expressions in awk");
+the array element shall also have its numeric value.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+In all cases where the behavior of
+.IR awk
+is affected by environment variables (including the environment of any
+commands that
+.IR awk
+executes via the
+.BR system
+function or via pipeline redirections with the
+.BR print
+statement, the
+.BR printf
+statement, or the
+.BR getline
+function), the environment used shall be the environment at the time
+.IR awk
+began executing; it is implementation-defined whether any
+modification of
+.BR ENVIRON
+affects this environment.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBFILENAME\fR" 10
+A pathname of the current input file. Inside a
+.BR BEGIN
+action the value is undefined. Inside an
+.BR END
+action the value shall be the name of the last input file processed.
+.IP "\fBFNR\fR" 10
+The ordinal number of the current record in the current file. Inside a
+.BR BEGIN
+action the value shall be zero. Inside an
+.BR END
+action the value shall be the number of the last record processed in
+the last file processed.
+.IP "\fBFS\fR" 10
+Input field separator regular expression; a
+<space>
+by default.
+.IP "\fBNF\fR" 10
+The number of fields in the current record. Inside a
+.BR BEGIN
+action, the use of
+.BR NF
+is undefined unless a
+.BR getline
+function without a
+.IR var
+argument is executed previously. Inside an
+.BR END
+action,
+.BR NF
+shall retain the value it had for the last record read, unless a
+subsequent, redirected,
+.BR getline
+function without a
+.IR var
+argument is performed prior to entering the
+.BR END
+action.
+.IP "\fBNR\fR" 10
+The ordinal number of the current record from the start of input.
+Inside a
+.BR BEGIN
+action the value shall be zero. Inside an
+.BR END
+action the value shall be the number of the last record processed.
+.IP "\fBOFMT\fR" 10
+The
+.BR printf
+format for converting numbers to strings in output statements (see
+.IR "Output Statements");
+.BR \(dq%.6g\(dq 
+by default. The result of the conversion is unspecified if the value of
+.BR OFMT
+is not a floating-point format specification.
+.IP "\fBOFS\fR" 10
+The
+.BR print
+statement output field separator;
+<space>
+by default.
+.IP "\fBORS\fR" 10
+The
+.BR print
+statement output record separator; a
+<newline>
+by default.
+.IP "\fBRLENGTH\fR" 10
+The length of the string matched by the
+.BR match
+function.
+.IP "\fBRS\fR" 10
+The first character of the string value of
+.BR RS
+shall be the input record separator; a
+<newline>
+by default. If
+.BR RS
+contains more than one character, the results are unspecified. If
+.BR RS
+is null, then records are separated by sequences consisting of a
+<newline>
+plus one or more blank lines, leading or trailing blank lines shall not
+result in empty records at the beginning or end of the input, and a
+<newline>
+shall always be a field separator, no matter what the value of
+.BR FS
+is.
+.IP "\fBRSTART\fR" 10
+The starting position of the string matched by the
+.BR match
+function, numbering from 1. This shall always be equivalent to the
+return value of the
+.BR match
+function.
+.IP "\fBSUBSEP\fR" 10
+The subscript separator string for multi-dimensional arrays; the
+default value is implementation-defined.
+.SS "Regular Expressions"
+.P
+The
+.IR awk
+utility shall make use of the extended regular expression notation
+(see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 9.4" ", " "Extended Regular Expressions")
+except that it shall allow the use of C-language conventions
+for escaping special characters within the EREs, as specified in the
+table in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 5" ", " "File Format Notation"
+(\c
+.BR '\e\e' ,
+.BR '\ea' ,
+.BR '\eb' ,
+.BR '\ef' ,
+.BR '\en' ,
+.BR '\er' ,
+.BR '\et' ,
+.BR '\ev' )
+and the following table; these escape sequences shall be recognized
+both inside and outside bracket expressions. Note that records need not
+be separated by
+<newline>
+characters and string constants can contain
+<newline>
+characters, so even the
+.BR \(dq\en\(dq 
+sequence is valid in
+.IR awk
+EREs. Using a
+<slash>
+character within an ERE requires the escaping shown in the following
+table.
+.br
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable 4-2: Escape Sequences in \fIawk\fP\fR
+.ad l
+.TS
+center tab(@) box;
+cB | cB | cB
+cB | cB | cB
+lf5 | lw(34) | lw(34).
+Escape
+Sequence@Description@Meaning
+_
+\e"@T{
+<backslash> <quotation-mark>
+T}@T{
+<quotation-mark> character
+T}
+_
+\e/@T{
+<backslash> <slash>
+T}@T{
+<slash> character
+T}
+_
+\eddd@T{
+A
+<backslash>
+character followed by the longest sequence of one, two, or
+three octal-digit characters (01234567). If all of the digits are 0
+(that is, representation of the NUL character), the behavior is
+undefined.
+T}@T{
+The character whose encoding is represented by the one, two, or
+three-digit octal integer. Multi-byte characters require
+multiple, concatenated escape sequences of this type, including the
+leading
+<backslash>
+for each byte.
+T}
+_
+\ec@T{
+A
+<backslash>
+character followed by any character not described in this
+table or in the table in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 5" ", " "File Format Notation"
+(\c
+.BR '\e\e' ,
+.BR '\ea' ,
+.BR '\eb' ,
+.BR '\ef' ,
+.BR '\en' ,
+.BR '\er' ,
+.BR '\et' ,
+.BR '\ev' ).
+T}@Undefined
+.TE
+.ad b
+.P
+A regular expression can be matched against a specific field or string
+by using one of the two regular expression matching operators,
+.BR '~' 
+and
+.BR \(dq!~\(dq .
+These operators shall interpret their right-hand operand as a regular
+expression and their left-hand operand as a string. If the regular
+expression matches the string, the
+.BR '~' 
+expression shall evaluate to a value of 1, and the
+.BR \(dq!~\(dq 
+expression shall evaluate to a value of 0. (The regular expression
+matching operation is as defined by the term matched in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 9.1" ", " "Regular Expression Definitions",
+where a match occurs on any part of the string unless the regular
+expression is limited with the
+<circumflex>
+or
+<dollar-sign>
+special characters.) If the regular expression does not match the
+string, the
+.BR '~' 
+expression shall evaluate to a value of 0, and the
+.BR \(dq!~\(dq 
+expression shall evaluate to a value of 1. If the right-hand operand is
+any expression other than the lexical token
+.BR ERE ,
+the string value of the expression shall be interpreted as an extended
+regular expression, including the escape conventions described above.
+Note that these same escape conventions shall also be applied in
+determining the value of a string literal (the lexical token
+.BR STRING ),
+and thus shall be applied a second time when a string literal is used
+in this context.
+.P
+When an
+.BR ERE
+token appears as an expression in any context other than as the
+right-hand of the
+.BR '~' 
+or
+.BR \(dq!~\(dq 
+operator or as one of the built-in function arguments described below,
+the value of the resulting expression shall be the equivalent of:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+$0  " "  /\fIere\fR/
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR ere
+argument to the
+.BR gsub ,
+.BR match ,
+.BR sub
+functions, and the
+.IR fs
+argument to the
+.BR split
+function (see
+.IR "String Functions")
+shall be interpreted as extended regular expressions. These can be
+either
+.BR ERE
+tokens or arbitrary expressions, and shall be interpreted in the same
+manner as the right-hand side of the
+.BR '~' 
+or
+.BR \(dq!~\(dq 
+operator.
+.P
+An extended regular expression can be used to separate fields by assigning
+a string containing the expression to the built-in variable
+.BR FS ,
+either directly or as a consequence of using the
+.BR \(miF
+.IR sepstring
+option.
+The default value of the
+.BR FS
+variable shall be a single
+<space>.
+The following describes
+.BR FS
+behavior:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If
+.BR FS
+is a null string, the behavior is unspecified.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If
+.BR FS
+is a single character:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+If
+.BR FS
+is
+<space>,
+skip leading and trailing
+<blank>
+and
+<newline>
+characters; fields shall be delimited by sets of one or more
+<blank>
+or
+<newline>
+characters.
+.IP " b." 4
+Otherwise, if
+.BR FS
+is any other character
+.IR c ,
+fields shall be delimited by each single occurrence of
+.IR c .
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+Otherwise, the string value of
+.BR FS
+shall be considered to be an extended regular expression. Each
+occurrence of a sequence matching the extended regular expression shall
+delimit fields.
+.P
+Except for the
+.BR '~' 
+and
+.BR \(dq!~\(dq 
+operators, and in the
+.BR gsub ,
+.BR match ,
+.BR split ,
+and
+.BR sub
+built-in functions, ERE matching shall be based on input records; that
+is, record separator characters (the first character of the value of
+the variable
+.BR RS ,
+<newline>
+by default) cannot be embedded in the expression, and no expression
+shall match the record separator character. If the record separator is
+not
+<newline>,
+<newline>
+characters embedded in the expression can be matched. For the
+.BR '~' 
+and
+.BR \(dq!~\(dq 
+operators, and in those four built-in functions, ERE matching shall be
+based on text strings; that is, any character (including
+<newline>
+and the record separator) can be embedded in the pattern, and an
+appropriate pattern shall match any character. However, in all
+.IR awk
+ERE matching, the use of one or more NUL characters in the pattern,
+input record, or text string produces undefined results.
+.SS "Patterns"
+.P
+A
+.IR pattern
+is any valid
+.IR expression ,
+a range specified by two expressions separated by a comma, or one of the
+two special patterns
+.BR BEGIN
+or
+.BR END .
+.SS "Special Patterns"
+.P
+The
+.IR awk
+utility shall recognize two special patterns,
+.BR BEGIN
+and
+.BR END .
+Each
+.BR BEGIN
+pattern shall be matched once and its associated action executed before
+the first record of input is read\(emexcept possibly by use of the
+.BR getline
+function (see
+.IR "Input/Output and General Functions")
+in a prior
+.BR BEGIN
+action\(emand before command line assignment is done. Each
+.BR END
+pattern shall be matched once and its associated action executed after
+the last record of input has been read. These two patterns shall have
+associated actions.
+.P
+.BR BEGIN
+and
+.BR END
+shall not combine with other patterns. Multiple
+.BR BEGIN
+and
+.BR END
+patterns shall be allowed. The actions associated with the
+.BR BEGIN
+patterns shall be executed in the order specified in the program, as
+are the
+.BR END
+actions. An
+.BR END
+pattern can precede a
+.BR BEGIN
+pattern in a program.
+.P
+If an
+.IR awk
+program consists of only actions with the pattern
+.BR BEGIN ,
+and the
+.BR BEGIN
+action contains no
+.BR getline
+function,
+.IR awk
+shall exit without reading its input when the last statement in the
+last
+.BR BEGIN
+action is executed. If an
+.IR awk
+program consists of only actions with the pattern
+.BR END
+or only actions with the patterns
+.BR BEGIN
+and
+.BR END ,
+the input shall be read before the statements in the
+.BR END
+actions are executed.
+.SS "Expression Patterns"
+.P
+An expression pattern shall be evaluated as if it were an expression in
+a Boolean context. If the result is true, the pattern shall be
+considered to match, and the associated action (if any) shall be
+executed. If the result is false, the action shall not be executed.
+.SS "Pattern Ranges"
+.P
+A pattern range consists of two expressions separated by a comma; in
+this case, the action shall be performed for all records between a
+match of the first expression and the following match of the second
+expression, inclusive. At this point, the pattern range can be repeated
+starting at input records subsequent to the end of the matched range.
+.SS "Actions"
+.P
+An action is a sequence of statements as shown in the grammar in
+.IR "Grammar".
+Any single statement can be replaced by a statement list enclosed in
+curly braces. The application shall ensure that statements in a
+statement list are separated by
+<newline>
+or
+<semicolon>
+characters. Statements in a statement list shall be executed sequentially
+in the order that they appear.
+.P
+The
+.IR expression
+acting as the conditional in an
+.BR if
+statement shall be evaluated and if it is non-zero or non-null, the
+following statement shall be executed; otherwise, if
+.BR else
+is present, the statement following the
+.BR else
+shall be executed.
+.P
+The
+.BR if ,
+.BR while ,
+.BR do .\|.\|.\c
+.BR while ,
+.BR for ,
+.BR break ,
+and
+.BR continue
+statements are based on the ISO\ C standard (see
+.IR "Section 1.1.2" ", " "Concepts Derived from the ISO C Standard"),
+except that the Boolean expressions shall be treated as described in
+.IR "Expressions in awk",
+and except in the case of:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+for (\fIvariable\fR in \fIarray\fR)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+which shall iterate, assigning each
+.IR index
+of
+.IR array
+to
+.IR variable
+in an unspecified order. The results of adding new elements to
+.IR array
+within such a
+.BR for
+loop are undefined. If a
+.BR break
+or
+.BR continue
+statement occurs outside of a loop, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The
+.BR delete
+statement shall remove an individual array element. Thus, the following
+code deletes an entire array:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+for (index in array)
+    delete array[index]
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR next
+statement shall cause all further processing of the current input
+record to be abandoned. The behavior is undefined if a
+.BR next
+statement appears or is invoked in a
+.BR BEGIN
+or
+.BR END
+action.
+.P
+The
+.BR exit
+statement shall invoke all
+.BR END
+actions in the order in which they occur in the program source and then
+terminate the program without reading further input. An
+.BR exit
+statement inside an
+.BR END
+action shall terminate the program without further execution of
+.BR END
+actions. If an expression is specified in an
+.BR exit
+statement, its numeric value shall be the exit status of
+.IR awk ,
+unless subsequent errors are encountered or a subsequent
+.BR exit
+statement with an expression is executed.
+.SS "Output Statements"
+.P
+Both
+.BR print
+and
+.BR printf
+statements shall write to standard output by default. The output shall
+be written to the location specified by
+.IR output_redirection
+if one is supplied, as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+> \fIexpression\fR
+>> \fIexpression\fR
+| \fIexpression\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In all cases, the
+.IR expression
+shall be evaluated to produce a string that is used as a pathname
+into which to write (for
+.BR '>' 
+or
+.BR \(dq>>\(dq )
+or as a command to be executed (for
+.BR '|' ).
+Using the first two forms, if the file of that name is not currently
+open, it shall be opened, creating it if necessary and using the first
+form, truncating the file. The output then shall be appended to the
+file. As long as the file remains open, subsequent calls in which
+.IR expression
+evaluates to the same string value shall simply append output to the
+file. The file remains open until the
+.BR close
+function (see
+.IR "Input/Output and General Functions")
+is called with an expression that evaluates to the same string value.
+.P
+The third form shall write output onto a stream piped to the input of a
+command. The stream shall be created if no stream is currently open
+with the value of
+.IR expression
+as its command name. The stream created shall be equivalent to one
+created by a call to the
+\fIpopen\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 with the value of
+.IR expression
+as the
+.IR command
+argument and a value of
+.IR w
+as the
+.IR mode
+argument. As long as the stream remains open, subsequent calls in which
+.IR expression
+evaluates to the same string value shall write output to the existing
+stream. The stream shall remain open until the
+.BR close
+function (see
+.IR "Input/Output and General Functions")
+is called with an expression that evaluates to the same string value.
+At that time, the stream shall be closed as if by a call to the
+\fIpclose\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+As described in detail by the grammar in
+.IR "Grammar",
+these output statements shall take a
+<comma>-separated
+list of
+.IR expression s
+referred to in the grammar by the non-terminal symbols
+.BR expr_list ,
+.BR print_expr_list ,
+or
+.BR print_expr_list_opt .
+This list is referred to here as the
+.IR "expression list" ,
+and each member is referred to as an
+.IR "expression argument" .
+.P
+The
+.BR print
+statement shall write the value of each expression argument onto the
+indicated output stream separated by the current output field separator
+(see variable
+.BR OFS
+above), and terminated by the output record separator (see variable
+.BR ORS
+above). All expression arguments shall be taken as strings, being
+converted if necessary; this conversion shall be as described in
+.IR "Expressions in awk",
+with the exception that the
+.BR printf
+format in
+.BR OFMT
+shall be used instead of the value in
+.BR CONVFMT .
+An empty expression list shall stand for the whole input record ($0).
+.P
+The
+.BR printf
+statement shall produce output based on a notation similar to the
+File Format Notation used to describe file formats in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 5" ", " "File Format Notation").
+Output shall be produced as specified with the first
+.IR expression
+argument as the string
+.IR format
+and subsequent
+.IR expression
+arguments as the strings
+.IR arg1
+to
+.IR argn ,
+inclusive, with the following exceptions:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The
+.IR format
+shall be an actual character string rather than a graphical
+representation. Therefore, it cannot contain empty character
+positions. The
+<space>
+in the
+.IR format
+string, in any context other than a
+.IR flag
+of a conversion specification, shall be treated as an ordinary
+character that is copied to the output.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the character set contains a
+.BR ' ' 
+character and that character appears in the
+.IR format
+string, it shall be treated as an ordinary character that is copied to
+the output.
+.IP " 3." 4
+The
+.IR "escape sequences"
+beginning with a
+<backslash>
+character shall be treated as sequences of ordinary characters that are
+copied to the output. Note that these same sequences shall be interpreted
+lexically by
+.IR awk
+when they appear in literal strings, but they shall not be treated
+specially by the
+.BR printf
+statement.
+.IP " 4." 4
+A
+.IR "field width"
+or
+.IR precision
+can be specified as the
+.BR '*' 
+character instead of a digit string. In this case the next argument
+from the expression list shall be fetched and its numeric value taken
+as the field width or precision.
+.IP " 5." 4
+The implementation shall not precede or follow output from the
+.BR d
+or
+.BR u
+conversion specifier characters with
+<blank>
+characters not specified by the
+.IR format
+string.
+.IP " 6." 4
+The implementation shall not precede output from the
+.BR o
+conversion specifier character with leading zeros not specified by the
+.IR format
+string.
+.IP " 7." 4
+For the
+.BR c
+conversion specifier character: if the argument has a numeric value, the
+character whose encoding is that value shall be output. If the value is
+zero or is not the encoding of any character in the character set, the
+behavior is undefined. If the argument does not have a numeric value,
+the first character of the string value shall be output; if the string
+does not contain any characters, the behavior is undefined.
+.IP " 8." 4
+For each conversion specification that consumes an argument, the next
+expression argument shall be evaluated. With the exception of the
+.BR c
+conversion specifier character, the value shall be converted (according
+to the rules specified in
+.IR "Expressions in awk")
+to the appropriate type for the conversion specification.
+.IP " 9." 4
+If there are insufficient expression arguments to satisfy all the
+conversion specifications in the
+.IR format
+string, the behavior is undefined.
+.IP 10. 4
+If any character sequence in the
+.IR format
+string begins with a
+.BR '%' 
+character, but does not form a valid conversion specification, the
+behavior is unspecified.
+.P
+Both
+.BR print
+and
+.BR printf
+can output at least
+{LINE_MAX}
+bytes.
+.SS "Functions"
+.P
+The
+.IR awk
+language has a variety of built-in functions: arithmetic, string,
+input/output, and general.
+.SS "Arithmetic Functions"
+.P
+The arithmetic functions, except for
+.BR int ,
+shall be based on the ISO\ C standard (see
+.IR "Section 1.1.2" ", " "Concepts Derived from the ISO C Standard").
+The behavior is undefined in cases where the ISO\ C standard specifies that an
+error be returned or that the behavior is undefined. Although the
+grammar (see
+.IR "Grammar")
+permits built-in functions to appear with no arguments or parentheses,
+unless the argument or parentheses are indicated as optional in the
+following list (by displaying them within the
+.BR \(dq[]\(dq 
+brackets), such use is undefined.
+.IP "\fBatan2\fR(\fIy\fR,\fIx\fR)" 10
+Return arctangent of \fIy\fP/\fIx\fR in radians in the range
+[\(mi\(*p,\(*p].
+.IP "\fBcos\fR(\fIx\fR)" 10
+Return cosine of \fIx\fP, where \fIx\fP is in radians.
+.IP "\fBsin\fR(\fIx\fR)" 10
+Return sine of \fIx\fP, where \fIx\fP is in radians.
+.IP "\fBexp\fR(\fIx\fR)" 10
+Return the exponential function of \fIx\fP.
+.IP "\fBlog\fR(\fIx\fR)" 10
+Return the natural logarithm of \fIx\fP.
+.IP "\fBsqrt\fR(\fIx\fR)" 10
+Return the square root of \fIx\fP.
+.IP "\fBint\fR(\fIx\fR)" 10
+Return the argument truncated to an integer. Truncation shall
+be toward 0 when \fIx\fP>0.
+.IP "\fBrand\fP(\|)" 10
+Return a random number \fIn\fP, such that 0\(<=\fIn\fP<1.
+.IP "\fBsrand\fR(\fB[\fIexpr\fB]\fR)" 10
+Set the seed value for
+.IR rand
+to
+.IR expr
+or use the time of day if
+.IR expr
+is omitted. The previous seed value shall be returned.
+.SS "String Functions"
+.P
+The string functions in the following list shall be supported.
+Although the grammar (see
+.IR "Grammar")
+permits built-in functions to appear with no arguments or parentheses,
+unless the argument or parentheses are indicated as optional in the
+following list (by displaying them within the
+.BR \(dq[]\(dq 
+brackets), such use is undefined.
+.IP "\fBgsub\fR(\fIere\fR,\ \fIrepl\fB[\fR,\ \fIin\fB]\fR)" 10
+.br
+Behave like
+.BR sub
+(see below), except that it shall replace all occurrences of the
+regular expression (like the
+.IR ed
+utility global substitute) in $0 or in the
+.IR in
+argument, when specified.
+.IP "\fBindex\fR(\fIs\fR,\ \fIt\fR)" 10
+Return the position, in characters, numbering from 1, in string
+.IR s
+where string
+.IR t
+first occurs, or zero if it does not occur at all.
+.IP "\fBlength[\fR(\fB[\fIs\fB]\fR)\fB]\fR" 10
+Return the length, in characters, of its argument taken as a string, or
+of the whole record, $0, if there is no argument.
+.IP "\fBmatch\fR(\fIs\fR,\ \fIere\fR)" 10
+Return the position, in characters, numbering from 1, in string
+.IR s
+where the extended regular expression
+.IR ere
+occurs, or zero if it does not occur at all. RSTART shall be set to the
+starting position (which is the same as the returned value), zero if no
+match is found; RLENGTH shall be set to the length of the matched
+string, \(mi1 if no match is found.
+.IP "\fBsplit\fR(\fIs\fR,\ \fIa\fB[\fR,\ \fIfs\ \fB]\fR)" 10
+.br
+Split the string
+.IR s
+into array elements
+.IR a [1],
+.IR a [2],
+\&.\|.\|.,
+.IR a [ n ],
+and return
+.IR n .
+All elements of the array shall be deleted before the split is
+performed. The separation shall be done with the ERE
+.IR fs
+or with the field separator
+.BR FS
+if
+.IR fs
+is not given. Each array element shall have a string value when created
+and, if appropriate, the array element shall be considered a numeric
+string (see
+.IR "Expressions in awk").
+The effect of a null string as the value of
+.IR fs
+is unspecified.
+.IP "\fBsprintf\fR(\fIfmt\fR,\ \fIexpr\fR,\ \fIexpr\fR,\ .\|.\|.)" 10
+.br
+Format the expressions according to the
+.BR printf
+format given by
+.IR fmt
+and return the resulting string.
+.IP "\fBsub(\fIere\fR,\ \fIrepl\fB[\fR,\ \fIin\ \fB]\fR)" 10
+.br
+Substitute the string
+.IR repl
+in place of the first instance of the extended regular expression
+.IR ERE
+in string
+.IR in
+and return the number of substitutions. An
+<ampersand>
+(\c
+.BR '&' )
+appearing in the string
+.IR repl
+shall be replaced by the string from
+.IR in
+that matches the ERE. An
+<ampersand>
+preceded with a
+<backslash>
+shall be interpreted as the literal
+<ampersand>
+character. An occurrence of two consecutive
+<backslash>
+characters shall be interpreted as just a single literal
+<backslash>
+character. Any other occurrence of a
+<backslash>
+(for example, preceding any other character) shall be treated as a
+literal
+<backslash>
+character. Note that if
+.IR repl
+is a string literal (the lexical token
+.BR STRING ;
+see
+.IR "Grammar"),
+the handling of the
+<ampersand>
+character occurs after any lexical processing, including any lexical
+<backslash>-escape
+sequence processing. If
+.IR in
+is specified and it is not an lvalue (see
+.IR "Expressions in awk"),
+the behavior is undefined. If
+.IR in
+is omitted,
+.IR awk
+shall use the current record ($0) in its place.
+.IP "\fBsubstr\fR(\fIs\fR,\ \fIm\fB[\fR,\ \fIn\ \fB]\fR)" 10
+.br
+Return the at most
+.IR n -character
+substring of
+.IR s
+that begins at position
+.IR m ,
+numbering from 1. If
+.IR n
+is omitted, or if
+.IR n
+specifies more characters than are left in the string, the length of
+the substring shall be limited by the length of the string
+.IR s .
+.IP "\fBtolower\fR(\fIs\fR)" 10
+Return a string based on the string
+.IR s .
+Each character in
+.IR s
+that is an uppercase letter specified to have a
+.BR tolower
+mapping by the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category of the current locale shall be replaced in the returned string
+by the lowercase letter specified by the mapping. Other characters in
+.IR s
+shall be unchanged in the returned string.
+.IP "\fBtoupper\fR(\fIs\fR)" 10
+Return a string based on the string
+.IR s .
+Each character in
+.IR s
+that is a lowercase letter specified to have a
+.BR toupper
+mapping by the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category of the current locale is replaced in the returned string by
+the uppercase letter specified by the mapping. Other characters in
+.IR s
+are unchanged in the returned string.
+.P
+All of the preceding functions that take
+.IR ERE
+as a parameter expect a pattern or a string valued expression that is a
+regular expression as defined in
+.IR "Regular Expressions".
+.SS "Input/Output and General Functions"
+.P
+The input/output and general functions are:
+.IP "\fBclose\fR(\fIexpression\fR)" 10
+.br
+Close the file or pipe opened by a
+.BR print
+or
+.BR printf
+statement or a call to
+.BR getline
+with the same string-valued
+.IR expression .
+The limit on the number of open
+.IR expression
+arguments is implementation-defined. If the close was successful, the
+function shall return zero; otherwise, it shall return non-zero.
+.IP "\fIexpression\ |\ \fBgetline\ [\fIvar\fB]\fR" 10
+.br
+Read a record of input from a stream piped from the output of a
+command. The stream shall be created if no stream is currently open
+with the value of
+.IR expression
+as its command name. The stream created shall be equivalent to one
+created by a call to the
+\fIpopen\fR()
+function with the value of
+.IR expression
+as the
+.IR command
+argument and a value of
+.IR r
+as the
+.IR mode
+argument. As long as the stream remains open, subsequent calls in which
+.IR expression
+evaluates to the same string value shall read subsequent records from
+the stream. The stream shall remain open until the
+.BR close
+function is called with an expression that evaluates to the same string
+value. At that time, the stream shall be closed as if by a call to the
+\fIpclose\fR()
+function. If
+.IR var
+is omitted, $0 and
+.BR NF
+shall be set; otherwise,
+.IR var
+shall be set and, if appropriate, it shall be considered a numeric
+string (see
+.IR "Expressions in awk").
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.BR getline
+operator can form ambiguous constructs when there are unparenthesized
+operators (including concatenate) to the left of the
+.BR '|' 
+(to the beginning of the expression containing
+.BR getline ).
+In the context of the
+.BR '$' 
+operator,
+.BR '|' 
+shall behave as if it had a lower precedence than
+.BR '$' .
+The result of evaluating other operators is unspecified, and conforming
+applications shall parenthesize properly all such usages.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBgetline\fR" 10
+Set $0 to the next input record from the current input file. This form
+of
+.BR getline
+shall set the
+.BR NF ,
+.BR NR ,
+and
+.BR FNR
+variables.
+.IP "\fBgetline\ \fIvar\fR" 10
+Set variable
+.IR var
+to the next input record from the current input file and, if
+appropriate,
+.IR var
+shall be considered a numeric string (see
+.IR "Expressions in awk").
+This form of
+.BR getline
+shall set the
+.BR FNR
+and
+.BR NR
+variables.
+.IP "\fBgetline\ \fB[\fIvar\fB]\ \fR<\ \fIexpression\fR" 10
+.br
+Read the next record of input from a named file. The
+.IR expression
+shall be evaluated to produce a string that is used as a pathname.
+If the file of that name is not currently open, it shall be opened. As
+long as the stream remains open, subsequent calls in which
+.IR expression
+evaluates to the same string value shall read subsequent records from
+the file. The file shall remain open until the
+.BR close
+function is called with an expression that evaluates to the same string
+value. If
+.IR var
+is omitted, $0 and
+.BR NF
+shall be set; otherwise,
+.IR var
+shall be set and, if appropriate, it shall be considered a numeric
+string (see
+.IR "Expressions in awk").
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.BR getline
+operator can form ambiguous constructs when there are unparenthesized
+binary operators (including concatenate) to the right of the
+.BR '<' 
+(up to the end of the expression containing the
+.BR getline ).
+The result of evaluating such a construct is unspecified, and conforming
+applications shall parenthesize properly all such usages.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBsystem\fR(\fIexpression\fR)" 10
+.br
+Execute the command given by
+.IR expression
+in a manner equivalent to the
+\fIsystem\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 and return the exit status of the
+command.
+.P
+All forms of
+.BR getline
+shall return 1 for successful input, zero for end-of-file, and \(mi1
+for an error.
+.P
+Where strings are used as the name of a file or pipeline, the
+application shall ensure that the strings are textually identical. The
+terminology ``same string value'' implies that ``equivalent strings'',
+even those that differ only by
+<space>
+characters, represent different files.
+.SS "User-Defined Functions"
+.P
+The
+.IR awk
+language also provides user-defined functions. Such functions can be
+defined as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+function \fIname\fR(\fB[\fIparameter\fR, ...\fB]\fR) { \fIstatements\fR }
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+A function can be referred to anywhere in an
+.IR awk
+program; in particular, its use can precede its definition. The scope
+of a function is global.
+.P
+Function parameters, if present, can be either scalars or arrays; the
+behavior is undefined if an array name is passed as a parameter that
+the function uses as a scalar, or if a scalar expression is passed as a
+parameter that the function uses as an array. Function parameters shall
+be passed by value if scalar and by reference if array name.
+.P
+The number of parameters in the function definition need not match the
+number of parameters in the function call. Excess formal parameters can
+be used as local variables. If fewer arguments are supplied in a
+function call than are in the function definition, the extra parameters
+that are used in the function body as scalars shall evaluate to the
+uninitialized value until they are otherwise initialized, and the extra
+parameters that are used in the function body as arrays shall be
+treated as uninitialized arrays where each element evaluates to the
+uninitialized value until otherwise initialized.
+.P
+When invoking a function, no white space can be placed between the
+function name and the opening parenthesis. Function calls can be nested
+and recursive calls can be made upon functions. Upon return from any
+nested or recursive function call, the values of all of the calling
+function's parameters shall be unchanged, except for array parameters
+passed by reference. The
+.BR return
+statement can be used to return a value. If a
+.BR return
+statement appears outside of a function definition, the behavior is
+undefined.
+.P
+In the function definition,
+<newline>
+characters shall be optional before the opening brace and after the
+closing brace. Function definitions can appear anywhere in the program
+where a
+.IR pattern-action
+pair is allowed.
+.SS "Grammar"
+.P
+The grammar in this section and the lexical conventions in the
+following section shall together describe the syntax for
+.IR awk
+programs. The general conventions for this style of grammar are
+described in
+.IR "Section 1.3" ", " "Grammar Conventions".
+A valid program can be represented as the non-terminal symbol
+.IR program
+in the grammar. This formal syntax shall take precedence over the
+preceding text syntax description.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+%token NAME NUMBER STRING ERE
+%token FUNC_NAME   /* Name followed by '(' without white space. */
+.P
+/* Keywords */
+%token       Begin   End
+/*          'BEGIN' 'END'                            */
+.P
+%token       Break   Continue   Delete   Do   Else
+/*          'break' 'continue' 'delete' 'do' 'else'  */
+.P
+%token       Exit   For   Function   If   In
+/*          'exit' 'for' 'function' 'if' 'in'        */
+.P
+%token       Next   Print   Printf   Return   While
+/*          'next' 'print' 'printf' 'return' 'while' */
+.P
+/* Reserved function names */
+%token BUILTIN_FUNC_NAME
+            /* One token for the following:
+             * atan2 cos sin exp log sqrt int rand srand
+             * gsub index length match split sprintf sub
+             * substr tolower toupper close system
+             */
+%token GETLINE
+            /* Syntactically different from other built-ins. */
+.P
+/* Two-character tokens. */
+%token ADD_ASSIGN SUB_ASSIGN MUL_ASSIGN DIV_ASSIGN MOD_ASSIGN POW_ASSIGN
+/*     '+='       '\(mi='       '*='       '/='       '%='       '^=' */
+.P
+%token OR   AND  NO_MATCH   EQ   LE   GE   NE   INCR  DECR  APPEND
+/*     '||' '&&' '!\^~' '==' '<=' '>=' '!=' '++'  '\(mi\|\(mi'  '>>'   */
+.P
+/* One-character tokens. */
+%token '{' '}' '(' ')' '[' ']' ',' ';' NEWLINE
+%token '+' '\(mi' '*' '%' '^' '!' '>' '<' '|' '?' ':' ' " " ' '$' '='
+.P
+%start program
+%%
+.P
+program          : item_list
+                 | actionless_item_list
+                 ;
+.P
+item_list        : newline_opt
+                 | actionless_item_list item terminator
+                 | item_list            item terminator
+                 | item_list          action terminator
+                 ;
+.P
+actionless_item_list : item_list            pattern terminator
+                 | actionless_item_list pattern terminator
+                 ;
+.P
+item             : pattern action
+                 | Function NAME      '(' param_list_opt ')'
+                       newline_opt action
+                 | Function FUNC_NAME '(' param_list_opt ')'
+                       newline_opt action
+                 ;
+.P
+param_list_opt   : /* empty */
+                 | param_list
+                 ;
+.P
+param_list       : NAME
+                 | param_list ',' NAME
+                 ;
+.P
+pattern          : Begin
+                 | End
+                 | expr
+                 | expr ',' newline_opt expr
+                 ;
+.P
+action           : '{' newline_opt                             '}'
+                 | '{' newline_opt terminated_statement_list   '}'
+                 | '{' newline_opt unterminated_statement_list '}'
+                 ;
+.P
+terminator       : terminator ';'
+                 | terminator NEWLINE
+                 |            ';'
+                 |            NEWLINE
+                 ;
+.P
+terminated_statement_list : terminated_statement
+                 | terminated_statement_list terminated_statement
+                 ;
+.P
+unterminated_statement_list : unterminated_statement
+                 | terminated_statement_list unterminated_statement
+                 ;
+.P
+terminated_statement : action newline_opt
+                 | If '(' expr ')' newline_opt terminated_statement
+                 | If '(' expr ')' newline_opt terminated_statement
+                       Else newline_opt terminated_statement
+                 | While '(' expr ')' newline_opt terminated_statement
+                 | For '(' simple_statement_opt ';'
+                      expr_opt ';' simple_statement_opt ')' newline_opt
+                      terminated_statement
+                 | For '(' NAME In NAME ')' newline_opt
+                      terminated_statement
+                 | ';' newline_opt
+                 | terminatable_statement NEWLINE newline_opt
+                 | terminatable_statement ';'     newline_opt
+                 ;
+.P
+unterminated_statement : terminatable_statement
+                 | If '(' expr ')' newline_opt unterminated_statement
+                 | If '(' expr ')' newline_opt terminated_statement
+                      Else newline_opt unterminated_statement
+                 | While '(' expr ')' newline_opt unterminated_statement
+                 | For '(' simple_statement_opt ';'
+                  expr_opt ';' simple_statement_opt ')' newline_opt
+                      unterminated_statement
+                 | For '(' NAME In NAME ')' newline_opt
+                      unterminated_statement
+                 ;
+.P
+terminatable_statement : simple_statement
+                 | Break
+                 | Continue
+                 | Next
+                 | Exit expr_opt
+                 | Return expr_opt
+                 | Do newline_opt terminated_statement While '(' expr ')'
+                 ;
+.P
+simple_statement_opt : /* empty */
+                 | simple_statement
+                 ;
+.P
+simple_statement : Delete NAME '[' expr_list ']'
+                 | expr
+                 | print_statement
+                 ;
+.P
+print_statement  : simple_print_statement
+                 | simple_print_statement output_redirection
+                 ;
+.P
+simple_print_statement : Print  print_expr_list_opt
+                 | Print  '(' multiple_expr_list ')'
+                 | Printf print_expr_list
+                 | Printf '(' multiple_expr_list ')'
+                 ;
+.P
+output_redirection : '>'    expr
+                 | APPEND expr
+                 | '|'    expr
+                 ;
+.P
+expr_list_opt    : /* empty */
+                 | expr_list
+                 ;
+.P
+expr_list        : expr
+                 | multiple_expr_list
+                 ;
+.P
+multiple_expr_list : expr ',' newline_opt expr
+                 | multiple_expr_list ',' newline_opt expr
+                 ;
+.P
+expr_opt         : /* empty */
+                 | expr
+                 ;
+.P
+expr             : unary_expr
+                 | non_unary_expr
+                 ;
+.P
+unary_expr       : '+' expr
+                 | '\(mi' expr
+                 | unary_expr '^'      expr
+                 | unary_expr '*'      expr
+                 | unary_expr '/'      expr
+                 | unary_expr '%'      expr
+                 | unary_expr '+'      expr
+                 | unary_expr '\(mi'      expr
+                 | unary_expr          non_unary_expr
+                 | unary_expr '<'      expr
+                 | unary_expr LE       expr
+                 | unary_expr NE       expr
+                 | unary_expr EQ       expr
+                 | unary_expr '>'      expr
+                 | unary_expr GE       expr
+                 | unary_expr '~'      expr
+                 | unary_expr NO_MATCH expr
+                 | unary_expr In NAME
+                 | unary_expr AND newline_opt expr
+                 | unary_expr OR  newline_opt expr
+                 | unary_expr '?' expr ':' expr
+                 | unary_input_function
+                 ;
+.P
+non_unary_expr   : '(' expr ')'
+                 | '!' expr
+                 | non_unary_expr '^'      expr
+                 | non_unary_expr '*'      expr
+                 | non_unary_expr '/'      expr
+                 | non_unary_expr '%'      expr
+                 | non_unary_expr '+'      expr
+                 | non_unary_expr '\(mi'      expr
+                 | non_unary_expr          non_unary_expr
+                 | non_unary_expr '<'      expr
+                 | non_unary_expr LE       expr
+                 | non_unary_expr NE       expr
+                 | non_unary_expr EQ       expr
+                 | non_unary_expr '>'      expr
+                 | non_unary_expr GE       expr
+                 | non_unary_expr '~'      expr
+                 | non_unary_expr NO_MATCH expr
+                 | non_unary_expr In NAME
+                 | '(' multiple_expr_list ')' In NAME
+                 | non_unary_expr AND newline_opt expr
+                 | non_unary_expr OR  newline_opt expr
+                 | non_unary_expr '?' expr ':' expr
+                 | NUMBER
+                 | STRING
+                 | lvalue
+                 | ERE
+                 | lvalue INCR
+                 | lvalue DECR
+                 | INCR lvalue
+                 | DECR lvalue
+                 | lvalue POW_ASSIGN expr
+                 | lvalue MOD_ASSIGN expr
+                 | lvalue MUL_ASSIGN expr
+                 | lvalue DIV_ASSIGN expr
+                 | lvalue ADD_ASSIGN expr
+                 | lvalue SUB_ASSIGN expr
+                 | lvalue '=' expr
+                 | FUNC_NAME '(' expr_list_opt ')'
+                      /* no white space allowed before '(' */
+                 | BUILTIN_FUNC_NAME '(' expr_list_opt ')'
+                 | BUILTIN_FUNC_NAME
+                 | non_unary_input_function
+                 ;
+.P
+print_expr_list_opt : /* empty */
+                 | print_expr_list
+                 ;
+.P
+print_expr_list  : print_expr
+                 | print_expr_list ',' newline_opt print_expr
+                 ;
+.P
+print_expr       : unary_print_expr
+                 | non_unary_print_expr
+                 ;
+.P
+unary_print_expr : '+' print_expr
+                 | '\(mi' print_expr
+                 | unary_print_expr '^'      print_expr
+                 | unary_print_expr '*'      print_expr
+                 | unary_print_expr '/'      print_expr
+                 | unary_print_expr '%'      print_expr
+                 | unary_print_expr '+'      print_expr
+                 | unary_print_expr '\(mi'      print_expr
+                 | unary_print_expr          non_unary_print_expr
+                 | unary_print_expr '~'      print_expr
+                 | unary_print_expr NO_MATCH print_expr
+                 | unary_print_expr In NAME
+                 | unary_print_expr AND newline_opt print_expr
+                 | unary_print_expr OR  newline_opt print_expr
+                 | unary_print_expr '?' print_expr ':' print_expr
+                 ;
+.P
+non_unary_print_expr : '(' expr ')'
+                 | '!' print_expr
+                 | non_unary_print_expr '^'      print_expr
+                 | non_unary_print_expr '*'      print_expr
+                 | non_unary_print_expr '/'      print_expr
+                 | non_unary_print_expr '%'      print_expr
+                 | non_unary_print_expr '+'      print_expr
+                 | non_unary_print_expr '\(mi'      print_expr
+                 | non_unary_print_expr          non_unary_print_expr
+                 | non_unary_print_expr '~'      print_expr
+                 | non_unary_print_expr NO_MATCH print_expr
+                 | non_unary_print_expr In NAME
+                 | '(' multiple_expr_list ')' In NAME
+                 | non_unary_print_expr AND newline_opt print_expr
+                 | non_unary_print_expr OR  newline_opt print_expr
+                 | non_unary_print_expr '?' print_expr ':' print_expr
+                 | NUMBER
+                 | STRING
+                 | lvalue
+                 | ERE
+                 | lvalue INCR
+                 | lvalue DECR
+                 | INCR lvalue
+                 | DECR lvalue
+                 | lvalue POW_ASSIGN print_expr
+                 | lvalue MOD_ASSIGN print_expr
+                 | lvalue MUL_ASSIGN print_expr
+                 | lvalue DIV_ASSIGN print_expr
+                 | lvalue ADD_ASSIGN print_expr
+                 | lvalue SUB_ASSIGN print_expr
+                 | lvalue '=' print_expr
+                 | FUNC_NAME '(' expr_list_opt ')'
+                     /* no white space allowed before '(' */
+                 | BUILTIN_FUNC_NAME '(' expr_list_opt ')'
+                 | BUILTIN_FUNC_NAME
+                 ;
+.P
+lvalue           : NAME
+                 | NAME '[' expr_list ']'
+                 | '$' expr
+                 ;
+.P
+non_unary_input_function : simple_get
+                 | simple_get '<' expr
+                 | non_unary_expr '|' simple_get
+                 ;
+.P
+unary_input_function : unary_expr '|' simple_get
+                 ;
+.P
+simple_get       : GETLINE
+                 | GETLINE lvalue
+                 ;
+.P
+newline_opt      : /* empty */
+                 | newline_opt NEWLINE
+                 ;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This grammar has several ambiguities that shall be resolved as
+follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+Operator precedence and associativity shall be as described in
+.IR "Table 4-1, Expressions in Decreasing Precedence in \fIawk\fP".
+.IP " *" 4
+In case of ambiguity, an
+.BR else
+shall be associated with the most immediately preceding
+.BR if
+that would satisfy the grammar.
+.IP " *" 4
+In some contexts, a
+<slash>
+(\c
+.BR '/' )
+that is used to surround an ERE could also be the division operator.
+This shall be resolved in such a way that wherever the division
+operator could appear, a
+<slash>
+is assumed to be the division operator. (There is no unary division
+operator.)
+.P
+Each expression in an
+.IR awk
+program shall conform to the precedence and associativity rules, even
+when this is not needed to resolve an ambiguity. For example, because
+.BR '$' 
+has higher precedence than
+.BR '++' ,
+the string
+.BR \(dq$x++\(mi\|\(mi\(dq 
+is not a valid
+.IR awk
+expression, even though it is unambiguously parsed by the grammar as
+.BR \(dq$(x++)\(mi\|\(mi\(dq .
+.P
+One convention that might not be obvious from the formal grammar is
+where
+<newline>
+characters are acceptable. There are several obvious placements such as
+terminating a statement, and a
+<backslash>
+can be used to escape
+<newline>
+characters between any lexical tokens. In addition,
+<newline>
+characters without
+<backslash>
+characters can follow a comma, an open brace, logical AND operator (\c
+.BR \(dq&&\(dq ),
+logical OR operator (\c
+.BR \(dq||\(dq ),
+the
+.BR do
+keyword, the
+.BR else
+keyword, and the closing parenthesis of an
+.BR if ,
+.BR for ,
+or
+.BR while
+statement. For example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+{ print  $1,
+         $2 }
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Lexical Conventions"
+.P
+The lexical conventions for
+.IR awk
+programs, with respect to the preceding grammar, shall be as follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Except as noted,
+.IR awk
+shall recognize the longest possible token or delimiter beginning at a
+given point.
+.IP " 2." 4
+A comment shall consist of any characters beginning with the
+<number-sign>
+character and terminated by, but excluding the next occurrence of, a
+<newline>.
+Comments shall have no effect, except to delimit lexical tokens.
+.IP " 3." 4
+The
+<newline>
+shall be recognized as the token
+.BR NEWLINE .
+.IP " 4." 4
+A
+<backslash>
+character immediately followed by a
+<newline>
+shall have no effect.
+.IP " 5." 4
+The token
+.BR STRING
+shall represent a string constant. A string constant shall begin with
+the character
+.BR '\&"' .
+Within a string constant, a
+<backslash>
+character shall be considered to begin an escape sequence as specified
+in the table in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 5" ", " "File Format Notation"
+(\c
+.BR '\e\e' ,
+.BR '\ea' ,
+.BR '\eb' ,
+.BR '\ef' ,
+.BR '\en' ,
+.BR '\er' ,
+.BR '\et' ,
+.BR '\ev' ).
+In addition, the escape sequences in
+.IR "Table 4-2, Escape Sequences in \fIawk\fP"
+shall be recognized. A
+<newline>
+shall not occur within a string constant. A string constant shall be
+terminated by the first unescaped occurrence of the character
+.BR '\&"' 
+after the one that begins the string constant. The value of the string
+shall be the sequence of all unescaped characters and values of escape
+sequences between, but not including, the two delimiting
+.BR '\&"' 
+characters.
+.IP " 6." 4
+The token
+.BR ERE
+represents an extended regular expression constant. An ERE constant
+shall begin with the
+<slash>
+character. Within an ERE constant, a
+<backslash>
+character shall be considered to begin an escape sequence as
+specified in the table in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 5" ", " "File Format Notation".
+In addition, the escape sequences in
+.IR "Table 4-2, Escape Sequences in \fIawk\fP"
+shall be recognized. The application shall ensure that a
+<newline>
+does not occur within an ERE constant. An ERE constant shall be
+terminated by the first unescaped occurrence of the
+<slash>
+character after the one that begins the ERE constant. The extended regular
+expression represented by the ERE constant shall be the sequence of all
+unescaped characters and values of escape sequences between, but not
+including, the two delimiting
+<slash>
+characters.
+.IP " 7." 4
+A
+<blank>
+shall have no effect, except to delimit lexical tokens or within
+.BR STRING
+or
+.BR ERE
+tokens.
+.IP " 8." 4
+The token
+.BR NUMBER
+shall represent a numeric constant. Its form and numeric value shall
+either be equivalent to the
+.BR decimal-floating-constant
+token as specified by the ISO\ C standard, or it shall be a sequence of decimal
+digits and shall be evaluated as an integer constant in decimal. In
+addition, implementations may accept numeric constants with the form
+and numeric value equivalent to the
+.BR hexadecimal-constant
+and
+.BR hexadecimal-floating-constant
+tokens as specified by the ISO\ C standard.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+If the value is too large or too small to be representable (see
+.IR "Section 1.1.2" ", " "Concepts Derived from the ISO C Standard"),
+the behavior is undefined.
+.RE
+.IP " 9." 4
+A sequence of underscores, digits, and alphabetics from the portable
+character set (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set"),
+beginning with an
+<underscore>
+or alphabetic character, shall be considered a word.
+.IP 10. 4
+The following words are keywords that shall be recognized as individual
+tokens; the name of the token is the same as the keyword:
+.TS
+tab(@);
+lw(0.6i)eB leB leB leB leB leB.
+T{
+.nf
+BEGIN
+break
+continue
+T}@T{
+.nf
+delete
+do
+else
+T}@T{
+.nf
+END
+exit
+for
+T}@T{
+.nf
+function
+getline
+if
+T}@T{
+.nf
+in
+next
+print
+T}@T{
+.nf
+printf
+return
+while
+T}
+.TE
+.IP 11. 4
+The following words are names of built-in functions and shall be
+recognized as the token
+.BR BUILTIN_FUNC_NAME :
+.TS
+tab(@);
+lw(0.6i)eB leB leB leB leB leB.
+T{
+.nf
+atan2
+close
+cos
+exp
+T}@T{
+.nf
+gsub
+index
+int
+length
+T}@T{
+.nf
+log
+match
+rand
+sin
+T}@T{
+.nf
+split
+sprintf
+sqrt
+srand
+T}@T{
+.nf
+sub
+substr
+system
+tolower
+T}@T{
+.nf
+toupper
+.fi
+T}
+.TE
+.RS 4 
+.P
+The above-listed keywords and names of built-in functions are
+considered reserved words.
+.RE
+.IP 12. 4
+The token
+.BR NAME
+shall consist of a word that is not a keyword or a name of a built-in
+function and is not followed immediately (without any delimiters) by
+the
+.BR '(' 
+character.
+.IP 13. 4
+The token
+.BR FUNC_NAME
+shall consist of a word that is not a keyword or a name of a built-in
+function, followed immediately (without any delimiters) by the
+.BR '(' 
+character. The
+.BR '(' 
+character shall not be included as part of the token.
+.IP 14. 4
+The following two-character sequences shall be recognized as the named
+tokens:
+.TS
+box center tab(@);
+cB | cB | cB | cB
+lB | cf5 | lB | cf5.
+Token Name@Sequence@Token Name@Sequence
+_
+ADD_ASSIGN@+=@NO_MATCH@!~
+SUB_ASSIGN@\(mi=@EQ@==
+MUL_ASSIGN@*=@LE@<=
+DIV_ASSIGN@/=@GE@>=
+MOD_ASSIGN@%=@NE@!=
+POW_ASSIGN@^=@INCR@++
+OR@||@DECR@\(mi\|\(mi
+AND@&&@APPEND@>>
+.TE
+.IP 15. 4
+The following single characters shall be recognized as tokens whose
+names are the character:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<newline> { } ( ) [ ] , ; + \(mi * % ^ ! > < | ? :  " "  $ =
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+There is a lexical ambiguity between the token
+.BR ERE
+and the tokens
+.BR '/' 
+and
+.BR DIV_ASSIGN .
+When an input sequence begins with a
+<slash>
+character in any syntactic context where the token
+.BR '/' 
+or
+.BR DIV_ASSIGN
+could appear as the next token in a valid program, the longer of those
+two tokens that can be recognized shall be recognized. In any other
+syntactic context where the token
+.BR ERE
+could appear as the next token in a valid program, the token
+.BR ERE
+shall be recognized.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+All input files were processed successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.P
+The exit status can be altered within the program by using an
+.BR exit
+expression.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+If any
+.IR file
+operand is specified and the named file cannot be accessed,
+.IR awk
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error and terminate
+without any further action.
+.P
+If the program specified by either the
+.IR program
+operand or a
+.IR progfile
+operand is not a valid
+.IR awk
+program (as specified in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section), the
+behavior is undefined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.BR index ,
+.BR length ,
+.BR match ,
+and
+.BR substr
+functions should not be confused with similar functions in the ISO\ C standard;
+the
+.IR awk
+versions deal with characters, while the ISO\ C standard deals with bytes.
+.P
+Because the concatenation operation is represented by adjacent
+expressions rather than an explicit operator, it is often necessary to
+use parentheses to enforce the proper evaluation precedence.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The
+.IR awk
+program specified in the command line is most easily specified within
+single-quotes (for example, '\fIprogram\fP') for applications using
+.IR sh ,
+because
+.IR awk
+programs commonly contain characters that are special to the shell,
+including double-quotes. In the cases where an
+.IR awk
+program contains single-quote characters, it is usually easiest to
+specify most of the program as strings within single-quotes
+concatenated by the shell with quoted single-quote characters. For
+example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+awk '/'\e''/ { print "quote:", $0 }'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+prints all lines from the standard input containing a single-quote
+character, prefixed with
+.IR quote :.
+.P
+The following are examples of simple
+.IR awk
+programs:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Write to the standard output all input lines for which field 3 is
+greater than 5:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+$3 > 5
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+Write every tenth line:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(NR % 10) == 0
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+Write any line with a substring matching the regular expression:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+/(G|D)(2[0\(mi9][[:alpha:]]*)/
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+Print any line with a substring containing a
+.BR 'G' 
+or
+.BR 'D' ,
+followed by a sequence of digits and characters. This example uses
+character classes
+.BR digit
+and
+.BR alpha
+to match language-independent digit and alphabetic characters
+respectively:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+/(G|D)([[:digit:][:alpha:]]*)/
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 5." 4
+Write any line in which the second field matches the regular expression
+and the fourth field does not:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+$2  " "  /xyz/ && $4 ! " "  /xyz/
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 6." 4
+Write any line in which the second field contains a
+<backslash>:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+$2  " "  /\e\e/
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 7." 4
+Write any line in which the second field contains a
+<backslash>.
+Note that
+<backslash>-escapes
+are interpreted twice; once in lexical processing of the string and once
+in processing the regular expression:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+$2  " "  "\e\e\e\e"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 8." 4
+Write the second to the last and the last field in each line. Separate
+the fields by a
+<colon>:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+{OFS=":";print $(NF\(mi1), $NF}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 9." 4
+Write the line number and number of fields in each line. The three
+strings representing the line number, the
+<colon>,
+and the number of fields are concatenated and that string is written to
+standard output:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+{print NR ":" NF}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP 10. 4
+Write lines longer than 72 characters:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+length($0) > 72
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP 11. 4
+Write the first two fields in opposite order separated by
+.BR OFS :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+{ print $2, $1 }
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP 12. 4
+Same, with input fields separated by a
+<comma>
+or
+<space>
+and
+<tab>
+characters, or both:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+BEGIN { FS = ",[ \et]*|[ \et]+" }
+      { print $2, $1 }
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP 13. 4
+Add up the first column, print sum, and average:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+      {s += $1 }
+END   {print "sum is ", s, " average is", s/NR}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP 14. 4
+Write fields in reverse order, one per line (many lines out for each
+line in):
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+{ for (i = NF; i > 0; \(mi\|\(mii) print $i }
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP 15. 4
+Write all lines between occurrences of the strings
+.BR start
+and
+.BR stop :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+/start/, /stop/
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP 16. 4
+Write all lines whose first field is different from the previous one:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+$1 != prev { print; prev = $1 }
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP 17. 4
+Simulate
+.IR echo :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+BEGIN  {
+        for (i = 1; i < ARGC; ++i)
+        printf("%s%s", ARGV[i], i==ARGC\(mi1?"\en":" ")
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP 18. 4
+Write the path prefixes contained in the
+.IR PATH
+environment variable, one per line:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+BEGIN  {
+        n = split (ENVIRON["PATH"], path, ":")
+        for (i = 1; i <= n; ++i)
+        print path[i]
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP 19. 4
+If there is a file named
+.BR input
+containing page headers of the form:
+Page #
+.RS 4 
+.P
+and a file named
+.BR program
+that contains:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+/Page/   { $2 = n++; }
+         { print }
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+then the command line:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+awk \(mif program n=5 input
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+prints the file
+.BR input ,
+filling in page numbers starting at 5.
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+This description is based on the new
+.IR awk ,
+``nawk'', (see the referenced \fIThe AWK Programming Language\fP), which introduced a number of new features to
+the historical
+.IR awk :
+.IP " 1." 4
+New keywords:
+.BR delete ,
+.BR do ,
+.BR function ,
+.BR return
+.IP " 2." 4
+New built-in functions:
+.BR atan2 ,
+.BR close ,
+.BR cos ,
+.BR gsub ,
+.BR match ,
+.BR rand ,
+.BR sin ,
+.BR srand ,
+.BR sub ,
+.BR system
+.IP " 3." 4
+New predefined variables:
+.BR FNR ,
+.BR ARGC ,
+.BR ARGV ,
+.BR RSTART ,
+.BR RLENGTH ,
+.BR SUBSEP
+.IP " 4." 4
+New expression operators:
+.BR ? ,
+.BR : ,
+.BR , ,
+.BR ^
+.IP " 5." 4
+The
+.BR FS
+variable and the third argument to
+.BR split ,
+now treated as extended regular expressions.
+.IP " 6." 4
+The operator precedence, changed to more closely match the C language.
+Two examples of code that operate differently are:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+while ( n /= 10 > 1) ...
+if (!"wk" ~ /bwk/) ...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Several features have been added based on newer implementations of
+.IR awk :
+.IP " *" 4
+Multiple instances of
+.BR \(mif
+.IR progfile
+are permitted.
+.IP " *" 4
+The new option
+.BR \(miv
+.IR assignment.
+.IP " *" 4
+The new predefined variable
+.BR ENVIRON .
+.IP " *" 4
+New built-in functions
+.BR toupper
+and
+.BR tolower .
+.IP " *" 4
+More formatting capabilities are added to
+.BR printf
+to match the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The overall
+.IR awk
+syntax has always been based on the C language, with a few features
+from the shell command language and other sources. Because of this, it
+is not completely compatible with any other language, which has caused
+confusion for some users. It is not the intent of the standard
+developers to address such issues. A few relatively minor changes
+toward making the language more compatible with the ISO\ C standard were
+made; most of these changes are based on similar changes in recent
+implementations, as described above. There remain several C-language
+conventions that are not in
+.IR awk .
+One of the notable ones is the
+<comma>
+operator, which is commonly used to specify multiple expressions in the
+C language
+.BR for
+statement. Also, there are various places where
+.IR awk
+is more restrictive than the C language regarding the type of
+expression that can be used in a given context. These limitations are
+due to the different features that the
+.IR awk
+language does provide.
+.P
+Regular expressions in
+.IR awk
+have been extended somewhat from historical implementations to make
+them a pure superset of extended regular expressions, as defined by
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 9.4" ", " "Extended Regular Expressions").
+The main extensions are internationalization
+features and interval expressions. Historical implementations of
+.IR awk
+have long supported
+<backslash>-escape
+sequences as an extension to extended regular expressions, and
+this extension has been retained despite inconsistency with other
+utilities. The number of escape sequences recognized in both extended
+regular expressions and strings has varied (generally increasing with
+time) among implementations. The set specified by POSIX.1\(hy2008 includes most
+sequences known to be supported by popular implementations and by the
+ISO\ C standard. One sequence that is not supported is hexadecimal value escapes
+beginning with
+.BR '\ex' .
+This would allow values expressed in more than 9 bits to be used within
+.IR awk
+as in the ISO\ C standard. However, because this syntax has a non-deterministic
+length, it does not permit the subsequent character to be a hexadecimal
+digit. This limitation can be dealt with in the C language by the use
+of lexical string concatenation. In the
+.IR awk
+language, concatenation could also be a solution for strings, but not
+for extended regular expressions (either lexical ERE tokens or strings
+used dynamically as regular expressions). Because of this limitation,
+the feature has not been added to POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+When a string variable is used in a context where an extended regular
+expression normally appears (where the lexical token ERE is used in the
+grammar) the string does not contain the literal
+<slash>
+characters.
+.P
+Some versions of
+.IR awk
+allow the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+func name(args, ... ) { statements }
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This has been deprecated by the authors of the language, who asked that
+it not be specified.
+.P
+Historical implementations of
+.IR awk
+produce an error if a
+.BR next
+statement is executed in a
+.BR BEGIN
+action, and cause
+.IR awk
+to terminate if a
+.BR next
+statement is executed in an
+.BR END
+action. This behavior has not been documented, and it was not believed
+that it was necessary to standardize it.
+.P
+The specification of conversions between string and numeric values is
+much more detailed than in the documentation of historical
+implementations or in the referenced \fIThe AWK Programming Language\fP. Although most of the behavior is
+designed to be intuitive, the details are necessary to ensure
+compatible behavior from different implementations. This is especially
+important in relational expressions since the types of the operands
+determine whether a string or numeric comparison is performed. From the
+perspective of an application developer, it is usually sufficient to
+expect intuitive behavior and to force conversions (by adding zero or
+concatenating a null string) when the type of an expression does not
+obviously match what is needed. The intent has been to specify
+historical practice in almost all cases. The one exception is that, in
+historical implementations, variables and constants maintain both
+string and numeric values after their original value is converted by
+any use. This means that referencing a variable or constant can have
+unexpected side-effects. For example, with historical implementations
+the following program:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+{
+    a = "+2"
+    b = 2
+    if (NR % 2)
+        c = a + b
+    if (a == b)
+        print "numeric comparison"
+    else
+        print "string comparison"
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would perform a numeric comparison (and output numeric comparison) for
+each odd-numbered line, but perform a string comparison (and output
+string comparison) for each even-numbered line. POSIX.1\(hy2008 ensures that
+comparisons will be numeric if necessary. With historical
+implementations, the following program:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+BEGIN {
+    OFMT = "%e"
+    print 3.14
+    OFMT = "%f"
+    print 3.14
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would output
+.BR \(dq3.140000e+00\(dq 
+twice, because in the second
+.BR print
+statement the constant
+.BR \(dq3.14\(dq 
+would have a string value from the previous conversion. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires
+that the output of the second
+.BR print
+statement be
+.BR \(dq3.140000\(dq .
+The behavior of historical implementations was seen as too unintuitive
+and unpredictable.
+.P
+It was pointed out that with the rules contained in early drafts, the
+following script would print nothing:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+BEGIN {
+    y[1.5] = 1
+    OFMT = "%e"
+    print y[1.5]
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Therefore, a new variable,
+.BR CONVFMT ,
+was introduced. The
+.BR OFMT
+variable is now restricted to affecting output conversions of numbers
+to strings and
+.BR CONVFMT
+is used for internal conversions, such as comparisons or array
+indexing. The default value is the same as that for
+.BR OFMT ,
+so unless a program changes
+.BR CONVFMT
+(which no historical program would do), it will receive the historical
+behavior associated with internal string conversions.
+.P
+The POSIX
+.IR awk
+lexical and syntactic conventions are specified more formally than in
+other sources. Again the intent has been to specify historical
+practice. One convention that may not be obvious from the formal
+grammar as in other verbal descriptions is where
+<newline>
+characters are acceptable. There are several obvious placements such as
+terminating a statement, and a
+<backslash>
+can be used to escape
+<newline>
+characters between any lexical tokens. In addition,
+<newline>
+characters without
+<backslash>
+characters can follow a comma, an open brace, a logical AND operator (\c
+.BR \(dq&&\(dq ),
+a logical OR operator (\c
+.BR \(dq||\(dq ),
+the
+.BR do
+keyword, the
+.BR else
+keyword, and the closing parenthesis of an
+.BR if ,
+.BR for ,
+or
+.BR while
+statement. For example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+{ print $1,
+        $2 }
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The requirement that
+.IR awk
+add a trailing
+<newline>
+to the program argument text is to simplify the grammar, making it
+match a text file in form. There is no way for an application or test
+suite to determine whether a literal
+<newline>
+is added or whether
+.IR awk
+simply acts as if it did.
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires several changes from historical implementations in order
+to support internationalization. Probably the most subtle of these is
+the use of the decimal-point character, defined by the
+.IR LC_NUMERIC
+category of the locale, in representations of floating-point numbers.
+This locale-specific character is used in recognizing numeric input, in
+converting between strings and numeric values, and in formatting
+output. However, regardless of locale, the
+<period>
+character (the decimal-point character of the POSIX locale) is the
+decimal-point character recognized in processing
+.IR awk
+programs (including assignments in command line arguments). This is
+essentially the same convention as the one used in the ISO\ C standard. The
+difference is that the C language includes the
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+function, which permits an application to modify its locale. Because of
+this capability, a C application begins executing with its locale set
+to the C locale, and only executes in the environment-specified locale
+after an explicit call to
+\fIsetlocale\fR().
+However, adding such an elaborate new feature to the
+.IR awk
+language was seen as inappropriate for POSIX.1\(hy2008. It is possible to execute
+an
+.IR awk
+program explicitly in any desired locale by setting the environment in
+the shell.
+.P
+The undefined behavior resulting from NULs in extended regular
+expressions allows future extensions for the GNU
+.IR gawk
+program to process binary data.
+.P
+The behavior in the case of invalid
+.IR awk
+programs (including lexical, syntactic, and semantic errors) is
+undefined because it was considered overly limiting on implementations
+to specify. In most cases such errors can be expected to produce a
+diagnostic and a non-zero exit status. However, some implementations
+may choose to extend the language in ways that make use of certain
+invalid constructs. Other invalid constructs might be deemed worthy of
+a warning, but otherwise cause some reasonable behavior. Still other
+constructs may be very difficult to detect in some implementations.
+Also, different implementations might detect a given error during an
+initial parsing of the program (before reading any input files) while
+others might detect it when executing the program after reading some
+input. Implementors should be aware that diagnosing errors as early as
+possible and producing useful diagnostics can ease debugging of
+applications, and thus make an implementation more usable.
+.P
+The unspecified behavior from using multi-character
+.BR RS
+values is to allow possible future extensions based on extended regular
+expressions used for record separators. Historical implementations take
+the first character of the string and ignore the others.
+.P
+Unspecified behavior when
+.IR split (\c
+.IR string ,\c
+.IR array ,\c
+<null>)
+is used is to allow a proposed future extension that would split up a
+string into an array of individual characters.
+.P
+In the context of the
+.BR getline
+function, equally good arguments for different precedences of the
+.BR |
+and
+.BR <
+operators can be made. Historical practice has been that:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+getline < "a" "b"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+is parsed as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+( getline < "a" ) "b"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+although many would argue that the intent was that the file
+.BR ab
+should be read. However:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+getline < "x" + 1
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+parses as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+getline < ( "x" + 1 )
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Similar problems occur with the
+.BR |
+version of
+.BR getline ,
+particularly in combination with
+.BR $ .
+For example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+$"echo hi" | getline
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+(This situation is particularly problematic when used in a
+.BR print
+statement, where the
+.BR |getline
+part might be a redirection of the
+.BR print .)
+.P
+Since in most cases such constructs are not (or at least should not) be
+used (because they have a natural ambiguity for which there is no
+conventional parsing), the meaning of these constructs has been made
+explicitly unspecified. (The effect is that a conforming application that
+runs into the problem must parenthesize to resolve the ambiguity.)
+There appeared to be few if any actual uses of such constructs.
+.P
+Grammars can be written that would cause an error under these
+circumstances. Where backwards-compatibility is not a large
+consideration, implementors may wish to use such grammars.
+.P
+Some historical implementations have allowed some built-in functions to
+be called without an argument list, the result being a default argument
+list chosen in some ``reasonable'' way. Use of
+.BR length
+as a synonym for
+.BR "length($0)"
+is the only one of these forms that is thought to be widely known or
+widely used; this particular form is documented in various places (for
+example, most historical
+.IR awk
+reference pages, although not in the referenced \fIThe AWK Programming Language\fP) as legitimate practice.
+With this exception, default argument lists have always been
+undocumented and vaguely defined, and it is not at all clear how (or
+if) they should be generalized to user-defined functions. They add no
+useful functionality and preclude possible future extensions that might
+need to name functions without calling them. Not standardizing them
+seems the simplest course. The standard developers considered that
+.BR length
+merited special treatment, however, since it has been documented in the
+past and sees possibly substantial use in historical programs.
+Accordingly, this usage has been made legitimate, but Issue\ 5
+removed the obsolescent marking for XSI-conforming implementations
+and many otherwise conforming applications depend on this feature.
+.P
+In
+.BR sub
+and
+.BR gsub ,
+if
+.IR repl
+is a string literal (the lexical token
+.BR STRING ),
+then two consecutive
+<backslash>
+characters should be used in the string to ensure a single
+<backslash>
+will precede the
+<ampersand>
+when the resultant string is passed to the function. (For example,
+to specify one literal
+<ampersand>
+in the replacement string, use
+.BR gsub (\c
+.BR ERE ,
+.BR \(dq\e\e&\(dq ).)
+.P
+Historically, the only special character in the
+.IR repl
+argument of
+.BR sub
+and
+.BR gsub
+string functions was the
+<ampersand>
+(\c
+.BR '&' )
+character and preceding it with the
+<backslash>
+character was used to turn off its special meaning.
+.P
+The description in the ISO\ POSIX\(hy2:\|1993 standard introduced behavior such that the
+<backslash>
+character was another special character and it was unspecified whether
+there were any other special characters. This description introduced
+several portability problems, some of which are described below, and so
+it has been replaced with the more historical description. Some of the
+problems include:
+.IP " *" 4
+Historically, to create the replacement string, a script could use
+.BR gsub (\c
+.BR ERE ,
+.BR \(dq\e\e&\(dq ),
+but with the ISO\ POSIX\(hy2:\|1993 standard wording, it was necessary to use
+.BR gsub (\c
+.BR ERE ,
+.BR \(dq\e\e\e\e&\(dq ).
+The
+<backslash>
+characters are doubled here because all string literals are subject to
+lexical analysis, which would reduce each pair of
+<backslash>
+characters to a single
+<backslash>
+before being passed to
+.BR gsub .
+.IP " *" 4
+Since it was unspecified what the special characters were, for portable
+scripts to guarantee that characters are printed literally, each
+character had to be preceded with a
+<backslash>.
+(For example, a portable script had to use
+.BR gsub (\c
+.BR ERE ,
+.BR \(dq\e\eh\e\ei\(dq )
+to produce a replacement string of
+.BR \(dqhi\(dq .)
+.P
+The description for comparisons in the ISO\ POSIX\(hy2:\|1993 standard did not properly describe
+historical practice because of the way numeric strings are compared as
+numbers. The current rules cause the following code:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+if (0 == "000")
+    print "strange, but true"
+else
+    print "not true"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+to do a numeric comparison, causing the
+.BR if
+to succeed. It should be intuitively obvious that this is incorrect
+behavior, and indeed, no historical implementation of
+.IR awk
+actually behaves this way.
+.P
+To fix this problem, the definition of
+.IR "numeric string"
+was enhanced to include only those values obtained from specific
+circumstances (mostly external sources) where it is not possible to
+determine unambiguously whether the value is intended to be a string or
+a numeric.
+.P
+Variables that are assigned to a numeric string shall also be treated
+as a numeric string. (For example, the notion of a numeric string can
+be propagated across assignments.) In comparisons, all variables having
+the uninitialized value are to be treated as a numeric operand
+evaluating to the numeric value zero.
+.P
+Uninitialized variables include all types of variables including
+scalars, array elements, and fields. The definition of an uninitialized
+value in
+.IR "Variables and Special Variables"
+is necessary to describe the value placed on uninitialized variables
+and on fields that are valid (for example,
+.BR <
+.BR $NF )
+but have no characters in them and to describe how these variables are
+to be used in comparisons. A valid field, such as
+.BR $1 ,
+that has no characters in it can be obtained from an input line of
+.BR \(dq\et\et\(dq 
+when
+.BR FS= \c
+.BR '\et' .
+Historically, the comparison (\c
+.BR $1< 10)
+was done numerically after evaluating
+.BR $1
+to the value zero.
+.P
+The phrase ``.\|.\|. also shall have the numeric value of the numeric
+string'' was removed from several sections of the ISO\ POSIX\(hy2:\|1993 standard because is
+specifies an unnecessary implementation detail. It is not necessary for
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 to specify that these objects be assigned two different values.
+It is only necessary to specify that these objects may evaluate to two
+different values depending on context.
+.P
+Historical implementations of
+.IR awk
+did not parse hexadecimal integer or floating constants like
+.BR \(dq0xa\(dq 
+and
+.BR \(dq0xap0\(dq .
+Due to an oversight, the 2001 through 2004 editions of this standard
+required support for hexadecimal floating constants. This was due to
+the reference to
+\fIatof\fR().
+This version of the standard allows but does not require implementations
+to use
+\fIatof\fR()
+and includes a description of how floating-point numbers are recognized
+as an alternative to match historic behavior. The intent of this change
+is to allow implementations to recognize floating-point constants
+according to either the ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1990 standard or ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1999 standard, and to allow (but not require)
+implementations to recognize hexadecimal integer constants.
+.P
+Historical implementations of
+.IR awk
+did not support floating-point infinities and NaNs in
+.IR "numeric strings" ;
+e.g.,
+.BR \(dq\(miINF\(dq 
+and
+.BR \(dqNaN\(dq .
+However, implementations that use the
+\fIatof\fR()
+or
+\fIstrtod\fR()
+functions to do the conversion picked up support for these values if they
+used a ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1999 standard version of the function instead of a ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1990 standard version. Due to
+an oversight, the 2001 through 2004 editions of this standard did not
+allow support for infinities and NaNs, but in this revision support is
+allowed (but not required). This is a silent change to the behavior of
+.IR awk
+programs; for example, in the POSIX locale the expression:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+("-INF" + 0 < 0)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+formerly had the value 0 because
+.BR \(dq\(miINF\(dq 
+converted to 0, but now it may have the value 0 or 1.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 1.3" ", " "Grammar Conventions",
+.IR "\fIgrep\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIlex\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsed\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 5" ", " "File Format Notation",
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Chapter 9" ", " "Regular Expressions",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIatof\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIisspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrtod\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/basename.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/basename.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d5153f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/basename.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,288 @@
+'\" et
+.TH BASENAME "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+basename
+\(em return non-directory portion of a pathname
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+basename \fIstring \fB[\fIsuffix\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR string
+operand shall be treated as a pathname, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.267" ", " "Pathname".
+The string
+.IR string
+shall be converted to the filename corresponding to the last pathname
+component in
+.IR string
+and then the suffix string
+.IR suffix ,
+if present, shall be removed. This shall be done by performing actions
+equivalent to the following steps in order:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If
+.IR string
+is a null string, it is unspecified whether the resulting string is
+.BR '.' 
+or a null string. In either case, skip steps 2 through 6.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If
+.IR string
+is
+.BR \(dq//\(dq ,
+it is implementation-defined whether steps 3 to 6 are skipped or
+processed.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If
+.IR string
+consists entirely of
+<slash>
+characters,
+.IR string
+shall be set to a single
+<slash>
+character. In this case, skip steps 4 to 6.
+.IP " 4." 4
+If there are any trailing
+<slash>
+characters in
+.IR string ,
+they shall be removed.
+.IP " 5." 4
+If there are any
+<slash>
+characters remaining in
+.IR string ,
+the prefix of
+.IR string
+up to and including the last
+<slash>
+character in
+.IR string
+shall be removed.
+.IP " 6." 4
+If the
+.IR suffix
+operand is present, is not identical to the characters remaining in
+.IR string ,
+and is identical to a suffix of the characters remaining in
+.IR string ,
+the suffix
+.IR suffix
+shall be removed from
+.IR string .
+Otherwise,
+.IR string
+is not modified by this step. It shall not be considered an error if
+.IR suffix
+is not found in
+.IR string .
+.P
+The resulting string shall be written to standard output.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIstring\fR" 10
+A string.
+.IP "\fIsuffix\fR" 10
+A string.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR basename :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The
+.IR basename
+utility shall write a line to the standard output in the following
+format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIresulting string\fP>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The definition of
+.IR pathname
+specifies implementation-defined behavior for pathnames starting with
+two
+<slash>
+characters. Therefore, applications shall not arbitrarily add
+<slash>
+characters to the beginning of a pathname unless they can ensure
+that there are more or less than two or are prepared to deal with the
+implementation-defined consequences.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+If the string
+.IR string
+is a valid pathname:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+$(basename -- "\fIstring\fP")
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+produces a filename that could be used to open the file named by
+.IR string
+in the directory returned by:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+$(dirname -- "\fIstring\fP")
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the string
+.IR string
+is not a valid pathname, the same algorithm is used, but the result
+need not be a valid filename. The
+.IR basename
+utility is not expected to make any judgements about the validity of
+.IR string
+as a pathname; it just follows the specified algorithm to produce a
+result string.
+.P
+The following shell script compiles
+.BR /usr/src/cmd/cat.c
+and moves the output to a file named
+.BR cat
+in the current directory when invoked with the argument
+.BR /usr/src/cmd/cat
+or with the argument
+.BR /usr/src/cmd/cat.c :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+c99 -- "$(dirname -- "$1")/$(basename -- "$1" .c).c" &&
+mv a.out "$(basename -- "$1" .c)"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The behaviors of
+.IR basename
+and
+.IR dirname
+have been coordinated so that when
+.IR string
+is a valid pathname:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+$(basename -- "\fIstring\fP")
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would be a valid filename for the file in the directory:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+$(dirname -- "\fIstring\fP")
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This would not work for the early proposal versions of these utilities due
+to the way it specified handling of trailing
+<slash>
+characters.
+.P
+Since the definition of
+.IR pathname
+specifies implementation-defined behavior for pathnames starting with
+two
+<slash>
+characters, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 specifies similar implementation-defined behavior
+for the
+.IR basename
+and
+.IR dirname
+utilities.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Parameters and Variables",
+.IR "\fIdirname\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.267" ", " "Pathname",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/batch.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/batch.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1cbadf4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/batch.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,275 @@
+'\" et
+.TH BATCH "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+batch
+\(em schedule commands to be executed in a batch queue
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+\fIbatch\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR batch
+utility shall read commands from standard input and schedule them
+for execution in a batch queue. It shall be the equivalent of
+the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+at \(miq b \(mim now
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where queue
+.IR b
+is a special
+.IR at
+queue, specifically for batch jobs. Batch jobs shall be submitted to the
+batch queue with no time constraints and shall be run by the system using
+algorithms, based on unspecified factors, that may vary with each
+invocation of
+.IR batch .
+.P
+Users shall be permitted to use
+.IR batch
+if their name appears in the file
+.BR at.allow
+which is located in an implementation-defined directory.
+If that file does not exist, the file
+.BR at.deny ,
+which is located in an implementation-defined directory,
+shall be checked to determine whether the user shall be denied access to
+.IR batch .
+If neither file exists, only a process with appropriate privileges
+shall be allowed to submit a job. If only
+.BR at.deny
+exists and is empty, global usage shall be permitted. The
+.BR at.allow
+and
+.BR at.deny
+files shall consist of one user name per line.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+None.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be a text file consisting of commands
+acceptable to the shell command language described in
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language".
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The text files
+.BR at.allow
+and
+.BR at.deny ,
+which are located in an implementation-defined directory,
+shall contain zero or more user names, one per line, of users who are,
+respectively, authorized or denied access to the
+.IR at
+and
+.IR batch
+utilities.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR batch :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fILC_TIME\fP" 10
+Determine the format and contents for date and time strings written by
+.IR batch .
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fISHELL\fP" 10
+Determine the name of a command interpreter to be used to invoke the
+at-job. If the variable is unset or null,
+.IR sh
+shall be used. If it is set to a value other than a name for
+.IR sh ,
+the implementation shall do one of the following: use that shell; use
+.IR sh ;
+use the login shell from the user database; any of the preceding
+accompanied by a warning diagnostic about which was chosen.
+.IP "\fITZ\fP" 10
+Determine the timezone. The job shall be submitted for execution at the
+time specified by
+.IR timespec
+or
+.BR \(mit
+.IR time
+relative to the timezone specified by the
+.IR TZ
+variable. If
+.IR timespec
+specifies a timezone, it overrides
+.IR TZ .
+If
+.IR timespec
+does not specify a timezone and
+.IR TZ
+is unset or null, an unspecified default timezone shall be used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+When standard input is a terminal, prompts of unspecified format for
+each line of the user input described in the STDIN section may be
+written to standard output.
+.SH STDERR
+The following shall be written to standard error when a job has been
+successfully submitted:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"job %s at %s\en", \fIat_job_id\fR, <\fIdate\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR date
+shall be equivalent in format to the output of:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+date +"%a %b %e %T %Y"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The date and time written shall be adjusted so that they appear in the
+timezone of the user (as determined by the
+.IR TZ
+variable).
+.P
+Neither this, nor warning messages concerning the selection of the
+command interpreter, are considered a diagnostic that changes the exit
+status.
+.P
+Diagnostic messages, if any, shall be written to standard error.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+The job shall not be scheduled.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+It may be useful to redirect standard output within the specified
+commands.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+This sequence can be used at a terminal:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+batch
+sort < file >outfile
+EOT
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+This sequence, which demonstrates redirecting standard error to a pipe,
+is useful in a command procedure (the sequence of output redirection
+specifications is significant):
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+batch <<!
+diff file1 file2 2>&1 >outfile | mailx mygroup
+!
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+Early proposals described
+.IR batch
+in a manner totally separated from
+.IR at ,
+even though the historical model treated it almost as a synonym for
+.IR at
+.BR \(miqb .
+A number of features were added to list and control batch work
+separately from those in
+.IR at .
+Upon further reflection, it was decided that the benefit of this did
+not merit the change to the historical interface.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mim
+option was included on the equivalent
+.IR at
+command because it is historical practice to mail results to the
+submitter, even if all job-produced output is redirected. As explained
+in the RATIONALE for
+.IR at ,
+the
+.BR now
+keyword submits the job for immediate execution (after scheduling
+delays), despite some historical systems where
+.IR at
+.BR now
+would have been considered an error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIat\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/bc.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/bc.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a535d59
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/bc.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,1615 @@
+'\" et
+.TH BC "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+bc
+\(em arbitrary-precision arithmetic language
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+bc \fB[\fR\(mil\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR bc
+utility shall implement an arbitrary precision calculator. It shall
+take input from any files given, then read from the standard input. If
+the standard input and standard output to
+.IR bc
+are attached to a terminal, the invocation of
+.IR bc
+shall be considered to be
+.IR interactive ,
+causing behavioral constraints described in the following sections.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR bc
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mil\fP" 10
+(The letter ell.) Define the math functions and initialize
+.IR scale
+to 20, instead of the default zero; see the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION
+section.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a text file containing
+.IR bc
+program statements. After all
+.IR file s
+have been read,
+.IR bc
+shall read the standard input.
+.SH STDIN
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+Input files shall be text files containing a sequence of comments,
+statements, and function definitions that shall be executed as they are
+read.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR bc :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The output of the
+.IR bc
+utility shall be controlled by the program read, and consist of zero or
+more lines containing the value of all executed expressions without
+assignments. The radix and precision of the output shall be controlled
+by the values of the
+.BR obase
+and
+.BR scale
+variables; see the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+.SS "Grammar"
+.P
+The grammar in this section and the lexical conventions in the
+following section shall together describe the syntax for
+.IR bc
+programs. The general conventions for this style of grammar are
+described in
+.IR "Section 1.3" ", " "Grammar Conventions".
+A valid program can be represented as the non-terminal symbol
+.BR program
+in the grammar. This formal syntax shall take precedence over the
+text syntax description.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+%token    EOF NEWLINE STRING LETTER NUMBER
+.P
+%token    MUL_OP
+/*        '*', '/', '%'                           */
+.P
+%token    ASSIGN_OP
+/*        '=', '+=', '\(mi=', '*=', '/=', '%=', '^=' */
+.P
+%token    REL_OP
+/*        '==', '<=', '>=', '!=', '<', '>'        */
+.P
+%token    INCR_DECR
+/*        '++', '\(mi\|\(mi'                              */
+.P
+%token    Define    Break    Quit    Length
+/*        'define', 'break', 'quit', 'length'     */
+.P
+%token    Return    For    If    While    Sqrt
+/*        'return', 'for', 'if', 'while', 'sqrt'  */
+.P
+%token    Scale    Ibase    Obase    Auto
+/*        'scale', 'ibase', 'obase', 'auto'       */
+.P
+%start    program
+.P
+%%
+.P
+program              : EOF
+                     | input_item program
+                     ;
+.P
+input_item           : semicolon_list NEWLINE
+                     | function
+                     ;
+.P
+semicolon_list       : /* empty */
+                     | statement
+                     | semicolon_list ';' statement
+                     | semicolon_list ';'
+                     ;
+.P
+statement_list       : /* empty */
+                     | statement
+                     | statement_list NEWLINE
+                     | statement_list NEWLINE statement
+                     | statement_list ';'
+                     | statement_list ';' statement
+                     ;
+.P
+statement            : expression
+                     | STRING
+                     | Break
+                     | Quit
+                     | Return
+                     | Return '(' return_expression ')'
+                     | For '(' expression ';'
+                           relational_expression ';'
+                           expression ')' statement
+                     | If '(' relational_expression ')' statement
+                     | While '(' relational_expression ')' statement
+                     | '{' statement_list '}'
+                     ;
+.P
+function             : Define LETTER '(' opt_parameter_list ')'
+                           '{' NEWLINE opt_auto_define_list
+                           statement_list '}'
+                     ;
+.P
+opt_parameter_list   : /* empty */
+                     | parameter_list
+                     ;
+.P
+parameter_list       : LETTER
+                     | define_list ',' LETTER
+                     ;
+.P
+opt_auto_define_list : /* empty */
+                     | Auto define_list NEWLINE
+                     | Auto define_list ';'
+                     ;
+.P
+define_list          : LETTER
+                     | LETTER '[' ']'
+                     | define_list ',' LETTER
+                     | define_list ',' LETTER '[' ']'
+                     ;
+.P
+opt_argument_list    : /* empty */
+                     | argument_list
+                     ;
+.P
+argument_list        : expression
+                     | LETTER '[' ']' ',' argument_list
+                     ;
+.P
+relational_expression : expression
+                     | expression REL_OP expression
+                     ;
+.P
+return_expression    : /* empty */
+                     | expression
+                     ;
+.P
+expression           : named_expression
+                     | NUMBER
+                     | '(' expression ')'
+                     | LETTER '(' opt_argument_list ')'
+                     | '\(mi' expression
+                     | expression '+' expression
+                     | expression '\(mi' expression
+                     | expression MUL_OP expression
+                     | expression '^' expression
+                     | INCR_DECR named_expression
+                     | named_expression INCR_DECR
+                     | named_expression ASSIGN_OP expression
+                     | Length '(' expression ')'
+                     | Sqrt '(' expression ')'
+                     | Scale '(' expression ')'
+                     ;
+.P
+named_expression     : LETTER
+                     | LETTER '[' expression ']'
+                     | Scale
+                     | Ibase
+                     | Obase
+                     ;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Lexical Conventions in bc"
+.P
+The lexical conventions for
+.IR bc
+programs, with respect to the preceding grammar, shall be as follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Except as noted,
+.IR bc
+shall recognize the longest possible token or delimiter beginning at a
+given point.
+.IP " 2." 4
+A comment shall consist of any characters beginning with the two adjacent
+characters
+.BR \(dq/*\(dq 
+and terminated by the next occurrence of the two adjacent characters
+.BR \(dq*/\(dq .
+Comments shall have no effect except to delimit lexical tokens.
+.IP " 3." 4
+The
+<newline>
+shall be recognized as the token
+.BR NEWLINE .
+.IP " 4." 4
+The token
+.BR STRING
+shall represent a string constant; it shall consist of any characters
+beginning with the double-quote character (\c
+.BR '\&"' )
+and terminated by another occurrence of the double-quote character. The
+value of the string is the sequence of all characters between, but not
+including, the two double-quote characters. All characters shall be
+taken literally from the input, and there is no way to specify a string
+containing a double-quote character. The length of the value of each
+string shall be limited to
+{BC_STRING_MAX}
+bytes.
+.IP " 5." 4
+A
+<blank>
+shall have no effect except as an ordinary character if it appears
+within a
+.BR STRING
+token, or to delimit a lexical token other than
+.BR STRING .
+.IP " 6." 4
+The combination of a
+<backslash>
+character immediately followed by a
+<newline>
+shall have no effect other than to delimit lexical tokens with the
+following exceptions:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " *" 4
+It shall be interpreted as the character sequence
+.BR \(dq\e<newline>\(dq 
+in
+.BR STRING
+tokens.
+.IP " *" 4
+It shall be ignored as part of a multi-line
+.BR NUMBER
+token.
+.RE
+.IP " 7." 4
+The token
+.BR NUMBER
+shall represent a numeric constant. It shall be recognized by the
+following grammar:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+NUMBER  : integer
+        | '.' integer
+        | integer '.'
+        | integer '.' integer
+        ;
+.P
+integer : digit
+        | integer digit
+        ;
+.P
+digit   : 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7
+        | 8 | 9 | A | B | C | D | E | F
+        ;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 8." 4
+The value of a
+.BR NUMBER
+token shall be interpreted as a numeral in the base specified by the
+value of the internal register
+.BR ibase
+(described below). Each of the
+.BR digit
+characters shall have the value from 0 to 15 in the order listed here,
+and the
+<period>
+character shall represent the radix point. The behavior is undefined if
+digits greater than or equal to the value of
+.BR ibase
+appear in the token. However, note the exception for single-digit
+values being assigned to
+.BR ibase
+and
+.BR obase
+themselves, in
+.IR "Operations in bc".
+.IP " 9." 4
+The following keywords shall be recognized as tokens:
+.TS
+tab(@);
+lBw(0.6i)e lBe lBe lBe lBe.
+T{
+.nf
+auto
+break
+define
+T}@T{
+.nf
+ibase
+if
+for
+T}@T{
+.nf
+length
+obase
+quit
+T}@T{
+.nf
+return
+scale
+sqrt
+T}@T{
+.nf
+while
+.fi
+T}
+.TE
+.IP 10. 4
+Any of the following characters occurring anywhere except within a
+keyword shall be recognized as the token
+.BR LETTER :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP 11. 4
+The following single-character and two-character sequences shall be
+recognized as the token
+.BR ASSIGN_OP :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+=   +=   \(mi=   *=   /=   %=   ^=
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP 12. 4
+If an
+.BR '=' 
+character, as the beginning of a token, is followed by a
+.BR '\(mi' 
+character with no intervening delimiter, the behavior is undefined.
+.IP 13. 4
+The following single-characters shall be recognized as the token
+.BR MUL_OP :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+*   /   %
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP 14. 4
+The following single-character and two-character sequences shall be
+recognized as the token
+.BR REL_OP :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+==   <=   >=   !=   <   >
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP 15. 4
+The following two-character sequences shall be recognized as the token
+.BR INCR_DECR :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+++   \(mi\|\(mi
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP 16. 4
+The following single characters shall be recognized as tokens whose
+names are the character:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<newline>  (  )  ,  +  \(mi  ;  [  ]  ^  {  }
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP 17. 4
+The token
+.BR EOF
+is returned when the end of input is reached.
+.SS "Operations in bc"
+.P
+There are three kinds of identifiers: ordinary identifiers, array
+identifiers, and function identifiers.
+All three types consist of single lowercase letters. Array identifiers
+shall be followed by square brackets (\c
+.BR \(dq[]\(dq ).
+An array subscript is required except in an argument or auto list.
+Arrays are singly dimensioned and can contain up to
+{BC_DIM_MAX}
+elements. Indexing shall begin at zero so an array is indexed from 0 to
+{BC_DIM_MAX}\(mi1.
+Subscripts shall be truncated to integers. The application shall ensure
+that function identifiers are followed by parentheses, possibly
+enclosing arguments. The three types of identifiers do not conflict.
+.P
+The following table summarizes the rules for precedence and
+associativity of all operators. Operators on the same line shall have
+the same precedence; rows are in order of decreasing precedence.
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable: Operators in \fIbc\fP\fR
+.TS
+center tab(@) box;
+cB | cB
+lf5 | l.
+Operator@Associativity
+_
+++, \(mi\|\(mi@N/A
+unary \(mi@N/A
+\&^@Right to left
+*, /, %@Left to right
++, binary \(mi@Left to right
+=, +=, \(mi=, *=, /=, %=, ^=@Right to left
+==, <=, >=, !=, <, >@None
+.TE
+.P
+Each expression or named expression has a
+.IR scale ,
+which is the number of decimal digits that shall be maintained as the
+fractional portion of the expression.
+.P
+.IR "Named expressions"
+are places where values are stored. Named expressions shall be valid on
+the left side of an assignment. The value of a named expression shall
+be the value stored in the place named. Simple identifiers and array
+elements are named expressions; they have an initial value of zero and
+an initial scale of zero.
+.P
+The internal registers
+.BR scale ,
+.BR ibase ,
+and
+.BR obase
+are all named expressions. The scale of an expression consisting of the
+name of one of these registers shall be zero; values assigned to any of
+these registers are truncated to integers. The
+.BR scale
+register shall contain a global value used in computing the scale of
+expressions (as described below). The value of the register
+.BR scale
+is limited to 0 \(<=
+.BR scale
+\(<=
+{BC_SCALE_MAX}
+and shall have a default value of zero. The
+.BR ibase
+and
+.BR obase
+registers are the input and output number radix, respectively. The
+value of
+.BR ibase
+shall be limited to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+2 \(<= ibase \(<= 16
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The value of
+.BR obase
+shall be limited to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+2 \(<= obase \(<= {BC_BASE_MAX}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+When either
+.BR ibase
+or
+.BR obase
+is assigned a single
+.BR digit
+value from the list in
+.IR "Lexical Conventions in bc",
+the value shall be assumed in hexadecimal. (For example,
+.BR ibase =A
+sets to base ten, regardless of the current
+.BR ibase
+value.) Otherwise, the behavior is undefined when digits greater than
+or equal to the value of
+.BR ibase
+appear in the input. Both
+.BR ibase
+and
+.BR obase
+shall have initial values of 10.
+.P
+Internal computations shall be conducted as if in decimal, regardless
+of the input and output bases, to the specified number of decimal
+digits. When an exact result is not achieved (for example,
+.BR scale "=0;\ 3.2/1)",
+the result shall be truncated.
+.P
+For all values of
+.BR obase
+specified by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR bc
+shall output numeric values by performing each of the following steps
+in order:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the value is less than zero, a
+<hyphen>
+(\c
+.BR '\(mi' )
+character shall be output.
+.IP " 2." 4
+One of the following is output, depending on the numerical value:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " *" 4
+If the absolute value of the numerical value is greater than or equal
+to one, the integer portion of the value shall be output as a series of
+digits appropriate to
+.BR obase
+(as described below), most significant digit first. The most significant
+non-zero digit shall be output next, followed by each successively
+less significant digit.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the absolute value of the numerical value is less than one but
+greater than zero and the scale of the numerical value is greater than
+zero, it is unspecified whether the character 0 is output.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the numerical value is zero, the character 0 shall be output.
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+If the scale of the value is greater than zero and the numeric value
+is not zero, a
+<period>
+character shall be output, followed by a series of digits appropriate to
+.BR obase
+(as described below) representing the most significant portion of the
+fractional part of the value. If
+.IR s
+represents the scale of the value being output, the number of digits
+output shall be
+.IR s
+if
+.BR obase
+is 10, less than or equal to
+.IR s
+if
+.BR obase
+is greater than 10, or greater than or equal to
+.IR s
+if
+.BR obase
+is less than 10. For
+.BR obase
+values other than 10, this should be the number of digits needed to
+represent a precision of 10\u\s-3\fIs\fP\s+3\d.
+.P
+For
+.BR obase
+values from 2 to 16, valid digits are the first
+.BR obase
+of the single characters:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7  8  9  A  B  C  D  E  F
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+which represent the values zero to 15, inclusive, respectively.
+.P
+For bases greater than 16, each digit shall be written as a separate
+multi-digit decimal number. Each digit except the most significant
+fractional digit shall be preceded by a single
+<space>.
+For bases from 17 to 100,
+.IR bc
+shall write two-digit decimal numbers; for bases from 101 to 1\|000,
+three-digit decimal strings, and so on. For example, the decimal number
+1\|024 in base 25 would be written as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ 01 15 24
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and in base 125, as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ 008 024
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Very large numbers shall be split across lines with 70 characters per
+line in the POSIX locale; other locales may split at different
+character boundaries. Lines that are continued shall end with a
+<backslash>.
+.P
+A function call shall consist of a function name followed by
+parentheses containing a
+<comma>-separated
+list of expressions, which are the function arguments. A whole array
+passed as an argument shall be specified by the array name followed
+by empty square brackets. All function arguments shall be passed by
+value. As a result, changes made to the formal parameters shall have no
+effect on the actual arguments. If the function terminates by executing a
+.BR return
+statement, the value of the function shall be the value of the
+expression in the parentheses of the
+.BR return
+statement or shall be zero if no expression is provided or if there is
+no
+.BR return
+statement.
+.P
+The result of
+.BR sqrt (\c
+.IR expression )
+shall be the square root of the expression. The result shall be
+truncated in the least significant decimal place. The scale of the
+result shall be the scale of the expression or the value of
+.BR scale ,
+whichever is larger.
+.P
+The result of
+.BR length (\c
+.IR expression )
+shall be the total number of significant decimal digits in the
+expression. The scale of the result shall be zero.
+.P
+The result of
+.BR scale (\c
+.IR expression )
+shall be the scale of the expression. The scale of the result shall be
+zero.
+.P
+A numeric constant shall be an expression. The scale shall be the
+number of digits that follow the radix point in the input representing
+the constant, or zero if no radix point appears.
+.P
+The sequence (\ \fIexpression\fP\ ) shall be an expression with the
+same value and scale as
+.IR expression .
+The parentheses can be used to alter the normal precedence.
+.P
+The semantics of the unary and binary operators are as follows:
+.IP "\(mi\fIexpression\fP" 6
+.br
+The result shall be the negative of the
+.IR expression .
+The scale of the result shall be the scale of
+.IR expression .
+.P
+The unary increment and decrement operators shall not modify the scale
+of the named expression upon which they operate. The scale of the
+result shall be the scale of that named expression.
+.IP "++\fInamed-expression\fP" 6
+.br
+The named expression shall be incremented by one. The result shall be
+the value of the named expression after incrementing.
+.IP "\(mi\|\(mi\fInamed-expression\fP" 6
+.br
+The named expression shall be decremented by one. The result shall be
+the value of the named expression after decrementing.
+.IP "\fInamed-expression\fP++" 6
+.br
+The named expression shall be incremented by one. The result shall be
+the value of the named expression before incrementing.
+.IP "\fInamed-expression\fP\(mi\|\(mi" 6
+.br
+The named expression shall be decremented by one. The result shall be
+the value of the named expression before decrementing.
+.P
+The exponentiation operator,
+<circumflex>
+(\c
+.BR '^' ),
+shall bind right to left.
+.IP "\fIexpression\fP^\fIexpression\fP" 6
+.br
+The result shall be the first
+.IR expression
+raised to the power of the second
+.IR expression .
+If the second expression is not an integer, the behavior is undefined.
+If
+.IR a
+is the scale of the left expression and
+.IR b
+is the absolute value of the right expression, the scale of the result
+shall be:
+.RS 6 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+if b >= 0 min(a * b, max(scale, a)) if b < 0 scale
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+The multiplicative operators (\c
+.BR '*' ,
+.BR '/' ,
+.BR '%' )
+shall bind left to right.
+.IP "\fIexpression\fP*\fIexpression\fP" 6
+.br
+The result shall be the product of the two expressions. If
+.IR a
+and
+.IR b
+are the scales of the two expressions, then the scale of the result
+shall be:
+.RS 6 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+min(a+b,max(scale,a,b))
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP "\fIexpression\fP/\fIexpression\fP" 6
+.br
+The result shall be the quotient of the two expressions. The scale of the
+result shall be the value of
+.BR scale .
+.IP "\fIexpression\fP%\fIexpression\fP" 6
+.br
+For expressions
+.IR a
+and
+.IR b ,
+.IR a %\c
+.IR b
+shall be evaluated equivalent to the steps:
+.RS 6 
+.IP " 1." 4
+Compute
+.IR a /\c
+.IR b
+to current scale.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Use the result to compute:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+a \(mi (a / b) * b
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+to scale:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+max(scale + scale(b), scale(a))
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+The scale of the result shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+max(scale + scale(b), scale(a))
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+When
+.BR scale
+is zero, the
+.BR '%' 
+operator is the mathematical remainder operator.
+.RE
+.P
+The additive operators (\c
+.BR '\(pl' ,
+.BR '\(mi' )
+shall bind left to right.
+.IP "\fIexpression\fP+\fIexpression\fP" 6
+.br
+The result shall be the sum of the two expressions. The scale of the
+result shall be the maximum of the scales of the expressions.
+.IP "\fIexpression\fP\(mi\fIexpression\fP" 6
+.br
+The result shall be the difference of the two expressions. The scale of
+the result shall be the maximum of the scales of the expressions.
+.P
+The assignment operators (\c
+.BR '=' ,
+.BR \(dq+=\(dq ,
+.BR \(dq\(mi=\(dq ,
+.BR \(dq*=\(dq ,
+.BR \(dq/=\(dq ,
+.BR \(dq%=\(dq ,
+.BR \(dq^=\(dq )
+shall bind right to left.
+.IP "\fInamed-expression\fP=\fIexpression\fP" 6
+.br
+This expression shall result in assigning the value of the expression
+on the right to the named expression on the left. The scale of both the
+named expression and the result shall be the scale of
+.IR expression .
+.P
+The compound assignment forms:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fInamed-expression\fR <\fIoperator\fR>= \fIexpression\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+shall be equivalent to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fInamed-expression\fR=\fInamed-expression\fR <\fIoperator\fR> \fIexpression\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+except that the
+.IR named-expression
+shall be evaluated only once.
+.P
+Unlike all other operators, the relational operators (\c
+.BR '<' ,
+.BR '>' ,
+.BR \(dq<=\(dq ,
+.BR \(dq>=\(dq ,
+.BR \(dq==\(dq ,
+.BR \(dq!=\(dq )
+shall be only valid as the object of an
+.BR if ,
+.BR while ,
+or inside a
+.BR for
+statement.
+.IP "\fIexpression1\fP<\fIexpression2\fR" 6
+.br
+The relation shall be true if the value of
+.IR expression1
+is strictly less than the value of
+.IR expression2 .
+.IP "\fIexpression1\fP>\fIexpression2\fP" 6
+.br
+The relation shall be true if the value of
+.IR expression1
+is strictly greater than the value of
+.IR expression2 .
+.IP "\fIexpression1\fP<=\fIexpression2\fR" 6
+.br
+The relation shall be true if the value of
+.IR expression1
+is less than or equal to the value of
+.IR expression2 .
+.IP "\fIexpression1\fP>=\fIexpression2\fR" 6
+.br
+The relation shall be true if the value of
+.IR expression1
+is greater than or equal to the value of
+.IR expression2 .
+.IP "\fIexpression1\fP=\|=\fIexpression2\fR" 6
+.br
+The relation shall be true if the values of
+.IR expression1
+and
+.IR expression2
+are equal.
+.IP "\fIexpression1\fP!=\fIexpression2\fR" 6
+.br
+The relation shall be true if the values of
+.IR expression1
+and
+.IR expression2
+are unequal.
+.P
+There are only two storage classes in
+.IR bc :
+global and automatic (local).
+Only identifiers that are local to a function need be declared
+with the
+.BR auto
+command. The arguments to a function shall be local to the function.
+All other identifiers are assumed to be global and available to all
+functions. All identifiers, global and local, have initial values of
+zero. Identifiers declared as auto shall be allocated on entry to the
+function and released on returning from the function. They therefore do
+not retain values between function calls. Auto arrays shall be
+specified by the array name followed by empty square brackets. On entry
+to a function, the old values of the names that appear as parameters
+and as automatic variables shall be pushed onto a stack. Until the
+function returns, reference to these names shall refer only to the new
+values.
+.P
+References to any of these names from other functions that are called
+from this function also refer to the new value until one of those
+functions uses the same name for a local variable.
+.P
+When a statement is an expression, unless the main operator is an
+assignment, execution of the statement shall write the value of the
+expression followed by a
+<newline>.
+.P
+When a statement is a string, execution of the statement shall write
+the value of the string.
+.P
+Statements separated by
+<semicolon>
+or
+<newline>
+characters shall be executed sequentially. In an interactive invocation of
+.IR bc ,
+each time a
+<newline>
+is read that satisfies the grammatical production:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+input_item : semicolon_list NEWLINE
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+the sequential list of statements making up the
+.BR semicolon_list
+shall be executed immediately and any output produced by that execution
+shall be written without any delay due to buffering.
+.P
+In an
+.BR if
+statement (\c
+.BR if (\c
+.IR relation )
+.IR statement ),
+the
+.IR statement
+shall be executed if the relation is true.
+.P
+The
+.BR while
+statement (\c
+.BR while (\c
+.IR relation )
+.IR statement )
+implements a loop in which the
+.IR relation
+is tested; each time the
+.IR relation
+is true, the
+.IR statement
+shall be executed and the
+.IR relation
+retested. When the
+.IR relation
+is false, execution shall resume after
+.IR statement .
+.P
+A
+.BR for
+statement(\c
+.BR for (\c
+.IR expression ;
+.IR relation ;
+.IR expression )
+.IR statement )
+shall be the same as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIfirst-expression\fP
+while (\fIrelation\fP) {
+    \fIstatement\fP
+    \fIlast-expression\fR
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+The application shall ensure that all three expressions are present.
+.P
+The
+.BR break
+statement shall cause termination of a
+.BR for
+or
+.BR while
+statement.
+.P
+The
+.BR auto
+statement (\c
+.BR auto
+.IR identifier
+.BR [ ,\c
+.IR identifier \c
+.BR ]
+\&.\|.\|.) shall cause the values of the identifiers to be pushed down.
+The identifiers can be ordinary identifiers or array identifiers. Array
+identifiers shall be specified by following the array name by empty
+square brackets. The application shall ensure that the
+.BR auto
+statement is the first statement in a function definition.
+.P
+A
+.BR define
+statement:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+define \fILETTER\fP ( \fIopt_parameter_list\fP ) {
+    \fIopt_auto_define_list\fP
+    \fIstatement_list\fR
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+defines a function named
+.BR LETTER .
+If a function named
+.BR LETTER
+was previously defined, the
+.BR define
+statement shall replace the previous definition. The expression:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+LETTER ( \fIopt_argument_list\fR )
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+shall invoke the function named
+.BR LETTER .
+The behavior is undefined if the number of arguments in the invocation
+does not match the number of parameters in the definition. Functions
+shall be defined before they are invoked. A function shall be
+considered to be defined within its own body, so recursive calls are
+valid. The values of numeric constants within a function shall be
+interpreted in the base specified by the value of the
+.BR ibase
+register when the function is invoked.
+.P
+The
+.BR return
+statements (\c
+.BR return
+and
+.BR return (\c
+.IR expression ))
+shall cause termination of a function, popping of its auto variables,
+and specification of the result of the function. The first form shall
+be equivalent to
+.BR return (0).
+The value and scale of the result returned by the function shall be the
+value and scale of the expression returned.
+.P
+The
+.BR quit
+statement (\c
+.BR quit )
+shall stop execution of a
+.IR bc
+program at the point where the statement occurs in the input, even if
+it occurs in a function definition, or in an
+.BR if ,
+.BR for ,
+or
+.BR while
+statement.
+.P
+The following functions shall be defined when the
+.BR \(mil
+option is specified:
+.IP "\fBs\fR(\ \fIexpression\fR\ )" 6
+.br
+Sine of argument in radians.
+.IP "\fBc\fR(\ \fIexpression\fR\ )" 6
+.br
+Cosine of argument in radians.
+.IP "\fBa\fR(\ \fIexpression\fR\ )" 6
+.br
+Arctangent of argument.
+.IP "\fBl\fR(\ \fIexpression\fR\ )" 6
+.br
+Natural logarithm of argument.
+.IP "\fBe\fR(\ \fIexpression\fR\ )" 6
+.br
+Exponential function of argument.
+.IP "\fBj\fR(\ \fIexpression\fR,\ \fIexpression\fR\ )" 6
+.br
+Bessel function of integer order.
+.P
+The scale of the result returned by these functions shall be the value
+of the
+.BR scale
+register at the time the function is invoked. The value of the
+.BR scale
+register after these functions have completed their execution shall be
+the same value it had upon invocation. The behavior is undefined if
+any of these functions is invoked with an argument outside the domain
+of the mathematical function.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP 0 10
+All input files were processed successfully.
+.IP "\fIunspecified\fR" 10
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+If any
+.IR file
+operand is specified and the named file cannot be accessed,
+.IR bc
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error and terminate
+without any further action.
+.P
+In an interactive invocation of
+.IR bc ,
+the utility should print an error message and recover following any
+error in the input. In a non-interactive invocation of
+.IR bc ,
+invalid input causes undefined behavior.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Automatic variables in
+.IR bc
+do not work in exactly the same way as in either C or PL/1.
+.P
+For historical reasons, the exit status from
+.IR bc
+cannot be relied upon to indicate that an error has occurred.
+Returning zero after an error is possible. Therefore,
+.IR bc
+should be used primarily by interactive users (who can react to error
+messages) or by application programs that can somehow validate the
+answers returned as not including error messages.
+.P
+The
+.IR bc
+utility always uses the
+<period>
+(\c
+.BR '.' )
+character to represent a radix point, regardless of any decimal-point
+character specified as part of the current locale. In languages like C or
+.IR awk ,
+the
+<period>
+character is used in program source, so it can be portable and
+unambiguous, while the locale-specific character is used in input and
+output. Because there is no distinction between source and input in
+.IR bc ,
+this arrangement would not be possible. Using the locale-specific
+character in
+.IR bc 's
+input would introduce ambiguities into the language; consider the
+following example in a locale with a
+<comma>
+as the decimal-point character:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+define f(a,b) {
+    ...
+}
+\&...
+.P
+f(1,2,3)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Because of such ambiguities, the
+<period>
+character is used in input. Having input follow different conventions
+from output would be confusing in either pipeline usage or interactive
+usage, so the
+<period>
+is also used in output.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+In the shell, the following assigns an approximation of the first ten
+digits of
+.BR '\(*p' 
+to the variable
+.IR x :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+x=$(printf "%s\en" 'scale = 10; 104348/33215' | bc)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following
+.IR bc
+program prints the same approximation of
+.BR '\(*p' ,
+with a label, to standard output:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+scale = 10
+"pi equals "
+104348 / 33215
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following defines a function to compute an approximate value of the
+exponential function (note that such a function is predefined if the
+.BR \(mil
+option is specified):
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+scale = 20
+define e(x){
+    auto a, b, c, i, s
+    a = 1
+    b = 1
+    s = 1
+    for (i = 1; 1 == 1; i++){
+        a = a*x
+        b = b*i
+        c = a/b
+        if (c == 0) {
+             return(s)
+        }
+        s = s+c
+    }
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following prints approximate values of the exponential function of
+the first ten integers:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+for (i = 1; i <= 10; ++i) {
+    e(i)
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR bc
+utility is implemented historically as a front-end processor for
+.IR dc ;
+.IR dc
+was not selected to be part of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 because
+.IR bc
+was thought to have a more intuitive programmatic interface. Current
+implementations that implement
+.IR bc
+using
+.IR dc
+are expected to be compliant.
+.P
+The exit status for error conditions has been left unspecified for
+several reasons:
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+.IR bc
+utility is used in both interactive and non-interactive situations.
+Different exit codes may be appropriate for the two uses.
+.IP " *" 4
+It is unclear when a non-zero exit should be given; divide-by-zero,
+undefined functions, and syntax errors are all possibilities.
+.IP " *" 4
+It is not clear what utility the exit status has.
+.IP " *" 4
+In the 4.3 BSD, System V, and Ninth Edition implementations,
+.IR bc
+works in conjunction with
+.IR dc .
+The
+.IR dc
+utility is the parent,
+.IR bc
+is the child. This was done to cleanly terminate
+.IR bc
+if
+.IR dc
+aborted.
+.P
+The decision to have
+.IR bc
+exit upon encountering an inaccessible input file is based on the
+belief that
+.IR bc
+.IR file1
+.IR file2
+is used most often when at least
+.IR file1
+contains data/function declarations/initializations. Having
+.IR bc
+continue with prerequisite files missing is probably not useful. There
+is no implication in the CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS section that
+.IR bc
+must check all its files for accessibility before opening any of them.
+.P
+There was considerable debate on the appropriateness of the language
+accepted by
+.IR bc .
+Several reviewers preferred to see either a pure subset of the C
+language or some changes to make the language more compatible with C.
+While the
+.IR bc
+language has some obvious similarities to C, it has never claimed to be
+compatible with any version of C. An interpreter for a subset of C
+might be a very worthwhile utility, and it could potentially make
+.IR bc
+obsolete. However, no such utility is known in historical practice, and
+it was not within the scope of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 to define such a language and
+utility. If and when they are defined, it may be appropriate to include
+them in a future version of this standard. This left the following
+alternatives:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Exclude any calculator language from this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+The consensus of the standard developers was that a simple programmatic
+calculator language is very useful for both applications and
+interactive users. The only arguments for excluding any calculator were
+that it would become obsolete if and when a C-compatible one emerged,
+or that the absence would encourage the development of such a
+C-compatible one. These arguments did not sufficiently address the
+needs of current application developers.
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+Standardize the historical
+.IR dc ,
+possibly with minor modifications.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+The consensus of the standard developers was that
+.IR dc
+is a fundamentally less usable language and that that would be far too
+severe a penalty for avoiding the issue of being similar to but
+incompatible with C.
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+Standardize the historical
+.IR bc ,
+possibly with minor modifications.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+This was the approach taken. Most of the proponents of changing the
+language would not have been satisfied until most or all of the
+incompatibilities with C were resolved. Since most of the changes
+considered most desirable would break historical applications and
+require significant modification to historical implementations, almost
+no modifications were made. The one significant modification that was
+made was the replacement of the historical
+.IR bc
+assignment operators
+.BR \(dq=+\(dq ,
+and so on, with the more modern
+.BR \(dq+=\(dq ,
+and so on. The older versions are considered to be fundamentally flawed
+because of the lexical ambiguity in uses like
+.IR a =\(mi1.
+.P
+In order to permit implementations to deal with backwards-compatibility
+as they see fit, the behavior of this one ambiguous construct was made
+undefined. (At least three implementations have been known to support
+this change already, so the degree of change involved should not be
+great.)
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR '%' 
+operator is the mathematical remainder operator when
+.BR scale
+is zero. The behavior of this operator for other values of
+.BR scale
+is from historical implementations of
+.IR bc ,
+and has been maintained for the sake of historical applications despite
+its non-intuitive nature.
+.P
+Historical implementations permit setting
+.BR ibase
+and
+.BR obase
+to a broader range of values. This includes values less than 2, which
+were not seen as sufficiently useful to standardize. These
+implementations do not interpret input properly for values of
+.BR ibase
+that are greater than 16. This is because numeric constants are
+recognized syntactically, rather than lexically, as described in
+\&this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. They are built from lexical tokens of single hexadecimal digits
+and
+<period>
+characters. Since
+<blank>
+characters between tokens are not visible at the syntactic level, it is
+not possible to recognize the multi-digit ``digits'' used in the higher
+bases properly. The ability to recognize input in these bases was not
+considered useful enough to require modifying these implementations.
+Note that the recognition of numeric constants at the syntactic level
+is not a problem with conformance to this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, as it does not impact the
+behavior of conforming applications (and correct
+.IR bc
+programs). Historical implementations also accept input with all of the
+digits
+.BR '0' \(mi\c
+.BR '9' 
+and
+.BR 'A' \(mi\c
+.BR 'F' 
+regardless of the value of
+.BR ibase ;
+since digits with value greater than or equal to
+.BR ibase
+are not really appropriate, the behavior when they appear is undefined,
+except for the common case of:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ibase=8;
+    /* Process in octal base. */
+\&...
+ibase=A
+    /* Restore decimal base. */
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In some historical implementations, if the expression to be written is
+an uninitialized array element, a leading
+<space>
+and/or up to four leading 0 characters may be output before the
+character zero. This behavior is considered a bug; it is unlikely that
+any currently conforming application relies on:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+echo 'b[3]' | bc
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+returning 00000 rather than 0.
+.P
+Exact calculation of the number of fractional digits to output for a
+given value in a base other than 10 can be computationally expensive.
+Historical implementations use a faster approximation, and this is
+permitted. Note that the requirements apply only to values of
+.BR obase
+that this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires implementations to support (in particular, not to
+1, 0, or negative bases, if an implementation supports them as an
+extension).
+.P
+Historical implementations of
+.IR bc
+did not allow array parameters to be passed as the last parameter to a
+function. New implementations are encouraged to remove this restriction
+even though it is not required by the grammar.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 1.3" ", " "Grammar Conventions",
+.IR "\fIawk\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/bg.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/bg.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..44c09d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/bg.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,222 @@
+'\" et
+.TH BG "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+bg
+\(em run jobs in the background
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+bg \fB[\fIjob_id\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+If job control is enabled (see the description of
+.IR set
+.BR \(mim ),
+the
+.IR bg
+utility shall resume suspended jobs from the current environment (see
+.IR "Section 2.12" ", " "Shell Execution Environment")
+by running them as background jobs. If the job specified by
+.IR job_id
+is already a running background job, the
+.IR bg
+utility shall have no effect and shall exit successfully.
+.P
+Using
+.IR bg
+to place a job into the background shall cause its process ID to become
+``known in the current shell execution environment'', as if it had been
+started as an asynchronous list; see
+.IR "Section 2.9.3.1" ", " "Examples".
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIjob_id\fR" 10
+Specify the job to be resumed as a background job. If no
+.IR job_id
+operand is given, the most recently suspended job shall be used. The
+format of
+.IR job_id
+is described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.204" ", " "Job Control Job ID".
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR bg :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The output of
+.IR bg
+shall consist of a line in the format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"[%d] %s\en", <\fIjob-number\fR>, <\fIcommand\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where the fields are as follows:
+.IP "<\fIjob-number\fR>" 10
+A number that can be used to identify the job to the
+.IR wait ,
+.IR fg ,
+and
+.IR kill
+utilities. Using these utilities, the job can be identified by
+prefixing the job number with
+.BR '%' .
+.IP "<\fIcommand\fR>" 10
+The associated command that was given to the shell.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+If job control is disabled, the
+.IR bg
+utility shall exit with an error and no job shall be placed in the
+background.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+A job is generally suspended by typing the SUSP character
+(<control>\(hyZ on most systems); see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+At that point,
+.IR bg
+can put the job into the background. This is most effective when the
+job is expecting no terminal input and its output has been redirected
+to non-terminal files. A background job can be forced to stop when it
+has terminal output by issuing the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+stty tostop
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+A background job can be stopped with the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+kill \(mis stop \fIjob ID\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR bg
+utility does not work as expected when it is operating in its own
+utility execution environment because that environment has no suspended
+jobs. In the following examples:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\&... | xargs bg
+(bg)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+each
+.IR bg
+operates in a different environment and does not share its parent
+shell's understanding of jobs. For this reason,
+.IR bg
+is generally implemented as a shell regular built-in.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The extensions to the shell specified in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 have mostly been based
+on features provided by the KornShell. The job control features
+provided by
+.IR bg ,
+.IR fg ,
+and
+.IR jobs
+are also based on the KornShell. The standard developers examined the
+characteristics of the C shell versions of these utilities and found
+that differences exist. Despite widespread use of the C shell, the
+KornShell versions were selected for this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 to maintain a degree of
+uniformity with the rest of the KornShell features selected (such as
+the very popular command line editing features).
+.P
+The
+.IR bg
+utility is expected to wrap its output if the output exceeds the number
+of display columns.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.9.3.1" ", " "Examples",
+.IR "\fIfg\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIjobs\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.204" ", " "Job Control Job ID",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/break.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/break.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..77cf59a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/break.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,134 @@
+'\" et
+.TH BREAK "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+break
+\(em exit from for, while, or until loop
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+break \fB[\fIn\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR break
+utility shall exit from the smallest enclosing
+.BR for ,
+.BR while ,
+or
+.BR until
+loop, if any; or from the
+.IR n th
+enclosing loop if
+.IR n
+is specified. The value of
+.IR n
+is an unsigned decimal integer greater than or equal to 1. The default
+shall be equivalent to
+.IR n =1.
+If
+.IR n
+is greater than the number of enclosing loops, the outermost enclosing
+loop shall be exited. Execution shall continue with the command
+immediately following the loop.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+None.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+The
+.IR n
+value was not an unsigned decimal integer greater than or equal to 1.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.LP
+.nf
+for i in *
+do
+    if test \(mid "$i"
+    then break
+    fi
+done
+.fi
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+In early proposals, consideration was given to expanding the syntax of
+.IR break
+and
+.IR continue
+to refer to a label associated with the appropriate loop as a
+preferable alternative to the
+.IR n
+method. However, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does reserve the name space of command names
+ending with a
+<colon>.
+It is anticipated that a future implementation could take advantage of
+this and provide something like:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+outofloop: for i in a b c d e
+do
+    for j in 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
+    do
+        if test \(mir "${i}${j}"
+        then break outofloop
+        fi
+    done
+done
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and that this might be standardized after implementation experience is
+achieved.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/c99.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/c99.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..386b094
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/c99.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,1152 @@
+'\" et
+.TH C99 "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+c99
+\(em compile standard C programs
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+c99 \fB[\fIoptions\fR...\fB] \fIpathname \fB[[\fIpathname\fB] [\fR\(miI \fIdirectory\fB]
+    \fB[\fR\(miL \fIdirectory\fB] [\fR\(mil \fIlibrary\fB]]\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR c99
+utility is an interface to the standard C compilation system; it shall
+accept source code conforming to the ISO\ C standard. The system conceptually
+consists of a compiler and link editor. The input files referenced by
+.IR pathname
+operands and
+.BR \(mil
+option-arguments shall be compiled and linked to produce an executable
+file. (It is unspecified whether the linking occurs entirely within the
+operation of
+.IR c99 ;
+some implementations may produce objects that are not fully resolved
+until the file is executed.)
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mic
+option is specified, for all pathname operands of the form
+.IR file \c
+.BR .c ,
+the files:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+$(basename \fIpathname\fR .c).o
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+shall be created as the result of successful compilation. If the
+.BR \(mic
+option is not specified, it is unspecified whether such
+.BR .o
+files are created or deleted for the
+.IR file \c
+.BR .c
+operands.
+.P
+If there are no options that prevent link editing (such as
+.BR \(mic
+or
+.BR \(miE ),
+and all input files compile and link without error, the resulting
+executable file shall be written according to the
+.BR \(mio
+.IR outfile
+option (if present) or to the file
+.BR a.out .
+.P
+The executable file shall be created as specified in
+.IR "Section 1.1.1.4" ", " "File Read" ", " "Write" ", " "and Creation",
+except that the file permission bits shall be set to:
+S_IRWXO | S_IRWXG | S_IRWXU
+.P
+and the bits specified by the
+.IR umask
+of the process shall be cleared.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR c99
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except that:
+.IP " *" 4
+Options can be interspersed with operands.
+.IP " *" 4
+The order of specifying the
+.BR \(miL
+and
+.BR \(mil
+options, and the order of specifying
+.BR \(mil
+options with respect to
+.IR pathname
+operands is significant.
+.IP " *" 4
+Conforming applications shall specify each option separately; that is,
+grouping option letters (for example,
+.BR \(micO )
+need not be recognized by all implementations.
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Suppress the link-edit phase of the compilation, and do not remove any
+object files that are produced.
+.IP "\fB\(miD\ \fIname\fB[=\fIvalue\fB]\fR" 10
+.br
+Define
+.IR name
+as if by a C-language
+.BR #define
+directive. If no =\c
+.IR value
+is given, a value of 1 shall be used. The
+.BR \(miD
+option has lower precedence than the
+.BR \(miU
+option. That is, if
+.IR name
+is used in both a
+.BR \(miU
+and a
+.BR \(miD
+option,
+.IR name
+shall be undefined regardless of the order of the options. Additional
+implementation-defined
+.IR name s
+may be provided by the compiler. Implementations shall support at least
+2\|048 bytes of
+.BR \(miD
+definitions and 256
+.IR names .
+.IP "\fB\(miE\fP" 10
+Copy C-language source files to standard output, expanding all
+preprocessor directives; no compilation shall be performed. If any
+operand is not a text file, the effects are unspecified.
+.IP "\fB\(mig\fP" 10
+Produce symbolic information in the object or executable files; the
+nature of this information is unspecified, and may be modified by
+implementation-defined interactions with other options.
+.IP "\fB\(miI\ \fIdirectory\fR" 10
+Change the algorithm for searching for headers whose names are not
+absolute pathnames to look in the directory named by the
+.IR directory
+pathname before looking in the usual places. Thus, headers whose names
+are enclosed in double-quotes (\c
+.BR \(dq\^\(dq )
+shall be searched for first in the directory of the file with the
+.BR #include
+line, then in directories named in
+.BR \(miI
+options, and last in the usual places. For headers whose names are
+enclosed in angle brackets (\c
+.BR \(dq<\|>\(dq ),
+the header shall be searched for only in directories named in
+.BR \(miI
+options and then in the usual places. Directories named in
+.BR \(miI
+options shall be searched in the order specified. If the
+.BR \(miI
+option is used to specify a directory that is one of the usual places
+searched by default, the results are unspecified. Implementations shall
+support at least ten instances of this option in a single
+.IR c99
+command invocation.
+.IP "\fB\(miL\ \fIdirectory\fR" 10
+Change the algorithm of searching for the libraries named in the
+.BR \(mil
+objects to look in the directory named by the
+.IR directory
+pathname before looking in the usual places. Directories named in
+.BR \(miL
+options shall be searched in the order specified. If the
+.BR \(miL
+option is used to specify a directory that is one of the usual places
+searched by default, the results are unspecified. Implementations shall
+support at least ten instances of this option in a single
+.IR c99
+command invocation. If a directory specified by a
+.BR \(miL
+option contains files with names starting with any of the strings
+.BR \(dqlibc.\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqlibl.\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqlibpthread.\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqlibm.\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqlibrt.\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqlibtrace.\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqlibxnet.\(dq ,
+or
+.BR \(dqliby.\(dq ,
+the results are unspecified.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\ \fIlibrary\fR" 10
+Search the library named
+.BR liblibrary.a .
+A library shall be searched when its name is encountered, so the
+placement of a
+.BR \(mil
+option is significant. Several standard libraries can be
+specified in this manner, as described in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION
+section. Implementations may recognize implementation-defined
+suffixes other than
+.BR .a
+as denoting libraries.
+.IP "\fB\(miO\ \fIoptlevel\fR" 10
+Specify the level of code optimization. If the
+.IR optlevel
+option-argument is the digit
+.BR '0' ,
+all special code optimizations shall be disabled. If it is the digit
+.BR '1' ,
+the nature of the optimization is unspecified. If the
+.BR \(miO
+option is omitted, the nature of the system's default optimization is
+unspecified. It is unspecified whether code generated in the presence
+of the
+.BR \(miO
+0 option is the same as that generated when
+.BR \(miO
+is omitted. Other
+.IR optlevel
+values may be supported.
+.IP "\fB\(mio\ \fIoutfile\fR" 10
+Use the pathname
+.IR outfile ,
+instead of the default
+.BR a.out ,
+for the executable file produced. If the
+.BR \(mio
+option is present with
+.BR \(mic
+or
+.BR \(miE ,
+the result is unspecified.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Produce object or executable files, or both, from which symbolic and
+other information not required for proper execution using the
+.IR exec
+family defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 has been removed (stripped). If both
+.BR \(mig
+and
+.BR \(mis
+options are present, the action taken is unspecified.
+.IP "\fB\(miU\ \fIname\fR" 10
+Remove any initial definition of
+.IR name .
+.P
+Multiple instances of the
+.BR \(miD ,
+.BR \(miI ,
+.BR \(miL ,
+.BR \(mil ,
+and
+.BR \(miU
+options can be specified.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The application shall ensure that at least one
+.IR pathname
+operand is specified. The following forms for
+.IR pathname
+operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile.\fBc\fR" 10
+A C-language source file to be compiled and optionally linked. The
+application shall ensure that the operand is of this form if the
+.BR \(mic
+option is used.
+.IP "\fIfile.\fBa\fR" 10
+A library of object files typically produced by the
+.IR ar
+utility, and passed directly to the link editor. Implementations may
+recognize implementation-defined suffixes other than
+.BR .a
+as denoting object file libraries.
+.IP "\fIfile.\fBo\fR" 10
+An object file produced by
+.IR c99
+.BR \(mic
+and passed directly to the link editor. Implementations may recognize
+implementation-defined suffixes other than
+.BR .o
+as denoting object files.
+.P
+The processing of other files is implementation-defined.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+Each input file shall be one of the following: a text file containing a
+C-language source program, an object file in the format produced by
+.IR c99
+.BR \(mic ,
+or a library of object files, in the format produced by archiving zero
+or more object files, using
+.IR ar .
+Implementations may supply additional utilities that produce files in
+these formats. Additional input file formats are
+implementation-defined.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR c99 :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fITMPDIR\fP" 10
+Provide a pathname that should override the default directory for
+temporary files, if any.
+On XSI-conforming systems, provide a pathname that shall override the
+default directory for temporary files, if any.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+If more than one
+.IR pathname
+operand ending in
+.BR .c
+(or possibly other unspecified suffixes) is given, for each such file:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s:\en", <\fIpathname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+may be written. These messages, if written, shall precede the
+processing of each input file; they shall not be written to the
+standard output if they are written to the standard error, as described
+in the STDERR section.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(miE
+option is specified, the standard output shall be a text file that
+represents the results of the preprocessing stage of the language; it
+may contain extra information appropriate for subsequent compilation
+passes.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+If more than one
+.IR pathname
+operand ending in
+.BR .c
+(or possibly other unspecified suffixes) is given, for each such file:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s:\en", <\fIpathname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+may be written to allow identification of the diagnostic and warning
+messages with the appropriate input file. These messages, if written,
+shall precede the processing of each input file; they shall not be
+written to the standard error if they are written to the standard
+output, as described in the STDOUT section.
+.P
+This utility may produce warning messages about certain conditions that
+do not warrant returning an error (non-zero) exit value.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+Object files or executable files or both are produced in unspecified
+formats. If the pathname of an object file or executable file to be
+created by
+.IR c99
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a file that is not a regular
+file, it is unspecified whether
+.IR c99
+shall attempt to create the file or shall issue a diagnostic and exit
+with a non-zero exit status.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+.SS "Standard Libraries"
+.P
+The
+.IR c99
+utility shall recognize the following
+.BR \(mil
+options for standard libraries:
+.IP "\fB\(mil\ c\fR" 10
+This option shall make available all interfaces referenced in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+with the possible exception of those interfaces listed as residing in
+.IR <aio.h> ,
+.IR <arpa/inet.h> ,
+.IR <complex.h> ,
+.IR <fenv.h> ,
+.IR <math.h> ,
+.IR <mqueue.h> ,
+.IR <netdb.h> ,
+.IR <net/if.h> ,
+.IR <netinet/in.h> ,
+.IR <pthread.h> ,
+.IR <sched.h> ,
+.IR <semaphore.h> ,
+.IR <spawn.h> ,
+.IR <sys/socket.h> ,
+\fIpthread_kill\fR(),
+and
+\fIpthread_sigmask\fR()
+in
+.IR <signal.h> ,
+.IR <trace.h> ,
+interfaces marked as optional in
+.IR <sys/mman.h> ,
+interfaces marked as ADV (Advisory Information) in
+.IR <fcntl.h> ,
+and interfaces beginning with the prefix clock_ or time_ in
+.IR <time.h> .
+This option shall not be required to be present to cause a search of
+this library.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\ l\fR" 10
+This option shall make available all interfaces required by the
+C-language output of
+.IR lex
+that are not made available through the
+.BR "\(mil\ c"
+option.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\ pthread\fR" 10
+This option shall make available all interfaces referenced in
+.IR <pthread.h> 
+and
+\fIpthread_kill\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_sigmask\fR()
+referenced in
+.IR <signal.h> .
+An implementation may search this library in the absence of this
+option.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\ m\fR" 10
+This option shall make available all interfaces referenced in
+.IR <math.h> ,
+.IR <complex.h> ,
+and
+.IR <fenv.h> .
+An implementation may search this library in the absence of this
+option.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\ rt\fR" 10
+This option shall make available all interfaces referenced in
+.IR <aio.h> ,
+.IR <mqueue.h> ,
+.IR <sched.h> ,
+.IR <semaphore.h> ,
+and
+.IR <spawn.h> ,
+interfaces marked as optional in
+.IR <sys/mman.h> ,
+interfaces marked as ADV (Advisory Information) in
+.IR <fcntl.h> ,
+and interfaces beginning with the prefix clock_ and time_ in
+.IR <time.h> .
+An implementation may search this library in the absence of this
+option.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\ trace\fR" 10
+This option shall make available all interfaces referenced in
+.IR <trace.h> .
+An implementation may search this library in the absence of this
+option.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\ xnet\fR" 10
+This option shall make available all interfaces referenced in
+.IR <arpa/inet.h> ,
+.IR <netdb.h> ,
+.IR <net/if.h> ,
+.IR <netinet/in.h> ,
+and
+.IR <sys/socket.h> .
+An implementation may search this library in the absence of this
+option.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\ y\fR" 10
+This option shall make available all interfaces required by the
+C-language output of
+.IR yacc
+that are not made available through the
+.BR "\(mil\ c"
+option.
+.P
+In the absence of options that inhibit invocation of the link editor,
+such as
+.BR \(mic
+or
+.BR \(miE ,
+the
+.IR c99
+utility shall cause the equivalent of a
+.BR "\(mil\ c"
+option to be passed to the link editor after the last
+.IR pathname
+operand or
+.BR \(mil
+option, causing it to be searched after all other object files and
+libraries are loaded.
+.P
+It is unspecified whether the libraries
+.BR libc.a ,
+.BR libl.a ,
+.BR libm.a ,
+.BR libpthread.a ,
+.BR librt.a ,
+.BR libtrace.a ,
+.BR libxnet.a ,
+or
+.BR liby.a
+exist as regular files. The implementation may accept as
+.BR \(mil
+option-arguments names of objects that do not exist as regular files.
+.SS "External Symbols"
+.P
+The C compiler and link editor shall support the significance of
+external symbols up to a length of at least 31 bytes; the action taken
+upon encountering symbols exceeding the implementation-defined
+maximum symbol length is unspecified.
+.P
+The compiler and link editor shall support a minimum of 511 external
+symbols per source or object file, and a minimum of 4\|095 external
+symbols in total. A diagnostic message shall be written to the standard
+output if the implementation-defined limit is exceeded; other actions
+are unspecified.
+.SS "Header Search"
+.P
+If a file with the same name as one of the standard headers defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 13" ", " "Headers",
+not provided as part of the implementation, is placed in any of the
+usual places that are searched by default for headers, the results are
+unspecified.
+.SS "Programming Environments"
+.P
+All implementations shall support one of the following programming
+environments as a default. Implementations may support more than one
+of the following programming environments. Applications can use
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+or
+.IR getconf
+to determine which programming environments are supported.
+.br
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable 4-4: Programming Environments: Type Sizes\fR
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB | cB | cB | cB
+cB | cB | cB | cB | cB
+l | n | n | n | n.
+Programming Environment!Bits in!Bits in!Bits in!Bits in
+\fIgetconf\fP Name!int!long!pointer!off_t
+_
+_POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFF32!32!32!32!32
+_POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG!32!32!32!\(>=64
+_POSIX_V7_LP64_OFF64!32!64!64!64
+_POSIX_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG!\(>=32!\(>=64!\(>=64!\(>=64
+.TE
+.P
+All implementations shall support one or more environments where the
+widths of the following types are no greater than the width of type
+.BR long :
+.TS
+tab(!) center;
+lB lB lB.
+T{
+.nf
+blksize_t
+cc_t
+mode_t
+nfds_t
+pid_t
+T}!T{
+.nf
+ptrdiff_t
+size_t
+speed_t
+ssize_t
+suseconds_t
+T}!T{
+.nf
+tcflag_t
+wchar_t
+wint_t
+.fi
+T}
+.TE
+.P
+The executable files created when these environments are selected shall
+be in a proper format for execution by the
+.IR exec
+family of functions. Each environment may be one of the ones in
+.IR "Table 4-4, Programming Environments: Type Sizes",
+or it may be another environment. The names for the environments that
+meet this requirement shall be output by a
+.IR getconf
+command using the POSIX_V7_WIDTH_RESTRICTED_ENVS argument, as a
+<newline>-separated
+list of names suitable for use with the
+.IR getconf
+.BR \(miv
+option. If more than one environment meets the requirement, the names
+of all such environments shall be output on separate lines. Any of
+these names can then be used in a subsequent
+.IR getconf
+command to obtain the flags specific to that environment with the
+following suffixes added as appropriate:
+.IP _CFLAGS 10
+To get the C compiler flags.
+.IP _LDFLAGS 10
+To get the linker/loader flags.
+.IP _LIBS 10
+To get the libraries.
+.P
+This requirement may be removed in a future version.
+.P
+When this utility processes a file containing a function called
+\fImain\fR(),
+it shall be defined with a return type equivalent to
+.BR int .
+Using return from the initial call to
+\fImain\fR()
+shall be equivalent (other than with respect to language scope issues)
+to calling
+\fIexit\fR()
+with the returned value. Reaching the end of the initial call to
+\fImain\fR()
+shall be equivalent to calling
+.IR exit (0).
+The implementation shall not declare a prototype for this function.
+.P
+Implementations provide configuration strings for C compiler flags,
+linker/loader flags, and libraries for each supported environment.
+When an application needs to use a specific programming environment
+rather than the implementation default programming environment while
+compiling, the application shall first verify that the implementation
+supports the desired environment. If the desired programming
+environment is supported, the application shall then invoke
+.IR c99
+with the appropriate C compiler flags as the first options for the
+compile, the appropriate linker/loader flags after any other options
+except
+.BR \(mil
+but before any operands or
+.BR \(mil
+options, and the appropriate libraries at the end of the operands
+and
+.BR \(mil
+options.
+.P
+Conforming applications shall not attempt to link together object files
+compiled for different programming models. Applications shall also be
+aware that binary data placed in shared memory or in files might not be
+recognized by applications built for other programming models.
+.br
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable 4-5: Programming Environments: \fIc99\fP Arguments\fR
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB | cB
+cB | cB | cB
+l | l | l.
+Programming Environment!!\fIc99\fP Arguments
+\fIgetconf\fP Name!Use!\fIgetconf\fP Name
+_
+_POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFF32!C Compiler Flags!POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFF32_CFLAGS
+!Linker/Loader Flags!POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFF32_LDFLAGS
+!Libraries!POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFF32_LIBS
+_
+_POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG!C Compiler Flags!POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG_CFLAGS
+!Linker/Loader Flags!POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG_LDFLAGS
+!Libraries!POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG_LIBS
+_
+_POSIX_V7_LP64_OFF64!C Compiler Flags!POSIX_V7_LP64_OFF64_CFLAGS
+!Linker/Loader Flags!POSIX_V7_LP64_OFF64_LDFLAGS
+!Libraries!POSIX_V7_LP64_OFF64_LIBS
+_
+_POSIX_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG!C Compiler Flags!POSIX_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG_CFLAGS
+!Linker/Loader Flags!POSIX_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG_LDFLAGS
+!Libraries!POSIX_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG_LIBS
+.TE
+.P
+In addition to the type size programming environments above, all
+implementations also support a multi-threaded programming environment
+that is orthogonal to all of the programming environments listed above.
+The
+.IR getconf
+utility can be used to get flags for the threaded programming environment,
+as indicated in
+.IR "Table 4-6, Threaded Programming Environment: \fIc99\fP Arguments".
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable 4-6: Threaded Programming Environment: \fIc99\fP Arguments\fR
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB | cB
+cB | cB | cB
+l | l | l.
+Programming Environment!!\fIc99\fP Arguments
+\fIgetconf\fP Name!Use!\fIgetconf\fP Name
+_
+_POSIX_THREADS!C Compiler Flags!POSIX_V7_THREADS_CFLAGS
+!Linker/Loader Flags!POSIX_V7_THREADS_LDFLAGS
+.TE
+.P
+These programming environment flags may be used in conjunction with any
+of the type size programming environments supported by the implementation.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful compilation or link edit.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+When
+.IR c99
+encounters a compilation error that causes an object file not to be
+created, it shall write a diagnostic to standard error and continue to
+compile other source code operands, but it shall not perform the link
+phase and return a non-zero exit status. If the link edit is
+unsuccessful, a diagnostic message shall be written to standard error
+and
+.IR c99
+exits with a non-zero status. A conforming application shall rely on the
+exit status of
+.IR c99 ,
+rather than on the existence or mode of the executable file.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since the
+.IR c99
+utility usually creates files in the current directory during the
+compilation process, it is typically necessary to run the
+.IR c99
+utility in a directory in which a file can be created.
+.P
+On systems providing POSIX Conformance (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Conformance"),
+.IR c99
+is required only with the C-Language Development option;
+XSI-conformant systems always provide
+.IR c99 .
+.P
+Some historical implementations have created
+.BR .o
+files when
+.BR \(mic
+is not specified and more than one source file is given. Since this
+area is left unspecified, the application cannot rely on
+.BR .o
+files being created, but it also must be prepared for any related
+.BR .o
+files that already exist being deleted at the completion of the link
+edit.
+.P
+There is the possible implication that if a user supplies versions of
+the standard functions (before they would be encountered by an implicit
+.BR "\(mil\ c"
+or explicit
+.BR "\(mil\ m" ),
+that those versions would be used in place of the standard versions.
+There are various reasons this might not be true (functions defined as
+macros, manipulations for clean name space, and so on), so the
+existence of files named in the same manner as the standard libraries
+within the
+.BR \(miL
+directories is explicitly stated to produce unspecified behavior.
+.P
+All of the functions specified in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 may be made visible by
+implementations when the Standard C Library is searched. Conforming
+applications must explicitly request searching the other standard
+libraries when functions made visible by those libraries are used.
+.P
+In the ISO\ C standard the mapping from physical source characters to the C
+source character set is implementation-defined. Implementations may
+strip white-space characters before the terminating
+<newline>
+of a (physical) line as part of this mapping and, as a consequence
+of this, one or more white-space characters (and no other characters)
+between a
+<backslash>
+character and the
+<newline>
+character that terminates the line produces implementation-defined
+results. Portable applications should not use such constructs.
+.P
+Some
+.IR c99
+compilers not conforming to POSIX.1\(hy2008 do not support trigraphs by default.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+The following usage example compiles
+.BR foo.c
+and creates the executable file
+.BR foo :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+c99 \(mio foo foo.c
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following usage example compiles
+.BR foo.c
+and creates the object file
+.BR foo.o :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+c99 \(mic foo.c
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following usage example compiles
+.BR foo.c
+and creates the executable file
+.BR a.out :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+c99 foo.c
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following usage example compiles
+.BR foo.c ,
+links it with
+.BR bar.o ,
+and creates the executable file
+.BR a.out .
+It may also create and leave
+.BR foo.o :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+c99 foo.c bar.o
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+The following example shows how an application using threads interfaces
+can test for support of and use a programming environment supporting
+32-bit
+.BR int ,
+.BR long ,
+and
+.BR pointer
+types and an
+.BR off_t
+type using at least 64 bits:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+offbig_env=$(getconf _POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG)
+if [ $offbig_env != "-1" ] && [ $offbig_env != "undefined" ]
+then
+    c99 $(getconf POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG_CFLAGS) \e
+    $(getconf POSIX_V7_THREADS_CFLAGS) -D_XOPEN_SOURCE=700 \e
+    $(getconf POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG_LDFLAGS) \e
+    $(getconf POSIX_V7_THREADS_LDFLAGS) foo.c -o foo \e
+    $(getconf POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG_LIBS) \e
+    -l pthread
+else
+    echo ILP32_OFFBIG programming environment not supported
+    exit 1
+fi
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+The following examples clarify the use and interactions of
+.BR \(miL
+and
+.BR \(mil
+options.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+Consider the case in which module
+.BR a.c
+calls function
+\fIf\fR()
+in library
+.BR libQ.a ,
+and module
+.BR b.c
+calls function
+\fIg\fR()
+in library
+.BR libp.a .
+Assume that both libraries reside in
+.BR /a/b/c .
+The command line to compile and link in the desired way is:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+c99 \(miL /a/b/c main.o a.c \(mil Q b.c \(mil p
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In this case the
+.BR \(miL
+option need only precede the first
+.BR \(mil
+option, since both
+.BR libQ.a
+and
+.BR libp.a
+reside in the same directory.
+.P
+Multiple
+.BR \(miL
+options can be used when library name collisions occur. Building on
+the previous example, suppose that the user wants to use a new
+.BR libp.a ,
+in
+.BR /a/a/a ,
+but still wants
+\fIf\fR()
+from
+.BR /a/b/c/libQ.a :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+c99 \(miL /a/a/a \(miL /a/b/c main.o a.c \(mil Q b.c \(mil p
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In this example, the linker searches the
+.BR \(miL
+options in the order specified, and finds
+.BR /a/a/a/libp.a
+before
+.BR /a/b/c/libp.a
+when resolving references for
+.BR b.c .
+The order of the
+.BR \(mil
+options is still important, however.
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+The following example shows how an application can use a programming
+environment where the widths of the following types:
+.BR blksize_t ,
+.BR cc_t ,
+.BR mode_t ,
+.BR nfds_t ,
+.BR pid_t ,
+.BR ptrdiff_t ,
+.BR size_t ,
+.BR speed_t ,
+.BR ssize_t ,
+.BR suseconds_t ,
+.BR tcflag_t ,
+.BR wchar_t ,
+.BR wint_t
+.RS 4 
+.P
+are no greater than the width of type
+.BR long :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+# First choose one of the listed environments ...
+.P
+# ... if there are no additional constraints, the first one will do:
+CENV=$(getconf POSIX_V7_WIDTH_RESTRICTED_ENVS | head -n l)
+.P
+# ... or, if an environment that supports large files is preferred,
+# look for names that contain "OFF64" or "OFFBIG". (This chooses
+# the last one in the list if none match.)
+for CENV in $(getconf POSIX_V7_WIDTH_RESTRICTED_ENVS)
+do
+    case $CENV in
+    *OFF64*|*OFFBIG*) break ;;
+    esac
+done
+.P
+# The chosen environment name can now be used like this:
+.P
+c99 $(getconf ${CENV}_CFLAGS) -D _POSIX_C_SOURCE=200809L \e
+$(getconf ${CENV}_LDFLAGS) foo.c -o foo \e
+$(getconf ${CENV}_LIBS)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR c99
+utility is based on the
+.IR c89
+utility originally introduced in the ISO\ POSIX\(hy2:\|1993 standard.
+.P
+Some of the changes from
+.IR c89
+include the ability to intersperse options and operands (which many
+.IR c89
+implementations allowed despite it not being specified),
+the description of
+.BR \(mil
+as an option instead of an operand, and the modification to the contents
+of the Standard Libraries section to account for new headers and options;
+for example,
+.IR <spawn.h> 
+added to the description of
+.BR "\(mil\ rt" ,
+and
+.BR "\(mil\ trace"
+added for the Tracing option.
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 specifies that the
+.IR c99
+utility must be able to use regular files for
+.BR *.o
+files and for
+.BR a.out
+files. Implementations are free to overwrite existing files of other
+types when attempting to create object files and executable files, but
+are not required to do so. If something other than a regular file is
+specified and using it fails for any reason,
+.IR c99
+is required to issue a diagnostic message and exit with a non-zero exit
+status. But for some file types, the problem may not be noticed for a
+long time. For example, if a FIFO named
+.BR a.out
+exists in the current directory,
+.IR c99
+may attempt to open
+.BR a.out
+and will hang in the
+\fIopen\fR()
+call until another process opens the FIFO for reading. Then
+.IR c99
+may write most of the
+.BR a.out
+to the FIFO and fail when it tries to seek back close to the start of
+the file to insert a timestamp (FIFOs are not seekable files). The
+.IR c99
+utility is also allowed to issue a diagnostic immediately if it
+encounters an
+.BR a.out
+or
+.BR *.o
+file that is not a regular file. For portable use, applications should
+ensure that any
+.BR a.out ,
+.BR \(mio
+option-argument, or
+.BR *.o
+files corresponding to any
+.BR *.c
+files do not conflict with names already in use that are not regular
+files or symbolic links that point to regular files.
+.P
+On many systems, multi-threaded applications run in a programming
+environment that is distinct from that used by single-threaded
+applications. This multi-threaded programming environment (in addition
+to needing to specify
+.BR "\(mil pthread"
+at link time) may require additional flags to be set when headers are
+processed at compile time (\c
+.BR \(miD_REENTRANT
+being common). This programming environment is orthogonal to the type
+size programming environments discussed above and listed in
+.IR "Table 4-4, Programming Environments: Type Sizes".
+This version of the standard adds
+.IR getconf
+utility calls to provide the C compiler flags and linker/loader flags
+needed to support multi-threaded applications. Note that on a system
+where single-threaded applications are a special case of a multi-threaded
+application, both of these
+.IR getconf
+calls may return NULL strings; on other implementations both of
+these strings may be non-NULL strings.
+.P
+The C standardization committee invented trigraphs (e.g.,
+.BR \(dq??!\(dq 
+to represent
+.BR '|' )
+to address character portability problems in development environments
+based on national variants of the 7-bit ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard character set. However,
+these environments were already obsolete by the time the first ISO\ C standard was
+published, and in practice trigraphs have not been used for their intended
+purpose, and usually are intended to have their original meaning in K&R C.
+For example, in practice a C-language source string like
+.BR \(dqWhat??!\(dq 
+is usually intended to end in two
+<question-mark>
+characters and an
+<exclamation-mark>,
+not in
+.BR '|' .
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 1.1.1.4" ", " "File Read" ", " "Write" ", " "and Creation",
+.IR "\fIar\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIgetconf\fR\^",
+.IR "\fImake\fR\^",
+.IR "\fInm\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIstrip\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIumask\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+.IR "Chapter 13" ", " "Headers"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cal.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cal.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dd71fc7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cal.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,162 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CAL "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cal
+\(em print a calendar
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+cal \fB[[\fImonth\fB] \fIyear\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR cal
+utility shall write a calendar to standard output using the Julian
+calendar for dates from January 1, 1 through September 2, 1752 and the
+Gregorian calendar for dates from September 14, 1752 through December
+31, 9999 as though the Gregorian calendar had been adopted on September
+14, 1752.
+.P
+If no operands are given,
+.IR cal
+shall produce a one-month calendar for the current month in the
+current year. If only the
+.IR year
+operand is given,
+.IR cal
+shall produce a calendar for all twelve months in the given calendar
+year. If both
+.IR month
+and
+.IR year
+operands are given,
+.IR cal
+shall produce a one-month calendar for the given month in the given year.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fImonth\fR" 10
+Specify the month to be displayed, represented as a decimal integer
+from 1 (January) to 12 (December).
+.IP "\fIyear\fR" 10
+Specify the year for which the calendar is displayed, represented as a
+decimal integer from 1 to 9999.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR cal :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error, and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fILC_TIME\fP" 10
+Determine the format and contents of the calendar.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fITZ\fP" 10
+Determine the timezone used to calculate the value of the current
+month.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall be used to display the calendar, in an
+unspecified format.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Note that:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cal 83
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+refers to A.D. 83, not 1983.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Earlier versions of this standard incorrectly required that the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cal 2000
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+write a one-month calendar for the current calendar month (no matter what
+the current year is) in the year 2000 to standard output. This did not
+match historic practice in any known version of the
+.IR cal
+utility. The description has been updated to match historic practice.
+When only the
+.IR year
+operand is given,
+.IR cal
+writes a twelve-month calendar for the specified year.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+A future version of this standard may support locale-specific
+recognition of the date of adoption of the Gregorian calendar.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cat.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cat.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1a79146
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cat.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,325 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CAT "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cat
+\(em concatenate and print files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+cat \fB[\fR\(miu\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR cat
+utility shall read files in sequence and shall write their contents
+to the standard output in the same sequence.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR cat
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(miu\fP" 10
+Write bytes from the input file to the standard output without delay as
+each is read.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of an input file. If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, the standard input shall be used. If a
+.IR file
+is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the
+.IR cat
+utility shall read from the standard input at that point in the
+sequence. The
+.IR cat
+utility shall not close and reopen standard input when it is referenced
+in this way, but shall accept multiple occurrences of
+.BR '\(mi' 
+as a
+.IR file
+operand.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used only if no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, or if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' .
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files can be any file type.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR cat :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall contain the sequence of bytes read from the
+input files. Nothing else shall be written to the standard output.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+All input files were output successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.BR \(miu
+option has value in prototyping non-blocking reads from FIFOs. The
+intent is to support the following sequence:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+mkfifo foo
+cat \(miu foo > /dev/tty13 &
+cat \(miu > foo
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+It is unspecified whether standard output is or is not buffered in the
+default case. This is sometimes of interest when standard output is
+associated with a terminal, since buffering may delay the output. The
+presence of the
+.BR \(miu
+option guarantees that unbuffered I/O is available. It is
+implementation-defined whether the
+.IR cat
+utility buffers output if the
+.BR \(miu
+option is not specified. Traditionally, the
+.BR \(miu
+option is implemented using the equivalent of the
+\fIsetvbuf\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cat myfile
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+writes the contents of the file
+.BR myfile
+to standard output.
+.P
+The following command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cat doc1 doc2 > doc.all
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+concatenates the files
+.BR doc1
+and
+.BR doc2
+and writes the result to
+.BR doc.all .
+.P
+Because of the shell language mechanism used to perform output
+redirection, a command such as this:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cat doc doc.end > doc
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+causes the original data in
+.BR doc
+to be lost.
+.P
+The command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cat start \(mi middle \(mi end > file
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+when standard input is a terminal, gets two arbitrary pieces of input
+from the terminal with a single invocation of
+.IR cat .
+Note, however, that if standard input is a regular file, this would be
+equivalent to the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cat start \(mi middle /dev/null end > file
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+because the entire contents of the file would be consumed by
+.IR cat
+the first time
+.BR '\(mi' 
+was used as a
+.IR file
+operand and an end-of-file condition would be detected immediately when
+.BR '\(mi' 
+was referenced the second time.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Historical versions of the
+.IR cat
+utility include the
+.BR \(mie ,
+.BR \(mit ,
+and
+.BR \(miv ,
+options which permit the ends of lines,
+<tab>
+characters, and invisible characters, respectively, to be rendered visible
+in the output. The standard developers omitted these options because
+they provide too fine a degree of control over what is made visible,
+and similar output can be obtained using a command such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sed \(min l pathname
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The latter also has the advantage that its output is unambiguous,
+whereas the output of historical
+.IR cat
+.BR \(mietv
+is not.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mis
+option was omitted because it corresponds to different functions in BSD
+and System V-based systems. The BSD
+.BR \(mis
+option to squeeze blank lines can be accomplished by the shell script
+shown in the following example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sed \(min '
+# Write non-empty lines.
+/./   {
+      p
+      d
+      }
+# Write a single empty line, then look for more empty lines.
+/^$/  p
+# Get next line, discard the held <newline> (empty line),
+# and look for more empty lines.
+:Empty
+/^$/  {
+      N
+      s/.//
+      b Empty
+      }
+# Write the non-empty line before going back to search
+# for the first in a set of empty lines.
+      p
+\&'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The System V
+.BR \(mis
+option to silence error messages can be accomplished by redirecting the
+standard error. Note that the BSD documentation for
+.IR cat
+uses the term ``blank line'' to mean the same as the POSIX ``empty
+line'': a line consisting only of a
+<newline>.
+.P
+The BSD
+.BR \(min
+option was omitted because similar functionality can be obtained from
+the
+.BR \(min
+option of the
+.IR pr
+utility.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImore\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIsetvbuf\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cd.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cd.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7d5308e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cd.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,507 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CD "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cd
+\(em change the working directory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+cd \fB[\fR\(miL|\(miP\fB] [\fIdirectory\fB]\fR
+.P
+cd \(mi
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR cd
+utility shall change the working directory of the current shell
+execution environment (see
+.IR "Section 2.12" ", " "Shell Execution Environment")
+by executing the following steps in sequence. (In the following steps,
+the symbol
+.BR curpath
+represents an intermediate value used to simplify the description of
+the algorithm used by
+.IR cd .
+There is no requirement that
+.BR curpath
+be made visible to the application.)
+.IP " 1." 4
+If no
+.IR directory
+operand is given and the
+.IR HOME
+environment variable is empty or undefined, the default behavior is
+implementation-defined and no further steps shall be taken.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If no
+.IR directory
+operand is given and the
+.IR HOME
+environment variable is set to a non-empty value, the
+.IR cd
+utility shall behave as if the directory named in the
+.IR HOME
+environment variable was specified as the
+.IR directory
+operand.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If the
+.IR directory
+operand begins with a
+<slash>
+character, set
+.BR curpath
+to the operand and proceed to step 7.
+.IP " 4." 4
+If the first component of the
+.IR directory
+operand is dot or dot-dot, proceed to step 6.
+.IP " 5." 4
+Starting with the first pathname in the
+<colon>-separated
+pathnames of
+.IR CDPATH
+(see the ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES section) if the pathname is non-null,
+test if the concatenation of that pathname, a
+<slash>
+character if that pathname did not end with a
+<slash>
+character, and the
+.IR directory
+operand names a directory. If the pathname is null, test if the
+concatenation of dot, a
+<slash>
+character, and the operand names a directory. In either case, if the
+resulting string names an existing directory, set
+.BR curpath
+to that string and proceed to step 7. Otherwise, repeat this step with
+the next pathname in
+.IR CDPATH
+until all pathnames have been tested.
+.IP " 6." 4
+Set
+.BR curpath
+to the
+.IR directory
+operand.
+.IP " 7." 4
+If the
+.BR \(miP
+option is in effect, proceed to step 10. If
+.BR curpath
+does not begin with a
+<slash>
+character, set
+.BR curpath
+to the string formed by the concatenation of the value of
+.IR PWD ,
+a
+<slash>
+character if the value of
+.IR PWD
+did not end with a
+<slash>
+character, and
+.BR curpath .
+.IP " 8." 4
+The
+.BR curpath
+value shall then be converted to canonical form as follows, considering
+each component from beginning to end, in sequence:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+Dot components and any
+<slash>
+characters that separate them from the next component shall be deleted.
+.IP " b." 4
+For each dot-dot component, if there is a preceding component and it is
+neither root nor dot-dot, then:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " i." 5
+If the preceding component does not refer (in the context of pathname
+resolution with symbolic links followed) to a directory, then the
+.IR cd
+utility shall display an appropriate error message and no further steps
+shall be taken.
+.IP ii. 5
+The preceding component, all
+<slash>
+characters separating the preceding component from dot-dot, dot-dot,
+and all
+<slash>
+characters separating dot-dot from the following component (if any)
+shall be deleted.
+.RE
+.IP " c." 4
+An implementation may further simplify
+.BR curpath
+by removing any trailing
+<slash>
+characters that are not also leading
+<slash>
+characters, replacing multiple non-leading consecutive
+<slash>
+characters with a single
+<slash>,
+and replacing three or more leading
+<slash>
+characters with a single
+<slash>.
+If, as a result of this canonicalization, the
+.BR curpath
+variable is null, no further steps shall be taken.
+.RE
+.IP " 9." 4
+If
+.BR curpath
+is longer than
+{PATH_MAX}
+bytes (including the terminating null) and the
+.IR directory
+operand was not longer than
+{PATH_MAX}
+bytes (including the terminating null), then
+.BR curpath
+shall be converted from an absolute pathname to an equivalent relative
+pathname if possible. This conversion shall always be considered
+possible if the value of
+.IR PWD ,
+with a trailing
+<slash>
+added if it does not already have one, is an initial substring of
+.BR curpath .
+Whether or not it is considered possible under other circumstances is
+unspecified. Implementations may also apply this conversion if
+.BR curpath
+is not longer than
+{PATH_MAX}
+bytes or the
+.IR directory
+operand was longer than
+{PATH_MAX}
+bytes.
+.IP 10. 4
+The
+.IR cd
+utility shall then perform actions equivalent to the
+\fIchdir\fR()
+function called with
+.BR curpath
+as the
+.IR path
+argument. If these actions fail for any reason, the
+.IR cd
+utility shall display an appropriate error message and the remainder of
+this step shall not be executed. If the
+.BR \(miP
+option is not in effect, the
+.IR PWD
+environment variable shall be set to the value that
+.BR curpath
+had on entry to step 9 (i.e., before conversion to a relative
+pathname). If the
+.BR \(miP
+option is in effect, the
+.IR PWD
+environment variable shall be set to the string that would be output by
+.IR pwd
+.BR \(miP .
+If there is insufficient permission on the new directory, or on any
+parent of that directory, to determine the current working directory,
+the value of the
+.IR PWD
+environment variable is unspecified.
+.P
+If, during the execution of the above steps, the
+.IR PWD
+environment variable
+is set, the
+.IR OLDPWD
+environment variable shall also be set to
+the value of the old working directory (that is the current working
+directory immediately prior to the call to
+.IR cd ).
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR cd
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported by the implementation:
+.IP "\fB\(miL\fP" 10
+Handle the operand dot-dot logically; symbolic link components shall
+not be resolved before dot-dot components are processed (see steps 8.
+and 9. in the DESCRIPTION).
+.IP "\fB\(miP\fP" 10
+Handle the operand dot-dot physically; symbolic link components shall
+be resolved before dot-dot components are processed (see step 7. in the
+DESCRIPTION).
+.P
+If both
+.BR \(miL
+and
+.BR \(miP
+options are specified, the last of these options shall be used and all
+others ignored. If neither
+.BR \(miL
+nor
+.BR \(miP
+is specified, the operand shall be handled dot-dot logically; see the
+DESCRIPTION.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIdirectory\fR" 10
+An absolute or relative pathname of the directory that shall become
+the new working directory. The interpretation of a relative pathname
+by
+.IR cd
+depends on the
+.BR \(miL
+option and the
+.IR CDPATH
+and
+.IR PWD
+environment variables. If
+.IR directory
+is an empty string, the results are unspecified.
+.IP "\(mi" 10
+When a
+<hyphen>
+is used as the operand, this shall be equivalent to the command:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cd "$OLDPWD" && pwd
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+which changes to the previous working directory and then writes its
+name.
+.RE
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR cd :
+.IP "\fICDPATH\fP" 10
+A
+<colon>-separated
+list of pathnames that refer to directories. The
+.IR cd
+utility shall use this list in its attempt to change the directory, as
+described in the DESCRIPTION. An empty string in place of a directory
+pathname represents the current directory. If
+.IR CDPATH
+is not set, it shall be treated as if it were an empty string.
+.IP "\fIHOME\fP" 10
+The name of the directory, used when no
+.IR directory
+operand is specified.
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fIOLDPWD\fP" 10
+A pathname of the previous working directory, used by
+.IR cd
+.BR \(mi .
+.IP "\fIPWD\fP" 10
+This variable shall be set as specified in the DESCRIPTION. If an
+application sets or unsets the value of
+.IR PWD ,
+the behavior of
+.IR cd
+is unspecified.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+If a non-empty directory name from
+.IR CDPATH
+is used, or if
+.IR cd
+.BR \(mi
+is used, an absolute pathname of the new working directory shall be
+written to the standard output as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fInew directory\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Otherwise, there shall be no output.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+The directory was successfully changed.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+The working directory shall remain unchanged.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since
+.IR cd
+affects the current shell execution environment, it is always provided
+as a shell regular built-in. If it is called in a subshell or separate
+utility execution environment, such as one of the following:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(cd /tmp)
+nohup cd
+find . \(miexec cd {} \e;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+it does not affect the working directory of the caller's environment.
+.P
+The user must have execute (search) permission in
+.IR directory
+in order to change to it.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following template can be used to perform processing in the directory
+specified by
+.IR location
+and end up in the current working directory in use before the first
+.IR cd
+command was issued:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cd \fIlocation\fP
+if [ $? -ne 0 ]
+then
+    print error message
+    exit 1
+fi
+\&... do whatever is desired as long as the OLDPWD environment variable
+    is not modified
+cd -
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The use of the
+.IR CDPATH
+was introduced in the System V shell. Its use is analogous to the use
+of the
+.IR PATH
+variable in the shell. The BSD C shell used a shell parameter
+.IR cdpath
+for this purpose.
+.P
+A common extension when
+.IR HOME
+is undefined is to get the login directory from the user database for
+the invoking user. This does not occur on System V implementations.
+.P
+Some historical shells, such as the KornShell, took special actions
+when the directory name contained a dot-dot component, selecting the
+logical parent of the directory, rather than the actual parent
+directory; that is, it moved up one level toward the
+.BR '/' 
+in the pathname, remembering what the user typed, rather than
+performing the equivalent of:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+chdir("..");
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In such a shell, the following commands would not necessarily produce
+equivalent output for all directories:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cd .. && ls      ls ..
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This behavior is now the default. It is not consistent with the
+definition of dot-dot in most historical practice; that is, while this
+behavior has been optionally available in the KornShell, other shells
+have historically not supported this functionality. The logical
+pathname is stored in the
+.IR PWD
+environment variable when the
+.IR cd
+utility completes and this value is used to construct the next
+directory name if
+.IR cd
+is invoked with the
+.BR \(miL
+option.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.12" ", " "Shell Execution Environment",
+.IR "\fIpwd\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIchdir\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cflow.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cflow.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8301c72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cflow.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,278 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CFLOW "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cflow
+\(em generate a C-language flowgraph (\fBDEVELOPMENT\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+cflow \fB[\fR\(mir\fB] [\fR\(mid \fInum\fB] [\fR\(miD \fIname\fB[\fR=\fIdef\fB]]\fR...\fB [\fR\(mii \fIincl\fB] [\fR\(miI \fIdir\fB]\fR...
+    \fB[\fR\(miU \fIdir\fB]\fR... \fIfile\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR cflow
+utility shall analyze a collection of object files or assembler,
+C-language,
+.IR lex ,
+or
+.IR yacc
+source files, and attempt to build a graph, written to standard output,
+charting the external references.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR cflow
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except that the order of the
+.BR \(miD ,
+.BR \(miI ,
+and
+.BR \(miU
+options (which are identical to their interpretation by
+.IR c99 )
+is significant.
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mid\ \fInum\fR" 10
+Indicate the depth at which the flowgraph is cut off. The application
+shall ensure that the argument
+.IR num
+is a decimal integer. By default this is a very large number
+(typically greater than 32\|000). Attempts to set the cut-off depth to
+a non-positive integer shall be ignored.
+.IP "\fB\(mii\ \fIincl\fR" 10
+Increase the number of included symbols. The
+.IR incl
+option-argument is one of the following characters:
+.RS 10 
+.IP "\fIx\fP" 6
+Include external and static data symbols. The default shall be to
+include only functions in the flowgraph.
+.IP "\fR_\fP" 6
+(Underscore) Include names that begin with an
+<underscore>.
+The default shall be to exclude these functions (and data if
+.BR "\(mii\ x"
+is used).
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+Reverse the caller:callee relationship, producing an inverted listing
+showing the callers of each function. The listing shall also be sorted
+in lexicographical order by callee.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand is supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+The pathname of a file for which a graph is to be generated.
+Filenames suffixed by
+.BR .l
+shall shall be taken to be
+.IR lex
+input,
+.BR .y
+as
+.IR yacc
+input,
+.BR .c
+as
+.IR c99
+input, and
+.BR .i
+as the output of
+.IR c99
+.BR \(miE .
+Such files shall be processed as appropriate, determined by their
+suffix.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+Files suffixed by
+.BR .s
+(conventionally assembler source) may have more limited information
+extracted from them.
+.RE
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files shall be object files or assembler, C-language,
+.IR lex ,
+or
+.IR yacc
+source files.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR cflow :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the ordering of the output when the
+.BR \(mir
+option is used.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The flowgraph written to standard output shall be formatted as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d %s:%s\en", <\fIreference number\fR>, <\fIglobal\fR>, <\fIdefinition\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Each line of output begins with a reference (that is, line) number,
+followed by indentation of at least one column position per level.
+This is followed by the name of the global, a
+<colon>,
+and its definition. Normally globals are only functions not defined as
+an external or beginning with an
+<underscore>;
+see the OPTIONS section for the
+.BR \(mii
+inclusion option. For information extracted from C-language source, the
+definition consists of an abstract type declaration (for example,
+.BR "char *" )
+and, delimited by angle brackets, the name of the source file and the
+line number where the definition was found. Definitions extracted from
+object files indicate the filename and location counter under which
+the symbol appeared (for example,
+.IR text ).
+.P
+Once a definition of a name has been written, subsequent references to
+that name contain only the reference number of the line where the
+definition can be found. For undefined references, only
+.BR \(dq<\|>\(dq 
+shall be written.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Files produced by
+.IR lex
+and
+.IR yacc
+cause the reordering of line number declarations, and this can confuse
+.IR cflow .
+To obtain proper results, the input of
+.IR yacc
+or
+.IR lex
+must be directed to
+.IR cflow .
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Given the following in
+.BR file.c :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int i;
+int f();
+int g();
+int h();
+int
+main()
+{
+    f();
+    g();
+    f();
+}
+int
+f()
+{
+    i = h();
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cflow \(mii x file.c
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+produces the output:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+1 main: int(), <file.c 6>
+2    f: int(), <file.c 13>
+3        h: <>
+4        i: int, <file.c 1>
+5    g: <>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIc99\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIlex\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIyacc\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/chgrp.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/chgrp.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..02b49bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/chgrp.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,235 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CHGRP "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+chgrp
+\(em change the file group ownership
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+chgrp \fB[\fR\(mih\fB] \fIgroup file\fR...
+.P
+chgrp \(miR \fB[\fR\(miH|\(miL|\(miP\fB] \fIgroup file\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR chgrp
+utility shall set the group ID of the file named by each
+.IR file
+operand to the group ID specified by the
+.IR group
+operand.
+.P
+For each
+.IR file
+operand, or, if the
+.BR \(miR
+option is used, each file encountered while walking the directory
+trees specified by the
+.IR file
+operands, the
+.IR chgrp
+utility shall perform actions equivalent to the
+\fIchown\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, called with the following arguments:
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+.IR file
+operand shall be used as the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.IP " *" 4
+The user ID of the file shall be used as the
+.IR owner
+argument.
+.IP " *" 4
+The specified group ID shall be used as the
+.IR group
+argument.
+.P
+Unless
+.IR chgrp
+is invoked by a process with appropriate privileges, the set-user-ID
+and set-group-ID bits of a regular file shall be cleared upon successful
+completion; the set-user-ID and set-group-ID bits of other file types
+may be cleared.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR chgrp
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported by the implementation:
+.IP "\fB\(mih\fP" 10
+For each
+.IR file
+operand that names a file of type symbolic link,
+.IR chgrp
+shall attempt to set the group ID of the symbolic link instead of the
+file referenced by the symbolic link.
+.IP "\fB\(miH\fP" 10
+If the
+.BR \(miR
+option is specified and a symbolic link referencing a file of type
+directory is specified on the command line,
+.IR chgrp
+shall change the group of the directory referenced by the symbolic link
+and all files in the file hierarchy below it.
+.IP "\fB\(miL\fP" 10
+If the
+.BR \(miR
+option is specified and a symbolic link referencing a file of type
+directory is specified on the command line or encountered during the
+traversal of a file hierarchy,
+.IR chgrp
+shall change the group of the directory referenced by the symbolic link
+and all files in the file hierarchy below it.
+.IP "\fB\(miP\fP" 10
+If the
+.BR \(miR
+option is specified and a symbolic link is specified on the command
+line or encountered during the traversal of a file hierarchy,
+.IR chgrp
+shall change the group ID of the symbolic link. The
+.IR chgrp
+utility shall not follow the symbolic link to any other part of the
+file hierarchy.
+.IP "\fB\(miR\fP" 10
+Recursively change file group IDs. For each
+.IR file
+operand that names a directory,
+.IR chgrp
+shall change the group of the directory and all files in the
+file hierarchy below it. Unless a
+.BR \(miH ,
+.BR \(miL ,
+or
+.BR \(miP
+option is specified, it is unspecified which of these options will be
+used as the default.
+.P
+Specifying more than one of the mutually-exclusive options
+.BR \(miH ,
+.BR \(miL ,
+and
+.BR \(miP
+shall not be considered an error. The last option specified shall
+determine the behavior of the utility.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIgroup\fR" 10
+A group name from the group database or a numeric group ID. Either
+specifies a group ID to be given to each file named by one of the
+.IR file
+operands. If a numeric
+.IR group
+operand exists in the group database as a group name, the group ID
+number associated with that group name is used as the group ID.
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file whose group ID is to be modified.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR chgrp :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+The utility executed successfully and all requested changes were made.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Only the owner of a file or the user with appropriate privileges may
+change the owner or group of a file.
+.P
+Some implementations restrict the use of
+.IR chgrp
+to a user with appropriate privileges when the
+.IR group
+specified is not the effective group ID or one of the supplementary
+group IDs of the calling process.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The System V and BSD versions use different exit status codes. Some
+implementations used the exit status as a count of the number of errors
+that occurred; this practice is unworkable since it can overflow the
+range of valid exit status values. The standard developers chose to
+mask these by specifying only 0 and >0 as exit values.
+.P
+The functionality of
+.IR chgrp
+is described substantially through references to
+\fIchown\fR().
+In this way, there is no duplication of effort required for describing
+the interactions of permissions, multiple groups, and so on.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIchown\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIchown\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/chmod.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/chmod.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3fcee04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/chmod.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,679 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CHMOD "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+chmod
+\(em change the file modes
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+chmod \fB[\fR\(miR\fB] \fImode file\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR chmod
+utility shall change any or all of the file mode bits of the file named
+by each
+.IR file
+operand in the way specified by the
+.IR mode
+operand.
+.P
+It is implementation-defined whether and how the
+.IR chmod
+utility affects any alternate or additional file access control
+mechanism (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.4" ", " "File Access Permissions")
+being used for the specified file.
+.P
+Only a process whose effective user ID matches the user ID of the file,
+or a process with appropriate privileges, shall be permitted to
+change the file mode bits of a file.
+.P
+Upon successfully changing the file mode bits of a file, the
+.IR chmod
+utility shall mark for update the last file status change timestamp
+of the file.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR chmod
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(miR\fP" 10
+Recursively change file mode bits. For each
+.IR file
+operand that names a directory,
+.IR chmod
+shall change the file mode bits of the directory and all files in the
+file hierarchy below it.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fImode\fR" 10
+Represents the change to be made to the file mode bits of each
+file named by one of the
+.IR file
+operands; see the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file whose file mode bits shall be modified.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR chmod :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+The
+.IR mode
+operand shall be either a
+.IR symbolic_mode
+expression or a non-negative octal integer. The
+.IR symbolic_mode
+form is described by the grammar later in this section.
+.P
+Each
+.BR clause
+shall specify an operation to be performed on the current file mode
+bits of each
+.IR file .
+The operations shall be performed on each
+.IR file
+in the order in which the
+.BR clause s
+are specified.
+.P
+The
+.BR who
+symbols
+.BR u ,
+.BR g ,
+and
+.BR o
+shall specify the
+.IR user ,
+.IR group ,
+and
+.IR other
+parts of the file mode bits, respectively. A
+.BR who
+consisting of the symbol
+.BR a
+shall be equivalent to
+.BR ugo .
+.P
+The
+.BR perm
+symbols
+.BR r ,
+.BR w ,
+and
+.BR x
+represent the
+.IR read ,
+.IR write ,
+and
+.IR execute /\c
+.IR search
+portions of file mode bits, respectively. The
+.BR perm
+symbol
+.BR s
+shall represent the
+.IR "set-user-ID-on-execution"
+(when
+.BR who
+contains or implies
+.BR u )
+and
+.IR "set-group-ID-on-execution"
+(when
+.BR who
+contains or implies
+.BR g )
+bits.
+.P
+The
+.BR perm
+symbol
+.BR X
+shall represent the execute/search portion of the file mode bits if the
+file is a directory or if the current (unmodified) file mode bits have
+at least one of the execute bits (S_IXUSR, S_IXGRP, or S_IXOTH) set. It
+shall be ignored if the file is not a directory and none of the execute
+bits are set in the current file mode bits.
+.P
+The
+.BR permcopy
+symbols
+.BR u ,
+.BR g ,
+and
+.BR o
+shall represent the current permissions associated with the user,
+group, and other parts of the file mode bits, respectively. For the
+remainder of this section,
+.BR perm
+refers to the non-terminals
+.BR perm
+and
+.BR permcopy
+in the grammar.
+.P
+If multiple
+.BR actionlist s
+are grouped with a single
+.BR wholist
+in the grammar, each
+.BR actionlist
+shall be applied in the order specified with that
+.BR wholist .
+The
+.IR op
+symbols shall represent the operation performed, as follows:
+.IP "\fR+\fP" 6
+If
+.BR perm
+is not specified, the
+.BR '\(pl' 
+operation shall not change the file mode bits.
+.RS 6 
+.P
+If
+.BR who
+is not specified, the file mode bits represented by
+.BR perm
+for the owner, group, and other permissions, except for those with
+corresponding bits in the file mode creation mask of the invoking
+process, shall be set.
+.P
+Otherwise, the file mode bits represented by the specified
+.BR who
+and
+.BR perm
+values shall be set.
+.RE
+.IP "\fR\(mi\fP" 6
+If
+.BR perm
+is not specified, the
+.BR '\(mi' 
+operation shall not change the file mode bits.
+.RS 6 
+.P
+If
+.BR who
+is not specified, the file mode bits represented by
+.BR perm
+for the owner, group, and other permissions, except for those with
+corresponding bits in the file mode creation mask of the invoking
+process, shall be cleared.
+.P
+Otherwise, the file mode bits represented by the specified
+.BR who
+and
+.BR perm
+values shall be cleared.
+.RE
+.IP "\fR=\fP" 6
+Clear the file mode bits specified by the
+.BR who
+value, or, if no
+.BR who
+value is specified, all of the file mode bits specified in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.RS 6 
+.P
+If
+.BR perm
+is not specified, the
+.BR '=' 
+operation shall make no further modifications to the file mode bits.
+.P
+If
+.BR who
+is not specified, the file mode bits represented by
+.BR perm
+for the owner, group, and other permissions, except for those with
+corresponding bits in the file mode creation mask of the invoking
+process, shall be set.
+.P
+Otherwise, the file mode bits represented by the specified
+.BR who
+and
+.BR perm
+values shall be set.
+.RE
+.P
+When using the symbolic mode form on a regular file, it is
+implementation-defined whether or not:
+.IP " *" 4
+Requests to set the set-user-ID-on-execution or
+set-group-ID-on-execution bit when all execute bits are currently clear
+and none are being set are ignored.
+.IP " *" 4
+Requests to clear all execute bits also clear the
+set-user-ID-on-execution and set-group-ID-on-execution bits.
+.IP " *" 4
+Requests to clear the set-user-ID-on-execution or
+set-group-ID-on-execution bits when all execute bits are currently
+clear are ignored. However, if the command
+.IR ls
+.BR \(mil
+.IR file
+writes an
+.IR s
+in the position indicating that the set-user-ID-on-execution or
+set-group-ID-on-execution is set, the commands
+.IR chmod
+.BR u\(mis
+.IR file
+or
+.IR chmod
+.BR g\(mis
+.IR file ,
+respectively, shall not be ignored.
+.P
+When using the symbolic mode form on other file types, it is
+implementation-defined whether or not requests to set or clear the
+set-user-ID-on-execution or set-group-ID-on-execution bits are
+honored.
+.P
+If the
+.BR who
+symbol
+.BR o
+is used in conjunction with the
+.BR perm
+symbol
+.BR s
+with no other
+.BR who
+symbols being specified, the set-user-ID-on-execution and
+set-group-ID-on-execution bits shall not be modified. It shall not be
+an error to specify the
+.BR who
+symbol
+.BR o
+in conjunction with the
+.BR perm
+symbol
+.BR s .
+.P
+The
+.BR perm
+symbol
+.BR t
+shall specify the S_ISVTX bit. When used with a file of type
+directory, it can be used with the
+.BR who
+symbol
+.BR a ,
+or with no
+.BR who
+symbol. It shall not be an error to specify a
+.BR who
+symbol of
+.BR u ,
+.BR g ,
+or
+.BR o
+in conjunction with the
+.BR perm
+symbol
+.BR t ,
+but the meaning of these combinations is unspecified. The effect when
+using the
+.BR perm
+symbol
+.BR t
+with any file type other than directory is unspecified.
+.P
+For an octal integer
+.IR mode
+operand, the file mode bits shall be set absolutely.
+.P
+For each bit set in the octal number, the corresponding file permission
+bit shown in the following table shall be set; all other file
+permission bits shall be cleared. For regular files, for each bit set
+in the octal number corresponding to the set-user-ID-on-execution or
+the set-group-ID-on-execution, bits shown in the following table shall
+be set; if these bits are not set in the octal number, they are
+cleared. For other file types, it is implementation-defined whether
+or not requests to set or clear the set-user-ID-on-execution or
+set-group-ID-on-execution bits are honored.
+.TS
+center tab(@) box;
+cB cB | cB cB | cB cB | cB cB
+nB l | nB l | nB l | nB l.
+Octal@Mode Bit@Octal@Mode Bit@Octal@Mode Bit@Octal@Mode Bit
+_
+4000@S_ISUID@0400@S_IRUSR@0040@S_IRGRP@0004@S_IROTH
+_
+2000@S_ISGID@0200@S_IWUSR@0020@S_IWGRP@0002@S_IWOTH
+_
+1000@S_ISVTX@0100@S_IXUSR@0010@S_IXGRP@0001@S_IXOTH
+.TE
+.P
+When bits are set in the octal number other than those listed in the
+table above, the behavior is unspecified.
+.SS "Grammar for chmod"
+.P
+The grammar and lexical conventions in this section describe the syntax
+for the
+.IR symbolic_mode
+operand. The general conventions for this style of grammar are
+described in
+.IR "Section 1.3" ", " "Grammar Conventions".
+A valid
+.IR symbolic_mode
+can be represented as the non-terminal symbol
+.IR symbolic_mode
+in the grammar. This formal syntax shall take precedence over the
+preceding text syntax description.
+.P
+The lexical processing is based entirely on single characters.
+Implementations need not allow
+<blank>
+characters within the single argument being processed.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+%start    symbolic_mode
+%%
+.P
+symbolic_mode    : clause
+                 | symbolic_mode ',' clause
+                 ;
+.P
+clause           : actionlist
+                 | wholist actionlist
+                 ;
+.P
+wholist          : who
+                 | wholist who
+                 ;
+.P
+who              : 'u' | 'g' | 'o' | 'a'
+                 ;
+.P
+actionlist       : action
+                 | actionlist action
+                 ;
+.P
+action           : op
+                 | op permlist
+                 | op permcopy
+                 ;
+.P
+permcopy         : 'u' | 'g' | 'o'
+                 ;
+.P
+op               : '+' | '\(mi' | '='
+                 ;
+.P
+permlist         : perm
+                 | perm permlist
+                 ;
+.P
+perm             : 'r' | 'w' | 'x' | 'X' | 's' | 't'  
+                 ;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+The utility executed successfully and all requested changes were made.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Some implementations of the
+.IR chmod
+utility change the mode of a directory before the files in the
+directory when performing a recursive (\c
+.BR \(miR
+option) change; others change the directory mode after the files in the
+directory. If an application tries to remove read or search permission
+for a file hierarchy, the removal attempt fails if the directory is
+changed first; on the other hand, trying to re-enable permissions to a
+restricted hierarchy fails if directories are changed last. Users
+should not try to make a hierarchy inaccessible to themselves.
+.P
+Some implementations of
+.IR chmod
+never used the
+.IR umask
+of the process when changing modes; systems conformant with this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+do so when
+.BR who
+is not specified. Note the difference between:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+chmod a\(miw file
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+which removes all write permissions, and:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+chmod \(mi\|\(mi \(miw file
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+which removes write permissions that would be allowed if
+.BR file
+was created with the same
+.IR umask .
+.P
+Conforming applications should never assume that they know how the
+set-user-ID and set-group-ID bits on directories are interpreted.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.ad l
+.TS
+center tab(@) box;
+cB | cB
+l | lw(3i).
+Mode@Results
+_
+\fIa\fP+=@T{
+Equivalent to
+.IR a +,\c
+.IR a =;
+clears all file mode bits.
+T}
+\fIgo\fP+\(miw@T{
+Equivalent to
+.IR go +,\c
+.IR go \(mi\c
+.IR w ;
+clears group and other write bits.
+T}
+\fIg\fR=\fIo\fR\(mi\fIw\fR@T{
+Equivalent to
+.IR g =\c
+.IR o ,\c
+.IR g \(mi\c
+.IR w ;
+sets group bit to match other bits and then clears group write bit.
+T}
+\fIg\fR\(mi\fIr\fR+\fIw\fR@T{
+Equivalent to
+.IR g \(mi\c
+.IR r ,\c
+.IR g +\c
+.IR w ;
+clears group read bit and sets group write bit.
+T}
+\fIuo\fR=\fIg\fR@T{
+Sets owner bits to match group bits and sets other bits to
+match group bits.
+T}
+.TE
+.ad b
+.SH RATIONALE
+The functionality of
+.IR chmod
+is described substantially through references to concepts defined in
+the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. In this way, there is less duplication of effort required
+for describing the interactions of permissions. However, the behavior
+of this utility is not described in terms of the
+\fIchmod\fR()
+function from the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 because that specification requires certain
+side-effects upon alternate file access control mechanisms that might
+not be appropriate, depending on the implementation.
+.P
+Implementations that support mandatory file and record locking as
+specified
+by the 1984 /usr/group standard historically used the combination of set-group-ID bit set
+and group execute bit clear to indicate mandatory locking. This
+condition is usually set or cleared with the symbolic mode
+.BR perm
+symbol
+.BR l
+instead of the
+.BR perm
+symbols
+.BR s
+and
+.BR x
+so that the mandatory locking mode is not changed without explicit
+indication that that was what the user intended. Therefore, the details
+on how the implementation treats these conditions must be defined in
+the documentation. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not require mandatory locking (nor does
+the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008), but does allow it as an extension. However, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does
+require that the
+.IR ls
+and
+.IR chmod
+utilities work consistently in this area. If
+.IR ls
+.BR \(mil
+.IR file
+indicates that the set-group-ID bit is set,
+.IR chmod
+.BR g\(mis
+.IR file
+must clear it (assuming appropriate privileges exist to change modes).
+.P
+The System V and BSD versions use different exit status codes. Some
+implementations used the exit status as a count of the number of errors
+that occurred; this practice is unworkable since it can overflow the
+range of valid exit status values. This problem is avoided here by
+specifying only 0 and >0 as exit values.
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 indicates that implementation-defined restrictions may cause
+the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits to be ignored. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 allows the
+.IR chmod
+utility to choose to modify these bits before calling
+\fIchmod\fR()
+(or some function providing equivalent capabilities) for non-regular
+files. Among other things, this allows implementations that use the
+set-user-ID and set-group-ID bits on directories to enable extended
+features to
+handle these extensions in an intelligent manner.
+.P
+The
+.BR X
+.BR perm
+symbol was adopted from BSD-based systems because it provides commonly
+desired functionality when doing recursive (\c
+.BR \(miR
+option) modifications. Similar functionality is not provided by the
+.IR find
+utility. Historical BSD versions of
+.IR chmod ,
+however, only supported
+.BR X
+with
+.IR op +;
+it has been extended in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 because it is also useful with
+.IR op =.
+(It has also been added for
+.IR op \(mi
+even though it duplicates
+.BR x ,
+in this case, because it is intuitive and easier to explain.)
+.P
+The grammar was extended with the
+.IR permcopy
+non-terminal to allow historical-practice forms of symbolic modes like
+.BR o =\c
+.BR u
+.BR \(mig
+(that is, set the ``other'' permissions to the permissions of ``owner''
+minus the permissions of ``group'').
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIls\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIumask\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.4" ", " "File Access Permissions",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/chown.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/chown.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4defb5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/chown.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,301 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CHOWN "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+chown
+\(em change the file ownership
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+chown \fB[\fR\(mih\fB] \fIowner\fB[\fR:\fIgroup\fB] \fIfile\fR...
+.P
+chown \(miR \fB[\fR\(miH|\(miL|\(miP\fB] \fIowner\fB[\fR:\fIgroup\fB] \fIfile\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR chown
+utility shall set the user ID of the file named by each
+.IR file
+operand to the user ID specified by the
+.IR owner
+operand.
+.P
+For each
+.IR file
+operand, or, if the
+.BR \(miR
+option is used, each file encountered while walking the directory
+trees specified by the
+.IR file
+operands, the
+.IR chown
+utility shall perform actions equivalent to the
+\fIchown\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, called with the following arguments:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The
+.IR file
+operand shall be used as the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The user ID indicated by the
+.IR owner
+portion of the first operand shall be used as the
+.IR owner
+argument.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If the
+.IR group
+portion of the first operand is given, the group ID indicated by it
+shall be used as the
+.IR group
+argument; otherwise, the group ownership shall not be changed.
+.P
+Unless
+.IR chown
+is invoked by a process with appropriate privileges, the set-user-ID
+and set-group-ID bits of a regular file shall be cleared upon
+successful completion; the set-user-ID and set-group-ID bits of other
+file types may be cleared.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR chown
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported by the implementation:
+.IP "\fB\(mih\fP" 10
+For each file operand that names a file of type symbolic link,
+.IR chown
+shall attempt to set the user ID of the symbolic link. If a group ID
+was specified, for each file operand that names a file of
+type symbolic link,
+.IR chown
+shall attempt to set the group ID of the symbolic link.
+.IP "\fB\(miH\fP" 10
+If the
+.BR \(miR
+option is specified and a symbolic link referencing a file of type
+directory is specified on the command line,
+.IR chown
+shall change the user ID (and group ID, if specified) of the directory
+referenced by the symbolic link and all files in the file hierarchy
+below it.
+.IP "\fB\(miL\fP" 10
+If the
+.BR \(miR
+option is specified and a symbolic link referencing a file of type
+directory is specified on the command line or encountered during the
+traversal of a file hierarchy,
+.IR chown
+shall change the user ID (and group ID, if specified) of the directory
+referenced by the symbolic link and all files in the file hierarchy
+below it.
+.IP "\fB\(miP\fP" 10
+If the
+.BR \(miR
+option is specified and a symbolic link is specified on the command
+line or encountered during the traversal of a file hierarchy,
+.IR chown
+shall change the owner ID (and group ID, if specified) of the symbolic
+link. The
+.IR chown
+utility shall not follow the symbolic link to any other part of the
+file hierarchy.
+.IP "\fB\(miR\fP" 10
+Recursively change file user and group IDs. For each
+.IR file
+operand that names a directory,
+.IR chown
+shall change the user ID (and group ID, if specified) of the directory
+and all files in the file hierarchy below it. Unless a
+.BR \(miH ,
+.BR \(miL ,
+or
+.BR \(miP
+option is specified, it is unspecified which of these options will be
+used as the default.
+.P
+Specifying more than one of the mutually-exclusive options
+.BR \(miH ,
+.BR \(miL ,
+and
+.BR \(miP
+shall not be considered an error. The last option specified shall
+determine the behavior of the utility.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIowner\fB[\fR:\fIgroup\fB]\fR" 10
+A user ID and optional group ID to be assigned to
+.IR file .
+The
+.IR owner
+portion of this operand shall be a user name from the user database or
+a numeric user ID. Either specifies a user ID which shall be given to
+each file named by one of the
+.IR file
+operands. If a numeric
+.IR owner
+operand exists in the user database as a user name, the user ID number
+associated with that user name shall be used as the user ID. Similarly,
+if the
+.IR group
+portion of this operand is present, it shall be a group name from the
+group database or a numeric group ID. Either specifies a group ID which
+shall be given to each file. If a numeric group operand exists in the
+group database as a group name, the group ID number associated with
+that group name shall be used as the group ID.
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file whose user ID is to be modified.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR chown :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+The utility executed successfully and all requested changes were made.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Only the owner of a file or the user with appropriate privileges may
+change the owner or group of a file.
+.P
+Some implementations restrict the use of
+.IR chown
+to a user with appropriate privileges.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The System V and BSD versions use different exit status codes. Some
+implementations used the exit status as a count of the number of errors
+that occurred; this practice is unworkable since it can overflow the
+range of valid exit status values. These are masked by specifying only
+0 and >0 as exit values.
+.P
+The functionality of
+.IR chown
+is described substantially through references to functions in the
+System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. In this way, there is no duplication of effort required for
+describing the interactions of permissions, multiple groups, and so
+on.
+.P
+The 4.3 BSD method of specifying both owner and group was included in
+\&this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 because:
+.IP " *" 4
+There are cases where the desired end condition could not be achieved
+using the
+.IR chgrp
+and
+.IR chown
+(that only changed the user ID) utilities. (If the current owner is not
+a member of the desired group and the desired owner is not a member of
+the current group, the
+\fIchown\fR()
+function could fail unless both owner and group are changed at the same
+time.)
+.IP " *" 4
+Even if they could be changed independently, in cases where both are
+being changed, there is a 100% performance penalty caused by being
+forced to invoke both utilities.
+.P
+The BSD syntax
+.IR user [.\c
+.IR group ]
+was changed to
+.IR user [:\c
+.IR group ]
+in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 because the
+<period>
+is a valid character in login names (as specified by the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, login
+names consist of characters in the portable filename character set). The
+<colon>
+character was chosen as the replacement for the
+<period>
+character because it would never be allowed as a character in a user
+name or group name on historical implementations.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miR
+option is considered by some observers as an undesirable departure from
+the historical UNIX system tools approach; since a tool,
+.IR find ,
+already exists to recurse over directories, there seemed to be no good
+reason to require other tools to have to duplicate that functionality.
+However, the
+.BR \(miR
+option was deemed an important user convenience, is far more efficient
+than forking a separate process for each element of the directory
+hierarchy, and is in widespread historical use.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIchgrp\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIchown\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cksum.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cksum.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..718ec6a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cksum.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,373 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CKSUM "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cksum
+\(em write file checksums and sizes
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+cksum \fB[\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR cksum
+utility shall calculate and write to standard output a cyclic
+redundancy check (CRC) for each input file, and also write to standard
+output the number of octets in each file. The CRC used is based on the
+polynomial used for CRC error checking in the ISO/IEC\ 8802\(hy3:\|1996 standard (Ethernet).
+.P
+The encoding for the CRC checksum is defined by the generating
+polynomial:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIG\fR(\fIx\fR)=\fIx\fR\u\s-332\s+3\d+\fIx\fR\u\s-326\s+3\d+\fIx\fR\u\s-323\s+3\d+\fIx\fR\u\s-322\s+3\d+\fIx\fR\u\s-316\s+3\d+\fIx\fR\u\s-312\s+3\d+\fIx\fR\u\s-311\s+3\d+\fIx\fR\u\s-310\s+3\d+\fIx\fR\u\s-38\s+3\d+\fIx\fR\u\s-37\s+3\d+\fIx\fR\u\s-35\s+3\d+\fIx\fR\u\s-34\s+3\d+\fIx\fR\u\s-32\s+3\d+\fIx\fR+1
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Mathematically, the CRC value corresponding to a given file shall be
+defined by the following procedure:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The
+.IR n
+bits to be evaluated are considered to be the coefficients of a mod 2
+polynomial
+.IR M (\c
+.IR x )
+of degree
+.IR n \(mi1.
+These
+.IR n
+bits are the bits from the file, with the most significant bit being
+the most significant bit of the first octet of the file and the last
+bit being the least significant bit of the last octet, padded with zero
+bits (if necessary) to achieve an integral number of octets, followed
+by one or more octets representing the length of the file as a binary
+value, least significant octet first. The smallest number of octets
+capable of representing this integer shall be used.
+.IP " 2." 4
+.IR M (\c
+.IR x )
+is multiplied by
+.IR x \u\s-332\s+3\d
+(that is, shifted left 32 bits) and divided by
+.IR G (\c
+.IR x )
+using mod 2 division, producing a remainder
+.IR R (\c
+.IR x )
+of degree \(<= 31.
+.IP " 3." 4
+The coefficients of
+.IR R (\c
+.IR x )
+are considered to be a 32-bit sequence.
+.IP " 4." 4
+The bit sequence is complemented and the result is the CRC.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file to be checked. If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, the standard input shall be used.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used if no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, and shall be used if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' 
+and the implementation treats the
+.BR '\(mi' 
+as meaning standard input.
+Otherwise, the standard input shall not be used.
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files can be any file type.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR cksum :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+For each file processed successfully, the
+.IR cksum
+utility shall write in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%u %d %s\en", <\fIchecksum\fR>, <\fI# of octets\fR>, <\fIpathname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If no
+.IR file
+operand was specified, the pathname and its leading
+<space>
+shall be omitted.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+All files were processed successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR cksum
+utility is typically used to quickly compare a suspect file against a
+trusted version of the same, such as to ensure that files transmitted
+over noisy media arrive intact. However, this comparison cannot be
+considered cryptographically secure. The chances of a damaged file
+producing the same CRC as the original are small; deliberate deception
+is difficult, but probably not impossible.
+.P
+Although input files to
+.IR cksum
+can be any type, the results need not be what would be expected on
+character special device files or on file types not described by the
+System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. Since this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not specify the block size used when doing
+input, checksums of character special files need not process all of the
+data in those files.
+.P
+The algorithm is expressed in terms of a bitstream divided into octets.
+If a file is transmitted between two systems and undergoes any data
+transformation (such as changing little-endian byte ordering to
+big-endian), identical CRC values cannot be expected. Implementations
+performing such transformations may extend
+.IR cksum
+to handle such situations.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The following C-language program can be used as a model to describe the
+algorithm. It assumes that a
+.BR char
+is one octet. It also assumes that the entire file is available for one
+pass through the function. This was done for simplicity in
+demonstrating the algorithm, rather than as an implementation model.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+static unsigned long crctab[] = {
+0x00000000,
+0x04c11db7, 0x09823b6e, 0x0d4326d9, 0x130476dc, 0x17c56b6b,
+0x1a864db2, 0x1e475005, 0x2608edb8, 0x22c9f00f, 0x2f8ad6d6,
+0x2b4bcb61, 0x350c9b64, 0x31cd86d3, 0x3c8ea00a, 0x384fbdbd,
+0x4c11db70, 0x48d0c6c7, 0x4593e01e, 0x4152fda9, 0x5f15adac,
+0x5bd4b01b, 0x569796c2, 0x52568b75, 0x6a1936c8, 0x6ed82b7f,
+0x639b0da6, 0x675a1011, 0x791d4014, 0x7ddc5da3, 0x709f7b7a,
+0x745e66cd, 0x9823b6e0, 0x9ce2ab57, 0x91a18d8e, 0x95609039,
+0x8b27c03c, 0x8fe6dd8b, 0x82a5fb52, 0x8664e6e5, 0xbe2b5b58,
+0xbaea46ef, 0xb7a96036, 0xb3687d81, 0xad2f2d84, 0xa9ee3033,
+0xa4ad16ea, 0xa06c0b5d, 0xd4326d90, 0xd0f37027, 0xddb056fe,
+0xd9714b49, 0xc7361b4c, 0xc3f706fb, 0xceb42022, 0xca753d95,
+0xf23a8028, 0xf6fb9d9f, 0xfbb8bb46, 0xff79a6f1, 0xe13ef6f4,
+0xe5ffeb43, 0xe8bccd9a, 0xec7dd02d, 0x34867077, 0x30476dc0,
+0x3d044b19, 0x39c556ae, 0x278206ab, 0x23431b1c, 0x2e003dc5,
+0x2ac12072, 0x128e9dcf, 0x164f8078, 0x1b0ca6a1, 0x1fcdbb16,
+0x018aeb13, 0x054bf6a4, 0x0808d07d, 0x0cc9cdca, 0x7897ab07,
+0x7c56b6b0, 0x71159069, 0x75d48dde, 0x6b93dddb, 0x6f52c06c,
+0x6211e6b5, 0x66d0fb02, 0x5e9f46bf, 0x5a5e5b08, 0x571d7dd1,
+0x53dc6066, 0x4d9b3063, 0x495a2dd4, 0x44190b0d, 0x40d816ba,
+0xaca5c697, 0xa864db20, 0xa527fdf9, 0xa1e6e04e, 0xbfa1b04b,
+0xbb60adfc, 0xb6238b25, 0xb2e29692, 0x8aad2b2f, 0x8e6c3698,
+0x832f1041, 0x87ee0df6, 0x99a95df3, 0x9d684044, 0x902b669d,
+0x94ea7b2a, 0xe0b41de7, 0xe4750050, 0xe9362689, 0xedf73b3e,
+0xf3b06b3b, 0xf771768c, 0xfa325055, 0xfef34de2, 0xc6bcf05f,
+0xc27dede8, 0xcf3ecb31, 0xcbffd686, 0xd5b88683, 0xd1799b34,
+0xdc3abded, 0xd8fba05a, 0x690ce0ee, 0x6dcdfd59, 0x608edb80,
+0x644fc637, 0x7a089632, 0x7ec98b85, 0x738aad5c, 0x774bb0eb,
+0x4f040d56, 0x4bc510e1, 0x46863638, 0x42472b8f, 0x5c007b8a,
+0x58c1663d, 0x558240e4, 0x51435d53, 0x251d3b9e, 0x21dc2629,
+0x2c9f00f0, 0x285e1d47, 0x36194d42, 0x32d850f5, 0x3f9b762c,
+0x3b5a6b9b, 0x0315d626, 0x07d4cb91, 0x0a97ed48, 0x0e56f0ff,
+0x1011a0fa, 0x14d0bd4d, 0x19939b94, 0x1d528623, 0xf12f560e,
+0xf5ee4bb9, 0xf8ad6d60, 0xfc6c70d7, 0xe22b20d2, 0xe6ea3d65,
+0xeba91bbc, 0xef68060b, 0xd727bbb6, 0xd3e6a601, 0xdea580d8,
+0xda649d6f, 0xc423cd6a, 0xc0e2d0dd, 0xcda1f604, 0xc960ebb3,
+0xbd3e8d7e, 0xb9ff90c9, 0xb4bcb610, 0xb07daba7, 0xae3afba2,
+0xaafbe615, 0xa7b8c0cc, 0xa379dd7b, 0x9b3660c6, 0x9ff77d71,
+0x92b45ba8, 0x9675461f, 0x8832161a, 0x8cf30bad, 0x81b02d74,
+0x857130c3, 0x5d8a9099, 0x594b8d2e, 0x5408abf7, 0x50c9b640,
+0x4e8ee645, 0x4a4ffbf2, 0x470cdd2b, 0x43cdc09c, 0x7b827d21,
+0x7f436096, 0x7200464f, 0x76c15bf8, 0x68860bfd, 0x6c47164a,
+0x61043093, 0x65c52d24, 0x119b4be9, 0x155a565e, 0x18197087,
+0x1cd86d30, 0x029f3d35, 0x065e2082, 0x0b1d065b, 0x0fdc1bec,
+0x3793a651, 0x3352bbe6, 0x3e119d3f, 0x3ad08088, 0x2497d08d,
+0x2056cd3a, 0x2d15ebe3, 0x29d4f654, 0xc5a92679, 0xc1683bce,
+0xcc2b1d17, 0xc8ea00a0, 0xd6ad50a5, 0xd26c4d12, 0xdf2f6bcb,
+0xdbee767c, 0xe3a1cbc1, 0xe760d676, 0xea23f0af, 0xeee2ed18,
+0xf0a5bd1d, 0xf464a0aa, 0xf9278673, 0xfde69bc4, 0x89b8fd09,
+0x8d79e0be, 0x803ac667, 0x84fbdbd0, 0x9abc8bd5, 0x9e7d9662,
+0x933eb0bb, 0x97ffad0c, 0xafb010b1, 0xab710d06, 0xa6322bdf,
+0xa2f33668, 0xbcb4666d, 0xb8757bda, 0xb5365d03, 0xb1f740b4
+};
+.P
+unsigned long memcrc(const unsigned char *b, size_t n)
+{
+/*  Input arguments:
+ *  const unsigned char*   b == byte sequence to checksum
+ *  size_t                 n == length of sequence
+ */
+.P
+    register size_t i;
+    register unsigned c, s = 0;
+.P
+    for (i = n; i > 0; \(mi\|\(mii) {
+        c = *b++;
+        s = (s << 8) ^ crctab[(s >> 24) ^ c];
+    }
+.P
+    /* Extend with the length of the string. */
+    while (n != 0) {
+        c = n & 0377;
+        n >>= 8;
+        s = (s << 8) ^ crctab[(s >> 24) ^ c];
+    }
+.P
+    return ~s;
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The historical practice of writing the number of ``blocks'' has been
+changed to writing the number of octets, since the latter is not only
+more useful, but also since historical implementations have not been
+consistent in defining what a ``block'' meant.
+.P
+The algorithm used was selected to increase the operational robustness
+of
+.IR cksum .
+Neither the System V nor BSD
+.IR sum
+algorithm was selected. Since each of these was different and each was
+the default behavior on those systems, no realistic compromise was
+available if either were selected\(emsome set of historical
+applications would break. Therefore, the name was changed to
+.IR cksum .
+Although the historical
+.IR sum
+commands will probably continue to be provided for many years, programs
+designed for portability across systems should use the new name.
+.P
+The algorithm selected is based on that used by the ISO/IEC\ 8802\(hy3:\|1996 standard (Ethernet)
+for the frame check sequence field. The algorithm used does not match
+the technical definition of a
+.IR checksum ;
+the term is used for historical reasons. The length of the file is
+included in the CRC calculation because this parallels inclusion of a
+length field by Ethernet in its CRC, but also because it guards against
+inadvertent collisions between files that begin with different series
+of zero octets. The chance that two different files produce identical
+CRCs is much greater when their lengths are not considered. Keeping the
+length and the checksum of the file itself separate would yield a
+slightly more robust algorithm, but historical usage has always been
+that a single number (the checksum as printed) represents the signature
+of the file. It was decided that historical usage was the more
+important consideration.
+.P
+Early proposals contained modifications to the Ethernet algorithm that
+involved extracting table values whenever an intermediate result became
+zero. This was demonstrated to be less robust than the current method
+and mathematically difficult to describe or justify.
+.P
+The calculation used is identical to that given in pseudo-code in the
+referenced Sarwate article. The pseudo-code rendition is:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+X <\(mi 0; Y <\(mi 0;
+for i <\(mi m \(mi1 step \(mi1 until 0 do
+    begin
+    T <\(mi X(1) ^ A[i];
+    X(1) <\(mi X(0); X(0) <\(mi Y(1); Y(1) <\(mi Y(0); Y(0) <\(mi 0;
+    comment: f[T] and f'[T] denote the T-th words in the
+        table f and f' ;
+    X <\(mi X ^ f[T]; Y <\(mi Y ^ f'[T];
+    end
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The pseudo-code is reproduced exactly as given; however, note that in
+the case of
+.IR cksum ,
+.BR A[i]
+represents a byte of the file, the words
+.BR X
+and
+.BR Y
+are treated as a single 32-bit value, and the tables
+.BR f
+and
+.BR f'
+are a single table containing 32-bit values.
+.P
+The referenced Sarwate article also discusses generating the table.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cmp.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cmp.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1157d60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cmp.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,269 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CMP "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cmp
+\(em compare two files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+cmp \fB[\fR\(mil|\(mis\fB] \fIfile1 file2\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR cmp
+utility shall compare two files. The
+.IR cmp
+utility shall write no output if the files are the same. Under default
+options, if they differ, it shall write to standard output the byte and
+line number at which the first difference occurred. Bytes and lines
+shall be numbered beginning with 1.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR cmp
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mil\fP" 10
+(Lowercase ell.) Write the byte number (decimal) and the differing
+bytes (octal) for each difference.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Write nothing for differing files; return exit status only.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile1\fR" 10
+A pathname of the first file to be compared. If
+.IR file1
+is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be used.
+.IP "\fIfile2\fR" 10
+A pathname of the second file to be compared. If
+.IR file2
+is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be used.
+.P
+If both
+.IR file1
+and
+.IR file2
+refer to standard input or refer to the same FIFO special, block
+special, or character special file, the results are undefined.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used only if the
+.IR file1
+or
+.IR file2
+operand refers to standard input. See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files can be any file type.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR cmp :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+In the POSIX locale, results of the comparison shall be written to
+standard output. When no options are used, the format shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s %s differ: char %d, line %d\en", \fIfile1\fR, \fIfile2\fR,
+    <\fIbyte number\fR>, <\fIline number\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+When the
+.BR \(mil
+option is used, the format shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d %o %o\en", <\fIbyte number\fR>, <\fIdiffering byte\fR>,
+    <\fIdiffering byte\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+for each byte that differs. The first <\fIdiffering\ byte\fP> number is
+from
+.IR file1
+while the second is from
+.IR file2 .
+In both cases, <\fIbyte\ number\fP> shall be relative to the beginning
+of the file, beginning with 1.
+.P
+No output shall be written to standard output when the
+.BR \(mis
+option is used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages. If the
+.BR \(mil
+option is used and
+.IR file1
+and
+.IR file2
+differ in length, or if the
+.BR \(mis
+option is not used and
+.IR file1
+and
+.IR file2
+are identical for the entire length of the shorter file, in the POSIX
+locale the following diagnostic message shall be written:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"cmp: EOF on %s%s\en", <\fIname of shorter file\fR>, <\fIadditional info\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The <\fIadditional\ info\fP> field shall either be null or a string
+that starts with a
+<blank>
+and contains no
+<newline>
+characters. Some implementations report on the number of lines in
+this case.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+The files are identical.
+.IP "\01" 6
+The files are different; this includes the case where one file is
+identical to the first part of the other.
+.IP >1 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Although input files to
+.IR cmp
+can be any type, the results might not be what would be expected on
+character special device files or on file types not described by the
+System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. Since this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not specify the block size used when doing
+input, comparisons of character special files need not compare all of
+the data in those files.
+.P
+For files which are not text files, line numbers simply reflect the
+presence of a
+<newline>,
+without any implication that the file is organized into lines.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The global language in
+.IR "Section 1.4" ", " "Utility Description Defaults"
+indicates that using two mutually-exclusive options together produces
+unspecified results. Some System V implementations consider the option
+usage:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cmp \(mil \(mis ...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+to be an error. They also treat:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cmp \(mis \(mil ...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+as if no options were specified. Both of these behaviors are
+considered bugs, but are allowed.
+.P
+The word
+.BR char
+in the standard output format comes from historical usage, even though
+it is actually a byte number. When
+.IR cmp
+is supported in other locales, implementations are encouraged to use
+the word
+.IR byte
+or its equivalent in another language. Users should not interpret this
+difference to indicate that the functionality of the utility changed
+between locales.
+.P
+Some implementations report on the number of lines in the
+identical-but-shorter file case. This is allowed by the inclusion of
+the <\fIadditional\ info\fP> fields in the output format. The
+restriction on having a leading
+<blank>
+and no
+<newline>
+characters is to make parsing for the filename easier. It is recognized
+that some filenames containing white-space characters make parsing
+difficult anyway, but the restriction does aid programs used on systems
+where the names are predominantly well behaved.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcomm\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIdiff\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/colon.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/colon.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0a4d835
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/colon.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+'\" et
+.TH COLON "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+colon
+\(em null utility
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+: \fB[\fIargument\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This utility shall only expand command
+.IR argument s.
+It is used when a command is needed, as in the
+.BR then
+condition of an
+.BR if
+command, but nothing is to be done by the command.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+None.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+Zero.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.LP
+.nf
+: ${X=abc}
+if     false
+then   :
+else   echo $X
+fi
+\fBabc\fR
+.fi
+.P
+As with any of the special built-ins, the null utility can also have
+variable assignments and redirections associated with it, such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+x=y : > z
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+which sets variable
+.IR x
+to the value
+.IR y
+(so that it persists after the null utility completes) and creates or
+truncates file
+.BR z .
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/comm.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/comm.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..86f4ed8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/comm.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,287 @@
+'\" et
+.TH COMM "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+comm
+\(em select or reject lines common to two files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+comm \fB[\fR\(mi123\fB] \fIfile1 file2\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR comm
+utility shall read
+.IR file1
+and
+.IR file2 ,
+which should be ordered in the current collating sequence, and produce
+three text columns as output: lines only in
+.IR file1 ,
+lines only in
+.IR file2 ,
+and lines in both files.
+.P
+If the lines in both files are not ordered according to the collating
+sequence of the current locale, the results are unspecified.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR comm
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mi1\fP" 10
+Suppress the output column of lines unique to
+.IR file1 .
+.IP "\fB\(mi2\fP" 10
+Suppress the output column of lines unique to
+.IR file2 .
+.IP "\fB\(mi3\fP" 10
+Suppress the output column of lines duplicated in
+.IR file1
+and
+.IR file2 .
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile1\fR" 10
+A pathname of the first file to be compared. If
+.IR file1
+is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be used.
+.IP "\fIfile2\fR" 10
+A pathname of the second file to be compared. If
+.IR file2
+is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be used.
+.P
+If both
+.IR file1
+and
+.IR file2
+refer to standard input or to the same FIFO special, block special, or
+character special file, the results are undefined.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used only if one of the
+.IR file1
+or
+.IR file2
+operands refers to standard input. See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files shall be text files.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR comm :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the collating sequence
+.IR comm
+expects to have been used when the input files were sorted.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The
+.IR comm
+utility shall produce output depending on the options selected. If the
+.BR \(mi1 ,
+.BR \(mi2 ,
+and
+.BR \(mi3
+options are all selected,
+.IR comm
+shall write nothing to standard output.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mi1
+option is not selected, lines contained only in
+.IR file1
+shall be written using the format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIline in file1\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mi2
+option is not selected, lines contained only in
+.IR file2
+are written using the format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s%s\en", <\fIlead\fR>, <\fIline in file2\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where the string <\fIlead\fP> is as follows:
+.IP <tab> 10
+The
+.BR \(mi1
+option is not selected.
+.IP "null\ string" 10
+The
+.BR \(mi1
+option is selected.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mi3
+option is not selected, lines contained in both files shall be written
+using the format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s%s\en", <\fIlead\fR>, <\fIline in both\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where the string <\fIlead\fP> is as follows:
+.IP <tab><tab> 10
+Neither the
+.BR \(mi1
+nor the
+.BR \(mi2
+option is selected.
+.IP <tab> 10
+Exactly one of the
+.BR \(mi1
+and
+.BR \(mi2
+options is selected.
+.IP "null\ string" 10
+Both the
+.BR \(mi1
+and
+.BR \(mi2
+options are selected.
+.P
+If the input files were ordered according to the collating sequence of
+the current locale, the lines written shall be in the collating
+sequence of the original lines.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+All input files were successfully output as specified.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If the input files are not properly presorted, the output of
+.IR comm
+might not be useful.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+If a file named
+.BR xcu
+contains a sorted list of the utilities in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, a file named
+.BR xpg3
+contains a sorted list of the utilities specified in the X/Open
+Portability Guide, Issue 3, and a file named
+.BR svid89
+contains a sorted list of the utilities in the System V Interface
+Definition Third Edition:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+comm \(mi23 xcu xpg3 | comm \(mi23 \(mi svid89
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would print a list of utilities in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 not specified by either of the
+other documents:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+comm \(mi12 xcu xpg3 | comm \(mi12 \(mi svid89
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would print a list of utilities specified by all three documents, and:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+comm \(mi12 xpg3 svid89 | comm \(mi23 \(mi xcu
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would print a list of utilities specified by both XPG3 and the SVID,
+but not specified in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcmp\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIdiff\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsort\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIuniq\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/command.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/command.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c8683a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/command.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,560 @@
+'\" et
+.TH COMMAND "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+command
+\(em execute a simple command
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+command \fB[\fR\(mip\fB] \fIcommand_name \fB[\fIargument\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+command \fB[\fR\(mip\fB][\fR\(miv|\(miV\fB] \fIcommand_name\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR command
+utility shall cause the shell to treat the arguments as a simple
+command, suppressing the shell function lookup that is described in
+.IR "Section 2.9.1.1" ", " "Command Search and Execution",
+item 1b.
+.P
+If the
+.IR command_name
+is the same as the name of one of the special built-in utilities, the
+special properties in the enumerated list at the beginning of
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities"
+shall not occur. In every other respect, if
+.IR command_name
+is not the name of a function, the effect of
+.IR command
+(with no options) shall be the same as omitting
+.IR command .
+.P
+When the
+.BR \(miv
+or
+.BR \(miV
+option is used, the
+.IR command
+utility shall provide information concerning how a command name
+is interpreted by the shell.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR command
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mip\fP" 10
+Perform the command search using a default value for
+.IR PATH
+that is guaranteed to find all of the standard utilities.
+.IP "\fB\(miv\fP" 10
+Write a string to standard output that indicates the pathname or command
+that will be used by the shell, in the current shell execution environment
+(see
+.IR "Section 2.12" ", " "Shell Execution Environment"),
+to invoke
+.IR command_name ,
+but do not invoke
+.IR command_name .
+.RS 10 
+.IP " *" 4
+Utilities, regular built-in utilities,
+.IR command_name s
+including a
+<slash>
+character, and any implementation-defined functions that are found
+using the
+.IR PATH
+variable (as described in
+.IR "Section 2.9.1.1" ", " "Command Search and Execution"),
+shall be written as absolute pathnames.
+.IP " *" 4
+Shell functions, special built-in utilities, regular built-in utilities
+not associated with a
+.IR PATH
+search, and shell reserved words shall be written as just their names.
+.IP " *" 4
+An alias shall be written as a command line that represents its alias
+definition.
+.IP " *" 4
+Otherwise, no output shall be written and the exit status shall reflect
+that the name was not found.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miV\fP" 10
+Write a string to standard output that indicates how the name given in the
+.IR command_name
+operand will be interpreted by the shell, in the current shell
+execution environment (see
+.IR "Section 2.12" ", " "Shell Execution Environment"),
+but do not invoke
+.IR command_name .
+Although the format of this string is unspecified, it shall indicate in
+which of the following categories
+.IR command_name
+falls and shall include the information stated:
+.RS 10 
+.IP " *" 4
+Utilities, regular built-in utilities, and any implementation-defined
+functions that are found using the
+.IR PATH
+variable (as described in
+.IR "Section 2.9.1.1" ", " "Command Search and Execution"),
+shall be identified as such and include the absolute pathname in the
+string.
+.IP " *" 4
+Other shell functions shall be identified as functions.
+.IP " *" 4
+Aliases shall be identified as aliases and their definitions
+included in the string.
+.IP " *" 4
+Special built-in utilities shall be identified as special built-in
+utilities.
+.IP " *" 4
+Regular built-in utilities not associated with a
+.IR PATH
+search shall be identified as regular built-in utilities. (The term
+``regular'' need not be used.)
+.IP " *" 4
+Shell reserved words shall be identified as reserved words.
+.RE
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIargument\fR" 10
+One of the strings treated as an argument to
+.IR command_name .
+.IP "\fIcommand_name\fR" 10
+.br
+The name of a utility or a special built-in utility.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR command :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fIPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the search path used during the command search described in
+.IR "Section 2.9.1.1" ", " "Command Search and Execution",
+except as described under the
+.BR \(mip
+option.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+When the
+.BR \(miv
+option is specified, standard output shall be formatted as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIpathname or command\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+When the
+.BR \(miV
+option is specified, standard output shall be formatted as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIunspecified\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+When the
+.BR \(miv
+or
+.BR \(miV
+options are specified, the following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+The
+.IR command_name
+could not be found or an error occurred.
+.P
+Otherwise, the following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP 126 6
+The utility specified by
+.IR command_name
+was found but could not be invoked.
+.IP 127 6
+An error occurred in the
+.IR command
+utility or the utility specified by
+.IR command_name
+could not be found.
+.P
+Otherwise, the exit status of
+.IR command
+shall be that of the simple command specified by the arguments to
+.IR command .
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The order for command search allows functions to override regular
+built-ins and path searches. This utility is necessary to allow
+functions that have the same name as a utility to call the utility
+(instead of a recursive call to the function).
+.P
+The system default path is available using
+.IR getconf ;
+however, since
+.IR getconf
+may need to have the
+.IR PATH
+set up before it can be called itself, the following can be used:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+command \(mip getconf PATH
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+There are some advantages to suppressing the special characteristics of
+special built-ins on occasion. For example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+command exec > \fIunwritable-file\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+does not cause a non-interactive script to abort, so that the output
+status can be checked by the script.
+.P
+The
+.IR command ,
+.IR env ,
+.IR nohup ,
+.IR time ,
+and
+.IR xargs
+utilities have been specified to use exit code 127 if an error occurs
+so that applications can distinguish ``failure to find a utility'' from
+``invoked utility exited with an error indication''. The value 127 was
+chosen because it is not commonly used for other meanings; most
+utilities use small values for ``normal error conditions'' and the
+values above 128 can be confused with termination due to receipt of a
+signal. The value 126 was chosen in a similar manner to indicate that
+the utility could be found, but not invoked. Some scripts produce
+meaningful error messages differentiating the 126 and 127 cases. The
+distinction between exit codes 126 and 127 is based on KornShell
+practice that uses 127 when all attempts to
+.IR exec
+the utility fail with
+.BR [ENOENT] ,
+and uses 126 when any attempt to
+.IR exec
+the utility fails for any other reason.
+.P
+Since the
+.BR \(miv
+and
+.BR \(miV
+options of
+.IR command
+produce output in relation to the current shell execution environment,
+.IR command
+is generally provided as a shell regular built-in. If it is called in a
+subshell or separate utility execution environment, such as one of the
+following:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(PATH=foo command \(miv)
+ nohup command \(miv
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+it does not necessarily produce correct results. For example, when
+called with
+.IR nohup
+or an
+.IR exec
+function, in a separate utility execution environment, most
+implementations are not able to identify aliases, functions, or special
+built-ins.
+.P
+Two types of regular built-ins could be encountered on a system and
+these are described separately by
+.IR command .
+The description of command search in
+.IR "Section 2.9.1.1" ", " "Command Search and Execution"
+allows for a standard utility to be implemented as a regular built-in
+as long as it is found in the appropriate place in a
+.IR PATH
+search. So, for example,
+.IR command
+.BR \(miv
+.IR true
+might yield
+.BR /bin/true
+or some similar pathname. Other implementation-defined utilities that
+are not defined by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 might exist only as built-ins and have no
+pathname associated with them. These produce output identified as
+(regular) built-ins. Applications encountering these are not able to
+count on
+.IR exec ing
+them, using them with
+.IR nohup ,
+overriding them with a different
+.IR PATH ,
+and so on.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+Make a version of
+.IR cd
+that always prints out the new working directory exactly once:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cd() {
+    command cd "$@" >/dev/null
+    pwd
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+Start off a ``secure shell script'' in which the script avoids
+being spoofed by its parent:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+IFS='
+\&'
+#    The preceding value should be <space><tab><newline>.
+#    Set IFS to its default value.
+.P
+\eunalias \(mia
+#    Unset all possible aliases.
+#    Note that unalias is escaped to prevent an alias
+#    being used for unalias.
+.P
+unset \(mif command
+#    Ensure command is not a user function.
+.P
+PATH="$(command \(mip getconf PATH):$PATH"
+#    Put on a reliable PATH prefix.
+.P
+#    ...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+At this point, given correct permissions on the directories called by
+.IR PATH ,
+the script has the ability to ensure that any utility it calls is the
+intended one. It is being very cautious because it assumes that
+implementation extensions may be present that would allow user
+functions to exist when it is invoked; this capability is not specified
+by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, but it is not prohibited as an extension. For example, the
+.IR ENV
+variable precedes the invocation of the script with a user start-up
+script. Such a script could define functions to spoof the application.
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+Since
+.IR command
+is a regular built-in utility it is always found prior to the
+.IR PATH
+search.
+.P
+There is nothing in the description of
+.IR command
+that implies the command line is parsed any differently from that of
+any other simple command. For example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+command a | b ; c
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+is not parsed in any special way that causes
+.BR '|' 
+or
+.BR ';' 
+to be treated other than a pipe operator or
+<semicolon>
+or that prevents function lookup on
+.BR b
+or
+.BR c .
+.P
+The
+.IR command
+utility is somewhat similar to the Eighth Edition shell
+.IR builtin
+command, but since
+.IR command
+also goes to the file system to search for utilities, the name
+.IR builtin
+would not be intuitive.
+.P
+The
+.IR command
+utility is most likely to be provided as a regular built-in. It is not
+listed as a special built-in
+for the following reasons:
+.IP " *" 4
+The removal of exportable functions made the special precedence of a
+special built-in unnecessary.
+.IP " *" 4
+A special built-in has special properties (see
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities")
+that were inappropriate for invoking other utilities. For example, two
+commands such as:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+date > \fIunwritable-file\fR
+.P
+command date > \fIunwritable-file\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would have entirely different results; in a non-interactive script, the
+former would continue to execute the next command, the latter would
+abort. Introducing this semantic difference along with suppressing
+functions was seen to be non-intuitive.
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mip
+option is present because it is useful to be able to ensure a safe path
+search that finds all the standard utilities. This search might not be
+identical to the one that occurs through one of the
+.IR exec
+functions (as defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008) when
+.IR PATH
+is unset. At the very least, this feature is required to allow the
+script to access the correct version of
+.IR getconf
+so that the value of the default path can be accurately retrieved.
+.P
+The
+.IR command
+.BR \(miv
+and
+.BR \(miV
+options were added to satisfy requirements from users that are
+currently accomplished by three different historical utilities:
+.IR type
+in the System V shell,
+.IR whence
+in the KornShell, and
+.IR which
+in the C shell. Since there is no historical agreement on how and what
+to accomplish here, the POSIX
+.IR command
+utility was enhanced and the historical utilities were left unmodified.
+The C shell
+.IR which
+merely conducts a path search. The KornShell
+.IR whence
+is more elaborate\(emin addition to the categories required by POSIX,
+it also reports on tracked aliases, exported aliases, and undefined
+functions.
+.P
+The output format of
+.BR \(miV
+was left mostly unspecified because human users are its only audience.
+Applications should not be written to care about this information; they
+can use the output of
+.BR \(miv
+to differentiate between various types of commands, but the additional
+information that may be emitted by the more verbose
+.BR \(miV
+is not needed and should not be arbitrarily constrained in its
+verbosity or localization for application parsing reasons.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.9.1.1" ", " "Command Search and Execution",
+.IR "Section 2.12" ", " "Shell Execution Environment",
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities",
+.IR "\fIsh\fR\^",
+.IR "\fItype\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/compress.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/compress.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8ade608
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/compress.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,258 @@
+'\" et
+.TH COMPRESS "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+compress
+\(em compress data
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+compress \fB[\fR\(mifv\fB] [\fR\(mib \fIbits\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+compress \fB[\fR\(micfv\fB] [\fR\(mib \fIbits\fB] [\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR compress
+utility shall attempt to reduce the size of the named files by using
+adaptive Lempel-Ziv coding algorithm.
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+Lempel-Ziv is US Patent 4464650, issued to William Eastman, Abraham
+Lempel, Jacob Ziv, Martin Cohn on August 7th, 1984, and assigned to
+Sperry Corporation.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+Lempel-Ziv-Welch compression is covered by US Patent 4558302, issued to
+Terry A. Welch on December 10th, 1985, and assigned to Sperry
+Corporation.
+.RE
+.P
+On systems not supporting adaptive Lempel-Ziv coding algorithm, the
+input files shall not be changed and an error value greater than two
+shall be returned. Except when the output is to the standard output,
+each file shall be replaced by one with the extension
+.BR .Z .
+If the invoking process has appropriate privileges, the ownership,
+modes, access time, and modification time of the original file are
+preserved. If appending the
+.BR .Z
+to the filename would make the name exceed
+{NAME_MAX}
+bytes, the command shall fail. If no files are specified, the standard
+input shall be compressed to the standard output.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR compress
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mib\ \fIbits\fR" 10
+Specify the maximum number of bits to use in a code. For a conforming
+application, the
+.IR bits
+argument shall be:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+9 <= \fIbits\fP <= 14
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The implementation may allow
+.IR bits
+values of greater than 14. The default is 14, 15, or 16.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Cause
+.IR compress
+to write to the standard output; the input file is not changed, and no
+.BR .Z
+files are created.
+.IP "\fB\(mif\fP" 10
+Force compression of
+.IR file ,
+even if it does not actually reduce the size of the file, or if the
+corresponding
+.IR file \c
+.BR .Z
+file already exists. If the
+.BR \(mif
+option is not given, and the process is not running in the background,
+the user is prompted as to whether an existing
+.IR file \c
+.BR .Z
+file should be overwritten. If the response is affirmative, the existing
+file will be overwritten.
+.IP "\fB\(miv\fP" 10
+Write the percentage reduction of each file to standard error.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file to be compressed.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used only if no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, or if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' .
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+If
+.IR file
+operands are specified, the input files contain the data to be
+compressed.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR compress :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, equivalence classes,
+and multi-character collating elements used in the extended regular
+expression defined for the
+.BR yesexpr
+locale keyword in the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+category.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of text
+data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi-byte
+characters in arguments), the behavior of character classes used in the
+extended regular expression defined for the
+.BR yesexpr
+locale keyword in the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+category.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale used to process affirmative responses, and the
+locale used to affect the format and contents of diagnostic messages,
+prompts, and the output from the
+.BR \(miv
+option written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, or if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+or if the
+.BR \(mic
+option is specified, the standard output contains the compressed
+output.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic and prompt
+messages and the output from
+.BR \(miv .
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+The output files shall contain the compressed output. The format of
+compressed files is unspecified and interchange of such files between
+implementations (including access via unspecified file sharing
+mechanisms) is not required by POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP "\01" 6
+An error occurred.
+.IP "\02" 6
+One or more files were not compressed because they would have increased
+in size (and the
+.BR \(mif
+option was not specified).
+.IP >2 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+The input file shall remain unmodified.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The amount of compression obtained depends on the size of the input,
+the number of
+.IR bits
+per code, and the distribution of common substrings. Typically, text
+such as source code or English is reduced by 50\(hy60%. Compression is
+generally much better than that achieved by Huffman coding
+or adaptive Huffman coding (\c
+.IR compact ),
+and takes less time to compute.
+.P
+Although
+.IR compress
+strictly follows the default actions upon receipt of a signal or when
+an error occurs, some unexpected results may occur. In some
+implementations it is likely that a partially compressed file is left
+in place, alongside its uncompressed input file. Since the general
+operation of
+.IR compress
+is to delete the uncompressed file only after the
+.BR .Z
+file has been successfully filled, an application should always
+carefully check the exit status of
+.IR compress
+before arbitrarily deleting files that have like-named neighbors with
+.BR .Z
+suffixes.
+.P
+The limit of 14 on the
+.IR bits
+option-argument is to achieve portability to all systems (within the
+restrictions imposed by the lack of an explicit published file
+format). Some implementations based on 16-bit architectures cannot
+support 15 or 16-bit uncompression.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIuncompress\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIzcat\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/continue.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/continue.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c2cead3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/continue.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CONTINUE "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+continue
+\(em continue for, while, or until loop
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+continue \fB[\fIn\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR continue
+utility shall return to the top of the smallest enclosing
+.BR for ,
+.BR while ,
+or
+.BR until
+loop, or to the top of the
+.IR n th
+enclosing loop, if
+.IR n
+is specified. This involves repeating the condition list of a
+.BR while
+or
+.BR until
+loop or performing the next assignment of a
+.BR for
+loop, and re-executing the loop if appropriate.
+.P
+The value of
+.IR n
+is a decimal integer greater than or equal to 1. The default shall be
+equivalent to
+.IR n =1.
+If
+.IR n
+is greater than the number of enclosing loops, the outermost enclosing
+loop shall be used.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+None.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+The
+.IR n
+value was not an unsigned decimal integer greater than or equal to 1.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.LP
+.nf
+for i in *
+do
+    if test \(mid "$i"
+    then continue
+    fi
+    printf '"%s" is not a directory.\en' "$i"
+done
+.fi
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cp.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cp.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..66193ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cp.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,806 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CP "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cp
+\(em copy files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+cp \fB[\fR\(miPfip\fB] \fIsource_file target_file\fR
+.P
+cp \fB[\fR\(miPfip\fB] \fIsource_file\fR... \fItarget\fR
+.P
+cp \(miR \fB[\fR\(miH|\(miL|\(miP\fB] [\fR\(mifip\fB] \fIsource_file\fR... \fItarget\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The first synopsis form is denoted by two operands, neither of which
+are existing files of type directory. The
+.IR cp
+utility shall copy the contents of
+.IR source_file
+(or, if
+.IR source_file
+is a file of type symbolic link, the contents of the file referenced by
+.IR source_file )
+to the destination path named by
+.IR target_file.
+.P
+The second synopsis form is denoted by two or more operands where the
+.BR \(miR
+option is not specified and the first synopsis form is not
+applicable. It shall be an error if any
+.IR source_file
+is a file of type directory, if
+.IR target
+does not exist, or if
+.IR target
+does not name a directory. The
+.IR cp
+utility shall copy the contents of each
+.IR source_file
+(or, if
+.IR source_file
+is a file of type symbolic link, the contents of the file referenced by
+.IR source_file )
+to the destination path named by the concatenation of
+.IR target ,
+a single
+<slash>
+character if
+.IR target
+did not end in a
+<slash>,
+and the last component of
+.IR source_file .
+.P
+The third synopsis form is denoted by two or more operands where the
+.BR \(miR
+option is specified. The
+.IR cp
+utility shall copy each file in the file hierarchy rooted in each
+.IR source_file
+to a destination path named as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR target
+exists and names an existing directory, the name of the corresponding
+destination path for each file in the file hierarchy shall be the
+concatenation of
+.IR target ,
+a single
+<slash>
+character if
+.IR target
+did not end in a
+<slash>,
+and the pathname of the file relative to the directory containing
+.IR source_file .
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR target
+does not exist and two operands are specified, the name of the
+corresponding destination path for
+.IR source_file
+shall be
+.IR target ;
+the name of the corresponding destination path for all other files in
+the file hierarchy shall be the concatenation of
+.IR target ,
+a
+<slash>
+character, and the pathname of the file relative to
+.IR source_file .
+.P
+It shall be an error if
+.IR target
+does not exist and more than two operands are specified, or if
+.IR target
+exists and does not name a directory.
+.P
+In the following description, the term
+.IR dest_file
+refers to the file named by the destination path. The term
+.IR source_file
+refers to the file that is being copied, whether specified as an
+operand or a file in a file hierarchy rooted in a
+.IR source_file
+operand. If
+.IR source_file
+is a file of type symbolic link:
+.IP " *" 4
+If the
+.BR \(miR
+option was not specified,
+.IR cp
+shall take actions based on the type and contents of the file referenced
+by the symbolic link, and not by the symbolic link itself, unless the
+.BR \(miP
+option was specified.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the
+.BR \(miR
+option was specified:
+.RS 4 
+.IP -- 4
+If none of the options
+.BR \(miH ,
+.BR \(miL ,
+nor
+.BR \(miP
+were specified, it is unspecified which of
+.BR \(miH ,
+.BR \(miL ,
+or
+.BR \(miP
+will be used as a default.
+.IP -- 4
+If the
+.BR \(miH
+option was specified,
+.IR cp
+shall take actions based on the type and contents of the
+file referenced by any symbolic link specified as a
+.IR source_file
+operand.
+.IP -- 4
+If the
+.BR \(miL
+option was specified,
+.IR cp
+shall take actions based on the type and contents of the
+file referenced by any symbolic link specified as a
+.IR source_file
+operand or any symbolic links encountered during traversal of a
+file hierarchy.
+.IP -- 4
+If the
+.BR \(miP
+option was specified,
+.IR cp
+shall copy any symbolic link specified as a
+.IR source_file
+operand and any symbolic links encountered during traversal of a
+file hierarchy, and shall not follow any symbolic links.
+.RE
+.P
+For each
+.IR source_file ,
+the following steps shall be taken:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If
+.IR source_file
+references the same file as
+.IR dest_file ,
+.IR cp
+may write a diagnostic message to standard error; it shall do nothing
+more with
+.IR source_file
+and shall go on to any remaining files.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If
+.IR source_file
+is of type directory, the following steps shall be taken:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+If the
+.BR \(miR
+option was not specified,
+.IR cp
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing more
+with
+.IR source_file ,
+and go on to any remaining files.
+.IP " b." 4
+If
+.IR source_file
+was not specified as an operand and
+.IR source_file
+is dot or dot-dot,
+.IR cp
+shall do nothing more with
+.IR source_file
+and go on to any remaining files.
+.IP " c." 4
+If
+.IR dest_file
+exists and it is a file type not specified by the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, the behavior
+is implementation-defined.
+.IP " d." 4
+If
+.IR dest_file
+exists and it is not of type directory,
+.IR cp
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing more
+with
+.IR source_file
+or any files below
+.IR source_file
+in the file hierarchy, and go on to any remaining files.
+.IP " e." 4
+If the directory
+.IR dest_file
+does not exist, it shall be created with file permission bits set to
+the same value as those of
+.IR source_file ,
+modified by the file creation mask of the user if the
+.BR \(mip
+option was not specified, and then bitwise-inclusively OR'ed with
+S_IRWXU. If
+.IR dest_file
+cannot be created,
+.IR cp
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing more
+with
+.IR source_file ,
+and go on to any remaining files. It is unspecified if
+.IR cp
+attempts to copy files in the file hierarchy rooted in
+.IR source_file .
+.IP " f." 4
+The files in the directory
+.IR source_file
+shall be copied to the directory
+.IR dest_file ,
+taking the four steps (1 to 4) listed here with the files as
+.IR source_file s.
+.IP " g." 4
+If
+.IR dest_file
+was created, its file permission bits shall be changed (if necessary)
+to be the same as those of
+.IR source_file ,
+modified by the file creation mask of the user if the
+.BR \(mip
+option was not specified.
+.IP " h." 4
+The
+.IR cp
+utility shall do nothing more with
+.IR source_file
+and go on to any remaining files.
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+If
+.IR source_file
+is of type regular file, the following steps shall be taken:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+The behavior is unspecified if
+.IR dest_file
+exists and was written by a previous step. Otherwise, if
+.IR dest_file
+exists, the following steps shall be taken:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " i." 5
+If the
+.BR \(mii
+option is in effect, the
+.IR cp
+utility shall write a prompt to the standard error and read a line from
+the standard input. If the response is not affirmative,
+.IR cp
+shall do nothing more with
+.IR source_file
+and go on to any remaining files.
+.IP ii. 5
+A file descriptor for
+.IR dest_file
+shall be obtained by performing actions equivalent to the
+\fIopen\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 called using
+.IR dest_file
+as the
+.IR path
+argument, and the bitwise-inclusive OR of O_WRONLY and O_TRUNC as the
+.IR oflag
+argument.
+.IP iii. 5
+If the attempt to obtain a file descriptor fails and the
+.BR \(mif
+option is in effect,
+.IR cp
+shall attempt to remove the file by performing actions equivalent to
+the
+\fIunlink\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 called using
+.IR dest_file
+as the
+.IR path
+argument. If this attempt succeeds,
+.IR cp
+shall continue with step 3b.
+.RE
+.IP " b." 4
+If
+.IR dest_file
+does not exist, a file descriptor shall be obtained by performing
+actions equivalent to the
+\fIopen\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 called using
+.IR dest_file
+as the
+.IR path
+argument, and the bitwise-inclusive OR of O_WRONLY and O_CREAT as the
+.IR oflag
+argument. The file permission bits of
+.IR source_file
+shall be the
+.IR mode
+argument.
+.IP " c." 4
+If the attempt to obtain a file descriptor fails,
+.IR cp
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing more with
+.IR source_file ,
+and go on to any remaining files.
+.IP " d." 4
+The contents of
+.IR source_file
+shall be written to the file descriptor. Any write errors shall cause
+.IR cp
+to write a diagnostic message to standard error and continue to step
+3e.
+.IP " e." 4
+The file descriptor shall be closed.
+.IP " f." 4
+The
+.IR cp
+utility shall do nothing more with
+.IR source_file .
+If a write error occurred in step 3d, it is unspecified if
+.IR cp
+continues with any remaining files. If no write error occurred in step
+3d,
+.IR cp
+shall go on to any remaining files.
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+Otherwise, the
+.BR \(miR
+option was specified, and the following steps shall be taken:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+The
+.IR dest_file
+shall be created with the same file type as
+.IR source_file .
+.IP " b." 4
+If
+.IR source_file
+is a file of type FIFO, the file permission bits shall be the same as
+those of
+.IR source_file,
+modified by the file creation mask of the user if the
+.BR \(mip
+option was not specified. Otherwise, the permissions, owner ID, and
+group ID of
+.IR dest_file
+are implementation-defined.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+If this creation fails for any reason,
+.IR cp
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing more
+with
+.IR source_file ,
+and go on to any remaining files.
+.RE
+.IP " c." 4
+If
+.IR source_file
+is a file of type symbolic link, and the options require the symbolic
+link itself to be acted upon, the pathname contained in
+.IR dest_file
+shall be the same as the pathname contained in
+.IR source_file .
+.RS 4 
+.P
+If this fails for any reason,
+.IR cp
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing more
+with
+.IR source_file ,
+and go on to any remaining files.
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the implementation provides additional or alternate access control
+mechanisms (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.4" ", " "File Access Permissions"),
+their effect on copies of files is implementation-defined.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR cp
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mif\fP" 10
+If a file descriptor for a destination file cannot be obtained, as
+described in step 3.a.ii., attempt to unlink the destination file and
+proceed.
+.IP "\fB\(miH\fP" 10
+Take actions based on the type and contents of the file referenced by
+any symbolic link specified as a
+.IR source_file
+operand.
+.IP "\fB\(mii\fP" 10
+Write a prompt to standard error before copying to any existing
+non-directory destination file. If the response from the standard input
+is affirmative, the copy shall be attempted; otherwise, it shall not.
+.IP "\fB\(miL\fP" 10
+Take actions based on the type and contents of the file referenced by
+any symbolic link specified as a
+.IR source_file
+operand or any symbolic links encountered during traversal of a
+file hierarchy.
+.IP "\fB\(miP\fP" 10
+Take actions on any symbolic link specified as a
+.IR source_file
+operand or any symbolic link encountered during traversal of a
+file hierarchy.
+.IP "\fB\(mip\fP" 10
+Duplicate the following characteristics of each source file in the
+corresponding destination file:
+.RS 10 
+.IP " 1." 4
+The time of last data modification and time of last access. If this
+duplication fails for any reason,
+.IR cp
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The user ID and group ID. If this duplication fails for any reason, it
+is unspecified whether
+.IR cp
+writes a diagnostic message to standard error.
+.IP " 3." 4
+The file permission bits and the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits. Other,
+implementation-defined, bits may be duplicated as well. If this
+duplication fails for any reason,
+.IR cp
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error.
+.P
+If the user ID or the group ID cannot be duplicated, the file
+permission bits S_ISUID and S_ISGID shall be cleared. If these bits are
+present in the source file but are not duplicated in the destination
+file, it is unspecified whether
+.IR cp
+writes a diagnostic message to standard error.
+.P
+The order in which the preceding characteristics are duplicated is
+unspecified. The
+.IR dest_file
+shall not be deleted if these characteristics cannot be preserved.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miR\fR" 10
+Copy file hierarchies.
+.P
+Specifying more than one of the mutually-exclusive options
+.BR \(miH ,
+.BR \(miL ,
+and
+.BR \(miP
+shall not be considered an error. The last option specified shall
+determine the behavior of the utility.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIsource_file\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file to be copied. If a
+.IR source_file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+it shall refer to a file named
+.BR \(mi ;
+implementations shall not treat it as meaning standard input.
+.IP "\fItarget_file\fR" 10
+A pathname of an existing or nonexistent file, used for the output when
+a single file is copied. If a
+.IR target_file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+it shall refer to a file named
+.BR \(mi ;
+implementations shall not treat it as meaning standard output.
+.IP "\fItarget\fR" 10
+A pathname of a directory to contain the copied files.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used to read an input line in response to
+each prompt specified in the STDERR section. Otherwise, the standard
+input shall not be used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files specified as operands may be of any file type.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR cp :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, equivalence classes,
+and multi-character collating elements used in the extended regular
+expression defined for the
+.BR yesexpr
+locale keyword in the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+category.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files) and the behavior of
+character classes used in the extended regular expression defined for
+the
+.BR yesexpr
+locale keyword in the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+category.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale used to process affirmative responses, and the
+locale used to affect the format and contents of diagnostic messages
+and prompts written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+A prompt shall be written to standard error under the conditions
+specified in the DESCRIPTION section. The prompt shall contain the
+destination pathname, but its format is otherwise unspecified.
+Otherwise, the standard error shall be used only for diagnostic
+messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+The output files may be of any type.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+All files were copied successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+If
+.IR cp
+is prematurely terminated by a signal or error, files or file
+hierarchies may be only partially copied and files and directories may
+have incorrect permissions or access and modification times.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The set-user-ID and set-group-ID bits are explicitly cleared when files
+are created. This is to prevent users from creating programs that are
+set-user-ID or set-group-ID to them when copying files or to make
+set-user-ID or set-group-ID files accessible to new groups of users.
+For example, if a file is set-user-ID and the copy has a different
+group ID than the source, a new group of users has execute permission
+to a set-user-ID program than did previously. In particular, this is a
+problem for superusers copying users' trees.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.BR \(mii
+option exists on BSD systems, giving applications and users a way to
+avoid accidentally removing files when copying. Although the 4.3 BSD
+version does not prompt if the standard input is not a terminal, the
+standard developers decided that use of
+.BR \(mii
+is a request for interaction, so when the destination path exists, the
+utility takes instructions from whatever responds on standard input.
+.P
+The exact format of the interactive prompts is unspecified. Only the
+general nature of the contents of prompts are specified because
+implementations may desire more descriptive prompts than those used on
+historical implementations. Therefore, an application using the
+.BR \(mii
+option relies on the system to provide the most suitable dialog
+directly with the user, based on the behavior specified.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mip
+option is historical practice on BSD systems, duplicating the time of
+last data modification and time of last access. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 extends it to
+preserve the user and group IDs, as well as the file permissions. This
+requirement has obvious problems in that the directories are almost
+certainly modified after being copied. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that the
+modification times be preserved. The statement that the order in which
+the characteristics are duplicated is unspecified is to permit
+implementations to provide the maximum amount of security for the user.
+Implementations should take into account the obvious security issues
+involved in setting the owner, group, and mode in the wrong order or
+creating files with an owner, group, or mode different from the final
+value.
+.P
+It is unspecified whether
+.IR cp
+writes diagnostic messages when the user and group IDs cannot be set
+due to the widespread practice of users using
+.BR \(mip
+to duplicate some portion of the file characteristics, indifferent to
+the duplication of others. Historic implementations only write
+diagnostic messages on errors other than
+.BR [EPERM] .
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard included support for the
+.BR \(mir
+option to copy file hierarchies. The
+.BR \(mir
+option is historical practice on BSD and BSD-derived systems. This
+option is no longer specified by POSIX.1\(hy2008 but may be present
+in some implementations. The
+.BR \(miR
+option was added as a close synonym to the
+.BR \(mir
+option, selected for consistency with all other options in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 that
+do recursive directory descent.
+.P
+The difference between
+.BR \(miR
+and the removed
+.BR \(mir
+option is in the treatment by
+.IR cp
+of file types other than regular and directory. It was
+implementation-defined how the
+.BR \(mi
+option treated special files to allow both historical implementations
+and those that chose to support
+.BR \(mir
+with the same abilities as
+.BR \(miR
+defined by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. The original
+.BR \(mir
+flag, for historic reasons, did not handle special files any differently
+from regular files, but always read the file and copied its contents. This
+had obvious problems in the presence of special file types; for example,
+character devices, FIFOs, and sockets.
+.P
+When a failure occurs during the copying of a file hierarchy,
+.IR cp
+is required to attempt to copy files that are on the same level in the
+hierarchy or above the file where the failure occurred. It is
+unspecified if
+.IR cp
+shall attempt to copy files below the file where the failure occurred
+(which cannot succeed in any case).
+.P
+Permissions, owners, and groups of created special file types have been
+deliberately left as implementation-defined. This is to allow systems
+to satisfy special requirements (for example, allowing users to create
+character special devices, but requiring them to be owned by a certain
+group). In general, it is strongly suggested that the permissions,
+owner, and group be the same as if the user had run the historical
+.IR mknod ,
+.IR ln ,
+or other utility to create the file. It is also probable that
+additional privileges are required to create block, character, or
+other implementation-defined special file types.
+.P
+Additionally, the
+.BR \(mip
+option explicitly requires that all set-user-ID
+and set-group-ID permissions be
+discarded if any of the owner or group IDs cannot be set. This is to
+keep users from unintentionally giving away special privilege when
+copying programs.
+.P
+When creating regular files, historical versions of
+.IR cp
+use the mode of the source file as modified by the file mode creation
+mask. Other choices would have been to use the mode of the source file
+unmodified by the creation mask or to use the same mode as would be
+given to a new file created by the user (plus the execution bits of the
+source file) and then modify it by the file mode creation mask. In the
+absence of any strong reason to change historic practice, it was in
+large part retained.
+.P
+When creating directories, historical versions of
+.IR cp
+use the mode of the source directory, plus read, write, and search bits
+for the owner, as modified by the file mode creation mask. This is done
+so that
+.IR cp
+can copy trees where the user has read permission, but the owner does
+not. A side-effect is that if the file creation mask denies the owner
+permissions,
+.IR cp
+fails. Also, once the copy is done, historical versions of
+.IR cp
+set the permissions on the created directory to be the same as the
+source directory, unmodified by the file creation mask.
+.P
+This behavior has been modified so that
+.IR cp
+is always able to create the contents of the directory, regardless of
+the file creation mask. After the copy is done, the permissions are set
+to be the same as the source directory, as modified by the file
+creation mask. This latter change from historical behavior is to
+prevent users from accidentally creating directories with permissions
+beyond those they would normally set and for consistency with the
+behavior of
+.IR cp
+in creating files.
+.P
+It is not a requirement that
+.IR cp
+detect attempts to copy a file to itself; however, implementations are
+strongly encouraged to do so. Historical implementations have detected
+the attempt in most cases.
+.P
+There are two methods of copying subtrees in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. The other method is
+described as part of the
+.IR pax
+utility (see
+.IR "\fIpax\fR\^").
+Both methods are historical practice. The
+.IR cp
+utility provides a simpler, more intuitive interface, while
+.IR pax
+offers a finer granularity of control. Each provides additional
+functionality to the other; in particular,
+.IR pax
+maintains the hard-link structure of the hierarchy, while
+.IR cp
+does not. It is the intention of the standard developers that the
+results be similar (using appropriate option combinations in both
+utilities). The results are not required to be identical; there seemed
+insufficient gain to applications to balance the difficulty of
+implementations having to guarantee that the results would be exactly
+identical.
+.P
+The wording allowing
+.IR cp
+to copy a directory to implementation-defined file types not
+specified by the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 is provided so that implementations supporting
+symbolic links are not required to prohibit copying directories to
+symbolic links. Other extensions to the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 file types may need to
+use this loophole as well.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImv\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfind\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIln\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIpax\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.4" ", " "File Access Permissions",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/crontab.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/crontab.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6a0d791
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/crontab.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,360 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CRONTAB "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+crontab
+\(em schedule periodic background work
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+crontab \fB[\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.P
+crontab \fB[\fR\(mie\||\(mil|\(mir\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR crontab
+utility shall create, replace,
+or edit a user's crontab entry;
+a crontab entry is a list of commands and the times at which they
+shall be executed. The new crontab entry can be input by specifying
+.IR file
+or input from standard input if no
+.IR file
+operand is specified,
+or by using an editor, if
+.BR \(mie
+is specified.
+.P
+Upon execution of a command from a crontab entry, the implementation
+shall supply a default environment, defining at least the following
+environment variables:
+.IP "\fIHOME\fP" 10
+A pathname of the user's home directory.
+.IP "\fILOGNAME\fP" 10
+The user's login name.
+.IP "\fIPATH\fP" 10
+A string representing a search path guaranteed to find all of the
+standard utilities.
+.IP "\fISHELL\fP" 10
+A pathname of the command interpreter. When
+.IR crontab
+is invoked as specified by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, the value shall be a pathname for
+.IR sh .
+.P
+The values of these variables when
+.IR crontab
+is invoked as specified by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 shall not affect the default
+values provided when the scheduled command is run.
+.P
+If standard output and standard error are not redirected by commands
+executed from the crontab entry, any generated output or errors shall
+be mailed, via an implementation-defined method, to the user.
+.P
+Users shall be permitted to use
+.IR crontab
+if their names appear in the file
+.BR cron.allow
+which is located in an implementation-defined directory.
+If that file does not exist, the file
+.BR cron.deny ,
+which is located in an implementation-defined directory,
+shall be checked to determine whether the user shall be denied access to
+.IR crontab .
+If neither file exists, only a process with appropriate privileges shall be
+allowed to submit a job. If only
+.BR cron.deny
+exists and is empty, global usage shall be permitted. The
+.BR cron.allow
+and
+.BR cron.deny
+files shall consist of one user name per line.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR crontab
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mie\fP" 10
+Edit a copy of the invoking user's crontab entry, or create an empty
+entry to edit if the crontab entry does not exist. When editing is
+complete, the entry shall be installed as the user's crontab entry.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\fP" 10
+(The letter ell.) List the invoking user's crontab entry.
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+Remove the invoking user's crontab entry.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+The pathname of a file that contains specifications, in the format
+defined in the INPUT FILES section, for crontab entries.
+.SH STDIN
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+In the POSIX locale, the user or application shall ensure that a
+crontab entry is a text file consisting of lines of six fields each.
+The fields shall be separated by
+<blank>
+characters. The first five fields shall be integer patterns that specify
+the following:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Minute [0,59]
+.IP " 2." 4
+Hour [0,23]
+.IP " 3." 4
+Day of the month [1,31]
+.IP " 4." 4
+Month of the year [1,12]
+.IP " 5." 4
+Day of the week ([0,6] with 0=Sunday)
+.P
+Each of these patterns can be either an
+<asterisk>
+(meaning all valid values), an element, or a list of elements separated by
+<comma>
+characters. An element shall be either a number or two numbers separated
+by a
+<hyphen>
+(meaning an inclusive range). The specification of days can be made by
+two fields (day of the month and day of the week). If month, day of
+month, and day of week are all
+<asterisk>
+characters, every day shall be matched. If either the month or day of
+month is specified as an element or list, but the day of week is an
+<asterisk>,
+the month and day of month fields shall specify the days that match. If
+both month and day of month are specified as an
+<asterisk>,
+but day of week is an element or list, then only the specified days of the
+week match. Finally, if either the month or day of month is specified as
+an element or list, and the day of week is also specified as an element
+or list, then any day matching either the month and day of month, or
+the day of week, shall be matched.
+.P
+The sixth field of a line in a crontab entry is a string that shall be
+executed by
+.IR sh
+at the specified times. A
+<percent-sign>
+character in this field shall be translated to a
+<newline>.
+Any character preceded by a
+<backslash>
+(including the
+.BR '%' )
+shall cause that character to be treated literally. Only the first line
+(up to a
+.BR '%' 
+or end-of-line) of the command field shall be executed by the command
+interpreter. The other lines shall be made available to the command as
+standard input.
+.P
+Blank lines and those whose first non-\c
+<blank>
+is
+.BR '#' 
+shall be ignored.
+.P
+The text files
+.BR cron.allow
+and
+.BR cron.deny ,
+which are located in an implementation-defined directory,
+shall contain zero or more user names, one per line, of users who are,
+respectively, authorized or denied access to the service underlying the
+.IR crontab
+utility.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR crontab :
+.IP "\fIEDITOR\fP" 10
+Determine the editor to be invoked when the
+.BR \(mie
+option is specified. The default editor shall be
+.IR vi .
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+If the
+.BR \(mil
+option is specified, the crontab entry shall be written to the standard
+output.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+The user's crontab entry is not submitted, removed,
+edited,
+or listed.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The format of the crontab entry shown here is guaranteed only for the
+POSIX locale. Other cultures may be supported with substantially
+different interfaces, although implementations are encouraged to
+provide comparable levels of functionality.
+.P
+The default settings of the
+.IR HOME ,
+.IR LOGNAME ,
+.IR PATH ,
+and
+.IR SHELL
+variables that are given to the scheduled job are not affected by the
+settings of those variables when
+.IR crontab
+is run; as stated, they are defaults. The text about ``invoked as
+specified by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008'' means that the implementation may provide
+extensions that allow these variables to be affected at runtime, but
+that the user has to take explicit action in order to access the
+extension, such as give a new option flag or modify the format of the
+crontab entry.
+.P
+A typical user error is to type only
+.IR crontab ;
+this causes the system to wait for the new crontab entry on standard
+input. If end-of-file is typed (generally <control>\(hyD), the crontab
+entry is replaced by an empty file. In this case, the user should type
+the interrupt character, which prevents the crontab entry from being
+replaced.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+Clean up
+.BR core
+files every weekday morning at 3:15 am:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+15 3 * * 1-5 find "$HOME" \(miname core \(miexec rm \(mif {} + 2>/dev/null
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+Mail a birthday greeting:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+0 12 14 2 * mailx john%Happy Birthday!%Time for lunch.
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+As an example of specifying the two types of days:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+0 0 1,15 * 1
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would run a command on the first and fifteenth of each month, as well
+as on every Monday. To specify days by only one field, the other field
+should be set to
+.BR '*' ;
+for example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+0 0 * * 1
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would run a command only on Mondays.
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+All references to a
+.IR cron
+daemon and to
+.IR cron
+.IR files
+have been omitted. Although historical implementations have used this
+arrangement, there is no reason to limit future implementations.
+.P
+This description of
+.IR crontab
+is designed to support only users with normal privileges. The format of
+the input is based on the System V
+.IR crontab ;
+however, there is no requirement here that the actual system database
+used by the
+.IR cron
+daemon (or a similar mechanism) use this format internally. For
+example, systems derived from BSD are likely to have an additional
+field appended that indicates the user identity to be used when the job
+is submitted.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mie
+option was adopted from the SVID as a user convenience, although it
+does not exist in all historical implementations.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIat\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/csplit.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/csplit.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6c36dbc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/csplit.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,315 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CSPLIT "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+csplit
+\(em split files based on context
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+csplit \fB[\fR\(miks\fB] [\fR\(mif \fIprefix\fB] [\fR\(min \fInumber\fB] \fIfile arg\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR csplit
+utility shall read the file named by the
+.IR file
+operand, write all or part of that file into other files as directed
+by the
+.IR arg
+operands, and write the sizes of the files.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR csplit
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mif\ \fIprefix\fR" 10
+Name the created files
+.IR prefix \c
+.BR 00 ,
+.IR prefix \c
+.BR 01 ,
+\&.\|.\|.,
+.IR prefixn .
+The default is
+.BR xx00
+\&.\|.\|.
+.BR xx \c
+.IR n .
+If the
+.IR prefix
+argument would create a filename exceeding
+{NAME_MAX}
+bytes, an error shall result,
+.IR csplit
+shall exit with a diagnostic message, and no files shall be created.
+.IP "\fB\(mik\fP" 10
+Leave previously created files intact. By default,
+.IR csplit
+shall remove created files if an error occurs.
+.IP "\fB\(min\ \fInumber\fR" 10
+Use
+.IR number
+decimal digits to form filenames for the file pieces. The default
+shall be 2.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Suppress the output of file size messages.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+The pathname of a text file to be split. If
+.IR file
+is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be used.
+.P
+Each
+.IR arg
+operand can be one of the following:
+.IP "/\fIrexp\fR/\fB[\fIoffset\fB]\fR" 10
+.br
+A file shall be created using the content of the lines from the current
+line up to, but not including, the line that results from the
+evaluation of the regular expression with
+.IR offset ,
+if any, applied. The regular expression
+.IR rexp
+shall follow the rules for basic regular expressions described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 9.3" ", " "Basic Regular Expressions".
+The application shall use the sequence
+.BR \(dq\e/\(dq 
+to specify a
+<slash>
+character within the
+.IR rexp .
+The optional offset shall be a positive or negative integer value
+representing a number of lines. A positive integer value can be
+preceded by
+.BR '\(pl' .
+If the selection of lines from an
+.IR offset
+expression of this type would create a file with zero lines, or one
+with greater than the number of lines left in the input file, the
+results are unspecified. After the section is created, the current line
+shall be set to the line that results from the evaluation of the
+regular expression with any offset applied. If the current line is the
+first line in the file and a regular expression operation has not yet
+been performed, the pattern match of
+.IR rexp
+shall be applied from the current line to the end of the file.
+Otherwise, the pattern match of
+.IR rexp
+shall be applied from the line following the current line to the end of
+the file.
+.IP "%\fIrexp\fR%\fB[\fIoffset\fB]\fR" 10
+.br
+Equivalent to /\fIrexp\fR/\fB[\fIoffset\fB]\fR, except that no
+file shall be created for the selected section of the input file. The
+application shall use the sequence
+.BR \(dq\e%\(dq 
+to specify a
+<percent-sign>
+character within the
+.IR rexp .
+.IP "\fIline_no\fR" 10
+Create a file from the current line up to (but not including) the line
+number
+.IR line_no .
+Lines in the file shall be numbered starting at one. The current line
+becomes
+.IR line_no .
+.IP "{\fInum\fR}" 10
+Repeat operand. This operand can follow any of the operands described
+previously. If it follows a
+.IR rexp
+type operand, that operand shall be applied
+.IR num
+more times. If it follows a
+.IR line_no
+operand, the file shall be split every
+.IR line_no
+lines,
+.IR num
+times, from that point.
+.P
+An error shall be reported if an operand does not reference a line
+between the current position and the end of the file.
+.SH STDIN
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input file shall be a text file.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR csplit :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, equivalence classes,
+and multi-character collating elements within regular expressions.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files) and the behavior of
+character classes within regular expressions.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+If the
+.BR \(mik
+option is specified, created files shall be retained. Otherwise, the
+default action occurs.
+.SH STDOUT
+Unless the
+.BR \(mis
+option is used, the standard output shall consist of one line per
+file created, with a format as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d\en", <\fIfile size in bytes\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+The output files shall contain portions of the original input file;
+otherwise, unchanged.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+By default, created files shall be removed if an error occurs. When the
+.BR \(mik
+option is specified, created files shall not be removed if an error
+occurs.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+This example creates four files,
+.BR cobol00
+\&.\|.\|.
+.BR cobol03 :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+csplit \(mif cobol file '/procedure division/' /par5./ /par16./
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+After editing the split files, they can be recombined as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cat cobol0[0\(mi3] > file
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Note that this example overwrites the original file.
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+This example would split the file after the first 99 lines, and every
+100 lines thereafter, up to 9\|999 lines; this is because lines in the
+file are numbered from 1 rather than zero, for historical reasons:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+csplit \(mik file  100  {99}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+Assuming that
+.BR prog.c
+follows the C-language coding convention of ending routines with a
+.BR '}' 
+at the beginning of the line, this example creates a file containing
+each separate C routine (up to 21) in
+.BR prog.c :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+csplit \(mik prog.c '%main(%'  '/^}/+1' {20}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.BR \(min
+option was added to extend the range of filenames that could be
+handled.
+.P
+Consideration was given to adding a
+.BR \(mia
+flag to use the alphabetic filename generation used by the historical
+.IR split
+utility, but the functionality added by the
+.BR \(min
+option was deemed to make alphabetic naming unnecessary.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsed\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsplit\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 9.3" ", " "Basic Regular Expressions",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ctags.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ctags.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa190b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ctags.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,477 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CTAGS "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ctags
+\(em create a tags file (\fBDEVELOPMENT\fR, \fBFORTRAN\fR)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+ctags \fB[\fR\(mia\fB] [\fR\(mif \fItagsfile\fB] \fIpathname\fR...
+.P
+ctags \(mix \fIpathname\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR ctags
+utility shall be provided on systems that support the the Software
+Development Utilities option, and either or both of the C-Language
+Development Utilities option and FORTRAN Development Utilities option. On
+other systems, it is optional.
+.P
+The
+.IR ctags
+utility shall write a
+.IR tagsfile
+or an index of objects from C-language or FORTRAN source files
+specified by the
+.IR pathname
+operands. The
+.IR tagsfile
+shall list the locators of language-specific objects within the source
+files. A locator consists of a name, pathname, and either a search
+pattern
+or a line number that can be used in searching for the object
+definition. The objects that shall be recognized are specified in the
+EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR ctags
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mia\fP" 10
+Append to
+.IR tagsfile .
+.IP "\fB\(mif\ \fItagsfile\fR" 10
+Write the object locator lists into
+.IR tagsfile
+instead of the default file named
+.BR tags
+in the current directory.
+.IP "\fB\(mix\fP" 10
+Produce a list of object names, the line number, and filename in which
+each is defined, as well as the text of that line, and write this to
+the standard output. A
+.IR tagsfile
+shall not be created when
+.BR \(mix
+is specified.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following
+.IR pathname
+operands are supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fB.c\fR" 10
+Files with basenames ending with the
+.BR .c
+suffix shall be treated as C-language source code. Such files that are
+not valid input to
+.IR c99
+produce unspecified results.
+.IP "\fIfile\fB.h\fR" 10
+Files with basenames ending with the
+.BR .h
+suffix shall be treated as C-language source code. Such files that are
+not valid input to
+.IR c99
+produce unspecified results.
+.IP "\fIfile\fB.f\fR" 10
+Files with basenames ending with the
+.BR .f
+suffix shall be treated as FORTRAN-language source code. Such files
+that are not valid input to
+.IR fort77
+produce unspecified results.
+.P
+The handling of other files is implementation-defined.
+.SH STDIN
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files shall be text files containing source code in the
+language indicated by the operand filename suffixes.
+.br
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR ctags :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the order in which output is sorted for the
+.BR \(mix
+option. The POSIX locale determines the order in which the
+.IR tagsfile
+is written.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files). When processing
+C-language source code, if the locale is not compatible with the C
+locale described by the ISO\ C standard, the results are unspecified.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The list of object name information produced by the
+.BR \(mix
+option shall be written to standard output in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s %d %s %s", <\fIobject-name\fR>, <\fIline-number\fR>, <\fIfilename\fR>, <\fItext\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fItext\fP> is the text of line <\fIline-number\fP> of file
+<\fIfilename\fP>.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+When the
+.BR \(mix
+option is not specified, the format of the output file shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\et%s\et/%s/\en", <\fIidentifier\fR>, <\fIfilename\fR>, <\fIpattern\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fIpattern\fP> is a search pattern that could be used by an
+editor to find the defining instance of <\fIidentifier\fP> in
+<\fIfilename\fP> (where
+.IR "defining instance"
+is indicated by the declarations listed in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION).
+.P
+An optional
+<circumflex>
+(\c
+.BR '^' )
+can be added as a prefix to <\fIpattern\fP>, and an optional
+<dollar-sign>
+can be appended to <\fIpattern\fP> to indicate that the pattern is
+anchored to the beginning (end) of a line of text. Any
+<slash>
+or
+<backslash>
+characters in <\fIpattern\fP> shall be preceded by a
+<backslash>
+character. The anchoring
+<circumflex>,
+<dollar-sign>,
+and escaping
+<backslash>
+characters shall not be considered part of the search pattern. All other
+characters in the search pattern shall be considered literal characters.
+.br
+.P
+An alternative format is:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\et%s\et?%s?\en", <\fIidentifier\fR>, <\fIfilename\fR>, <\fIpattern\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+which is identical to the first format except that
+<slash>
+characters in <\fIpattern\fP> shall not be preceded by escaping
+<backslash>
+characters, and
+<question-mark>
+characters in <\fIpattern\fP> shall be preceded by
+<backslash>
+characters.
+.P
+A second alternative format is:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\et%s\et%d\en", <\fIidentifier\fR>, <\fIfilename\fR>, <\fIlineno\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fIlineno\fP> is a decimal line number that could be used by an
+editor to find <\fIidentifier\fP> in <\fIfilename\fP>.
+.P
+Neither alternative format shall be produced by
+.IR ctags
+when it is used as described by POSIX.1\(hy2008, but the standard utilities that
+process tags files shall be able to process those formats as well as
+the first format.
+.P
+In any of these formats, the file shall be sorted by identifier, based
+on the collation sequence in the POSIX locale.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+If the operand identifies C-language source, the
+.IR ctags
+utility shall attempt to produce an output line for each of the
+following objects:
+.IP " *" 4
+Function definitions
+.IP " *" 4
+Type definitions
+.IP " *" 4
+Macros with arguments
+.P
+It may also produce output for any of the following objects:
+.IP " *" 4
+Function prototypes
+.IP " *" 4
+Structures
+.IP " *" 4
+Unions
+.IP " *" 4
+Global variable definitions
+.IP " *" 4
+Enumeration types
+.IP " *" 4
+Macros without arguments
+.IP " *" 4
+.BR #define
+statements
+.IP " *" 4
+.BR #line
+statements
+.P
+Any
+.BR #if
+and
+.BR #ifdef
+statements shall produce no output. The tag
+.BR main
+is treated specially in C programs. The tag formed shall be created by
+prefixing
+.BR M
+to the name of the file, with the trailing
+.BR .c ,
+and leading pathname components (if any) removed.
+.P
+On systems that do not support the C-Language Development Utilities
+option,
+.IR ctags
+produces unspecified results for C-language source code files. It should
+write to standard error a message identifying this condition and cause
+a non-zero exit status to be produced.
+.P
+If the operand identifies FORTRAN source, the
+.IR ctags
+utility shall produce an output line for each function definition. It
+may also produce output for any of the following objects:
+.IP " *" 4
+Subroutine definitions
+.IP " *" 4
+COMMON statements
+.IP " *" 4
+PARAMETER statements
+.IP " *" 4
+DATA and BLOCK DATA statements
+.IP " *" 4
+Statement numbers
+.P
+On systems that do not support the FORTRAN Development Utilities
+option,
+.IR ctags
+produces unspecified results for FORTRAN source code files. It should
+write to standard error a message identifying this condition and cause
+a non-zero exit status to be produced.
+.P
+It is implementation-defined what other objects (including duplicate
+identifiers) produce output.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The output with
+.BR \(mix
+is meant to be a simple index that can be written out as an off-line
+readable function index. If the input files to
+.IR ctags
+(such as
+.BR .c
+files) were not created using the same locale as that in effect when
+.IR ctags
+.BR \(mix
+is run, results might not be as expected.
+.P
+The description of C-language processing says ``attempts to'' because
+the C language can be greatly confused, especially through the use of
+.BR #define s,
+and this utility would be of no use if the real C preprocessor were run
+to identify them. The output from
+.IR ctags
+may be fooled and incorrect for various constructs.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The option list was significantly reduced from that provided by
+historical implementations. The
+.BR \(miF
+option was omitted as redundant, since it is the default. The
+.BR \(miB
+option was omitted as being of very limited usefulness. The
+.BR \(mit
+option was omitted since the recognition of
+.BR typedef s
+is now required for C source files. The
+.BR \(miu
+option was omitted because the update function was judged to be not
+only inefficient, but also rarely needed.
+.P
+An early proposal included a
+.BR \(miw
+option to suppress warning diagnostics. Since the types of such
+diagnostics could not be described, the option was omitted as being not
+useful.
+.P
+The text for
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+about compatibility with the C locale acknowledges that the ISO\ C standard
+imposes requirements on the locale used to process C source. This could
+easily be a superset of that known as ``the C locale'' by way of
+implementation extensions, or one of a few alternative locales for
+systems supporting different codesets. No statement is made for FORTRAN
+because the ANSI\ X3.9\(hy1978 standard (FORTRAN 77) does not (yet) define a similar locale
+concept. However, a general rule in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 is that any time that locales
+do not match (preparing a file for one locale and processing it in
+another), the results are suspect.
+.P
+The collation sequence of the tags file is not affected by
+.IR LC_COLLATE
+because it is typically not used by human readers, but only by programs
+such as
+.IR vi
+to locate the tag within the source files. Using the POSIX locale
+eliminates some of the problems of coordinating locales between the
+.IR ctags
+file creator and the
+.IR vi
+file reader.
+.P
+Historically, the tags file has been used only by
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi .
+However, the format of the tags file has been published to encourage
+other programs to use the tags in new ways. The format allows either
+patterns or line numbers to find the identifiers because the historical
+.IR vi
+recognizes either. The
+.IR ctags
+utility does not produce the format using line numbers because it is
+not useful following any source file changes that add or delete lines.
+The documented search patterns match historical practice. It should be
+noted that literal leading
+<circumflex>
+or trailing
+<dollar-sign>
+characters in the search pattern will only behave correctly if anchored
+to the beginning of the line or end of the line by an additional
+<circumflex>
+or
+<dollar-sign>
+character.
+.P
+Historical implementations also understand the objects used by the
+languages Pascal and sometimes LISP, and they understand the C source
+output by
+.IR lex
+and
+.IR yacc .
+The
+.IR ctags
+utility is not required to accommodate these languages, although
+implementors are encouraged to do so.
+.P
+The following historical option was not specified, as
+.IR vgrind
+is not included in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008:
+.IP "\fB\(miv\fP" 10
+If the
+.BR \(miv
+flag is given, an index of the form expected by
+.IR vgrind
+is produced on the standard output. This listing contains the function
+name, filename, and page number (assuming 64-line pages). Since the
+output is sorted into lexicographic order, it may be desired to run the
+output through
+.IR sort
+.BR \(mif .
+Sample use:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ctags \(miv files | sort \(mif > index vgrind \(mix index
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The special treatment of the tag
+.BR main
+makes the use of
+.IR ctags
+practical in directories with more than one program.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIc99\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfort77\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIvi\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cut.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cut.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d5cfbc2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cut.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,496 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CUT "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cut
+\(em cut out selected fields of each line of a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+cut \(mib \fIlist \fB[\fR\(min\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+cut \(mic \fIlist \fB[\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+cut \(mif \fIlist \fB[\fR\(mid \fIdelim\fB] [\fR\(mis\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR cut
+utility shall cut out bytes (\c
+.BR \(mib
+option), characters (\c
+.BR \(mic
+option), or character-delimited fields (\c
+.BR \(mif
+option) from each line in one or more files, concatenate them, and
+write them to standard output.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR cut
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The application shall ensure that the option-argument
+.IR list
+(see options
+.BR \(mib ,
+.BR \(mic ,
+and
+.BR \(mif
+below) is a
+<comma>-separated
+list or
+<blank>-separated
+list of positive numbers and ranges. Ranges can be in three forms. The
+first is two positive numbers separated by a
+<hyphen>
+(\c
+.IR low \(mi\c
+.IR high ),
+which represents all fields from the first number to the second
+number. The second is a positive number preceded by a
+<hyphen>
+(\(mi\c
+.IR high ),
+which represents all fields from field number 1 to that number. The
+third is a positive number followed by a
+<hyphen>
+(\c
+.IR low \(mi),
+which represents that number to the last field, inclusive. The elements
+in
+.IR list
+can be repeated, can overlap, and can be specified in any order, but
+the bytes, characters, or fields selected shall be written in the order
+of the input data. If an element appears in the selection list more
+than once, it shall be written exactly once.
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mib\ \fIlist\fR" 10
+Cut based on a
+.IR list
+of bytes. Each selected byte shall be output unless the
+.BR \(min
+option is also specified. It shall not be an error to select bytes not
+present in the input line.
+.IP "\fB\(mic\ \fIlist\fR" 10
+Cut based on a
+.IR list
+of characters. Each selected character shall be output. It shall not
+be an error to select characters not present in the input line.
+.IP "\fB\(mid\ \fIdelim\fR" 10
+Set the field delimiter to the character
+.IR delim .
+The default is the
+<tab>.
+.IP "\fB\(mif\ \fIlist\fR" 10
+Cut based on a
+.IR list
+of fields, assumed to be separated in the file by a delimiter character
+(see
+.BR \(mid ).
+Each selected field shall be output. Output fields shall be separated
+by a single occurrence of the field delimiter character. Lines with no
+field delimiters shall be passed through intact, unless
+.BR \(mis
+is specified. It shall not be an error to select fields not present in
+the input line.
+.IP "\fB\(min\fP" 10
+Do not split characters. When specified with the
+.BR \(mib
+option, each element in
+.IR list
+of the form
+.IR low \(mi\c
+.IR high
+(\c
+<hyphen>-separated
+numbers) shall be modified as follows:
+.RS 10 
+.IP " *" 4
+If the byte selected by
+.IR low
+is not the first byte of a character,
+.IR low
+shall be decremented to select the first byte of the character
+originally selected by
+.IR low .
+If the byte selected by
+.IR high
+is not the last byte of a character,
+.IR high
+shall be decremented to select the last byte of the character prior to
+the character originally selected by
+.IR high ,
+or zero if there is no prior character. If the resulting range element
+has
+.IR high
+equal to zero or
+.IR low
+greater than
+.IR high ,
+the list element shall be dropped from
+.IR list
+for that input line without causing an error.
+.P
+Each element in
+.IR list
+of the form
+.IR low \(mi
+shall be treated as above with
+.IR high
+set to the number of bytes in the current line, not including the
+terminating
+<newline>.
+Each element in
+.IR list
+of the form \(mi\c
+.IR high
+shall be treated as above with
+.IR low
+set to 1. Each element in
+.IR list
+of the form
+.IR num
+(a single number) shall be treated as above with
+.IR low
+set to
+.IR num
+and
+.IR high
+set to
+.IR num .
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Suppress lines with no delimiter characters, when used with the
+.BR \(mif
+option. Unless specified, lines with no delimiters shall be passed
+through untouched.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of an input file. If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, or if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be used.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used only if no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, or if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' .
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files shall be text files, except that line lengths shall be
+unlimited.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR cut :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The
+.IR cut
+utility output shall be a concatenation of the selected bytes,
+characters, or fields (one of the following):
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIconcatenation of bytes\fR>
+.P
+"%s\en", <\fIconcatenation of characters\fR>
+.P
+"%s\en", <\fIconcatenation of fields and field delimiters\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+All input files were output successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR cut
+and
+.IR fold
+utilities can be used to create text files out of files with
+arbitrary line lengths. The
+.IR cut
+utility should be used when the number of lines (or records) needs
+to remain constant. The
+.IR fold
+utility should be used when the contents of long lines need to be
+kept contiguous.
+.P
+Earlier versions of the
+.IR cut
+utility worked in an environment where bytes and characters were
+considered equivalent (modulo
+<backspace>
+and
+<tab>
+processing in some implementations). In the extended world of
+multi-byte characters, the new
+.BR \(mib
+option has been added. The
+.BR \(min
+option (used with
+.BR \(mib )
+allows it to be used to act on bytes rounded to character boundaries.
+The algorithm specified for
+.BR \(min
+guarantees that:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cut \(mib 1\(mi500 \(min file > file1
+cut \(mib 501\(mi \(min file > file2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+ends up with all the characters in
+.BR file
+appearing exactly once in
+.BR file1
+or
+.BR file2 .
+(There is, however, a
+<newline>
+in both
+.BR file1
+and
+.BR file2
+for each
+<newline>
+in
+.BR file .)
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Examples of the option qualifier list:
+.IP 1,4,7 8
+Select the first, fourth, and seventh bytes, characters, or fields and
+field delimiters.
+.IP "1\(mi3,8" 8
+Equivalent to 1,2,3,8.
+.IP "\(mi5,10" 8
+Equivalent to 1,2,3,4,5,10.
+.IP "3\(mi" 8
+Equivalent to third to last, inclusive.
+.P
+The
+.IR low \(mi\c
+.IR high
+forms are not always equivalent when used with
+.BR \(mib
+and
+.BR \(min
+and multi-byte characters; see the description of
+.BR \(min .
+.P
+The following command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cut \(mid : \(mif 1,6 /etc/passwd
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+reads the System V password file (user database) and produces lines of
+the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<\fIuser ID\fR>:<\fIhome directory\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Most utilities in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 work on text files. The
+.IR cut
+utility can be used to turn files with arbitrary line lengths into a
+set of text files containing the same data. The
+.IR paste
+utility can be used to create (or recreate) files with arbitrary line
+lengths. For example, if
+.BR file
+contains long lines:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cut \(mib 1\(mi500 \(min file > file1
+cut \(mib 501\(mi \(min file > file2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+creates
+.BR file1
+(a text file) with lines no longer than 500 bytes (plus the
+<newline>)
+and
+.BR file2
+that contains the remainder of the data from
+.BR file .
+(Note that
+.BR file2
+is not a text file if there are lines in
+.BR file
+that are longer than 500 +
+{LINE_MAX}
+bytes.) The original file can be recreated from
+.BR file1
+and
+.BR file2
+using the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+paste \(mid "\e0" file1 file2 > file
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+Some historical implementations do not count
+<backspace>
+characters in determining character counts with the
+.BR \(mic
+option. This may be useful for using
+.IR cut
+for processing
+.IR nroff
+output. It was deliberately decided not to have the
+.BR \(mic
+option treat either
+<backspace>
+or
+<tab>
+characters in any special fashion. The
+.IR fold
+utility does treat these characters specially.
+.P
+Unlike other utilities, some historical implementations of
+.IR cut
+exit after not finding an input file, rather than continuing to process
+the remaining
+.IR file
+operands. This behavior is prohibited by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, where only the exit
+status is affected by this problem.
+.P
+The behavior of
+.IR cut
+when provided with either mutually-exclusive options or options that do
+not work logically together has been deliberately left unspecified in
+favor of global wording in
+.IR "Section 1.4" ", " "Utility Description Defaults".
+.P
+The OPTIONS section was changed in response to IEEE PASC Interpretation
+1003.2 #149. The change represents historical practice on all known
+systems. The original standard was ambiguous on the nature of the
+output.
+.P
+The
+.IR list
+option-arguments are historically used to select the portions of the
+line to be written, but do not affect the order of the data. For
+example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+echo abcdefghi | cut \(mic6,2,4\(mi7,1
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+yields
+.BR \(dqabdefg\(dq .
+.P
+A proposal to enhance
+.IR cut
+with the following option:
+.IP "\fB\(mio\fP" 6
+Preserve the selected field order. When this option is specified, each
+byte, character, or field (or ranges of such) shall be written in the
+order specified by the
+.IR list
+option-argument, even if this requires multiple outputs of the same
+bytes, characters, or fields.
+.P
+was rejected because this type of enhancement is outside the scope of
+the IEEE\ P1003.2b draft standard.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Parameters and Variables",
+.IR "\fIfold\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIgrep\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIpaste\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cxref.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cxref.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a53c599
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/cxref.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,180 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CXREF "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cxref
+\(em generate a C-language program cross-reference table
+(\fBDEVELOPMENT\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+cxref \fB[\fR\(mics\fB] [\fR\(mio \fIfile\fB] [\fR\(miw \fInum\fB] [\fR\(miD \fIname\fB[\fR=\fIdef\fB]]\fR...\fB [\fR\(miI \fIdir\fB]\fR...
+    \fB[\fR\(miU \fIname\fB]\fR... \fIfile\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR cxref
+utility shall analyze a collection of C-language
+.IR file s
+and attempt to build a cross-reference table. Information from
+.BR #define
+lines shall be included in the symbol table. A sorted listing shall be
+written to standard output of all symbols (auto, static, and global) in
+each
+.IR file
+separately, or with the
+.BR \(mic
+option, in combination. Each symbol shall contain an
+<asterisk>
+before the declaring reference.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR cxref
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except that the order of the
+.BR \(miD ,
+.BR \(miI ,
+and
+.BR \(miU
+options (which are identical to their interpretation by
+.IR c99 )
+is significant. The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Write a combined cross-reference of all input files.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Operate silently; do not print input filenames.
+.IP "\fB\(mio\ \fIfile\fR" 10
+Direct output to named
+.IR file .
+.IP "\fB\(miw\ \fInum\fR" 10
+Format output no wider than
+.IR num
+(decimal) columns. This option defaults to 80 if
+.IR num
+is not specified or is less than 51.
+.IP "\fB\(miD\fP" 10
+Equivalent to
+.IR c99 .
+.IP "\fB\(miI\fP" 10
+Equivalent to
+.IR c99 .
+.IP "\fB\(miU\fP" 10
+Equivalent to
+.IR c99 .
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a C-language source file.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files are C-language source files.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR cxref :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the ordering of the output.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall be used for the cross-reference listing,
+unless the
+.BR \(mio
+option is used to select a different output file.
+.P
+The format of standard output is unspecified, except that the following
+information shall be included:
+.IP " *" 4
+If the
+.BR \(mic
+option is not specified, each portion of the listing shall start
+with the name of the input file on a separate line.
+.IP " *" 4
+The name line shall be followed by a sorted list of symbols, each with
+its associated location pathname, the name of the function in which it
+appears (if it is not a function name itself), and line number
+references.
+.IP " *" 4
+Each line number may be preceded by an
+<asterisk>
+(\c
+.BR '*' )
+flag, meaning that this is the declaring reference. Other
+single-character flags, with implementation-defined meanings, may be
+included.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+The output file named by the
+.BR \(mio
+option shall be used instead of standard output.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIc99\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/date.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/date.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..52d4639
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/date.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,627 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DATE "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+date
+\(em write the date and time
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+date \fB[\fR\(miu\fB] [\fR+\fIformat\fB]\fR
+.P
+date \fB[\fR\(miu\fB] \fImmddhhmm\fB[[\fIcc\fB]\fIyy\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR date
+utility shall write the date and time to standard output
+or attempt to set the system date and time.
+By default, the current date and time shall be written. If an operand
+beginning with
+.BR '\(pl' 
+is specified, the output format of
+.IR date
+shall be controlled by the conversion specifications and other text
+in the operand.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR date
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(miu\fP" 10
+Perform operations as if the
+.IR TZ
+environment variable was set to the string
+.BR \(dqUTC0\(dq ,
+or its equivalent historical value of
+.BR \(dqGMT0\(dq .
+Otherwise,
+.IR date
+shall use the timezone indicated by the
+.IR TZ
+environment variable or the system default if that variable is
+unset or null.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "+\fIformat\fR" 10
+When the format is specified, each conversion specifier shall be
+replaced in the standard output by its corresponding value. All other
+characters shall be copied to the output without change. The output
+shall always be terminated with a
+<newline>.
+.SS "Conversion Specifications"
+.RS 10 
+.IP "\fR%a\fR" 8
+Locale's abbreviated weekday name.
+.IP "\fR%A\fR" 8
+Locale's full weekday name.
+.IP "\fR%b\fR" 8
+Locale's abbreviated month name.
+.IP "\fR%B\fR" 8
+Locale's full month name.
+.IP "\fR%c\fR" 8
+Locale's appropriate date and time representation.
+.IP "\fR%C\fR" 8
+Century (a year divided by 100 and truncated to an integer) as a
+decimal number [00,99].
+.IP "\fR%d\fR" 8
+Day of the month as a decimal number [01,31].
+.IP "\fR%D\fR" 8
+Date in the format \fImm\fP/\fIdd\fP/\fIyy\fR.
+.IP "\fR%e\fR" 8
+Day of the month as a decimal number [1,31] in a two-digit field
+with leading
+<space>
+character fill.
+.IP "\fR%h\fR" 8
+A synonym for
+.BR %b .
+.IP "\fR%H\fR" 8
+Hour (24-hour clock) as a decimal number [00,23].
+.IP "\fR%I\fR" 8
+Hour (12-hour clock) as a decimal number [01,12].
+.IP "\fR%j\fR" 8
+Day of the year as a decimal number [001,366].
+.IP "\fR%m\fR" 8
+Month as a decimal number [01,12].
+.IP "\fR%M\fR" 8
+Minute as a decimal number [00,59].
+.IP "\fR%n\fR" 8
+A
+<newline>.
+.IP "\fR%p\fR" 8
+Locale's equivalent of either AM or PM.
+.IP "\fR%r\fR" 8
+12-hour clock time [01,12] using the AM/PM notation; in the POSIX
+locale, this shall be equivalent to
+.BR %I :\c
+.BR %M :\c
+.BR %S
+.BR %p .
+.IP "\fR%S\fR" 8
+Seconds as a decimal number [00,60].
+.IP "\fR%t\fR" 8
+A
+<tab>.
+.IP "\fR%T\fR" 8
+24-hour clock time [00,23] in the format \fIHH\fP:\fIMM\fP:\fISS\fP.
+.IP "\fR%u\fR" 8
+Weekday as a decimal number [1,7] (1=Monday).
+.IP "\fR%U\fR" 8
+Week of the year (Sunday as the first day of the week) as a decimal
+number [00,53]. All days in a new year preceding the first Sunday
+shall be considered to be in week 0.
+.IP "\fR%V\fR" 8
+Week of the year (Monday as the first day of the week) as a decimal
+number [01,53]. If the week containing January 1 has four or more
+days in the new year, then it shall be considered week 1; otherwise, it
+shall be the last week of the previous year, and the next week shall be
+week 1.
+.IP "\fR%w\fR" 8
+Weekday as a decimal number [0,6] (0=Sunday).
+.IP "\fR%W\fR" 8
+Week of the year (Monday as the first day of the week) as a decimal
+number [00,53]. All days in a new year preceding the first Monday
+shall be considered to be in week 0.
+.IP "\fR%x\fR" 8
+Locale's appropriate date representation.
+.IP "\fR%X\fR" 8
+Locale's appropriate time representation.
+.IP "\fR%y\fR" 8
+Year within century [00,99].
+.IP "\fR%Y\fR" 8
+Year with century as a decimal number.
+.IP "\fR%Z\fR" 8
+Timezone name, or no characters if no timezone is determinable.
+.IP "\fR%%\fR" 8
+A
+<percent-sign>
+character.
+.P
+See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 7.3.5" ", " "LC_TIME"
+for the conversion specifier values in the POSIX locale.
+.SS "Modified Conversion Specifications"
+.P
+Some conversion specifiers can be modified by the
+.BR E
+and
+.BR O
+modifier characters to indicate a different format or specification as
+specified in the
+.IR LC_TIME
+locale description (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 7.3.5" ", " "LC_TIME").
+If the corresponding keyword (see
+.BR era ,
+.BR era_year ,
+.BR era_d_fmt ,
+and
+.BR alt_digits
+in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 7.3.5" ", " "LC_TIME")
+is not specified or not supported for the current locale,
+the unmodified conversion specifier value shall be used.
+.IP "\fR%Ec\fR" 8
+Locale's alternative appropriate date and time representation.
+.IP "\fR%EC\fR" 8
+The name of the base year (period) in the locale's alternative
+representation.
+.IP "\fR%Ex\fR" 8
+Locale's alternative date representation.
+.IP "\fR%EX\fR" 8
+Locale's alternative time representation.
+.IP "\fR%Ey\fR" 8
+Offset from
+.BR %EC
+(year only) in the locale's alternative representation.
+.IP "\fR%EY\fR" 8
+Full alternative year representation.
+.IP "\fR%Od\fR" 8
+Day of month using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%Oe\fR" 8
+Day of month using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%OH\fR" 8
+Hour (24-hour clock) using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%OI\fR" 8
+Hour (12-hour clock) using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%Om\fR" 8
+Month using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%OM\fR" 8
+Minutes using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%OS\fR" 8
+Seconds using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%Ou\fR" 8
+Weekday as a number in the locale's alternative representation (Monday
+= 1).
+.IP "\fR%OU\fR" 8
+Week number of the year (Sunday as the first day of the week) using the
+locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%OV\fR" 8
+Week number of the year (Monday as the first day of the week, rules
+corresponding to
+.BR %V ),
+using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%Ow\fR" 8
+Weekday as a number in the locale's alternative representation (Sunday
+= 0).
+.IP "\fR%OW\fR" 8
+Week number of the year (Monday as the first day of the week) using the
+locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%Oy\fR" 8
+Year (offset from
+.BR %C )
+in alternative representation.
+.RE
+.IP "\fImmddhhmm\fB[[\fIcc\fB]\fIyy\fB]\fR" 10
+.br
+Attempt to set the system date and time from the value given in the
+operand. This is only possible if the user has appropriate privileges
+and the system permits the setting of the system date and time. The
+first
+.IR mm
+is the month (number);
+.IR dd
+is the day (number);
+.IR hh
+is the hour (number, 24-hour system); the second
+.IR mm
+is the minute (number);
+.IR cc
+is the century and is the first two digits of the year (this is
+optional);
+.IR yy
+is the last two digits of the year and is optional. If century is not
+specified, then values in the range [69,99] shall refer to years
+1969 to 1999 inclusive, and values in the range [00,68] shall refer
+to years 2000 to 2068 inclusive. The current year is the default if
+.IR yy
+is omitted.
+.RS 10 
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+It is expected that in a future version of this standard the default
+century inferred from a 2-digit year will change. (This would apply
+to all commands accepting a 2-digit year as input.)
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR date :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILC_TIME\fP" 10
+Determine the format and contents of date and time strings written by
+.IR date .
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fITZ\fP" 10
+Determine the timezone in which the time and date are written, unless
+the
+.BR \(miu
+option is specified. If the
+.IR TZ
+variable is unset or null and
+.BR \(miu
+is not specified, an unspecified system default timezone is used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+When no formatting operand is specified, the output in the POSIX locale
+shall be equivalent to specifying:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+date "+%a %b %e %H:%M:%S %Z %Y"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+The date was written successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Conversion specifiers are of unspecified format when not in the POSIX
+locale. Some of them can contain
+<newline>
+characters in some locales, so it may be difficult to use the format
+shown in standard output for parsing the output of
+.IR date
+in those locales.
+.P
+The range of values for
+.BR %S
+extends from 0 to 60 seconds to accommodate the occasional leap second.
+.P
+Although certain of the conversion specifiers in the POSIX locale (such
+as the name of the month) are shown with initial capital letters, this
+need not be the case in other locales. Programs using these fields may
+need to adjust the capitalization if the output is going to be used at
+the beginning of a sentence.
+.P
+The date string formatting capabilities are intended for use in
+Gregorian-style calendars, possibly with a different starting year (or
+years). The
+.BR %x
+and
+.BR %c
+conversion specifications, however, are intended for local
+representation; these may be based on a different, non-Gregorian
+calendar.
+.P
+The
+.BR %C
+conversion specification was introduced to allow a fallback for the
+.BR %EC
+(alternative year format base year); it can be viewed as the base of
+the current subdivision in the Gregorian calendar. The century number
+is calculated as the year divided by 100 and truncated to an integer;
+it should not be confused with the use of ordinal numbers for centuries
+(for example, ``twenty-first century''.) Both the
+.BR %Ey
+and
+.BR %y
+can then be viewed as the offset from
+.BR %EC
+and
+.BR %C ,
+respectively.
+.P
+The
+.BR E
+and
+.BR O
+modifiers modify the traditional conversion specifiers, so that they
+can always be used, even if the implementation (or the current locale)
+does not support the modifier.
+.P
+The
+.BR E
+modifier supports alternative date formats, such as the Japanese
+Emperor's Era, as long as these are based on the Gregorian calendar
+system. Extending the
+.BR E
+modifiers to other date elements may provide an implementation-defined
+extension capable of supporting other calendar systems, especially in
+combination with the
+.BR O
+modifier.
+.P
+The
+.BR O
+modifier supports time and date formats using the locale's alternative
+numerical symbols, such as Kanji or Hindi digits or ordinal number
+representation.
+.P
+Non-European locales, whether they use Latin digits in computational
+items or not, often have local forms of the digits for use in date
+formats. This is not totally unknown even in Europe; a variant of dates
+uses Roman numerals for the months: the third day of September 1991
+would be written as 3.IX.1991. In Japan, Kanji digits are regularly
+used for dates; in Arabic-speaking countries, Hindi digits are used.
+The
+.BR %d ,
+.BR %e ,
+.BR %H ,
+.BR %I ,
+.BR %m ,
+.BR %S ,
+.BR %U ,
+.BR %w ,
+.BR %W ,
+and
+.BR %y
+conversion specifications always return the date and time field in
+Latin digits (that is, 0 to 9). The
+.BR %O
+modifier was introduced to support the use for display purposes of
+non-Latin digits. In the
+.IR LC_TIME
+category in
+.IR localedef ,
+the optional
+.BR alt_digits
+keyword is intended for this purpose. As an example, assume the
+following (partial)
+.IR localedef
+source:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+alt_digits  "";"I";"II";"III";"IV";"V";"VI";"VII";"VIII" \e
+            "IX";"X";"XI";"XII"
+d_fmt       "%e.%Om.%Y"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+With the above date, the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+date "+%x"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would yield 3.IX.1991. With the same
+.BR d_fmt ,
+but without the
+.BR alt_digits ,
+the command would yield 3.9.1991.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+The following are input/output examples of
+.IR date
+used at arbitrary times in the POSIX locale:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB$ \fRdate
+\fBTue Jun 26 09:58:10 PDT 1990
+.P
+\fB$ \fRdate "+DATE: %m/%d/%y%nTIME: %H:%M:%S"
+\fBDATE: 11/02/91
+\fBTIME: 13:36:16
+.P
+\fB$ \fRdate "+TIME: %r"
+\fBTIME: 01:36:32 PM\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+Examples for Denmark, where the default date and time format is
+.BR %a
+.BR %d
+.BR %b
+.BR %Y
+.BR %T
+.BR %Z :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB$ \fRLANG=da_DK.iso_8859\(mi1 date
+\fBons 02 okt 1991 15:03:32 CET
+.P
+\fB$ \fRLANG=da_DK.iso_8859\(mi1 \e
+    date "+DATO: %A den %e. %B %Y%nKLOKKEN: %H:%M:%S"
+\fBDATO: onsdag den 2. oktober 1991
+\fBKLOKKEN: 15:03:56\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+Examples for Germany, where the default date and time format is
+.BR %a
+.BR %d .\c
+.BR %h .\c
+.BR %Y ,
+.BR %T
+.BR %Z :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB$ \fRLANG=De_DE.88591 date
+\fBMi 02.Okt.1991, 15:01:21 MEZ
+.P
+\fB$ \fRLANG=De_DE.88591 date "+DATUM: %A, %d. %B %Y%nZEIT: %H:%M:%S"
+\fBDATUM: Mittwoch, 02. Oktober 1991
+\fBZEIT: 15:02:02\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+Examples for France, where the default date and time format is
+.BR %a
+.BR %d
+.BR %h
+.BR %Y
+.BR %Z
+.BR %T :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB$ \fRLANG=Fr_FR.88591 date
+\fBMer 02 oct 1991 MET 15:03:32
+.P
+\fB$ \fRLANG=Fr_FR.88591 date "+JOUR: %A %d %B %Y%nHEURE: %H:%M:%S"
+\fBJOUR: Mercredi 02 octobre 1991
+\fBHEURE: 15:03:56\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+Some of the new options for formatting are from the ISO\ C standard. The
+.BR \(miu
+option was introduced to allow portable access to Coordinated Universal
+Time (UTC).
+The string
+.BR \(dqGMT0\(dq 
+is allowed as an equivalent
+.IR TZ
+value to be compatible with all of the systems using the BSD
+implementation, where this option originated.
+.P
+The
+.BR %e
+format conversion specification (adopted from System V) was added
+because the ISO\ C standard conversion specifications did not provide any way to
+produce the historical default
+.IR date
+output during the first nine days of any month.
+.P
+There are two varieties of day and week numbering supported (in
+addition to any others created with the locale-dependent
+.BR %E
+and
+.BR %O
+modifier characters):
+.IP " *" 4
+The historical variety in which Sunday is the first day of the week and
+the weekdays preceding the first Sunday of the year are considered week
+0. These are represented by
+.BR %w
+and
+.BR %U .
+A variant of this is
+.BR %W ,
+using Monday as the first day of the week, but still referring to week
+0. This view of the calendar was retained because so many historical
+applications depend on it and the ISO\ C standard
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+function, on which many
+.IR date
+implementations are based, was defined in this way.
+.IP " *" 4
+The international standard, based on the ISO\ 8601:\|2004 standard where Monday is the
+first weekday and the algorithm for the first week number is more
+complex: If the week (Monday to Sunday) containing January 1 has four
+or more days in the new year, then it is week 1; otherwise, it is week
+53 of the previous year, and the next week is week 1. These are
+represented by the new conversion specifications
+.BR %u
+and
+.BR %V ,
+added as a result of international comments.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 7.3.5" ", " "LC_TIME",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIfprintf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrftime\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/dd.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/dd.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aedaa34
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/dd.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,769 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DD "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+dd
+\(em convert and copy a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+dd \fB[\fIoperand\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR dd
+utility shall copy the specified input file to the specified output
+file with possible conversions using specific input and output block
+sizes. It shall read the input one block at a time, using the
+specified input block size; it shall then process the block of data
+actually returned, which could be smaller than the requested block
+size. It shall apply any conversions that have been specified and write
+the resulting data to the output in blocks of the specified output
+block size. If the
+.BR bs =\c
+.IR expr
+operand is specified and no conversions other than
+.BR sync ,
+.BR noerror ,
+or
+.BR notrunc
+are requested, the data returned from each input block shall be written
+as a separate output block; if the read returns less than a full block
+and the
+.BR sync
+conversion is not specified, the resulting output block shall be the
+same size as the input block. If the
+.BR bs =\c
+.IR expr
+operand is not specified, or a conversion other than
+.BR sync ,
+.BR noerror ,
+or
+.BR notrunc
+is requested, the input shall be processed and collected into
+full-sized output blocks until the end of the input is reached.
+.P
+The processing order shall be as follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+An input block is read.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the input block is shorter than the specified input block size and
+the
+.BR sync
+conversion is specified, null bytes shall be appended to the input data
+up to the specified size. (If either
+.BR block
+or
+.BR unblock
+is also specified,
+<space>
+characters shall be appended instead of null bytes.) The remaining
+conversions and output shall include the pad characters as if they had
+been read from the input.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If the
+.BR bs =\c
+.IR expr
+operand is specified and no conversion other than
+.BR sync
+or
+.BR noerror
+is requested, the resulting data shall be written to the output as a
+single block, and the remaining steps are omitted.
+.IP " 4." 4
+If the
+.BR swab
+conversion is specified, each pair of input data bytes shall be
+swapped. If there is an odd number of bytes in the input block, the
+last byte in the input record shall not be swapped.
+.IP " 5." 4
+Any remaining conversions (\c
+.BR block ,
+.BR unblock ,
+.BR lcase ,
+and
+.BR ucase )
+shall be performed. These conversions shall operate on the input data
+independently of the input blocking; an input or output fixed-length
+record may span block boundaries.
+.IP " 6." 4
+The data resulting from input or conversion or both shall be aggregated
+into output blocks of the specified size. After the end of input is
+reached, any remaining output shall be written as a block without
+padding if
+.BR conv =\c
+.BR sync
+is not specified; thus, the final output block may be shorter than the
+output block size.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+All of the operands shall be processed before any input is read.
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fBif\fR=\fIfile\fR" 10
+Specify the input pathname; the default is standard input.
+.IP "\fBof\fR=\fIfile\fR" 10
+Specify the output pathname; the default is standard output. If the
+.BR seek =\c
+.IR expr
+conversion is not also specified, the output file shall be truncated
+before the copy begins if an explicit
+.BR of =\c
+.IR file
+operand is specified, unless
+.BR conv =\c
+.BR notrunc
+is specified. If
+.BR seek =\c
+.IR expr
+is specified, but
+.BR conv =\c
+.BR notrunc
+is not, the effect of the copy shall be to preserve the blocks in the
+output file over which
+.IR dd
+seeks, but no other portion of the output file shall be preserved. (If
+the size of the seek plus the size of the input file is less than the
+previous size of the output file, the output file shall be shortened by
+the copy. If the input file is empty and either the size of the seek is
+greater than the previous size of the output file or the output file
+did not previously exist, the size of the output file shall be set to
+the file offset after the seek.)
+.IP "\fBibs\fR=\fIexpr\fR" 10
+Specify the input block size, in bytes, by
+.IR expr
+(default is 512).
+.IP "\fBobs\fR=\fIexpr\fR" 10
+Specify the output block size, in bytes, by
+.IR expr
+(default is 512).
+.IP "\fBbs\fR=\fIexpr\fR" 10
+Set both input and output block sizes to
+.IR expr
+bytes, superseding
+.BR ibs =
+and
+.BR obs =.
+If no conversion other than
+.BR sync ,
+.BR noerror ,
+and
+.BR notrunc
+is specified, each input block shall be copied to the output as a
+single block without aggregating short blocks.
+.IP "\fBcbs\fR=\fIexpr\fR" 10
+Specify the conversion block size for
+.BR block
+and
+.BR unblock
+in bytes by
+.IR expr
+(default is zero). If
+.BR cbs =
+is omitted or given a value of zero, using
+.BR block
+or
+.BR unblock
+produces unspecified results.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The application shall ensure that this operand is also specified if the
+.BR conv =
+operand is specified with a value of
+.BR ascii ,
+.BR ebcdic ,
+or
+.BR ibm .
+For a
+.BR conv =
+operand with an
+.BR ascii
+value, the input is handled as described for the
+.BR unblock
+value, except that characters are converted to ASCII before any
+trailing
+<space>
+characters are deleted. For
+.BR conv =
+operands with
+.BR ebcdic
+or
+.BR ibm
+values, the input is handled as described for the
+.BR block
+value except that the characters are converted to EBCDIC or IBM EBCDIC,
+respectively, after any trailing
+<space>
+characters are added.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBskip\fR=\fIn\fR" 10
+Skip
+.IR n
+input blocks (using the specified input block size) before starting to
+copy. On seekable files, the implementation shall read the blocks or
+seek past them; on non-seekable files, the blocks shall be read and the
+data shall be discarded.
+.IP "\fBseek\fR=\fIn\fR" 10
+Skip
+.IR n
+blocks (using the specified output block size) from the beginning of the
+output file before copying. On non-seekable files, existing blocks
+shall be read and space from the current end-of-file to the specified
+offset, if any, filled with null bytes; on seekable files, the
+implementation shall seek to the specified offset or read the blocks as
+described for non-seekable files.
+.IP "\fBcount\fR=\fIn\fR" 10
+Copy only
+.IR n
+input blocks.
+.IP "\fBconv\fR=\fIvalue\fB[\fR,\fIvalue\fR\ .\|.\|.\fB]\fR" 10
+.br
+Where
+.IR value s
+are
+<comma>-separated
+symbols from the following list:
+.RS 10 
+.IP "\fBascii\fR" 9
+Convert EBCDIC to ASCII; see
+.IR "Table 4-7, ASCII to EBCDIC Conversion".
+.IP "\fBebcdic\fR" 9
+Convert ASCII to EBCDIC; see
+.IR "Table 4-7, ASCII to EBCDIC Conversion".
+.IP "\fBibm\fR" 9
+Convert ASCII to a different EBCDIC set; see
+.IR "Table 4-8, ASCII to IBM EBCDIC Conversion".
+.P
+The
+.BR ascii ,
+.BR ebcdic ,
+and
+.BR ibm
+values are mutually-exclusive.
+.IP "\fBblock\fR" 9
+Treat the input as a sequence of
+<newline>-terminated
+or end-of-file-terminated variable-length records independent of the
+input block boundaries. Each record shall be converted to a record with
+a fixed length specified by the conversion block size. Any
+<newline>
+shall be removed from the input line;
+<space>
+characters shall be appended to lines that are shorter than their
+conversion block size to fill the block. Lines that are longer than
+the conversion block size shall be truncated to the largest number of
+characters that fit into that size; the number of truncated lines shall
+be reported (see the STDERR section).
+.RS 9 
+.P
+The
+.BR block
+and
+.BR unblock
+values are mutually-exclusive.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBunblock\fR" 9
+Convert fixed-length records to variable length. Read a number of bytes
+equal to the conversion block size (or the number of bytes remaining in
+the input, if less than the conversion block size), delete all trailing
+<space>
+characters, and append a
+<newline>.
+.IP "\fBlcase\fR" 9
+Map uppercase characters specified by the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+keyword
+.BR tolower
+to the corresponding lowercase character. Characters for which no
+mapping is specified shall not be modified by this conversion.
+.RS 9 
+.P
+The
+.BR lcase
+and
+.BR ucase
+symbols are mutually-exclusive.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBucase\fR" 9
+Map lowercase characters specified by the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+keyword
+.BR toupper
+to the corresponding uppercase character. Characters for which no
+mapping is specified shall not be modified by this conversion.
+.IP "\fBswab\fR" 9
+Swap every pair of input bytes.
+.IP "\fBnoerror\fR" 9
+Do not stop processing on an input error. When an input error occurs, a
+diagnostic message shall be written on standard error, followed by the
+current input and output block counts in the same format as used at
+completion (see the STDERR section). If the
+.BR sync
+conversion is specified, the missing input shall be replaced with null
+bytes and processed normally; otherwise, the input block shall be
+omitted from the output.
+.IP "\fBnotrunc\fR" 9
+Do not truncate the output file. Preserve blocks in the output
+file not explicitly written by this invocation of the
+.IR dd
+utility. (See also the preceding
+.BR of =\c
+.IR file
+operand.)
+.IP "\fBsync\fR" 9
+Pad every input block to the size of the
+.BR ibs =
+buffer, appending null bytes. (If either
+.BR block
+or
+.BR unblock
+is also specified, append
+<space>
+characters, rather than null bytes.)
+.RE
+.P
+The behavior is unspecified if operands other than
+.BR conv =
+are specified more than once.
+.P
+For the
+.BR bs =,
+.BR cbs =,
+.BR ibs =,
+and
+.BR obs =
+operands, the application shall supply an expression specifying a size
+in bytes. The expression,
+.IR expr ,
+can be:
+.IP " 1." 4
+A positive decimal number
+.IP " 2." 4
+A positive decimal number followed by
+.IR k ,
+specifying multiplication by 1\|024
+.IP " 3." 4
+A positive decimal number followed by
+.IR b ,
+specifying multiplication by 512
+.IP " 4." 4
+Two or more positive decimal numbers (with or without
+.IR k
+or
+.IR b )
+separated by
+.IR x ,
+specifying the product of the indicated values
+.P
+All of the operands are processed before any input is read.
+.P
+The following two tables display the octal number character values used
+for the
+.BR ascii
+and
+.BR ebcdic
+conversions (first table) and for the
+.BR ibm
+conversion (second table). In both tables, the ASCII values are the row
+and column headers and the EBCDIC values are found at their
+intersections. For example, ASCII 0012 (LF) is the second row, third
+column, yielding 0045 in EBCDIC. The inverted tables (for EBCDIC to
+ASCII conversion) are not shown, but are in one-to-one correspondence
+with these tables. The differences between the two tables are
+highlighted by small boxes drawn around five entries.
+.br
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable 4-7: ASCII to EBCDIC Conversion\fR
+.bp
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable 4-8: ASCII to IBM EBCDIC Conversion\fR
+.SH STDIN
+If no
+.BR if =
+operand is specified, the standard input shall be used. See the INPUT
+FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input file can be any file type.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR dd :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files), the classification
+of characters as uppercase or lowercase, and the mapping of characters
+from one case to the other.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+For SIGINT, the
+.IR dd
+utility shall interrupt its current processing, write status
+information to standard error, and exit as though terminated by
+SIGINT. It shall take the standard action for all other signals; see
+the ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS section in
+.IR "Section 1.4" ", " "Utility Description Defaults".
+.SH STDOUT
+If no
+.BR of =
+operand is specified, the standard output shall be used. The nature of
+the output depends on the operands selected.
+.SH STDERR
+On completion,
+.IR dd
+shall write the number of input and output blocks to standard error. In
+the POSIX locale the following formats shall be used:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%u+%u records in\en", <\fInumber of whole input blocks\fR>,
+    <\fInumber of partial input blocks\fR>
+.P
+"%u+%u records out\en", <\fInumber of whole output blocks\fR>,
+    <\fInumber of partial output blocks\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+A partial input block is one for which
+\fIread\fR()
+returned less than the input block size. A partial output block is one
+that was written with fewer bytes than specified by the output block
+size.
+.P
+In addition, when there is at least one truncated block, the number of
+truncated blocks shall be written to standard error. In the POSIX
+locale, the format shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%u truncated %s\en", <\fInumber of truncated blocks\fR>, "record" (if
+    <\fInumber of truncated blocks\fR> is one) "records" (otherwise)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Diagnostic messages may also be written to standard error.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+If the
+.BR of =
+operand is used, the output shall be the same as described in the
+STDOUT section.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+The input file was copied successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+If an input error is detected and the
+.BR noerror
+conversion has not been specified, any partial output block shall be
+written to the output file, a diagnostic message shall be written, and
+the copy operation shall be discontinued. If some other error is
+detected, a diagnostic message shall be written and the copy operation
+shall be discontinued.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The input and output block size can be specified to take advantage of
+raw physical I/O.
+.P
+There are many different versions of the EBCDIC codesets. The ASCII and
+EBCDIC conversions specified for the
+.IR dd
+utility perform conversions for the version specified by the tables.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+dd if=/dev/rmt0h  of=/dev/rmt1h
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+copies from tape drive 0 to tape drive 1, using a common historical
+device naming convention.
+.P
+The following command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+dd ibs=10  skip=1
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+strips the first 10 bytes from standard input.
+.P
+This example reads an EBCDIC tape blocked ten 80-byte EBCDIC card
+images per block into the ASCII file
+.BR x :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+dd if=/dev/tape of=x ibs=800 cbs=80 conv=ascii,lcase
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The OPTIONS section is listed as ``None'' because there are no options
+recognized by historical
+.IR dd
+utilities. Certainly, many of the operands could have been designed to
+use the Utility Syntax Guidelines, which would have resulted in the
+classic hyphenated option letters. In this version of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR dd
+retains its curious JCL-like syntax due to the large number of
+applications that depend on the historical implementation.
+.P
+A suggested implementation technique for
+.BR conv =\c
+.BR noerror ,\c
+.BR sync
+is to zero (or
+<space>-fill,
+if
+.BR block ing
+or
+.BR unblock ing)
+the input buffer before each read and to write the contents of the
+input buffer to the output even after an error. In this manner, any
+data transferred to the input buffer before the error was detected is
+preserved. Another point is that a failed read on a regular file or a
+disk generally does not increment the file offset, and
+.IR dd
+must then seek past the block on which the error occurred; otherwise,
+the input error occurs repetitively. When the input is a magnetic tape,
+however, the tape normally has passed the block containing the error
+when the error is reported, and thus no seek is necessary.
+.P
+The default
+.BR ibs =
+and
+.BR obs =
+sizes are specified as 512 bytes because there are historical (largely
+portable) scripts that assume these values. If they were left
+unspecified, unusual results could occur if an implementation chose an
+odd block size.
+.P
+Historical implementations of
+.IR dd
+used
+\fIcreat\fR()
+when processing
+.BR of =\c
+.IR file .
+This makes the
+.BR seek =
+operand unusable except on special files. The
+.BR conv =\c
+.BR notrunc
+feature was added because more recent BSD-based implementations use
+\fIopen\fR()
+(without O_TRUNC) instead of
+\fIcreat\fR(),
+but they fail to delete output file contents after the data copied.
+.P
+The
+.IR w
+multiplier (historically meaning
+.IR word ),
+is used in System V to mean 2 and in 4.2 BSD to mean 4. Since
+.IR word
+is inherently non-portable, its use is not supported by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+Standard EBCDIC does not have the characters
+.BR '[' 
+and
+.BR ']' .
+The values used in the table are taken from a common print train that
+does contain them. Other than those characters, the print train values
+are not filled in, but appear to provide some of the motivation for the
+historical choice of translations reflected here.
+.P
+The Standard EBCDIC table provides a 1:1 translation for all 256
+bytes.
+.P
+The IBM EBCDIC table does not provide such a translation. The marked
+cells in the tables differ in such a way that:
+.IP " 1." 4
+EBCDIC 0112 (\c
+.BR '\(ct' )
+and 0152 (broken pipe) do not appear in the table.
+.IP " 2." 4
+EBCDIC 0137 (\c
+.BR '\(no' )
+translates to/from ASCII 0236 (\c
+.BR '^' ).
+In the standard table, EBCDIC 0232 (no graphic) is used.
+.IP " 3." 4
+EBCDIC 0241 (\c
+.BR '~' )
+translates to/from ASCII 0176 (\c
+.BR '~' ).
+In the standard table, EBCDIC 0137 (\c
+.BR '\(no' )
+is used.
+.IP " 4." 4
+0255 (\c
+.BR '[' )
+and 0275 (\c
+.BR ']' )
+appear twice, once in the same place as for the standard table and once
+in place of 0112 (\c
+.BR '\(ct' )
+and 0241 (\c
+.BR '~' ).
+.P
+In net result:
+.sp
+.RS
+EBCDIC 0275 (\c
+.BR ']' )
+displaced EBCDIC 0241 (\c
+.BR '~' )
+in cell 0345.
+.P
+\0\0\0\0That displaced EBCDIC 0137 (\c
+.BR '\(no' )
+in cell 0176.
+.P
+\0\0\0\0That displaced EBCDIC 0232 (no graphic) in cell 0136.
+.P
+\0\0\0\0That replaced EBCDIC 0152 (broken pipe) in cell 0313.
+.P
+EBCDIC 0255 (\c
+.BR '[' )
+replaced EBCDIC 0112 (\c
+.BR '\(ct' ).
+.RE
+.P
+This translation, however, reflects historical practice that (ASCII)
+.BR '~' 
+and
+.BR '\(no' 
+were often mapped to each other, as were
+.BR '[' 
+and
+.BR '\(ct' ;
+and
+.BR ']' 
+and (EBCDIC)
+.BR '~' .
+.P
+The
+.BR cbs
+operand is required if any of the
+.BR ascii ,
+.BR ebcdic ,
+or
+.BR ibm
+operands are specified. For the
+.BR ascii
+operand, the input is handled as described for the
+.BR unblock
+operand except that characters are converted to ASCII before the
+trailing
+<space>
+characters are deleted. For the
+.BR ebcdic
+and
+.BR ibm
+operands, the input is handled as described for the
+.BR block
+operand except that the characters are converted to EBCDIC or IBM
+EBCDIC after the trailing
+<space>
+characters are added.
+.P
+The
+.BR block
+and
+.BR unblock
+keywords are from historical BSD practice.
+.P
+The consistent use of the word
+.BR record
+in standard error messages matches most historical practice. An
+earlier version of System V used
+.BR block ,
+but this has been updated in more recent releases.
+.P
+Early proposals only allowed two numbers separated by
+.BR x
+to be used in a product when specifying
+.BR bs =,
+.BR cbs =,
+.BR ibs =,
+and
+.BR obs =
+sizes. This was changed to reflect the historical practice of allowing
+multiple numbers in the product as provided by Version 7 and all
+releases of System V and BSD.
+.P
+A change to the
+.BR swab
+conversion is required to match historical practice and is the result
+of IEEE PASC Interpretations 1003.2 #03 and #04, submitted for the
+ISO\ POSIX\(hy2:\|1993 standard.
+.P
+A change to the handling of SIGINT is required to match historical
+practice and is the result of IEEE PASC Interpretation 1003.2 #06
+submitted for the ISO\ POSIX\(hy2:\|1993 standard.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 1.4" ", " "Utility Description Defaults",
+.IR "\fIsed\fR\^",
+.IR "\fItr\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/delta.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/delta.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2350903
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/delta.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,342 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DELTA "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+delta
+\(em make a delta (change) to an SCCS file (\fBDEVELOPMENT\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+delta \fB[\fR\(minps\fB] [\fR\(mig \fIlist\fB] [\fR\(mim \fImrlist\fB] [\fR\(mir \fISID\fB] [\fR\(miy\fB[\fIcomment\fB]] \fIfile\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR delta
+utility shall be used to permanently introduce into the named SCCS
+files changes that were made to the files retrieved by
+.IR get
+(called the
+.IR g-files ,
+or generated files).
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR delta
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except that the
+.BR \(miy
+option has an optional option-argument. This optional option-argument
+shall not be presented as a separate argument.
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mir\ \fISID\fR" 10
+Uniquely identify which delta is to be made to the SCCS file. The use
+of this option shall be necessary only if two or more outstanding
+.IR get
+commands for editing (\c
+.IR get
+.BR \(mie )
+on the same SCCS file were done by the same person (login name). The
+SID value specified with the
+.BR \(mir
+option can be either the SID specified on the
+.IR get
+command line or the SID to be made as reported by the
+.IR get
+utility; see
+.IR "\fIget\fR\^".
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Suppress the report to standard output of the activity associated with
+each
+.IR file .
+See the STDOUT section.
+.IP "\fB\(min\fP" 10
+Specify retention of the edited
+.IR g-file
+(normally removed at completion of delta processing).
+.IP "\fB\(mig\ \fIlist\fR" 10
+Specify a
+.IR list
+(see
+.IR "\fIget\fR\^"
+for the definition of
+.IR list )
+of deltas that shall be ignored when the file is accessed at the
+change level (SID) created by this delta.
+.IP "\fB\(mim\ \fImrlist\fR" 10
+Specify a modification request (MR) number that the application shall
+supply as the reason for creating the new delta. This shall be used if
+the SCCS file has the
+.BR v
+flag set; see
+.IR "\fIadmin\fR\^".
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If
+.BR \(mim
+is not used and
+.BR '\(mi' 
+is not specified as a file argument, and the standard input is a
+terminal, the prompt described in the STDOUT section shall be written
+to standard output before the standard input is read; if the standard
+input is not a terminal, no prompt shall be issued.
+.P
+MRs in a list shall be separated by
+<blank>
+characters or escaped
+<newline>
+characters. An unescaped
+<newline>
+shall terminate the MR list. The escape character is
+<backslash>.
+.P
+If the
+.BR v
+flag has a value, it shall be taken to be the name of a program which
+validates the correctness of the MR numbers. If a non-zero exit status
+is returned from the MR number validation program, the
+.IR delta
+utility shall terminate. (It is assumed that the MR numbers were not
+all valid.)
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miy\fB[\fIcomment\fB]\fR" 10
+Describe the reason for making the delta. The
+.IR comment
+shall be an arbitrary group of lines that would meet the definition of
+a text file. Implementations shall support
+.IR comment s
+from zero to 512 bytes and may support longer values. A null string
+(specified as either
+.BR \(miy ,
+.BR \(miy \c
+.BR \(dq\^\(dq ,
+or in response to a prompt for a comment) shall be considered a valid
+.IR comment .
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If
+.BR \(miy
+is not specified and
+.BR '\(mi' 
+is not specified as a file argument, and the standard input is a
+terminal, the prompt described in the STDOUT section shall be written
+to standard output before the standard input is read; if the standard
+input is not a terminal, no prompt shall be issued. An unescaped
+<newline>
+shall terminate the comment text. The escape character is
+<backslash>.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miy
+option shall be required if the
+.IR file
+operand is specified as
+.BR '\(mi' .
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mip\fP" 10
+Write (to standard output) the SCCS file differences before and after
+the delta is applied in
+.IR diff
+format; see
+.IR "\fIdiff\fR\^".
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of an existing SCCS file or a directory. If
+.IR file
+is a directory, the
+.IR delta
+utility shall behave as though each file in the directory were
+specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files (last component
+of the pathname does not begin with
+.BR s. )
+and unreadable files shall be silently ignored.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If exactly one
+.IR file
+operand appears, and it is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be read; each line of the standard input shall
+be taken to be the name of an SCCS file to be processed. Non-SCCS files
+and unreadable files shall be silently ignored.
+.RE
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be a text file used only in the following
+cases:
+.IP " *" 4
+To read an
+.IR mrlist
+or a
+.IR comment
+(see the
+.BR \(mim
+and
+.BR \(miy
+options).
+.IP " *" 4
+A
+.IR file
+operand shall be specified as
+.BR '\(mi' .
+In this case, the
+.BR \(miy
+option must be used to specify the comment, and if the SCCS file has
+the
+.BR v
+flag set, the
+.BR \(mim
+option must also be used to specify the MR list.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+Input files shall be text files whose data is to be included in the
+SCCS files. If the first character of any line of an input file is
+<SOH>
+in the POSIX locale, the results are unspecified. If this file contains
+more than 99\|999 lines, the number of lines recorded in the header for
+this file shall be 99\|999 for this delta.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR delta :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error, and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fITZ\fP" 10
+Determine the timezone in which the time and date are written in the
+SCCS file. If the
+.IR TZ
+variable is unset or NULL, an unspecified system default timezone is
+used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+If SIGINT is caught, temporary files shall be cleaned up and
+.IR delta
+shall exit with a non-zero exit code. The standard action shall
+be taken for all other signals; see
+.IR "Section 1.4" ", " "Utility Description Defaults".
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall be used only for the following messages in
+the POSIX locale:
+.IP " *" 4
+Prompts (see the
+.BR \(mim
+and
+.BR \(miy
+options) in the following formats:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"MRs? "
+.P
+"comments? "
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The MR prompt, if written, shall always precede the comments prompt.
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+A report of each file's activities (unless the
+.BR \(mis
+option is specified) in the following format:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en%d inserted\en%d deleted\en%d unchanged\en", <\fINew SID\fR>,
+    <\fInumber of lines inserted\fR>, <\fInumber of lines deleted\fR>,
+    <\fInumber of lines unchanged\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+Any SCCS files updated shall be files of an unspecified format.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+.SS "System Date and Time"
+.P
+When a delta is added to an SCCS file, the system date and time shall
+be recorded for the new delta. If a
+.IR get
+is performed using an SCCS file with a date recorded apparently in the
+future, the behavior is unspecified.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Problems can arise if the system date and time have been modified (for
+example, put forward and then back again, or unsynchronized clocks
+across a network) and can also arise when different values of the
+.IR TZ
+environment variable are used.
+.P
+Problems of a similar nature can also arise for the operation of the
+.IR get
+utility, which records the date and time in the file body.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 1.4" ", " "Utility Description Defaults",
+.IR "\fIadmin\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIdiff\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIget\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIprs\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIrmdel\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/df.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/df.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef1579d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/df.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,332 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DF "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+df
+\(em report free disk space
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+df \fB[\fR\(mik\fB] [\fR\(miP|\(mit\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR df
+utility shall write the amount of available space
+and file slots
+for file systems on which the invoking user has appropriate read
+access. File systems shall be specified by the
+.IR file
+operands; when none are specified, information shall be written for all
+file systems. The format of the default output from
+.IR df
+is unspecified, but all space figures are reported in 512-byte units,
+unless the
+.BR \(mik
+option is specified. This output shall contain at least the file system
+names, amount of available space on each of these file systems,
+and, if no options other than
+.BR \(mit
+are specified, the number of free file slots, or
+.IR inode s,
+available; when
+.BR \(mit
+is specified, the output shall contain the total allocated space as well.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR df
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mik\fP" 10
+Use 1\|024-byte units, instead of the default 512-byte units, when
+writing space figures.
+.IP "\fB\(miP\fP" 10
+Produce output in the format described in the STDOUT section.
+.IP "\fB\(mit\fP" 10
+Include total allocated-space figures in the output.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file within the hierarchy of the desired file system.
+If a file other than a FIFO, a regular file, a directory,
+or a special file representing the device containing the file system
+(for example,
+.BR /dev/dsk/0s1 )
+is specified, the results are unspecified. If the
+.IR file
+operand names a file other than a special file containing a file
+system,
+.IR df
+shall write the amount of free space in the file system containing the
+specified
+.IR file
+operand.
+Otherwise,
+.IR df
+shall write the amount of free space in that file system.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR df :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+When both the
+.BR \(mik
+and
+.BR \(miP
+options are specified, the following header line shall be written (in
+the POSIX locale):
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"Filesystem 1024-blocks Used Available Capacity Mounted on\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+When the
+.BR \(miP
+option is specified without the
+.BR \(mik
+option, the following header line shall be written (in the POSIX
+locale):
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"Filesystem 512-blocks Used Available Capacity Mounted on\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The implementation may adjust the spacing of the header line and the
+individual data lines so that the information is presented in orderly
+columns.
+.P
+The remaining output with
+.BR \(miP
+shall consist of one line of information for each specified
+file system. These lines shall be formatted as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s %d %d %d %d%% %s\en", <\fIfile system name\fR>, <\fItotal space\fR>,
+    <\fIspace used\fR>, <\fIspace free\fR>, <\fIpercentage used\fR>,
+    <\fIfile system root\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In the following list, all quantities expressed in 512-byte units
+(1\|024-byte when
+.BR \(mik
+is specified) shall be rounded up to the next higher unit. The fields
+are:
+.IP "<\fIfile\ system\ name\fP>" 10
+.br
+The name of the file system, in an implementation-defined format.
+.IP "<\fItotal\ space\fP>" 10
+The total size of the file system in 512-byte units. The exact meaning
+of this figure is implementation-defined, but should include
+<\fIspace\ used\fP>, <\fIspace\ free\fP>, plus any space reserved by
+the system not normally available to a user.
+.IP "<\fIspace\ used\fP>" 10
+The total amount of space allocated to existing files in the
+file system, in 512-byte units.
+.IP "<\fIspace\ free\fP>" 10
+The total amount of space available within the file system for the
+creation of new files by unprivileged users, in 512-byte units. When
+this figure is less than or equal to zero, it shall not be possible to
+create any new files on the file system without first deleting others,
+unless the process has appropriate privileges. The figure written may
+be less than zero.
+.IP "<\fIpercentage\ used\fP>" 10
+.br
+The percentage of the normally available space that is currently
+allocated to all files on the file system. This shall be calculated
+using the fraction:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<\fIspace used\fR>/( <\fIspace used\fR>+ <\fIspace free\fR>)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+expressed as a percentage. This percentage may be greater than 100 if
+<\fIspace\ free\fP> is less than zero. The percentage value shall be
+expressed as a positive integer, with any fractional result causing it
+to be rounded to the next highest integer.
+.RE
+.IP "<\fIfile\ system\ root\fP>" 10
+.br
+The directory below which the file system hierarchy appears.
+.P
+The output format is unspecified when
+.BR \(mit
+is used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On most systems, the ``name of the file system, in an
+implementation-defined format'' is the special file on which the
+file system is mounted.
+.P
+On large file systems, the calculation specified for percentage used
+can create huge rounding errors.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+The following example writes portable information about the
+.BR /usr
+file system:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+df \(miP /usr
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+Assuming that
+.BR /usr/src
+is part of the
+.BR /usr
+file system, the following produces the same output as the previous
+example:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+df \(miP /usr/src
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The behavior of
+.IR df
+with the
+.BR \(miP
+option is the default action of the 4.2 BSD
+.IR df
+utility. The uppercase
+.BR \(miP
+was selected to avoid collision with a known industry extension using
+.BR \(mip .
+.P
+Historical
+.IR df
+implementations vary considerably in their default output. It was
+therefore necessary to describe the default output in a loose manner to
+accommodate all known historical implementations and to add a portable
+option (\c
+.BR \(miP )
+to provide information in a portable format.
+.P
+The use of 512-byte units is historical practice and maintains
+compatibility with
+.IR ls
+and other utilities in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. This does not mandate that the
+file system itself be based on 512-byte blocks. The
+.BR \(mik
+option was added as a compromise measure. It was agreed by the standard
+developers that 512 bytes was the best default unit because of its
+complete historical consistency on System V (\fIversus\fP the mixed
+512/1\|024-byte usage on BSD systems), and that a
+.BR \(mik
+option to switch to 1\|024-byte units was a good compromise. Users who
+prefer the more logical 1\|024-byte quantity can easily alias
+.IR df
+to
+.IR df
+.BR \(mik
+without breaking many historical scripts relying on the 512-byte
+units.
+.P
+It was suggested that
+.IR df
+and the various related utilities be modified to access a
+.IR BLOCKSIZE
+environment variable to achieve consistency and user acceptance. Since
+this is not historical practice on any system, it is left as a possible
+area for system extensions and will be re-evaluated in a future version
+if it is widely implemented.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfind\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/diff.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/diff.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d41c898
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/diff.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,1001 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DIFF "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+diff
+\(em compare two files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+diff \fB[\fR\(mic|\(mie|\(mif|\(miu|\(miC \fIn\fR|\(miU \fIn\fB] [\fR\(mibr\fB] \fIfile1 file2\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR diff
+utility shall compare the contents of
+.IR file1
+and
+.IR file2
+and write to standard output a list of changes necessary to convert
+.IR file1
+into
+.IR file2 .
+This list should be minimal. No output shall be produced if the files
+are identical.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR diff
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mib\fP" 10
+Cause any amount of white space at the end of a line to be treated as a
+single
+<newline>
+(that is, the white-space characters preceding the
+<newline>
+are ignored) and other strings of white-space characters, not including
+<newline>
+characters, to compare equal.
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Produce output in a form that provides three lines of copied context.
+.IP "\fB\(miC\ \fIn\fR" 10
+Produce output in a form that provides
+.IR n
+lines of copied context (where
+.IR n
+shall be interpreted as a positive decimal integer).
+.IP "\fB\(mie\fP" 10
+Produce output in a form suitable as input for the
+.IR ed
+utility, which can then be used to convert
+.IR file1
+into
+.IR file2 .
+.IP "\fB\(mif\fP" 10
+Produce output in an alternative form, similar in format to
+.BR \(mie ,
+but not intended to be suitable as input for the
+.IR ed
+utility, and in the opposite order.
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+Apply
+.IR diff
+recursively to files and directories of the same name when
+.IR file1
+and
+.IR file2
+are both directories.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR diff
+utility shall detect infinite loops; that is, entering a previously
+visited directory that is an ancestor of the last file encountered.
+When it detects an infinite loop,
+.IR diff
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error and shall either
+recover its position in the hierarchy or terminate.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miu\fP" 10
+Produce output in a form that provides three lines of unified context.
+.IP "\fB\(miU\ \fIn\fR" 10
+Produce output in a form that provides
+.IR n
+lines of unified context (where
+.IR n
+shall be interpreted as a non-negative decimal integer).
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile1\fR,\ \fIfile2\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file to be compared. If either the
+.IR file1
+or
+.IR file2
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be used in its place.
+.P
+If both
+.IR file1
+and
+.IR file2
+are directories,
+.IR diff
+shall not compare block special files, character special files, or FIFO
+special files to any files and shall not compare regular files to
+directories.
+Further details are as specified in
+.IR "Diff Directory Comparison Format".
+The behavior of
+.IR diff
+on other file types is implementation-defined when found in directories.
+.P
+If only one of
+.IR file1
+and
+.IR file2
+is a directory,
+.IR diff
+shall be applied to the non-directory file and the file contained in
+the directory file with a filename that is the same as the last
+component of the non-directory file.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used only if one of the
+.IR file1
+or
+.IR file2
+operands references standard input. See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files may be of any type.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR diff :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fILC_TIME\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for affecting the format of file timestamps
+written with the
+.BR \(miC
+and
+.BR \(mic
+options.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fITZ\fP" 10
+Determine the timezone used for calculating file timestamps written
+with a context format. If
+.IR TZ
+is unset or null, an unspecified default timezone shall be used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+.SS "Diff Directory Comparison Format"
+.P
+If both
+.IR file1
+and
+.IR file2
+are directories, the following output formats shall be used.
+.P
+In the POSIX locale, each file that is present in only one directory
+shall be reported using the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"Only in %s: %s\en", <\fIdirectory pathname\fP>, <\fIfilename\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In the POSIX locale, subdirectories that are common to the two
+directories may be reported with the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"Common subdirectories: %s and %s\en", <\fIdirectory1 pathname\fR>,
+    <\fIdirectory2 pathname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+For each file common to the two directories, if the two files are not to
+be compared: if the two files have the same device ID and file
+serial number, or are both block special files that refer to the
+same device, or are both character special files that refer to the
+same device, in the POSIX locale the output format is unspecified.
+Otherwise, in the POSIX locale an unspecified format shall be used
+that contains the pathnames of the two files.
+.P
+For each file common to the two directories, if the files are
+compared and are identical, no output shall be written. If the two
+files differ, the following format is written:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"diff %s %s %s\en", <\fIdiff_options\fR>, <\fIfilename1\fR>, <\fIfilename2\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fIdiff_options\fP> are the options as specified on the command
+line.
+.P
+All directory pathnames listed in this section shall be relative to the
+original command line arguments. All other names of files listed in
+this section shall be filenames (pathname components).
+.SS "Diff Binary Output Format"
+.P
+In the POSIX locale, if one or both of the files being compared are not
+text files, it is implementation-defined whether
+.IR diff
+uses the binary file output format or the other formats as specified
+below. The binary file output format shall contain the pathnames of
+two files being compared and the string
+.BR \(dqdiffer\(dq .
+.P
+If both files being compared are text files, depending on the options
+specified, one of the following formats shall be used to write the
+differences.
+.SS "Diff Default Output Format"
+.P
+The default (without
+.BR \(mie ,
+.BR \(mif ,
+.BR \(mic ,
+.BR \(miC ,
+.BR \(miu ,
+or
+.BR \(miU
+options)
+.IR diff
+utility output shall contain lines of these forms:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%da%d\en", <\fInum1\fR>, <\fInum2\fR>
+.P
+"%da%d,%d\en", <\fInum1\fR>, <\fInum2\fR>, <\fInum3\fR>
+.P
+"%dd%d\en", <\fInum1\fR>, <\fInum2\fR>
+.P
+"%d,%dd%d\en", <\fInum1\fR>, <\fInum2\fR>, <\fInum3\fR>
+.P
+"%dc%d\en", <\fInum1\fR>, <\fInum2\fR>
+.P
+"%d,%dc%d\en", <\fInum1\fR>, <\fInum2\fR>, <\fInum3\fR>
+.P
+"%dc%d,%d\en", <\fInum1\fR>, <\fInum2\fR>, <\fInum3\fR>
+.P
+"%d,%dc%d,%d\en", <\fInum1\fR>, <\fInum2\fR>, <\fInum3\fR>, <\fInum4\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+These lines resemble
+.IR ed
+subcommands to convert
+.IR file1
+into
+.IR file2 .
+The line numbers before the action letters shall pertain to
+.IR file1 ;
+those after shall pertain to
+.IR file2 .
+Thus, by exchanging
+.IR a
+for
+.IR d
+and reading the line in reverse order, one can also determine how to
+convert
+.IR file2
+into
+.IR file1 .
+As in
+.IR ed ,
+identical pairs (where
+.IR num1 =
+.IR num2 )
+are abbreviated as a single number.
+.P
+Following each of these lines,
+.IR diff
+shall write to standard output all lines affected in the first
+file using the format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"< %s", <\fIline\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and all lines affected in the second file using the format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"> %s", <\fIline\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If there are lines affected in both
+.IR file1
+and
+.IR file2
+(as with the
+.BR c
+subcommand), the changes are separated with a line consisting of three
+<hyphen>
+characters:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"\(mi\|\(mi\|\(mi\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Diff \(mie Output Format"
+.P
+With the
+.BR \(mie
+option, a script shall be produced that shall, when provided as input
+to
+.IR ed ,
+along with an appended
+.BR w
+(write) command, convert
+.IR file1
+into
+.IR file2 .
+Only the
+.BR a
+(append),
+.BR c
+(change),
+.BR d
+(delete),
+.BR i
+(insert), and
+.BR s
+(substitute) commands of
+.IR ed
+shall be used in this script. Text lines, except those consisting of
+the single character
+<period>
+(\c
+.BR '.' ),
+shall be output as they appear in the file.
+.SS "Diff \(mif Output Format"
+.P
+With the
+.BR \(mif
+option, an alternative format of script shall be produced. It is
+similar to that produced by
+.BR \(mie ,
+with the following differences:
+.IP " 1." 4
+It is expressed in reverse sequence; the output of
+.BR \(mie
+orders changes from the end of the file to the beginning; the
+.BR \(mif
+from beginning to end.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The command form <\fIlines\fP> <\fIcommand-letter\fR> used by
+.BR \(mie
+is reversed. For example, 10\fIc\fP with
+.BR \(mie
+would be
+.IR c 10
+with
+.BR \(mif .
+.IP " 3." 4
+The form used for ranges of line numbers is
+<space>-separated,
+rather than
+<comma>-separated.
+.SS "Diff \(mic or \(miC Output Format"
+.P
+With the
+.BR \(mic
+or
+.BR \(miC
+option, the output format shall consist of affected lines along with
+surrounding lines of context. The affected lines shall show which ones
+need to be deleted or changed in
+.IR file1 ,
+and those added from
+.IR file2 .
+With the
+.BR \(mic
+option, three lines of context, if available, shall be written before
+and after the affected lines. With the
+.BR \(miC
+option, the user can specify how many lines of context are written.
+The exact format follows.
+.P
+The name and last modification time of each file shall be output in the
+following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"*** %s %s\en", \fIfile1\fR, <\fIfile1 timestamp\fR>
+"\(mi\|\(mi\|\(mi %s %s\en", \fIfile2\fR, <\fIfile2 timestamp\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Each <\fIfile\fP> field shall be the pathname of the corresponding
+file being compared. The pathname written for standard input is
+unspecified.
+.P
+In the POSIX locale, each <\fItimestamp\fP> field shall be equivalent
+to the output from the following command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+date "+%a %b %e %T %Y"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+without the trailing
+<newline>,
+executed at the time of last modification of the corresponding file (or
+the current time, if the file is standard input).
+.P
+Then, the following output formats shall be applied for every set of
+changes.
+.P
+First, a line shall be written in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"***************\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Next, the range of lines in
+.IR file1
+shall be written in the following format if the range contains
+two or more lines:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"*** %d,%d ****\en", <\fIbeginning line number\fR>, <\fIending line number\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and the following format otherwise:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"*** %d ****\en", <\fIending line number\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The ending line number of an empty range shall be the number of the
+preceding line, or 0 if the range is at the start of the file.
+.P
+Next, the affected lines along with lines of context (unaffected lines)
+shall be written. Unaffected lines shall be written in the following
+format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"  %s", <\fIunaffected_line\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Deleted lines shall be written as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"\(mi %s", <\fIdeleted_line\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Changed lines shall be written as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"! %s", <\fIchanged_line\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Next, the range of lines in
+.IR file2
+shall be written in the following format if the range contains two
+or more lines:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"\(mi\|\(mi\|\(mi %d,%d \(mi\|\(mi\|\(mi\|\(mi\en", <\fIbeginning line number\fR>, <\fIending line number\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and the following format otherwise:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"\(mi\|\(mi\|\(mi %d \(mi\|\(mi\|\(mi\|\(mi\en", <\fIending line number\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Then, lines of context and changed lines shall be written as described in
+the previous formats. Lines added from
+.IR file2
+shall be written in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"+ %s", <\fIadded_line\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Diff \(miu or \(miU Output Format"
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miu
+or
+.BR \(miU
+options behave like the
+.BR \(mic
+or
+.BR \(miC
+options, except that the context lines are not repeated; instead,
+the context, deleted, and added lines are shown together, interleaved.
+The exact format follows.
+.P
+The name and last modification time of each file shall be output
+in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"--- %s\t%s%s %s\n", file1, <file1 timestamp>, <file1 frac>, <file1 zone>
+"+++ %s\t%s%s %s\n", file2, <file2 timestamp>, <file2 frac>, <file2 zone>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Each <\fIfile\fR> field shall be the pathname of the corresponding file
+being compared, or the single character
+.BR '\(mi' 
+if standard input is being compared. However, if the pathname contains
+a
+<tab>
+or a
+<newline>,
+or if it does not consist entirely of characters taken
+from the portable character set, the behavior is implementation-defined.
+.P
+Each <\fItimestamp\fR> field shall be equivalent to the output from the
+following command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+date '+%Y-%m-%d %H:%M:%S'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+without the trailing
+<newline>,
+executed at the time of last modification of the corresponding file
+(or the current time, if the file is standard input).
+.P
+Each <\fIfrac\fR> field shall be either empty, or a decimal point
+followed by at least one decimal digit, indicating the
+fractional-seconds part (if any) of the file timestamp. The
+number of fractional digits shall be at least the number needed to
+represent the file's timestamp without loss of information.
+.P
+Each <\fIzone\fR> field shall be of the form
+.BR \(dqshhmm\(dq ,
+where
+.BR \(dqshh\(dq 
+is a signed two-digit decimal number in the range \(mi24 through +25, and
+.BR \(dqmm\(dq 
+is an unsigned two-digit decimal number in the range 00 through 59.
+It represents the timezone of the timestamp as the number of hours
+(hh) and minutes (mm) east (+) or west (\(mi) of UTC for the timestamp.
+If the hours and minutes are both zero, the sign shall be
+.BR '+' .
+However, if the timezone is not an integral number of minutes away
+from UTC, the <\fIzone\fR> field is implementation-defined.
+.P
+Then, the following output formats shall be applied for every set
+of changes.
+.P
+First, the range of lines in each file shall be written in the
+following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"@@ -%s +%s @@", <file1 range>, <file2 range>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Each <\fIrange\fR> field shall be of the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%1d", <beginning line number>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+if the range contains exactly one line, and:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%1d,%1d", <beginning line number>, <number of lines>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+otherwise. If a range is empty, its beginning line number shall be
+the number of the line just before the range, or 0 if the empty
+range starts the file.
+.P
+Next, the affected lines along with lines of context shall be written.
+Each non-empty unaffected line shall be written in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+" %s", <unaffected_line>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where the contents of the unaffected line shall be taken from
+.IR file1 .
+It is implementation-defined whether an empty unaffected line is written
+as an empty line or a line containing a single
+<space>
+character. This line also represents the same line of
+.IR file2 ,
+even though
+.IR file2 's
+line may contain different contents due to the
+.BR \(mib .
+Deleted lines shall be written as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"-%s", <deleted_line>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Added lines shall be written as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"+%s", <added_line>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The order of lines written shall be the same as that of the
+corresponding file. A deleted line shall never be written
+immediately after an added line.
+.P
+If
+.BR \(miU
+.IR n
+is specified, the output shall contain no more than
+.IR n
+consecutive unaffected lines; and if the output contains an
+affected line and this line is adjacent to up to
+.IR n
+consecutive unaffected lines in the corresponding file, the output shall
+contain these unaffected lines.
+.BR \(miu
+shall act like
+.BR \(miU 3.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+No differences were found.
+.IP "\01" 6
+Differences were found.
+.IP >1 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If lines at the end of a file are changed and other lines are added,
+.IR diff
+output may show this as a delete and add, as a change, or as a change
+and add;
+.IR diff
+is not expected to know which happened and users should not care about
+the difference in output as long as it clearly shows the differences
+between the files.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+If
+.BR dir1
+is a directory containing a directory named
+.BR x ,
+.BR dir2
+is a directory containing a directory named
+.BR x ,
+.BR dir1/x
+and
+.BR dir2/x
+both contain files named
+.BR date.out ,
+and
+.BR dir2/x
+contains a file named
+.BR y ,
+the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+diff \(mir dir1 dir2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+could produce output similar to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+Common subdirectories: dir1/x and dir2/x
+Only in dir2/x: y
+diff \(mir dir1/x/date.out dir2/x/date.out
+1c1
+< Mon Jul  2 13:12:16 PDT 1990
+\(mi\|\(mi\|\(mi
+> Tue Jun 19 21:41:39 PDT 1990
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.BR \(mih
+option was omitted because it was insufficiently specified and does not
+add to applications portability.
+.P
+Historical implementations employ algorithms that do not always produce
+a minimum list of differences; the current language about making every
+effort is the best this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 can do, as there is no metric that could be
+employed to judge the quality of implementations against any and all
+file contents. The statement ``This list should be minimal'' clearly
+implies that implementations are not expected to provide the following
+output when comparing two 100-line files that differ in only one
+character on a single line:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+1,100c1,100
+all 100 lines from file1 preceded with "< "
+\(mi\|\(mi\|\(mi
+all 100 lines from file2 preceded with "> "
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The ``Only in'' messages required when the
+.BR \(mir
+option is specified are not used by most historical implementations if
+the
+.BR \(mie
+option is also specified. It is required here because it provides
+useful information that must be provided to update a target directory
+hierarchy to match a source hierarchy. The ``Common subdirectories''
+messages are written by System V and 4.3 BSD when the
+.BR \(mir
+option is specified. They are allowed here but are not required because
+they are reporting on something that is the same, not reporting a
+difference, and are not needed to update a target hierarchy.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mic
+option, which writes output in a format using lines of context, has
+been included. The format is useful for a variety of reasons, among
+them being much improved readability and the ability to understand
+difference changes when the target file has line numbers that differ
+from another similar, but slightly different, copy. The
+.IR patch
+utility is most valuable when working with difference listings using
+a context format. The BSD version of
+.BR \(mic
+takes an optional argument specifying the amount of context. Rather
+than overloading
+.BR \(mic
+and breaking the Utility Syntax Guidelines for
+.IR diff ,
+the standard developers decided to add a separate option for specifying
+a context diff with a specified amount of context (\c
+.BR \(miC ).
+Also, the format for context
+.IR diff s
+was extended slightly in 4.3 BSD to allow multiple changes that are
+within context lines from each other to be merged together. The output
+format contains an additional four
+<asterisk>
+characters after the range of affected lines in the first filename. This
+was to provide a flag for old programs (like old versions of
+.IR patch )
+that only understand the old context format. The version of context
+described here does not require that multiple changes within context
+lines be merged, but it does not prohibit it either. The extension is
+upwards-compatible, so any vendors that wish to retain the old version
+of
+.IR diff
+can do so by adding the extra four
+<asterisk>
+characters (that is, utilities that currently use
+.IR diff
+and understand the new merged format will also understand the old
+unmerged format, but not \fIvice versa\fP).
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miu
+and
+.BR \(miU
+options of GNU
+.IR diff
+have been included. Their output format, designed by Wayne Davison,
+takes up less space than
+.BR \(mic
+and
+.BR \(miC
+format, and in many cases is easier to read. The format's timestamps
+do not vary by locale, so
+.IR LC_TIME
+does not affect it. The format's line numbers are rendered with the
+.BR %1d
+format, not
+.BR %d ,
+because the file format notation rules would allow extra
+<blank>
+characters to appear around the numbers.
+.P
+The substitute command was added as an additional format for the
+.BR \(mie
+option. This was added to provide implementations with a way to fix the
+classic ``dot alone on a line'' bug present in many versions of
+.IR diff .
+Since many implementations have fixed this bug, the standard developers
+decided not to standardize broken behavior, but rather to provide the
+necessary tool for fixing the bug. One way to fix this bug is to output
+two periods whenever a lone period is needed, then terminate the append
+command with a period, and then use the substitute command to convert
+the two periods into one period.
+.P
+The BSD-derived
+.BR \(mir
+option was added to provide a mechanism for using
+.IR diff
+to compare two file system trees. This behavior is useful, is standard
+practice on all BSD-derived systems, and is not easily reproducible
+with the
+.IR find
+utility.
+.P
+The requirement that
+.IR diff
+not compare files in some circumstances, even though they have the same
+name, is based on the actual output of historical implementations.
+The specified behavior precludes the problems arising from running
+into FIFOs and other files that would cause
+.IR diff
+to hang waiting for input with no indication to the user that
+.IR diff
+was hung. An earlier version of this standard specified the output
+format more precisely, but in practice this requirement was widely
+ignored and the benefit of standardization seemed small, so it is now
+unspecified. In most common usage,
+.IR diff
+.BR \(mir
+should indicate differences in the file hierarchies, not the difference
+of contents of devices pointed to by the hierarchies.
+.P
+Many early implementations of
+.IR diff
+require seekable files. Since the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 supports named pipes, the
+standard developers decided that such a restriction was unreasonable.
+Note also that the allowed filename
+.BR \(mi
+almost always refers to a pipe.
+.P
+No directory search order is specified for
+.IR diff .
+The historical ordering is, in fact, not optimal, in that it prints out
+all of the differences at the current level, including the statements
+about all common subdirectories before recursing into those
+subdirectories.
+.P
+The message:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"diff %s %s %s\en", <\fIdiff_options\fP>, <\fIfilename1\fP>, <\fIfilename2\fP>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+does not vary by locale because it is the representation of a command,
+not an English sentence.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcmp\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIcomm\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIed\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfind\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/dirname.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/dirname.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6e1e187
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/dirname.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,260 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DIRNAME "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+dirname
+\(em return the directory portion of a pathname
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+dirname \fIstring\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR string
+operand shall be treated as a pathname, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.267" ", " "Pathname".
+The string
+.IR string
+shall be converted to the name of the directory containing the
+filename corresponding to the last pathname component in
+.IR string ,
+performing actions equivalent to the following steps in order:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If
+.IR string
+is
+.BR // ,
+skip steps 2 to 5.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If
+.IR string
+consists entirely of
+<slash>
+characters,
+.IR string
+shall be set to a single
+<slash>
+character. In this case, skip steps 3 to 8.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If there are any trailing
+<slash>
+characters in
+.IR string ,
+they shall be removed.
+.IP " 4." 4
+If there are no
+<slash>
+characters remaining in
+.IR string ,
+.IR string
+shall be set to a single
+<period>
+character. In this case, skip steps 5 to 8.
+.IP " 5." 4
+If there are any trailing non-\c
+<slash>
+characters in
+.IR string ,
+they shall be removed.
+.IP " 6." 4
+If the remaining
+.IR string
+is
+.BR // ,
+it is implementation-defined whether steps 7 and 8 are skipped or
+processed.
+.IP " 7." 4
+If there are any trailing
+<slash>
+characters in
+.IR string ,
+they shall be removed.
+.IP " 8." 4
+If the remaining
+.IR string
+is empty,
+.IR string
+shall be set to a single
+<slash>
+character.
+.P
+The resulting string shall be written to standard output.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIstring\fR" 10
+A string.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR dirname :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The
+.IR dirname
+utility shall write a line to the standard output in the following
+format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIresulting string\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The definition of
+.IR pathname
+specifies implementation-defined behavior for pathnames starting with
+two
+<slash>
+characters. Therefore, applications shall not arbitrarily add
+<slash>
+characters to the beginning of a pathname unless they can ensure
+that there are more or less than two or are prepared to deal with the
+implementation-defined consequences.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.TS
+center tab(@) box;
+cB | cB
+l | l.
+Command@Results
+_
+\fIdirname\fR /@/
+\fIdirname\fR //@/ or //
+\fIdirname\fR /\fIa\fR/\fIb\fR/@/\fIa\fR
+\fIdirname\fR //\fIa\fR//\fIb\fR//@//\fIa\fR
+\fIdirname\fR@Unspecified
+\fIdirname a\fR@. ($? = 0)
+\fIdirname\fR ""@. ($? = 0)
+\fIdirname\fR /\fIa\fR@/
+\fIdirname\fR /\fIa\fR/\fIb\fR@/\fIa\fR
+\fIdirname\fR \fIa\fR/\fIb\fR@\fIa\fR
+.TE
+.P
+See also the examples for the
+.IR basename
+utility.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR dirname
+utility originated in System III. It has evolved through the System V
+releases to a version that matches the requirements specified in this
+description in System V Release 3. 4.3 BSD and earlier versions did
+not include
+.IR dirname .
+.P
+The behaviors of
+.IR basename
+and
+.IR dirname
+in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 have been coordinated so that when
+.IR string
+is a valid pathname:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+$(basename -- "\fIstring\fP")
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would be a valid filename for the file in the directory:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+$(dirname -- "\fIstring\fP")
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This would not work for the versions of these utilities in early proposals
+due to the way processing of trailing
+<slash>
+characters was specified. Consideration was given to leaving processing
+unspecified if there were trailing
+<slash>
+characters, but this cannot be done; the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.267" ", " "Pathname"
+allows trailing
+<slash>
+characters. The
+.IR basename
+and
+.IR dirname
+utilities have to specify consistent handling for all valid pathnames.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Parameters and Variables",
+.IR "\fIbasename\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.267" ", " "Pathname",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/dot.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/dot.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5d2c527
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/dot.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DOT "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+dot
+\(em execute commands in the current environment
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+\&. \fIfile\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The shell shall execute commands from the
+.IR file
+in the current environment.
+.P
+If
+.IR file
+does not contain a
+<slash>,
+the shell shall use the search path specified by
+.IR PATH
+to find the directory containing
+.IR file .
+Unlike normal command search, however, the file searched for by the
+.IR dot
+utility need not be executable. If no readable file is found, a
+non-interactive shell shall abort; an interactive shell shall write a
+diagnostic message to standard error, but this condition shall not be
+considered a syntax error.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+If no readable file was found or if the commands in the file could not
+be parsed, and the shell is interactive (and therefore does not abort; see
+.IR "Section 2.8.1" ", " "Consequences of Shell Errors"),
+the exit status shall be non-zero. Otherwise, return the value of the
+last command executed, or a zero exit status if no command is executed.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.LP
+.nf
+cat foobar
+\fBfoo=hello bar=world\fR
+\&. ./foobar
+echo $foo $bar
+\fBhello world\fR
+.fi
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+Some older implementations searched the current directory for the
+.IR file ,
+even if the value of
+.IR PATH
+disallowed it. This behavior was omitted from this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 due to concerns
+about introducing the susceptibility to trojan horses that the user
+might be trying to avoid by leaving
+.BR dot
+out of
+.IR PATH .
+.P
+The KornShell version of
+.IR dot
+takes optional arguments that are set to the positional parameters.
+This is a valid extension that allows a
+.IR dot
+script to behave identically to a function.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities",
+.IR "\fIreturn\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/du.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/du.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cf0854a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/du.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,279 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DU "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+du
+\(em estimate file space usage
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+du \fB[\fR\(mia|\(mis\fB] [\fR\(mikx\fB] [\fR\(miH|\(miL\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+By default, the
+.IR du
+utility shall write to standard output the size of the file space
+allocated to, and the size of the file space allocated to each
+subdirectory of, the file hierarchy rooted in each of the specified
+files. By default, when a symbolic link is encountered on the command
+line or in the file hierarchy,
+.IR du
+shall count the size of the symbolic link (rather than the file
+referenced by the link), and shall not follow the link to another
+portion of the file hierarchy. The size of the file space allocated to
+a file of type directory shall be defined as the sum total of space
+allocated to all files in the file hierarchy rooted in the directory
+plus the space allocated to the directory itself.
+.P
+When
+.IR du
+cannot
+\fIstat\fR()
+files or
+\fIstat\fR()
+or read directories, it shall report an error condition and the final
+exit status is affected. Files with multiple links shall be counted and
+written for only one entry. The directory entry that is selected in the
+report is unspecified. By default, file sizes shall be written in
+512-byte units, rounded up to the next 512-byte unit.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR du
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mia\fP" 10
+In addition to the default output, report the size of each file not of
+type directory in the file hierarchy rooted in the specified file.
+Regardless of the presence of the
+.BR \(mia
+option, non-directories given as
+.IR file
+operands shall always be listed.
+.IP "\fB\(miH\fP" 10
+If a symbolic link is specified on the command line,
+.IR du
+shall count the size of the file or file hierarchy referenced by the
+link.
+.IP "\fB\(mik\fP" 10
+Write the files sizes in units of 1\|024 bytes, rather than the default
+512-byte units.
+.IP "\fB\(miL\fP" 10
+If a symbolic link is specified on the command line or encountered
+during the traversal of a file hierarchy,
+.IR du
+shall count the size of the file or file hierarchy referenced by the
+link.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Instead of the default output, report only the total sum for each of
+the specified files.
+.IP "\fB\(mix\fP" 10
+When evaluating file sizes, evaluate only those files that have the
+same device as the file specified by the
+.IR file
+operand.
+.P
+Specifying more than one of the mutually-exclusive options
+.BR \(miH
+and
+.BR \(miL
+shall not be considered an error. The last option specified shall
+determine the behavior of the utility.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+The pathname of a file whose size is to be written. If no
+.IR file
+is specified, the current directory shall be used.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR du :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The output from
+.IR du
+shall consist of the amount of space allocated to a file and the
+name of the file, in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d %s\en", <\fIsize\fR>, <\fIpathname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The use of 512-byte units is historical practice and maintains
+compatibility with
+.IR ls
+and other utilities in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. This does not mandate that the
+file system itself be based on 512-byte blocks. The
+.BR \(mik
+option was added as a compromise measure. It was agreed by the standard
+developers that 512 bytes was the best default unit because of its
+complete historical consistency on System V (\fIversus\fP the mixed
+512/1\|024-byte usage on BSD systems), and that a
+.BR \(mik
+option to switch to 1\|024-byte units was a good compromise. Users who
+prefer the 1\|024-byte quantity can easily alias
+.IR du
+to
+.IR du
+.BR \(mik
+without breaking the many historical scripts relying on the 512-byte
+units.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mib
+option was added to an early proposal to provide a resolution to the
+situation where System V and BSD systems give figures for file sizes in
+.IR blocks ,
+which is an implementation-defined concept. (In common usage, the
+block size is 512 bytes for System V and 1\|024 bytes for BSD systems.)
+However,
+.BR \(mib
+was later deleted, since the default was eventually decided as 512-byte
+units.
+.P
+Historical file systems provided no way to obtain exact figures for the
+space allocation given to files. There are two known areas of
+inaccuracies in historical file systems: cases of
+.IR "indirect blocks"
+being used by the file system or
+.IR "sparse"
+files yielding incorrectly high values. An indirect block is space used
+by the file system in the storage of the file, but that need not be
+counted in the space allocated to the file. A
+.IR sparse
+file is one in which an
+\fIlseek\fR()
+call has been made to a position beyond the end of the file and data
+has subsequently been written at that point. A file system need not
+allocate all the intervening zero-filled blocks to such a file. It is
+up to the implementation to define exactly how accurate its methods
+are.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mia
+and
+.BR \(mis
+options were mutually-exclusive in the original version of
+.IR du .
+The POSIX Shell and Utilities description is implied by the language in
+the SVID where
+.BR \(mis
+is described as causing ``only the grand total'' to be reported. Some
+systems may produce output for
+.BR \(misa ,
+but a Strictly Conforming POSIX Shell and Utilities Application cannot
+use that combination.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mia
+and
+.BR \(mis
+options were adopted from the SVID except that the System V behavior of
+not listing non-directories explicitly given as operands, unless the
+.BR \(mia
+option is specified, was considered a bug; the BSD-based behavior
+(report for all operands) is mandated. The default behavior of
+.IR du
+in the SVID with regard to reporting the failure to read files (it
+produces no messages) was considered counter-intuitive, and thus it was
+specified that the POSIX Shell and Utilities default behavior shall be
+to produce such messages. These messages can be turned off with shell
+redirection to achieve the System V behavior.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mix
+option is historical practice on recent BSD systems. It has been
+adopted by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 because there was no other historical method of
+limiting the
+.IR du
+search to a single file hierarchy. This limitation of the search is
+necessary to make it possible to obtain file space usage information
+about a file system on which other file systems are mounted, without
+having to resort to a lengthy
+.IR find
+and
+.IR awk
+script.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIls\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIfstatat\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/echo.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/echo.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..da31e54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/echo.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,266 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ECHO "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+echo
+\(em write arguments to standard output
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+echo \fB[\fIstring\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR echo
+utility writes its arguments to standard output, followed by a
+<newline>.
+If there are no arguments, only the
+<newline>
+is written.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR echo
+utility shall not recognize the
+.BR \(dq\(mi\|\(mi\(dq 
+argument in the manner specified by Guideline 10 of the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines";
+.BR \(dq\(mi\|\(mi\(dq 
+shall be recognized as a string operand.
+.P
+Implementations shall not support any options.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIstring\fR" 10
+A string to be written to standard output. If the first operand is
+.BR \(min ,
+or if any of the operands contain a
+<backslash>
+character, the results are implementation-defined.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+On XSI-conformant systems, if the first operand is
+.BR \(min ,
+it shall be treated as a string, not an option. The following character
+sequences shall be recognized on XSI-conformant systems within any of
+the arguments:
+.IP "\fR\ea\fR" 8
+Write an
+<alert>.
+.IP "\fR\eb\fR" 8
+Write a
+<backspace>.
+.IP "\fR\ec\fR" 8
+Suppress the
+<newline>
+that otherwise follows the final argument in the output. All
+characters following the
+.BR '\ec' 
+in the arguments shall be ignored.
+.IP "\fR\ef\fR" 8
+Write a
+<form-feed>.
+.IP "\fR\en\fR" 8
+Write a
+<newline>.
+.IP "\fR\er\fR" 8
+Write a
+<carriage-return>.
+.IP "\fR\et\fR" 8
+Write a
+<tab>.
+.IP "\fR\ev\fR" 8
+Write a
+<vertical-tab>.
+.IP "\fR\e\e\fR" 8
+Write a
+<backslash>
+character.
+.IP "\fR\e0\fInum\fR" 8
+Write an 8-bit value that is the zero, one, two, or three-digit octal
+number
+.IR num .
+.RE
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR echo :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The
+.IR echo
+utility arguments shall be separated by single
+<space>
+characters and a
+<newline>
+character shall follow the last argument.
+Output transformations shall occur based on the escape sequences in
+the input. See the OPERANDS section.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+It is not possible to use
+.IR echo
+portably across all POSIX systems unless both
+.BR \(min
+(as the first argument) and escape sequences are omitted.
+.P
+The
+.IR printf
+utility can be used portably to emulate any of the traditional
+behaviors of the
+.IR echo
+utility as follows (assuming that
+.IR IFS
+has its standard value or is unset):
+.IP " *" 4
+The historic System V
+.IR echo
+and the requirements on XSI implementations in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 are equivalent to:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+printf "%b\en$*"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+The BSD
+.IR echo
+is equivalent to:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+if [ "X$1" = "X\(min" ]
+then
+    shift
+    printf "%s$*"
+else
+    printf "%s\en$*"
+fi
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+New applications are encouraged to use
+.IR printf
+instead of
+.IR echo .
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR echo
+utility has not been made obsolescent because of its extremely
+widespread use in historical applications. Conforming applications that
+wish to do prompting without
+<newline>
+characters or that could possibly be expecting to echo a
+.BR \(min ,
+should use the
+.IR printf
+utility derived from the Ninth Edition system.
+.P
+As specified,
+.IR echo
+writes its arguments in the simplest of ways. The two different
+historical versions of
+.IR echo
+vary in fatally incompatible ways.
+.P
+The BSD
+.IR echo
+checks the first argument for the string
+.BR \(min
+which causes it to suppress the
+<newline>
+that would otherwise follow the final argument in the output.
+.P
+The System V
+.IR echo
+does not support any options, but allows escape sequences within its
+operands, as described for XSI implementations in the OPERANDS section.
+.P
+The
+.IR echo
+utility does not support Utility Syntax Guideline 10 because historical
+applications depend on
+.IR echo
+to echo
+.IR all
+of its arguments, except for the
+.BR \(min
+option in the BSD version.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIprintf\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ed.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ed.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dd071cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ed.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,2097 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ED "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ed
+\(em edit text
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+ed \fB[\fR\(mip \fIstring\fB] [\fR\(mis\fB] [\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR ed
+utility is a line-oriented text editor that uses two modes:
+.IR "command mode"
+and
+.IR "input mode" .
+In command mode the input characters shall be interpreted as commands,
+and in input mode they shall be interpreted as text. See the EXTENDED
+DESCRIPTION section.
+.P
+If an operand is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the results are unspecified.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR ed
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except for the unspecified usage of
+.BR '\(mi' .
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mip\ \fIstring\fR" 10
+Use
+.IR string
+as the prompt string when in command mode. By default, there shall be
+no prompt string.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Suppress the writing of byte counts by
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR r ,
+and
+.BR w
+commands and of the
+.BR '!' 
+prompt after a !\fIcommand\fR.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+If the
+.IR file
+argument is given,
+.IR ed
+shall simulate an
+.BR e
+command on the file named by the pathname,
+.IR file ,
+before accepting commands from the standard input.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be a text file consisting of commands, as
+described in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files shall be text files.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR ed :
+.IP "\fIHOME\fP" 10
+Determine the pathname of the user's home directory.
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, equivalence classes,
+and multi-character collating elements within regular expressions.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files) and the behavior of
+character classes within regular expressions.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+The
+.IR ed
+utility shall take the standard action for all signals (see the
+ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS section in
+.IR "Section 1.4" ", " "Utility Description Defaults")
+with the following exceptions:
+.IP SIGINT 10
+The
+.IR ed
+utility shall interrupt its current activity, write the string
+.BR \(dq?\en\(dq 
+to standard output, and return to command mode (see the EXTENDED
+DESCRIPTION section).
+.IP SIGHUP 10
+If the buffer is not empty and has changed since the last write, the
+.IR ed
+utility shall attempt to write a copy of the buffer in a file. First,
+the file named
+.BR ed.hup
+in the current directory shall be used; if that fails, the file named
+.BR ed.hup
+in the directory named by the
+.IR HOME
+environment variable shall be used. In any case, the
+.IR ed
+utility shall exit without writing the file to the currently
+remembered pathname and without returning to command mode.
+.IP SIGQUIT 10
+The
+.IR ed
+utility shall ignore this event.
+.SH STDOUT
+Various editing commands and the prompting feature (see
+.BR \(mip )
+write to standard output, as described in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION
+section.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+The output files shall be text files whose formats are dependent on the
+editing commands given.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+The
+.IR ed
+utility shall operate on a copy of the file it is editing; changes made
+to the copy shall have no effect on the file until a
+.BR w
+(write) command is given. The copy of the text is called the
+.IR buffer .
+.P
+Commands to
+.IR ed
+have a simple and regular structure: zero, one, or two
+.IR addresses
+followed by a single-character
+.IR command ,
+possibly followed by parameters to that command. These addresses
+specify one or more lines in the buffer. Every command that requires
+addresses has default addresses, so that the addresses very often can
+be omitted. If the
+.BR \(mip
+option is specified, the prompt string shall be written to standard
+output before each command is read.
+.P
+In general, only one command can appear on a line. Certain commands
+allow text to be input. This text is placed in the appropriate place in
+the buffer. While
+.IR ed
+is accepting text, it is said to be in \fIinput mode\fR. In this mode,
+no commands shall be recognized; all input is merely collected. Input
+mode is terminated by entering a line consisting of two characters: a
+<period>
+(\c
+.BR '.' )
+followed by a
+<newline>.
+This line is not considered part of the input text.
+.SS "Regular Expressions in ed"
+.P
+The
+.IR ed
+utility shall support basic regular expressions, as described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 9.3" ", " "Basic Regular Expressions".
+Since regular expressions in
+.IR ed
+are always matched against single lines (excluding the terminating
+<newline>
+characters), never against any larger section of text, there is no way
+for a regular expression to match a
+<newline>.
+.P
+A null RE shall be equivalent to the last RE encountered.
+.P
+Regular expressions are used in addresses to specify lines, and in some
+commands (for example, the
+.BR s
+substitute command) to specify portions of a line to be substituted.
+.SS "Addresses in ed"
+.P
+Addressing in
+.IR ed
+relates to the current line. Generally, the current line is the last
+line affected by a command. The current line number is the address of
+the current line. If the edit buffer is not empty, the initial value
+for the current line shall be the last line in the edit buffer;
+otherwise, zero.
+.P
+Addresses shall be constructed as follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The
+<period>
+character (\c
+.BR '.' )
+shall address the current line.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The
+<dollar-sign>
+character (\c
+.BR '$' )
+shall address the last line of the edit buffer.
+.IP " 3." 4
+The positive decimal number
+.IR n
+shall address the
+.IR n th
+line of the edit buffer.
+.IP " 4." 4
+The
+<apostrophe>-x
+character pair (\c
+.BR \(dq'x\(dq )
+shall address the line marked with the mark name character
+.IR x ,
+which shall be a lowercase letter from the portable character set. It
+shall be an error if the character has not been set to mark a line or
+if the line that was marked is not currently present in the edit
+buffer.
+.IP " 5." 4
+A BRE enclosed by
+<slash>
+characters (\c
+.BR '/' )
+shall address the first line found by searching forwards from the line
+following the current line toward the end of the edit buffer and
+stopping at the first line for which the line excluding the
+terminating
+<newline>
+matches the BRE. The BRE consisting of a null BRE delimited by a pair of
+<slash>
+characters shall address the next line for which the line excluding
+the terminating
+<newline>
+matches the last BRE encountered. In addition, the second
+<slash>
+can be omitted at the end of a command line. Within the BRE, a
+<backslash>-\c
+<slash>
+pair (\c
+.BR \(dq\e/\(dq )
+shall represent a literal
+<slash>
+instead of the BRE delimiter. If necessary, the search shall wrap around
+to the beginning of the buffer and continue up to and including the
+current line, so that the entire buffer is searched.
+.IP " 6." 4
+A BRE enclosed by
+<question-mark>
+characters (\c
+.BR '?' )
+shall address the first line found by searching backwards from the line
+preceding the current line toward the beginning of the edit buffer and
+stopping at the first line for which the line excluding the terminating
+<newline>
+matches the BRE. The BRE consisting of a null BRE delimited by a pair
+of
+<question-mark>
+characters (\c
+.BR \(dq??\(dq )
+shall address the previous line for which the line excluding the
+terminating
+<newline>
+matches the last BRE encountered. In addition, the second
+<question-mark>
+can be omitted at the end of a command line. Within the
+BRE, a
+<backslash>-\c
+<question-mark>
+pair (\c
+.BR \(dq\e?\(dq )
+shall represent a literal
+<question-mark>
+instead of the BRE delimiter. If necessary, the search shall wrap around
+to the end of the buffer and continue up to and including the current
+line, so that the entire buffer is searched.
+.IP " 7." 4
+A
+<plus-sign>
+(\c
+.BR '\(pl' )
+or
+<hyphen>
+character (\c
+.BR '\(mi' )
+followed by a decimal number shall address the current line plus or
+minus the number. A
+<plus-sign>
+or
+<hyphen>
+character not followed by a decimal number shall address the current
+line plus or minus 1.
+.P
+Addresses can be followed by zero or more address offsets, optionally
+<blank>-separated.
+Address offsets are constructed as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+A
+<plus-sign>
+or
+<hyphen>
+character followed by a decimal number shall add or subtract,
+respectively, the indicated number of lines to or from the address. A
+<plus-sign>
+or
+<hyphen>
+character not followed by a decimal number shall add or subtract 1 to
+or from the address.
+.IP " *" 4
+A decimal number shall add the indicated number of lines to the
+address.
+.P
+It shall not be an error for an intermediate address value to be less
+than zero or greater than the last line in the edit buffer. It shall be
+an error for the final address value to be less than zero or greater
+than the last line in the edit buffer. It shall be an error if a search
+for a BRE fails to find a matching line.
+.P
+Commands accept zero, one, or two addresses. If more than the required
+number of addresses are provided to a command that requires zero
+addresses, it shall be an error. Otherwise, if more than the required
+number of addresses are provided to a command, the addresses specified
+first shall be evaluated and then discarded until the maximum number of
+valid addresses remain, for the specified command.
+.P
+Addresses shall be separated from each other by a
+<comma>
+(\c
+.BR ',' )
+or
+<semicolon>
+character (\c
+.BR ';' ).
+In the case of a
+<semicolon>
+separator, the current line (\c
+.BR '.' )
+shall be set to the first address, and only then will the second
+address be calculated. This feature can be used to determine the
+starting line for forwards and backwards searches; see rules 5. and
+6.
+.P
+Addresses can be omitted on either side of the
+<comma>
+or
+<semicolon>
+separator, in which case the resulting address pairs shall be as
+follows:
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB
+lf5 | lf5.
+Specified!Resulting
+_
+\&,!1 , $
+\&, addr!1 , addr
+addr ,!addr , addr
+;!. ; $
+; addr!. ; addr
+addr ;!addr ; addr
+.TE
+.P
+Any
+<blank>
+characters included between addresses, address separators, or address
+offsets shall be ignored.
+.SS "Commands in ed"
+.P
+In the following list of
+.IR ed
+commands, the default addresses are shown in parentheses. The number of
+addresses shown in the default shall be the number expected by the
+command. The parentheses are not part of the address; they show that
+the given addresses are the default.
+.P
+It is generally invalid for more than one command to appear on a line.
+However, any command (except
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR q ,
+.BR Q ,
+.BR r ,
+.BR w ,
+and
+.BR ! )
+can be suffixed by the letter
+.BR l ,
+.BR n ,
+or
+.BR p ;
+in which case, except for the
+.BR l ,
+.BR n ,
+and
+.BR p
+commands, the command shall be executed and then the new current line
+shall be written as described below under the
+.BR l ,
+.BR n ,
+and
+.BR p
+commands. When an
+.BR l ,
+.BR n ,
+or
+.BR p
+suffix is used with an
+.BR l ,
+.BR n ,
+or
+.BR p
+command, the command shall write to standard output as described below,
+but it is unspecified whether the suffix writes the current line again
+in the requested format or whether the suffix has no effect. For
+example, the
+.BR pl
+command (base
+.BR p
+command with an
+.BR l
+suffix) shall either write just the current line or write it
+twice\(emonce as specified for
+.BR p
+and once as specified for
+.BR l .
+Also, the
+.BR g ,
+.BR G ,
+.BR v ,
+and
+.BR V
+commands shall take a command as a parameter.
+.P
+Each address component can be preceded by zero or more
+<blank>
+characters. The command letter can be preceded by zero or more
+<blank>
+characters. If a suffix letter (\c
+.BR l ,
+.BR n ,
+or
+.BR p )
+is given, the application shall ensure that it immediately follows the
+command.
+.P
+The
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR r ,
+and
+.BR w
+commands shall take an optional
+.IR file
+parameter, separated from the command letter by one or more
+<blank>
+characters.
+.P
+If changes have been made in the buffer since the last
+.BR w
+command that wrote the entire buffer,
+.IR ed
+shall warn the user if an attempt is made to destroy the editor buffer
+via the
+.BR e
+or
+.BR q
+commands. The
+.IR ed
+utility shall write the string:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"?\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+(followed by an explanatory message if
+.IR "help mode"
+has been enabled via the
+.BR H
+command) to standard output and shall continue in command mode with the
+current line number unchanged. If the
+.BR e
+or
+.BR q
+command is repeated with no intervening command, it shall take effect.
+.P
+If a terminal disconnect (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+Modem Disconnect and Closing a Device Terminal), is detected:
+.IP " *" 4
+If accompanied by a SIGHUP signal, the
+.IR ed
+utility shall operate as described in the ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS section
+for a SIGHUP signal.
+.IP " *" 4
+If not accompanied by a SIGHUP signal, the
+.IR ed
+utility shall act as if an end-of-file had been detected on standard
+input.
+.P
+If an end-of-file is detected on standard input:
+.IP " *" 4
+If the
+.IR ed
+utility is in input mode,
+.IR ed
+shall terminate input mode and return to command mode. It is
+unspecified if any partially entered lines (that is, input text without
+a terminating
+<newline>)
+are discarded from the input text.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the
+.IR ed
+utility is in command mode, it shall act as if a
+.BR q
+command had been entered.
+.P
+If the closing delimiter of an RE or of a replacement string (for
+example,
+.BR '/' )
+in a
+.BR g ,
+.BR G ,
+.BR s ,
+.BR v ,
+or
+.BR V
+command would be the last character before a
+<newline>,
+that delimiter can be omitted, in which case the addressed line shall
+be written. For example, the following pairs of commands are
+equivalent:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+s/s1/s2   s/s1/s2/p
+g/s1      g/s1/p
+?s1       ?s1?
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If an invalid command is entered,
+.IR ed
+shall write the string:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"?\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+(followed by an explanatory message if
+.IR "help mode"
+has been enabled via the
+.BR H
+command) to standard output and shall continue in command mode with the
+current line number unchanged.
+.SS "Append Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(.)a
+<\fItext\fR>
+\&.
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR a
+command shall read the given text and append it after the addressed
+line; the current line number shall become the address of the last
+inserted line or, if there were none, the addressed line. Address 0
+shall be valid for this command; it shall cause the appended text to be
+placed at the beginning of the buffer.
+.SS "Change Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(.,.)c
+<\fItext\fR>
+\&.
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR c
+command shall delete the addressed lines, then accept input text that
+replaces these lines; the current line shall be set to the address of
+the last line input; or, if there were none, at the line after the last
+line deleted; if the lines deleted were originally at the end of the
+buffer, the current line number shall be set to the address of the new
+last line; if no lines remain in the buffer, the current line number
+shall be set to zero. Address 0 shall be valid for this command; it
+shall be interpreted as if address 1 were specified.
+.SS "Delete Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(.,.)d
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR d
+command shall delete the addressed lines from the buffer. The address
+of the line after the last line deleted shall become the current line
+number; if the lines deleted were originally at the end of the buffer,
+the current line number shall be set to the address of the new last
+line; if no lines remain in the buffer, the current line number shall
+be set to zero.
+.SS "Edit Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+e \fB[\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR e
+command shall delete the entire contents of the buffer and then read in
+the file named by the pathname
+.IR file .
+The current line number shall be set to the address of the last line of
+the buffer. If no pathname is given, the currently remembered pathname,
+if any, shall be used (see the
+.BR f
+command). The number of bytes read shall be written to standard output,
+unless the
+.BR \(mis
+option was specified, in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d\en", <\fInumber of bytes read\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The name \fIfile\fR shall be remembered for possible use as a default
+pathname in subsequent
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR r ,
+and
+.BR w
+commands. If
+.IR file
+is replaced by
+.BR '!' ,
+the rest of the line shall be taken to be a shell command line whose
+output is to be read. Such a shell command line shall not be remembered
+as the current
+.IR file .
+All marks shall be discarded upon the completion of a successful
+.BR e
+command. If the buffer has changed since the last time the entire
+buffer was written, the user shall be warned, as described previously.
+.SS "Edit Without Checking Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+E \fB[\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR E
+command shall possess all properties and restrictions of the
+.BR e
+command except that the editor shall not check to see whether any
+changes have been made to the buffer since the last
+.BR w
+command.
+.SS "Filename Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+f \fB[\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.IR file
+is given, the
+.BR f
+command shall change the currently remembered pathname to
+.IR file ;
+whether the name is changed or not, it shall then write the (possibly
+new) currently remembered pathname to the standard output in the
+following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIpathname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The current line number shall be unchanged.
+.SS "Global Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(1,$)g/\fIRE\fR/\fIcommand list\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+In the
+.BR g
+command, the first step shall be to mark every line for which the
+line excluding the terminating
+<newline>
+matches the given RE. Then, going sequentially from the beginning of
+the file to the end of the file, the given
+.IR "command list"
+shall be executed for each marked line, with the current line number
+set to the address of that line. Any line modified by the
+.IR "command list"
+shall be unmarked. When the
+.BR g
+command completes, the current line number shall have the value
+assigned by the last command in the
+.IR "command list" .
+If there were no matching lines, the current line number shall not be
+changed. A single command or the first of a list of commands shall
+appear on the same line as the global command. All lines of a
+multi-line list except the last line shall be ended with a
+<backslash>
+preceding the terminating
+<newline>;
+the
+.BR a ,
+.BR i ,
+and
+.BR c
+commands and associated input are permitted. The
+.BR '.' 
+terminating input mode can be omitted if it would be the last line of
+the \fIcommand list\fR. An empty \fIcommand list\fR shall be equivalent
+to the
+.BR p
+command. The use of the
+.BR g ,
+.BR G ,
+.BR v ,
+.BR V ,
+and
+.BR !
+commands in the
+.IR "command list"
+produces undefined results. Any character other than
+<space>
+or
+<newline>
+can be used instead of a
+<slash>
+to delimit the RE. Within the RE, the RE delimiter itself can be used
+as a literal character if it is preceded by a
+<backslash>.
+.SS "Interactive Global Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(1,$)G/\fIRE\fR/
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+In the
+.BR G
+command, the first step shall be to mark every line for which the line
+excluding the terminating
+<newline>
+matches the given RE. Then, for every such line, that line shall be
+written, the current line number shall be set to the address of that
+line, and any one command (other than one of the
+.BR a ,
+.BR c ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR g ,
+.BR G ,
+.BR v ,
+and
+.BR V
+commands) shall be read and executed. A
+<newline>
+shall act as a null command (causing no action to be taken on
+the current line); an
+.BR '&' 
+shall cause the re-execution of the most recent non-null command
+executed within the current invocation of
+.BR G .
+Note that the commands input as part of the execution of the
+.BR G
+command can address and affect any lines in the buffer. Any line
+modified by the command shall be unmarked. The final value
+of the current line number shall be the value set by the last command
+successfully executed. (Note that the last command successfully
+executed shall be the
+.BR G
+command itself if a command fails or the null command is specified.) If
+there were no matching lines, the current line number shall not be
+changed. The
+.BR G
+command can be terminated by a SIGINT signal. Any character other than
+<space>
+or
+<newline>
+can be used instead of a
+<slash>
+to delimit the RE and the replacement. Within the RE, the RE delimiter
+itself can be used as a literal character if it is preceded by a
+<backslash>.
+.SS "Help Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+h
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR h
+command shall write a short message to standard output that explains
+the reason for the most recent
+.BR '?' 
+notification. The current line number shall be unchanged.
+.SS "Help-Mode Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+H
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR H
+command shall cause
+.IR ed
+to enter a mode in which help messages (see the
+.BR h
+command) shall be written to standard output for all subsequent
+.BR '?' 
+notifications. The
+.BR H
+command alternately shall turn this mode on and off; it is initially
+off. If the help-mode is being turned on, the
+.BR H
+command also explains the previous
+.BR '?' 
+notification, if there was one. The current line number shall be
+unchanged.
+.SS "Insert Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(.)i
+<\fItext\fR>
+\&.
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR i
+command shall insert the given text before the addressed line; the
+current line is set to the last inserted line or, if there was none, to
+the addressed line. This command differs from the
+.BR a
+command only in the placement of the input text. Address 0 shall be
+valid for this command; it shall be interpreted as if address 1 were
+specified.
+.SS "Join Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(.,.+1)j
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR j
+command shall join contiguous lines by removing the appropriate
+<newline>
+characters. If exactly one address is given, this command shall do
+nothing. If lines are joined, the current line number shall be set to
+the address of the joined line; otherwise, the current line number shall
+be unchanged.
+.SS "Mark Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(.)k\fIx\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR k
+command shall mark the addressed line with name
+.IR x ,
+which the application shall ensure is a lowercase letter from the
+portable character set. The address
+.BR \(dq'x\(dq 
+shall then refer to this line; the current line number shall be
+unchanged.
+.SS "List Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(.,.)l
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR l
+command shall write to standard output the addressed lines in a
+visually unambiguous form. The characters listed in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Table 5-1" ", " "Escape Sequences and Associated Actions"
+(\c
+.BR '\e\e' ,
+.BR '\ea' ,
+.BR '\eb' ,
+.BR '\ef' ,
+.BR '\er' ,
+.BR '\et' ,
+.BR '\ev' )
+shall be written as the corresponding escape sequence; the
+.BR '\en' 
+in that table is not applicable. Non-printable characters not in the
+table shall be written as one three-digit octal number (with a
+preceding
+<backslash>
+character) for each byte in the character (most significant byte first).
+.P
+Long lines shall be folded, with the point of folding indicated by
+<newline>
+preceded by a
+<backslash>;
+the length at which folding occurs is unspecified, but should be
+appropriate for the output device. The end of each line shall be marked
+with a
+.BR '$' ,
+and
+.BR '$' 
+characters within the text shall be written with a preceding
+<backslash>.
+An
+.BR l
+command can be appended to any other command other than
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR q ,
+.BR Q ,
+.BR r ,
+.BR w ,
+or
+.BR ! .
+The current line number shall be set to the address of the last line
+written.
+.SS "Move Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(.,.)m\fIaddress\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR m
+command shall reposition the addressed lines after the line addressed
+by
+.IR address .
+Address 0 shall be valid for
+.IR address
+and cause the addressed lines to be moved to the beginning of the
+buffer. It shall be an error if address
+.IR address
+falls within the range of moved lines. The current line number shall be
+set to the address of the last line moved.
+.SS "Number Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(.,.)n
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR n
+command shall write to standard output the addressed lines, preceding
+each line by its line number and a
+<tab>;
+the current line number shall be set to the address of the last line
+written. The
+.BR n
+command can be appended to any command other than
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR q ,
+.BR Q ,
+.BR r ,
+.BR w ,
+or
+.BR ! .
+.SS "Print Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(.,.)p
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR p
+command shall write to standard output the addressed lines; the current
+line number shall be set to the address of the last line written. The
+.BR p
+command can be appended to any command other than
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR q ,
+.BR Q ,
+.BR r ,
+.BR w ,
+or
+.BR ! .
+.SS "Prompt Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+P
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR P
+command shall cause
+.IR ed
+to prompt with an
+<asterisk>
+(\c
+.BR '*' )
+(or
+.IR string ,
+if
+.BR \(mip
+is specified) for all subsequent commands. The
+.BR P
+command alternatively shall turn this mode on and off; it shall be
+initially on if the
+.BR \(mip
+option is specified; otherwise, off. The current line number shall be
+unchanged.
+.SS "Quit Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+q
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR q
+command shall cause
+.IR ed
+to exit. If the buffer has changed since the last time the entire
+buffer was written, the user shall be warned, as described previously.
+.SS "Quit Without Checking Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+Q
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR Q
+command shall cause
+.IR ed
+to exit without checking whether changes have been made in the buffer
+since the last
+.BR w
+command.
+.SS "Read Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+($)r\fB [\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR r
+command shall read in the file named by the pathname
+.IR file
+and append it after the addressed line. If no
+.IR file
+argument is given, the currently remembered pathname, if any, shall be
+used (see the
+.BR e
+and
+.BR f
+commands). The currently remembered pathname shall not be changed
+unless there is no remembered pathname. Address 0 shall be valid for
+.BR r
+and shall cause the file to be read at the beginning of the buffer. If
+the read is successful, and
+.BR \(mis
+was not specified, the number of bytes read shall be written to
+standard output in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d\en", <\fInumber of bytes read\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The current line number shall be set to the address of the last line
+read in. If
+.IR file
+is replaced by
+.BR '!' ,
+the rest of the line shall be taken to be a shell command line whose
+output is to be read. Such a shell command line shall not be remembered
+as the current pathname.
+.SS "Substitute Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(.,.)s/\fIRE\fR/\fIreplacement\fR/\fIflags\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR s
+command shall search each addressed line for an occurrence of the
+specified RE and replace either the first or all (non-overlapped)
+matched strings with the
+.IR replacement ;
+see the following description of the
+.BR g
+suffix. It is an error if the substitution fails on every addressed
+line. Any character other than
+<space>
+or
+<newline>
+can be used instead of a
+<slash>
+to delimit the RE and the replacement. Within the RE, the RE delimiter
+itself can be used as a literal character if it is preceded by a
+<backslash>.
+The current line shall be set to the address of the last line on which
+a substitution occurred.
+.P
+An
+<ampersand>
+(\c
+.BR '&' )
+appearing in the
+.IR replacement
+shall be replaced by the string matching the RE on the current line.
+The special meaning of
+.BR '&' 
+in this context can be suppressed by preceding it by
+<backslash>.
+As a more general feature, the characters
+.BR '\en' ,
+where
+.IR n
+is a digit, shall be replaced by the text matched by the corresponding
+back-reference expression. If the corresponding back-reference
+expression does not match, then the characters
+.BR '\en' 
+shall be replaced by the empty string. When the character
+.BR '%' 
+is the only character in the
+.IR replacement ,
+the
+.IR replacement
+used in the most recent substitute command shall be used as the
+.IR replacement
+in the current substitute command; if there was no previous substitute
+command, the use of
+.BR '%' 
+in this manner shall be an error. The
+.BR '%' 
+shall lose its special meaning when it is in a replacement string of
+more than one character or is preceded by a
+<backslash>.
+For each
+<backslash>
+encountered in scanning
+.IR replacement
+from beginning to end, the following character shall lose its special
+meaning (if any). It is unspecified what special meaning is given to
+any character other than
+<backslash>,
+.BR '&' ,
+.BR '%' ,
+or digits.
+.P
+A line can be split by substituting a
+<newline>
+into it. The application shall ensure it escapes the
+<newline>
+in the
+.IR replacement
+by preceding it by
+<backslash>.
+Such substitution cannot be done as part of a
+.BR g
+or
+.BR v
+.IR "command list" .
+The current line number shall be set to the address of the last line on
+which a substitution is performed. If no substitution is performed, the
+current line number shall be unchanged. If a line is split, a
+substitution shall be considered to have been performed on each of the
+new lines for the purpose of determining the new current line number. A
+substitution shall be considered to have been performed even if the
+replacement string is identical to the string that it replaces.
+.P
+The application shall ensure that the value of
+.IR flags
+is zero or more of:
+.IP "\fIcount\fR" 8
+Substitute for the
+.IR count th
+occurrence only of the RE found on each addressed line.
+.IP "\fBg\fR" 8
+Globally substitute for all non-overlapping instances of the RE rather
+than just the first one. If both
+.BR g
+and
+.IR count
+are specified, the results are unspecified.
+.IP "\fBl\fR" 8
+Write to standard output the final line in which a substitution was
+made. The line shall be written in the format specified for the
+.BR l
+command.
+.IP "\fBn\fR" 8
+Write to standard output the final line in which a substitution was
+made. The line shall be written in the format specified for the
+.BR n
+command.
+.IP "\fBp\fR" 8
+Write to standard output the final line in which a substitution was
+made. The line shall be written in the format specified for the
+.BR p
+command.
+.SS "Copy Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(.,.)t\fIaddress\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR t
+command shall be equivalent to the
+.BR m
+command, except that a copy of the addressed lines shall be placed
+after address
+.IR address
+(which can be 0); the current line number shall be set to the address
+of the last line added.
+.SS "Undo Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+u
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR u
+command shall nullify the effect of the most recent command that
+modified anything in the buffer, namely the most recent
+.BR a ,
+.BR c ,
+.BR d ,
+.BR g ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR j ,
+.BR m ,
+.BR r ,
+.BR s ,
+.BR t ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR v ,
+.BR G ,
+or
+.BR V
+command. All changes made to the buffer by a
+.BR g ,
+.BR G ,
+.BR v ,
+or
+.BR V
+global command shall be undone as a single change; if no changes were
+made by the global command (such as with
+.BR g /RE/\c
+.BR p ),
+the
+.BR u
+command shall have no effect. The current line number shall be set to
+the value it had immediately before the command being undone started.
+.SS "Global Non-Matched Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(1,$)v\fR/\fIRE\fR/\fIcommand list\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+This command shall be equivalent to the global command
+.BR g
+except that the lines that are marked during the first step shall be
+those for which the line excluding the terminating
+<newline>
+does not match the RE.
+.SS "Interactive Global Not-Matched Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(1,$)V\fR/\fIRE\fR/
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+This command shall be equivalent to the interactive global command
+.BR G
+except that the lines that are marked during the first step shall be
+those for which the line excluding the terminating
+<newline>
+does not match the RE.
+.SS "Write Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(1,$)w\fB [\fIfile\fB]
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR w
+command shall write the addressed lines into the file named by the
+pathname
+.IR file .
+The command shall create the file, if it does not exist, or shall
+replace the contents of the existing file. The currently remembered
+pathname shall not be changed unless there is no remembered pathname.
+If no pathname is given, the currently remembered pathname, if any,
+shall be used (see the
+.BR e
+and
+.BR f
+commands); the current line number shall be unchanged. If the command
+is successful, the number of bytes written shall be written to standard
+output, unless the
+.BR \(mis
+option was specified, in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d\en", <\fInumber of bytes written\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.IR file
+begins with
+.BR '!' ,
+the rest of the line shall be taken to be a shell command line whose
+standard input shall be the addressed lines. Such a shell command line
+shall not be remembered as the current pathname. This usage of the
+write command with
+.BR '!' 
+shall not be considered as a ``last
+.BR w
+command that wrote the entire buffer'', as described previously; thus,
+this alone shall not prevent the warning to the user if an attempt is
+made to destroy the editor buffer via the
+.BR e
+or
+.BR q
+commands.
+.SS "Line Number Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+($)=
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The line number of the addressed line shall be written to standard
+output in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d\en", <\fIline number\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The current line number shall be unchanged by this command.
+.SS "Shell Escape Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+!\fIcommand\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The remainder of the line after the
+.BR '!' 
+shall be sent to the command interpreter to be interpreted as a shell
+command line. Within the text of that shell command line, the unescaped
+character
+.BR '%' 
+shall be replaced with the remembered pathname; if a
+.BR '!' 
+appears as the first character of the command, it shall be replaced
+with the text of the previous shell command executed via
+.BR '!' .
+Thus,
+.BR \(dq!!\(dq 
+shall repeat the previous !\fIcommand\fP. If any replacements of
+.BR '%' 
+or
+.BR '!' 
+are performed, the modified line shall be written to the standard
+output before
+.IR command
+is executed. The
+.BR !
+command shall write:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"!\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+to standard output upon completion, unless the
+.BR \(mis
+option is specified. The current line number shall be unchanged.
+.SS "Null Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(.+1)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+An address alone on a line shall cause the addressed line to be
+written. A
+<newline>
+alone shall be equivalent to
+.BR \(dq+1p\(dq .
+The current line number shall be set to the address of the written
+line.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion without any file or command errors.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+When an error in the input script is encountered, or when an error is
+detected that is a consequence of the data (not) present in the file or
+due to an external condition such as a read or write error:
+.IP " *" 4
+If the standard input is a terminal device file, all input shall be
+flushed, and a new command read.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the standard input is a regular file,
+.IR ed
+shall terminate with a non-zero exit status.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Because of the extremely terse nature of the default error messages,
+the prudent script writer begins the
+.IR ed
+input commands with an
+.BR H
+command, so that if any errors do occur at least some clue as to the
+cause is made available.
+.P
+In earlier versions of this standard, an obsolescent
+.BR \(mi
+option was described. This is no longer specified. Applications should
+use the
+.BR \(mis
+option. Using
+.BR \(mi
+as a
+.IR file
+operand now produces unspecified results. This allows implementations
+to continue to support the former required behavior.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The initial description of this utility was adapted from the SVID. It
+contains some features not found in Version 7 or BSD-derived systems.
+Some of the differences between the POSIX and BSD
+.IR ed
+utilities include, but need not be limited to:
+.IP " *" 4
+The BSD
+.BR \(mi
+option does not suppress the
+.BR '!' 
+prompt after a
+.BR !
+command.
+.IP " *" 4
+BSD does not support the special meanings of the
+.BR '%' 
+and
+.BR '!' 
+characters within a
+.BR !
+command.
+.IP " *" 4
+BSD does not support the
+.IR addresses
+.BR ';' 
+and
+.BR ',' .
+.IP " *" 4
+BSD allows the command/suffix pairs
+.BR pp ,
+.BR ll ,
+and so on, which are unspecified in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.IP " *" 4
+BSD does not support the
+.BR '!' 
+character part of the
+.BR e ,
+.BR r ,
+or
+.BR w
+commands.
+.IP " *" 4
+A failed
+.BR g
+command in BSD sets the line number to the last line searched if there
+are no matches.
+.IP " *" 4
+BSD does not default the
+.IR "command list"
+to the
+.BR p
+command.
+.IP " *" 4
+BSD does not support the
+.BR G ,
+.BR h ,
+.BR H ,
+.BR n ,
+or
+.BR V
+commands.
+.IP " *" 4
+On BSD, if there is no inserted text, the insert command changes the
+current line to the referenced line \(mi1; that is, the line before the
+specified line.
+.IP " *" 4
+On BSD, the
+.IR join
+command with only a single address changes the current line to that
+address.
+.IP " *" 4
+BSD does not support the
+.BR P
+command; moreover, in BSD it is synonymous with the
+.BR p
+command.
+.IP " *" 4
+BSD does not support the
+.IR undo
+of the commands
+.BR j ,
+.BR m ,
+.BR r ,
+.BR s ,
+or
+.BR t .
+.IP " *" 4
+The Version 7
+.IR ed
+command
+.BR W ,
+and the BSD
+.IR ed
+commands
+.BR W ,
+.BR wq ,
+and
+.BR z
+are not present in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mis
+option was added to allow the functionality of the removed
+.BR \(mi
+option in a manner compatible with the Utility Syntax Guidelines.
+.P
+In early proposals there was a limit,
+{ED_FILE_MAX},
+that described the historical limitations of some
+.IR ed
+utilities in their handling of large files; some of these have had
+problems with files larger than 100\|000 bytes. It was this limitation
+that prompted much of the desire to include a
+.IR split
+command in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. Since this limit was removed, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that
+implementations document the file size limits imposed by
+.IR ed
+in the conformance document. The limit
+{ED_LINE_MAX}
+was also removed; therefore, the global limit
+{LINE_MAX}
+is used for input and output lines.
+.P
+The manner in which the
+.BR l
+command writes non-printable characters was changed to avoid
+the historical backspace-overstrike method. On video display terminals,
+the overstrike is ambiguous because most terminals simply replace
+overstruck characters, making the
+.BR l
+format not useful for its intended purpose of unambiguously
+understanding the content of the line. The historical
+<backslash>-escapes
+were also ambiguous. (The string
+.BR \(dqa\e0011\(dq 
+could represent a line containing those six characters or a line
+containing the three characters
+.BR 'a' ,
+a byte with a binary value of 1, and a 1.) In the format required here,
+a
+<backslash>
+appearing in the line is written as
+.BR \(dq\e\e\(dq 
+so that the output is truly unambiguous. The method of marking the ends
+of lines was adopted from the
+.IR ex
+editor and is required for any line ending in
+<space>
+characters; the
+.BR '$' 
+is placed on all lines so that a real
+.BR '$' 
+at the end of a line cannot be misinterpreted.
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard allowed for implementations
+with bytes other than eight bits, but this has been modified in this
+version.
+.P
+The description of how a NUL is written was removed. The NUL character
+cannot be in text files, and this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 should not dictate behavior in the
+case of undefined, erroneous input.
+.P
+Unlike some of the other editing utilities, the filenames accepted by
+the
+.BR E ,
+.BR e ,
+.BR R ,
+and
+.BR r
+commands are not patterns.
+.P
+Early proposals stated that the
+.BR \(mip
+option worked only when standard input was associated with a terminal
+device. This has been changed to conform to historical implementations,
+thereby allowing applications to interpose themselves between a user
+and the
+.IR ed
+utility.
+.P
+The form of the substitute command that uses the
+.BR n
+suffix was limited in some historical documentation (where this was
+described incorrectly as ``backreferencing''). This limit has been
+omitted because there is no reason why an editor processing lines of
+{LINE_MAX}
+length should have this restriction. The command
+.BR "s/x/X/2047"
+should be able to substitute the 2\|047th occurrence of
+.BR 'x' 
+on a line.
+.P
+The use of printing commands with printing suffixes (such as
+.BR pn ,
+.BR lp ,
+and so on) was made unspecified because BSD-based systems allow this,
+whereas System V does not.
+.P
+Some BSD-based systems exit immediately upon receipt of end-of-file if
+all of the lines in the file have been deleted. Since this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 refers
+to the
+.BR q
+command in this instance, such behavior is not allowed.
+.P
+Some historical implementations returned exit status zero even if
+command errors had occurred; this is not allowed by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+Some historical implementations contained a bug that allowed a single
+<period>
+to be entered in input mode as
+<backslash>
+<period>
+<newline>.
+This is not allowed by
+.IR ed
+because there is no description of escaping any of the characters in
+input mode;
+<backslash>
+characters are entered into the buffer exactly as typed. The typical
+method of entering a single
+<period>
+has been to precede it with another character and then use the substitute
+command to delete that character.
+.P
+It is difficult under some modes of some versions of historical
+operating system terminal drivers to distinguish between an end-of-file
+condition and terminal disconnect. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not require
+implementations to distinguish between the two situations, which
+permits historical implementations of the
+.IR ed
+utility on historical platforms to conform. Implementations are
+encouraged to distinguish between the two, if possible, and take
+appropriate action on terminal disconnect.
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR ed
+accepted a zero address for the
+.BR a
+and
+.BR r
+commands in order to insert text at the start of the edit buffer. When
+the buffer was empty the command
+.BR .=
+returned zero. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice.
+.P
+For consistency with the
+.BR a
+and
+.BR r
+commands and better user functionality, the
+.BR i
+and
+.BR c
+commands must also accept an address of 0, in which case 0\fIi\fP is
+treated as 1\fIi\fP and likewise for the
+.BR c
+command.
+.P
+All of the following are valid addresses:
+.IP "\fR+++\fP" 12
+Three lines after the current line.
+.IP "\fR/\fIpattern\fR/\(mi\fR" 12
+One line before the next occurrence of pattern.
+.IP "\fR\(mi2\fR" 12
+Two lines before the current line.
+.IP "\fR3\ \(mi\|\(mi\|\(mi\|\(mi\ 2\fR" 12
+Line one (note the intermediate negative address).
+.IP "\fR1\ 2\ 3\fR" 12
+Line six.
+.P
+Any number of addresses can be provided to commands taking addresses;
+for example,
+.BR \(dq1,2,3,4,5p\(dq 
+prints lines 4 and 5, because two is the greatest valid number of
+addresses accepted by the
+.BR print
+command. This, in combination with the
+<semicolon>
+delimiter, permits users to create commands based on ordered patterns
+in the file. For example, the command
+.BR \(dq3;/foo/;+2p\(dq 
+will display the first line after line 3 that contains the pattern
+.IR foo ,
+plus the next two lines. Note that the address
+.BR \(dq3;\(dq 
+must still be evaluated before being discarded, because the search
+origin for the
+.BR \(dq/foo/\(dq 
+command depends on this.
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR ed
+disallowed address chains, as discussed above, consisting solely of
+<comma>
+or
+<semicolon>
+separators; for example,
+.BR \(dq,,,\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dq;;;\(dq 
+were considered an error. For consistency of address specification,
+this restriction is removed. The following table lists some of the
+address forms now possible:
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB | cB | cB | cB
+lf5 | nf5 | nf5 | l | l.
+Address!Addr1!Addr2!Status!Comment
+_
+7,!7!7!Historical
+7,5,!5!5!Historical
+7,5,9!5!9!Historical
+7,9!7!9!Historical
+7,+!7!8!Historical
+\&,!1!$!Historical
+\&,7!1!7!Extension
+\&,,!$!$!Extension
+\&,;!$!$!Extension
+7;!7!7!Historical
+7;5;!5!5!Historical
+7;5;9!5!9!Historical
+7;5,9!5!9!Historical
+7;$;4!$!4!Historical!Valid, but erroneous.
+7;9!7!9!Historical
+7;+!7!8!Historical
+;!.!$!Historical
+;7!.!7!Extension
+;;!$!$!Extension
+;,!$!$!Extension
+.TE
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR ed
+accepted the
+.BR '^' 
+character as an address, in which case it was identical to the
+<hyphen>
+character. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not require or prohibit this behavior.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 1.4" ", " "Utility Description Defaults",
+.IR "\fIex\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsed\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsh\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIvi\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Table 5-1" ", " "Escape Sequences and Associated Actions",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 9.3" ", " "Basic Regular Expressions",
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/env.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/env.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..14f628e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/env.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,330 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ENV "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+env
+\(em set the environment for command invocation
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+env \fB[\fR\(mii\fB] [\fIname\fR=\fIvalue\fB]\fR... \fB[\fIutility\fB [\fIargument\fR...\fB]]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR env
+utility shall obtain the current environment, modify it according to
+its arguments, then invoke the utility named by the
+.IR utility
+operand with the modified environment.
+.P
+Optional arguments shall be passed to
+.IR utility .
+.P
+If no
+.IR utility
+operand is specified, the resulting environment shall be written to the
+standard output, with one
+.IR name =\c
+.IR value
+pair per line.
+.P
+If the first argument is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the results are unspecified.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR env
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except for the unspecified usage of
+.BR '\(mi' .
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mii\fP" 10
+Invoke
+.IR utility
+with exactly the environment specified by the arguments; the inherited
+environment shall be ignored completely.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIname\fR=\fIvalue\fR" 10
+Arguments of the form
+.IR name =\c
+.IR value
+shall modify the execution environment, and shall be placed into the
+inherited environment before the
+.IR utility
+is invoked.
+.IP "\fIutility\fR" 10
+The name of the utility to be invoked. If the
+.IR utility
+operand names any of the special built-in utilities in
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities",
+the results are undefined.
+.IP "\fIargument\fR" 10
+A string to pass as an argument for the invoked utility.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR env :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fIPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of the
+.IR utility ,
+as described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables".
+If
+.IR PATH
+is specified as a
+.IR name =\c
+.IR value
+operand to
+.IR env ,
+the
+.IR value
+given shall be used in the search for
+.IR utility .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+If no
+.IR utility
+operand is specified, each
+.IR name =\c
+.IR value
+pair in the resulting environment shall be written in the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s=%s\en", <\fIname\fR>, <\fIvalue\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the
+.IR utility
+operand is specified, the
+.IR env
+utility shall not write to standard output.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+If
+.IR utility
+is invoked, the exit status of
+.IR env
+shall be the exit status of
+.IR utility ;
+otherwise, the
+.IR env
+utility shall exit with one of the following values:
+.IP "\0\0\0\00" 8
+The
+.IR env
+utility completed successfully.
+.IP "1\(mi125" 8
+An error occurred in the
+.IR env
+utility.
+.IP "\0\0126" 8
+The utility specified by
+.IR utility
+was found but could not be invoked.
+.IP "\0\0127" 8
+The utility specified by
+.IR utility
+could not be found.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR command ,
+.IR env ,
+.IR nice ,
+.IR nohup ,
+.IR time ,
+and
+.IR xargs
+utilities have been specified to use exit code 127 if an error occurs
+so that applications can distinguish ``failure to find a utility'' from
+``invoked utility exited with an error indication''. The value 127 was
+chosen because it is not commonly used for other meanings; most
+utilities use small values for ``normal error conditions'' and the
+values above 128 can be confused with termination due to receipt of a
+signal. The value 126 was chosen in a similar manner to indicate that
+the utility could be found, but not invoked. Some scripts produce
+meaningful error messages differentiating the 126 and 127 cases. The
+distinction between exit codes 126 and 127 is based on KornShell
+practice that uses 127 when all attempts to
+.IR exec
+the utility fail with
+.BR [ENOENT] ,
+and uses 126 when any attempt to
+.IR exec
+the utility fails for any other reason.
+.P
+Historical implementations of the
+.IR env
+utility use the
+\fIexecvp\fR()
+or
+\fIexeclp\fR()
+functions defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 to invoke the specified utility; this
+provides better performance and keeps users from having to escape
+characters with special meaning to the shell. Therefore, shell
+functions, special built-ins, and built-ins that are only provided by
+the shell are not found.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+env \(mii PATH=/mybin:"$PATH" $(getconf V7_ENV) mygrep xyz myfile
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+invokes the command
+.IR mygrep
+with a new
+.IR PATH
+value as the only entry in its environment other than any variables
+required by the implementation for conformance. In this case,
+.IR PATH
+is used to locate
+.IR mygrep ,
+which is expected to reside in
+.BR /mybin .
+.SH RATIONALE
+As with all other utilities that invoke other utilities, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 only
+specifies what
+.IR env
+does with standard input, standard output, standard error, input files,
+and output files. If a utility is executed, it is not constrained by
+the specification of input and output by
+.IR env .
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mii
+option was added to allow the functionality of the removed
+.BR \(mi
+option in a manner compatible with the Utility Syntax Guidelines. It
+is possible to create a non-conforming environment using the
+.BR \(mii
+option, as it may remove environment variables required by the
+implementation for conformance. The following will preserve these
+environment variables as well as preserve the
+.IR PATH
+for conforming utilities:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+IFS='
+\&'
+# The preceding value should be <space><tab><newline>.
+# Set IFS to its default value.
+.P
+set \(mif
+# disable pathname expansion
+.P
+\eunalias \(mia
+# Unset all possible aliases.
+# Note that unalias is escaped to prevent an alias
+# being used for unalias.
+# This step is not strictly necessary, since aliases are not inherited,
+# and the ENV environment variable is only used by interactive shells,
+# the only way any aliases can exist in a script is if it defines them
+# itself.
+.P
+unset \(mif env getconf
+# Ensure env and getconf are not user functions.
+.P
+env \(mii $(getconf V7_ENV) PATH="$(getconf PATH)" command
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Some have suggested that
+.IR env
+is redundant since the same effect is achieved by:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+name=value ... utility \fB[\fR argument ... \fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The example is equivalent to
+.IR env
+when an environment variable is being added to the environment of the
+command, but not when the environment is being set to the given value.
+The
+.IR env
+utility also writes out the current environment if invoked without
+arguments. There is sufficient functionality beyond what the example
+provides to justify inclusion of
+.IR env .
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities",
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Parameters and Variables"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/eval.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/eval.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7414d5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/eval.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,138 @@
+'\" et
+.TH EVAL "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+eval
+\(em construct command by concatenating arguments
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+eval \fB[\fIargument\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR eval
+utility shall construct a command by concatenating
+.IR argument s
+together, separating each with a
+<space>
+character.
+The constructed command shall be read and executed by the shell.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+None.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+If there are no
+.IR argument s,
+or only null
+.IR argument s,
+.IR eval
+shall return a zero exit status; otherwise, it shall return the exit
+status of the command defined by the string of concatenated
+.IR argument s
+separated by
+<space>
+characters, or a non-zero exit status if the concatenation could not
+be parsed as a command and the shell is interactive (and therefore did
+not abort).
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since
+.IR eval
+is not required to recognize the
+.BR \(dq--\(dq 
+end of options delimiter, in cases where the argument(s) to
+.IR eval
+might begin with
+.BR '-' 
+it is recommended that the first argument is prefixed by a string that
+will not alter the commands to be executed, such as a
+<space>
+character:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+eval " $commands"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+or:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+eval " $(some_command)"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.LP
+.nf
+foo=10 x=foo
+y='$'$x
+echo $y
+\fB$foo\fR
+eval y='$'$x
+echo $y
+\fB10\fR
+.fi
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+This standard allows, but does not require,
+.IR eval
+to recognize
+.BR \(dq--\(dq .
+Although this means applications cannot use
+.BR \(dq--\(dq 
+to protect against options supported as an extension (or errors reported
+for unsupported options), the nature of the
+.IR eval
+utility is such that other means can be used to provide this protection
+(see APPLICATION USAGE above).
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ex.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ex.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a3be3e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ex.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,9025 @@
+'\" et
+.TH EX "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ex
+\(em text editor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+ex \fB[\fR\(mirR\fB] [\fR\(mis|\(miv\fB] [\fR\(mic \fIcommand\fB] [\fR\(mit \fItagstring\fB] [\fR\(miw \fIsize\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR ex
+utility is a line-oriented text editor. There are two other modes of
+the editor\(emopen and visual\(emin which screen-oriented editing is
+available. This is described more fully by the
+.IR ex
+.BR open
+and
+.BR visual
+commands and in
+.IR "\fIvi\fR\^".
+.P
+If an operand is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the results are unspecified.
+.P
+This section uses the term
+.IR "edit buffer"
+to describe the current working text. No specific implementation is
+implied by this term. All editing changes are performed on the edit
+buffer, and no changes to it shall affect any file until an editor
+command writes the file.
+.P
+Certain terminals do not have all the capabilities necessary to support
+the complete
+.IR ex
+definition, such as the full-screen editing commands (\c
+.IR "visual mode"
+or
+.IR "open mode" ).
+When these commands cannot be supported on such terminals, this
+condition shall not produce an error message such as ``not an editor
+command'' or report a syntax error. The implementation may either
+accept the commands and produce results on the screen that are the
+result of an unsuccessful attempt to meet the requirements of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 or
+report an error describing the terminal-related deficiency.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR ex
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except for the unspecified usage of
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+and that
+.BR '\(pl' 
+may be recognized as an option delimiter as well as
+.BR '\(mi' .
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mic\ \fIcommand\fR" 10
+Specify an initial command to be executed in the first edit buffer
+loaded from an existing file (see the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section).
+Implementations may support more than a single
+.BR \(mic
+option. In such implementations, the specified commands shall be
+executed in the order specified on the command line.
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+Recover the named files (see the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section).
+Recovery information for a file shall be saved during an editor or
+system crash (for example, when the editor is terminated by a signal
+which the editor can catch), or after the use of an
+.IR ex
+.BR preserve
+command.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+A
+.IR crash
+in this context is an unexpected failure of the system or utility that
+requires restarting the failed system or utility. A system crash
+implies that any utilities running at the time also crash. In the case
+of an editor or system crash, the number of changes to the edit buffer
+(since the most recent
+.BR preserve
+command) that will be recovered is unspecified.
+.P
+If no
+.IR file
+operands are given and the
+.BR \(mit
+option is not specified, all other options, the
+.IR EXINIT
+variable, and any
+.BR .exrc
+files shall be ignored; a list of all recoverable files available to
+the invoking user shall be written, and the editor shall exit normally
+without further action.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miR\fP" 10
+Set
+.BR readonly
+edit option.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Prepare
+.IR ex
+for batch use by taking the following actions:
+.RS 10 
+.IP " *" 4
+Suppress writing prompts and informational (but not diagnostic)
+messages.
+.IP " *" 4
+Ignore the value of
+.IR TERM
+and any implementation default terminal type and assume the terminal is
+a type incapable of supporting open or visual modes; see the
+.BR visual
+command and the description of
+.IR "\fIvi\fR\^".
+.IP " *" 4
+Suppress the use of the
+.IR EXINIT
+environment variable and the reading of any
+.BR .exrc
+file; see the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.IP " *" 4
+Suppress autoindentation, ignoring the value of the
+.BR autoindent
+edit option.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mit\ \fItagstring\fR" 10
+Edit the file containing the specified
+.IR tagstring ;
+see
+.IR "\fIctags\fR\^".
+The tags feature represented by
+.BR \(mit
+.IR tagstring
+and the
+.BR tag
+command is optional. It shall be provided on any system that also
+provides a conforming implementation of
+.IR ctags ;
+otherwise, the use of
+.BR \(mit
+produces undefined results. On any system, it shall be an error to
+specify more than a single
+.BR \(mit
+option.
+.IP "\fB\(miv\fP" 10
+Begin in visual mode (see
+.IR "\fIvi\fR\^").
+.IP "\fB\(miw\ \fIsize\fR" 10
+Set the value of the
+.IR window
+editor option to
+.IR size .
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file to be edited.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input consists of a series of commands and input text, as
+described in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section. The implementation may
+limit each line of standard input to a length of
+{LINE_MAX}.
+.P
+If the standard input is not a terminal device, it shall be as if the
+.BR \(mis
+option had been specified.
+.P
+If a read from the standard input returns an error, or if the editor
+detects an end-of-file condition from the standard input, it shall be
+equivalent to a SIGHUP asynchronous event.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+Input files shall be text files or files that would be text files
+except for an incomplete last line that is not longer than
+{LINE_MAX}\(mi1
+bytes in length and contains no NUL characters. By default, any
+incomplete last line shall be treated as if it had a trailing
+<newline>.
+The editing of other forms of files may optionally be allowed by
+.IR ex
+implementations.
+.P
+The
+.BR .exrc
+files and source files shall be text files consisting of
+.IR ex
+commands; see the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.P
+By default, the editor shall read lines from the files to be edited
+without interpreting any of those lines as any form of editor command.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR ex :
+.IP "\fICOLUMNS\fP" 10
+Override the system-selected horizontal screen size. See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+for valid values and results when it is unset or null.
+.IP "\fIEXINIT\fP" 10
+Determine a list of
+.IR ex
+commands that are executed on editor start-up. See the EXTENDED
+DESCRIPTION section for more details of the initialization phase.
+.IP "\fIHOME\fP" 10
+Determine a pathname of a directory that shall be searched for an
+editor start-up file named
+.BR .exrc ;
+see the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, equivalence classes,
+and multi-character collating elements within regular expressions.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files), the behavior of
+character classes within regular expressions, the classification of
+characters as uppercase or lowercase letters, the case conversion of
+letters, and the detection of word boundaries.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILINES\fP" 10
+Override the system-selected vertical screen size, used as the number
+of lines in a screenful and the vertical screen size in visual mode.
+See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+for valid values and results when it is unset or null.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fIPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the search path for the shell command specified in the
+.IR ex
+editor commands
+.BR ! ,
+.BR shell ,
+.BR read ,
+and
+.BR write ,
+and the open and visual mode command
+.BR ! ;
+see the description of command search and execution in
+.IR "Section 2.9.1.1" ", " "Command Search and Execution".
+.IP "\fISHELL\fP" 10
+Determine the preferred command line interpreter for use as the default
+value of the
+.BR shell
+edit option.
+.IP "\fITERM\fP" 10
+Determine the name of the terminal type. If this variable is unset or
+null, an unspecified default terminal type shall be used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+The following term is used in this and following sections to specify
+command and asynchronous event actions:
+.IP "\fIcomplete\ write\fP" 10
+.br
+A complete write is a write of the entire contents of the edit buffer
+to a file of a type other than a terminal device, or the saving of the
+edit buffer caused by the user executing the
+.IR ex
+.BR preserve
+command. Writing the contents of the edit buffer to a temporary file
+that will be removed when the editor exits shall not be considered a
+complete write.
+.P
+The following actions shall be taken upon receipt of signals:
+.IP SIGINT 10
+If the standard input is not a terminal device,
+.IR ex
+shall not write the file or return to command or text input mode, and
+shall exit with a non-zero exit status.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+Otherwise, if executing an open or visual text input mode command,
+.IR ex
+in receipt of SIGINT shall behave identically to its receipt of the
+<ESC>
+character.
+.P
+Otherwise:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If executing an
+.IR ex
+text input mode command, all input lines that have been completely
+entered shall be resolved into the edit buffer, and any partially
+entered line shall be discarded.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If there is a currently executing command, it shall be aborted and a
+message displayed. Unless otherwise specified by the
+.IR ex
+or
+.IR vi
+command descriptions, it is unspecified whether any lines modified by
+the executing command appear modified, or as they were before being
+modified by the executing command, in the buffer.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+If the currently executing command was a motion command, its associated
+command shall be discarded.
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+If in open or visual command mode, the terminal shall be alerted.
+.IP " 4." 4
+The editor shall then return to command mode.
+.RE
+.IP SIGCONT 10
+The screen shall be refreshed if in open or visual mode.
+.IP SIGHUP 10
+If the edit buffer has been modified since the last complete write,
+.IR ex
+shall attempt to save the edit buffer so that it can be recovered later
+using the
+.BR \(mir
+option or the
+.IR ex
+.BR recover
+command. The editor shall not write the file or return to command or
+text input mode, and shall terminate with a non-zero exit status.
+.IP SIGTERM 10
+Refer to SIGHUP.
+.P
+The action taken for all other signals is unspecified.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall be used only for writing prompts to the user,
+for informational messages, and for writing lines from the file.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+The output from
+.IR ex
+shall be text files.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+Only the
+.IR ex
+mode of the editor is described in this section. See
+.IR "\fIvi\fR\^"
+for additional editing capabilities available in
+.IR ex .
+.P
+When an error occurs,
+.IR ex
+shall write a message. If the terminal supports a standout mode (such
+as inverse video), the message shall be written in standout mode. If
+the terminal does not support a standout mode, and the edit option
+.BR errorbells
+is set, an alert action shall precede the error message.
+.P
+By default,
+.IR ex
+shall start in command mode, which shall be indicated by a
+.BR :
+prompt; see the
+.BR prompt
+command. Text input mode can be entered by the
+.BR append ,
+.BR insert ,
+or
+.BR change
+commands; it can be exited (and command mode re-entered) by typing a
+<period>
+(\c
+.BR '.' )
+alone at the beginning of a line.
+.SS "Initialization in ex and vi"
+.P
+The following symbols are used in this and following sections to
+specify locations in the edit buffer:
+.IP "\fIalternate\ and\ current\ pathnames\fP" 6
+.br
+Two pathnames, named
+.IR current
+and
+.IR alternate ,
+are maintained by the editor. Any
+.IR ex
+commands that take filenames as arguments shall set them as follows:
+.RS 6 
+.IP " 1." 4
+If a
+.IR file
+argument is specified to the
+.IR ex
+.BR edit ,
+.BR ex ,
+or
+.BR recover
+commands, or if an
+.IR ex
+.BR tag
+command replaces the contents of the edit buffer.
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+If the command replaces the contents of the edit buffer, the current
+pathname shall be set to the
+.IR file
+argument or the file indicated by the tag, and the alternate pathname
+shall be set to the previous value of the current pathname.
+.IP " b." 4
+Otherwise, the alternate pathname shall be set to the
+.IR file
+argument.
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+If a
+.IR file
+argument is specified to the
+.IR ex
+.BR next
+command:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+If the command replaces the contents of the edit buffer, the current
+pathname shall be set to the first
+.IR file
+argument, and the alternate pathname shall be set to the previous
+value of the current pathname.
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+If a
+.IR file
+argument is specified to the
+.IR ex
+.BR file
+command, the current pathname shall be set to the
+.IR file
+argument, and the alternate pathname shall be set to the previous
+value of the current pathname.
+.IP " 4." 4
+If a
+.IR file
+argument is specified to the
+.IR ex
+.BR read
+and
+.BR write
+commands (that is, when reading or writing a file, and not to the
+program named by the
+.BR shell
+edit option), or a
+.IR file
+argument is specified to the
+.IR ex
+.BR xit
+command:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+If the current pathname has no value, the current pathname shall be
+set to the
+.IR file
+argument.
+.IP " b." 4
+Otherwise, the alternate pathname shall be set to the
+.IR file
+argument.
+.RE
+.P
+If the alternate pathname is set to the previous value of the current
+pathname when the current pathname had no previous value, then the
+alternate pathname shall have no value as a result.
+.RE
+.IP "\fIcurrent\ line\fP" 6
+.br
+The line of the edit buffer referenced by the cursor. Each command
+description specifies the current line after the command has been
+executed, as the
+.IR "current line value" .
+When the edit buffer contains no lines, the current line shall be zero;
+see
+.IR "Addressing in ex".
+.IP "\fIcurrent\ column\fP" 6
+.br
+The current display line column occupied by the cursor. (The columns
+shall be numbered beginning at 1.) Each command description specifies
+the current column after the command has been executed, as the
+.IR "current column"
+value. This column is an
+.IR ideal
+column that is remembered over the lifetime of the editor. The actual
+display line column upon which the cursor rests may be different from
+the current column; see the cursor positioning discussion in
+.IR "Command Descriptions in vi".
+.IP "\fIset\ to\ non-<blank>\fP" 6
+.br
+A description for a current column value, meaning that the current
+column shall be set to the last display line column on which is
+displayed any part of the first non-\c
+<blank>
+of the line. If the line has no non-\c
+<blank>
+non-\c
+<newline>
+characters, the current column shall be set to the last display line
+column on which is displayed any part of the last non-\c
+<newline>
+character in the line. If the line is empty, the current column shall
+be set to column position 1.
+.P
+The length of lines in the edit buffer may be limited to
+{LINE_MAX}
+bytes. In open and visual mode, the length of lines in the edit buffer
+may be limited to the number of characters that will fit in the
+display. If either limit is exceeded during editing, an error message
+shall be written. If either limit is exceeded by a line read in from a
+file, an error message shall be written and the edit session may be
+terminated.
+.P
+If the editor stops running due to any reason other than a user
+command, and the edit buffer has been modified since the last complete
+write, it shall be equivalent to a SIGHUP asynchronous event. If the
+system crashes, it shall be equivalent to a SIGHUP asynchronous event.
+.P
+During initialization (before the first file is copied into the edit
+buffer or any user commands from the terminal are processed) the
+following shall occur:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the environment variable
+.IR EXINIT
+is set, the editor shall execute the
+.IR ex
+commands contained in that variable.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the
+.IR EXINIT
+variable is not set, and all of the following are true:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+The
+.IR HOME
+environment variable is not null and not empty.
+.IP " b." 4
+The file
+.BR .exrc
+in the directory referred to by the
+.IR HOME
+environment variable:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " i." 5
+Exists
+.IP ii. 5
+Is owned by the same user ID as the real user ID of the process or the
+process has appropriate privileges
+.IP iii. 5
+Is not writable by anyone other than the owner
+.RE
+.P
+the editor shall execute the
+.IR ex
+commands contained in that file.
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+If and only if all of the following are true:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+The current directory is not referred to by the
+.IR HOME
+environment variable.
+.IP " b." 4
+A command in the
+.IR EXINIT
+environment variable or a command in the
+.BR .exrc
+file in the directory referred to by the
+.IR HOME
+environment variable sets the editor option
+.BR exrc .
+.IP " c." 4
+The
+.BR .exrc
+file in the current directory:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " i." 5
+Exists
+.IP ii. 5
+Is owned by the same user ID as the real user ID of the process, or by
+one of a set of implementation-defined user IDs
+.IP iii. 5
+Is not writable by anyone other than the owner
+.RE
+.P
+the editor shall attempt to execute the
+.IR ex
+commands contained in that file.
+.RE
+.P
+Lines in any
+.BR .exrc
+file that are blank lines shall be ignored. If any
+.BR .exrc
+file exists, but is not read for ownership or permission reasons, it
+shall be an error.
+.P
+After the
+.IR EXINIT
+variable and any
+.BR .exrc
+files are processed, the first file specified by the user shall be
+edited, as follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the user specified the
+.BR \(mit
+option, the effect shall be as if the
+.IR ex
+.BR tag
+command was entered with the specified argument, with the exception
+that if tag processing does not result in a file to edit, the effect
+shall be as described in step 3. below.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise, if the user specified any command line
+.IR file
+arguments, the effect shall be as if the
+.IR ex
+.BR edit
+command was entered with the first of those arguments as its
+.IR file
+argument.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Otherwise, the effect shall be as if the
+.IR ex
+.BR edit
+command was entered with a nonexistent filename as its
+.IR file
+argument. It is unspecified whether this action shall set the current
+pathname. In an implementation where this action does not set the
+current pathname, any editor command using the current pathname shall
+fail until an editor command sets the current pathname.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mir
+option was specified, the first time a file in the initial argument
+list or a file specified by the
+.BR \(mit
+option is edited, if recovery information has previously been saved
+about it, that information shall be recovered and the editor shall
+behave as if the contents of the edit buffer have already been
+modified. If there are multiple instances of the file to be recovered,
+the one most recently saved shall be recovered, and an informational
+message that there are previous versions of the file that can be
+recovered shall be written. If no recovery information about a file is
+available, an informational message to this effect shall be written,
+and the edit shall proceed as usual.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mic
+option was specified, the first time a file that already exists
+(including a file that might not exist but for which recovery
+information is available, when the
+.BR \(mir
+option is specified) replaces or initializes the contents of the edit
+buffer, the current line shall be set to the last line of the edit
+buffer, the current column shall be set to non-\c
+<blank>,
+and the
+.IR ex
+commands specified with the
+.BR \(mic
+option shall be executed. In this case, the current line and current
+column shall not be set as described for the command associated with
+the replacement or initialization of the edit buffer contents. However,
+if the
+.BR \(mit
+option or a
+.BR tag
+command is associated with this action, the
+.BR \(mic
+option commands shall be executed and then the movement to the tag
+shall be performed.
+.P
+The current argument list shall initially be set to the filenames
+specified by the user on the command line. If no filenames are
+specified by the user, the current argument list shall be empty. If the
+.BR \(mit
+option was specified, it is unspecified whether any filename resulting
+from tag processing shall be prepended to the current argument list. In
+the case where the filename is added as a prefix to the current
+argument list, the current argument list reference shall be set to that
+filename. In the case where the filename is not added as a prefix to
+the current argument list, the current argument list reference shall
+logically be located before the first of the filenames specified on
+the command line (for example, a subsequent
+.IR ex
+.BR next
+command shall edit the first filename from the command line). If the
+.BR \(mit
+option was not specified, the current argument list reference shall be
+to the first of the filenames on the command line.
+.SS "Addressing in ex"
+.P
+Addressing in
+.IR ex
+relates to the current line and the current column; the address of a
+line is its 1-based line number, the address of a column is its 1-based
+count from the beginning of the line. Generally, the current line is
+the last line affected by a command. The current line number is the
+address of the current line. In each command description, the effect of
+the command on the current line number and the current column is
+described.
+.P
+Addresses are constructed as follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The character
+.BR '.' 
+(period) shall address the current line.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The character
+.BR '$' 
+shall address the last line of the edit buffer.
+.IP " 3." 4
+The positive decimal number
+.IR n
+shall address the
+.IR n th
+line of the edit buffer.
+.IP " 4." 4
+The address
+.BR \(dq'x\(dq 
+refers to the line marked with the mark name character
+.BR 'x' ,
+which shall be a lowercase letter from the portable character set,
+the backquote character, or the single-quote character. It shall be an
+error if the line that was marked is not currently present in the edit
+buffer or the mark has not been set. Lines can be marked with the
+.IR ex
+.BR mark
+or
+.BR k
+commands, or the
+.IR vi
+.BR m
+command.
+.IP " 5." 4
+A regular expression enclosed by
+<slash>
+characters (\c
+.BR '/' )
+shall address the first line found by searching forwards from the line
+following the current line toward the end of the edit buffer and
+stopping at the first line for which the line excluding the terminating
+<newline>
+matches the regular expression. As stated in
+.IR "Regular Expressions in ex",
+an address consisting of a null regular expression delimited by
+<slash>
+characters (\c
+.BR \(dq//\(dq )
+shall address the next line for which the line excluding the
+terminating
+<newline>
+matches the last regular expression encountered. In addition, the second
+<slash>
+can be omitted at the end of a command line. If the
+.BR wrapscan
+edit option is set, the search shall wrap around to the beginning of
+the edit buffer and continue up to and including the current line, so
+that the entire edit buffer is searched. Within the regular expression,
+the sequence
+.BR \(dq\e/\(dq 
+shall represent a literal
+<slash>
+instead of the regular expression delimiter.
+.IP " 6." 4
+A regular expression enclosed in
+<question-mark>
+characters (\c
+.BR '?' )
+shall address the first line found by searching backwards from the line
+preceding the current line toward the beginning of the edit buffer and
+stopping at the first line for which the line excluding the terminating
+<newline>
+matches the regular expression. An address consisting of a null regular
+expression delimited by
+<question-mark>
+characters (\c
+.BR \(dq??\(dq )
+shall address the previous line for which the line excluding the
+terminating
+<newline>
+matches the last regular expression encountered. In addition, the second
+<question-mark>
+can be omitted at the end of a command line. If the
+.BR wrapscan
+edit option is set, the search shall wrap around from the beginning of
+the edit buffer to the end of the edit buffer and continue up to and
+including the current line, so that the entire edit buffer is
+searched. Within the regular expression, the sequence
+.BR \(dq\e?\(dq 
+shall represent a literal
+<question-mark>
+instead of the RE delimiter.
+.IP " 7." 4
+A
+<plus-sign>
+(\c
+.BR '\(pl' )
+or a minus-sign (\c
+.BR '\(mi' )
+followed by a decimal number shall address the current line plus or
+minus the number. A
+.BR '\(pl' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+not followed by a decimal number shall address the current line plus or
+minus 1.
+.P
+Addresses can be followed by zero or more address offsets, optionally
+<blank>-separated.
+Address offsets are constructed as follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+A
+.BR '\(pl' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+immediately followed by a decimal number shall add (subtract) the
+indicated number of lines to (from) the address. A
+.BR '\(pl' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+not followed by a decimal number shall add (subtract) 1 to (from) the
+address.
+.IP " 2." 4
+A decimal number shall add the indicated number of lines to the
+address.
+.P
+It shall not be an error for an intermediate address value to be less
+than zero or greater than the last line in the edit buffer. It shall be
+an error for the final address value to be less than zero or greater
+than the last line in the edit buffer.
+.P
+Commands take zero, one, or two addresses; see the descriptions of
+.IR 1addr
+and
+.IR 2addr
+in
+.IR "Command Descriptions in ex".
+If more than the required number of addresses are provided to a command
+that requires zero addresses, it shall be an error. Otherwise, if more
+than the required number of addresses are provided to a command, the
+addresses specified first shall be evaluated and then discarded until
+the maximum number of valid addresses remain.
+.P
+Addresses shall be separated from each other by a
+<comma>
+(\c
+.BR ',' )
+or a
+<semicolon>
+(\c
+.BR ';' ).
+If no address is specified before or after a
+<comma>
+or
+<semicolon>
+separator, it shall be as if the address of the current line was
+specified before or after the separator. In the case of a
+<semicolon>
+separator, the current line (\c
+.BR '.' )
+shall be set to the first address, and only then will the next address
+be calculated. This feature can be used to determine the starting line
+for forwards and backwards searches (see rules 5. and 6.).
+.P
+A
+<percent-sign>
+(\c
+.BR '%' )
+shall be equivalent to entering the two addresses
+.BR \(dq1,$\(dq .
+.P
+Any delimiting
+<blank>
+characters between addresses, address separators, or address offsets
+shall be discarded.
+.SS "Command Line Parsing in ex"
+.P
+The following symbol is used in this and following sections to describe
+parsing behavior:
+.IP "\fIescape\fP" 10
+If a character is referred to as ``\c
+<backslash>-escaped''
+or ``\c
+<control>\(hyV-escaped'',
+it shall mean that the character acquired or lost a special
+meaning by virtue of being preceded, respectively, by a
+<backslash>
+or
+<control>\(hyV
+character. Unless otherwise specified, the escaping character shall be
+discarded at that time and shall not be further considered for any
+purpose.
+.P
+Command-line parsing shall be done in the following steps. For each
+step, characters already evaluated shall be ignored; that is, the
+phrase ``leading character'' refers to the next character that has not
+yet been evaluated.
+.IP " 1." 4
+Leading
+<colon>
+characters shall be skipped.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Leading
+<blank>
+characters shall be skipped.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If the leading character is a double-quote character, the characters up
+to and including the next non-\c
+<backslash>-escaped
+<newline>
+shall be discarded, and any subsequent characters shall be parsed as a
+separate command.
+.IP " 4." 4
+Leading characters that can be interpreted as addresses shall be
+evaluated; see
+.IR "Addressing in ex".
+.IP " 5." 4
+Leading
+<blank>
+characters shall be skipped.
+.IP " 6." 4
+If the next character is a
+<vertical-line>
+character or a
+<newline>:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+If the next character is a
+<newline>:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " i." 5
+If
+.IR ex
+is in open or visual mode, the current line shall be set to the last
+address specified, if any.
+.IP ii. 5
+Otherwise, if the last command was terminated by a
+<vertical-line>
+character, no action shall be taken; for example, the command
+.BR \(dq||<newline>\(dq 
+shall execute two implied commands, not three.
+.IP iii. 5
+Otherwise, step 6.b. shall apply.
+.RE
+.IP " b." 4
+Otherwise, the implied command shall be the
+.BR print
+command. The last
+.BR # ,
+.BR p ,
+and
+.BR l
+flags specified to any
+.IR ex
+command shall be remembered and shall apply to this implied command.
+Executing the
+.IR ex
+.BR number ,
+.BR print ,
+or
+.BR list
+command shall set the remembered flags to
+.BR # ,
+nothing, and
+.BR l ,
+respectively, plus any other flags specified for that execution of the
+.BR number ,
+.BR print ,
+or
+.BR list
+command.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+If
+.IR ex
+is not currently performing a
+.BR global
+or
+.BR v
+command, and no address or count is specified, the current line shall
+be incremented by 1 before the command is executed. If incrementing the
+current line would result in an address past the last line in the edit
+buffer, the command shall fail, and the increment shall not happen.
+.RE
+.IP " c." 4
+The
+<newline>
+or
+<vertical-line>
+character shall be discarded and any subsequent characters shall be
+parsed as a separate command.
+.RE
+.IP " 7." 4
+The command name shall be comprised of the next character (if the
+character is not alphabetic), or the next character and any subsequent
+alphabetic characters (if the character is alphabetic), with the
+following exceptions:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+Commands that consist of any prefix of the characters in the command
+name
+.BR delete ,
+followed immediately by any of the characters
+.BR 'l' ,
+.BR 'p' ,
+.BR '\(pl' ,
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+or
+.BR '#' 
+shall be interpreted as a
+.BR delete
+command, followed by a
+<blank>,
+followed by the characters that were not part of the prefix of the
+.BR delete
+command. The maximum number of characters shall be matched to the
+command name
+.BR delete ;
+for example,
+.BR \(dqdel\(dq 
+shall not be treated as
+.BR \(dqde\(dq 
+followed by the flag
+.BR l .
+.IP " b." 4
+Commands that consist of the character
+.BR 'k' ,
+followed by a character that can be used as the name of a mark, shall
+be equivalent to the mark command followed by a
+<blank>,
+followed by the character that followed the
+.BR 'k' .
+.IP " c." 4
+Commands that consist of the character
+.BR 's' ,
+followed by characters that could be interpreted as valid options to
+the
+.BR s
+command, shall be the equivalent of the
+.BR s
+command, without any pattern or replacement values, followed by a
+<blank>,
+followed by the characters after the
+.BR 's' .
+.RE
+.IP " 8." 4
+The command name shall be matched against the possible command names,
+and a command name that contains a prefix matching the characters
+specified by the user shall be the executed command. In the case of
+commands where the characters specified by the user could be ambiguous,
+the executed command shall be as follows:
+.TS
+center tab(!) box;
+lB | lB || lB | lB || lB | lB.
+a!append!n!next!t!t
+c!change!p!print!u!undo
+ch!change!pr!print!un!undo
+e!edit!r!read!v!v
+m!move!re!read!w!write
+ma!mark!s!s
+.TE
+.RS 4 
+.P
+Implementation extensions with names causing similar ambiguities shall
+not be checked for a match until all possible matches for commands
+specified by POSIX.1\(hy2008 have been checked.
+.RE
+.IP " 9." 4
+If the command is a
+.BR !
+command, or if the command is a
+.BR read
+command followed by zero or more
+<blank>
+characters and a
+.BR ! ,
+or if the command is a
+.BR write
+command followed by one or more
+<blank>
+characters and a
+.BR ! ,
+the rest of the command shall include all characters up to a non-\c
+<backslash>-escaped
+<newline>.
+The
+<newline>
+shall be discarded and any subsequent characters shall be parsed as a
+separate
+.IR ex
+command.
+.IP 10. 4
+Otherwise, if the command is an
+.BR edit ,
+.BR ex ,
+or
+.BR next
+command, or a
+.BR visual
+command while in open or visual mode, the next part of the command
+shall be parsed as follows:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+Any
+.BR '!' 
+character immediately following the command shall be skipped and be
+part of the command.
+.IP " b." 4
+Any leading
+<blank>
+characters shall be skipped and be part of the command.
+.IP " c." 4
+If the next character is a
+.BR '\(pl' ,
+characters up to the first non-\c
+<backslash>-escaped
+<newline>
+or non-\c
+<backslash>-escaped
+<blank>
+shall be skipped and be part of the command.
+.IP " d." 4
+The rest of the command shall be determined by the steps specified in
+paragraph 12.
+.RE
+.IP 11. 4
+Otherwise, if the command is a
+.BR global ,
+.BR open ,
+.BR s ,
+or
+.BR v
+command, the next part of the command shall be parsed as follows:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+Any leading
+<blank>
+characters shall be skipped and be part of the command.
+.IP " b." 4
+If the next character is not an alphanumeric, double-quote,
+<newline>,
+<backslash>,
+or
+<vertical-line>
+character:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " i." 5
+The next character shall be used as a command delimiter.
+.IP ii. 5
+If the command is a
+.BR global ,
+.BR open ,
+or
+.BR v
+command, characters up to the first non-\c
+<backslash>-escaped
+<newline>,
+or first non-\c
+<backslash>-escaped
+delimiter character, shall be skipped and be part of the command.
+.IP iii. 5
+If the command is an
+.BR s
+command, characters up to the first non-\c
+<backslash>-escaped
+<newline>,
+or second non-\c
+<backslash>-escaped
+delimiter character, shall be skipped and be part of the command.
+.RE
+.IP " c." 4
+If the command is a
+.BR global
+or
+.BR v
+command, characters up to the first non-\c
+<backslash>-escaped
+<newline>
+shall be skipped and be part of the command.
+.IP " d." 4
+Otherwise, the rest of the command shall be determined by the steps
+specified in paragraph 12.
+.RE
+.IP 12. 4
+Otherwise:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+If the command was a
+.BR map ,
+.BR unmap ,
+.BR abbreviate ,
+or
+.BR unabbreviate
+command, characters up to the first non-\c
+<control>\(hyV-escaped
+<newline>,
+<vertical-line>,
+or double-quote character shall be skipped and be part of the command.
+.IP " b." 4
+Otherwise, characters up to the first non-\c
+<backslash>-escaped
+<newline>,
+<vertical-line>,
+or double-quote character shall be skipped and be part of the command.
+.IP " c." 4
+If the command was an
+.BR append ,
+.BR change ,
+or
+.BR insert
+command, and the step 12.b. ended at a
+<vertical-line>
+character, any subsequent characters, up to the next non-\c
+<backslash>-escaped
+<newline>
+shall be used as input text to the command.
+.IP " d." 4
+If the command was ended by a double-quote character, all subsequent
+characters, up to the next non-\c
+<backslash>-escaped
+<newline>,
+shall be discarded.
+.IP " e." 4
+The terminating
+<newline>
+or
+<vertical-line>
+character shall be discarded and any subsequent characters shall be
+parsed as a separate
+.IR ex
+command.
+.RE
+.P
+Command arguments shall be parsed as described by the Synopsis and
+Description of each individual
+.IR ex
+command. This parsing shall not be
+<blank>-sensitive,
+except for the
+.BR !
+argument, which must follow the command name without intervening
+<blank>
+characters, and where it would otherwise be ambiguous. For example,
+.IR count
+and
+.IR flag
+arguments need not be
+<blank>-separated
+because
+.BR \(dqd22p\(dq 
+is not ambiguous, but
+.IR file
+arguments to the
+.IR ex
+.BR next
+command must be separated by one or more
+<blank>
+characters. Any
+<blank>
+in command arguments for the
+.BR abbreviate ,
+.BR unabbreviate ,
+.BR map ,
+and
+.BR unmap
+commands can be
+<control>\(hyV-escaped,
+in which case the
+<blank>
+shall not be used as an argument delimiter. Any
+<blank>
+in the command argument for any other command can be
+<backslash>-escaped,
+in which case that
+<blank>
+shall not be used as an argument delimiter.
+.P
+Within command arguments for the
+.BR abbreviate ,
+.BR unabbreviate ,
+.BR map ,
+and
+.BR unmap
+commands, any character can be
+<control>\(hyV-escaped.
+All such escaped characters shall be treated literally and shall have
+no special meaning. Within command arguments for all other
+.IR ex
+commands that are not regular expressions or replacement strings, any
+character that would otherwise have a special meaning can be
+<backslash>-escaped.
+Escaped characters shall be treated literally, without special meaning
+as shell expansion characters or
+.BR '!' ,
+.BR '%' ,
+and
+.BR '#' 
+expansion characters. See
+.IR "Regular Expressions in ex"
+and
+.IR "Replacement Strings in ex"
+for descriptions of command arguments that are regular expressions or
+replacement strings.
+.P
+Non-\c
+<backslash>-escaped
+.BR '%' 
+characters appearing in
+.IR file
+arguments to any
+.IR ex
+command shall be replaced by the current pathname; unescaped
+.BR '#' 
+characters shall be replaced by the alternate pathname. It shall be an
+error if
+.BR '%' 
+or
+.BR '#' 
+characters appear unescaped in an argument and their corresponding
+values are not set.
+.P
+Non-\c
+<backslash>-escaped
+.BR '!' 
+characters in the arguments to either the
+.IR ex
+.BR !
+command or the open and visual mode
+.BR !
+command, or in the arguments to the
+.IR ex
+.BR read
+command, where the first non-\c
+<blank>
+after the command name is a
+.BR '!' 
+character, or in the arguments to the
+.IR ex
+.BR write
+command where the command name is followed by one or more
+<blank>
+characters and the first non-\c
+<blank>
+after the command name is a
+.BR '!' 
+character, shall be replaced with the arguments to the last of those
+three commands as they appeared after all unescaped
+.BR '%' ,
+.BR '#' ,
+and
+.BR '!' 
+characters were replaced. It shall be an error if
+.BR '!' 
+characters appear unescaped in one of these commands and there has been
+no previous execution of one of these commands.
+.P
+If an error occurs during the parsing or execution of an
+.IR ex
+command:
+.IP " *" 4
+An informational message to this effect shall be written. Execution of
+the
+.IR ex
+command shall stop, and the cursor (for example, the current line and
+column) shall not be further modified.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the
+.IR ex
+command resulted from a map expansion, all characters from that map
+expansion shall be discarded, except as otherwise specified by the
+.BR map
+command.
+.IP " *" 4
+Otherwise, if the
+.IR ex
+command resulted from the processing of an
+.IR EXINIT
+environment variable, a
+.BR .exrc
+file, a
+.BR :source
+command, a
+.BR \(mic
+option, or a
+.BR + \c
+.IR command
+specified to an
+.IR ex
+.BR edit ,
+.BR ex ,
+.BR next ,
+or
+.BR visual
+command, no further commands from the source of the commands shall be
+executed.
+.IP " *" 4
+Otherwise, if the
+.IR ex
+command resulted from the execution of a buffer or a
+.BR global
+or
+.BR v
+command, no further commands caused by the execution of the buffer or
+the
+.BR global
+or
+.BR v
+command shall be executed.
+.IP " *" 4
+Otherwise, if the
+.IR ex
+command was not terminated by a
+<newline>,
+all characters up to and including the next non-\c
+<backslash>-escaped
+<newline>
+shall be discarded.
+.SS "Input Editing in ex"
+.P
+The following symbol is used in this and the following sections to
+specify command actions:
+.IP "\fIword\fP" 10
+In the POSIX locale, a word consists of a maximal sequence of letters,
+digits, and underscores, delimited at both ends by characters other
+than letters, digits, or underscores, or by the beginning or end of a
+line or the edit buffer.
+.P
+When accepting input characters from the user, in either
+.IR ex
+command mode or
+.IR ex
+text input mode,
+.IR ex
+shall enable canonical mode input processing, as defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.br
+.P
+If in
+.IR ex
+text input mode:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the
+.BR number
+edit option is set,
+.IR ex
+shall prompt for input using the line number that would be assigned to
+the line if it is entered, in the format specified for the
+.IR ex
+.BR number
+command.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the
+.BR autoindent
+edit option is set,
+.IR ex
+shall prompt for input using
+.BR autoindent
+characters, as described by the
+.BR autoindent
+edit option.
+.BR autoindent
+characters shall follow the line number, if any.
+.P
+If in
+.IR ex
+command mode:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the
+.BR prompt
+edit option is set, input shall be prompted for using a single
+.BR ':' 
+character; otherwise, there shall be no prompt.
+.P
+The input characters in the following sections shall have the following
+effects on the input line.
+.SS "Scroll"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+eof
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+See the description of the
+.IR stty
+.IR eof
+character in
+.IR "\fIstty\fR\^".
+.P
+If in
+.IR ex
+command mode:
+.sp
+.RS
+If the
+.IR eof
+character is the first character entered on the line, the line shall be
+evaluated as if it contained two characters: a
+<control>\(hyD
+and a
+<newline>.
+.P
+Otherwise, the
+.IR eof
+character shall have no special meaning.
+.RE
+.br
+.P
+If in
+.IR ex
+text input mode:
+.sp
+.RS
+If the cursor follows an
+.BR autoindent
+character, the
+.BR autoindent
+characters in the line shall be modified so that a part of the next
+text input character will be displayed on the first column in the line
+after the previous
+.BR shiftwidth
+edit option column boundary, and the user shall be prompted again for
+input for the same line.
+.P
+Otherwise, if the cursor follows a
+.BR '0' ,
+which follows an
+.BR autoindent
+character, and the
+.BR '0' 
+was the previous text input character, the
+.BR '0' 
+and all
+.BR autoindent
+characters in the line shall be discarded, and the user shall be
+prompted again for input for the same line.
+.P
+Otherwise, if the cursor follows a
+.BR '^' ,
+which follows an
+.BR autoindent
+character, and the
+.BR '^' 
+was the previous text input character, the
+.BR '^' 
+and all
+.BR autoindent
+characters in the line shall be discarded, and the user shall be
+prompted again for input for the same line. In addition, the
+.BR autoindent
+level for the next input line shall be derived from the same line from
+which the
+.BR autoindent
+level for the current input line was derived.
+.P
+Otherwise, if there are no
+.BR autoindent
+or text input characters in the line, the
+.IR eof
+character shall be discarded.
+.P
+Otherwise, the
+.IR eof
+character shall have no special meaning.
+.RE
+.SS "<newline>"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<newline>
+.br
+<control>-J
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If in
+.IR ex
+command mode:
+.sp
+.RS
+Cause the command line to be parsed;
+<control>\(hyJ
+shall be mapped to the
+<newline>
+for this purpose.
+.RE
+.br
+.P
+If in
+.IR ex
+text input mode:
+.sp
+.RS
+Terminate the current line. If there are no characters other than
+.BR autoindent
+characters on the line, all characters on the line shall be discarded.
+.P
+Prompt for text input on a new line after the current line. If the
+.BR autoindent
+edit option is set, an appropriate number of
+.BR autoindent
+characters shall be added as a prefix to the line as described by the
+.IR ex
+.BR autoindent
+edit option.
+.RE
+.SS "<backslash>"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<backslash>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Allow the entry of a subsequent
+<newline>
+or
+<control>\(hyJ
+as a literal character, removing any special meaning that it may have
+to the editor during text input mode. The
+<backslash>
+character shall be retained and evaluated when the command line is
+parsed, or retained and included when the input text becomes part of
+the edit buffer.
+.SS "<control>\(hyV"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<control>-V
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Allow the entry of any subsequent character as a literal character,
+removing any special meaning that it may have to the editor during text
+input mode. The
+<control>\(hyV
+character shall be discarded before the command line is parsed or the
+input text becomes part of the edit buffer.
+.P
+If the ``literal next'' functionality is performed by the underlying
+system, it is implementation-defined whether a character other than
+<control>\(hyV
+performs this function.
+.SS "<control>\(hyW"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<control>-W
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Discard the
+<control>\(hyW,
+and the word previous to it in the input line, including any
+<blank>
+characters following the word and preceding the
+<control>\(hyW.
+If the ``word erase'' functionality is performed by the underlying
+system, it is implementation-defined whether a character other than
+<control>\(hyW
+performs this function.
+.SS "Command Descriptions in ex"
+.P
+The following symbols are used in this section to represent command
+modifiers. Some of these modifiers can be omitted, in which case the
+specified defaults shall be used.
+.IP "\fI1addr\fR" 10
+A single line address, given in any of the forms described in
+.IR "Addressing in ex";
+the default shall be the current line (\c
+.BR '.' ),
+unless otherwise specified.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If the line address is zero, it shall be an error, unless otherwise
+specified in the following command descriptions.
+.P
+If the edit buffer is empty, and the address is specified with a
+command other than
+.BR = ,
+.BR append ,
+.BR insert ,
+.BR open ,
+.BR put ,
+.BR read ,
+or
+.BR visual ,
+or the address is not zero, it shall be an error.
+.RE
+.IP "\fI2addr\fP" 10
+Two addresses specifying an inclusive range of lines. If no addresses
+are specified, the default for
+.IR 2addr
+shall be the current line only (\c
+.BR \(dq.,.\(dq ),
+unless otherwise specified in the following command descriptions. If
+one address is specified,
+.IR 2addr
+shall specify that line only, unless otherwise specified in the
+following command descriptions.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+It shall be an error if the first address is greater than the second
+address.
+.P
+If the edit buffer is empty, and the two addresses are specified with a
+command other than the
+.BR ! ,
+.BR write ,
+.BR wq ,
+or
+.BR xit
+commands, or either address is not zero, it shall be an error.
+.RE
+.IP "\fIcount\fP" 10
+A positive decimal number. If
+.IR count
+is specified, it shall be equivalent to specifying an additional
+address to the command, unless otherwise specified by the following
+command descriptions. The additional address shall be equal to the last
+address specified to the command (either explicitly or by default) plus
+.IR count \(mi1.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If this would result in an address greater than the last line of the
+edit buffer, it shall be corrected to equal the last line of the edit
+buffer.
+.RE
+.IP "\fIflags\fP" 10
+One or more of the characters
+.BR '\(pl' ,
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+.BR '#' ,
+.BR 'p' ,
+or
+.BR 'l' 
+(ell). The flag characters can be
+<blank>-separated,
+and in any order or combination. The characters
+.BR '#' ,
+.BR 'p' ,
+and
+.BR 'l' 
+shall cause lines to be written in the format specified by the
+.BR print
+command with the specified
+.IR flags .
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The lines to be written are as follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+All edit buffer lines written during the execution of the
+.IR ex
+.BR & ,
+.BR ~ ,
+.BR list ,
+.BR number ,
+.BR open ,
+.BR print ,
+.BR s ,
+.BR visual ,
+and
+.BR z
+commands shall be written as specified by
+.IR flags .
+.IP " 2." 4
+After the completion of an
+.IR ex
+command with a flag as an argument, the current line shall be written
+as specified by
+.IR flags ,
+unless the current line was the last line written by the command.
+.P
+The characters
+.BR '\(pl' 
+and
+.BR '\(mi' 
+cause the value of the current line after the execution of the
+.IR ex
+command to be adjusted by the offset address as described in
+.IR "Addressing in ex".
+This adjustment shall occur before the current line is written as
+described in 2. above.
+.P
+The default for
+.IR flags
+shall be none.
+.RE
+.IP "\fIbuffer\fP" 10
+One of a number of named areas for holding text. The named buffers are
+specified by the alphanumeric characters of the POSIX locale. There
+shall also be one ``unnamed'' buffer. When no buffer is specified for
+editor commands that use a buffer, the unnamed buffer shall be used.
+Commands that store text into buffers shall store the text as it was
+before the command took effect, and shall store text occurring earlier
+in the file before text occurring later in the file, regardless of how
+the text region was specified. Commands that store text into buffers
+shall store the text into the unnamed buffer as well as any specified
+buffer.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+In
+.IR ex
+commands, buffer names are specified as the name by itself. In open or
+visual mode commands the name is preceded by a double-quote (\c
+.BR '\&"' )
+character.
+.P
+If the specified buffer name is an uppercase character, and the buffer
+contents are to be modified, the buffer shall be appended to rather
+than being overwritten. If the buffer is not being modified, specifying
+the buffer name in lowercase and uppercase shall have identical
+results.
+.P
+There shall also be buffers named by the numbers 1 through 9. In open
+and visual mode, if a region of text including characters from more
+than a single line is being modified by the
+.IR vi
+.BR c
+or
+.BR d
+commands, the motion character associated with the
+.BR c
+or
+.BR d
+commands specifies that the buffer text shall be in line mode, or the
+commands
+.BR % ,
+.BR ` ,
+.BR / ,
+.BR ? ,
+.BR ( ,
+.BR ) ,
+.BR N ,
+.BR n ,
+.BR { ,
+or
+.BR }
+are used to define a region of text for the
+.BR c
+or
+.BR d
+commands, the contents of buffers 1 through 8 shall be moved into the
+buffer named by the next numerically greater value, the contents of
+buffer 9 shall be discarded, and the region of text shall be copied
+into buffer 1. This shall be in addition to copying the text into a
+user-specified buffer or unnamed buffer, or both. Numeric buffers can
+be specified as a source buffer for open and visual mode commands;
+however, specifying a numeric buffer as the write target of an open or
+visual mode command shall have unspecified results.
+.P
+The text of each buffer shall have the characteristic of being in
+either line or character mode. Appending text to a non-empty buffer
+shall set the mode to match the characteristic of the
+text being appended. Appending text to a buffer shall cause the
+creation of at least one additional line in the buffer. All text stored
+into buffers by
+.IR ex
+commands shall be in line mode. The
+.IR ex
+commands that use buffers as the source of text specify individually
+how buffers of different modes are handled. Each open or visual mode
+command that uses buffers for any purpose specifies individually the
+mode of the text stored into the buffer and how buffers of different
+modes are handled.
+.RE
+.IP "\fIfile\fP" 10
+Command text used to derive a pathname. The default shall be the
+current pathname, as defined previously, in which case, if no current
+pathname has yet been established it shall be an error, except where
+specifically noted in the individual command descriptions that follow.
+If the command text contains any of the characters
+.BR '~' ,
+.BR '{' ,
+.BR '[' ,
+.BR '*' ,
+.BR '?' ,
+.BR '$' ,
+.BR '\&"' ,
+backquote, single-quote, and
+<backslash>,
+it shall be subjected to the process of ``shell expansions'', as
+described below; if more than a single pathname results and the
+command expects only one, it shall be an error.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The process of shell expansions in the editor shall be done as
+follows. The
+.IR ex
+utility shall pass two arguments to the program named by the shell edit
+option; the first shall be
+.BR \(mic ,
+and the second shall be the string
+.BR \(dqecho\(dq 
+and the command text as a single argument. The standard output and
+standard error of that command shall replace the command text.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB!\fP" 10
+A character that can be appended to the command name to modify its
+operation, as detailed in the individual command descriptions. With the
+exception of the
+.IR ex
+.BR read ,
+.BR write ,
+and
+.BR !
+commands, the
+.BR '!' 
+character shall only act as a modifier if there are no
+<blank>
+characters between it and the command name.
+.IP "\fIremembered\ search\ direction\fP" 10
+.br
+The
+.IR vi
+commands
+.BR N
+and
+.BR n
+begin searching in a forwards or backwards direction in the edit buffer
+based on a remembered search direction, which is initially unset, and
+is set by the
+.IR ex
+.BR global ,
+.BR v ,
+.BR s ,
+and
+.BR tag
+commands, and the
+.IR vi
+.BR /
+and
+.BR ?
+commands.
+.SS "Abbreviate"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ab\fB[\fIbreviate\fB][\fIlhs rhs\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.IR lhs
+and
+.IR rhs
+are not specified, write the current list of abbreviations and do
+nothing more.
+.P
+Implementations may restrict the set of characters accepted in
+.IR lhs
+or
+.IR rhs ,
+except that printable characters and
+<blank>
+characters shall not be restricted. Additional restrictions shall be
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+In both
+.IR lhs
+and
+.IR rhs ,
+any character may be escaped with a
+<control>\(hyV,
+in which case the character shall not be used to delimit
+.IR lhs
+from
+.IR rhs ,
+and the escaping
+<control>\(hyV
+shall be discarded.
+.P
+In open and visual text input mode, if a non-word or
+<ESC>
+character that is not escaped by a
+<control>\(hyV
+character is entered after a word character, a check shall be made for
+a set of characters matching
+.IR lhs ,
+in the text input entered during this command. If it is found, the
+effect shall be as if
+.IR rhs
+was entered instead of
+.IR lhs .
+.P
+The set of characters that are checked is defined as follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If there are no characters inserted before the word and non-word or
+<ESC>
+characters that triggered the check, the set of characters shall
+consist of the word character.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the character inserted before the word and non-word or
+<ESC>
+characters that triggered the check is a word character, the set of
+characters shall consist of the characters inserted immediately before
+the triggering characters that are word characters, plus the triggering
+word character.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If the character inserted before the word and non-word or
+<ESC>
+characters that triggered the check is not a word character, the set of
+characters shall consist of the characters that were inserted before
+the triggering characters that are neither
+<blank>
+characters nor word characters, plus the triggering word character.
+.P
+It is unspecified whether the
+.IR lhs
+argument entered for the
+.IR ex
+.BR abbreviate
+and
+.BR unabbreviate
+commands is replaced in this fashion. Regardless of whether or not the
+replacement occurs, the effect of the command shall be as if the
+replacement had not occurred.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Append"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI1addr\fB] \fRa\fB[\fRppend\fB][\fR!\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Enter
+.IR ex
+text input mode; the input text shall be placed after the specified
+line. If line zero is specified, the text shall be placed at the
+beginning of the edit buffer.
+.P
+This command shall be affected by the
+.BR number
+and
+.BR autoindent
+edit options; following the command name with
+.BR '!' 
+shall cause the
+.BR autoindent
+edit option setting to be toggled for the duration of this command
+only.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the last input line; if no lines were input, set to the
+specified line, or to the first line of the edit buffer if a line of
+zero was specified, or zero if the edit buffer is empty.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Arguments"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ar\fB[\fIgs\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Write the current argument list, with the current argument-list entry,
+if any, between
+.BR '[' 
+and
+.BR ']' 
+characters.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Change"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI2addr\fB] \fRc\fB[\fRhange\fB][\fR!\fB][\fIcount\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Enter
+.IR ex
+text input mode; the input text shall replace the specified lines. The
+specified lines shall be copied into the unnamed buffer, which shall
+become a line mode buffer.
+.P
+This command shall be affected by the
+.BR number
+and
+.BR autoindent
+edit options; following the command name with
+.BR '!' 
+shall cause the
+.BR autoindent
+edit option setting to be toggled for the duration of this command
+only.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the last input line; if no lines were input, set to the line
+before the first address, or to the first line of the edit buffer if
+there are no lines preceding the first address, or to zero if the edit
+buffer is empty.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Change Directory"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+chd\fB[\fRir\fB][\fR!\fB][\fIdirectory\fB]\fR
+cd\fB[\fR!\fB][\fIdirectory\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Change the current working directory to
+.IR directory .
+.P
+If no
+.IR directory
+argument is specified, and the
+.IR HOME
+environment variable is set to a non-null and non-empty value,
+.IR directory
+shall default to the value named in the
+.IR HOME
+environment variable. If the
+.IR HOME
+environment variable is empty or is undefined, the default value of
+.IR directory
+is implementation-defined.
+.P
+If no
+.BR '!' 
+is appended to the command name, and the edit buffer has been modified
+since the last complete write, and the current pathname does not begin
+with a
+.BR '/' ,
+it shall be an error.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Copy"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI2addr\fB] \fRco\fB[\fRpy\fB] \fI1addr \fB[\fIflags\fB]
+[\fI2addr\fB] \fRt \fI1addr \fB[\fIflags\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Copy the specified lines after the specified destination line; line
+zero specifies that the lines shall be placed at the beginning of the
+edit buffer.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the last line copied.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Delete"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI2addr\fB] \fRd\fB[\fRelete\fB][\fIbuffer\fB][\fIcount\fB][\fIflags\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Delete the specified lines into a buffer (defaulting to the unnamed
+buffer), which shall become a line-mode buffer.
+.P
+Flags can immediately follow the command name; see
+.IR "Command Line Parsing in ex".
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the line following the deleted lines, or to the last line in the
+edit buffer if that line is past the end of the edit buffer, or to zero
+if the edit buffer is empty.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Edit"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+e\fB[\fRdit\fB][\fR!\fB][\fR+\fIcommand\fB][\fIfile\fB]\fR
+ex\fB[\fR!\fB][\fR+\fIcommand\fB][\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If no
+.BR '!' 
+is appended to the command name, and the edit buffer has been modified
+since the last complete write, it shall be an error.
+.P
+If
+.IR file
+is specified, replace the current contents of the edit buffer with the
+current contents of
+.IR file ,
+and set the current pathname to
+.IR file .
+If
+.IR file
+is not specified, replace the current contents of the edit buffer with
+the current contents of the file named by the current pathname. If for
+any reason the current contents of the file cannot be accessed, the
+edit buffer shall be empty.
+.P
+The
+.BR + \c
+.IR command
+option shall be
+<blank>-delimited;
+<blank>
+characters within the
+.BR + \c
+.IR command
+can be escaped by preceding them with a
+<backslash>
+character. The
+.BR + \c
+.IR command
+shall be interpreted as an
+.IR ex
+command immediately after the contents of the edit buffer have been
+replaced and the current line and column have been set.
+.P
+If the edit buffer is empty:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to 0.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to 1.
+.P
+Otherwise, if executed while in
+.IR ex
+command mode or if the
+.BR + \c
+.IR command
+argument is specified:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the last line of the edit buffer.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.P
+Otherwise, if
+.IR file
+is omitted or results in the current pathname:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the first line of the edit buffer.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.P
+Otherwise, if
+.IR file
+is the same as the last file edited, the line and column shall be set
+as follows; if the file was previously edited, the line and column may
+be set as follows:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the last value held when that file was last edited. If this
+value is not a valid line in the new edit buffer, set to the first line
+of the edit buffer.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+If the current line was set to the last value held when the file was
+last edited, set to the last value held when the file was last edited.
+Otherwise, or if the last value is not a valid column in the new edit
+buffer, set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.br
+.P
+Otherwise:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the first line of the edit buffer.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "File"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+f\fB[\fRile\fB][\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If a
+.IR file
+argument is specified, the alternate pathname shall be set to the
+current pathname, and the current pathname shall be set to
+.IR file .
+.P
+Write an informational message. If the file has a current pathname, it
+shall be included in this message; otherwise, the message shall
+indicate that there is no current pathname. If the edit buffer
+contains lines, the current line number and the number of lines in the
+edit buffer shall be included in this message; otherwise, the message
+shall indicate that the edit buffer is empty. If the edit buffer has
+been modified since the last complete write, this fact shall be
+included in this message. If the
+.BR readonly
+edit option is set, this fact shall be included in this message. The
+message may contain other unspecified information.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Global"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI2addr\fB] \fRg\fB[\fRlobal\fB] \fR/\fIpattern\fR/ \fB[\fIcommands\fB]
+[\fI2addr\fB] \fRv /\fIpattern\fR/ \fB[\fIcommands\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The optional
+.BR '!' 
+character after the
+.BR global
+command shall be the same as executing the
+.BR v
+command.
+.P
+If
+.IR pattern
+is empty (for example,
+.BR \(dq//\(dq )
+or not specified, the last regular expression used in the editor
+command shall be used as the
+.IR pattern .
+The
+.IR pattern
+can be delimited by
+<slash>
+characters (shown in the Synopsis), as well as any non-alphanumeric
+or non-\c
+<blank>
+other than
+<backslash>,
+<vertical-line>,
+<newline>,
+or double-quote.
+.P
+If no lines are specified, the lines shall default to the entire file.
+.P
+The
+.BR global
+and
+.BR v
+commands are logically two-pass operations. First, mark the lines
+within the specified lines for which the line excluding the terminating
+<newline>
+matches (\c
+.BR global )
+or does not match (\c
+.BR v
+or
+.BR global! )
+the specified pattern. Second, execute the
+.IR ex
+commands given by
+.IR commands ,
+with the current line (\c
+.BR '.' )
+set to each marked line. If an error occurs during this process, or the
+contents of the edit buffer are replaced (for example, by the
+.IR ex
+.BR :edit
+command) an error message shall be written and no more commands
+resulting from the execution of this command shall be processed.
+.P
+Multiple
+.IR ex
+commands can be specified by entering multiple commands on a single
+line using a
+<vertical-line>
+to delimit them, or one per line, by escaping each
+<newline>
+with a
+<backslash>.
+.P
+If no commands are specified:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If in
+.IR ex
+command mode, it shall be as if the
+.BR print
+command were specified.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise, no command shall be executed.
+.P
+For the
+.BR append ,
+.BR change ,
+and
+.BR insert
+commands, the input text shall be included as part of the command, and
+the terminating
+<period>
+can be omitted if the command ends the list of commands. The
+.BR open
+and
+.BR visual
+commands can be specified as one of the commands, in which case each
+marked line shall cause the editor to enter open or visual mode. If
+open or visual mode is exited using the
+.IR vi
+.BR Q
+command, the current line shall be set to the next marked line, and
+open or visual mode reentered, until the list of marked lines is
+exhausted.
+.P
+The
+.BR global ,
+.BR v ,
+and
+.BR undo
+commands cannot be used in
+.IR commands .
+Marked lines may be deleted by commands executed for lines occurring
+earlier in the file than the marked lines. In this case, no commands
+shall be executed for the deleted lines.
+.P
+If the remembered search direction is not set, the
+.BR global
+and
+.BR v
+commands shall set it to forward.
+.P
+The
+.BR autoprint
+and
+.BR autoindent
+edit options shall be inhibited for the duration of the
+.BR g
+or
+.BR v
+command.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+If no commands executed, set to the last marked line. Otherwise, as
+specified for the executed
+.IR ex
+commands.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+If no commands are executed, set to non-\c
+<blank>;
+otherwise, as specified for the individual
+.IR ex
+commands.
+.SS "Insert"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI1addr\fB] \fRi\fB[\fRnsert\fB][\fR!\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Enter
+.IR ex
+text input mode; the input text shall be placed before the specified
+line. If the line is zero or 1, the text shall be placed at the
+beginning of the edit buffer.
+.P
+This command shall be affected by the
+.BR number
+and
+.BR autoindent
+edit options; following the command name with
+.BR '!' 
+shall cause the
+.BR autoindent
+edit option setting to be toggled for the duration of this command
+only.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the last input line; if no lines were input, set to the line
+before the specified line, or to the first line of the edit buffer if
+there are no lines preceding the specified line, or zero if the edit
+buffer is empty.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Join"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI2addr\fB] \fRj\fB[\fRoin\fB][\fR!\fB][\fIcount\fB][\fIflags\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.IR count
+is specified:
+.sp
+.RS
+If no address was specified, the
+.BR join
+command shall behave as if
+.IR 2addr
+were the current line and the current line plus
+.IR count
+(.\|,\|. +
+.IR count ).
+.P
+If one address was specified, the
+.BR join
+command shall behave as if
+.IR 2addr
+were the specified address and the specified address plus
+.IR count
+(\c
+.IR addr ,\c
+.IR addr
++
+.IR count ).
+.P
+If two addresses were specified, the
+.BR join
+command shall behave as if an additional address, equal to the last
+address plus
+.IR count
+\(mi1 (\c
+.IR addr1 ,\c
+.IR addr2 ,\c
+.IR addr2
++
+.IR count
+\(mi1), was specified.
+.P
+If this would result in a second address greater than the last line of
+the edit buffer, it shall be corrected to be equal to the last line of
+the edit buffer.
+.RE
+.P
+If no
+.IR count
+is specified:
+.sp
+.RS
+If no address was specified, the
+.BR join
+command shall behave as if
+.IR 2addr
+were the current line and the next line (.\|,\|. +1).
+.P
+If one address was specified, the
+.BR join
+command shall behave as if
+.IR 2addr
+were the specified address and the next line (\c
+.IR addr ,\c
+.IR addr
++1).
+.RE
+.P
+Join the text from the specified lines together into a single line,
+which shall replace the specified lines.
+.P
+If a
+.BR '!' 
+character is appended to the command name, the
+.BR join
+shall be without modification of any line, independent of the current
+locale.
+.P
+Otherwise, in the POSIX locale, set the current line to the first of
+the specified lines, and then, for each subsequent line, proceed as
+follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Discard leading
+<space>
+characters from the line to be joined.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the line to be joined is now empty, delete it, and skip steps 3
+through 5.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If the current line ends in a
+<blank>,
+or the first character of the line to be joined is a
+.BR ')' 
+character, join the lines without further modification.
+.IP " 4." 4
+If the last character of the current line is a
+.BR '.' ,
+join the lines with two
+<space>
+characters between them.
+.IP " 5." 4
+Otherwise, join the lines with a single
+<space>
+between them.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the first line specified.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "List"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI2addr\fB] \fRl\fB[\fRist\fB][\fIcount\fB][\fIflags\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+This command shall be equivalent to the
+.IR ex
+command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI2addr\fB] \fRp\fB[\fRrint\fB][\fIcount\fB] \fRl\fB[\fIflags\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+See
+.IR "Print".
+.SS "Map"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+map\fB[\fR!\fB][\fIlhs rhs\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.IR lhs
+and
+.IR rhs
+are not specified:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If
+.BR '!' 
+is specified, write the current list of text input mode maps.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise, write the current list of command mode maps.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Do nothing more.
+.P
+Implementations may restrict the set of characters accepted in
+.IR lhs
+or
+.IR rhs ,
+except that printable characters and
+<blank>
+characters shall not be restricted. Additional restrictions shall be
+implementation-defined. In both
+.IR lhs
+and
+.IR rhs ,
+any character can be escaped with a
+<control>\(hyV,
+in which case the character shall not be used to delimit
+.IR lhs
+from
+.IR rhs ,
+and the escaping
+<control>\(hyV
+shall be discarded.
+.P
+If the character
+.BR '!' 
+is appended to the
+.BR map
+command name, the mapping shall be effective during open or visual text
+input mode rather than
+.BR open
+or
+.BR visual
+command mode. This allows
+.IR lhs
+to have two different
+.BR map
+definitions at the same time: one for command mode and one for text
+input mode.
+.br
+.P
+For command mode mappings:
+.sp
+.RS
+When the
+.IR lhs
+is entered as any part of a
+.IR vi
+command in open or visual mode (but not as part of the arguments to the
+command), the action shall be as if the corresponding
+.IR rhs
+had been entered.
+.P
+If any character in the command, other than the first, is escaped using
+a
+<control>\(hyV
+character, that character shall not be part of a match to an
+.IR lhs .
+.P
+It is unspecified whether implementations shall support
+.BR map
+commands where the
+.IR lhs
+is more than a single character in length, where the first character of
+the
+.IR lhs
+is printable.
+.RE
+.P
+.sp
+.RS
+If
+.IR lhs
+contains more than one character and the first character is
+.BR '#' ,
+followed by a sequence of digits corresponding to a numbered function
+key, then when this function key is typed it shall be mapped to
+.IR rhs .
+Characters other than digits following a
+.BR '#' 
+character also represent the function key named by the characters in
+the
+.IR lhs
+following the
+.BR '#' 
+and may be mapped to
+.IR rhs .
+It is unspecified how function keys are named or what function keys are
+supported.
+.RE
+.P
+For text input mode mappings:
+.sp
+.RS
+When the
+.IR lhs
+is entered as any part of text entered in open or visual text input
+modes, the action shall be as if the corresponding
+.IR rhs
+had been entered.
+.P
+If any character in the input text is escaped using a
+<control>\(hyV
+character, that character shall not be part of a match to an
+.IR lhs .
+.P
+It is unspecified whether the
+.IR lhs
+text entered for subsequent
+.BR map
+or
+.BR unmap
+commands is replaced with the
+.IR rhs
+text for the purposes of the screen display; regardless of whether or
+not the display appears as if the corresponding
+.IR rhs
+text was entered, the effect of the command shall be as if the
+.IR lhs
+text was entered.
+.RE
+.P
+If only part of the
+.IR lhs
+is entered, it is unspecified how long the editor will wait for
+additional, possibly matching characters before treating the already
+entered characters as not matching the
+.IR lhs .
+.P
+The
+.IR rhs
+characters shall themselves be subject to remapping, unless otherwise
+specified by the
+.BR remap
+edit option, except that if the characters in
+.IR lhs
+occur as prefix characters in
+.IR rhs ,
+those characters shall not be remapped.
+.P
+On block-mode terminals, the mapping need not occur immediately (for
+example, it may occur after the terminal transmits a group of
+characters to the system), but it shall achieve the same results as if
+it occurred immediately.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Mark"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI1addr\fB] \fRma\fB[\fRrk\fB] \fIcharacter
+\fB[\fI1addr\fB] \fRk \fIcharacter\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Implementations shall support
+.IR character
+values of a single lowercase letter of the POSIX locale and the
+backquote and single-quote characters; support of other characters is
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+If executing the
+.IR vi
+.BR m
+command, set the specified mark to the current line and 1-based
+numbered character referenced by the current column, if any; otherwise,
+column position 1.
+.P
+Otherwise, set the specified mark to the specified line and 1-based
+numbered first non-\c
+<blank>
+non-\c
+<newline>
+in the line, if any; otherwise, the last non-\c
+<newline>
+in the line, if any; otherwise, column position 1.
+.P
+The mark shall remain associated with the line until the mark is reset
+or the line is deleted. If a deleted line is restored by a subsequent
+.BR undo
+command, any marks previously associated with the line, which have not
+been reset, shall be restored as well. Any use of a mark not associated
+with a current line in the edit buffer shall be an error.
+.P
+The marks
+.BR `
+and
+.BR '
+shall be set as described previously, immediately before the following
+events occur in the editor:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The use of
+.BR '$' 
+as an
+.IR ex
+address
+.IP " 2." 4
+The use of a positive decimal number as an
+.IR ex
+address
+.IP " 3." 4
+The use of a search command as an
+.IR ex
+address
+.IP " 4." 4
+The use of a mark reference as an
+.IR ex
+address
+.IP " 5." 4
+The use of the following open and visual mode commands:
+<control>\(hy],
+.BR % ,
+.BR ( ,
+.BR ) ,
+.BR [ ,
+.BR ] ,
+.BR { ,
+.BR }
+.IP " 6." 4
+The use of the following open and visual mode commands:
+.BR ' ,
+.BR G ,
+.BR H ,
+.BR L ,
+.BR M ,
+.BR z
+if the current line will change as a result of the command
+.IP " 7." 4
+The use of the open and visual mode commands:
+.BR / ,
+.BR ? ,
+.BR N ,
+.BR ` ,
+.BR n
+if the current line or column will change as a result of the command
+.IP " 8." 4
+The use of the
+.IR ex
+mode commands:
+.BR z ,
+.BR undo ,
+.BR global ,
+.BR v
+.P
+For rules 1., 2., 3., and 4., the
+.BR `
+and
+.BR '
+marks shall not be set if the
+.IR ex
+command is parsed as specified by rule 6.a. in
+.IR "Command Line Parsing in ex".
+.P
+For rules 5., 6., and 7., the
+.BR `
+and
+.BR '
+marks shall not be set if the commands are used as motion commands in
+open and visual mode.
+.P
+For rules 1., 2., 3., 4., 5., 6., 7., and 8., the
+.BR `
+and
+.BR '
+marks shall not be set if the command fails.
+.P
+The
+.BR `
+and
+.BR '
+marks shall be set as described previously, each time the contents of
+the edit buffer are replaced (including the editing of the initial
+buffer), if in open or visual mode, or if in
+.BR ex
+mode and the edit buffer is not empty, before any commands or movements
+(including commands or movements specified by the
+.BR \(mic
+or
+.BR \(mit
+options or the
+.BR + \c
+.IR command
+argument) are executed on the edit buffer. If in open or visual mode,
+the marks shall be set as if executing the
+.IR vi
+.BR m
+command; otherwise, as if executing the
+.IR ex
+.BR mark
+command.
+.P
+When changing from
+.BR ex
+mode to open or visual mode, if the
+.BR `
+and
+.BR '
+marks are not already set, the
+.BR `
+and
+.BR '
+marks shall be set as described previously.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Move"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI2addr\fB] \fRm\fB[\fRove\fB] \fI1addr\fR \fB[\fIflags\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Move the specified lines after the specified destination line. A
+destination of line zero specifies that the lines shall be placed at
+the beginning of the edit buffer. It shall be an error if the
+destination line is within the range of lines to be moved.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the last of the moved lines.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Next"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+n\fB[\fRext\fB][\fR!\fB][\fR+\fIcommand\fB][\fIfile \fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If no
+.BR '!' 
+is appended to the command name, and the edit buffer has been modified
+since the last complete write, it shall be an error, unless the file is
+successfully written as specified by the
+.BR autowrite
+option.
+.br
+.P
+If one or more files is specified:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Set the argument list to the specified filenames.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Set the current argument list reference to be the first entry in the
+argument list.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Set the current pathname to the first filename specified.
+.P
+Otherwise:
+.IP " 1." 4
+It shall be an error if there are no more filenames in the argument
+list after the filename currently referenced.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Set the current pathname and the current argument list reference to
+the filename after the filename currently referenced in the argument
+list.
+.P
+Replace the contents of the edit buffer with the contents of the file
+named by the current pathname. If for any reason the contents of the
+file cannot be accessed, the edit buffer shall be empty.
+.P
+This command shall be affected by the
+.BR autowrite
+and
+.BR writeany
+edit options.
+.P
+The
+.BR + \c
+.IR command
+option shall be
+<blank>-delimited;
+<blank>
+characters can be escaped by preceding them with a
+<backslash>
+character. The
+.BR + \c
+.IR command
+shall be interpreted as an
+.IR ex
+command immediately after the contents of the edit buffer have been
+replaced and the current line and column have been set.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set as described for the
+.BR edit
+command.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set as described for the
+.BR edit
+command.
+.SS "Number"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI2addr\fB] \fRnu\fB[\fRmber\fB][\fIcount\fB][\fIflags\fB]
+[\fI2addr\fB] \fR#\fB[\fIcount\fB][\fIflags\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+These commands shall be equivalent to the
+.IR ex
+command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI2addr\fB] \fRp\fB[\fRrint\fB][\fIcount\fB] \fR#\fB[\fIflags\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+See
+.IR "Print".
+.SS "Open"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI1addr\fB] \fRo\fB[\fRpen\fB]\fR /\fIpattern\fR/ \fB[\fIflags\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+This command need not be supported on block-mode terminals or terminals
+with insufficient capabilities. If standard input, standard output, or
+standard error are not terminal devices, the results are unspecified.
+.P
+Enter open mode.
+.P
+The trailing delimiter can be omitted from
+.IR pattern
+at the end of the command line. If
+.IR pattern
+is empty (for example,
+.BR \(dq//\(dq )
+or not specified, the last regular expression used in the editor shall
+be used as the pattern. The pattern can be delimited by
+<slash>
+characters (shown in the Synopsis), as well as any alphanumeric, or non-\c
+<blank>
+other than
+<backslash>,
+<vertical-line>,
+<newline>,
+or
+double-quote.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the specified line.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Preserve"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+pre\fB[\fRserve\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Save the edit buffer in a form that can later be recovered by using the
+.BR \(mir
+option or by using the
+.IR ex
+.BR recover
+command. After the file has been preserved, a mail message shall be
+sent to the user. This message shall be readable by invoking the
+.IR mailx
+utility. The message shall contain the name of the file, the time of
+preservation, and an
+.IR ex
+command that could be used to recover the file. Additional information
+may be included in the mail message.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Print"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI2addr\fB] \fRp\fB[\fRrint\fB][\fIcount\fB][\fIflags\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Write the addressed lines. The behavior is unspecified if the number of
+columns on the display is less than the number of columns required to
+write any single character in the lines being written.
+.P
+Non-printable characters, except for the
+<tab>,
+shall be written as implementation-defined multi-character sequences.
+.P
+If the
+.BR #
+flag is specified or the
+.BR number
+edit option is set, each line shall be preceded by its line number in
+the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%6d  ", <\fIline number\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the
+.BR l
+flag is specified or the
+.BR list
+edit option is set:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The characters listed in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Table 5-1" ", " "Escape Sequences and Associated Actions"
+shall be written as the corresponding escape sequence.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Non-printable characters not in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Table 5-1" ", " "Escape Sequences and Associated Actions"
+shall be written as one three-digit octal number (with a preceding
+<backslash>)
+for each byte in the character (most significant byte first).
+.IP " 3." 4
+The end of each line shall be marked with a
+.BR '$' ,
+and literal
+.BR '$' 
+characters within the line shall be written with a preceding
+<backslash>.
+.P
+Long lines shall be folded; the length at which folding occurs is
+unspecified, but should be appropriate for the output terminal,
+considering the number of columns of the terminal.
+.P
+If a line is folded, and the
+.BR l
+flag is not specified and the
+.BR list
+edit option is not set, it is unspecified whether a multi-column
+character at the folding position is separated; it shall not be
+discarded.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the last written line.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged if the current line is unchanged; otherwise, set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Put"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI1addr\fB] \fRpu\fB[\fRt\fB][\fIbuffer\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Append text from the specified buffer (by default, the unnamed buffer)
+to the specified line; line zero specifies that the text shall be
+placed at the beginning of the edit buffer. Each portion of a line in
+the buffer shall become a new line in the edit buffer, regardless of
+the mode of the buffer.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the last line entered into the edit buffer.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Quit"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+q\fB[\fRuit\fB][\fR!\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If no
+.BR '!' 
+is appended to the command name:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the edit buffer has been modified since the last complete write, it
+shall be an error.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If there are filenames in the argument list after the filename
+currently referenced, and the last command was not a
+.BR quit ,
+.BR wq ,
+.BR xit ,
+or
+.BR ZZ
+(see
+.IR "Exit")
+command, it shall be an error.
+.P
+Otherwise, terminate the editing session.
+.SS "Read"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI1addr\fB] \fRr\fB[\fRead\fB][\fR!\fB][\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.BR '!' 
+is not the first non-\c
+<blank>
+to follow the command name, a copy of the specified file shall be
+appended into the edit buffer after the specified line; line zero
+specifies that the copy shall be placed at the beginning of the edit
+buffer. The number of lines and bytes read shall be written. If no
+.IR file
+is named, the current pathname shall be the default. If there is no
+current pathname, then
+.IR file
+shall become the current pathname. If there is no current pathname or
+.IR file
+operand, it shall be an error. Specifying a
+.IR file
+that is not of type regular shall have unspecified results.
+.P
+Otherwise, if
+.IR file
+is preceded by
+.BR '!' ,
+the rest of the line after the
+.BR '!' 
+shall have
+.BR '%' ,
+.BR '#' ,
+and
+.BR '!' 
+characters expanded as described in
+.IR "Command Line Parsing in ex".
+.P
+The
+.IR ex
+utility shall then pass two arguments to the program named by the
+shell edit option; the first shall be
+.BR \(mic
+and the second shall be the expanded arguments to the
+.BR read
+command as a single argument. The standard input of the program shall
+be set to the standard input of the
+.IR ex
+program when it was invoked. The standard error and standard output of
+the program shall be appended into the edit buffer after the specified
+line.
+.P
+Each line in the copied file or program output (as delimited by
+<newline>
+characters or the end of the file or output if it is not immediately
+preceded by a
+<newline>),
+shall be a separate line in the edit buffer. Any occurrences of
+<carriage-return>
+and
+<newline>
+pairs in the output shall be treated as single
+<newline>
+characters.
+.P
+The special meaning of the
+.BR '!' 
+following the
+.BR read
+command can be overridden by escaping it with a
+<backslash>
+character.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+If no lines are added to the edit buffer, unchanged. Otherwise, if in
+open or visual mode, set to the first line entered into the edit
+buffer. Otherwise, set to the last line entered into the edit buffer.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Recover"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+rec\fB[\fRover\fB][\fR!\fB] \fIfile\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If no
+.BR '!' 
+is appended to the command name, and the edit buffer has been modified
+since the last complete write, it shall be an error.
+.P
+If no
+.IR file
+operand is specified, then the current pathname shall be used. If
+there is no current pathname or
+.IR file
+operand, it shall be an error.
+.P
+If no recovery information has previously been saved about
+.IR file ,
+the
+.BR recover
+command shall behave identically to the
+.BR edit
+command, and an informational message to this effect shall be written.
+.P
+Otherwise, set the current pathname to
+.IR file ,
+and replace the current contents of the edit buffer with the recovered
+contents of
+.IR file .
+If there are multiple instances of the file to be recovered, the one
+most recently saved shall be recovered, and an informational message
+that there are previous versions of the file that can be recovered
+shall be written. The editor shall behave as if the contents of the
+edit buffer have already been modified.
+.P
+.IR "Current file" :
+Set as described for the
+.BR edit
+command.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set as described for the
+.BR edit
+command.
+.SS "Rewind"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+rew\fB[\fRind\fB][\fR!\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If no
+.BR '!' 
+is appended to the command name, and the edit buffer has been modified
+since the last complete write, it shall be an error, unless the file is
+successfully written as specified by the
+.BR autowrite
+option.
+.P
+If the argument list is empty, it shall be an error.
+.P
+The current argument list reference and the current pathname shall be
+set to the first filename in the argument list.
+.P
+Replace the contents of the edit buffer with the contents of the file
+named by the current pathname. If for any reason the contents of the
+file cannot be accessed, the edit buffer shall be empty.
+.P
+This command shall be affected by the
+.BR autowrite
+and
+.BR writeany
+edit options.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set as described for the
+.BR edit
+command.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set as described for the
+.BR edit
+command.
+.SS "Set"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+se\fB[\fRt\fB][\fIoption\fB[\fR=\fB[\fIvalue\fB]]\fR ...\fB][\fRno\fIoption\fR ...\fB][\fIoption\fR? ...\fB][\fRall\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+When no arguments are specified, write the value of the
+.BR term
+edit option and those options whose values have been changed from the
+default settings; when the argument
+.IR all
+is specified, write all of the option values.
+.P
+Giving an option name followed by the character
+.BR '?' 
+shall cause the current value of that option to be written. The
+.BR '?' 
+can be separated from the option name by zero or more
+<blank>
+characters. The
+.BR '?' 
+shall be necessary only for Boolean valued options. Boolean options can
+be given values by the form
+.BR set
+.IR option
+to turn them on or
+.BR set
+.BR no \c
+.IR option
+to turn them off; string and numeric options can be assigned by the
+form
+.BR set
+.IR option =\c
+.IR value .
+Any
+<blank>
+characters in strings can be included as is by preceding each
+<blank>
+with an escaping
+<backslash>.
+More than one option can be set or listed by a single set command by
+specifying multiple arguments, each separated from the next by one or more
+<blank>
+characters.
+.P
+See
+.IR "Edit Options in ex"
+for details about specific options.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Shell"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sh\fB[\fRell\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Invoke the program named in the
+.BR shell
+edit option with the single argument
+.BR \(mii
+(interactive mode). Editing shall be resumed when the program exits.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Source"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+so\fB[\fRurce\fB] \fIfile\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Read and execute
+.IR ex
+commands from
+.IR file .
+Lines in the file that are blank lines shall be ignored.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+As specified for the individual
+.IR ex
+commands.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+As specified for the individual
+.IR ex
+commands.
+.SS "Substitute"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI2addr\fB] \fRs\fB[\fRubstitute\fB][\fR/\fIpattern\fR/\fIrepl\fR/\fB[\fIoptions\fB][\fIcount\fB][\fIflags\fB]]\fR
+.br
+\fB[\fI2addr\fB] \fR&\fB[\fIoptions\fB][\fIcount\fB][\fIflags\fB]]\fR
+.br
+\fB[\fI2addr\fB] \fR~\fB[\fIoptions\fB][\fIcount\fB][\fIflags\fB]]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Replace the first instance of the pattern
+.IR pattern
+by the string
+.IR repl
+on each specified line. (See
+.IR "Regular Expressions in ex"
+and
+.IR "Replacement Strings in ex".)
+Any non-alphabetic, non-\c
+<blank>
+delimiter other than
+<backslash>,
+.BR '|' ,
+<newline>,
+or double-quote
+can be used instead of
+.BR '/' .
+<backslash>
+characters can be used to escape delimiters,
+<backslash>
+characters, and other special characters.
+.P
+The trailing delimiter can be omitted from
+.IR pattern
+or from
+.IR repl
+at the end of the command line. If both
+.IR pattern
+and
+.IR repl
+are not specified or are empty (for example,
+.BR \(dq//\(dq ),
+the last
+.BR s
+command shall be repeated. If only
+.IR pattern
+is not specified or is empty, the last regular expression used in the
+editor shall be used as the pattern. If only
+.IR repl
+is not specified or is empty, the pattern shall be replaced by nothing.
+If the entire replacement pattern is
+.BR '%' ,
+the last replacement pattern to an
+.BR s
+command shall be used.
+.P
+Entering a
+<carriage-return>
+in
+.IR repl
+(which requires an escaping
+<backslash>
+in
+.IR ex
+mode and an escaping
+<control>\(hyV
+in open or
+.IR vi
+mode) shall split the line at that point, creating a new line in the
+edit buffer. The
+<carriage-return>
+shall be discarded.
+.P
+If
+.IR options
+includes the letter
+.BR 'g' 
+(\c
+.BR global ),
+all non-overlapping instances of the pattern in the line shall be
+replaced.
+.P
+If
+.IR options
+includes the letter
+.BR 'c' 
+(\c
+.BR confirm ),
+then before each substitution the line shall be written; the written
+line shall reflect all previous substitutions. On the following line,
+<space>
+characters shall be written beneath the characters from the line that
+are before the
+.IR pattern
+to be replaced, and
+.BR '^' 
+characters written beneath the characters included in the
+.IR pattern
+to be replaced. The
+.IR ex
+utility shall then wait for a response from the user. An affirmative
+response shall cause the substitution to be done, while any other input
+shall not make the substitution. An affirmative response shall consist
+of a line with the affirmative response (as defined by the current
+locale) at the beginning of the line. This line shall be subject to
+editing in the same way as the
+.IR ex
+command line.
+.P
+If interrupted (see the ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS section), any modifications
+confirmed by the user shall be preserved in the edit buffer after the
+interrupt.
+.P
+If the remembered search direction is not set, the
+.BR s
+command shall set it to forward.
+.P
+In the second Synopsis, the
+.BR &
+command shall repeat the previous substitution, as if the
+.BR &
+command were replaced by:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+s/\fIpattern\fR/\fIrepl\fR/
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR pattern
+and
+.IR repl
+are as specified in the previous
+.BR s ,
+.BR & ,
+or
+.BR ~
+command.
+.P
+In the third Synopsis, the
+.BR ~
+command shall repeat the previous substitution, as if the
+.BR '~' 
+were replaced by:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+s/\fIpattern\fR/\fIrepl\fR/
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR pattern
+shall be the last regular expression specified to the editor, and
+.IR repl
+shall be from the previous substitution (including
+.BR &
+and
+.BR ~ )
+command.
+.P
+These commands shall be affected by the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+environment variable.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the last line in which a substitution occurred, or, unchanged if
+no substitution occurred.
+.P
+.IR "Current column":
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Suspend"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+su\fB[\fRspend\fB][\fR!\fB]\fR
+st\fB[\fRop\fB][\fR!\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Allow control to return to the invoking process;
+.IR ex
+shall suspend itself as if it had received the SIGTSTP signal. The
+suspension shall occur only if job control is enabled in the invoking
+shell (see the description of
+.IR set
+.BR \(mim ).
+.P
+These commands shall be affected by the
+.BR autowrite
+and
+.BR writeany
+edit options.
+.P
+The current
+.BR susp
+character (see
+.IR "\fIstty\fR\^")
+shall be equivalent to the
+.BR suspend
+command.
+.SS "Tag"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ta\fB[\fRg\fB][\fR!\fB] \fItagstring\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The results are unspecified if the format of a tags file is not as
+specified by the
+.IR ctags
+utility (see
+.IR "\fIctags\fR\^")
+description.
+.P
+The
+.BR tag
+command shall search for
+.IR tagstring
+in the tag files referred to by the
+.BR tag
+edit option, in the order they are specified, until a reference to
+.IR tagstring
+is found. Files shall be searched from beginning to end. If no
+reference is found, it shall be an error and an error message to this
+effect shall be written. If the reference is not found, or if an error
+occurs while processing a file referred to in the
+.BR tag
+edit option, it shall be an error, and an error message shall be
+written at the first occurrence of such an error.
+.P
+Otherwise, if the tags file contained a pattern, the pattern shall be
+treated as a regular expression used in the editor; for example, for
+the purposes of the
+.BR s
+command.
+.P
+If the
+.IR tagstring
+is in a file with a different name than the current pathname, set the
+current pathname to the name of that file, and replace the contents of
+the edit buffer with the contents of that file. In this case, if no
+.BR '!' 
+is appended to the command name, and the edit buffer has been modified
+since the last complete write, it shall be an error, unless the file is
+successfully written as specified by the
+.BR autowrite
+option.
+.P
+This command shall be affected by the
+.BR autowrite ,
+.BR tag ,
+.BR taglength ,
+and
+.BR writeany
+edit options.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+If the tags file contained a line number, set to that line number. If
+the line number is larger than the last line in the edit buffer, an
+error message shall be written and the current line shall be set as
+specified for the
+.BR edit
+command.
+.P
+If the tags file contained a pattern, set to the first occurrence of
+the pattern in the file. If no matching pattern is found, an error
+message shall be written and the current line shall be set as specified
+for the
+.BR edit
+command.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+If the tags file contained a line-number reference and that line-number
+was not larger than the last line in the edit buffer, or if the tags
+file contained a pattern and that pattern was found, set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+Otherwise, set as specified for the
+.BR edit
+command.
+.SS "Unabbreviate"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+una\fB[\fRbbrev\fB] \fIlhs\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.IR lhs
+is not an entry in the current list of abbreviations (see
+.IR "Abbreviate"),
+it shall be an error. Otherwise, delete
+.IR lhs
+from the list of abbreviations.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Undo"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+u\fB[\fRndo\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Reverse the changes made by the last command that modified the contents
+of the edit buffer, including
+.BR undo .
+For this purpose, the
+.BR global ,
+.BR v ,
+.BR open ,
+and
+.BR visual
+commands, and commands resulting from buffer executions and mapped
+character expansions, are considered single commands.
+.P
+If no action that can be undone preceded the
+.BR undo
+command, it shall be an error.
+.P
+If the
+.BR undo
+command restores lines that were marked, the mark shall also be
+restored unless it was reset subsequent to the deletion of the lines.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+.IP " 1." 4
+If lines are added or changed in the file, set to the first line added
+or changed.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Set to the line before the first line deleted, if it exists.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Set to 1 if the edit buffer is not empty.
+.IP " 4." 4
+Set to zero.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Unmap"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+unm\fB[\fRap\fB][\fR!\fB] \fIlhs\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.BR '!' 
+is appended to the command name, and if
+.IR lhs
+is not an entry in the list of text input mode map definitions, it
+shall be an error. Otherwise, delete
+.IR lhs
+from the list of text input mode map definitions.
+.P
+If no
+.BR '!' 
+is appended to the command name, and if
+.IR lhs
+is not an entry in the list of command mode map definitions, it shall
+be an error. Otherwise, delete
+.IR lhs
+from the list of command mode map definitions.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Version"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ve\fB[\fRrsion\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Write a message containing version information for the editor. The
+format of the message is unspecified.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Visual"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI1addr\fB] \fRvi\fB[\fRsual\fB][\fItype\fB][\fIcount\fB][\fIflags\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.IR ex
+is currently in open or visual mode, the Synopsis and behavior of the
+visual command shall be the same as the
+.BR edit
+command, as specified by
+.IR "Edit".
+.P
+Otherwise, this command need not be supported on block-mode terminals
+or terminals with insufficient capabilities. If standard input,
+standard output, or standard error are not terminal devices, the
+results are unspecified.
+.P
+If
+.IR count
+is specified, the value of the
+.BR window
+edit option shall be set to
+.IR count
+(as described in
+.IR "window").
+If the
+.BR '^' 
+type character was also specified, the
+.BR window
+edit option shall be set before being used by the type character.
+.P
+Enter visual mode. If
+.IR type
+is not specified, it shall be as if a
+.IR type
+of
+.BR '\(pl' 
+was specified. The
+.IR type
+shall cause the following effects:
+.IP "\fR+\fP" 6
+Place the beginning of the specified line at the top of the display.
+.IP "\fR-\fP" 6
+Place the end of the specified line at the bottom of the display.
+.IP "\fR.\fP" 6
+Place the beginning of the specified line in the middle of the display.
+.IP "\fR^\fP" 6
+If the specified line is less than or equal to the value of the
+.BR window
+edit option, set the line to 1; otherwise, decrement the line by the
+value of the
+.BR window
+edit option minus 1. Place the beginning of this line as close to the
+bottom of the displayed lines as possible, while still displaying the
+value of the
+.BR window
+edit option number of lines.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the specified line.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Write"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI2addr\fB] \fRw\fB[\fRrite\fB][\fR!\fB][\fR>>\fB][\fIfile\fB]
+[\fI2addr\fB] \fRw\fB[\fRrite\fB][\fR!\fB][\fIfile\fB]
+[\fI2addr\fB] \fRwq\fB[\fR!\fB][\fR>>\fB][\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If no lines are specified, the lines shall default to the entire file.
+.P
+The command
+.BR wq
+shall be equivalent to a
+.BR write
+command followed by a
+.BR quit
+command;
+.BR wq!
+shall be equivalent to
+.BR write!
+followed by
+.BR quit .
+In both cases, if the
+.BR write
+command fails, the
+.BR quit
+shall not be attempted.
+.P
+If the command name is not followed by one or more
+<blank>
+characters, or
+.IR file
+is not preceded by a
+.BR '!' 
+character, the
+.BR write
+shall be to a file.
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the
+.BR >>
+argument is specified, and the file already exists, the lines shall be
+appended to the file instead of replacing its contents. If the
+.BR >>
+argument is specified, and the file does not already exist, it is
+unspecified whether the write shall proceed as if the
+.BR >>
+argument had not been specified or if the write shall fail.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the
+.BR readonly
+edit option is set (see
+.IR "readonly"),
+the
+.BR write
+shall fail.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If
+.IR file
+is specified, and is not the current pathname, and the file exists,
+the
+.BR write
+shall fail.
+.IP " 4." 4
+If
+.IR file
+is not specified, the current pathname shall be used. If there is no
+current pathname, the
+.BR write
+command shall fail.
+.IP " 5." 4
+If the current pathname is used, and the current pathname has been
+changed by the
+.BR file
+or
+.BR read
+commands, and the file exists, the
+.BR write
+shall fail. If the
+.BR write
+is successful, subsequent
+.BR write s
+shall not fail for this reason (unless the current pathname is changed
+again).
+.IP " 6." 4
+If the whole edit buffer is not being written, and the file to be
+written exists, the
+.BR write
+shall fail.
+.P
+For rules 1., 2., 3., and 5., the
+.BR write
+can be forced by appending the character
+.BR '!' 
+to the command name.
+.P
+For rules 2., 3., and 5., the
+.BR write
+can be forced by setting the
+.BR writeany
+edit option.
+.P
+Additional, implementation-defined tests may cause the
+.BR write
+to fail.
+.P
+If the edit buffer is empty, a file without any contents shall be written.
+.P
+An informational message shall be written noting the number of lines
+and bytes written.
+.P
+Otherwise, if the command is followed by one or more
+<blank>
+characters, and the file is preceded by
+.BR '!' ,
+the rest of the line after the
+.BR '!' 
+shall have
+.BR '%' ,
+.BR '#' ,
+and
+.BR '!' 
+characters expanded as described in
+.IR "Command Line Parsing in ex".
+.P
+The
+.IR ex
+utility shall then pass two arguments to the program named by the
+.BR shell
+edit option; the first shall be
+.BR \(mic
+and the second shall be the expanded arguments to the
+.BR write
+command as a single argument. The specified lines shall be written to
+the standard input of the command. The standard error and standard
+output of the program, if any, shall be written as described for the
+.BR print
+command. If the last character in that output is not a
+<newline>,
+a
+<newline>
+shall be written at the end of the output.
+.P
+The special meaning of the
+.BR '!' 
+following the
+.BR write
+command can be overridden by escaping it with a
+<backslash>
+character.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Write and Exit"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI2addr\fB] \fRx\fB[\fRit\fB][\fR!\fB][\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the edit buffer has not been modified since the last complete
+.BR write ,
+.BR xit
+shall be equivalent to the
+.BR quit
+command, or if a
+.BR '!' 
+is appended to the command name, to
+.BR quit! .
+.P
+Otherwise,
+.BR xit
+shall be equivalent to the
+.BR wq
+command, or if a
+.BR '!' 
+is appended to the command name, to
+.BR wq! .
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Yank"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI2addr\fB] \fRya\fB[\fRnk\fB][\fIbuffer\fB][\fIcount\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Copy the specified lines to the specified buffer (by default, the
+unnamed buffer), which shall become a line-mode buffer.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Adjust Window"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI1addr\fB] \fRz\fB[\fR!\fB][\fItype \fR...\fB][\fIcount\fB][\fIflags\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If no line is specified, the current line shall be the default; if
+.IR type
+is omitted as well, the current line value shall first be incremented
+by 1. If incrementing the current line would cause it to be greater
+than the last line in the edit buffer, it shall be an error.
+.P
+If there are
+<blank>
+characters between the
+.IR type
+argument and the preceding
+.BR z
+command name or optional
+.BR '!' 
+character, it shall be an error.
+.P
+If
+.IR count
+is specified, the value of the
+.BR window
+edit option shall be set to
+.IR count
+(as described in
+.IR "window").
+If
+.IR count
+is omitted, it shall default to 2 times the value of the
+.BR scroll
+edit option, or if
+.BR !
+was specified, the number of lines in the display minus 1.
+.P
+If
+.IR type
+is omitted, then
+.IR count
+lines starting with the specified line shall be written. Otherwise,
+.IR count
+lines starting with the line specified by the
+.IR type
+argument shall be written.
+.P
+The
+.IR type
+argument shall change the lines to be written. The possible values of
+.IR type
+are as follows:
+.IP "\fR\(mi\fP" 6
+The specified line shall be decremented by the following value:
+.RS 6 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(((number of ``\(mi'' characters) x \fIcount\fR) \(mi1)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the calculation would result in a number less than 1, it shall be an
+error. Write lines from the edit buffer, starting at the new value of
+line, until
+.IR count
+lines or the last line in the edit buffer has been written.
+.RE
+.IP "\fR+\fP" 6
+The specified line shall be incremented by the following value:
+.RS 6 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(((number of ``+'' characters) \(mi1) x \fIcount\fR) +1
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the calculation would result in a number greater than the last line
+in the edit buffer, it shall be an error. Write lines from the edit
+buffer, starting at the new value of line, until
+.IR count
+lines or the last line in the edit buffer has been written.
+.RE
+.IP "\fR=\fR,\fR.\fR" 6
+If more than a single
+.BR '.' 
+or
+.BR '=' 
+is specified, it shall be an error. The following steps shall be
+taken:
+.RS 6 
+.IP " 1." 4
+If
+.IR count
+is zero, nothing shall be written.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Write as many of the
+.IR N
+lines before the current line in the edit buffer as exist. If
+.IR count
+or
+.BR '!' 
+was specified,
+.IR N
+shall be:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(\fIcount\fR \(mi1) /2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Otherwise,
+.IR N
+shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(\fIcount\fP \(mi3) /2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.IR N
+is a number less than 3, no lines shall be written.
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+If
+.BR '=' 
+was specified as the type character, write a line consisting of the
+smaller of the number of columns in the display divided by two, or 40
+.BR '\(mi' 
+characters.
+.IP " 4." 4
+Write the current line.
+.IP " 5." 4
+Repeat step 3.
+.IP " 6." 4
+Write as many of the
+.IR N
+lines after the current line in the edit buffer as exist.
+.IR N
+shall be defined as in step 2. If
+.IR N
+is a number less than 3, no lines shall be written. If
+.IR count
+is less than 3, no lines shall be written.
+.RE
+.IP "\fR^\fP" 6
+The specified line shall be decremented by the following value:
+.RS 6 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(((number of ``^'' characters) +1) x \fIcount\fR) \(mi1
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the calculation would result in a number less than 1, it shall be an
+error. Write lines from the edit buffer, starting at the new value of
+line, until
+.IR count
+lines or the last line in the edit buffer has been written.
+.RE
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the last line written, unless the type is
+.BR = ,
+in which case, set to the specified line.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Escape"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+! \fIcommand
+\fB[\fIaddr\fB]\fR! \fIcommand\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The contents of the line after the
+.BR '!' 
+shall have
+.BR '%' ,
+.BR '#' ,
+and
+.BR '!' 
+characters expanded as described in
+.IR "Command Line Parsing in ex".
+If the expansion causes the text of the line to change, it shall be
+redisplayed, preceded by a single
+.BR '!' 
+character.
+.P
+The
+.IR ex
+utility shall execute the program named by the
+.BR shell
+edit option. It shall pass two arguments to the program; the first
+shall be
+.BR \(mic ,
+and the second shall be the expanded arguments to the
+.BR !
+command as a single argument.
+.P
+If no lines are specified, the standard input, standard output, and
+standard error of the program shall be set to the standard input,
+standard output, and standard error of the
+.IR ex
+program when it was invoked. In addition, a warning message shall be
+written if the edit buffer has been modified since the last complete
+write, and the
+.BR warn
+edit option is set.
+.P
+If lines are specified, they shall be passed to the program as standard
+input, and the standard output and standard error of the program shall
+replace those lines in the edit buffer. Each line in the program output
+(as delimited by
+<newline>
+characters or the end of the output if it is not immediately preceded by a
+<newline>),
+shall be a separate line in the edit buffer. Any occurrences of
+<carriage-return>
+and
+<newline>
+pairs in the output shall be treated as single
+<newline>
+characters. The specified lines shall be copied into the unnamed buffer
+before they are replaced, and the unnamed buffer shall become a line-mode
+buffer.
+.P
+If in
+.IR ex
+mode, a single
+.BR '!' 
+character shall be written when the program completes.
+.P
+This command shall be affected by the
+.BR shell
+and
+.BR warn
+edit options. If no lines are specified, this command shall be affected
+by the
+.BR autowrite
+and
+.BR writeany
+edit options. If lines are specified, this command shall be affected by
+the
+.BR autoprint
+edit option.
+.br
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+.IP " 1." 4
+If no lines are specified, unchanged.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise, set to the last line read in, if any lines are read in.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Otherwise, set to the line before the first line of the lines
+specified, if that line exists.
+.IP " 4." 4
+Otherwise, set to the first line of the edit buffer if the edit buffer
+is not empty.
+.IP " 5." 4
+Otherwise, set to zero.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+If no lines are specified, unchanged. Otherwise, set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Shift Left"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI2addr\fB]\fR <\fB[\fR< ...\fB][\fIcount\fB][\fIflags\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Shift the specified lines to the start of the line; the number of
+column positions to be shifted shall be the number of command
+characters times the value of the
+.BR shiftwidth
+edit option. Only leading
+<blank>
+characters shall be deleted or changed into other
+<blank>
+characters in shifting; other characters shall not be affected.
+.P
+Lines to be shifted shall be copied into the unnamed buffer, which
+shall become a line-mode buffer.
+.P
+This command shall be affected by the
+.BR autoprint
+edit option.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the last line in the lines specified.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Shift Right"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI2addr\fB]\fR >\fB[\fR> ...\fB][\fIcount\fB][\fIflags\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Shift the specified lines away from the start of the line; the number
+of column positions to be shifted shall be the number of command
+characters times the value of the
+.BR shiftwidth
+edit option. The shift shall be accomplished by adding
+<blank>
+characters as a prefix to the line or changing leading
+<blank>
+characters into other
+<blank>
+characters. Empty lines shall not be changed.
+.P
+Lines to be shifted shall be copied into the unnamed buffer, which
+shall become a line-mode buffer.
+.P
+This command shall be affected by the
+.BR autoprint
+edit option.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the last line in the lines specified.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "<control>\(hyD"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<control>-D
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Write the next
+.IR n
+lines, where
+.IR n
+is the minimum of the values of the
+.BR scroll
+edit option and the number of lines after the current line in the edit
+buffer. If the current line is the last line of the edit buffer it
+shall be an error.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the last line written.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Write Line Number"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI1addr\fB] \fR= \fB[\fIflags\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.IR line
+is not specified, it shall default to the last line in the edit buffer.
+Write the line number of the specified line.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Execute"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fI2addr\fB]\fR @ \fIbuffer\fR
+\fB[\fI2addr\fB]\fR * \fIbuffer\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If no buffer is specified or is specified as
+.BR '@' 
+or
+.BR '*' ,
+the last buffer executed shall be used. If no previous buffer has been
+executed, it shall be an error.
+.P
+For each line specified by the addresses, set the current line (\c
+.BR '.' )
+to the specified line, and execute the contents of the named
+.IR buffer
+(as they were at the time the
+.BR @
+command was executed) as
+.IR ex
+commands. For each line of a line-mode buffer, and all but the last
+line of a character-mode buffer, the
+.IR ex
+command parser shall behave as if the line was terminated by a
+<newline>.
+.P
+If an error occurs during this process, or a line specified by the
+addresses does not exist when the current line would be set to it, or
+more than a single line was specified by the addresses, and the
+contents of the edit buffer are replaced (for example, by the
+.IR ex
+.BR :edit
+command) an error message shall be written, and no more commands
+resulting from the execution of this command shall be processed.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+As specified for the individual
+.IR ex
+commands.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+As specified for the individual
+.IR ex
+commands.
+.SS "Regular Expressions in ex"
+.P
+The
+.IR ex
+utility shall support regular expressions that are a superset of the
+basic regular expressions described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 9.3" ", " "Basic Regular Expressions".
+A null regular expression (\c
+.BR \(dq//\(dq )
+shall be equivalent to the last regular expression encountered.
+.P
+Regular expressions can be used in addresses to specify lines and, in
+some commands (for example, the
+.BR substitute
+command), to specify portions of a line to be substituted.
+.P
+The following constructs can be used to enhance the basic regular
+expressions:
+.IP "\fR\e<\fR" 6
+Match the beginning of a
+.IR word .
+(See the definition of
+.IR word
+at the beginning of
+.IR "Command Descriptions in ex".)
+.IP "\fR\e>\fR" 6
+Match the end of a
+.IR word .
+.IP "\fR~\fR" 6
+Match the replacement part of the last
+.BR substitute
+command. The
+<tilde>
+(\c
+.BR '~' )
+character can be escaped in a regular expression to become a normal
+character with no special meaning. The
+<backslash>
+shall be discarded.
+.P
+When the editor option
+.BR magic
+is not set, the only characters with special meanings shall be
+.BR '^' 
+at the beginning of a pattern,
+.BR '$' 
+at the end of a pattern, and
+<backslash>.
+The characters
+.BR '.' ,
+.BR '*' ,
+.BR '[' ,
+and
+.BR '~' 
+shall be treated as ordinary characters unless preceded by a
+<backslash>;
+when preceded by a
+<backslash>
+they shall regain their special meaning, or in the case of
+<backslash>,
+be handled as a single
+<backslash>.
+<backslash>
+characters used to escape other characters shall be discarded.
+.SS "Replacement Strings in ex"
+.P
+The character
+.BR '&' 
+(\c
+.BR '\e&' 
+if the editor option
+.BR magic
+is not set) in the replacement string shall stand for the text matched
+by the pattern to be replaced. The character
+.BR '~' 
+(\c
+.BR '\e~' 
+if
+.BR magic
+is not set) shall be replaced by the replacement part of the previous
+.BR substitute
+command. The sequence
+.BR '\en' ,
+where
+.IR n
+is an integer, shall be replaced by the text matched by the
+corresponding back-reference expression. If the corresponding
+back-reference expression does not match, then the characters
+.BR '\en' 
+shall be replaced by the empty string.
+.P
+The strings
+.BR '\el' ,
+.BR '\eu' ,
+.BR '\eL' ,
+and
+.BR '\eU' 
+can be used to modify the case of elements in the replacement string
+(using the
+.BR '\e&' 
+or
+.BR \(dq\e\(dq digit)
+notation. The string
+.BR '\el' 
+(\c
+.BR '\eu' )
+shall cause the character that follows to be converted to lowercase
+(uppercase). The string
+.BR '\eL' 
+(\c
+.BR '\eU' )
+shall cause all characters subsequent to it to be converted to
+lowercase (uppercase) as they are inserted by the substitution until
+the string
+.BR '\ee' 
+or
+.BR '\eE' ,
+or the end of the replacement string, is encountered.
+.P
+Otherwise, any character following a
+<backslash>
+shall be treated as that literal character, and the escaping
+<backslash>
+shall be discarded.
+.P
+An example of case conversion with the
+.BR s
+command is as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB:\fRp
+\fBThe cat sat on the mat.
+\fB:\fRs/\e<.at\e>/\eu&/gp
+\fBThe Cat Sat on the Mat.
+\fB:\fRs/S\e(.*\e)M/S\eU\e1\eeM/p
+\fBThe Cat SAT ON THE Mat.\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Edit Options in ex"
+.P
+The
+.IR ex
+utility has a number of options that modify its behavior. These options
+have default settings, which can be changed using the
+.BR set
+command.
+.P
+Options are Boolean unless otherwise specified.
+.SS "autoindent, ai"
+.P
+[Default \fIunset\fR]
+.P
+If
+.BR autoindent
+is set, each line in input mode shall be indented (using first as many
+<tab>
+characters as possible, as determined by the editor option
+.BR tabstop ,
+and then using
+<space>
+characters) to align with another line, as follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If in open or visual mode and the text input is part of a line-oriented
+command (see the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION in
+.IR "\fIvi\fR\^"),
+align to the first column.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise, if in open or visual mode, indentation for each line shall
+be set as follows:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+If a line was previously inserted as part of this command, it shall be
+set to the indentation of the last inserted line by default, or as
+otherwise specified for the
+<control>\(hyD
+character in
+.IR "Input Mode Commands in vi".
+.IP " b." 4
+Otherwise, it shall be set to the indentation of the previous current
+line, if any; otherwise, to the first column.
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+For the
+.IR ex
+.BR a ,
+.BR i ,
+and
+.BR c
+commands, indentation for each line shall be set as follows:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+If a line was previously inserted as part of this command, it shall be
+set to the indentation of the last inserted line by default, or as
+otherwise specified for the
+.IR eof
+character in
+.IR "Scroll".
+.IP " b." 4
+Otherwise, if the command is the
+.IR ex
+.BR a
+command, it shall be set to the line appended after, if any; otherwise
+to the first column.
+.IP " c." 4
+Otherwise, if the command is the
+.IR ex
+.BR i
+command, it shall be set to the line inserted before, if any; otherwise
+to the first column.
+.IP " d." 4
+Otherwise, if the command is the
+.IR ex
+.BR c
+command, it shall be set to the indentation of the line replaced.
+.RE
+.SS "autoprint, ap"
+.P
+[Default \fIset\fR]
+.P
+If
+.BR autoprint
+is set, the current line shall be written after each
+.IR ex
+command that modifies the contents of the current edit buffer, and
+after each
+.BR tag
+command for which the tag search pattern was found or tag line number
+was valid, unless:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The command was executed while in open or visual mode.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The command was executed as part of a
+.BR global
+or
+.BR v
+command or
+.BR @
+buffer execution.
+.IP " 3." 4
+The command was the form of the
+.BR read
+command that reads a file into the edit buffer.
+.IP " 4." 4
+The command was the
+.BR append ,
+.BR change ,
+or
+.BR insert
+command.
+.IP " 5." 4
+The command was not terminated by a
+<newline>.
+.IP " 6." 4
+The current line shall be written by a flag specified to the command;
+for example,
+.BR "delete #"
+shall write the current line as specified for the flag modifier to the
+.BR delete
+command, and not as specified by the
+.BR autoprint
+edit option.
+.SS "autowrite, aw"
+.P
+[Default \fIunset\fR]
+.P
+If
+.BR autowrite
+is set, and the edit buffer has been modified since it was last
+completely written to any file, the contents of the edit buffer shall
+be written as if the
+.IR ex
+.BR write
+command had been specified without arguments, before each command
+affected by the
+.BR autowrite
+edit option is executed. Appending the character
+.BR '!' 
+to the command name of any of the
+.IR ex
+commands except
+.BR '!' 
+shall prevent the write. If the write fails, it shall be an error and
+the command shall not be executed.
+.SS "beautify, bf"
+.P
+[Default \fIunset\fR]
+.P
+If
+.BR beautify
+is set, all non-printable characters, other than
+<tab>,
+<newline>,
+and
+<form-feed>
+characters, shall be discarded from text read in from files.
+.SS "directory, dir"
+.P
+[Default \fIimplementation-defined\fR]
+.P
+The value of this option specifies the directory in which the editor
+buffer is to be placed. If this directory is not writable by the user,
+the editor shall quit.
+.SS "edcompatible, ed"
+.P
+[Default \fIunset\fR]
+.P
+Causes the presence of
+.BR g
+and
+.BR c
+suffixes on substitute commands to be remembered, and toggled by
+repeating the suffixes.
+.SS "errorbells, eb"
+.P
+[Default \fIunset\fR]
+.P
+If the editor is in
+.IR ex
+mode, and the terminal does not support a standout mode (such as
+inverse video), and
+.BR errorbells
+is set, error messages shall be preceded by alerting the terminal.
+.SS "exrc"
+.P
+[Default \fIunset\fR]
+.P
+If
+.BR exrc
+is set,
+.IR ex
+shall access any
+.BR .exrc
+file in the current directory, as described in
+.IR "Initialization in ex and vi".
+If
+.BR exrc
+is not set,
+.IR ex
+shall ignore any
+.BR .exrc
+file in the current directory during initialization, unless the current
+directory is that named by the
+.IR HOME
+environment variable.
+.SS "ignorecase, ic"
+.P
+[Default \fIunset\fR]
+.P
+If
+.BR ignorecase
+is set, characters that have uppercase and lowercase representations
+shall have those representations considered as equivalent for purposes
+of regular expression comparison.
+.P
+The
+.BR ignorecase
+edit option shall affect all remembered regular expressions; for
+example, unsetting the
+.BR ignorecase
+edit option shall cause a subsequent
+.IR vi
+.BR n
+command to search for the last basic regular expression in a
+case-sensitive fashion.
+.SS "list"
+.P
+[Default \fIunset\fR]
+.P
+If
+.BR list
+is set, edit buffer lines written while in
+.IR ex
+command mode shall be written as specified for the
+.BR print
+command with the
+.BR l
+flag specified. In open or visual mode, each edit buffer line shall be
+displayed as specified for the
+.IR ex
+.BR print
+command with the
+.BR l
+flag specified. In open or visual text input mode, when the cursor
+does not rest on any character in the line, it shall rest on the
+.BR '$' 
+marking the end of the line.
+.SS "magic"
+.P
+[Default \fIset\fR]
+.P
+If
+.BR magic
+is set, modify the interpretation of characters in regular expressions
+and substitution replacement strings (see
+.IR "Regular Expressions in ex"
+and
+.IR "Replacement Strings in ex").
+.SS "mesg"
+.P
+[Default \fIset\fR]
+.P
+If
+.BR mesg
+is set, the permission for others to use the
+.BR write
+or
+.BR talk
+commands to write to the terminal shall be turned on while in open or
+visual mode. The shell-level command
+.IR mesg
+.BR n
+shall take precedence over any setting of the
+.IR ex
+.BR mesg
+option; that is, if
+.BR "mesg y"
+was issued before the editor started (or in a shell escape), such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+:!mesg y
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+the
+.BR mesg
+option in
+.IR ex
+shall suppress incoming messages, but the
+.BR mesg
+option shall not enable incoming messages if
+.BR "mesg n"
+was issued.
+.SS "number, nu"
+.P
+[Default \fIunset\fR]
+.P
+If
+.BR number
+is set, edit buffer lines written while in
+.IR ex
+command mode shall be written with line numbers, in the format
+specified by the
+.BR print
+command with the
+.BR #
+flag specified. In
+.IR ex
+text input mode, each line shall be preceded by the line number it will
+have in the file.
+.P
+In open or visual mode, each edit buffer line shall be displayed with a
+preceding line number, in the format specified by the
+.IR ex
+.BR print
+command with the
+.BR #
+flag specified. This line number shall not be considered part of the
+line for the purposes of evaluating the current column; that is, column
+position 1 shall be the first column position after the format
+specified by the
+.BR print
+command.
+.SS "paragraphs, para"
+.P
+[Default in the POSIX locale \fRIPLPPPQPP LIpplpipbp\fR]
+.P
+The
+.BR paragraphs
+edit option shall define additional paragraph boundaries for the open
+and visual mode commands. The
+.BR paragraphs
+edit option can be set to a character string consisting of zero or more
+character pairs. It shall be an error to set it to an odd number of
+characters.
+.SS "prompt"
+.P
+[Default \fIset\fR]
+.P
+If
+.BR prompt
+is set,
+.IR ex
+command mode input shall be prompted for with a
+<colon>
+(\c
+.BR ':' );
+when unset, no prompt shall be written.
+.SS "readonly"
+.P
+[Default \fIsee text\fR]
+.P
+If the
+.BR readonly
+edit option is set, read-only mode shall be enabled (see
+.IR "Write").
+The
+.BR readonly
+edit option shall be initialized to set if either of the following
+conditions are true:
+.IP " *" 4
+The command-line option
+\(miR
+was specified.
+.IP " *" 4
+Performing actions equivalent to the
+\fIaccess\fR()
+function called with the following arguments indicates that the file
+lacks write permission:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " 1." 4
+The current pathname is used as the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The constant
+.BR W_OK
+is used as the
+.IR amode
+argument.
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR readonly
+edit option may be initialized to set for other,
+implementation-defined reasons. The
+.BR readonly
+edit option shall not be initialized to unset based on any special
+privileges of the user or process. The
+.BR readonly
+edit option shall be reinitialized each time that the contents of the
+edit buffer are replaced (for example, by an
+.BR edit
+or
+.BR next
+command) unless the user has explicitly set it, in which case it shall
+remain set until the user explicitly unsets it. Once unset, it shall
+again be reinitialized each time that the contents of the edit buffer
+are replaced.
+.SS "redraw"
+.P
+[Default \fIunset\fR]
+.P
+The editor simulates an intelligent terminal on a dumb terminal.
+(Since this is likely to require a large amount of output to the
+terminal, it is useful only at high transmission speeds.)
+.SS "remap"
+.P
+[Default \fIset\fR]
+.P
+If
+.BR remap
+is set, map translation shall allow for maps defined in terms of other
+maps; translation shall continue until a final product is obtained. If
+unset, only a one-step translation shall be done.
+.SS "report"
+.P
+[Default 5]
+.P
+The value of this
+.BR report
+edit option specifies what number of lines being added, copied,
+deleted, or modified in the edit buffer will cause an informational
+message to be written to the user. The following conditions shall cause
+an informational message. The message shall contain the number of lines
+added, copied, deleted, or modified, but is otherwise unspecified.
+.IP " *" 4
+An
+.IR ex
+or
+.IR vi
+editor command, other than
+.BR open ,
+.BR undo ,
+or
+.BR visual ,
+that modifies at least the value of the
+.BR report
+edit option number of lines, and which is not part of an
+.IR ex
+.BR global
+or
+.BR v
+command, or
+.IR ex
+or
+.IR vi
+buffer execution, shall cause an informational message to be written.
+.IP " *" 4
+An
+.IR ex
+.BR yank
+or
+.IR vi
+.BR y
+or
+.BR Y
+command, that copies at least the value of the
+.BR report
+edit option plus 1 number of lines, and which is not part of an
+.IR ex
+.BR global
+or
+.BR v
+command, or
+.IR ex
+or
+.IR vi
+buffer execution, shall cause an informational message to be written.
+.IP " *" 4
+An
+.IR ex
+.BR global ,
+.BR v ,
+.BR open ,
+.BR undo ,
+or
+.BR visual
+command or
+.IR ex
+or
+.IR vi
+buffer execution, that adds or deletes a total of at least the value of
+the
+.BR report
+edit option number of lines, and which is not part of an
+.IR ex
+.BR global
+or
+.BR v
+command, or
+.IR ex
+or
+.IR vi
+buffer execution, shall cause an informational message to be written.
+(For example, if 3 lines were added and 8 lines deleted during an
+.IR ex
+.BR visual
+command, 5 would be the number compared against the
+.BR report
+edit option after the command completed.)
+.SS "scroll, scr"
+.P
+[Default (number of lines in the display \(mi1)/2]
+.P
+The value of the
+.BR scroll
+edit option shall determine the number of lines scrolled by the
+.IR ex
+<control>\(hyD
+and
+.BR z
+commands. For the
+.IR vi
+<control>\(hyD
+and
+<control>\(hyU
+commands, it shall be the initial number of lines to scroll when no
+previous
+<control>\(hyD
+or
+<control>\(hyU
+command has been executed.
+.SS "sections"
+.P
+[Default in the POSIX locale \fRNHSHH HUnhsh\fR]
+.P
+The
+.BR sections
+edit option shall define additional section boundaries for the open and
+visual mode commands. The
+.BR sections
+edit option can be set to a character string consisting of zero or more
+character pairs; it shall be an error to set it to an odd number of
+characters.
+.SS "shell, sh"
+.P
+[Default from the environment variable
+.IR SHELL ]
+.P
+The value of this option shall be a string. The default shall be taken
+from the
+.IR SHELL
+environment variable. If the
+.IR SHELL
+environment variable is null or empty, the
+.IR sh
+(see
+.IR "\fIsh\fR\^")
+utility shall be the default.
+.SS "shiftwidth, sw"
+.P
+[Default 8]
+.P
+The value of this option shall give the width in columns of an
+indentation level used during autoindentation and by the shift commands
+(\c
+.BR <
+and
+.BR > ).
+.SS "showmatch, sm"
+.P
+[Default \fIunset\fR]
+.P
+The functionality described for the
+.BR showmatch
+edit option need not be supported on block-mode terminals or terminals
+with insufficient capabilities.
+.P
+If
+.BR showmatch
+is set, in open or visual mode, when a
+.BR ')' 
+or
+.BR '}' 
+is typed, if the matching
+.BR '(' 
+or
+.BR '{' 
+is currently visible on the display, the matching
+.BR '(' 
+or
+.BR '{' 
+shall be flagged moving the cursor to its location for an unspecified
+amount of time.
+.SS "showmode"
+.P
+[Default \fIunset\fP]
+.P
+If
+.BR showmode
+is set, in open or visual mode, the current mode that the editor is in
+shall be displayed on the last line of the display. Command mode and
+text input mode shall be differentiated; other unspecified modes and
+implementation-defined information may be displayed.
+.SS "slowopen"
+.P
+[Default \fIunset\fR]
+.P
+If
+.BR slowopen
+is set during open and visual text input modes, the editor shall not
+update portions of the display other than those display line columns
+that display the characters entered by the user (see
+.IR "Input Mode Commands in vi").
+.SS "tabstop, ts"
+.P
+[Default 8]
+.P
+The value of this edit option shall specify the column boundary used by
+a
+<tab>
+in the display (see
+.IR "autoprint" ", " "ap"
+and
+.IR "Input Mode Commands in vi").
+.SS "taglength, tl"
+.P
+[Default zero]
+.P
+The value of this edit option shall specify the maximum number of
+characters that are considered significant in the user-specified tag
+name and in the tag name from the tags file. If the value is zero, all
+characters in both tag names shall be significant.
+.SS "tags"
+.P
+[Default \fIsee text\fP]
+.P
+The value of this edit option shall be a string of
+<blank>-delimited
+pathnames of files used by the
+.BR tag
+command. The default value is unspecified.
+.SS "term"
+.P
+[Default from the environment variable
+.IR TERM ]
+.P
+The value of this edit option shall be a string. The default shall be
+taken from the
+.IR TERM
+variable in the environment. If the
+.IR TERM
+environment variable is empty or null, the default is unspecified. The
+editor shall use the value of this edit option to determine the type of
+the display device.
+.P
+The results are unspecified if the user changes the value of the term
+edit option after editor initialization.
+.SS "terse"
+.P
+[Default \fIunset\fR]
+.P
+If
+.BR terse
+is set, error messages may be less verbose. However, except for this
+caveat, error messages are unspecified. Furthermore, not all error
+messages need change for different settings of this option.
+.SS "warn"
+.P
+[Default \fIset\fR]
+.P
+If
+.BR warn
+is set, and the contents of the edit buffer have been modified since
+they were last completely written, the editor shall write a warning
+message before certain
+.BR !
+commands (see
+.IR "Escape").
+.SS "window"
+.P
+[Default \fIsee text\fR]
+.P
+A value used in open and visual mode, by the
+<control>\(hyB
+and
+<control>\(hyF
+commands, and, in visual mode, to specify the number of lines displayed
+when the screen is repainted.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(miw
+command-line option is not specified, the default value shall be set to
+the value of the
+.IR LINES
+environment variable. If the
+.IR LINES
+environment variable is empty or null, the default shall be the number
+of lines in the display minus 1.
+.P
+Setting the
+.BR window
+edit option to zero or to a value greater than the number of lines in
+the display minus 1 (either explicitly or based on the
+.BR \(miw
+option or the
+.IR LINES
+environment variable) shall cause the
+.BR window
+edit option to be set to the number of lines in the display minus 1.
+.P
+The baud rate of the terminal line may change the default in an
+implementation-defined manner.
+.SS "wrapmargin, wm"
+.P
+[Default 0]
+.P
+If the value of this edit option is zero, it shall have no effect.
+.P
+If not in the POSIX locale, the effect of this edit option is
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+Otherwise, it shall specify a number of columns from the ending margin
+of the terminal.
+.P
+During open and visual text input modes, for each character for which
+any part of the character is displayed in a column that is less than
+.BR wrapmargin
+columns from the ending margin of the display line, the editor shall
+behave as follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the character triggering this event is a
+<blank>,
+it, and all immediately preceding
+<blank>
+characters on the current line entered during the execution of the
+current text input command, shall be discarded, and the editor shall
+behave as if the user had entered a single
+<newline>
+instead. In addition, if the next user-entered character is a
+<space>,
+it shall be discarded as well.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise, if there are one or more
+<blank>
+characters on the current line immediately preceding the last group of
+inserted non-\c
+<blank>
+characters which was entered during the execution of the current text
+input command, the
+<blank>
+characters shall be replaced as if the user had entered a single
+<newline>
+instead.
+.P
+If the
+.BR autoindent
+edit option is set, and the events described in 1. or 2. are performed,
+any
+<blank>
+characters at or after the cursor in the current line shall be discarded.
+.P
+The ending margin shall be determined by the system or overridden by
+the user, as described for
+.IR COLUMNS
+in the ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES section and the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables".
+.SS "wrapscan, ws"
+.P
+[Default \fIset\fR]
+.P
+If
+.BR wrapscan
+is set, searches (the
+.IR ex
+.BR /
+or
+.BR ?
+addresses, or open and visual mode
+.BR / ,
+.BR ? ,
+.BR N ,
+and
+.BR n
+commands) shall wrap around the beginning or end of the edit buffer;
+when unset, searches shall stop at the beginning or end of the edit
+buffer.
+.SS "writeany, wa"
+.P
+[Default \fIunset\fR]
+.P
+If
+.BR writeany
+is set, some of the checks performed when executing the
+.IR ex
+.BR write
+commands shall be inhibited, as described in editor option
+.BR autowrite .
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+When any error is encountered and the standard input is not a terminal
+device file,
+.IR ex
+shall not write the file or return to command or text input mode, and
+shall terminate with a non-zero exit status.
+.P
+Otherwise, when an unrecoverable error is encountered, it shall be
+equivalent to a SIGHUP asynchronous event.
+.P
+Otherwise, when an error is encountered, the editor shall behave as
+specified in
+.IR "Command Line Parsing in ex".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If a SIGSEGV signal is received while
+.IR ex
+is saving a file, the file might not be successfully saved.
+.P
+The
+.BR next
+command can accept more than one file, so usage such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+next `ls [abc]*`
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+is valid; it would not be valid for the
+.BR edit
+or
+.BR read
+commands, for example, because they expect only one file and
+unspecified results occur.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR ex /\c
+.IR vi
+specification is based on the historical practice found in the 4 BSD and
+System V implementations of
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi .
+.P
+A
+.IR "restricted editor"
+(both the historical
+.IR red
+utility and modifications to
+.IR ex )
+were considered and rejected for inclusion. Neither option provided the
+level of security that users might expect.
+.P
+It is recognized that
+.IR ex
+visual mode and related features would be difficult, if not impossible,
+to implement satisfactorily on a block-mode terminal, or a terminal
+without any form of cursor addressing; thus, it is not a mandatory
+requirement that such features should work on all terminals. It is the
+intention, however, that an
+.IR ex
+implementation should provide the full set of capabilities on all
+terminals capable of supporting them.
+.SS "Options"
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mic
+replacement for
+.BR + \c
+.IR command
+was inspired by the
+.BR \(mie
+option of
+.IR sed .
+Historically, all such commands (see
+.BR edit
+and
+.BR next
+as well) were executed from the last line of the edit buffer. This
+meant, for example, that
+.BR \(dq+/pattern\(dq 
+would fail unless the
+.BR wrapscan
+option was set. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice. The
+.BR \(pl \c
+.IR command
+option is no longer specified by POSIX.1\(hy2008 but may be present in
+some implementations. Historically, some implementations restricted the
+.IR ex
+commands that could be listed as part of the command line arguments.
+For consistency, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit these restrictions.
+.P
+In historical implementations of the editor, the
+.BR \(miR
+option (and the
+.BR readonly
+edit option) only prevented overwriting of files; appending to files
+was still permitted, mapping loosely into the
+.IR csh
+.BR noclobber
+variable. Some implementations, however, have not followed this
+semantic, and
+.BR readonly
+does not permit appending either. POSIX.1\(hy2008 follows the latter practice,
+believing that it is a more obvious and intuitive meaning of
+.BR readonly .
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mis
+option suppresses all interactive user feedback and is useful for
+editing scripts in batch jobs. The list of specific effects is
+historical practice. The terminal type ``incapable of supporting open
+and visual modes'' has historically been named ``dumb''.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mit
+option was required because the
+.IR ctags
+utility appears in POSIX.1\(hy2008 and the option is available in all historical
+implementations of
+.IR ex .
+.P
+Historically, the
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+utilities accepted a
+.BR \(mix
+option, which did encryption based on the algorithm found in the
+historical
+.IR crypt
+utility. The
+.BR \(mix
+option for encryption, and the associated
+.IR crypt
+utility, were omitted because the algorithm used was not specifiable
+and the export control laws of some nations make it difficult to export
+cryptographic technology. In addition, it did not historically provide
+the level of security that users might expect.
+.SS "Standard Input"
+.P
+An end-of-file condition is not equivalent to an end-of-file character.
+A common end-of-file character,
+<control>\(hyD,
+is historically an
+.IR ex
+command.
+.P
+There was no maximum line length in historical implementations of
+.IR ex .
+Specifically, as it was parsed in chunks, the addresses had a different
+maximum length than the filenames. Further, the maximum line buffer
+size was declared as BUFSIZ, which was different lengths on different
+systems. This version selected the value of
+{LINE_MAX}
+to impose a reasonable restriction on portable usage of
+.IR ex
+and to aid test suite writers in their development of realistic tests
+that exercise this limit.
+.SS "Input Files"
+.P
+It was an explicit decision by the standard developers that a
+<newline>
+be added to any file lacking one. It was believed that this feature of
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+was relied on by users in order to make text files lacking a trailing
+<newline>
+more portable. It is recognized that this will require a user-specified
+option or extension for implementations that permit
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+to edit files of type other than text if such files are not otherwise
+identified by the system. It was agreed that the ability to edit files
+of arbitrary type can be useful, but it was not considered necessary to
+mandate that an
+.IR ex
+or
+.IR vi
+implementation be required to handle files other than text files.
+.P
+The paragraph in the INPUT FILES section, ``By default, .\|.\|.'', is
+intended to close a long-standing security problem in
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi ;
+that of the ``modeline'' or ``modelines'' edit option. This feature
+allows any line in the first or last five lines of the file containing
+the strings
+.BR \(dqex:\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dqvi:\(dq 
+(and, apparently,
+.BR \(dqei:\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dqvx:\(dq )
+to be a line containing editor commands, and
+.IR ex
+interprets all the text up to the next
+.BR ':' 
+or
+<newline>
+as a command. Consider the consequences, for example, of an
+unsuspecting user using
+.IR ex
+or
+.IR vi
+as the editor when replying to a mail message in which a line such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ex:! rm \(mirf :
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+appeared in the signature lines. The standard developers believed
+strongly that an editor should not by default interpret any lines of a
+file. Vendors are strongly urged to delete this feature from their
+implementations of
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi .
+.SS "Asynchronous Events"
+.P
+The intention of the phrase ``complete write'' is that the entire edit
+buffer be written to stable storage. The note regarding temporary files
+is intended for implementations that use temporary files to back edit
+buffers unnamed by the user.
+.P
+Historically, SIGQUIT was ignored by
+.IR ex ,
+but was the equivalent of the
+.BR Q
+command in visual mode; that is, it exited visual mode and entered
+.IR ex
+mode. POSIX.1\(hy2008 permits, but does not require, this behavior. Historically,
+SIGINT was often used by
+.IR vi
+users to terminate text input mode (\c
+<control>\(hyC
+is often easier to enter than
+<ESC>).
+Some implementations of
+.IR vi
+alerted the terminal on this event, and some did not. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires
+that SIGINT behave identically to
+<ESC>,
+and that the terminal not be alerted.
+.P
+Historically, suspending the
+.IR ex
+editor during text input mode was similar to SIGINT, as completed lines
+were retained, but any partial line discarded, and the editor returned
+to command mode. POSIX.1\(hy2008 is silent on this issue; implementations are
+encouraged to follow historical practice, where possible.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.IR vi
+editor did not treat SIGTSTP as an asynchronous event, and it was
+therefore impossible to suspend the editor in visual text input mode.
+There are two major reasons for this. The first is that SIGTSTP is a
+broadcast signal on UNIX systems, and the chain of events where the
+shell
+.IR exec s
+an application that then
+.IR exec s
+.IR vi
+usually caused confusion for the terminal state if SIGTSTP was delivered
+to the process group in the default manner. The second was that most
+implementations of the UNIX
+.IR curses
+package did not handle SIGTSTP safely, and the receipt of SIGTSTP at
+the wrong time would cause them to crash. POSIX.1\(hy2008 is silent on this issue;
+implementations are encouraged to treat suspension as an asynchronous
+event if possible.
+.P
+Historically, modifications to the edit buffer made before SIGINT
+interrupted an operation were retained; that is, anywhere from zero to
+all of the lines to be modified might have been modified by the time
+the SIGINT arrived. These changes were not discarded by the arrival of
+SIGINT. POSIX.1\(hy2008 permits this behavior, noting that the
+.BR undo
+command is required to be able to undo these partially completed
+commands.
+.P
+The action taken for signals other than SIGINT, SIGCONT, SIGHUP, and
+SIGTERM is unspecified because some implementations attempt to save the
+edit buffer in a useful state when other signals are received.
+.SS "Standard Error"
+.P
+For
+.IR ex /\c
+.IR vi ,
+diagnostic messages are those messages reported as a result of a failed
+attempt to invoke
+.IR ex
+or
+.IR vi ,
+such as invalid options or insufficient resources, or an abnormal
+termination condition. Diagnostic messages should not be confused with
+the error messages generated by inappropriate or illegal user
+commands.
+.SS "Initialization in ex and vi"
+.P
+If an
+.IR ex
+command (other than
+.BR cd ,
+.BR chdir ,
+or
+.BR source )
+has a filename argument, one or both of the alternate and current
+pathnames will be set. Informally, they are set as follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the
+.IR ex
+command is one that replaces the contents of the edit buffer, and it
+succeeds, the current pathname will be set to the filename argument
+(the first filename argument in the case of the
+.BR next
+command) and the alternate pathname will be set to the previous
+current pathname, if there was one.
+.IP " 2." 4
+In the case of the file read/write forms of the
+.BR read
+and
+.BR write
+commands, if there is no current pathname, the current pathname will
+be set to the filename argument.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Otherwise, the alternate pathname will be set to the filename
+argument.
+.P
+For example,
+.BR ":edit foo"
+and
+.BR ":recover foo" ,
+when successful, set the current pathname, and, if there was a
+previous current pathname, the alternate pathname. The commands
+.BR :write ,
+.BR !command ,
+and
+.BR :edit
+set neither the current or alternate pathnames. If the
+.BR ":edit foo"
+command were to fail for some reason, the alternate pathname would be
+set. The
+.BR read
+and
+.BR write
+commands set the alternate pathname to their
+.IR file
+argument, unless the current pathname is not set, in which case they
+set the current pathname to their
+.IR file
+arguments. The alternate pathname was not historically set by the
+.BR :source
+command. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice.
+Implementations adding commands that take filenames as arguments are
+encouraged to set the alternate pathname as described here.
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+read the
+.BR .exrc
+file in the
+.IR $HOME
+directory twice, if the editor was executed in the
+.IR $HOME
+directory. POSIX.1\(hy2008 prohibits this behavior.
+.P
+Historically, the 4 BSD
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+read the
+.IR $HOME
+and local
+.BR .exrc
+files if they were owned by the real ID of the user, or the
+.BR sourceany
+option was set, regardless of other considerations. This was a security
+problem because it is possible to put normal UNIX system commands
+inside a
+.BR .exrc
+file. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not specify the
+.BR sourceany
+option, and historical implementations are encouraged to delete it.
+.P
+The
+.BR .exrc
+files must be owned by the real ID of the user, and not writable by
+anyone other than the owner. The appropriate privileges exception is
+intended to permit users to acquire special privileges, but continue to
+use the
+.BR .exrc
+files in their home directories.
+.P
+System V Release 3.2 and later
+.IR vi
+implementations added the option
+.BR [no]exrc .
+The behavior is that local
+.BR .exrc
+files are read-only if the
+.BR exrc
+option is set. The default for the
+.BR exrc
+option was off, so by default, local
+.BR .exrc
+files were not read. The problem this was intended to solve was that
+System V permitted users to give away files, so there is no possible
+ownership or writeability test to ensure that the file is safe. This is
+still a security problem on systems where users can give away files,
+but there is nothing additional that POSIX.1\(hy2008 can do. The
+implementation-defined exception is intended to permit groups to have
+local
+.BR .exrc
+files that are shared by users, by creating pseudo-users to own the
+shared files.
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not mention system-wide
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+start-up files. While they exist in several implementations of
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi ,
+they are not present in any implementations considered historical
+practice by POSIX.1\(hy2008. Implementations that have such files should use them
+only if they are owned by the real user ID or an appropriate user (for
+example, root on UNIX systems) and if they are not writable by any
+user other than their owner. System-wide start-up files should be read
+before the
+.IR EXINIT
+variable,
+.BR $HOME/.exrc ,
+or local
+.BR .exrc
+files are evaluated.
+.P
+Historically, any
+.IR ex
+command could be entered in the
+.IR EXINIT
+variable or the
+.BR .exrc
+file, although ones requiring that the edit buffer already contain
+lines of text generally caused historical implementations of the editor
+to drop
+.BR core .
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that any
+.IR ex
+command be permitted in the
+.IR EXINIT
+variable and
+.BR .exrc
+files, for simplicity of specification and consistency, although many
+of them will obviously fail under many circumstances.
+.P
+The initialization of the contents of the edit buffer uses the phrase
+``the effect shall be'' with regard to various
+.IR ex
+commands. The intent of this phrase is that edit buffer contents loaded
+during the initialization phase not be lost; that is, loading the edit
+buffer should fail if the
+.BR .exrc
+file read in the contents of a file and did not subsequently write the
+edit buffer. An additional intent of this phrase is to specify that the
+initial current line and column is set as specified for the individual
+.IR ex
+commands.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR \(mit
+option behaved as if the tag search were a
+.BR + \c
+.IR command ;
+that is, it was executed from the last line of the file specified by
+the tag. This resulted in the search failing if the pattern was a
+forward search pattern and the
+.BR wrapscan
+edit option was not set. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this behavior, requiring
+that the search for the tag pattern be performed on the entire file,
+and, if not found, that the current line be set to a more reasonable
+location in the file.
+.P
+Historically, the empty edit buffer presented for editing when a file
+was not specified by the user was unnamed. This is permitted by POSIX.1\(hy2008;
+however, implementations are encouraged to provide users a temporary
+filename for this buffer because it permits them the use of
+.IR ex
+commands that use the current pathname during temporary edit
+sessions.
+.P
+Historically, the file specified using the
+.BR \(mit
+option was not part of the current argument list. This practice is
+permitted by POSIX.1\(hy2008; however, implementations are encouraged to include
+its name in the current argument list for consistency.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR \(mic
+command was generally not executed until a file that already exists was
+edited. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to this historical practice.
+Commands that could cause the
+.BR \(mic
+command to be executed include the
+.IR ex
+commands
+.BR edit ,
+.BR next ,
+.BR recover ,
+.BR rewind ,
+and
+.BR tag ,
+and the
+.IR vi
+commands
+<control>\(hy^
+and
+<control>\(hy].
+Historically, reading a file into an edit buffer did not cause the
+.BR \(mic
+command to be executed (even though it might set the current pathname)
+with the exception that it did cause the
+.BR \(mic
+command to be executed if: the editor was in
+.IR ex
+mode, the edit buffer had no current pathname, the edit buffer was
+empty, and no read commands had yet been attempted. For consistency and
+simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this behavior.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR \(mir
+option was the same as a normal edit session if there was no recovery
+information available for the file. This allowed users to enter:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+vi \(mir *.c
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and recover whatever files were recoverable. In some implementations,
+recovery was attempted only on the first file named, and the file was
+not entered into the argument list; in others, recovery was attempted
+for each file named. In addition, some historical implementations
+ignored
+.BR \(mir
+if
+.BR \(mit
+was specified or did not support command line
+.IR file
+arguments with the
+.BR \(mit
+option. For consistency and simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008
+disallows these special cases, and requires that recovery be attempted
+the first time each file is edited.
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR vi
+initialized the
+.BR `
+and
+.BR '
+marks, but
+.IR ex
+did not. This meant that if the first command in
+.IR ex
+mode was
+.BR visual
+or if an
+.IR ex
+command was executed first (for example,
+.IR vi
++10
+.IR file ),
+.IR vi
+was entered without the marks being initialized. Because the standard
+developers believed the marks to be generally useful, and for
+consistency and simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that they
+always be initialized if in open or visual mode, or if in
+.IR ex
+mode and the edit buffer is not empty. Not initializing it in
+.IR ex
+mode if the edit buffer is empty is historical practice; however, it
+has always been possible to set (and use) marks in empty edit buffers
+in open and visual mode edit sessions.
+.SS "Addressing"
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+accepted the additional addressing forms
+.BR '\e/' 
+and
+.BR '\e?' .
+They were equivalent to
+.BR \(dq//\(dq 
+and
+.BR \(dq??\(dq ,
+respectively. They are not required by POSIX.1\(hy2008, mostly because nobody can
+remember whether they ever did anything different historically.
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+permitted an address of zero for several commands, and permitted the
+.BR %
+address in empty files for others. For consistency, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires
+support for the former in the few commands where it makes sense, and
+disallows it otherwise. In addition, because POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that
+.BR %
+be logically equivalent to
+.BR \(dq1,$\(dq ,
+it is also supported where it makes sense and disallowed otherwise.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR %
+address could not be followed by further addresses. For consistency and
+simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that additional addresses
+be supported.
+.P
+All of the following are valid
+.IR addresses :
+.IP "\fR+++\fP" 10
+Three lines after the current line.
+.IP "\fR/\fIre\fR/\(mi\fR" 10
+One line before the next occurrence of
+.IR re .
+.IP "\fR\(mi2\fR" 10
+Two lines before the current line.
+.IP "\fR3\0\(mi\|\(mi\|\(mi\|\(mi\02\fR" 10
+Line one (note intermediate negative address).
+.IP "\fR1\02\03\fR" 10
+Line six.
+.P
+Any number of addresses can be provided to commands taking addresses;
+for example,
+.BR \(dq1,2,3,4,5p\(dq 
+prints lines 4 and 5, because two is the greatest valid number of
+addresses accepted by the
+.BR print
+command. This, in combination with the
+<semicolon>
+delimiter, permits users to create commands based on ordered patterns
+in the file. For example, the command
+.BR "3;/foo/;+2print"
+will display the first line after line 3 that contains the pattern
+.IR foo ,
+plus the next two lines. Note that the address
+.BR "3;"
+must be evaluated before being discarded because the search origin for
+the
+.BR /foo/
+command depends on this.
+.P
+Historically, values could be added to addresses by including them
+after one or more
+<blank>
+characters; for example,
+.BR "3\0\(mi\05p"
+wrote the seventh line of the file, and
+.BR "/foo/\05"
+was the same as
+.BR "/foo/+5" .
+However, only absolute values could be added; for example,
+.BR "5\0/foo/"
+was an error. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice.
+Address offsets are separately specified from addresses because they
+could historically be provided to visual mode search commands.
+.P
+Historically, any missing addresses defaulted to the current line. This
+was true for leading and trailing
+<comma>-delimited
+addresses, and for trailing
+<semicolon>-delimited
+addresses. For consistency, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires it for leading
+<semicolon>
+addresses as well.
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+accepted the
+.BR '^' 
+character as both an address and as a flag offset for commands. In both
+cases it was identical to the
+.BR '\(mi' 
+character. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not require or prohibit this behavior.
+.P
+Historically, the enhancements to basic regular expressions could be
+used in addressing; for example,
+.BR '~' ,
+.BR '\e<' ,
+and
+.BR '\e>' .
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice; that is, that
+regular expression usage be consistent, and that regular expression
+enhancements be supported wherever regular expressions are used.
+.SS "Command Line Parsing in ex"
+.P
+Historical
+.IR ex
+command parsing was even more complex than that described here. POSIX.1\(hy2008
+requires the subset of the command parsing that the standard developers
+believed was documented and that users could reasonably be expected to
+use in a portable fashion, and that was historically consistent between
+implementations. (The discarded functionality is obscure, at best.)
+Historical implementations will require changes in order to comply with
+POSIX.1\(hy2008; however, users are not expected to notice any of these changes.
+Most of the complexity in
+.IR ex
+parsing is to handle three special termination cases:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The
+.BR ! ,
+.BR global ,
+.BR v ,
+and the filter versions of the
+.BR read
+and
+.BR write
+commands are delimited by
+<newline>
+characters (they can contain
+<vertical-line>
+characters that are usually shell pipes).
+.IP " 2." 4
+The
+.BR ex ,
+.BR edit ,
+.BR next ,
+and
+.BR visual
+in open and visual mode commands all take
+.IR ex
+commands, optionally containing
+<vertical-line>
+characters, as their first arguments.
+.IP " 3." 4
+The
+.BR s
+command takes a regular expression as its first argument, and uses the
+delimiting characters to delimit the command.
+.P
+Historically,
+<vertical-line>
+characters in the
+.BR + \c
+.IR command
+argument of the
+.BR ex ,
+.BR edit ,
+.BR next ,
+.BR vi ,
+and
+.BR visual
+commands, and in the
+.IR pattern
+and
+.IR replacement
+parts of the
+.BR s
+command, did not delimit the command, and in the filter cases for
+.BR read
+and
+.BR write ,
+and the
+.BR ! ,
+.BR global ,
+and
+.BR v
+commands, they did not delimit the command at all. For example, the
+following commands are all valid:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB:\fRedit +25 | s/abc/ABC/ file.c
+\fB:\fRs/ | /PIPE/
+\fB:\fRread !spell % | columnate
+\fB:\fRglobal/pattern/p | l
+\fB:\fRs/a/b/ | s/c/d | set
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Historically, empty or
+<blank>
+filled lines in
+.BR .exrc
+files and
+.BR source d
+files (as well as
+.IR EXINIT
+variables and
+.IR ex
+command scripts) were treated as default commands; that is,
+.BR print
+commands. POSIX.1\(hy2008 specifically requires that they be ignored when
+encountered in
+.BR .exrc
+and
+.BR source d
+files to eliminate a common source of new user error.
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR ex
+commands with multiple adjacent (or
+<blank>-separated)
+vertical lines were handled oddly when executed from
+.IR ex
+mode. For example, the command
+.BR "|||"
+<carriage-return>,
+when the cursor was on line 1, displayed lines 2, 3, and 5 of the file.
+In addition, the command
+.BR |
+would only display the line after the next line, instead of the next
+two lines. The former worked more logically when executed from
+.IR vi
+mode, and displayed lines 2, 3, and 4. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires the
+.IR vi
+behavior; that is, a single default command and line number increment
+for each command separator, and trailing
+<newline>
+characters after
+<vertical-line>
+separators are discarded.
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR ex
+permitted a single extra
+<colon>
+as a leading command character; for example,
+.BR ":g/pattern/:p"
+was a valid command. POSIX.1\(hy2008 generalizes this to require that any number
+of leading
+<colon>
+characters be stripped.
+.P
+Historically, any prefix of the
+.BR delete
+command could be followed without intervening
+<blank>
+characters by a flag character because in the command
+.BR "d\0p" ,
+.IR p
+is interpreted as the buffer
+.IR p .
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR k
+command could be followed by the mark name without intervening
+<blank>
+characters. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR s
+command could be immediately followed by flag and option characters;
+for example,
+.BR "s/e/E/|s|sgc3p"
+was a valid command. However, flag characters could not stand alone;
+for example, the commands
+.BR sp
+and
+.BR s\0l
+would fail, while the command
+.BR sgp
+and
+.BR "s\0gl"
+would succeed. (Obviously, the
+.BR '#' 
+flag character was used as a delimiter character if it followed the
+command.) Another issue was that option characters had to precede flag
+characters even when the command was fully specified; for example, the
+command
+.BR s/e/E/pg
+would fail, while the command
+.BR s/e/E/gp
+would succeed. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice.
+.P
+Historically, the first command name that had a prefix matching the
+input from the user was the executed command; for example,
+.BR ve ,
+.BR ver ,
+and
+.BR vers
+all executed the
+.BR version
+command. Commands were in a specific order, however, so that
+.BR a
+matched
+.BR append ,
+not
+.BR abbreviate .
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice. The restriction on
+command search order for implementations with extensions is to avoid
+the addition of commands such that the historical prefixes would fail
+to work portably.
+.P
+Historical implementations of
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+did not correctly handle multiple
+.IR ex
+commands, separated by
+<vertical-line>
+characters, that entered or exited visual mode or the editor. Because
+implementations of
+.IR vi
+exist that do not exhibit this failure mode, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit it.
+.P
+The requirement that alphabetic command names consist of all following
+alphabetic characters up to the next non-alphabetic character means
+that alphabetic command names must be separated from their arguments by
+one or more non-alphabetic characters, normally a
+<blank>
+or
+.BR '!' 
+character, except as specified for the exceptions, the
+.BR delete ,
+.BR k ,
+and
+.BR s
+commands.
+.P
+Historically, the repeated execution of the
+.IR ex
+default
+.BR print
+commands (\c
+<control>\(hyD,
+.IR eof ,
+<newline>,
+<carriage-return>)
+erased any prompting character and displayed the next lines without
+scrolling the terminal; that is, immediately below any previously
+displayed lines. This provided a cleaner presentation of the lines in
+the file for the user. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not require this behavior because it
+may be impossible in some situations; however, implementations are
+strongly encouraged to provide this semantic if possible.
+.P
+Historically, it was possible to change files in the middle of a command,
+and have the rest of the command executed in the new file; for example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+:edit +25 file.c | s/abc/ABC/ | 1
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+was a valid command, and the substitution was attempted in the newly
+edited file. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice. The
+following commands are examples that exercise the
+.IR ex
+parser:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+echo 'foo | bar' > file1; echo 'foo/bar' > file2;
+vi
+:edit +1 | s/|/PIPE/ | w file1 | e file2 | 1 | s/\e//SLASH/ | wq
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Historically, there was no protection in editor implementations to
+avoid
+.IR ex
+.BR global ,
+.BR v ,
+.BR @ ,
+or
+.BR *
+commands changing edit buffers during execution of their associated
+commands. Because this would almost invariably result in catastrophic
+failure of the editor, and implementations exist that do exhibit these
+problems, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that changing the edit buffer during a
+.BR global
+or
+.BR v
+command, or during a
+.BR @
+or
+.BR *
+command for which there will be more than a single execution, be an
+error. Implementations supporting multiple edit buffers simultaneously
+are strongly encouraged to apply the same semantics to switching
+between buffers as well.
+.P
+The
+.IR ex
+command quoting required by POSIX.1\(hy2008 is a superset of the quoting in
+historical implementations of the editor. For example, it was not
+historically possible to escape a
+<blank>
+in a filename; for example,
+.BR ":edit\0foo\e\e\e\0bar"
+would report that too many filenames had been entered for the edit
+command, and there was no method of escaping a
+<blank>
+in the first argument of an
+.BR edit ,
+.BR ex ,
+.BR next ,
+or
+.BR visual
+command at all. POSIX.1\(hy2008 extends historical practice, requiring that
+quoting behavior be made consistent across all
+.IR ex
+commands, except for the
+.BR map ,
+.BR unmap ,
+.BR abbreviate ,
+and
+.BR unabbreviate
+commands, which historically used
+<control>\(hyV
+instead of
+<backslash>
+characters for quoting. For those four commands, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires
+conformance to historical practice.
+.P
+Backslash quoting in
+.IR ex
+is non-intuitive.
+<backslash>-escapes
+are ignored unless they escape a special character; for example, when
+performing
+.IR file
+argument expansion, the string
+.BR \(dq\e\e%\(dq 
+is equivalent to
+.BR '\e%' ,
+not \fR"\e<\fIcurrent\ pathname\fR>"\fR.
+This can be confusing for users because
+<backslash>
+is usually one of the characters that causes shell expansion to
+be performed, and therefore shell quoting rules must be taken into
+consideration. Generally, quoting characters are only considered if they
+escape a special character, and a quoting character must be provided
+for each layer of parsing for which the character is special. As another
+example, only a single
+<backslash>
+is necessary for the
+.BR '\el' 
+sequence in substitute replacement patterns, because the character
+.BR 'l' 
+is not special to any parsing layer above it.
+.P
+<control>\(hyV
+quoting in
+.IR ex
+is slightly different from backslash quoting. In the four commands
+where
+<control>\(hyV
+quoting applies (\c
+.BR abbreviate ,
+.BR unabbreviate ,
+.BR map ,
+and
+.BR unmap ),
+any character may be escaped by a
+<control>\(hyV
+whether it would have a special meaning or not. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires
+conformance to historical practice.
+.P
+Historical implementations of the editor did not require delimiters
+within character classes to be escaped; for example, the command
+.BR ":s/[/]//"
+on the string
+.BR \(dqxxx/yyy\(dq 
+would delete the
+.BR '/' 
+from the string. POSIX.1\(hy2008 disallows this historical practice for
+consistency and because it places a large burden on implementations by
+requiring that knowledge of regular expressions be built into the
+editor parser.
+.P
+Historically, quoting
+<newline>
+characters in
+.IR ex
+commands was handled inconsistently. In most cases, the
+<newline>
+character always terminated the command, regardless of any preceding
+escape character, because
+<backslash>
+characters did not escape
+<newline>
+characters for most
+.IR ex
+commands. However, some
+.IR ex
+commands (for example,
+.BR s ,
+.BR map ,
+and
+.BR abbreviation )
+permitted
+<newline>
+characters to be escaped (although in the case of
+.BR map
+and
+.BR abbreviation ,
+<control>\(hyV
+characters escaped them instead of
+<backslash>
+characters). This was true in not only the command line, but also
+.BR .exrc
+and
+.BR source d
+files. For example, the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+map = foo<control-V><newline>bar
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would succeed, although it was sometimes difficult to get the
+<control>\(hyV
+and the inserted
+<newline>
+passed to the
+.IR ex
+parser. For consistency and simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires
+that it be possible to escape
+<newline>
+characters in
+.IR ex
+commands at all times, using
+<backslash>
+characters for most
+.IR ex
+commands, and using
+<control>\(hyV
+characters for the
+.BR map
+and
+.BR abbreviation
+commands. For example, the command
+.BR print \c
+<newline>\c
+.BR list
+is required to be parsed as the single command
+.BR print \c
+<newline>\c
+.BR list .
+While this differs from historical practice, POSIX.1\(hy2008 developers believed
+it unlikely that any script or user depended on the historical
+behavior.
+.P
+Historically, an error in a command specified using the
+.BR \(mic
+option did not cause the rest of the
+.BR \(mic
+commands to be discarded. POSIX.1\(hy2008 disallows this for consistency with
+mapped keys, the
+.BR @ ,
+.BR global ,
+.BR source ,
+and
+.BR v
+commands, the
+.IR EXINIT
+environment variable, and the
+.BR .exrc
+files.
+.SS "Input Editing in ex"
+.P
+One of the common uses of the historical
+.IR ex
+editor is over slow network connections. Editors that run in canonical
+mode can require far less traffic to and from, and far less processing
+on, the host machine, as well as more easily supporting block-mode
+terminals. For these reasons, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that
+.IR ex
+be implemented using canonical mode input processing, as was done
+historically.
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not require the historical 4 BSD input editing characters
+``word erase'' or ``literal next''. For this reason, it is unspecified
+how they are handled by
+.IR ex ,
+although they must have the required effect. Implementations that
+resolve them after the line has been ended using a
+<newline>
+or
+<control>\(hyM
+character, and implementations that rely on the underlying system
+terminal support for this processing, are both conforming.
+Implementations are strongly urged to use the underlying system
+functionality, if at all possible, for compatibility with other system
+text input interfaces.
+.P
+Historically, when the
+.IR eof
+character was used to decrement the
+.BR autoindent
+level, the cursor moved to display the new end of the
+.BR autoindent
+characters, but did not move the cursor to a new line, nor did it erase
+the
+<control>\(hyD
+character from the line. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not specify that the cursor remain
+on the same line or that the rest of the line is erased; however,
+implementations are strongly encouraged to provide the best possible
+user interface; that is, the cursor should remain on the same line, and
+any
+<control>\(hyD
+character on the line should be erased.
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not require the historical 4 BSD input editing character
+``reprint'', traditionally
+<control>\(hyR,
+which redisplayed the current input from the user. For this reason, and
+because the functionality cannot be implemented after the line has been
+terminated by the user, POSIX.1\(hy2008 makes no requirements about this
+functionality. Implementations are strongly urged to make this
+historical functionality available, if possible.
+.P
+Historically,
+<control>\(hyQ
+did not perform a literal next function in
+.IR ex ,
+as it did in
+.IR vi .
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice to avoid breaking
+historical
+.IR ex
+scripts and
+.BR .exrc
+files.
+.SS "eof"
+.P
+Whether the
+.IR eof
+character immediately modifies the
+.BR autoindent
+characters in the prompt is left unspecified so that implementations
+can conform in the presence of systems that do not support this
+functionality. Implementations are encouraged to modify the line and
+redisplay it immediately, if possible.
+.P
+The specification of the handling of the
+.IR eof
+character differs from historical practice only in that
+.IR eof
+characters are not discarded if they follow normal characters in the
+text input. Historically, they were always discarded.
+.SS "Command Descriptions in ex"
+.P
+Historically, several commands (for example,
+.BR global ,
+.BR v ,
+.BR visual ,
+.BR s ,
+.BR write ,
+.BR wq ,
+.BR yank ,
+.BR ! ,
+.BR < ,
+.BR > ,
+.BR & ,
+and
+.BR ~ )
+were executable in empty files (that is, the default address(es) were
+0), or permitted explicit addresses of 0 (for example, 0 was a valid
+address, or 0,0 was a valid range). Addresses of 0, or command
+execution in an empty file, make sense only for commands that add new
+text to the edit buffer or write commands (because users may wish to
+write empty files). POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires this behavior for such commands and
+disallows it otherwise, for consistency and simplicity of
+specification.
+.P
+A count to an
+.IR ex
+command has been historically corrected to be no greater than the last
+line in a file; for example, in a five-line file, the command
+.BR "1,6print"
+would fail, but the command
+.BR "1print300"
+would succeed. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice.
+.P
+Historically, the use of flags in
+.IR ex
+commands could be obscure. General historical practice was as described
+by POSIX.1\(hy2008, but there were some special cases. For instance, the
+.BR list ,
+.BR number ,
+and
+.BR print
+commands ignored trailing address offsets; for example,
+.BR "3p\0+++#"
+would display line 3, and 3 would be the current line after the
+execution of the command. The
+.BR open
+and
+.BR visual
+commands ignored both the trailing offsets and the trailing flags.
+Also, flags specified to the
+.BR open
+and
+.BR visual
+commands interacted badly with the
+.BR list
+edit option, and setting and then unsetting it during the open/visual
+session would cause
+.IR vi
+to stop displaying lines in the specified format. For consistency and
+simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit any of these
+exceptions to the general rule.
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 uses the word
+.IR copy
+in several places when discussing buffers. This is not intended to
+imply implementation.
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR ex
+users could not specify numeric buffers because of the ambiguity this
+would cause; for example, in the command
+.BR "3\0delete\02" ,
+it is unclear whether 2 is a buffer name or a
+.IR count .
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice by default, but does
+not preclude extensions.
+.P
+Historically, the contents of the unnamed buffer were frequently
+discarded after commands that did not explicitly affect it; for
+example, when using the
+.BR edit
+command to switch files. For consistency and simplicity of
+specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this behavior.
+.P
+The
+.IR ex
+utility did not historically have access to the numeric buffers, and,
+furthermore, deleting lines in
+.IR ex
+did not modify their contents. For example, if, after doing a delete in
+.IR vi ,
+the user switched to
+.IR ex ,
+did another delete, and then switched back to
+.IR vi ,
+the contents of the numeric buffers would not have changed. POSIX.1\(hy2008
+requires conformance to historical practice. Numeric buffers are
+described in the
+.IR ex
+utility in order to confine the description of buffers to a single
+location in POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+The metacharacters that trigger shell expansion in
+.IR file
+arguments match historical practice, as does the method for doing shell
+expansion. Implementations wishing to provide users with the
+flexibility to alter the set of metacharacters are encouraged to
+provide a
+.BR shellmeta
+string edit option.
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR ex
+commands executed from
+.IR vi
+refreshed the screen when it did not strictly need to do so; for
+example,
+.BR ":!date\0>\0/dev/null"
+does not require a screen refresh because the output of the UNIX
+.IR date
+command requires only a single line of the screen. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that
+the screen be refreshed if it has been overwritten, but makes no
+requirements as to how an implementation should make that
+determination. Implementations may prompt and refresh the screen
+regardless.
+.SS "Abbreviate"
+.P
+Historical practice was that characters that were entered as part of an
+abbreviation replacement were subject to
+.BR map
+expansions, the
+.BR showmatch
+edit option, further abbreviation expansions, and so on; that is, they
+were logically pushed onto the terminal input queue, and were not a
+simple replacement. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice.
+Historical practice was that whenever a non-word character (that had
+not been escaped by a
+<control>\(hyV)
+was entered after a word character,
+.IR vi
+would check for abbreviations. The check was based on the type of the
+character entered before the word character of the word/non-word pair
+that triggered the check. The word character of the word/non-word pair
+that triggered the check and all characters entered before the trigger
+pair that were of that type were included in the check, with the
+exception of
+<blank>
+characters, which always delimited the abbreviation.
+.P
+This means that, for the abbreviation to work, the
+.IR lhs
+must end with a word character, there can be no transitions from word
+to non-word characters (or \fIvice versa\fP) other than between the
+last and next-to-last characters in the
+.IR lhs ,
+and there can be no
+<blank>
+characters in the
+.IR lhs .
+In addition, because of the historical quoting rules, it was impossible
+to enter a literal
+<control>\(hyV
+in the
+.IR lhs .
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice. Historical
+implementations did not inform users when abbreviations that could
+never be used were entered; implementations are strongly encouraged to
+do so.
+.br
+.P
+For example, the following abbreviations will work:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+:ab (p  REPLACE
+:ab p   REPLACE
+:ab ((p REPLACE
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following abbreviations will not work:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+:ab (   REPLACE
+:ab (pp REPLACE
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Historical practice is that words on the
+.IR vi
+colon command line were subject to abbreviation expansion, including
+the arguments to the
+.BR abbrev
+(and more interestingly) the
+.BR unabbrev
+command. Because there are implementations that do not do abbreviation
+expansion for the first argument to those commands, this is permitted,
+but not required, by POSIX.1\(hy2008. However, the following sequence:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+:ab foo bar
+:ab foo baz
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+resulted in the addition of an abbreviation of
+.BR \(dqbaz\(dq 
+for the string
+.BR \(dqbar\(dq 
+in historical
+.IR ex /\c
+.IR vi ,
+and the sequence:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+:ab foo1 bar
+:ab foo2 bar
+:unabbreviate foo2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+deleted the abbreviation
+.BR \(dqfoo1\(dq ,
+not
+.BR \(dqfoo2\(dq .
+These behaviors are not permitted by POSIX.1\(hy2008 because they clearly violate
+the expectations of the user.
+.P
+It was historical practice that
+<control>\(hyV,
+not
+<backslash>,
+characters be interpreted as escaping subsequent characters in the
+.BR abbreviate
+command. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice; however, it
+should be noted that an abbreviation containing a
+<blank>
+will never work.
+.SS "Append"
+.P
+Historically, any text following a
+<vertical-line>
+command separator after an
+.BR append ,
+.BR change ,
+or
+.BR insert
+command became part of the insert text. For example, in the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+:g/pattern/append|stuff1
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+a line containing the text
+.BR \(dqstuff1\(dq 
+would be appended to each line matching pattern. It was also
+historically valid to enter:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+:append|stuff1
+stuff2
+\&.
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and the text on the
+.IR ex
+command line would be appended along with the text inserted after it.
+There was an historical bug, however, that the user had to enter two
+terminating lines (the
+.BR '.' 
+lines) to terminate text input mode in this case. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires
+conformance to historical practice, but disallows the historical need
+for multiple terminating lines.
+.SS "Change"
+.P
+See the RATIONALE for the
+.BR append
+command. Historical practice for cursor positioning after the change
+command when no text is input, is as described in POSIX.1\(hy2008. However, one
+System V implementation is known to have been modified such that the
+cursor is positioned on the first address specified, and not on the
+line before the first address. POSIX.1\(hy2008 disallows this modification for
+consistency.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR change
+command did not support buffer arguments, although some implementations
+allow the specification of an optional buffer. This behavior is neither
+required nor disallowed by POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SS "Change Directory"
+.P
+A common extension in
+.IR ex
+implementations is to use the elements of a
+.BR cdpath
+edit option as prefix directories for
+.IR path
+arguments to
+.BR chdir
+that are relative pathnames and that do not have
+.BR '.' 
+or
+.BR \(dq..\(dq 
+as their first component. Elements in the
+.BR cdpath
+edit option are
+<colon>-separated.
+The initial value of the
+.BR cdpath
+edit option is the value of the shell
+.IR CDPATH
+environment variable. This feature was not included in POSIX.1\(hy2008 because it
+does not exist in any of the implementations considered historical
+practice.
+.SS "Copy"
+.P
+Historical implementations of
+.IR ex
+permitted copies to lines inside of the specified range; for example,
+.BR ":2,5copy3"
+was a valid command. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical
+practice.
+.SS "Delete"
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires support for the historical parsing of a
+.BR delete
+command followed by flags, without any intervening
+<blank>
+characters. For example:
+.IP "\fB1dp\fP" 8
+Deletes the first line and prints the line that was second.
+.IP "\fB1delep\fP" 8
+As for
+.BR 1dp .
+.IP "\fB1d\fP" 8
+Deletes the first line, saving it in buffer
+.IR p .
+.IP "\fB1d\0p1l\fP" 8
+(Pee-one-ell.) Deletes the first line, saving it in buffer
+.IR p ,
+and listing the line that was second.
+.SS "Edit"
+.P
+Historically, any
+.IR ex
+command could be entered as a
+.BR + \c
+.IR command
+argument to the
+.BR edit
+command, although some (for example,
+.BR insert
+and
+.BR append )
+were known to confuse historical implementations. For consistency and
+simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that any command be
+supported as an argument to the
+.BR edit
+command.
+.P
+Historically, the command argument was executed with the current line
+set to the last line of the file, regardless of whether the
+.BR edit
+command was executed from visual mode or not. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires
+conformance to historical practice.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR + \c
+.IR command
+specified to the
+.BR edit
+and
+.BR next
+commands was delimited by the first
+<blank>,
+and there was no way to quote them. For consistency, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires
+that the usual
+.IR ex
+backslash quoting be provided.
+.P
+Historically, specifying the
+.BR + \c
+.IR command
+argument to the edit command required a filename to be specified as
+well; for example,
+.BR ":edit\0+100"
+would always fail. For consistency and simplicity of specification,
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this usage to fail for that reason.
+.P
+Historically, only the cursor position of the last file edited was
+remembered by the editor. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that this be supported;
+however, implementations are permitted to remember and restore the
+cursor position for any file previously edited.
+.SS "File"
+.P
+Historical versions of the
+.IR ex
+editor
+.BR file
+command displayed a current line and number of lines in the edit buffer
+of 0 when the file was empty, while the
+.IR vi
+<control>\(hyG
+command displayed a current line and number of lines in the edit buffer
+of 1 in the same situation. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this discrepancy,
+instead requiring that a message be displayed indicating that the file
+is empty.
+.SS "Global"
+.P
+The two-pass operation of the
+.BR global
+and
+.BR v
+commands is not intended to imply implementation, only the required
+result of the operation.
+.P
+The current line and column are set as specified for the individual
+.IR ex
+commands. This requirement is cumulative; that is, the current line and
+column must track across all the commands executed by the
+.BR global
+or
+.BR v
+commands.
+.SS "Insert"
+.P
+See the RATIONALE for the
+.BR append
+command.
+.P
+Historically,
+.BR insert
+could not be used with an address of zero; that is, not when the edit
+buffer was empty. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that this command behave consistently
+with the
+.BR append
+command.
+.SS "Join"
+.P
+The action of the
+.BR join
+command in relation to the special characters is only defined for the
+POSIX locale because the correct amount of white space after a period
+varies; in Japanese none is required, in French only a single space,
+and so on.
+.SS "List"
+.P
+The historical output of the
+.BR list
+command was potentially ambiguous. The standard developers believed
+correcting this to be more important than adhering to historical
+practice, and POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires unambiguous output.
+.SS "Map"
+.P
+Historically, command mode maps only applied to command names; for
+example, if the character
+.BR 'x' 
+was mapped to
+.BR 'y' ,
+the command
+.BR fx
+searched for the
+.BR 'x' 
+character, not the
+.BR 'y' 
+character. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires this behavior. Historically, entering
+<control>\(hyV
+as the first character of a
+.IR vi
+command was an error. Several implementations have extended the
+semantics of
+.IR vi
+such that
+<control>\(hyV
+means that the subsequent command character is not mapped. This is
+permitted, but not required, by POSIX.1\(hy2008. Regardless, using
+<control>\(hyV
+to escape the second or later character in a sequence of characters
+that might match a
+.BR map
+command, or any character in text input mode, is historical practice,
+and stops the entered keys from matching a map. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires
+conformance to historical practice.
+.P
+Historical implementations permitted digits to be used as a
+.BR map
+command
+.IR lhs ,
+but then ignored the map. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that the mapped digits not be
+ignored.
+.P
+The historical implementation of the
+.BR map
+command did not permit
+.BR map
+commands that were more than a single character in length if the first
+character was printable. This behavior is permitted, but not required,
+by POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+Historically, mapped characters were remapped unless the
+.BR remap
+edit option was not set, or the prefix of the mapped characters matched
+the mapping characters; for example, in the
+.BR map :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+:map ab abcd
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+the characters
+.BR \(dqab\(dq 
+were used as is and were not remapped, but the characters
+.BR \(dqcd\(dq 
+were mapped if appropriate. This can cause infinite loops in the
+.IR vi
+mapping mechanisms. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice,
+and that such loops be interruptible.
+.P
+Text input maps had the same problems with expanding the
+.IR lhs
+for the
+.IR ex
+.BR map!
+and
+.BR unmap!
+command as did the
+.IR ex
+.BR abbreviate
+and
+.BR unabbreviate
+commands. See the RATIONALE for the
+.IR ex
+.BR abbreviate
+command. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires similar modification of some historical
+practice for the
+.BR map
+and
+.BR unmap
+commands, as described for the
+.BR abbreviate
+and
+.BR unabbreviate
+commands.
+.P
+Historically,
+.BR map s
+that were subsets of other
+.BR map s
+behaved differently depending on the order in which they were defined.
+For example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+:map! ab     short
+:map! abc    long
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would always translate the characters
+.BR \(dqab\(dq 
+to
+.BR \(dqshort\(dq ,
+regardless of how fast the characters
+.BR \(dqabc\(dq 
+were entered. If the entry order was reversed:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+:map! abc    long
+:map! ab     short
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+the characters
+.BR \(dqab\(dq 
+would cause the editor to pause, waiting for the completing
+.BR 'c' 
+character, and the characters might never be mapped to
+.BR \(dqshort\(dq .
+For consistency and simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that
+the shortest match be used at all times.
+.P
+The length of time the editor spends waiting for the characters to
+complete the
+.IR lhs
+is unspecified because the timing capabilities of systems are often
+inexact and variable, and it may depend on other factors such as the
+speed of the connection. The time should be long enough for the user to
+be able to complete the sequence, but not long enough for the user to
+have to wait. Some implementations of
+.IR vi
+have added a
+.BR keytime
+option, which permits users to set the number of 0,1 seconds the editor
+waits for the completing characters. Because mapped terminal function
+and cursor keys tend to start with an
+<ESC>
+character, and
+<ESC>
+is the key ending
+.IR vi
+text input mode,
+.BR map s
+starting with
+<ESC>
+characters are generally exempted from this timeout period, or, at
+least timed out differently.
+.SS "Mark"
+.P
+Historically, users were able to set the ``previous context'' marks
+explicitly. In addition, the
+.IR ex
+commands
+.BR ''
+and
+.BR '`
+and the
+.IR vi
+commands
+.BR '' ,
+.BR `` ,
+.BR `' ,
+and
+.BR '`
+all referred to the same mark. In addition, the previous context marks
+were not set if the command, with which the address setting the mark
+was associated, failed. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical
+practice. Historically, if marked lines were deleted, the mark was also
+deleted, but would reappear if the change was undone. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires
+conformance to historical practice.
+.P
+The description of the special events that set the
+.BR `
+and
+.BR '
+marks matches historical practice. For example, historically the
+command
+.BR "/a/,/b/"
+did not set the
+.BR `
+and
+.BR '
+marks, but the command
+.BR "/a/,/b/delete"
+did.
+.SS "Next"
+.P
+Historically, any
+.IR ex
+command could be entered as a
+.BR + \c
+.IR command
+argument to the
+.BR next
+command, although some (for example,
+.BR insert
+and
+.BR append )
+were known to confuse historical implementations. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that
+any command be permitted and that it behave as specified. The
+.BR next
+command can accept more than one file, so usage such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+next `ls [abc] `
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+is valid; it need not be valid for the
+.BR edit
+or
+.BR read
+commands, for example, because they expect only one filename.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR next
+command behaved differently from the
+.BR :rewind
+command in that it ignored the force flag if the
+.BR autowrite
+flag was set. For consistency, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this behavior.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR next
+command positioned the cursor as if the file had never been edited
+before, regardless. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this behavior, for
+consistency with the
+.BR edit
+command.
+.P
+Implementations wanting to provide a counterpart to the
+.BR next
+command that edited the previous file have used the command
+.BR prev[ious],
+which takes no
+.IR file
+argument. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not require this command.
+.SS "Open"
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR open
+command would fail if the
+.BR open
+edit option was not set. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not mention the
+.BR open
+edit option and does not require this behavior. Some historical
+implementations do not permit entering open mode from open or visual
+mode, only from
+.IR ex
+mode. For consistency, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this behavior.
+.P
+Historically, entering open mode from the command line (that is,
+.IR vi
+.BR +open )
+resulted in anomalous behaviors; for example, the
+.IR ex
+file and
+.IR set
+commands, and the
+.IR vi
+command
+<control>\(hyG
+did not work. For consistency, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this behavior.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR open
+command only permitted
+.BR '/' 
+characters to be used as the search pattern delimiter. For consistency,
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that the search delimiters used by the
+.BR s ,
+.BR global ,
+and
+.BR v
+commands be accepted as well.
+.SS "Preserve"
+.P
+The
+.BR preserve
+command does not historically cause the file to be considered
+unmodified for the purposes of future commands that may exit the
+editor. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice.
+.P
+Historical documentation stated that mail was not sent to the user when
+preserve was executed; however, historical implementations did send
+mail in this case. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to the historical
+implementations.
+.SS "Print"
+.P
+The writing of NUL by the
+.BR print
+command is not specified as a special case because the standard
+developers did not want to require
+.IR ex
+to support NUL characters. Historically, characters were displayed
+using the ARPA standard mappings, which are as follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Printable characters are left alone.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Control characters less than \e177 are represented as
+.BR '^' 
+followed by the character offset from the
+.BR '@' 
+character in the ASCII map; for example, \e007 is represented as
+.BR '^G' .
+.IP " 3." 4
+\e177 is represented as
+.BR '^' 
+followed by
+.BR '?' .
+.P
+The display of characters having their eighth bit set was less
+standard. Existing implementations use hex (0x00), octal (\e000), and a
+meta-bit display. (The latter displayed bytes that had their eighth bit
+set as the two characters
+.BR \(dqM\(mi\(dq 
+followed by the seven-bit display as described above.) The latter
+probably has the best claim to historical practice because it was used
+for the
+.BR \(miv
+option of 4 BSD and 4 BSD-derived versions of the
+.IR cat
+utility since 1980.
+.P
+No specific display format is required by POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+Explicit dependence on the ASCII character set has been avoided where
+possible, hence the use of the phrase an ``implementation-defined
+multi-character sequence'' for the display of non-printable characters
+in preference to the historical usage of, for instance,
+.BR \(dq^I\(dq 
+for the
+<tab>.
+Implementations are encouraged to conform to historical practice in the
+absence of any strong reason to diverge.
+.P
+Historically, all
+.IR ex
+commands beginning with the letter
+.BR 'p' 
+could be entered using capitalized versions of the commands; for
+example,
+.BR P[rint] ,
+.BR Pre[serve] ,
+and
+.BR Pu[t]
+were all valid command names. POSIX.1\(hy2008 permits, but does not require, this
+historical practice because capital forms of the commands are used by
+some implementations for other purposes.
+.SS "Put"
+.P
+Historically, an
+.IR ex
+.BR put
+command, executed from open or visual mode, was the same as the open or
+visual mode
+.BR P
+command, if the buffer was named and was cut in character mode, and the
+same as the
+.BR p
+command if the buffer was named and cut in line mode. If the unnamed
+buffer was the source of the text, the entire line from which the text
+was taken was usually
+.BR put ,
+and the buffer was handled as if in line mode, but it was possible to
+get extremely anomalous behavior. In addition, using the
+.BR Q
+command to switch into
+.IR ex
+mode, and then doing a
+.BR put
+often resulted in errors as well, such as appending text that was
+unrelated to the (supposed) contents of the buffer. For consistency and
+simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit these behaviors. All
+.IR ex
+.BR put
+commands are required to operate in line mode, and the contents of the
+buffers are not altered by changing the mode of the editor.
+.SS "Read"
+.P
+Historically, an
+.IR ex
+.BR read
+command executed from open or visual mode, executed in an empty file,
+left an empty line as the first line of the file. For consistency and
+simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this behavior.
+Historically, a
+.BR read
+in open or visual mode from a program left the cursor at the last line
+read in, not the first. For consistency, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this
+behavior.
+.P
+Historical implementations of
+.IR ex
+were unable to undo
+.BR read
+commands that read from the output of a program. For consistency, POSIX.1\(hy2008
+does not permit this behavior.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+message after a successful
+.BR read
+or
+.BR write
+command specified ``characters'', not ``bytes''. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that
+the number of bytes be displayed, not the number of characters, because
+it may be difficult in multi-byte implementations to determine the
+number of characters read. Implementations are encouraged to clarify
+the message displayed to the user.
+.P
+Historically, reads were not permitted on files other than type
+regular, except that FIFO files could be read (probably only because
+they did not exist when
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+were originally written). Because the historical
+.IR ex
+evaluated
+.BR read!
+and
+.BR read\0!
+equivalently, there can be no optional way to force the read. POSIX.1\(hy2008
+permits, but does not require, this behavior.
+.SS "Recover"
+.P
+Some historical implementations of the editor permitted users to
+recover the edit buffer contents from a previous edit session, and then
+exit without saving those contents (or explicitly discarding them). The
+intent of POSIX.1\(hy2008 in requiring that the edit buffer be treated as already
+modified is to prevent this user error.
+.SS "Rewind"
+.P
+Historical implementations supported the
+.BR rewind
+command when the user was editing the first file in the list; that is,
+the file that the
+.BR rewind
+command would edit. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice.
+.SS "Substitute"
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR ex
+accepted an
+.BR r
+option to the
+.BR s
+command. The effect of the
+.BR r
+option was to use the last regular expression used in any command as
+the pattern, the same as the
+.BR ~
+command. The
+.BR r
+option is not required by POSIX.1\(hy2008. Historically, the
+.BR c
+and
+.BR g
+options were toggled; for example, the command
+.BR ":s/abc/def/"
+was the same as
+.BR "s/abc/def/ccccgggg" .
+For simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this behavior.
+.P
+The tilde command is often used to replace the last search RE. For
+example, in the sequence:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+s/red/blue/
+/green
+~
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+the
+.BR ~
+command is equivalent to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+s/green/blue/
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR ex
+accepted all of the following forms:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+s/abc/def/
+s/abc/def
+s/abc/
+s/abc
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to this historical practice.
+.P
+The
+.BR s
+command presumes that the
+.BR '^' 
+character only occupies a single column in the display. Much of the
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+specification presumes that the
+<space>
+only occupies a single column in the display. There are no known
+character sets for which this is not true.
+.P
+Historically, the final column position for the substitute commands was
+based on previous column movements; a search for a pattern followed by
+a substitution would leave the column position unchanged, while a 0
+command followed by a substitution would change the column position to
+the first non-\c
+<blank>.
+For consistency and simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that
+the final column position always be set to the first non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Set"
+.P
+Historical implementations redisplayed all of the options for each
+occurrence of the
+.BR all
+keyword. POSIX.1\(hy2008 permits, but does not require, this behavior.
+.SS "Tag"
+.P
+No requirement is made as to where
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+shall look for the file referenced by the tag entry. Historical
+practice has been to look for the path found in the
+.BR tags
+file, based on the current directory. A useful extension found in some
+implementations is to look based on the directory containing the tags
+file that held the entry, as well. No requirement is made as to which
+reference for the tag in the tags file is used. This is deliberate, in
+order to permit extensions such as multiple entries in a tags file for
+a tag.
+.P
+Because users often specify many different tags files, some of which
+need not be relevant or exist at any particular time, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires
+that error messages about problem tags files be displayed only if the
+requested tag is not found, and then, only once for each time that the
+.BR tag
+edit option is changed.
+.P
+The requirement that the current edit buffer be unmodified is only
+necessary if the file indicated by the tag entry is not the same as the
+current file (as defined by the current pathname). Historically, the
+file would be reloaded if the filename had changed, as well as if the
+filename was different from the current pathname. For consistency and
+simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this behavior,
+requiring that the name be the only factor in the decision.
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR vi
+only searched for tags in the current file from the current cursor to
+the end of the file, and therefore, if the
+.BR wrapscan
+option was not set, tags occurring before the current cursor were not
+found. POSIX.1\(hy2008 considers this a bug, and implementations are required to
+search for the first occurrence in the file, regardless.
+.SS "Undo"
+.P
+The
+.BR undo
+description deliberately uses the word ``modified''. The
+.BR undo
+command is not intended to undo commands that replace the contents of
+the edit buffer, such as
+.BR edit ,
+.BR next ,
+.BR tag ,
+or
+.BR recover .
+.P
+Cursor positioning after the
+.BR undo
+command was inconsistent in the historical
+.IR vi ,
+sometimes attempting to restore the original cursor position (\c
+.BR global ,
+.BR undo ,
+and
+.BR v
+commands), and sometimes, in the presence of maps, placing the cursor
+on the last line added or changed instead of the first. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires
+a simplified behavior for consistency and simplicity of specification.
+.SS "Version"
+.P
+The
+.BR version
+command cannot be exactly specified since there is no widely-accepted
+definition of what the version information should contain.
+Implementations are encouraged to do something reasonably intelligent.
+.SS "Write"
+.P
+Historically, the
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+message after a successful
+.BR read
+or
+.BR write
+command specified ``characters'', not ``bytes''. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that
+the number of bytes be displayed, not the number of characters because
+it may be difficult in multi-byte implementations to determine the
+number of characters written. Implementations are encouraged to clarify
+the message displayed to the user.
+.P
+Implementation-defined tests are permitted so that implementations
+can make additional checks; for example, for locks or file modification
+times.
+.P
+Historically, attempting to append to a nonexistent file caused an
+error. It has been left unspecified in POSIX.1\(hy2008 to permit implementations
+to let the
+.BR write
+succeed, so that the append semantics are similar to those of the
+historical
+.IR csh .
+.P
+Historical
+.IR vi
+permitted empty edit buffers to be written. However, since the way
+.IR vi
+got around dealing with ``empty'' files was to always have a line in
+the edit buffer, no matter what, it wrote them as files of a single,
+empty line. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this behavior.
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR ex
+restored standard output and standard error to their values as of when
+.IR ex
+was invoked, before writes to programs were performed. This could
+disturb the terminal configuration as well as be a security issue for
+some terminals. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this, requiring that the program
+output be captured and displayed as if by the
+.IR ex
+.BR print
+command.
+.SS "Adjust Window"
+.P
+Historically, the line count was set to the value of the
+.BR scroll
+option if the type character was end-of-file. This feature was broken
+on most historical implementations long ago, however, and is not
+documented anywhere. For this reason, POSIX.1\(hy2008 is resolutely silent.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR z
+command was
+<blank>-sensitive
+and
+.BR z\0+
+and
+.BR z\0\(mi
+did different things than
+.BR z+
+and
+.BR z\(mi
+because the type could not be distinguished from a flag. (The commands
+.BR z\0.
+and
+.BR z\0=
+were historically invalid.) POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to this
+historical practice.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR z
+command was further
+<blank>-sensitive
+in that the
+.IR count
+could not be
+<blank>-delimited;
+for example, the commands
+.BR z=\05
+and
+.BR z\(mi\05
+were also invalid. Because the
+.IR count
+is not ambiguous with respect to either the type character or the
+flags, this is not permitted by POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SS "Escape"
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR ex
+filter commands only read the standard output of the commands, letting
+standard error appear on the terminal as usual. The
+.IR vi
+utility, however, read both standard output and standard error. POSIX.1\(hy2008
+requires the latter behavior for both
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi ,
+for consistency.
+.SS "Shift Left and Shift Right"
+.P
+Historically, it was possible to add shift characters to increase the
+effect of the command; for example,
+.BR <<<
+outdented (or
+.BR >>>
+indented) the lines 3 levels of indentation instead of the default 1.
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice.
+.SS "<control>\(hyD"
+.P
+Historically, the
+<control>\(hyD
+command erased the prompt, providing the user with an unbroken
+presentation of lines from the edit buffer. This is not required by
+POSIX.1\(hy2008; implementations are encouraged to provide it if possible.
+Historically, the
+<control>\(hyD
+command took, and then ignored, a
+.IR count .
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this behavior.
+.SS "Write Line Number"
+.P
+Historically, the
+.IR ex
+.BR =
+command, when executed in
+.IR ex
+mode in an empty edit buffer, reported 0, and from open or visual mode,
+reported 1. For consistency and simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does
+not permit this behavior.
+.SS "Execute"
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR ex
+did not correctly handle the inclusion of text input commands (that is,
+.BR append ,
+.BR insert ,
+and
+.BR change )
+in executed buffers. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this exclusion for
+consistency.
+.P
+Historically, the logical contents of the buffer being executed did not
+change if the buffer itself were modified by the commands being
+executed; that is, buffer execution did not support self-modifying
+code. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR @
+command took a range of lines, and the
+.BR @
+buffer was executed once per line, with the current line (\c
+.BR '.' )
+set to each specified line. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical
+practice.
+.P
+Some historical implementations did not notice if errors occurred
+during buffer execution. This, coupled with the ability to specify a
+range of lines for the
+.IR ex
+.BR @
+command, makes it trivial to cause them to drop
+.BR core .
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that implementations stop buffer execution if any error
+occurs, if the specified line doesn't exist, or if the contents of the
+edit buffer itself are replaced (for example, the buffer executes the
+.IR ex
+.BR :edit
+command).
+.SS "Regular Expressions in ex"
+.P
+Historical practice is that the characters in the replacement part of
+the last
+.BR s
+command\(emthat is, those matched by entering a
+.BR '~' 
+in the regular expression\(emwere not further expanded by the regular
+expression engine. So, if the characters contained the string
+.BR \(dqa.,\(dq 
+they would match
+.BR 'a' 
+followed by
+.BR \(dq.,\(dq 
+and not
+.BR 'a' 
+followed by any character. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical
+practice.
+.SS "Edit Options in ex"
+.P
+The following paragraphs describe the historical behavior of some edit
+options that were not, for whatever reason, included in POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+Implementations are strongly encouraged to only use these names if the
+functionality described here is fully supported.
+.IP "\fBextended\fP" 10
+The
+.BR extended
+edit option has been used in some implementations of
+.IR vi
+to provide extended regular expressions instead of basic regular
+expressions This option was omitted from POSIX.1\(hy2008 because it is not
+widespread historical practice.
+.IP "\fBflash\fP" 10
+The
+.BR flash
+edit option historically caused the screen to flash instead of beeping
+on error. This option was omitted from POSIX.1\(hy2008 because it is not found in
+some historical implementations.
+.IP "\fBhardtabs\fP" 10
+The
+.BR hardtabs
+edit option historically defined the number of columns between hardware
+tab settings. This option was omitted from POSIX.1\(hy2008 because it was
+believed to no longer be generally useful.
+.IP "\fBmodeline\fP" 10
+The
+.BR modeline
+(sometimes named
+.BR modelines )
+edit option historically caused
+.IR ex
+or
+.IR vi
+to read the five first and last lines of the file for editor commands.
+This option is a security problem, and vendors are strongly encouraged
+to delete it from historical implementations.
+.IP "\fBopen\fP" 10
+The
+.BR open
+edit option historically disallowed the
+.IR ex
+.BR open
+and
+.BR visual
+commands. This edit option was omitted because these commands are
+required by POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.IP "\fBoptimize\fP" 10
+The
+.BR optimize
+edit option historically expedited text throughput by setting the
+terminal to not do automatic
+<carriage-return>
+characters when printing more than one logical line of output. This
+option was omitted from POSIX.1\(hy2008 because it was intended for terminals
+without addressable cursors, which are rarely, if ever, still used.
+.IP "\fBruler\fP" 10
+The
+.BR ruler
+edit option has been used in some implementations of
+.IR vi
+to present a current row/column ruler for the user. This option was
+omitted from POSIX.1\(hy2008 because it is not widespread historical practice.
+.IP "\fBsourceany\fP" 10
+The
+.BR sourceany
+edit option historically caused
+.IR ex
+or
+.IR vi
+to source start-up files that were owned by users other than the user
+running the editor. This option is a security problem, and vendors are
+strongly encouraged to remove it from their implementations.
+.IP "\fBtimeout\fP" 10
+The
+.BR timeout
+edit option historically enabled the (now standard) feature of only
+waiting for a short period before returning keys that could be part of
+a macro. This feature was omitted from POSIX.1\(hy2008 because its behavior is
+now standard, it is not widely useful, and it was rarely documented.
+.IP "\fBverbose\fP" 10
+The
+.BR verbose
+edit option has been used in some implementations of
+.IR vi
+to cause
+.IR vi
+to output error messages for common errors; for example, attempting to
+move the cursor past the beginning or end of the line instead of only
+alerting the screen. (The historical
+.IR vi
+only alerted the terminal and presented no message for such errors. The
+historical editor option
+.BR terse
+did not select when to present error messages, it only made existing
+error messages more or less verbose.) This option was omitted from
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 because it is not widespread historical practice; however,
+implementors are encouraged to use it if they wish to provide error
+messages for naive users.
+.IP "\fBwraplen\fP" 10
+The
+.BR wraplen
+edit option has been used in some implementations of
+.IR vi
+to specify an automatic margin measured from the left margin instead of
+from the right margin. This is useful when multiple screen sizes are
+being used to edit a single file. This option was omitted from POSIX.1\(hy2008
+because it is not widespread historical practice; however, implementors
+are encouraged to use it if they add this functionality.
+.SS "autoindent, ai"
+.P
+Historically, the command
+.BR 0a
+did not do any autoindentation, regardless of the current indentation
+of line 1. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that any indentation present in line 1 be
+used.
+.SS "autoprint, ap"
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR autoprint
+edit option was not completely consistent or based solely on
+modifications to the edit buffer. Exceptions were the
+.BR read
+command (when reading from a file, but not from a filter), the
+.BR append ,
+.BR change ,
+.BR insert ,
+.BR global ,
+and
+.BR v
+commands, all of which were not affected by
+.BR autoprint ,
+and the
+.BR tag
+command, which was affected by
+.BR autoprint .
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR autoprint
+option only applied to the last of multiple commands entered using
+<vertical-line>
+delimiters; for example,
+.BR delete
+<newline>
+was affected by
+.BR autoprint ,
+but
+.BR delete|version
+<newline>
+was not. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice.
+.SS "autowrite, aw"
+.P
+Appending the
+.BR '!' 
+character to the
+.IR ex
+.BR next
+command to avoid performing an automatic write was not supported in
+historical implementations. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that the behavior match the
+other
+.IR ex
+commands for consistency.
+.SS "ignorecase, ic"
+.P
+Historical implementations of case-insensitive matching (the
+.BR ignorecase
+edit option) lead to counter-intuitive situations when uppercase
+characters were used in range expressions. Historically, the process
+was as follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Take a line of text from the edit buffer.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Convert uppercase to lowercase in text line.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Convert uppercase to lowercase in regular expressions, except in
+character class specifications.
+.IP " 4." 4
+Match regular expressions against text.
+.P
+This would mean that, with
+.BR ignorecase
+in effect, the text:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+The cat sat on the mat
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would be matched by
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+/^the/
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+but not by:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+/^[A\(miZ]he/
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+For consistency with other commands implementing regular expressions,
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this behavior.
+.SS "paragraphs, para"
+.P
+The ISO\ POSIX\(hy2:\|1993 standard made the default
+.BR paragraphs
+and
+.BR sections
+edit options implementation-defined, arguing they were historically
+oriented to the UNIX system
+.IR troff
+text formatter, and a ``portable user'' could use the
+.BR { ,
+.BR } ,
+.BR [[ ,
+.BR ]] ,
+.BR ( ,
+and
+.BR )
+commands in open or visual mode and have the cursor stop in unexpected
+places. POSIX.1\(hy2008 specifies their values in the POSIX locale because the
+unusual grouping (they only work when grouped into two characters at a
+time) means that they cannot be used for general-purpose movement,
+regardless.
+.SS "readonly"
+.P
+Implementations are encouraged to provide the best possible information
+to the user as to the read-only status of the file, with the exception
+that they should not consider the current special privileges of the
+process. This provides users with a safety net because they must force
+the overwrite of read-only files, even when running with additional
+privileges.
+.P
+The
+.BR readonly
+edit option specification largely conforms to historical practice. The
+only difference is that historical implementations did not notice that
+the user had set the
+.BR readonly
+edit option in cases where the file was already marked read-only for
+some reason, and would therefore reinitialize the
+.BR readonly
+edit option the next time the contents of the edit buffer were
+replaced. This behavior is disallowed by POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SS "report"
+.P
+The requirement that lines copied to a buffer interact differently than
+deleted lines is historical practice. For example, if the
+.BR report
+edit option is set to 3, deleting 3 lines will cause a report to be
+written, but 4 lines must be copied before a report is written.
+.P
+The requirement that the
+.IR ex
+.BR global ,
+.BR v ,
+.BR open ,
+.BR undo ,
+and
+.BR visual
+commands present reports based on the total number of lines added or
+deleted during the command execution, and that commands executed by the
+.BR global
+and
+.BR v
+commands not present reports, is historical practice. POSIX.1\(hy2008 extends
+historical practice by requiring that buffer execution be treated
+similarly. The reasons for this are two-fold. Historically, only the
+report by the last command executed from the buffer would be seen by
+the user, as each new report would overwrite the last. In addition, the
+standard developers believed that buffer execution had more in common
+with
+.BR global
+and
+.BR v
+commands than it did with other
+.IR ex
+commands, and should behave similarly, for consistency and simplicity
+of specification.
+.SS "showmatch, sm"
+.P
+The length of time the cursor spends on the matching character is
+unspecified because the timing capabilities of systems are often
+inexact and variable. The time should be long enough for the user to
+notice, but not long enough for the user to become annoyed. Some
+implementations of
+.IR vi
+have added a
+.BR matchtime
+option that permits users to set the number of 0,1 second intervals the
+cursor pauses on the matching character.
+.SS "showmode"
+.P
+The
+.BR showmode
+option has been used in some historical implementations of
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+to display the current editing mode when in open or visual mode. The
+editing modes have generally included ``command'' and ``input'', and
+sometimes other modes such as ``replace'' and ``change''. The string
+was usually displayed on the bottom line of the screen at the far
+right-hand corner. In addition, a preceding
+.BR '*' 
+character often denoted whether the contents of the edit buffer had
+been modified. The latter display has sometimes been part of the
+.BR showmode
+option, and sometimes based on another option. This option was not
+available in the 4 BSD historical implementation of
+.IR vi ,
+but was viewed as generally useful, particularly to novice users, and
+is required by POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+The
+.BR smd
+shorthand for the
+.BR showmode
+option was not present in all historical implementations of the editor.
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires it, for consistency.
+.P
+Not all historical implementations of the editor displayed a mode
+string for command mode, differentiating command mode from text input
+mode by the absence of a mode string. POSIX.1\(hy2008 permits this behavior for
+consistency with historical practice, but implementations are
+encouraged to provide a display string for both modes.
+.SS "slowopen"
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR slowopen
+option was automatically set if the terminal baud rate was less than
+1\|200 baud, or if the baud rate was 1\|200 baud and the
+.BR redraw
+option was not set. The
+.BR slowopen
+option had two effects. First, when inserting characters in the middle
+of a line, characters after the cursor would not be pushed ahead, but
+would appear to be overwritten. Second, when creating a new line of
+text, lines after the current line would not be scrolled down, but
+would appear to be overwritten. In both cases, ending text input mode
+would cause the screen to be refreshed to match the actual contents of
+the edit buffer. Finally, terminals that were sufficiently intelligent
+caused the editor to ignore the
+.BR slowopen
+option. POSIX.1\(hy2008 permits most historical behavior, extending historical
+practice to require
+.BR slowopen
+behaviors if the edit option is set by the user.
+.SS "tags"
+.P
+The default path for tags files is left unspecified as implementations
+may have their own
+.BR tags
+implementations that do not correspond to the historical ones. The
+default
+.BR tags
+option value should probably at least include the file
+.BR ./tags .
+.SS "term"
+.P
+Historical implementations of
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+ignored changes to the
+.BR term
+edit option after the initial terminal information was loaded. This is
+permitted by POSIX.1\(hy2008; however, implementations are encouraged to permit
+the user to modify their terminal type at any time.
+.SS "terse"
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR terse
+edit option optionally provided a shorter, less descriptive error
+message, for some error messages. This is permitted, but not required,
+by POSIX.1\(hy2008. Historically, most common visual mode errors (for example,
+trying to move the cursor past the end of a line) did not result in an
+error message, but simply alerted the terminal. Implementations wishing
+to provide messages for novice users are urged to do so based on the
+.BR edit
+option
+.BR verbose ,
+and not
+.BR terse .
+.SS "window"
+.P
+In historical implementations, the default for the
+.BR window
+edit option was based on the baud rate as follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the baud rate was less than 1\|200, the
+.BR edit
+option
+.BR w300
+set the window value; for example, the line:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+set w300=12
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would set the window option to 12 if the baud rate was less than
+1\|200.
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the baud rate was equal to 1\|200, the
+.BR edit
+option
+.BR w1200
+set the window value.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If the baud rate was greater than 1\|200, the
+.BR edit
+option
+.BR w9600
+set the window value.
+.P
+The
+.BR w300 ,
+.BR w1200 ,
+and
+.BR w9600
+options do not appear in POSIX.1\(hy2008 because of their dependence on specific
+baud rates.
+.P
+In historical implementations, the size of the window displayed by
+various commands was related to, but not necessarily the same as, the
+.BR window
+edit option. For example, the size of the window was set by the
+.IR ex
+command
+.BR "visual 10" ,
+but it did not change the value of the
+.BR window
+edit option. However, changing the value of the
+.BR window
+edit option did change the number of lines that were displayed when the
+screen was repainted. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this behavior in the
+interests of consistency and simplicity of specification, and requires
+that all commands that change the number of lines that are displayed do
+it by setting the value of the
+.BR window
+edit option.
+.SS "wrapmargin, wm"
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR wrapmargin
+option did not affect maps inserting characters that also had
+associated
+.IR count s;
+for example
+.BR ":map\0K\05aABC\0DEF" .
+Unfortunately, there are widely used maps that depend on this behavior.
+For consistency and simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit
+this behavior.
+.P
+Historically,
+.BR wrapmargin
+was calculated using the column display width of all characters on the
+screen. For example, an implementation using
+.BR \(dq^I\(dq 
+to represent
+<tab>
+characters when the
+.BR list
+edit option was set, where
+.BR '^' 
+and
+.BR 'I' 
+each took up a single column on the screen, would calculate the
+.BR wrapmargin
+based on a value of 2 for each
+<tab>.
+The
+.BR number
+edit option similarly changed the effective length of the line as well.
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice.
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard allowed for implementations
+with bytes other than eight bits, but this has been modified in this
+version.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.9.1.1" ", " "Command Search and Execution",
+.IR "\fIctags\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIed\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsed\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsh\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIstty\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIvi\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Table 5-1" ", " "Escape Sequences and Associated Actions",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 9.3" ", " "Basic Regular Expressions",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIaccess\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/exec.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/exec.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9b6c976
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/exec.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,184 @@
+'\" et
+.TH EXEC "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+exec
+\(em execute commands and open, close, or copy file descriptors
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+exec \fB[\fIcommand \fB[\fIargument\fR...\fB]]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR exec
+utility shall open, close, and/or copy file descriptors as specified by
+any redirections as part of the command.
+.P
+If
+.IR exec
+is specified without
+.IR command
+or
+.IR argument s,
+and any file descriptors with numbers greater than 2 are opened with
+associated redirection statements, it is unspecified whether those file
+descriptors remain open when the shell invokes another utility.
+Scripts concerned that child shells could misuse open file descriptors
+can always close them explicitly, as shown in one of the following
+examples.
+.P
+If
+.IR exec
+is specified with
+.IR command ,
+it shall replace the shell with
+.IR command
+without creating a new process. If
+.IR argument s
+are specified, they shall be arguments to
+.IR command .
+Redirection affects the current shell execution environment.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+None.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+If
+.IR command
+is specified,
+.IR exec
+shall not return to the shell; rather, the exit status of the process
+shall be the exit status of the program implementing
+.IR command ,
+which overlaid the shell. If
+.IR command
+is not found, the exit status shall be 127. If
+.IR command
+is found, but it is not an executable utility, the exit status shall be
+126. If a redirection error occurs (see
+.IR "Section 2.8.1" ", " "Consequences of Shell Errors"),
+the shell shall exit with a value in the range 1\(mi125. Otherwise,
+.IR exec
+shall return a zero exit status.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Open
+.IR readfile
+as file descriptor 3 for reading:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+exec 3< readfile
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Open
+.IR writefile
+as file descriptor 4 for writing:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+exec 4> writefile
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Make file descriptor 5 a copy of file descriptor 0:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+exec 5<&0
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Close file descriptor 3:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+exec 3<&\(mi
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Cat the file
+.BR maggie
+by replacing the current shell with the
+.IR cat
+utility:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+exec cat maggie
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+Most historical implementations were not conformant in that:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+foo=bar exec cmd
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+did not pass
+.BR foo
+to
+.BR cmd .
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/exit.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/exit.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..28ebb68
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/exit.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+'\" et
+.TH EXIT "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+exit
+\(em cause the shell to exit
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+exit \fB[\fIn\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR exit
+utility shall cause the shell to exit with the exit status specified
+by the unsigned decimal integer
+.IR n .
+If
+.IR n
+is specified, but its value is not between 0 and 255 inclusively, the
+exit status is undefined.
+.P
+A
+.IR trap
+on
+.BR EXIT
+shall be executed before the shell terminates, except when the
+.IR exit
+utility is invoked in that
+.IR trap
+itself, in which case the shell shall exit immediately.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+None.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The exit status shall be
+.IR n ,
+if specified. Otherwise, the value shall be the exit value of the last
+command executed, or zero if no command was executed. When
+.IR exit
+is executed in a
+.IR trap
+action, the last command is considered to be the command that executed
+immediately preceding the
+.IR trap
+action.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Exit with a
+.IR true
+value:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+exit 0
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Exit with a
+.IR false
+value:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+exit 1
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+As explained in other sections, certain exit status values have been
+reserved for special uses and should be used by applications only for
+those purposes:
+.IP "\0126" 8
+A file to be executed was found, but it was not an executable utility.
+.IP "\0127" 8
+A utility to be executed was not found.
+.IP >128 8
+A command was interrupted by a signal.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/expand.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/expand.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6b4e2aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/expand.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,205 @@
+'\" et
+.TH EXPAND "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+expand
+\(em convert tabs to spaces
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+expand \fB[\fR\(mit \fItablist\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR expand
+utility shall write files or the standard input to the standard output
+with
+<tab>
+characters replaced with one or more
+<space>
+characters needed to pad to the next tab stop. Any
+<backspace>
+characters shall be copied to the output and cause the column position
+count for tab stop calculations to be decremented; the column position
+count shall not be decremented below zero.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR expand
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mit\ \fItablist\fR" 10
+Specify the tab stops. The application shall ensure that the argument
+.IR tablist
+consists of either a single positive decimal integer or a list of
+tabstops. If a single number is given, tabs shall be set that number of
+column positions apart instead of the default 8.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If a list of tabstops is given, the application shall ensure that it
+consists of a list of two or more positive decimal integers, separated
+by
+<blank>
+or
+<comma>
+characters, in ascending order. The
+<tab>
+characters shall be set at those specific column positions. Each tab stop
+.IR N
+shall be an integer value greater than zero, and the list is in
+strictly ascending order. This is taken to mean that, from the start of
+a line of output, tabbing to position
+.IR N
+shall cause the next character output to be in the (\c
+.IR N +1)th
+column position on that line.
+.P
+In the event of
+.IR expand
+having to process a
+<tab>
+at a position beyond the last of those specified in a multiple tab-stop
+list, the
+<tab>
+shall be replaced by a single
+<space>
+in the output.
+.RE
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+The pathname of a text file to be used as input.
+.SH STDIN
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+Input files shall be text files.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR expand :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files), the processing of
+<tab>
+and
+<space>
+characters, and for the determination of the width in column positions
+each character would occupy on an output device.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall be equivalent to the input files with
+<tab>
+characters converted into the appropriate number of
+<space>
+characters.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+The
+.IR expand
+utility shall terminate with an error message and non-zero exit status
+upon encountering difficulties accessing one of the
+.IR file
+operands.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR expand
+utility is useful for preprocessing text files (before sorting, looking
+at specific columns, and so on) that contain
+<tab>
+characters.
+.P
+See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.103" ", " "Column Position".
+.P
+The
+.IR tablist
+option-argument consists of integers in ascending order. Utility Syntax
+Guideline 8 mandates that
+.IR expand
+shall accept the integers (within the single argument) separated using
+either
+<comma>
+or
+<blank>
+characters.
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard allowed the following form in
+the SYNOPSIS:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+expand \fB[\fR\(mitabstop\fB][\fR\(mitab1,tab2,...,tabn\fB][\fIfile\fR ...\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This form is no longer specified by POSIX.1\(hy2008 but may be present
+in some implementations.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fItabs\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIunexpand\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.103" ", " "Column Position",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/export.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/export.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d9b6094
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/export.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,191 @@
+'\" et
+.TH EXPORT "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+export
+\(em set the export attribute for variables
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+export name\fB[\fR=\fIword\fB]\fR...
+.P
+export\fR \(mip
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The shell shall give the
+.IR export
+attribute to the variables corresponding to the specified
+.IR name s,
+which shall cause them to be in the environment of subsequently
+executed commands. If the name of a variable is followed by =\c
+.IR word ,
+then the value of that variable shall be set to
+.IR word .
+.P
+The
+.IR export
+special built-in shall support the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+When
+.BR \(mip
+is specified,
+.IR export
+shall write to the standard output the names and values of all exported
+variables, in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"export %s=%s\en", <\fIname\fR>, <\fIvalue\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+if
+.IR name
+is set, and:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"export %s\en", <\fIname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+if
+.IR name
+is unset.
+.P
+The shell shall format the output, including the proper use of quoting,
+so that it is suitable for reinput to the shell as commands that
+achieve the same exporting results, except:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Read-only variables with values cannot be reset.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Variables that were unset at the time they were output need not be
+reset to the unset state if a value is assigned to the variable between
+the time the state was saved and the time at which the saved output is
+reinput to the shell.
+.P
+When no arguments are given, the results are unspecified. If a variable
+assignment precedes the command name of
+.IR export
+but that variable is not also listed as an operand of
+.IR export ,
+then that variable shall be set in the current shell execution environment
+after the completion of the
+.IR export
+command, but it is unspecified whether that variable is marked for export.
+.SH OPTIONS
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH OPERANDS
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+None.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH STDERR S
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+Zero.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Export
+.IR PWD
+and
+.IR HOME
+variables:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+export PWD HOME
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Set and export the
+.IR PATH
+variable:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+export PATH=/local/bin:$PATH
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Save and restore all exported variables:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+export \(mip > \fItemp-file\fR
+unset \fIa lot of variables\fR
+\&... \fIprocessing\fR
+\&. \fItemp-file\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+Some historical shells use the no-argument case as the functional
+equivalent of what is required here with
+.BR \(mip .
+This feature was left unspecified because it is not historical practice
+in all shells, and some scripts may rely on the now-unspecified results
+on their implementations. Attempts to specify the
+.BR \(mip
+output as the default case were unsuccessful in achieving consensus.
+The
+.BR \(mip
+option was added to allow portable access to the values that can be
+saved and then later restored using; for example, a
+.IR dot
+script.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/expr.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/expr.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a0be688
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/expr.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,440 @@
+'\" et
+.TH EXPR "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+expr
+\(em evaluate arguments as an expression
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+expr \fIoperand\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR expr
+utility shall evaluate an expression and write the result to standard
+output.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The single expression evaluated by
+.IR expr
+shall be formed from the
+.IR operand
+operands, as described in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section. The
+application shall ensure that each of the expression operator symbols:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(  )  |  &  =  >  >=  <  <=  !=  +  \(mi  *  /  %  :
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and the symbols
+.IR integer
+and
+.IR string
+in the table are provided as separate arguments to
+.IR expr .
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR expr :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, equivalence classes,
+and multi-character collating elements within regular expressions and
+by the string comparison operators.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments) and the behavior of character
+classes within regular expressions.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The
+.IR expr
+utility shall evaluate the expression and write the result, followed by
+a
+<newline>,
+to standard output.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+The formation of the expression to be evaluated is shown in the
+following table. The symbols
+.IR expr ,
+.IR expr1 ,
+and
+.IR expr2
+represent expressions formed from
+.IR integer
+and
+.IR string
+symbols and the expression operator symbols (all separate arguments) by
+recursive application of the constructs described in the table. The
+expressions are listed in order of increasing precedence, with
+equal-precedence operators grouped between horizontal lines. All of
+the operators shall be left-associative.
+.TS
+center tab(@) box;
+cB | cB
+l | lw(4i).
+Expression@Description
+_
+\fIexpr1\fP\ |\ \fIexpr2\fP@T{
+Returns the evaluation of
+.IR expr1
+if it is neither null nor zero; otherwise, returns the evaluation of
+.IR expr2
+if it is not null; otherwise, zero.
+T}
+_
+\fIexpr1\fP\ &\ \fIexpr2\fP@T{
+Returns the evaluation of
+.IR expr1
+if neither expression evaluates to null or zero; otherwise, returns zero.
+T}
+_
+@T{
+Returns the result of a decimal integer comparison if both arguments
+are integers; otherwise, returns the result of a string comparison
+using the locale-specific collation sequence. The result of each
+comparison is 1 if the specified relationship is true, or 0 if the
+relationship is false.
+T}
+\fIexpr1\fP\ =\ \fIexpr2\fR@Equal.
+\fIexpr1\fP\ >\ \fIexpr2\fR@Greater than.
+\fIexpr1\fP\ >=\ \fIexpr2\fR@Greater than or equal.
+\fIexpr1\fP\ <\ \fIexpr2\fR@Less than.
+\fIexpr1\fP\ <=\ \fIexpr2\fR@Less than or equal.
+\fIexpr1\fP\ !=\ \fIexpr2\fR@Not equal.
+_
+\fIexpr1\fP\ +\ \fIexpr2\fP@T{
+Addition of decimal integer-valued arguments.
+T}
+\fIexpr1\fP\ \(mi\ \fIexpr2\fP@T{
+Subtraction of decimal integer-valued arguments.
+T}
+_
+\fIexpr1\fP\ *\ \fIexpr2\fP@T{
+Multiplication of decimal integer-valued arguments.
+T}
+\fIexpr1\fP\ /\ \fIexpr2\fP@T{
+Integer division of decimal integer-valued arguments, producing
+an integer result.
+T}
+\fIexpr1\fP\ %\ \fIexpr2\fP@T{
+Remainder of integer division of decimal integer-valued arguments.
+T}
+_
+\fIexpr1\fP\ :\ \fIexpr2\fP@T{
+Matching expression; see below.
+T}
+_
+(\ \fIexpr\fR\ )@T{
+Grouping symbols. Any expression can be placed within parentheses.
+Parentheses can be nested to a depth of
+{EXPR_NEST_MAX}.
+T}
+_
+\fIinteger\fP@T{
+An argument consisting only of an (optional) unary minus followed
+by digits.
+T}
+\fIstring\fP@T{
+A string argument; see below.
+T}
+.TE
+.SS "Matching Expression"
+.P
+The
+.BR ':' 
+matching operator shall compare the string resulting from the
+evaluation of
+.IR expr1
+with the regular expression pattern resulting from the evaluation of
+.IR expr2 .
+Regular expression syntax shall be that defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 9.3" ", " "Basic Regular Expressions",
+except that all patterns are anchored to the beginning of the string (that
+is, only sequences starting at the first character of a string are matched
+by the regular expression) and, therefore, it is unspecified whether
+.BR '^' 
+is a special character in that context. Usually, the matching operator
+shall return a string representing the number of characters matched (\c
+.BR '0' 
+on failure). Alternatively, if the pattern contains at least one
+regular expression subexpression
+.BR \(dq[\e(...\e)]\(dq ,
+the string matched by the back-reference expression
+.BR \(dq\e1\(dq 
+shall be returned. If the back-reference expression
+.BR \(dq\e1\(dq 
+does not match, then the null string shall be returned.
+.SS "String Operand"
+.P
+A string argument is an argument that cannot be identified as an
+.IR integer
+argument or as one of the expression operator symbols shown in the
+OPERANDS section.
+.P
+The use of string arguments
+.BR length ,
+.BR substr ,
+.BR index ,
+or
+.BR match
+produces unspecified results.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+The
+.IR expression
+evaluates to neither null nor zero.
+.IP "\01" 6
+The
+.IR expression
+evaluates to null or zero.
+.IP "\02" 6
+Invalid
+.IR expression .
+.IP >2 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+After argument processing by the shell,
+.IR expr
+is not required to be able to tell the difference between an operator
+and an operand except by the value. If
+.BR \(dq$a\(dq 
+is
+.BR '=' ,
+the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+expr $a = '='
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+looks like:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+expr = = =
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+as the arguments are passed to
+.IR expr
+(and they all may be taken as the
+.BR '=' 
+operator). The following works reliably:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+expr X$a = X=
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Also note that this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 permits implementations to extend utilities. The
+.IR expr
+utility permits the integer arguments to be preceded with a unary
+minus. This means that an integer argument could look like an option.
+Therefore, the conforming application must employ the
+.BR \(dq\(mi\|\(mi\(dq 
+construct of Guideline 10 of the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+to protect its operands if there is any chance the first operand might
+be a negative integer (or any string with a leading minus).
+.br
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The
+.IR expr
+utility has a rather difficult syntax:
+.IP " *" 4
+Many of the operators are also shell control operators or reserved
+words, so they have to be escaped on the command line.
+.IP " *" 4
+Each part of the expression is composed of separate arguments, so
+liberal usage of
+<blank>
+characters is required. For example:
+.TS
+center tab(@) box;
+cB | cB
+lf5 | lf5.
+Invalid@Valid
+_
+\fIexpr\fP 1+2@\fIexpr\fP 1 + 2
+\fIexpr\fP "1 + 2"@\fIexpr\fP 1 + 2
+\fIexpr\fP 1 + (2 * 3)@\fIexpr\fP 1 + \e( 2 \e* 3 \e)
+.TE
+.P
+In many cases, the arithmetic and string features provided as part of
+the shell command language are easier to use than their equivalents in
+.IR expr .
+Newly written scripts should avoid
+.IR expr
+in favor of the new features within the shell; see
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Parameters and Variables"
+and
+.IR "Section 2.6.4" ", " "Arithmetic Expansion".
+.P
+The following command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+a=$(expr $a + 1)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+adds 1 to the variable
+.IR a .
+.P
+The following command, for
+.BR \(dq$a\(dq 
+equal to either
+.BR /usr/abc/file
+or just
+.BR file :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+expr $a : '.*/\e(.*\e)' \e| $a
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+returns the last segment of a pathname (that is,
+.BR file ).
+Applications should avoid the character
+.BR '/' 
+used alone as an argument;
+.IR expr
+may interpret it as the division operator.
+.P
+The following command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+expr "//$a" : '.*/\e(.*\e)'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+is a better representation of the previous example. The addition of
+the
+.BR \(dq//\(dq 
+characters eliminates any ambiguity about the division operator and
+simplifies the whole expression. Also note that pathnames may contain
+characters contained in the
+.IR IFS
+variable and should be quoted to avoid having
+.BR \(dq$a\(dq 
+expand into multiple arguments.
+.P
+The following command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+expr "$VAR" : '.*'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+returns the number of characters in
+.IR VAR .
+.SH RATIONALE
+In an early proposal, EREs were used in the matching expression syntax.
+This was changed to BREs to avoid breaking historical applications.
+.P
+The use of a leading
+<circumflex>
+in the BRE is unspecified because many historical implementations have
+treated it as a special character, despite their system documentation. For
+example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+expr foo : ^foo     expr ^foo : ^foo
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+return 3 and 0, respectively, on those systems; their documentation
+would imply the reverse. Thus, the anchoring condition is left
+unspecified to avoid breaking historical scripts relying on this
+undocumented feature.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Parameters and Variables",
+.IR "Section 2.6.4" ", " "Arithmetic Expansion"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 9.3" ", " "Basic Regular Expressions",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/false.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/false.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7fa2366
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/false.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FALSE "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+false
+\(em return false value
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+false
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR false
+utility shall return with a non-zero exit code.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+None.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+None.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+Not used.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The
+.IR false
+utility shall always exit with a value other than zero.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fItrue\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/fc.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/fc.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f6e7463
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/fc.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,593 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FC "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fc
+\(em process the command history list
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+fc \fB[\fR\(mir\fB] [\fR\(mie \fIeditor\fB] [\fIfirst \fB[\fIlast\fB]]\fR
+.P
+fc \(mil\fB [\fR\(minr\fB] [\fIfirst \fB[\fIlast\fB]]\fR
+.P
+fc \(mis\fB [\fIold\fR=\fInew\fB] [\fIfirst\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR fc
+utility shall list, or shall edit and re-execute, commands previously
+entered to an interactive
+.IR sh .
+.P
+The command history list shall reference commands by number. The first
+number in the list is selected arbitrarily. The relationship of a
+number to its command shall not change except when the user logs in and
+no other process is accessing the list, at which time the system may
+reset the numbering to start the oldest retained command at another
+number (usually 1). When the number reaches an
+implementation-defined upper limit, which shall be no smaller than
+the value in
+.IR HISTSIZE
+or 32\|767 (whichever is greater), the shell may wrap the numbers,
+starting the next command with a lower number (usually 1). However,
+despite this optional wrapping of numbers,
+.IR fc
+shall maintain the time-ordering sequence of the commands. For
+example, if four commands in sequence are given the numbers 32\|766,
+32\|767, 1 (wrapped), and 2 as they are executed, command 32\|767 is
+considered the command previous to 1, even though its number is
+higher.
+.P
+When commands are edited (when the
+.BR \(mil
+option is not specified), the resulting lines shall be entered at the
+end of the history list and then re-executed by
+.IR sh .
+The
+.IR fc
+command that caused the editing shall not be entered into the history
+list. If the editor returns a non-zero exit status, this shall
+suppress the entry into the history list and the command re-execution.
+Any command line variable assignments or redirection operators used
+with
+.IR fc
+shall affect both the
+.IR fc
+command itself as well as the command that results; for example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fc \(mis \(mi\|\(mi \(mi1 2>/dev/null
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+reinvokes the previous command, suppressing standard error for both
+.IR fc
+and the previous command.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR fc
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mie\ \fIeditor\fR" 10
+Use the editor named by
+.IR editor
+to edit the commands. The
+.IR editor
+string is a utility name, subject to search via the
+.IR PATH
+variable (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables").
+The value in the
+.IR FCEDIT
+variable shall be used as a default when
+.BR \(mie
+is not specified. If
+.IR FCEDIT
+is null or unset,
+.IR ed
+shall be used as the editor.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\fP" 10
+(The letter ell.) List the commands rather than invoking an editor on
+them. The commands shall be written in the sequence indicated by the
+.IR first
+and
+.IR last
+operands, as affected by
+.BR \(mir ,
+with each command preceded by the command number.
+.IP "\fB\(min\fP" 10
+Suppress command numbers when listing with
+.BR \(mil .
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+Reverse the order of the commands listed (with
+.BR \(mil )
+or edited (with neither
+.BR \(mil
+nor
+.BR \(mis ).
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Re-execute the command without invoking an editor.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfirst\fR,\ \fIlast\fR" 10
+Select the commands to list or edit. The number of previous commands
+that can be accessed shall be determined by the value of the
+.IR HISTSIZE
+variable. The value of
+.IR first
+or
+.IR last
+or both shall be one of the following:
+.RS 10 
+.IP "\fB[+]\fInumber\fR" 10
+A positive number representing a command number; command numbers can be
+displayed with the
+.BR \(mil
+option.
+.IP "\fB\(mi\fInumber\fR" 10
+A negative decimal number representing the command that was executed
+.IR number
+of commands previously. For example, \(mi1 is the immediately previous
+command.
+.IP "\fIstring\fR" 10
+A string indicating the most recently entered command that begins with
+that string. If the
+.IR old =\c
+.IR new
+operand is not also specified with
+.BR \(mis ,
+the string form of the
+.IR first
+operand cannot contain an embedded
+<equals-sign>.
+.P
+When the synopsis form with
+.BR \(mis
+is used:
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR first
+is omitted, the previous command shall be used.
+.P
+For the synopsis forms without
+.BR \(mis :
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR last
+is omitted,
+.IR last
+shall default to the previous command when
+.BR \(mil
+is specified; otherwise, it shall default to
+.IR first .
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR first
+and
+.IR last
+are both omitted, the previous 16 commands shall be listed or the
+previous single command shall be edited (based on the
+.BR \(mil
+option).
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR first
+and
+.IR last
+are both present, all of the commands from
+.IR first
+to
+.IR last
+shall be edited (without
+.BR \(mil )
+or listed (with
+.BR \(mil ).
+Editing multiple commands shall be accomplished by presenting to the
+editor all of the commands at one time, each command starting on a new
+line. If
+.IR first
+represents a newer command than
+.IR last ,
+the commands shall be listed or edited in reverse sequence, equivalent
+to using
+.BR \(mir .
+For example, the following commands on the first line are equivalent to
+the corresponding commands on the second:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fc \(mir 10 20    fc    30 40
+fc    20 10    fc \(mir 40 30
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+When a range of commands is used, it shall not be an error to specify
+.IR first
+or
+.IR last
+values that are not in the history list;
+.IR fc
+shall substitute the value representing the oldest or newest command in
+the list, as appropriate. For example, if there are only ten commands
+in the history list, numbered 1 to 10:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fc \(mil
+fc 1 99
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+shall list and edit, respectively, all ten commands.
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP "\fIold\fP=\fInew\fR" 10
+Replace the first occurrence of string
+.IR old
+in the commands to be re-executed by the string
+.IR new .
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR fc :
+.IP "\fIFCEDIT\fP" 10
+This variable, when expanded by the shell, shall determine the default
+value for the
+.BR \(mie
+.IR editor
+option's
+.IR editor
+option-argument. If
+.IR FCEDIT
+is null or unset,
+.IR ed
+shall be used as the editor.
+.IP "\fIHISTFILE\fP" 10
+Determine a pathname naming a command history file. If the
+.IR HISTFILE
+variable is not set, the shell may attempt to access or create a file
+.BR .sh_history
+in the directory referred to by the
+.IR HOME
+environment variable. If the shell cannot obtain both read and write
+access to, or create, the history file, it shall use an unspecified
+mechanism that allows the history to operate properly. (References to
+history ``file'' in this section shall be understood to mean this
+unspecified mechanism in such cases.) An implementation may choose to
+access this variable only when initializing the history file; this
+initialization shall occur when
+.IR fc
+or
+.IR sh
+first attempt to retrieve entries from, or add entries to, the file, as
+the result of commands issued by the user, the file named by the
+.IR ENV
+variable, or implementation-defined system start-up files. In some
+historical shells, the history file is initialized just after the
+.IR ENV
+file has been processed. Therefore, it is implementation-defined
+whether changes made to
+.IR HISTFILE
+after the history file has been initialized are effective.
+Implementations may choose to disable the history list mechanism for
+users with appropriate privileges who do not set
+.IR HISTFILE ;
+the specific circumstances under which this occurs are
+implementation-defined. If more than one instance of the shell is
+using the same history file, it is unspecified how updates to the
+history file from those shells interact. As entries are deleted from
+the history file, they shall be deleted oldest first. It is
+unspecified when history file entries are physically removed from the
+history file.
+.IP "\fIHISTSIZE\fP" 10
+Determine a decimal number representing the limit to the number of
+previous commands that are accessible. If this variable is unset, an
+unspecified default greater than or equal to 128 shall be used. The
+maximum number of commands in the history list is unspecified, but
+shall be at least 128. An implementation may choose to access this
+variable only when initializing the history file, as described under
+.IR HISTFILE .
+Therefore, it is unspecified whether changes made to
+.IR HISTSIZE
+after the history file has been initialized are effective.
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+When the
+.BR \(mil
+option is used to list commands, the format of each command in the list
+shall be as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d\et%s\en", <\fIline number\fR>, <\fIcommand\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If both the
+.BR \(mil
+and
+.BR \(min
+options are specified, the format of each command shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"\et%s\en", <\fIcommand\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the <\fIcommand\fP> consists of more than one line, the lines after
+the first shall be displayed as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"\et%s\en", <\fIcontinued-command\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion of the listing.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.P
+Otherwise, the exit status shall be that of the commands executed by
+.IR fc .
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since editors sometimes use file descriptors as integral parts of their
+editing, redirecting their file descriptors as part of the
+.IR fc
+command can produce unexpected results. For example, if
+.IR vi
+is the
+.IR FCEDIT
+editor, the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fc \(mis | more
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+does not work correctly on many systems.
+.P
+Users on windowing systems may want to have separate history files for
+each window by setting
+.IR HISTFILE
+as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+HISTFILE=$HOME/.sh_hist$$
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+This utility is based on the
+.IR fc
+built-in of the KornShell.
+.P
+An early proposal specified the
+.BR \(mie
+option as
+.BR [\(mie
+.IR editor
+.BR [ \c
+.IR old \c
+=
+.IR new
+.BR ]\|] ,
+which is not historical practice. Historical practice in
+.IR fc
+of either
+.BR [\(mie
+.IR editor \c
+.BR ]
+or
+.BR "[\(mie \(mi ["
+.IR old \c
+=
+.IR new
+.BR ]\|]
+is acceptable, but not both together. To clarify this, a new option
+.BR \(mis
+was introduced replacing the
+.BR "[\(mie \(mi]" .
+This resolves the conflict and makes
+.IR fc
+conform to the Utility Syntax Guidelines.
+.IP "\fIHISTFILE\fP" 10
+Some implementations of the KornShell check for the superuser
+and do not create a history file unless
+.IR HISTFILE
+is set. This is done primarily to avoid creating unlinked files in the
+root file system when logging in during single-user mode.
+.IR HISTFILE
+must be set for the superuser to have history.
+.IP "\fIHISTSIZE\fP" 10
+Needed to limit the size of history files. It is the intent of the
+standard developers that when two shells share the same history file,
+commands that are entered in one shell shall be accessible by the other
+shell. Because of the difficulties of synchronization over a network,
+the exact nature of the interaction is unspecified.
+.P
+The initialization process for the history file can be dependent on the
+system start-up files, in that they may contain commands that
+effectively preempt the settings the user has for
+.IR HISTFILE
+and
+.IR HISTSIZE .
+For example, function definition commands are recorded in the history
+file. If the system administrator includes function definitions in some
+system start-up file called before the
+.IR ENV
+file, the history file is initialized before the user can influence its
+characteristics. In some historical shells, the history file is
+initialized just after the
+.IR ENV
+file has been processed. Because of these situations, the text requires
+the initialization process to be implementation-defined.
+.P
+Consideration was given to omitting the
+.IR fc
+utility in favor of the command line editing feature in
+.IR sh .
+For example, in
+.IR vi
+editing mode, typing
+.BR \(dq<ESC> v\(dq 
+is equivalent to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+EDITOR=vi fc
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+However, the
+.IR fc
+utility allows the user the flexibility to edit multiple commands
+simultaneously (such as
+.IR fc
+10 20) and to use editors other than those supported by
+.IR sh
+for command line editing.
+.P
+In the KornShell, the alias
+.BR r
+(``re-do'') is preset to
+.IR fc
+.BR "\(mie \(mi"
+(equivalent to the POSIX
+.IR fc
+.BR \(mis ).
+This is probably an easier command name to remember than
+.IR fc
+(``fix command''), but it does not meet the Utility Syntax Guidelines.
+Renaming
+.IR fc
+to
+.IR hist
+or
+.IR redo
+was considered, but since this description closely matches historical
+KornShell practice already, such a renaming was seen as gratuitous.
+Users are free to create aliases whenever odd historical names such as
+.IR fc ,
+.IR awk ,
+.IR cat ,
+.IR grep ,
+or
+.IR yacc
+are standardized by POSIX.
+.P
+Command numbers have no ordering effects; they are like serial numbers.
+The
+.BR \(mir
+option and \(mi\fInumber\fP operand address the sequence of command
+execution, regardless of serial numbers. So, for example, if the
+command number wrapped back to 1 at some arbitrary point, there would
+be no ambiguity associated with traversing the wrap point. For example,
+if the command history were:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+32766: echo 1
+32767: echo 2
+1: echo 3
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+the number \(mi2 refers to command 32\|767 because it is the second
+previous command, regardless of serial number.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsh\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/fg.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/fg.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba1802c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/fg.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,162 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FG "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fg
+\(em run jobs in the foreground
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+fg \fB[\fIjob_id\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+If job control is enabled (see the description of
+.IR set
+.BR \(mim ),
+the
+.IR fg
+utility shall move a background job from the current environment (see
+.IR "Section 2.12" ", " "Shell Execution Environment")
+into the foreground.
+.P
+Using
+.IR fg
+to place a job into the foreground shall remove its process ID from the
+list of those ``known in the current shell execution environment''; see
+.IR "Section 2.9.3.1" ", " "Examples".
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIjob_id\fR" 10
+Specify the job to be run as a foreground job. If no
+.IR job_id
+operand is given, the
+.IR job_id
+for the job that was most recently suspended, placed in the background,
+or run as a background job shall be used. The format of
+.IR job_id
+is described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.204" ", " "Job Control Job ID".
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR fg :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The
+.IR fg
+utility shall write the command line of the job to standard output
+in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIcommand\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+If job control is disabled, the
+.IR fg
+utility shall exit with an error and no job shall be placed in the
+foreground.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR fg
+utility does not work as expected when it is operating in its own
+utility execution environment because that environment has no
+applicable jobs to manipulate. See the APPLICATION USAGE section for
+.IR "\fIbg\fR\^".
+For this reason,
+.IR fg
+is generally implemented as a shell regular built-in.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The extensions to the shell specified in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 have mostly been based
+on features provided by the KornShell. The job control features
+provided by
+.IR bg ,
+.IR fg ,
+and
+.IR jobs
+are also based on the KornShell. The standard developers examined the
+characteristics of the C shell versions of these utilities and found
+that differences exist. Despite widespread use of the C shell, the
+KornShell versions were selected for this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 to maintain a degree of
+uniformity with the rest of the KornShell features selected (such as
+the very popular command line editing features).
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.9.3.1" ", " "Examples",
+.IR "Section 2.12" ", " "Shell Execution Environment",
+.IR "\fIbg\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIjobs\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.204" ", " "Job Control Job ID",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/file.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/file.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3353707
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/file.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,829 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FILE "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+file
+\(em determine file type
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+file \fB[\fR\(midh\fB] [\fR\(miM \fIfile\fB] [\fR\(mim \fIfile\fB] \fIfile\fR...
+.P
+file \(mii \fB[\fR\(mih\fB] \fIfile\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR file
+utility shall perform a series of tests in sequence on each specified
+.IR file
+in an attempt to classify it:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If
+.IR file
+does not exist, cannot be read, or its file status could not be
+determined, the output shall indicate that the file was processed, but
+that its type could not be determined.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the file is not a regular file, its file type shall be identified.
+The file types directory, FIFO, socket, block special, and character
+special shall be identified as such. Other implementation-defined file
+types may also be identified. If
+.IR file
+is a symbolic link, by default the link shall be resolved and
+.IR file
+shall test the type of file referenced by the symbolic link. (See the
+.BR \(mih
+and
+.BR \(mii
+options below.)
+.IP " 3." 4
+If the length of
+.IR file
+is zero, it shall be identified as an empty file.
+.IP " 4." 4
+The
+.IR file
+utility shall examine an initial segment of
+.IR file
+and shall make a guess at identifying its contents based on
+position-sensitive tests. (The answer is not guaranteed to be correct;
+see the
+.BR \(mid ,
+.BR \(miM ,
+and
+.BR \(mim
+options below.)
+.IP " 5." 4
+The
+.IR file
+utility shall examine
+.IR file
+and make a guess at identifying its contents based on context-sensitive
+default system tests. (The answer is not guaranteed to be correct.)
+.IP " 6." 4
+The file shall be identified as a data file.
+.P
+If
+.IR file
+does not exist, cannot be read, or its file status could not be
+determined, the output shall indicate that the file was processed, but
+that its type could not be determined.
+.P
+If
+.IR file
+is a symbolic link, by default the link shall be resolved and
+.IR file
+shall test the type of file referenced by the symbolic link.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR file
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except that the order of the
+.BR \(mim ,
+.BR \(mid ,
+and
+.BR \(miM
+options shall be significant.
+.P
+The following options shall be supported by the implementation:
+.IP "\fB\(mid\fP" 10
+Apply any position-sensitive default system tests and
+context-sensitive default system tests to the file. This is the
+default if no
+.BR \(miM
+or
+.BR \(mim
+option is specified.
+.IP "\fB\(mih\fP" 10
+When a symbolic link is encountered, identify the file as a symbolic
+link. If
+.BR \(mih
+is not specified and
+.IR file
+is a symbolic link that refers to a nonexistent file,
+.IR file
+shall identify the file as a symbolic link, as if
+.BR \(mih
+had been specified.
+.IP "\fB\(mii\fP" 10
+If a file is a regular file, do not attempt to classify the type of the
+file further, but identify the file as specified in the STDOUT section.
+.IP "\fB\(miM\ \fIfile\fR" 10
+Specify the name of a file containing position-sensitive tests that
+shall be applied to a file in order to classify it (see the EXTENDED
+DESCRIPTION). No position-sensitive default system tests nor
+context-sensitive default system tests shall be applied unless the
+.BR \(mid
+option is also specified.
+.IP "\fB\(mim\ \fIfile\fR" 10
+Specify the name of a file containing position-sensitive tests that
+shall be applied to a file in order to classify it (see the EXTENDED
+DESCRIPTION).
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mim
+option is specified without specifying the
+.BR \(mid
+option or the
+.BR \(miM
+option, position-sensitive default system tests shall be applied after
+the position-sensitive tests specified by the
+.BR \(mim
+option. If the
+.BR \(miM
+option is specified with the
+.BR \(mid
+option, the
+.BR \(mim
+option, or both, or the
+.BR \(mim
+option is specified with the
+.BR \(mid
+option, the concatenation of the position-sensitive tests specified by
+these options shall be applied in the order specified by the appearance
+of these options. If a
+.BR \(miM
+or
+.BR \(mim
+.IR file
+option-argument is
+.BR \(mi ,
+the results are unspecified.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file to be tested.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' 
+and the implementation treats the
+.BR '\(mi' 
+as meaning standard input.
+Otherwise, the standard input shall not be used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The
+.IR file
+can be any file type.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR file :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+In the POSIX locale, the following format shall be used to identify
+each operand,
+.IR file
+specified:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s: %s\en", <\fIfile\fR>, <\fItype\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The values for <\fItype\fP> are unspecified, except that in the POSIX
+locale, if
+.IR file
+is identified as one of the types listed in the following table,
+<\fItype\fP> shall contain (but is not limited to) the corresponding
+string, unless the file is identified by a position-sensitive test
+specified by a
+.BR \(miM
+or
+.BR \(mim
+option. Each
+<space>
+shown in the strings shall be exactly one
+<space>.
+.br
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable 4-9: File Utility Output Strings\fR
+.TS
+center tab(@) box;
+cB | cB | cB
+l | l | l.
+If \fIfile\fP is:@<\fItype\fP> shall contain the string:@Notes
+_
+Nonexistent@cannot open
+.P
+Block special@block special@1
+Character special@character special@1
+Directory@directory@1
+FIFO@fifo@1
+Socket@socket@1
+Symbolic link@symbolic link to@1
+Regular file@regular file@1,2
+Empty regular file@empty@3
+Regular file that cannot be read@cannot open@3
+.P
+Executable binary@executable@3,4,6
+\fIar\fR archive library (see \fIar\fP)@archive@3,4,6
+Extended \fIcpio\fP format (see \fIpax\fP)@cpio archive@3,4,6
+Extended \fItar\fP format (see \fBustar\fP in \fIpax\fP)@tar archive@3,4,6
+.P
+Shell script@commands text@3,5,6
+C-language source@c program text@3,5,6
+FORTRAN source@fortran program text@3,5,6
+.P
+Regular file whose type cannot be determined@data@3
+.TE
+.TP 10
+.BR Notes:
+.RS 10 
+.IP " 1." 4
+This is a file type test.
+.IP " 2." 4
+This test is applied only if the
+.BR \(mii
+option is specified.
+.IP " 3." 4
+This test is applied only if the
+.BR \(mii
+option is not specified.
+.IP " 4." 4
+This is a position-sensitive default system test.
+.IP " 5." 4
+This is a context-sensitive default system test.
+.IP " 6." 4
+Position-sensitive default system tests and context-sensitive
+default system tests are not applied if the
+.BR \(miM
+option is specified unless the
+.BR \(mid
+option is also specified.
+.RE
+.P
+.P
+In the POSIX locale, if
+.IR file
+is identified as a symbolic link (see the
+.BR \(mih
+option), the following alternative output format shall be used:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s: %s %s\en", <\fIfile\fR>, <\fItype\fR>, <\fIcontents of link\fR>"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the file named by the
+.IR file
+operand does not exist, cannot be read, or the type of the file named
+by the
+.IR file
+operand cannot be determined, this shall not be considered an error
+that affects the exit status.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+A file specified as an option-argument to the
+.BR \(mim
+or
+.BR \(miM
+options shall contain one position-sensitive test per line, which shall
+be applied to the file. If the test succeeds, the message field of the
+line shall be printed and no further tests shall be applied, with the
+exception that tests on immediately following lines beginning with a
+single
+.BR '>' 
+character shall be applied.
+.P
+Each line shall be composed of the following four
+<tab>-separated
+fields. (Implementations may allow any combination of one or more
+white-space characters other than
+<newline>
+to act as field separators.)
+.IP "\fIoffset\fP" 10
+An unsigned number (optionally preceded by a single
+.BR '>' 
+character) specifying the
+.IR offset ,
+in bytes, of the value in the file that is to be compared against the
+.IR value
+field of the line. If the file is shorter than the specified offset,
+the test shall fail.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If the
+.IR offset
+begins with the character
+.BR '>' ,
+the test contained in the line shall not be applied to the file unless
+the test on the last line for which the
+.IR offset
+did not begin with a
+.BR '>' 
+was successful. By default, the
+.IR offset
+shall be interpreted as an unsigned decimal number. With a leading 0x
+or 0X, the
+.IR offset
+shall be interpreted as a hexadecimal number; otherwise, with a leading
+0, the
+.IR offset
+shall be interpreted as an octal number.
+.RE
+.IP "\fItype\fP" 10
+The type of the value in the file to be tested. The type shall consist
+of the type specification characters
+.BR d ,
+.BR s ,
+and
+.BR u ,
+specifying signed decimal, string, and unsigned decimal, respectively.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR type
+string shall be interpreted as the bytes from the file starting at the
+specified
+.IR offset
+and including the same number of bytes specified by the
+.IR value
+field. If insufficient bytes remain in the file past the
+.IR offset
+to match the
+.IR value
+field, the test shall fail.
+.P
+The type specification characters
+.BR d
+and
+.BR u
+can be followed by an optional unsigned decimal integer that specifies
+the number of bytes represented by the type. The type specification
+characters
+.BR d
+and
+.BR u
+can be followed by an optional
+.BR C ,
+.BR S ,
+.BR I ,
+or
+.BR L ,
+indicating that the value is of type
+.BR char ,
+.BR short ,
+.BR int ,
+or
+.BR long ,
+respectively.
+.P
+The default number of bytes represented by the type specifiers
+.BR d ,
+.BR f ,
+and
+.BR u
+shall correspond to their respective C-language types as follows. If
+the system claims conformance to the C-Language Development Utilities
+option, those specifiers shall correspond to the default sizes used in
+the
+.IR c99
+utility. Otherwise, the default sizes shall be implementation-defined.
+.P
+For the type specifier characters
+.BR d
+and
+.BR u ,
+the default number of bytes shall correspond to the size of a basic
+integer type of the implementation. For these specifier
+characters, the implementation shall support values of the optional
+number of bytes to be converted corresponding to the number of bytes in
+the C-language types
+.BR char ,
+.BR short ,
+.BR int ,
+or
+.BR long .
+These numbers can also be specified by an application as the characters
+.BR C ,
+.BR S ,
+.BR I ,
+and
+.BR L ,
+respectively. The byte order used when interpreting numeric values is
+implementation-defined, but shall correspond to the order in which a
+constant of the corresponding type is stored in memory on the system.
+.P
+All type specifiers, except for
+.BR s ,
+can be followed by a mask specifier of the form &\fInumber\fP. The mask
+value shall be AND'ed with the value of the input file before the
+comparison with the
+.IR value
+field of the line is made. By default, the mask shall be interpreted as
+an unsigned decimal number. With a leading 0x or 0X, the mask shall be
+interpreted as an unsigned hexadecimal number; otherwise, with a
+leading 0, the mask shall be interpreted as an unsigned octal number.
+.P
+The strings
+.BR byte ,
+.BR short ,
+.BR long ,
+and
+.BR string
+shall also be supported as type fields, being interpreted as
+.BR dC ,
+.BR dS ,
+.BR dL ,
+and
+.BR s ,
+respectively.
+.RE
+.IP "\fIvalue\fP" 10
+The
+.IR value
+to be compared with the value from the file.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If the specifier from the type field is
+.BR s
+or
+.BR string ,
+then interpret the value as a string. Otherwise, interpret it as a
+number. If the value is a string, then the test shall succeed only when
+a string value exactly matches the bytes from the file.
+.P
+If the
+.IR value
+is a string, it can contain the following sequences:
+.IP "\e\fIcharacter\fR" 12
+The
+<backslash>-escape
+sequences as specified in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Table 5-1" ", " "Escape Sequences and Associated Actions"
+(\c
+.BR '\e\e' ,
+.BR '\ea' ,
+.BR '\eb' ,
+.BR '\ef' ,
+.BR '\en' ,
+.BR '\er' ,
+.BR '\et' ,
+.BR '\ev' ).
+In addition, the escape sequence
+.BR '\e\ ' 
+(the
+<backslash>
+character followed by a
+<space>
+character) shall be recognized to represent a
+<space>
+character. The results of using any other character, other than an
+octal digit, following the
+<backslash>
+are unspecified.
+.IP "\e\fIoctal\fR" 12
+Octal sequences that can be used to represent characters with specific
+coded values. An octal sequence shall consist of a
+<backslash>
+followed by the longest sequence of one, two, or three octal-digit
+characters (01234567).
+.P
+By default, any value that is not a string shall be interpreted as a
+signed decimal number. Any such value, with a leading 0x or 0X, shall
+be interpreted as an unsigned hexadecimal number; otherwise, with a
+leading zero, the value shall be interpreted as an unsigned octal
+number.
+.P
+If the value is not a string, it can be preceded by a character
+indicating the comparison to be performed. Permissible characters and
+the comparisons they specify are as follows:
+.IP "\fR=\fP" 6
+The test shall succeed if the value from the file equals the
+.IR value
+field.
+.IP "\fR<\fP" 6
+The test shall succeed if the value from the file is less than the
+.IR value
+field.
+.IP "\fR>\fP" 6
+The test shall succeed if the value from the file is greater than the
+.IR value
+field.
+.IP "\fR&\fP" 6
+The test shall succeed if all of the set bits in the
+.IR value
+field are set in the value from the file.
+.IP "\fR^\fP" 6
+The test shall succeed if at least one of the set bits in the
+.IR value
+field is not set in the value from the file.
+.IP "\fRx\fP" 6
+The test shall succeed if the file is large enough to contain a value
+of the type specified starting at the offset specified.
+.RE
+.IP "\fImessage\fP" 10
+The
+.IR message
+to be printed if the test succeeds. The
+.IR message
+shall be interpreted using the notation for the
+.IR printf
+formatting specification; see
+.IR printf .
+If the
+.IR value
+field was a string, then the value from the file shall be the argument
+for the
+.IR printf
+formatting specification; otherwise, the value from the file shall be
+the argument.
+.br
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR file
+utility can only be required to guess at many of the file types because
+only exhaustive testing can determine some types with certainty. For
+example, binary data on some implementations might match the initial
+segment of an executable or a
+.IR tar
+archive.
+.P
+Note that the table indicates that the output contains the stated
+string. Systems may add text before or after the string. For
+executables, as an example, the machine architecture and various facts
+about how the file was link-edited may be included. Note also that on
+systems that recognize shell script files starting with
+.BR \(dq#!\(dq 
+as executable files, these may be identified as executable binary files
+rather than as shell scripts.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Determine whether an argument is a binary executable file:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+file \(mi\|\(mi "$1" | grep \(miq ':.*executable' &&
+    printf "%s is executable.\en$1"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.BR \(mif
+option was omitted because the same effect can (and should) be obtained
+using the
+.IR xargs
+utility.
+.P
+Historical versions of the
+.IR file
+utility attempt to identify the following types of files: symbolic
+link, directory, character special, block special, socket,
+.IR tar
+archive,
+.IR cpio
+archive, SCCS archive, archive library, empty,
+.IR compress
+output,
+.IR pack
+output, binary data, C source, FORTRAN source, assembler source,
+.IR nroff /\c
+.IR troff /\c
+.IR eqn /\c
+.IR tbl
+source
+.IR troff
+output, shell script, C shell script, English text, ASCII text, various
+executables, APL workspace, compiled terminfo entries, and CURSES
+screen images. Only those types that are reasonably well specified in
+POSIX or are directly related to POSIX utilities are listed in the
+table.
+.P
+Historical systems have used a ``magic file'' named
+.BR /etc/magic
+to help identify file types. Because it is generally useful for users
+and scripts to be able to identify special file types, the
+.BR \(mim
+flag and a portable format for user-created magic files has been
+specified. No requirement is made that an implementation of
+.IR file
+use this method of identifying files, only that users be permitted to
+add their own classifying tests.
+.P
+In addition, three options have been added to historical practice. The
+.BR \(mid
+flag has been added to permit users to cause their tests to follow any
+default system tests. The
+.BR \(mii
+flag has been added to permit users to test portably for regular files
+in shell scripts. The
+.BR \(miM
+flag has been added to permit users to ignore any default system
+tests.
+.P
+The POSIX.1\(hy2008 description of default system tests and the interaction
+between the
+.BR \(mid ,
+.BR \(miM ,
+and
+.BR \(mim
+options did not clearly indicate that there were two types of ``default
+system tests''. The ``position-sensitive tests'' determine file types
+by looking for certain string or binary values at specific offsets in
+the file being examined. These position-sensitive tests were
+implemented in historical systems using the magic file described above.
+Some of these tests are now built into the
+.IR file
+utility itself on some implementations so the output can provide more
+detail than can be provided by magic files. For example, a magic file
+can easily identify a
+.BR core
+file on most implementations, but cannot name the program file that
+dropped the core. A magic file could produce output such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+/home/dwc/core: ELF 32-bit MSB core file SPARC Version 1
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+but by building the test into the
+.IR file
+utility, you could get output such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+/home/dwc/core: ELF 32-bit MSB core file SPARC Version 1, from 'testprog'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+These extended built-in tests are still to be treated as
+position-sensitive default system tests even if they are not listed in
+.BR /etc/magic
+or any other magic file.
+.P
+The context-sensitive default system tests were always built into the
+.IR file
+utility. These tests looked for language constructs in text files
+trying to identify shell scripts, C, FORTRAN, and other computer
+language source files, and even plain text files. With the addition of
+the
+.BR \(mim
+and
+.BR \(miM
+options the distinction between position-sensitive and
+context-sensitive default system tests became important because the
+order of testing is important. The context-sensitive system default
+tests should never be applied before any position-sensitive tests even
+if the
+.BR \(mid
+option is specified before a
+.BR \(mim
+option or
+.BR \(miM
+option due to the high probability that the context-sensitive system
+default tests will incorrectly identify arbitrary text files as text
+files before position-sensitive tests specified by the
+.BR \(mim
+or
+.BR \(miM
+option would be applied to give a more accurate identification.
+.P
+Leaving the meaning of
+.BR "\(miM \(mi"
+and
+.BR "\(mim \(mi"
+unspecified allows an existing prototype of these options to continue
+to work in a backwards-compatible manner. (In that implementation,
+.BR "\(miM \(mi"
+was roughly equivalent to
+.BR \(mid
+in POSIX.1\(hy2008.)
+.P
+The historical
+.BR \(mic
+option was omitted as not particularly useful to users or portable
+shell scripts. In addition, a reasonable implementation of the
+.IR file
+utility would report any errors found each time the magic file is
+read.
+.P
+The historical format of the magic file was the same as that specified
+by the Rationale in the ISO\ POSIX\(hy2:\|1993 standard for the
+.IR offset ,
+.IR value ,
+and
+.IR message
+fields; however, it used less precise type fields than the format
+specified by the current normative text. The new type field values are
+a superset of the historical ones.
+.P
+The following is an example magic file:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+0  short     070707              cpio archive
+0  short     0143561             Byte-swapped cpio archive
+0  string    070707              ASCII cpio archive
+0  long      0177555             Very old archive
+0  short     0177545             Old archive
+0  short     017437              Old packed data
+0  string    \e037\e036            Packed data
+0  string    \e377\e037            Compacted data
+0  string    \e037\e235            Compressed data
+>2 byte&0x80 >0                  Block compressed
+>2 byte&0x1f x                   %d bits
+0  string    \e032\e001            Compiled Terminfo Entry
+0  short     0433                Curses screen image
+0  short     0434                Curses screen image
+0  string    <ar>                System V Release 1 archive
+0  string    !<arch>\en__.SYMDEF  Archive random library
+0  string    !<arch>             Archive
+0  string    ARF_BEGARF          PHIGS clear text archive
+0  long      0x137A2950          Scalable OpenFont binary
+0  long      0x137A2951          Encrypted scalable OpenFont binary
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The use of a basic integer data type is intended to allow the
+implementation to choose a word size commonly used by applications
+on that architecture.
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard allowed for implementations with
+bytes other than eight bits, but this has been modified in this
+version.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIar\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIls\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIpax\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIprintf\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Table 5-1" ", " "Escape Sequences and Associated Actions",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/find.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/find.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5ef0743
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/find.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,1126 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FIND "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+find
+\(em find files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+find \fB[\fR\(miH|\(miL\fB] \fIpath\fR... \fB[\fIoperand_expression\fR...\fB]
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR find
+utility shall recursively descend the directory hierarchy from each
+file specified by
+.IR path ,
+evaluating a Boolean expression composed of the primaries described in
+the OPERANDS section for each file encountered. Each
+.IR path
+operand shall be evaluated unaltered as it was provided, including
+all trailing
+<slash>
+characters; all pathnames for other files encountered in the hierarchy
+shall consist of the concatenation of the current
+.IR path
+operand, a
+<slash>
+if the current
+.IR path
+operand did not end in one, and the filename relative to the
+.IR path
+operand. The relative portion shall contain no dot or dot-dot components,
+no trailing
+<slash>
+characters, and only single
+<slash>
+characters between pathname components.
+.P
+The
+.IR find
+utility shall be able to descend to arbitrary depths in a file
+hierarchy and shall not fail due to path length limitations (unless a
+.IR path
+operand specified by the application exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}
+requirements).
+.P
+The
+.IR find
+utility shall detect infinite loops; that is, entering a previously
+visited directory that is an ancestor of the last file encountered.
+When it detects an infinite loop,
+.IR find
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error and shall either
+recover its position in the hierarchy or terminate.
+.P
+If a file is removed from or added to the directory hierarchy being
+searched it is unspecified whether or not
+.IR find
+includes that file in its search.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR find
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported by the implementation:
+.IP "\fB\(miH\fP" 10
+Cause the file information and file type evaluated for each symbolic
+link encountered as a
+.IR path
+operand on the command line to be those of the file referenced by the
+link, and not the link itself. If the referenced file does not exist, the
+file information and type shall be for the link itself. File information
+and type for symbolic links encountered during the traversal of a file
+hierarchy shall be that of the link itself.
+.IP "\fB\(miL\fP" 10
+Cause the file information and file type evaluated for each symbolic
+link encountered as a
+.IR path
+operand on the command line or encountered during the traversal of
+a file hierarchy to be those of the file referenced by the link, and
+not the link itself. If the referenced file does not exist, the file
+information and type shall be for the link itself.
+.P
+Specifying more than one of the mutually-exclusive options
+.BR \(miH
+and
+.BR \(miL
+shall not be considered an error. The last option specified shall
+determine the behavior of the utility. If neither the
+.BR \(miH
+nor the
+.BR \(miL
+option is specified, then the file information and type for symbolic
+links encountered as a
+.IR path
+operand on the command line or encountered during the traversal of a
+file hierarchy shall be that of the link itself.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.P
+The first operand and subsequent operands up to but not including the
+first operand that starts with a
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+or is a
+.BR '!' 
+or a
+.BR '(' ,
+shall be interpreted as
+.IR path
+operands. If the first operand starts with a
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+or is a
+.BR '!' 
+or a
+.BR '(' ,
+the behavior is unspecified. Each
+.IR path
+operand is a pathname of a starting point in the file hierarchy.
+.P
+The first operand that starts with a
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+or is a
+.BR '!' 
+or a
+.BR '(' ,
+and all subsequent arguments shall be interpreted as an
+.IR expression
+made up of the following primaries and operators. In the descriptions,
+wherever
+.IR n
+is used as a primary argument, it shall be interpreted as a decimal
+integer optionally preceded by a plus (\c
+.BR '\(pl' )
+or minus-sign (\c
+.BR '\(mi' )
+sign, as follows:
+.IP "+\fIn\fR" 10
+More than
+.IR n .
+.IP "\fIn\fR" 10
+Exactly
+.IR n .
+.IP "\(mi\fIn\fR" 10
+Less than
+.IR n .
+.P
+The following primaries shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(miname\ \fIpattern\fR" 10
+.br
+The primary shall evaluate as true if the basename of the current
+pathname matches
+.IR pattern
+using the pattern matching notation described in
+.IR "Section 2.13" ", " "Pattern Matching Notation".
+The additional rules in
+.IR "Section 2.13.3" ", " "Patterns Used for Filename Expansion"
+do not apply as this is a matching operation, not an expansion.
+.IP "\fB\(mipath\ \fIpattern\fR" 10
+.br
+The primary shall evaluate as true if the current pathname matches
+.IR pattern
+using the pattern matching notation described in
+.IR "Section 2.13" ", " "Pattern Matching Notation".
+The additional rules in
+.IR "Section 2.13.3" ", " "Patterns Used for Filename Expansion"
+do not apply as this is a matching operation, not an expansion.
+.IP "\fB\(minouser\fP" 10
+The primary shall evaluate as true if the file belongs to a user ID for
+which the
+\fIgetpwuid\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 (or equivalent) returns NULL.
+.IP "\fB\(minogroup\fP" 10
+The primary shall evaluate as true if the file belongs to a group ID
+for which the
+\fIgetgrgid\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 (or equivalent) returns NULL.
+.IP "\fB\(mixdev\fP" 10
+The primary shall always evaluate as true; it shall cause
+.IR find
+not to continue descending past directories that have a different
+device ID (\c
+.IR st_dev ,
+see the
+\fIstat\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008). If any
+.BR \(mixdev
+primary is specified, it shall apply to the entire expression even if
+the
+.BR \(mixdev
+primary would not normally be evaluated.
+.IP "\fB\(miprune\fP" 10
+The primary shall always evaluate as true; it shall cause
+.IR find
+not to descend the current pathname if it is a directory. If the
+.BR \(midepth
+primary is specified, the
+.BR \(miprune
+primary shall have no effect.
+.IP "\fB\(miperm\ [\(mi]\fImode\fR" 10
+.br
+The
+.IR mode
+argument is used to represent file mode bits. It shall be identical in
+format to the
+.IR symbolic_mode
+operand described in
+.IR chmod ,
+and shall be interpreted as follows. To start, a template shall be
+assumed with all file mode bits cleared. An
+.IR op
+symbol of
+.BR '\(pl' 
+shall set the appropriate mode bits in the template;
+.BR '\(mi' 
+shall clear the appropriate bits;
+.BR '=' 
+shall set the appropriate mode bits, without regard to the contents of
+the file mode creation mask of the process. The
+.IR op
+symbol of
+.BR '\(mi' 
+cannot be the first character of
+.IR mode ;
+this avoids ambiguity with the optional leading
+<hyphen>.
+Since the initial mode is all bits off, there are not any symbolic modes
+that need to use
+.BR '\(mi' 
+as the first character.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If the
+<hyphen>
+is omitted, the primary shall evaluate as true when the file permission
+bits exactly match the value of the resulting template.
+.P
+Otherwise, if
+.IR mode
+is prefixed by a
+<hyphen>,
+the primary shall evaluate as true if at least all the bits in the
+resulting template are set in the file permission bits.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miperm\ [\(mi]\fIonum\fR" 10
+.br
+If the
+<hyphen>
+is omitted, the primary shall evaluate as true when the file mode bits
+exactly match the value of the octal number
+.IR onum
+(see the description of the octal
+.IR mode
+in
+.IR chmod ).
+Otherwise, if
+.IR onum
+is prefixed by a
+<hyphen>,
+the primary shall evaluate as true if at least all of the bits specified in
+.IR onum
+are set. In both cases, the behavior is unspecified when
+.IR onum
+exceeds 07777.
+.IP "\fB\(mitype\ \fIc\fR" 10
+The primary shall evaluate as true if the type of the file is
+.IR c ,
+where
+.IR c
+is
+.BR 'b' ,
+.BR 'c' ,
+.BR 'd' ,
+.BR 'l' ,
+.BR 'p' ,
+.BR 'f' ,
+or
+.BR 's' 
+for block special file, character special file, directory, symbolic
+link, FIFO, regular file, or socket, respectively.
+.IP "\fB\(milinks\ \fIn\fR" 10
+The primary shall evaluate as true if the file has
+.IR n
+links.
+.IP "\fB\(miuser\ \fIuname\fR" 10
+The primary shall evaluate as true if the file belongs to the user
+.IR uname.
+If
+.IR uname
+is a decimal integer and the
+\fIgetpwnam\fR()
+(or equivalent) function does not return a valid user name,
+.IR uname
+shall be interpreted as a user ID.
+.IP "\fB\(migroup\ \fIgname\fR" 10
+.br
+The primary shall evaluate as true if the file belongs to the group
+.IR gname .
+If
+.IR gname
+is a decimal integer and the
+\fIgetgrnam\fR()
+(or equivalent) function does not return a valid group name,
+.IR gname
+shall be interpreted as a group ID.
+.IP "\fB\(misize\ \fIn\fB[c]\fR" 10
+The primary shall evaluate as true if the file size in bytes, divided
+by 512 and rounded up to the next integer, is
+.IR n .
+If
+.IR n
+is followed by the character
+.BR 'c' ,
+the size shall be in bytes.
+.IP "\fB\(miatime\ \fIn\fR" 10
+The primary shall evaluate as true if the file access time subtracted
+from the initialization time, divided by 86\|400 (with any remainder
+discarded), is
+.IR n .
+.IP "\fB\(mictime\ \fIn\fR" 10
+The primary shall evaluate as true if the time of last change of file
+status information subtracted from the initialization time, divided by
+86\|400 (with any remainder discarded), is
+.IR n .
+.IP "\fB\(mimtime\ \fIn\fR" 10
+The primary shall evaluate as true if the file modification time
+subtracted from the initialization time, divided by 86\|400 (with any
+remainder discarded), is
+.IR n .
+.IP "\fB\(miexec\ \fIutility_name\ \fB[\fIargument\fR\ .\|.\|.\fB]\ ;\fR" 10
+.IP "\fB\(miexec\ \fIutility_name\ \fB[\fIargument\fR\ .\|.\|.\fB]\ \ \fR{\|}\0+" 10
+.br
+The end of the primary expression shall be punctuated by a
+<semicolon>
+or by a
+<plus-sign>.
+Only a
+<plus-sign>
+that immediately follows an argument containing only the two characters
+.BR \(dq{}\(dq 
+shall punctuate the end of the primary expression. Other uses of the
+<plus-sign>
+shall not be treated as special.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If the primary expression is punctuated by a
+<semicolon>,
+the utility
+.IR utility_name
+shall be invoked once for each pathname and the primary shall evaluate
+as true if the utility returns a zero value as exit status. A
+.IR utility_name
+or
+.IR argument
+containing only the two characters
+.BR \(dq{}\(dq 
+shall be replaced by the current pathname. If a
+.IR utility_name
+or
+.IR argument
+string contains the two characters
+.BR \(dq{}\(dq ,
+but not just the two characters
+.BR \(dq{}\(dq ,
+it is implementation-defined whether
+.IR find
+replaces those two characters or uses the string without change.
+.P
+If the primary expression is punctuated by a
+<plus-sign>,
+the primary shall always evaluate as true, and the pathnames for which
+the primary is evaluated shall be aggregated into sets. The utility
+.IR utility_name
+shall be invoked once for each set of aggregated pathnames. Each
+invocation shall begin after the last pathname in the set is
+aggregated, and shall be completed before the
+.IR find
+utility exits and before the first pathname in the next set (if any) is
+aggregated for this primary, but it is otherwise unspecified whether
+the invocation occurs before, during, or after the evaluations of other
+primaries. If any invocation returns a non-zero value as exit status,
+the
+.IR find
+utility shall return a non-zero exit status. An argument containing
+only the two characters
+.BR \(dq{}\(dq 
+shall be replaced by the set of aggregated pathnames, with each
+pathname passed as a separate argument to the invoked utility in the
+same order that it was aggregated. The size of any set of two or more
+pathnames shall be limited such that execution of the utility does not
+cause the system's
+{ARG_MAX}
+limit to be exceeded. If more than one argument containing the two
+characters
+.BR \(dq{}\(dq 
+is present, the behavior is unspecified.
+.P
+The current directory for the invocation of
+.IR utility_name
+shall be the same as the current directory when the
+.IR find
+utility was started. If the
+.IR utility_name
+names any of the special built-in utilities (see
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities"),
+the results are undefined.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miok\ \fIutility_name\ \fB[\fIargument\fR\ .\|.\|.\fB]\ ;\fR" 10
+.br
+The
+.BR \(miok
+primary shall be equivalent to
+.BR \(miexec ,
+except that the use of a
+<plus-sign>
+to punctuate the end of the primary expression need not be supported, and
+.IR find
+shall request affirmation of the invocation of
+.IR utility_name
+using the current file as an argument by writing to standard error as
+described in the STDERR section. If the response on standard input is
+affirmative, the utility shall be invoked. Otherwise, the command
+shall not be invoked and the value of the
+.BR \(miok
+operand shall be false.
+.IP "\fB\(miprint\fR" 10
+The primary shall always evaluate as true; it shall cause the current
+pathname to be written to standard output.
+.IP "\fB\(minewer\ \fIfile\fR" 10
+The primary shall evaluate as true if the modification time of the
+current file is more recent than the modification time of the file
+named by the pathname
+.IR file .
+.IP "\fB\(midepth\fR" 10
+The primary shall always evaluate as true; it shall cause descent of
+the directory hierarchy to be done so that all entries in a directory
+are acted on before the directory itself. If a
+.BR \(midepth
+primary is not specified, all entries in a directory shall be acted on
+after the directory itself. If any
+.BR \(midepth
+primary is specified, it shall apply to the entire expression even if
+the
+.BR \(midepth
+primary would not normally be evaluated.
+.P
+The primaries can be combined using the following operators (in order
+of decreasing precedence):
+.IP "(\ \fIexpression\fR\ )" 10
+True if
+.IR expression
+is true.
+.IP "\fB!\ \fIexpression\fR" 10
+Negation of a primary; the unary NOT operator.
+.IP "\fIexpression\ \fB[\(mia]\ \fIexpression\fR" 10
+.br
+Conjunction of primaries; the AND operator is implied by the
+juxtaposition of two primaries or made explicit by the optional
+.BR \(mia
+operator. The second expression shall not be evaluated if the first
+expression is false.
+.IP "\fIexpression\ \fB\(mio\ \fIexpression\fR" 10
+.br
+Alternation of primaries; the OR operator. The second expression shall
+not be evaluated if the first expression is true.
+.P
+If no
+.IR expression
+is present,
+.BR \(miprint
+shall be used as the expression. Otherwise, if the given expression
+does not contain any of the primaries
+.BR \(miexec ,
+.BR \(miok ,
+or
+.BR \(miprint ,
+the given expression shall be effectively replaced by:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+( \fIgiven_expression\fP ) \(miprint
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miuser ,
+.BR \(migroup ,
+and
+.BR \(minewer
+primaries each shall evaluate their respective arguments only once.
+.P
+When the file type evaluated for the current file is a symbolic link,
+the results of evaluating the
+.BR \(miperm
+primary are implementation-defined.
+.SH STDIN
+If the
+.BR \(miok
+primary is used, the response shall be read from the standard input.
+An entire line shall be read as the response. Otherwise, the standard
+input shall not be used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR find :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, equivalence classes,
+and multi-character collating elements used in the pattern matching
+notation for the
+.BR \(min
+option and in the extended regular expression defined for the
+.BR yesexpr
+locale keyword in the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+category.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+This variable determines the locale for the interpretation of sequences
+of bytes of text data as characters (for example, single-byte
+as opposed to multi-byte characters in arguments), the behavior of
+character classes within the pattern matching notation used for the
+.BR \(min
+option, and the behavior of character classes within regular
+expressions used in the extended regular expression defined for the
+.BR yesexpr
+locale keyword in the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+category.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale used to process affirmative responses, and the
+locale used to affect the format and contents of diagnostic messages
+and prompts written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fIPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of the
+.IR utility_name
+for the
+.BR \(miexec
+and
+.BR \(miok
+primaries, as described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables".
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The
+.BR \(miprint
+primary shall cause the current pathnames to be written to standard
+output. The format shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIpath\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The
+.BR \(miok
+primary shall write a prompt to standard error containing at least the
+.IR utility_name
+to be invoked and the current pathname. In the POSIX locale, the last
+non-\c
+<blank>
+in the prompt shall be
+.BR '?' .
+The exact format used is unspecified.
+.P
+Otherwise, the standard error shall be used only for diagnostic
+messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+All
+.IR path
+operands were traversed successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+When used in operands, pattern matching notation,
+<semicolon>,
+<left-parenthesis>,
+and
+<right-parenthesis>
+characters are special to the shell and must be quoted (see
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "Quoting").
+.P
+The bit that is traditionally used for sticky (historically 01000) is
+specified in the
+.BR \(miperm
+primary using the octal number argument form. Since this bit is not
+defined by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, applications must not assume that it actually refers
+to the traditional sticky bit.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+The following commands are equivalent:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+find .
+find . \(miprint
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+They both write out the entire directory hierarchy from the current
+directory.
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+The following command:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+find / \e( \(miname tmp \(mio \(miname '*.xx' \e) \(miatime +7 \(miexec rm {} \e;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+removes all files named
+.BR tmp
+or ending in
+.BR .xx
+that have not been accessed for seven or more 24-hour periods.
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+The following command:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+find . \(miperm \(mio+w,+s
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+prints (\c
+.BR \(miprint
+is assumed) the names of all files in or below the current directory,
+with all of the file permission bits S_ISUID, S_ISGID, and S_IWOTH set.
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+The following command:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+find . \(miname SCCS \(miprune \(mio \(miprint
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+recursively prints pathnames of all files in the current directory and
+below, but skips directories named SCCS and files in them.
+.RE
+.IP " 5." 4
+The following command:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+find . \(miprint \(miname SCCS \(miprune
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+behaves as in the previous example, but prints the names of the SCCS
+directories.
+.RE
+.IP " 6." 4
+The following command is roughly equivalent to the
+.BR \(mint
+extension to
+.IR test :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+if [ \(min "$(find file1 \(miprune \(minewer file2)" ]; then
+    printf %s\e\en "file1 is newer than file2"
+fi
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 7." 4
+The descriptions of
+.BR \(miatime ,
+.BR \(mictime ,
+and
+.BR \(mimtime
+use the terminology
+.IR n
+``86\|400 second periods (days)''. For example, a file accessed at 23:59
+is selected by:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+find . \(miatime \(mi1 \(miprint
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+at 00:01 the next day (less than 24 hours later, not more than one day
+ago); the midnight boundary between days has no effect on the 24-hour
+calculation.
+.RE
+.IP " 8." 4
+The following command:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+find . ! \(miname . \(miprune \(miname '*.old' \(miexec \e
+    sh \(mic 'mv "$@" ../old/' sh {} +
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+performs the same task as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+mv ./*.old ./.old ./.*.old ../old/
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+while avoiding an ``Argument list too long'' error if there are
+a large number of files ending with
+.BR .old
+and without running
+.IR mv
+if there are no such files (and avoiding ``No such file or directory''
+errors if
+.BR ./.old
+does not exist or no files match
+.BR ./*.old
+or
+.BR ./.*.old ).
+.P
+The alternative:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+find . ! \(miname . \(miprune \(miname '*.old' \(miexec mv {} ../old/ \e;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+is less efficient if there are many files to move because it executes one
+.IR mv
+command per file.
+.RE
+.IP " 9." 4
+On systems configured to mount removable media on directories under
+.BR /media ,
+the following command searches the file hierarchy for files larger
+than 100\|000 KB without searching any mounted removable media:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+find / \(mipath /media \(miprune \(mio \(misize +200000 \(miprint
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP 10. 4
+Except for the root directory, and
+.BR \(dq//\(dq 
+on implementations where
+.BR \(dq//\(dq 
+does not refer to the root directory, no pattern given to
+.BR \(miname
+will match a
+<slash>,
+because trailing
+<slash>
+characters are ignored when computing the basename of the file under
+evaluation. Given two empty directories named
+.BR foo
+and
+.BR bar ,
+the following command:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+find foo/// bar/// \(miname foo \(mio \(miname 'bar?*'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+prints only the line
+.BR \(dqfoo///\(dq .
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.BR \(mia
+operator was retained as an optional operator for compatibility with
+historical shell scripts, even though it is redundant with expression
+concatenation.
+.P
+The descriptions of the
+.BR '\(mi' 
+modifier on the
+.IR mode
+and
+.IR onum
+arguments to the
+.BR \(miperm
+primary agree with historical practice on BSD and System V
+implementations. System V and BSD documentation both describe it in
+terms of checking additional bits; in fact, it uses the same bits, but
+checks for having at least all of the matching bits set instead of
+having exactly the matching bits set.
+.P
+The exact format of the interactive prompts is unspecified. Only the
+general nature of the contents of prompts are specified because:
+.IP " *" 4
+Implementations may desire more descriptive prompts than those
+used on historical implementations.
+.IP " *" 4
+Since the historical prompt strings do not terminate with
+<newline>
+characters, there is no portable way for another program to interact
+with the prompts of this utility via pipes.
+.P
+Therefore, an application using this prompting option relies on the
+system to provide the most suitable dialog directly with the user,
+based on the general guidelines specified.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miname
+.IR file
+operand was changed to use the shell pattern matching notation
+so that
+.IR find
+is consistent with other utilities using pattern matching.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(misize
+operand refers to the size of a file, rather than the number of blocks
+it may occupy in the file system. The intent is that the
+.IR st_size
+field defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 should be used, not the
+.IR st_blocks
+found in historical implementations. There are at least two reasons for
+this:
+.IP " 1." 4
+In both System V and BSD,
+.IR find
+only uses
+.IR st_size
+in size calculations for the operands specified by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. (BSD uses
+.IR st_blocks
+only when processing the
+.BR \(mils
+primary.)
+.IP " 2." 4
+Users usually think of file size in terms of bytes, which is also the
+unit used by the
+.IR ls
+utility for the output from the
+.BR \(mil
+option. (In both System V and BSD,
+.IR ls
+uses
+.IR st_size
+for the
+.BR \(mil
+option size field and uses
+.IR st_blocks
+for the
+.IR ls
+.BR \(mis
+calculations. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not specify
+.IR ls
+.BR \(mis .)
+.P
+The descriptions of
+.BR \(miatime ,
+.BR \(mictime ,
+and
+.BR \(mimtime
+were changed from the SVID description of
+.IR n
+``days'' to
+.IR n
+being the result of the integer division of the time difference in
+seconds by 86\|400. The description is also different in terms of the
+exact timeframe for the
+.IR n
+case (\fIversus\fP the
+.IR +n
+or
+.IR \(min ),
+but it matches all known historical implementations. It refers to one
+86\|400 second period in the past, not any time from the beginning of
+that period to the current time. For example,
+.BR \(miatime
+2 is true if the file was accessed any time in the period from 72 hours
+to 48 hours ago.
+.P
+Historical implementations do not modify
+.BR \(dq{}\(dq 
+when it appears as a substring of an
+.BR \(miexec
+or
+.BR \(miok
+.IR utility_name
+or argument string. There have been numerous user requests for this
+extension, so this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 allows the desired behavior. At least one recent
+implementation does support this feature, but encountered several
+problems in managing memory allocation and dealing with multiple
+occurrences of
+.BR \(dq{}\(dq 
+in a string while it was being developed, so it is not yet required
+behavior.
+.P
+Assuming the presence of
+.BR \(miprint
+was added to correct a historical pitfall that plagues novice users, it
+is entirely upwards-compatible from the historical System V
+.IR find
+utility. In its simplest form (\c
+.IR find
+.IR directory ),
+it could be confused with the historical BSD fast
+.IR find .
+The BSD developers agreed that adding
+.BR \(miprint
+as a default expression was the correct decision and have added the
+fast
+.IR find
+functionality within a new utility called
+.IR locate .
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR \(miL
+option was implemented using the primary
+.BR \(mifollow .
+The
+.BR \(miH
+and
+.BR \(miL
+options were added for two reasons. First, they offer a finer
+granularity of control and consistency with other programs that walk
+file hierarchies. Second, the
+.BR \(mifollow
+primary always evaluated to true. As they were historically really
+global variables that took effect before the traversal began, some
+valid expressions had unexpected results. An example is the expression
+.BR \(miprint
+.BR \(mio
+.BR \(mifollow .
+Because
+.BR \(miprint
+always evaluates to true, the standard order of evaluation implies that
+.BR \(mifollow
+would never be evaluated. This was never the case. Historical practice
+for the
+.BR \(mifollow
+primary, however, is not consistent. Some implementations always follow
+symbolic links on the command line whether
+.BR \(mifollow
+is specified or not. Others follow symbolic links on the command line
+only if
+.BR \(mifollow
+is specified. Both behaviors are provided by the
+.BR \(miH
+and
+.BR \(miL
+options, but scripts using the current
+.BR \(mifollow
+primary would be broken if the
+.BR \(mifollow
+option is specified to work either way.
+.P
+Since the
+.BR \(miL
+option resolves all symbolic links and the
+.BR \(mitype
+.IR l
+primary is true for symbolic links that still exist after symbolic
+links have been resolved, the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+find \(miL . \(mitype l
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+prints a list of symbolic links reachable from the current directory
+that do not resolve to accessible files.
+.P
+A feature of SVR4's
+.IR find
+utility was the
+.BR \(miexec
+primary's
+.BR +
+terminator. This allowed filenames containing special characters
+(especially
+<newline>
+characters) to be grouped together without the problems that occur if
+such filenames are piped to
+.IR xargs .
+Other implementations have added other ways to get around this problem,
+notably a
+.BR \(miprint0
+primary that wrote filenames with a null byte terminator. This was
+considered here, but not adopted. Using a null terminator meant that
+any utility that was going to process
+.IR find 's
+.BR \(miprint0
+output had to add a new option to parse the null terminators it would
+now be reading.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(dq\(miexec ... {} +\(dq 
+syntax adopted was a result of IEEE PASC Interpretation 1003.2 #210. It
+should be noted that this is an incompatible change to IEEE\ Std 1003.2\(hy1992. For example,
+the following command printed all files with a
+.BR '\(mi' 
+after their name if they are regular files, and a
+.BR '\(pl' 
+otherwise:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+find / \(mitype f \(miexec echo {} \(mi ';' \(mio \(miexec echo {} + ';'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The change invalidates usage like this. Even though the previous
+standard stated that this usage would work, in practice many did not
+support it and the standard developers felt it better to now state that
+this was not allowable.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "Quoting",
+.IR "Section 2.13" ", " "Pattern Matching Notation",
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities",
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^",
+.IR "\fImv\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIpax\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsh\fR\^",
+.IR "\fItest\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIfstatat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetgrgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpwuid\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/fold.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/fold.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2c7469d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/fold.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,280 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FOLD "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fold
+\(em filter for folding lines
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+fold \fB[\fR\(mibs\fB] [\fR\(miw \fIwidth\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR fold
+utility is a filter that shall fold lines from its input files,
+breaking the lines to have a maximum of
+.IR width
+column positions (or bytes, if the
+.BR \(mib
+option is specified). Lines shall be broken by the insertion of a
+<newline>
+such that each output line (referred to later in this section
+as a \fIsegment\fP) is the maximum width possible that does not exceed
+the specified number of column positions (or bytes). A line shall not
+be broken in the middle of a character. The behavior is undefined if
+.IR width
+is less than the number of columns any single character in the input
+would occupy.
+.P
+If the
+<carriage-return>,
+<backspace>,
+or
+<tab>
+characters are encountered in the input, and the
+.BR \(mib
+option is not specified, they shall be treated specially:
+.IP <backspace> 10
+The current count of line width shall be decremented by one, although
+the count never shall become negative. The
+.IR fold
+utility shall not insert a
+<newline>
+immediately before or after any
+<backspace>,
+unless the following character has a width greater than 1 and would
+cause the line width to exceed
+.IR width .
+.IP <carriage-return> 10
+.br
+The current count of line width shall be set to zero. The
+.IR fold
+utility shall not insert a
+<newline>
+immediately before or after any
+<carriage-return>.
+.IP <tab> 10
+Each
+<tab>
+encountered shall advance the column position pointer to the next tab
+stop. Tab stops shall be at each column position
+.IR n
+such that
+.IR n
+modulo 8 equals 1.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR fold
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mib\fR" 10
+Count
+.IR width
+in bytes rather than column positions.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fR" 10
+If a segment of a line contains a
+<blank>
+within the first
+.IR width
+column positions (or bytes), break the line after the last such
+<blank>
+meeting the width constraints. If there is no
+<blank>
+meeting the requirements, the
+.BR \(mis
+option shall have no effect for that output segment of the input line.
+.IP "\fB\(miw\ \fIwidth\fR" 10
+Specify the maximum line length, in column positions (or bytes if
+.BR \(mib
+is specified). The results are unspecified if
+.IR width
+is not a positive decimal number. The default value shall be 80.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a text file to be folded. If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, the standard input shall be used.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used if no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, and shall be used if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' 
+and the implementation treats the
+.BR '\(mi' 
+as meaning standard input.
+Otherwise, the standard input shall not be used.
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+If the
+.BR \(mib
+option is specified, the input files shall be text files except that the
+lines are not limited to
+{LINE_MAX}
+bytes in length. If the
+.BR \(mib
+option is not specified, the input files shall be text files.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR fold :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files), and for the
+determination of the width in column positions each character would
+occupy on a constant-width font output device.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall be a file containing a sequence of characters
+whose order shall be preserved from the input files, possibly with
+inserted
+<newline>
+characters.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+All input files were processed successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR cut
+and
+.IR fold
+utilities can be used to create text files out of files with arbitrary
+line lengths. The
+.IR cut
+utility should be used when the number of lines (or records) needs to
+remain constant. The
+.IR fold
+utility should be used when the contents of long lines need to be kept
+contiguous.
+.P
+The
+.IR fold
+utility is frequently used to send text files to printers that
+truncate, rather than fold, lines wider than the printer is able to
+print (usually 80 or 132 column positions).
+.SH EXAMPLES
+An example invocation that submits a file of possibly long lines to the
+printer (under the assumption that the user knows the line width of the
+printer to be assigned by
+.IR lp ):
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fold \(miw 132 bigfile | lp
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+Although terminal input in canonical processing mode requires the erase
+character (frequently set to
+<backspace>)
+to erase the previous character (not byte or column position), terminal
+output is not buffered and is extremely difficult, if not impossible,
+to parse correctly; the interpretation depends entirely on the physical
+device that actually displays/prints/stores the output. In all known
+internationalized implementations, the utilities producing output for
+mixed column-width output assume that a
+<backspace>
+character backs up one column position and outputs enough
+<backspace>
+characters to return to the start of the character when
+<backspace>
+is used to provide local line motions to support underlining and
+emboldening operations. Since
+.IR fold
+without the
+.BR \(mib
+option is dealing with these same constraints,
+<backspace>
+is always treated as backing up one column position rather than backing
+up one character.
+.P
+Historical versions of the
+.IR fold
+utility assumed 1 byte was one character and occupied one column
+position when written out. This is no longer always true. Since the
+most common usage of
+.IR fold
+is believed to be folding long lines for output to limited-length
+output devices, this capability was preserved as the default case. The
+.BR \(mib
+option was added so that applications could
+.IR fold
+files with arbitrary length lines into text files that could then be
+processed by the standard utilities. Note that although the width for
+the
+.BR \(mib
+option is in bytes, a line is never split in the middle of a character.
+(It is unspecified what happens if a width is specified that is too
+small to hold a single character found in the input followed by a
+<newline>.)
+.P
+The tab stops are hardcoded to be every eighth column to meet
+historical practice. No new method of specifying other tab stops was
+invented.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcut\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/fort77.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/fort77.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f14ea4f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/fort77.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,581 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FORT77 "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fort77
+\(em FORTRAN compiler (\fBFORTRAN\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+fort77 \fB[\fR\(mic\fB] [\fR\(mig\fB] [\fR\(miL \fIdirectory\fB]\fR...\fB [\fR\(miO \fIoptlevel\fB] [\fR\(mio \fIoutfile\fB] [\fR\(mis\fB]
+    [\fR\(miw\fB] \fIoperand\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR fort77
+utility is the interface to the FORTRAN compilation system; it shall
+accept the full FORTRAN-77 language defined by the ANSI\ X3.9\(hy1978 standard. The system
+conceptually consists of a compiler and link editor. The files
+referenced by
+.IR operand s
+are compiled and linked to produce an executable file. It is
+unspecified whether the linking occurs entirely within the operation of
+.IR fort77 ;
+some implementations may produce objects that are not fully resolved
+until the file is executed.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mic
+option is present, for all pathname operands of the form
+.IR file \c
+.BR .f ,
+the files:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+$(basename \fIpathname\fR.f).o
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+shall be created or overwritten as the result of successful
+compilation. If the
+.BR \(mic
+option is not specified, it is unspecified whether such
+.BR .o
+files are created or deleted for the
+.IR file \c
+.BR .f
+operands.
+.P
+If there are no options that prevent link editing (such as
+.BR \(mic )
+and all operands compile and link without error, the resulting
+executable file shall be written into the file named by the
+.BR \(mio
+option (if present) or to the file
+.BR a.out .
+The executable file shall be created as specified in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, except
+that the file permissions shall be set to:
+S_IRWXO | S_IRWXG | S_IRWXU
+.P
+and that the bits specified by the
+.IR umask
+of the process shall be cleared.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR fort77
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except that:
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+.BR \(mil
+.IR library
+operands have the format of options, but their position within a list
+of operands affects the order in which libraries are searched.
+.IP " *" 4
+The order of specifying the multiple
+.BR \(miL
+options is significant.
+.IP " *" 4
+Conforming applications shall specify each option separately; that is,
+grouping option letters (for example,
+.BR \(micg )
+need not be recognized by all implementations.
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fR" 10
+Suppress the link-edit phase of the compilation, and do not remove any
+object files that are produced.
+.IP "\fB\(mig\fR" 10
+Produce symbolic information in the object or executable files; the
+nature of this information is unspecified, and may be modified by
+implementation-defined interactions with other options.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fR" 10
+Produce object or executable files, or both, from which symbolic and
+other information not required for proper execution using the
+.IR exec
+family of functions defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 has been removed (stripped).
+If both
+.BR \(mig
+and
+.BR \(mis
+options are present, the action taken is unspecified.
+.IP "\fB\(mio\ \fIoutfile\fR" 10
+Use the pathname
+.IR outfile ,
+instead of the default
+.BR a.out ,
+for the executable file produced. If the
+.BR \(mio
+option is present with
+.BR \(mic ,
+the result is unspecified.
+.IP "\fB\(miL\ \fIdirectory\fR" 10
+Change the algorithm of searching for the libraries named in
+.BR \(mil
+operands to look in the directory named by the
+.IR directory
+pathname before looking in the usual places. Directories named in
+.BR \(miL
+options shall be searched in the specified order. At least ten
+instances of this option shall be supported in a single
+.IR fort77
+command invocation. If a directory specified by a
+.BR \(miL
+option contains a file named
+.BR libf.a ,
+the results are unspecified.
+.IP "\fB\(miO\ \fIoptlevel\fR" 10
+Specify the level of code optimization. If the
+.IR optlevel
+option-argument is the digit
+.BR '0' ,
+all special code optimizations shall be disabled. If it is the digit
+.BR '1' ,
+the nature of the optimization is unspecified. If the
+.BR \(miO
+option is omitted, the nature of the system's default optimization is
+unspecified. It is unspecified whether code generated in the presence
+of the
+.BR \(miO
+0 option is the same as that generated when
+.BR \(miO
+is omitted. Other
+.IR optlevel
+values may be supported.
+.IP "\fB\(miw\fR" 10
+Suppress warnings.
+.P
+Multiple instances of
+.BR \(miL
+options can be specified.
+.SH OPERANDS
+An
+.IR operand
+is either in the form of a pathname or the form
+.BR \(mil
+.IR library .
+At least one operand of the pathname form shall be specified. The
+following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile.\fBf\fR" 10
+The pathname of a FORTRAN source file to be compiled and optionally
+passed to the link editor. The filename operand shall be of this form
+if the
+.BR \(mic
+option is used.
+.IP "\fIfile.\fBa\fR" 10
+A library of object files typically produced by
+.IR ar ,
+and passed directly to the link editor. Implementations may recognize
+implementation-defined suffixes other than
+.BR .a
+as denoting object file libraries.
+.IP "\fIfile.\fBo\fR" 10
+An object file produced by
+.IR fort77
+.BR \(mic
+and passed directly to the link editor. Implementations may recognize
+implementation-defined suffixes other than
+.BR .o
+as denoting object files.
+.P
+The processing of other files is implementation-defined.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\ \fIlibrary\fR" 10
+(The letter ell.) Search the library named:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+lib\fIlibrary\fR.a
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+A library is searched when its name is encountered, so the placement of
+a
+.BR \(mil
+operand is significant. Several standard libraries can be specified in
+this manner, as described in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+Implementations may recognize implementation-defined suffixes other
+than
+.BR .a
+as denoting libraries.
+.RE
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input file shall be one of the following: a text file containing
+FORTRAN source code; an object file in the format produced by
+.IR fort77
+.BR \(mic ;
+or a library of object files, in the format produced by archiving zero
+or more object files, using
+.IR ar .
+Implementations may supply additional utilities that produce files in
+these formats. Additional input files are implementation-defined.
+.P
+A
+<tab>
+encountered within the first six characters on a line of source code
+shall cause the compiler to interpret the following character as if it
+were the seventh character on the line (that is, in column 7).
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR fort77 :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fITMPDIR\fP" 10
+Determine the pathname that should override the default directory for
+temporary files, if any.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+If more than one
+.IR file
+operand ending in
+.BR .f
+(or possibly other unspecified suffixes) is given, for each such file:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s:\en", <\fIfile\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+may be written to allow identification of the diagnostic message with
+the appropriate input file.
+.P
+This utility may produce warning messages about certain conditions that
+do not warrant returning an error (non-zero) exit value.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+Object files, listing files, and executable files shall be produced in
+unspecified formats.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+.SS "Standard Libraries"
+.P
+The
+.IR fort77
+utility shall recognize the following
+.BR \(mil
+operand for the standard library:
+.IP "\fB\(mil\ f\fR" 10
+This library contains all functions referenced in the ANSI\ X3.9\(hy1978 standard. This
+operand shall not be required to be present to cause a search of this
+library.
+.P
+In the absence of options that inhibit invocation of the link editor,
+such as
+.BR \(mic ,
+the
+.IR fort77
+utility shall cause the equivalent of a
+.BR "\(mil\ f"
+operand to be passed to the link editor as the last
+.BR \(mil
+operand, causing it to be searched after all other object files and
+libraries are loaded.
+.P
+It is unspecified whether the library
+.BR libf.a
+exists as a regular file. The implementation may accept as
+.BR \(mil
+operands names of objects that do not exist as regular files.
+.SS "External Symbols"
+.P
+The FORTRAN compiler and link editor shall support the significance of
+external symbols up to a length of at least 31 bytes; case folding is
+permitted. The action taken upon encountering symbols exceeding the
+implementation-defined maximum symbol length is unspecified.
+.P
+The compiler and link editor shall support a minimum of 511 external
+symbols per source or object file, and a minimum of 4\|095 external
+symbols total. A diagnostic message is written to standard output if
+the implementation-defined limit is exceeded; other actions are
+unspecified.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful compilation or link edit.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+When
+.IR fort77
+encounters a compilation error, it shall write a diagnostic to standard
+error and continue to compile other source code operands. It shall
+return a non-zero exit status, but it is implementation-defined
+whether an object module is created. If the link edit is unsuccessful,
+a diagnostic message shall be written to standard error, and
+.IR fort77
+shall exit with a non-zero status.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following usage example compiles
+.BR xyz.f
+and creates the executable file
+.BR foo :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fort77 \(mio foo xyz.f
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following example compiles
+.BR xyz.f
+and creates the object file
+.BR xyz.o :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fort77 \(mic xyz.f
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following example compiles
+.BR xyz.f
+and creates the executable file
+.BR a.out :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fort77 xyz.f
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following example compiles
+.BR xyz.f ,
+links it with
+.BR b.o ,
+and creates the executable
+.BR a.out :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fort77 xyz.f b.o
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The name of this utility was chosen as
+.IR fort77
+to parallel the renaming of the C compiler. The name
+.IR f77
+was not chosen to avoid problems with historical implementations. The
+ANSI\ X3.9\(hy1978 standard was selected as a normative reference because the ISO/IEC version
+of FORTRAN-77 has been superseded by the ISO/IEC\ 1539:\|1991 standard.
+.P
+The file inclusion and symbol definition
+.BR #define
+mechanisms used by the
+.IR c99
+utility were not included in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008\(emeven though they are commonly
+implemented\(emsince there is no requirement that the FORTRAN compiler
+use the C preprocessor.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mionetrip
+option was not included in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, even though many historical compilers
+support it, because it is derived from FORTRAN-66; it is an anachronism
+that should not be perpetuated.
+.P
+Some implementations produce compilation listings. This aspect of
+FORTRAN has been left unspecified because there was controversy
+concerning the various methods proposed for implementing it: a
+.BR \(miV
+option overlapped with historical vendor practice and a naming
+convention of creating files with
+.BR .l
+suffixes collided with historical
+.IR lex
+file naming practice.
+.P
+There is no
+.BR \(miI
+option in this version of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 to specify a directory for file
+inclusion. An INCLUDE directive has been a part of the Fortran-90
+discussions, but an interface supporting that standard is not in the
+current scope.
+.P
+It is noted that many FORTRAN compilers produce an object module even
+when compilation errors occur; during a subsequent compilation, the
+compiler may patch the object module rather than recompiling all the
+code. Consequently, it is left to the implementor whether or not an
+object file is created.
+.P
+A reference to MIL-STD-1753
+was removed from an early proposal in response to a request from the
+POSIX FORTRAN-binding standard developers. It was not the intention of
+the standard developers to require certification of the FORTRAN
+compiler, and IEEE\ Std\ 1003.9\(hy1992 does not specify the military standard or any
+special preprocessing requirements. Furthermore, use of that document
+would have been inappropriate for an international standard.
+.P
+The specification of optimization has been subject to changes through
+early proposals. At one time,
+.BR \(miO
+and
+.BR \(miN
+were Booleans: optimize and do not optimize (with an unspecified
+default). Some historical practice led this to be changed to:
+.IP "\fB\(miO\fR\ 0" 10
+No optimization.
+.IP "\fB\(miO\fR\ 1" 10
+Some level of optimization.
+.IP "\fB\(miO\ \fIn\fR" 10
+Other, unspecified levels of optimization.
+.P
+It is not always clear whether ``good code generation'' is the same
+thing as optimization. Simple optimizations of local actions do not
+usually affect the semantics of a program. The
+.BR \(miO
+0 option has been included to accommodate the very particular nature of
+scientific calculations in a highly optimized environment; compilers
+make errors. Some degree of optimization is expected, even if it is not
+documented here, and the ability to shut it off completely could be
+important when porting an application. An implementation may treat
+.BR \(miO
+0 as ``do less than normal'' if it wishes, but this is only meaningful
+if any of the operations it performs can affect the semantics of a
+program. It is highly dependent on the implementation whether doing
+less than normal is logical. It is not the intent of the
+.BR \(miO
+0 option to ask for inefficient code generation, but rather to assure
+that any semantically visible optimization is suppressed.
+.P
+The specification of standard library access is consistent with the C
+compiler specification. Implementations are not required to have
+.BR /usr/lib/libf.a ,
+as many historical implementations do, but if not they are required to
+recognize
+.BR f
+as a token.
+.P
+External symbol size limits are in normative text; conforming
+applications need to know these limits. However, the minimum maximum
+symbol length should be taken as a constraint on a conforming
+application, not on an implementation, and consequently the action
+taken for a symbol exceeding the limit is unspecified. The minimum size
+for the external symbol table was added for similar reasons.
+.P
+The CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS section clearly specifies the behavior of
+the compiler when compilation or link-edit errors occur. The behavior
+of several historical implementations was examined, and the choice was
+made to be silent on the status of the executable, or
+.BR a.out ,
+file in the face of compiler or linker errors. If a linker writes the
+executable file, then links it on disk with
+\fIlseek\fR()s
+and
+\fIwrite\fR()s,
+the partially linked executable file can be left on disk and its
+execute bits turned off if the link edit fails. However, if the linker
+links the image in memory before writing the file to disk, it need not
+touch the executable file (if it already exists) because the link edit
+fails. Since both approaches are historical practice, a conforming
+application shall rely on the exit status of
+.IR fort77 ,
+rather than on the existence or mode of the executable file.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mig
+and
+.BR \(mis
+options are not specified as mutually-exclusive. Historically, these two
+options have been mutually-exclusive, but because both are so loosely
+specified, it seemed appropriate to leave their interaction
+unspecified.
+.P
+The requirement that conforming applications specify compiler options
+separately is to reserve the multi-character option name space for
+vendor-specific compiler options, which are known to exist in many
+historical implementations. Implementations are not required to
+recognize, for example,
+.BR \(migc
+as if it were
+.BR \(mig
+.BR \(mic ;
+nor are they forbidden from doing so. The SYNOPSIS shows all of the
+options separately to highlight this requirement on applications.
+.P
+Echoing filenames to standard error is considered a diagnostic message
+because it would otherwise be difficult to associate an error message
+with the erring file. They are described with ``may'' to allow
+implementations to use other methods of identifying files and to
+parallel the description in
+.IR c99 .
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+A compilation system based on the ISO/IEC\ 1539:\|1991 standard may be considered for a
+future version; it may have a different utility name from
+.IR fort77 .
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIar\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIasa\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIc99\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIumask\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/fuser.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/fuser.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1ded533
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/fuser.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,247 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FUSER "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fuser
+\(em list process IDs of all processes that have one or more files open
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+fuser \fB[\fR\(micfu\fB] \fIfile\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR fuser
+utility shall write to standard output the process IDs of processes
+running on the local system that have one or more named files open.
+For block special devices, all processes using any file on that device
+are listed.
+.P
+The
+.IR fuser
+utility shall write to standard error additional information about the
+named files indicating how the file is being used.
+.P
+Any output for processes running on remote systems that have a named
+file open is unspecified.
+.P
+A user may need appropriate privileges to invoke the
+.IR fuser
+utility.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR fuser
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fR" 10
+The file is treated as a mount point and the utility shall report
+on any files open in the file system.
+.IP "\fB\(mif\fR" 10
+The report shall be only for the named files.
+.IP "\fB\(miu\fR" 10
+The user name, in parentheses, associated with each process ID written
+to standard output shall be written to standard error.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fP" 10
+A pathname on which the file or file system is to be reported.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The user database.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR fuser :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The
+.IR fuser
+utility shall write the process ID for each process using each file
+given as an operand to standard output in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d", <\fIprocess_id\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The
+.IR fuser
+utility shall write diagnostic messages to standard error.
+.P
+The
+.IR fuser
+utility also shall write the following to standard error:
+.IP " *" 4
+The pathname of each named file is written followed immediately by a
+<colon>.
+.IP " *" 4
+For each process ID written to standard output, the character
+.BR 'c' 
+shall be written to standard error if the process is using the file as
+its current directory and the character
+.BR 'r' 
+shall be written to standard error if the process is using the file as
+its root directory. Implementations may write other alphabetic
+characters to indicate other uses of files.
+.IP " *" 4
+When the
+.BR \(miu
+option is specified, characters indicating the use of the file shall be
+followed immediately by the user name, in parentheses, corresponding to
+the real user ID of the process. If the user name cannot be resolved from
+the real user ID of the process, the real user ID of the process shall
+be written instead of the user name.
+.P
+When standard output and standard error are directed to the same file,
+the output shall be interleaved so that the filename appears at the
+start of each line, followed by the process ID and characters
+indicating the use of the file. Then, if the
+.BR \(miu
+option is specified, the user name or user ID for each process using
+that file shall be written.
+.P
+A
+<newline>
+shall be written to standard error after the last output
+described above for each
+.IR file
+operand.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fuser \(mifu .
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+writes to standard output the process IDs of processes that are using
+the current directory and writes to standard error an indication of how
+those processes are using the directory and the user names associated
+with the processes that are using the current directory.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fuser \(mic <\fImount point\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+writes to standard output the process IDs of processes that are using
+any file in the file system which is mounted on <\fImount point\fR>
+and writes to standard error an indication of how those processes are
+using the files.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fuser <\fImount point\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+writes to standard output the process IDs of processes that are using
+the file which is named by <\fImount point\fR> and writes to standard
+error an indication of how those processes are using the file.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fuser <\fIblock device\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+writes to standard output the process IDs of processes that are using
+any file which is on the device named by <\fIblock device\fR> and
+writes to standard error an indication of how those processes are using
+the file.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fuser \(mif <\fIblock device\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+writes to standard output the process IDs of processes that are using
+the file <\fIblock device\fR> itself and writes to standard error an
+indication of how those processes are using the file.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The definition of the
+.IR fuser
+utility follows existing practice.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/gencat.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/gencat.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8fa40d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/gencat.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,289 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GENCAT "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+gencat
+\(em generate a formatted message catalog
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+gencat \fIcatfile msgfile\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR gencat
+utility shall merge the message text source file
+.IR msgfile
+into a formatted message catalog
+.IR catfile .
+The file
+.IR catfile
+shall be created if it does not already exist. If
+.IR catfile
+does exist, its messages shall be included in the new
+.IR catfile .
+If set and message numbers collide, the new message text defined in
+.IR msgfile
+shall replace the old message text currently contained in
+.IR catfile .
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIcatfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of the formatted message catalog. If
+.BR '\(mi' 
+is specified, standard output shall be used. The format of the message
+catalog produced is unspecified.
+.IP "\fImsgfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a message text source file. If
+.BR '\(mi' 
+is specified for an instance of
+.IR msgfile ,
+standard input shall be used. The format of message text source files
+is defined in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall not be used unless a
+.IR msgfile
+operand is specified as
+.BR '\(mi' .
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files shall be text files.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR gencat :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall not be used unless the
+.IR catfile
+operand is specified as
+.BR '\(mi' .
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+The content of a message text file shall be in the format defined as
+follows. Note that the fields of a message text source line are
+separated by a single
+<blank>
+character. Any other
+<blank>
+characters are considered to be part of the subsequent field.
+.IP "\fB$set\ \fIn\ comment\fR" 10
+.br
+This line specifies the set identifier of the following messages until
+the next
+.BR $set
+or end-of-file appears. The
+.IR n
+denotes the set identifier, which is defined as a number in the range
+[1,
+{NL_SETMAX}]
+(see the
+.IR <limits.h> 
+header defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008). The application shall ensure that set
+identifiers are presented in ascending order within a single source
+file, but need not be contiguous. Any string following the set
+identifier shall be treated as a comment. If no
+.BR $set
+directive is specified in a message text source file, all messages
+shall be located in an implementation-defined default message set
+NL_SETD (see the
+.IR <nl_types.h> 
+header defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008).
+.IP "\fB$delset\ \fIn\ comment\fR" 10
+.br
+This line deletes message set
+.IR n
+from an existing message catalog. The
+.IR n
+denotes the set number [1,
+{NL_SETMAX}].
+Any string following the set number shall be treated as a comment.
+.IP "\fB$\ \fIcomment\fR" 10
+A line beginning with
+.BR '$' 
+followed by a
+<blank>
+shall be treated as a comment.
+.IP "\fIm\ message-text\fR" 10
+.br
+The
+.IR m
+denotes the message identifier, which is defined as a number in the
+range [1,
+{NL_MSGMAX}]
+(see the
+.IR <limits.h> 
+header). The
+.IR message-text
+shall be stored in the message catalog with the set identifier
+specified by the last
+.BR $set
+directive, and with message identifier
+.IR m .
+If the
+.IR message-text
+is empty, and a
+<blank>
+field separator is present, an empty string shall be stored
+in the message catalog. If a message source line has a message number,
+but neither a field separator nor
+.IR message-text ,
+the existing message with that number (if any) shall be deleted from
+the catalog. The application shall ensure that message identifiers are
+in ascending order within a single set, but need not be contiguous. The
+application shall ensure that the length of
+.IR message-text
+is in the range [0,
+{NL_TEXTMAX}]
+(see the
+.IR <limits.h> 
+header).
+.IP "\fB$quote\ \fIn\fR" 10
+This line specifies an optional quote character
+.IR c ,
+which can be used to surround
+.IR message-text
+so that trailing
+<space>
+characters or null (empty) messages are visible in a message source
+line. By default, or if an empty
+.BR $quote
+directive is supplied, no quoting of
+.IR message-text
+shall be recognized.
+.P
+Empty lines in a message text source file shall be ignored. The
+effects of lines starting with any character other than those defined
+above are implementation-defined.
+.P
+Text strings can contain the special characters and escape sequences
+defined in the following table:
+.TS
+center tab(@) box;
+cB | cB | cB
+l | l | lf5.
+Description@Symbol@Sequence
+_
+<newline>@NL(LF)@\en
+Horizontal-tab@HT@\et
+<vertical-tab>@VT@\ev
+<backspace>@BS@\eb
+<carriage-return>@CR@\er
+<form-feed>@FF@\ef
+Backslash@\fR\e\fP@\e\e
+Bit pattern@\fRddd\fP@\eddd
+.TE
+.P
+The escape sequence
+.BR \(dq\eddd\(dq 
+consists of
+<backslash>
+followed by one, two, or three octal digits, which shall be taken to
+specify the value of the desired character. If the character following a
+<backslash>
+is not one of those specified, the
+<backslash>
+shall be ignored.
+.P
+A
+<backslash>
+followed by a
+<newline>
+is also used to continue a string on the following line. Thus, the
+following two lines describe a single message string:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+1 This line continues \e
+to the next line
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+which shall be equivalent to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+1 This line continues to the next line
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Message catalogs produced by
+.IR gencat
+are binary encoded, meaning that their portability cannot be guaranteed
+between different types of machine. Thus, just as C programs need to
+be recompiled for each type of machine, so message catalogs must be
+recreated via
+.IR gencat .
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIiconv\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "\fB<limits.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<nl_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/get.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/get.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c1f1e81
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/get.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,848 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GET "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+get
+\(em get a version of an SCCS file (\fBDEVELOPMENT\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+get \fB[\fR\(mibegkmnlLpst\fB] [\fR\(mic \fIcutoff\fB] [\fR\(mii \fIlist\fB] [\fR\(mir \fISID\fB] [\fR\(mix \fIlist\fB] \fIfile\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR get
+utility shall generate a text file from each named SCCS
+.IR file
+according to the specifications given by its options.
+.P
+The generated text shall normally be written into a file called the
+.BR g-file
+whose name is derived from the SCCS filename by simply removing the
+leading
+.BR \(dqs.\(dq .
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR get
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mir\ \fISID\fR" 10
+Indicate the SCCS Identification String (SID) of the version (delta)
+of an SCCS file to be retrieved. The table shows, for the most useful
+cases, what version of an SCCS file is retrieved (as well as the SID of
+the version to be eventually created by
+.IR delta
+if the
+.BR \(mie
+option is also used), as a function of the SID specified.
+.IP "\fB\(mic\ \fIcutoff\fR" 10
+Indicate the
+.IR cutoff
+date-time, in the form:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIYY\fB[\fIMM\fB[\fIDD\fB[\fIHH\fB[\fIMM\fB[\fISS\fB]]]]]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+For the
+.IR YY
+component, values in the range [69,99] shall refer to years 1969 to
+1999 inclusive, and values in the range [00,68] shall refer to years
+2000 to 2068 inclusive.
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+It is expected that in a future version of this standard the default
+century inferred from a 2-digit year will change. (This would apply
+to all commands accepting a 2-digit year as input.)
+.P
+.P
+No changes (deltas) to the SCCS file that were created after the
+specified
+.IR cutoff
+date-time shall be included in the generated text file. Units omitted
+from the date-time default to their maximum possible values; for
+example,
+.BR \(mic
+7502 is equivalent to
+.BR \(mic
+750228235959.
+.P
+Any number of non-numeric characters may separate the various 2-digit
+pieces of the
+.IR cutoff
+date-time. This feature allows the user to specify a
+.IR cutoff
+date in the form:
+.BR \(mic
+"77/2/2\09:22:25".
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mie\fR" 10
+Indicate that the
+.IR get
+is for the purpose of editing or making a change (delta) to the SCCS
+file via a subsequent use of
+.IR delta .
+The
+.BR \(mie
+option used in a
+.IR get
+for a particular version (SID) of the SCCS file shall prevent further
+.IR get
+commands from editing on the same SID until
+.IR delta
+is executed or the
+.BR j
+(joint edit) flag is set in the SCCS file. Concurrent use of
+.IR get
+.BR \(mie
+for different SIDs is always allowed.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If the
+.BR g-file
+generated by
+.IR get
+with a
+.BR \(mie
+option is accidentally ruined in the process of editing, it may be
+regenerated by re-executing the
+.IR get
+command with the
+.BR \(mik
+option in place of the
+.BR \(mie
+option.
+.P
+SCCS file protection specified via the ceiling, floor, and authorized
+user list stored in the SCCS file shall be enforced when the
+.BR \(mie
+option is used.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mib\fR" 10
+Use with the
+.BR \(mie
+option to indicate that the new delta should have an SID in a new
+branch as shown in the table below. This option shall be ignored if the
+.BR b
+flag is not present in the file or if the retrieved delta is not a leaf
+delta. (A leaf delta is one that has no successors on the SCCS file tree.)
+.RS 10 
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+A branch delta may always be created from a non-leaf delta.
+.P
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mii\ \fIlist\fR" 10
+Indicate a
+.IR list
+of deltas to be included (forced to be applied) in the creation of the
+generated file. The
+.IR list
+has the following syntax:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<list> ::= <range> | <list> , <range>
+<range> ::= SID | SID \(mi SID
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+SID, the SCCS Identification of a delta, may be in any form shown in
+the ``SID Specified'' column of the table in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION
+section, except that the result of supplying a partial SID is
+unspecified. A diagnostic message shall be written if the first SID in
+the range is not an ancestor of the second SID in the range.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mix\ \fIlist\fR" 10
+Indicate a
+.IR list
+of deltas to be excluded (forced not to be applied) in the creation of
+the generated file. See the
+.BR \(mii
+option for the
+.IR list
+format.
+.IP "\fB\(mik\fR" 10
+Suppress replacement of identification keywords (see below) in the
+retrieved text by their value. The
+.BR \(mik
+option shall be implied by the
+.BR \(mie
+option.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\fR" 10
+Write a delta summary into an
+.BR l-file .
+.IP "\fB\(miL\fR" 10
+Write a delta summary to standard output. All informative output that
+normally is written to standard output shall be written to standard
+error instead, unless the
+.BR \(mis
+option is used, in which case it shall be suppressed.
+.IP "\fB\(mip\fR" 10
+Write the text retrieved from the SCCS file to the standard output. No
+.BR g-file
+shall be created. All informative output that normally goes to the
+standard output shall go to standard error instead, unless the
+.BR \(mis
+option is used, in which case it shall disappear.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fR" 10
+Suppress all informative output normally written to standard output.
+However, fatal error messages (which shall always be written to the
+standard error) shall remain unaffected.
+.IP "\fB\(mim\fR" 10
+Precede each text line retrieved from the SCCS file by the SID of the
+delta that inserted the text line in the SCCS file. The format shall be:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\et%s", <\fISID\fR>, <\fItext line\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(min\fR" 10
+Precede each generated text line with the %\fBM\fP% identification
+keyword value (see below). The format shall be:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\et%s", <\fI%M% value\fR>, <\fItext line\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+When both the
+.BR \(mim
+and
+.BR \(min
+options are used, the <\fItext\ line\fP> shall be replaced by the
+.BR \(mim
+option-generated format.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mig\fR" 10
+Suppress the actual retrieval of text from the SCCS file. It is
+primarily used to generate an
+.BR l-file ,
+or to verify the existence of a particular SID.
+.IP "\fB\(mit\fR" 10
+Use to access the most recently created (top) delta in a given release
+(for example,
+.BR "\(mir 1" ),
+or release and level (for example,
+.BR "\(mir 1.2" ).
+.br
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of an existing SCCS file or a directory. If
+.IR file
+is a directory, the
+.IR get
+utility shall behave as though each file in the directory were
+specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files (last component
+of the pathname does not begin with
+.BR s. )
+and unreadable files shall be silently ignored.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If exactly one
+.IR file
+operand appears, and it is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be read; each line of the standard input is
+taken to be the name of an SCCS file to be processed. Non-SCCS files
+and unreadable files shall be silently ignored.
+.RE
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be a text file used only if the
+.IR file
+operand is specified as
+.BR '\(mi' .
+Each line of the text file shall be interpreted as an SCCS pathname.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The SCCS files shall be files of an unspecified format.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR get :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error, and
+informative messages written to standard output (or standard error, if
+the
+.BR \(mip
+option is used).
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fITZ\fR" 10
+Determine the timezone in which the times and dates written in the
+SCCS file are evaluated. If the
+.IR TZ
+variable is unset or NULL, an unspecified system default timezone is
+used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+For each file processed,
+.IR get
+shall write to standard output the SID being accessed and the number of
+lines retrieved from the SCCS file, in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en%d lines\en", <\fISID\fR>, <\fInumber of lines\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mie
+option is used, the SID of the delta to be made shall appear after the
+SID accessed and before the number of lines generated, in the POSIX
+locale:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\ennew delta %s\en%d lines\en", <\fISID accessed\fR>,
+    <\fISID to be made\fR>, <\fInumber of lines\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If there is more than one named file or if a directory or standard
+input is named, each pathname shall be written before each of the lines
+shown in one of the preceding formats:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"\en%s:\en", <\fIpathname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(miL
+option is used, a delta summary shall be written following the format
+specified below for
+.BR l-files .
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mii
+option is used, included deltas shall be listed following the notation,
+in the POSIX locale:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"Included:\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mix
+option is used, excluded deltas shall be listed following the notation,
+in the POSIX locale:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"Excluded:\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mip
+or
+.BR \(miL
+options are specified, the standard output shall consist of the text
+retrieved from the SCCS file.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages, except
+if the
+.BR \(mip
+or
+.BR \(miL
+options are specified, it shall include all informative messages
+normally sent to standard output.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+Several auxiliary files may be created by
+.IR get .
+These files are known generically as the
+.BR g-file ,
+.BR l-file ,
+.BR p-file ,
+and
+.BR z-file .
+The letter before the
+<hyphen>
+is called the
+.IR tag .
+An auxiliary filename shall be formed from the SCCS filename: the
+application shall ensure that the last component of all SCCS filenames
+is of the form
+.BR s. \c
+.IR module-name ;
+the auxiliary files shall be named by replacing the leading
+.BR s
+with the tag. The
+.BR g-file
+shall be an exception to this scheme: the
+.BR g-file
+is named by removing the
+.BR s.
+prefix. For example, for
+.BR s.xyz.c ,
+the auxiliary filenames would be
+.BR xyz.c ,
+.BR l.xyz.c ,
+.BR p.xyz.c ,
+and
+.BR z.xyz.c ,
+respectively.
+.P
+The
+.BR g-file ,
+which contains the generated text, shall be created in the current
+directory (unless the
+.BR \(mip
+option is used). A
+.BR g-file
+shall be created in all cases, whether or not any lines of text were
+generated by the
+.IR get .
+It shall be owned by the real user. If the
+.BR \(mik
+option is used or implied, the
+.BR g-file
+shall be writable by the owner only (read-only for everyone else);
+otherwise, it shall be read-only. Only the real user need have write
+permission in the current directory.
+.P
+The
+.BR l-file
+shall contain a table showing which deltas were applied in generating
+the retrieved text. The
+.BR l-file
+shall be created in the current directory if the
+.BR \(mil
+option is used; it shall be read-only and it is owned by the real user.
+Only the real user need have write permission in the current
+directory.
+.P
+Lines in the
+.BR l-file
+shall have the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%c%c%c %s\et%s %s\en", <\fIcode1\fR>, <\fIcode2\fR>, <\fIcode3\fR>,
+    <\fISID\fR>, <\fIdate-time\fR>, <\fIlogin\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where the entries are:
+.IP "<\fIcode1\fP>" 10
+A
+<space>
+if the delta was applied;
+.BR '*' 
+otherwise.
+.IP "<\fIcode2\fP>" 10
+A
+<space>
+if the delta was applied or was not applied and ignored;
+.BR '*' 
+if the delta was not applied and was not ignored.
+.IP "<\fIcode3\fP>" 10
+A character indicating a special reason why the delta was or was not
+applied:
+.RS 10 
+.IP "\fBI\fP" 6
+Included.
+.IP "\fBX\fP" 6
+Excluded.
+.IP "\fBC\fP" 6
+Cut off (by a
+.BR \(mic
+option).
+.RE
+.IP "<\fIdate-time\fP>" 10
+Date and time (using the format of the
+.IR date
+utility's
+.BR %y /\c
+.BR %m /\c
+.BR %d
+.BR %T
+conversion specification format) of creation.
+.IP "<\fIlogin\fP>" 10
+Login name of person who created
+.IR delta .
+.P
+The comments and MR data shall follow on subsequent lines, indented one
+<tab>.
+A blank line shall terminate each entry.
+.P
+The
+.BR p-file
+shall be used to pass information resulting from a
+.IR get
+with a
+.BR \(mie
+option along to
+.IR delta .
+Its contents shall also be used to prevent a subsequent execution of
+.IR get
+with a
+.BR \(mie
+option for the same SID until
+.IR delta
+is executed or the joint edit flag,
+.BR j ,
+is set in the SCCS file. The
+.BR p-file
+shall be created in the directory containing the SCCS file and the
+application shall ensure that the effective user has write permission
+in that directory. It shall be writable by owner only, and owned
+by the effective user. Each line in the
+.BR p-file
+shall have the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s %s %s %s%s%s\en", <\fIg-file SID\fR>,
+    <\fISID of new delta\fR>, <\fIlogin-name of real user\fR>,
+    <\fIdate-time\fR>, <\fIi-value\fR>, <\fIx-value\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fIi\(hyvalue\fP> uses the format
+.BR \(dq\^\(dq 
+if no
+.BR \(mii
+option was specified, and shall use the format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+" \(mii%s", <\(mii option \fIoption-argument\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+if a
+.BR \(mii
+option was specified and <\fIx\(hyvalue\fP> uses the format
+.BR \(dq\^\(dq 
+if no
+.BR \(mix
+option was specified, and shall use the format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+" \(mix%s", <\(mix option \fIoption-argument\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+if a
+.BR \(mix
+option was specified. There can be an arbitrary number of lines in the
+.BR p-file
+at any time; no two lines shall have the same new delta SID.
+.P
+The
+.BR z-file
+shall serve as a lock-out mechanism against simultaneous updates. Its
+contents shall be the binary process ID of the command (that is,
+.IR get )
+that created it. The
+.BR z-file
+shall be created in the directory containing the SCCS file for the
+duration of
+.IR get .
+The same protection restrictions as those for the
+.BR p-file
+shall apply for the
+.BR z-file .
+The
+.BR z-file
+shall be created read-only.
+.br
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+.TS
+center tab(@) box;
+cB s s s s
+cB cB cB cB cB
+cB cB cB cB cB
+l c lw(4.5c) l l.
+Determination of SCCS Identification String
+=
+SID*@\(mib Keyletter@Other@SID@SID of Delta
+Specified@Used\(dg@Conditions@Retrieved@to be Created
+.sp 1.5p
+=
+none\(dd@no@R defaults to mR@mR.mL@mR.(mL+1)
+_
+none\(dd@yes@R defaults to mR@mR.mL@mR.mL.(mB+1).1
+.sp 1.5p
+=
+R@no@R > mR@mR.mL@R.1***
+_
+R@no@R = mR@mR.mL@mR.(mL+1)
+_
+R@yes@R > mR@mR.mL@mR.mL.(mB+1).1
+_
+R@yes@R = mR@mR.mL@mR.mL.(mB+1).1
+_
+R@\(mi@T{
+R < mR and
+R does not exist
+T}@hR.mL**@hR.mL.(mB+1).1
+_
+R@\(mi@T{
+Trunk successor in release > R
+and R exists
+T}@R.mL@R.mL.(mB+1).1
+.sp 1.5p
+=
+R.L@no@No trunk successor@R.L@R.(L+1)
+_
+R.L@yes@No trunk successor@R.L@R.L.(mB+1).1
+_
+R.L@\(mi@T{
+Trunk successor
+in release \(>= R
+T}@R.L@R.L.(mB+1).1
+.sp 1.5p
+=
+R.L.B@no@No branch successor@R.L.B.mS@R.L.B.(mS+1)
+_
+R.L.B@yes@No branch successor@R.L.B.mS@R.L.(mB+1).1
+.sp 1.5p
+=
+R.L.B.S@no@No branch successor@R.L.B.S@R.L.B.(S+1)
+_
+R.L.B.S@yes@No branch successor@R.L.B.S@R.L.(mB+1).1
+_
+R.L.B.S@\(mi@Branch successor@R.L.B.S@R.L.(mB+1).1
+.TE
+.IP * 8
+R, L, B, and S are the release, level, branch, and sequence components
+of the SID, respectively; m means maximum. Thus, for example, R.mL
+means ``the maximum level number within release R''; R.L.(mB+1).1 means
+``the first sequence number on the new branch (that is, maximum branch
+number plus one) of level L within release R''. Note that if the SID
+specified is of the form R.L, R.L.B, or R.L.B.S, each of the specified
+components shall exist.
+.IP ** 8
+hR is the highest existing release that is lower than the specified,
+nonexistent, release R.
+.IP *** 8
+This is used to force creation of the first delta in a new release.
+.IP "\(dg" 8
+The
+.BR \(mib
+option is effective only if the
+.BR b
+flag is present in the file. An entry of
+.BR '\(mi' 
+means ``irrelevant''.
+.IP "\(dd" 8
+This case applies if the
+.BR d
+(default SID) flag is not present in the file. If the
+.BR d
+flag is present in the file, then the SID obtained from the
+.BR d
+flag is interpreted as if it had been specified on the command line.
+Thus, one of the other cases in this table applies.
+.SS "System Date and Time"
+.P
+When a
+.BR g-file
+is generated, the creation time of deltas in the SCCS file may be taken
+into account. If any of these times are apparently in the future, the
+behavior is unspecified.
+.SS "Identification Keywords"
+.P
+Identifying information shall be inserted into the text retrieved from
+the SCCS file by replacing identification keywords with their value
+wherever they occur. The following keywords may be used in the text
+stored in an SCCS file:
+.IP "%\fBM\fP%" 10
+Module name: either the value of the
+.BR m
+flag in the file, or if absent, the name of the SCCS file with the
+leading
+.BR s.
+removed.
+.IP "%\fBI\fP%" 10
+SCCS identification (SID) (%\fBR\fR%.%\fBL\fR% or
+%\fBR\fR%.%\fBL\fR%.%\fBB\fR%.%\fBS\fR%) of the retrieved text.
+.IP "%\fBR\fP%" 10
+Release.
+.IP "%\fBL\fP%" 10
+Level.
+.IP "%\fBB\fP%" 10
+Branch.
+.IP "%\fBS\fP%" 10
+Sequence.
+.IP "%\fBD\fP%" 10
+Current date (\fIYY\fR/\fIMM\fR/\fIDD\fR).
+.IP "%\fBH\fP%" 10
+Current date (\fIMM\fR/\fIDD\fR/\fIYY\fR).
+.IP "%\fBT\fP%" 10
+Current time (\fIHH\fR:\fIMM\fR:\fISS\fR).
+.IP "%\fBE\fP%" 10
+Date newest applied delta was created (\fIYY\fR/\fIMM\fR/\fIDD\fR).
+.IP "%\fBG\fP%" 10
+Date newest applied delta was created (\fIMM\fR/\fIDD\fR/\fIYY\fR).
+.IP "%\fBU\fP%" 10
+Time newest applied delta was created (\fIHH\fR:\fIMM\fR:\fISS\fR).
+.IP "%\fBY\fP%" 10
+Module type: value of the
+.BR t
+flag in the SCCS file.
+.IP "%\fBF\fP%" 10
+SCCS filename.
+.IP "%\fBP\fP%" 10
+SCCS absolute pathname.
+.IP "%\fBQ\fP%" 10
+The value of the
+.BR q
+flag in the file.
+.IP "%\fBC\fP%" 10
+Current line number. This keyword is intended for identifying messages
+output by the program, such as ``this should not have happened'' type
+errors. It is not intended to be used on every line to provide
+sequence numbers.
+.IP "%\fBZ\fP%" 10
+The four-character string
+.BR \(dq@(#)\(dq 
+recognizable by
+.IR what .
+.IP "%\fBW\fP%" 10
+A shorthand notation for constructing
+.IR what
+strings:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+%\^W\^%=%\^Z\^%%\^M\^%<tab>%\^I\^%
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP "%\fBA\fP%" 10
+Another shorthand notation for constructing
+.IR what
+strings:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+%\^A\^%=%\^Z\^%%\^Y\^%%\^M\^%%\^I\^%%\^Z\^%
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Problems can arise if the system date and time have been modified (for
+example, put forward and then back again, or unsynchronized clocks
+across a network) and can also arise when different values of the
+.IR TZ
+environment variable are used.
+.P
+Problems of a similar nature can also arise for the operation of the
+.IR delta
+utility, which compares the previous file body against the working file
+as part of its normal operation.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIadmin\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIdelta\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIprs\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIwhat\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/getconf.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/getconf.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..484bdf3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/getconf.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,443 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETCONF "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getconf
+\(em get configuration values
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+getconf \fB[\fR\(miv specification\fB] \fIsystem_var\fR
+.P
+getconf \fB[\fR\(miv specification\fB] \fIpath_var pathname\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+In the first synopsis form, the
+.IR getconf
+utility shall write to the standard output the value of the variable
+specified by the
+.IR system_var
+operand.
+.P
+In the second synopsis form, the
+.IR getconf
+utility shall write to the standard output the value of the variable
+specified by the
+.IR path_var
+operand for the path specified by the
+.IR pathname
+operand.
+.P
+The value of each configuration variable shall be determined as if it
+were obtained by calling the function from which it is defined to be
+available by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 or by the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 (see the OPERANDS section). The
+value shall reflect conditions in the current operating environment.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR getconf
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(miv\ \fIspecification\fR" 10
+.br
+Indicate a specific specification and version for which configuration
+variables shall be determined. If this option is not specified, the
+values returned correspond to an implementation default conforming
+compilation environment.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+getconf _POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFF32
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+does not write
+.BR \(dq\(mi1\en\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dqundefined\en\(dq 
+to standard output, then commands of the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+getconf \(miv POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFF32 ...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+determine values for configuration variables corresponding to the
+POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFF32 compilation environment specified in
+.IR "\fIc99\fR\^",
+the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION.
+.P
+If the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+getconf _POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+does not write
+.BR \(dq\(mi1\en\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dqundefined\en\(dq 
+to standard output, then commands of the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+getconf \(miv POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG ...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+determine values for configuration variables corresponding to the
+POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG compilation environment specified in
+.IR "\fIc99\fR\^",
+the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION.
+.P
+If the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+getconf _POSIX_V7_LP64_OFF64
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+does not write
+.BR \(dq\(mi1\en\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dqundefined\en\(dq 
+to standard output, then commands of the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+getconf \(miv POSIX_V7_LP64_OFF64 ...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+determine values for configuration variables corresponding to the
+POSIX_V7_LP64_OFF64 compilation environment specified in
+.IR "\fIc99\fR\^",
+the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION.
+.P
+If the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+getconf _POSIX_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+does not write
+.BR \(dq\(mi1\en\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dqundefined\en\(dq 
+to standard output, then commands of the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+getconf \(miv POSIX_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG ...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+determine values for configuration variables corresponding to the
+POSIX_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG compilation environment specified in
+.IR "\fIc99\fR\^",
+the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION.
+.RE
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIpath_var\fR" 10
+A name of a configuration variable. All of the variables in the
+Variable column of the table in the DESCRIPTION of the
+\fIfpathconf\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, without the enclosing braces, shall be
+supported. The implementation may add other local variables.
+.IP "\fIpathname\fR" 10
+A pathname for which the variable specified by
+.IR path_var
+is to be determined.
+.IP "\fIsystem_var\fR" 10
+A name of a configuration variable. All of the following variables
+shall be supported:
+.RS 10 
+.IP " *" 4
+The names in the Variable column of the table in the DESCRIPTION of the
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+function in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, except for the entries corresponding to
+_SC_CLK_TCK, _SC_GETGR_R_SIZE_MAX, and _SC_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX, without
+the enclosing braces.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+For compatibility with earlier versions, the following variable names
+shall also be supported:
+POSIX2_C_BIND
+POSIX2_C_DEV
+POSIX2_CHAR_TERM
+POSIX2_FORT_DEV
+POSIX2_FORT_RUN
+POSIX2_LOCALEDEF
+POSIX2_SW_DEV
+POSIX2_UPE
+POSIX2_VERSION
+.P
+and shall be equivalent to the same name prefixed with an
+<underscore>.
+This requirement may be removed in a future version.
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+The names of the symbolic constants used as the
+.IR name
+argument of the
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+function in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, without the _CS_ prefix.
+.IP " *" 4
+The names of the symbolic constants listed under the headings ``Maximum
+Values'' and ``Minimum Values'' in the description of the
+.IR <limits.h> 
+header in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, without the enclosing braces.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+For compatibility with earlier versions, the following variable names
+shall also be supported:
+POSIX2_BC_BASE_MAX
+POSIX2_BC_DIM_MAX
+POSIX2_BC_SCALE_MAX
+POSIX2_BC_STRING_MAX
+POSIX2_COLL_WEIGHTS_MAX
+POSIX2_EXPR_NEST_MAX
+POSIX2_LINE_MAX
+POSIX2_RE_DUP_MAX
+.P
+and shall be equivalent to the same name prefixed with an
+<underscore>.
+This requirement may be removed in a future version.
+.RE
+.P
+The implementation may add other local values.
+.RE
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR getconf :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+If the specified variable is defined on the system and its value is
+described to be available from the
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, its value shall be written in the
+following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIvalue\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Otherwise, if the specified variable is defined on the system, its
+value shall be written in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d\en", <\fIvalue\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the specified variable is valid, but is undefined on the system,
+.IR getconf
+shall write using the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"undefined\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the variable name is invalid or an error occurs, nothing shall be
+written to standard output.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+The specified variable is valid and information about its current state
+was written successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following example illustrates the value of
+{NGROUPS_MAX}:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+getconf NGROUPS_MAX
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following example illustrates the value of
+{NAME_MAX}
+for a specific directory:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+getconf NAME_MAX /usr
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following example shows how to deal more carefully with results
+that might be unspecified:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+if value=$(getconf PATH_MAX /usr); then
+    if [ "$value" = "undefined" ]; then
+        echo PATH_MAX in /usr is indeterminate.
+    else
+        echo PATH_MAX in /usr is $value.
+    fi
+else
+    echo Error in getconf.
+fi
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The original need for this utility, and for the
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+function, was to provide a way of finding the configuration-defined
+default value for the
+.IR PATH
+environment variable. Since
+.IR PATH
+can be modified by the user to include directories that could contain
+utilities replacing the standard utilities, shell scripts need
+a way to determine the system-supplied
+.IR PATH
+environment variable value that contains the correct search path for
+the standard utilities. It was later suggested that access to the other
+variables described in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 could also be useful to applications.
+.P
+This functionality of
+.IR getconf
+would not be adequately subsumed by another command such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+grep \fIvar\fP /etc/conf
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+because such a strategy would provide correct values for neither those
+variables that can vary at runtime, nor those that can vary depending
+on the path.
+.P
+Early proposal versions of
+.IR getconf
+specified exit status 1 when the specified variable was valid, but not
+defined on the system. The output string
+.BR \(dqundefined\(dq 
+is now used to specify this case with exit code 0 because so many
+things depend on an exit code of zero when an invoked utility is
+successful.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIc99\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+.IR "\fB<limits.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIconfstr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfpathconf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsystem\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/getopts.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/getopts.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..baf210d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/getopts.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,445 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETOPTS "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getopts
+\(em parse utility options
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+getopts \fIoptstring name \fB[\fIarg\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR getopts
+utility shall retrieve options and option-arguments from a list of
+parameters. It shall support the Utility Syntax Guidelines 3 to 10,
+inclusive, described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+Each time it is invoked, the
+.IR getopts
+utility shall place the value of the next option in the shell variable
+specified by the
+.IR name
+operand and the index of the next argument to be processed in the shell
+variable
+.IR OPTIND .
+Whenever the shell is invoked,
+.IR OPTIND
+shall be initialized to 1.
+.P
+When the option requires an option-argument, the
+.IR getopts
+utility shall place it in the shell variable
+.IR OPTARG .
+If no option was found, or if the option that was found does not have
+an option-argument,
+.IR OPTARG
+shall be unset.
+.P
+If an option character not contained in the
+.IR optstring
+operand is found where an option character is expected, the shell
+variable specified by
+.IR name
+shall be set to the
+<question-mark>
+(\c
+.BR '?' )
+character. In this case, if the first character in
+.IR optstring
+is a
+<colon>
+(\c
+.BR ':' ),
+the shell variable
+.IR OPTARG
+shall be set to the option character found, but no output shall be
+written to standard error; otherwise, the shell variable
+.IR OPTARG
+shall be unset and a diagnostic message shall be written to standard
+error. This condition shall be considered to be an error detected in
+the way arguments were presented to the invoking application, but shall
+not be an error in
+.IR getopts
+processing.
+.P
+If an option-argument is missing:
+.IP " *" 4
+If the first character of
+.IR optstring
+is a
+<colon>,
+the shell variable specified by
+.IR name
+shall be set to the
+<colon>
+character and the shell variable
+.IR OPTARG
+shall be set to the option character found.
+.IP " *" 4
+Otherwise, the shell variable specified by
+.IR name
+shall be set to the
+<question-mark>
+character, the shell variable
+.IR OPTARG
+shall be unset, and a diagnostic message shall be written to standard
+error. This condition shall be considered to be an error detected in
+the way arguments were presented to the invoking application, but shall
+not be an error in
+.IR getopts
+processing; a diagnostic message shall be written as stated, but the
+exit status shall be zero.
+.P
+When the end of options is encountered, the
+.IR getopts
+utility shall exit with a return value greater than zero; the shell
+variable
+.IR OPTIND
+shall be set to the index of the first operand, or the value
+.BR \(dq$#\(dq +1
+if there are no operands; the
+.IR name
+variable shall be set to the
+<question-mark>
+character. Any of the following shall identify the end of options:
+the first
+.BR \(dq\(mi\|\(mi\(dq 
+argument that is not an option-argument, finding an argument that is
+not an option-argument and does not begin with a
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+or encountering an error.
+.P
+The shell variables
+.IR OPTIND
+and
+.IR OPTARG
+shall be local to the caller of
+.IR getopts
+and shall not be exported by default.
+.P
+The shell variable specified by the
+.IR name
+operand,
+.IR OPTIND ,
+and
+.IR OPTARG
+shall affect the current shell execution environment; see
+.IR "Section 2.12" ", " "Shell Execution Environment".
+.P
+If the application sets
+.IR OPTIND
+to the value 1, a new set of parameters can be used: either the
+current positional parameters or new
+.IR arg
+values. Any other attempt to invoke
+.IR getopts
+multiple times in a single shell execution environment with parameters
+(positional parameters or
+.IR arg
+operands) that are not the same in all invocations, or with an
+.IR OPTIND
+value modified to be a value other than 1, produces unspecified
+results.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIoptstring\fR" 10
+A string containing the option characters recognized by the utility
+invoking
+.IR getopts .
+If a character is followed by a
+<colon>,
+the option shall be expected to have an argument, which should be supplied
+as a separate argument. Applications should specify an option character
+and its option-argument as separate arguments, but
+.IR getopts
+shall interpret the characters following an option character requiring
+arguments as an argument whether or not this is done. An explicit null
+option-argument need not be recognized if it is not supplied as a
+separate argument when
+.IR getopts
+is invoked. (See also the
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.) The characters
+<question-mark>
+and
+<colon>
+shall not be used as option characters by an application. The use of
+other option characters that are not alphanumeric produces unspecified
+results. If the option-argument is not supplied as a separate argument
+from the option character, the value in
+.IR OPTARG
+shall be stripped of the option character and the
+.BR '\(mi' .
+The first character in
+.IR optstring
+determines how
+.IR getopts
+behaves if an option character is not known or an option-argument is
+missing.
+.IP "\fIname\fR" 10
+The name of a shell variable that shall be set by the
+.IR getopts
+utility to the option character that was found.
+.P
+The
+.IR getopts
+utility by default shall parse positional parameters passed to the
+invoking shell procedure. If
+.IR arg s
+are given, they shall be parsed instead of the positional parameters.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR getopts :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fIOPTIND\fP" 10
+This variable shall be used by the
+.IR getopts
+utility as the index of the next argument to be processed.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+Whenever an error is detected and the first character in the
+.IR optstring
+operand is not a
+<colon>
+(\c
+.BR ':' ),
+a diagnostic message shall be written to standard error with the
+following information in an unspecified format:
+.IP " *" 4
+The invoking program name shall be identified in the message. The
+invoking program name shall be the value of the shell special parameter
+0 (see
+.IR "Section 2.5.2" ", " "Special Parameters")
+at the time the
+.IR getopts
+utility is invoked. A name equivalent to:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+basename "$0"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+may be used.
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+If an option is found that was not specified in
+.IR optstring ,
+this error is identified and the invalid option character shall be
+identified in the message.
+.IP " *" 4
+If an option requiring an option-argument is found, but an
+option-argument is not found, this error shall be identified and the
+invalid option character shall be identified in the message.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+An option, specified or unspecified by
+.IR optstring ,
+was found.
+.IP >0 6
+The end of options was encountered or an error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since
+.IR getopts
+affects the current shell execution environment, it is generally
+provided as a shell regular built-in. If it is called in a subshell or
+separate utility execution environment, such as one of the following:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(getopts abc value "$@")
+nohup getopts ...
+find . \(miexec getopts ... \e;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+it does not affect the shell variables in the caller's environment.
+.P
+Note that shell functions share
+.IR OPTIND
+with the calling shell even though the positional parameters are
+changed. If the calling shell and any of its functions uses
+.IR getopts
+to parse arguments, the results are unspecified.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following example script parses and displays its arguments:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+aflag=
+bflag=
+while getopts ab: name
+do
+    case $name in
+    a)    aflag=1;;
+    b)    bflag=1
+          bval="$OPTARG";;
+    ?)   printf "Usage: %s: [\(mia] [\(mib value] args\en" $0
+          exit 2;;
+    esac
+done
+if [ ! \(miz "$aflag" ]; then
+    printf "Option \(mia specified\en"
+fi
+if [ ! \(miz "$bflag" ]; then
+    printf 'Option \(mib "%s" specified\en' "$bval"
+fi
+shift $(($OPTIND \(mi 1))
+printf "Remaining arguments are: %s\en$*"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR getopts
+utility was chosen in preference to the System V
+.IR getopt
+utility because
+.IR getopts
+handles option-arguments containing
+<blank>
+characters.
+.P
+The
+.IR OPTARG
+variable is not mentioned in the ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES section because
+it does not affect the execution of
+.IR getopts ;
+it is one of the few ``output-only'' variables used by the standard
+utilities.
+.P
+The
+<colon>
+is not allowed as an option character because that is not historical
+behavior, and it violates the Utility Syntax Guidelines. The
+<colon>
+is now specified to behave as in the KornShell version of the
+.IR getopts
+utility; when used as the first character in the
+.IR optstring
+operand, it disables diagnostics concerning missing option-arguments
+and unexpected option characters. This replaces the use of the
+.IR OPTERR
+variable that was specified in an early proposal.
+.P
+The formats of the diagnostic messages produced by the
+.IR getopts
+utility and the
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+function are not fully specified because implementations with superior
+(``friendlier'') formats objected to the formats used by some
+historical implementations. The standard developers considered it
+important that the information in the messages used be uniform between
+.IR getopts
+and
+\fIgetopt\fR().
+Exact duplication of the messages might not be possible, particularly
+if a utility is built on another system that has a different
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+function, but the messages must have specific information included so
+that the program name, invalid option character, and type of error can
+be distinguished by a user.
+.P
+Only a rare application program intercepts a
+.IR getopts
+standard error message and wants to parse it. Therefore,
+implementations are free to choose the most usable messages they can
+devise. The following formats are used by many historical
+implementations:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s: illegal option \(mi\|\(mi %c\en", <\fIprogram name\fP>, <\fIoption character\fP>
+.P
+"%s: option requires an argument \(mi\|\(mi %c\en", <\fIprogram name\fP>, \e
+    <\fIoption character\fP>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Historical shells with built-in versions of
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+or
+.IR getopts
+have used different formats, frequently not even indicating the option
+character found in error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5.2" ", " "Special Parameters"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIgetopt\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/grep.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/grep.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..43374b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/grep.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,529 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GREP "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+grep
+\(em search a file for a pattern
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+grep \fB[\fR\(miE|\(miF\fB] [\fR\(mic|\(mil|\(miq\fB] [\fR\(miinsvx\fB] \fR\(mie \fIpattern_list
+    \fB[\fR\(mie \fIpattern_list\fB]\fR... \fB[\fR\(mif \fIpattern_file\fB]\fR... \fB[\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+grep \fB[\fR\(miE|\(miF\fB] [\fR\(mic|\(mil|\(miq\fB] [\fR\(miinsvx\fB] [\fR\(mie \fIpattern_list\fB]...
+    \fR\(mif \fIpattern_file \fB[\fR\(mif \fIpattern_file\fB]\fR... \fB[\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+grep \fB[\fR\(miE|\(miF\fB] [\fR\(mic|\(mil|\(miq\fB] [\fR\(miinsvx\fB] \fIpattern_list\fB [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR grep
+utility shall search the input files, selecting lines matching one or
+more patterns; the types of patterns are controlled by the options
+specified. The patterns are specified by the
+.BR \(mie
+option,
+.BR \(mif
+option, or the
+.IR pattern_list
+operand. The
+.IR pattern_list 's
+value shall consist of one or more patterns separated by
+<newline>
+characters; the
+.IR pattern_file 's
+contents shall consist of one or more patterns terminated by a
+<newline>
+character. By default, an input line shall be selected if any
+pattern, treated as an entire basic regular expression (BRE) as
+described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 9.3" ", " "Basic Regular Expressions",
+matches any part of the line excluding the terminating
+<newline>;
+a null BRE shall match every line. By default, each selected input
+line shall be written to the standard output.
+.P
+Regular expression matching shall be based on text lines. Since a
+<newline>
+separates or terminates patterns (see the
+.BR \(mie
+and
+.BR \(mif
+options below), regular expressions cannot contain a
+<newline>.
+Similarly, since patterns are matched against individual lines
+(excluding the terminating
+<newline>
+characters) of the input, there is no way for a pattern to match a
+<newline>
+found in the input.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR grep
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(miE\fP" 10
+Match using extended regular expressions.
+Treat each pattern specified as an ERE, as described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 9.4" ", " "Extended Regular Expressions".
+If any entire ERE pattern matches some part of an input line excluding
+the terminating
+<newline>,
+the line shall be matched. A null ERE shall match every line.
+.IP "\fB\(miF\fP" 10
+Match using fixed strings. Treat each pattern specified as a string
+instead of a regular expression. If an input line contains any of the
+patterns as a contiguous sequence of bytes, the line shall be matched.
+A null string shall match every line.
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Write only a count of selected lines to standard output.
+.IP "\fB\(mie\ \fIpattern_list\fR" 10
+.br
+Specify one or more patterns to be used during the search for input.
+The application shall ensure that patterns in
+.IR pattern_list
+are separated by a
+<newline>.
+A null pattern can be specified by two adjacent
+<newline>
+characters in
+.IR pattern_list .
+Unless the
+.BR \(miE
+or
+.BR \(miF
+option is also specified, each pattern shall be treated as a BRE, as
+described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 9.3" ", " "Basic Regular Expressions".
+Multiple
+.BR \(mie
+and
+.BR \(mif
+options shall be accepted by the
+.IR grep
+utility. All of the specified patterns shall be used when matching
+lines, but the order of evaluation is unspecified.
+.IP "\fB\(mif\ \fIpattern_file\fR" 10
+.br
+Read one or more patterns from the file named by the pathname
+.IR pattern_file .
+Patterns in
+.IR pattern_file
+shall be terminated by a
+<newline>.
+A null pattern can be specified by an empty line in
+.IR pattern_file .
+Unless the
+.BR \(miE
+or
+.BR \(miF
+option is also specified, each pattern shall be treated as a BRE, as
+described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 9.3" ", " "Basic Regular Expressions".
+.IP "\fB\(mii\fP" 10
+Perform pattern matching in searches without regard to case; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 9.2" ", " "Regular Expression General Requirements".
+.IP "\fB\(mil\fP" 10
+(The letter ell.) Write only the names of files containing selected
+lines to standard output. Pathnames shall be written once per file
+searched. If the standard input is searched, a pathname of
+.BR \(dq(standard input)\(dq 
+shall be written, in the POSIX locale. In other locales,
+.BR \(dqstandard input\(dq 
+may be replaced by something more appropriate in those locales.
+.IP "\fB\(min\fP" 10
+Precede each output line by its relative line number in the file, each
+file starting at line 1. The line number counter shall be reset for
+each file processed.
+.IP "\fB\(miq\fP" 10
+Quiet. Nothing shall be written to the standard output, regardless of
+matching lines. Exit with zero status if an input line is selected.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Suppress the error messages ordinarily written for nonexistent or
+unreadable files. Other error messages shall not be suppressed.
+.IP "\fB\(miv\fP" 10
+Select lines not matching any of the specified patterns. If the
+.BR \(miv
+option is not specified, selected lines shall be those that match any
+of the specified patterns.
+.IP "\fB\(mix\fP" 10
+Consider only input lines that use all characters in the line excluding
+the terminating
+<newline>
+to match an entire fixed string or regular expression to be matching
+lines.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIpattern_list\fR" 10
+Specify one or more patterns to be used during the search for input.
+This operand shall be treated as if it were specified as
+.BR \(mie
+.IR pattern_list .
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file to be searched for the patterns. If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, the standard input shall be used.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used if no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, and shall be used if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' 
+and the implementation treats the
+.BR '\(mi' 
+as meaning standard input.
+Otherwise, the standard input shall not be used.
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files shall be text files.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR grep :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, equivalence classes,
+and multi-character collating elements within regular expressions.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files) and the behavior of
+character classes within regular expressions.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+If the
+.BR \(mil
+option is in effect, the following shall be written for each file
+containing at least one selected input line:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIfile\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Otherwise, if more than one
+.IR file
+argument appears, and
+.BR \(miq
+is not specified, the
+.IR grep
+utility shall prefix each output line by:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s:", <\fIfile\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The remainder of each output line shall depend on the other options
+specified:
+.IP " *" 4
+If the
+.BR \(mic
+option is in effect, the remainder of each output line shall contain:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d\en", <\fIcount\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Otherwise, if
+.BR \(mic
+is not in effect and the
+.BR \(min
+option is in effect, the following shall be written to standard
+output:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d:", <\fIline number\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Finally, the following shall be written to standard output:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s", <\fIselected-line contents\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+One or more lines were selected.
+.IP "\01" 6
+No lines were selected.
+.IP >1 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+If the
+.BR \(miq
+option is specified, the exit status shall be zero if an input line is
+selected, even if an error was detected. Otherwise, default actions
+shall be performed.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Care should be taken when using characters in
+.IR pattern_list
+that may also be meaningful to the command interpreter. It is safest
+to enclose the entire
+.IR pattern_list
+argument in single-quotes:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\&'...'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mie
+.IR pattern_list
+option has the same effect as the
+.IR pattern_list
+operand, but is useful when
+.IR pattern_list
+begins with the
+<hyphen>
+delimiter. It is also useful when it is more convenient to provide
+multiple patterns as separate arguments.
+.P
+Multiple
+.BR \(mie
+and
+.BR \(mif
+options are accepted and
+.IR grep
+uses all of the patterns it is given while matching input text lines.
+(Note that the order of evaluation is not specified. If an
+implementation finds a null string as a pattern, it is allowed to use
+that pattern first, matching every line, and effectively ignore any
+other patterns.)
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miq
+option provides a means of easily determining whether or not a pattern
+(or string) exists in a group of files. When searching several files,
+it provides a performance improvement (because it can quit as soon as
+it finds the first match) and requires less care by the user in
+choosing the set of files to supply as arguments (because it exits zero
+if it finds a match even if
+.IR grep
+detected an access or read error on earlier
+.IR file
+operands).
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+To find all uses of the word
+.BR \(dqPosix\(dq 
+(in any case) in file
+.BR text.mm
+and write with line numbers:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+grep \(mii \(min posix text.mm
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+To find all empty lines in the standard input:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+grep ^$
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+or:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+grep \(miv .
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+Both of the following commands print all lines containing strings
+.BR \(dqabc\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dqdef\(dq 
+or both:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+grep \(miE 'abc|def'
+.P
+grep \(miF 'abc
+def'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+Both of the following commands print all lines matching exactly
+.BR \(dqabc\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dqdef\(dq :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+grep \(miE '^abc$|^def$'
+.P
+grep \(miF \(mix 'abc
+def'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+This
+.IR grep
+has been enhanced in an upwards-compatible way to provide the exact
+functionality of the historical
+.IR egrep
+and
+.IR fgrep
+commands as well. It was the clear intention of the standard
+developers to consolidate the three
+.IR grep s
+into a single command.
+.P
+The old
+.IR egrep
+and
+.IR fgrep
+commands are likely to be supported for many years to come as
+implementation extensions, allowing historical applications to operate
+unmodified.
+.P
+Historical implementations usually silently ignored all but one of
+multiply-specified
+.BR \(mie
+and
+.BR \(mif
+options, but were not consistent as to which specification was actually
+used.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mib
+option was omitted from the OPTIONS section because block numbers are
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+The System V restriction on using
+.BR \(mi
+to mean standard input was omitted.
+.P
+A definition of action taken when given a null BRE or ERE is specified.
+This is an error condition in some historical implementations.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mil
+option previously indicated that its use was undefined when no files
+were explicitly named. This behavior was historical and placed an
+unnecessary restriction on future implementations. It has been
+removed.
+.P
+The historical BSD
+.IR grep
+.BR \(mis
+option practice is easily duplicated by redirecting standard output to
+.BR /dev/null .
+The
+.BR \(mis
+option required here is from System V.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mix
+option, historically available only with
+.IR fgrep ,
+is available here for all of the non-obsolescent versions.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsed\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Chapter 9" ", " "Regular Expressions",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/hash.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/hash.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..00c2821
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/hash.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,189 @@
+'\" et
+.TH HASH "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+hash
+\(em remember or report utility locations
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+hash \fB[\fIutility\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+hash \(mir
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR hash
+utility shall affect the way the current shell environment remembers
+the locations of utilities found as described in
+.IR "Section 2.9.1.1" ", " "Command Search and Execution".
+Depending on the arguments specified, it shall add utility locations to
+its list of remembered locations or it shall purge the contents of the
+list. When no arguments are specified, it shall report on the contents
+of the list.
+.P
+Utilities provided as built-ins to the shell shall not be reported by
+.IR hash .
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR hash
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+Forget all previously remembered utility locations.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIutility\fR" 10
+The name of a utility to be searched for and added to the list of
+remembered locations. If
+.IR utility
+contains one or more
+<slash>
+characters, the results are unspecified.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR hash :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fIPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of
+.IR utility ,
+as described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables".
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output of
+.IR hash
+shall be used when no arguments are specified. Its format is
+unspecified, but includes the pathname of each utility in the list of
+remembered locations for the current shell environment. This list
+shall consist of those utilities named in previous
+.IR hash
+invocations that have been invoked, and may contain those invoked and
+found through the normal command search process.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since
+.IR hash
+affects the current shell execution environment, it is always provided
+as a shell regular built-in. If it is called in a separate utility
+execution environment, such as one of the following:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+nohup hash \(mir
+find . \(mitype f | xargs hash
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+it does not affect the command search process of the caller's
+environment.
+.P
+The
+.IR hash
+utility may be implemented as an alias\(emfor example,
+.IR alias
+.BR "\(mit\ \(mi" ,
+in which case utilities found through normal command search are not
+listed by the
+.IR hash
+command.
+.P
+The effects of
+.IR hash
+.BR \(mir
+can also be achieved portably by resetting the value of
+.IR PATH ;
+in the simplest form, this can be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+PATH="$PATH"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The use of
+.IR hash
+with
+.IR utility
+names is unnecessary for most applications, but may provide a
+performance improvement on a few implementations; normally, the hashing
+process is included by default.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.9.1.1" ", " "Command Search and Execution"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/head.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/head.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..477328d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/head.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,207 @@
+'\" et
+.TH HEAD "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+head
+\(em copy the first part of files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+head \fB[\fR\(min \fInumber\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR head
+utility shall copy its input files to the standard output, ending the
+output for each file at a designated point.
+.P
+Copying shall end at the point in each input file indicated by the
+.BR \(min
+.IR number
+option. The option-argument
+.IR number
+shall be counted in units of lines.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR head
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(min\ \fInumber\fR" 10
+The first
+.IR number
+lines of each input file shall be copied to standard output. The
+application shall ensure that the
+.IR number
+option-argument is a positive decimal integer.
+.P
+When a file contains less than
+.IR number
+lines, it shall be copied to standard output in its entirety. This
+shall not be an error.
+.P
+If no options are specified,
+.IR head
+shall act as if
+.BR "\(min 10"
+had been specified.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of an input file. If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, the standard input shall be used.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used if no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, and shall be used if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' 
+and the implementation treats the
+.BR '\(mi' 
+as meaning standard input.
+Otherwise, the standard input shall not be used.
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+Input files shall be text files, but the line length is not restricted
+to
+{LINE_MAX}
+bytes.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR head :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall contain designated portions of the input
+files.
+.P
+If multiple
+.IR file
+operands are specified,
+.IR head
+shall precede the output for each with the header:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"\en==> %s <==\en", <\fIpathname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+except that the first header written shall not include the initial
+<newline>.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+To write the first ten lines of all files (except those with a leading
+period) in the directory:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+head \(mi\|\(mi *
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+Although it is possible to simulate
+.IR head
+with
+.IR sed
+10q for a single file, the standard developers decided that the
+popularity of
+.IR head
+on historical BSD systems warranted its inclusion alongside
+.IR tail .
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 version of
+.IR head
+follows the Utility Syntax Guidelines. The
+.BR \(min
+option was added to this new interface so that
+.IR head
+and
+.IR tail
+would be more logically related. Earlier versions of this standard
+allowed a
+.BR \(minumber
+option. This form is no longer specified by POSIX.1\(hy2008 but may
+be present in some implementations.
+.P
+There is no
+.BR \(mic
+option (as there is in
+.IR tail )
+because it is not historical practice and because other utilities in
+\&this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 provide similar functionality.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsed\fR\^",
+.IR "\fItail\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/iconv.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/iconv.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..41b3b09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/iconv.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,288 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ICONV "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+iconv
+\(em codeset conversion
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+iconv \fB[\fR\(mics\fB]\fR \(mif \fIfrommap\fR \(mit \fItomap \fB[\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+iconv \(mif \fIfromcode \fB[\fR\(mics\fB] [\fR\(mit \fItocode\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+iconv \(mit \fItocode \fB[\fR\(mics\fB] [\fR\(mif \fIfromcode\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+iconv \(mil
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR iconv
+utility shall convert the encoding of characters in
+.IR file
+from one codeset to another and write the results to standard output.
+.P
+When the options indicate that charmap files are used to specify the
+codesets (see OPTIONS), the codeset conversion shall be accomplished by
+performing a logical join on the symbolic character names in the two
+charmaps. The implementation need not support the use of charmap files
+for codeset conversion unless the POSIX2_LOCALEDEF symbol is defined on
+the system.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR iconv
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fR" 10
+Omit any characters that are invalid in the codeset of the input file
+from the output. When
+.BR \(mic
+is not used, the results of encountering invalid characters in the
+input stream (either those that are not characters in the codeset of
+the input file or that have no corresponding character in the codeset
+of the output file) shall be specified in the system documentation. The
+presence or absence of
+.BR \(mic
+shall not affect the exit status of
+.IR iconv .
+.IP "\fB\(mif\ \fIfromcodeset\fR" 10
+.br
+Identify the codeset of the input file. The implementation shall
+recognize the following two forms of the
+.IR fromcodeset
+option-argument:
+.RS 10 
+.IP "\fIfromcode\fR" 10
+The
+.IR fromcode
+option-argument must not contain a
+<slash>
+character. It shall be interpreted as the name of one of the codeset
+descriptions provided by the implementation in an unspecified
+format. Valid values of
+.IR fromcode
+are implementation-defined.
+.IP "\fIfrommap\fR" 10
+The
+.IR frommap
+option-argument must contain a
+<slash>
+character. It shall be interpreted as the pathname of a charmap file as
+defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.4" ", " "Character Set Description File".
+If the pathname does not represent a valid, readable charmap file,
+the results are undefined.
+.P
+If this option is omitted, the codeset of the current locale shall
+be used.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mil\fR" 10
+Write all supported
+.IR fromcode
+and
+.IR tocode
+values to standard output in an unspecified format.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fR" 10
+Suppress any messages written to standard error concerning invalid
+characters. When
+.BR \(mis
+is not used, the results of encountering invalid characters in the
+input stream (either those that are not valid characters in the codeset
+of the input file or that have no corresponding character in the
+codeset of the output file) shall be specified in the system
+documentation. The presence or absence of
+.BR \(mis
+shall not affect the exit status of
+.IR iconv .
+.IP "\fB\(mit\ \fItocodeset\fR" 10
+Identify the codeset to be used for the output file. The implementation
+shall recognize the following two forms of the
+.IR tocodeset
+option-argument:
+.RS 10 
+.IP "\fItocode\fR" 10
+The semantics shall be equivalent to the
+.BR \(mif
+.IR fromcode
+option.
+.IP "\fItomap\fR" 10
+The semantics shall be equivalent to the
+.BR \(mif
+.IR frommap
+option.
+.P
+If this option is omitted, the codeset of the current locale shall be
+used.
+.RE
+.P
+If either
+.BR \(mif
+or
+.BR \(mit
+represents a charmap file, but the other does not (or is omitted), or
+both
+.BR \(mif
+and
+.BR \(mit
+are omitted, the results are undefined.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of an input file. If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, or if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be used.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used only if no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, or if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' .
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input file shall be a text file.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR iconv :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments). During translation of the file,
+this variable is superseded by the use of the
+.IR fromcode
+option-argument.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+When the
+.BR \(mil
+option is used, the standard output shall contain all supported
+.IR fromcode
+and
+.IR tocode
+values, written in an unspecified format.
+.P
+When the
+.BR \(mil
+option is not used, the standard output shall contain the sequence of
+characters read from the input files, translated to the specified
+codeset. Nothing else shall be written to the standard output.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The user must ensure that both charmap files use the same symbolic
+names for characters the two codesets have in common.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following example converts the contents of file
+.BR mail.x400
+from the ISO/IEC\ 6937:\|2001 standard codeset to the ISO/IEC\ 8859\(hy1:\|1998 standard codeset, and stores the results in
+file
+.BR mail.local :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+iconv \(mif IS6937 \(mit IS8859 mail.x400 > mail.local
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR iconv
+utility can be used portably only when the user provides two charmap
+files as option-arguments. This is because a single charmap provided by
+the user cannot reliably be joined with the names in a system-provided
+character set description. The valid values for
+.IR fromcode
+and
+.IR tocode
+are implementation-defined and do not have to have any relation to
+the charmap mechanisms. As an aid to interactive users, the
+.BR \(mil
+option was adopted from the Plan 9 operating system. It writes
+information concerning these implementation-defined values. The
+format is unspecified because there are many possible useful formats
+that could be chosen, such as a matrix of valid combinations of
+.IR fromcode
+and
+.IR tocode .
+The
+.BR \(mil
+option is not intended for shell script usage; conforming applications
+will have to use charmaps.
+.P
+The
+.IR iconv
+utility may support the conversion between ASCII and EBCDIC-based
+encodings, but is not required to do so. In an XSI-compliant
+implementation, the
+.IR dd
+utility is the only method guaranteed to support conversion between
+these two character sets.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIdd\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIgencat\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.4" ", " "Character Set Description File",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/id.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/id.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..319f76f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/id.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,351 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ID "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+id
+\(em return user identity
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+id \fB[\fIuser\fB]\fR
+.P
+id \(miG \fB[\fR\(min\fB] [\fIuser\fB]\fR
+.P
+id \(mig \fB[\fR\(minr\fB] [\fIuser\fB]\fR
+.P
+id \(miu \fB[\fR\(minr\fB] [\fIuser\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+If no
+.IR user
+operand is provided, the
+.IR id
+utility shall write the user and group IDs and the corresponding user
+and group names of the invoking process to standard output. If the
+effective and real IDs do not match, both shall be written. If
+multiple groups are supported by the underlying system (see the
+description of
+{NGROUPS_MAX}
+in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008), the supplementary group affiliations of the invoking
+process shall also be written.
+.P
+If a
+.IR user
+operand is provided and the process has appropriate privileges, the
+user and group IDs of the selected user shall be written. In this
+case, effective IDs shall be assumed to be identical to real IDs. If
+the selected user has more than one allowable group membership listed
+in the group database, these shall be written in the same manner as the
+supplementary groups described in the preceding paragraph.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR id
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(miG\fP" 10
+Output all different group IDs (effective, real, and supplementary)
+only, using the format
+.BR \(dq%u\en\(dq .
+If there is more than one distinct group affiliation, output each such
+affiliation, using the format
+.BR \(dq\ %u\(dq ,
+before the
+<newline>
+is output.
+.IP "\fB\(mig\fP" 10
+Output only the effective group ID, using the format
+.BR \(dq%u\en\(dq .
+.IP "\fB\(min\fP" 10
+Output the name in the format
+.BR \(dq%s\(dq 
+instead of the numeric ID using the format
+.BR \(dq%u\(dq .
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+Output the real ID instead of the effective ID.
+.IP "\fB\(miu\fP" 10
+Output only the effective user ID, using the format
+.BR \(dq%u\en\(dq .
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIuser\fR" 10
+The login name for which information is to be written.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR id :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The following formats shall be used when the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+locale category specifies the POSIX locale. In other locales, the
+strings
+.IR uid ,
+.IR gid ,
+.IR euid ,
+.IR egid ,
+and
+.IR groups
+may be replaced with more appropriate strings corresponding to the
+locale.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"uid=%u(%s) gid=%u(%s)\en", <\fIreal user ID\fR>, <\fIuser-name\fR>,
+    <\fIreal group ID\fR>, <\fIgroup-name\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the effective and real user IDs do not match, the following shall be
+inserted immediately before the
+.BR '\en' 
+character in the previous format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+" euid=%u(%s)"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+with the following arguments added at the end of the argument list:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<\fIeffective user ID\fR>, <\fIeffective user-name\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the effective and real group IDs do not match, the following shall
+be inserted directly before the
+.BR '\en' 
+character in the format string (and after any addition resulting from
+the effective and real user IDs not matching):
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+" egid=%u(%s)"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+with the following arguments added at the end of the argument list:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<\fIeffective group-ID\fR>, <\fIeffective group name\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the process has supplementary group affiliations or the selected
+user is allowed to belong to multiple groups, the first shall be added
+directly before the
+<newline>
+in the format string:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+" groups=%u(%s)"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+with the following arguments added at the end of the argument list:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<\fIsupplementary group ID\fR>, <\fIsupplementary group name\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and the necessary number of the following added after that for any
+remaining supplementary group IDs:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+",%u(%s)"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and the necessary number of the following arguments added at the end of
+the argument list:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<\fIsupplementary group ID\fR>, <\fIsupplementary group name\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If any of the user ID, group ID, effective user ID, effective group ID,
+or supplementary/multiple group IDs cannot be mapped by the system into
+printable user or group names, the corresponding
+.BR \(dq(%s)\(dq 
+and
+.IR name
+argument shall be omitted from the corresponding format string.
+.P
+When any of the options are specified, the output format shall be as
+described in the OPTIONS section.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Output produced by the
+.BR \(miG
+option and by the default case could potentially produce very long
+lines on systems that support large numbers of supplementary groups.
+(On systems with user and group IDs that are 32-bit integers and with
+group names with a maximum of 8 bytes per name, 93 supplementary groups
+plus distinct effective and real group and user IDs could theoretically
+overflow the 2\|048-byte
+{LINE_MAX}
+text file line limit on the default output case. It would take about
+186 supplementary groups to overflow the 2\|048-byte barrier using
+.IR id
+.BR \(miG ).
+This is not expected to be a problem in practice, but in cases where it
+is a concern, applications should consider using
+.IR fold
+.BR \(mis
+before post-processing the output of
+.IR id .
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The functionality provided by the 4 BSD
+.IR groups
+utility can be simulated using:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+id \(miGn [ user ]
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The 4 BSD command
+.IR groups
+was considered, but it was not included because it did not provide the
+functionality of the
+.IR id
+utility of the SVID. Also, it was thought that it would be easier to
+modify
+.IR id
+to provide the additional functionality necessary to systems with
+multiple groups than to invent another command.
+.P
+The options
+.BR \(miu ,
+.BR \(mig ,
+.BR \(min ,
+and
+.BR \(mir
+were added to ease the use of
+.IR id
+with shell commands substitution. Without these options it is
+necessary to use some preprocessor such as
+.IR sed
+to select the desired piece of information. Since output such as that
+produced by:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+id \(miu \(min
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+is frequently wanted, it seemed desirable to add the options.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfold\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIlogname\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIwho\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIgetgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetgroups\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetuid\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ipcrm.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ipcrm.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..032e835
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ipcrm.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+'\" et
+.TH IPCRM "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ipcrm
+\(em remove an XSI message queue, semaphore set, or shared memory
+segment identifier
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+ipcrm \fB[\fR\(miq msgid|\(miQ msgkey|\(mis semid|\(miS semkey|\(mim shmid|\(miM shmkey\fB]\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR ipcrm
+utility shall remove zero or more message queues, semaphore sets, or
+shared memory segments. The interprocess communication facilities to be
+removed are specified by the options.
+.P
+Only a user with appropriate privileges shall be allowed to remove an
+interprocess communication facility that was not created by or owned by
+the user invoking
+.IR ipcrm .
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR ipcrm
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(miq\ \fImsgid\fR" 10
+Remove the message queue identifier
+.IR msgid
+from the system and destroy the message queue and data structure
+associated with it.
+.IP "\fB\(mim\ \fIshmid\fR" 10
+Remove the shared memory identifier
+.IR shmid
+from the system. The shared memory segment and data structure
+associated with it shall be destroyed after the last detach.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\ \fIsemid\fR" 10
+Remove the semaphore identifier
+.IR semid
+from the system and destroy the set of semaphores and data structure
+associated with it.
+.IP "\fB\(miQ\ \fImsgkey\fR" 10
+Remove the message queue identifier, created with key
+.IR msgkey ,
+from the system and destroy the message queue and data structure
+associated with it.
+.IP "\fB\(miM\ \fIshmkey\fR" 10
+Remove the shared memory identifier, created with key
+.IR shmkey ,
+from the system. The shared memory segment and data structure
+associated with it shall be destroyed after the last detach.
+.IP "\fB\(miS\ \fIsemkey\fR" 10
+Remove the semaphore identifier, created with key
+.IR semkey ,
+from the system and destroy the set of semaphores and data structure
+associated with it.
+.SH OPERANDS
+None.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR ipcrm :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIipcs\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fImsgctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmctl\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ipcs.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ipcs.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..54456e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ipcs.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,556 @@
+'\" et
+.TH IPCS "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ipcs
+\(em report XSI interprocess communication facilities status
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+ipcs \fB[\fR\(miqms\fB] [\fR\(mia|\(mibcopt\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR ipcs
+utility shall write information about active interprocess communication
+facilities.
+.P
+Without options, information shall be written in short format for
+message queues, shared memory segments, and semaphore sets that are
+currently active in the system. Otherwise, the information that is
+displayed is controlled by the options specified.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR ipcs
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The
+.IR ipcs
+utility accepts the following options:
+.IP "\fB\(miq\fP" 10
+Write information about active message queues.
+.IP "\fB\(mim\fP" 10
+Write information about active shared memory segments.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Write information about active semaphore sets.
+.P
+If
+.BR \(miq ,
+.BR \(mim ,
+or
+.BR \(mis
+are specified, only information about those facilities shall be
+written. If none of these three are specified, information about all
+three shall be written subject to the following options:
+.IP "\fB\(mia\fP" 10
+Use all print options. (This is a shorthand notation for
+.BR \(mib ,
+.BR \(mic ,
+.BR \(mio ,
+.BR \(mip ,
+and
+.BR \(mit .)
+.IP "\fB\(mib\fP" 10
+Write information on maximum allowable size. (Maximum number of bytes
+in messages on queue for message queues, size of segments for shared
+memory, and number of semaphores in each set for semaphores.)
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Write creator's user name and group name; see below.
+.IP "\fB\(mio\fP" 10
+Write information on outstanding usage. (Number of messages on queue
+and total number of bytes in messages on queue for message queues, and
+number of processes attached to shared memory segments.)
+.IP "\fB\(mip\fP" 10
+Write process number information. (Process ID of the last process to
+send a message and process ID of the last process to receive a message
+on message queues, process ID of the creating process, and process ID
+of the last process to attach or detach on shared memory segments.)
+.IP "\fB\(mit\fP" 10
+Write time information. (Time of the last control operation that
+changed the access permissions for all facilities, time of the last
+\fImsgsnd\fR()
+and
+\fImsgrcv\fR()
+operations on message queues, time of the last
+\fIshmat\fR()
+and
+\fIshmdt\fR()
+operations on shared memory, and time of the last
+\fIsemop\fR()
+operation on semaphores.)
+.SH OPERANDS
+None.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+.IP " *" 4
+The group database
+.IP " *" 4
+The user database
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR ipcs :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fITZ\fP" 10
+Determine the timezone for the date and time strings written by
+.IR ipcs .
+If
+.IR TZ
+is unset or null, an unspecified default timezone shall be used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+An introductory line shall be written with the format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"IPC status from %s as of %s\en", <\fIsource\fP>, <\fIdate\fP>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fIsource\fP> indicates the source used to gather the statistics
+and <\fIdate\fP> is the information that would be produced by the
+.IR date
+command when invoked in the POSIX locale.
+.P
+The
+.IR ipcs
+utility then shall create up to three reports depending upon the
+.BR \(miq ,
+.BR \(mim ,
+and
+.BR \(mis
+options. The first report shall indicate the status of message queues,
+the second report shall indicate the status of shared memory segments,
+and the third report shall indicate the status of semaphore sets.
+.P
+If the corresponding facility is not installed or has not been used
+since the last reboot, then the report shall be written out in the
+format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s facility not in system.\en", <\fIfacility\fP>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fIfacility\fP> is
+.IR "Message Queue" ,
+.IR "Shared Memory" ,
+or
+.IR "Semaphore" ,
+as appropriate. If the facility has been installed and has been used
+since the last reboot, column headings separated by one or more
+<space>
+characters and followed by a
+<newline>
+shall be written as indicated below followed by the facility name
+written out using the format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s:\en", <\fIfacility\fP>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fIfacility\fP> is
+.IR "Message Queues" ,
+.IR "Shared Memory" ,
+or
+.IR "Semaphores" ,
+as appropriate. On the second and third reports the column headings
+need not be written if the last column headings written already provide
+column headings for all information in that report.
+.P
+The column headings provided in the first column below and the meaning
+of the information in those columns shall be given in order below; the
+letters in parentheses indicate the options that shall cause the
+corresponding column to appear; ``all'' means that the column shall
+always appear. Each column is separated by one or more
+<space>
+characters. Note that these options only determine what information is
+provided for each report; they do not determine which reports are written.
+.IP "T (all)" 12
+Type of facility:
+.RS 12 
+.IP "\fRq\fP" 8
+Message queue.
+.IP "\fRm\fP" 8
+Shared memory segment.
+.IP "\fRs\fP" 8
+Semaphore.
+.P
+This field is a single character written using the format
+.BR %c .
+.RE
+.IP "ID (all)" 12
+The identifier for the facility entry. This field shall be written
+using the format
+.BR %d .
+.IP "KEY (all)" 12
+The key used as an argument to
+\fImsgget\fR(),
+\fIsemget\fR(),
+or
+\fIshmget\fR()
+to create the facility entry.
+.RS 12 
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+The key of a shared memory segment is changed to IPC_PRIVATE when the
+segment has been removed until all processes attached to the segment
+detach it.
+.P
+This field shall be written using the format \fR0x%x\fR.
+.RE
+.IP "MODE (all)" 12
+The facility access modes and flags. The mode shall consist of 11
+characters that are interpreted as follows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+The first character shall be:
+.IP "\fRS\fP" 8
+If a process is waiting on a
+\fImsgsnd\fR()
+operation.
+.IP "\fR\(mi\fP" 8
+If the above is not true.
+.P
+The second character shall be:
+.IP "\fRR\fP" 8
+If a process is waiting on a
+\fImsgrcv\fR()
+operation.
+.IP "\fRC\fP\ or\ \fR\(mi\fP" 8
+If the associated shared memory segment is to be cleared when the first
+attach operation is executed.
+.IP "\fR\(mi\fP" 8
+If none of the above is true.
+.P
+The next nine characters shall be interpreted as three sets of three
+bits each. The first set refers to the owner's permissions; the next
+to permissions of others in the usergroup of the facility entry; and
+the last to all others. Within each set, the first character indicates
+permission to read, the second character indicates permission to write
+or alter the facility entry, and the last character is a minus-sign (\c
+.BR '\(mi' ).
+.P
+The permissions shall be indicated as follows:
+.IP "\fIr\fP" 8
+If read permission is granted.
+.IP "\fIw\fP" 8
+If write permission is granted.
+.IP "\fIa\fP" 8
+If alter permission is granted.
+.IP "\fR\(mi\fP" 8
+If the indicated permission is not granted.
+.P
+The first character following the permissions specifies if there is an
+alternate or additional access control method associated with the
+facility. If there is no alternate or additional access control method
+associated with the facility, a single
+<space>
+shall be written; otherwise, another printable character is
+written.
+.RE
+.IP "OWNER (all)" 12
+The user name of the owner of the facility entry. If the user name of
+the owner is found in the user database, at least the first eight
+column positions of the name shall be written using the format
+.BR %s .
+Otherwise, the user ID of the owner shall be written using the format
+.BR %d .
+.IP "GROUP (all)" 12
+The group name of the owner of the facility entry. If the group name
+of the owner is found in the group database, at least the first eight
+column positions of the name shall be written using the format
+.BR %s .
+Otherwise, the group ID of the owner shall be written using the format
+.BR %d .
+.P
+The following nine columns shall be only written out for message
+queues:
+.IP "CREATOR (\fBa\fP,\fBc\fP)" 12
+The user name of the creator of the facility entry. If the user name
+of the creator is found in the user database, at least the first eight
+column positions of the name shall be written using the format
+.BR %s .
+Otherwise, the user ID of the creator shall be written using the format
+.BR %d .
+.IP "CGROUP (\fBa\fP,\fBc\fP)" 12
+The group name of the creator of the facility entry. If the group name
+of the creator is found in the group database, at least the first eight
+column positions of the name shall be written using the format
+.BR %s .
+Otherwise, the group ID of the creator shall be written using the format
+.BR %d .
+.IP "CBYTES (\fBa\fP,\fBo\fP)" 12
+The number of bytes in messages currently outstanding on the associated
+message queue. This field shall be written using the format
+.BR %d .
+.IP "QNUM (\fBa\fP,\fBo\fP)" 12
+The number of messages currently outstanding on the associated message
+queue. This field shall be written using the format
+.BR %d .
+.IP "QBYTES (\fBa\fP,\fBb\fP)" 12
+The maximum number of bytes allowed in messages outstanding on the
+associated message queue. This field shall be written using the format
+.BR %d .
+.IP "LSPID (\fBa\fP,\fBp\fP)" 12
+The process ID of the last process to send a message to the associated
+queue. This field shall be written using the format:
+.RS 12 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d", <\fIpid\fP>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fIpid\fP> is 0 if no message has been sent to the corresponding
+message queue; otherwise, <\fIpid\fP> shall be the process ID of the
+last process to send a message to the queue.
+.RE
+.IP "LRPID (\fBa\fP,\fBp\fP)" 12
+The process ID of the last process to receive a message from the
+associated queue. This field shall be written using the format:
+.RS 12 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d", <\fIpid\fP>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fIpid\fP> is 0 if no message has been received from the
+corresponding message queue; otherwise, <\fIpid\fP> shall be the
+process ID of the last process to receive a message from the queue.
+.RE
+.IP "STIME (\fBa\fP,\fBt\fP)" 12
+The time the last message was sent to the associated queue.
+If a message has been sent to the corresponding message queue,
+the hour, minute, and second of the last time a message
+was sent to the queue shall be written using the format
+.BR %d :\c
+.BR %2.2d :\c
+.BR %2.2d .
+Otherwise, the format
+.BR \(dq\ no-entry\(dq 
+shall be written.
+.IP "RTIME (\fBa\fP,\fBt\fP)" 12
+The time the last message was received from the associated queue.
+If a message has been received from the corresponding message queue,
+the hour, minute, and second of the last time a message was received
+from the queue shall be written using the format
+.BR %d :\c
+.BR %2.2d :\c
+.BR %2.2d .
+Otherwise, the format
+.BR \(dq\ no-entry\(dq 
+shall be written.
+.P
+The following eight columns shall be only written out for shared memory
+segments.
+.IP "CREATOR (\fBa\fP,\fBc\fP)" 12
+The user of the creator of the facility entry. If the user name of the
+creator is found in the user database, at least the first eight column
+positions of the name shall be written using the format
+.BR %s .
+Otherwise, the user ID of the creator shall be written using the format
+.BR %d .
+.IP "CGROUP (\fBa\fP,\fBc\fP)" 12
+The group name of the creator of the facility entry. If the group name
+of the creator is found in the group database, at least the first eight
+column positions of the name shall be written using the format
+.BR %s .
+Otherwise, the group ID of the creator shall be written using the format
+.BR %d .
+.IP "NATTCH (\fBa\fP,\fBo\fP)" 12
+The number of processes attached to the associated shared memory
+segment. This field shall be written using the format
+.BR %d .
+.IP "SEGSZ (\fBa\fP,\fBb\fP)" 12
+The size of the associated shared memory segment. This field shall be
+written using the format
+.BR %d .
+.IP "CPID (\fBa\fP,\fBp\fP)" 12
+The process ID of the creator of the shared memory entry. This field
+shall be written using the format
+.BR %d .
+.IP "LPID (\fBa\fP,\fBp\fP)" 12
+The process ID of the last process to attach or detach the shared
+memory segment. This field shall be written using the format:
+.RS 12 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d", <\fIpid\fP>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fIpid\fP> is 0 if no process has attached the corresponding
+shared memory segment; otherwise, <\fIpid\fP> shall be the process ID
+of the last process to attach or detach the segment.
+.RE
+.IP "ATIME (\fBa\fP,\fBt\fP)" 12
+The time the last attach on the associated shared memory segment was
+completed. If the corresponding shared memory segment has ever been
+attached, the hour, minute, and second of the last time the segment was
+attached shall be written using the format
+.BR %d :\c
+.BR %2.2d :\c
+.BR %2.2d .
+Otherwise, the format
+.BR \(dq\ no-entry\(dq 
+shall be written.
+.IP "DTIME (\fBa\fP,\fBt\fP)" 12
+The time the last detach on the associated shared memory segment was
+completed. If the corresponding shared memory segment has ever been
+detached, the hour, minute, and second of the last time the segment was
+detached shall be written using the format
+.BR %d :\c
+.BR %2.2d :\c
+.BR %2.2d .
+Otherwise, the format
+.BR \(dq\ no-entry\(dq 
+shall be written.
+.P
+The following four columns shall be only written out for semaphore
+sets:
+.IP "CREATOR (\fBa\fP,\fBc\fP)" 12
+The user of the creator of the facility entry. If the user name of the
+creator is found in the user database, at least the first eight column
+positions of the name shall be written using the format
+.BR %s .
+Otherwise, the user ID of the creator shall be written using the format
+.BR %d .
+.IP "CGROUP     (\fBa\fP,\fBc\fP)" 12
+The group name of the creator of the facility entry. If the group name
+of the creator is found in the group database, at least the first eight
+column positions of the name shall be written using the format
+.BR %s .
+Otherwise, the group ID of the creator shall be written using the
+format
+.BR %d .
+.IP "NSEMS (\fBa\fP,\fBb\fP)" 12
+The number of semaphores in the set associated with the semaphore
+entry. This field shall be written using the format
+.BR %d .
+.IP "OTIME (\fBa\fP,\fBt\fP)" 12
+The time the last semaphore operation on the set associated with the
+semaphore entry was completed. If a semaphore operation has ever been
+performed on the corresponding semaphore set, the hour, minute, and
+second of the last semaphore operation on the semaphore set shall be
+written using the format
+.BR %d :\c
+.BR %2.2d :\c
+.BR %2.2d .
+Otherwise, the format
+.BR \(dq\ no-entry\(dq 
+shall be written.
+.P
+The following column shall be written for all three reports when it is
+requested:
+.IP "CTIME (\fBa\fP,\fBt\fP)" 12
+The time the associated entry was created or changed. The hour,
+minute, and second of the time when the associated entry was created
+shall be written using the format
+.BR %d :\c
+.BR %2.2d :\c
+.BR %2.2d .
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Things can change while
+.IR ipcs
+is running; the information it gives is guaranteed to be accurate
+only when it was retrieved.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIipcrm\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fImsgrcv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgsnd\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemop\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmdt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmget\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/jobs.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/jobs.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..96288b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/jobs.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,343 @@
+'\" et
+.TH JOBS "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+jobs
+\(em display status of jobs in the current session
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+jobs \fB[\fR\(mil|\(mip\fB] [\fIjob_id\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR jobs
+utility shall display the status of jobs that were started in the
+current shell environment; see
+.IR "Section 2.12" ", " "Shell Execution Environment".
+.P
+When
+.IR jobs
+reports the termination status of a job, the shell shall remove its
+process ID from the list of those ``known in the current shell
+execution environment''; see
+.IR "Section 2.9.3.1" ", " "Examples".
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR jobs
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mil\fP" 10
+(The letter ell.) Provide more information about each job listed. This
+information shall include the job number, current job, process group
+ID, state, and the command that formed the job.
+.IP "\fB\(mip\fP" 10
+Display only the process IDs for the process group leaders of the
+selected jobs.
+.P
+By default, the
+.IR jobs
+utility shall display the status of all stopped jobs, running
+background jobs and all jobs whose status has changed and have not been
+reported by the shell.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIjob_id\fR" 10
+Specifies the jobs for which the status is to be displayed. If no
+.IR job_id
+is given, the status information for all jobs shall be displayed. The
+format of
+.IR job_id
+is described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.204" ", " "Job Control Job ID".
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR jobs :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+If the
+.BR \(mip
+option is specified, the output shall consist of one line for each
+process ID:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d\en", <\fIprocess ID\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Otherwise, if the
+.BR \(mil
+option is not specified, the output shall be a series of lines of the
+form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"[%d] %c %s %s\en", <\fIjob-number\fR>, <\fIcurrent\fR>, <\fIstate\fR>, <\fIcommand\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where the fields shall be as follows:
+.IP "<\fIcurrent\fP>" 10
+The character
+.BR '\(pl' 
+identifies the job that would be used as a default for the
+.IR fg
+or
+.IR bg
+utilities; this job can also be specified using the
+.IR job_id
+%+ or
+.BR \(dq%%\(dq .
+The character
+.BR '\(mi' 
+identifies the job that would become the default if the current default
+job were to exit; this job can also be specified using the
+.IR job_id
+%\(mi. For other jobs, this field is a
+<space>.
+At most one job can be identified with
+.BR '\(pl' 
+and at most one job can be identified with
+.BR '\(mi' .
+If there is any suspended job, then the current job shall be a
+suspended job. If there are at least two suspended jobs, then the
+previous job also shall be a suspended job.
+.IP "<\fIjob-number\fP>" 10
+A number that can be used to identify the process group to the
+.IR wait ,
+.IR fg ,
+.IR bg ,
+and
+.IR kill
+utilities. Using these utilities, the job can be identified by
+prefixing the job number with
+.BR '%' .
+.IP "<\fIstate\fP>" 10
+One of the following strings (in the POSIX locale):
+.RS 10 
+.IP "\fBRunning\fR" 10
+Indicates that the job has not been suspended by a signal and has not
+exited.
+.IP "\fBDone\fR" 10
+Indicates that the job completed and returned exit status zero.
+.IP "\fBDone\fR(\fIcode\fR)" 10
+Indicates that the job completed normally and that it exited with the
+specified non-zero exit status,
+.IR code ,
+expressed as a decimal number.
+.IP "\fBStopped\fR" 10
+Indicates that the job was suspended by the SIGTSTP signal.
+.IP "\fBStopped\fR\ (\fBSIGTSTP\fR)" 10
+.br
+Indicates that the job was suspended by the SIGTSTP signal.
+.IP "\fBStopped\fR\ (\fBSIGSTOP\fR)" 10
+.br
+Indicates that the job was suspended by the SIGSTOP signal.
+.IP "\fBStopped\fR\ (\fBSIGTTIN\fR)" 10
+.br
+Indicates that the job was suspended by the SIGTTIN signal.
+.IP "\fBStopped\fR\ (\fBSIGTTOU\fR)" 10
+.br
+Indicates that the job was suspended by the SIGTTOU signal.
+.P
+The implementation may substitute the string
+.BR Suspended
+in place of
+.BR Stopped .
+If the job was terminated by a signal, the format of <\fIstate\fP> is
+unspecified, but it shall be visibly distinct from all of the other
+<\fIstate\fP> formats shown here and shall indicate the name or
+description of the signal causing the termination.
+.RE
+.IP "<\fIcommand\fR>" 10
+The associated command that was given to the shell.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mil
+option is specified, a field containing the process group ID shall be
+inserted before the <\fIstate\fP> field. Also, more processes in a
+process group may be output on separate lines, using only the process
+ID and <\fIcommand\fP> fields.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.BR \(mip
+option is the only portable way to find out the process group of a job
+because different implementations have different strategies for
+defining the process group of the job. Usage such as $(\c
+.IR jobs
+.BR \(mip )
+provides a way of referring to the process group of the job in an
+implementation-independent way.
+.P
+The
+.IR jobs
+utility does not work as expected when it is operating in its own
+utility execution environment because that environment has no
+applicable jobs to manipulate. See the APPLICATION USAGE section for
+.IR "\fIbg\fR\^".
+For this reason,
+.IR jobs
+is generally implemented as a shell regular built-in.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Both
+.BR \(dq%%\(dq 
+and
+.BR \(dq%+\(dq 
+are used to refer to the current job. Both forms are of equal
+validity\(emthe
+.BR \(dq%%\(dq 
+mirroring
+.BR \(dq$$\(dq 
+and
+.BR \(dq%+\(dq 
+mirroring the output of
+.IR jobs .
+Both forms reflect historical practice of the KornShell and the C shell
+with job control.
+.P
+The job control features provided by
+.IR bg ,
+.IR fg ,
+and
+.IR jobs
+are based on the KornShell. The standard developers examined the
+characteristics of the C shell versions of these utilities and found
+that differences exist. Despite widespread use of the C shell, the
+KornShell versions were selected for this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 to maintain a degree of
+uniformity with the rest of the KornShell features selected (such as
+the very popular command line editing features).
+.P
+The
+.IR jobs
+utility is not dependent on the job control option, as are the
+seemingly related
+.IR bg
+and
+.IR fg
+utilities because
+.IR jobs
+is useful for examining background jobs, regardless of the condition of
+job control. When the user has invoked a
+.IR set
+.BR +m
+command and job control has been turned off,
+.IR jobs
+can still be used to examine the background jobs associated with that
+current session. Similarly,
+.IR kill
+can then be used to kill background jobs with
+.IR kill
+%<\fIbackground job number\fP>.
+.P
+The output for terminated jobs is left unspecified to accommodate
+various historical systems. The following formats have been witnessed:
+.IP " 1." 4
+.BR Killed (\c
+.IR "signal name" )
+.IP " 2." 4
+.IR "signal name"
+.IP " 3." 4
+.IR "signal name" (\c
+.BR coredump )
+.IP " 4." 4
+.IR "signal description" \(mi
+.BR "core dumped"
+.P
+Most users should be able to understand these formats, although it
+means that applications have trouble parsing them.
+.P
+The calculation of job IDs was not described since this would suggest
+an implementation, which may impose unnecessary restrictions.
+.P
+In an early proposal, a
+.BR \(min
+option was included to ``Display the status of jobs that have changed,
+exited, or stopped since the last status report''. It was removed
+because the shell always writes any changed status of jobs before each
+prompt.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.12" ", " "Shell Execution Environment",
+.IR "\fIbg\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfg\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.204" ", " "Job Control Job ID",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/join.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/join.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a52a155
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/join.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,507 @@
+'\" et
+.TH JOIN "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+join
+\(em relational database operator
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+join \fB[\fR\(mia \fIfile_number\fR|\(miv \fIfile_number\fB] [\fR\(mie \fIstring\fB] [\fR\(mio \fIlist\fB] [\fR\(mit \fIchar\fB]
+    [\fR\(mi1 \fIfield\fB] [\fR\(mi2 \fIfield\fB]\fI file1 file2\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR join
+utility shall perform an equality join on the files
+.IR file1
+and
+.IR file2 .
+The joined files shall be written to the standard output.
+.P
+The join field is a field in each file on which the files are
+compared. The
+.IR join
+utility shall write one line in the output for each pair of lines in
+.IR file1
+and
+.IR file2
+that have identical join fields. The output line by default shall
+consist of the join field, then the remaining fields from
+.IR file1 ,
+then the remaining fields from
+.IR file2 .
+This format can be changed by using the
+.BR \(mio
+option (see below). The
+.BR \(mia
+option can be used to add unmatched lines to the output. The
+.BR \(miv
+option can be used to output only unmatched lines.
+.P
+The files
+.IR file1
+and
+.IR file2
+shall be ordered in the collating sequence of
+.IR sort
+.BR \(mib
+on the fields on which they shall be joined, by default the first in
+each line. All selected output shall be written in the same collating
+sequence.
+.P
+The default input field separators shall be
+<blank>
+characters. In this case, multiple separators shall count as one field
+separator, and leading separators shall be ignored. The default output
+field separator shall be a
+<space>.
+.P
+The field separator and collating sequence can be changed by using the
+.BR \(mit
+option (see below).
+.P
+If the same key appears more than once in either file, all combinations
+of the set of remaining fields in
+.IR file1
+and the set of remaining fields in
+.IR file2
+are output in the order of the lines encountered.
+.P
+If the input files are not in the appropriate collating sequence, the
+results are unspecified.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR join
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mia\ \fIfile_number\fR" 10
+.br
+Produce a line for each unpairable line in file
+.IR file_number ,
+where
+.IR file_number
+is 1 or 2, in addition to the default output. If both
+.BR \(mia 1
+and
+.BR \(mia 2
+are specified, all unpairable lines shall be output.
+.IP "\fB\(mie\ \fIstring\fR" 10
+Replace empty output fields in the list selected by
+.BR \(mio
+with the string
+.IR string .
+.IP "\fB\(mio\ \fIlist\fR" 10
+Construct the output line to comprise the fields specified in
+.IR list ,
+each element of which shall have one of the following two forms:
+.RS 10 
+.IP " 1." 4
+\fIfile_number.field\fR, where
+.IR file_number
+is a file number and
+.IR field
+is a decimal integer field number
+.IP " 2." 4
+0 (zero), representing the join field
+.P
+The elements of
+.IR list
+shall be either
+<comma>-separated
+or
+<blank>-separated,
+as specified in Guideline 8 of the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+The fields specified by
+.IR list
+shall be written for all selected output lines. Fields selected by
+.IR list
+that do not appear in the input shall be treated as empty output
+fields. (See the
+.BR \(mie
+option.) Only specifically requested fields shall be written. The
+application shall ensure that
+.IR list
+is a single command line argument.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mit\ \fIchar\fR" 10
+Use character
+.IR char
+as a separator, for both input and output. Every appearance of
+.IR char
+in a line shall be significant. When this option is specified, the
+collating sequence shall be the same as
+.IR sort
+without the
+.BR \(mib
+option.
+.IP "\fB\(miv\ \fIfile_number\fR" 10
+.br
+Instead of the default output, produce a line only for each unpairable
+line in
+.IR file_number ,
+where
+.IR file_number
+is 1 or 2. If both
+.BR \(miv 1
+and
+.BR \(miv 2
+are specified, all unpairable lines shall be output.
+.IP "\fB\(mi1\ \fIfield\fR" 10
+Join on the
+.IR field th
+field of file 1. Fields are decimal integers starting with 1.
+.IP "\fB\(mi2\ \fIfield\fR" 10
+Join on the
+.IR field th
+field of file 2. Fields are decimal integers starting with 1.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile1\fR,\ \fIfile2\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file to be joined. If either of the
+.IR file1
+or
+.IR file2
+operands is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be used in its place.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used only if the
+.IR file1
+or
+.IR file2
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' .
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files shall be text files.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR join :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale of the collating sequence
+.IR join
+expects to have been used when the input files were sorted.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The
+.IR join
+utility output shall be a concatenation of selected character fields.
+When the
+.BR \(mio
+option is not specified, the output shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s%s%s\en", <\fIjoin field\fR>, <\fIother file1 fields\fR>,
+    <\fIother file2 fields\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the join field is not the first field in a file, the
+<\fIother\ file\ fields\fP> for that file shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<\fIfields preceding join field\fR>, <\fIfields following join field\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+When the
+.BR \(mio
+option is specified, the output format shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIconcatenation of fields\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where the concatenation of fields is described by the
+.BR \(mio
+option, above.
+.P
+For either format, each field (except the last) shall be written with
+its trailing separator character. If the separator is the default (\c
+<blank>
+characters), a single
+<space>
+shall be written after each field (except the last).
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+All input files were output successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Pathnames consisting of numeric digits or of the form
+.IR string.string
+should not be specified directly following the
+.BR \(mio
+list.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The
+.BR \(mio
+0 field essentially selects the union of the join fields. For example,
+given file
+.BR phone :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+!Name           Phone Number
+Don             +1 123-456-7890
+Hal             +1 234-567-8901
+Yasushi         +2 345-678-9012
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and file
+.BR fax :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+!Name           Fax Number
+Don             +1 123-456-7899
+Keith           +1 456-789-0122
+Yasushi         +2 345-678-9011
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+(where the large expanses of white space are meant to each represent a
+single
+<tab>),
+the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+join \(mit "<tab>" \(mia 1 \(mia 2 \(mie '(unknown)' \(mio 0,1.2,2.2 phone fax
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would produce:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+!Name           Phone Number            Fax Number
+Don             +1 123-456-7890         +1 123-456-7899
+Hal             +1 234-567-8901         (unknown)
+Keith           (unknown)               +1 456-789-0122
+Yasushi         +2 345-678-9012         +2 345-678-9011
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Multiple instances of the same key will produce combinatorial results.
+The following:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fa:
+    a x
+    a y
+    a z
+fb:
+    a p
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+will produce:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+a x p
+a y p
+a z p
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+And the following:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fa:
+    a b c
+    a d e
+fb:
+    a w x
+    a y z
+    a o p
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+will produce:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+a b c w x
+a b c y z
+a b c o p
+a d e w x
+a d e y z
+a d e o p
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.BR \(mie
+option is only effective when used with
+.BR \(mio
+because, unless specific fields are identified using
+.BR \(mio ,
+.IR join
+is not aware of what fields might be empty. The exception to this is
+the join field, but identifying an empty join field with the
+.BR \(mie
+string is not historical practice and some scripts might break if this
+were changed.
+.P
+The 0 field in the
+.BR \(mio
+list was adopted from the Tenth Edition version of
+.IR join
+to satisfy international objections that the
+.IR join
+in the base documents does not support the ``full join'' or ``outer
+join'' described in relational database literature. Although it has
+been possible to include a join field in the output (by default, or by
+field number using
+.BR \(mio ),
+the join field could not be included for an unpaired line selected by
+.BR \(mia .
+The
+.BR \(mio
+0 field essentially selects the union of the join fields.
+.P
+This sort of outer join was not possible with the
+.IR join
+commands in the base documents. The
+.BR \(mio
+0 field was chosen because it is an upwards-compatible change for
+applications. An alternative was considered: have the join field
+represent the union of the fields in the files (where they are
+identical for matched lines, and one or both are null for unmatched
+lines). This was not adopted because it would break some historical
+applications.
+.P
+The ability to specify
+.IR file2
+as
+.BR \(mi
+is not historical practice; it was added for completeness.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miv
+option is not historical practice, but was considered necessary because
+it permitted the writing of
+.IR only
+those lines that do not match on the join field, as opposed to the
+.BR \(mia
+option, which prints both lines that do and do not match. This
+additional facility is parallel with the
+.BR \(miv
+option of
+.IR grep .
+.P
+Some historical implementations have been encountered where a blank
+line in one of the input files was considered to be the end of the
+file; the description in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not cite this as an allowable case.
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard allowed
+.BR \(mij ,
+.BR \(mij1 ,
+.BR \(mij2
+options, and a form of the
+.BR \(mio
+option that allowed the
+.IR list
+option-argument to be multiple arguments. These forms are no longer
+specified by POSIX.1\(hy2008 but may be present in some implementations.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIawk\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIcomm\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsort\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIuniq\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/kill.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/kill.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..af6c32b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/kill.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,460 @@
+'\" et
+.TH KILL "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+kill
+\(em terminate or signal processes
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+kill \(mis \fIsignal_name pid\fR...
+.P
+kill \(mil \fB[\fIexit_status\fB]\fR
+.P
+kill \fB[\fR\(mi\fIsignal_name\fB] \fIpid\fR...
+.P
+kill \fB[\fR\(mi\fIsignal_number\fB] \fIpid\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR kill
+utility shall send a signal to the process or processes specified by
+each
+.IR pid
+operand.
+.P
+For each
+.IR pid
+operand, the
+.IR kill
+utility shall perform actions equivalent to the
+\fIkill\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 called with the following arguments:
+.IP " *" 4
+The value of the
+.IR pid
+operand shall be used as the
+.IR pid
+argument.
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+.IR sig
+argument is the value specified by the
+.BR \(mis
+option,
+.BR \(mi \c
+.IR signal_number
+option, or the
+.BR \(mi \c
+.IR signal_name
+option, or by SIGTERM, if none of these options is specified.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR kill
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except that in the last two SYNOPSIS forms, the
+.BR \(mi \c
+.IR signal_number
+and
+.BR \(mi \c
+.IR signal_name
+options are usually more than a single character.
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mil\fP" 10
+(The letter ell.) Write all values of
+.IR signal_name
+supported by the implementation, if no operand is given. If an
+.IR exit_status
+operand is given and it is a value of the
+.BR '?' 
+shell special parameter (see
+.IR "Section 2.5.2" ", " "Special Parameters"
+and
+.IR wait )
+corresponding to a process that was terminated by a signal, the
+.IR signal_name
+corresponding to the signal that terminated the process shall be
+written. If an
+.IR exit_status
+operand is given and it is the unsigned decimal integer value of a
+signal number, the
+.IR signal_name
+(the symbolic constant name without the
+.BR SIG
+prefix defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008) corresponding to that signal shall be
+written. Otherwise, the results are unspecified.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\ \fIsignal_name\fR" 10
+.br
+Specify the signal to send, using one of the symbolic names defined in
+the
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header. Values of
+.IR signal_name
+shall be recognized in a case-independent fashion, without the
+.BR SIG
+prefix. In addition, the symbolic name 0 shall be recognized,
+representing the signal value zero. The corresponding signal shall be
+sent instead of SIGTERM.
+.IP "\fB\(mi\fIsignal_name\fR" 10
+.br
+Equivalent to
+.BR \(mis
+.IR signal_name .
+.IP "\fB\(mi\fIsignal_number\fR" 10
+.br
+Specify a non-negative decimal integer,
+.IR signal_number ,
+representing the signal to be used instead of SIGTERM, as the
+.IR sig
+argument in the effective call to
+\fIkill\fR().
+The correspondence between integer values and the
+.IR sig
+value used is shown in the following list.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The effects of specifying any
+.IR signal_number
+other than those listed below are undefined.
+.IP 0 6
+0
+.IP 1 6
+SIGHUP
+.IP 2 6
+SIGINT
+.IP 3 6
+SIGQUIT
+.IP 6 6
+SIGABRT
+.IP 9 6
+SIGKILL
+.IP 14 6
+SIGALRM
+.IP 15 6
+SIGTERM
+.P
+If the first argument is a negative integer, it shall be interpreted as a
+.BR \(mi \c
+.IR signal_number
+option, not as a negative
+.IR pid
+operand specifying a process group.
+.RE
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIpid\fR" 10
+One of the following:
+.RS 10 
+.IP " 1." 4
+A decimal integer specifying a process or process group to be signaled.
+The process or processes selected by positive, negative, and zero
+values of the
+.IR pid
+operand shall be as described for the
+\fIkill\fR()
+function. If process number 0 is specified, all processes in the
+current process group shall be signaled. For the effects of negative
+.IR pid
+numbers, see the
+\fIkill\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. If the first
+.IR pid
+operand is negative, it should be preceded by
+.BR \(dq\(mi\|\(mi\(dq 
+to keep it from being interpreted as an option.
+.IP " 2." 4
+A job control job ID (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.204" ", " "Job Control Job ID")
+that identifies a background process group to be signaled. The job
+control job ID notation is applicable only for invocations of
+.IR kill
+in the current shell execution environment; see
+.IR "Section 2.12" ", " "Shell Execution Environment".
+.RE
+.IP "\fIexit_status\fR" 10
+A decimal integer specifying a signal number or the exit status of a
+process terminated by a signal.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR kill :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+When the
+.BR \(mil
+option is not specified, the standard output shall not be used.
+.P
+When the
+.BR \(mil
+option is specified, the symbolic name of each signal shall be written
+in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s%c", <\fIsignal_name\fR>, <\fIseparator\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where the <\fIsignal_name\fP> is in uppercase, without the
+.BR SIG
+prefix, and the <\fIseparator\fP> shall be either a
+<newline>
+or a
+<space>.
+For the last signal written, <\fIseparator\fP> shall be a
+<newline>.
+.P
+When both the
+.BR \(mil
+option and
+.IR exit_status
+operand are specified, the symbolic name of the corresponding signal
+shall be written in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIsignal_name\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+At least one matching process was found for each
+.IR pid
+operand, and the specified signal was successfully processed for at
+least one matching process.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Process numbers can be found by using
+.IR ps .
+.P
+The job control job ID notation is not required to work as expected
+when
+.IR kill
+is operating in its own utility execution environment. In either of
+the following examples:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+nohup kill %1 &
+system("kill %1");
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+the
+.IR kill
+operates in a different environment and does not share the shell's
+understanding of job numbers.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Any of the commands:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+kill \(mi9 100 \(mi165
+kill \(mis kill 100 \(mi165
+kill \(mis KILL 100 \(mi165
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+sends the SIGKILL signal to the process whose process ID is 100 and to
+all processes whose process group ID is 165, assuming the sending
+process has permission to send that signal to the specified processes,
+and that they exist.
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 and this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 do not require specific signal numbers for any
+.IR signal_names .
+Even the
+.BR \(mi \c
+.IR signal_number
+option provides symbolic (although numeric) names for signals. If a
+process is terminated by a signal, its exit status indicates the signal
+that killed it, but the exact values are not specified. The
+.IR kill
+.BR \(mil
+option, however, can be used to map decimal signal numbers and exit
+status values into the name of a signal. The following example reports
+the status of a terminated job:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+job
+stat=$?
+if [ $stat \(mieq 0 ]
+then
+    echo job completed successfully.
+elif [ $stat \(migt 128 ]
+then
+    echo job terminated by signal SIG$(kill \(mil $stat).
+else
+    echo job terminated with error code $stat.
+fi
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+To send the default signal to a process group (say 123), an application
+should use a command similar to one of the following:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+kill \(miTERM \(mi123
+kill \(mi\|\(mi \(mi123
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.BR \(mil
+option originated from the C shell, and is also implemented in the
+KornShell. The C shell output can consist of multiple output lines
+because the signal names do not always fit on a single line on some
+terminal screens. The KornShell output also included the
+implementation-defined signal numbers and was considered by the
+standard developers to be too difficult for scripts to parse
+conveniently. The specified output format is intended not only to
+accommodate the historical C shell output, but also to permit an
+entirely vertical or entirely horizontal listing on systems for which
+this is appropriate.
+.P
+An early proposal invented the name SIGNULL as a
+.IR signal_name
+for signal 0 (used by the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 to test for the existence of a process
+without sending it a signal). Since the
+.IR signal_name
+0 can be used in this case unambiguously, SIGNULL has been removed.
+.P
+An early proposal also required symbolic
+.IR signal_name s
+to be recognized with or without the
+.BR SIG
+prefix. Historical versions of
+.IR kill
+have not written the
+.BR SIG
+prefix for the
+.BR \(mil
+option and have not recognized the
+.BR SIG
+prefix on
+.IR signal_name s.
+Since neither applications portability nor ease-of-use would be improved
+by requiring this extension, it is no longer required.
+.P
+To avoid an ambiguity of an initial negative number argument specifying
+either a signal number or a process group, POSIX.1\(hy2008 mandates that it is
+always considered the former by implementations that support the XSI
+option. It also requires that conforming applications always use the
+.BR \(dq\(mi\|\(mi\(dq 
+options terminator argument when specifying a process group, unless an
+option is also specified.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mis
+option was added in response to international interest in providing
+some form of
+.IR kill
+that meets the Utility Syntax Guidelines.
+.P
+The job control job ID notation is not required to work as expected
+when
+.IR kill
+is operating in its own utility execution environment. In either of
+the following examples:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+nohup kill %1 &
+system("kill %1");
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+the
+.IR kill
+operates in a different environment and does not understand how the
+shell has managed its job numbers.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language",
+.IR "\fIps\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.204" ", " "Job Control Job ID",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/lex.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/lex.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dc02c3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/lex.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,1374 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LEX "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+lex
+\(em generate programs for lexical tasks (\fBDEVELOPMENT\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+lex \fB[\fR\(mit\fB] [\fR\(min|\(miv\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR lex
+utility shall generate C programs to be used in lexical processing of
+character input, and that can be used as an interface to
+.IR yacc .
+The C programs shall be generated from
+.IR lex
+source code and conform to the ISO\ C standard, without depending on any undefined,
+unspecified, or implementation-defined behavior, except in cases where
+the code is copied directly from the supplied source, or in cases that
+are documented by the implementation. Usually, the
+.IR lex
+utility shall write the program it generates to the file
+.BR lex.yy.c ;
+the state of this file is unspecified if
+.IR lex
+exits with a non-zero exit status. See the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION
+section for a complete description of the
+.IR lex
+input language.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR lex
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except for Guideline 9.
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(min\fP" 10
+Suppress the summary of statistics usually written with the
+.BR \(miv
+option. If no table sizes are specified in the
+.IR lex
+source code and the
+.BR \(miv
+option is not specified, then
+.BR \(min
+is implied.
+.IP "\fB\(mit\fP" 10
+Write the resulting program to standard output instead of
+.BR lex.yy.c .
+.IP "\fB\(miv\fP" 10
+Write a summary of
+.IR lex
+statistics to the standard output. (See the discussion of
+.IR lex
+table sizes in
+.IR "Definitions in lex".)
+If the
+.BR \(mit
+option is specified and
+.BR \(min
+is not specified, this report shall be written to standard error. If
+table sizes are specified in the
+.IR lex
+source code, and if the
+.BR \(min
+option is not specified, the
+.BR \(miv
+option may be enabled.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of an input file. If more than one such
+.IR file
+is specified, all files shall be concatenated to produce a single
+.IR lex
+program. If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, or if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be used.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used if no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, or if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' .
+See INPUT FILES.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files shall be text files containing
+.IR lex
+source code, as described in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR lex :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, equivalence classes,
+and multi-character collating elements within regular expressions. If
+this variable is not set to the POSIX locale, the results are
+unspecified.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files), and the behavior
+of character classes within regular expressions. If this variable is
+not set to the POSIX locale, the results are unspecified.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+If the
+.BR \(mit
+option is specified, the text file of C source code output of
+.IR lex
+shall be written to standard output.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mit
+option is not specified:
+.IP " *" 4
+Implementation-defined informational, error, and warning messages
+concerning the contents of
+.IR lex
+source code input shall be written to either the standard output or
+standard error.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the
+.BR \(miv
+option is specified and the
+.BR \(min
+option is not specified,
+.IR lex
+statistics shall also be written to either the standard output or
+standard error, in an implementation-defined format. These
+statistics may also be generated if table sizes are specified with a
+.BR '%' 
+operator in the
+.IR Definitions
+section, as long as the
+.BR \(min
+option is not specified.
+.SH STDERR
+If the
+.BR \(mit
+option is specified, implementation-defined informational, error, and
+warning messages concerning the contents of
+.IR lex
+source code input shall be written to the standard error.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mit
+option is not specified:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Implementation-defined informational, error, and warning messages
+concerning the contents of
+.IR lex
+source code input shall be written to either the standard output or
+standard error.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the
+.BR \(miv
+option is specified and the
+.BR \(min
+option is not specified,
+.IR lex
+statistics shall also be written to either the standard output or
+standard error, in an implementation-defined format. These
+statistics may also be generated if table sizes are specified with a
+.BR '%' 
+operator in the
+.IR Definitions
+section, as long as the
+.BR \(min
+option is not specified.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+A text file containing C source code shall be written to
+.BR lex.yy.c ,
+or to the standard output if the
+.BR \(mit
+option is present.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+Each input file shall contain
+.IR lex
+source code, which is a table of regular expressions with corresponding
+actions in the form of C program fragments.
+.P
+When
+.BR lex.yy.c
+is compiled and linked with the
+.IR lex
+library (using the
+.BR "\(mil\ l"
+operand with
+.IR c99 ),
+the resulting program shall read character input from the standard
+input and shall partition it into strings that match the given
+expressions.
+.br
+.P
+When an expression is matched, these actions shall occur:
+.IP " *" 4
+The input string that was matched shall be left in
+.IR yytext
+as a null-terminated string;
+.IR yytext
+shall either be an external character array or a pointer to a
+character string. As explained in
+.IR "Definitions in lex",
+the type can be explicitly selected using the
+.BR %array
+or
+.BR %pointer
+declarations, but the default is implementation-defined.
+.IP " *" 4
+The external
+.BR int
+.IR yyleng
+shall be set to the length of the matching string.
+.IP " *" 4
+The expression's corresponding program fragment, or action, shall be
+executed.
+.P
+During pattern matching,
+.IR lex
+shall search the set of patterns for the single longest possible
+match. Among rules that match the same number of characters, the rule
+given first shall be chosen.
+.P
+The general format of
+.IR lex
+source shall be:
+.sp
+.RS
+.IR Definitions
+.BR %%
+.IR Rules
+.BR %%
+.IR User Subroutines
+.RE
+.P
+The first
+.BR \(dq%%\(dq 
+is required to mark the beginning of the rules (regular expressions and
+actions); the second
+.BR \(dq%%\(dq 
+is required only if user subroutines follow.
+.P
+Any line in the
+.IR Definitions
+section beginning with a
+<blank>
+shall be assumed to be a C program fragment and shall be copied to the
+external definition area of the
+.BR lex.yy.c
+file. Similarly, anything in the
+.IR Definitions
+section included between delimiter lines containing only
+.BR \(dq%{\(dq 
+and
+.BR \(dq%}\(dq 
+shall also be copied unchanged to the external definition area of the
+.BR lex.yy.c
+file.
+.P
+Any such input (beginning with a
+<blank>
+or within
+.BR \(dq%{\(dq 
+and
+.BR \(dq%}\(dq 
+delimiter lines) appearing at the beginning of the
+.IR Rules
+section before any rules are specified shall be written to
+.BR lex.yy.c
+after the declarations of variables for the
+\fIyylex\fR()
+function and before the first line of code in
+\fIyylex\fR().
+Thus, user variables local to
+\fIyylex\fR()
+can be declared here, as well as application code to execute upon entry
+to
+\fIyylex\fR().
+.P
+The action taken by
+.IR lex
+when encountering any input beginning with a
+<blank>
+or within
+.BR \(dq%{\(dq 
+and
+.BR \(dq%}\(dq 
+delimiter lines appearing in the
+.IR Rules
+section but coming after one or more rules is undefined. The presence
+of such input may result in an erroneous definition of the
+\fIyylex\fR()
+function.
+.P
+C-language code in the input shall not contain C-language trigraphs.
+The C-language code within
+.BR \(dq%{\(dq 
+and
+.BR \(dq%}\(dq 
+delimiter lines shall not contain any lines consisting only of
+.BR \(dq%}\(dq ,
+or only of
+.BR \(dq%%\(dq .
+.SS "Definitions in lex"
+.P
+.IR Definitions
+appear before the first
+.BR \(dq%%\(dq 
+delimiter. Any line in this section not contained between
+.BR \(dq%{\(dq 
+and
+.BR \(dq%}\(dq 
+lines and not beginning with a
+<blank>
+shall be assumed to define a
+.IR lex
+substitution string. The format of these lines shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIname substitute\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If a
+.IR name
+does not meet the requirements for identifiers in the ISO\ C standard, the result
+is undefined. The string
+.IR substitute
+shall replace the string {\c
+.IR name }
+when it is used in a rule. The
+.IR name
+string shall be recognized in this context only when the braces are
+provided and when it does not appear within a bracket expression or
+within double-quotes.
+.P
+In the
+.IR Definitions
+section, any line beginning with a
+<percent-sign>
+(\c
+.BR '%' )
+character and followed by an alphanumeric word beginning with either
+.BR 's' 
+or
+.BR 'S' 
+shall define a set of start conditions. Any line beginning with a
+.BR '%' 
+followed by a word beginning with either
+.BR 'x' 
+or
+.BR 'X' 
+shall define a set of exclusive start conditions. When the generated
+scanner is in a
+.BR %s
+state, patterns with no state specified shall be also active; in a
+.BR %x
+state, such patterns shall not be active. The rest of the line, after
+the first word, shall be considered to be one or more
+<blank>-separated
+names of start conditions. Start condition names shall be constructed
+in the same way as definition names. Start conditions can be used to
+restrict the matching of regular expressions to one or more states as
+described in
+.IR "Regular Expressions in lex".
+.P
+Implementations shall accept either of the following two
+mutually-exclusive declarations in the
+.IR Definitions
+section:
+.IP "\fB%array\fR" 10
+Declare the type of
+.IR yytext
+to be a null-terminated character array.
+.IP "\fB%pointer\fR" 10
+Declare the type of
+.IR yytext
+to be a pointer to a null-terminated character string.
+.P
+The default type of
+.IR yytext
+is implementation-defined. If an application refers to
+.IR yytext
+outside of the scanner source file (that is, via an
+.BR extern ),
+the application shall include the appropriate
+.BR %array
+or
+.BR %pointer
+declaration in the scanner source file.
+.P
+Implementations shall accept declarations in the
+.IR Definitions
+section for setting certain internal table sizes. The declarations are
+shown in the following table.
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable: Table Size Declarations in \fIlex\fP\fR
+.TS
+center tab(!) box;
+cB | cB | cB
+l | l | n.
+Declaration!Description!Minimum Value
+_
+%\fBp \fIn\fR!Number of positions!2\|500
+%\fBn \fIn\fR!Number of states!500
+%\fBa \fIn\fR!Number of transitions!2\|000
+%\fBe \fIn\fR!Number of parse tree nodes!1\|000
+%\fBk \fIn\fR!Number of packed character classes!1\|000
+%\fBo \fIn\fR!Size of the output array!3\|000
+.TE
+.P
+In the table,
+.IR n
+represents a positive decimal integer, preceded by one or more
+<blank>
+characters. The exact meaning of these table size numbers is
+implementation-defined. The implementation shall document how these
+numbers affect the
+.IR lex
+utility and how they are related to any output that may be generated by
+the implementation should limitations be encountered during the
+execution of
+.IR lex .
+It shall be possible to determine from this output which of the table
+size values needs to be modified to permit
+.IR lex
+to successfully generate tables for the input language. The values in
+the column Minimum Value represent the lowest values conforming
+implementations shall provide.
+.SS "Rules in lex"
+.P
+The rules in
+.IR lex
+source files are a table in which the left column contains regular
+expressions and the right column contains actions (C program fragments)
+to be executed when the expressions are recognized.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIERE action
+ERE action\fP
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The extended regular expression (ERE) portion of a row shall be
+separated from
+.IR action
+by one or more
+<blank>
+characters. A regular expression containing
+<blank>
+characters shall be recognized under one of the following conditions:
+.IP " *" 4
+The entire expression appears within double-quotes.
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+<blank>
+characters appear within double-quotes or square brackets.
+.IP " *" 4
+Each
+<blank>
+is preceded by a
+<backslash>
+character.
+.SS "User Subroutines in lex"
+.P
+Anything in the user subroutines section shall be copied to
+.BR lex.yy.c
+following
+\fIyylex\fR().
+.SS "Regular Expressions in lex"
+.P
+The
+.IR lex
+utility shall support the set of extended regular expressions (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 9.4" ", " "Extended Regular Expressions"),
+with the following additions and exceptions to the syntax:
+.IP "\fR\&\(dq...\&\(dq\fR" 10
+Any string enclosed in double-quotes shall represent the characters
+within the double-quotes as themselves, except that
+<backslash>-escapes
+(which appear in the following table) shall be recognized. Any
+<backslash>-escape
+sequence shall be terminated by the closing quote. For example,
+.BR \(dq\e01\(dq \c
+.BR \(dq1\(dq 
+represents a single string: the octal value 1 followed by the
+character
+.BR '1' .
+.IP "<\fIstate\fR>\fIr\fR,\ <\fIstate1,state2,\fR.\|.\|.>\fIr\fR" 10
+.br
+The regular expression
+.IR r
+shall be matched only when the program is in one of the start
+conditions indicated by
+.IR state ,
+.IR state1 ,
+and so on; see
+.IR "Actions in lex".
+(As an exception to the typographical conventions of the rest of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+in this case <\fIstate\fP> does not represent a metavariable, but the
+literal angle-bracket characters surrounding a symbol.) The start
+condition shall be recognized as such only at the beginning of a
+regular expression.
+.IP "\fIr\fP/\fIx\fP" 10
+The regular expression
+.IR r
+shall be matched only if it is followed by an occurrence of regular
+expression
+.IR x
+(\c
+.IR x
+is the instance of trailing context, further defined below). The token
+returned in
+.IR yytext
+shall only match
+.IR r .
+If the trailing portion of
+.IR r
+matches the beginning of
+.IR x ,
+the result is unspecified. The
+.IR r
+expression cannot include further trailing context or the
+.BR '$' 
+(match-end-of-line) operator;
+.IR x
+cannot include the
+.BR '^' 
+(match-beginning-of-line) operator, nor trailing context, nor the
+.BR '$' 
+operator. That is, only one occurrence of trailing context is allowed
+in a
+.IR lex
+regular expression, and the
+.BR '^' 
+operator only can be used at the beginning of such an expression.
+.IP "{\fIname\fR}" 10
+When
+.IR name
+is one of the substitution symbols from the
+.IR Definitions
+section, the string, including the enclosing braces, shall be replaced
+by the
+.IR substitute
+value. The
+.IR substitute
+value shall be treated in the extended regular expression as if it were
+enclosed in parentheses. No substitution shall occur if {\c
+.IR name }
+occurs within a bracket expression or within double-quotes.
+.P
+Within an ERE, a
+<backslash>
+character shall be considered to begin an escape sequence as specified
+in the table in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 5" ", " "File Format Notation"
+(\c
+.BR '\e\e' ,
+.BR '\ea' ,
+.BR '\eb' ,
+.BR '\ef' ,
+.BR '\en' ,
+.BR '\er' ,
+.BR '\et' ,
+.BR '\ev' ).
+In addition, the escape sequences in the following table shall be
+recognized.
+.P
+A literal
+<newline>
+cannot occur within an ERE; the escape sequence
+.BR '\en' 
+can be used to represent a
+<newline>.
+A
+<newline>
+shall not be matched by a period operator.
+.br
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable: Escape Sequences in \fIlex\fP\fR
+.ad l
+.TS
+center tab(@) box;
+cB | cB | cB
+cB | cB | cB
+lf5 | lw(2.4i) | lw(2.4i).
+Escape
+Sequence@Description@Meaning
+_
+\e\fIdigits\fP@T{
+A
+<backslash>
+character followed by the longest sequence of one, two, or three
+octal-digit characters (01234567). If all of the digits are 0 (that is,
+representation of the NUL character), the behavior is undefined.
+T}@T{
+The character whose encoding is represented by the one, two, or
+three-digit octal integer. Multi-byte characters require
+multiple, concatenated escape sequences of this type, including the
+leading
+<backslash>
+for each byte.
+T}
+_
+\ex\fIdigits\fP@T{
+A
+<backslash>
+character followed by the longest sequence of hexadecimal-digit
+characters (01234567abcdefABCDEF). If all of the digits are 0 (that is,
+representation of the NUL character), the behavior is undefined.
+T}@T{
+The character whose encoding is represented by the hexadecimal
+integer.
+T}
+_
+\ec@T{
+A
+<backslash>
+character followed by any character not described in this
+table or in the table in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 5" ", " "File Format Notation"
+(\c
+.BR '\e\e' ,
+.BR '\ea' ,
+.BR '\eb' ,
+.BR '\ef' ,
+.BR '\en' ,
+.BR '\er' ,
+.BR '\et' ,
+.BR '\ev' ).
+T}@T{
+The character
+.BR 'c' ,
+unchanged.
+T}
+.TE
+.ad b
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+If a
+.BR '\ex' 
+sequence needs to be immediately followed by a hexadecimal digit
+character, a sequence such as
+.BR \(dq\ex1\(dq \c
+.BR \(dq1\(dq 
+can be used, which represents a character containing the value 1,
+followed by the character
+.BR '1' .
+.P
+.P
+The order of precedence given to extended regular expressions for
+.IR lex
+differs from that specified in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 9.4" ", " "Extended Regular Expressions".
+The order of precedence for
+.IR lex
+shall be as shown in the following table, from high to low.
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+The escaped characters entry is not meant to imply that these are
+operators, but they are included in the table to show their
+relationships to the true operators. The start condition, trailing
+context, and anchoring notations have been omitted from the table
+because of the placement restrictions described in this section; they
+can only appear at the beginning or ending of an ERE.
+.P
+.br
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable: ERE Precedence in \fIlex\fP\fR
+.TS
+center tab(@) box;
+cB | cB
+lf2 | lf5.
+Extended Regular Expression@Precedence
+_
+collation-related bracket symbols@[= =]  [: :]  [. .]
+escaped characters@\e<\fIspecial character\fP>
+bracket expression@[ ]
+quoting@"..."
+grouping@( )
+definition@{\fIname\fP}
+single-character RE duplication@* + ?
+concatenation
+interval expression@{m,n}
+alternation@|
+.TE
+.P
+The ERE anchoring operators
+.BR '^' 
+and
+.BR '$' 
+do not appear in the table. With
+.IR lex
+regular expressions, these operators are restricted in their use: the
+.BR '^' 
+operator can only be used at the beginning of an entire regular
+expression, and the
+.BR '$' 
+operator only at the end. The operators apply to the entire regular
+expression. Thus, for example, the pattern
+.BR \(dq(^abc)|(def$)\(dq 
+is undefined; it can instead be written as two separate rules, one with
+the regular expression
+.BR \(dq^abc\(dq 
+and one with
+.BR \(dqdef$\(dq ,
+which share a common action via the special
+.BR '|' 
+action (see below). If the pattern were written
+.BR \(dq^abc|def$\(dq ,
+it would match either
+.BR \(dqabc\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dqdef\(dq 
+on a line by itself.
+.P
+Unlike the general ERE rules, embedded anchoring is not allowed by most
+historical
+.IR lex
+implementations. An example of embedded anchoring would be for
+patterns such as
+.BR \(dq(^|\ )foo(\ |$)\(dq 
+to match
+.BR \(dqfoo\(dq 
+when it exists as a complete word. This functionality can be obtained
+using existing
+.IR lex
+features:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+^foo/[ \en]      |
+" foo"/[ \en]    /* Found foo as a separate word. */
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Note also that
+.BR '$' 
+is a form of trailing context (it is equivalent to
+.BR \(dq/\en\(dq )
+and as such cannot be used with regular expressions containing another
+instance of the operator (see the preceding discussion of trailing
+context).
+.P
+The additional regular expressions trailing-context operator
+.BR '/' 
+can be used as an ordinary character if presented within double-quotes,
+.BR \(dq/\(dq ;
+preceded by a
+<backslash>,
+.BR \(dq\e/\(dq ;
+or within a bracket expression,
+.BR \(dq[/]\(dq .
+The start-condition
+.BR '<' 
+and
+.BR '>' 
+operators shall be special only in a start condition at the beginning
+of a regular expression; elsewhere in the regular expression they shall
+be treated as ordinary characters.
+.SS "Actions in lex"
+.P
+The action to be taken when an ERE is matched can be a C program
+fragment or the special actions described below; the program fragment
+can contain one or more C statements, and can also include special
+actions. The empty C statement
+.BR ';' 
+shall be a valid action; any string in the
+.BR lex.yy.c
+input that matches the pattern portion of such a rule is effectively
+ignored or skipped. However, the absence of an action shall not be
+valid, and the action
+.IR lex
+takes in such a condition is undefined.
+.P
+The specification for an action, including C statements and special
+actions, can extend across several lines if enclosed in braces:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIERE\fP <\fIone or more blanks\fR> { \fIprogram statement
+                           program statement\fP }
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The program statements shall not contain unbalanced curly brace
+preprocessing tokens.
+.P
+The default action when a string in the input to a
+.BR lex.yy.c
+program is not matched by any expression shall be to copy the string to
+the output. Because the default behavior of a program generated by
+.IR lex
+is to read the input and copy it to the output, a minimal
+.IR lex
+source program that has just
+.BR \(dq%%\(dq 
+shall generate a C program that simply copies the input to the output
+unchanged.
+.P
+Four special actions shall be available:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+|   ECHO;   REJECT;   BEGIN
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.IP "\fR|\fR" 10
+The action
+.BR '|' 
+means that the action for the next rule is the action for this rule.
+Unlike the other three actions,
+.BR '|' 
+cannot be enclosed in braces or be
+<semicolon>-terminated;
+the application shall ensure that it is specified alone, with no other
+actions.
+.IP "\fBECHO;\fR" 10
+Write the contents of the string
+.IR yytext
+on the output.
+.IP "\fBREJECT;\fR" 10
+Usually only a single expression is matched by a given string in the
+input.
+.BR REJECT
+means ``continue to the next expression that matches the current
+input'', and shall cause whatever rule was the second choice after the
+current rule to be executed for the same input. Thus, multiple rules
+can be matched and executed for one input string or overlapping input
+strings. For example, given the regular expressions
+.BR \(dqxyz\(dq 
+and
+.BR \(dqxy\(dq 
+and the input
+.BR \(dqxyz\(dq ,
+usually only the regular expression
+.BR \(dqxyz\(dq 
+would match. The next attempted match would start after
+.BR z.
+If the last action in the
+.BR \(dqxyz\(dq 
+rule is
+.BR REJECT ,
+both this rule and the
+.BR \(dqxy\(dq 
+rule would be executed. The
+.BR REJECT
+action may be implemented in such a fashion that flow of control does
+not continue after it, as if it were equivalent to a
+.BR goto
+to another part of
+\fIyylex\fR().
+The use of
+.BR REJECT
+may result in somewhat larger and slower scanners.
+.IP "\fBBEGIN\fR" 10
+The action:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+BEGIN \fInewstate\fP;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+switches the state (start condition) to
+.IR newstate .
+If the string
+.IR newstate
+has not been declared previously as a start condition in the
+.IR Definitions
+section, the results are unspecified. The initial state is indicated
+by the digit
+.BR '0' 
+or the token
+.BR INITIAL .
+.RE
+.P
+The functions or macros described below are accessible to user code
+included in the
+.IR lex
+input. It is unspecified whether they appear in the C code output of
+.IR lex ,
+or are accessible only through the
+.BR "\(mil\ l"
+operand to
+.IR c99
+(the
+.IR lex
+library).
+.IP "\fBint\ \fIyylex\fR(\fBvoid\fR)" 6
+.br
+Performs lexical analysis on the input; this is the primary function
+generated by the
+.IR lex
+utility. The function shall return zero when the end of input is
+reached; otherwise, it shall return non-zero values (tokens) determined
+by the actions that are selected.
+.IP "\fBint\ \fIyymore\fR(\fBvoid\fR)" 6
+.br
+When called, indicates that when the next input string is recognized,
+it is to be appended to the current value of
+.IR yytext
+rather than replacing it; the value in
+.IR yyleng
+shall be adjusted accordingly.
+.IP "\fBint\ \fIyyless\fR(\fBint\ \fIn\fR)" 6
+.br
+Retains
+.IR n
+initial characters in
+.IR yytext ,
+NUL-terminated, and treats the remaining characters as if they had not
+been read; the value in
+.IR yyleng
+shall be adjusted accordingly.
+.IP "\fBint\ \fIinput\fR(\fBvoid\fR)" 6
+.br
+Returns the next character from the input, or zero on end-of-file. It
+shall obtain input from the stream pointer
+.IR yyin ,
+although possibly via an intermediate buffer. Thus, once scanning has
+begun, the effect of altering the value of
+.IR yyin
+is undefined. The character read shall be removed from the input
+stream of the scanner without any processing by the scanner.
+.IP "\fBint\ \fIunput\fR(\fBint\ \fIc\fR)" 6
+.br
+Returns the character
+.BR 'c' 
+to the input;
+.IR yytext
+and
+.IR yyleng
+are undefined until the next expression is matched. The result of
+using
+\fIunput\fR()
+for more characters than have been input is unspecified.
+.P
+The following functions shall appear only in the
+.IR lex
+library accessible through the
+.BR "\(mil\ l"
+operand; they can therefore be redefined by a conforming application:
+.IP "\fBint\ \fIyywrap\fR(\fBvoid\fR)" 6
+.br
+Called by
+\fIyylex\fR()
+at end-of-file; the default
+\fIyywrap\fR()
+shall always return 1. If the application requires
+\fIyylex\fR()
+to continue processing with another source of input, then the
+application can include a function
+\fIyywrap\fR(),
+which associates another file with the external variable
+.BR "FILE *"
+.IR yyin
+and shall return a value of zero.
+.IP "\fBint\ \fImain\fR(\fBint\ \fIargc\fR, \fBchar *\fIargv\fR[\|])" 6
+.br
+Calls
+\fIyylex\fR()
+to perform lexical analysis, then exits. The user code can contain
+\fImain\fR()
+to perform application-specific operations, calling
+\fIyylex\fR()
+as applicable.
+.P
+Except for
+\fIinput\fR(),
+\fIunput\fR(),
+and
+\fImain\fR(),
+all external and static names generated by
+.IR lex
+shall begin with the prefix
+.BR yy
+or
+.BR YY .
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Conforming applications are warned that in the
+.IR Rules
+section, an ERE without an action is not acceptable, but need not be
+detected as erroneous by
+.IR lex .
+This may result in compilation or runtime errors.
+.P
+The purpose of
+\fIinput\fR()
+is to take characters off the input stream and discard them as far as
+the lexical analysis is concerned. A common use is to discard the body
+of a comment once the beginning of a comment is recognized.
+.P
+The
+.IR lex
+utility is not fully internationalized in its treatment of regular
+expressions in the
+.IR lex
+source code or generated lexical analyzer. It would seem desirable to
+have the lexical analyzer interpret the regular expressions given in
+the
+.IR lex
+source according to the environment specified when the lexical analyzer
+is executed, but this is not possible with the current
+.IR lex
+technology. Furthermore, the very nature of the lexical analyzers
+produced by
+.IR lex
+must be closely tied to the lexical requirements of the input language
+being described, which is frequently locale-specific anyway. (For
+example, writing an analyzer that is used for French text is not
+automatically useful for processing other languages.)
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following is an example of a
+.IR lex
+program that implements a rudimentary scanner for a Pascal-like
+syntax:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+%{
+/* Need this for the call to atof() below. */
+#include <math.h>
+/* Need this for printf(), fopen(), and stdin below. */
+#include <stdio.h>
+%}
+.P
+DIGIT    [0\(mi9]
+ID       [a\(miz][a\(miz0\(mi9]*
+.P
+%%
+.P
+{DIGIT}+ {
+    printf("An integer: %s (%d)\en", yytext,
+        atoi(yytext));
+    }
+.P
+{DIGIT}+"."{DIGIT}*        {
+    printf("A float: %s (%g)\en", yytext,
+        atof(yytext));
+    }
+.P
+if|then|begin|end|procedure|function        {
+    printf("A keyword: %s\en", yytext);
+    }
+.P
+{ID}    printf("An identifier: %s\en", yytext);
+.P
+"+"|"\(mi"|"*"|"/"        printf("An operator: %s\en", yytext);
+.P
+"{"[^}\en]*"}"    /* Eat up one-line comments. */
+.P
+[ \et\en]+        /* Eat up white space. */
+.P
+\&.  printf("Unrecognized character: %s\en", yytext);
+.P
+%%
+.P
+int main(int argc, char *argv[])
+{
+    ++argv, \(mi\|\(miargc;  /* Skip over program name. */
+    if (argc > 0)
+        yyin = fopen(argv[0], "r");
+    else
+        yyin = stdin;
+.P
+    yylex();
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+Even though the
+.BR \(mic
+option and references to the C language are retained in this
+description,
+.IR lex
+may be generalized to other languages, as was done at one time for EFL,
+the Extended FORTRAN Language. Since the
+.IR lex
+input specification is essentially language-independent, versions of
+this utility could be written to produce Ada, Modula-2, or Pascal code,
+and there are known historical implementations that do so.
+.P
+The current description of
+.IR lex
+bypasses the issue of dealing with internationalized EREs in the
+.IR lex
+source code or generated lexical analyzer. If it follows the model used
+by
+.IR awk
+(the source code is assumed to be presented in the POSIX locale, but
+input and output are in the locale specified by the environment
+variables), then the tables in the lexical analyzer produced by
+.IR lex
+would interpret EREs specified in the
+.IR lex
+source in terms of the environment variables specified when
+.IR lex
+was executed. The desired effect would be to have the lexical analyzer
+interpret the EREs given in the
+.IR lex
+source according to the environment specified when the lexical analyzer
+is executed, but this is not possible with the current
+.IR lex
+technology.
+.P
+The description of octal and hexadecimal-digit escape sequences agrees
+with the ISO\ C standard use of escape sequences.
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard allowed for implementations with
+bytes other than eight bits, but this has been modified in this
+version.
+.P
+There is no detailed output format specification. The observed behavior
+of
+.IR lex
+under four different historical implementations was that none of these
+implementations consistently reported the line numbers for error and
+warning messages. Furthermore, there was a desire that
+.IR lex
+be allowed to output additional diagnostic messages. Leaving message
+formats unspecified avoids these formatting questions and problems with
+internationalization.
+.P
+Although the
+.BR %x
+specifier for
+.IR exclusive
+start conditions is not historical practice, it is believed to be a
+minor change to historical implementations and greatly enhances the
+usability of
+.IR lex
+programs since it permits an application to obtain the expected
+functionality with fewer statements.
+.P
+The
+.BR %array
+and
+.BR %pointer
+declarations were added as a compromise between historical systems.
+The System V-based
+.IR lex
+copies the matched text to a
+.IR yytext
+array. The
+.IR flex
+program, supported in BSD and GNU systems, uses a pointer. In the
+latter case, significant performance improvements are available for
+some scanners. Most historical programs should require no change in
+porting from one system to another because the string being referenced
+is null-terminated in both cases. (The method used by
+.IR flex
+in its case is to null-terminate the token in place by remembering the
+character that used to come right after the token and replacing it
+before continuing on to the next scan.) Multi-file programs with
+external references to
+.IR yytext
+outside the scanner source file should continue to operate on their
+historical systems, but would require one of the new declarations to be
+considered strictly portable.
+.P
+The description of EREs avoids unnecessary duplication of ERE details
+because their meanings within a
+.IR lex
+ERE are the same as that for the ERE in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+The reason for the undefined condition associated with text beginning
+with a
+<blank>
+or within
+.BR \(dq%{\(dq 
+and
+.BR \(dq%}\(dq 
+delimiter lines appearing in the
+.IR Rules
+section is historical practice. Both the BSD and System V
+.IR lex
+copy the indented (or enclosed) input in the
+.IR Rules
+section (except at the beginning) to unreachable areas of the
+\fIyylex\fR()
+function (the code is written directly after a
+.IR break
+statement). In some cases, the System V
+.IR lex
+generates an error message or a syntax error, depending on the form of
+indented input.
+.P
+The intention in breaking the list of functions into those that may
+appear in
+.BR lex.yy.c
+\fIversus\fR those that only appear in
+.BR libl.a
+is that only those functions in
+.BR libl.a
+can be reliably redefined by a conforming application.
+.P
+The descriptions of standard output and standard error are somewhat
+complicated because historical
+.IR lex
+implementations chose to issue diagnostic messages to standard output
+(unless
+.BR \(mit
+was given). POSIX.1\(hy2008 allows this behavior, but leaves an opening
+for the more expected behavior of using standard error for diagnostics.
+Also, the System V behavior of writing the statistics when any table
+sizes are given is allowed, while BSD-derived systems can avoid it. The
+programmer can always precisely obtain the desired results by using
+either the
+.BR \(mit
+or
+.BR \(min
+options.
+.P
+The OPERANDS section does not mention the use of
+.BR \(mi
+as a synonym for standard input; not all historical implementations
+support such usage for any of the
+.IR file
+operands.
+.P
+A description of the
+.IR "translation table"
+was deleted from early proposals because of its relatively low usage in
+historical applications.
+.P
+The change to the definition of the
+\fIinput\fR()
+function that allows buffering of input presents the opportunity for
+major performance gains in some applications.
+.P
+The following examples clarify the differences between
+.IR lex
+regular expressions and regular expressions appearing elsewhere in
+\&this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. For regular expressions of the form
+.BR \(dqr/x\(dq ,
+the string matching
+.IR r
+is always returned; confusion may arise when the beginning of
+.IR x
+matches the trailing portion of
+.IR r .
+For example, given the regular expression
+.BR \(dqa*b/cc\(dq 
+and the input
+.BR \(dqaaabcc\(dq ,
+.IR yytext
+would contain the string
+.BR \(dqaaab\(dq 
+on this match. But given the regular expression
+.BR \(dqx*/xy\(dq 
+and the input
+.BR \(dqxxxy\(dq ,
+the token
+.BR xxx ,
+not
+.BR xx ,
+is returned by some implementations because
+.BR xxx
+matches
+.BR \(dqx*\(dq .
+.P
+In the rule
+.BR \(dqab*/bc\(dq ,
+the
+.BR \(dqb*\(dq 
+at the end of
+.IR r
+extends
+.IR r 's
+match into the beginning of the trailing context, so the result is
+unspecified. If this rule were
+.BR \(dqab/bc\(dq ,
+however, the rule matches the text
+.BR \(dqab\(dq 
+when it is followed by the text
+.BR \(dqbc\(dq .
+In this latter case, the matching of
+.IR r
+cannot extend into the beginning of
+.IR x ,
+so the result is specified.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIc99\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIed\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIyacc\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 5" ", " "File Format Notation",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Chapter 9" ", " "Regular Expressions",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/link.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/link.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..12b08e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/link.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,122 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LINK "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+link \(em call
+\fIlink\fR()
+function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+link \fIfile1 file2\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR link
+utility shall perform the function call:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+link(\fIfile1\fR, \fIfile2\fR);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+A user may need appropriate privileges to invoke the
+.IR link
+utility.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile1\fP" 10
+The pathname of an existing file.
+.IP "\fIfile2\fP" 10
+The pathname of the new directory entry to be created.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+Not used.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR link :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+None.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIln\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIunlink\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ln.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ln.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d3e62a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ln.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,469 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LN "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ln
+\(em link files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+ln \fB[\fR\(mifs\fB] [\fR\(miL|\(miP\fB] \fIsource_file target_file\fR
+.P
+ln \fB[\fR\(mifs\fB] [\fR\(miL|\(miP\fB] \fIsource_file\fR... \fItarget_dir\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+In the first synopsis form, the
+.IR ln
+utility shall create a new directory entry (link) at the
+destination path specified by the
+.IR target_file
+operand. If the
+.BR \(mis
+option is specified, a symbolic link shall be created for the file
+specified by the
+.IR source_file
+operand. This first synopsis form shall be assumed when the final
+operand does not name an existing directory; if more than two operands
+are specified and the final is not an existing directory, an error
+shall result.
+.P
+In the second synopsis form, the
+.IR ln
+utility shall create a new directory entry (link), or if the
+.BR \(mis
+option is specified a symbolic link, for each file specified by a
+.IR source_file
+operand, at a destination path in the existing directory named by
+.IR target_dir .
+.P
+If the last operand specifies an existing file of a type not
+specified by the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, the behavior is implementation-defined.
+.P
+The corresponding destination path for each
+.IR source_file
+shall be the concatenation of the target directory pathname, a
+<slash>
+character if the target directory pathname did not end in a
+<slash>,
+and the last pathname component of the
+.IR source_file .
+The second synopsis form shall be assumed when the final operand names
+an existing directory.
+.P
+For each
+.IR source_file :
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the destination path exists and was created by a previous step,
+it is unspecified whether
+.IR ln
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing more with
+the current
+.IR source_file ,
+and go on to any remaining
+.IR source_file s;
+or will continue processing the current
+.IR source_file .
+If the destination path exists:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+If the
+.BR \(mif
+option is not specified,
+.IR ln
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing more
+with the current
+.IR source_file ,
+and go on to any remaining
+.IR source_file s.
+.IP " b." 4
+If
+.IR destination
+names the same directory entry as the current
+.IR source_file
+.IR ln
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing more with
+the current
+.IR source_file ,
+and go on to any remaining
+.IR source_file s .
+.IP " c." 4
+Actions shall be performed equivalent to the
+\fIunlink\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, called using
+.IR destination
+as the
+.IR path
+argument. If this fails for any reason,
+.IR ln
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing more
+with the current
+.IR source_file ,
+and go on to any remaining
+.IR source_file s.
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the
+.BR \(mis
+option is specified, actions shall be performed equivalent to the
+\fIsymlink\fR()
+function with
+.IR source_file
+as the
+.IR path1
+argument and the destination path as the
+.IR path2
+argument. The
+.IR ln
+utility shall do nothing more with
+.IR source_file
+and shall go on to any remaining files.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If
+.IR source_file
+is a symbolic link:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+If the
+.BR \(miP
+option is in effect, actions shall be performed equivalent to the
+\fIlinkat\fR()
+function with
+.IR source_file
+as the
+.IR path1
+argument, the destination path as the
+.IR path2
+argument, AT_FDCWD as the
+.IR fd1
+and
+.IR fd2
+arguments, and zero as the
+.IR flag
+argument.
+.IP " b." 4
+If the
+.BR \(miL
+option is in effect, actions shall be performed equivalent to the
+\fIlinkat\fR()
+function with
+.IR source_file
+as the
+.IR path1
+argument, the destination path as the
+.IR path2
+argument, AT_FDCWD as the
+.IR fd1
+and
+.IR fd2
+arguments, and AT_SYMLINK_FOLLOW as the
+.IR flag
+argument.
+.P
+The
+.IR ln
+utility shall do nothing more with
+.IR source_file
+and shall go on to any remaining files.
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+Actions shall be performed equivalent to the
+\fIlink\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 using
+.IR source_file
+as the
+.IR path1
+argument, and the destination path as the
+.IR path2
+argument.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR ln
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mif\fP" 10
+Force existing destination pathnames to be removed to allow the link.
+.IP "\fB\(miL\fP" 10
+For each
+.IR source_file
+operand that names a file of type symbolic link, create a (hard)
+link to the file referenced by the symbolic link.
+.IP "\fB\(miP\fP" 10
+For each
+.IR source_file
+operand that names a file of type symbolic link, create a (hard)
+link to the symbolic link itself.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Create symbolic links instead of hard links. If the
+.BR \(mis
+option is specified, the
+.BR \(miL
+and
+.BR \(miP
+options shall be silently ignored.
+.P
+Specifying more than one of the mutually-exclusive options
+.BR \(miL
+and
+.BR \(miP
+shall not be considered an error. The last option specified shall
+determine the behavior of the utility (unless the
+.BR \(mis
+option causes it to be ignored).
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mis
+option is not specified and neither a
+.BR \(miL
+nor a
+.BR \(miP
+option is specified, it is implementation-defined which of the
+.BR \(miL
+and
+.BR \(miP
+options will be used as the default.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIsource_file\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file to be linked. If the
+.BR \(mis
+option is specified, no restrictions on the type of file or on its
+existence shall be made. If the
+.BR \(mis
+option is not specified, whether a directory can be linked is
+implementation-defined.
+.IP "\fItarget_file\fR" 10
+The pathname of the new directory entry to be created.
+.IP "\fItarget_dir\fR" 10
+A pathname of an existing directory in which the new directory entries
+are created.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR ln :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+All the specified files were linked successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS section does not require
+.IR ln
+.BR \(mif
+.IR "a b"
+to remove
+.IR b
+if a subsequent link operation would fail.
+.P
+Some historic versions of
+.IR ln
+(including the one specified by the SVID) unlink the destination file,
+if it exists, by default. If the mode does not permit writing, these
+versions prompt for confirmation before attempting the unlink. In these
+versions the
+.BR \(mif
+option causes
+.IR ln
+not to attempt to prompt for confirmation.
+.P
+This allows
+.IR ln
+to succeed in creating links when the target file already exists, even
+if the file itself is not writable (although the directory must be).
+Early proposals specified this functionality.
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not allow the
+.IR ln
+utility to unlink existing destination paths by default for the
+following reasons:
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+.IR ln
+utility has historically been used to provide locking for shell
+applications, a usage that is incompatible with
+.IR ln
+unlinking the destination path by default. There was no corresponding
+technical advantage to adding this functionality.
+.IP " *" 4
+This functionality gave
+.IR ln
+the ability to destroy the link structure of files, which changes the
+historical behavior of
+.IR ln .
+.IP " *" 4
+This functionality is easily replicated with a combination of
+.IR rm
+and
+.IR ln .
+.IP " *" 4
+It is not historical practice in many systems; BSD and BSD-derived
+systems do not support this behavior. Unfortunately, whichever behavior
+is selected can cause scripts written expecting the other behavior to
+fail.
+.IP " *" 4
+It is preferable that
+.IR ln
+perform in the same manner as the
+\fIlink\fR()
+function, which does not permit the target to exist already.
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 retains the
+.BR \(mif
+option to provide support for shell scripts depending on the SVID
+semantics. It seems likely that shell scripts would not be written to
+handle prompting by
+.IR ln
+and would therefore have specified the
+.BR \(mif
+option.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mif
+option is an undocumented feature of many historical versions of the
+.IR ln
+utility, allowing linking to directories. These versions require
+modification.
+.P
+Early proposals of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 also required a
+.BR \(mii
+option, which behaved like the
+.BR \(mii
+options in
+.IR cp
+and
+.IR mv ,
+prompting for confirmation before unlinking existing files. This was
+not historical practice for the
+.IR ln
+utility and has been omitted.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miL
+and
+.BR \(miP
+options allow for implementing both common behaviors of the
+.IR ln
+utility. Earlier versions of this standard did not specify these options
+and required the behavior now described for the
+.BR \(miL
+option. Many systems by default or as an alternative provided a
+non-conforming
+.IR ln
+utility with the behavior now described for the
+.BR \(miP
+option. Since applications could not rely on
+.IR ln
+following links in practice, the
+.BR \(miL
+and
+.BR \(miP
+options were added to specify the desired behavior for the application.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miL
+and
+.BR \(miP
+options are ignored when
+.BR \(mis
+is specified in order to allow an alias to be created to alter the
+default behavior when creating hard links (for example,
+.IR alias
+.IR ln ='\c
+.IR ln
+.BR \(miL ').
+They serve no purpose when
+.BR \(mis
+is specified, since
+.IR source_file
+is then just a string to be used as the contents of the created symbolic
+link and need not exist as a file.
+.P
+The specification ensures that
+.IR ln
+.BR a
+.BR a
+with or without the
+.BR \(mif
+option will not unlink the file
+.BR a .
+Earlier versions of this standard were unclear in this case.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfind\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIpax\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIrm\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/locale.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/locale.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8855008
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/locale.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,560 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LOCALE "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+locale
+\(em get locale-specific information
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+locale \fB[\fR\(mia|\(mim\fB]\fR
+.P
+locale \fB[\fR\(mick\fB] \fIname\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR locale
+utility shall write information about the current locale environment,
+or all public locales, to the standard output. For the purposes of
+this section, a
+.IR "public locale"
+is one provided by the implementation that is accessible to the
+application.
+.P
+When
+.IR locale
+is invoked without any arguments, it shall summarize the current locale
+environment for each locale category as determined by the settings of
+the environment variables defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+When invoked with operands, it shall write values that have been
+assigned to the keywords in the locale categories, as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+Specifying a keyword name shall select the named keyword and the
+category containing that keyword.
+.IP " *" 4
+Specifying a category name shall select the named category and all
+keywords in that category.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR locale
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mia\fP" 10
+Write information about all available public locales. The available
+locales shall include
+.BR POSIX ,
+representing the POSIX locale. The manner in which the implementation
+determines what other locales are available is
+implementation-defined.
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Write the names of selected locale categories; see the STDOUT section.
+The
+.BR \(mic
+option increases readability when more than one category is selected
+(for example, via more than one keyword name or via a category name).
+It is valid both with and without the
+.BR \(mik
+option.
+.IP "\fB\(mik\fP" 10
+Write the names and values of selected keywords. The implementation
+may omit values for some keywords; see the OPERANDS section.
+.IP "\fB\(mim\fP" 10
+Write names of available charmaps; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set".
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIname\fR" 10
+The name of a locale category as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+the name of a keyword in a locale category, or the reserved name
+.BR charmap .
+The named category or keyword shall be selected for output. If a
+single
+.IR name
+represents both a locale category name and a keyword name in the
+current locale, the results are unspecified. Otherwise, both category
+and keyword names can be specified as
+.IR name
+operands, in any sequence. It is implementation-defined whether any
+keyword values are written for the categories
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+and
+.IR LC_COLLATE .
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR locale :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.P
+The application shall ensure that the
+.IR LANG ,
+.IR LC_* ,
+and
+.IR NLSPATH
+environment variables specify the current locale environment to be
+written out; they shall be used if the
+.BR \(mia
+option is not specified.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The
+.IR LANG
+variable shall be written first using the format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"LANG=%s\en", <\fIvalue\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.IR LANG
+is not set or is an empty string, the value is the empty string.
+.P
+If
+.IR locale
+is invoked without any options or operands, the names and values of the
+.IR LC_*
+environment variables described in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 shall be written to the
+standard output, one variable per line, and each line using the
+following format. Only those variables set in the environment and not
+overridden by
+.IR LC_ALL
+shall be written using this format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s=%s\en", <\fIvariable_name\fR>, <\fIvalue\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The names of those
+.IR LC_*
+variables associated with locale categories defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 that are
+not set in the environment or are overridden by
+.IR LC_ALL
+shall be written in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s=\e"%s\e"\en", <\fIvariable_name\fR>, <\fIimplied value\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The <\fIimplied\ value\fP> shall be the name of the locale that has
+been selected for that category by the implementation, based on the
+values in
+.IR LANG
+and
+.IR LC_ALL ,
+as described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables".
+.P
+The <\fIvalue\fP> and <\fIimplied\ value\fP> shown above shall be
+properly quoted for possible later reentry to the shell. The
+<\fIvalue\fP> shall not be quoted using double-quotes (so that it can
+be distinguished by the user from the <\fIimplied\ value\fP> case,
+which always requires double-quotes).
+.P
+The
+.IR LC_ALL
+variable shall be written last, using the first format shown above. If
+it is not set, it shall be written as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"LC_ALL=\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If any arguments are specified:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the
+.BR \(mia
+option is specified, the names of all the public locales shall be
+written, each in the following format:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIlocale\ name\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the
+.BR \(mic
+option is specified, the names of all selected categories shall be
+written, each in the following format:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIcategory\ name\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If keywords are also selected for writing (see following items), the
+category name output shall precede the keyword output for that
+category.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mic
+option is not specified, the names of the categories shall not be
+written; only the keywords, as selected by the <\fIname\fP> operand,
+shall be written.
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+If the
+.BR \(mik
+option is specified, the names and values of selected keywords shall be
+written. If a value is non-numeric and is not a compound keyword
+value, it shall be written in the following format:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s=\e"%s\e"\en", <\fIkeyword name\fR>, <\fIkeyword value\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If a value is a non-numeric compound keyword value, it shall either be
+written in the format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s=\e"%s\e"\en", <\fIkeyword name\fR>, <\fIkeyword value\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where the <\fIkeyword value\fR> is a single string of values separated by
+<semicolon>
+characters, or it shall be written in the format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s=%s\en", <\fIkeyword name\fR>, <\fIkeyword value\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where the <\fIkeyword value\fP> is encoded as a set of strings, each
+enclosed in double-quotation-marks, separated by
+<semicolon>
+characters.
+.P
+If the keyword was
+.BR charmap ,
+the name of the charmap (if any) that was specified via the
+.IR localedef
+.BR \(mif
+option when the locale was created shall be written, with the word
+.BR charmap
+as <\fIkeyword\ name\fP>.
+.P
+If a value is numeric, it shall be written in one of the following
+formats:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s=%d\en", <\fIkeyword name\fR>, <\fIkeyword value\fR>
+.P
+"%s=%c%o\en", <\fIkeyword name\fR>, <\fIescape character\fR>, <\fIkeyword value\fR>
+.P
+"%s=%cx%x\en", <\fIkeyword name\fR>, <\fIescape character\fR>, <\fIkeyword value\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where the <\fIescape\ character\fP> is that identified by the
+.BR escape_char
+keyword in the current locale; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 7.3" ", " "Locale Definition".
+.P
+Compound keyword values (list entries) shall be separated in the output by
+<semicolon>
+characters. When included in keyword values, the
+<semicolon>,
+<backslash>,
+double-quote, and any control character shall be preceded (escaped)
+with the escape character.
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+If the
+.BR \(mik
+option is not specified, selected keyword values shall be written, each
+in the following format:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIkeyword value\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the keyword was
+.BR charmap ,
+the name of the charmap (if any) that was specified via the
+.IR localedef
+.BR \(mif
+option when the locale was created shall be written.
+.RE
+.IP " 5." 4
+If the
+.BR \(mim
+option is specified, then a list of all available charmaps shall be
+written, each in the format:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIcharmap\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fIcharmap\fP> is in a format suitable for use as the
+option-argument to the
+.IR localedef
+.BR \(mif
+option.
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+All the requested information was found and output successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If the
+.IR LANG
+environment variable is not set or set to an empty value, or one of the
+.IR LC_*
+environment variables is set to an unrecognized value, the actual
+locales assumed (if any) are implementation-defined as described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables".
+.P
+Implementations are not required to write out the actual values for
+keywords in the categories
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+and
+.IR LC_COLLATE ;
+however, they must write out the categories (allowing an application to
+determine, for example, which character classes are available).
+.SH EXAMPLES
+In the following examples, the assumption is that locale environment
+variables are set as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+LANG=locale_x
+LC_COLLATE=locale_y
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The command
+.IR locale
+would result in the following output:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+LANG=locale_x
+LC_CTYPE="locale_x"
+LC_COLLATE=locale_y
+LC_TIME="locale_x"
+LC_NUMERIC="locale_x"
+LC_MONETARY="locale_x"
+LC_MESSAGES="locale_x"
+LC_ALL=
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The order of presentation of the categories is not specified by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+The command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+LC_ALL=POSIX locale \(mick decimal_point
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would produce:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+LC_NUMERIC
+decimal_point="."
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following command shows an application of
+.IR locale
+to determine whether a user-supplied response is affirmative:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+if printf "%s\en$response" | grep \(miEq "$(locale yesexpr)"
+then
+    affirmative processing goes here
+else
+    non-affirmative processing goes here
+fi
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The output for categories
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+and
+.IR LC_COLLATE
+has been made implementation-defined because there is a questionable
+value in having a shell script receive an entire array of characters.
+It is also difficult to return a logical collation description, short
+of returning a complete
+.IR localedef
+source.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mim
+option was included to allow applications to query for the existence of
+charmaps.
+The output is a list of the charmaps (implementation-supplied and
+user-supplied, if any) on the system.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mic
+option was included for readability when more than one category is
+selected (for example, via more than one keyword name or via a category
+name). It is valid both with and without the
+.BR \(mik
+option.
+.P
+The
+.BR charmap
+keyword, which returns the name of the charmap (if any) that was used
+when the current locale was created, was included to allow applications
+needing the information to retrieve it.
+.P
+According to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set",
+the standard requires that all supported locales must have the same
+encoding for
+<period>
+and
+<slash>,
+because these two characters are used within the locale-independent
+pathname resolution sequence. Therefore, it would be an error if
+.IR locale
+.BR \(mia
+listed both ASCII and EBCDIC-based locales, since those two encodings
+do not share the same representation for either
+<period>
+or
+<slash>.
+Any system that supports both environments would be expected to provide two
+POSIX locales, one in either codeset, where only the locales appropriate
+to the current environment can be visible at a time. In an XSI-compliant
+implementation, the
+.IR dd
+utility is the only portable means for performing conversions between
+the two character sets.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIlocaledef\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set",
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/localedef.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/localedef.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e314661
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/localedef.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,327 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LOCALEDEF "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+localedef \(em define locale environment
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+localedef \fB[\fR\(mic\fB] [\fR\(mif \fIcharmap\fB] [\fR\(mii \fIsourcefile\fB] [\fR\(miu \fIcode_set_name\fB] \fIname\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR localedef
+utility shall convert source definitions for locale categories into a
+format usable by the functions and utilities whose operational behavior
+is determined by the setting of the locale environment variables
+defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+It is implementation-defined whether users have the capability to create
+new locales, in addition to those supplied by the implementation. If
+the symbolic constant POSIX2_LOCALEDEF is defined, the system supports
+the creation of new locales.
+On XSI-conformant systems, the symbolic constant POSIX2_LOCALEDEF
+shall be defined.
+.P
+The utility shall read source definitions for one or more locale
+categories belonging to the same locale from the file named in the
+.BR \(mii
+option (if specified) or from standard input.
+.P
+The
+.IR name
+operand identifies the target locale. The utility shall support the
+creation of
+.IR public ,
+or generally accessible locales, as well as
+.IR private ,
+or restricted-access locales. Implementations may restrict the
+capability to create or modify public locales to users with
+appropriate privileges.
+.P
+Each category source definition shall be identified by the
+corresponding environment variable name and terminated by an
+.BR END
+.IR category-name
+statement. The following categories shall be supported. In addition,
+the input may contain source for implementation-defined categories.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fR" 10
+Defines character classification and case conversion.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fR" 10
+.br
+Defines collation rules.
+.IP "\fILC_MONETARY\fR" 10
+.br
+Defines the format and symbols used in formatting of monetary
+information.
+.IP "\fILC_NUMERIC\fR" 10
+.br
+Defines the decimal delimiter, grouping, and grouping symbol for
+non-monetary numeric editing.
+.IP "\fILC_TIME\fR" 10
+Defines the format and content of date and time information.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fR" 10
+.br
+Defines the format and values of affirmative and negative responses.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR localedef
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Create permanent output even if warning messages have been issued.
+.IP "\fB\(mif\ \fIcharmap\fR" 10
+Specify the pathname of a file containing a mapping of character
+symbols and collating element symbols to actual character encodings.
+The format of the
+.IR charmap
+is described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.4" ", " "Character Set Description File".
+The application shall ensure that this option is specified if symbolic
+names (other than collating symbols defined in a
+.BR collating-symbol
+keyword) are used. If the
+.BR \(mif
+option is not present, an implementation-defined character mapping
+shall be used.
+.IP "\fB\(mii\ \fIinputfile\fR" 10
+The pathname of a file containing the source definitions. If this
+option is not present, source definitions shall be read from standard
+input. The format of the
+.IR inputfile
+is described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 7.3" ", " "Locale Definition".
+.IP "\fB\(miu\ \fIcode_set_name\fR" 10
+.br
+Specify the name of a codeset used as the target mapping of character
+symbols and collating element symbols whose encoding values are defined
+in terms of the ISO/IEC\ 10646\(hy1:\|2000 standard position constant values.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIname\fR" 10
+Identifies the locale; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale"
+for a description of the use of this name. If the name contains one
+or more
+<slash>
+characters,
+.IR name
+shall be interpreted as a pathname where the created locale definitions
+shall be stored. If
+.IR name
+does not contain any
+<slash>
+characters, the interpretation of the name is implementation-defined
+and the locale shall be public. The ability to create public locales in
+this way may be restricted to users with appropriate privileges. (As a
+consequence of specifying one
+.IR name ,
+although several categories can be processed in one execution, only
+categories belonging to the same locale can be processed.)
+.SH STDIN
+Unless the
+.BR \(mii
+option is specified, the standard input shall be a text file containing
+one or more locale category source definitions, as described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 7.3" ", " "Locale Definition".
+When lines are continued using the escape character mechanism,
+there is no limit to the length of the accumulated continued line.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The character set mapping file specified as the
+.IR charmap
+option-argument is described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.4" ", " "Character Set Description File".
+If a locale category source definition contains a
+.BR copy
+statement, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+and the
+.BR copy
+statement names a valid, existing locale, then
+.IR localedef
+shall behave as if the source definition had contained a valid category
+source definition for the named locale.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR localedef :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+(This variable has no affect on
+.IR localedef ;
+the POSIX locale is used for this category.)
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files). This variable has
+no affect on the processing of
+.IR localedef
+input data; the POSIX locale is used for this purpose, regardless of
+the value of this variable.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The utility shall report all categories successfully processed, in an
+unspecified format.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+The format of the created output is unspecified. If the
+.IR name
+operand does not contain a
+<slash>,
+the existence of an output file for the locale is unspecified.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+When the
+.BR \(miu
+option is used, the
+.IR code_set_name
+option-argument shall be interpreted as an implementation-defined
+name of a codeset to which the ISO/IEC\ 10646\(hy1:\|2000 standard position constant values shall be
+converted via an implementation-defined method. Both the ISO/IEC\ 10646\(hy1:\|2000 standard
+position constant values and other formats (decimal, hexadecimal, or
+octal) shall be valid as encoding values within the
+.IR charmap
+file. The codeset represented by the implementation-defined name can
+be any codeset that is supported by the implementation.
+.P
+When conflicts occur between the
+.IR charmap
+specification of <\fIcode_set_name\fP>, <\fImb_cur_max\fP>, or
+<\fImb_cur_min\fP> and the implementation-defined interpretation of
+these respective items for the codeset represented by the
+.BR \(miu
+option-argument
+.IR code_set_name ,
+the result is unspecified.
+.P
+When conflicts occur between the
+.IR charmap
+encoding values specified for symbolic names of characters of the
+portable character set and the implementation-defined assignment of
+character encoding values, the result is unspecified.
+.P
+If a non-printable character in the
+.IR charmap
+has a width specified that is not
+.BR \(mi1 ,
+the result will be undefined.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+No errors occurred and the locales were successfully created.
+.IP "\01" 6
+Warnings occurred and the locales were successfully created.
+.IP "\02" 6
+The locale specification exceeded implementation limits or the coded
+character set or sets used were not supported by the implementation,
+and no locale was created.
+.IP "\03" 6
+The capability to create new locales is not supported by the
+implementation.
+.IP >3 6
+Warnings or errors occurred and no output was created.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+If an error is detected, no permanent output shall be created.
+.P
+If warnings occur, permanent output shall be created if the
+.BR \(mic
+option was specified. The following conditions shall cause warning
+messages to be issued:
+.IP " *" 4
+If a symbolic name not found in the
+.IR charmap
+file is used for the descriptions of the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+or
+.IR LC_COLLATE
+categories (for other categories, this shall be an error condition).
+.IP " *" 4
+If the number of operands to the
+.BR order
+keyword exceeds the
+{COLL_WEIGHTS_MAX}
+limit.
+.IP " *" 4
+If optional keywords not supported by the implementation are present in
+the source.
+.P
+Other implementation-defined conditions may also cause warnings.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR charmap
+definition is optional, and is contained outside the locale
+definition. This allows both completely self-defined source files, and
+generic sources (applicable to more than one codeset). To aid
+portability, all
+.IR charmap
+definitions must use the same symbolic names for the portable character
+set. As explained in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.4" ", " "Character Set Description File",
+it is implementation-defined whether or not users or applications can
+provide additional character set description files. Therefore, the
+.BR \(mif
+option might be operable only when an implementation-defined
+.IR charmap
+is named.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The output produced by the
+.IR localedef
+utility is implementation-defined. The
+.IR name
+operand is used to identify the specific locale. (As a consequence,
+although several categories can be processed in one execution, only
+categories belonging to the same locale can be processed.)
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIlocale\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.4" ", " "Character Set Description File",
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/logger.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/logger.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fffb689
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/logger.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LOGGER "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+logger
+\(em log messages
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+logger \fIstring\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR logger
+utility saves a message, in an unspecified manner and format,
+containing the
+.IR string
+operands provided by the user. The messages are expected to be
+evaluated later by personnel performing system administration tasks.
+.P
+It is implementation-defined whether messages written in locales
+other than the POSIX locale are effective.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIstring\fR" 10
+One of the string arguments whose contents are concatenated together,
+in the order specified, separated by single
+<space>
+characters.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR logger :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error. (This means
+diagnostics from
+.IR logger
+to the user or application, not diagnostic messages that the user is
+sending to the system administrator.)
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+Unspecified.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+This utility allows logging of information for later use by a system
+administrator or programmer in determining why non-interactive
+utilities have failed. The locations of the saved messages, their
+format, and retention period are all unspecified. There is no method
+for a conforming application to read messages, once written.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+A batch application, running non-interactively, tries to read a
+configuration file and fails; it may attempt to notify the system
+administrator with:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+logger myname: unable to read file foo. [timestamp]
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The standard developers believed strongly that some method of alerting
+administrators to errors was necessary. The obvious example is a batch
+utility, running non-interactively, that is unable to read its
+configuration files or that is unable to create or write its results
+file. However, the standard developers did not wish to define the
+format or delivery mechanisms as they have historically been (and will
+probably continue to be) very system-specific, as well as involving
+functionality clearly outside the scope of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+The text with
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+about diagnostic messages means diagnostics from
+.IR logger
+to the user or application, not diagnostic messages that the user is
+sending to the system administrator.
+.P
+Multiple
+.IR string
+arguments are allowed, similar to
+.IR echo ,
+for ease-of-use.
+.P
+Like the utilities
+.IR mailx
+and
+.IR lp ,
+.IR logger
+is admittedly difficult to test. This was not deemed sufficient
+justification to exclude these utilities from this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. It is also
+arguable that they are, in fact, testable, but that the tests
+themselves are not portable.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIlp\fR\^",
+.IR "\fImailx\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/logname.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/logname.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c8fc7aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/logname.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LOGNAME "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+logname
+\(em return the user's login name
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+logname
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR logname
+utility shall write the user's login name to standard output. The
+login name shall be the string that would be returned by the
+\fIgetlogin\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. Under the conditions where the
+\fIgetlogin\fR()
+function would fail, the
+.IR logname
+utility shall write a diagnostic message to standard error and exit
+with a non-zero exit status.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+None.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR logname :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The
+.IR logname
+utility output shall be a single line consisting of the user's login
+name:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIlogin name\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR logname
+utility explicitly ignores the
+.IR LOGNAME
+environment variable because environment changes could produce
+erroneous results.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.BR passwd
+file is not listed as required because the implementation may have
+other means of mapping login names.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIid\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIwho\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIgetlogin\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/lp.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/lp.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2aa2969
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/lp.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,480 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LP "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+lp
+\(em send files to a printer
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+lp \fB[\fR\(mic\fB] [\fR\(mid \fIdest\fB] [\fR\(min \fIcopies\fB] [\fR\(mimsw\fB] [\fR\(mio \fIoption\fB]\fR... \fB[\fR\(mit \fItitle\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR lp
+utility shall copy the input files to an output destination in an
+unspecified manner. The default output destination should be to a
+hardcopy device, such as a printer or microfilm recorder, that produces
+non-volatile, human-readable documents. If such a device is not
+available to the application, or if the system provides no such device,
+the
+.IR lp
+utility shall exit with a non-zero exit status.
+.P
+The actual writing to the output device may occur some time after the
+.IR lp
+utility successfully exits. During the portion of the writing that
+corresponds to each input file, the implementation shall guarantee
+exclusive access to the device.
+.P
+The
+.IR lp
+utility shall associate a unique
+.IR "request ID"
+with each request.
+.P
+Normally, a banner page is produced to separate and identify each print
+job. This page may be suppressed by implementation-defined
+conditions, such as an operator command or one of the
+.BR \(mio
+.IR option
+values.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR lp
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Exit only after further access to any of the input files is no longer
+required. The application can then safely delete or modify the files
+without affecting the output operation. Normally, files are not
+copied, but are linked whenever possible. If the
+.BR \(mic
+option is not given, then the user should be careful not to remove any
+of the files before the request has been printed in its entirety. It
+should also be noted that in the absence of the
+.BR \(mic
+option, any changes made to the named files after the request is made
+but before it is printed may be reflected in the printed output.
+On some implementations,
+.BR \(mic
+may be on by default.
+.IP "\fB\(mid\ \fIdest\fR" 10
+Specify a string that names the destination (\c
+.IR dest ).
+If
+.IR dest
+is a printer, the request shall be printed only on that specific
+printer. If
+.IR dest
+is a class of printers, the request shall be printed on the first
+available printer that is a member of the class. Under certain
+conditions (printer unavailability, file space limitation, and so on),
+requests for specific destinations need not be accepted. Destination
+names vary between systems.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If
+.BR \(mid
+is not specified, and neither the
+.IR LPDEST
+nor
+.IR PRINTER
+environment variable is set, an unspecified destination is used. The
+.BR \(mid
+.IR dest
+option shall take precedence over
+.IR LPDEST ,
+which in turn shall take precedence over
+.IR PRINTER .
+Results are undefined when
+.IR dest
+contains a value that is not a valid destination name.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mim\fP" 10
+Send mail (see
+.IR "\fImailx\fR\^")
+after the files have been printed. By default, no mail is sent upon
+normal completion of the print request.
+.IP "\fB\(min\ \fIcopies\fR" 10
+Write
+.IR copies
+number of copies of the files, where
+.IR copies
+is a positive decimal integer. The methods for producing multiple
+copies and for arranging the multiple copies when multiple
+.IR file
+operands are used are unspecified, except that each file shall be
+output as an integral whole, not interleaved with portions of other
+files.
+.IP "\fB\(mio\ \fIoption\fR" 10
+Specify printer-dependent or class-dependent
+.IR option s.
+Several such
+.IR option s
+may be collected by specifying the
+.BR \(mio
+option more than once.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Suppress messages from
+.IR lp .
+.IP "\fB\(mit\ \fItitle\fR" 10
+Write
+.IR title
+on the banner page of the output.
+.IP "\fB\(miw\fP" 10
+Write a message on the user's terminal after the files have been
+printed. If the user is not logged in, then mail shall be sent
+instead.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file to be output. If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, or if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be used. If a
+.IR file
+operand is used, but the
+.BR \(mic
+option is not specified, the process performing the writing to the
+output device may have user and group permissions that differ from that
+of the process invoking
+.IR lp .
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used only if no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, or if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' .
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files shall be text files.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR lp :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fILC_TIME\fP" 10
+Determine the format and contents of date and time strings displayed in
+the
+.IR lp
+banner page, if any.
+.IP "\fILPDEST\fP" 10
+Determine the destination. If the
+.IR LPDEST
+environment variable is not set, the
+.IR PRINTER
+environment variable shall be used. The
+.BR \(mid
+.IR dest
+option takes precedence over
+.IR LPDEST .
+Results are undefined when
+.BR \(mid
+is not specified and
+.IR LPDEST
+contains a value that is not a valid destination name.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fIPRINTER\fP" 10
+Determine the output device or destination. If the
+.IR LPDEST
+and
+.IR PRINTER
+environment variables are not set, an unspecified output device is
+used. The
+.BR \(mid
+.IR dest
+option and the
+.IR LPDEST
+environment variable shall take precedence over
+.IR PRINTER .
+Results are undefined when
+.BR \(mid
+is not specified,
+.IR LPDEST
+is unset, and
+.IR PRINTER
+contains a value that is not a valid device or destination name.
+.IP "\fITZ\fP" 10
+Determine the timezone used to calculate date and time strings
+displayed in the
+.IR lp
+banner page, if any. If
+.IR TZ
+is unset or null, an unspecified default timezone shall be used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The
+.IR lp
+utility shall write a
+.IR "request ID"
+to the standard output, unless
+.BR \(mis
+is specified. The format of the message is unspecified. The request
+ID can be used on systems supporting the historical
+.IR cancel
+and
+.IR lpstat
+utilities.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+All input files were processed successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+No output device was available, or an error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR pr
+and
+.IR fold
+utilities can be used to achieve reasonable formatting for the
+implementation's default page size.
+.P
+A conforming application can use one of the
+.IR file
+operands only with the
+.BR \(mic
+option or if the file is publicly readable and guaranteed to be
+available at the time of printing. This is because POSIX.1\(hy2008 gives
+the implementation the freedom to queue up the request for printing at
+some later time by a different process that might not be able to access
+the file.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+To print file
+.IR file :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+lp \(mic \fIfile\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+To print multiple files with headers:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+pr \fIfile1 file2\fP | lp
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR lp
+utility was designed to be a basic version of a utility that is already
+available in many historical implementations. The standard developers
+considered that it should be implementable simply as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cat "$@" > /dev/lp
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+after appropriate processing of options, if that is how the
+implementation chose to do it and if exclusive access could be granted
+(so that two users did not write to the device simultaneously).
+Although in the future the standard developers may add other options to
+this utility, it should always be able to execute with no options or
+operands and send the standard input to an unspecified output device.
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 makes no representations concerning the format of the printed
+output, except that it must be ``human-readable'' and ``non-volatile''.
+Thus, writing by default to a disk or tape drive or a display terminal
+would not qualify. (Such destinations are not prohibited when
+.BR \(mid
+.IR dest ,
+.IR LPDEST ,
+or
+.IR PRINTER
+are used, however.)
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 is worded such that a ``print job'' consisting of multiple input
+files, possibly in multiple copies, is guaranteed to print so that any
+one file is not intermixed with another, but there is no statement that
+all the files or copies have to print out together.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mic
+option may imply a spooling operation, but this is not required. The
+utility can be implemented to wait until the printer is ready and then
+wait until it is finished. Because of that, there is no attempt to
+define a queuing mechanism (priorities, classes of output, and so on).
+.P
+On some historical systems, the request ID reported on the STDOUT
+can be used to later cancel or find the status of a request using
+utilities not defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+Although the historical System V
+.IR lp
+and BSD
+.IR lpr
+utilities have provided similar functionality, they used different
+names for the environment variable specifying the destination printer.
+Since the name of the utility here is
+.IR lp ,
+.IR LPDEST
+(used by the System V
+.IR lp
+utility) was given precedence over
+.IR PRINTER
+(used by the BSD
+.IR lpr
+utility). Since environments of users frequently contain one or the
+other environment variable, the
+.IR lp
+utility is required to recognize both. If this was not done, many
+applications would send output to unexpected output devices when users
+moved from system to system.
+.P
+Some have commented that
+.IR lp
+has far too little functionality to make it worthwhile. Requests have
+proposed additional options or operands or both that added
+functionality. The requests included:
+.IP " *" 4
+Wording
+.IR requiring
+the output to be ``hardcopy''
+.IP " *" 4
+A requirement for multiple printers
+.IP " *" 4
+Options for supporting various page-description languages
+.P
+Given that a compliant system is not required to even have a printer,
+placing further restrictions upon the behavior of the printer is not
+useful. Since hardcopy format is so application-dependent, it is
+difficult, if not impossible, to select a reasonable subset of
+functionality that should be required on all compliant systems.
+.P
+The term \fIunspecified\fR is used in this section in lieu of
+\fIimplementation-defined\fR as most known implementations would not be
+able to make definitive statements in their conformance documents; the
+existence and usage of printers is very dependent on how the system
+administrator configures each individual system.
+.P
+Since the default destination, device type, queuing mechanisms, and
+acceptable forms of input are all unspecified, usage guidelines for
+what a conforming application can do are as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+Use the command in a pipeline, or with
+.BR \(mic ,
+so that there are no permission problems and the files can be safely
+deleted or modified.
+.IP " *" 4
+Limit output to text files of reasonable line lengths and printable
+characters and include no device-specific formatting information, such
+as a page description language. The meaning of ``reasonable'' in this
+context can only be answered as a quality-of-implementation issue, but
+it should be apparent from historical usage patterns in the industry
+and the locale. The
+.IR pr
+and
+.IR fold
+utilities can be used to achieve reasonable formatting for the default
+page size of the implementation.
+.P
+Alternatively, the application can arrange its installation in such a
+way that it requires the system administrator or operator to provide
+the appropriate information on
+.IR lp
+options and environment variable values.
+.P
+At a minimum, having this utility in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 tells the industry that
+conforming applications require a means to print output and provides at
+least a command name and
+.IR LPDEST
+routing mechanism that can be used for discussions between vendors,
+application developers, and users. The use of ``should'' in the
+DESCRIPTION of
+.IR lp
+clearly shows the intent of the standard developers, even if they
+cannot mandate that all systems (such as laptops) have printers.
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not specify what the ownership of the process performing the
+writing to the output device may be. If
+.BR \(mic
+is not used, it is unspecified whether the process performing the
+writing to the output device has permission to read
+.IR file
+if there are any restrictions in place on who may read
+.IR file
+until after it is printed. Also, if
+.BR \(mic
+is not used, the results of deleting
+.IR file
+before it is printed are unspecified.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImailx\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ls.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ls.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0131cc3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ls.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,1134 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LS "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ls
+\(em list directory contents
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+ls \fB[\fR\(miikqrs\fB] [\fR\(mig\|lno\|\fB] [\fR\(miA|\(mia\fB] [\fR\(miC|\(mim|\(mix|\(mi1\fB]\fR \e
+    \fB[\fR\(miF|\(mip\fB] [\fR\(miH|\(miL\fB] [\fR\(miR|\(mid\fB] [\fR\(miS|\(mif|\(mit\fB] [\fR\(mic|\(miu\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For each operand that names a file of a type other than directory or
+symbolic link to a directory,
+.IR ls
+shall write the name of the file as well as any requested, associated
+information. For each operand that names a file of type directory,
+.IR ls
+shall write the names of files contained within the directory as well
+as any requested, associated information. Filenames beginning
+with a
+<period>
+(\c
+.BR '.' )
+and any associated information shall not be written out unless
+explicitly referenced, the
+.BR \(miA
+or
+.BR \(mia
+option is supplied, or an implementation-defined condition causes them
+to be written. If one or more of the
+.BR \(mid ,
+.BR \(miF ,
+or
+.BR \(mil
+options are specified, and neither the
+.BR \(miH
+nor the
+.BR \(miL
+option is specified, for each operand that names a file of type
+symbolic link to a directory,
+.IR ls
+shall write the name of the file as well as any requested, associated
+information. If none of the
+.BR \(mid ,
+.BR \(miF ,
+or
+.BR \(mil
+options are specified, or the
+.BR \(miH
+or
+.BR \(miL
+options are specified, for each operand that names a file of type
+symbolic link to a directory,
+.IR ls
+shall write the names of files contained within the directory as well
+as any requested, associated information. In each case where the names
+of files contained within a directory are written, if the directory
+contains any symbolic links then
+.IR ls
+shall evaluate the file information and file type to be those of
+the symbolic link itself, unless the
+.BR \(miL
+option is specified.
+.P
+If no operands are specified,
+.IR ls
+shall behave as if a single operand of dot (\c
+.BR '.' )
+had been specified. If more than one operand is specified,
+.IR ls
+shall write non-directory operands first; it shall sort directory and
+non-directory operands separately according to the collating sequence
+in the current locale.
+.P
+The
+.IR ls
+utility shall detect infinite loops; that is, entering a previously
+visited directory that is an ancestor of the last file encountered.
+When it detects an infinite loop,
+.IR ls
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error and shall either
+recover its position in the hierarchy or terminate.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR ls
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(miA\fP" 10
+Write out all directory entries, including those whose names begin with a
+<period>
+(\c
+.BR '.' )
+but excluding the entries dot and dot-dot (if they exist).
+.IP "\fB\(miC\fP" 10
+Write multi-text-column output with entries sorted down the columns,
+according to the collating sequence. The number of text columns and the
+column separator characters are unspecified, but should be adapted to
+the nature of the output device. This option disables long format output.
+.IP "\fB\(miF\fP" 10
+Do not follow symbolic links named as operands unless the
+.BR \(miH
+or
+.BR \(miL
+options are specified. Write a
+<slash>
+(\c
+.BR '/' )
+immediately after each pathname that is a directory, an
+<asterisk>
+(\c
+.BR '*' )
+after each that is executable, a
+<vertical-line>
+(\c
+.BR '|' )
+after each that is a FIFO, and an at-sign (\c
+.BR '@' )
+after each that is a symbolic link. For other file types, other
+symbols may be written.
+.IP "\fB\(miH\fP" 10
+Evaluate the file information and file type for symbolic links specified
+on the command line to be those of the file referenced by the link,
+and not the link itself; however,
+.IR ls
+shall write the name of the link itself and not the file referenced by
+the link.
+.IP "\fB\(miL\fP" 10
+Evaluate the file information and file type for all symbolic links
+(whether named on the command line or encountered in a file hierarchy)
+to be those of the file referenced by the link, and not the link
+itself; however,
+.IR ls
+shall write the name of the link itself and not the file referenced by
+the link. When
+.BR \(miL
+is used with
+.BR \(mil ,
+write the contents of symbolic links in the long format (see the STDOUT
+section).
+.IP "\fB\(miR\fP" 10
+Recursively list subdirectories encountered. When a symbolic link to a
+directory is encountered, the directory shall not be recursively listed
+unless the
+.BR \(miL
+option is specified.
+The use of
+.BR \(miR
+with
+.BR \(mid
+or
+.BR \(mif
+produces unspecified results.
+.IP "\fB\(miS\fP" 10
+Sort with the primary key being file size (in decreasing order) and the
+secondary key being filename in the collating sequence (in increasing
+order).
+.IP "\fB\(mia\fP" 10
+Write out all directory entries, including those whose names begin with a
+<period>
+(\c
+.BR '.' ).
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Use time of last modification of the file status information (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP")
+instead of last modification of the file itself for sorting (\c
+.BR \(mit )
+or writing (\c
+.BR \(mil ).
+.IP "\fB\(mid\fP" 10
+Do not follow symbolic links named as operands unless the
+.BR \(miH
+or
+.BR \(miL
+options are specified. Do not treat directories differently than other
+types of files. The use of
+.BR \(mid
+with
+.BR \(miR
+or
+.BR \(mif
+produces unspecified results.
+.IP "\fB\(mif\fP" 10
+List the entries in directory operands in the order they appear in the
+directory. The behavior for non-directory operands is unspecified. This
+option shall turn on
+.BR \(mia .
+When
+.BR \(mif
+is specified, any occurrences of the
+.BR \(mir ,
+.BR \(miS ,
+and
+.BR \(mit
+options shall be ignored and any occurrences of the
+.BR \(miA ,
+.BR \(mig ,
+.BR \(mil ,
+.BR \(min ,
+.BR \(mio ,
+and
+.BR \(mis
+options may be ignored. The use of
+.BR \(mif
+with
+.BR \(miR
+or
+.BR \(mid
+produces unspecified results.
+.IP "\fB\(mig\fP" 10
+Turn on the
+.BR \(mil
+(ell) option, but disable writing the file's owner name or number.
+Disable the
+.BR \(miC ,
+.BR \(mim ,
+and
+.BR \(mix
+options.
+.IP "\fB\(mii\fP" 10
+For each file, write the file's file serial number (see
+\fIstat\fR()
+in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008).
+.IP "\fB\(mik\fP" 10
+Set the block size for the
+.BR \(mis
+option and the per-directory block count written for the
+.BR \(mil ,
+.BR \(min ,
+.BR \(mis ,
+.BR \(mig ,
+and
+.BR \(mio
+options (see the STDOUT section) to 1\|024 bytes.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\fP" 10
+(The letter ell.) Do not follow symbolic links named as operands unless
+the
+.BR \(miH
+or
+.BR \(miL
+options are specified. Write out in long format (see the STDOUT
+section). Disable the
+.BR \(miC ,
+.BR \(mim ,
+and
+.BR \(mix
+options.
+.IP "\fB\(mim\fP" 10
+Stream output format; list pathnames across the page, separated by a
+<comma>
+character followed by a
+<space>
+character. Use a
+<newline>
+character as the list terminator and after the separator sequence when
+there is not room on a line for the next list entry. This option disables
+long format output.
+.IP "\fB\(min\fP" 10
+Turn on the
+.BR \(mil
+(ell) option, but when writing the file's owner or group, write
+the file's numeric UID or GID rather than the user or group name,
+respectively. Disable the
+.BR \(miC ,
+.BR \(mim ,
+and
+.BR \(mix
+options.
+.IP "\fB\(mio\fP" 10
+Turn on the
+.BR \(mil
+(ell) option, but disable writing the file's group name or number.
+Disable the
+.BR \(miC ,
+.BR \(mim ,
+and
+.BR \(mix
+options.
+.IP "\fB\(mip\fP" 10
+Write a
+<slash>
+(\c
+.BR '/' )
+after each filename if that file is a directory.
+.IP "\fB\(miq\fP" 10
+Force each instance of non-printable filename characters and
+<tab>
+characters to be written as the
+<question-mark>
+(\c
+.BR '?' )
+character. Implementations may provide this option by default if the
+output is to a terminal device.
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+Reverse the order of the sort to get reverse collating sequence oldest
+first, or smallest file size first depending on the other options
+given.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Indicate the total number of file system blocks consumed by each file
+displayed. If the
+.BR \(mik
+option is also specified, the block size shall be 1\|024 bytes;
+otherwise, the block size is implementation-defined.
+.IP "\fB\(mit\fP" 10
+Sort with the primary key being time modified (most recently modified
+first) and the secondary key being filename in the collating sequence.
+For a symbolic link, the time used as the sort key is that of the
+symbolic link itself, unless
+.IR ls
+is evaluating its file information to be that of the file referenced
+by the link (see the
+.BR \(miH
+and
+.BR \(miL
+options).
+.IP "\fB\(miu\fP" 10
+Use time of last access (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP")
+instead of last modification of the file for sorting (\c
+.BR \(mit )
+or writing (\c
+.BR \(mil ).
+.IP "\fB\(mix\fP" 10
+The same as
+.BR \(miC ,
+except that the multi-text-column output is produced with entries sorted
+across, rather than down, the columns. This option disables long format
+output.
+.IP "\fB\(mi1\fP" 10
+(The numeric digit one.) Force output to be one entry per line.
+This option does not disable long format output. (Long format output is
+enabled by
+.BR \(mig ,
+.BR \(mil
+(ell),
+.BR \(min ,
+and
+.BR \(mio ;
+and disabled by
+.BR \(miC ,
+.BR \(mim ,
+and
+.BR \(mix .)
+.P
+If an option that enables long format output (\c
+.BR \(mig ,
+.BR \(mil
+(ell),
+.BR \(min ,
+and
+.BR "\\(mio\|\" )
+is given with an option that disables long format output (\c
+.BR \(miC ,
+.BR \(mim ,
+and
+.BR \(mix ),
+this shall not be considered an error. The last of these options
+specified shall determine whether long format output is written.
+.P
+If
+.BR \(miR ,
+.BR \(mid ,
+or
+.BR \(mif
+are specified, the results of specifying these mutually-exclusive options
+are specified by the descriptions of these options above. If more
+than one of any of the other options shown in the SYNOPSIS section in
+mutually-exclusive sets are given, this shall not be considered an error;
+the last option specified in each set shall determine the output.
+.P
+Note that if
+.BR \(mit
+is specified,
+.BR \(mic
+and
+.BR \(miu
+are not only mutually-exclusive with each other, they are also
+mutually-exclusive with
+.BR \(miS
+when determining sort order. But even if
+.BR \(miS
+is specified after all occurrences of
+.BR \(mic ,
+.BR \(mit ,
+and
+.BR \(miu ,
+the last use of
+.BR \(mic
+or
+.BR \(miu
+determines the timestamp printed when producing long format output.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file to be written. If the file specified is not
+found, a diagnostic message shall be output on standard error.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.br
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR ls :
+.IP "\fICOLUMNS\fP" 10
+Determine the user's preferred column position width for writing
+multiple text-column output. If this variable contains a string
+representing a decimal integer, the
+.IR ls
+utility shall calculate how many pathname text columns to write (see
+.BR \(miC )
+based on the width provided. If
+.IR COLUMNS
+is not set or invalid, an implementation-defined number of column
+positions shall be assumed, based on the implementation's knowledge of
+the output device. The column width chosen to write the names of files
+in any given directory shall be constant. Filenames shall not be
+truncated to fit into the multiple text-column output.
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for character collation information in determining
+the pathname collation sequence.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi-byte
+characters in arguments) and which characters are defined as printable
+(character class
+.BR print ).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILC_TIME\fP" 10
+Determine the format and contents for date and time strings written by
+.IR ls .
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fITZ\fP" 10
+Determine the timezone for date and time strings written by
+.IR ls .
+If
+.IR TZ
+is unset or null, an unspecified default timezone shall be used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The default format shall be to list one entry per line to standard
+output; the exceptions are to terminals or when one of the
+.BR \(miC ,
+.BR \(mim ,
+or
+.BR \(mix
+options is specified. If the output is to a terminal, the format is
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+When
+.BR \(mim
+is specified, the format used for the last element of the list
+shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIfilename\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The format used for each other element of the list shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s,%s", <\fIfilename\fR>, <\fIseparator\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where, if there is not room for the next element of the list to fit
+within the current line length, <\fIseparator\fP> is a string containing
+an optional
+<space>
+character and a mandatory
+<newline>
+character; otherwise it is a single
+<space>
+character.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mii
+option is specified, the file's file serial number (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP")
+shall be written in the following format before any other output for
+the corresponding entry:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+%u ", <\fIfile serial number\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mil
+option is specified, the following information shall be written for
+files other than character special and block special files:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s %u %s %s %u %s %s\en", <\fIfile mode\fR>, <\fInumber of links\fR>,
+    <\fIowner name\fR>, <\fIgroup name\fR>, <\fIsize\fR>, <\fIdate and time\fR>,
+    <\fIpathname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mil
+option is specified, the following information shall be written
+for character special and block special files:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s %u %s %s %s %s %s\en", <\fIfile mode\fR>, <\fInumber of links\fR>,
+    <\fIowner name\fR>, <\fIgroup name\fR>, <\fIdevice info\fR>, <\fIdate and time\fR>,
+    <\fIpathname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In both cases if the file is a symbolic link and the
+.BR \(miL
+option is also specified, this information shall be for the file
+resolved from the symbolic link, except that the <\fIpathname\fP> field
+shall contain the pathname of the symbolic link itself. If the file is
+a symbolic link and the
+.BR \(miL
+option is not specified, this information shall be about the link itself
+and the <\fIpathname\fP> field shall be of the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s \(mi> %s", <\fIpathname of link\fR>, <\fIcontents of link\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR \(min ,
+.BR \(mig ,
+and
+.BR \(mio
+options use the same format as
+.BR \(mil ,
+but with omitted items and their associated
+<blank>
+characters. See the OPTIONS section.
+.P
+In both the preceding
+.BR \(mil
+forms, if <\fIowner name\fR> or <\fIgroup name\fR> cannot be
+determined, or if
+.BR \(min
+is given, they shall be replaced with their associated numeric values
+using the format
+.BR %u .
+.P
+The <\fIsize\fP> field shall contain the value that would be returned
+for the file in the
+.IR st_size
+field of
+.BR "struct stat"
+(see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP").
+Note that for some file types this value is unspecified.
+.P
+The <\fIdevice\ info\fP> field shall contain implementation-defined
+information associated with the device in question.
+.P
+The <\fIdate\ and\ time\fP> field shall contain the appropriate date
+and timestamp of when the file was last modified. In the POSIX locale,
+the field shall be the equivalent of the output of the following
+.IR date
+command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+date "+%b %e %H:%M"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+if the file has been modified in the last six months, or:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+date "+%b %e %Y"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+(where two
+<space>
+characters are used between
+.BR %e
+and
+.BR %Y )
+if the file has not been modified in the last six months or if the
+modification date is in the future, except that, in both cases, the final
+<newline>
+produced by
+.IR date
+shall not be included and the output shall be as if the
+.IR date
+command were executed at the time of the last modification date of the
+file rather than the current time. When the
+.IR LC_TIME
+locale category is not set to the POSIX locale, a different format and
+order of presentation of this field may be used.
+.P
+If the pathname was specified as a
+.IR file
+operand, it shall be written as specified.
+.P
+The file mode written under the
+.BR \(mil ,
+.BR \(min ,
+.BR \(mig ,
+and
+.BR \(mio
+options shall consist of the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%c%s%s%s%s", <\fIentry type\fR>, <\fIowner permissions\fR>,
+    <\fIgroup permissions\fR>, <\fIother permissions\fR>,
+    <\fIoptional alternate access method flag\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The <\fIoptional\ alternate\ access\ method\ flag\fP> shall be the
+empty string if there is no alternate or additional access control
+method associated with the file; otherwise, it shall be a string
+containing a single printable character that is not a
+<blank>.
+.P
+The <\fIentry\ type\fP> character shall describe the type of file, as
+follows:
+.IP "\fRd\fP" 8
+Directory.
+.IP "\fRb\fP" 8
+Block special file.
+.IP "\fRc\fP" 8
+Character special file.
+.IP "\fRl\fP\ (ell)" 8
+Symbolic link.
+.IP "\fRp\fP" 8
+FIFO.
+.IP "\fR\(mi\fP" 8
+Regular file.
+.P
+Implementations may add other characters to this list to represent
+other implementation-defined file types.
+.P
+The next three fields shall be three characters each:
+.IP "<\fIowner permissions\fP>" 6
+.br
+Permissions for the file owner class (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.4" ", " "File Access Permissions").
+.IP "<\fIgroup permissions\fP>" 6
+.br
+Permissions for the file group class.
+.IP "<\fIother permissions\fP>" 6
+.br
+Permissions for the file other class.
+.P
+Each field shall have three character positions:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If
+.BR 'r' ,
+the file is readable; if
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the file is not readable.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If
+.BR 'w' ,
+the file is writable; if
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the file is not writable.
+.IP " 3." 4
+The first of the following that applies:
+.RS 4 
+.IP "\fRS\fR" 6
+If in <\fIowner\ permissions\fP>, the file is not executable and
+set-user-ID mode is set. If in <\fIgroup\ permissions\fP>, the file is
+not executable and set-group-ID mode is set.
+.IP "\fRs\fR" 6
+If in <\fIowner\ permissions\fP>, the file is executable and
+set-user-ID mode is set. If in <\fIgroup\ permissions\fP>, the file is
+executable and set-group-ID mode is set.
+.IP "\fRT\fR" 6
+If in <\fIother\ permissions\fP> and the file is a directory, search
+permission is not granted to others, and the restricted deletion flag
+is set.
+.IP "\fRt\fR" 6
+If in <\fIother\ permissions\fP> and the file is a directory, search
+permission is granted to others, and the restricted deletion flag
+is set.
+.IP "\fRx\fR" 6
+The file is executable or the directory is searchable.
+.IP "\fR\(mi\fR" 6
+None of the attributes of
+.BR 'S' ,
+.BR 's' ,
+.BR 'T' ,
+.BR 't' ,
+or
+.BR 'x' 
+applies.
+.P
+Implementations may add other characters to this list for the third
+character position. Such additions shall, however, be written in
+lowercase if the file is executable or searchable, and in uppercase if
+it is not.
+.RE
+.P
+If any of the
+.BR \(mil ,
+.BR \(min ,
+.BR \(mis ,
+.BR \(mig ,
+or
+.BR \(mio
+options is specified, each list of files within the directory shall be
+preceded by a status line indicating the number of file system blocks
+occupied by files in the directory in 512-byte units if the
+.BR \(mik
+option is not specified, or 1\|024-byte units if the
+.BR \(mik
+option is specified, rounded up to the next integral number of units,
+if necessary. In the POSIX locale, the format shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"total %u\en", <\fInumber of units in the directory\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If more than one directory, or a combination of non-directory files and
+directories are written, either as a result of specifying multiple
+operands, or the
+.BR \(miR
+option, each list of files within a directory shall be preceded by:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"\en%s:\en", <\fIdirectory name\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If this string is the first thing to be written, the first
+<newline>
+shall not be written. This output shall precede the number of units in
+the directory.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mis
+option is given, each file shall be written with the number of blocks
+used by the file. Along with
+.BR \(miC ,
+.BR \(mi1 ,
+.BR \(mim ,
+or
+.BR \(mix ,
+the number and a
+<space>
+shall precede the filename; with
+.BR \(mil ,
+.BR \(min ,
+.BR \(mig ,
+or
+.BR \(mio ,
+they shall precede each line describing a file.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Many implementations use the
+<equals-sign>
+(\c
+.BR '=' )
+to denote sockets bound to the file system for the
+.BR \(miF
+option. Similarly, many historical implementations use the
+.BR 's' 
+character to denote sockets as the entry type characters for the
+.BR \(mil
+option.
+.P
+It is difficult for an application to use every part of the file modes
+field of
+.IR ls
+.BR \(mil
+in a portable manner. Certain file types and executable bits are not
+guaranteed to be exactly as shown, as implementations may have
+extensions. Applications can use this field to pass directly to a user
+printout or prompt, but actions based on its contents should generally
+be deferred, instead, to the
+.IR test
+utility.
+.P
+The output of
+.IR ls
+(with the
+.BR \(mil
+and related options) contains information that logically could be used
+by utilities such as
+.IR chmod
+and
+.IR touch
+to restore files to a known state. However, this information is
+presented in a format that cannot be used directly by those utilities
+or be easily translated into a format that can be used. A character
+has been added to the end of the permissions string so that
+applications at least have an indication that they may be working in an
+area they do not understand instead of assuming that they can translate
+the permissions string into something that can be used. Future versions
+or related documents may define one or more specific characters to be
+used based on different standard additional or alternative access
+control mechanisms.
+.P
+As with many of the utilities that deal with filenames, the output of
+.IR ls
+for multiple files or in one of the long listing formats must be used
+carefully on systems where filenames can contain embedded white
+space. Systems and system administrators should institute policies and
+user training to limit the use of such filenames.
+.P
+The number of disk blocks occupied by the file that it reports varies
+depending on underlying file system type, block size units reported,
+and the method of calculating the number of blocks. On some file
+system types, the number is the actual number of blocks occupied by the
+file (counting indirect blocks and ignoring holes in the file); on
+others it is calculated based on the file size (usually making an
+allowance for indirect blocks, but ignoring holes).
+.SH EXAMPLES
+An example of a small directory tree being fully listed with
+.IR ls
+.BR "\(milaRF\ a"
+in the POSIX locale:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+total 11
+drwxr-xr-x   3 fox      prog          64 Jul  4 12:07 ./
+drwxrwxrwx   4 fox      prog        3264 Jul  4 12:09 ../
+drwxr-xr-x   2 fox      prog          48 Jul  4 12:07 b/
+-rwxr--r--   1 fox      prog         572 Jul  4 12:07 foo*
+.P
+a/b:
+total 4
+drwxr-xr-x   2 fox      prog          48 Jul  4 12:07 ./
+drwxr-xr-x   3 fox      prog          64 Jul  4 12:07 ../
+-rw-r--r--   1 fox      prog         700 Jul  4 12:07 bar
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+Some historical implementations of the
+.IR ls
+utility show all entries in a directory except dot and dot-dot when a
+superuser invokes
+.IR ls
+without specifying the
+.BR \(mia
+option. When ``normal'' users invoke
+.IR ls
+without specifying
+.BR \(mia ,
+they should not see information about any files with names beginning
+with a
+<period>
+unless they were named as
+.IR file
+operands.
+.P
+Implementations are expected to traverse arbitrary depths when
+processing the
+.BR \(miR
+option. The only limitation on depth should be based on running out of
+physical storage for keeping track of untraversed directories.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mi1
+(one) option was historically found in BSD and BSD-derived
+implementations only. It is required in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 so that conforming
+applications might ensure that output is one entry per line, even if
+the output is to a terminal.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miS
+option was added in Issue 7, but had been provided by several
+implementations for many years. The description given in the
+standard documents historic practice, but does not match much of the
+documentation that described its behavior. Historical documentation
+typically described it as something like:
+.IP "\fB\(miS\fP" 10
+Sort by size (largest size first) instead of by name. Special character
+devices (listed last) are sorted by name.
+.P
+even though the file type was never considered when sorting the output.
+Character special files do typically sort close to the end of the list
+because their file size on most implementations is zero. But they are
+sorted alphabetically with any other files that happen to have the same
+file size (zero), not sorted separately and added to the end.
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 is frequently silent about what happens when mutually-exclusive
+options are specified. Except for
+.BR \(miR ,
+.BR \(mid ,
+and
+.BR \(mif ,
+the
+.IR ls
+utility is required to accept multiple options from each
+mutually-exclusive option set without treating them as errors and to use
+the behavior specified by the last option given in each mutually-exclusive
+set. Since
+.IR ls
+is one of the most aliased commands, it is important that the
+implementation perform intuitively. For example, if the alias were:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+alias ls="ls \(miC"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and the user typed
+.IR ls
+.BR \(mi1
+(one), single-text-column output should result, not an error.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mig ,
+.BR \(mil
+(ell),
+.BR \(min ,
+and
+.BR \(mio
+options are not mutually-exclusive options. They all enable long format
+output. They work together to determine whether the file's owner is
+written (no if
+.BR \(mig
+is present), file's group is written (no if
+.BR \(mio
+is present), and if the file's group or owner is written whether it is
+written as the name (default) or a string representation of the UID or
+GID number (if
+.BR \(min
+is present). The
+.BR \(miC ,
+.BR \(mim ,
+.BR \(mix ,
+and
+.BR \(mi1
+(one) are mutually-exclusive options and the first three of these disable
+long format output. The
+.BR \(mi1
+(one) option does not directly change whether or not long format output
+is enabled, but by overriding
+.BR \(miC ,
+.BR \(mim ,
+and
+.BR \(mix ,
+it can re-enable long format output that had been disabled by one of
+these options.
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard did not describe the BSD
+.BR \(miA
+option (like
+.BR \(mia ,
+but dot and dot-dot are not written out). It has been added due to
+widespread implementation.
+.P
+Implementations may make
+.BR \(miq
+the default for terminals to prevent trojan horse attacks on terminals
+with special escape sequences.
+This is not required because:
+.IP " *" 4
+Some control characters may be useful on some terminals; for example, a
+system might write them as
+.BR \(dq\e001\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dq^A\(dq .
+.IP " *" 4
+Special behavior for terminals is not relevant to applications
+portability.
+.P
+An early proposal specified that the
+<\fIoptional\ alternate\ access\ method\ flag\fR> had to be
+.BR '\(pl' 
+if there was an alternate access method used on the file or
+<space>
+if there was not. This was changed to be
+<space>
+if there is not and a single printable character if there is. This was
+done for three reasons:
+.IP " 1." 4
+There are historical implementations using characters other than
+.BR '\(pl' .
+.IP " 2." 4
+There are implementations that vary this character used in that
+position to distinguish between various alternate access methods in
+use.
+.IP " 3." 4
+The standard developers did not want to preclude future specifications
+that might need a way to specify more than one alternate access
+method.
+.P
+Nonetheless, implementations providing a single alternate access method
+are encouraged to use
+.BR '\(pl' .
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard did not have the
+.BR \(mik
+option, which meant that the
+.BR \(mis
+option could not be used portably as its block size was
+implementation-defined, and the units used to specify the
+number of blocks occupied by files in a directory in an
+.IR ls
+.BR \(mil
+listing were fixed as 512-byte units. The
+.BR \(mik
+option has been added to provide a way for the
+.BR \(mis
+option to be used portably, and for consistency it also changes the
+aforementioned units from 512-byte to 1\|024-byte.
+.P
+The <\fIdate\ and\ time\fP> field in the
+.BR \(mil
+format is specified only for the POSIX locale. As noted, the format can
+be different in other locales. No mechanism for defining this is
+present in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, as the appropriate vehicle is a messaging system;
+that is, the format should be specified as a ``message''.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+Allowing
+.BR \(mif
+to ignore the
+.BR \(miA ,
+.BR \(mig ,
+.BR \(mil ,
+.BR \(min ,
+.BR \(mio ,
+and
+.BR \(mis
+options may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfind\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.4" ", " "File Access Permissions",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIfstatat\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/m4.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/m4.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e533cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/m4.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,841 @@
+'\" et
+.TH M4 "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+m4 \(em macro processor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+m4 \fB[\fR\(mis\fB] [\fR\(miD \fIname\fB[\fR=\fIval\fB]]\fR...\fB [\fR\(miU \fIname\fB]\fR... \fIfile\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR m4
+utility is a macro processor that shall read one or more text files,
+process them according to their included macro statements, and write
+the results to standard output.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR m4
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except that the order of the
+.BR \(miD
+and
+.BR \(miU
+options shall be significant, and options can be interspersed with
+operands.
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Enable line synchronization output for the
+.IR c99
+preprocessor phase (that is,
+.BR #line
+directives).
+.IP "\fB\(miD\ \fIname\fB[\fR=\fIval\fB]\fR" 10
+.br
+Define
+.IR name
+to
+.IR val
+or to null if =\c
+.IR val
+is omitted.
+.IP "\fB\(miU\ \fIname\fR" 10
+Undefine
+.IR name .
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a text file to be processed. If no
+.IR file
+is given, or if it is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be read.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be a text file that is used if no
+.IR file
+operand is given, or if it is
+.BR '\(mi' .
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input file named by the
+.IR file
+operand shall be a text file.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR m4 :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall be the same as the input files, after being
+processed for macro expansion.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used to display strings with the
+.BR errprint
+macro, macro tracing enabled by the
+.BR traceon
+macro, the defined text for macros written by the
+.BR dumpdef
+macro, or for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+The
+.IR m4
+utility shall compare each token from the input against the set of
+built-in and user-defined macros. If the token matches the name of a
+macro, then the token shall be replaced by the macro's defining text, if
+any, and rescanned for matching macro names. Once no portion of the
+token matches the name of a macro, it shall be written to standard
+output. Macros may have arguments, in which case the arguments shall
+be substituted into the defining text before it is rescanned.
+.P
+Macro calls have the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIname\fR(\fIarg1\fR, \fIarg2\fR, ..., \fIargn\fR)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Macro names shall consist of letters, digits, and underscores, where
+the first character is not a digit. Tokens not of this form shall not
+be treated as macros.
+.P
+The application shall ensure that the
+<left-parenthesis>
+immediately follows the name of the macro. If a token matching the name
+of a macro is not followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>,
+it is handled as a use of that macro without arguments.
+.P
+If a macro name is followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>,
+its arguments are the
+<comma>-separated
+tokens between the
+<left-parenthesis>
+and the matching
+<right-parenthesis>.
+Unquoted white-space characters preceding each argument shall be
+ignored. All other characters, including trailing white-space characters,
+are retained.
+<comma>
+characters enclosed between
+<left-parenthesis>
+and
+<right-parenthesis>
+characters do not delimit arguments.
+.P
+Arguments are positionally defined and referenced. The string
+.BR \(dq$1\(dq 
+in the defining text shall be replaced by the first argument. Systems
+shall support at least nine arguments; only the first nine can be
+referenced, using the strings
+.BR \(dq$1\(dq 
+to
+.BR \(dq$9\(dq ,
+inclusive. The string
+.BR \(dq$0\(dq 
+is replaced with the name of the macro. The string
+.BR \(dq$#\(dq 
+is replaced by the number of arguments as a string. The string
+.BR \(dq$*\(dq 
+is replaced by a list of all of the arguments, separated by
+<comma>
+characters. The string
+.BR \(dq$@\(dq 
+is replaced by a list of all of the arguments separated by
+<comma>
+characters, and each argument is quoted using the current left and right
+quoting strings. The string
+.BR \(dq${\(dq 
+produces unspecified behavior.
+.P
+If fewer arguments are supplied than are in the macro definition, the
+omitted arguments are taken to be null. It is not an error if more
+arguments are supplied than are in the macro definition.
+.P
+No special meaning is given to any characters enclosed between matching
+left and right quoting strings, but the quoting strings are themselves
+discarded. By default, the left quoting string consists of a grave accent
+(backquote) and the right quoting string consists of an acute accent
+(single-quote); see also the
+.BR changequote
+macro.
+.P
+Comments are written but not scanned for matching macro names; by
+default, the begin-comment string consists of the
+<number-sign>
+character and the end-comment string consists of a
+<newline>.
+See also the
+.BR changecom
+and
+.BR dnl
+macros.
+.P
+The
+.IR m4
+utility shall make available the following built-in macros. They can be
+redefined, but once this is done the original meaning is lost. Their
+values shall be null unless otherwise stated. In the descriptions
+below, the term
+.IR "defining text"
+refers to the value of the macro: the second argument to the
+.BR define
+macro, among other things. Except for the first argument to the
+.BR eval
+macro, all numeric arguments to built-in macros shall be interpreted as
+decimal values. The string values produced as the defining text of the
+.BR decr ,
+.BR divnum ,
+.BR incr ,
+.BR index ,
+.BR len ,
+and
+.BR sysval
+built-in macros shall be in the form of a decimal-constant as defined
+in the C language.
+.IP "\fBchangecom\fR" 10
+The
+.BR changecom
+macro shall set the begin-comment and end-comment strings. With no
+arguments, the comment mechanism shall be disabled. With a single non-null
+argument, that argument shall become the begin-comment and the
+<newline>
+shall become the end-comment string. With two non-null arguments,
+the first argument shall become the begin-comment string and the second
+argument shall become the end-comment string. The behavior is unspecified
+if either argument is provided but null. Systems shall support comment
+strings of at least five characters.
+.IP "\fBchangequote\fR" 10
+The
+.BR changequote
+macro shall set the begin-quote and end-quote strings. With no
+arguments, the quote strings shall be set to the default values (that
+is, \fR`\|'\fP). The behavior is unspecified if there is a single argument
+or either argument is null. With two non-null arguments, the first
+argument shall become the begin-quote string and the second argument
+shall become the end-quote string. Systems shall support quote strings
+of at least five characters.
+.IP "\fBdecr\fR" 10
+The defining text of the
+.BR decr
+macro shall be its first argument decremented by 1. It shall be an
+error to specify an argument containing any non-numeric characters.
+The behavior is unspecified if
+.BR decr
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.IP "\fBdefine\fR" 10
+The second argument shall become the defining text of the macro
+whose name is the first argument. It is unspecified whether the
+.BR define
+macro deletes all prior definitions of the macro named by its first
+argument or preserves all but the current definition of the macro.
+The behavior is unspecified if
+.BR define
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.IP "\fBdefn\fR" 10
+The defining text of the
+.BR defn
+macro shall be the quoted definition (using the current quoting
+strings) of its arguments. The behavior is unspecified if
+.BR defn
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.IP "\fBdivert\fR" 10
+The
+.IR m4
+utility maintains nine temporary buffers, numbered 1 to 9, inclusive.
+When the last of the input has been processed, any output that has been
+placed in these buffers shall be written to standard output in
+buffer-numerical order. The
+.BR divert
+macro shall divert future output to the buffer specified by its
+argument. Specifying no argument or an argument of 0 shall resume the
+normal output process. Output diverted to a stream with a negative
+number shall be discarded. Behavior is implementation-defined if
+a stream number larger than 9 is specified. It shall be an error to
+specify an argument containing any non-numeric characters.
+.IP "\fBdivnum\fR" 10
+The defining text of the
+.BR divnum
+macro shall be the number of the current output stream as a string.
+.IP "\fBdnl\fR" 10
+The
+.BR dnl
+macro shall cause
+.IR m4
+to discard all input characters up to and including the next
+<newline>.
+.IP "\fBdumpdef\fR" 10
+The
+.BR dumpdef
+macro shall write the defined text to standard error for each of the
+macros specified as arguments, or, if no arguments are specified, for
+all macros.
+.IP "\fBerrprint\fR" 10
+The
+.BR errprint
+macro shall write its arguments to standard error. The behavior
+is unspecified if
+.BR errprint
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.IP "\fBeval\fR" 10
+The
+.BR eval
+macro shall evaluate its first argument as an arithmetic expression,
+using signed integer arithmetic with at least 32-bit precision. At least
+the following C-language operators shall be supported, with precedence,
+associativity, and behavior as described in
+.IR "Section 1.1.2.1" ", " "Arithmetic Precision and Operations":
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+()
+unary +
+unary \(mi
+\&~
+.P
+\&!
+binary *
+/
+%
+binary +
+binary \(mi
+<<
+>>
+<
+<=
+>
+>=
+=\|=
+!=
+binary &
+\&^
+|
+&&
+||
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Systems shall support octal and hexadecimal numbers as in the ISO\ C standard.
+The second argument, if specified, shall set the radix for the result;
+if the argument is blank or unspecified, the default is 10. Behavior is
+unspecified if the radix falls outside the range 2 to 36, inclusive. The
+third argument, if specified, sets the minimum number of digits in the
+result. Behavior is unspecified if the third argument is less than
+zero. It shall be an error to specify the second or third argument
+containing any non-numeric characters. The behavior is unspecified if
+.BR eval
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBifdef\fR" 10
+If the first argument to the
+.BR ifdef
+macro is defined, the defining text shall be the second argument.
+Otherwise, the defining text shall be the third argument, if specified,
+or the null string, if not. The behavior is unspecified if
+.BR ifdef
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.IP "\fBifelse\fR" 10
+The
+.BR ifelse
+macro takes three or more arguments. If the first two arguments compare
+as equal strings (after macro expansion of both arguments), the
+defining text shall be the third argument. If the first two arguments
+do not compare as equal strings and there are three arguments, the
+defining text shall be null. If the first two arguments do not compare
+as equal strings and there are four or five arguments, the defining
+text shall be the fourth argument. If the first two arguments do not
+compare as equal strings and there are six or more arguments, the first
+three arguments shall be discarded and processing shall restart with
+the remaining arguments. The behavior is unspecified if
+.BR ifelse
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.IP "\fBinclude\fR" 10
+The defining text for the
+.BR include
+macro shall be the contents of the file named by the first argument. It
+shall be an error if the file cannot be read. The behavior is unspecified if
+.BR include
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.IP "\fBincr\fR" 10
+The defining text of the
+.BR incr
+macro shall be its first argument incremented by 1. It shall be an
+error to specify an argument containing any non-numeric characters.
+The behavior is unspecified if
+.BR incr
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.IP "\fBindex\fR" 10
+The defining text of the
+.BR index
+macro shall be the first character position (as a string) in the first
+argument where a string matching the second argument begins (zero
+origin), or \(mi1 if the second argument does not occur.
+The behavior is unspecified if
+.BR index
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.IP "\fBlen\fR" 10
+The defining text of the
+.BR len
+macro shall be the length (as a string) of the first argument.
+The behavior is unspecified if
+.BR len
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.IP "\fBm4exit\fR" 10
+Exit from the
+.IR m4
+utility. If the first argument is specified, it is the exit code. The
+default is zero. It shall be an error to specify an argument containing
+any non-numeric characters.
+.IP "\fBm4wrap\fR" 10
+The first argument shall be processed when EOF is reached. If the
+.BR m4wrap
+macro is used multiple times, the arguments specified shall be
+processed in the order in which the
+.BR m4wrap
+macros were processed. The behavior is unspecified if
+.BR m4wrap
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.IP "\fBmaketemp\fR" 10
+The defining text shall be the first argument, with any trailing
+.BR 'X' 
+characters replaced with the current process ID as a string.
+The behavior is unspecified if
+.BR maketemp
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.IP "\fBmkstemp\fR" 10
+The first argument shall be taken as a template for creating an
+empty file, with trailing
+.BR 'X' 
+characters replaced with characters from the portable filename
+character set. The behavior is unspecified if the first argument
+does not end in at least six
+.BR 'X' 
+characters. If a temporary file is successfully created, then the
+defining text of the macro shall be the name of the new file.
+The user ID of the file shall be set to the effective user ID
+of the process. The group ID of the file shall be set to the group ID
+of the file's parent directory or to the effective group ID of the
+process. The file access permission bits are set such that
+only the owner can both read and write the file, regardless of
+the current
+.IR umask
+of the process. If a file could not be created, the defining text
+of the macro shall be the empty string. The behavior is unspecified if
+.BR mkstemp
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.IP "\fBpopdef\fR" 10
+The
+.BR popdef
+macro shall delete the current definition of its arguments, replacing
+that definition with the previous one. If there is no previous
+definition, the macro is undefined. The behavior is unspecified if
+.BR popdef
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.IP "\fBpushdef\fR" 10
+The
+.BR pushdef
+macro shall be equivalent to the
+.BR define
+macro with the exception that it shall preserve any current definition
+for future retrieval using the
+.BR popdef
+macro. The behavior is unspecified if
+.BR pushdef
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.IP "\fBshift\fR" 10
+The defining text for the
+.BR shift
+macro shall be a comma-separated list of its arguments except the first
+one. Each argument shall be quoted using the current quoting strings.
+The behavior is unspecified if
+.BR shift
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.IP "\fBsinclude\fR" 10
+The
+.BR sinclude
+macro shall be equivalent to the
+.BR include
+macro, except that it shall not be an error if the file is inaccessible.
+The behavior is unspecified if
+.BR sinclude
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.IP "\fBsubstr\fR" 10
+The defining text for the
+.BR substr
+macro shall be the substring of the first argument beginning at the
+zero-offset character position specified by the second argument. The
+third argument, if specified, shall be the number of characters to
+select; if not specified, the characters from the starting point to the
+end of the first argument shall become the defining text. It shall not
+be an error to specify a starting point beyond the end of the first
+argument and the defining text shall be null. It shall be an error to
+specify an argument containing any non-numeric characters.
+The behavior is unspecified if
+.BR substr
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.IP "\fBsyscmd\fR" 10
+The
+.BR syscmd
+macro shall interpret its first argument as a shell command line. The
+defining text shall be the string result of that command. The string
+result shall not be rescanned for macros while setting the defining
+text. No output redirection shall be performed by the
+.IR m4
+utility. The exit status value from the command can be retrieved using
+the
+.BR sysval
+macro. The behavior is unspecified if
+.BR syscmd
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.IP "\fBsysval\fR" 10
+The defining text of the
+.BR sysval
+macro shall be the exit value of the utility last invoked by the
+.BR syscmd
+macro (as a string).
+.IP "\fBtraceon\fR" 10
+The
+.BR traceon
+macro shall enable tracing for the macros specified as arguments, or,
+if no arguments are specified, for all macros. The trace output shall
+be written to standard error in an unspecified format.
+.IP "\fBtraceoff\fR" 10
+The
+.BR traceoff
+macro shall disable tracing for the macros specified as arguments, or,
+if no arguments are specified, for all macros.
+.IP "\fBtranslit\fR" 10
+The defining text of the
+.BR translit
+macro shall be the first argument with every character that occurs in
+the second argument replaced with the corresponding character from the
+third argument. If no replacement character is specified for some
+source character because the second argument is longer than the third
+argument, that character shall be deleted from the first argument in
+.BR translit 's
+defining text. The behavior is unspecified if the
+.BR '\(mi' 
+character appears within the second or third argument anywhere besides
+the first or last character. The behavior is unspecified if the same
+character appears more than once in the second argument. The behavior
+is unspecified if
+.BR translit
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.IP "\fBundefine\fR" 10
+The
+.BR undefine
+macro shall delete all definitions (including those preserved using the
+.BR pushdef
+macro) of the macros named by its arguments. The behavior is unspecified if
+.BR undefine
+is not immediately followed by a
+<left-parenthesis>.
+.IP "\fBundivert\fR" 10
+The
+.BR undivert
+macro shall cause immediate output of any text in temporary buffers
+named as arguments, or all temporary buffers if no arguments are
+specified. Buffers can be undiverted into other temporary buffers.
+Undiverting shall discard the contents of the temporary buffer. The
+behavior is unspecified if an argument contains any non-numeric
+characters.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred
+.P
+If the
+.BR m4exit
+macro is used, the exit value can be specified by the input file.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.BR defn
+macro is useful for renaming macros, especially built-ins.
+.P
+Since
+.BR eval
+defers to the ISO\ C standard, some operations have undefined behavior. In some
+implementations, division or remainder by zero cause a fatal signal,
+even if the division occurs on the short-circuited branch of
+.BR \(dq&&\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dq||\(dq .
+Any operation that overflows in signed arithmetic produces undefined
+behavior. Likewise, using the
+.BR shift
+operators with a shift amount that is not positive and smaller
+than the precision is undefined, as is shifting a negative number to
+the right. Historically, not all implementations obeyed C-language
+precedence rules:
+.BR '~' 
+and
+.BR '!' 
+were lower than
+.BR '==' ;
+.BR '==' 
+and
+.BR '!=' 
+were not lower than
+.BR '<' ;
+and
+.BR '|' 
+was not lower than
+.BR '^' ;
+the liberal use of
+.BR \(dq()\(dq 
+can force the desired precedence even with these non-compliant
+implementations. Furthermore, some traditional implementations treated
+.BR '^' 
+as an exponentiation operator, although most implementations now use
+.BR \(dq**\(dq 
+as an extension for this purpose.
+.P
+When a macro has been multiply defined via the
+.BR pushdef
+macro, it is unspecified whether the
+.BR define
+macro will alter only the most recent definition (as though by
+.BR popdef
+and
+.BR pushdef ),
+or replace the entire stack of definitions with a single definition
+(as though by
+.BR undefine
+and
+.BR pushdef ).
+An application desiring particular behavior for the
+.BR define
+macro in this case can redefine it accordingly.
+.P
+Applications should use the
+.BR mkstemp
+macro instead of the obsolescent
+.BR maketemp
+macro for creating temporary files.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+If the file
+.BR m4src
+contains the lines:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+The value of `VER' is "VER".
+ifdef(`VER', ``VER'' is defined to be VER., VER is not defined.)
+ifelse(VER, 1, ``VER'' is `VER'.)
+ifelse(VER, 2, ``VER'' is `VER'., ``VER'' is not 2.)
+end
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+then the command
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+m4 m4src
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+or the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+m4 \(miU VER m4src
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+produces the output:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+The value of VER is "VER".
+VER is not defined.
+.P
+VER is not 2.
+end
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+m4 \(miD VER m4src
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+produces the output:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+The value of VER is "".
+VER is defined to be .
+.P
+VER is not 2.
+end
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+m4 \(miD VER=1 m4src
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+produces the output:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+The value of VER is "1".
+VER is defined to be 1.
+VER is 1.
+VER is not 2.
+end
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+m4 \(miD VER=2 m4src
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+produces the output:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+The value of VER is "2".
+VER is defined to be 2.
+.P
+VER is 2.
+end
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+Historic System V-based behavior treated
+.BR \(dq${\(dq 
+in a macro definition as two literal characters. However, this sequence
+is left unspecified so that implementations may offer extensions
+such as
+.BR \(dq${11}\(dq 
+meaning the eleventh positional parameter. Macros can still be defined with
+appropriate uses of nested quoting to result in a literal
+.BR \(dq${\(dq 
+in the output after rescanning removes the nested quotes.
+.P
+In the
+.BR translit
+built-in, historic System V-based behavior treated
+.BR '\(mi' 
+as a literal; GNU behavior treats it as a range. This version of
+the standard allows either behavior.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIc99\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/mailx.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/mailx.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8657e30
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/mailx.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,3090 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MAILX "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mailx
+\(em process messages
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.SS "Send Mode"
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+mailx \fB[\fR\(mis \fIsubject\fB]\fI address\fR...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Receive Mode"
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+mailx \(mie
+.P
+mailx \fB[\fR\(miHiNn\fB] [\fR\(miF\fB] [\fR\(miu \fIuser\fB]\fR
+.P
+mailx \(mif \fB[\fR\(miHiNn\fB] [\fR\(miF\fB] [\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR mailx
+utility provides a message sending and receiving facility. It has two
+major modes, selected by the options used: Send Mode and Receive
+Mode.
+.P
+On systems that do not support the User Portability Utilities option,
+an application using
+.IR mailx
+shall have the ability to send messages in an unspecified manner (Send
+Mode). Unless the first character of one or more lines is
+<tilde>
+(\c
+.BR '~' ),
+all characters in the input message shall appear in the delivered
+message, but additional characters may be inserted in the message
+before it is retrieved.
+.P
+On systems supporting the User Portability Utilities option,
+mail-receiving capabilities and other interactive features, Receive
+Mode, described below, also shall be enabled.
+.SS "Send Mode"
+.P
+Send Mode can be used by applications or users to send messages from
+the text in standard input.
+.SS "\*!Receive Mode"
+.P
+Receive Mode is more oriented towards interactive users. Mail can be read
+and sent in this interactive mode.
+.P
+When reading mail,
+.IR mailx
+provides commands to facilitate saving, deleting, and responding to
+messages. When sending mail,
+.IR mailx
+allows editing, reviewing, and other modification of the message as it
+is entered.
+.P
+Incoming mail shall be stored in one or more unspecified locations for
+each user, collectively called the system
+.IR mailbox
+for that user. When
+.IR mailx
+is invoked in Receive Mode, the system mailbox shall be the default
+place to find new mail. As messages are read, they shall be marked to
+be moved to a secondary file for storage, unless specific action is
+taken. This secondary file is called the
+.BR mbox
+and is normally located in the directory referred to by the
+.IR HOME
+environment variable (see
+.IR MBOX
+in the ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES section for a description of this file).
+Messages shall remain in this file until explicitly removed. When the
+.BR \(mif
+option is used to read mail messages from secondary files, messages
+shall be retained in those files unless specifically removed. All
+three of these locations\(emsystem mailbox,
+.BR mbox ,
+and secondary file\(emare referred to in this section as simply
+``mailboxes'', unless more specific identification is required.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR mailx
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported. (Only the
+.BR \(mis
+.IR subject
+option shall be required on all systems. The other options are required
+only on systems supporting the User Portability Utilities option.)
+.IP "\fB\(mie\fP" 10
+Test for the presence of mail in the system mailbox. The
+.IR mailx
+utility shall write nothing and exit with a successful return code if
+there is mail to read.
+.IP "\fB\(mif\fP" 10
+Read messages from the file named by the
+.IR file
+operand instead of the system mailbox. (See also
+.BR folder .)
+If no
+.IR file
+operand is specified, read messages from
+.BR mbox
+instead of the system mailbox.
+.IP "\fB\(miF\fP" 10
+Record the message in a file named after the first recipient. The name
+is the login-name portion of the address found first on the
+.BR To:
+line in the mail header. Overrides the
+.BR record
+variable, if set (see
+.IR "Internal Variables in mailx").
+.IP "\fB\(miH\fP" 10
+Write a header summary only.
+.IP "\fB\(mii\fP" 10
+Ignore interrupts. (See also
+.BR ignore .)
+.IP "\fB\(min\fP" 10
+Do not initialize from the system default start-up file. See the
+EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.IP "\fB\(miN\fP" 10
+Do not write an initial header summary.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\0\fIsubject\fR" 10
+Set the
+.BR Subject
+header field to
+.IR subject .
+All characters in the
+.IR subject
+string shall appear in the delivered message. The results are
+unspecified if
+.IR subject
+is longer than
+{LINE_MAX}
+\(mi 10 bytes or contains a
+<newline>.
+.IP "\fB\(miu\0\fIuser\fR" 10
+Read the system mailbox of the login name
+.IR user .
+This shall only be successful if the invoking user has appropriate
+privileges to read the system mailbox of that user.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIaddress\fR" 10
+Addressee of message. When
+.BR \(min
+is specified and no user start-up files are accessed (see the EXTENDED
+DESCRIPTION section), the user or application shall ensure this is an
+address to pass to the mail delivery system. Any system or user
+start-up files may enable aliases (see
+.BR alias
+under
+.IR "Commands in mailx")
+that may modify the form of
+.IR address
+before it is passed to the mail delivery system.
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file to be read instead of the system mailbox when
+.BR \(mif
+is specified. The meaning of the
+.IR file
+option-argument shall be affected by the contents of the
+.BR folder
+internal variable; see
+.IR "Internal Variables in mailx".
+.SH STDIN
+When
+.IR mailx
+is invoked in Send Mode (the first synopsis line), standard input shall
+be the message to be delivered to the specified addresses.
+When in Receive Mode, user commands shall be accepted from
+.IR stdin .
+If the User Portability Utilities option is not supported, standard
+input lines beginning with a
+<tilde>
+(\c
+.BR '~' )
+character produce unspecified results.
+.P
+If the User Portability Utilities option is supported, then in both
+Send and Receive Modes, standard input lines beginning with the escape
+character (usually
+<tilde>
+(\c
+.BR '~' ))
+shall affect processing as described in
+.IR "Command Escapes in mailx".
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+When
+.IR mailx
+is used as described by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, the
+.IR file
+option-argument (see the
+.BR \(mif
+option) and the
+.BR mbox
+shall be text files containing mail messages, formatted as described in
+the OUTPUT FILES section. The nature of the system mailbox is
+unspecified; it need not be a file.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+Some of the functionality described in this section shall be provided on
+implementations that support the User Portability Utilities option
+as described in the text, and is not further shaded for this option.
+.P
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR mailx :
+.IP "\fIDEAD\fP" 10
+Determine the pathname of the file in which to save partial messages in
+case of interrupts or delivery errors. The default shall be
+.BR dead.letter
+in the directory named by the
+.IR HOME
+variable. The behavior of
+.IR mailx
+in saving partial messages is unspecified if the User Portability
+Utilities option is not supported and
+.IR DEAD
+is not defined with the value
+.BR /dev/null .
+.IP "\fIEDITOR\fP" 10
+Determine the name of a utility to invoke when the
+.BR edit
+(see
+.IR "Commands in mailx")
+or
+.BR ~e
+(see
+.IR "Command Escapes in mailx")
+command is used. The default editor is unspecified.
+On XSI-conformant systems it is
+.IR ed .
+The effects of this variable are unspecified if the User Portability
+Utilities option is not supported.
+.IP "\fIHOME\fP" 10
+Determine the pathname of the user's home directory.
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files) and the handling of
+case-insensitive address and header-field comparisons.
+.IP "\fILC_TIME\fP" 10
+This variable may determine the format and contents of the date and
+time strings written by
+.IR mailx .
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 specifies the effects of this variable only for systems
+supporting the User Portability Utilities option.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fILISTER\fP" 10
+Determine a string representing the command for writing the contents of
+the
+.BR folder
+directory to standard output when the
+.BR folders
+command is given (see
+.BR folders
+in
+.IR "Commands in mailx").
+Any string acceptable as a
+.IR command_string
+operand to the
+.IR sh
+.BR \(mic
+command shall be valid. If this variable is null or not set, the output
+command shall be
+.IR ls .
+The effects of this variable are unspecified if the User Portability
+Utilities option is not supported.
+.IP "\fIMAILRC\fP" 10
+Determine the pathname of the start-up file. The default shall be
+.BR .mailrc
+in the directory referred to by the
+.IR HOME
+environment variable. The behavior of
+.IR mailx
+is unspecified if the User Portability Utilities option is not
+supported and
+.IR MAILRC
+is not defined with the value
+.BR /dev/null .
+.IP "\fIMBOX\fP" 10
+Determine a pathname of the file to save messages from the system
+mailbox that have been read. The
+.BR exit
+command shall override this function, as shall saving the message
+explicitly in another file. The default shall be
+.BR mbox
+in the directory named by the
+.IR HOME
+variable. The effects of this variable are unspecified if the User
+Portability Utilities option is not supported.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fIPAGER\fP" 10
+Determine a string representing an output filtering or pagination
+command for writing the output to the terminal. Any string acceptable
+as a
+.IR command_string
+operand to the
+.IR sh
+.BR \(mic
+command shall be valid. When standard output is a terminal device, the
+message output shall be piped through the command if the
+.IR mailx
+internal variable
+.BR crt
+is set to a value less the number of lines in the message; see
+.IR "Internal Variables in mailx".
+If the
+.IR PAGER
+variable is null or not set, the paginator shall be either
+.IR more
+or another paginator utility documented in the system documentation.
+The effects of this variable are unspecified if the User Portability
+Utilities option is not supported.
+.IP "\fISHELL\fP" 10
+Determine the name of a preferred command interpreter. The default
+shall be
+.IR sh .
+The effects of this variable are unspecified if the User Portability
+Utilities option is not supported.
+.IP "\fITERM\fP" 10
+If the internal variable
+.BR screen
+is not specified, determine the name of the terminal type to indicate
+in an unspecified manner the number of lines in a screenful of headers.
+If
+.IR TERM
+is not set or is set to null, an unspecified default terminal type
+shall be used and the value of a screenful is unspecified. The effects
+of this variable are unspecified if the User Portability Utilities
+option is not supported.
+.IP "\fITZ\fP" 10
+This variable may determine the timezone used to calculate date and
+time strings written by
+.IR mailx .
+If
+.IR TZ
+is unset or null, an unspecified default timezone shall be used.
+.IP "\fIVISUAL\fP" 10
+Determine a pathname of a utility to invoke when the
+.BR visual
+command (see
+.IR "Commands in mailx")
+or
+.BR ~v
+command-escape (see
+.IR "Command Escapes in mailx")
+is used. If this variable is null or not set, the full-screen editor
+shall be
+.IR vi .
+The effects of this variable are unspecified if the User Portability
+Utilities option is not supported.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+When
+.IR mailx
+is in Send Mode and standard input is not a terminal, it shall take the
+standard action for all signals.
+.P
+In
+Receive Mode, or in
+Send Mode when standard input is a terminal, if a SIGINT signal
+is received:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If in command mode, the current command, if there is one, shall be
+aborted, and a command-mode prompt shall be written.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If in input mode:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+If
+.BR ignore
+is set,
+.IR mailx
+shall write
+.BR \(dq@\en\(dq ,
+discard the current input line, and continue processing, bypassing the
+message-abort mechanism described in item 2b.
+.IP " b." 4
+If the interrupt was received while sending mail, either when in
+Receive Mode or in
+Send Mode, a message shall be written, and another
+subsequent interrupt, with no other intervening characters typed, shall
+be required to abort the mail message.
+If in Receive Mode and another
+interrupt is received, a command-mode prompt shall be written.
+If in Send Mode and another interrupt is received,
+.IR mailx
+shall terminate with a non-zero status.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+In both cases listed in item b, if the message is not empty:
+.IP " i." 5
+If
+.BR save
+is enabled and the file named by
+.IR DEAD
+can be created, the message shall be written to the file named by
+.IR DEAD .
+If the file exists, the message shall be written to replace the
+contents of the file.
+.IP ii. 5
+If
+.BR save
+is not enabled, or
+the file named by
+.IR DEAD
+cannot be created, the message shall not be saved.
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR mailx
+utility shall take the standard action for all other signals.
+.SH STDOUT
+In command and input modes, all output, including prompts and messages,
+shall be written to standard output.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+Various
+.IR mailx
+commands and command escapes can create or add to files, including the
+.BR mbox ,
+the dead-letter file, and secondary mailboxes. When
+.IR mailx
+is used as described in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, these files shall be text files,
+formatted as follows:
+.sp
+.RS
+\fRline beginning with \fBFrom<space>
+.br
+[\fRone or more \fIheader-lines\fR; see
+.IR "Commands in mailx"]
+.br
+\fIempty line
+.br
+\fB[\fRzero or more \fIbody lines
+.br
+\fIempty line]
+.br
+\fB[\fRline beginning with \fBFrom<space>...]\fR
+.RE
+.P
+where each message begins with the
+.BR "From\0<space>"
+line shown, preceded by the beginning of the file or an empty line.
+(The
+.BR "From <space>"
+line is considered to be part of the message header, but not one of the
+header-lines referred to in
+.IR "Commands in mailx";
+thus, it shall not be affected by the
+.BR discard ,
+.BR ignore ,
+or
+.BR retain
+commands.) The formats of the remainder of the
+.BR "From <space>"
+line and any additional header lines are unspecified, except that none
+shall be empty. The format of a message body line is also unspecified,
+except that no line following an empty line shall start with
+.BR "From <space>" ;
+.IR mailx
+shall modify any such user-entered message body lines (following an
+empty line and beginning with
+.BR "From <space>" )
+by adding one or more characters to precede the
+.BR 'F' ;
+it may add these characters to
+.BR "From <space>"
+lines that are not preceded by an empty line.
+.P
+When a message from the system mailbox or entered by the user is not a
+text file, it is implementation-defined how such a message is stored
+in files written by
+.IR mailx .
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+The functionality in the entire EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section shall
+be provided on implementations supporting the User Portability
+Utilities option.
+The functionality described in this section shall be provided on
+implementations that support the User Portability Utilities option
+(and the rest of this section is not further shaded for this option).
+.P
+The
+.IR mailx
+utility need not support for all character encodings in all
+circumstances. For example, inter-system mail may be restricted to
+7-bit data by the underlying network, 8-bit data need not be portable
+to non-internationalized systems, and so on. Under these
+circumstances, it is recommended that only characters defined in the
+ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard International Reference Version (equivalent to ASCII) 7-bit range
+of characters be used.
+.P
+When
+.IR mailx
+is invoked using one of the Receive Mode synopsis forms, it shall write
+a page of header-summary lines (if
+.BR \(miN
+was not specified and there are messages, see below), followed by a
+prompt indicating that
+.IR mailx
+can accept regular commands (see
+.IR "Commands in mailx");
+this is termed
+.IR "command mode" .
+The page of header-summary lines shall contain the first new message if
+there are new messages, or the first unread message if there are unread
+messages, or the first message. When
+.IR mailx
+is invoked using the Send Mode synopsis and standard input is a
+terminal, if no subject is specified on the command line and the
+.BR asksub
+variable is set, a prompt for the subject shall be written. At this
+point,
+.IR mailx
+shall be in input mode. This input mode shall also be entered when using
+one of the Receive Mode synopsis forms and a reply or new message is
+composed using the
+.BR reply ,
+.BR Reply ,
+.BR followup ,
+.BR Followup ,
+or
+.BR mail
+commands and standard input is a terminal. When the message is typed
+and the end of the message is encountered, the message shall be passed to
+the mail delivery software. Commands can be entered by beginning a line
+with the escape character (by default,
+<tilde>
+(\c
+.BR '~' ))
+followed by a single command letter and optional arguments. See
+.IR "Commands in mailx"
+for a summary of these commands. It is unspecified what effect these
+commands will have if standard input is not a terminal when a message
+is entered using either the Send Mode synopsis, or the Read Mode
+commands
+.BR reply ,
+.BR Reply ,
+.BR followup ,
+.BR Followup ,
+or
+.BR mail .
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+For notational convenience, this section uses the default escape
+character,
+<tilde>,
+in all references and examples.
+.P
+.P
+At any time, the behavior of
+.IR mailx
+shall be governed by a set of environmental and internal variables.
+These are flags and valued parameters that can be set and cleared via
+the
+.IR mailx
+.BR set
+and
+.BR unset
+commands.
+.P
+Regular commands are of the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcommand\fB] [\fImsglist\fB] [\fIargument \fR...\fB]
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If no
+.IR command
+is specified in command mode,
+.BR next
+shall be assumed. In input mode, commands shall be recognized by the
+escape character, and lines not treated as commands shall be taken as
+input for the message.
+.P
+In command mode, each message shall be assigned a sequential number,
+starting with 1.
+.P
+All messages have a state that shall affect how they are displayed in
+the header summary and how they are retained or deleted upon
+termination of
+.IR mailx .
+There is at any time the notion of a
+.IR current
+message, which shall be marked by a
+.BR '>' 
+at the beginning of a line in the header summary. When
+.IR mailx
+is invoked using one of the Receive Mode synopsis forms, the current
+message shall be the first new message, if there is a new message, or
+the first unread message if there is an unread message, or the first
+message if there are any messages, or unspecified if there are no
+messages in the mailbox. Each command that takes an optional list of
+messages (\fImsglist\fP) or an optional single message (\fImessage\fP)
+on which to operate shall leave the current message set to the
+highest-numbered message of the messages specified, unless the command
+deletes messages, in which case the current message shall be set to the
+first undeleted message (that is, a message not in the deleted state)
+after the highest-numbered message deleted by the command, if one
+exists, or the first undeleted message before the highest-numbered
+message deleted by the command, if one exists, or to an unspecified
+value if there are no remaining undeleted messages. All messages
+shall be in one of the following states:
+.IP "\fInew\fR" 10
+The message is present in the system mailbox and has not been viewed by
+the user or moved to any other state. Messages in state
+.IR new
+when
+.IR mailx
+quits shall be retained in the system mailbox.
+.IP "\fIunread\fR" 10
+The message has been present in the system mailbox for more than one
+invocation of
+.IR mailx
+and has not been viewed by the user or moved to any other state.
+Messages in state
+.IR unread
+when
+.IR mailx
+quits shall be retained in the system mailbox.
+.IP "\fIread\fR" 10
+The message has been processed by one of the following commands:
+.BR ~f ,
+.BR ~m ,
+.BR ~F ,
+.BR ~M ,
+.BR copy ,
+.BR mbox ,
+.BR next ,
+.BR pipe ,
+.BR print ,
+.BR Print ,
+.BR top ,
+.BR type ,
+.BR Type ,
+.BR undelete .
+The
+.BR delete ,
+.BR dp ,
+and
+.BR dt
+commands may also cause the next message to be marked as
+.IR read ,
+depending on the value of the
+.BR autoprint
+variable. Messages that are in the system mailbox and in state
+.IR read
+when
+.IR mailx
+quits shall be saved in the
+.BR mbox ,
+unless the internal variable
+.BR hold
+was set. Messages that are in the
+.BR mbox
+or in a secondary mailbox and in state
+.IR read
+when
+.IR mailx
+quits shall be retained in their current location.
+.IP "\fIdeleted\fR" 10
+The message has been processed by one of the following commands:
+.BR delete ,
+.BR dp ,
+.BR dt .
+Messages in state
+.IR deleted
+when
+.IR mailx
+quits shall be deleted. Deleted messages shall be ignored until
+.IR mailx
+quits or changes mailboxes or they are specified to the undelete
+command; for example, the message specification /\c
+.IR string
+shall only search the subject lines of messages that have not yet been
+deleted, unless the command operating on the list of messages is
+.BR undelete .
+No deleted message or deleted message header shall be displayed by any
+.IR mailx
+command other than
+.BR undelete .
+.IP "\fIpreserved\fR" 10
+The message has been processed by a
+.BR preserve
+command. When
+.IR mailx
+quits, the message shall be retained in its current location.
+.IP "\fIsaved\fR" 10
+The message has been processed by one of the following commands:
+.BR save
+or
+.BR write .
+If the current mailbox is the system mailbox, and the internal variable
+.BR keepsave
+is set, messages in the state saved shall be saved to the file
+designated by the
+.IR MBOX
+variable (see the ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES section). If the current
+mailbox is the system mailbox, messages in the state
+.IR saved
+shall be deleted from the current mailbox, when the
+.BR quit
+or
+.BR file
+command is used to exit the current mailbox.
+.P
+The header-summary line for each message shall indicate the state of
+the message.
+.P
+Many commands take an optional list of messages (\c
+.IR msglist )
+on which to operate, which defaults to the current message. A
+.IR msglist
+is a list of message specifications separated by
+<blank>
+characters, which can include:
+.IP "\fRn\fR" 8
+Message number
+.IR n .
+.IP "\fR+\fR" 8
+The next undeleted message, or the next deleted message for the
+.BR undelete
+command.
+.IP "\fR\(mi\fR" 8
+The next previous undeleted message, or the next previous deleted
+message for the
+.BR undelete
+command.
+.IP "\fR.\fR" 8
+The current message.
+.IP "\fR^\fR" 8
+The first undeleted message, or the first deleted message for the
+.BR undelete
+command.
+.IP "\fR$\fR" 8
+The last message.
+.IP "\fR*\fR" 8
+All messages.
+.IP "\fRn\(hym\fR" 8
+An inclusive range of message numbers.
+.IP "\fIaddress\fR" 8
+All messages from
+.IR address ;
+any address as shown in a header summary shall be matchable in this
+form.
+.IP "/\fIstring\fR" 8
+All messages with
+.IR string
+in the subject line (case ignored).
+.IP "\fR:c\fR" 8
+All messages of type
+.IR c ,
+where
+.IR c
+shall be one of:
+.RS 8 
+.IP "\fRd\fR" 6
+Deleted messages.
+.IP "\fRn\fR" 6
+New messages.
+.IP "\fRo\fR" 6
+Old messages (any not in state
+.IR read
+or
+.IR new ).
+.IP "\fRr\fR" 6
+Read messages.
+.IP "\fRu\fR" 6
+Unread messages.
+.RE
+.P
+Other commands take an optional message (\c
+.IR message )
+on which to operate, which defaults to the current message. All of the
+forms allowed for
+.IR msglist
+are also allowed for
+.IR message ,
+but if more than one message is specified, only the first shall be
+operated on.
+.P
+Other arguments are usually arbitrary strings whose usage depends on
+the command involved.
+.SS "Start-Up in mailx"
+.P
+At start-up time,
+.IR mailx
+shall take the following steps in sequence:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Establish all variables at their stated default values.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Process command line options, overriding corresponding default values.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Import any of the
+.IR DEAD ,
+.IR EDITOR ,
+.IR MBOX ,
+.IR LISTER ,
+.IR PAGER ,
+.IR SHELL ,
+or
+.IR VISUAL
+variables that are present in the environment, overriding the
+corresponding default values.
+.IP " 4." 4
+Read
+.IR mailx
+commands from an unspecified system start-up file, unless the
+.BR \(min
+option is given, to initialize any internal
+.IR mailx
+variables and aliases.
+.IP " 5." 4
+Process the start-up file of
+.IR mailx
+commands named in the user
+.IR MAILRC
+variable.
+.P
+Most regular
+.IR mailx
+commands are valid inside start-up files, the most common use being to
+set up initial display options and alias lists. The following commands
+shall be invalid in the start-up file:
+.BR ! ,
+.BR edit ,
+.BR hold ,
+.BR mail ,
+.BR preserve ,
+.BR reply ,
+.BR Reply ,
+.BR shell ,
+.BR visual ,
+.BR Copy ,
+.BR followup ,
+and
+.BR Followup .
+Any errors in the start-up file shall either cause
+.IR mailx
+to terminate with a diagnostic message and a non-zero status or to
+continue after writing a diagnostic message, ignoring the remainder of
+the lines in the start-up file.
+.P
+A blank line in a start-up file shall be ignored.
+.SS "Internal Variables in mailx"
+.P
+The following variables are internal
+.IR mailx
+variables. Each internal variable can be set via the
+.IR mailx
+.BR set
+command at any time. The
+.BR unset
+and
+.BR "set\0no"
+.IR name
+commands can be used to erase variables.
+.P
+In the following list, variables shown as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+variable
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+represent Boolean values. Variables shown as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+variable=\fIvalue\fP
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+shall be assigned string or numeric values. For string values, the
+rules in
+.IR "Commands in mailx"
+concerning filenames and quoting shall also apply.
+.P
+The defaults specified here may be changed by the unspecified system
+start-up file unless the user specifies the
+.BR \(min
+option.
+.IP "\fBallnet\fP" 10
+All network names whose login name components match shall be treated as
+identical. This shall cause the
+.IR msglist
+message specifications to behave similarly. The default shall be
+.BR noallnet .
+See also the
+.BR alternates
+command and the
+.BR metoo
+variable.
+.IP "\fBappend\fR" 10
+Append messages to the end of the
+.BR mbox
+file upon termination instead of placing them at the beginning. The
+default shall be
+.BR noappend .
+This variable shall not affect the
+.BR save
+command when saving to
+.BR mbox .
+.IP "\fBask\fR,\0\fBasksub\fR" 10
+Prompt for a subject line on outgoing mail if one is not specified on
+the command line with the
+.BR \(mis
+option. The
+.BR ask
+and
+.BR asksub
+forms are synonyms; the system shall refer to
+.BR asksub
+and
+.BR noasksub
+in its messages, but shall accept
+.BR ask
+and
+.BR noask
+as user input to mean
+.BR asksub
+and
+.BR noasksub .
+It shall not be possible to set both
+.BR ask
+and
+.BR noasksub ,
+or
+.BR noask
+and
+.BR asksub .
+The default shall be
+.BR asksub ,
+but no prompting shall be done if standard input is not a terminal.
+.IP "\fBaskbcc\fR" 10
+Prompt for the blind copy list. The default shall be
+.BR noaskbcc .
+.IP "\fBaskcc\fR" 10
+Prompt for the copy list. The default shall be
+.BR noaskcc .
+.IP "\fBautoprint\fR" 10
+Enable automatic writing of messages after
+.BR delete
+and
+.BR undelete
+commands. The default shall be
+.BR noautoprint .
+.IP "\fBbang\fR" 10
+Enable the special-case treatment of
+<exclamation-mark>
+characters (\c
+.BR '!' )
+in escape command lines; see the
+.BR escape
+command and
+.IR "Command Escapes in mailx".
+The default shall be
+.BR nobang ,
+disabling the expansion of
+.BR '!' 
+in the
+.IR command
+argument to the
+.BR ~!
+command and the
+.BR ~<! \c
+.IR command
+escape.
+.IP "\fBcmd\fR=\fIcommand\fR" 10
+.br
+Set the default command to be invoked by the
+.BR pipe
+command. The default shall be
+.BR nocmd .
+.IP "\fBcrt\fR=\fInumber\fR" 10
+Pipe messages having more than
+.IR number
+lines through the command specified by the value of the
+.IR PAGER
+variable. The default shall be
+.BR nocrt .
+If it is set to null, the value used is implementation-defined.
+.IP "\fBdebug\fR" 10
+Enable verbose diagnostics for debugging. Messages are not delivered.
+The default shall be
+.BR nodebug .
+.IP "\fBdot\fR" 10
+When
+.BR dot
+is set, a
+<period>
+on a line by itself during message input from a terminal shall also
+signify end-of-file (in addition to normal end-of-file). The default
+shall be
+.BR nodot .
+If
+.BR ignoreeof
+is set (see below), a setting of
+.BR nodot
+shall be ignored and the
+<period>
+is the only method to terminate input mode.
+.IP "\fBescape\fR=\fIc\fR" 10
+Set the command escape character to be the character
+.BR 'c' .
+By default, the command escape character shall be
+<tilde>.
+If
+.BR escape
+is unset,
+<tilde>
+shall be used; if it is set to null, command escaping shall be disabled.
+.IP "\fBflipr\fR" 10
+Reverse the meanings of the
+.BR R
+and
+.BR r
+commands. The default shall be
+.BR noflipr .
+.IP "\fBfolder\fR=\fIdirectory\fR" 10
+.br
+The default directory for saving mail files. User-specified filenames
+beginning with a
+<plus-sign>
+(\c
+.BR '\(pl' )
+shall be expanded by preceding the filename with this directory name
+to obtain the real pathname. If
+.IR directory
+does not start with a
+<slash>
+(\c
+.BR '/' ),
+the contents of
+.IR HOME
+shall be prefixed to it. The default shall be
+.BR nofolder .
+If
+.BR folder
+is unset or set to null, user-specified filenames beginning with
+.BR '\(pl' 
+shall refer to files in the current directory that begin with the
+literal
+.BR '\(pl' 
+character. See also
+.BR outfolder
+below. The
+.BR folder
+value need not affect the processing of the files named in
+.IR MBOX
+and
+.IR DEAD .
+.IP "\fBheader\fR" 10
+Enable writing of the header summary when entering
+.IR mailx
+in Receive Mode. The default shall be
+.BR header .
+.IP "\fBhold\fR" 10
+Preserve all messages that are read in the system mailbox instead of
+putting them in the
+.BR mbox
+save file. The default shall be
+.BR nohold .
+.IP "\fBignore\fR" 10
+Ignore interrupts while entering messages. The default shall be
+.BR noignore .
+.IP "\fBignoreeof\fR" 10
+Ignore normal end-of-file during message input. Input can be
+terminated only by entering a
+<period>
+(\c
+.BR '.' )
+on a line by itself or by the
+.BR ~.
+command escape. The default shall be
+.BR noignoreeof .
+See also
+.BR dot
+above.
+.IP "\fBindentprefix\fR=\fIstring\fR" 10
+.br
+A string that shall be added as a prefix to each line that is inserted
+into the message by the
+.BR ~m
+command escape. This variable shall default to one
+<tab>.
+.IP "\fBkeep\fR" 10
+When a system mailbox, secondary mailbox, or
+.BR mbox
+is empty, truncate it to zero length instead of removing it. The
+default shall be
+.BR nokeep .
+.IP "\fBkeepsave\fR" 10
+Keep the messages that have been saved from the system mailbox into
+other files in the file designated by the variable
+.IR MBOX ,
+instead of deleting them. The default shall be
+.BR nokeepsave .
+.IP "\fBmetoo\fR" 10
+Suppress the deletion of the login name of the user from the recipient
+list when replying to a message or sending to a group. The default
+shall be
+.BR nometoo .
+.IP "\fBonehop\fR" 10
+When responding to a message that was originally sent to several
+recipients, the other recipient addresses are normally forced to be
+relative to the originating author's machine for the response. This
+flag disables alteration of the recipients' addresses, improving
+efficiency in a network where all machines can send directly to all
+other machines (that is, one hop away). The default shall be
+.BR noonehop .
+.IP "\fBoutfolder\fR" 10
+Cause the files used to record outgoing messages to be located in the
+directory specified by the
+.BR folder
+variable unless the pathname is absolute. The default shall be
+.BR nooutfolder .
+See the
+.BR record
+variable.
+.IP "\fBpage\fR" 10
+Insert a
+<form-feed>
+after each message sent through the pipe created by the
+.BR pipe
+command. The default shall be
+.BR nopage .
+.IP "\fBprompt\fR=\fIstring\fR" 10
+.br
+Set the command-mode prompt to
+.IR string .
+If
+.IR string
+is null or if
+.BR noprompt
+is set, no prompting shall occur. The default shall be to prompt with
+the string
+.BR \(dq?\0\(dq .
+.IP "\fBquiet\fR" 10
+Refrain from writing the opening message and version when entering
+.IR mailx .
+The default shall be
+.BR noquiet .
+.IP "\fBrecord\fR=\fIfile\fR" 10
+Record all outgoing mail in the file with the pathname
+.IR file .
+The default shall be
+.BR norecord .
+See also
+.BR outfolder
+above.
+.IP "\fBsave\fR" 10
+Enable saving of messages in the dead-letter file on interrupt or
+delivery error. See the variable
+.IR DEAD
+for the location of the dead-letter file. The default shall be
+.BR save .
+.IP "\fBscreen\fR=\fInumber\fR" 10
+.br
+Set the number of lines in a screenful of headers for the
+.BR headers
+and
+.BR z
+commands. If
+.BR screen
+is not specified, a value based on the terminal type identified by the
+.IR TERM
+environment variable, the window size, the baud rate, or some
+combination of these shall be used.
+.IP "\fBsendwait\fR" 10
+Wait for the background mailer to finish before returning. The default
+shall be
+.BR nosendwait .
+.IP "\fBshowto\fR" 10
+When the sender of the message was the user who is invoking
+.IR mailx ,
+write the information from the
+.BR To:
+line instead of the
+.BR From:
+line in the header summary. The default shall be
+.BR noshowto .
+.IP "\fBsign\fR=\fIstring\fR" 10
+Set the variable inserted into the text of a message when the
+.BR ~a
+command escape is given. The default shall be
+.BR nosign .
+The character sequences
+.BR '\et' 
+and
+.BR '\en' 
+shall be recognized in the variable as
+<tab>
+and
+<newline>
+characters, respectively. (See also
+.BR ~i
+in
+.IR "Command Escapes in mailx".)
+.IP "\fBSign\fR=\fIstring\fR" 10
+Set the variable inserted into the text of a message when the
+.BR ~A
+command escape is given. The default shall be
+.BR noSign .
+The character sequences
+.BR '\et' 
+and
+.BR '\en' 
+shall be recognized in the variable as
+<tab>
+and
+<newline>
+characters, respectively.
+.IP "\fBtoplines\fR=\fInumber\fR" 10
+.br
+Set the number of lines of the message to write with the
+.BR top
+command. The default shall be 5.
+.SS "Commands in mailx"
+.P
+The following
+.IR mailx
+commands shall be provided. In the following list, header refers to
+lines from the message header, as shown in the OUTPUT FILES section.
+Header-line refers to lines within the header that begin with one or
+more non-white-space characters, immediately followed by a
+<colon>
+and white space and continuing until the next line beginning with a
+non-white-space character or an empty line. Header-field refers to the
+portion of a header line prior to the first
+<colon>
+in that line.
+.P
+For each of the commands listed below, the command can be entered as
+the abbreviation (those characters in the Synopsis command word
+preceding the
+.BR '[' ),
+the full command (all characters shown for the command word, omitting
+the
+.BR '[' 
+and
+.BR ']' ),
+or any truncation of the full command down to the abbreviation. For
+example, the
+.BR exit
+command (shown as \fBex[it]\fR in the Synopsis) can be entered as
+.BR ex ,
+.BR exi ,
+or
+.BR exit .
+.P
+The arguments to commands can be quoted, using the following methods:
+.IP " *" 4
+An argument can be enclosed between paired double-quotes (\c
+.BR \(dq\^\(dq )
+or single-quotes (\c
+.BR '\^' );
+any white space, shell word expansion, or
+<backslash>
+characters within the quotes shall be treated literally as part of the
+argument. A double-quote shall be treated literally within single-quotes
+and \fIvice versa\fP. These special properties of the
+<quotation-mark>
+characters shall occur only when they are paired at the beginning and
+end of the argument.
+.IP " *" 4
+A
+<backslash>
+outside of the enclosing quotes shall be discarded and the following
+character treated literally as part of the argument.
+.IP " *" 4
+An unquoted
+<backslash>
+at the end of a command line shall be discarded and the next line shall
+continue the command.
+.br
+.P
+Filenames, where expected, shall be subjected to the following
+transformations, in sequence:
+.IP " *" 4
+If the filename begins with an unquoted
+<plus-sign>,
+and the
+.BR folder
+variable is defined (see the
+.BR folder
+variable), the
+<plus-sign>
+shall be replaced by the value of the
+.BR folder
+variable followed by a
+<slash>.
+If the
+.BR folder
+variable is unset or is set to null, the filename shall be unchanged.
+.IP " *" 4
+Shell word expansions shall be applied to the filename (see
+.IR "Section 2.6" ", " "Word Expansions").
+If more than a single pathname results from this expansion and the
+command is expecting one file, the effects are unspecified.
+.SS "Declare Aliases"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+a\fB[\fRlias\fB] [\fIalias \fB[\fIaddress\fR...\fB]]\fR
+g\fB[\fRroup\fB] [\fIalias \fB[\fIaddress\fR...\fB]]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Add the given addresses to the alias specified by
+.IR alias .
+The names shall be substituted when
+.IR alias
+is used as a recipient address specified by the user in an outgoing
+message (that is, other recipients addressed indirectly through the
+.BR reply
+command shall not be substituted in this manner). Mail address alias
+substitution shall apply only when the alias string is used as a full
+address; for example, when
+.BR hlj
+is an alias,
+.IR hlj@posix.com
+does not trigger the alias substitution. If no arguments are given,
+write a listing of the current aliases to standard output. If only an
+.IR alias
+argument is given, write a listing of the specified alias to standard
+output. These listings need not reflect the same order of addresses
+that were entered.
+.SS "Declare Alternatives"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+alt\fB[\fRernates\fB] \fIname\fR...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+(See also the
+.BR metoo
+variable.) Declare a list of alternative names for the user's login.
+When responding to a message, these names shall be removed from the
+list of recipients for the response. The comparison of names shall be
+in a case-insensitive manner. With no arguments,
+.BR alternates
+shall write the current list of alternative names.
+.SS "Change Current Directory"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cd \fB[\fIdirectory\fB]\fR
+ch\fB[\fRdir\fB] [\fIdirectory\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Change directory. If
+.IR directory
+is not specified, the contents of
+.IR HOME
+shall be used.
+.SS "Copy Messages"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+c\fB[\fRopy\fB] [\fIfile\fB]\fR
+c\fB[\fRopy\fB] [\fImsglist\fB] \fIfile\fR
+C\fB[\fRopy\fB] [\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Copy messages to the file named by the pathname
+.IR file
+without marking the messages as saved. Otherwise, it shall be
+equivalent to the
+.BR save
+command.
+.P
+In the capitalized form, save the specified messages in a file whose
+name is derived from the author of the message to be saved, without
+marking the messages as saved. Otherwise, it shall be equivalent to
+the
+.BR Save
+command.
+.SS "Delete Messages"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+d\fB[\fRelete\fB] [\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Mark messages for deletion from the mailbox. The deletions shall not
+occur until
+.IR mailx
+quits (see the
+.BR quit
+command) or changes mailboxes (see the
+.BR folder
+command). If
+.BR autoprint
+is set and there are messages remaining after the
+.BR delete
+command, the current message shall be written as described for the
+.BR print
+command (see the
+.BR print
+command); otherwise, the
+.IR mailx
+prompt shall be written.
+.SS "Discard Header Fields"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+di\fB[\fRscard\fB] [\fIheader-field\fR...\fB]\fR
+ig\fB[\fRnore\fB] [\fIheader-field\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Suppress the specified header fields when writing messages. Specified
+.IR header-fields
+shall be added to the list of suppressed header fields. Examples of
+header fields to ignore are
+.BR status
+and
+.BR cc .
+The fields shall be included when the message is saved. The
+.BR Print
+and
+.BR Type
+commands shall override this command. The comparison of header fields
+shall be in a case-insensitive manner. If no arguments are specified,
+write a list of the currently suppressed header fields to standard
+output; the listing need not reflect the same order of header fields
+that were entered.
+.P
+If both
+.BR retain
+and
+.BR discard
+commands are given,
+.BR discard
+commands shall be ignored.
+.SS "Delete Messages and Display"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+dp \fB[\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+dt \fB[\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Delete the specified messages as described for the
+.BR delete
+command, except that the
+.BR autoprint
+variable shall have no effect, and the current message shall be written
+only if it was set to a message after the last message deleted by the
+command. Otherwise, an informational message to the effect that there
+are no further messages in the mailbox shall be written, followed by
+the
+.IR mailx
+prompt.
+.SS "Echo a String"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ec\fB[\fRho\fB] \fIstring\fR ...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Echo the given strings, equivalent to the shell
+.IR echo
+utility.
+.SS "Edit Messages"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+e\fB[\fRdit\fB] [\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Edit the given messages. The messages shall be placed in a temporary
+file and the utility named by the
+.IR EDITOR
+variable is invoked to edit each file in sequence. The default
+.IR EDITOR
+is unspecified.
+.P
+The
+.BR edit
+command does not modify the contents of those messages in the mailbox.
+.SS "Exit"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ex\fB[\fRit\fB]\fR
+x\fB[\fRit\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Exit from
+.IR mailx
+without changing the mailbox. No messages shall be saved in the
+.BR mbox
+(see also
+.BR quit ).
+.SS "Change Folder"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fi\fB[\fRle\fB] [\fIfile\fB]\fR
+fold\fB[\fRer\fB] [\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Quit (see the
+.BR quit
+command) from the current file of messages and read in the file named
+by the pathname
+.IR file .
+If no argument is given, the name and status of the current mailbox
+shall be written.
+.P
+Several unquoted special characters shall be recognized when used as
+.IR file
+names, with the following substitutions:
+.IP "\fR%\fR" 8
+The system mailbox for the invoking user.
+.IP "\fR%\fIuser\fR" 8
+The system mailbox for
+.IR user .
+.IP "\fR#\fR" 8
+The previous file.
+.IP "\fR&\fR" 8
+The current
+.BR mbox .
+.IP "\fR+\fIfile\fR" 8
+The named file in the
+.BR folder
+directory. (See the
+.BR folder
+variable.)
+.P
+The default file shall be the current mailbox.
+.SS "Display List of Folders"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fRfolders\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Write the names of the files in the directory set by the
+.BR folder
+variable. The command specified by the
+.IR LISTER
+environment variable shall be used (see the ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
+section).
+.SS "Follow Up Specified Messages"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fo\fB[\fRllowup\fB] [\fImessage\fB]\fR
+F\fB[\fRollowup\fB] [\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+In the lowercase form, respond to a message, recording the response in
+a file whose name is derived from the author of the message. See also
+the
+.BR save
+and
+.BR copy
+commands and
+.BR outfolder .
+.P
+In the capitalized form, respond to the first message in the
+.IR msglist ,
+sending the message to the author of each message in the
+.IR msglist .
+The subject line shall be taken from the first message and the response
+shall be recorded in a file whose name is derived from the author of
+the first message. See also the
+.BR Save
+and
+.BR Copy
+commands and
+.BR outfolder .
+.P
+Both forms shall override the
+.BR record
+variable, if set.
+.SS "Display Header Summary for Specified Messages"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+f\fB[\fRrom\fB] [\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Write the header summary for the specified messages.
+.SS "Display Header Summary"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+h\fB[\fReaders\fB] [\fImessage\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Write the page of headers that includes the message specified. If the
+.IR message
+argument is not specified, the current message shall not change.
+However, if the
+.IR message
+argument is specified, the current message shall become the message
+that appears at the top of the page of headers that includes the
+message specified. The
+.BR screen
+variable sets the number of headers per page. See also the
+.BR z
+command.
+.SS "Help"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+hel\fB[\fRp\fB]\fR
+?
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Write a summary of commands.
+.SS "Hold Messages"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ho\fB[\fRld\fB] [\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+pre\fB[\fRserve\fB] [\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Mark the messages in
+.IR msglist
+to be retained in the mailbox when
+.IR mailx
+terminates. This shall override any commands that might previously
+have marked the messages to be deleted. During the current invocation
+of
+.IR mailx ,
+only the
+.BR delete ,
+.BR dp ,
+or
+.BR dt
+commands shall remove the
+.IR preserve
+marking of a message.
+.SS "Execute Commands Conditionally"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+i\fB[\fRf\fB]\fR s|r
+\fImail-command\fRs
+el\fB[\fRse\fB]
+\fImail-command\fRs
+en\fB[\fRdif\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Execute commands conditionally, where
+.BR "if\0s"
+executes the following
+.IR mail-command s,
+up to an
+.BR else
+or
+.BR endif ,
+if the program is in Send Mode, and
+.BR "if\0r"
+shall cause the
+.IR mail-command s
+to be executed only in Receive Mode.
+.SS "List Available Commands"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+l\fB[\fRist\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Write a list of all commands available. No explanation shall be
+given.
+.SS "Mail a Message"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+m\fB[\fRail\fB] \fIaddress\fR...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Mail a message to the specified addresses or aliases.
+.SS "Direct Messages to mbox"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+mb\fB[\fRox\fB] [\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Arrange for the given messages to end up in the
+.BR mbox
+save file when
+.IR mailx
+terminates normally. See
+.IR MBOX .
+See also the
+.BR exit
+and
+.BR quit
+commands.
+.SS "Process Next Specified Message"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+n\fB[\fRext\fB] [\fImessage\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the current message has not been written (for example, by the
+.BR print
+command) since
+.IR mailx
+started or since any other message was the current message, behave as
+if the
+.BR print
+command was entered. Otherwise, if there is an undeleted message after
+the current message, make it the current message and behave as if the
+.BR print
+command was entered. Otherwise, an informational message to the effect
+that there are no further messages in the mailbox shall be written,
+followed by the
+.IR mailx
+prompt. Should the current message location be the result of an
+immediately preceding
+.BR hold ,
+.BR mbox ,
+.BR preserve ,
+or
+.BR touch
+command,
+.BR next
+will act as if the current message has already been written.
+.SS "Pipe Message"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+pi\fB[\fRpe\fB] [[\fImsglist\fB] \fIcommand\fB]\fR
+| \fB[[\fImsglist\fB] \fIcommand\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Pipe the messages through the given
+.IR command
+by invoking the command interpreter specified by
+.IR SHELL
+with two arguments:
+.BR \(mic
+and
+.IR command .
+(See also
+.IR sh
+.BR \(mic .)
+The application shall ensure that the command is given as a single
+argument. Quoting, described previously, can be used to accomplish
+this. If no arguments are given, the current message shall be piped
+through the command specified by the value of the
+.BR cmd
+variable. If the
+.BR page
+variable is set, a
+<form-feed>
+shall be inserted after each message.
+.SS "Display Message with Headers"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+P\fB[\fRrint\fB] [\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+T\fB[\fRype\fB] [\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Write the specified messages, including all header lines, to standard
+output. Override suppression of lines by the
+.BR discard ,
+.BR ignore ,
+and
+.BR retain
+commands. If
+.BR crt
+is set, the messages longer than the number of lines specified by the
+.BR crt
+variable shall be paged through the command specified by the
+.IR PAGER
+environment variable.
+.SS "Display Message"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+p\fB[\fRrint\fB] [\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+t\fB[\fRype\fB] [\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Write the specified messages to standard output. If
+.BR crt
+is set, the messages longer than the number of lines specified by the
+.BR crt
+variable shall be paged through the command specified by the
+.IR PAGER
+environment variable.
+.SS "Quit"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+q\fB[\fRuit\fB]
+\fIend-of-file\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Terminate
+.IR mailx ,
+storing messages that were read in
+.BR mbox
+(if the current mailbox is the system mailbox and unless
+.BR hold
+is set), deleting messages that have been explicitly saved (unless
+.BR keepsave
+is set), discarding messages that have been deleted, and saving all
+remaining messages in the mailbox.
+.SS "Reply to a Message List"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+R\fB[\fReply\fB] [\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+R\fB[\fRespond\fB] [\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Mail a reply message to the sender of each message in the
+.IR msglist .
+The subject line shall be formed by concatenating
+.BR Re: \c
+<space>
+(unless it already begins with that string) and the subject from the
+first message. If
+.BR record
+is set to a filename, the response shall be saved at the end of that
+file.
+.P
+See also the
+.BR flipr
+variable.
+.SS "Reply to a Message"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+r\fB[\fReply\fB] [\fImessage\fB]\fR
+r\fB[\fRespond\fB] [\fImessage\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Mail a reply message to all recipients included in the header of the
+message. The subject line shall be formed by concatenating
+.BR Re: \c
+<space>
+(unless it already begins with that string) and the subject from the
+message. If
+.BR record
+is set to a filename, the response shall be saved at the end of that
+file.
+.P
+See also the
+.BR flipr
+variable.
+.SS "Retain Header Fields"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ret\fB[\fRain\fB] [\fIheader-field\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Retain the specified header fields when writing messages. This command
+shall override all
+.BR discard
+and
+.BR ignore
+commands. The comparison of header fields shall be in a
+case-insensitive manner. If no arguments are specified, write a list
+of the currently retained header fields to standard output; the listing
+need not reflect the same order of header fields that were entered.
+.SS "Save Messages"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+s\fB[\fRave\fB] [\fIfile\fB]\fR
+s\fB[\fRave\fB] [\fImsglist\fB] \fIfile\fR
+S\fB[\fRave\fB] [\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Save the specified messages in the file named by the pathname
+.IR file ,
+or the
+.BR mbox
+if the
+.IR file
+argument is omitted. The file shall be created if it does not exist;
+otherwise, the messages shall be appended to the file. The message
+shall be put in the state
+.IR saved ,
+and shall behave as specified in the description of the
+.IR saved
+state when the current mailbox is exited by the
+.BR quit
+or
+.BR file
+command.
+.P
+In the capitalized form, save the specified messages in a file whose
+name is derived from the author of the first message. The name of the
+file shall be taken to be the author's name with all network addressing
+stripped off. See also the
+.BR Copy ,
+.BR followup ,
+and
+.BR Followup
+commands and
+.BR outfolder
+variable.
+.SS "Set Variables"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+se\fB[\fRt\fB] [\fIname\fB[\fR=\fB[\fIstring\fB]] \fR...\fB] [\fIname\fR=\fInumber \fR...\fB] [\fRno\fIname \fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Define one or more variables called
+.IR name .
+The variable can be given a null, string, or numeric value. Quoting and
+<backslash>-escapes
+can occur anywhere in
+.IR string ,
+as described previously, as if the
+.IR string
+portion of the argument were the entire argument. The forms
+.IR name
+and
+.IR name =
+shall be equivalent to
+.IR name =""
+for variables that take string values. The
+.BR set
+command without arguments shall write a list of all defined variables
+and their values. The
+.BR no
+.IR name
+form shall be equivalent to
+.BR unset
+.IR name .
+.SS "Invoke a Shell"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sh\fB[\fRell\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Invoke an interactive command interpreter (see also
+.IR SHELL ).
+.SS "Display Message Size"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+si\fB[\fRze\fB] [\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Write the size in bytes of each of the specified messages.
+.SS "Read mailx Commands From a File"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+so\fB[\fRurce\fB] \fIfile\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Read and execute commands from the file named by the pathname
+.IR file
+and return to command mode.
+.SS "Display Beginning of Messages"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+to\fB[\fRp\fB] [\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Write the top few lines of each of the specified messages. If the
+.BR toplines
+variable is set, it is taken as the number of lines to write. The
+default shall be 5.
+.SS "Touch Messages"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+tou\fB[\fRch\fB] [\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Touch the specified messages. If any message in
+.IR msglist
+is not specifically deleted nor saved in a file, it shall be placed in
+the
+.BR mbox
+upon normal termination. See
+.BR exit
+and
+.BR quit .
+.SS "Delete Aliases"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+una\fB[\fRlias\fB] [\fIalias\fB]\fR...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Delete the specified alias names. If a specified alias does not exist,
+the results are unspecified.
+.SS "Undelete Messages"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+u\fB[\fRndelete\fB] [\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Change the state of the specified messages from deleted to read. If
+.BR autoprint
+is set, the last message of those restored shall be written. If
+.IR msglist
+is not specified, the message shall be selected as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+If there are any deleted messages that follow the current message, the
+first of these shall be chosen.
+.IP " *" 4
+Otherwise, the last deleted message that also precedes the current
+message shall be chosen.
+.SS "Unset Variables"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+uns\fB[\fRet\fB] \fIname\fR...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Cause the specified variables to be erased.
+.SS "Edit Message with Full-Screen Editor"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+v\fB[\fRisual\fB] [\fImsglist\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Edit the given messages with a screen editor. Each message shall be
+placed in a temporary file, and the utility named by the
+.IR VISUAL
+variable shall be invoked to edit each file in sequence. The default
+editor shall be
+.IR vi .
+.P
+The
+.BR visual
+command does not modify the contents of those messages in the mailbox.
+.SS "Write Messages to a File"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+w\fB[\fRrite\fB] [\fImsglist\fB] \fIfile\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Write the given messages to the file specified by the pathname
+.IR file ,
+minus the message header. Otherwise, it shall be equivalent to the
+.BR save
+command.
+.SS "Scroll Header Display"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+z\fB[\fR+|\(mi\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Scroll the header display forward (if
+.BR '\(pl' 
+is specified or if no option is specified) or backward (if
+.BR '\(mi' 
+is specified) one screenful. The number of headers written shall be
+set by the
+.BR screen
+variable.
+.SS "Invoke Shell Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+!\fIcommand\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Invoke the command interpreter specified by
+.IR SHELL
+with two arguments:
+.BR \(mic
+and
+.IR command .
+(See also
+.IR sh
+.BR \(mic .)
+If the
+.BR bang
+variable is set, each unescaped occurrence of
+.BR '!' 
+in
+.IR command
+shall be replaced with the command executed by the previous
+.BR !
+command or
+.BR ~!
+command escape.
+.SS "Null Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+# \fIcomment\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+This null command (comment) shall be ignored by
+.IR mailx .
+.SS "Display Current Message Number"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+=
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Write the current message number.
+.SS "Command Escapes in mailx"
+.P
+The following commands can be entered only from input mode, by
+beginning a line with the escape character (by default,
+<tilde>
+(\c
+.BR '~' )).
+See the
+.BR escape
+variable description for changing this special character. The format
+for the commands shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<\fIescape-character\fR><\fIcommand-char\fR><\fIseparator\fR>\fB[\fR<\fIarguments\fR>\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where the <\fIseparator\fP> can be zero or more
+<blank>
+characters.
+.P
+In the following descriptions, the application shall ensure that the
+argument
+.IR command
+(but not
+.IR mailx-command)
+is a shell command string. Any string acceptable to the command
+interpreter specified by the
+.IR SHELL
+variable when it is invoked as
+.IR SHELL
+.BR \(mic
+.IR command_string
+shall be valid. The command can be presented as multiple arguments
+(that is, quoting is not required).
+.P
+Command escapes that are listed with
+.IR msglist
+or
+.IR mailx-command
+arguments are invalid in Send Mode and produce unspecified results.
+.IP "\fB~!\0\fIcommand\fR" 10
+Invoke the command interpreter specified by
+.IR SHELL
+with two arguments:
+.BR \(mic
+and
+.IR command ;
+and then return to input mode. If the
+.BR bang
+variable is set, each unescaped occurrence of
+.BR '!' 
+in
+.IR command
+shall be replaced with the command executed by the previous
+.BR !
+command or
+.BR ~!
+command escape.
+.IP "\fB~.\fR" 10
+Simulate end-of-file (terminate message input).
+.IP "\fB~:\0\fImailx-command\fR,\0\fB~_\0\fImailx-command\fR" 10
+.br
+Perform the command-level request.
+.IP "\fB~?\fR" 10
+Write a summary of command escapes.
+.IP "\fB~A\fR" 10
+This shall be equivalent to
+.BR "~i\0Sign" .
+.IP "\fB~a\fR" 10
+This shall be equivalent to
+.BR "~i\0sign" .
+.IP "\fB~b\0\fIname\fR.\|.\|." 10
+Add the
+.IR name s
+to the blind carbon copy (\c
+.BR Bcc )
+list.
+.IP "\fB~c\0\fIname\fR.\|.\|." 10
+Add the
+.IR name s
+to the carbon copy (\c
+.BR Cc )
+list.
+.IP "\fB~d\fR" 10
+Read in the dead-letter file. See
+.IR DEAD
+for a description of this file.
+.IP "\fB~e\fR" 10
+Invoke the editor, as specified by the
+.IR EDITOR
+environment variable, on the partial message.
+.IP "\fB~\|f\0[\fImsglist\fB]\fR" 10
+Forward the specified messages. The specified messages shall be
+inserted into the current message without alteration. This command
+escape also shall insert message headers into the message with field
+selection affected by the
+.BR discard ,
+.BR ignore ,
+and
+.BR retain
+commands.
+.IP "\fB~\|F\0[\fImsglist\fB]\fR" 10
+This shall be the equivalent of the
+.BR ~f
+command escape, except that all headers shall be included in the
+message, regardless of previous
+.BR discard ,
+.BR ignore ,
+and
+.BR retain
+commands.
+.IP "\fB~h\fR" 10
+If standard input is a terminal, prompt for a
+.BR Subject
+line and the
+.BR To ,
+.BR Cc ,
+and
+.BR Bcc
+lists. Other implementation-defined headers may also be presented
+for editing. If the field is written with an initial value, it can be
+edited as if it had just been typed.
+.IP "\fB~i\0\fIstring\fR" 10
+Insert the value of the named variable, followed by a
+<newline>,
+into the text of the message. If the string is unset or null, the
+message shall not be changed.
+.IP "\fB~\|m\0[\fImsglist\fB]\fR" 10
+Insert the specified messages into the message, prefixing non-empty
+lines with the string in the
+.BR indentprefix
+variable. This command escape also shall insert message headers into
+the message, with field selection affected by the
+.BR discard ,
+.BR ignore ,
+and
+.BR retain
+commands.
+.IP "\fB~\|M\0[\fImsglist\fB]\fR" 10
+This shall be the equivalent of the
+.BR ~m
+command escape, except that all headers shall be included in the
+message, regardless of previous
+.BR discard ,
+.BR ignore ,
+and
+.BR retain
+commands.
+.IP "\fB~p\fR" 10
+Write the message being entered. If the message is longer than
+.BR crt
+lines (see
+.IR "Internal Variables in mailx"),
+the output shall be paginated as described for the
+.IR PAGER
+variable.
+.IP "\fB~q\fR" 10
+Quit (see the
+.BR quit
+command) from input mode by simulating an interrupt. If the body of
+the message is not empty, the partial message shall be saved in the
+dead-letter file. See
+.IR DEAD
+for a description of this file.
+.IP "\fB~r\0\fIfile\fR,\0\fB~<\0\fIfile\fR,\0\fB~r\0!\fIcommand\fR,\0\fB~<\0!\fIcommand\fR" 10
+.br
+Read in the file specified by the pathname
+.IR file .
+If the argument begins with an
+<exclamation-mark>
+(\c
+.BR '!' ),
+the rest of the string shall be taken as an arbitrary system command;
+the command interpreter specified by
+.IR SHELL
+shall be invoked with two arguments:
+.BR \(mic
+and
+.IR command .
+The standard output of
+.IR command
+shall be inserted into the message.
+.IP "\fB~s\0\fIstring\fR" 10
+Set the subject line to
+.IR string .
+.IP "\fB~t\0\fIname\fR.\|.\|." 10
+Add the given
+.IR name s
+to the
+.BR To
+list.
+.IP "\fB~v\fR" 10
+Invoke the full-screen editor, as specified by the
+.IR VISUAL
+environment variable, on the partial message.
+.IP "\fB~w\0\fIfile\fR" 10
+Write the partial message, without the header, onto the file named by
+the pathname
+.IR file .
+The file shall be created or the message shall be appended to it if the
+file exists.
+.IP "\fB~x\fR" 10
+Exit as with
+.BR ~q ,
+except the message shall not be saved in the dead-letter file.
+.IP "\fB~|\0\fIcommand\fR" 10
+Pipe the body of the message through the given
+.IR command
+by invoking the command interpreter specified by
+.IR SHELL
+with two arguments:
+.BR \(mic
+and
+.IR command .
+If the
+.IR command
+returns a successful exit status, the standard output of the command
+shall replace the message. Otherwise, the message shall remain
+unchanged. If the
+.IR command
+fails, an error message giving the exit status shall be written.
+.br
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+When the
+.BR \(mie
+option is specified, the following exit values are returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Mail was found.
+.IP >0 6
+Mail was not found or an error occurred.
+.P
+Otherwise, the following exit values are returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion; note that this status implies that all messages
+were
+.IR sent ,
+but it gives no assurances that any of them were actually
+.IR delivered .
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+When in
+input mode (Receive Mode)
+or Send Mode:
+.IP " *" 4
+If an error is encountered processing an input line beginning
+with a
+<tilde>
+(\c
+.BR '~' )
+character,
+(see
+.IR "Command Escapes in mailx"),
+a diagnostic message shall be written to standard error, and the
+message being composed may be modified, but this condition shall not
+prevent the message from being sent.
+.IP " *" 4
+Other errors shall prevent the sending of the message.
+.P
+When in command mode:
+.IP " *" 4
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Delivery of messages to remote systems requires the existence of
+communication paths to such systems. These need not exist.
+.P
+Input lines are limited to
+{LINE_MAX}
+bytes, but mailers between systems may impose more severe line-length
+restrictions. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not place any restrictions on the length of
+messages handled by
+.IR mailx ,
+and for delivery of local messages the only limitations should be the
+normal problems of available disk space for the target mail file. When
+sending messages to external machines, applications are advised to
+limit messages to less than 100\|000 bytes because some mail gateways
+impose message-length restrictions.
+.P
+The format of the system mailbox is intentionally unspecified. Not all
+systems implement system mailboxes as flat files, particularly with the
+advent of multimedia mail messages. Some system mailboxes may be
+multiple files, others records in a database. The internal format of
+the messages themselves is specified with the historical format from
+Version\ 7, but only after the messages have been saved in some file
+other than the system mailbox. This was done so that many historical
+applications expecting text-file mailboxes are not broken.
+.P
+Some new formats for messages can be expected in the future, probably
+including binary data, bit maps, and various multimedia objects. As
+described here,
+.IR mailx
+is not prohibited from handling such messages, but it must store them
+as text files in secondary mailboxes (unless some extension, such as a
+variable or command line option, is used to change the stored format).
+Its method of doing so is implementation-defined and might include
+translating the data into text file-compatible or readable form or
+omitting certain portions of the message from the stored output.
+.P
+The
+.BR discard
+and
+.BR ignore
+commands are not inverses of the
+.BR retain
+command. The
+.BR retain
+command discards all header-fields except those explicitly retained.
+The
+.BR discard
+command keeps all header-fields except those explicitly discarded. If
+headers exist on the retained header list,
+.BR discard
+and
+.BR ignore
+commands are ignored.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The standard developers felt strongly that a method for applications to
+send messages to specific users was necessary. The obvious example is a
+batch utility, running non-interactively, that wishes to communicate
+errors or results to a user. However, the actual format, delivery
+mechanism, and method of reading the message are clearly beyond the
+scope of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+The intent of this command is to provide a simple, portable interface
+for sending messages non-interactively. It merely defines a
+``front-end'' to the historical mail system. It is suggested that
+implementations explicitly denote the sender and recipient in the body
+of the delivered message. Further specification of formats for either
+the message envelope or the message itself were deliberately not made,
+as the industry is in the midst of changing from the current standards
+to a more internationalized standard and it is probably incorrect, at
+this time, to require either one.
+.P
+Implementations are encouraged to conform to the various delivery
+mechanisms described in the CCITT X.400 standards or to the equivalent
+Internet standards, described in Internet Request for Comment (RFC)
+documents RFC\ 819, RFC\ 822, RFC\ 920, RFC\ 921, and RFC\ 1123.
+.P
+Many historical systems modified each body line that started with
+.BR "From\0"
+by prefixing the
+.BR 'F' 
+with
+.BR '>' .
+It is unnecessary, but allowed, to do that when the string does not
+follow a blank line because it cannot be confused with the next
+header.
+.P
+The
+.BR edit
+and
+.BR visual
+commands merely edit the specified messages in a temporary file. They
+do not modify the contents of those messages in the mailbox; such a
+capability could be added as an extension, such as by using different
+command names.
+.P
+The restriction on a subject line being
+{LINE_MAX}\(mi10
+bytes is based on the historical format that consumes 10 bytes for
+.BR "Subject:\0"
+and the trailing
+<newline>.
+Many historical mailers that a message may encounter on other systems
+are not able to handle lines that long, however.
+.P
+Like the utilities
+.IR logger
+and
+.IR lp ,
+.IR mailx
+admittedly is difficult to test. This was not deemed sufficient
+justification to exclude this utility from this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. It is also arguable
+that it is, in fact, testable, but that the tests themselves are not
+portable.
+.P
+When
+.IR mailx
+is being used by an application that wishes to receive the results as
+if none of the User Portability Utilities option features were
+supported, the
+.IR DEAD
+environment variable must be set to
+.BR /dev/null .
+Otherwise, it may be subject to the file creations described in
+.IR mailx
+ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS. Similarly, if the
+.IR MAILRC
+environment variable is not set to
+.BR /dev/null ,
+historical versions of
+.IR mailx
+and
+.IR Mail
+read initialization commands from a file before processing begins.
+Since the initialization that a user specifies could alter the contents
+of messages an application is trying to send, such applications must
+set
+.IR MAILRC
+to
+.BR /dev/null .
+.P
+The description of
+.IR LC_TIME
+uses ``may affect'' because many historical implementations do not or
+cannot manipulate the date and time strings in the incoming mail
+headers. Some headers found in incoming mail do not have enough
+information to determine the timezone in which the mail originated,
+and, therefore,
+.IR mailx
+cannot convert the date and time strings into the internal form that
+then is parsed by routines like
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+that can take
+.IR LC_TIME
+settings into account. Changing all these times to a user-specified
+format is allowed, but not required.
+.P
+The paginator selected when
+.IR PAGER
+is null or unset is partially unspecified to allow the System V
+historical practice of using
+.IR pg
+as the default. Bypassing the pagination function, such as by declaring
+that
+.IR cat
+is the paginator, would not meet with the intended meaning of this
+description. However, any ``portable user'' would have to set
+.IR PAGER
+explicitly to get his or her preferred paginator on all systems. The
+paginator choice was made partially unspecified, unlike the
+.IR VISUAL
+editor choice (mandated to be
+.IR vi )
+because most historical pagers follow a common theme of user input,
+whereas editors differ dramatically.
+.P
+Options to specify addresses as
+.BR cc
+(carbon copy) or
+.BR bcc
+(blind carbon copy) were considered to be format details and were
+omitted.
+.P
+A zero exit status implies that all messages were
+.IR sent ,
+but it gives no assurances that any of them were actually
+.IR delivered .
+The reliability of the delivery mechanism is unspecified and is an
+appropriate marketing distinction between systems.
+.P
+In order to conform to the Utility Syntax Guidelines, a solution was
+required to the optional
+.IR file
+option-argument to
+.BR \(mif .
+By making
+.IR file
+an operand, the guidelines are satisfied and users remain portable.
+However, it does force implementations to support usage such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+mailx \(mifin mymail.box
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR no
+.IR name
+method of unsetting variables is not present in all historical systems,
+but it is in System V and provides a logical set of commands
+corresponding to the format of the display of options from the
+.IR mailx
+.IR set
+command without arguments.
+.P
+The
+.BR ask
+and
+.BR asksub
+variables are the names selected by BSD and System V, respectively, for
+the same feature. They are synonyms in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+The
+.IR mailx
+.IR echo
+command was not documented in the BSD version and has been omitted here
+because it is not obviously useful for interactive users.
+.P
+The default prompt on the System V
+.IR mailx
+is a
+<question-mark>,
+on BSD
+.IR Mail
+an
+<ampersand>.
+Since this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 chose the
+.IR mailx
+name, it kept the System V default, assuming that BSD users would not
+have difficulty with this minor incompatibility (that they can
+override).
+.P
+The meanings of
+.BR r
+and
+.BR R
+are reversed between System V
+.IR mailx
+and SunOS
+.IR Mail .
+Once again, since this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 chose the
+.IR mailx
+name, it kept the System V default, but allows the SunOS user to
+achieve the desired results using
+.BR flipr ,
+an internal variable in System V
+.IR mailx ,
+although it has not been documented in the SVID.
+.P
+The
+.BR indentprefix
+variable, the
+.BR retain
+and
+.BR unalias
+commands, and the
+.BR ~F
+and
+.BR ~M
+command escapes were adopted from 4.3 BSD
+.IR Mail .
+.P
+The
+.BR version
+command was not included because no sufficiently general specification
+of the version information could be devised that would still be useful
+to a portable user. This command name should be used by suppliers who
+wish to provide version information about the
+.IR mailx
+command.
+.P
+The ``implementation-specific (unspecified) system start-up file''
+historically has been named
+.BR /etc/mailx.rc ,
+but this specific name and location are not required.
+.P
+The intent of the wording for the
+.BR next
+command is that if any command has already displayed the current
+message it should display a following message, but, otherwise, it
+should display the current message. Consider the command sequence:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+next 3
+delete 3
+next
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where the
+.BR autoprint
+option was not set. The normative text specifies that the second
+.BR next
+command should display a message following the third message, because
+even though the current message has not been displayed since it was set
+by the
+.BR delete
+command, it has been displayed since the current message was anything
+other than message number 3. This does not always match historical
+practice in some implementations, where the command file address
+followed by
+.BR next
+(or the default command) would skip the message for which the user had
+searched.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language",
+.IR "\fIed\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIls\fR\^",
+.IR "\fImore\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIvi\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/make.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/make.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..44f900f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/make.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,2487 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MAKE "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+make
+\(em maintain, update, and regenerate groups of programs
+(\fBDEVELOPMENT\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+make \fB[\fR\(mieinpqrst\fB] [\fR\(mif \fImakefile\fB]\fR... \fB[\fR\(mik|\(miS\fB] [\fImacro\fR=\fIvalue\fR...\fB]
+    \fB[\fItarget_name\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR make
+utility shall update files that are derived from other files. A typical
+case is one where object files are derived from the corresponding
+source files. The
+.IR make
+utility examines time relationships and shall update those derived files
+(called targets) that have modified times earlier than the modified
+times of the files (called prerequisites) from which they are derived.
+A description file (makefile) contains a description of the
+relationships between files, and the commands that need to be executed
+to update the targets to reflect changes in their prerequisites. Each
+specification, or rule, shall consist of a target, optional
+prerequisites, and optional commands to be executed when a prerequisite
+is newer than the target. There are two types of rule:
+.IP " 1." 4
+\fIInference rules\fP,
+which have one target name with at least one
+<period>
+(\c
+.BR '.' )
+and no
+<slash>
+(\c
+.BR '/' )
+.IP " 2." 4
+\fITarget rules\fP,
+which can have more than one target name
+.P
+In addition,
+.IR make
+shall have a collection of built-in macros and inference rules that
+infer prerequisite relationships to simplify maintenance of programs.
+.P
+To receive exactly the behavior described in this section, the
+user shall ensure that a portable makefile shall:
+.IP " *" 4
+Include the special target
+.BR .POSIX
+.IP " *" 4
+Omit any special target reserved for implementations (a leading period
+followed by uppercase letters) that has not been specified by this
+section
+.P
+The behavior of
+.IR make
+is unspecified if either or both of these conditions are not met.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR make
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except for Guideline 9.
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mie\fP" 10
+Cause environment variables, including those with null values, to
+override macro assignments within makefiles.
+.IP "\fB\(mif\ \fImakefile\fR" 10
+Specify a different makefile. The argument
+.IR makefile
+is a pathname of a description file, which is also referred to as the
+.IR makefile .
+A pathname of
+.BR '\(mi' 
+shall denote the standard input. There can be multiple instances of
+this option, and they shall be processed in the order specified. The
+effect of specifying the same option-argument more than once is
+unspecified.
+.IP "\fB\(mii\fP" 10
+Ignore error codes returned by invoked commands. This mode is the same
+as if the special target
+.BR .IGNORE
+were specified without prerequisites.
+.IP "\fB\(mik\fP" 10
+Continue to update other targets that do not depend on the current
+target if a non-ignored error occurs while executing the commands to
+bring a target up-to-date.
+.IP "\fB\(min\fP" 10
+Write commands that would be executed on standard output, but do not
+execute them. However, lines with a
+<plus-sign>
+(\c
+.BR '\(pl' )
+prefix shall be executed. In this mode, lines with an at-sign (\c
+.BR '@' )
+character prefix shall be written to standard output.
+.IP "\fB\(mip\fP" 10
+Write to standard output the complete set of macro definitions and
+target descriptions. The output format is unspecified.
+.IP "\fB\(miq\fP" 10
+Return a zero exit value if the target file is up-to-date; otherwise,
+return an exit value of 1. Targets shall not be updated if this option
+is specified. However, a makefile command line (associated with the
+targets) with a
+<plus-sign>
+(\c
+.BR '\(pl' )
+prefix shall be executed.
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+Clear the suffix list and do not use the built-in rules.
+.IP "\fB\(miS\fP" 10
+Terminate
+.IR make
+if an error occurs while executing the commands to bring a target
+up-to-date. This shall be the default and the opposite of
+.BR \(mik .
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Do not write makefile command lines or touch messages (see
+.BR \(mit )
+to standard output before executing. This mode shall be the same as if
+the special target
+.BR .SILENT
+were specified without prerequisites.
+.IP "\fB\(mit\fP" 10
+Update the modification time of each target as though a
+.IR touch
+.IR target
+had been executed. Targets that have prerequisites but no commands (see
+.IR "Target Rules"),
+or that are already up-to-date, shall not be touched in this manner.
+Write messages to standard output for each target file indicating the
+name of the file and that it was touched. Normally, the
+.IR makefile
+command lines associated with each target are not executed. However, a
+command line with a
+<plus-sign>
+(\c
+.BR '\(pl' )
+prefix shall be executed.
+.P
+Any options specified in the
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+environment variable shall be evaluated before any options specified on
+the
+.IR make
+utility command line. If the
+.BR \(mik
+and
+.BR \(miS
+options are both specified on the
+.IR make
+utility command line or by the
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+environment variable, the last option specified shall take precedence.
+If the
+.BR \(mif
+or
+.BR \(mip
+options appear in the
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+environment variable, the result is undefined.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fItarget_name\fR" 10
+Target names, as defined in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section. If no
+target is specified, while
+.IR make
+is processing the makefiles, the first target that
+.IR make
+encounters that is not a special target or an inference rule shall be
+used.
+.IP "\fImacro\fR=\fIvalue\fR" 10
+Macro definitions, as defined in
+.IR "Macros".
+.P
+If the
+.IR target_name
+and
+.IR macro =\c
+.IR value
+operands are intermixed on the
+.IR make
+utility command line, the results are unspecified.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used only if the
+.IR makefile
+option-argument is
+.BR '\(mi' .
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input file, otherwise known as the makefile, is a text file
+containing rules, macro definitions, and comments. See the
+EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR make :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fIMAKEFLAGS\fP" 10
+.br
+This variable shall be interpreted as a character string representing a
+series of option characters to be used as the default options. The
+implementation shall accept both of the following formats (but need not
+accept them when intermixed):
+.RS 10 
+.IP " *" 4
+The characters are option letters without the leading
+<hyphen>
+characters or
+<blank>
+separation used on a
+.IR make
+utility command line.
+.IP " *" 4
+The characters are formatted in a manner similar to a portion of the
+.IR make
+utility command line: options are preceded by
+<hyphen>
+characters and
+<blank>-separated
+as described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+The
+.IR macro =\c
+.IR value
+macro definition operands can also be included. The difference between
+the contents of
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+and the
+.IR make
+utility command line is that the contents of the variable shall not be
+subjected to the word expansions (see
+.IR "Section 2.6" ", " "Word Expansions")
+associated with parsing the command line values.
+.RE
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fIPROJECTDIR\fP" 10
+.br
+Provide a directory to be used to search for SCCS files not found in
+the current directory. In all of the following cases, the search for
+SCCS files is made in the directory
+.BR SCCS
+in the identified directory. If the value of
+.IR PROJECTDIR
+begins with a
+<slash>,
+it shall be considered an absolute pathname; otherwise, the value of
+.IR PROJECTDIR
+is treated as a user name and that user's initial working directory
+shall be examined for a subdirectory
+.BR src
+or
+.BR source .
+If such a directory is found, it shall be used. Otherwise, the value
+is used as a relative pathname.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If
+.IR PROJECTDIR
+is not set or has a null value, the search for SCCS files shall be made
+in the directory
+.BR SCCS
+in the current directory.
+.P
+The setting of
+.IR PROJECTDIR
+affects all files listed in the remainder of this utility description
+for files with a component named
+.BR SCCS .
+.RE
+.P
+The value of the
+.IR SHELL
+environment variable shall not be used as a macro and shall not be
+modified by defining the
+.BR SHELL
+macro in a makefile or on the command line. All other environment
+variables, including those with null values, shall be used as macros,
+as defined in
+.IR "Macros".
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+If not already ignored,
+.IR make
+shall trap SIGHUP, SIGTERM, SIGINT, and SIGQUIT and remove the current
+target unless the target is a directory or the target is a prerequisite
+of the special target
+.BR .PRECIOUS
+or unless one of the
+.BR \(min ,
+.BR \(mip ,
+or
+.BR \(miq
+options was specified. Any targets removed in this manner shall be
+reported in diagnostic messages of unspecified format, written to
+standard error. After this cleanup process, if any,
+.IR make
+shall take the standard action for all other signals.
+.SH STDOUT
+The
+.IR make
+utility shall write all commands to be executed to standard output
+unless the
+.BR \(mis
+option was specified, the command is prefixed with an at-sign, or the
+special target
+.BR .SILENT
+has either the current target as a prerequisite or has no
+prerequisites. If
+.IR make
+is invoked without any work needing to be done, it shall write a
+message to standard output indicating that no action was taken. If the
+.BR \(mit
+option is present and a file is touched,
+.IR make
+shall write to standard output a message of unspecified format
+indicating that the file was touched, including the filename of the
+file.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+Files can be created when the
+.BR \(mit
+option is present. Additional files can also be created by the
+utilities invoked by
+.IR make .
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+The
+.IR make
+utility attempts to perform the actions required to ensure that the
+specified targets are up-to-date. A target is considered out-of-date
+if it is older than any of its prerequisites or if it does not exist.
+The
+.IR make
+utility shall treat all prerequisites as targets themselves and
+recursively ensure that they are up-to-date, processing them in the
+order in which they appear in the rule. The
+.IR make
+utility shall use the modification times of files to determine whether
+the corresponding targets are out-of-date.
+.P
+After
+.IR make
+has ensured that all of the prerequisites of a target are up-to-date
+and if the target is out-of-date, the commands associated with the
+target entry shall be executed. If there are no commands listed for
+the target, the target shall be treated as up-to-date.
+.SS "Makefile Syntax"
+.P
+A makefile can contain rules, macro definitions (see
+.IR "Macros"),
+include lines, and comments. There are two kinds of rules:
+.IR "inference rules"
+and
+.IR "target rules" .
+The
+.IR make
+utility shall contain a set of built-in inference rules. If the
+.BR \(mir
+option is present, the built-in rules shall not be used and the suffix
+list shall be cleared. Additional rules of both types can be specified
+in a makefile. If a rule is defined more than once, the value of the
+rule shall be that of the last one specified. Macros can also be
+defined more than once, and the value of the macro is specified in
+.IR "Macros".
+Comments start with a
+<number-sign>
+(\c
+.BR '#' )
+and continue until an unescaped
+<newline>
+is reached.
+.P
+By default, the following files shall be tried in sequence:
+.BR ./makefile
+and
+.BR ./Makefile .
+If neither
+.BR ./makefile
+or
+.BR ./Makefile
+are found, other implementation-defined files may also be tried.
+On XSI-conformant systems, the additional files
+.BR ./s.makefile ,
+.BR SCCS/s.makefile ,
+.BR ./s.Makefile ,
+and
+.BR SCCS/s.Makefile
+shall also be tried.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mif
+option shall direct
+.IR make
+to ignore any of these default files and use the specified argument as
+a makefile instead. If the
+.BR '\(mi' 
+argument is specified, standard input shall be used.
+.P
+The term
+.IR makefile
+is used to refer to any rules provided by the user, whether in
+.BR ./makefile
+or its variants, or specified by the
+.BR \(mif
+option.
+.P
+The rules in makefiles shall consist of the following types of lines:
+target rules, including special targets (see
+.IR "Target Rules"),
+inference rules (see
+.IR "Inference Rules"),
+macro definitions (see
+.IR "Macros"),
+empty lines, and comments.
+.P
+Target and Inference Rules may contain
+.IR "command lines" .
+Command lines can have a prefix that shall be removed before
+execution (see
+.IR "Makefile Execution").
+.P
+When an escaped
+<newline>
+(one preceded by a
+<backslash>)
+is found anywhere in the makefile except in a command line, an include
+line, or a line immediately preceding an include line, it shall be
+replaced, along with any leading white space on the following line,
+with a single
+<space>.
+When an escaped
+<newline>
+is found in a command line in a makefile, the command line shall
+contain the
+<backslash>,
+the
+<newline>,
+and the next line, except that the first character of the next line
+shall not be included if it is a
+<tab>.
+When an escaped
+<newline>
+is found in an include line or in a line immediately preceding an
+include line, the behavior is unspecified.
+.SS "Include Lines"
+.P
+If the word
+.BR include
+appears at the beginning of a line and is followed by one or more
+<blank>
+characters, the string formed by the remainder of the line shall be
+processed as follows to produce a pathname:
+.IP " *" 4
+The trailing
+<newline>
+and any comment shall be discarded. If the resulting string contains
+any double-quote characters (\c
+.BR '\&"' )
+the behavior is unspecified.
+.IP " *" 4
+The resulting string shall be processed for macro expansion (see
+.IR "Macros".
+.IP " *" 4
+Any
+<blank>
+characters that appear after the first non-\c
+<blank>
+shall be used as separators to divide the macro-expanded string into
+fields. It is unspecified whether any other white-space characters
+are also used as separators. It is unspecified whether pathname
+expansion (see
+.IR "Section 2.13" ", " "Pattern Matching Notation")
+is also performed.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the processing of separators and optional pathname expansion
+results in either zero or two or more non-empty fields, the
+behavior is unspecified. If it results in one non-empty field,
+that field is taken as the pathname.
+.P
+If the pathname does not begin with a
+.BR '/' 
+it shall be treated as relative to the current working directory
+of the process, not relative to the directory containing the makefile.
+If the file does not exist in this location, it is unspecified whether
+additional directories are searched.
+.P
+The contents of the file specified by the pathname shall be read
+and processed as if they appeared in the makefile in place of the
+include line. If the file ends with an escaped
+<newline>
+the behavior is unspecified.
+.P
+The file may itself contain further include lines. Implementations
+shall support nesting of include files up to a depth of at least 16.
+.SS "Makefile Execution"
+.P
+Makefile command lines shall be processed one at a time.
+.P
+Makefile command lines can have one or more of the following prefixes: a
+<hyphen>
+(\c
+.BR '-' ),
+an at-sign (\c
+.BR '@' ),
+or a
+<plus-sign>
+(\c
+.BR '+' ).
+These shall modify the way in which
+.IR make
+processes the command.
+.IP "\fR\(mi\fR" 6
+If the command prefix contains a
+<hyphen>,
+or the
+.BR \(mii
+option is present, or the special target
+.BR .IGNORE
+has either the current target as a prerequisite or has no prerequisites,
+any error found while executing the command shall be ignored.
+.IP "\fR@\fR" 6
+If the command prefix contains an at-sign and the
+.IR make
+utility command line
+.BR \(min
+option is not specified, or the
+.BR \(mis
+option is present, or the special target
+.BR .SILENT
+has either the current target as a prerequisite or has no prerequisites,
+the command shall not be written to standard output before it is executed.
+.IP "\fR+\fR" 6
+If the command prefix contains a
+<plus-sign>,
+this indicates a makefile command line that shall be executed even if
+.BR \(min ,
+.BR \(miq ,
+or
+.BR \(mit
+is specified.
+.P
+An
+.IR "execution line"
+is built from the command line by removing any prefix characters. Except
+as described under the at-sign prefix, the execution line shall be
+written to the standard output, optionally preceded by a
+<tab>.
+The execution line shall then be executed by a shell as if it were passed
+as the argument to the
+\fIsystem\fR()
+interface, except that if errors are not being ignored then the shell
+.BR \(mie
+option shall also be in effect. If errors are being ignored for the
+command (as a result of the
+.BR \(mii
+option, a
+.BR '\(mi' 
+command prefix, or a
+.BR .IGNORE
+special target), the shell
+.BR \(mie
+option shall not be in effect. The environment for the command being
+executed shall contain all of the variables in the environment of
+.IR make .
+.P
+By default, when
+.IR make
+receives a non-zero status from the execution of a command, it shall
+terminate with an error message to standard error.
+.SS "Target Rules"
+.P
+Target rules are formatted as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fItarget \fB[\fItarget\fR...\fB]\fR: \fB[\fIprerequisite\fR...\fB][;\fIcommand\fB]
+[\fR<tab>\fIcommand\fR
+<tab>\fIcommand\fR
+\&...\fB]\fR
+.P
+\fIline that does not begin with \fR<tab>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Target entries are specified by a
+<blank>-separated,
+non-null list of targets, then a
+<colon>,
+then a
+<blank>-separated,
+possibly empty list of prerequisites. Text following a
+<semicolon>,
+if any, and all following lines that begin with a
+<tab>,
+are makefile command lines to be executed to update the target. The
+first non-empty line that does not begin with a
+<tab>
+or
+.BR '#' 
+shall begin a new entry. An empty or blank line, or a line beginning
+with
+.BR '#' ,
+may begin a new entry.
+.P
+Applications shall select target names from the set of characters
+consisting solely of periods, underscores, digits, and alphabetics from
+the portable character set (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set").
+Implementations may allow other characters in target names as
+extensions. The interpretation of targets containing the characters
+.BR '%' 
+and
+.BR '\&"' 
+is implementation-defined.
+.P
+A target that has prerequisites, but does not have any commands, can be
+used to add to the prerequisite list for that target. Only one target
+rule for any given target can contain commands.
+.P
+Lines that begin with one of the following are called
+.IR "special targets"
+and control the operation of
+.IR make :
+.IP "\&\fB.DEFAULT\fR" 10
+If the makefile uses this special target, the application shall ensure
+that it is specified with commands, but without prerequisites. The
+commands shall be used by
+.IR make
+if there are no other rules available to build a target.
+.IP "\&\fB.IGNORE\fR" 10
+Prerequisites of this special target are targets themselves; this shall
+cause errors from commands associated with them to be ignored in the
+same manner as specified by the
+.BR \(mii
+option. Subsequent occurrences of
+.BR .IGNORE
+shall add to the list of targets ignoring command errors. If no
+prerequisites are specified,
+.IR make
+shall behave as if the
+.BR \(mii
+option had been specified and errors from all commands associated with
+all targets shall be ignored.
+.IP "\&\fB.POSIX\fR" 10
+The application shall ensure that this special target is specified
+without prerequisites or commands. If it appears as the first
+non-comment line in the makefile,
+.IR make
+shall process the makefile as specified by this section; otherwise, the
+behavior of
+.IR make
+is unspecified.
+.IP "\&\fB.PRECIOUS\fR" 10
+Prerequisites of this special target shall not be removed if
+.IR make
+receives one of the asynchronous events explicitly described in the
+ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS section. Subsequent occurrences of
+.BR .PRECIOUS
+shall add to the list of precious files. If no prerequisites are
+specified, all targets in the makefile shall be treated as if specified
+with
+.BR .PRECIOUS .
+.IP "\fB.SCCS_GET\fR" 10
+The application shall ensure that this special target is specified
+without prerequisites. If this special target is included in a
+makefile, the commands specified with this target shall replace the
+default commands associated with this special target (see
+.IR "Default Rules").
+The commands specified with this target are used to get all SCCS files
+that are not found in the current directory.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+When source files are named in a dependency list,
+.IR make
+shall treat them just like any other target. Because the source file is
+presumed to be present in the directory, there is no need to add an
+entry for it to the makefile. When a target has no dependencies, but is
+present in the directory,
+.IR make
+shall assume that that file is up-to-date. If, however, an SCCS file
+named
+.BR SCCS/s. \c
+.IR source_file
+is found for a target
+.IR source_file ,
+.IR make
+compares the timestamp of the target file with that of the
+.BR SCCS/s.source_file
+to ensure the target is up-to-date. If the target is missing, or if the
+SCCS file is newer,
+.IR make
+shall automatically issue the commands specified for the
+.BR .SCCS_GET
+special target to retrieve the most recent version. However, if the
+target is writable by anyone,
+.IR make
+shall not retrieve a new version.
+.RE
+.IP "\&\fB.SILENT\fR" 10
+Prerequisites of this special target are targets themselves; this shall
+cause commands associated with them not to be written to the standard
+output before they are executed. Subsequent occurrences of
+.BR .SILENT
+shall add to the list of targets with silent commands. If no
+prerequisites are specified,
+.IR make
+shall behave as if the
+.BR \(mis
+option had been specified and no commands or touch messages associated
+with any target shall be written to standard output.
+.IP "\&\fB.SUFFIXES\fR" 10
+Prerequisites of
+.BR .SUFFIXES
+shall be appended to the list of known suffixes and are used in
+conjunction with the inference rules (see
+.IR "Inference Rules").
+If
+.BR .SUFFIXES
+does not have any prerequisites, the list of known suffixes shall be
+cleared.
+.P
+The special targets
+.BR .IGNORE ,
+.BR .POSIX ,
+.BR .PRECIOUS ,
+.BR .SILENT ,
+and
+.BR .SUFFIXES
+shall be specified without commands.
+.P
+Targets with names consisting of a leading
+<period>
+followed by the uppercase letters
+.BR \(dqPOSIX\(dq 
+and then any other characters are reserved for future standardization.
+Targets with names consisting of a leading
+<period>
+followed by one or more uppercase letters are reserved for implementation
+extensions.
+.SS "Macros"
+.P
+Macro definitions are in the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIstring1\fR = \fB[\fIstring2\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The macro named
+.IR string1
+is defined as having the value of
+.IR string2 ,
+where
+.IR string2
+is defined as all characters, if any, after the
+<equals-sign>,
+up to a comment character (\c
+.BR '#' )
+or an unescaped
+<newline>.
+Any
+<blank>
+characters immediately before or after the
+<equals-sign>
+shall be ignored.
+.P
+Applications shall select macro names from the set of characters
+consisting solely of periods, underscores, digits, and alphabetics from
+the portable character set (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set").
+A macro name shall not contain an
+<equals-sign>.
+Implementations may allow other characters in macro names as extensions.
+.P
+Macros can appear anywhere in the makefile. Macro expansions using
+the forms $(\c
+.IR string1 )
+or ${\c
+.IR string1 }
+shall be replaced by
+.IR string2 ,
+as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+Macros in target lines shall be evaluated when the target line is read.
+.IP " *" 4
+Macros in makefile command lines shall be evaluated when the command is
+executed.
+.IP " *" 4
+Macros in the string before the
+<equals-sign>
+in a macro definition shall be evaluated when the macro assignment
+is made.
+.IP " *" 4
+Macros after the
+<equals-sign>
+in a macro definition shall not be evaluated until the defined macro
+is used in a rule or command, or before the
+<equals-sign>
+in a macro definition.
+.P
+The parentheses or braces are optional if
+.IR string1
+is a single character. The macro $$ shall be replaced by the single
+character
+.BR '$' .
+If
+.IR string1
+in a macro expansion contains a macro expansion, the results are
+unspecified.
+.P
+Macro expansions using the forms $(\c
+.IR string1 \c
+.BR [: \c
+.IR subst1 \c
+.BR =[ \c
+.IR subst2 \c
+.BR ]] )
+or ${\c
+.IR string1 \c
+.BR [: \c
+.IR subst1 \c
+.BR =[ \c
+.IR subst2 \c
+.BR ]] }
+can be used to replace all occurrences of
+.IR subst1
+with
+.IR subst2
+when the macro substitution is performed. The
+.IR subst1
+to be replaced shall be recognized when it is a suffix at the end of a
+word in
+.IR string1
+(where a
+.IR word ,
+in this context, is defined to be a string delimited by the beginning
+of the line, a
+<blank>,
+or a
+<newline>).
+If
+.IR string1
+in a macro expansion contains a macro expansion, the results are
+unspecified.
+.P
+Macro expansions in
+.IR string1
+of macro definition lines shall be evaluated when read. Macro
+expansions in
+.IR string2
+of macro definition lines shall be performed when the macro identified
+by
+.IR string1
+is expanded in a rule or command.
+.P
+Macro definitions shall be taken from the following sources, in the
+following logical order, before the makefile(s) are read.
+.IP " 1." 4
+Macros specified on the
+.IR make
+utility command line, in the order specified on the command line. It is
+unspecified whether the internal macros defined in
+.IR "Internal Macros"
+are accepted from this source.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Macros defined by the
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+environment variable, in the order specified in the environment
+variable. It is unspecified whether the internal macros defined in
+.IR "Internal Macros"
+are accepted from this source.
+.IP " 3." 4
+The contents of the environment, excluding the
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+and
+.IR SHELL
+variables and including the variables with null values.
+.IP " 4." 4
+Macros defined in the inference rules built into
+.IR make .
+.P
+Macro definitions from these sources shall not override macro
+definitions from a lower-numbered source. Macro definitions from a
+single source (for example, the
+.IR make
+utility command line, the
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+environment variable, or the other environment variables) shall
+override previous macro definitions from the same source.
+.P
+Macros defined in the makefile(s) shall override macro definitions that
+occur before them in the makefile(s) and macro definitions from source
+4. If the
+.BR \(mie
+option is not specified, macros defined in the makefile(s) shall
+override macro definitions from source 3. Macros defined in the
+makefile(s) shall not override macro definitions from source 1 or
+source 2.
+.P
+Before the makefile(s) are read, all of the
+.IR make
+utility command line options (except
+.BR \(mif
+and
+.BR \(mip )
+and
+.IR make
+utility command line macro definitions (except any for the
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+macro), not already included in the
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+macro, shall be added to the
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+macro, quoted in an implementation-defined manner such that when
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+is read by another instance of the
+.IR make
+command, the original macro's value is recovered. Other
+implementation-defined options and macros may also be added to the
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+macro. If this modifies the value of the
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+macro, or, if the
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+macro is modified at any subsequent time, the
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+environment variable shall be modified to match the new value of the
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+macro. The result of setting
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+in the Makefile is unspecified.
+.P
+Before the makefile(s) are read, all of the
+.IR make
+utility command line macro definitions (except the
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+macro or the
+.IR SHELL
+macro) shall be added to the environment of
+.IR make .
+Other implementation-defined variables may also be added to the
+environment of
+.IR make .
+.P
+The
+.BR SHELL
+macro shall be treated specially. It shall be provided by
+.IR make
+and set to the pathname of the shell command language interpreter (see
+.IR "\fIsh\fR\^").
+The
+.IR SHELL
+environment variable shall not affect the value of the
+.BR SHELL
+macro. If
+.BR SHELL
+is defined in the makefile or is specified on the command line, it
+shall replace the original value of the
+.BR SHELL
+macro, but shall not affect the
+.IR SHELL
+environment variable. Other effects of defining
+.BR SHELL
+in the makefile or on the command line are implementation-defined.
+.SS "Inference Rules"
+.P
+Inference rules are formatted as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fItarget\fR:
+<tab>\fIcommand
+\fB[\fR<tab>\fIcommand\fB]\fR
+\&...
+.P
+\fIline that does not begin with \fR<tab>\fI or \fR#
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The application shall ensure that the
+.IR target
+portion is a valid target name (see
+.IR "Target Rules")
+of the form
+.BR .s2
+or
+.BR .s1.s2
+(where
+.BR .s1
+and
+.BR .s2
+are suffixes that have been given as prerequisites of the
+.BR .SUFFIXES
+special target and
+.IR s1
+and
+.IR s2
+do not contain any
+<slash>
+or
+<period>
+characters.) If there is only one
+<period>
+in the target, it is a single-suffix inference rule. Targets with two
+periods are double-suffix inference rules. Inference rules can have
+only one target before the
+<colon>.
+.P
+The application shall ensure that the makefile does not specify
+prerequisites for inference rules; no characters other than white space
+shall follow the
+<colon>
+in the first line, except when creating the
+.IR "empty rule,"
+described below. Prerequisites are inferred, as described below.
+.P
+Inference rules can be redefined. A target that matches an existing
+inference rule shall overwrite the old inference rule. An empty rule
+can be created with a command consisting of simply a
+<semicolon>
+(that is, the rule still exists and is found during inference rule search,
+but since it is empty, execution has no effect). The empty rule can also
+be formatted as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIrule\fR: ;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where zero or more
+<blank>
+characters separate the
+<colon>
+and
+<semicolon>.
+.P
+The
+.IR make
+utility uses the suffixes of targets and their prerequisites to infer
+how a target can be made up-to-date. A list of inference rules defines
+the commands to be executed. By default,
+.IR make
+contains a built-in set of inference rules. Additional rules can be
+specified in the makefile.
+.P
+The special target
+.BR .SUFFIXES
+contains as its prerequisites a list of suffixes that shall be used by
+the inference rules. The order in which the suffixes are specified
+defines the order in which the inference rules for the suffixes are
+used. New suffixes shall be appended to the current list by specifying
+a
+.BR .SUFFIXES
+special target in the makefile. A
+.BR .SUFFIXES
+target with no prerequisites shall clear the list of suffixes. An
+empty
+.BR .SUFFIXES
+target followed by a new
+.BR .SUFFIXES
+list is required to change the order of the suffixes.
+.P
+Normally, the user would provide an inference rule for each suffix.
+The inference rule to update a target with a suffix
+.BR .s1
+from a prerequisite with a suffix
+.BR .s2
+is specified as a target
+.BR .s2.s1 .
+The internal macros provide the means to specify general inference
+rules (see
+.IR "Internal Macros").
+.P
+When no target rule is found to update a target, the inference rules
+shall be checked. The suffix of the target (\c
+.BR .s1 )
+to be built is compared to the list of suffixes specified by the
+.BR .SUFFIXES
+special targets. If the
+.BR .s1
+suffix is found in
+.BR .SUFFIXES ,
+the inference rules shall be searched in the order defined for the
+first
+.BR .s2.s1
+rule whose prerequisite file (\c
+.BR $*.s2 )
+exists. If the target is out-of-date with respect to this
+prerequisite, the commands for that inference rule shall be executed.
+.P
+If the target to be built does not contain a suffix and there is no
+rule for the target, the single suffix inference rules shall be
+checked. The single-suffix inference rules define how to build a
+target if a file is found with a name that matches the target name with
+one of the single suffixes appended. A rule with one suffix
+.BR .s2
+is the definition of how to build
+.IR target
+from
+.BR target.s2 .
+The other suffix (\c
+.BR .s1 )
+is treated as null.
+.P
+A
+<tilde>
+(\c
+.BR '~' )
+in the above rules refers to an SCCS file in the current directory.
+Thus, the rule
+.BR .c~.o
+would transform an SCCS C-language source file into an object file (\c
+.BR .o ).
+Because the
+.BR s.
+of the SCCS files is a prefix, it is incompatible with
+.IR make 's
+suffix point of view. Hence, the
+.BR '~' 
+is a way of changing any file reference into an SCCS file reference.
+.SS "Libraries"
+.P
+If a target or prerequisite contains parentheses, it shall be treated
+as a member of an archive library. For the
+.IR lib (\c
+.IR member \c
+.BR .o )
+expression
+.IR lib
+refers to the name of the archive library and
+.IR member \c
+.BR .o
+to the member name. The application shall ensure that the member is an
+object file with the
+.BR .o
+suffix. The modification time of the expression is the modification
+time for the member as kept in the archive library; see
+.IR "\fIar\fR\^".
+The
+.BR .a
+suffix shall refer to an archive library. The
+.BR .s2.a
+rule shall be used to update a member in the library from a file
+with a suffix
+.BR .s2 .
+.SS "Internal Macros"
+.P
+The
+.IR make
+utility shall maintain five internal macros that can be used in target
+and inference rules. In order to clearly define the meaning of these
+macros, some clarification of the terms
+.IR "target rule" ,
+.IR "inference rule" ,
+.IR target ,
+and
+.IR prerequisite
+is necessary.
+.P
+Target rules are specified by the user in a makefile for a particular
+target. Inference rules are user-specified or
+.IR make -specified
+rules for a particular class of target name. Explicit prerequisites
+are those prerequisites specified in a makefile on target lines.
+Implicit prerequisites are those prerequisites that are generated when
+inference rules are used. Inference rules are applied to implicit
+prerequisites or to explicit prerequisites that do not have target
+rules defined for them in the makefile. Target rules are applied to
+targets specified in the makefile.
+.P
+Before any target in the makefile is updated, each of its prerequisites
+(both explicit and implicit) shall be updated. This shall be
+accomplished by recursively processing each prerequisite. Upon
+recursion, each prerequisite shall become a target itself. Its
+prerequisites in turn shall be processed recursively until a target is
+found that has no prerequisites, at which point the recursion stops.
+The recursion shall then back up, updating each target as it goes.
+.P
+In the definitions that follow, the word
+.IR target
+refers to one of:
+.IP " *" 4
+A target specified in the makefile
+.IP " *" 4
+An explicit prerequisite specified in the makefile that becomes the
+target when
+.IR make
+processes it during recursion
+.IP " *" 4
+An implicit prerequisite that becomes a target when
+.IR make
+processes it during recursion
+.P
+In the definitions that follow, the word
+.IR prerequisite
+refers to one of the following:
+.IP " *" 4
+An explicit prerequisite specified in the makefile for a particular
+target
+.IP " *" 4
+An implicit prerequisite generated as a result of locating an
+appropriate inference rule and corresponding file that matches the
+suffix of the target
+.P
+The five internal macros are:
+.IP $@ 8
+The $@ shall evaluate to the full target name of the current target, or
+the archive filename part of a library archive target. It shall be
+evaluated for both target and inference rules.
+.RS 8 
+.P
+For example, in the
+.BR .c.a
+inference rule, $@ represents the out-of-date
+.BR .a
+file to be built. Similarly, in a makefile target rule to build
+.BR lib.a
+from
+.BR file.c ,
+$@ represents the out-of-date
+.BR lib.a .
+.RE
+.IP $% 8
+The $% macro shall be evaluated only when the current target is an
+archive library member of the form
+.IR libname (\c
+.IR member \c
+.BR .o ).
+In these cases, $@ shall evaluate to
+.IR libname
+and $% shall evaluate to
+.IR member \c
+.BR .o .
+The $% macro shall be evaluated for both target and inference rules.
+.RS 8 
+.P
+For example, in a makefile target rule to build
+.BR lib.a (\c
+.BR file.o ),
+$% represents
+.BR file.o ,
+as opposed to $@, which represents
+.BR lib.a .
+.RE
+.IP $? 8
+The $? macro shall evaluate to the list of prerequisites that are
+newer than the current target. It shall be evaluated for both target
+and inference rules.
+.RS 8 
+.P
+For example, in a makefile target rule to build
+.IR prog
+from
+.BR file1.o ,
+.BR file2.o ,
+and
+.BR file3.o ,
+and where
+.IR prog
+is not out-of-date with respect to
+.BR file1.o ,
+but is out-of-date with respect to
+.BR file2.o
+and
+.BR file3.o ,
+$? represents
+.BR file2.o
+and
+.BR file3.o .
+.RE
+.IP $< 8
+In an inference rule, the $< macro shall evaluate to the filename
+whose existence allowed the inference rule to be chosen for the target.
+In the
+.BR .DEFAULT
+rule, the $< macro shall evaluate to the current target name. The
+meaning of the $< macro shall be otherwise unspecified.
+.RS 8 
+.P
+For example, in the
+.BR .c.a
+inference rule, $< represents the prerequisite
+.BR .c
+file.
+.RE
+.IP $* 8
+The $* macro shall evaluate to the current target name with its suffix
+deleted. It shall be evaluated at least for inference rules.
+.RS 8 
+.P
+For example, in the
+.BR .c.a
+inference rule, $*.o represents the out-of-date
+.BR .o
+file that corresponds to the prerequisite
+.BR .c
+file.
+.RE
+.P
+Each of the internal macros has an alternative form. When an uppercase
+.BR 'D' 
+or
+.BR 'F' 
+is appended to any of the macros, the meaning shall be changed to the
+.IR "directory part"
+for
+.BR 'D' 
+and
+.IR "filename part"
+for
+.BR 'F' .
+The directory part is the path prefix of the file without a trailing
+<slash>;
+for the current directory, the directory part is
+.BR '.' .
+When the $? macro contains more than one prerequisite filename, the
+$(?D) and $(?F) (or ${?D} and ${?F}) macros expand to a list of
+directory name parts and filename parts respectively.
+.P
+For the target
+.IR lib (\c
+.IR member \c
+.BR .o )
+and the
+.BR s2.a
+rule, the internal macros shall be defined as:
+.IP $< 8
+.IR member \c
+.BR .s2
+.IP $* 8
+.IR member
+.IP $@ 8
+.IR lib
+.IP $? 8
+.IR member \c
+.BR .s2
+.IP $% 8
+.IR member \c
+.BR .o
+.SS "Default Rules"
+.P
+The default rules for
+.IR make
+shall achieve results that are the same as if the following were used.
+Implementations that do not support the C-Language Development
+Utilities option may omit
+.BR CC ,
+.BR CFLAGS ,
+.BR YACC ,
+.BR YFLAGS ,
+.BR LEX ,
+.BR LFLAGS ,
+.BR LDFLAGS ,
+and the
+.BR .c ,
+.BR .y ,
+and
+.BR .l
+inference rules. Implementations that do not support FORTRAN may omit
+.BR FC ,
+.BR FFLAGS ,
+and the
+.BR .f
+inference rules. Implementations may provide additional macros and
+rules.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fISPECIAL TARGETS\fP
+.P
+\&.SCCS_GET: sccs $(SCCSFLAGS) get $(SCCSGETFLAGS) $@
+.P
+\&.SUFFIXES: .o .c .y .l .a .sh .f .c~ .y~ .l~ .sh~ .f~
+.P
+.IR MACROS
+.P
+MAKE=make
+AR=ar
+ARFLAGS=\(mirv
+YACC=yacc
+YFLAGS=
+LEX=lex
+LFLAGS=
+LDFLAGS=
+CC=c99
+CFLAGS=\(miO
+FC=fort77
+FFLAGS=\(miO 1
+GET=get
+GFLAGS=
+SCCSFLAGS=
+SCCSGETFLAGS=\(mis
+.P
+\fISINGLE SUFFIX RULES\fP
+.P
+\&.c:
+    $(CC) $(CFLAGS) $(LDFLAGS) \(mio $@ $<
+.P
+\&.f:
+    $(FC) $(FFLAGS) $(LDFLAGS) \(mio $@ $<
+.P
+\&.sh:
+    cp $< $@
+    chmod a+x $@
+.P
+\&.c~:
+    $(GET) $(GFLAGS) \(mip $< > $*.c
+    $(CC) $(CFLAGS) $(LDFLAGS) \(mio $@ $*.c
+.P
+\&.f~:
+    $(GET) $(GFLAGS) \(mip $< > $*.f
+    $(FC) $(FFLAGS) $(LDFLAGS) \(mio $@ $*.f
+.P
+\&.sh~:
+    $(GET) $(GFLAGS) \(mip $< > $*.sh
+    cp $*.sh $@
+    chmod a+x $@
+.P
+\fIDOUBLE SUFFIX RULES\fP
+.P
+\&.c.o:
+    $(CC) $(CFLAGS) \(mic $<
+.P
+\&.f.o:
+    $(FC) $(FFLAGS) \(mic $<
+.P
+\&.y.o:
+    $(YACC) $(YFLAGS) $<
+    $(CC) $(CFLAGS) \(mic y.tab.c
+    rm \(mif y.tab.c
+    mv y.tab.o $@
+.P
+\&.l.o:
+    $(LEX) $(LFLAGS) $<
+    $(CC) $(CFLAGS) \(mic lex.yy.c
+    rm \(mif lex.yy.c
+    mv lex.yy.o $@
+.P
+\&.y.c:
+    $(YACC) $(YFLAGS) $<
+    mv y.tab.c $@
+.P
+\&.l.c:
+    $(LEX) $(LFLAGS) $<
+    mv lex.yy.c $@
+.P
+\&.c~.o:
+    $(GET) $(GFLAGS) \(mip $< > $*.c
+    $(CC) $(CFLAGS) \(mic $*.c
+.P
+\&.f~.o:
+    $(GET) $(GFLAGS) \(mip $< > $*.f
+    $(FC) $(FFLAGS) \(mic $*.f
+.P
+\&.y~.o:
+    $(GET) $(GFLAGS) \(mip $< > $*.y
+    $(YACC) $(YFLAGS) $*.y
+    $(CC) $(CFLAGS) \(mic y.tab.c
+    rm \(mif y.tab.c
+    mv y.tab.o $@
+.P
+\&.l~.o:
+    $(GET) $(GFLAGS) \(mip $< > $*.l
+    $(LEX) $(LFLAGS) $*.l
+    $(CC) $(CFLAGS) \(mic lex.yy.c
+    rm \(mif lex.yy.c
+    mv lex.yy.o $@
+.P
+\&.y~.c:
+    $(GET) $(GFLAGS) \(mip $< > $*.y
+    $(YACC) $(YFLAGS) $*.y
+    mv y.tab.c $@
+.P
+\&.l~.c:
+    $(GET) $(GFLAGS) \(mip $< > $*.l
+    $(LEX) $(LFLAGS) $*.l
+    mv lex.yy.c $@
+.P
+\&.c.a:
+    $(CC) \(mic $(CFLAGS) $<
+    $(AR) $(ARFLAGS) $@ $*.o
+    rm \(mif $*.o
+.P
+\&.f.a:
+    $(FC) \(mic $(FFLAGS) $<
+    $(AR) $(ARFLAGS) $@ $*.o
+    rm \(mif $*.o
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+When the
+.BR \(miq
+option is specified, the
+.IR make
+utility shall exit with one of the following values:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP "\01" 6
+The target was not up-to-date.
+.IP >1 6
+An error occurred.
+.P
+When the
+.BR \(miq
+option is not specified, the
+.IR make
+utility shall exit with one of the following values:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If there is a source file (such as
+.BR ./source.c )
+and there are two SCCS files corresponding to it (\c
+.BR ./s.source.c
+and
+.BR ./SCCS/s.source.c ),
+on XSI-conformant systems
+.IR make
+uses the SCCS file in the current directory. However, users are
+advised to use the underlying SCCS utilities (\c
+.IR admin ,
+.IR delta ,
+.IR get ,
+and so on) or the
+.IR sccs
+utility for all source files in a given directory. If both forms are
+used for a given source file, future developers are very likely to be
+confused.
+.P
+It is incumbent upon portable makefiles to specify the
+.BR .POSIX
+special target in order to guarantee that they are not affected by
+local extensions.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mik
+and
+.BR \(miS
+options are both present so that the relationship between the command
+line, the
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+variable, and the makefile can be controlled precisely. If the
+.BR k
+flag is passed in
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+and a command is of the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+$(MAKE) \(miS foo
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+then the default behavior is restored for the child
+.IR make .
+.P
+When the
+.BR \(min
+option is specified, it is always added to
+.IR MAKEFLAGS .
+This allows a recursive
+.IR make
+.BR \(min
+.IR target
+to be used to see all of the action that would be taken to update
+.IR target .
+.P
+Because of widespread historical practice, interpreting a
+<number-sign>
+(\c
+.BR '#' )
+inside a variable as the start of a comment has the unfortunate
+side-effect of making it impossible to place a
+<number-sign>
+in a variable, thus forbidding something like:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+CFLAGS = "\(miD COMMENT_CHAR='#'"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Many historical
+.IR make
+utilities stop chaining together inference rules when an intermediate
+target is nonexistent. For example, it might be possible for a
+.IR make
+to determine that both
+.BR .y.c
+and
+.BR .c.o
+could be used to convert a
+.BR .y
+to a
+.BR .o .
+Instead, in this case,
+.IR make
+requires the use of a
+.BR .y.o
+rule.
+.P
+The best way to provide portable makefiles is to include all of the
+rules needed in the makefile itself. The rules provided use only
+features provided by other parts of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. The default rules include
+rules for optional commands in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. Only rules pertaining to commands
+that are provided are needed in an implementation's default set.
+.P
+Macros used within other macros are evaluated when the new macro is
+used rather than when the new macro is defined. Therefore:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+MACRO = \fIvalue1\fP
+NEW   = $(MACRO)
+MACRO = \fIvalue2\fP
+.P
+target:
+    echo $(NEW)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would produce
+.IR value2
+and not
+.IR value1
+since
+.BR NEW
+was not expanded until it was needed in the
+.IR echo
+command line.
+.P
+Some historical applications have been known to intermix
+.IR target_name
+and
+.IR macro=name
+operands on the command line, expecting that all of the macros are
+processed before any of the targets are dealt with. Conforming
+applications do not do this, although some backwards-compatibility
+support may be included in some implementations.
+.P
+The following characters in filenames may give trouble:
+.BR '=' ,
+.BR ':' ,
+.BR '`' ,
+single-quote, and
+.BR '@' .
+In include filenames, pattern matching characters and
+.BR '\&"' 
+should also be avoided, as they may be treated as special by some
+implementations.
+.P
+For inference rules, the description of $< and $? seem similar. However,
+an example shows the minor difference. In a makefile containing:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+foo.o: foo.h
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+if
+.BR foo.h
+is newer than
+.BR foo.o ,
+yet
+.BR foo.c
+is older than
+.BR foo.o ,
+the built-in rule to make
+.BR foo.o
+from
+.BR foo.c
+is used, with $< equal to
+.BR foo.c
+and $? equal to
+.BR foo.h .
+If
+.BR foo.c
+is also newer than
+.BR foo.o ,
+$< is equal to
+.BR foo.c
+and $? is equal to
+.BR "foo.h foo.c" .
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+The following command:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+make
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+makes the first target found in the makefile.
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+The following command:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+make junk
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+makes the target
+.BR junk .
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+The following makefile says that
+.BR pgm
+depends on two files,
+.BR a.o
+and
+.BR b.o ,
+and that they in turn depend on their corresponding source files (\c
+.BR a.c
+and
+.BR b.c ),
+and a common file
+.BR incl.h :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+pgm: a.o b.o
+    c99 a.o b.o \(mio pgm
+a.o: incl.h a.c
+    c99 \(mic a.c
+b.o: incl.h b.c
+    c99 \(mic b.c
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+An example for making optimized
+.BR .o
+files from
+.BR .c
+files is:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\&.c.o:
+    c99 \(mic \(miO $*.c
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+or:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\&.c.o:
+    c99 \(mic \(miO $<
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 5." 4
+The most common use of the archive interface follows. Here, it is
+assumed that the source files are all C-language source:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+lib: lib(file1.o) lib(file2.o) lib(file3.o)
+    @echo lib is now up-to-date
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR .c.a
+rule is used to make
+.BR file1.o ,
+.BR file2.o ,
+and
+.BR file3.o
+and insert them into
+.BR lib .
+.P
+The treatment of escaped
+<newline>
+characters throughout the makefile is historical practice. For example,
+the inference rule:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\&.c.o\e
+:
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+works, and the macro:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+f=  bar baz\e
+    biz
+a:
+    echo ==$f==
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+echoes
+.BR \(dq==bar\ baz\ biz==\(dq .
+.P
+If $? were:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+/usr/include/stdio.h /usr/include/unistd.h foo.h
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+then $(?D) would be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+/usr/include /usr/include .
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and $(?F) would be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+stdio.h unistd.h foo.h
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 6." 4
+The contents of the built-in rules can be viewed by running:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+make \(mip \(mif /dev/null 2>/dev/null
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR make
+utility described in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 is intended to provide the means for
+changing portable source code into executables that can be run on an
+POSIX.1\(hy2008-conforming system. It reflects the most common features present
+in System V and BSD
+.IR make s.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.IR make
+utility has been an especially fertile ground for vendor and research
+organization-specific syntax modifications and extensions. Examples
+include:
+.IP " *" 4
+Syntax supporting parallel execution (such as from various
+multi-processor vendors, GNU, and others)
+.IP " *" 4
+Additional ``operators'' separating targets and their prerequisites
+(System V, BSD, and others)
+.IP " *" 4
+Specifying that command lines containing the strings
+.BR \(dq${MAKE}\(dq 
+and
+.BR \(dq$(MAKE)\(dq 
+are executed when the
+.BR \(min
+option is specified (GNU and System V)
+.IP " *" 4
+Modifications of the meaning of internal macros when referencing
+libraries (BSD and others)
+.IP " *" 4
+Using a single instance of the shell for all of the command lines of
+the target (BSD and others)
+.IP " *" 4
+Allowing
+<space>
+characters as well as
+<tab>
+characters to delimit command lines (BSD)
+.IP " *" 4
+Adding C preprocessor-style ``include'' and ``ifdef'' constructs
+(System V, GNU, BSD, and others)
+.IP " *" 4
+Remote execution of command lines (Sprite and others)
+.IP " *" 4
+Specifying additional special targets (BSD, System V, and most others)
+.P
+Additionally, many vendors and research organizations have rethought
+the basic concepts of
+.IR make ,
+creating vastly extended, as well as completely new, syntaxes. Each of
+these versions of
+.IR make
+fulfills the needs of a different community of users; it is
+unreasonable for this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 to require behavior that would be incompatible
+(and probably inferior) to historical practice for such a community.
+.P
+In similar circumstances, when the industry has enough sufficiently
+incompatible formats as to make them irreconcilable, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 has followed
+one or both of two courses of action. Commands have been renamed (\c
+.IR cksum ,
+.IR echo ,
+and
+.IR pax )
+and/or command line options have been provided to select the desired
+behavior (\c
+.IR grep ,
+.IR od ,
+and
+.IR pax ).
+.P
+Because the syntax specified for the
+.IR make
+utility is, by and large, a subset of the syntaxes accepted by almost
+all versions of
+.IR make ,
+it was decided that it would be counter-productive to change the name.
+And since the makefile itself is a basic unit of portability, it would
+not be completely effective to reserve a new option letter, such as
+.IR make
+.BR \(miP ,
+to achieve the portable behavior. Therefore, the special target
+.BR .POSIX
+was added to the makefile, allowing users to specify ``standard''
+behavior. This special target does not preclude extensions in the
+.IR make
+utility, nor does it preclude such extensions being used by the
+makefile specifying the target; it does, however, preclude any
+extensions from being applied that could alter the behavior of
+previously valid syntax; such extensions must be controlled via
+command line options or new special targets. It is incumbent upon
+portable makefiles to specify the
+.BR .POSIX
+special target in order to guarantee that they are not affected by
+local extensions.
+.P
+The portable version of
+.IR make
+described in this reference page is not intended to be the
+state-of-the-art software generation tool and, as such, some newer and
+more leading-edge features have not been included. An attempt has been
+made to describe the portable makefile in a manner that does not
+preclude such extensions as long as they do not disturb the portable
+behavior described here.
+.P
+When the
+.BR \(min
+option is specified, it is always added to
+.IR MAKEFLAGS .
+This allows a recursive
+.IR make
+.BR \(min
+.IR target
+to be used to see all of the action that would be taken to update
+.IR target .
+.P
+The definition of
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+allows both the System V letter string and the BSD command line
+formats. The two formats are sufficiently different to allow
+implementations to support both without ambiguity.
+.P
+Early proposals stated that an ``unquoted''
+<number-sign>
+was treated as the start of a comment. The
+.IR make
+utility does not pay any attention to quotes. A
+<number-sign>
+starts a comment regardless of its surroundings.
+.P
+The text about ``other implementation-defined pathnames may also be
+tried'' in addition to
+.BR ./makefile
+and
+.BR ./Makefile
+is to allow such extensions as
+.BR SCCS/s.Makefile
+and other variations. It was made an implementation-defined
+requirement (as opposed to unspecified behavior) to highlight
+surprising implementations that might select something unexpected like
+.BR /etc/Makefile .
+XSI-conformant systems also try
+.BR ./s.makefile ,
+.BR SCCS/s.makefile ,
+.BR ./s.Makefile ,
+and
+.BR SCCS/s.Makefile .
+.P
+Early proposals contained the macro
+.BR NPROC
+as a means of specifying that
+.IR make
+should use
+.IR n
+processes to do the work required. While this feature is a valuable
+extension for many systems, it is not common usage and could require
+other non-trivial extensions to makefile syntax. This extension is not
+required by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, but could be provided as a compatible extension. The
+macro
+.BR PARALLEL
+is used by some historical systems with essentially the same meaning
+(but without using a name that is a common system limit value). It is
+suggested that implementors recognize the existing use of
+.BR NPROC
+and/or
+.BR PARALLEL
+as extensions to
+.IR make .
+.P
+The default rules are based on System V. The default
+.BR CC=
+value is
+.IR c99
+instead of
+.IR cc
+because this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not standardize the utility named
+.IR cc .
+Thus, every conforming application would be required to define
+.BR CC= \c
+.IR c99
+to expect to run. There is no advantage conferred by the hope that the
+makefile might hit the ``preferred'' compiler because this cannot be
+guaranteed to work. Also, since the portable makescript can only use
+the
+.IR c99
+options, no advantage is conferred in terms of what the script can do.
+It is a quality-of-implementation issue as to whether
+.IR c99
+is as valuable as
+.IR cc .
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mid
+option to
+.IR make
+is frequently used to produce debugging information, but is too
+implementation-defined to add to this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mip
+option is not passed in
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+on most historical implementations and to change this would cause many
+implementations to break without sufficiently increased portability.
+.P
+Commands that begin with a
+<plus-sign>
+(\c
+.BR '\(pl' )
+are executed even if the
+.BR \(min
+option is present. Based on the GNU version of
+.IR make ,
+the behavior of
+.BR \(min
+when the
+<plus-sign>
+prefix is encountered has been extended to apply to
+.BR \(miq
+and
+.BR \(mit
+as well. However, the System V convention of forcing command execution
+with
+.BR \(min
+when the command line of a target contains either of the strings
+.BR \(dq$(MAKE)\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dq${MAKE}\(dq 
+has not been adopted. This functionality appeared in early proposals,
+but the danger of this approach was pointed out with the following
+example of a portion of a makefile:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+subdir:
+    cd subdir; rm all_the_files; $(MAKE)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The loss of the System V behavior in this case is well-balanced by the
+safety afforded to other makefiles that were not aware of this
+situation. In any event, the command line
+<plus-sign>
+prefix can provide the desired functionality.
+.P
+The double
+<colon>
+in the target rule format is supported in BSD systems to allow more
+than one target line containing the same target name to have commands
+associated with it. Since this is not functionality described in the
+SVID or XPG3 it has been allowed as an extension, but not mandated.
+.P
+The default rules are provided with text specifying that the built-in
+rules shall be the same as if the listed set were used. The intent is
+that implementations should be able to use the rules without change,
+but will be allowed to alter them in ways that do not affect the
+primary behavior.
+.P
+The best way to provide portable makefiles is to include all of the
+rules needed in the makefile itself. The rules provided use only
+features provided by other portions of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. The default rules include
+rules for optional commands in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. Only rules pertaining to commands
+that are provided are needed in the default set of an implementation.
+.P
+One point of discussion was whether to drop the default rules list from
+\&this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. They provide convenience, but do not enhance portability of
+applications. The prime benefit is in portability of users who wish to
+type
+.IR make
+.IR command
+and have the command build from a
+.BR command.c
+file.
+.P
+The historical
+.IR MAKESHELL
+feature was omitted. In some implementations it is used to let a user
+override the shell to be used to run
+.IR make
+commands. This was confusing; for a portable
+.IR make ,
+the shell should be chosen by the makefile writer or specified on the
+.IR make
+command line and not by a user running
+.IR make .
+.P
+The
+.IR make
+utilities in most historical implementations process the prerequisites
+of a target in left-to-right order, and the makefile format
+requires this. It supports the standard idiom used in many makefiles
+that produce
+.IR yacc
+programs; for example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+foo: y.tab.o lex.o main.o
+    $(CC) $(CFLAGS) \(mio $\fR@\fP t.tab.o lex.o main.o
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In this example, if
+.IR make
+chose any arbitrary order, the
+.BR lex.o
+might not be made with the correct
+.BR y.tab.h .
+Although there may be better ways to express this relationship, it is
+widely used historically. Implementations that desire to update
+prerequisites in parallel should require an explicit extension to
+.IR make
+or the makefile format to accomplish it, as described previously.
+.P
+The algorithm for determining a new entry for target rules is partially
+unspecified. Some historical
+.IR make s
+allow blank, empty, or comment lines within the collection of commands
+marked by leading
+<tab>
+characters. A conforming makefile must ensure that each command starts
+with a
+<tab>,
+but implementations are free to ignore blank, empty, and comment lines
+without triggering the start of a new entry.
+.P
+The ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS section includes having SIGTERM and SIGHUP,
+along with the more traditional SIGINT and SIGQUIT, remove the current
+target unless directed not to do so. SIGTERM and SIGHUP were added to
+parallel other utilities that have historically cleaned up their work
+as a result of these signals. When
+.IR make
+receives any signal other than SIGQUIT, it is required to resend itself
+the signal it received so that it exits with a status that reflects the
+signal. The results from SIGQUIT are partially unspecified because, on
+systems that create
+.BR core
+files upon receipt of SIGQUIT, the
+.BR core
+from
+.IR make
+would conflict with a
+.BR core
+file from the command that was running when the SIGQUIT arrived. The
+main concern was to prevent damaged files from appearing up-to-date when
+.IR make
+is rerun.
+.P
+The
+.BR .PRECIOUS
+special target was extended to affect all targets globally (by
+specifying no prerequisites). The
+.BR .IGNORE
+and
+.BR .SILENT
+special targets were extended to allow prerequisites; it was judged to
+be more useful in some cases to be able to turn off errors or echoing
+for a list of targets than for the entire makefile. These extensions
+to
+.IR make
+in System V were made to match historical practice from the BSD
+.IR make .
+.P
+Macros are not exported to the environment of commands to be run. This
+was never the case in any historical
+.IR make
+and would have serious consequences. The environment is the same as
+the environment to
+.IR make
+except that
+.IR MAKEFLAGS
+and macros defined on the
+.IR make
+command line are added.
+.P
+Some implementations do not use
+\fIsystem\fR()
+for all command lines, as required by the portable makefile
+format; as a performance enhancement, they select lines without shell
+metacharacters for direct execution by
+\fIexecve\fR().
+There is no requirement that
+\fIsystem\fR()
+be used specifically, but merely that the same results be achieved.
+The metacharacters typically used to bypass the direct
+\fIexecve\fR()
+execution have been any of:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+=  |  ^  (  )  ;  &  <  >  *  ?  [  ]  :  $  `  '  "  \e  \en
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The default in some advanced versions of
+.IR make
+is to group all the command lines for a target and execute them using a
+single shell invocation; the System V method is to pass each line
+individually to a separate shell. The single-shell method has the
+advantages in performance and the lack of a requirement for many
+continued lines. However, converting to this newer method has caused
+portability problems with many historical makefiles, so the behavior
+with the POSIX makefile is specified to be the same as that of System
+V. It is suggested that the special target
+.BR .ONESHELL
+be used as an implementation extension to achieve the single-shell
+grouping for a target or group of targets.
+.P
+Novice users of
+.IR make
+have had difficulty with the historical need to start commands with a
+<tab>.
+Since it is often difficult to discern differences between
+<tab>
+and
+<space>
+characters on terminals or printed listings, confusing bugs can arise. In
+early proposals, an attempt was made to correct this problem by allowing
+leading
+<blank>
+characters instead of
+<tab>
+characters. However, implementors reported many makefiles that failed
+in subtle ways following this change, and it is difficult to implement a
+.IR make
+that unambiguously can differentiate between macro and command lines.
+There is extensive historical practice of allowing leading
+<space>
+characters before macro definitions. Forcing macro lines into column 1
+would be a significant backwards-compatibility problem for some makefiles.
+Therefore, historical practice was restored.
+.P
+There is substantial variation in the handling of include lines by
+different implementations. However, there is enough commonality for the
+standard to be able to specify a minimum set of requirements that allow
+the feature to be used portably. Known variations have been explicitly
+called out as unspecified behavior in the description.
+.P
+The System V dynamic dependency feature was not included. It would
+support:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cat: $$@.c
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+that would expand to;
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cat: cat.c
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This feature exists only in the new version of System V
+.IR make
+and, while useful, is not in wide usage. This means that macros are
+expanded twice for prerequisites: once at makefile parse time and once
+at target update time.
+.P
+Consideration was given to adding metarules to the POSIX
+.IR make .
+This would make
+.BR "%.o:\ %.c"
+the same as
+.BR .c.o: .
+This is quite useful and available from some vendors, but it would
+cause too many changes to this
+.IR make
+to support. It would have introduced rule chaining and new substitution
+rules. However, the rules for target names have been set to reserve the
+.BR '%' 
+and
+.BR '\&"' 
+characters. These are traditionally used to implement metarules and
+quoting of target names, respectively. Implementors are strongly
+encouraged to use these characters only for these purposes.
+.P
+A request was made to extend the suffix delimiter character from a
+<period>
+to any character. The metarules feature in newer
+.IR make s
+solves this problem in a more general way. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 is staying with the
+more conservative historical definition.
+.P
+The standard output format for the
+.BR \(mip
+option is not described because it is primarily a debugging option and
+because the format is not generally useful to programs. In historical
+implementations the output is not suitable for use in generating
+makefiles. The
+.BR \(mip
+format has been variable across historical implementations. Therefore,
+the definition of
+.BR \(mip
+was only to provide a consistently named option for obtaining
+.IR make
+script debugging information.
+.P
+Some historical implementations have not cleared the suffix list with
+.BR \(mir .
+.P
+Implementations should be aware that some historical applications have
+intermixed
+.IR target_name
+and
+.IR macro =\c
+.IR value
+operands on the command line, expecting that all of the macros are
+processed before any of the targets are dealt with. Conforming
+applications do not do this, but some backwards-compatibility support
+may be warranted.
+.P
+Empty inference rules are specified with a
+<semicolon>
+command rather than omitting all commands, as described in an early
+proposal. The latter case has no traditional meaning and is reserved
+for implementation extensions, such as in GNU
+.IR make .
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language",
+.IR "\fIar\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIc99\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIget\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIlex\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsccs\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsh\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIyacc\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsystem\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/man.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/man.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee4ba2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/man.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,267 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MAN "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+man
+\(em display system documentation
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+man \fB[\fR\(mik\fB] \fIname\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR man
+utility shall write information about each of the
+.IR name
+operands. If
+.IR name
+is the name of a standard utility,
+.IR man
+at a minimum shall write a message describing the syntax used by the
+standard utility, its options, and operands. If more information is
+available, the
+.IR man
+utility shall provide it in an implementation-defined manner.
+.P
+An implementation may provide information for values of
+.IR name
+other than the standard utilities. Standard utilities that are listed
+as optional and that are not supported by the implementation either
+shall cause a brief message indicating that fact to be displayed or
+shall cause a full display of information as described previously.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR man
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mik\fP" 8
+Interpret
+.IR name
+operands as keywords to be used in searching a utilities summary
+database that contains a brief purpose entry for each standard utility
+and write lines from the summary database that match any of the
+keywords. The keyword search shall produce results that are the
+equivalent of the output of the following command:
+.RS 8 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+grep \(miEi '
+\fIname
+name\fP
+\&...
+\&' \fIsummary-database\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This assumes that the
+.IR summary-database
+is a text file with a single entry per line; this organization is not
+required and the example using
+.IR grep
+.BR \(miEi
+is merely illustrative of the type of search intended. The purpose
+entry to be included in the database shall consist of a terse
+description of the purpose of the utility.
+.RE
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIname\fR" 10
+A keyword or the name of a standard utility. When
+.BR \(mik
+is not specified and
+.IR name
+does not represent one of the standard utilities, the results are
+unspecified.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR man :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and in the summary database). The
+value of
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+need not affect the format of the information written about the
+.IR name
+operands.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fIPAGER\fP" 10
+Determine an output filtering command for writing the output to a
+terminal. Any string acceptable as a
+.IR command_string
+operand to the
+.IR sh
+.BR \(mic
+command shall be valid. When standard output is a terminal device, the
+reference page output shall be piped through the command. If the
+.IR PAGER
+variable is null or not set, the command shall be either
+.IR more
+or another paginator utility documented in the system documentation.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The
+.IR man
+utility shall write text describing the syntax of the utility
+.IR name ,
+its options and its operands, or, when
+.BR \(mik
+is specified, lines from the summary database. The format of this text
+is implementation-defined.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used for diagnostic messages, and may also
+be used for informational messages of unspecified format.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+It is recognized that the
+.IR man
+utility is only of minimal usefulness as specified. The opinion of the
+standard developers was strongly divided as to how much or how little
+information
+.IR man
+should be required to provide. They considered, however, that the
+provision of some portable way of accessing documentation would aid
+user portability. The arguments against a fuller specification were:
+.IP " *" 4
+Large quantities of documentation should not be required on a system
+that does not have excess disk space.
+.IP " *" 4
+The current manual system does not present information in a manner that
+greatly aids user portability.
+.IP " *" 4
+A ``better help system'' is currently an area in which vendors feel
+that they can add value to their POSIX implementations.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mif
+option was considered, but due to implementation differences, it was
+not included in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+The description was changed to be more specific about what has to be
+displayed for a utility. The standard developers considered it
+insufficient to allow a display of only the synopsis without giving a
+short description of what each option and operand does.
+.P
+The ``purpose'' entry to be included in the database can be similar to
+the section title (less the numeric prefix) from this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 for each utility.
+These titles are similar to those used in historical systems for this
+purpose.
+.P
+See
+.IR mailx
+for rationale concerning the default paginator.
+.P
+The caveat in the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+description was added because it is not a requirement that an
+implementation provide reference pages for all of its supported locales
+on each system; changing
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+does not necessarily translate the reference page into another
+language. This is equivalent to the current state of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+in POSIX.1\(hy2008\(emlocale-specific messages are not yet a requirement.
+.P
+The historical
+.IR MANPATH
+variable is not included in POSIX because no attempt is made to specify
+naming conventions for reference page files, nor even to mandate that
+they are files at all. On some implementations they could be a true
+database, a hypertext file, or even fixed strings within the
+.IR man
+executable. The standard developers considered the portability of
+reference pages to be outside their scope of work. However, users
+should be aware that
+.IR MANPATH
+is implemented on a number of historical systems and that it can be
+used to tailor the search pattern for reference pages from the various
+categories (utilities, functions, file formats, and so on) when the
+system administrator reveals the location and conventions for reference
+pages on the system.
+.P
+The keyword search can rely on at least the text of the section titles
+from these utility descriptions, and the implementation may add more
+keywords. The term ``section titles'' refers to the strings such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+man \(em Display system documentation
+ps \(em Report process status
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImore\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/mesg.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/mesg.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..89ba318
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/mesg.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MESG "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mesg
+\(em permit or deny messages
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+mesg \fB[\fRy|n\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR mesg
+utility shall control whether other users are allowed to send messages
+via
+.IR write ,
+.IR talk ,
+or other utilities to a terminal device. The terminal device affected
+shall be determined by searching for the first terminal in the sequence
+of devices associated with standard input, standard output, and
+standard error, respectively. With no arguments,
+.IR mesg
+shall report the current state without changing it. Processes with
+appropriate privileges may be able to send messages to the terminal
+independent of the current state.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported in the POSIX locale:
+.IP "\fIy\fR" 10
+Grant permission to other users to send messages to the terminal
+device.
+.IP "\fIn\fR" 10
+Deny permission to other users to send messages to the terminal
+device.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR mesg :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written (by
+.IR mesg )
+to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+If no operand is specified,
+.IR mesg
+shall display the current terminal state in an unspecified format.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Receiving messages is allowed.
+.IP "\01" 6
+Receiving messages is not allowed.
+.IP >1 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The mechanism by which the message status of the terminal is changed is
+unspecified. Therefore, unspecified actions may cause the status of
+the terminal to change after
+.IR mesg
+has successfully completed. These actions may include, but are not
+limited to: another invocation of the
+.IR mesg
+utility, login procedures; invocation of the
+.IR stty
+utility, invocation of the
+.IR chmod
+utility or
+\fIchmod\fR()
+function, and so on.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The terminal changed by
+.IR mesg
+is that associated with the standard input, output, or error, rather
+than the controlling terminal for the session. This is because users
+logged in more than once should be able to change any of their login
+terminals without having to stop the job running in those sessions.
+This is not a security problem involving the terminals of other users
+because appropriate privileges would
+be required to affect the terminal of another user.
+.P
+The method of checking each of the first three file descriptors in
+sequence until a terminal is found was adopted from System V.
+.P
+The file
+.BR /dev/tty
+is not specified for the terminal device because it was thought to be
+too restrictive. Typical environment changes for the
+.IR n
+operand are that write permissions are removed for
+.IR others
+and
+.IR group
+from the appropriate device. It was decided to leave the actual
+description of what is done as unspecified because of potential
+differences between implementations.
+.P
+The format for standard output is unspecified because of differences
+between historical implementations. This output is generally not
+useful to shell scripts (they can use the exit status), so exact
+parsing of the output is unnecessary.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fItalk\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/mkdir.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/mkdir.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..51a773f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/mkdir.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,261 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MKDIR "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mkdir
+\(em make directories
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+mkdir \fB[\fR\(mip\fB] [\fR\(mim \fImode\fB] \fIdir\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR mkdir
+utility shall create the directories specified by the operands, in the
+order specified.
+.P
+For each
+.IR dir
+operand, the
+.IR mkdir
+utility shall perform actions equivalent to the
+\fImkdir\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, called with the following arguments:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The
+.IR dir
+operand is used as the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The value of the bitwise-inclusive OR of S_IRWXU, S_IRWXG, and S_IRWXO
+is used as the
+.IR mode
+argument. (If the
+.BR \(mim
+option is specified, the value of the
+\fImkdir\fR()
+.IR mode
+argument is unspecified, but the directory shall at no time
+have permissions less restrictive than the
+.BR \(mim
+.IR mode
+option-argument.)
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR mkdir
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mim\ \fImode\fR" 10
+Set the file permission bits of the newly-created directory to the
+specified
+.IR mode
+value. The
+.IR mode
+option-argument shall be the same as the
+.IR mode
+operand defined for the
+.IR chmod
+utility. In the
+.IR symbolic_mode
+strings, the
+.IR op
+characters
+.BR '\(pl' 
+and
+.BR '\(mi' 
+shall be interpreted relative to an assumed initial mode of
+.IR a =\c
+.IR rwx ;
+.BR '\(pl' 
+shall add permissions to the default mode,
+.BR '\(mi' 
+shall delete permissions from the default mode.
+.IP "\fB\(mip\fP" 10
+Create any missing intermediate pathname components.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+For each
+.IR dir
+operand that does not name an existing directory, before performing the
+actions described in the DESCRIPTION above, the
+.IR mkdir
+utility shall create any pathname components of the path prefix of
+.IR dir
+that do not name an existing directory by performing actions equivalent
+to first calling the
+\fImkdir\fR()
+function with the following arguments:
+.IP " 1." 4
+A pathname naming the missing pathname component, ending with a trailing
+<slash>
+character, as the
+.IR path
+argument
+.IP " 2." 4
+The value zero as the
+.IR mode
+argument
+.P
+and then calling the
+\fIchmod\fR()
+function with the following arguments:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The same
+.IR path
+argument as in the
+\fImkdir\fR()
+call
+.IP " 2." 4
+The value
+.IR "(S_IWUSR|S_IXUSR|~\fIfilemask\fP)&0777" \fR
+as the
+.IR mode
+argument, where
+.IR filemask
+is the file mode creation mask of the process (see the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIumask\fR\^(\|)")
+.P
+Each
+.IR dir
+operand that names an existing directory shall be ignored without
+error.
+.RE
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIdir\fR" 10
+A pathname of a directory to be created.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR mkdir :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+All the specified directories were created successfully or the
+.BR \(mip
+option was specified and all the specified directories now exist.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The default file mode for directories is
+.IR a =\c
+.IR rwx
+(777 on most systems) with selected permissions removed in accordance
+with the file mode creation mask. For intermediate pathname components
+created by
+.IR mkdir ,
+the mode is the default modified by
+.IR u +\c
+.IR wx
+so that the subdirectories can always be created regardless of the file
+mode creation mask; if different ultimate permissions are desired for
+the intermediate directories, they can be changed afterwards with
+.IR chmod .
+.P
+Note that some of the requested directories may have been created even
+if an error occurs.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The System V
+.BR \(mim
+option was included to control the file mode.
+.P
+The System V
+.BR \(mip
+option was included to create any needed intermediate directories and
+to complement the functionality provided by
+.IR rmdir
+for removing directories in the path prefix as they become empty.
+Because no error is produced if any path component already exists, the
+.BR \(mip
+option is also useful to ensure that a particular directory exists.
+.P
+The functionality of
+.IR mkdir
+is described substantially through a reference to the
+\fImkdir\fR()
+function in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. For example, by default, the mode of the
+directory is affected by the file mode creation mask in accordance with
+the specified behavior of the
+\fImkdir\fR()
+function. In this way, there is less duplication of effort required for
+describing details of the directory creation.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIrm\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIrmdir\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIumask\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fImkdir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIumask\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/mkfifo.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/mkfifo.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c5501a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/mkfifo.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MKFIFO "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mkfifo
+\(em make FIFO special files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+mkfifo \fB[\fR\(mim \fImode\fB] \fIfile\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR mkfifo
+utility shall create the FIFO special files specified by the operands,
+in the order specified.
+.P
+For each
+.IR file
+operand, the
+.IR mkfifo
+utility shall perform actions equivalent to the
+\fImkfifo\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, called with the following arguments:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The
+.IR file
+operand is used as the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The value of the bitwise-inclusive OR of S_IRUSR, S_IWUSR, S_IRGRP,
+S_IWGRP, S_IROTH, and S_IWOTH is used as the
+.IR mode
+argument. (If the
+.BR \(mim
+option is specified, the value of the
+\fImkfifo\fR()
+.IR mode
+argument is unspecified, but the FIFO shall at no time have permissions
+less restrictive than the
+.BR \(mim
+.IR mode
+option-argument.)
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR mkfifo
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mim\ \fImode\fR" 10
+Set the file permission bits of the newly-created FIFO to the specified
+.IR mode
+value. The
+.IR mode
+option-argument shall be the same as the
+.IR mode
+operand defined for the
+.IR chmod
+utility. In the
+.IR symbolic_mode
+strings, the
+.IR op
+characters
+.BR '\(pl' 
+and
+.BR '\(mi' 
+shall be interpreted relative to an assumed initial mode of
+.IR a =\c
+.IR rw .
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of the FIFO special file to be created.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR mkfifo :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+All the specified FIFO special files were created successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+This utility was added to permit shell applications to create FIFO
+special files.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mim
+option was added to control the file mode, for consistency with the
+similar functionality provided by the
+.IR mkdir
+utility.
+.P
+Early proposals included a
+.BR \(mip
+option similar to the
+.IR mkdir
+.BR \(mip
+option that created intermediate directories leading up to the FIFO
+specified by the final component. This was removed because it is not
+commonly needed and is not common practice with similar utilities.
+.P
+The functionality of
+.IR mkfifo
+is described substantially through a reference to the
+\fImkfifo\fR()
+function in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. For example, by default, the mode of the FIFO
+file is affected by the file mode creation mask in accordance with the
+specified behavior of the
+\fImkfifo\fR()
+function. In this way, there is less duplication of effort required for
+describing details of the file creation.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIumask\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fImkfifo\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/more.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/more.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5e56f88
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/more.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,1382 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MORE "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+more
+\(em display files on a page-by-page basis
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+more \fB[\fR\(miceisu\fB] [\fR\(min \fInumber\fB] [\fR\(mip \fIcommand\fB] [\fR\(mit \fItagstring\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR more
+utility shall read files and either write them to the terminal on a
+page-by-page basis or filter them to standard output. If standard
+output is not a terminal device, all input files shall be copied to
+standard output in their entirety, without modification, except as
+specified for the
+.BR \(mis
+option. If standard output is a terminal device, the files shall be
+written a number of lines (one screenful) at a time under the control
+of user commands. See the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.P
+Certain block-mode terminals do not have all the capabilities necessary
+to support the complete
+.IR more
+definition; they are incapable of accepting commands that are not
+terminated with a
+<newline>.
+Implementations that support such terminals shall provide an
+operating mode to
+.IR more
+in which all commands can be terminated with a
+<newline>
+on those terminals. This mode:
+.IP " *" 4
+Shall be documented in the system documentation
+.IP " *" 4
+Shall, at invocation, inform the user of the terminal deficiency that
+requires the
+<newline>
+usage and provide instructions on how this warning can be suppressed in
+future invocations
+.IP " *" 4
+Shall not be required for implementations supporting only fully capable
+terminals
+.IP " *" 4
+Shall not affect commands already requiring
+<newline>
+characters
+.IP " *" 4
+Shall not affect users on the capable terminals from using
+.IR more
+as described in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR more
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except that
+.BR '\(pl' 
+may be recognized as an option delimiter as well as
+.BR '\(mi' .
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+If a screen is to be written that has no lines in common with the
+current screen, or
+.IR more
+is writing its first screen,
+.IR more
+shall not scroll the screen, but instead shall redraw each line of the
+screen in turn, from the top of the screen to the bottom. In addition,
+if
+.IR more
+is writing its first screen, the screen shall be cleared. This option
+may be silently ignored on devices with insufficient terminal
+capabilities.
+.IP "\fB\(mie\fP" 10
+Exit immediately after writing the last line of the last file in the
+argument list; see the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.IP "\fB\(mii\fP" 10
+Perform pattern matching in searches without regard to case; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 9.2" ", " "Regular Expression General Requirements".
+.IP "\fB\(min\ \fInumber\fR" 10
+Specify the number of lines per screenful. The
+.IR number
+argument is a positive decimal integer. The
+.BR \(min
+option shall override any values obtained from any other source.
+.IP "\fB\(mip\ \fIcommand\fR" 10
+Each time a screen from a new file is displayed or redisplayed
+(including as a result of
+.IR more
+commands; for example,
+.BR :p ),
+execute the
+.IR more
+command(s) in the command arguments in the order specified, as if
+entered by the user after the first screen has been displayed. No
+intermediate results shall be displayed (that is, if the command is a
+movement to a screen different from the normal first screen, only the
+screen resulting from the command shall be displayed.) If any of the
+commands fail for any reason, an informational message to this effect
+shall be written, and no further commands specified using the
+.BR \(mip
+option shall be executed for this file.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Behave as if consecutive empty lines were a single empty line.
+.IP "\fB\(mit\ \fItagstring\fR" 10
+Write the screenful of the file containing the tag named by the
+.IR tagstring
+argument. See the
+.IR "\fIctags\fR\^"
+utility. The tags feature represented by
+.BR \(mit
+.IR tagstring
+and the
+.BR :t
+command is optional. It shall be provided on any system that also
+provides a conforming implementation of
+.IR ctags ;
+otherwise, the use of
+.BR \(mit
+produces undefined results.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The filename resulting from the
+.BR \(mit
+option shall be logically added as a prefix to the list of command line
+files, as if specified by the user. If the tag named by the
+.IR tagstring
+argument is not found, it shall be an error, and
+.IR more
+shall take no further action.
+.P
+If the tag specifies a line number, the first line of the display shall
+contain the beginning of that line. If the tag specifies a pattern, the
+first line of the display shall contain the beginning of the matching
+text from the first line of the file that contains that pattern. If the
+line does not exist in the file or matching text is not found, an
+informational message to this effect shall be displayed, and
+.IR more
+shall display the default screen as if
+.BR \(mit
+had not been specified.
+.P
+If both the
+.BR \(mit
+.IR tagstring
+and
+.BR \(mip
+.IR command
+options are given, the
+.BR \(mit
+.IR tagstring
+shall be processed first; that is, the file and starting line for the
+display shall be as specified by
+.BR \(mit ,
+and then the
+.BR \(mip
+.IR more
+command shall be executed. If the line (matching text) specified by the
+.BR \(mit
+command does not exist (is not found), no
+.BR \(mip
+.IR more
+command shall be executed for this file at any time.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miu\fP" 10
+Treat a
+<backspace>
+as a printable control character, displayed as an
+implementation-defined character sequence (see the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION
+section), suppressing backspacing and the special handling that
+produces underlined or standout mode text on some terminal types.
+Also, do not ignore a
+<carriage-return>
+at the end of a line.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of an input file. If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, the standard input shall be used. If a
+.IR file
+is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be read at that point in the sequence.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used only if no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, or if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' .
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files being examined shall be text files. If standard output
+is a terminal, standard error shall be used to read commands from the
+user. If standard output is a terminal, standard error is not readable,
+and command input is needed,
+.IR more
+may attempt to obtain user commands from the controlling terminal (for
+example,
+.BR /dev/tty );
+otherwise,
+.IR more
+shall terminate with an error indicating that it was unable to read
+user commands. If standard output is not a terminal, no error shall
+result if standard error cannot be opened for reading.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR more :
+.IP "\fICOLUMNS\fP" 10
+Override the system-selected horizontal display line size. See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+for valid values and results when it is unset or null.
+.IP "\fIEDITOR\fP" 10
+Used by the
+.BR v
+command to select an editor. See the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, equivalence classes,
+and multi-character collating elements within regular expressions.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files) and the behavior of
+character classes within regular expressions.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fILINES\fP" 10
+Override the system-selected vertical screen size, used as the number
+of lines in a screenful. See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+for valid values and results when it is unset or null. The
+.BR \(min
+option shall take precedence over the
+.IR LINES
+variable for determining the number of lines in a screenful.
+.IP "\fIMORE\fP" 10
+Determine a string containing options described in the OPTIONS section
+preceded with
+<hyphen>
+characters and
+<blank>-separated
+as on the command line. Any command line options shall be processed
+after those in the
+.IR MORE
+variable, as if the command line were:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+more $MORE \fIoptions operands\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR MORE
+variable shall take precedence over the
+.IR TERM
+and
+.IR LINES
+variables for determining the number of lines in a screenful.
+.RE
+.IP "\fITERM\fP" 10
+Determine the name of the terminal type. If this variable is unset or
+null, an unspecified default terminal type is used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall be used to write the contents of the input
+files.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used for diagnostic messages and user
+commands (see the INPUT FILES section), and, if standard output is a
+terminal device, to write a prompting string. The prompting string
+shall appear on the screen line below the last line of the file
+displayed in the current screenful. The prompt shall contain the name
+of the file currently being examined and shall contain an end-of-file
+indication and the name of the next file, if any, when prompting at the
+end-of-file. If an error or informational message is displayed, it is
+unspecified whether it is contained in the prompt. If it is not
+contained in the prompt, it shall be displayed and then the user shall
+be prompted for a continuation character, at which point another
+message or the user prompt may be displayed. The prompt is otherwise
+unspecified. It is unspecified whether informational messages are
+written for other user commands.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+The following section describes the behavior of
+.IR more
+when the standard output is a terminal device. If the standard output
+is not a terminal device, no options other than
+.BR \(mis
+shall have any effect, and all input files shall be copied to standard
+output otherwise unmodified, at which time
+.IR more
+shall exit without further action.
+.P
+The number of lines available per screen shall be determined by the
+.BR \(min
+option, if present, or by examining values in the environment (see the
+ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES section). If neither method yields a number, an
+unspecified number of lines shall be used.
+.P
+The maximum number of lines written shall be one less than this number,
+because the screen line after the last line written shall be used to
+write a user prompt and user input. If the number of lines in the
+screen is less than two, the results are undefined. It is unspecified
+whether user input is permitted to be longer than the remainder of the
+single line where the prompt has been written.
+.P
+The number of columns available per line shall be determined by
+examining values in the environment (see the ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
+section), with a default value as described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables".
+.P
+Lines that are longer than the display shall be folded; the length at
+which folding occurs is unspecified, but should be appropriate for the
+output device. Folding may occur between glyphs of single characters
+that take up multiple display columns.
+.P
+When standard output is a terminal and
+.BR \(miu
+is not specified,
+.IR more
+shall treat
+<backspace>
+and
+<carriage-return>
+characters specially:
+.IP " *" 4
+A character, followed first by a sequence of
+.IR n
+<backspace>
+characters (where
+.IR n
+is the same as the number of column positions that the character
+occupies), then by
+.IR n
+<underscore>
+characters (\c
+.BR '_' ),
+shall cause that character to be written as underlined text, if the
+terminal type supports that. The
+.IR n
+<underscore>
+characters, followed first by
+.IR n
+<backspace>
+characters, then any character with
+.IR n
+column positions, shall also cause that character to be written as
+underlined text, if the terminal type supports that.
+.IP " *" 4
+A sequence of
+.IR n
+<backspace>
+characters (where
+.IR n
+is the same as the number of column positions that the previous
+character occupies) that appears between two identical printable
+characters shall cause the first of those two characters to be written
+as emboldened text (that is, visually brighter, standout mode, or
+inverse-video mode), if the terminal type supports that, and the second
+to be discarded. Immediately subsequent occurrences of
+<backspace>/\c
+character pairs for that same character shall also be discarded. (For
+example, the sequence
+.BR \(dqa\eba\eba\eba\(dq 
+is interpreted as a single emboldened
+.BR 'a' .)
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+.IR more
+utility shall logically discard all other
+<backspace>
+characters from the line as well as the character which precedes them,
+if any.
+.IP " *" 4
+A
+<carriage-return>
+at the end of a line shall be ignored, rather than being written as a
+non-printable character, as described in the next paragraph.
+.P
+It is implementation-defined how other non-printable characters are
+written. Implementations should use the same format that they use for
+the
+.IR ex
+.BR print
+command; see the OPTIONS section within the
+.IR ed
+utility. It is unspecified whether a multi-column character shall be
+separated if it crosses a display line boundary; it shall not be
+discarded. The behavior is unspecified if the number of columns on the
+display is less than the number of columns any single character in the
+line being displayed would occupy.
+.P
+When each new file is displayed (or redisplayed),
+.IR more
+shall write the first screen of the file. Once the initial screen has
+been written,
+.IR more
+shall prompt for a user command. If the execution of the user command
+results in a screen that has lines in common with the current screen,
+and the device has sufficient terminal capabilities,
+.IR more
+shall scroll the screen; otherwise, it is unspecified whether the
+screen is scrolled or redrawn.
+.P
+For all files but the last (including standard input if no file was
+specified, and for the last file as well, if the
+.BR \(mie
+option was not specified), when
+.IR more
+has written the last line in the file,
+.IR more
+shall prompt for a user command. This prompt shall contain the name of
+the next file as well as an indication that
+.IR more
+has reached end-of-file. If the user command is
+.BR f ,
+<control>\(hyF,
+<space>,
+.BR j ,
+<newline>,
+.BR d ,
+<control>\(hyD,
+or
+.BR s ,
+.IR more
+shall display the next file. Otherwise, if displaying the last file,
+.IR more
+shall exit. Otherwise,
+.IR more
+shall execute the user command specified.
+.P
+Several of the commands described in this section display a previous
+screen from the input stream. In the case that text is being taken from
+a non-rewindable stream, such as a pipe, it is implementation-defined
+how much backwards motion is supported. If a command cannot be executed
+because of a limitation on backwards motion, an error message to this
+effect shall be displayed, the current screen shall not change, and the
+user shall be prompted for another command.
+.P
+If a command cannot be performed because there are insufficient lines
+to display,
+.IR more
+shall alert the terminal. If a command cannot be performed because
+there are insufficient lines to display or a
+.BR /
+command fails: if the input is the standard input, the last screen in
+the file may be displayed; otherwise, the current file and screen shall
+not change, and the user shall be prompted for another command.
+.P
+The interactive commands in the following sections shall be supported.
+Some commands can be preceded by a decimal integer, called
+.IR count
+in the following descriptions. If not specified with the command,
+.IR count
+shall default to 1. In the following descriptions,
+.IR pattern
+is a basic regular expression, as described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 9.3" ", " "Basic Regular Expressions".
+The term ``examine'' is historical usage meaning ``open the
+file for viewing''; for example,
+.IR more
+.BR foo
+would be expressed as examining file
+.BR foo .
+.P
+In the following descriptions, unless otherwise specified,
+.IR line
+is a line in the
+.IR more
+display, not a line from the file being examined.
+.P
+In the following descriptions, the
+.IR "current position"
+refers to two things:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The position of the current line on the screen
+.IP " 2." 4
+The line number (in the file) of the current line on the screen
+.P
+Usually, the line on the screen corresponding to the current position
+is the third line on the screen. If this is not possible (there are
+fewer than three lines to display or this is the first page of the
+file, or it is the last page of the file), then the current position is
+either the first or last line on the screen as described later.
+.SS "Help"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+h
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Write a summary of these commands and other implementation-defined
+commands. The behavior shall be as if the
+.IR more
+utility were executed with the
+.BR \(mie
+option on a file that contained the summary information. The user shall
+be prompted as described earlier in this section when end-of-file is
+reached. If the user command is one of those specified to continue to
+the next file,
+.IR more
+shall return to the file and screen state from which the
+.BR h
+command was executed.
+.SS "Scroll Forward One Screenful"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fRf
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR<control>-F
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Scroll forward
+.IR count
+lines, with a default of one screenful. If
+.IR count
+is more than the screen size, only the final screenful shall be
+written.
+.SS "Scroll Backward One Screenful"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fRb
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR<control>-B
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Scroll backward
+.IR count
+lines, with a default of one screenful (see the
+.BR \(min
+option). If
+.IR count
+is more than the screen size, only the final screenful shall be
+written.
+.SS "Scroll Forward One Line"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR<space>
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fRj
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR<newline>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Scroll forward
+.IR count
+lines. The default
+.IR count
+for the
+<space>
+shall be one screenful; for
+.BR j
+and
+<newline>,
+one line. The entire
+.IR count
+lines shall be written, even if
+.IR count
+is more than the screen size.
+.SS "Scroll Backward One Line"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fRk
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Scroll backward
+.IR count
+lines. The entire
+.IR count
+lines shall be written, even if
+.IR count
+is more than the screen size.
+.SS "Scroll Forward One Half Screenful"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fRd
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR<control>-D
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Scroll forward
+.IR count
+lines, with a default of one half of the screen size. If
+.IR count
+is specified, it shall become the new default for subsequent
+.BR d ,
+<control>\(hyD,
+and
+.BR u
+commands.
+.SS "Skip Forward One Line"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fRs
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Display the screenful beginning with the line
+.IR count
+lines after the last line on the current screen. If
+.IR count
+would cause the current position to be such that less than one
+screenful would be written, the last screenful in the file shall be
+written.
+.SS "Scroll Backward One Half Screenful"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fRu
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR<control>-U
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Scroll backward
+.IR count
+lines, with a default of one half of the screen size. If
+.IR count
+is specified, it shall become the new default for subsequent
+.BR d ,
+<control>\(miD,
+.BR u ,
+and
+<control>\(miU
+commands. The entire
+.IR count
+lines shall be written, even if
+.IR count
+is more than the screen size.
+.SS "Go to Beginning of File"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fRg
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Display the screenful beginning with line
+.IR count .
+.SS "Go to End-of-File"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fRG
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.IR count
+is specified, display the screenful beginning with the line
+.IR count .
+Otherwise, display the last screenful of the file.
+.SS "Refresh the Screen"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+r
+<control>-L
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Refresh the screen.
+.SS "Discard and Refresh"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+R
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Refresh the screen, discarding any buffered input. If the current file
+is non-seekable, buffered input shall not be discarded and the
+.BR R
+command shall be equivalent to the
+.BR r
+command.
+.SS "Mark Position"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+m\fIletter\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Mark the current position with the letter named by
+.IR letter ,
+where
+.IR letter
+represents the name of one of the lowercase letters of the portable
+character set. When a new file is examined, all marks may be lost.
+.SS "Return to Mark"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\&'\fIletter\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Return to the position that was previously marked with the letter named
+by
+.IR letter ,
+making that line the current position.
+.SS "Return to Previous Position"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\&''
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Return to the position from which the last large movement command was
+executed (where a ``large movement'' is defined as any movement of more
+than a screenful of lines). If no such movements have been made, return
+to the beginning of the file.
+.SS "Search Forward for Pattern"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR/\fB[\fR!\fB]\fIpattern\fR<newline>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Display the screenful beginning with the
+.IR count th
+line containing the pattern. The search shall start after the first
+line currently displayed. The null regular expression (\c
+.BR '/' 
+followed by a
+<newline>)
+shall repeat the search using the previous regular expression, with a
+default
+.IR count .
+If the character
+.BR '!' 
+is included, the matching lines shall be those that do not contain the
+.IR pattern .
+If no match is found for the
+.IR pattern ,
+a message to that effect shall be displayed.
+.SS "Search Backward for Pattern"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR?\fB[\fR!\fB]\fIpattern\fR<newline>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Display the screenful beginning with the
+.IR count th
+previous line containing the pattern. The search shall start on the
+last line before the first line currently displayed. The null regular
+expression (\c
+.BR '?' 
+followed by a
+<newline>)
+shall repeat the search using the previous regular expression, with a
+default
+.IR count .
+If the character
+.BR '!' 
+is included, matching lines shall be those that do not contain the
+.IR pattern .
+If no match is found for the
+.IR pattern ,
+a message to that effect shall be displayed.
+.SS "Repeat Search"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fRn
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Repeat the previous search for
+.IR count th
+line containing the last
+.IR pattern
+(or not containing the last
+.IR pattern ,
+if the previous search was
+.BR \(dq/!\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dq?!\(dq ).
+.SS "Repeat Search in Reverse"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fRN
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Repeat the search in the opposite direction of the previous search for
+the
+.IR count th
+line containing the last
+.IR pattern
+(or not containing the last
+.IR pattern ,
+if the previous search was
+.BR \(dq/!\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dq?!\(dq ).
+.SS "Examine New File"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+:e \fB[\fIfilename\fB]\fR<newline>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Examine a new file. If the
+.IR filename
+argument is not specified, the current file (see the
+.BR :n
+and
+.BR :p
+commands below) shall be re-examined. The
+.IR filename
+shall be subjected to the process of shell word expansions (see
+.IR "Section 2.6" ", " "Word Expansions");
+if more than a single pathname results, the effects are unspecified.
+If
+.IR filename
+is a
+<number-sign>
+(\c
+.BR '#' ),
+the previously examined file shall be re-examined. If
+.IR filename
+is not accessible for any reason (including that it is a non-seekable
+file), an error message to this effect shall be displayed and the
+current file and screen shall not change.
+.SS "Examine Next File"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR:n
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Examine the next file. If a number
+.IR count
+is specified, the
+.IR count th
+next file shall be examined. If
+.IR filename
+refers to a non-seekable file, the results are unspecified.
+.SS "Examine Previous File"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR:p
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Examine the previous file. If a number
+.IR count
+is specified, the
+.IR count th
+previous file shall be examined. If
+.IR filename
+refers to a non-seekable file, the results are unspecified.
+.SS "Go to Tag"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+:t \fItagstring\fR<newline>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the file containing the tag named by the
+.IR tagstring
+argument is not the current file, examine the file, as if the
+.BR :e
+command was executed with that file as the argument. Otherwise, or in
+addition, display the screenful beginning with the tag, as described
+for the
+.BR \(mit
+option (see the OPTIONS section). If the
+.IR ctags
+utility is not supported by the system, the use of
+.BR :t
+produces undefined results.
+.SS "Invoke Editor"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+v
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Invoke an editor to edit the current file being examined. If standard
+input is being examined, the results are unspecified. The name of the
+editor shall be taken from the environment variable
+.IR EDITOR ,
+or shall default to
+.IR vi .
+If the last pathname component in
+.IR EDITOR
+is either
+.IR vi
+or
+.IR ex ,
+the editor shall be invoked with a
+.BR \(mic
+.IR linenumber
+command line argument, where
+.IR linenumber
+is the line number of the file line containing the display line
+currently displayed as the first line of the screen. It is
+implementation-defined whether line-setting options are passed to
+editors other than
+.IR vi
+and
+.IR ex .
+.P
+When the editor exits,
+.IR more
+shall resume with the same file and screen as when the editor was
+invoked.
+.SS "Display Position"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+=
+<control>-G
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Write a message for which the information references the first byte of
+the line after the last line of the file on the screen. This message
+shall include the name of the file currently being examined, its number
+relative to the total number of files there are to examine, the line
+number in the file, the byte number and the total bytes in the file,
+and what percentage of the file precedes the current position. If
+.IR more
+is reading from standard input, or the file is shorter than a single
+screen, the line number, the byte number, the total bytes, and the
+percentage need not be written.
+.SS "Quit"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+q
+:q
+ZZ
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Exit
+.IR more .
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+If an error is encountered accessing a file when using the
+.BR :n
+command,
+.IR more
+shall attempt to examine the next file in the argument list, but the
+final exit status shall be affected. If an error is encountered
+accessing a file via the
+.BR :p
+command,
+.IR more
+shall attempt to examine the previous file in the argument list, but
+the final exit status shall be affected. If an error is encountered
+accessing a file via the
+.BR :e
+command,
+.IR more
+shall remain in the current file and the final exit status shall not be
+affected.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+When the standard output is not a terminal, only the
+.BR \(mis
+filter-modification option is effective. This is based on historical
+practice. For example, a typical implementation of
+.IR man
+pipes its output through
+.IR more
+.BR \(mis
+to squeeze excess white space for terminal users. When
+.IR man
+is piped to
+.IR lp ,
+however, it is undesirable for this squeezing to happen.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The
+.BR \(mip
+allows arbitrary commands to be executed at the start of each file.
+Examples are:
+.IP "\fImore\ \fB\(mip\ G\ \fIfile1\ file2\fR" 6
+.br
+Examine each file starting with its last screenful.
+.IP "\fImore\ \fB\(mip\ \fR100\ \fIfile1\ file2\fR" 6
+.br
+Examine each file starting with line 100 in the current position
+(usually the third line, so line 98 would be the first line written).
+.IP "\fImore\ \fB\(mip\ \fR/100\ \fIfile1\ file2\fR" 6
+.br
+Examine each file starting with the first line containing the string
+.BR \(dq100\(dq 
+in the current position
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR more
+utility, available in BSD and BSD-derived systems, was chosen as the
+prototype for the POSIX file display program since it is more widely
+available than either the public-domain program
+.IR less
+or than
+.IR pg ,
+a pager provided in System V. The 4.4 BSD
+.IR more
+is the model for the features selected; it is almost fully
+upwards-compatible from the 4.3 BSD version in wide use and has become
+more amenable for
+.IR vi
+users. Several features originally derived from various file editors,
+found in both
+.IR less
+and
+.IR pg ,
+have been added to this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 as they have proved extremely popular with
+users.
+.P
+There are inconsistencies between
+.IR more
+and
+.IR vi
+that result from historical practice. For example, the single-character
+commands
+.BR h ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR b ,
+and
+<space>
+are screen movers in
+.IR more ,
+but cursor movers in
+.IR vi .
+These inconsistencies were maintained because the cursor movements are
+not applicable to
+.IR more
+and the powerful functionality achieved without the use of the control
+key justifies the differences.
+.P
+The tags interface has been included in a program that is not a text
+editor because it promotes another degree of consistent operation with
+.IR vi .
+It is conceivable that the paging environment of
+.IR more
+would be superior for browsing source code files in some
+circumstances.
+.P
+The operating mode referred to for block-mode terminals effectively
+adds a
+<newline>
+to each Synopsis line that currently has none. So, for example,
+.BR d \c
+<newline>
+would page one screenful. The mode could be triggered by a command
+line option, environment variable, or some other method. The details
+are not imposed by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 because there are so few systems known to
+support such terminals. Nevertheless, it was considered that all
+systems should be able to support
+.IR more
+given the exception cited for this small community of terminals
+because, in comparison to
+.IR vi ,
+the cursor movements are few and the command set relatively amenable to
+the optional
+<newline>
+characters.
+.P
+Some versions of
+.IR more
+provide a shell escaping mechanism similar to the
+.IR ex
+.BR !
+command. The standard developers did not consider that this was
+necessary in a paginator, particularly given the wide acceptance of
+multiple window terminals and job control features. (They chose to
+retain such features in the editors and
+.IR mailx
+because the shell interaction also gives an opportunity to modify the
+editing buffer, which is not applicable to
+.IR more .)
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mip
+(position) option replaces the
+.BR +
+command because of the Utility Syntax Guidelines. The
+.BR \(pl \c
+.IR command
+option is no longer specified by POSIX.1\(hy2008 but may be present
+in some implementations. In early proposals, it took a
+.IR pattern
+argument, but historical
+.IR less
+provided the
+.IR more
+general facility of a command. It would have been desirable to use the
+same
+.BR \(mic
+as
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi ,
+but the letter was already in use.
+.P
+The text stating ``from a non-rewindable stream .\|.\|. implementations
+may limit the amount of backwards motion supported'' would allow an
+implementation that permitted no backwards motion beyond text already
+on the screen. It was not possible to require a minimum amount of
+backwards motion that would be effective for all conceivable device
+types. The implementation should allow the user to back up as far as
+possible, within device and reasonable memory allocation constraints.
+.P
+Historically, non-printable characters were displayed using the ARPA
+standard mappings, which are as follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Printable characters are left alone.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Control characters less than \e177 are represented as followed by the
+character offset from the
+.BR '@' 
+character in the ASCII map; for example, \e007 is represented as
+.BR 'G' .
+.IP " 3." 4
+\e177 is represented as followed by
+.BR '?' .
+.P
+The display of characters having their eighth bit set was less
+standard. Existing implementations use hex (0x00), octal (\e000), and a
+meta-bit display. (The latter displayed characters with their eighth
+bit set as the two characters
+.BR \(dqM\(mi\(dq ,
+followed by the seven-bit display as described previously.) The latter
+probably has the best claim to historical practice because it was used
+with the
+.BR \(miv
+option of 4 BSD and 4 BSD-derived versions of the
+.IR cat
+utility since 1980.
+.P
+No specific display format is required by POSIX.1\(hy2008. Implementations are
+encouraged to conform to historic practice in the absence of any strong
+reason to diverge.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language",
+.IR "\fIctags\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIed\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIex\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIvi\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 9.2" ", " "Regular Expression General Requirements",
+.IR "Section 9.3" ", " "Basic Regular Expressions",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/mv.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/mv.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d8e4dde
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/mv.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,529 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MV "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mv
+\(em move files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+mv \fB[\fR\(miif\fB] \fIsource_file target_file\fR
+.P
+mv \fB[\fR\(miif\fB] \fIsource_file\fR... \fItarget_dir\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+In the first synopsis form, the
+.IR mv
+utility shall move the file named by the
+.IR source_file
+operand to the destination specified by the
+.IR target_file .
+This first synopsis form is assumed when the final operand does not
+name an existing directory and is not a symbolic link referring to
+an existing directory. In this case, if
+.IR source_file
+names a non-directory file and
+.IR target_file
+ends with a trailing
+<slash>
+character,
+.IR mv
+shall treat this as an error and no
+.IR source_file
+operands will be processed.
+.P
+In the second synopsis form,
+.IR mv
+shall move each file named by a
+.IR source_file
+operand to a destination file in the existing directory named by the
+.IR target_dir
+operand, or referenced if
+.IR target_dir
+is a symbolic link referring to an existing directory. The
+destination path for each
+.IR source_file
+shall be the concatenation of the target directory, a single
+<slash>
+character if the target did not end in a
+<slash>,
+and the last pathname component of the
+.IR source_file .
+This second form is assumed when the final operand names an existing
+directory.
+.P
+If any operand specifies an existing file of a type not
+specified by the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, the behavior is implementation-defined.
+.P
+For each
+.IR source_file
+the following steps shall be taken:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the destination path exists, the
+.BR \(mif
+option is not specified, and either of the following conditions is
+true:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+The permissions of the destination path do not permit writing and the
+standard input is a terminal.
+.IP " b." 4
+The
+.BR \(mii
+option is specified.
+.P
+the
+.IR mv
+utility shall write a prompt to standard error and read a line from
+standard input. If the response is not affirmative,
+.IR mv
+shall do nothing more with the current
+.IR source_file
+and go on to any remaining
+.IR source_file s.
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the
+.IR source_file
+operand and destination path name the same existing file, then the
+destination path shall not be removed, and one of the following shall
+occur:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+No change is made to
+.IR source_file ,
+no error occurs, and no diagnostic is issued.
+.IP " b." 4
+No change is made to
+.IR source_file ,
+a diagnostic is issued to standard error identifying the two names,
+and the exit status is affected.
+.IP " c." 4
+If the
+.IR source_file
+operand and destination path name distinct directory entries, then the
+.IR source_file
+operand is removed, no error occurs, and no diagnostic is issued.
+.P
+The
+.IR mv
+utility shall do nothing more with the current
+.IR source_file ,
+and go on to any remaining
+.IR source_file s.
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+The
+.IR mv
+utility shall perform actions equivalent to the
+\fIrename\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, called with the following arguments:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+The
+.IR source_file
+operand is used as the
+.IR old
+argument.
+.IP " b." 4
+The destination path is used as the
+.IR new
+argument.
+.P
+If this succeeds,
+.IR mv
+shall do nothing more with the current
+.IR source_file
+and go on to any remaining
+.IR source_file s.
+If this fails for any reasons other than those described for the
+.IR errno
+.BR [EXDEV] 
+in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR mv
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing more
+with the current
+.IR source_file ,
+and go on to any remaining
+.IR source_file s.
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+If the destination path exists, and it is a file of type directory and
+.IR source_file
+is not a file of type directory, or it is a file not of type directory
+and
+.IR source_file
+is a file of type directory,
+.IR mv
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing more
+with the current
+.IR source_file ,
+and go on to any remaining
+.IR source_file s.
+If the destination path exists and was created by a previous step, it
+is unspecified whether this will treated as an error or the destination
+path will be overwritten.
+.IP " 5." 4
+If the destination path exists,
+.IR mv
+shall attempt to remove it. If this fails for any reason,
+.IR mv
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing more
+with the current
+.IR source_file ,
+and go on to any remaining
+.IR source_file s.
+.IP " 6." 4
+The file hierarchy rooted in
+.IR source_file
+shall be duplicated as a file hierarchy rooted in the destination path. If
+.IR source_file
+or any of the files below it in the hierarchy are symbolic links, the
+links themselves shall be duplicated, including their contents, rather
+than any files to which they refer. The following characteristics of
+each file in the file hierarchy shall be duplicated:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " *" 4
+The time of last data modification and time of last access
+.IP " *" 4
+The user ID and group ID
+.IP " *" 4
+The file mode
+.P
+If the user ID, group ID, or file mode of a regular file cannot be
+duplicated, the file mode bits S_ISUID and S_ISGID shall not be
+duplicated.
+.P
+When files are duplicated to another file system, the implementation
+may require that the process invoking
+.IR mv
+has read access to each file being duplicated.
+.P
+If files being duplicated to another file system have hard links to
+other files, it is unspecified whether the files copied to the new
+file system have the hard links preserved or separate copies are created
+for the linked files.
+.P
+If the duplication of the file hierarchy fails for any reason,
+.IR mv
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing more
+with the current
+.IR source_file ,
+and go on to any remaining
+.IR source_file s.
+.P
+If the duplication of the file characteristics fails for any reason,
+.IR mv
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error, but this failure
+shall not cause
+.IR mv
+to modify its exit status.
+.RE
+.IP " 7." 4
+The file hierarchy rooted in
+.IR source_file
+shall be removed. If this fails for any reason,
+.IR mv
+shall write a diagnostic message to the standard error, do nothing more
+with the current
+.IR source_file ,
+and go on to any remaining
+.IR source_file s.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR mv
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mif\fP" 10
+Do not prompt for confirmation if the destination path exists. Any
+previous occurrence of the
+.BR \(mii
+option is ignored.
+.IP "\fB\(mii\fP" 10
+Prompt for confirmation if the destination path exists. Any previous
+occurrence of the
+.BR \(mif
+option is ignored.
+.P
+Specifying more than one of the
+.BR \(mif
+or
+.BR \(mii
+options shall not be considered an error. The last option specified
+shall determine the behavior of
+.IR mv .
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIsource_file\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file or directory to be moved.
+.IP "\fItarget_file\fR" 10
+A new pathname for the file or directory being moved.
+.IP "\fItarget_dir\fR" 10
+A pathname of an existing directory into which to move the input
+files.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used to read an input line in response to
+each prompt specified in the STDERR section. Otherwise, the standard
+input shall not be used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files specified by each
+.IR source_file
+operand can be of any file type.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR mv :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, equivalence classes,
+and multi-character collating elements used in the extended regular
+expression defined for the
+.BR yesexpr
+locale keyword in the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+category.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files), the behavior of
+character classes used in the extended regular expression defined for
+the
+.BR yesexpr
+locale keyword in the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+category.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale used to process affirmative responses, and the
+locale used to affect the format and contents of diagnostic messages
+and prompts written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+Prompts shall be written to the standard error under the conditions
+specified in the DESCRIPTION section. The prompts shall contain the
+destination pathname, but their format is otherwise unspecified.
+Otherwise, the standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+The output files may be of any file type.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+All input files were moved successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+If the copying or removal of
+.IR source_file
+is prematurely terminated by a signal or error,
+.IR mv
+may leave a partial copy of
+.IR source_file
+at the source or destination. The
+.IR mv
+utility shall not modify both
+.IR source_file
+and the destination path simultaneously; termination at any point shall
+leave either
+.IR source_file
+or the destination path complete.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Some implementations mark for update the last file status change timestamp
+of renamed files and some do not. Applications which make use of the
+last file status change timestamp may behave differently with respect
+to renamed files unless they are designed to allow for either behavior.
+.P
+The specification ensures that
+.IR mv
+.BR a
+.BR a
+will not alter the contents of file
+.BR a ,
+and allows the implementation to issue an error that a file cannot be
+moved onto itself. Likewise, when
+.BR a
+and
+.BR b
+are hard links to the same file,
+.IR mv
+.BR a
+.BR b
+will not alter
+.BR b ,
+but if a diagnostic is not issued, then it is unspecified whether
+.BR a
+is left untouched (as it would be by the
+\fIrename\fR()
+function) or unlinked (reducing the link count of
+.BR b ).
+.SH EXAMPLES
+If the current directory contains only files
+.BR a
+(of any type defined by the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008),
+.BR b
+(also of any type), and a directory
+.BR c :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+mv a b c
+mv c d
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+results with the original files
+.BR a
+and
+.BR b
+residing in the directory
+.BR d
+in the current directory.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Early proposals diverged from the SVID and BSD historical practice in
+that they required that when the destination path exists, the
+.BR \(mif
+option is not specified, and input is not a terminal,
+.IR mv
+fails. This was done for compatibility with
+.IR cp .
+The current text returns to historical practice. It should be noted
+that this is consistent with the
+\fIrename\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, which does not require write permission
+on the target.
+.P
+For absolute clarity, paragraph (1), describing the behavior of
+.IR mv
+when prompting for confirmation, should be interpreted in the following
+manner:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+if (exists AND (NOT f_option) AND
+    ((not_writable AND input_is_terminal) OR i_option))
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mii
+option exists on BSD systems, giving applications and users a way to
+avoid accidentally unlinking files when moving others. When the
+standard input is not a terminal, the 4.3 BSD
+.IR mv
+deletes all existing destination paths without prompting, even when
+.BR \(mii
+is specified; this is inconsistent with the behavior of the 4.3 BSD
+.IR cp
+utility, which always generates an error when the file is unwritable
+and the standard input is not a terminal. The standard developers
+decided that use of
+.BR \(mii
+is a request for interaction, so when the destination
+path exists, the utility takes instructions from whatever responds to
+standard input.
+.P
+The
+\fIrename\fR()
+function is able to move directories within the same file system. Some
+historical versions of
+.IR mv
+have been able to move directories, but not to a different file system.
+The standard developers considered that this was an annoying
+inconsistency, so this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires directories to be able to be moved
+even across file systems. There is no
+.BR \(miR
+option to confirm that moving a directory is actually intended, since
+such an option was not required for moving directories in historical
+practice. Requiring the application to specify it sometimes, depending
+on the destination, seemed just as inconsistent. The semantics of the
+\fIrename\fR()
+function were preserved as much as possible. For example,
+.IR mv
+is not permitted to ``rename'' files to or from directories, even
+though they might be empty and removable.
+.P
+Historic implementations of
+.IR mv
+did not exit with a non-zero exit status if they were unable to
+duplicate any file characteristics when moving a file across file
+systems, nor did they write a diagnostic message for the user. The
+former behavior has been preserved to prevent scripts from breaking; a
+diagnostic message is now required, however, so that users are alerted
+that the file characteristics have changed.
+.P
+The exact format of the interactive prompts is unspecified. Only the
+general nature of the contents of prompts are specified because
+implementations may desire more descriptive prompts than those used on
+historical implementations. Therefore, an application not using the
+.BR \(mif
+option or using the
+.BR \(mii
+option relies on the system to provide the most suitable dialog
+directly with the user, based on the behavior specified.
+.P
+When
+.IR mv
+is dealing with a single file system and
+.IR source_file
+is a symbolic link, the link itself is moved as a consequence of the
+dependence on the
+\fIrename\fR()
+functionality, per the DESCRIPTION. Across file systems, this has to be
+made explicit.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcp\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIln\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIrename\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/newgrp.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/newgrp.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c747daf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/newgrp.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,296 @@
+'\" et
+.TH NEWGRP "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+newgrp
+\(em change to a new group
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+newgrp \fB[\fR\(mil\fB] [\fIgroup\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR newgrp
+utility shall create a new shell execution environment with a new real
+and effective group identification. Of the attributes listed in
+.IR "Section 2.12" ", " "Shell Execution Environment",
+the new shell execution environment shall retain the working directory,
+file creation mask, and exported variables from the previous
+environment (that is, open files, traps, unexported variables, alias
+definitions, shell functions, and
+.IR set
+options may be lost). All other aspects of the process environment
+that are preserved by the
+.IR exec
+family of functions defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 shall also be preserved by
+.IR newgrp ;
+whether other aspects are preserved is unspecified.
+.P
+A failure to assign the new group identifications (for example, for
+security or password-related reasons) shall not prevent the new shell
+execution environment from being created.
+.P
+The
+.IR newgrp
+utility shall affect the supplemental groups for the process as
+follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+On systems where the effective group ID is normally in the
+supplementary group list (or whenever the old effective group ID
+actually is in the supplementary group list):
+.RS 4 
+.IP -- 4
+If the new effective group ID is also in the supplementary group list,
+.IR newgrp
+shall change the effective group ID.
+.IP -- 4
+If the new effective group ID is not in the supplementary group list,
+.IR newgrp
+shall add the new effective group ID to the list, if there is room to
+add it.
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+On systems where the effective group ID is not normally in the
+supplementary group list (or whenever the old effective group ID is not
+in the supplementary group list):
+.RS 4 
+.IP -- 4
+If the new effective group ID is in the supplementary group list,
+.IR newgrp
+shall delete it.
+.IP -- 4
+If the old effective group ID is not in the supplementary list,
+.IR newgrp
+shall add it if there is room.
+.RE
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not specify whether the effective group ID of a process
+is included in its supplementary group list.
+.P
+.P
+With no operands,
+.IR newgrp
+shall change the effective group back to the groups identified in the
+user's user entry, and shall set the list of supplementary groups to
+that set in the user's group database entries.
+.P
+If the first argument is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the results are unspecified.
+.P
+If a password is required for the specified group, and the user is not
+listed as a member of that group in the group database, the user shall
+be prompted to enter the correct password for that group. If the user
+is listed as a member of that group, no password shall be requested.
+If no password is required for the specified group, it is
+implementation-defined whether users not listed as members of that
+group can change to that group. Whether or not a password is required,
+implementation-defined system accounting or security mechanisms may
+impose additional authorization restrictions that may cause
+.IR newgrp
+to write a diagnostic message and suppress the changing of the group
+identification.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR newgrp
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except for the unspecified usage of
+.BR '\(mi' .
+.P
+The following option shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mil\fP" 10
+(The letter ell.) Change the environment to what would be expected if
+the user actually logged in again.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIgroup\fR" 10
+A group name from the group database or a non-negative numeric group
+ID. Specifies the group ID to which the real and effective group IDs
+shall be set. If
+.IR group
+is a non-negative numeric string and exists in the group database as a
+group name (see
+\fIgetgrnam\fR()),
+the numeric group ID associated with that group name shall be used as
+the group ID.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The file
+.BR /dev/tty
+shall be used to read a single line of text for password checking, when
+one is required.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR newgrp :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used for diagnostic messages and a prompt
+string for a password, if one is required. Diagnostic messages may be
+written in cases where the exit status is not available. See the EXIT
+STATUS section.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+If
+.IR newgrp
+succeeds in creating a new shell execution environment, whether or not
+the group identification was changed successfully, the exit status
+shall be the exit status of the shell. Otherwise, the following exit
+value shall be returned:
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+The invoking shell may terminate.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+There is no convenient way to enter a password into the group
+database. Use of group passwords is not encouraged, because by their
+very nature they encourage poor security practices. Group passwords
+may disappear in the future.
+.P
+A common implementation of
+.IR newgrp
+is that the current shell uses
+.IR exec
+to overlay itself with
+.IR newgrp ,
+which in turn overlays itself with a new shell after changing group.
+On some implementations, however, this may not occur and
+.IR newgrp
+may be invoked as a subprocess.
+.P
+The
+.IR newgrp
+command is intended only for use from an interactive terminal. It does
+not offer a useful interface for the support of applications.
+.P
+The exit status of
+.IR newgrp
+is generally inapplicable. If
+.IR newgrp
+is used in a script, in most cases it successfully invokes a new shell
+and the rest of the original shell script is bypassed when the new
+shell exits. Used interactively,
+.IR newgrp
+displays diagnostic messages to indicate problems. But usage such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+newgrp foo
+echo $?
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+is not useful because the new shell might not have access to any status
+.IR newgrp
+may have generated (and most historical systems do not provide this
+status). A zero status echoed here does not necessarily indicate that
+the user has changed to the new group successfully. Following
+.IR newgrp
+with the
+.IR id
+command provides a portable means of determining whether the group
+change was successful or not.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Most historical implementations use one of the
+.IR exec
+functions to implement the behavior of
+.IR newgrp .
+Errors detected before the
+.IR exec
+leave the environment unchanged, while errors detected after the
+.IR exec
+leave the user in a changed environment. While it would be useful to
+have
+.IR newgrp
+issue a diagnostic message to tell the user that the environment
+changed, it would be inappropriate to require this change to some
+historical implementations.
+.P
+The password mechanism is allowed in the group database, but how this
+would be implemented is not specified.
+.P
+The
+.IR newgrp
+utility was retained in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, even given the existence of the multiple
+group permissions feature in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, for several reasons. First, in
+some implementations, the group ownership of a newly created file is
+determined by the group of the directory in which the file is created,
+as allowed by the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008; on other implementations, the group ownership
+of a newly created file is determined by the effective group ID. On
+implementations of the latter type,
+.IR newgrp
+allows files to be created with a specific group ownership. Finally,
+many implementations use the real group ID in accounting, and on such
+systems,
+.IR newgrp
+allows the accounting identity of the user to be changed.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language",
+.IR "\fIsh\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIgetgrnam\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/nice.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/nice.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fa1baaa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/nice.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,287 @@
+'\" et
+.TH NICE "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+nice
+\(em invoke a utility with an altered nice value
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+nice \fB[\fR\(min \fIincrement\fB] \fIutility \fB[\fIargument\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR nice
+utility shall invoke a utility, requesting that it be run with a
+different nice value (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.240" ", " "Nice Value").
+With no options, the executed utility shall be run with a nice value
+that is some implementation-defined quantity greater than or equal to
+the nice value of the current process. If the user lacks appropriate
+privileges to affect the nice value in the requested manner, the
+.IR nice
+utility shall not affect the nice value; in this case, a warning
+message may be written to standard error, but this shall not prevent
+the invocation of
+.IR utility
+or affect the exit status.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR nice
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option is supported:
+.IP "\fB\(min\ \fIincrement\fR" 10
+A positive or negative decimal integer which shall have the same
+effect on the execution of the utility as if the utility had
+called the
+\fInice\fR()
+function with the numeric value of the
+.IR increment
+option-argument.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIutility\fR" 10
+The name of a utility that is to be invoked. If the
+.IR utility
+operand names any of the special built-in utilities in
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities",
+the results are undefined.
+.IP "\fIargument\fR" 10
+Any string to be supplied as an argument when invoking the utility
+named by the
+.IR utility
+operand.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR nice :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fIPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the search path used to locate the utility to be invoked.
+See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables".
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+If
+.IR utility
+is invoked, the exit status of
+.IR nice
+shall be the exit status of
+.IR utility ;
+otherwise, the
+.IR nice
+utility shall exit with one of the following values:
+.IP "1\(hy125" 8
+An error occurred in the
+.IR nice
+utility.
+.IP "\0\0126" 8
+The utility specified by
+.IR utility
+was found but could not be invoked.
+.IP "\0\0127" 8
+The utility specified by
+.IR utility
+could not be found.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The only guaranteed portable uses of this utility are:
+.IP "\fInice\ utility\fR" 6
+.br
+Run
+.IR utility
+with the default higher or equal nice value.
+.IP "\fInice\ \fB\(min\ \fR<\fIpositive\ integer\fR>\fI\ utility\fR" 6
+.br
+Run
+.IR utility
+with a higher nice value.
+.P
+On some implementations they have no discernible effect on the invoked
+utility and on some others they are exactly equivalent.
+.P
+Historical systems have frequently supported the <\fIpositive
+integer\fP> up to 20. Since there is no error penalty associated with
+guessing a number that is too high, users without access to the system
+conformance document (to see what limits are actually in place) could
+use the historical 1 to 20 range or attempt to use very large numbers
+if the job should be truly low priority.
+.P
+The nice value of a process can be displayed using the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ps \(mio nice
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR command ,
+.IR env ,
+.IR nice ,
+.IR nohup ,
+.IR time ,
+and
+.IR xargs
+utilities have been specified to use exit code 127 if an error occurs
+so that applications can distinguish ``failure to find a utility'' from
+``invoked utility exited with an error indication''. The value 127 was
+chosen because it is not commonly used for other meanings; most
+utilities use small values for ``normal error conditions'' and the
+values above 128 can be confused with termination due to receipt of a
+signal. The value 126 was chosen in a similar manner to indicate that
+the utility could be found, but not invoked. Some scripts produce
+meaningful error messages differentiating the 126 and 127 cases. The
+distinction between exit codes 126 and 127 is based on KornShell
+practice that uses 127 when all attempts to
+.IR exec
+the utility fail with
+.BR [ENOENT] ,
+and uses 126 when any attempt to
+.IR exec
+the utility fails for any other reason.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The 4.3 BSD version of
+.IR nice
+does not check whether
+.IR increment
+is a valid decimal integer. The command
+.IR nice
+.BR \(mix
+.IR utility ,
+for example, would be treated the same as the command
+.IR nice
+.BR \(mi\|\(mi1
+.IR utility .
+If the user does not have appropriate privileges, this results in a
+``permission denied'' error.
+This is considered a bug.
+.P
+When a user without appropriate privileges gives a negative
+.IR increment ,
+System V treats it like the command
+.IR nice
+.BR \(mi0
+.IR utility ,
+while 4.3 BSD writes a ``permission denied'' message and does not run
+the utility. The standard specifies the System V behavior together
+with an optional BSD-style ``permission denied'' message.
+.P
+The C shell has a built-in version of
+.IR nice
+that has a different interface from the one described in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+The term ``utility'' is used, rather than ``command'', to highlight the
+fact that shell compound commands, pipelines, and so on, cannot be
+used. Special built-ins also cannot be used.
+However, ``utility'' includes user application programs and shell
+scripts, not just utilities defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+Historical implementations of
+.IR nice
+provide a nice value range of 40 or 41 discrete steps, with the default
+nice value being the midpoint of that range. By default, they raise the
+nice value of the executed utility by 10.
+.P
+Some historical documentation states that the
+.IR increment
+value must be within a fixed range. This is misleading; the valid
+.IR increment
+values on any invocation are determined by the current process
+nice value, which is not always the default.
+.P
+The definition of nice value is not intended to suggest that all
+processes in a system have priorities that are comparable. Scheduling
+policy extensions such as the realtime priorities in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 make the
+notion of a single underlying priority for all scheduling policies
+problematic. Some implementations may implement the
+.IR nice -related
+features to affect all processes on the system, others to affect just
+the general time-sharing activities implied by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, and others may
+have no effect at all. Because of the use of
+``implementation-defined'' in
+.IR nice
+and
+.IR renice ,
+a wide range of implementation strategies are possible.
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard allowed a
+.BR \(mi \c
+.IR increment
+option. This form is no longer specified by POSIX.1\(hy2008 but may
+be present in some implementations.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language",
+.IR "\fIrenice\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.240" ", " "Nice Value",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fInice\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/nl.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/nl.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b5633e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/nl.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,312 @@
+'\" et
+.TH NL "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+nl
+\(em line numbering filter
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+nl \fB[\fR\(mip\fB] [\fR\(mib \fItype\fB] [\fR\(mid \fIdelim\fB] [\fR\(mif \fItype\fB] [\fR\(mih \fItype\fB] [\fR\(mii \fIincr\fB] [\fR\(mil \fInum\fB]
+    [\fR\(min \fIformat\fB] [\fR\(mis \fIsep\fB] [\fR\(miv \fIstartnum\fB] [\fR\(miw \fIwidth\fB] [\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR nl
+utility shall read lines from the named
+.IR file
+or the standard input if no
+.IR file
+is named and shall reproduce the lines to standard output. Lines shall
+be numbered on the left. Additional functionality may be provided in
+accordance with the command options in effect.
+.P
+The
+.IR nl
+utility views the text it reads in terms of logical pages. Line
+numbering shall be reset at the start of each logical page. A logical
+page consists of a header, a body, and a footer section. Empty sections
+are valid. Different line numbering options are independently available
+for header, body, and footer (for example, no numbering of header and
+footer lines while numbering blank lines only in the body).
+.P
+The starts of logical page sections shall be signaled by input lines
+containing nothing but the following delimiter characters:
+.TS
+center box tab(@);
+cB | cB
+lw(1i)f5 | lw(1i).
+Line@Start of
+_
+\e:\e:\e:@Header
+\e:\e:@Body
+\e:@Footer
+.TE
+.P
+Unless otherwise specified,
+.IR nl
+shall assume the text being read is in a single logical page body.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR nl
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+Only one file can be named.
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mib\ \fItype\fR" 10
+Specify which logical page body lines shall be numbered. Recognized
+.IR types
+and their meaning are:
+.RS 10 
+.IP "\fBa\fP" 8
+Number all lines.
+.IP "\fBt\fP" 8
+Number only non-empty lines.
+.IP "\fBn\fP" 8
+No line numbering.
+.IP "\fBp\fIstring\fR" 8
+Number only lines that contain the basic regular expression
+specified in
+.IR string .
+.P
+The default
+.IR type
+for logical page body shall be
+.BR t
+(text lines numbered).
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mid\ \fIdelim\fR" 10
+Specify the delimiter characters that indicate the start of a logical
+page section. These can be changed from the default characters
+.BR \(dq\e:\(dq 
+to two user-specified characters. If only one character is entered,
+the second character shall remain the default character
+.BR ':' .
+.IP "\fB\(mif\ \fItype\fR" 10
+Specify the same as
+.BR b
+.IR type
+except for footer. The default for logical page footer shall be
+.BR n
+(no lines numbered).
+.IP "\fB\(mih\ \fItype\fR" 10
+Specify the same as
+.BR b
+.IR type
+except for header. The default
+.IR type
+for logical page header shall be
+.BR n
+(no lines numbered).
+.IP "\fB\(mii\ \fIincr\fR" 10
+Specify the increment value used to number logical page lines. The
+default shall be 1.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\ \fInum\fR" 10
+Specify the number of blank lines to be considered as one. For
+example,
+.BR "\(mil\ 2"
+results in only the second adjacent blank line being numbered (if the
+appropriate
+.BR "\(mih\ a" ,
+.BR "\(mib\ a" ,
+or
+.BR "\(mif\ a"
+option is set). The default shall be 1.
+.IP "\fB\(min\ \fIformat\fR" 10
+Specify the line numbering format. Recognized values are:
+.BR ln ,
+left justified, leading zeros suppressed;
+.BR rn ,
+right justified, leading zeros suppressed;
+.BR rz ,
+right justified, leading zeros kept. The default
+.IR format
+shall be
+.BR rn
+(right justified).
+.IP "\fB\(mip\fP" 10
+Specify that numbering should not be restarted at logical page
+delimiters.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\ \fIsep\fR" 10
+Specify the characters used in separating the line number and the
+corresponding text line. The default
+.IR sep
+shall be a
+<tab>.
+.IP "\fB\(miv\ \fIstartnum\fR" 10
+Specify the initial value used to number logical page lines. The
+default shall be 1.
+.IP "\fB\(miw\ \fIwidth\fR" 10
+Specify the number of characters to be used for the line number. The
+default
+.IR width
+shall be 6.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a text file to be line-numbered.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used if no
+.IR file
+operand is specified, and shall be used if the
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' 
+and the implementation treats the
+.BR '\(mi' 
+as meaning standard input.
+Otherwise, the standard input shall not be used.
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input file shall be a text file.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR nl :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, equivalence classes,
+and multi-character collating elements within regular expressions.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files), the behavior of
+character classes within regular expressions, and for deciding which
+characters are in character class
+.BR graph
+(for the
+.BR "\(mib\ t" ,
+.BR "\(mif\ t" ,
+and
+.BR "\(mih\ t"
+options).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall be a text file in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s%s%s", <\fIline number\fR>, <\fIseparator\fR>, <\fIinput line\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fIline\ number\fP> is one of the following numeric formats:
+.IP "\fR%6d\fP" 10
+When the
+.BR rn
+format is used (the default; see
+.BR \(min ).
+.IP "\fR%06d\fP" 10
+When the
+.BR rz
+format is used.
+.IP "\fR%\(mi6d\fP" 10
+When the
+.BR ln
+format is used.
+.IP <empty> 10
+When line numbers are suppressed for a portion of the page; the
+<\fIseparator\fP> is also suppressed.
+.P
+In the preceding list, the number 6 is the default width; the
+.BR \(miw
+option can change this value.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+In using the
+.BR \(mid
+.IR delim
+option, care should be taken to escape characters that have special
+meaning to the command interpreter.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+nl \(miv 10 \(mii 10 \(mid \e!+ file1
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+numbers
+.IR file1
+starting at line number 10 with an increment of 10. The logical page
+delimiter is
+.BR \(dq!+\(dq .
+Note that the
+.BR '!' 
+has to be escaped when using
+.IR csh
+as a command interpreter because of its history substitution syntax.
+For
+.IR ksh
+and
+.IR sh
+the escape is not necessary, but does not do any harm.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpr\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/nm.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/nm.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..149a908
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/nm.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,405 @@
+'\" et
+.TH NM "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+nm
+\(em write the name list of an object file (\fBDEVELOPMENT\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+nm \fB[\fR\(miAPv\fB] [\fR\(mig|\(miu\fB] [\fR\(mit \fIformat\fB] \fIfile\fR...
+nm \fB[\fR\(miAPv\fB] [\fR\(miefox\fB] [\fR\(mig|\(miu\fB] [\fR\(mit \fIformat\fB]\fI file\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR nm
+utility shall display symbolic information appearing in the object
+file, executable file, or object-file library named by
+.IR file .
+If no symbolic information is available for a valid input file, the
+.IR nm
+utility shall report that fact, but not consider it an error
+condition.
+.P
+The default base used when numeric values are written is unspecified.
+On XSI-conformant systems, it shall be decimal.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR nm
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(miA\fP" 10
+Write the full pathname or library name of an object on each line.
+.IP "\fB\(mie\fP" 10
+Write only external (global) and static symbol information.
+.IP "\fB\(mif\fP" 10
+Produce full output. Write redundant symbols (\c
+.BR .text ,
+.BR .data ,
+and
+.BR .bss ),
+normally suppressed.
+.IP "\fB\(mig\fP" 10
+Write only external (global) symbol information.
+.IP "\fB\(mio\fP" 10
+Write numeric values in octal (equivalent to
+.BR "\(mit\ o" ).
+.IP "\fB\(miP\fP" 10
+Write information in a portable output format, as specified in the
+STDOUT section.
+.IP "\fB\(mit\ \fIformat\fR" 10
+Write each numeric value in the specified format. The format shall be
+dependent on the single character used as the
+.IR format
+option-argument:
+.RS 10 
+.IP "\fRd\fR" 6
+The offset is written in decimal
+(default).
+.IP "\fRo\fR" 6
+The offset is written in octal.
+.IP "\fRx\fR" 6
+The offset is written in hexadecimal.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miu\fP" 10
+Write only undefined symbols.
+.IP "\fB\(miv\fP" 10
+Sort output by value instead of by symbol name.
+.IP "\fB\(mix\fP" 10
+Write numeric values in hexadecimal (equivalent to
+.BR "\(mit\ x" ).
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of an object file, executable file, or object-file library.
+.SH STDIN
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input file shall be an object file, an object-file library whose
+format is the same as those produced by the
+.IR ar
+utility for link editing, or an executable file. The
+.IR nm
+utility may accept additional implementation-defined object library
+formats for the input file.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR nm :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for character collation information for the
+symbol-name and symbol-value collation sequences.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+If symbolic information is present in the input files, then for each
+file or for each member of an archive, the
+.IR nm
+utility shall write the following information to standard output. By
+default, the format is unspecified, but the output shall be sorted by
+symbol name according to the collation sequence in the current locale.
+.IP " *" 4
+Library or object name, if
+.BR \(miA
+is specified
+.IP " *" 4
+Symbol name
+.IP " *" 4
+Symbol type, which shall either be one of the following single
+characters or an implementation-defined type represented by a single
+character:
+.RS 4 
+.IP "\fRA\fR" 6
+Global absolute symbol.
+.IP "\fRa\fR" 6
+Local absolute symbol.
+.IP "\fRB\fR" 6
+Global ``bss'' (that is, uninitialized data space) symbol.
+.IP "\fRb\fR" 6
+Local bss symbol.
+.IP "\fRD\fR" 6
+Global data symbol.
+.IP "\fRd\fR" 6
+Local data symbol.
+.IP "\fRT\fR" 6
+Global text symbol.
+.IP "\fRt\fR" 6
+Local text symbol.
+.IP "\fRU\fR" 6
+Undefined symbol.
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Value of the symbol
+.IP " *" 4
+The size associated with the symbol, if applicable
+.P
+This information may be supplemented by additional information specific
+to the implementation.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(miP
+option is specified, the previous information shall be displayed using
+the following portable format. The three versions differ depending on
+whether
+.BR "\(mit\ d" ,
+.BR "\(mit\ o" ,
+or
+.BR "\(mit\ x"
+was specified, respectively:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s%s %s %d %d\en", <\fIlibrary/object name\fR>, <\fIname\fR>, <\fItype\fR>,
+    <\fIvalue\fR>, <\fIsize\fR>
+.P
+"%s%s %s %o %o\en", <\fIlibrary/object name\fR>, <\fIname\fR>, <\fItype\fR>,
+    <\fIvalue\fR>, <\fIsize\fR>
+.P
+"%s%s %s %x %x\en", <\fIlibrary/object name\fR>, <\fIname\fR>, <\fItype\fR>,
+    <\fIvalue\fR>, <\fIsize\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+where <\fIlibrary/object\ name\fP> shall be formatted as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.BR \(miA
+is not specified, <\fIlibrary/object\ name\fP> shall be an empty string.
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.BR \(miA
+is specified and the corresponding
+.IR file
+operand does not name a library:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s: ", <\fIfile\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.BR \(miA
+is specified and the corresponding
+.IR file
+operand names a library. In this case, <\fIobject\ file\fP> shall name
+the object file in the library containing the symbol being described:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s[%s]: ", <\fIfile\fR>, <\fIobject file\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.BR \(miA
+is not specified, then if more than one
+.IR file
+operand is specified or if only one
+.IR file
+operand is specified and it names a library,
+.IR nm
+shall write a line identifying the object containing the following
+symbols before the lines containing those symbols, in the form:
+.IP " *" 4
+If the corresponding
+.IR file
+operand does not name a library:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s:\en", <\fIfile\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+If the corresponding
+.IR file
+operand names a library; in this case, <\fIobject\ file\fP> shall be
+the name of the file in the library containing the following symbols:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s[%s]:\en", <\fIfile\fR>, <\fIobject file\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.BR \(miP
+is specified, but
+.BR \(mit
+is not, the format shall be as if
+.BR "\(mit\ x"
+had been specified.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Mechanisms for dynamic linking make this utility less meaningful when
+applied to an executable file because a dynamically linked executable
+may omit numerous library routines that would be found in a statically
+linked executable.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Historical implementations of
+.IR nm
+have used different bases for numeric output and supplied different
+default types of symbols that were reported. The
+.BR \(mit
+.IR format
+option, similar to that used in
+.IR od
+and
+.IR strings ,
+can be used to specify the numeric base;
+.BR \(mig
+and
+.BR \(miu
+can be used to restrict the amount of output or the types of symbols
+included in the output.
+.P
+The compromise of using
+.BR \(mit
+.IR format
+\fIversus\fP using
+.BR \(mid ,
+.BR \(mio ,
+and other similar options was necessary because of differences in the
+meaning of
+.BR \(mio
+between implementations. The
+.BR \(mio
+option from BSD has been provided here as
+.BR \(miA
+to avoid confusion with the
+.BR \(mio
+from System V (which has been provided here as
+.BR \(mit
+and as
+.BR \(mio
+on XSI-conformant systems).
+.P
+The option list was significantly reduced from that provided by
+historical implementations.
+.P
+The
+.IR nm
+description is a subset of both the System V and BSD
+.IR nm
+utilities with no specified default output.
+.P
+It was recognized that mechanisms for dynamic linking make this utility
+less meaningful when applied to an executable file (because a
+dynamically linked executable file may omit numerous library routines
+that would be found in a statically linked executable file), but the
+value of
+.IR nm
+during software development was judged to outweigh other limitations.
+.P
+The default output format of
+.IR nm
+is not specified because of differences in historical implementations.
+The
+.BR \(miP
+option was added to allow some type of portable output format. After a
+comparison of the different formats used in SunOS, BSD, SVR3, and SVR4,
+it was decided to create one that did not match the current format of
+any of these four systems. The format devised is easy to parse by
+humans, easy to parse in shell scripts, and does not need to vary
+depending on locale (because no English descriptions are included).
+All of the systems currently have the information available to use this
+format.
+.P
+The format given in
+.IR nm
+STDOUT uses
+<space>
+characters between the fields, which may be any number of
+<blank>
+characters required to align the columns. The single-character types
+were selected to match historical practice, and the requirement that
+implementation additions also be single characters made parsing the
+information easier for shell scripts.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIar\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIc99\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/nohup.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/nohup.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..13e18f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/nohup.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,311 @@
+'\" et
+.TH NOHUP "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+nohup
+\(em invoke a utility immune to hangups
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+nohup \fIutility \fB[\fIargument\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR nohup
+utility shall invoke the utility named by the
+.IR utility
+operand with arguments supplied as the
+.IR argument
+operands. At the time the named
+.IR utility
+is invoked, the SIGHUP signal shall be set to be ignored.
+.P
+If standard input is associated with a terminal, the
+.IR nohup
+utility may redirect standard input from an unspecified file.
+.P
+If the standard output is a terminal, all output written by the named
+.IR utility
+to its standard output shall be appended to the end of the file
+.BR nohup.out
+in the current directory. If
+.BR nohup.out
+cannot be created or opened for appending, the output shall be appended
+to the end of the file
+.BR nohup.out
+in the directory specified by the
+.IR HOME
+environment variable. If neither file can be created or opened for
+appending,
+.IR utility
+shall not be invoked. If a file is created, the file's permission bits
+shall be set to S_IRUSR | S_IWUSR.
+.P
+If standard error is a terminal and standard output is open but is not
+a terminal, all output written by the named utility to its standard
+error shall be redirected to the same open file description as the
+standard output. If standard error is a terminal and standard output
+either is a terminal or is closed, the same output shall instead be
+appended to the end of the
+.BR nohup.out
+file as described above.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIutility\fR" 10
+The name of a utility that is to be invoked. If the
+.IR utility
+operand names any of the special built-in utilities in
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities",
+the results are undefined.
+.IP "\fIargument\fR" 10
+Any string to be supplied as an argument when invoking the utility
+named by the
+.IR utility
+operand.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR nohup :
+.IP "\fIHOME\fP" 10
+Determine the pathname of the user's home directory: if the output
+file
+.BR nohup.out
+cannot be created in the current directory, the
+.IR nohup
+utility shall use the directory named by
+.IR HOME
+to create the file.
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fIPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the search path that is used to locate the utility to be
+invoked. See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables".
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+The
+.IR nohup
+utility shall take the standard action for all signals except that
+SIGHUP shall be ignored.
+.SH STDOUT
+If the standard output is not a terminal, the standard output of
+.IR nohup
+shall be the standard output generated by the execution of the
+.IR utility
+specified by the operands. Otherwise, nothing shall be written to the
+standard output.
+.SH STDERR
+If the standard output is a terminal, a message shall be written to the
+standard error, indicating the name of the file to which the output is
+being appended. The name of the file shall be either
+.BR nohup.out
+or
+.BR $HOME/nohup.out .
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+Output written by the named utility is appended to the file
+.BR nohup.out
+(or
+.BR $HOME/nohup.out ),
+if the conditions hold as described in the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP 126 8
+The utility specified by
+.IR utility
+was found but could not be invoked.
+.IP 127 8
+An error occurred in the
+.IR nohup
+utility or the utility specified by
+.IR utility
+could not be found.
+.P
+Otherwise, the exit status of
+.IR nohup
+shall be that of the utility specified by the
+.IR utility
+operand.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR command ,
+.IR env ,
+.IR nice ,
+.IR nohup ,
+.IR time ,
+and
+.IR xargs
+utilities have been specified to use exit code 127 if an error occurs
+so that applications can distinguish ``failure to find a utility'' from
+``invoked utility exited with an error indication''. The value 127 was
+chosen because it is not commonly used for other meanings; most
+utilities use small values for ``normal error conditions'' and the
+values above 128 can be confused with termination due to receipt of a
+signal. The value 126 was chosen in a similar manner to indicate that
+the utility could be found, but not invoked. Some scripts produce
+meaningful error messages differentiating the 126 and 127 cases. The
+distinction between exit codes 126 and 127 is based on KornShell
+practice that uses 127 when all attempts to
+.IR exec
+the utility fail with
+.BR [ENOENT] ,
+and uses 126 when any attempt to
+.IR exec
+the utility fails for any other reason.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+It is frequently desirable to apply
+.IR nohup
+to pipelines or lists of commands. This can be done by placing
+pipelines and command lists in a single file; this file can then be
+invoked as a utility, and the
+.IR nohup
+applies to everything in the file.
+.P
+Alternatively, the following command can be used to apply
+.IR nohup
+to a complex command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+nohup sh \(mic '\fIcomplex-command-line\fP' </dev/null
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The 4.3 BSD version ignores SIGTERM and SIGHUP, and if
+.BR ./nohup.out
+cannot be used, it fails instead of trying to use
+.BR $HOME/nohup.out .
+.P
+The
+.IR csh
+utility has a built-in version of
+.IR nohup
+that acts differently from the
+.IR nohup
+defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+The term
+.IR utility
+is used, rather than
+.IR command ,
+to highlight the fact that shell compound commands, pipelines, special
+built-ins, and so on, cannot be used directly.
+However,
+.IR utility
+includes user application programs and shell scripts, not just the
+standard utilities.
+.P
+Historical versions of the
+.IR nohup
+utility use default file creation semantics. Some more recent versions
+use the permissions specified here as an added security precaution.
+.P
+Some historical implementations ignore SIGQUIT in addition to SIGHUP;
+others ignore SIGTERM. An early proposal allowed, but did not require,
+SIGQUIT to be ignored. Several reviewers objected that
+.IR nohup
+should only modify the handling of SIGHUP as required by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+Historical versions of
+.IR nohup
+did not affect standard input, but that causes problems in the common
+scenario where the user logs into a system, types the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+nohup make &
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+at the prompt, and then logs out. If standard input is not affected by
+.IR nohup ,
+the login session may not terminate for quite some time, since standard
+input remains open until
+.IR make
+exits. To avoid this problem, POSIX.1\(hy2008 allows implementations to
+redirect standard input if it is a terminal. Since the behavior is
+implementation-defined, portable applications that may run into the
+problem should redirect standard input themselves. For example,
+instead of:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+nohup make &
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+an application can invoke:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+nohup make </dev/null &
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language",
+.IR "\fIsh\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIsignal\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/od.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/od.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3b2eee8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/od.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,940 @@
+'\" et
+.TH OD "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+od
+\(em dump files in various formats
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+od \fB[\fR\(miv\fB] [\fR\(miA \fIaddress_base\fB] [\fR\(mij \fIskip\fB] [\fR\(miN \fIcount\fB] [\fR\(mit \fItype_string\fB]\fR...
+    \fB[\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+od \fB[\fR\(mibcdosx\fB] [\fIfile\fB] [[\fR+\fB]\fIoffset\fB[\fR.\fB][\fRb\fB]]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR od
+utility shall write the contents of its input files to standard output
+in a user-specified format.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR od
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except that the order of presentation of the
+.BR \(mit
+options
+and the
+.BR \(mibcdosx
+options
+is significant.
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(miA\ \fIaddress_base\fR" 10
+.br
+Specify the input offset base. See the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+The application shall ensure that the
+.IR address_base
+option-argument is a character. The characters
+.BR 'd' ,
+.BR 'o' ,
+and
+.BR 'x' 
+specify that the offset base shall be written in decimal, octal, or
+hexadecimal, respectively. The character
+.BR 'n' 
+specifies that the offset shall not be written.
+.IP "\fB\(mib\fP" 10
+Interpret bytes in octal. This shall be equivalent to
+.BR "\(mit\ o1" .
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Interpret bytes as characters specified by the current setting of the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category. Certain non-graphic characters appear as C escapes:
+.BR \(dqNUL=\e0\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqBS=\eb\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqFF=\ef\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqNL=\en\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqCR=\er\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqHT=\et\(dq ;
+others appear as 3-digit octal numbers.
+.IP "\fB\(mid\fP" 10
+Interpret
+.IR word s
+(two-byte units) in unsigned decimal. This shall be equivalent to
+.BR "\(mit\ u2" .
+.IP "\fB\(mij\ \fIskip\fR" 10
+Jump over
+.IR skip
+bytes from the beginning of the input. The
+.IR od
+utility shall read or seek past the first
+.IR skip
+bytes in the concatenated input files. If the combined input is not at
+least
+.IR skip
+bytes long, the
+.IR od
+utility shall write a diagnostic message to standard error and exit
+with a non-zero exit status.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+By default, the
+.IR skip
+option-argument shall be interpreted as a decimal number. With a
+leading 0x or 0X, the offset shall be interpreted as a hexadecimal
+number; otherwise, with a leading
+.BR '0' ,
+the offset shall be interpreted as an octal number. Appending the
+character
+.BR 'b' ,
+.BR 'k' ,
+or
+.BR 'm' 
+to offset shall cause it to be interpreted as a multiple of 512,
+1\|024, or 1\|048\|576 bytes, respectively. If the
+.IR skip
+number is hexadecimal, any appended
+.BR 'b' 
+shall be considered to be the final hexadecimal digit.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miN\ \fIcount\fR" 10
+Format no more than
+.IR count
+bytes of input. By default,
+.IR count
+shall be interpreted as a decimal number. With a leading 0x or 0X,
+.IR count
+shall be interpreted as a hexadecimal number; otherwise, with a leading
+.BR '0' ,
+it shall be interpreted as an octal number. If
+.IR count
+bytes of input (after successfully skipping, if
+.BR \(mij
+.IR skip
+is specified) are not available, it shall not be considered an error;
+the
+.IR od
+utility shall format the input that is available.
+.IP "\fB\(mio\fP" 10
+Interpret
+.IR word s
+(two-byte units) in octal. This shall be equivalent to
+.BR "\(mit\ o2" .
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Interpret
+.IR word s
+(two-byte units) in signed decimal. This shall be equivalent to
+.BR "\(mit\ d2" .
+.IP "\fB\(mit\ \fItype_string\fR" 10
+.br
+Specify one or more output types. See the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION
+section. The application shall ensure that the
+.IR type_string
+option-argument is a string specifying the types to be used when
+writing the input data. The string shall consist of the type
+specification characters
+.BR a ,
+.BR c ,
+.BR d ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+and
+.BR x ,
+specifying named character, character, signed decimal, floating point,
+octal, unsigned decimal, and hexadecimal, respectively. The type
+specification characters
+.BR d ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+and
+.BR x
+can be followed by an optional unsigned decimal integer that specifies
+the number of bytes to be transformed by each instance of the output
+type. The type specification character
+.BR f
+can be followed by an optional
+.BR F ,
+.BR D ,
+or
+.BR L
+indicating that the conversion should be applied to an item of type
+.BR float ,
+.BR double ,
+or
+.BR "long double" ,
+respectively. The type specification characters
+.BR d ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+and
+.BR x
+can be followed by an optional
+.BR C ,
+.BR S ,
+.BR I ,
+or
+.BR L
+indicating that the conversion should be applied to an item of type
+.BR char ,
+.BR short ,
+.BR int ,
+or
+.BR long ,
+respectively. Multiple types can be concatenated within the same
+.IR type_string
+and multiple
+.BR \(mit
+options can be specified. Output lines shall be written for each type
+specified in the order in which the type specification characters are
+specified.
+.IP "\fB\(miv\fP" 10
+Write all input data. Without the
+.BR \(miv
+option, any number of groups of output lines, which would be identical
+to the immediately preceding group of output lines (except for the byte
+offsets), shall be replaced with a line containing only an
+<asterisk>
+(\c
+.BR '*' ).
+.IP "\fB\(mix\fP" 10
+Interpret
+.IR word s
+(two-byte units) in hexadecimal. This shall be equivalent to
+.BR "\(mit\ x2" .
+.P
+Multiple types can be specified by using multiple
+.BR \(mibcdostx
+options. Output lines are written for each type specified in the order
+in which the types are specified.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file to be read. If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, the standard input shall be used.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If there are no more than two operands, none of the
+.BR \(miA ,
+.BR \(mij ,
+.BR \(miN ,
+.BR \(mit ,
+or
+.BR \(miv
+options is specified, and either of the following is true: the first
+character of the last operand is a
+<plus-sign>
+(\c
+.BR '\(pl' ),
+or there are two operands and the first character of the last operand
+is numeric;
+the last operand shall be interpreted as an offset operand on
+XSI-conformant systems.
+Under these conditions, the results are unspecified on systems that are
+not XSI-conformant systems.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB[+]\fIoffset\fB[.][b]\fR" 10
+The
+.IR offset
+operand specifies the offset in the file where dumping is to commence.
+This operand is normally interpreted as octal bytes. If
+.BR '.' 
+is appended, the offset shall be interpreted in decimal. If
+.BR 'b' 
+is appended, the offset shall be interpreted in units of 512 bytes.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used if no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, and shall be used if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' 
+and the implementation treats the
+.BR '\(mi' 
+as meaning standard input.
+Otherwise, the standard input shall not be used.
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files can be any file type.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR od :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILC_NUMERIC\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for selecting the radix character used when
+writing floating-point formatted output.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+See the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+The
+.IR od
+utility shall copy sequentially each input file to standard output,
+transforming the input data according to the output types specified by
+the
+.BR \(mit
+option
+or the
+.BR \(mibcdosx
+options.
+If no output type is specified, the default output shall be as if
+.BR "\(mit\ oS"
+had been specified.
+.P
+The number of bytes transformed by the output type specifier
+.BR c
+may be variable depending on the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category.
+.P
+The default number of bytes transformed by output type specifiers
+.BR d ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+and
+.BR x
+corresponds to the various C-language types as follows. If the
+.IR c99
+compiler is present on the system, these specifiers shall correspond to
+the sizes used by default in that compiler. Otherwise, these sizes
+may vary among systems that conform to POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.IP " *" 4
+For the type specifier characters
+.BR d ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+and
+.BR x ,
+the default number of bytes shall correspond to the size of the
+underlying implementation's basic integer type. For these specifier
+characters, the implementation shall support values of the optional
+number of bytes to be converted corresponding to the number of bytes in
+the C-language types
+.BR char ,
+.BR short ,
+.BR int ,
+and
+.BR long .
+These numbers can also be specified by an application as the characters
+.BR 'C' ,
+.BR 'S' ,
+.BR 'I' ,
+and
+.BR 'L' ,
+respectively. The implementation shall also support the values 1, 2, 4,
+and 8, even if it provides no C-Language types of those sizes. The
+implementation shall support the decimal value corresponding to the
+C-language type
+.BR "long long" .
+The byte order used when interpreting numeric values is
+implementation-defined, but shall correspond to the order in which a
+constant of the corresponding type is stored in memory on the system.
+.IP " *" 4
+For the type specifier character
+.BR f ,
+the default number of bytes shall correspond to the number of bytes in
+the underlying implementation's basic double precision floating-point
+data type. The implementation shall support values of the optional
+number of bytes to be converted corresponding to the number of bytes in
+the C-language types
+.BR float,
+.BR double ,
+and
+.BR "long double" .
+These numbers can also be specified by an application as the characters
+.BR 'F' ,
+.BR 'D' ,
+and
+.BR 'L' ,
+respectively.
+.P
+The type specifier character
+.BR a
+specifies that bytes shall be interpreted as named characters from the
+International Reference Version (IRV) of the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard. Only the least
+significant seven bits of each byte shall be used for this type
+specification. Bytes with the values listed in the following table
+shall be written using the corresponding names for those characters.
+.br
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable: Named Characters in \fIod\fP\fR
+.TS
+center box tab(@);
+cB cB | cB cB | cB cB | cB cB
+l lb | l lb | l lb | l lb.
+Value@Name@Value@Name@Value@Name@Value@Name
+_
+\e000@nul@\e001@soh@\e002@stx@\e003@etx
+\e004@eot@\e005@enq@\e006@ack@\e007@bel
+\e010@bs@\e011@ht@\e012@lf \fRor\fP nl\u\s-3*\s+3\d@\e013@vt
+\e014@ff@\e015@cr@\e016@so@\e017@si
+\e020@dle@\e021@dc1@\e022@dc2@\e023@dc3
+\e024@dc4@\e025@nak@\e026@syn@\e027@etb
+\e030@can@\e031@em@\e032@sub@\e033@esc
+\e034@fs@\e035@gs@\e036@rs@\e037@us
+\e040@sp@\e177@del
+.TE
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+The
+.BR \(dq\e012\(dq 
+value may be written either as
+.BR lf
+or
+.BR nl .
+.P
+.P
+The type specifier character
+.BR c
+specifies that bytes shall be interpreted as characters specified by
+the current setting of the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+locale category. Characters listed in the table in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 5" ", " "File Format Notation"
+(\c
+.BR '\e\e' ,
+.BR '\ea' ,
+.BR '\eb' ,
+.BR '\ef' ,
+.BR '\en' ,
+.BR '\er' ,
+.BR '\et' ,
+.BR '\ev' )
+shall be written as the corresponding escape sequences, except that
+<backslash>
+shall be written as a single
+<backslash>
+and a NUL shall be written as
+.BR '\e0' .
+Other non-printable characters shall be written as one three-digit
+octal number for each byte in the character. Printable multi-byte
+characters shall be written in the area corresponding to the first byte
+of the character; the two-character sequence
+.BR \(dq**\(dq 
+shall be written in the area corresponding to each remaining byte in
+the character, as an indication that the character is continued. When
+either the
+.BR \(mij
+.IR skip
+or
+.BR \(miN
+.IR count
+option is specified along with the
+.BR c
+type specifier, and this results in an attempt to start or finish in
+the middle of a multi-byte character, the result is
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+The input data shall be manipulated in blocks, where a block is defined
+as a multiple of the least common multiple of the number of bytes
+transformed by the specified output types. If the least common
+multiple is greater than 16, the results are unspecified. Each input
+block shall be written as transformed by each output type, one per
+written line, in the order that the output types were specified. If
+the input block size is larger than the number of bytes transformed by
+the output type, the output type shall sequentially transform the parts
+of the input block, and the output from each of the transformations
+shall be separated by one or more
+<blank>
+characters.
+.P
+If, as a result of the specification of the
+.BR \(miN
+option or end-of-file being reached on the last input file, input data
+only partially satisfies an output type, the input shall be extended
+sufficiently with null bytes to write the last byte of the input.
+.P
+Unless
+.BR "\(miA\ n"
+is specified, the first output line produced for each input block shall
+be preceded by the input offset, cumulative across input files, of the
+next byte to be written. The format of the input offset is unspecified;
+however, it shall not contain any
+<blank>
+characters, shall start at the first character of the output line,
+and shall be followed by one or more
+<blank>
+characters. In addition, the offset of the byte following the last byte
+written shall be written after all the input data has been processed,
+but shall not be followed by any
+<blank>
+characters.
+.P
+If no
+.BR \(miA
+option is specified, the input offset base is unspecified.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+All input files were processed successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+XSI-conformant applications are warned not to use filenames starting
+with
+.BR '\(pl' 
+or a first operand starting with a numeric character so that the old
+functionality can be maintained by implementations, unless they specify
+one of the
+.BR \(miA ,
+.BR \(mij ,
+or
+.BR \(miN
+options. To guarantee that one of these filenames is always
+interpreted as a filename, an application could always specify the
+address base format with the
+.BR \(miA
+option.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+If a file containing 128 bytes with decimal values zero to 127, in
+increasing order, is supplied as standard input to the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+od \(miA d \(mit a
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+on an implementation using an input block size of 16 bytes, the
+standard output, independent of the current locale setting, would be
+similar to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+0000000 nul soh stx etx eot enq ack bel  bs  ht  nl  vt  ff  cr  so  si
+0000016 dle dc1 dc2 dc3 dc4 nak syn etb can  em sub esc  fs  gs  rs  us
+0000032  sp   !   "   #   $   %   &   '   (   )   *   +   ,   \(mi   .  /
+0000048   0   1   2   3   4   5   6   7   8   9   :   ;   <   =   >   ?
+0000064   @   A   B   C   D   E   F   G   H   I   J   K   L   M   N   O
+0000080   P   Q   R   S   T   U   V   W   X   Y   Z   [   \e   ]   ^   _
+0000096   `   a   b   c   d   e   f   g   h   i   j   k   l   m   n   o
+0000112   p   q   r   s   t   u   v   w   x   y   z   {   |   }   ~ del
+0000128
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Note that this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 allows
+.BR nl
+or
+.BR lf
+to be used as the name for the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard IRV character with decimal value
+10. The IRV names this character
+.BR lf
+(line feed), but traditional implementations have referred to this
+character as newline
+(\c
+.BR nl )
+and the POSIX locale character set symbolic name for the corresponding
+character is a
+<newline>.
+.P
+The command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+od \(miA o \(mit o2x2x \(miN 18
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+on a system with 32-bit words and an implementation using an input
+block size of 16 bytes could write 18 bytes in approximately the
+following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+0000000 032056 031440 041123 042040 052516 044530 020043 031464
+          342e   3320   4253   4420   554e   4958   2023   3334
+             342e3320      42534420      554e4958      20233334
+0000020 032472
+          353a
+             353a0000
+0000022
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+od \(miA d \(mit f \(mit o4 \(mit x4 \(miN 24 \(mij 0x15
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+on a system with 64-bit doubles (for example, IEEE\ Std\ 754\(hy1985 double
+precision floating-point format) would skip 21 bytes of input data and
+then write 24 bytes in approximately the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+0000000    1.00000000000000e+00    1.57350000000000e+01
+        07774000000 00000000000 10013674121 35341217270
+           3ff00000    00000000    402f3851    eb851eb8
+0000016    1.40668230000000e+02
+        10030312542 04370303230
+           40619562    23e18698
+0000024
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR od
+utility went through several names in early proposals, including
+.IR hd ,
+.IR xd ,
+and most recently
+.IR hexdump .
+There were several objections to all of these based on the following
+reasons:
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+.IR hd
+and
+.IR xd
+names conflicted with historical utilities that behaved differently.
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+.IR hexdump
+description was much more complex than needed for a simple dump
+utility.
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+.IR od
+utility has been available on all historical implementations and there
+was no need to create a new name for a utility so similar to the
+historical
+.IR od
+utility.
+.P
+The original reasons for not standardizing historical
+.IR od
+were also fairly widespread. Those reasons are given below along with
+rationale explaining why the standard developers believe that this
+version does not suffer from the indicated problem:
+.IP " *" 4
+The BSD and System V versions of
+.IR od
+have diverged, and the intersection of features provided by both does
+not meet the needs of the user community. In fact, the System V
+version only provides a mechanism for dumping octal bytes and
+.BR short s,
+signed and unsigned decimal
+.BR short s,
+hexadecimal
+.BR short s,
+and ASCII characters. BSD added the ability to dump
+.BR float s,
+.BR double s,
+named ASCII characters, and octal, signed decimal, unsigned decimal,
+and hexadecimal
+.BR long s.
+The version presented here provides more normalized forms for dumping
+bytes,
+.BR short s,
+.BR int s,
+and
+.BR long s
+in octal, signed decimal, unsigned decimal, and hexadecimal;
+.BR float ,
+.BR double ,
+and
+.BR "long double" ;
+and named ASCII as well as current locale characters.
+.IP " *" 4
+It would not be possible to come up with a compatible superset of the
+BSD and System V flags that met the requirements of the standard
+developers. The historical default
+.IR od
+output is the specified default output of this utility. None of the
+option letters chosen for this version of
+.IR od
+conflict with any of the options to historical versions of
+.IR od .
+.IP " *" 4
+On systems with different sizes for
+.BR short ,
+.BR int ,
+and
+.BR long ,
+there was no way to ask for dumps of
+.BR int s,
+even in the BSD version. Because of the way options are named, the
+name space could not be extended to solve these problems. This is why
+the
+.BR \(mit
+option was added (with type specifiers more closely matched to the
+\fIprintf\fR()
+formats used in the rest of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008) and the optional field sizes were
+added to the
+.BR d ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+and
+.BR x
+type specifiers. It is also one of the reasons why the historical
+practice was not mandated as a required obsolescent form of
+.IR od .
+(Although the old versions of
+.IR od
+are not listed as an obsolescent form, implementations are urged to
+continue to recognize the older forms for several more years.) The
+.BR a ,
+.BR c ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR o ,
+and
+.BR x
+types match the meaning of the corresponding format characters in the
+historical implementations of
+.IR od
+except for the default sizes of the fields converted. The
+.BR d
+format is signed in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 to match the
+\fIprintf\fR()
+notation. (Historical versions of
+.IR od
+used
+.BR d
+as a synonym for
+.BR u
+in this version. The System V implementation uses
+.BR s
+for signed decimal; BSD uses
+.BR i
+for signed decimal and
+.BR s
+for null-terminated strings.) Other than
+.BR d
+and
+.BR u ,
+all of the type specifiers match format characters in the historical
+BSD version of
+.BR od .
+.RS 4 
+.P
+The sizes of the C-language types
+.BR char ,
+.BR short ,
+.BR int ,
+.BR long ,
+.BR float ,
+.BR double ,
+and
+.BR "long double"
+are used even though it is recognized that there may be zero or more
+than one compiler for the C language on an implementation and that they
+may use different sizes for some of these types. (For example, one
+compiler might use 2 bytes
+.BR short s,
+2 bytes
+.BR int s,
+and 4 bytes
+.BR long s,
+while another compiler (or an option to the same compiler) uses 2 bytes
+.BR short s,
+4 bytes
+.BR int s,
+and 4 bytes
+.BR long s.)
+Nonetheless, there has to be a basic size known by the implementation
+for these types, corresponding to the values reported by invocations of
+the
+.IR getconf
+utility when called with
+.IR system_var
+operands
+{UCHAR_MAX},
+{USHORT_MAX},
+{UINT_MAX},
+and
+{ULONG_MAX}
+for the types
+.BR char ,
+.BR short ,
+.BR int ,
+and
+.BR long ,
+respectively. There are similar constants required by the ISO\ C standard, but
+not required by the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 or this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. They are
+{FLT_MANT_DIG},
+{DBL_MANT_DIG},
+and
+{LDBL_MANT_DIG}
+for the types
+.BR float ,
+.BR double ,
+and
+.BR "long double" ,
+respectively. If the optional
+.IR c99
+utility is provided by the implementation and used as specified by
+\&this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, these are the sizes that would be provided. If an option is used
+that specifies different sizes for these types, there is no guarantee
+that the
+.IR od
+utility is able to interpret binary data output by such a program
+correctly.
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that the numeric values of these lengths be recognized
+by the
+.IR od
+utility and that symbolic forms also be recognized. Thus, a conforming
+application can always look at an array of
+.BR "unsigned long"
+data elements using
+.IR od
+.BR \(mit
+.IR uL .
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+The method of specifying the format for the address field based on
+specifying a starting offset in a file unnecessarily tied the two
+together. The
+.BR \(miA
+option now specifies the address base and the
+.BR \(miS
+option specifies a starting offset.
+.IP " *" 4
+It would be difficult to break the dependence on US ASCII to achieve
+an internationalized utility. It does not seem to be any harder for
+.IR od
+to dump characters in the current locale than it is for the
+.IR ed
+or
+.IR sed
+.BR l
+commands. The
+.BR c
+type specifier does this without difficulty and is completely
+compatible with the historical implementations of the
+.BR c
+format character when the current locale uses a superset of the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard
+as a codeset. The
+.BR a
+type specifier (from the BSD
+.BR a
+format character) was left as a portable means to dump ASCII (or more
+correctly ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard (IRV)) so that headers produced by
+.IR pax
+could be deciphered even on systems that do not use the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard as a
+subset of their base codeset.
+.P
+The use of
+.BR \(dq**\(dq 
+as an indication of continuation of a multi-byte character in
+.BR c
+specifier output was chosen based on seeing an implementation that uses
+this method. The continuation bytes have to be marked in a way that is
+not ambiguous with another single-byte or multi-byte character.
+.P
+An early proposal used
+.BR \(miS
+and
+.BR \(min ,
+respectively, for the
+.BR \(mij
+and
+.BR \(miN
+options eventually selected. These were changed to avoid conflicts with
+historical implementations.
+.P
+The original standard specified
+.BR "\(mit o2"
+as the default when no output type was given. This was changed to
+.BR "\(mit oS"
+(the length of a
+.BR short )
+to accommodate a supercomputer implementation that historically used 64
+bits as its default (and that defined shorts as 64 bits). This change
+should not affect conforming applications. The requirement to support
+lengths of 1, 2, and 4 was added at the same time to address an
+historical implementation that had no two-byte data types in its C
+compiler.
+.P
+The use of a basic integer data type is intended to allow the
+implementation to choose a word size commonly used by applications
+on that architecture.
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard allowed for implementations with
+bytes other than eight bits, but this has been modified in this
+version.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+All option and operand interfaces marked XSI may be removed
+in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIc99\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsed\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 5" ", " "File Format Notation",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/paste.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/paste.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..10e9e64
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/paste.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,365 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PASTE "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+paste
+\(em merge corresponding or subsequent lines of files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+paste \fB[\fR\(mis\fB] [\fR\(mid \fIlist\fB] \fIfile\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR paste
+utility shall concatenate the corresponding lines of the given input
+files, and write the resulting lines to standard output.
+.P
+The default operation of
+.IR paste
+shall concatenate the corresponding lines of the input files. The
+<newline>
+of every line except the line from the last input file shall be
+replaced with a
+<tab>.
+.P
+If an end-of-file condition is detected on one or more input files, but
+not all input files,
+.IR paste
+shall behave as though empty lines were read from the files on which
+end-of-file was detected, unless the
+.BR \(mis
+option is specified.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR paste
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mid\ \fIlist\fR" 10
+Unless a
+<backslash>
+character appears in
+.IR list ,
+each character in
+.IR list
+is an element specifying a delimiter character. If a
+<backslash>
+character appears in
+.IR list ,
+the
+<backslash>
+character and one or more characters following it are an element
+specifying a delimiter character as described below. These elements
+specify one or more delimiters to use, instead of the default
+<tab>,
+to replace the
+<newline>
+of the input lines. The elements in
+.IR list
+shall be used circularly; that is, when the list is exhausted the first
+element from the list is reused. When the
+.BR \(mis
+option is specified:
+.RS 10 
+.IP " *" 4
+The last
+<newline>
+in a file shall not be modified.
+.IP " *" 4
+The delimiter shall be reset to the first element of
+.IR list
+after each
+.IR file
+operand is processed.
+.P
+When the
+.BR \(mis
+option is not specified:
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+<newline>
+characters in the file specified by the last
+.IR file
+operand shall not be modified.
+.IP " *" 4
+The delimiter shall be reset to the first element of list each time a
+line is processed from each file.
+.P
+If a
+<backslash>
+character appears in
+.IR list ,
+it and the character following it shall be used to represent the
+following delimiter characters:
+.IP "\fR\en\fR" 6
+<newline>.
+.IP "\fR\et\fR" 6
+<tab>.
+.IP "\fR\e\e\fR" 6
+<backslash>
+character.
+.IP "\fR\e0\fR" 6
+Empty string (not a null character). If
+.BR '\e0' 
+is immediately followed by the character
+.BR 'x' ,
+the character
+.BR 'X' ,
+or any character defined by the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+.BR digit
+keyword (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale"),
+the results are unspecified.
+.P
+If any other characters follow the
+<backslash>,
+the results are unspecified.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Concatenate all of the lines of each separate input file in command
+line order. The
+<newline>
+of every line except the last line in each input file shall be replaced
+with the
+<tab>,
+unless otherwise specified by the
+.BR \(mid
+option.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of an input file. If
+.BR '\(mi' 
+is specified for one or more of the
+.IR file s,
+the standard input shall be used; the standard input shall be read one
+line at a time, circularly, for each instance of
+.BR '\(mi' .
+Implementations shall support pasting of at least 12
+.IR file
+operands.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used only if one or more
+.IR file
+operands is
+.BR '\(mi' .
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files shall be text files, except that line lengths shall be
+unlimited.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR paste :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine the
+values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Concatenated lines of input files shall be separated by the
+<tab>
+(or other characters under the control of the
+.BR \(mid
+option) and terminated by a
+<newline>.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+If one or more input files cannot be opened when the
+.BR \(mis
+option is not specified, a diagnostic message shall be written to
+standard error, but no output is written to standard output. If the
+.BR \(mis
+option is specified, the
+.IR paste
+utility shall provide the default behavior described in
+.IR "Section 1.4" ", " "Utility Description Defaults".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+When the escape sequences of the
+.IR list
+option-argument are used in a shell script, they must be quoted;
+otherwise, the shell treats the
+<backslash>
+as a special character.
+.P
+Conforming applications should only use the specific
+<backslash>-escaped
+delimiters presented in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. Historical implementations treat
+.BR '\ex' ,
+where
+.BR 'x' 
+is not in this list, as
+.BR 'x' ,
+but future implementations are free to expand this list to recognize
+other common escapes similar to those accepted by
+.IR printf
+and other standard utilities.
+.P
+Most of the standard utilities work on text files. The
+.IR cut
+utility can be used to turn files with arbitrary line lengths into a
+set of text files containing the same data. The
+.IR paste
+utility can be used to create (or recreate) files with arbitrary line
+lengths. For example, if
+.IR file
+contains long lines:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cut \(mib 1\(mi500 \(min file > file1
+cut \(mib 501\(mi \(min file > file2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+creates
+.BR file1
+(a text file) with lines no longer than 500 bytes (plus the
+<newline>)
+and
+.BR file2
+that contains the remainder of the data from
+.IR file .
+Note that
+.BR file2
+is not a text file if there are lines in
+.IR file
+that are longer than 500 +
+{LINE_MAX}
+bytes. The original file can be recreated from
+.BR file1
+and
+.BR file2
+using the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+paste \(mid "\e0" file1 file2 > file
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The commands:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+paste \(mid "\e0" ...
+paste \(mid "" ...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+are not necessarily equivalent; the latter is not specified by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+and may result in an error. The construct
+.BR '\e0' 
+is used to mean ``no separator'' because historical versions of
+.IR paste
+did not follow the syntax guidelines, and the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+paste \(mid"" ...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+could not be handled properly by
+\fIgetopt\fR().
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+Write out a directory in four columns:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ls | paste \(mi \(mi \(mi \(mi
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+Combine pairs of lines from a file into single lines:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+paste \(mis \(mid "\et\en" file
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 1.4" ", " "Utility Description Defaults",
+.IR "\fIcut\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIgrep\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIpr\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/patch.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/patch.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..67243ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/patch.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,713 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PATCH "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+patch
+\(em apply changes to files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+patch \fB[\fR\(miblNR\fB] [\fR\(mic|\(mie|\(min|\(miu\fB] [\fR\(mid \fIdir\fB] [\fR\(miD \fIdefine\fB] [\fR\(mii \fIpatchfile\fB]
+    [\fR\(mio \fIoutfile\fB] [\fR\(mip \fInum\fB] [\fR\(mir \fIrejectfile\fB] [\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR patch
+utility shall read a source (patch) file containing any of four
+forms of difference (diff) listings produced by the
+.IR diff
+utility (normal, copied context, unified context, or in the style of
+.IR ed )
+and apply those differences to a file. By default,
+.IR patch
+shall read from the standard input.
+.P
+The
+.IR patch
+utility shall attempt to determine the type of the
+.IR diff
+listing, unless overruled by a
+.BR \(mic ,
+.BR \(mie ,
+.BR \(min ,
+or
+.BR \(miu
+option.
+.P
+If the patch file contains more than one patch,
+.IR patch
+shall attempt to apply each of them as if they came from separate patch
+files. (In this case, the application shall ensure that the name of the
+patch file is determinable for each
+.IR diff
+listing.)
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR patch
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mib\fP" 10
+Save a copy of the original contents of each modified file, before the
+differences are applied, in a file of the same name with the suffix
+.BR .orig
+appended to it. If the file already exists, it shall be overwritten;
+if multiple patches are applied to the same file, the
+.BR .orig
+file shall be written only for the first patch. When the
+.BR \(mio
+.IR outfile
+option is also specified,
+.IR file \c
+.BR .orig
+shall not be created but, if
+.IR outfile
+already exists,
+.IR outfile \c
+.BR .orig
+shall be created.
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Interpret the patch file as a copied context difference (the output
+of the utility
+.IR diff
+when the
+.BR \(mic
+or
+.BR \(miC
+options are specified).
+.IP "\fB\(mid\ \fIdir\fR" 10
+Change the current directory to
+.IR dir
+before processing as described in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.IP "\fB\(miD\ \fIdefine\fR" 10
+Mark changes with one of the following C preprocessor constructs:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#ifdef define
+\&...
+#endif
+.P
+#ifndef define
+\&...
+#endif
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+optionally combined with the C preprocessor construct
+.BR #else .
+If the patched file is processed with the C preprocessor, where the
+macro
+.IR define
+is defined, the output shall contain the changes from the patch file;
+otherwise, the output shall not contain the patches specified in the
+patch file.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mie\fP" 10
+Interpret the patch file as an
+.IR ed
+script, rather than a
+.IR diff
+script.
+.IP "\fB\(mii\ \fIpatchfile\fR" 10
+Read the patch information from the file named by the pathname
+.IR patchfile ,
+rather than the standard input.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\fP" 10
+(The letter ell.) Cause any sequence of
+<blank>
+characters in the difference script to match any sequence of
+<blank>
+characters in the input file. Other characters shall be matched exactly.
+.IP "\fB\(min\fP" 10
+Interpret the script as a normal difference.
+.IP "\fB\(miN\fP" 10
+Ignore patches where the differences have already been applied to the
+file; by default, already-applied patches shall be rejected.
+.IP "\fB\(mio\ \fIoutfile\fR" 10
+Instead of modifying the files (specified by the
+.IR file
+operand or the difference listings) directly, write a copy of the file
+referenced by each patch, with the appropriate differences applied, to
+.IR outfile .
+Multiple patches for a single file shall be applied to the intermediate
+versions of the file created by any previous patches, and shall result
+in multiple, concatenated versions of the file being written to
+.IR outfile .
+.IP "\fB\(mip\ \fInum\fR" 10
+For all pathnames in the patch file that indicate the names of files to
+be patched, delete
+.IR num
+pathname components from the beginning of each pathname. If the
+pathname in the patch file is absolute, any leading
+<slash>
+characters shall be considered the first component (that is,
+.BR "\(mip\ 1"
+shall remove the leading
+<slash>
+characters). Specifying
+.BR "\(mip\ 0"
+shall cause the full pathname to be used. If
+.BR \(mip
+is not specified, only the basename (the final pathname component)
+shall be used.
+.IP "\fB\(miR\fP" 10
+Reverse the sense of the patch script; that is, assume that the
+difference script was created from the new version to the old version.
+The
+.BR \(miR
+option cannot be used with
+.IR ed
+scripts. The
+.IR patch
+utility shall attempt to reverse each portion of the script before
+applying it. Rejected differences shall be saved in swapped format. If
+this option is not specified, and until a portion of the patch file is
+successfully applied,
+.IR patch
+attempts to apply each portion in its reversed sense as well as in its
+normal sense. If the attempt is successful, the user shall be prompted
+to determine whether the
+.BR \(miR
+option should be set.
+.IP "\fB\(mir\ \fIrejectfile\fR" 10
+Override the default reject filename. In the default case, the reject
+file shall have the same name as the output file, with the suffix
+.BR .rej
+appended to it; see
+.IR "Patch Application".
+.IP "\fB\(miu\fR" 10
+Interpret the patch file as a unified context difference (the output
+of the
+.IR diff
+utility when the
+.BR \(miu
+or
+.BR \(miU
+options are specified).
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file to patch.
+.SH STDIN
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+Input files shall be text files.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR patch :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine the
+values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, equivalence classes,
+and multi-character collating elements used in the extended regular
+expression defined for the
+.BR yesexpr
+locale keyword in the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+category.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of text
+data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to multi-byte
+characters in arguments and input files), and the behavior of character
+classes used in the extended regular expression defined for the
+.BR yesexpr
+locale keyword in the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+category.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale used to process affirmative responses, and the
+locale used to affect the format and contents of diagnostic messages
+and prompts written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fILC_TIME\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for recognizing the format of file timestamps
+written by the
+.IR diff
+utility in a context-difference input file.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used for diagnostic and informational
+messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+The output of the
+.IR patch
+utility, the save files (\c
+.BR .orig
+suffixes), and the reject files (\c
+.BR .rej
+suffixes) shall be text files.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+A patch file may contain patching instructions for more than one file;
+filenames shall be determined as specified in
+.IR "Filename Determination".
+When the
+.BR \(mib
+option is specified, for each patched file, the original shall be saved
+in a file of the same name with the suffix
+.BR .orig
+appended to it.
+.P
+For each patched file, a reject file may also be created as noted in
+.IR "Patch Application".
+In the absence of a
+.BR \(mir
+option, the name of this file shall be formed by appending the suffix
+.BR .rej
+to the original filename.
+.SS "Patch File Format"
+.P
+The patch file shall contain zero or more lines of header information
+followed by one or more patches. Each patch shall contain zero or more
+lines of filename identification in the format produced by the
+.BR \(mic ,
+.BR \(miC ,
+.BR \(miu ,
+or
+.BR \(miU
+options of the
+.IR diff
+utility, and one or more sets of
+.IR diff
+output, which are customarily called \fIhunks\fP.
+.P
+The
+.IR patch
+utility shall recognize the following expression in the header
+information:
+.IP "\fBIndex:\ \fIpathname\fR" 6
+.br
+The file to be patched is named
+.IR pathname .
+.P
+If all lines (including headers) within a patch begin with the same
+leading sequence of
+<blank>
+characters, the
+.IR patch
+utility shall remove this sequence before proceeding. Within each
+patch, if the type of difference is common context, the
+.IR patch
+utility shall recognize the following expressions:
+.IP "***\ \fIfilename\ timestamp\fR" 6
+.br
+The patches arose from
+.IR filename .
+.IP "\(mi\|\(mi\|\(mi\ \fIfilename\ timestamp\fR" 6
+.br
+The patches should be applied to
+.IR filename .
+.P
+If the type of difference is unified context, the
+.IR patch
+utility shall recognize the following expressions:
+.IP "\(mi\|\(mi\|\(mi\ \fIfilename\ timestamp\fR" 6
+.br
+The patches arose from
+.IR filename .
+.IP "+\|+\|+\ \fIfilename\ timestamp\fR" 6
+.br
+The patches should be applied to
+.IR filename .
+.P
+Each hunk within a patch shall be the
+.IR diff
+output to change a line range within the original file. The line
+numbers for successive hunks within a patch shall occur in ascending
+order.
+.SS "Filename Determination"
+.P
+If no
+.IR file
+operand is specified,
+.IR patch
+shall perform the following steps to determine the filename to use:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the type of
+.IR diff
+is context, the
+.IR patch
+utility shall delete pathname components (as specified by the
+.BR \(mip
+option) from the filename on the line beginning with
+.BR \(dq***\(dq 
+(if copied context) or
+.BR \(dq\(mi\|\(mi\|\(mi\(dq 
+(if unified context), then test for the existence of this file relative
+to the current directory (or the directory specified with the
+.BR \(mid
+option). If the file exists, the
+.IR patch
+utility shall use this filename.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the type of
+.IR diff
+is context, the
+.IR patch
+utility shall delete the pathname components (as specified by the
+.BR \(mip
+option) from the filename on the line beginning with
+.BR \(dq\(mi\|\(mi\|\(mi\(dq 
+(if copied context) or
+.BR \(dq+\|+\|+\(dq 
+(if unified context), then test for the existence of this file relative
+to the current directory (or the directory specified with the
+.BR \(mid
+option). If the file exists, the
+.IR patch
+utility shall use this filename.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If the header information contains a line beginning with the string
+.BR Index: ,
+the
+.IR patch
+utility shall delete pathname components (as specified by the
+.BR \(mip
+option) from this line, then test for the existence of this file
+relative to the current directory (or the directory specified with the
+.BR \(mid
+option). If the file exists, the
+.IR patch
+utility shall use this filename.
+.IP " 4." 4
+If an
+.BR SCCS
+directory exists in the current directory,
+.IR patch
+shall attempt to perform a
+.IR get
+.BR \(mie
+.BR SCCS/s. \c
+.IR filename
+command to retrieve an editable version of the file. If the file
+exists, the
+.IR patch
+utility shall use this filename.
+.IP " 5." 4
+The
+.IR patch
+utility shall write a prompt to standard output and request a filename
+interactively from the controlling terminal (for example,
+.BR /dev/tty ).
+.SS "Patch Application"
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mic ,
+.BR \(mie ,
+.BR \(min ,
+or
+.BR \(miu
+option is present, the
+.IR patch
+utility shall interpret information within each hunk as a copied context
+difference, an
+.IR ed
+difference, a normal difference, or a unified context difference,
+respectively. In the absence of any of these options, the
+.IR patch
+utility shall determine the type of difference based on the format of
+information within the hunk.
+.P
+For each hunk, the
+.IR patch
+utility shall begin to search for the place to apply the patch at the
+line number at the beginning of the hunk, plus or minus any offset used
+in applying the previous hunk. If lines matching the hunk context are
+not found,
+.IR patch
+shall scan both forwards and backwards at least 1\|000 bytes for a set
+of lines that match the hunk context.
+.P
+If no such place is found and it is a context difference, then another
+scan shall take place, ignoring the first and last line of context. If
+that fails, the first two and last two lines of context shall be
+ignored and another scan shall be made. Implementations may search
+more extensively for installation locations.
+.P
+If no location can be found, the
+.IR patch
+utility shall append the hunk to the reject file. A rejected hunk that
+is a copied context difference, an
+.IR ed
+difference, or a normal difference shall be written in
+copied-context-difference format regardless of the format of the patch
+file. It is implementation-defined whether a rejected hunk that is
+a unified context difference is written in copied-context-difference
+format or in unified-context-difference format.
+If the input was a normal or
+.IR ed -style
+difference, the reject file may contain differences with zero lines of
+context. The line numbers on the hunks in the reject file may be
+different from the line numbers in the patch file since they shall
+reflect the approximate locations for the failed hunks in the new file
+rather than the old one.
+.P
+If the type of patch is an
+.IR ed
+diff, the implementation may accomplish the patching by invoking the
+.IR ed
+utility.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP "\01" 6
+One or more lines were written to a reject file.
+.IP >1 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Patches that cannot be correctly placed in the file shall be written to
+a reject file.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.BR \(miR
+option does not work with
+.IR ed
+scripts because there is too little information to reconstruct the
+reverse operation.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mip
+option makes it possible to customize a patch file to local user
+directory structures without manually editing the patch file. For
+example, if the filename in the patch file was:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+/curds/whey/src/blurfl/blurfl.c
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Setting
+.BR "\(mip\ 0"
+gives the entire pathname unmodified;
+.BR "\(mip\ 1"
+gives:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+curds/whey/src/blurfl/blurfl.c
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+without the leading
+<slash>,
+.BR "\(mip\ 4"
+gives:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+blurfl/blurfl.c
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and not specifying
+.BR \(mip
+at all gives:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+blurfl.c .
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Some of the functionality in historical
+.IR patch
+implementations was not specified. The following documents those
+features present in historical implementations that have not been
+specified.
+.P
+A deleted piece of functionality was the
+.BR '\(pl' 
+pseudo-option allowing an additional set of options and a patch file
+operand to be given. This was seen as being insufficiently useful to
+standardize.
+.P
+In historical implementations, if the string
+.BR \(dqPrereq:\(dq 
+appeared in the header, the
+.IR patch
+utility would search for the corresponding version information (the
+string specified in the header, delimited by
+<blank>
+characters or the beginning or end of a line or the file) anywhere in
+the original file. This was deleted as too simplistic and insufficiently
+trustworthy a mechanism to standardize. For example, if:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+Prereq: 1.2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+were in the header, the presence of a delimited 1.2 anywhere in the
+file would satisfy the prerequisite.
+.P
+The following options were dropped from historical implementations of
+.IR patch
+as insufficiently useful to standardize:
+.IP "\fB\(mib\fP" 10
+The
+.BR \(mib
+option historically provided a method for changing the name extension
+of the backup file from the default
+.BR .orig .
+This option has been modified and retained in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.IP "\fB\(miF\fP" 10
+The
+.BR \(miF
+option specified the number of lines of a context diff to ignore when
+searching for a place to install a patch.
+.IP "\fB\(mif\fP" 10
+The
+.BR \(mif
+option historically caused
+.IR patch
+not to request additional information from the user.
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+The
+.BR \(mir
+option historically provided a method of overriding the extension of
+the reject file from the default
+.BR .rej .
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+The
+.BR \(mis
+option historically caused
+.IR patch
+to work silently unless an error occurred.
+.IP "\fB\(mix\fP" 10
+The
+.BR \(mix
+option historically set internal debugging flags.
+.P
+In some file system implementations, the saving of a
+.BR .orig
+file may produce unwanted results. In the case of 12, 13, or
+14-character filenames (on file systems supporting 14-character
+maximum filenames), the
+.BR .orig
+file overwrites the new file. The reject file may also exceed this
+filename limit. It was suggested, due to some historical practice,
+that a
+<tilde>
+(\c
+.BR '~' )
+suffix be used instead of
+.BR .orig
+and some other character instead of the
+.BR .rej
+suffix. This was rejected because it is not obvious to the user which
+file is which. The suffixes
+.BR .orig
+and
+.BR .rej
+are clearer and more understandable.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mib
+option has the opposite sense in some historical implementations\(emdo
+not save the
+.BR .orig
+file. The default case here is not to save the files, making
+.IR patch
+behave more consistently with the other standard utilities.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miw
+option in early proposals was changed to
+.BR \(mil
+to match historical practice.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miN
+option was included because without it, a non-interactive application
+cannot reject previously applied patches. For example, if a user is
+piping the output of
+.IR diff
+into the
+.IR patch
+utility, and the user only wants to patch a file to a newer version
+non-interactively, the
+.BR \(miN
+option is required.
+.P
+Changes to the
+.BR \(mil
+option description were proposed to allow matching across
+<newline>
+characters in addition to just
+<blank>
+characters. Since this is not historical practice, and since some
+ambiguities could result, it is suggested that future developments in
+this area utilize another option letter, such as
+.BR \(miL .
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miu
+option of GNU
+.IR patch
+has been added, along with support for unified context formats.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIdiff\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIed\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/pathchk.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/pathchk.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ce6862b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/pathchk.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,426 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PATHCHK "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pathchk
+\(em check pathnames
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+pathchk \fB[\fR\(mip\fB] [\fR\(miP\fB] \fIpathname\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR pathchk
+utility shall check that one or more pathnames are valid (that is, they
+could be used to access or create a file without causing syntax errors)
+and portable (that is, no filename truncation results). More
+extensive portability checks are provided by the
+.BR \(mip
+and
+.BR \(miP
+options.
+.P
+By default, the
+.IR pathchk
+utility shall check each component of each
+.IR pathname
+operand based on the underlying file system. A diagnostic shall be
+written for each
+.IR pathname
+operand that:
+.IP " *" 4
+Is longer than
+{PATH_MAX}
+bytes (see
+.BR "Pathname Variable Values"
+in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<limits.h>\fP")
+.IP " *" 4
+Contains any component longer than
+{NAME_MAX}
+bytes in its containing directory
+.IP " *" 4
+Contains any component in a directory that is not searchable
+.IP " *" 4
+Contains any byte sequence that is not valid in its
+containing directory
+.P
+The format of the diagnostic message is not specified, but shall
+indicate the error detected and the corresponding
+.IR pathname
+operand.
+.P
+It shall not be considered an error if one or more components of a
+.IR pathname
+operand do not exist as long as a file matching the pathname specified
+by the missing components could be created that does not violate any of
+the checks specified above.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR pathchk
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mip\fP" 10
+Instead of performing checks based on the underlying file system, write
+a diagnostic for each
+.IR pathname
+operand that:
+.RS 10 
+.IP " *" 4
+Is longer than
+{_POSIX_PATH_MAX}
+bytes (see
+.BR "Minimum Values"
+in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<limits.h>\fP")
+.IP " *" 4
+Contains any component longer than
+{_POSIX_NAME_MAX}
+bytes
+.IP " *" 4
+Contains any character in any component that is not in the portable
+filename character set
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miP\fP" 10
+Write a diagnostic for each
+.IR pathname
+operand that:
+.RS 10 
+.IP " *" 4
+Contains a component whose first character is the
+<hyphen>
+character
+.IP " *" 4
+Is empty
+.RE
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIpathname\fR" 10
+A pathname to be checked.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR pathchk :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine the
+values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+All
+.IR pathname
+operands passed all of the checks.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR test
+utility can be used to determine whether a given pathname names an
+existing file; it does not, however, give any indication of whether or
+not any component of the pathname was truncated in a directory where
+the _POSIX_NO_TRUNC feature is not in effect. The
+.IR pathchk
+utility does not check for file existence; it performs checks to
+determine whether a pathname does exist or could be created with no
+pathname component truncation.
+.P
+The
+.IR noclobber
+option in the shell (see the
+.IR "\fIset\fR\^"
+special built-in) can be used to atomically create a file. As with all
+file creation semantics in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, it guarantees atomic creation,
+but still depends on applications to agree on conventions and cooperate
+on the use of files after they have been created.
+.P
+To verify that a pathname meets the requirements of filename
+portability, applications should use both the
+.BR \(mip
+and
+.BR \(miP
+options together.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+To verify that all pathnames in an imported data interchange archive
+are legitimate and unambiguous on the current system:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+# This example assumes that no pathnames in the archive
+# contain <newline> characters.
+pax \(mif archive | sed \(mie 's/[^[:alnum:]]/\e\e&/g' | xargs pathchk \(mi\|\(mi
+if [ $? \(mieq 0 ]
+then
+    pax \(mir \(mif archive
+else
+    echo Investigate problems before importing files.
+    exit 1
+fi
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+To verify that all files in the current directory hierarchy could be
+moved to any system conforming to the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 that also supports the
+.IR pax
+utility:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+find . \(miexec pathchk \(mip \(miP {} +
+if [ $? \(mieq 0 ]
+then
+    pax \(miw \(mif ../archive .
+else
+    echo Portable archive cannot be created.
+    exit 1
+fi
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+To verify that a user-supplied pathname names a readable file and that
+the application can create a file extending the given path without
+truncation and without overwriting any existing file:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+case $\(mi in
+    *C*)    reset="";;
+    *)      reset="set +C"
+            set \(miC;;
+esac
+test \(mir "$path" && pathchk "$path.out" &&
+    rm "$path.out" > "$path.out"
+if [ $? \(mine 0 ]; then
+    printf "%s: %s not found or %s.out fails \e
+creation checks.\en" $0 "$path$path"
+    $reset    # Reset the noclobber option in case a trap
+              # on EXIT depends on it.
+    exit 1
+fi
+$reset
+PROCESSING < "$path" > "$path.out"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following assumptions are made in this example:
+.IP " 1." 4
+.BR PROCESSING
+represents the code that is used by the application to use
+.BR $path
+once it is verified that
+.BR $path.out
+works as intended.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The state of the
+.IR noclobber
+option is unknown when this code is invoked and should be set on exit
+to the state it was in when this code was invoked. (The
+.BR reset
+variable is used in this example to restore the initial state.)
+.IP " 3." 4
+Note the usage of:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+rm "$path.out" > "$path.out"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.IP " a." 4
+The
+.IR pathchk
+command has already verified, at this point, that
+.BR $path.out
+is not truncated.
+.IP " b." 4
+With the
+.IR noclobber
+option set, the shell verifies that
+.BR $path.out
+does not already exist before invoking
+.IR rm .
+.IP " c." 4
+If the shell succeeded in creating
+.BR $path.out ,
+.IR rm
+removes it so that the application can create the file again in the
+.BR PROCESSING
+step.
+.IP " d." 4
+If the
+.BR PROCESSING
+step wants the file to exist already when it is invoked, the:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+rm "$path.out" > "$path.out"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+should be replaced with:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+> "$path.out"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+which verifies that the file did not already exist, but leaves
+.BR $path.out
+in place for use by
+.BR PROCESSING .
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR pathchk
+utility was new for the ISO\ POSIX\(hy2:\|1993 standard. It, along with the
+.IR set
+.BR \(miC (\c
+.IR noclobber )
+option added to the shell, replaces the
+.IR mktemp ,
+.IR validfnam ,
+and
+.IR create
+utilities that appeared in early proposals. All of these utilities were
+attempts to solve several common problems:
+.IP " *" 4
+Verify the validity (for several different definitions of ``valid'') of
+a pathname supplied by a user, generated by an application, or imported
+from an external source.
+.IP " *" 4
+Atomically create a file.
+.IP " *" 4
+Perform various string handling functions to generate a temporary
+filename.
+.P
+The
+.IR create
+utility, included in an early proposal, provided checking and atomic
+creation in a single invocation of the utility; these are orthogonal
+issues and need not be grouped into a single utility. Note that the
+.IR noclobber
+option also provides a way of creating a lock for process
+synchronization; since it provides an atomic
+.IR create ,
+there is no race between a test for existence and the following
+creation if it did not exist.
+.P
+Having a function like
+\fItmpnam\fR()
+in the ISO\ C standard is important in many high-level languages. The shell
+programming language, however, has built-in string manipulation
+facilities, making it very easy to construct temporary filenames. The
+names needed obviously depend on the application, but are frequently of
+a form similar to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB$TMPDIR/\fIapplication_abbreviation\fB$$.\fIsuffix\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In cases where there is likely to be contention for a given suffix, a
+simple shell
+.BR for
+or
+.BR while
+loop can be used with the shell
+.IR noclobber
+option to create a file without risk of collisions, as long as
+applications trying to use the same filename name space are cooperating
+on the use of files after they have been created.
+.P
+For historical purposes,
+.BR \(mip
+does not check for the use of the
+<hyphen>
+character as the first character in a component of the pathname, or for
+an empty
+.IR pathname
+operand.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "Redirection",
+.IR "\fIset\fR\^",
+.IR "\fItest\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+.IR "\fB<limits.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/pax.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/pax.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..788756b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/pax.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,4153 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PAX "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pax
+\(em portable archive interchange
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+pax \fB[\fR\(midv\fB] [\fR\(mic|\(min\fB] [\fR\(miH|\(miL\fB] [\fR\(mio \fIoptions\fB] [\fR\(mif \fIarchive\fB] [\fR\(mis \fIreplstr\fB]\fR...
+    \fB[\fIpattern\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+pax \(mir\fB[\fR\(mic|\(min\fB] [\fR\(midikuv\fB] [\fR\(miH|\(miL\fB] [\fR\(mif \fIarchive\fB] [\fR\(mio \fIoptions\fB]\fR... \fB[\fR\(mip \fIstring\fB]\fR...
+    \fB[\fR\(mis \fIreplstr\fB]\fR... \fB[\fIpattern\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+pax \(miw \fB[\fR\(midituvX\fB] [\fR\(miH|\(miL\fB] [\fR\(mib \fIblocksize\fB] [[\fR\(mia\fB] [\fR\(mif \fIarchive\fB]] [\fR\(mio \fIoptions\fB]\fR...
+    \fB[\fR\(mis \fIreplstr\fB]\fR... \fB[\fR\(mix \fIformat\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+pax \(mir \(miw \fB[\fR\(midiklntuvX\fB] [\fR\(miH|\(miL\fB] [\fR\(mio \fIoptions\fB]\fR... \fB[\fR\(mip \fIstring\fB]\fR...
+    \fB[\fR\(mis \fIreplstr\fB]\fR... \fB[\fIfile\fR...\fB] \fIdirectory\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR pax
+utility shall read, write, and write lists of the members of archive
+files and copy directory hierarchies. A variety of archive formats
+shall be supported; see the
+.BR \(mix
+.IR format
+option.
+.P
+The action to be taken depends on the presence of the
+.BR \(mir
+and
+.BR \(miw
+options. The four combinations of
+.BR \(mir
+and
+.BR \(miw
+are referred to as the four modes of operation:
+.BR list ,
+.BR read ,
+.BR write ,
+and
+.BR copy
+modes, corresponding respectively to the four forms shown in the
+SYNOPSIS section.
+.IP "\fBlist\fP" 10
+In
+.BR list
+mode (when neither
+.BR \(mir
+nor
+.BR \(miw
+are specified),
+.IR pax
+shall write the names of the members of the archive file read from the
+standard input, with pathnames matching the specified patterns, to
+standard output. If a named file is of type directory, the file
+hierarchy rooted at that file shall be listed as well.
+.IP "\fBread\fP" 10
+In
+.BR read
+mode (when
+.BR \(mir
+is specified, but
+.BR \(miw
+is not),
+.IR pax
+shall extract the members of the archive file read from the standard
+input, with pathnames matching the specified patterns. If an extracted
+file is of type directory, the file hierarchy rooted at that file shall
+be extracted as well. The extracted files shall be created performing
+pathname resolution with the directory in which
+.IR pax
+was invoked as the current working directory.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If an attempt is made to extract a directory when the directory
+already exists, this shall not be considered an error. If
+an attempt is made to extract a FIFO when the FIFO already exists,
+this shall not be considered an error.
+.P
+The ownership, access, and modification times, and file mode of the
+restored files are discussed under the
+.BR \(mip
+option.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBwrite\fP" 10
+In
+.BR write
+mode (when
+.BR \(miw
+is specified, but
+.BR \(mir
+is not),
+.IR pax
+shall write the contents of the
+.IR file
+operands to the standard output in an archive format. If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, a list of files to copy, one per line, shall be
+read from the standard input and each entry in this list shall be
+processed as if it had been a
+.IR file
+operand on the command line. A file of type directory shall include
+all of the files in the file hierarchy rooted at the file.
+.IP "\fBcopy\fP" 10
+In
+.BR copy
+mode (when both
+.BR \(mir
+and
+.BR \(miw
+are specified),
+.IR pax
+shall copy the
+.IR file
+operands to the destination directory.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, a list of files to copy, one per line, shall be
+read from the standard input. A file of type directory shall include
+all of the files in the file hierarchy rooted at the file.
+.P
+The effect of the
+.BR copy
+shall be as if the copied files were written to a
+.IR pax
+format archive file and then subsequently extracted, except that there
+may be hard links between the original and the copied files. If the
+destination directory is a subdirectory of one of the files to be
+copied, the results are unspecified. If the destination directory is a
+file of a type not defined by the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, the results are
+implementation-defined; otherwise, it shall be an error for the file
+named by the
+.IR directory
+operand not to exist, not be writable by the user, or not be a file of
+type directory.
+.RE
+.P
+In
+.BR read
+or
+.BR copy
+modes, if intermediate directories are necessary to extract an archive
+member,
+.IR pax
+shall perform actions equivalent to the
+\fImkdir\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, called with the following arguments:
+.IP " *" 4
+The intermediate directory used as the
+.IR path
+argument
+.IP " *" 4
+The value of the bitwise-inclusive OR of S_IRWXU, S_IRWXG, and S_IRWXO
+as the
+.IR mode
+argument
+.P
+If any specified
+.IR pattern
+or
+.IR file
+operands are not matched by at least one file or archive member,
+.IR pax
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error for each one that
+did not match and exit with a non-zero exit status.
+.P
+The archive formats described in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section shall
+be automatically detected on input. The default output archive format
+shall be implementation-defined.
+.P
+A single archive can span multiple files. The
+.IR pax
+utility shall determine, in an implementation-defined manner, what
+file to read or write as the next file.
+.P
+If the selected archive format supports the specification of linked files,
+it shall be an error if these files cannot be linked when the archive
+is extracted. For archive formats that do not store file contents with
+each name that causes a hard link, if the file that contains the data
+is not extracted during this
+.IR pax
+session, either the data shall be restored from the original file, or a
+diagnostic message shall be displayed with the name of a file that can
+be used to extract the data. In traversing directories,
+.IR pax
+shall detect infinite loops; that is, entering a previously visited
+directory that is an ancestor of the last file visited. When it detects
+an infinite loop,
+.IR pax
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error and shall
+terminate.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR pax
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except that the order of presentation of the
+.BR \(mio ,
+.BR \(mip ,
+and
+.BR \(mis
+options is significant.
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+Read an archive file from standard input.
+.IP "\fB\(miw\fP" 10
+Write files to the standard output in the specified archive format.
+.IP "\fB\(mia\fP" 10
+Append files to the end of the archive. It is implementation-defined
+which devices on the system support appending. Additional file formats
+unspecified by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 may impose restrictions on appending.
+.IP "\fB\(mib\ \fIblocksize\fR" 10
+Block the output at a positive decimal integer number of bytes per
+write to the archive file. Devices and archive formats may impose
+restrictions on blocking. Blocking shall be automatically determined on
+input. Conforming applications shall not specify a
+.IR blocksize
+value larger than 32\|256. Default blocking when creating archives
+depends on the archive format. (See the
+.BR \(mix
+option below.)
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Match all file or archive members except those specified by the
+.IR pattern
+or
+.IR file
+operands.
+.IP "\fB\(mid\fP" 10
+Cause files of type directory being copied or archived or archive
+members of type directory being extracted or listed to match only the
+file or archive member itself and not the file hierarchy rooted at the
+file.
+.IP "\fB\(mif\ \fIarchive\fR" 10
+Specify the pathname of the input or output archive, overriding the
+default standard input (in
+.BR list
+or
+.BR read
+modes) or standard output (\c
+.BR write
+mode).
+.IP "\fB\(miH\fP" 10
+If a symbolic link referencing a file of type directory is specified on
+the command line,
+.IR pax
+shall archive the file hierarchy rooted in the file referenced by the
+link, using the name of the link as the root of the file hierarchy.
+Otherwise, if a symbolic link referencing a file of any other file type
+which
+.IR pax
+can normally archive is specified on the command line, then
+.IR pax
+shall archive the file referenced by the link, using the name of the
+link. The default behavior, when neither
+.BR \(miH
+or
+.BR \(miL
+are specified, shall be to archive the symbolic link itself.
+.IP "\fB\(mii\fP" 10
+Interactively rename files or archive members. For each archive member
+matching a
+.IR pattern
+operand or file matching a
+.IR file
+operand, a prompt shall be written to the file
+.BR /dev/tty .
+The prompt shall contain the name of the file or archive member, but
+the format is otherwise unspecified. A line shall then be read from
+.BR /dev/tty .
+If this line is blank, the file or archive member shall be skipped. If
+this line consists of a single period, the file or archive member shall
+be processed with no modification to its name. Otherwise, its name
+shall be replaced with the contents of the line. The
+.IR pax
+utility shall immediately exit with a non-zero exit status if
+end-of-file is encountered when reading a response or if
+.BR /dev/tty
+cannot be opened for reading and writing.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The results of extracting a hard link to a file that has been renamed
+during extraction are unspecified.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mik\fP" 10
+Prevent the overwriting of existing files.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\fP" 10
+(The letter ell.) In
+.BR copy
+mode, hard links shall be made between the source and destination file
+hierarchies whenever possible. If specified in conjunction with
+.BR \(miH
+or
+.BR \(miL ,
+when a symbolic link is encountered, the hard link created in the
+destination file hierarchy shall be to the file referenced by the
+symbolic link. If specified when neither
+.BR \(miH
+nor
+.BR \(miL
+is specified, when a symbolic link is encountered, the implementation
+shall create a hard link to the symbolic link in the source file
+hierarchy or copy the symbolic link to the destination.
+.IP "\fB\(miL\fP" 10
+If a symbolic link referencing a file of type directory is specified on
+the command line or encountered during the traversal of a file
+hierarchy,
+.IR pax
+shall archive the file hierarchy rooted in the file referenced by the
+link, using the name of the link as the root of the file hierarchy.
+Otherwise, if a symbolic link referencing a file of any other file type
+which
+.IR pax
+can normally archive is specified on the command line or encountered
+during the traversal of a file hierarchy,
+.IR pax
+shall archive the file referenced by the link, using the name of the
+link. The default behavior, when neither
+.BR \(miH
+or
+.BR \(miL
+are specified, shall be to archive the symbolic link itself.
+.IP "\fB\(min\fP" 10
+Select the first archive member that matches each
+.IR pattern
+operand. No more than one archive member shall be matched for each
+pattern (although members of type directory shall still match the file
+hierarchy rooted at that file).
+.IP "\fB\(mio\ \fIoptions\fR" 10
+Provide information to the implementation to modify the algorithm for
+extracting or writing files. The value of
+.IR options
+shall consist of one or more
+<comma>-separated
+keywords of the form:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIkeyword\fB[[\fR:\fB]\fR=\fIvalue\fB][\fR,\fIkeyword\fB[[\fR:\fB]\fR=\fIvalue\fB]\fR, ...\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Some keywords apply only to certain file formats, as indicated with
+each description. Use of keywords that are inapplicable to the file
+format being processed produces undefined results.
+.P
+Keywords in the
+.IR options
+argument shall be a string that would be a valid portable filename as
+described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.278" ", " "Portable Filename Character Set".
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+Keywords are not expected to be filenames, merely to follow the same
+character composition rules as portable filenames.
+.P
+.P
+Keywords can be preceded with white space. The
+.IR value
+field shall consist of zero or more characters; within
+.IR value ,
+the application shall precede any literal
+<comma>
+with a
+<backslash>,
+which shall be ignored, but preserves the
+<comma>
+as part of
+.IR value .
+A
+<comma>
+as the final character, or a
+<comma>
+followed solely by white space as the final characters, in
+.IR options
+shall be ignored. Multiple
+.BR \(mio
+options can be specified; if keywords given to these multiple
+.BR \(mio
+options conflict, the keywords and values appearing later in command
+line sequence shall take precedence and the earlier shall be silently
+ignored. The following keyword values of
+.IR options
+shall be supported for the file formats as indicated:
+.IP "\fBdelete\fR=\fIpattern\fR" 6
+.br
+(Applicable only to the
+.BR \(mix
+.BR pax
+format.) When used in
+.BR write
+or
+.BR copy
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall omit from extended header records that it produces any keywords
+matching the string pattern. When used in
+.BR read
+or
+.BR list
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall ignore any keywords matching the string pattern in the extended
+header records. In both cases, matching shall be performed using the
+pattern matching notation described in
+.IR "Section 2.13.1" ", " "Patterns Matching a Single Character"
+and
+.IR "Section 2.13.2" ", " "Patterns Matching Multiple Characters".
+For example:
+.RS 6 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\(mio \fBdelete\fR=\fIsecurity\fR.*
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would suppress security-related information. See
+.IR "pax Extended Header"
+for extended header record keyword usage.
+.P
+When multiple
+.BR \(mio \c
+.BR delete=pattern
+options are specified, the patterns shall be additive; all keywords
+matching the specified string patterns shall be omitted from extended
+header records that
+.IR pax
+produces.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBexthdr.name\fR=\fIstring\fR" 6
+.br
+(Applicable only to the
+.BR \(mix
+.BR pax
+format.) This keyword allows user control over the name that is written
+into the
+.BR ustar
+header blocks for the extended header produced under the circumstances
+described in
+.IR "pax Header Block".
+The name shall be the contents of
+.IR string ,
+after the following character substitutions have been made:
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB
+cB | cB
+lf5 | lw(3.8i).
+\fIstring\fP
+Includes:!Replaced by:
+_
+%d!T{
+The directory name of the file, equivalent to the result of the
+.IR dirname
+utility on the translated pathname.
+T}
+%f!T{
+The filename of the file, equivalent to the result of the
+.IR basename
+utility on the translated pathname.
+T}
+%p!T{
+The process ID of the
+.IR pax
+process.
+T}
+%%!T{
+A
+.BR '%' 
+character.
+T}
+.TE
+.RS 6 
+.P
+Any other
+.BR '%' 
+characters in
+.IR string
+produce undefined results.
+.P
+If no
+.BR \(mio
+.BR exthdr.name=string
+is specified,
+.IR pax
+shall use the following default value:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+%d/PaxHeaders.%p/%f
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP "\fBglobexthdr.name\fR=\fIstring\fR" 6
+.br
+(Applicable only to the
+.BR \(mix
+.BR pax
+format.) When used in
+.BR write
+or
+.BR copy
+mode with the appropriate options,
+.IR pax
+shall create global extended header records with
+.BR ustar
+header blocks that will be treated as regular files by previous
+versions of
+.IR pax .
+This keyword allows user control over the name that is written into the
+.BR ustar
+header blocks for global extended header records. The name shall be the
+contents of string, after the following character substitutions have
+been made:
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB
+cB | cB
+lf5 | lw(3.8i).
+\fIstring\fP
+Includes:!Replaced by:
+_
+%n!T{
+An integer that represents the sequence number of the global extended
+header record in the archive, starting at 1.
+T}
+%p!T{
+The process ID of the
+.IR pax
+process.
+T}
+%%!T{
+A
+.BR '%' 
+character.
+T}
+.TE
+.RS 6 
+.P
+Any other
+.BR '%' 
+characters in
+.IR string
+produce undefined results.
+.P
+If no
+.BR \(mio
+.BR globexthdr.name=string
+is specified,
+.IR pax
+shall use the following default value:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+$TMPDIR/GlobalHead.%p.%n
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where $\c
+.IR TMPDIR
+represents the value of the
+.IR TMPDIR
+environment variable. If
+.IR TMPDIR
+is not set,
+.IR pax
+shall use
+.BR /tmp .
+.RE
+.IP "\fBinvalid\fR=\fIaction\fR" 6
+.br
+(Applicable only to the
+.BR \(mix
+.BR pax
+format.) This keyword allows user control over the action
+.IR pax
+takes upon encountering values in an extended header record that, in
+.BR read
+or
+.BR copy
+mode, are invalid in the destination hierarchy or, in
+.BR list
+mode, cannot be written in the codeset and current locale of the
+implementation. The following are invalid values that shall be
+recognized by
+.IR pax :
+.RS 6 
+.IP -- 4
+In
+.BR read
+or
+.BR copy
+mode, a filename or link name that contains character encodings
+invalid in the destination hierarchy. (For example, the name may
+contain embedded NULs.)
+.IP -- 4
+In
+.BR read
+or
+.BR copy
+mode, a filename or link name that is longer than the maximum allowed
+in the destination hierarchy (for either a pathname component or the
+entire pathname).
+.IP -- 4
+In
+.BR list
+mode, any character string value (filename, link name, user name, and
+so on) that cannot be written in the codeset and current locale of the
+implementation.
+.P
+The following mutually-exclusive values of the
+.IR action
+argument are supported:
+.IP "\fBbinary\fR" 10
+In
+.BR write
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall generate a
+.BR hdrcharset = BINARY
+extended header record for each file with a filename, link name, group
+name, owner name, or any other field in an extended header record that
+cannot be translated to the UTF\(hy8 codeset, allowing the archive to
+contain the files with unencoded extended header record values. In
+.BR read
+or
+.BR copy
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall use the values specified in the header without translation,
+regardless of whether this may overwrite an existing file with a valid
+name. In
+.BR list
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall behave identically to the
+.BR bypass
+action.
+.IP "\fBbypass\fR" 10
+In
+.BR read
+or
+.BR copy
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall bypass the file, causing no change to the destination hierarchy.
+In
+.BR list
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall write all requested valid values for the file, but its method for
+writing invalid values is unspecified.
+.IP "\fBrename\fR" 10
+In
+.BR read
+or
+.BR copy
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall act as if the
+.BR \(mii
+option were in effect for each file with invalid filename or link name
+values, allowing the user to provide a replacement name interactively.
+In
+.BR list
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall behave identically to the
+.BR bypass
+action.
+.IP "\fBUTF\(hy8\fR" 10
+When used in
+.BR read ,
+.BR copy ,
+or
+.BR list
+mode and a filename, link name, owner name, or any other field in an
+extended header record cannot be translated from the
+.BR pax
+UTF\(hy8 codeset format to the codeset and current locale of the
+implementation,
+.IR pax
+shall use the actual UTF\(hy8 encoding for the name. If a
+.BR hdrcharset
+extended header record is in effect for this file, the character set
+specified by that record shall be used instead of UTF\(hy8. If a
+.BR hdrcharset = BINARY
+extended header record is in effect for this file, no translation shall
+be performed.
+.IP "\fBwrite\fR" 10
+In
+.BR read
+or
+.BR copy
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall write the file, translating the name, regardless of whether this
+may overwrite an existing file with a valid name. In
+.BR list
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall behave identically to the
+.BR bypass
+action.
+.P
+If no
+.BR \(mio
+.BR invalid=option
+is specified,
+.IR pax
+shall act as if
+.BR \(mio \c
+.BR invalid=bypass
+were specified. Any overwriting of existing files that may be allowed
+by the
+.BR \(mio \c
+.BR invalid=
+actions shall be subject to permission (\c
+.BR \(mip )
+and modification time (\c
+.BR \(miu )
+restrictions, and shall be suppressed if the
+.BR \(mik
+option is also specified.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBlinkdata\fP" 6
+.br
+(Applicable only to the
+.BR \(mix
+.BR pax
+format.) In
+.BR write
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall write the contents of a file to the archive even when that file
+is merely a hard link to a file whose contents have already been
+written to the archive.
+.IP "\fBlistopt\fR=\fIformat\fP" 6
+.br
+This keyword specifies the output format of the table of contents
+produced when the
+.BR \(miv
+option is specified in
+.BR list
+mode. See
+.IR "List Mode Format Specifications".
+To avoid ambiguity, the
+.BR listopt=format
+shall be the only or final
+.BR keyword=value
+pair in a
+.BR \(mio
+option-argument; all characters in the remainder of the option-argument
+shall be considered part of the format string. When multiple
+.BR \(mio \c
+.BR listopt=format
+options are specified, the format strings shall be considered a single,
+concatenated string, evaluated in command line order.
+.IP "\fBtimes\fR" 6
+.br
+(Applicable only to the
+.BR \(mix
+.IR pax
+format.) When used in
+.BR write
+or
+.BR copy
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall include
+.BR atime
+and
+.BR mtime
+extended header records for each file. See
+.IR "pax Extended Header File Times".
+.P
+In addition to these keywords, if the
+.BR \(mix
+.IR pax
+format is specified, any of the keywords and values defined in
+.IR "pax Extended Header",
+including implementation extensions, can be used in
+.BR \(mio
+option-arguments, in either of two modes:
+.IP "\fBkeyword\fR=\fIvalue\fR" 6
+.br
+When used in
+.BR write
+or
+.BR copy
+mode, these keyword/value pairs shall be included at the beginning of
+the archive as
+.BR typeflag
+.BR g
+global extended header records. When used in
+.BR read
+or
+.BR list
+mode, these keyword/value pairs shall act as if they had been at the
+beginning of the archive as
+.BR typeflag
+.BR g
+global extended header records.
+.IP "\fBkeyword\fR:=\fIvalue\fR" 6
+.br
+When used in
+.BR write
+or
+.BR copy
+mode, these keyword/value pairs shall be included as records at the
+beginning of a
+.BR typeflag
+.BR x
+extended header for each file. (This shall be equivalent to the
+<equals-sign>
+form except that it creates no
+.BR typeflag
+.BR g
+global extended header records.) When used in
+.BR read
+or
+.BR list
+mode, these keyword/value pairs shall act as if they were included as
+records at the end of each extended header; thus, they shall override
+any global or file-specific extended header record keywords of the same
+names. For example, in the command:
+.RS 6 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+pax \(mir \(mio "
+gname:=mygroup,
+" <archive
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+the group name will be forced to a new value for all files read from
+the archive.
+.RE
+.P
+The precedence of
+.BR \(mio
+keywords over various fields in the archive is described in
+.IR "pax Extended Header Keyword Precedence".
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mip\ \fIstring\fR" 10
+Specify one or more file characteristic options (privileges). The
+.IR string
+option-argument shall be a string specifying file characteristics to be
+retained or discarded on extraction. The string shall consist of the
+specification characters
+.BR a ,
+.BR e ,
+.BR m ,
+.BR o ,
+and
+.BR p .
+Other implementation-defined characters can be included. Multiple
+characteristics can be concatenated within the same string and multiple
+.BR \(mip
+options can be specified. The meaning of the specification characters
+are as follows:
+.RS 10 
+.IP "\fRa\fP" 6
+Do not preserve file access times.
+.IP "\fRe\fP" 6
+Preserve the user ID, group ID, file mode bits (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.169" ", " "File Mode Bits"),
+access time, modification time, and any other implementation-defined
+file characteristics.
+.IP "\fRm\fP" 6
+Do not preserve file modification times.
+.IP "\fRo\fP" 6
+Preserve the user ID and group ID.
+.IP "\fRp\fP" 6
+Preserve the file mode bits. Other implementation-defined file mode
+attributes may be preserved.
+.P
+In the preceding list, ``preserve'' indicates that an attribute stored
+in the archive shall be given to the extracted file, subject to the
+permissions of the invoking process. The access and modification times
+of the file shall be preserved unless otherwise specified with the
+.BR \(mip
+option or not stored in the archive. All attributes that are not
+preserved shall be determined as part of the normal file creation
+action (see
+.IR "Section 1.1.1.4" ", " "File Read" ", " "Write" ", " "and Creation").
+.P
+If neither the
+.BR e
+nor the
+.BR o
+specification character is specified, or the user ID and group ID are
+not preserved for any reason,
+.IR pax
+shall not set the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits of the file mode.
+.P
+If the preservation of any of these items fails for any reason,
+.IR pax
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error. Failure to preserve
+these items shall affect the final exit status, but shall not cause the
+extracted file to be deleted.
+.P
+If file characteristic letters in any of the
+.IR string
+option-arguments are duplicated or conflict with each other, the ones
+given last shall take precedence. For example, if
+.BR \(mip
+.BR eme
+is specified, file modification times are preserved.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mis\ \fIreplstr\fR" 10
+Modify file or archive member names named by
+.IR pattern
+or
+.IR file
+operands according to the substitution expression
+.IR replstr ,
+using the syntax of the
+.IR ed
+utility. The concepts of ``address'' and ``line'' are meaningless in
+the context of the
+.IR pax
+utility, and shall not be supplied. The format shall be:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\(mis /\fIold\fR/\fInew\fR/\fB[\fRgp\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where as in
+.IR ed ,
+.IR old
+is a basic regular expression and
+.IR new
+can contain an
+<ampersand>,
+.BR '\en' 
+(where
+.IR n
+is a digit) back-references, or subexpression matching. The
+.IR old
+string shall also be permitted to contain
+<newline>
+characters.
+.P
+Any non-null character can be used as a delimiter (\c
+.BR '/' 
+shown here). Multiple
+.BR \(mis
+expressions can be specified; the expressions shall be applied in the
+order specified, terminating with the first successful substitution.
+The optional trailing
+.BR 'g' 
+is as defined in the
+.IR ed
+utility. The optional trailing
+.BR 'p' 
+shall cause successful substitutions to be written to standard error.
+File or archive member names that substitute to the empty string shall
+be ignored when reading and writing archives.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mit\fP" 10
+When reading files from the file system, and if the user has the
+permissions required by
+\fIutime\fR()
+to do so, set the access time of each file read to the access time that
+it had before being read by
+.IR pax .
+.IP "\fB\(miu\fP" 10
+Ignore files that are older (having a less recent file modification
+time) than a pre-existing file or archive member with the same name.
+In
+.BR read
+mode, an archive member with the same name as a file in the file system
+shall be extracted if the archive member is newer than the file. In
+.BR write
+mode, an archive file member with the same name as a file in the file
+system shall be superseded if the file is newer than the archive
+member. If
+.BR \(mia
+is also specified, this is accomplished by appending to the archive;
+otherwise, it is unspecified whether this is accomplished by actual
+replacement in the archive or by appending to the archive. In
+.BR copy
+mode, the file in the destination hierarchy shall be replaced by the
+file in the source hierarchy or by a link to the file in the source
+hierarchy if the file in the source hierarchy is newer.
+.IP "\fB\(miv\fP" 10
+In
+.BR list
+mode, produce a verbose table of contents (see the STDOUT section).
+Otherwise, write archive member pathnames to standard error (see the
+STDERR section).
+.IP "\fB\(mix\ \fIformat\fR" 10
+Specify the output archive format. The
+.IR pax
+utility shall support the following formats:
+.RS 10 
+.IP "\fBcpio\fR" 10
+The
+.BR cpio
+interchange format; see the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section. The default
+.IR blocksize
+for this format for character special archive files shall be 5\|120.
+Implementations shall support all
+.IR blocksize
+values less than or equal to 32\|256 that are multiples of 512.
+.IP "\fBpax\fR" 10
+The
+.BR pax
+interchange format; see the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section. The default
+.IR blocksize
+for this format for character special archive files shall be 5\|120.
+Implementations shall support all
+.IR blocksize
+values less than or equal to 32\|256 that are multiples of 512.
+.IP "\fBustar\fR" 10
+The
+.BR tar
+interchange format; see the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section. The default
+.IR blocksize
+for this format for character special archive files shall be 10\|240.
+Implementations shall support all
+.IR blocksize
+values less than or equal to 32\|256 that are multiples of 512.
+.P
+Implementation-defined formats shall specify a default block size as
+well as any other block sizes supported for character special archive
+files.
+.P
+Any attempt to append to an archive file in a format different from the
+existing archive format shall cause
+.IR pax
+to exit immediately with a non-zero exit status.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miX\fP" 10
+When traversing the file hierarchy specified by a pathname,
+.IR pax
+shall not descend into directories that have a different device ID (\c
+.IR st_dev ;
+see the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+\fIstat\fR()).
+.P
+Specifying more than one of the mutually-exclusive options
+.BR \(miH
+and
+.BR \(miL
+shall not be considered an error and the last option specified shall
+determine the behavior of the utility.
+.P
+The options that operate on the names of files or archive members (\c
+.BR \(mic ,
+.BR \(mii ,
+.BR \(min ,
+.BR \(mis ,
+.BR \(miu ,
+and
+.BR \(miv )
+shall interact as follows. In
+.BR read
+mode, the archive members shall be selected based on the user-specified
+.IR pattern
+operands as modified by the
+.BR \(mic ,
+.BR \(min ,
+and
+.BR \(miu
+options. Then, any
+.BR \(mis
+and
+.BR \(mii
+options shall modify, in that order, the names of the selected files.
+The
+.BR \(miv
+option shall write names resulting from these modifications.
+.P
+In
+.BR write
+mode, the files shall be selected based on the user-specified
+pathnames as modified by the
+.BR \(min
+and
+.BR \(miu
+options. Then, any
+.BR \(mis
+and
+.BR \(mii
+options shall modify, in that order, the names of these selected files.
+The
+.BR \(miv
+option shall write names resulting from these modifications.
+.P
+If both the
+.BR \(miu
+and
+.BR \(min
+options are specified,
+.IR pax
+shall not consider a file selected unless it is newer than the file to
+which it is compared.
+.SS "List Mode Format Specifications"
+.P
+In
+.BR list
+mode with the
+.BR \(mio
+.BR listopt=format
+option, the
+.IR format
+argument shall be applied for each selected file. The
+.IR pax
+utility shall append a
+<newline>
+to the
+.BR listopt
+output for each selected file. The
+.IR format
+argument shall be used as the
+.IR format
+string described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 5" ", " "File Format Notation",
+with the exceptions 1. through 6. defined in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION
+section of
+.IR printf ,
+plus the following exceptions:
+.IP 7. 6
+The sequence (\c
+.IR keyword )
+can occur before a format conversion specifier. The conversion
+argument is defined by the value of
+.IR keyword .
+The implementation shall support the following keywords:
+.RS 6 
+.IP -- 4
+Any of the Field Name entries in
+.IR "Table 4-14, ustar Header Block"
+and
+.IR "Table 4-16, Octet-Oriented cpio Archive Entry".
+The implementation may support the
+.IR cpio
+keywords without the leading
+.BR c_
+in addition to the form required by
+.IR "Table 4-16, Octet-Oriented cpio Archive Entry".
+.IP -- 4
+Any keyword defined for the extended header in
+.IR "pax Extended Header".
+.IP -- 4
+Any keyword provided as an implementation-defined extension within
+the extended header defined in
+.IR "pax Extended Header".
+.P
+For example, the sequence
+.BR \(dq%(charset)s\(dq 
+is the string value of the name of the character set in the extended
+header.
+.P
+The result of the keyword conversion argument shall be the value from
+the applicable header field or extended header, without any trailing
+NULs.
+.P
+All keyword values used as conversion arguments shall be translated
+from the UTF\(hy8 encoding (or alternative encoding specified by any
+.BR hdrcharset
+extended header record) to the character set appropriate for the local
+file system, user database, and so on, as applicable.
+.RE
+.IP 8. 6
+An additional conversion specifier character,
+.BR T ,
+shall be used to specify time formats. The
+.BR T
+conversion specifier character can be preceded by the sequence (\c
+.IR keyword= \c
+.IR subformat ),
+where
+.IR subformat
+is a date format as defined by
+.IR date
+operands. The default
+.IR keyword
+shall be
+.BR mtime
+and the default subformat shall be:
+.RS 6 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+%b %e %H:%M %Y
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP 9. 6
+An additional conversion specifier character,
+.BR M ,
+shall be used to specify the file mode string as defined in
+.IR ls
+Standard Output. If (\c
+.IR keyword )
+is omitted, the
+.BR mode
+keyword shall be used. For example,
+.BR %.1M
+writes the single character corresponding to the <\fIentry\ type\fP>
+field of the
+.IR ls
+.BR \(mil
+command.
+.IP 10. 6
+An additional conversion specifier character,
+.BR D ,
+shall be used to specify the device for block or special files, if
+applicable, in an implementation-defined format. If not applicable,
+and (\c
+.IR keyword )
+is specified, then this conversion shall be equivalent to
+\fR%(\fIkeyword\fR)u\fR. If not applicable, and (\c
+.IR keyword )
+is omitted, then this conversion shall be equivalent to
+<space>.
+.IP 11. 6
+An additional conversion specifier character,
+.BR F ,
+shall be used to specify a pathname. The
+.BR F
+conversion character can be preceded by a sequence of
+<comma>-separated
+keywords:
+.RS 6 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(\fIkeyword\fB[\fR,\fIkeyword\fB]\fR ... )
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The values for all the keywords that are non-null shall be concatenated
+together, each separated by a
+.BR '/' .
+The default shall be (\c
+.BR path )
+if the keyword
+.BR path
+is defined; otherwise, the default shall be (\c
+.BR prefix ,\c
+.BR name ).
+.RE
+.IP 12. 6
+An additional conversion specifier character,
+.BR L ,
+shall be used to specify a symbolic link expansion. If the current
+file is a symbolic link, then
+.BR %L
+shall expand to:
+.RS 6 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s \(mi> %s", <\fIvalue of keyword\fR>, <\fIcontents of link\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Otherwise, the
+.BR %L
+conversion specification shall be the equivalent of
+.BR %F .
+.RE
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIdirectory\fR" 10
+The destination directory pathname for
+.BR copy
+mode.
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file to be copied or archived.
+.IP "\fIpattern\fR" 10
+A pattern matching one or more pathnames of archive members. A pattern
+must be given in the name-generating notation of the pattern matching
+notation in
+.IR "Section 2.13" ", " "Pattern Matching Notation",
+including the filename expansion rules in
+.IR "Section 2.13.3" ", " "Patterns Used for Filename Expansion".
+The default, if no
+.IR pattern
+is specified, is to select all members in the archive.
+.SH STDIN
+In
+.BR write
+mode, the standard input shall be used only if no
+.IR file
+operands are specified. It shall be a file containing a list of
+pathnames, each terminated by a
+<newline>
+character.
+.P
+In
+.BR list
+and
+.BR read
+modes, if
+.BR \(mif
+is not specified, the standard input shall be an archive file.
+.P
+Otherwise, the standard input shall not be used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input file named by the
+.IR archive
+option-argument, or standard input when the archive is read from there,
+shall be a file formatted according to one of the specifications in the
+EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section or some other implementation-defined
+format.
+.P
+The file
+.BR /dev/tty
+shall be used to write prompts and read responses.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR pax :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine the
+values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, equivalence classes,
+and multi-character collating elements used in the pattern matching
+expressions for the
+.IR pattern
+operand, the basic regular expression for the
+.BR \(mis
+option, and the extended regular expression defined for the
+.BR yesexpr
+locale keyword in the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+category.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files), the behavior of
+character classes used in the extended regular expression defined for
+the
+.BR yesexpr
+locale keyword in the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+category, and pattern matching.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale used to process affirmative responses, and the
+locale used to affect the format and contents of diagnostic messages
+and prompts written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILC_TIME\fP" 10
+Determine the format and contents of date and time strings when the
+.BR \(miv
+option is specified.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fITMPDIR\fP" 10
+Determine the pathname that provides part of the default global
+extended header record file, as described for the
+.BR \(mio
+.BR globexthdr=
+keyword in the OPTIONS section.
+.IP "\fITZ\fP" 10
+Determine the timezone used to calculate date and time strings when the
+.BR \(miv
+option is specified. If
+.IR TZ
+is unset or null, an unspecified default timezone shall be used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+In
+.BR write
+mode, if
+.BR \(mif
+is not specified, the standard output shall be the archive formatted
+according to one of the specifications in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION
+section, or some other implementation-defined format (see
+.BR \(mix
+.IR format ).
+.P
+In
+.BR list
+mode, when the
+.BR \(mio \c
+.BR listopt =\c
+.IR format
+has been specified, the selected archive members shall be written to
+standard output using the format described under
+.IR "List Mode Format Specifications".
+In
+.BR list
+mode without the
+.BR \(mio \c
+.BR listopt =\c
+.IR format
+option, the table of contents of the selected archive members shall
+be written to standard output using the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIpathname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(miv
+option is specified in
+.BR list
+mode, the table of contents of the selected archive members shall be
+written to standard output using the following formats.
+.P
+For pathnames representing hard links to previous members of the
+archive:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s == %s\en", <\fIls\fR \(mil \fIlisting\fR>, <\fIlinkname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+For all other pathnames:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIls\fR \(mil \fIlisting\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fIls\ \fR\(mil\ \fIlisting\fR> shall be the format specified by
+the
+.IR ls
+utility with the
+.BR \(mil
+option. When writing pathnames in this format, it is unspecified what
+is written for fields for which the underlying archive format does not
+have the correct information, although the correct number of
+<blank>-separated
+fields shall be written.
+.P
+In
+.BR list
+mode, standard output shall not be buffered more than a pathname
+(plus any associated information and a
+<newline>
+terminator) at a time.
+.SH STDERR
+If
+.BR \(miv
+is specified in
+.BR read ,
+.BR write ,
+or
+.BR copy
+modes,
+.IR pax
+shall write the pathnames it processes to the standard error output
+using the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIpathname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+These pathnames shall be written as soon as processing is begun on the
+file or archive member, and shall be flushed to standard error. The
+trailing
+<newline>,
+which shall not be buffered, is written when the file has been read or
+written.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mis
+option is specified, and the replacement string has a trailing
+.BR 'p' ,
+substitutions shall be written to standard error in the following
+format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s >> %s\en", <\fIoriginal pathname\fR>, <\fInew pathname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In all operating modes of
+.IR pax ,
+optional messages of unspecified format concerning the input archive
+format and volume number, the number of files, blocks, volumes, and
+media parts as well as other diagnostic messages may be written to
+standard error.
+.P
+In all formats, for both standard output and standard error, it is
+unspecified how non-printable characters in pathnames or link names
+are written.
+.P
+When using the
+.BR \(mix \c
+.BR pax
+archive format, if a filename, link name, group name, owner name, or
+any other field in an extended header record cannot be translated
+between the codeset in use for that extended header record and the
+character set of the current locale,
+.IR pax
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error, shall process the
+file as described for the
+.BR \(mio
+.BR invalid=
+option, and then shall continue processing with the next file.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+In
+.BR read
+mode, the extracted output files shall be of the archived file type.
+In
+.BR copy
+mode, the copied output files shall be the type of the file being
+copied. In either mode, existing files in the destination hierarchy
+shall be overwritten only when all permission (\c
+.BR \(mip ),
+modification time (\c
+.BR \(miu ),
+and invalid-value (\c
+.BR \(mio \c
+.BR invalid= )
+tests allow it.
+.P
+In
+.BR write
+mode, the output file named by the
+.BR \(mif
+option-argument shall be a file formatted according to one of the
+specifications in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section, or some other
+implementation-defined format.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+.SS "pax Interchange Format"
+.P
+A
+.IR pax
+archive tape or file produced in the
+.BR \(mix \c
+.BR pax
+format shall contain a series of blocks. The physical layout of the
+archive shall be identical to the
+.BR ustar
+format described in
+.IR "ustar Interchange Format".
+Each file archived shall be represented by the following sequence:
+.IP " *" 4
+An optional header block with extended header records. This header
+block is of the form described in
+.IR "pax Header Block",
+with a
+.IR typeflag
+value of
+.BR x
+or
+.BR g .
+The extended header records, described in
+.IR "pax Extended Header",
+shall be included as the data for this header block.
+.IP " *" 4
+A header block that describes the file. Any fields in the preceding
+optional extended header shall override the associated fields in
+this header block for this file.
+.IP " *" 4
+Zero or more blocks that contain the contents of the file.
+.P
+At the end of the archive file there shall be two 512-byte blocks
+filled with binary zeros, interpreted as an end-of-archive indicator.
+.P
+A schematic of an example archive with global extended header records
+and two actual files is shown in
+.IR "Figure 4-1, pax Format Archive Example".
+In the example, the second file in the archive has no extended header
+preceding it, presumably because it has no need for extended
+attributes.
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBFigure 4-1: pax Format Archive Example\fR
+.SS "pax Header Block"
+.P
+The
+.BR pax
+header block shall be identical to the
+.BR ustar
+header block described in
+.IR "ustar Interchange Format",
+except that two additional
+.IR typeflag
+values are defined:
+.IP "\fRx\fP" 6
+Represents extended header records for the following file in the
+archive (which shall have its own
+.BR ustar
+header block). The format of these extended header records shall be as
+described in
+.IR "pax Extended Header".
+.IP "\fRg\fR" 6
+Represents global extended header records for the following files in
+the archive. The format of these extended header records shall be as
+described in
+.IR "pax Extended Header".
+Each value shall affect all subsequent files that do not override that
+value in their own extended header record and until another global
+extended header record is reached that provides another value for the
+same field. The
+.IR typeflag
+.BR g
+global headers should not be used with interchange media that could
+suffer partial data loss in transporting the archive.
+.P
+For both of these types, the
+.IR size
+field shall be the size of the extended header records in octets. The
+other fields in the header block are not meaningful to this version of
+the
+.IR pax
+utility. However, if this archive is read by a
+.IR pax
+utility conforming to the ISO\ POSIX\(hy2:\|1993 standard, the header block fields are used to
+create a regular file that contains the extended header records as
+data. Therefore, header block field values should be selected to
+provide reasonable file access to this regular file.
+.P
+A further difference from the
+.BR ustar
+header block is that data blocks for files of
+.IR typeflag
+1 (the digit one) (hard link) may be included, which means that the
+size field may be greater than zero. Archives created by
+.IR pax
+.BR \(mio
+.BR linkdata
+shall include these data blocks with the hard links.
+.SS "pax Extended Header"
+.P
+A
+.BR pax
+extended header contains values that are inappropriate for the
+.BR ustar
+header block because of limitations in that format: fields requiring a
+character encoding other than that described in the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard, fields
+representing file attributes not described in the
+.BR ustar
+header, and fields whose format or length do not fit the requirements
+of the
+.BR ustar
+header. The values in an extended header add attributes to the
+following file (or files; see the description of the
+.IR typeflag
+.BR g
+header block) or override values in the following header block(s), as
+indicated in the following list of keywords.
+.P
+An extended header shall consist of one or more records, each
+constructed as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d %s=%s\en", <\fIlength\fR>, <\fIkeyword\fR>, <\fIvalue\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The extended header records shall be encoded according to the ISO/IEC\ 10646\(hy1:\|2000 standard
+UTF\(hy8 encoding. The <\fIlength\fP> field,
+<blank>,
+<equals-sign>,
+and
+<newline>
+shown shall be limited to the portable character set, as encoded in
+UTF\(hy8. The <\fIkeyword\fP> fields can be any UTF\(hy8 characters.
+The <\fIlength\fP> field shall be the decimal length of the extended
+header record in octets, including the trailing
+<newline>.
+If there is a
+.BR hdrcharset
+extended header in effect for a file, the
+.IR value
+field for any
+.BR gname ,
+.BR linkpath ,
+.BR path ,
+and
+.BR uname
+extended header records shall be encoded using the character set
+specified by the
+.BR hdrcharset
+extended header record; otherwise, the
+.IR value
+field shall be encoded using UTF\(hy8. The
+.IR value
+field for all other keywords specified by POSIX.1\(hy2008 shall be
+encoded using UTF\(hy8.
+.P
+The <\fIkeyword\fP> field shall be one of the entries from the
+following list or a keyword provided as an implementation extension.
+Keywords consisting entirely of lowercase letters, digits, and periods
+are reserved for future standardization. A keyword shall not include an
+<equals-sign>.
+(In the following list, the notations ``file(s)'' or ``block(s)'' is used
+to acknowledge that a keyword affects the following single file after a
+.IR typeflag
+.BR x
+extended header, but possibly multiple files after
+.IR typeflag
+.BR g .
+Any requirements in the list for
+.IR pax
+to include a record when in
+.BR write
+or
+.BR copy
+mode shall apply only when such a record has not already been provided
+through the use of the
+.BR \(mio
+option. When used in
+.BR copy
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall behave as if an archive had been created with applicable extended
+header records and then extracted.)
+.IP "\fBatime\fP" 10
+The file access time for the following file(s), equivalent to the value
+of the
+.IR st_atime
+member of the
+.BR stat
+structure for a file, as described by the
+\fIstat\fR()
+function. The access time shall be restored if the process has
+appropriate privileges required to do so. The format of the
+<\fIvalue\fP> shall be as described in
+.IR "pax Extended Header File Times".
+.IP "\fBcharset\fP" 10
+The name of the character set used to encode the data in the following
+file(s). The entries in the following table are defined to refer to
+known standards; additional names may be agreed on between the
+originator and recipient.
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB
+lf5 | l.
+<value>!Formal Standard
+_
+ISO-IR 646 1990!ISO/IEC 646:\|1990
+ISO-IR 8859 1 1998!ISO/IEC 8859\(hy1:\|1998
+ISO-IR 8859 2 1999!ISO/IEC 8859\(hy2:\|1999
+ISO-IR 8859 3 1999!ISO/IEC 8859\(hy3:\|1999
+ISO-IR 8859 4 1998!ISO/IEC 8859\(hy4:\|1998
+ISO-IR 8859 5 1999!ISO/IEC 8859\(hy5:\|1999
+ISO-IR 8859 6 1999!ISO/IEC 8859\(hy6:\|1999
+ISO-IR 8859 7 1987!ISO/IEC 8859\(hy7:\|1987
+ISO-IR 8859 8 1999!ISO/IEC 8859\(hy8:\|1999
+ISO-IR 8859 9 1999!ISO/IEC 8859\(hy9:\|1999
+ISO-IR 8859 10 1998!ISO/IEC 8859\(hy10:\|1998
+ISO-IR 8859 13 1998!ISO/IEC 8859\(hy13:\|1998
+ISO-IR 8859 14 1998!ISO/IEC 8859\(hy14:\|1998
+ISO-IR 8859 15 1999!ISO/IEC 8859\(hy15:\|1999
+ISO-IR 10646 2000!ISO/IEC 10646:\|2000
+ISO-IR 10646 2000 UTF-8!ISO/IEC 10646, UTF-8 encoding
+BINARY!None.
+.TE
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The encoding is included in an extended header for information only;
+when
+.IR pax
+is used as described in POSIX.1\(hy2008, it shall not translate the file data
+into any other encoding. The
+.BR BINARY
+entry indicates unencoded binary data.
+.P
+When used in
+.BR write
+or
+.BR copy
+mode, it is implementation-defined whether
+.IR pax
+includes a
+.BR charset
+extended header record for a file.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBcomment\fP" 10
+A series of characters used as a comment. All characters in the
+<\fIvalue\fP> field shall be ignored by
+.IR pax .
+.IP "\fBgid\fP" 10
+The group ID of the group that owns the file, expressed as a decimal
+number using digits from the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard. This record shall override the
+.IR gid
+field in the following header block(s). When used in
+.BR write
+or
+.BR copy
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall include a
+.IR gid
+extended header record for each file whose group ID is greater than
+2\|097\|151 (octal 7\|777\|777).
+.IP "\fBgname\fP" 10
+The group of the file(s), formatted as a group name in the group
+database. This record shall override the
+.IR gid
+and
+.IR gname
+fields in the following header block(s), and any
+.IR gid
+extended header record. When used in
+.BR read ,
+.BR copy ,
+or
+.BR list
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall translate the name from the encoding in the header record to
+the character set appropriate for the group database on the
+receiving system. If any of the characters cannot be
+translated, and if neither the
+.BR \(mio \c
+.BR invalid=UTF\(hy8
+option nor the
+.BR \(mio \c
+.BR invalid=binary
+option is specified, the results are implementation-defined.
+When used in
+.BR write
+or
+.BR copy
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall include a
+.BR gname
+extended header record for each file whose group name cannot be
+represented entirely with the letters and digits of the portable
+character set.
+.IP "\fBhdrcharset\fR" 10
+The name of the character set used to encode the value field of the
+.BR gname ,
+.BR linkpath ,
+.BR path ,
+and
+.BR uname
+.IR pax
+extended header records. The entries in the following table are defined
+to refer to known standards; additional names may be agreed between the
+originator and the recipient.
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB
+lf5 | l.
+<value>!Formal Standard
+_
+ISO-IR 10646 2000 UTF-8!ISO/IEC 10646, UTF-8 encoding
+BINARY!None.
+.TE
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If no
+.BR hdrcharset
+extended header record is specified, the default character set used to
+encode all values in extended header records shall be the ISO/IEC\ 10646\(hy1:\|2000 standard
+UTF\(hy8 encoding.
+.P
+The
+.BR BINARY
+entry indicates that all values recorded in extended headers for
+affected files are unencoded binary data from the underlying system.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBlinkpath\fP" 10
+The pathname of a link being created to another file, of any type,
+previously archived. This record shall override the
+.IR linkname
+field in the following
+.BR ustar
+header block(s). The following
+.BR ustar
+header block shall determine the type of link created. If
+.IR typeflag
+of the following header block is 1, it shall be a hard link. If
+.IR typeflag
+is 2, it shall be a symbolic link and the
+.BR linkpath
+value shall be the contents of the symbolic link. The
+.IR pax
+utility shall translate the name of the link (contents of the symbolic
+link) from the encoding in the header to the character set appropriate
+for the local file system. When used in
+.BR write
+or
+.BR copy
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall include a
+.BR linkpath
+extended header record for each link whose pathname cannot be
+represented entirely with the members of the portable character set
+other than NUL.
+.IP "\fBmtime\fP" 10
+The file modification time of the following file(s), equivalent to the
+value of the
+.IR st_mtime
+member of the
+.BR stat
+structure for a file, as described in the
+\fIstat\fR()
+function. This record shall override the
+.IR mtime
+field in the following header block(s). The modification time shall be
+restored if the process has appropriate privileges required to do
+so. The format of the <\fIvalue\fP> shall be as described in
+.IR "pax Extended Header File Times".
+.IP "\fBpath\fP" 10
+The pathname of the following file(s). This record shall override the
+.IR name
+and
+.IR prefix
+fields in the following header block(s). The
+.IR pax
+utility shall translate the pathname of the file from the encoding in
+the header to the character set appropriate for the local file system.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+When used in
+.BR write
+or
+.BR copy
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall include a
+.IR path
+extended header record for each file whose pathname cannot be
+represented entirely with the members of the portable character set
+other than NUL.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBrealtime.\fIany\fR" 10
+The keywords prefixed by ``realtime.'' are reserved for future
+standardization.
+.IP "\fBsecurity.\fIany\fR" 10
+The keywords prefixed by ``security.'' are reserved for future
+standardization.
+.IP "\fBsize\fP" 10
+The size of the file in octets, expressed as a decimal number using
+digits from the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard. This record shall override the
+.IR size
+field in the following header block(s). When used in
+.BR write
+or
+.BR copy
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall include a
+.IR size
+extended header record for each file with a size value greater than
+8\|589\|934\|591 (octal 77\|777\|777\|777).
+.IP "\fBuid\fP" 10
+The user ID of the file owner, expressed as a decimal number using
+digits from the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard. This record shall override the
+.IR uid
+field in the following header block(s). When used in
+.BR write
+or
+.BR copy
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall include a
+.IR uid
+extended header record for each file whose owner ID is greater than
+2\|097\|151 (octal 7\|777\|777).
+.IP "\fBuname\fP" 10
+The owner of the following file(s), formatted as a user name in the
+user database. This record shall override the
+.IR uid
+and
+.IR uname
+fields in the following header block(s), and any
+.IR uid
+extended header record. When used in
+.BR read ,
+.BR copy ,
+or
+.BR list
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall translate the name from the encoding in the header record to the
+character set appropriate for the user database on the receiving
+system. If any of the characters cannot be translated, and if neither
+the
+.BR \(mio \c
+.BR invalid=UTF\(hy8
+option nor the
+.BR \(mio \c
+.BR invalid=binary
+option is specified, the results are implementation-defined.
+When used in
+.BR write
+or
+.BR copy
+mode,
+.IR pax
+shall include a
+.BR uname
+extended header record for each file whose user name cannot be
+represented entirely with the letters and digits of the portable
+character set.
+.P
+If the <\fIvalue\fP> field is zero length, it shall delete any header
+block field, previously entered extended header value, or global
+extended header value of the same name.
+.P
+If a keyword in an extended header record (or in a
+.BR \(mio
+option-argument) overrides or deletes a corresponding field in the
+.BR ustar
+header block,
+.IR pax
+shall ignore the contents of that header block field.
+.P
+Unlike the
+.BR ustar
+header block fields, NULs shall not delimit <\fIvalue\fP>s; all
+characters within the <\fIvalue\fP> field shall be considered data for
+the field. None of the length limitations of the
+.BR ustar
+header block fields in
+.IR "Table 4-14, ustar Header Block"
+shall apply to the extended header records.
+.SS "pax Extended Header Keyword Precedence"
+.P
+This section describes the precedence in which the various header
+records and fields and command line options are selected to apply to a
+file in the archive. When
+.IR pax
+is used in
+.BR read
+or
+.BR list
+modes, it shall determine a file attribute in the following sequence:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If
+.BR \(mio \c
+.BR delete=keyword-prefix
+is used, the affected attributes shall be determined from step 7., if
+applicable, or ignored otherwise.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If
+.BR \(mio \c
+.IR keyword :=
+is used, the affected attributes shall be ignored.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If
+.BR \(mio \c
+.BR keyword:=value
+is used, the affected attribute shall be assigned the value.
+.IP " 4." 4
+If there is a
+.IR typeflag
+.BR x
+extended header record, the affected attribute shall be assigned the
+<\fIvalue\fP>. When extended header records conflict, the last one
+given in the header shall take precedence.
+.IP " 5." 4
+If
+.BR \(mio \c
+.BR keyword=value
+is used, the affected attribute shall be assigned the value.
+.IP " 6." 4
+If there is a
+.IR typeflag
+.BR g
+global extended header record, the affected attribute shall be assigned
+the <\fIvalue\fP>. When global extended header records conflict, the
+last one given in the global header shall take precedence.
+.IP " 7." 4
+Otherwise, the attribute shall be determined from the
+.BR ustar
+header block.
+.SS "pax Extended Header File Times"
+.P
+The
+.IR pax
+utility shall write an
+.BR mtime
+record for each file in
+.BR write
+or
+.BR copy
+modes if the file's modification time cannot be represented exactly in
+the
+.BR ustar
+header logical record described in
+.IR "ustar Interchange Format".
+This can occur if the time is out of
+.BR ustar
+range, or if the file system of the underlying implementation supports
+non-integer time granularities and the time is not an integer. All of
+these time records shall be formatted as a decimal representation of
+the time in seconds since the Epoch. If a
+<period>
+(\c
+.BR '.' )
+decimal point character is present, the digits to the right of the
+point shall represent the units of a subsecond timing granularity,
+where the first digit is tenths of a second and each subsequent digit
+is a tenth of the previous digit. In
+.BR read
+or
+.BR copy
+mode, the
+.IR pax
+utility shall truncate the time of a file to the greatest value that is
+not greater than the input header file time. In
+.BR write
+or
+.BR copy
+mode, the
+.IR pax
+utility shall output a time exactly if it can be represented exactly as
+a decimal number, and otherwise shall generate only enough digits so
+that the same time shall be recovered if the file is extracted on a
+system whose underlying implementation supports the same time
+granularity.
+.SS "ustar Interchange Format"
+.P
+A
+.BR ustar
+archive tape or file shall contain a series of logical records. Each
+logical record shall be a fixed-size logical record of 512 octets (see
+below). Although this format may be thought of as being stored on
+9-track industry-standard 12.7 mm (0.5 in) magnetic tape, other types of
+transportable media are not excluded. Each file archived shall be
+represented by a header logical record that describes the file,
+followed by zero or more logical records that give the contents of the
+file. At the end of the archive file there shall be two 512-octet
+logical records filled with binary zeros, interpreted as an
+end-of-archive indicator.
+.P
+The logical records may be grouped for physical I/O operations, as
+described under the
+.BR \(mib \c
+.IR blocksize
+and
+.BR \(mix
+.BR ustar
+options. Each group of logical records may be written with a single
+operation equivalent to the
+\fIwrite\fR()
+function. On magnetic tape, the result of this write shall be a single
+tape physical block. The last physical block shall always be the full
+size, so logical records after the two zero logical records may contain
+undefined data.
+.P
+The header logical record shall be structured as shown in the following
+table. All lengths and offsets are in decimal.
+.br
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable 4-14: ustar Header Block\fR
+.TS
+center box tab(@);
+cB | cB | cB
+lI | n | n.
+Field Name@Octet Offset@Length (in Octets)
+_
+name@0@100
+mode@100@8
+uid@108@8
+gid@116@8
+size@124@12
+mtime@136@12
+chksum@148@8
+typeflag@156@1
+linkname@157@100
+magic@257@6
+version@263@2
+uname@265@32
+gname@297@32
+devmajor@329@8
+devminor@337@8
+prefix@345@155
+.TE
+.P
+All characters in the header logical record shall be represented in the
+coded character set of the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard. For maximum portability between
+implementations, names should be selected from characters represented
+by the portable filename character set as octets with the most
+significant bit zero. If an implementation supports the use of
+characters outside of
+<slash>
+and the portable filename character set in names for files, users, and
+groups, one or more implementation-defined encodings of these characters
+shall be provided for interchange purposes.
+.P
+However, the
+.IR pax
+utility shall never create filenames on the local system that cannot
+be accessed via the procedures described in POSIX.1\(hy2008. If a filename is
+found on the medium that would create an invalid filename, it is
+implementation-defined whether the data from the file is stored on the
+file hierarchy and under what name it is stored. The
+.IR pax
+utility may choose to ignore these files as long as it produces an
+error indicating that the file is being ignored.
+.P
+Each field within the header logical record is contiguous; that is,
+there is no padding used. Each character on the archive medium shall be
+stored contiguously.
+.P
+The fields
+.IR magic ,
+.IR uname ,
+and
+.IR gname
+are character strings each terminated by a NUL character. The fields
+.IR name ,
+.IR linkname ,
+and
+.IR prefix
+are NUL-terminated character strings except when all characters in the
+array contain non-NUL characters including the last character. The
+.IR version
+field is two octets containing the characters
+.BR \(dq00\(dq 
+(zero-zero). The
+.IR typeflag
+contains a single character. All other fields are leading zero-filled
+octal numbers using digits from the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard IRV. Each numeric field is
+terminated by one or more
+<space>
+or NUL characters.
+.P
+The
+.IR name
+and the
+.IR prefix
+fields shall produce the pathname of the file. A new pathname shall
+be formed, if
+.IR prefix
+is not an empty string (its first character is not NUL), by
+concatenating
+.IR prefix
+(up to the first NUL character), a
+<slash>
+character, and
+.IR name ;
+otherwise,
+.IR name
+is used alone. In either case,
+.IR name
+is terminated at the first NUL character. If
+.IR prefix
+begins with a NUL character, it shall be ignored. In this manner,
+pathnames of at most 256 characters can be supported. If a pathname
+does not fit in the space provided,
+.IR pax
+shall notify the user of the error, and shall not store any part of the
+file\(emheader or data\(emon the medium.
+.P
+The
+.IR linkname
+field, described below, shall not use the
+.IR prefix
+to produce a pathname. As such, a
+.IR linkname
+is limited to 100 characters. If the name does not fit in the space
+provided,
+.IR pax
+shall notify the user of the error, and shall not attempt to store the
+link on the medium.
+.P
+The
+.IR mode
+field provides 12 bits encoded in the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard octal digit representation.
+The encoded bits shall represent the following values:
+.br
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable: ustar \fImode\fP Field\fR
+.TS
+tab(!) center box;
+cB | cB | cB
+n | l | l.
+Bit Value!POSIX.1\(hy2008 Bit!Description
+_
+04\|000!S_ISUID!Set UID on execution.
+02\|000!S_ISGID!Set GID on execution.
+01\|000!<reserved>!Reserved for future standardization.
+00\|400!S_IRUSR!Read permission for file owner class.
+00\|200!S_IWUSR!Write permission for file owner class.
+00\|100!S_IXUSR!Execute/search permission for file owner class.
+00\|040!S_IRGRP!Read permission for file group class.
+00\|020!S_IWGRP!Write permission for file group class.
+00\|010!S_IXGRP!Execute/search permission for file group class.
+00\|004!S_IROTH!Read permission for file other class.
+00\|002!S_IWOTH!Write permission for file other class.
+00\|001!S_IXOTH!Execute/search permission for file other class.
+.TE
+.P
+When appropriate privileges are required to set one of these mode bits,
+and the user restoring the files from the archive does not have
+appropriate privileges, the mode bits for which the user does not have
+appropriate privileges shall be ignored. Some of the mode bits in the
+archive format are not mentioned elsewhere in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. If the
+implementation does not support those bits, they may be ignored.
+.P
+The
+.IR uid
+and
+.IR gid
+fields are the user and group ID of the owner and group of the file,
+respectively.
+.P
+The
+.IR size
+field is the size of the file in octets. If the
+.IR typeflag
+field is set to specify a file to be of type 1 (a link) or 2 (a
+symbolic link), the
+.IR size
+field shall be specified as zero. If the
+.IR typeflag
+field is set to specify a file of type 5 (directory), the
+.IR size
+field shall be interpreted as described under the definition of that
+record type. No data logical records are stored for types 1, 2, or 5.
+If the
+.IR typeflag
+field is set to 3 (character special file), 4 (block special file), or
+6 (FIFO), the meaning of the
+.IR size
+field is unspecified by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, and no data logical records shall be
+stored on the medium. Additionally, for type 6, the
+.IR size
+field shall be ignored when reading. If the
+.IR typeflag
+field is set to any other value, the number of logical records written
+following the header shall be (\c
+.IR size +511)/512,
+ignoring any fraction in the result of the division.
+.P
+The
+.IR mtime
+field shall be the modification time of the file at the time it was
+archived. It is the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard representation of the octal value of the
+modification time obtained from the
+\fIstat\fR()
+function.
+.P
+The
+.IR chksum
+field shall be the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard IRV representation of the octal value of the
+simple sum of all octets in the header logical record. Each octet in
+the header shall be treated as an unsigned value. These values shall be
+added to an unsigned integer, initialized to zero, the precision of
+which is not less than 17 bits. When calculating the checksum, the
+.IR chksum
+field is treated as if it were all
+<space>
+characters.
+.P
+The
+.IR typeflag
+field specifies the type of file archived. If a particular
+implementation does not recognize the type, or the user does not have
+appropriate privileges to create that type, the file shall be extracted
+as if it were a regular file if the file type is defined to have a
+meaning for the
+.IR size
+field that could cause data logical records to be written on the medium
+(see the previous description for
+.IR size ).
+If conversion to a regular file occurs, the
+.IR pax
+utility shall produce an error indicating that the conversion took
+place. All of the
+.IR typeflag
+fields shall be coded in the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard IRV:
+.IP "\fR0\fR" 8
+Represents a regular file. For backwards-compatibility, a
+.IR typeflag
+value of binary zero (\c
+.BR '\e0' )
+should be recognized as meaning a regular file when extracting files
+from the archive. Archives written with this version of the archive
+file format create regular files with a
+.IR typeflag
+value of the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard IRV
+.BR '0' .
+.IP "\fR1\fR" 8
+Represents a file linked to another file, of any type, previously
+archived. Such files are identified by having the same device
+and file serial numbers, and pathnames that refer to different
+directory entries. All such files shall be archived as linked files.
+The linked-to name is specified in the
+.IR linkname
+field with a NUL-character terminator if it is less than 100 octets in
+length.
+.IP "\fR2\fR" 8
+Represents a symbolic link. The contents of the symbolic link shall be
+stored in the
+.IR linkname
+field.
+.IP "\fR3,4\fR" 8
+Represent character special files and block special files respectively.
+In this case the
+.IR devmajor
+and
+.IR devminor
+fields shall contain information defining the device, the format of
+which is unspecified by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. Implementations may map the device
+specifications to their own local specification or may ignore the
+entry.
+.IP "\fR5\fR" 8
+Specifies a directory or subdirectory. On systems where disk allocation
+is performed on a directory basis, the
+.IR size
+field shall contain the maximum number of octets (which may be rounded
+to the nearest disk block allocation unit) that the directory may hold.
+A
+.IR size
+field of zero indicates no such limiting. Systems that do not support
+limiting in this manner should ignore the
+.IR size
+field.
+.IP "\fR6\fR" 8
+Specifies a FIFO special file. Note that the archiving of a FIFO file
+archives the existence of this file and not its contents.
+.IP "\fR7\fR" 8
+Reserved to represent a file to which an implementation has associated
+some high-performance attribute. Implementations without such
+extensions should treat this file as a regular file (type 0).
+.IP "\fRA\(hyZ\fR" 8
+The letters
+.BR 'A' 
+to
+.BR 'Z' ,
+inclusive, are reserved for custom implementations. All other values
+are reserved for future versions of this standard.
+.P
+It is unspecified whether files with pathnames that refer to the same
+directory entry are archived as linked files or as separate files. If
+they are archived as linked files, this means that attempting to
+extract both pathnames from the resulting archive will always cause an
+error (unless the
+.BR \(miu
+option is used) because the link cannot be created.
+.P
+It is unspecified whether files with the same device and file serial
+numbers being appended to an archive are treated as linked files to
+members that were in the archive before the append.
+.P
+Attempts to archive a socket using
+.BR ustar
+interchange format shall produce a diagnostic message. Handling of
+other file types is implementation-defined.
+.P
+The
+.IR magic
+field is the specification that this archive was output in this archive
+format. If this field contains
+.BR ustar
+(the five characters from the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard IRV shown followed by NUL), the
+.IR uname
+and
+.IR gname
+fields shall contain the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard IRV representation of the owner and
+group of the file, respectively (truncated to fit, if necessary). When
+the file is restored by a privileged, protection-preserving version of
+the utility, the user and group databases shall be scanned for these
+names. If found, the user and group IDs contained within these files
+shall be used rather than the values contained within the
+.IR uid
+and
+.IR gid
+fields.
+.SS "cpio Interchange Format"
+.P
+The octet-oriented
+.BR cpio
+archive format shall be a series of entries, each comprising a header
+that describes the file, the name of the file, and then the contents of
+the file.
+.P
+An archive may be recorded as a series of fixed-size blocks of octets.
+This blocking shall be used only to make physical I/O more efficient.
+The last group of blocks shall always be at the full size.
+.P
+For the octet-oriented
+.BR cpio
+archive format, the individual entry information shall be in the order
+indicated and described by the following table; see also the
+.IR <cpio.h> 
+header.
+.br
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable 4-16: Octet-Oriented cpio Archive Entry\fR
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB | cB
+lI | n | l.
+Header Field Name!Length (in Octets)!Interpreted as
+_
+c_magic!6!Octal number
+c_dev!6!Octal number
+c_ino!6!Octal number
+c_mode!6!Octal number
+c_uid!6!Octal number
+c_gid!6!Octal number
+c_nlink!6!Octal number
+c_rdev!6!Octal number
+c_mtime!11!Octal number
+c_namesize!6!Octal number
+c_filesize!11!Octal number
+_
+.T&
+cB | cB | cB
+lI lI l.
+Filename Field Name!Length!Interpreted as
+_
+c_name!c_namesize!Pathname string
+_
+.T&
+cB | cB | cB
+lI lI l.
+File Data Field Name!Length!Interpreted as
+_
+c_filedata!c_filesize!Data
+.TE
+.SS "cpio Header"
+.P
+For each file in the archive, a header as defined previously shall be
+written. The information in the header fields is written as streams of
+the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard characters interpreted as octal numbers. The octal numbers
+shall be extended to the necessary length by appending the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard IRV
+zeros at the most-significant-digit end of the number; the result is
+written to the most-significant digit of the stream of octets first.
+The fields shall be interpreted as follows:
+.IP "\fIc_magic\fR" 10
+Identify the archive as being a transportable archive by containing the
+identifying value
+.BR \(dq070707\(dq .
+.IP "\fIc_dev\fR,\ \fIc_ino\fR" 10
+Contains values that uniquely identify the file within the archive
+(that is, no files contain the same pair of
+.IR c_dev
+and
+.IR c_ino
+values unless they are links to the same file). The values shall be
+determined in an unspecified manner.
+.IP "\fIc_mode\fR" 10
+Contains the file type and access permissions as defined in the
+following table.
+.br
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable 4-17: Values for cpio c_mode Field\fR
+.TS
+center box tab(@);
+cB | cB | cB
+l | n | l.
+File Permissions Name@Value@Indicates
+_
+C_IRUSR@000\|400@Read by owner
+C_IWUSR@000\|200@Write by owner
+C_IXUSR@000\|100@Execute by owner
+C_IRGRP@000\|040@Read by group
+C_IWGRP@000\|020@Write by group
+C_IXGRP@000\|010@Execute by group
+C_IROTH@000\|004@Read by others
+C_IWOTH@000\|002@Write by others
+C_IXOTH@000\|001@Execute by others
+C_ISUID@004\|000@Set \fIuid\fP
+C_ISGID@002\|000@Set \fIgid\fP
+C_ISVTX@001\|000@Reserved
+_
+.T&
+cB | cB | cB
+l | n | l.
+File Type Name@Value@Indicates
+_
+C_ISDIR@040\|000@Directory
+C_ISFIFO@010\|000@FIFO
+C_ISREG@0100\|000@Regular file
+C_ISLNK@0120\|000@Symbolic link
+.RS 10 
+.P
+C_ISBLK@060\|000@Block special file
+C_ISCHR@020\|000@Character special file
+C_ISSOCK@0140\|000@Socket
+.P
+C_ISCTG@0110\|000@Reserved
+.TE
+.P
+Directories, FIFOs, symbolic links, and regular files shall be
+supported on a system conforming to this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008; additional values defined
+previously are reserved for compatibility with existing systems.
+Additional file types may be supported; however, such files should not
+be written to archives intended to be transported to other systems.
+.RE
+.IP "\fIc_uid\fR" 10
+Contains the user ID of the owner.
+.IP "\fIc_gid\fR" 10
+Contains the group ID of the group.
+.IP "\fIc_nlink\fR" 10
+Contains a number greater than or equal to the number of links in the
+archive referencing the file. If the
+.BR \(mia
+option is used to append to a
+.IR cpio
+archive, then the
+.IR pax
+utility need not account for the files in the existing part of the
+archive when calculating the
+.IR c_nlink
+values for the appended part of the archive, and need not alter the
+.IR c_nlink
+values in the existing part of the archive if additional files with the
+same
+.IR c_dev
+and
+.IR c_ino
+values are appended to the archive.
+.IP "\fIc_rdev\fR" 10
+Contains implementation-defined information for character or block
+special files.
+.IP "\fIc_mtime\fR" 10
+Contains the latest time of modification of the file at the time the
+archive was created.
+.IP "\fIc_namesize\fR" 10
+Contains the length of the pathname, including the terminating NUL
+character.
+.IP "\fIc_filesize\fR" 10
+Contains the length in octets of the data section following the
+header structure.
+.SS "cpio Filename"
+.P
+The
+.IR c_name
+field shall contain the pathname of the file. The length of this field
+in octets is the value of
+.IR c_namesize .
+.P
+If a filename is found on the medium that would create an invalid
+pathname, it is implementation-defined whether the data from the file
+is stored on the file hierarchy and under what name it is stored.
+.P
+All characters shall be represented in the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard IRV. For maximum
+portability between implementations, names should be selected from
+characters represented by the portable filename character set as
+octets with the most significant bit zero. If an implementation
+supports the use of characters outside the portable filename character
+set in names for files, users, and groups, one or more
+implementation-defined encodings of these characters shall be provided
+for interchange purposes. However, the
+.IR pax
+utility shall never create filenames on the local system that cannot
+be accessed via the procedures described previously in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. If a
+filename is found on the medium that would create an invalid filename,
+it is implementation-defined whether the data from the file is stored on
+the local file system and under what name it is stored. The
+.IR pax
+utility may choose to ignore these files as long as it produces an
+error indicating that the file is being ignored.
+.SS "cpio File Data"
+.P
+Following
+.IR c_name ,
+there shall be
+.IR c_filesize
+octets of data. Interpretation of such data occurs in a manner
+dependent on the file. For regular files, the data shall consist
+of the contents of the file. For symbolic links, the data shall
+consist of the contents of the symbolic link. If
+.IR c_filesize
+is zero, no data shall be contained in
+.IR c_filedata .
+.P
+When restoring from an archive:
+.IP " *" 4
+If the user does not have appropriate privileges to create a file of
+the specified type,
+.IR pax
+shall ignore the entry and write an error message to standard error.
+.IP " *" 4
+Only regular files and symbolic links have data to be restored. Presuming
+a regular file meets any selection criteria that might be imposed on
+the format-reading utility by the user, such data shall be restored.
+.IP " *" 4
+If a user does not have appropriate privileges to set a particular mode
+flag, the flag shall be ignored. Some of the mode flags in the archive
+format are not mentioned elsewhere in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. If the implementation does
+not support those flags, they may be ignored.
+.SS "cpio Special Entries"
+.P
+FIFO special files, directories, and the trailer shall be recorded with
+.IR c_filesize
+equal to zero. Symbolic links shall be recorded with
+.IR c_filesize
+equal to the length of the contents of the symbolic link.
+For other special files,
+.IR c_filesize
+is unspecified by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. The header for the next file entry in the
+archive shall be written directly after the last octet of the file
+entry preceding it. A header denoting the filename
+.BR TRAILER!!!
+shall indicate the end of the archive; the contents of octets in the
+last block of the archive following such a header are undefined.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+All files were processed successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+If
+.IR pax
+cannot create a file or a link when reading an archive or cannot find a
+file when writing an archive, or cannot preserve the user ID, group ID,
+or file mode when the
+.BR \(mip
+option is specified, a diagnostic message shall be written to standard
+error and a non-zero exit status shall be returned, but processing
+shall continue. In the case where
+.IR pax
+cannot create a link to a file,
+.IR pax
+shall not, by default, create a second copy of the file.
+.P
+If the extraction of a file from an archive is prematurely terminated
+by a signal or error,
+.IR pax
+may have only partially extracted the file or (if the
+.BR \(min
+option was not specified) may have extracted a file of the same name as
+that specified by the user, but which is not the file the user wanted.
+Additionally, the file modes of extracted directories may have
+additional bits from the S_IRWXU mask set as well as incorrect
+modification and access times.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Caution is advised when using the
+.BR \(mia
+option to append to a
+.IR cpio
+format archive. If any of the files being appended happen to be given
+the same
+.IR c_dev
+and
+.IR c_ino
+values as a file in the existing part of the archive, then they may be
+treated as links to that file on extraction. Thus, it is risky to use
+.BR \(mia
+with
+.IR cpio
+format except when it is done on the same system that the original
+archive was created on, and with the same
+.IR pax
+utility, and in the knowledge that there has been little or no file
+system activity since the original archive was created that could lead
+to any of the files appended being given the same
+.IR c_dev
+and
+.IR c_ino
+values as an unrelated file in the existing part of the archive. Also,
+when (intentionally) appending additional links to a file in the
+existing part of the archive, the
+.IR c_nlink
+values in the modified archive can be smaller than the number of links
+to the file in the archive, which may mean that the links are not
+preserved on extraction.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mip
+(privileges) option was invented to reconcile differences between
+historical
+.IR tar
+and
+.IR cpio
+implementations. In particular, the two utilities use
+.BR \(mim
+in diametrically opposed ways. The
+.BR \(mip
+option also provides a consistent means of extending the ways in which
+future file attributes can be addressed, such as for enhanced security
+systems or high-performance files. Although it may seem complex, there
+are really two modes that are most commonly used:
+.IP "\fB\(mip\ e\fR" 8
+``Preserve everything''. This would be used by the historical
+superuser, someone with all appropriate privileges, to preserve all
+aspects of the files as they are recorded in the archive. The
+.BR e
+flag is the sum of
+.BR o
+and
+.BR p ,
+and other implementation-defined attributes.
+.IP "\fB\(mip\ p\fR" 8
+``Preserve'' the file mode bits. This would be used by the user with
+regular privileges who wished to preserve aspects of the file other
+than the ownership. The file times are preserved by default, but two
+other flags are offered to disable these and use the time of
+extraction.
+.P
+The one pathname per line format of standard input precludes
+pathnames containing
+<newline>
+characters. Although such pathnames violate the portable filename
+guidelines, they may exist and their presence may inhibit usage of
+.IR pax
+within shell scripts. This problem is inherited from historical archive
+programs. The problem can be avoided by listing filename arguments on
+the command line instead of on standard input.
+.P
+It is almost certain that appropriate privileges are required for
+.IR pax
+to accomplish parts of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. Specifically, creating files of type
+block special or character special, restoring file access times unless
+the files are owned by the user (the
+.BR \(mit
+option), or preserving file owner, group, and mode (the
+.BR \(mip
+option) all probably require appropriate privileges.
+.P
+In
+.BR read
+mode, implementations are permitted to overwrite files when the archive
+has multiple members with the same name. This may fail if permissions
+on the first version of the file do not permit it to be overwritten.
+.P
+The
+.BR cpio
+and
+.BR ustar
+formats can only support files up to 8\|589\|934\|592 bytes
+(8 \(** 2^30) in size.
+.P
+When archives containing binary header information are listed , the
+filenames printed may cause strange behavior on some terminals.
+.P
+When all of the following are true:
+.IP " 1." 4
+A file of type directory is being placed into an archive.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The
+.BR ustar
+archive format is being used.
+.IP " 3." 4
+The pathname of the directory is less than or equal to 155 bytes long
+(it will fit in the
+.IR prefix
+field in the
+.BR ustar
+header block).
+.IP " 4." 4
+The last component of the pathname of the directory is longer than 100
+bytes long (it will not fit in the
+.IR name
+field in the
+.BR ustar
+header block).
+.P
+some implementations of the
+.IR pax
+utility will place the entire directory pathname in the
+.IR prefix
+field, set the
+.IR name
+field to an empty string, and place the directory in the archive.
+Other implementations of the
+.IR pax
+utility will give an error under these conditions because the
+.IR name
+field is not large enough to hold the last component of the directory name.
+This standard allows either behavior. However, when extracting a directory
+from a
+.BR ustar
+format archive, this standard requires that all implementations be able
+to extract a directory even if the
+.IR name
+field contains an empty string as long as the
+.IR prefix
+field does not also contain an empty string.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+pax \(miw \(mif /dev/rmt/1m .
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+copies the contents of the current directory to tape drive 1, medium
+density (assuming historical System V device naming procedures\(emthe
+historical BSD device name would be
+.BR /dev/rmt9 ).
+.P
+The following commands:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+mkdir \fInewdir\fR
+pax \(mirw \fIolddir newdir\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+copy the
+.IR olddir
+directory hierarchy to
+.IR newdir .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+pax \(mir \(mis ',^//*usr//*,,' \(mif a.pax
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+reads the archive
+.BR a.pax ,
+with all files rooted in
+.BR /usr
+in the archive extracted relative to the current directory.
+.P
+Using the option:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\(mio listopt="%M %(atime)T %(size)D %(name)s"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+overrides the default output description in Standard Output and instead
+writes:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\(mirw\(mirw\(mi\|\(mi\|\(mi Jan 12 15:53 2003 1492 /usr/foo/bar
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Using the options:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\(mio listopt='%L\et%(size)D\en%.7' \e
+\(mio listopt='(name)s\en%(atime)T\en%T'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+overrides the default output description in Standard Output and instead
+writes:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+/usr/foo/bar \(mi> /tmp   1492
+/usr/fo
+Jan 12 15:53 1991
+Jan 31 15:53 2003
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR pax
+utility was new for the ISO\ POSIX\(hy2:\|1993 standard. It represents a peaceful
+compromise between advocates of the historical
+.IR tar
+and
+.IR cpio
+utilities.
+.P
+A fundamental difference between
+.IR cpio
+and
+.IR tar
+was in the way directories were treated. The
+.IR cpio
+utility did not treat directories differently from other files, and to
+select a directory and its contents required that each file in the
+hierarchy be explicitly specified. For
+.IR tar ,
+a directory matched every file in the file hierarchy it rooted.
+.P
+The
+.IR pax
+utility offers both interfaces; by default, directories map into the
+file hierarchy they root. The
+.BR \(mid
+option causes
+.IR pax
+to skip any file not explicitly referenced, as
+.IR cpio
+historically did. The
+.IR tar
+.BR \(mi \c
+.IR style
+behavior was chosen as the default because it was believed that this
+was the more common usage and because
+.IR tar
+is the more commonly available interface, as it was historically
+provided on both System V and BSD implementations.
+.P
+The data interchange format specification in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that
+processes with ``appropriate privileges'' shall always restore the
+ownership and permissions of extracted files exactly as archived. If
+viewed from the historic equivalence between superuser and
+``appropriate privileges'', there are two problems
+with this requirement. First, users running as superusers may
+unknowingly set dangerous permissions on extracted files. Second, it is
+needlessly limiting, in that superusers cannot extract files and own
+them as superuser unless the archive was created by the superuser. (It
+should be noted that restoration of ownerships and permissions for the
+superuser, by default, is historical practice in
+.IR cpio ,
+but not in
+.Im tar .)
+In order to avoid these two problems, the
+.IR pax
+specification has an additional ``privilege'' mechanism, the
+.BR \(mip
+option. Only a
+.IR pax
+invocation with the privileges needed, and which has the
+.BR \(mip
+option set using the
+.BR e
+specification character, has appropriate privileges to restore
+full ownership and permission information.
+.P
+Note also that this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that the file ownership and access
+permissions shall be set, on extraction, in the same fashion as the
+\fIcreat\fR()
+function when provided with the mode stored in the archive. This means
+that the file creation mask of the user is applied to the file
+permissions.
+.P
+Users should note that directories may be created by
+.IR pax
+while extracting files with permissions that are different from those
+that existed at the time the archive was created. When extracting
+sensitive information into a directory hierarchy that no longer exists,
+users are encouraged to set their file creation mask appropriately to
+protect these files during extraction.
+.P
+The table of contents output is written to standard output to
+facilitate pipeline processing.
+.P
+An early proposal had hard links displaying for all pathnames. This
+was removed because it complicates the output of the case where
+.BR \(miv
+is not specified and does not match historical
+.IR cpio
+usage. The hard-link information is available in the
+.BR \(miv
+display.
+.P
+The description of the
+.BR \(mil
+option allows implementations to make hard links to symbolic links.
+Earlier versions of this standard did not specify any way to create a
+hard link to a symbolic link, but many implementations provided this
+capability as an extension. If there are hard links to symbolic links
+when an archive is created, the implementation is required to archive
+the hard link in the archive (unless
+.BR \(miH
+or
+.BR \(miL
+is specified). When in
+.BR read
+mode and in
+.BR copy
+mode, implementations supporting hard links to symbolic links should
+use them when appropriate.
+.P
+The archive formats inherited from the POSIX.1\(hy1990 standard have certain restrictions
+that have been brought along from historical usage. For example, there
+are restrictions on the length of pathnames stored in the archive.
+When
+.IR pax
+is used in
+.BR copy (\c
+.BR \(mirw )
+mode (copying directory hierarchies), the ability to use extensions
+from the
+.BR \(mix \c
+.BR pax
+format overcomes these restrictions.
+.P
+The default
+.IR blocksize
+value of 5\|120 bytes for
+.IR cpio
+was selected because it is one of the standard block-size values for
+.IR cpio ,
+set when the
+.BR \(miB
+option is specified. (The other default block-size value for
+.IR cpio
+is 512 bytes, and this was considered to be too small.) The default
+block value of 10\|240 bytes for
+.IR tar
+was selected because that is the standard block-size value for BSD
+.IR tar .
+The maximum block size of 32\|256 bytes (2\s-3\u15\d\s+3\(mi512 bytes)
+is the largest multiple of 512 bytes that fits into a signed 16-bit
+tape controller transfer register. There are known limitations in some
+historical systems that would prevent larger blocks from being
+accepted. Historical values were chosen to improve compatibility with
+historical scripts using
+.IR dd
+or similar utilities to manipulate archives. Also, default block sizes
+for any file type other than character special file has been deleted
+from this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 as unimportant and not likely to affect the structure of the
+resulting archive.
+.P
+Implementations are permitted to modify the block-size value based on
+the archive format or the device to which the archive is being
+written. This is to provide implementations with the opportunity to
+take advantage of special types of devices, and it should not be used
+without a great deal of consideration as it almost certainly decreases
+archive portability.
+.P
+The intended use of the
+.BR \(min
+option was to permit extraction of one or more files from the archive
+without processing the entire archive. This was viewed by the standard
+developers as offering significant performance advantages over
+historical implementations. The
+.BR \(min
+option in early proposals had three effects; the first was to cause
+special characters in patterns to not be treated specially. The second
+was to cause only the first file that matched a pattern to be
+extracted. The third was to cause
+.IR pax
+to write a diagnostic message to standard error when no file was found
+matching a specified pattern. Only the second behavior is retained by
+this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, for many reasons. First, it is in general not acceptable for a
+single option to have multiple effects. Second, the ability to make
+pattern matching characters act as normal characters
+is useful for parts of
+.IR pax
+other than file extraction. Third, a finer degree of control over the
+special characters is useful because users may wish to normalize only a
+single special character in a single filename. Fourth, given a more
+general escape mechanism, the previous behavior of the
+.BR \(min
+option can be easily obtained using the
+.BR \(mis
+option or a
+.IR sed
+script. Finally, writing a diagnostic message when a pattern specified
+by the user is unmatched by any file is useful behavior in all cases.
+.P
+In this version, the
+.BR \(min
+was removed from the
+.BR copy
+mode synopsis of
+.IR pax ;
+it is inapplicable because there are no pattern operands specified in
+this mode.
+.P
+There is another method than
+.IR pax
+for copying subtrees in POSIX.1\(hy2008 described as part of the
+.IR cp
+utility. Both methods are historical practice:
+.IR cp
+provides a simpler, more intuitive interface, while
+.IR pax
+offers a finer granularity of control. Each provides additional
+functionality to the other; in particular,
+.IR pax
+maintains the hard-link structure of the hierarchy while
+.IR cp
+does not. It is the intention of the standard developers that the
+results be similar (using appropriate option combinations in both
+utilities). The results are not required to be identical; there seemed
+insufficient gain to applications to balance the difficulty of
+implementations having to guarantee that the results would be exactly
+identical.
+.P
+A single archive may span more than one file. It is suggested that
+implementations provide informative messages to the user on standard
+error whenever the archive file is changed.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mid
+option (do not create intermediate directories not listed in the
+archive) found in early proposals was originally provided as a
+complement to the historic
+.BR \(mid
+option of
+.IR cpio .
+It has been deleted.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mis
+option in early proposals specified a subset of the substitution
+command from the
+.IR ed
+utility. As there was no reason for only a subset to be supported, the
+.BR \(mis
+option is now compatible with the current
+.IR ed
+specification. Since the delimiter can be any non-null character, the
+following usage with single
+<space>
+characters is valid:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+pax \(mis " foo bar " ...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mit
+description is worded so as to note that this may cause the access time
+update caused by some other activity (which occurs while the file is
+being read) to be overwritten.
+.P
+The default behavior of
+.IR pax
+with regard to file modification times is the same as historical
+implementations of
+.IR tar .
+It is not the historical behavior of
+.IR cpio .
+.P
+Because the
+.BR \(mii
+option uses
+.BR /dev/tty ,
+utilities without a controlling terminal are not able to use this
+option.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miy
+option, found in early proposals, has been deleted because a line
+containing a single
+<period>
+for the
+.BR \(mii
+option has equivalent functionality. The special lines for the
+.BR \(mii
+option (a single
+<period>
+and the empty line) are historical practice in
+.IR cpio .
+.P
+In early drafts, a
+.BR \(mie \c
+.IR charmap
+option was included to increase portability of files between systems
+using different coded character sets. This option was omitted because
+it was apparent that consensus could not be formed for it. In this
+version, the use of UTF\(hy8 should be an adequate substitute.
+.P
+The ISO\ POSIX\(hy2:\|1993 standard and ISO\ POSIX\(hy1 standard requirements for
+.IR pax ,
+however, made it very difficult to create a single archive containing
+files created using extended characters provided by different locales.
+This version adds the
+.BR hdrcharset
+keyword to make it possible to archive files in these cases without
+dropping files due to translation errors.
+.P
+Translating filenames and other attributes from a locale's encoding to
+UTF\(hy8 and then back again can lose information, as the resulting
+filename might not be byte-for-byte equivalent to the original. To
+avoid this problem, users can specify the
+.BR \(mio
+.BR hdrcharset=binary
+option, which will cause the resulting archive to use binary
+format for all names and attributes. Such archives are not portable
+among hosts that use different native encodings (e.g., EBCDIC
+\fIversus\fR ASCII-based encodings), but they will allow interchange
+among the vast majority of POSIX file systems in practical use. Also,
+the
+.BR \(mio
+.BR hdrcharset=binary
+option will cause
+.IR pax
+in
+.BR copy
+mode to behave more like other standard utilities such as
+.IR cp .
+.P
+If the values specified by the
+.BR \(mio
+.BR exthdr.name=value ,
+.BR \(mio
+.BR globexthdr.name=value ,
+or by
+.BR $TMPDIR
+(if
+.BR \(mio
+.BR globexthdr.name
+is not specified) require a character encoding other than that
+described in the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard, a
+.BR path
+extended header record will have to be created for the file. If a
+.BR hdrcharset
+extended header record is active for such headers, it will determine
+the codeset used for the value field in these extended
+.BR path
+header records. These
+.BR path
+extended header records always need to be created when writing an
+archive even if
+.BR hdrcharset=binary
+has been specified and would contain the same (binary) data that
+appears in the
+.BR ustar
+header record prefix and
+.IR name
+fields. (In other words, an extended header
+.BR path
+record is always required to be generated if the
+.IR prefix
+or
+.IR name
+fields contain non-ASCII characters even when
+.BR hdrcharset=binary
+is also in effect for that file.)
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mik
+option was added to address international concerns about the dangers
+involved in the character set transformations of
+.BR \(mie
+(if the target character set were different from the source, the
+filenames might be transformed into names matching existing files) and
+also was made more general to protect files transferred between file
+systems with different
+{NAME_MAX}
+values (truncating a filename on a smaller system might also
+inadvertently overwrite existing files). As stated, it prevents any
+overwriting, even if the target file is older than the source. This
+version adds more granularity of options to solve this problem by
+introducing the
+.BR \(mio \c
+.BR invalid=option \c
+\(emspecifically the
+.BR UTF\(hy8
+and
+.BR binary
+actions. (Note that an existing file is still subject to overwriting in
+this case. The
+.BR \(mik
+option closes that loophole.)
+.P
+Some of the file characteristics referenced in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 might not be
+supported by some archive formats. For example, neither the
+.BR tar
+nor
+.BR cpio
+formats contain the file access time. For this reason, the
+.BR e
+specification character has been provided, intended to cause all file
+characteristics specified in the archive to be retained.
+.P
+It is required that extracted directories, by default, have their
+access and modification times and permissions set to the values
+specified in the archive. This has obvious problems in that the
+directories are almost certainly modified after being extracted and
+that directory permissions may not permit file creation. One possible
+solution is to create directories with the mode specified in the
+archive, as modified by the
+.IR umask
+of the user, with sufficient permissions to allow file creation. After
+all files have been extracted,
+.IR pax
+would then reset the access and modification times and permissions as
+necessary.
+.P
+The list-mode formatting description borrows heavily from the one
+defined by the
+.IR printf
+utility. However, since there is no separate operand list to get
+conversion arguments, the format was extended to allow specifying the
+name of the conversion argument as part of the conversion
+specification.
+.P
+The
+.BR T
+conversion specifier allows time fields to be displayed in any of
+the date formats. Unlike the
+.IR ls
+utility,
+.IR pax
+does not adjust the format when the date is less than six months in the
+past. This makes parsing the output more predictable.
+.P
+The
+.BR D
+conversion specifier handles the ability to display the major/minor
+or file size, as with
+.IR ls ,
+by using \fR%\(mi8(\fIsize\fR)D\fR.
+.P
+The
+.BR L
+conversion specifier handles the
+.IR ls
+display for symbolic links.
+.P
+Conversion specifiers were added to generate existing known types used
+for
+.IR ls .
+.SS "pax Interchange Format"
+.P
+The new POSIX data interchange format was developed primarily to
+satisfy international concerns that the
+.BR ustar
+and
+.BR cpio
+formats did not provide for file, user, and group names encoded in
+characters outside a subset of the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard. The standard developers
+realized that this new POSIX data interchange format should be very
+extensible because there were other requirements they foresaw in the
+near future:
+.IP " *" 4
+Support international character encodings and locale information
+.IP " *" 4
+Support security information (ACLs, and so on)
+.IP " *" 4
+Support future file types, such as realtime or contiguous files
+.IP " *" 4
+Include data areas for implementation use
+.IP " *" 4
+Support systems with words larger than 32 bits and timers with
+subsecond granularity
+.P
+The following were not goals for this format because these are better
+handled by separate utilities or are inappropriate for a portable
+format:
+.IP " *" 4
+Encryption
+.IP " *" 4
+Compression
+.IP " *" 4
+Data translation between locales and codesets
+.IP " *" 4
+.IR inode
+storage
+.P
+The format chosen to support the goals is an extension of the
+.BR ustar
+format. Of the two formats previously available, only the
+.BR ustar
+format was selected for extensions because:
+.IP " *" 4
+It was easier to extend in an upwards-compatible way. It offered version
+flags and header block type fields with room for future
+standardization. The
+.BR cpio
+format, while possessing a more flexible file naming methodology, could
+not be extended without breaking some theoretical implementation
+or using a dummy filename that could be a legitimate filename.
+.IP " *" 4
+Industry experience since the original ``\c
+.IR tar
+wars'' fought in developing the ISO\ POSIX\(hy1 standard has clearly been in favor of the
+.BR ustar
+format, which is generally the default output format selected for
+.IR pax
+implementations on new systems.
+.P
+The new format was designed with one additional goal in mind:
+reasonable behavior when an older
+.IR tar
+or
+.IR pax
+utility happened to read an archive. Since the POSIX.1\(hy1990 standard mandated that a
+``format-reading utility'' had to treat unrecognized
+.IR typeflag
+values as regular files, this allowed the format to include all the
+extended information in a pseudo-regular file that preceded each real
+file. An option is given that allows the archive creator to set up
+reasonable names for these files on the older systems. Also, the
+normative text suggests that reasonable file access values be used for
+this
+.BR ustar
+header block. Making these header files inaccessible for convenient
+reading and deleting would not be reasonable. File permissions of 600
+or 700 are suggested.
+.P
+The
+.BR ustar
+.IR typeflag
+field was used to accommodate the additional functionality of the new
+format rather than magic or version because the POSIX.1\(hy1990 standard (and, by
+reference, the previous version of
+.IR pax ),
+mandated the behavior of the format-reading utility when it encountered
+an unknown
+.IR typeflag ,
+but was silent about the other two fields.
+.P
+Early proposals for the first version of this standard contained a proposed
+archive format that was based on compatibility with the standard for
+tape files (ISO\ 1001, similar to the format used historically on many
+mainframes and minicomputers). This format was overly complex and required
+considerable overhead in volume and header records. Furthermore, the
+standard developers felt that it would not be acceptable to the community
+of POSIX developers, so it was later changed to be a format more closely
+related to historical practice on POSIX systems.
+.P
+The prefix and name split of pathnames in
+.BR ustar
+was replaced by the single path extended header record for simplicity.
+.P
+The concept of a global extended header (\c
+.IR typeflag \c
+.BR g )
+was controversial. If this were applied to an archive being recorded on
+magnetic tape, a few unreadable blocks at the beginning of the tape
+could be a serious problem; a utility attempting to extract as many
+files as possible from a damaged archive could lose a large percentage
+of file header information in this case. However, if the archive were
+on a reliable medium, such as a CD\(hyROM, the global extended header
+offers considerable potential size reductions by eliminating redundant
+information. Thus, the text warns against using the global method for
+unreliable media and provides a method for implanting global
+information in the extended header for each file, rather than in the
+.IR typeflag
+.BR g
+records.
+.P
+No facility for data translation or filtering on a per-file basis is
+included because the standard developers could not invent an interface
+that would allow this in an efficient manner. If a filter, such as
+encryption or compression, is to be applied to all the files, it is
+more efficient to apply the filter to the entire archive as a single
+file. The standard developers considered interfaces that would invoke a
+shell script for each file going into or out of the archive, but the
+system overhead in this approach was considered to be too high.
+.P
+One such approach would be to have
+.BR filter=
+records that give a pathname for an executable. When the program is
+invoked, the file and archive would be open for standard input/output
+and all the header fields would be available as environment variables
+or command-line arguments. The standard developers did discuss such
+schemes, but they were omitted from POSIX.1\(hy2008 due to concerns about
+excessive overhead. Also, the program itself would need to be in the
+archive if it were to be used portably.
+.P
+There is currently no portable means of identifying the character
+set(s) used for a file in the file system. Therefore,
+.IR pax
+has not been given a mechanism to generate charset records
+automatically. The only portable means of doing this is for the user to
+write the archive using the
+.BR \(mio \c
+.BR charset=string
+command line option. This assumes that all of the files in the archive
+use the same encoding. The ``implementation-defined'' text is
+included to allow for a system that can identify the encodings used for
+each of its files.
+.P
+The table of standards that accompanies the charset record description
+is acknowledged to be very limited. Only a limited number of character
+set standards is reasonable for maximal interchange. Any character set
+is, of course, possible by prior agreement. It was suggested that
+EBCDIC be listed, but it was omitted because it is not defined by a
+formal standard. Formal standards, and then only those with reasonably
+large followings, can be included here, simply as a matter of
+practicality. The <\fIvalue\fP>s represent names of officially
+registered character sets in the format required by the ISO\ 2375:\|1985 standard.
+.P
+The normal
+<comma>
+or
+<blank>-separated
+list rules are not followed in the case of keyword options to allow
+ease of argument parsing for
+.IR getopts .
+.P
+Further information on character encodings is in
+.IR "pax Archive Character Set Encoding/Decoding".
+.P
+The standard developers have reserved keyword name space for vendor
+extensions. It is suggested that the format to be used is:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIVENDOR.keyword\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR VENDOR
+is the name of the vendor or organization in all uppercase letters. It
+is further suggested that the keyword following the
+<period>
+be named differently than any of the standard keywords so that it could
+be used for future standardization, if appropriate, by omitting the
+.IR VENDOR
+prefix.
+.P
+The <\fIlength\fP> field in the extended header record was included to
+make it simpler to step through the records, even if a record contains
+an unknown format (to a particular
+.IR pax )
+with complex interactions of special characters. It also provides a
+minor integrity checkpoint within the records to aid a program
+attempting to recover files from a damaged archive.
+.P
+There are no extended header versions of the
+.IR devmajor
+and
+.IR devminor
+fields because the unspecified format
+.BR ustar
+header field should be sufficient. If they are not, vendor-specific
+extended keywords (such as
+.IR VENDOR.devmajor )
+should be used.
+.P
+Device and
+.IR i -number
+labeling of files was not adopted from
+.IR cpio ;
+files are interchanged strictly on a symbolic name basis, as in
+.BR ustar .
+.P
+Just as with the
+.BR ustar
+format descriptions, the new format makes no special arrangements for
+multi-volume archives. Each of the
+.IR pax
+archive types is assumed to be inside a single POSIX file and splitting
+that file over multiple volumes (diskettes, tape cartridges, and so
+on), processing their labels, and mounting each in the proper sequence
+are considered to be implementation details that cannot be described
+portably.
+.P
+The
+.BR pax
+format is intended for interchange, not only for backup on a single
+(family of) systems. It is not as densely packed as might be possible
+for backup:
+.IP " *" 4
+It contains information as coded characters that could be coded in
+binary.
+.IP " *" 4
+It identifies extended records with name fields that could be omitted
+in favor of a fixed-field layout.
+.IP " *" 4
+It translates names into a portable character set and identifies
+locale-related information, both of which are probably unnecessary for
+backup.
+.P
+The requirements on restoring from an archive are slightly different
+from the historical wording, allowing for non-monolithic privilege to
+bring forward as much as possible. In particular, attributes such as
+``high performance file'' might be broadly but not universally granted
+while set-user-ID or
+\fIchown\fR()
+might be much more restricted. There is no implication in POSIX.1\(hy2008 that
+the security information be honored after it is restored to the file
+hierarchy, in spite of what might be improperly inferred by the silence
+on that topic. That is a topic for another standard.
+.P
+Links are recorded in the fashion described here because a link can be
+to any file type. It is desirable in general to be able to restore part
+of an archive selectively and restore all of those files completely. If
+the data is not associated with each link, it is not possible to do
+this. However, the data associated with a file can be large, and when
+selective restoration is not needed, this can be a significant burden.
+The archive is structured so that files that have no associated data
+can always be restored by the name of any link name of any link, and
+the user may choose whether data is recorded with each instance of a
+file that contains data. The format permits mixing of both types of
+links in a single archive; this can be done for special needs, and
+.IR pax
+is expected to interpret such archives on input properly, despite the
+fact that there is no
+.IR pax
+option that would force this mixed case on output. (When
+.BR \(mio
+.BR linkdata
+is used, the output must contain the duplicate data, but the
+implementation is free to include it or omit it when
+.BR \(mio
+.BR linkdata
+is not used.)
+.P
+The time values are included as extended header records for those
+implementations needing more than the eleven octal digits allowed by
+the
+.BR ustar
+format. Portable file timestamps cannot be negative. If
+.IR pax
+encounters a file with a negative timestamp in
+.BR copy
+or
+.BR write
+mode, it can reject the file, substitute a non-negative timestamp, or
+generate a non-portable timestamp with a leading
+.BR '\(mi' .
+Even though some implementations can support finer file-time
+granularities than seconds, the normative text requires support only
+for seconds since the Epoch because the ISO\ POSIX\(hy1 standard states them that way. The
+.BR ustar
+format includes only
+.IR mtime ;
+the new format adds
+.IR atime
+and
+.IR ctime
+for symmetry. The
+.IR atime
+access time restored to the file system will be affected by the
+.BR \(mip
+.BR a
+and
+.BR \(mip
+.BR e
+options. The
+.IR ctime
+creation time (actually
+.IR inode
+modification time) is described with appropriate privileges so that
+it can be ignored when writing to the file system. POSIX does not
+provide a portable means to change file creation time. Nothing is
+intended to prevent a non-portable implementation of
+.IR pax
+from restoring the value.
+.P
+The
+.IR gid ,
+.IR size ,
+and
+.IR uid
+extended header records were included to allow expansion beyond the
+sizes specified in the regular
+.IR tar
+header. New file system architectures are emerging that will exhaust
+the 12-digit size field. There are probably not many systems requiring
+more than 8 digits for user and group IDs, but the extended header
+values were included for completeness, allowing overrides for all of
+the decimal values in the
+.IR tar
+header.
+.P
+The standard developers intended to describe the effective results of
+.IR pax
+with regard to file ownerships and permissions; implementations are not
+restricted in timing or sequencing the restoration of such, provided
+the results are as specified.
+.P
+Much of the text describing the extended headers refers to use in ``\c
+.BR write
+or
+.BR copy
+modes''. The
+.BR copy
+mode references are due to the normative text: ``The effect of the
+copy shall be as if the copied files were written to an archive file
+and then subsequently extracted .\|.\|.''. There is certainly no way to
+test whether
+.IR pax
+is actually generating the extended headers in
+.BR copy
+mode, but the effects must be as if it had.
+.SS "pax Archive Character Set Encoding/Decoding"
+.P
+There is a need to exchange archives of files between systems of
+different native codesets. Filenames, group names, and user names must
+be preserved to the fullest extent possible when an archive is read on
+the receiving platform. Translation of the contents of files is not
+within the scope of the
+.IR pax
+utility.
+.P
+There will also be the need to represent characters that are not
+available on the receiving platform. These unsupported characters
+cannot be automatically folded to the local set of characters due to
+the chance of collisions. This could result in overwriting previous
+extracted files from the archive or pre-existing files on the system.
+.P
+For these reasons, the codeset used to represent characters within the
+extended header records of the
+.IR pax
+archive must be sufficiently rich to handle all commonly used character
+sets. The fields requiring translation include, at a minimum,
+filenames, user names, group names, and link pathnames. Implementations
+may wish to have localized extended keywords that use non-portable
+characters.
+.P
+The standard developers considered the following options:
+.IP " *" 4
+The archive creator specifies the well-defined name of the source
+codeset. The receiver must then recognize the codeset name and perform
+the appropriate translations to the destination codeset.
+.IP " *" 4
+The archive creator includes within the archive the character mapping
+table for the source codeset used to encode extended header records.
+The receiver must then read the character mapping table and perform the
+appropriate translations to the destination codeset.
+.IP " *" 4
+The archive creator translates the extended header records in the
+source codeset into a canonical form. The receiver must then perform
+the appropriate translations to the destination codeset.
+.P
+The approach that incorporates the name of the source codeset poses the
+problem of codeset name registration, and makes the archive useless to
+.IR pax
+archive decoders that do not recognize that codeset.
+.P
+Because parts of an archive may be corrupted, the standard developers
+felt that including the character map of the source codeset was too
+fragile. The loss of this one key component could result in making the
+entire archive useless. (The difference between this and the global
+extended header decision was that the latter has a
+workaround\(emduplicating extended header records on unreliable
+media\(embut this would be too burdensome for large character set
+maps.)
+.P
+Both of the above approaches also put an undue burden on the
+.IR pax
+archive receiver to handle the cross-product of all source and
+destination codesets.
+.P
+To simplify the translation from the source codeset to the canonical
+form and from the canonical form to the destination codeset, the
+standard developers decided that the internal representation should be
+a stateless encoding. A stateless encoding is one where each codepoint
+has the same meaning, without regard to the decoder being in a specific
+state. An example of a stateful encoding would be the Japanese
+Shift-JIS; an example of a stateless encoding would be the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard
+(equivalent to 7-bit ASCII).
+.P
+For these reasons, the standard developers decided to adopt a canonical
+format for the representation of file information strings. The obvious,
+well-endorsed candidate is the ISO/IEC\ 10646\(hy1:\|2000 standard (based in part on Unicode), which
+can be used to represent the characters of virtually all standardized
+character sets. The standard developers initially agreed upon using
+UCS2 (16-bit Unicode) as the internal representation. This repertoire
+of characters provides a sufficiently rich set to represent all
+commonly-used codesets.
+.P
+However, the standard developers found that the 16-bit Unicode
+representation had some problems. It forced the issue of standardizing
+byte ordering. The 2-byte length of each character made the extended
+header records twice as long for the case of strings coded entirely
+from historical 7-bit ASCII. For these reasons, the standard developers
+chose the UTF\(hy8 defined in the ISO/IEC\ 10646\(hy1:\|2000 standard. This multi-byte representation
+encodes UCS2 or UCS4 characters reliably and deterministically,
+eliminating the need for a canonical byte ordering. In addition, NUL
+octets and other characters possibly confusing to POSIX file systems do
+not appear, except to represent themselves. It was realized that
+certain national codesets take up more space after the encoding, due to
+their placement within the UCS range; it was felt that the usefulness
+of the encoding of the names outweighs the disadvantage of size
+increase for file, user, and group names.
+.P
+The encoding of UTF\(hy8 is as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+UCS4 Hex Encoding  UTF-8 Binary Encoding
+.P
+00000000-0000007F  0xxxxxxx
+00000080-000007FF  110xxxxx 10xxxxxx
+00000800-0000FFFF  1110xxxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx
+00010000-001FFFFF  11110xxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx
+00200000-03FFFFFF  111110xx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx
+04000000-7FFFFFFF  1111110x 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where each
+.BR 'x' 
+represents a bit value from the character being translated.
+.SS "ustar Interchange Format"
+.P
+The description of the
+.BR ustar
+format reflects numerous enhancements over pre-1988 versions of the
+historical
+.IR tar
+utility. The goal of these changes was not only to provide the
+functional enhancements desired, but also to retain compatibility
+between new and old versions. This compatibility has been retained.
+Archives written using the old archive format are compatible with the
+new format.
+.P
+Implementors should be aware that the previous file format did not
+include a mechanism to archive directory type files. For this reason,
+the convention of using a filename ending with
+<slash>
+was adopted to specify a directory on the archive.
+.P
+The total size of the
+.IR name
+and
+.IR prefix
+fields have been set to meet the minimum requirements for
+{PATH_MAX}.
+If a pathname will fit within the
+.IR name
+field, it is recommended that the pathname be stored there without the
+use of the
+.IR prefix
+field. Although the name field is known to be too small to contain
+{PATH_MAX}
+characters, the value was not changed in this version of the archive
+file format to retain backwards-compatibility, and instead the prefix
+was introduced. Also, because of the earlier version of the format,
+there is no way to remove the restriction on the
+.IR linkname
+field being limited in size to just that of the
+.IR name
+field.
+.P
+The
+.IR size
+field is required to be meaningful in all implementation extensions,
+although it could be zero. This is required so that the data blocks can
+always be properly counted.
+.P
+It is suggested that if device special files need to be represented
+that cannot be represented in the standard format, that one of the
+extension types (\c
+.BR A \(hy\c
+.BR Z )
+be used, and that the additional information for the special file be
+represented as data and be reflected in the
+.IR size
+field.
+.P
+Attempting to restore a special file type, where it is converted to
+ordinary data and conflicts with an existing filename, need not be
+specially detected by the utility. If run as an ordinary user,
+.IR pax
+should not be able to overwrite the entries in, for example,
+.BR /dev
+in any case (whether the file is converted to another type or not). If
+run as a privileged user, it should be able to do so, and it would be
+considered a bug if it did not. The same is true of ordinary data files
+and similarly named special files; it is impossible to anticipate the
+needs of the user (who could really intend to overwrite the file), so
+the behavior should be predictable (and thus regular) and rely on the
+protection system as required.
+.P
+The value 7 in the
+.IR typeflag
+field is intended to define how contiguous files can be stored in a
+.BR ustar
+archive. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not require the contiguous file extension, but does
+define a standard way of archiving such files so that all conforming
+systems can interpret these file types in a meaningful and consistent
+manner. On a system that does not support extended file types, the
+.IR pax
+utility should do the best it can with the file and go on to the next.
+.P
+The file protection modes are those conventionally used by the
+.IR ls
+utility. This is extended beyond the usage in the ISO\ POSIX\(hy2 standard to support the
+``shared text'' or ``sticky'' bit. It is intended that the conformance
+document should not document anything beyond the existence of and
+support of such a mode. Further extensions are expected to these bits,
+particularly with overloading the set-user-ID and set-group-ID flags.
+.SS "cpio Interchange Format"
+.P
+The reference to appropriate privileges in the
+.BR cpio
+format refers to an error on standard output; the
+.BR ustar
+format does not make comparable statements.
+.P
+The model for this format was the historical System V
+.IR cpio \c
+.BR \(mic
+data interchange format. This model documents the portable version of
+the
+.BR cpio
+format and not the binary version. It has the flexibility to transfer
+data of any type described within POSIX.1\(hy2008, yet is extensible to transfer
+data types specific to extensions beyond POSIX.1\(hy2008 (for example, contiguous
+files). Because it describes existing practice, there is no question of
+maintaining upwards-compatibility.
+.SS "cpio Header"
+.P
+There has been some concern that the size of the
+.IR c_ino
+field of the header is too small to handle those systems that have very
+large
+.IR inode
+numbers. However, the
+.IR c_ino
+field in the header is used strictly as a hard-link resolution
+mechanism for archives. It is not necessarily the same value as the
+.IR inode
+number of the file in the location from which that file is extracted.
+.P
+The name
+.IR c_magic
+is based on historical usage.
+.SS "cpio Filename"
+.P
+For most historical implementations of the
+.IR cpio
+utility,
+{PATH_MAX}
+octets can be used to describe the pathname without the addition of
+any other header fields (the NUL character would be included in this
+count).
+{PATH_MAX}
+is the minimum value for pathname size, documented as 256 bytes.
+However, an implementation may use
+.IR c_namesize
+to determine the exact length of the pathname. With the current
+description of the
+.IR <cpio.h> 
+header, this pathname size can be as large as a number that is
+described in six octal digits.
+.P
+Two values are documented under the
+.IR c_mode
+field values to provide for extensibility for known file types:
+.IP "\fB0110\ 000\fP" 10
+Reserved for contiguous files. The implementation may treat the rest of
+the information for this archive like a regular file. If this file type
+is undefined, the implementation may create the file as a regular
+file.
+.P
+This provides for extensibility of the
+.BR cpio
+format while allowing for the ability to read old archives. Files of an
+unknown type may be read as ``regular files'' on some implementations.
+On a system that does not support extended file types, the
+.IR pax
+utility should do the best it can with the file and go on to the next.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language",
+.IR "\fIcp\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIed\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIgetopts\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIls\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIprintf\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.169" ", " "File Mode Bits",
+.IR "Chapter 5" ", " "File Format Notation",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+.IR "\fB<cpio.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIchown\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcreat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfstatat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImkdir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImkfifo\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIutime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/pr.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/pr.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7280c6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/pr.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,569 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PR "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pr
+\(em print files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+pr \fB[\fR+\fIpage\fB] [\fR\(mi\fIcolumn\fB] [\fR\(miadFmrt\fB] [\fR\(mie\fB[\fIchar\fB][\fIgap\fB]] [\fR\(mih \fIheader\fB] [\fR\(mii\fB[\fIchar\fB][\fIgap\fB]]
+    [\fR\(mil \fIlines\fB] [\fR\(min\fB[\fIchar\fB][\fIwidth\fB]] [\fR\(mio \fIoffset\fB] [\fR\(mis\fB[\fIchar\fB]] [\fR\(miw \fIwidth\fB] [\fR\(mifp\fB]
+    [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR pr
+utility is a printing and pagination filter. If multiple input files
+are specified, each shall be read, formatted, and written to standard
+output. By default, the input shall be separated into 66-line pages,
+each with:
+.IP " *" 4
+A 5-line header that includes the page number, date, time, and
+the pathname of the file
+.IP " *" 4
+A 5-line trailer consisting of blank lines
+.P
+If standard output is associated with a terminal, diagnostic messages
+shall be deferred until the
+.IR pr
+utility has completed processing.
+.P
+When options specifying multi-column output are specified, output text
+columns shall be of equal width; input lines that do not fit into a
+text column shall be truncated. By default, text columns shall be
+separated with at least one
+<blank>.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR pr
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except that: the
+.IR page
+option has a
+.BR '\(pl' 
+delimiter;
+.IR page
+and
+.IR column
+can be multi-digit numbers; some of the option-arguments are optional;
+and some of the option-arguments cannot be specified as separate
+arguments from the preceding option letter. In particular, the
+.BR \(mis
+option does not allow the option letter to be separated from its
+argument, and the options
+.BR \(mie ,
+.BR \(mii ,
+and
+.BR \(min
+require that both arguments, if present, not be separated from the
+option letter.
+.P
+The following options shall be supported. In the following option
+descriptions,
+.IR column ,
+.IR lines ,
+.IR offset ,
+.IR page ,
+and
+.IR width
+are positive decimal integers;
+.IR gap
+is a non-negative decimal integer.
+.IP "\fB+\fIpage\fR" 10
+Begin output at page number
+.IR page
+of the formatted input.
+.IP "\fB\(mi\fIcolumn\fR" 10
+Produce multi-column output that is arranged in
+.IR column
+columns (the default shall be 1) and is written down each column in the
+order in which the text is received from the input file. This option
+should not be used with
+.BR \(mim .
+The options
+.BR \(mie
+and
+.BR \(mii
+shall be assumed for multiple text-column output. Whether or not text
+columns are produced with identical vertical lengths is unspecified,
+but a text column shall never exceed the length of the page (see the
+.BR \(mil
+option). When used with
+.BR \(mit ,
+use the minimum number of lines to write the output.
+.IP "\fB\(mia\fP" 10
+Modify the effect of the
+.BR \(mi \c
+.IR column
+option so that the columns are filled across the page in a round-robin
+order (for example, when
+.IR column
+is 2, the first input line heads column 1, the second heads column 2,
+the third is the second line in column 1, and so on).
+.IP "\fB\(mid\fP" 10
+Produce output that is double-spaced; append an extra
+<newline>
+following every
+<newline>
+found in the input.
+.IP "\fB\(mie[\fIchar\fB][\fIgap\fB]\fR" 10
+.br
+Expand each input
+<tab>
+to the next greater column position specified by the formula
+.IR n *\c
+.IR gap +1,
+where
+.IR n
+is an integer > 0. If
+.IR gap
+is zero or is omitted, it shall default to 8. All
+<tab>
+characters in the input shall be expanded into the appropriate number of
+<space>
+characters. If any non-digit character,
+.IR char ,
+is specified, it shall be used as the input
+<tab>.
+If the first character of the
+.BR \(mie
+option-argument is a digit, the entire option-argument shall be assumed
+to be
+.IR gap .
+.IP "\fB\(mif\fP" 10
+Use a
+<form-feed>
+for new pages, instead of the default behavior that uses a sequence of
+<newline>
+characters. Pause before beginning the first page if the standard output
+is associated with a terminal.
+.IP "\fB\(miF\fP" 10
+Use a
+<form-feed>
+for new pages, instead of the default behavior that uses a sequence of
+<newline>
+characters.
+.IP "\fB\(mih\ \fIheader\fR" 10
+Use the string
+.IR header
+to replace the contents of the
+.IR file
+operand in the page header.
+.IP "\fB\(mii[\fIchar\fB][\fIgap\fB]\fR" 10
+In output, replace
+<space>
+characters with
+<tab>
+characters wherever one or more adjacent
+<space>
+characters reach column positions
+.IR gap +1,
+2*
+.IR gap +1,
+3*
+.IR gap +1,
+and so on. If
+.IR gap
+is zero or is omitted, default tab settings at every eighth column
+position shall be assumed. If any non-digit character,
+.IR char ,
+is specified, it shall be used as the output
+<tab>.
+If the first character of the
+.BR \(mii
+option-argument is a digit, the entire option-argument shall be assumed
+to be
+.IR gap .
+.IP "\fB\(mil\ \fIlines\fR" 10
+Override the 66-line default and reset the page length to
+.IR lines .
+If
+.IR lines
+is not greater than the sum of both the header and trailer depths (in
+lines), the
+.IR pr
+utility shall suppress both the header and trailer, as if the
+.BR \(mit
+option were in effect.
+.IP "\fB\(mim\fP" 10
+Merge files. Standard output shall be formatted so the
+.IR pr
+utility writes one line from each file specified by a
+.IR file
+operand, side by side into text columns of equal fixed widths, in terms
+of the number of column positions. Implementations shall support
+merging of at least nine
+.IR file
+operands.
+.IP "\fB\(min[\fIchar\fB][\fIwidth\fB]\fR" 10
+.br
+Provide
+.IR width -digit
+line numbering (default for
+.IR width
+shall be 5). The number shall occupy the first
+.IR width
+column positions of each text column of default output or each line of
+.BR \(mim
+output. If
+.IR char
+(any non-digit character) is given, it shall be appended to the line
+number to separate it from whatever follows (default for
+.IR char
+is a
+<tab>).
+.IP "\fB\(mio\ \fIoffset\fR" 10
+Each line of output shall be preceded by offset
+<space>
+characters. If the
+.BR \(mio
+option is not specified, the default offset shall be zero. The space
+taken is in addition to the output line width (see the
+.BR \(miw
+option below).
+.IP "\fB\(mip\fP" 10
+Pause before beginning each page if the standard output is directed to
+a terminal (\c
+.IR pr
+shall write an
+<alert>
+to standard error and wait for a
+<carriage-return>
+to be read on
+.BR /dev/tty ).
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+Write no diagnostic reports on failure to open files.
+.IP "\fB\(mis[\fIchar\fB]\fR" 10
+Separate text columns by the single character
+.IR char
+instead of by the appropriate number of
+<space>
+characters (default for
+.IR char
+shall be
+<tab>).
+.IP "\fB\(mit\fP" 10
+Write neither the five-line identifying header nor the five-line
+trailer usually supplied for each page. Quit writing after the last
+line of each file without spacing to the end of the page.
+.IP "\fB\(miw\ \fIwidth\fR" 10
+Set the width of the line to
+.IR width
+column positions for multiple text-column output only. If the
+.BR \(miw
+option is not specified and the
+.BR \(mis
+option is not specified, the default width shall be 72. If the
+.BR \(miw
+option is not specified and the
+.BR \(mis
+option is specified, the default width shall be 512.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+For single column output, input lines shall not be truncated.
+.RE
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file to be written. If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, or if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be used.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used only if no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, or if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' .
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files shall be text files.
+.P
+The file
+.BR /dev/tty
+shall be used to read responses required by the
+.BR \(mip
+option.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR pr :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine the
+values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files) and which
+characters are defined as printable (character class
+.BR print ).
+Non-printable characters are still written to standard output, but are
+not counted for the purpose for column-width and line-length
+calculations.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILC_TIME\fP" 10
+Determine the format of the date and time for use in writing header
+lines.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fITZ\fP" 10
+Determine the timezone used to calculate date and time strings written
+in header lines. If
+.IR TZ
+is unset or null, an unspecified default timezone shall be used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+If
+.IR pr
+receives an interrupt while writing to a terminal, it shall flush all
+accumulated error messages to the screen before terminating.
+.SH STDOUT
+The
+.IR pr
+utility output shall be a paginated version of the original file (or
+files). This pagination shall be accomplished using either
+<form-feed>
+characters or a sequence of
+<newline>
+characters, as controlled by the
+.BR \(miF
+or
+.BR \(mif
+option. Page headers shall be generated unless the
+.BR \(mit
+option is specified. The page headers shall be of the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"\en\en%s %s Page %d\en\en\en", <\fIoutput of date\fP>, <\fIfile\fR>, <\fIpage number\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In the POSIX locale, the <\fIoutput\ of\ date\fR> field, representing
+the date and time of last modification of the input file (or the
+current date and time if the input file is standard input), shall be
+equivalent to the output of the following command as it would appear if
+executed at the given time:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+date "+%b %e %H:%M %Y"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+without the trailing
+<newline>,
+if the page being written is from standard input. If the page being
+written is not from standard input, in the POSIX locale, the same
+format shall be used, but the time used shall be the modification time
+of the file corresponding to
+.IR file
+instead of the current time. When the
+.IR LC_TIME
+locale category is not set to the POSIX locale, a different format and
+order of presentation of this field may be used.
+.P
+If the standard input is used instead of a
+.IR file
+operand, the <\fIfile\fP> field shall be replaced by a null string.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mih
+option is specified, the <\fIfile\fP> field shall be replaced by the
+.IR header
+argument.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used for diagnostic messages and
+for alerting the terminal when
+.BR \(mip
+is specified.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+A conforming application must protect its first operand, if it starts
+with a
+<plus-sign>,
+by preceding it with the
+.BR \(dq\(mi\|\(mi\(dq 
+argument that denotes the end of the options. For example,
+.IR pr \(pl\c
+.IR x
+could be interpreted as an invalid page number or a
+.IR file
+operand.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+Print a numbered list of all files in the current directory:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ls \(mia | pr \(min \(mih "Files in $(pwd)."
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+Print
+.BR file1
+and
+.BR file2
+as a double-spaced, three-column listing headed by ``file list'':
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+pr \(mi3d \(mih "file list" file1 file2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+Write
+.BR file1
+on
+.BR file2 ,
+expanding tabs to columns 10, 19, 28, .\|.\|.:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+pr \(mie9 \(mit <file1 >file2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+This utility is one of those that does not follow the Utility Syntax
+Guidelines because of its historical origins. The standard developers
+could have added new options that obeyed the guidelines (and marked the
+old options obsolescent) or devised an entirely new utility; there are
+examples of both actions in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. Because of its widespread use by
+historical applications, the standard developers decided to exempt this
+version of
+.IR pr
+from many of the guidelines.
+.P
+Implementations are required to accept option-arguments to the
+.BR \(mih ,
+.BR \(mil ,
+.BR \(mio ,
+and
+.BR \(miw
+options whether presented as part of the same argument or as a separate
+argument to
+.IR pr ,
+as suggested by the Utility Syntax Guidelines. The
+.BR \(min
+and
+.BR \(mis
+options, however, are specified as in historical practice because they
+are frequently specified without their optional arguments. If a
+<blank>
+were allowed before the option-argument in these cases, a
+.IR file
+operand could mistakenly be interpreted as an option-argument in
+historical applications.
+.P
+The text about the minimum number of lines in multi-column output was
+included to ensure that a best effort is made in balancing the length
+of the columns. There are known historical implementations in which,
+for example, 60-line files are listed by
+.IR pr
+\(mi2 as one column of 56 lines and a second of 4. Although this is not
+a problem when a full page with headers and trailers is produced, it
+would be relatively useless when used with
+.BR \(mit .
+.P
+Historical implementations of the
+.IR pr
+utility have differed in the action taken for the
+.BR \(mif
+option. BSD uses it as described here for the
+.BR \(miF
+option; System V uses it to change trailing
+<newline>
+characters on each page to a
+<form-feed>
+and, if standard output is a TTY device, sends an
+<alert>
+to standard error and reads a line from
+.BR /dev/tty
+before the first page. There were strong arguments from both sides of
+this issue concerning historical practice and as a result the
+.BR \(miF
+option was added. XSI-conformant systems support the System V
+historical actions for the
+.BR \(mif
+option.
+.P
+The <\fIoutput\ of\ date\fP> field in the
+.BR \(mil
+format is specified only for the POSIX locale. As noted, the format can
+be different in other locales. No mechanism for defining this is
+present in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, as the appropriate vehicle is a message catalog;
+that is, the format should be specified as a ``message''.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexpand\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIlp\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/printf.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/printf.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..716fb08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/printf.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,576 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PRINTF "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+printf
+\(em write formatted output
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+printf \fIformat\fB [\fIargument\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR printf
+utility shall write formatted operands to the standard output. The
+.IR argument
+operands shall be formatted under control of the
+.IR format
+operand.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIformat\fR" 10
+A string describing the format to use to write the remaining operands.
+See the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.IP "\fIargument\fR" 10
+The strings to be written to standard output, under the control of
+.IR format .
+See the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR printf :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine the
+values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILC_NUMERIC\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for numeric formatting. It shall affect the
+format of numbers written using the
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR g ,
+and
+.BR G
+conversion specifier characters (if supported).
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+See the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+The
+.IR format
+operand shall be used as the
+.IR format
+string described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 5" ", " "File Format Notation"
+with the following exceptions:
+.IP " 1." 4
+A
+<space>
+in the format string, in any context other than a flag of a conversion
+specification, shall be treated as an ordinary character that is copied
+to the output.
+.IP " 2." 4
+A
+.BR ' ' 
+character in the format string shall be treated as a
+.BR ' ' 
+character, not as a
+<space>.
+.IP " 3." 4
+In addition to the escape sequences shown in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 5" ", " "File Format Notation"
+(\c
+.BR '\e\e' ,
+.BR '\ea' ,
+.BR '\eb' ,
+.BR '\ef' ,
+.BR '\en' ,
+.BR '\er' ,
+.BR '\et' ,
+.BR '\ev' ),
+.BR \(dq\eddd\(dq ,
+where
+.IR ddd
+is a one, two, or three-digit octal number, shall be written as a byte
+with the numeric value specified by the octal number.
+.IP " 4." 4
+The implementation shall not precede or follow output from the
+.BR d
+or
+.BR u
+conversion specifiers with
+<blank>
+characters not specified by the
+.IR format
+operand.
+.IP " 5." 4
+The implementation shall not precede output from the
+.BR o
+conversion specifier with zeros not specified by the
+.IR format
+operand.
+.IP " 6." 4
+The
+.BR a ,
+.BR A ,
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR g ,
+and
+.BR G
+conversion specifiers need not be supported.
+.IP " 7." 4
+An additional conversion specifier character,
+.BR b ,
+shall be supported as follows. The argument shall be taken to be a
+string that may contain
+<backslash>-escape
+sequences. The following
+<backslash>-escape
+sequences shall be supported:
+.RS 4 
+.IP -- 4
+The escape sequences listed in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 5" ", " "File Format Notation"
+(\c
+.BR '\e\e' ,
+.BR '\ea' ,
+.BR '\eb' ,
+.BR '\ef' ,
+.BR '\en' ,
+.BR '\er' ,
+.BR '\et' ,
+.BR '\ev' ),
+which shall be converted to the characters they represent
+.IP -- 4
+.BR \(dq\e0ddd\(dq ,
+where
+.IR ddd
+is a zero, one, two, or three-digit octal number that shall be
+converted to a byte with the numeric value specified by the octal
+number
+.IP -- 4
+.BR '\ec' ,
+which shall not be written and shall cause
+.IR printf
+to ignore any remaining characters in the string operand containing it,
+any remaining string operands, and any additional characters in the
+.IR format
+operand
+.P
+The interpretation of a
+<backslash>
+followed by any other sequence of characters is unspecified.
+.P
+Bytes from the converted string shall be written until the end of the
+string or the number of bytes indicated by the precision specification
+is reached. If the precision is omitted, it shall be taken to be
+infinite, so all bytes up to the end of the converted string shall be
+written.
+.RE
+.IP " 8." 4
+For each conversion specification that consumes an argument, the next
+argument operand shall be evaluated and converted to the appropriate
+type for the conversion as specified below.
+.IP " 9." 4
+The
+.IR format
+operand shall be reused as often as necessary to satisfy the argument
+operands. Any extra
+.BR c
+or
+.BR s
+conversion specifiers shall be evaluated as if a null string
+argument were supplied; other extra conversion specifications shall be
+evaluated as if a zero argument were supplied. If the
+.IR format
+operand contains no conversion specifications and
+.IR argument
+operands are present, the results are unspecified.
+.IP 10. 4
+If a character sequence in the
+.IR format
+operand begins with a
+.BR '%' 
+character, but does not form a valid conversion specification, the
+behavior is unspecified.
+.IP 11. 4
+The argument to the
+.BR c
+conversion specifier can be a string containing zero or more bytes. If
+it contains one or more bytes, the first byte shall be written and any
+additional bytes shall be ignored. If the argument is an empty string,
+it is unspecified whether nothing is written or a null byte is written.
+.P
+The
+.IR argument
+operands shall be treated as strings if the corresponding conversion
+specifier is
+.BR b ,
+.BR c ,
+or
+.BR s ,
+and shall be evaluated as if by the
+\fIstrtod\fR()
+function if the corresponding conversion specifier is
+.BR a ,
+.BR A ,
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR g ,
+or
+.BR G .
+Otherwise, they shall be evaluated as unsuffixed C integer constants,
+as described by the ISO\ C standard, with the following extensions:
+.IP " *" 4
+A leading
+<plus-sign>
+or minus-sign shall be allowed.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the leading character is a single-quote or double-quote, the value
+shall be the numeric value in the underlying codeset of the character
+following the single-quote or double-quote.
+.IP " *" 4
+Suffixed integer constants may be allowed.
+.P
+If an argument operand cannot be completely converted into an internal
+value appropriate to the corresponding conversion specification, a
+diagnostic message shall be written to standard error and the utility
+shall not exit with a zero exit status, but shall continue processing
+any remaining operands and shall write the value accumulated at the
+time the error was detected to standard output.
+.P
+It is not considered an error if an argument operand is not completely
+used for a
+.BR c
+or
+.BR s
+conversion.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The floating-point formatting conversion specifications of
+\fIprintf\fR()
+are not required because all arithmetic in the shell is integer
+arithmetic. The
+.IR awk
+utility performs floating-point calculations and provides its own
+.BR printf
+function. The
+.IR bc
+utility can perform arbitrary-precision floating-point arithmetic, but
+does not provide extensive formatting capabilities. (This
+.IR printf
+utility cannot really be used to format
+.IR bc
+output; it does not support arbitrary precision.) Implementations are
+encouraged to support the floating-point conversions as an extension.
+.P
+Note that this
+.IR printf
+utility, like the
+\fIprintf\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 on which it is based, makes no special
+provision for dealing with multi-byte characters when using the
+.BR %c
+conversion specification or when a precision is specified in a
+.BR %b
+or
+.BR %s
+conversion specification. Applications should be extremely cautious
+using either of these features when there are multi-byte characters in
+the character set.
+.P
+No provision is made in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 which allows field widths and precisions
+to be specified as
+.BR '*' 
+since the
+.BR '*' 
+can be replaced directly in the
+.IR format
+operand using shell variable substitution. Implementations can also
+provide this feature as an extension if they so choose.
+.P
+Hexadecimal character constants as defined in the ISO\ C standard are not
+recognized in the
+.IR format
+operand because there is no consistent way to detect the end of the
+constant. Octal character constants are limited to, at most, three
+octal digits, but hexadecimal character constants are only terminated
+by a non-hex-digit character. In the ISO\ C standard, the
+.BR \(dq##\(dq 
+concatenation operator can be used to terminate a constant and follow
+it with a hexadecimal character to be written. In the shell,
+concatenation occurs before the
+.IR printf
+utility has a chance to parse the end of the hexadecimal constant.
+.P
+The
+.BR %b
+conversion specification is not part of the ISO\ C standard; it has been added
+here as a portable way to process
+<backslash>-escapes
+expanded in string operands as provided by the
+.IR echo
+utility. See also the APPLICATION USAGE section of
+.IR "\fIecho\fR\^"
+for ways to use
+.IR printf
+as a replacement for all of the traditional versions of the
+.IR echo
+utility.
+.P
+If an argument cannot be parsed correctly for the corresponding
+conversion specification, the
+.IR printf
+utility is required to report an error. Thus, overflow and extraneous
+characters at the end of an argument being used for a numeric
+conversion shall be reported as errors.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+To alert the user and then print and read a series of prompts:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+printf "\eaPlease fill in the following: \enName: "
+read name
+printf "Phone number: "
+read phone
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+To read out a list of right and wrong answers from a file, calculate
+the percentage correctly, and print them out. The numbers are
+right-justified and separated by a single
+<tab>.
+The percentage is written to one decimal place of accuracy:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+while read right wrong ; do
+    percent=$(echo "scale=1;($right*100)/($right+$wrong)" | bc)
+    printf "%2d right\et%2d wrong\et(%s%%)\en" \e
+        $right $wrong $percent
+done < database_file
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+The command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+printf "%5d%4d\en" 1 21 321 4321 54321
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+produces:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+    1  21
+  3214321
+54321   0
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Note that the
+.IR format
+operand is used three times to print all of the given strings and that
+a
+.BR '0' 
+was supplied by
+.IR printf
+to satisfy the last
+.BR %4d
+conversion specification.
+.P
+The
+.IR printf
+utility is required to notify the user when conversion errors are
+detected while producing numeric output; thus, the following results
+would be expected on an implementation with 32-bit twos-complement
+integers when
+.BR %d
+is specified as the
+.IR format
+operand:
+.br
+.TS
+center tab(@) box;
+cB | cB | cB
+cB | cB | cB
+lf5 | lf5 | lf7.
+@Standard
+Argument@Output@Diagnostic Output
+_
+5a@5@printf: "5a" not completely converted
+9999999999@2147483647@printf: "9999999999" arithmetic overflow
+\(mi9999999999@\(mi2147483648@printf: "\(mi9999999999" arithmetic overflow
+ABC@0@printf: "ABC" expected numeric value
+.TE
+.P
+The diagnostic message format is not specified, but these examples
+convey the type of information that should be reported. Note that the
+value shown on standard output is what would be expected as the return
+value from the
+\fIstrtol\fR()
+function as defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. A similar correspondence exists
+between
+.BR %u
+and
+\fIstrtoul\fR()
+and
+.BR %e ,
+.BR %f ,
+and
+.BR %g
+(if the implementation supports floating-point conversions) and
+\fIstrtod\fR().
+.P
+In a locale using the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard as the underlying codeset, the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+printf "%d\en" 3 +3 \(mi3 \e'3 \e"+3 "'\(mi3"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+produces:
+.IP 3 6
+Numeric value of constant 3
+.IP 3 6
+Numeric value of constant 3
+.IP "\(mi3" 6
+Numeric value of constant \(mi3
+.IP 51 6
+Numeric value of the character
+.BR '3' 
+in the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard codeset
+.IP 43 6
+Numeric value of the character
+.BR '\(pl' 
+in the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard codeset
+.IP 45 6
+Numeric value of the character
+.BR '\(mi' 
+in the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard codeset
+.P
+Note that in a locale with multi-byte characters, the value of a
+character is intended to be the value of the equivalent of the
+.BR wchar_t
+representation of the character as described in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR printf
+utility was added to provide functionality that has historically been
+provided by
+.IR echo .
+However, due to irreconcilable differences in the various versions of
+.IR echo
+extant, the version has few special features, leaving those to this new
+.IR printf
+utility, which is based on one in the Ninth Edition system.
+.P
+The EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section almost exactly matches the
+\fIprintf\fR()
+function in the ISO\ C standard, although it is described in terms of the file
+format notation in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 5" ", " "File Format Notation".
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard specified that arguments for all
+conversions other than
+.BR b ,
+.BR c ,
+and
+.BR s
+were evaluated in the same way (as C constants, but with stated
+exceptions). For implementations supporting the floating-point conversions
+it was not clear whether integer conversions need only accept integer
+constants and floating-point conversions need only accept floating-point
+constants, or whether both types of conversions should accept both
+types of constants. Also by not distinguishing between them, the
+requirement relating to a leading single-quote or double-quote applied
+to floating-point conversions even though this provided no useful
+functionality to applications that was not already available through
+the integer conversions. The current standard clarifies the situation
+by specifying that the arguments for floating-point conversions are
+evaluated as if by
+\fIstrtod\fR(),
+and the arguments for integer conversions are evaluated as C integer
+constants, with the special treatment of leading single-quote and
+double-quote applying only to integer conversions.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIawk\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIbc\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIecho\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 5" ", " "File Format Notation",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIfprintf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrtod\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/prs.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/prs.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa268a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/prs.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,445 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PRS "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+prs
+\(em print an SCCS file (\fBDEVELOPMENT\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+prs \fB[\fR\(mia\fB] [\fR\(mid \fIdataspec\fB] [\fR\(mir\fB[\fISID\fB]]\fI file\fR...
+.P
+prs \fB[\fR\(mie|\(mil\fB]\fR \(mic \fIcutoff \fB[\fR\(mid \fIdataspec\fB]\fI file\fR...
+.P
+prs \fB[\fR\(mie|\(mil\fB]\fR \(mir\fB[\fISID\fB] [\fR\(mid \fIdataspec\fB] \fIfile\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR prs
+utility shall write to standard output parts or all of an SCCS file in
+a user-supplied format.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR prs
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except that the
+.BR \(mir
+option has an optional option-argument. This optional option-argument
+cannot be presented as a separate argument. The following options
+shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mid\ \fIdataspec\fR" 10
+Specify the output data specification. The
+.IR dataspec
+shall be a string consisting of SCCS file
+.IR data
+.IR keywords
+(see
+.IR "Data Keywords")
+interspersed with optional user-supplied text.
+.IP "\fB\(mir[\fISID\fB]\fR" 10
+Specify the SCCS identification string (SID) of a delta for which
+information is desired. If no
+.IR SID
+option-argument is specified, the SID of the most recently created
+delta shall be assumed.
+.IP "\fB\(mie\fP" 10
+Request information for all deltas created earlier than and including
+the delta designated via the
+.BR \(mir
+option or the date-time given by the
+.BR \(mic
+option.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\fP" 10
+Request information for all deltas created later than and including the
+delta designated via the
+.BR \(mir
+option or the date-time given by the
+.BR \(mic
+option.
+.IP "\fB\(mic\ \fIcutoff\fR" 10
+Indicate the
+.IR cutoff
+date-time, in the form:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIYY\fB[\fIMM\fB[\fIDD\fB[\fIHH\fB[\fIMM\fB[\fISS\fB]]]]]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+For the
+.IR YY
+component, values in the range [69,99] shall refer to years 1969 to
+1999 inclusive, and values in the range [00,68] shall refer to years
+2000 to 2068 inclusive.
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+It is expected that in a future version of this standard the default
+century inferred from a 2-digit year will change. (This would apply to
+all commands accepting a 2-digit year as input.)
+.P
+.P
+No changes (deltas) to the SCCS file that were created after the
+specified
+.IR cutoff
+date-time shall be included in the output. Units omitted from the
+date-time default to their maximum possible values; for example,
+.BR \(mic\07502
+is equivalent to
+.BR \(mic\0750228235959 .
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mia\fP" 10
+Request writing of information for both removed\(emthat is,
+.IR delta
+.IR type =\c
+.IR R
+(see
+.IR "\fIrmdel\fR\^")\(em\c
+and existing\(emthat is,
+.IR delta
+.IR type =\c
+.IR D ,\(em\c
+deltas. If the
+.BR \(mia
+option is not specified, information for existing deltas only shall be
+provided.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of an existing SCCS file or a directory. If
+.IR file
+is a directory, the
+.IR prs
+utility shall behave as though each file in the directory were
+specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files (last component
+of the pathname does not begin with
+.BR s. )
+and unreadable files shall be silently ignored.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If exactly one
+.IR file
+operand appears, and it is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be read; each line of the standard input shall
+be taken to be the name of an SCCS file to be processed. Non-SCCS
+files and unreadable files shall be silently ignored.
+.RE
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be a text file used only when the
+.IR file
+operand is specified as
+.BR '\(mi' .
+Each line of the text file shall be interpreted as an SCCS pathname.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+Any SCCS files displayed are files of an unspecified format.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR prs :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine the
+values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall be a text file whose format is dependent on
+the data keywords specified with the
+.BR \(mid
+option.
+.SS "Data Keywords"
+.P
+Data keywords specify which parts of an SCCS file shall be retrieved
+and output. All parts of an SCCS file have an associated data
+keyword. A data keyword may appear in a
+.IR dataspec
+multiple times.
+.P
+The information written by
+.IR prs
+shall consist of:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The user-supplied text
+.IP " 2." 4
+Appropriate values (extracted from the SCCS file) substituted for the
+recognized data keywords in the order of appearance in the
+.IR dataspec
+.P
+The format of a data keyword value shall either be simple (\c
+.BR 'S' ),
+in which keyword substitution is direct, or multi-line (\c
+.BR 'M' ).
+.P
+User-supplied text shall be any text other than recognized data
+keywords. A
+<tab>
+shall be specified by
+.BR '\et' 
+and
+<newline>
+by
+.BR '\en' .
+When the
+.BR \(mir
+option is not specified, the default
+.IR dataspec
+shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+:PN::\en\en
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and the following
+.IR dataspec
+shall be used for each selected delta:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+:Dt:\et:DL:\enMRs:\en:MR:COMMENTS:\en:C:
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB s s s s
+cB | cB | cB | cB | cB
+lB | l | c | lB | c.
+SCCS File Data Keywords
+_
+Keyword!Data Item!File Section!Value!Format
+_
+:Dt:!Delta information!Delta Table!\fRSee below*\fP!S
+:DL:!Delta line statistics!"!:Li:/:Ld:/:Lu:!S
+:Li:!Lines inserted by Delta!"!\fInnnnn\fR***!S
+:Ld:!Lines deleted by Delta!"!\fInnnnn\fR***!S
+:Lu:!Lines unchanged by Delta!"!\fInnnnn\fR***!S
+:DT:!Delta type!"!D or R!S
+:I:!SCCS ID string (SID)!"!\fRSee below**\fP!S
+:R:!Release number!"!\fInnnn\fR!S
+:L:!Level number!"!\fInnnn\fR!S
+:B:!Branch number!"!\fInnnn\fR!S
+:S:!Sequence number!"!\fInnnn\fR!S
+:D:!Date delta created!"!:Dy:/:Dm:/:Dd:!S
+:Dy:!Year delta created!"!\fInn\fR!S
+:Dm:!Month delta created!"!\fInn\fR!S
+:Dd:!Day delta created!"!\fInn\fR!S
+:T:!Time delta created!"!:Th:::Tm:::Ts:!S
+:Th:!Hour delta created!"!\fInn\fR!S
+:Tm:!Minutes delta created!"!\fInn\fR!S
+:Ts:!Seconds delta created!"!\fInn\fR!S
+:P:!Programmer who created Delta!"!\fIlogname\fR!S
+:DS:!Delta sequence number!"!\fInnnn\fR!S
+:DP:!Predecessor Delta sequence!"!\fInnnn\fR!S
+!number
+:DI:!Sequence number of deltas!"!:Dn:/:Dx:/:Dg:!S
+!included, excluded, or ignored
+:Dn:!Deltas included (sequence #)!"!:DS: :DS: .\|.\|.!S
+:Dx:!Deltas excluded (sequence #)!"!:DS: :DS: .\|.\|.!S
+:Dg:!Deltas ignored (sequence #)!"!:DS: :DS: .\|.\|.!S
+:MR:!MR numbers for delta!"!\fItext\fR!M
+:C:!Comments for delta!"!\fItext\fR!M
+:UN:!User names!User Names!\fItext\fR!M
+:FL:!Flag list!Flags!\fItext\fP!M
+:Y:!Module type flag!"!\fItext\fR!S
+:MF:!MR validation flag!"!yes \fRor\fP no!S
+:MP:!MR validation program name!"!\fItext\fR!S
+:KF:!Keyword error, warning flag!"!yes \fRor\fP no!S
+:KV:!Keyword validation string!"!\fItext\fR!S
+:BF:!Branch flag!"!yes \fRor\fP no!S
+:J:!Joint edit flag!"!yes \fRor\fP no!S
+:LK:!Locked releases!"!:R: .\|.\|.!S
+:Q:!User-defined keyword!"!\fItext\fR!S
+:M:!Module name!"!\fItext\fR!S
+:FB:!Floor boundary!"!:R:!S
+:CB:!Ceiling boundary!"!:R:!S
+:Ds:!Default SID!"!:I:!S
+:ND:!Null delta flag!"!yes \fRor\fP no!S
+:FD:!File descriptive text!Comments!\fItext\fR!M
+:BD:!Body!Body!\fItext\fR!M
+:GB:!Gotten body!"!\fItext\fR!M
+:W:!A form of \fIwhat\fP string!N/A!:Z::M:\et:I:!S
+:A:!A form of \fIwhat\fP string!N/A!:Z::Y: :M: :I::Z:!S
+:Z:!\fIwhat\fP string delimiter!N/A!\fR@(#)\fR!S
+:F:!SCCS filename!N/A!\fItext\fR!S
+:PN:!SCCS file pathname!N/A!\fItext\fR!S
+.TE
+.IP * 6
+.BR :Dt: =\c
+.BR ":DT: :I: :D: :T: :P: :DS: :DP:"
+.IP ** 6
+.BR ":R:.:L:.:B:.:S:"
+if the delta is a branch delta (\c
+.BR :BF: =\|=\c
+.BR yes )
+.br
+.BR ":R:.:L:"
+if the delta is not a branch delta (\c
+.BR :BF: =\|=\c
+.BR no )
+.IP *** 6
+The line statistics are capped at 99\|999. For example, if 100\|000
+lines were unchanged in a certain revision,
+.BR :Lu:
+shall produce the value 99\|999.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+The following example:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+prs \(mid "User Names for :F: are:\en:UN:" s.file
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+might write to standard output:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+User Names for s.file are:
+xyz
+131
+abc
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+The following example:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+prs \(mid "Delta for pgm :M:: :I: \(mi :D: By :P:" \(mir s.file
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+might write to standard output:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+Delta for pgm main.c: 3.7 \(mi 77/12/01 By cas
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+As a special case:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+prs s.file
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+might write to standard output:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+s.file:
+<\fIblank line\fP>
+D 1.1 77/12/01 00:00:00 cas 1 000000/00000/00000
+MRs:
+bl78\(mi12345
+bl79\(mi54321
+COMMENTS:
+this is the comment line for s.file initial delta
+<\fIblank line\fP>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+for each delta table entry of the
+.BR D
+type. The only option allowed to be used with this special case is the
+.BR \(mia
+option.
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIadmin\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIdelta\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIget\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIwhat\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ps.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ps.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..05757a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ps.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,671 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PS "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ps
+\(em report process status
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+ps \fB[\fR\(miaA\fB] \*![\fR\(midefl\fB] [\fR\(mig \fIgrouplist\fB]\*? [\fR\(miG \fIgrouplist\fB]
+    \*![\fR\(min \fInamelist\fB]\*? [\fR\(mio \fIformat\fB]\fR... \fB[\fR\(mip \fIproclist\fB] [\fR\(mit \fItermlist\fB]
+    \*![\fR\(miu \fIuserlist\fB]\*? [\fR\(miU \fIuserlist\fB]
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR ps
+utility shall write information about processes, subject to having
+appropriate privileges to obtain information about those processes.
+.P
+By default,
+.IR ps
+shall select all processes with the same effective user ID as the
+current user and the same controlling terminal as the invoker.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR ps
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mia\fP" 10
+Write information for all processes associated with terminals.
+Implementations may omit session leaders from this list.
+.IP "\fB\(miA\fP" 10
+Write information for all processes.
+.IP "\fB\(mid\fP" 10
+Write information for all processes, except session leaders.
+.IP "\fB\(mie\fP" 10
+Write information for all processes.
+(Equivalent to
+.BR \(miA .)
+.IP "\fB\(mif\fP" 10
+Generate a
+.BR full
+listing. (See the STDOUT section for the contents of a
+.BR full
+listing.)
+.IP "\fB\(mig\ \fIgrouplist\fR" 10
+Write information for processes whose session leaders are given in
+.IR grouplist .
+The application shall ensure that the
+.IR grouplist
+is a single argument in the form of a
+<blank>
+or
+<comma>-separated
+list.
+.IP "\fB\(miG\ \fIgrouplist\fR" 10
+Write information for processes whose real group ID numbers are given
+in
+.IR grouplist .
+The application shall ensure that the
+.IR grouplist
+is a single argument in the form of a
+<blank>
+or
+<comma>-separated
+list.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\fP" 10
+Generate a
+.BR long
+listing. (See STDOUT for the contents of a
+.BR long
+listing.)
+.IP "\fB\(min\ \fInamelist\fR" 10
+Specify the name of an alternative system
+.IR namelist
+file in place of the default. The name of the default file and the
+format of a
+.IR namelist
+file are unspecified.
+.IP "\fB\(mio\ \fIformat\fR" 10
+Write information according to the format specification given in
+.IR format .
+This is fully described in the STDOUT section. Multiple
+.BR \(mio
+options can be specified; the format specification shall be interpreted
+as the
+<space>-separated
+concatenation of all the
+.IR format
+option-arguments.
+.IP "\fB\(mip\ \fIproclist\fR" 10
+Write information for processes whose process ID numbers are given in
+.IR proclist .
+The application shall ensure that the
+.IR proclist
+is a single argument in the form of a
+<blank>
+or
+<comma>-separated
+list.
+.IP "\fB\(mit\ \fItermlist\fR" 10
+Write information for processes associated with terminals given in
+.IR termlist .
+The application shall ensure that the
+.IR termlist
+is a single argument in the form of a
+<blank>
+or
+<comma>-separated
+list. Terminal identifiers shall be given in an implementation-defined
+format.
+On XSI-conformant systems, they shall be given in one of two forms:
+the device's filename (for example,
+.BR tty04 )
+or, if the device's filename starts with
+.BR tty ,
+just the identifier following the characters
+.BR tty
+(for example,
+.BR \(dq04\(dq ).
+.IP "\fB\(miu\ \fIuserlist\fR" 10
+Write information for processes whose user ID numbers or login names
+are given in
+.IR userlist .
+The application shall ensure that the
+.IR userlist
+is a single argument in the form of a
+<blank>
+or
+<comma>-separated
+list. In the listing, the numerical user ID shall be written unless the
+.BR \(mif
+option is used, in which case the login name shall be written.
+.IP "\fB\(miU\ \fIuserlist\fR" 10
+Write information for processes whose real user ID numbers or login
+names are given in
+.IR userlist .
+The application shall ensure that the
+.IR userlist
+is a single argument in the form of a
+<blank>
+or
+<comma>-separated
+list.
+.P
+With the exception of
+.BR \(mif ,
+.BR \(mil ,
+.BR \(min
+.IR namelist ,
+and
+.BR \(mio
+.IR format ,
+all of the options shown are used to select processes. If any are
+specified, the default list shall be ignored and
+.IR ps
+shall select the processes represented by the inclusive OR of
+all the selection-criteria options.
+.SH OPERANDS
+None.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR ps :
+.IP "\fICOLUMNS\fP" 10
+Override the system-selected horizontal display line size, used to
+determine the number of text columns to display. See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+for valid values and results when it is unset or null.
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine the
+values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fILC_TIME\fP" 10
+Determine the format and contents of the date and time strings
+displayed.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fITZ\fP" 10
+Determine the timezone used to calculate date and time strings
+displayed. If
+.IR TZ
+is unset or null, an unspecified default timezone shall be used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+When the
+.BR \(mio
+option is not specified, the standard output format is unspecified.
+.br
+.P
+On XSI-conformant systems, the output format shall be as follows.
+The column headings and descriptions of the columns in a
+.IR ps
+listing are given below. The precise meanings of these fields are
+implementation-defined. The letters
+.BR 'f' 
+and
+.BR 'l' 
+(below) indicate the option (\c
+.BR full
+or
+.BR long )
+that shall cause the corresponding heading to appear;
+.BR all
+means that the heading always appears. Note that these two options
+determine only what information is provided for a process; they do not
+determine which processes are listed.
+.TS
+tab(@);
+lB l lw(11c).
+F@(l)@T{
+Flags (octal and additive) associated with the process.
+T}
+S@(l)@The state of the process.
+UID@(f,l)@T{
+The user ID number of the process owner; the login name is printed
+under the
+.BR \(mif
+option.
+T}
+PID@(all)@T{
+The process ID of the process; it is possible to kill a process if this
+datum is known.
+T}
+PPID@(f,l)@The process ID of the parent process.
+C@(f,l)@Processor utilization for scheduling.
+PRI@(l)@T{
+The priority of the process; higher numbers mean lower priority.
+T}
+NI@(l)@T{
+Nice value; used in priority computation.
+T}
+ADDR@(l)@The address of the process.
+SZ@(l)@T{
+The size in blocks of the core image of the process.
+T}
+WCHAN@(l)@T{
+The event for which the process is waiting or sleeping; if blank, the
+process is running.
+T}
+STIME@(f)@Starting time of the process.
+TTY@(all)@The controlling terminal for the process.
+TIME@(all)@T{
+The cumulative execution time for the process.
+T}
+CMD@(all)@T{
+The command name; the full command name and its arguments are written
+under the
+.BR \(mif
+option.
+T}
+.TE
+.P
+A process that has exited and has a parent, but has not yet been waited
+for by the parent, shall be marked
+.BR defunct .
+.P
+Under the option
+.BR \(mif ,
+.IR ps
+tries to determine the command name and arguments given when the
+process was created by examining memory or the swap area. Failing
+this, the command name, as it would appear without the option
+.BR \(mif ,
+is written in square brackets.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mio
+option allows the output format to be specified under user control.
+.P
+The application shall ensure that the format specification is a list of
+names presented as a single argument,
+<blank>
+or
+<comma>-separated.
+Each variable has a default header. The default header can be overridden
+by appending an
+<equals-sign>
+and the new text of the header. The rest of the characters in the
+argument shall be used as the header text. The fields specified shall
+be written in the order specified on the command line, and should be
+arranged in columns in the output. The field widths shall be selected
+by the system to be at least as wide as the header text (default or
+overridden value). If the header text is null, such as
+.BR \(mio
+.IR user =,
+the field width shall be at least as wide as the default header text.
+If all header text fields are null, no header line shall be written.
+.P
+The following names are recognized in the POSIX locale:
+.IP "\fBruser\fR" 8
+The real user ID of the process. This shall be the textual user ID, if
+it can be obtained and the field width permits, or a decimal
+representation otherwise.
+.IP "\fBuser\fR" 8
+The effective user ID of the process. This shall be the textual user
+ID, if it can be obtained and the field width permits, or a decimal
+representation otherwise.
+.IP "\fBrgroup\fR" 8
+The real group ID of the process. This shall be the textual group ID,
+if it can be obtained and the field width permits, or a decimal
+representation otherwise.
+.IP "\fBgroup\fR" 8
+The effective group ID of the process. This shall be the textual group
+ID, if it can be obtained and the field width permits, or a decimal
+representation otherwise.
+.IP "\fBpid\fR" 8
+The decimal value of the process ID.
+.IP "\fBppid\fR" 8
+The decimal value of the parent process ID.
+.IP "\fBpgid\fR" 8
+The decimal value of the process group ID.
+.IP "\fBpcpu\fR" 8
+The ratio of CPU time used recently to CPU time available in the same
+period, expressed as a percentage. The meaning of ``recently'' in this
+context is unspecified. The CPU time available is determined in an
+unspecified manner.
+.IP "\fBvsz\fR" 8
+The size of the process in (virtual) memory in 1\|024 byte units as a
+decimal integer.
+.IP "\fBnice\fR" 8
+The decimal value of the nice value of the process; see
+.IR nice .
+.IP "\fBetime\fR" 8
+In the POSIX locale, the elapsed time since the process was started, in
+the form:
+.RS 8 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[[\fIdd\fR\(mi\fB]\fIhh\fR:\fB]\fImm\fR:\fIss\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR dd
+shall represent the number of days,
+.IR hh
+the number of hours,
+.IR mm
+the number of minutes, and
+.IR ss
+the number of seconds. The
+.IR dd
+field shall be a decimal integer. The
+.IR hh ,
+.IR mm ,
+and
+.IR ss
+fields shall be two-digit decimal integers padded on the left with
+zeros.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBtime\fR" 8
+In the POSIX locale, the cumulative CPU time of the process in the
+form:
+.RS 8 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIdd\fR\(mi\fB]\fIhh\fR:\fImm\fR:\fIss\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR dd ,
+.IR hh ,
+.IR mm ,
+and
+.IR ss
+fields shall be as described in the
+.BR etime
+specifier.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBtty\fR" 8
+The name of the controlling terminal of the process (if any) in the
+same format used by the
+.IR who
+utility.
+.IP "\fBcomm\fR" 8
+The name of the command being executed (\c
+.IR argv [0]
+value) as a string.
+.IP "\fBargs\fR" 8
+The command with all its arguments as a string. The implementation may
+truncate this value to the field width; it is implementation-defined
+whether any further truncation occurs. It is unspecified whether the
+string represented is a version of the argument list as it was passed
+to the command when it started, or is a version of the arguments as
+they may have been modified by the application. Applications cannot
+depend on being able to modify their argument list and having that
+modification be reflected in the output of
+.IR ps .
+.P
+Any field need not be meaningful in all implementations. In such a
+case a
+<hyphen>
+(\c
+.BR '\(mi' )
+should be output in place of the field value.
+.P
+Only
+.BR comm
+and
+.BR args
+shall be allowed to contain
+<blank>
+characters; all others shall not. Any implementation-defined variables
+shall be specified in the system documentation along with the default
+header and indicating whether the field may contain
+<blank>
+characters.
+.P
+The following table specifies the default header to be used in the
+POSIX locale corresponding to each format specifier.
+.br
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTableNames: Variable\fR
+.TS
+center tab(@) box;
+cB cB | cB cB
+lB lB | lB lB.
+Format Specifier@Default Header@Format Specifier@Default Header
+_
+args@COMMAND@ppid@PPID
+comm@COMMAND@rgroup@RGROUP
+etime@ELAPSED@ruser@RUSER
+group@GROUP@time@TIME
+nice@NI@tty@TT
+pcpu@%CPU@user@USER
+pgid@PGID@vsz@VSZ
+pid@PID
+.TE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Things can change while
+.IR ps
+is running; the snapshot it gives is only true for an instant, and
+might not be accurate by the time it is displayed.
+.P
+The
+.BR args
+format specifier is allowed to produce a truncated version of the
+command arguments. In some implementations, this information is no
+longer available when the
+.IR ps
+utility is executed.
+.P
+If the field width is too narrow to display a textual ID, the system
+may use a numeric version. Normally, the system would be expected to
+choose large enough field widths, but if a large number of fields were
+selected to write, it might squeeze fields to their minimum sizes to
+fit on one line. One way to ensure adequate width for the textual IDs
+is to override the default header for a field to make it larger than
+most or all user or group names.
+.P
+There is no special quoting mechanism for header text. The header text
+is the rest of the argument. If multiple header changes are needed,
+multiple
+.BR \(mio
+options can be used, such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ps \(mio "user=User Name" \(mio pid=Process\e ID
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+On some implementations, especially multi-level secure systems,
+.IR ps
+may be severely restricted and produce information only about child
+processes owned by the user.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ps \(mio user,pid,ppid=MOM \(mio args
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+writes at least the following in the POSIX locale:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+  USER   PID   MOM   COMMAND
+helene    34    12   ps \(mio uid,pid,ppid=MOM \(mio args
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The contents of the
+.BR COMMAND
+field need not be the same in all implementations, due to possible
+truncation.
+.SH RATIONALE
+There is very little commonality between BSD and System V
+implementations of
+.IR ps .
+Many options conflict or have subtly different usages. The standard
+developers attempted to select a set of options for the base standard
+that were useful on a wide range of systems and selected options that
+either can be implemented on both BSD and System V-based systems
+without breaking the current implementations or where the options are
+sufficiently similar that any changes would not be unduly problematic
+for users or implementors.
+.P
+It is recognized that on some implementations, especially multi-level
+secure systems,
+.IR ps
+may be nearly useless. The default output has therefore been chosen
+such that it does not break historical implementations and also is
+likely to provide at least some useful information on most systems.
+.P
+The major change is the addition of the format specification
+capability. The motivation for this invention is to provide a mechanism
+for users to access a wider range of system information, if the system
+permits it, in a portable manner. The fields chosen to appear in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+were arrived at after considering what concepts were likely to be both
+reasonably useful to the ``average'' user and had a reasonable chance
+of being implemented on a wide range of systems. Again it is recognized
+that not all systems are able to provide all the information and,
+conversely, some may wish to provide more. It is hoped that the
+approach adopted will be sufficiently flexible and extensible to
+accommodate most systems. Implementations may be expected to introduce
+new format specifiers.
+.P
+The default output should consist of a short listing containing the
+process ID, terminal name, cumulative execution time, and command name
+of each process.
+.P
+The preference of the standard developers would have been to make the
+format specification an operand of the
+.IR ps
+command. Unfortunately, BSD usage precluded this.
+.P
+At one time a format was included to display the environment array of
+the process. This was deleted because there is no portable way to
+display it.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miA
+option is equivalent to the BSD
+.BR \(mig
+and the SVID
+.BR \(mie .
+Because the two systems differed, a mnemonic compromise was selected.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mia
+option is described with some optional behavior because the SVID omits
+session leaders, but BSD does not.
+.P
+In an early proposal, format specifiers appeared for priority and start
+time. The former was not defined adequately in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 and was removed in
+deference to the defined nice value; the latter because elapsed time
+was considered to be more useful.
+.P
+In a new BSD version of
+.IR ps ,
+a
+.BR \(miO
+option can be used to write all of the default information, followed by
+additional format specifiers. This was not adopted because the default
+output is implementation-defined. Nevertheless, this is a useful
+option that should be reserved for that purpose. In the
+.BR \(mio
+option for the POSIX Shell and Utilities
+.IR ps ,
+the format is the concatenation of each
+.BR \(mio .
+Therefore, the user can have an alias or function that defines the
+beginning of their desired format and add more fields to the end of the
+output in certain cases where that would be useful.
+.P
+The format of the terminal name is unspecified, but the descriptions of
+.IR ps ,
+.IR talk ,
+.IR who ,
+and
+.IR write
+require that they all use the same format.
+.P
+The
+.BR pcpu
+field indicates that the CPU time available is determined in an
+unspecified manner. This is because it is difficult to express an
+algorithm that is useful across all possible machine architectures.
+Historical counterparts to this value have attempted to show percentage
+of use in the recent past, such as the preceding minute. Frequently,
+these values for all processes did not add up to 100%. Implementations
+are encouraged to provide data in this field to users that will help
+them identify processes currently affecting the performance of the
+system.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^",
+.IR "\fInice\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIrenice\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/pwd.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/pwd.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6284794
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/pwd.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,210 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PWD "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pwd
+\(em return working directory name
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+pwd \fB[\fR\(miL|\(miP\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR pwd
+utility shall write to standard output an absolute pathname of the
+current working directory, which does not contain the filenames dot or
+dot-dot.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR pwd
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported by the implementation:
+.IP "\fB\(miL\fP" 10
+If the
+.IR PWD
+environment variable contains an absolute pathname of the current
+directory that does not contain the filenames dot or dot-dot,
+.IR pwd
+shall write this pathname to standard output. Otherwise, if the
+.IR PWD
+environment variable contains a pathname of the current directory
+that is longer than
+{PATH_MAX}
+bytes including the terminating null, and the pathname does not contain
+any components that are dot or dot-dot, it is unspecified whether
+.IR pwd
+writes this pathname to standard output or behaves as if the
+.BR \(miP
+option had been specified. Otherwise, the
+.BR \(miL
+option shall behave as the
+.BR \(miP
+option.
+.IP "\fB\(miP\fP" 10
+The pathname written to standard output shall not contain any components
+that refer to files of type symbolic link. If there are multiple pathnames
+that the
+.IR pwd
+utility could write to standard output, one beginning with a single
+<slash>
+character and one or more beginning with two
+<slash>
+characters, then it shall write the pathname beginning with a single
+<slash>
+character. The pathname shall not contain any unnecessary
+<slash>
+characters after the leading one or two
+<slash>
+characters.
+.P
+If both
+.BR \(miL
+and
+.BR \(miP
+are specified, the last one shall apply. If neither
+.BR \(miL
+nor
+.BR \(miP
+is specified, the
+.IR pwd
+utility shall behave as if
+.BR \(miL
+had been specified.
+.SH OPERANDS
+None.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR pwd :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine the
+values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fIPWD\fP" 10
+An absolute pathname of the current working directory. If an
+application sets or unsets the value of
+.IR PWD ,
+the behavior of
+.IR pwd
+is unspecified.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The
+.IR pwd
+utility output is an absolute pathname of the current working
+directory:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIdirectory pathname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+If an error is detected, output shall not be written to standard
+output, a diagnostic message shall be written to standard error, and
+the exit status is not zero.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If the pathname obtained from
+.IR pwd
+is longer than
+{PATH_MAX}
+bytes, it could produce an error if passed to
+.IR cd .
+Therefore, in order to return to that directory it may be necessary to
+break the pathname into sections shorter than
+{PATH_MAX}
+and call
+.IR cd
+on each section in turn (the first section being an absolute pathname
+and subsequent sections being relative pathnames).
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Some implementations have historically provided
+.IR pwd
+as a shell special built-in command.
+.P
+In most utilities, if an error occurs, partial output may be written to
+standard output. This does not happen in historical implementations of
+.IR pwd .
+Because
+.IR pwd
+is frequently used in historical shell scripts without checking the
+exit status, it is important that the historical behavior is required
+here; therefore, the CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS section specifically
+disallows any partial output being written to standard output.
+.P
+An earlier version of this standard stated that the
+.IR PWD
+environment variable was affected when the
+.BR \(miP
+option was in effect. This was incorrect; conforming implementations
+do not do this.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcd\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIgetcwd\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qalter.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qalter.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..668d277
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qalter.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,1093 @@
+'\" et
+.TH QALTER "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+qalter
+\(em alter batch job
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+qalter \fB[\fR\(mia \fIdate_time\fB] [\fR\(miA \fIaccount_string\fB] [\fR\(mic \fIinterval\fB] [\fR\(mie \fIpath_name\fB]
+    [\fR\(mih \fIhold_list\fB] [\fR\(mij \fIjoin_list\fB] [\fR\(mik \fIkeep_list\fB] [\fR\(mil \fIresource_list\fB]
+    [\fR\(mim \fImail_options\fB] [\fR\(miM \fImail_list\fB] [\fR\(miN \fIname\fB] [\fR\(mio \fIpath_name\fB]
+    [\fR\(mip \fIpriority\fB] [\fR\(mir \fIy\fR|\fIn\fB] [\fR\(miS \fIpath_name_list\fB] [\fR\(miu \fIuser_list\fB]
+    \fIjob_identifier\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The attributes of a batch job are altered by a request to the batch
+server that manages the batch job. The
+.IR qalter
+utility is a user-accessible batch client that requests the alteration
+of the attributes of one or more batch jobs.
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall alter the attributes of those batch jobs, and only those
+batch jobs, for which a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+is presented to the utility.
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall alter the attributes of batch jobs in the order in which
+the batch
+.IR job_identifier s
+are presented to the utility.
+.P
+If the
+.IR qalter
+utility fails to process a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+successfully, the utility shall proceed to process the remaining batch
+.IR job_identifier s,
+if any.
+.P
+For each batch
+.IR job_identifier
+for which the
+.IR qalter
+utility succeeds, each attribute of the identified batch job shall be
+altered as indicated by all the options presented to the utility.
+.P
+For each identified batch job for which the
+.IR qalter
+utility fails, the utility shall not alter any attribute of the batch
+job.
+.P
+For each batch job that the
+.IR qalter
+utility processes, the utility shall not modify any attribute other
+than those required by the options and option-arguments presented to
+the utility.
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall alter batch jobs by sending a
+.IR "Modify Job Request"
+to the batch server that manages each batch job. At the time the
+.IR qalter
+utility exits, it shall have modified the batch job corresponding to
+each successfully processed batch
+.IR job_identifier .
+An attempt to alter the attributes of a batch job in the RUNNING state
+is implementation-defined.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported by the implementation:
+.IP "\fB\(mia\ \fIdate_time\fR" 10
+Redefine the time at which the batch job becomes eligible for
+execution.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR date_time
+argument shall be in the same form and represent the same time as for
+the
+.IR touch
+utility. The time so represented shall be set into the
+.IR Execution_Time
+attribute of the batch job. If the time specified is earlier than the
+current time, the
+.BR \(mia
+option shall have no effect.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miA\ \fIaccount_string\fR" 10
+.br
+Redefine the account to which the resource consumption of the batch job
+should be charged.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The syntax of the
+.IR account_string
+option-argument is unspecified.
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall set the
+.IR Account_Name
+attribute of the batch job to the value of the
+.IR account_string
+option-argument.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mic\ \fIinterval\fR" 10
+Redefine whether the batch job should be checkpointed, and if so, how
+often.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall accept a value for the interval option-argument that is
+one of the following:
+.IP "\fRn\fP" 10
+No checkpointing is to be performed on the batch job
+(NO_CHECKPOINT).
+.IP "\fRs\fP" 10
+Checkpointing is to be performed only when the batch server is shut
+down (CHECKPOINT_AT_SHUTDOWN).
+.IP "\fRc\fP" 10
+Automatic periodic checkpointing is to be performed at the
+.IR Minimum_Cpu_Interval
+attribute of the batch queue, in units of CPU minutes
+(CHECKPOINT_AT_MIN_CPU_INTERVAL).
+.IP "\fRc\fR=\fIminutes\fR" 10
+Automatic periodic checkpointing is to be performed every
+.IR minutes
+of CPU time, or every
+.IR Minimum_Cpu_Interval
+minutes, whichever is greater. The
+.IR minutes
+argument shall conform to the syntax for unsigned integers and shall be
+greater than zero.
+.P
+An implementation may define other checkpoint intervals. The
+conformance document for an implementation shall describe any
+alternative checkpoint intervals, how they are specified, their
+internal behavior, and how they affect the behavior of the utility.
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall set the
+.IR Checkpoint
+attribute of the batch job to the value of the
+.IR interval
+option-argument.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mie\ \fIpath_name\fR" 10
+.br
+Redefine the path to be used for the standard error stream of the batch
+job.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall accept a
+.IR path_name
+option-argument that conforms to the syntax of the
+.IR path_name
+element defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, which can be preceded by a host name
+element of the form
+.IR hostname :.
+.P
+If the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument constitutes an absolute pathname, the
+.IR qalter
+utility shall set the
+.IR Error_Path
+attribute of the batch job to the value of the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument, including the host name element, if present.
+.P
+If the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument constitutes a relative pathname and no host name
+element is specified, the
+.IR qalter
+utility shall set the
+.IR Error_Path
+attribute of the batch job to the value of the absolute pathname
+derived by expanding the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument relative to the current directory of the process that
+executes the
+.IR qalter
+utility.
+.P
+If the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument constitutes a relative pathname and a host name
+element is specified, the
+.IR qalter
+utility shall set the
+.IR Error_Path
+attribute of the batch job to the value of the option-argument without
+expansion.
+.P
+If the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument does not include a host name element, the
+.IR qalter
+utility shall prefix the pathname in the
+.IR Error_Path
+attribute with
+.IR hostname :,
+where
+.IR hostname
+is the name of the host upon which the
+.IR qalter
+utility is being executed.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mih\ \fIhold_list\fR" 10
+Redefine the types of holds, if any, on the batch job. The
+.IR qalter
+.BR \(mih
+option shall accept a value for the
+.IR hold_list
+option-argument that is a string of alphanumeric characters in the
+portable character set.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall accept a value for the
+.IR hold_list
+option-argument that is a string of one or more of the characters
+.BR 'u' ,
+.BR 's' ,
+or
+.BR 'o' ,
+or the single character
+.BR 'n' .
+For each unique character in the
+.IR hold_list
+option-argument, the
+.IR qalter
+utility shall add a value to the
+.IR Hold_Types
+attribute of the batch job as follows, each representing a different
+hold type:
+.IP "\fRu\fP" 6
+USER
+.IP "\fRs\fP" 6
+SYSTEM
+.IP "\fRo\fP" 6
+OPERATOR
+.P
+If any of these characters are duplicated in the
+.IR hold_list
+option-argument, the duplicates shall be ignored. An existing
+.IR Hold_Types
+attribute can be cleared by the hold type:
+.IP "\fRn\fP" 6
+NO_HOLD
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall consider it an error if any hold type other than
+.BR 'n' 
+is combined with hold type
+.BR 'n' .
+Strictly conforming applications shall not repeat any of the characters
+.BR 'u' ,
+.BR 's' ,
+.BR 'o' ,
+or
+.BR 'n' 
+within the
+.IR hold_list
+option-argument. The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall permit the repetition of characters, but shall not assign
+additional meaning to the repeated characters. An implementation may
+define other hold types. The conformance document for an implementation
+shall describe any additional hold types, how they are specified, their
+internal behavior, and how they affect the behavior of the utility.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mij\ \fIjoin_list\fR" 10
+Redefine which streams of the batch job are to be merged. The
+.IR qalter
+.BR \(mij
+option shall accept a value for the
+.IR join_list
+option-argument that is a string of alphanumeric characters in the
+portable character set.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall accept a
+.IR join_list
+option-argument that consists of one or more of the characters
+.BR 'e' 
+and
+.BR 'o' ,
+or the single character
+.BR 'n' .
+.P
+All of the other batch job output streams specified shall be merged
+into the output stream represented by the character listed first in the
+.IR join_list
+option-argument.
+.P
+For each unique character in the
+.IR join_list
+option-argument, the
+.IR qalter
+utility shall add a value to the
+.IR Join_Path
+attribute of the batch job as follows, each representing a different
+batch job stream to join:
+.IP "\fRe\fP" 6
+The standard error of the batch job (JOIN_STD_ERROR).
+.IP "\fRo\fP" 6
+The standard output of the batch job (JOIN_STD_OUTPUT).
+.P
+An existing
+.IR Join_Path
+attribute can be cleared by the join type:
+.IP "\fRn\fP" 6
+NO_JOIN
+.P
+If
+.BR 'n' 
+is specified, then no files are joined. The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall consider it an error if any join type other than
+.BR 'n' 
+is combined with join type
+.BR 'n' .
+.P
+Strictly conforming applications shall not repeat any of the characters
+.BR 'e' ,
+.BR 'o' ,
+or
+.BR 'n' 
+within the
+.IR join_list
+option-argument. The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall permit the repetition of characters, but shall not assign
+additional meaning to the repeated characters.
+.P
+An implementation may define other join types. The conformance document
+for an implementation shall describe any additional batch job streams,
+how they are specified, their internal behavior, and how they affect
+the behavior of the utility.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mik\ \fIkeep_list\fR" 10
+Redefine which output of the batch job to retain on the execution host.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+.BR \(mik
+option shall accept a value for the
+.IR keep_list
+option-argument that is a string of alphanumeric characters in the
+portable character set.
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall accept a
+.IR keep_list
+option-argument that consists of one or more of the characters
+.BR 'e' 
+and
+.BR 'o' ,
+or the single character
+.BR 'n' .
+.P
+For each unique character in the
+.IR keep_list
+option-argument, the
+.IR qalter
+utility shall add a value to the
+.IR Keep_Files
+attribute of the batch job as follows, each representing a different
+batch job stream to keep:
+.IP "\fRe\fP" 6
+The standard error of the batch job (KEEP_STD_ERROR).
+.IP "\fRo\fP" 6
+The standard output of the batch job (KEEP_STD_OUTPUT).
+.P
+If both
+.BR 'e' 
+and
+.BR 'o' 
+are specified, then both files are retained. An existing
+.IR Keep_Files
+attribute can be cleared by the keep type:
+.IP "\fRn\fP" 6
+NO_KEEP
+.P
+If
+.BR 'n' 
+is specified, then no files are retained. The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall consider it an error if any keep type other than
+.BR 'n' 
+is combined with keep type
+.BR 'n' .
+.P
+Strictly conforming applications shall not repeat any of the characters
+.BR 'e' ,
+.BR 'o' ,
+or
+.BR 'n' 
+within the
+.IR keep_list
+option-argument. The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall permit the repetition of characters, but shall not assign
+additional meaning to the repeated characters. An implementation may
+define other keep types. The conformance document for an implementation
+shall describe any additional keep types, how they are specified, their
+internal behavior, and how they affect the behavior of the utility.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mil\ \fIresource_list\fR" 10
+.br
+Redefine the resources that are allowed or required by the batch job.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall accept a
+.IR resource_list
+option-argument that conforms to the following syntax:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+resource=value[,,resource=value,,...]
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall set one entry in the value of the
+.IR Resource_List
+attribute of the batch job for each resource listed in the
+.IR resource_list
+option-argument.
+.P
+Because the list of supported resource names might vary by batch
+server, the
+.IR qalter
+utility shall rely on the batch server to validate the resource names
+and associated values. See
+.IR "Section 3.3.3" ", " "Multiple Keyword-Value Pairs"
+for a means of removing
+.IR keyword =\c
+.IR value
+(and
+.IR value @\c
+.IR keyword )
+pairs and other general rules for list-oriented batch job attributes.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mim\ \fImail_options\fR" 10
+.br
+Redefine the points in the execution of the batch job at which the
+batch server is to send mail about a change in the state of the batch
+job.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+.BR \(mim
+option shall accept a value for the
+.IR mail_options
+option-argument that is a string of alphanumeric characters in the
+portable character set.
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall accept a value for the
+.IR mail_options
+option-argument that is a string of one or more of the characters
+.BR 'e' ,
+.BR 'b' ,
+and
+.BR 'a' ,
+or the single character
+.BR 'n' .
+For each unique character in the
+.IR mail_options
+option-argument, the
+.IR qalter
+utility shall add a value to the
+.IR Mail_Users
+attribute of the batch job as follows, each representing a different
+time during the life of a batch job at which to send mail:
+.IP "\fRe\fP" 6
+MAIL_AT_EXIT
+.IP "\fRb\fP" 6
+MAIL_AT_BEGINNING
+.IP "\fRa\fP" 6
+MAIL_AT_ABORT
+.P
+If any of these characters are duplicated in the
+.IR mail_options
+option-argument, the duplicates shall be ignored.
+.P
+An existing
+.IR Mail_Points
+attribute can be cleared by the mail type:
+.IP "\fRn\fP" 6
+NO_MAIL
+.P
+If
+.BR 'n' 
+is specified, then mail is not sent. The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall consider it an error if any mail type other than
+.BR 'n' 
+is combined with mail type
+.BR 'n' .
+Strictly conforming applications shall not repeat any of the characters
+.BR 'e' ,
+.BR 'b' ,
+.BR 'a' ,
+or
+.BR 'n' 
+within the
+.IR mail_options
+option-argument. The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall permit the repetition of characters but shall not assign
+additional meaning to the repeated characters.
+.P
+An implementation may define other mail types. The conformance document
+for an implementation shall describe any additional mail types, how
+they are specified, their internal behavior, and how they affect the
+behavior of the utility.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miM\ \fImail_list\fR" 10
+Redefine the list of users to which the batch server that executes the
+batch job is to send mail, if the batch server sends mail about the
+batch job.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The syntax of the
+.IR mail_list
+option-argument is unspecified. If the implementation of the
+.IR qalter
+utility uses a name service to locate users, the utility shall accept
+the syntax used by the name service.
+.P
+If the implementation of the
+.IR qalter
+utility does not use a name service to locate users, the implementation
+shall accept the following syntax for user names:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+mail_address[,,mail_address,,...]
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The interpretation of
+.IR mail_address
+is implementation-defined.
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall set the
+.IR Mail_Users
+attribute of the batch job to the value of the
+.IR mail_list
+option-argument.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miN\ \fIname\fR" 10
+Redefine the name of the batch job.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+.BR \(miN
+option shall accept a value for the
+.IR name
+option-argument that is a string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters in
+the portable character set where the first character is alphabetic.
+.P
+The syntax of the
+.IR name
+option-argument is unspecified.
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall set the
+.IR Job_Name
+attribute of the batch job to the value of the
+.IR name
+option-argument.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mio\ \fIpath_name\fR" 10
+.br
+Redefine the path for the standard output of the batch job.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall accept a
+.IR path_name
+option-argument that conforms to the syntax of the
+.IR path_name
+element defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, which can be preceded by a host name
+element of the form
+.IR hostname :.
+.P
+If the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument constitutes an absolute pathname, the
+.IR qalter
+utility shall set the
+.IR Output_Path
+attribute of the batch job to the value of the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument.
+.P
+If the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument constitutes a relative pathname and no host name
+element is specified, the
+.IR qalter
+utility shall set the
+.IR Output_Path
+attribute of the batch job to the absolute pathname derived by
+expanding the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument relative to the current directory of the process that
+executes the
+.IR qalter
+utility.
+.P
+If the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument constitutes a relative pathname and a host name
+element is specified, the
+.IR qalter
+utility shall set the
+.IR Output_Path
+attribute of the batch job to the value of the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument without any expansion of the pathname.
+.P
+If the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument does not include a host name element, the
+.IR qalter
+utility shall prefix the pathname in the
+.IR Output_Path
+attribute with
+.IR hostname :,
+where
+.IR hostname
+is the name of the host upon which the
+.IR qalter
+utility is being executed.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mip\ \fIpriority\fR" 10
+Redefine the priority of the batch job.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall accept a value for the priority option-argument that
+conforms to the syntax for signed decimal integers, and which is not
+less than \(mi1\|024 and not greater than 1\|023.
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall set the
+.IR Priority
+attribute of the batch job to the value of the
+.IR priority
+option-argument.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mir\ \fRy\fR|\fRn\fR" 10
+Redefine whether the batch job is rerunnable.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If the value of the option-argument is
+.BR 'y' ,
+the
+.IR qalter
+utility shall set the
+.IR Rerunable
+attribute of the batch job to TRUE.
+.P
+If the value of the option-argument is
+.BR 'n' ,
+the
+.IR qalter
+utility shall set the
+.IR Rerunable
+attribute of the batch job to FALSE.
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall consider it an error if any character other than
+.BR 'y' 
+or
+.BR 'n' 
+is specified in the option-argument.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miS\ \fIpath_name_list\fR" 10
+.br
+Redefine the shell that interprets the script at the destination
+system.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall accept a
+.IR path_name_list
+option-argument that conforms to the following syntax:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+pathname[@host][,pathname[@host],...]
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall accept only one pathname that is missing a corresponding
+host name. The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall allow only one pathname per named host.
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall add a value to the
+.IR Shell_Path_List
+attribute of the batch job for each entry in the
+.IR path_name_list
+option-argument. See
+.IR "Section 3.3.3" ", " "Multiple Keyword-Value Pairs"
+for a means of removing
+.IR keyword =\c
+.IR value
+(and
+.IR value @\c
+.IR keyword )
+pairs and other general rules for list-oriented batch job attributes.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miu\ \fIuser_list\fR" 10
+Redefine the user name under which the batch job is to run at the
+destination system.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall accept a
+.IR user_list
+option-argument that conforms to the following syntax:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+username[@host][,,username[@host],,...]
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall accept only one user name that is missing a corresponding
+host name. The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall accept only one user name per named host.
+.P
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall add a value to the
+.IR User_List
+attribute of the batch job for each entry in the
+.IR user_list
+option-argument. See
+.IR "Section 3.3.3" ", " "Multiple Keyword-Value Pairs"
+for a means of removing
+.IR keyword =\c
+.IR value
+(and
+.IR value @\c
+.IR keyword )
+pairs and other general rules for list-oriented batch job attributes.
+.RE
+.SH OPERANDS
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility shall accept one or more operands that conform to the syntax
+for a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+(see
+.IR "Section 3.3.1" ", " "Batch Job Identifier").
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR qalter :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine the
+values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILOGNAME\fP" 10
+Determine the login name of the user.
+.IP "\fITZ\fP" 10
+Determine the timezone used to interpret the
+.IR date-time
+option-argument. If
+.IR TZ
+is unset or null, an unspecified default timezone shall be used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+None.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+In addition to the default behavior, the
+.IR qalter
+utility shall not be required to write a diagnostic message to standard
+error when the error reply received from a batch server indicates that
+the batch
+.IR job_identifier
+does not exist on the server. Whether or not the
+.IR qalter
+utility attempts to locate the batch job on other batch servers is
+implementation-defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility allows users to change the attributes of a batch job.
+.P
+As a means of altering a queued job, the
+.IR qalter
+utility is superior to deleting and requeuing the batch job insofar as
+an altered job retains its place in the queue with some traditional
+selection algorithms. In addition, the
+.IR qalter
+utility is both shorter and simpler than a sequence of
+.IR qdel
+and
+.IR qsub
+utilities.
+.P
+The result of an attempt on the part of a user to alter a batch job in
+a RUNNING state is implementation-defined because a batch job in the
+RUNNING state will already have opened its output files and otherwise
+performed any actions indicated by the options in effect at the time
+the batch job began execution.
+.P
+The options processed by the
+.IR qalter
+utility are identical to those of the
+.IR qsub
+utility, with a few exceptions:
+.BR \(miV ,
+.BR \(miv ,
+and
+.BR \(miq .
+The
+.BR \(miV
+and
+.BR \(miv
+are inappropriate for the
+.IR qalter
+utility, since they capture potentially transient environment
+information from the submitting process. The
+.BR \(miq
+option would specify a new queue, which would largely negate the
+previously stated advantage of using
+.IR qalter ;
+furthermore, the
+.IR qmove
+utility provides a superior means of moving jobs.
+.P
+Each of the following paragraphs provides the rationale for a
+.IR qalter
+option.
+.P
+Additional rationale concerning these options can be found in the
+rationale for the
+.IR qsub
+utility.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mia
+option allows users to alter the date and time at which a batch job
+becomes eligible to run.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miA
+option allows users to change the account that will be charged for the
+resources consumed by the batch job. Support for the
+.BR \(miA
+option is mandatory for conforming implementations of
+.IR qalter ,
+even though support of accounting is optional for servers. Whether or
+not to support accounting is left to the implementor of the server, but
+mandatory support of the
+.BR \(miA
+option assures users of a consistent interface and allows them to
+control accounting on servers that support accounting.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mic
+option allows users to alter the checkpointing interval of a batch
+job. A checkpointing system, which is not defined by POSIX.1\(hy2008, allows
+recovery of a batch job at the most recent checkpoint in the event of a
+crash. Checkpointing is typically used for jobs that consume expensive
+computing time or must meet a critical schedule. Users should be
+allowed to make the tradeoff between the overhead of checkpointing and
+the risk to the timely completion of the batch job; therefore, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+provides the checkpointing interval option. Support for checkpointing
+is optional for servers.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mie
+option allows users to alter the name and location of the standard
+error stream written by a batch job. However, the path of the standard
+error stream is meaningless if the value of the
+.IR Join_Path
+attribute of the batch job is TRUE.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mih
+option allows users to set the hold type in the
+.IR Hold_Types
+attribute of a batch job. The
+.IR qhold
+and
+.IR qrls
+utilities add or remove hold types to the
+.IR Hold_Types
+attribute, respectively. The
+.BR \(mih
+option has been modified to allow for implementation-defined hold
+types.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mij
+option allows users to alter the decision to join (merge) the standard
+error stream of the batch job with the standard output stream of the
+batch job.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mil
+option allows users to change the resource limits imposed on a batch
+job.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mim
+option allows users to modify the list of points in the life of a batch
+job at which the designated users will receive mail notification.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miM
+option allows users to alter the list of users who will receive
+notification about events in the life of a batch job.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miN
+option allows users to change the name of a batch job.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mio
+option allows users to alter the name and path to which the standard
+output stream of the batch job will be written.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miP
+option allows users to modify the priority of a batch job. Support for
+priority is optional for batch servers.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mir
+option allows users to alter the rerunability status of a batch job.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miS
+option allows users to change the name and location of the shell image
+that will be invoked to interpret the script of the batch job. This
+option has been modified to allow a list of shell name and locations
+associated with different hosts.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miu
+option allows users to change the user identifier under which the batch
+job will execute.
+.P
+The
+.IR job_identifier
+operand syntax is provided so that the user can differentiate between
+the originating and destination (or executing) batch server. These may
+or may not be the same. The .\c
+.IR server_name
+portion identifies the originating batch server, while the @\c
+.IR server
+portion identifies the destination batch server.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.IR qalter
+utility has been a component of the Network Queuing System (NQS), the
+existing practice from which this utility has been derived.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+.IR qalter
+utility may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 3" ", " "Batch Environment Services",
+.IR "\fIqdel\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIqhold\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIqmove\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIqrls\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIqsub\fR\^",
+.IR "\fItouch\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qdel.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qdel.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..322db96
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qdel.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,208 @@
+'\" et
+.TH QDEL "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+qdel
+\(em delete batch jobs
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+qdel \fIjob_identifier\fP...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+A batch job is deleted by sending a request to the batch server that
+manages the batch job. A batch job that has been deleted is no longer
+subject to management by batch services.
+.P
+The
+.IR qdel
+utility is a user-accessible client of batch services that requests the
+deletion of one or more batch jobs.
+.P
+The
+.IR qdel
+utility shall request a batch server to delete those batch jobs for
+which a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+is presented to the utility.
+.P
+The
+.IR qdel
+utility shall delete batch jobs in the order in which their batch
+.IR job_identifier s
+are presented to the utility.
+.P
+If the
+.IR qdel
+utility fails to process any batch
+.IR job_identifier
+successfully, the utility shall proceed to process the remaining batch
+.IR job_identifier s,
+if any.
+.P
+The
+.IR qdel
+utility shall delete each batch job by sending a
+.IR "Delete Job Request"
+to the batch server that manages the batch job.
+.P
+The
+.IR qdel
+utility shall not exit until the batch job corresponding to each
+successfully processed batch
+.IR job_identifier
+has been deleted.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The
+.IR qdel
+utility shall accept one or more operands that conform to the syntax
+for a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+(see
+.IR "Section 3.3.1" ", " "Batch Job Identifier").
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR qdel :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine the
+values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILOGNAME\fP" 10
+Determine the login name of the user.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+An implementation of the
+.IR qdel
+utility may write informative messages to standard output.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+In addition to the default behavior, the
+.IR qdel
+utility shall not be required to write a diagnostic message to standard
+error when the error reply received from a batch server indicates that
+the batch
+.IR job_identifier
+does not exist on the server. Whether or not the
+.IR qdel
+utility waits to output the diagnostic message while attempting to
+locate the job on other servers is implementation-defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR qdel
+utility allows users and administrators to delete jobs.
+.P
+The
+.IR qdel
+utility provides functionality that is not otherwise available. For
+example, the
+.IR kill
+utility of the operating system does not suffice. First, to use the
+.IR kill
+utility, the user might have to log in on a remote node, because the
+.IR kill
+utility does not operate across the network. Second, unlike
+.IR qdel ,
+.IR kill
+cannot remove jobs from queues. Lastly, the arguments of the
+.IR qdel
+utility are job identifiers rather than process identifiers, and so
+this utility can be passed the output of the
+.IR qselect
+utility, thus providing users with a means of deleting a list of jobs.
+.P
+Because a set of jobs can be selected using the
+.IR qselect
+utility, the
+.IR qdel
+utility has not been complicated with options that provide for
+selection of jobs. Instead, the batch jobs to be deleted are identified
+individually by their job identifiers.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.IR qdel
+utility has been a component of NQS, the existing practice on which it
+is based. However, the
+.IR qdel
+utility defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not provide an option for specifying a
+signal number to send to the batch job prior to the killing of the
+process; that capability has been subsumed by the
+.IR qsig
+utility.
+.P
+A discussion was held about the delays of networking and the
+possibility that the batch server may never respond, due to a down
+router, down batch server, or other network mishap. The DESCRIPTION
+records this under the words ``fails to process any job identifier''.
+In the broad sense, the network problem is also an error, which causes
+the failure to process the batch job identifier.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+.IR qdel
+utility may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 3" ", " "Batch Environment Services",
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIqselect\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIqsig\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qhold.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qhold.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c1f0088
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qhold.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,270 @@
+'\" et
+.TH QHOLD "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+qhold
+\(em hold batch jobs
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+qhold \fB[\fR\(mih \fIhold_list\fB] \fIjob_identifier\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+A hold is placed on a batch job by a request to the batch server that
+manages the batch job. A batch job that has one or more holds is not
+eligible for execution. The
+.IR qhold
+utility is a user-accessible client of batch services that requests one
+or more types of hold to be placed on one or more batch jobs.
+.P
+The
+.IR qhold
+utility shall place holds on those batch jobs for which a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+is presented to the utility.
+.P
+The
+.IR qhold
+utility shall place holds on batch jobs in the order in which their
+batch
+.IR job_identifier s
+are presented to the utility. If the
+.IR qhold
+utility fails to process any batch
+.IR job_identifier
+successfully, the utility shall proceed to process the remaining batch
+.IR job_identifier s,
+if any.
+.P
+The
+.IR qhold
+utility shall place holds on each batch job by sending a
+.IR "Hold Job Request"
+to the batch server that manages the batch job.
+.P
+The
+.IR qhold
+utility shall not exit until holds have been placed on the batch job
+corresponding to each successfully processed batch
+.IR job_identifier .
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR qhold
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported by the implementation:
+.IP "\fB\(mih\ \fIhold_list\fR" 10
+Define the types of holds to be placed on the batch job.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qhold
+.BR \(mih
+option shall accept a value for the
+.IR hold_list
+option-argument that is a string of alphanumeric characters in the
+portable character set (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set").
+.P
+The
+.IR qhold
+utility shall accept a value for the
+.IR hold_list
+option-argument that is a string of one or more of the characters
+.BR 'u' ,
+.BR 's' ,
+or
+.BR 'o' ,
+or the single character
+.BR 'n' .
+.P
+For each unique character in the
+.IR hold_list
+option-argument, the
+.IR qhold
+utility shall add a value to the
+.IR Hold_Types
+attribute of the batch job as follows, each representing a different
+hold type:
+.IP "\fRu\fP" 6
+USER
+.IP "\fRs\fP" 6
+SYSTEM
+.IP "\fRo\fP" 6
+OPERATOR
+.P
+If any of these characters are duplicated in the
+.IR hold_list
+option-argument, the duplicates shall be ignored.
+.P
+An existing
+.IR Hold_Types
+attribute can be cleared by the following hold type:
+.IP "\fRn\fP" 6
+NO_HOLD
+.P
+The
+.IR qhold
+utility shall consider it an error if any hold type other than
+.BR 'n' 
+is combined with hold type
+.BR 'n' .
+.P
+Strictly conforming applications shall not repeat any of the characters
+.BR 'u' ,
+.BR 's' ,
+.BR 'o' ,
+or
+.BR 'n' 
+within the
+.IR hold_list
+option-argument. The
+.IR qhold
+utility shall permit the repetition of characters, but shall not assign
+additional meaning to the repeated characters.
+.P
+An implementation may define other hold types. The conformance document
+for an implementation shall describe any additional hold types, how
+they are specified, their internal behavior, and how they affect the
+behavior of the utility.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mih
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qhold
+utility, the implementation shall set the
+.IR Hold_Types
+attribute to USER.
+.RE
+.SH OPERANDS
+The
+.IR qhold
+utility shall accept one or more operands that conform to the syntax
+for a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+(see
+.IR "Section 3.3.1" ", " "Batch Job Identifier").
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR qhold :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine the
+values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILOGNAME\fP" 10
+Determine the login name of the user.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+None.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+.br
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+In addition to the default behavior, the
+.IR qhold
+utility shall not be required to write a diagnostic message to standard
+error when the error reply received from a batch server indicates that
+the batch
+.IR job_identifier
+does not exist on the server. Whether or not the
+.IR qhold
+utility waits to output the diagnostic message while attempting to
+locate the job on other servers is implementation-defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR qhold
+utility allows users to place a hold on one or more jobs. A hold makes
+a batch job ineligible for execution.
+.P
+The
+.IR qhold
+utility has options that allow the user to specify the type of hold.
+Should the user wish to place a hold on a set of jobs that meet a
+selection criteria, such a list of jobs can be acquired using the
+.IR qselect
+utility.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mih
+option allows the user to specify the type of hold that is to be placed
+on the job. This option allows for USER, SYSTEM, OPERATOR, and
+implementation-defined hold types. The USER and OPERATOR holds are
+distinct. The batch server that manages the batch job will verify that
+the user is authorized to set the specified hold for the batch job.
+.P
+Mail is not required on hold because the administrator has the tools
+and libraries to build this option if he or she wishes.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.IR qhold
+utility has been a part of some existing batch systems, although it has
+not traditionally been a part of the NQS.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+.IR qhold
+utility may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 3" ", " "Batch Environment Services",
+.IR "\fIqselect\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qmove.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qmove.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a64e98e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qmove.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,187 @@
+'\" et
+.TH QMOVE "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+qmove
+\(em move batch jobs
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+qmove \fIdestination job_identifier\fP...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+To move a batch job is to remove the batch job from the batch queue in
+which it resides and instantiate the batch job in another batch queue.
+A batch job is moved by a request to the batch server that manages the
+batch job. The
+.IR qmove
+utility is a user-accessible batch client that requests the movement of
+one or more batch jobs.
+.P
+The
+.IR qmove
+utility shall move those batch jobs, and only those batch jobs, for
+which a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+is presented to the utility.
+.P
+The
+.IR qmove
+utility shall move batch jobs in the order in which the corresponding
+batch
+.IR job_identifier s
+are presented to the utility.
+.P
+If the
+.IR qmove
+utility fails to process a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+successfully, the utility shall proceed to process the remaining batch
+.IR job_identifier s,
+if any.
+.P
+The
+.IR qmove
+utility shall move batch jobs by sending a
+.IR "Move Job Request"
+to the batch server that manages each batch job. The
+.IR qmove
+utility shall not exit before the batch jobs corresponding to all
+successfully processed batch
+.IR job_identifier s
+have been moved.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The
+.IR qmove
+utility shall accept one operand that conforms to the syntax for a
+destination (see
+.IR "Section 3.3.2" ", " "Destination").
+.P
+The
+.IR qmove
+utility shall accept one or more operands that conform to the syntax
+for a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+(see
+.IR "Section 3.3.1" ", " "Batch Job Identifier").
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR qmove :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine the
+values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILOGNAME\fP" 10
+Determine the login name of the user.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+None.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+In addition to the default behavior, the
+.IR qmove
+utility shall not be required to write a diagnostic message to standard
+error when the error reply received from a batch server indicates that
+the batch
+.IR job_identifier
+does not exist on the server. Whether or not the
+.IR qmove
+utility waits to output the diagnostic message while attempting to
+locate the job on other servers is implementation-defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR qmove
+utility allows users to move jobs between queues.
+.P
+The alternative to using the
+.IR qmove
+utility\(emdeleting the batch job and requeuing it\(ementails
+considerably more typing.
+.P
+Since the means of selecting jobs based on attributes has been
+encapsulated in the
+.IR qselect
+utility, the only option of the
+.IR qmove
+utility concerns authorization. The
+.BR \(miu
+option provides the user with the convenience of changing the user
+identifier under which the batch job will execute. Minimalism and
+consistency have taken precedence over convenience; the
+.BR \(miu
+option has been deleted because the equivalent capability exists with
+the
+.BR \(miu
+option of the
+.IR qalter
+utility.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+.IR qmove
+utility may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 3" ", " "Batch Environment Services",
+.IR "\fIqalter\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIqselect\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qmsg.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qmsg.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0a8d237
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qmsg.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,265 @@
+'\" et
+.TH QMSG "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+qmsg
+\(em send message to batch jobs
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+qmsg \fB[\fR\(miEO\fB] \fImessage_string job_identifier\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+To send a message to a batch job is to request that a server write a
+message string into one or more output files of the batch job. A
+message is sent to a batch job by a request to the batch server that
+manages the batch job. The
+.IR qmsg
+utility is a user-accessible batch client that requests the sending of
+messages to one or more batch jobs.
+.P
+The
+.IR qmsg
+utility shall write messages into the files of batch jobs by sending a
+.IR "Job Message Request"
+to the batch server that manages the batch job. The
+.IR qmsg
+utility shall not directly write the message into the files of the
+batch job.
+.P
+The
+.IR qmsg
+utility shall send a
+.IR "Job Message Request"
+for those batch jobs, and only those batch jobs, for which a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+is presented to the utility.
+.P
+The
+.IR qmsg
+utility shall send
+.IR "Job Message Request" s
+for batch jobs in the order in which their batch
+.IR job_identifier s
+are presented to the utility.
+.P
+If the
+.IR qmsg
+utility fails to process any batch
+.IR job_identifier
+successfully, the utility shall proceed to process the remaining batch
+.IR job_identifier s,
+if any.
+.P
+The
+.IR qmsg
+utility shall not exit before a
+.IR "Job Message Request"
+has been sent to the server that manages the batch job that corresponds
+to each successfully processed batch
+.IR job_identifier .
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR qmsg
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported by the implementation:
+.IP "\fB\(miE\fP" 10
+Specify that the message is written to the standard error of each batch
+job.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qmsg
+utility shall write the message into the standard error of the batch
+job.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miO\fP" 10
+Specify that the message is written to the standard output of each
+batch job.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qmsg
+utility shall write the message into the standard output of the batch
+job.
+.RE
+.P
+If neither the
+.BR \(miO
+nor the
+.BR \(miE
+option is presented to the
+.IR qmsg
+utility, the utility shall write the message into an
+implementation-defined file. The conformance document for the
+implementation shall describe the name and location of the
+implementation-defined file. If both the
+.BR \(miO
+and the
+.BR \(miE
+options are presented to the
+.IR qmsg
+utility, then the utility shall write the messages to both standard
+output and standard error.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The
+.IR qmsg
+utility shall accept a minimum of two operands,
+.IR message_string
+and one or more batch
+.IR job_identifier s.
+.P
+The
+.IR message_string
+operand shall be the string to be written to one or more output files
+of the batch job followed by a
+<newline>.
+If the string contains
+<blank>
+characters, then the application shall ensure that the string is
+quoted. The
+.IR message_string
+shall be encoded in the portable character set (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set").
+.P
+All remaining operands are batch
+.IR job_identifier s
+that conform to the syntax for a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+(see
+.IR "Section 3.3.1" ", " "Batch Job Identifier").
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR qmsg :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine the
+values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILOGNAME\fP" 10
+Determine the login name of the user.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+None.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+In addition to the default behavior, the
+.IR qmsg
+utility shall not be required to write a diagnostic message to standard
+error when the error reply received from a batch server indicates that
+the batch
+.IR job_identifier
+does not exist on the server. Whether or not the
+.IR qmsg
+utility waits to output the diagnostic message while attempting to
+locate the job on other servers is implementation-defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR qmsg
+utility allows users to write messages into the output files of running
+jobs. Users, including operators and administrators, have a number of
+occasions when they want to place messages in the output files of a
+batch job. For example, if a disk that is being used by a batch job is
+showing errors, the operator might note this in the standard error
+stream of the batch job.
+.P
+The options of the
+.IR qmsg
+utility provide users with the means of placing the message in the
+output stream of their choice. The default output stream for the
+message\(emif the user does not designate an output stream\(emis
+implementation-defined, since many implementations will provide, as
+an extension to this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, a log file that shows the history of utility
+execution.
+.P
+If users wish to send a message to a set of jobs that meet a selection
+criteria, the
+.IR qselect
+utility can be used to acquire the appropriate list of job
+identifiers.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miE
+option allows users to place the message in the standard error stream
+of the batch job.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miO
+option allows users to place the message in the standard output stream
+of the batch job.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.IR qmsg
+utility is an existing practice in the offerings of one or more
+implementors of an NQS-derived batch system. The utility has been found
+to be useful enough that it deserves to be included in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+.IR qmsg
+utility may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 3" ", " "Batch Environment Services",
+.IR "\fIqselect\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qrerun.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qrerun.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..537bc8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qrerun.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+'\" et
+.TH QRERUN "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+qrerun
+\(em rerun batch jobs
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+qrerun \fIjob_identifier\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+To rerun a batch job is to terminate the session leader of the batch
+job, delete any associated checkpoint files, and return the batch job
+to the batch queued state. A batch job is rerun by a request to the
+batch server that manages the batch job. The
+.IR qrerun
+utility is a user-accessible batch client that requests the rerunning
+of one or more batch jobs.
+.P
+The
+.IR qrerun
+utility shall rerun those batch jobs for which a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+is presented to the utility.
+.P
+The
+.IR qrerun
+utility shall rerun batch jobs in the order in which their batch
+.IR job_identifier s
+are presented to the utility.
+.P
+If the
+.IR qrerun
+utility fails to process any batch
+.IR job_identifier
+successfully, the utility shall proceed to process the remaining batch
+.IR job_identifier s,
+if any.
+.P
+The
+.IR qrerun
+utility shall rerun batch jobs by sending a
+.IR "Rerun Job Request"
+to the batch server that manages each batch job.
+.P
+For each successfully processed batch
+.IR job_identifier ,
+the
+.IR qrerun
+utility shall have rerun the corresponding batch job at the time
+the utility exits.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The
+.IR qrerun
+utility shall accept one or more operands that conform to the syntax
+for a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+(see
+.IR "Section 3.3.1" ", " "Batch Job Identifier").
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR qrerun :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine the
+values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILOGNAME\fP" 10
+Determine the login name of the user.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+None.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+In addition to the default behavior, the
+.IR qrerun
+utility shall not be required to write a diagnostic message to standard
+error when the error reply received from a batch server indicates that
+the batch
+.IR job_identifier
+does not exist on the server. Whether or not the
+.IR qrerun
+utility waits to output the diagnostic message while attempting to
+locate the job on other servers is implementation-defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR qrerun
+utility allows users to cause jobs in the running state to exit and
+rerun.
+.P
+The
+.IR qrerun
+utility is a new utility, \fIvis-a-vis\fP existing practice, that has
+been defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 to correct user-perceived deficiencies in the
+existing practice.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+.IR qrerun
+utility may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 3" ", " "Batch Environment Services"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qrls.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qrls.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dfc78df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qrls.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,279 @@
+'\" et
+.TH QRLS "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+qrls
+\(em release batch jobs
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+qrls \fB[\fR\(mih \fIhold_list\fB] \fIjob_identifier\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+A batch job might have one or more holds, which prevent the batch job
+from executing. A batch job from which all the holds have been removed
+becomes eligible for execution and is said to have been released. A
+batch job hold is removed by sending a request to the batch server that
+manages the batch job. The
+.IR qrls
+utility is a user-accessible client of batch services that requests
+holds be removed from one or more batch jobs.
+.P
+The
+.IR qrls
+utility shall remove one or more holds from those batch jobs for which
+a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+is presented to the utility.
+.P
+The
+.IR qrls
+utility shall remove holds from batch jobs in the order in which their
+batch
+.IR job_identifier s
+are presented to the utility.
+.P
+If the
+.IR qrls
+utility fails to process a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+successfully, the utility shall proceed to process the remaining batch
+.IR job_identifier s,
+if any.
+.P
+The
+.IR qrls
+utility shall remove holds on each batch job by sending a
+.IR "Release Job Request"
+to the batch server that manages the batch job.
+.P
+The
+.IR qrls
+utility shall not exit until the holds have been removed from the batch
+job corresponding to each successfully processed batch
+.IR job_identifier .
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR qrls
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported by the implementation:
+.IP "\fB\(mih\ \fIhold_list\fR" 10
+Define the types of holds to be removed from the batch job.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qrls
+.BR \(mih
+option shall accept a value for the
+.IR hold_list
+option-argument that is a string of alphanumeric characters in the
+portable character set (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set").
+.P
+The
+.IR qrls
+utility shall accept a value for the
+.IR hold_list
+option-argument that is a string of one or more of the characters
+.BR 'u' ,
+.BR 's' ,
+or
+.BR 'o' ,
+or the single character
+.BR 'n' .
+.P
+For each unique character in the
+.IR hold_list
+option-argument, the
+.IR qrls
+utility shall add a value to the
+.IR Hold_Types
+attribute of the batch job as follows, each representing a different
+hold type:
+.IP "\fRu\fP" 6
+USER
+.IP "\fRs\fP" 6
+SYSTEM
+.IP "\fRo\fP" 6
+OPERATOR
+.P
+If any of these characters are duplicated in the
+.IR hold_list
+option-argument, the duplicates shall be ignored.
+.P
+An existing
+.IR Hold_Types
+attribute can be cleared by the following hold type:
+.IP "\fRn\fP" 6
+NO_HOLD
+.P
+The
+.IR qrls
+utility shall consider it an error if any hold type other than
+.BR 'n' 
+is combined with hold type
+.BR 'n' .
+.P
+Strictly conforming applications shall not repeat any of the characters
+.BR 'u' ,
+.BR 's' ,
+.BR 'o' ,
+or
+.BR 'n' 
+within the
+.IR hold_list
+option-argument. The
+.IR qrls
+utility shall permit the repetition of characters, but shall not assign
+additional meaning to the repeated characters.
+.P
+An implementation may define other hold types. The conformance document
+for an implementation shall describe any additional hold types, how
+they are specified, their internal behavior, and how they affect the
+behavior of the utility.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mih
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qrls
+utility, the implementation shall remove the USER hold in the
+.IR Hold_Types
+attribute.
+.RE
+.SH OPERANDS
+The
+.IR qrls
+utility shall accept one or more operands that conform to the syntax
+for a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+(see
+.IR "Section 3.3.1" ", " "Batch Job Identifier").
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR qrls :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine the
+values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILOGNAME\fP" 10
+Determine the login name of the user.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+None.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+In addition to the default behavior, the
+.IR qrls
+utility shall not be required to write a diagnostic message to standard
+error when the error reply received from a batch server indicates that
+the batch
+.IR job_identifier
+does not exist on the server. Whether or not the
+.IR qrls
+utility waits to output the diagnostic message while attempting to
+locate the job on other servers is implementation-defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR qrls
+utility allows users, operators, and administrators to remove holds
+from jobs.
+.P
+The
+.IR qrls
+utility does not support any job selection options or wildcard
+arguments. Users may acquire a list of jobs selected by attributes
+using the
+.IR qselect
+utility. For example, a user could select all of their held jobs.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mih
+option allows the user to specify the type of hold that is to be
+removed. This option allows for USER, SYSTEM, OPERATOR, and
+implementation-defined hold types. The batch server that manages the
+batch job will verify whether the user is authorized to remove the
+specified hold for the batch job. If more than one type of hold has
+been placed on the batch job, a user may wish to remove only some of
+them.
+.P
+Mail is not required on release because the administrator has the tools
+and libraries to build this option if required.
+.P
+The
+.IR qrls
+utility is a new utility \fIvis-a-vis\fP existing practice; it has been
+defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 as the natural complement to the
+.IR qhold
+utility.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+.IR qrls
+utility may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 3" ", " "Batch Environment Services",
+.IR "\fIqhold\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIqselect\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qselect.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qselect.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6d9e6bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qselect.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,918 @@
+'\" et
+.TH QSELECT "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+qselect
+\(em select batch jobs
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+qselect \fB[\fR\(mia \fB[\fIop\fB]\fIdate_time\fB] [\fR\(miA \fIaccount_string\fB] [\fR\(mic \fB[\fIop\fB]\fIinterval\fB]
+    [\fR\(mih \fIhold_list\fB] [\fR\(mil \fIresource_list\fB] [\fR\(miN \fIname\fB] [\fR\(mip \fB[\fIop\fB]\fIpriority\fB]
+    [\fR\(miq \fIdestination\fB] [\fR\(mir \fIy\fR|\fIn\fB] [\fR\(mis \fIstates\fB] [\fR\(miu \fIuser_list\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+To select a set of batch jobs is to return the batch
+.IR job_identifier s
+for each batch job that meets a list of selection criteria. A set of
+batch jobs is selected by a request to a batch server. The
+.IR qselect
+utility is a user-accessible batch client that requests the selection
+of batch jobs.
+.P
+Upon successful completion, the
+.IR qselect
+utility shall have returned a list of zero or more batch
+.IR job_identifier s
+that meet the criteria specified by the options and option-arguments
+presented to the utility.
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall select batch jobs by sending a
+.IR "Select Jobs Request"
+to a batch server. The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall not exit until the server replies to each request
+generated.
+.P
+For each option presented to the
+.IR qselect
+utility, the utility shall restrict the set of selected batch jobs as
+described in the OPTIONS section.
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall not restrict selection of batch jobs except by
+authorization and as required by the options presented to the utility.
+.P
+When an option is specified with a mandatory or optional
+.IR op
+component to the option-argument, then
+.IR op
+shall specify a relation between the value of a certain batch job
+attribute and the
+.IR value
+component of the option-argument. If an
+.IR op
+is allowable on an option, then the description of the option letter
+indicates the
+.IR op
+as either mandatory or optional. Acceptable strings for the
+.IR op
+component, and the relation the string indicates, are shown in the
+following list:
+.IP "\fR.eq.\fR" 8
+The value represented by the attribute of the batch job is equal to the
+value represented by the option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.ge.\fR" 8
+The value represented by the attribute of the batch job is greater than
+or equal to the value represented by the option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.gt.\fR" 8
+The value represented by the attribute of the batch job is greater than
+the value represented by the option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.lt.\fR" 8
+The value represented by the attribute of the batch job is less than
+the value represented by the option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.le.\fR" 8
+The value represented by the attribute of the batch job is less than or
+equal to the value represented by the option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.ne.\fR" 8
+The value represented by the attribute of the batch job is not equal to
+the value represented by the option-argument.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported by the implementation:
+.IP "\fB\(mia\ [\fIop\fB]\fIdate_time\fR" 10
+.br
+Restrict selection to a specific time, or a range of times.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall select only batch jobs for which the value of the
+.IR Execution_Time
+attribute is related to the Epoch equivalent of the local time
+expressed by the value of the
+.IR date_time
+component of the option-argument in the manner indicated by the value
+of the
+.IR op
+component of the option-argument.
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall accept a
+.IR date_time
+component of the option-argument that conforms to the syntax of the
+.IR time
+operand of the
+.IR touch
+utility.
+.P
+If the
+.IR op
+component of the option-argument is not presented to the
+.IR qselect
+utility, the utility shall select batch jobs for which the
+.IR Execution_Time
+attribute is equal to the
+.IR date_time
+component of the option-argument.
+.P
+When comparing times, the
+.IR qselect
+utility shall use the following definitions for the
+.IR op
+component of the option-argument:
+.IP "\fR.eq.\fR" 8
+The time represented by value of the
+.IR Execution_Time
+attribute of the batch job is equal to the time represented by the
+.IR date_time
+component of the option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.ge.\fR" 8
+The time represented by value of the
+.IR Execution_Time
+attribute of the batch job is after or equal to the time represented by
+the
+.IR date_time
+component of the option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.gt.\fR" 8
+The time represented by value of the
+.IR Execution_Time
+attribute of the batch job is after the time represented by the
+.IR date_time
+component of the option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.lt.\fR" 8
+The time represented by value of the
+.IR Execution_Time
+attribute of the batch job is before the time represented by the
+.IR date_time
+component of the option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.le.\fR" 8
+The time represented by value of the
+.IR Execution_Time
+attribute of the batch job is before or equal to the time represented
+by the
+.IR date_time
+component of the option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.ne.\fR" 8
+The time represented by value of the
+.IR Execution_Time
+attribute of the batch job is not equal to the time represented by the
+.IR date_time
+component of the option-argument.
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall accept the defined character strings for the
+.IR op
+component of the option-argument.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miA\ \fIaccount_string\fR" 10
+.br
+Restrict selection to the batch jobs charging a specified account.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall select only batch jobs for which the value of the
+.IR Account_Name
+attribute of the batch job matches the value of the
+.IR account_string
+option-argument.
+.P
+The syntax of the
+.IR account_string
+option-argument is unspecified.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mic\ [\fIop\fB]\fIinterval\fR" 10
+.br
+Restrict selection to batch jobs within a range of checkpoint
+intervals.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall select only batch jobs for which the value of the
+.IR Checkpoint
+attribute relates to the value of the
+.IR interval
+component of the option-argument in the manner indicated by the value
+of the
+.IR op
+component of the option-argument.
+.P
+If the
+.IR op
+component of the option-argument is omitted, the
+.IR qselect
+utility shall select batch jobs for which the value of the
+.IR Checkpoint
+attribute is equal to the value of the
+.IR interval
+component of the option-argument.
+.P
+When comparing checkpoint intervals, the
+.IR qselect
+utility shall use the following definitions for the
+.IR op
+component of the option-argument:
+.IP "\fR.eq.\fR" 8
+The value of the
+.IR Checkpoint
+attribute of the batch job equals the value of the
+.IR interval
+component of the option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.ge.\fR" 8
+The value of the
+.IR Checkpoint
+attribute of the batch job is greater than or equal to the value of the
+.IR interval
+component option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.gt.\fR" 8
+The value of the
+.IR Checkpoint
+attribute of the batch job is greater than the value of the
+.IR interval
+component option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.lt.\fR" 8
+The value of the
+.IR Checkpoint
+attribute of the batch job is less than the value of the
+.IR interval
+component option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.le.\fR" 8
+The value of the
+.IR Checkpoint
+attribute of the batch job is less than or equal to the value of the
+.IR interval
+component option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.ne.\fR" 8
+The value of the
+.IR Checkpoint
+attribute of the batch job does not equal the value of the
+.IR interval
+component option-argument.
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall accept the defined character strings for the
+.IR op
+component of the option-argument.
+.P
+The ordering relationship for the values of the interval
+option-argument is defined to be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\&`n' .gt. `s' .gt. `c=\fIminutes\fR' .ge. `c'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+When comparing
+.IR Checkpoint
+attributes with an interval having the value of the single character
+.BR 'u' ,
+only equality or inequality are valid comparisons.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mih\ \fIhold_list\fR" 10
+Restrict selection to batch jobs that have a specific type of hold.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall select only batch jobs for which the value of the
+.IR Hold_Types
+attribute matches the value of the
+.IR hold_list
+option-argument.
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+.BR \(mih
+option shall accept a value for the
+.IR hold_list
+option-argument that is a string of alphanumeric characters in the
+portable character set (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set").
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall accept a value for the
+.IR hold_list
+option-argument that is a string of one or more of the characters
+.BR 'u' ,
+.BR 's' ,
+or
+.BR 'o' ,
+or the single character
+.BR 'n' .
+.P
+Each unique character in the
+.IR hold_list
+option-argument of the
+.IR qselect
+utility is defined as follows, each representing a different hold type:
+.IP "\fRu\fP" 6
+USER
+.IP "\fRs\fP" 6
+SYSTEM
+.IP "\fRo\fP" 6
+OPERATOR
+.P
+If any of these characters are duplicated in the
+.IR hold_list
+option-argument, the duplicates shall be ignored.
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall consider it an error if any hold type other than
+.BR 'n' 
+is combined with hold type
+.BR 'n' .
+.P
+Strictly conforming applications shall not repeat any of the characters
+.BR 'u' ,
+.BR 's' ,
+.BR 'o' ,
+or
+.BR 'n' 
+within the
+.IR hold_list
+option-argument. The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall permit the repetition of characters, but shall not assign
+additional meaning to the repeated characters.
+.P
+An implementation may define other hold types. The conformance document
+for an implementation shall describe any additional hold types, how
+they are specified, their internal behavior, and how they affect the
+behavior of the utility.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mil\ \fIresource_list\fR" 10
+.br
+Restrict selection to batch jobs with specified resource limits and
+attributes.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall accept a
+.IR resource_list
+option-argument with the following syntax:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIresource_name op value \fB[\fR,,\fIresource_name op value\fR,, ...\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+When comparing resource values, the
+.IR qselect
+utility shall use the following definitions for the
+.IR op
+component of the option-argument:
+.IP "\fR.eq.\fR" 8
+The value of the resource of the same name in the
+.IR Resource_List
+attribute of the batch job equals the value of the value component of
+the option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.ge.\fR" 8
+The value of the resource of the same name in the
+.IR Resource_List
+attribute of the batch job is greater than or equal to the value of the
+.IR value
+component of the option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.gt.\fR" 8
+The value of the resource of the same name in the
+.IR Resource_List
+attribute of the batch job is greater than the value of the value
+component of the option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.lt.\fR" 8
+The value of the resource of the same name in the
+.IR Resource_List
+attribute of the batch job is less than the value of the value
+component of the option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.ne.\fR" 8
+The value of the resource of the same name in the
+.IR Resource_List
+attribute of the batch job does not equal the value of the value
+component of the option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.le.\fR" 8
+The value of the resource of the same name in the
+.IR Resource_List
+attribute of the batch job is less than or equal to the value of the
+.IR value
+component of the option-argument.
+.P
+When comparing the limit of a
+.IR Resource_List
+attribute with the
+.IR value
+component of the option-argument, if the limit, the value, or both are
+non-numeric, only equality or inequality are valid comparisons.
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall select only batch jobs for which the values of the
+.IR resource_name s
+listed in the
+.IR resource_list
+option-argument match the corresponding limits of the
+.IR Resource_List
+attribute of the batch job.
+.P
+Limits of
+.IR resource_name s
+present in the
+.IR Resource_List
+attribute of the batch job that have no corresponding values in the
+.IR resource_list
+option-argument shall not be considered when selecting batch jobs.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miN\ \fIname\fR" 10
+Restrict selection to batch jobs with a specified name.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall select only batch jobs for which the value of the
+.IR Job_Name
+attribute matches the value of the
+.IR name
+option-argument. The string specified in the
+.IR name
+option-argument shall be passed, uninterpreted, to the server. This
+allows an implementation to match ``wildcard'' patterns against batch
+job names.
+.P
+An implementation shall describe in the conformance document the format
+it supports for matching against the
+.IR Job_Name
+attribute.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mip\ [\fIop\fB]\fIpriority\fR" 10
+.br
+Restrict selection to batch jobs of the specified priority or range of
+priorities.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall select only batch jobs for which the value of the
+.IR Priority
+attribute of the batch job relates to the value of the
+.IR priority
+component of the option-argument in the manner indicated by the value
+of the
+.IR op
+component of the option-argument.
+.P
+If the
+.IR op
+component of the option-argument is omitted, the
+.IR qselect
+utility shall select batch jobs for which the value of the
+.IR Priority
+attribute of the batch job is equal to the value of the
+.IR priority
+component of the option-argument.
+.P
+When comparing priority values, the
+.IR qselect
+utility shall use the following definitions for the
+.IR op
+component of the option-argument:
+.IP "\fR.eq.\fR" 8
+The value of the
+.IR Priority
+attribute of the batch job equals the value of the
+.IR priority
+component of the option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.ge.\fR" 8
+The value of the
+.IR Priority
+attribute of the batch job is greater than or equal to the value of the
+.IR priority
+component option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.gt.\fR" 8
+The value of the
+.IR Priority
+attribute of the batch job is greater than the value of the
+.IR priority
+component option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.lt.\fR" 8
+The value of the
+.IR Priority
+attribute of the batch job is less than the value of the
+.IR priority
+component option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.lt.\fR" 8
+The value of the
+.IR Priority
+attribute of the batch job is less than or equal to the value of the
+.IR priority
+component option-argument.
+.IP "\fR.ne.\fR" 8
+The value of the
+.IR Priority
+attribute of the batch job does not equal the value of the
+.IR priority
+component option-argument.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miq\ \fIdestination\fR" 10
+.br
+Restrict selection to the specified batch queue or server, or both.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall select only batch jobs that are located at the
+destination indicated by the value of the
+.IR destination
+option-argument.
+.P
+The destination defines a batch queue, a server, or a batch queue at a
+server.
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall accept an option-argument for the
+.BR \(miq
+option that conforms to the syntax for a destination. If the
+.BR \(miq
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qselect
+utility, the utility shall select batch jobs from all batch queues at
+the default batch server.
+.P
+If the option-argument describes only a batch queue, the
+.IR qselect
+utility shall select only batch jobs from the batch queue of the
+specified name at the default batch server. The means by which
+.IR qselect
+determines the default server is implementation-defined.
+.P
+If the option-argument describes only a batch server, the
+.IR qselect
+utility shall select batch jobs from all the batch queues at that batch
+server.
+.P
+If the option-argument describes both a batch queue and a batch server,
+the
+.IR qselect
+utility shall select only batch jobs from the specified batch queue at
+the specified server.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mir\ \fRy\fR|\fRn\fR" 10
+Restrict selection to batch jobs with the specified rerunability
+status.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall select only batch jobs for which the value of the
+.IR Rerunable
+attribute of the batch job matches the value of the option-argument.
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall accept a value for the option-argument that consists of
+either the single character
+.BR 'y' 
+or the single character
+.BR 'n' .
+The character
+.BR 'y' 
+represents the value TRUE, and the character
+.BR 'n' 
+represents the value FALSE.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mis\ \fIstates\fR" 10
+Restrict selection to batch jobs in the specified states.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall accept an option-argument that consists of any
+combination of the characters
+.BR 'e' ,
+.BR 'q' ,
+.BR 'r' ,
+.BR 'w' ,
+.BR 'h' ,
+and
+.BR 't' .
+.P
+Conforming applications shall not repeat any character in the
+option-argument. The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall permit the repetition of characters in the
+option-argument, but shall not assign additional meaning to repeated
+characters.
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall interpret the characters in the
+.IR states
+option-argument as follows:
+.IP "\fRe\fR" 6
+Represents the EXITING state.
+.IP "\fRq\fR" 6
+Represents the QUEUED state.
+.IP "\fRr\fR" 6
+Represents the RUNNING state.
+.IP "\fRt\fR" 6
+Represents the TRANSITING state.
+.IP "\fRh\fR" 6
+Represents the HELD state.
+.IP "\fRw\fR" 6
+Represents the WAITING state.
+.P
+For each character in the
+.IR states
+option-argument, the
+.IR qselect
+utility shall select batch jobs in the corresponding state.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miu\ \fIuser_list\fR" 10
+Restrict selection to batch jobs owned by the specified user names.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall select only the batch jobs of those users specified in
+the
+.IR user_list
+option-argument.
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall accept a
+.IR user_list
+option-argument that conforms to the following syntax:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIusername\fB[\fR@\fIhost\fB][\fR,,\fIusername\fB[\fR@\fIhost\fB]\fR,, ...\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall accept only one user name that is missing a corresponding
+host name. The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall accept only one user name per named host.
+.RE
+.SH OPERANDS
+None.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR qselect :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine the
+values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILOGNAME\fP" 10
+Determine the login name of the user.
+.IP "\fITZ\fP" 10
+Determine the timezone used to interpret the
+.IR date-time
+option-argument. If
+.IR TZ
+is unset or null, an unspecified default timezone shall be used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall write zero or more batch
+.IR job_identifier s
+to standard output.
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall separate the batch
+.IR job_identifier s
+written to standard output by white space.
+.P
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility shall write batch
+.IR job_identifier s
+in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIsequence_number.server_name\fR@\fIserver\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following example shows how a user might use the
+.IR qselect
+utility in conjunction with the
+.IR qdel
+utility to delete all of his or her jobs in the queued state without
+affecting any jobs that are already running:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+qdel $(qselect \(mis q)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+or:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+qselect \(mis q || xargs qdel
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility allows users to acquire a list of job identifiers that match
+user-specified selection criteria. The list of identifiers returned by
+the
+.IR qselect
+utility conforms to the syntax of the batch job identifier list
+processed by a utility such as
+.IR qmove ,
+.IR qdel ,
+and
+.IR qrls .
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility is thus a powerful tool for causing another batch system
+utility to act upon a set of jobs that match a list of selection
+criteria.
+.P
+The options of the
+.IR qselect
+utility let the user apply a number of useful filters for selecting
+jobs. Each option further restricts the selection of jobs. Many of the
+selection options allow the specification of a relational operator. The
+FORTRAN-like syntax of the operator\(emthat is,
+.BR \(dq.lt.\(dq \(em\c
+was chosen rather than the C-like
+.BR \(dq<=\(dq 
+meta-characters.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mia
+option allows users to restrict the selected jobs to those that have
+been submitted (or altered) to wait until a particular time. The time
+period is determined by the argument of this option, which includes
+both a time and an operator\(emit is thus possible to select jobs
+waiting until a specific time, jobs waiting until after a certain time,
+or those waiting for a time before the specified time.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miA
+option allows users to restrict the selected jobs to those that have
+been submitted (or altered) to charge a particular account.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mic
+option allows users to restrict the selected jobs to those whose
+checkpointing interval falls within the specified range.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mil
+option allows users to select those jobs whose resource limits fall
+within the range indicated by the value of the option. For example, a
+user could select those jobs for which the CPU time limit is greater
+than two hours.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miN
+option allows users to select jobs by job name. For instance, all the
+parts of a task that have been divided in parallel jobs might be given
+the same name, and thus manipulated as a group by means of this
+option.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miq
+option allows users to select jobs in a specified queue.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mir
+option allows users to select only those jobs with a specified rerun
+criteria. For instance, a user might select only those jobs that can be
+rerun for use with the
+.IR qrerun
+utility.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mis
+option allows users to select only those jobs that are in a certain
+state.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miu
+option allows users to select jobs that have been submitted to execute
+under a particular account.
+.P
+The selection criteria provided by the options of the
+.IR qselect
+utility allow users to select jobs based on all the appropriate
+attributes that can be assigned to jobs by the
+.IR qsub
+utility.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.IR qselect
+utility has not been a part of existing practice; it is an improvement
+that has been introduced in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+.IR qselect
+utility may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 3" ", " "Batch Environment Services",
+.IR "\fIqdel\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIqrerun\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIqrls\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIqselect\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIqsub\fR\^",
+.IR "\fItouch\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qsig.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qsig.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e4e77f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qsig.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,235 @@
+'\" et
+.TH QSIG "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+qsig
+\(em signal batch jobs
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+qsig \fB[\fR\(mis \fIsignal\fB] \fIjob_identifier\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+To signal a batch job is to send a signal to the session leader of the
+batch job. A batch job is signaled by sending a request to the batch
+server that manages the batch job. The
+.IR qsig
+utility is a user-accessible batch client that requests the signaling
+of a batch job.
+.P
+The
+.IR qsig
+utility shall signal those batch jobs for which a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+is presented to the utility. The
+.IR qsig
+utility shall not signal any batch jobs whose batch
+.IR job_identifier s
+are not presented to the utility.
+.P
+The
+.IR qsig
+utility shall signal batch jobs in the order in which the corresponding
+batch
+.IR job_identifier s
+are presented to the utility. If the
+.IR qsig
+utility fails to process a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+successfully, the utility shall proceed to process the remaining batch
+.IR job_identifier s,
+if any.
+.P
+The
+.IR qsig
+utility shall signal batch jobs by sending a
+.IR "Signal Job Request"
+to the batch server that manages the batch job.
+.P
+For each successfully processed batch
+.IR job_identifier ,
+the
+.IR qsig
+utility shall have received a completion reply to each
+.IR "Signal Job Request"
+sent to a batch server at the time the utility exits.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR qsig
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported by the implementation:
+.IP "\fB\(mis\ \fIsignal\fR" 10
+Define the signal to be sent to the batch job.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qsig
+utility shall accept a
+.IR signal
+option-argument that is either a symbolic signal name or an unsigned
+integer signal number (see the POSIX.1\(hy1990 standard, Section 3.3.1.1). The
+.IR qsig
+utility shall accept signal names for which the SIG prefix has been
+omitted.
+.P
+If the
+.IR signal
+option-argument is a signal name, the
+.IR qsig
+utility shall send that name.
+.P
+If the
+.IR signal
+option-argument is a number, the
+.IR qsig
+utility shall send the signal value represented by the number.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mis
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qsig
+utility, the utility shall send the signal SIGTERM to each signaled
+batch job.
+.RE
+.SH OPERANDS
+The
+.IR qsig
+utility shall accept one or more operands that conform to the syntax
+for a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+(see
+.IR "Section 3.3.1" ", " "Batch Job Identifier").
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR qsig :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine the
+values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILOGNAME\fP" 10
+Determine the login name of the user.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+An implementation of the
+.IR qsig
+utility may write informative messages to standard output.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+In addition to the default behavior, the
+.IR qsig
+utility shall not be required to write a diagnostic message to standard
+error when the error reply received from a batch server indicates that
+the batch
+.IR job_identifier
+does not exist on the server. Whether or not the
+.IR qsig
+utility waits to output the diagnostic message while attempting to
+locate the batch job on other servers is implementation-defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR qsig
+utility allows users to signal batch jobs.
+.P
+A user may be unable to signal a batch job with the
+.IR kill
+utility of the operating system for a number of reasons. First, the
+process ID of the batch job may be unknown to the user. Second, the
+processes of the batch job may be on a remote node. However, by virtue
+of communication between batch nodes, the
+.IR qsig
+utility can arrange for the signaling of a process.
+.P
+Because a batch job that is not running cannot be signaled, and because
+the signal may not terminate the batch job, the
+.IR qsig
+utility is not a substitute for the
+.IR qdel
+utility.
+.P
+The options of the
+.IR qsig
+utility allow the user to specify the signal that is to be sent to the
+batch job.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mis
+option allows users to specify a signal by name or by number, and thus
+override the default signal. The POSIX.1\(hy1990 standard defines signals by both name and
+number.
+.P
+The
+.IR qsig
+utility is a new utility, \fIvis-a-vis\fP existing practice; it has
+been defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 in response to user-perceived shortcomings in
+existing practice.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+.IR qsig
+utility may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 3" ", " "Batch Environment Services",
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIqdel\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qstat.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qstat.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..be3a39e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qstat.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,404 @@
+'\" et
+.TH QSTAT "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+qstat
+\(em show status of batch jobs
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+qstat \fB[\fR\(mif\fB] \fIjob_identifier\fR...
+.P
+qstat \(miQ \fB[\fR\(mif\fB] \fIdestination\fR...
+.P
+qstat \(miB \fB[\fR\(mif\fB] \fIserver_name\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The status of a batch job, batch queue, or batch server is obtained by
+a request to the server. The
+.IR qstat
+utility is a user-accessible batch client that requests the status of
+one or more batch jobs, batch queues, or servers, and writes the status
+information to standard output.
+.P
+For each successfully processed batch
+.IR job_identifier ,
+the
+.IR qstat
+utility shall display information about the corresponding batch job.
+.P
+For each successfully processed destination, the
+.IR qstat
+utility shall display information about the corresponding batch queue.
+.P
+For each successfully processed server name, the
+.IR qstat
+utility shall display information about the corresponding server.
+.P
+The
+.IR qstat
+utility shall acquire batch job status information by sending a
+.IR "Job Status Request"
+to a batch server. The
+.IR qstat
+utility shall acquire batch queue status information by sending a
+.IR "Queue Status Request"
+to a batch server. The
+.IR qstat
+utility shall acquire server status information by sending a
+.IR "Server Status Request"
+to a batch server.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR qstat
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported by the implementation:
+.IP "\fB\(mif\fR" 10
+Specify that a full display is produced.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The minimum contents of a full display are specified in the STDOUT
+section.
+.P
+Additional contents and format of a full display are
+implementation-defined.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miQ\fR" 10
+Specify that the operand is a destination.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qstat
+utility shall display information about each batch queue at each
+destination identified as an operand.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miB\fR" 10
+Specify that the operand is a server name.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qstat
+utility shall display information about each server identified as an
+operand.
+.RE
+.SH OPERANDS
+If the
+.BR \(miQ
+option is presented to the
+.IR qstat
+utility, the utility shall accept one or more operands that conform to
+the syntax for a destination (see
+.IR "Section 3.3.2" ", " "Destination").
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(miB
+option is presented to the
+.IR qstat
+utility, the utility shall accept one or more
+.IR server_name
+operands.
+.P
+If neither the
+.BR \(miB
+nor the
+.BR \(miQ
+option is presented to the
+.IR qstat
+utility, the utility shall accept one or more operands that conform to
+the syntax for a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+(see
+.IR "Section 3.3.1" ", " "Batch Job Identifier").
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR qstat :
+.IP "\fIHOME\fP" 10
+Determine the pathname of the user's home directory.
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine the
+values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, equivalence classes,
+and multi-character collating elements within regular expressions.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILC_NUMERIC\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for selecting the radix character used when
+writing floating-point formatted output.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+If an operand presented to the
+.IR qstat
+utility is a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+and the
+.BR \(mif
+option is not specified, the
+.IR qstat
+utility shall display the following items on a single line, in the
+stated order, with white space between each item, for each successfully
+processed operand:
+.IP " *" 4
+The batch
+.IR job_identifier
+.IP " *" 4
+The batch job name
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+.IR Job_Owner
+attribute
+.IP " *" 4
+The CPU time used by the batch job
+.IP " *" 4
+The batch job state
+.IP " *" 4
+The batch job location
+.P
+If an operand presented to the
+.IR qstat
+utility is a batch
+.IR job_identifier
+and the
+.BR \(mif
+option is specified, the
+.IR qstat
+utility shall display the following items for each success fully
+processed operand:
+.IP " *" 4
+The batch
+.IR job_identifier
+.IP " *" 4
+The batch job name
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+.IR Job_Owner
+attribute
+.IP " *" 4
+The execution user ID
+.IP " *" 4
+The CPU time used by the batch job
+.IP " *" 4
+The batch job state
+.IP " *" 4
+The batch job location
+.IP " *" 4
+Additional implementation-defined information, if any, about the
+batch job or batch queue
+.P
+If an operand presented to the
+.IR qstat
+utility is a destination, the
+.BR \(miQ
+option is specified, and the
+.BR \(mif
+option is not specified, the
+.IR qstat
+utility shall display the following items on a single line, in the
+stated order, with white space between each item, for each successfully
+processed operand:
+.IP " *" 4
+The batch queue name
+.IP " *" 4
+The maximum number of batch jobs that shall be run in the batch
+queue concurrently
+.IP " *" 4
+The total number of batch jobs in the batch queue
+.IP " *" 4
+The status of the batch queue
+.IP " *" 4
+For each state, the number of batch jobs in that state in the batch
+queue and the name of the state
+.IP " *" 4
+The type of batch queue (execution or routing)
+.P
+If the operands presented to the
+.IR qstat
+utility are destinations, the
+.BR \(miQ
+option is specified, and the
+.BR \(mif
+option is specified, the
+.IR qstat
+utility shall display the following items for each successfully
+processed operand:
+.IP " *" 4
+The batch queue name
+.IP " *" 4
+The maximum number of batch jobs that shall be run in the batch
+queue concurrently
+.IP " *" 4
+The total number of batch jobs in the batch queue
+.IP " *" 4
+The status of the batch queue
+.IP " *" 4
+For each state, the number of batch jobs in that state in the batch
+queue and the name of the state
+.IP " *" 4
+The type of batch queue (execution or routing)
+.IP " *" 4
+Additional implementation-defined information, if any, about
+the batch queue
+.P
+If the operands presented to the
+.IR qstat
+utility are batch server names, the
+.BR \(miB
+option is specified, and the
+.BR \(mif
+option is not specified, the
+.IR qstat
+utility shall display the following items on a single line, in the
+stated order, with white space between each item, for each successfully
+processed operand:
+.IP " *" 4
+The batch server name
+.IP " *" 4
+The maximum number of batch jobs that shall be run in the batch
+queue concurrently
+.IP " *" 4
+The total number of batch jobs managed by the batch server
+.IP " *" 4
+The status of the batch server
+.IP " *" 4
+For each state, the number of batch jobs in that state and the name of
+the state
+.P
+If the operands presented to the
+.IR qstat
+utility are server names, the
+.BR \(miB
+option is specified, and the
+.BR \(mif
+option is specified, the
+.IR qstat
+utility shall display the following items for each successfully
+processed operand:
+.IP " *" 4
+The server name
+.IP " *" 4
+The maximum number of batch jobs that shall be run in the batch
+queue concurrently
+.IP " *" 4
+The total number of batch jobs managed by the server
+.IP " *" 4
+The status of the server
+.IP " *" 4
+For each state, the number of batch jobs in that state and the name of
+the state
+.IP " *" 4
+Additional implementation-defined information, if any, about the server
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+In addition to the default behavior, the
+.IR qstat
+utility shall not be required to write a diagnostic message to standard
+error when the error reply received from a batch server indicates that
+the batch
+.IR job_identifier
+does not exist on the server. Whether or not the
+.IR qstat
+utility waits to output the diagnostic message while attempting to
+locate the batch job on other servers is implementation-defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR qstat
+utility allows users to display the status of jobs and list the
+batch jobs in queues.
+.P
+The operands of the
+.IR qstat
+utility may be either job identifiers, queues (specified as destination
+identifiers), or batch server names. The
+.BR \(miQ
+and
+.BR \(miB
+options, or absence thereof, indicate the nature of the operands.
+.P
+The other options of the
+.IR qstat
+utility allow the user to control the amount of information displayed
+and the format in which it is displayed. Should a user wish to display
+the status of a set of jobs that match a selection criteria, the
+.IR qselect
+utility may be used to acquire such a list.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mif
+option allows users to request a ``full'' display in an
+implementation-defined format.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.IR qstat
+utility has been a part of the NQS and its derivatives, the existing
+practice on which it is based.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+.IR qstat
+utility may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 3" ", " "Batch Environment Services",
+.IR "\fIqselect\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qsub.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qsub.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..daa7898
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/qsub.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,1472 @@
+'\" et
+.TH QSUB "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+qsub
+\(em submit a script
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+qsub \fB[\fR\(mia \fIdate_time\fB] [\fR\(miA \fIaccount_string\fB] [\fR\(mic \fIinterval\fB]
+    [\fR\(miC \fIdirective_prefix\fB] [\fR\(mie \fIpath_name\fB] [\fR\(mih\fB] [\fR\(mij \fIjoin_list\fB]
+    [\fR\(mik \fIkeep_list\fB] [\fR\(mim \fImail_options\fB] [\fR\(miM \fImail_list\fB] [\fR\(miN \fIname\fB]
+    [\fR\(mio \fIpath_name\fB] [\fR\(mip \fIpriority\fB] [\fR\(miq \fIdestination\fB] [\fR\(mir \fIy\fR|\fIn\fB]
+    [\fR\(miS \fIpath_name_list\fB] [\fR\(miu \fIuser_list\fB] [\fR\(miv \fIvariable_list\fB] [\fR\(miV\fB]
+    [\fR\(miz\fB] [\fIscript\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+To submit a script is to create a batch job that executes the script. A
+script is submitted by a request to a batch server. The
+.IR qsub
+utility is a user-accessible batch client that submits a script.
+.P
+Upon successful completion, the
+.IR qsub
+utility shall have created a batch job that will execute the submitted
+script.
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall submit a script by sending a
+.IR "Queue Job Request"
+to a batch server.
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall place the value of the following environment variables in
+the
+.IR Variable_List
+attribute of the batch job:
+.IR HOME ,
+.IR LANG ,
+.IR LOGNAME ,
+.IR PATH ,
+.IR MAIL ,
+.IR SHELL ,
+and
+.IR TZ .
+The name of the environment variable shall be the current name prefixed
+with the string PBS_O_.
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+If the current value of the
+.IR HOME
+variable in the environment space of the
+.IR qsub
+utility is
+.BR /aa/bb/cc ,
+then
+.IR qsub
+shall place
+.IR PBS_O_HOME =\c
+.BR /aa/bb/cc
+in the
+.IR Variable_List
+attribute of the batch job.
+.P
+.P
+In addition to the variables described above, the
+.IR qsub
+utility shall add the following variables with the indicated values to
+the variable list:
+.IP "\fIPBS_O_WORKDIR\fP" 14
+The absolute path of the current working directory of the
+.IR qsub
+utility process.
+.IP "\fIPBS_O_HOST\fP" 14
+The name of the host on which the
+.IR qsub
+utility is running.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported by the implementation:
+.IP "\fB\(mia\ \fIdate_time\fR" 10
+Define the time at which a batch job becomes eligible for execution.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall accept an option-argument that conforms to the syntax of
+the
+.IR time
+operand of the
+.IR touch
+utility.
+.br
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable 4-19: Environment Variable Values (Utilities)\fR
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB
+lI | lI.
+Variable Name!Value at qsub Time
+_
+PBS_O_HOME!HOME
+PBS_O_HOST!\fRClient host name\fP
+PBS_O_LANG!LANG
+PBS_O_LOGNAME!LOGNAME
+PBS_O_PATH!PATH
+PBS_O_MAIL!MAIL
+PBS_O_SHELL!SHELL
+PBS_O_TZ!TZ
+PBS_O_WORKDIR!\fRCurrent working directory\fP
+.TE
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+The server that initiates execution of the batch job will add other
+variables to the batch job's environment; see
+.IR "Section 3.2.2.1" ", " "Batch Job Execution".
+.P
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall set the
+.IR Execution_Time
+attribute of the batch job to the number of seconds since the Epoch
+that is equivalent to the local time expressed by the value of the
+.IR date_time
+option-argument. The Epoch is defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.150" ", " "Epoch".
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mia
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, the utility shall set the
+.IR Execution_Time
+attribute of the batch job to a time (number of seconds since the
+Epoch) that is earlier than the time at which the utility exits.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miA\ \fIaccount_string\fR" 10
+.br
+Define the account to which the resource consumption of the batch job
+should be charged.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The syntax of the
+.IR account_string
+option-argument is unspecified.
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall set the
+.IR Account_Name
+attribute of the batch job to the value of the
+.IR account_string
+option-argument.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(miA
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, the utility shall omit the
+.IR Account_Name
+attribute from the attributes of the batch job.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mic\ \fIinterval\fR" 10
+Define whether the batch job should be checkpointed, and if so, how
+often.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall accept a value for the interval option-argument that is
+one of the following:
+.IP "\fRn\fR" 10
+No checkpointing shall be performed on the batch job
+(NO_CHECKPOINT).
+.IP "\fRs\fR" 10
+Checkpointing shall be performed only when the batch server is shut
+down (CHECKPOINT_AT_SHUTDOWN).
+.IP "\fRc\fR" 10
+Automatic periodic checkpointing shall be performed at the
+.IR Minimum_Cpu_Interval
+attribute of the batch queue, in units of CPU minutes
+(CHECKPOINT_AT_MIN_CPU_INTERVAL).
+.IP "\fRc\fR=\fIminutes\fR" 10
+Automatic periodic checkpointing shall be performed every
+.IR minutes
+of CPU time, or every
+.IR Minimum_Cpu_Interval
+minutes, whichever is greater. The
+.IR minutes
+argument shall conform to the syntax for unsigned integers and shall be
+greater than zero.
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall set the
+.IR Checkpoint
+attribute of the batch job to the value of the
+.IR interval
+option-argument.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mic
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, the utility shall set the
+.IR Checkpoint
+attribute of the batch job to the single character
+.BR 'u' 
+(CHECKPOINT_UNSPECIFIED).
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miC\ \fIdirective_prefix\fR" 10
+.br
+Define the prefix that declares a directive to the
+.IR qsub
+utility within the script.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR directive_prefix
+is not a batch job attribute; it affects the behavior of the
+.IR qsub
+utility.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(miC
+option is presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, and the value of the
+.IR directive_prefix
+option-argument is the null string, the utility shall not scan the
+script file for directives. If the
+.BR \(miC
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, then the value of the
+.IR PBS_DPREFIX
+environment variable is used. If the environment variable is not
+defined, then #PBS encoded in the portable character set is the
+default.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mie\ \fIpath_name\fR" 10
+.br
+Define the path to be used for the standard error stream of the batch
+job.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall accept a
+.IR path_name
+option-argument which can be preceded by a host name element of the
+form
+.IR hostname :.
+.P
+If the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument constitutes an absolute pathname, the
+.IR qsub
+utility shall set the
+.IR Error_Path
+attribute of the batch job to the value of the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument.
+.P
+If the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument constitutes a relative pathname and no host name
+element is specified, the
+.IR qsub
+utility shall set the
+.IR Error_Path
+attribute of the batch job to the value of the absolute pathname
+derived by expanding the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument relative to the current directory of the process
+executing
+.IR qsub .
+.P
+If the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument constitutes a relative pathname and a host name
+element is specified, the
+.IR qsub
+utility shall set the
+.IR Error_Path
+attribute of the batch job to the value of the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument without expansion. The host name element shall be
+included.
+.P
+If the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument does not include a host name element, the
+.IR qsub
+utility shall prefix the pathname with
+.IR hostname :,
+where
+.IR hostname
+is the name of the host upon which the
+.IR qsub
+utility is being executed.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mie
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, the utility shall set the
+.IR Error_Path
+attribute of the batch job to the host name and path of the current
+directory of the submitting process and the default filename.
+.P
+The default filename for standard error has the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIjob_name\fR.e\fIsequence_number\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mih\fR" 10
+Specify that a USER hold is applied to the batch job.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall set the value of the
+.IR Hold_Types
+attribute of the batch job to the value USER.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mih
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, the utility shall set the
+.IR Hold_Types
+attribute of the batch job to the value NO_HOLD.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mij\ \fIjoin_list\fR" 10
+Define which streams of the batch job are to be merged. The
+.IR qsub
+.BR \(mij
+option shall accept a value for the
+.IR join_list
+option-argument that is a string of alphanumeric characters in the
+portable character set (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set").
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall accept a
+.IR join_list
+option-argument that consists of one or more of the characters
+.BR 'e' 
+and
+.BR 'o' ,
+or the single character
+.BR 'n' .
+.P
+All of the other batch job output streams specified will be merged into
+the output stream represented by the character listed first in the
+.IR join_list
+option-argument.
+.P
+For each unique character in the
+.IR join_list
+option-argument, the
+.IR qsub
+utility shall add a value to the
+.IR Join_Path
+attribute of the batch job as follows, each representing a different
+batch job stream to join:
+.IP "\fRe\fR" 6
+The standard error of the batch job (JOIN_STD_ERROR).
+.IP "\fRo\fR" 6
+The standard output of the batch job (JOIN_STD_OUTPUT).
+.P
+An existing
+.IR Join_Path
+attribute can be cleared by the following join type:
+.IP "\fRn\fR" 6
+NO_JOIN
+.P
+If
+.BR 'n' 
+is specified, then no files are joined. The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall consider it an error if any join type other than
+.BR 'n' 
+is combined with join type
+.BR 'n' .
+.P
+Strictly conforming applications shall not repeat any of the characters
+.BR 'e' ,
+.BR 'o' ,
+or
+.BR 'n' 
+within the
+.IR join_list
+option-argument. The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall permit the repetition of characters, but shall not assign
+additional meaning to the repeated characters.
+.P
+An implementation may define other join types. The conformance document
+for an implementation shall describe any additional batch job streams,
+how they are specified, their internal behavior, and how they affect
+the behavior of the utility.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mij
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, the utility shall set the value of the
+.IR Join_Path
+attribute of the batch job to NO_JOIN.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mik\ \fIkeep_list\fR" 10
+Define which output of the batch job to retain on the execution host.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+.BR \(mik
+option shall accept a value for the
+.IR keep_list
+option-argument that is a string of alphanumeric characters in the
+portable character set (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set").
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall accept a
+.IR keep_list
+option-argument that consists of one or more of the characters
+.BR 'e' 
+and
+.BR 'o' ,
+or the single character
+.BR 'n' .
+.P
+For each unique character in the
+.IR keep_list
+option-argument, the
+.IR qsub
+utility shall add a value to the
+.IR Keep_Files
+attribute of the batch job as follows, each representing a different
+batch job stream to keep:
+.IP "\fRe\fR" 6
+The standard error of the batch job (KEEP_STD_ERROR).
+.IP "\fRo\fR" 6
+The standard output of the batch job (KEEP_STD_OUTPUT).
+.P
+If both
+.BR 'e' 
+and
+.BR 'o' 
+are specified, then both files are retained. An existing
+.IR Keep_Files
+attribute can be cleared by the following keep type:
+.IP "\fRn\fR" 6
+NO_KEEP
+.P
+If
+.BR 'n' 
+is specified, then no files are retained. The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall consider it an error if any keep type other than
+.BR 'n' 
+is combined with keep type
+.BR 'n' .
+.P
+Strictly conforming applications shall not repeat any of the characters
+.BR 'e' ,
+.BR 'o' ,
+or
+.BR 'n' 
+within the
+.IR keep_list
+option-argument. The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall permit the repetition of characters, but shall not assign
+additional meaning to the repeated characters.
+.P
+An implementation may define other keep types. The conformance document
+for an implementation shall describe any additional keep types, how
+they are specified, their internal behavior, and how they affect the
+behavior of the utility. If the
+.BR \(mik
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, the utility shall set the
+.IR Keep_Files
+attribute of the batch job to the value NO_KEEP.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mim\ \fImail_options\fR" 10
+.br
+Define the points in the execution of the batch job at which the batch
+server that manages the batch job shall send mail about a change in the
+state of the batch job.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+.BR \(mim
+option shall accept a value for the
+.IR mail_options
+option-argument that is a string of alphanumeric characters in the
+portable character set (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set").
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall accept a value for the
+.IR mail_options
+option-argument that is a string of one or more of the characters
+.BR 'e' ,
+.BR 'b' ,
+and
+.BR 'a' ,
+or the single character
+.BR 'n' .
+.P
+For each unique character in the
+.IR mail_options
+option-argument, the
+.IR qsub
+utility shall add a value to the
+.IR Mail_Users
+attribute of the batch job as follows, each representing a different
+time during the life of a batch job at which to send mail:
+.IP "\fRe\fR" 6
+MAIL_AT_EXIT
+.IP "\fRb\fR" 6
+MAIL_AT_BEGINNING
+.IP "\fRa\fR" 6
+MAIL_AT_ABORT
+.P
+If any of these characters are duplicated in the
+.IR mail_options
+option-argument, the duplicates shall be ignored.
+.P
+An existing
+.IR Mail_Points
+attribute can be cleared by the following mail type:
+.IP "\fRn\fR" 6
+NO_MAIL
+.P
+If
+.BR 'n' 
+is specified, then mail is not sent. The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall consider it an error if any mail type other than
+.BR 'n' 
+is combined with mail type
+.BR 'n' .
+.P
+Strictly conforming applications shall not repeat any of the characters
+.BR 'e' ,
+.BR 'b' ,
+.BR 'a' ,
+or
+.BR 'n' 
+within the
+.IR mail_options
+option-argument.
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall permit the repetition of characters, but shall not assign
+additional meaning to the repeated characters. An implementation may
+define other mail types. The conformance document for an implementation
+shall describe any additional mail types, how they are specified, their
+internal behavior, and how they affect the behavior of the utility.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mim
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, the utility shall set the
+.IR Mail_Points
+attribute to the value MAIL_AT_ABORT.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miM\ \fImail_list\fR" 10
+Define the list of users to which a batch server that executes the
+batch job shall send mail, if the server sends mail about the batch
+job.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The syntax of the
+.IR mail_list
+option-argument is unspecified.
+.P
+If the implementation of the
+.IR qsub
+utility uses a name service to locate users, the utility should accept
+the syntax used by the name service.
+.P
+If the implementation of the
+.IR qsub
+utility does not use a name service to locate users, the implementation
+should accept the following syntax for user names:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fImail_address\fB[\fR,,\fImail_address\fR,, ...\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The interpretation of
+.IR mail_address
+is implementation-defined.
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall set the
+.IR Mail_Users
+attribute of the batch job to the value of the
+.IR mail_list
+option-argument.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(miM
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, the utility shall place only the user name and host name for
+the current process in the
+.IR Mail_Users
+attribute of the batch job.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miN\ \fIname\fR" 10
+Define the name of the batch job.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+.BR \(miN
+option shall accept a value for the
+.IR name
+option-argument that is a string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters in
+the portable character set (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set")
+where the first character is alphabetic.
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall set the value of the
+.IR Job_Name
+attribute of the batch job to the value of the
+.IR name
+option-argument.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(miN
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, the utility shall set the
+.IR Job_Name
+attribute of the batch job to the name of the
+.IR script
+argument from which the directory specification if any, has been
+removed.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(miN
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, and the script is read from standard input, the utility shall
+set the
+.IR Job_Name
+attribute of the batch job to the value STDIN.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mio\ \fIpath_name\fR" 10
+.br
+Define the path for the standard output of the batch job.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall accept a
+.IR path_name
+option-argument that conforms to the syntax of the
+.IR path_name
+element defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, which can be preceded by a host name
+element of the form
+.IR hostname :.
+.P
+If the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument constitutes an absolute pathname, the
+.IR qsub
+utility shall set the
+.IR Output_Path
+attribute of the batch job to the value of the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument without expansion.
+.P
+If the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument constitutes a relative pathname and no host name
+element is specified, the
+.IR qsub
+utility shall set the
+.IR Output_Path
+attribute of the batch job to the pathname derived by expanding the
+value of the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument relative to the current directory of the process
+executing the
+.IR qsub .
+.P
+If the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument constitutes a relative pathname and a host name
+element is specified, the
+.IR qsub
+utility shall set the
+.IR Output_Path
+attribute of the batch job to the value of the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument without expansion.
+.P
+If the
+.IR path_name
+option-argument does not specify a host name element, the
+.IR qsub
+utility shall prefix the pathname with
+.IR hostname :,
+where
+.IR hostname
+is the name of the host upon which the
+.IR qsub
+utility is executing.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mio
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, the utility shall set the
+.IR Output_Path
+attribute of the batch job to the host name and path of the current
+directory of the submitting process and the default filename.
+.P
+The default filename for standard output has the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIjob_name\fR.o\fIsequence_number\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mip\ \fIpriority\fR" 10
+Define the priority the batch job should have relative to other batch
+jobs owned by the batch server.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall set the
+.IR Priority
+attribute of the batch job to the value of the
+.IR priority
+option-argument.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mip
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, the value of the
+.IR Priority
+attribute is implementation-defined.
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall accept a value for the
+.IR priority
+option-argument that conforms to the syntax for signed decimal
+integers, and which is not less than \(mi1\|024 and not greater than
+1\|023.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miq\ \fIdestination\fR" 10
+.br
+Define the destination of the batch job.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The destination is not a batch job attribute; it determines the batch
+server, and possibly the batch queue, to which the
+.IR qsub
+utility batch queues the batch job.
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall submit the script to the batch server named by the
+.IR destination
+option-argument or the server that owns the batch queue named in the
+.IR destination
+option-argument.
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall accept an option-argument for the
+.BR \(miq
+option that conforms to the syntax for a destination (see
+.IR "Section 3.3.2" ", " "Destination").
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(miq
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, the
+.IR qsub
+utility shall submit the batch job to the default destination. The
+mechanism for determining the default destination is
+implementation-defined.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mir\ \fIy\fR|\fIn\fR" 10
+Define whether the batch job is rerunnable.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If the value of the option-argument is
+.IR y ,
+the
+.IR qsub
+utility shall set the
+.IR Rerunable
+attribute of the batch job to TRUE.
+.P
+If the value of the option-argument is
+.IR n ,
+the
+.IR qsub
+utility shall set the
+.IR Rerunable
+attribute of the batch job to FALSE.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mir
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, the utility shall set the
+.IR Rerunable
+attribute of the batch job to TRUE.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miS\ \fIpath_name_list\fR" 10
+.br
+Define the pathname to the shell under which the batch job is to
+execute.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall accept a
+.IR path_name_list
+option-argument that conforms to the following syntax:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIpathname\fB[\fR@\fIhost\fB][\fR,,\fIpathname\fB[\fR@\fIhost\fB]\fR,, ...\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall allow only one pathname for a given host name. The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall allow only one pathname that is missing a corresponding
+host name.
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall add a value to the
+.IR Shell_Path_List
+attribute of the batch job for each entry in the
+.IR path_name_list
+option-argument.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(miS
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, the utility shall set the
+.IR Shell_Path_List
+attribute of the batch job to the null string.
+.P
+The conformance document for an implementation shall describe the
+mechanism used to set the default shell and determine the current value
+of the default shell. An implementation shall provide a means for the
+installation to set the default shell to the login shell of the user
+under which the batch job is to execute. See
+.IR "Section 3.3.3" ", " "Multiple Keyword-Value Pairs"
+for a means of removing
+.IR keyword =\c
+.IR value
+(and
+.IR value @\c
+.IR keyword )
+pairs and other general rules for list-oriented batch job attributes.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miu\ \fIuser_list\fR" 10
+Define the user name under which the batch job is to execute.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall accept a
+.IR user_list
+option-argument that conforms to the following syntax:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIusername\fB[\fR@\fIhost\fB][\fR,,\fIusername\fB[\fR@\fIhost\fB]\fR,, ...\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall accept only one user name that is missing a corresponding
+host name. The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall accept only one user name per named host.
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall add a value to the
+.IR User_List
+attribute of the batch job for each entry in the
+.IR user_list
+option-argument.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(miu
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, the utility shall set the
+.IR User_List
+attribute of the batch job to the user name from which the utility is
+executing. See
+.IR "Section 3.3.3" ", " "Multiple Keyword-Value Pairs"
+for a means of removing
+.IR keyword =\c
+.IR value
+(and
+.IR value @\c
+.IR keyword )
+pairs and other general rules for list-oriented batch job attributes.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miv\ \fIvariable_list\fR" 10
+.br
+Add to the list of variables that are exported to the session leader of
+the batch job.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+A
+.IR variable_list
+is a set of strings of either the form <\c
+.IR variable >
+or <\c
+.IR variable =\c
+.IR value >,
+delimited by
+<comma>
+characters.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(miv
+option is presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, the utility shall also add, to the environment
+.IR Variable_List
+attribute of the batch job, every variable named in the environment
+.IR variable_list
+option-argument and, optionally, values of specified variables.
+.P
+If a value is not provided on the command line, the
+.IR qsub
+utility shall set the value of each variable in the environment
+.IR Variable_List
+attribute of the batch job to the value of the corresponding
+environment variable for the process in which the utility is executing;
+see
+.IR "Table 4-19, Environment Variable Values (Utilities)".
+.P
+A conforming application shall not repeat a variable in the environment
+.IR variable_list
+option-argument.
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall not repeat a variable in the environment
+.IR Variable_List
+attribute of the batch job. See
+.IR "Section 3.3.3" ", " "Multiple Keyword-Value Pairs"
+for a means of removing
+.IR keyword =\c
+.IR value
+(and
+.IR value @\c
+.IR keyword )
+pairs and other general rules for list-oriented batch job attributes.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miV\fR" 10
+Specify that all of the environment variables of the process are
+exported to the context of the batch job.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall place every environment variable in the process in which
+the utility is executing in the list and shall set the value of each
+variable in the attribute to the value of that variable in the
+process.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miz\fR" 10
+Specify that the utility does not write the batch
+.IR job_identifier
+of the created batch job to standard output.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(miz
+option is presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, the utility shall not write the batch
+.IR job_identifier
+of the created batch job to standard output.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(miz
+option is not presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, the utility shall write the identifier of the created batch
+job to standard output.
+.RE
+.SH OPERANDS
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall accept a
+.IR script
+operand that indicates the path to the script of the batch job.
+.P
+If the
+.IR script
+operand is not presented to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, or if the operand is the single-character string
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the utility shall read the script from standard input.
+.P
+If the script represents a partial path, the
+.IR qsub
+utility shall expand the path relative to the current directory of the
+process executing the utility.
+.SH STDIN
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility reads the script of the batch job from standard input if the
+script operand is omitted or is the single character
+.BR '\(mi' .
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+In addition to binding the file indicated by the
+.IR script
+operand to the batch job, the
+.IR qsub
+utility reads the script file and acts on directives in the script.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR qsub :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine the
+values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILOGNAME\fP" 10
+Determine the login name of the user.
+.IP "\fIPBS_DPREFIX\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the default prefix for directives within the script.
+.IP "\fISHELL\fP" 10
+Determine the pathname of the preferred command language interpreter
+of the user.
+.IP "\fITZ\fP" 10
+Determine the timezone used to interpret the
+.IR date-time
+option-argument. If
+.IR TZ
+is unset or null, an unspecified default timezone shall be used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Once created, a batch job exists until it exits, aborts, or is
+deleted.
+.P
+After a batch job is created by the
+.IR qsub
+utility, batch servers might route, execute, modify, or delete the
+batch job.
+.SH STDOUT
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility writes the batch
+.IR job_identifier
+assigned to the batch job to standard output, unless the
+.BR \(miz
+option is specified.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+.SS "Script Preservation"
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall make the script available to the server executing the
+batch job in such a way that the server executes the script as it
+exists at the time of submission.
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility can send a copy of the script to the server with the
+.IR "Queue Job Request"
+or store a temporary copy of the script in a location specified to the
+server.
+.SS "Option Specification"
+.P
+A script can contain directives to the
+.IR qsub
+utility.
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall scan the lines of the script for directives, skipping
+blank lines, until the first line that begins with a string other than
+the directive string; if directives occur on subsequent lines, the
+utility shall ignore those directives.
+.P
+Lines are separated by a
+<newline>.
+If the first line of the script begins with
+.BR \(dq#!\(dq 
+or a
+<colon>
+(\c
+.BR ':' ),
+then it is skipped. The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall process a line in the script as a directive if and only
+if the string of characters from the first non-white-space character on
+the line until the first
+<space>
+or
+<tab>
+on the line match the directive prefix. If a line in the script
+contains a directive and the final characters of the line are
+<backslash>
+and
+<newline>,
+then the next line shall be interpreted as a continuation of that
+directive.
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall process the options and option-arguments contained on the
+directive prefix line using the same syntax as if the options were
+input on the
+.IR qsub
+utility.
+.P
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility shall continue to process a directive prefix line until after a
+<newline>
+is encountered. An implementation may ignore lines which, according to
+the syntax of the shell that will interpret the script, are comments.
+An implementation shall describe in the conformance document the format
+of any shell comments that it will recognize.
+.P
+If an option is present in both a directive and the arguments to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, the utility shall ignore the option and the corresponding
+option-argument, if any, in the directive.
+.P
+If an option that is present in the directive is not present in the
+arguments to the
+.IR qsub
+utility, the utility shall process the option and the option-argument,
+if any.
+.P
+In order of preference, the
+.IR qsub
+utility shall select the directive prefix from one of the following
+sources:
+.IP " *" 4
+If the
+.BR \(miC
+option is presented to the utility, the value of the
+.IR directive_prefix
+option-argument
+.IP " *" 4
+If the environment variable
+.IR PBS_DPREFIX
+is defined, the value of that variable
+.IP " *" 4
+The four-character string
+.BR \(dq#PBS\(dq 
+encoded in the portable character set
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(miC
+option is present in the script file it shall be ignored.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility allows users to create a batch job that will process the script
+specified as the operand of the utility.
+.P
+The options of the
+.IR qsub
+utility allow users to control many aspects of the queuing and
+execution of a batch job.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mia
+option allows users to designate the time after which the batch job
+will become eligible to run. By specifying an execution time, users can
+take advantage of resources at off-peak hours, synchronize jobs with
+chronologically predictable events, and perhaps take advantage of
+off-peak pricing of computing time. For these reasons and others, a
+timing option is existing practice on the part of almost every batch
+system, including NQS.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miA
+option allows users to specify the account that will be charged for the
+batch job. Support for account is not mandatory for conforming batch
+servers.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miC
+option allows users to prescribe the prefix for directives within the
+script file. The default prefix
+.BR \(dq#PBS\(dq 
+may be inappropriate if the script will be interpreted with an
+alternate shell, as specified by the
+.BR \(miS
+option.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mic
+option allows users to establish the checkpointing interval for their
+jobs. A checkpointing system, which is not defined by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, allows
+recovery of a batch job at the most recent checkpoint in the event of a
+crash. Checkpointing is typically used for jobs that consume expensive
+computing time or must meet a critical schedule. Users should be
+allowed to make the tradeoff between the overhead of checkpointing and
+the risk to the timely completion of the batch job; therefore, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+provides the checkpointing interval option. Support for checkpointing
+is optional for batch servers.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mie
+option allows users to redirect the standard error streams of their
+jobs to a non-default path. For example, if the submitted script
+generally produces a great deal of useless error output, a user might
+redirect the standard error output to the null device. Or, if the file
+system holding the default location (the home directory of the user)
+has too little free space, the user might redirect the standard error
+stream to a file in another file system.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mih
+option allows users to create a batch job that is held until explicitly
+released. The ability to create a held job is useful when some external
+event must complete before the batch job can execute. For example, the
+user might submit a held job and release it when the system load has
+dropped.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mij
+option allows users to merge the standard error of a batch job into its
+standard output stream, which has the advantage of showing the
+sequential relationship between output and error messages.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mim
+option allows users to designate those points in the execution of a
+batch job at which mail will be sent to the submitting user, or to the
+account(s) indicated by the
+.BR \(miM
+option. By requesting mail notification at points of interest in the
+life of a job, the submitting user, or other designated users, can
+track the progress of a batch job.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miN
+option allows users to associate a name with the batch job. The job
+name in no way affects the processing of the batch job, but rather
+serves as a mnemonic handle for users. For example, the batch job name
+can help the user distinguish between multiple jobs listed by the
+.IR qstat
+utility.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mio
+option allows users to redirect the standard output stream. A user
+might, for example, wish to redirect to the null device the standard
+output stream of a job that produces copious yet superfluous output.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miP
+option allows users to designate the relative priority of a batch job
+for selection from a queue.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miq
+option allows users to specify an initial queue for the batch job. If
+the user specifies a routing queue, the batch server routes the
+batch job to another queue for execution or further routing. If the
+user specifies a non-routing queue, the batch server of the queue
+eventually executes the batch job.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mir
+option allows users to control whether the submitted job will be rerun
+if the controlling batch node fails during execution of the batch job.
+The
+.BR \(mir
+option likewise allows users to indicate whether or not the batch job
+is eligible to be rerun by the
+.IR qrerun
+utility. Some jobs cannot be correctly rerun because of changes they
+make in the state of databases or other aspects of their environment.
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 specifies that the default, if the
+.BR \(mir
+option is not presented to the utility, will be that the batch job
+cannot be rerun, since the result of rerunning a non-rerunnable job
+might be catastrophic.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miS
+option allows users to specify the program (usually a shell) that will
+be invoked to process the script of the batch job. This option has been
+modified to allow a list of shell names and locations associated with
+different hosts.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miu
+option is useful when the submitting user is authorized to use more
+than one account on a given host, in which case the
+.BR \(miu
+option allows the user to select from among those accounts. The
+option-argument is a list of user-host pairs, so that the submitting
+user can provide different user identifiers for different nodes in the
+event the batch job is routed. The
+.BR \(miu
+option provides a lot of flexibility to accommodate sites with complex
+account structures. Users that have the same user identifier on all the
+hosts they are authorized to use will not need to use the
+.BR \(miu
+option.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miV
+option allows users to export all their current environment variables,
+as of the time the batch job is submitted, to the context of the
+processes of the batch job.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miv
+option allows users to export specific environment variables from their
+current process to the processes of the batch job.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miz
+option allows users to suppress the writing of the batch job identifier
+to standard output. The
+.BR \(miz
+option is an existing NQS practice that has been standardized.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.IR qsub
+utility has served the batch job-submission function in the NQS system,
+the existing practice on which it is based. Some changes and additions
+have been made to the
+.IR qsub
+utility in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, \fIvis-a-vis\fP NQS, as a result of the growing pool
+of experience with distributed batch systems.
+.P
+The set of features of the
+.IR qsub
+utility as defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 appears to incorporate all the common
+existing practice on potentially conforming platforms.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+.IR qsub
+utility may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 3" ", " "Batch Environment Services",
+.IR "\fIqrerun\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIqstat\fR\^",
+.IR "\fItouch\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.150" ", " "Epoch",
+.IR "Section 6.1" ", " "Portable Character Set",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/read.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/read.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9896542
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/read.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,272 @@
+'\" et
+.TH READ "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+read
+\(em read a line from standard input
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+read \fB[\fR\(mir\fB] \fIvar\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR read
+utility shall read a single line from standard input.
+.P
+By default, unless the
+.BR \(mir
+option is specified,
+<backslash>
+shall act as an escape character. An unescaped
+<backslash>
+shall preserve the literal value of the following character, with the
+exception of a
+<newline>.
+If a
+<newline>
+follows the
+<backslash>,
+the
+.IR read
+utility shall interpret this as line continuation. The
+<backslash>
+and
+<newline>
+shall be removed before splitting the input into fields. All other
+unescaped
+<backslash>
+characters shall be removed after splitting the input into fields.
+.P
+If standard input is a terminal device and the invoking shell is
+interactive,
+.IR read
+shall prompt for a continuation line when it reads an input line ending
+with a
+<backslash>
+<newline>,
+unless the
+.BR \(mir
+option is specified.
+.P
+The terminating
+<newline>
+(if any) shall be removed from the input and the results shall be split
+into fields as in the shell for the results of parameter expansion (see
+.IR "Section 2.6.5" ", " "Field Splitting");
+the first field shall be assigned to the first variable
+.IR var ,
+the second field to the second variable
+.IR var ,
+and so on. If there are fewer fields than there are
+.IR var
+operands, the remaining
+.IR var s
+shall be set to empty strings. If there are fewer
+.IR var s
+than fields, the last
+.IR var
+shall be set to a value comprising the following elements:
+.IP " *" 4
+The field that corresponds to the last
+.IR var
+in the normal assignment sequence described above
+.IP " *" 4
+The delimiter(s) that follow the field corresponding to the last
+.IR var
+.IP " *" 4
+The remaining fields and their delimiters, with trailing
+.IR IFS
+white space ignored
+.P
+The setting of variables specified by the
+.IR var
+operands shall affect the current shell execution environment; see
+.IR "Section 2.12" ", " "Shell Execution Environment".
+If it is called in a subshell or separate utility execution
+environment, such as one of the following:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(read foo)
+nohup read ...
+find . \(miexec read ... \e;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+it shall not affect the shell variables in the caller's environment.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR read
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option is supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+Do not treat a
+<backslash>
+character in any special way. Consider each
+<backslash>
+to be part of the input line.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIvar\fR" 10
+The name of an existing or nonexisting shell variable.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be a text file.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR read :
+.IP "\fIIFS\fP" 10
+Determine the internal field separators used to delimit fields; see
+.IR "Section 2.5.3" ", " "Shell Variables".
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fIPS2\fP" 10
+Provide the prompt string that an interactive shell shall write to
+standard error when a line ending with a
+<backslash>
+<newline>
+is read and the
+.BR \(mir
+option was not specified.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used for diagnostic messages and
+prompts for continued input.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+End-of-file was detected or an error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.BR \(mir
+option is included to enable
+.IR read
+to subsume the purpose of the
+.IR line
+utility, which is not included in POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+while read \(mir xx yy
+do
+    printf "%s %s\en$yy$xx"
+done < \fIinput_file\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+prints a file with the first field of each line moved to the end of the
+line.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR read
+utility historically has been a shell built-in. It was separated off
+into its own utility to take advantage of the richer description of
+functionality introduced by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+Since
+.IR read
+affects the current shell execution environment,
+it is generally provided as a shell regular built-in. If it is called
+in a subshell or separate utility execution environment, such as one of
+the following:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(read foo)
+nohup read ...
+find . \(miexec read ... \e;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+it does not affect the shell variables in the environment of the
+caller.
+.P
+Although the standard input is required to be a text file, and
+therefore will always end with a
+<newline>
+(unless it is an empty file), the processing of continuation lines
+when the
+.BR \(mir
+option is not used can result in the input not ending with a
+<newline>.
+This occurs if the last line of the input file ends with a
+<backslash>
+<newline>.
+It is for this reason that ``if any'' is used in ``The terminating
+<newline>
+(if any) shall be removed from the input'' in the description.
+It is not a relaxation of the requirement for standard input to
+be a text file.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/readonly.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/readonly.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f00a71a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/readonly.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
+'\" et
+.TH READONLY "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+readonly
+\(em set the readonly attribute for variables
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+readonly name\fB[\fR=\fIword\fB]\fR...
+.P
+readonly\fR \(mip
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The variables whose
+.IR name s
+are specified shall be given the
+.IR readonly
+attribute. The values of variables with the
+.IR readonly
+attribute cannot be changed by subsequent assignment, nor can those
+variables be unset by the
+.IR unset
+utility. If the name of a variable is followed by =\c
+.IR word ,
+then the value of that variable shall be set to
+.IR word .
+.P
+The
+.IR readonly
+special built-in shall support the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+When
+.BR \(mip
+is specified,
+.IR readonly
+writes to the standard output the names and values of all read-only
+variables, in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"readonly %s=%s\en", <\fIname\fR>, <\fIvalue\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+if
+.IR name
+is set, and
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"readonly %s\en", <\fIname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+if
+.IR name
+is unset.
+.P
+The shell shall format the output, including the proper use of quoting,
+so that it is suitable for reinput to the shell as commands that
+achieve the same value and
+.IR readonly
+attribute-setting results in a shell execution environment in which:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Variables with values at the time they were output do not have the
+.IR readonly
+attribute set.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Variables that were unset at the time they were output do not have a
+value at the time at which the saved output is reinput to the shell.
+.P
+When no arguments are given, the results are unspecified.
+.SH OPTIONS
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH OPERANDS
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+None.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+Zero.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.LP
+.nf
+readonly HOME PWD
+.fi
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+Some historical shells preserve the
+.IR readonly
+attribute across separate invocations. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 allows this behavior,
+but does not require it.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mip
+option allows portable access to the values that can be saved and then
+later restored using, for example, a
+.IR dot
+script. Also see the RATIONALE for
+.IR "\fIexport\fR\^"
+for a description of the no-argument and
+.BR \(mip
+output cases and a related example.
+.P
+Read-only functions were considered, but they were omitted as not being
+historical practice or particularly useful. Furthermore, functions must
+not be read-only across invocations to preclude ``spoofing''
+(spoofing is the term for the practice of creating a program that acts
+like a well-known utility with the intent of subverting the real intent
+of the user) of administrative or security-relevant (or
+security-conscious) shell scripts.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/renice.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/renice.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..993773f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/renice.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,280 @@
+'\" et
+.TH RENICE "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+renice
+\(em set nice values of running processes
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+renice \fB[\fR\(mig|\(mip|\(miu\fB] \fR\(min \fIincrement ID\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR renice
+utility shall request that the nice values (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.240" ", " "Nice Value")
+of one or more running processes be changed. By default, the applicable
+processes are specified by their process IDs. When a process group is
+specified (see
+.BR \(mig ),
+the request shall apply to all processes in the process group.
+.P
+The nice value shall be bounded in an implementation-defined manner.
+If the requested
+.IR increment
+would raise or lower the nice value of the executed utility beyond
+implementation-defined limits, then the limit whose value was
+exceeded shall be used.
+.P
+When a user is
+.IR renice d,
+the request applies to all processes whose saved set-user-ID matches
+the user ID corresponding to the user.
+.P
+Regardless of which options are supplied or any other factor,
+.IR renice
+shall not alter the nice values of any process unless the user
+requesting such a change has appropriate privileges to do so for the
+specified process. If the user lacks appropriate privileges to perform
+the requested action, the utility shall return an error status.
+.P
+The saved set-user-ID of the user's process shall be checked instead of
+its effective user ID when
+.IR renice
+attempts to determine the user ID of the process in order to determine
+whether the user has appropriate privileges.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR renice
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except for Guideline 9.
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mig\fP" 10
+Interpret the following operands as unsigned decimal integer process
+group IDs.
+.IP "\fB\(min\ \fIincrement\fR" 10
+Specify how the nice value of the specified process or processes is to
+be adjusted. The
+.IR increment
+option-argument is a positive or negative decimal integer that shall be
+used to modify the nice value of the specified process or processes.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+Positive
+.IR increment
+values shall cause a lower nice value. Negative
+.IR increment
+values may require appropriate privileges and shall cause a higher
+nice value.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mip\fP" 10
+Interpret the following operands as unsigned decimal integer process
+IDs. The
+.BR \(mip
+option is the default if no options are specified.
+.IP "\fB\(miu\fP" 10
+Interpret the following operands as users. If a user exists with a user
+name equal to the operand, then the user ID of that user is used in
+further processing. Otherwise, if the operand represents an unsigned
+decimal integer, it shall be used as the numeric user ID of the user.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIID\fR" 10
+A process ID, process group ID, or user name/user ID, depending on the
+option selected.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR renice :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+Adjust the nice value so that process IDs 987 and 32 would have a lower
+nice value:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+renice \(min 5 \(mip 987 32
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+Adjust the nice value so that group IDs 324 and 76 would have a higher
+nice value, if the user has appropriate privileges to do so:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+renice \(min \(mi4 \(mig 324 76
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+Adjust the nice value so that numeric user ID 8 and user
+.BR sas
+would have a lower nice value:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+renice \(min 4 \(miu 8 sas
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Useful nice value increments on historical systems include 19 or 20
+(the affected processes run only when nothing else in the system
+attempts to run) and any negative number (to make processes run
+faster).
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR gid ,
+.IR pid ,
+and
+.IR user
+specifications do not fit either the definition of operand or
+option-argument. However, for clarity, they have been included in the
+OPTIONS section, rather than the OPERANDS section.
+.P
+The definition of nice value is not intended to suggest that all
+processes in a system have priorities that are comparable. Scheduling
+policy extensions such as the realtime priorities in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 make the
+notion of a single underlying priority for all scheduling policies
+problematic. Some implementations may implement the
+.IR nice -related
+features to affect all processes on the system, others to affect just
+the general time-sharing activities implied by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, and others may
+have no effect at all. Because of the use of
+``implementation-defined'' in
+.IR nice
+and
+.IR renice ,
+a wide range of implementation strategies are possible.
+.P
+Originally, this utility was written in the historical manner, using
+the term ``nice value''. This was always a point of concern with users
+because it was never intuitively obvious what this meant. With a newer
+version of
+.IR renice ,
+which used the term ``system scheduling priority'', it was hoped that
+novice users could better understand what this utility was meant to
+do. Also, it would be easier to document what the utility was meant to
+do. Unfortunately, the addition of the POSIX realtime scheduling
+capabilities introduced the concepts of process and thread scheduling
+priorities that were totally unaffected by the
+.IR nice /\c
+.IR renice
+utilities or the
+\fInice\fR()/\c
+\fIsetpriority\fR()
+functions. Continuing to use the term ``system scheduling priority''
+would have incorrectly suggested that these utilities and functions
+were indeed affecting these realtime priorities. It was decided to
+revert to the historical term ``nice value'' to reference this
+unrelated process attribute.
+.P
+Although this utility has use by system administrators (and in fact
+appears in the system administration portion of the BSD documentation),
+the standard developers considered that it was very useful for
+individual end users to control their own processes.
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard allowed the following forms in the
+SYNOPSIS:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+renice \fInice_value\fB[\fR\(mip\fB] \fIpid\fR...\fB[\fR\(mig \fIgid\fR...\fB][\fR\(mip \fIpid\fR...\fB][\fR\(miu \fIuser\fR...\fB]\fR
+renice \fInice_value \(mig \fIgid\fR...\fB[\fR\(mig \fIgid\fR...\fB]\fR\(mip \fIpid\fR...\fB][\fR\(miu \fIuser\fR...\fB]\fR
+renice \fInice_value \(miu \fIuser\fR...\fB[\fR\(mig \fIgid\fR...\fB]\fR\(mip \fIpid\fR...\fB][\fR\(miu \fIuser\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+These forms are no longer specified by POSIX.1\(hy2008 but may be
+present in some implementations.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fInice\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.240" ", " "Nice Value",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/return.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/return.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba20275
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/return.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+'\" et
+.TH RETURN "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+return
+\(em return from a function or dot script
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+return \fB[\fIn\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR return
+utility shall cause the shell to stop executing the current function or
+.IR dot
+script. If the shell is not currently executing a function or
+.IR dot
+script, the results are unspecified.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+None.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The value of the special parameter
+.BR '?' 
+shall be set to
+.IR n ,
+an unsigned decimal integer, or to the exit status of the last command
+executed if
+.IR n
+is not specified. If the value of
+.IR n
+is greater than 255, the results are undefined. When
+.IR return
+is executed in a
+.IR trap
+action, the last command is considered to be the command that
+executed immediately preceding the
+.IR trap
+action.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+The behavior of
+.IR return
+when not in a function or
+.IR dot
+script differs between the System V shell and the KornShell. In the
+System V shell this is an error, whereas in the KornShell, the effect
+is the same as
+.IR exit .
+.P
+The results of returning a number greater than 255 are undefined
+because of differing practices in the various historical
+implementations. Some shells AND out all but the low-order 8 bits;
+others allow larger values, but not of unlimited size.
+.P
+See the discussion of appropriate exit status values under
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.9.5" ", " "Function Definition Command",
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities",
+.IR "\fIdot\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/rm.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/rm.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2a8c94d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/rm.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,447 @@
+'\" et
+.TH RM "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+rm
+\(em remove directory entries
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+rm \fB[\fR\(mifiRr\fB]\fI file\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR rm
+utility shall remove the directory entry specified by each
+.IR file
+argument.
+.P
+If either of the files dot or dot-dot are specified as the basename
+portion of an operand (that is, the final pathname component) or if an
+operand resolves to the root directory,
+.IR rm
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error and do nothing more
+with such operands.
+.P
+For each
+.IR file
+the following steps shall be taken:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the
+.IR file
+does not exist:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+If the
+.BR \(mif
+option is not specified,
+.IR rm
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error.
+.IP " b." 4
+Go on to any remaining
+.IR files .
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+If
+.IR file
+is of type directory, the following steps shall be taken:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+If neither the
+.BR \(miR
+option nor the
+.BR \(mir
+option is specified,
+.IR rm
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing more
+with
+.IR file ,
+and go on to any remaining files.
+.IP " b." 4
+If the
+.BR \(mif
+option is not specified, and either the permissions of
+.IR file
+do not permit writing and the standard input is a terminal or the
+.BR \(mii
+option is specified,
+.IR rm
+shall write a prompt to standard error and read a line from the
+standard input. If the response is not affirmative,
+.IR rm
+shall do nothing more with the current file and go on to any remaining
+files.
+.IP " c." 4
+For each entry contained in
+.IR file ,
+other than dot or dot-dot, the four steps listed here (1 to 4) shall be
+taken with the entry as if it were a
+.IR file
+operand. The
+.IR rm
+utility shall not traverse directories by following symbolic links into
+other parts of the hierarchy, but shall remove the links themselves.
+.IP " d." 4
+If the
+.BR \(mii
+option is specified,
+.IR rm
+shall write a prompt to standard error and read a line from the
+standard input. If the response is not affirmative,
+.IR rm
+shall do nothing more with the current file, and go on to any remaining
+files.
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+If
+.IR file
+is not of type directory, the
+.BR \(mif
+option is not specified, and either the permissions of
+.IR file
+do not permit writing and the standard input is a terminal or the
+.BR \(mii
+option is specified,
+.IR rm
+shall write a prompt to the standard error and read a line from the
+standard input. If the response is not affirmative,
+.IR rm
+shall do nothing more with the current file and go on to any remaining
+files.
+.IP " 4." 4
+If the current file is a directory,
+.IR rm
+shall perform actions equivalent to the
+\fIrmdir\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 called with a pathname of the current
+file used as the
+.IR path
+argument. If the current file is not a directory,
+.IR rm
+shall perform actions equivalent to the
+\fIunlink\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 called with a pathname of the current
+file used as the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+If this fails for any reason,
+.IR rm
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error, do nothing more
+with the current file, and go on to any remaining files.
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR rm
+utility shall be able to descend to arbitrary depths in a file
+hierarchy, and shall not fail due to path length limitations (unless an
+operand specified by the user exceeds system limitations).
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR rm
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mif\fP" 10
+Do not prompt for confirmation. Do not write diagnostic messages or
+modify the exit status in the case of nonexistent operands. Any
+previous occurrences of the
+.BR \(mii
+option shall be ignored.
+.IP "\fB\(mii\fP" 10
+Prompt for confirmation as described previously. Any previous
+occurrences of the
+.BR \(mif
+option shall be ignored.
+.IP "\fB\(miR\fP" 10
+Remove file hierarchies. See the DESCRIPTION.
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+Equivalent to
+.BR \(miR .
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a directory entry to be removed.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used to read an input line in response to
+each prompt specified in the STDOUT section. Otherwise, the standard
+input shall not be used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR rm :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, equivalence classes,
+and multi-character collating elements used in the extended regular
+expression defined for the
+.BR yesexpr
+locale keyword in the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+category.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments) and the behavior of character
+classes within regular expressions used in the extended regular
+expression defined for the
+.BR yesexpr
+locale keyword in the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+category.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale used to process affirmative responses, and the
+locale used to affect the format and contents of diagnostic messages
+and prompts written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+Prompts shall be written to standard error under the conditions
+specified in the DESCRIPTION and OPTIONS sections. The prompts shall
+contain the
+.IR file
+pathname, but their format is otherwise unspecified. The standard
+error also shall be used for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Each directory entry was successfully removed, unless its removal was
+canceled by a non-affirmative response to a prompt for confirmation.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR rm
+utility is forbidden to remove the names dot and dot-dot in order to
+avoid the consequences of inadvertently doing something like:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+rm \(mir .*
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Some implementations do not permit the removal of the last link to an
+executable binary file that is being executed; see the
+.BR [EBUSY] 
+error in the
+\fIunlink\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. Thus, the
+.IR rm
+utility can fail to remove such files.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mii
+option causes
+.IR rm
+to prompt and read the standard input even if the standard input is not
+a terminal, but in the absence of
+.BR \(mii
+the mode prompting is not done when the standard input is not a
+terminal.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+The following command:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+rm a.out core
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+removes the directory entries:
+.BR a.out
+and
+.BR core .
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+The following command:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+rm \(miRf junk
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+removes the directory
+.BR junk
+and all its contents, without prompting.
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+For absolute clarity, paragraphs (2b) and (3) in the DESCRIPTION of
+.IR rm
+describing the behavior when prompting for confirmation, should be
+interpreted in the following manner:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+if ((NOT f_option) AND
+    ((not_writable AND input_is_terminal) OR i_option))
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The exact format of the interactive prompts is unspecified. Only the
+general nature of the contents of prompts are specified because
+implementations may desire more descriptive prompts than those used on
+historical implementations. Therefore, an application not using the
+.BR \(mif
+option, or using the
+.BR \(mii
+option, relies on the system to provide the most suitable dialog
+directly with the user, based on the behavior specified.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mir
+option is historical practice on all known systems. The synonym
+.BR \(miR
+option is provided for consistency with the other utilities in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+that provide options requesting recursive descent through the file
+hierarchy.
+.P
+The behavior of the
+.BR \(mif
+option in historical versions of
+.IR rm
+is inconsistent. In general, along with ``forcing'' the unlink without
+prompting for permission, it always causes diagnostic messages to be
+suppressed and the exit status to be unmodified for nonexistent
+operands and files that cannot be unlinked. In some versions, however,
+the
+.BR \(mif
+option suppresses usage messages and system errors as well.
+Suppressing such messages is not a service to either shell scripts or
+users.
+.P
+It is less clear that error messages regarding files that cannot be
+unlinked (removed) should be suppressed. Although this is historical
+practice, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit the
+.BR \(mif
+option to suppress such messages.
+.P
+When given the
+.BR \(mir
+and
+.BR \(mii
+options, historical versions of
+.IR rm
+prompt the user twice for each directory, once before removing its
+contents and once before actually attempting to delete the directory
+entry that names it. This allows the user to ``prune'' the file
+hierarchy walk. Historical versions of
+.IR rm
+were inconsistent in that some did not do the former prompt for
+directories named on the command line and others had obscure prompting
+behavior when the
+.BR \(mii
+option was specified and the permissions of the file did not permit
+writing. The POSIX Shell and Utilities
+.IR rm
+differs little from historic practice, but does require that prompts be
+consistent. Historical versions of
+.IR rm
+were also inconsistent in that prompts were done to both standard
+output and standard error. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that prompts be done to
+standard error, for consistency with
+.IR cp
+and
+.IR mv ,
+and to allow historical extensions to
+.IR rm
+that provide an option to list deleted files on standard output.
+.P
+The
+.IR rm
+utility is required to descend to arbitrary depths so that any file
+hierarchy may be deleted. This means, for example, that the
+.IR rm
+utility cannot run out of file descriptors during its descent (that is,
+if the number of file descriptors is limited,
+.IR rm
+cannot be implemented in the historical fashion where one file
+descriptor is used per directory level). Also,
+.IR rm
+is not permitted to fail because of path length restrictions, unless an
+operand specified by the user is longer than
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.P
+The
+.IR rm
+utility removes symbolic links themselves, not the files they refer to,
+as a consequence of the dependence on the
+\fIunlink\fR()
+functionality, per the DESCRIPTION. When removing hierarchies with
+.BR \(mir
+or
+.BR \(miR ,
+the prohibition on following symbolic links has to be made explicit.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIrmdir\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIremove\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrmdir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/rmdel.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/rmdel.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..08d0578
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/rmdel.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+'\" et
+.TH RMDEL "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+rmdel
+\(em remove a delta from an SCCS file (\fBDEVELOPMENT\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+rmdel \(mir \fISID file\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR rmdel
+utility shall remove the delta specified by the SID from each named
+SCCS file. The delta to be removed shall be the most recent delta in
+its branch in the delta chain of each named SCCS file. In addition, the
+application shall ensure that the SID specified is not that of a
+version being edited for the purpose of making a delta; that is, if a
+.IR p-file
+(see
+.IR "\fIget\fR\^")
+exists for the named SCCS file, the SID specified shall not appear in
+any entry of the
+.IR p-file .
+.P
+Removal of a delta shall be restricted to:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The user who made the delta
+.IP " 2." 4
+The owner of the SCCS file
+.IP " 3." 4
+The owner of the directory containing the SCCS file
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR rmdel
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mir\ \fISID\fR" 10
+Specify the SCCS identification string (\c
+.IR SID )
+of the delta to be deleted.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of an existing SCCS file or a directory. If
+.IR file
+is a directory, the
+.IR rmdel
+utility shall behave as though each file in the directory were
+specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files (last component
+of the pathname does not begin with
+.BR s. )
+and unreadable files shall be silently ignored.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If exactly one
+.IR file
+operand appears, and it is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be read; each line of the standard input is
+taken to be the name of an SCCS file to be processed. Non-SCCS files
+and unreadable files shall be silently ignored.
+.RE
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be a text file used only when the
+.IR file
+operand is specified as
+.BR '\(mi' .
+Each line of the text file shall be interpreted as an SCCS pathname.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The SCCS files shall be files of unspecified format.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR rmdel :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+The SCCS files shall be files of unspecified format. During processing
+of a
+.IR file ,
+a temporary
+.IR x-file ,
+as described in
+.IR "\fIadmin\fR\^",
+may be created and deleted; a locking
+.IR z-file ,
+as described in
+.IR "\fIget\fR\^",
+may be created and deleted.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIadmin\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIdelta\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIget\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIprs\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/rmdir.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/rmdir.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..753d854
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/rmdir.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,195 @@
+'\" et
+.TH RMDIR "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+rmdir
+\(em remove directories
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+rmdir \fB[\fR\(mip\fB]\fI dir\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR rmdir
+utility shall remove the directory entry specified by each
+.IR dir
+operand.
+.P
+For each
+.IR dir
+operand, the
+.IR rmdir
+utility shall perform actions equivalent to the
+\fIrmdir\fR()
+function called with the
+.IR dir
+operand as its only argument.
+.P
+Directories shall be processed in the order specified. If a directory
+and a subdirectory of that directory are specified in a single
+invocation of the
+.IR rmdir
+utility, the application shall specify the subdirectory before the
+parent directory so that the parent directory will be empty when the
+.IR rmdir
+utility tries to remove it.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR rmdir
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mip\fP" 10
+Remove all directories in a pathname. For each
+.IR dir
+operand:
+.RS 10 
+.IP " 1." 4
+The directory entry it names shall be removed.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the
+.IR dir
+operand includes more than one pathname component, effects equivalent
+to the following command shall occur:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+rmdir \(mip $(dirname \fIdir\fP)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIdir\fR" 10
+A pathname of an empty directory to be removed.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR rmdir :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Each directory entry specified by a
+.IR dir
+operand was removed successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The definition of an empty directory is one that contains, at most,
+directory entries for dot and dot-dot.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+If a directory
+.BR a
+in the current directory is empty except it contains a directory
+.BR b
+and
+.BR a/b
+is empty except it contains a directory
+.BR c :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+rmdir \(mip a/b/c
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+removes all three directories.
+.SH RATIONALE
+On historical System V systems, the
+.BR \(mip
+option also caused a message to be written to the standard output. The
+message indicated whether the whole path was removed or whether part of
+the path remained for some reason. The STDERR section requires this
+diagnostic when the entire path specified by a
+.IR dir
+operand is not removed, but does not allow the status message reporting
+success to be written as a diagnostic.
+.P
+The
+.IR rmdir
+utility on System V also included a
+.BR \(mis
+option that suppressed the informational message output by the
+.BR \(mip
+option. This option has been omitted because the informational message
+is not specified by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIrm\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIremove\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrmdir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/sact.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/sact.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fe3e7b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/sact.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,186 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SACT "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sact
+\(em print current SCCS file-editing activity (\fBDEVELOPMENT\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+sact \fIfile\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR sact
+utility shall inform the user of any impending deltas to a named SCCS
+file by writing a list to standard output. This situation occurs when
+.IR get
+.BR \(mie
+has been executed previously without a subsequent execution of
+.IR delta ,
+.IR unget ,
+or
+.IR sccs
+.BR unedit .
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of an existing SCCS file or a directory. If
+.IR file
+is a directory, the
+.IR sact
+utility shall behave as though each file in the directory were
+specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files (last component
+of the pathname does not begin with
+.BR s. )
+and unreadable files shall be silently ignored.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If exactly one
+.IR file
+operand appears, and it is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be read; each line of the standard input shall
+be taken to be the name of an SCCS file to be processed. Non-SCCS files
+and unreadable files shall be silently ignored.
+.RE
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be a text file used only when the
+.IR file
+operand is specified as
+.BR '\(mi' .
+Each line of the text file shall be interpreted as an SCCS pathname.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+Any SCCS files interrogated are files of an unspecified format.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR sact :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The output for each named file shall consist of a line in the following
+format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s %s %s %s %s\en", <\fISID\fR>, <\fInew SID\fR>, <\fIlogin\fR>, <\fIdate\fR>, <\fItime\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.IP "<\fISID\fR>" 10
+Specifies the SID of a delta that currently exists in the SCCS file to
+which changes are made to make the new delta.
+.IP "<\fInew\ SID\fR>" 10
+Specifies the SID for the new delta to be created.
+.IP "<\fIlogin\fR>" 10
+Contains the login name of the user who makes the delta (that is, who
+executed a
+.IR get
+for editing).
+.IP "<\fIdate\fR>" 10
+Contains the date that
+.IR get
+.BR \(mie
+was executed, in the format used by the
+.IR prs
+.BR :D:
+data keyword.
+.IP "<\fItime\fR>" 10
+Contains the time that
+.IR get
+.BR \(mie
+was executed, in the format used by the
+.IR prs
+.BR :T:
+data keyword.
+.P
+If there is more than one named file or if a directory or standard
+input is named, each pathname shall be written before each of the
+preceding lines:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"\en%s:\en", <\fIpathname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for optional informative
+messages concerning SCCS files with no impending deltas, and for
+diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIdelta\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIget\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsccs\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIunget\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/sccs.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/sccs.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..765bf08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/sccs.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,542 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SCCS "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sccs
+\(em front end for the SCCS subsystem (\fBDEVELOPMENT\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+sccs \fB[\fR\(mir\fB] [\fR\(mid \fIpath\fB] [\fR\(mip \fIpath\fB] \fIcommand \fB[\fIoptions\fR...\fB] [\fIoperands\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR sccs
+utility is a front end to the SCCS programs. It also includes the
+capability to run set-user-id to another user to provide additional
+protection.
+.P
+The
+.IR sccs
+utility shall invoke the specified
+.IR command
+with the specified
+.IR options
+and
+.IR operands .
+By default, each of the
+.IR operands
+shall be modified by prefixing it with the string
+.BR \(dqSCCS/s.\(dq .
+.P
+The
+.IR command
+can be the name of one of the SCCS utilities in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 (\c
+.IR admin ,
+.IR delta ,
+.IR get ,
+.IR prs ,
+.IR rmdel ,
+.IR sact ,
+.IR unget ,
+.IR val ,
+or
+.IR what )
+or one of the pseudo-utilities listed in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION
+section.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR sccs
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except that
+.IR options
+operands are actually options to be passed to the utility named by
+.IR command .
+When the portion of the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIcommand \fB[\fIoptions\fR ... \fB] [\fIoperands\fR ... \fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+is considered, all of the pseudo-utilities used as
+.IR command
+shall support the Utility Syntax Guidelines. Any of the other SCCS
+utilities that can be invoked in this manner support the Guidelines to
+the extent indicated by their individual OPTIONS sections.
+.P
+The following options shall be supported preceding the
+.IR command
+operand:
+.IP "\fB\(mid\ \fIpath\fR" 10
+A pathname of a directory to be used as a root directory for the SCCS
+files. The default shall be the current directory. The
+.BR \(mid
+option shall take precedence over the
+.IR PROJECTDIR
+variable. See
+.BR \(mip .
+.IP "\fB\(mip\ \fIpath\fR" 10
+A pathname of a directory in which the SCCS files are located. The
+default shall be the
+.BR SCCS
+directory.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mip
+option differs from the
+.BR \(mid
+option in that the
+.BR \(mid
+option-argument shall be prefixed to the entire pathname and the
+.BR \(mip
+option-argument shall be inserted before the final component of the
+pathname. For example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sccs \(mid /x \(mip y get a/b
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+converts to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+get /x/a/y/s.b
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This allows the creation of aliases such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+alias syssccs="sccs \(mid /usr/src"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+which is used as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+syssccs get cmd/who.c
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+Invoke
+.IR command
+with the real user ID of the process, not any effective user ID that
+the
+.IR sccs
+utility is set to. Certain commands (\c
+.IR admin ,
+.BR check ,
+.BR clean ,
+.BR diffs ,
+.BR info ,
+.IR rmdel ,
+and
+.BR tell )
+cannot be run set-user-ID by all users, since this would allow anyone
+to change the authorizations. These commands are always run as the
+real user.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIcommand\fR" 10
+An SCCS utility name or the name of one of the pseudo-utilities listed
+in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.IP "\fIoptions\fR" 10
+An option or option-argument to be passed to
+.IR command .
+.IP "\fIoperands\fR" 10
+An operand to be passed to
+.IR command .
+.SH STDIN
+See the utility description for the specified
+.IR command .
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+See the utility description for the specified
+.IR command .
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR sccs :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fIPROJECTDIR\fP" 10
+.br
+Provide a default value for the
+.BR \(mid
+.IR path
+option. If the value of
+.IR PROJECTDIR
+begins with a
+<slash>,
+it shall be considered an absolute pathname; otherwise, the value of
+.IR PROJECTDIR
+is treated as a user name and that user's initial working directory
+shall be examined for a subdirectory
+.BR src
+or
+.BR source .
+If such a directory is found, it shall be used. Otherwise, the value
+shall be used as a relative pathname.
+.P
+Additional environment variable effects may be found in the utility
+description for the specified
+.IR command .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+See the utility description for the specified
+.IR command .
+.SH STDERR
+See the utility description for the specified
+.IR command .
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+See the utility description for the specified
+.IR command .
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+The following pseudo-utilities shall be supported as
+.IR command
+operands. All options referred to in the following list are values
+given in the
+.IR options
+operands following
+.IR command .
+.IP "\fBcheck\fR" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR info ,
+except that nothing shall be printed if nothing is being edited, and a
+non-zero exit status shall be returned if anything is being edited. The
+intent is to have this included in an ``install'' entry in a makefile
+to ensure that everything is included into the SCCS file before a
+version is installed.
+.IP "\fBclean\fR" 8
+Remove everything from the current directory that can be recreated from
+SCCS files, but do not remove any files being edited. If the
+.BR \(mib
+option is given, branches shall be ignored in the determination of
+whether they are being edited; this is dangerous if branches are kept
+in the same directory.
+.IP "\fBcreate\fR" 8
+Create an SCCS file, taking the initial contents from the file of the
+same name. Any options to
+.IR admin
+are accepted. If the creation is successful, the original files shall
+be renamed by prefixing the basenames with a comma. These renamed files
+should be removed after it has been verified that the SCCS files have
+been created successfully.
+.IP "\fBdelget\fR" 8
+Perform a
+.IR delta
+on the named files and then
+.IR get
+new versions. The new versions shall have ID keywords expanded and
+shall not be editable. Any
+.BR \(mim ,
+.BR \(mip ,
+.BR \(mir ,
+.BR \(mis ,
+and
+.BR \(miy
+options shall be passed to
+.IR delta ,
+and any
+.BR \(mib ,
+.BR \(mic ,
+.BR \(mie ,
+.BR \(mii ,
+.BR \(mik ,
+.BR \(mil ,
+.BR \(mis ,
+and
+.BR \(mix
+options shall be passed to
+.IR get .
+.IP "\fBdeledit\fR" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR delget ,
+except that the
+.IR get
+phase shall include the
+.BR \(mie
+option. This option is useful for making a checkpoint of the current
+editing phase. The same options shall be passed to
+.IR delta
+as described above, and all the options listed for
+.IR get
+above except
+.BR \(mie
+shall be passed to
+.BR edit .
+.IP "\fBdiffs\fR" 8
+Write a difference listing between the current version of the files
+checked out for editing and the versions in SCCS format. Any
+.BR \(mir ,
+.BR \(mic ,
+.BR \(mii ,
+.BR \(mix ,
+and
+.BR \(mit
+options shall be passed to
+.IR get ;
+any
+.BR \(mil ,
+.BR \(mis ,
+.BR \(mie ,
+.BR \(mif ,
+.BR \(mih ,
+and
+.BR \(mib
+options shall be passed to
+.IR diff .
+A
+.BR \(miC
+option shall be passed to
+.IR diff
+as
+.BR \(mic .
+.IP "\fBedit\fR" 8
+Equivalent to
+.IR get
+.BR \(mie .
+.IP "\fBfix\fR" 8
+Remove the named delta, but leave a copy of the delta with the changes
+that were in it. It is useful for fixing small compiler bugs, and so
+on. The application shall ensure that it is followed by a
+.BR \(mir
+.IR SID
+option. Since
+.BR fix
+does not leave audit trails, it should be used carefully.
+.IP "\fBinfo\fR" 8
+Write a listing of all files being edited. If the
+.BR \(mib
+option is given, branches (that is, SIDs with two or fewer components)
+shall be ignored. If a
+.BR \(miu
+.IR user
+option is given, then only files being edited by the named user shall
+be listed. A
+.BR \(miU
+option shall be equivalent to
+.BR \(miu <\c
+.IR "current\ user" >.
+.IP "\fBprint\fR" 8
+Write out verbose information about the named files, equivalent to
+.IR sccs
+.IR prs .
+.IP "\fBtell\fR" 8
+Write a
+<newline>-separated
+list of the files being edited to standard output. Takes the
+.BR \(mib ,
+.BR \(miu ,
+and
+.BR \(miU
+options like
+.BR info
+and
+.BR check .
+.IP "\fBunedit\fR" 8
+This is the opposite of an
+.BR edit
+or a
+.IR get
+.BR \(mie .
+It should be used with caution, since any changes made since the
+.IR get
+are lost.
+.br
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Many of the SCCS utilities take directory names as operands as well as
+specific filenames. The pseudo-utilities supported by
+.IR sccs
+are not described as having this capability, but are not prohibited
+from doing so.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+To get a file for editing, edit it and produce a new delta:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sccs get \(mie file.c
+ex file.c
+sccs delta file.c
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+To get a file from another directory:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sccs \(mip /usr/src/sccs/s. get cc.c
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+or:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sccs get /usr/src/sccs/s.cc.c
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+To make a delta of a large number of files in the current directory:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sccs delta *.c
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+To get a list of files being edited that are not on branches:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sccs info \(mib
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 5." 4
+To delta everything being edited by the current user:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sccs delta $(sccs tell \(miU)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 6." 4
+In a makefile, to get source files from an SCCS file if it does not
+already exist:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+SRCS = <\fIlist of source files\fP>
+$(SRCS):
+    sccs get $(REL) $@
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+.IR sccs
+and its associated utilities are part of the XSI Development
+Utilities option within the XSI option.
+.P
+SCCS is an abbreviation for Source Code Control System. It is a
+maintenance and enhancement tracking tool. When a file is put under
+SCCS, the source code control system maintains the file and, when
+changes are made, identifies and stores them in the file with the
+original source code and/or documentation. As other changes are made,
+they too are identified and retained in the file.
+.P
+Retrieval of the original and any set of changes is possible. Any
+version of the file as it develops can be reconstructed for inspection
+or additional modification. History data can be stored with each
+version, documenting why the changes were made, who made them, and when
+they were made.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIadmin\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIdelta\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIget\fR\^",
+.IR "\fImake\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIprs\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIrmdel\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsact\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIunget\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIval\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIwhat\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/sed.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/sed.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..90428f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/sed.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,1067 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SED "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sed
+\(em stream editor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+sed \fB[\fR\(min\fB] \fIscript \fB[\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+sed \fB[\fR\(min\fB] \fR\(mie \fIscript \fB[\fR\(mie \fIscript\fB]\fR... \fB[\fR\(mif \fIscript_file\fB]\fR... \fB[\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+sed \fB[\fR\(min\fB] [\fR\(mie \fIscript\fB]\fR... \(mif \fIscript_file\fR \fB[\fR\(mif \fIscript_file\fB]\fR... \fB[\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR sed
+utility is a stream editor that shall read one or more text files, make
+editing changes according to a script of editing commands, and write
+the results to standard output. The script shall be obtained from
+either the
+.IR script
+operand string or a combination of the option-arguments from the
+.BR \(mie
+.IR script
+and
+.BR \(mif
+.IR script_file
+options.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR sed
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except that the order of presentation of the
+.BR \(mie
+and
+.BR \(mif
+options is significant.
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mie\ \fIscript\fR" 10
+Add the editing commands specified by the
+.IR script
+option-argument to the end of the script of editing commands.
+.IP "\fB\(mif\ \fIscript_file\fR" 10
+Add the editing commands in the file
+.IR script_file
+to the end of the script of editing commands.
+.IP "\fB\(min\fP" 10
+Suppress the default output (in which each line, after it is examined
+for editing, is written to standard output). Only lines explicitly
+selected for output are written.
+.P
+If any
+.BR \(mie
+or
+.BR \(mif
+options are specified, the script of editing commands shall initially
+be empty. The commands specified by each
+.BR \(mie
+or
+.BR \(mif
+option shall be added to the script in the order specified. When each
+addition is made, if the previous addition (if any) was from a
+.BR \(mie
+option, a
+<newline>
+shall be inserted before the new addition. The resulting script shall
+have the same properties as the
+.IR script
+operand, described in the OPERANDS section.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file whose contents are read and edited. If multiple
+.IR file
+operands are specified, the named files shall be read in the order
+specified and the concatenation shall be edited. If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, the standard input shall be used.
+.IP "\fIscript\fR" 10
+A string to be used as the script of editing commands. The application
+shall not present a
+.IR script
+that violates the restrictions of a text file except that the final
+character need not be a
+<newline>.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used if no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, and shall be used if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' 
+and the implementation treats the
+.BR '\(mi' 
+as meaning standard input.
+Otherwise, the standard input shall not be used.
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files shall be text files. The
+.IR script_file s
+named by the
+.BR \(mif
+option shall consist of editing commands.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR sed :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, equivalence classes,
+and multi-character collating elements within regular expressions.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files), and the behavior
+of character classes within regular expressions.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The input files shall be written to standard output, with the editing
+commands specified in the script applied. If the
+.BR \(min
+option is specified, only those input lines selected by the script
+shall be written to standard output.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+The output files shall be text files whose formats are dependent on the
+editing commands given.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+The
+.IR script
+shall consist of editing commands of the following form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIaddress\fB[\fR,\fIaddress\fB]]\fIfunction\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR function
+represents a single-character command verb from the list in
+.IR "Editing Commands in sed",
+followed by any applicable arguments.
+.P
+The command can be preceded by
+<blank>
+characters and/or
+<semicolon>
+characters. The function can be preceded by
+<blank>
+characters. These optional characters shall have no effect.
+.P
+In default operation,
+.IR sed
+cyclically shall append a line of input, less its terminating
+<newline>
+character, into the pattern space. Reading from input shall be skipped
+if a
+<newline>
+was in the pattern space prior to a
+.BR D
+command ending the previous cycle. The
+.IR sed
+utility shall then apply in sequence all commands whose addresses select
+that pattern space, until a command starts the next cycle or quits. If
+no commands explicitly started a new cycle, then at the end of the script
+the pattern space shall be copied to standard output (except when
+.BR \(min
+is specified) and the pattern space shall be deleted. Whenever the
+pattern space is written to standard output or a named file,
+.IR sed
+shall immediately follow it with a
+<newline>.
+.P
+Some of the editing commands use a hold space to save all or part of
+the pattern space for subsequent retrieval. The pattern and hold spaces
+shall each be able to hold at least 8\|192 bytes.
+.SS "Addresses in sed"
+.P
+An address is either a decimal number that counts input lines
+cumulatively across files, a
+.BR '$' 
+character that addresses the last line of input, or a context address
+(which consists of a BRE, as described in
+.IR "Regular Expressions in sed",
+preceded and followed by a delimiter, usually a
+<slash>).
+.P
+An editing command with no addresses shall select every pattern space.
+.P
+An editing command with one address shall select each pattern space
+that matches the address.
+.P
+An editing command with two addresses shall select the inclusive range
+from the first pattern space that matches the first address through the
+next pattern space that matches the second. (If the second address is a
+number less than or equal to the line number first selected, only one
+line shall be selected.) Starting at the first line following the
+selected range,
+.IR sed
+shall look again for the first address. Thereafter, the process shall
+be repeated. Omitting either or both of the address components in the
+following form produces undefined results:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIaddress\fB[\fR,\fIaddress\fB]]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Regular Expressions in sed"
+.P
+The
+.IR sed
+utility shall support the BREs described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 9.3" ", " "Basic Regular Expressions",
+with the following additions:
+.IP " *" 4
+In a context address, the construction
+.BR \(dq\ecBREc\(dq ,
+where
+.IR c
+is any character other than
+<backslash>
+or
+<newline>,
+shall be identical to
+.BR \(dq/BRE/\(dq .
+If the character designated by
+.IR c
+appears following a
+<backslash>,
+then it shall be considered to be that literal character, which shall
+not terminate the BRE. For example, in the context address
+.BR \(dq\exabc\exdefx\(dq ,
+the second
+.IR x
+stands for itself, so that the BRE is
+.BR \(dqabcxdef\(dq .
+.IP " *" 4
+The escape sequence
+.BR '\en' 
+shall match a
+<newline>
+embedded in the pattern space. A literal
+<newline>
+shall not be used in the BRE of a context address or in the substitute
+function.
+.IP " *" 4
+If an RE is empty (that is, no pattern is specified)
+.IR sed
+shall behave as if the last RE used in the last command applied (either
+as an address or as part of a substitute command) was specified.
+.SS "Editing Commands in sed"
+.P
+In the following list of editing commands, the maximum number of
+permissible addresses for each function is indicated by [\c
+.IR 0addr ],
+[\c
+.IR 1addr ],
+or [\c
+.IR 2addr ],
+representing zero, one, or two addresses.
+.P
+The argument
+.IR text
+shall consist of one or more lines. Each embedded
+<newline>
+in the text shall be preceded by a
+<backslash>.
+Other
+<backslash>
+characters in text shall be removed, and the following character shall
+be treated literally.
+.P
+The
+.BR r
+and
+.BR w
+command verbs, and the
+.IR w
+flag to the
+.BR s
+command, take an
+.IR rfile
+(or
+.IR wfile )
+parameter, separated from the command verb letter or flag by one or
+more
+<blank>
+characters; implementations may allow zero separation as an extension.
+.P
+The argument
+.IR rfile
+or the argument
+.IR wfile
+shall terminate the editing command. Each
+.IR wfile
+shall be created before processing begins. Implementations shall
+support at least ten
+.IR wfile
+arguments in the script; the actual number (greater than or equal to
+10) that is supported by the implementation is unspecified. The
+use of the
+.IR wfile
+parameter shall cause that file to be initially created, if it does not
+exist, or shall replace the contents of an existing file.
+.P
+The
+.BR b ,
+.BR r ,
+.BR s ,
+.BR t ,
+.BR w ,
+.BR y ,
+and
+.BR :
+command verbs shall accept additional arguments. The following synopses
+indicate which arguments shall be separated from the command verbs by a
+single
+<space>.
+.P
+The
+.BR a
+and
+.BR r
+commands schedule text for later output. The text specified for the
+.BR a
+command, and the contents of the file specified for the
+.BR r
+command, shall be written to standard output just before the next
+attempt to fetch a line of input when executing the
+.BR N
+or
+.BR n
+commands, or when reaching the end of the script. If written when
+reaching the end of the script, and the
+.BR \(min
+option was not specified, the text shall be written after copying the
+pattern space to standard output. The contents of the file specified
+for the
+.BR r
+command shall be as of the time the output is written, not the time the
+.BR r
+command is applied. The text shall be output in the order in which the
+.BR a
+and
+.BR r
+commands were applied to the input.
+.P
+Command verbs other than
+.BR { ,
+.BR a ,
+.BR b ,
+.BR c ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR r ,
+.BR t ,
+.BR w ,
+.BR : ,
+and
+.BR #
+can be followed by a
+<semicolon>,
+optional
+<blank>
+characters, and another command verb. However, when the
+.BR s
+command verb is used with the
+.IR w
+flag, following it with another command in this manner produces
+undefined results.
+.P
+A function can be preceded by one or more
+.BR '!' 
+characters, in which case the function shall be applied if the
+addresses do not select the pattern space. Zero or more
+<blank>
+characters shall be accepted before the first
+.BR '!' 
+character. It is unspecified whether
+<blank>
+characters can follow a
+.BR '!' 
+character, and conforming applications shall not follow a
+.BR '!' 
+character with
+<blank>
+characters.
+.IP "\fB[\fI2addr\fB]\ {\fIediting command\fR" 10
+.IP "\fIediting command\fR" 10
+.IP ".\|.\|." 10
+.IP "\fB}\fR" 10
+Execute a list of
+.IR sed
+editing commands only when the pattern space is selected. The list of
+.IR sed
+editing commands shall be surrounded by braces and separated by
+<newline>
+characters, and conform to the following rules. The braces can be preceded
+or followed by
+<blank>
+characters. The editing commands can be preceded by
+<blank>
+characters, but shall not be followed by
+<blank>
+characters. The
+<right-brace>
+shall be preceded by a
+<newline>
+and can be preceded or followed by
+<blank>
+characters.
+.IP "\fB[\fI1addr\fB]a\e\fR" 10
+.IP "\fItext\fR" 10
+Write text to standard output as described previously.
+.IP "\fB[\fI2addr\fB]b\ [\fIlabel\fB]\fR" 10
+.br
+Branch to the
+.BR :
+function bearing the
+.IR label .
+If
+.IR label
+is not specified, branch to the end of the script. The implementation
+shall support
+.IR label s
+recognized as unique up to at least 8 characters; the actual length
+(greater than or equal to 8) that shall be supported by the
+implementation is unspecified. It is unspecified whether exceeding a
+label length causes an error or a silent truncation.
+.IP "\fB[\fI2addr\fB]c\e\fR" 10
+.IP "\fItext\fR" 10
+Delete the pattern space. With a 0 or 1 address or at the end of a
+2-address range, place
+.IR text
+on the output and start the next cycle.
+.IP "\fB[\fI2addr\fB]d\fR" 10
+Delete the pattern space and start the next cycle.
+.IP "\fB[\fI2addr\fB]D\fR" 10
+If the pattern space contains no
+<newline>,
+delete the pattern space and start a normal new cycle as if the
+.BR d
+command was issued. Otherwise, delete the initial segment of the
+pattern space through the first
+<newline>,
+and start the next cycle with the resultant pattern space and without
+reading any new input.
+.IP "\fB[\fI2addr\fB]g\fR" 10
+Replace the contents of the pattern space by the contents of the hold
+space.
+.IP "\fB[\fI2addr\fB]G\fR" 10
+Append to the pattern space a
+<newline>
+followed by the contents of the hold space.
+.IP "\fB[\fI2addr\fB]h\fR" 10
+Replace the contents of the hold space with the contents of the pattern
+space.
+.IP "\fB[\fI2addr\fB]H\fR" 10
+Append to the hold space a
+<newline>
+followed by the contents of the pattern space.
+.IP "\fB[\fI1addr\fB]i\e\fR" 10
+.IP "\fItext\fR" 10
+Write
+.IR text
+to standard output.
+.IP "\fB[\fI2addr\fB]l\fR" 10
+(The letter ell.) Write the pattern space to standard output in a
+visually unambiguous form. The characters listed in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Table 5-1" ", " "Escape Sequences and Associated Actions"
+(\c
+.BR '\e\e' ,
+.BR '\ea' ,
+.BR '\eb' ,
+.BR '\ef' ,
+.BR '\er' ,
+.BR '\et' ,
+.BR '\ev' )
+shall be written as the corresponding escape sequence; the
+.BR '\en' 
+in that table is not applicable. Non-printable characters not in that
+table shall be written as one three-digit octal number (with a
+preceding
+<backslash>)
+for each byte in the character (most significant byte first).
+.RS 10 
+.P
+Long lines shall be folded, with the point of folding indicated by
+writing a
+<backslash>
+followed by a
+<newline>;
+the length at which folding occurs is unspecified, but should be
+appropriate for the output device. The end of each line shall be marked
+with a
+.BR '$' .
+.RE
+.IP "\fB[\fI2addr\fB]n\fR" 10
+Write the pattern space to standard output if the default output has
+not been suppressed, and replace the pattern space with the next line
+of input, less its terminating
+<newline>.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If no next line of input is available, the
+.BR n
+command verb shall branch to the end of the script and quit without
+starting a new cycle.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB[\fI2addr\fB]N\fR" 10
+Append the next line of input, less its terminating
+<newline>,
+to the pattern space, using an embedded
+<newline>
+to separate the appended material from the original material. Note that
+the current line number changes.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If no next line of input is available, the
+.BR N
+command verb shall branch to the end of the script and quit without
+starting a new cycle or copying the pattern space to standard output.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB[\fI2addr\fB]p\fR" 10
+Write the pattern space to standard output.
+.IP "\fB[\fI2addr\fB]P\fR" 10
+Write the pattern space, up to the first
+<newline>,
+to standard output.
+.IP "\fB[\fI1addr\fB]q\fR" 10
+Branch to the end of the script and quit without starting a new cycle.
+.IP "\fB[\fI1addr\fB]r\ \fIrfile\fR" 10
+Copy the contents of
+.IR rfile
+to standard output as described previously. If
+.IR rfile
+does not exist or cannot be read, it shall be treated as if it were an
+empty file, causing no error condition.
+.IP "\fB[\fI2addr\fB]s/\fIBRE\fB/\fIreplacement\fB/\fIflags\fR" 10
+.br
+Substitute the replacement string for instances of the BRE in the
+pattern space. Any character other than
+<backslash>
+or
+<newline>
+can be used instead of a
+<slash>
+to delimit the BRE and the replacement. Within the BRE and the
+replacement, the BRE delimiter itself can be used as a literal character
+if it is preceded by a
+<backslash>.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The replacement string shall be scanned from beginning to end. An
+<ampersand>
+(\c
+.BR '&' )
+appearing in the replacement shall be replaced by the string matching
+the BRE. The special meaning of
+.BR '&' 
+in this context can be suppressed by preceding it by a
+<backslash>.
+The characters \fR"\e\fIn"\fR, where
+.IR n
+is a digit, shall be replaced by the text matched by the corresponding
+back-reference expression. If the corresponding back-reference expression
+does not match, then the characters \fR"\e\fIn"\fR shall be replaced
+by the empty string. The special meaning of \fR"\e\fIn"\fR where
+.IR n
+is a digit in this context, can be suppressed by preceding it by a
+<backslash>.
+For each other
+<backslash>
+encountered, the following character shall lose its special meaning (if
+any). The meaning of a
+<backslash>
+immediately followed by any character other than
+.BR '&' ,
+<backslash>,
+a digit, or the delimiter character used for this command, is
+unspecified.
+.P
+A line can be split by substituting a
+<newline>
+into it. The application shall escape the
+<newline>
+in the replacement by preceding it by a
+<backslash>.
+A substitution shall be considered to have been performed even if the
+replacement string is identical to the string that it replaces. Any
+<backslash>
+used to alter the default meaning of a subsequent character shall be
+discarded from the BRE or the replacement before evaluating the BRE or
+using the replacement.
+.P
+The value of
+.IR flags
+shall be zero or more of:
+.IP "\fIn\fR" 10
+Substitute for the
+.IR n th
+occurrence only of the BRE found within the pattern space.
+.IP "\fBg\fR" 10
+Globally substitute for all non-overlapping instances of the BRE rather
+than just the first one. If both
+.BR g
+and
+.IR n
+are specified, the results are unspecified.
+.IP "\fBp\fR" 10
+Write the pattern space to standard output if a replacement was made.
+.IP "\fBw\ \fIwfile\fR" 10
+Write. Append the pattern space to
+.IR wfile
+if a replacement was made. A conforming application shall precede the
+.IR wfile
+argument with one or more
+<blank>
+characters. If the
+.BR w
+flag is not the last flag value given in a concatenation of multiple
+flag values, the results are undefined.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB[\fI2addr\fB]t\ [\fIlabel\fB]\fR" 10
+.br
+Test. Branch to the
+.BR :
+command verb bearing the
+.IR label
+if any substitutions have been made since the most recent reading of an
+input line or execution of a
+.BR t .
+If
+.IR label
+is not specified, branch to the end of the script.
+.IP "\fB[\fI2addr\fB]w\ \fIwfile\fR" 10
+.br
+Append (write) the pattern space to
+.IR wfile .
+.IP "\fB[\fI2addr\fB]x\fR" 10
+Exchange the contents of the pattern and hold spaces.
+.IP "\fB[\fI2addr\fB]y/\fIstring1\fB/\fIstring2\fB/\fR" 10
+.br
+Replace all occurrences of characters in
+.IR string1
+with the corresponding characters in
+.IR string2 .
+If a
+<backslash>
+followed by an
+.BR 'n' 
+appear in
+.IR string1
+or
+.IR string2 ,
+the two characters shall be handled as a single
+<newline>.
+If the number of characters in
+.IR string1
+and
+.IR string2
+are not equal, or if any of the characters in
+.IR string1
+appear more than once, the results are undefined. Any character other
+than
+<backslash>
+or
+<newline>
+can be used instead of
+<slash>
+to delimit the strings. If the delimiter is not
+.BR 'n' ,
+within
+.IR string1
+and
+.IR string2 ,
+the delimiter itself can be used as a literal character if it is
+preceded by a
+<backslash>.
+If a
+<backslash>
+character is immediately followed by a
+<backslash>
+character in
+.IR string1
+or
+.IR string2 ,
+the two
+<backslash>
+characters shall be counted as a single literal
+<backslash>
+character. The meaning of a
+<backslash>
+followed by any character that is not
+.BR 'n' ,
+a
+<backslash>,
+or the delimiter character is undefined.
+.IP "\fB[\fI0addr\fB]:\fIlabel\fR" 10
+Do nothing. This command bears a
+.IR label
+to which the
+.BR b
+and
+.BR t
+commands branch.
+.IP "\fB[\fI1addr\fB]=\fR" 10
+Write the following to standard output:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d\en", <\fIcurrent line number\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP "\fB[\fI0addr\fB]\fR" 10
+Ignore this empty command.
+.IP "\fB[\fI0addr\fB]#\fR" 10
+Ignore the
+.BR '#' 
+and the remainder of the line (treat them as a comment), with the
+single exception that if the first two characters in the script are
+.BR \(dq#n\(dq ,
+the default output shall be suppressed; this shall be the equivalent of
+specifying
+.BR \(min
+on the command line.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Regular expressions match entire strings, not just individual lines,
+but a
+<newline>
+is matched by
+.BR '\en' 
+in a
+.IR sed
+RE; a
+<newline>
+is not allowed by the general definition of regular expression in
+POSIX.1\(hy2008. Also note that
+.BR '\en' 
+cannot be used to match a
+<newline>
+at the end of an arbitrary input line;
+<newline>
+characters appear in the pattern space as a result of the
+.BR N
+editing command.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+This
+.IR sed
+script simulates the BSD
+.IR cat
+.BR \(mis
+command, squeezing excess empty lines from standard input.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sed \(min '
+# Write non-empty lines.
+/./ {
+    p
+    d
+    }
+# Write a single empty line, then look for more empty lines.
+/^$/    p
+# Get next line, discard the held <newline> (empty line),
+# and look for more empty lines.
+:Empty
+/^$/    {
+    N
+    s/.//
+    b Empty
+    }
+# Write the non-empty line before going back to search
+# for the first in a set of empty lines.
+    p
+\&'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following
+.IR sed
+command is a much simpler method of squeezing empty lines, although
+it is not quite the same as
+.IR cat
+.BR \(mis
+since it removes any initial empty lines:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sed \(min '/./,/^$/p'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires implementations to support at least ten distinct
+.IR wfile s,
+matching historical practice on many implementations. Implementations
+are encouraged to support more, but conforming applications should not
+exceed this limit.
+.P
+The exit status codes specified here are different from those in System
+V. System V returns 2 for garbled
+.IR sed
+commands, but returns zero with its usage message or if the input file
+could not be opened. The standard developers considered this to be a
+bug.
+.P
+The manner in which the
+.BR l
+command writes non-printable characters was changed to avoid
+the historical backspace-overstrike method, and other requirements to
+achieve unambiguous output were added. See the RATIONALE for
+.IR "\fIed\fR\^"
+for details of the format chosen, which is the same as that chosen for
+.IR sed .
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires implementations to provide pattern and hold spaces of at
+least 8\|192 bytes, larger than the 4\|000 bytes spaces used by some
+historical implementations, but less than the 20\|480 bytes limit used
+in an early proposal. Implementations are encouraged to allocate
+dynamically larger pattern and hold spaces as needed.
+.P
+The requirements for acceptance of
+<blank>
+and
+<space>
+characters in command lines has been made more explicit than in early
+proposals to describe clearly the historical practice and to remove
+confusion about the phrase ``protect initial blanks [\fIsic\fP] and tabs
+from the stripping that is done on every script line'' that appears in
+much of the historical documentation of the
+.IR sed
+utility description of text. (Not all implementations are known to have
+stripped
+<blank>
+characters from text lines, although they all have allowed leading
+<blank>
+characters preceding the address on a command line.)
+.P
+The treatment of
+.BR '#' 
+comments differs from the SVID which only allows a comment as the first
+line of the script, but matches BSD-derived implementations. The
+comment character is treated as a command, and it has the same
+properties in terms of being accepted with leading
+<blank>
+characters; the BSD implementation has historically supported this.
+.P
+Early proposals required that a
+.IR script_file
+have at least one non-comment line. Some historical implementations
+have behaved in unexpected ways if this were not the case. The standard
+developers considered that this was incorrect behavior and that
+application developers should not have to avoid this feature. A correct
+implementation of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 shall permit
+.IR script_file s
+that consist only of comment lines.
+.P
+Early proposals indicated that if
+.BR \(mie
+and
+.BR \(mif
+options were intermixed, all
+.BR \(mie
+options were processed before any
+.BR \(mif
+options. This has been changed to process them in the order presented
+because it matches historical practice and is more intuitive.
+.P
+The treatment of the
+.BR p
+flag to the
+.BR s
+command differs between System V and BSD-based systems when the default
+output is suppressed. In the two examples:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+echo a | sed    's/a/A/p'
+echo a | sed \(min 's/a/A/p'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, BSD, System V documentation, and the SVID indicate that the
+first example should write two lines with
+.BR A ,
+whereas the second should write one. Some System V systems write the
+.BR A
+only once in both examples because the
+.BR p
+flag is ignored if the
+.BR \(min
+option is not specified.
+.P
+This is a case of a diametrical difference between systems that could
+not be reconciled through the compromise of declaring the behavior to
+be unspecified. The SVID/BSD/System V documentation behavior was
+adopted for this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 because:
+.IP " *" 4
+No known documentation for any historic system describes the
+interaction between the
+.BR p
+flag and the
+.BR \(min
+option.
+.IP " *" 4
+The selected behavior is more correct as there is no technical
+justification for any interaction between the
+.BR p
+flag and the
+.BR \(min
+option. A relationship between
+.BR \(min
+and the
+.BR p
+flag might imply that they are only used together, but this ignores
+valid scripts that interrupt the cyclical nature of the processing
+through the use of the
+.BR D ,
+.BR d ,
+.BR q ,
+or branching commands. Such scripts rely on the
+.BR p
+suffix to write the pattern space because they do not make use of the
+default output at the ``bottom'' of the script.
+.IP " *" 4
+Because the
+.BR \(min
+option makes the
+.BR p
+flag unnecessary, any interaction would only be useful if
+.IR sed
+scripts were written to run both with and without the
+.BR \(min
+option. This is believed to be unlikely. It is even more unlikely that
+programmers have coded the
+.BR p
+flag expecting it to be unnecessary. Because the interaction was not
+documented, the likelihood of a programmer discovering the interaction
+and depending on it is further decreased.
+.IP " *" 4
+Finally, scripts that break under the specified behavior produce too
+much output instead of too little, which is easier to diagnose and
+correct.
+.P
+The form of the substitute command that uses the
+.BR n
+suffix was limited to the first 512 matches in an early proposal. This
+limit has been removed because there is no reason an editor processing
+lines of
+{LINE_MAX}
+length should have this restriction. The command
+.BR "s/a/A/2047"
+should be able to substitute the 2\|047th occurrence of
+.BR a
+on a line.
+.P
+The
+.BR b ,
+.BR t ,
+and
+.BR :
+commands are documented to ignore leading white space, but no mention
+is made of trailing white space. Historical implementations of
+.IR sed
+assigned different locations to the labels
+.BR 'x' 
+and
+.BR \(dqx\ \(dq .
+This is not useful, and leads to subtle programming errors, but it is
+historical practice, and changing it could theoretically break working
+scripts. Implementors are encouraged to provide warning messages about
+labels that are never used or jumps to labels that do not exist.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.IR sed
+.BR !
+and
+.BR }
+editing commands did not permit multiple commands on a single line
+using a
+<semicolon>
+as a command delimiter. Implementations are permitted, but not required,
+to support this extension.
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard allowed for implementations with
+bytes other than eight bits, but this has been modified in this
+version.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIawk\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIed\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIgrep\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Table 5-1" ", " "Escape Sequences and Associated Actions",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 9.3" ", " "Basic Regular Expressions",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/set.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/set.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8db4db1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/set.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,806 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SET "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+set
+\(em set or unset options and positional parameters
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+set \fB[\fR\(miabCefhmnuvx\fB] [\fR\(mio \fIoption\fB] [\fIargument\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+set \fB[\fR+abCefhmnuvx\fB] [\fR+o \fIoption\fB] [\fIargument\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+set \(mi\|\(mi\fB [\fIargument\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+set \(mio
+.P
+set +o
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+If no
+.IR option s
+or
+.IR argument s
+are specified,
+.IR set
+shall write the names and values of all shell variables in the collation
+sequence of the current locale. Each
+.IR name
+shall start on a separate line, using the format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s=%s\en", <\fIname\fR>, <\fIvalue\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR value
+string shall be written with appropriate quoting; see the description
+of shell quoting in
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "Quoting".
+The output shall be suitable for reinput to the shell, setting or
+resetting, as far as possible, the variables that are currently set;
+read-only variables cannot be reset.
+.P
+When options are specified, they shall set or unset attributes of the
+shell, as described below. When
+.IR argument s
+are specified, they cause positional parameters to be set or unset, as
+described below. Setting or unsetting attributes and positional
+parameters are not necessarily related actions, but they can be
+combined in a single invocation of
+.IR set .
+.P
+The
+.IR set
+special built-in shall support the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+except that options can be specified with either a leading
+<hyphen>
+(meaning enable the option) or
+<plus-sign>
+(meaning disable it) unless otherwise specified.
+.P
+Implementations shall support the options in the following list in both
+their
+<hyphen>
+and
+<plus-sign>
+forms. These options can also be specified as options to
+.IR sh .
+.IP "\fB\(mia\fP" 6
+When this option is on, the
+.IR export
+attribute shall be set for each variable to which an assignment is
+performed; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.22" ", " "Variable Assignment".
+If the assignment precedes a utility name in a command, the
+.IR export
+attribute shall not persist in the current execution environment after
+the utility completes, with the exception that preceding one of the
+special built-in utilities causes the
+.IR export
+attribute to persist after the built-in has completed. If the
+assignment does not precede a utility name in the command, or if the
+assignment is a result of the operation of the
+.IR getopts
+or
+.IR read
+utilities, the
+.IR export
+attribute shall persist until the variable is unset.
+.IP "\fB\(mib\fP" 6
+This option shall be supported if the implementation supports the User
+Portability Utilities option. It shall cause the shell to notify the
+user asynchronously of background job completions. The following
+message is written to standard error:
+.RS 6 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"[%d]%c %s%s\en", <\fIjob-number\fR>, <\fIcurrent\fR>, <\fRstatus\fR>, <\fRjob-name\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where the fields shall be as follows:
+.IP "<\fIcurrent\fR>" 12
+The character
+.BR '+' 
+identifies the job that would be used as a default for the
+.IR fg
+or
+.IR bg
+utilities; this job can also be specified using the
+.IR job_id
+.BR \(dq%+\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dq%%\(dq .
+The character
+.BR '\(mi' 
+identifies the job that would become the
+default if the current default job were to exit; this job can also be
+specified using the
+.IR job_id
+.BR \(dq%\(mi\(dq .
+For other jobs, this field is a
+<space>.
+At most one job can be identified with
+.BR '+' 
+and at most one job can be identified with
+.BR '\(mi' .
+If there is any suspended job, then the current job shall be a
+suspended job. If there are at least two suspended jobs, then the
+previous job also shall be a suspended job.
+.IP "<\fIjob-number\fR>" 12
+A number that can be used to identify the process group to the
+.IR wait ,
+.IR fg ,
+.IR bg ,
+and
+.IR kill
+utilities. Using these utilities, the job can be identified by
+prefixing the job number with
+.BR '%' .
+.IP "<\fIstatus\fR>" 12
+Unspecified.
+.IP "<\fIjob-name\fR>" 12
+Unspecified.
+.P
+When the shell notifies the user a job has been completed, it may
+remove the job's process ID from the list of those known in the current
+shell execution environment; see
+.IR "Section 2.9.3.1" ", " "Examples".
+Asynchronous notification shall not be enabled by default.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miC\fP" 6
+(Uppercase C.) Prevent existing files from being overwritten by the
+shell's
+.BR '>' 
+redirection operator (see
+.IR "Section 2.7.2" ", " "Redirecting Output");
+the
+.BR \(dq>|\(dq 
+redirection operator shall override this
+.IR noclobber
+option for an individual file.
+.IP "\fB\(mie\fP" 6
+When this option is on, when any command fails (for any of the reasons
+listed in
+.IR "Section 2.8.1" ", " "Consequences of Shell Errors"
+or by returning an exit status greater than zero), the shell immediately
+shall exit with the following exceptions:
+.RS 6 
+.IP " 1." 4
+The failure of any individual command in a multi-command pipeline shall
+not cause the shell to exit. Only the failure of the pipeline itself
+shall be considered.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The
+.BR \(mie
+setting shall be ignored when executing the compound list following the
+.BR while ,
+.BR until ,
+.BR if ,
+or
+.BR elif
+reserved word, a pipeline beginning with the
+.BR !
+reserved word, or any command of an AND-OR list other than the last.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If the exit status of a compound command other than a subshell command
+was the result of a failure while
+.BR \(mie
+was being ignored, then
+.BR \(mie
+shall not apply to this command.
+.P
+This requirement applies to the shell environment and each subshell
+environment separately. For example, in:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+set -e; (false; echo one) | cat; echo two
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+the
+.IR false
+command causes the subshell to exit without executing
+.IR "echo one" ;
+however,
+.IR "echo two"
+is executed because the exit status of the pipeline
+.IR "(false; echo one) | cat"
+is zero.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mif\fP" 6
+The shell shall disable pathname expansion.
+.IP "\fB\(mih\fP" 6
+Locate and remember utilities invoked by functions as those functions
+are defined (the utilities are normally located when the function is
+executed).
+.IP "\fB\(mim\fP" 6
+This option shall be supported if the implementation supports the User
+Portability Utilities option. All jobs shall be run in their own
+process groups. Immediately before the shell issues a prompt after
+completion of the background job, a message reporting the exit status
+of the background job shall be written to standard error. If a
+foreground job stops, the shell shall write a message to standard error
+to that effect, formatted as described by the
+.IR jobs
+utility. In addition, if a job changes status other than exiting (for
+example, if it stops for input or output or is stopped by a SIGSTOP
+signal), the shell shall write a similar message immediately prior to
+writing the next prompt. This option is enabled by default for
+interactive shells.
+.IP "\fB\(min\fP" 6
+The shell shall read commands but does not execute them; this can be
+used to check for shell script syntax errors. An interactive shell may
+ignore this option.
+.IP "\fB\(mio\fP" 6
+Write the current settings of the options to standard output in an
+unspecified format.
+.IP "\fB+o\fP" 6
+Write the current option settings to standard output in a format that
+is suitable for reinput to the shell as commands that achieve the same
+options settings.
+.IP "\fB\(mio\ \fIoption\fR" 6
+.br
+This option is supported if the system supports the User Portability
+Utilities option. It shall set various options, many of which shall be
+equivalent to the single option letters. The following values of
+.IR option
+shall be supported:
+.RS 6 
+.IP "\fIallexport\fR" 10
+Equivalent to
+.BR \(mia .
+.IP "\fIerrexit\fR" 10
+Equivalent to
+.BR \(mie .
+.IP "\fIignoreeof\fR" 10
+Prevent an interactive shell from exiting on end-of-file. This setting
+prevents accidental logouts when
+<control>\(hyD
+is entered. A user shall explicitly
+.IR exit
+to leave the interactive shell.
+.IP "\fImonitor\fR" 10
+Equivalent to
+.BR \(mim .
+This option is supported if the system supports the User Portability
+Utilities option.
+.IP "\fInoclobber\fR" 10
+Equivalent to
+.BR \(miC
+(uppercase C).
+.IP "\fInoglob\fR" 10
+Equivalent to
+.BR \(mif .
+.IP "\fInoexec\fR" 10
+Equivalent to
+.BR \(min .
+.IP "\fInolog\fR" 10
+Prevent the entry of function definitions into the command history; see
+.IR "Command History List".
+.IP "\fInotify\fR" 10
+Equivalent to
+.BR \(mib .
+.IP "\fInounset\fR" 10
+Equivalent to
+.BR \(miu .
+.IP "\fIverbose\fR" 10
+Equivalent to
+.BR \(miv .
+.IP "\fIvi\fR" 10
+Allow shell command line editing using the built-in
+.IR vi
+editor. Enabling
+.IR vi
+mode shall disable any other command line editing mode provided as an
+implementation extension.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+It need not be possible to set
+.IR vi
+mode on for certain block-mode terminals.
+.RE
+.IP "\fIxtrace\fR" 10
+Equivalent to
+.BR \(mix .
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miu\fP" 6
+When the shell tries to expand an unset parameter other than the
+.BR '@' 
+and
+.BR '*' 
+special parameters, it shall write a message to standard error and shall
+not execute the command containing the expansion, but for the purposes
+of setting the
+.BR '?' 
+special parameter and the exit status of the shell the command shall be
+treated as having been executed and returned an exit status of between
+1 and 125 inclusive. A non-interactive shell shall immediately exit. An
+interactive shell shall not exit.
+.IP "\fB\(miv\fP" 6
+The shell shall write its input to standard error as it is read.
+.IP "\fB\(mix\fP" 6
+The shell shall write to standard error a trace for each command after
+it expands the command and before it executes it. It is unspecified
+whether the command that turns tracing off is traced.
+.P
+The default for all these options shall be off (unset) unless stated
+otherwise in the description of the option or unless the shell was
+invoked with them on; see
+.IR sh .
+.P
+The remaining arguments shall be assigned in order to the positional
+parameters. The special parameter
+.BR '#' 
+shall be set to reflect the number of positional parameters. All
+positional parameters shall be unset before any new values are
+assigned.
+.P
+If the first argument is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the results are unspecified.
+.P
+The special argument
+.BR \(dq\(mi\|\(mi\(dq 
+immediately following the
+.IR set
+command name can be used to delimit the arguments if the first argument
+begins with
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+or to prevent inadvertent listing of all shell variables when there are
+no arguments. The command
+.IR set
+.BR \(mi\|\(mi
+without
+.IR argument
+shall unset all positional parameters and set the special parameter
+.BR '#' 
+to zero.
+.SH OPTIONS
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH OPERANDS
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+None.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+Zero.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Application writers should avoid relying on
+.IR set
+.BR \(mie
+within functions. For example, in the following script:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+set -e
+start() {
+    some_server
+    echo some_server started successfully
+}
+start || echo >&2 some_server failed
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+the
+.BR \(mie
+setting is ignored within the function body (because the function is a
+command in an AND-OR list other than the last). Therefore, if
+.IR some_server
+fails, the function carries on to echo
+.BR \(dqsome_server started successfully\(dq ,
+and the exit status of the function is zero (which means
+.BR \(dqsome_server failed\(dq 
+is not output).
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Write out all variables and their values:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+set
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Set $1, $2, and $3 and set
+.BR \(dq$#\(dq 
+to 3:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+set c a b
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Turn on the
+.BR \(mix
+and
+.BR \(miv
+options:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+set \(mixv
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Unset all positional parameters:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+set \(mi\|\(mi
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Set $1 to the value of
+.IR x ,
+even if it begins with
+.BR '\(mi' 
+or
+.BR '+' :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+set \(mi\|\(mi "$x"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Set the positional parameters to the expansion of
+.IR x ,
+even if
+.IR x
+expands with a leading
+.BR '\(mi' 
+or
+.BR '+' :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+set \(mi\|\(mi $x
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+The
+.IR set
+\(mi\|\(mi form is listed specifically in the SYNOPSIS even though this
+usage is implied by the Utility Syntax Guidelines. The explanation of
+this feature removes any ambiguity about whether the
+.IR set
+\(mi\|\(mi form might be misinterpreted as being equivalent to
+.IR set
+without any options or arguments. The functionality of this form has
+been adopted from the KornShell. In System V,
+.IR set
+\(mi\|\(mi only unsets parameters if there is at least one argument;
+the only way to unset all parameters is to use
+.IR shift .
+Using the KornShell version should not affect System V scripts because
+there should be no reason to issue it without arguments deliberately;
+if it were issued as, for example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+set \(mi\|\(mi "$@"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and there were in fact no arguments resulting from
+.BR \(dq$@\(dq ,
+unsetting the parameters would have no result.
+.P
+The
+.IR set
++ form in early proposals was omitted as being an unnecessary
+duplication of
+.IR set
+alone and not widespread historical practice.
+.P
+The
+.IR noclobber
+option was changed to allow
+.IR set
+.BR \(miC
+as well as the
+.IR set
+.BR \(mio
+.IR noclobber
+option. The single-letter version was added so that the historical
+.BR \(dq$\(mi\(dq 
+paradigm would not be broken; see
+.IR "Section 2.5.2" ", " "Special Parameters".
+.P
+The description of the
+.BR \(mie
+option is intended to match the behavior of the 1988 version of the
+KornShell.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mih
+flag is related to command name hashing. See
+.IR "\fIhash\fR\^".
+.P
+The following
+.IR set
+flags were omitted intentionally with the following rationale:
+.IP "\fB\(mik\fP" 6
+The
+.BR \(mik
+flag was originally added by the author of the Bourne shell to make it
+easier for users of pre-release versions of the shell. In early
+versions of the Bourne shell the construct
+.IR set
+.IR name =\c
+.IR value
+had to be used to assign values to shell variables. The problem with
+.BR \(mik
+is that the behavior affects parsing, virtually precluding writing any
+compilers. To explain the behavior of
+.BR \(mik ,
+it is necessary to describe the parsing algorithm, which is
+implementation-defined. For example:
+.RS 6 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+set \(mik; echo \fIname\fR=\fIvalue\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+set \(mik
+echo \fIname\fP=\fIvalue\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+behave differently. The interaction with functions is even more
+complex. What is more, the
+.BR \(mik
+flag is never needed, since the command line could have been
+reordered.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mit\fP" 6
+The
+.BR \(mit
+flag is hard to specify and almost never used. The only known use could
+be done with here-documents. Moreover, the behavior with
+.IR ksh
+and
+.IR sh
+differs. The reference page says that it exits after reading and
+executing one command. What is one command? If the input is
+.IR date ;\c
+.IR date ,
+.IR sh
+executes both
+.IR date
+commands while
+.IR ksh
+does only the first.
+.P
+Consideration was given to rewriting
+.IR set
+to simplify its confusing syntax. A specific suggestion was that the
+.IR unset
+utility should be used to unset options instead of using the non-\c
+\fIgetopt\fR()\c
+-able +\c
+.IR option
+syntax. However, the conclusion was reached that the historical
+practice of using +\c
+.IR option
+was satisfactory and that there was no compelling reason to modify such
+widespread historical practice.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mio
+option was adopted from the KornShell to address user needs. In
+addition to its generally friendly interface,
+.BR \(mio
+is needed to provide the
+.IR vi
+command line editing mode, for which historical practice yields no
+single-letter option name. (Although it might have been possible to
+invent such a letter, it was recognized that other editing modes would
+be developed and
+.BR \(mio
+provides ample name space for describing such extensions.)
+.P
+Historical implementations are inconsistent in the format used for
+.BR \(mio
+option status reporting. The
+.BR +o
+format without an option-argument was added to allow portable access to
+the options that can be saved and then later restored using, for
+instance, a dot script.
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR sh
+did trace the command
+.IR set
+.BR +x ,
+but
+.IR ksh
+did not.
+.P
+The
+.IR ignoreeof
+setting prevents accidental logouts when the end-of-file character
+(typically
+<control>\(hyD)
+is entered. A user shall explicitly
+.IR exit
+to leave the interactive shell.
+.P
+The
+.IR set
+.BR \(mim
+option was added to apply only to the UPE because it applies primarily
+to interactive use, not shell script applications.
+.P
+The ability to do asynchronous notification became available in the
+1988 version of the KornShell. To have it occur, the user had to issue
+the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+trap "jobs \(min" CLD
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The C shell provides two different levels of an asynchronous
+notification capability. The environment variable
+.IR notify
+is analogous to what is done in
+.IR set
+.BR \(mib
+or
+.IR set
+.BR \(mio
+.IR notify .
+When set, it notifies the user immediately of background job
+completions. When unset, this capability is turned off.
+.P
+The other notification ability comes through the built-in utility
+.IR notify .
+The syntax is:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+notify \fB[\fR%job ... \fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+By issuing
+.IR notify
+with no operands, it causes the C shell to notify the user
+asynchronously when the state of the current job changes. If given
+operands,
+.IR notify
+asynchronously informs the user of changes in the states of the
+specified jobs.
+.P
+To add asynchronous notification to the POSIX shell, neither the
+KornShell extensions to
+.IR trap ,
+nor the C shell
+.IR notify
+environment variable seemed appropriate (\c
+.IR notify
+is not a proper POSIX environment variable name).
+.P
+The
+.IR set
+.BR \(mib
+option was selected as a compromise.
+.P
+The
+.IR notify
+built-in was considered to have more functionality than was required
+for simple asynchronous notification.
+.P
+Historically, some shells applied the
+.BR \(miu
+option to all parameters including
+.IR $@
+and
+.IR $* .
+The standard developers felt that this was a misfeature since it is
+normal and common for
+.IR $@
+and
+.IR $*
+to be used in shell scripts regardless of whether they were passed any
+arguments. Treating these uses as an error when no arguments are passed
+reduces the value of
+.BR \(miu
+for its intended purpose of finding spelling mistakes in variable names
+and uses of unset positional parameters.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities",
+.IR "\fIhash\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.22" ", " "Variable Assignment",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/sh.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/sh.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d280223
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/sh.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,1729 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SH "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sh
+\(em shell, the standard command language interpreter
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+sh \fB[\fR\(miabCefhimnuvx\fB] [\fR\(mio \fIoption\fB]\fR... \fB[\fR+abCefhimnuvx\fB] [\fR+o \fIoption\fB]\fR...
+    \fB[\fIcommand_file \fB[\fIargument\fR...\fB]]\fR
+.P
+sh \(mic \fB[\fR\(miabCefhimnuvx\fB] [\fR\(mio \fIoption\fB]\fR... \fB[\fR+abCefhimnuvx\fB] [\fR+o \fIoption\fB]\fR...
+    \fIcommand_string \fB[\fIcommand_name \fB[\fIargument\fR...\fB]]\fR
+.P
+sh \(mis \fB[\fR\(miabCefhimnuvx\fB] [\fR\(mio \fIoption\fB]\fR... \fB[\fR+abCefhimnuvx\fB] [\fR+o \fIoption\fB]\fR...
+    \fB[\fIargument\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR sh
+utility is a command language interpreter that shall execute commands
+read from a command line string, the standard input, or a specified
+file. The application shall ensure that the commands to be executed are
+expressed in the language described in
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language".
+.P
+Pathname expansion shall not fail due to the size of a file.
+.P
+Shell input and output redirections have an implementation-defined
+offset maximum that is established in the open file description.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR sh
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+with an extension for support of a leading
+<plus-sign>
+(\c
+.BR '\(pl' )
+as noted below.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mia ,
+.BR \(mib ,
+.BR \(miC ,
+.BR \(mie ,
+.BR \(mif ,
+.BR \(mim ,
+.BR \(min ,
+.BR \(mio
+.IR option ,
+.BR \(miu ,
+.BR \(miv ,
+and
+.BR \(mix
+options are described as part of the
+.IR set
+utility in
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities".
+The option letters derived from the
+.IR set
+special built-in shall also be accepted with a leading
+<plus-sign>
+(\c
+.BR '\(pl' )
+instead of a leading
+<hyphen>
+(meaning the reverse case of the option as described in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008).
+.P
+The following additional options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Read commands from the
+.IR command_string
+operand. Set the value of special parameter 0 (see
+.IR "Section 2.5.2" ", " "Special Parameters")
+from the value of the
+.IR command_name
+operand and the positional parameters ($1, $2, and so on) in sequence
+from the remaining
+.IR argument
+operands. No commands shall be read from the standard input.
+.IP "\fB\(mii\fP" 10
+Specify that the shell is
+.IR interactive ;
+see below. An implementation may treat specifying the
+.BR \(mii
+option as an error if the real user ID of the calling process does not
+equal the effective user ID or if the real group ID does not equal the
+effective group ID.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Read commands from the standard input.
+.P
+If there are no operands and the
+.BR \(mic
+option is not specified, the
+.BR \(mis
+option shall be assumed.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mii
+option is present, or if there are no operands and the shell's standard
+input and standard error are attached to a terminal, the shell is
+considered to be
+.IR interactive .
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fR\(mi\fR" 10
+A single
+<hyphen>
+shall be treated as the first operand and then ignored. If both
+.BR '\(mi' 
+and
+.BR \(dq\(mi\|\(mi\(dq 
+are given as arguments, or if other operands precede the single
+<hyphen>,
+the results are undefined.
+.IP "\fIargument\fR" 10
+The positional parameters ($1, $2, and so on) shall be set to
+.IR arguments ,
+if any.
+.IP "\fIcommand_file\fR" 10
+The pathname of a file containing commands. If the pathname contains
+one or more
+<slash>
+characters, the implementation attempts to read that file; the file need
+not be executable. If the pathname does not contain a
+<slash>
+character:
+.RS 10 
+.IP " *" 4
+The implementation shall attempt to read that file from the current
+working directory; the file need not be executable.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the file is not in the current working directory, the implementation
+may perform a search for an executable file using the value of
+.IR PATH ,
+as described in
+.IR "Section 2.9.1.1" ", " "Command Search and Execution".
+.P
+Special parameter 0 (see
+.IR "Section 2.5.2" ", " "Special Parameters")
+shall be set to the value of
+.IR command_file .
+If
+.IR sh
+is called using a synopsis form that omits
+.IR command_file ,
+special parameter 0 shall be set to the value of the first argument
+passed to
+.IR sh
+from its parent (for example,
+.IR argv [0]
+for a C program), which is normally a pathname used to execute the
+.IR sh
+utility.
+.RE
+.IP "\fIcommand_name\fR" 10
+.br
+A string assigned to special parameter 0 when executing the commands in
+.IR command_string .
+If
+.IR command_name
+is not specified, special parameter 0 shall be set to the value of the
+first argument passed to
+.IR sh
+from its parent (for example,
+.IR argv [0]
+for a C program), which is normally a pathname used to execute the
+.IR sh
+utility.
+.IP "\fIcommand_string\fR" 10
+.br
+A string that shall be interpreted by the shell as one or more
+commands, as if the string were the argument to the
+\fIsystem\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. If the
+.IR command_string
+operand is an empty string,
+.IR sh
+shall exit with a zero exit status.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used only if one of the following is true:
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+.BR \(mis
+option is specified.
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+.BR \(mic
+option is not specified and no operands are specified.
+.IP " *" 4
+The script executes one or more commands that require input from
+standard input (such as a
+.IR read
+command that does not redirect its input).
+.P
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.P
+When the shell is using standard input and it invokes a command that
+also uses standard input, the shell shall ensure that the standard
+input file pointer points directly after the command it has read when
+the command begins execution. It shall not read ahead in such a manner
+that any characters intended to be read by the invoked command are
+consumed by the shell (whether interpreted by the shell or not) or that
+characters that are not read by the invoked command are not seen by the
+shell. When the command expecting to read standard input is started
+asynchronously by an interactive shell, it is unspecified whether
+characters are read by the command or interpreted by the shell.
+.P
+If the standard input to
+.IR sh
+is a FIFO or terminal device and is set to non-blocking reads, then
+.IR sh
+shall enable blocking reads on standard input. This shall remain in
+effect when the command completes.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input file shall be a text file, except that line lengths shall be
+unlimited. If the input file is empty or consists solely of blank
+lines or comments, or both,
+.IR sh
+shall exit with a zero exit status.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR sh :
+.IP "\fIENV\fP" 10
+This variable, when and only when an interactive shell is invoked,
+shall be subjected to parameter expansion (see
+.IR "Section 2.6.2" ", " "Parameter Expansion")
+by the shell, and the resulting value shall be used as a pathname of a
+file containing shell commands to execute in the current environment.
+The file need not be executable. If the expanded value of
+.IR ENV
+is not an absolute pathname, the results are unspecified.
+.IR ENV
+shall be ignored if the real and effective user IDs or real and
+effective group IDs of the process are different.
+.IP "\fIFCEDIT\fP" 10
+This variable, when expanded by the shell, shall determine the default
+value for the
+.BR \(mie
+.IR editor
+option's
+.IR editor
+option-argument. If
+.IR FCEDIT
+is null or unset,
+.IR ed
+shall be used as the editor.
+.IP "\fIHISTFILE\fP" 10
+Determine a pathname naming a command history file. If the
+.IR HISTFILE
+variable is not set, the shell may attempt to access or create a file
+.BR .sh_history
+in the directory referred to by the
+.IR HOME
+environment variable. If the shell cannot obtain both read and
+write access to, or create, the history file, it shall use an
+unspecified mechanism that allows the history to operate properly.
+(References to history ``file'' in this section shall be understood to
+mean this unspecified mechanism in such cases.) An implementation may
+choose to access this variable only when initializing the history file;
+this initialization shall occur when
+.IR fc
+or
+.IR sh
+first attempt to retrieve entries from, or add entries to, the file, as
+the result of commands issued by the user, the file named by the
+.IR ENV
+variable, or implementation-defined system start-up files.
+Implementations may choose to disable the history list mechanism for
+users with appropriate privileges who do not set
+.IR HISTFILE ;
+the specific circumstances under which this occurs are
+implementation-defined. If more than one instance of the shell is
+using the same history file, it is unspecified how updates to the
+history file from those shells interact. As entries are deleted from
+the history file, they shall be deleted oldest first. It is
+unspecified when history file entries are physically removed from the
+history file.
+.IP "\fIHISTSIZE\fP" 10
+Determine a decimal number representing the limit to the number of
+previous commands that are accessible. If this variable is unset, an
+unspecified default greater than or equal to 128 shall be used. The
+maximum number of commands in the history list is unspecified, but
+shall be at least 128. An implementation may choose to access this
+variable only when initializing the history file, as described under
+.IR HISTFILE .
+Therefore, it is unspecified whether changes made to
+.IR HISTSIZE
+after the history file has been initialized are effective.
+.IP "\fIHOME\fP" 10
+Determine the pathname of the user's home directory. The contents of
+.IR HOME
+are used in tilde expansion as described in
+.IR "Section 2.6.1" ", " "Tilde Expansion".
+.IP "\fIIFS\fP" 10
+A string treated as a list of characters that is used for field
+splitting and to split lines into fields with the
+.IR read
+command.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If
+.IR IFS
+is not set, it shall behave as normal for an unset variable, except
+that field splitting by the shell and line splitting by the
+.IR read
+command shall be performed as if the value of
+.IR IFS
+is
+<space>\c
+<tab>\c
+<newline>;
+see
+.IR "Section 2.6.5" ", " "Field Splitting".
+.P
+Implementations may ignore the value of
+.IR IFS
+in the environment, or the absence of
+.IR IFS
+from the environment, at the time the shell is invoked, in which case
+the shell shall set
+.IR IFS
+to
+<space>\c
+<tab>\c
+<newline>
+when it is invoked.
+.RE
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the behavior of range expressions, equivalence classes, and
+multi-character collating elements within pattern matching.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files), which characters
+are defined as letters (character class
+.BR alpha ),
+and the behavior of character classes within pattern matching.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fIMAIL\fP" 10
+Determine a pathname of the user's mailbox file for purposes of
+incoming mail notification. If this variable is set, the shell shall
+inform the user if the file named by the variable is created or if its
+modification time has changed. Informing the user shall be accomplished
+by writing a string of unspecified format to standard error prior to
+the writing of the next primary prompt string. Such check shall be
+performed only after the completion of the interval defined by the
+.IR MAILCHECK
+variable after the last such check. The user shall be informed only if
+.IR MAIL
+is set and
+.IR MAILPATH
+is not set.
+.IP "\fIMAILCHECK\fP" 10
+.br
+Establish a decimal integer value that specifies how often (in seconds)
+the shell shall check for the arrival of mail in the files specified by
+the
+.IR MAILPATH
+or
+.IR MAIL
+variables. The default value shall be 600 seconds. If set to zero,
+the shell shall check before issuing each primary prompt.
+.IP "\fIMAILPATH\fP" 10
+Provide a list of pathnames and optional messages separated by
+<colon>
+characters. If this variable is set, the shell shall inform the user if
+any of the files named by the variable are created or if any of their
+modification times change. (See the preceding entry for
+.IR MAIL
+for descriptions of mail arrival and user informing.) Each pathname can
+be followed by
+.BR '%' 
+and a string that shall be subjected to parameter expansion and written
+to standard error when the modification time changes. If a
+.BR '%' 
+character in the pathname is preceded by a
+<backslash>,
+it shall be treated as a literal
+.BR '%' 
+in the pathname. The default message is unspecified.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The
+.IR MAILPATH
+environment variable takes precedence over the
+.IR MAIL
+variable.
+.RE
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fIPATH\fP" 10
+Establish a string formatted as described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+used to effect command interpretation; see
+.IR "Section 2.9.1.1" ", " "Command Search and Execution".
+.IP "\fIPWD\fP" 10
+This variable shall represent an absolute pathname of the current
+working directory. Assignments to this variable may be ignored.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+The
+.IR sh
+utility shall take the standard action for all signals (see
+.IR "Section 1.4" ", " "Utility Description Defaults")
+with the following exceptions.
+.P
+If the shell is interactive, SIGINT signals received during command
+line editing shall be handled as described in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION,
+and SIGINT signals received at other times shall be caught but no action
+performed.
+.P
+If the shell is interactive:
+.IP " *" 4
+SIGQUIT and SIGTERM signals shall be ignored.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the
+.BR \(mim
+option is in effect, SIGTTIN, SIGTTOU, and SIGTSTP signals shall be
+ignored.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the
+.BR \(mim
+option is not in effect, it is unspecified whether SIGTTIN, SIGTTOU,
+and SIGTSTP signals are ignored, set to the default action, or caught.
+If they are caught, the shell shall, in the signal-catching function,
+set the signal to the default action and raise the signal (after taking
+any appropriate steps, such as restoring terminal settings).
+.P
+The standard actions, and the actions described above for interactive
+shells, can be overridden by use of the
+.IR trap
+special built-in utility (see
+.IR "\fItrap\fR\^"
+and
+.IR "Section 2.11" ", " "Signals and Error Handling").
+.SH STDOUT
+See the STDERR section.
+.SH STDERR
+Except as otherwise stated (by the descriptions of any invoked
+utilities or in interactive mode), standard error shall be used
+only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+See
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language".
+The functionality described in the rest of the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION
+section shall be provided on implementations that support the User
+Portability Utilities option
+(and the rest of this section is not further shaded for this option).
+.SS "Command History List"
+.P
+When the
+.IR sh
+utility is being used interactively, it shall maintain a list of
+commands previously entered from the terminal in the file named by the
+.IR HISTFILE
+environment variable. The type, size, and internal format of this file
+are unspecified. Multiple
+.IR sh
+processes can share access to the file for a user, if file access
+permissions allow this; see the description of the
+.IR HISTFILE
+environment variable.
+.SS "Command Line Editing"
+.P
+When
+.IR sh
+is being used interactively from a terminal, the current command and
+the command history (see
+.IR "\fIfc\fR\^")
+can be edited using
+.IR vi -mode
+command line editing. This mode uses commands, described below,
+similar to a subset of those described in the
+.IR vi
+utility. Implementations may offer other command line editing modes
+corresponding to other editing utilities.
+.P
+The command
+.IR set
+.BR \(mio
+.IR vi
+shall enable
+.IR vi -mode
+editing and place
+.IR sh
+into
+.IR vi
+insert mode (see
+.IR "Command Line Editing (vi-mode)").
+This command also shall disable any other editing mode that the
+implementation may provide. The command
+.IR set
+.BR +o
+.IR vi
+disables
+.IR vi -mode
+editing.
+.P
+Certain block-mode terminals may be unable to support shell command
+line editing. If a terminal is unable to provide either edit mode, it
+need not be possible to
+.IR set
+.BR \(mio
+.IR vi
+when using the shell on this terminal.
+.P
+In the following sections, the characters
+.IR erase ,
+.IR interrupt ,
+.IR kill ,
+and
+.IR end-of-file
+are those set by the
+.IR stty
+utility.
+.SS "Command Line Editing (vi-mode)"
+.P
+In
+.IR vi
+editing mode, there shall be a distinguished line, the edit line. All
+the editing operations which modify a line affect the edit line. The
+edit line is always the newest line in the command history buffer.
+.P
+With
+.IR vi -mode
+enabled,
+.IR sh
+can be switched between insert mode and command mode.
+.P
+When in insert mode, an entered character shall be inserted into the
+command line, except as noted in
+.IR "vi Line Editing Insert Mode".
+Upon entering
+.IR sh
+and after termination of the previous command,
+.IR sh
+shall be in insert mode.
+.P
+Typing an escape character shall switch
+.IR sh
+into command mode (see
+.IR "vi Line Editing Command Mode").
+In command mode, an entered character shall either invoke a defined
+operation, be used as part of a multi-character operation, or be
+treated as an error. A character that is not recognized as part of an
+editing command shall terminate any specific editing command and shall
+alert the terminal. If
+.IR sh
+receives a SIGINT signal in command mode (whether generated by typing the
+.IR interrupt
+character or by other means), it shall terminate command line editing
+on the current command line, reissue the prompt on the next line of the
+terminal, and reset the command history (see
+.IR "\fIfc\fR\^")
+so that the most recently executed command is the previous command
+(that is, the command that was being edited when it was interrupted is
+not re-entered into the history).
+.P
+In the following sections, the phrase ``move the cursor to the
+beginning of the word'' shall mean ``move the cursor to the first
+character of the current word'' and the phrase ``move the cursor to the
+end of the word'' shall mean ``move the cursor to the last character of
+the current word''. The phrase ``beginning of the command line''
+indicates the point between the end of the prompt string issued by the
+shell (or the beginning of the terminal line, if there is no prompt
+string) and the first character of the command text.
+.SS "vi Line Editing Insert Mode"
+.P
+While in insert mode, any character typed shall be inserted in the
+current command line, unless it is from the following set.
+.IP <newline> 10
+Execute the current command line. If the current command line is not
+empty, this line shall be entered into the command history (see
+.IR "\fIfc\fR\^").
+.IP "\fIerase\fR" 10
+Delete the character previous to the current cursor position and move
+the current cursor position back one character. In insert mode,
+characters shall be erased from both the screen and the buffer when
+backspacing.
+.IP "\fIinterrupt\fR" 10
+If
+.IR sh
+receives a SIGINT signal in insert mode (whether generated by typing
+the
+.IR interrupt
+character or by other means), it shall terminate command line editing
+with the same effects as described for interrupting command mode; see
+.IR "Command Line Editing (vi-mode)".
+.IP "\fIkill\fR" 10
+Clear all the characters from the input line.
+.IP "<control>\(hyV" 10
+Insert the next character input, even if the character is otherwise a
+special insert mode character.
+.IP "<control>\(hyW" 10
+Delete the characters from the one preceding the cursor to the
+preceding word boundary. The word boundary in this case is the closer
+to the cursor of either the beginning of the line or a character that
+is in neither the
+.BR blank
+nor
+.BR punct
+character classification of the current locale.
+.IP "\fIend-of-file\fR" 10
+Interpreted as the end of input in
+.IR sh .
+This interpretation shall occur only at the beginning of an input
+line. If
+.IR end-of-file
+is entered other than at the beginning of the line, the results are
+unspecified.
+.IP <ESC> 10
+Place
+.IR sh
+into command mode.
+.SS "vi Line Editing Command Mode"
+.P
+In command mode for the command line editing feature, decimal digits
+not beginning with 0 that precede a command letter shall be
+remembered. Some commands use these decimal digits as a count number
+that affects the operation.
+.P
+The term
+.IR "motion command"
+represents one of the commands:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<space>  0  b  F  l  W  ^  $  ;  E  f  T  w  |  ,  B  e  h  t
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the current line is not the edit line, any command that modifies the
+current line shall cause the content of the current line to replace the
+content of the edit line, and the current line shall become the edit
+line. This replacement cannot be undone (see the
+.BR u
+and
+.BR U
+commands below). The modification requested shall then be performed to
+the edit line. When the current line is the edit line, the modification
+shall be done directly to the edit line.
+.P
+Any command that is preceded by
+.IR count
+shall take a count (the numeric value of any preceding decimal
+digits). Unless otherwise noted, this count shall cause the specified
+operation to repeat by the number of times specified by the count.
+Also unless otherwise noted, a
+.IR count
+that is out of range is considered an error condition and shall alert
+the terminal, but neither the cursor position, nor the command line,
+shall change.
+.P
+The terms
+.IR word
+and
+.IR bigword
+are used as defined in the
+.IR vi
+description. The term
+.IR "save buffer"
+corresponds to the term
+.IR "unnamed buffer"
+in
+.IR vi .
+.P
+The following commands shall be recognized in command mode:
+.IP <newline> 10
+Execute the current command line. If the current command line is not
+empty, this line shall be entered into the command history (see
+.IR "\fIfc\fR\^").
+.IP "<control>\(hyL" 10
+Redraw the current command line. Position the cursor at the same
+location on the redrawn line.
+.IP "\fB#\fP" 10
+Insert the character
+.BR '#' 
+at the beginning of the current command line and treat the resulting
+edit line as a comment. This line shall be entered into the command
+history; see
+.IR "\fIfc\fR\^".
+.IP "\fB=\fP" 10
+Display the possible shell word expansions (see
+.IR "Section 2.6" ", " "Word Expansions")
+of the bigword at the current command line position.
+.RS 10 
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+This does not modify the content of the current line, and therefore
+does not cause the current line to become the edit line.
+.P
+.P
+These expansions shall be displayed on subsequent terminal lines. If
+the bigword contains none of the characters
+.BR '?' ,
+.BR '*' ,
+or
+.BR '[' ,
+an
+<asterisk>
+(\c
+.BR '*' )
+shall be implicitly assumed at the end. If any directories are
+matched, these expansions shall have a
+.BR '/' 
+character appended. After the expansion, the line shall be redrawn,
+the cursor repositioned at the current cursor position, and
+.IR sh
+shall be placed in command mode.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\e\fR" 10
+Perform pathname expansion (see
+.IR "Section 2.6.6" ", " "Pathname Expansion")
+on the current bigword, up to the largest set of characters that can be
+matched uniquely. If the bigword contains none of the characters
+.BR '?' ,
+.BR '*' ,
+or
+.BR '[' ,
+an
+<asterisk>
+(\c
+.BR '*' )
+shall be implicitly assumed at the end. This maximal expansion then
+shall replace the original bigword in the command line, and the cursor
+shall be placed after this expansion. If the resulting bigword
+completely and uniquely matches a directory, a
+.BR '/' 
+character shall be inserted directly after the bigword. If some other
+file is completely matched, a single
+<space>
+shall be inserted after the bigword. After this operation,
+.IR sh
+shall be placed in insert mode.
+.IP "\fB*\fR" 10
+Perform pathname expansion on the current bigword and insert all
+expansions into the command to replace the current bigword, with each
+expansion separated by a single
+<space>.
+If at the end of the line, the current cursor position shall be moved
+to the first column position following the expansions and
+.IR sh
+shall be placed in insert mode. Otherwise, the current cursor position
+shall be the last column position of the first character after the
+expansions and
+.IR sh
+shall be placed in insert mode. If the current bigword contains none
+of the characters
+.BR '?' ,
+.BR '*' ,
+or
+.BR '[' ,
+before the operation, an
+<asterisk>
+(\c
+.BR '*' )
+shall be implicitly assumed at the end.
+.IP "\fB@\fIletter\fR" 10
+Insert the value of the alias named
+.IR _letter .
+The symbol
+.IR letter
+represents a single alphabetic character from the portable character
+set; implementations may support additional characters as an
+extension. If the alias
+.IR _letter
+contains other editing commands, these commands shall be performed as
+part of the insertion. If no alias
+.IR _letter
+is enabled, this command shall have no effect.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]~\fR" 10
+Convert, if the current character is a lowercase letter, to the
+equivalent uppercase letter and
+.IR "vice versa" ,
+as prescribed by the current locale. The current cursor position then
+shall be advanced by one character. If the cursor was positioned on
+the last character of the line, the case conversion shall occur, but
+the cursor shall not advance. If the
+.BR '~' 
+command is preceded by a
+.IR count ,
+that number of characters shall be converted, and the cursor shall be
+advanced to the character position after the last character converted.
+If the
+.IR count
+is larger than the number of characters after the cursor, this shall
+not be considered an error; the cursor shall advance to the last
+character on the line.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB].\fR" 10
+Repeat the most recent non-motion command, even if it was executed on
+an earlier command line. If the previous command was preceded by a
+.IR count ,
+and no count is given on the
+.BR '.' 
+command, the count from the previous command shall be included as part
+of the repeated command. If the
+.BR '.' 
+command is preceded by a
+.IR count ,
+this shall override any
+.IR count
+argument to the previous command. The
+.IR count
+specified in the
+.BR '.' 
+command shall become the count for subsequent
+.BR '.' 
+commands issued without a count.
+.IP "\fB[\fInumber\fB]v\fR" 10
+Invoke the
+.IR vi
+editor to edit the current command line in a temporary file. When the
+editor exits, the commands in the temporary file shall be executed and
+placed in the command history. If a
+.IR number
+is included, it specifies the command number in the command history to
+be edited, rather than the current command line.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]l\fR\0\0\0(ell)" 10
+.sp -0.5v
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR<space>" 10
+.br
+Move the current cursor position to the next character position. If
+the cursor was positioned on the last character of the line, the
+terminal shall be alerted and the cursor shall not be advanced. If the
+.IR count
+is larger than the number of characters after the cursor, this shall
+not be considered an error; the cursor shall advance to the last
+character on the line.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]h\fR" 10
+Move the current cursor position to the
+.IR count th
+(default 1) previous character position. If the cursor was positioned
+on the first character of the line, the terminal shall be alerted and
+the cursor shall not be moved. If the count is larger than the number
+of characters before the cursor, this shall not be considered an error;
+the cursor shall move to the first character on the line.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]w\fR" 10
+Move to the start of the next word. If the cursor was positioned on
+the last character of the line, the terminal shall be alerted and the
+cursor shall not be advanced. If the
+.IR count
+is larger than the number of words after the cursor, this shall not be
+considered an error; the cursor shall advance to the last character on
+the line.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]W\fR" 10
+Move to the start of the next bigword. If the cursor was positioned on
+the last character of the line, the terminal shall be alerted and the
+cursor shall not be advanced. If the
+.IR count
+is larger than the number of bigwords after the cursor, this shall not
+be considered an error; the cursor shall advance to the last character
+on the line.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]e\fR" 10
+Move to the end of the current word. If at the end of a word, move to
+the end of the next word. If the cursor was positioned on the last
+character of the line, the terminal shall be alerted and the cursor
+shall not be advanced. If the
+.IR count
+is larger than the number of words after the cursor, this shall not be
+considered an error; the cursor shall advance to the last character on
+the line.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]E\fR" 10
+Move to the end of the current bigword. If at the end of a bigword,
+move to the end of the next bigword. If the cursor was positioned on
+the last character of the line, the terminal shall be alerted and the
+cursor shall not be advanced. If the
+.IR count
+is larger than the number of bigwords after the cursor, this shall not
+be considered an error; the cursor shall advance to the last character
+on the line.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]b\fR" 10
+Move to the beginning of the current word. If at the beginning of a
+word, move to the beginning of the previous word. If the cursor was
+positioned on the first character of the line, the terminal shall be
+alerted and the cursor shall not be moved. If the
+.IR count
+is larger than the number of words preceding the cursor, this shall not
+be considered an error; the cursor shall return to the first character
+on the line.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]B\fR" 10
+Move to the beginning of the current bigword. If at the beginning of a
+bigword, move to the beginning of the previous bigword. If the cursor
+was positioned on the first character of the line, the terminal shall
+be alerted and the cursor shall not be moved. If the
+.IR count
+is larger than the number of bigwords preceding the cursor, this shall
+not be considered an error; the cursor shall return to the first
+character on the line.
+.IP "\fB^\fR" 10
+Move the current cursor position to the first character on the input
+line that is not a
+<blank>.
+.IP "\fB$\fR" 10
+Move to the last character position on the current command line.
+.IP "\fB0\fR" 10
+(Zero.) Move to the first character position on the current command
+line.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]\||\fR" 10
+Move to the
+.IR count th
+character position on the current command line. If no number is
+specified, move to the first position. The first character position
+shall be numbered 1. If the count is larger than the number of
+characters on the line, this shall not be considered an error; the
+cursor shall be placed on the last character on the line.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]f\fIc\fR" 10
+Move to the first occurrence of the character
+.BR 'c' 
+that occurs after the current cursor position. If the cursor was
+positioned on the last character of the line, the terminal shall be
+alerted and the cursor shall not be advanced. If the character
+.BR 'c' 
+does not occur in the line after the current cursor position, the
+terminal shall be alerted and the cursor shall not be moved.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]F\fIc\fR" 10
+Move to the first occurrence of the character
+.BR 'c' 
+that occurs before the current cursor position. If the cursor was
+positioned on the first character of the line, the terminal shall be
+alerted and the cursor shall not be moved. If the character
+.BR 'c' 
+does not occur in the line before the current cursor position, the
+terminal shall be alerted and the cursor shall not be moved.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]t\fIc\fR" 10
+Move to the character before the first occurrence of the character
+.BR 'c' 
+that occurs after the current cursor position. If the cursor was
+positioned on the last character of the line, the terminal shall be
+alerted and the cursor shall not be advanced. If the character
+.BR 'c' 
+does not occur in the line after the current cursor position, the
+terminal shall be alerted and the cursor shall not be moved.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]T\fIc\fR" 10
+Move to the character after the first occurrence of the character
+.BR 'c' 
+that occurs before the current cursor position. If the cursor was
+positioned on the first character of the line, the terminal shall be
+alerted and the cursor shall not be moved. If the character
+.BR 'c' 
+does not occur in the line before the current cursor position, the
+terminal shall be alerted and the cursor shall not be moved.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB];\fR" 10
+Repeat the most recent
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR t ,
+or
+.BR T
+command. Any number argument on that previous command shall be
+ignored. Errors are those described for the repeated command.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB],\fR" 10
+Repeat the most recent
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR t ,
+or
+.BR T
+command. Any number argument on that previous command shall be
+ignored. However, reverse the direction of that command.
+.IP "\fBa\fR" 10
+Enter insert mode after the current cursor position. Characters that
+are entered shall be inserted before the next character.
+.IP "\fBA\fR" 10
+Enter insert mode after the end of the current command line.
+.IP "\fBi\fR" 10
+Enter insert mode at the current cursor position. Characters that are
+entered shall be inserted before the current character.
+.IP "\fBI\fR" 10
+Enter insert mode at the beginning of the current command line.
+.IP "\fBR\fR" 10
+Enter insert mode, replacing characters from the command line beginning
+at the current cursor position.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]c\fImotion\fR" 10
+.br
+Delete the characters between the current cursor position and the
+cursor position that would result from the specified motion
+command. Then enter insert mode before the first character following
+any deleted characters. If
+.IR count
+is specified, it shall be applied to the motion command. A
+.IR count
+shall be ignored for the following motion commands:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+0    ^    $    c
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the motion command is the character
+.BR 'c' ,
+the current command line shall be cleared and insert mode shall be
+entered. If the motion command would move the current cursor position
+toward the beginning of the command line, the character under the
+current cursor position shall not be deleted. If the motion command
+would move the current cursor position toward the end of the command
+line, the character under the current cursor position shall be deleted.
+If the
+.IR count
+is larger than the number of characters between the current cursor
+position and the end of the command line toward which the motion
+command would move the cursor, this shall not be considered an error;
+all of the remaining characters in the aforementioned range shall be
+deleted and insert mode shall be entered. If the motion command is
+invalid, the terminal shall be alerted, the cursor shall not be moved,
+and no text shall be deleted.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBC\fR" 10
+Delete from the current character to the end of the line and enter
+insert mode at the new end-of-line.
+.IP "\fBS\fR" 10
+Clear the entire edit line and enter insert mode.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]r\fIc\fR" 10
+Replace the current character with the character
+.BR 'c' .
+With a number
+.IR count ,
+replace the current and the following
+.IR count \(mi1
+characters. After this command, the current cursor position shall be
+on the last character that was changed. If the
+.IR count
+is larger than the number of characters after the cursor, this shall
+not be considered an error; all of the remaining characters shall be
+changed.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]_\fR" 10
+Append a
+<space>
+after the current character position and then append the last bigword
+in the previous input line after the
+<space>.
+Then enter insert mode after the last character just appended. With a
+number
+.IR count ,
+append the
+.IR count th
+bigword in the previous line.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]x\fR" 10
+Delete the character at the current cursor position and place the
+deleted characters in the save buffer. If the cursor was positioned on
+the last character of the line, the character shall be deleted and the
+cursor position shall be moved to the previous character (the new last
+character). If the
+.IR count
+is larger than the number of characters after the cursor, this shall
+not be considered an error; all the characters from the cursor to the
+end of the line shall be deleted.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]X\fR" 10
+Delete the character before the current cursor position and place the
+deleted characters in the save buffer. The character under the current
+cursor position shall not change. If the cursor was positioned on the
+first character of the line, the terminal shall be alerted, and the
+.BR X
+command shall have no effect. If the line contained a single
+character, the
+.BR X
+command shall have no effect. If the line contained no characters, the
+terminal shall be alerted and the cursor shall not be moved. If the
+.IR count
+is larger than the number of characters before the cursor, this shall
+not be considered an error; all the characters from before the cursor
+to the beginning of the line shall be deleted.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]d\fImotion\fR" 10
+.br
+Delete the characters between the current cursor position and the
+character position that would result from the motion command. A number
+.IR count
+repeats the motion command
+.IR count
+times. If the motion command would move toward the beginning of the
+command line, the character under the current cursor position shall not
+be deleted. If the motion command is
+.BR d ,
+the entire current command line shall be cleared. If the
+.IR count
+is larger than the number of characters between the current cursor
+position and the end of the command line toward which the motion
+command would move the cursor, this shall not be considered an error;
+all of the remaining characters in the aforementioned range shall be
+deleted. The deleted characters shall be placed in the save buffer.
+.IP "\fBD\fR" 10
+Delete all characters from the current cursor position to the end of
+the line. The deleted characters shall be placed in the save buffer.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]y\fImotion\fR" 10
+.br
+Yank (that is, copy) the characters from the current cursor position to
+the position resulting from the motion command into the save buffer. A
+number
+.IR count
+shall be applied to the motion command. If the motion command would
+move toward the beginning of the command line, the character under the
+current cursor position shall not be included in the set of yanked
+characters. If the motion command is
+.BR y ,
+the entire current command line shall be yanked into the save buffer.
+The current cursor position shall be unchanged. If the
+.IR count
+is larger than the number of characters between the current cursor
+position and the end of the command line toward which the motion
+command would move the cursor, this shall not be considered an error;
+all of the remaining characters in the aforementioned range shall be
+yanked.
+.IP "\fBY\fR" 10
+Yank the characters from the current cursor position to the end of the
+line into the save buffer. The current character position shall be
+unchanged.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]p\fR" 10
+Put a copy of the current contents of the save buffer after the current
+cursor position. The current cursor position shall be advanced to the
+last character put from the save buffer. A
+.IR count
+shall indicate how many copies of the save buffer shall be put.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]P\fR" 10
+Put a copy of the current contents of the save buffer before the
+current cursor position. The current cursor position shall be moved to
+the last character put from the save buffer. A
+.IR count
+shall indicate how many copies of the save buffer shall be put.
+.IP "\fBu\fR" 10
+Undo the last command that changed the edit line. This operation shall
+not undo the copy of any command line to the edit line.
+.IP "\fBU\fR" 10
+Undo all changes made to the edit line. This operation shall not undo
+the copy of any command line to the edit line.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]k\fR" 10
+.sp -0.5v
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]\(mi\fR" 10
+Set the current command line to be the
+.IR count th
+previous command line in the shell command history. If
+.IR count
+is not specified, it shall default to 1. The cursor shall be positioned
+on the first character of the new command. If a
+.BR k
+or
+.BR \(mi
+command would retreat past the maximum number of commands in effect for
+this shell (affected by the
+.IR HISTSIZE
+environment variable), the terminal shall be alerted, and the command
+shall have no effect.
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]j\fR" 10
+.sp -0.5v
+.IP "\fB[\fIcount\fB]+\fR" 10
+Set the current command line to be the
+.IR count th
+next command line in the shell command history. If
+.IR count
+is not specified, it shall default to 1. The cursor shall be positioned
+on the first character of the new command. If a
+.BR j
+or
+.BR +
+command advances past the edit line, the current command line shall be
+restored to the edit line and the terminal shall be alerted.
+.IP "\fB[\fInumber\fB]G\fR" 10
+Set the current command line to be the oldest command line stored in
+the shell command history. With a number
+.IR number ,
+set the current command line to be the command line
+.IR number
+in the history. If command line
+.IR number
+does not exist, the terminal shall be alerted and the command line
+shall not be changed.
+.IP "\fB/\fIpattern\fR<newline>" 10
+.br
+Move backwards through the command history, searching for the specified
+pattern, beginning with the previous command line. Patterns use the
+pattern matching notation described in
+.IR "Section 2.13" ", " "Pattern Matching Notation",
+except that the
+.BR '^' 
+character shall have special meaning when it appears as the first
+character of
+.IR pattern .
+In this case, the
+.BR '^' 
+is discarded and the characters after the
+.BR '^' 
+shall be matched only at the beginning of a line. Commands in the
+command history shall be treated as strings, not as filenames. If the
+pattern is not found, the current command line shall be unchanged and
+the terminal is alerted. If it is found in a previous line, the current
+command line shall be set to that line and the cursor shall be set to
+the first character of the new command line.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If
+.IR pattern
+is empty, the last non-empty pattern provided to
+.BR /
+or
+.BR ?
+shall be used. If there is no previous non-empty pattern, the terminal
+shall be alerted and the current command line shall remain unchanged.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB?\fIpattern\fR<newline>" 10
+.br
+Move forwards through the command history, searching for the specified
+pattern, beginning with the next command line. Patterns use the pattern
+matching notation described in
+.IR "Section 2.13" ", " "Pattern Matching Notation",
+except that the
+.BR '^' 
+character shall have special meaning when it appears as the first
+character of
+.IR pattern .
+In this case, the
+.BR '^' 
+is discarded and the characters after the
+.BR '^' 
+shall be matched only at the beginning of a line. Commands in the
+command history shall be treated as strings, not as filenames. If the
+pattern is not found, the current command line shall be unchanged and
+the terminal alerted. If it is found in a following line, the current
+command line shall be set to that line and the cursor shall be set to
+the fist character of the new command line.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If
+.IR pattern
+is empty, the last non-empty pattern provided to
+.BR /
+or
+.BR ?
+shall be used. If there is no previous non-empty pattern, the terminal
+shall be alerted and the current command line shall remain unchanged.
+.RE
+.IP "\fBn\fR" 10
+Repeat the most recent
+.BR /
+or
+.BR ?
+command. If there is no previous
+.BR /
+or
+.BR ? ,
+the terminal shall be alerted and the current command line shall remain
+unchanged.
+.IP "\fBN\fR" 10
+Repeat the most recent
+.BR /
+or
+.BR ?
+command, reversing the direction of the search. If there is no previous
+.BR /
+or
+.BR ? ,
+the terminal shall be alerted and the current command line shall remain
+unchanged.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\0\0\0\00" 8
+The script to be executed consisted solely of zero or more blank lines
+or comments, or both.
+.IP "1\(hy125" 8
+A non-interactive shell detected an error other than
+.IR command_file
+not found, including but not limited to syntax, redirection, or variable
+assignment errors.
+.IP "\0\0127" 8
+A specified
+.IR command_file
+could not be found by a non-interactive shell.
+.P
+Otherwise, the shell shall return the exit status of the last command
+it invoked or attempted to invoke (see also the
+.IR exit
+utility in
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities").
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+See
+.IR "Section 2.8.1" ", " "Consequences of Shell Errors".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Standard input and standard error are the files that
+determine whether a shell is interactive when
+.BR \(mii
+is not specified. For example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sh > file
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sh 2> file
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+create interactive and non-interactive shells, respectively. Although
+both accept terminal input, the results of error conditions are
+different, as described in
+.IR "Section 2.8.1" ", " "Consequences of Shell Errors";
+in the second example a redirection error encountered by a special
+built-in utility aborts the shell.
+.P
+A conforming application must protect its first operand, if it starts
+with a
+<plus-sign>,
+by preceding it with the
+.BR \(dq\(mi\|\(mi\(dq 
+argument that denotes the end of the options.
+.P
+Applications should note that the standard
+.IR PATH
+to the shell cannot be assumed to be either
+.BR /bin/sh
+or
+.BR /usr/bin/sh ,
+and should be determined by interrogation of the
+.IR PATH
+returned by
+.IR getconf
+.IR PATH ,
+ensuring that the returned pathname is an absolute pathname and not a
+shell built-in.
+.P
+For example, to determine the location of the standard
+.IR sh
+utility:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+command \(miv sh
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+On some implementations this might return:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+/usr/xpg4/bin/sh
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Furthermore, on systems that support executable scripts (the
+.BR \(dq#!\(dq 
+construct), it is recommended that applications using executable
+scripts install them using
+.IR getconf
+.IR PATH
+to determine the shell pathname and update the
+.BR \(dq#!\(dq 
+script appropriately as it is being installed (for example, with
+.IR sed ).
+For example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#
+# Installation time script to install correct POSIX shell pathname
+#
+# Get list of paths to check
+#
+Sifs=$IFS
+Sifs_set=${IFS+y}
+IFS=:
+set \(mi\|\(mi $(getconf PATH)
+if [ "$Sifs_set" = y ]
+then
+    IFS=$Sifs
+else
+    unset IFS
+fi
+#
+# Check each path for 'sh'
+#
+for i
+do
+    if [ \(mix "${i}"/sh ]
+    then
+        Pshell=${i}/sh
+    fi
+done
+#
+# This is the list of scripts to update. They should be of the
+# form '${name}.source' and will be transformed to '${name}'.
+# Each script should begin:
+#
+# #!INSTALLSHELLPATH
+#
+scripts="a b c"
+#
+# Transform each script
+#
+for i in ${scripts}
+do
+    sed \(mie "s|INSTALLSHELLPATH|${Pshell}|" < ${i}.source > ${i}
+done
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+Execute a shell command from a string:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sh \(mic "cat myfile"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+Execute a shell script from a file in the current directory:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sh my_shell_cmds
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR sh
+utility and the
+.IR set
+special built-in utility share a common set of options.
+.P
+The name
+.IR IFS
+was originally an abbreviation of ``Input Field Separators''; however,
+this name is misleading as the
+.IR IFS
+characters are actually used as field terminators. The KornShell
+ignores the contents of
+.IR IFS
+upon entry to the script. A conforming application cannot rely on
+importing
+.IR IFS .
+One justification for this, beyond security considerations, is to
+assist possible future shell compilers. Allowing
+.IR IFS
+to be imported from the environment prevents many optimizations that
+might otherwise be performed via dataflow analysis of the script
+itself.
+.P
+The text in the STDIN section about non-blocking reads concerns an
+instance of
+.IR sh
+that has been invoked, probably by a C-language program, with standard
+input that has been opened using the O_NONBLOCK flag; see
+\fIopen\fR()
+in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. If the shell did not reset this flag, it would
+immediately terminate because no input data would be available yet and
+that would be considered the same as end-of-file.
+.P
+The options associated with a
+.IR "restricted shell"
+(command name
+.IR rsh
+and the
+.BR \(mir
+option) were excluded because the standard developers considered that
+the implied level of security could not be achieved and they did not
+want to raise false expectations.
+.P
+On systems that support set-user-ID scripts,
+a historical trapdoor has been to link a script to the name
+.BR \(mii .
+When it is called by a sequence such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sh \(mi
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+or by:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#!\ usr/bin/sh\ \(mi
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+the historical systems have assumed that no option letters follow.
+Thus, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 allows the single
+<hyphen>
+to mark the end of the options, in addition to the use of the regular
+.BR \(dq\(mi\|\(mi\(dq 
+argument, because it was considered that the older practice was so
+pervasive. An alternative approach is taken by the KornShell, where
+real and effective user/group IDs must match for an interactive shell;
+this behavior is specifically allowed by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+There are other problems with set-user-ID scripts that the two
+approaches described here do not resolve.
+.P
+.P
+The initialization process for the history file can be dependent on the
+system start-up files, in that they may contain commands that
+effectively preempt the user's settings of
+.IR HISTFILE
+and
+.IR HISTSIZE .
+For example, function definition commands are recorded in the history
+file, unless the
+.IR set
+.BR \(mio
+.IR nolog
+option is set. If the system administrator includes function
+definitions in some system start-up file called before the
+.IR ENV
+file, the history file is initialized before the user gets a chance to
+influence its characteristics. In some historical shells, the history
+file is initialized just after the
+.IR ENV
+file has been processed. Therefore, it is implementation-defined
+whether changes made to
+.IR HISTFILE
+after the history file has been initialized are effective.
+.P
+The default messages for the various
+.IR MAIL -related
+messages are unspecified because they vary across implementations.
+Typical messages are:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"you have mail\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+or:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"you have new mail\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+It is important that the descriptions of command line editing refer to
+the same shell as that in POSIX.1\(hy2008 so that interactive users can also be
+application programmers without having to deal with programmatic
+differences in their two environments. It is also essential that the
+utility name
+.IR sh
+be specified because this explicit utility name is too firmly rooted in
+historical practice of application programs for it to change.
+.P
+Consideration was given to mandating a diagnostic message when
+attempting to set
+.IR vi -mode
+on terminals that do not support command line editing. However, it is
+not historical practice for the shell to be cognizant of all terminal
+types and thus be able to detect inappropriate terminals in all cases.
+Implementations are encouraged to supply diagnostics in this case
+whenever possible, rather than leaving the user in a state where
+editing commands work incorrectly.
+.P
+In early proposals, the KornShell-derived
+.IR emacs
+mode of command line editing was included, even though the
+.IR emacs
+editor itself was not. The community of
+.IR emacs
+proponents was adamant that the full
+.IR emacs
+editor not be standardized because they were concerned that an attempt
+to standardize this very powerful environment would encourage vendors
+to ship strictly conforming versions lacking the extensibility required
+by the community. The author of the original
+.IR emacs
+program also expressed his desire to omit the program. Furthermore,
+there were a number of historical systems that did not include
+.IR emacs ,
+or included it without supporting it, but there were very few that did
+not include and support
+.IR vi .
+The shell
+.IR emacs
+command line editing mode was finally omitted because it became
+apparent that the KornShell version and the editor being distributed
+with the GNU system had diverged in some respects. The author of
+.IR emacs
+requested that the POSIX
+.IR emacs
+mode either be deleted or have a significant number of unspecified
+conditions. Although the KornShell author agreed to consider changes to
+bring the shell into alignment, the standard developers decided to
+defer specification at that time. At the time, it was assumed that
+convergence on an acceptable definition would occur for a subsequent
+draft, but that has not happened, and there appears to be no impetus to
+do so. In any case, implementations are free to offer additional
+command line editing modes based on the exact models of editors their
+users are most comfortable with.
+.P
+Early proposals had the following list entry in
+.IR "vi Line Editing Insert Mode":
+.IP "\fR\e\fR" 6
+If followed by the
+.IR erase
+or
+.IR kill
+character, that character shall be inserted into the input line.
+Otherwise, the
+<backslash>
+itself shall be inserted into the input line.
+.P
+However, this is not actually a feature of
+.IR sh
+command line editing insert mode, but one of some historical terminal
+line drivers. Some conforming implementations continue to do this when
+the
+.IR stty
+.BR iexten
+flag is set.
+.P
+In interactive shells, SIGTERM is ignored so that
+.IR "kill 0"
+does not kill the shell, and SIGINT is caught so that
+.IR wait
+is interruptible. If the shell does not ignore SIGTTIN, SIGTTOU, and
+SIGTSTP signals when it is interactive and the
+.BR \(mim
+option is not in effect, these signals suspend the shell if it is not
+a session leader. If it is a session leader, the signals are discarded
+if they would stop the process, as required by the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.4.3" ", " "Signal Actions"
+for orphaned process groups.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language",
+.IR "\fIcd\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIecho\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfc\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIpwd\fR\^",
+.IR "invalid",
+.IR "\fIset\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIstty\fR\^",
+.IR "\fItest\fR\^",
+.IR "\fItrap\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIumask\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIvi\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIdup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpipe\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsignal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsystem\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIulimit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIumask\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/shift.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/shift.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0194fa0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/shift.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SHIFT "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+shift
+\(em shift positional parameters
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+shift \fB[\fIn\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The positional parameters shall be shifted. Positional parameter 1
+shall be assigned the value of parameter (1+\fIn\fP), parameter 2 shall
+be assigned the value of parameter (2+\fIn\fP), and so on. The
+parameters represented by the numbers
+.BR \(dq$#\(dq 
+down to
+.BR \(dq$#\(min+1\(dq 
+shall be unset, and the parameter
+.BR '#' 
+is updated to reflect the new number of positional parameters.
+.P
+The value
+.IR n
+shall be an unsigned decimal integer less than or equal to the value of
+the special parameter
+.BR '#' .
+If
+.IR n
+is not given, it shall be assumed to be 1. If
+.IR n
+is 0, the positional and special parameters are not changed.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+None.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+If the
+.IR n
+operand is invalid or is greater than
+.BR \(dq$#\(dq ,
+this may be considered a syntax error and a non-interactive shell may
+exit; if the shell does not exit in this case, a non-zero exit status
+shall be returned. Otherwise, zero shall be returned.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.LP
+.nf
+\fB$\fR set a b c d e
+\fB$\fR shift 2
+\fB$\fR echo $*
+\fBc d e\fR
+.fi
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/sleep.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/sleep.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a86781f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/sleep.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SLEEP "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sleep
+\(em suspend execution for an interval
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+sleep \fItime\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR sleep
+utility shall suspend execution for at least the integral number of
+seconds specified by the
+.IR time
+operand.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fItime\fR" 10
+A non-negative decimal integer specifying the number of seconds for
+which to suspend execution.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR sleep :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+If the
+.IR sleep
+utility receives a SIGALRM signal, one of the following actions shall
+be taken:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Terminate normally with a zero exit status.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Effectively ignore the signal.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Provide the default behavior for signals described in the ASYNCHRONOUS
+EVENTS section of
+.IR "Section 1.4" ", " "Utility Description Defaults".
+This could include terminating with a non-zero exit status.
+.P
+The
+.IR sleep
+utility shall take the standard action for all other signals.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+The execution was successfully suspended for at least
+.IR time
+seconds, or a SIGALRM signal was received. See the ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS
+section.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The
+.IR sleep
+utility can be used to execute a command after a certain amount of
+time, as in:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(sleep 105; \fIcommand\fP) &
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+or to execute a command every so often, as in:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+while true
+do
+    \fIcommand\fP
+    sleep 37
+done
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The exit status is allowed to be zero when
+.IR sleep
+is interrupted by the SIGALRM signal because most implementations of
+this utility rely on the arrival of that signal to notify them that the
+requested finishing time has been successfully attained. Such
+implementations thus do not distinguish this situation from the
+successful completion case. Other implementations are allowed to catch
+the signal and go back to sleep until the requested time expires or to
+provide the normal signal termination procedures.
+.P
+As with all other utilities that take integral operands and do not
+specify subranges of allowed values,
+.IR sleep
+is required by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 to deal with
+.IR time
+requests of up to 2\|147\|483\|647 seconds. This may mean that some
+implementations have to make multiple calls to the delay mechanism of
+the underlying operating system if its argument range is less than
+this.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIalarm\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsleep\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/sort.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/sort.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a8cde07
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/sort.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,776 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SORT "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sort
+\(em sort, merge, or sequence check text files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+sort \fB[\fR\(mim\fB] [\fR\(mio \fIoutput\fB] [\fR\(mibdfinru\fB] [\fR\(mit \fIchar\fB] [\fR\(mik \fIkeydef\fB]\fR... \fB[\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.P
+sort \fB[\fR\(mic|\(miC\fB] [\fR\(mibdfinru\fB] [\fR\(mit \fIchar\fB] [\fR\(mik \fIkeydef\fB] [\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR sort
+utility shall perform one of the following functions:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Sort lines of all the named files together and write the result to
+the specified output.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Merge lines of all the named (presorted) files together and write the
+result to the specified output.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Check that a single input file is correctly presorted.
+.P
+Comparisons shall be based on one or more sort keys extracted from each
+line of input (or, if no sort keys are specified, the entire line up
+to, but not including, the terminating
+<newline>),
+and shall be performed using the collating sequence of the current
+locale.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR sort
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except for Guideline 9, and the
+.BR \(mik
+.IR keydef
+option should follow the
+.BR \(mib ,
+.BR \(mid ,
+.BR \(mif ,
+.BR \(mii ,
+.BR \(min ,
+and
+.BR \(mir
+options. In addition,
+.BR '\(pl' 
+may be recognized as an option delimiter as well as
+.BR '\(mi' .
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Check that the single input file is ordered as specified by the
+arguments and the collating sequence of the current locale. Output
+shall not be sent to standard output. The exit code shall indicate
+whether or not disorder was detected or an error occurred. If
+disorder (or, with
+.BR \(miu ,
+a duplicate key) is detected, a warning message shall be sent to
+standard error indicating where the disorder or duplicate key
+was found.
+.IP "\fB\(miC\fP" 10
+Same as
+.BR \(mic ,
+except that a warning message shall not be sent to standard error
+if disorder or, with
+.BR \(miu ,
+a duplicate key is detected.
+.IP "\fB\(mim\fP" 10
+Merge only; the input file shall be assumed to be already sorted.
+.IP "\fB\(mio\ \fIoutput\fR" 10
+Specify the name of an output file to be used instead of the standard
+output. This file can be the same as one of the input
+.IR file s.
+.IP "\fB\(miu\fP" 10
+Unique: suppress all but one in each set of lines having equal keys.
+If used with the
+.BR \(mic
+option, check that there are no lines with duplicate keys, in addition
+to checking that the input file is sorted.
+.P
+The following options shall override the default ordering rules. When
+ordering options appear independent of any key field specifications,
+the requested field ordering rules shall be applied globally to all
+sort keys. When attached to a specific key (see
+.BR \(mik ),
+the specified ordering options shall override all global ordering
+options for that key.
+.IP "\fB\(mid\fP" 10
+Specify that only
+<blank>
+characters and alphanumeric characters, according to the current
+setting of
+.IR LC_CTYPE ,
+shall be significant in comparisons. The behavior is undefined for a
+sort key to which
+.BR \(mii
+or
+.BR \(min
+also applies.
+.IP "\fB\(mif\fP" 10
+Consider all lowercase characters that have uppercase equivalents,
+according to the current setting of
+.IR LC_CTYPE ,
+to be the uppercase equivalent for the purposes of comparison.
+.IP "\fB\(mii\fP" 10
+Ignore all characters that are non-printable, according to the current
+setting of
+.IR LC_CTYPE .
+The behavior is undefined for a sort key for which
+.BR \(min
+also applies.
+.IP "\fB\(min\fP" 10
+Restrict the sort key to an initial numeric string, consisting of
+optional
+<blank>
+characters, optional minus-sign, and zero or more digits with an
+optional radix character and thousands separators (as defined in the
+current locale), which shall be sorted by arithmetic value. An empty
+digit string shall be treated as zero. Leading zeros and signs on zeros
+shall not affect ordering.
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+Reverse the sense of comparisons.
+.P
+The treatment of field separators can be altered using the options:
+.IP "\fB\(mib\fP" 10
+Ignore leading
+<blank>
+characters when determining the starting and ending positions of a
+restricted sort key. If the
+.BR \(mib
+option is specified before the first
+.BR \(mik
+option, it shall be applied to all
+.BR \(mik
+options. Otherwise, the
+.BR \(mib
+option can be attached independently to each
+.BR \(mik
+.IR field_start
+or
+.IR field_end
+option-argument (see below).
+.IP "\fB\(mit\ \fIchar\fR" 10
+Use
+.IR char
+as the field separator character;
+.IR char
+shall not be considered to be part of a field (although it can be
+included in a sort key). Each occurrence of
+.IR char
+shall be significant (for example, <\fIchar\fR><\fIchar\fR> delimits an
+empty field). If
+.BR \(mit
+is not specified,
+<blank>
+characters shall be used as default field separators; each maximal
+non-empty sequence of
+<blank>
+characters that follows a non-\c
+<blank>
+shall be a field separator.
+.P
+Sort keys can be specified using the options:
+.IP "\fB\(mik\ \fIkeydef\fR" 10
+The
+.IR keydef
+argument is a restricted sort key field definition. The format of this
+definition is:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIfield_start\fB[\fItype\fB][\fR,\fIfield_end\fB[\fItype\fB]]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR field_start
+and
+.IR field_end
+define a key field restricted to a portion of the line (see the
+EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section), and
+.IR type
+is a modifier from the list of characters
+.BR 'b' ,
+.BR 'd' ,
+.BR 'f' ,
+.BR 'i' ,
+.BR 'n' ,
+.BR 'r' .
+The
+.BR 'b' 
+modifier shall behave like the
+.BR \(mib
+option, but shall apply only to the
+.IR field_start
+or
+.IR field_end
+to which it is attached. The other modifiers shall behave like the
+corresponding options, but shall apply only to the key field to which
+they are attached; they shall have this effect if specified with
+.IR field_start ,
+.IR field_end ,
+or both. If any modifier is attached to a
+.IR field_start
+or to a
+.IR field_end ,
+no option shall apply to either. Implementations shall support at
+least nine occurrences of the
+.BR \(mik
+option, which shall be significant in command line order. If no
+.BR \(mik
+option is specified, a default sort key of the entire line shall be
+used.
+.P
+When there are multiple key fields, later keys shall be compared only
+after all earlier keys compare equal. Except when the
+.BR \(miu
+option is specified, lines that otherwise compare equal shall be
+ordered as if none of the options
+.BR \(mid ,
+.BR \(mif ,
+.BR \(mii ,
+.BR \(min ,
+or
+.BR \(mik
+were present (but with
+.BR \(mir
+still in effect, if it was specified) and with all bytes in the lines
+significant to the comparison. The order in which lines that still
+compare equal are written is unspecified.
+.RE
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file to be sorted, merged, or checked. If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, or if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be used.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used only if no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, or if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' .
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files shall be text files, except that the
+.IR sort
+utility shall add a
+<newline>
+to the end of a file ending with an incomplete last line.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR sort :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for ordering rules.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files) and the behavior of
+character classification for the
+.BR \(mib ,
+.BR \(mid ,
+.BR \(mif ,
+.BR \(mii ,
+and
+.BR \(min
+options.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILC_NUMERIC\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the definition of the radix character and
+thousands separator for the
+.BR \(min
+option.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Unless the
+.BR \(mio
+or
+.BR \(mic
+options are in effect, the standard output shall contain the sorted
+input.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used for diagnostic messages. When
+.BR \(mic
+is specified, if disorder is detected (or if
+.BR \(miu
+is also specified and a duplicate key is detected), a message shall
+be written to the standard error which identifies the input line at
+which disorder (or a duplicate key) was detected. A warning
+message about correcting an incomplete last line of an input file
+may be generated, but need not affect the final exit status.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+If the
+.BR \(mio
+option is in effect, the sorted input shall be written to the file
+.IR output .
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+The notation:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\(mik \fIfield_start\fB[\fItype\fB][\fR,\fIfield_end\fB[\fItype\fB]]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+shall define a key field that begins at
+.IR field_start
+and ends at
+.IR field_end
+inclusive, unless
+.IR field_start
+falls beyond the end of the line or after
+.IR field_end ,
+in which case the key field is empty. A missing
+.IR field_end
+shall mean the last character of the line.
+.P
+A field comprises a maximal sequence of non-separating characters and,
+in the absence of option
+.BR \(mit ,
+any preceding field separator.
+.P
+The
+.IR field_start
+portion of the
+.IR keydef
+option-argument shall have the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIfield_number\fB[\fR.\fIfirst_character\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Fields and characters within fields shall be numbered starting with 1.
+The
+.IR field_number
+and
+.IR first_character
+pieces, interpreted as positive decimal integers, shall specify the
+first character to be used as part of a sort key. If
+.IR .first_character
+is omitted, it shall refer to the first character of the field.
+.P
+The
+.IR field_end
+portion of the
+.IR keydef
+option-argument shall have the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIfield_number\fB[\fR.\fIlast_character\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR field_number
+shall be as described above for
+.IR field_start.
+The
+.IR last_character
+piece, interpreted as a non-negative decimal integer, shall specify the
+last character to be used as part of the sort key. If
+.IR last_character
+evaluates to zero or
+.IR .last_character
+is omitted, it shall refer to the last character of the field specified
+by
+.IR field_number .
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mib
+option or
+.BR b
+type modifier is in effect, characters within a field shall be counted
+from the first non-\c
+<blank>
+in the field. (This shall apply separately to
+.IR first_character
+and
+.IR last_character .)
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+All input files were output successfully, or
+.BR \(mic
+was specified and the input file was correctly sorted.
+.IP "\01" 6
+Under the
+.BR \(mic
+option, the file was not ordered as specified, or if the
+.BR \(mic
+and
+.BR \(miu
+options were both specified, two input lines were found with equal
+keys.
+.IP >1 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The default value for
+.BR \(mit ,
+<blank>,
+has different properties from, for example,
+.BR \(mit \c
+"<space>". If a line contains:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<space><space>foo
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+the following treatment would occur with default separation as opposed
+to specifically selecting a
+<space>:
+.TS
+center box tab(@);
+cB | cB | cB
+n | l | l.
+Field@Default@\(mit "<space>"
+_
+1@<space><space>foo@\fIempty\fP
+2@\fIempty\fP@\fIempty\fP
+3@\fIempty\fP@foo
+.TE
+.P
+The leading field separator itself is included in a field when
+.BR \(mit
+is not used. For example, this command returns an exit status of zero,
+meaning the input was already sorted:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sort \(mic \(mik 2 <<eof
+y<tab>b
+x<space>a
+eof
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+(assuming that a
+<tab>
+precedes the
+<space>
+in the current collating sequence). The field separator is not included
+in a field when it is explicitly set via
+.BR \(mit .
+This is historical practice and allows usage such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sort \(mit "|" \(mik 2n <<eof
+Atlanta|425022|Georgia
+Birmingham|284413|Alabama
+Columbia|100385|South Carolina
+eof
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where the second field can be correctly sorted numerically without
+regard to the non-numeric field separator.
+.P
+The wording in the OPTIONS section clarifies that the
+.BR \(mib ,
+.BR \(mid ,
+.BR \(mif ,
+.BR \(mii ,
+.BR \(min ,
+and
+.BR \(mir
+options have to come before the first sort key specified if they are
+intended to apply to all specified keys. The way it is described in
+\&this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 matches historical practice, not historical documentation.
+The results are unspecified if these options are specified after a
+.BR \(mik
+option.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mif
+option might not work as expected in locales where there is not a
+one-to-one mapping between an uppercase and a lowercase letter.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+The following command sorts the contents of
+.BR infile
+with the second field as the sort key:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sort \(mik 2,2 infile
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+The following command sorts, in reverse order, the contents of
+.BR infile1
+and
+.BR infile2 ,
+placing the output in
+.BR outfile
+and using the second character of the second field as the sort key
+(assuming that the first character of the second field is the field
+separator):
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sort \(mir \(mio outfile \(mik 2.2,2.2 infile1 infile2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+The following command sorts the contents of
+.BR infile1
+and
+.BR infile2
+using the second non-\c
+<blank>
+of the second field as the sort key:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sort \(mik 2.2b,2.2b infile1 infile2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+The following command prints the System\ V password file (user
+database) sorted by the numeric user ID (the third
+<colon>-separated
+field):
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sort \(mit : \(mik 3,3n /etc/passwd
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 5." 4
+The following command prints the lines of the already sorted file
+.BR infile ,
+suppressing all but one occurrence of lines having the same third
+field:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sort \(mium \(mik 3.1,3.0 infile
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+Examples in some historical documentation state that options
+.BR \(mium
+with one input file keep the first in each set of lines with equal
+keys. This behavior was deemed to be an implementation artifact and
+was not standardized.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miz
+option was omitted; it is not standard practice on most systems and is
+inconsistent with using
+.IR sort
+to sort several files individually and then merge them together. The
+text concerning
+.BR \(miz
+in historical documentation appeared to require implementations to
+determine the proper buffer length during the sort phase of operation,
+but not during the merge.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miy
+option was omitted because of non-portability. The
+.BR \(miM
+option, present in System V, was omitted because of non-portability in
+international usage.
+.P
+An undocumented
+.BR \(miT
+option exists in some implementations. It is used to specify a
+directory for intermediate files. Implementations are encouraged to
+support the use of the
+.IR TMPDIR
+environment variable instead of adding an option to support this
+functionality.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mik
+option was added to satisfy two objections. First, the zero-based
+counting used by
+.IR sort
+is not consistent with other utility conventions. Second, it did not
+meet syntax guideline requirements.
+.P
+Historical documentation indicates that ``setting
+.BR \(min
+implies
+.BR \(mib ''.
+The description of
+.BR \(min
+already states that optional leading <blank>s are tolerated in doing
+the comparison. If
+.BR \(mib
+is enabled, rather than implied, by
+.BR \(min ,
+this has unusual side-effects. When a character offset is used in a
+column of numbers (for example, to sort modulo 100), that offset is
+measured relative to the most significant digit, not to the column.
+Based upon a recommendation from the author of the original
+.IR sort
+utility, the
+.BR \(mib
+implication has been omitted from this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, and an application wishing to
+achieve the previously mentioned side-effects has to code the
+.BR \(mib
+flag explicitly.
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard allowed the
+.BR \(mio
+option to appear after operands. Historical practice allowed all
+options to be interspersed with operands. This version of the
+standard allows implementations to accept options after operands
+but conforming applications should not use this form.
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard also allowed the
+.BR \(mi \c
+.IR number
+and
+.BR \(pl \c
+.IR number
+options. These options are no longer specified by POSIX.1\(hy2008 but may
+be present in some implementations.
+.P
+Historical implementations produced a message on standard error when
+.BR \(mic
+was specified and disorder was detected, and when
+.BR \(mic
+and
+.BR \(miu
+were specified and a duplicate key was detected. An earlier version of
+this standard contained wording that did not make it clear that this
+message was allowed and some implementations removed this message to
+be sure that they conformed to the standard's requirements. Confronted
+with this difference in behavior, interactive users that wanted to be
+sure that they got visual feedback instead of just exit code 1 could
+have used a command like:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sort \(mic file || echo disorder
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+whether or not the
+.IR sort
+utility provided a message in this case. But, it was not easy for a user
+to find where the disorder or duplicate key occurred on implementations
+that do not produce a message, especially when some parts of the input
+line were not part of the key and when one or more of the
+.BR \(mib ,
+.BR \(mid ,
+.BR \(mif ,
+.BR \(mii ,
+.BR \(min ,
+or
+.BR \(mi r
+options or
+.IR keydef
+type modifiers were in use. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires a message to be
+produced in this case. POSIX.1\(hy2008 also contains the
+.BR \(miC
+option giving users the ability to choose either behavior.
+.P
+When a disorder or duplicate is found when the
+.BR \(mic
+option is specified, some implementations print a message containing
+the first line that is out of order or contains a duplicate key; others
+print a message specifying the line number of the offending line. This
+standard allows either type of message.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcomm\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIjoin\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIuniq\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fItoupper\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/split.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/split.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a8269f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/split.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,318 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SPLIT "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+split
+\(em split files into pieces
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+split \fB[\fR\(mil \fIline_count\fB] [\fR\(mia \fIsuffix_length\fB] [\fIfile\fB[\fIname\fB]]\fR
+.P
+split \(mib \fIn\fB[\fRk|m\fB] [\fR\(mia \fIsuffix_length\fB] [\fIfile\fB[\fIname\fB]]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR split
+utility shall read an input file and write one or more output files.
+The default size of each output file shall be 1\|000 lines. The size
+of the output files can be modified by specification of the
+.BR \(mib
+or
+.BR \(mil
+options. Each output file shall be created with a unique suffix. The
+suffix shall consist of exactly
+.IR suffix_length
+lowercase letters from the POSIX locale. The letters of the suffix
+shall be used as if they were a base-26 digit system, with the first
+suffix to be created consisting of all
+.BR 'a' 
+characters, the second with a
+.BR 'b' 
+replacing the last
+.BR 'a' ,
+and so on, until a name of all
+.BR 'z' 
+characters is created. By default, the names of the output files shall
+be
+.BR 'x' ,
+followed by a two-character suffix from the character set as described
+above, starting with
+.BR \(dqaa\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqab\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqac\(dq ,
+and so on, and continuing until the suffix
+.BR \(dqzz\(dq ,
+for a maximum of 676 files.
+.P
+If the number of files required exceeds the maximum allowed by the
+suffix length provided, such that the last allowable file would be
+larger than the requested size, the
+.IR split
+utility shall fail after creating the last file with a valid suffix;
+.IR split
+shall not delete the files it created with valid suffixes. If the file
+limit is not exceeded, the last file created shall contain the
+remainder of the input file, and may be smaller than the requested
+size.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR split
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mia\ \fIsuffix_length\fR" 10
+.br
+Use
+.IR suffix_length
+letters to form the suffix portion of the filenames of the split
+file. If
+.BR \(mia
+is not specified, the default suffix length shall be two. If the sum
+of the
+.IR name
+operand and the
+.IR suffix_length
+option-argument would create a filename exceeding
+{NAME_MAX}
+bytes, an error shall result;
+.IR split
+shall exit with a diagnostic message and no files shall be created.
+.IP "\fB\(mib\ \fIn\fR" 10
+Split a file into pieces
+.IR n
+bytes in size.
+.IP "\fB\(mib\ \fIn\fBk\fR" 10
+Split a file into pieces
+.IR n *1\|024
+bytes in size.
+.IP "\fB\(mib\ \fIn\fBm\fR" 10
+Split a file into pieces
+.IR n *1\|048\|576
+bytes in size.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\ \fIline_count\fR" 10
+Specify the number of lines in each resulting file piece. The
+.IR line_count
+argument is an unsigned decimal integer. The default is 1\|000. If
+the input does not end with a
+<newline>,
+the partial line shall be included in the last output file.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+The pathname of the ordinary file to be split. If no input file is
+given or
+.IR file
+is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be used.
+.IP "\fIname\fR" 10
+The prefix to be used for each of the files resulting from the split
+operation. If no
+.IR name
+argument is given,
+.BR 'x' 
+shall be used as the prefix of the output files. The combined length
+of the basename of
+.IR prefix
+and
+.IR suffix_length
+cannot exceed
+{NAME_MAX}
+bytes. See the OPTIONS section.
+.SH STDIN
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+Any file can be used as input.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR split :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+The output files contain portions of the original input file; otherwise,
+unchanged.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+In the following examples
+.BR foo
+is a text file that contains 5\|000 lines.
+.IP " 1." 4
+Create five files,
+.BR xaa ,
+.BR xab ,
+.BR xac ,
+.BR xad ,
+and
+.BR xae :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+split foo
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+Create five files, but the suffixed portion of the created
+files consists of three letters,
+.BR xaaa ,
+.BR xaab ,
+.BR xaac ,
+.BR xaad ,
+and
+.BR xaae :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+split \(mia 3 foo
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+Create three files with four-letter suffixes and a supplied prefix,
+.BR bar_aaaa ,
+.BR bar_aaab ,
+and
+.BR bar_aaac :
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+split \(mia 4 \(mil 2000 foo bar_
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+Create as many files as are necessary to contain at most 20*1\|024
+bytes, each with the default prefix of
+.BR x
+and a five-letter suffix:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+split \(mia 5 \(mib 20k foo
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.BR \(mib
+option was added to provide a mechanism for splitting files other than
+by lines. While most uses of the
+.BR \(mib
+option are for transmitting files over networks, some believed it would
+have additional uses.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mia
+option was added to overcome the limitation of being able to create
+only 676 files.
+.P
+Consideration was given to deleting this utility, using the rationale
+that the functionality provided by this utility is available via the
+.IR csplit
+utility (see
+.IR "\fIcsplit\fR\^").
+Upon reconsideration of the purpose of the User Portability Utilities
+option, it was decided to retain both this utility and the
+.IR csplit
+utility because users use both utilities and have historical
+expectations of their behavior. Furthermore, the splitting on byte
+boundaries in
+.IR split
+cannot be duplicated with the historical
+.IR csplit .
+.P
+The text ``\c
+.IR split
+shall not delete the files it created with valid suffixes'' would
+normally be assumed, but since the related utility,
+.IR csplit ,
+does delete files under some circumstances, the historical behavior of
+.IR split
+is made explicit to avoid misinterpretation.
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard allowed a
+.BR \(mi \c
+.IR line_count
+option. This form is no longer specified by POSIX.1\(hy2008 but may be
+present in some implementations.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcsplit\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/strings.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/strings.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eaaaf0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/strings.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,244 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRINGS "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strings
+\(em find printable strings in files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+strings \fB[\fR\(mia\fB] [\fR\(mit \fIformat\fB] [\fR\(min \fInumber\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR strings
+utility shall look for printable strings in regular files and shall
+write those strings to standard output. A printable string is any
+sequence of four (by default) or more printable characters terminated
+by a
+<newline>
+or NUL character. Additional implementation-defined strings may be
+written; see
+.IR localedef .
+.P
+If the first argument is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the results are unspecified.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR strings
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except for the unspecified usage of
+.BR '\(mi' .
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mia\fP" 10
+Scan files in their entirety. If
+.BR \(mia
+is not specified, it is implementation-defined what portion of each
+file is scanned for strings.
+.IP "\fB\(min\ \fInumber\fR" 10
+Specify the minimum string length, where the
+.IR number
+argument is a positive decimal integer. The default shall be 4.
+.IP "\fB\(mit\ \fIformat\fR" 10
+Write each string preceded by its byte offset from the start of the
+file. The format shall be dependent on the single character used as
+the
+.IR format
+option-argument:
+.RS 10 
+.IP "\fRd\fR" 6
+The offset shall be written in decimal.
+.IP "\fRo\fR" 6
+The offset shall be written in octal.
+.IP "\fRx\fR" 6
+The offset shall be written in hexadecimal.
+.RE
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a regular file to be used as input. If no
+.IR file
+operand is specified, the
+.IR strings
+utility shall read from the standard input.
+.SH STDIN
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files named by the utility arguments or the standard input
+shall be regular files of any format.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR strings :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files) and to identify
+printable strings.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Strings found shall be written to the standard output, one per line.
+.P
+When the
+.BR \(mit
+option is not specified, the format of the output shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s", <\fIstring\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+With the
+.BR "\(mit\ o"
+option, the format of the output shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%o %s", <\fIbyte offset\fR>, <\fIstring\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+With the
+.BR "\(mit\ x"
+option, the format of the output shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%x %s", <\fIbyte offset\fR>, <\fIstring\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+With the
+.BR "\(mit\ d"
+option, the format of the output shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d %s", <\fIbyte offset\fR>, <\fIstring\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+By default the data area (as opposed to the text, ``bss'', or header
+areas) of a binary executable file is scanned. Implementations
+document which areas are scanned.
+.P
+Some historical implementations do not require NUL or
+<newline>
+terminators for strings to permit those languages that do not use NUL
+as a string terminator to have their strings written.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Apart from rationalizing the option syntax and slight difficulties with
+object and executable binary files,
+.IR strings
+is specified to match historical practice closely. The
+.BR \(mia
+and
+.BR \(min
+options were introduced to replace the non-conforming
+.BR \(mi
+and
+.BR \(mi \c
+.IR number
+options. These options are no longer specified by POSIX.1\(hy2008 but
+may be present in some implementations.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mio
+option historically means different things on different
+implementations. Some use it to mean ``\c
+.IR offset
+in decimal'', while others use it as ``\c
+.IR offset
+in octal''. Instead of trying to decide which way would be least
+objectionable, the
+.BR \(mit
+option was added. It was originally named
+.BR \(miO
+to mean ``offset'', but was changed to
+.BR \(mit
+to be consistent with
+.IR od .
+.P
+The ISO\ C standard function
+\fIisprint\fR()
+is restricted to a domain of
+.BR "unsigned char" .
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires implementations to write strings as defined by the
+current locale.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIlocaledef\fR\^",
+.IR "\fInm\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/strip.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/strip.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1b9eea9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/strip.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRIP "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strip
+\(em remove unnecessary information from strippable files
+(\fBDEVELOPMENT\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+strip \fIfile\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+A strippable file is defined as a relocatable, object, or executable
+file.
+On XSI-conformant systems, a strippable file can also be an archive
+of object or relocatable files.
+.P
+The
+.IR strip
+utility shall remove from strippable files named by the
+.IR file
+operands any information the implementor deems unnecessary for
+execution of those files. The nature of that information is
+unspecified. The effect of
+.IR strip
+on object and executable files shall be similar to the use of the
+.BR \(mis
+option to
+.IR c99
+or
+.IR fort77 .
+The effect of
+.IR strip
+on an archive of object files shall be similar to the use of the
+.BR \(mis
+option to
+.IR c99
+or
+.IR fort77
+for each object file in the archive.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname referring to a strippable file.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files shall be in the form of strippable files successfully
+produced by any compiler defined by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+or produced by creating or updating an archive of such files
+using the
+.IR ar
+utility.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR strip :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+The
+.IR strip
+utility shall produce strippable files of unspecified format.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Historically, this utility has been used to remove the symbol table
+from a strippable file. It was included since it is known that the
+amount of symbolic information can amount to several megabytes; the
+ability to remove it in a portable manner was deemed important,
+especially for smaller systems.
+.P
+The behavior of
+.IR strip
+on object and executable files is said to be the same as the
+.BR \(mis
+option to a compiler. While the end result is essentially the same,
+it is not required to be identical.
+.P
+XSI-conformant systems support use of
+.IR strip
+on archive files containing object files or relocatable files.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIar\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIc99\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfort77\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/stty.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/stty.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bd707d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/stty.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,807 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STTY "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+stty
+\(em set the options for a terminal
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+stty \fB[\fR\(mia|\(mig\fB]\fR
+.P
+stty \fIoperand\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR stty
+utility shall set or report on terminal I/O characteristics for the
+device that is its standard input. Without options or operands
+specified, it shall report the settings of certain characteristics,
+usually those that differ from implementation-defined defaults.
+Otherwise, it shall modify the terminal state according to the
+specified operands. Detailed information about the modes listed in the
+first five groups below are described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+Operands in the Combination Modes group (see
+.IR "Combination Modes")
+are implemented using operands in the previous groups. Some
+combinations of operands are mutually-exclusive on some terminal types;
+the results of using such combinations are unspecified.
+.P
+Typical implementations of this utility require a communications line
+configured to use the
+.BR termios
+interface defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. On systems where none of these lines
+are available, and on lines not currently configured to support the
+.BR termios
+interface, some of the operands need not affect terminal
+characteristics.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR stty
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mia\fP" 10
+Write to standard output all the current settings for the terminal.
+.IP "\fB\(mig\fP" 10
+Write to standard output all the current settings in an unspecified
+form that can be used as arguments to another invocation of the
+.IR stty
+utility on the same system. The form used shall not contain any
+characters that would require quoting to avoid word expansion by the
+shell; see
+.IR "Section 2.6" ", " "Word Expansions".
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported to set the terminal
+characteristics.
+.SS "Control Modes"
+.IP "\fBparenb\ \fR(\fB\(miparenb\fR)" 12
+Enable (disable) parity generation and detection. This shall have
+the effect of setting (not setting) PARENB in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_cflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBparodd\ \fR(\fB\(miparodd\fR)" 12
+.br
+Select odd (even) parity. This shall have the effect of setting (not
+setting) PARODD in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_cflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBcs5\ cs6\ cs7\ cs8\fR" 12
+Select character size, if possible. This shall have the effect of
+setting CS5, CS6, CS7, and CS8, respectively, in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_cflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fInumber\fR" 12
+Set terminal baud rate to the number given, if possible. If the baud
+rate is set to zero, the modem control lines shall no longer be
+asserted. This shall have the effect of setting the input and output
+.BR termios
+baud rate values as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBispeed\ \fInumber\fR" 12
+Set terminal input baud rate to the number given, if possible. If the
+input baud rate is set to zero, the input baud rate shall be specified
+by the value of the output baud rate. This shall have the effect of
+setting the input
+.BR termios
+baud rate values as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBospeed\ \fInumber\fR" 12
+Set terminal output baud rate to the number given, if possible. If the
+output baud rate is set to zero, the modem control lines shall no
+longer be asserted. This shall have the effect of setting the output
+.BR termios
+baud rate values as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBhupcl\ \fR(\fB\(mihupcl\fR)" 12
+Stop asserting modem control lines (do not stop asserting modem control
+lines) on last close. This shall have the effect of setting (not
+setting) HUPCL in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_cflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBhup\ \fR(\fB\(mihup\fR)" 12
+Equivalent to
+.BR hupcl (\c
+.BR \(mihupcl ).
+.IP "\fBcstopb\ \fR(\fB\(micstopb\fR)" 12
+Use two (one) stop bits per character. This shall have the effect of
+setting (not setting) CSTOPB in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_cflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBcread\ \fR(\fB\(micread\fR)" 12
+Enable (disable) the receiver. This shall have the effect of setting
+(not setting) CREAD in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_cflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBclocal\ \fR(\fB\(miclocal\fR)" 12
+Assume a line without (with) modem control. This shall have the effect
+of setting (not setting) CLOCAL in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_cflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.P
+It is unspecified whether
+.IR stty
+shall report an error if an attempt to set a Control Mode fails.
+.SS "Input Modes"
+.IP "\fBignbrk\ \fR(\fB\(miignbrk\fR)" 12
+Ignore (do not ignore) break on input. This shall have the effect of
+setting (not setting) IGNBRK in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_iflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBbrkint\ \fR(\fB\(mibrkint\fR)" 12
+Signal (do not signal) INTR on break. This shall have the effect of
+setting (not setting) BRKINT in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_iflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBignpar\ \fR(\fB\(miignpar\fR)" 12
+Ignore (do not ignore) bytes with parity errors. This shall have the
+effect of setting (not setting) IGNPAR in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_iflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBparmrk\ \fR(\fB\(miparmrk\fR)" 12
+.br
+Mark (do not mark) parity errors. This shall have the effect of
+setting (not setting) PARMRK in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_iflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBinpck\ \fR(\fB\(miinpck\fR)" 12
+Enable (disable) input parity checking. This shall have the effect of
+setting (not setting) INPCK in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_iflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBistrip\ \fR(\fB\(miistrip\fR)" 12
+Strip (do not strip) input characters to seven bits. This shall have
+the effect of setting (not setting) ISTRIP in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_iflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBinlcr\ \fR(\fB\(miinlcr\fR)" 12
+Map (do not map) NL to CR on input. This shall have the effect of
+setting (not setting) INLCR in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_iflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBigncr\ (\(miigncr)\fR" 12
+Ignore (do not ignore) CR on input. This shall have the effect of
+setting (not setting) IGNCR in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_iflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBicrnl\ \fR(\fB\(miicrnl\fR)" 12
+Map (do not map) CR to NL on input. This shall have the effect of
+setting (not setting) ICRNL in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_iflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBixon\ \fR(\fB\(miixon\fR)" 12
+Enable (disable) START/STOP output control. Output from the system is
+stopped when the system receives STOP and started when the system
+receives START. This shall have the effect of setting (not setting)
+IXON in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_iflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBixany\ \fR(\fB\(miixany\fR)" 12
+Allow any character to restart output. This shall have the effect of
+setting (not setting) IXANY in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_iflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBixoff\ \fR(\fB\(miixoff\fR)" 12
+Request that the system send (not send) STOP characters when the input
+queue is nearly full and START characters to resume data transmission.
+This shall have the effect of setting (not setting) IXOFF in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_iflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.SS "Output Modes"
+.IP "\fBopost\ \fR(\fB\(miopost\fR)" 12
+Post-process output (do not post-process output; ignore all other
+output modes). This shall have the effect of setting (not setting)
+OPOST in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_oflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBocrnl\ \fR(\fB\(miocrnl\fR)" 12
+Map (do not map) CR to NL on output This shall have the effect of
+setting (not setting) OCRNL in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_oflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBonocr\ \fR(\fB\(mionocr\fR)" 12
+Do not (do) output CR at column zero. This shall have the effect of
+setting (not setting) ONOCR in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_oflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBonlret\ \fR(\fB\(mionlret\fR)" 12
+The terminal newline key performs (does not perform) the CR function.
+This shall have the effect of setting (not setting) ONLRET in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_oflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBofill\ \fR(\fB\(miofill\fR)" 12
+Use fill characters (use timing) for delays. This shall have the
+effect of setting (not setting) OFILL in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_oflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBofdel\ \fR(\fB\(miofdel\fR)" 12
+Fill characters are DELs (NULs). This shall have the effect of setting
+(not setting) OFDEL in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_oflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBcr0\ cr1\ cr2\ cr3\fR" 12
+Select the style of delay for CRs. This shall have the effect of
+setting CRDLY to CR0, CR1, CR2, or CR3, respectively, in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_oflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBnl0\ nl1\fR" 12
+Select the style of delay for NL. This shall have the effect of
+setting NLDLY to NL0 or NL1, respectively, in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_oflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBtab0\ tab1\ tab2\ tab3\fR" 12
+.br
+Select the style of delay for horizontal tabs. This shall have the
+effect of setting TABDLY to TAB0, TAB1, TAB2, or TAB3, respectively,
+in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_oflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+Note that TAB3 has the effect of expanding
+<tab>
+characters to
+<space>
+characters.
+.IP "\fBtabs\ \fR(\fB\(mitabs\fR)" 12
+Synonym for
+.BR tab0
+(\c
+.BR tab3 ).
+.IP "\fBbs0\ bs1\fR" 12
+Select the style of delay for
+<backspace>
+characters. This shall have the effect of setting BSDLY to BS0 or BS1,
+respectively, in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_oflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBff0\ ff1\fR" 12
+Select the style of delay for
+<form-feed>
+characters. This shall have the effect of setting FFDLY to FF0 or FF1,
+respectively, in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_oflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBvt0\ vt1\fR" 12
+Select the style of delay for
+<vertical-tab>
+characters. This shall have the effect of setting VTDLY to VT0 or VT1,
+respectively, in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_oflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.SS "Local Modes"
+.IP "\fBisig\ \fR(\fB\(miisig\fR)" 12
+Enable (disable) the checking of characters against the special control
+characters INTR, QUIT, and SUSP. This shall have the effect of setting
+(not setting) ISIG in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_lflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBicanon\ \fR(\fB\(miicanon\fR)" 12
+Enable (disable) canonical input (ERASE and KILL processing). This
+shall have the effect of setting (not setting) ICANON in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_lflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBiexten\ \fR(\fB\(miiexten\fR)" 12
+Enable (disable) any implementation-defined special control
+characters not currently controlled by
+.BR icanon ,
+.BR isig ,
+.BR ixon ,
+or
+.BR ixoff .
+This shall have the effect of setting (not setting) IEXTEN in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_lflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBecho\ \fR(\fB\(miecho\fR)" 12
+Echo back (do not echo back) every character typed. This shall have
+the effect of setting (not setting) ECHO in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_lflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBechoe\ \fR(\fB\(miechoe\fR)" 12
+The ERASE character visually erases (does not erase) the last character
+in the current line from the display, if possible. This shall have the
+effect of setting (not setting) ECHOE in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_lflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBechok\ \fR(\fB\(miechok\fR)" 12
+Echo (do not echo) NL after KILL character. This shall have the effect
+of setting (not setting) ECHOK in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_lflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBechonl\ \fR(\fB\(miechonl\fR)" 12
+Echo (do not echo) NL, even if
+.BR echo
+is disabled. This shall have the effect of setting (not setting)
+ECHONL in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_lflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBnoflsh\ \fR(\fB\(minoflsh\fR)" 12
+Disable (enable) flush after INTR, QUIT, SUSP. This shall have the
+effect of setting (not setting) NOFLSH in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_lflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP "\fBtostop\ \fR(\fB\(mitostop\fR)" 12
+Send SIGTTOU for background output. This shall have the effect of
+setting (not setting) TOSTOP in the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_lflag
+field, as defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.SS "Special Control Character Assignments"
+.IP "<\fIcontrol\fR>\(hy\fIcharacter\ string\fR" 6
+.br
+Set <\fIcontrol\fP>\(hy\fIcharacter\fR to
+.IR string .
+If <\fIcontrol\fP>\(hy\fIcharacter\fR is one of the character sequences
+in the first column of the following table, the corresponding the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface"
+control character from the second column shall be recognized. This has
+the effect of setting the corresponding element of the
+.BR termios
+.IR c_cc
+array (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 13" ", " "Headers",
+.IR <termios.h> ).
+.br
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable: Control Character Names in \fIstty\fP\fR
+.TS
+center tab(@) box;
+cB | cB | cB
+lB | l | l.
+Control Character@c_cc Subscript@Description
+_
+eof@VEOF@EOF character
+eol@VEOL@EOL character
+erase@VERASE@ERASE character
+intr@VINTR@INTR character
+kill@VKILL@KILL character
+quit@VQUIT@QUIT character
+susp@VSUSP@SUSP character
+start@VSTART@START character
+stop@VSTOP@STOP character
+.TE
+.RS 6 
+.P
+If
+.IR string
+is a single character, the control character shall be set to that
+character. If
+.IR string
+is the two-character sequence
+.BR \(dq^\(mi\(dq 
+or the string
+.IR undef ,
+the control character shall be set to _POSIX_VDISABLE , if it is in
+effect for the device; if _POSIX_VDISABLE is not in effect for the
+device, it shall be treated as an error. In the POSIX locale, if
+.IR string
+is a two-character sequence beginning with
+<circumflex>
+(\c
+.BR '^' ),
+and the second character is one of those listed in the
+.BR \(dq^c\(dq 
+column of the following table, the control character shall be set to
+the corresponding character value in the Value column of the table.
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable: Circumflex Control Characters in \fIstty\fP\fR
+.TS
+center tab(@) box;
+cB cB | cB cB | cB cB
+lf5 2 l 6 | lf5 2 l 6 | lf5 2 l.
+\&^c@Value@^c@Value@^c@Value
+_
+a\fR,\fP A@<SOH>@l\fR,\fP L@<FF>@w\fR,\fP W@<ETB>
+b\fR,\fP B@<STX>@m\fR,\fP M@<CR>@x\fR,\fP X@<CAN>
+c\fR,\fP C@<ETX>@n\fR,\fP N@<SO>@y\fR,\fP Y@<EM>
+d\fR,\fP D@<EOT>@o\fR,\fP O@<SI>@z\fR,\fP Z@<SUB>
+e\fR,\fP E@<ENQ>@p\fR,\fP P@<DLE>@[@<ESC>
+f\fR,\fP F@<ACK>@q\fR,\fP Q@<DC1>@\e@<FS>
+g\fR,\fP G@<BEL>@r\fR,\fP R@<DC2>@]@<GS>
+h\fR,\fP H@<BS>@s\fR,\fP S@<DC3>@\&^@<RS>
+i\fR,\fP I@<HT>@t\fR,\fP T@<DC4>@\&_@<US>
+j\fR,\fP J@<LF>@u\fR,\fP U@<NAK>@?@<DEL>
+k\fR,\fP K@<VT>@v\fR,\fP V@<SYN>
+.TE
+.RE
+.IP "\fBmin\ \fInumber\fR" 6
+.br
+Set the value of MIN to
+.IR number .
+MIN is used in non-canonical mode input processing (\c
+.BR icanon ).
+.IP "\fBtime\ \fInumber\fR" 6
+.br
+Set the value of TIME to
+.IR number .
+TIME is used in non-canonical mode input processing (\c
+.BR icanon ).
+.SS "Combination Modes"
+.IP "\fIsaved\ settings\fR" 6
+.br
+Set the current terminal characteristics to the saved settings produced
+by the
+.BR \(mig
+option.
+.IP "\fBevenp\fR\ or\ \fBparity\fR" 6
+.br
+Enable
+.BR parenb
+and
+.BR cs7 ;
+disable
+.BR parodd .
+.IP "\fBoddp\fR" 6
+.br
+Enable
+.BR parenb ,
+.BR cs7 ,
+and
+.BR parodd .
+.IP "\fB\(miparity\fR, \fB\(mievenp\fR, or \fB\(mioddp\fR" 6
+.br
+Disable
+.BR parenb ,
+and set
+.BR cs8 .
+.IP "\fBraw\ \fR(\fB\(miraw\fR\ or\ \fBcooked\fR)" 6
+.br
+Enable (disable) raw input and output. Raw mode shall be equivalent to
+setting:
+.RS 6 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+stty cs8 erase ^\(mi kill ^\(mi intr ^\(mi \e
+    quit ^\(mi eof ^\(mi eol ^\(mi \(mipost \(miinpck
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP "\fBnl\ \fR(\fB\(minl\fR)" 6
+.br
+Disable (enable)
+.BR icrnl .
+In addition,
+.BR \(minl
+unsets
+.BR inlcr
+and
+.BR igncr .
+.IP "\fBek\fR" 6
+Reset ERASE and KILL characters back to system defaults.
+.IP "\fBsane\fR" 6
+.br
+Reset all modes to some reasonable, unspecified, values.
+.SH STDIN
+Although no input is read from standard input, standard input shall be
+used to get the current terminal I/O characteristics and to set new
+terminal I/O characteristics.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR stty :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+This variable determines the locale for the interpretation of sequences
+of bytes of text data as characters (for example, single-byte as
+opposed to multi-byte characters in arguments) and which characters are
+in the class
+.BR print .
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+If operands are specified, no output shall be produced.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mig
+option is specified,
+.IR stty
+shall write to standard output the current settings in a form that can
+be used as arguments to another instance of
+.IR stty
+on the same system.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mia
+option is specified, all of the information as described in the
+OPERANDS section shall be written to standard output. Unless otherwise
+specified, this information shall be written as
+<space>-separated
+tokens in an unspecified format, on one or more lines, with an
+unspecified number of tokens per line. Additional information may be
+written.
+.P
+If no options or operands are specified, an unspecified subset of the
+information written for the
+.BR \(mia
+option shall be written.
+.P
+If speed information is written as part of the default output, or if
+the
+.BR \(mia
+option is specified and if the terminal input speed and output speed
+are the same, the speed information shall be written as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"speed %d baud;", <\fIspeed\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Otherwise, speeds shall be written as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"ispeed %d baud; ospeed %d baud;", <\fIispeed\fR>, <\fIospeed\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In locales other than the POSIX locale, the word
+.BR baud
+may be changed to something more appropriate in those locales.
+.P
+If control characters are written as part of the default output, or if
+the
+.BR \(mia
+option is specified, control characters shall be written as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s = %s;", <\fIcontrol-character name\fR>, <\fIvalue\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fIvalue\fP> is either the character, or some visual
+representation of the character if it is non-printable, or the string
+.IR undef
+if the character is disabled.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+The terminal options were read or set successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.BR \(mig
+flag is designed to facilitate the saving and restoring of terminal
+state from the shell level. For example, a program may:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+saveterm="$(stty \(mig)"       # save terminal state
+stty \fI(new settings)\fR         # set new state
+\&...                         # ...
+stty $saveterm              # restore terminal state
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Since the format is unspecified, the saved value is not portable across
+systems.
+.P
+Since the
+.BR \(mia
+format is so loosely specified, scripts that save and restore terminal
+settings should use the
+.BR \(mig
+option.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The original
+.IR stty
+description was taken directly from System V and reflected the System V
+terminal driver
+.BR termio .
+It has been modified to correspond to the terminal driver
+.BR termios .
+.P
+Output modes are specified only for XSI-conformant systems. All
+implementations are expected to provide
+.IR stty
+operands corresponding to all of the output modes they support.
+.P
+The
+.IR stty
+utility is primarily used to tailor the user interface of the terminal,
+such as selecting the preferred ERASE and KILL characters. As an
+application programming utility,
+.IR stty
+can be used within shell scripts to alter the terminal settings for the
+duration of the script.
+.P
+The
+.BR termios
+section states that individual disabling of control characters is
+possible through the option _POSIX_VDISABLE.
+If enabled, two conventions currently exist for specifying this: System
+V uses
+.BR \(dq^\(mi\(dq ,
+and BSD uses
+.IR undef .
+Both are accepted by
+.IR stty
+in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. The other BSD convention of using the letter
+.BR 'u' 
+was rejected because it conflicts with the actual letter
+.BR 'u' ,
+which is an acceptable value for a control character.
+.P
+Early proposals did not specify the mapping of
+.BR \(dq^c\(dq 
+to control characters because the control characters were not specified
+in the POSIX locale character set description file requirements. The
+control character set is now specified in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 3" ", " "Definitions",
+so the historical mapping is specified. Note that although the mapping
+corresponds to control-character key assignments on many terminals that
+use the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard (or ASCII) character encodings, the mapping specified
+here is to the control characters, not their keyboard encodings.
+.P
+Since
+.BR termios
+supports separate speeds for input and output, two new options were
+added to specify each distinctly.
+.P
+Some historical implementations use standard input to get and set
+terminal characteristics; others use standard output. Since input from
+a login TTY is usually restricted to the owner while output to a TTY is
+frequently open to anyone, using standard input provides fewer chances
+of accidentally (or maliciously) altering the terminal settings of
+other users. Using standard input also allows
+.IR stty
+.BR \(mia
+and
+.IR stty
+.BR \(mig
+output to be redirected for later use. Therefore, usage of standard
+input is required by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+.IR "\fB<termios.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/tabs.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/tabs.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e323b9c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/tabs.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,291 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TABS "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tabs
+\(em set terminal tabs
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+tabs \fB[\fR\(mi\fIn\fP|\(mia|\(mia2|\(mic|\(mic2|\(mic3|\(mif|\(mip|\(mis|\(miu\fB] [\fR\(miT \fItype\fB]\fR
+.P
+tabs \fB[\fR\(miT \fItype\fB] \fIn\fB[[\fIsep\fB[\fR+\fB]\fIn\fB]\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR tabs
+utility shall display a series of characters that first clears the
+hardware terminal tab settings and then initializes the tab stops at
+the specified positions
+and optionally adjusts the margin.
+.P
+The phrase ``tab-stop position
+.IR N ''
+shall be taken to mean that, from the start of a line of output,
+tabbing to position
+.IR N
+shall cause the next character output to be in the (\c
+.IR N +1)th
+column position on that line. The maximum number of tab stops allowed
+is terminal-dependent.
+.P
+It need not be possible to implement
+.IR tabs
+on certain terminals. If the terminal type obtained from the
+.IR TERM
+environment variable or
+.BR \(miT
+option represents such a terminal, an appropriate diagnostic message
+shall be written to standard error and
+.IR tabs
+shall exit with a status greater than zero.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR tabs
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except for various extensions: the options
+.BR \(mia2 ,
+.BR \(mic2 ,
+and
+.BR \(mic3
+are multi-character.
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mi\fIn\fR" 10
+Specify repetitive tab stops separated by a uniform number of column
+positions,
+.IR n ,
+where
+.IR n
+is a single-digit decimal number. The default usage of
+.IR tabs
+with no arguments shall be equivalent to
+.IR tabs
+\(mi8. When
+.BR \(mi0
+is used, the tab stops shall be cleared and no new ones set.
+.IP "\fB\(mia\fP" 10
+1,10,16,36,72
+.br
+Assembler, applicable to some mainframes.
+.IP "\fB\(mia2\fP" 10
+1,10,16,40,72
+.br
+Assembler, applicable to some mainframes.
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+1,8,12,16,20,55
+.br
+COBOL, normal format.
+.IP "\fB\(mic2\fP" 10
+1,6,10,14,49
+.br
+COBOL, compact format (columns 1 to 6 omitted).
+.IP "\fB\(mic3\fP" 10
+1,6,10,14,18,22,26,30,34,38,42,46,50,54,58,62,67
+.br
+COBOL compact format (columns 1 to 6 omitted), with more tabs than
+.BR \(mic2 .
+.IP "\fB\(mif\fP" 10
+1,7,11,15,19,23
+.br
+FORTRAN
+.IP "\fB\(mip\fP" 10
+1,5,9,13,17,21,25,29,33,37,41,45,49,53,57,61
+.br
+PL/1
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+1,10,55
+.br
+SNOBOL
+.IP "\fB\(miu\fP" 10
+1,12,20,44
+.br
+Assembler, applicable to some mainframes.
+.IP "\fB\(miT\ \fItype\fR" 10
+Indicate the type of terminal. If this option is not supplied and the
+.IR TERM
+variable is unset or null, an unspecified default terminal type shall
+be used. The setting of
+.IR type
+shall take precedence over the value in
+.IR TERM .
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIn\fB[[\fIsep\fB[\fR+\fB]\fIn\fB]\fR...\fB]\fR" 10
+A single command line argument that consists of one or more tab-stop
+values (\c
+.IR n )
+separated by a separator character (\c
+.IR sep )
+which is either a
+<comma>
+or a
+<blank>
+character. The application shall ensure that the tab-stop values are
+positive decimal integers in strictly ascending order. If any tab-stop
+value (except the first one) is preceded by a
+<plus-sign>,
+it is taken as an increment to be added to the previous value. For
+example, the tab lists 1,10,20,30 and
+.BR \(dq1 10 +10 +10\(dq 
+are considered to be identical.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR tabs :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fITERM\fP" 10
+Determine the terminal type. If this variable is unset or null, and if
+the
+.BR \(miT
+option is not specified, an unspecified default terminal type shall be
+used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+If standard output is a terminal, the appropriate sequence to clear and
+set the tab stops may be written to standard output in an unspecified
+format. If standard output is not a terminal, undefined results
+occur.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+This utility makes use of the terminal's hardware tabs and the
+.IR stty
+.IR tabs
+option.
+.P
+This utility is not recommended for application use.
+.P
+Some integrated display units might not have escape sequences to set
+tab stops, but may be set by internal system calls. On these
+terminals,
+.IR tabs
+works if standard output is directed to the terminal; if output is
+directed to another file, however,
+.IR tabs
+fails.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Consideration was given to having the
+.IR tput
+utility handle all of the functions described in
+.IR tabs .
+However, the separate
+.IR tabs
+utility was retained because it seems more intuitive to use a command
+named
+.IR tabs
+than
+.IR tput
+with a new option. The
+.IR tput
+utility does not support setting or clearing tabs, and no known
+historical version of
+.IR tabs
+supports the capability of setting arbitrary tab stops.
+.P
+The System V
+.IR tabs
+interface is very complex; the version in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 has a reduced feature
+list, but many of the features omitted were restored as part of the
+XSI option even though the supported languages and coding styles are
+primarily historical.
+.P
+There was considerable sentiment for specifying only a means of
+resetting the tabs back to a known state\(empresumably the ``standard''
+of tabs every eight positions. The following features were omitted:
+.IP " *" 4
+Setting tab stops via the first line in a file, using \(mi\|\(mi\c
+.IR file .
+Since even the SVID has no complete explanation of this feature, it is
+doubtful that it is in widespread use.
+.P
+In an early proposal, a
+.BR \(mit
+.IR tablist
+option was added for consistency with
+.IR expand ;
+this was later removed when inconsistencies with the historical list of
+tabs were identified.
+.P
+Consideration was given to adding a
+.BR \(mip
+option that would output the current tab settings so that they could be
+saved and then later restored. This was not accepted because querying
+the tab stops of the terminal is not a capability in historical
+.IR terminfo
+or
+.IR termcap
+facilities and might not be supported on a wide range of terminals.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexpand\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIstty\fR\^",
+.IR "\fItput\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIunexpand\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/tail.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/tail.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..28f5976
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/tail.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,348 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TAIL "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tail
+\(em copy the last part of a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+tail \fB[\fR\(mif\fB] [\fR\(mic \fInumber\fR|\(min \fInumber\fB] [\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR tail
+utility shall copy its input file to the standard output beginning at a
+designated place.
+.P
+Copying shall begin at the point in the file indicated by the
+.BR \(mic
+.IR number
+or
+.BR \(min
+.IR number
+options. The option-argument
+.IR number
+shall be counted in units of lines or bytes, according to the options
+.BR \(min
+and
+.BR \(mic .
+Both line and byte counts start from 1.
+.P
+Tails relative to the end of the file may be saved in an internal
+buffer, and thus may be limited in length. Such a buffer, if any,
+shall be no smaller than
+{LINE_MAX}*10
+bytes.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR tail
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except that
+.BR '\(pl' 
+may be recognized as an option delimiter as well as
+.BR '\(mi' .
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mic\ \fInumber\fR" 10
+The application shall ensure that the
+.IR number
+option-argument is a decimal integer, optionally including a sign.
+The sign shall affect the location in the file, measured in bytes,
+to begin the copying:
+.TS
+center tab(@) box;
+cB | cB
+cf5 | l.
+Sign@Copying Starts
+_
++@Relative to the beginning of the file.
+\(mi@Relative to the end of the file.
+\fInone\fP@Relative to the end of the file.
+.TE
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The application shall ensure that if the sign of the
+.IR number
+option-argument is
+.BR '\(pl' ,
+the
+.IR number
+option-argument is a non-zero decimal integer.
+.P
+The origin for counting shall be 1; that is,
+.BR \(mic
++1 represents the first byte of the file,
+.BR \(mic
+\(mi1 the last.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mif\fP" 10
+If the input file is a regular file or if the
+.IR file
+operand specifies a FIFO, do not terminate after the last line of the
+input file has been copied, but read and copy further bytes from the
+input file when they become available. If no
+.IR file
+operand is specified and standard input is a pipe or FIFO, the
+.BR \(mif
+option shall be ignored. If the input file is not a FIFO, pipe, or
+regular file, it is unspecified whether or not the
+.BR \(mif
+option shall be ignored.
+.IP "\fB\(min\ \fInumber\fR" 10
+This option shall be equivalent to
+.BR \(mic
+.IR number ,
+except the starting location in the file shall be measured in lines
+instead of bytes. The origin for counting shall be 1; that is,
+.BR \(min
++1 represents the first line of the file,
+.BR \(min
+\(mi1 the last.
+.P
+If neither
+.BR \(mic
+nor
+.BR \(min
+is specified,
+.BR \(min
+10 shall be assumed.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of an input file. If no
+.IR file
+operand is specified, the standard input shall be used.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used if no
+.IR file
+operand is specified, and shall be used if the
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' 
+and the implementation treats the
+.BR '\(mi' 
+as meaning standard input.
+Otherwise, the standard input shall not be used.
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+If the
+.BR \(mic
+option is specified, the input file can contain arbitrary data;
+otherwise, the input file shall be a text file.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR tail :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The designated portion of the input file shall be written to standard
+output.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.BR \(mic
+option should be used with caution when the input is a text file
+containing multi-byte characters; it may produce output that does not
+start on a character boundary.
+.P
+Although the input file to
+.IR tail
+can be any type, the results might not be what would be expected on
+some character special device files or on file types not described by
+the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. Since this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not specify the block size used when doing
+input,
+.IR tail
+need not read all of the data from devices that only perform block
+transfers.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The
+.BR \(mif
+option can be used to monitor the growth of a file that is being
+written by some other process. For example, the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+tail \(mif fred
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+prints the last ten lines of the file
+.BR fred ,
+followed by any lines that are appended to
+.BR fred
+between the time
+.IR tail
+is initiated and killed. As another example, the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+tail \(mif \(mic 15 fred
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+prints the last 15 bytes of the file
+.BR fred ,
+followed by any bytes that are appended to
+.BR fred
+between the time
+.IR tail
+is initiated and killed.
+.SH RATIONALE
+This version of
+.IR tail
+was created to allow conformance to the Utility Syntax Guidelines. The
+historical
+.BR \(mib
+option was omitted because of the general non-portability of block-sized
+units of text. The
+.BR \(mic
+option historically meant ``characters'', but this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 indicates
+that it means ``bytes''. This was selected to allow reasonable
+implementations when multi-byte characters are possible; it was not
+named
+.BR \(mib
+to avoid confusion with the historical
+.BR \(mib .
+.P
+The origin of counting both lines and bytes is 1, matching all
+widespread historical implementations. Hence
+.IR tail
+.BR \(min
++0 is not conforming usage because it attempts to output line zero; but
+note that
+.IR tail
+.BR \(min
+0 does conform, and outputs nothing.
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard allowed the following forms in the
+SYNOPSIS:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+tail \(mi\fB[\fRnumber\fB][\fRb|c|l\fB][\fRf\fB] [\fIfile\fB]\fR
+tail \(pl\fB[\fRnumber\fB][\fRb|c|l\fB][\fRf\fB] [\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+These forms are no longer specified by POSIX.1\(hy2008, but may be
+present in some implementations.
+.P
+The restriction on the internal buffer is a compromise between the
+historical System V implementation of 4\|096 bytes and the BSD 32\|768
+bytes.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mif
+option has been implemented as a loop that sleeps for 1 second and
+copies any bytes that are available. This is sufficient, but if more
+efficient methods of determining when new data are available are
+developed, implementations are encouraged to use them.
+.P
+Historical documentation indicates that
+.IR tail
+ignores the
+.BR \(mif
+option if the input file is a pipe (pipe and FIFO on systems that
+support FIFOs). On BSD-based systems, this has been true; on System
+V-based systems, this was true when input was taken from standard
+input, but it did not ignore the
+.BR \(mif
+flag if a FIFO was named as the
+.IR file
+operand. Since the
+.BR \(mif
+option is not useful on pipes and all historical implementations ignore
+.BR \(mif
+if no
+.IR file
+operand is specified and standard input is a pipe, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires this
+behavior. However, since the
+.BR \(mif
+option is useful on a FIFO, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 also requires that
+if a FIFO is named, the
+.BR \(mif
+option shall not be ignored. Earlier versions of this standard did
+not state any requirement for the case where no
+.IR file
+operand is specified and standard input is a FIFO. The standard has
+been updated to reflect current practice which is to treat this case
+the same as a pipe on standard input.
+Although historical behavior does not ignore the
+.BR \(mif
+option for other file types, this is unspecified so that
+implementations are allowed to ignore the
+.BR \(mif
+option if it is known that the file cannot be extended.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIhead\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/talk.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/talk.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f622d55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/talk.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,309 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TALK "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+talk
+\(em talk to another user
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+talk \fIaddress \fB[\fIterminal\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR talk
+utility is a two-way, screen-oriented communication program.
+.P
+When first invoked,
+.IR talk
+shall send a message similar to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+Message from <\fIunspecified string\fP>
+talk: connection requested by \fIyour_address\fP
+talk: respond with: talk \fIyour_address\fP
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+to the specified
+.IR address .
+At this point, the recipient of the message can reply by typing:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+talk \fIyour_address\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Once communication is established, the two parties can type
+simultaneously, with their output displayed in separate regions of the
+screen. Characters shall be processed as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+Typing the
+<alert>
+character shall alert the recipient's terminal.
+.IP " *" 4
+Typing <control>\(hyL shall cause the sender's screen regions to be
+refreshed.
+.IP " *" 4
+Typing the erase and kill characters shall affect the sender's terminal
+in the manner described by the
+.BR termios
+interface in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP " *" 4
+Typing the interrupt or end-of-file characters shall terminate the
+local
+.IR talk
+utility. Once the
+.IR talk
+session has been terminated on one side, the other side of the
+.IR talk
+session shall be notified that the
+.IR talk
+session has been terminated and shall be able to do nothing except
+exit.
+.IP " *" 4
+Typing characters from
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+classifications
+.BR print
+or
+.BR space
+shall cause those characters to be sent to the recipient's terminal.
+.IP " *" 4
+When and only when the
+.IR stty
+.BR iexten
+local mode is enabled, the existence and processing of additional
+special control characters and multi-byte or single-byte functions
+shall be implementation-defined.
+.IP " *" 4
+Typing other non-printable characters shall cause
+implementation-defined sequences of printable characters to be sent
+to the recipient's terminal.
+.P
+Permission to be a recipient of a
+.IR talk
+message can be denied or granted by use of the
+.IR mesg
+utility. However, a user's privilege may further constrain the domain
+of accessibility of other users' terminals. The
+.IR talk
+utility shall fail when the user lacks appropriate privileges to
+perform the requested action.
+.P
+Certain block-mode terminals do not have all the capabilities necessary
+to support the simultaneous exchange of messages required for
+.IR talk .
+When this type of exchange cannot be supported on such terminals, the
+implementation may support an exchange with reduced levels of
+simultaneous interaction or it may report an error describing the
+terminal-related deficiency.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIaddress\fR" 10
+The recipient of the
+.IR talk
+session. One form of
+.IR address
+is the <\fIuser\ name\fP>, as returned by the
+.IR who
+utility. Other address formats and how they are handled are
+unspecified.
+.IP "\fIterminal\fR" 10
+If the recipient is logged in more than once, the
+.IR terminal
+argument can be used to indicate the appropriate terminal name. If
+.IR terminal
+is not specified, the
+.IR talk
+message shall be displayed on one or more accessible terminals in use
+by the recipient. The format of
+.IR terminal
+shall be the same as that returned by the
+.IR who
+utility.
+.SH STDIN
+Characters read from standard input shall be copied to the recipient's
+terminal in an unspecified manner. If standard input is not a
+terminal, talk shall write a diagnostic message and exit with a
+non-zero status.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR talk :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files). If the
+recipient's locale does not use an
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+equivalent to the sender's, the results are undefined.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fITERM\fP" 10
+Determine the name of the invoker's terminal type. If this variable is
+unset or null, an unspecified default terminal type shall be used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+When the
+.IR talk
+utility receives a SIGINT signal, the utility shall terminate and exit
+with a zero status. It shall take the standard action for all other
+signals.
+.SH STDOUT
+If standard output is a terminal, characters copied from the
+recipient's standard input may be written to standard output. Standard
+output also may be used for diagnostic messages. If standard output is
+not a terminal,
+.IR talk
+shall exit with a non-zero status.
+.SH STDERR
+None.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred or
+.IR talk
+was invoked on a terminal incapable of supporting it.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Because the handling of non-printable, non-\c
+<space>
+characters is tied to the
+.IR stty
+description of
+.BR iexten ,
+implementation extensions within the terminal driver can be accessed.
+For example, some implementations provide line editing functions with
+certain control character sequences.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR write
+utility was included in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 since it can be implemented on all
+terminal types. The
+.IR talk
+utility, which cannot be implemented on certain terminals, was
+considered to be a ``better'' communications interface. Both of these
+programs are in widespread use on historical implementations.
+Therefore, both utilities have been specified.
+.P
+All references to networking abilities (\fItalk\fPing to a user on
+another system) were removed as being outside the scope of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+Historical BSD and System V versions of
+.IR talk
+terminate both of the conversations when either user breaks out of the
+session. This can lead to adverse consequences if a user unwittingly
+continues to enter text that is interpreted by the shell when the other
+terminates the session. Therefore, the version of
+.IR talk
+specified by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires both users to terminate their end of the
+session explicitly.
+.P
+Only messages sent to the terminal of the invoking user can be
+internationalized in any way:
+.IP " *" 4
+The original ``Message from <\fIunspecified string\fP> .\|.\|.''
+message sent to the terminal of the recipient cannot be
+internationalized because the environment of the recipient is as yet
+inaccessible to the
+.IR talk
+utility. The environment of the invoking party is irrelevant.
+.IP " *" 4
+Subsequent communication between the two parties cannot be
+internationalized because the two parties may specify different
+languages in their environment (and non-portable characters cannot be
+mapped from one language to another).
+.IP " *" 4
+Neither party can be required to communicate in a language other than C
+and/or the one specified by their environment because unavailable
+terminal hardware support (for example, fonts) may be required.
+.P
+The text in the STDOUT section reflects the usage of the verb
+``display'' in this section; some
+.IR talk
+implementations actually use standard output to write to the terminal,
+but this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not require that to be the case.
+.P
+The format of the terminal name is unspecified, but the descriptions of
+.IR ps ,
+.IR talk ,
+.IR who ,
+and
+.IR write
+require that they all use or accept the same format.
+.P
+The handling of non-printable characters is partially
+implementation-defined
+because the details of mapping them to printable sequences is not
+needed by the user. Historical implementations, for security reasons,
+disallow the transmission of non-printable characters that may send
+commands to the other terminal.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImesg\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIstty\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIwho\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/tee.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/tee.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4f8dfde
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/tee.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,196 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TEE "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tee
+\(em duplicate standard input
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+tee \fB[\fR\(miai\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR tee
+utility shall copy standard input to standard output, making a copy in
+zero or more files. The
+.IR tee
+utility shall not buffer output.
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mia
+option is not specified, output files shall be written (see
+.IR "Section 1.1.1.4" ", " "File Read" ", " "Write" ", " "and Creation".
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR tee
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mia\fP" 10
+Append the output to the files.
+.IP "\fB\(mii\fP" 10
+Ignore the SIGINT signal.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of an output file. If a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+it shall refer to a file named
+.BR \(mi ;
+implementations shall not treat it as meaning standard output.
+Processing of at least 13
+.IR file
+operands shall be supported.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input can be of any type.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR tee :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default, except that if the
+.BR \(mii
+option was specified, SIGINT shall be ignored.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall be a copy of the standard input.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+If any
+.IR file
+operands are specified, the standard input shall be copied to each
+named file.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+The standard input was successfully copied to all output files.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+If a write to any successfully opened
+.IR file
+operand fails, writes to other successfully opened
+.IR file
+operands and standard output shall continue, but the exit status shall
+be non-zero. Otherwise, the default actions specified in
+.IR "Section 1.4" ", " "Utility Description Defaults"
+apply.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR tee
+utility is usually used in a pipeline, to make a copy of the output of
+some utility.
+.P
+The
+.IR file
+operand is technically optional, but
+.IR tee
+is no more useful than
+.IR cat
+when none is specified.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Save an unsorted intermediate form of the data in a pipeline:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\&... | tee unsorted | sort > sorted
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The buffering requirement means that
+.IR tee
+is not allowed to use ISO\ C standard fully buffered or line-buffered writes. It
+does not mean that
+.IR tee
+has to do 1-byte reads followed by 1-byte writes.
+.P
+It should be noted that early versions of BSD ignore any invalid
+options and accept a single
+.BR '\(mi' 
+as an alternative to
+.BR \(mii .
+They also print a message if unable to open a file:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"tee: cannot access %s\en", <\fIpathname\fP>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Historical implementations ignore write errors. This is explicitly not
+permitted by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+Some historical implementations use O_APPEND when providing append
+mode; others use the
+\fIlseek\fR()
+function to seek to the end-of-file after opening the file without
+O_APPEND. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires functionality equivalent to using O_APPEND;
+see
+.IR "Section 1.1.1.4" ", " "File Read" ", " "Write" ", " "and Creation".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 1" ", " "Introduction",
+.IR "\fIcat\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIlseek\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/test.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/test.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f9779dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/test.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,1058 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TEST "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+test
+\(em evaluate expression
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+test \fB[\fIexpression\fB]\fR
+.P
+[ \fB[\fIexpression\fB]\fR ]
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR test
+utility shall evaluate the
+.IR expression
+and indicate the result of the evaluation by its exit status. An exit
+status of zero indicates that the expression evaluated as true and an
+exit status of 1 indicates that the expression evaluated as false.
+.P
+In the second form of the utility, which uses
+.BR \(dq[]\(dq 
+rather than
+.IR test ,
+the application shall ensure that the square brackets are separate
+arguments.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR test
+utility shall not recognize the
+.BR \(dq\(mi\|\(mi\(dq 
+argument in the manner specified by Guideline 10 in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+No options shall be supported.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The application shall ensure that all operators and elements of
+primaries are presented as separate arguments to the
+.IR test
+utility.
+.P
+The following primaries can be used to construct
+.IR expression :
+.IP "\fB\(mib\ \fIpathname\fR" 10
+True if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to en existing directory entry for a block special file.
+False if
+.IR pathname
+cannot be resolved, or if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a file that is not a block
+special file.
+.IP "\fB\(mic\ \fIpathname\fR" 10
+True if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a character special file.
+False if
+.IR pathname
+cannot be resolved, or if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a file that is not a character
+special file.
+.IP "\fB\(mid\ \fIpathname\fR" 10
+True if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a directory. False if
+.IR pathname
+cannot be resolved, or if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a file that is not a
+directory.
+.IP "\fB\(mie\ \fIpathname\fR" 10
+True if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry. False if
+.IR pathname
+cannot be resolved.
+.IP "\fB\(mif\ \fIpathname\fR" 10
+True if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a regular file. False if
+.IR pathname
+cannot be resolved, or if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a file that is not a
+regular file.
+.IP "\fB\(mig\ \fIpathname\fR" 10
+True if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a file that has its
+set-group-ID flag set. False if
+.IR pathname
+cannot be resolved, or if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a file that does not have
+its set-group-ID flag set.
+.IP "\fB\(mih\ \fIpathname\fR" 10
+True if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a symbolic link. False if
+.IR pathname
+cannot be resolved, or if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a file that is not a symbolic
+link. If the final component of
+.IR pathname
+is a symbolic link, that symbolic link is not followed.
+.IP "\fB\(miL\ \fIpathname\fR" 10
+True if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a symbolic link. False if
+.IR pathname
+cannot be resolved, or if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a file that is not a symbolic
+link. If the final component of
+.IR pathname
+is a symbolic link, that symbolic link is not followed.
+.IP "\fB\(min\ \fIstring\fR" 10
+True if the length of
+.IR string
+is non-zero; otherwise, false.
+.IP "\fB\(mip\ \fIpathname\fR" 10
+True if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a FIFO. False if
+.IR pathname
+cannot be resolved, or if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a file that is not a FIFO.
+.IP "\fB\(mir\ \fIpathname\fR" 10
+True if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a file for which permission
+to read from the file will be granted, as defined in
+.IR "Section 1.1.1.4" ", " "File Read" ", " "Write" ", " "and Creation".
+False if
+.IR pathname
+cannot be resolved, or if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a file for which permission
+to read from the file will not be granted.
+.IP "\fB\(miS\ \fIpathname\fR" 10
+True if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a socket. False if
+.IR pathname
+cannot be resolved, or if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a file that is not a socket.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\ \fIpathname\fR" 10
+True if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a file that has a size
+greater than zero. False if
+.IR pathname
+cannot be resolved, or if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a file that does not have
+a size greater than zero.
+.IP "\fB\(mit\ \fIfile_descriptor\fR" 10
+.br
+True if file descriptor number
+.IR file_descriptor
+is open and is associated with a terminal. False if
+.IR file_descriptor
+is not a valid file descriptor number, or if file descriptor number
+.IR file_descriptor
+is not open, or if it is open but is not associated with a terminal.
+.IP "\fB\(miu\ \fIpathname\fR" 10
+True if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a file that has its
+set-user-ID flag set. False if
+.IR pathname
+cannot be resolved, or if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a file that does not have
+its set-user-ID flag set.
+.IP "\fB\(miw\ \fIpathname\fR" 10
+True if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a file for which permission
+to write to the file will be granted, as defined in
+.IR "Section 1.1.1.4" ", " "File Read" ", " "Write" ", " "and Creation".
+False if
+.IR pathname
+cannot be resolved, or if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a file for which permission
+to write to the file will not be granted.
+.IP "\fB\(mix\ \fIpathname\fR" 10
+True if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a file for which permission
+to execute the file (or search it, if it is a directory) will be granted,
+as defined in
+.IR "Section 1.1.1.4" ", " "File Read" ", " "Write" ", " "and Creation".
+False if
+.IR pathname
+cannot be resolved, or if
+.IR pathname
+resolves to an existing directory entry for a file for which permission
+to execute (or search) the file will not be granted.
+.IP "\fB\(miz\ \fIstring\fR" 10
+True if the length of string
+.IR string
+is zero; otherwise, false.
+.IP "\fIstring\fR" 10
+True if the string
+.IR string
+is not the null string; otherwise, false.
+.IP "\fIs1\fB\ \(eq\ \fIs2\fR" 10
+True if the strings
+.IR s1
+and
+.IR s2
+are identical; otherwise, false.
+.IP "\fIs1\fB\ !=\ \fIs2\fR" 10
+True if the strings
+.IR s1
+and
+.IR s2
+are not identical; otherwise, false.
+.IP "\fIn1\fB\ \(mieq\ \fIn2\fR" 10
+True if the integers
+.IR n1
+and
+.IR n2
+are algebraically equal; otherwise, false.
+.IP "\fIn1\fB\ \(mine\ \fIn2\fR" 10
+True if the integers
+.IR n1
+and
+.IR n2
+are not algebraically equal; otherwise, false.
+.IP "\fIn1\fB\ \(migt\ \fIn2\fR" 10
+True if the integer
+.IR n1
+is algebraically greater than the integer
+.IR n2 ;
+otherwise, false.
+.IP "\fIn1\fB\ \(mige\ \fIn2\fR" 10
+True if the integer
+.IR n1
+is algebraically greater than or equal to the integer
+.IR n2 ;
+otherwise, false.
+.IP "\fIn1\fB\ \(milt\ \fIn2\fR" 10
+True if the integer
+.IR n1
+is algebraically less than the integer
+.IR n2 ;
+otherwise, false.
+.IP "\fIn1\fB\ \(mile\ \fIn2\fR" 10
+True if the integer
+.IR n1
+is algebraically less than or equal to the integer
+.IR n2 ;
+otherwise, false.
+.IP "\fIexpression1\fB\ \(mia\ \fIexpression2\fR" 10
+.br
+True if both
+.IR expression1
+and
+.IR expression2
+are true; otherwise, false. The
+.BR \(mia
+binary primary is left associative. It has a higher precedence than
+.BR \(mio .
+.IP "\fIexpression1\fB\ \(mio\ \fIexpression2\fR" 10
+.br
+True if either
+.IR expression1
+or
+.IR expression2
+is true; otherwise, false. The
+.BR \(mio
+binary primary is left associative.
+.P
+With the exception of the
+.BR \(mih
+.IR pathname
+and
+.BR \(miL
+.IR pathname
+primaries, if a
+.IR pathname
+argument is a symbolic link,
+.IR test
+shall evaluate the expression by resolving the symbolic link and using
+the file referenced by the link.
+.P
+These primaries can be combined with the following operators:
+.IP "\fB!\ \fIexpression\fR" 10
+True if
+.IR expression
+is false. False if
+.IR expression
+is true.
+.IP "\fB(\ \fIexpression\ \fB)\fR" 10
+True if
+.IR expression
+is true. False if
+.IR expression
+is false. The parentheses can be used to alter the normal precedence
+and associativity.
+.P
+The primaries with two elements of the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\(mi\fIprimary_operator primary_operand\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+are known as
+.IR "unary primaries" .
+The primaries with three elements in either of the two forms:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIprimary_operand \fR\(mi\fIprimary_operator primary_operand
+.P
+primary_operand primary_operator primary_operand\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+are known as
+.IR "binary primaries" .
+Additional implementation-defined operators and
+.IR primary_operator s
+may be provided by implementations. They shall be of the form \(mi\c
+.IR operator
+where the first character of
+.IR operator
+is not a digit.
+.P
+The algorithm for determining the precedence of the operators and the
+return value that shall be generated is based on the number of
+arguments presented to
+.IR test .
+(However, when using the
+.BR \(dq[...]\(dq 
+form, the
+<right-square-bracket>
+final argument shall not be counted in this algorithm.)
+.P
+In the following list, $1, $2, $3, and $4 represent the arguments
+presented to
+.IR test :
+.IP "0\ arguments:" 12
+Exit false (1).
+.IP "1\ argument:" 12
+Exit true (0) if $1 is not null; otherwise, exit false.
+.IP "2\ arguments:" 12
+.sp -1v
+.RS 12 
+.IP " *" 4
+If $1 is
+.BR '!' ,
+exit true if $2 is null, false if $2 is not null.
+.IP " *" 4
+If $1 is a unary primary, exit true if the unary test is true, false if
+the unary test is false.
+.IP " *" 4
+Otherwise, produce unspecified results.
+.RE
+.IP "3\ arguments:" 12
+.sp -1v
+.RS 12 
+.IP " *" 4
+If $2 is a binary primary, perform the binary test of $1 and $3.
+.IP " *" 4
+If $1 is
+.BR '!' ,
+negate the two-argument test of $2 and $3.
+.IP " *" 4
+If $1 is
+.BR '(' 
+and $3 is
+.BR ')' ,
+perform the unary test of $2.
+On systems that do not support the XSI option, the results are
+unspecified if $1 is
+.BR '(' 
+and $3 is
+.BR ')' .
+.IP " *" 4
+Otherwise, produce unspecified results.
+.RE
+.IP "4\ arguments:" 12
+.sp -1v
+.RS 12 
+.IP " *" 4
+If $1 is
+.BR '!' ,
+negate the three-argument test of $2, $3, and $4.
+.IP " *" 4
+If $1 is
+.BR '(' 
+and $4 is
+.BR ')' ,
+perform the two-argument test of $2 and $3.
+On systems that do not support the XSI option, the results are
+unspecified if $1 is
+.BR '(' 
+and $4 is
+.BR ')' .
+.IP " *" 4
+Otherwise, the results are unspecified.
+.RE
+.IP ">4\ arguments:" 12
+The results are unspecified.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+On XSI-conformant systems, combinations of primaries and operators
+shall be evaluated using the precedence and associativity rules
+described previously. In addition, the string comparison binary
+primaries
+.BR '=' 
+and
+.BR \(dq!=\(dq 
+shall have a higher precedence than any unary primary.
+.RE
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR test :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+.IR expression
+evaluated to true.
+.IP "\01" 6
+.IR expression
+evaluated to false or
+.IR expression
+was missing.
+.IP >1 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The XSI extensions specifying the
+.BR \(mia
+and
+.BR \(mio
+binary primaries and the
+.BR '(' 
+and
+.BR ')' 
+operators have been marked obsolescent. (Many expressions using them
+are ambiguously defined by the grammar depending on the specific
+expressions being evaluated.) Scripts using these expressions should be
+converted to the forms given below. Even though many implementations
+will continue to support these obsolescent forms, scripts should be
+extremely careful when dealing with user-supplied input that could be
+confused with these and other primaries and operators. Unless the
+application developer knows all the cases that produce input to the
+script, invocations like:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+test "$1" \(mia "$2"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+should be written as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+test "$1" && test "$2"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+to avoid problems if a user supplied values such as $1 set to
+.BR '!' 
+and $2 set to the null string. That is, in cases where maximal
+portability is of concern, replace:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+test expr1 \(mia expr2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+with:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+test expr1 && test expr2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and replace:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+test expr1 \(mio expr2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+with:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+test expr1 || test expr2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+but note that, in
+.IR test ,
+.BR \(mia
+has higher precedence than
+.BR \(mio
+while
+.BR \(dq&&\(dq 
+and
+.BR \(dq||\(dq 
+have equal precedence in the shell.
+.P
+Parentheses or braces can be used in the shell command language to
+effect grouping.
+.P
+Parentheses must be escaped when using
+.IR sh ;
+for example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+test \e( expr1 \(mia expr2 \e) \(mio expr3
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This command is not always portable even on XSI-conformant systems
+depending on the expressions specified by
+.IR expr 1,
+.IR expr 2,
+and
+.IR expr 3.
+The following form can be used instead:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+( test expr1 && test expr2 ) || test expr3
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The two commands:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+test "$1"
+test ! "$1"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+could not be used reliably on some historical systems. Unexpected
+results would occur if such a
+.IR string
+expression were used and $1 expanded to
+.BR '!' ,
+.BR '(' ,
+or a known unary primary. Better constructs are:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+test \(min "$1"
+test \(miz "$1"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+respectively.
+.P
+Historical systems have also been unreliable given the common
+construct:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+test "$response" = "expected string"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+One of the following is a more reliable form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+test "X$response" = "Xexpected string"
+test "expected string" = "$response"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Note that the second form assumes that
+.IR "expected string"
+could not be confused with any unary primary. If
+.IR "expected string"
+starts with
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+.BR '(' ,
+.BR '!' ,
+or even
+.BR '=' ,
+the first form should be used instead. Using the preceding rules
+without the XSI marked extensions, any of the three comparison forms is
+reliable, given any input. (However, note that the strings are quoted
+in all cases.)
+.P
+Because the string comparison binary primaries,
+.BR '=' 
+and
+.BR \(dq!=\(dq ,
+have a higher precedence than any unary primary in the greater than 4
+argument case, unexpected results can occur if arguments are not
+properly prepared. For example, in:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+test \(mid $1 \(mio \(mid $2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If $1 evaluates to a possible directory name of
+.BR '=' ,
+the first three arguments are considered a string comparison, which
+shall cause a syntax error when the second
+.BR \(mid
+is encountered. One of the following forms prevents this; the second
+is preferred:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+test \e( \(mid "$1" \e) \(mio \e( \(mid "$2" \e)
+test \(mid "$1" || test \(mid "$2"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Also in the greater than 4 argument case:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+test "$1" = "bat" \(mia "$2" = "ball"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+syntax errors occur if $1 evaluates to
+.BR '(' 
+or
+.BR '!' .
+One of the following forms prevents this; the third is preferred:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+test "X$1" = "Xbat" \(mia "X$2" = "Xball"
+test "$1" = "bat" && test "$2" = "ball"
+test "X$1" = "Xbat" && test "X$2" = "Xball"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+Exit if there are not two or three arguments (two variations):
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+if [ $# \(mine 2 ] && [ $# \(mine 3 ]; then exit 1; fi
+if [ $# \(milt 2 ] || [ $# \(migt 3 ]; then exit 1; fi
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+Perform a
+.IR mkdir
+if a directory does not exist:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+test ! \(mid tempdir && mkdir tempdir
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+Wait for a file to become non-readable:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+while test \(mir thefile
+do
+    sleep 30
+done
+echo '"thefile" is no longer readable'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+Perform a command if the argument is one of three strings (two
+variations):
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+if [ "$1" = "pear" ] || [ "$1" = "grape" ] || [ "$1" = "apple" ]
+then
+    \fIcommand\fP
+fi
+.P
+case "$1" in
+    pear|grape|apple) \fIcommand\fP ;;
+esac
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The KornShell-derived conditional command (double bracket
+.BR [[\|]] )
+was removed from the shell command language description in an early
+proposal. Objections were raised that the real problem is misuse of the
+.IR test
+command (\c
+.BR [ ),
+and putting it into the shell is the wrong way to fix the problem.
+Instead, proper documentation and a new shell reserved word (\c
+.BR ! )
+are sufficient.
+.P
+Tests that require multiple
+.IR test
+operations can be done at the shell level using individual invocations
+of the
+.IR test
+command and shell logicals, rather than using the error-prone
+.BR \(mio
+flag of
+.IR test .
+.P
+XSI-conformant systems support more than four arguments.
+.P
+XSI-conformant systems support the combining of primaries with the
+following constructs:
+.IP "\fIexpression1\fB \(mia \fIexpression2\fR" 6
+.br
+True if both
+.IR expression1
+and
+.IR expression2
+are true.
+.IP "\fIexpression1\fB \(mio \fIexpression2\fR" 6
+.br
+True if at least one of
+.IR expression1
+and
+.IR expression2
+are true.
+.IP "\fB( \fIexpression \fB)\fR" 6
+.br
+True if
+.IR expression
+is true.
+.P
+In evaluating these more complex combined expressions, the following
+precedence rules are used:
+.IP " *" 4
+The unary primaries have higher precedence than the algebraic binary
+primaries.
+.IP " *" 4
+The unary primaries have lower precedence than the string binary
+primaries.
+.IP " *" 4
+The unary and binary primaries have higher precedence than the unary
+.IR string
+primary.
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+.BR !
+operator has higher precedence than the
+.BR \(mia
+operator, and the
+.BR \(mia
+operator has higher precedence than the
+.BR \(mio
+operator.
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+.BR \(mia
+and
+.BR \(mio
+operators are left associative.
+.IP " *" 4
+The parentheses can be used to alter the normal precedence and
+associativity.
+.P
+The BSD and System V versions of
+.BR \(mif
+are not the same. The BSD definition was:
+.IP "\fB\(mif\ \fIfile\fR" 10
+True if
+.IR file
+exists and is not a directory.
+.P
+The SVID version (true if the file exists and is a regular file) was
+chosen for this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 because its use is consistent with the
+.BR \(mib ,
+.BR \(mic ,
+.BR \(mid ,
+and
+.BR \(mip
+operands (\c
+.IR file
+exists and is a specific file type).
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mie
+primary, possessing similar functionality to that provided by the C
+shell, was added because it provides the only way for a shell script to
+find out if a file exists without trying to open the file. Since
+implementations are allowed to add additional file types, a portable
+script cannot use:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+test \(mib foo \(mio \(mic foo \(mio \(mid foo \(mio \(mif foo \(mio \(mip foo
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+to find out if
+.BR foo
+is an existing file. On historical BSD systems, the existence of a
+file could be determined by:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+test \(mif foo \(mio \(mid foo
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+but there was no easy way to determine that an existing file was a
+regular file. An early proposal used the KornShell
+.BR \(mia
+primary (with the same meaning), but this was changed to
+.BR \(mie
+because there were concerns about the high probability of humans
+confusing the
+.BR \(mia
+primary with the
+.BR \(mia
+binary operator.
+.P
+The following options were not included in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, although they are
+provided by some implementations. These operands should not be used by
+new implementations for other purposes:
+.IP "\fB\(mik\ \fIfile\fR" 10
+True if
+.IR file
+exists and its sticky bit is set.
+.IP "\fB\(miC\ \fIfile\fR" 10
+True if
+.IR file
+is a contiguous file.
+.IP "\fB\(miV\ \fIfile\fR" 10
+True if
+.IR file
+is a version file.
+.P
+The following option was not included because it was undocumented in
+most implementations, has been removed from some implementations
+(including System V), and the functionality is provided by the shell
+(see
+.IR "Section 2.6.2" ", " "Parameter Expansion".
+.IP "\fB\(mil\ \fIstring\fR" 10
+The length of the string
+.IR string .
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mib ,
+.BR \(mic ,
+.BR \(mig ,
+.BR \(mip ,
+.BR \(miu ,
+and
+.BR \(mix
+operands are derived from the SVID; historical BSD does not provide
+them. The
+.BR \(mik
+operand is derived from System V; historical BSD does not provide it.
+.P
+On historical BSD systems,
+.IR test
+.BR \(miw
+.IR directory
+always returned false because
+.IR test
+tried to open the directory for writing, which always fails.
+.P
+Some additional primaries newly invented or from the KornShell appeared
+in an early proposal as part of the conditional command (\c
+.BR [[\|]] ):
+.IR s1
+.BR >
+.IR s2 ,
+.IR s1
+.BR <
+.IR s2 ,
+.IR str
+.BR =
+.IR pattern ,
+.IR str
+.BR !=
+.IR pattern ,
+.IR f1
+.BR \(mint
+.IR f2 ,
+.IR f1
+.BR \(miot
+.IR f2 ,
+and
+.IR f1
+.BR \(mief
+.IR f2 .
+They were not carried forward into the
+.IR test
+utility when the conditional command was removed from the shell because
+they have not been included in the
+.IR test
+utility built into historical implementations of the
+.IR sh
+utility.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mit
+.IR file_descriptor
+primary is shown with a mandatory argument because the grammar is
+ambiguous if it can be omitted. Historical implementations have allowed
+it to be omitted, providing a default of 1.
+.P
+It is noted that
+.BR '[' 
+is not part of the portable filename character set; however, since it
+is required to be encoded by a single byte, and is part of the portable
+character set, the name of this utility forms a character string across
+all supported locales.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 1.1.1.4" ", " "File Read" ", " "Write" ", " "and Creation",
+.IR "\fIfind\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/time.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/time.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7dc70ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/time.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,320 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TIME "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+time
+\(em time a simple command
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+time \fB[\fR\(mip\fB] \fIutility \fB[\fIargument\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR time
+utility shall invoke the utility named by the
+.IR utility
+operand with arguments supplied as the
+.IR argument
+operands and write a message to standard error that lists timing
+statistics for the utility. The message shall include the following
+information:
+.IP " *" 4
+The elapsed (real) time between invocation of
+.IR utility
+and its termination.
+.IP " *" 4
+The User CPU time, equivalent to the sum of the
+.IR tms_utime
+and
+.IR tms_cutime
+fields returned by the
+\fItimes\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 for the process in which
+.IR utility
+is executed.
+.IP " *" 4
+The System CPU time, equivalent to the sum of the
+.IR tms_stime
+and
+.IR tms_cstime
+fields returned by the
+\fItimes\fR()
+function for the process in which
+.IR utility
+is executed.
+.P
+The precision of the timing shall be no less than the granularity
+defined for the size of the clock tick unit on the system, but the
+results shall be reported in terms of standard time units (for example,
+0.02 seconds, 00:00:00.02, 1m33.75s, 365.21 seconds), not numbers of
+clock ticks.
+.P
+When
+.IR time
+is used as part of a pipeline, the times reported are unspecified,
+except when it is the sole command within a grouping command (see
+.IR "Section 2.9.4.1" ", " "Grouping Commands")
+in that pipeline. For example, the commands on the left are
+unspecified; those on the right report on utilities
+.BR a
+and
+.BR c ,
+respectively:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+time a | b | c    { time a; } | b | c
+a | b | time c    a | b | (time c)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR time
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mip\fP" 10
+Write the timing output to standard error in the format shown in the
+STDERR section.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIutility\fR" 10
+The name of a utility that is to be invoked. If the
+.IR utility
+operand names any of the special built-in utilities in
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities",
+the results are undefined.
+.IP "\fIargument\fR" 10
+Any string to be supplied as an argument when invoking the utility
+named by the
+.IR utility
+operand.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR time :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic and informative messages written to standard
+error.
+.IP "\fILC_NUMERIC\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for numeric formatting.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fIPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the search path that shall be used to locate the utility to
+be invoked; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables".
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used to write the timing statistics. If
+.BR \(mip
+is specified, the following format shall be used in the POSIX locale:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"real %f\enuser %f\ensys %f\en", <\fIreal seconds\fR>, <\fIuser seconds\fR>,
+    <\fIsystem seconds\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where each floating-point number shall be expressed in seconds. The
+precision used may be less than the default six digits of
+.BR %f ,
+but shall be sufficiently precise to accommodate the size of the clock
+tick on the system (for example, if there were 60 clock ticks per
+second, at least two digits shall follow the radix character). The
+number of digits following the radix character shall be no less than
+one, even if this always results in a trailing zero. The implementation
+may append white space and additional information following the format
+shown here. The implementation may also prepend a single empty line
+before the format shown here.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+If the
+.IR utility
+utility is invoked, the exit status of
+.IR time
+shall be the exit status of
+.IR utility ;
+otherwise, the
+.IR time
+utility shall exit with one of the following values:
+.IP "1\(hy125" 8
+An error occurred in the
+.IR time
+utility.
+.IP "\0\0126" 8
+The utility specified by
+.IR utility
+was found but could not be invoked.
+.IP "\0\0127" 8
+The utility specified by
+.IR utility
+could not be found.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR command ,
+.IR env ,
+.IR nice ,
+.IR nohup ,
+.IR time ,
+and
+.IR xargs
+utilities have been specified to use exit code 127 if an error occurs
+so that applications can distinguish ``failure to find a utility'' from
+``invoked utility exited with an error indication''. The value 127 was
+chosen because it is not commonly used for other meanings; most
+utilities use small values for ``normal error conditions'' and the
+values above 128 can be confused with termination due to receipt of a
+signal. The value 126 was chosen in a similar manner to indicate that
+the utility could be found, but not invoked. Some scripts produce
+meaningful error messages differentiating the 126 and 127 cases. The
+distinction between exit codes 126 and 127 is based on KornShell
+practice that uses 127 when all attempts to
+.IR exec
+the utility fail with
+.BR [ENOENT] ,
+and uses 126 when any attempt to
+.IR exec
+the utility fails for any other reason.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+It is frequently desirable to apply
+.IR time
+to pipelines or lists of commands. This can be done by placing
+pipelines and command lists in a single file; this file can then be
+invoked as a utility, and the
+.IR time
+applies to everything in the file.
+.P
+Alternatively, the following command can be used to apply
+.IR time
+to a complex command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+time sh \(mic '\fIcomplex-command-line\fP'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+When the
+.IR time
+utility was originally proposed to be included in the ISO\ POSIX\(hy2:\|1993 standard,
+questions were raised about its suitability for inclusion on
+the grounds that it was not useful for conforming applications,
+specifically:
+.IP " *" 4
+The underlying CPU definitions from the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 are
+vague, so the numeric output could not be compared accurately between
+systems or even between invocations.
+.IP " *" 4
+The creation of portable benchmark programs was outside the scope this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+However,
+.IR time
+does fit in the scope of user portability. Human judgement can be
+applied to the analysis of the output, and it could be very useful in
+hands-on debugging of applications or in providing subjective measures
+of system performance. Hence it has been included in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+The default output format has been left unspecified because historical
+implementations differ greatly in their style of depicting this numeric
+output. The
+.BR \(mip
+option was invented to provide scripts with a common means of obtaining
+this information.
+.P
+In the KornShell,
+.IR time
+is a shell reserved word that can be used to time an entire pipeline,
+rather than just a simple command. The POSIX definition has been
+worded to allow this implementation. Consideration was given to
+invalidating this approach because of the historical model from the C
+shell and System V shell. However, since the System V
+.IR time
+utility historically has not produced accurate results in pipeline
+timing (because the constituent processes are not all owned by the same
+parent process, as allowed by POSIX), it did not seem worthwhile to
+break historical KornShell usage.
+.P
+The term
+.IR utility
+is used, rather than
+.IR command ,
+to highlight the fact that shell compound commands, pipelines, special
+built-ins, and so on, cannot be used directly.
+However,
+.IR utility
+includes user application programs and shell scripts, not just the
+standard utilities.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language",
+.IR "\fIsh\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fItimes\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/times.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/times.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..79cb57a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/times.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TIMES "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+times
+\(em write process times
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+times\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR times
+utility shall write the accumulated user and system times for the shell
+and for all of its child processes, in the following POSIX locale
+format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%dm%fs %dm%fs\en%dm%fs %dm%fs\en", <\fIshell user minutes\fR>,
+    <\fIshell user seconds\fR>, <\fIshell system minutes\fR>,
+    <\fIshell system seconds\fR>, <\fIchildren user minutes\fR>,
+    <\fIchildren user seconds\fR>, <\fIchildren system minutes\fR>,
+    <\fIchildren system seconds\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The four pairs of times shall correspond to the members of the
+.IR <sys/times.h> 
+.BR tms
+structure (defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 13" ", " "Headers")
+as returned by
+\fItimes\fR():
+.IR tms_utime ,
+.IR tms_stime ,
+.IR tms_cutime ,
+and
+.IR tms_cstime ,
+respectively.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+None.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+None.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+Zero.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.LP
+.nf
+\fB$\fP times
+\fB0m0.43s 0m1.11s
+8m44.18s 1m43.23s\fR
+.fi
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+The
+.IR times
+special built-in from the Single UNIX Specification is now required
+for all conforming shells.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_times.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/touch.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/touch.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a9fca6f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/touch.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,646 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TOUCH "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+touch
+\(em change file access and modification times
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+touch \fB[\fR\(miacm\fB] [\fR\(mir \fIref_file\fR|\(mit \fItime\fR|\(mid \fIdate_time\fB] \fIfile\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR touch
+utility shall change the last data modification timestamps, the
+last data access timestamps, or both.
+.P
+The time used can be specified by the
+.BR \(mit
+.IR time
+option-argument, the corresponding
+.IR time
+fields of the file referenced by the
+.BR \(mir
+.IR ref_file
+option-argument, or the
+.BR \(mid
+.IR date_time
+option-argument, as specified in the following sections. If none of
+these are specified,
+.IR touch
+shall use the current time.
+.P
+For each
+.IR file
+operand,
+.IR touch
+shall perform actions equivalent to the following functions defined in
+the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If
+.IR file
+does not exist:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+The
+\fIcreat\fR()
+function is called with the following arguments:
+.RS 4 
+.IP -- 4
+The
+.IR file
+operand is used as the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.IP -- 4
+The value of the bitwise-inclusive OR of S_IRUSR, S_IWUSR,
+S_IRGRP, S_IWGRP, S_IROTH, and S_IWOTH is used as the
+.IR mode
+argument.
+.RE
+.IP " b." 4
+The
+\fIfutimens\fR()
+function is called with the following arguments:
+.RS 4 
+.IP -- 4
+The file descriptor opened in step 1a.
+.IP -- 4
+The access time and the modification time, set as described in the
+OPTIONS section, are used as the first and second elements of the
+.IR times
+array argument, respectively.
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+If
+.IR file
+exists, the
+\fIutimensat\fR()
+function is called with the following arguments:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+The AT_FDCWD special value is used as the
+.IR fd
+argument.
+.IP " b." 4
+The
+.IR file
+operand is used as the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.IP " c." 4
+The access time and the modification time, set as described in the
+OPTIONS section, are used as the first and second elements of the
+.IR times
+array argument, respectively.
+.IP " d." 4
+The
+.IR flag
+argument is set to zero.
+.RE
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR touch
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mia\fP" 10
+Change the access time of
+.IR file .
+Do not change the modification time unless
+.BR \(mim
+is also specified.
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Do not create a specified
+.IR file
+if it does not exist. Do not write any diagnostic messages concerning
+this condition.
+.IP "\fB\(mid\ \fIdate_time\fR" 10
+Use the specified
+.IR date_time
+instead of the current time. The option-argument shall be a string of
+the form:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIYYYY\fR\(mi\fIMM\fR\(mi\fIDD\fRT\fIhh\fR:\fImm\fR:\fISS\fB[\fR.\fIfrac\fB][\fItz\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+or:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIYYYY\fR\(mi\fIMM\fR\(mi\fIDD\fRT\fIhh\fR:\fImm\fR:\fISS\fB[\fR,\fIfrac\fB][\fItz\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where:
+.IP " *" 4
+.IR YYYY
+are at least four decimal digits giving the year.
+.IP " *" 4
+.IR MM ,
+.IR DD ,
+.IR hh ,
+.IR mm ,
+and
+.IR SS
+are as with
+.BR \(mit
+.IR time .
+.IP " *" 4
+\fRT\fR is the time designator, and can be replaced by a single
+<space>.
+.IP " *" 4
+\fR[.\fIfrac\fR]\fR and \fR[,\fIfrac\fR]\fR are either empty, or a
+<period>
+(\c
+.BR '.' )
+or a
+<comma>
+(\c
+.BR ',' )
+respectively, followed by one or more decimal digits, specifying
+a fractional second.
+.IP " *" 4
+\fR[\fItz\fR]\fR is either empty, signifying local time, or the letter
+.BR 'Z' ,
+signifying UTC. If \fR[\fItz\fR]\fR is empty, the resulting time shall
+be affected by the value of the
+.IR TZ
+environment variable.
+.P
+If the resulting time precedes the Epoch, the behavior is
+implementation-defined. If the time cannot be represented as the file's
+timestamp,
+.IR touch
+shall exit immediately with an error status.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mim\fP" 10
+Change the modification time of
+.IR file .
+Do not change the access time unless
+.BR \(mia
+is also specified.
+.IP "\fB\(mir\ \fIref_file\fR" 10
+Use the corresponding time of the file named by the pathname
+.IR ref_file
+instead of the current time.
+.IP "\fB\(mit\ \fItime\fR" 10
+Use the specified
+.IR time
+instead of the current time. The option-argument shall be a decimal
+number of the form:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[[\fICC\fB]\fIYY\fB]\fIMMDDhhmm\fB[\fR.\fISS\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where each two digits represents the following:
+.IP "\fIMM\fR" 8
+The month of the year [01,12].
+.IP "\fIDD\fR" 8
+The day of the month [01,31].
+.IP "\fIhh\fR" 8
+The hour of the day [00,23].
+.IP "\fImm\fR" 8
+The minute of the hour [00,59].
+.IP "\fICC\fR" 8
+The first two digits of the year (the century).
+.IP "\fIYY\fR" 8
+The second two digits of the year.
+.IP "\fISS\fR" 8
+The second of the minute [00,60].
+.P
+Both
+.IR CC
+and
+.IR YY
+shall be optional. If neither is given, the current year shall be
+assumed. If
+.IR YY
+is specified, but
+.IR CC
+is not,
+.IR CC
+shall be derived as follows:
+.TS
+center tab(@) box;
+cB | cB
+c | n.
+If \fIYY\fP is:@\fICC\fP becomes:
+_
+[69,99]@19
+[00,68]@20
+.TE
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+It is expected that in a future version of this standard the default
+century inferred from a 2-digit year will change. (This would apply
+to all commands accepting a 2-digit year as input.)
+.P
+.P
+The resulting time shall be affected by the value of the
+.IR TZ
+environment variable. If the resulting time value precedes the Epoch,
+the behavior is implementation-defined. If the time is out of range for
+the file's timestamp,
+.IR touch
+shall exit immediately with an error status. The range of valid times
+past the Epoch is implementation-defined, but it shall extend to at
+least the time 0 hours, 0 minutes, 0 seconds, January 1, 2038,
+Coordinated Universal Time. Some implementations may not be able to
+represent dates beyond January 18, 2038, because they use
+.BR "signed int"
+as a time holder.
+.P
+The range for
+.IR SS
+is [00,60] rather than [00,59] because of leap seconds. If
+.IR SS
+is 60, and the resulting time, as affected by the
+.IR TZ
+environment variable, does not refer to a leap second, the resulting
+time shall be one second after a time where
+.IR SS
+is 59. If
+.IR SS
+is not given a value, it is assumed to be zero.
+.RE
+.P
+If neither the
+.BR \(mia
+nor
+.BR \(mim
+options were specified,
+.IR touch
+shall behave as if both the
+.BR \(mia
+and
+.BR \(mim
+options were specified.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file whose times shall be modified.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR touch :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fITZ\fP" 10
+Determine the timezone to be used for interpreting the
+.IR time
+option-argument. If
+.IR TZ
+is unset or null, an unspecified default timezone shall be used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+The utility executed successfully and all requested changes were made.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The interpretation of time is taken to be
+.IR "seconds since the Epoch"
+(see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.15" ", " "Seconds Since the Epoch").
+It should be noted that implementations conforming to the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 do
+not take leap seconds into account when computing seconds since the
+Epoch. When
+.IR SS =60
+is used, the resulting time always refers to 1 plus
+.IR "seconds since the Epoch"
+for a time when
+.IR SS =59.
+.P
+Although the
+.BR \(mit
+.IR time
+option-argument specifies values in 1969, the access time and
+modification time fields are defined in terms of seconds since the
+Epoch (00:00:00 on 1 January 1970 UTC). Therefore, depending on the
+value of
+.IR TZ
+when
+.IR touch
+is run, there is never more than a few valid hours in 1969 and there
+need not be any valid times in 1969.
+.P
+One ambiguous situation occurs if
+.BR \(mit
+.IR time
+is not specified,
+.BR \(mir
+.IR ref_file
+is not specified, and the first operand is an eight or ten-digit
+decimal number. A portable script can avoid this problem by using:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+touch \(mi\|\(mi file
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+or:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+touch ./file
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+in this case.
+.P
+If the
+.IR T
+time designator is replaced by a
+<space>
+for the
+.BR \(mid
+.IR date_time
+option-argument, the
+<space>
+must be quoted to prevent the shell from splitting the argument.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Create or update a file called
+.BR dwc ;
+the resulting file has both the last data modification and last data
+access timestamps set to November 12, 2007 at 10:15:30 local time:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+touch \(mid 2007-11-12T10:15:30 dwc
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Create or update a file called
+.BR nick ;
+the resulting file has both the last data modification and last data
+access timestamps set to November 12, 2007 at 10:15:30 UTC:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+touch \(mid 2007-11-12T10:15:30Z nick
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Create or update a file called
+.BR gwc ;
+the resulting file has both the last data modification and last data
+access timestamps set to November 12, 2007 at 10:15:30 local time with
+a fractional second timestamp of .002 seconds:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+touch \(mid 2007-11-12T10:15:30,002 gwc
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Create or update a file called
+.BR ajosey ;
+the resulting file has both the last data modification and last data
+access timestamps set to November 12, 2007 at 10:15:30 UTC with a
+fractional second timestamp of .002 seconds:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+touch \(mid "2007-11-12 10:15:30.002Z" ajosey
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Create or update a file called
+.BR cathy ;
+the resulting file has both the last data modification and last data
+access timestamps set to November 12, 2007 at 10:15:00 local time:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+touch \(mit 200711121015 cathy
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Create or update a file called
+.BR drepper ;
+the resulting file has both the last data modification and last data
+access timestamps set to November 12, 2007 at 10:15:30 local time:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+touch \(mit 200711121015.30 drepper
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Create or update a file called
+.BR ebb9 ;
+the resulting file has both the last data modification and last data
+access timestamps set to November 12, 2007 at 10:15:30 local time:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+touch \(mit 0711121015.30 ebb9
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Create or update a file called
+.BR eggert ;
+the resulting file has the last data access timestamp set to the
+corresponding time of the file named
+.BR mark
+instead of the current time. If the file exists, the last data
+modification time is not changed:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+touch \(mia \(mir mark eggert
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The functionality of
+.IR touch
+is described almost entirely through references to functions in
+the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. In this way, there is no duplication of effort required for
+describing such side-effects as the relationship of user IDs to the
+user database, permissions, and so on.
+.P
+There are some significant differences between the
+.IR touch
+utility in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 and those in System V and BSD systems. They are
+upwards-compatible for historical applications from both
+implementations:
+.IP " 1." 4
+In System V, an ambiguity exists when a pathname that is a decimal
+number leads the operands; it is treated as a time value. In BSD, no
+.IR time
+value is allowed; files may only be
+.IR touch ed
+to the current time. The
+.BR \(mit
+.IR time
+construct solves these problems for future conforming applications (note
+that the
+.BR \(mit
+option is not historical practice).
+.IP " 2." 4
+The inclusion of the century digits,
+.IR CC ,
+is also new. Note that a ten-digit
+.IR time
+value is treated as if
+.IR YY ,
+and not
+.IR CC ,
+were specified. The caveat about the range of dates following the
+Epoch was included as recognition that some implementations are not
+able to represent dates beyond 18 January 2038 because they use
+.BR "signed int"
+as a time holder.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mir
+option was added because several comments requested this capability.
+This option was named
+.BR \(mif
+in an early proposal, but was changed because the
+.BR \(mif
+option is used in the BSD version of
+.IR touch
+with a different meaning.
+.P
+At least one historical implementation of
+.IR touch
+incremented the exit code if
+.BR \(mic
+was specified and the file did not exist. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires exit status
+zero if no errors occur.
+.P
+In previous version of the standard, if at least two operands are
+specified, and the first operand is an eight or ten-digit decimal
+integer, the first operand was assumed to be a
+.IR date_time
+operand. This usage was removed in this version of the standard since
+it had been marked obsolescent previously.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mid
+.IR date_time
+format is an ISO\ 8601:\|2004 standard complete representation of date and time extended
+format with an optional decimal point or
+<comma>
+followed by a string of digits following the seconds portion to specify
+fractions of a second. It is not necessary to recognize
+.BR \(dq[+/-]hh:mm\(dq 
+and
+.BR \(dq[+/-]hh\(dq 
+to specify timezones other than local time and UTC. The
+.IR T
+time designator in the ISO\ 8601:\|2004 standard extended format may be replaced by
+<space>.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIdate\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.15" ", " "Seconds Since the Epoch",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIcreat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfutimens\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIutime\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/tput.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/tput.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0ec6ad2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/tput.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,222 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TPUT "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tput
+\(em change terminal characteristics
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+tput \fB[\fR\(miT \fItype\fB] \fIoperand\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR tput
+utility shall display terminal-dependent information. The manner in
+which this information is retrieved is unspecified. The information
+displayed shall clear the terminal screen, initialize the user's
+terminal, or reset the user's terminal, depending on the operand
+given. The exact consequences of displaying this information are
+unspecified.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR tput
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(miT\ \fItype\fR" 10
+Indicate the type of terminal. If this option is not supplied and the
+.IR TERM
+variable is unset or null, an unspecified default terminal type shall
+be used. The setting of
+.IR type
+shall take precedence over the value in
+.IR TERM .
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following strings shall be supported as operands by the
+implementation in the POSIX locale:
+.IP "\fBclear\fR" 10
+Display the clear-screen sequence.
+.IP "\fBinit\fR" 10
+Display the sequence that initializes the user's terminal in an
+implementation-defined manner.
+.IP "\fBreset\fR" 10
+Display the sequence that resets the user's terminal in an
+implementation-defined manner.
+.P
+If a terminal does not support any of the operations described by these
+operands, this shall not be considered an error condition.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR tput :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fITERM\fP" 10
+Determine the terminal type. If this variable is unset or null, and if
+the
+.BR \(miT
+option is not specified, an unspecified default terminal type shall be
+used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+If standard output is a terminal device, it may be used for writing the
+appropriate sequence to clear the screen or reset or initialize the
+terminal. If standard output is not a terminal device, undefined
+results occur.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+The requested string was written successfully.
+.IP "\01" 6
+Unspecified.
+.IP "\02" 6
+Usage error.
+.IP "\03" 6
+No information is available about the specified terminal type.
+.IP "\04" 6
+The specified operand is invalid.
+.IP >4 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+If one of the operands is not available for the terminal,
+.IR tput
+continues processing the remaining operands.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The difference between resetting and initializing a terminal is left
+unspecified, as they vary greatly based on hardware types. In general,
+resetting is a more severe action.
+.P
+Some terminals use control characters to perform the stated functions,
+and on such terminals it might make sense to use
+.IR tput
+to store the initialization strings in a file or environment variable
+for later use. However, because other terminals might rely on system
+calls to do this work, the standard output cannot be used in a portable
+manner, such as the following non-portable constructs:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ClearVar=`tput clear`
+tput reset | mailx \(mis "Wake Up" ddg
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+Initialize the terminal according to the type of terminal in the
+environmental variable
+.IR TERM .
+This command can be included in a
+.BR .profile
+file.
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+tput init
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+Reset a 450 terminal.
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+tput \(miT 450 reset
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The list of operands was reduced to a minimum for the following
+reasons:
+.IP " *" 4
+The only features chosen were those that were likely to be used by
+human users interacting with a terminal.
+.IP " *" 4
+Specifying the full
+.IR terminfo
+set was not considered desirable, but the standard developers did not
+want to select among operands.
+.IP " *" 4
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not attempt to provide applications with sophisticated
+terminal handling capabilities, as that falls outside of its assigned
+scope and intersects with the responsibilities of other standards
+bodies.
+.P
+The difference between resetting and initializing a terminal is left
+unspecified as this varies greatly based on hardware types. In
+general, resetting is a more severe action.
+.P
+The exit status of 1 is historically reserved for finding out if a
+Boolean operand is not set. Although the operands were reduced to a
+minimum, the exit status of 1 should still be reserved for the Boolean
+operands, for those sites that wish to support them.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstty\fR\^",
+.IR "\fItabs\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/tr.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/tr.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8706a0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/tr.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,699 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TR "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tr
+\(em translate characters
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+tr \fB[\fR\(mic|\(miC\fB] [\fR\(mis\fB] \fIstring1 string2\fR
+.P
+tr \(mis \fB[\fR\(mic|\(miC\fB] \fIstring1\fR
+.P
+tr \(mid \fB[\fR\(mic|\(miC\fB] \fIstring1\fR
+.P
+tr \(mids \fB[\fR\(mic|\(miC\fB] \fIstring1 string2\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR tr
+utility shall copy the standard input to the standard output with
+substitution or deletion of selected characters. The options specified
+and the
+.IR string1
+and
+.IR string2
+operands shall control translations that occur while copying characters
+and single-character collating elements.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR tr
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Complement the set of values specified by
+.IR string1 .
+See the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.IP "\fB\(miC\fP" 10
+Complement the set of characters specified by
+.IR string1 .
+See the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.IP "\fB\(mid\fP" 10
+Delete all occurrences of input characters that are specified by
+.IR string1 .
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Replace instances of repeated characters with a single character, as
+described in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIstring1\fR,\ \fIstring2\fR" 10
+.br
+Translation control strings. Each string shall represent a set of
+characters to be converted into an array of characters used for the
+translation. For a detailed description of how the strings are
+interpreted, see the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input can be any type of file.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR tr :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the behavior of range expressions and
+equivalence classes.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments) and the behavior of character
+classes.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The
+.IR tr
+output shall be identical to the input, with the exception of the
+specified transformations.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+The operands
+.IR string1
+and
+.IR string2
+(if specified) define two arrays of characters. The constructs in the
+following list can be used to specify characters or single-character
+collating elements. If any of the constructs result in multi-character
+collating elements,
+.IR tr
+shall exclude, without a diagnostic, those multi-character elements
+from the resulting array.
+.IP "\fIcharacter\fR" 10
+Any character not described by one of the conventions below shall
+represent itself.
+.IP "\e\fIoctal\fR" 10
+Octal sequences can be used to represent characters with specific coded
+values. An octal sequence shall consist of a
+<backslash>
+followed by the longest sequence of one, two, or three-octal-digit
+characters (01234567). The sequence shall cause the value whose encoding
+is represented by the one, two, or three-digit octal integer to be placed
+into the array. Multi-byte characters require multiple, concatenated
+escape sequences of this type, including the leading
+<backslash>
+for each byte.
+.IP "\e\fIcharacter\fR" 10
+The
+<backslash>-escape
+sequences in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Table 5-1" ", " "Escape Sequences and Associated Actions"
+(\c
+.BR '\e\e' ,
+.BR '\ea' ,
+.BR '\eb' ,
+.BR '\ef' ,
+.BR '\en' ,
+.BR '\er' ,
+.BR '\et' ,
+.BR '\ev' )
+shall be supported. The results of using any other character, other
+than an octal digit, following the
+<backslash>
+are unspecified. Also, if there is no character following the
+<backslash>,
+the results are unspecified.
+.IP "\fIc\fR\(mi\fIc\fR" 10
+In the POSIX locale, this construct shall represent the range of
+collating elements between the range endpoints (as long as neither
+endpoint is an octal sequence of the form \e\fIoctal\fP), inclusive, as
+defined by the collation sequence. The characters or collating elements
+in the range shall be placed in the array in ascending collation
+sequence. If the second endpoint precedes the starting endpoint in the
+collation sequence, it is unspecified whether the range of collating
+elements is empty, or this construct is treated as invalid. In locales
+other than the POSIX locale, this construct has unspecified behavior.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If either or both of the range endpoints are octal sequences of the
+form \e\fIoctal\fP, this shall represent the range of specific coded
+values between the two range endpoints, inclusive.
+.RE
+.IP "[:\fIclass\fR:]" 10
+Represents all characters belonging to the defined character class, as
+defined by the current setting of the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+locale category. The following character class names shall be accepted
+when specified in
+.IR string1 :
+.TS
+tab(@);
+lB lB lB lB lB lB.
+alnum@blank@digit@lower@punct@upper
+alpha@cntrl@graph@print@space@xdigit
+.TE
+.RS 10 
+.P
+In addition, character class expressions of the form [:\c
+.IR name :]
+shall be recognized in those locales where the
+.IR name
+keyword has been given a
+.BR charclass
+definition in the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category.
+.P
+When both the
+.BR \(mid
+and
+.BR \(mis
+options are specified, any of the character class names shall be
+accepted in
+.IR string2 .
+Otherwise, only character class names
+.BR lower
+or
+.BR upper
+are valid in
+.IR string2
+and then only if the corresponding character class (\c
+.BR upper
+and
+.BR lower ,
+respectively) is specified in the same relative position in
+.IR string1 .
+Such a specification shall be interpreted as a request for case
+conversion. When [:\c
+.IR lower :]
+appears in
+.IR string1
+and [:\c
+.IR upper :]
+appears in
+.IR string2 ,
+the arrays shall contain the characters from the
+.BR toupper
+mapping in the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category of the current locale. When [:\c
+.IR upper :]
+appears in
+.IR string1
+and [:\c
+.IR lower :]
+appears in
+.IR string2 ,
+the arrays shall contain the characters from the
+.BR tolower
+mapping in the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category of the current locale. The first character from each mapping
+pair shall be in the array for
+.IR string1
+and the second character from each mapping pair shall be in the array
+for
+.IR string2
+in the same relative position.
+.P
+Except for case conversion, the characters specified by a character
+class expression shall be placed in the array in an unspecified order.
+.P
+If the name specified for
+.IR class
+does not define a valid character class in the current locale, the
+behavior is undefined.
+.RE
+.IP "[=\fIequiv\fR=]" 10
+Represents all characters or collating elements belonging to the same
+equivalence class as
+.IR equiv ,
+as defined by the current setting of the
+.IR LC_COLLATE
+locale category. An equivalence class expression shall be allowed only
+in
+.IR string1 ,
+or in
+.IR string2
+when it is being used by the combined
+.BR \(mid
+and
+.BR \(mis
+options. The characters belonging to the equivalence class shall be
+placed in the array in an unspecified order.
+.IP "[\fIx\fR*\fIn\fR]" 10
+Represents
+.IR n
+repeated occurrences of the character
+.IR x .
+Because this expression is used to map multiple characters to one, it
+is only valid when it occurs in
+.IR string2 .
+If
+.IR n
+is omitted or is zero, it shall be interpreted as large enough to
+extend the
+.IR string2 -based
+sequence to the length of the
+.IR string1 -based
+sequence. If
+.IR n
+has a leading zero, it shall be interpreted as an octal value.
+Otherwise, it shall be interpreted as a decimal value.
+.P
+When the
+.BR \(mid
+option is not specified:
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR string2
+is present, each input character found in the array specified by
+.IR string1
+shall be replaced by the character in the same relative position in the
+array specified by
+.IR string2 .
+If the array specified by
+.IR string2
+is shorter that the one specified by
+.IR string1 ,
+or if a character occurs more than once in
+.IR string1 ,
+the results are unspecified.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the
+.BR \(miC
+option is specified, the complements of the characters specified by
+.IR string1
+(the set of all characters in the current character set, as defined by
+the current setting of
+.IR LC_CTYPE ,
+except for those actually specified in the
+.IR string1
+operand) shall be placed in the array in ascending collation sequence,
+as defined by the current setting of
+.IR LC_COLLATE .
+.IP " *" 4
+If the
+.BR \(mic
+option is specified, the complement of the values specified by
+.IR string1
+shall be placed in the array in ascending order by binary value.
+.IP " *" 4
+Because the order in which characters specified by character class
+expressions or equivalence class expressions is undefined, such
+expressions should only be used if the intent is to map several
+characters into one. An exception is case conversion, as described
+previously.
+.P
+When the
+.BR \(mid
+option is specified:
+.IP " *" 4
+Input characters found in the array specified by
+.IR string1
+shall be deleted.
+.IP " *" 4
+When the
+.BR \(miC
+option is specified with
+.BR \(mid ,
+all characters except those specified by
+.IR string1
+shall be deleted. The contents of
+.IR string2
+are ignored, unless the
+.BR \(mis
+option is also specified.
+.IP " *" 4
+When the
+.BR \(mic
+option is specified with
+.BR \(mid ,
+all values except those specified by
+.IR string1
+shall be deleted. The contents of
+.IR string2
+shall be ignored, unless the
+.BR \(mis
+option is also specified.
+.IP " *" 4
+The same string cannot be used for both the
+.BR \(mid
+and the
+.BR \(mis
+option; when both options are specified, both
+.IR string1
+(used for deletion) and
+.IR string2
+(used for squeezing) shall be required.
+.P
+When the
+.BR \(mis
+option is specified, after any deletions or translations have taken
+place, repeated sequences of the same character shall be replaced by
+one occurrence of the same character, if the character is found in the
+array specified by the last operand. If the last operand contains a
+character class, such as the following example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+tr \(mis '[:space:]'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+the last operand's array shall contain all of the characters in that
+character class. However, in a case conversion, as described
+previously, such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+tr \(mis '[:upper:]' '[:lower:]'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+the last operand's array shall contain only those characters defined as
+the second characters in each of the
+.BR toupper
+or
+.BR tolower
+character pairs, as appropriate.
+.P
+An empty string used for
+.IR string1
+or
+.IR string2
+produces undefined results.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+All input was processed successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If necessary,
+.IR string1
+and
+.IR string2
+can be quoted to avoid pattern matching by the shell.
+.P
+If an ordinary digit (representing itself) is to follow an octal
+sequence, the octal sequence must use the full three digits to avoid
+ambiguity.
+.P
+When
+.IR string2
+is shorter than
+.IR string1 ,
+a difference results between historical System\ V and BSD systems. A
+BSD system pads
+.IR string2
+with the last character found in
+.IR string2 .
+Thus, it is possible to do the following:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+tr 0123456789 d
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+which would translate all digits to the letter
+.BR 'd' .
+Since this area is specifically unspecified in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, both the BSD and
+System\ V behaviors are allowed, but a conforming application cannot rely
+on the BSD behavior. It would have to code the example in the
+following way:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+tr 0123456789 '[d*]'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+It should be noted that, despite similarities in appearance, the string
+operands used by
+.IR tr
+are not regular expressions.
+.P
+Unlike some historical implementations, this definition of the
+.IR tr
+utility correctly processes NUL characters in its input stream. NUL
+characters can be stripped by using:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+tr \(mid '\e000'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+The following example creates a list of all words in
+.BR file1
+one per line in
+.BR file2 ,
+where a word is taken to be a maximal string of letters.
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+tr \(mics "[:alpha:]" "[\en*]" <file1 >file2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+The next example translates all lowercase characters in
+.BR file1
+to uppercase and writes the results to standard output.
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+tr "[:lower:]" "[:upper:]" <file1
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+This example uses an equivalence class to identify accented variants of
+the base character
+.BR 'e' 
+in
+.BR file1 ,
+which are stripped of diacritical marks and written to
+.BR file2 .
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+tr "[=e=]" "[e*]" <file1 >file2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+In some early proposals, an explicit option
+.BR \(min
+was added to disable the historical behavior of stripping NUL
+characters from the input. It was considered that automatically
+stripping NUL characters from the input was not correct functionality.
+However, the removal of
+.BR \(min
+in a later proposal does not remove the requirement that
+.IR tr
+correctly process NUL characters in its input stream. NUL characters
+can be stripped by using
+.IR tr
+.BR \(mid
+\&'\e000'.
+.P
+Historical implementations of
+.IR tr
+differ widely in syntax and behavior. For example, the BSD version has
+not needed the bracket characters for the repetition sequence. The
+.IR tr
+utility syntax is based more closely on the System V and XPG3 model
+while attempting to accommodate historical BSD implementations. In the
+case of the short
+.IR string2
+padding, the decision was to unspecify the behavior and preserve System
+V and XPG3 scripts, which might find difficulty with the BSD method.
+The assumption was made that BSD users of
+.IR tr
+have to make accommodations to meet the syntax defined here. Since it
+is possible to use the repetition sequence to duplicate the desired
+behavior, whereas there is no simple way to achieve the System V
+method, this was the correct, if not desirable, approach.
+.P
+The use of octal values to specify control characters, while having
+historical precedents, is not portable. The introduction of escape
+sequences for control characters should provide the necessary
+portability. It is recognized that this may cause some historical
+scripts to break.
+.P
+An early proposal included support for multi-character collating elements.
+It was pointed out that, while
+.IR tr
+does employ some syntactical elements from REs, the aim of
+.IR tr
+is quite different; ranges, for example, do not have a similar meaning
+(``any of the chars in the range matches'', \fIversus\fP ``translate
+each character in the range to the output counterpart''). As a result,
+the previously included support for multi-character collating elements
+has been removed. What remains are ranges in current collation order
+(to support, for example, accented characters), character classes, and
+equivalence classes.
+.P
+In XPG3 the [:\c
+.IR class :]
+and [=\c
+.IR equiv =]
+conventions are shown with double brackets, as in RE syntax. However,
+.IR tr
+does not implement RE principles; it just borrows part of the syntax.
+Consequently, [:\c
+.IR class :]
+and [=\c
+.IR equiv =]
+should be regarded as syntactical elements on a par with [\c
+.IR x *\c
+.IR n ],
+which is not an RE bracket expression.
+.P
+The standard developers will consider changes to
+.IR tr
+that allow it to translate characters between different character
+encodings, or they will consider providing a new utility to accomplish
+this.
+.P
+On historical System V systems, a range expression requires enclosing
+square-brackets, such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+tr '[a-z]' '[A-Z]'
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+However, BSD-based systems did not require the brackets, and this
+convention is used here to avoid breaking large numbers of BSD scripts:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+tr a-z A-Z
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The preceding System V script will continue to work because the
+brackets, treated as regular characters, are translated to themselves.
+However, any System V script that relied on
+.BR \(dqa\(hyz\(dq 
+representing the three characters
+.BR 'a' ,
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+and
+.BR 'z' 
+have to be rewritten as
+.BR \(dqaz\(mi\(dq .
+.P
+The ISO\ POSIX\(hy2:\|1993 standard had a
+.BR \(mic
+option that behaved similarly to the
+.BR \(miC
+option, but did not supply functionality equivalent to the
+.BR \(mic
+option specified in POSIX.1\(hy2008. This meant that historical practice of being
+able to specify
+.IR tr
+.BR \(micd \e000\(mi\e177
+(which would delete all bytes with the top bit set) would have no
+effect because, in the C locale, bytes with the values octal 200 to
+octal 377 are not characters.
+.P
+The earlier version also said that octal sequences referred to
+collating elements and could be placed adjacent to each other to
+specify multi-byte characters. However, it was noted that this caused
+ambiguities because
+.IR tr
+would not be able to tell whether adjacent octal sequences were
+intending to specify multi-byte characters or multiple single byte
+characters. POSIX.1\(hy2008 specifies that octal sequences always refer to single
+byte binary values when used to specify an endpoint of a range of
+collating elements.
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard allowed for implementations with
+bytes other than eight bits, but this has been modified in this
+version.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsed\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Table 5-1" ", " "Escape Sequences and Associated Actions",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/trap.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/trap.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..264ce1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/trap.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,362 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TRAP "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+trap
+\(em trap signals
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+trap \fIn \fB[\fIcondition\fR...\fB]\fR
+trap \fB[\fIaction condition\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+If the first operand is an unsigned decimal integer, the shell shall
+treat all operands as conditions, and shall reset each condition to
+the default value. Otherwise, if there are operands, the first is
+treated as an action and the remaining as conditions.
+.P
+If
+.IR action
+is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the shell shall reset each
+.IR condition
+to the default value. If
+.IR action
+is null (\c
+.BR \(dq\^\(dq ),
+the shell shall ignore each specified
+.IR condition
+if it arises. Otherwise, the argument
+.IR action
+shall be read and executed by the shell when one of the corresponding
+conditions arises. The action of
+.IR trap
+shall override a previous action (either default action or one
+explicitly set). The value of
+.BR \(dq$?\(dq 
+after the
+.IR trap
+action completes shall be the value it had before
+.IR trap
+was invoked.
+.P
+The condition can be EXIT, 0 (equivalent to EXIT), or a signal
+specified using a symbolic name, without the SIG prefix, as listed in
+the tables of signal names in the
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header defined in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 13" ", " "Headers";
+for example, HUP, INT, QUIT, TERM. Implementations may permit names with
+the SIG prefix or ignore case in signal names as an extension. Setting
+a trap for SIGKILL or SIGSTOP produces undefined results.
+.P
+The environment in which the shell executes a
+.IR trap
+on EXIT shall be identical to the environment immediately after the
+last command executed before the
+.IR trap
+on EXIT was taken.
+.P
+Each time
+.IR trap
+is invoked, the
+.IR action
+argument shall be processed in a manner equivalent to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+eval \fIaction\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Signals that were ignored on entry to a non-interactive shell cannot be
+trapped or reset, although no error need be reported when attempting to
+do so. An interactive shell may reset or catch signals ignored on
+entry. Traps shall remain in place for a given shell until explicitly
+changed with another
+.IR trap
+command.
+.P
+When a subshell is entered, traps that are not being ignored shall be
+set to the default actions, except in the case of a command substitution
+containing only a single
+.IR trap
+command, when the traps need not be altered. Implementations may check
+for this case using only lexical analysis; for example, if
+.IR `trap`
+and
+.IR "$( trap -- )"
+do not alter the traps in the subshell, cases such as assigning
+.IR var=trap
+and then using
+.IR $($var)
+may still alter them. This does not imply that the
+.IR trap
+command cannot be used within the subshell to set new traps.
+.P
+The
+.IR trap
+command with no operands shall write to standard output a list of commands
+associated with each condition. If the command is executed in a subshell,
+the implementation does not perform the optional check described above
+for a command substitution containing only a single
+.IR trap
+command, and no
+.IR trap
+commands with operands have been executed since entry to the subshell,
+the list shall contain the commands that were associated with each
+condition immediately before the subshell environment was entered.
+Otherwise, the list shall contain the commands currently associated with
+each condition. The format shall be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"trap \(mi\|\(mi %s %s ...\en", <\fIaction\fR>, <\fIcondition\fR> ...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The shell shall format the output, including the proper use of quoting,
+so that it is suitable for reinput to the shell as commands that
+achieve the same trapping results. For example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+save_traps=$(trap)
+\&...
+eval "$save_traps"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+XSI-conformant systems also allow numeric signal numbers for the
+conditions corresponding to the following signal names:
+.IP 1 6
+SIGHUP
+.IP 2 6
+SIGINT
+.IP 3 6
+SIGQUIT
+.IP 6 6
+SIGABRT
+.IP 9 6
+SIGKILL
+.IP 14 6
+SIGALRM
+.IP 15 6
+SIGTERM
+.P
+The
+.IR trap
+special built-in shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+None.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+If the trap name
+or number
+is invalid, a non-zero exit status shall be returned; otherwise, zero
+shall be returned. For both interactive and non-interactive shells,
+invalid signal names
+or numbers
+shall not be considered a syntax error and do not cause the shell to
+abort.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Write out a list of all traps and actions:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+trap
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Set a trap so the
+.IR logout
+utility in the directory referred to by the
+.IR HOME
+environment variable executes when the shell terminates:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+trap '"$HOME"/logout' EXIT
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+or:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+trap '"$HOME"/logout' 0
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Unset traps on INT, QUIT, TERM, and EXIT:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+trap \(mi INT QUIT TERM EXIT
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+Implementations may permit lowercase signal names as an extension.
+Implementations may also accept the names with the SIG prefix; no known
+historical shell does so. The
+.IR trap
+and
+.IR kill
+utilities in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 are now consistent in their omission of the SIG
+prefix for signal names. Some
+.IR kill
+implementations do not allow the prefix, and
+.IR kill
+.BR \(mil
+lists the signals without prefixes.
+.P
+Trapping SIGKILL or SIGSTOP is syntactically accepted by some
+historical implementations, but it has no effect. Portable POSIX
+applications cannot attempt to trap these signals.
+.P
+The output format is not historical practice. Since the output of
+historical
+.IR trap
+commands is not portable (because numeric signal values are not
+portable) and had to change to become so, an opportunity was taken to
+format the output in a way that a shell script could use to save and
+then later reuse a trap if it wanted.
+.P
+The KornShell uses an
+.BR ERR
+trap that is triggered whenever
+.IR set
+.BR \(mie
+would cause an exit. This is allowable as an extension, but was not
+mandated, as other shells have not used it.
+.P
+The text about the environment for the EXIT trap invalidates the
+behavior of some historical versions of interactive shells which, for
+example, close the standard input before executing a trap on 0. For
+example, in some historical interactive shell sessions the following
+trap on 0 would always print
+.BR \(dq\(mi\|\(mi\(dq :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+trap 'read foo; echo "\(mi$foo\(mi"' 0
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+trap 'eval " $cmd"' 0
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+causes the contents of the shell variable
+.IR cmd
+to be executed as a command when the shell exits. Using:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+trap '$cmd' 0
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+does not work correctly if
+.IR cmd
+contains any special characters such as quoting or redirections. Using:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+trap " $cmd" 0
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+also works (the leading
+<space>
+character protects against unlikely cases where
+.IR cmd
+is a decimal integer or begins with
+.BR '\(mi' ),
+but it expands the
+.IR cmd
+variable when the
+.IR trap
+command is executed, not when the exit action is executed.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/true.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/true.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..99c5fdd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/true.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TRUE "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+true
+\(em return true value
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+true
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR true
+utility shall return with exit code zero.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+None.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+None.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+Not used.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+Zero.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+None.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+This utility is typically used in shell scripts, as shown in the
+EXAMPLES section. The special built-in utility
+.BR :
+is sometimes more efficient than
+.IR true .
+.SH EXAMPLES
+This command is executed forever:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+while true
+do
+    command
+done
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR true
+utility has been retained in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, even though the shell special
+built-in
+.BR :
+provides similar functionality, because
+.IR true
+is widely used in historical scripts and is less cryptic to novice
+script readers.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.9" ", " "Shell Commands",
+.IR "\fIfalse\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/tsort.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/tsort.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a1519f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/tsort.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TSORT "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tsort
+\(em topological sort
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+tsort \fB[\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR tsort
+utility shall write to standard output a totally ordered list of items
+consistent with a partial ordering of items contained in the input.
+.P
+The application shall ensure that the input consists of pairs of items
+(non-empty strings) separated by
+<blank>
+characters. Pairs of different items indicate ordering. Pairs of
+identical items indicate presence, but not ordering.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a text file to order. If no
+.IR file
+operand is given, the standard input shall be used.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used if no
+.IR file
+operand is specified, and shall be used if the
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' 
+and the implementation treats the
+.BR '\(mi' 
+as meaning standard input.
+Otherwise, the standard input shall not be used.
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input file shall be a text file.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR tsort :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall be a text file consisting of the order list
+produced from the partially ordered input.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR LC_COLLATE
+variable need not affect the actions of
+.IR tsort .
+The output ordering is not lexicographic, but depends on the pairs of
+items given as input.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+tsort <<EOF
+a b c c d e
+g g
+f g e f
+h h
+EOF
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+produces the output:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fBa
+b
+c
+d
+e
+f
+g
+h\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/tty.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/tty.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1148f9d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/tty.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TTY "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tty
+\(em return user's terminal name
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+tty
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR tty
+utility shall write to the standard output the name of the terminal
+that is open as standard input. The name that is used shall be
+equivalent to the string that would be returned by the
+\fIttyname\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR tty
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.SH OPERANDS
+None.
+.SH STDIN
+While no input is read from standard input, standard input shall be
+examined to determine whether or not it is a terminal, and, if so, to
+determine the name of the terminal.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR tty :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+If standard input is a terminal device, a pathname of the terminal as
+specified by the
+\fIttyname\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 shall be written in the following
+format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIterminal name\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Otherwise, a message shall be written indicating that standard input is
+not connected to a terminal. In the POSIX locale, the
+.IR tty
+utility shall use the format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"not a tty\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Standard input is a terminal.
+.IP "\01" 6
+Standard input is not a terminal.
+.IP >1 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+This utility checks the status of the file open as standard input
+against that of an implementation-defined set of files. It is possible
+that no match can be found, or that the match found need not be the
+same file as that which was opened for standard input (although they
+are the same device).
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIisatty\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIttyname\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/type.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/type.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d1f3d69
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/type.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TYPE "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+type
+\(em write a description of command type
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+type \fIname\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR type
+utility shall indicate how each argument would be interpreted if used
+as a command name.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIname\fR" 10
+A name to be interpreted.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR type :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fIPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of
+.IR name ,
+as described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables".
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output of
+.IR type
+contains information about each operand in an unspecified format. The
+information provided typically identifies the operand as a shell
+built-in, function, alias, or keyword, and where applicable, may
+display the operand's pathname.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since
+.IR type
+must be aware of the contents of the current shell execution
+environment (such as the lists of commands, functions, and built-ins
+processed by
+.IR hash ),
+it is always provided as a shell regular built-in. If it is called in
+a separate utility execution environment, such as one of the
+following:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+nohup type writer
+find . \(mitype f | xargs type
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+it might not produce accurate results.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcommand\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIhash\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ulimit.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ulimit.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f14b213
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/ulimit.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ULIMIT "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ulimit
+\(em set or report file size limit
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+ulimit \fB[\fR\(mif\fB] [\fIblocks\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR ulimit
+utility shall set or report the file-size writing limit imposed on
+files written by the shell and its child processes (files of any size
+may be read). Only a process with appropriate privileges can increase
+the limit.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR ulimit
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mif\fP" 10
+Set (or report, if no
+.IR blocks
+operand is present), the file size limit in blocks. The
+.BR \(mif
+option shall also be the default case.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIblocks\fR" 10
+The number of 512-byte blocks to use as the new file size limit.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR ulimit :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall be used when no
+.IR blocks
+operand is present. If the current number of blocks is limited, the
+number of blocks in the current limit shall be written in the following
+format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d\en", <\fInumber of 512-byte blocks\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If there is no current limit on the number of blocks, in the POSIX
+locale the following format shall be used:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"unlimited\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+A request for a higher limit was rejected or an error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since
+.IR ulimit
+affects the current shell execution environment, it is always provided
+as a shell regular built-in. If it is called in a separate utility
+execution environment, such as one of the following:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+nohup ulimit \(mif 10000
+env ulimit 10000
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+it does not affect the file size limit of the caller's environment.
+.P
+Once a limit has been decreased by a process, it cannot be increased
+(unless appropriate privileges are involved), even back to the original
+system limit.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Set the file size limit to 51\|200 bytes:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ulimit \(mif 100
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIulimit\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/umask.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/umask.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..128c265
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/umask.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,372 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UMASK "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+umask
+\(em get or set the file mode creation mask
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+umask \fB[\fR\(miS\fB] [\fImask\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR umask
+utility shall set the file mode creation mask of the current shell
+execution environment (see
+.IR "Section 2.12" ", " "Shell Execution Environment")
+to the value specified by the
+.IR mask
+operand. This mask shall affect the initial value of the file
+permission bits of subsequently created files. If
+.IR umask
+is called in a subshell or separate utility execution environment, such
+as one of the following:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(umask 002)
+nohup umask ...
+find . \(miexec umask ... \e;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+it shall not affect the file mode creation mask of the caller's
+environment.
+.P
+If the
+.IR mask
+operand is not specified, the
+.IR umask
+utility shall write to standard output the value of the
+file mode creation mask of the invoking process.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR umask
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(miS\fP" 10
+Produce symbolic output.
+.P
+The default output style is unspecified, but shall be recognized on a
+subsequent invocation of
+.IR umask
+on the same system as a
+.IR mask
+operand to restore the previous file mode creation mask.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fImask\fR" 10
+A string specifying the new file mode creation mask. The string is
+treated in the same way as the
+.IR mode
+operand described in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section for
+.IR chmod .
+.RS 10 
+.P
+For a
+.IR symbolic_mode
+value, the new value of the file mode creation mask shall be the
+logical complement of the file permission bits portion of the file mode
+specified by the
+.IR symbolic_mode
+string.
+.P
+In a
+.IR symbolic_mode
+value, the permissions
+.IR op
+characters
+.BR '\(pl' 
+and
+.BR '\(mi' 
+shall be interpreted relative to the current file mode creation mask;
+.BR '\(pl' 
+shall cause the bits for the indicated permissions to be cleared in the
+mask;
+.BR '\(mi' 
+shall cause the bits for the indicated permissions to be set in the
+mask.
+.P
+The interpretation of
+.IR mode
+values that specify file mode bits other than the file permission bits
+is unspecified.
+.P
+In the octal integer form of
+.IR mode ,
+the specified bits are set in the file mode creation mask.
+.P
+The file mode creation mask shall be set to the resulting numeric
+value.
+.P
+The default output of a prior invocation of
+.IR umask
+on the same system with no operand also shall be recognized as a
+.IR mask
+operand.
+.RE
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR umask :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+When the
+.IR mask
+operand is not specified, the
+.IR umask
+utility shall write a message to standard output that can later be used
+as a
+.IR umask
+.IR mask
+operand.
+.P
+If
+.BR \(miS
+is specified, the message shall be in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"u=%s,g=%s,o=%s\en", <\fIowner permissions\fR>, <\fIgroup permissions\fR>,
+    <\fIother permissions\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where the three values shall be combinations of letters from the set
+{\c
+.IR r ,
+.IR w ,
+.IR x };
+the presence of a letter shall indicate that the corresponding bit is
+clear in the file mode creation mask.
+.P
+If a
+.IR mask
+operand is specified, there shall be no output written to standard
+output.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+The file mode creation mask was successfully changed, or no
+.IR mask
+operand was supplied.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since
+.IR umask
+affects the current shell execution environment, it is generally
+provided as a shell regular built-in.
+.P
+In contrast to the negative permission logic provided by the file mode
+creation mask and the octal number form of the
+.IR mask
+argument, the symbolic form of the
+.IR mask
+argument specifies those permissions that are left alone.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Either of the commands:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+umask a=rx,ug+w
+.P
+umask 002
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+sets the mode mask so that subsequently created files have their
+S_IWOTH bit cleared.
+.P
+After setting the mode mask with either of the above commands, the
+.IR umask
+command can be used to write out the current value of the mode mask:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB$ \fRumask
+\fB0002\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+(The output format is unspecified, but historical implementations use
+the octal integer mode format.)
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB$ \fRumask \(miS
+\fBu=rwx,g=rwx,o=rx\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Either of these outputs can be used as the mask operand to a subsequent
+invocation of the
+.IR umask
+utility.
+.P
+Assuming the mode mask is set as above, the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+umask g\(miw
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+sets the mode mask so that subsequently created files have their
+S_IWGRP and S_IWOTH bits cleared.
+.P
+The command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+umask \(mi\|\(mi \(miw
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+sets the mode mask so that subsequently created files have all their
+write bits cleared. Note that
+.IR mask
+operands
+.BR \(mir ,
+.BR \(miw ,
+.BR \(mix
+or anything beginning with a
+<hyphen>,
+must be preceded by
+.BR \(dq\(mi\|\(mi\(dq 
+to keep it from being interpreted as an option.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Since
+.IR umask
+affects the current shell execution environment,
+it is generally provided as a shell regular built-in. If it is called
+in a subshell or separate utility execution environment, such as one of
+the following:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(umask 002)
+nohup umask ...
+find . \(miexec umask ... \e;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+it does not affect the file mode creation mask of the environment of
+the caller.
+.P
+The description of the historical utility was modified to allow it to
+use the symbolic modes of
+.IR chmod .
+The
+.BR \(mis
+option used in early proposals was changed to
+.BR \(miS
+because
+.BR \(mis
+could be confused with a
+.IR symbolic_mode
+form of mask referring to the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits.
+.P
+The default output style is unspecified to permit implementors to
+provide migration to the new symbolic style at the time most
+appropriate to their users. A
+.BR \(mio
+flag to force octal mode output was omitted because the octal mode may
+not be sufficient to specify all of the information that may be present
+in the file mode creation mask when more secure file access permission
+checks are implemented.
+.P
+It has been suggested that trusted systems developers might appreciate
+ameliorating the requirement that the mode mask ``affects'' the file
+access permissions, since it seems access control lists might replace
+the mode mask to some degree. The wording has been changed to say that
+it affects the file permission bits, and it leaves the details of the
+behavior of how they affect the file access permissions to the
+description in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language",
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIumask\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/unalias.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/unalias.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..78602cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/unalias.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UNALIAS "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+unalias
+\(em remove alias definitions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+unalias \fIalias-name\fR...
+.P
+unalias \(mia
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR unalias
+utility shall remove the definition for each alias name specified. See
+.IR "Section 2.3.1" ", " "Alias Substitution".
+The aliases shall be removed from the current shell execution
+environment; see
+.IR "Section 2.12" ", " "Shell Execution Environment".
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR unalias
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mia\fP" 10
+Remove all alias definitions from the current shell execution
+environment.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIalias-name\fR" 10
+The name of an alias to be removed.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR unalias :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+One of the
+.IR alias-name
+operands specified did not represent a valid alias definition, or an
+error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since
+.IR unalias
+affects the current shell execution environment, it is generally
+provided as a shell regular built-in.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR unalias
+description is based on that from historical KornShell implementations.
+Known differences exist between that and the C shell. The KornShell
+version was adopted to be consistent with all the other KornShell
+features in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, such as command line editing.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mia
+option is the equivalent of the
+.IR unalias
+* form of the C shell and is provided to address security concerns
+about unknown aliases entering the environment of a user (or
+application) through the allowable implementation-defined predefined
+alias route or as a result of an
+.IR ENV
+file. (Although
+.IR unalias
+could be used to simplify the ``secure'' shell script shown in the
+.IR command
+rationale, it does not obviate the need to quote all command names. An
+initial call to
+.IR unalias
+.BR \(mia
+would have to be quoted in case there was an alias for
+.IR unalias .)
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language",
+.IR "\fIalias\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uname.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uname.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..511d53c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uname.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,201 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UNAME "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+uname
+\(em return system name
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+uname \fB[\fR\(miamnrsv\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+By default, the
+.IR uname
+utility shall write the operating system name to standard output. When
+options are specified, symbols representing one or more system
+characteristics shall be written to the standard output. The format
+and contents of the symbols are implementation-defined. On systems
+conforming to the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, the symbols written shall be those supported
+by the
+\fIuname\fR()
+function as defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR uname
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mia\fP" 10
+Behave as though all of the options
+.BR \(mimnrsv
+were specified.
+.IP "\fB\(mim\fP" 10
+Write the name of the hardware type on which the system is running to
+standard output.
+.IP "\fB\(min\fP" 10
+Write the name of this node within an implementation-defined
+communications network.
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+Write the current release level of the operating system
+implementation.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Write the name of the implementation of the operating system.
+.IP "\fB\(miv\fP" 10
+Write the current version level of this release of the operating system
+implementation.
+.P
+If no options are specified, the
+.IR uname
+utility shall write the operating system name, as if the
+.BR \(mis
+option had been specified.
+.SH OPERANDS
+None.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR uname :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+By default, the output shall be a single line of the following form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIsysname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mia
+option is specified, the output shall be a single line of the following
+form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s %s %s %s %s\en", <\fIsysname\fR>, <\fInodename\fR>, <\fIrelease\fR>,
+    <\fIversion\fR>, <\fImachine\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Additional implementation-defined symbols may be written; all such
+symbols shall be written at the end of the line of output before the
+<newline>.
+.P
+If options are specified to select different combinations of the
+symbols, only those symbols shall be written, in the order shown above
+for the
+.BR \(mia
+option. If a symbol is not selected for writing, its corresponding
+trailing
+<blank>
+characters also shall not be written.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+The requested information was successfully written.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Note that any of the symbols could include embedded
+<space>
+characters, which may affect parsing algorithms if multiple options are
+selected for output.
+.P
+The node name is typically a name that the system uses to identify
+itself for inter-system communication addressing.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+uname \(misr
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+writes the operating system name and release level, separated by one or
+more
+<blank>
+characters.
+.SH RATIONALE
+It was suggested that this utility cannot be used portably since the
+format of the symbols is implementation-defined. The POSIX.1 working
+group could not achieve consensus on defining these formats in the
+underlying
+\fIuname\fR()
+function, and there was no expectation that this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 would be any more
+successful. Some applications may still find this historical utility of
+value. For example, the symbols could be used for system log entries or
+for comparison with operator or user input.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIuname\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uncompress.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uncompress.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7ab1245
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uncompress.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,186 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UNCOMPRESS "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+uncompress
+\(em expand compressed data
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+uncompress \fB[\fR\(micfv\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR uncompress
+utility shall restore files to their original state after they have
+been compressed using the
+.IR compress
+utility. If no files are specified, the standard input shall be
+uncompressed to the standard output. If the invoking process has
+appropriate privileges, the ownership, modes, access time, and
+modification time of the original file shall be preserved.
+.P
+This utility shall support the uncompressing of any files produced by
+the
+.IR compress
+utility on the same implementation. For files produced by
+.IR compress
+on other systems,
+.IR uncompress
+supports 9 to 14-bit compression (see
+.IR "\fIcompress\fR\^",
+.BR \(mib );
+it is implementation-defined whether values of
+.BR \(mib
+greater than 14 are supported.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR uncompress
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except that Guideline 1 does apply since the utility name has ten letters.
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Write to standard output; no files are changed.
+.IP "\fB\(mif\fP" 10
+Do not prompt for overwriting files. Except when run in the
+background, if
+.BR \(mif
+is not given the user shall be prompted as to whether an existing file
+should be overwritten. If the standard input is not a terminal and
+.BR \(mif
+is not given,
+.IR uncompress
+shall write a diagnostic message to standard error and exit with a
+status greater than zero.
+.IP "\fB\(miv\fP" 10
+Write messages to standard error concerning the expansion of each file.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file. If
+.IR file
+already has the
+.BR .Z
+suffix specified, it shall be used as the input file and the output
+file shall be named
+.BR file
+with the
+.BR .Z
+suffix removed. Otherwise,
+.IR file
+shall be used as the name of the output file and
+.BR file
+with the
+.BR .Z
+suffix appended shall be used as the input file.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used only if no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, or if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' .
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+Input files shall be in the format produced by the
+.IR compress
+utility.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR uncompress :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+When there are no
+.IR file
+operands or the
+.BR \(mic
+option is specified, the uncompressed output is written to standard
+output.
+.SH STDERR
+Prompts shall be written to the standard error output under the
+conditions specified in the DESCRIPTION and OPTIONS sections. The
+prompts shall contain the
+.IR file
+pathname, but their format is otherwise unspecified. Otherwise, the
+standard error output shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+Output files are the same as the respective input files to
+.IR compress .
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+The input file remains unmodified.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The limit of 14 on the
+.IR compress
+.BR \(mib
+.IR bits
+argument is to achieve portability to all systems (within the
+restrictions imposed by the lack of an explicit published file
+format). Some implementations based on 16-bit architectures cannot
+support 15 or 16-bit uncompression.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcompress\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIzcat\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/unexpand.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/unexpand.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c65a979
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/unexpand.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,238 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UNEXPAND "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+unexpand
+\(em convert spaces to tabs
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+unexpand \fB[\fR\(mia|\(mit \fItablist\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR unexpand
+utility shall copy files or standard input to standard output,
+converting
+<blank>
+characters at the beginning of each line into the maximum number of
+<tab>
+characters followed by the minimum number of
+<space>
+characters needed to fill the same column positions originally filled
+by the translated
+<blank>
+characters. By default, tabstops shall be set at every eighth column
+position. Each
+<backspace>
+shall be copied to the output, and shall cause the column position
+count for tab calculations to be decremented; the count shall never be
+decremented to a value less than one.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR unexpand
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mia\fP" 10
+In addition to translating
+<blank>
+characters at the beginning of each line, translate all sequences of
+two or more
+<blank>
+characters immediately preceding a tab stop to the maximum number of
+<tab>
+characters followed by the minimum number of
+<space>
+characters needed to fill the same column positions originally filled
+by the translated
+<blank>
+characters.
+.IP "\fB\(mit\ \fItablist\fR" 10
+Specify the tab stops. The application shall ensure that the
+.IR tablist
+option-argument is a single argument consisting of a single positive
+decimal integer or multiple positive decimal integers, separated by
+<blank>
+or
+<comma>
+characters, in ascending order. If a single number is given, tabs shall
+be set
+.IR tablist
+column positions apart instead of the default 8. If multiple numbers
+are given, the tabs shall be set at those specific column positions.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The application shall ensure that each tab-stop position
+.IR N
+is an integer value greater than zero, and the list shall be in
+strictly ascending order. This is taken to mean that, from the start of
+a line of output, tabbing to position
+.IR N
+shall cause the next character output to be in the (\c
+.IR N +1)th
+column position on that line. When the
+.BR \(mit
+option is not specified, the default shall be the equivalent of
+specifying
+.BR "\(mit\ 8"
+(except for the interaction with
+.BR \(mia ,
+described below).
+.P
+No
+<space>-to-\c
+<tab>
+conversions shall occur for characters at positions beyond the last of
+those specified in a multiple tab-stop list.
+.P
+When
+.BR \(mit
+is specified, the presence or absence of the
+.BR \(mia
+option shall be ignored; conversion shall not be limited to the
+processing of leading
+<blank>
+characters.
+.RE
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a text file to be used as input.
+.SH STDIN
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files shall be text files.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR unexpand :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files), the processing of
+<tab>
+and
+<space>
+characters, and for the determination of the width in column positions
+each character would occupy on an output device.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall be equivalent to the input files with
+the specified
+<space>-to-\c
+<tab>
+conversions.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+One non-intuitive aspect of
+.IR unexpand
+is its restriction to leading
+<space>
+characters when neither
+.BR \(mia
+nor
+.BR \(mit
+is specified. Users who always want to convert all
+<space>
+characters in a file can easily alias
+.IR unexpand
+to use the
+.BR \(mia
+or
+.BR "\(mit\ 8"
+option.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+On several occasions, consideration was given to adding a
+.BR \(mit
+option to the
+.IR unexpand
+utility to complement the
+.BR \(mit
+in
+.IR expand
+(see
+.IR "\fIexpand\fR\^").
+The historical intent of
+.IR unexpand
+was to translate multiple
+<blank>
+characters into tab stops, where tab stops were a multiple of eight
+column positions on most UNIX systems. An early proposal omitted
+.BR \(mit
+because it seemed outside the scope of the User Portability Utilities
+option; it was not described in any of the base documents. However,
+hard-coding tab stops every eight columns was not suitable for the
+international community and broke historical precedents for some
+vendors in the FORTRAN community, so
+.BR \(mit
+was restored in conjunction with the list of valid extension categories
+considered by the standard developers. Thus,
+.IR unexpand
+is now the logical converse of
+.IR expand .
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexpand\fR\^",
+.IR "\fItabs\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/unget.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/unget.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7a0a579
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/unget.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,189 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UNGET "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+unget
+\(em undo a previous get of an SCCS file (\fBDEVELOPMENT\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+unget \fB[\fR\(mins\fB] [\fR\(mir \fISID\fB] \fIfile\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR unget
+utility shall reverse the effect of a
+.IR get
+.BR \(mie
+done prior to creating the intended new delta.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR unget
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mir\ \fISID\fR" 10
+Uniquely identify which delta is no longer intended. (This would have
+been specified by
+.IR get
+as the new delta.) The use of this option is necessary only if two or
+more outstanding
+.IR get
+commands for editing on the same SCCS file were done by the same person
+(login name).
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Suppress the writing to standard output of the intended delta's SID.
+.IP "\fB\(min\fP" 10
+Retain the file that was obtained by
+.IR get ,
+which would normally be removed from the current directory.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of an existing SCCS file or a directory. If
+.IR file
+is a directory, the
+.IR unget
+utility shall behave as though each file in the directory were specified as a named
+file, except that non-SCCS files (last component of the pathname does
+not begin with
+.BR s. )
+and unreadable files shall be silently ignored.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If exactly one
+.IR file
+operand appears, and it is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be read; each line of the standard input shall
+be taken to be the name of an SCCS file to be processed. Non-SCCS files
+and unreadable files shall be silently ignored.
+.RE
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be a text file used only when the
+.IR file
+operand is specified as
+.BR '\(mi' .
+Each line of the text file shall be interpreted as an SCCS pathname.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+Any SCCS files processed shall be files of an unspecified format.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR unget :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall consist of a line for each file, in the
+following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fISID removed from file\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If there is more than one named file or if a directory or standard
+input is named, each pathname shall be written before each of the
+preceding lines:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"\en%s:\en", <\fIpathname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+Any SCCS files updated shall be files of an unspecified format.
+During processing of a
+.IR file ,
+a locking
+.IR z-file ,
+as described in
+.IR get ,
+and a
+.IR q-file
+(a working copy of the
+.IR p-file ),
+may be created and deleted. The
+.IR p-file
+and
+.IR g-file ,
+as described in
+.IR get ,
+shall be deleted.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIdelta\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIget\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsact\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uniq.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uniq.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..47a3d2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uniq.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,355 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UNIQ "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+uniq
+\(em report or filter out repeated lines in a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+uniq \fB[\fR\(mic|\(mid|\(miu\fB] [\fR\(mif \fIfields\fB] [\fR\(mis \fIchar\fB] [\fIinput_file \fB[\fIoutput_file\fB]]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR uniq
+utility shall read an input file comparing adjacent lines, and write
+one copy of each input line on the output. The second and succeeding
+copies of repeated adjacent input lines shall not be written.
+The trailing
+<newline>
+of each line in the input shall be ignored when doing comparisons.
+.P
+Repeated lines in the input shall not be detected if they are not
+adjacent.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR uniq
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except that
+.BR '\(pl' 
+may be recognized as an option delimiter as well as
+.BR '\(mi' .
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Precede each output line with a count of the number of times the line
+occurred in the input.
+.IP "\fB\(mid\fP" 10
+Suppress the writing of lines that are not repeated in the input.
+.IP "\fB\(mif\ \fIfields\fR" 10
+Ignore the first
+.IR fields
+fields on each input line when doing comparisons, where
+.IR fields
+is a positive decimal integer. A field is the maximal string matched
+by the basic regular expression:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+[[:blank:]]*[^[:blank:]]*
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the
+.IR fields
+option-argument specifies more fields than appear on an input line, a
+null string shall be used for comparison.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mis\ \fIchars\fR" 10
+Ignore the first
+.IR chars
+characters when doing comparisons, where
+.IR chars
+shall be a positive decimal integer. If specified in conjunction with
+the
+.BR \(mif
+option, the first
+.IR chars
+characters after the first
+.IR fields
+fields shall be ignored. If the
+.IR chars
+option-argument specifies more characters than remain on an input line,
+a null string shall be used for comparison.
+.IP "\fB\(miu\fP" 10
+Suppress the writing of lines that are repeated in the input.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIinput_file\fR" 10
+A pathname of the input file. If the
+.IR input_file
+operand is not specified, or if the
+.IR input_file
+is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be used.
+.IP "\fIoutput_file\fR" 10
+A pathname of the output file. If the
+.IR output_file
+operand is not specified, the standard output shall be used. The
+results are unspecified if the file named by
+.IR output_file
+is the file named by
+.IR input_file .
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used only if no
+.IR input_file
+operand is specified or if
+.IR input_file
+is
+.BR '\(mi' .
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input file shall be a text file.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR uniq :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for ordering rules.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files) and which
+characters constitute a
+<blank>
+in the current locale.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall be used if no
+.IR output_file
+operand is specified, and shall be used if the
+.IR output_file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' 
+and the implementation treats the
+.BR '\(mi' 
+as meaning standard output. Otherwise, the standard output shall
+not be used.
+See the OUTPUT FILES section.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+If the
+.BR \(mic
+option is specified, the output file shall be empty or each line
+shall be of the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d %s", <\fInumber of duplicates\fR>, <\fIline\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+otherwise, the output file shall be empty or each line shall be
+of the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s", <\fIline\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+The utility executed successfully.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR sort
+utility can be used to cause repeated lines to be adjacent in the input
+file.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following input file data (but flushed left) was used for a test
+series on
+.IR uniq :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#01 foo0 bar0 foo1 bar1
+#02 bar0 foo1 bar1 foo1
+#03 foo0 bar0 foo1 bar1
+#04
+#05 foo0 bar0 foo1 bar1
+#06 foo0 bar0 foo1 bar1
+#07 bar0 foo1 bar1 foo0
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+What follows is a series of test invocations of the
+.IR uniq
+utility that use a mixture of
+.IR uniq
+options against the input file data. These tests verify the meaning of
+.IR adjacent .
+The
+.IR uniq
+utility views the input data as a sequence of strings delimited by
+.BR '\en' .
+Accordingly, for the
+.IR fields th
+member of the sequence,
+.IR uniq
+interprets unique or repeated adjacent lines strictly relative to the
+.IR fields +1th
+member.
+.IP " 1." 4
+This first example tests the line counting option, comparing each line
+of the input file data starting from the second field:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+uniq \(mic \(mif 1 uniq_0I.t
+    1 #01 foo0 bar0 foo1 bar1
+    1 #02 bar0 foo1 bar1 foo1
+    1 #03 foo0 bar0 foo1 bar1
+    1 #04
+    2 #05 foo0 bar0 foo1 bar1
+    1 #07 bar0 foo1 bar1 foo0
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The number
+.BR '2' ,
+prefixing the fifth line of output, signifies that the
+.IR uniq
+utility detected a pair of repeated lines. Given the input data, this
+can only be true when
+.IR uniq
+is run using the
+.BR "\(mif\ 1"
+option (which shall cause
+.IR uniq
+to ignore the first field on each input line).
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+The second example tests the option to suppress unique lines, comparing
+each line of the input file data starting from the second field:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+uniq \(mid \(mif 1 uniq_0I.t
+#05 foo0 bar0 foo1 bar1
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+This test suppresses repeated lines, comparing each line of the input
+file data starting from the second field:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+uniq \(miu \(mif 1 uniq_0I.t
+#01 foo0 bar0 foo1 bar1
+#02 bar0 foo1 bar1 foo1
+#03 foo0 bar0 foo1 bar1
+#04
+#07 bar0 foo1 bar1 foo0
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+This suppresses unique lines, comparing each line of the input file
+data starting from the third character:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+uniq \(mid \(mis 2 uniq_0I.t
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In the last example, the
+.IR uniq
+utility found no input matching the above criteria.
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+Some historical implementations have limited lines to be 1\|080 bytes
+in length, which does not meet the implied
+{LINE_MAX}
+limit.
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard allowed the
+.BR \(mi \c
+.IR number
+and
+.BR \(pl \c
+.IR number
+options. These options are no longer specified by POSIX.1\(hy2008 but
+may be present in some implementations.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcomm\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsort\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/unlink.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/unlink.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..54884d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/unlink.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UNLINK "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+unlink
+\(em call the
+\fIunlink\fR()
+function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+unlink \fIfile\fP
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR unlink
+utility shall perform the function call:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+unlink(\fIfile\fP);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+A user may need appropriate privileges to invoke the
+.IR unlink
+utility.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fP" 10
+The pathname of an existing file.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+Not used.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR unlink :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+None.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIlink\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIrm\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIunlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/unset.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/unset.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cabb5c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/unset.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,177 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UNSET "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+unset
+\(em unset values and attributes of variables and functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+unset \fB[\fR\(mifv\fB] \fIname\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Each variable or function specified by
+.IR name
+shall be unset.
+.P
+If
+.BR \(miv
+is specified,
+.IR name
+refers to a variable name and the shell shall unset it and remove it
+from the environment. Read-only variables cannot be unset.
+.P
+If
+.BR \(mif
+is specified,
+.IR name
+refers to a function and the shell shall unset the function definition.
+.P
+If neither
+.BR \(mif
+nor
+.BR \(miv
+is specified,
+.IR name
+refers to a variable; if a variable by that name does not exist, it is
+unspecified whether a function by that name, if any, shall be unset.
+.P
+Unsetting a variable or function that was not previously set shall not
+be considered an error and does not cause the shell to abort.
+.P
+The
+.IR unset
+special built-in shall support the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+Note that:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+VARIABLE=
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+is not equivalent to an
+.IR unset
+of
+.BR VARIABLE ;
+in the example,
+.BR VARIABLE
+is set to
+.BR \(dq\^\(dq .
+Also, the variables that can be
+.IR unset
+should not be misinterpreted to include the special parameters (see
+.IR "Section 2.5.2" ", " "Special Parameters").
+.SH OPTIONS
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH OPERANDS
+See the DESCRIPTION.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+None.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+.IP "\00" 6
+All
+.IR name
+operands were successfully unset.
+.IP >0 6
+At least one
+.IR name
+could not be unset.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Unset
+.IR VISUAL
+variable:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+unset \(miv VISUAL
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Unset the functions
+.BR foo
+and
+.BR bar :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+unset \(mif foo bar
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+Consideration was given to omitting the
+.BR \(mif
+option in favor of an
+.IR unfunction
+utility, but the standard developers decided to retain historical
+practice.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miv
+option was introduced because System V historically used one name space
+for both variables and functions. When
+.IR unset
+is used without options, System V historically unset either a function
+or a variable, and there was no confusion about which one was intended.
+A portable POSIX application can use
+.IR unset
+without an option to unset a variable, but not a function; the
+.BR \(mif
+option must be used.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uucp.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uucp.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..05c753c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uucp.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,292 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UUCP "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+uucp
+\(em system-to-system copy
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+uucp \fB[\fR\(micCdfjmr\fB] [\fR\(min \fIuser\fB] \fIsource-file\fR... \fIdestination-file\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR uucp
+utility shall copy files named by the
+.IR source-file
+argument to the
+.IR destination-file
+argument. The files named can be on local or remote systems.
+.P
+The
+.IR uucp
+utility cannot guarantee support for all character encodings in all
+circumstances. For example, transmission data may be restricted to 7
+bits by the underlying network, 8-bit data and filenames need not be
+portable to non-internationalized systems, and so on. Under these
+circumstances, it is recommended that only characters defined in the
+ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard International Reference Version (equivalent to ASCII) 7-bit range
+of characters be used, and that only characters defined in the portable
+filename character set be used for naming files. The protocol for
+transfer of files is unspecified by POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+Typical implementations of this utility require a communications line
+configured to use the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+but other communications means may be used. On systems where there are
+no available communications means (either temporarily or permanently),
+this utility shall write an error message describing the problem and
+exit with a non-zero exit status.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR uucp
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Do not copy local file to the spool directory for transfer to the
+remote machine (default).
+.IP "\fB\(miC\fP" 10
+Force the copy of local files to the spool directory for transfer.
+.IP "\fB\(mid\fP" 10
+Make all necessary directories for the file copy (default).
+.IP "\fB\(mif\fP" 10
+Do not make intermediate directories for the file copy.
+.IP "\fB\(mij\fP" 10
+Write the job identification string to standard output. This job
+identification can be used by
+.IR uustat
+to obtain the status or terminate a job.
+.IP "\fB\(mim\fP" 10
+Send mail to the requester when the copy is completed.
+.IP "\fB\(min\ \fIuser\fR" 10
+Notify
+.IR user
+on the remote system that a file was sent.
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+Do not start the file transfer; just queue the job.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIdestination-file\fR,\ \fIsource-file\fR" 10
+.br
+A pathname of a file to be copied to, or from, respectively. Either
+name can be a pathname on the local machine, or can have the form:
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIsystem-name\fR!\fIpathname\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR system-name
+is taken from a list of system names that
+.IR uucp
+knows about.
+The destination
+.IR system-name
+can also be a list of names such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIsystem-name\fR!\fIsystem-name\fR!...!\fIsystem-name\fR!\fIpathname\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+in which case, an attempt is made to send the file via the specified
+route to the destination. Care should be taken to ensure that
+intermediate nodes in the route are willing to forward information.
+.P
+The shell pattern matching notation characters
+.BR '?' ,
+.BR '*' ,
+and
+.BR \(dq[...]\(dq 
+appearing in
+.IR pathname
+shall be expanded on the appropriate system.
+.P
+Pathnames can be one of:
+.IP " 1." 4
+An absolute pathname.
+.IP " 2." 4
+A pathname preceded by ~\c
+.IR user
+where
+.IR user
+is a login name on the specified system and is replaced by that user's
+login directory. Note that if an invalid login is specified, the
+default is to the public directory (called
+.IR PUBDIR ;
+the actual location of
+.IR PUBDIR
+is implementation-defined).
+.IP " 3." 4
+A pathname preceded by ~/\c
+.IR destination
+where
+.IR destination
+is appended to
+.IR PUBDIR .
+.RS 4 
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+This destination is treated as a filename unless more than one file is
+being transferred by this request or the destination is already a
+directory. To ensure that it is a directory, follow the destination
+with a
+.BR '/' .
+For example,
+.BR ~/dan/
+as the destination makes the directory
+.BR PUBDIR/dan
+if it does not exist and puts the requested files in that directory.
+.P
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+Anything else shall be prefixed by the current directory.
+.P
+If the result is an erroneous pathname for the remote system, the copy
+shall fail. If the
+.IR destination-file
+is a directory, the last part of the
+.IR source-file
+name shall be used.
+.P
+The read, write, and execute permissions given by
+.IR uucp
+are implementation-defined.
+.RE
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The files to be copied are regular files.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR uucp :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, equivalence classes,
+and multi-character collating elements within bracketed filename
+patterns.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files) and the behavior of
+character classes within bracketed filename patterns (for example,
+.BR \(dq'[[:lower:]]*'\(dq ).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error, and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+The output files (which may be on other systems) are copies of the
+input files.
+.P
+If
+.BR \(mim
+is used, mail files are modified.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+This utility is part of the UUCP Utilities option and need not be
+supported by all implementations.
+.P
+The domain of remotely accessible files can (and for obvious security
+reasons usually should) be severely restricted.
+.P
+Note that the
+.BR '!' 
+character in addresses has to be escaped when using
+.IR csh
+as a command interpreter because of its history substitution syntax.
+For
+.IR ksh
+and
+.IR sh
+the escape is not necessary, but may be used.
+.P
+As noted above, shell metacharacters appearing in pathnames are
+expanded on the appropriate system. On an internationalized system,
+this is done under the control of local settings of
+.IR LC_COLLATE
+and
+.IR LC_CTYPE .
+Thus, care should be taken when using bracketed filename patterns, as
+collation and typing rules may vary from one system to another. Also
+be aware that certain types of expression (that is, equivalence
+classes, character classes, and collating symbols) need not be
+supported on non-internationalized systems.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImailx\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIuuencode\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIuustat\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIuux\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uudecode.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uudecode.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f93cd87
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uudecode.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,215 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UUDECODE "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+uudecode
+\(em decode a binary file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+uudecode \fB[\fR\(mio \fIoutfile\fB] [\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR uudecode
+utility shall read a file, or standard input if no file is specified,
+that includes data created by the
+.IR uuencode
+utility. The
+.IR uudecode
+utility shall scan the input file, searching for data compatible with
+one of the formats specified in
+.IR uuencode ,
+and attempt to create or overwrite the file described by the data (or
+overridden by the
+.BR \(mio
+option). The pathname shall be contained in the data or specified by
+the
+.BR \(mio
+option. The file access permission bits and contents for the file to be
+produced shall be contained in that data. The mode bits of the created
+file (other than standard output) shall be set from the file access
+permission bits contained in the data; that is, other attributes of the
+mode, including the file mode creation mask (see
+.IR umask ),
+shall not affect the file being produced. If either of the
+.IR op
+characters
+.BR '\(pl' 
+and
+.BR '\(mi' 
+(see
+.IR chmod )
+are specified in symbolic mode, the initial mode on which those
+operations are based is unspecified.
+.P
+If the pathname of the file to be produced exists, and the user does
+not have write permission on that file,
+.IR uudecode
+shall terminate with an error. If the pathname of the file to be
+produced exists, and the user has write permission on that file, the
+existing file shall be overwritten.
+.P
+If the input data was produced by
+.IR uuencode
+on a system with a different number of bits per byte than on the target
+system, the results of
+.IR uudecode
+are unspecified.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR uudecode
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported by the implementation:
+.IP "\fB\(mio\ \fIoutfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file that shall be used instead of any pathname
+contained in the input data. Specifying an
+.IR outfile
+option-argument of
+.BR /dev/stdout
+shall indicate standard output.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+The pathname of a file containing the output of
+.IR uuencode .
+.SH STDIN
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files shall be files containing the output of
+.IR uuencode .
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR uudecode :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+If the file data header encoded by
+.IR uuencode
+is
+.BR \(mi
+or
+.BR /dev/stdout ,
+or the
+.BR \(mio
+.BR /dev/stdout
+option overrides the file data, the standard output shall be in the
+same format as the file originally encoded by
+.IR uuencode .
+Otherwise, the standard output shall not be used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+The output file shall be in the same format as the file originally
+encoded by
+.IR uuencode .
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The user who is invoking
+.IR uudecode
+must have write permission on any file being created.
+.P
+The output of
+.IR uuencode
+is essentially an encoded bit stream that is not cognizant of byte
+boundaries. It is possible that a 9-bit byte target machine can
+process input from an 8-bit source, if it is aware of the requirement,
+but the reverse is unlikely to be satisfying. Of course, the only data
+that is meaningful for such a transfer between architectures is
+generally character data.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Input files are not necessarily text files, as stated by an early
+proposal. Although the
+.IR uuencode
+output is a text file, that output could have been wrapped within
+another file or mail message that is not a text file.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mio
+option is not historical practice, but was added at the request of WG15
+so that the user could override the target pathname without having to
+edit the input data itself.
+.P
+In early drafts, the [\c
+.BR \(mio
+.IR outfile ]
+option-argument allowed the use of
+.BR \(mi
+to mean standard output. The symbol
+.BR \(mi
+has only been used previously in POSIX.1\(hy2008 as a standard input indicator.
+The standard developers did not wish to overload the meaning of
+.BR \(mi
+in this manner. The
+.BR /dev/stdout
+concept exists on most modern systems. The
+.BR /dev/stdout
+syntax does not refer to a new special file. It is just a magic cookie
+to specify standard output.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIumask\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIuuencode\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uuencode.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uuencode.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f307713
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uuencode.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,378 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UUENCODE "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+uuencode
+\(em encode a binary file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+uuencode \fB[\fR\(mim\fB] [\fIfile\fB] \fIdecode_pathname\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR uuencode
+utility shall write an encoded version of the named input file, or
+standard input if no
+.IR file
+is specified, to standard output. The output shall be encoded using
+one of the algorithms described in the STDOUT section and shall
+include the file access permission bits (in
+.IR chmod
+octal or symbolic notation) of the input file and the
+.IR decode_pathname ,
+for re-creation of the file on another system that conforms to this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR uuencode
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported by the implementation:
+.IP "\fB\(mim\fP" 10
+Encode the output using the MIME Base64 algorithm described in STDOUT.
+If
+.BR \(mim
+is not specified, the historical algorithm described in STDOUT shall be
+used.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIdecode_pathname\fR" 10
+.br
+The pathname of the file into which the
+.IR uudecode
+utility shall place the decoded file. Specifying a
+.IR decode_pathname
+operand of
+.BR /dev/stdout
+shall indicate that
+.IR uudecode
+is to use standard output. If there are characters in
+.IR decode_pathname
+that are not in the portable filename character set the results are
+unspecified.
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of the file to be encoded.
+.SH STDIN
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+Input files can be files of any type.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR uuencode :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+.SS "uuencode Base64 Algorithm"
+.P
+The standard output shall be a text file (encoded in the character set
+of the current locale) that begins with the line:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"begin-base64 %s %s\en", <\fImode\fR>, <\fIdecode_pathname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and ends with the line:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"====\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In both cases, the lines shall have no preceding or trailing
+<blank>
+characters.
+.P
+The encoding process represents 24-bit groups of input bits as output
+strings of four encoded characters. Proceeding from left to right, a
+24-bit input group shall be formed by concatenating three 8-bit input
+groups. Each 24-bit input group then shall be treated as four
+concatenated 6-bit groups, each of which shall be translated into a
+single digit in the Base64 alphabet. When encoding a bit stream via the
+Base64 encoding, the bit stream shall be presumed to be ordered with
+the most-significant bit first. That is, the first bit in the stream
+shall be the high-order bit in the first byte, and the eighth bit shall
+be the low-order bit in the first byte, and so on. Each 6-bit group is
+used as an index into an array of 64 printable characters, as shown in
+.IR "Table 4-22, uuencode Base64 Values".
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable 4-22: uuencode Base64 Values\fR
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB || cB | cB || cB | cB || cB | cB
+n | cf5 || n | cf5 || n | cf5 || n | cf5.
+Value!Encoding!Value!Encoding!Value!Encoding!Value!Encoding
+_
+0!A!17!R!34!i!51!z
+1!B!18!S!35!j!52!0
+2!C!19!T!36!k!53!1
+3!D!20!U!37!l!54!2
+4!E!21!V!38!m!55!3
+5!F!22!W!39!n!56!4
+6!G!23!X!40!o!57!5
+7!H!24!Y!41!p!58!6
+8!I!25!Z!42!q!59!7
+9!J!26!a!43!r!60!8
+10!K!27!b!44!s!61!9
+11!L!28!c!45!t!62!+
+12!M!29!d!46!u!63!/
+13!N!30!e!47!v
+14!O!31!f!48!w!(pad)!\&=
+15!P!32!g!49!x
+16!Q!33!h!50!y
+.TE
+.P
+The character referenced by the index shall be placed in the output
+string.
+.P
+The output stream (encoded bytes) shall be represented in lines of no
+more than 76 characters each. All line breaks or other characters not
+found in the table shall be ignored by decoding software (see
+.IR "\fIuudecode\fR\^").
+.P
+Special processing shall be performed if fewer than 24 bits are
+available at the end of a message or encapsulated part of a message. A
+full encoding quantum shall always be completed at the end of a
+message. When fewer than 24 input bits are available in an input group,
+zero bits shall be added (on the right) to form an integral number of
+6-bit groups. Output character positions that are not required to
+represent actual input data shall be set to the character
+.BR '=' .
+Since all Base64 input is an integral number of octets, only the
+following cases can arise:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The final quantum of encoding input is an integral multiple of 24 bits;
+here, the final unit of encoded output shall be an integral multiple of
+4 characters with no
+.BR '=' 
+padding.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The final quantum of encoding input is exactly 16 bits; here, the final
+unit of encoded output shall be three characters followed by one
+.BR '=' 
+padding character.
+.IP " 3." 4
+The final quantum of encoding input is exactly 8 bits; here, the final
+unit of encoded output shall be two characters followed by two
+.BR '=' 
+padding characters.
+.P
+A terminating
+.BR \(dq====\(dq 
+evaluates to nothing and denotes the end of the encoded data.
+.SS "uuencode Historical Algorithm"
+.P
+The standard output shall be a text file (encoded in the character set
+of the current locale) that begins with the line:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"begin %s %s\en" <\fImode\fR>, <\fIdecode_pathname\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and ends with the line:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"end\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In both cases, the lines shall have no preceding or trailing
+<blank>
+characters.
+.P
+The algorithm that shall be used for lines in between
+.BR begin
+and
+.BR end
+takes three octets as input and writes four characters of output by
+splitting the input at six-bit intervals into four octets, containing
+data in the lower six bits only. These octets shall be converted to
+characters by adding a value of 0x20 to each octet, so that each octet
+is in the range [0x20,0x5f], and then it shall be assumed to represent
+a printable character in the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard encoded character set. It then
+shall be translated into the corresponding character codes for the
+codeset in use in the current locale. (For example, the octet 0x41,
+representing
+.BR 'A' ,
+would be translated to
+.BR 'A' 
+in the current codeset, such as 0xc1 if it were EBCDIC.)
+.P
+Where the bits of two octets are combined, the least significant bits
+of the first octet shall be shifted left and combined with the most
+significant bits of the second octet shifted right. Thus the three
+octets
+.IR A ,
+.IR B ,
+.IR C
+shall be converted into the four octets:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+0x20 + (( A >> 2                    ) & 0x3F)
+0x20 + (((A << 4) |\h'\n(XX' ((B >> 4) & 0xF)) & 0x3F)
+0x20 + (((B << 2) |\h'\n(XX' ((C >> 6) & 0x3)) & 0x3F)
+0x20 + (( C                         ) & 0x3F)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+These octets then shall be translated into the local character set.
+.P
+Each encoded line contains a length character, equal to the number of
+characters to be decoded plus 0x20 translated to the local character
+set as described above, followed by the encoded characters. The
+maximum number of octets to be encoded on each line shall be 45.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The file is expanded by 35 percent (each three octets become four, plus
+control information) causing it to take longer to transmit.
+.P
+Since this utility is intended to create files to be used for data
+interchange between systems with possibly different codesets, and to
+represent binary data as a text file, the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard was chosen for a
+midpoint in the algorithm as a known reference point. The output from
+.IR uuencode
+is a text file on the local system. If the output were in the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard
+codeset, it might not be a text file (at least because the
+<newline>
+characters might not match), and the goal of creating a text file would
+be defeated. If this text file was then carried to another machine with
+the same codeset, it would be perfectly compatible with that system's
+.IR uudecode .
+If it was transmitted over a mail system or sent to a machine with a
+different codeset, it is assumed that, as for every other text file,
+some translation mechanism would convert it (by the time it reached a
+user on the other system) into an appropriate codeset. This
+translation only makes sense from the local codeset, not if the file
+has been put into a ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard representation first. Similarly, files
+processed by
+.IR uuencode
+can be placed in
+.IR pax
+archives, intermixed with other text files in the same codeset.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+A new algorithm was added at the request of the international community
+to parallel work in RFC\ 2045 (MIME). As with the historical
+.IR uuencode
+format, the Base64 Content-Transfer-Encoding is designed to represent
+arbitrary sequences of octets in a form that is not humanly readable. A
+65-character subset of the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard is used, enabling 6 bits to be
+represented per printable character. (The extra 65th character,
+.BR '=' ,
+is used to signify a special processing function.)
+.P
+This subset has the important property that it is represented
+identically in all versions of the ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard, including US ASCII, and all
+characters in the subset are also represented identically in all
+versions of EBCDIC. The historical
+.IR uuencode
+algorithm does not share this property, which is the reason that a
+second algorithm was added to the ISO\ POSIX\(hy2 standard.
+.P
+The string
+.BR \(dq====\(dq 
+was used for the termination instead of the end used in the original
+format because the latter is a string that could be valid encoded
+input.
+.P
+In an early draft, the
+.BR \(mim
+option was named
+.BR \(mib
+(for Base64), but it was renamed to reflect its relationship to the
+RFC\ 2045. A
+.BR \(miu
+was also present to invoke the default algorithm, but since this was
+not historical practice, it was omitted as being unnecessary.
+.P
+See the RATIONALE section in
+.IR "\fIuudecode\fR\^"
+for the derivation of the
+.BR /dev/stdout
+symbol.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^",
+.IR "\fImailx\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIuudecode\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uustat.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uustat.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dcab76d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uustat.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,162 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UUSTAT "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+uustat
+\(em uucp status enquiry and job control
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+uustat \fB[\fR\(miq|\(mik \fIjobid\fR|\(mir \fIjobid\fB]\fR
+.P
+uustat \fB[\fR\(mis \fIsystem\fB] [\fR\(miu \fIuser\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR uustat
+utility shall display the status of, or cancel, previously specified
+.IR uucp
+requests, or provide general status on
+.IR uucp
+connections to other systems.
+.P
+When no options are given,
+.IR uustat
+shall write to standard output the status of all
+.IR uucp
+requests issued by the current user.
+.P
+Typical implementations of this utility require a communications line
+configured to use the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+but other communications means may be used. On systems where there are
+no available communications means (either temporarily or permanently),
+this utility shall write an error message describing the problem and
+exit with a non-zero exit status.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR uustat
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(miq\fP" 10
+Write the jobs queued for each machine.
+.IP "\fB\(mik\ \fIjobid\fR" 10
+Kill the
+.IR uucp
+request whose job identification is
+.IR jobid .
+The application shall ensure that the killed
+.IR uucp
+request belongs to the person invoking
+.IR uustat
+unless that user has appropriate privileges.
+.IP "\fB\(mir\ \fIjobid\fR" 10
+Rejuvenate
+.IR jobid .
+The files associated with
+.IR jobid
+are touched so that their modification time is set to the current
+time. This prevents the cleanup program from deleting the job until
+the jobs modification time reaches the limit imposed by the program.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\ \fIsystem\fR" 10
+Write the status of all
+.IR uucp
+requests for remote system
+.IR system .
+.IP "\fB\(miu\ \fIuser\fR" 10
+Write the status of all
+.IR uucp
+requests issued by
+.IR user .
+.SH OPERANDS
+None.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR uustat :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error, and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall consist of information about each job
+selected, in an unspecified format. The information shall include at
+least the job ID, the user ID or name, and the remote system name.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+This utility is part of the UUCP Utilities option and need not be
+supported by all implementations.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIuucp\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uux.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uux.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..903f6cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/uux.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,361 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UUX "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+uux
+\(em remote command execution
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+uux \fB[\fR\(mijnp\fB] \fIcommand\(mistring\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR uux
+utility shall gather zero or more files from various systems, execute a
+shell pipeline (see
+.IR "Section 2.9" ", " "Shell Commands")
+on a specified system, and then send the standard output of the command
+to a file on a specified system. Only the first command of a pipeline
+can have a
+.IR system-name !
+prefix. All other commands in the pipeline shall be executed on the
+system of the first command.
+.P
+The following restrictions are applicable to the shell pipeline
+processed by
+.IR uux :
+.IP " *" 4
+In gathering files from different systems, pathname expansion shall
+not be performed by
+.IR uux .
+Thus, a request such as:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+uux "c99 remsys!~/*.c"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would attempt to copy the file named literally
+.BR *.c
+to the local system.
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+The redirection operators
+.BR \(dq>>\(dq ,
+.BR \(dq<<\(dq ,
+.BR \(dq>|\(dq ,
+and
+.BR \(dq>&\(dq 
+shall not be accepted. Any use of these redirection operators shall
+cause this utility to write an error message describing the problem
+and exit with a non-zero exit status.
+.IP " *" 4
+The reserved word
+.BR !
+cannot be used at the head of the pipeline to modify the exit status.
+(See the
+.IR command-string
+operand description below.)
+.IP " *" 4
+Alias substitution shall not be performed.
+.P
+A filename can be specified as for
+.IR uucp ;
+it can be an absolute pathname, a pathname preceded by ~\c
+.IR name
+(which is replaced by the corresponding login directory), a pathname
+specified as ~/\^\c
+.IR dest
+(\c
+.IR dest
+is prefixed by the public directory called
+.IR PUBDIR ;
+the actual location of
+.IR PUBDIR
+is implementation-defined), or a simple filename (which is prefixed
+by
+.IR uux
+with the current directory). See
+.IR "\fIuucp\fR\^"
+for the details.
+.P
+The execution of commands on remote systems shall take place in an
+execution directory known to the
+.IR uucp
+system. All files required for the execution shall be put into this
+directory unless they already reside on that machine. Therefore, the
+application shall ensure that non-local filenames (without path or
+machine reference) are unique within the
+.IR uux
+request.
+.P
+The
+.IR uux
+utility shall attempt to get all files to the execution system. For
+files that are output files, the application shall ensure that the
+filename is escaped using parentheses.
+.P
+The remote system shall notify the user by mail if the requested
+command on the remote system was disallowed or the files were not
+accessible. This notification can be turned off by the
+.BR \(min
+option.
+.P
+Typical implementations of this utility require a communications line
+configured to use the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+but other communications means may be used. On systems where there are
+no available communications means (either temporarily or permanently),
+this utility shall write an error message describing the problem and
+exit with a non-zero exit status.
+.P
+The
+.IR uux
+utility cannot guarantee support for all character encodings in all
+circumstances. For example, transmission data may be restricted to 7
+bits by the underlying network, 8-bit data and filenames need not be
+portable to non-internationalized systems, and so on. Under these
+circumstances, it is recommended that only characters defined in the
+ISO/IEC\ 646:\|1991 standard International Reference Version (equivalent to ASCII) 7-bit range
+of characters be used and that only characters defined in the portable
+filename character set be used for naming files.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR uux
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mij\fP" 10
+Write the job identification string to standard output. This job
+identification can be used by
+.IR uustat
+to obtain the status or terminate a job.
+.IP "\fB\(min\fP" 10
+Do not notify the user if the command fails.
+.IP "\fB\(mip\fP" 10
+Make the standard input to
+.IR uux
+the standard input to the
+.IR command-string .
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIcommand-string\fR" 10
+.br
+A string made up of one or more arguments that are similar to normal
+command arguments, except that the command and any filenames can be
+prefixed by
+.IR system-name !.
+A null
+.IR system-name
+shall be interpreted as the local system.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall not be used unless the
+.BR '\(mi' 
+or
+.BR \(mip
+option is specified; in those cases, the standard input shall be made
+the standard input of the
+.IR command-string .
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+Input files shall be selected according to the contents of
+.IR command-string .
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR uux :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall not be used unless the
+.BR \(mij
+option is specified; in that case, the job identification string shall
+be written to standard output in the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en", <\fIjobid\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+Output files shall be created or written, or both, according to the
+contents of
+.IR command-string .
+.P
+If
+.BR \(min
+is not used, mail files shall be modified following any command or
+file-access failures on the remote system.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+This utility is part of the UUCP Utilities option and need not be
+supported by all implementations.
+.P
+Note that, for security reasons, many installations limit the list of
+commands executable on behalf of an incoming request from
+.IR uux .
+Many sites permit little more than the receipt of mail via
+.IR uux .
+.P
+Any characters special to the command interpreter should be quoted
+either by quoting the entire
+.IR command-string
+or quoting the special characters as individual arguments.
+.P
+As noted in
+.IR uucp ,
+shell pattern matching notation
+characters appearing in pathnames are expanded on the appropriate local
+system. This is done under the control of local settings of
+.IR LC_COLLATE
+and
+.IR LC_CTYPE .
+Thus, care should be taken when using bracketed filename patterns, as
+collation and typing rules may vary from one system to another. Also
+be aware that certain types of expression (that is, equivalence
+classes, character classes, and collating symbols) need not be
+supported on non-internationalized systems.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+The following command gets
+.BR file1
+from system
+.BR a
+and
+.BR file2
+from system
+.BR b ,
+executes
+.IR diff
+on the local system, and puts the results in
+.BR file.diff
+in the local
+.IR PUBDIR
+directory. (\c
+.IR PUBDIR
+is the
+.IR uucp
+public directory on the local system.)
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+uux "!diff a!/usr/file1 b!/a4/file2 >!~/file.diff"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+The following command fails because
+.IR uux
+places all files copied to a system in the same working directory.
+Although the files
+.BR xyz
+are from two different systems, their filenames are the same and
+conflict.
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+uux "!diff a!/usr1/xyz b!/usr2/xyz >!~/xyz.diff"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+The following command succeeds (assuming
+.IR diff
+is permitted on system
+.BR a )
+because the file local to system
+.BR a
+is not copied to the working directory, and hence does not conflict with
+the file from system
+.BR c .
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+uux "a!diff a!/usr/xyz c!/usr/xyz >!~/xyz.diff"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language",
+.IR "\fIuucp\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIuuencode\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIuustat\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/val.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/val.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0a83f4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/val.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,248 @@
+'\" et
+.TH VAL "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+val
+\(em validate SCCS files (\fBDEVELOPMENT\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+val \(mi
+.P
+val \fB[\fR\(mis\fB] [\fR\(mim \fIname\fB] [\fR\(mir \fISID\fB] [\fR\(miy \fItype\fB] \fIfile\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR val
+utility shall determine whether the specified
+.IR file
+is an SCCS file meeting the characteristics specified by the options.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR val
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except that the usage of the
+.BR '\(mi' 
+operand is not strictly as intended by the guidelines (that is, reading
+options and operands from standard input).
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mim\ \fIname\fR" 10
+Specify a
+.IR name ,
+which is compared with the SCCS %\fBM\fP% keyword in
+.IR file ;
+see
+.IR "\fIget\fR\^".
+.IP "\fB\(mir\ \fISID\fR" 10
+Specify a
+.IR SID
+(SCCS Identification String), an SCCS delta number. A check shall be
+made to determine whether the
+.IR SID
+is ambiguous (for example,
+.BR "\(mir\ 1"
+is ambiguous because it physically does not exist but implies 1.1, 1.2,
+and so on, which may exist) or invalid (for example,
+.BR "\(mir\ 1.0"
+or
+.BR "\(mir\ 1.1.0"
+are invalid because neither case can exist as a valid delta number).
+If the
+.IR SID
+is valid and not ambiguous, a check shall be made to determine whether
+it actually exists.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Silence the diagnostic message normally written to standard output for
+any error that is detected while processing each named file on a given
+command line.
+.IP "\fB\(miy\ \fItype\fR" 10
+Specify a
+.IR type ,
+which shall be compared with the SCCS %\fBY\fP% keyword in
+.IR file ;
+see
+.IR "\fIget\fR\^".
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of an existing SCCS file. If exactly one
+.IR file
+operand appears, and it is
+.BR '\(mi' ,
+the standard input shall be read: each line shall be independently
+processed as if it were a command line argument list. (However, the
+line is not subjected to any of the shell word expansions, such as
+parameter expansion or quote removal.)
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be a text file used only when the
+.IR file
+operand is specified as
+.BR '\(mi' .
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+Any SCCS files processed shall be files of an unspecified format.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR val :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error, and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall consist of informative messages about either:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Each file processed
+.IP " 2." 4
+Each command line read from standard input
+.P
+If the standard input is not used, for each
+.IR file
+operand yielding a discrepancy, the output line shall have the
+following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s: %s\en", <\fIpathname\fR>, <\fIunspecified string\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the standard input is used, for each input line yielding a discrepancy,
+the output shall have the following format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s\en\en %s: %s\en", <\fIinput\fR>, <\fIpathname\fR>, <\fIunspecified string\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fIinput\fP> is the input line minus its terminating
+<newline>.
+.SH STDERR
+Not used.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The 8-bit code returned by
+.IR val
+shall be a disjunction of the possible errors; that is, it can be
+interpreted as a bit string where set bits are interpreted as follows:
+.TS
+tab(@);
+l c l.
+0x80@\&=@Missing file argument.
+0x40@\&=@Unknown or duplicate option.
+0x20@\&=@Corrupted SCCS file.
+0x10@\&=@Cannot open file or file not SCCS.
+0x08@\&=@\fISID\fR is invalid or ambiguous.
+0x04@\&=@\fISID\fR does not exist.
+0x02@\&=@%\fBY\fR%, \fB\(miy\fR mismatch.
+0x01@\&=@%\fBM\fR%, \fB\(mim\fR mismatch.
+.TE
+.P
+Note that
+.IR val
+can process two or more files on a given command line and can process
+multiple command lines (when reading the standard input). In these
+cases an aggregate code shall be returned: a logical OR of the codes
+generated for each command line and file processed.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since the
+.IR val
+exit status sets the 0x80 bit, shell applications checking
+.BR \(dq$?\(dq 
+cannot tell if it terminated due to a missing file argument or receipt
+of a signal.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+In a directory with three SCCS files\(em\c
+.BR s.x
+(of
+.BR t
+type ``text''),
+.BR s.y ,
+and
+.BR s.z
+(a corrupted file)\(emthe following command could produce the output
+shown:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+val \(mi <<EOF
+\(miy source s.x
+\(mim y s.y
+s.z
+EOF
+\(miy source s.x
+.P
+    s.x: %\|Y\|%, \(miy mismatch
+s.z
+.P
+    s.z: corrupted SCCS file
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIadmin\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIdelta\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIget\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIprs\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/vi.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/vi.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba72472
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/vi.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,6469 @@
+'\" et
+.TH VI "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+vi
+\(em screen-oriented (visual) display editor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+vi \fB[\fR\(mirR\fB] [\fR\(mic \fIcommand\fB] [\fR\(mit \fItagstring\fB] [\fR\(miw \fIsize\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This utility shall be provided on systems that both support the User
+Portability Utilities option and define the POSIX2_CHAR_TERM symbol.
+On other systems it is optional.
+.P
+The
+.IR vi
+(visual) utility is a screen-oriented text editor. Only the open and
+visual modes of the editor are described in POSIX.1\(hy2008; see the line editor
+.IR ex
+for additional editing capabilities used in
+.IR vi .
+The user can switch back and forth between
+.IR vi
+and
+.IR ex
+and execute
+.IR ex
+commands from within
+.IR vi .
+.P
+This reference page uses the term
+.IR "edit buffer"
+to describe the current working text. No specific implementation is
+implied by this term. All editing changes are performed on the edit
+buffer, and no changes to it shall affect any file until an editor
+command writes the file.
+.P
+When using
+.IR vi ,
+the terminal screen acts as a window into the editing buffer. Changes
+made to the editing buffer shall be reflected in the screen display;
+the position of the cursor on the screen shall indicate the position
+within the editing buffer.
+.P
+Certain terminals do not have all the capabilities necessary to support
+the complete
+.IR vi
+definition. When these commands cannot be supported on such terminals,
+this condition shall not produce an error message such as ``not an
+editor command'' or report a syntax error. The implementation may
+either accept the commands and produce results on the screen that are
+the result of an unsuccessful attempt to meet the requirements of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+or report an error describing the terminal-related deficiency.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR vi
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except that
+.BR '\(pl' 
+may be recognized as an option delimiter as well as
+.BR '\(mi' .
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mic\ \fIcommand\fR" 10
+See the
+.IR ex
+command description of the
+.BR \(mic
+option.
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+See the
+.IR ex
+command description of the
+.BR \(mir
+option.
+.IP "\fB\(miR\fP" 10
+See the
+.IR ex
+command description of the
+.BR \(miR
+option.
+.IP "\fB\(mit\ \fItagstring\fR" 10
+See the
+.IR ex
+command description of the
+.BR \(mit
+option.
+.IP "\fB\(miw\ \fIsize\fR" 10
+See the
+.IR ex
+command description of the
+.BR \(miw
+option.
+.SH OPERANDS
+See the OPERANDS section of the
+.IR ex
+command for a description of the operands supported by the
+.IR vi
+command.
+.SH STDIN
+If standard input is not a terminal device, the results are undefined.
+The standard input consists of a series of commands and input text, as
+described in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.P
+If a read from the standard input returns an error, or if the editor
+detects an end-of-file condition from the standard input, it shall be
+equivalent to a SIGHUP asynchronous event.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+See the INPUT FILES section of the
+.IR ex
+command for a description of the input files supported by the
+.IR vi
+command.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+See the ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES section of the
+.IR ex
+command for the environment variables that affect the execution of the
+.IR vi
+command.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+See the ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS section of the
+.IR ex
+for the asynchronous events that affect the execution of the
+.IR vi
+command.
+.SH STDOUT
+If standard output is not a terminal device, undefined results occur.
+.P
+Standard output may be used for writing prompts to the user, for
+informational messages, and for writing lines from the file.
+.SH STDERR
+If standard output is not a terminal device, undefined results occur.
+.P
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+See the OUTPUT FILES section of the
+.IR ex
+command for a description of the output files supported by the
+.IR vi
+command.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+If the terminal does not have the capabilities necessary to support an
+unspecified portion of the
+.IR vi
+definition, implementations shall start initially in
+.IR ex
+mode or open mode. Otherwise, after initialization,
+.IR vi
+shall be in command mode; text input mode can be entered by one of
+several commands used to insert or change text. In text input mode,
+<ESC>
+can be used to return to command mode; other uses of
+<ESC>
+are described later in this section; see
+.IR "Terminate Command or Input Mode".
+.SS "Initialization in ex and vi"
+.P
+See
+.IR "Initialization in ex and vi"
+for a description of
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+initialization for the
+.IR vi
+utility.
+.SS "Command Descriptions in vi"
+.P
+The following symbols are used in this reference page to represent
+arguments to commands.
+.IP "\fIbuffer\fR" 8
+See the description of
+.IR buffer
+in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section of the
+.IR ex
+utility; see
+.IR "Command Descriptions in ex".
+.RS 8 
+.P
+In open and visual mode, when a command synopsis shows both [\c
+.IR buffer ]
+and [\c
+.IR count ]
+preceding the command name, they can be specified in either order.
+.RE
+.IP "\fIcount\fR" 8
+A positive integer used as an optional argument to most commands,
+either to give a repeat count or as a size. This argument is optional
+and shall default to 1 unless otherwise specified.
+.RS 8 
+.P
+The Synopsis lines for the
+.IR vi
+commands
+<control>\(hyG,
+<control>\(hyL,
+<control>\(hyR,
+<control>\(hy],
+.BR % ,
+.BR & ,
+.BR ^ ,
+.BR D ,
+.BR m ,
+.BR M ,
+.BR Q ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR U ,
+and
+.BR ZZ
+do not have
+.IR count
+as an optional argument. Regardless, it shall not be an error to
+specify a
+.IR count
+to these commands, and any specified
+.IR count
+shall be ignored.
+.RE
+.IP "\fImotion\fR" 8
+An optional trailing argument used by the
+.BR ! ,
+.BR < ,
+.BR > ,
+.BR c ,
+.BR d ,
+and
+.BR y
+commands, which is used to indicate the region of text that shall be
+affected by the command. The motion can be either one of the command
+characters repeated or one of several other
+.IR vi
+commands (listed in the following table). Each of the applicable
+commands specifies the region of text matched by repeating the command;
+each command that can be used as a motion command specifies the region
+of text it affects.
+.RS 8 
+.P
+Commands that take
+.IR motion
+arguments operate on either lines or characters, depending on the
+circumstances. When operating on lines, all lines that fall partially
+or wholly within the text region specified for the command shall be
+affected. When operating on characters, only the exact characters in
+the specified text region shall be affected. Each motion command
+specifies this individually.
+.P
+When commands that may be motion commands are not used as motion
+commands, they shall set the current position to the current line and
+column as specified.
+.P
+The following commands shall be valid cursor motion commands:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<apostrophe>       (    -    j    H
+<carriage-return>  )    $    k    L
+<comma>            [[   %    l    M
+<control>-H        ]]   _    n    N
+<control>-N        {    ;    t    T
+<control>-P        }    ?    w    W
+<grave-accent>     ^    b    B
+<newline>          +    e    E
+<space>            |    f    F
+<zero>             /    h    G
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Any
+.IR count
+that is specified to a command that has an associated motion command
+shall be applied to the motion command. If a
+.IR count
+is applied to both the command and its associated motion command, the
+effect shall be multiplicative.
+.RE
+.P
+The following symbols are used in this section to specify locations
+in the edit buffer:
+.IP "\fIcurrent\ character\fP" 8
+.br
+The character that is currently indicated by the cursor.
+.IP "\fIend\ of\ a\ line\fP" 8
+.br
+The point located between the last non-\c
+<newline>
+(if any) and the terminating
+<newline>
+of a line. For an empty line, this location coincides with the
+beginning of the line.
+.IP "\fIend\ of\ the\ edit\ buffer\fP" 8
+.br
+The location corresponding to the end of the last line in the edit
+buffer.
+.P
+The following symbols are used in this section to specify command
+actions:
+.IP "\fIbigword\fP" 8
+In the POSIX locale,
+.IR vi
+shall recognize four kinds of
+.IR bigwords :
+.RS 8 
+.IP " 1." 4
+A maximal sequence of non-\c
+<blank>
+characters preceded and followed by
+<blank>
+characters or the beginning or end of a line or the edit buffer
+.IP " 2." 4
+One or more sequential blank lines
+.IP " 3." 4
+The first character in the edit buffer
+.IP " 4." 4
+The last non-\c
+<newline>
+in the edit buffer
+.RE
+.IP "\fIword\fP" 8
+In the POSIX locale,
+.IR vi
+shall recognize five kinds of words:
+.RS 8 
+.IP " 1." 4
+A maximal sequence of letters, digits, and underscores, delimited at
+both ends by:
+.RS 4 
+.IP -- 4
+Characters other than letters, digits, or underscores
+.IP -- 4
+The beginning or end of a line
+.IP -- 4
+The beginning or end of the edit buffer
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+A maximal sequence of characters other than letters, digits, underscores, or
+<blank>
+characters, delimited at both ends by:
+.RS 4 
+.IP -- 4
+A letter, digit, underscore
+.IP -- 4
+<blank>
+characters
+.IP -- 4
+The beginning or end of a line
+.IP -- 4
+The beginning or end of the edit buffer
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+One or more sequential blank lines
+.IP " 4." 4
+The first character in the edit buffer
+.IP " 5." 4
+The last non-\c
+<newline>
+in the edit buffer
+.RE
+.IP "\fIsection\ boundary\fR" 8
+.br
+A
+.IR "section boundary"
+is one of the following:
+.RS 8 
+.IP " 1." 4
+A line whose first character is a
+<form-feed>
+.IP " 2." 4
+A line whose first character is an open curly brace (\c
+.BR '{' )
+.IP " 3." 4
+A line whose first character is a
+<period>
+and whose second and third characters match a two-character pair in the
+.BR sections
+edit option (see
+.IR ed )
+.IP " 4." 4
+A line whose first character is a
+<period>
+and whose only other character matches the first character of a
+two-character pair in the
+.BR sections
+edit option, where the second character of the two-character pair is a
+<space>
+.IP " 5." 4
+The first line of the edit buffer
+.IP " 6." 4
+The last line of the edit buffer if the last line of the edit buffer is
+empty or if it is a
+.BR ]]
+or
+.BR }
+command; otherwise, the last non-\c
+<newline>
+of the last line of the edit buffer
+.RE
+.IP "\fIparagraph\ boundary\fR" 8
+.br
+A
+.IR "paragraph boundary"
+is one of the following:
+.RS 8 
+.IP " 1." 4
+A section boundary
+.IP " 2." 4
+A line whose first character is a
+<period>
+and whose second and third characters match a two-character pair in the
+.BR paragraphs
+edit option (see
+.IR ed )
+.IP " 3." 4
+A line whose first character is a
+<period>
+and whose only other character matches the first character of a
+two-character pair in the
+.IR paragraphs
+edit option, where the second character of the two-character pair is a
+<space>
+.IP " 4." 4
+One or more sequential blank lines
+.RE
+.IP "\fIremembered\ search\ direction\fR" 8
+.br
+See the description of \fIremembered search direction\fP in
+.IR ed .
+.IP "\fIsentence\ boundary\fR" 8
+.br
+A
+.IR "sentence boundary"
+is one of the following:
+.RS 8 
+.IP " 1." 4
+A paragraph boundary
+.IP " 2." 4
+The first non-\c
+<blank>
+that occurs after a paragraph boundary
+.IP " 3." 4
+The first non-\c
+<blank>
+that occurs after a
+<period>
+(\c
+.BR '.' ),
+<exclamation-mark>
+(\c
+.BR '!' ),
+or
+<question-mark>
+(\c
+.BR '?' ),
+followed by two
+<space>
+characters or the end of a line; any number of closing parenthesis (\c
+.BR ')' ),
+closing brackets (\c
+.BR ']' ),
+double-quote (\c
+.BR '\&"' ),
+or single-quote (\c
+<apostrophe>)
+characters can appear between the punctuation mark and the two
+<space>
+characters or end-of-line
+.RE
+.P
+In the remainder of the description of the
+.IR vi
+utility, the term ``buffer line'' refers to a line in the edit buffer
+and the term ``display line'' refers to the line or lines on the
+display screen used to display one buffer line. The term ``current
+line'' refers to a specific ``buffer line''.
+.P
+If there are display lines on the screen for which there are no
+corresponding buffer lines because they correspond to lines that would
+be after the end of the file, they shall be displayed as a single
+<tilde>
+(\c
+.BR '~' )
+character, plus the terminating
+<newline>.
+.P
+The last line of the screen shall be used to report errors or display
+informational messages. It shall also be used to display the input for
+``line-oriented commands'' (\c
+.BR / ,
+.BR ? ,
+.BR : ,
+and
+.BR ! ).
+When a line-oriented command is executed, the editor shall enter text
+input mode on the last line on the screen, using the respective command
+characters as prompt characters. (In the case of the
+.BR !
+command, the associated motion shall be entered by the user before the
+editor enters text input mode.) The line entered by the user shall be
+terminated by a
+<newline>,
+a non-\c
+<control>\(hyV-escaped
+<carriage-return>,
+or unescaped
+<ESC>.
+It is unspecified if more characters than require a display width minus
+one column number of screen columns can be entered.
+.P
+If any command is executed that overwrites a portion of the screen
+other than the last line of the screen (for example, the
+.IR ex
+.BR suspend
+or
+.BR !
+commands), other than the
+.IR ex
+.BR shell
+command, the user shall be prompted for a character before the screen
+is refreshed and the edit session continued.
+.P
+<tab>
+characters shall take up the number of columns on the screen set by the
+.BR tabstop
+edit option (see
+.IR ed ),
+unless there are less than that number of columns before the display
+margin that will cause the displayed line to be folded; in this case,
+they shall only take up the number of columns up to that boundary.
+.P
+The cursor shall be placed on the current line and relative to the
+current column as specified by each command described in the following
+sections.
+.P
+In open mode, if the current line is not already displayed, then it
+shall be displayed.
+.P
+In visual mode, if the current line is not displayed, then the lines
+that are displayed shall be expanded, scrolled, or redrawn to cause an
+unspecified portion of the current line to be displayed. If the screen
+is redrawn, no more than the number of display lines specified by the
+value of the
+.BR window
+edit option shall be displayed (unless the current line cannot be
+completely displayed in the number of display lines specified by the
+.BR window
+edit option) and the current line shall be positioned as close to the
+center of the displayed lines as possible (within the constraints
+imposed by the distance of the line from the beginning or end of the
+edit buffer). If the current line is before the first line in the
+display and the screen is scrolled, an unspecified portion of the
+current line shall be placed on the first line of the display. If the
+current line is after the last line in the display and the screen is
+scrolled, an unspecified portion of the current line shall be placed on
+the last line of the display.
+.P
+In visual mode, if a line from the edit buffer (other than the current
+line) does not entirely fit into the lines at the bottom of the display
+that are available for its presentation, the editor may choose not to
+display any portion of the line. The lines of the display that do not
+contain text from the edit buffer for this reason shall each consist of
+a single
+.BR '@' 
+character.
+.P
+In visual mode, the editor may choose for unspecified reasons to not
+update lines in the display to correspond to the underlying edit buffer
+text. The lines of the display that do not correctly correspond to text
+from the edit buffer for this reason shall consist of a single
+.BR '@' 
+character (plus the terminating
+<newline>),
+and the
+<control>\(hyR
+command shall cause the editor to update the screen to correctly
+represent the edit buffer.
+.P
+Open and visual mode commands that set the current column set it to a
+column position in the display, and not a character position in the
+line. In this case, however, the column position in the display shall
+be calculated for an infinite width display; for example, the column
+related to a character that is part of a line that has been folded onto
+additional screen lines will be offset from the display line column
+where the buffer line begins, not from the beginning of a particular
+display line.
+.P
+The display cursor column in the display is based on the value of the
+current column, as follows, with each rule applied in turn:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the current column is after the last display line column used by the
+displayed line, the display cursor column shall be set to the last
+display line column occupied by the last non-\c
+<newline>
+in the current line; otherwise, the display cursor column shall be set
+to the current column.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the character of which some portion is displayed in the display line
+column specified by the display cursor column requires more than a
+single display line column:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+If in text input mode, the display cursor column shall be adjusted to
+the first display line column in which any portion of that character is
+displayed.
+.IP " b." 4
+Otherwise, the display cursor column shall be adjusted to the last
+display line column in which any portion of that character is
+displayed.
+.RE
+.P
+The current column shall not be changed by these adjustments to the
+display cursor column.
+.P
+If an error occurs during the parsing or execution of a
+.IR vi
+command:
+.IP " *" 4
+The terminal shall be alerted. Execution of the
+.IR vi
+command shall stop, and the cursor (for example, the current line and
+column) shall not be further modified.
+.IP " *" 4
+Unless otherwise specified by the following command sections, it is
+unspecified whether an informational message shall be displayed.
+.IP " *" 4
+Any partially entered
+.IR vi
+command shall be discarded.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the
+.IR vi
+command resulted from a
+.BR map
+expansion, all characters from that
+.BR map
+expansion shall be discarded, except as otherwise specified by the
+.BR map
+command (see
+.IR ed ).
+.IP " *" 4
+If the
+.IR vi
+command resulted from the execution of a buffer, no further commands
+caused by the execution of the buffer shall be executed.
+.SS "Page Backwards"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR <control>-B
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If in open mode, the
+<control>\(hyB
+command shall behave identically to the
+.BR z
+command. Otherwise, if the current line is the first line of the edit
+buffer, it shall be an error.
+.P
+If the
+.BR window
+edit option is less than 3, display a screen where the last line of the
+display shall be some portion of:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(\fIcurrent first line\fR) \(mi1
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+otherwise, display a screen where the first line of the display shall
+be some portion of:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(\fIcurrent first line\fR) \(mi \fIcount\fR x ((window edit option) \(mi2)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If this calculation would result in a line that is before the first
+line of the edit buffer, the first line of the display shall display
+some portion of the first line of the edit buffer.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+If no lines from the previous display remain on the screen, set to the
+last line of the display; otherwise, set to (\c
+.IR line
+\(mi the number of new lines displayed on this screen).
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Scroll Forward"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR <control>-D
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the current line is the last line of the edit buffer, it shall be an
+error.
+.P
+If no
+.IR count
+is specified,
+.IR count
+shall default to the
+.IR count
+associated with the previous
+<control>\(hyD
+or
+<control>\(hyU
+command. If there was no previous
+<control>\(hyD
+or
+<control>\(hyU
+command,
+.IR count
+shall default to the value of the
+.BR scroll
+edit option.
+.P
+If in open mode, write lines starting with the line after the current
+line, until
+.IR count
+lines or the last line of the file have been written.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+If the current line +
+.IR count
+is past the last line of the edit buffer, set to the last line of the
+edit buffer; otherwise, set to the current line +
+.IR count .
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Scroll Forward by Line"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR <control>-E
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Display the line count lines after the last line currently displayed.
+.P
+If the last line of the edit buffer is displayed, it shall be an error.
+If there is no line
+.IR count
+lines after the last line currently displayed, the last line of the
+display shall display some portion of the last line of the edit
+buffer.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged if the previous current character is displayed; otherwise,
+set to the first line displayed.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Page Forward"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR <control>-F
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If in open mode, the
+<control>\(hyF
+command shall behave identically to the
+.BR z
+command. Otherwise, if the current line is the last line of the edit
+buffer, it shall be an error.
+.P
+If the
+.BR window
+edit option is less than 3, display a screen where the first line of
+the display shall be some portion of:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(\fIcurrent last line\fR) +1
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+otherwise, display a screen where the first line of the display shall
+be some portion of:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(\fIcurrent first line\fR) + \fIcount\fR x ((window edit option) \(mi2)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If this calculation would result in a line that is after the last line
+of the edit buffer, the last line of the display shall display some
+portion of the last line of the edit buffer.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+If no lines from the previous display remain on the screen, set to the
+first line of the display; otherwise, set to (\c
+.IR line
++ the number of new lines displayed on this screen).
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Display Information"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<control>-G
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+This command shall be equivalent to the
+.IR ex
+.BR file
+command.
+.SS "Move Cursor Backwards"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR <control>-H
+.br
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR h
+.br
+the current \fIerase\fP character (see stty)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If there are no characters before the current character on the current
+line, it shall be an error. If there are less than
+.IR count
+previous characters on the current line,
+.IR count
+shall be adjusted to the number of previous characters on the line.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The text region shall be from the character before the starting cursor
+up to and including the
+.IR count th
+character before the starting cursor.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Any text copied to a buffer shall be in character mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to (\c
+.IR column
+\(mi the number of columns occupied by
+.IR count
+characters ending with the previous current column).
+.SS "Move Down"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR <newline>
+.br
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR <control>-J
+.br
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR <control>-M
+.br
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR <control>-N
+.br
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR j
+.br
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR <carriage-return>
+.br
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR +
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If there are less than
+.IR count
+lines after the current line in the edit buffer, it shall be an error.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The text region shall include the starting line and the next
+.IR count
+\(mi 1 lines.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Any text copied to a buffer shall be in line mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to
+.IR "current line" +
+.IR count .
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>
+for the
+<carriage-return>,
+<control>\(hyM,
+and
+.BR +
+commands; otherwise, unchanged.
+.SS "Clear and Redisplay"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<control>-L
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If in open mode, clear the screen and redisplay the current line.
+Otherwise, clear and redisplay the screen.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Move Up"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR <control>-P
+.br
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR k
+.br
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR \(mi
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If there are less than
+.IR count
+lines before the current line in the edit buffer, it shall be an
+error.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The text region shall include the starting line and the previous
+.IR count
+lines.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Any text copied to a buffer shall be in line mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to
+.IR "current line"
+\(mi
+.IR count .
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>
+for the
+.BR \(mi
+command; otherwise, unchanged.
+.SS "Redraw Screen"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<control>-R
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If any lines have been deleted from the display screen and flagged as
+deleted on the terminal using the
+.BR @
+convention (see the beginning of the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section),
+they shall be redisplayed to match the contents of the edit buffer.
+.P
+It is unspecified whether lines flagged with
+.BR @
+because they do not fit on the terminal display shall be affected.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Scroll Backward"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR <control>-U
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the current line is the first line of the edit buffer, it shall be
+an error.
+.P
+If no
+.IR count
+is specified,
+.IR count
+shall default to the
+.IR count
+associated with the previous
+<control>\(hyD
+or
+<control>\(hyU
+command. If there was no previous
+<control>\(hyD
+or
+<control>\(hyU
+command,
+.IR count
+shall default to the value of the
+.BR scroll
+edit option.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+If
+.IR count
+is greater than the current line, set to 1; otherwise, set to the
+current line \(mi
+.IR count .
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Scroll Backward by Line"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR <control>-Y
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Display the line
+.IR count
+lines before the first line currently displayed.
+.P
+If the current line is the first line of the edit buffer, it shall be
+an error. If this calculation would result in a line that is before the
+first line of the edit buffer, the first line of the display shall
+display some portion of the first line of the edit buffer.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged if the previous current character is displayed; otherwise,
+set to the first line displayed.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Edit the Alternate File"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<control>-^
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+This command shall be equivalent to the
+.IR ex
+.BR edit
+command, with the alternate pathname as its argument.
+.SS "Terminate Command or Input Mode"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<ESC>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If a partial
+.IR vi
+command (as defined by at least one, non-\c
+.IR count
+character) has been entered, discard the
+.IR count
+and the command character(s).
+.P
+Otherwise, if no command characters have been entered, and the
+<ESC>
+was the result of a map expansion, the terminal shall be alerted and
+the
+<ESC>
+character shall be discarded, but it shall not be an error.
+.P
+Otherwise, it shall be an error.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Search for tagstring"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<control>-]
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the current character is not a word or
+<blank>,
+it shall be an error.
+.P
+This command shall be equivalent to the
+.IR ex
+.BR tag
+command, with the argument to that command defined as follows.
+.P
+If the current character is a
+<blank>:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Skip all
+<blank>
+characters after the cursor up to the end of the line.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the end of the line is reached, it shall be an error.
+.P
+Then, the argument to the
+.IR ex
+.BR tag
+command shall be the current character and all subsequent characters,
+up to the first non-word character or the end of the line.
+.SS "Move Cursor Forward"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR <space>
+.br
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR l\fR  (ell)\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If there are less than
+.IR count
+non-\c
+<newline>
+characters after the cursor on the current line,
+.IR count
+shall be adjusted to the number of non-\c
+<newline>
+characters after the cursor on the line.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the current or
+.IR count th
+character after the cursor is the last non-\c
+<newline>
+in the line, the text region shall be comprised of the current
+character up to and including the last non-\c
+<newline>
+in the line. Otherwise, the text region shall be from the current
+character up to, but not including, the
+.IR count th
+character after the cursor.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Any text copied to a buffer shall be in character mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+If there are no non-\c
+<newline>
+characters after the current character on the current line, it shall be
+an error.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to the last column that displays any portion of the
+.IR count th
+character after the current character.
+.SS "Replace Text with Results from Shell Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR ! \fImotion shell-commands\fR <newline>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the motion command is the
+.BR !
+command repeated:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the edit buffer is empty and no
+.IR count
+was supplied, the command shall be the equivalent of the
+.IR ex
+.BR :read
+.BR !
+command, with the text input, and no text shall be copied to any
+buffer.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+If there are less than
+.IR count
+\(mi1 lines after the current line in the edit buffer, it shall be an
+error.
+.IP " b." 4
+The text region shall be from the current line up to and including the
+next
+.IR count
+\(mi1 lines.
+.RE
+.P
+Otherwise, the text region shall be the lines in which any character of
+the text region specified by the motion command appear.
+.P
+Any text copied to a buffer shall be in line mode.
+.P
+This command shall be equivalent to the
+.IR ex
+.BR !
+command for the specified lines.
+.SS "Move Cursor to End-of-Line"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR $
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+It shall be an error if there are less than (\c
+.IR count
+\(mi1) lines after the current line in the edit buffer.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If
+.IR count
+is 1:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+It shall be an error if the line is empty.
+.IP " b." 4
+Otherwise, the text region shall consist of all characters from the
+starting cursor to the last non-\c
+<newline>
+in the line, inclusive, and any text copied to a buffer shall be in
+character mode.
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise, if the starting cursor position is at or before the first
+non-\c
+<blank>
+in the line, the text region shall consist of the current and the next
+.IR count
+\(mi1 lines, and any text saved to a buffer shall be in line mode.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Otherwise, the text region shall consist of all characters from the
+starting cursor to the last non-\c
+<newline>
+in the line that is
+.IR count
+\(mi1 lines forward from the current line, and any text copied to a
+buffer shall be in character mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the
+.IR "current line"
++
+.IR count \(mi1.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+The current column is set to the last display line column of the last
+non-\c
+<newline>
+in the line, or column position 1 if the line is empty.
+.P
+The current column shall be adjusted to be on the last display line
+column of the last non-\c
+<newline>
+of the current line as subsequent commands change the current line,
+until a command changes the current column.
+.SS "Move to Matching Character"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+%
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the character at the current position is not a parenthesis, bracket,
+or curly brace, search forward in the line to the first one of those
+characters. If no such character is found, it shall be an error.
+.P
+The matching character shall be the parenthesis, bracket, or curly
+brace matching the parenthesis, bracket, or curly brace, respectively,
+that was at the current position or that was found on the current
+line.
+.P
+Matching shall be determined as follows, for an open parenthesis:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Set a counter to 1.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Search forwards until a parenthesis is found or the end of the edit
+buffer is reached.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If the end of the edit buffer is reached, it shall be an error.
+.IP " 4." 4
+If an open parenthesis is found, increment the counter by 1.
+.IP " 5." 4
+If a close parenthesis is found, decrement the counter by 1.
+.IP " 6." 4
+If the counter is zero, the current character is the matching
+character.
+.P
+Matching for a close parenthesis shall be equivalent, except that the
+search shall be backwards, from the starting character to the beginning
+of the buffer, a close parenthesis shall increment the counter by 1,
+and an open parenthesis shall decrement the counter by 1.
+.P
+Matching for brackets and curly braces shall be equivalent, except that
+searching shall be done for open and close brackets or open and close
+curly braces. It is implementation-defined whether other characters
+are searched for and matched as well.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the matching cursor was after the starting cursor in the edit
+buffer, and the starting cursor position was at or before the first
+non-\c
+<blank>
+non-\c
+<newline>
+in the starting line, and the matching cursor position was at or after
+the last non-\c
+<blank>
+non-\c
+<newline>
+in the matching line, the text region shall consist of the current line
+to the matching line, inclusive, and any text copied to a buffer shall
+be in line mode.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the matching cursor was before the starting cursor in the edit
+buffer, and the starting cursor position was at or after the last
+non-\c
+<blank>
+non-\c
+<newline>
+in the starting line, and the matching cursor position was at or before
+the first non-\c
+<blank>
+non-\c
+<newline>
+in the matching line, the text region shall consist of the current line
+to the matching line, inclusive, and any text copied to a buffer shall
+be in line mode.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Otherwise, the text region shall consist of the starting character to
+the matching character, inclusive, and any text copied to a buffer
+shall be in character mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the line where the matching character is located.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to the last column where any portion of the matching character is
+displayed.
+.SS "Repeat Substitution"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+&
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Repeat the previous substitution command. This command shall be
+equivalent to the
+.IR ex
+.BR &
+command with the current line as its addresses, and without
+.IR options ,
+.IR count ,
+or
+.IR flags .
+.SS "Return to Previous Context at Beginning of Line"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\&' \fIcharacter\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+It shall be an error if there is no line in the edit buffer marked by
+.IR character .
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the starting cursor is after the marked cursor, then the locations
+of the starting cursor and the marked cursor in the edit buffer shall
+be logically swapped.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The text region shall consist of the starting line up to and including
+the marked line, and any text copied to a buffer shall be in line
+mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the line referenced by the mark.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Return to Previous Context"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\&` \fIcharacter\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+It shall be an error if the marked line is no longer in the edit
+buffer. If the marked line no longer contains a character in the saved
+numbered character position, it shall be as if the marked position is
+the first non-\c
+<blank>.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+It shall be an error if the marked cursor references the same character
+in the edit buffer as the starting cursor.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the starting cursor is after the marked cursor, then the locations
+of the starting cursor and the marked cursor in the edit buffer shall
+be logically swapped.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If the starting line is empty or the starting cursor is at or before
+the first non-\c
+<blank>
+non-\c
+<newline>
+of the starting line, and the marked cursor line is empty or the marked
+cursor references the first character of the marked cursor line, the
+text region shall consist of all lines containing characters from the
+starting cursor to the line before the marked cursor line, inclusive,
+and any text copied to a buffer shall be in line mode.
+.IP " 4." 4
+Otherwise, if the marked cursor line is empty or the marked cursor
+references a character at or before the first non-\c
+<blank>
+non-\c
+<newline>
+of the marked cursor line, the region of text shall be from the
+starting cursor to the last non-\c
+<newline>
+of the line before the marked cursor line, inclusive, and any text
+copied to a buffer shall be in character mode.
+.IP " 5." 4
+Otherwise, the region of text shall be from the starting cursor
+(inclusive), to the marked cursor (exclusive), and any text copied to a
+buffer shall be in character mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the line referenced by the mark.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to the last column in which any portion of the character referenced
+by the mark is displayed.
+.SS "Return to Previous Section"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR [[
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Move the cursor backward through the edit buffer to the first character
+of the previous section boundary,
+.IR count
+times.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the starting cursor was at the first character of the starting line
+or the starting line was empty, and the first character of the boundary
+was the first character of the boundary line, the text region shall
+consist of the current line up to and including the line where the
+.IR count th
+next boundary starts, and any text copied to a buffer shall be in line
+mode.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the boundary was the last line of the edit buffer or the last non-\c
+<newline>
+of the last line of the edit buffer, the text region shall consist of
+the last character in the edit buffer up to and including the starting
+character, and any text saved to a buffer shall be in character mode.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Otherwise, the text region shall consist of the starting character up
+to but not including the first character in the
+.IR count th
+next boundary, and any text copied to a buffer shall be in character
+mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the line where the
+.IR count th
+next boundary in the edit buffer starts.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to the last column in which any portion of the first character of
+the
+.IR count th
+next boundary is displayed, or column position 1 if the line is empty.
+.SS "Move to Next Section"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR ]]
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Move the cursor forward through the edit buffer to the first character
+of the next section boundary,
+.IR count
+times.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the starting cursor was at the first character of the starting line
+or the starting line was empty, and the first character of the boundary
+was the first character of the boundary line, the text region shall
+consist of the current line up to and including the line where the
+.IR count th
+previous boundary starts, and any text copied to a buffer shall be in
+line mode.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the boundary was the first line of the edit buffer, the text region
+shall consist of the first character in the edit buffer up to but not
+including the starting character, and any text copied to a buffer shall
+be in character mode.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Otherwise, the text region shall consist of the first character in the
+.IR count th
+previous section boundary up to but not including the starting
+character, and any text copied to a buffer shall be in character mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the line where the
+.IR count th
+previous boundary in the edit buffer starts.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to the last column in which any portion of the first character of
+the
+.IR count th
+previous boundary is displayed, or column position 1 if the line is
+empty.
+.SS "Move to First Non-<blank> Position on Current Line"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\&^
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the line has no non-\c
+<blank>
+non-\c
+<newline>
+characters, or if the cursor is at the first non-\c
+<blank>
+non-\c
+<newline>
+of the line, it shall be an error.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the cursor is before the first non-\c
+<blank>
+non-\c
+<newline>
+of the line, the text region shall be comprised of the current
+character, up to, but not including, the first non-\c
+<blank>
+non-\c
+<newline>
+of the line.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If the cursor is after the first non-\c
+<blank>
+non-\c
+<newline>
+of the line, the text region shall be from the character before the
+starting cursor up to and including the first non-\c
+<blank>
+non-\c
+<newline>
+of the line.
+.IP " 4." 4
+Any text copied to a buffer shall be in character mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Current and Line Above"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR _
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If there are less than
+.IR count
+\(mi1 lines after the current line in the edit buffer, it shall be an
+error.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If
+.IR count
+is less than 2, the text region shall be the current line.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise, the text region shall include the starting line and the next
+.IR count
+\(mi1 lines.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Any text copied to a buffer shall be in line mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to current line +
+.IR count
+\(mi1.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Move Back to Beginning of Sentence"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR (
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Move backward to the beginning of a sentence. This command shall be
+equivalent to the
+.BR [[
+command, with the exception that sentence boundaries shall be used
+instead of section boundaries.
+.SS "Move Forward to Beginning of Sentence"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR )
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Move forward to the beginning of a sentence. This command shall be
+equivalent to the
+.BR ]]
+command, with the exception that sentence boundaries shall be used
+instead of section boundaries.
+.SS "Move Back to Preceding Paragraph"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR {
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Move back to the beginning of the preceding paragraph. This command
+shall be equivalent to the
+.BR [[
+command, with the exception that paragraph boundaries shall be used
+instead of section boundaries.
+.SS "Move Forward to Next Paragraph"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR }
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Move forward to the beginning of the next paragraph. This command
+shall be equivalent to the
+.BR ]]
+command, with the exception that paragraph boundaries shall be used
+instead of section boundaries.
+.SS "Move to Specific Column Position"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR |
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+For the purposes of this command, lines that are too long for the
+current display and that have been folded shall be treated as having a
+single, 1\(mibased, number of columns.
+.P
+If there are less than
+.IR count
+columns in which characters from the current line are displayed on the
+screen,
+.IR count
+shall be adjusted to be the last column in which any portion of the
+line is displayed on the screen.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the line is empty, or the cursor character is the same as the
+character on the
+.IR count th
+column of the line, it shall be an error.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the cursor is before the
+.IR count th
+column of the line, the text region shall be comprised of the current
+character, up to but not including the character on the
+.IR count th
+column of the line.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If the cursor is after the
+.IR count th
+column of the line, the text region shall be from the character before
+the starting cursor up to and including the character on the
+.IR count th
+column of the line.
+.IP " 4." 4
+Any text copied to a buffer shall be in character mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to the last column in which any portion of the character that is
+displayed in the
+.IR count
+column of the line is displayed.
+.SS "Reverse Find Character"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR ,
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the last
+.BR F ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR T ,
+or
+.BR t
+command was
+.BR F ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR T ,
+or
+.BR t ,
+this command shall be equivalent to an
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR t ,
+or
+.BR T
+command, respectively, with the specified
+.IR count
+and the same search character.
+.P
+If there was no previous
+.BR F ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR T ,
+or
+.BR t
+command, it shall be an error.
+.SS "Repeat"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR .
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Repeat the last
+.BR ! ,
+.BR < ,
+.BR > ,
+.BR A ,
+.BR C ,
+.BR D ,
+.BR I ,
+.BR J ,
+.BR O ,
+.BR P ,
+.BR R ,
+.BR S ,
+.BR X ,
+.BR Y ,
+.BR a ,
+.BR c ,
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR p ,
+.BR r ,
+.BR s ,
+.BR x ,
+.BR y ,
+or
+.BR ~
+command. It shall be an error if none of these commands have been
+executed. Commands (other than commands that enter text input mode)
+executed as a result of map expansions, shall not change the value of
+the last repeatable command.
+.P
+Repeated commands with associated motion commands shall repeat the
+motion command as well; however, any specified
+.IR count
+shall replace the
+.IR count (s)
+that were originally specified to the repeated command or its
+associated motion command.
+.P
+If the motion component of the repeated command is
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR t ,
+or
+.BR T ,
+the repeated command shall not set the remembered search character for
+the
+.BR ;
+and
+.BR ,
+commands.
+.P
+If the repeated command is
+.BR p
+or
+.BR P ,
+and the buffer associated with that command was a numeric buffer named
+with a number less than 9, the buffer associated with the repeated
+command shall be set to be the buffer named by the name of the previous
+buffer logically incremented by 1.
+.P
+If the repeated character is a text input command, the input text
+associated with that command is repeated literally:
+.IP " *" 4
+Input characters are neither macro or abbreviation-expanded.
+.IP " *" 4
+Input characters are not interpreted in any special way with the
+exception that
+<newline>,
+<carriage-return>,
+and
+<control>\(hyT
+behave as described in
+.IR "Input Mode Commands in vi".
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set as described for the repeated command.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set as described for the repeated command.
+.SS "Find Regular Expression"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+/
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the input line contains no non-\c
+<newline>
+characters, it shall be equivalent to a line containing only the
+last regular expression encountered. The enhanced regular expressions
+supported by
+.IR vi
+are described in
+.IR "Regular Expressions in ex".
+.P
+Otherwise, the line shall be interpreted as one or more regular
+expressions, optionally followed by an address offset or a
+.IR vi
+.BR z
+command.
+.P
+If the regular expression is not the last regular expression on the
+line, or if a line offset or
+.BR z
+command is specified, the regular expression shall be terminated by an
+unescaped
+.BR '/' 
+character, which shall not be used as part of the regular expression.
+If the regular expression is not the first regular expression on the
+line, it shall be preceded by zero or more
+<blank>
+characters, a
+<semicolon>,
+zero or more
+<blank>
+characters, and a leading
+.BR '/' 
+character, which shall not be interpreted as part of the regular
+expression. It shall be an error to precede any regular expression with
+any characters other than these.
+.P
+Each search shall begin from the character after the first character of
+the last match (or, if it is the first search, after the cursor). If
+the
+.BR wrapscan
+edit option is set, the search shall continue to the character before
+the starting cursor character; otherwise, to the end of the edit
+buffer. It shall be an error if any search fails to find a match, and
+an informational message to this effect shall be displayed.
+.P
+An optional address offset (see
+.IR "Addressing in ex")
+can be specified after the last regular expression by including a
+trailing
+.BR '/' 
+character after the regular expression and specifying the address
+offset. This offset will be from the line containing the match for the
+last regular expression specified. It shall be an error if the line
+offset would indicate a line address less than 1 or greater than the
+last line in the edit buffer. An address offset of zero shall be
+supported. It shall be an error to follow the address offset with any
+other characters than
+<blank>
+characters.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command, an optional
+.BR z
+command (see
+.IR "Redraw Window")
+can be specified after the last regular expression by including a
+trailing
+.BR '/' 
+character after the regular expression, zero or more
+<blank>
+characters, a
+.BR 'z' ,
+zero or more
+<blank>
+characters, an optional new
+.BR window
+edit option value, zero or more
+<blank>
+characters, and a location character. The effect shall be as if the
+.BR z
+command was executed after the
+.BR /
+command. It shall be an error to follow the
+.BR z
+command with any other characters than
+<blank>
+characters.
+.P
+The remembered search direction shall be set to forward.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+It shall be an error if the last match references the same character in
+the edit buffer as the starting cursor.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If any address offset is specified, the last match shall be adjusted by
+the specified offset as described previously.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If the starting cursor is after the last match, then the locations of
+the starting cursor and the last match in the edit buffer shall be
+logically swapped.
+.IP " 4." 4
+If any address offset is specified, the text region shall consist of
+all lines containing characters from the starting cursor to the last
+match line, inclusive, and any text copied to a buffer shall be in line
+mode.
+.IP " 5." 4
+Otherwise, if the starting line is empty or the starting cursor is at
+or before the first non-\c
+<blank>
+non-\c
+<newline>
+of the starting line, and the last match line is empty or the last
+match starts at the first character of the last match line, the text
+region shall consist of all lines containing characters from the
+starting cursor to the line before the last match line, inclusive, and
+any text copied to a buffer shall be in line mode.
+.IP " 6." 4
+Otherwise, if the last match line is empty or the last match begins at
+a character at or before the first non-\c
+<blank>
+non-\c
+<newline>
+of the last match line, the region of text shall be from the current
+cursor to the last non-\c
+<newline>
+of the line before the last match line, inclusive, and any text copied
+to a buffer shall be in character mode.
+.IP " 7." 4
+Otherwise, the region of text shall be from the current cursor
+(inclusive), to the first character of the last match (exclusive), and
+any text copied to a buffer shall be in character mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+If a match is found, set to the last matched line plus the address
+offset, if any; otherwise, unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to the last column on which any portion of the first character in
+the last matched string is displayed, if a match is found; otherwise,
+unchanged.
+.SS "Move to First Character in Line"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+0  \fR(zero)\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Move to the first character on the current line. The character
+.BR '0' 
+shall not be interpreted as a command if it is immediately preceded by
+a digit.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the cursor character is the first character in the line, it shall be
+an error.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The text region shall be from the character before the cursor character
+up to and including the first character in the line.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Any text copied to a buffer shall be in character mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+The last column in which any portion of the first character in the line
+is displayed, or if the line is empty, unchanged.
+.SS "Execute an ex Command"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+:
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Execute one or more
+.IR ex
+commands.
+.P
+If any portion of the screen other than the last line of the screen was
+overwritten by any
+.IR ex
+command (except
+.BR shell ),
+.IR vi
+shall display a message indicating that it is waiting for an input from
+the user, and shall then read a character. This action may also be
+taken for other, unspecified reasons.
+.P
+If the next character entered is a
+.BR ':' ,
+another
+.IR ex
+command shall be accepted and executed. Any other character shall cause
+the screen to be refreshed and
+.IR vi
+shall return to command mode.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+As specified for the
+.IR ex
+command.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+As specified for the
+.IR ex
+command.
+.SS "Repeat Find"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR ;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+This command shall be equivalent to the last
+.BR F ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR T ,
+or
+.BR t
+command, with the specified
+.IR count ,
+and with the same search character used for the last
+.BR F ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR T ,
+or
+.BR t
+command. If there was no previous
+.BR F ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR T ,
+or
+.BR t
+command, it shall be an error.
+.SS "Shift Left"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR < \fImotion\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the motion command is the
+.BR <
+command repeated:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If there are less than
+.IR count
+\(mi1 lines after the current line in the edit buffer, it shall be an
+error.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The text region shall be from the current line, up to and including the
+next
+.IR count
+\(mi1 lines.
+.P
+Shift any line in the text region specified by the
+.IR count
+and motion command one shiftwidth (see the
+.IR ex
+.BR shiftwidth
+option) toward the start of the line, as described by the
+.IR ex
+.BR <
+command. The unshifted lines shall be copied to the unnamed buffer in
+line mode.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+If the motion was from the current cursor position toward the end of
+the edit buffer, unchanged. Otherwise, set to the first line in the
+edit buffer that is part of the text region specified by the motion
+command.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Shift Right"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR > \fImotion\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the motion command is the
+.BR >
+command repeated:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If there are less than
+.IR count
+\(mi1 lines after the current line in the edit buffer, it shall be an
+error.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The text region shall be from the current line, up to and including the
+next
+.IR count
+\(mi1 lines.
+.P
+Shift any line with characters in the text region specified by the
+.IR count
+and motion command one shiftwidth (see the
+.IR ex
+.BR shiftwidth
+option) away from the start of the line, as described by the
+.IR ex
+.BR >
+command. The unshifted lines shall be copied into the unnamed buffer in
+line mode.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+If the motion was from the current cursor position toward the end of
+the edit buffer, unchanged. Otherwise, set to the first line in the
+edit buffer that is part of the text region specified by the
+motion command.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Scan Backwards for Regular Expression"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+?
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Scan backwards; the
+.BR ?
+command shall be equivalent to the
+.BR /
+command (see
+.IR "Find Regular Expression")
+with the following exceptions:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The input prompt shall be a
+.BR '?' .
+.IP " 2." 4
+Each search shall begin from the character before the first character
+of the last match (or, if it is the first search, the character before
+the cursor character).
+.IP " 3." 4
+The search direction shall be from the cursor toward the beginning of
+the edit buffer, and the
+.BR wrapscan
+edit option shall affect whether the search wraps to the end of the
+edit buffer and continues.
+.IP " 4." 4
+The remembered search direction shall be set to backward.
+.SS "Execute"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+@\fIbuffer\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the
+.IR buffer
+is specified as
+.BR @ ,
+the last buffer executed shall be used. If no previous buffer has been
+executed, it shall be an error.
+.P
+Behave as if the contents of the named buffer were entered as standard
+input. After each line of a line-mode buffer, and all but the last line
+of a character mode buffer, behave as if a
+<newline>
+were entered as standard input.
+.P
+If an error occurs during this process, an error message shall be
+written, and no more characters resulting from the execution of this
+command shall be processed.
+.P
+If a
+.IR count
+is specified, behave as if that count were entered as user input before
+the characters from the
+.BR @
+buffer were entered.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+As specified for the individual commands.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+As specified for the individual commands.
+.SS "Reverse Case"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR ~
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Reverse the case of the current character and the next
+.IR count
+\(mi1 characters, such that lowercase characters that have uppercase
+counterparts shall be changed to uppercase characters, and uppercase
+characters that have lowercase counterparts shall be changed to
+lowercase characters, as prescribed by the current locale. No other
+characters shall be affected by this command.
+.P
+If there are less than
+.IR count
+\(mi1 characters after the cursor in the edit buffer,
+.IR count
+shall be adjusted to the number of characters after the cursor in the
+edit buffer minus 1.
+.P
+For the purposes of this command, the next character after the last
+non-\c
+<newline>
+on the line shall be the next character in the edit buffer.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the line including the (\c
+.IR count \(mi1)th
+character after the cursor.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to the last column in which any portion of the (\c
+.IR count \(mi1)th
+character after the cursor is displayed.
+.SS "Append"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR a
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Enter text input mode after the current cursor position. No characters
+already in the edit buffer shall be affected by this command. A
+.IR count
+shall cause the input text to be appended
+.IR count
+\(mi1 more times to the end of the input.
+.P
+.IR "Current line/column" :
+As specified for the text input commands (see
+.IR "Input Mode Commands in vi").
+.SS "Append at End-of-Line"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR A
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+This command shall be equivalent to the
+.IR vi
+command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fR$\fB [ \fIcount \fB]\fR a
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+(see
+.IR "Append").
+.SS "Move Backward to Preceding Word"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR b
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+With the exception that words are used as the delimiter instead of
+bigwords, this command shall be equivalent to the
+.BR B
+command.
+.SS "Move Backward to Preceding Bigword"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR B
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the edit buffer is empty or the cursor is on the first character of
+the edit buffer, it shall be an error. If less than
+.IR count
+bigwords begin between the cursor and the start of the edit buffer,
+.IR count
+shall be adjusted to the number of bigword beginnings between the
+cursor and the start of the edit buffer.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The text region shall be from the first character of the
+.IR count th
+previous bigword beginning up to but not including the cursor
+character.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Any text copied to a buffer shall be in character mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the line containing the
+.IR "current column" .
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to the last column upon which any part of the first character of
+the
+.IR count th
+previous bigword is displayed.
+.SS "Change"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIbuffer\fB][\fIcount\fB]\fR c \fImotion\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the motion command is the
+.BR c
+command repeated:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The buffer text shall be in line mode.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If there are less than
+.IR count
+\(mi1 lines after the current line in the edit buffer, it shall be an
+error.
+.IP " 3." 4
+The text region shall be from the current line up to and including the
+next
+.IR count
+\(mi1 lines.
+.P
+Otherwise, the buffer text mode and text region shall be as specified
+by the motion command.
+.P
+The replaced text shall be copied into
+.IR buffer ,
+if specified, and into the unnamed buffer. If the text to be replaced
+contains characters from more than a single line, or the buffer text is
+in line mode, the replaced text shall be copied into the numeric
+buffers as well.
+.P
+If the buffer text is in line mode:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Any lines that contain characters in the region shall be deleted, and
+the editor shall enter text input mode at the beginning of a new line
+which shall replace the first line deleted.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the
+.BR autoindent
+edit option is set,
+.BR autoindent
+characters equal to the
+.BR autoindent
+characters on the first line deleted shall be inserted as if entered by
+the user.
+.P
+Otherwise, if characters from more than one line are in the region of
+text:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The text shall be deleted.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Any text remaining in the last line in the text region shall be
+appended to the first line in the region, and the last line in the
+region shall be deleted.
+.IP " 3." 4
+The editor shall enter text input mode after the last character not
+deleted from the first line in the text region, if any; otherwise, on
+the first column of the first line in the region.
+.br
+.P
+Otherwise:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the glyph for
+.BR '$' 
+is smaller than the region, the end of the region shall be marked with
+a
+.BR '$' .
+.IP " 2." 4
+The editor shall enter text input mode, overwriting the region of
+text.
+.P
+.IR "Current line/column" :
+As specified for the text input commands (see
+.IR "Input Mode Commands in vi").
+.SS "Change to End-of-Line"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIbuffer\fB][\fIcount\fB]\fR C
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+This command shall be equivalent to the
+.IR vi
+command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIbuffer\fB][\fIcount\fB]\fR c$
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+See the
+.BR c
+command.
+.SS "Delete"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIbuffer\fB][\fIcount\fB]\fR d \fImotion\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the motion command is the
+.BR d
+command repeated:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The buffer text shall be in line mode.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If there are less than
+.IR count
+\(mi1 lines after the current line in the edit buffer, it shall be an
+error.
+.IP " 3." 4
+The text region shall be from the current line up to and including the
+next
+.IR count
+\(mi1 lines.
+.P
+Otherwise, the buffer text mode and text region shall be as specified
+by the motion command.
+.P
+If in open mode, and the current line is deleted, and the line remains
+on the display, an
+.BR '@' 
+character shall be displayed as the first glyph of that line.
+.P
+Delete the region of text into
+.IR buffer ,
+if specified, and into the unnamed buffer. If the text to be deleted
+contains characters from more than a single line, or the buffer text is
+in line mode, the deleted text shall be copied into the numeric
+buffers, as well.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the first text region line that appears in the edit buffer,
+unless that line has been deleted, in which case it shall be set to the
+last line in the edit buffer, or line 1 if the edit buffer is empty.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the line is empty, set to column position 1.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise, if the buffer text is in line mode or the motion was from
+the cursor toward the end of the edit buffer:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+If a character from the current line is displayed in the current
+column, set to the last column that displays any portion of that
+character.
+.IP " b." 4
+Otherwise, set to the last column in which any portion of any character
+in the line is displayed.
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+Otherwise, if a character is displayed in the column that began the
+text region, set to the last column that displays any portion of that
+character.
+.IP " 4." 4
+Otherwise, set to the last column in which any portion of any character
+in the line is displayed.
+.SS "Delete to End-of-Line"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIbuffer\fB]\fR D
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Delete the text from the current position to the end of the current
+line; equivalent to the
+.IR vi
+command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIbuffer\fB]\fR d$
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Move to End-of-Word"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR e
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+With the exception that words are used instead of bigwords as the
+delimiter, this command shall be equivalent to the
+.BR E
+command.
+.SS "Move to End-of-Bigword"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR E
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the edit buffer is empty it shall be an error. If less than
+.IR count
+bigwords end between the cursor and the end of the edit buffer,
+.IR count
+shall be adjusted to the number of bigword endings between the cursor
+and the end of the edit buffer.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The text region shall be from the last character of the
+.IR count th
+next bigword up to and including the cursor character.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Any text copied to a buffer shall be in character mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the line containing the current column.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to the last column upon which any part of the last character of the
+.IR count th
+next bigword is displayed.
+.SS "Find Character in Current Line (Forward)"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR f \fIcharacter\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+It shall be an error if
+.IR count
+occurrences of the character do not occur after the cursor in the
+line.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The text range shall be from the cursor character up to and including
+the
+.IR count th
+occurrence of the specified character after the cursor.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Any text copied to a buffer shall be in character mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to the last column in which any portion of the
+.IR count th
+occurrence of the specified character after the cursor appears in the
+line.
+.SS "Find Character in Current Line (Reverse)"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR F \fIcharacter\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+It shall be an error if
+.IR count
+occurrences of the character do not occur before the cursor in the
+line.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The text region shall be from the
+.IR count th
+occurrence of the specified character before the cursor, up to, but not
+including the cursor character.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Any text copied to a buffer shall be in character mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to the last column in which any portion of the
+.IR count th
+occurrence of the specified character before the cursor appears in the
+line.
+.SS "Move to Line"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR G
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.IR count
+is not specified, it shall default to the last line of the edit buffer.
+If
+.IR count
+is greater than the last line of the edit buffer, it shall be an
+error.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The text region shall be from the cursor line up to and including the
+specified line.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Any text copied to a buffer shall be in line mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to
+.IR count
+if
+.IR count
+is specified; otherwise, the last line.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Move to Top of Screen"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR H
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the beginning of the line
+.IR count
+greater than the first line of which any portion appears on the display
+does not exist, it shall be an error.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If in open mode, the text region shall be the current line.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise, the text region shall be from the starting line up to and
+including (the first line of the display +
+.IR count
+\(mi1).
+.IP " 3." 4
+Any text copied to a buffer shall be in line mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+If in open mode, this command shall set the current column to non-\c
+<blank>
+and do nothing else.
+.P
+Otherwise, it shall set the current line and current column as
+follows.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to (the first line of the display +
+.IR count
+\(mi1).
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Insert Before Cursor"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR i
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Enter text input mode before the current cursor position. No characters
+already in the edit buffer shall be affected by this command. A
+.IR count
+shall cause the input text to be appended
+.IR count
+\(mi1 more times to the end of the input.
+.P
+.IR "Current line/column" :
+As specified for the text input commands (see
+.IR "Input Mode Commands in vi").
+.SS "Insert at Beginning of Line"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR I
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+This command shall be equivalent to the
+.IR vi
+command ^[\c
+.IR count ]\c
+.BR i .
+.SS "Join"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR J
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the current line is the last line in the edit buffer, it shall be an
+error.
+.P
+This command shall be equivalent to the
+.IR ex
+.BR join
+command with no addresses, and an
+.IR ex
+command
+.IR count
+value of 1 if
+.IR count
+was not specified or if a
+.IR count
+of 1 was specified, and an
+.IR ex
+command
+.IR count
+value of
+.IR count
+\(mi1 for any other value of
+.IR count ,
+except that the current line and column shall be set as follows.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+The last column in which any portion of the character following the
+last character in the initial line is displayed, or the last non-\c
+<newline>
+in the line if no characters were appended.
+.SS "Move to Bottom of Screen"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR L
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the beginning of the line
+.IR count
+less than the last line of which any portion appears on the display
+does not exist, it shall be an error.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If in open mode, the text region shall be the current line.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise, the text region shall include all lines from the starting
+cursor line to (the last line of the display \(mi(\c
+.IR count
+\(mi1)).
+.IP " 3." 4
+Any text copied to a buffer shall be in line mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If in open mode, this command shall set the current column to non-\c
+<blank>
+and do nothing else.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise, it shall set the current line and current column as follows.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to (the last line of the display \(mi(\c
+.IR count
+\(mi1)).
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Mark Position"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+m \fIletter\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+This command shall be equivalent to the
+.IR ex
+.BR mark
+command with the specified character as an argument.
+.SS "Move to Middle of Screen"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+M
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The middle line of the display shall be calculated as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(the top line of the display) + (((number of lines displayed) +1) /2) \(mi1
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If in open mode, the text region shall be the current line.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise, the text region shall include all lines from the starting
+cursor line up to and including the middle line of the display.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Any text copied to a buffer shall be in line mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+If in open mode, this command shall set the current column to non-\c
+<blank>
+and do nothing else.
+.P
+Otherwise, it shall set the current line and current column as
+follows.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the middle line of the display.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Repeat Regular Expression Find (Forward)"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+n
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the remembered search direction was forward, the
+.BR n
+command shall be equivalent to the
+.IR vi
+.BR /
+command with no characters entered by the user. Otherwise, it shall be
+equivalent to the
+.IR vi
+.BR ?
+command with no characters entered by the user.
+.P
+If the
+.BR n
+command is used as a motion command for the
+.BR !
+command, the editor shall not enter text input mode on the last line on
+the screen, and shall behave as if the user entered a single
+.BR '!' 
+character as the text input.
+.SS "Repeat Regular Expression Find (Reverse)"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+N
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Scan for the next match of the last pattern given to
+.BR /
+or
+.BR ? ,
+but in the reverse direction; this is the reverse of
+.BR n .
+.P
+If the remembered search direction was forward, the
+.BR N
+command shall be equivalent to the
+.IR vi
+.BR ?
+command with no characters entered by the user. Otherwise, it shall be
+equivalent to the
+.IR vi
+.BR /
+command with no characters entered by the user. If the
+.BR N
+command is used as a motion command for the
+.BR !
+command, the editor shall not enter text input mode on the last line on
+the screen, and shall behave as if the user entered a single
+.BR !
+character as the text input.
+.SS "Insert Empty Line Below"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+o
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Enter text input mode in a new line appended after the current line. A
+.IR count
+shall cause the input text to be appended
+.IR count
+\(mi1 more times to the end of the already added text, each time
+starting on a new, appended line.
+.P
+.IR "Current line/column" :
+As specified for the text input commands (see
+.IR "Input Mode Commands in vi").
+.SS "Insert Empty Line Above"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+O
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Enter text input mode in a new line inserted before the current line. A
+.IR count
+shall cause the input text to be appended
+.IR count
+\(mi1 more times to the end of the already added text, each time
+starting on a new, appended line.
+.P
+.IR "Current line/column" :
+As specified for the text input commands (see
+.IR "Input Mode Commands in vi").
+.SS "Put from Buffer Following"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIbuffer\fB]\fR p
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If no
+.IR buffer
+is specified, the unnamed buffer shall be used.
+.P
+If the buffer text is in line mode, the text shall be appended below
+the current line, and each line of the buffer shall become a new line
+in the edit buffer. A
+.IR count
+shall cause the buffer text to be appended
+.IR count
+\(mi1 more times to the end of the already added text, each time
+starting on a new, appended line.
+.P
+If the buffer text is in character mode, the text shall be appended
+into the current line after the cursor, and each line of the buffer
+other than the first and last shall become a new line in the edit
+buffer. A
+.IR count
+shall cause the buffer text to be appended
+.IR count
+\(mi1 more times to the end of the already added text, each time
+starting after the last added character.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+If the buffer text is in line mode, set the line to line +1; otherwise,
+unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+If the buffer text is in line mode:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If there is a non-\c
+<blank>
+in the first line of the buffer, set to the last column on which any
+portion of the first non-\c
+<blank>
+in the line is displayed.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If there is no non-\c
+<blank>
+in the first line of the buffer, set to the last column on which any
+portion of the last non-\c
+<newline>
+in the first line of the buffer is displayed.
+.P
+If the buffer text is in character mode:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the text in the buffer is from more than a single line, then set to
+the last column on which any portion of the first character from the
+buffer is displayed.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise, if the buffer is the unnamed buffer, set to the last column
+on which any portion of the last character from the buffer is
+displayed.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Otherwise, set to the first column on which any portion of the first
+character from the buffer is displayed.
+.SS "Put from Buffer Before"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIbuffer\fB]\fR P
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If no
+.IR buffer
+is specified, the unnamed buffer shall be used.
+.P
+If the buffer text is in line mode, the text shall be inserted above
+the current line, and each line of the buffer shall become a new line
+in the edit buffer. A
+.IR count
+shall cause the buffer text to be appended
+.IR count
+\(mi1 more times to the end of the already added text, each time
+starting on a new, appended line.
+.P
+If the buffer text is in character mode, the text shall be inserted
+into the current line before the cursor, and each line of the buffer
+other than the first and last shall become a new line in the edit
+buffer. A
+.IR count
+shall cause the buffer text to be appended
+.IR count
+\(mi1 more times to the end of the already added text, each time
+starting after the last added character.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+If the buffer text is in line mode:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If there is a non-\c
+<blank>
+in the first line of the buffer, set to the last column on which any
+portion of that character is displayed.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If there is no non-\c
+<blank>
+in the first line of the buffer, set to the last column on which any
+portion of the last non-\c
+<newline>
+in the first line of the buffer is displayed.
+.P
+If the buffer text is in character mode:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the text in the buffer is from more than a single line, then set to
+the last column on which any portion of the first character from the
+buffer is displayed.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise, if the buffer is the unnamed buffer, set to the last column
+on which any portion of the last character from the buffer is displayed.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Otherwise, set to the first column on which any portion of the first
+character from the buffer is displayed.
+.SS "Enter ex Mode"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+Q
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Leave visual or open mode and enter
+.IR ex
+command mode.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "Replace Character"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR r \fIcharacter\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Replace the
+.IR count
+characters at and after the cursor with the specified character. If
+there are less than
+.IR count
+non-\c
+<newline>
+characters at and after the cursor on the line, it shall be an error.
+.P
+If character is
+<control>\(hyV,
+any next character other than the
+<newline>
+shall be stripped of any special meaning and used as a literal
+character.
+.P
+If character is
+<ESC>,
+no replacement shall be made and the current line and current column
+shall be unchanged.
+.P
+If character is
+<carriage-return>
+or
+<newline>,
+.IR count
+new lines shall be appended to the current line. All but the last of
+these lines shall be empty.
+.IR count
+characters at and after the cursor shall be discarded, and any
+remaining characters after the cursor in the current line shall be
+moved to the last of the new lines. If the
+.BR autoindent
+edit option is set, they shall be preceded by the same number of
+.BR autoindent
+characters found on the line from which the command was executed.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged unless the replacement character is a
+<carriage-return>
+or
+<newline>,
+in which case it shall be set to line +
+.IR count .
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to the last column position on which a portion of the last replaced
+character is displayed, or if the replacement character caused new
+lines to be created, set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Replace Characters"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+R
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Enter text input mode at the current cursor position possibly
+replacing text on the current line. A
+.IR count
+shall cause the input text to be appended
+.IR count
+\(mi1 more times to the end of the input.
+.P
+.IR "Current line/column" :
+As specified for the text input commands (see
+.IR "Input Mode Commands in vi").
+.SS "Substitute Character"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIbuffer\fB][\fIcount\fB]\fR s
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+This command shall be equivalent to the
+.IR vi
+command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIbuffer\fB][\fIcount\fB]\fR c<space>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Substitute Lines"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIbuffer\fB][\fIcount\fB]\fR S
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+This command shall be equivalent to the
+.IR vi
+command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIbuffer\fB][\fIcount\fB]\fR c_
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Move Cursor to Before Character (Forward)"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR t \fIcharacter\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+It shall be an error if
+.IR count
+occurrences of the character do not occur after the cursor in the
+line.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The text region shall be from the cursor up to but not including the
+.IR count th
+occurrence of the specified character after the cursor.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Any text copied to a buffer shall be in character mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to the last column in which any portion of the character before the
+.IR count th
+occurrence of the specified character after the cursor appears in the
+line.
+.SS "Move Cursor to After Character (Reverse)"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR T \fIcharacter\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+It shall be an error if
+.IR count
+occurrences of the character do not occur before the cursor in the
+line.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the character before the cursor is the specified character, it shall
+be an error.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The text region shall be from the character before the cursor up to but
+not including the
+.IR count th
+occurrence of the specified character before the cursor.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Any text copied to a buffer shall be in character mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to the last column in which any portion of the character after the
+.IR count th
+occurrence of the specified character before the cursor appears in the
+line.
+.SS "Undo"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+u
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+This command shall be equivalent to the
+.IR ex
+.BR undo
+command except that the current line and current column shall be set as
+follows:
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the first line added or changed if any; otherwise, move to the
+line preceding any deleted text if one exists; otherwise, move to line 1.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+If undoing an
+.IR ex
+command, set to the first non-\c
+<blank>.
+.P
+Otherwise, if undoing a text input command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the command was a
+.BR C ,
+.BR c ,
+.BR O ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR R ,
+.BR S ,
+or
+.BR s
+command, the current column shall be set to the value it held when the
+text input command was entered.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise, set to the last column in which any portion of the first
+character after the deleted text is displayed, or, if no non-\c
+<newline>
+characters follow the text deleted from this line, set to the last column
+in which any portion of the last non-\c
+<newline>
+in the line is displayed, or 1 if the line is empty.
+.P
+Otherwise, if a single line was modified (that is, not added or
+deleted) by the
+.BR u
+command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If text was added or changed, set to the last column in which any
+portion of the first character added or changed is displayed.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If text was deleted, set to the last column in which any portion of the
+first character after the deleted text is displayed, or, if no non-\c
+<newline>
+characters follow the deleted text, set to the last column in which any
+portion of the last non-\c
+<newline>
+in the line is displayed, or 1 if the line is empty.
+.P
+Otherwise, set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Undo Current Line"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+U
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Restore the current line to its state immediately before the most
+recent time that it became the current line.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to the first column in the line in which any portion of the first
+character in the line is displayed.
+.SS "Move to Beginning of Word"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR w
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+With the exception that words are used as the delimiter instead of
+bigwords, this command shall be equivalent to the
+.BR W
+command.
+.SS "Move to Beginning of Bigword"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR W
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the edit buffer is empty, it shall be an error. If there are less
+than
+.IR count
+bigwords between the cursor and the end of the edit buffer,
+.IR count
+shall be adjusted to move the cursor to the last bigword in the edit
+buffer.
+.P
+If used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the associated command is
+.BR c ,
+.IR count
+is 1, and the cursor is on a
+<blank>,
+the region of text shall be the current character and no further action
+shall be taken.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If there are less than
+.IR count
+bigwords between the cursor and the end of the edit buffer, then the
+command shall succeed, and the region of text shall include the last
+character of the edit buffer.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If there are
+<blank>
+characters or an end-of-line that precede the
+.IR count th
+bigword, and the associated command is
+.BR c ,
+the region of text shall be up to and including the last character
+before the preceding
+<blank>
+characters or end-of-line.
+.IP " 4." 4
+If there are
+<blank>
+characters or an end-of-line that precede the bigword, and the associated
+command is
+.BR d
+or
+.BR y ,
+the region of text shall be up to and including the last
+<blank>
+before the start of the bigword or end-of-line.
+.IP " 5." 4
+Any text copied to a buffer shall be in character mode.
+.P
+If not used as a motion command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the cursor is on the last character of the edit buffer, it shall be
+an error.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to the line containing the current column.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to the last column in which any part of the first character of the
+.IR count th
+next bigword is displayed.
+.SS "Delete Character at Cursor"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIbuffer\fB][\fIcount\fB]\fR x
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Delete the
+.IR count
+characters at and after the current character into
+.IR buffer ,
+if specified, and into the unnamed buffer.
+.P
+If the line is empty, it shall be an error. If there are less than
+.IR count
+non-\c
+<newline>
+characters at and after the cursor on the current line,
+.IR count
+shall be adjusted to the number of non-\c
+<newline>
+characters at and after the cursor.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+If the line is empty, set to column position 1. Otherwise, if there
+were
+.IR count
+or less non-\c
+<newline>
+characters at and after the cursor on the current line, set to the last
+column that displays any part of the last non-\c
+<newline>
+of the line. Otherwise, unchanged.
+.SS "Delete Character Before Cursor"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIbuffer\fB][\fIcount\fB]\fR X
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Delete the
+.IR count
+characters before the current character into
+.IR buffer ,
+if specified, and into the unnamed buffer.
+.P
+If there are no characters before the current character on the current
+line, it shall be an error. If there are less than
+.IR count
+previous characters on the current line,
+.IR count
+shall be adjusted to the number of previous characters on the line.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to (current column \(mi the width of the deleted characters).
+.SS "Yank"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIbuffer\fB][\fIcount\fB]\fR y \fImotion\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Copy (yank) the region of text into
+.IR buffer ,
+if specified, and into the unnamed buffer.
+.P
+If the motion command is the
+.BR y
+command repeated:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The buffer shall be in line mode.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If there are less than
+.IR count
+\(mi1 lines after the current line in the edit buffer, it shall be an
+error.
+.IP " 3." 4
+The text region shall be from the current line up to and including the
+next
+.IR count
+\(mi1 lines.
+.P
+Otherwise, the buffer text mode and text region shall be as specified
+by the motion command.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+If the motion was from the current cursor position toward the end of
+the edit buffer, unchanged. Otherwise, set to the first line in the
+edit buffer that is part of the text region specified by the
+motion command.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the motion was from the current cursor position toward the end of
+the edit buffer, unchanged.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise, if the current line is empty, set to column position 1.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Otherwise, set to the last column that displays any part of the first
+character in the file that is part of the text region specified by the
+motion command.
+.SS "Yank Current Line"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIbuffer\fB][\fIcount\fB]\fR Y
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+This command shall be equivalent to the
+.IR vi
+command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIbuffer\fB][\fIcount\fB]\fR y_
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Redraw Window"
+.P
+If in open mode, the
+.BR z
+command shall have the Synopsis:
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIcount\fB]\fR z
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.IR count
+is not specified, it shall default to the
+.BR window
+edit option \(mi1. The
+.BR z
+command shall be equivalent to the
+.IR ex
+.BR z
+command, with a type character of
+.BR =
+and a
+.IR count
+of
+.IR count
+\(mi2, except that the current line and current column shall be set as
+follows, and the
+.BR window
+edit option shall not be affected. If the calculation for the
+.IR count
+argument would result in a negative number, the
+.IR count
+argument to the
+.IR ex
+.BR z
+command shall be zero. A blank line shall be written after the last
+line is written.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+If not in open mode, the
+.BR z
+command shall have the following Synopsis:
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fB[\fIline\fB]\fR z \fB[\fIcount\fB] \fIcharacter\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.IR line
+is not specified, it shall default to the current line. If
+.IR line
+is specified, but is greater than the number of lines in the edit
+buffer, it shall default to the number of lines in the edit buffer.
+.P
+If
+.IR count
+is specified, the value of the
+.BR window
+edit option shall be set to
+.IR count
+(as described in the
+.IR ex
+.BR window
+command), and the screen shall be redrawn.
+.P
+.IR line
+shall be placed as specified by the following characters:
+.IP "<newline>,\ <carriage-return>" 6
+.br
+Place the beginning of the line on the first line of the display.
+.IP "\fR.\fP" 6
+Place the beginning of the line in the center of the display. The
+middle line of the display shall be calculated as described for the
+.BR M
+command.
+.IP "\fR\(mi\fP" 6
+Place an unspecified portion of the line on the last line of the
+display.
+.IP "\fR+\fP" 6
+If
+.IR line
+was specified, equivalent to the
+<newline>
+case. If
+.IR line
+was not specified, display a screen where the first line of the display
+shall be (current last line) +1. If there are no lines after the last
+line in the display, it shall be an error.
+.IP "\fR^\fP" 6
+If
+.IR line
+was specified, display a screen where the last line of the display
+shall contain an unspecified portion of the first line of a display
+that had an unspecified portion of the specified line on the last line
+of the display. If this calculation results in a line before the
+beginning of the edit buffer, display the first screen of the edit
+buffer.
+.RS 6 
+.P
+Otherwise, display a screen where the last line of the display shall
+contain an unspecified portion of (current first line \(mi1). If this
+calculation results in a line before the beginning of the edit buffer,
+it shall be an error.
+.RE
+.br
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+If
+.IR line
+and the
+.BR '^' 
+character were specified:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the first screen was displayed as a result of the command attempting
+to display lines before the beginning of the edit buffer: if the first
+screen was already displayed, unchanged; otherwise, set to (current
+first line \(mi1).
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise, set to the last line of the display.
+.P
+If
+.IR line
+and the
+.BR '\(pl' 
+character were specified, set to the first line of the display.
+.P
+Otherwise, if
+.IR line
+was specified, set to
+.IR line .
+.P
+Otherwise, unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to non-\c
+<blank>.
+.SS "Exit"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ZZ
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+This command shall be equivalent to the
+.IR ex
+.BR xit
+command with no addresses, trailing
+.BR ! ,
+or filename (see the
+.IR ex
+.BR xit
+command).
+.SS "Input Mode Commands in vi"
+.P
+In text input mode, the current line shall consist of zero or more of
+the following categories, plus the terminating
+<newline>:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Characters preceding the text input entry point
+.RS 4 
+.P
+Characters in this category shall not be modified during text input
+mode.
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+.BR autoindent
+characters
+.RS 4 
+.P
+.BR autoindent
+characters shall be automatically inserted into each line that is
+created in text input mode, either as a result of entering a
+<newline>
+or
+<carriage-return>
+while in text input mode, or as an effect of the command itself; for
+example,
+.BR O
+or
+.BR o
+(see the
+.IR ex
+.BR autoindent
+command), as if entered by the user.
+.P
+It shall be possible to erase
+.BR autoindent
+characters with the
+<control>\(hyD
+command; it is unspecified whether they can be erased by
+<control>\(hyH,
+<control>\(hyU,
+and
+<control>\(hyW
+characters. Erasing any
+.BR autoindent
+character turns the glyph into erase-columns and deletes the character
+from the edit buffer, but does not change its representation on the
+screen.
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+Text input characters
+.RS 4 
+.P
+Text input characters are the characters entered by the user. Erasing
+any text input character turns the glyph into erase-columns and deletes
+the character from the edit buffer, but does not change its
+representation on the screen.
+.P
+Each text input character entered by the user (that does not have a
+special meaning) shall be treated as follows:
+.IP " a." 4
+The text input character shall be appended to the last character in the
+edit buffer from the first, second, or third categories.
+.IP " b." 4
+If there are no erase-columns on the screen, the text input command was
+the
+.BR R
+command, and characters in the fifth category from the original line
+follow the cursor, the next such character shall be deleted from the
+edit buffer. If the
+.BR slowopen
+edit option is not set, the corresponding glyph on the screen shall
+become erase-columns.
+.IP " c." 4
+If there are erase-columns on the screen, as many columns as they
+occupy, or as are necessary, shall be overwritten to display the text
+input character. (If only part of a multi-column glyph is overwritten,
+the remainder shall be left on the screen, and continue to be treated
+as erase-columns; it is unspecified whether the remainder of the glyph
+is modified in any way.)
+.IP " d." 4
+If additional display line columns are needed to display the text input
+character:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " i." 5
+If the
+.BR slowopen
+edit option is set, the text input characters shall be displayed on
+subsequent display line columns, overwriting any characters displayed
+in those columns.
+.IP ii. 5
+Otherwise, any characters currently displayed on or after the column on
+the display line where the text input character is to be displayed
+shall be pushed ahead the number of display line columns necessary to
+display the rest of the text input character.
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+Erase-columns
+.RS 4 
+.P
+Erase-columns are not logically part of the edit buffer, appearing only
+on the screen, and may be overwritten on the screen by subsequent text
+input characters. When text input mode ends, all erase-columns shall no
+longer appear on the screen.
+.P
+Erase-columns are initially the region of text specified by the
+.BR c
+command (see
+.IR "Change");
+however, erasing
+.BR autoindent
+or text input characters causes the glyphs of the erased characters to
+be treated as erase-columns.
+.RE
+.IP " 5." 4
+Characters following the text region for the
+.BR c
+command, or the text input entry point for all other commands
+.RS 4 
+.P
+Characters in this category shall not be modified during text input
+mode, except as specified in category 3.b. for the
+.BR R
+text input command, or as
+<blank>
+characters deleted when a
+<newline>
+or
+<carriage-return>
+is entered.
+.RE
+.P
+It is unspecified whether it is an error to attempt to erase past the
+beginning of a line that was created by the entry of a
+<newline>
+or
+<carriage-return>
+during text input mode. If it is not an error, the editor shall behave
+as if the erasing character was entered immediately after the last text
+input character entered on the previous line, and all of the non-\c
+<newline>
+characters on the current line shall be treated as erase-columns.
+.P
+When text input mode is entered, or after a text input mode character
+is entered (except as specified for the special characters below), the
+cursor shall be positioned as follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+On the first column that displays any part of the first erase-column,
+if one exists
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise, if the
+.BR slowopen
+edit option is set, on the first display line column after the last
+character in the first, second, or third categories, if one exists
+.IP " 3." 4
+Otherwise, the first column that displays any part of the first
+character in the fifth category, if one exists
+.IP " 4." 4
+Otherwise, the display line column after the last character in the
+first, second, or third categories, if one exists
+.IP " 5." 4
+Otherwise, on column position 1
+.P
+The characters that are updated on the screen during text input mode
+are unspecified, other than that the last text input character shall
+always be updated, and, if the
+.BR slowopen
+edit option is not set, the current cursor character shall always be
+updated.
+.P
+The following specifications are for command characters entered during
+text input mode.
+.SS "NUL"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+NUL
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If the first character of the text input is a NUL, the most recently
+input text shall be input as if entered by the user, and then text
+input mode shall be exited. The text shall be input literally; that is,
+characters are neither macro or abbreviation expanded, nor are any
+characters interpreted in any special manner. It is unspecified whether
+implementations shall support more than 256 bytes of remembered input
+text.
+.SS "<control>-D"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<control>-D
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+<control>\(hyD
+character shall have no special meaning when in text input
+mode for a line-oriented command (see
+.IR "Command Descriptions in vi").
+.P
+This command need not be supported on block-mode terminals.
+.P
+If the cursor does not follow an
+.BR autoindent
+character, or an
+.BR autoindent
+character and a
+.BR '0' 
+or
+.BR '^' 
+character:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the cursor is in column position 1, the
+<control>\(hyD
+character shall be discarded and no further action taken.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise, the
+<control>\(hyD
+character shall have no special meaning.
+.P
+If the last input character was a
+.BR '0' ,
+the cursor shall be moved to column position 1.
+.P
+Otherwise, if the last input character was a
+.BR '^' ,
+the cursor shall be moved to column position 1. In addition, the
+.BR autoindent
+level for the next input line shall be derived from the same line from
+which the
+.BR autoindent
+level for the current input line was derived.
+.P
+Otherwise, the cursor shall be moved back to the column after the
+previous shiftwidth (see the
+.IR ex
+.BR shiftwidth
+command) boundary.
+.P
+All of the glyphs on columns between the starting cursor position and
+(inclusively) the ending cursor position shall become erase-columns as
+described in
+.IR "Input Mode Commands in vi".
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to 1 if the
+<control>\(hyD
+was preceded by a
+.BR '^' 
+or
+.BR '0' ;
+otherwise, set to (column \(mi1) \(mi((column \(mi2) %
+.BR shiftwidth ).
+.SS "<control>-H"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<control>-H
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If in text input mode for a line-oriented command, and there are no
+characters to erase, text input mode shall be terminated, no further
+action shall be done for this command, and the current line and column
+shall be unchanged.
+.P
+If there are characters other than
+.BR autoindent
+characters that have been input on the current line before the cursor,
+the cursor shall move back one character.
+.P
+Otherwise, if there are
+.BR autoindent
+characters on the current line before the cursor, it is
+implementation-defined whether the
+<control>\(hyH
+command is an error or if the cursor moves back one
+.BR autoindent
+character.
+.P
+Otherwise, if the cursor is in column position 1 and there are previous
+lines that have been input, it is implementation-defined whether the
+<control>\(hyH
+command is an error or if it is equivalent to entering
+<control>\(hyH
+after the last input character on the previous input line.
+.P
+Otherwise, it shall be an error.
+.P
+All of the glyphs on columns between the starting cursor position and
+(inclusively) the ending cursor position shall become erase-columns as
+described in
+.IR "Input Mode Commands in vi".
+.P
+The current erase character (see
+.IR stty )
+shall cause an equivalent action to the
+<control>\(hyH
+command, unless the previously inserted character was a
+<backslash>,
+in which case it shall be as if the literal current erase character had
+been inserted instead of the
+<backslash>.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged, unless previously input lines are erased, in which case it
+shall be set to line \(mi1.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to the first column that displays any portion of the character
+backed up over.
+.SS "<newline>"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<newline>
+.br
+<carriage-return>
+.br
+<control>-J
+.br
+<control>-M
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If input was part of a line-oriented command, text input mode shall be
+terminated and the command shall continue execution with the input
+provided.
+.P
+Otherwise, terminate the current line. If there are no characters other
+than
+.BR autoindent
+characters on the line, all characters on the line shall be discarded.
+Otherwise, it is unspecified whether the
+.BR autoindent
+characters in the line are modified by entering these characters.
+.P
+Continue text input mode on a new line appended after the current line.
+If the
+.BR slowopen
+edit option is set, the lines on the screen below the current line
+shall not be pushed down, but the first of them shall be cleared and
+shall appear to be overwritten. Otherwise, the lines of the screen
+below the current line shall be pushed down.
+.P
+If the
+.BR autoindent
+edit option is set, an appropriate number of
+.BR autoindent
+characters shall be added as a prefix to the line as described by the
+.IR ex
+.BR autoindent
+edit option.
+.P
+All columns after the cursor that are erase-columns (as described in
+.IR "Input Mode Commands in vi")
+shall be discarded.
+.P
+If the
+.BR autoindent
+edit option is set, all
+<blank>
+characters immediately following the cursor shall be discarded.
+.P
+All remaining characters after the cursor shall be transferred to the
+new line, positioned after any
+.BR autoindent
+characters.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Set to current line +1.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to the first column that displays any portion of the first
+character after the
+.BR autoindent
+characters on the new line, if any, or the first column position after
+the last
+.BR autoindent
+character, if any, or column position 1.
+.SS "<control>-T"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<control>-T
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The
+<control>\(hyT
+character shall have no special meaning when in text input mode for a
+line-oriented command (see
+.IR "Command Descriptions in vi").
+.P
+This command need not be supported on block-mode terminals.
+.P
+Behave as if the user entered the minimum number of
+<blank>
+characters necessary to move the cursor forward to the column position
+after the next
+.BR shiftwidth
+(see the
+.IR ex
+.BR shiftwidth
+command) boundary.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to
+.IR column
++
+.BR shiftwidth
+\(mi ((column \(mi1) %
+.BR shiftwidth ).
+.SS "<control>-U"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<control>-U
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If there are characters other than
+.BR autoindent
+characters that have been input on the current line before the cursor,
+the cursor shall move to the first character input after the
+.BR autoindent
+characters.
+.P
+Otherwise, if there are
+.BR autoindent
+characters on the current line before the cursor, it is
+implementation-defined whether the
+<control>\(hyU
+command is an error or if the cursor moves to the first column position
+on the line.
+.P
+Otherwise, if the cursor is in column position 1 and there are previous
+lines that have been input, it is implementation-defined whether the
+<control>\(hyU
+command is an error or if it is equivalent to entering
+<control>\(hyU
+after the last input character on the previous input line.
+.P
+Otherwise, it shall be an error.
+.P
+All of the glyphs on columns between the starting cursor position and
+(inclusively) the ending cursor position shall become erase-columns as
+described in
+.IR "Input Mode Commands in vi".
+.P
+The current
+.IR kill
+character (see
+.IR stty )
+shall cause an equivalent action to the
+<control>\(hyU
+command, unless the previously inserted character was a
+<backslash>,
+in which case it shall be as if the literal current
+.IR kill
+character had been inserted instead of the
+<backslash>.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged, unless previously input lines are erased, in which case it
+shall be set to line \(mi1.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to the first column that displays any portion of the last character
+backed up over.
+.SS "<control>-V"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<control>-V
+.br
+<control>-Q
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Allow the entry of any subsequent character, other than
+<control>\(hyJ
+or the
+<newline>,
+as a literal character, removing any special meaning that it may have
+to the editor in text input mode. If a
+<control>\(hyV
+or
+<control>\(hyQ
+is entered before a
+<control>\(hyJ
+or
+<newline>,
+the
+<control>\(hyV
+or
+<control>\(hyQ
+character shall be discarded, and the
+<control>\(hyJ
+or
+<newline>
+shall behave as described in the
+<newline>
+command character during input mode.
+.P
+For purposes of the display only, the editor shall behave as if a
+.BR '^' 
+character was entered, and the cursor shall be positioned as if
+overwriting the
+.BR '^' 
+character. When a subsequent character is entered, the editor shall
+behave as if that character was entered instead of the original
+<control>\(hyV
+or
+<control>\(hyQ
+character.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Unchanged.
+.SS "<control>-W"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<control>-W
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If there are characters other than
+.BR autoindent
+characters that have been input on the current line before the cursor,
+the cursor shall move back over the last word preceding the cursor
+(including any
+<blank>
+characters between the end of the last word and the current cursor); the
+cursor shall not move to before the first character after the end of any
+.BR autoindent
+characters.
+.P
+Otherwise, if there are
+.BR autoindent
+characters on the current line before the cursor, it is
+implementation-defined whether the
+<control>\(hyW
+command is an error or if the cursor moves to the first column position
+on the line.
+.P
+Otherwise, if the cursor is in column position 1 and there are previous
+lines that have been input, it is implementation-defined whether the
+<control>\(hyW
+command is an error or if it is equivalent to entering
+<control>\(hyW
+after the last input character on the previous input line.
+.P
+Otherwise, it shall be an error.
+.P
+All of the glyphs on columns between the starting cursor position and
+(inclusively) the ending cursor position shall become erase-columns as
+described in
+.IR "Input Mode Commands in vi".
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged, unless previously input lines are erased, in which case it
+shall be set to line \(mi1.
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+Set to the first column that displays any portion of the last character
+backed up over.
+.SS "<ESC>"
+.IP "\fISynopsis\fR:" 10
+.sp -1v
+.RS 10 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<ESC>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+If input was part of a line-oriented command:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If
+.IR interrupt
+was entered, text input mode shall be terminated and the editor shall
+return to command mode. The terminal shall be alerted.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If
+<ESC>
+was entered, text input mode shall be terminated and the command shall
+continue execution with the input provided.
+.P
+Otherwise, terminate text input mode and return to command mode.
+.P
+Any
+.BR autoindent
+characters entered on newly created lines that have no other non-\c
+<newline>
+characters shall be deleted.
+.P
+Any leading
+.BR autoindent
+and
+<blank>
+characters on newly created lines shall be rewritten to be the minimum
+number of
+<blank>
+characters possible.
+.P
+The screen shall be redisplayed as necessary to match the contents of
+the edit buffer.
+.P
+.IR "Current line" :
+Unchanged.
+.br
+.P
+.IR "Current column" :
+.IP " 1." 4
+If there are text input characters on the current line, the column
+shall be set to the last column where any portion of the last text
+input character is displayed.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise, if a character is displayed in the current column,
+unchanged.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Otherwise, set to column position 1.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+When any error is encountered and the standard input is not a terminal
+device file,
+.IR vi
+shall not write the file or return to command or text input mode, and
+shall terminate with a non-zero exit status.
+.P
+Otherwise, when an unrecoverable error is encountered it shall be
+equivalent to a SIGHUP asynchronous event.
+.P
+Otherwise, when an error is encountered, the editor shall behave as
+specified in
+.IR "Command Descriptions in vi".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+See the RATIONALE for
+.IR "\fIex\fR\^"
+for more information on
+.IR vi .
+Major portions of the
+.IR vi
+utility specification point to
+.IR ex
+to avoid inadvertent divergence. While
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+have historically been implemented as a single utility, this is not
+required by POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+It is recognized that portions of
+.IR vi
+would be difficult, if not impossible, to implement satisfactorily on a
+block-mode terminal, or a terminal without any form of cursor
+addressing, thus it is not a mandatory requirement that such features
+should work on all terminals. It is the intention, however, that a
+.IR vi
+implementation should provide the full set of capabilities on all
+terminals capable of supporting them.
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR vi
+exited immediately if the standard input was not a terminal. POSIX.1\(hy2008
+permits, but does not require, this behavior. An end-of-file condition
+is not equivalent to an end-of-file character. A common end-of-file
+character,
+<control>\(hyD,
+is historically a
+.IR vi
+command.
+.P
+The text in the STDOUT section reflects the usage of the verb
+.IR display
+in this section; some implementations of
+.IR vi
+use standard output to write to the terminal, but POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not
+require that to be the case.
+.P
+Historically, implementations reverted to open mode if the terminal was
+incapable of supporting full visual mode. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires this
+behavior. Historically, the open mode of
+.IR vi
+behaved roughly equivalently to the visual mode, with the exception
+that only a single line from the edit buffer (one ``buffer line'') was
+kept current at any time. This line was normally displayed on the
+next-to-last line of a terminal with cursor addressing (and the last
+line performed its normal visual functions for line-oriented commands
+and messages). In addition, some few commands behaved differently in
+open mode than in visual mode. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical
+practice.
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+implementations have expected text to proceed in the usual
+European/Latin order of left to right, top to bottom. There is no
+requirement in POSIX.1\(hy2008 that this be the case. The specification was
+deliberately written using words like ``before'', ``after'', ``first'',
+and ``last'' in order to permit implementations to support the natural
+text order of the language.
+.P
+Historically, lines past the end of the edit buffer were marked with
+single
+<tilde>
+(\c
+.BR '~' )
+characters; that is, if the one-based display was 20 lines in length,
+and the last line of the file was on line one, then lines 2-20 would
+contain only a single
+.BR '~' 
+character.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.IR vi
+editor attempted to display only complete lines at the bottom of the
+screen (it did display partial lines at the top of the screen). If a
+line was too long to fit in its entirety at the bottom of the screen,
+the screen lines where the line would have been displayed were
+displayed as single
+.BR '@' 
+characters, instead of displaying part of the line. POSIX.1\(hy2008 permits, but
+does not require, this behavior. Implementations are encouraged to
+attempt always to display a complete line at the bottom of the screen
+when doing scrolling or screen positioning by buffer lines.
+.P
+Historically, lines marked with
+.BR '@' 
+were also used to minimize output to dumb terminals over slow lines;
+that is, changes local to the cursor were updated, but changes to lines
+on the screen that were not close to the cursor were simply marked with
+an
+.BR '@' 
+sign instead of being updated to match the current text. POSIX.1\(hy2008 permits,
+but does not require this feature because it is used ever less
+frequently as terminals become smarter and connections are faster.
+.SS "Initialization in ex and vi"
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR vi
+always had a line in the edit buffer, even if the edit buffer was
+``empty''. For example:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The
+.IR ex
+command
+.BR =
+executed from visual mode wrote ``1'' when the buffer was empty.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Writes from visual mode of an empty edit buffer wrote files of a single
+character (a
+<newline>),
+while writes from
+.IR ex
+mode of an empty edit buffer wrote empty files.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Put and read commands into an empty edit buffer left an empty line at
+the top of the edit buffer.
+.P
+For consistency, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit any of these behaviors.
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR vi
+did not always return the terminal to its original modes; for example,
+ICRNL was modified if it was not originally set. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit
+this behavior.
+.SS "Command Descriptions in vi"
+.P
+Motion commands are among the most complicated aspects of
+.IR vi
+to describe. With some exceptions, the text region and buffer type
+effect of a motion command on a
+.IR vi
+command are described on a case-by-case basis. The descriptions of text
+regions in POSIX.1\(hy2008 are not intended to imply direction; that is, an
+inclusive region from line
+.IR n
+to line
+.IR n +5
+is identical to a region from line
+.IR n +5
+to line
+.IR n .
+This is of more than academic interest\(emmovements to marks can be in
+either direction, and, if the
+.BR wrapscan
+option is set, so can movements to search points. Historically, lines
+are always stored into buffers in text order; that is, from the start
+of the edit buffer to the end. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical
+practice.
+.P
+Historically, command counts were applied to any associated motion, and
+were multiplicative to any supplied motion count. For example,
+.BR 2cw
+is the same as
+.BR c2w ,
+and
+.BR 2c3w
+is the same as
+.BR c6w .
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires this behavior. Historically,
+.IR vi
+commands that used bigwords, words, paragraphs, and sentences as
+objects treated groups of empty lines, or lines that contained only
+<blank>
+characters, inconsistently. Some commands treated them as a single entity,
+while others treated each line separately. For example, the
+.BR w ,
+.BR W ,
+and
+.BR B
+commands treated groups of empty lines as individual words; that is,
+the command would move the cursor to each new empty line. The
+.BR e
+and
+.BR E
+commands treated groups of empty lines as a single word; that is, the
+first use would move past the group of lines. The
+.BR b
+command would just beep at the user, or if done from the start of the
+line as a motion command, fail in unexpected ways. If the lines
+contained only (or ended with)
+<blank>
+characters, the
+.BR w
+and
+.BR W
+commands would just beep at the user, the
+.BR E
+and
+.BR e
+commands would treat the group as a single word, and the
+.BR B
+and
+.BR b
+commands would treat the lines as individual words. For consistency and
+simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that all
+.IR vi
+commands treat groups of empty or blank lines as a single entity, and
+that movement through lines ending with
+<blank>
+characters be consistent with other movements.
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR vi
+documentation indicated that any number of double-quotes were skipped
+after punctuation marks at sentence boundaries; however,
+implementations only skipped single-quotes. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires both to be
+skipped.
+.P
+Historically, the first and last characters in the edit buffer were
+word boundaries. This historical practice is required by POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR vi
+attempted to update the minimum number of columns on the screen
+possible, which could lead to misleading information being displayed.
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 makes no requirements other than that the current character being
+entered is displayed correctly, leaving all other decisions in this
+area up to the implementation.
+.P
+Historically, lines were arbitrarily folded between columns of any
+characters that required multiple column positions on the screen, with
+the exception of tabs, which terminated at the right-hand margin. POSIX.1\(hy2008
+permits the former and requires the latter. Implementations that do not
+arbitrarily break lines between columns of characters that occupy
+multiple column positions should not permit the cursor to rest on a
+column that does not contain any part of a character.
+.P
+The historical
+.IR vi
+had a problem in that all movements were by buffer lines, not by
+display or screen lines. This is often the right thing to do; for
+example, single line movements, such as
+.BR j
+or
+.BR k ,
+should work on buffer lines. Commands like
+.BR dj ,
+or
+.BR j. ,
+where
+.BR .
+is a change command, only make sense for buffer lines. It is not,
+however, the right thing to do for screen motion or scrolling commands
+like
+<control>\(hyD,
+<control>\(hyF,
+and
+.BR H .
+If the window is fairly small, using buffer lines in these cases can
+result in completely random motion; for example,
+.BR 1 \c
+<control>\c
+.BR \(hyD
+can result in a completely changed screen, without any overlap. This is
+clearly not what the user wanted. The problem is even worse in the case
+of the
+.BR H ,
+.BR L ,
+and
+.BR M
+commands\(emas they position the cursor at the first non-\c
+<blank>
+of the line, they may all refer to the same location in large lines,
+and will result in no movement at all.
+.P
+In addition, if the line is larger than the screen, using buffer
+lines can make it impossible to display parts of the line\(emthere are
+not any commands that do not display the beginning of the line in
+historical
+.IR vi ,
+and if both the beginning and end of the line cannot be on the screen
+at the same time, the user suffers. Finally, the page and half-page
+scrolling commands historically moved to the first non-\c
+<blank>
+in the new line. If the line is approximately the same size as the
+screen, this is inadequate because the cursor before and after a
+<control>\(hyD
+command will refer to the same location on the screen.
+.P
+Implementations of
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+exist that do not have these problems because the relevant commands (\c
+<control>\(hyB,
+<control>\(hyD,
+<control>\(hyF,
+<control>\(hyU,
+<control>\(hyY,
+<control>\(hyE,
+.BR H ,
+.BR L ,
+and
+.BR M)
+operate on display (screen) lines, not (edit) buffer lines.
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this behavior by default because the standard
+developers believed that users would find it too confusing. However,
+historical practice has been relaxed. For example,
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi
+historically attempted, albeit sometimes unsuccessfully, to never put
+part of a line on the last lines of a screen; for example, if a line
+would not fit in its entirety, no part of the line was displayed, and
+the screen lines corresponding to the line contained single
+.BR '@' 
+characters. This behavior is permitted, but not required by POSIX.1\(hy2008, so
+that it is possible for implementations to support long lines in small
+screens more reasonably without changing the commands to be oriented to
+the display (instead of oriented to the buffer). POSIX.1\(hy2008 also permits
+implementations to refuse to edit any edit buffer containing a line
+that will not fit on the screen in its entirety.
+.P
+The display area (for example, the value of the
+.BR window
+edit option) has historically been ``grown'', or expanded, to display
+new text when local movements are done in displays where the number of
+lines displayed is less than the maximum possible. Expansion has
+historically been the first choice, when the target line is less than
+the maximum possible expansion value away. Scrolling has historically
+been the next choice, done when the target line is less than half a
+display away, and otherwise, the screen was redrawn. There were
+exceptions, however, in that
+.IR ex
+commands generally always caused the screen to be redrawn. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does
+not specify a standard behavior because there may be external issues,
+such as connection speed, the number of characters necessary to redraw
+as opposed to scroll, or terminal capabilities that implementations
+will have to accommodate.
+.P
+The current line in POSIX.1\(hy2008 maps one-to-one to a buffer line in the
+file. The current column does not. There are two different column
+values that are described by POSIX.1\(hy2008. The first is the current column
+value as set by many of the
+.IR vi
+commands. This value is remembered for the lifetime of the editor. The
+second column value is the actual position on the screen where the
+cursor rests. The two are not always the same. For example, when the
+cursor is backed by a multi-column character, the actual cursor
+position on the screen has historically been the last column of the
+character in command mode, and the first column of the character in
+input mode.
+.P
+Commands that set the current line, but that do not set the current
+cursor value (for example,
+.BR j
+and
+.BR k )
+attempt to get as close as possible to the remembered column position,
+so that the cursor tends to restrict itself to a vertical column as the
+user moves around in the edit buffer. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to
+historical practice, requiring that the display location of the cursor
+on the display line be adjusted from the current column value as
+necessary to support this historical behavior.
+.P
+Historically, only a single line (and for some terminals, a single line
+minus 1 column) of characters could be entered by the user for the
+line-oriented commands; that is,
+.BR : ,
+.BR ! ,
+.BR / ,
+or
+.BR ? .
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 permits, but does not require, this limitation.
+.P
+Historically, ``soft'' errors in
+.IR vi
+caused the terminal to be alerted, but no error message was displayed.
+As a general rule, no error message was displayed for errors in command
+execution in
+.IR vi ,
+when the error resulted from the user attempting an invalid or
+impossible action, or when a searched-for object was not found.
+Examples of soft errors included
+.BR h
+at the left margin,
+<control>\(hyB
+or
+.BR [[
+at the beginning of the file,
+.BR 2G
+at the end of the file, and so on. In addition, errors such as
+.BR % ,
+.BR ]] ,
+.BR } ,
+.BR ) ,
+.BR N ,
+.BR n ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR t ,
+and
+.BR T
+failing to find the searched-for object were soft as well. Less
+consistently,
+.BR /
+and
+.BR ?
+displayed an error message if the pattern was not found,
+.BR / ,
+.BR ? ,
+.BR N ,
+and
+.BR n
+displayed an error message if no previous regular expression had been
+specified, and
+.BR ;
+did not display an error message if no previous
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR t ,
+or
+.BR T
+command had occurred. Also, behavior in this area might reasonably be
+based on a runtime evaluation of the speed of a network connection.
+Finally, some implementations have provided error messages for soft
+errors in order to assist naive users, based on the value of a verbose
+edit option. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not list specific errors for which an error
+message shall be displayed. Implementations should conform to
+historical practice in the absence of any strong reason to diverge.
+.SS "Page Backwards"
+.P
+The
+<control>\(hyB
+and
+<control>\(hyF
+commands historically considered it an error to attempt to page past
+the beginning or end of the file, whereas the
+<control>\(hyD
+and
+<control>\(hyU
+commands simply moved to the beginning or end of the file. For
+consistency, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires the latter behavior for all four commands.
+All four commands still consider it an error if the current line is at
+the beginning (\c
+<control>\(hyB,
+<control>\(hyU)
+or end (\c
+<control>\(hyF,
+<control>\(hyD)
+of the file. Historically, the
+<control>\(hyB
+and
+<control>\(hyF
+commands skip two lines in order to include overlapping lines when a
+single command is entered. This makes less sense in the presence of a
+.IR count ,
+as there will be, by definition, no overlapping lines. The actual
+calculation used by historical implementations of the
+.IR vi
+editor for
+<control>\(hyB
+was:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+((current first line) \(mi count x (window edit option)) +2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and for
+<control>\(hyF
+was:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+((current first line) + count x (window edit option)) \(mi2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This calculation does not work well when intermixing commands with and
+without counts; for example,
+.BR 3\c
+<control>\(hyF
+is not equivalent to entering the
+<control>\(hyF
+command three times, and is not reversible by entering the
+<control>\(hyB
+command three times. For consistency with other
+.IR vi
+commands that take counts, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires a different calculation.
+.SS "Scroll Forward"
+.P
+The 4BSD and System V implementations of
+.IR vi
+differed on the initial value used by the
+.BR scroll
+command. 4BSD used:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+((window edit option) +1) /2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+while System V used the value of the
+.BR scroll
+edit option. The System V version is specified by POSIX.1\(hy2008 because the
+standard developers believed that it was more intuitive and permitted
+the user a method of setting the scroll value initially without also
+setting the number of lines that are displayed.
+.SS "Scroll Forward by Line"
+.P
+Historically, the
+<control>\(hyE
+and
+<control>\(hyY
+commands considered it an error if the last and first lines,
+respectively, were already on the screen. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to
+historical practice. Historically, the
+<control>\(hyE
+and
+<control>\(hyY
+commands had no effect in open mode. For simplicity and consistency of
+specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that they behave as usual, albeit with a
+single line screen.
+.SS "Clear and Redisplay"
+.P
+The historical
+<control>\(hyL
+command refreshed the screen exactly as it was supposed to be currently
+displayed, replacing any
+.BR '@' 
+characters for lines that had been deleted but not updated on the
+screen with refreshed
+.BR '@' 
+characters. The intent of the
+<control>\(hyL
+command is to refresh when the screen has been accidentally
+overwritten; for example, by a
+.BR write
+command from another user, or modem noise.
+.SS "Redraw Screen"
+.P
+The historical
+<control>\(hyR
+command redisplayed only when necessary to update lines that had been
+deleted but not updated on the screen and that were flagged with
+.BR '@' 
+characters. There is no requirement that the screen be in any way
+refreshed if no lines of this form are currently displayed. POSIX.1\(hy2008
+permits implementations to extend this command to refresh lines on the
+screen flagged with
+.BR '@' 
+characters because they are too long to be displayed in the current
+framework; however, the current line and column need not be modified.
+.SS "Search for tagstring"
+.P
+Historically, the first non-\c
+<blank>
+at or after the cursor was the first character, and all subsequent
+characters that were word characters, up to the end of the line, were
+included. For example, with the cursor on the leading
+<space>
+or on the
+.BR '#' 
+character in the text
+.BR \(dq#bar@\(dq ,
+the tag was
+.BR \(dq#bar\(dq .
+On the character
+.BR 'b' 
+it was
+.BR \(dqbar\(dq ,
+and on the
+.BR 'a' 
+it was
+.BR \(dqar\(dq .
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires this behavior.
+.SS "Replace Text with Results from Shell Command"
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR < ,
+.BR > ,
+and
+.BR !
+commands considered most cursor motions other than line-oriented
+motions an error; for example, the command
+.BR ">/foo<CR>"
+succeeded, while the command
+.BR ">l"
+failed, even though the text region described by the two commands might
+be identical. For consistency, all three commands only consider entire
+lines and not partial lines, and the region is defined as any line that
+contains a character that was specified by the motion.
+.SS "Move to Matching Character"
+.P
+Other matching characters have been left implementation-defined in
+order to allow extensions such as matching
+.BR '<' 
+and
+.BR '>' 
+for searching HTML, or
+.BR #ifdef ,
+.BR #else ,
+and
+.BR #endif
+for searching C source.
+.SS "Repeat Substitution"
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that any
+.BR c
+and
+.BR g
+flags specified to the previous substitute command be ignored; however,
+the
+.BR r
+flag may still apply, if supported by the implementation.
+.SS "Return to Previous (Context or Section)"
+.P
+The
+.BR [[ ,
+.BR ]] ,
+.BR ( ,
+.BR ) ,
+.BR { ,
+and
+.BR }
+commands are all affected by ``section boundaries'', but in some
+historical implementations not all of the commands recognize the same
+section boundaries. This is a bug, not a feature, and a unique
+section-boundary algorithm was not described for each command. One
+special case that is preserved is that the sentence command moves to
+the end of the last line of the edit buffer while the other commands go
+to the beginning, in order to preserve the traditional character cut
+semantics of the sentence command. Historically,
+.IR vi
+section boundaries at the beginning and end of the edit buffer were the
+first non-\c
+<blank>
+on the first and last lines of the edit buffer if one exists;
+otherwise, the last character of the first and last lines of the edit
+buffer if one exists. To increase consistency with other section
+locations, this has been simplified by POSIX.1\(hy2008 to the first character of
+the first and last lines of the edit buffer, or the first and the last
+lines of the edit buffer if they are empty.
+.P
+Sentence boundaries were problematic in the historical
+.IR vi .
+They were not only the boundaries as defined for the section and
+paragraph commands, but they were the first non-\c
+<blank>
+that occurred after those boundaries, as well. Historically, the
+.IR vi
+section commands were documented as taking an optional window size as a
+.IR count
+preceding the command. This was not implemented in historical versions,
+so POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that the
+.IR count
+repeat the command, for consistency with other
+.IR vi
+commands.
+.SS "Repeat"
+.P
+Historically, mapped commands other than text input commands could not
+be repeated using the
+.BR period
+command. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice.
+.P
+The restrictions on the interpretation of special characters (for
+example,
+<control>\(hyH)
+in the repetition of text input mode commands is intended to match
+historical practice. For example, given the input sequence:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+iab<control>-H<control>-H<control>-Hdef<escape>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+the user should be informed of an error when the sequence is first
+entered, but not during a command repetition. The character
+<control>\(hyT
+is specifically exempted from this restriction. Historical
+implementations of
+.IR vi
+ignored
+<control>\(hyT
+characters that were input in the original command during command
+repetition. POSIX.1\(hy2008 prohibits this behavior.
+.SS "Find Regular Expression"
+.P
+Historically, commands did not affect the line searched to or from if
+the motion command was a search (\c
+.BR / ,
+.BR ? ,
+.BR N ,
+.BR n )
+and the final position was the start/end of the line. There were some
+special cases and
+.IR vi
+was not consistent. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this behavior, for
+consistency. Historical implementations permitted but were unable to
+handle searches as motion commands that wrapped (that is, due to the
+edit option
+.BR wrapscan )
+to the original location. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that this behavior be treated
+as an error.
+.P
+Historically, the syntax
+.BR \(dq/RE/0\(dq 
+was used to force the command to cut text in line mode. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires
+conformance to historical practice.
+.P
+Historically, in open mode, a
+.BR z
+specified to a search command redisplayed the current line instead of
+displaying the current screen with the current line highlighted. For
+consistency and simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this
+behavior.
+.P
+Historically, trailing
+.BR z
+commands were permitted and ignored if entered as part of a search used
+as a motion command. For consistency and simplicity of specification,
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this behavior.
+.SS "Execute an ex Command"
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR vi
+implementations restricted the commands that could be entered on the
+colon command line (for example,
+.BR append
+and
+.BR change ),
+and some other commands were known to cause them to fail
+catastrophically. For consistency, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit these
+restrictions. When executing an
+.IR ex
+command by entering
+.BR : ,
+it is not possible to enter a
+<newline>
+as part of the command because it is considered the end of the command.
+A different approach is to enter
+.IR ex
+command mode by using the
+.IR vi
+.BR Q
+command (and later resuming visual mode with the
+.IR ex
+.BR vi
+command). In
+.IR ex
+command mode, the single-line limitation does not exist. So, for
+example, the following is valid:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+Q
+s/break here/break\e
+here/
+vi
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that, if the
+.IR ex
+command overwrites any part of the screen that would be erased by a
+refresh,
+.IR vi
+pauses for a character from the user. Historically, this character
+could be any character; for example, a character input by the user
+before the message appeared, or even a mapped character. This is
+probably a bug, but implementations that have tried to be more rigorous
+by requiring that the user enter a specific character, or that the user
+enter a character after the message was displayed, have been forced by
+user indignation back into historical behavior. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires
+conformance to historical practice.
+.SS "Shift Left (Right)"
+.P
+Refer to the Rationale for the
+.BR !
+and
+.BR /
+commands. Historically, the
+.BR <
+and
+.BR >
+commands sometimes moved the cursor to the first non-\c
+<blank>
+(for example if the command was repeated or with
+.BR _
+as the motion command), and sometimes left it unchanged. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not
+permit this inconsistency, requiring instead that the cursor always
+move to the first non-\c
+<blank>.
+Historically, the
+.BR <
+and
+.BR >
+commands did not support buffer arguments, although some
+implementations allow the specification of an optional buffer. This
+behavior is neither required nor disallowed by POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SS "Execute"
+.P
+Historically, buffers could execute other buffers, and loops, infinite
+and otherwise, were possible. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical
+practice. The *\c
+.IR buffer
+syntax of
+.IR ex
+is not required in
+.IR vi ,
+because it is not historical practice and has been used in some
+.IR vi
+implementations to support additional scripting languages.
+.SS "Reverse Case"
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR ~
+command ignored any associated
+.IR count ,
+and acted only on the characters in the current line. For consistency
+with other
+.IR vi
+commands, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that an associated
+.IR count
+act on the next
+.IR count
+characters, and that the command move to subsequent lines if warranted
+by
+.IR count ,
+to make it possible to modify large pieces of text in a reasonably
+efficient manner. There exist
+.IR vi
+implementations that optionally require an associated motion command
+for the
+.BR ~
+command. Implementations supporting this functionality are encouraged
+to base it on the
+.BR tildedop
+edit option and handle the text regions and cursor positioning
+identically to the
+.BR yank
+command.
+.SS "Append"
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR count s
+specified to the
+.BR A ,
+.BR a ,
+.BR I ,
+and
+.BR i
+commands repeated the input of the first line
+.IR count
+times, and did not repeat the subsequent lines of the input text. POSIX.1\(hy2008
+requires that the entire text input be repeated
+.IR count
+times.
+.SS "Move Backward to Preceding Word"
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR vi
+became confused if word commands were used as motion commands in empty
+files. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that this be an error. Historical implementations
+of
+.IR vi
+had a large number of bugs in the word movement commands, and they
+varied greatly in behavior in the presence of empty lines, ``words''
+made up of a single character, and lines containing only
+<blank>
+characters. For consistency and simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does
+not permit this behavior.
+.SS "Change to End-of-Line"
+.P
+Some historical implementations of the
+.BR C
+command did not behave as described by POSIX.1\(hy2008 when the
+.BR $
+key was remapped because they were implemented by pushing the
+.BR $
+key onto the input queue and reprocessing it. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit
+this behavior. Historically, the
+.BR C ,
+.BR S ,
+and
+.BR s
+commands did not copy replaced text into the numeric buffers. For
+consistency and simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that they
+behave like their respective
+.BR c
+commands in all respects.
+.SS "Delete"
+.P
+Historically, lines in open mode that were deleted were scrolled up,
+and an
+.BR @
+glyph written over the beginning of the line. In the case of terminals
+that are incapable of the necessary cursor motions, the editor erased
+the deleted line from the screen. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to
+historical practice; that is, if the terminal cannot display the
+.BR '@' 
+character, the line cannot remain on the screen.
+.SS "Delete to End-of-Line"
+.P
+Some historical implementations of the
+.BR D
+command did not behave as described by POSIX.1\(hy2008 when the
+.BR $
+key was remapped because they were implemented by pushing the
+.BR $
+key onto the input queue and reprocessing it. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit
+this behavior.
+.SS "Join"
+.P
+An historical oddity of
+.IR vi
+is that the commands
+.BR J ,
+.BR 1J ,
+and
+.BR 2J
+are all equivalent. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice.
+The
+.IR vi
+.BR J
+command is specified in terms of the
+.IR ex
+.BR join
+command with an
+.IR ex
+command
+.IR count
+value. The address correction for a
+.IR count
+that is past the end of the edit buffer is necessary for historical
+compatibility for both
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi .
+.SS "Mark Position"
+.P
+Historical practice is that only lowercase letters, plus backquote and
+single-quote, could be used to mark a cursor position. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires
+conformance to historical practice, but encourages implementations to
+support other characters as marks as well.
+.SS "Repeat Regular Expression Find (Forward and Reverse)"
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR N
+and
+.BR n
+commands could not be used as motion components for the
+.BR c
+command. With the exception of the
+.BR cN
+command, which worked if the search crossed a line boundary, the text
+region would be discarded, and the user would not be in text input
+mode. For consistency and simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not
+permit this behavior.
+.SS "Insert Empty Line (Below and Above)"
+.P
+Historically, counts to the
+.BR O
+and
+.BR o
+commands were used as the number of physical lines to open, if the
+terminal was dumb and the
+.BR slowopen
+option was not set. This was intended to minimize traffic over slow
+connections and repainting for dumb terminals. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit
+this behavior, requiring that a
+.IR count
+to the open command behave as for other text input commands. This
+change to historical practice was made for consistency, and because a
+superset of the functionality is provided by the
+.BR slowopen
+edit option.
+.SS "Put from Buffer (Following and Before)"
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR count s
+to the
+.BR p
+and
+.BR P
+commands were ignored if the buffer was a line mode buffer, but were
+(mostly) implemented as described in POSIX.1\(hy2008 if the buffer was a
+character mode buffer. Because implementations exist that do not have
+this limitation, and because pasting lines multiple times is generally
+useful, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that
+.IR count
+be supported for all
+.BR p
+and
+.BR P
+commands.
+.P
+Historical implementations of
+.IR vi
+were widely known to have major problems in the
+.BR p
+and
+.BR P
+commands, particularly when unusual regions of text were copied into
+the edit buffer. The standard developers viewed these as bugs, and they
+are not permitted for consistency and simplicity of specification.
+.P
+Historically, a
+.BR P
+or
+.BR p
+command (or an
+.IR ex
+.BR put
+command executed from open or visual mode) executed in an empty file,
+left an empty line as the first line of the file. For consistency and
+simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this behavior.
+.SS "Replace Character"
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR r
+command did not correctly handle the
+.IR erase
+and
+.IR "word erase"
+characters as arguments, nor did it handle an associated
+.IR count
+greater than 1 with a
+<carriage-return>
+argument, for which it replaced
+.IR count
+characters with a single
+<newline>.
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit these inconsistencies.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR r
+command permitted the
+<control>\(hyV
+escaping of entered characters, such as
+<ESC>
+and the
+<carriage-return>;
+however, it required two leading
+<control>\(hyV
+characters instead of one. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that this be changed for
+consistency with the other text input commands of
+.IR vi .
+.P
+Historically, it is an error to enter the
+.BR r
+command if there are less than
+.IR count
+characters at or after the cursor in the line. While a reasonable and
+unambiguous extension would be to permit the
+.BR r
+command on empty lines, it would require that too large a
+.IR count
+be adjusted to match the number of characters at or after the cursor
+for consistency, which is sufficiently different from historical
+practice to be avoided. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical
+practice.
+.SS "Replace Characters"
+.P
+Historically, if there were
+.BR autoindent
+characters in the line on which the
+.BR R
+command was run, and
+.BR autoindent
+was set, the first
+<newline>
+would be properly indented and no characters would be replaced by the
+<newline>.
+Each additional
+<newline>
+would replace
+.IR n
+characters, where
+.IR n
+was the number of characters that were needed to indent the rest of the
+line to the proper indentation level. This behavior is a bug and is not
+permitted by POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SS "Undo"
+.P
+Historical practice for cursor positioning after undoing commands was
+mixed. In most cases, when undoing commands that affected a single
+line, the cursor was moved to the start of added or changed text, or
+immediately after deleted text. However, if the user had moved from the
+line being changed, the column was either set to the first non-\c
+<blank>,
+returned to the origin of the command, or remained unchanged. When
+undoing commands that affected multiple lines or entire lines, the
+cursor was moved to the first character in the first line restored. As
+an example of how inconsistent this was, a search, followed by an
+.BR o
+text input command, followed by an
+.BR undo
+would return the cursor to the location where the
+.BR o
+command was entered, but a
+.BR cw
+command followed by an
+.BR o
+command followed by an
+.BR undo
+would return the cursor to the first non-\c
+<blank>
+of the line. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires the most useful of these behaviors, and
+discards the least useful, in the interest of consistency and
+simplicity of specification.
+.SS "Yank"
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR yank
+command did not move to the end of the motion if the motion was in the
+forward direction. It moved to the end of the motion if the motion was
+in the backward direction, except for the
+.BR _
+command, or for the
+.BR G
+and
+.BR '
+commands when the end of the motion was on the current line. This was
+further complicated by the fact that for a number of motion commands,
+the
+.BR yank
+command moved the cursor but did not update the screen; for example, a
+subsequent command would move the cursor from the end of the motion,
+even though the cursor on the screen had not reflected the cursor
+movement for the
+.BR yank
+command. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that all
+.BR yank
+commands associated with backward motions move the cursor to the end of
+the motion for consistency, and specifically, to make
+.BR '
+commands as motions consistent with search patterns as motions.
+.SS "Yank Current Line"
+.P
+Some historical implementations of the
+.BR Y
+command did not behave as described by POSIX.1\(hy2008 when the
+.BR '_' 
+key was remapped because they were implemented by pushing the
+.BR '_' 
+key onto the input queue and reprocessing it. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit
+this behavior.
+.SS "Redraw Window"
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR z
+command always redrew the screen. This is permitted but not required by
+POSIX.1\(hy2008, because of the frequent use of the
+.BR z
+command in macros such as
+.BR "map n nz."
+for screen positioning, instead of its use to change the screen size.
+The standard developers believed that expanding or scrolling the screen
+offered a better interface for users. The ability to redraw the screen
+is preserved if the optional new window size is specified, and in the
+<control>\(hyL
+and
+<control>\(hyR
+commands.
+.P
+The semantics of
+.BR z^
+are confusing at best. Historical practice is that the screen before
+the screen that ended with the specified line is displayed. POSIX.1\(hy2008
+requires conformance to historical practice.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR z
+command would not display a partial line at the top or bottom of the
+screen. If the partial line would normally have been displayed at the
+bottom of the screen, the command worked, but the partial line was
+replaced with
+.BR '@' 
+characters. If the partial line would normally have been displayed at
+the top of the screen, the command would fail. For consistency and
+simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this behavior.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR z
+command with a line specification of 1 ignored the command. For
+consistency and simplicity of specification, POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this
+behavior.
+.P
+Historically, the
+.BR z
+command did not set the cursor column to the first non-\c
+<blank>
+for the character if the first screen was to be displayed, and was
+already displayed. For consistency and simplicity of specification,
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not permit this behavior.
+.SS "Input Mode Commands in vi"
+.P
+Historical implementations of
+.IR vi
+did not permit the user to erase more than a single line of input,
+or to use normal erase characters such as
+.IR "line erase" ,
+.IR worderase ,
+and
+.IR erase
+to erase
+.BR autoindent
+characters. As there exist implementations of
+.IR vi
+that do not have these limitations, both behaviors are permitted, but
+only historical practice is required. In the case of these extensions,
+.IR vi
+is required to pause at the
+.BR autoindent
+and previous line boundaries.
+.P
+Historical implementations of
+.IR vi
+updated only the portion of the screen where the current cursor
+character was displayed. For example, consider the
+.IR vi
+input keystrokes:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+iabcd<escape>0C<tab>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Historically, the
+<tab>
+would overwrite the characters
+.BR \(dqabcd\(dq 
+when it was displayed. Other implementations replace only the
+.BR 'a' 
+character with the
+<tab>,
+and then push the rest of the characters ahead of the cursor. Both
+implementations have problems. The historical implementation is
+probably visually nicer for the above example; however, for the
+keystrokes:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+iabcd<ESC>0R<tab><ESC>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+the historical implementation results in the string
+.BR \(dqbcd\(dq 
+disappearing and then magically reappearing when the
+<ESC>
+character is entered. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires the former behavior when
+overwriting erase-columns\(emthat is, overwriting characters that are no
+longer logically part of the edit buffer\(emand the latter behavior
+otherwise.
+.P
+Historical implementations of
+.IR vi
+discarded the
+<control>\(hyD
+and
+<control>\(hyT
+characters when they were entered at places where their command
+functionality was not appropriate. POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that the
+<control>\(hyT
+functionality always be available, and that
+<control>\(hyD
+be treated as any other key when not operating on
+.BR autoindent
+characters.
+.SS "NUL"
+.P
+Some historical implementations of
+.IR vi
+limited the number of characters entered using the NUL input character
+to 256 bytes. POSIX.1\(hy2008 permits this limitation; however, implementations
+are encouraged to remove this limit.
+.SS "<control>\(hyD"
+.P
+See also Rationale for the input mode command
+<newline>.
+The hidden assumptions in the
+<control>\(hyD
+command (and in the
+.IR vi
+.BR autoindent
+specification in general) is that
+<space>
+characters take up a single column on the screen and that
+<tab>
+characters are comprised of an integral number of
+<space>
+characters.
+.SS "<newline>"
+.P
+Implementations are permitted to rewrite
+.BR autoindent
+characters in the line when
+<newline>,
+<carriage-return>,
+<control>\(hyD,
+and
+<control>\(hyT
+are entered, or when the
+.BR shift
+commands are used, because historical implementations have both done so
+and found it necessary to do so. For example, a
+<control>\(hyD
+when the cursor is preceded by a single
+<tab>,
+with
+.BR tabstop
+set to 8, and
+.BR shiftwidth
+set to 3, will result in the
+<tab>
+being replaced by several
+<space>
+characters.
+.SS "<control>\(hyT"
+.P
+See also the Rationale for the input mode command
+<newline>.
+Historically,
+<control>\(hyT
+only worked if no non-\c
+<blank>
+characters had yet been input in the current input line. In addition,
+the characters inserted by
+<control>\(hyT
+were treated as
+.BR autoindent
+characters, and could not be erased using normal user erase characters.
+Because implementations exist that do not have these limitations, and
+as moving to a column boundary is generally useful, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that
+both limitations be removed.
+.SS "<control>\(hyV"
+.P
+Historically,
+.IR vi
+used
+.BR ^V ,
+regardless of the value of the literal-next character of the terminal.
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires conformance to historical practice.
+.P
+The uses described for
+<control>\(hyV
+can also be accomplished with
+<control>\(hyQ,
+which is useful on terminals that use
+<control>\(hyV
+for the down-arrow function. However, most historical implementations
+use
+<control>\(hyQ
+for the
+.IR termios
+START character, so the editor will generally not receive the
+<control>\(hyQ
+unless
+.BR "stty ixon"
+mode is set to off. (In addition, some historical implementations of
+.IR vi
+explicitly set
+.BR ixon
+mode to on, so it was difficult for the user to set it to off.) Any of
+the command characters described in POSIX.1\(hy2008 can be made ineffective by
+their selection as
+.IR termios
+control characters, using the
+.IR stty
+utility or other methods described in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SS "<ESC>"
+.P
+Historically, SIGINT alerted the terminal when used to end input
+mode. This behavior is permitted, but not required, by POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIed\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIex\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIstty\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/wait.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/wait.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6c7fe6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/wait.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,346 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WAIT "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wait
+\(em await process completion
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+wait \fB[\fIpid\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+When an asynchronous list (see
+.IR "Section 2.9.3.1" ", " "Examples")
+is started by the shell, the process ID of the last command in each
+element of the asynchronous list shall become known in the current
+shell execution environment; see
+.IR "Section 2.12" ", " "Shell Execution Environment".
+.P
+If the
+.IR wait
+utility is invoked with no operands, it shall wait until all process
+IDs known to the invoking shell have terminated and exit with a zero
+exit status.
+.P
+If one or more
+.IR pid
+operands are specified that represent known process IDs, the
+.IR wait
+utility shall wait until all of them have terminated. If one or more
+.IR pid
+operands are specified that represent unknown process IDs,
+.IR wait
+shall treat them as if they were known process IDs that exited with
+exit status 127. The exit status returned by the
+.IR wait
+utility shall be the exit status of the process requested by the last
+.IR pid
+operand.
+.P
+The known process IDs are applicable only for invocations of
+.IR wait
+in the current shell execution environment.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIpid\fR" 10
+One of the following:
+.RS 10 
+.IP " 1." 4
+The unsigned decimal integer process ID of a command, for which the
+utility is to wait for the termination.
+.IP " 2." 4
+A job control job ID (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.204" ", " "Job Control Job ID")
+that identifies a background process group to be waited for. The job
+control job ID notation is applicable only for invocations of
+.IR wait
+in the current shell execution environment; see
+.IR "Section 2.12" ", " "Shell Execution Environment".
+The exit status of
+.IR wait
+shall be determined by the last command in the pipeline.
+.RS 4 
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+The job control job ID type of
+.IR pid
+is only available on systems supporting the User Portability Utilities
+option.
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR wait :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+If one or more operands were specified, all of them have terminated or
+were not known by the invoking shell, and the status of the last
+operand specified is known, then the exit status of
+.IR wait
+shall be the exit status information of the command indicated by the
+last operand specified. If the process terminated abnormally due to
+the receipt of a signal, the exit status shall be greater than 128 and
+shall be distinct from the exit status generated by other signals, but
+the exact value is unspecified. (See the
+.IR kill
+.BR \(mil
+option.) Otherwise, the
+.IR wait
+utility shall exit with one of the following values:
+.IP "\0\0\0\00" 8
+The
+.IR wait
+utility was invoked with no operands and all process IDs known by the
+invoking shell have terminated.
+.IP "1\(hy126" 8
+The
+.IR wait
+utility detected an error.
+.IP "\0\0127" 8
+The command identified by the last
+.IR pid
+operand specified is unknown.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On most implementations,
+.IR wait
+is a shell built-in. If it is called in a subshell or separate utility
+execution environment, such as one of the following:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(wait)
+nohup wait ...
+find . \(miexec wait ... \e;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+it returns immediately because there are no known process IDs to wait
+for in those environments.
+.P
+Historical implementations of interactive shells have discarded the
+exit status of terminated background processes before each shell
+prompt. Therefore, the status of background processes was usually lost
+unless it terminated while
+.IR wait
+was waiting for it. This could be a serious problem when a job that
+was expected to run for a long time actually terminated quickly with a
+syntax or initialization error because the exit status returned was
+usually zero if the requested process ID was not found. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires
+the implementation to keep the status of terminated jobs available
+until the status is requested, so that scripts like:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+j1&
+p1=$!
+j2&
+wait $p1
+echo Job 1 exited with status $?
+wait $!
+echo Job 2 exited with status $?
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+work without losing status on any of the jobs. The shell is allowed to
+discard the status of any process if it determines that the application
+cannot get the process ID for that process from the shell. It is also
+required to remember only
+{CHILD_MAX}
+number of processes in this way. Since the only way to get the process
+ID from the shell is by using the
+.BR '!' 
+shell parameter, the shell is allowed to discard the status of an
+asynchronous list if
+.BR \(dq$!\(dq 
+was not referenced before another asynchronous list was started. (This
+means that the shell only has to keep the status of the last
+asynchronous list started if the application did not reference
+.BR \(dq$!\(dq .
+If the implementation of the shell is smart enough to determine that a
+reference to
+.BR \(dq$!\(dq 
+was not saved anywhere that the application can retrieve it later, it
+can use this information to trim the list of saved information. Note
+also that a successful call to
+.IR wait
+with no operands discards the exit status of all asynchronous lists.)
+.P
+If the exit status of
+.IR wait
+is greater than 128, there is no way for the application to know if the
+waited-for process exited with that value or was killed by a signal.
+Since most utilities exit with small values, there is seldom any
+ambiguity. Even in the ambiguous cases, most applications just need to
+know that the asynchronous job failed; it does not matter whether it
+detected an error and failed or was killed and did not complete its job
+normally.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Although the exact value used when a process is terminated by a signal
+is unspecified, if it is known that a signal terminated a process, a
+script can still reliably determine which signal by using
+.IR kill
+as shown by the following script:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sleep 1000&
+pid=$!
+kill \(mikill $pid
+wait $pid
+echo $pid was terminated by a SIG$(kill \(mil $?) signal.
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the following sequence of commands is run in less than 31 seconds:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sleep 257 | sleep 31 &
+jobs \(mil %%
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+either of the following commands returns the exit status of the second
+.IR sleep
+in the pipeline:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+wait \fI<pid of sleep 31>\fP
+wait %%
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The description of
+.IR wait
+does not refer to the
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+function from the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 because that would needlessly overspecify this
+interface. However, the wording means that
+.IR wait
+is required to wait for an explicit process when it is given an
+argument so that the status information of other processes is not
+consumed. Historical implementations use the
+\fIwait\fR()
+function defined in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 until
+\fIwait\fR()
+returns the requested process ID or finds that the requested process
+does not exist. Because this means that a shell script could not
+reliably get the status of all background children if a second
+background job was ever started before the first job finished, it is
+recommended that the
+.IR wait
+utility use a method such as the functionality provided by the
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+function.
+.P
+The ability to wait for multiple
+.IR pid
+operands was adopted from the KornShell.
+.P
+This new functionality was added because it is needed to determine the
+exit status of any asynchronous list accurately. The only
+compatibility problem that this change creates is for a script like
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+while sleep 60 do
+    job& echo Job started $(date) as $!  done
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+which causes the shell to monitor all of the jobs started until the
+script terminates or runs out of memory. This would not be a problem
+if the loop did not reference
+.BR \(dq$!\(dq 
+or if the script would occasionally
+.IR wait
+for jobs it started.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language",
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsh\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.204" ", " "Job Control Job ID",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^(\|)"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/wc.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/wc.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2de8551
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/wc.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,264 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WC "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wc
+\(em word, line, and byte or character count
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+wc \fB[\fR\(mic|\(mim\fB] [\fR\(milw\fB] [\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR wc
+utility shall read one or more input files and, by default, write the
+number of
+<newline>
+characters, words, and bytes contained in each input file to the standard
+output.
+.P
+The utility also shall write a total count for all named files, if more
+than one input file is specified.
+.P
+The
+.IR wc
+utility shall consider a
+.IR word
+to be a non-zero-length string of characters delimited by white space.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR wc
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mic\fP" 10
+Write to the standard output the number of bytes in each input file.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\fP" 10
+Write to the standard output the number of
+<newline>
+characters in each input file.
+.IP "\fB\(mim\fP" 10
+Write to the standard output the number of characters in each input
+file.
+.IP "\fB\(miw\fP" 10
+Write to the standard output the number of words in each input file.
+.P
+When any option is specified,
+.IR wc
+shall report only the information requested by the specified options.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of an input file. If no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, the standard input shall be used.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used if no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, and shall be used if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' 
+and the implementation treats the
+.BR '\(mi' 
+as meaning standard input.
+Otherwise, the standard input shall not be used.
+See the INPUT FILES section.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files may be of any type.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR wc :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files) and which
+characters are defined as white-space characters.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+By default, the standard output shall contain an entry for each input
+file of the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%d %d %d %s\en", <\fInewlines\fR>, <\fIwords\fR>, <\fIbytes\fR>, <\fIfile\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(mim
+option is specified, the number of characters shall replace the
+<\fIbytes\fP> field in this format.
+.P
+If any options are specified and the
+.BR \(mil
+option is not specified, the number of
+<newline>
+characters shall not be written.
+.P
+If any options are specified and the
+.BR \(miw
+option is not specified, the number of words shall not be written.
+.P
+If any options are specified and neither
+.BR \(mic
+nor
+.BR \(mim
+is specified, the number of bytes or characters shall not be written.
+.P
+If no input
+.IR file
+operands are specified, no name shall be written and no
+<blank>
+characters preceding the pathname shall be written.
+.P
+If more than one input
+.IR file
+operand is specified, an additional line shall be written, of the same
+format as the other lines, except that the word
+.BR total
+(in the POSIX locale) shall be written instead of a pathname and the
+total of each column shall be written as appropriate. Such an
+additional line, if any, is written at the end of the output.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.BR \(mim
+option is not a switch, but an option at the same level as
+.BR \(mic .
+Thus, to produce the full default output with character counts instead
+of bytes, the command required is:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+wc \(mimlw
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The output file format pseudo-\c
+\fIprintf\fR()
+string differs from the System V version of
+.IR wc :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%7d%7d%7d %s\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+which produces possibly ambiguous and unparsable results for very large
+files, as it assumes no number shall exceed six digits.
+.P
+Some historical implementations use only
+<space>,
+<tab>,
+and
+<newline>
+as word separators. The equivalent of the ISO\ C standard
+\fIisspace\fR()
+function is more appropriate.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mic
+option stands for ``character'' count, even though it counts bytes.
+This stems from the sometimes erroneous historical view that bytes and
+characters are the same size. Due to international requirements, the
+.BR \(mim
+option (reminiscent of ``multi-byte'') was added to obtain actual
+character counts.
+.P
+Early proposals only specified the results when input files were text
+files. The current specification more closely matches historical
+practice. (Bytes, words, and
+<newline>
+characters are counted separately and the results are written when an
+end-of-file is detected.)
+.P
+Historical implementations of the
+.IR wc
+utility only accepted one argument to specify the options
+.BR \(mic ,
+.BR \(mil ,
+and
+.BR \(miw .
+Some of them also had multiple occurrences of an option cause the
+corresponding count to be written multiple times and had the order of
+specification of the options affect the order of the fields on output,
+but did not document either of these. Because common usage either
+specifies no options or only one option, and because none of this was
+documented, the changes required by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 should not break many
+historical applications (and do not break any historical conforming
+applications).
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcksum\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/what.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/what.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b8fbf3e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/what.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,193 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WHAT "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+what
+\(em identify SCCS files (\fBDEVELOPMENT\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+what \fB[\fR\(mis\fB] \fIfile\fR...
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR what
+utility shall search the given files for all occurrences of the pattern
+that
+.IR get
+(see
+.IR "\fIget\fR\^")
+substitutes for the %\fBZ\fP% keyword (\c
+.BR \(dq@(#)\(dq )
+and shall write to standard output what follows until the first
+occurrence of one of the following:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\&"   >   newline   \e   NUL
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR what
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following option shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+Quit after finding the first occurrence of the pattern in each file.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file to search.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The input files shall be of any file type.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR what :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The standard output shall consist of the following for each
+.IR file
+operand:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s:\en\et%s\en", <\fIpathname\fR>, <\fIidentification string\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP 0 6
+Any matches were found.
+.IP 1 6
+Otherwise.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR what
+utility is intended to be used in conjunction with the SCCS command
+.IR get ,
+which automatically inserts identifying information, but it can also be
+used where the information is inserted by any other means.
+.P
+When the string
+.BR \(dq@(#)\(dq 
+is included in a library routine in a shared library, it might not be
+found in an
+.BR a.out
+file using that library routine.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+If the C-language program in file
+.BR f.c
+contains:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+char ident[] = "@(#)identification information";
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and
+.BR f.c
+is compiled to yield
+.BR f.o
+and
+.BR a.out ,
+then the command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+what f.c f.o a.out
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+writes:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+f.c:
+    identification information
+    ...
+f.o:
+    identification information
+    ...
+a.out:
+    identification information
+    ...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIget\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/who.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/who.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1bdfeb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/who.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,315 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WHO "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+who
+\(em display who is on the system
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+who \fB[\fR\(mimTu\fB] [\fR\(miabdHlprt\fB] [\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.P
+who \fB[\fR\(mimu\fB] \fR\(mis\fB [\fR\(mibHlprt\fB] [\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.P
+who \(miq \fB[\fIfile\fB]\fR
+.P
+who am i
+.P
+who am I
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR who
+utility shall list various pieces of information about accessible
+users. The domain of accessibility is implementation-defined.
+.P
+Based on the options given,
+.IR who
+can also list the user's name, terminal line, login time, elapsed time
+since activity occurred on the line, and the process ID of the command
+interpreter for each current system user.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR who
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported. The metavariables, such as
+<\fIline\fP>, refer to fields described in the STDOUT section.
+.IP "\fB\(mia\fP" 10
+Process the implementation-defined database or named file with the
+.BR \(mib ,
+.BR \(mid ,
+.BR \(mil ,
+.BR \(mip ,
+.BR \(mir ,
+.BR \(mit ,
+.BR \(miT
+and
+.BR \(miu
+options turned on.
+.IP "\fB\(mib\fP" 10
+Write the time and date of the last system reboot. The system reboot
+time is the time at which the implementation is able to commence
+running processes.
+.IP "\fB\(mid\fP" 10
+Write a list of all processes that have expired and not been respawned
+by the
+.IR init
+system process. The <\fIexit\fP> field shall appear for dead processes
+and contain the termination and exit values of the dead process. This
+can be useful in determining why a process terminated.
+.IP "\fB\(miH\fP" 10
+Write column headings above the regular output.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\fP" 10
+(The letter ell.) List only those lines on which the system is waiting
+for someone to login. The <\fIname\fP> field shall be
+.BR LOGIN
+in such cases. Other fields shall be the same as for user entries
+except that the <\fIstate\fP> field does not exist.
+.IP "\fB\(mim\fP" 10
+Output only information about the current terminal.
+.IP "\fB\(mip\fP" 10
+List any other process that is currently active and has been previously
+spawned by
+.IR init .
+.IP "\fB\(miq\fP" 10
+(Quick.) List only the names and the number of users currently logged
+on. When this option is used, all other options shall be ignored.
+.IP "\fB\(mir\fP" 10
+Write the current
+.IR run-level
+of the
+.IR init
+process.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\fP" 10
+List only the <\fIname\fR>, <\fIline\fR>, and <\fItime\fR> fields.
+This is the default case.
+.IP "\fB\(mit\fP" 10
+Indicate the last change to the system clock.
+.IP "\fB\(miT\fP" 10
+Show the state of each terminal, as described in the STDOUT section.
+.IP "\fB\(miu\fP" 10
+Write ``idle time'' for each displayed user in addition to any other
+information. The idle time is the time since any activity occurred on
+the user's terminal. The method of determining this is unspecified.
+This option shall list only those users who are currently logged in.
+The <\fIname\fP> is the user's login name. The <\fIline\fP> is the name
+of the line as found in the directory
+.BR /dev .
+The <\fItime\fP> is the time that the user logged in. The
+<\fIactivity\fP> is the number of hours and minutes since activity last
+occurred on that particular line. A dot indicates that the terminal has
+seen activity in the last minute and is therefore ``current''. If more
+than twenty-four hours have elapsed or the line has not been used since
+boot time, the entry shall be marked <\fIold\fP>. This field is useful
+when trying to determine whether a person is working at the terminal or
+not. The <\fIpid\fP> is the process ID of the user's login process.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fBam\ i\fR,\ \fBam\ I\fR" 10
+In the POSIX locale, limit the output to describing the invoking user,
+equivalent to the
+.BR \(mim
+option. The
+.BR am
+and
+.BR i
+or
+.BR I
+must be separate arguments.
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+Specify a pathname of a file to substitute for the
+implementation-defined database of logged-on users that
+.IR who
+uses by default.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR who :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fILC_TIME\fP" 10
+Determine the locale used for the format and contents of the date and
+time strings.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fITZ\fP" 10
+Determine the timezone used when writing date and time information. If
+.IR TZ
+is unset or null, an unspecified default timezone shall be used.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The
+.IR who
+utility shall write its default format to the standard output in an
+implementation-defined format, subject only to the requirement of
+containing the information described above.
+.P
+XSI-conformant systems shall write the default information to the
+standard output in the following general format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+<\fIname\fR>\fB[\fR<\fIstate\fR>\fB]\fR<\fIline\fR><\fItime\fR>\fB[\fR<\fIactivity\fR>\fB][\fR<\fIpid\fR>\fB][\fR<\fIcomment\fR>\fB][\fR<\fIexit\fR>\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+For the
+.BR \(mib
+option, <\fIline\fP> shall be
+.BR \(dqsystem boot\(dq .
+The <\fIname\fP> is unspecified.
+.P
+The following format shall be used for the
+.BR \(miT
+option:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s %c %s %s\en" <\fIname\fR>, <\fIterminal state\fR>, <\fIterminal name\fR>,
+    <\fItime of login\fR>
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fIterminal\ state\fP> is one of the following characters:
+.IP "\fR+\fR" 8
+The terminal allows write access to other users.
+.IP "\fR\(mi\fR" 8
+The terminal denies write access to other users.
+.IP "\fR?\fR" 8
+The terminal write-access state cannot be determined.
+.IP "\fR<space>\fR" 8
+This entry is not associated with a terminal.
+.P
+In the POSIX locale, the <\fItime\ of\ login\fP> shall be equivalent in
+format to the output of:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+date +"%b %e %H:%M"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the
+.BR \(miu
+option is used with
+.BR \(miT ,
+the idle time shall be added to the end of the previous format in an
+unspecified format.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The name
+.IR init
+used for the system process is the most commonly used on historical
+systems, but it may vary.
+.P
+The ``domain of accessibility'' referred to is a broad concept that
+permits interpretation either on a very secure basis or even to allow a
+network-wide implementation like the historical
+.IR rwho .
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Due to differences between historical implementations, the base options
+provided were a compromise to allow users to work with those
+functions. The standard developers also considered removing all the
+options, but felt that these options offered users valuable
+functionality. Additional options to match historical systems are
+available on XSI-conformant systems.
+.P
+It is recognized that the
+.IR who
+command may be of limited usefulness, especially in a multi-level
+secure environment. The standard developers considered, however, that
+having some standard method of determining the ``accessibility'' of
+other users would aid user portability.
+.P
+No format was specified for the default
+.IR who
+output for systems not supporting the XSI option. In such a
+user-oriented command, designed only for human use, this was not
+considered to be a deficiency.
+.P
+The format of the terminal name is unspecified, but the descriptions of
+.IR ps ,
+.IR talk ,
+and
+.IR write
+require that they use the same format.
+.P
+It is acceptable for an implementation to produce no output for
+an invocation of
+.IR who
+.BR mil .
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImesg\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/write.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/write.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c2f1a75
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/write.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,232 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WRITE "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+write
+\(em write to another user
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+write \fIuser_name \fB[\fIterminal\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR write
+utility shall read lines from the standard input and write them
+to the terminal of the specified user. When first invoked, it shall
+write the message:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fBMessage from \fIsender-login-id\fR (\fIsending-terminal\fR) \fB[\fIdate\fB]\fR...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+to
+.IR user_name .
+When it has successfully completed the connection, the sender's
+terminal shall be alerted twice to indicate that what the sender is
+typing is being written to the recipient's terminal.
+.P
+If the recipient wants to reply, this can be accomplished by typing:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+write \fIsender-login-id \fB[\fIsending-terminal\fB]\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+upon receipt of the initial message. Whenever a line of input as
+delimited by an NL, EOF, or EOL special character (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface")
+is accumulated while in canonical input mode, the accumulated data shall
+be written on the other user's terminal. Characters shall be processed
+as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+Typing
+<alert>
+shall write the
+<alert>
+character to the recipient's terminal.
+.IP " *" 4
+Typing the erase and kill characters shall affect the sender's terminal
+in the manner described by the
+.BR termios
+interface in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface".
+.IP " *" 4
+Typing the interrupt or end-of-file characters shall cause
+.IR write
+to write an appropriate message (\c
+.BR \(dqEOT\en\(dq 
+in the POSIX locale) to the recipient's terminal and exit.
+.IP " *" 4
+Typing characters from
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+classifications
+.BR print
+or
+.BR space
+shall cause those characters to be sent to the recipient's terminal.
+.IP " *" 4
+When and only when the
+.IR stty
+.BR iexten
+local mode is enabled, the existence and processing of additional
+special control characters and multi-byte or single-byte functions is
+implementation-defined.
+.IP " *" 4
+Typing other non-printable characters shall cause
+implementation-defined sequences of printable characters to be
+written to the recipient's terminal.
+.P
+To write to a user who is logged in more than once, the
+.IR terminal
+argument can be used to indicate which terminal to write to; otherwise,
+the recipient's terminal is selected in an implementation-defined
+manner and an informational message is written to the sender's standard
+output, indicating which terminal was chosen.
+.P
+Permission to be a recipient of a
+.IR write
+message can be denied or granted by use of the
+.IR mesg
+utility. However, a user's privilege may further constrain the domain
+of accessibility of other users' terminals. The
+.IR write
+utility shall fail when the user lacks appropriate privileges to
+perform the requested action.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+.br
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIuser_name\fR" 10
+Login name of the person to whom the message shall be written. The
+application shall ensure that this operand is of the form returned by
+the
+.IR who
+utility.
+.IP "\fIterminal\fR" 10
+Terminal identification in the same format provided by the
+.IR who
+utility.
+.SH STDIN
+Lines to be copied to the recipient's terminal are read from standard
+input.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR write :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files). If the
+recipient's locale does not use an
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+equivalent to the sender's, the results are undefined.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error and
+informative messages written to standard output.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+If an interrupt signal is received,
+.IR write
+shall write an appropriate message on the recipient's terminal and
+exit with a status of zero. It shall take the standard action for all
+other signals.
+.SH STDOUT
+An informational message shall be written to standard output if a
+recipient is logged in more than once.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+The recipient's terminal is used for output.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+The addressed user is not logged on or the addressed user denies
+permission.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR talk
+utility is considered by some users to be a more usable utility on
+full-screen terminals.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR write
+utility was included in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 since it can be implemented on all
+terminal types. The standard developers considered the
+.IR talk
+utility, which cannot be implemented on certain terminals, to be a
+``better'' communications interface. Both of these programs are in
+widespread use on historical implementations. Therefore, the standard
+developers decided that both utilities should be specified.
+.P
+The format of the terminal name is unspecified, but the descriptions of
+.IR ps ,
+.IR talk ,
+.IR who ,
+and
+.IR write
+require that they all use or accept the same format.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImesg\fR\^",
+.IR "\fItalk\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIwho\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/xargs.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/xargs.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..507e93d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/xargs.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,749 @@
+'\" et
+.TH XARGS "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+xargs
+\(em construct argument lists and invoke utility
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+xargs \fB[\fR\(miptx\fB] [\fR\(miE \fIeofstr\fB] [\fR\(miI \fIreplstr\fR|\(miL \fInumber\fR|\(min \fInumber\fB]\fR
+    \fB[\fR\(mis \fIsize\fB] [\fIutility \fB[\fIargument\fR...\fB]]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR xargs
+utility shall construct a command line consisting of the
+.IR utility
+and
+.IR argument
+operands specified followed by as many arguments read in sequence from
+standard input as fit in length and number constraints specified by the
+options. The
+.IR xargs
+utility shall then invoke the constructed command line and wait for its
+completion. This sequence shall be repeated until one of the following
+occurs:
+.IP " *" 4
+An end-of-file condition is detected on standard input.
+.IP " *" 4
+An argument consisting of just the logical end-of-file string
+(see the
+.BR \(miE
+.IR eofstr
+option) is found on standard input after double-quote processing,
+<apostrophe>
+processing, and
+<backslash>-escape
+processing (see next paragraph). All arguments up to but not including
+the argument consisting of just the logical end-of-file string shall be
+used as arguments in constructed command lines.
+.IP " *" 4
+An invocation of a constructed command line returns an exit status of
+255.
+.P
+The application shall ensure that arguments in the standard input are
+separated by unquoted
+<blank>
+characters, unescaped
+<blank>
+characters, or
+<newline>
+characters. A string of zero or more non-double-quote (\c
+.BR '\&"' )
+characters and non-\c
+<newline>
+characters can be quoted by enclosing them in double-quotes. A string
+of zero or more non-\c
+<apostrophe>
+(\c
+.BR '\e'' )
+characters and non-\c
+<newline>
+characters can be quoted by enclosing them in
+<apostrophe>
+characters. Any unquoted character can be escaped by preceding it with a
+<backslash>.
+The utility named by
+.IR utility
+shall be executed one or more times until the end-of-file is reached or
+the logical end-of file string is found. The results are unspecified if
+the utility named by
+.IR utility
+attempts to read from its standard input.
+.P
+The generated command line length shall be the sum of the size in bytes
+of the utility name and each argument treated as strings, including a
+null byte terminator for each of these strings. The
+.IR xargs
+utility shall limit the command line length such that when the command
+line is invoked, the combined argument and environment lists (see the
+.IR exec
+family of functions in the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008) shall not exceed
+{ARG_MAX}\(mi2\|048
+bytes. Within this constraint, if neither the
+.BR \(min
+nor the
+.BR \(mis
+option is specified, the default command line length shall be at least
+{LINE_MAX}.
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR xargs
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(miE\ \fIeofstr\fR" 10
+Use
+.IR eofstr
+as the logical end-of-file string. If
+.BR \(miE
+is not specified, it is unspecified whether the logical end-of-file
+string is the
+<underscore>
+character (\c
+.BR '_' )
+or the end-of-file string capability is disabled. When
+.IR eofstr
+is the null string, the logical end-of-file string capability shall be
+disabled and
+<underscore>
+characters shall be taken literally.
+.IP "\fB\(miI\ \fIreplstr\fR" 10
+Insert mode:
+.IR utility
+is executed for each logical line from standard input. Arguments in the
+standard input shall be separated only by unescaped
+<newline>
+characters, not by
+<blank>
+characters. Any unquoted unescaped
+<blank>
+characters at the beginning of each line shall be ignored. The resulting
+argument shall be inserted in
+.IR arguments
+in place of each occurrence of
+.IR replstr .
+At least five arguments in
+.IR arguments
+can each contain one or more instances of
+.IR replstr .
+Each of these constructed arguments cannot grow larger than an
+implementation-defined limit greater than or equal to 255 bytes. Option
+.BR \(mix
+shall be forced on.
+.IP "\fB\(miL\ \fInumber\fR" 10
+The
+.IR utility
+shall be executed for each non-empty
+.IR number
+lines of arguments from standard input. The last invocation of
+.IR utility
+shall be with fewer lines of arguments if fewer than
+.IR number
+remain. A line is considered to end with the first
+<newline>
+unless the last character of the line is a
+<blank>;
+a trailing
+<blank>
+signals continuation to the next non-empty line, inclusive.
+.IP "\fB\(min\ \fInumber\fR" 10
+Invoke
+.IR utility
+using as many standard input arguments as possible, up to
+.IR number
+(a positive decimal integer) arguments maximum. Fewer arguments shall
+be used if:
+.RS 10 
+.IP " *" 4
+The command line length accumulated exceeds the size specified by the
+.BR \(mis
+option (or
+{LINE_MAX}
+if there is no
+.BR \(mis
+option).
+.IP " *" 4
+The last iteration has fewer than
+.IR number ,
+but not zero, operands remaining.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mip\fP" 10
+Prompt mode: the user is asked whether to execute
+.IR utility
+at each invocation. Trace mode (\c
+.BR \(mit )
+is turned on to write the command instance to be executed, followed by
+a prompt to standard error. An affirmative response read from
+.BR /dev/tty
+shall execute the command; otherwise, that particular invocation of
+.IR utility
+shall be skipped.
+.IP "\fB\(mis\ \fIsize\fR" 10
+Invoke
+.IR utility
+using as many standard input arguments as possible yielding a command
+line length less than
+.IR size
+(a positive decimal integer) bytes. Fewer arguments shall be used if:
+.RS 10 
+.IP " *" 4
+The total number of arguments exceeds that specified by the
+.BR \(min
+option.
+.IP " *" 4
+The total number of lines exceeds that specified by the
+.BR \(miL
+option.
+.IP " *" 4
+End-of-file is encountered on standard input before
+.IR size
+bytes are accumulated.
+.P
+Values of
+.IR size
+up to at least
+{LINE_MAX}
+bytes shall be supported, provided that the constraints specified in
+the DESCRIPTION are met. It shall not be considered an error if a
+value larger than that supported by the implementation or exceeding the
+constraints specified in the DESCRIPTION is given;
+.IR xargs
+shall use the largest value it supports within the constraints.
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(mit\fP" 10
+Enable trace mode. Each generated command line shall be written to
+standard error just prior to invocation.
+.IP "\fB\(mix\fP" 10
+Terminate if a constructed command line will not fit in the
+implied or specified size (see the
+.BR \(mis
+option above).
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operands shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIutility\fR" 10
+The name of the utility to be invoked, found by search path using the
+.IR PATH
+environment variable, described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables".
+If
+.IR utility
+is omitted, the default shall be the
+.IR echo
+utility. If the
+.IR utility
+operand names any of the special built-in utilities in
+.IR "Section 2.14" ", " "Special Built-In Utilities",
+the results are undefined.
+.IP "\fIargument\fR" 10
+An initial option or operand for the invocation of
+.IR utility .
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be a text file. The results are unspecified if
+an end-of-file condition is detected immediately following an escaped
+<newline>.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The file
+.BR /dev/tty
+shall be used to read responses required by the
+.BR \(mip
+option.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR xargs :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_COLLATE\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale for the behavior of ranges, equivalence classes,
+and multi-character collating elements used in the extended regular
+expression defined for the
+.BR yesexpr
+locale keyword in the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+category.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files) and the behavior of
+character classes used in the extended regular expression defined for
+the
+.BR yesexpr
+locale keyword in the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+category.
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale used to process affirmative responses, and the
+locale used to affect the format and contents of diagnostic messages
+and prompts written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.IP "\fIPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of
+.IR utility ,
+as described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables".
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used for diagnostic messages and the
+.BR \(mit
+and
+.BR \(mip
+options. If the
+.BR \(mit
+option is specified, the
+.IR utility
+and its constructed argument list shall be written to standard error,
+as it will be invoked, prior to invocation. If
+.BR \(mip
+is specified, a prompt of the following format shall be written (in the
+POSIX locale):
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"?..."
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+at the end of the line of the output from
+.BR \(mit .
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\0\0\0\00" 8
+All invocations of
+.IR utility
+returned exit status zero.
+.IP "1\(hy125" 8
+A command line meeting the specified requirements could not be
+assembled, one or more of the invocations of
+.IR utility
+returned a non-zero exit status, or some other error occurred.
+.IP "\0\0126" 8
+The utility specified by
+.IR utility
+was found but could not be invoked.
+.IP "\0\0127" 8
+The utility specified by
+.IR utility
+could not be found.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+If a command line meeting the specified requirements cannot be
+assembled, the utility cannot be invoked, an invocation of the utility
+is terminated by a signal, or an invocation of the utility exits with
+exit status 255, the
+.IR xargs
+utility shall write a diagnostic message and exit without processing
+any remaining input.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The 255 exit status allows a utility being used by
+.IR xargs
+to tell
+.IR xargs
+to terminate if it knows no further invocations using the current data
+stream will succeed. Thus,
+.IR utility
+should explicitly
+.IR exit
+with an appropriate value to avoid accidentally returning with 255.
+.P
+Note that since input is parsed as lines,
+<blank>
+characters separate arguments, and
+<backslash>,
+<apostrophe>,
+and double-quote characters are used for quoting, if
+.IR xargs
+is used to bundle the output of commands like
+.IR find
+.IR dir
+.BR \(miprint
+or
+.IR ls
+into commands to be executed, unexpected results are likely if any
+filenames contain
+<blank>,
+<newline>,
+or quoting characters. This can be solved by using find to call a script
+that converts each file found into a quoted string that is then piped to
+.IR xargs ,
+but in most cases it is preferable just to have
+.IR find
+do the argument aggregation itself by using
+.BR \(miexec
+with a
+.BR '+' 
+terminator instead of
+.BR ';' .
+Note that the quoting rules used by
+.IR xargs
+are not the same as in the shell. They were not made consistent here
+because existing applications depend on the current rules. An easy (but
+inefficient) method that can be used to transform input consisting of
+one argument per line into a quoted form that
+.IR xargs
+interprets correctly is to precede each non-\c
+<newline>
+character with a
+<backslash>.
+More efficient alternatives are shown in Example 2 and Example 5 below.
+.P
+On implementations with a large value for
+{ARG_MAX},
+.IR xargs
+may produce command lines longer than
+{LINE_MAX}.
+For invocation of utilities, this is not a problem. If
+.IR xargs
+is being used to create a text file, users should explicitly set the
+maximum command line length with the
+.BR \(mis
+option.
+.P
+The
+.IR command ,
+.IR env ,
+.IR nice ,
+.IR nohup ,
+.IR time ,
+and
+.IR xargs
+utilities have been specified to use exit code 127 if an error occurs
+so that applications can distinguish ``failure to find a utility'' from
+``invoked utility exited with an error indication''. The value 127 was
+chosen because it is not commonly used for other meanings; most
+utilities use small values for ``normal error conditions'' and the
+values above 128 can be confused with termination due to receipt of a
+signal. The value 126 was chosen in a similar manner to indicate that
+the utility could be found, but not invoked. Some scripts produce
+meaningful error messages differentiating the 126 and 127 cases. The
+distinction between exit codes 126 and 127 is based on KornShell
+practice that uses 127 when all attempts to
+.IR exec
+the utility fail with
+.BR [ENOENT] ,
+and uses 126 when any attempt to
+.IR exec
+the utility fails for any other reason.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+The following command combines the output of the parenthesized
+commands (minus the
+<apostrophe>
+characters) onto one line, which is then appended to the file log. It
+assumes that the expansion of
+.BR \(dq$0 $*\(dq 
+does not include any
+<apostrophe>
+or
+<newline>
+characters.
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(logname; date; printf "'%s'\en$0 $*") | xargs \(miE "" >>log
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+The following command invokes
+.IR diff
+with successive pairs of arguments originally typed as command line
+arguments. It assumes there are no embedded
+<newline>
+characters in the elements of the original argument list.
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+printf "%s\en$@" | sed 's/[^[:alnum:]]/\e\e&/g' |
+    xargs \(miE "" \(min 2 \(mix diff
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+In the following commands, the user is asked which files in the current
+directory (excluding dotfiles) are to be archived. The files are
+archived into
+.BR arch ;
+.IR a ,
+one at a time or
+.IR b ,
+many at a time. The commands assume that no filenames contain
+<blank>,
+<newline>,
+<backslash>,
+<apostrophe>,
+or double-quote characters.
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+a. ls | xargs \(miE "" \(mip \(miL 1 ar \(mir arch
+.P
+b. ls | xargs \(miE "" \(mip \(miL 1 | xargs \(miE "" ar \(mir arch
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+The following command invokes
+.IR command1
+one or more times with multiple arguments, stopping if an invocation of
+.IR command1
+has a non-zero exit status.
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+xargs \(miE "" sh \(mic 'command1 "$@" || exit 255' sh < xargs_input
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 5." 4
+On XSI-conformant systems, the following command moves all files
+from directory
+.BR $1
+to directory
+.BR $2 ,
+and echoes each move command just before doing it. It assumes no
+filenames contain
+<newline>
+characters and that neither
+.BR $1
+nor
+.BR $2
+contains the sequence
+.BR \(dq{}\(dq .
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ls \(miA "$1" | sed \(mie 's/"/"\e\e""/g' \(mie 's/.*/"&"/' |
+    xargs \(miE "" \(miI {} \(mit mv "$1"/{} "$2"/{}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR xargs
+utility was usually found only in System V-based systems; BSD systems
+included an
+.IR apply
+utility that provided functionality similar to
+.IR xargs
+.BR \(min
+.IR number .
+The SVID lists
+.IR xargs
+as a software development extension. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not share the view that
+it is used only for development, and therefore it is not optional.
+.P
+The classic application of the
+.IR xargs
+utility is in conjunction with the
+.IR find
+utility to reduce the number of processes launched by a simplistic use
+of the
+.IR find
+.BR \(miexec
+combination. The
+.IR xargs
+utility is also used to enforce an upper limit on memory required to
+launch a process. With this basis in mind, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 selected only the
+minimal features required.
+.P
+Although the 255 exit status is mostly an accident of historical
+implementations, it allows a utility being used by
+.IR xargs
+to tell
+.IR xargs
+to terminate if it knows no further invocations using the current data
+stream shall succeed. Any non-zero exit status from a utility falls
+into the 1\(hy125 range when
+.IR xargs
+exits. There is no statement of how the various non-zero utility exit
+status codes are accumulated by
+.IR xargs .
+The value could be the addition of all codes, their highest value, the
+last one received, or a single value such as 1. Since no algorithm is
+arguably better than the others, and since many of the standard
+utilities say little more (portably) than ``pass/fail'', no new
+algorithm was invented.
+.P
+Several other
+.IR xargs
+options were removed because simple alternatives already exist within
+\&this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. For example, the
+.BR \(mii
+.IR replstr
+option can be just as efficiently performed using a shell
+.BR for
+loop. Since
+.IR xargs
+calls an
+.IR exec
+function with each input line, the
+.BR \(mii
+option does not usually exploit the grouping capabilities of
+.IR xargs .
+.P
+The requirement that
+.IR xargs
+never produces command lines such that invocation of
+.IR utility
+is within 2\|048 bytes of hitting the POSIX
+.IR exec
+{ARG_MAX}
+limitations is intended to guarantee that the invoked utility has room
+to modify its environment variables and command line arguments and
+still be able to invoke another utility. Note that the minimum
+{ARG_MAX}
+allowed by the System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 is 4\|096 bytes and the minimum
+value allowed by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 is 2\|048 bytes; therefore,
+the 2\|048 bytes difference seems reasonable. Note, however, that
+.IR xargs
+may never be able to invoke a utility if the environment passed in to
+.IR xargs
+comes close to using
+{ARG_MAX}
+bytes.
+.P
+The version of
+.IR xargs
+required by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 is required to wait for the completion of the invoked
+command before invoking another command. This was done because
+historical scripts using
+.IR xargs
+assumed sequential execution. Implementations wanting to provide
+parallel operation of the invoked utilities are encouraged to add an
+option enabling parallel invocation, but should still wait for
+termination of all of the children before
+.IR xargs
+terminates normally.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mie
+option was omitted from the ISO\ POSIX\(hy2:\|1993 standard in the belief that the
+.IR eofstr
+option-argument was recognized only when it was on a line by itself and
+before quote and escape processing were performed, and that the logical
+end-of-file processing was only enabled if a
+.BR \(mie
+option was specified. In that case, a simple
+.IR sed
+script could be used to duplicate the
+.BR \(mie
+functionality. Further investigation revealed that:
+.IP " *" 4
+The logical end-of-file string was checked for after quote and escape
+processing, making a
+.IR sed
+script that provided equivalent functionality much more difficult to
+write.
+.IP " *" 4
+The default was to perform logical end-of-file processing with an
+<underscore>
+as the logical end-of-file string.
+.P
+To correct this misunderstanding, the
+.BR \(miE
+.IR eofstr
+option was adopted from the X/Open Portability Guide. Users should
+note that the description of the
+.BR \(miE
+option matches historical documentation of the
+.BR \(mie
+option (which was not adopted because it did not support the Utility
+Syntax Guidelines), by
+saying that if
+.IR eofstr
+is the null string, logical end-of-file processing is disabled.
+Historical implementations of
+.IR xargs
+actually did not disable logical end-of-file processing; they treated a
+null argument found in the input as a logical end-of-file string. (A
+null
+.IR string
+argument could be generated using single or double-quotes (\c
+.BR '\^' 
+or
+.BR \(dq\^\(dq ).
+Since this behavior was not documented historically, it is considered
+to be a bug.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(miI ,
+.BR \(miL ,
+and
+.BR \(min
+options are mutually-exclusive. Some implementations use the last one
+specified if more than one is given on a command line; other
+implementations treat combinations of the options in different ways.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language",
+.IR "\fIdiff\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIecho\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfind\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.P
+The System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/yacc.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/yacc.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cd62644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/yacc.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,1597 @@
+'\" et
+.TH YACC "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+yacc
+\(em yet another compiler compiler (\fBDEVELOPMENT\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+yacc \fB[\fR\(midltv\fB] [\fR\(mib \fIfile_prefix\fB] [\fR\(mip \fIsym_prefix\fB]\fI grammar\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR yacc
+utility shall read a description of a context-free grammar in
+.IR grammar
+and write C source code, conforming to the ISO\ C standard, to a code file,
+and optionally header information into a header file, in the current
+directory. The generated source code shall not depend on any undefined,
+unspecified, or implementation-defined behavior, except in cases where
+it is copied directly from the supplied grammar, or in cases that are
+documented by the implementation. The C code shall define a function
+and related routines and macros for an automaton that executes a parsing
+algorithm meeting the requirements in
+.IR "Algorithms".
+.P
+The form and meaning of the grammar are described in the EXTENDED
+DESCRIPTION section.
+.P
+The C source code and header file shall be produced in a form suitable
+as input for the C compiler (see
+.IR "\fIc99\fR\^").
+.SH OPTIONS
+The
+.IR yacc
+utility shall conform to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+except for Guideline 9.
+.P
+The following options shall be supported:
+.IP "\fB\(mib\ \fIfile_prefix\fR" 10
+Use
+.IR file_prefix
+instead of
+.BR y
+as the prefix for all output filenames. The code file
+.BR y.tab.c ,
+the header file
+.BR y.tab.h
+(created when
+.BR \(mid
+is specified), and the description file
+.BR y.output
+(created when
+.BR \(miv
+is specified), shall be changed to
+.IR file_prefix \c
+.BR .tab.c ,
+.IR file_prefix \c
+.BR .tab.h ,
+and
+.IR file_prefix \c
+.BR .output ,
+respectively.
+.IP "\fB\(mid\fP" 10
+Write the header file; by default only the code file is written. The
+.BR #define
+statements associate the token codes assigned by
+.IR yacc
+with the user-declared token names. This allows source files other
+than
+.BR y.tab.c
+to access the token codes.
+.IP "\fB\(mil\fP" 10
+Produce a code file that does not contain any
+.BR #line
+constructs. If this option is not present, it is unspecified whether
+the code file or header file contains
+.BR #line
+directives. This should only be used after the grammar and the
+associated actions are fully debugged.
+.IP "\fB\(mip\ \fIsym_prefix\fR" 10
+.br
+Use
+.IR sym_prefix
+instead of
+.BR yy
+as the prefix for all external names produced by
+.IR yacc .
+The names affected shall include the functions
+\fIyyparse\fR(),
+\fIyylex\fR(),
+and
+\fIyyerror\fR(),
+and the variables
+.IR yylval ,
+.IR yychar ,
+and
+.IR yydebug .
+(In the remainder of this section, the six symbols cited are referenced
+using their default names only as a notational convenience.) Local
+names may also be affected by the
+.BR \(mip
+option; however, the
+.BR \(mip
+option shall not affect
+.BR #define
+symbols generated by
+.IR yacc .
+.IP "\fB\(mit\fP" 10
+Modify conditional compilation directives to permit compilation of
+debugging code in the code file. Runtime debugging statements shall
+always be contained in the code file, but by default conditional
+compilation directives prevent their compilation.
+.IP "\fB\(miv\fP" 10
+Write a file containing a description of the parser and a report of
+conflicts generated by ambiguities in the grammar.
+.br
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand is required:
+.IP "\fIgrammar\fR" 10
+A pathname of a file containing instructions, hereafter called
+.IR grammar ,
+for which a parser is to be created. The format for the grammar is
+described in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION section.
+.SH STDIN
+Not used.
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+The file
+.IR grammar
+shall be a text file formatted as specified in the EXTENDED DESCRIPTION
+section.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR yacc :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments and input files).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.P
+The
+.IR LANG
+and
+.IR LC_*
+variables affect the execution of the
+.IR yacc
+utility as stated. The
+\fImain\fR()
+function defined in
+.IR "Yacc Library"
+shall call:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+setlocale(LC_ALL, "")
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and thus the program generated by
+.IR yacc
+shall also be affected by the contents of these variables at runtime.
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+Not used.
+.SH STDERR
+If shift/reduce or reduce/reduce conflicts are detected in
+.IR grammar ,
+.IR yacc
+shall write a report of those conflicts to the standard error in an
+unspecified format.
+.P
+Standard error shall also be used for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+The code file, the header file, and the description file shall be text
+files. All are described in the following sections.
+.SS "Code File"
+.P
+This file shall contain the C source code for the
+\fIyyparse\fR()
+function. It shall contain code for the various semantic actions with
+macro substitution performed on them as described in the EXTENDED
+DESCRIPTION section. It also shall contain a copy of the
+.BR #define
+statements in the header file. If a
+.BR %union
+declaration is used, the declaration for YYSTYPE shall also be included
+in this file.
+.SS "Header File"
+.P
+The header file shall contain
+.BR #define
+statements that associate the token numbers with the token names. This
+allows source files other than the code file to access the token
+codes. If a
+.BR %union
+declaration is used, the declaration for YYSTYPE and an
+.IR "extern YYSTYPE yylval"
+declaration shall also be included in this file.
+.SS "Description File"
+.P
+The description file shall be a text file containing a description of
+the state machine corresponding to the parser, using an unspecified
+format. Limits for internal tables (see
+.IR "Limits")
+shall also be reported, in an implementation-defined manner. (Some
+implementations may use dynamic allocation techniques and have no
+specific limit values to report.)
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+The
+.IR yacc
+command accepts a language that is used to define a grammar for a
+target language to be parsed by the tables and code generated by
+.IR yacc .
+The language accepted by
+.IR yacc
+as a grammar for the target language is described below using the
+.IR yacc
+input language itself.
+.P
+The input
+.IR grammar
+includes rules describing the input structure of the target language
+and code to be invoked when these rules are recognized to provide the
+associated semantic action. The code to be executed shall appear as bodies
+of text that are intended to be C-language code. These bodies of text
+shall not contain C-language trigraphs. The C-language inclusions are
+presumed to form a correct function when processed by
+.IR yacc
+into its output files. The code included in this way shall be executed
+during the recognition of the target language.
+.P
+Given a grammar, the
+.IR yacc
+utility generates the files described in the OUTPUT FILES section. The
+code file can be compiled and linked using
+.IR c99 .
+If the declaration and programs sections of the grammar file did not
+include definitions of
+\fImain\fR(),
+\fIyylex\fR(),
+and
+\fIyyerror\fR(),
+the compiled output requires linking with externally supplied versions
+of those functions. Default versions of
+\fImain\fR()
+and
+\fIyyerror\fR()
+are supplied in the
+.IR yacc
+library and can be linked in by using the
+.BR "\(mil\ y"
+operand to
+.IR c99 .
+The
+.IR yacc
+library interfaces need not support interfaces with other than the
+default
+.BR yy
+symbol prefix. The application provides the lexical analyzer function,
+\fIyylex\fR();
+the
+.IR lex
+utility is specifically designed to generate such a routine.
+.SS "Input Language"
+.P
+The application shall ensure that every specification file consists of
+three sections in order:
+.IR declarations ,
+.IR "grammar rules" ,
+and
+.IR programs ,
+separated by double
+<percent-sign>
+characters (\c
+.BR \(dq%%\(dq ).
+The declarations and programs sections can be empty. If the latter is
+empty, the preceding
+.BR \(dq%%\(dq 
+mark separating it from the rules section can be omitted.
+.P
+The input is free form text following the structure of the grammar
+defined below.
+.SS "Lexical Structure of the Grammar"
+.P
+The
+<blank>,
+<newline>,
+and
+<form-feed>
+character shall be ignored, except that the application shall ensure that
+they do not appear in names or multi-character reserved symbols. Comments
+shall be enclosed in
+.BR \(dq/*\ ...\ */\(dq ,
+and can appear wherever a name is valid.
+.P
+Names are of arbitrary length, made up of letters, periods (\c
+.BR '.' ),
+underscores (\c
+.BR '_' ),
+and non-initial digits. Uppercase and lowercase letters are distinct.
+Conforming applications shall not use names beginning in
+.BR yy
+or
+.BR YY
+since the
+.IR yacc
+parser uses such names. Many of the names appear in the final output
+of
+.IR yacc ,
+and thus they should be chosen to conform with any additional rules
+created by the C compiler to be used. In particular they appear in
+.BR #define
+statements.
+.P
+A literal shall consist of a single character enclosed in single-quote
+characters. All of the escape sequences supported for character constants
+by the ISO\ C standard shall be supported by
+.IR yacc .
+.P
+The relationship with the lexical analyzer is discussed in detail below.
+.P
+The application shall ensure that the NUL character is not used in
+grammar rules or literals.
+.SS "Declarations Section"
+.P
+The declarations section is used to define the symbols used to define
+the target language and their relationship with each other. In
+particular, much of the additional information required to resolve
+ambiguities in the context-free grammar for the target language is
+provided here.
+.P
+Usually
+.IR yacc
+assigns the relationship between the symbolic names it generates and
+their underlying numeric value. The declarations section makes it
+possible to control the assignment of these values.
+.P
+It is also possible to keep semantic information associated with the
+tokens currently on the parse stack in a user-defined C-language
+.BR union ,
+if the members of the union are associated with the various names in
+the grammar. The declarations section provides for this as well.
+.P
+The first group of declarators below all take a list of names as
+arguments. That list can optionally be preceded by the name of a C
+union member (called a
+.IR tag
+below) appearing within
+.BR '<' 
+and
+.BR '>' .
+(As an exception to the typographical conventions of the rest of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+in this case <\fItag\fP> does not represent a metavariable, but the
+literal angle bracket characters surrounding a symbol.) The use of
+.IR tag
+specifies that the tokens named on this line shall be of the same C
+type as the union member referenced by
+.IR tag .
+This is discussed in more detail below.
+.P
+For lists used to define tokens, the first appearance of a given token
+can be followed by a positive integer (as a string of decimal digits).
+If this is done, the underlying value assigned to it for lexical
+purposes shall be taken to be that number.
+.P
+The following declares
+.IR name
+to be a token:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+%token \fB[\fR<\fItag\fR>\fB] \fIname \fB[\fInumber\fB] [\fIname \fB[\fInumber\fB]]\fR...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.IR tag
+is present, the C type for all tokens on this line shall be declared to
+be the type referenced by
+.IR tag .
+If a positive integer,
+.IR number ,
+follows a
+.IR name ,
+that value shall be assigned to the token.
+.P
+The following declares
+.IR name
+to be a token, and assigns precedence to it:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+%left \fB[\fR<\fItag\fR>\fB] \fIname \fB[\fInumber\fB] [\fIname \fB[\fInumber\fB]]\fR...
+%right \fB[\fR<\fItag\fR>\fB] \fIname \fB[\fInumber\fB] [\fIname \fB[\fInumber\fB]]\fR...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+One or more lines, each beginning with one of these symbols, can appear
+in this section. All tokens on the same line have the same precedence
+level and associativity; the lines are in order of increasing
+precedence or binding strength.
+.BR %left
+denotes that the operators on that line are left associative, and
+.BR %right
+similarly denotes right associative operators. If
+.IR tag
+is present, it shall declare a C type for
+.IR name s
+as described for
+.BR %token .
+.P
+The following declares
+.IR name
+to be a token, and indicates that this cannot be used associatively:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+%nonassoc \fB[\fR<\fItag\fR>\fB] \fIname \fB[\fInumber\fB] [\fIname \fB[\fInumber\fB]]\fR...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the parser encounters associative use of this token it reports an
+error. If
+.IR tag
+is present, it shall declare a C type for
+.IR name s
+as described for
+.BR %token .
+.P
+The following declares that union member
+.IR name s
+are non-terminals, and thus it is required to have a
+.IR tag
+field at its beginning:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+%type <\fItag\fR> \fIname\fR...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Because it deals with non-terminals only, assigning a token number or
+using a literal is also prohibited. If this construct is present,
+.IR yacc
+shall perform type checking; if this construct is not present, the
+parse stack shall hold only the
+.BR int
+type.
+.P
+Every name used in
+.IR grammar
+not defined by a
+.BR %token ,
+.BR %left ,
+.BR %right ,
+or
+.BR %nonassoc
+declaration is assumed to represent a non-terminal symbol. The
+.IR yacc
+utility shall report an error for any non-terminal symbol that does not
+appear on the left side of at least one grammar rule.
+.P
+Once the type, precedence, or token number of a name is specified, it
+shall not be changed. If the first declaration of a token does not
+assign a token number,
+.IR yacc
+shall assign a token number. Once this assignment is made, the token
+number shall not be changed by explicit assignment.
+.P
+The following declarators do not follow the previous pattern.
+.P
+The following declares the non-terminal
+.IR name
+to be the
+.IR "start symbol" ,
+which represents the largest, most general structure described by the
+grammar rules:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+%start \fIname\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+By default, it is the left-hand side of the first grammar rule; this
+default can be overridden with this declaration.
+.P
+The following declares the
+.IR yacc
+value stack to be a union of the various types of values desired.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+%union { \fIbody of union\fR (\fIin C\fR) }
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The body of the union shall not contain unbalanced curly brace
+preprocessing tokens.
+.P
+By default, the values returned by actions (see below) and the lexical
+analyzer shall be of type
+.BR int .
+The
+.IR yacc
+utility keeps track of types, and it shall insert corresponding union
+member names in order to perform strict type checking of the resulting
+parser.
+.P
+Alternatively, given that at least one <\fItag\fP> construct is used,
+the union can be declared in a header file (which shall be included in
+the declarations section by using a
+.BR #include
+construct within
+.BR %{
+and
+.BR %} ),
+and a
+.BR typedef
+used to define the symbol YYSTYPE to represent this union. The effect
+of
+.BR %union
+is to provide the declaration of YYSTYPE directly from the
+.IR yacc
+input.
+.P
+C-language declarations and definitions can appear in the declarations
+section, enclosed by the following marks:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+%{ ... %}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+These statements shall be copied into the code file, and have global
+scope within it so that they can be used in the rules and program
+sections. The statements shall not contain
+.BR \(dq%}\(dq 
+outside a comment, string literal, or multi-character constant.
+.P
+The application shall ensure that the declarations section is
+terminated by the token
+.BR %% .
+.SS "Grammar Rules in yacc"
+.P
+The rules section defines the context-free grammar to be accepted by
+the function
+.IR yacc
+generates, and associates with those rules C-language actions and
+additional precedence information. The grammar is described below, and
+a formal definition follows.
+.P
+The rules section is comprised of one or more grammar rules. A grammar
+rule has the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+A : BODY ;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The symbol
+.BR A
+represents a non-terminal name, and
+.BR BODY
+represents a sequence of zero or more
+.IR name s,
+.IR literal s,
+and
+.IR "semantic action" s
+that can then be followed by optional
+.IR "precedence rule" s.
+Only the names and literals participate in the formation of the
+grammar; the semantic actions and precedence rules are used in other
+ways. The
+<colon>
+and the
+<semicolon>
+are
+.IR yacc
+punctuation. If there are several successive grammar rules with the
+same left-hand side, the
+<vertical-line>
+(\c
+.BR '|' )
+can be used to avoid rewriting the left-hand side; in this case the
+<semicolon>
+appears only after the last rule. The BODY part can be empty
+(or empty of names and literals) to indicate that the non-terminal
+symbol matches the empty string.
+.P
+The
+.IR yacc
+utility assigns a unique number to each rule. Rules using the vertical
+bar notation are distinct rules. The number assigned to the rule
+appears in the description file.
+.P
+The elements comprising a BODY are:
+.IP "\fIname\fR,\ \fIliteral\fR" 10
+These form the rules of the grammar:
+.IR name
+is either a
+.IR token
+or a
+.IR non-terminal ;
+.IR literal
+stands for itself (less the lexically required quotation marks).
+.IP "\fIsemantic action\fR" 10
+.br
+With each grammar rule, the user can associate actions to be performed
+each time the rule is recognized in the input process. (Note that the
+word ``action'' can also refer to the actions of the parser\(emshift,
+reduce, and so on.)
+.RS 10 
+.P
+These actions can return values and can obtain the values returned by
+previous actions. These values are kept in objects of type YYSTYPE
+(see
+.BR %union ).
+The result value of the action shall be kept on the parse stack with
+the left-hand side of the rule, to be accessed by other reductions as
+part of their right-hand side. By using the <\fItag\fP> information
+provided in the declarations section, the code generated by
+.IR yacc
+can be strictly type checked and contain arbitrary information. In
+addition, the lexical analyzer can provide the same kinds of values for
+tokens, if desired.
+.P
+An action is an arbitrary C statement and as such can do input or
+output, call subprograms, and alter external variables. An action is
+one or more C statements enclosed in curly braces
+.BR '{' 
+and
+.BR '}' .
+The statements shall not contain unbalanced curly brace preprocessing
+tokens.
+.P
+Certain pseudo-variables can be used in the action. These are macros
+for access to data structures known internally to
+.IR yacc .
+.IP $$ 10
+The value of the action can be set by assigning it to $$. If type
+checking is enabled and the type of the value to be assigned cannot be
+determined, a diagnostic message may be generated.
+.IP "$\fInumber\fR" 10
+This refers to the value returned by the component specified by the
+token
+.IR number
+in the right side of a rule, reading from left to right;
+.IR number
+can be zero or negative. If
+.IR number
+is zero or negative, it refers to the data associated with the name on
+the parser's stack preceding the leftmost symbol of the current rule.
+(That is,
+.BR \(dq$0\(dq 
+refers to the name immediately preceding the leftmost name in the
+current rule to be found on the parser's stack and
+.BR \(dq$\(mi1\(dq 
+refers to the symbol to
+.IR its
+left.) If
+.IR number
+refers to an element past the current point in the rule, or beyond the
+bottom of the stack, the result is undefined. If type checking is
+enabled and the type of the value to be assigned cannot be determined,
+a diagnostic message may be generated.
+.IP "$<\fItag\fR>\fInumber\fR" 10
+.br
+These correspond exactly to the corresponding symbols without the
+.IR tag
+inclusion, but allow for strict type checking (and preclude unwanted
+type conversions). The effect is that the macro is expanded to use
+.IR tag
+to select an element from the YYSTYPE union (using
+.IR dataname.tag ).
+This is particularly useful if
+.IR number
+is not positive.
+.IP "$<\fItag\fR>$" 10
+This imposes on the reference the type of the union member referenced
+by
+.IR tag .
+This construction is applicable when a reference to a left context
+value occurs in the grammar, and provides
+.IR yacc
+with a means for selecting a type.
+.P
+Actions can occur anywhere in a rule (not just at the end); an
+action can access values returned by actions to its left, and in turn
+the value it returns can be accessed by actions to its right. An
+action appearing in the middle of a rule shall be equivalent to
+replacing the action with a new non-terminal symbol and adding an empty
+rule with that non-terminal symbol on the left-hand side. The semantic
+action associated with the new rule shall be equivalent to the original
+action. The use of actions within rules might introduce conflicts that
+would not otherwise exist.
+.P
+By default, the value of a rule shall be the value of the first element
+in it. If the first element does not have a type (particularly in the
+case of a literal) and type checking is turned on by
+.BR %type ,
+an error message shall result.
+.RE
+.IP "\fIprecedence\fR" 10
+The keyword
+.BR %prec
+can be used to change the precedence level associated with a particular
+grammar rule. Examples of this are in cases where a unary and binary
+operator have the same symbolic representation, but need to be given
+different precedences, or where the handling of an ambiguous if-else
+construction is necessary. The reserved symbol
+.BR %prec
+can appear immediately after the body of the grammar rule and can be
+followed by a token name or a literal. It shall cause the precedence
+of the grammar rule to become that of the following token name or
+literal. The action for the rule as a whole can follow
+.BR %prec .
+.P
+If a program section follows, the application shall ensure that the
+grammar rules are terminated by
+.BR %% .
+.SS "Programs Section"
+.P
+The
+.IR programs
+section can include the definition of the lexical analyzer
+\fIyylex\fR(),
+and any other functions; for example, those used in the actions
+specified in the grammar rules. It is unspecified whether the programs
+section precedes or follows the semantic actions in the output file;
+therefore, if the application contains any macro definitions and
+declarations intended to apply to the code in the semantic actions, it
+shall place them within
+.BR \(dq%{\ ...\ %}\(dq 
+in the declarations section.
+.SS "Input Grammar"
+.P
+The following input to
+.IR yacc
+yields a parser for the input to
+.IR yacc .
+This formal syntax takes precedence over the preceding text syntax
+description.
+.P
+The lexical structure is defined less precisely;
+.IR "Lexical Structure of the Grammar"
+defines most terms. The correspondence between the previous terms and
+the tokens below is as follows.
+.IP "\fBIDENTIFIER\fR" 12
+This corresponds to the concept of
+.IR name ,
+given previously. It also includes literals as defined previously.
+.IP "\fBC_IDENTIFIER\fR" 12
+This is a name, and additionally it is known to be followed by a
+<colon>.
+A literal cannot yield this token.
+.IP "\fBNUMBER\fR" 12
+A string of digits (a non-negative decimal integer).
+.IP "\fBTYPE\fR,\ \fBLEFT\fR,\ \fBMARK\fR,\ \fBLCURL\fR,\ \fBRCURL\fR" 12
+.br
+These correspond directly to
+.BR %type ,
+.BR %left ,
+.BR %% ,
+.BR %{ ,
+and
+.BR %} .
+.IP "\fB{\ .\|.\|.\ }\fR" 12
+This indicates C-language source code, with the possible inclusion of
+.BR '$' 
+macros as discussed previously.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+/* Grammar for the input to yacc. */
+/* Basic entries. */
+/* The following are recognized by the lexical analyzer. */
+.P
+%token    IDENTIFIER      /* Includes identifiers and literals */
+%token    C_IDENTIFIER    /* identifier (but not literal)
+                             followed by a :. */
+%token    NUMBER          /* [0-9][0-9]* */
+.P
+/* Reserved words : %type=>TYPE %left=>LEFT, and so on */
+.P
+%token    LEFT RIGHT NONASSOC TOKEN PREC TYPE START UNION
+.P
+%token    MARK            /* The %% mark. */
+%token    LCURL           /* The %{ mark. */
+%token    RCURL           /* The %} mark. */
+.P
+/* 8-bit character literals stand for themselves; */
+/* tokens have to be defined for multi-byte characters. */
+.P
+%start    spec
+.P
+%%
+.P
+spec  : defs MARK rules tail
+      ;
+tail  : MARK
+      {
+        /* In this action, set up the rest of the file. */
+      }
+      | /* Empty; the second MARK is optional. */
+      ;
+defs  : /* Empty. */
+      |    defs def
+      ;
+def   : START IDENTIFIER
+      |    UNION
+      {
+        /* Copy union definition to output. */
+      }
+      |    LCURL
+      {
+        /* Copy C code to output file. */
+      }
+        RCURL
+      |    rword tag nlist
+      ;
+rword : TOKEN
+      | LEFT
+      | RIGHT
+      | NONASSOC
+      | TYPE
+      ;
+tag   : /* Empty: union tag ID optional. */
+      | '<' IDENTIFIER '>'
+      ;
+nlist : nmno
+      | nlist nmno
+      ;
+nmno  : IDENTIFIER         /* Note: literal invalid with % type. */
+      | IDENTIFIER NUMBER  /* Note: invalid with % type. */
+      ;
+.P
+/* Rule section */
+.P
+rules : C_IDENTIFIER rbody prec
+      | rules  rule
+      ;
+rule  : C_IDENTIFIER rbody prec
+      | '|' rbody prec
+      ;
+rbody : /* empty */
+      | rbody IDENTIFIER
+      | rbody act
+      ;
+act   : '{'
+        {
+          /* Copy action, translate $$, and so on. */
+        }
+        '}'
+      ;
+prec  : /* Empty */
+      | PREC IDENTIFIER
+      | PREC IDENTIFIER act
+      | prec ';'
+      ;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.sp
+.SS "Conflicts"
+.P
+The parser produced for an input grammar may contain states in which
+conflicts occur. The conflicts occur because the grammar is not
+LALR(1). An ambiguous grammar always contains at least one LALR(1)
+conflict. The
+.IR yacc
+utility shall resolve all conflicts, using either default rules or
+user-specified precedence rules.
+.P
+Conflicts are either shift/reduce conflicts or reduce/reduce
+conflicts. A shift/reduce conflict is where, for a given state and
+lookahead symbol, both a shift action and a reduce action are
+possible. A reduce/reduce conflict is where, for a given state and
+lookahead symbol, reductions by two different rules are possible.
+.P
+The rules below describe how to specify what actions to take when a
+conflict occurs. Not all shift/reduce conflicts can be successfully
+resolved this way because the conflict may be due to something other
+than ambiguity, so incautious use of these facilities can cause the
+language accepted by the parser to be much different from that which
+was intended. The description file shall contain sufficient
+information to understand the cause of the conflict. Where ambiguity
+is the reason either the default or explicit rules should be adequate
+to produce a working parser.
+.P
+The declared precedences and associativities (see
+.IR "Declarations Section")
+are used to resolve parsing conflicts as follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+A precedence and associativity is associated with each grammar rule; it
+is the precedence and associativity of the last token or literal in the
+body of the rule. If the
+.BR %prec
+keyword is used, it overrides this default. Some grammar rules might
+not have both precedence and associativity.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If there is a shift/reduce conflict, and both the grammar rule and the
+input symbol have precedence and associativity associated with them,
+then the conflict is resolved in favor of the action (shift or reduce)
+associated with the higher precedence. If the precedences are the
+same, then the associativity is used; left associative implies reduce,
+right associative implies shift, and non-associative implies an error
+in the string being parsed.
+.IP " 3." 4
+When there is a shift/reduce conflict that cannot be resolved by rule
+2, the shift is done. Conflicts resolved this way are counted in the
+diagnostic output described in
+.IR "Error Handling".
+.IP " 4." 4
+When there is a reduce/reduce conflict, a reduction is done by the
+grammar rule that occurs earlier in the input sequence. Conflicts
+resolved this way are counted in the diagnostic output described in
+.IR "Error Handling".
+.P
+Conflicts resolved by precedence or associativity shall not be counted
+in the shift/reduce and reduce/reduce conflicts reported by
+.IR yacc
+on either standard error or in the description file.
+.SS "Error Handling"
+.P
+The token
+.BR error
+shall be reserved for error handling. The name
+.BR error
+can be used in grammar rules. It indicates places where the parser can
+recover from a syntax error. The default value of
+.BR error
+shall be 256. Its value can be changed using a
+.BR %token
+declaration. The lexical analyzer should not return the value of
+.BR error .
+.P
+The parser shall detect a syntax error when it is in a state where the
+action associated with the lookahead symbol is
+.BR error .
+A semantic action can cause the parser to initiate error handling by
+executing the macro YYERROR. When YYERROR is executed, the semantic
+action passes control back to the parser. YYERROR cannot be used
+outside of semantic actions.
+.P
+When the parser detects a syntax error, it normally calls
+\fIyyerror\fR()
+with the character string
+.BR \(dqsyntax\ error\(dq 
+as its argument. The call shall not be made if the parser is still
+recovering from a previous error when the error is detected. The
+parser is considered to be recovering from a previous error until the
+parser has shifted over at least three normal input symbols since the
+last error was detected or a semantic action has executed the macro
+.IR yyerrok .
+The parser shall not call
+\fIyyerror\fR()
+when YYERROR is executed.
+.P
+The macro function YYRECOVERING shall return 1 if a syntax error
+has been detected and the parser has not yet fully recovered from it.
+Otherwise, zero shall be returned.
+.P
+When a syntax error is detected by the parser, the parser shall check
+if a previous syntax error has been detected. If a previous error was
+detected, and if no normal input symbols have been shifted since the
+preceding error was detected, the parser checks if the lookahead symbol
+is an endmarker (see
+.IR "Interface to the Lexical Analyzer").
+If it is, the parser shall return with a non-zero value. Otherwise,
+the lookahead symbol shall be discarded and normal parsing shall
+resume.
+.P
+When YYERROR is executed or when the parser detects a syntax error and
+no previous error has been detected, or at least one normal input
+symbol has been shifted since the previous error was detected, the
+parser shall pop back one state at a time until the parse stack is
+empty or the current state allows a shift over
+.BR error .
+If the parser empties the parse stack, it shall return with a non-zero
+value. Otherwise, it shall shift over
+.BR error
+and then resume normal parsing. If the parser reads a lookahead symbol
+before the error was detected, that symbol shall still be the lookahead
+symbol when parsing is resumed.
+.P
+The macro
+.IR yyerrok
+in a semantic action shall cause the parser to act as if it has fully
+recovered from any previous errors. The macro
+.IR yyclearin
+shall cause the parser to discard the current lookahead token. If the
+current lookahead token has not yet been read,
+.IR yyclearin
+shall have no effect.
+.P
+The macro YYACCEPT shall cause the parser to return with the value
+zero. The macro YYABORT shall cause the parser to return with a
+non-zero value.
+.SS "Interface to the Lexical Analyzer"
+.P
+The
+\fIyylex\fR()
+function is an integer-valued function that returns a
+.IR "token number"
+representing the kind of token read. If there is a value associated
+with the token returned by
+\fIyylex\fR()
+(see the discussion of
+.IR tag
+above), it shall be assigned to the external variable
+.IR yylval .
+.P
+If the parser and
+\fIyylex\fR()
+do not agree on these token numbers, reliable communication between
+them cannot occur. For (single-byte character) literals, the token is
+simply the numeric value of the character in the current character set.
+The numbers for other tokens can either be chosen by
+.IR yacc ,
+or chosen by the user. In either case, the
+.BR #define
+construct of C is used to allow
+\fIyylex\fR()
+to return these numbers symbolically. The
+.BR #define
+statements are put into the code file, and the header file if that file
+is requested. The set of characters permitted by
+.IR yacc
+in an identifier is larger than that permitted by C. Token names found
+to contain such characters shall not be included in the
+.BR #define
+declarations.
+.P
+If the token numbers are chosen by
+.IR yacc ,
+the tokens other than literals shall be assigned numbers greater than
+256, although no order is implied. A token can be explicitly assigned a
+number by following its first appearance in the declarations section
+with a number. Names and literals not defined this way retain their
+default definition. All token numbers assigned by
+.IR yacc
+shall be unique and distinct from the token numbers used for literals
+and user-assigned tokens. If duplicate token numbers cause conflicts in
+parser generation,
+.IR yacc
+shall report an error; otherwise, it is unspecified whether the token
+assignment is accepted or an error is reported.
+.P
+The end of the input is marked by a special token called the
+.IR endmarker ,
+which has a token number that is zero or negative. (These values are
+invalid for any other token.) All lexical analyzers shall return zero
+or negative as a token number upon reaching the end of their input. If
+the tokens up to, but excluding, the endmarker form a structure that
+matches the start symbol, the parser shall accept the input. If the
+endmarker is seen in any other context, it shall be considered an
+error.
+.SS "Completing the Program"
+.P
+In addition to
+\fIyyparse\fR()
+and
+\fIyylex\fR(),
+the functions
+\fIyyerror\fR()
+and
+\fImain\fR()
+are required to make a complete program. The application can supply
+\fImain\fR()
+and
+\fIyyerror\fR(),
+or those routines can be obtained from the
+.IR yacc
+library.
+.SS "Yacc Library"
+.P
+The following functions shall appear only in the
+.IR yacc
+library accessible through the
+.BR "\(mil\ y"
+operand to
+.IR c99 ;
+they can therefore be redefined by a conforming application:
+.IP "\fBint\ \fImain\fR(\fBvoid\fR)" 6
+.br
+This function shall call
+\fIyyparse\fR()
+and exit with an unspecified value. Other actions within this function
+are unspecified.
+.IP "\fBint\ \fIyyerror\fR(\fBconst\ char\fR\ *\fIs\fR)" 6
+.br
+This function shall write the NUL-terminated argument to standard
+error, followed by a
+<newline>.
+.P
+The order of the
+.BR "\(mil\ y"
+and
+.BR "\(mil\ l"
+operands given to
+.IR c99
+is significant; the application shall either provide its own
+\fImain\fR()
+function or ensure that
+.BR "\(mil\ y"
+precedes
+.BR "\(mil\ l" .
+.SS "Debugging the Parser"
+.P
+The parser generated by
+.IR yacc
+shall have diagnostic facilities in it that can be optionally enabled
+at either compile time or at runtime (if enabled at compile time).
+The compilation of the runtime debugging code is under the control of
+YYDEBUG, a preprocessor symbol. If YYDEBUG has a non-zero value, the
+debugging code shall be included. If its value is zero, the code shall
+not be included.
+.P
+In parsers where the debugging code has been included, the external
+.BR int
+.IR yydebug
+can be used to turn debugging on (with a non-zero value) and off (zero
+value) at runtime. The initial value of
+.IR yydebug
+shall be zero.
+.P
+When
+.BR \(mit
+is specified, the code file shall be built such that, if YYDEBUG is not
+already defined at compilation time (using the
+.IR c99
+.BR \(miD
+YYDEBUG option, for example), YYDEBUG shall be set explicitly to 1.
+When
+.BR \(mit
+is not specified, the code file shall be built such that, if YYDEBUG is
+not already defined, it shall be set explicitly to zero.
+.P
+The format of the debugging output is unspecified but includes at least
+enough information to determine the shift and reduce actions, and the
+input symbols. It also provides information about error recovery.
+.SS "Algorithms"
+.P
+The parser constructed by
+.IR yacc
+implements an LALR(1) parsing algorithm as documented in the
+literature. It is unspecified whether the parser is table-driven or
+direct-coded.
+.P
+A parser generated by
+.IR yacc
+shall never request an input symbol from
+\fIyylex\fR()
+while in a state where the only actions other than the error action are
+reductions by a single rule.
+.P
+The literature of parsing theory defines these concepts.
+.SS "Limits"
+.P
+The
+.IR yacc
+utility may have several internal tables. The minimum maximums for
+these tables are shown in the following table. The exact meaning of
+these values is implementation-defined. The implementation shall
+define the relationship between these values and between them and any
+error messages that the implementation may generate should it run out
+of space for any internal structure. An implementation may combine
+groups of these resources into a single pool as long as the total
+available to the user does not fall below the sum of the sizes
+specified by this section.
+.br
+.sp
+.ce 1
+\fBTable: Internal Limits in \fIyacc\fP\fR
+.ad l
+.TS
+center box tab(@);
+cB | cB | cB
+cB | cB | cB
+l | n | lw(3i).
+@Minimum
+Limit@Maximum@Description
+_
+{NTERMS}@126@Number of tokens.
+{NNONTERM}@200@Number of non-terminals.
+{NPROD}@300@Number of rules.
+{NSTATES}@600@Number of states.
+{MEMSIZE}@5\|200@T{
+Length of rules. The total length, in names (tokens and
+non-terminals), of all the rules of the grammar. The left-hand side is
+counted for each rule, even if it is not explicitly repeated, as
+specified in
+.IR "Grammar Rules in yacc".
+T}
+{ACTSIZE}@4\|000@T{
+Number of actions. ``Actions'' here (and in the description file)
+refer to parser actions (shift, reduce, and so on) not to semantic
+actions defined in
+.IR "Grammar Rules in yacc".
+T}
+.TE
+.ad b
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+If any errors are encountered, the run is aborted and
+.IR yacc
+exits with a non-zero status. Partial code files and header files
+may be produced. The summary information in the description file
+shall always be produced if the
+.BR \(miv
+flag is present.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Historical implementations experience name conflicts on the names
+.BR yacc.tmp ,
+.BR yacc.acts ,
+.BR yacc.debug ,
+.BR y.tab.c ,
+.BR y.tab.h ,
+and
+.BR y.output
+if more than one copy of
+.IR yacc
+is running in a single directory at one time. The
+.BR \(mib
+option was added to overcome this problem. The related problem of
+allowing multiple
+.IR yacc
+parsers to be placed in the same file was addressed by adding a
+.BR \(mip
+option to override the previously hard-coded
+.BR yy
+variable prefix.
+.P
+The description of the
+.BR \(mip
+option specifies the minimal set of function and variable names that
+cause conflict when multiple parsers are linked together. YYSTYPE does
+not need to be changed. Instead, the programmer can use
+.BR \(mib
+to give the header files for different parsers different names, and
+then the file with the
+\fIyylex\fR()
+for a given parser can include the header for that parser. Names such
+as
+.IR yyclearerr
+do not need to be changed because they are used only in the actions;
+they do not have linkage. It is possible that an implementation has
+other names, either internal ones for implementing things such as
+.IR yyclearerr ,
+or providing non-standard features that it wants to change with
+.BR \(mip .
+.P
+Unary operators that are the same token as a binary operator in general
+need their precedence adjusted. This is handled by the
+.BR %prec
+advisory symbol associated with the particular grammar rule defining
+that unary operator. (See
+.IR "Grammar Rules in yacc".)
+Applications are not required to use this operator for unary operators,
+but the grammars that do not require it are rare.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Access to the
+.IR yacc
+library is obtained with library search operands to
+.IR c99 .
+To use the
+.IR yacc
+library
+\fImain\fR():
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+c99 y.tab.c \(mil y
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Both the
+.IR lex
+library and the
+.IR yacc
+library contain
+\fImain\fR().
+To access the
+.IR yacc
+\fImain\fR():
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+c99 y.tab.c lex.yy.c \(mil y \(mil l
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This ensures that the
+.IR yacc
+library is searched first, so that its
+\fImain\fR()
+is used.
+.P
+The historical
+.IR yacc
+libraries have contained two simple functions that are normally coded
+by the application programmer. These functions are similar to the
+following code:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <locale.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+    extern int yyparse();
+.P
+    setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
+.P
+    /* If the following parser is one created by lex, the
+       application must be careful to ensure that LC_CTYPE
+       and LC_COLLATE are set to the POSIX locale. */
+    (void) yyparse();
+    return (0);
+}
+.P
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int yyerror(const char *msg)
+{
+    (void) fprintf(stderr, "%s\en", msg);
+    return (0);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+The references in
+.BR "Referenced Documents"
+may be helpful in constructing the parser generator. The referenced DeRemer and Pennello article (along
+with the works it references) describes a technique to generate parsers
+that conform to this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. Work in this area continues to be done, so
+implementors should consult current literature before doing any new
+implementations. The original Knuth article is the theoretical basis for this
+kind of parser, but the tables it generates are impractically large for
+reasonable grammars and should not be used. The ``equivalent to''
+wording is intentional to assure that the best tables that are LALR(1)
+can be generated.
+.P
+There has been confusion between the class of grammars, the algorithms
+needed to generate parsers, and the algorithms needed to parse the
+languages. They are all reasonably orthogonal. In particular, a parser
+generator that accepts the full range of LR(1) grammars need not
+generate a table any more complex than one that accepts SLR(1) (a
+relatively weak class of LR grammars) for a grammar that happens to be
+SLR(1). Such an implementation need not recognize the case, either;
+table compression can yield the SLR(1) table (or one even smaller than
+that) without recognizing that the grammar is SLR(1).
+The speed of an LR(1) parser for any class is dependent more upon the
+table representation and compression (or the code generation if a
+direct parser is generated) than upon the class of grammar that the
+table generator handles.
+.P
+The speed of the parser generator is somewhat dependent upon the class
+of grammar it handles. However, the original Knuth article algorithms for
+constructing LR parsers were judged by its author to be impractically
+slow at that time. Although full LR is more complex than LALR(1), as
+computer speeds and algorithms improve, the difference (in terms of
+acceptable wall-clock execution time) is becoming less significant.
+.P
+Potential authors are cautioned that the referenced DeRemer and Pennello article previously cited
+identifies a bug (an over-simplification of the computation of LALR(1)
+lookahead sets) in some of the LALR(1) algorithm statements that
+preceded it to publication. They should take the time to seek out that
+paper, as well as current relevant work, particularly Aho's.
+.P
+The
+.BR \(mib
+option was added to provide a portable method for permitting
+.IR yacc
+to work on multiple separate parsers in the same directory. If a
+directory contains more than one
+.IR yacc
+grammar, and both grammars are constructed at the same time (by, for
+example, a parallel
+.IR make
+program), conflict results. While the solution is not historical
+practice, it corrects a known deficiency in historical implementations.
+Corresponding changes were made to all sections that referenced the
+filenames
+.BR y.tab.c
+(now ``the code file''),
+.BR y.tab.h
+(now ``the header file''), and
+.BR y.output
+(now ``the description file'').
+.P
+The grammar for
+.IR yacc
+input is based on System V documentation. The textual description shows
+there that the
+.BR ';' 
+is required at the end of the rule. The grammar and the implementation
+do not require this. (The use of
+.BR C_IDENTIFIER
+causes a reduce to occur in the right place.)
+.P
+Also, in that implementation, the constructs such as
+.BR %token
+can be terminated by a
+<semicolon>,
+but this is not permitted by the grammar. The keywords such as
+.BR %token
+can also appear in uppercase, which is again not discussed. In most
+places where
+.BR '%' 
+is used,
+<backslash>
+can be substituted, and there are alternate spellings for some of the
+symbols (for example,
+.BR %LEFT
+can be
+.BR \(dq%<\(dq 
+or even
+.BR \(dq\e<\(dq ).
+.P
+Historically, <\fItag\fP> can contain any characters except
+.BR '>' ,
+including white space, in the implementation. However, since the
+.IR tag
+must reference an ISO\ C standard union member, in practice conforming
+implementations need to support only the set of characters for ISO\ C standard
+identifiers in this context.
+.P
+Some historical implementations are known to accept actions that are
+terminated by a period. Historical implementations often allow
+.BR '$' 
+in names. A conforming implementation does not need to support either
+of these behaviors.
+.P
+Deciding when to use
+.BR %prec
+illustrates the difficulty in specifying the behavior of
+.IR yacc .
+There may be situations in which the
+.IR grammar
+is not, strictly speaking, in error, and yet
+.IR yacc
+cannot interpret it unambiguously. The resolution of ambiguities in the
+grammar can in many instances be resolved by providing additional
+information, such as using
+.BR %type
+or
+.BR %union
+declarations. It is often easier and it usually yields a smaller parser
+to take this alternative when it is appropriate.
+.P
+The size and execution time of a program produced without the runtime
+debugging code is usually smaller and slightly faster in historical
+implementations.
+.P
+Statistics messages from several historical implementations include the
+following types of information:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIn\fR/512 terminals, \fIn\fR/300 non-terminals
+\fIn\fR/600 grammar rules, \fIn\fR/1\|500 states
+\fIn\fR shift/reduce, \fIn\fR reduce/reduce conflicts reported
+\fIn\fR/350 working sets used
+Memory: states, etc. \fIn\fR/15\|000, parser \fIn\fR/15\|000
+\fIn\fR/600 distinct lookahead sets
+\fIn\fR extra closures
+\fIn\fR shift entries, \fIn\fR exceptions
+\fIn\fR goto entries
+\fIn\fR entries saved by goto default
+Optimizer space used: input \fIn\fR/15\|000, output \fIn\fR/15\|000
+\fIn\fR table entries, \fIn\fR zero
+Maximum spread: \fIn\fR, Maximum offset: \fIn\fR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The report of internal tables in the description file is left
+implementation-defined because all aspects of these limits are also
+implementation-defined. Some implementations may use dynamic
+allocation techniques and have no specific limit values to report.
+.P
+The format of the
+.BR y.output
+file is not given because specification of the format was not seen to
+enhance applications portability. The listing is primarily intended to
+help human users understand and debug the parser; use of
+.BR y.output
+by a conforming application script would be unusual. Furthermore,
+implementations have not produced consistent output and no popular
+format was apparent. The format selected by the implementation should
+be human-readable, in addition to the requirement that it be a text
+file.
+.P
+Standard error reports are not specifically described because they are
+seldom of use to conforming applications and there was no reason to
+restrict implementations.
+.P
+Some implementations recognize
+.BR \(dq={\(dq 
+as equivalent to
+.BR '{' 
+because it appears in historical documentation. This construction was
+recognized and documented as obsolete as long ago as 1978, in the
+referenced \fIYacc: Yet Another Compiler-Compiler\fP. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 chose to leave it as obsolete and omit it.
+.P
+Multi-byte characters should be recognized by the lexical analyzer and
+returned as tokens. They should not be returned as multi-byte
+character literals. The token
+.BR error
+that is used for error recovery is normally assigned the value 256 in
+the historical implementation. Thus, the token value 256, which is used
+in many multi-byte character sets, is not available for use as the
+value of a user-defined token.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIc99\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIlex\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/zcat.1p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/zcat.1p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5c78cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man1p/zcat.1p
@@ -0,0 +1,127 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ZCAT "1P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+zcat
+\(em expand and concatenate data
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+zcat \fB[\fIfile\fR...\fB]\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR zcat
+utility shall write to standard output the uncompressed form of files
+that have been compressed using the
+.IR compress
+utility. It is the equivalent of
+.IR uncompress
+.BR \(mic .
+Input files are not affected.
+.SH OPTIONS
+None.
+.SH OPERANDS
+The following operand shall be supported:
+.IP "\fIfile\fR" 10
+The pathname of a file previously processed by the
+.IR compress
+utility. If
+.IR file
+already has the
+.BR .Z
+suffix specified, it is used as submitted. Otherwise, the
+.BR .Z
+suffix is appended to the filename prior to processing.
+.SH STDIN
+The standard input shall be used only if no
+.IR file
+operands are specified, or if a
+.IR file
+operand is
+.BR '\(mi' .
+.SH "INPUT FILES"
+Input files shall be compressed files that are in the format produced by
+the
+.IR compress
+utility.
+.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
+The following environment variables shall affect the execution of
+.IR zcat :
+.IP "\fILANG\fP" 10
+Provide a default value for the internationalization variables that are
+unset or null. (See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables"
+for the precedence of internationalization variables used to determine
+the values of locale categories.)
+.IP "\fILC_ALL\fP" 10
+If set to a non-empty string value, override the values of all the
+other internationalization variables.
+.IP "\fILC_CTYPE\fP" 10
+Determine the locale for the interpretation of sequences of bytes of
+text data as characters (for example, single-byte as opposed to
+multi-byte characters in arguments).
+.IP "\fILC_MESSAGES\fP" 10
+.br
+Determine the locale that should be used to affect the format and
+contents of diagnostic messages written to standard error.
+.IP "\fINLSPATH\fP" 10
+Determine the location of message catalogs for the processing of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES .
+.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS"
+Default.
+.SH STDOUT
+The compressed files given as input shall be written on standard output
+in their uncompressed form.
+.SH STDERR
+The standard error shall be used only for diagnostic messages.
+.SH "OUTPUT FILES"
+None.
+.SH "EXTENDED DESCRIPTION"
+None.
+.SH "EXIT STATUS"
+The following exit values shall be returned:
+.IP "\00" 6
+Successful completion.
+.IP >0 6
+An error occurred.
+.SH "CONSEQUENCES OF ERRORS"
+Default.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcompress\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIuncompress\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/FD_CLR.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/FD_CLR.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..499063a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/FD_CLR.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FD_CLR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+FD_CLR
+\(em macros for synchronous I/O multiplexing
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/select.h>
+.P
+void FD_CLR(int \fIfd\fP, fd_set *\fIfdset\fP);
+int FD_ISSET(int \fIfd\fP, fd_set *\fIfdset\fP);
+void FD_SET(int \fIfd\fP, fd_set *\fIfdset\fP);
+void FD_ZERO(fd_set *\fIfdset\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpselect\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/_Exit.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/_Exit.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..67bf8b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/_Exit.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,451 @@
+'\" et
+.TH _EXIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+_Exit,
+_exit
+\(em terminate a process
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+void _Exit(int \fIstatus\fP);
+.P
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+void _exit(int \fIstatus\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fI_Exit\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The value of
+.IR status
+may be 0, EXIT_SUCCESS, EXIT_FAILURE,
+or any other value, though only the least significant 8 bits (that is,
+.IR status
+& 0377) shall be available to a waiting parent process.
+.P
+The
+\fI_Exit\fR()
+and
+\fI_exit\fR()
+functions shall be functionally equivalent.
+.P
+The
+\fI_Exit\fR()
+and
+\fI_exit\fR()
+functions shall not call functions registered with
+\fIatexit\fR()
+nor any registered signal handlers.
+Open streams shall not be flushed.
+Whether open streams are closed (without flushing) is
+implementation-defined. Finally, the calling process shall be
+terminated with the consequences described below.
+.SS "Consequences of Process Termination"
+.P
+Process termination caused by any reason shall have the following
+consequences:
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+These consequences are all extensions to the ISO\ C standard and are not further
+CX shaded. However, functionality relating to the XSI option is shaded.
+.P
+.IP " *" 4
+All of the file descriptors, directory streams,
+conversion descriptors, and message catalog descriptors
+open in the calling process shall be closed.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the parent process of the calling process is executing a
+\fIwait\fR(),
+\fIwaitid\fR(),
+or
+\fIwaitpid\fR(),
+and has neither set its SA_NOCLDWAIT flag nor set SIGCHLD to SIG_IGN,
+it shall be notified of termination of the calling process and the
+low-order eight bits (that is, bits 0377) of
+.IR status
+shall be made available to it. If the parent is not waiting, the child's
+status shall be made available to it when the parent subsequently
+executes
+\fIwait\fR(),
+\fIwaitid\fR(),
+or
+\fIwaitpid\fR().
+.RS 4 
+.P
+The semantics of the
+\fIwaitid\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIwait\fR().
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+If the parent process of the calling process is not executing a
+\fIwait\fR(),
+\fIwaitid\fR(),
+or
+\fIwaitpid\fR(),
+and has neither set its SA_NOCLDWAIT flag nor set SIGCHLD to SIG_IGN,
+the calling process shall be transformed into a \fIzombie process\fP.
+A \fIzombie process\fP is an inactive process and it shall be deleted
+at some later time when its parent process executes
+\fIwait\fR(),
+\fIwaitid\fR(),
+or
+\fIwaitpid\fR().
+.RS 4 
+.P
+The semantics of the
+\fIwaitid\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIwait\fR().
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+Termination of a process does not directly terminate its children. The
+sending of a SIGHUP
+signal as described below indirectly terminates children in some
+circumstances.
+.IP " *" 4
+Either:
+.RS 4 
+.P
+If the implementation supports the SIGCHLD
+signal, a SIGCHLD shall be sent to the parent process.
+.P
+Or:
+.P
+If the parent process has set its SA_NOCLDWAIT flag,
+or set SIGCHLD to SIG_IGN, the status shall be
+discarded, and the lifetime of the calling process shall end
+immediately. If SA_NOCLDWAIT is set, it is implementation-defined
+whether a SIGCHLD signal is sent to the parent process.
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+The parent process ID of all of the existing child processes and
+zombie processes of the calling process shall be set to the process ID
+of an implementation-defined system process. That is, these processes
+shall be inherited by a special system process.
+.IP " *" 4
+Each attached shared-memory segment is detached and the value of
+.IR shm_nattch
+(see
+\fIshmget\fR())
+in the data structure associated with its shared memory ID
+shall be decremented by 1.
+.IP " *" 4
+For each semaphore for which the calling process has set a
+.IR semadj
+value (see
+\fIsemop\fR()),
+that value shall be added to the
+.IR semval
+of the specified semaphore.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the process is a controlling process, the SIGHUP
+signal shall be sent to each process in the foreground process group of
+the controlling terminal belonging to the calling process.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the process is a controlling process, the controlling terminal
+associated with the session shall be disassociated from the session,
+allowing it to be acquired by a new controlling process.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the exit of the process causes a process group to become orphaned,
+and if any member of the newly-orphaned process group is stopped, then
+a SIGHUP signal followed by a SIGCONT signal shall be sent to each
+process in the newly-orphaned process group.
+.IP " *" 4
+All open named semaphores in the calling process shall be closed as
+if by appropriate calls to
+\fIsem_close\fR().
+.IP " *" 4
+Any memory locks established by the process via calls to
+\fImlockall\fR()
+or
+\fImlock\fR()
+shall be removed. If locked pages in the address space of the calling
+process are also mapped into the address spaces of other processes and
+are locked by those processes, the locks established by the other
+processes shall be unaffected by the call by this process to
+\fI_Exit\fR()
+or
+\fI_exit\fR().
+.IP " *" 4
+Memory mappings that were created in the process shall be unmapped
+before the process is destroyed.
+.IP " *" 4
+Any blocks of typed memory that were mapped in the calling process
+shall be unmapped, as if
+\fImunmap\fR()
+was implicitly called to unmap them.
+.IP " *" 4
+All open message queue descriptors in the calling process shall be
+closed as if by appropriate calls to
+\fImq_close\fR().
+.IP " *" 4
+Any outstanding cancelable asynchronous I/O operations may be
+canceled. Those asynchronous I/O operations that are not canceled
+shall complete as if the
+\fI_Exit\fR()
+or
+\fI_exit\fR()
+operation had not yet occurred, but any associated signal notifications
+shall be suppressed. The
+\fI_Exit\fR()
+or
+\fI_exit\fR()
+operation may block awaiting such I/O completion. Whether any
+I/O is canceled, and which I/O may be canceled upon
+\fI_Exit\fR()
+or
+\fI_exit\fR(),
+is implementation-defined.
+.IP " *" 4
+Threads terminated by a call to
+\fI_Exit\fR()
+or
+\fI_exit\fR()
+shall not invoke their cancellation cleanup handlers or per-thread data
+destructors.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the calling process is a trace controller process, any trace streams
+that were created by the calling process shall be shut down as
+described by the
+\fIposix_trace_shutdown\fR()
+function, and mapping of trace event names to trace event type identifiers
+of any process built for these trace streams may be deallocated.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions do not return.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Normally applications should use
+\fIexit\fR()
+rather than
+\fI_Exit\fR()
+or
+\fI_exit\fR().
+.SH RATIONALE
+.SS "Process Termination"
+.P
+Early proposals drew a distinction between normal and abnormal process
+termination. Abnormal termination was caused only by certain signals
+and resulted in implementation-defined ``actions'', as discussed below.
+Subsequent proposals distinguished three types of termination:
+\fInormal termination\fP (as in the current specification), \fIsimple
+abnormal termination\fP, and \fIabnormal termination with actions\fP.
+Again the distinction between the two types of abnormal termination was
+that they were caused by different signals and that
+implementation-defined actions would result in the latter case. Given
+that these actions were completely implementation-defined, the early
+proposals were only saying when the actions could occur and how their
+occurrence could be detected, but not what they were. This was of
+little or no use to conforming applications, and thus the distinction is
+not made in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+The implementation-defined actions usually include, in most
+historical implementations, the creation of a file named
+.BR core
+in the current working directory of the process. This file contains an
+image of the memory of the process, together with descriptive
+information about the process, perhaps sufficient to reconstruct the
+state of the process at the receipt of the signal.
+.P
+There is a potential security problem in creating a
+.BR core
+file if the process was set-user-ID
+and the current user is not the owner of the program, if the process
+was set-group-ID
+and none of the user's groups match the group of the program, or if the
+user does not have permission to write in the current directory. In
+this situation, an implementation either should not create a
+.BR core
+file or should make it unreadable by the user.
+.P
+Despite the silence of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 on this feature, applications are
+advised not to create files named
+.BR core
+because of potential conflicts in many implementations. Some
+implementations use a name other than
+.BR core
+for the file; for example, by appending the process ID to the filename.
+.SS "Terminating a Process"
+.P
+It is important that the consequences of process termination as
+described occur regardless of whether the process called
+\fI_exit\fR()
+(perhaps indirectly through
+\fIexit\fR())
+or instead was terminated due to a signal or for some other reason.
+Note that in the specific case of
+\fIexit\fR()
+this means that the
+.IR status
+argument to
+\fIexit\fR()
+is treated in the same way as the
+.IR status
+argument to
+\fI_exit\fR().
+.P
+A language other than C may have other termination primitives than the
+C-language
+\fIexit\fR()
+function, and programs written in such a language should use its native
+termination primitives, but those should have as part of their function
+the behavior of
+\fI_exit\fR()
+as described. Implementations in languages other than C are outside
+the scope of this version of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, however.
+.P
+As required by the ISO\ C standard, using
+.BR return
+from
+\fImain\fR()
+has the same behavior (other than with respect to language scope
+issues) as calling
+\fIexit\fR()
+with the returned value. Reaching the end of the
+\fImain\fR()
+function has the same behavior as calling
+.IR exit (0).
+.P
+A value of zero (or EXIT_SUCCESS, which is required to be zero)
+for the argument
+.IR status
+conventionally indicates successful termination. This corresponds to
+the specification for
+\fIexit\fR()
+in the ISO\ C standard. The convention is followed by utilities such as
+.IR make
+and various shells, which interpret a zero status
+from a child process as success. For this reason, applications should
+not call \fIexit\fP(0) or \fI_exit\fP(0) when they terminate
+unsuccessfully; for example, in signal-catching functions.
+.P
+Historically, the implementation-defined process that inherits
+children whose parents have terminated without waiting on them is
+called
+.IR init
+and has a process ID of 1.
+.P
+The sending of a SIGHUP
+to the foreground process group when a controlling process terminates
+corresponds to somewhat different historical implementations. In System
+V, the kernel sends a
+SIGHUP on termination of (essentially) a controlling process. In 4.2 BSD,
+the kernel does not send SIGHUP in a case like this, but the termination
+of a controlling process is usually noticed by a system daemon, which
+arranges to send a SIGHUP to the foreground process group with the
+\fIvhangup\fR()
+function. However, in 4.2 BSD, due to the behavior of the shells that
+support job control,
+the controlling process is usually a shell with no other processes in
+its process group. Thus, a change to make
+\fI_exit\fR()
+behave this way in such systems should not cause problems with existing
+applications.
+.P
+The termination of a process may cause a process group to become
+orphaned in either of two ways.
+The connection of a process group to its parent(s) outside of the group
+depends on both the parents and their children. Thus, a process group
+may be orphaned by the termination of the last connecting parent
+process outside of the group or by the termination of the last direct
+descendant of the parent process(es). In either case, if the
+termination of a process causes a process group to become orphaned,
+processes within the group are disconnected from their job control
+shell, which no longer has any information on the existence of the
+process group. Stopped processes within the group would languish
+forever. In order to avoid this problem, newly orphaned process groups
+that contain stopped processes are sent a SIGHUP signal and a SIGCONT
+signal to indicate that they have been disconnected from their
+session.
+The SIGHUP signal causes the process group members to terminate unless
+they are catching or ignoring SIGHUP. Under most circumstances, all of
+the members of the process group are stopped if any of them are
+stopped.
+.P
+The action of sending a SIGHUP and a SIGCONT signal to members of a
+newly orphaned process group is similar to the action of 4.2 BSD, which
+sends SIGHUP and SIGCONT to each stopped child of an exiting process.
+If such children exit in response to the SIGHUP, any additional
+descendants receive similar treatment at that time. In this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, the
+signals are sent to the entire process group at the same time. Also,
+in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, but not in 4.2 BSD, stopped processes may be orphaned, but
+may be members of a process group that is not orphaned; therefore, the
+action taken at
+\fI_exit\fR()
+must consider processes other than child processes.
+.P
+It is possible for a process group to be orphaned by a call to
+\fIsetpgid\fR()
+or
+\fIsetsid\fR(),
+as well as by process termination. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not require sending
+SIGHUP and SIGCONT in those cases, because, unlike process termination,
+those cases are not caused accidentally by applications that are
+unaware of job control. An implementation can choose to send SIGHUP
+and SIGCONT in those cases as an extension; such an extension must be
+documented as required in
+.IR <signal.h> .
+.P
+The ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1999 standard adds the
+\fI_Exit\fR()
+function that results in immediate program termination without
+triggering signals or
+\fIatexit\fR()-registered
+functions. In POSIX.1\(hy2008, this is equivalent to the
+\fI_exit\fR()
+function.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIatexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImlockall\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_close\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImunmap\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_close\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemop\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetpgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwaitid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/_longjmp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/_longjmp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9b155d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/_longjmp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+'\" et
+.TH _LONGJMP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+_longjmp,
+_setjmp
+\(em non-local goto
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <setjmp.h>
+.P
+void _longjmp(jmp_buf \fIenv\fP, int \fIval\fP);
+int _setjmp(jmp_buf \fIenv\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fI_longjmp\fR()
+and
+\fI_setjmp\fR()
+functions shall be equivalent to
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+and
+\fIsetjmp\fR(),
+respectively, with the additional restriction that
+\fI_longjmp\fR()
+and
+\fI_setjmp\fR()
+shall not manipulate the signal mask.
+.P
+If
+\fI_longjmp\fR()
+is called even though
+.IR env
+was never initialized by a call to
+\fI_setjmp\fR(),
+or when the last such call was in a function that has since returned,
+the results are undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIlongjmp\fR\^(\|)"
+and
+.IR "\fIsetjmp\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If
+\fI_longjmp\fR()
+is executed and the environment in which
+\fI_setjmp\fR()
+was executed no longer exists, errors can occur. The conditions under
+which the environment of the
+\fI_setjmp\fR()
+no longer exists include exiting the function that contains the
+\fI_setjmp\fR()
+call, and exiting an inner block with temporary storage. This
+condition might not be detectable, in which case the
+\fI_longjmp\fR()
+occurs and, if the environment no longer exists, the contents of the
+temporary storage of an inner block are unpredictable. This condition
+might also cause unexpected process termination. If the function has
+returned, the results are undefined.
+.P
+Passing
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+a pointer to a buffer not created by
+\fIsetjmp\fR(),
+passing
+\fI_longjmp\fR()
+a pointer to a buffer not created by
+\fI_setjmp\fR(),
+passing
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR()
+a pointer to a buffer not created by
+\fIsigsetjmp\fR(),
+or passing any of these three functions a buffer that has been modified
+by the user can cause all the problems listed above, and more.
+.P
+The
+\fI_longjmp\fR()
+and
+\fI_setjmp\fR()
+functions are included to support programs written to historical system
+interfaces. New applications should use
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR()
+and
+\fIsigsetjmp\fR()
+respectively.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fI_longjmp\fR()
+and
+\fI_setjmp\fR()
+functions may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIlongjmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetjmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsiglongjmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigsetjmp\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<setjmp.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/_tolower.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/_tolower.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..db6a857
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/_tolower.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+'\" et
+.TH _TOLOWER "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+_tolower
+\(em transliterate uppercase characters to lowercase
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ctype.h>
+.P
+int _tolower(int \fIc\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fI_tolower\fR()
+macro shall be equivalent to \fItolower\fP(\fIc\fP) except that the
+application shall ensure that the argument
+.IR c
+is an uppercase letter.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fI_tolower\fR()
+shall return the lowercase letter corresponding to the argument
+passed.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications should use the
+\fItolower\fR()
+function instead of the obsolescent
+\fI_tolower\fR()
+function.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fI_tolower\fR()
+function may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fItolower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisupper\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<ctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/_toupper.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/_toupper.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bbdceae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/_toupper.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+'\" et
+.TH _TOUPPER "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+_toupper
+\(em transliterate lowercase characters to uppercase
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ctype.h>
+.P
+int _toupper(int \fIc\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fI_toupper\fR()
+macro shall be equivalent to
+\fItoupper\fR()
+except that the application shall ensure that the argument
+.IR c
+is a lowercase letter.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fI_toupper\fR()
+shall return the uppercase letter corresponding to the argument passed.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications should use the
+\fItoupper\fR()
+function instead of the obsolescent
+\fI_toupper\fR()
+function.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fI_toupper\fR()
+function may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIislower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItoupper\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<ctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/a64l.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/a64l.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5632ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/a64l.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+'\" et
+.TH A64L "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+a64l,
+l64a
+\(em convert between a 32-bit integer and a radix-64 ASCII string
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+long a64l(const char *\fIs\fP);
+char *l64a(long \fIvalue\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These functions maintain numbers stored in radix-64 ASCII
+characters. This is a notation by which 32-bit integers can be
+represented by up to six characters; each character represents a digit
+in radix-64 notation. If the type
+.BR long
+contains more than 32 bits, only the low-order 32 bits shall be used for
+these operations.
+.P
+The characters used to represent digits are
+.BR '.' 
+(dot) for 0,
+.BR '/' 
+for 1,
+.BR '0' 
+through
+.BR '9' 
+for [2,11],
+.BR 'A' 
+through
+.BR 'Z' 
+for [12,37], and
+.BR 'a' 
+through
+.BR 'z' 
+for [38,63].
+.P
+The
+\fIa64l\fR()
+function shall take a pointer to a radix-64 representation, in which
+the first digit is the least significant, and return the corresponding
+.BR long
+value. If the string pointed to by
+.IR s
+contains more than six characters,
+\fIa64l\fR()
+shall use the first six. If the first six characters of the string
+contain a null terminator,
+\fIa64l\fR()
+shall use only characters preceding the null terminator. The
+\fIa64l\fR()
+function shall scan the character string from left to right with the
+least significant digit on the left, decoding each character as a 6-bit
+radix-64 number. If the type
+.BR long
+contains more than 32 bits, the resulting value is sign-extended. The
+behavior of
+\fIa64l\fR()
+is unspecified if
+.IR s
+is a null pointer or the string pointed to by
+.IR s
+was not generated by a previous call to
+\fIl64a\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIl64a\fR()
+function shall take a
+.BR long
+argument and return a pointer to the corresponding radix-64
+representation. The behavior of
+\fIl64a\fR()
+is unspecified if
+.IR value
+is negative.
+.P
+The value returned by
+\fIl64a\fR()
+may be a pointer into a static buffer. Subsequent calls to
+\fIl64a\fR()
+may overwrite the buffer.
+.P
+The
+\fIl64a\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIa64l\fR()
+shall return the
+.BR long
+value resulting from conversion of the input string. If a string
+pointed to by
+.IR s
+is an empty string,
+\fIa64l\fR()
+shall return 0L.
+.P
+The
+\fIl64a\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to the radix-64 representation. If
+.IR value
+is 0L,
+\fIl64a\fR()
+shall return a pointer to an empty string.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If the type
+.BR long
+contains more than 32 bits, the result of
+\fIa64l\fP(\fIl64a\fP(\fIx\fP)) is
+.IR x
+in the low-order 32 bits.
+.SH RATIONALE
+This is not the same encoding as used by either encoding variant
+of the
+.IR uuencode
+utility.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrtoul\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.P
+The Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIuuencode\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/abort.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/abort.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..56caedb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/abort.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,134 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ABORT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+abort
+\(em generate an abnormal process abort
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+void abort(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIabort\fR()
+function shall cause abnormal process termination to occur, unless the
+signal SIGABRT is being caught and the signal handler does not return.
+.P
+The abnormal termination processing shall include the default actions
+defined for SIGABRT and may include an attempt to effect
+\fIfclose\fR()
+on all open streams.
+.P
+The SIGABRT signal shall be sent to the calling process as if by means
+of
+\fIraise\fR()
+with the argument SIGABRT.
+.P
+The status made available to
+\fIwait\fR(),
+\fIwaitid\fR(),
+or
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+by
+\fIabort\fR()
+shall be that of a process terminated by the SIGABRT signal.
+The
+\fIabort\fR()
+function shall override blocking or ignoring the SIGABRT signal.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIabort\fR()
+function shall not return.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Catching the signal is intended to provide the application developer with
+a portable means to abort processing, free from possible interference
+from any implementation-supplied functions.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1999 standard requires the
+\fIabort\fR()
+function to be async-signal-safe. Since POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard,
+this required a change to the DESCRIPTION from ``shall include the
+effect of
+\fIfclose\fR()''
+to ``may include an attempt to effect
+\fIfclose\fR().''
+.P
+The revised wording permits some backwards-compatibility and avoids a
+potential deadlock situation.
+.P
+The Open Group Base Resolution bwg2002\(hy003 is applied, removing the
+following XSI shaded paragraph from the DESCRIPTION:
+.P
+``On XSI-conformant systems, in addition the abnormal termination
+processing shall include the effect of
+\fIfclose\fR()
+on message catalog descriptors.''
+.P
+There were several reasons to remove this paragraph:
+.IP " *" 4
+No special processing of open message catalogs needs to be performed
+prior to abnormal process termination.
+.IP " *" 4
+The main reason to specifically mention that
+\fIabort\fR()
+includes the effect of
+\fIfclose\fR()
+on open streams is to flush output queued on the stream. Message
+catalogs in this context are read-only and, therefore, do not need to
+be flushed.
+.IP " *" 4
+The effect of
+\fIfclose\fR()
+on a message catalog descriptor is unspecified. Message catalog
+descriptors are allowed, but not required to be implemented using a
+file descriptor, but there is no mention in POSIX.1\(hy2008 of a message catalog
+descriptor using a standard I/O stream FILE object as would be expected
+by
+\fIfclose\fR().
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIraise\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsignal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwaitid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/abs.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/abs.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ebad567
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/abs.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ABS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+abs
+\(em return an integer absolute value
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+int abs(int \fIi\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIabs\fR()
+function shall compute the absolute value of its integer operand,
+.IR i .
+If the result cannot be represented, the behavior is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIabs\fR()
+function shall return the absolute value of its integer operand.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+In two's-complement representation, the absolute value of the negative
+integer with largest magnitude
+{INT_MIN}
+might not be representable.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfabs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlabs\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/accept.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/accept.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b4a7a3e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/accept.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ACCEPT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+accept
+\(em accept a new connection on a socket
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+.P
+int accept(int \fIsocket\fP, struct sockaddr *restrict \fIaddress\fP,
+    socklen_t *restrict \fIaddress_len\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIaccept\fR()
+function shall extract the first connection on the queue of pending
+connections, create a new socket with the same socket type protocol
+and address family as the specified socket, and allocate a new file
+descriptor for that socket.
+.P
+The
+\fIaccept\fR()
+function takes the following arguments:
+.IP "\fIsocket\fR" 12
+Specifies a socket that was created with
+\fIsocket\fR(),
+has been bound to an address with
+\fIbind\fR(),
+and has issued a successful call to
+\fIlisten\fR().
+.IP "\fIaddress\fR" 12
+Either a null pointer, or a pointer to a
+.BR sockaddr
+structure where the address of the connecting socket shall be returned.
+.IP "\fIaddress_len\fR" 12
+Either a null pointer, if
+.IR address
+is a null pointer, or a pointer to a
+.BR socklen_t
+object which on input specifies the length of the supplied
+.BR sockaddr
+structure, and on output specifies the length of the stored address.
+.P
+If
+.IR address
+is not a null pointer, the address of the peer for the accepted
+connection shall be stored in the
+.BR sockaddr
+structure pointed to by
+.IR address ,
+and the length of this address shall be stored in the object pointed to
+by
+.IR address_len .
+.P
+If the actual length of the address is greater than the length of the
+supplied
+.BR sockaddr
+structure, the stored address shall be truncated.
+.P
+If the protocol permits connections by unbound clients, and the peer is
+not bound, then the value stored in the object pointed to by
+.IR address
+is unspecified.
+.P
+If the listen queue is empty of connection requests and O_NONBLOCK is
+not set on the file descriptor for the socket,
+\fIaccept\fR()
+shall block until a connection is present. If the
+\fIlisten\fR()
+queue is empty of connection requests and O_NONBLOCK is set on the file
+descriptor for the socket,
+\fIaccept\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EAGAIN] 
+or
+.BR [EWOULDBLOCK] .
+.P
+The accepted socket cannot itself accept more connections. The original
+socket remains open and can accept more connections.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIaccept\fR()
+shall return the non-negative file descriptor of the accepted socket.
+Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIaccept\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN " or " EWOULDBLOCK
+.br
+O_NONBLOCK is set for the socket file descriptor and no connections are
+present to be accepted.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR socket
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR ECONNABORTED
+.br
+A connection has been aborted.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fIaccept\fR()
+function was interrupted by a signal that was caught before a valid
+connection arrived.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR socket
+is not accepting connections.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+The maximum number of file descriptors in the system are already open.
+.TP
+.BR ENOBUFS
+No buffer space is available.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+There was insufficient memory available to complete the operation.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSOCK
+The
+.IR socket
+argument does not refer to a socket.
+.TP
+.BR EOPNOTSUPP
+The socket type of the specified socket does not support accepting
+connections.
+.P
+The
+\fIaccept\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EPROTO
+A protocol error has occurred;
+for example, the STREAMS protocol stack has not been initialized.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+When a connection is available,
+\fIselect\fR()
+indicates that the file descriptor for the socket is ready for reading.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIbind\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIconnect\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlisten\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/access.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/access.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..955556d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/access.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,294 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ACCESS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+access, faccessat
+\(em determine accessibility of a file relative to directory file
+descriptor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int access(const char *\fIpath\fP, int \fIamode\fP);
+int faccessat(int \fIfd\fP, const char *\fIpath\fP, int \fIamode\fP, int \fIflag\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIaccess\fR()
+function shall check the file named by the pathname pointed to by the
+.IR path
+argument for accessibility according to the bit pattern contained in
+.IR amode ,
+using the real user ID in place of the effective user ID and the real
+group ID in place of the effective group ID.
+.P
+The value of
+.IR amode
+is either the bitwise-inclusive OR of the access permissions to be
+checked (R_OK, W_OK, X_OK) or the existence test (F_OK).
+.P
+If any access permissions are checked, each shall be checked
+individually, as described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.4" ", " "File Access Permissions",
+except that where that description refers to execute permission for
+a process with appropriate privileges, an implementation may indicate
+success for X_OK even if execute permission is not granted to any user.
+.P
+The
+\fIfaccessat\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIaccess\fR()
+function, except in the case where
+.IR path
+specifies a relative path. In this case the file whose accessibility is
+to be determined shall be located relative to the directory associated
+with the file descriptor
+.IR fd
+instead of the current working directory. If the file descriptor was
+opened without O_SEARCH, the function shall check whether directory
+searches are permitted using the current permissions of the directory
+underlying the file descriptor. If the file descriptor was opened with
+O_SEARCH, the function shall not perform the check.
+.P
+If
+\fIfaccessat\fR()
+is passed the special value AT_FDCWD in the
+.IR fd
+parameter, the current working directory shall be used and the behavior
+shall be identical to a call to
+\fIaccess\fR().
+.P
+Values for
+.IR flag
+are constructed by a bitwise-inclusive OR of flags from the following
+list, defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> :
+.IP AT_EACCESS 12
+The checks for accessibility are performed using the effective user and
+group IDs instead of the real user and group ID as required in a call
+to
+\fIaccess\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return 0. Otherwise,
+these functions shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Permission bits of the file mode do not permit the requested access, or
+search permission is denied on a component of the path prefix.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR path
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory, or the
+.IR path
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file
+that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+Write access is requested for a file on a read-only file system.
+.P
+The
+\fIfaccessat\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+.IR fd
+was not opened with O_SEARCH and the permissions of the directory
+underlying
+.IR fd
+do not permit directory searches.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR path
+argument does not specify an absolute path and the
+.IR fd
+argument is neither AT_FDCWD nor a valid file descriptor open
+for reading or searching.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+The
+.IR path
+argument is not an absolute path and
+.IR fd
+is a file descriptor associated with a non-directory file.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the \fIamode\fP argument is invalid.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ETXTBSY
+Write access is requested for a pure procedure (shared text) file that
+is being executed.
+.P
+The
+\fIfaccessat\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR flag
+argument is not valid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Testing for the Existence of a File"
+.P
+The following example tests whether a file named
+.BR myfile
+exists in the
+.BR /tmp
+directory.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+\&...
+int result;
+const char *pathname = "/tmp/myfile";
+.P
+result = access (pathname, F_OK);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Additional values of
+.IR amode
+other than the set defined in the description may be valid; for
+example, if a system has extended access controls.
+.P
+The use of the AT_EACCESS value for
+.IR flag
+enables functionality not available in
+\fIaccess\fR().
+.SH RATIONALE
+In early proposals, some inadequacies in the
+\fIaccess\fR()
+function led to the creation of an
+\fIeaccess\fR()
+function because:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Historical implementations of
+\fIaccess\fR()
+do not test file access correctly when the process'
+real user ID is
+superuser. In particular, they always return zero when testing execute
+permissions without regard to whether the file is executable.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The superuser has complete access to all files on a system. As a
+consequence, programs started by the superuser and switched to the
+effective user ID
+with lesser privileges cannot use
+\fIaccess\fR()
+to test their file access permissions.
+.P
+However, the historical model of
+\fIeaccess\fR()
+does not resolve problem (1), so this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 now allows
+\fIaccess\fR()
+to behave in the desired way because several implementations have
+corrected the problem. It was also argued that problem (2) is more
+easily solved by using
+\fIopen\fR(),
+\fIchdir\fR(),
+or one of the
+.IR exec
+functions as appropriate and responding to the error, rather than
+creating a new function that would not be as reliable. Therefore,
+\fIeaccess\fR()
+is not included in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+The sentence concerning appropriate privileges and execute permission
+bits
+reflects the two possibilities implemented by historical
+implementations when checking superuser access for X_OK.
+.P
+New implementations are discouraged from returning X_OK unless at least
+one execution permission bit is set.
+.P
+The purpose of the
+\fIfaccessat\fR()
+function is to enable the checking of the accessibility of files in
+directories other than the current working directory without exposure
+to race conditions. Any part of the path of a file could be changed in
+parallel to a call to
+\fIaccess\fR(),
+resulting in unspecified behavior. By opening a file descriptor for
+the target directory and using the
+\fIfaccessat\fR()
+function it can be guaranteed that the file tested for accessibility is
+located relative to the desired directory.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfstatat\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.4" ", " "File Access Permissions",
+.IR "\fB<fcntl.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/acos.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/acos.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..16df697
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/acos.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ACOS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+acos,
+acosf,
+acosl
+\(em arc cosine functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double acos(double \fIx\fP);
+float acosf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double acosl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the principal value of the arc cosine of
+their argument
+.IR x .
+The value of
+.IR x
+should be in the range [\(mi1,1].
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the arc
+cosine of
+.IR x ,
+in the range [0,\(*p] radians.
+.P
+For finite values of
+.IR x
+not in the range [\(mi1,1], a domain error shall occur, and
+either a NaN (if supported), or
+an implementation-defined value shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is +1, +0 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-Inf, a domain error shall occur, and a NaN shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The
+.IR x
+argument is finite and is not in the range [\(mi1,1],
+or is \(+-Inf.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcos\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/acosh.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/acosh.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f5cecba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/acosh.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ACOSH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+acosh,
+acoshf,
+acoshl
+\(em inverse hyperbolic cosine functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double acosh(double \fIx\fP);
+float acoshf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double acoshl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the inverse hyperbolic cosine of their
+argument
+.IR x .
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the inverse
+hyperbolic cosine of their argument.
+.P
+For finite values of
+.IR x
+< 1, a domain error shall occur, and
+either a NaN (if supported), or
+an implementation-defined value shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is +1, +0 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is +Inf, +Inf shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(miInf, a domain error shall occur, and a NaN shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The
+.IR x
+argument is finite and less than +1.0,
+or is \(miInf.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcosh\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/acosl.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/acosl.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dfba44b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/acosl.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ACOSL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+acosl
+\(em arc cosine functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+long double acosl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIacos\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/aio_cancel.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/aio_cancel.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..25b8388
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/aio_cancel.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
+'\" et
+.TH AIO_CANCEL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+aio_cancel
+\(em cancel an asynchronous I/O request
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <aio.h>
+.P
+int aio_cancel(int \fIfildes\fP, struct aiocb *\fIaiocbp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIaio_cancel\fR()
+function shall attempt to cancel one or more asynchronous I/O requests
+currently outstanding against file descriptor
+.IR fildes .
+The
+.IR aiocbp
+argument points to the asynchronous I/O control block for a particular
+request to be canceled. If
+.IR aiocbp
+is NULL, then all outstanding cancelable asynchronous I/O requests
+against
+.IR fildes
+shall be canceled.
+.P
+Normal asynchronous notification shall occur for asynchronous I/O
+operations that are successfully canceled. If there are requests that
+cannot be canceled, then the normal asynchronous completion process
+shall take place for those requests when they are completed.
+.P
+For requested operations that are successfully canceled, the associated
+error status shall be set to
+.BR [ECANCELED] 
+and the return status shall be \(mi1. For requested operations that are
+not successfully canceled, the
+.IR aiocbp
+shall not be modified by
+\fIaio_cancel\fR().
+.P
+If
+.IR aiocbp
+is not NULL, then if
+.IR fildes
+does not have the same value as the file descriptor with which the
+asynchronous operation was initiated, unspecified results occur.
+.P
+Which operations are cancelable is implementation-defined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIaio_cancel\fR()
+function shall return the value AIO_CANCELED
+if the requested operation(s) were canceled.
+The value AIO_NOTCANCELED
+shall be returned if at least one of the requested operation(s) cannot
+be canceled because it is in progress. In this case, the state of the
+other operations, if any, referenced in the call to
+\fIaio_cancel\fR()
+is not indicated by the return value of
+\fIaio_cancel\fR().
+The application may determine the state of affairs for these operations
+by using
+\fIaio_error\fR().
+The value AIO_ALLDONE
+is returned if all of the operations have already completed.
+Otherwise, the function shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIaio_cancel\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIaio_read\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_write\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<aio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/aio_error.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/aio_error.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..69a04fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/aio_error.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+'\" et
+.TH AIO_ERROR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+aio_error
+\(em retrieve errors status for an asynchronous I/O operation
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <aio.h>
+.P
+int aio_error(const struct aiocb *\fIaiocbp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIaio_error\fR()
+function shall return the error status associated with the
+.BR aiocb
+structure referenced by the
+.IR aiocbp
+argument. The error status for an asynchronous I/O operation is the
+.IR errno
+value that would be set by the corresponding
+\fIread\fR(),
+\fIwrite\fR(),
+\fIfdatasync\fR(),
+or
+\fIfsync\fR()
+operation. If the operation has not yet completed, then the error
+status shall be equal to
+.BR [EINPROGRESS] .
+.P
+If the
+.BR aiocb
+structure pointed to by
+.IR aiocbp
+is not associated with an operation that has been scheduled, the
+results are undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the asynchronous I/O operation has completed successfully, then 0
+shall be returned. If the asynchronous operation has completed
+unsuccessfully, then the error status, as described for
+\fIread\fR(),
+\fIwrite\fR(),
+\fIfdatasync\fR(),
+and
+\fIfsync\fR(),
+shall be returned. If the asynchronous I/O operation has not yet
+completed, then
+.BR [EINPROGRESS] 
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If the
+\fIaio_error\fR()
+function fails, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIaio_error\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR aiocbp
+argument does not refer to an asynchronous operation whose return
+status has not yet been retrieved.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIaio_cancel\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_fsync\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_read\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_return\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_write\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlio_listio\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlseek\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<aio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/aio_fsync.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/aio_fsync.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5b2435e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/aio_fsync.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,191 @@
+'\" et
+.TH AIO_FSYNC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+aio_fsync
+\(em asynchronous file synchronization
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <aio.h>
+.P
+int aio_fsync(int \fIop\fP, struct aiocb *\fIaiocbp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIaio_fsync\fR()
+function shall asynchronously perform a file synchronization operation,
+as specified by the
+.IR op
+argument, for I/O operations associated with the file indicated by the
+file descriptor
+.IR aio_fildes
+member of the
+.BR aiocb
+structure referenced by the
+.IR aiocbp
+argument and queued at the time of the call to
+\fIaio_fsync\fR().
+The function call shall return when the synchronization request has been
+initiated or queued to the file or device (even when the data cannot be
+synchronized immediately).
+.P
+If
+.IR op
+is O_DSYNC,
+all currently queued I/O operations shall be completed as if by a call to
+\fIfdatasync\fR();
+that is, as defined for synchronized I/O data integrity completion.
+.P
+If
+.IR op
+is O_SYNC,
+all currently queued I/O operations shall be completed as if by a call to
+\fIfsync\fR();
+that is, as defined for synchronized I/O file integrity completion.
+If the
+\fIaio_fsync\fR()
+function fails, or if the operation queued by
+\fIaio_fsync\fR()
+fails, then outstanding I/O operations are not guaranteed to have been
+completed.
+.P
+If
+\fIaio_fsync\fR()
+succeeds, then it is only the I/O that was queued at the time of the
+call to
+\fIaio_fsync\fR()
+that is guaranteed to be forced to the relevant completion state. The
+completion of subsequent I/O on the file descriptor is not guaranteed
+to be completed in a synchronized fashion.
+.P
+The
+.IR aiocbp
+argument refers to an asynchronous I/O control block. The
+.IR aiocbp
+value may be used as an argument to
+\fIaio_error\fR()
+and
+\fIaio_return\fR()
+in order to determine the error status and return status, respectively,
+of the asynchronous operation while it is proceeding. When the request
+is queued, the error status for the operation is
+.BR [EINPROGRESS] .
+When all data has been successfully transferred, the error status shall
+be reset to reflect the success or failure of the operation. If the
+operation does not complete successfully, the error status for the
+operation shall be set to indicate the error. The
+.IR aio_sigevent
+member determines the asynchronous notification to occur as specified
+in
+.IR "Section 2.4.1" ", " "Signal Generation and Delivery"
+when all operations have achieved synchronized I/O completion. All
+other members of the structure referenced by
+.IR aiocbp
+are ignored. If the control block referenced by
+.IR aiocbp
+becomes an illegal address prior to asynchronous I/O completion, then
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+If the
+\fIaio_fsync\fR()
+function fails or
+.IR aiocbp
+indicates an error condition, data is not guaranteed to have been
+successfully transferred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIaio_fsync\fR()
+function shall return the value 0 if the I/O operation is successfully
+queued; otherwise, the function shall return the value \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIaio_fsync\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The requested asynchronous operation was not queued due to
+temporary resource limitations.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR aio_fildes
+member of the
+.BR aiocb
+structure referenced by the
+.IR aiocbp
+argument is not a valid file descriptor open for writing.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+This implementation does not support synchronized I/O for this file.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR aio_fildes
+member of the
+.BR aiocb
+structure refers to a file on which an
+\fIfsync\fR()
+operation is not possible.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+A value of
+.IR op
+other than O_DSYNC or O_SYNC was specified, or O_DSYNC was specified and
+the implementation does not provide runtime support for the Synchronized
+Input and Output option, or O_SYNC was specified and the implementation
+does not provide runtime support for the File Synchronization option.
+.P
+In the event that any of the queued I/O operations fail,
+\fIaio_fsync\fR()
+shall return the error condition defined for
+\fIread\fR()
+and
+\fIwrite\fR().
+The error is returned in the error status for the asynchronous operation,
+which can be retrieved using
+\fIaio_error\fR().
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfdatasync\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfsync\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<aio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/aio_read.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/aio_read.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2ff7112
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/aio_read.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,208 @@
+'\" et
+.TH AIO_READ "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+aio_read
+\(em asynchronous read from a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <aio.h>
+.P
+int aio_read(struct aiocb *\fIaiocbp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIaio_read\fR()
+function shall read \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_nbytes\fR from the file
+associated with \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_fildes\fR into the buffer pointed
+to by \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_buf\fR. The function call shall return when
+the read request has been initiated or queued to the file or device
+(even when the data cannot be delivered immediately).
+.P
+If prioritized I/O is supported for this file, then the asynchronous
+operation shall be submitted at a priority equal to a base scheduling
+priority minus \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_reqprio\fR. If Thread Execution
+Scheduling is not supported, then the base scheduling priority is that
+of the calling process;
+.br
+otherwise, the base scheduling priority is that of the calling thread.
+.P
+The
+.IR aiocbp
+value may be used as an argument to
+\fIaio_error\fR()
+and
+\fIaio_return\fR()
+in order to determine the error status and return status, respectively,
+of the asynchronous operation while it is proceeding. If an error
+condition is encountered during queuing, the function call shall return
+without having initiated or queued the request. The requested
+operation takes place at the absolute position in the file as given by
+.IR aio_offset ,
+as if
+\fIlseek\fR()
+were called immediately prior to the operation with an
+.IR offset
+equal to
+.IR aio_offset
+and a
+.IR whence
+equal to SEEK_SET.
+After a successful call to enqueue an asynchronous I/O operation, the
+value of the file offset for the file is unspecified.
+.P
+The
+.IR aio_sigevent
+member specifies the notification which occurs when the request is
+completed.
+.P
+The \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_lio_opcode\fR field shall be ignored by
+\fIaio_read\fR().
+.P
+The
+.IR aiocbp
+argument points to an
+.BR aiocb
+structure. If the buffer pointed to by \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_buf\fR or
+the control block pointed to by
+.IR aiocbp
+becomes an illegal address prior to asynchronous I/O completion, then
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+Simultaneous asynchronous operations using the same
+.IR aiocbp
+produce undefined results.
+.P
+If synchronized I/O is enabled on the file associated with
+\fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_fildes\fR, the behavior of this function shall
+be according to the definitions of synchronized I/O data integrity
+completion and synchronized I/O file integrity completion.
+.P
+For any system action that changes the process memory space while an
+asynchronous I/O is outstanding to the address range being changed, the
+result of that action is undefined.
+.P
+For regular files, no data transfer shall occur past the offset maximum
+established in the open file description associated with
+\fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_fildes\fR.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIaio_read\fR()
+function shall return the value zero if the I/O operation is
+successfully queued; otherwise, the function shall return the value
+\(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIaio_read\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The requested asynchronous I/O operation was not queued due to system
+resource limitations.
+.P
+Each of the following conditions may be detected synchronously at the
+time of the call to
+\fIaio_read\fR(),
+or asynchronously. If any of the conditions below are detected
+synchronously, the
+\fIaio_read\fR()
+function shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to the corresponding value. If any of the conditions below are
+detected asynchronously, the return status of the asynchronous
+operation is set to \(mi1, and the error status of the asynchronous
+operation is set to the corresponding value.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_fildes\fP argument is not a valid file
+descriptor open for reading.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The file offset value implied by \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_offset\fR would
+be invalid,
+.br
+\fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_reqprio\fR is not a valid value,
+or \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_nbytes\fR is an invalid value.
+.P
+In the case that the
+\fIaio_read\fR()
+successfully queues the I/O operation but the operation is subsequently
+canceled or encounters an error, the return status of the asynchronous
+operation is one of the values normally returned by the
+\fIread\fR()
+function call. In addition, the error status of the asynchronous
+operation is set to one of the error statuses normally set by the
+\fIread\fR()
+function call, or one of the following values:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_fildes\fR argument is not a valid file
+descriptor open for reading.
+.TP
+.BR ECANCELED
+The requested I/O was canceled before the I/O completed due to an
+explicit
+\fIaio_cancel\fR()
+request.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The file offset value implied by \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_offset\fR would
+be invalid.
+.P
+The following condition may be detected synchronously or asynchronously:
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The file is a regular file, \fIaiobcp\fP\->\fIaio_nbytes\fR is greater
+than 0, and the starting offset in \fIaiobcp\fP\->\fIaio_offset\fR is
+before the end-of-file and is at or beyond the offset maximum in the
+open file description associated with \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_fildes\fR.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIaio_cancel\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_error\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlio_listio\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_return\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_write\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlseek\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<aio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/aio_return.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/aio_return.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9bfafbf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/aio_return.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+'\" et
+.TH AIO_RETURN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+aio_return
+\(em retrieve return status of an asynchronous I/O operation
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <aio.h>
+.P
+ssize_t aio_return(struct aiocb *\fIaiocbp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIaio_return\fR()
+function shall return the return status associated with the
+.BR aiocb
+structure referenced by the
+.IR aiocbp
+argument. The return status for an asynchronous I/O operation is the
+value that would be returned by the corresponding
+\fIread\fR(),
+\fIwrite\fR(),
+or
+\fIfsync\fR()
+function call. If the error status for the operation is equal to
+.BR [EINPROGRESS] ,
+then the return status for the operation is undefined. The
+\fIaio_return\fR()
+function may be called exactly once to retrieve the return status of a
+given asynchronous operation; thereafter, if the same
+.BR aiocb
+structure is used in a call to
+\fIaio_return\fR()
+or
+\fIaio_error\fR(),
+an error may be returned. When the
+.BR aiocb
+structure referred to by
+.IR aiocbp
+is used to submit another asynchronous operation, then
+\fIaio_return\fR()
+may be successfully used to retrieve the return status of that
+operation.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the asynchronous I/O operation has completed, then the return
+status, as described for
+\fIread\fR(),
+\fIwrite\fR(),
+and
+\fIfsync\fR(),
+shall be returned. If the asynchronous I/O operation has not yet
+completed, the results of
+\fIaio_return\fR()
+are undefined.
+.P
+If the
+\fIaio_return\fR()
+function fails, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIaio_return\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR aiocbp
+argument does not refer to an asynchronous operation whose return
+status has not yet been retrieved.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIaio_cancel\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_error\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_fsync\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_read\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_write\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlio_listio\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlseek\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<aio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/aio_suspend.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/aio_suspend.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fda1d0f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/aio_suspend.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+'\" et
+.TH AIO_SUSPEND "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+aio_suspend
+\(em wait for an asynchronous I/O request
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <aio.h>
+.P
+int aio_suspend(const struct aiocb *const \fIlist\fP[], int \fInent\fP,
+    const struct timespec *\fItimeout\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIaio_suspend\fR()
+function shall suspend the calling thread until at least one of the
+asynchronous I/O operations referenced by the
+.IR list
+argument has completed, until a signal interrupts the function, or, if
+.IR timeout
+is not NULL, until the time interval specified by
+.IR timeout
+has passed. If any of the
+.BR aiocb
+structures in the list correspond to completed asynchronous I/O
+operations (that is, the error status for the operation is not equal to
+.BR [EINPROGRESS] )
+at the time of the call, the function shall return without suspending
+the calling thread. The
+.IR list
+argument is an array of pointers to asynchronous I/O control blocks.
+The
+.IR nent
+argument indicates the number of elements in the array. Each
+.BR aiocb
+structure pointed to has been used in initiating an asynchronous
+I/O request via
+\fIaio_read\fR(),
+\fIaio_write\fR(),
+or
+\fIlio_listio\fR().
+This array may contain null pointers, which are ignored. If this array
+contains pointers that refer to
+.BR aiocb
+structures that have not been used in submitting asynchronous I/O, the
+effect is undefined.
+.P
+If the time interval indicated in the
+.BR timespec
+structure pointed to by
+.IR timeout
+passes before any of the I/O operations referenced by
+.IR list
+are completed, then
+\fIaio_suspend\fR()
+shall return with an error.
+If the Monotonic Clock option is supported, the clock that shall be
+used to measure this time interval shall be the CLOCK_MONOTONIC clock.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the
+\fIaio_suspend\fR()
+function returns after one or more asynchronous I/O operations have
+completed, the function shall return zero. Otherwise, the function shall
+return a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.P
+The application may determine which asynchronous I/O completed by
+scanning the associated error and return status using
+\fIaio_error\fR()
+and
+\fIaio_return\fR(),
+respectively.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIaio_suspend\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+No asynchronous I/O indicated in the list referenced by
+.IR list
+completed in the time interval indicated by
+.IR timeout .
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal interrupted the
+\fIaio_suspend\fR()
+function. Note that, since each asynchronous I/O operation may
+possibly provoke a signal when it completes, this error return may be
+caused by the completion of one (or more) of the very I/O operations
+being awaited.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIaio_read\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_write\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlio_listio\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<aio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/aio_write.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/aio_write.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e3bbb1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/aio_write.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,218 @@
+'\" et
+.TH AIO_WRITE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+aio_write
+\(em asynchronous write to a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <aio.h>
+.P
+int aio_write(struct aiocb *\fIaiocbp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIaio_write\fR()
+function shall write \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_nbytes\fR to the file
+associated with \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_fildes\fR from the buffer pointed
+to by \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_buf\fR. The function shall return when
+the write request has been initiated or, at a minimum, queued to the
+file or device.
+.P
+If prioritized I/O is supported for this file, then the asynchronous
+operation shall be submitted at a priority equal to a base scheduling
+priority minus \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_reqprio\fR. If Thread Execution
+Scheduling is not supported, then the base scheduling priority is that
+of the calling process;
+.br
+otherwise, the base scheduling priority is that of the calling thread.
+.P
+The
+.IR aiocbp
+argument may be used as an argument to
+\fIaio_error\fR()
+and
+\fIaio_return\fR()
+in order to determine the error status and return status, respectively,
+of the asynchronous operation while it is proceeding.
+.P
+The
+.IR aiocbp
+argument points to an
+.BR aiocb
+structure. If the buffer pointed to by \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_buf\fR or
+the control block pointed to by
+.IR aiocbp
+becomes an illegal address prior to asynchronous I/O completion, then
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+If O_APPEND is not set for the file descriptor
+.IR aio_fildes ,
+then the requested operation shall take place at the absolute
+position in the file as given by
+.IR aio_offset ,
+as if
+\fIlseek\fR()
+were called immediately prior to the operation with an
+.IR offset
+equal to
+.IR aio_offset
+and a
+.IR whence
+equal to SEEK_SET.
+If O_APPEND is set for the file descriptor, or if
+.IR aio_fildes
+is associated with a device that is incapable of seeking, write operations
+append to the file in the same order as the calls were made, except
+under circumstances described in
+.IR "Section 2.8.2" ", " "Asynchronous I/O".
+After a successful call to enqueue an asynchronous I/O operation, the
+value of the file offset for the file is unspecified.
+.P
+The
+.IR aio_sigevent
+member specifies the notification which occurs when the request is
+completed.
+.P
+The \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_lio_opcode\fR field shall be ignored by
+\fIaio_write\fR().
+.P
+Simultaneous asynchronous operations using the same
+.IR aiocbp
+produce undefined results.
+.P
+If synchronized I/O is enabled on the file associated with
+\fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_fildes\fR, the behavior of this function shall
+be according to the definitions of synchronized I/O data integrity
+completion, and synchronized I/O file integrity completion.
+.P
+For any system action that changes the process memory space while an
+asynchronous I/O is outstanding to the address range being changed, the
+result of that action is undefined.
+.P
+For regular files, no data transfer shall occur past the offset maximum
+established in the open file description associated with
+\fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_fildes\fR.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIaio_write\fR()
+function shall return the value zero if the I/O operation is
+successfully queued; otherwise, the function shall return the value
+\(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIaio_write\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The requested asynchronous I/O operation was not queued due to system
+resource limitations.
+.P
+Each of the following conditions may be detected synchronously at the
+time of the call to
+\fIaio_write\fR(),
+or asynchronously. If any of the conditions below are detected
+synchronously, the
+\fIaio_write\fR()
+function shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to the corresponding value. If any of the conditions below are detected
+asynchronously, the return status of the asynchronous operation shall
+be set to \(mi1, and the error status of the asynchronous operation
+is set to the corresponding value.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_fildes\fR argument is not a valid file
+descriptor open for writing.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The file offset value implied by \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_offset\fR would
+be invalid,
+.br
+\fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_reqprio\fR is not a valid value,
+or \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_nbytes\fR is an invalid value.
+.P
+In the case that the
+\fIaio_write\fR()
+successfully queues the I/O operation, the return status of the
+asynchronous operation shall be one of the values normally returned
+by the
+\fIwrite\fR()
+function call. If the operation is successfully queued but is
+subsequently canceled or encounters an error, the error status for the
+asynchronous operation contains one of the values normally set by the
+\fIwrite\fR()
+function call, or one of the following:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_fildes\fR argument is not a valid file
+descriptor open for writing.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The file offset value implied by \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_offset\fR would
+be invalid.
+.TP
+.BR ECANCELED
+The requested I/O was canceled before the I/O completed due to an
+explicit
+\fIaio_cancel\fR()
+request.
+.P
+The following condition may be detected synchronously or asynchronously:
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+The file is a regular file, \fIaiobcp\fP\->\fIaio_nbytes\fR is greater
+than 0, and the starting offset in \fIaiobcp\fP\->\fIaio_offset\fR is
+at or beyond the offset maximum in the open file description associated
+with \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_fildes\fR.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.8.2" ", " "Asynchronous I/O",
+.IR "\fIaio_cancel\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_error\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_read\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_return\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlio_listio\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlseek\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<aio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/alarm.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/alarm.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..00e93c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/alarm.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ALARM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+alarm
+\(em schedule an alarm signal
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+unsigned alarm(unsigned \fIseconds\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIalarm\fR()
+function shall cause the system to generate a SIGALRM signal for the
+process after the number of realtime seconds specified by
+.IR seconds
+have elapsed. Processor scheduling delays may prevent the process from
+handling the signal as soon as it is generated.
+.P
+If
+.IR seconds
+is 0, a pending alarm request, if any, is canceled.
+.P
+Alarm requests are not stacked; only one SIGALRM generation can be
+scheduled in this manner. If the SIGALRM signal has not yet been
+generated, the call shall result in rescheduling the time at which the
+SIGALRM signal is generated.
+.P
+Interactions between
+\fIalarm\fR()
+and
+\fIsetitimer\fR()
+are unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If there is a previous
+\fIalarm\fR()
+request with time remaining,
+\fIalarm\fR()
+shall return a non-zero value that is the number of seconds until the
+previous request would have generated a SIGALRM signal. Otherwise,
+\fIalarm\fR()
+shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIalarm\fR()
+function is always successful, and no return value is reserved to
+indicate an error.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIfork\fR()
+function clears pending alarms in the child process. A new process
+image created by one of the
+.IR exec
+functions inherits the time left to an alarm signal in the
+image of the old process.
+.P
+Application developers should note that the type of the argument
+.IR seconds
+and the return value of
+\fIalarm\fR()
+is
+.BR unsigned .
+That means that a Strictly Conforming POSIX System Interfaces
+Application cannot pass a value greater than the minimum guaranteed
+value for
+{UINT_MAX},
+which the ISO\ C standard
+sets as 65\|535, and any application passing a larger value is
+restricting its portability. A different type was considered, but
+historical implementations, including those with a 16-bit
+.BR int
+type, consistently use either
+.BR unsigned
+or
+.BR int .
+.P
+Application developers should be aware of possible interactions when
+the same process uses both the
+\fIalarm\fR()
+and
+\fIsleep\fR()
+functions.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Many historical implementations (including Version 7
+and System V) allow an alarm to occur up to a second early.
+Other implementations allow alarms up to half a second or one clock
+tick early or do not
+allow them to occur early at all. The latter is considered most
+appropriate, since it gives the most predictable behavior, especially
+since the signal can always be delayed for an indefinite amount of time
+due to scheduling. Applications can thus choose the
+.IR seconds
+argument as the minimum amount of time they wish to have elapse before
+the signal.
+.P
+The term ``realtime'' here and elsewhere (\c
+\fIsleep\fR(),
+\fItimes\fR())
+is intended to mean ``wall clock'' time as common English usage, and
+has nothing to do with ``realtime operating systems''. It is in
+contrast to \fIvirtual time\fP, which could be misinterpreted if just
+\fItime\fP were used.
+.P
+In some implementations, including 4.3 BSD, very large values of the
+.IR seconds
+argument are silently rounded down to an implementation-specific maximum
+value. This maximum is large enough (to the order of several months)
+that the effect is not noticeable.
+.P
+There were two possible choices for alarm generation in multi-threaded
+applications: generation for the calling thread or generation for the
+process. The first option would not have been particularly useful
+since the alarm state is maintained on a per-process basis and the
+alarm that is established by the last invocation of
+\fIalarm\fR()
+is the only one that would be active.
+.P
+Furthermore, allowing generation of an asynchronous signal for a thread
+would have introduced an exception to the overall signal model. This
+requires a compelling reason in order to be justified.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIalarm\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetitimer\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpause\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsleep\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/alphasort.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/alphasort.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0865014
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/alphasort.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,266 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ALPHASORT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+alphasort, scandir
+\(em scan a directory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <dirent.h>
+.P
+int alphasort(const struct dirent **\fId1\fP, const struct dirent **\fId2\fP);
+int scandir(const char *\fIdir\fP, struct dirent ***\fInamelist\fP,
+    int (*\fIsel\fP)(const struct dirent *),
+    int (*\fIcompar\fP)(const struct dirent **, const struct dirent **));
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIalphasort\fR()
+function can be used as the comparison function for the
+\fIscandir\fR()
+function to sort the directory entries,
+.IR d1
+and
+.IR d2 ,
+into alphabetical order. Sorting happens as if by calling the
+\fIstrcoll\fR()
+function on the
+.IR d_name
+element of the
+.BR dirent
+structures passed as the two parameters. If the
+\fIstrcoll\fR()
+function fails, the return value of
+\fIalphasort\fR()
+is unspecified.
+.P
+The
+\fIalphasort\fR()
+function shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful. Since no return value is reserved to indicate an error,
+an application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0, then call
+\fIalphasort\fR(),
+then check
+.IR errno .
+.P
+The
+\fIscandir\fR()
+function shall scan the directory
+.IR dir ,
+calling the function referenced by
+.IR sel
+on each directory entry. Entries for which the function referenced by
+.IR sel
+returns non-zero shall be stored in strings allocated as if by
+a call to
+\fImalloc\fR(),
+and sorted as if by a call to
+\fIqsort\fR()
+with the comparison function
+.IR compar ,
+except that
+.IR compar
+need not provide total ordering. The strings are collected in
+array
+.IR namelist
+which shall be allocated as if by a call to
+\fImalloc\fR().
+If
+.IR sel
+is a null pointer, all entries shall be selected.
+If the comparison function
+.IR compar
+does not provide total ordering, the order in which the directory
+entries are stored is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIalphasort\fR()
+function shall return an integer greater than, equal to, or less than 0,
+according to whether the name of the directory entry pointed to by
+.IR d1
+is lexically greater than, equal to, or less than the directory pointed
+to by
+.IR d2
+when both are interpreted as appropriate to the current locale. There
+is no return value reserved to indicate an error.
+.P
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIscandir\fR()
+function shall return the number of entries in the array and a pointer
+to the array through the parameter
+.IR namelist .
+Otherwise, the
+\fIscandir\fR()
+function shall return \(mi1.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIscandir\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied for the component of the path prefix of
+.IR dir
+or read permission is denied for
+.IR dir .
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR dir
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR dir
+does not name an existing directory or
+.IR dir
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient storage space is available.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of
+.IR dir
+names an existing file that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link
+to a directory.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+One of the values to be returned or passed to a callback function cannot
+be represented correctly.
+.P
+The
+\fIscandir\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR dir
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+Too many files are currently open in the system.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+An example to print the files in the current directory:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <dirent.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+\&...
+struct dirent **namelist;
+int i,n;
+.P
+    n = scandir(".", &namelist, 0, alphasort);
+    if (n < 0)
+        perror("scandir");
+    else {
+        for (i = 0; i < n; i++) {
+            printf("%s\en", namelist[i]->d_name);
+            free(namelist[i]);
+            }
+        }
+    free(namelist);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If
+.IR dir
+contains filenames that do not form character strings, or which contain
+characters outside the domain of the collating sequence of the current
+locale, the
+\fIalphasort\fR()
+function need not provide a total ordering. This condition is not possible
+if all filenames within the directory consist only of characters from
+the portable filename character set.
+.P
+The
+\fIscandir\fR()
+function may allocate dynamic storage during its operation. If
+\fIscandir\fR()
+is forcibly terminated, such as by
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+or
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR()
+being executed by the function pointed to by
+.IR sel
+or
+.IR compar ,
+or by an interrupt routine,
+\fIscandir\fR()
+does not have a chance to free that storage, so it remains permanently
+allocated. A safe way to handle interrupts is to store the fact that
+an interrupt has occurred, then wait until
+\fIscandir\fR()
+returns to act on the interrupt.
+.P
+For functions that allocate memory as if by
+\fImalloc\fR(),
+the application should release such memory when it is no longer
+required by a call to
+\fIfree\fR().
+For
+\fIscandir\fR(),
+this is
+.IR namelist
+(including all of the individual strings in
+.IR namelist ).
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIqsort\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrcoll\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<dirent.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/asctime.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/asctime.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7ef2731
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/asctime.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,197 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ASCTIME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+asctime,
+asctime_r
+\(em convert date and time to a string
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+char *asctime(const struct tm *\fItimeptr\fP);
+char *asctime_r(const struct tm *restrict \fItm\fP, char *restrict \fIbuf\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIasctime\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIasctime\fR()
+function shall convert the broken-down time in the structure pointed
+to by
+.IR timeptr
+into a string in the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+Sun Sep 16 01:03:52 1973\en\e0
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+using the equivalent of the following algorithm:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+char *asctime(const struct tm *timeptr)
+{
+    static char wday_name[7][3] = {
+        "Sun", "Mon", "Tue", "Wed", "Thu", "Fri", "Sat"
+    };
+    static char mon_name[12][3] = {
+        "Jan", "Feb", "Mar", "Apr", "May", "Jun",
+        "Jul", "Aug", "Sep", "Oct", "Nov", "Dec"
+    };
+    static char result[26];
+.P
+    sprintf(result, "%.3s %.3s%3d %.2d:%.2d:%.2d %d\en",
+        wday_name[timeptr->tm_wday],
+        mon_name[timeptr->tm_mon],
+        timeptr->tm_mday, timeptr->tm_hour,
+        timeptr->tm_min, timeptr->tm_sec,
+        1900 + timeptr->tm_year);
+    return result;
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+However, the behavior is undefined if \fItimeptr\fR\->\fItm_wday\fR or
+\fItimeptr\fR\->\fItm_mon\fR are not within the normal ranges as
+defined in
+.IR <time.h> ,
+or if \fItimeptr\fR\->\fItm_year\fR exceeds
+{INT_MAX}\(mi1990,
+or if the above algorithm would attempt to generate more than 26 bytes
+of output (including the terminating null).
+.P
+The
+.BR tm
+structure is defined in the
+.IR <time.h> 
+header.
+.P
+The
+\fIasctime\fR(),
+\fIctime\fR(),
+\fIgmtime\fR(),
+and
+\fIlocaltime\fR()
+functions shall return values in one of two static objects: a
+broken-down time structure and an array of type
+.BR char .
+Execution of any of the functions may overwrite the information
+returned in either of these objects by any of the other functions.
+.P
+The
+\fIasctime\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.P
+The
+\fIasctime_r\fR()
+function shall convert the broken-down time in the structure pointed to
+by
+.IR tm
+into a string (of the same form as that returned by
+\fIasctime\fR(),
+and with the same undefined behavior when input or output is out of
+range) that is placed in the user-supplied buffer pointed to by
+.IR buf
+(which shall contain at least 26 bytes) and then return
+.IR buf .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIasctime\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the string.
+If the function is unsuccessful, it shall return NULL.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIasctime_r\fR()
+shall return a pointer to a character string containing the date and
+time. This string is pointed to by the argument
+.IR buf .
+If the function is unsuccessful, it shall return NULL.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+These functions are included only for compatibility with older
+implementations. They have undefined behavior if the resulting string
+would be too long, so the use of these functions should be
+discouraged. On implementations that do not detect output string
+length overflow, it is possible to overflow the output buffers in such
+a way as to cause applications to fail, or possible system security
+violations. Also, these functions do not support localized date and
+time formats. To avoid these problems, applications should use
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+to generate strings from broken-down times.
+.P
+Values for the broken-down time structure can be obtained by calling
+\fIgmtime\fR()
+or
+\fIlocaltime\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIasctime_r\fR()
+function is thread-safe and shall return values in a user-supplied
+buffer instead of possibly using a static data area that may be
+overwritten by each call.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The standard developers decided to mark the
+\fIasctime\fR()
+and
+\fIasctime_r\fR()
+functions obsolescent even though
+\fIasctime\fR()
+is in the ISO\ C standard due to the possibility of buffer overflow. The ISO\ C standard
+also provides the
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+function which can be used to avoid these problems.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+These functions may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIclock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdifftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgmtime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlocaltime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImktime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrptime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIutime\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/asin.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/asin.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..815fbbc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/asin.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ASIN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+asin,
+asinf,
+asinl
+\(em arc sine function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double asin(double \fIx\fP);
+float asinf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double asinl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the principal value of the arc sine of
+their argument
+.IR x .
+The value of
+.IR x
+should be in the range [\(mi1,1].
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the arc sine
+of
+.IR x ,
+in the range [\(mi\(*p/2,\(*p/2] radians.
+.P
+For finite values of
+.IR x
+not in the range [\(mi1,1], a domain error shall occur, and
+either a NaN (if supported), or
+an implementation-defined value shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-Inf, a domain error shall occur, and a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is subnormal, a range error may occur
+.br
+and
+.IR x
+should be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is not returned,
+\fIasin\fR(),
+\fIasinf\fR(),
+and
+\fIasinl\fR()
+shall return an implementation-defined value no greater in magnitude
+than DBL_MIN, FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN, respectively.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The
+.IR x
+argument is finite and is not in the range [\(mi1,1],
+or is \(+-Inf.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is subnormal.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsin\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/asinh.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/asinh.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c19fe56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/asinh.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ASINH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+asinh,
+asinhf,
+asinhl
+\(em inverse hyperbolic sine functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double asinh(double \fIx\fP);
+float asinhf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double asinhl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the inverse hyperbolic sine of their
+argument
+.IR x .
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the inverse
+hyperbolic sine of their argument.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0, or \(+-Inf,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is subnormal, a range error may occur
+.br
+and
+.IR x
+should be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is not returned,
+\fIasinh\fR(),
+\fIasinhf\fR(),
+and
+\fIasinhl\fR()
+shall return an implementation-defined value no greater in magnitude
+than DBL_MIN, FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN, respectively.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is subnormal.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsinh\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/asinl.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/asinl.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7bdd691
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/asinl.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ASINL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+asinl
+\(em arc sine function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+long double asinl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIasin\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/assert.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/assert.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5d3c7ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/assert.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ASSERT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+assert
+\(em insert program diagnostics
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <assert.h>
+.P
+void assert(scalar \fIexpression\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIassert\fR()
+macro shall insert diagnostics into programs; it shall expand to a
+.BR void
+expression. When it is executed, if
+.IR expression
+(which shall have a
+.BR scalar
+type) is false (that is, compares equal to 0),
+\fIassert\fR()
+shall write information about the particular call that failed on
+.IR stderr
+and shall call
+\fIabort\fR().
+.P
+The information written about the call that failed shall include the
+text of the argument, the name of the source file, the source file line
+number, and the name of the enclosing function; the latter are,
+respectively, the values of the preprocessing macros _\|_FILE_\|_ and
+_\|_LINE_\|_
+and of the identifier _\|_func_\|_.
+.P
+Forcing a definition of the name NDEBUG,
+either from the compiler command line or with the preprocessor control
+statement
+.BR #define
+NDEBUG ahead of the
+.BR #include
+.IR <assert.h> 
+statement, shall stop assertions from being compiled into the program.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIassert\fR()
+macro shall not return a value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIabort\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstdin\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<assert.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atan.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atan.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5860afc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atan.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ATAN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+atan,
+atanf,
+atanl
+\(em arc tangent function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double atan(double \fIx\fP);
+float atanf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double atanl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the principal value of the arc tangent of
+their argument
+.IR x .
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the arc
+tangent of
+.IR x
+in the range [\(mi\(*p/2,\(*p/2] radians.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-Inf, \(+-\(*p/2 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is subnormal, a range error may occur
+.br
+and
+.IR x
+should be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is not returned,
+\fIatan\fR(),
+\fIatanf\fR(),
+and
+\fIatanl\fR()
+shall return an implementation-defined value no greater in magnitude
+than DBL_MIN, FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN, respectively.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is subnormal.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIatan2\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItan\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atan2.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atan2.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..643a33c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atan2.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,239 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ATAN2 "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+atan2,
+atan2f,
+atan2l
+\(em arc tangent functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double atan2(double \fIy\fP, double \fIx\fP);
+float atan2f(float \fIy\fP, float \fIx\fP);
+long double atan2l(long double \fIy\fP, long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the principal value of the arc tangent of
+.IR y /\c
+.IR x ,
+using the signs of both arguments to determine the quadrant of the
+return value.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the arc
+tangent of
+.IR y /\c
+.IR x
+in the range [\(mi\(*p,\(*p] radians.
+.P
+If
+.IR y
+is \(+-0 and
+.IR x
+is < 0, \(+-\(*p shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR y
+is \(+-0 and
+.IR x
+is > 0, \(+-0 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR y
+is < 0 and
+.IR x
+is \(+-0, \(mi\(*p/2 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR y
+is > 0 and
+.IR x
+is \(+-0, \(*p/2 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is 0, a pole error shall not occur.
+.P
+If either
+.IR x
+or
+.IR y
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow, a range error may occur, and
+\fIatan\fR(),
+\fIatan2f\fR(),
+and
+\fIatan2l\fR()
+shall return an implementation-defined value no greater in magnitude
+than DBL_MIN, FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN, respectively.
+.P
+If the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option is supported,
+.IR y /\c
+.IR x
+should be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR y
+is \(+-0 and
+.IR x
+is \(mi0, \(+-\(*p shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR y
+is \(+-0 and
+.IR x
+is +0, \(+-0 shall be returned.
+.P
+For finite values of \(+-\c
+.IR y
+> 0, if
+.IR x
+is \(miInf, \(+-\(*p shall be returned.
+.P
+For finite values of \(+-\c
+.IR y
+> 0, if
+.IR x
+is +Inf, \(+-0 shall be returned.
+.P
+For finite values of
+.IR x ,
+if
+.IR y
+is \(+-Inf, \(+-\(*p/2 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR y
+is \(+-Inf and
+.IR x
+is \(miInf, \(+-3\(*p/4 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR y
+is \(+-Inf and
+.IR x
+is +Inf, \(+-\(*p/4 shall be returned.
+.P
+If both arguments are 0, a domain error shall not occur.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result underflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Converting Cartesian to Polar Coordinates System"
+.P
+The function below uses
+\fIatan2\fR()
+to convert a 2d vector expressed in cartesian coordinates
+(\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) to the polar coordinates (\fIrho\fR,\fItheta\fR).
+There are other ways to compute the angle
+.IR theta ,
+using
+\fIasin\fR()
+\fIacos\fR(),
+or
+\fIatan\fR().
+However,
+\fIatan2\fR()
+presents here two advantages:
+.IP " *" 4
+The angle's quadrant is automatically determined.
+.IP " *" 4
+The singular cases (0,\fIy\fR) are taken into account.
+.P
+Finally, this example uses
+\fIhypot\fR()
+rather than
+\fIsqrt\fR()
+since it is better for special cases; see
+\fIhypot\fR()
+for more information.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+void
+cartesian_to_polar(const double x, const double y,
+                   double *rho, double *theta
+    )
+{
+    *rho   = hypot (x,y); /* better than sqrt(x*x+y*y) */
+    *theta = atan2 (y,x);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIacos\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIasin\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIatan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIhypot\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsqrt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItan\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atanf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atanf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..acfc87a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atanf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ATANF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+atanf
+\(em arc tangent function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+float atanf(float \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIatan\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atanh.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atanh.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6ecdf2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atanh.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,174 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ATANH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+atanh,
+atanhf,
+atanhl
+\(em inverse hyperbolic tangent functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double atanh(double \fIx\fP);
+float atanhf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double atanhl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the inverse hyperbolic tangent of their
+argument
+.IR x .
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the inverse
+hyperbolic tangent of their argument.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-1, a pole error shall occur, and
+\fIatanh\fR(),
+\fIatanhf\fR(),
+and
+\fIatanhl\fR()
+shall return the value of the macro HUGE_VAL, HUGE_VALF, and HUGE_VALL,
+respectively, with the same sign as the correct value of the function.
+.P
+For finite |\fIx\fR|>1, a domain error shall occur, and
+either a NaN (if supported), or
+an implementation-defined value shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-Inf, a domain error shall occur, and a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is subnormal, a range error may occur
+.br
+and
+.IR x
+should be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is not returned,
+\fIatanh\fR(),
+\fIatanhf\fR(),
+and
+\fIatanhl\fR()
+shall return an implementation-defined value no greater in magnitude
+than DBL_MIN, FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN, respectively.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The
+.IR x
+argument is finite and not in the range [\(mi1,1],
+or is \(+-Inf.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.IP "Pole\ Error" 12
+The
+.IR x
+argument is \(+-1.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the divide-by-zero floating-point exception shall be
+raised.
+.RE
+.br
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is subnormal.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItanh\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atanl.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atanl.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c68741c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atanl.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ATANL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+atanl
+\(em arc tangent function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+long double atanl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIatan\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atexit.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atexit.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..144837c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atexit.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ATEXIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+atexit
+\(em register a function to run at process termination
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+int atexit(void (*\fIfunc\fP)(void));
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIatexit\fR()
+function shall register the function pointed to by
+.IR func ,
+to be called without arguments at normal program termination. At normal
+program termination, all functions registered by the
+\fIatexit\fR()
+function shall be called, in the reverse order of their registration,
+except that a function is called after any previously registered
+functions that had already been called at the time it was registered.
+Normal termination occurs either by a call to
+\fIexit\fR()
+or a return from
+\fImain\fR().
+.P
+At least 32 functions can be registered with
+\fIatexit\fR().
+.P
+After a successful call to any of the
+.IR exec
+functions, any functions previously registered by
+\fIatexit\fR()
+shall no longer be registered.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIatexit\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, it shall return a non-zero value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The functions registered by a call to
+\fIatexit\fR()
+must return to ensure that all registered functions are called.
+.P
+The application should call
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+to obtain the value of
+{ATEXIT_MAX},
+the number of functions that can be registered. There is no way for an
+application to tell how many functions have already been registered
+with
+\fIatexit\fR().
+.P
+Since the behavior is undefined if the
+\fIexit\fR()
+function is called more than once, portable applications calling
+\fIatexit\fR()
+must ensure that the
+\fIexit\fR()
+function is not called at normal process termination when all functions
+registered by the
+\fIatexit\fR()
+function are called.
+.P
+All functions registered by the
+\fIatexit\fR()
+function are called at normal process termination, which occurs by a
+call to the
+\fIexit\fR()
+function or a return from
+\fImain\fR()
+or on the last thread termination, when the behavior is as if the
+implementation called
+\fIexit\fR()
+with a zero argument at thread termination time.
+.P
+If, at normal process termination, a function registered by the
+\fIatexit\fR()
+function is called and a portable application needs to stop further
+\fIexit\fR()
+processing, it must call the
+\fI_exit\fR()
+function or the
+\fI_Exit\fR()
+function or one of the functions which cause abnormal process
+termination.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atof.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atof.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1440493
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atof.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ATOF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+atof
+\(em convert a string to a double-precision number
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+double atof(const char *\fIstr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The call
+.IR atof ( str )
+shall be equivalent to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+strtod(\fIstr\fP,(char **)NULL),
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+except that the handling of errors may differ. If the value cannot be
+represented, the behavior is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIatof\fR()
+function shall return the converted value if the value can be
+represented.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIatof\fR()
+function is subsumed by
+\fIstrtod\fR()
+but is retained because it is used extensively in existing code. If the
+number is not known to be in range,
+\fIstrtod\fR()
+should be used because
+\fIatof\fR()
+is not required to perform any error checking.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrtod\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atoi.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atoi.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5535ea6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atoi.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ATOI "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+atoi
+\(em convert a string to an integer
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+int atoi(const char *\fIstr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The call
+.IR atoi ( str )
+shall be equivalent to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(int) strtol(str, (char **)NULL, 10)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+except that the handling of errors may differ. If the value cannot be
+represented, the behavior is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIatoi\fR()
+function shall return the converted value if the value can be
+represented.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Converting an Argument"
+.P
+The following example checks for proper usage of the program. If there
+is an argument and the decimal conversion of this argument (obtained
+using
+\fIatoi\fR())
+is greater than 0, then the program has a valid number of minutes to
+wait for an event.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+int minutes_to_event;
+\&...
+if (argc < 2 || ((minutes_to_event = atoi (argv[1]))) <= 0) {
+   fprintf(stderr, "Usage: %s minutes\en", argv[0]); exit(1);
+}
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIatoi\fR()
+function is subsumed by
+\fIstrtol\fR()
+but is retained because it is used extensively in existing code. If the
+number is not known to be in range,
+\fIstrtol\fR()
+should be used because
+\fIatoi\fR()
+is not required to perform any error checking.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrtol\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atol.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atol.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..65c7bb9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/atol.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ATOL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+atol,
+atoll
+\(em convert a string to a long integer
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+long atol(const char *\fIstr\fP);
+long long atoll(const char *\fInptr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The call
+.IR atol ( str )
+shall be equivalent to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+strtol(str, (char **)NULL, 10)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The call
+.IR atoll ( nptr )
+shall be equivalent to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+strtoll(nptr, (char **)NULL, 10)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+except that the handling of errors may differ. If the value cannot be
+represented, the behavior is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the converted value if the value can be
+represented.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIatol\fR()
+function is subsumed by
+\fIstrtol\fR()
+but is retained because it is used extensively in existing code. If the
+number is not known to be in range,
+\fIstrtol\fR()
+should be used because
+\fIatol\fR()
+is not required to perform any error checking.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrtol\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/basename.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/basename.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9d81c23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/basename.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
+'\" et
+.TH BASENAME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+basename
+\(em return the last component of a pathname
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <libgen.h>
+.P
+char *basename(char *\fIpath\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIbasename\fR()
+function shall take the pathname pointed to by
+.IR path
+and return a pointer to the final component of the pathname, deleting
+any trailing
+.BR '/' 
+characters.
+.P
+If the string pointed to by
+.IR path
+consists entirely of the
+.BR '/' 
+character,
+\fIbasename\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the string
+.BR \(dq/\(dq .
+If the string pointed to by
+.IR path
+is exactly
+.BR \(dq//\(dq ,
+it is implementation-defined whether
+.BR '/' 
+or
+.BR \(dq//\(dq 
+is returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR path
+is a null pointer or points to an empty string,
+\fIbasename\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the string
+.BR \(dq.\(dq .
+.P
+The
+\fIbasename\fR()
+function may modify the string pointed to by
+.IR path ,
+and may return a pointer to internal storage. The returned pointer might
+be invalidated or the storage might be overwritten by a subsequent call to
+\fIbasename\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIbasename\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIbasename\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to the final component of
+.IR path .
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Using basename(\|)"
+.P
+The following program fragment returns a pointer to the value
+.IR lib ,
+which is the base name of
+.BR /usr/lib .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <libgen.h>
+\&...
+char *name = "/usr/lib";
+char *base;
+.P
+base = basename(name);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Sample Input and Output Strings for basename(\|)"
+.P
+In the following table, the input string is the value pointed to by
+.IR path ,
+and the output string is the return value of the
+\fIbasename\fR()
+function.
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB
+lf5 | lf5.
+Input String!Output String
+_
+"/usr/lib"!"lib"
+"/usr/"!"usr"
+"/"!"/"
+"///"!"/"
+"//usr//lib//"!"lib"
+.TE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIdirname\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<libgen.h>\fP"
+.P
+The Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIbasename\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/bind.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/bind.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8af6d9e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/bind.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,290 @@
+'\" et
+.TH BIND "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+bind
+\(em bind a name to a socket
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+.P
+int bind(int \fIsocket\fP, const struct sockaddr *\fIaddress\fP,
+    socklen_t \fIaddress_len\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIbind\fR()
+function shall assign a local socket address
+.IR address
+to a socket identified by descriptor
+.IR socket
+that has no local socket address assigned. Sockets created with the
+\fIsocket\fR()
+function are initially unnamed; they are identified only by their
+address family.
+.P
+The
+\fIbind\fR()
+function takes the following arguments:
+.IP "\fIsocket\fR" 12
+Specifies the file descriptor of the socket to be bound.
+.IP "\fIaddress\fR" 12
+Points to a
+.BR sockaddr
+structure containing the address to be bound to the socket. The length
+and format of the address depend on the address family of the socket.
+.IP "\fIaddress_len\fR" 12
+Specifies the length of the
+.BR sockaddr
+structure pointed to by the
+.IR address
+argument.
+.P
+The socket specified by
+.IR socket
+may require the process to have appropriate privileges to use the
+\fIbind\fR()
+function.
+.P
+If the address family of the socket is AF_UNIX and the pathname in
+.IR address
+names a symbolic link,
+\fIbind\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EADDRINUSE] .
+.P
+If the socket address cannot be assigned immediately and O_NONBLOCK is
+set for the file descriptor for the socket,
+\fIbind\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EINPROGRESS] ,
+but the assignment request shall not be aborted, and the assignment
+shall be completed asynchronously. Subsequent calls to
+\fIbind\fR()
+for the same socket, before the assignment is completed, shall fail
+and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EALREADY] .
+.P
+When the assignment has been performed asynchronously,
+\fIpselect\fR(),
+\fIselect\fR(),
+and
+\fIpoll\fR()
+shall indicate that the file descriptor for the socket is ready for
+reading and writing.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIbind\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIbind\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EADDRINUSE
+The specified address is already in use.
+.TP
+.BR EADDRNOTAVAIL
+.br
+The specified address is not available from the local machine.
+.TP
+.BR EAFNOSUPPORT
+.br
+The specified address is not a valid address for the address family of
+the specified socket.
+.TP
+.BR EALREADY
+An assignment request is already in progress for the specified socket.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR socket
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINPROGRESS
+O_NONBLOCK is set for the file descriptor for the socket and the
+assignment cannot be immediately performed; the assignment shall be
+performed asynchronously.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The socket is already bound to an address, and the protocol does not
+support binding to a new address; or the socket has been shut down.
+.TP
+.BR ENOBUFS
+Insufficient resources were available to complete the call.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSOCK
+The
+.IR socket
+argument does not refer to a socket.
+.TP
+.BR EOPNOTSUPP
+The socket type of the specified socket does not support binding to an
+address.
+.P
+If the address family of the socket is AF_UNIX, then
+\fIbind\fR()
+shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+A component of the path prefix denies search permission, or the
+requested name requires writing in a directory with a mode that denies
+write permission.
+.TP
+.BR EDESTADDRREQ " or " EISDIR
+.br
+The
+.IR address
+argument is a null pointer.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+pathname in
+.IR address .
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of the path prefix of the pathname in
+.IR address
+does not name an existing file or the pathname is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT " or " ENOTDIR
+.br
+The pathname in
+.IR address
+contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters. If the pathname names an existing file, an
+.BR [ENOENT] 
+error shall not occur.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix of the pathname in
+.IR address
+names an existing file that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link
+to a directory, or the pathname in
+.IR address
+contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file
+that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+The name would reside on a read-only file system.
+.P
+The
+\fIbind\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+The specified address is protected and the current user does not have
+permission to bind to it.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR address_len
+argument is not a valid length for the address family.
+.TP
+.BR EISCONN
+The socket is already connected.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the pathname in
+.IR address .
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following code segment shows how to create a socket and
+bind it to a name in the AF_UNIX domain.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#define MY_SOCK_PATH "/somepath"
+.P
+int sfd;
+struct sockaddr_un my_addr;
+.P
+sfd = socket(AF_UNIX, SOCK_STREAM, 0);
+if (sfd == \(mi1)
+    /* Handle error */;
+.P
+memset(&my_addr, '\e0', sizeof(struct sockaddr_un));
+                     /* Clear structure */
+my_addr.sun_family = AF_UNIX;
+strncpy(my_addr.sun_path, MY_SOCK_PATH, sizeof(my_addr.sun_path) \(mi1);
+.P
+if (bind(sfd, (struct sockaddr *) &my_addr,
+    sizeof(struct sockaddr_un)) == \(mi1)
+    /* Handle error */;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+An application program can retrieve the assigned socket name with the
+\fIgetsockname\fR()
+function.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIconnect\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetsockname\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlisten\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/bsearch.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/bsearch.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bff1b94
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/bsearch.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,193 @@
+'\" et
+.TH BSEARCH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+bsearch
+\(em binary search a sorted table
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+void *bsearch(const void *\fIkey\fP, const void *\fIbase\fP, size_t \fInel\fP,
+    size_t \fIwidth\fP, int (*\fIcompar\fP)(const void *, const void *));
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIbsearch\fR()
+function shall search an array of
+.IR nel
+objects, the initial element of which is pointed to by
+.IR base ,
+for an element that matches the object pointed to by
+.IR key .
+The size of each element in the array is specified by
+.IR width .
+If the
+.IR nel
+argument has the value zero, the comparison function pointed to by
+.IR compar
+shall not be called and no match shall be found.
+.P
+The comparison function pointed to by
+.IR compar
+shall be called with two arguments that point to the
+.IR key
+object and to an array element, in that order.
+.P
+The application shall ensure that the comparison function pointed to by
+.IR compar
+does not alter the contents of the array. The implementation may
+reorder elements of the array between calls to the comparison function,
+but shall not alter the contents of any individual element.
+.P
+The implementation shall ensure that the first argument is always a
+pointer to the key.
+.P
+When the same objects (consisting of width bytes, irrespective of their
+current positions in the array) are passed more than once to the
+comparison function, the results shall be consistent with one another.
+That is, the same object shall always compare the same way with the
+key.
+.P
+The application shall ensure that the function returns an integer less
+than, equal to, or greater than 0 if the
+.IR key
+object is considered, respectively, to be less than, to match, or to be
+greater than the array element. The application shall ensure that the
+array consists of all the elements that compare less than, all the
+elements that compare equal to, and all the elements that compare
+greater than the
+.IR key
+object, in that order.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIbsearch\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to a matching member of the array, or a
+null pointer if no match is found. If two or more members compare
+equal, which member is returned is unspecified.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+The example below searches a table containing pointers to nodes
+consisting of a string and its length. The table is ordered
+alphabetically on the string in the node pointed to by each entry.
+.P
+The code fragment below reads in strings and either finds the
+corresponding node and prints out the string and its length, or prints
+an error message.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+#define\ TABSIZE    1000
+.P
+struct node {                  /* These are stored in the table. */
+    char *string;
+    int length;
+};
+struct node table[TABSIZE];    /* Table to be searched. */
+    .
+    .
+    .
+{
+    struct node *node_ptr, node;
+    /* Routine to compare 2 nodes. */
+    int node_compare(const void *, const void *);
+    .
+    .
+    .
+    while (scanf("%ms", &node.string) != EOF) {
+        node_ptr = (struct node *)bsearch((void *)(&node),
+               (void *)table, TABSIZE,
+               sizeof(struct node), node_compare);
+        if (node_ptr != NULL) {
+            (void)printf("string = %20s, length = %d\en",
+                node_ptr->string, node_ptr->length);
+        } else {
+            (void)printf("not found: %s\en", node.string);
+        }
+        free(node.string);
+    }
+}
+/*
+    This routine compares two nodes based on an
+    alphabetical ordering of the string field.
+*/
+int
+node_compare(const void *node1, const void *node2)
+{
+    return strcoll(((const struct node *)node1)->string,
+        ((const struct node *)node2)->string);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The pointers to the key and the element at the base of the table should
+be of type pointer-to-element.
+.P
+The comparison function need not compare every byte, so arbitrary data
+may be contained in the elements in addition to the values being
+compared.
+.P
+In practice, the array is usually sorted according to the comparison
+function.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The requirement that the second argument (hereafter referred to as
+.IR p )
+to the comparison function is a pointer to an element of the array
+implies that for every call all of the following expressions are
+non-zero:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+((char *)p \(mi (char *(base) % width == 0
+(char *)p >= (char *)base
+(char *)p < (char *)base + nel * width
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIhcreate\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlsearch\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIqsort\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItdelete\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/btowc.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/btowc.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8065db0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/btowc.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+'\" et
+.TH BTOWC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+btowc
+\(em single byte to wide character conversion
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wint_t btowc(int \fIc\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIbtowc\fR()
+function shall determine whether
+.IR c
+constitutes a valid (one-byte) character in the initial shift state.
+.P
+The behavior of this function shall be affected by the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category of the current locale.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIbtowc\fR()
+function shall return WEOF if
+.IR c
+has the value EOF or if
+.BR "(unsigned char)"
+.IR c
+does not constitute a valid (one-byte) character in the initial shift
+state. Otherwise, it shall return the wide-character representation of
+that character.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwctob\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cabs.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cabs.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1ee6a6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cabs.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CABS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cabs,
+cabsf,
+cabsl
+\(em return a complex absolute value
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double cabs(double complex \fIz\fP);
+float cabsf(float complex \fIz\fP);
+long double cabsl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the complex absolute value (also called
+norm, modulus, or magnitude) of
+.IR z .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the complex absolute value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cacos.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cacos.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3a7f79f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cacos.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CACOS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cacos,
+cacosf,
+cacosl
+\(em complex arc cosine functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double complex cacos(double complex \fIz\fP);
+float complex cacosf(float complex \fIz\fP);
+long double complex cacosl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the complex arc cosine of
+.IR z ,
+with branch cuts outside the interval [\(mi1,\ +1] along the real
+axis.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the complex arc cosine value, in the range
+of a strip mathematically unbounded along the imaginary axis and in the
+interval [0,\ \(*p] along the real axis.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIccos\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cacosh.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cacosh.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef3866f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cacosh.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CACOSH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cacosh,
+cacoshf,
+cacoshl
+\(em complex arc hyperbolic cosine functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double complex cacosh(double complex \fIz\fP);
+float complex cacoshf(float complex \fIz\fP);
+long double complex cacoshl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the complex arc hyperbolic cosine of
+.IR z ,
+with a branch cut at values less than 1 along the real axis.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the complex arc hyperbolic cosine value,
+in the range of a half-strip of non-negative values along the real axis
+and in the interval [\(mi\fIi\fR\(*p,\ +\fIi\fR\(*p] along the
+imaginary axis.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIccosh\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cacosl.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cacosl.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..281ccc2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cacosl.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CACOSL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cacosl
+\(em complex arc cosine functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+long double complex cacosl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIcacos\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/calloc.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/calloc.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa27402
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/calloc.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CALLOC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+calloc
+\(em a memory allocator
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+void *calloc(size_t \fInelem\fP, size_t \fIelsize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIcalloc\fR()
+function shall allocate unused space for an array of
+.IR nelem
+elements each of whose size in bytes is
+.IR elsize .
+The space shall be initialized to all bits 0.
+.P
+The order and contiguity of storage allocated by successive calls to
+\fIcalloc\fR()
+is unspecified. The pointer returned if the allocation succeeds shall
+be suitably aligned so that it may be assigned to a pointer to any type
+of object and then used to access such an object or an array of such
+objects in the space allocated (until the space is explicitly freed or
+reallocated). Each such allocation shall yield a pointer to an object
+disjoint from any other object. The pointer returned shall point to the
+start (lowest byte address) of the allocated space. If the space cannot
+be allocated, a null pointer shall be returned. If the size of the
+space requested is 0, the behavior is implementation-defined: the value
+returned shall be either a null pointer or a unique pointer.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion with both
+.IR nelem
+and
+.IR elsize
+non-zero,
+\fIcalloc\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the allocated space. If either
+.IR nelem
+or
+.IR elsize
+is 0, then either a null pointer or a unique pointer value that can be
+successfully passed to
+\fIfree\fR()
+shall be returned. Otherwise, it shall return a null pointer
+and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIcalloc\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory is available.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+There is now no requirement for the implementation to support the
+inclusion of
+.IR <malloc.h> .
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfree\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImalloc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrealloc\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/carg.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/carg.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0fbe9dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/carg.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CARG "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+carg,
+cargf,
+cargl
+\(em complex argument functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double carg(double complex \fIz\fP);
+float cargf(float complex \fIz\fP);
+long double cargl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the argument (also called phase angle) of
+.IR z ,
+with a branch cut along the negative real axis.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the value of the argument in the interval
+[\(mi\(*p,\ +\(*p].
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcimag\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIconj\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcproj\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/casin.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/casin.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d5c35b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/casin.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CASIN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+casin,
+casinf,
+casinl
+\(em complex arc sine functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double complex casin(double complex \fIz\fP);
+float complex casinf(float complex \fIz\fP);
+long double complex casinl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the complex arc sine of
+.IR z ,
+with branch cuts outside the interval [\(mi1,\ +1] along the real
+axis.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the complex arc sine value, in the range
+of a strip mathematically unbounded along the imaginary axis and in the
+interval [\(mi\(*p/2,\ +\(*p/2] along the real axis.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcsin\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/casinh.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/casinh.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e3cd49b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/casinh.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CASINH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+casinh,
+casinhf,
+casinhl
+\(em complex arc hyperbolic sine functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double complex casinh(double complex \fIz\fP);
+float complex casinhf(float complex \fIz\fP);
+long double complex casinhl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the complex arc hyperbolic sine of
+.IR z ,
+with branch cuts outside the interval [\(mi\fIi\fR,\ +\fIi\fR] along
+the imaginary axis.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the complex arc hyperbolic sine value, in
+the range of a strip mathematically unbounded along the real axis and
+in the interval [\(mi\fIi\fR\(*p/2,\ +\fIi\fR\(*p/2] along the
+imaginary axis.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcsinh\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/casinl.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/casinl.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6305a23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/casinl.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CASINL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+casinl
+\(em complex arc sine functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+long double complex casinl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIcasin\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/catan.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/catan.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bb01b0a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/catan.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CATAN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+catan,
+catanf,
+catanl
+\(em complex arc tangent functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double complex catan(double complex \fIz\fP);
+float complex catanf(float complex \fIz\fP);
+long double complex catanl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the complex arc tangent of
+.IR z ,
+with branch cuts outside the interval [\(mi\fIi\fR,\ +\fIi\fR] along
+the imaginary axis.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the complex arc tangent value, in the
+range of a strip mathematically unbounded along the imaginary axis and
+in the interval [\(mi\(*p/2,\ +\(*p/2] along the real axis.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIctan\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/catanh.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/catanh.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5135f5c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/catanh.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CATANH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+catanh,
+catanhf,
+catanhl
+\(em complex arc hyperbolic tangent functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double complex catanh(double complex \fIz\fP);
+float complex catanhf(float complex \fIz\fP);
+long double complex catanhl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the complex arc hyperbolic tangent of
+.IR z ,
+with branch cuts outside the interval [\(mi1,\ +1] along the real
+axis.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the complex arc hyperbolic tangent value,
+in the range of a strip mathematically unbounded along the real axis
+and in the interval [\(mi\fIi\fR\(*p/2,\ +\fIi\fR\(*p/2] along the
+imaginary axis.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIctanh\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/catanl.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/catanl.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b0bfce8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/catanl.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CATANL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+catanl
+\(em complex arc tangent functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+long double complex catanl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIcatan\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/catclose.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/catclose.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..45aeb20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/catclose.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CATCLOSE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+catclose
+\(em close a message catalog descriptor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <nl_types.h>
+.P
+int catclose(nl_catd \fIcatd\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIcatclose\fR()
+function shall close the message catalog identified by
+.IR catd .
+If a file descriptor is used to implement the type
+.BR nl_catd ,
+that file descriptor shall be closed.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIcatclose\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned, and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIcatclose\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The catalog descriptor is not valid.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fIcatclose\fR()
+function was interrupted by a signal.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcatgets\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcatopen\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<nl_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/catgets.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/catgets.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9a136b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/catgets.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CATGETS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+catgets
+\(em read a program message
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <nl_types.h>
+.P
+char *catgets(nl_catd \fIcatd\fP, int \fIset_id\fP, int \fImsg_id\fP, const char *\fIs\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIcatgets\fR()
+function shall attempt to read message
+.IR msg_id ,
+in set
+.IR set_id ,
+from the message catalog identified by
+.IR catd .
+The
+.IR catd
+argument is a message catalog descriptor returned from an earlier call
+to
+\fIcatopen\fR().
+The results are undefined if
+.IR catd
+is not a value returned by
+\fIcatopen\fR()
+for a message catalog still open in the process. The
+.IR s
+argument points to a default message string which shall be returned by
+\fIcatgets\fR()
+if it cannot retrieve the identified message.
+.P
+The
+\fIcatgets\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the identified message is retrieved successfully,
+\fIcatgets\fR()
+shall return a pointer to an internal buffer area containing the
+null-terminated message string. If the call is unsuccessful for any
+reason,
+.IR s
+shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIcatgets\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The read operation was terminated due to the receipt of a signal, and
+no data was transferred.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMSG
+The message identified by
+.IR set_id
+and
+.IR msg_id
+is not in the message catalog.
+.P
+The
+\fIcatgets\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR catd
+argument is not a valid message catalog descriptor open for reading.
+.TP
+.BR EBADMSG
+The message identified by
+.IR set_id
+and
+.IR msg_id
+in the specified message catalog did not satisfy implementation-defined
+security criteria.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The message catalog identified by
+.IR catd
+is corrupted.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcatclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcatopen\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<nl_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/catopen.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/catopen.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a53908f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/catopen.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,195 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CATOPEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+catopen
+\(em open a message catalog
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <nl_types.h>
+.P
+nl_catd catopen(const char *\fIname\fP, int \fIoflag\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIcatopen\fR()
+function shall open a message catalog and return a message catalog
+descriptor. The
+.IR name
+argument specifies the name of the message catalog to be opened. If
+.IR name
+contains a
+.BR '/' ,
+then
+.IR name
+specifies a complete name for the message catalog. Otherwise, the
+environment variable
+.IR NLSPATH
+is used with
+.IR name
+substituted for the
+.BR %N
+conversion specification (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables").
+If
+.IR NLSPATH
+exists in the environment when the process starts, then if the process
+has appropriate privileges, the behavior of
+\fIcatopen\fR()
+is undefined. If
+.IR NLSPATH
+does not exist in the environment, or if a message catalog cannot be
+found in any of the components specified by
+.IR NLSPATH ,
+then an implementation-defined default path shall be used. This default
+may be affected by the setting of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+if the value of
+.IR oflag
+is NL_CAT_LOCALE, or the
+.IR LANG
+environment variable if
+.IR oflag
+is 0.
+.P
+A message catalog descriptor shall remain valid in a process until that
+process closes it, or a successful call to one of the
+.IR exec
+functions. A change in the setting of the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+category may invalidate existing open catalogs.
+.P
+If a file descriptor is used to implement message catalog descriptors,
+the FD_CLOEXEC flag shall be set; see
+.IR <fcntl.h> .
+.P
+If the value of the
+.IR oflag
+argument is 0, the
+.IR LANG
+environment variable is used to locate the catalog without regard to
+the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+category. If the
+.IR oflag
+argument is NL_CAT_LOCALE, the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+category is used to locate the message catalog (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables").
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIcatopen\fR()
+shall return a message catalog descriptor for use on subsequent calls to
+\fIcatgets\fR()
+and
+\fIcatclose\fR().
+Otherwise,
+\fIcatopen\fR()
+shall return (\c
+.BR nl_catd )
+\(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIcatopen\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied for the component of the path prefix of the
+message catalog or read permission is denied for the message catalog.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+Too many files are currently open in the system.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+The message catalog does not exist or the
+.IR name
+argument points to an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient storage space is available.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix of the message catalog names an existing
+file that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory,
+or the pathname of the message catalog contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file
+that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Some implementations of
+\fIcatopen\fR()
+use
+\fImalloc\fR()
+to allocate space for internal buffer areas. The
+\fIcatopen\fR()
+function may fail if there is insufficient storage space available to
+accommodate these buffers.
+.P
+Conforming applications must assume that message catalog descriptors are
+not valid after a call to one of the
+.IR exec
+functions.
+.P
+Application developers should be aware that guidelines for the location
+of message catalogs have not yet been developed. Therefore they should
+take care to avoid conflicting with catalogs used by other applications
+and the standard utilities.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcatclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcatgets\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "\fB<fcntl.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<nl_types.h>\fP",
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cbrt.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cbrt.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..813f263
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cbrt.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CBRT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cbrt,
+cbrtf,
+cbrtl
+\(em cube root functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double cbrt(double \fIx\fP);
+float cbrtf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double cbrtl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the real cube root of their argument
+.IR x .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the cube root
+of
+.IR x .
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0 or \(+-Inf,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+For some applications, a true cube root function, which returns
+negative results for negative arguments, is more appropriate than
+.IR pow (\c
+.IR x ,
+1.0/3.0), which returns a NaN for
+.IR x
+less than 0.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ccos.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ccos.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..727ed37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ccos.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CCOS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ccos,
+ccosf,
+ccosl
+\(em complex cosine functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double complex ccos(double complex \fIz\fP);
+float complex ccosf(float complex \fIz\fP);
+long double complex ccosl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the complex cosine of
+.IR z .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the complex cosine value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcacos\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ccosh.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ccosh.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d3f3cb2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ccosh.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CCOSH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ccosh,
+ccoshf,
+ccoshl
+\(em complex hyperbolic cosine functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double complex ccosh(double complex \fIz\fP);
+float complex ccoshf(float complex \fIz\fP);
+long double complex ccoshl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the complex hyperbolic cosine of
+.IR z .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the complex hyperbolic cosine value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcacosh\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ccosl.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ccosl.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bebfe75
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ccosl.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CCOSL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ccosl
+\(em complex cosine functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+long double complex ccosl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIccos\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ceil.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ceil.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7ae4304
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ceil.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CEIL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ceil,
+ceilf,
+ceill
+\(em ceiling value function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double ceil(double \fIx\fP);
+float ceilf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double ceill(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the smallest integral value not less than
+.IR x .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The result shall have the same sign as
+.IR x .
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIceil\fR(),
+\fIceilf\fR(),
+and
+\fIceill\fR()
+shall return the smallest integral value not less than
+.IR x ,
+expressed as a type
+.BR double ,
+.BR float ,
+or
+.BR "long double" ,
+respectively.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0 or \(+-Inf,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The integral value returned by these functions need not be expressible
+as an
+.BR intmax_t .
+The return value should be tested before assigning it to an integer
+type to avoid the undefined results of an integer overflow.
+.P
+These functions may raise the inexact floating-point exception if the
+result differs in value from the argument.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfloor\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cexp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cexp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..18a10f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cexp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CEXP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cexp,
+cexpf,
+cexpl
+\(em complex exponential functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double complex cexp(double complex \fIz\fP);
+float complex cexpf(float complex \fIz\fP);
+long double complex cexpl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the complex exponent of
+.IR z ,
+defined as \fIe\s-3\uz\d\s+3\fR.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the complex exponential value of
+.IR z .
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIclog\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cfgetispeed.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cfgetispeed.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..20b1192
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cfgetispeed.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CFGETISPEED "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cfgetispeed
+\(em get input baud rate
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <termios.h>
+.P
+speed_t cfgetispeed(const struct termios *\fItermios_p\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIcfgetispeed\fR()
+function shall extract the input baud rate from the
+.BR termios
+structure to which the
+.IR termios_p
+argument points.
+.P
+This function shall return exactly the value in the
+.BR termios
+data structure, without interpretation.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIcfgetispeed\fR()
+shall return a value of type
+.BR speed_t
+representing the input baud rate.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The term ``baud'' is used historically here, but is not technically
+correct. This is properly ``bits per second'', which may not be the
+same as baud. However, the term is used because of the historical
+usage and understanding.
+.P
+The
+\fIcfgetospeed\fR(),
+\fIcfgetispeed\fR(),
+\fIcfsetospeed\fR(),
+and
+\fIcfsetispeed\fR()
+functions do not take arguments as numbers, but rather as symbolic
+names. There are two reasons for this:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Historically, numbers were not used because of the way the rate was
+stored in the data structure. This is retained even though a
+function is now used.
+.IP " 2." 4
+More importantly, only a limited set of possible rates is at all
+portable, and this constrains the application to that set.
+.P
+There is nothing to prevent an implementation accepting as an extension
+a number (such as 126), and since the encoding of the Bxxx symbols is
+not specified, this can be done to avoid introducing ambiguity.
+.P
+Setting the input baud rate to zero was a mechanism to allow for split
+baud rates. Clarifications in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 have made it possible to determine
+whether split rates are supported and to support them without having to
+treat zero as a special case. Since this functionality is also
+confusing, it has been declared obsolescent.
+The 0 argument referred to is the literal constant 0, not the symbolic
+constant B0. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not preclude B0 from being defined as the value
+0; in fact, implementations would likely benefit from the two being
+equivalent. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not fully specify whether the previous
+\fIcfsetispeed\fR()
+value is retained after a
+\fItcgetattr\fR()
+as the actual value or as zero. Therefore, conforming applications should
+always set both the input speed and output speed when setting either.
+.P
+In historical implementations, the baud rate information is
+traditionally kept in
+.BR c_cflag .
+Applications should be written to presume that this might be the case
+(and thus not blindly copy
+.BR c_cflag ),
+but not to rely on it in case it is in some other field of the
+structure. Setting the
+.BR c_cflag
+field absolutely after setting a baud rate is a non-portable action
+because of this. In general, the unused parts of the flag fields might
+be used by the implementation and should not be blindly copied from the
+descriptions of one terminal device to another.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcfgetospeed\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcfsetispeed\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcfsetospeed\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItcgetattr\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+.IR "\fB<termios.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cfgetospeed.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cfgetospeed.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0c53117
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cfgetospeed.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CFGETOSPEED "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cfgetospeed
+\(em get output baud rate
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <termios.h>
+.P
+speed_t cfgetospeed(const struct termios *\fItermios_p\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIcfgetospeed\fR()
+function shall extract the output baud rate from the
+.BR termios
+structure to which the
+.IR termios_p
+argument points.
+.P
+This function shall return exactly the value in the
+.BR termios
+data structure, without interpretation.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIcfgetospeed\fR()
+shall return a value of type
+.BR speed_t
+representing the output baud rate.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIcfgetispeed\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcfgetispeed\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcfsetispeed\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcfsetospeed\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItcgetattr\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+.IR "\fB<termios.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cfsetispeed.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cfsetispeed.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e028f07
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cfsetispeed.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CFSETISPEED "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cfsetispeed
+\(em set input baud rate
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <termios.h>
+.P
+int cfsetispeed(struct termios *\fItermios_p\fP, speed_t \fIspeed\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIcfsetispeed\fR()
+function shall set the input baud rate stored in the structure pointed
+to by
+.IR termios_p
+to
+.IR speed.
+.P
+There shall be no effect on the baud rates set in the hardware until a
+subsequent successful call to
+\fItcsetattr\fR()
+with the same
+.BR termios
+structure. Similarly, errors resulting from attempts to set baud rates
+not supported by the terminal device need not be detected until the
+\fItcsetattr\fR()
+function is called.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIcfsetispeed\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned, and
+.IR errno
+may be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIcfsetispeed\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR speed
+value is not a valid baud rate.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR speed
+is outside the range of possible speed values as specified in
+.IR <termios.h> .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIcfgetispeed\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcfgetispeed\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcfgetospeed\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcfsetospeed\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItcsetattr\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+.IR "\fB<termios.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cfsetospeed.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cfsetospeed.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..be606b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cfsetospeed.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CFSETOSPEED "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cfsetospeed
+\(em set output baud rate
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <termios.h>
+.P
+int cfsetospeed(struct termios *\fItermios_p\fP, speed_t \fIspeed\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIcfsetospeed\fR()
+function shall set the output baud rate stored in the structure pointed
+to by
+.IR termios_p
+to
+.IR speed .
+.P
+There shall be no effect on the baud rates set in the hardware until a
+subsequent successful call to
+\fItcsetattr\fR()
+with the same
+.BR termios
+structure. Similarly, errors resulting from attempts to set baud rates
+not supported by the terminal device need not be detected until the
+\fItcsetattr\fR()
+function is called.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIcfsetospeed\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and
+.IR errno
+may be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIcfsetospeed\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR speed
+value is not a valid baud rate.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR speed
+is outside the range of possible speed values as specified in
+.IR <termios.h> .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIcfgetispeed\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcfgetispeed\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcfgetospeed\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcfsetispeed\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItcsetattr\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+.IR "\fB<termios.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/chdir.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/chdir.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a09c219
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/chdir.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CHDIR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+chdir
+\(em change working directory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int chdir(const char *\fIpath\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIchdir\fR()
+function shall cause the directory named by the pathname pointed to
+by the
+.IR path
+argument to become the current working directory; that is, the starting
+point for path searches for pathnames not beginning with
+.BR '/' .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned. Otherwise, \(mi1 shall
+be returned, the current working directory shall remain unchanged, and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIchdir\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied for any component of the pathname.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing directory or
+.IR path
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the pathname names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.P
+The
+\fIchdir\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Changing the Current Working Directory"
+.P
+The following example makes the value pointed to by
+.BR directory ,
+.BR /tmp ,
+the current working directory.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+\&...
+char *directory = "/tmp";
+int ret;
+.P
+ret = chdir (directory);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIchdir\fR()
+function only affects the working directory of the current process.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetcwd\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/chmod.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/chmod.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..181c01d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/chmod.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,365 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CHMOD "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+chmod, fchmodat
+\(em change mode of a file relative to directory file descriptor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+int chmod(const char *\fIpath\fP, mode_t \fImode\fP);
+int fchmodat(int \fIfd\fP, const char *\fIpath\fP, mode_t \fImode\fP, int \fIflag\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIchmod\fR()
+function shall change S_ISUID, S_ISGID,
+S_ISVTX,
+and the file permission bits of the file named by the pathname pointed
+to by the
+.IR path
+argument to the corresponding bits in the
+.IR mode
+argument. The application shall ensure that the effective user ID
+of the process matches the owner of the file or the process has
+appropriate privileges in order to do this.
+.P
+S_ISUID, S_ISGID,
+S_ISVTX,
+and the file permission bits
+are described in
+.IR <sys/stat.h> .
+.P
+If the calling process does not have appropriate privileges, and if the
+group ID of the file does not match the effective group ID or one of
+the supplementary group IDs and if the file is a regular file, bit
+S_ISGID (set-group-ID on execution) in the file's mode shall be cleared
+upon successful return from
+\fIchmod\fR().
+.P
+Additional implementation-defined restrictions may cause the S_ISUID
+and S_ISGID bits in
+.IR mode
+to be ignored.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIchmod\fR()
+shall mark for update the last file status change timestamp of the file.
+.P
+The
+\fIfchmodat\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIchmod\fR()
+function except in the case where
+.IR path
+specifies a relative path. In this case the file to be changed is
+determined relative to the directory associated with the file
+descriptor
+.IR fd
+instead of the current working directory. If the file descriptor was
+opened without O_SEARCH, the function shall check whether directory
+searches are permitted using the current permissions of the directory
+underlying the file descriptor. If the file descriptor was opened with
+O_SEARCH, the function shall not perform the check.
+.P
+Values for
+.IR flag
+are constructed by a bitwise-inclusive OR of flags from the following
+list, defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> :
+.IP AT_SYMLINK_NOFOLLOW 6
+.br
+If
+.IR path
+names a symbolic link, then the mode of the symbolic link is changed.
+.P
+If
+\fIfchmodat\fR()
+is passed the special value AT_FDCWD in the
+.IR fd
+parameter, the current working directory shall be used. If also
+.IR flag
+is zero, the behavior shall be identical to a call to
+\fIchmod\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return 0.
+Otherwise, these functions shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error. If \(mi1 is returned, no change to the
+file mode occurs.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied on a component of the path prefix.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR path
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory, or the
+.IR path
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file
+that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The effective user ID does not match the owner of the file and the
+process does not have appropriate privileges.
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+The named file resides on a read-only file system.
+.P
+The
+\fIfchmodat\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+.IR fd
+was not opened with O_SEARCH and the permissions of the directory
+underlying
+.IR fd
+do not permit directory searches.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR path
+argument does not specify an absolute path and the
+.IR fd
+argument is neither AT_FDCWD nor a valid file descriptor open
+for reading or searching.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+The
+.IR path
+argument is not an absolute path and
+.IR fd
+is a file descriptor associated with a non-directory file.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was caught during execution of the function.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR mode
+argument is invalid.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.P
+The
+\fIfchmodat\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR flag
+argument is invalid.
+.TP
+.BR EOPNOTSUPP
+The AT_SYMLINK_NOFOLLOW bit is set in the
+.IR flag
+argument,
+.IR path
+names a symbolic link, and the system does not support changing the
+mode of a symbolic link.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Setting Read Permissions for User, Group, and Others"
+.P
+The following example sets read permissions for the owner, group, and
+others.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+const char *path;
+\&...
+chmod(path, S_IRUSR|S_IRGRP|S_IROTH);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Setting Read, Write, and Execute Permissions for the Owner Only"
+.P
+The following example sets read, write, and execute permissions for the
+owner, and no permissions for group and others.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+const char *path;
+\&...
+chmod(path, S_IRWXU);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Setting Different Permissions for Owner, Group, and Other"
+.P
+The following example sets owner permissions for CHANGEFILE to read,
+write, and execute, group permissions to read and execute, and other
+permissions to read.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+#define CHANGEFILE "/etc/myfile"
+\&...
+chmod(CHANGEFILE, S_IRWXU|S_IRGRP|S_IXGRP|S_IROTH);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Setting and Checking File Permissions"
+.P
+The following example sets the file permission bits for a file named
+.BR /home/cnd/mod1 ,
+then calls the
+\fIstat\fR()
+function to verify the permissions.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+int status;
+struct stat buffer
+\&...
+chmod("home/cnd/mod1", S_IRWXU|S_IRWXG|S_IROTH|S_IWOTH);
+status = stat("home/cnd/mod1", &buffer;);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+In order to ensure that the S_ISUID and S_ISGID
+bits are set, an application requiring this should use
+\fIstat\fR()
+after a successful
+\fIchmod\fR()
+to verify this.
+.P
+Any file descriptors currently open by any process on the file could
+possibly become invalid if the mode of the file is changed to a value
+which would deny access to that process. One situation where this could
+occur is on a stateless file system. This behavior will not occur in a
+conforming environment.
+.SH RATIONALE
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 specifies that the S_ISGID bit is cleared by
+\fIchmod\fR()
+on a regular file under certain conditions. This is specified on the
+assumption that regular files may be executed, and the system should
+prevent users from making executable
+\fIsetgid\fR()
+files perform with privileges that the caller does not have. On
+implementations that support execution of other file types, the S_ISGID
+bit should be cleared for those file types under the same
+circumstances.
+.P
+Implementations that use the S_ISUID bit to indicate some other
+function (for example, mandatory record locking) on non-executable
+files need not clear this bit on writing. They should clear the bit
+for executable files and any other cases where the bit grants special
+powers to processes that change the file contents. Similar comments
+apply to the S_ISGID bit.
+.P
+The purpose of the
+\fIfchmodat\fR()
+function is to enable changing the mode of files in directories other
+than the current working directory without exposure to race conditions.
+Any part of the path of a file could be changed in parallel to a call
+to
+\fIchmod\fR(),
+resulting in unspecified behavior. By opening a file descriptor for
+the target directory and using the
+\fIfchmodat\fR()
+function it can be guaranteed that the changed file is located relative
+to the desired directory. Some implementations might allow changing
+the mode of symbolic links. This is not supported by the interfaces in
+the POSIX specification. Systems with such support provide an
+interface named
+.IR lchmod (\|).
+To support such implementations
+\fIfchmodat\fR()
+has a
+.IR flag
+parameter.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIaccess\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIchown\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfstatat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfstatvfs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImkdir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImkfifo\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImknod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fcntl.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/chown.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/chown.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5dc8ed6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/chown.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,323 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CHOWN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+chown, fchownat
+\(em change owner and group of a file relative to directory
+file descriptor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int chown(const char *\fIpath\fP, uid_t \fIowner\fP, gid_t \fIgroup\fP);
+int fchownat(int \fIfd\fP, const char *\fIpath\fP, uid_t \fIowner\fP, gid_t \fIgroup\fP,
+    int \fIflag\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIchown\fR()
+function shall change the user and group ownership of a file.
+.P
+The
+.IR path
+argument points to a pathname naming a file. The user ID and group ID
+of the named file shall be set to the numeric values contained in
+.IR owner
+and
+.IR group ,
+respectively.
+.P
+Only processes with an effective user ID equal to the user ID of the
+file or with appropriate privileges may change the ownership of a
+file. If _POSIX_CHOWN_RESTRICTED is in effect for
+.IR path :
+.IP " *" 4
+Changing the user ID is restricted to processes with appropriate
+privileges.
+.IP " *" 4
+Changing the group ID is permitted to a process with an effective user
+ID equal to the user ID of the file, but without appropriate
+privileges, if and only if
+.IR owner
+is equal to the file's user ID or (\c
+.BR uid_t )\(mi1
+and
+.IR group
+is equal either to the calling process' effective group ID or to one of
+its supplementary group IDs.
+.P
+If the specified file is a regular file, one or more of the S_IXUSR,
+S_IXGRP, or S_IXOTH bits of the file mode are set, and the process does
+not have appropriate privileges, the set-user-ID (S_ISUID) and
+set-group-ID (S_ISGID) bits of the file mode shall be cleared upon
+successful return from
+\fIchown\fR().
+If the specified file is a regular file, one or more of the S_IXUSR,
+S_IXGRP, or S_IXOTH bits of the file mode are set, and the process has
+appropriate privileges, it is implementation-defined whether the
+set-user-ID and set-group-ID bits are altered. If the
+\fIchown\fR()
+function is successfully invoked on a file that is not a regular file
+and one or more of the S_IXUSR, S_IXGRP, or S_IXOTH bits of the file
+mode are set, the set-user-ID and set-group-ID bits may be cleared.
+.P
+If
+.IR owner
+or
+.IR group
+is specified as (\c
+.BR uid_t )\(mi1
+or (\c
+.BR gid_t )\(mi1,
+respectively, the corresponding ID of the file shall not be changed.
+If both owner and group are \(mi1, the times need not be updated.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIchown\fR()
+shall mark for update the last file status change timestamp of the file.
+.P
+The
+\fIfchownat\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIchown\fR()
+and
+\fIlchown\fR()
+functions except in the case where
+.IR path
+specifies a relative path. In this case the file to be changed is
+determined relative to the directory associated with the file
+descriptor
+.IR fd
+instead of the current working directory. If the file descriptor was
+opened without O_SEARCH, the function shall check whether directory
+searches are permitted using the current permissions of the directory
+underlying the file descriptor. If the file descriptor was opened with
+O_SEARCH, the function shall not perform the check.
+.P
+Values for
+.IR flag
+are constructed by a bitwise-inclusive OR of flags from the following
+list, defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> :
+.IP AT_SYMLINK_NOFOLLOW 6
+.br
+If
+.IR path
+names a symbolic link, ownership of the symbolic link is changed.
+.P
+If
+\fIfchownat\fR()
+is passed the special value AT_FDCWD in the
+.IR fd
+parameter, the current working directory shall be used and the behavior
+shall be identical to a call to
+\fIchown\fR()
+or
+\fIlchown\fR()
+respectively, depending on whether or not the AT_SYMLINK_NOFOLLOW bit
+is set in the
+.IR flag
+argument.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return 0.
+Otherwise, these functions shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error. If \(mi1 is returned, no changes are
+made in the user ID and group ID of the file.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied on a component of the path prefix.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR path
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory, or the
+.IR path
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file
+that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The effective user ID does not match the owner of the file, or the
+calling process does not have appropriate privileges and
+_POSIX_CHOWN_RESTRICTED indicates that such privilege is required.
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+The named file resides on a read-only file system.
+.P
+The
+\fIfchownat\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+.IR fd
+was not opened with O_SEARCH and the permissions of the directory
+underlying
+.IR fd
+do not permit directory searches.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR path
+argument does not specify an absolute path and the
+.IR fd
+argument is neither AT_FDCWD nor a valid file descriptor open
+for reading or searching.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+The
+.IR path
+argument is not an absolute path and
+.IR fd
+is a file descriptor associated with a non-directory file.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while reading or writing to the file system.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fIchown\fR()
+function was interrupted by a signal which was caught.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The owner or group ID supplied is not a value supported by the
+implementation.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIfchownat\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR flag
+argument is not valid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Although
+\fIchown\fR()
+can be used on some implementations by the file owner to change the owner
+and group to any desired values, the only portable use of this function
+is to change the group of a file to the effective GID of the calling
+process or to a member of its group set.
+.SH RATIONALE
+System III and System V allow a user to give away files;
+that is, the owner of a file may change its user ID to anything. This
+is a serious problem for implementations that are intended to meet
+government security regulations.
+Version 7 and 4.3 BSD permit only the superuser
+to change the user ID of a file. Some government agencies (usually not
+ones concerned directly with security) find this limitation too
+confining. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 uses \fImay\fP to permit secure implementations
+while not disallowing System V.
+.P
+System III and System V allow the owner of a file to change the
+group ID to anything. Version 7 permits only the superuser to change
+the group ID of a file.
+4.3 BSD permits the owner to change the group ID of a file
+to its effective group ID
+or to any of the groups in the list of supplementary group IDs, but to
+no others.
+.P
+The POSIX.1\(hy1990 standard requires that the
+\fIchown\fR()
+function invoked by a non-appropriate privileged process clear the
+S_ISGID and the S_ISUID bits for regular files, and permits them to be
+cleared for other types of files. This is so that changes in
+accessibility do not accidentally cause files to become security holes.
+Unfortunately, requiring these bits to be cleared on non-executable
+data files also clears the mandatory file locking bit (shared with
+S_ISGID), which is an extension on many implementations (it first
+appeared in System V). These bits should only be required to be
+cleared on regular files that have one or more of their execute bits
+set.
+.P
+The purpose of the
+\fIfchownat\fR()
+function is to enable changing ownership of files in directories other
+than the current working directory without exposure to race
+conditions. Any part of the path of a file could be changed in
+parallel to a call to
+\fIchown\fR()
+or
+\fIlchown\fR(),
+resulting in unspecified behavior. By opening a file descriptor for
+the target directory and using the
+\fIfchownat\fR()
+function it can be guaranteed that the changed file is located relative
+to the desired directory.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfpathconf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlchown\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fcntl.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cimag.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cimag.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5f96a6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cimag.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CIMAG "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cimag,
+cimagf,
+cimagl
+\(em complex imaginary functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double cimag(double complex \fIz\fP);
+float cimagf(float complex \fIz\fP);
+long double cimagl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the imaginary part of
+.IR z .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the imaginary part value (as a real).
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+For a variable
+.IR z
+of complex type:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+z == creal(z) + cimag(z)*I
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcarg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIconj\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcproj\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcreal\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/clearerr.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/clearerr.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2460d64
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/clearerr.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CLEARERR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+clearerr
+\(em clear indicators on a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+void clearerr(FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIclearerr\fR()
+function shall clear the end-of-file and error indicators for the
+stream to which
+.IR stream
+points.
+.P
+The
+\fIclearerr\fR()
+function shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if
+.IR stream
+is valid.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIclearerr\fR()
+function shall not return a value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/clock.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/clock.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8e5853c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/clock.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CLOCK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+clock
+\(em report CPU time used
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+clock_t clock(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIclock\fR()
+function shall return the implementation's best approximation to the
+processor time used by the process since the beginning of an
+implementation-defined era related only to the process invocation.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+To determine the time in seconds, the value returned by
+\fIclock\fR()
+should be divided by the value of the macro CLOCKS_PER_SEC.
+CLOCKS_PER_SEC is defined to be one million in
+.IR <time.h> .
+If the processor time used is not available or its value cannot be
+represented, the function shall return the value (\c
+.BR clock_t )\(mi1.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+In order to measure the time spent in a program,
+\fIclock\fR()
+should be called at the start of the program and its return value
+subtracted from the value returned by subsequent calls. The value
+returned by
+\fIclock\fR()
+is defined for compatibility across systems that have clocks with
+different resolutions. The resolution on any particular system need
+not be to microsecond accuracy.
+.P
+The value returned by
+\fIclock\fR()
+may wrap around on some implementations. For example, on a machine with
+32-bit values for
+.BR clock_t ,
+it wraps after 2\|147 seconds or 36 minutes.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIasctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdifftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgmtime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlocaltime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImktime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrptime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIutime\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/clock_getcpuclockid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/clock_getcpuclockid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4b3eb73
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/clock_getcpuclockid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CLOCK_GETCPUCLOCKID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+clock_getcpuclockid
+\(em access a process CPU-time clock
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+int clock_getcpuclockid(pid_t \fIpid\fP, clockid_t *\fIclock_id\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIclock_getcpuclockid\fR()
+function shall return the clock ID of the CPU-time clock of the process
+specified by
+.IR pid .
+If the process described by
+.IR pid
+exists and the calling process has permission, the clock ID of this
+clock shall be returned in
+.IR clock_id .
+.P
+If
+.IR pid
+is zero, the
+\fIclock_getcpuclockid\fR()
+function shall return the clock ID of the CPU-time clock of the process
+making the call, in
+.IR clock_id .
+.P
+The conditions under which one process has permission to obtain the
+CPU-time clock ID of other processes are implementation-defined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIclock_getcpuclockid\fR()
+shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to
+indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIclock_getcpuclockid\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The requesting process does not have permission to access the CPU-time
+clock for the process.
+.P
+The
+\fIclock_getcpuclockid\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ESRCH
+No process can be found corresponding to the process specified by
+.IR pid .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIclock_getcpuclockid\fR()
+function is part of the Process CPU-Time Clocks option and need not be
+provided on all implementations.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIclock_getres\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItimer_create\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/clock_getres.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/clock_getres.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..58c42f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/clock_getres.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,284 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CLOCK_GETRES "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+clock_getres,
+clock_gettime,
+clock_settime
+\(em clock and timer functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+int clock_getres(clockid_t \fIclock_id\fP, struct timespec *\fIres\fP);
+int clock_gettime(clockid_t \fIclock_id\fP, struct timespec *\fItp\fP);
+int clock_settime(clockid_t \fIclock_id\fP, const struct timespec *\fItp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIclock_getres\fR()
+function shall return the resolution of any clock. Clock resolutions
+are implementation-defined and cannot be set by a process. If the
+argument
+.IR res
+is not NULL, the resolution of the specified clock shall be stored in the
+location pointed to by
+.IR res .
+If
+.IR res
+is NULL, the clock resolution is not returned. If the
+.IR time
+argument of
+\fIclock_settime\fR()
+is not a multiple of
+.IR res ,
+then the value is truncated to a multiple of
+.IR res .
+.P
+The
+\fIclock_gettime\fR()
+function shall return the current value
+.IR tp
+for the specified clock,
+.IR clock_id .
+.P
+The
+\fIclock_settime\fR()
+function shall set the specified clock,
+.IR clock_id ,
+to the value specified by
+.IR tp .
+Time values that are between two consecutive non-negative integer
+multiples of the resolution of the specified clock shall be truncated
+down to the smaller multiple of the resolution.
+.P
+A clock may be system-wide (that is, visible to all processes) or
+per-process (measuring time that is meaningful only within a process).
+All implementations shall support a
+.IR clock_id
+of CLOCK_REALTIME as defined in
+.IR <time.h> .
+This clock represents the clock measuring real time for the system.
+For this clock, the values returned by
+\fIclock_gettime\fR()
+and specified by
+\fIclock_settime\fR()
+represent the amount of time (in seconds and nanoseconds) since the
+Epoch. An implementation may also support additional clocks. The
+interpretation of time values for these clocks is unspecified.
+.P
+If the value of the CLOCK_REALTIME clock is set via
+\fIclock_settime\fR(),
+the new value of the clock shall be used to determine the time of
+expiration for absolute time services based upon the CLOCK_REALTIME
+clock. This applies to the time at which armed absolute timers expire.
+If the absolute time requested at the invocation of such a time service
+is before the new value of the clock, the time service shall expire
+immediately as if the clock had reached the requested time normally.
+.P
+Setting the value of the CLOCK_REALTIME clock via
+\fIclock_settime\fR()
+shall have no effect on threads that are blocked waiting for a relative
+time service based upon this clock, including the
+\fInanosleep\fR()
+function; nor on the expiration of relative timers based upon this
+clock. Consequently, these time services shall expire when the
+requested relative interval elapses, independently of the new or old
+value of the clock.
+.P
+If the Monotonic Clock option is supported, all implementations shall
+support a
+.IR clock_id
+of CLOCK_MONOTONIC defined in
+.IR <time.h> .
+This clock represents the monotonic clock for the system. For this
+clock, the value returned by
+\fIclock_gettime\fR()
+represents the amount of time (in seconds and nanoseconds) since an
+unspecified point in the past (for example, system start-up time, or the
+Epoch). This point does not change after system start-up time. The value
+of the CLOCK_MONOTONIC clock cannot be set via
+\fIclock_settime\fR().
+This function shall fail if it is invoked with a
+.IR clock_id
+argument of CLOCK_MONOTONIC.
+.P
+The effect of setting a clock via
+\fIclock_settime\fR()
+on armed per-process timers associated with a clock other than
+CLOCK_REALTIME is implementation-defined.
+.P
+If the value of the CLOCK_REALTIME clock is set via
+\fIclock_settime\fR(),
+the new value of the clock shall be used to determine the time at which
+the system shall awaken a thread blocked on an absolute
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+call based upon the CLOCK_REALTIME clock. If the absolute time
+requested at the invocation of such a time service is before the new
+value of the clock, the call shall return immediately as if the clock
+had reached the requested time normally.
+.P
+Setting the value of the CLOCK_REALTIME clock via
+\fIclock_settime\fR()
+shall have no effect on any thread that is blocked on a relative
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+call. Consequently, the call shall return when the requested relative
+interval elapses, independently of the new or old value of the clock.
+.P
+Appropriate privileges to set a particular clock are
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+If _POSIX_CPUTIME is defined, implementations shall support clock ID
+values obtained by invoking
+\fIclock_getcpuclockid\fR(),
+which represent the CPU-time clock of a given process. Implementations
+shall also support the special
+.BR clockid_t
+value CLOCK_PROCESS_CPUTIME_ID, which represents the CPU-time clock of
+the calling process when invoking one of the
+.IR clock_* (\|)
+or
+.IR timer_* (\|)
+functions. For these clock IDs, the values returned by
+\fIclock_gettime\fR()
+and specified by
+\fIclock_settime\fR()
+represent the amount of execution time of the process associated with
+the clock. Changing the value of a CPU-time clock via
+\fIclock_settime\fR()
+shall have no effect on the behavior of the sporadic server scheduling
+policy (see
+.IR "Scheduling Policies").
+.P
+If _POSIX_THREAD_CPUTIME is defined, implementations shall support
+clock ID values obtained by invoking
+\fIpthread_getcpuclockid\fR(),
+which represent the CPU-time clock of a given thread. Implementations
+shall also support the special
+.BR clockid_t
+value CLOCK_THREAD_CPUTIME_ID, which represents the CPU-time clock of
+the calling thread when invoking one of the
+.IR clock_* (\|)
+or
+.IR timer_* (\|)
+functions. For these clock IDs, the values returned by
+\fIclock_gettime\fR()
+and specified by
+\fIclock_settime\fR()
+shall represent the amount of execution time of the thread associated
+with the clock. Changing the value of a CPU-time clock via
+\fIclock_settime\fR()
+shall have no effect on the behavior of the sporadic server scheduling
+policy (see
+.IR "Scheduling Policies").
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+A return value of 0 shall indicate that the call succeeded. A return
+value of \(mi1 shall indicate that an error occurred, and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIclock_getres\fR(),
+\fIclock_gettime\fR(),
+and
+\fIclock_settime\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR clock_id
+argument does not specify a known clock.
+.P
+The
+\fIclock_gettime\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The number of seconds will not fit in an object of type
+.BR time_t .
+.P
+The
+\fIclock_settime\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR tp
+argument to
+\fIclock_settime\fR()
+is outside the range for the given clock ID.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR tp
+argument specified a nanosecond value less than zero or greater than or
+equal to 1\|000 million.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR clock_id
+argument is CLOCK_MONOTONIC.
+.P
+The
+\fIclock_settime\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The requesting process does not have appropriate privileges
+to set the specified clock.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Note that the absolute value of the monotonic clock is meaningless
+(because its origin is arbitrary), and thus there is no need to set it.
+Furthermore, realtime applications can rely on the fact that the value
+of this clock is never set and, therefore, that time intervals measured
+with this clock will not be affected by calls to
+\fIclock_settime\fR().
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "Scheduling Policies",
+.IR "\fIclock_getcpuclockid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclock_nanosleep\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_receive\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_send\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fInanosleep\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_timedlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_timedwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItimer_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItimer_getoverrun\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/clock_nanosleep.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/clock_nanosleep.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..000d3b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/clock_nanosleep.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,261 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CLOCK_NANOSLEEP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+clock_nanosleep
+\(em high resolution sleep with specifiable clock
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+int clock_nanosleep(clockid_t \fIclock_id\fP, int \fIflags\fP,
+    const struct timespec *\fIrqtp\fP, struct timespec *\fIrmtp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+If the flag TIMER_ABSTIME
+is not set in the
+.IR flags
+argument, the
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+function shall cause the current thread to be suspended from execution
+until either the time interval specified by the
+.IR rqtp
+argument has elapsed, or a signal is delivered to the calling thread
+and its action is to invoke a signal-catching function, or the process
+is terminated. The clock used to measure the time shall be the clock
+specified by
+.IR clock_id .
+.P
+If the flag TIMER_ABSTIME is set in the
+.IR flags
+argument, the
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+function shall cause the current thread to be suspended from execution
+until either the time value of the clock specified by
+.IR clock_id
+reaches the absolute time specified by the
+.IR rqtp
+argument, or a signal is delivered to the calling thread and its action
+is to invoke a signal-catching function, or the process is terminated.
+If, at the time of the call, the time value specified by
+.IR rqtp
+is less than or equal to the time value of the specified clock, then
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+shall return immediately and the calling process shall not be
+suspended.
+.P
+The suspension time caused by this function may be longer than
+requested because the argument value is rounded up to an integer
+multiple of the sleep resolution, or because of the scheduling of other
+activity by the system. But, except for the case of being interrupted
+by a signal, the suspension time for the relative
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+function (that is, with the TIMER_ABSTIME flag not set) shall not be
+less than the time interval specified by
+.IR rqtp ,
+as measured by the corresponding clock. The suspension for the absolute
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+function (that is, with the TIMER_ABSTIME flag set) shall be in effect
+at least until the value of the corresponding clock reaches the
+absolute time specified by
+.IR rqtp ,
+except for the case of being interrupted by a signal.
+.P
+The use of the
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+function shall have no effect on the action or blockage of any signal.
+.P
+The
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+function shall fail if the
+.IR clock_id
+argument refers to the CPU-time clock of the calling thread. It is
+unspecified whether
+.IR clock_id
+values of other CPU-time clocks are allowed.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+function returns because the requested time has elapsed, its return
+value shall be zero.
+.P
+If the
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+function returns because it has been interrupted by a signal, it shall
+return the corresponding error value. For the relative
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+function, if the
+.IR rmtp
+argument is non-NULL, the
+.BR timespec
+structure referenced by it shall be updated to contain the amount of
+time remaining in the interval (the requested time minus the time
+actually slept). If the
+.IR rmtp
+argument is NULL, the remaining time is not returned. The absolute
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+function has no effect on the structure referenced by
+.IR rmtp .
+.P
+If
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+fails, it shall return the corresponding error value.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+function was interrupted by a signal.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR rqtp
+argument specified a nanosecond value less than zero or greater than or
+equal to 1\|000 million; or the TIMER_ABSTIME flag was specified in
+flags and the
+.IR rqtp
+argument is outside the range for the clock specified by
+.IR clock_id ;
+or the
+.IR clock_id
+argument does not specify a known clock, or specifies the CPU-time
+clock of the calling thread.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSUP
+The
+.IR clock_id
+argument specifies a clock for which
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+is not supported, such as a CPU-time clock.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Calling
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+with the value TIMER_ABSTIME not set in the
+.IR flags
+argument and with a
+.IR clock_id
+of CLOCK_REALTIME is equivalent to calling
+\fInanosleep\fR()
+with the same
+.IR rqtp
+and
+.IR rmtp
+arguments.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fInanosleep\fR()
+function specifies that the system-wide clock CLOCK_REALTIME is used to
+measure the elapsed time for this time service. However, with the
+introduction of the monotonic clock CLOCK_MONOTONIC a new relative
+sleep function is needed to allow an application to take advantage of
+the special characteristics of this clock.
+.P
+There are many applications in which a process needs to be suspended
+and then activated multiple times in a periodic way; for example, to
+poll the status of a non-interrupting device or to refresh a display
+device. For these cases, it is known that precise periodic activation
+cannot be achieved with a relative
+\fIsleep\fR()
+or
+\fInanosleep\fR()
+function call. Suppose, for example, a periodic process that is
+activated at time
+.IR T 0,
+executes for a while, and then wants to suspend itself until time
+.IR T 0+\c
+.IR T ,
+the period being
+.IR T .
+If this process wants to use the
+\fInanosleep\fR()
+function, it must first call
+\fIclock_gettime\fR()
+to get the current time, then calculate the difference between the
+current time and
+.IR T 0+\c
+.IR T
+and, finally, call
+\fInanosleep\fR()
+using the computed interval. However, the process could be preempted by
+a different process between the two function calls, and in this case
+the interval computed would be wrong; the process would wake up later
+than desired. This problem would not occur with the absolute
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+function, since only one function call would be necessary to suspend
+the process until the desired time. In other cases, however, a relative
+sleep is needed, and that is why both functionalities are required.
+.P
+Although it is possible to implement periodic processes using the
+timers interface, this implementation would require the use of signals,
+and the reservation of some signal numbers. In this regard, the reasons
+for including an absolute version of the
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+function in POSIX.1\(hy2008 are the same as for the inclusion of the relative
+\fInanosleep\fR().
+.P
+It is also possible to implement precise periodic processes using
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR(),
+in which an absolute timeout is specified that takes effect if the
+condition variable involved is never signaled. However, the use of this
+interface is unnatural, and involves performing other operations on
+mutexes and condition variables that imply an unnecessary overhead.
+Furthermore,
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+is not available in implementations that do not support threads.
+.P
+Although the interface of the relative and absolute versions of the new
+high resolution sleep service is the same
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+function, the
+.IR rmtp
+argument is only used in the relative sleep. This argument is needed in
+the relative
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+function to reissue the function call if it is interrupted by a signal,
+but it is not needed in the absolute
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+function call; if the call is interrupted by a signal, the absolute
+\fIclock_nanosleep\fR()
+function can be invoked again with the same
+.IR rqtp
+argument used in the interrupted call.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIclock_getres\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fInanosleep\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsleep\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/clock_settime.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/clock_settime.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1a03aac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/clock_settime.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CLOCK_SETTIME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+clock_settime
+\(em clock and timer functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+int clock_settime(clockid_t \fIclock_id\fP, const struct timespec *\fItp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIclock_getres\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/clog.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/clog.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3fe3620
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/clog.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CLOG "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+clog,
+clogf,
+clogl
+\(em complex natural logarithm functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double complex clog(double complex \fIz\fP);
+float complex clogf(float complex \fIz\fP);
+long double complex clogl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the complex natural (base
+.IR e )
+logarithm of
+.IR z ,
+with a branch cut along the negative real axis.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the complex natural logarithm value, in
+the range of a strip mathematically unbounded along the real axis and
+in the interval [\(mi\fIi\fR\(*p,\ +\fIi\fR\(*p] along the imaginary
+axis.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcexp\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/close.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/close.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..98910e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/close.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,329 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CLOSE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+close
+\(em close a file descriptor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int close(int \fIfildes\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIclose\fR()
+function shall deallocate the file descriptor indicated by
+.IR fildes .
+To deallocate means to make the file descriptor available for return by
+subsequent calls to
+\fIopen\fR()
+or other functions that allocate file descriptors. All outstanding
+record locks owned by the process on the file associated with the file
+descriptor shall be removed (that is, unlocked).
+.P
+If
+\fIclose\fR()
+is interrupted by a signal that is to be caught, it shall return
+\(mi1 with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [EINTR] 
+and the state of
+.IR fildes
+is unspecified. If an I/O error occurred while reading from or writing
+to the file system during
+\fIclose\fR(),
+it may return \(mi1 with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [EIO] ;
+if this error is returned, the state of
+.IR fildes
+is unspecified.
+.P
+When all file descriptors associated with a pipe or FIFO special file
+are closed, any data remaining in the pipe or FIFO shall be discarded.
+.P
+When all file descriptors associated with an open file description have
+been closed, the open file description shall be freed.
+.P
+If the link count of the file is 0, when all file descriptors
+associated with the file are closed, the space occupied by the file
+shall be freed and the file shall no longer be accessible.
+.P
+If a STREAMS-based
+.IR fildes
+is closed and the calling process was previously registered to receive
+a SIGPOLL signal
+for events associated with that STREAM, the calling process shall be
+unregistered for events associated with the STREAM. The last
+\fIclose\fR()
+for a STREAM shall cause the STREAM associated with
+.IR fildes
+to be dismantled. If O_NONBLOCK is not set and there have been no
+signals posted for the STREAM,
+and if there is data on the module's write queue,
+\fIclose\fR()
+shall wait for an unspecified time (for each module and driver) for
+any output to drain before dismantling the STREAM. The time delay
+can be changed via an I_SETCLTIME
+\fIioctl\fR()
+request. If the O_NONBLOCK flag is set, or if there are any pending
+signals,
+\fIclose\fR()
+shall not wait for output to drain, and shall dismantle the STREAM
+immediately.
+.P
+If the implementation supports STREAMS-based pipes, and
+.IR fildes
+is associated with one end of a pipe, the last
+\fIclose\fR()
+shall cause a hangup to occur on the other end of the pipe. In
+addition, if the other end of the pipe has been named by
+\fIfattach\fR(),
+then the last
+\fIclose\fR()
+shall force the named end to be detached by
+\fIfdetach\fR().
+If the named end has no open file descriptors associated with it and
+gets detached, the STREAM associated with that end shall also be
+dismantled.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to the master side of a pseudo-terminal, and this is the last
+close, a SIGHUP signal shall be sent to the
+controlling process, if any, for which the slave side of the
+pseudo-terminal is the controlling terminal. It is unspecified whether
+closing the master side of the pseudo-terminal flushes all queued input
+and output.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to the slave side of a STREAMS-based pseudo-terminal, a
+zero-length message may be sent to the master.
+.P
+When there is an outstanding cancelable asynchronous I/O operation
+against
+.IR fildes
+when
+\fIclose\fR()
+is called, that I/O operation may be canceled. An I/O operation that
+is not canceled completes as if the
+\fIclose\fR()
+operation had not yet occurred. All operations that are not canceled
+shall complete as if the
+\fIclose\fR()
+blocked until the operations completed. The
+\fIclose\fR()
+operation itself need not block awaiting such I/O completion. Whether
+any I/O operation is canceled, and which I/O operation may be
+canceled upon
+\fIclose\fR(),
+is implementation-defined.
+.P
+If a memory mapped file
+or a shared memory object
+remains referenced at the last close (that is, a process has
+it mapped), then the entire contents of the memory object shall
+persist until the memory object becomes unreferenced.
+If this is the last close of a memory mapped file
+or a shared memory object
+and the close results in the memory object becoming unreferenced,
+and the memory object has been unlinked, then the memory object
+shall be removed.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a socket,
+\fIclose\fR()
+shall cause the socket to be destroyed. If the socket is in
+connection-mode, and the SO_LINGER option is set for the socket with
+non-zero linger time, and the socket has untransmitted data, then
+\fIclose\fR()
+shall block for up to the current linger interval until all data is
+transmitted.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned; otherwise, \(mi1
+shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIclose\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a open file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fIclose\fR()
+function was interrupted by a signal.
+.P
+The
+\fIclose\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to the file system.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Reassigning a File Descriptor"
+.P
+The following example closes the file descriptor associated with
+standard output for the current process, re-assigns standard output to
+a new file descriptor, and closes the original file descriptor to clean
+up. This example assumes that the file descriptor 0 (which is the
+descriptor for standard input) is not closed.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+\&...
+int pfd;
+\&...
+close(1);
+dup(pfd);
+close(pfd);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Incidentally, this is exactly what could be achieved using:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+dup2(pfd, 1);
+close(pfd);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Closing a File Descriptor"
+.P
+In the following example,
+\fIclose\fR()
+is used to close
+a file descriptor after an unsuccessful attempt is made to associate that
+file descriptor with a stream.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+#define LOCKFILE "/etc/ptmp"
+\&...
+int pfd;
+FILE *fpfd;
+\&...
+if ((fpfd = fdopen (pfd, "w")) == NULL) {
+    close(pfd);
+    unlink(LOCKFILE);
+    exit(1);
+}
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+An application that had used the
+.IR stdio
+routine
+\fIfopen\fR()
+to open a file should use the corresponding
+\fIfclose\fR()
+routine rather than
+\fIclose\fR().
+Once a file is closed, the file descriptor no longer exists, since the
+integer corresponding to it no longer refers to a file.
+.P
+Implementations may use file descriptors that must be inherited into
+child processes for the child process to remain conforming, such as for
+message catalog or tracing purposes. Therefore, an application that calls
+\fIclose\fR()
+on an arbitrary integer risks non-conforming behavior, and
+\fIclose\fR()
+can only portably be used on file descriptor values that the application
+has obtained through explicit actions, as well as the three file
+descriptors corresponding to the standard file streams. In multi-threaded
+parent applications, the practice of calling
+\fIclose\fR()
+in a loop after
+\fIfork\fR()
+and before an
+.IR exec
+call in order to avoid a race condition of leaking an unintended file
+descriptor into a child process, is therefore unsafe, and the race should
+instead be combatted by opening all file descriptors with the FD_CLOEXEC
+bit set unless the file descriptor is intended to be inherited across
+.IR exec .
+.SH RATIONALE
+The use of interruptible device close routines should be discouraged to
+avoid problems with the implicit closes of file descriptors by
+.IR exec
+and
+\fIexit\fR().
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 only intends to permit such behavior by specifying the
+.BR [EINTR] 
+error condition.
+.P
+Note that the requirement for
+\fIclose\fR()
+on a socket to block for up to the current linger interval is not
+conditional on the O_NONBLOCK setting.
+.P
+The standard developers rejected a proposal to add
+\fIclosefrom\fR()
+to the standard. Because the standard permits implementations to
+use inherited file descriptors as a means of providing a conforming
+environment for the child process, it is not possible to standardize an
+interface that closes arbitrary file descriptors above a certain value
+while still guaranteeing a conforming environment.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.6" ", " "STREAMS",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfattach\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfdetach\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIioctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/closedir.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/closedir.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3a27757
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/closedir.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CLOSEDIR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+closedir
+\(em close a directory stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <dirent.h>
+.P
+int closedir(DIR *\fIdirp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIclosedir\fR()
+function shall close the directory stream referred to by the argument
+.IR dirp .
+Upon return, the value of
+.IR dirp
+may no longer point to an accessible object of the type
+.BR DIR .
+If a file descriptor is used to implement type
+.BR DIR ,
+that file descriptor shall be closed.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIclosedir\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIclosedir\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR dirp
+argument does not refer to an open directory stream.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fIclosedir\fR()
+function was interrupted by a signal.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Closing a Directory Stream"
+.P
+The following program fragment demonstrates how the
+\fIclosedir\fR()
+function is used.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\&...
+    DIR *dir;
+    struct dirent *dp;
+\&...
+    if ((dir = opendir (".")) == NULL) {
+\&...
+    }
+.P
+    while ((dp = readdir (dir)) != NULL) {
+\&...
+    }
+.P
+    closedir(dir);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIdirfd\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfdopendir\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<dirent.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/closelog.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/closelog.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e29a69e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/closelog.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,291 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CLOSELOG "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+closelog,
+openlog,
+setlogmask,
+syslog
+\(em control system log
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <syslog.h>
+.P
+void closelog(void);
+void openlog(const char *\fIident\fP, int \fIlogopt\fP, int \fIfacility\fP);
+int setlogmask(int \fImaskpri\fP);
+void syslog(int \fIpriority\fP, const char *\fImessage\fP, ... /* \fIarguments\fP */);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsyslog\fR()
+function shall send a message to an implementation-defined logging
+facility, which may log it in an implementation-defined system log,
+write it to the system console, forward it to a list of users, or
+forward it to the logging facility on another host over the network.
+The logged message shall include a message header and a message body.
+The message header contains at least a timestamp and a tag string.
+.P
+The message body is generated from the
+.IR message
+and following arguments in the same manner as if these were arguments
+to
+\fIprintf\fR(),
+except that the additional conversion specification
+.BR %m
+shall be recognized; it shall convert no arguments, shall cause the
+output of the error message string associated with the value of
+.IR errno
+on entry to
+\fIsyslog\fR(),
+and may be mixed with argument specifications of the \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR
+form. If a complete conversion specification with the
+.BR m
+conversion specifier character is not just
+.BR %m ,
+the behavior is undefined. A trailing
+<newline>
+may be added if needed.
+.P
+Values of the
+.IR priority
+argument are formed by OR'ing together a severity-level value and an
+optional facility value. If no facility value is specified, the current
+default facility value is used.
+.P
+Possible values of severity level include:
+.IP LOG_EMERG 12
+A panic condition.
+.IP LOG_ALERT 12
+A condition that should be corrected immediately, such as a corrupted
+system database.
+.IP LOG_CRIT 12
+Critical conditions, such as hard device errors.
+.IP LOG_ERR 12
+Errors.
+.IP LOG_WARNING 12
+.br
+Warning messages.
+.IP LOG_NOTICE 12
+Conditions that are not error conditions, but that may require special
+handling.
+.IP LOG_INFO 12
+Informational messages.
+.IP LOG_DEBUG 12
+Messages that contain information normally of use only when debugging a
+program.
+.P
+The facility indicates the application or system component generating
+the message. Possible facility values include:
+.IP LOG_USER 12
+Messages generated by arbitrary processes. This is the default facility
+identifier if none is specified.
+.IP LOG_LOCAL0 12
+Reserved for local use.
+.IP LOG_LOCAL1 12
+Reserved for local use.
+.IP LOG_LOCAL2 12
+Reserved for local use.
+.IP LOG_LOCAL3 12
+Reserved for local use.
+.IP LOG_LOCAL4 12
+Reserved for local use.
+.IP LOG_LOCAL5 12
+Reserved for local use.
+.IP LOG_LOCAL6 12
+Reserved for local use.
+.IP LOG_LOCAL7 12
+Reserved for local use.
+.P
+The
+\fIopenlog\fR()
+function shall set process attributes that affect subsequent calls to
+\fIsyslog\fR().
+The
+.IR ident
+argument is a string that is prepended to every message. The
+.IR logopt
+argument indicates logging options. Values for
+.IR logopt
+are constructed by a bitwise-inclusive OR of zero or more of the
+following:
+.IP LOG_PID 12
+Log the process ID with each message. This is useful for identifying
+specific processes.
+.IP LOG_CONS 12
+Write messages to the system console if they cannot be sent to the
+logging facility. The
+\fIsyslog\fR()
+function ensures that the process does not acquire the console as a
+controlling terminal in the process of writing the message.
+.IP LOG_NDELAY 12
+Open the connection to the logging facility immediately. Normally the
+open is delayed until the first message is logged. This is useful for
+programs that need to manage the order in which file descriptors are
+allocated.
+.IP LOG_ODELAY 12
+Delay open until
+\fIsyslog\fR()
+is called.
+.IP LOG_NOWAIT 12
+Do not wait for child processes that may have been created during the
+course of logging the message. This option should be used by processes
+that enable notification of child termination using SIGCHLD, since
+\fIsyslog\fR()
+may otherwise block waiting for a child whose exit status has already
+been collected.
+.P
+The
+.IR facility
+argument encodes a default facility to be assigned to all messages that
+do not have an explicit facility already encoded. The initial default
+facility is LOG_USER.
+.P
+The
+\fIopenlog\fR()
+and
+\fIsyslog\fR()
+functions may allocate a file descriptor. It is not necessary to call
+\fIopenlog\fR()
+prior to calling
+\fIsyslog\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIcloselog\fR()
+function shall close any open file descriptors allocated by previous
+calls to
+\fIopenlog\fR()
+or
+\fIsyslog\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIsetlogmask\fR()
+function shall set the log priority mask for the current process to
+.IR maskpri
+and return the previous mask. If the
+.IR maskpri
+argument is 0, the current log mask is not modified. Calls by the
+current process to
+\fIsyslog\fR()
+with a priority not set in
+.IR maskpri
+shall be rejected. The default log mask allows all priorities to be
+logged. A call to
+\fIopenlog\fR()
+is not required prior to calling
+\fIsetlogmask\fR().
+.P
+Symbolic constants for use as values of the
+.IR logopt ,
+.IR facility ,
+.IR priority ,
+and
+.IR maskpri
+arguments are defined in the
+.IR <syslog.h> 
+header.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIsetlogmask\fR()
+function shall return the previous log priority mask. The
+\fIcloselog\fR(),
+\fIopenlog\fR(),
+and
+\fIsyslog\fR()
+functions shall not return a value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Using openlog(\|)"
+.P
+The following example causes subsequent calls to
+\fIsyslog\fR()
+to log the process ID with each message, and to write messages to the
+system console if they cannot be sent to the logging facility.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <syslog.h>
+.P
+char *ident = "Process demo";
+int logopt = LOG_PID | LOG_CONS;
+int facility = LOG_USER;
+\&...
+openlog(ident, logopt, facility);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Using setlogmask(\|)"
+.P
+The following example causes subsequent calls to
+\fIsyslog\fR()
+to accept error messages, and to reject all other messages.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <syslog.h>
+.P
+int result;
+int mask = LOG_MASK (LOG_ERR);
+\&...
+result = setlogmask(mask);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Using syslog"
+.P
+The following example sends the message
+.BR \(dqThis is a message\(dq 
+to the default logging facility, marking the message as an error
+message generated by random processes.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <syslog.h>
+.P
+char *message = "This is a message";
+int priority = LOG_ERR | LOG_USER;
+\&...
+syslog(priority, message);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfprintf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<syslog.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/confstr.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/confstr.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..01f2f3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/confstr.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,278 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CONFSTR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+confstr
+\(em get configurable variables
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+size_t confstr(int \fIname\fP, char *\fIbuf\fP, size_t \fIlen\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+function shall return configuration-defined string values. Its use and
+purpose are similar to
+\fIsysconf\fR(),
+but it is used where string values rather than numeric values are
+returned.
+.P
+The
+.IR name
+argument represents the system variable to be queried. The
+implementation shall support the following name values, defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> .
+It may support others:
+.P
+.nf
+_CS_PATH
+_CS_POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFF32_CFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFF32_LDFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFF32_LIBS
+_CS_POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG_CFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG_LDFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG_LIBS
+_CS_POSIX_V7_LP64_OFF64_CFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V7_LP64_OFF64_LDFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V7_LP64_OFF64_LIBS
+_CS_POSIX_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG_CFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG_LDFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG_LIBS
+_CS_POSIX_V7_THREADS_CFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V7_THREADS_LDFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V7_WIDTH_RESTRICTED_ENVS
+_CS_V7_ENV
+_CS_POSIX_V6_ILP32_OFF32_CFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_ILP32_OFF32_LDFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_ILP32_OFF32_LIBS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_ILP32_OFFBIG_CFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_ILP32_OFFBIG_LDFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_ILP32_OFFBIG_LIBS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_LP64_OFF64_CFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_LP64_OFF64_LDFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_LP64_OFF64_LIBS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_LPBIG_OFFBIG_CFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_LPBIG_OFFBIG_LDFLAGS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_LPBIG_OFFBIG_LIBS
+_CS_POSIX_V6_WIDTH_RESTRICTED_ENVS
+_CS_V6_ENV
+.fi
+.P
+If
+.IR len
+is not 0, and if
+.IR name
+has a configuration-defined value,
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+shall copy that value into the
+.IR len -byte
+buffer pointed to by
+.IR buf .
+If the string to be returned is longer than
+.IR len
+bytes, including the terminating null, then
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+shall truncate the string to
+.IR len \(mi1
+bytes and null-terminate the result. The application can detect that
+the string was truncated by comparing the value returned by
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+with
+.IR len .
+.P
+If
+.IR len
+is 0 and
+.IR buf
+is a null pointer, then
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+shall still return the integer value as defined below, but shall not
+return a string. If
+.IR len
+is 0 but
+.IR buf
+is not a null pointer, the result is unspecified.
+.P
+After a call to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+confstr(_CS_V7_ENV, buf, sizeof(buf))
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+the string stored in
+.IR buf
+will contain the
+<space>-separated
+list of variable=value environment variable pairs required by the
+implementation to create a conforming environment, as described in the
+implementations' conformance documentation.
+.P
+If the implementation supports the POSIX shell option, the string
+stored in
+.IR buf
+after a call to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+confstr(_CS_PATH, buf, sizeof(buf))
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+can be used as a value of the
+.IR PATH
+environment variable that accesses all of the standard utilities of
+POSIX.1\(hy2008, if the return value is less than or equal to
+.IR sizeof (\c
+.IR buf ).
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If
+.IR name
+has a configuration-defined value,
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+shall return the size of buffer that would be needed to hold the entire
+configuration-defined value including the terminating null. If this
+return value is greater than
+.IR len ,
+the string returned in
+.IR buf
+is truncated.
+.P
+If
+.IR name
+is invalid,
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+shall return 0 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.P
+If
+.IR name
+does not have a configuration-defined value,
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+shall return 0 and leave
+.IR errno
+unchanged.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR name
+argument is invalid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+An application can distinguish between an invalid
+.IR name
+parameter value and one that corresponds to a configurable variable
+that has no configuration-defined value by checking if
+.IR errno
+is modified. This mirrors the behavior of
+\fIsysconf\fR().
+.P
+The original need for this function was to provide a way of finding the
+configuration-defined default value for the environment variable
+.IR PATH .
+Since
+.IR PATH
+can be modified by the user to include directories that could contain
+utilities replacing the standard utilities in the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, applications
+need a way to determine the system-supplied
+.IR PATH
+environment variable value that contains the correct search path for
+the standard utilities.
+.P
+An application could use:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+confstr(name, (char *)NULL, (size_t)0)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+to find out how big a buffer is needed for the string value; use
+\fImalloc\fR()
+to allocate a buffer to hold the string; and call
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+again to get the string. Alternately, it could allocate a fixed, static
+buffer that is big enough to hold most answers (perhaps 512 or 1\|024
+bytes), but then use
+\fImalloc\fR()
+to allocate a larger buffer if it finds that this is too small.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Application developers can normally determine any configuration
+variable by means of reading from the stream opened by a call to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+popen("command -p getconf variable", "r");
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+function with a
+.IR name
+argument of _CS_PATH returns a string that can be used as a
+.IR PATH
+environment variable setting that will reference the standard shell and
+utilities as described in the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+The
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+function copies the returned string into a buffer supplied by the
+application instead of returning a pointer to a string. This allows a
+cleaner function in some implementations (such as those with
+lightweight threads) and resolves questions about when the application
+must copy the string returned.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfpathconf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.P
+The Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIc99\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/conj.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/conj.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f15209f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/conj.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CONJ "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+conj,
+conjf,
+conjl
+\(em complex conjugate functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double complex conj(double complex \fIz\fP);
+float complex conjf(float complex \fIz\fP);
+long double complex conjl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the complex conjugate of
+.IR z ,
+by reversing the sign of its imaginary part.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions return the complex conjugate value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcarg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcimag\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcproj\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcreal\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/connect.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/connect.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bff7364
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/connect.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,301 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CONNECT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+connect
+\(em connect a socket
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+.P
+int connect(int \fIsocket\fP, const struct sockaddr *\fIaddress\fP,
+    socklen_t \fIaddress_len\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIconnect\fR()
+function shall attempt to make a connection on a connection-mode
+socket or to set or reset the peer address of a connectionless-mode
+socket. The function takes the following arguments:
+.IP "\fIsocket\fR" 12
+Specifies the file descriptor associated with the socket.
+.IP "\fIaddress\fR" 12
+Points to a
+.BR sockaddr
+structure containing the peer address. The length and format of the
+address depend on the address family of the socket.
+.IP "\fIaddress_len\fR" 12
+Specifies the length of the
+.BR sockaddr
+structure pointed to by the
+.IR address
+argument.
+.P
+If the socket has not already been bound to a local address,
+\fIconnect\fR()
+shall bind it to an address which, unless the socket's address family
+is AF_UNIX, is an unused local address.
+.P
+If the initiating socket is not connection-mode, then
+\fIconnect\fR()
+shall set the socket's peer address, and no connection is made. For
+SOCK_DGRAM sockets, the peer address identifies where all datagrams are
+sent on subsequent
+\fIsend\fR()
+functions, and limits the remote sender for subsequent
+\fIrecv\fR()
+functions. If the
+.IR sa_family
+member of
+.IR address
+is AF_UNSPEC, the socket's peer address shall be reset. Note that despite
+no connection being made, the term ``connected'' is used to describe a
+connectionless-mode socket for which a peer address has been set.
+.P
+If the initiating socket is connection-mode, then
+\fIconnect\fR()
+shall attempt to establish a connection to the address specified by the
+.IR address
+argument. If the connection cannot be established immediately and
+O_NONBLOCK is not set for the file descriptor for the socket,
+\fIconnect\fR()
+shall block for up to an unspecified timeout interval until the
+connection is established. If the timeout interval expires before the
+connection is established,
+\fIconnect\fR()
+shall fail and the connection attempt shall be aborted. If
+\fIconnect\fR()
+is interrupted by a signal that is caught while blocked waiting to
+establish a connection,
+\fIconnect\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EINTR] ,
+but the connection request shall not be aborted, and the connection
+shall be established asynchronously.
+.P
+If the connection cannot be established immediately and O_NONBLOCK is
+set for the file descriptor for the socket,
+\fIconnect\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EINPROGRESS] ,
+but the connection request shall not be aborted, and the connection
+shall be established asynchronously. Subsequent calls to
+\fIconnect\fR()
+for the same socket, before the connection is established, shall fail
+and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EALREADY] .
+.P
+When the connection has been established asynchronously,
+\fIpselect\fR(),
+\fIselect\fR(),
+and
+\fIpoll\fR()
+shall indicate that the file descriptor for the socket is ready for
+writing.
+.P
+The socket in use may require the process to have appropriate
+privileges to use the
+\fIconnect\fR()
+function.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIconnect\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIconnect\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EADDRNOTAVAIL
+.br
+The specified address is not available from the local machine.
+.TP
+.BR EAFNOSUPPORT
+.br
+The specified address is not a valid address for the address family of
+the specified socket.
+.TP
+.BR EALREADY
+A connection request is already in progress for the specified socket.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR socket
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR ECONNREFUSED
+.br
+The target address was not listening for connections or refused the
+connection request.
+.TP
+.BR EINPROGRESS
+O_NONBLOCK is set for the file descriptor for the socket and the
+connection cannot be immediately established; the connection shall be
+established asynchronously.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The attempt to establish a connection was interrupted by delivery of a
+signal that was caught; the connection shall be established
+asynchronously.
+.TP
+.BR EISCONN
+The specified socket is connection-mode and is already connected.
+.TP
+.BR ENETUNREACH
+.br
+No route to the network is present.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSOCK
+The
+.IR socket
+argument does not refer to a socket.
+.TP
+.BR EPROTOTYPE
+The specified address has a different type than the socket bound to the
+specified peer address.
+.TP
+.BR ETIMEDOUT
+The attempt to connect timed out before a connection was made.
+.P
+If the address family of the socket is AF_UNIX, then
+\fIconnect\fR()
+shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to the file system.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+pathname in
+.IR address .
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of the pathname does not name an existing file or the
+pathname is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix of the pathname in
+.IR address
+names an existing file that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link
+to a directory, or the pathname in
+.IR address
+contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file that
+is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.P
+The
+\fIconnect\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied for a component of the path prefix; or
+write access to the named socket is denied.
+.TP
+.BR EADDRINUSE
+Attempt to establish a connection that uses addresses that are already
+in use.
+.TP
+.BR ECONNRESET
+Remote host reset the connection request.
+.TP
+.BR EHOSTUNREACH
+.br
+The destination host cannot be reached (probably because the host is
+down or a remote router cannot reach it).
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR address_len
+argument is not a valid length for the address family; or invalid
+address family in the
+.BR sockaddr
+structure.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the pathname in
+.IR address .
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENETDOWN
+The local network interface used to reach the destination is down.
+.TP
+.BR ENOBUFS
+No buffer space is available.
+.TP
+.BR EOPNOTSUPP
+The socket is listening and cannot be connected.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If
+\fIconnect\fR()
+fails, the state of the socket is unspecified. Conforming applications
+should close the file descriptor and create a new socket before
+attempting to reconnect.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIaccept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIbind\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetsockname\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpoll\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpselect\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsend\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshutdown\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/copysign.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/copysign.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..082437a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/copysign.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+'\" et
+.TH COPYSIGN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+copysign,
+copysignf,
+copysignl
+\(em number manipulation function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double copysign(double \fIx\fP, double \fIy\fP);
+float copysignf(float \fIx\fP, float \fIy\fP);
+long double copysignl(long double \fIx\fP, long double \fIy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall produce a value with the magnitude of
+.IR x
+and the sign of
+.IR y .
+On implementations that represent a signed zero but do not treat
+negative zero consistently in arithmetic operations, these functions
+regard the sign of zero as positive.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return a value with
+the magnitude of
+.IR x
+and the sign of
+.IR y .
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsignbit\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cos.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cos.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e4c2fd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cos.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+'\" et
+.TH COS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cos,
+cosf,
+cosl
+\(em cosine function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double cos(double \fIx\fP);
+float cosf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double cosl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the cosine of their argument
+.IR x ,
+measured in radians.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the cosine of
+.IR x .
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0, the value 1.0 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-Inf, a domain error shall occur, and a NaN shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The
+.IR x
+argument is \(+-Inf.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Taking the Cosine of a 45-Degree Angle"
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <math.h>
+\&...
+double radians = 45 * M_PI / 180;
+double result;
+\&...
+result = cos(radians);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+These functions may lose accuracy when their argument is near an odd
+multiple of \(*p/2 or is far from 0.
+.P
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIacos\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsin\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItan\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cosh.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cosh.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..73d8350
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cosh.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+'\" et
+.TH COSH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cosh,
+coshf,
+coshl
+\(em hyperbolic cosine functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double cosh(double \fIx\fP);
+float coshf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double coshl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the hyperbolic cosine of their argument
+.IR x .
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the hyperbolic
+cosine of
+.IR x .
+.P
+If the correct value would cause overflow, a range error shall occur
+and
+\fIcosh\fR(),
+\fIcoshf\fR(),
+and
+\fIcoshl\fR()
+shall return the value of the macro HUGE_VAL, HUGE_VALF, and HUGE_VALL,
+respectively.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0, the value 1.0 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-Inf, +Inf shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result would cause an overflow.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the overflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.P
+For IEEE\ Std\ 754\(hy1985
+.BR double ,
+710.5 < |\fIx\fP| implies that
+.IR cosh (\c
+.IR x )
+has overflowed.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIacosh\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsinh\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItanh\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cosl.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cosl.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2ee1234
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cosl.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH COSL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cosl
+\(em cosine function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+long double cosl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIcos\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cpow.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cpow.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..34eb021
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cpow.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CPOW "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cpow,
+cpowf,
+cpowl
+\(em complex power functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double complex cpow(double complex \fIx\fP, double complex \fIy\fP);
+float complex cpowf(float complex \fIx\fP, float complex \fIy\fP);
+long double complex cpowl(long double complex \fIx\fP,
+    long double complex \fIy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the complex power function
+\fIx\s-3\uy\d\s+3\fR, with a branch cut for the first parameter along
+the negative real axis.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the complex power function value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcabs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcsqrt\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cproj.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cproj.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f521162
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/cproj.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CPROJ "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+cproj,
+cprojf,
+cprojl
+\(em complex projection functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double complex cproj(double complex \fIz\fP);
+float complex cprojf(float complex \fIz\fP);
+long double complex cprojl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute a projection of
+.IR z
+onto the Riemann sphere:
+.IR z
+projects to
+.IR z ,
+except that all complex infinities (even those with one infinite part
+and one NaN part) project to positive infinity on the real axis. If
+.IR z
+has an infinite part, then
+.IR cproj (\c
+.IR z )
+shall be equivalent to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+INFINITY + I * copysign(0.0, cimag(z))
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the value of the projection onto the
+Riemann sphere.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Two topologies are commonly used in complex mathematics: the complex
+plane with its continuum of infinities, and the Riemann sphere with its
+single infinity. The complex plane is better suited for transcendental
+functions, the Riemann sphere for algebraic functions. The complex
+types with their multiplicity of infinities provide a useful (though
+imperfect) model for the complex plane. The
+\fIcproj\fR()
+function helps model the Riemann sphere by mapping all infinities to
+one, and should be used just before any operation, especially
+comparisons, that might give spurious results for any of the other
+infinities. Note that a complex value with one infinite part and one
+NaN part is regarded as an infinity, not a NaN, because if one part is
+infinite, the complex value is infinite independent of the value of the
+other part. For the same reason,
+\fIcabs\fR()
+returns an infinity if its argument has an infinite part and a NaN
+part.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcarg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcimag\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIconj\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcreal\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/creal.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/creal.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0953fd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/creal.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CREAL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+creal,
+crealf,
+creall
+\(em complex real functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double creal(double complex \fIz\fP);
+float crealf(float complex \fIz\fP);
+long double creall(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the real part of
+.IR z .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the real part value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+For a variable
+.IR z
+of type
+.BR complex :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+z == creal(z) + cimag(z)*I
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcarg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcimag\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIconj\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcproj\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/creat.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/creat.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e97c847
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/creat.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CREAT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+creat
+\(em create a new file or rewrite an existing one
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+.P
+int creat(const char *\fIpath\fP, mode_t \fImode\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIcreat\fR()
+function shall behave as if it is implemented as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int creat(const char *path, mode_t mode)
+{
+    return open(path, O_WRONLY|O_CREAT|O_TRUNC, mode);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Creating a File"
+.P
+The following example creates the file
+.BR /tmp/file
+with read and write permissions for the file owner and read permission
+for group and others. The resulting file descriptor is assigned to the
+.IR fd
+variable.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <fcntl.h>
+\&...
+int fd;
+mode_t mode = S_IRUSR | S_IWUSR | S_IRGRP | S_IROTH;
+char *pathname = "/tmp/file";
+\&...
+fd = creat(pathname, mode);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIcreat\fR()
+function is redundant. Its services are also provided by the
+\fIopen\fR()
+function. It has been included primarily for historical purposes since
+many existing applications depend on it. It is best considered a part
+of the C binding rather than a function that should be provided in
+other languages.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImknod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fcntl.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/crypt.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/crypt.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..697bed3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/crypt.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,155 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CRYPT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+crypt
+\(em string encoding function
+(\fBCRYPT\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+char *crypt(const char *\fIkey\fP, const char *\fIsalt\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIcrypt\fR()
+function is a string encoding function. The algorithm is
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+The
+.IR key
+argument points to a string to be encoded. The
+.IR salt
+argument shall be a string of at least two bytes in length not
+including the null character chosen from the set:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
+A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
+0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 . /
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The first two bytes of this string may be used to perturb the
+encoding algorithm.
+.P
+The return value of
+\fIcrypt\fR()
+points to static data that is overwritten by each call.
+.P
+The
+\fIcrypt\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIcrypt\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the encoded string. The first two bytes
+of the returned value shall be those of the
+.IR salt
+argument. Otherwise, it shall return a null pointer and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIcrypt\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOSYS
+The functionality is not supported on this implementation.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Encoding Passwords"
+.P
+The following example finds a user database entry matching a particular
+user name and changes the current password to a new password. The
+\fIcrypt\fR()
+function generates an encoded version of each password. The
+first call to
+\fIcrypt\fR()
+produces an encoded version of the old password; that encoded password
+is then compared to the password stored in the user database. The
+second call to
+\fIcrypt\fR()
+encodes the new password before it is stored.
+.P
+The
+\fIputpwent\fR()
+function, used in the following example, is not part of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <pwd.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+int valid_change;
+int pfd;  /* Integer for file descriptor returned by open(). */
+FILE *fpfd;  /* File pointer for use in putpwent(). */
+struct passwd *p;
+char user[100];
+char oldpasswd[100];
+char newpasswd[100];
+char savepasswd[100];
+\&...
+valid_change = 0;
+while ((p = getpwent()) != NULL) {
+    /* Change entry if found. */
+    if (strcmp(p->pw_name, user) == 0) {
+        if (strcmp(p->pw_passwd, crypt(oldpasswd, p->pw_passwd)) == 0) {
+            strcpy(savepasswd, crypt(newpasswd, user));
+            p->pw_passwd = savepasswd;
+            valid_change = 1;
+        }
+        else {
+            fprintf(stderr, "Old password is not valid\en");
+        }
+    }
+    /* Put passwd entry into ptmp. */
+    putpwent(p, fpfd);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The values returned by this function need not be portable among
+XSI-conformant systems.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIencrypt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetkey\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/csin.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/csin.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..98c185c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/csin.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CSIN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+csin,
+csinf,
+csinl
+\(em complex sine functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double complex csin(double complex \fIz\fP);
+float complex csinf(float complex \fIz\fP);
+long double complex csinl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the complex sine of
+.IR z .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the complex sine value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcasin\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/csinh.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/csinh.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9cd401d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/csinh.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CSINH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+csinh,
+csinhf,
+csinhl
+\(em complex hyperbolic sine functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double complex csinh(double complex \fIz\fP);
+float complex csinhf(float complex \fIz\fP);
+long double complex csinhl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the complex hyperbolic sine of
+.IR z .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the complex hyperbolic sine value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcasinh\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/csinl.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/csinl.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2c78758
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/csinl.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CSINL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+csinl
+\(em complex sine functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+long double complex csinl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIcsin\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/csqrt.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/csqrt.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..947a09a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/csqrt.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CSQRT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+csqrt,
+csqrtf,
+csqrtl
+\(em complex square root functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double complex csqrt(double complex \fIz\fP);
+float complex csqrtf(float complex \fIz\fP);
+long double complex csqrtl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the complex square root of
+.IR z ,
+with a branch cut along the negative real axis.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the complex square root value, in the
+range of the right half-plane (including the imaginary axis).
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcabs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcpow\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ctan.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ctan.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..67525a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ctan.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CTAN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ctan,
+ctanf,
+ctanl
+\(em complex tangent functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double complex ctan(double complex \fIz\fP);
+float complex ctanf(float complex \fIz\fP);
+long double complex ctanl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the complex tangent of
+.IR z .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the complex tangent value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcatan\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ctanh.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ctanh.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f174d10
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ctanh.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CTANH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ctanh,
+ctanhf,
+ctanhl
+\(em complex hyperbolic tangent functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+double complex ctanh(double complex \fIz\fP);
+float complex ctanhf(float complex \fIz\fP);
+long double complex ctanhl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the complex hyperbolic tangent of
+.IR z .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the complex hyperbolic tangent value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcatanh\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<complex.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ctanl.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ctanl.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba2ee73
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ctanl.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CTANL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ctanl
+\(em complex tangent functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <complex.h>
+.P
+long double complex ctanl(long double complex \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIctan\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ctermid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ctermid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4fd8f2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ctermid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CTERMID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ctermid
+\(em generate a pathname for the controlling terminal
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+char *ctermid(char *\fIs\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIctermid\fR()
+function shall generate a string that, when used as a pathname,
+refers to the current controlling terminal for the current process. If
+\fIctermid\fR()
+returns a pathname, access to the file is not guaranteed.
+.P
+The
+\fIctermid\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe if called with a NULL parameter.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If
+.IR s
+is a null pointer, the string shall be generated in an area that may be
+static, the address of which shall be returned. The application shall
+not modify the string returned. The returned pointer might be invalidated
+or the string content might be overwritten by a subsequent call to
+\fIctermid\fR().
+If
+.IR s
+is not a null pointer,
+.IR s
+is assumed to point to a character array of at least L_ctermid bytes;
+the string is placed in this array and the value of
+.IR s
+shall be returned. The symbolic constant L_ctermid is defined in
+.IR <stdio.h> ,
+and shall have a value greater than 0.
+.P
+The
+\fIctermid\fR()
+function shall return an empty string if the pathname that would refer
+to the controlling terminal cannot be determined, or if the function is
+unsuccessful.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Determining the Controlling Terminal for the Current Process"
+.P
+The following example returns a pointer to a string that identifies the
+controlling terminal for the current process. The pathname for the
+terminal is stored in the array pointed to by the
+.IR ptr
+argument, which has a size of L_ctermid bytes, as indicated by the
+.IR term
+argument.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+char term[L_ctermid];
+char *ptr;
+.P
+ptr = ctermid(term);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The difference between
+\fIctermid\fR()
+and
+\fIttyname\fR()
+is that
+\fIttyname\fR()
+must be handed a file descriptor and return a path of the terminal
+associated with that file descriptor, while
+\fIctermid\fR()
+returns a string (such as
+.BR \(dq/dev/tty\(dq )
+that refers to the current controlling terminal if used as a
+pathname.
+.SH RATIONALE
+L_ctermid
+must be defined appropriately for a given implementation and must be
+greater than zero so that array declarations using it are accepted by
+the compiler. The value includes the terminating null byte.
+.P
+Conforming applications that use multiple threads cannot call
+\fIctermid\fR()
+with NULL as the parameter. If
+.IR s
+is not NULL, the
+\fIctermid\fR()
+function generates a string that, when used as a pathname, refers to
+the current controlling terminal for the current process. If
+.IR s
+is NULL, the return value of
+\fIctermid\fR()
+is undefined.
+.P
+There is no additional burden on the programmer\(emchanging to use a
+hypothetical thread-safe version of
+\fIctermid\fR()
+along with allocating a buffer is more of a burden than merely
+allocating a buffer. Application code should not assume that the
+returned string is short, as some implementations have more than two
+pathname components before reaching a logical device name.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIttyname\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ctime.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ctime.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..00681b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ctime.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
+'\" et
+.TH CTIME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ctime,
+ctime_r
+\(em convert a time value to a date and time string
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+char *ctime(const time_t *\fIclock\fP);
+char *ctime_r(const time_t *\fIclock\fP, char *\fIbuf\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIctime\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIctime\fR()
+function shall convert the time pointed to by
+.IR clock ,
+representing time in seconds since the Epoch, to local time in the form
+of a string. It shall be equivalent to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+asctime(localtime(clock))
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+\fIasctime\fR(),
+\fIctime\fR(),
+\fIgmtime\fR(),
+and
+\fIlocaltime\fR()
+functions shall return values in one of two static objects: a
+broken-down time structure and an array of
+.BR char .
+Execution of any of the functions may overwrite the information
+returned in either of these objects by any of the other functions.
+.P
+The
+\fIctime\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.P
+The
+\fIctime_r\fR()
+function shall convert the calendar time pointed to by
+.IR clock
+to local time in exactly the same form as
+\fIctime\fR()
+and put the string into the array pointed to by
+.IR buf
+(which shall be at least 26 bytes in size) and return
+.IR buf .
+.P
+Unlike
+\fIctime\fR(),
+the
+\fIctime_r\fR()
+function is not required to set
+.IR tzname .
+If
+\fIctime_r\fR()
+does not set
+.IR tzname ,
+it shall not set
+.IR daylight
+and shall not set
+.IR timezone .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIctime\fR()
+function shall return the pointer returned by
+\fIasctime\fR()
+with that broken-down time as an argument.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIctime_r\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the string pointed to by
+.IR buf .
+When an error is encountered, a null pointer shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+These functions are included only for compatibility with older
+implementations. They have undefined behavior if the resulting string
+would be too long, so the use of these functions should be discouraged.
+On implementations that do not detect output string length overflow, it
+is possible to overflow the output buffers in such a way as to cause
+applications to fail, or possible system security violations. Also,
+these functions do not support localized date and time formats. To
+avoid these problems, applications should use
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+to generate strings from broken-down times.
+.P
+Values for the broken-down time structure can be obtained by calling
+\fIgmtime\fR()
+or
+\fIlocaltime\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIctime_r\fR()
+function is thread-safe and shall return values in a user-supplied
+buffer instead of possibly using a static data area that may be
+overwritten by each call.
+.P
+Attempts to use
+\fIctime\fR()
+or
+\fIctime_r\fR()
+for times before the Epoch or for times beyond the year 9999 produce
+undefined results. Refer to
+.IR "\fIasctime\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH RATIONALE
+The standard developers decided to mark the
+\fIctime\fR()
+and
+\fIctime_r\fR()
+functions obsolescent even though they are in the ISO\ C standard due to the
+possibility of buffer overflow. The ISO\ C standard also provides the
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+function which can be used to avoid these problems.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+These functions may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIasctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdifftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgmtime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlocaltime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImktime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrptime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIutime\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/daylight.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/daylight.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5a0836
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/daylight.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DAYLIGHT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+daylight
+\(em daylight savings time flag
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+extern int daylight;
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fItzset\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dbm_clearerr.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dbm_clearerr.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4047ec5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dbm_clearerr.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,403 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DBM_CLEARERR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+dbm_clearerr,
+dbm_close,
+dbm_delete,
+dbm_error,
+dbm_fetch,
+dbm_firstkey,
+dbm_nextkey,
+dbm_open,
+dbm_store
+\(em database functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ndbm.h>
+.P
+int dbm_clearerr(DBM *\fIdb\fP);
+void dbm_close(DBM *\fIdb\fP);
+int dbm_delete(DBM *\fIdb\fP, datum \fIkey\fP);
+int dbm_error(DBM *\fIdb\fP);
+datum dbm_fetch(DBM *\fIdb\fP, datum \fIkey\fP);
+datum dbm_firstkey(DBM *\fIdb\fP);
+datum dbm_nextkey(DBM *\fIdb\fP);
+DBM *dbm_open(const char *\fIfile\fP, int \fIopen_flags\fP, mode_t \fIfile_mode\fP);
+int dbm_store(DBM *\fIdb\fP, datum \fIkey\fP, datum \fIcontent\fP, int \fIstore_mode\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These functions create, access, and modify a database.
+.P
+A
+.BR datum
+consists of at least two members,
+.IR dptr
+and
+.IR dsize .
+The
+.IR dptr
+member points to an object that is
+.IR dsize
+bytes in length. Arbitrary binary data, as well as character strings,
+may be stored in the object pointed to by
+.IR dptr .
+.P
+A database shall be stored in one or two files. When one file is used,
+the name of the database file shall be formed by appending the suffix
+.BR .db
+to the
+.IR file
+argument given to
+\fIdbm_open\fR().
+When two files are used, the names of the database files shall be
+formed by appending the suffixes
+.BR .dir
+and
+.BR .pag
+respectively to the
+.IR file
+argument.
+.P
+The
+\fIdbm_open\fR()
+function shall open a database. The
+.IR file
+argument to the function is the pathname of the database. The
+.IR open_flags
+argument has the same meaning as the
+.IR flags
+argument of
+\fIopen\fR()
+except that a database opened for write-only access opens the files for
+read and write access and the behavior of the O_APPEND flag
+is unspecified. The
+.IR file_mode
+argument has the same meaning as the third argument of
+\fIopen\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIdbm_open\fR()
+function need not accept pathnames longer than
+{PATH_MAX}\(mi4
+bytes (including the terminating null), or pathnames with a last
+component longer than
+{NAME_MAX}\(mi4
+bytes (excluding the terminating null).
+.P
+The
+\fIdbm_close\fR()
+function shall close a database. The application shall ensure that
+argument
+.IR db
+is a pointer to a
+.BR dbm
+structure that has been returned from a call to
+\fIdbm_open\fR().
+.P
+These database functions shall support an internal block size large
+enough to support key/content pairs of at least 1\|023 bytes.
+.P
+The
+\fIdbm_fetch\fR()
+function shall read a record from a database. The argument
+.IR db
+is a pointer to a database structure that has been returned from a call
+to
+\fIdbm_open\fR().
+The argument
+.IR key
+is a
+.BR datum
+that has been initialized by the application to the value of
+the key that matches the key of the record the program is fetching.
+.P
+The
+\fIdbm_store\fR()
+function shall write a record to a database. The argument
+.IR db
+is a pointer to a database structure that has been returned from a call
+to
+\fIdbm_open\fR().
+The argument
+.IR key
+is a
+.BR datum
+that has been initialized by the application to the value of the key
+that identifies (for subsequent reading, writing, or deleting) the
+record the application is writing. The argument
+.IR content
+is a
+.BR datum
+that has been initialized by the application to the value of the record
+the program is writing. The argument
+.IR store_mode
+controls whether
+\fIdbm_store\fR()
+replaces any pre-existing record that has the same key that is
+specified by the
+.IR key
+argument. The application shall set
+.IR store_mode
+to either DBM_INSERT or DBM_REPLACE. If the database contains a record
+that matches the
+.IR key
+argument and
+.IR store_mode
+is DBM_REPLACE, the existing record shall be replaced with the new
+record. If the database contains a record that matches the
+.IR key
+argument and
+.IR store_mode
+is DBM_INSERT, the existing record shall be left unchanged and the new
+record ignored. If the database does not contain a record that matches
+the
+.IR key
+argument and
+.IR store_mode
+is either DBM_INSERT or DBM_REPLACE, the new record shall be inserted
+in the database.
+.P
+If the sum of a key/content pair exceeds the internal block size, the
+result is unspecified. Moreover, the application shall ensure that all
+key/content pairs that hash together fit on a single block. The
+\fIdbm_store\fR()
+function shall return an error in the event that a disk block fills
+with inseparable data.
+.P
+The
+\fIdbm_delete\fR()
+function shall delete a record and its key from the database. The
+argument
+.IR db
+is a pointer to a database structure that has been returned from a call
+to
+\fIdbm_open\fR().
+The argument
+.IR key
+is a
+.BR datum
+that has been initialized by the application to the value of
+the key that identifies the record the program is deleting.
+.P
+The
+\fIdbm_firstkey\fR()
+function shall return the first key in the database. The argument
+.IR db
+is a pointer to a database structure that has been returned from a call
+to
+\fIdbm_open\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIdbm_nextkey\fR()
+function shall return the next key in the database. The argument
+.IR db
+is a pointer to a database structure that has been returned from a call
+to
+\fIdbm_open\fR().
+The application shall ensure that the
+\fIdbm_firstkey\fR()
+function is called before calling
+\fIdbm_nextkey\fR().
+Subsequent calls to
+\fIdbm_nextkey\fR()
+return the next key until all of the keys in the database have been
+returned.
+.P
+The
+\fIdbm_error\fR()
+function shall return the error condition of the database. The argument
+.IR db
+is a pointer to a database structure that has been returned from a call
+to
+\fIdbm_open\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIdbm_clearerr\fR()
+function shall clear the error condition of the database. The argument
+.IR db
+is a pointer to a database structure that has been returned from a call
+to
+\fIdbm_open\fR().
+.P
+The
+.IR dptr
+pointers returned by these functions may point into static storage that
+may be changed by subsequent calls.
+.P
+These functions need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIdbm_store\fR()
+and
+\fIdbm_delete\fR()
+functions shall return 0 when they succeed and a negative value when
+they fail.
+.P
+The
+\fIdbm_store\fR()
+function shall return 1 if it is called with a
+.IR flags
+value of DBM_INSERT and the function finds an existing record with the
+same key.
+.P
+The
+\fIdbm_error\fR()
+function shall return 0 if the error condition is not set and return a
+non-zero value if the error condition is set.
+.P
+The return value of
+\fIdbm_clearerr\fR()
+is unspecified.
+.P
+The
+\fIdbm_firstkey\fR()
+and
+\fIdbm_nextkey\fR()
+functions shall return a key
+.BR datum .
+When the end of the database is reached, the
+.IR dptr
+member of the key is a null pointer. If an error is detected, the
+.IR dptr
+member of the key shall be a null pointer and the error condition of
+the database shall be set.
+.P
+The
+\fIdbm_fetch\fR()
+function shall return a content
+.BR datum .
+If no record in the database matches the key or if an error condition
+has been detected in the database, the
+.IR dptr
+member of the content shall be a null pointer.
+.P
+The
+\fIdbm_open\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to a database structure. If an error
+is detected during the operation,
+\fIdbm_open\fR()
+shall return a (\c
+.BR "DBM *" )0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The following code can be used to traverse the database:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+for(key = dbm_firstkey(db); key.dptr != NULL; key = dbm_nextkey(db))
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR dbm_ *
+functions provided in this library should not be confused in any way
+with those of a general-purpose database management system. These
+functions do not provide for multiple search keys per entry, they do
+not protect against multi-user access (in other words they do not lock
+records or files), and they do not provide the many other useful
+database functions that are found in more robust database management
+systems. Creating and updating databases by use of these functions is
+relatively slow because of data copies that occur upon hash
+collisions. These functions are useful for applications requiring fast
+lookup of relatively static information that is to be indexed by a
+single key.
+.P
+Note that a strictly conforming application is extremely limited by
+these functions: since there is no way to determine that the keys in
+use do not all hash to the same value (although that would be rare), a
+strictly conforming application cannot be guaranteed that it can store
+more than one block's worth of data in the database. As long as a key
+collision does not occur, additional data may be stored, but because
+there is no way to determine whether an error is due to a key collision
+or some other error condition (\c
+\fIdbm_error\fR()
+being effectively a Boolean), once an error is detected, the
+application is effectively limited to guessing what the error might be
+if it wishes to continue using these functions.
+.P
+The
+\fIdbm_delete\fR()
+function need not physically reclaim file space, although it does make
+it available for reuse by the database.
+.P
+After calling
+\fIdbm_store\fR()
+or
+\fIdbm_delete\fR()
+during a pass through the keys by
+\fIdbm_firstkey\fR()
+and
+\fIdbm_nextkey\fR(),
+the application should reset the database by calling
+\fIdbm_firstkey\fR()
+before again calling
+\fIdbm_nextkey\fR().
+The contents of these files are unspecified and may not be portable.
+.P
+Applications should take care that database pathname arguments
+specified to
+\fIdbm_open\fR()
+are not prefixes of unrelated files. This might be done, for example,
+by placing databases in a separate directory.
+.P
+Since some implementations use three characters for a suffix and others
+use four characters for a suffix, applications should ensure that the
+maximum portable pathname length passed to
+\fIdbm_open\fR()
+is no greater than
+{PATH_MAX}\(mi4
+bytes, with the last component of the pathname no greater than
+{NAME_MAX}\(mi4
+bytes.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Previously the standard required the database to be stored in two
+files, one file being a directory containing a bitmap of keys and
+having
+.BR .dir
+as its suffix. The second file containing all data and having
+.BR .pag
+as its suffix. This has been changed not to specify the use of the
+files and to allow newer implementations of the Berkeley DB interface
+using a single file that have evolved while remaining compatible with
+the application programming interface. The standard developers
+considered removing the specific suffixes altogether but decided to
+retain them so as not to pollute the application file name space more
+than necessary and to allow for portable backups of the database.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<ndbm.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/difftime.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/difftime.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7027e44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/difftime.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DIFFTIME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+difftime
+\(em compute the difference between two calendar time values
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+double difftime(time_t \fItime1\fP, time_t \fItime0\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIdifftime\fR()
+function shall compute the difference between two calendar times (as
+returned by
+\fItime\fR()):
+.IR time 1\(mi
+.IR time 0.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIdifftime\fR()
+function shall return the difference expressed in seconds as a type
+.BR double .
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIasctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgmtime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlocaltime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImktime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrptime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIutime\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dirfd.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dirfd.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a3f1b5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dirfd.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DIRFD "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+dirfd
+\(em extract the file descriptor used by a DIR stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <dirent.h>
+.P
+int dirfd(DIR *\fIdirp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIdirfd\fR()
+function shall return a file descriptor referring to the same directory
+as the
+.IR dirp
+argument. This file descriptor shall be closed by a call to
+\fIclosedir\fR().
+If any attempt is made to close the file descriptor, or to modify the
+state of the associated description, other than by means of
+\fIclosedir\fR(),
+\fIreaddir\fR(),
+\fIreaddir_r\fR(),
+\fIrewinddir\fR(),
+or
+\fIseekdir\fR(),
+the behavior is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIdirfd\fR()
+function shall return an integer which contains a file descriptor for
+the stream pointed to by
+.IR dirp .
+Otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and may set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIdirfd\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR dirp
+argument does not refer to a valid directory stream.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSUP
+The implementation does not support the association of a file
+descriptor with a directory.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIdirfd\fR()
+function is intended to be a mechanism by which an application may
+obtain a file descriptor to use for the
+\fIfchdir\fR()
+function.
+.SH RATIONALE
+This interface was introduced because the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not make public
+the
+.BR DIR
+data structure. Applications tend to use the
+\fIfchdir\fR()
+function on the file descriptor returned by this interface, and this
+has proven useful for security reasons; in particular, it is a better
+technique than others where directory names might change.
+.P
+The description uses the term ``a file descriptor'' rather than ``the
+file descriptor''. The implication intended is that an implementation
+that does not use an
+.IR fd
+for
+\fIopendir\fR()
+could still
+\fIopen\fR()
+the directory to implement the
+\fIdirfd\fR()
+function. Such a descriptor must be closed later during a call to
+\fIclosedir\fR().
+.P
+An implementation that does not support file descriptors referring to
+directories may fail with
+.BR [ENOTSUP] .
+.P
+If it is necessary to allocate an
+.IR fd
+to be returned by
+\fIdirfd\fR(),
+it should be done at the time of a call to
+\fIopendir\fR().
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIclosedir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfchdir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfdopendir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfileno\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIreaddir\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<dirent.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dirname.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dirname.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..41e8bd5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dirname.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,162 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DIRNAME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+dirname
+\(em report the parent directory name of a file pathname
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <libgen.h>
+.P
+char *dirname(char *\fIpath\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIdirname\fR()
+function shall take a pointer to a character string that contains a
+pathname, and return a pointer to a string that is a pathname of the
+parent directory of that file. Trailing
+.BR '/' 
+characters in the path are not counted as part of the path.
+.P
+If
+.IR path
+does not contain a
+.BR '/' ,
+then
+\fIdirname\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the string
+.BR \(dq.\(dq .
+If
+.IR path
+is a null pointer or points to an empty string,
+\fIdirname\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the string
+.BR \(dq.\(dq .
+.P
+The
+\fIdirname\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIdirname\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to a string that is the parent
+directory of
+.IR path .
+If
+.IR path
+is a null pointer or points to an empty string, a pointer to a string
+.BR \(dq.\(dq 
+is returned.
+.P
+The
+\fIdirname\fR()
+function may modify the string pointed to by
+.IR path ,
+and may return a pointer to internal storage. The returned pointer might
+be invalidated or the storage might be overwritten by a subsequent call to
+\fIdirname\fR().
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following code fragment reads a pathname, changes the current
+working directory to the parent directory, and opens the file.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+char *path = NULL, *pathcopy;
+size_t buflen = 0;
+ssize_t linelen = 0;
+int fd;
+.P
+linelen = getline(&path, &buflen, stdin);
+.P
+path[linelen-1] = 0;
+pathcopy = strdup(path);
+if (chdir(dirname(pathcopy)) < 0) {
+    ...
+}
+if ((fd = open(basename(path), O_RDONLY)) >= 0) {
+    ...
+    close (fd);
+}
+\&...
+free (pathcopy);
+free (path);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Sample Input and Output Strings for dirname(\|)"
+.P
+In the following table, the input string is the value pointed to by
+.IR path ,
+and the output string is the return value of the
+\fIdirname\fR()
+function.
+.TS
+center tab(!) box;
+cB | cB
+lf5 | lf5.
+Input String!Output String
+_
+"/usr/lib"!"/usr"
+"/usr/"!"/"
+"usr"!"."
+"/"!"/"
+"."!"."
+".."!"."
+.TE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIdirname\fR()
+and
+\fIbasename\fR()
+functions together yield a complete pathname. The expression
+\fIdirname\fP\^(\fIpath\fP) obtains the pathname of the directory where
+\fIbasename\fP\^(\fIpath\fP) is found.
+.P
+Since the meaning of the leading
+.BR \(dq//\(dq 
+is implementation-defined,
+.IR dirname ("\c
+.BR //foo ")
+may return either
+.BR \(dq//\(dq 
+or
+.BR '/' 
+(but nothing else).
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIbasename\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<libgen.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/div.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/div.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5dc211d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/div.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DIV "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+div
+\(em compute the quotient and remainder of an integer division
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+div_t div(int \fInumer\fP, int \fIdenom\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIdiv\fR()
+function shall compute the quotient and remainder of the division
+of the numerator
+.IR numer
+by the denominator
+.IR denom .
+If the division is inexact, the resulting quotient is the integer of
+lesser magnitude that is the nearest to the algebraic quotient. If the
+result cannot be represented, the behavior is undefined; otherwise,
+.IR quot *\c
+.IR denom +\c
+.IR rem
+shall equal
+.IR numer .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIdiv\fR()
+function shall return a structure of type
+.BR div_t ,
+comprising both the quotient and the remainder. The structure includes
+the following members, in any order:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int  quot;  /* quotient */
+int  rem;   /* remainder */
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIldiv\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dlclose.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dlclose.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..063ab5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dlclose.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DLCLOSE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+dlclose
+\(em close a symbol table handle
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <dlfcn.h>
+.P
+int dlclose(void *\fIhandle\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIdlclose\fR()
+function shall inform the system that the symbol table handle specified by
+.IR handle
+is no longer needed by the application.
+.P
+An application writer may use
+\fIdlclose\fR()
+to make a statement of intent on the part of the process, but this
+statement does not create any requirement upon the implementation. When
+the symbol table handle is closed, the implementation may unload the
+executable object files that were loaded by
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+when the symbol table handle was opened and those that were loaded by
+\fIdlsym\fR()
+when using the symbol table handle identified by
+.IR handle .
+.P
+Once a symbol table handle has been closed, an application should assume
+that any symbols (function identifiers and data object identifiers)
+made visible using
+.IR handle ,
+are no longer available to the process.
+.P
+Although a
+\fIdlclose\fR()
+operation is not required to remove any functions or data objects from
+the address space, neither is an implementation prohibited from doing
+so. The only restriction on such a removal is that no function nor data
+object shall be removed to which references have been relocated, until
+or unless all such references are removed. For instance, an executable
+object file that had been loaded with a
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+operation specifying the RTLD_GLOBAL flag might provide a target for
+dynamic relocations performed in the processing of other relocatable
+objects\(emin such environments, an application may assume that no
+relocation, once made, shall be undone or remade unless the executable
+object file containing the relocated object has itself been removed.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the referenced symbol table handle was successfully closed,
+\fIdlclose\fR()
+shall return 0. If
+.IR handle
+does not refer to an open symbol table handle or if the symbol table
+handle could not be closed,
+\fIdlclose\fR()
+shall return a non-zero value. More detailed diagnostic information
+shall be available through
+\fIdlerror\fR().
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following example illustrates use of
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+and
+\fIdlclose\fR():
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <dlfcn.h>
+int eret;
+void *mylib;
+\&...
+/* Open a dynamic library and then close it ... */
+mylib = dlopen("mylib.so", RTLD_LOCAL | RTLD_LAZY);
+\&...
+eret = dlclose(mylib);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+A conforming application should employ a symbol table handle returned
+from a
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+invocation only within a given scope bracketed by a
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+operation and the corresponding
+\fIdlclose\fR()
+operation. Implementations are free to use reference counting or other
+techniques such that multiple calls to
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+referencing the same executable object file may return a pointer to the
+same data object as the symbol table handle.
+.P
+Implementations are also free to re-use a handle. For these reasons,
+the value of a handle must be treated as an opaque data type by the
+application, used only in calls to
+\fIdlsym\fR()
+and
+\fIdlclose\fR().
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIdlerror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdlopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdlsym\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<dlfcn.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dlerror.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dlerror.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dce70ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dlerror.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DLERROR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+dlerror
+\(em get diagnostic information
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <dlfcn.h>
+.P
+char *dlerror(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIdlerror\fR()
+function shall return a null-terminated character string (with no
+trailing
+<newline>)
+that describes the last error that occurred during dynamic linking
+processing. If no dynamic linking errors have occurred since the last
+invocation of
+\fIdlerror\fR(),
+\fIdlerror\fR()
+shall return NULL.
+Thus, invoking
+\fIdlerror\fR()
+a second time, immediately following a prior invocation, shall result
+in NULL being returned.
+.P
+It is implementation-defined whether or not the
+\fIdlerror\fR()
+function is thread-safe. A thread-safe implementation shall return only
+errors that occur on the current thread.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful,
+\fIdlerror\fR()
+shall return a null-terminated character string; otherwise, NULL
+shall be returned.
+.P
+The application shall not modify the string returned. The returned
+pointer might be invalidated or the string content might be overwritten
+by a subsequent call to
+\fIdlerror\fR()
+in the same thread (if
+\fIdlerror\fR()
+is thread-safe) or in any thread (if
+\fIdlerror\fR()
+is not thread-safe).
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following example prints out the last dynamic linking error:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\&...
+#include <dlfcn.h>
+.P
+char *errstr;
+.P
+errstr = dlerror();
+if (errstr != NULL)
+    printf ("A dynamic linking error occurred: (%s)\en", errstr);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Depending on the application environment with respect to asynchronous
+execution events, such as signals or other asynchronous computation
+sharing the address space, conforming applications should use a critical
+section to retrieve the error pointer and buffer.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIdlclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdlopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdlsym\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<dlfcn.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dlopen.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dlopen.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..18f854c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dlopen.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,268 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DLOPEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+dlopen
+\(em open a symbol table handle
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <dlfcn.h>
+.P
+void *dlopen(const char *\fIfile\fP, int \fImode\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+function shall make the symbols (function identifiers and data object
+identifiers) in the executable object file specified by
+.IR file
+available to the calling program.
+.P
+The class of executable object files eligible for this operation and
+the manner of their construction are implementation-defined, though
+typically such files are shared libraries or programs.
+.P
+Implementations may permit the construction of embedded dependencies in
+executable object files. In such cases, a
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+operation shall load those dependencies in addition to the executable
+object file specified by
+.IR file .
+Implementations may also impose specific constraints on the construction
+of programs that can employ
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+and its related services.
+.P
+A successful
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+shall return a symbol table handle which the caller may use on subsequent
+calls to
+\fIdlsym\fR()
+and
+\fIdlclose\fR().
+.P
+The value of this symbol table handle should not be interpreted in any
+way by the caller.
+.P
+The
+.IR file
+argument is used to construct a pathname to the executable object file. If
+.IR file
+contains a
+<slash>
+character, the
+.IR file
+argument is used as the pathname for the file. Otherwise,
+.IR file
+is used in an implementation-defined manner to yield a pathname.
+.P
+If
+.IR file
+is a null pointer,
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+shall return a global symbol table handle for the currently running
+process image. This symbol table handle shall provide access to the
+symbols from an ordered set of executable object files consisting of
+the original program image file, any executable object files loaded
+at program start-up as specified by that process file (for example,
+shared libraries), and the set of executable object files loaded using
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+operations with the RTLD_GLOBAL flag. As the latter set of executable
+object files can change during execution, the set of symbols made
+available by this symbol table handle can also change dynamically.
+.P
+Only a single copy of an executable object file shall be brought into
+the address space, even if
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+is invoked multiple times in reference to the executable object file,
+and even if different pathnames are used to reference the executable
+object file.
+.P
+The
+.IR mode
+parameter describes how
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+shall operate upon
+.IR file
+with respect to the processing of relocations and the scope of visibility
+of the symbols provided within
+.IR file .
+When an executable object file is brought into the address space of a
+process, it may contain references to symbols whose addresses are not
+known until the executable object file is loaded.
+.P
+These references shall be relocated before the symbols can be accessed. The
+.IR mode
+parameter governs when these relocations take place and may have the
+following values:
+.IP RTLD_LAZY 12
+Relocations shall be performed at an implementation-defined time,
+ranging from the time of the
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+call until the first reference to a given symbol occurs. Specifying
+RTLD_LAZY should improve performance on implementations supporting dynamic
+symbol binding since a process might not reference all of the symbols
+in an executable object file. And, for systems supporting dynamic symbol
+resolution for normal process execution, this behavior mimics the normal
+handling of process execution.
+.IP RTLD_NOW 12
+All necessary relocations shall be performed when the executable object
+file is first loaded. This may waste some processing if relocations are
+performed for symbols that are never referenced. This behavior may be
+useful for applications that need to know that all symbols referenced
+during execution will be available before
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+returns.
+.P
+Any executable object file loaded by
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+that requires relocations against global symbols can reference the symbols
+in the original process image file, any executable object files loaded
+at program start-up, from the initial process image itself, from any
+other executable object file included in the same
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+invocation, and any executable object files that were loaded in any
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+invocation and which specified the RTLD_GLOBAL flag. To determine the
+scope of visibility for the symbols loaded with a
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+invocation, the
+.IR mode
+parameter should be a bitwise-inclusive OR with one of the following
+values:
+.IP RTLD_GLOBAL 12
+The executable object file's symbols shall be made available for
+relocation processing of any other executable object file. In addition,
+symbol lookup using
+.IR dlopen (NULL, mode )
+and an associated
+\fIdlsym\fR()
+allows executable object files loaded with this mode to be searched.
+.IP RTLD_LOCAL 12
+The executable object file's symbols shall not be made available for
+relocation processing of any other executable object file.
+.P
+If neither RTLD_GLOBAL nor RTLD_LOCAL is specified, the default behavior
+is unspecified.
+.P
+If an executable object file is specified in multiple
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+invocations,
+.IR mode
+is interpreted at each invocation.
+.P
+If RTLD_NOW has been specified, all relocations shall have been completed
+rendering further RTLD_NOW operations redundant and any further RTLD_LAZY
+operations irrelevant.
+.P
+If RTLD_GLOBAL has been specified, the executable object file shall
+maintain the RTLD_GLOBAL status regardless of any previous or future
+specification of RTLD_LOCAL, as long as the executable object file
+remains in the address space (see
+.IR "\fIdlclose\fR\^(\|)").
+.P
+Symbols introduced into the process image through calls to
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+may be used in relocation activities. Symbols so introduced may duplicate
+symbols already defined by the program or previous
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+operations. To resolve the ambiguities such a situation might present,
+the resolution of a symbol reference to symbol definition is based on a
+symbol resolution order. Two such resolution orders are defined: load
+order and dependency order. Load order establishes an ordering among
+symbol definitions, such that the first definition loaded (including
+definitions from the process image file and any dependent executable
+object files loaded with it) has priority over executable object files
+added later (by
+\fIdlopen\fR()).
+Load ordering is used in relocation processing. Dependency ordering uses
+a breadth-first order starting with a given executable object file,
+then all of its dependencies, then any dependents of those, iterating
+until all dependencies are satisfied. With the exception of the global
+symbol table handle obtained via a
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+operation with a null pointer as the
+.IR file
+argument, dependency ordering is used by the
+\fIdlsym\fR()
+function. Load ordering is used in
+\fIdlsym\fR()
+operations upon the global symbol table handle.
+.P
+When an executable object file is first made accessible via
+\fIdlopen\fR(),
+it and its dependent executable object files are added in dependency
+order. Once all the executable object files are added, relocations are
+performed using load order. Note that if an executable object file or
+its dependencies had been previously loaded, the load and dependency
+orders may yield different resolutions.
+.P
+The symbols introduced by
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+operations and available through
+\fIdlsym\fR()
+are at a minimum those which are exported as identifiers of global
+scope by the executable object file. Typically, such identifiers shall
+be those that were specified in (for example) C source code as having
+.BR extern
+linkage. The precise manner in which an implementation constructs
+the set of exported symbols for an executable object file is
+implementation-defined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+shall return a symbol table handle. If
+.IR file
+cannot be found, cannot be opened for reading, is not of an appropriate
+executable object file format for processing by
+\fIdlopen\fR(),
+or if an error occurs during the process of loading
+.IR file
+or relocating its symbolic references,
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+shall return a null pointer. More detailed diagnostic information shall
+be available through
+\fIdlerror\fR().
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIdlsym\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIdlclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdlerror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdlsym\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<dlfcn.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dlsym.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dlsym.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f9c6692
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dlsym.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DLSYM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+dlsym
+\(em get the address of a symbol from a symbol table handle
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <dlfcn.h>
+.P
+void *dlsym(void *restrict \fIhandle\fP, const char *restrict \fIname\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIdlsym\fR()
+function shall obtain the address of a symbol (a function identifier or
+a data object identifier) defined in the symbol table identified by the
+.IR handle
+argument. The
+.IR handle
+argument is a symbol table handle returned from a call to
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+(and which has not since been released by a call to
+\fIdlclose\fR()),
+and
+.IR name
+is the symbol's name as a character string. The return value from
+\fIdlsym\fR(),
+cast to a pointer to the type of the named symbol, can be used to call
+(in the case of a function) or access the contents of (in the case of
+a data object) the named symbol.
+.P
+The
+\fIdlsym\fR()
+function shall search for the named symbol in the symbol table
+referenced by
+.IR handle .
+If the symbol table was created with lazy loading
+(see RTLD_LAZY in
+\fIdlopen\fR()),
+load ordering shall be used in
+\fIdlsym\fR()
+operations to relocate executable object files needed to resolve the
+symbol. The symbol resolution algorithm used shall be dependency order
+as described in
+\fIdlopen\fR().
+.P
+The RTLD_DEFAULT and RTLD_NEXT symbolic constants (which may be defined in
+.IR <dlfcn.h> )
+are reserved for future use as special values that applications may be
+allowed to use for
+.IR handle .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, if
+.IR name
+names a function identifier,
+\fIdlsym\fR()
+shall return the address of the function converted from type pointer to
+function to type pointer to
+.BR void ;
+otherwise,
+\fIdlsym\fR()
+shall return the address of the data object associated with the data
+object identifier named by
+.IR name
+converted from a pointer to the type of the data object to a pointer to
+.BR void .
+If
+.IR handle
+does not refer to a valid symbol table handle or if the symbol named by
+.IR name
+cannot be found in the symbol table associated with
+.IR handle ,
+\fIdlsym\fR()
+shall return a null pointer.
+.P
+More detailed diagnostic information shall be available through
+\fIdlerror\fR().
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+The following example shows how
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+and
+\fIdlsym\fR()
+can be used to access either a function or a data object. For simplicity,
+error checking has been omitted.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void *handle;
+int (*fptr)(int), *iptr, result;
+/* open the needed symbol table */
+handle = dlopen("/usr/home/me/libfoo.so", RTLD_LOCAL | RTLD_LAZY);
+/* find the address of the function my_function */
+fptr = (int (*)(int))dlsym(handle, "my_function");
+/* find the address of the data object my_object */
+iptr = (int *)dlsym(handle, "my_OBJ");
+/* invoke my_function, passing the value of my_OBJ as the parameter */
+result = (*fptr)(*iptr);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The following special purpose values for
+.IR handle
+are reserved for future use and have the indicated meanings:
+.IP RTLD_DEFAULT 12
+The identifier lookup happens in the normal global scope; that is,
+a search for an identifier using
+.IR handle
+would find the same definition as a direct use of this identifier in
+the program code.
+.IP RTLD_NEXT 12
+Specifies the next executable object file after this one that defines
+.IR name .
+This one refers to the executable object file containing the invocation of
+\fIdlsym\fR().
+The next executable object file is the one found upon the application
+of a load order symbol resolution algorithm (see
+\fIdlopen\fR()).
+The next symbol is either one of global scope (because it was introduced
+as part of the original process image or because it was added with a
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+operation including the RTLD_GLOBAL flag), or is in an executable object
+file that was included in the same
+\fIdlopen\fR()
+operation that loaded this one.
+.P
+The RTLD_NEXT flag is useful to navigate an intentionally created
+hierarchy of multiply-defined symbols created through interposition. For
+example, if a program wished to create an implementation of
+\fImalloc\fR()
+that embedded some statistics gathering about memory allocations, such
+an implementation could use the real
+\fImalloc\fR()
+definition to perform the memory allocation \(em and itself only embed
+the necessary logic to implement the statistics gathering function.
+.P
+Note that conversion from a
+.BR "void *"
+pointer to a function pointer as in:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fptr = (int (*)(int))dlsym(handle, "my_function");
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+is not defined by the ISO\ C standard. This standard requires this conversion to
+work correctly on conforming implementations.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIdlclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdlerror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdlopen\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<dlfcn.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dprintf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dprintf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7007d8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dprintf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DPRINTF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+dprintf \(em print formatted output
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int dprintf(int \fIfildes\fP, const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfprintf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/drand48.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/drand48.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..72e7546
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/drand48.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,240 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DRAND48 "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.EQ
+delim $$
+.EN
+.SH NAME
+drand48,
+erand48,
+jrand48,
+lcong48,
+lrand48,
+mrand48,
+nrand48,
+seed48,
+srand48
+\(em generate uniformly distributed pseudo-random numbers
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+double drand48(void);
+double erand48(unsigned short \fIxsubi\fP[3]);
+long jrand48(unsigned short \fIxsubi\fP[3]);
+void lcong48(unsigned short \fIparam\fP[7]);
+long lrand48(void);
+long mrand48(void);
+long nrand48(unsigned short \fIxsubi\fP[3]);
+unsigned short *seed48(unsigned short \fIseed16v\fP[3]);
+void srand48(long \fIseedval\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This family of functions shall generate pseudo-random numbers using
+a linear congruential algorithm and 48-bit integer arithmetic.
+.P
+The
+\fIdrand48\fR()
+and
+\fIerand48\fR()
+functions shall return non-negative, double-precision, floating-point
+values, uniformly distributed over the interval [0.0,1.0).
+.P
+The
+\fIlrand48\fR()
+and
+\fInrand48\fR()
+functions shall return non-negative, long integers, uniformly
+distributed over the interval [0,2\u\s-331\s+3\d).
+.P
+The
+\fImrand48\fR()
+and
+\fIjrand48\fR()
+functions shall return signed long integers uniformly distributed over
+the interval [\(mi2\u\s-331\s+3\d,2\u\s-331\s+3\d).
+.P
+The
+\fIsrand48\fR(),
+\fIseed48\fR(),
+and
+\fIlcong48\fR()
+functions are initialization entry points, one of which should be
+invoked before either
+\fIdrand48\fR(),
+\fIlrand48\fR(),
+or
+\fImrand48\fR()
+is called. (Although it is not recommended practice, constant default
+initializer values shall be supplied automatically if
+\fIdrand48\fR(),
+\fIlrand48\fR(),
+or
+\fImrand48\fR()
+is called without a prior call to an initialization entry point.) The
+\fIerand48\fR(),
+\fInrand48\fR(),
+and
+\fIjrand48\fR()
+functions do not require an initialization entry point to be called
+first.
+.P
+All the routines work by generating a sequence of 48-bit integer
+values, $X_ i" " ,$ according to the linear congruential formula:
+.sp
+.RS
+$X sub{n+1} " " = " " (aX_ n" "^+^c) sub{roman mod " " m} " "  " "  " "  " "  " "  " "  " "  " " n>= " " 0$
+.RE
+.P
+The parameter $m^=^2"^" 48$; hence 48-bit integer arithmetic is
+performed. Unless
+\fIlcong48\fR()
+is invoked, the multiplier value $a$ and the addend value $c$ are given
+by:
+.sp
+.RS
+$a " " mark = " " roman "5DEECE66D"^sub 16 " " = " " roman 273673163155^sub 8$
+.P
+$c " " lineup = " " roman B^sub 16 " " = " " roman 13^sub 8$
+.RE
+.P
+The value returned by any of the
+\fIdrand48\fR(),
+\fIerand48\fR(),
+\fIjrand48\fR(),
+\fIlrand48\fR(),
+\fImrand48\fR(),
+or
+\fInrand48\fR()
+functions is computed by first generating the next 48-bit $X_ i$ in
+the sequence. Then the appropriate number of bits, according to the
+type of data item to be returned, are copied from the high-order
+(leftmost) bits of $X_ i$ and transformed into the returned value.
+.P
+The
+\fIdrand48\fR(),
+\fIlrand48\fR(),
+and
+\fImrand48\fR()
+functions store the last 48-bit $X_ i$ generated in an internal
+buffer; that is why the application shall ensure that these are
+initialized prior to being invoked. The
+\fIerand48\fR(),
+\fInrand48\fR(),
+and
+\fIjrand48\fR()
+functions require the calling program to provide storage for the
+successive $X_ i$ values in the array specified as an argument when
+the functions are invoked. That is why these routines do not have to
+be initialized; the calling program merely has to place the desired
+initial value of $X_ i$ into the array and pass it as an argument.
+By using different arguments,
+\fIerand48\fR(),
+\fInrand48\fR(),
+and
+\fIjrand48\fR()
+allow separate modules of a large program to generate several
+.IR independent
+streams of pseudo-random numbers; that is, the sequence of numbers in
+each stream shall
+.IR not
+depend upon how many times the routines are called to generate numbers
+for the other streams.
+.P
+The initializer function
+\fIsrand48\fR()
+sets the high-order 32 bits of $X_ i$ to the low-order 32 bits
+contained in its argument. The low-order 16 bits of $X_ i$ are set
+to the arbitrary value $roman 330E_ 16" " .$
+.P
+The initializer function
+\fIseed48\fR()
+sets the value of $X_ i$ to the 48-bit value specified in the
+argument array. The low-order 16 bits of $X_ i$ are set to the
+low-order 16 bits of
+.IR seed16v [ 0 ].
+The mid-order 16 bits of $X_ i$ are set to the low-order 16 bits of
+.IR seed16v [ 1 ].
+The high-order 16 bits of $X_ i$ are set to the low-order 16 bits of
+.IR seed16v [ 2 ].
+In addition, the previous value of $X_ i$ is copied into a 48-bit
+internal buffer, used only by
+\fIseed48\fR(),
+and a pointer to this buffer is the value returned by
+\fIseed48\fR().
+This returned pointer, which can just be ignored if not needed, is
+useful if a program is to be restarted from a given point at some
+future time\(emuse the pointer to get at and store the last $X_ i$
+value, and then use this value to reinitialize via
+\fIseed48\fR()
+when the program is restarted.
+.P
+The initializer function
+\fIlcong48\fR()
+allows the user to specify the initial $X_ i" " ,$ the multiplier value
+$a,$ and the addend value $c.$ Argument array elements
+.IR param [ 0-2 ]
+specify $X_ i" " ,$
+.IR param [ 3-5 ]
+specify the multiplier $a,$ and
+.IR param [ 6 ]
+specifies the 16-bit addend $c.$ After
+\fIlcong48\fR()
+is called, a subsequent call to either
+\fIsrand48\fR()
+or
+\fIseed48\fR()
+shall restore the standard multiplier and addend values,
+.IR a
+and
+.IR c,
+specified above.
+.P
+The
+\fIdrand48\fR(),
+\fIlrand48\fR(),
+and
+\fImrand48\fR()
+functions need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+As described in the DESCRIPTION above.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIrand\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dup.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dup.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..744f320
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/dup.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,262 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DUP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+dup,
+dup2
+\(em duplicate an open file descriptor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int dup(int \fIfildes\fP);
+int dup2(int \fIfildes\fP, int \fIfildes2\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIdup\fR()
+function provides an alternative interface to the service provided by
+\fIfcntl\fR()
+using the F_DUPFD command. The call
+.IR dup ( fildes )
+shall be equivalent to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fcntl(fildes, F_DUPFD, 0);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+\fIdup2\fR()
+function shall cause the file descriptor
+.IR fildes2
+to refer to the same open file description as the file descriptor
+.IR fildes
+and to share any locks, and shall return
+.IR fildes2 .
+If
+.IR fildes2
+is already a valid open file descriptor, it shall be closed first, unless
+.IR fildes
+is equal to
+.IR fildes2
+in which case
+\fIdup2\fR()
+shall return
+.IR fildes2
+without closing it. If the close operation fails to close
+.IR fildes2 ,
+\fIdup2\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 without changing the open file description to which
+.IR fildes2
+refers. If
+.IR fildes
+is not a valid file descriptor,
+\fIdup2\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 and shall not close
+.IR fildes2 .
+If
+.IR fildes2
+is less than 0 or greater than or equal to
+{OPEN_MAX},
+\fIdup2\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [EBADF] .
+.P
+Upon successful completion, if
+.IR fildes
+is not equal to
+.IR fildes2 ,
+the FD_CLOEXEC flag associated with
+.IR fildes2
+shall be cleared. If
+.IR fildes
+is equal to
+.IR fildes2 ,
+the FD_CLOEXEC flag associated with
+.IR fildes2
+shall not be changed.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a typed memory object, the result of the
+\fIdup2\fR()
+function is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion a non-negative integer, namely the file
+descriptor, shall be returned; otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned
+and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIdup\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid open file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.P
+The
+\fIdup2\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid open file descriptor or the argument
+.IR fildes2
+is negative or greater than or equal to
+{OPEN_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fIdup2\fR()
+function was interrupted by a signal.
+.P
+The
+\fIdup2\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while attempting to close
+.IR fildes2 .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Redirecting Standard Output to a File" S
+.P
+The following example closes standard output for the current processes,
+re-assigns standard output to go to the file referenced by
+.IR pfd ,
+and closes the original file descriptor to clean up.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+\&...
+int pfd;
+\&...
+close(1);
+dup(pfd);
+close(pfd);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Redirecting Error Messages"
+.P
+The following example redirects messages from
+.IR stderr
+to
+.IR stdout .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+\&...
+dup2(1, 2);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Implementations may use file descriptors that must be inherited into
+child processes for the child process to remain conforming, such as for
+message catalog or tracing purposes. Therefore, an application that calls
+\fIdup2\fR()
+with an arbitrary integer for
+.IR fildes2
+risks non-conforming behavior, and
+\fIdup2\fR()
+can only portably be used to overwrite file descriptor values that the
+application has obtained through explicit actions, or for the three file
+descriptors corresponding to the standard file streams. In order to avoid
+a race condition of leaking an unintended file descriptor into a child
+process, an application should consider opening all file descriptors
+with the FD_CLOEXEC bit set unless the file descriptor is intended to
+be inherited across
+.IR exec .
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIdup\fR()
+function is redundant. Its services are also provided by the
+\fIfcntl\fR()
+function. It has been included in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 primarily for historical reasons,
+since many existing applications use it. On the other hand, the
+\fIdup2\fR()
+function provides unique services, as no other interface is able to
+atomically replace an existing file descriptor.
+.P
+The
+\fIdup2\fR()
+function is not marked obsolescent because it presents a type-safe
+version of functionality provided in a type-unsafe version by
+\fIfcntl\fR().
+It is used in the POSIX Ada binding.
+.P
+The
+\fIdup2\fR()
+function is not intended for use in critical regions as a
+synchronization mechanism.
+.P
+In the description of
+.BR [EBADF] ,
+the case of
+.IR fildes
+being out of range is covered by the given case of
+.IR fildes
+not being valid. The descriptions for
+.IR fildes
+and
+.IR fildes2
+are different because the only kind of invalidity that is relevant for
+.IR fildes2
+is whether it is out of range; that is, it does not matter whether
+.IR fildes2
+refers to an open file when the
+\fIdup2\fR()
+call is made.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/duplocale.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/duplocale.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c3e1a74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/duplocale.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+'\" et
+.TH DUPLOCALE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+duplocale
+\(em duplicate a locale object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <locale.h>
+.P
+locale_t duplocale(locale_t \fIlocobj\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIduplocale\fR()
+function shall create a duplicate copy of the locale object referenced
+by the
+.IR locobj
+argument.
+.P
+If the
+.IR locobj
+argument is LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE,
+\fIduplocale\fR()
+shall create a new locale object containing a copy of the global locale
+determined by the
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+function.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locobj
+argument is not a valid locale object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIduplocale\fR()
+function shall return a handle for a new locale object. Otherwise,
+\fIduplocale\fR()
+shall return (\c
+.BR locale_t )0
+and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIduplocale\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+There is not enough memory available to create the locale object or
+load the locale data.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Constructing an Altered Version of an Existing Locale Object"
+.P
+The following example shows a code fragment to create a slightly
+altered version of an existing locale object. The function takes a
+locale object and a locale name and it replaces the
+.IR LC_TIME
+category data in the locale object with that from the named locale.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <locale.h>
+\&...
+.P
+locale_t
+with_changed_lc_time (locale_t obj, const char *name)
+{
+.P
+    locale_t retval = duplocale (obj);
+    if (retval != (locale_t) 0)
+    {
+        locale_t changed = newlocale (LC_TIME_MASK, name, retval);
+        if (changed == (locale_t) 0)
+            /* An error occurred. Free all allocated resources. */
+            freelocale (retval);
+        retval = changed;
+    }
+    return retval; }
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The use of the
+\fIduplocale\fR()
+function is recommended for situations where a locale object is being
+used in multiple places, and it is possible that the lifetime of the
+locale object might end before all uses are finished. Another reason to
+duplicate a locale object is if a slightly modified form is needed.
+This can be achieved by a call to
+\fInewlocale\fR()
+following the
+\fIduplocale\fR()
+call.
+.P
+As with the
+\fInewlocale\fR()
+function, handles for locale objects created by the
+\fIduplocale\fR()
+function should be released by a corresponding call to
+\fIfreelocale\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIduplocale\fR()
+function can also be used in conjunction with
+.IR uselocale ((\c
+.BR locale_t )0).
+This returns the locale in effect for the calling thread, but can have
+the value LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE. Passing LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE to functions such as
+\fIisalnum_l\fR()
+results in undefined behavior, but applications can convert it into a
+usable locale object by using
+\fIduplocale\fR().
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfreelocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fInewlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/encrypt.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/encrypt.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d15534a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/encrypt.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ENCRYPT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+encrypt
+\(em encoding function
+(\fBCRYPT\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+void encrypt(char \fIblock\fP[64], int \fIedflag\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIencrypt\fR()
+function shall provide access to an implementation-defined encoding
+algorithm. The key generated by
+\fIsetkey\fR()
+is used to encrypt the string
+.IR block
+with
+\fIencrypt\fR().
+.P
+The
+.IR block
+argument to
+\fIencrypt\fR()
+shall be an array of length 64 bytes containing only the bytes with
+values of 0 and 1. The array is modified in place to a similar
+array using the key set by
+\fIsetkey\fR().
+If
+.IR edflag
+is 0, the argument is encoded. If
+.IR edflag
+is 1, the argument may be decoded (see the APPLICATION USAGE section);
+if the argument is not decoded,
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ENOSYS] .
+.P
+The
+\fIencrypt\fR()
+function shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful. An application wishing to check for error situations
+should set
+.IR errno
+to 0 before calling
+\fIencrypt\fR().
+If
+.IR errno
+is non-zero on return, an error has occurred.
+.P
+The
+\fIencrypt\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIencrypt\fR()
+function shall not return a value.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIencrypt\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOSYS
+The functionality is not supported on this implementation.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Historical implementations of the
+\fIencrypt\fR()
+function used a rather primitive encoding algorithm.
+.P
+In some environments, decoding might not be implemented. This is
+related to some Government restrictions on encryption and decryption
+routines. Historical practice has been to ship a different version of
+the encryption library without the decryption feature in the routines
+supplied. Thus the exported version of
+\fIencrypt\fR()
+does encoding but not decoding.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcrypt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetkey\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/endgrent.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/endgrent.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..89e9189
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/endgrent.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ENDGRENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+endgrent,
+getgrent,
+setgrent
+\(em group database entry functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <grp.h>
+.P
+void endgrent(void);
+struct group *getgrent(void);
+void setgrent(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetgrent\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to a structure containing the broken-out
+fields of an entry in the group database. When first called,
+\fIgetgrent\fR()
+shall return a pointer to a
+.BR group
+structure containing the first entry in the group database. Thereafter,
+it shall return a pointer to a
+.BR group
+structure containing the next group structure in the group database, so
+successive calls may be used to search the entire database.
+.P
+An implementation that provides extended security controls may impose
+further implementation-defined restrictions on accessing the group
+database. In particular, the system may deny the existence of some or
+all of the group database entries associated with groups other than
+those groups associated with the caller and may omit users other than
+the caller from the list of members of groups in database entries that
+are returned.
+.P
+The
+\fIsetgrent\fR()
+function shall rewind the group database to allow repeated searches.
+.P
+The
+\fIendgrent\fR()
+function may be called to close the group database when processing is
+complete.
+.P
+These functions need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+When first called,
+\fIgetgrent\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the first group structure in the group
+database. Upon subsequent calls it shall return the next group
+structure in the group database. The
+\fIgetgrent\fR()
+function shall return a null pointer on end-of-file or an error and
+.IR errno
+may be set to indicate the error.
+.P
+The application shall not modify the structure to which the return
+value points, nor any storage areas pointed to by pointers within the
+structure. The returned pointer, and pointers within the structure,
+might be invalidated or the structure or the storage areas might be
+overwritten by a subsequent call to
+\fIgetgrgid\fR(),
+\fIgetgrnam\fR(),
+or
+\fIgetgrent\fR().
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIgetgrent\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was caught during the operation.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error has occurred.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+The maximum allowable number of files is currently open in the system.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+These functions are provided due to their historical usage.
+Applications should avoid dependencies on fields in the group database,
+whether the database is a single file, or where in the file system
+name space the database resides. Applications should use
+\fIgetgrnam\fR()
+and
+\fIgetgrgid\fR()
+whenever possible because it avoids these dependencies.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIendpwent\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetgrgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetgrnam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetlogin\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<grp.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/endhostent.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/endhostent.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..45b54e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/endhostent.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ENDHOSTENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+endhostent,
+gethostent,
+sethostent
+\(em network host database functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <netdb.h>
+.P
+void endhostent(void);
+struct hostent *gethostent(void);
+void sethostent(int \fIstayopen\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These functions shall retrieve information about hosts. This
+information is considered to be stored in a database that can be
+accessed sequentially or randomly. The implementation of this database
+is unspecified.
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+In many cases this database is implemented by the Domain Name System,
+as documented in RFC\ 1034, RFC\ 1035, and RFC\ 1886.
+.P
+.P
+The
+\fIsethostent\fR()
+function shall open a connection to the database and set the next entry
+for retrieval to the first entry in the database. If the
+.IR stayopen
+argument is non-zero, the connection shall not be closed by a call to
+\fIgethostent\fR(),
+and the implementation may maintain an open file descriptor.
+.P
+The
+\fIgethostent\fR()
+function shall read the next entry in the database, opening and closing
+a connection to the database as necessary.
+.P
+Entries shall be returned in
+.BR hostent
+structures.
+.P
+The
+\fIendhostent\fR()
+function shall close the connection to the database, releasing any open
+file descriptor.
+.P
+These functions need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIgethostent\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to a
+.BR hostent
+structure if the requested entry was found, and a null pointer if the
+end of the database was reached or the requested entry was not found.
+.P
+The application shall not modify the structure to which the return
+value points, nor any storage areas pointed to by pointers within the
+structure. The returned pointer, and pointers within the structure,
+might be invalidated or the structure or the storage areas might be
+overwritten by a subsequent call to
+\fIgethostent\fR().
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined for
+\fIendhostent\fR(),
+\fIgethostent\fR(),
+and
+\fIsethostent\fR().
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIendservent\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<netdb.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/endnetent.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/endnetent.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b0a3fdb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/endnetent.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ENDNETENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+endnetent,
+getnetbyaddr,
+getnetbyname,
+getnetent,
+setnetent
+\(em network database functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <netdb.h>
+.P
+void endnetent(void);
+struct netent *getnetbyaddr(uint32_t \fInet\fP, int \fItype\fP);
+struct netent *getnetbyname(const char *\fIname\fP);
+struct netent *getnetent(void);
+void setnetent(int \fIstayopen\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These functions shall retrieve information about networks. This
+information is considered to be stored in a database that can be
+accessed sequentially or randomly. The implementation of this database
+is unspecified.
+.P
+The
+\fIsetnetent\fR()
+function shall open and rewind the database. If the
+.IR stayopen
+argument is non-zero, the connection to the
+.IR net
+database shall not be closed after each call to
+\fIgetnetent\fR()
+(either directly, or indirectly through one of the other
+.IR getnet* (\|)
+functions), and the implementation may maintain an open file descriptor
+to the database.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetnetent\fR()
+function shall read the next entry of the database, opening and
+closing a connection to the database as necessary.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetnetbyaddr\fR()
+function shall search the database from the beginning, and find the
+first entry for which the address family specified by
+.IR type
+matches the
+.IR n_addrtype
+member and the network number
+.IR net
+matches the
+.IR n_net
+member, opening and closing a connection to the database as necessary.
+The
+.IR net
+argument shall be the network number in host byte order.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetnetbyname\fR()
+function shall search the database from the beginning and find the
+first entry for which the network name specified by
+.IR name
+matches the
+.IR n_name
+member, opening and closing a connection to the database as necessary.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetnetbyaddr\fR(),
+\fIgetnetbyname\fR(),
+and
+\fIgetnetent\fR()
+functions shall each return a pointer to a
+.BR netent
+structure, the members of which shall contain the fields of an entry in
+the network database.
+.P
+The
+\fIendnetent\fR()
+function shall close the database, releasing any open file descriptor.
+.P
+These functions need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgetnetbyaddr\fR(),
+\fIgetnetbyname\fR(),
+and
+\fIgetnetent\fR()
+shall return a pointer to a
+.BR netent
+structure if the requested entry was found, and a null pointer if the
+end of the database was reached or the requested entry was not found.
+Otherwise, a null pointer shall be returned.
+.P
+The application shall not modify the structure to which the return
+value points, nor any storage areas pointed to by pointers within the
+structure. The returned pointer, and pointers within the structure,
+might be invalidated or the structure or the storage areas might be
+overwritten by a subsequent call to
+\fIgetnetbyaddr\fR(),
+\fIgetnetbyname\fR(),
+or
+\fIgetnetent\fR().
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<netdb.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/endprotoent.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/endprotoent.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7cfaee8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/endprotoent.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,137 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ENDPROTOENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+endprotoent,
+getprotobyname,
+getprotobynumber,
+getprotoent,
+setprotoent
+\(em network protocol database functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <netdb.h>
+.P
+void endprotoent(void);
+struct protoent *getprotobyname(const char *\fIname\fP);
+struct protoent *getprotobynumber(int \fIproto\fP);
+struct protoent *getprotoent(void);
+void setprotoent(int \fIstayopen\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These functions shall retrieve information about protocols. This
+information is considered to be stored in a database that can be
+accessed sequentially or randomly. The implementation of this database
+is unspecified.
+.P
+The
+\fIsetprotoent\fR()
+function shall open a connection to the database, and set the next
+entry to the first entry. If the
+.IR stayopen
+argument is non-zero, the connection to the network protocol database
+shall not be closed after each call to
+\fIgetprotoent\fR()
+(either directly, or indirectly through one of the other
+.IR getproto* (\|)
+functions), and the implementation may maintain an open file descriptor
+for the database.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetprotobyname\fR()
+function shall search the database from the beginning and find the
+first entry for which the protocol name specified by
+.IR name
+matches the
+.IR p_name
+member, opening and closing a connection to the database as necessary.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetprotobynumber\fR()
+function shall search the database from the beginning and find the
+first entry for which the protocol number specified by
+.IR proto
+matches the
+.IR p_proto
+member, opening and closing a connection to the database as necessary.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetprotoent\fR()
+function shall read the next entry of the database, opening and closing
+a connection to the database as necessary.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetprotobyname\fR(),
+\fIgetprotobynumber\fR(),
+and
+\fIgetprotoent\fR()
+functions shall each return a pointer to a
+.BR protoent
+structure, the members of which shall contain the fields of an entry in
+the network protocol database.
+.P
+The
+\fIendprotoent\fR()
+function shall close the connection to the database, releasing any
+open file descriptor.
+.P
+These functions need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgetprotobyname\fR(),
+\fIgetprotobynumber\fR(),
+and
+\fIgetprotoent\fR()
+return a pointer to a
+.BR protoent
+structure if the requested entry was found, and a null pointer if the
+end of the database was reached or the requested entry was not found.
+Otherwise, a null pointer is returned.
+.P
+The application shall not modify the structure to which the return
+value points, nor any storage areas pointed to by pointers within the
+structure. The returned pointer, and pointers within the structure,
+might be invalidated or the structure or the storage areas might be
+overwritten by a subsequent call to
+\fIgetprotobyname\fR(),
+\fIgetprotobynumber\fR(),
+or
+\fIgetprotoent\fR().
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<netdb.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/endpwent.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/endpwent.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..547d930
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/endpwent.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,165 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ENDPWENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+endpwent,
+getpwent,
+setpwent
+\(em user database functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pwd.h>
+.P
+void endpwent(void);
+struct passwd *getpwent(void);
+void setpwent(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These functions shall retrieve information about users.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetpwent\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to a structure containing the broken-out
+fields of an entry in the user database. Each entry in the user
+database contains a
+.BR passwd
+structure. When first called,
+\fIgetpwent\fR()
+shall return a pointer to a
+.BR passwd
+structure containing the first entry in the user database. Thereafter,
+it shall return a pointer to a
+.BR passwd
+structure containing the next entry in the user database. Successive
+calls can be used to search the entire user database.
+.P
+If an end-of-file or an error is encountered on reading,
+\fIgetpwent\fR()
+shall return a null pointer.
+.P
+An implementation that provides extended security controls may impose
+further implementation-defined restrictions on accessing the user
+database. In particular, the system may deny the existence of some or
+all of the user database entries associated with users other than the
+caller.
+.P
+The
+\fIsetpwent\fR()
+function effectively rewinds the user database to allow repeated
+searches.
+.P
+The
+\fIendpwent\fR()
+function may be called to close the user database when processing is
+complete.
+.P
+These functions need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIgetpwent\fR()
+function shall return a null pointer on end-of-file or error.
+.P
+The application shall not modify the structure to which the return
+value points, nor any storage areas pointed to by pointers within the
+structure. The returned pointer, and pointers within the structure,
+might be invalidated or the structure or the storage areas might be
+overwritten by a subsequent call to
+\fIgetpwuid\fR(),
+\fIgetpwnam\fR(),
+or
+\fIgetpwent\fR().
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error has occurred.
+.P
+In addition,
+\fIgetpwent\fR()
+and
+\fIsetpwent\fR()
+may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+The maximum allowable number of files is currently open in the system.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Searching the User Database"
+.P
+The following example uses the
+\fIgetpwent\fR()
+function to get successive entries in the user database, returning a
+pointer to a
+.BR passwd
+structure that contains information about each user. The call to
+\fIendpwent\fR()
+closes the user database and cleans up.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <pwd.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+void printname(uid_t uid)
+{
+    struct passwd *pwd;
+.P
+    setpwent();
+    while((pwd = getpwent()) != NULL) {
+        if (pwd->pw_uid == uid) {
+            printf("name=%s\en",pwd->pw_name);
+            break;
+        }
+    }
+    endpwent();
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+These functions are provided due to their historical usage.
+Applications should avoid dependencies on fields in the password
+database, whether the database is a single file, or where in the
+file system name space the database resides. Applications should use
+\fIgetpwuid\fR()
+whenever possible because it avoids these dependencies.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIendgrent\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetlogin\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpwnam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpwuid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pwd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/endservent.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/endservent.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..386a7b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/endservent.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ENDSERVENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+endservent,
+getservbyname,
+getservbyport,
+getservent,
+setservent
+\(em network services database functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <netdb.h>
+.P
+void endservent(void);
+struct servent *getservbyname(const char *\fIname\fP, const char *\fIproto\fP);
+struct servent *getservbyport(int \fIport\fP, const char *\fIproto\fP);
+struct servent *getservent(void);
+void setservent(int \fIstayopen\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These functions shall retrieve information about network services. This
+information is considered to be stored in a database that can be
+accessed sequentially or randomly. The implementation of this database
+is unspecified.
+.P
+The
+\fIsetservent\fR()
+function shall open a connection to the database, and set the next
+entry to the first entry. If the
+.IR stayopen
+argument is non-zero, the
+.IR net
+database shall not be closed after each call to the
+\fIgetservent\fR()
+function (either directly, or indirectly through one of the other
+.IR getserv* (\|)
+functions), and the implementation may maintain an open file descriptor
+for the database.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetservent\fR()
+function shall read the next entry of the database, opening and closing
+a connection to the database as necessary.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetservbyname\fR()
+function shall search the database from the beginning and find the
+first entry for which the service name specified by
+.IR name
+matches the
+.IR s_name
+member and the protocol name specified by
+.IR proto
+matches the
+.IR s_proto
+member, opening and closing a connection to the database as necessary.
+If
+.IR proto
+is a null pointer, any value of the
+.IR s_proto
+member shall be matched.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetservbyport\fR()
+function shall search the database from the beginning and find the
+first entry for which the port specified by
+.IR port
+matches the
+.IR s_port
+member and the protocol name specified by
+.IR proto
+matches the
+.IR s_proto
+member, opening and closing a connection to the database as necessary.
+If
+.IR proto
+is a null pointer, any value of the
+.IR s_proto
+member shall be matched. The
+.IR port
+argument shall be a value obtained by converting a
+.BR uint16_t
+in network byte order to
+.BR int .
+.P
+The
+\fIgetservbyname\fR(),
+\fIgetservbyport\fR(),
+and
+\fIgetservent\fR()
+functions shall each return a pointer to a
+.BR servent
+structure, the members of which shall contain the fields of an entry in
+the network services database.
+.P
+The
+\fIendservent\fR()
+function shall close the database, releasing any open file descriptor.
+.P
+These functions need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgetservbyname\fR(),
+\fIgetservbyport\fR(),
+and
+\fIgetservent\fR()
+return a pointer to a
+.BR servent
+structure if the requested entry was found, and a null pointer if the
+end of the database was reached or the requested entry was not found.
+Otherwise, a null pointer is returned.
+.P
+The application shall not modify the structure to which the return
+value points, nor any storage areas pointed to by pointers within the
+structure. The returned pointer, and pointers within the structure,
+might be invalidated or the structure or the storage areas might be
+overwritten by a subsequent call to
+\fIgetservbyname\fR(),
+\fIgetservbyport\fR(),
+or
+\fIgetservent\fR().
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR port
+argument of
+\fIgetservbyport\fR()
+need not be compatible with the port values of all address families.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIendhostent\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIendprotoent\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIhtonl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIinet_addr\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<netdb.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/endutxent.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/endutxent.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9739c4a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/endutxent.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,238 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ENDUTXENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+endutxent,
+getutxent,
+getutxid,
+getutxline,
+pututxline,
+setutxent
+\(em user accounting database functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <utmpx.h>
+.P
+void endutxent(void);
+struct utmpx *getutxent(void);
+struct utmpx *getutxid(const struct utmpx *\fIid\fP);
+struct utmpx *getutxline(const struct utmpx *\fIline\fP);
+struct utmpx *pututxline(const struct utmpx *\fIutmpx\fP);
+void setutxent(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These functions shall provide access to the user accounting database.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetutxent\fR()
+function shall read the next entry from the user accounting database.
+If the database is not already open, it shall open it. If it reaches
+the end of the database, it shall fail.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetutxid\fR()
+function shall search forward from the current point in the database.
+If the
+.IR ut_type
+value of the
+.BR utmpx
+structure pointed to by
+.IR id
+is BOOT_TIME, OLD_TIME, or NEW_TIME, then it shall stop when it finds
+an
+entry with a matching
+.IR ut_type
+value. If the
+.IR ut_type
+value is INIT_PROCESS, LOGIN_PROCESS, USER_PROCESS,
+or DEAD_PROCESS, then it shall stop when it finds an entry whose type
+is one of these four and whose
+.IR ut_id
+member matches the
+.IR ut_id
+member of the
+.BR utmpx
+structure pointed to by
+.IR id .
+If the end of the database is reached without a match,
+\fIgetutxid\fR()
+shall fail.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetutxline\fR()
+function shall search forward from the current point in the database
+until it finds an entry of the type LOGIN_PROCESS or USER_PROCESS which
+also has a
+.IR ut_line
+value matching that in the
+.BR utmpx
+structure pointed to by
+.IR line .
+If the end of the database is reached without a match,
+\fIgetutxline\fR()
+shall fail.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetutxid\fR()
+or
+\fIgetutxline\fR()
+function may cache data. For this reason, to use
+\fIgetutxline\fR()
+to search for multiple occurrences, the application shall zero out the
+static data after each success, or
+\fIgetutxline\fR()
+may return a pointer to the same
+.BR utmpx
+structure.
+.P
+There is one exception to the rule about clearing the structure before
+further reads are done. The implicit read done by
+\fIpututxline\fR()
+(if it finds that it is not already at the correct place in the user
+accounting database) shall not modify the static structure returned by
+\fIgetutxent\fR(),
+\fIgetutxid\fR(),
+or
+\fIgetutxline\fR(),
+if the application has modified this structure and passed the
+pointer back to
+\fIpututxline\fR().
+.P
+For all entries that match a request, the
+.IR ut_type
+member indicates the type of the entry. Other members of the entry
+shall contain meaningful data based on the value of the
+.IR ut_type
+member as follows:
+.TS
+box center tab(!);
+cB | cB
+l | l.
+ut_type Member!Other Members with Meaningful Data
+_
+EMPTY!No others
+BOOT_TIME!\fIut_tv\fP
+OLD_TIME!\fIut_tv\fP
+NEW_TIME!\fIut_tv\fP
+USER_PROCESS!\fIut_id\fP, \fIut_user\fP (login name of the user), \fIut_line\fP, \fIut_pid\fP, \fIut_tv\fP
+INIT_PROCESS!\fIut_id\fP, \fIut_pid\fP, \fIut_tv\fP
+LOGIN_PROCESS!T{
+.IR ut_id ,
+.IR ut_user
+(implementation-defined name of the login process),
+.IR ut_line ,
+.IR ut_pid ,
+.IR ut_tv
+T}
+DEAD_PROCESS!\fIut_id\fP, \fIut_pid\fP, \fIut_tv\fP
+.TE
+.P
+An implementation that provides extended security controls may impose
+implementation-defined restrictions on accessing the user accounting
+database. In particular, the system may deny the existence of some or
+all of the user accounting database entries associated with users other
+than the caller.
+.P
+If the process has appropriate privileges, the
+\fIpututxline\fR()
+function shall write out the structure into the user accounting
+database. It shall search for a record as if by
+\fIgetutxid\fR()
+that satisfies the request. If this search succeeds, then the entry
+shall be replaced. Otherwise, a new entry shall be made at the end of
+the user accounting database.
+.P
+The
+\fIendutxent\fR()
+function shall close the user accounting database.
+.P
+The
+\fIsetutxent\fR()
+function shall reset the input to the beginning of the database. This
+should be done before each search for a new entry if it is desired that
+the entire database be examined.
+.P
+These functions need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgetutxent\fR(),
+\fIgetutxid\fR(),
+and
+\fIgetutxline\fR()
+shall return a pointer to a
+.BR utmpx
+structure containing a copy of the requested entry in the user
+accounting database. Otherwise, a null pointer shall be returned.
+.P
+The return value may point to a static area which is overwritten by a
+subsequent call to
+\fIgetutxid\fR()
+or
+\fIgetutxline\fR().
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIpututxline\fR()
+shall return a pointer to a
+.BR utmpx
+structure containing a copy of the entry added to the user accounting
+database. Otherwise, a null pointer shall be returned.
+.P
+The
+\fIendutxent\fR()
+and
+\fIsetutxent\fR()
+functions shall not return a value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined for the
+\fIendutxent\fR(),
+\fIgetutxent\fR(),
+\fIgetutxid\fR(),
+\fIgetutxline\fR(),
+and
+\fIsetutxent\fR()
+functions.
+.P
+The
+\fIpututxline\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The process does not have appropriate privileges.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The sizes of the arrays in the structure can be found using the
+.IR sizeof
+operator.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<utmpx.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/environ.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/environ.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bf8d9bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/environ.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ENVIRON "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+environ
+\(em array of character pointers to the environment strings
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+extern char **environ;
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^"
+and the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/erand48.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/erand48.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3c6d421
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/erand48.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ERAND48 "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+erand48
+\(em generate uniformly distributed pseudo-random numbers
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+double erand48(unsigned short \fIxsubi\fP[3]);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIdrand48\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/erf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/erf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0563e1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/erf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ERF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.EQ
+delim $$
+.EN
+.SH NAME
+erf,
+erff,
+erfl
+\(em error functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double erf(double \fIx\fP);
+float erff(float \fIx\fP);
+long double erfl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the error function of their argument
+.IR x ,
+defined as:
+.sp
+.RS
+${2 over sqrt pi} int from 0 to x e"^" " "{- t"^" 2" "} dt$
+.RE
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the value of
+the error function.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0, \(+-0 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-Inf, \(+-1 shall be returned.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow, a range error may occur, and
+\fIerf\fR(),
+\fIerff\fR(),
+and
+\fIerfl\fR()
+shall return an implementation-defined value no greater in magnitude
+than DBL_MIN, FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN, respectively.
+.P
+If the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option is supported, 2 *
+.IR x /\c
+.IR sqrt (\(*p)
+should be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result underflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.br
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Computing the Probability for a Normal Variate"
+.P
+This example shows how to use
+\fIerf\fR()
+to compute the probability that a normal variate assumes a value in the
+range [\fIx\fR1,\fIx\fR2] with \fIx\fR1\(<=\fIx\fR2.
+.P
+This example uses the constant M_SQRT1_2 which is part of the XSI option.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double
+Phi(const double x1, const double x2)
+{
+    return ( erf(x2*M_SQRT1_2) \(mi erf(x1*M_SQRT1_2) ) / 2;
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Underflow occurs when |\fIx\fP| < DBL_MIN * (\c
+.IR sqrt (\(*p)/2).
+.P
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIerfc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/erfc.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/erfc.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1a9b738
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/erfc.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ERFC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+erfc,
+erfcf,
+erfcl
+\(em complementary error functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double erfc(double \fIx\fP);
+float erfcf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double erfcl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the complementary error function 1.0 \(mi
+.IR erf ( x ).
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the value of
+the complementary error function.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow,
+and is not
+representable,
+a range error may occur, and
+\fIerfc\fR(),
+\fIerfcf\fR(),
+and
+\fIerfcl\fR()
+shall return
+0.0, or
+(if the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option is not supported) an
+implementation-defined value no greater in magnitude than DBL_MIN,
+FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN, respectively.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0, +1 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(miInf, +2 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is +Inf, +0 shall be returned.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow and is representable, a
+range error may occur and the correct value shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result underflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIerfc\fR()
+function is provided because of the extreme loss of relative accuracy if
+.IR erf ( x )
+is called for large
+.IR x
+and the result subtracted from 1.0.
+.P
+Note for IEEE\ Std\ 754\(hy1985
+.BR double ,
+26.55 <
+.IR x
+implies
+.IR erfc (\c
+.IR x )
+has underflowed.
+.P
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIerf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/erff.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/erff.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..52cd8f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/erff.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ERFF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+erff,
+erfl
+\(em error functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+float erff(float \fIx\fP);
+long double erfl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIerf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/errno.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/errno.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8a3f9b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/errno.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ERRNO "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+errno
+\(em error return value
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <errno.h>
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The lvalue
+.IR errno
+is used by many functions to return error values.
+.P
+Many functions provide an error number in
+.IR errno ,
+which has type
+.BR int
+and is defined in
+.IR <errno.h> .
+The value of
+.IR errno
+shall be defined only after a call to a function for which it is
+explicitly stated to be set and until it is changed by the next
+function call or if the application assigns it a value. The value of
+.IR errno
+should only be examined when it is indicated to be valid by a
+function's return value. Applications shall obtain the definition of
+.IR errno
+by the inclusion of
+.IR <errno.h> .
+No function in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 shall set
+.IR errno
+to 0. The setting of
+.IR errno
+after a successful call to a function is unspecified unless the
+description of that function specifies that
+.IR errno
+shall not be modified.
+.P
+It is unspecified whether
+.IR errno
+is a macro or an identifier declared with external linkage. If a macro
+definition is suppressed in order to access an actual object, or a
+program defines an identifier with the name
+.IR errno ,
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The symbolic values stored in
+.IR errno
+are documented in the ERRORS sections on all relevant pages.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+None.
+.SH ERRORS
+None.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Previously both POSIX and X/Open documents were more restrictive than
+the ISO\ C standard in that they required
+.IR errno
+to be defined as an external variable, whereas the ISO\ C standard required only
+that
+.IR errno
+be defined as a modifiable lvalue with type
+.BR int .
+.P
+An application that needs to examine the value of
+.IR errno
+to determine the error should set it to 0 before a function call, then
+inspect it before a subsequent function call.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.3" ", " "Error Numbers"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<errno.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/exec.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/exec.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7ef839d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/exec.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,1344 @@
+'\" et
+.TH EXEC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+environ,
+execl,
+execle,
+execlp,
+execv,
+execve,
+execvp,
+fexecve
+\(em execute a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+extern char **environ;
+int execl(const char *\fIpath\fP, const char *\fIarg0\fP, ... /*, (char *)0 */);
+int execle(const char *\fIpath\fP, const char *\fIarg0\fP, ... /*,
+    (char *)0, char *const \fIenvp\fP[]*/);
+int execlp(const char *\fIfile\fP, const char *\fIarg0\fP, ... /*, (char *)0 */);
+int execv(const char *\fIpath\fP, char *const \fIargv\fP[]);
+int execve(const char *\fIpath\fP, char *const \fIargv\fP[], char *const \fIenvp\fP[]);
+int execvp(const char *\fIfile\fP, char *const \fIargv\fP[]);
+int fexecve(int \fIfd\fP, char *const \fIargv\fP[], char *const \fIenvp\fP[]);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR exec
+family of functions shall replace the current process image with a new
+process image. The new image shall be constructed from a regular,
+executable file called the
+.IR "new process image file" .
+There shall be no return from a successful
+.IR exec ,
+because the calling process image is overlaid by the new process
+image.
+.P
+The
+\fIfexecve\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIexecve\fR()
+function except that the file to be executed is determined by the file
+descriptor
+.IR fd
+instead of a pathname. The file offset of
+.IR fd
+is ignored.
+.P
+When a C-language program is executed as a result of a call to one
+of the
+.IR exec
+family of functions, it shall be entered as a C-language function call
+as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int main (\fIint argc, char *argv\fP[]);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR argc
+is the argument count and
+.IR argv
+is an array of character pointers to the arguments themselves.
+In addition, the following variable, which must be declared by the user
+if it is to be used directly:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+extern char **environ;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+is initialized as a pointer to an array of character pointers to the
+environment strings. The
+.IR argv
+and
+.IR environ
+arrays are each terminated by a null pointer. The null pointer
+terminating the
+.IR argv
+array is not counted in
+.IR argc .
+.P
+Applications can change the entire environment in a single operation by
+assigning the
+.IR environ
+variable to point to an array of character pointers to the new environment
+strings. After assigning a new value to
+.IR environ ,
+applications should not rely on the new environment strings remaining
+part of the environment, as a call to
+\fIgetenv\fR(),
+\fIputenv\fR(),
+\fIsetenv\fR(),
+\fIunsetenv\fR(),
+or any function that is dependent on an environment variable may, on
+noticing that
+.IR environ
+has changed, copy the environment strings to a new array and assign
+.IR environ
+to point to it.
+.P
+Any application that directly modifies the pointers to which the
+.IR environ
+variable points has undefined behavior.
+.P
+Conforming multi-threaded applications shall not use the
+.IR environ
+variable to access or modify any environment variable while any other
+thread is concurrently modifying any environment variable. A call to
+any function dependent on any environment variable shall be considered
+a use of the
+.IR environ
+variable to access that environment variable.
+.P
+The arguments specified by a program with one of the
+.IR exec
+functions shall be passed on to the new process image in the
+corresponding
+\fImain\fR()
+arguments.
+.P
+The argument
+.IR path
+points to a pathname that identifies the new process image file.
+.P
+The argument
+.IR file
+is used to construct a pathname that identifies the new process image
+file. If the
+.IR file
+argument contains a
+<slash>
+character, the
+.IR file
+argument shall be used as the pathname for this file. Otherwise, the
+path prefix for this file is obtained by a search of the directories
+passed as the environment variable
+.IR PATH
+(see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables").
+If this environment variable is not present, the results
+of the search are implementation-defined.
+.P
+There are two distinct ways in which the contents of the process image
+file may cause the execution to fail, distinguished by the setting of
+.IR errno
+to either
+.BR [ENOEXEC] 
+or
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+(see the ERRORS section). In the cases where the other members of the
+.IR exec
+family of functions would fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [ENOEXEC] ,
+the
+\fIexeclp\fR()
+and
+\fIexecvp\fR()
+functions shall execute a command interpreter and the environment of the
+executed command shall be as if the process invoked the
+.IR sh
+utility using
+\fIexecl\fR()
+as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+execl(<shell path>, arg0, file, arg1, ..., (char *)0);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fIshell\ path\fP> is an unspecified pathname for the
+.IR sh
+utility,
+.IR file
+is the process image file, and for
+\fIexecvp\fR(),
+where
+.IR arg 0,
+.IR arg 1,
+and so on correspond to the values passed to
+\fIexecvp\fR()
+in
+.IR argv [0],
+.IR argv [1],
+and so on.
+.P
+The arguments represented by
+.IR arg0 ,\|.\|.\|.
+are pointers to null-terminated character strings. These strings
+shall constitute the argument list available to the new process
+image. The list is terminated by a null pointer. The argument
+.IR arg0
+should point to a filename string that is associated with the process
+being started by one of the
+.IR exec
+functions.
+.P
+The argument
+.IR argv
+is an array of character pointers to null-terminated strings. The
+application shall ensure that the last member of this array is a null
+pointer. These strings shall constitute the argument list available to
+the new process image. The value in
+.IR argv [0]
+should point to a filename string that is associated with the process
+being started by one of the
+.IR exec
+functions.
+.P
+The argument
+.IR envp
+is an array of character pointers to null-terminated strings. These
+strings shall constitute the environment for the new process image.
+The
+.IR envp
+array is terminated by a null pointer.
+.P
+For those forms not containing an
+.IR envp
+pointer (\c
+\fIexecl\fR(),
+\fIexecv\fR(),
+\fIexeclp\fR(),
+and
+\fIexecvp\fR()),
+the environment for the new process image shall be taken from the
+external variable
+.IR environ
+in the calling process.
+.P
+The number of bytes available for the new process' combined argument
+and environment lists is
+{ARG_MAX}.
+It is implementation-defined whether null terminators, pointers,
+and/or any alignment bytes are included in this total.
+.P
+File descriptors open in the calling process image shall remain open in
+the new process image, except for those whose close-on-\c
+.IR exec
+flag FD_CLOEXEC is set.
+For those file descriptors that remain open, all attributes of the open
+file description remain unchanged. For any file descriptor that is
+closed for this reason, file locks are removed as a result of the close
+as described in
+\fIclose\fR().
+Locks that are not removed by closing of file descriptors remain
+unchanged.
+.P
+If file descriptor 0, 1, or 2 would otherwise be closed after a successful
+call to one of the
+.IR exec
+family of functions, implementations may open an unspecified file for
+the file descriptor in the new process image. If a standard utility
+or a conforming application is executed with file descriptor 0 not
+open for reading or with file descriptor 1 or 2 not open for writing,
+the environment in which the utility or application is executed shall
+be deemed non-conforming, and consequently the utility or application
+might not behave as described in this standard.
+.P
+Directory streams open in the calling process image shall be closed
+in the new process image.
+.P
+The state of the floating-point environment in the initial thread
+of the new process image shall be set to the default.
+.P
+The state of conversion descriptors
+and message catalog descriptors in the new process image is undefined.
+.P
+For the new process image, the equivalent of:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+setlocale(LC_ALL, "C")
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+shall be executed at start-up.
+.P
+Signals set to the default action (SIG_DFL) in the calling process
+image shall be set to the default action in the new process image.
+Except for SIGCHLD, signals set to be ignored (SIG_IGN) by the calling
+process image shall be set to be
+ignored by the new process image. Signals set to be caught by the
+calling process image shall be set to the default action in the new
+process image (see
+.IR <signal.h> ).
+.P
+If the SIGCHLD signal is set to be ignored by the calling process
+image, it is unspecified whether the SIGCHLD signal is set to be
+ignored or to the default action in the new process image.
+.P
+After a successful call to any of the
+.IR exec
+functions, alternate signal stacks are not preserved and the SA_ONSTACK
+flag
+shall be cleared for all signals.
+.P
+After a successful call to any of the
+.IR exec
+functions, any functions previously registered by the
+\fIatexit\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_atfork\fR()
+functions are no longer registered.
+.P
+If the ST_NOSUID bit is set for the file system containing the new
+process
+image file, then the effective user ID, effective group ID, saved
+set-user-ID, and saved set-group-ID are unchanged in the new process
+image. Otherwise,
+if the set-user-ID mode bit of the new process image file is set, the
+effective user ID of the new process image shall be set to the user ID
+of the new process image file. Similarly, if the set-group-ID mode bit
+of the new process image file is set, the effective group ID of the new
+process image shall be set to the group ID of the new process image
+file. The real user ID, real group ID, and supplementary group IDs of
+the new process image shall remain the same as those of the calling
+process image. The effective user ID and effective group ID of the new
+process image shall be saved (as the saved set-user-ID and the saved
+set-group-ID) for use by
+\fIsetuid\fR().
+.P
+Any shared memory segments attached to the calling process image
+shall not be attached to the new process image.
+.P
+Any named semaphores open in the calling process shall be closed as
+if by appropriate calls to
+\fIsem_close\fR().
+.P
+Any blocks of typed memory that were mapped in the calling process are
+unmapped, as if
+\fImunmap\fR()
+was implicitly called to unmap them.
+.P
+Memory locks established by the calling process via calls to
+\fImlockall\fR()
+or
+\fImlock\fR()
+shall be removed. If locked pages in the address space of the calling
+process are also mapped into the address spaces of other processes and
+are locked by those processes, the locks established by the other
+processes shall be unaffected by the call by this process to the
+.IR exec
+function. If the
+.IR exec
+function fails, the effect on memory locks is unspecified.
+.P
+Memory mappings created in the process are unmapped before the address
+space is rebuilt for the new process image.
+.P
+When the calling process image does not use the SCHED_FIFO, SCHED_RR,
+or SCHED_SPORADIC
+scheduling policies, the scheduling policy and parameters of the
+new process image and the initial thread in that new process image are
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+When the calling process image uses the SCHED_FIFO, SCHED_RR, or
+SCHED_SPORADIC scheduling policies, the process policy and scheduling
+parameter settings shall not be changed by a call to an
+.IR exec
+function.
+The initial thread in the new process image shall inherit the
+process scheduling policy and parameters. It shall have the default
+system contention scope, but shall inherit its allocation domain
+from the calling process image.
+.P
+Per-process timers created by the calling process shall be deleted before
+replacing the current process image with the new process image.
+.P
+All open message queue descriptors in the calling process shall be closed,
+as described in
+\fImq_close\fR().
+.P
+Any outstanding asynchronous I/O operations may be canceled. Those
+asynchronous I/O operations that are not canceled shall complete as if
+the
+.IR exec
+function had not yet occurred, but any associated signal notifications
+shall be suppressed. It is unspecified whether the
+.IR exec
+function itself blocks awaiting such I/O completion. In no event,
+however, shall the new process image created by the
+.IR exec
+function be affected by the presence of outstanding asynchronous I/O
+operations at the time the
+.IR exec
+function is called. Whether any I/O is canceled, and which I/O may be
+canceled upon
+.IR exec ,
+is implementation-defined.
+.P
+The new process image shall inherit the CPU-time clock of the calling
+process image. This inheritance means that the process CPU-time clock
+of the process being
+.IR exec -ed
+shall not be reinitialized or altered as a result of the
+.IR exec
+function other than to reflect the time spent by the process executing
+the
+.IR exec
+function itself.
+.P
+The initial value of the CPU-time clock of the initial thread of the
+new process image shall be set to zero.
+.P
+If the calling process is being traced, the new process image shall
+continue to be traced into the same trace stream as the original
+process image, but the new process image shall not inherit the mapping
+of trace event names to trace event type identifiers that was defined
+by calls to the
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_open\fR()
+or the
+\fIposix_trace_trid_eventid_open\fR()
+functions in the calling process image.
+.P
+If the calling process is a trace controller process, any trace streams
+that were created by the calling process shall be shut down as
+described in the
+\fIposix_trace_shutdown\fR()
+function.
+.P
+The thread ID of the initial thread in the new process image is
+unspecified.
+.P
+The size and location of the stack on which the initial thread in the
+new process image runs is unspecified.
+.P
+The initial thread in the new process image shall have its cancellation
+type set to PTHREAD_CANCEL_DEFERRED and its cancellation state set to
+PTHREAD_CANCEL_ENABLED.
+.P
+The initial thread in the new process image shall have all
+thread-specific data values set to NULL and all thread-specific data
+keys shall be removed by the call to
+.IR exec
+without running destructors.
+.P
+The initial thread in the new process image shall be joinable, as if
+created with the
+.IR detachstate
+attribute set to PTHREAD_CREATE_JOINABLE.
+.P
+The new process shall inherit at least the following attributes from
+the calling process image:
+.IP " *" 4
+Nice value (see
+\fInice\fR())
+.IP " *" 4
+\fIsemadj\fP values (see
+\fIsemop\fR())
+.IP " *" 4
+Process ID
+.IP " *" 4
+Parent process ID
+.IP " *" 4
+Process group ID
+.IP " *" 4
+Session membership
+.IP " *" 4
+Real user ID
+.IP " *" 4
+Real group ID
+.IP " *" 4
+Supplementary group IDs
+.IP " *" 4
+Time left until an alarm clock signal (see
+\fIalarm\fR())
+.IP " *" 4
+Current working directory
+.IP " *" 4
+Root directory
+.IP " *" 4
+File mode creation mask (see
+\fIumask\fR())
+.IP " *" 4
+File size limit (see
+\fIgetrlimit\fR()
+and
+\fIsetrlimit\fR())
+.IP " *" 4
+Process signal mask (see
+\fIpthread_sigmask\fR())
+.IP " *" 4
+Pending signal (see
+\fIsigpending\fR())
+.IP " *" 4
+.IR tms_utime ,
+.IR tms_stime ,
+.IR tms_cutime ,
+and
+.IR tms_cstime
+(see
+\fItimes\fR())
+.IP " *" 4
+Resource limits
+.IP " *" 4
+Controlling terminal
+.IP " *" 4
+Interval timers
+.P
+The initial thread of the new process shall inherit at least the
+following attributes from the calling thread:
+.IP " *" 4
+Signal mask (see
+\fIsigprocmask\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_sigmask\fR())
+.IP " *" 4
+Pending signals (see
+\fIsigpending\fR())
+.P
+All other process attributes defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 shall be inherited in the
+new process image from the old process image. All other thread
+attributes defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 shall be inherited in the initial thread in
+the new process image from the calling thread in the old process image.
+The inheritance of process or thread attributes not defined by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 is
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+A call to any
+.IR exec
+function from a process with more than one thread shall result in all
+threads being terminated and the new executable image being loaded and
+executed. No destructor functions or cleanup handlers shall be called.
+.P
+Upon successful completion, the
+.IR exec
+functions shall mark for update the last data access timestamp
+of the file. If an
+.IR exec
+function failed but was able to locate the process image file, whether the
+last data access timestamp is marked for update is unspecified. Should the
+.IR exec
+function succeed, the process image file shall be considered to have been
+opened with
+\fIopen\fR().
+The corresponding
+\fIclose\fR()
+shall be considered to occur at a time after this open, but before process
+termination or successful completion of a subsequent call to one of the
+.IR exec
+functions,
+\fIposix_spawn\fR(),
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR().
+The
+.IR argv [\|]
+and
+.IR envp [\|]
+arrays of pointers and the strings to which those arrays point shall
+not be modified by a call to one of the
+.IR exec
+functions, except as a consequence of replacing the process image.
+.P
+The saved resource limits in the new process image are set to be a copy
+of the process' corresponding hard and soft limits.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If one of the
+.IR exec
+functions returns to the calling process image, an error has occurred;
+the return value shall be \(mi1, and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+.IR exec
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR E2BIG
+The number of bytes used by the new process image's argument list and
+environment list is greater than the system-imposed limit of
+{ARG_MAX}
+bytes.
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+The new process image file is not a regular file and the implementation
+does not support execution of files of its type.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The new process image file has appropriate privileges and has a
+recognized executable binary format, but the system does not support
+execution of a file with this format.
+.P
+The
+.IR exec
+functions, except for
+\fIfexecve\fR(),
+shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied for a directory listed in the new process
+image file's path prefix, or the new process image file denies execution
+permission.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+or
+.IR file
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR path
+or
+.IR file
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR path
+or
+.IR file
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the new process image file's path prefix names an existing
+file that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory,
+or the new process image file's pathname contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file that
+is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.P
+The
+.IR exec
+functions, except for
+\fIexeclp\fR()
+and
+\fIexecvp\fR(),
+shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOEXEC
+The new process image file has the appropriate access permission but
+has an unrecognized format.
+.P
+The
+\fIfexecve\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fd
+argument is not a valid file descriptor open for executing.
+.P
+The
+.IR exec
+functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+The new process image requires more memory than is allowed by
+the hardware or system-imposed memory management constraints.
+.P
+The
+.IR exec
+functions, except for
+\fIfexecve\fR(),
+may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+or
+.IR file
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of the
+.IR path
+argument or the length of the pathname constructed from the
+.IR file
+argument exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate result
+with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ETXTBSY
+The new process image file is a pure procedure (shared text) file that
+is currently open for writing by some process.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Using execl(\|)"
+.P
+The following example executes the
+.IR ls
+command, specifying the pathname of the executable (\c
+.BR /bin/ls )
+and using arguments supplied directly to the command to produce
+single-column output.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int ret;
+\&...
+ret = execl ("/bin/ls", "ls", "-1", (char *)0);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Using execle(\|)"
+.P
+The following example is similar to
+.IR "Using execl(\|)".
+In addition, it specifies the environment for the new process image
+using the
+.IR env
+argument.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int ret;
+char *env[] = { "HOME=/usr/home", "LOGNAME=home", (char *)0 };
+\&...
+ret = execle ("/bin/ls", "ls", "-l", (char *)0, env);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Using execlp(\|)"
+.P
+The following example searches for the location of the
+.IR ls
+command among the directories specified by the
+.IR PATH
+environment variable.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int ret;
+\&...
+ret = execlp ("ls", "ls", "-l", (char *)0);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Using execv(\|)"
+.P
+The following example passes arguments to the
+.IR ls
+command in the
+.IR cmd
+array.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int ret;
+char *cmd[] = { "ls", "-l", (char *)0 };
+\&...
+ret = execv ("/bin/ls", cmd);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Using execve(\|)"
+.P
+The following example passes arguments to the
+.IR ls
+command in the
+.IR cmd
+array, and specifies the environment for the new process image using the
+.IR env
+argument.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int ret;
+char *cmd[] = { "ls", "-l", (char *)0 };
+char *env[] = { "HOME=/usr/home", "LOGNAME=home", (char *)0 };
+\&...
+ret = execve ("/bin/ls", cmd, env);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Using execvp(\|)"
+.P
+The following example searches for the location of the
+.IR ls
+command among the directories specified by the
+.IR PATH
+environment variable, and passes arguments to the
+.IR ls
+command in the
+.IR cmd
+array.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int ret;
+char *cmd[] = { "ls", "-l", (char *)0 };
+\&...
+ret = execvp ("ls", cmd);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+As the state of conversion descriptors and message catalog
+descriptors in the new process image is undefined, conforming
+applications should not rely on their use and should close them prior
+to calling one of the
+.IR exec
+functions.
+.P
+Applications that require other than the default POSIX locale as the
+global locale in the new process image should call
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+with the appropriate parameters.
+.P
+When assigning a new value to the
+.IR environ
+variable, applications should ensure that the environment to which it
+will point contains at least the following:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Any implementation-defined variables required by the implementation to
+provide a conforming environment. See the _CS_V7_ENV entry in
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+and
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+for details.
+.IP " 2." 4
+A value for
+.IR PATH
+which finds conforming versions of all standard utilities before any
+other versions.
+.P
+The same constraint applies to the
+.IR envp
+array passed to
+\fIexecle\fR()
+or
+\fIexecve\fR(),
+in order to ensure that the new process image is invoked in a conforming
+environment.
+.P
+Applications should not execute programs with file descriptor 0 not open
+for reading or with file descriptor 1 or 2 not open for writing, as this
+might cause the executed program to misbehave. In order not to pass on
+these file descriptors to an executed program, applications should not
+just close them but should reopen them on, for example,
+.BR /dev/null .
+Some implementations may reopen them automatically, but applications
+should not rely on this being done.
+.P
+If an application wants to perform a checksum test of the file being
+executed before executing it, the file will need to be opened with read
+permission to perform the checksum test.
+.P
+Since execute permission is checked by
+\fIfexecve\fR(),
+the file description
+.IR fd
+need not have been opened with the O_EXEC flag. However, if the file
+to be executed denies read and write permission for the process
+preparing to do the
+.IR exec ,
+the only way to provide the
+.IR fd
+to
+\fIfexecve\fR()
+will be to use the O_EXEC flag when opening
+.IR fd .
+In this case, the application will not be able to perform a checksum
+test since it will not be able to read the contents of the file.
+.P
+Note that when a file descriptor is opened with O_RDONLY, O_RDWR, or
+O_WRONLY mode, the file descriptor can be used to read, read and write,
+or write the file, respectively, even if the mode of the file changes
+after the file was opened. Using the O_EXEC open mode is different;
+\fIfexecve\fR()
+will ignore the mode that was used when the file descriptor was opened
+and the
+.IR exec
+will fail if the mode of the file associated with
+.IR fd
+does not grant execute permission to the calling process at the time
+\fIfexecve\fR()
+is called.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Early proposals required that the value of
+.IR argc
+passed to
+\fImain\fR()
+be ``one or greater''. This was driven by the same requirement in
+drafts of the ISO\ C standard.
+In fact, historical implementations have passed a value of zero when no
+arguments are supplied to the caller of the
+.IR exec
+functions. This requirement was removed from the ISO\ C standard and subsequently
+removed from this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 as well. The wording, in particular the use of the
+word \fIshould\fP, requires a Strictly Conforming POSIX Application
+to pass at least one argument to the
+.IR exec
+function, thus guaranteeing that
+.IR argc
+be one or greater when invoked by such an application. In fact, this is
+good practice, since many existing applications reference
+.IR argv [0]
+without first checking the value of
+.IR argc .
+.P
+The requirement on a Strictly Conforming POSIX Application also states
+that the value passed as the first argument be a filename string
+associated with the process being started. Although some existing
+applications pass a pathname rather than a filename string in some
+circumstances, a filename string is more generally useful, since the
+common usage of
+.IR argv [0]
+is in printing diagnostics. In some cases the filename passed is not
+the actual filename of the file; for example, many implementations of the
+.IR login
+utility use a convention of prefixing a
+<hyphen>
+(\c
+.BR '\(hy' )
+to the actual filename, which indicates to the command interpreter being
+invoked that it is a ``login shell''.
+.P
+Historically, there have been two ways that implementations can
+.IR exec
+shell scripts.
+.P
+One common historical implementation is that the
+\fIexecl\fR(),
+\fIexecv\fR(),
+\fIexecle\fR(),
+and
+\fIexecve\fR()
+functions return an
+.BR [ENOEXEC] 
+error for any file not recognizable as executable, including a shell
+script. When the
+\fIexeclp\fR()
+and
+\fIexecvp\fR()
+functions encounter such a file, they assume the file to be a shell
+script and invoke a known command interpreter to interpret such files.
+This is now required by POSIX.1\(hy2008. These implementations of
+\fIexecvp\fR()
+and
+\fIexeclp\fR()
+only give the
+.BR [ENOEXEC] 
+error in the rare case of a problem with the command interpreter's
+executable file. Because of these implementations, the
+.BR [ENOEXEC] 
+error is not mentioned for
+\fIexeclp\fR()
+or
+\fIexecvp\fR(),
+although implementations can still give it.
+.P
+Another way that some historical implementations handle shell scripts
+is by recognizing the first two bytes of the file as the character
+string
+.BR \(dq#!\(dq 
+and using the remainder of the first line of the file as the name of
+the command interpreter to execute.
+.P
+One potential source of confusion noted by the standard developers
+is over how the contents of a process image file affect the behavior
+of the
+.IR exec
+family of functions. The following is a description of the actions
+taken:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the process image file is a valid executable (in a format that is
+executable and valid and having appropriate privileges) for this
+system, then the system executes the file.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If the process image file has appropriate privileges and is in a format
+that is executable but not valid for this system (such as a recognized
+binary for another architecture), then this is an error and
+.IR errno
+is set to
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+(see later RATIONALE on
+.BR [EINVAL] ).
+.IP " 3." 4
+If the process image file has appropriate privileges but is not
+otherwise recognized:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+If this is a call to
+\fIexeclp\fR()
+or
+\fIexecvp\fR(),
+then they invoke a command interpreter assuming that the process image
+file is a shell script.
+.IP " b." 4
+If this is not a call to
+\fIexeclp\fR()
+or
+\fIexecvp\fR(),
+then an error occurs and
+.IR errno
+is set to
+.BR [ENOEXEC] .
+.RE
+.P
+Applications that do not require to access their arguments may use
+the form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+main(void)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+as specified in the ISO\ C standard. However, the implementation will always
+provide the two arguments
+.IR argc
+and
+.IR argv ,
+even if they are not used.
+.P
+Some implementations provide a third argument to
+\fImain\fR()
+called
+.IR envp .
+This is defined as a pointer to the environment. The ISO\ C standard
+specifies invoking
+\fImain\fR()
+with two arguments, so implementations must support applications
+written this way. Since this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defines the global variable
+.IR environ ,
+which is also provided by historical implementations and can be used
+anywhere that
+.IR envp
+could be used, there is no functional need for the
+.IR envp
+argument. Applications should use the
+\fIgetenv\fR()
+function rather than accessing the environment directly via either
+.IR envp
+or
+.IR environ .
+Implementations are required to support the two-argument calling
+sequence, but this does not prohibit an implementation from supporting
+.IR envp
+as an optional third argument.
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 specifies that signals set to SIG_IGN
+remain set to SIG_IGN, and that the new process image inherits the
+signal mask of the thread that called
+.IR exec
+in the old process image. This is consistent with historical
+implementations, and it permits some useful functionality, such as the
+.IR nohup
+command. However, it should be noted that many existing applications
+wrongly assume that they start with certain signals set to the default
+action and/or unblocked. In particular, applications written with a
+simpler signal model that does not include blocking of signals, such as
+the one in the ISO\ C standard, may not behave properly if invoked with some
+signals blocked. Therefore, it is best not to block or ignore signals
+across
+.IR exec s
+without explicit reason to do so, and especially not to block signals
+across
+.IR exec s
+of arbitrary (not closely cooperating) programs.
+.P
+The
+.IR exec
+functions always save the value of the effective user ID
+and effective group ID
+of the process at the completion of the
+.IR exec ,
+whether or not the set-user-ID
+or the set-group-ID
+bit of the process image file is set.
+.P
+The statement about
+.IR argv [\|]
+and
+.IR envp [\|]
+being constants is included to make explicit to future writers of
+language bindings that these objects are completely constant. Due to a
+limitation of the ISO\ C standard, it is not possible to state that idea in
+standard C. Specifying two levels of
+.IR const \(mi\c
+.IR qualification
+for the
+.IR argv [\|]
+and
+.IR envp [\|]
+parameters for the
+.IR exec
+functions may seem to be the natural choice, given that these functions
+do not modify either the array of pointers or the characters to which
+the function points, but this would disallow existing correct code.
+Instead, only the array of pointers is noted as constant. The table of
+assignment compatibility for
+.IR dst =\c
+.IR src
+derived from the ISO\ C standard summarizes the compatibility:
+.TS
+box tab(!) center;
+r | lB | lB | lB | lB
+lB | c | c | c | c.
+\fIdst\fP:!char *[\|]!const char *[\|]!char *const[\|]!const char *const[\|]
+_
+\fIsrc\fP:
+char *[\|]!VALID!\(em!VALID!\(em
+const char *[\|]!\(em!VALID!\(em!VALID
+char * const [\|]!\(em!\(em!VALID!\(em
+const char *const[\|]!\(em!\(em!\(em!VALID
+.TE
+.P
+Since all existing code has a source type matching the first row, the
+column that gives the most valid combinations is the third column. The
+only other possibility is the fourth column, but using it would require
+a cast on the
+.IR argv
+or
+.IR envp
+arguments. It is unfortunate that the fourth column cannot be used,
+because the declaration a non-expert would naturally use would be that
+in the second row.
+.P
+The ISO\ C standard and this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 do not conflict on the use of
+.IR environ ,
+but some historical implementations of
+.IR environ
+may cause a conflict. As long as
+.IR environ
+is treated in the same way as an entry point (for example,
+\fIfork\fR()),
+it conforms to both standards. A library can contain
+\fIfork\fR(),
+but if there is a user-provided
+\fIfork\fR(),
+that
+\fIfork\fR()
+is given precedence and no problem ensues. The situation is similar
+for
+.IR environ :
+the definition in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 is to be used if there is no user-provided
+.IR environ
+to take precedence. At least three implementations are known to exist
+that solve this problem.
+.TP
+.BR E2BIG
+The limit
+{ARG_MAX}
+applies not just to the size of the argument list, but to the sum of
+that and the size of the environment list.
+.TP
+.BR EFAULT
+Some historical systems return
+.BR [EFAULT] 
+rather than
+.BR [ENOEXEC] 
+when the new process image file is corrupted. They are non-conforming.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+This error condition was added to POSIX.1\(hy2008 to allow an implementation to
+detect executable files generated for different architectures, and
+indicate this situation to the application. Historical implementations
+of shells,
+\fIexecvp\fR(),
+and
+\fIexeclp\fR()
+that encounter an
+.BR [ENOEXEC] 
+error will execute a shell on the assumption that the file is a shell
+script. This will not produce the desired effect when the file is a
+valid executable for a different architecture. An implementation may
+now choose to avoid this problem by returning
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+when a valid executable for a different architecture is encountered.
+Some historical implementations return
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+to indicate that the
+.IR path
+argument contains a character with the high order bit set. The
+standard developers chose to deviate from historical practice for the
+following reasons:
+.RS 12 
+.IP " 1." 4
+The new utilization of
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+will provide some measure of utility to the user community.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Historical use of
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+is not acceptable in an internationalized operating environment.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+Since the file pathname may be constructed by taking elements in the
+.IR PATH
+variable and putting them together with the filename, the
+.BR [ENAMETOOLONG] 
+error condition could also be reached this way.
+.TP
+.BR ETXTBSY
+System V returns this error when the executable file is currently open
+for writing by some process. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 neither requires nor prohibits this
+behavior.
+.P
+Other systems (such as System V) may return
+.BR [EINTR] 
+from
+.IR exec .
+This is not addressed by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, but implementations may have a
+window between the call to
+.IR exec
+and the time that a signal could cause one of the
+.IR exec
+calls to return with
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.P
+An explicit statement regarding the floating-point environment (as
+defined in the
+.IR <fenv.h> 
+header) was added to make it clear that the floating-point environment
+is set to its default when a call to one of the
+.IR exec
+functions succeeds. The requirements for inheritance or setting to the
+default for other process and thread start-up functions is covered by
+more generic statements in their descriptions and can be summarized as
+follows:
+.IP "\fIposix_spawn\fR\^(\|)" 14
+Set to default.
+.IP "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)" 14
+Inherit.
+.IP "\fIpthread_create\fR\^(\|)" 14
+Inherit.
+.P
+The purpose of the
+\fIfexecve\fR()
+function is to enable executing a file which has been verified to be
+the intended file. It is possible to actively check the file by reading
+from the file descriptor and be sure that the file is not exchanged for
+another between the reading and the execution. Alternatively, an
+function like
+\fIopenat\fR()
+can be used to open a file which has been found by reading the content
+of a directory using
+\fIreaddir\fR().
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIalarm\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIatexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIconfstr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfstatvfs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetenv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetitimer\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetrlimit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImknod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImmap\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fInice\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_event\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_eventid_equal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_atfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_sigmask\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputenv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIreaddir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemop\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaltstack\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigpending\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsystem\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItimes\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIulimit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIumask\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/exit.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/exit.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bcfb671
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/exit.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+'\" et
+.TH EXIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+exit
+\(em terminate a process
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+void exit(int \fIstatus\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The value of
+.IR status
+may be 0, EXIT_SUCCESS, EXIT_FAILURE,
+or any other value, though only the least significant 8 bits (that is,
+.IR status
+& 0377) shall be available to a waiting parent process.
+.P
+The
+\fIexit\fR()
+function shall first call all functions registered by
+\fIatexit\fR(),
+in the reverse order of their registration, except that a function is
+called after any previously registered functions that had already been
+called at the time it was registered. Each function is called as many
+times as it was registered. If, during the call to any such function, a
+call to the
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+function is made that would terminate the call to the registered
+function, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+If a function registered by a call to
+\fIatexit\fR()
+fails to return, the remaining registered functions shall not be called
+and the rest of the
+\fIexit\fR()
+processing shall not be completed. If
+\fIexit\fR()
+is called more than once, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The
+\fIexit\fR()
+function shall then flush all open streams with unwritten buffered data
+and close all open streams. Finally, the process shall be terminated
+with the same consequences as described in
+.IR "Consequences of Process Termination".
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIexit\fR()
+function does not return.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+See
+\fI_Exit\fR().
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fI_Exit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIatexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIlongjmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItmpfile\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/exp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/exp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b487627
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/exp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,187 @@
+'\" et
+.TH EXP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+exp,
+expf,
+expl
+\(em exponential function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double exp(double \fIx\fP);
+float expf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double expl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the base-\c
+.IR e
+exponential of
+.IR x .
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the
+exponential value of
+.IR x .
+.P
+If the correct value would cause overflow, a range error shall occur
+and
+\fIexp\fR(),
+\fIexpf\fR(),
+and
+\fIexpl\fR()
+shall return the value of the macro HUGE_VAL, HUGE_VALF, and HUGE_VALL,
+respectively.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow,
+and is not representable,
+a range error may occur, and
+\fIexp\fR(),
+\fIexpf\fR(),
+and
+\fIexpl\fR()
+shall return
+0.0, or
+(if the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option is not supported) an
+implementation-defined value no greater in magnitude than DBL_MIN,
+FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN, respectively.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0, 1 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(miInf, +0 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is +Inf,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow, and is representable, a
+range error may occur and the correct value shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result overflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the overflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result underflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Computing the Density of the Standard Normal Distribution"
+.P
+This function shows an implementation for the density of the standard
+normal distribution using
+\fIexp\fR().
+This example uses the constant M_PI which is part of the XSI option.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double
+normal_density (double x)
+{
+    return exp(\(mix*x/2) / sqrt (2*M_PI);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Note that for IEEE\ Std\ 754\(hy1985
+.BR double ,
+709.8 <
+.IR x
+implies
+.IR exp (\c
+.IR x )
+has overflowed. The value
+.IR x \c
+<\ \(mi708.4
+implies
+.IR exp (\c
+.IR x )
+has underflowed.
+.P
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlog\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/exp2.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/exp2.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..56aeb7b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/exp2.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,165 @@
+'\" et
+.TH EXP2 "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+exp2,
+exp2f,
+exp2l
+\(em exponential base 2 functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double exp2(double \fIx\fP);
+float exp2f(float \fIx\fP);
+long double exp2l(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the base-2 exponential of
+.IR x .
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return
+2\fI\s-3\ux\d\s+3\fR.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause overflow, a range error shall occur
+and
+\fIexp2\fR(),
+\fIexp2f\fR(),
+and
+\fIexp2l\fR()
+shall return the value of the macro HUGE_VAL, HUGE_VALF, and HUGE_VALL,
+respectively.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow,
+and is not representable,
+a range error may occur, and
+\fIexp2\fR(),
+\fIexp2f\fR(),
+and
+\fIexp2l\fR()
+shall return
+0.0, or
+(if the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option is not supported) an
+implementation-defined value no greater in magnitude than DBL_MIN,
+FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN, respectively.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0, 1 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(miInf, +0 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is +Inf,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow, and is representable, a
+range error may occur and the correct value shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result overflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the overflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result underflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+For IEEE\ Std\ 754\(hy1985
+.BR double ,
+1024 <=
+.IR x
+implies
+.IR exp2 (\c
+.IR x )
+has overflowed. The value
+.IR x \c
+<\ \(mi1022 implies
+.IR exp (\c
+.IR x )
+has underflowed.
+.P
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlog\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/expm1.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/expm1.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e0afa4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/expm1.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,191 @@
+'\" et
+.TH EXPM1 "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+expm1,
+expm1f,
+expm1l
+\(em compute exponential functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double expm1(double \fIx\fP);
+float expm1f(float \fIx\fP);
+long double expm1l(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute \fIe\u\s-3x\s+3\d\fR\(mi1.0.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions return
+\fIe\s-3\ux\d\s+3\fR\(mi1.0.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause overflow, a range error shall occur
+and
+\fIexpm1\fR(),
+\fIexpm1f\fR(),
+and
+\fIexpm1l\fR()
+shall return the value of the macro HUGE_VAL, HUGE_VALF, and HUGE_VALL,
+respectively.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0, \(+-0 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(miInf, \(mi1 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is +Inf,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is subnormal, a range error may occur
+.br
+and
+.IR x
+should be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is not returned,
+\fIexpm1\fR(),
+\fIexpm1f\fR(),
+and
+\fIexpm1l\fR()
+shall return an implementation-defined value no greater in magnitude
+than DBL_MIN, FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN, respectively.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result overflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the overflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is subnormal.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The value of
+.IR expm1 ( x )
+may be more accurate than
+.IR exp ( x )\(mi1.0
+for small values of
+.IR x .
+.P
+The
+\fIexpm1\fR()
+and
+\fIlog1p\fR()
+functions are useful for financial calculations of
+((1+\fIx\fR)\u\s-3\fIn\fR\s+3\d\(mi1)/\fIx\fR, namely:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+expm1(\fIn\fP * log1p(\fIx\fP))/\fIx\fP
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+when
+.IR x
+is very small (for example, when calculating small daily interest
+rates). These functions also simplify writing accurate inverse
+hyperbolic functions.
+.P
+For IEEE\ Std\ 754\(hy1985
+.BR double ,
+709.8 <
+.IR x
+implies
+.IR expm1 (\c
+.IR x )
+has overflowed.
+.P
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIilogb\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlog1p\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fabs.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fabs.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e3ebcb4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fabs.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FABS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fabs,
+fabsf,
+fabsl
+\(em absolute value function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double fabs(double \fIx\fP);
+float fabsf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double fabsl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the absolute value of their argument
+.IR x ,|\c
+.IR x |.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the absolute
+value of
+.IR x .
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0, +0 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-Inf, +Inf shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Computing the 1-Norm of a Floating-Point Vector"
+.P
+This example shows the use of
+\fIfabs\fR()
+to compute the 1-norm of a vector defined as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+norm1(v) = |v[0]| + |v[1]| + ... + |v[n\(mi1]|
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where |\fIx\fR| denotes the absolute value of \fIx\fR, \fIn\fR denotes
+the vector's dimension \fIv\fR[\fIi\fR] denotes the
+.IR i -th
+component of \fIv\fR (0\(<=\fIi\fR<\fIn\fR).
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double
+norm1(const double v[], const int n)
+{
+    int     i;
+    double  n1_v;  /* 1-norm of v */
+.P
+    n1_v = 0;
+    for (i=0; i<n; i++) {
+        n1_v += fabs (v[i]);
+    }
+.P
+    return n1_v;
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/faccessat.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/faccessat.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e8368cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/faccessat.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FACCESSAT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+faccessat
+\(em determine accessibility of a file relative to directory file
+descriptor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int faccessat(int \fIfd\fP, const char *\fIpath\fP, int \fIamode\fP, int \fIflag\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIaccess\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fattach.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fattach.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..726e7ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fattach.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,234 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FATTACH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fattach
+\(em attach a STREAMS-based file descriptor to a file in the
+file system name space (\fBSTREAMS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stropts.h>
+.P
+int fattach(int \fIfildes\fP, const char *\fIpath\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIfattach\fR()
+function shall attach a STREAMS-based file descriptor to a file,
+effectively associating a pathname with
+.IR fildes .
+The application shall ensure that the
+.IR fildes
+argument is a valid open file descriptor associated with a STREAMS
+file. The
+.IR path
+argument points to a pathname of an existing file. The application
+shall have appropriate privileges or be the owner of the file
+named by
+.IR path
+and have write permission. A successful call to
+\fIfattach\fR()
+shall cause all pathnames that name the file named by
+.IR path
+to name the STREAMS file associated with
+.IR fildes ,
+until the STREAMS file is detached from the file. A STREAMS file can be
+attached to more than one file and can have several pathnames
+associated with it.
+.P
+The attributes of the named STREAMS file shall be initialized as follows:
+the permissions, user ID, group ID, and times are set to those of the
+file named by
+.IR path ,
+the number of links is set to 1, and the size and device identifier are
+set to those of the STREAMS file associated with
+.IR fildes .
+If any attributes of the named STREAMS file are subsequently changed
+(for example, by
+\fIchmod\fR()),
+neither the attributes of the underlying file nor the attributes of the
+STREAMS file to which
+.IR fildes
+refers shall be affected.
+.P
+File descriptors referring to the underlying file, opened prior to an
+\fIfattach\fR()
+call, shall continue to refer to the underlying file.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfattach\fR()
+shall return 0. Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfattach\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied for a component of the path prefix, or the
+process is the owner of
+.IR path
+but does not have write permissions on the file named by
+.IR path .
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid open file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EBUSY
+The file named by
+.IR path
+is currently a mount point or has a STREAMS file attached to it.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR path
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory, or the
+.IR path
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The effective user ID of the process is not the owner of the file named
+by
+.IR path
+and the process does not have appropriate privileges.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIfattach\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument does not refer to a STREAMS file.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR EXDEV
+A link to a file on another file system was attempted.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Attaching a File Descriptor to a File"
+.P
+In the following example,
+.IR fd
+refers to an open STREAMS file. The call to
+\fIfattach\fR()
+associates this STREAM with the file
+.BR /tmp/named-STREAM ,
+such that any future calls to open
+.BR /tmp/named-STREAM ,
+prior to breaking the attachment via a call to
+\fIfdetach\fR(),
+will instead create a new file handle referring to the STREAMS file
+associated with
+.IR fd .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stropts.h>
+\&...
+    int fd;
+    char *pathname = "/tmp/named-STREAM";
+    int ret;
+.P
+    ret = fattach(fd, pathname);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIfattach\fR()
+function behaves similarly to the traditional
+\fImount\fR()
+function in the way a file is temporarily replaced by the root
+directory of the mounted file system. In the case of
+\fIfattach\fR(),
+the replaced file need not be a directory and the replacing file is a
+STREAMS file.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The file attributes of a file which has been the subject of an
+\fIfattach\fR()
+call are specifically set because of an artifact of the original
+implementation. The internal mechanism was the same as for the
+\fImount\fR()
+function. Since
+\fImount\fR()
+is typically only applied to directories, the effects when applied to
+a regular file are a little surprising, especially as regards the link
+count which rigidly remains one, even if there were several links
+originally and despite the fact that all original links refer to the
+STREAM as long as the
+\fIfattach\fR()
+remains in effect.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIfattach\fR()
+function may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfdetach\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisastream\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stropts.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fchdir.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fchdir.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2277715
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fchdir.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FCHDIR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fchdir
+\(em change working directory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int fchdir(int \fIfildes\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIfchdir\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIchdir\fR()
+except that the directory that is to be the new current working
+directory is specified by the file descriptor
+.IR fildes .
+.P
+A conforming application can obtain a file descriptor for a file of
+type directory using
+\fIopen\fR(),
+provided that the file status flags and access modes do not contain
+O_WRONLY or O_RDWR.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfchdir\fR()
+shall return 0. Otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error. On failure the current working directory
+shall remain unchanged.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfchdir\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied for the directory referenced by
+.IR fildes .
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not an open file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+The open file descriptor
+.IR fildes
+does not refer to a directory.
+.P
+The
+\fIfchdir\fR()
+may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was caught during the execution of
+\fIfchdir\fR().
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to the file system.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIchdir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdirfd\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fchmod.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fchmod.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..20c00e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fchmod.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FCHMOD "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fchmod
+\(em change mode of a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+int fchmod(int \fIfildes\fP, mode_t \fImode\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIfchmod\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIchmod\fR()
+except that the file whose permissions are changed is specified
+by the file descriptor
+.IR fildes .
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+references a shared memory object, the
+\fIfchmod\fR()
+function need only affect the S_IRUSR, S_IWUSR, S_IRGRP, S_IWGRP,
+S_IROTH, and S_IWOTH file permission bits.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+references a typed memory object, the behavior of
+\fIfchmod\fR()
+is unspecified.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a socket, the behavior of
+\fIfchmod\fR()
+is unspecified.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a STREAM (which is
+\fIfattach\fR()-ed
+into the file system name space) the call returns successfully, doing
+nothing.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfchmod\fR()
+shall return 0. Otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfchmod\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not an open file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The effective user ID does not match the owner of the file and the
+process does not have appropriate privileges.
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+The file referred to by
+.IR fildes
+resides on a read-only file system.
+.P
+The
+\fIfchmod\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fIfchmod\fR()
+function was interrupted by a signal.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR mode
+argument is invalid.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument refers to a pipe and the implementation disallows execution of
+\fIfchmod\fR()
+on a pipe.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Changing the Current Permissions for a File"
+.P
+The following example shows how to change the permissions for a
+file named
+.BR /home/cnd/mod1
+so that the owner and group have read/write/execute permissions, but
+the world only has read/write permissions.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+.P
+mode_t mode;
+int    fildes;
+\&...
+fildes = open("/home/cnd/mod1", O_RDWR);
+fchmod(fildes, S_IRWXU | S_IRWXG | S_IROTH | S_IWOTH);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIchown\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcreat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfstatat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfstatvfs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImknod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fchmodat.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fchmodat.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d8231f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fchmodat.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FCHMODAT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fchmodat
+\(em change mode of a file relative to directory file descriptor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+int fchmodat(int \fIfd\fP, const char *\fIpath\fP, mode_t \fImode\fP, int \fIflag\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fchown.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fchown.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..98dbcc0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fchown.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,138 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FCHOWN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fchown
+\(em change owner and group of a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int fchown(int \fIfildes\fP, uid_t \fIowner\fP, gid_t \fIgroup\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIfchown\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIchown\fR()
+except that the file whose owner and group are changed is
+specified by the file descriptor
+.IR fildes .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfchown\fR()
+shall return 0. Otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfchown\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not an open file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The effective user ID does not match the owner of the file or the
+process does not have appropriate privileges and _POSIX_CHOWN_RESTRICTED
+indicates that such privilege is required.
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+The file referred to by
+.IR fildes
+resides on a read-only file system.
+.P
+The
+\fIfchown\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The owner or group ID is not a value supported by the implementation.
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument refers to a pipe or socket
+or an
+\fIfattach\fR()-ed
+STREAM
+and the implementation disallows execution of
+\fIfchown\fR()
+on a pipe.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+A physical I/O error has occurred.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fIfchown\fR()
+function was interrupted by a signal which was caught.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Changing the Current Owner of a File"
+.P
+The following example shows how to change the owner of a file named
+.BR /home/cnd/mod1
+to ``jones'' and the group to ``cnd''.
+.P
+The numeric value for the user ID is obtained by extracting the user ID
+from the user database entry associated with ``jones''. Similarly, the
+numeric value for the group ID is obtained by extracting the group ID
+from the group database entry associated with ``cnd''. This example
+assumes the calling program has appropriate privileges.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <pwd.h>
+#include <grp.h>
+.P
+struct passwd *pwd;
+struct group  *grp;
+int            fildes;
+\&...
+fildes = open("/home/cnd/mod1", O_RDWR);
+pwd = getpwnam("jones");
+grp = getgrnam("cnd");
+fchown(fildes, pwd->pw_uid, grp->gr_gid);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIchown\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fchownat.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fchownat.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..444c5cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fchownat.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FCHOWNAT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fchownat
+\(em change owner and group of a file relative to directory
+file descriptor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int fchownat(int \fIfd\fP, const char *\fIpath\fP, uid_t \fIowner\fP, gid_t \fIgroup\fP,
+    int \fIflag\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIchown\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fclose.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fclose.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c5f6171
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fclose.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,166 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FCLOSE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fclose
+\(em close a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int fclose(FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfclose\fR()
+function shall cause the stream pointed to by
+.IR stream
+to be flushed and the associated file to be closed. Any unwritten
+buffered data for the stream shall be written to the file; any unread
+buffered data shall be discarded. Whether or not the call succeeds,
+the stream shall be disassociated from the file and any buffer set by
+the
+\fIsetbuf\fR()
+or
+\fIsetvbuf\fR()
+function shall be disassociated from the stream. If the associated
+buffer was automatically allocated, it shall be deallocated.
+.P
+If the file is not already at EOF, and the file is one capable of seeking,
+the file offset of the underlying open file description shall be set to
+the file position of the stream if the stream is the active handle to
+the underlying file description.
+.P
+The
+\fIfclose\fR()
+function shall mark for update the last data modification and last
+file status change timestamps of the underlying file, if the stream was
+writable, and if buffered data remains that has not yet been written to
+the file. The
+\fIfclose\fR()
+function shall perform the equivalent of a
+\fIclose\fR()
+on the file descriptor that is associated with the stream pointed to by
+.IR stream .
+.P
+After the call to
+\fIfclose\fR(),
+any use of
+.IR stream
+results in undefined behavior.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfclose\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, it shall return EOF
+and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfclose\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The O_NONBLOCK flag is set for the file descriptor underlying
+.IR stream
+and the thread would be delayed in the write operation.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The file descriptor underlying stream is not valid.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+An attempt was made to write a file that exceeds the maximum file size.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+An attempt was made to write a file that exceeds the file size
+limit of the process.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+The file is a regular file and an attempt was made to write at or beyond
+the offset maximum associated with the corresponding stream.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fIfclose\fR()
+function was interrupted by a signal.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+The process is a member of a background process group attempting to
+write to its controlling terminal, TOSTOP is set, the calling thread
+is not blocking SIGTTOU, the process is not ignoring SIGTTOU, and the
+process group of the process is orphaned.
+This error may also be returned under implementation-defined conditions.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+The underlying stream was created by
+\fIopen_memstream\fR()
+or
+\fIopen_wmemstream\fR()
+and insufficient memory is available.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+There was no free space remaining on the device containing the file or
+in the buffer used by the
+\fIfmemopen\fR()
+function.
+.TP
+.BR EPIPE
+An attempt is made to write to a pipe or FIFO that is not open for
+reading by any process. A SIGPIPE signal shall also be sent to the
+thread.
+.P
+The
+\fIfclose\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+A request was made of a nonexistent device, or the request was outside
+the capabilities of the device.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfmemopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetrlimit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen_memstream\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIulimit\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fcntl.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fcntl.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5977fe8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fcntl.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,690 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FCNTL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fcntl
+\(em file control
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <fcntl.h>
+.P
+int fcntl(int \fIfildes\fP, int \fIcmd\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIfcntl\fR()
+function shall perform the operations described below on open files. The
+.IR fildes
+argument is a file descriptor.
+.P
+The available values for
+.IR cmd
+are defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+and are as follows:
+.IP F_DUPFD 14
+Return a new file descriptor which shall be the lowest numbered
+available (that is, not already open) file descriptor greater than or
+equal to the third argument,
+.IR arg ,
+taken as an integer of type
+.BR int .
+The new file descriptor shall refer to the same open file description as
+the original file descriptor, and shall share any locks. The FD_CLOEXEC
+flag associated with the new file descriptor shall be cleared to keep
+the file open across calls to one of the
+.IR exec
+functions.
+.IP F_DUPFD_CLOEXEC 14
+.br
+Like F_DUPFD, but the FD_CLOEXEC flag associated with the new file
+descriptor shall be set.
+.IP F_GETFD 14
+Get the file descriptor flags defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+that are associated with the file descriptor
+.IR fildes .
+File descriptor flags are associated with a single file descriptor and
+do not affect other file descriptors that refer to the same file.
+.IP F_SETFD 14
+Set the file descriptor flags defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> ,
+that are associated with
+.IR fildes ,
+to the third argument,
+.IR arg ,
+taken as type
+.BR int .
+If the FD_CLOEXEC flag in the third argument
+is 0, the file descriptor shall remain open across the
+.IR exec
+functions; otherwise, the file descriptor shall be closed upon
+successful execution of one of the
+.IR exec
+functions.
+.IP F_GETFL 14
+Get the file status flags and file access modes, defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> ,
+for the file description associated with
+.IR fildes .
+The file access modes can be extracted from the return value using the
+mask O_ACCMODE, which is defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> .
+File status flags and file access modes are associated with the file
+description and do not affect other file descriptors that refer to the
+same file with different open file descriptions. The flags returned may
+include non-standard file status flags which the application did not
+set, provided that these additional flags do not alter the behavior of
+a conforming application.
+.IP F_SETFL 14
+Set the file status flags, defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> ,
+for the file description associated with
+.IR fildes
+from the corresponding bits in the third argument,
+.IR arg ,
+taken as type
+.BR int .
+Bits corresponding to the file access mode and the file creation
+flags, as defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> ,
+that are set in
+.IR arg
+shall be ignored. If any bits in
+.IR arg
+other than those mentioned here are changed by the application, the
+result is unspecified. If
+.IR fildes
+does not support non-blocking operations, it is unspecified whether the
+O_NONBLOCK flag will be ignored.
+.IP F_GETOWN 14
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a socket, get the process or process group ID specified to
+receive SIGURG signals when out-of-band data is available. Positive
+values indicate a process ID; negative values, other than \(mi1,
+indicate a process group ID. If
+.IR fildes
+does not refer to a socket, the results are unspecified.
+.IP F_SETOWN 14
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a socket, set the process or process group ID specified to
+receive SIGURG signals when out-of-band data is available, using the
+value of the third argument,
+.IR arg ,
+taken as type
+.BR int .
+Positive values indicate a process ID; negative values, other than
+\(mi1, indicate a process group ID. If
+.IR fildes
+does not refer to a socket, the results are unspecified.
+.P
+The following values for
+.IR cmd
+are available for advisory record locking. Record locking shall be
+supported for regular files, and may be supported for other files.
+.IP F_GETLK 14
+Get the first lock which blocks the lock description pointed to by the
+third argument,
+.IR arg ,
+taken as a pointer to type
+.BR "struct flock" ,
+defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> .
+The information retrieved shall overwrite the information passed to
+\fIfcntl\fR()
+in the structure
+.BR flock .
+If no lock is found that would prevent this lock from being created,
+then the structure shall be left unchanged except for the lock type
+which shall be set to F_UNLCK.
+.IP F_SETLK 14
+Set or clear a file segment lock according to the lock description
+pointed to by the third argument,
+.IR arg ,
+taken as a pointer to type
+.BR "struct flock" ,
+defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> .
+F_SETLK can establish shared (or read) locks (F_RDLCK) or
+exclusive (or write) locks (F_WRLCK), as well as to remove either type
+of lock (F_UNLCK). F_RDLCK, F_WRLCK, and F_UNLCK are defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> .
+If a shared or exclusive lock cannot be set,
+\fIfcntl\fR()
+shall return immediately with a return value of \(mi1.
+.IP F_SETLKW 14
+This command shall be equivalent to F_SETLK except that if a shared or
+exclusive lock is blocked by other locks, the thread shall wait until
+the request can be satisfied. If a signal that is to be caught is
+received while
+\fIfcntl\fR()
+is waiting for a region,
+\fIfcntl\fR()
+shall be interrupted. Upon return from the signal handler,
+\fIfcntl\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [EINTR] ,
+and the lock operation shall not be done.
+.P
+Additional implementation-defined values for
+.IR cmd
+may be defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> .
+Their names shall start with F_.
+.P
+When a shared lock is set on a segment of a file, other processes shall
+be able to set shared locks on that segment or a portion of it. A
+shared lock prevents any other process from setting an exclusive lock
+on any portion of the protected area. A request for a shared lock
+shall fail if the file descriptor was not opened with read access.
+.P
+An exclusive lock shall prevent any other process from setting a shared
+lock or an exclusive lock on any portion of the protected area. A
+request for an exclusive lock shall fail if the file descriptor was not
+opened with write access.
+.P
+The structure
+.BR flock
+describes the type (\c
+.IR l_type ),
+starting offset (\c
+.IR l_whence ),
+relative offset (\c
+.IR l_start ),
+size (\c
+.IR l_len ),
+and process ID (\c
+.IR l_pid )
+of the segment of the file to be affected.
+.P
+The value of
+.IR l_whence
+is SEEK_SET, SEEK_CUR, or SEEK_END,
+to indicate that the relative offset
+.IR l_start
+bytes shall be measured from the start of the file, current position,
+or end of the file, respectively. The value of
+.IR l_len
+is the number of consecutive bytes to be locked. The value of
+.IR l_len
+may be negative (where the definition of
+.BR off_t
+permits negative values of
+.IR l_len ).
+The
+.IR l_pid
+field is only used with F_GETLK to return the process ID of the process
+holding a blocking lock. After a successful F_GETLK request, when a
+blocking lock is found, the values returned in the
+.BR flock
+structure shall be as follows:
+.IP "\fIl_type\fP" 10
+Type of blocking lock found.
+.IP "\fIl_whence\fP" 10
+SEEK_SET.
+.IP "\fIl_start\fP" 10
+Start of the blocking lock.
+.IP "\fIl_len\fP" 10
+Length of the blocking lock.
+.IP "\fIl_pid\fP" 10
+Process ID of the process that holds the blocking lock.
+.P
+If the command is F_SETLKW and the process must wait for another
+process to release a lock, then the range of bytes to be locked shall
+be determined before the
+\fIfcntl\fR()
+function blocks. If the file size or file descriptor seek offset change
+while
+\fIfcntl\fR()
+is blocked, this shall not affect the range of bytes locked.
+.P
+If
+.IR l_len
+is positive, the area affected shall start at
+.IR l_start
+and end at
+.IR l_start +\c
+.IR l_len \(mi1.
+If
+.IR l_len
+is negative, the area affected shall start at
+.IR l_start +\c
+.IR l_len
+and end at
+.IR l_start \(mi1.
+Locks may start and extend beyond the current end of a file, but shall
+not extend before the beginning of the file. A lock shall be set to
+extend to the largest possible value of the file offset for that file
+by setting
+.IR l_len
+to 0. If such a lock also has
+.IR l_start
+set to 0 and
+.IR l_whence
+is set to SEEK_SET, the whole file shall be locked.
+.P
+There shall be at most one type of lock set for each byte in the file.
+Before a successful return from an F_SETLK or an F_SETLKW request when
+the calling process has previously existing locks on bytes in the
+region specified by the request, the previous lock type for each byte
+in the specified region shall be replaced by the new lock type. As
+specified above under the descriptions of shared locks and exclusive
+locks, an F_SETLK or an F_SETLKW request (respectively) shall fail or
+block when another process has existing locks on bytes in the specified
+region and the type of any of those locks conflicts with the type
+specified in the request.
+.P
+All locks associated with a file for a given process shall be removed
+when a file descriptor for that file is closed by that process or the
+process holding that file descriptor terminates. Locks are not
+inherited by a child process.
+.P
+A potential for deadlock occurs if a process controlling a locked
+region is put to sleep by attempting to lock the locked region of
+another process. If the system detects that sleeping until a locked
+region is unlocked would cause a deadlock,
+\fIfcntl\fR()
+shall fail with an
+.BR [EDEADLK] 
+error.
+.P
+An unlock (F_UNLCK) request in which
+.IR l_len
+is non-zero and the offset of the last byte of the requested segment is
+the maximum value for an object of type
+.BR off_t ,
+when the process has an existing lock in which
+.IR l_len
+is 0 and which includes the last byte of the requested segment, shall be
+treated as a request to unlock from the start of the requested segment
+with an
+.IR l_len
+equal to 0. Otherwise, an unlock (F_UNLCK) request shall attempt to
+unlock only the requested segment.
+.P
+When the file descriptor
+.IR fildes
+refers to a shared memory object, the behavior of
+\fIfcntl\fR()
+shall be the same as for a regular file except the effect of the
+following values for the argument
+.IR cmd
+shall be unspecified: F_SETFL, F_GETLK, F_SETLK, and F_SETLKW.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a typed memory object, the result of the
+\fIfcntl\fR()
+function is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the value returned shall depend on
+.IR cmd
+as follows:
+.IP F_DUPFD 12
+A new file descriptor.
+.IP F_DUPFD_CLOEXEC 12
+.br
+A new file descriptor.
+.IP F_GETFD 12
+Value of flags defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> .
+The return value shall not be negative.
+.IP F_SETFD 12
+Value other than \(mi1.
+.IP F_GETFL 12
+Value of file status flags and access modes. The return value is not
+negative.
+.IP F_SETFL 12
+Value other than \(mi1.
+.IP F_GETLK 12
+Value other than \(mi1.
+.IP F_SETLK 12
+Value other than \(mi1.
+.IP F_SETLKW 12
+Value other than \(mi1.
+.IP F_GETOWN 12
+Value of the socket owner process or process group; this will not be
+\(mi1.
+.IP F_SETOWN 12
+Value other than \(mi1.
+.P
+Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfcntl\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES " or " EAGAIN
+.br
+The
+.IR cmd
+argument is F_SETLK; the type of lock (\c
+.IR l_type )
+is a shared (F_RDLCK) or exclusive (F_WRLCK) lock and the segment of a
+file to be locked is already exclusive-locked by another process, or the
+type is an exclusive lock and some portion of the segment of a file to
+be locked is already shared-locked or exclusive-locked by another process.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid open file descriptor, or the argument
+.IR cmd
+is F_SETLK or F_SETLKW, the type of lock,
+.IR l_type ,
+is a shared lock (F_RDLCK), and
+.IR fildes
+is not a valid file descriptor open for reading, or the type of lock,
+.IR l_type ,
+is an exclusive lock (F_WRLCK), and
+.IR fildes
+is not a valid file descriptor open for writing.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+.IR cmd
+argument is F_SETLKW and the function was interrupted by a signal.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR cmd
+argument is invalid, or the
+.IR cmd
+argument is F_DUPFD or F_DUPFD_CLOEXEC and
+.IR arg
+is negative or greater than or equal to
+{OPEN_MAX},
+or the
+.IR cmd
+argument is F_GETLK, F_SETLK, or F_SETLKW and the data pointed to by
+.IR arg
+is not valid, or
+.IR fildes
+refers to a file that does not support locking.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+The argument
+.IR cmd
+is F_DUPFD or F_DUPFD_CLOEXEC and all file descriptors available to
+the process are currently open, or no file descriptors greater than or
+equal to
+.IR arg
+are available.
+.TP
+.BR ENOLCK
+The argument
+.IR cmd
+is F_SETLK or F_SETLKW and satisfying the lock or unlock request would
+result in the number of locked regions in the system exceeding a
+system-imposed limit.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+One of the values to be returned cannot be represented correctly.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The
+.IR cmd
+argument is F_GETLK, F_SETLK, or F_SETLKW and the smallest or, if
+.IR l_len
+is non-zero, the largest offset of any byte in the requested segment
+cannot be represented correctly in an object of type
+.BR off_t .
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIfcntl\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EDEADLK
+The
+.IR cmd
+argument is F_SETLKW, the lock is blocked by a lock from another
+process, and putting the calling process to sleep to wait for that lock
+to become free would cause a deadlock.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Locking and Unlocking a File"
+.P
+The following example demonstrates how to place a lock on bytes 100 to
+109 of a file and then later remove it. F_SETLK is used to perform a
+non-blocking lock request so that the process does not have to wait if
+an incompatible lock is held by another process; instead the process
+can take some other action.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int
+main(int argc, char *argv[])
+{
+    int fd;
+    struct flock fl;
+.P
+    fd = open("testfile", O_RDWR);
+    if (fd == -1)
+        /* Handle error */;
+.P
+    /* Make a non-blocking request to place a write lock
+       on bytes 100-109 of testfile */
+.P
+    fl.l_type = F_WRLCK;
+    fl.l_whence = SEEK_SET;
+    fl.l_start = 100;
+    fl.l_len = 10;
+.P
+    if (fcntl(fd, F_SETLK, &fl) == \(mi1) {
+        if (errno == EACCES || errno == EAGAIN) {
+            printf("Already locked by another process\en");
+.P
+            /* We can't get the lock at the moment */
+.P
+        } else {
+            /* Handle unexpected error */;
+        }
+    } else { /* Lock was granted... */
+.P
+        /* Perform I/O on bytes 100 to 109 of file */
+.P
+        /* Unlock the locked bytes */
+.P
+        fl.l_type = F_UNLCK;
+        fl.l_whence = SEEK_SET;
+        fl.l_start = 100;
+        fl.l_len = 10;
+        if (fcntl(fd, F_SETLK, &fl) == \(mi1)
+            /* Handle error */;
+    }
+    exit(EXIT_SUCCESS);
+} /* main */
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Setting the Close-on-Exec Flag"
+.P
+The following example demonstrates how to set the close-on-exec flag
+for the file descriptor
+.IR fd .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+\&...
+    int flags;
+.P
+    flags = fcntl(fd, F_GETFD);
+    if (flags == \(mi1)
+        /* Handle error */;
+    flags |= FD_CLOEXEC;
+    if (fcntl(fd, F_SETFD, flags) == \(mi1)
+        /* Handle error */;"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR arg
+values to F_GETFD, F_SETFD, F_GETFL, and F_SETFL all represent flag
+values to allow for future growth. Applications using these functions
+should do a read-modify-write operation on them, rather than assuming
+that only the values defined by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 are valid. It is a common error to
+forget this, particularly in the case of F_SETFD. Some implementations
+set additional file status flags to advise the application of default
+behavior, even though the application did not request these flags.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The ellipsis in the SYNOPSIS is the syntax specified by the ISO\ C standard
+for a variable number of arguments. It is used because System V uses
+pointers for the implementation of file locking functions.
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 permits concurrent read and write access to file data using the
+\fIfcntl\fR()
+function; this is a change from the 1984 /usr/group standard and early proposals. Without
+concurrency controls, this feature may not be fully utilized without
+occasional loss of data.
+.P
+Data losses occur in several ways. One case occurs when several
+processes try to update the same record, without sequencing controls;
+several updates may occur in parallel and the last writer ``wins''.
+Another case is a bit-tree or other internal list-based database that
+is undergoing reorganization. Without exclusive use to the tree segment
+by the updating process, other reading processes chance getting lost in
+the database when the index blocks are split, condensed, inserted, or
+deleted. While
+\fIfcntl\fR()
+is useful for many applications, it is not intended to be overly
+general and does not handle the bit-tree example well.
+.P
+This facility is only required for regular files because it is not
+appropriate for many devices such as terminals and network
+connections.
+.P
+Since
+\fIfcntl\fR()
+works with ``any file descriptor associated with that file, however it
+is obtained'', the file descriptor may have been inherited through a
+\fIfork\fR()
+or
+.IR exec
+operation and thus may affect a file that another process also has
+open.
+.P
+The use of the open file description to identify what to lock requires
+extra calls and presents problems if several processes are sharing an
+open file description, but there are too many implementations of the
+existing mechanism for this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 to use different specifications.
+.P
+Another consequence of this model is that closing any file descriptor
+for a given file (whether or not it is the same open file description
+that created the lock) causes the locks on that file to be relinquished
+for that process. Equivalently, any close for any file/process pair
+relinquishes the locks owned on that file for that process. But note
+that while an open file description may be shared through
+\fIfork\fR(),
+locks are not inherited through
+\fIfork\fR().
+Yet locks may be inherited through one of the
+.IR exec
+functions.
+.P
+The identification of a machine in a network environment is outside
+the scope of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. Thus, an
+.IR l_sysid
+member, such as found in System V, is not included in the locking
+structure.
+.P
+Changing of lock types can result in a previously locked region being
+split into smaller regions.
+.P
+Mandatory locking was a major feature of the 1984 /usr/group standard.
+.P
+For advisory file record locking to be effective, all processes that
+have access to a file must cooperate and use the advisory mechanism
+before doing I/O on the file. Enforcement-mode record locking is
+important when it cannot be assumed that all processes are cooperating.
+For example, if one user uses an editor to update a file at the same
+time that a second user executes another process that updates the same
+file and if only one of the two processes is using advisory locking,
+the processes are not cooperating. Enforcement-mode record locking
+would protect against accidental collisions.
+.P
+Secondly, advisory record locking requires a process using locking to
+bracket each I/O operation with lock (or test) and unlock operations.
+With enforcement-mode file and record locking, a process can lock the
+file once and unlock when all I/O operations have been completed.
+Enforcement-mode record locking provides a base that can be enhanced;
+for example, with sharable locks. That is, the mechanism could be
+enhanced to allow a process to lock a file so other processes could
+read it, but none of them could write it.
+.P
+Mandatory locks were omitted for several reasons:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Mandatory lock setting was done by multiplexing the set-group-ID
+bit in most implementations; this was confusing, at best.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The relationship to file truncation as supported in 4.2 BSD
+was not well specified.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Any publicly readable file could be locked by anyone. Many historical
+implementations keep the password database in a publicly readable
+file. A malicious user could thus prohibit logins. Another
+possibility would be to hold open a long-distance telephone line.
+.IP " 4." 4
+Some demand-paged historical implementations offer memory mapped files,
+and enforcement cannot be done on that type of file.
+.P
+Since sleeping on a region is interrupted with any signal,
+\fIalarm\fR()
+may be used to provide a timeout facility in applications requiring
+it. This is useful in deadlock detection. Since implementation of
+full deadlock detection is not always feasible, the
+.BR [EDEADLK] 
+error was made optional.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIalarm\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fcntl.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fdatasync.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fdatasync.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..728367a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fdatasync.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FDATASYNC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fdatasync
+\(em synchronize the data of a file
+(\fBREALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int fdatasync(int \fIfildes\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIfdatasync\fR()
+function shall force all currently queued I/O operations associated
+with the file indicated by file descriptor
+.IR fildes
+to the synchronized I/O completion state.
+.P
+The functionality shall be equivalent to
+\fIfsync\fR()
+with the symbol _POSIX_SYNCHRONIZED_IO defined,
+with the exception that all I/O operations shall be completed as
+defined for synchronized I/O data integrity completion.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIfdatasync\fR()
+function shall return the value 0; otherwise, the function shall return
+the value \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error. If the
+\fIfdatasync\fR()
+function fails, outstanding I/O operations are not guaranteed to have
+been completed.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfdatasync\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid file descriptor open for writing.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+This implementation does not support synchronized I/O for this file.
+.P
+In the event that any of the queued I/O operations fail,
+\fIfdatasync\fR()
+shall return the error conditions defined for
+\fIread\fR()
+and
+\fIwrite\fR().
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIaio_fsync\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfsync\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fdetach.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fdetach.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..198423f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fdetach.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,174 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FDETACH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fdetach
+\(em detach a name from a STREAMS-based file descriptor (\fBSTREAMS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stropts.h>
+.P
+int fdetach(const char *\fIpath\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIfdetach\fR()
+function shall detach a STREAMS-based file from the file to which
+it was attached by a previous call to
+\fIfattach\fR().
+The
+.IR path
+argument points to the pathname of the attached STREAMS file. The
+process shall have appropriate privileges or be the owner of the file.
+A successful call to
+\fIfdetach\fR()
+shall cause all pathnames that named the attached STREAMS file to again
+name the file to which the STREAMS file was attached. All subsequent
+operations on
+.IR path
+shall operate on the underlying file and not on the STREAMS file.
+.P
+All open file descriptions established while the STREAMS file was
+attached to the file referenced by
+.IR path
+shall still refer to the STREAMS file after the
+\fIfdetach\fR()
+has taken effect.
+.P
+If there are no open file descriptors or other references to the
+STREAMS file, then a successful call to
+\fIfdetach\fR()
+shall be equivalent to performing the last
+\fIclose\fR()
+on the attached file.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfdetach\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfdetach\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied on a component of the path prefix.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR path
+argument names a file that is not currently attached.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR path
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory, or the
+.IR path
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file
+that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The effective user ID is not the owner of
+.IR path
+and the process does not have appropriate privileges.
+.P
+The
+\fIfdetach\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Detaching a File"
+.P
+The following example detaches the STREAMS-based file
+.BR /tmp/named-STREAM
+from the file to which it was attached by a previous, successful call
+to
+\fIfattach\fR().
+Subsequent calls to open this file refer to the underlying file, not to
+the STREAMS file.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stropts.h>
+\&...
+    char *pathname = "/tmp/named-STREAM";
+    int ret;
+.P
+    ret = fdetach(pathname);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIfdetach\fR()
+function may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfattach\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stropts.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fdim.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fdim.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..44ea76b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fdim.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,148 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FDIM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fdim,
+fdimf,
+fdiml
+\(em compute positive difference between two floating-point numbers
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double fdim(double \fIx\fP, double \fIy\fP);
+float fdimf(float \fIx\fP, float \fIy\fP);
+long double fdiml(long double \fIx\fP, long double \fIy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall determine the positive difference between their
+arguments. If
+.IR x
+is greater than
+.IR y ,
+.IR x \(mi\c
+.IR y
+is returned. If
+.IR x
+is less than or equal to
+.IR y ,
++0 is returned.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the positive
+difference value.
+.P
+If
+.IR x \(mi\c
+.IR y
+is positive and overflows, a range error shall occur and
+\fIfdim\fR(),
+\fIfdimf\fR(),
+and
+\fIfdiml\fR()
+shall return the value of the macro HUGE_VAL, HUGE_VALF, and HUGE_VALL,
+respectively.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow, a range error may occur, and
+\fIfdim\fR(),
+\fIfdimf\fR(),
+and
+\fIfdiml\fR()
+shall return
+the correct value, or
+(if the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option is not supported) an
+implementation-defined value no greater in magnitude than DBL_MIN,
+FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN, respectively.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+or
+.IR y
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfdim\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result overflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the overflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.P
+The
+\fIfdim\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result underflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfmax\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfmin\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fdopen.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fdopen.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cf1779e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fdopen.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FDOPEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fdopen
+\(em associate a stream with a file descriptor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+FILE *fdopen(int \fIfildes\fP, const char *\fImode\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIfdopen\fR()
+function shall associate a stream with a file descriptor.
+.P
+The
+.IR mode
+argument is a character string having one of the following values:
+.IP "\fIr\fP\ or\ \fIrb\fP" 14
+Open a file for reading.
+.IP "\fIw\fP\ or\ \fIwb\fP" 14
+Open a file for writing.
+.IP "\fIa\fP\ or\ \fIab\fP" 14
+Open a file for writing at end-of-file.
+.IP "\fIr\fP+\ or\ \fIrb\fP+\ or\ \fIr\fP+\fIb\fP" 14
+Open a file for update (reading and writing).
+.IP "\fIw\fP+\ or\ \fIwb\fP+\ or\ \fIw\fP+\fIb\fP" 14
+Open a file for update (reading and writing).
+.IP "\fIa\fP+\ or\ \fIab\fP+\ or\ \fIa\fP+\fIb\fP" 14
+Open a file for update (reading and writing) at end-of-file.
+.P
+The meaning of these flags is exactly as specified in
+\fIfopen\fR(),
+except that modes beginning with
+.IR w
+shall not cause truncation of the file.
+.P
+Additional values for the
+.IR mode
+argument may be supported by an implementation.
+.P
+The application shall ensure that the mode of the stream as expressed
+by the
+.IR mode
+argument is allowed by the file access mode of the open file
+description to which
+.IR fildes
+refers. The file position indicator associated with the new stream is
+set to the position indicated by the file offset associated with the
+file descriptor.
+.P
+The error and end-of-file indicators for the stream shall be cleared.
+The
+\fIfdopen\fR()
+function may cause the last data access timestamp of the underlying
+file to be marked for update.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a shared memory object, the result of the
+\fIfdopen\fR()
+function is unspecified.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a typed memory object, the result of the
+\fIfdopen\fR()
+function is unspecified.
+.P
+The
+\fIfdopen\fR()
+function shall preserve the offset maximum previously set for the
+open file description corresponding to
+.IR fildes .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfdopen\fR()
+shall return a pointer to a stream; otherwise, a null pointer shall be
+returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfdopen\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+{STREAM_MAX}
+streams are currently open in the calling process.
+.P
+The
+\fIfdopen\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR mode
+argument is not a valid mode.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+{FOPEN_MAX}
+streams are currently open in the calling process.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient space to allocate a buffer.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+File descriptors are obtained from calls like
+\fIopen\fR(),
+\fIdup\fR(),
+\fIcreat\fR(),
+or
+\fIpipe\fR(),
+which open files but do not return streams.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The file descriptor may have been obtained from
+\fIopen\fR(),
+\fIcreat\fR(),
+\fIpipe\fR(),
+\fIdup\fR(),
+\fIfcntl\fR(),
+or
+\fIsocket\fR();
+inherited through
+\fIfork\fR(),
+\fIposix_spawn\fR(),
+or
+.IR exec ;
+or perhaps obtained by other means.
+.P
+The meanings of the
+.IR mode
+arguments of
+\fIfdopen\fR()
+and
+\fIfopen\fR()
+differ. With
+\fIfdopen\fR(),
+open for write (\fIw\fP or \fIw+\fP) does not truncate, and append
+(\fIa\fP or \fIa+\fP) cannot create for writing. The
+.IR mode
+argument formats that include a \fIb\fP are allowed for consistency
+with the ISO\ C standard function
+\fIfopen\fR().
+The \fIb\fP has no effect on the resulting stream. Although not
+explicitly required by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, a good implementation of append (\fIa\fP)
+mode would cause the O_APPEND flag to be set.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5.1" ", " "Interaction of File Descriptors and Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfmemopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen_memstream\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fdopendir.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fdopendir.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8e221e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fdopendir.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,314 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FDOPENDIR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fdopendir, opendir
+\(em open directory associated with file descriptor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <dirent.h>
+.P
+DIR *fdopendir(int \fIfd\fP);
+DIR *opendir(const char *\fIdirname\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIfdopendir\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIopendir\fR()
+function except that the directory is specified by a file descriptor
+rather than by a name. The file offset associated with the file
+descriptor at the time of the call determines which entries are
+returned.
+.P
+Upon successful return from
+\fIfdopendir\fR(),
+the file descriptor is under the control of the system, and if any
+attempt is made to close the file descriptor, or to modify the state of
+the associated description, other than by means of
+\fIclosedir\fR(),
+\fIreaddir\fR(),
+\fIreaddir_r\fR(),
+\fIrewinddir\fR(),
+or
+\fIseekdir\fR(),
+the behavior is undefined. Upon calling
+\fIclosedir\fR()
+the file descriptor shall be closed.
+.P
+It is unspecified whether the FD_CLOEXEC flag will be set on the file
+descriptor by a successful call to
+\fIfdopendir\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIopendir\fR()
+function shall open a directory stream corresponding to the directory
+named by the
+.IR dirname
+argument. The directory stream is positioned at the first entry. If
+the type
+.BR DIR
+is implemented using a file descriptor, applications shall only be
+able to open up to a total of
+{OPEN_MAX}
+files and directories.
+.P
+If the type
+.BR DIR
+is implemented using a file descriptor, the descriptor shall be
+obtained as if the O_DIRECTORY flag was passed to
+\fIopen\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return
+a pointer to an object of type
+.BR DIR .
+Otherwise, these functions shall return a null pointer and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfdopendir\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fd
+argument is not a valid file descriptor open for reading.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+The descriptor
+.IR fd
+is not associated with a directory.
+.P
+The
+\fIopendir\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied for the component of the path prefix of
+.IR dirname
+or read permission is denied for
+.IR dirname .
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR dirname
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR dirname
+does not name an existing directory or
+.IR dirname
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of
+.IR dirname
+names an existing file that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link
+to a directory.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIopendir\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR dirname
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+Too many files are currently open in the system.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Open a Directory Stream"
+.P
+The following program fragment demonstrates how the
+\fIopendir\fR()
+function is used.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <dirent.h>
+\&...
+    DIR *dir;
+    struct dirent *dp;
+\&...
+    if ((dir = opendir (".")) == NULL) {
+        perror ("Cannot open .");
+        exit (1);
+    }
+.P
+    while ((dp = readdir (dir)) != NULL) {
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Find And Open a File"
+.P
+The following program searches through a given directory looking
+for files whose name does not begin with a dot and whose size is
+larger than 1 MiB.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <dirent.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int
+main(int argc, char *argv[])
+{
+    struct stat statbuf;
+    DIR *d;
+    struct dirent *dp;
+    int dfd, ffd;
+.P
+    if ((d = fdopendir((dfd = open("./tmp", O_RDONLY)))) == NULL) {
+        fprintf(stderr, "Cannot open ./tmp directory\en");
+        exit(1);
+    }
+    while ((dp = readdir(d)) != NULL) {
+        if (dp->d_name[0] == '.')
+            continue;
+        /* there is a possible race condition here as the file
+         * could be renamed between the readdir and the open */
+        if ((ffd = openat(dfd, dp->d_name, O_RDONLY)) == -1) {
+            perror(dp->d_name);
+            continue;
+        }
+        if (fstat(ffd, &statbuf) == 0 && statbuf.st_size > (1024*1024)) {
+            /* found it ... */
+            printf("%s: %jdK\en", dp->d_name,
+                (intmax_t)(statbuf.st_size / 1024));
+        }
+        close(ffd);
+    }
+    closedir(d); // note this implicitly closes dfd
+    return 0;
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIopendir\fR()
+function should be used in conjunction with
+\fIreaddir\fR(),
+\fIclosedir\fR(),
+and
+\fIrewinddir\fR()
+to examine the contents of the directory (see the EXAMPLES section in
+.IR "\fIreaddir\fR\^(\|)").
+This method is recommended for portability.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The purpose of the
+\fIfdopendir\fR()
+function is to enable opening files in directories other than the
+current working directory without exposure to race conditions. Any part
+of the path of a file could be changed in parallel to a call to
+\fIopendir\fR(),
+resulting in unspecified behavior.
+.P
+Based on historical implementations, the rules about file descriptors
+apply to directory streams as well. However, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not
+mandate that the directory stream be implemented using file
+descriptors. The description of
+\fIclosedir\fR()
+clarifies that if a file descriptor is used for the directory stream,
+it is mandatory that
+\fIclosedir\fR()
+deallocate the file descriptor. When a file descriptor is used to
+implement the directory stream, it behaves as if the FD_CLOEXEC
+had been set for the file descriptor.
+.P
+The directory entries for dot
+and dot-dot
+are optional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not provide a way to test
+.IR "a priori"
+for their existence because an application that is portable must be
+written to look for (and usually ignore) those entries. Writing code
+that presumes that they are the first two entries does not always work,
+as many implementations permit them to be other than the first two
+entries, with a ``normal'' entry preceding them. There is negligible
+value in providing a way to determine what the implementation does
+because the code to deal with dot and dot-dot must be written in any
+case and because such a flag would add to the list of those flags
+(which has proven in itself to be objectionable) and might be abused.
+.P
+Since the structure and buffer allocation, if any, for directory
+operations are defined by the implementation, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 imposes no
+portability requirements for erroneous program constructs, erroneous
+data, or the use of unspecified values such as the use or referencing
+of a
+.IR dirp
+value or a
+.BR dirent
+structure value after a directory stream has been closed or after a
+\fIfork\fR()
+or one of the
+.IR exec
+function calls.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIclosedir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdirfd\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfstatat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIreaddir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrewinddir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsymlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<dirent.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/feclearexcept.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/feclearexcept.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7daac9c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/feclearexcept.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FECLEAREXCEPT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+feclearexcept
+\(em clear floating-point exception
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <fenv.h>
+.P
+int feclearexcept(int \fIexcepts\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfeclearexcept\fR()
+function shall attempt to clear the supported floating-point
+exceptions represented by
+.IR excepts .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the argument is zero or if all the specified exceptions were
+successfully cleared,
+\fIfeclearexcept\fR()
+shall return zero. Otherwise, it shall return a non-zero value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfegetexceptflag\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIferaiseexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fenv.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fegetenv.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fegetenv.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f396fe9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fegetenv.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FEGETENV "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fegetenv,
+fesetenv
+\(em get and set current floating-point environment
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <fenv.h>
+.P
+int fegetenv(fenv_t *\fIenvp\fP);
+int fesetenv(const fenv_t *\fIenvp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfegetenv\fR()
+function shall attempt to store the current floating-point environment
+in the object pointed to by
+.IR envp .
+.P
+The
+\fIfesetenv\fR()
+function shall attempt to establish the floating-point environment
+represented by the object pointed to by
+.IR envp .
+The argument
+.IR envp
+shall point to an object set by a call to
+\fIfegetenv\fR()
+or
+\fIfeholdexcept\fR(),
+or equal a floating-point environment macro. The
+\fIfesetenv\fR()
+function does not raise floating-point exceptions, but only installs
+the state of the floating-point status flags represented through its
+argument.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the representation was successfully stored,
+\fIfegetenv\fR()
+shall return zero. Otherwise, it shall return a non-zero value.
+If the environment was successfully established,
+\fIfesetenv\fR()
+shall return zero. Otherwise, it shall return a non-zero value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeholdexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeupdateenv\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fenv.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fegetexceptflag.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fegetexceptflag.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7e86259
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fegetexceptflag.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FEGETEXCEPTFLAG "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fegetexceptflag,
+fesetexceptflag
+\(em get and set floating-point status flags
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <fenv.h>
+.P
+int fegetexceptflag(fexcept_t *\fIflagp\fP, int \fIexcepts\fP);
+int fesetexceptflag(const fexcept_t *\fIflagp\fP, int \fIexcepts\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfegetexceptflag\fR()
+function shall attempt to store an implementation-defined representation
+of the states of the floating-point status flags indicated by the argument
+.IR excepts
+in the object pointed to by the argument
+.IR flagp .
+.P
+The
+\fIfesetexceptflag\fR()
+function shall attempt to set the floating-point status flags indicated
+by the argument
+.IR excepts
+to the states stored in the object pointed to by
+.IR flagp .
+The value pointed to by
+.IR flagp
+shall have been set by a previous call to
+\fIfegetexceptflag\fR()
+whose second argument represented at least those floating-point
+exceptions represented by the argument
+.IR excepts .
+This function does not raise floating-point exceptions, but only sets
+the state of the flags.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the representation was successfully stored,
+\fIfegetexceptflag\fR()
+shall return zero. Otherwise, it shall return a non-zero value. If the
+.IR excepts
+argument is zero or if all the specified exceptions were successfully
+set,
+\fIfesetexceptflag\fR()
+shall return zero. Otherwise, it shall return a non-zero value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIferaiseexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fenv.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fegetround.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fegetround.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f3ba4a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fegetround.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FEGETROUND "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fegetround,
+fesetround
+\(em get and set current rounding direction
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <fenv.h>
+.P
+int fegetround(void);
+int fesetround(int \fIround\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfegetround\fR()
+function shall get the current rounding direction.
+.P
+The
+\fIfesetround\fR()
+function shall establish the rounding direction represented by its
+argument
+.IR round .
+If the argument is not equal to the value of a rounding direction
+macro, the rounding direction is not changed.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIfegetround\fR()
+function shall return the value of the rounding direction macro
+representing the current rounding direction or a negative value if
+there is no such rounding direction macro or the current rounding
+direction is not determinable.
+.P
+The
+\fIfesetround\fR()
+function shall return a zero value if and only if the requested
+rounding direction was established.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following example saves, sets, and restores the rounding direction,
+reporting an error and aborting if setting the rounding direction
+fails:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <fenv.h>
+#include <assert.h>
+void f(int round_dir)
+{
+    #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
+    int save_round;
+    int setround_ok;
+    save_round = fegetround();
+    setround_ok = fesetround(round_dir);
+    assert(setround_ok == 0);
+    /* ... */
+    fesetround(save_round);
+    /* ... */
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fenv.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/feholdexcept.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/feholdexcept.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..26ee32b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/feholdexcept.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FEHOLDEXCEPT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+feholdexcept
+\(em save current floating-point environment
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <fenv.h>
+.P
+int feholdexcept(fenv_t *\fIenvp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfeholdexcept\fR()
+function shall save the current floating-point environment in the
+object pointed to by
+.IR envp ,
+clear the floating-point status flags, and then install a non-stop
+(continue on floating-point exceptions) mode, if available, for all
+floating-point exceptions.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIfeholdexcept\fR()
+function shall return zero if and only if non-stop floating-point
+exception handling was successfully installed.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIfeholdexcept\fR()
+function should be effective on typical IEC\ 60559:\|1989 standard implementations which
+have the default non-stop mode and at least one other mode for trap
+handling or aborting. If the implementation provides only the non-stop
+mode, then installing the non-stop mode is trivial.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfegetenv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeupdateenv\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fenv.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/feof.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/feof.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5ffc49f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/feof.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FEOF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+feof
+\(em test end-of-file indicator on a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int feof(FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfeof\fR()
+function shall test the end-of-file indicator for the stream pointed
+to by
+.IR stream .
+.P
+The
+\fIfeof\fR()
+function shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if
+.IR stream
+is valid.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIfeof\fR()
+function shall return non-zero if and only if the end-of-file
+indicator is set for
+.IR stream .
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIclearerr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIferror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/feraiseexcept.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/feraiseexcept.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8a9aff3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/feraiseexcept.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FERAISEEXCEPT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+feraiseexcept
+\(em raise floating-point exception
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <fenv.h>
+.P
+int feraiseexcept(int \fIexcepts\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIferaiseexcept\fR()
+function shall attempt to raise the supported floating-point exceptions
+represented by the argument
+.IR excepts .
+The order in which these floating-point exceptions are raised is
+unspecified. Whether the
+\fIferaiseexcept\fR()
+function additionally raises the inexact floating-point exception
+whenever it raises the overflow or underflow floating-point exception
+is implementation-defined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the argument is zero or if all the specified exceptions were
+successfully raised,
+\fIferaiseexcept\fR()
+shall return zero. Otherwise, it shall return a non-zero value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The effect is intended to be similar to that of floating-point
+exceptions raised by arithmetic operations. Hence, enabled traps for
+floating-point exceptions raised by this function are taken.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Raising overflow or underflow is allowed to also raise inexact because
+on some architectures the only practical way to raise an exception is
+to execute an instruction that has the exception as a side-effect. The
+function is not restricted to accept only valid coincident expressions
+for atomic operations, so the function can be used to raise exceptions
+accrued over several operations.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfegetexceptflag\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fenv.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ferror.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ferror.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7228256
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ferror.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FERROR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ferror
+\(em test error indicator on a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int ferror(FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIferror\fR()
+function shall test the error indicator for the stream pointed to by
+.IR stream .
+.P
+The
+\fIferror\fR()
+function shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if
+.IR stream
+is valid.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIferror\fR()
+function shall return non-zero if and only if the error indicator is
+set for
+.IR stream .
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIclearerr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeof\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fesetenv.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fesetenv.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4fb238c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fesetenv.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FESETENV "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fesetenv
+\(em set current floating-point environment
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <fenv.h>
+.P
+int fesetenv(const fenv_t *\fIenvp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfegetenv\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fesetexceptflag.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fesetexceptflag.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c452f55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fesetexceptflag.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FESETEXCEPTFLAG "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fesetexceptflag
+\(em set floating-point status flags
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <fenv.h>
+.P
+int fesetexceptflag(const fexcept_t *\fIflagp\fP, int \fIexcepts\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfegetexceptflag\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fesetround.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fesetround.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7578f8b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fesetround.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FESETROUND "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fesetround
+\(em set current rounding direction
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <fenv.h>
+.P
+int fesetround(int \fIround\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfegetround\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fetestexcept.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fetestexcept.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f2b7b1a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fetestexcept.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FETESTEXCEPT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fetestexcept
+\(em test floating-point exception flags
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <fenv.h>
+.P
+int fetestexcept(int \fIexcepts\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfetestexcept\fR()
+function shall determine which of a specified subset of the
+floating-point exception flags are currently set. The
+.IR excepts
+argument specifies the floating-point status flags to be queried.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIfetestexcept\fR()
+function shall return the value of the bitwise-inclusive OR of the
+floating-point exception macros corresponding to the currently set
+floating-point exceptions included in
+.IR excepts .
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following example calls function
+\fIf\fR()
+if an invalid exception is set, and then function
+\fIg\fR()
+if an overflow exception is set:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <fenv.h>
+/* ... */
+{
+    #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
+    int set_excepts;
+    feclearexcept(FE_INVALID | FE_OVERFLOW);
+    // maybe raise exceptions
+    set_excepts = fetestexcept(FE_INVALID | FE_OVERFLOW);
+    if (set_excepts & FE_INVALID) f();
+    if (set_excepts & FE_OVERFLOW) g();
+    /* ... */
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfegetexceptflag\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIferaiseexcept\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fenv.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/feupdateenv.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/feupdateenv.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..df6c78f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/feupdateenv.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FEUPDATEENV "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+feupdateenv
+\(em update floating-point environment
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <fenv.h>
+.P
+int feupdateenv(const fenv_t *\fIenvp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfeupdateenv\fR()
+function shall attempt to save the currently raised floating-point
+exceptions in its automatic storage, attempt to install the
+floating-point environment represented by the object pointed to by
+.IR envp ,
+and then attempt to raise the saved floating-point exceptions. The
+argument
+.IR envp
+shall point to an object set by a call to
+\fIfeholdexcept\fR()
+or
+\fIfegetenv\fR(),
+or equal a floating-point environment macro.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIfeupdateenv\fR()
+function shall return a zero value if and only if all the required
+actions were successfully carried out.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following example shows sample code to hide spurious underflow
+floating-point exceptions:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <fenv.h>
+double f(double x)
+{
+    #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
+    double result;
+    fenv_t save_env;
+    feholdexcept(&save_env);
+    // compute result
+    if (/* test spurious underflow */)
+    feclearexcept(FE_UNDERFLOW);
+    feupdateenv(&save_env);
+    return result;
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfegetenv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeholdexcept\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fenv.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fexecve.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fexecve.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b866db7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fexecve.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FEXECVE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fexecve \(em execute a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int fexecve(int \fIfd\fP, char *const \fIargv[]\fP, char *const \fIenvp[]\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fflush.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fflush.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3ddfe4a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fflush.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,214 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FFLUSH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fflush
+\(em flush a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int fflush(FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+If
+.IR stream
+points to an output stream or an update stream in which the most recent
+operation was not input,
+\fIfflush\fR()
+shall cause any unwritten data for that stream to be written to the
+file,
+and the last data modification and last file status change timestamps
+of the underlying file shall be marked for update.
+.P
+If
+.IR stream
+is a null pointer,
+\fIfflush\fR()
+shall perform this flushing action on all streams for which the
+behavior is defined above.
+.P
+For a stream open for reading, if the file is not already at EOF, and
+the file is one capable of seeking, the file offset of the underlying
+open file description shall be set to the file position of the stream,
+and any characters pushed back onto the stream by
+\fIungetc\fR()
+or
+\fIungetwc\fR()
+that have not subsequently been read from the stream shall be discarded
+(without further changing the file offset).
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfflush\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, it shall set the error indicator for
+the stream, return EOF,
+and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfflush\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The O_NONBLOCK flag is set for the file descriptor underlying
+.IR stream
+and the thread would be delayed in the write operation.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The file descriptor underlying
+.IR stream
+is not valid.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+An attempt was made to write a file that exceeds the maximum file size.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+An attempt was made to write a file that exceeds the file size
+limit of the process.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+The file is a regular file and an attempt was made to write at or
+beyond the offset maximum associated with the corresponding stream.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fIfflush\fR()
+function was interrupted by a signal.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+The process is a member of a background process group attempting to
+write to its controlling terminal, TOSTOP is set, the calling thread
+is not blocking SIGTTOU, the process is not ignoring SIGTTOU, and the
+process group of the process is orphaned.
+This error may also be returned under implementation-defined conditions.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+The underlying stream was created by
+\fIopen_memstream\fR()
+or
+\fIopen_wmemstream\fR()
+and insufficient memory is available.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+There was no free space remaining on the device containing the file or
+in the buffer used by the
+\fIfmemopen\fR()
+function.
+.TP
+.BR EPIPE
+An attempt is made to write to a pipe or FIFO that is not open for
+reading by any process. A SIGPIPE signal shall also be sent to the thread.
+.P
+The
+\fIfflush\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+A request was made of a nonexistent device, or the request was
+outside the capabilities of the device.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Sending Prompts to Standard Output"
+.P
+The following example uses
+\fIprintf\fR()
+calls to print a series of prompts for information the user must enter
+from standard input. The
+\fIfflush\fR()
+calls force the output to standard output. The
+\fIfflush\fR()
+function is used because standard output is usually buffered and the
+prompt may not immediately be printed on the output or terminal. The
+\fIgetline\fR()
+function calls read strings from standard input and place the
+results in variables, for use later in the program.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+char *user;
+char *oldpasswd;
+char *newpasswd;
+ssize_t llen;
+size_t blen;
+struct termios term;
+tcflag_t saveflag;
+.P
+printf("User name: ");
+fflush(stdout);
+blen = 0;
+llen = getline(&user, &blen, stdin);
+user[llen-1] = 0;
+tcgetattr(fileno(stdin), &term);
+saveflag = term.c_lflag;
+term.c_lflag &= ~ECHO;
+tcsetattr(fileno(stdin), TCSANOW, &term);
+printf("Old password: ");
+fflush(stdout);
+blen = 0;
+llen = getline(&oldpasswd, &blen, stdin);
+oldpasswd[llen-1] = 0;
+.P
+printf("\enNew password: ");
+fflush(stdout);
+blen = 0;
+llen = getline(&newpasswd, &blen, stdin);
+newpasswd[llen-1] = 0;
+term.c_lflag = saveflag;
+tcsetattr(fileno(stdin), TCSANOW, &term);
+free(user);
+free(oldpasswd);
+free(newpasswd);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Data buffered by the system may make determining the validity of the
+position of the current file descriptor impractical. Thus, enforcing
+the repositioning of the file descriptor after
+\fIfflush\fR()
+on streams open for
+\fIread\fR()
+is not mandated by POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfmemopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetrlimit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen_memstream\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIulimit\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ffs.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ffs.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4b41368
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ffs.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FFS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ffs
+\(em find first set bit
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <strings.h>
+.P
+int ffs(int \fIi\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIffs\fR()
+function shall find the first bit set (beginning with the least
+significant bit) in
+.IR i ,
+and return the index of that bit. Bits are numbered starting at one
+(the least significant bit).
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIffs\fR()
+function shall return the index of the first bit set. If
+.IR i
+is 0, then
+\fIffs\fR()
+shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<strings.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fgetc.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fgetc.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fbc8008
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fgetc.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,175 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FGETC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fgetc
+\(em get a byte from a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int fgetc(FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+If the end-of-file indicator for the input stream pointed to by
+.IR stream
+is not set and a next byte is present, the
+\fIfgetc\fR()
+function shall obtain the next byte as an
+.BR "unsigned char"
+converted to an
+.BR int ,
+from the input stream pointed to by
+.IR stream ,
+and advance the associated file position indicator for the stream (if
+defined). Since
+\fIfgetc\fR()
+operates on bytes, reading a character consisting of multiple bytes (or
+``a multi-byte character'') may require multiple calls to
+\fIfgetc\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIfgetc\fR()
+function may mark the last data access timestamp of the file
+associated with
+.IR stream
+for update. The last data access timestamp shall be marked for
+update by the first successful execution of
+\fIfgetc\fR(),
+\fIfgets\fR(),
+\fIfread\fR(),
+\fIfscanf\fR(),
+\fIgetc\fR(),
+\fIgetchar\fR(),
+\fIgetdelim\fR(),
+\fIgetline\fR(),
+\fIgets\fR(),
+or
+\fIscanf\fR()
+using
+.IR stream
+that returns data not supplied by a prior call to
+\fIungetc\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfgetc\fR()
+shall return the next byte from the input stream pointed to by
+.IR stream .
+If the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set, or if the
+stream is at end-of-file, the end-of-file indicator for the
+stream shall be set and
+\fIfgetc\fR()
+shall return EOF. If a read error occurs, the error indicator for the
+stream shall be set,
+\fIfgetc\fR()
+shall return EOF,
+and shall set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfgetc\fR()
+function shall fail if data needs to be read and:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The O_NONBLOCK flag is set for the file descriptor underlying
+.IR stream
+and the thread would be delayed in the
+\fIfgetc\fR()
+operation.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The file descriptor underlying
+.IR stream
+is not a valid file descriptor open for reading.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The read operation was terminated due to the receipt of a signal, and
+no data was transferred.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+A physical I/O error has occurred, or the process is in a background
+process group attempting to read from its controlling terminal, and
+either the calling thread is blocking SIGTTIN or the process is ignoring
+SIGTTIN or the process group of the process is orphaned.
+This error may also be generated for implementation-defined reasons.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The file is a regular file and an attempt was made to read at or beyond
+the offset maximum associated with the corresponding stream.
+.P
+The
+\fIfgetc\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient storage space is available.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+A request was made of a nonexistent device, or the request was outside
+the capabilities of the device.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If the integer value returned by
+\fIfgetc\fR()
+is stored into a variable of type
+.BR char
+and then compared against the integer constant EOF, the comparison may
+never succeed, because sign-extension of a variable of type
+.BR char
+on widening to integer is implementation-defined.
+.P
+The
+\fIferror\fR()
+or
+\fIfeof\fR()
+functions must be used to distinguish between an error condition and an
+end-of-file condition.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfeof\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIferror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfgets\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfscanf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetchar\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgets\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIungetc\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fgetpos.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fgetpos.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..913d90c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fgetpos.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FGETPOS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fgetpos
+\(em get current file position information
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int fgetpos(FILE *restrict \fIstream\fP, fpos_t *restrict \fIpos\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfgetpos\fR()
+function shall store the current values of the parse state (if any)
+and file position indicator for the stream pointed to by
+.IR stream
+in the object pointed to by
+.IR pos .
+The value stored contains unspecified information usable by
+\fIfsetpos\fR()
+for repositioning the stream to its position at the time of the call to
+\fIfgetpos\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIfgetpos\fR()
+function shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfgetpos\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, it shall return a non-zero value and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfgetpos\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The file descriptor underlying
+.IR stream
+is not valid.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The current value of the file position cannot be represented correctly
+in an object of type
+.BR fpos_t .
+.TP
+.BR ESPIPE
+The file descriptor underlying
+.IR stream
+is associated with a pipe, FIFO, or socket.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIftell\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrewind\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIungetc\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fgets.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fgets.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bad0ccf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fgets.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,176 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FGETS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fgets
+\(em get a string from a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+char *fgets(char *restrict \fIs\fP, int \fIn\fP, FILE *restrict \fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfgets\fR()
+function shall read bytes from
+.IR stream
+into the array pointed to by
+.IR s ,
+until
+.IR n \(mi1
+bytes are read, or a
+<newline>
+is read and transferred to
+.IR s ,
+or an end-of-file condition is encountered. The string is then
+terminated with a null byte.
+.P
+The
+\fIfgets\fR()
+function may mark the last data access timestamp of the file associated
+with
+.IR stream
+for update. The last data access timestamp shall be marked for update
+by the first successful execution of
+\fIfgetc\fR(),
+\fIfgets\fR(),
+\fIfread\fR(),
+\fIfscanf\fR(),
+\fIgetc\fR(),
+\fIgetchar\fR(),
+\fIgetdelim\fR(),
+\fIgetline\fR(),
+\fIgets\fR(),
+or
+\fIscanf\fR()
+using
+.IR stream
+that returns data not supplied by a prior call to
+\fIungetc\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfgets\fR()
+shall return
+.IR s .
+If the stream is at end-of-file, the end-of-file indicator for
+the stream shall be set and
+\fIfgets\fR()
+shall return a null pointer.
+If a read error occurs, the error indicator for the stream shall be set,
+\fIfgets\fR()
+shall return a null pointer,
+and shall set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfgetc\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Reading Input"
+.P
+The following example uses
+\fIfgets\fR()
+to read lines of input. It assumes that the file it is reading is a text
+file and that lines in this text file are no longer than 16384 (or
+{LINE_MAX}
+if it is less than 16384 on the implementation where it is running)
+bytes long. (Note that the standard utilities have no line length limit if
+.IR sysconf (_SC_LINE_MAX)
+returns \(mi1 without setting
+.IR errno .
+This example assumes that
+.IR sysconf (_SC_LINE_MAX)
+will not fail.)
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <limits.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#define MYLIMIT 16384
+.P
+char *line;
+int line_max;
+if (LINE_MAX >= MYLIMIT) {
+    // Use maximum line size of MYLIMIT. If LINE_MAX is
+    // bigger than our limit, sysconf() can't report a
+    // smaller limit.
+    line_max = MYLIMIT;
+} else {
+    long limit = sysconf(_SC_LINE_MAX);
+    line_max = (limit < 0 || limit > MYLIMIT) ? MYLIMIT : (int)limit;
+}
+.P
+// line_max + 1 leaves room for the null byte added by fgets().
+line = malloc(line_max + 1);
+if (line == NULL) {
+    // out of space
+    ...
+    return error;
+}
+.P
+while (fgets(line, line_max + 1, fp) != NULL) {
+    // Verify that a full line has been read ...
+    // If not, report an error or prepare to treat the
+    // next time through the loop as a read of a
+    // continuation of the current line.
+    ...
+    // Process line ...
+    ...
+}
+free(line);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfgetc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfscanf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetchar\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetdelim\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgets\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIungetc\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fgetwc.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fgetwc.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3aa1dc7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fgetwc.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,174 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FGETWC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fgetwc
+\(em get a wide-character code from a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wint_t fgetwc(FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfgetwc\fR()
+function shall obtain the next character (if present) from the input
+stream pointed to by
+.IR stream ,
+convert that to the corresponding wide-character code, and advance the
+associated file position indicator for the stream (if defined).
+.P
+If an error occurs, the resulting value of the file position indicator
+for the stream is unspecified.
+.P
+The
+\fIfgetwc\fR()
+function may mark the last data access timestamp of the file associated
+with
+.IR stream
+for update. The last data access timestamp shall be marked for update
+by the first successful execution of
+\fIfgetwc\fR(),
+\fIfgetws\fR(),
+\fIfwscanf\fR(),
+\fIgetwc\fR(),
+\fIgetwchar\fR(),
+\fIvfwscanf\fR(),
+\fIvwscanf\fR(),
+or
+\fIwscanf\fR()
+using
+.IR stream
+that returns data not supplied by a prior call to
+\fIungetwc\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIfgetwc\fR()
+function shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIfgetwc\fR()
+function shall return the wide-character code of the character read from the
+input stream pointed to by
+.IR stream
+converted to a type
+.BR wint_t .
+If the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set, or if the stream is
+at end-of-file, the end-of-file indicator for the stream shall be set
+and
+\fIfgetwc\fR()
+shall return WEOF. If a read error occurs, the error indicator for the
+stream shall be set,
+\fIfgetwc\fR()
+shall return WEOF,
+and shall set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+If an encoding error occurs, the error indicator for the stream
+shall be set,
+\fIfgetwc\fR()
+shall return WEOF, and shall set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfgetwc\fR()
+function shall fail if data needs to be read and:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The O_NONBLOCK flag is set for the file descriptor underlying
+.IR stream
+and the thread would be delayed in the
+\fIfgetwc\fR()
+operation.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The file descriptor underlying
+.IR stream
+is not a valid file descriptor open for reading.
+.TP
+.BR EILSEQ
+The data obtained from the input stream does not form a valid
+character.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The read operation was terminated due to the receipt of a signal, and
+no data was transferred.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+A physical I/O error has occurred, or the process is in a background
+process group attempting to read from its controlling terminal, and
+either the calling thread is blocking SIGTTIN or the process is ignoring
+SIGTTIN or the process group of the process is orphaned.
+This error may also be generated for implementation-defined reasons.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The file is a regular file and an attempt was made to read at or beyond
+the offset maximum associated with the corresponding stream.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIfgetwc\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient storage space is available.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+A request was made of a nonexistent device, or the request was outside
+the capabilities of the device.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIferror\fR()
+or
+\fIfeof\fR()
+functions must be used to distinguish between an error condition and an
+end-of-file condition.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfeof\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIferror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fgetws.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fgetws.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..96e442a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fgetws.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FGETWS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fgetws
+\(em get a wide-character string from a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wchar_t *fgetws(wchar_t *restrict \fIws\fP, int \fIn\fP,
+    FILE *restrict \fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfgetws\fR()
+function shall read characters from the
+.IR stream ,
+convert these to the corresponding wide-character codes, place them
+in the
+.BR wchar_t
+array pointed to by
+.IR ws ,
+until
+.IR n \(mi1
+characters are read, or a
+<newline>
+is read, converted, and transferred to
+.IR ws ,
+or an end-of-file condition is encountered. The wide-character string,
+.IR ws ,
+shall then be terminated with a null wide-character code.
+.P
+If an error occurs, the resulting value of the file position indicator
+for the stream is unspecified.
+.P
+The
+\fIfgetws\fR()
+function may mark the last data access timestamp of the file
+associated with
+.IR stream
+for update. The last data access timestamp shall be marked for update
+by the first successful execution of
+\fIfgetwc\fR(),
+\fIfgetws\fR(),
+\fIfwscanf\fR(),
+\fIgetwc\fR(),
+\fIgetwchar\fR(),
+\fIvfwscanf\fR(),
+\fIvwscanf\fR(),
+or
+\fIwscanf\fR()
+using
+.IR stream
+that returns data not supplied by a prior call to
+\fIungetwc\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfgetws\fR()
+shall return
+.IR ws .
+If the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set, or if the stream
+is at end-of-file, the end-of-file indicator for the
+stream shall be set and
+\fIfgetws\fR()
+shall return a null pointer. If a read error occurs, the error
+indicator for the stream shall be set,
+\fIfgetws\fR()
+shall return a null pointer,
+and shall set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfgetwc\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfread\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fileno.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fileno.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c47a132
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fileno.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FILENO "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fileno
+\(em map a stream pointer to a file descriptor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int fileno(FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIfileno\fR()
+function shall return the integer file descriptor associated with
+the stream pointed to by
+.IR stream .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfileno\fR()
+shall return the integer value of the file descriptor associated with
+.IR stream .
+Otherwise, the value \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfileno\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR stream
+argument is not a valid stream, or the stream is not associated
+with a file.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Without some specification of which file descriptors are associated
+with these streams, it is impossible for an application to set up the
+streams for another application it starts with
+\fIfork\fR()
+and
+.IR exec .
+In particular, it would not be possible to write a portable version of
+the
+.IR sh
+command interpreter (although there may be other constraints that would
+prevent that portability).
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5.1" ", " "Interaction of File Descriptors and Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIdirfd\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfdopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstdin\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/flockfile.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/flockfile.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4c2293c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/flockfile.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FLOCKFILE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+flockfile,
+ftrylockfile,
+funlockfile
+\(em stdio locking functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+void flockfile(FILE *\fIfile\fP);
+int ftrylockfile(FILE *\fIfile\fP);
+void funlockfile(FILE *\fIfile\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These functions shall provide for explicit application-level locking of
+stdio (\c
+.BR "FILE *" )
+objects. These functions can be used by a thread to delineate a
+sequence of I/O statements that are executed as a unit.
+.P
+The
+\fIflockfile\fR()
+function shall acquire for a thread ownership of a (\c
+.BR "FILE *" )
+object.
+.P
+The
+\fIftrylockfile\fR()
+function shall acquire for a thread ownership of a (\c
+.BR "FILE *" )
+object if the object is available;
+\fIftrylockfile\fR()
+is a non-blocking version of
+\fIflockfile\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIfunlockfile\fR()
+function shall relinquish the ownership granted to the thread.
+The behavior is undefined if a thread other than the current owner
+calls the
+\fIfunlockfile\fR()
+function.
+.P
+The functions shall behave as if there is a lock count associated with
+each (\c
+.BR "FILE *" )
+object. This count is implicitly initialized to zero when the (\c
+.BR "FILE *" )
+object is created. The (\c
+.BR "FILE *" )
+object is unlocked when the count is zero. When the count is positive,
+a single thread owns the (\c
+.BR "FILE *" )
+object. When the
+\fIflockfile\fR()
+function is called, if the count is zero or if the count is positive
+and the caller owns the (\c
+.BR "FILE *" )
+object, the count shall be incremented. Otherwise, the calling thread
+shall be suspended, waiting for the count to return to zero. Each call
+to
+\fIfunlockfile\fR()
+shall decrement the count. This allows matching calls to
+\fIflockfile\fR()
+(or successful calls to
+\fIftrylockfile\fR())
+and
+\fIfunlockfile\fR()
+to be nested.
+.P
+All functions that reference (\c
+.BR "FILE *" )
+objects, except those with names ending in
+.IR _unlocked ,
+shall behave as if they use
+\fIflockfile\fR()
+and
+\fIfunlockfile\fR()
+internally to obtain ownership of these (\c
+.BR "FILE *" )
+objects.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+None for
+\fIflockfile\fR()
+and
+\fIfunlockfile\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIftrylockfile\fR()
+function shall return zero for success and non-zero to indicate
+that the lock cannot be acquired.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications using these functions may be subject to priority inversion,
+as discussed in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.287" ", " "Priority Inversion".
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIflockfile\fR()
+and
+\fIfunlockfile\fR()
+functions provide an orthogonal mutual-exclusion lock for each
+.BR FILE .
+The
+\fIftrylockfile\fR()
+function provides a non-blocking attempt to acquire a file lock,
+analogous to
+\fIpthread_mutex_trylock\fR().
+.P
+These locks behave as if they are the same as those used internally by
+.IR stdio
+for thread-safety.
+This both provides thread-safety of these functions without requiring a
+second level of internal locking and allows functions in
+.IR stdio
+to be implemented in terms of other
+.IR stdio
+functions.
+.P
+Application developers and implementors should be aware that there are
+potential deadlock problems on
+.BR FILE
+objects. For example, the line-buffered flushing semantics of
+.IR stdio
+(requested via {_IOLBF})
+require that certain input operations sometimes cause the buffered
+contents of implementation-defined line-buffered output streams to be
+flushed. If two threads each hold the lock on the other's
+.BR FILE ,
+deadlock ensues. This type of deadlock can be avoided by acquiring
+.BR FILE
+locks in a consistent order. In particular, the line-buffered output
+stream deadlock can typically be avoided by acquiring locks on input
+streams before locks on output streams if a thread would be acquiring
+both.
+.P
+In summary, threads sharing
+.IR stdio
+streams with other threads can use
+\fIflockfile\fR()
+and
+\fIfunlockfile\fR()
+to cause sequences of I/O performed by a single thread to be kept
+bundled. The only case where the use of
+\fIflockfile\fR()
+and
+\fIfunlockfile\fR()
+is required is to provide a scope protecting uses of the
+.IR *_unlocked
+functions/macros. This moves the cost/performance tradeoff to the
+optimal point.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetc_unlocked\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.287" ", " "Priority Inversion",
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/floor.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/floor.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..569f1d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/floor.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FLOOR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+floor,
+floorf,
+floorl
+\(em floor function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double floor(double \fIx\fP);
+float floorf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double floorl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the largest integral value not greater
+than
+.IR x .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The result shall have the same sign as
+.IR x .
+.P
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the largest
+integral value not greater than
+.IR x ,
+expressed as a
+.BR double ,
+.BR float ,
+or
+.BR "long double" ,
+as appropriate for the return type of the function.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0 or \(+-Inf,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The integral value returned by these functions might not be expressible
+as an
+.BR intmax_t .
+The return value should be tested before assigning it to an integer
+type to avoid the undefined results of an integer overflow.
+.P
+These functions may raise the inexact floating-point exception if the
+result differs in value from the argument.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIceil\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fma.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fma.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..75ae21e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fma.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,209 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FMA "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fma,
+fmaf,
+fmal
+\(em floating-point multiply-add
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double fma(double \fIx\fP, double \fIy\fP, double \fIz\fP);
+float fmaf(float \fIx\fP, float \fIy\fP, float \fIz\fP);
+long double fmal(long double \fIx\fP, long double \fIy\fP, long double \fIz\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute (\fIx\fR\ *\ \fIy\fR)\ +\ \fIz\fR,
+rounded as one ternary operation: they shall compute the value (as if)
+to infinite precision and round once to the result format, according to
+the rounding mode characterized by the value of FLT_ROUNDS.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return
+(\fIx\fR\ *\ \fIy\fR)\ + \fIz\fR, rounded as one ternary operation.
+.P
+If the result overflows or underflows, a range error may occur.
+On systems that support the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option, if the
+result overflows a range error shall occur.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+or
+.IR y
+are NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+multiplied by
+.IR y
+is an exact infinity and
+.IR z
+is also an infinity but with the opposite sign, a domain error shall
+occur, and either a NaN (if supported), or an implementation-defined
+value shall be returned.
+.P
+If one of
+.IR x
+and
+.IR y
+is infinite, the other is zero, and
+.IR z
+is not a NaN, a domain error shall occur, and either a NaN (if
+supported), or an implementation-defined value shall be returned.
+.P
+If one of
+.IR x
+and
+.IR y
+is infinite, the other is zero, and
+.IR z
+is a NaN, a NaN shall be returned and a domain error may occur.
+.P
+If
+.IR x *\c
+.IR y
+is not 0*Inf nor Inf*0 and
+.IR z
+is a NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x *\c
+.IR y +\c
+.IR z
+is invalid, or the value
+.IR x *\c
+.IR y
+is invalid and
+.IR z
+is not a NaN.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result overflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the overflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.br
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The value
+.IR x *\c
+.IR y
+is invalid and
+.IR z
+is a NaN.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result underflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result overflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the overflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+In many cases, clever use of floating (\fIfused\fR) multiply-add leads
+to much improved code; but its unexpected use by the compiler can
+undermine carefully written code. The FP_CONTRACT macro can be used to
+disallow use of floating multiply-add; and the
+\fIfma\fR()
+function guarantees its use where desired. Many current machines
+provide hardware floating multiply-add instructions; software
+implementation can be used for others.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fmax.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fmax.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..151663a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fmax.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FMAX "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fmax,
+fmaxf,
+fmaxl
+\(em determine maximum numeric value of two floating-point numbers
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double fmax(double \fIx\fP, double \fIy\fP);
+float fmaxf(float \fIx\fP, float \fIy\fP);
+long double fmaxl(long double \fIx\fP, long double \fIy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall determine the maximum numeric value of their
+arguments.
+NaN arguments shall be treated as missing data: if one argument
+is a NaN and the other numeric, then these functions shall
+choose the numeric value.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the maximum
+numeric value of their arguments.
+.P
+If just one argument is a NaN, the other argument shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+and
+.IR y
+are NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfdim\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfmin\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fmemopen.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fmemopen.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fa3b384
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fmemopen.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,280 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FMEMOPEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fmemopen
+\(em open a memory buffer stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+FILE *fmemopen(void *restrict \fIbuf\fP, size_t \fIsize\fP,
+    const char *restrict \fImode\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIfmemopen\fR()
+function shall associate the buffer given by the
+.IR buf
+and
+.IR size
+arguments with a stream. The
+.IR buf
+argument shall be either a null pointer or point to a buffer that is at
+least
+.IR size
+bytes long.
+.P
+The
+.IR mode
+argument points to a string. If the string is one of the following,
+the stream shall be opened in the indicated mode. Otherwise, the behavior
+is undefined.
+.IP "\fIr\fP" 8
+Open the stream for reading.
+.IP "\fIw\fP" 8
+Open the stream for writing.
+.IP "\fIa\fP" 8
+Append; open the stream for writing at the first null byte.
+.IP "\fIr\fP+" 8
+Open the stream for update (reading and writing).
+.IP "\fIw\fP+" 8
+Open the stream for update (reading and writing). Truncate the
+buffer contents.
+.IP "\fIa\fP+" 8
+Append; open the stream for update (reading and writing);
+the initial position is at the first null byte.
+.P
+Implementations shall accept all mode strings allowed by
+\fIfopen\fR(),
+but the use of the character
+.BR 'b' 
+shall produce implementation-defined results, where the resulting
+.BR "FILE *"
+need not behave the same as if
+.BR 'b' 
+were omitted.
+.P
+If a null pointer is specified as the
+.IR buf
+argument,
+\fIfmemopen\fR()
+shall allocate
+.IR size
+bytes of memory as if by a call to
+\fImalloc\fR().
+This buffer shall be automatically freed when the stream is closed.
+Because this feature is only useful when the stream is opened for
+updating (because there is no way to get a pointer to the buffer) the
+\fIfmemopen\fR()
+call may fail if the
+.IR mode
+argument does not include a
+.BR '+' .
+.P
+The stream shall maintain a current position in the buffer. This position
+shall be initially set to either the beginning of the buffer (for
+.IR r
+and
+.IR w
+modes) or to the first null byte in the buffer (for
+.IR a
+modes). If no null byte is found in append mode, the initial position
+shall be set to one byte after the end of the buffer.
+.P
+If
+.IR buf
+is a null pointer, the initial position shall always be set to the
+beginning of the buffer.
+.P
+The stream shall also maintain the size of the current buffer contents;
+use of
+\fIfseek\fR()
+or
+\fIfseeko\fR()
+on the stream with SEEK_END shall seek relative to this size. For modes
+.IR r
+and
+.IR r+
+the size shall be set to the value given by the
+.IR size
+argument. For modes
+.IR w
+and
+.IR w+
+the initial size shall be zero and for modes
+.IR a
+and
+.IR a+
+the initial size shall be either the position of the first null byte in
+the buffer or the value of the
+.IR size
+argument if no null byte is found.
+.P
+A read operation on the stream shall not advance the current buffer
+position beyond the current buffer size. Reaching the buffer size in a
+read operation shall count as ``end-of-file''. Null bytes in the buffer
+shall have no special meaning for reads. The read operation shall start
+at the current buffer position of the stream.
+.P
+A write operation shall start either at the current position of the stream
+(if
+.IR mode
+has not specified
+.BR 'a' 
+as the first character) or at the current size of the stream (if
+.IR mode
+had
+.BR 'a' 
+as the first character). If the current position at the end of the write
+is larger than the current buffer size, the current buffer size shall
+be set to the current position. A write operation on the stream shall
+not advance the current buffer size beyond the size given in the
+.IR size
+argument.
+.P
+When a stream open for writing is flushed or closed, a null byte shall be
+written at the current position or at the end of the buffer, depending
+on the size of the contents. If a stream open for update is flushed or
+closed and the last write has advanced the current buffer size, a null
+byte shall be written at the end of the buffer if it fits.
+.P
+An attempt to seek a memory buffer stream to a negative position or to
+a position larger than the buffer size given in the
+.IR size
+argument shall fail.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfmemopen\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the object controlling the stream. Otherwise,
+a null pointer shall be returned, and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfmemopen\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR size
+argument specifies a buffer size of zero.
+.P
+The
+\fIfmemopen\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR mode
+argument is not valid.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR buf
+argument is a null pointer and the
+.IR mode
+argument does not include a
+.BR '+' 
+character.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+The
+.IR buf
+argument is a null pointer and the allocation of a buffer of length
+.IR size
+has failed.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+{FOPEN_MAX}
+streams are currently open in the calling process.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+static char buffer[] = "foobar";
+.P
+int
+main (void)
+{
+    int ch;
+    FILE *stream;
+.P
+    stream = fmemopen(buffer, strlen (buffer), "r");
+    if (stream == NULL)
+        /* handle error */;
+.P
+    while ((ch = fgetc(stream)) != EOF)
+        printf("Got %c\en", ch);
+.P
+    fclose(stream);
+    return (0);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This program produces the following output:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+Got f
+Got o
+Got o
+Got b
+Got a
+Got r
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+This interface has been introduced to eliminate many of the errors
+encountered in the construction of strings, notably overflowing of
+strings. This interface prevents overflow.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+A future revision of this standard may mandate specific behavior when the
+.IR mode
+argument includes
+.BR 'b' .
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfdopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfreopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfseek\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImalloc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen_memstream\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fmin.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fmin.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f64ddf8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fmin.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FMIN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fmin,
+fminf,
+fminl
+\(em determine minimum numeric value of two floating-point numbers
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double fmin(double \fIx\fP, double \fIy\fP);
+float fminf(float \fIx\fP, float \fIy\fP);
+long double fminl(long double \fIx\fP, long double \fIy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall determine the minimum numeric value of their
+arguments.
+NaN arguments shall be treated as missing data: if one argument
+is a NaN and the other numeric, then these functions shall
+choose the numeric value.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the minimum
+numeric value of their arguments.
+.P
+If just one argument is a NaN, the other argument shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+and
+.IR y
+are NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfdim\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfmax\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fmod.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fmod.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eedc0b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fmod.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FMOD "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fmod,
+fmodf,
+fmodl
+\(em floating-point remainder value function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double fmod(double \fIx\fP, double \fIy\fP);
+float fmodf(float \fIx\fP, float \fIy\fP);
+long double fmodl(long double \fIx\fP, long double \fIy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall return the floating-point remainder of the
+division of
+.IR x
+by
+.IR y .
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the value
+.IR x \(mi\c
+.IR i *\c
+.IR y ,
+for some integer
+.IR i
+such that, if
+.IR y
+is non-zero, the result has the same sign as
+.IR x
+and magnitude less than the magnitude of
+.IR y .
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow,
+and is not
+representable,
+a range error may occur, and
+\fIfmod\fR(),
+\fImodf\fR(),
+and
+\fIfmodl\fR()
+shall return
+0.0, or
+(if the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option is not supported) an
+implementation-defined value no greater in magnitude than DBL_MIN,
+FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN, respectively.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+or
+.IR y
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR y
+is zero, a domain error shall occur, and a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is infinite, a domain error shall occur, and a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0 and
+.IR y
+is not zero, \(+-0 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is not infinite and
+.IR y
+is \(+-Inf,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow, and is representable, a
+range error may occur and the correct value shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The
+.IR x
+argument is infinite or
+.IR y
+is zero.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result underflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fmtmsg.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fmtmsg.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1cb1c57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fmtmsg.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,247 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FMTMSG "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fmtmsg
+\(em display a message in the specified format on standard
+error and/or a system console
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <fmtmsg.h>
+.P
+int fmtmsg(long \fIclassification\fP, const char *\fIlabel\fP, int \fIseverity\fP,
+    const char *\fItext\fP, const char *\fIaction\fP, const char *\fItag\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIfmtmsg\fR()
+function shall display messages in a specified format instead
+of the traditional
+\fIprintf\fR()
+function.
+.P
+Based on a message's classification component,
+\fIfmtmsg\fR()
+shall write a formatted message either to standard error, to the
+console, or to both.
+.P
+A formatted message consists of up to five components as defined
+below. The component \fIclassification\fR is not part of a message
+displayed to the user, but defines the source of the message and
+directs the display of the formatted message.
+.IP "\fIclassification\fP" 12
+Contains the sum of identifying values constructed from the constants
+defined below. Any one identifier from a subclass may be used in
+combination with a single identifier from a different subclass. Two or
+more identifiers from the same subclass should not be used together,
+with the exception of identifiers from the display subclass. (Both
+display subclass identifiers may be used so that messages can be
+displayed to both standard error and the system console.)
+.RS 12 
+.IP "\fBMajor Classifications\fP" 6
+.br
+Identifies the source of the condition. Identifiers are: MM_HARD
+(hardware), MM_SOFT (software), and MM_FIRM (firmware).
+.IP "\fBMessage Source Subclassifications\fP" 6
+.br
+Identifies the type of software in which the problem is detected.
+Identifiers are: MM_APPL (application), MM_UTIL (utility), and MM_OPSYS
+(operating system).
+.IP "\fBDisplay Subclassifications\fP" 6
+.br
+Indicates where the message is to be displayed. Identifiers are:
+MM_PRINT to display the message on the standard error stream,
+MM_CONSOLE to display the message on the system console. One or both
+identifiers may be used.
+.IP "\fBStatus Subclassifications\fP" 6
+.br
+Indicates whether the application can recover from the condition.
+Identifiers are: MM_RECOVER (recoverable) and MM_NRECOV
+(non-recoverable).
+.P
+An additional identifier, MM_NULLMC, indicates that no classification
+component is supplied for the message.
+.RE
+.IP "\fIlabel\fP" 12
+Identifies the source of the message. The format is two fields
+separated by a
+<colon>.
+The first field is up to 10 bytes, the second is up to 14 bytes.
+.IP "\fIseverity\fP" 12
+Indicates the seriousness of the condition. Identifiers for the levels
+of \fIseverity\fR are:
+.RS 12 
+.IP MM_HALT 12
+Indicates that the application has encountered a severe fault and is
+halting. Produces the string
+.BR \(dqHALT\(dq .
+.IP MM_ERROR 12
+Indicates that the application has detected a fault. Produces the
+string
+.BR \(dqERROR\(dq .
+.IP MM_WARNING 12
+Indicates a condition that is out of the ordinary, that might be a
+problem, and should be watched. Produces the string
+.BR \(dqWARNING\(dq .
+.IP MM_INFO 12
+Provides information about a condition that is not in error. Produces
+the string
+.BR \(dqINFO\(dq .
+.IP MM_NOSEV 12
+Indicates that no severity level is supplied for the message.
+.RE
+.IP "\fItext\fP" 12
+Describes the error condition that produced the message. The character
+string is not limited to a specific size. If the character string is
+empty, then the text produced is unspecified.
+.IP "\fIaction\fP" 12
+Describes the first step to be taken in the error-recovery process.
+The
+\fIfmtmsg\fR()
+function precedes the action string with the prefix:
+.BR \(dqTO FIX:\(dq .
+The \fIaction\fR string is not limited to a specific size.
+.IP "\fItag\fP" 12
+An identifier that references on-line documentation for the message.
+Suggested usage is that \fItag\fR includes the \fIlabel\fR and a unique
+identifying number. A sample \fItag\fR is
+.BR \(dqXSI:cat:146\(dq .
+.P
+The
+.IR MSGVERB
+environment variable (for message verbosity) shall determine for
+\fIfmtmsg\fR()
+which message components it is to select when writing messages to
+standard error. The value of
+.IR MSGVERB
+shall be a
+<colon>-separated
+list of optional keywords. Valid keywords are: \fIlabel\fR,
+\fIseverity\fR, \fItext\fR, \fIaction\fR, and \fItag\fR. If
+.IR MSGVERB
+contains a keyword for a component and the component's value is not the
+component's null value,
+\fIfmtmsg\fR()
+shall include that component in the message when writing the message to
+standard error. If
+.IR MSGVERB
+does not include a keyword for a message component, that component
+shall not be included in the display of the message. The keywords may
+appear in any order. If
+.IR MSGVERB
+is not defined, if its value is the null string, if its value is not of
+the correct format, or if it contains keywords other than the valid
+ones listed above,
+\fIfmtmsg\fR()
+shall select all components.
+.P
+.IR MSGVERB
+shall determine which components are selected for display to standard
+error. All message components shall be included in console messages.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIfmtmsg\fR()
+function shall return one of the following values:
+.IP MM_OK 12
+The function succeeded.
+.IP MM_NOTOK 12
+The function failed completely.
+.IP MM_NOMSG 12
+The function was unable to generate a message on standard error,
+but otherwise succeeded.
+.IP MM_NOCON 12
+The function was unable to generate a console message, but otherwise
+succeeded.
+.SH ERRORS
+None.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+The following example of
+\fIfmtmsg\fR():
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fmtmsg(MM_PRINT, "XSI:cat", MM_ERROR, "illegal option",
+"refer to cat in user's reference manual", "XSI:cat:001")
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+produces a complete message in the specified message format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+XSI:cat: ERROR: illegal option
+TO FIX: refer to cat in user's reference manual XSI:cat:001
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+When the environment variable
+.IR MSGVERB
+is set as follows:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+MSGVERB=severity:text:action
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+and Example 1 is used,
+\fIfmtmsg\fR()
+produces:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ERROR: illegal option
+TO FIX: refer to cat in user's reference manual
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+One or more message components may be systematically omitted from
+messages generated by an application by using the null value of the
+argument for that component.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfprintf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fmtmsg.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fnmatch.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fnmatch.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d7ab403
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fnmatch.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,196 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FNMATCH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fnmatch
+\(em match a filename string or a pathname
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <fnmatch.h>
+.P
+int fnmatch(const char *\fIpattern\fP, const char *\fIstring\fP, int \fIflags\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIfnmatch\fR()
+function shall match patterns as described in the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.13.1" ", " "Patterns Matching a Single Character"
+and
+.IR "Section 2.13.2" ", " "Patterns Matching Multiple Characters".
+It checks the string specified by the
+.IR string
+argument to see if it matches the pattern specified by the
+.IR pattern
+argument.
+.P
+The
+.IR flags
+argument shall modify the interpretation of
+.IR pattern
+and
+.IR string .
+It is the bitwise-inclusive OR of zero or more of the flags defined in
+.IR <fnmatch.h> .
+If the FNM_PATHNAME flag is set in
+.IR flags ,
+then a
+<slash>
+character (\c
+.BR '/' )
+in
+.IR string
+shall be explicitly matched by a
+<slash>
+in
+.IR pattern ;
+it shall not be matched by either the
+<asterisk>
+or
+<question-mark>
+special characters, nor by a bracket expression. If the FNM_PATHNAME flag
+is not set, the
+<slash>
+character shall be treated as an ordinary character.
+.P
+If FNM_NOESCAPE is not set in
+.IR flags ,
+a
+<backslash>
+character in
+.IR pattern
+followed by any other character shall match that second character in
+.IR string .
+In particular,
+.BR \(dq\e\e\(dq 
+shall match a
+<backslash>
+in
+.IR string .
+If FNM_NOESCAPE is set, a
+<backslash>
+character shall be treated as an ordinary character.
+.P
+If FNM_PERIOD is set in
+.IR flags ,
+then a leading
+<period>
+(\c
+.BR '.' )
+in
+.IR string
+shall match a
+<period>
+in
+.IR pattern ;
+as described by rule 2 in the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.13.3" ", " "Patterns Used for Filename Expansion"
+where the location of ``leading'' is indicated by the value
+of FNM_PATHNAME:
+.IP " *" 4
+If FNM_PATHNAME is set, a
+<period>
+is ``leading'' if it is the first character in
+.IR string
+or if it immediately follows a
+<slash>.
+.IP " *" 4
+If FNM_PATHNAME is not set, a
+<period>
+is ``leading'' only if it is the first character of
+.IR string .
+.P
+If FNM_PERIOD is not set, then no special restrictions are placed on
+matching a period.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If
+.IR string
+matches the pattern specified by
+.IR pattern ,
+then
+\fIfnmatch\fR()
+shall return 0. If there is no match,
+\fIfnmatch\fR()
+shall return FNM_NOMATCH, which is defined in
+.IR <fnmatch.h> .
+If an error occurs,
+\fIfnmatch\fR()
+shall return another non-zero value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIfnmatch\fR()
+function has two major uses. It could be used by an application or
+utility that needs to read a directory and apply a pattern against each
+entry. The
+.IR find
+utility is an example of this. It can also be used by the
+.IR pax
+utility to process its
+.IR pattern
+operands, or by applications that need to match strings in a similar
+manner.
+.P
+The name
+\fIfnmatch\fR()
+is intended to imply
+.IR "filename"
+match, rather than
+.IR "pathname"
+match. The default action of this function is to match filename strings,
+rather than pathnames, since it gives no special significance to the
+<slash>
+character. With the FNM_PATHNAME flag,
+\fIfnmatch\fR()
+does match pathnames, but without tilde expansion, parameter
+expansion, or special treatment for a
+<period>
+at the beginning of a filename.
+.SH RATIONALE
+This function replaced the REG_FILENAME flag of
+\fIregcomp\fR()
+in early proposals of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. It provides virtually the same functionality
+as the
+\fIregcomp\fR()
+and
+\fIregexec\fR()
+functions using the REG_FILENAME and REG_FSLASH flags (the REG_FSLASH
+flag was proposed for
+\fIregcomp\fR(),
+and would have had the opposite effect from FNM_PATHNAME), but with a
+simpler function and less system overhead.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIglob\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "Section 2.6" ", " "Word Expansions"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fnmatch.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fopen.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fopen.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..65a1f7d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fopen.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,354 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FOPEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fopen
+\(em open a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+FILE *fopen(const char *restrict \fIpathname\fP, const char *restrict \fImode\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfopen\fR()
+function shall open the file whose pathname is the string pointed to by
+.IR pathname ,
+and associates a stream with it.
+.P
+The
+.IR mode
+argument points to a string. If the string is one of the following, the
+file shall be opened in the indicated mode. Otherwise, the behavior is
+undefined.
+.IP "\fIr\fP\ or\ \fIrb\fP" 14
+Open file for reading.
+.IP "\fIw\fP\ or\ \fIwb\fP" 14
+Truncate to zero length or create file for writing.
+.IP "\fIa\fP\ or\ \fIab\fP" 14
+Append; open or create file for writing at end-of-file.
+.IP "\fIr+\fP\ or\ \fIrb+\fP\ or\ \fIr+b\fP" 14
+Open file for update (reading and writing).
+.IP "\fIw+\fP\ or\ \fIwb+\fP\ or\ \fIw+b\fP" 14
+Truncate to zero length or create file for update.
+.IP "\fIa+\fP\ or\ \fIab+\fP\ or\ \fIa+b\fP" 14
+Append; open or create file for update, writing at end-of-file.
+.P
+The character
+.BR 'b' 
+shall have no effect, but is allowed for ISO\ C standard conformance.
+Opening a file with read mode (\fIr\fP as the first character in the
+.IR mode
+argument) shall fail if the file does not exist or cannot be read.
+.P
+Opening a file with append mode (\fIa\fP as the first character in the
+.IR mode
+argument) shall cause all subsequent writes to the file to be forced to
+the then current end-of-file, regardless of intervening calls to
+\fIfseek\fR().
+.P
+When a file is opened with update mode (\c
+.BR '+' 
+as the second or third character in the
+.IR mode
+argument), both input and output may be performed on the associated
+stream. However, the application shall ensure that output is not
+directly followed by input without an intervening call to
+\fIfflush\fR()
+or to a file positioning function (\c
+\fIfseek\fR(),
+\fIfsetpos\fR(),
+or
+\fIrewind\fR()),
+and input is not directly followed by output without an intervening
+call to a file positioning function, unless the input operation
+encounters end-of-file.
+.P
+When opened, a stream is fully buffered if and only if it can be
+determined not to refer to an interactive device. The error and
+end-of-file indicators for the stream shall be cleared.
+.P
+If
+.IR mode
+is \fIw\fR, \fIwb\fR, \fIa\fR, \fIab\fR, \fIw\fR+, \fIwb\fR+,
+\fIw\fR+\fIb\fR, \fIa\fP+, \fIab\fR+, or \fIa\fR+\fIb\fR, and the file
+did not previously exist, upon successful completion,
+\fIfopen\fR()
+shall mark for update the last data access, last data modification, and
+last file status change timestamps of the file and the last file status
+change and last data modification timestamps of the parent directory.
+.P
+If
+.IR mode
+is \fIw\fR, \fIwb\fR, \fIa\fR, \fIab\fR, \fIw\fR+, \fIwb\fR+,
+\fIw\fR+\fIb\fR, \fIa\fP+, \fIab\fR+, or \fIa\fR+\fIb\fR, and the file
+did not previously exist, the
+\fIfopen\fR()
+function shall create a file as if it called the
+\fIcreat\fR()
+function with a value appropriate for the
+.IR path
+argument interpreted from
+.IR pathname
+and a value of S_IRUSR | S_IWUSR | S_IRGRP | S_IWGRP | S_IROTH |
+S_IWOTH for the
+.IR mode
+argument.
+.P
+If
+.IR mode
+is \fIw\fR, \fIwb\fR, \fIw\fR+, \fIwb\fR+, or \fIw\fR+\fIb\fR, and the
+file did previously exist, upon successful completion,
+\fIfopen\fR()
+shall mark for update the last data modification and last file
+status change timestamps of the file.
+.P
+After a successful call to the
+\fIfopen\fR()
+function, the orientation of the stream shall be cleared,
+the encoding rule shall be cleared,
+and the associated
+.BR mbstate_t
+object shall be set to describe an initial conversion state.
+.P
+The file descriptor associated with the opened stream shall be allocated
+and opened as if by a call to
+\fIopen\fR()
+with the following flags:
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB
+l | l.
+\fIfopen\fP(\^) Mode!\fIopen\fP(\^) Flags
+_
+\fIr\fR or \fIrb\fR!O_RDONLY
+\fIw\fR or \fIwb\fR!O_WRONLY|O_CREAT|O_TRUNC
+\fIa\fR or \fIab\fR!O_WRONLY|O_CREAT|O_APPEND
+\fIr+\fR or \fIrb+\fR or \fIr+b\fR!O_RDWR
+\fIw+\fR or \fIwb+\fR or \fIw+b\fR!O_RDWR|O_CREAT|O_TRUNC
+\fIa+\fR or \fIab+\fR or \fIa+b\fR!O_RDWR|O_CREAT|O_APPEND
+.TE
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfopen\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the object controlling the stream. Otherwise,
+a null pointer shall be returned,
+and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfopen\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied on a component of the path prefix, or the
+file exists and the permissions specified by
+.IR mode
+are denied, or the file does not exist and write permission is denied
+for the parent directory of the file to be created.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was caught during
+\fIfopen\fR().
+.TP
+.BR EISDIR
+The named file is a directory and
+.IR mode
+requires write access.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+{STREAM_MAX}
+streams are currently open in the calling process.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+The maximum allowable number of files is currently open in the system.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+The
+.IR mode
+string begins with
+.BR 'r' 
+and a component of
+.IR pathname
+does not name an existing file, or
+.IR mode
+begins with
+.BR 'w' 
+or
+.BR 'a' 
+and a component of the path prefix of
+.IR pathname
+does not name an existing file, or
+.IR pathname
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT " or " ENOTDIR
+.br
+The
+.IR pathname
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters. If
+.IR pathname
+names an existing file, an
+.BR [ENOENT] 
+error shall not occur.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+The directory or file system that would contain the new file cannot be
+expanded, the file does not exist, and the file was to be created.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory, or the
+.IR pathname
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file that
+is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+The named file is a character special or block special file,
+and the device associated with this special file does not exist.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The named file is a regular file and the size of the file cannot be
+represented correctly in an object of type
+.BR off_t .
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+The named file resides on a read-only file system and
+.IR mode
+requires write access.
+.P
+The
+\fIfopen\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR mode
+argument is not valid.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+{FOPEN_MAX}
+streams are currently open in the calling process.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient storage space is available.
+.TP
+.BR ETXTBSY
+The file is a pure procedure (shared text) file that is being executed
+and
+.IR mode
+requires write access.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Opening a File"
+.P
+The following example tries to open the file named
+.BR file
+for reading. The
+\fIfopen\fR()
+function returns a file pointer that is used in subsequent
+\fIfgets\fR()
+and
+\fIfclose\fR()
+calls. If the program cannot open the file, it just ignores it.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+FILE *fp;
+\&...
+void rgrep(const char *file)
+{
+\&...
+    if ((fp = fopen(file, "r")) == NULL)
+        return;
+\&...
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIcreat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfdopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfmemopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfreopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen_memstream\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fork.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fork.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c9dcf0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fork.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,435 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FORK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fork
+\(em create a new process
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+pid_t fork(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIfork\fR()
+function shall create a new process. The new process (child process)
+shall be an exact copy of the calling process (parent process) except
+as detailed below:
+.IP " *" 4
+The child process shall have a unique process ID.
+.IP " *" 4
+The child process ID also shall not match any active process group ID.
+.IP " *" 4
+The child process shall have a different parent process ID, which shall
+be the process ID of the calling process.
+.IP " *" 4
+The child process shall have its own copy of the parent's file
+descriptors. Each of the child's file descriptors shall refer to the
+same open file description with the corresponding file descriptor of
+the parent.
+.IP " *" 4
+The child process shall have its own copy of the parent's open directory
+streams. Each open directory stream in the child process may share
+directory stream positioning with the corresponding directory stream of
+the parent.
+.IP " *" 4
+The child process shall have its own copy of the parent's message
+catalog descriptors.
+.IP " *" 4
+The child process values of
+.IR tms_utime ,
+.IR tms_stime ,
+.IR tms_cutime ,
+and
+.IR tms_cstime
+shall be set to 0.
+.IP " *" 4
+The time left until an alarm clock signal shall be reset to zero, and
+the alarm, if any, shall be canceled; see
+.IR "\fIalarm\fR\^(\|)".
+.IP " *" 4
+All
+.IR semadj
+values shall be cleared.
+.IP " *" 4
+File locks set by the parent process shall not be inherited by the
+child process.
+.IP " *" 4
+The set of signals pending for the child process shall be initialized
+to the empty set.
+.IP " *" 4
+Interval timers shall be reset in the child process.
+.IP " *" 4
+Any semaphores that are open in the parent process shall also be open
+in the child process.
+.IP " *" 4
+The child process shall not inherit any address space memory locks
+established by the parent process via calls to
+\fImlockall\fR()
+or
+\fImlock\fR().
+.IP " *" 4
+Memory mappings created in the parent shall be retained in the child
+process. MAP_PRIVATE mappings inherited from the parent shall also be
+MAP_PRIVATE mappings in the child, and any modifications to the data in
+these mappings made by the parent prior to calling
+\fIfork\fR()
+shall be visible to the child. Any modifications to the data in
+MAP_PRIVATE mappings made by the parent after
+\fIfork\fR()
+returns shall be visible only to the parent. Modifications to the data
+in MAP_PRIVATE mappings made by the child shall be visible only to the
+child.
+.IP " *" 4
+For the SCHED_FIFO and SCHED_RR scheduling policies,
+the child process shall inherit the policy and priority settings of the
+parent process during a
+\fIfork\fR()
+function. For other scheduling policies, the policy and priority
+settings on
+\fIfork\fR()
+are implementation-defined.
+.IP " *" 4
+Per-process timers created by the parent shall not be inherited by
+the child process.
+.IP " *" 4
+The child process shall have its own copy of the message queue
+descriptors of the parent. Each of the message descriptors of the child
+shall refer to the same open message queue description as the
+corresponding message descriptor of the parent.
+.IP " *" 4
+No asynchronous input or asynchronous output operations shall be
+inherited by the child process. Any use of asynchronous control blocks
+created by the parent produces undefined behavior.
+.IP " *" 4
+A process shall be created with a single thread. If a multi-threaded
+process calls
+\fIfork\fR(),
+the new process shall contain a replica of the calling thread and its
+entire address space, possibly including the states of mutexes and
+other resources. Consequently, to avoid errors, the child process may
+only execute async-signal-safe operations until such time as one of the
+.IR exec
+functions is called. Fork handlers may be established by means of the
+\fIpthread_atfork\fR()
+function in order to maintain application invariants across
+\fIfork\fR()
+calls.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+When the application calls
+\fIfork\fR()
+from a signal handler and any of the fork handlers registered by
+\fIpthread_atfork\fR()
+calls a function that is not async-signal-safe, the behavior is
+undefined.
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+If the Trace option and the Trace Inherit option are both supported:
+.RS 4 
+.P
+If the calling process was being traced in a trace stream that had its
+inheritance policy set to POSIX_TRACE_INHERITED, the child process shall
+be traced into that trace stream, and the child process shall inherit
+the parent's mapping of trace event names to trace event type
+identifiers. If the trace stream in which the calling process was being
+traced had its inheritance policy set to POSIX_TRACE_CLOSE_FOR_CHILD,
+the child process shall not be traced into that trace stream. The
+inheritance policy is set by a call to the
+\fIposix_trace_attr_setinherited\fR()
+function.
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+If the Trace option is supported, but the Trace Inherit option is not
+supported:
+.RS 4 
+.P
+The child process shall not be traced into any of the trace streams
+of its parent process.
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+If the Trace option is supported, the child process of a trace
+controller process shall not control the trace streams controlled by
+its parent process.
+.IP " *" 4
+The initial value of the CPU-time clock of the child process shall be
+set to zero.
+.IP " *" 4
+The initial value of the CPU-time clock of the single thread of the
+child process shall be set to zero.
+.P
+All other process characteristics defined by POSIX.1\(hy2008 shall be the same in
+the parent and child processes. The inheritance of process
+characteristics not defined by POSIX.1\(hy2008 is unspecified by POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+After
+\fIfork\fR(),
+both the parent and the child processes shall be capable of executing
+independently before either one terminates.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfork\fR()
+shall return 0 to the child process and shall return the process ID
+of the child process to the parent process. Both processes shall
+continue to execute from the
+\fIfork\fR()
+function. Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be
+returned to the parent process, no child process shall be created, and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfork\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The system lacked the necessary resources to create another process, or
+the system-imposed limit on the total number of processes under
+execution system-wide or by a single user
+{CHILD_MAX}
+would be exceeded.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIfork\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient storage space is available.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Many historical implementations have timing windows where a signal sent
+to a process group (for example, an interactive SIGINT)
+just prior to or during execution of
+\fIfork\fR()
+is delivered to the parent following the
+\fIfork\fR()
+but not to the child because the
+\fIfork\fR()
+code clears the child's set of pending signals. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not require,
+or even permit, this behavior. However, it is pragmatic to expect that
+problems of this nature may continue to exist in implementations that
+appear to conform to this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 and pass available verification suites. This
+behavior is only a consequence of the implementation failing to make
+the interval between signal generation and delivery totally invisible.
+From the application's perspective, a
+\fIfork\fR()
+call should appear atomic. A signal that is generated prior to the
+\fIfork\fR()
+should be delivered prior to the
+\fIfork\fR().
+A signal sent to the process group after the
+\fIfork\fR()
+should be delivered to both parent and child. The implementation may
+actually initialize internal data structures corresponding to the
+child's set of pending signals to include signals sent to the process
+group during the
+\fIfork\fR().
+Since the
+\fIfork\fR()
+call can be considered as atomic from the application's perspective,
+the set would be initialized as empty and such signals would have
+arrived after the
+\fIfork\fR();
+see also
+.IR <signal.h> .
+.P
+One approach that has been suggested to address the problem of signal
+inheritance across
+\fIfork\fR()
+is to add an
+.BR [EINTR] 
+error, which would be returned when a signal is detected during the
+call. While this is preferable to losing signals, it was not
+considered an optimal solution. Although it is not recommended for
+this purpose, such an error would be an allowable extension for an
+implementation.
+.P
+The
+.BR [ENOMEM] 
+error value is reserved for those implementations that detect and
+distinguish such a condition. This condition occurs when an
+implementation detects that there is not enough memory to create the
+process. This is intended to be returned when
+.BR [EAGAIN] 
+is inappropriate because there can never be enough memory (either
+primary or secondary storage) to perform the operation. Since
+\fIfork\fR()
+duplicates an existing process, this must be a condition where there is
+sufficient memory for one such process, but not for two. Many
+historical implementations actually return
+.BR [ENOMEM] 
+due to temporary lack of memory, a case that is not generally distinct
+from
+.BR [EAGAIN] 
+from the perspective of a conforming application.
+.P
+Part of the reason for including the optional error
+.BR [ENOMEM] 
+is because the SVID specifies it and it should be reserved for the
+error condition specified there. The condition is not applicable on
+many implementations.
+.P
+IEEE\ Std\ 1003.1\(hy1988 neglected to require concurrent execution of the parent and child
+of
+\fIfork\fR().
+A system that single-threads processes was clearly not intended and is
+considered an unacceptable ``toy implementation'' of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+The only objection anticipated to the phrase ``executing
+independently'' is testability, but this assertion should be testable.
+Such tests require that both the parent and child can block on a
+detectable action of the other, such as a write to a pipe or a signal.
+An interactive exchange of such actions should be possible for the
+system to conform to the intent of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+The
+.BR [EAGAIN] 
+error exists to warn applications that such a condition might occur.
+Whether it occurs or not is not in any practical sense under the
+control of the application because the condition is usually a
+consequence of the user's use of the system, not of the application's
+code. Thus, no application can or should rely upon its occurrence
+under any circumstances, nor should the exact semantics of what concept
+of ``user'' is used be of concern to the application developer.
+Validation writers should be cognizant of this limitation.
+.P
+There are two reasons why POSIX programmers call
+\fIfork\fR().
+One reason is to create a new thread of control within the same program
+(which was originally only possible in POSIX by creating a new
+process); the other is to create a new process running a different
+program. In the latter case, the call to
+\fIfork\fR()
+is soon followed by a call to one of the
+.IR exec
+functions.
+.P
+The general problem with making
+\fIfork\fR()
+work in a multi-threaded world is what to do with all of the threads.
+There are two alternatives. One is to copy all of the threads into the
+new process. This causes the programmer or implementation to deal with
+threads that are suspended on system calls or that might be about to
+execute system calls that should not be executed in the new process.
+The other alternative is to copy only the thread that calls
+\fIfork\fR().
+This creates the difficulty that the state of process-local resources
+is usually held in process memory. If a thread that is not calling
+\fIfork\fR()
+holds a resource, that resource is never released in the child process
+because the thread whose job it is to release the resource does not
+exist in the child process.
+.P
+When a programmer is writing a multi-threaded program, the first
+described use of
+\fIfork\fR(),
+creating new threads in the same program, is provided by the
+\fIpthread_create\fR()
+function. The
+\fIfork\fR()
+function is thus used only to run new programs, and the effects of
+calling functions that require certain resources between the call to
+\fIfork\fR()
+and the call to an
+.IR exec
+function are undefined.
+.P
+The addition of the
+\fIforkall\fR()
+function to the standard was considered and rejected. The
+\fIforkall\fR()
+function lets all the threads in the parent be duplicated in the
+child. This essentially duplicates the state of the parent in the
+child. This allows threads in the child to continue processing and
+allows locks and the state to be preserved without explicit
+\fIpthread_atfork\fR()
+code. The calling process has to ensure that the threads processing
+state that is shared between the parent and child (that is, file
+descriptors or MAP_SHARED
+memory) behaves properly after
+\fIforkall\fR().
+For example, if a thread is reading a file descriptor in the parent
+when
+\fIforkall\fR()
+is called, then two threads (one in the parent and one in the child)
+are reading the file descriptor after the
+\fIforkall\fR().
+If this is not desired behavior, the parent process has to synchronize
+with such threads before calling
+\fIforkall\fR().
+.P
+While the
+\fIfork\fR()
+function is async-signal-safe, there is no way for an implementation to
+determine whether the fork handlers established by
+\fIpthread_atfork\fR()
+are async-signal-safe. The fork handlers may attempt to execute
+portions of the implementation that are not async-signal-safe, such as
+those that are protected by mutexes, leading to a deadlock condition.
+It is therefore undefined for the fork handlers to execute functions
+that are not async-signal-safe when
+\fIfork\fR()
+is called from a signal handler.
+.P
+When
+\fIforkall\fR()
+is called, threads, other than the calling thread, that are in
+functions that can return with an
+.BR [EINTR] 
+error may have those functions return
+.BR [EINTR] 
+if the implementation cannot ensure that the function behaves correctly
+in the parent and child. In particular,
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+need to return in order to ensure that the condition has not changed.
+These functions can be awakened by a spurious condition wakeup rather
+than returning
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIalarm\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_attr_getinherited\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_eventid_equal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_atfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemop\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsignal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItimes\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.11" ", " "Memory Synchronization",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fpathconf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fpathconf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6aa368a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fpathconf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,509 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FPATHCONF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fpathconf,
+pathconf
+\(em get configurable pathname variables
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+long fpathconf(int \fIfildes\fP, int \fIname\fP);
+long pathconf(const char *\fIpath\fP, int \fIname\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIfpathconf\fR()
+and
+\fIpathconf\fR()
+functions shall determine the current value of a configurable limit or
+option (\fIvariable\fP) that is associated with a file or directory.
+.P
+For
+\fIpathconf\fR(),
+the
+.IR path
+argument points to the pathname of a file or directory.
+.P
+For
+\fIfpathconf\fR(),
+the
+.IR fildes
+argument is an open file descriptor.
+.P
+The
+.IR name
+argument represents the variable to be queried relative to that file or
+directory. Implementations shall support all of the variables listed in
+the following table and may support others. The variables in the
+following table come from
+.IR <limits.h> 
+or
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+and the symbolic constants, defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> ,
+are the corresponding values used for
+.IR name .
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB | cB
+l | l | l.
+Variable!Value of \fIname\fP!Requirements
+_
+{FILESIZEBITS}!_PC_FILESIZEBITS!4,\|7
+{LINK_MAX}!_PC_LINK_MAX!1
+{MAX_CANON}!_PC_MAX_CANON!2
+{MAX_INPUT}!_PC_MAX_INPUT!2
+{NAME_MAX}!_PC_NAME_MAX!3,\|4
+{PATH_MAX}!_PC_PATH_MAX!4,\|5
+{PIPE_BUF}!_PC_PIPE_BUF!6
+{POSIX2_SYMLINKS}!_PC_2_SYMLINKS!4
+{POSIX_ALLOC_SIZE_MIN}!_PC_ALLOC_SIZE_MIN!10
+{POSIX_REC_INCR_XFER_SIZE}!_PC_REC_INCR_XFER_SIZE!10
+{POSIX_REC_MAX_XFER_SIZE}!_PC_REC_MAX_XFER_SIZE!10
+{POSIX_REC_MIN_XFER_SIZE}!_PC_REC_MIN_XFER_SIZE!10
+{POSIX_REC_XFER_ALIGN}!_PC_REC_XFER_ALIGN!10
+{SYMLINK_MAX}!_PC_SYMLINK_MAX!4,\|9
+_POSIX_CHOWN_RESTRICTED!_PC_CHOWN_RESTRICTED!7
+_POSIX_NO_TRUNC!_PC_NO_TRUNC!3,\|4
+_POSIX_VDISABLE!_PC_VDISABLE!2
+_POSIX_ASYNC_IO!_PC_ASYNC_IO!8
+_POSIX_PRIO_IO!_PC_PRIO_IO!8
+_POSIX_SYNC_IO!_PC_SYNC_IO!8
+_POSIX_TIMESTAMP_RESOLUTION!_PC_TIMESTAMP_RESOLUTION!1
+.TE
+.SS "Requirements"
+.IP " 1." 4
+If
+.IR path
+or
+.IR fildes
+refers to a directory, the value returned shall apply to the directory
+itself.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If
+.IR path
+or
+.IR fildes
+does not refer to a terminal file, it is unspecified whether an
+implementation supports an association of the variable name with the
+specified file.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If
+.IR path
+or
+.IR fildes
+refers to a directory, the value returned shall apply to filenames
+within the directory.
+.IP " 4." 4
+If
+.IR path
+or
+.IR fildes
+does not refer to a directory, it is unspecified whether an
+implementation supports an association of the variable name with the
+specified file.
+.IP " 5." 4
+If
+.IR path
+or
+.IR fildes
+refers to a directory, the value returned shall be the maximum length
+of a relative pathname that would not cross any mount points when the
+specified directory is the working directory.
+.IP " 6." 4
+If
+.IR path
+refers to a FIFO, or
+.IR fildes
+refers to a pipe or FIFO, the value returned shall apply to the
+referenced object. If
+.IR path
+or
+.IR fildes
+refers to a directory, the value returned shall apply to any FIFO that
+exists or can be created within the directory. If
+.IR path
+or
+.IR fildes
+refers to any other type of file, it is unspecified whether an
+implementation supports an association of the variable name with the
+specified file.
+.IP " 7." 4
+If
+.IR path
+or
+.IR fildes
+refers to a directory, the value returned shall apply to any files,
+other than directories, that exist or can be created within the
+directory.
+.IP " 8." 4
+If
+.IR path
+or
+.IR fildes
+refers to a directory, it is unspecified whether an implementation
+supports an association of the variable name with the specified file.
+.IP " 9." 4
+If
+.IR path
+or
+.IR fildes
+refers to a directory, the value returned shall be the maximum length
+of the string that a symbolic link in that directory can contain.
+.IP 10. 4
+If
+.IR path
+or
+.IR fildes
+des does not refer to a regular file, it is unspecified whether an
+implementation supports an association of the variable name with the
+specified file. If an implementation supports such an association for
+other than a regular file, the value returned is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If
+.IR name
+is an invalid value, both
+\fIpathconf\fR()
+and
+\fIfpathconf\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.P
+If the variable corresponding to
+.IR name
+is described in
+.IR <limits.h> 
+as a maximum or minimum value and the variable has no limit for the
+path or file descriptor, both
+\fIpathconf\fR()
+and
+\fIfpathconf\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 without changing
+.IR errno .
+Note that indefinite limits do not imply infinite limits; see
+.IR <limits.h> .
+.P
+If the implementation needs to use
+.IR path
+to determine the value of
+.IR name
+and the implementation does not support the association of
+.IR name
+with the file specified by
+.IR path ,
+or if the process did not have appropriate privileges to query the
+file specified by
+.IR path ,
+or
+.IR path
+does not exist,
+\fIpathconf\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.P
+If the implementation needs to use
+.IR fildes
+to determine the value of
+.IR name
+and the implementation does not support the association of
+.IR name
+with the file specified by
+.IR fildes ,
+or if
+.IR fildes
+is an invalid file descriptor,
+\fIfpathconf\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.P
+Otherwise,
+\fIpathconf\fR()
+or
+\fIfpathconf\fR()
+shall return the current variable value for the file or directory
+without changing
+.IR errno .
+The value returned shall not be more restrictive than the corresponding
+value available to the application when it was compiled with the
+implementation's
+.IR <limits.h> 
+or
+.IR <unistd.h> .
+.P
+If the variable corresponding to
+.IR name
+is dependent on an unsupported option, the results are unspecified.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpathconf\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR name
+is not valid.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The value of
+.IR name
+is _PC_TIMESTAMP_RESOLUTION and the resolution is larger than
+{LONG_MAX}.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIpathconf\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied for a component of the path prefix.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The implementation does not support an association of the variable
+.IR name
+with the specified file.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR path
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory, or the
+.IR path
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file
+that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.P
+The
+\fIfpathconf\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR name
+is not valid.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The value of
+.IR name
+is _PC_TIMESTAMP_RESOLUTION and the resolution is larger than
+{LONG_MAX}.
+.P
+The
+\fIfpathconf\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The implementation does not support an association of the variable
+.IR name
+with the specified file.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Application developers should check whether an option, such as
+_POSIX_ADVISORY_INFO, is supported prior to obtaining and using values
+for related variables such as
+{POSIX_ALLOC_SIZE_MIN}.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIpathconf\fR()
+function was proposed immediately after the
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+function when it was realized that some configurable values may differ
+across file system, directory, or device boundaries.
+.P
+For example,
+{NAME_MAX}
+frequently changes between System V and
+BSD-based file systems; System V uses a maximum of 14, BSD 255. On an
+implementation that provides both types of file systems, an application
+would be forced to limit all pathname components to 14 bytes, as this
+would be the value specified in
+.IR <limits.h> 
+on such a system.
+.P
+Therefore, various useful values can be queried on any pathname or file
+descriptor, assuming that appropriate privileges
+are in place.
+.P
+The value returned for the variable
+{PATH_MAX}
+indicates the longest relative pathname that could be given if the
+specified directory is the current working directory of the process. A
+process may not always be able to generate a name that long and use it
+if a subdirectory in the pathname crosses into a more restrictive file
+system. Note that implementations are allowed to accept pathnames
+longer than
+{PATH_MAX}
+bytes long, but are not allowed to return pathnames longer than this
+unless the user specifies a larger buffer using a function that provides
+a buffer size argument.
+.P
+The value returned for the variable _POSIX_CHOWN_RESTRICTED
+also applies to directories that do not have file systems mounted on
+them. The value may change when crossing a mount point, so
+applications that need to know should check for each directory. (An
+even easier check is to try the
+\fIchown\fR()
+function and look for an error in case it happens.)
+.P
+Unlike the values returned by
+\fIsysconf\fR(),
+the pathname-oriented variables are potentially more volatile and are
+not guaranteed to remain constant throughout the lifetime of the process.
+For example, in between two calls to
+\fIpathconf\fR(),
+the file system in question may have been unmounted and remounted with
+different characteristics.
+.P
+Also note that most of the errors are optional. If one of the
+variables always has the same value on an implementation, the
+implementation need not look at
+.IR path
+or
+.IR fildes
+to return that value and is, therefore, not required to detect any of
+the errors except the meaning of
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+that indicates that the value of
+.IR name
+is not valid for that variable.
+.P
+If the value of any of the limits is unspecified (logically
+infinite), they will not be defined in
+.IR <limits.h> 
+and the
+\fIpathconf\fR()
+and
+\fIfpathconf\fR()
+functions return \(mi1 without changing
+.IR errno .
+This can be distinguished from the case of giving an unrecognized
+.IR name
+argument because
+.IR errno
+is set to
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+in this case.
+.P
+Since \(mi1 is a valid return value for the
+\fIpathconf\fR()
+and
+\fIfpathconf\fR()
+functions, applications should set
+.IR errno
+to zero before calling them and check
+.IR errno
+only if the return value is \(mi1.
+.P
+For the case of
+{SYMLINK_MAX},
+since both
+\fIpathconf\fR()
+and
+\fIopen\fR()
+follow symbolic links, there is no way that
+.IR path
+or
+.IR fildes
+could refer to a symbolic link.
+.P
+It was the intention of IEEE\ Std 1003.1d\(hy1999 that the following variables:
+.sp
+.RS
+{POSIX_ALLOC_SIZE_MIN}
+{POSIX_REC_INCR_XFER_SIZE}
+{POSIX_REC_MAX_XFER_SIZE}
+{POSIX_REC_MIN_XFER_SIZE}
+{POSIX_REC_XFER_ALIGN}
+.RE
+.P
+only applied to regular files, but Note 10 also permits implementation
+of the advisory semantics on other file types unique to an
+implementation (for example, a character special device).
+.P
+The
+.BR [EOVERFLOW] 
+error for _PC_TIMESTAMP_RESOLUTION cannot occur on POSIX-compliant
+file systems because POSIX requires a timestamp resolution no
+larger than one second. Even on 32-bit systems, this can be
+represented without overflow.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIchown\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIconfstr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<limits.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.P
+The Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIgetconf\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fpclassify.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fpclassify.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6f01154
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fpclassify.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FPCLASSIFY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fpclassify
+\(em classify real floating type
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+int fpclassify(real-floating \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfpclassify\fR()
+macro shall classify its argument value as NaN, infinite, normal,
+subnormal, zero, or into another implementation-defined category.
+First, an argument represented in a format wider than its semantic type
+is converted to its semantic type. Then classification is based on the
+type of the argument.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIfpclassify\fR()
+macro shall return the value of the number classification macro
+appropriate to the value of its argument.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisfinite\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisinf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnormal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsignbit\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fprintf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fprintf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..63f2c95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fprintf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,1490 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FPRINTF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+dprintf,
+fprintf,
+printf,
+snprintf,
+sprintf
+\(em print formatted output
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int dprintf(int \fIfildes\fP, const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+int fprintf(FILE *restrict \fIstream\fP, const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+int printf(const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+int snprintf(char *restrict \fIs\fP, size_t \fIn\fP,
+    const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+int sprintf(char *restrict \fIs\fP, const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Excluding
+\fIdprintf\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfprintf\fR()
+function shall place output on the named output
+.IR stream .
+The
+\fIprintf\fR()
+function shall place output on the standard output stream
+.IR stdout .
+The
+\fIsprintf\fR()
+function shall place output followed by the null byte,
+.BR '\e0' ,
+in consecutive bytes starting at *\fIs\fP; it is the user's
+responsibility to ensure that enough space is available.
+.P
+The
+\fIdprintf\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIfprintf\fR()
+function, except that
+\fIdprintf\fR()
+shall write output to the file associated with the file descriptor
+specified by the
+.IR fildes
+argument rather than place output on a stream.
+.P
+The
+\fIsnprintf\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIsprintf\fR(),
+with the addition of the
+.IR n
+argument which states the size of the buffer referred to by
+.IR s .
+If
+.IR n
+is zero, nothing shall be written and
+.IR s
+may be a null pointer. Otherwise, output bytes beyond the
+.IR n \(hy1st
+shall be discarded instead of being written to the array, and a null
+byte is written at the end of the bytes actually written into the
+array.
+.P
+If copying takes place between objects that overlap as a result of a
+call to
+\fIsprintf\fR()
+or
+\fIsnprintf\fR(),
+the results are undefined.
+.P
+Each of these functions converts, formats, and prints its arguments
+under control of the
+.IR format .
+The
+.IR format
+is a character string, beginning and ending in its initial shift state,
+if any. The
+.IR format
+is composed of zero or more directives:
+.IR "ordinary characters" ,
+which are simply copied to the output stream, and
+.IR "conversion specifications" ,
+each of which shall result in the fetching of zero or more arguments.
+The results are undefined if there are insufficient arguments for the
+.IR format .
+If the
+.IR format
+is exhausted while arguments remain, the excess arguments shall be
+evaluated but are otherwise ignored.
+.P
+Conversions can be applied to the
+.IR n th
+argument after the
+.IR format
+in the argument list, rather than to the next unused argument. In this
+case, the conversion specifier character
+.BR %
+(see below) is replaced by the sequence \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR, where
+.IR n
+is a decimal integer in the range [1,{NL_ARGMAX}],
+giving the position of the argument in the argument list. This feature
+provides for the definition of format strings that select arguments in
+an order appropriate to specific languages (see the EXAMPLES section).
+.P
+The
+.IR format
+can contain either numbered argument conversion specifications (that
+is, \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR and \fR"*\fIm\fR$"\fR), or unnumbered argument
+conversion specifications (that is,
+.BR %
+and
+.BR * ),
+but not both. The only exception to this is that
+.BR %%
+can be mixed with the \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR form. The results of mixing
+numbered and unnumbered argument specifications in a
+.IR format
+string are undefined. When numbered argument specifications are used,
+specifying the
+.IR N th
+argument requires that all the leading arguments, from the first to the
+(\fIN\(mi1\fP)th, are specified in the format string.
+.P
+In format strings containing the \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR form of conversion
+specification, numbered arguments in the argument list can be
+referenced from the format string as many times as required.
+.P
+In format strings containing the
+.BR %
+form of conversion specification, each conversion specification uses
+the first unused argument in the argument list.
+.P
+All forms of the
+\fIfprintf\fR()
+functions allow for the insertion of a language-dependent radix
+character in the output string. The radix character is defined in the
+current locale (category
+.IR LC_NUMERIC ).
+In the POSIX locale, or in a locale where the radix character is not
+defined, the radix character shall default to a
+<period>
+(\c
+.BR '.' ).
+.P
+Each conversion specification is introduced by the
+.BR '%' 
+character
+or by the character sequence \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR,
+after which the following appear in sequence:
+.IP " *" 4
+Zero or more
+.IR flags
+(in any order), which modify the meaning of the conversion
+specification.
+.IP " *" 4
+An optional minimum
+.IR "field width" .
+If the converted value has fewer bytes than the field width, it shall
+be padded with
+<space>
+characters by default on the left; it shall be padded on the right if
+the left-adjustment flag (\c
+.BR '\(mi' ),
+described below, is given to the field width. The field width takes the
+form of an
+<asterisk>
+(\c
+.BR '*' ),
+described below, or a decimal integer.
+.IP " *" 4
+An optional
+.IR precision
+that gives the minimum number of digits to appear for the
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+and
+.BR X
+conversion specifiers; the number of digits to appear after the radix
+character for the
+.BR a ,
+.BR A ,
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+and
+.BR F
+conversion specifiers; the maximum number of significant digits for the
+.BR g
+and
+.BR G
+conversion specifiers; or the maximum number of bytes to be printed
+from a string in the
+.BR s
+and
+.BR S
+conversion specifiers. The precision takes the form of a
+<period>
+(\c
+.BR '.' )
+followed either by an
+<asterisk>
+(\c
+.BR '*' ),
+described below, or an optional decimal digit string, where a null
+digit string is treated as zero. If a precision appears with any other
+conversion specifier, the behavior is undefined.
+.IP " *" 4
+An optional length modifier that specifies the size of the argument.
+.IP " *" 4
+A
+.IR "conversion specifier"
+character that indicates the type of conversion to be applied.
+.P
+A field width, or precision, or both, may be indicated by an
+<asterisk>
+(\c
+.BR '*' ).
+In this case an argument of type
+.BR int
+supplies the field width or precision. Applications shall ensure that
+arguments specifying field width, or precision, or both appear in that
+order before the argument, if any, to be converted. A negative field
+width is taken as a
+.BR '\(mi' 
+flag followed by a positive field width. A negative precision is taken
+as if the precision were omitted.
+In
+.IR format
+strings containing the \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR form of a
+conversion specification, a field width or precision may be indicated
+by the sequence \fR"*\fIm\fR$"\fR, where
+.IR m
+is a decimal integer in the range [1,{NL_ARGMAX}] giving the position
+in the argument list (after the
+.IR format
+argument) of an integer argument containing the field width or
+precision, for example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+printf("%1$d:%2$.*3$d:%4$.*3$d\en", hour, min, precision, sec);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The flag characters and their meanings are:
+.IP "\fR'\fR" 8
+(The
+<apostrophe>.)
+The integer portion of the result of a decimal conversion (\c
+.BR %i ,
+.BR %d ,
+.BR %u ,
+.BR %f ,
+.BR %F ,
+.BR %g ,
+or
+.BR %G )
+shall be formatted with thousands' grouping characters. For other
+conversions the behavior is undefined. The non-monetary grouping
+character is used.
+.IP "\fR\(mi\fR" 8
+The result of the conversion shall be left-justified within the field.
+The conversion is right-justified if this flag is not specified.
+.IP "\fR+\fR" 8
+The result of a signed conversion shall always begin with a sign (\c
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' ).
+The conversion shall begin with a sign only when a negative value is
+converted if this flag is not specified.
+.IP <space> 8
+If the first character of a signed conversion is not a sign or if a
+signed conversion results in no characters, a
+<space>
+shall be prefixed to the result. This means that if the
+<space>
+and
+.BR '+' 
+flags both appear, the
+<space>
+flag shall be ignored.
+.IP "\fR#\fR" 8
+Specifies that the value is to be converted to an alternative
+form. For
+.BR o
+conversion, it increases the precision (if necessary) to force the
+first digit of the result to be zero. For
+.BR x
+or
+.BR X
+conversion specifiers, a non-zero result shall have 0x (or 0X) prefixed
+to it. For
+.BR a ,
+.BR A ,
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR g ,
+and
+.BR G
+conversion specifiers, the result shall always contain a radix
+character, even if no digits follow the radix character. Without this
+flag, a radix character appears in the result of these conversions only
+if a digit follows it. For
+.BR g
+and
+.BR G
+conversion specifiers, trailing zeros shall
+.IR not
+be removed from the result as they normally are. For other conversion
+specifiers, the behavior is undefined.
+.IP "\fR0\fR" 8
+For
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+.BR X ,
+.BR a ,
+.BR A ,
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR g ,
+and
+.BR G
+conversion specifiers, leading zeros (following any indication of sign
+or base) are used to pad to the field width rather than performing
+space padding, except when converting an infinity or NaN. If the
+.BR '0' 
+and
+.BR '\(mi' 
+flags both appear, the
+.BR '0' 
+flag is ignored. For
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+and
+.BR X
+conversion specifiers, if a precision is specified, the
+.BR '0' 
+flag shall be ignored.
+If the
+.BR '0' 
+and
+<apostrophe>
+flags both appear, the grouping characters are inserted before zero
+padding. For other conversions, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The length modifiers and their meanings are:
+.IP "\fRhh\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+or
+.BR X
+conversion specifier applies to a
+.BR "signed char"
+or
+.BR "unsigned char"
+argument (the argument will have been promoted according to the integer
+promotions, but its value shall be converted to
+.BR "signed char"
+or
+.BR "unsigned char"
+before printing); or that a following
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a
+.BR "signed char"
+argument.
+.IP "\fRh\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+or
+.BR X
+conversion specifier applies to a
+.BR "short"
+or
+.BR "unsigned short"
+argument (the argument will have been promoted according to the integer
+promotions, but its value shall be converted to
+.BR "short"
+or
+.BR "unsigned short"
+before printing); or that a following
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a
+.BR "short"
+argument.
+.IP "\fRl\fR\ (ell)" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+or
+.BR X
+conversion specifier applies to a
+.BR "long"
+or
+.BR "unsigned long"
+argument; that a following
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a
+.BR "long"
+argument; that a following
+.BR c
+conversion specifier applies to a
+.BR wint_t
+argument; that a following
+.BR s
+conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a
+.BR wchar_t
+argument; or has no effect on a following
+.BR a ,
+.BR A ,
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR g ,
+or
+.BR G
+conversion specifier.
+.IP "\fRll\fR\ (ell-ell)" 8
+.br
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+or
+.BR X
+conversion specifier applies to a
+.BR "long long"
+or
+.BR "unsigned long long"
+argument; or that a following
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a
+.BR "long long"
+argument.
+.IP "\fRj\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+or
+.BR X
+conversion specifier applies to an
+.BR intmax_t
+or
+.BR uintmax_t
+argument; or that a following
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to a pointer to an
+.BR intmax_t
+argument.
+.IP "\fRz\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+or
+.BR X
+conversion specifier applies to a
+.BR size_t
+or the corresponding signed integer type argument; or that a following
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a signed integer type
+corresponding to a
+.BR size_t
+argument.
+.IP "\fRt\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+or
+.BR X
+conversion specifier applies to a
+.BR ptrdiff_t
+or the corresponding
+.BR unsigned
+type argument; or that a following
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a
+.BR ptrdiff_t
+argument.
+.IP "\fRL\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR a ,
+.BR A ,
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR g ,
+or
+.BR G
+conversion specifier applies to a
+.BR "long double"
+argument.
+.P
+If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than
+as specified above, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:
+.IP "\fRd\fR,\ \fRi\fR" 8
+The
+.BR int
+argument shall be converted to a signed decimal in the style
+\fR"[\(mi]\fIdddd\fR"\fR. The precision specifies the minimum number of
+digits to appear; if the value being converted can be represented in
+fewer digits, it shall be expanded with leading zeros. The default
+precision is 1. The result of converting zero with an explicit
+precision of zero shall be no characters.
+.IP "\fRo\fP" 8
+The
+.BR unsigned
+argument shall be converted to unsigned octal format in the style
+\fR"\fIdddd\fR"\fR. The precision specifies the minimum number of
+digits to appear; if the value being converted can be represented in
+fewer digits, it shall be expanded with leading zeros. The default
+precision is 1. The result of converting zero with an explicit
+precision of zero shall be no characters.
+.IP "\fRu\fP" 8
+The
+.BR unsigned
+argument shall be converted to unsigned decimal format in the style
+\fR"\fIdddd\fR"\fR. The precision specifies the minimum number of
+digits to appear; if the value being converted can be represented in
+fewer digits, it shall be expanded with leading zeros. The default
+precision is 1. The result of converting zero with an explicit
+precision of zero shall be no characters.
+.IP "\fRx\fP" 8
+The
+.BR unsigned
+argument shall be converted to unsigned hexadecimal format in the
+style \fR"\fIdddd\fR"\fR; the letters
+.BR \(dqabcdef\(dq 
+are used. The precision specifies the minimum number of digits to
+appear; if the value being converted can be represented in fewer
+digits, it shall be expanded with leading zeros. The default precision
+is 1. The result of converting zero with an explicit precision of zero
+shall be no characters.
+.IP "\fRX\fP" 8
+Equivalent to the
+.BR x
+conversion specifier, except that letters
+.BR \(dqABCDEF\(dq 
+are used instead of
+.BR \(dqabcdef\(dq .
+.IP "\fRf\fR,\ \fRF\fR" 8
+The
+.BR double
+argument shall be converted to decimal notation in the style
+\fR"[\(mi]\fIddd\fR.\fIddd\fR"\fR, where the number of digits after the
+radix character is equal to the precision specification. If the
+precision is missing, it shall be taken as 6; if the precision is
+explicitly zero and no
+.BR '#' 
+flag is present, no radix character shall appear. If a radix character
+appears, at least one digit appears before it. The low-order digit
+shall be rounded in an implementation-defined manner.
+.RS 8 
+.P
+A
+.BR double
+argument representing an infinity shall be converted in one of the
+styles
+.BR \(dq[\(mi]inf\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dq[\(mi]infinity\(dq ;
+which style is implementation-defined. A
+.BR double
+argument representing a NaN shall be converted in one of the styles
+\fR"[\(mi]nan(\fIn-char-sequence\fR)"\fR or
+.BR \(dq[\(mi]nan\(dq ;
+which style, and the meaning of any
+.IR n-char-sequence ,
+is implementation-defined. The
+.BR F
+conversion specifier produces
+.BR \(dqINF\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqINFINITY\(dq ,
+or
+.BR \(dqNAN\(dq 
+instead of
+.BR \(dqinf\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqinfinity\(dq ,
+or
+.BR \(dqnan\(dq ,
+respectively.
+.RE
+.IP "\fRe\fR,\ \fRE\fR" 8
+The
+.BR double
+argument shall be converted in the style
+\fR"[\(mi]\fId\fR.\fIddd\fRe\(+-\fIdd\fR"\fR, where there is one digit
+before the radix character (which is non-zero if the argument is
+non-zero) and the number of digits after it is equal to the precision;
+if the precision is missing, it shall be taken as 6; if the precision
+is zero and no
+.BR '#' 
+flag is present, no radix character shall appear. The low-order digit
+shall be rounded in an implementation-defined manner. The
+.BR E
+conversion specifier shall produce a number with
+.BR 'E' 
+instead of
+.BR 'e' 
+introducing the exponent. The exponent shall always contain at least
+two digits. If the value is zero, the exponent shall be zero.
+.RS 8 
+.P
+A
+.BR double
+argument representing an infinity or NaN shall be converted in
+the style of an
+.BR f
+or
+.BR F
+conversion specifier.
+.RE
+.IP "\fRg\fR,\ \fRG\fR" 8
+The
+.BR double
+argument representing a floating-point number shall be converted in the
+style
+.BR f
+or
+.BR e
+(or in the style
+.BR F
+or
+.BR E
+in the case of a
+.BR G
+conversion specifier), depending on the value converted and the precision.
+Let
+.BR P
+equal the precision if non-zero, 6 if the precision is omitted, or 1 if the
+precision is zero. Then, if a conversion with style
+.BR E
+would have an exponent of
+.IR X :
+.RS 8 
+.IP -- 4
+If
+.BR P >\c
+.IR X \(>=\(mi4,
+the conversion shall be with style
+.BR f
+(or
+.BR F )
+and precision
+.BR P \(mi(\c
+.IR X +1).
+.IP -- 4
+Otherwise, the conversion shall be with style
+.BR e
+(or
+.BR E )
+and precision
+.BR P \(mi1.
+.P
+Finally, unless the
+.BR '#' 
+flag is used, any trailing zeros shall be removed from the fractional
+portion of the result and the decimal-point character shall be removed
+if there is no fractional portion remaining.
+.P
+A
+.BR double
+argument representing an infinity or NaN shall be converted in the
+style of an
+.BR f
+or
+.BR F
+conversion specifier.
+.RE
+.IP "\fRa\fR,\ \fRA\fR" 8
+A
+.BR double
+argument representing a floating-point number shall be converted in the
+style \fR"[\(mi]0x\fIh\fR.\fIhhhh\fRp\(+-\fId\fR"\fR, where there is
+one hexadecimal digit (which shall be non-zero if the argument is a
+normalized floating-point number and is otherwise unspecified) before
+the decimal-point character and the number of hexadecimal digits after
+it is equal to the precision; if the precision is missing and FLT_RADIX
+is a power of 2, then the precision shall be sufficient for an exact
+representation of the value; if the precision is missing and FLT_RADIX
+is not a power of 2, then the precision shall be sufficient to
+distinguish values of type
+.BR double ,
+except that trailing zeros may be omitted; if the precision is zero and
+the
+.BR '#' 
+flag is not specified, no decimal-point character shall appear. The
+letters
+.BR \(dqabcdef\(dq 
+shall be used for
+.BR a
+conversion and the letters
+.BR \(dqABCDEF\(dq 
+for
+.BR A
+conversion. The
+.BR A
+conversion specifier produces a number with
+.BR 'X' 
+and
+.BR 'P' 
+instead of
+.BR 'x' 
+and
+.BR 'p' .
+The exponent shall always contain at least one digit, and only as many
+more digits as necessary to represent the decimal exponent of 2. If the
+value is zero, the exponent shall be zero.
+.RS 8 
+.P
+A
+.BR double
+argument representing an infinity or NaN shall be converted in the
+style of an
+.BR f
+or
+.BR F
+conversion specifier.
+.RE
+.IP "\fRc\fP" 8
+The
+.BR int
+argument shall be converted to an
+.BR "unsigned char" ,
+and the resulting byte shall be written.
+.RS 8 
+.P
+If an
+.BR l
+(ell) qualifier is present, the
+.BR wint_t
+argument shall be converted as if by an
+.BR ls
+conversion specification with no precision and an argument that points
+to a two-element array of type
+.BR wchar_t ,
+the first element of which contains the
+.BR wint_t
+argument to the
+.BR ls
+conversion specification and the second element contains a null wide
+character.
+.RE
+.IP "\fRs\fP" 8
+The argument shall be a pointer to an array of
+.BR char .
+Bytes from the array shall be written up to (but not including) any
+terminating null byte. If the precision is specified, no more than that
+many bytes shall be written. If the precision is not specified or is
+greater than the size of the array, the application shall ensure that
+the array contains a null byte.
+.RS 8 
+.P
+If an
+.BR l
+(ell) qualifier is present, the argument shall be a pointer to an array
+of type
+.BR wchar_t .
+Wide characters from the array shall be converted to characters (each
+as if by a call to the
+\fIwcrtomb\fR()
+function, with the conversion state described by an
+.BR mbstate_t
+object initialized to zero before the first wide character is
+converted) up to and including a terminating null wide character. The
+resulting characters shall be written up to (but not including) the
+terminating null character (byte). If no precision is specified, the
+application shall ensure that the array contains a null wide character.
+If a precision is specified, no more than that many characters (bytes)
+shall be written (including shift sequences, if any), and the array
+shall contain a null wide character if, to equal the character sequence
+length given by the precision, the function would need to access a wide
+character one past the end of the array. In no case shall a partial
+character be written.
+.RE
+.IP "\fRp\fP" 8
+The argument shall be a pointer to
+.BR void .
+The value of the pointer is converted to a sequence of printable
+characters, in an implementation-defined manner.
+.IP "\fRn\fP" 8
+The argument shall be a pointer to an integer into which is written the
+number of bytes written to the output so far by this call to one of the
+\fIfprintf\fR()
+functions. No argument is converted.
+.IP "\fRC\fP" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR lc .
+.IP "\fRS\fP" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR ls .
+.IP "\fR%\fR" 8
+Print a
+.BR '%' 
+character; no argument is converted. The complete conversion
+specification shall be
+.BR %% .
+.P
+If a conversion specification does not match one of the above forms,
+the behavior is undefined. If any argument is not the correct type for
+the corresponding conversion specification, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+In no case shall a nonexistent or small field width cause truncation of
+a field; if the result of a conversion is wider than the field width,
+the field shall be expanded to contain the conversion result.
+Characters generated by
+\fIfprintf\fR()
+and
+\fIprintf\fR()
+are printed as if
+\fIfputc\fR()
+had been called.
+.P
+For the
+.BR a
+and
+.BR A
+conversion specifiers, if FLT_RADIX is a power of 2, the value shall be
+correctly rounded to a hexadecimal floating number with the given
+precision.
+.P
+For
+.BR a
+and
+.BR A
+conversions, if FLT_RADIX is not a power of 2 and the result is not
+exactly representable in the given precision, the result should be one
+of the two adjacent numbers in hexadecimal floating style with the
+given precision, with the extra stipulation that the error should have
+a correct sign for the current rounding direction.
+.P
+For the
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR g ,
+and
+.BR G
+conversion specifiers, if the number of significant decimal digits is
+at most DECIMAL_DIG, then the result should be correctly rounded. If
+the number of significant decimal digits is more than DECIMAL_DIG but
+the source value is exactly representable with DECIMAL_DIG digits, then
+the result should be an exact representation with trailing zeros.
+Otherwise, the source value is bounded by two adjacent decimal strings
+.IR L
+<
+.IR U ,
+both having DECIMAL_DIG significant digits; the value of the resultant
+decimal string
+.IR D
+should satisfy
+.IR L
+<=
+.IR D
+<=
+.IR U ,
+with the extra stipulation that the error should have a correct sign
+for the current rounding direction.
+.P
+The last data modification and last file status change timestamps
+of the file shall be marked for update:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Between the call to a successful execution of
+\fIfprintf\fR()
+or
+\fIprintf\fR()
+and the next successful completion of a call to
+\fIfflush\fR()
+or
+\fIfclose\fR()
+on the same stream or a call to
+\fIexit\fR()
+or
+\fIabort\fR()
+.IP " 2." 4
+Upon successful completion of a call to
+\fIdprintf\fR()
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIdprintf\fR(),
+\fIfprintf\fR(),
+and
+\fIprintf\fR()
+functions shall return the number of bytes transmitted.
+.P
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIsprintf\fR()
+function shall return the number of bytes written to
+.IR s ,
+excluding the terminating null byte.
+.P
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIsnprintf\fR()
+function shall return the number of bytes that would be written to
+.IR s
+had
+.IR n
+been sufficiently large excluding the terminating null byte.
+.P
+If an output error was encountered, these functions shall return a
+negative value
+and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR n
+is zero on a call to
+\fIsnprintf\fR(),
+nothing shall be written, the number of bytes that would have been
+written had
+.IR n
+been sufficiently large excluding the terminating null shall be
+returned, and
+.IR s
+may be a null pointer.
+.SH ERRORS
+For the conditions under which
+\fIdprintf\fR(),
+\fIfprintf\fR(),
+and
+\fIprintf\fR()
+fail and may fail, refer to
+.IR "\fIfputc\fR\^(\|)"
+or
+.IR "\fIfputwc\fR\^(\|)".
+.P
+In addition, all forms of
+\fIfprintf\fR()
+shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EILSEQ
+A wide-character code that does not correspond to a valid character
+has been detected.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The value to be returned is greater than
+{INT_MAX}.
+.P
+In addition, all forms of
+\fIfprintf\fR()
+may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+There are insufficient arguments.
+.P
+The
+\fIdprintf\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.P
+The
+\fIdprintf\fR(),
+\fIfprintf\fR(),
+and
+\fIprintf\fR()
+functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient storage space is available.
+.P
+The
+\fIsnprintf\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The value of
+.IR n
+is greater than
+{INT_MAX}.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+.SS "Printing Language-Independent Date and Time"
+.P
+The following statement can be used to print date and time using a
+language-independent format:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+printf(format, weekday, month, day, hour, min);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+For American usage,
+.IR format
+could be a pointer to the following string:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%s, %s %d, %d:%.2d\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This example would produce the following message:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+Sunday, July 3, 10:02
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+For German usage,
+.IR format
+could be a pointer to the following string:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"%1$s, %3$d. %2$s, %4$d:%5$.2d\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This definition of
+.IR format
+would produce the following message:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+Sonntag, 3. Juli, 10:02
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Printing File Information"
+.P
+The following example prints information about the type, permissions,
+and number of links of a specific file in a directory.
+.P
+The first two calls to
+\fIprintf\fR()
+use data decoded from a previous
+\fIstat\fR()
+call. The user-defined
+\fIstrperm\fR()
+function shall return a string similar to the one at the beginning of the
+output for the following command:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ls \(mil
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The next call to
+\fIprintf\fR()
+outputs the owner's name if it is found using
+\fIgetpwuid\fR();
+the
+\fIgetpwuid\fR()
+function shall return a
+.BR passwd
+structure from which the name of the user is extracted. If the user
+name is not found, the program instead prints out the numeric value of
+the user ID.
+.P
+The next call prints out the group name if it is found using
+\fIgetgrgid\fR();
+\fIgetgrgid\fR()
+is very similar to
+\fIgetpwuid\fR()
+except that it shall return group information based on the group number.
+Once again, if the group is not found, the program prints the numeric
+value of the group for the entry.
+.P
+The final call to
+\fIprintf\fR()
+prints the size of the file.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <pwd.h>
+#include <grp.h>
+.P
+char *strperm (mode_t);
+\&...
+struct stat statbuf;
+struct passwd *pwd;
+struct group *grp;
+\&...
+printf("%10.10s", strperm (statbuf.st_mode));
+printf("%4d", statbuf.st_nlink);
+.P
+if ((pwd = getpwuid(statbuf.st_uid)) != NULL)
+    printf(" %\(mi8.8s", pwd->pw_name);
+else
+    printf(" %\(mi8ld", (long) statbuf.st_uid);
+.P
+if ((grp = getgrgid(statbuf.st_gid)) != NULL)
+    printf(" %\(mi8.8s", grp->gr_name);
+else
+    printf(" %\(mi8ld", (long) statbuf.st_gid);
+.P
+printf("%9jd", (intmax_t) statbuf.st_size);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Printing a Localized Date String"
+.P
+The following example gets a localized date string. The
+\fInl_langinfo\fR()
+function shall return the localized date string, which specifies the
+order and layout of the date. The
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+function takes this information and, using the
+.BR tm
+structure for values, places the date and time information into
+.IR datestring .
+The
+\fIprintf\fR()
+function then outputs
+.IR datestring
+and the name of the entry.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <time.h>
+#include <langinfo.h>
+\&...
+struct dirent *dp;
+struct tm *tm;
+char datestring[256];
+\&...
+strftime(datestring, sizeof(datestring), nl_langinfo (D_T_FMT), tm);
+.P
+printf(" %s %s\en", datestring, dp->d_name);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Printing Error Information"
+.P
+The following example uses
+\fIfprintf\fR()
+to write error information to standard error.
+.P
+In the first group of calls, the program tries to open the password
+lock file named
+.BR LOCKFILE .
+If the file already exists, this is an error, as indicated by the
+O_EXCL flag on the
+\fIopen\fR()
+function. If the call fails, the program assumes that someone else is
+updating the password file, and the program exits.
+.P
+The next group of calls saves a new password file as the current
+password file by creating a link between
+.BR LOCKFILE
+and the new password file
+.BR PASSWDFILE .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+.P
+#define LOCKFILE "/etc/ptmp"
+#define PASSWDFILE "/etc/passwd"
+\&...
+int pfd;
+\&...
+if ((pfd = open(LOCKFILE, O_WRONLY | O_CREAT | O_EXCL,
+    S_IRUSR | S_IWUSR | S_IRGRP | S_IROTH)) == \(mi1)
+{
+    fprintf(stderr, "Cannot open /etc/ptmp. Try again later.\en");
+    exit(1);
+}
+\&...
+if (link(LOCKFILE,PASSWDFILE) == -1) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "Link error: %s\en", strerror(errno));
+    exit(1);
+}
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Printing Usage Information"
+.P
+The following example checks to make sure the program has the necessary
+arguments, and uses
+\fIfprintf\fR()
+to print usage information if the expected number of arguments is not
+present.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+\&...
+char *Options = "hdbtl";
+\&...
+if (argc < 2) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "Usage: %s -%s <file\en", argv[0], Options); exit(1);
+}
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Formatting a Decimal String"
+.P
+The following example prints a key and data pair on
+.IR stdout .
+Note use of the
+<asterisk>
+(\c
+.BR '*' )
+in the format string; this ensures the correct number of decimal places
+for the element based on the number of elements requested.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+long i;
+char *keystr;
+int elementlen, len;
+\&...
+while (len < elementlen) {
+\&...
+    printf("%s Element%0*ld\en", keystr, elementlen, i);
+\&...
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Creating a Pathname"
+.P
+The following example creates a pathname using information from a previous
+\fIgetpwnam\fR()
+function that returned the password database entry of the user.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+\&...
+char *pathname;
+struct passwd *pw;
+size_t len;
+\&...
+// digits required for pid_t is number of bits times
+// log2(10) = approx 10/33
+len = strlen(pw->pw_dir) + 1 + 1+(sizeof(pid_t)*80+32)/33 +
+    sizeof ".out";
+pathname = malloc(len);
+if (pathname != NULL)
+{
+    snprintf(pathname, len, "%s/%jd.out", pw->pw_dir,
+        (intmax_t)getpid());
+    ...
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Reporting an Event"
+.P
+The following example loops until an event has timed out. The
+\fIpause\fR()
+function waits forever unless it receives a signal. The
+\fIfprintf\fR()
+statement should never occur due to the possible return values of
+\fIpause\fR().
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+\&...
+while (!event_complete) {
+\&...
+    if (pause() != \(mi1 || errno != EINTR)
+        fprintf(stderr, "pause: unknown error: %s\en", strerror(errno));
+}
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Printing Monetary Information"
+.P
+The following example uses
+\fIstrfmon\fR()
+to convert a number and store it as a formatted monetary string named
+.IR convbuf .
+If the first number is printed, the program prints the format and the
+description; otherwise, it just prints the number.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <monetary.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+struct tblfmt {
+    char *format;
+    char *description;
+};
+.P
+struct tblfmt table[] = {
+    { "%n", "default formatting" },
+    { "%11n", "right align within an 11 character field" },
+    { "%#5n", "aligned columns for values up to 99\|999" },
+    { "%=*#5n", "specify a fill character" },
+    { "%=0#5n", "fill characters do not use grouping" },
+    { "%^#5n", "disable the grouping separator" },
+    { "%^#5.0n", "round off to whole units" },
+    { "%^#5.4n", "increase the precision" },
+    { "%(#5n", "use an alternative pos/neg style" },
+    { "%!(#5n", "disable the currency symbol" },
+};
+\&...
+float input[3];
+int i, j;
+char convbuf[100];
+\&...
+strfmon(convbuf, sizeof(convbuf), table[i].format, input[j]);
+.P
+if (j == 0) {
+    printf("%s\t%s\t%s\en", table[i].format,
+        convbuf, table[i].description);
+}
+else {
+    printf("\t%s\en", convbuf);
+}
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Printing Wide Characters"
+.P
+The following example prints a series of wide characters. Suppose that
+.BR \(dqL`@`\(dq 
+expands to three bytes:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+wchar_t wz [3] = L"@@";       // Zero-terminated
+wchar_t wn [3] = L"@@@";      // Unterminated
+.P
+fprintf (stdout,"%ls", wz);   // Outputs 6 bytes
+fprintf (stdout,"%ls", wn);   // Undefined because wn has no terminator
+fprintf (stdout,"%4ls", wz);  // Outputs 3 bytes
+fprintf (stdout,"%4ls", wn);  // Outputs 3 bytes; no terminator needed
+fprintf (stdout,"%9ls", wz);  // Outputs 6 bytes
+fprintf (stdout,"%9ls", wn);  // Outputs 9 bytes; no terminator needed
+fprintf (stdout,"%10ls", wz); // Outputs 6 bytes
+fprintf (stdout,"%10ls", wn); // Undefined because wn has no terminator
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In the last line of the example, after processing three characters,
+nine bytes have been output. The fourth character must then be examined
+to determine whether it converts to one byte or more. If it converts
+to more than one byte, the output is only nine bytes. Since there is
+no fourth character in the array, the behavior is undefined.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If the application calling
+\fIfprintf\fR()
+has any objects of type
+.BR wint_t
+or
+.BR wchar_t ,
+it must also include the
+.IR <wchar.h> 
+header to have these objects defined.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfputc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfscanf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrfmon\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcrtomb\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fputc.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fputc.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..280900d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fputc.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,157 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FPUTC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fputc
+\(em put a byte on a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int fputc(int \fIc\fP, FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfputc\fR()
+function shall write the byte specified by
+.IR c
+(converted to an
+.BR "unsigned char" )
+to the output stream pointed to by
+.IR stream ,
+at the position indicated by the associated file-position indicator for
+the stream (if defined), and shall advance the indicator appropriately.
+If the file cannot support positioning requests, or if the stream was
+opened with append mode, the byte shall be appended to the output
+stream.
+.P
+The last data modification and last file status change timestamps
+of the file shall be marked for update between the successful
+execution of
+\fIfputc\fR()
+and the next successful completion of a call to
+\fIfflush\fR()
+or
+\fIfclose\fR()
+on the same stream or a call to
+\fIexit\fR()
+or
+\fIabort\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfputc\fR()
+shall return the value it has written. Otherwise, it shall return EOF,
+the error indicator for the stream shall be set,
+and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfputc\fR()
+function shall fail if either the
+.IR stream
+is unbuffered or the
+.IR stream 's
+buffer needs to be flushed, and:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The O_NONBLOCK flag is set for the file descriptor underlying
+.IR stream
+and the thread would be delayed in the write operation.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The file descriptor underlying
+.IR stream
+is not a valid file descriptor open for writing.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+An attempt was made to write to a file that exceeds the maximum file
+size.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+An attempt was made to write to a file that exceeds the file
+size limit of the process.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+The file is a regular file and an attempt was made to write at or
+beyond the offset maximum.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The write operation was terminated due to the receipt of a signal, and
+no data was transferred.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+A physical I/O error has occurred, or the process is a member of a
+background process group attempting to write to its controlling terminal,
+TOSTOP is set, the calling thread is not blocking SIGTTOU, the process
+is not ignoring SIGTTOU, and the process group of the process is orphaned.
+This error may also be returned under implementation-defined conditions.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+There was no free space remaining on the device containing the file.
+.TP
+.BR EPIPE
+An attempt is made to write to a pipe or FIFO that is not open for
+reading by any process. A SIGPIPE signal shall also be sent to the
+thread.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIfputc\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient storage space is available.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+A request was made of a nonexistent device, or the request was
+outside the capabilities of the device.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIferror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetrlimit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetbuf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIulimit\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fputs.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fputs.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a9e2453
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fputs.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,154 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FPUTS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fputs
+\(em put a string on a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int fputs(const char *restrict \fIs\fP, FILE *restrict \fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfputs\fR()
+function shall write the null-terminated string pointed to by
+.IR s
+to the stream pointed to by
+.IR stream .
+The terminating null byte shall not be written.
+.P
+The last data modification and last file status change timestamps
+of the file shall be marked for update between the successful
+execution of
+\fIfputs\fR()
+and the next successful completion of a call to
+\fIfflush\fR()
+or
+\fIfclose\fR()
+on the same stream or a call to
+\fIexit\fR()
+or
+\fIabort\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfputs\fR()
+shall return a non-negative number. Otherwise, it shall return EOF,
+set an error indicator for the stream,
+and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfputc\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Printing to Standard Output"
+.P
+The following example gets the current time, converts it to a string
+using
+\fIlocaltime\fR()
+and
+\fIasctime\fR(),
+and prints it to standard output using
+\fIfputs\fR().
+It then prints the number of minutes to an event for which it is
+waiting.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <time.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+time_t now;
+int minutes_to_event;
+\&...
+time(&now);
+printf("The time is ");
+fputs(asctime(localtime(&now)), stdout);
+printf("There are still %d minutes to the event.\en",
+    minutes_to_event);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIputs\fR()
+function appends a
+<newline>
+while
+\fIfputs\fR()
+does not.
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that successful completion simply return a non-negative
+integer. There are at least three known different implementation
+conventions for this requirement:
+.IP " *" 4
+Return a constant value.
+.IP " *" 4
+Return the last character written.
+.IP " *" 4
+Return the number of bytes written. Note that this implementation
+convention cannot be adhered to for strings longer than
+{INT_MAX}
+bytes as the value would not be representable in the return type of the
+function. For backwards-compatibility, implementations can return the
+number of bytes for strings of up to
+{INT_MAX}
+bytes, and return
+{INT_MAX}
+for all longer strings.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIfputs\fR()
+function is one whose source code was specified in the referenced \fIThe C Programming Language\fP. In the
+original edition, the function had no defined return value, yet many
+practical implementations would, as a side-effect, return the value of the
+last character written as that was the value remaining in the accumulator
+used as a return value. In the second edition of the book, either the
+fixed value 0 or EOF would be returned depending upon the return value of
+\fIferror\fR();
+however, for compatibility with extant implementations, several
+implementations would, upon success, return a positive value representing
+the last byte written.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputs\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fputwc.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fputwc.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cca9f1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fputwc.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,162 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FPUTWC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fputwc
+\(em put a wide-character code on a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wint_t fputwc(wchar_t \fIwc\fP, FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfputwc\fR()
+function shall write the character corresponding to the wide-character
+code
+.IR wc
+to the output stream pointed to by
+.IR stream ,
+at the position indicated by the associated file-position indicator for
+the stream (if defined), and advances the indicator appropriately. If
+the file cannot support positioning requests, or if the stream was
+opened with append mode, the character is appended to the output
+stream. If an error occurs while writing the character, the shift
+state of the output file is left in an undefined state.
+.P
+The last data modification and last file status change timestamps
+of the file shall be marked for update between the successful
+execution of
+\fIfputwc\fR()
+and the next successful completion of a call to
+\fIfflush\fR()
+or
+\fIfclose\fR()
+on the same stream or a call to
+\fIexit\fR()
+or
+\fIabort\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIfputwc\fR()
+function shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfputwc\fR()
+shall return
+.IR wc .
+Otherwise, it shall return WEOF, the error indicator for the stream shall
+be set,
+and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfputwc\fR()
+function shall fail if either the stream is unbuffered or data in the
+.IR stream 's
+buffer needs to be written, and:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The O_NONBLOCK flag is set for the file descriptor underlying
+.IR stream
+and the thread would be delayed in the write operation.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The file descriptor underlying
+.IR stream
+is not a valid file descriptor open for writing.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+An attempt was made to write to a file that exceeds the maximum file
+size or the file size limit of the process.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+The file is a regular file and an attempt was made to write at or
+beyond the offset maximum associated with the corresponding stream.
+.TP
+.BR EILSEQ
+The wide-character code
+.IR wc
+does not correspond to a valid character.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The write operation was terminated due to the receipt of a signal, and
+no data was transferred.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+A physical I/O error has occurred, or the process is a member of a
+background process group attempting to write to its controlling terminal,
+TOSTOP is set, the calling thread is not blocking SIGTTOU, the process
+is not ignoring SIGTTOU, and the process group of the process is orphaned.
+This error may also be returned under implementation-defined conditions.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+There was no free space remaining on the device containing the file.
+.TP
+.BR EPIPE
+An attempt is made to write to a pipe or FIFO that is not open for
+reading by any process. A SIGPIPE signal shall also be sent to the
+thread.
+.P
+The
+\fIfputwc\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient storage space is available.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+A request was made of a nonexistent device, or the request was
+outside the capabilities of the device.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIferror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetbuf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIulimit\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fputws.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fputws.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ea418e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fputws.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FPUTWS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fputws
+\(em put a wide-character string on a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int fputws(const wchar_t *restrict \fIws\fP, FILE *restrict \fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfputws\fR()
+function shall write a character string corresponding to the
+(null-terminated) wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws
+to the stream pointed to by
+.IR stream .
+No character corresponding to the terminating null wide-character code
+shall be written.
+.P
+The last data modification and last file status change timestamps
+of the file shall be marked for update between the successful
+execution of
+\fIfputws\fR()
+and the next successful completion of a call to
+\fIfflush\fR()
+or
+\fIfclose\fR()
+on the same stream or a call to
+\fIexit\fR()
+or
+\fIabort\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfputws\fR()
+shall return a non-negative number. Otherwise,
+it shall return \(mi1, set an error indicator for the stream,
+and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfputwc\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIfputws\fR()
+function does not append a
+<newline>.
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that successful completion simply return a non-negative
+integer. There are at least three known different implementation
+conventions for this requirement:
+.IP " *" 4
+Return a constant value.
+.IP " *" 4
+Return the last character written.
+.IP " *" 4
+Return the number of bytes written. Note that this implementation
+convention cannot be adhered to for strings longer than
+{INT_MAX}
+bytes as the value would not be representable in the return type of the
+function. For backwards-compatibility, implementations can return the
+number of bytes for strings of up to
+{INT_MAX}
+bytes, and return
+{INT_MAX}
+for all longer strings.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fread.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fread.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..18baec6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fread.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FREAD "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fread
+\(em binary input
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+size_t fread(void *restrict \fIptr\fP, size_t \fIsize\fP, size_t \fInitems\fP,
+    FILE *restrict \fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfread\fR()
+function shall read into the array pointed to by
+.IR ptr
+up to
+.IR nitems
+elements whose size is specified by
+.IR size
+in bytes, from the stream pointed to by
+.IR stream .
+For each object,
+.IR size
+calls shall be made to the
+\fIfgetc\fR()
+function and the results stored, in the order read, in an array of
+.BR "unsigned char"
+exactly overlaying the object. The file position indicator for the
+stream (if defined) shall be advanced by the number of bytes
+successfully read. If an error occurs, the resulting value of the file
+position indicator for the stream is unspecified. If a partial element
+is read, its value is unspecified.
+.P
+The
+\fIfread\fR()
+function may mark the last data access timestamp of the file
+associated with
+.IR stream
+for update. The last data access timestamp shall be
+marked for update by the first successful execution of
+\fIfgetc\fR(),
+\fIfgets\fR(),
+\fIfread\fR(),
+\fIfscanf\fR(),
+\fIgetc\fR(),
+\fIgetchar\fR(),
+\fIgetdelim\fR(),
+\fIgetline\fR(),
+\fIgets\fR(),
+or
+\fIscanf\fR()
+using
+.IR stream
+that returns data not supplied by a prior call to
+\fIungetc\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfread\fR()
+shall return the number of elements successfully read which is less than
+.IR nitems
+only if a read error or end-of-file is encountered. If
+.IR size
+or
+.IR nitems
+is 0,
+\fIfread\fR()
+shall return 0 and the contents of the array and the state of the
+stream remain unchanged. Otherwise, if a read error occurs, the error
+indicator for the stream shall be set,
+and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfgetc\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Reading from a Stream"
+.P
+The following example reads a single element from the
+.IR fp
+stream into the array pointed to by
+.IR buf .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+size_t elements_read;
+char buf[100];
+FILE *fp;
+\&...
+elements_read = fread(buf, sizeof(buf), 1, fp);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If a read error occurs,
+.IR elements_read
+will be zero but the number of bytes read from the stream could be
+anything from zero to
+.IR sizeof ( buf )\(mi1.
+.P
+The following example reads multiple single-byte elements from the
+.IR fp
+stream into the array pointed to by
+.IR buf .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+size_t bytes_read;
+char buf[100];
+FILE *fp;
+\&...
+bytes_read = fread(buf, 1, sizeof(buf), fp);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If a read error occurs,
+.IR bytes_read
+will contain the number of bytes read from the stream.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIferror\fR()
+or
+\fIfeof\fR()
+functions must be used to distinguish between an error condition and an
+end-of-file condition.
+.P
+Because of possible differences in element length and byte ordering,
+files written using
+\fIfwrite\fR()
+are application-dependent, and possibly cannot be read using
+\fIfread\fR()
+by a different application or by the same application on a different
+processor.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfeof\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIferror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfgetc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfscanf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgets\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/free.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/free.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5ec34e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/free.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FREE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+free
+\(em free allocated memory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+void free(void *\fIptr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfree\fR()
+function shall cause the space pointed to by
+.IR ptr
+to be deallocated; that is, made available for further allocation. If
+.IR ptr
+is a null pointer, no action shall occur. Otherwise, if the argument
+does not match a pointer earlier returned by a function in POSIX.1\(hy2008 that
+allocates memory as if by
+\fImalloc\fR(),
+or if the space has been deallocated by a call to
+\fIfree\fR()
+or
+\fIrealloc\fR(),
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+Any use of a pointer that refers to freed space results in undefined
+behavior.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIfree\fR()
+function shall not return a value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+There is now no requirement for the implementation to support the
+inclusion of
+.IR <malloc.h> .
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcalloc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImalloc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_memalign\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrealloc\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/freeaddrinfo.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/freeaddrinfo.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4dcfcbe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/freeaddrinfo.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,504 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FREEADDRINFO "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+freeaddrinfo,
+getaddrinfo
+\(em get address information
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+#include <netdb.h>
+.P
+void freeaddrinfo(struct addrinfo *\fIai\fP);
+int getaddrinfo(const char *restrict \fInodename\fP,
+    const char *restrict \fIservname\fP,
+    const struct addrinfo *restrict \fIhints\fP,
+    struct addrinfo **restrict \fIres\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIfreeaddrinfo\fR()
+function shall free one or more
+.BR addrinfo
+structures returned by
+\fIgetaddrinfo\fR(),
+along with any additional storage associated with those structures. If
+the
+.IR ai_next
+field of the structure is not null, the entire list of structures shall
+be freed. The
+\fIfreeaddrinfo\fR()
+function shall support the freeing of arbitrary sublists of an
+.BR addrinfo
+list originally returned by
+\fIgetaddrinfo\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIgetaddrinfo\fR()
+function shall translate the name of a service location (for example, a
+host name) and/or a service name
+and shall return a set of socket addresses and associated information
+to be used in creating a socket with which to address the specified
+service.
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+In many cases it is implemented by the Domain Name System,
+as documented in RFC\ 1034, RFC\ 1035, and RFC\ 1886.
+.P
+.P
+The
+\fIfreeaddrinfo\fR()
+and
+\fIgetaddrinfo\fR()
+functions shall be thread-safe.
+.P
+The
+.IR nodename
+and
+.IR servname
+arguments are either null pointers or pointers to null-terminated
+strings. One or both of these two arguments shall be supplied by the
+application as a non-null pointer.
+.P
+The format of a valid name depends on the address family or families.
+If a specific family is not given and the name could be interpreted as
+valid within multiple supported families, the implementation shall
+attempt to resolve the name in all supported families and, in absence
+of errors, one or more results shall be returned.
+.P
+If the
+.IR nodename
+argument is not null, it can be a descriptive name or can be an address
+string.
+If the specified address family is AF_INET,
+AF_INET6,
+or AF_UNSPEC, valid descriptive names include host names. If the
+specified address family is AF_INET or AF_UNSPEC, address strings using
+Internet standard dot notation as specified in
+.IR "\fIinet_addr\fR\^(\|)"
+are valid.
+.P
+If the specified address family is AF_INET6 or AF_UNSPEC, standard IPv6
+text forms described in
+.IR "\fIinet_ntop\fR\^(\|)"
+are valid.
+.P
+If
+.IR nodename
+is not null, the requested service location is named by
+.IR nodename ;
+otherwise, the requested service location is local to the caller.
+.P
+If
+.IR servname
+is null, the call shall return network-level addresses for the
+specified
+.IR nodename.
+If
+.IR servname
+is not null, it is a null-terminated character string identifying the
+requested service. This can be either a descriptive name or a numeric
+representation suitable for use with the address family or families.
+If the specified address family is AF_INET,
+AF_INET6,
+or AF_UNSPEC, the service can be specified as a string specifying a
+decimal port number.
+.P
+If the
+.IR hints
+argument is not null, it refers to a structure containing input values
+that directs the operation by providing options and by limiting the
+returned information to a specific socket type, address family, and/or
+protocol, as described below. In this
+.IR hints
+structure every member other than
+.IR ai_flags ,
+.IR ai_family ,
+.IR ai_socktype ,
+and
+.IR ai_protocol
+shall be set to zero or a null pointer. A value of AF_UNSPEC for
+.IR ai_family
+means that the caller shall accept any address family. A value of zero
+for
+.IR ai_socktype
+means that the caller shall accept any socket type. A value of zero for
+.IR ai_protocol
+means that the caller shall accept any protocol. If
+.IR hints
+is a null pointer, the behavior shall be as if it referred to a
+structure containing the value zero for the
+.IR ai_flags ,
+.IR ai_socktype ,
+and
+.IR ai_protocol
+fields, and AF_UNSPEC for the
+.IR ai_family
+field.
+.P
+The
+.IR ai_flags
+field to which the
+.IR hints
+parameter points shall be set to zero or be the bitwise-inclusive
+OR of one or more of the values AI_PASSIVE, AI_CANONNAME,
+AI_NUMERICHOST, AI_NUMERICSERV, AI_V4MAPPED, AI_ALL, and AI_ADDRCONFIG.
+.P
+If the AI_PASSIVE flag is specified, the returned address information
+shall be suitable for use in binding a socket for accepting incoming
+connections for the specified service. In this case, if the
+.IR nodename
+argument is null, then the IP address portion of the socket address
+structure shall be set to INADDR_ANY for an IPv4 address or
+IN6ADDR_ANY_INIT for an IPv6 address. If the AI_PASSIVE flag is not
+specified, the returned address information shall be suitable for a call
+to
+\fIconnect\fR()
+(for a connection-mode protocol) or for a call to
+\fIconnect\fR(),
+\fIsendto\fR(),
+or
+\fIsendmsg\fR()
+(for a connectionless protocol). In this case, if the
+.IR nodename
+argument is null, then the IP address portion of the socket address
+structure shall be set to the loopback address. The AI_PASSIVE flag shall
+be ignored if the
+.IR nodename
+argument is not null.
+.P
+If the AI_CANONNAME flag is specified and the
+.IR nodename
+argument is not null, the function shall attempt to determine the
+canonical name corresponding to
+.IR nodename
+(for example, if
+.IR nodename
+is an alias or shorthand notation for a complete name).
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+Since different implementations use different conceptual models, the
+terms ``canonical name'' and ``alias'' cannot be precisely defined for
+the general case. However, Domain Name System implementations are
+expected to interpret them as they are used in RFC\ 1034.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+A numeric host address string is not a ``name'', and thus does not have
+a ``canonical name'' form; no address to host name translation is
+performed. See below for handling of the case where a canonical name
+cannot be obtained.
+.RE
+.P
+.P
+If the AI_NUMERICHOST flag is specified, then a non-null
+.IR nodename
+string supplied shall be a numeric host address string. Otherwise, an
+.BR [EAI_NONAME] 
+error is returned. This flag shall prevent any type of name resolution
+service (for example, the DNS) from being invoked.
+.P
+If the AI_NUMERICSERV flag is specified, then a non-null
+.IR servname
+string supplied shall be a numeric port string. Otherwise, an
+.BR [EAI_NONAME] 
+error shall be returned. This flag shall prevent any type of name
+resolution service (for example, NIS+) from being invoked.
+.P
+If the AI_V4MAPPED flag is specified along with an
+.IR ai_family
+of AF_INET6, then
+\fIgetaddrinfo\fR()
+shall return IPv4-mapped IPv6 addresses on finding no matching IPv6
+addresses (\c
+.IR ai_addrlen
+shall be 16). The AI_V4MAPPED flag shall be ignored unless
+.IR ai_family
+equals AF_INET6. If the AI_ALL flag is used with the AI_V4MAPPED flag,
+then
+\fIgetaddrinfo\fR()
+shall return all matching IPv6 and IPv4 addresses. The AI_ALL flag
+without the AI_V4MAPPED flag is ignored.
+.P
+If the AI_ADDRCONFIG flag is specified, IPv4 addresses shall be
+returned only if an IPv4 address is configured on the local system,
+and IPv6 addresses shall be returned only if an IPv6 address is
+configured on the local system.
+.P
+The
+.IR ai_socktype
+field to which argument
+.IR hints
+points specifies the socket type for the service, as defined in
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)".
+If a specific socket type is not given (for example, a value of zero)
+and the service name could be interpreted as valid with multiple
+supported socket types, the implementation shall attempt to resolve the
+service name for all supported socket types and, in the absence of
+errors, all possible results shall be returned. A non-zero socket type
+value shall limit the returned information to values with the specified
+socket type.
+.P
+If the
+.IR ai_family
+field to which
+.IR hints
+points has the value AF_UNSPEC, addresses shall be returned for use
+with any address family that can be used with the specified
+.IR nodename
+and/or
+.IR servname .
+Otherwise, addresses shall be returned for use only with the specified
+address family. If
+.IR ai_family
+is not AF_UNSPEC and
+.IR ai_protocol
+is not zero, then addresses shall be returned for use only with the
+specified address family and protocol; the value of
+.IR ai_protocol
+shall be interpreted as in a call to the
+\fIsocket\fR()
+function with the corresponding values of
+.IR ai_family
+and
+.IR ai_protocol .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+A zero return value for
+\fIgetaddrinfo\fR()
+indicates successful completion; a non-zero return value indicates
+failure. The possible values for the failures are listed in the
+ERRORS section.
+.P
+Upon successful return of
+\fIgetaddrinfo\fR(),
+the location to which
+.IR res
+points shall refer to a linked list of
+.BR addrinfo
+structures, each of which shall specify a socket address and
+information for use in creating a socket with which to use that socket
+address. The list shall include at least one
+.BR addrinfo
+structure. The
+.IR ai_next
+field of each structure contains a pointer to the next structure on the
+list, or a null pointer if it is the last structure on the list. Each
+structure on the list shall include values for use with a call to the
+\fIsocket\fR()
+function, and a socket address for use with the
+\fIconnect\fR()
+function or, if the AI_PASSIVE flag was specified, for use with the
+\fIbind\fR()
+function. The fields
+.IR ai_family ,
+.IR ai_socktype ,
+and
+.IR ai_protocol
+shall be usable as the arguments to the
+\fIsocket\fR()
+function to create a socket suitable for use with the returned
+address. The fields
+.IR ai_addr
+and
+.IR ai_addrlen
+are usable as the arguments to the
+\fIconnect\fR()
+or
+\fIbind\fR()
+functions with such a socket, according to the AI_PASSIVE flag.
+.P
+If
+.IR nodename
+is not null, and if requested by the AI_CANONNAME flag, the
+.IR ai_canonname
+field of the first returned
+.BR addrinfo
+structure shall point to a null-terminated string containing the
+canonical name corresponding to the input
+.IR nodename ;
+if the canonical name is not available, then
+.IR ai_canonname
+shall refer to the
+.IR nodename
+argument or a string with the same contents. The contents of the
+.IR ai_flags
+field of the returned structures are undefined.
+.P
+All fields in socket address structures returned by
+\fIgetaddrinfo\fR()
+that are not filled in through an explicit argument (for example,
+.IR sin6_flowinfo )
+shall be set to zero.
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+This makes it easier to compare socket address structures.
+.P
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIgetaddrinfo\fR()
+function shall fail and return the corresponding error value if:
+.IP [EAI_AGAIN] 12
+The name could not be resolved at this time. Future attempts may
+succeed.
+.IP [EAI_BADFLAGS] 12
+.br
+The
+.IR flags
+parameter had an invalid value.
+.IP [EAI_FAIL] 12
+A non-recoverable error occurred when attempting to resolve the name.
+.IP [EAI_FAMILY] 12
+The address family was not recognized.
+.IP [EAI_MEMORY] 12
+There was a memory allocation failure when trying to allocate storage
+for the return value.
+.IP [EAI_NONAME] 12
+The name does not resolve for the supplied parameters.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+Neither
+.IR nodename
+nor
+.IR servname
+were supplied. At least one of these shall be supplied.
+.RE
+.IP [EAI_SERVICE] 12
+The service passed was not recognized for the specified socket type.
+.IP [EAI_SOCKTYPE] 12
+.br
+The intended socket type was not recognized.
+.IP [EAI_SYSTEM] 12
+A system error occurred; the error code can be found in
+.IR errno .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+The following (incomplete) program demonstrates the use of
+\fIgetaddrinfo\fR()
+to obtain the socket address structure(s) for the service named in the
+program's command-line argument. The program then loops through each
+of the address structures attempting to create and bind a socket to the
+address, until it performs a successful
+\fIbind\fR().
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+#include <netdb.h>
+.P
+int
+main(int argc, char *argv[])
+{
+    struct addrinfo *result, *rp;
+    int sfd, s;
+.P
+    if (argc != 2) {
+        fprintf(stderr, "Usage: %s port\en", argv[0]);
+        exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+    }
+.P
+    struct addrinfo hints = {};
+    hints.ai_family = AF_UNSPEC;
+    hints.ai_socktype = SOCK_DGRAM;
+    hints.ai_flags = AI_PASSIVE;
+    hints.ai_protocol = 0;
+.P
+    s = getaddrinfo(NULL, argv[1], &hints, &result);
+    if (s != 0) {
+        fprintf(stderr, "getaddrinfo: %s\en", gai_strerror(s));
+        exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+    }
+.P
+    /* getaddrinfo() returns a list of address structures.
+       Try each address until a successful bind().
+       If socket(2) (or bind(2)) fails, close the socket
+       and try the next address. */
+.P
+    for (rp = result; rp != NULL; rp = rp->ai_next) {
+        sfd = socket(rp->ai_family, rp->ai_socktype,
+            rp->ai_protocol);
+        if (sfd == -1)
+            continue;
+.P
+        if (bind(sfd, rp->ai_addr, rp->ai_addrlen) == 0)
+            break;            /* Success */
+.P
+        close(sfd);
+    }
+.P
+    if (rp == NULL) {         /* No address succeeded */
+        fprintf(stderr, "Could not bind\en");
+        exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+    }
+.P
+    freeaddrinfo(result);     /* No longer needed */
+.P
+             /* ... use socket bound to sfd ... */
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If the caller handles only TCP and not UDP, for example, then the
+.IR ai_protocol
+member of the
+.IR hints
+structure should be set to IPPROTO_TCP when
+\fIgetaddrinfo\fR()
+is called.
+.P
+If the caller handles only IPv4 and not IPv6, then the
+.IR ai_family
+member of the
+.IR hints
+structure should be set to AF_INET when
+\fIgetaddrinfo\fR()
+is called.
+.P
+The term ``canonical name'' is misleading; it is taken from the Domain
+Name System (RFC\ 2181). It should be noted that the canonical name is
+a result of alias processing, and not necessarily a unique attribute of
+a host, address, or set of addresses. See RFC\ 2181 for more discussion
+of this in the Domain Name System context.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIconnect\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIendservent\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgai_strerror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetnameinfo\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<netdb.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/freelocale.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/freelocale.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1ef3cea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/freelocale.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FREELOCALE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+freelocale
+\(em free resources allocated for a locale object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <locale.h>
+.P
+void freelocale(locale_t \fIlocobj\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIfreelocale\fR()
+function shall cause the resources allocated for a locale object
+returned by a call to the
+\fInewlocale\fR()
+or
+\fIduplocale\fR()
+functions to be released.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locobj
+argument is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid
+locale object handle.
+.P
+Any use of a locale object that has been freed results in undefined
+behavior.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+None.
+.SH ERRORS
+None.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Freeing Up a Locale Object"
+.P
+The following example shows a code fragment to free a locale object
+created by
+\fInewlocale\fR():
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <locale.h>
+\&...
+.P
+/* Every locale object allocated with newlocale() should be
+ * freed using freelocale():
+ */
+.P
+locale_t loc;
+.P
+/* Get the locale. */
+.P
+loc = newlocale (LC_CTYPE_MASK | LC_TIME_MASK, "locname", NULL);
+.P
+/* ... Use the locale object ... */
+\&...
+.P
+/* Free the locale object resources. */
+freelocale (loc);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIduplocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fInewlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/freopen.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/freopen.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9132e43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/freopen.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,361 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FREOPEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+freopen
+\(em open a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+FILE *freopen(const char *restrict \fIpathname\fP, const char *restrict \fImode\fP,
+    FILE *restrict \fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfreopen\fR()
+function shall first attempt to flush the stream associated with
+.IR stream
+as if by a call to
+.IR fflush ( stream ).
+Failure to flush the stream successfully shall be ignored. If
+.IR pathname
+is not a null pointer,
+\fIfreopen\fR()
+shall close any file descriptor associated with
+.IR stream .
+Failure to close the file descriptor successfully shall be ignored.
+The error and end-of-file indicators for the stream shall be
+cleared.
+.P
+The
+\fIfreopen\fR()
+function shall open the file whose pathname is the string pointed to by
+.IR pathname
+and associate the stream pointed to by
+.IR stream
+with it. The
+.IR mode
+argument shall be used just as in
+\fIfopen\fR().
+.P
+The original stream shall be closed regardless of whether the
+subsequent open succeeds.
+.P
+If
+.IR pathname
+is a null pointer, the
+\fIfreopen\fR()
+function shall attempt to change the mode of the stream to that
+specified by
+.IR mode ,
+as if the name of the file currently associated with the stream had
+been used. In this case, the file descriptor associated with the stream
+need not be closed if the call to
+\fIfreopen\fR()
+succeeds. It is implementation-defined which changes of mode are
+permitted (if any), and under what circumstances.
+.P
+After a successful call to the
+\fIfreopen\fR()
+function, the orientation of the stream shall be cleared,
+the encoding rule shall be cleared,
+and the associated
+.BR mbstate_t
+object shall be set to describe an initial conversion state.
+.P
+If
+.IR pathname
+is not a null pointer, or if
+.IR pathname
+is a null pointer and the specified mode change necessitates the file
+descriptor associated with the stream to be closed and reopened, the
+file descriptor associated with the reopened stream shall be allocated
+and opened as if by a call to
+\fIopen\fR()
+with the following flags:
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB
+l | l.
+\fIfreopen\fP(\^) Mode!\fIopen\fP(\^) Flags
+_
+\fIr\fR or \fIrb\fR!O_RDONLY
+\fIw\fR or \fIwb\fR!O_WRONLY|O_CREAT|O_TRUNC
+\fIa\fR or \fIab\fR!O_WRONLY|O_CREAT|O_APPEND
+\fIr+\fR or \fIrb+\fR or \fIr+b\fR!O_RDWR
+\fIw+\fR or \fIwb+\fR or \fIw+b\fR!O_RDWR|O_CREAT|O_TRUNC
+\fIa+\fR or \fIab+\fR or \fIa+b\fR!O_RDWR|O_CREAT|O_APPEND
+.TE
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfreopen\fR()
+shall return the value of
+.IR stream .
+Otherwise, a null pointer shall be returned,
+and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfreopen\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied on a component of the path prefix, or the
+file exists and the permissions specified by
+.IR mode
+are denied, or the file does not exist and write permission is denied
+for the parent directory of the file to be created.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The file descriptor underlying the stream is not a valid file
+descriptor when
+.IR pathname
+is a null pointer.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was caught during
+\fIfreopen\fR().
+.TP
+.BR EISDIR
+The named file is a directory and
+.IR mode
+requires write access.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+The maximum allowable number of files is currently open in the system.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+The
+.IR mode
+string begins with
+.BR 'r' 
+and a component of
+.IR pathname
+does not name an existing file, or
+.IR mode
+begins with
+.BR 'w' 
+or
+.BR 'a' 
+and a component of the path prefix of
+.IR pathname
+does not name an existing file, or
+.IR pathname
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT " or " ENOTDIR
+.br
+The
+.IR pathname
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters. If
+.IR pathname
+names an existing file, an
+.BR [ENOENT] 
+error shall not occur.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+The directory or file system that would contain the new file cannot be
+expanded, the file does not exist, and it was to be created.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory, or the
+.IR pathname
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file that
+is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+The named file is a character special or block special file, and the
+device associated with this special file does not exist.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The named file is a regular file and the size of the file cannot be
+represented correctly in an object of type
+.BR off_t .
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+The named file resides on a read-only file system and
+.IR mode
+requires write access.
+.P
+The
+\fIfreopen\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The mode with which the file descriptor underlying the stream was
+opened does not support the requested mode when
+.IR pathname
+is a null pointer.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR mode
+argument is not valid.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient storage space is available.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+A request was made of a nonexistent device, or the request was outside
+the capabilities of the device.
+.TP
+.BR ETXTBSY
+The file is a pure procedure (shared text) file that is being executed
+and
+.IR mode
+requires write access.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Directing Standard Output to a File"
+.P
+The following example logs all standard output to the
+.BR /tmp/logfile
+file.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+FILE *fp;
+\&...
+fp = freopen ("/tmp/logfile", "a+", stdout);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIfreopen\fR()
+function is typically used to attach the pre-opened
+.IR streams
+associated with
+.IR stdin ,
+.IR stdout ,
+and
+.IR stderr
+to other files.
+.P
+Since implementations are not required to support any stream mode changes
+when the
+.IR pathname
+argument is NULL, portable applications cannot rely on the use of
+\fIfreopen\fR()
+to change the stream mode, and use of this feature is discouraged. The
+feature was originally added to the ISO\ C standard in order to facilitate changing
+.IR stdin
+and
+.IR stdout
+to binary mode. Since a
+.BR 'b' 
+character in the mode has no effect on POSIX systems, this use of the
+feature is unnecessary in POSIX applications. However, even though the
+.BR 'b' 
+is ignored, a successful call to
+.IR freopen \c
+(NULL, "\fIwb\fR", \fIstdout\fR) does have an effect. In particular,
+for regular files it truncates the file and sets the file-position
+indicator for the stream to the start of the file. It is possible that
+these side-effects are an unintended consequence of the way the feature
+is specified in the ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1999 standard, but unless or until the ISO\ C standard is changed,
+applications which successfully call
+.IR freopen \c
+(NULL, "\fIwb\fR", \fIstdout\fR) will behave in unexpected ways on
+conforming systems in situations such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+{ appl file1; appl file2; } > file3
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+which will result in
+.BR file3
+containing only the output from the second invocation of
+.IR appl .
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfdopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfflush\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfmemopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbsinit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen_memstream\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/frexp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/frexp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d7af0ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/frexp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FREXP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+frexp,
+frexpf,
+frexpl
+\(em extract mantissa and exponent from a double precision number
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double frexp(double \fInum\fP, int *\fIexp\fP);
+float frexpf(float \fInum\fP, int *\fIexp\fP);
+long double frexpl(long double \fInum\fP, int *\fIexp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall break a floating-point number
+.IR num
+into a normalized fraction and an integral power of 2. The integer
+exponent shall be stored in the
+.BR int
+object pointed to by
+.IR exp .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+For finite arguments, these functions shall return the value
+.IR x ,
+such that
+.IR x
+has a magnitude in the interval [\(12,1) or 0, and
+.IR num
+equals
+.IR x
+times 2 raised to the power *\fIexp\fP.
+.P
+If
+.IR num
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned, and the value of *\fIexp\fP is
+unspecified.
+.P
+If
+.IR num
+is \(+-0, \(+-0 shall be returned, and the value of *\fIexp\fP shall be
+0.
+.P
+If
+.IR num
+is \(+-Inf,
+.IR num
+shall be returned, and the value of *\fIexp\fP is unspecified.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.P
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIldexp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImodf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fscanf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fscanf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8681c90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fscanf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,880 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FSCANF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fscanf,
+scanf,
+sscanf
+\(em convert formatted input
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int fscanf(FILE *restrict \fIstream\fP, const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+int scanf(const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+int sscanf(const char *restrict \fIs\fP, const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfscanf\fR()
+function shall read from the named input
+.IR stream .
+The
+\fIscanf\fR()
+function shall read from the standard input stream
+.IR stdin .
+The
+\fIsscanf\fR()
+function shall read from the string
+.IR s .
+Each function reads bytes, interprets them according to a format, and
+stores the results in its arguments. Each expects, as arguments, a
+control string
+.IR format
+described below, and a set of
+.IR pointer
+arguments indicating where the converted input should be stored. The
+result is undefined if there are insufficient arguments for the
+format. If the format is exhausted while arguments remain, the excess
+arguments shall be evaluated but otherwise ignored.
+.P
+Conversions can be applied to the
+.IR n th
+argument after the
+.IR format
+in the argument list, rather than to the next unused argument. In this
+case, the conversion specifier character
+.BR %
+(see below) is replaced by the sequence \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR, where
+.IR n
+is a decimal integer in the range [1,{NL_ARGMAX}].
+This feature provides for the definition of format strings that select
+arguments in an order appropriate to specific languages. In format
+strings containing the \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR form of conversion
+specifications,
+it is unspecified whether numbered arguments in the argument list can
+be referenced from the format string more than once.
+.P
+The
+.IR format
+can contain either form of a conversion specification\(emthat is,
+.BR %
+or \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR\(embut the two forms cannot be mixed
+within a single
+.IR format
+string. The only exception to this is that
+.BR %%
+or
+.BR %*
+can be mixed with the \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR form. When numbered argument
+specifications are used, specifying the
+.IR N th
+argument requires that all the leading arguments, from the first to
+the (\c
+.IR N \(mi1)th,
+are pointers.
+.P
+The
+\fIfscanf\fR()
+function in all its forms shall allow detection of a language-dependent
+radix character in the input string. The radix character is defined in
+the current locale (category
+.IR LC_NUMERIC ).
+In the POSIX locale, or in a locale where the radix character is not
+defined, the radix character shall default to a
+<period>
+(\c
+.BR '.' ).
+.P
+The format is a character string, beginning and ending in its initial
+shift state, if any, composed of zero or more directives. Each
+directive is composed of one of the following:
+one or more white-space characters (\c
+<space>,
+<tab>,
+<newline>,
+<vertical-tab>,
+or
+<form-feed>);
+an ordinary character (neither
+.BR '%' 
+nor a white-space character); or a conversion specification. Each
+conversion specification is introduced by the character
+.BR '%' 
+or the character sequence \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR,
+after which the following appear in sequence:
+.IP " *" 4
+An optional assignment-suppressing character
+.BR '*' .
+.IP " *" 4
+An optional non-zero decimal integer that specifies the maximum field
+width.
+.IP " *" 4
+An optional assignment-allocation character
+.BR 'm' .
+.IP " *" 4
+An option length modifier that specifies the size of the receiving
+object.
+.IP " *" 4
+A
+.IR "conversion specifier"
+character that specifies the type of conversion to be applied. The
+valid conversion specifiers are described below.
+.P
+The
+\fIfscanf\fR()
+functions shall execute each directive of the format in turn. If a
+directive fails, as detailed below, the function shall return. Failures
+are described as input failures (due to the unavailability of input
+bytes) or matching failures (due to inappropriate input).
+.P
+A directive composed of one or more white-space characters shall be
+executed by reading input until no more valid input can be read, or up
+to the first byte which is not a white-space character, which remains
+unread.
+.P
+A directive that is an ordinary character shall be executed as follows:
+the next byte shall be read from the input and compared with the byte
+that comprises the directive; if the comparison shows that they are not
+equivalent, the directive shall fail, and the differing and subsequent
+bytes shall remain unread. Similarly, if end-of-file, an encoding
+error, or a read error prevents a character from being read, the
+directive shall fail.
+.P
+A directive that is a conversion specification defines a set of
+matching input sequences, as described below for each conversion
+character. A conversion specification shall be executed in the
+following steps.
+.P
+Input white-space characters (as specified by
+.IR "\fIisspace\fR\^(\|)")
+shall be skipped, unless the conversion specification includes a
+.BR [ ,
+.BR c ,
+.BR C ,
+or
+.BR n
+conversion specifier.
+.P
+An item shall be read from the input, unless the conversion
+specification includes an
+.BR n
+conversion specifier. An input item shall be defined as the longest
+sequence of input bytes (up to any specified maximum field width, which
+may be measured in characters or bytes dependent on the conversion
+specifier) which is an initial subsequence of a matching sequence. The
+first byte, if any, after the input item shall remain unread. If the
+length of the input item is 0, the execution of the conversion
+specification shall fail; this condition is a matching failure, unless
+end-of-file, an encoding error, or a read error prevented input from
+the stream, in which case it is an input failure.
+.P
+Except in the case of a
+.BR %
+conversion specifier, the input item (or, in the case of a
+.BR %n
+conversion specification, the count of input bytes) shall be converted
+to a type appropriate to the conversion character. If the input item is
+not a matching sequence, the execution of the conversion specification
+fails; this condition is a matching failure. Unless assignment
+suppression was indicated by a
+.BR '*' ,
+the result of the conversion shall be placed in the object pointed to
+by the first argument following the
+.IR format
+argument that has not already received a conversion result if the
+conversion specification is introduced by
+.BR % ,
+or in the
+.IR n th
+argument if introduced by the character sequence \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR.
+If this object does not have an appropriate type, or if the result of
+the conversion cannot be represented in the space provided, the
+behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The
+.BR %c ,
+.BR %s ,
+and
+.BR %[
+conversion specifiers shall accept an optional assignment-allocation
+character
+.BR 'm' ,
+which shall cause a memory buffer to be allocated to hold the string
+converted including a terminating null character. In such a case,
+the argument corresponding to the conversion specifier should be a
+reference to a pointer variable that will receive a pointer to the
+allocated buffer. The system shall allocate a buffer as if
+\fImalloc\fR()
+had been called. The application shall be responsible for freeing the
+memory after usage. If there is insufficient memory to allocate a buffer,
+the function shall set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [ENOMEM] 
+and a conversion error shall result. If the function returns EOF, any
+memory successfully allocated for parameters using assignment-allocation
+character
+.BR 'm' 
+by this call shall be freed before the function returns.
+.br
+.P
+The length modifiers and their meanings are:
+.IP "\fRhh\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+.BR X ,
+or
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to
+.BR "signed char"
+or
+.BR "unsigned char" .
+.IP "\fRh\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+.BR X ,
+or
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to
+.BR "short"
+or
+.BR "unsigned short" .
+.IP "\fRl\fR\ (ell)" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+.BR X ,
+or
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to
+.BR "long"
+or
+.BR "unsigned long" ;
+that a following
+.BR a ,
+.BR A ,
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR g ,
+or
+.BR G
+conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to
+.BR double ;
+or that a following
+.BR c ,
+.BR s ,
+or
+.BR [
+conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to
+.BR wchar_t .
+If the
+.BR 'm' 
+assignment-allocation character is specified, the conversion applies
+to an argument with the type pointer to a pointer to
+.BR wchar_t .
+.IP "\fRll\fR\ (ell-ell)" 8
+.br
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+.BR X ,
+or
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to
+.BR "long long"
+or
+.BR "unsigned long long" .
+.IP "\fRj\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+.BR X ,
+or
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to
+.BR intmax_t
+or
+.BR uintmax_t .
+.IP "\fRz\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+.BR X ,
+or
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to
+.BR size_t
+or the corresponding signed integer type.
+.IP "\fRt\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+.BR X ,
+or
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to
+.BR ptrdiff_t
+or the corresponding
+.BR unsigned
+type.
+.IP "\fRL\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR a ,
+.BR A ,
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR g ,
+or
+.BR G
+conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to
+.BR "long double" .
+.P
+If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than
+as specified above, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The following conversion specifiers are valid:
+.IP "\fRd\fP" 8
+Matches an optionally signed decimal integer, whose format is the same
+as expected for the subject sequence of
+\fIstrtol\fR()
+with the value 10 for the
+.IR base
+argument. In the absence of a size modifier, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to
+.BR int .
+.IP "\fRi\fP" 8
+Matches an optionally signed integer, whose format is the same as
+expected for the subject sequence of
+\fIstrtol\fR()
+with 0 for the
+.IR base
+argument. In the absence of a size modifier, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to
+.BR int .
+.IP "\fRo\fP" 8
+Matches an optionally signed octal integer, whose format is the same as
+expected for the subject sequence of
+\fIstrtoul\fR()
+with the value 8 for the
+.IR base
+argument. In the absence of a size modifier, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to
+.BR unsigned .
+.IP "\fRu\fP" 8
+Matches an optionally signed decimal integer, whose format is the same
+as expected for the subject sequence of
+\fIstrtoul\fR()
+with the value 10 for the
+.IR base
+argument. In the absence of a size modifier, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to
+.BR unsigned .
+.IP "\fRx\fP" 8
+Matches an optionally signed hexadecimal integer, whose format is the
+same as expected for the subject sequence of
+\fIstrtoul\fR()
+with the value 16 for the
+.IR base
+argument. In the absence of a size modifier, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to
+.BR unsigned .
+.IP "\fRa\fR,\ \fRe\fR,\ \fRf\fR,\ \fRg\fR" 8
+.br
+Matches an optionally signed floating-point number, infinity, or NaN,
+whose format is the same as expected for the subject sequence of
+\fIstrtod\fR().
+In the absence of a size modifier, the application shall ensure that
+the corresponding argument is a pointer to
+.BR float .
+.RS 8 
+.P
+If the
+\fIfprintf\fR()
+family of functions generates character string representations for
+infinity and NaN (a symbolic entity encoded in floating-point
+format) to support IEEE\ Std\ 754\(hy1985, the
+\fIfscanf\fR()
+family of functions shall recognize them as input.
+.RE
+.IP "\fRs\fP" 8
+Matches a sequence of bytes that are not white-space characters. If the
+.BR 'm' 
+assignment-allocation character is not specified, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to the initial byte
+of an array of
+.BR char ,
+.BR "signed char" ,
+or
+.BR "unsigned char"
+large enough to accept the sequence and a terminating null character
+code, which shall be added automatically.
+Otherwise, the application shall ensure that the corresponding
+argument is a pointer to a pointer to a
+.BR char .
+.RS 8 
+.P
+If an
+.BR l
+(ell) qualifier is present, the input is a sequence of characters that
+begins in the initial shift state. Each character shall be converted to
+a wide character as if by a call to the
+\fImbrtowc\fR()
+function, with the conversion state described by an
+.BR mbstate_t
+object initialized to zero before the first character is converted.
+If the
+.BR 'm' 
+assignment-allocation character is not specified, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to an array of
+.BR wchar_t
+large enough to accept the sequence and the terminating null wide
+character, which shall be added automatically.
+Otherwise, the application shall ensure that the corresponding
+argument is a pointer to a pointer to a
+.BR wchar_t .
+.RE
+.IP "\fR[\fR" 8
+Matches a non-empty sequence of bytes from a set of expected bytes (the
+.IR scanset ).
+The normal skip over white-space characters shall be suppressed in this
+case. If the
+.BR 'm' 
+assignment-allocation character is not specified, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to the initial byte
+of an array of
+.BR char ,
+.BR "signed char" ,
+or
+.BR "unsigned char"
+large enough to accept the sequence and a terminating null byte, which
+shall be added automatically.
+Otherwise, the application shall ensure that the corresponding
+argument is a pointer to a pointer to a
+.BR char .
+.RS 8 
+.P
+If an
+.BR l
+(ell) qualifier is present, the input is a sequence of characters that
+begins in the initial shift state. Each character in the sequence shall
+be converted to a wide character as if by a call to the
+\fImbrtowc\fR()
+function, with the conversion state described by an
+.BR mbstate_t
+object initialized to zero before the first character is converted.
+If the
+.BR 'm' 
+assignment-allocation character is not specified, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to an array of
+.BR wchar_t
+large enough to accept the sequence and the terminating null wide
+character, which shall be added automatically.
+.br
+Otherwise, the application shall ensure that the corresponding
+argument is a pointer to a pointer to a
+.BR wchar_t .
+.P
+The conversion specification includes all subsequent bytes in the
+.IR format
+string up to and including the matching
+<right-square-bracket>
+(\c
+.BR ']' ).
+The bytes between the square brackets (the
+.IR scanlist )
+comprise the scanset, unless the byte after the
+<left-square-bracket>
+is a
+<circumflex>
+(\c
+.BR '^' ),
+in which case the scanset contains all bytes that do not appear in the
+scanlist between the
+<circumflex>
+and the
+<right-square-bracket>.
+If the conversion specification begins with
+.BR \(dq[\|]\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dq[^]\(dq ,
+the
+<right-square-bracket>
+is included in the scanlist and the next
+<right-square-bracket>
+is the matching
+<right-square-bracket>
+that ends the conversion specification; otherwise, the first
+<right-square-bracket>
+is the one that ends the conversion specification. If a
+.BR '\(mi' 
+is in the scanlist and is not the first character, nor the second where
+the first character is a
+.BR '^' ,
+nor the last character, the behavior is implementation-defined.
+.RE
+.IP "\fRc\fP" 8
+Matches a sequence of bytes of the number specified by the field width
+(1 if no field width is present in the conversion specification). No
+null byte is added. The normal skip over white-space characters
+shall be suppressed in this case. If the
+.BR 'm' 
+assignment-allocation character is not specified, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to the initial byte
+of an array of
+.BR char ,
+.BR "signed char" ,
+or
+.BR "unsigned char"
+large enough to accept the sequence.
+Otherwise, the application shall ensure that the corresponding
+argument is a pointer to a pointer to a
+.BR char .
+.RS 8 
+.P
+If an
+.BR l
+(ell) qualifier is present, the input shall be a sequence of characters
+that begins in the initial shift state. Each character in the sequence
+is converted to a wide character as if by a call to the
+\fImbrtowc\fR()
+function, with the conversion state described by an
+.BR mbstate_t
+object initialized to zero before the first character is converted.
+No null wide character is added. If the
+.BR 'm' 
+assignment-allocation character is not specified, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to an array of
+.BR wchar_t
+large enough to accept the resulting sequence of wide characters.
+Otherwise, the application shall ensure that the corresponding
+argument is a pointer to a pointer to a
+.BR wchar_t .
+.RE
+.IP "\fRp\fP" 8
+Matches an implementation-defined set of sequences, which shall be the
+same as the set of sequences that is produced by the
+.BR %p
+conversion specification of the corresponding
+\fIfprintf\fR()
+functions. The application shall ensure that the corresponding argument
+is a pointer to a pointer to
+.BR void .
+The interpretation of the input item is implementation-defined. If
+the input item is a value converted earlier during the same program
+execution, the pointer that results shall compare equal to that value;
+otherwise, the behavior of the
+.BR %p
+conversion specification is undefined.
+.IP "\fRn\fP" 8
+No input is consumed. The application shall ensure that the
+corresponding argument is a pointer to the integer into which shall be
+written the number of bytes read from the input so far by this call to
+the
+\fIfscanf\fR()
+functions. Execution of a
+.BR %n
+conversion specification shall not increment the assignment count
+returned at the completion of execution of the function. No argument
+shall be converted, but one shall be consumed. If the conversion
+specification includes an assignment-suppressing character or a field
+width, the behavior is undefined.
+.IP "\fRC\fP" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR lc .
+.IP "\fRS\fP" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR ls .
+.IP "\fR%\fR" 8
+Matches a single
+.BR '%' 
+character; no conversion or assignment occurs. The complete conversion
+specification shall be
+.BR %% .
+.P
+If a conversion specification is invalid, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The conversion specifiers
+.BR A ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR G ,
+and
+.BR X
+are also valid and shall be equivalent to
+.BR a ,
+.BR e ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR g ,
+and
+.BR x ,
+respectively.
+.P
+If end-of-file is encountered during input, conversion shall be
+terminated. If end-of-file occurs before any bytes matching the current
+conversion specification (except for
+.BR %n )
+have been read (other than leading white-space characters, where
+permitted), execution of the current conversion specification shall
+terminate with an input failure. Otherwise, unless execution of the
+current conversion specification is terminated with a matching failure,
+execution of the following conversion specification (if any) shall be
+terminated with an input failure.
+.P
+Reaching the end of the string in
+\fIsscanf\fR()
+shall be equivalent to encountering end-of-file for
+\fIfscanf\fR().
+.P
+If conversion terminates on a conflicting input, the offending input is
+left unread in the input. Any trailing white space (including
+<newline>
+characters) shall be left unread unless matched by a conversion
+specification. The success of literal matches and suppressed assignments
+is only directly determinable via the
+.BR %n
+conversion specification.
+.P
+The
+\fIfscanf\fR()
+and
+\fIscanf\fR()
+functions may mark the last data access timestamp of the file
+associated with
+.IR stream
+for update. The last data access timestamp shall be
+marked for update by the first successful execution of
+\fIfgetc\fR(),
+\fIfgets\fR(),
+\fIfread\fR(),
+\fIgetc\fR(),
+\fIgetchar\fR(),
+\fIgetdelim\fR(),
+\fIgetline\fR(),
+\fIgets\fR(),
+\fIfscanf\fR(),
+or
+\fIscanf\fR()
+using
+.IR stream
+that returns data not supplied by a prior call to
+\fIungetc\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the number of
+successfully matched and assigned input items; this number can be zero
+in the event of an early matching failure. If the input ends before the
+first conversion (if any) has completed, and without a matching failure
+having occurred, EOF shall be returned. If an error occurs before the
+first conversion (if any) has completed, and without a matching failure
+having occurred, EOF shall be returned
+and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+If a read error occurs, the error indicator for the stream shall be set.
+.SH ERRORS
+For the conditions under which the
+\fIfscanf\fR()
+functions fail and may fail, refer to
+.IR "\fIfgetc\fR\^(\|)"
+or
+.IR "\fIfgetwc\fR\^(\|)".
+.P
+In addition, the
+\fIfscanf\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EILSEQ
+Input byte sequence does not form a valid character.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient storage space is available.
+.P
+In addition, the
+\fIfscanf\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+There are insufficient arguments.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+The call:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int i, n; float x; char name[50];
+n = scanf("%d%f%s", &i, &x, name);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+with the input line:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+25 54.32E\(mi1 Hamster
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+assigns to
+.IR n
+the value 3, to
+.IR i
+the value 25, to
+.IR x
+the value 5.432, and
+.IR name
+contains the string
+.BR \(dqHamster\(dq .
+.P
+The call:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int i; float x; char name[50];
+(void) scanf("%2d%f%*d %[0123456789]", &i, &x, name);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+with input:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+56789 0123 56a72
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+assigns 56 to
+.IR i ,
+789.0 to
+.IR x ,
+skips 0123, and places the string
+.BR \(dq56\e0\(dq 
+in
+.IR name .
+The next call to
+\fIgetchar\fR()
+shall return the character
+.BR 'a' .
+.SS "Reading Data into an Array"
+.P
+The following call uses
+\fIfscanf\fR()
+to read three floating-point numbers from standard input into the
+.IR input
+array.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+float input[3]; fscanf (stdin, "%f %f %f", input, input+1, input+2);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If the application calling
+\fIfscanf\fR()
+has any objects of type
+.BR wint_t
+or
+.BR wchar_t ,
+it must also include the
+.IR <wchar.h> 
+header to have these objects defined.
+.P
+For functions that allocate memory as if by
+\fImalloc\fR(),
+the application should release such memory when it is no longer
+required by a call to
+\fIfree\fR().
+For
+\fIfscanf\fR(),
+this is memory allocated via use of the
+.BR 'm' 
+assignment-allocation character.
+.SH RATIONALE
+This function is aligned with the ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1999 standard, and in doing so a few
+``obvious'' things were not included. Specifically, the set of
+characters allowed in a scanset is limited to single-byte characters.
+In other similar places, multi-byte characters have been permitted, but
+for alignment with the ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1999 standard, it has not been done here. Applications
+needing this could use the corresponding wide-character functions to
+achieve the desired results.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfprintf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrtod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrtol\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrtoul\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcrtomb\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<langinfo.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fseek.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fseek.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..93eb0b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fseek.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,250 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FSEEK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fseek,
+fseeko
+\(em reposition a file-position indicator in a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int fseek(FILE *\fIstream\fP, long \fIoffset\fP, int \fIwhence\fP);
+int fseeko(FILE *\fIstream\fP, off_t \fIoffset\fP, int \fIwhence\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfseek\fR()
+function shall set the file-position indicator for the stream pointed
+to by
+.IR stream .
+If a read or write error occurs, the error indicator for the stream
+shall be set and
+\fIfseek\fR()
+fails.
+.P
+The new position, measured in bytes from the beginning of the file,
+shall be obtained by adding
+.IR offset
+to the position specified by
+.IR whence .
+The specified point is the beginning of the file for SEEK_SET, the
+current value of the file-position indicator for SEEK_CUR, or
+end-of-file for SEEK_END.
+.P
+If the stream is to be used with wide-character input/output functions,
+the application shall ensure that
+.IR offset
+is either 0 or a value returned by an earlier call to
+\fIftell\fR()
+on the same stream and
+.IR whence
+is SEEK_SET.
+.P
+A successful call to
+\fIfseek\fR()
+shall clear the end-of-file indicator for the stream and undo any
+effects of
+\fIungetc\fR()
+and
+\fIungetwc\fR()
+on the same stream. After an
+\fIfseek\fR()
+call, the next operation on an update stream may be either input or
+output.
+.P
+If the most recent operation, other than
+\fIftell\fR(),
+on a given stream is
+\fIfflush\fR(),
+the file offset in the underlying open file description shall be
+adjusted to reflect the location specified by
+\fIfseek\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIfseek\fR()
+function shall allow the file-position indicator to be set beyond the
+end of existing data in the file. If data is later written at this
+point, subsequent reads of data in the gap shall return bytes with the
+value 0 until data is actually written into the gap.
+.P
+The behavior of
+\fIfseek\fR()
+on devices which are incapable of seeking is implementation-defined.
+The value of the file offset associated with such a device is
+undefined.
+.P
+If the stream is writable and buffered data had not been written to the
+underlying file,
+\fIfseek\fR()
+shall cause the unwritten data to be written to the file and shall mark
+the last data modification and last file status change timestamps
+of the file for update.
+.P
+In a locale with state-dependent encoding, whether
+\fIfseek\fR()
+restores the stream's shift state is implementation-defined.
+.P
+The
+\fIfseeko\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIfseek\fR()
+function except that the
+.IR offset
+argument is of type
+.BR off_t .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIfseek\fR()
+and
+\fIfseeko\fR()
+functions shall return 0 if they succeed.
+.P
+Otherwise, they shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfseek\fR()
+and
+\fIfseeko\fR()
+functions shall fail if,
+either the
+.IR stream
+is unbuffered or the
+.IR stream 's
+buffer needed to be flushed, and the call to
+\fIfseek\fR()
+or
+\fIfseeko\fR()
+causes an underlying
+\fIlseek\fR()
+or
+\fIwrite\fR()
+to be invoked, and:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The O_NONBLOCK flag is set for the file descriptor and the thread
+would be delayed in the write operation.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The file descriptor underlying the stream file is not open for writing
+or the stream's buffer needed to be flushed and the file is not open.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+An attempt was made to write a file that exceeds the maximum file size.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+An attempt was made to write a file that exceeds the file size
+limit of the process.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+The file is a regular file and an attempt was made to write at or
+beyond the offset maximum associated with the corresponding stream.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The write operation was terminated due to the receipt of a signal,
+and no data was transferred.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR whence
+argument is invalid. The resulting file-position indicator would be
+set to a negative value.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+A physical I/O error has occurred, or the process is a member of a
+background process group attempting to perform a
+\fIwrite\fR()
+to its controlling terminal, TOSTOP is set, the calling thread is not
+blocking SIGTTOU, the process is not ignoring SIGTTOU, and the process
+group of the process is orphaned.
+This error may also be returned under implementation-defined conditions.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+There was no free space remaining on the device containing the file.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+For
+\fIfseek\fR(),
+the resulting file offset would be a value which cannot be represented
+correctly in an object of type
+.BR long .
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+For
+\fIfseeko\fR(),
+the resulting file offset would be a value which cannot be represented
+correctly in an object of type
+.BR off_t .
+.TP
+.BR EPIPE
+An attempt was made to write to a pipe or FIFO that is not open for
+reading by any process; a SIGPIPE
+signal shall also be sent to the thread.
+.TP
+.BR ESPIPE
+The file descriptor underlying
+.IR stream
+is associated with a pipe, FIFO, or socket.
+.P
+The
+\fIfseek\fR()
+and
+\fIfseeko\fR()
+functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+A request was made of a nonexistent device, or the request was outside
+the capabilities of the device.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfsetpos\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIftell\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetrlimit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlseek\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrewind\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIulimit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIungetc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fsetpos.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fsetpos.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b9a5f45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fsetpos.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,172 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FSETPOS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fsetpos
+\(em set current file position
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int fsetpos(FILE *\fIstream\fP, const fpos_t *\fIpos\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfsetpos\fR()
+function shall set the file position and state indicators for the
+stream pointed to by
+.IR stream
+according to the value of the object pointed to by
+.IR pos ,
+which the application shall ensure is a value obtained from an earlier
+call to
+\fIfgetpos\fR()
+on the same stream. If a read or write error occurs, the error
+indicator for the stream shall be set and
+\fIfsetpos\fR()
+fails.
+.P
+A successful call to the
+\fIfsetpos\fR()
+function shall clear the end-of-file indicator for the stream and
+undo any effects of
+\fIungetc\fR()
+on the same stream. After an
+\fIfsetpos\fR()
+call, the next operation on an update stream may be either input or
+output.
+.P
+The behavior of
+\fIfsetpos\fR()
+on devices which are incapable of seeking is implementation-defined.
+The value of the file offset associated with such a device is
+undefined.
+.P
+The
+\fIfsetpos\fR()
+function shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIfsetpos\fR()
+function shall return 0 if it succeeds; otherwise, it shall return
+a non-zero value and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfsetpos\fR()
+function shall fail if,
+either the
+.IR stream
+is unbuffered or the
+.IR stream 's
+buffer needed to be flushed, and the call to
+\fIfsetpos\fR()
+causes an underlying
+\fIlseek\fR()
+or
+\fIwrite\fR()
+to be invoked, and:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The O_NONBLOCK flag is set for the file descriptor and the thread
+would be delayed in the write operation.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The file descriptor underlying the stream file is not open for writing
+or the stream's buffer needed to be flushed and the file is not open.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+An attempt was made to write a file that exceeds the maximum file size.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+An attempt was made to write a file that exceeds the file size
+limit of the process.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+The file is a regular file and an attempt was made to write at or
+beyond the offset maximum associated with the corresponding stream.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The write operation was terminated due to the receipt of a signal,
+and no data was transferred.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+A physical I/O error has occurred, or the process is a member of a
+background process group attempting to perform a
+\fIwrite\fR()
+to its controlling terminal, TOSTOP is set, the calling thread is not
+blocking SIGTTOU, the process is not ignoring SIGTTOU, and the process
+group of the process is orphaned.
+This error may also be returned under implementation-defined conditions.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+There was no free space remaining on the device containing the file.
+.TP
+.BR EPIPE
+An attempt was made to write to a pipe or FIFO that is not open for
+reading by any process; a SIGPIPE
+signal shall also be sent to the thread.
+.TP
+.BR ESPIPE
+The file descriptor underlying
+.IR stream
+is associated with a pipe, FIFO, or socket.
+.P
+The
+\fIfsetpos\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+A request was made of a nonexistent device, or the request was outside
+the capabilities of the device.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIftell\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlseek\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrewind\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIungetc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fstat.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fstat.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..abc8c2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fstat.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,192 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FSTAT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fstat
+\(em get file status
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+int fstat(int \fIfildes\fP, struct stat *\fIbuf\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIfstat\fR()
+function shall obtain information about an open file associated with
+the file descriptor
+.IR fildes ,
+and shall write it to the area pointed to by
+.IR buf .
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+references a shared memory object, the implementation shall update in
+the
+.BR stat
+structure pointed to by the
+.IR buf
+argument the
+.IR st_uid ,
+.IR st_gid ,
+.IR st_size ,
+and
+.IR st_mode
+fields, and only the S_IRUSR, S_IWUSR, S_IRGRP, S_IWGRP, S_IROTH, and
+S_IWOTH file permission bits need be valid.
+The implementation may update other fields and flags.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+references a typed memory object, the implementation shall update in
+the
+.BR stat
+structure pointed to by the
+.IR buf
+argument the
+.IR st_uid ,
+.IR st_gid ,
+.IR st_size ,
+and
+.IR st_mode
+fields, and only the S_IRUSR, S_IWUSR, S_IRGRP, S_IWGRP, S_IROTH, and
+S_IWOTH file permission bits need be valid. The implementation
+may update other fields and flags.
+.P
+The
+.IR buf
+argument is a pointer to a
+.BR stat
+structure, as defined in
+.IR <sys/stat.h> ,
+into which information is placed concerning the file.
+.P
+For all other file types defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, the structure members
+.IR st_mode ,
+.IR st_ino ,
+.IR st_dev ,
+.IR st_uid ,
+.IR st_gid ,
+.IR st_atim ,
+.IR st_ctim ,
+and
+.IR st_mtim
+shall have meaningful values and the value of the
+.IR st_nlink
+member shall be set to the number of links to the file.
+.P
+An implementation that provides additional or alternative file access
+control mechanisms may, under implementation-defined conditions,
+cause
+\fIfstat\fR()
+to fail.
+.P
+The
+\fIfstat\fR()
+function shall update any time-related fields (as described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.8" ", " "File Times Update"),
+before writing into the
+.BR stat
+structure.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned. Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be
+returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfstat\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while reading from the file system.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The file size in bytes or the number of blocks allocated to the file or
+the file serial number cannot be represented correctly in the structure
+pointed to by
+.IR buf .
+.P
+The
+\fIfstat\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+One of the values is too large to store into the structure pointed to
+by the
+.IR buf
+argument.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Obtaining File Status Information "
+.P
+The following example shows how to obtain file status information for a
+file named
+.BR /home/cnd/mod1 .
+The structure variable
+.IR buffer
+is defined for the
+.BR stat
+structure. The
+.BR /home/cnd/mod1
+file is opened with read/write privileges and is passed to the open
+file descriptor
+.IR fildes .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+.P
+struct stat buffer;
+int         status;
+\&...
+fildes = open("/home/cnd/mod1", O_RDWR);
+status = fstat(fildes, &buffer);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfstatat\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.8" ", " "File Times Update",
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fstatat.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fstatat.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8b6e2a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fstatat.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,493 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FSTATAT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fstatat,
+lstat,
+stat
+\(em get file status
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+int fstatat(int fd, const char *restrict \fIpath\fP,
+    struct stat *restrict \fIbuf\fP, int \fIflag\fP);
+int lstat(const char *restrict \fIpath\fP, struct stat *restrict \fIbuf\fP);
+int stat(const char *restrict \fIpath\fP, struct stat *restrict \fIbuf\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIstat\fR()
+function shall obtain information about the named file and write it
+to the area pointed to by the
+.IR buf
+argument. The
+.IR path
+argument points to a pathname naming a file. Read, write, or execute
+permission of the named file is not required. An implementation that
+provides additional or alternate file access control mechanisms may,
+under implementation-defined conditions, cause
+\fIstat\fR()
+to fail. In particular, the system may deny the existence of the file
+specified by
+.IR path .
+.P
+If the named file is a symbolic link, the
+\fIstat\fR()
+function shall continue pathname resolution using the contents of the
+symbolic link, and shall return information pertaining to the resulting
+file if the file exists.
+.P
+The
+.IR buf
+argument is a pointer to a
+.BR stat
+structure, as defined in the
+.IR <sys/stat.h> 
+header, into which information is placed concerning the file.
+.P
+The
+\fIstat\fR()
+function shall update any time-related fields (as described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.8" ", " "File Times Update"),
+before writing into the
+.BR stat
+structure.
+.P
+If the named file is a shared memory object, the implementation
+shall update in the
+.BR stat
+structure pointed to by the
+.IR buf
+argument the
+.IR st_uid ,
+.IR st_gid ,
+.IR st_size ,
+and
+.IR st_mode
+fields, and only the S_IRUSR, S_IWUSR, S_IRGRP, S_IWGRP, S_IROTH, and
+S_IWOTH file permission bits need be valid. The implementation may
+update other fields and flags.
+.P
+If the named file is a typed memory object, the implementation
+shall update in the
+.BR stat
+structure pointed to by the
+.IR buf
+argument the
+.IR st_uid ,
+.IR st_gid ,
+.IR st_size ,
+and
+.IR st_mode
+fields, and only the S_IRUSR, S_IWUSR, S_IRGRP, S_IWGRP, S_IROTH, and
+S_IWOTH file permission bits need be valid. The implementation may
+update other fields and flags.
+.P
+For all other file types defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, the structure members
+.IR st_mode ,
+.IR st_ino ,
+.IR st_dev ,
+.IR st_uid ,
+.IR st_gid ,
+.IR st_atim ,
+.IR st_ctim ,
+and
+.IR st_mtim
+shall have meaningful values and the value of the member
+.IR st_nlink
+shall be set to the number of links to the file.
+.P
+The
+\fIlstat\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIstat\fR(),
+except when
+.IR path
+refers to a symbolic link. In that case
+\fIlstat\fR()
+shall return information about the link, while
+\fIstat\fR()
+shall return information about the file the link references.
+.P
+For symbolic links, the
+.IR st_mode
+member shall contain meaningful information when used with the file
+type macros. The file mode bits in
+.IR st_mode
+are unspecified. The structure members
+.IR st_ino ,
+.IR st_dev ,
+.IR st_uid ,
+.IR st_gid ,
+.IR st_atim ,
+.IR st_ctim ,
+and
+.IR st_mtim
+shall have meaningful values and the value of the
+.IR st_nlink
+member shall be set to the number of (hard) links to the symbolic link.
+The value of the
+.IR st_size
+member shall be set to the length of the pathname contained in the
+symbolic link not including any terminating null byte.
+.P
+The
+\fIfstatat\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIstat\fR()
+or
+\fIlstat\fR()
+function, depending on the value of
+.IR flag
+(see below), except in the case where
+.IR path
+specifies a relative path. In this case the status shall be retrieved
+from a file relative to the directory associated with the file descriptor
+.IR fd
+instead of the current working directory. If the file descriptor was
+opened without O_SEARCH, the function shall check whether directory
+searches are permitted using the current permissions of the directory
+underlying the file descriptor. If the file descriptor was opened with
+O_SEARCH, the function shall not perform the check.
+.P
+Values for
+.IR flag
+are constructed by a bitwise-inclusive OR of flags from the following
+list, defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> :
+.IP AT_SYMLINK_NOFOLLOW 6
+.br
+If
+.IR path
+names a symbolic link, the status of the symbolic link is returned.
+.P
+If
+\fIfstatat\fR()
+is passed the special value AT_FDCWD in the
+.IR fd
+parameter, the current working directory shall be used and the behavior
+shall be identical to a call to
+\fIstat\fR()
+or
+\fIlstat\fR()
+respectively, depending on whether or not the AT_SYMLINK_NOFOLLOW bit
+is set in
+.IR flag .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return 0.
+Otherwise, these functions shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied for a component of the path prefix.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An error occurred while reading from the file system.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR path
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory, or the
+.IR path
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file
+that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The file size in bytes or the number of blocks allocated to the file or
+the file serial number cannot be represented correctly in the structure
+pointed to by
+.IR buf .
+.P
+The
+\fIfstatat\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+.IR fd
+was not opened with O_SEARCH and the permissions of the directory
+underlying
+.IR fd
+do not permit directory searches.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR path
+argument does not specify an absolute path and the
+.IR fd
+argument is neither AT_FDCWD nor a valid file descriptor open
+for reading or searching.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+The
+.IR path
+argument is not an absolute path and
+.IR fd
+is a file descriptor associated with a non-directory file.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+A value to be stored would overflow one of the members of the
+.BR stat
+structure.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIfstatat\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR flag
+argument is not valid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Obtaining File Status Information"
+.P
+The following example shows how to obtain file status information for a
+file named
+.BR /home/cnd/mod1 .
+The structure variable
+.IR buffer
+is defined for the
+.BR stat
+structure.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+.P
+struct stat buffer;
+int         status;
+\&...
+status = stat("/home/cnd/mod1", &buffer);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Getting Directory Information"
+.P
+The following example fragment gets status information for each entry
+in a directory. The call to the
+\fIstat\fR()
+function stores file information in the
+.BR stat
+structure pointed to by
+.IR statbuf .
+The lines that follow the
+\fIstat\fR()
+call format the fields in the
+.BR stat
+structure for presentation to the user of the program.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <dirent.h>
+#include <pwd.h>
+#include <grp.h>
+#include <time.h>
+#include <locale.h>
+#include <langinfo.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+.P
+struct dirent  *dp;
+struct stat     statbuf;
+struct passwd  *pwd;
+struct group   *grp;
+struct tm      *tm;
+char            datestring[256];
+\&...
+/* Loop through directory entries. */
+while ((dp = readdir(dir)) != NULL) {
+.P
+    /* Get entry's information. */
+    if (stat(dp->d_name, &statbuf) == -1)
+        continue;
+.P
+    /* Print out type, permissions, and number of links. */
+    printf("%10.10s", sperm (statbuf.st_mode));
+    printf("%4d", statbuf.st_nlink);
+.P
+    /* Print out owner's name if it is found using getpwuid(). */
+    if ((pwd = getpwuid(statbuf.st_uid)) != NULL)
+        printf(" %-8.8s", pwd->pw_name);
+    else
+        printf(" %-8d", statbuf.st_uid);
+.P
+    /* Print out group name if it is found using getgrgid(). */
+    if ((grp = getgrgid(statbuf.st_gid)) != NULL)
+        printf(" %-8.8s", grp->gr_name);
+    else
+        printf(" %-8d", statbuf.st_gid);
+.P
+    /* Print size of file. */
+    printf(" %9jd", (intmax_t)statbuf.st_size);
+.P
+    tm = localtime(&statbuf.st_mtime);
+.P
+    /* Get localized date string. */
+    strftime(datestring, sizeof(datestring), nl_langinfo(D_T_FMT), tm);
+.P
+    printf(" %s %s\en", datestring, dp->d_name);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Obtaining Symbolic Link Status Information"
+.P
+The following example shows how to obtain status information for a
+symbolic link named
+.BR /modules/pass1 .
+The structure variable
+.IR buffer
+is defined for the
+.BR stat
+structure. If the
+.IR path
+argument specified the pathname for the file pointed to by the symbolic
+link (\c
+.BR /home/cnd/mod1 ),
+the results of calling the function would be the same as those returned
+by a call to the
+\fIstat\fR()
+function.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+struct stat buffer;
+int status;
+\&...
+status = lstat("/modules/pass1", &buffer);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The intent of the paragraph describing ``additional or alternate file
+access control mechanisms'' is to allow a secure implementation where a
+process
+with a label that does not dominate the file's label cannot perform a
+\fIstat\fR()
+function. This is not related to read permission; a process with a
+label that dominates the file's label does not need read permission.
+An implementation that supports write-up operations could fail
+\fIfstat\fR()
+function calls even though it has a valid file descriptor open for
+writing.
+.P
+The
+\fIlstat\fR()
+function is not required to update the time-related fields if the named
+file is not a symbolic link. While the
+.IR st_uid ,
+.IR st_gid ,
+.IR st_atim ,
+.IR st_mtim ,
+and
+.IR st_ctim
+members of the
+.BR stat
+structure may apply to a symbolic link, they are not required to do so.
+No functions in POSIX.1\(hy2008 are required to maintain any of these time
+fields.
+.P
+The purpose of the
+\fIfstatat\fR()
+function is to obtain the status of files in directories other than the
+current working directory without exposure to race conditions. Any part
+of the path of a file could be changed in parallel to a call to
+\fIstat\fR(),
+resulting in unspecified behavior. By opening a file descriptor for the
+target directory and using the
+\fIfstatat\fR()
+function it can be guaranteed that the file for which status is returned
+is located relative to the desired directory.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIaccess\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfdopendir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfstat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImknod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIreadlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsymlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.8" ", " "File Times Update",
+.IR "\fB<fcntl.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fstatvfs.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fstatvfs.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..73184a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fstatvfs.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,233 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FSTATVFS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fstatvfs,
+statvfs
+\(em get file system information
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/statvfs.h>
+.P
+int fstatvfs(int \fIfildes\fP, struct statvfs *\fIbuf\fP);
+int statvfs(const char *restrict \fIpath\fP, struct statvfs *restrict \fIbuf\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIfstatvfs\fR()
+function shall obtain information about the file system containing
+the file referenced by
+.IR fildes .
+.P
+The
+\fIstatvfs\fR()
+function shall obtain information about the file system
+containing the file named by
+.IR path .
+.P
+For both functions, the
+.IR buf
+argument is a pointer to a
+.BR statvfs
+structure that shall be filled. Read, write, or execute permission of
+the named file is not required.
+.P
+The following flags can be returned in the
+.IR f_flag
+member:
+.IP ST_RDONLY 12
+Read-only file system.
+.IP ST_NOSUID 12
+Setuid/setgid bits ignored by
+.IR exec .
+.P
+It is unspecified whether all members of the
+.BR statvfs
+structure have meaningful values on all file systems.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIstatvfs\fR()
+shall return 0. Otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfstatvfs\fR()
+and
+\fIstatvfs\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while reading the file system.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was caught during execution of the function.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+One of the values to be returned cannot be represented correctly in
+the structure pointed to by
+.IR buf .
+.P
+The
+\fIfstatvfs\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not an open file descriptor.
+.P
+The
+\fIstatvfs\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied on a component of the path prefix.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR path
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory, or the
+.IR path
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file
+that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIstatvfs\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Obtaining File System Information Using fstatvfs(\|)"
+.P
+The following example shows how to obtain file system information for
+the file system upon which the file named
+.BR /home/cnd/mod1
+resides, using the
+\fIfstatvfs\fR()
+function. The
+.BR /home/cnd/mod1
+file is opened with read/write privileges and the open file descriptor
+is passed to the
+\fIfstatvfs\fR()
+function.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/statvfs.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+.P
+struct statvfs buffer;
+int            status;
+\&...
+fildes = open("/home/cnd/mod1", O_RDWR);
+status  = fstatvfs(fildes, &buffer);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Obtaining File System Information Using statvfs(\|)"
+.P
+The following example shows how to obtain file system information for
+the file system upon which the file named
+.BR /home/cnd/mod1
+resides, using the
+\fIstatvfs\fR()
+function.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/statvfs.h>
+.P
+struct statvfs buffer;
+int            status;
+\&...
+status = statvfs("/home/cnd/mod1", &buffer);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIchown\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcreat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImknod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpipe\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIutime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_statvfs.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fsync.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fsync.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..10f3736
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fsync.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FSYNC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fsync
+\(em synchronize changes to a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int fsync(int \fIfildes\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIfsync\fR()
+function shall request that all data for the open file descriptor
+named by
+.IR fildes
+is to be transferred to the storage device associated with the file
+described by
+.IR fildes .
+The nature of the transfer is implementation-defined. The
+\fIfsync\fR()
+function shall not return until the system has completed that action
+or until an error is detected.
+.P
+If _POSIX_SYNCHRONIZED_IO is defined, the
+\fIfsync\fR()
+function shall force all currently queued I/O operations associated
+with the file indicated by file descriptor
+.IR fildes
+to the synchronized I/O completion state. All I/O operations shall be
+completed as defined for synchronized I/O file integrity completion.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIfsync\fR()
+shall return 0. Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error. If the
+\fIfsync\fR()
+function fails, outstanding I/O operations are not guaranteed to have
+been completed.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfsync\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fIfsync\fR()
+function was interrupted by a signal.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument does not refer to a file on which this operation is possible.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to the file system.
+.P
+In the event that any of the queued I/O operations fail,
+\fIfsync\fR()
+shall return the error conditions defined for
+\fIread\fR()
+and
+\fIwrite\fR().
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIfsync\fR()
+function should be used by programs which require modifications to a
+file to be completed before continuing; for example, a program which
+contains a simple transaction facility might use it to ensure that all
+modifications to a file or files caused by a transaction are recorded.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIfsync\fR()
+function is intended to force a physical write of data from the buffer
+cache, and to assure that after a system crash or other failure that
+all data up to the time of the
+\fIfsync\fR()
+call is recorded on the disk. Since the concepts of ``buffer cache'',
+``system crash'', ``physical write'', and ``non-volatile storage''
+are not defined here, the wording has to be more abstract.
+.P
+If _POSIX_SYNCHRONIZED_IO is not defined, the wording relies heavily on
+the conformance document to tell the user what can be expected from the
+system. It is explicitly intended that a null implementation is
+permitted. This could be valid in the case where the system cannot
+assure non-volatile storage under any circumstances or when the system
+is highly fault-tolerant and the functionality is not required. In the
+middle ground between these extremes,
+\fIfsync\fR()
+might or might not actually cause data to be written where it is safe
+from a power failure. The conformance document should identify at least
+that one configuration exists (and how to obtain that configuration)
+where this can be assured for at least some files that the user can
+select to use for critical data. It is not intended that an exhaustive
+list is required, but rather sufficient information is provided so that
+if critical data needs to be saved, the user can determine how the
+system is to be configured to allow the data to be written to
+non-volatile storage.
+.P
+It is reasonable to assert that the key aspects of
+\fIfsync\fR()
+are unreasonable to test in a test suite. That does not make the
+function any less valuable, just more difficult to test. A formal
+conformance test should probably force a system crash (power shutdown)
+during the test for this condition, but it needs to be done in such a
+way that automated testing does not require this to be done except when
+a formal record of the results is being made. It would also not be
+unreasonable to omit testing for
+\fIfsync\fR(),
+allowing it to be treated as a quality-of-implementation issue.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsync\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ftell.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ftell.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fed666a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ftell.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FTELL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ftell,
+ftello
+\(em return a file offset in a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+long ftell(FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+off_t ftello(FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIftell\fR()
+function shall obtain the current value of the file-position indicator
+for the stream pointed to by
+.IR stream .
+.P
+The
+\fIftell\fR()
+function shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.P
+The
+\fIftello\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIftell\fR(),
+except that the return value is of type
+.BR off_t
+and the
+\fIftello\fR()
+function may change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIftell\fR()
+and
+\fIftello\fR()
+shall return the current value of the file-position indicator for the
+stream measured in bytes from the beginning of the file.
+.P
+Otherwise,
+\fIftell\fR()
+and
+\fIftello\fR()
+shall return \(mi1, and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIftell\fR()
+and
+\fIftello\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The file descriptor underlying
+.IR stream
+is not an open file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+For
+\fIftell\fR(),
+the current file offset cannot be represented correctly in an object of
+type
+.BR long .
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+For
+\fIftello\fR(),
+the current file offset cannot be represented correctly in an object of
+type
+.BR off_t .
+.TP
+.BR ESPIPE
+The file descriptor underlying
+.IR stream
+is associated with a pipe, FIFO, or socket.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfgetpos\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfseek\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlseek\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ftok.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ftok.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7b30e2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ftok.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,193 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FTOK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ftok
+\(em generate an IPC key
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/ipc.h>
+.P
+key_t ftok(const char *\fIpath\fP, int \fIid\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIftok\fR()
+function shall return a key based on
+.IR path
+and
+.IR id
+that is usable in subsequent calls to
+\fImsgget\fR(),
+\fIsemget\fR(),
+and
+\fIshmget\fR().
+The application shall ensure that the
+.IR path
+argument is the pathname of an existing file that the process is
+able to
+\fIstat\fR(),
+with the exception that if
+\fIstat\fR()
+would fail with
+.BR [EOVERFLOW] 
+due to file size,
+\fIftok\fR()
+shall still succeed.
+.P
+The
+\fIftok\fR()
+function shall return the same key value for all paths that name the
+same file, when called with the same
+.IR id
+value, and should return different key values when called with different
+.IR id
+values or with paths that name different files existing on the same
+file system at the same time. It is unspecified whether
+\fIftok\fR()
+shall return the same key value when called again after the file named
+by
+.IR path
+is removed and recreated with the same name.
+.P
+Only the low-order 8-bits of
+.IR id
+are significant. The behavior of
+\fIftok\fR()
+is unspecified if these bits are 0.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIftok\fR()
+shall return a key. Otherwise,
+\fIftok\fR()
+shall return (\fBkey_t\fP)\(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIftok\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied for a component of the path prefix.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An error occurred while reading from the file system.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR path
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory, or the
+.IR path
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file
+that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.P
+The
+\fIftok\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Getting an IPC Key"
+.P
+The following example gets a key based on the pathname
+.BR /tmp
+and the ID value
+.IR a .
+It also assigns the value of the resulting key to the
+.IR semkey
+variable so that it will be available to a later call to
+\fIsemget\fR(),
+\fImsgget\fR(),
+or
+\fIshmget\fR().
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/ipc.h>
+\&...
+key_t semkey;
+.P
+if ((semkey = ftok("/tmp", 'a')) == (key_t) -1) {
+    perror("IPC error: ftok"); exit(1);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+For maximum portability,
+.IR id
+should be a single-byte character.
+.P
+Applications should not assume that the resulting key value is unique.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+Future versions of this standard may add new interfaces to provide
+unique keys.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImsgget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmget\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_ipc.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ftruncate.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ftruncate.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e24175a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ftruncate.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FTRUNCATE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ftruncate
+\(em truncate a file to a specified length
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int ftruncate(int \fIfildes\fP, off_t \fIlength\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+If
+.IR fildes
+is not a valid file descriptor open for writing, the
+\fIftruncate\fR()
+function shall fail.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a regular file, the
+\fIftruncate\fR()
+function shall cause the size of the file to be truncated to
+.IR length .
+If the size of the file previously exceeded
+.IR length ,
+the extra data shall no longer be available to reads on the file. If
+the file previously was smaller than this size,
+\fIftruncate\fR()
+shall increase the size of the file. If the file size is increased,
+the extended area shall appear as if it were zero-filled. The value of
+the seek pointer shall not be modified by a call to
+\fIftruncate\fR().
+.P
+Upon successful completion, if
+.IR fildes
+refers to a regular file,
+\fIftruncate\fR()
+shall mark for update the last data modification and last file
+status change timestamps of the file and the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits
+of the file mode may be cleared. If the
+\fIftruncate\fR()
+function is unsuccessful, the file is unaffected.
+.P
+If the request would cause the file size to exceed the soft file size
+limit for the process, the request shall fail and the implementation
+shall generate the SIGXFSZ signal for the thread.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a directory,
+\fIftruncate\fR()
+shall fail.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to any other file type, except a shared memory object, the
+result is unspecified.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a shared memory object,
+\fIftruncate\fR()
+shall set the size of the shared memory object to
+.IR length .
+.P
+If the effect of
+\fIftruncate\fR()
+is to decrease the size of a memory mapped file
+or a shared memory object
+and whole pages beyond the new end were previously mapped, then the
+whole pages beyond the new end shall be discarded.
+.P
+References to discarded pages shall result in the generation of a
+SIGBUS signal.
+.P
+If the effect of
+\fIftruncate\fR()
+is to increase the size of a memory object, it is unspecified
+whether the contents of any mapped pages between the old end-of-file
+and the new are flushed to the underlying object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIftruncate\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIftruncate\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was caught during execution.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR length
+argument was less than 0.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG " or " EINVAL
+.br
+The
+.IR length
+argument was greater than the maximum file size.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+The file is a regular file and
+.IR length
+is greater than the offset maximum established in the open file
+description associated with
+.IR fildes .
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to a file system.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF " or " EINVAL
+.br
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a file descriptor open for writing.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItruncate\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ftrylockfile.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ftrylockfile.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5fa236a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ftrylockfile.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FTRYLOCKFILE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ftrylockfile
+\(em stdio locking functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int ftrylockfile(FILE *\fIfile\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIflockfile\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ftw.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ftw.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2befe8f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ftw.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,284 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FTW "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ftw
+\(em traverse (walk) a file tree
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ftw.h>
+.P
+int ftw(const char *\fIpath\fP, int (*\fIfn\fP)(const char *,
+    const struct stat *\fIptr\fP, int \fIflag\fP), int \fIndirs\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIftw\fR()
+function shall recursively descend the directory hierarchy rooted in
+.IR path .
+For each object in the hierarchy,
+\fIftw\fR()
+shall call the function pointed to by
+.IR fn ,
+passing it a pointer to a null-terminated character string containing
+the name of the object, a pointer to a
+.BR stat
+structure containing information about the object, filled in as if
+\fIstat\fR()
+or
+\fIlstat\fR()
+had been called to retrieve the information. Possible values of the
+integer, defined in the
+.IR <ftw.h> 
+header, are:
+.IP FTW_D 10
+For a directory.
+.IP FTW_DNR 10
+For a directory that cannot be read.
+.IP FTW_F 10
+For a non-directory file.
+.IP FTW_SL 10
+For a symbolic link (but see also FTW_NS below).
+.IP FTW_NS 10
+For an object other than a symbolic link on which
+\fIstat\fR()
+could not successfully be executed. If the object is a symbolic link
+and
+\fIstat\fR()
+failed, it is unspecified whether
+\fIftw\fR()
+passes FTW_SL or FTW_NS to the user-supplied function.
+.P
+If the integer is FTW_DNR, descendants of that directory shall not be
+processed. If the integer is FTW_NS, the
+.BR stat
+structure contains undefined values. An example of an object that
+would cause FTW_NS to be passed to the function pointed to by
+.IR fn
+would be a file in a directory with read but without execute (search)
+permission.
+.P
+The
+\fIftw\fR()
+function shall visit a directory before visiting any of its
+descendants.
+.P
+The
+\fIftw\fR()
+function shall use at most one file descriptor for each level in
+the tree.
+.P
+The argument
+.IR ndirs
+should be in the range [1,\c
+{OPEN_MAX}].
+.P
+The tree traversal shall continue until either the tree is exhausted,
+an invocation of
+.IR fn
+returns a non-zero value, or some error, other than
+.BR [EACCES] ,
+is detected within
+\fIftw\fR().
+.P
+The
+.IR ndirs
+argument shall specify the maximum number of directory streams or file
+descriptors or both available for use by
+\fIftw\fR()
+while traversing the tree. When
+\fIftw\fR()
+returns it shall close any directory streams and file descriptors it
+uses not counting any opened by the application-supplied
+.IR fn
+function.
+.P
+The results are unspecified if the application-supplied
+.IR fn
+function does not preserve the current working directory.
+.P
+The
+\fIftw\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the tree is exhausted,
+\fIftw\fR()
+shall return 0. If the function pointed to by
+.IR fn
+returns a non-zero value,
+\fIftw\fR()
+shall stop its tree traversal and return whatever value was returned
+by the function pointed to by
+.IR fn .
+If
+\fIftw\fR()
+detects an error, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.P
+If
+\fIftw\fR()
+encounters an error other than
+.BR [EACCES] 
+(see FTW_DNR and FTW_NS above), it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error. The external variable
+.IR errno
+may contain any error value that is possible when a directory is opened
+or when one of the
+.IR stat
+functions is executed on a directory or file.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIftw\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied for any component of
+.IR path
+or read permission is denied for
+.IR path .
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR path
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of
+.IR path
+names an existing file that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link
+to a directory.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+A field in the
+.BR stat
+structure cannot be represented correctly in the current programming
+environment for one or more files found in the file hierarchy.
+.P
+The
+\fIftw\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR ndirs
+argument is invalid.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.P
+In addition, if the function pointed to by
+.IR fn
+encounters system errors,
+.IR errno
+may be set accordingly.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Walking a Directory Structure"
+.P
+The following example walks the current directory structure, calling
+the
+.IR fn
+function for every directory entry, using at most 10 file descriptors:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <ftw.h>
+\&...
+if (ftw(".", fn, 10) != 0) {
+    perror("ftw"); exit(2);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIftw\fR()
+function may allocate dynamic storage during its operation. If
+\fIftw\fR()
+is forcibly terminated, such as by
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+or
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR()
+being executed by the function pointed to by
+.IR fn
+or an interrupt routine,
+\fIftw\fR()
+does not have a chance to free that storage, so it remains
+permanently allocated. A safe way to handle interrupts is to store the
+fact that an interrupt has occurred, and arrange to have the function
+pointed to by
+.IR fn
+return a non-zero value at its next invocation.
+.P
+Applications should use the
+\fInftw\fR()
+function instead of the obsolescent
+\fIftw\fR()
+function.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIftw\fR()
+function may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfdopendir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfstatat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlongjmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fInftw\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsiglongjmp\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<ftw.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/funlockfile.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/funlockfile.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ed048b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/funlockfile.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FUNLOCKFILE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+funlockfile
+\(em stdio locking functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+void funlockfile(FILE *\fIfile\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIflockfile\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/futimens.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/futimens.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e270c19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/futimens.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,383 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FUTIMENS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+futimens, utimensat, utimes
+\(em set file access and modification times
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+int futimens(int \fIfd\fP, const struct timespec \fItimes\fP[2]);
+int utimensat(int \fIfd\fP, const char *\fIpath\fP, const struct timespec \fItimes\fP[2],
+    int \fIflag\fP);
+.P
+#include <sys/time.h>
+.P
+int utimes(const char *\fIpath\fP, const struct timeval \fItimes\fP[2]);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIfutimens\fR()
+and
+\fIutimensat\fR()
+functions shall set the access and modification times of a file
+to the values of the
+.IR times
+argument. The
+\fIfutimens\fR()
+function changes the times of the file associated with the file
+descriptor
+.IR fd .
+The
+\fIutimensat\fR()
+function changes the times of the file pointed to by the
+.IR path
+argument, relative to the directory associated with the file
+descriptor
+.IR fd .
+Both functions allow time specifications accurate to the nanosecond.
+.P
+For
+\fIfutimens\fR()
+and
+\fIutimensat\fR(),
+the
+.IR times
+argument is an array of two
+.BR timespec
+structures. The first array member represents the date and time of
+last access, and the second member represents the date and time of last
+modification. The times in the
+.BR timespec
+structure are measured in seconds and nanoseconds since the Epoch. The
+file's relevant timestamp shall be set to the greatest value supported
+by the file system that is not greater than the specified time.
+.P
+If the
+.IR tv_nsec
+field of a
+.BR timespec
+structure has the special value UTIME_NOW, the file's relevant timestamp
+shall be set to the greatest value supported by the file system that is
+not greater than the current time. If the
+.IR tv_nsec
+field has the special value UTIME_OMIT, the file's relevant timestamp
+shall not be changed. In either case, the
+.IR tv_sec
+field shall be ignored.
+.P
+If the
+.IR times
+argument is a null pointer, both the access and modification timestamps
+shall be set to the greatest value supported by the file system that is
+not greater than the current time. If
+\fIutimensat\fR()
+is passed a relative path in the
+.IR path
+argument, the file to be used shall be relative to the directory
+associated with the file descriptor
+.IR fd
+instead of the current working directory. If the file descriptor was
+opened without O_SEARCH, the function shall check whether directory
+searches are permitted using the current permissions of the directory
+underlying the file descriptor. If the file descriptor was opened with
+O_SEARCH, the function shall not perform the check.
+.P
+If
+\fIutimensat\fR()
+is passed the special value AT_FDCWD in the
+.IR fd
+parameter, the current working directory shall be used.
+.P
+Only a process with the effective user ID equal to the user ID of the
+file, or with write access to the file, or with appropriate privileges
+may use
+\fIfutimens\fR()
+or
+\fIutimensat\fR()
+with a null pointer as the
+.IR times
+argument or with both
+.IR tv_nsec
+fields set to the special value UTIME_NOW. Only a process with the
+effective user ID equal to the user ID of the file or with appropriate
+privileges may use
+\fIfutimens\fR()
+or
+\fIutimensat\fR()
+with a non-null
+.IR times
+argument that does not have both
+.IR tv_nsec
+fields set to UTIME_NOW and does not have both
+.IR tv_nsec
+fields set to UTIME_OMIT. If both
+.IR tv_nsec
+fields are set to UTIME_OMIT, no ownership or permissions check shall be
+performed for the file, but other error conditions may still be detected
+(including
+.BR [EACCES] 
+errors related to the path prefix).
+.P
+Values for the
+.IR flag
+argument of
+\fIutimensat\fR()
+are constructed by a bitwise-inclusive OR of flags from the following
+list, defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> :
+.IP AT_SYMLINK_NOFOLLOW 6
+.br
+If
+.IR path
+names a symbolic link, then the access and modification times
+of the symbolic link are changed.
+.br
+.P
+Upon completion,
+\fIfutimens\fR()
+and
+\fIutimensat\fR()
+shall mark the last file status change timestamp for update.
+.P
+The
+\fIutimes\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIutimensat\fR()
+function with the special value AT_FDCWD as the
+.IR fd
+argument and the
+.IR flag
+argument set to zero, except that the
+.IR times
+argument is a
+.BR timeval
+structure rather than a
+.BR timespec
+structure, and accuracy is only to the microsecond, not nanosecond,
+and rounding towards the nearest second may occur.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return 0.
+Otherwise, these functions shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error. If \(mi1 is returned, the file times shall
+not be affected.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+The
+.IR times
+argument is a null pointer, or both
+.IR tv_nsec
+values are UTIME_NOW, and the effective user ID of the process
+does not match the owner of the file and write access is denied.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+Either of the
+.IR times
+argument structures specified a
+.IR tv_nsec
+value that was neither UTIME_NOW nor UTIME_OMIT, and was a value less
+than zero or greater than or equal to 1\|000 million.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+A new file timestamp would be a value whose
+.IR tv_sec
+component is not a value supported by the file system.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The
+.IR times
+argument is not a null pointer, does not have both
+.IR tv_nsec
+fields set to UTIME_NOW, does not have both
+.IR tv_nsec
+fields set to UTIME_OMIT, the calling process' effective user ID does
+not match the owner of the file, and the calling process does not have
+appropriate privileges.
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+The file system containing the file is read-only.
+.P
+The
+\fIfutimens\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fd
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.P
+The
+\fIutimensat\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+.IR fd
+was not opened with O_SEARCH and the permissions of the directory
+underlying
+.IR fd
+do not permit directory searches.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR path
+argument does not specify an absolute path and the
+.IR fd
+argument is neither AT_FDCWD nor a valid file descriptor open
+for reading or searching.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+The
+.IR path
+argument is not an absolute path and
+.IR fd
+is a file descriptor associated with a non-directory file.
+.P
+The
+\fIutimensat\fR()
+and
+\fIutimes\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied by a component of the path prefix.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR path
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory, or the
+.IR path
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file
+that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.P
+The
+\fIutimensat\fR()
+and
+\fIutimes\fR()
+functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.P
+The
+\fIutimensat\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR flag
+argument is not valid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The purpose of the
+\fIutimensat\fR()
+function is to set the access and modification time of files in
+directories other than the current working directory without exposure
+to race conditions. Any part of the path of a file could be changed in
+parallel to a call to
+\fIutimes\fR(),
+resulting in unspecified behavior. By opening a file descriptor for
+the target directory and using the
+\fIutimensat\fR()
+function it can be guaranteed that the changed file is located relative
+to the desired directory.
+.P
+The standard developers considered including a special case for the
+permissions required by
+\fIutimensat\fR()
+when one
+.IR tv_nsec
+field is UTIME_NOW and the other is UTIME_OMIT. One possibility would
+be to include this case in with the cases where
+.IR times
+is a null pointer or both fields are UTIME_NOW, where the call is allowed
+if the process has write permission for the file. However, associating
+write permission with an update to just the last data access timestamp
+(which is normally updated by
+\fIread\fR())
+did not seem appropriate. The other possibility would be to specify that
+this one case is allowed if the process has read permission, but this
+was felt to be too great a departure from the
+\fIutime\fR()
+and
+\fIutimes\fR()
+functions on which
+\fIutimensat\fR()
+is based. If an application needs to set the last data access timestamp
+to the current time for a file on which it has read permission but is not
+the owner, it can do so by opening the file, reading one or more bytes
+(or reading a directory entry, if the file is a directory), and then
+closing it.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIutime\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fcntl.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fwide.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fwide.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b1527aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fwide.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FWIDE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fwide
+\(em set stream orientation
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int fwide(FILE *\fIstream\fP, int \fImode\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfwide\fR()
+function shall determine the orientation of the stream pointed to by
+.IR stream .
+If
+.IR mode
+is greater than zero, the function first attempts to make the stream
+wide-oriented. If
+.IR mode
+is less than zero, the function first attempts to make the stream
+byte-oriented. Otherwise,
+.IR mode
+is zero and the function does not alter the orientation of the stream.
+.P
+If the orientation of the stream has already been determined,
+\fIfwide\fR()
+shall not change it.
+.P
+The
+\fIfwide\fR()
+function shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.P
+Since no return value is reserved to indicate an error, an
+application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0, then call
+\fIfwide\fR(),
+then check
+.IR errno ,
+and if it is non-zero, assume an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIfwide\fR()
+function shall return a value greater than zero if, after the call, the
+stream has wide-orientation, a value less than zero if the stream has
+byte-orientation, or zero if the stream has no orientation.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIfwide\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR stream
+argument is not a valid stream.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+A call to
+\fIfwide\fR()
+with
+.IR mode
+set to zero can be used to determine the current orientation of a
+stream.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fwprintf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fwprintf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fb0dc7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fwprintf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,1040 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FWPRINTF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fwprintf,
+swprintf,
+wprintf
+\(em print formatted wide-character output
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int fwprintf(FILE *restrict \fIstream\fP, const wchar_t *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+int swprintf(wchar_t *restrict \fIws\fP, size_t \fIn\fP,
+    const wchar_t *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+int wprintf(const wchar_t *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfwprintf\fR()
+function shall place output on the named output
+.IR stream .
+The
+\fIwprintf\fR()
+function shall place output on the standard output stream
+.IR stdout .
+The
+\fIswprintf\fR()
+function shall place output followed by the null wide character in
+consecutive wide characters starting at *\fIws\fP; no more than
+.IR n
+wide characters shall be written, including a terminating null wide
+character, which is always added (unless
+.IR n
+is zero).
+.P
+Each of these functions shall convert, format, and print its arguments
+under control of the
+.IR format
+wide-character string. The
+.IR format
+is composed of zero or more directives:
+.IR "ordinary wide-characters" ,
+which are simply copied to the output stream, and
+.IR "conversion specifications" ,
+each of which results in the fetching of zero or more arguments. The
+results are undefined if there are insufficient arguments for the
+.IR format .
+If the
+.IR format
+is exhausted while arguments remain, the excess arguments are evaluated
+but are otherwise ignored.
+.P
+Conversions can be applied to the
+.IR n th
+argument after the
+.IR format
+in the argument list, rather than to the next unused argument. In this
+case, the conversion specifier wide character
+.BR %
+(see below) is replaced by the
+sequence
+.BR \(dq%n$\(dq ,
+where
+.IR n
+is a decimal integer in the range [1,{NL_ARGMAX}],
+giving the position of the argument in the argument list. This feature
+provides for the definition of
+.IR format
+wide-character strings that select arguments in an order appropriate to
+specific languages (see the EXAMPLES section).
+.P
+The
+.IR format
+can contain either numbered argument specifications (that is,
+\fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR and \fR"*\fIm\fR$"\fR), or unnumbered argument
+conversion specifications (that is,
+.BR %
+and
+.BR * ),
+but not both. The only exception to this is that
+.BR %%
+can be mixed with the \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR form. The results of mixing
+numbered and unnumbered argument specifications in a
+.IR format
+wide-character string are undefined. When numbered argument
+specifications are used, specifying the
+.IR N th
+argument requires that all the leading arguments, from the first to the
+(\fIN\fP\(mi1)th, are specified in the
+.IR format
+wide-character string.
+.P
+In
+.IR format
+wide-character strings containing the \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR form of
+conversion specification, numbered arguments in the argument list can
+be referenced from the
+.IR format
+wide-character string as many times as required.
+.P
+In
+.IR format
+wide-character strings containing the
+.BR %
+form of conversion specification, each argument in the argument list
+shall be used exactly once.
+.P
+All forms of the
+\fIfwprintf\fR()
+function allow for the insertion of a locale-dependent radix
+character in the output string, output as a wide-character value. The
+radix character is defined in the current locale (category
+.IR LC_NUMERIC ).
+In the POSIX locale, or in a locale where the radix character is not
+defined, the radix character shall default to a
+<period>
+(\c
+.BR '.' ).
+.br
+.P
+Each conversion specification is introduced by the
+.BR '%' 
+wide character
+or by the wide-character sequence \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR,
+after which the following appear in sequence:
+.IP " *" 4
+Zero or more
+.IR flags
+(in any order), which modify the meaning of the conversion
+specification.
+.IP " *" 4
+An optional minimum
+.IR "field width" .
+If the converted value has fewer wide characters than the field width,
+it shall be padded with
+<space>
+characters by default on the left; it shall be padded on the right,
+if the left-adjustment flag (\c
+.BR '\(mi' ),
+described below, is given to the field width. The field width takes the
+form of an
+<asterisk>
+(\c
+.BR '*' ),
+described below, or a decimal integer.
+.IP " *" 4
+An optional
+.IR precision
+that gives the minimum number of digits to appear for the
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+and
+.BR X
+conversion specifiers; the number of digits to appear after the radix
+character for the
+.BR a ,
+.BR A ,
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+and
+.BR F
+conversion specifiers; the maximum number of significant digits for the
+.BR g
+and
+.BR G
+conversion specifiers; or the maximum number of wide characters to be
+printed from a string in the
+.BR s
+conversion specifiers. The precision takes the form of a
+<period>
+(\c
+.BR '.' )
+followed either by an
+<asterisk>
+(\c
+.BR '*' ),
+described below, or an optional decimal digit string, where a null
+digit string is treated as 0. If a precision appears with any other
+conversion wide character, the behavior is undefined.
+.IP " *" 4
+An optional length modifier that specifies the size of the argument.
+.IP " *" 4
+A
+.IR "conversion specifier"
+wide character that indicates the type of conversion to be applied.
+.P
+A field width, or precision, or both, may be indicated by an
+<asterisk>
+(\c
+.BR '*' ).
+In this case an argument of type
+.BR int
+supplies the field width or precision. Applications shall ensure that
+arguments specifying field width, or precision, or both appear in that
+order before the argument, if any, to be converted. A negative field
+width is taken as a
+.BR '\(mi' 
+flag followed by a positive field width. A negative precision is taken
+as if the precision were omitted.
+In
+.IR format
+wide-character strings containing the \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR form
+of a conversion specification, a field width or precision may be
+indicated by the sequence \fR"*\fIm\fR$"\fR, where
+.IR m
+is a decimal integer in the range [1,{NL_ARGMAX}] giving the position
+in the argument list (after the
+.IR format
+argument) of an integer argument containing the field width or
+precision, for example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+wprintf(L"%1$d:%2$.*3$d:%4$.*3$d\en", hour, min, precision, sec); \*?
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The flag wide characters and their meanings are:
+.IP "\fR'\fR" 8
+(The
+<apostrophe>.)
+The integer portion of the result of a decimal conversion (\c
+.BR %i ,
+.BR %d ,
+.BR %u ,
+.BR %f ,
+.BR %F ,
+.BR %g ,
+or
+.BR %G )
+shall be formatted with thousands' grouping wide characters. For other
+conversions, the behavior is undefined. The numeric grouping wide
+character is used.
+.IP "\fR\(mi\fR" 8
+The result of the conversion shall be left-justified within the field.
+The conversion shall be right-justified if this flag is not specified.
+.IP "\fR+\fR" 8
+The result of a signed conversion shall always begin with a sign (\c
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' ).
+The conversion shall begin with a sign only when a negative value is
+converted if this flag is not specified.
+.IP <space> 8
+If the first wide character of a signed conversion is not a sign, or if
+a signed conversion results in no wide characters, a
+<space>
+shall be prefixed to the result. This means that if the
+<space>
+and
+.BR '+' 
+flags both appear, the
+<space>
+flag shall be ignored.
+.IP "\fR#\fR" 8
+Specifies that the value is to be converted to an alternative form.
+For
+.BR o
+conversion, it increases the precision (if necessary) to force the
+first digit of the result to be 0. For
+.BR x
+or
+.BR X
+conversion specifiers, a non-zero result shall have 0x (or 0X) prefixed
+to it. For
+.BR a ,
+.BR A ,
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR g ,
+and
+.BR G
+conversion specifiers, the result shall always contain a radix
+character, even if no digits follow it. Without this flag, a radix
+character appears in the result of these conversions only if a digit
+follows it. For
+.BR g
+and
+.BR G
+conversion specifiers, trailing zeros shall
+.IR not
+be removed from the result as they normally are. For other conversion
+specifiers, the behavior is undefined.
+.IP "\fR0\fR" 8
+For
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+.BR X ,
+.BR a ,
+.BR A ,
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR g ,
+and
+.BR G
+conversion specifiers, leading zeros (following any indication of sign
+or base) are used to pad to the field width rather than performing
+space padding, except when converting an infinity or NaN. If the
+.BR '0' 
+and
+.BR '\(mi' 
+flags both appear, the
+.BR '0' 
+flag shall be ignored. For
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+and
+.BR X
+conversion specifiers, if a precision is specified, the
+.BR '0' 
+flag shall be ignored.
+If the
+.BR '0' 
+and
+<apostrophe>
+flags both appear, the grouping wide characters are inserted before
+zero padding. For other conversions, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The length modifiers and their meanings are:
+.IP "\fRhh\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+or
+.BR X
+conversion specifier applies to a
+.BR "signed char"
+or
+.BR "unsigned char"
+argument (the argument will have been promoted according to the integer
+promotions, but its value shall be converted to
+.BR "signed char"
+or
+.BR "unsigned char"
+before printing); or that a following
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a
+.BR "signed char"
+argument.
+.IP "\fRh\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+or
+.BR X
+conversion specifier applies to a
+.BR "short"
+or
+.BR "unsigned short"
+argument (the argument will have been promoted according to the integer
+promotions, but its value shall be converted to
+.BR "short"
+or
+.BR "unsigned short"
+before printing); or that a following
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a
+.BR "short"
+argument.
+.IP "\fRl\fR\ (ell)" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+or
+.BR X
+conversion specifier applies to a
+.BR "long"
+or
+.BR "unsigned long"
+argument; that a following
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a
+.BR "long"
+argument; that a following
+.BR c
+conversion specifier applies to a
+.BR wint_t
+argument; that a following
+.BR s
+conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a
+.BR wchar_t
+argument; or has no effect on a following
+.BR a ,
+.BR A ,
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR g ,
+or
+.BR G
+conversion specifier.
+.IP "\fRll\fR\ (ell-ell)" 8
+.br
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+or
+.BR X
+conversion specifier applies to a
+.BR "long long"
+or
+.BR "unsigned long long"
+argument; or that a following
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a
+.BR "long long"
+argument.
+.IP "\fRj\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+or
+.BR X
+conversion specifier applies to an
+.BR intmax_t
+or
+.BR uintmax_t
+argument; or that a following
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to a pointer to an
+.BR intmax_t
+argument.
+.IP "\fRz\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+or
+.BR X
+conversion specifier applies to a
+.BR size_t
+or the corresponding signed integer type argument; or that a following
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a signed integer type
+corresponding to a
+.BR size_t
+argument.
+.IP "\fRt\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+or
+.BR X
+conversion specifier applies to a
+.BR ptrdiff_t
+or the corresponding
+.BR unsigned
+type argument; or that a following
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a
+.BR ptrdiff_t
+argument.
+.IP "\fRL\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR a ,
+.BR A ,
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR g ,
+or
+.BR G
+conversion specifier applies to a
+.BR "long double"
+argument.
+.br
+.P
+If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than
+as specified above, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:
+.IP "\fRd\fR,\ \fRi\fR" 8
+The
+.BR int
+argument shall be converted to a signed decimal in the style
+\fR"[\(mi]\fIdddd"\fR. The precision specifies the minimum number of
+digits to appear; if the value being converted can be represented in
+fewer digits, it shall be expanded with leading zeros. The default
+precision shall be 1. The result of converting zero with an explicit
+precision of zero shall be no wide characters.
+.IP "\fRo\fP" 8
+The
+.BR unsigned
+argument shall be converted to unsigned octal format in the style
+.BR \(dqdddd\(dq .
+The precision specifies the minimum number of digits to appear; if the
+value being converted can be represented in fewer digits, it shall be
+expanded with leading zeros. The default precision shall be 1. The
+result of converting zero with an explicit precision of zero shall be
+no wide characters.
+.IP "\fRu\fP" 8
+The
+.BR unsigned
+argument shall be converted to unsigned decimal format in the style
+.BR \(dqdddd\(dq .
+The precision specifies the minimum number of digits to appear; if the
+value being converted can be represented in fewer digits, it shall be
+expanded with leading zeros. The default precision shall be 1. The
+result of converting zero with an explicit precision of zero shall be
+no wide characters.
+.IP "\fRx\fP" 8
+The
+.BR unsigned
+argument shall be converted to unsigned hexadecimal format in the style
+.BR \(dqdddd\(dq ;
+the letters
+.BR \(dqabcdef\(dq 
+are used. The precision specifies the minimum number of digits to
+appear; if the value being converted can be represented in fewer
+digits, it shall be expanded with leading zeros. The default precision
+shall be 1. The result of converting zero with an explicit precision of
+zero shall be no wide characters.
+.IP "\fRX\fP" 8
+Equivalent to the
+.BR x
+conversion specifier, except that letters
+.BR \(dqABCDEF\(dq 
+are used instead of
+.BR \(dqabcdef\(dq .
+.IP "\fRf\fR,\ \fRF\fR" 8
+The
+.BR double
+argument shall be converted to decimal notation in the style
+\fR"[\(mi]\fIddd.ddd"\fR, where the number of digits after the radix
+character shall be equal to the precision specification. If the
+precision is missing, it shall be taken as 6; if the precision is
+explicitly zero and no
+.BR '#' 
+flag is present, no radix character shall appear. If a radix character
+appears, at least one digit shall appear before it. The value shall be
+rounded in an implementation-defined manner to the appropriate number
+of digits.
+.RS 8 
+.P
+A
+.BR double
+argument representing an infinity shall be converted in one of the
+styles
+.BR \(dq[\(mi]inf\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dq[\(mi]infinity\(dq ;
+which style is implementation-defined. A
+.BR double
+argument representing a NaN shall be converted in one of the styles
+.BR \(dq[\(mi]nan\(dq 
+or \fR"[\(mi]nan(\fIn-char-sequence\fR)"\fR; which style, and the
+meaning of any \fIn-char-sequence\fR, is implementation-defined. The
+.BR F
+conversion specifier produces
+.BR \(dqINF\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqINFINITY\(dq ,
+or
+.BR \(dqNAN\(dq 
+instead of
+.BR \(dqinf\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqinfinity\(dq ,
+or
+.BR \(dqnan\(dq ,
+respectively.
+.RE
+.IP "\fRe\fR,\ \fRE\fR" 8
+The
+.BR double
+argument shall be converted in the style
+\fR"[\(mi]\fId.ddd\fRe\fR\(+-dd"\fR, where there shall be one digit
+before the radix character (which is non-zero if the argument is
+non-zero) and the number of digits after it shall be equal to the
+precision; if the precision is missing, it shall be taken as 6; if the
+precision is zero and no
+.BR '#' 
+flag is present, no radix character shall appear. The value shall be
+rounded in an implementation-defined manner to the appropriate number
+of digits. The
+.BR E
+conversion wide character shall produce a number with
+.BR 'E' 
+instead of
+.BR 'e' 
+introducing the exponent. The exponent shall always contain at least
+two digits. If the value is zero, the exponent shall be zero.
+.RS 8 
+.P
+A
+.BR double
+argument representing an infinity or NaN shall be converted in the
+style of an
+.BR f
+or
+.BR F
+conversion specifier.
+.RE
+.IP "\fRg\fR,\ \fRG\fR" 8
+The
+.BR double
+argument representing a floating-point number shall be converted in the
+style
+.BR f
+or
+.BR e
+(or in the style
+.BR F
+or
+.BR E
+in the case of a
+.BR G
+conversion specifier), depending on the value converted and the precision.
+Let
+.BR P
+equal the precision if non-zero, 6 if the precision is omitted, or 1 if the
+precision is zero. Then, if a conversion with style
+.BR E
+would have an exponent of
+.IR X :
+.RS 8 
+.IP -- 4
+If
+.BR P >\c
+.IR X \(>=\(mi4,
+the conversion shall be with style
+.BR f
+(or
+.BR F )
+and precision
+.BR P \(mi(\c
+.IR X +1).
+.IP -- 4
+Otherwise, the conversion shall be with style
+.BR e
+(or
+.BR E )
+and precision
+.BR P \(mi1.
+.P
+Finally, unless the
+.BR '#' 
+flag is used, any trailing zeros shall be removed from the fractional
+portion of the result and the decimal-point character shall be removed
+if there is no fractional portion remaining.
+.P
+A
+.BR double
+argument representing an infinity or NaN shall be converted in the
+style of an
+.BR f
+or
+.BR F
+conversion specifier.
+.RE
+.IP "\fRa\fR,\ \fRA\fR" 8
+A
+.BR double
+argument representing a floating-point number shall be converted in
+the style \fR"[\(mi]0x\fIh\fR.\fIhhhh\fRp\(+-\fId\fR"\fR, where there
+shall be one hexadecimal digit (which is non-zero if the argument is a
+normalized floating-point number and is otherwise unspecified) before
+the decimal-point wide character and the number of hexadecimal digits
+after it shall be equal to the precision; if the precision is missing
+and FLT_RADIX is a power of 2, then the precision shall be sufficient
+for an exact representation of the value; if the precision is missing
+and FLT_RADIX is not a power of 2, then the precision shall be sufficient
+to distinguish values of type
+.BR double ,
+except that trailing zeros may be omitted; if the precision is zero and
+the
+.BR '#' 
+flag is not specified, no decimal-point wide character shall appear.
+The letters
+.BR \(dqabcdef\(dq 
+are used for
+.BR a
+conversion and the letters
+.BR \(dqABCDEF\(dq 
+for
+.BR A
+conversion. The
+.BR A
+conversion specifier produces a number with
+.BR 'X' 
+and
+.BR 'P' 
+instead of
+.BR 'x' 
+and
+.BR 'p' .
+The exponent shall always contain at least one digit, and only as many
+more digits as necessary to represent the decimal exponent of 2. If the
+value is zero, the exponent shall be zero.
+.RS 8 
+.P
+A
+.BR double
+argument representing an infinity or NaN shall be converted in the
+style of an
+.BR f
+or
+.BR F
+conversion specifier.
+.RE
+.IP "\fRc\fP" 8
+If no
+.BR l
+(ell) qualifier is present, the
+.BR int
+argument shall be converted to a wide character as if by calling the
+\fIbtowc\fR()
+function and the resulting wide character shall be written. Otherwise,
+the
+.BR wint_t
+argument shall be converted to
+.BR wchar_t ,
+and written.
+.IP "\fRs\fP" 8
+If no
+.BR l
+(ell) qualifier is present, the application shall ensure that the
+argument is a pointer to a character array containing a character
+sequence beginning in the initial shift state. Characters from the
+array shall be converted as if by repeated calls to the
+\fImbrtowc\fR()
+function, with the conversion state described by an
+.BR mbstate_t
+object initialized to zero before the first character is converted, and
+written up to (but not including) the terminating null wide character.
+If the precision is specified, no more than that many wide characters
+shall be written. If the precision is not specified, or is greater than
+the size of the array, the application shall ensure that the array
+contains a null wide character.
+.RS 8 
+.P
+If an
+.BR l
+(ell) qualifier is present, the application shall ensure that the
+argument is a pointer to an array of type
+.BR wchar_t .
+Wide characters from the array shall be written up to (but not
+including) a terminating null wide character. If no precision is
+specified, or is greater than the size of the array, the application
+shall ensure that the array contains a null wide character. If a
+precision is specified, no more than that many wide characters shall be
+written.
+.RE
+.IP "\fRp\fP" 8
+The application shall ensure that the argument is a pointer to
+.BR void .
+The value of the pointer shall be converted to a sequence of printable
+wide characters in an implementation-defined manner.
+.IP "\fRn\fP" 8
+The application shall ensure that the argument is a pointer to an
+integer into which is written the number of wide characters written to
+the output so far by this call to one of the
+\fIfwprintf\fR()
+functions. No argument shall be converted, but one shall be consumed.
+If the conversion specification includes any flags, a field width, or a
+precision, the behavior is undefined.
+.IP "\fRC\fP" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR lc .
+.IP "\fRS\fP" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR ls .
+.IP "\fR%\fR" 8
+Output a
+.BR '%' 
+wide character; no argument shall be converted. The entire conversion
+specification shall be
+.BR %% .
+.P
+If a conversion specification does not match one of the above forms,
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+In no case does a nonexistent or small field width cause truncation of
+a field; if the result of a conversion is wider than the field width,
+the field shall be expanded to contain the conversion result.
+Characters generated by
+\fIfwprintf\fR()
+and
+\fIwprintf\fR()
+shall be printed as if
+\fIfputwc\fR()
+had been called.
+.P
+For
+.BR a
+and
+.BR A
+conversions, if FLT_RADIX is not a power of 2 and the result is not
+exactly representable in the given precision, the result should be one
+of the two adjacent numbers in hexadecimal floating style with the
+given precision, with the extra stipulation that the error should have
+a correct sign for the current rounding direction.
+.P
+For
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR g ,
+and
+.BR G
+conversion specifiers, if the number of significant decimal digits is
+at most DECIMAL_DIG, then the result should be correctly rounded. If
+the number of significant decimal digits is more than DECIMAL_DIG but
+the source value is exactly representable with DECIMAL_DIG digits, then
+the result should be an exact representation with trailing zeros.
+Otherwise, the source value is bounded by two adjacent decimal strings
+.IR L
+<
+.IR U ,
+both having DECIMAL_DIG significant digits; the value of the resultant
+decimal string
+.IR D
+should satisfy
+.IR L
+<=
+.IR D
+<=
+.IR U ,
+with the extra stipulation that the error should have a correct sign
+for the current rounding direction.
+.P
+The last data modification and last file status change timestamps
+of the file shall be marked for update between the call to a
+successful execution of
+\fIfwprintf\fR()
+or
+\fIwprintf\fR()
+and the next successful completion of a call to
+\fIfflush\fR()
+or
+\fIfclose\fR()
+on the same stream, or a call to
+\fIexit\fR()
+or
+\fIabort\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the number of
+wide characters transmitted, excluding the terminating null wide character
+in the case of
+\fIswprintf\fR(),
+or a negative value if an output error was encountered,
+and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.P
+If
+.IR n
+or more wide characters were requested to be written,
+\fIswprintf\fR()
+shall return a negative value,
+and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+For the conditions under which
+\fIfwprintf\fR()
+and
+\fIwprintf\fR()
+fail and may fail, refer to
+.IR "\fIfputwc\fR\^(\|)".
+.P
+In addition, all forms of
+\fIfwprintf\fR()
+shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EILSEQ
+A wide-character code that does not correspond to a valid character has
+been detected.
+.br
+.P
+In addition, all forms of
+\fIfwprintf\fR()
+may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+There are insufficient arguments.
+.br
+.P
+In addition,
+\fIfwprintf\fR()
+and
+\fIwprintf\fR()
+may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient storage space is available.
+.P
+The
+\fIswprintf\fR()
+shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The value of
+.IR n
+is greater than
+{INT_MAX}
+or the number of bytes needed to hold the output excluding the
+terminating null is greater than
+{INT_MAX}.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+To print the language-independent date and time format, the following
+statement could be used:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+wprintf(format, weekday, month, day, hour, min);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+For American usage,
+.IR format
+could be a pointer to the wide-character string:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+L"%s, %s %d, %d:%.2d\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+producing the message:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+Sunday, July 3, 10:02
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+whereas for German usage,
+.IR format
+could be a pointer to the wide-character string:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+L"%1$s, %3$d. %2$s, %4$d:%5$.2d\en"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+producing the message:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+Sonntag, 3. Juli, 10:02
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIbtowc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfputwc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfwscanf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbrtowc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fwrite.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fwrite.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5a9a12e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fwrite.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FWRITE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fwrite
+\(em binary output
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+size_t fwrite(const void *restrict \fIptr\fP, size_t \fIsize\fP, size_t \fInitems\fP,
+    FILE *restrict \fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfwrite\fR()
+function shall write, from the array pointed to by
+.IR ptr ,
+up to
+.IR nitems
+elements whose size is specified by
+.IR size ,
+to the stream pointed to by
+.IR stream .
+For each object,
+.IR size
+calls shall be made to the
+\fIfputc\fR()
+function, taking the values (in order) from an array of
+.BR "unsigned char"
+exactly overlaying the object. The file-position indicator for the
+stream (if defined) shall be advanced by the number of bytes
+successfully written. If an error occurs, the resulting value of the
+file-position indicator for the stream is unspecified.
+.P
+The last data modification and last file status change timestamps
+of the file shall be marked for update between the successful
+execution of
+\fIfwrite\fR()
+and the next successful completion of a call to
+\fIfflush\fR()
+or
+\fIfclose\fR()
+on the same stream, or a call to
+\fIexit\fR()
+or
+\fIabort\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIfwrite\fR()
+function shall return the number of elements successfully written,
+which may be less than
+.IR nitems
+if a write error is encountered. If
+.IR size
+or
+.IR nitems
+is 0,
+\fIfwrite\fR()
+shall return 0 and the state of the stream remains unchanged. Otherwise,
+if a write error occurs, the error indicator for the stream shall be set,
+and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfputc\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Because of possible differences in element length and byte ordering,
+files written using
+\fIfwrite\fR()
+are application-dependent, and possibly cannot be read using
+\fIfread\fR()
+by a different application or by the same application on a different
+processor.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIferror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfprintf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fwscanf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fwscanf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a9fcd3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/fwscanf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,862 @@
+'\" et
+.TH FWSCANF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+fwscanf,
+swscanf,
+wscanf
+\(em convert formatted wide-character input
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int fwscanf(FILE *restrict \fIstream\fP, const wchar_t *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+int swscanf(const wchar_t *restrict \fIws\fP,
+    const wchar_t *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+int wscanf(const wchar_t *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIfwscanf\fR()
+function shall read from the named input
+.IR stream .
+The
+\fIwscanf\fR()
+function shall read from the standard input stream
+.IR stdin .
+The
+\fIswscanf\fR()
+function shall read from the wide-character string
+.IR ws .
+Each function reads wide characters, interprets them according to a
+format, and stores the results in its arguments. Each expects, as
+arguments, a control wide-character string
+.IR format
+described below, and a set of
+.IR pointer
+arguments indicating where the converted input should be stored. The
+result is undefined if there are insufficient arguments for the
+format. If the
+.IR format
+is exhausted while arguments remain, the excess arguments are
+evaluated but are otherwise ignored.
+.P
+Conversions can be applied to the
+.IR n th
+argument after the
+.IR format
+in the argument list, rather than to the next unused argument. In this
+case, the conversion specifier wide character
+.BR %
+(see below) is replaced by the sequence
+.BR \(dq%n$\(dq ,
+where
+.IR n
+is a decimal integer in the range [1,{NL_ARGMAX}].
+This feature provides for the definition of
+.IR format
+wide-character strings that select arguments in an order appropriate
+to specific languages. In
+.IR format
+wide-character strings containing the \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR form of
+conversion specifications,
+it is unspecified whether numbered arguments in the argument list can
+be referenced from the
+.IR format
+wide-character string more than once.
+.P
+The
+.IR format
+can contain either form of a conversion specification\(emthat is,
+.BR %
+or \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR\(em but the two forms cannot normally be mixed
+within a single
+.IR format
+wide-character string. The only exception to this is that
+.BR %%
+or
+.BR %*
+can be mixed with the \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR form. When numbered argument
+specifications are used, specifying the
+.IR N th
+argument requires that all the leading arguments, from the first to
+the (\c
+.IR N \(mi1)th,
+are pointers.
+.P
+The
+\fIfwscanf\fR()
+function in all its forms allows for detection of a language-dependent
+radix character in the input string, encoded as a wide-character
+value. The radix character is defined in the current locale (category
+.IR LC_NUMERIC ).
+In the POSIX locale, or in a locale where the radix character is not
+defined, the radix character shall default to a
+<period>
+(\c
+.BR '.' ).
+.P
+The
+.IR format
+is a wide-character string composed of zero or more directives. Each
+directive is composed of one of the following:
+one or more white-space wide characters (\c
+<space>,
+<tab>,
+<newline>,
+<vertical-tab>,
+or
+<form-feed>);
+an ordinary wide character (neither
+.BR '%' 
+nor a white-space character); or a conversion specification.
+.P
+Each conversion specification is introduced by the
+.BR '%' 
+or by the character sequence \fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR,
+after which the following appear in sequence:
+.IP " *" 4
+An optional assignment-suppressing character
+.BR '*' .
+.IP " *" 4
+An optional non-zero decimal integer that specifies the maximum field
+width.
+.IP " *" 4
+An optional assignment-allocation character
+.BR 'm' .
+.IP " *" 4
+An optional length modifier that specifies the size of the receiving
+object.
+.IP " *" 4
+A conversion specifier wide character that specifies the type of
+conversion to be applied. The valid conversion specifiers are described
+below.
+.P
+The
+\fIfwscanf\fR()
+functions shall execute each directive of the format in turn. If a
+directive fails, as detailed below, the function shall return. Failures
+are described as input failures (due to the unavailability of input
+bytes) or matching failures (due to inappropriate input).
+.P
+A directive composed of one or more white-space wide characters is
+executed by reading input until no more valid input can be read, or up
+to the first wide character which is not a white-space wide character,
+which remains unread.
+.P
+A directive that is an ordinary wide character shall be executed as
+follows. The next wide character is read from the input and compared
+with the wide character that comprises the directive; if the comparison
+shows that they are not equivalent, the directive shall fail, and the
+differing and subsequent wide characters remain unread. Similarly, if
+end-of-file, an encoding error, or a read error prevents a wide
+character from being read, the directive shall fail.
+.P
+A directive that is a conversion specification defines a set of
+matching input sequences, as described below for each conversion wide
+character. A conversion specification is executed in the following
+steps.
+.P
+Input white-space wide characters (as specified by
+.IR "\fIiswspace\fR\^(\|)")
+shall be skipped, unless the conversion specification includes a
+.BR [ ,
+.BR c ,
+or
+.BR n
+conversion specifier.
+.P
+An item shall be read from the input, unless the conversion
+specification includes an
+.BR n
+conversion specifier wide character. An input item is defined as the
+longest sequence of input wide characters, not exceeding any specified
+field width, which is an initial subsequence of a matching sequence.
+The first wide character, if any, after the input item shall remain
+unread. If the length of the input item is zero, the execution of the
+conversion specification shall fail; this condition is a matching
+failure, unless end-of-file, an encoding error, or a read error
+prevented input from the stream, in which case it is an input failure.
+.P
+Except in the case of a
+.BR %
+conversion specifier, the input item (or, in the case of a
+.BR %n
+conversion specification, the count of input wide characters) shall be
+converted to a type appropriate to the conversion wide character. If
+the input item is not a matching sequence, the execution of the
+conversion specification shall fail; this condition is a matching
+failure. Unless assignment suppression was indicated by a
+.BR '*' ,
+the result of the conversion shall be placed in the object pointed to
+by the first argument following the
+.IR format
+argument that has not already received a conversion result if the
+conversion specification is introduced by
+.BR % ,
+or in the
+.IR n th
+argument if introduced by the wide-character sequence
+\fR"%\fIn\fR$"\fR.
+If this object does not have an appropriate type, or if the result
+of the conversion cannot be represented in the space provided, the
+behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The
+.BR %c ,
+.BR %s ,
+and
+.BR %[
+conversion specifiers shall accept an optional assignment-allocation
+character
+.BR 'm' ,
+which shall cause a memory buffer to be allocated to hold the
+wide-character string converted including a terminating null wide
+character. In such a case, the argument corresponding to the conversion
+specifier should be a reference to a pointer value that will receive a
+pointer to the allocated buffer. The system shall allocate a buffer as if
+\fImalloc\fR()
+had been called. The application shall be responsible for freeing the
+memory after usage. If there is insufficient memory to allocate a buffer,
+the function shall set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [ENOMEM] 
+and a conversion error shall result. If the function returns EOF, any
+memory successfully allocated for parameters using assignment-allocation
+character
+.BR 'm' 
+by this call shall be freed before the function returns.
+.br
+.P
+The length modifiers and their meanings are:
+.IP "\fRhh\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+.BR X ,
+or
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to
+.BR "signed char"
+or
+.BR "unsigned char" .
+.IP "\fRh\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+.BR X ,
+or
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to
+.BR "short"
+or
+.BR "unsigned short" .
+.IP "\fRl\fR\ (ell)" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+.BR X ,
+or
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to
+.BR "long"
+or
+.BR "unsigned long" ;
+that a following
+.BR a ,
+.BR A ,
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR g ,
+or
+.BR G
+conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to
+.BR double ;
+or that a following
+.BR c ,
+.BR s ,
+or
+.BR [
+conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to
+.BR wchar_t .
+If the
+.BR 'm' 
+assignment-allocation character is specified, the conversion applies
+to an argument with the type pointer to a pointer to
+.BR wchar_t .
+.IP "\fRll\fR\ (ell-ell)" 8
+.br
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+.BR X ,
+or
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to
+.BR "long long"
+or
+.BR "unsigned long long" .
+.IP "\fRj\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+.BR X ,
+or
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to
+.BR intmax_t
+or
+.BR uintmax_t .
+.IP "\fRz\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+.BR X ,
+or
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to
+.BR size_t
+or the corresponding signed integer type.
+.IP "\fRt\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR d ,
+.BR i ,
+.BR o ,
+.BR u ,
+.BR x ,
+.BR X ,
+or
+.BR n
+conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to
+.BR ptrdiff_t
+or the corresponding
+.BR unsigned
+type.
+.IP "\fRL\fR" 8
+Specifies that a following
+.BR a ,
+.BR A ,
+.BR e ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR g ,
+or
+.BR G
+conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to
+.BR "long double" .
+.P
+If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than
+as specified above, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The following conversion specifier wide characters are valid:
+.IP "\fRd\fP" 8
+Matches an optionally signed decimal integer, whose format is the same
+as expected for the subject sequence of
+\fIwcstol\fR()
+with the value 10 for the
+.IR base
+argument. In the absence of a size modifier, the application shall ensure
+that the corresponding argument is a pointer to
+.BR int .
+.IP "\fRi\fP" 8
+Matches an optionally signed integer, whose format is the same as
+expected for the subject sequence of
+\fIwcstol\fR()
+with 0 for the
+.IR base
+argument. In the absence of a size modifier, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to
+.BR int .
+.IP "\fRo\fP" 8
+Matches an optionally signed octal integer, whose format is the same as
+expected for the subject sequence of
+\fIwcstoul\fR()
+with the value 8 for the
+.IR base
+argument. In the absence of a size modifier, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to
+.BR unsigned .
+.IP "\fRu\fP" 8
+Matches an optionally signed decimal integer, whose format is the same
+as expected for the subject sequence of
+\fIwcstoul\fR()
+with the value 10 for the
+.IR base
+argument. In the absence of a size modifier, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to
+.BR unsigned .
+.IP "\fRx\fP" 8
+Matches an optionally signed hexadecimal integer, whose format is the
+same as expected for the subject sequence of
+\fIwcstoul\fR()
+with the value 16 for the
+.IR base
+argument. In the absence of a size modifier, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to
+.BR unsigned .
+.IP "\fRa\fR,\ \fRe\fP,\ \fRf\fP,\ \fRg\fP" 8
+.br
+Matches an optionally signed floating-point number, infinity, or NaN
+whose format is the same as expected for the subject sequence of
+\fIwcstod\fR().
+In the absence of a size modifier, the application shall ensure that
+the corresponding argument is a pointer to
+.BR float .
+.RS 8 
+.P
+If the
+\fIfwprintf\fR()
+family of functions generates character string representations for
+infinity and NaN (a symbolic entity encoded in floating-point
+format) to support IEEE\ Std\ 754\(hy1985, the
+\fIfwscanf\fR()
+family of functions shall recognize them as input.
+.RE
+.IP "\fRs\fP" 8
+Matches a sequence of non-white-space wide characters. If no
+.BR l
+(ell) qualifier is present, characters from the input field shall be
+converted as if by repeated calls to the
+\fIwcrtomb\fR()
+function, with the conversion state described by an
+.BR mbstate_t
+object initialized to zero before the first wide character is
+converted. If the
+.BR 'm' 
+assignment-allocation character is not specified, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to a character array
+large enough to accept the sequence and the terminating null character,
+which shall be added automatically.
+Otherwise, the application shall ensure that the corresponding
+argument is a pointer to a pointer to a
+.BR wchar_t .
+.RS 8 
+.P
+If the
+.BR l
+(ell) qualifier is present and the
+.BR 'm' 
+assignment-allocation character is not specified, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to an array of
+.BR wchar_t
+large enough to accept the sequence and the terminating null wide
+character, which shall be added automatically.
+If the
+.BR l
+(ell) qualifier is present and the
+.BR 'm' 
+assignment-allocation character is present, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to a pointer
+to a
+.BR wchar_t .
+.RE
+.IP "\fR[\fR" 8
+Matches a non-empty sequence of wide characters from a set of expected
+wide characters (the
+.IR scanset ).
+If no
+.BR l
+(ell) qualifier is present, wide characters from the input field shall
+be converted as if by repeated calls to the
+\fIwcrtomb\fR()
+function, with the conversion state described by an
+.BR mbstate_t
+object initialized to zero before the first wide character is
+converted. If the
+.BR 'm' 
+assignment-allocation character is not specified, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to a character array
+large enough to accept the sequence and the terminating null character,
+which shall be added automatically.
+Otherwise, the application shall ensure that the corresponding
+argument is a pointer to a pointer to a
+.BR wchar_t .
+.RS 8 
+.P
+If an
+.BR l
+(ell) qualifier is present and the
+.BR 'm' 
+assignment-allocation character is not specified, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to an array of
+.BR wchar_t
+large enough to accept the sequence and the terminating null
+wide character.
+If an
+.BR l
+(ell) qualifier is present and the
+.BR 'm' 
+assignment-allocation character is specified, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to a pointer
+to a
+.BR wchar_t .
+.P
+The conversion specification includes all subsequent wide characters in
+the
+.IR format
+string up to and including the matching
+<right-square-bracket>
+(\c
+.BR ']' ).
+The wide characters between the square brackets (the
+.IR scanlist )
+comprise the scanset, unless the wide character after the
+<left-square-bracket>
+is a
+<circumflex>
+(\c
+.BR '^' ),
+in which case the scanset contains all wide characters that do not
+appear in the scanlist between the
+<circumflex>
+and the
+<right-square-bracket>.
+If the conversion specification begins with
+.BR \(dq[\|]\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dq[^]\(dq ,
+the
+<right-square-bracket>
+is included in the scanlist and the next
+<right-square-bracket>
+is the matching
+<right-square-bracket>
+that ends the conversion specification; otherwise, the first
+<right-square-bracket>
+is the one that ends the conversion specification. If a
+.BR '\(mi' 
+is in the scanlist and is not the first wide character, nor the second
+where the first wide character is a
+.BR '^' ,
+nor the last wide character, the behavior is implementation-defined.
+.RE
+.IP "\fRc\fP" 8
+Matches a sequence of wide characters of exactly the number specified
+by the field width (1 if no field width is present in the conversion
+specification).
+.RS 8 
+.P
+If no
+.BR l
+(ell) length modifier is present, characters from the input field shall
+be converted as if by repeated calls to the
+\fIwcrtomb\fR()
+function, with the conversion state described by an
+.BR mbstate_t
+object initialized to zero before the first wide character is
+converted. No null character is added. If the
+.BR 'm' 
+assignment-allocation character is not specified, the application
+shall ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to the
+initial element of a character array large enough to accept the sequence.
+Otherwise, the application shall ensure that the corresponding
+argument is a pointer to a pointer to a
+.BR char .
+.P
+No null wide character is added. If an
+.BR l
+(ell) length modifier is present and the
+.BR 'm' 
+assignment-allocation character is not specified, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument shall be a pointer to the initial
+element of an array of
+.BR wchar_t
+large enough to accept the sequence.
+If an
+.BR l
+(ell) qualifier is present and the
+.BR 'm' 
+assignment-allocation character is specified, the application shall
+ensure that the corresponding argument is a pointer to a pointer
+to a
+.BR wchar_t .
+.RE
+.IP "\fRp\fP" 8
+Matches an implementation-defined set of sequences, which shall be
+the same as the set of sequences that is produced by the
+.BR %p
+conversion specification of the corresponding
+\fIfwprintf\fR()
+functions. The application shall ensure that the corresponding argument
+is a pointer to a pointer to
+.BR void .
+The interpretation of the input item is implementation-defined. If
+the input item is a value converted earlier during the same program
+execution, the pointer that results shall compare equal to that value;
+otherwise, the behavior of the
+.BR %p
+conversion is undefined.
+.IP "\fRn\fP" 8
+No input is consumed. The application shall ensure that the
+corresponding argument is a pointer to the integer into which is to be
+written the number of wide characters read from the input so far by
+this call to the
+\fIfwscanf\fR()
+functions. Execution of a
+.BR %n
+conversion specification shall not increment the assignment count
+returned at the completion of execution of the function. No argument
+shall be converted, but one shall be consumed. If the conversion
+specification includes an assignment-suppressing wide character or a
+field width, the behavior is undefined.
+.IP "\fRC\fP" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR lc .
+.IP "\fRS\fP" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR ls .
+.IP "\fR%\fR" 8
+Matches a single
+.BR '%' 
+wide character; no conversion or assignment shall occur. The complete
+conversion specification shall be
+.BR %% .
+.P
+If a conversion specification is invalid, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The conversion specifiers
+.BR A ,
+.BR E ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR G ,
+and
+.BR X
+are also valid and shall be equivalent to, respectively,
+.BR a ,
+.BR e ,
+.BR f ,
+.BR g ,
+and
+.BR x .
+.P
+If end-of-file is encountered during input, conversion is terminated.
+If end-of-file occurs before any wide characters matching the current
+conversion specification (except for
+.BR %n )
+have been read (other than leading white-space, where permitted),
+execution of the current conversion specification shall terminate with
+an input failure. Otherwise, unless execution of the current conversion
+specification is terminated with a matching failure, execution of the
+following conversion specification (if any) shall be terminated with an
+input failure.
+.P
+Reaching the end of the string in
+\fIswscanf\fR()
+shall be equivalent to encountering end-of-file for
+\fIfwscanf\fR().
+.P
+If conversion terminates on a conflicting input, the offending input
+shall be left unread in the input. Any trailing white space (including
+<newline>)
+shall be left unread unless matched by a conversion specification. The
+success of literal matches and suppressed assignments is only directly
+determinable via the
+.BR %n
+conversion specification.
+.P
+The
+\fIfwscanf\fR()
+and
+\fIwscanf\fR()
+functions may mark the last data access timestamp of the file
+associated with
+.IR stream
+for update. The last data access timestamp shall be marked for update
+by the first successful execution of
+\fIfgetwc\fR(),
+\fIfgetws\fR(),
+\fIfwscanf\fR(),
+\fIgetwc\fR(),
+\fIgetwchar\fR(),
+\fIvfwscanf\fR(),
+\fIvwscanf\fR(),
+or
+\fIwscanf\fR()
+using
+.IR stream
+that returns data not supplied by a prior call to
+\fIungetwc\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the number of
+successfully matched and assigned input items; this number can be zero
+in the event of an early matching failure. If the input ends before the
+first matching failure or conversion, EOF shall be returned.
+If any error occurs, EOF shall be returned,
+and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+If a read error occurs, the error indicator for the stream shall be set.
+.SH ERRORS
+For the conditions under which the
+\fIfwscanf\fR()
+functions shall fail and may fail, refer to
+.IR "\fIfgetwc\fR\^(\|)".
+.P
+In addition, the
+\fIfwscanf\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EILSEQ
+Input byte sequence does not form a valid character.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient storage space is available.
+.P
+In addition, the
+\fIfwscanf\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+There are insufficient arguments.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+The call:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int i, n; float x; char name[50];
+n = wscanf(L"%d%f%s", &i, &x, name);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+with the input line:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+25 54.32E\(mi1 Hamster
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+assigns to
+.IR n
+the value 3, to
+.IR i
+the value 25, to
+.IR x
+the value 5.432, and
+.IR name
+contains the string
+.BR \(dqHamster\(dq .
+.P
+The call:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int i; float x; char name[50];
+(void) wscanf(L"%2d%f%*d %[0123456789]", &i, &x, name);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+with input:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+56789 0123 56a72
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+assigns 56 to
+.IR i ,
+789.0 to
+.IR x ,
+skips 0123, and places the string
+.BR \(dq56\e0\(dq 
+in
+.IR name .
+The next call to
+\fIgetchar\fR()
+shall return the character
+.BR 'a' .
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+In format strings containing the
+.BR '%' 
+form of conversion specifications, each argument in the argument
+list is used exactly once.
+.P
+For functions that allocate memory as if by
+\fImalloc\fR(),
+the application should release such memory when it is no longer
+required by a call to
+\fIfree\fR().
+For
+\fIfwscanf\fR(),
+this is memory allocated via use of the
+.BR 'm' 
+assignment-allocation character.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIgetwc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfwprintf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcstod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcstol\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcstoul\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcrtomb\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/gai_strerror.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/gai_strerror.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..53c7b0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/gai_strerror.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GAI_STRERROR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+gai_strerror
+\(em address and name information error description
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <netdb.h>
+.P
+const char *gai_strerror(int \fIecode\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgai_strerror\fR()
+function shall return a text string describing an error value for the
+\fIgetaddrinfo\fR()
+and
+\fIgetnameinfo\fR()
+functions listed in the
+.IR <netdb.h> 
+header.
+.P
+When the
+.IR ecode
+argument is one of the following values listed in the
+.IR <netdb.h> 
+header:
+.TS
+tab(!);
+le le.
+T{
+.nf
+.BR [EAI_AGAIN] 
+.BR [EAI_BADFLAGS] 
+.BR [EAI_FAIL] 
+.BR [EAI_FAMILY] 
+.BR [EAI_MEMORY] 
+T}!T{
+.nf
+.BR [EAI_NONAME] 
+.BR [EAI_OVERFLOW] 
+.BR [EAI_SERVICE] 
+.BR [EAI_SOCKTYPE] 
+.BR [EAI_SYSTEM] 
+.fi
+T}
+.TE
+.P
+the function return value shall point to a string describing the error.
+If the argument is not one of those values, the function shall return a
+pointer to a string whose contents indicate an unknown error.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgai_strerror\fR()
+shall return a pointer to an implementation-defined string.
+.SH "ERRORS"
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfreeaddrinfo\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<netdb.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getaddrinfo.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getaddrinfo.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..97be9cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getaddrinfo.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETADDRINFO "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getaddrinfo
+\(em get address information
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+#include <netdb.h>
+.P
+int getaddrinfo(const char *restrict \fInodename\fP,
+    const char *restrict \fIservname\fP,
+    const struct addrinfo *restrict \fIhints\fP,
+    struct addrinfo **restrict \fIres\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfreeaddrinfo\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getc.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getc.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a96e11f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getc.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getc
+\(em get a byte from a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int getc(FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetc\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+.IR "\fIfgetc\fR\^(\|)",
+except that if it is implemented as a macro it may evaluate
+.IR stream
+more than once, so the argument should never be an expression with
+side-effects.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfgetc\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfgetc\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If the integer value returned by
+\fIgetc\fR()
+is stored into a variable of type
+.BR char
+and then compared against the integer constant EOF, the comparison may
+never succeed, because sign-extension of a variable of type
+.BR char
+on widening to integer is implementation-defined.
+.P
+Since it may be implemented as a macro,
+\fIgetc\fR()
+may treat incorrectly a
+.IR stream
+argument with side-effects. In particular,
+.IR getc (* f \(pl\(pl)
+does not necessarily work as expected. Therefore, use of this function
+should be preceded by
+.BR \(dq#undef getc\(dq 
+in such situations;
+\fIfgetc\fR()
+could also be used.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfgetc\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getc_unlocked.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getc_unlocked.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..166c155
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getc_unlocked.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,233 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETC_UNLOCKED "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getc_unlocked,
+getchar_unlocked,
+putc_unlocked,
+putchar_unlocked
+\(em stdio with explicit client locking
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int getc_unlocked(FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+int getchar_unlocked(void);
+int putc_unlocked(int \fIc\fP, FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+int putchar_unlocked(int \fIc\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Versions of the functions
+\fIgetc\fR(),
+\fIgetchar\fR(),
+\fIputc\fR(),
+and
+\fIputchar\fR()
+respectively named
+\fIgetc_unlocked\fR(),
+\fIgetchar_unlocked\fR(),
+\fIputc_unlocked\fR(),
+and
+\fIputchar_unlocked\fR()
+shall be provided which are functionally equivalent to the original
+versions, with the exception that they are not required to be
+implemented in a thread-safe manner. They may only safely be used
+within a scope protected by
+\fIflockfile\fR()
+(or
+\fIftrylockfile\fR())
+and
+\fIfunlockfile\fR().
+These functions may safely be used in a multi-threaded program if and
+only if they are called while the invoking thread owns the (\c
+.BR "FILE *" )
+object, as is the case after a successful call to the
+\fIflockfile\fR()
+or
+\fIftrylockfile\fR()
+functions.
+.P
+If
+\fIgetc_unlocked\fR()
+or
+\fIputc_unlocked\fR()
+are implemented as macros they may evaluate
+.IR stream
+more than once, so the
+.IR stream
+argument should never be an expression with side-effects.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+See
+.IR "\fIgetc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetchar\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputc\fR\^(\|)",
+and
+.IR "\fIputchar\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH ERRORS
+See
+.IR "\fIgetc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetchar\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputc\fR\^(\|)",
+and
+.IR "\fIputchar\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since they may be implemented as macros,
+\fIgetc_unlocked\fR()
+and
+\fIputc_unlocked\fR()
+may treat incorrectly a
+.IR stream
+argument with side-effects. In particular, \fIgetc_unlocked\fP(*f++)
+and \fIputc_unlocked\fP(c,*f++) do not necessarily work as expected.
+Therefore, use of these functions in such situations should be preceded
+by the following statement as appropriate:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#undef getc_unlocked
+#undef putc_unlocked
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+Some I/O functions are typically implemented as macros for performance
+reasons (for example,
+\fIputc\fR()
+and
+\fIgetc\fR()).
+For safety, they need to be synchronized, but it is often too expensive
+to synchronize on every character. Nevertheless, it was felt that the
+safety concerns were more important; consequently, the
+\fIgetc\fR(),
+\fIgetchar\fR(),
+\fIputc\fR(),
+and
+\fIputchar\fR()
+functions are required to be thread-safe. However, unlocked versions
+are also provided with names that clearly indicate the unsafe nature of
+their operation but can be used to exploit their higher performance.
+These unlocked versions can be safely used only within explicitly
+locked program regions, using exported locking primitives. In
+particular, a sequence such as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+flockfile(fileptr);
+putc_unlocked('1', fileptr);
+putc_unlocked('\en', fileptr);
+fprintf(fileptr, "Line 2\en");
+funlockfile(fileptr);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.br
+.P
+is permissible, and results in the text sequence:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+1
+Line 2
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+being printed without being interspersed with output from other
+threads.
+.P
+It would be wrong to have the standard names such as
+\fIgetc\fR(),
+\fIputc\fR(),
+and so on, map to the ``faster, but unsafe'' rather than the ``slower,
+but safe'' versions. In either case, you would still want to inspect
+all uses of
+\fIgetc\fR(),
+\fIputc\fR(),
+and so on, by hand when converting existing code. Choosing the safe
+bindings as the default, at least, results in correct code and
+maintains the ``atomicity at the function'' invariant. To do otherwise
+would introduce gratuitous synchronization errors into converted code.
+Other routines that modify the
+.IR stdio
+(\c
+.BR "FILE *" )
+structures or buffers are also safely synchronized.
+.P
+Note that there is no need for functions of the form
+\fIgetc_locked\fR(),
+\fIputc_locked\fR(),
+and so on, since this is the functionality of
+\fIgetc\fR(),
+\fIputc\fR(),
+.IR "et al" .
+It would be inappropriate to use a feature test macro to
+switch a macro definition of
+\fIgetc\fR()
+between
+\fIgetc_locked\fR()
+and
+\fIgetc_unlocked\fR(),
+since the ISO\ C standard requires an actual function to exist,
+a function whose behavior could not be changed by the
+feature test macro. Also, providing both the
+\fIxxx_locked\fR()
+and
+\fIxxx_unlocked\fR()
+forms leads to the confusion of whether the suffix describes the
+behavior of the function or the circumstances under which it should be
+used.
+.P
+Three additional routines,
+\fIflockfile\fR(),
+\fIftrylockfile\fR(),
+and
+\fIfunlockfile\fR()
+(which may be macros), are provided to allow the user to delineate a
+sequence of I/O statements that are executed synchronously.
+.P
+The
+\fIungetc\fR()
+function is infrequently called relative to the other functions/macros
+so no unlocked variation is needed.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIflockfile\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetchar\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputchar\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getchar.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getchar.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a6c8ea2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getchar.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETCHAR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getchar
+\(em get a byte from a
+.IR stdin
+stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int getchar(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetchar\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to \fIgetc\fP(\fIstdin\fP).
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfgetc\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfgetc\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If the integer value returned by
+\fIgetchar\fR()
+is stored into a variable of type
+.BR char
+and then compared against the integer constant EOF, the comparison may
+never succeed, because sign-extension of a variable of type
+.BR char
+on widening to integer is implementation-defined.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIgetc\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getchar_unlocked.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getchar_unlocked.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f2d5130
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getchar_unlocked.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETCHAR_UNLOCKED "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getchar_unlocked
+\(em stdio with explicit client locking
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int getchar_unlocked(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIgetc_unlocked\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getcwd.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getcwd.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2cf9a50
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getcwd.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,292 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETCWD "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getcwd
+\(em get the pathname of the current working directory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+char *getcwd(char *\fIbuf\fP, size_t \fIsize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+function shall place an absolute pathname of the current working directory
+in the array pointed to by
+.IR buf ,
+and return
+.IR buf .
+The pathname shall contain no components that are dot or dot-dot, or
+are symbolic links.
+.P
+If there are multiple pathnames that
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+could place in the array pointed to by
+.IR buf ,
+one beginning with a single
+<slash>
+character and one or more beginning with two
+<slash>
+characters, then
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+shall place the pathname beginning with a single
+<slash>
+character in the array. The pathname shall not contain any unnecessary
+<slash>
+characters after the leading one or two
+<slash>
+characters.
+.P
+The
+.IR size
+argument is the size in bytes of the character array pointed to by the
+.IR buf
+argument. If
+.IR buf
+is a null pointer, the behavior of
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+shall return the
+.IR buf
+argument. Otherwise,
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+shall return a null pointer and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error. The contents of the array pointed to by
+.IR buf
+are then undefined.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR size
+argument is 0.
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+The
+.IR size
+argument is greater than 0, but is smaller than the length of
+the string +1.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission was denied for the current directory, or read or search
+permission was denied for a directory above the current directory in
+the file hierarchy.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient storage space is available.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following example uses
+{PATH_MAX}
+as the initial buffer size (unless it is indeterminate or very large),
+and calls
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+with progressively larger buffers until it does not give an
+.BR [ERANGE] 
+error.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+\&...
+.P
+long path_max;
+size_t size;
+char *buf;
+char *ptr;
+.P
+path_max = pathconf(".", _PC_PATH_MAX);
+if (path_max == -1)
+    size = 1024;
+else if (path_max > 10240)
+    size = 10240;
+else
+    size = path_max;
+.P
+for (buf = ptr = NULL; ptr == NULL; size *= 2)
+{
+    if ((buf = realloc(buf, size)) == NULL)
+    {
+        ... handle error ...
+    }
+.P
+    ptr = getcwd(buf, size);
+    if (ptr == NULL && errno != ERANGE)
+    {
+        ... handle error ...
+    }
+}
+\&...
+free (buf);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If the pathname obtained from
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+is longer than
+{PATH_MAX}
+bytes, it could produce an
+.BR [ENAMETOOLONG] 
+error if passed to
+\fIchdir\fR().
+Therefore, in order to return to that directory it may be necessary to
+break the pathname into sections shorter than
+{PATH_MAX}
+bytes and call
+\fIchdir\fR()
+on each section in turn (the first section being an absolute pathname and
+subsequent sections being relative pathnames). A simpler way to handle
+saving and restoring the working directory when it may be deeper than
+{PATH_MAX}
+bytes in the file hierarchy is to use a file descriptor and
+\fIfchdir\fR(),
+rather than
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+and
+\fIchdir\fR().
+However, the two methods do have some differences. The
+\fIfchdir\fR()
+approach causes the program to restore a working directory even
+if it has been renamed in the meantime, whereas the
+\fIchdir\fR()
+approach restores to a directory with the same name as the original,
+even if the directories were renamed in the meantime. Since the
+\fIfchdir\fR()
+approach does not access parent directories, it can succeed when
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+would fail due to permissions problems. In applications conforming to
+earlier versions of this standard, it was not possible to use the
+\fIfchdir\fR()
+approach when the working directory is searchable but not readable,
+as the only way to open a directory was with O_RDONLY, whereas the
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+approach can succeed in this case.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Having
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+take no arguments and instead use the
+\fImalloc\fR()
+function to produce space for the returned argument was considered.
+The advantage is that
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+knows how big the working directory pathname is and can allocate an
+appropriate amount of space. But the programmer would have to use the
+\fIfree\fR()
+function to free the resulting object, or each use of
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+would further reduce the available memory. Finally,
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+is taken from the SVID where it has the two arguments used in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+The older function
+.IR getwd (\|)
+was rejected for use in this context because it had only a buffer
+argument and no
+.IR size
+argument, and thus had no way to prevent overwriting the buffer, except
+to depend on the programmer to provide a large enough buffer.
+.P
+On some implementations, if
+.IR buf
+is a null pointer,
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+may obtain
+.IR size
+bytes of memory using
+\fImalloc\fR().
+In this case, the pointer returned by
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+may be used as the argument in a subsequent call to
+\fIfree\fR().
+Invoking
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+with
+.IR buf
+as a null pointer is not recommended in conforming applications.
+.P
+Earlier implementations of
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+sometimes generated pathnames like
+.BR \(dq../../../subdirname\(dq 
+internally, using them to explore the path of ancestor directories back
+to the root. If one of these internal pathnames exceeded
+{PATH_MAX}
+in length, the implementation could fail with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [ENAMETOOLONG] .
+This is no longer allowed.
+.P
+If a program is operating in a directory where some (grand)parent
+directory does not permit reading,
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+may fail, as in most implementations it must read the directory to
+determine the name of the file. This can occur if search, but not read,
+permission is granted in an intermediate directory, or if the program
+is placed in that directory by some more privileged process (for
+example, login). Including the
+.BR [EACCES] 
+error condition makes the reporting of the error consistent and warns
+the application developer that
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+can fail for reasons beyond the control of the application developer or
+user. Some implementations can avoid this occurrence (for example, by
+implementing
+\fIgetcwd\fR()
+using
+.IR pwd ,
+where
+.IR pwd
+is a set-user-root process),
+thus the error was made optional. Since this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 permits the addition of
+other errors, this would be a common addition and yet one that
+applications could not be expected to deal with without this addition.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImalloc\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getdate.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getdate.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..698f10b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getdate.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,399 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETDATE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getdate
+\(em convert user format date and time
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+struct tm *getdate(const char *\fIstring\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetdate\fR()
+function shall convert a string representation of a date or time
+into a broken-down time.
+.P
+The external variable or macro
+.IR getdate_err ,
+which has type
+.BR int ,
+is used by
+\fIgetdate\fR()
+to return error values. It is unspecified whether
+.IR getdate_err
+is a macro or an identifier declared with external linkage, and whether
+or not it is a modifiable lvalue. If a macro definition is suppressed
+in order to access an actual object, or a program defines an identifier
+with the name
+.IR getdate_err ,
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+Templates are used to parse and interpret the input string. The
+templates are contained in a text file identified by the environment
+variable
+.IR DATEMSK .
+The
+.IR DATEMSK
+variable should be set to indicate the full pathname of the file that
+contains the templates. The first line in the template that matches
+the input specification is used for interpretation and conversion into
+the internal time format.
+.P
+The following conversion specifications shall be supported:
+.IP "\fR%%\fR" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR % .
+.IP "\fR%a\fR" 8
+Abbreviated weekday name.
+.IP "\fR%A\fR" 8
+Full weekday name.
+.IP "\fR%b\fR" 8
+Abbreviated month name.
+.IP "\fR%B\fR" 8
+Full month name.
+.IP "\fR%c\fR" 8
+Locale's appropriate date and time representation.
+.IP "\fR%C\fR" 8
+Century number [00,99]; leading zeros are permitted but not required.
+.IP "\fR%d\fR" 8
+Day of month [01,31]; the leading 0 is optional.
+.IP "\fR%D\fR" 8
+Date as
+.BR %m /\c
+.BR %d /\c
+.BR %y .
+.IP "\fR%e\fR" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR %d .
+.IP "\fR%h\fR" 8
+Abbreviated month name.
+.IP "\fR%H\fR" 8
+Hour [00,23].
+.IP "\fR%I\fR" 8
+Hour [01,12].
+.IP "\fR%m\fR" 8
+Month number [01,12].
+.IP "\fR%M\fR" 8
+Minute [00,59].
+.IP "\fR%n\fR" 8
+Equivalent to
+<newline>.
+.IP "\fR%p\fR" 8
+Locale's equivalent of either AM or PM.
+.IP "\fR%r\fR" 8
+The locale's appropriate representation of time in AM and PM notation.
+In the POSIX locale, this shall be equivalent to
+.BR %I :\c
+.BR %M :\c
+.BR %S
+.BR %p .
+.IP "\fR%R\fR" 8
+Time as
+.BR %H :\c
+.BR %M .
+.IP "\fR%S\fR" 8
+Seconds [00,60]. The range goes to 60 (rather than stopping at 59)
+to allow positive leap seconds to be expressed. Since leap seconds
+cannot be predicted by any algorithm, leap second data must come from
+some external source.
+.IP "\fR%t\fR" 8
+Equivalent to
+<tab>.
+.IP "\fR%T\fR" 8
+Time as
+.BR %H :\c
+.BR %M :\c
+.BR %S .
+.IP "\fR%w\fR" 8
+Weekday number (Sunday = [0,6]).
+.IP "\fR%x\fR" 8
+Locale's appropriate date representation.
+.IP "\fR%X\fR" 8
+Locale's appropriate time representation.
+.IP "\fR%y\fR" 8
+Year within century. When a century is not otherwise specified, values
+in the range [69,99] shall refer to years 1969 to 1999 inclusive,
+and values in the range [00,68] shall refer to years 2000 to 2068
+inclusive.
+.RS 8 
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+It is expected that in a future version of this standard the default
+century inferred from a 2-digit year will change. (This would apply
+to all commands accepting a 2-digit year as input.)
+.P
+.RE
+.IP "\fR%Y\fR" 8
+Year as
+.BR \(dqccyy\(dq 
+(for example, 2001).
+.IP "\fR%Z\fR" 8
+Timezone name or no characters if no timezone exists. If the
+timezone supplied by
+.BR %Z
+is not the timezone that
+\fIgetdate\fR()
+expects, an invalid input specification error shall result. The
+\fIgetdate\fR()
+function calculates an expected timezone based on information supplied
+to the function (such as the hour, day, and month).
+.P
+The match between the template and input specification performed by
+\fIgetdate\fR()
+shall be case-insensitive.
+.P
+The month and weekday names can consist of any combination of upper and
+lowercase letters. The process can request that the input date or time
+specification be in a specific language by setting the
+.IR LC_TIME
+category
+(see
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)").
+.P
+Leading zeros are not necessary for the descriptors that allow leading
+zeros. However, at most two digits are allowed for those descriptors,
+including leading zeros. Extra white space in either the template file
+or in
+.IR string
+shall be ignored.
+.P
+The results are undefined if the conversion specifications
+.BR %c ,
+.BR %x ,
+and
+.BR %X
+include unsupported conversion specifications.
+.P
+The following rules apply for converting the input specification into
+the internal format:
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.BR %Z
+is being scanned, then
+\fIgetdate\fR()
+shall initialize the broken-down time to be the current time in the
+scanned timezone. Otherwise, it shall initialize the broken-down time
+based on the current local time as if
+\fIlocaltime\fR()
+had been called.
+.IP " *" 4
+If only the weekday is given, the day chosen shall be the day, starting
+with today and moving into the future, which first matches the named
+day.
+.IP " *" 4
+If only the month (and no year) is given, the month chosen shall be the
+month, starting with the current month and moving into the future,
+which first matches the named month. The first day of the month shall
+be assumed if no day is given.
+.IP " *" 4
+If no hour, minute, and second are given, the current hour, minute, and
+second shall be assumed.
+.IP " *" 4
+If no date is given, the hour chosen shall be the hour, starting with
+the current hour and moving into the future, which first matches the
+named hour.
+.P
+If a conversion specification in the DATEMSK file does not correspond
+to one of the conversion specifications above, the behavior is
+unspecified.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetdate\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgetdate\fR()
+shall return a pointer to a
+.BR "struct tm" .
+Otherwise, it shall return a null pointer and set
+.IR getdate_err
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIgetdate\fR()
+function shall fail in the following cases, setting
+.IR getdate_err
+to the value shown in the list below. Any changes to
+.IR errno
+are unspecified.
+.IP " 1." 4
+The
+.IR DATEMSK
+environment variable is null or undefined.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The template file cannot be opened for reading.
+.IP " 3." 4
+Failed to get file status information.
+.IP " 4." 4
+The template file is not a regular file.
+.IP " 5." 4
+An I/O error is encountered while reading the template file.
+.IP " 6." 4
+Memory allocation failed (not enough memory available).
+.IP " 7." 4
+There is no line in the template that matches the input.
+.IP " 8." 4
+Invalid input specification. For example, February 31; or a time is
+specified that cannot be represented in a
+.BR time_t
+(representing the time in seconds since the Epoch).
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.IP " 1." 4
+The following example shows the possible contents of a template:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+%m
+%A %B %d, %Y, %H:%M:%S
+%A
+%B
+%m/%d/%y %I %p
+%d,%m,%Y %H:%M
+at %A the %dst of %B in %Y
+run job at %I %p,%B %dnd
+%A den %d. %B %Y %H.%M Uhr
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+The following are examples of valid input specifications for the
+template in Example 1:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+getdate("10/1/87 4 PM");
+getdate("Friday");
+getdate("Friday September 18, 1987, 10:30:30");
+getdate("24,9,1986 10:30");
+getdate("at monday the 1st of december in 1986");
+getdate("run job at 3 PM, december 2nd");
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the
+.IR LC_TIME
+category is set to a German locale that includes
+.IR freitag
+as a weekday name and
+.IR oktober
+as a month name, the following would be valid:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+getdate("freitag den 10. oktober 1986 10.30 Uhr");
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+The following example shows how local date and time specification can
+be defined in the template:
+.TS
+box tab(!) center;
+cB | cB
+lf5 | lf5.
+Invocation!Line in Template
+_
+getdate("11/27/86")!%m/%d/%y
+getdate("27.11.86")!%d.%m.%y
+getdate("86-11-27")!%y-%m-%d
+getdate("Friday 12:00:00")!%A %H:%M:%S
+.TE
+.IP " 4." 4
+The following examples help to illustrate the above rules assuming that
+the current date is Mon Sep 22 12:19:47 EDT 1986 and the
+.IR LC_TIME
+category is set to the default C locale:
+.TS
+box tab(!) center;
+cB | cB | cB
+lf5 | lf5 | l.
+Input!Line in Template!Date
+_
+Mon!%a!Mon Sep 22 12:19:47 EDT 1986
+Sun!%a!Sun Sep 28 12:19:47 EDT 1986
+Fri!%a!Fri Sep 26 12:19:47 EDT 1986
+September!%B!Mon Sep 1 12:19:47 EDT 1986
+January!%B!Thu Jan 1 12:19:47 EST 1987
+December!%B!Mon Dec 1 12:19:47 EST 1986
+Sep Mon!%b %a!Mon Sep 1 12:19:47 EDT 1986
+Jan Fri!%b %a!Fri Jan 2 12:19:47 EST 1987
+Dec Mon!%b %a!Mon Dec 1 12:19:47 EST 1986
+Jan Wed 1989!%b %a %Y!Wed Jan 4 12:19:47 EST 1989
+Fri 9!%a %H!Fri Sep 26 09:00:00 EDT 1986
+Feb 10:30!%b %H:%S!Sun Feb 1 10:00:30 EST 1987
+10:30!%H:%M!Tue Sep 23 10:30:00 EDT 1986
+13:30!%H:%M!Mon Sep 22 13:30:00 EDT 1986
+.TE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Although historical versions of
+\fIgetdate\fR()
+did not require that
+.IR <time.h> 
+declare the external variable
+.IR getdate_err ,
+this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does require it. The standard developers encourage applications
+to remove declarations of
+.IR getdate_err
+and instead incorporate the declaration by including
+.IR <time.h> .
+.P
+Applications should use
+.BR %Y
+(4-digit years) in preference to
+.BR %y
+(2-digit years).
+.SH RATIONALE
+In standard locales, the conversion specifications
+.BR %c ,
+.BR %x ,
+and
+.BR %X
+do not include unsupported conversion specifiers and so the text
+regarding results being undefined is not a problem in that case.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlocaltime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItimes\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getdelim.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getdelim.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..92e8255
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getdelim.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,221 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETDELIM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getdelim, getline
+\(em read a delimited record from
+.IR stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+ssize_t getdelim(char **restrict \fIlineptr\fP, size_t *restrict \fIn\fP,
+    int \fIdelimiter\fP, FILE *restrict \fIstream\fP);
+ssize_t getline(char **restrict \fIlineptr\fP, size_t *restrict \fIn\fP,
+    FILE *restrict \fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetdelim\fR()
+function shall read from
+.IR stream
+until it encounters a character matching the
+.IR delimiter
+character. The
+.IR delimiter
+argument is an
+.BR int ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a character
+representable as an
+.BR "unsigned char"
+of equal value that terminates the read process. If the
+.IR delimiter
+argument has any other value, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The application shall ensure that
+.IR *lineptr
+is a valid argument that could be passed to the
+\fIfree\fR()
+function. If
+.IR *n
+is non-zero, the application shall ensure that
+.IR *lineptr
+either points to an object of size at least
+.IR *n
+bytes, or is a null pointer.
+.P
+The size of the object pointed to by
+.IR *lineptr
+shall be increased to fit the incoming line, if it isn't already large
+enough, including room for the delimiter and a terminating NUL. The
+characters read, including any delimiter, shall be stored in the string
+pointed to by the
+.IR lineptr
+argument, and a terminating NUL added when the delimiter or end of file is
+encountered.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetline\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIgetdelim\fR()
+function with the
+.IR delimiter
+character equal to the
+<newline>
+character.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetdelim\fR()
+and
+\fIgetline\fR()
+functions may mark the last data access timestamp of the file associated
+with
+.IR stream
+for update. The last data access timestamp shall be marked for update
+by the first successful execution of
+\fIfgetc\fR(),
+\fIfgets\fR(),
+\fIfread\fR(),
+\fIfscanf\fR(),
+\fIgetc\fR(),
+\fIgetchar\fR(),
+\fIgetdelim\fR(),
+\fIgetline\fR(),
+\fIgets\fR(),
+or
+\fIscanf\fR()
+using
+.IR stream
+that returns data not supplied by a prior call to
+\fIungetc\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIgetline\fR()
+and
+\fIgetdelim\fR()
+functions shall return the number of characters written into the buffer,
+including the delimiter character if one was encountered before EOF,
+but excluding the terminating NUL character. If no characters were read,
+and the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set, or if the stream is
+at end-of-file, the end-of-file indicator for the stream shall be set and
+the function shall return \(mi1. If an error occurs, the error indicator
+for the stream shall be set, and the function shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+For the conditions under which the
+\fIgetdelim\fR()
+and
+\fIgetline\fR()
+functions shall fail and may fail, refer to
+.IR "\fIfgetc\fR\^(\|)".
+.P
+In addition, these functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+.IR lineptr
+or
+.IR n
+is a null pointer.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory is available.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+More than
+{SSIZE_MAX}
+characters were read without encountering the
+.IR delimiter
+character.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+int main(void)
+{
+    FILE *fp;
+    char *line = NULL;
+    size_t len = 0;
+    ssize_t read;
+    fp = fopen("/etc/motd", "r");
+    if (fp == NULL)
+        exit(1);
+    while ((read = getline(&line, &len, fp)) != -1) {
+        printf("Retrieved line of length %zu :\en", read);
+        printf("%s", line);
+    }
+    if (ferror(fp)) {
+        /* handle error */
+    }
+    free(line);
+    fclose(fp);
+    return 0;
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Setting
+.IR *lineptr
+to a null pointer and
+.IR *n
+to zero are allowed and a recommended way to start parsing a file.
+.P
+The
+\fIferror\fR()
+or
+\fIfeof\fR()
+functions should be used to distinguish between an error condition and
+an end-of-file condition.
+.P
+Although a NUL terminator is always supplied after the line, note that
+.IR strlen (* lineptr )
+will be smaller than the return value if the line contains embedded
+NUL characters.
+.SH RATIONALE
+These functions are widely used to solve the problem that the
+\fIfgets\fR()
+function has with long lines. The functions automatically enlarge the
+target buffers if needed. These are especially useful since they reduce
+code needed for applications.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfgetc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfgets\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfree\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getegid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getegid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..62008be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getegid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETEGID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getegid
+\(em get the effective group ID
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+gid_t getegid(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetegid\fR()
+function shall return the effective group ID of the calling process.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIgetegid\fR()
+function shall always be successful and no return value is reserved to
+indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgeteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetegid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIseteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetregid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetreuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetuid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getenv.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getenv.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..99c8cfd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getenv.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,220 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETENV "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getenv
+\(em get value of an environment variable
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+char *getenv(const char *\fIname\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetenv\fR()
+function shall search the environment of the calling process (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables")
+for the environment variable
+.IR name
+if it exists and return a pointer to the value of the environment
+variable. If the specified environment variable cannot be found, a null
+pointer shall be returned. The application shall ensure that it does
+not modify the string pointed to by the
+\fIgetenv\fR()
+function.
+.P
+The returned string pointer might be invalidated or
+the string content might be overwritten by a subsequent call to
+\fIgetenv\fR(),
+\fIsetenv\fR(),
+\fIunsetenv\fR(),
+or (if supported)
+\fIputenv\fR()
+but they shall not be affected by a call to any other function in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetenv\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgetenv\fR()
+shall return a pointer to a string containing the
+.IR value
+for the specified
+.IR name .
+If the specified
+.IR name
+cannot be found in the environment of the calling process, a null
+pointer shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Getting the Value of an Environment Variable"
+.P
+The following example gets the value of the
+.IR HOME
+environment variable.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdlib.h>
+\&...
+const char *name = "HOME";
+char *value;
+.P
+value = getenv(name);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIclearenv\fR()
+function was considered but rejected. The
+\fIputenv\fR()
+function has now been included for alignment with the Single UNIX
+Specification.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetenv\fR()
+function is inherently not thread-safe because it returns a value
+pointing to static data.
+.P
+Conforming applications are required not to directly modify the pointers
+to which
+.IR environ
+points, but to use only the
+\fIsetenv\fR(),
+\fIunsetenv\fR(),
+and
+\fIputenv\fR()
+functions, or assignment to
+.IR environ
+itself, to manipulate the process environment. This constraint allows
+the implementation to properly manage the memory it allocates. This
+enables the implementation to free any space it has allocated to strings
+(and perhaps the pointers to them) stored in
+.IR environ
+when
+\fIunsetenv\fR()
+is called. A C runtime start-up procedure (that which invokes
+\fImain\fR()
+and perhaps initializes
+.IR environ )
+can also initialize a flag indicating that none of the environment has
+yet been copied to allocated storage, or that the separate table has
+not yet been initialized. If the application switches to a complete new
+environment by assigning a new value to
+.IR environ ,
+this can be detected by
+\fIgetenv\fR(),
+\fIsetenv\fR(),
+\fIunsetenv\fR(),
+or
+\fIputenv\fR()
+and the implementation can at that point reinitialize based on the new
+environment. (This may include copying the environment strings into a
+new array and assigning
+.IR environ
+to point to it.)
+.P
+In fact, for higher performance of
+\fIgetenv\fR(),
+implementations that do not provide
+\fIputenv\fR()
+could also maintain a separate copy of the environment in a data structure
+that could be searched much more quickly (such as an indexed hash table,
+or a binary tree), and update both it and the linear list at
+.IR environ
+when
+\fIsetenv\fR()
+or
+\fIunsetenv\fR()
+is invoked. On implementations that do provide
+\fIputenv\fR(),
+such a copy might still be worthwhile but would need to allow for the
+fact that applications can directly modify the content of environment
+strings added with
+\fIputenv\fR().
+For example, if an environment string found by searching the copy is
+one that was added using
+\fIputenv\fR(),
+the implementation would need to check that the string in
+.IR environ
+still has the same name (and value, if the copy includes values), and
+whenever searching the copy produces no match the implementation would
+then need to search each environment string in
+.IR environ
+that was added using
+\fIputenv\fR()
+in case any of them have changed their names and now match. Thus, each
+use of
+\fIputenv\fR()
+to add to the environment would reduce the speed advantage of having
+the copy.
+.P
+Performance of
+\fIgetenv\fR()
+can be important for applications which have large numbers of
+environment variables. Typically, applications like this use the
+environment as a resource database of user-configurable parameters.
+The fact that these variables are in the user's shell environment
+usually means that any other program that uses environment variables
+(such as
+.IR ls ,
+which attempts to use
+.IR COLUMNS ),
+or really almost any utility (\c
+.IR LANG ,
+.IR LC_ALL ,
+and so on) is similarly slowed down by the linear search through the
+variables.
+.P
+An implementation that maintains separate data structures, or even one
+that manages the memory it consumes, is not currently required as it
+was thought it would reduce consensus among implementors who do not
+want to change their historical implementations.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+A future version may add one or more functions to access and modify the
+environment in a thread-safe manner.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIputenv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetenv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunsetenv\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/geteuid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/geteuid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4ec16bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/geteuid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETEUID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+geteuid
+\(em get the effective user ID
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+uid_t geteuid(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgeteuid\fR()
+function shall return the effective user ID of the calling process.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIgeteuid\fR()
+function shall always be successful and no return value is reserved to
+indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetegid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetegid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIseteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetregid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetreuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetuid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getgid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getgid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a1901e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getgid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETGID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getgid
+\(em get the real group ID
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+gid_t getgid(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetgid\fR()
+function shall return the real group ID of the calling process.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIgetgid\fR()
+function shall always be successful and no return value is reserved
+to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetegid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgeteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetegid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIseteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetregid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetreuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetuid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getgrent.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getgrent.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1ae72e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getgrent.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETGRENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getgrent
+\(em get the group database entry
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <grp.h>
+.P
+struct group *getgrent(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIendgrent\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getgrgid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getgrgid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7d4b51e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getgrgid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,235 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETGRGID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getgrgid,
+getgrgid_r
+\(em get group database entry for a group ID
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <grp.h>
+.P
+struct group *getgrgid(gid_t \fIgid\fP);
+int getgrgid_r(gid_t \fIgid\fP, struct group *\fIgrp\fP, char *\fIbuffer\fP,
+    size_t \fIbufsize\fP, struct group **\fIresult\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetgrgid\fR()
+function shall search the group database for an entry with a matching
+.IR gid .
+.P
+The
+\fIgetgrgid\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetgrgid_r\fR()
+function shall update the
+.BR group
+structure pointed to by
+.IR grp
+and store a pointer to that structure at the location pointed to by
+.IR result .
+The structure shall contain an entry from the group database with a
+matching
+.IR gid .
+Storage referenced by the group structure is allocated from the memory
+provided with the
+.IR buffer
+parameter, which is
+.IR bufsize
+bytes in size. A call to
+.IR sysconf (_SC_GETGR_R_SIZE_MAX)
+returns either \(mi1 without changing
+.IR errno
+or an initial value suggested for the size of this buffer.
+A null pointer shall be returned at the location pointed to by
+.IR result
+on error or if the requested entry is not found.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgetgrgid\fR()
+shall return a pointer to a
+.BR "struct group"
+with the structure defined in
+.IR <grp.h> 
+with a matching entry if one is found. The
+\fIgetgrgid\fR()
+function shall return a null pointer if either the requested entry was
+not found, or an error occurred. On error,
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.P
+The application shall not modify the structure to which the return
+value points, nor any storage areas pointed to by pointers within the
+structure. The returned pointer, and pointers within the structure,
+might be invalidated or the structure or the storage areas might be
+overwritten by a subsequent call to
+\fIgetgrent\fR(),
+\fIgetgrgid\fR(),
+or
+\fIgetgrnam\fR().
+.P
+If successful, the
+\fIgetgrgid_r\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIgetgrgid\fR()
+and
+\fIgetgrgid_r\fR()
+functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error has occurred.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was caught during
+\fIgetgrgid\fR().
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+The maximum allowable number of files is currently open in the system.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetgrgid_r\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+Insufficient storage was supplied via
+.IR buffer
+and
+.IR bufsize
+to contain the data to be referenced by the resulting
+.BR group
+structure.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Note that
+.IR sysconf (_SC_GETGR_R_SIZE_MAX)
+may return \(mi1 if there is no hard limit on the size of the buffer
+needed to store all the groups returned. This example shows how an
+application can allocate a buffer of sufficient size to work with
+\fIgetgrid_r\fR().
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+long int initlen = sysconf(_SC_GETGR_R_SIZE_MAX);
+size_t len;
+if (initlen =\|= \(mi1)
+    /* Default initial length. */
+    len = 1024;
+else
+    len = (size_t) initlen;
+struct group result;
+struct group *resultp;
+char *buffer = malloc(len);
+if (buffer =\|= NULL)
+    ...handle error...
+int e;
+while ((e = getgrgid_r(42, &result, buffer, len, &resultp)) =\|= ERANGE)
+    {
+    size_t newlen = 2 * len;
+    if (newlen < len)
+        ...handle error...
+    len = newlen;
+    char *newbuffer = realloc(buffer, len);
+    if (newbuffer =\|= NULL)
+        ...handle error...
+    buffer = newbuffer;
+    }
+if (e != 0)
+    ...handle error...
+free (buffer);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Finding an Entry in the Group Database"
+.P
+The following example uses
+\fIgetgrgid\fR()
+to search the group database for a group ID that was previously stored
+in a
+.BR stat
+structure, then prints out the group name if it is found. If the group
+is not found, the program prints the numeric value of the group for the
+entry.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <grp.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+struct stat statbuf;
+struct group *grp;
+\&...
+if ((grp = getgrgid(statbuf.st_gid)) != NULL)
+    printf(" %-8.8s", grp->gr_name);
+else
+    printf(" %-8d", statbuf.st_gid);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0 before calling
+\fIgetgrgid\fR().
+If
+.IR errno
+is set on return, an error occurred.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetgrgid_r\fR()
+function is thread-safe and shall return values in a user-supplied
+buffer instead of possibly using a static data area that may be
+overwritten by each call.
+.P
+Portable applications should take into account that it is usual
+for an implementation to return \(mi1 from
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+indicating that there is no maximum for _SC_GETGR_R_SIZE_MAX.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIendgrent\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetgrnam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<grp.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getgrnam.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getgrnam.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa6ab98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getgrnam.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,210 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETGRNAM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getgrnam,
+getgrnam_r
+\(em search group database for a name
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <grp.h>
+.P
+struct group *getgrnam(const char *\fIname\fP);
+int getgrnam_r(const char *\fIname\fP, struct group *\fIgrp\fP, char *\fIbuffer\fP,
+    size_t \fIbufsize\fP, struct group **\fIresult\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetgrnam\fR()
+function shall search the group database for an entry with a matching
+.IR name .
+.P
+The
+\fIgetgrnam\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetgrnam_r\fR()
+function shall update the
+.BR group
+structure pointed to by
+.IR grp
+and store a pointer to that structure at the location pointed to by
+.IR result .
+The structure shall contain an entry from the group database with a
+matching
+.IR name .
+Storage referenced by the
+.BR group
+structure is allocated from the memory provided with the
+.IR buffer
+parameter, which is
+.IR bufsize
+bytes in size. A call to
+.IR sysconf (_SC_GETGR_R_SIZE_MAX)
+returns either \(mi1 without changing
+.IR errno
+or an initial value suggested for the size of this buffer.
+A null pointer is returned at the location pointed to by
+.IR result
+on error or if the requested entry is not found.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIgetgrnam\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to a
+.BR "struct group"
+with the structure defined in
+.IR <grp.h> 
+with a matching entry if one is found. The
+\fIgetgrnam\fR()
+function shall return a null pointer if either the requested entry
+was not found, or an error occurred. On error,
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.P
+The application shall not modify the structure to which the return
+value points, nor any storage areas pointed to by pointers within the
+structure. The returned pointer, and pointers within the structure,
+might be invalidated or the structure or the storage areas might be
+overwritten by a subsequent call to
+\fIgetgrent\fR(),
+\fIgetgrgid\fR(),
+or
+\fIgetgrnam\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIgetgrnam_r\fR()
+function shall return zero on success or if the requested entry was not
+found and no error has occurred. If any error has occurred, an error
+number shall be returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIgetgrnam\fR()
+and
+\fIgetgrnam_r\fR()
+functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error has occurred.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was caught during
+\fIgetgrnam\fR().
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+The maximum allowable number of files is currently open in the
+system.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetgrnam_r\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+Insufficient storage was supplied via
+.IR buffer
+and
+.IR bufsize
+to contain the data to be referenced by the resulting
+.BR group
+structure.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Note that
+.IR sysconf (_SC_GETGR_R_SIZE_MAX)
+may return \(mi1 if there is no hard limit on the size of the buffer
+needed to store all the groups returned. This example shows how an
+application can allocate a buffer of sufficient size to work with
+\fIgetgrnam_r\fR().
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+long int initlen = sysconf(_SC_GETGR_R_SIZE_MAX);
+size_t len;
+if (initlen =\|= \(mi1)
+    /* Default initial length. */
+    len = 1024;
+else
+    len = (size_t) initlen;
+struct group result;
+struct group *resultp;
+char *buffer = malloc(len);
+if (buffer =\|= NULL)
+    ...handle error...
+int e;
+while ((e = getgrnam_r("somegroup", &result, buffer, len, &resultp))
+        =\|= ERANGE)
+    {
+    size_t newlen = 2 * len;
+    if (newlen < len)
+        ...handle error...
+    len = newlen;
+    char *newbuffer = realloc(buffer, len);
+    if (newbuffer =\|= NULL)
+        ...handle error...
+    buffer = newbuffer;
+    }
+if (e != 0)
+    ...handle error...
+free (buffer);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0 before calling
+\fIgetgrnam\fR().
+If
+.IR errno
+is set on return, an error occurred.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetgrnam_r\fR()
+function is thread-safe and shall return values in a user-supplied
+buffer instead of possibly using a static data area that may be
+overwritten by each call.
+.P
+Portable applications should take into account that it is usual
+for an implementation to return \(mi1 from
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+indicating that there is no maximum for _SC_GETGR_R_SIZE_MAX.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIendgrent\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetgrgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<grp.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getgroups.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getgroups.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..28f14a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getgroups.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETGROUPS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getgroups
+\(em get supplementary group IDs
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int getgroups(int \fIgidsetsize\fP, gid_t \fIgrouplist\fP[]);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetgroups\fR()
+function shall fill in the array
+.IR grouplist
+with the current supplementary group IDs of the calling process. It is
+implementation-defined whether
+\fIgetgroups\fR()
+also returns the effective group ID in the
+.IR grouplist
+array.
+.P
+The
+.IR gidsetsize
+argument specifies the number of elements in the array
+.IR grouplist .
+The actual number of group IDs stored in the array shall be returned.
+The values of array entries with indices greater than or equal to the
+value returned are undefined.
+.P
+If
+.IR gidsetsize
+is 0,
+\fIgetgroups\fR()
+shall return the number of group IDs that it would otherwise return
+without modifying the array pointed to by
+.IR grouplist .
+.P
+If the effective group ID of the process is returned with the
+supplementary group IDs, the value returned shall always be greater
+than or equal to one and less than or equal to the value of
+{NGROUPS_MAX}+1.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the number of supplementary group IDs shall
+be returned. A return value of \(mi1 indicates failure and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIgetgroups\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR gidsetsize
+argument is non-zero and less than the number of group IDs that would
+have been returned.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Getting the Supplementary Group IDs of the Calling Process"
+.P
+The following example places the current supplementary group IDs of the
+calling process into the
+.IR group
+array.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+\&...
+gid_t *group;
+int nogroups;
+long ngroups_max;
+.P
+ngroups_max = sysconf(_SC_NGROUPS_MAX) + 1;
+group = (gid_t *)malloc(ngroups_max *sizeof(gid_t));
+.P
+ngroups = getgroups(ngroups_max, group);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The related function
+\fIsetgroups\fR()
+is a privileged operation and therefore is not covered by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+As implied by the definition of supplementary groups, the effective
+group ID
+may appear in the array returned by
+\fIgetgroups\fR()
+or it may be returned only by
+\fIgetegid\fR().
+Duplication may exist, but the application needs to call
+\fIgetegid\fR()
+to be sure of getting all of the information. Various implementation
+variations and administrative sequences cause the set of groups
+appearing in the result of
+\fIgetgroups\fR()
+to vary in order and as to whether the effective group ID is included,
+even when the set of groups is the same (in the mathematical sense of
+``set''). (The history of a process and its parents could affect the
+details of the result.)
+.P
+Application developers should note that
+{NGROUPS_MAX}
+is not necessarily a constant on all implementations.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetegid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetgid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/gethostent.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/gethostent.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..835f4d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/gethostent.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETHOSTENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+gethostent
+\(em network host database functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <netdb.h>
+.P
+struct hostent *gethostent(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIendhostent\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/gethostid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/gethostid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..386d6d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/gethostid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETHOSTID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+gethostid
+\(em get an identifier for the current host
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+long gethostid(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgethostid\fR()
+function shall retrieve a 32-bit identifier for the current host.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgethostid\fR()
+shall return an identifier for the current host.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not define the domain in which the return value is unique.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIinitstate\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/gethostname.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/gethostname.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..93e4c39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/gethostname.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETHOSTNAME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+gethostname
+\(em get name of current host
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int gethostname(char *\fIname\fP, size_t \fInamelen\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgethostname\fR()
+function shall return the standard host name for the current machine.
+The
+.IR namelen
+argument shall specify the size of the array pointed to by the
+.IR name
+argument. The returned name shall be null-terminated, except that if
+.IR namelen
+is an insufficient length to hold the host name, then the returned name
+shall be truncated and it is unspecified whether the returned name is
+null-terminated.
+.P
+Host names are limited to
+{HOST_NAME_MAX}
+bytes.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned; otherwise, \(mi1 shall
+be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgethostid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuname\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getitimer.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getitimer.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cd48ace
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getitimer.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETITIMER "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getitimer,
+setitimer
+\(em get and set value of interval timer
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/time.h>
+.P
+int getitimer(int \fIwhich\fP, struct itimerval *\fIvalue\fP);
+int setitimer(int \fIwhich\fP, const struct itimerval *restrict \fIvalue\fP,
+    struct itimerval *restrict \fIovalue\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetitimer\fR()
+function shall store the current value of the timer specified by
+.IR which
+into the structure pointed to by
+.IR value .
+The
+\fIsetitimer\fR()
+function shall set the timer specified by
+.IR which
+to the value specified in the structure pointed to by
+.IR value ,
+and if
+.IR ovalue
+is not a null pointer, store the previous value of the timer in the
+structure pointed to by
+.IR ovalue .
+.P
+A timer value is defined by the
+.BR itimerval
+structure, specified in
+.IR <sys/time.h> .
+If
+.IR it_value
+is non-zero, it shall indicate the time to the next timer expiration.
+If
+.IR it_interval
+is non-zero, it shall specify a value to be used in reloading
+.IR it_value
+when the timer expires. Setting
+.IR it_value
+to 0 shall disable a timer, regardless of the value of
+.IR it_interval .
+Setting
+.IR it_interval
+to 0 shall disable a timer after its next expiration (assuming
+.IR it_value
+is non-zero).
+.P
+Implementations may place limitations on the granularity of timer
+values. For each interval timer, if the requested timer value requires
+a finer granularity than the implementation supports, the actual timer
+value shall be rounded up to the next supported value.
+.P
+An XSI-conforming implementation provides each process with at least
+three interval timers, which are indicated by the
+.IR which
+argument:
+.IP ITIMER_PROF 14
+Decrements both in process virtual time and when the system is running
+on behalf of the process. It is designed to be used by interpreters in
+statistically profiling the execution of interpreted programs. Each
+time the ITIMER_PROF timer expires, the SIGPROF signal is delivered.
+.IP ITIMER_REAL 14
+Decrements in real time. A SIGALRM signal is delivered when this timer
+expires.
+.IP ITIMER_VIRTUAL 14
+Decrements in process virtual time. It runs only when the process is
+executing. A SIGVTALRM signal is delivered when it expires.
+.P
+The interaction between
+\fIsetitimer\fR()
+and
+\fIalarm\fR()
+or
+\fIsleep\fR()
+is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgetitimer\fR()
+or
+\fIsetitimer\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsetitimer\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR value
+argument is not in canonical form. (In canonical form, the number of
+microseconds is a non-negative integer less than 1\|000\|000 and the
+number of seconds is a non-negative integer.)
+.P
+The
+\fIgetitimer\fR()
+and
+\fIsetitimer\fR()
+functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR which
+argument is not recognized.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications should use the
+\fItimer_gettime\fR()
+and
+\fItimer_settime\fR()
+functions instead of the obsolescent
+\fIgetitimer\fR()
+and
+\fIsetitimer\fR()
+functions, respectively.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIgetitimer\fR()
+and
+\fIsetitimer\fR()
+functions may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIalarm\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsleep\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItimer_getoverrun\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getline.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getline.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3081a23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getline.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETLINE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getline
+\(em read a delimited record from
+.IR stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+ssize_t getline(char **restrict \fIlineptr\fP, size_t *restrict \fIn\fP,
+    FILE *restrict \fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIgetdelim\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getlogin.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getlogin.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4d42edc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getlogin.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,225 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETLOGIN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getlogin,
+getlogin_r
+\(em get login name
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+char *getlogin(void);
+int getlogin_r(char *\fIname\fP, size_t \fInamesize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetlogin\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to a string containing the user name
+associated by the login activity with the controlling terminal of the
+current process. If
+\fIgetlogin\fR()
+returns a non-null pointer, then that pointer points to the name that
+the user logged in under, even if there are several login names with
+the same user ID.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetlogin\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetlogin_r\fR()
+function shall put the name associated by the login activity with the
+controlling terminal of the current process in the character array
+pointed to by
+.IR name .
+The array is
+.IR namesize
+characters long and should have space for the name and the terminating
+null character. The maximum size of the login name is
+{LOGIN_NAME_MAX}.
+.P
+If
+\fIgetlogin_r\fR()
+is successful,
+.IR name
+points to the name the user used at login, even if there are several
+login names with the same user ID.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetlogin\fR()
+and
+\fIgetlogin_r\fR()
+functions may make use of file descriptors 0, 1, and 2 to find the
+controlling terminal of the current process, examining each in turn
+until the terminal is found. If in this case none of these three file
+descriptors is open to the controlling terminal, these functions may
+fail. The method used to find the terminal associated with a file
+descriptor may depend on the file descriptor being open to the actual
+terminal device, not
+.BR /dev/tty .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgetlogin\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the login name or a null pointer if the
+user's login name cannot be found. Otherwise, it shall return a null
+pointer and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.P
+The application shall not modify the string returned. The returned
+pointer might be invalidated or the string content might be overwritten
+by a subsequent call to
+\fIgetlogin\fR().
+.P
+If successful, the
+\fIgetlogin_r\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+The maximum allowable number of files is currently open in the system.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTTY
+None of the file descriptors 0, 1, or 2 is open to the controlling
+terminal of the current process.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+The calling process has no controlling terminal.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetlogin_r\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+The value of
+.IR namesize
+is smaller than the length of the string to be returned including the
+terminating null character.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Getting the User Login Name" S
+.P
+The following example calls the
+\fIgetlogin\fR()
+function to obtain the name of the user associated with the calling
+process, and passes this information to the
+\fIgetpwnam\fR()
+function to get the associated user database information.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <pwd.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+char *lgn;
+struct passwd *pw;
+\&...
+if ((lgn = getlogin()) == NULL || (pw = getpwnam(lgn)) == NULL) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "Get of user information failed.\en"); exit(1);
+    }
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Three names associated with the current process can be determined:
+.IR getpwuid (\c
+\fIgeteuid\fR())
+shall return the name associated with the effective user ID of the
+process;
+\fIgetlogin\fR()
+shall return the name associated with the current login activity; and
+.IR getpwuid (\c
+\fIgetuid\fR())
+shall return the name associated with the real user ID of the process.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetlogin_r\fR()
+function is thread-safe and returns values in a user-supplied buffer
+instead of possibly using a static data area that may be overwritten by
+each call.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIgetlogin\fR()
+function returns a pointer to the user's login name. The same user ID
+may be shared by several login names. If it is desired to get the user
+database entry that is used during login, the result of
+\fIgetlogin\fR()
+should be used to provide the argument to the
+\fIgetpwnam\fR()
+function. (This might be used to determine the user's login shell,
+particularly where a single user has multiple login shells with
+distinct login names, but the same user ID.)
+.P
+The information provided by the
+.IR cuserid (\|)
+function, which was originally defined in the POSIX.1\(hy1988 standard and subsequently
+removed, can be obtained by the following:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+getpwuid(geteuid())
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+while the information provided by historical implementations of
+.IR cuserid (\|)
+can be obtained by:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+getpwuid(getuid())
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The thread-safe version of this function places the user name in a
+user-supplied buffer and returns a non-zero value if it fails. The
+non-thread-safe version may return the name in a static data area that
+may be overwritten by each call.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetpwnam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpwuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgeteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetuid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<limits.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getmsg.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getmsg.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b660d1c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getmsg.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,410 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETMSG "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getmsg,
+getpmsg
+\(em receive next message from a STREAMS file (\fBSTREAMS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stropts.h>
+.P
+int getmsg(int \fIfildes\fP, struct strbuf *restrict \fIctlptr\fP,
+    struct strbuf *restrict \fIdataptr\fP, int *restrict \fIflagsp\fP);
+int getpmsg(int \fIfildes\fP, struct strbuf *restrict \fIctlptr\fP,
+    struct strbuf *restrict \fIdataptr\fP, int *restrict \fIbandp\fP,
+    int *restrict \fIflagsp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+function shall retrieve the contents of a message located at the head
+of the STREAM head read queue associated with a STREAMS file and place
+the contents into one or more buffers. The message contains either a
+data part, a control part, or both. The data and control parts of the
+message shall be placed into separate buffers, as described below. The
+semantics of each part are defined by the originator of the message.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetpmsg\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIgetmsg\fR(),
+except that it provides finer control over the priority of the messages
+received. Except where noted, all requirements on
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+also pertain to
+\fIgetpmsg\fR().
+.P
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument specifies a file descriptor referencing a STREAMS-based file.
+.P
+The
+.IR ctlptr
+and
+.IR dataptr
+arguments each point to a
+.BR strbuf
+structure, in which the
+.IR buf
+member points to a buffer in which the data or control information is
+to be placed, and the
+.IR maxlen
+member indicates the maximum number of bytes this buffer can hold. On
+return, the
+.IR len
+member shall contain the number of bytes of data or control information
+actually received. The
+.IR len
+member shall be set to 0 if there is a zero-length control or data part
+and
+.IR len
+shall be set to \(mi1 if no data or control information is present in
+the message.
+.P
+When
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+is called,
+.IR flagsp
+should point to an integer that indicates the type of message the
+process is able to receive. This is described further below.
+.P
+The
+.IR ctlptr
+argument is used to hold the control part of the message, and
+.IR dataptr
+is used to hold the data part of the message. If
+.IR ctlptr
+(or
+.IR dataptr )
+is a null pointer or the
+.IR maxlen
+member is \(mi1, the control (or data) part of the message shall not be
+processed and shall be left on the STREAM head read queue, and if the
+.IR ctlptr
+(or
+.IR dataptr )
+is not a null pointer,
+.IR len
+shall be set to \(mi1. If the
+.IR maxlen
+member is set to 0 and there is a zero-length control (or data) part,
+that zero-length part shall be removed from the read queue and
+.IR len
+shall be set to 0. If the
+.IR maxlen
+member is set to 0 and there are more than 0 bytes of control (or data)
+information, that information shall be left on the read queue and
+.IR len
+shall be set to 0. If the
+.IR maxlen
+member in
+.IR ctlptr
+(or
+.IR dataptr )
+is less than the control (or data) part of the message,
+.IR maxlen
+bytes shall be retrieved. In this case, the remainder of the message
+shall be left on the STREAM head read queue and a non-zero return value
+shall be provided.
+.P
+By default,
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+shall process the first available message on the STREAM head read
+queue. However, a process may choose to retrieve only high-priority
+messages by setting the integer pointed to by
+.IR flagsp
+to RS_HIPRI. In this case,
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+shall only process the next message if it is a high-priority message.
+When the integer pointed to by
+.IR flagsp
+is 0, any available message shall be retrieved. In this case, on
+return, the integer pointed to by
+.IR flagsp
+shall be set to RS_HIPRI if a high-priority message was retrieved, or 0
+otherwise.
+.P
+For
+\fIgetpmsg\fR(),
+the flags are different. The
+.IR flagsp
+argument points to a bitmask with the following mutually-exclusive
+flags defined: MSG_HIPRI, MSG_BAND, and MSG_ANY.
+Like
+\fIgetmsg\fR(),
+\fIgetpmsg\fR()
+shall process the first available message on the STREAM head read
+queue. A process may choose to retrieve only high-priority messages by
+setting the integer pointed to by
+.IR flagsp
+to MSG_HIPRI and the integer pointed to by
+.IR bandp
+to 0. In this case,
+\fIgetpmsg\fR()
+shall only process the next message if it is a high-priority message.
+In a similar manner, a process may choose to retrieve a message from a
+particular priority band by setting the integer pointed to by
+.IR flagsp
+to MSG_BAND and the integer pointed to by
+.IR bandp
+to the priority band of interest. In this case,
+\fIgetpmsg\fR()
+shall only process the next message if it is in a priority band equal
+to, or greater than, the integer pointed to by
+.IR bandp ,
+or if it is a high-priority message. If a process wants to get the
+first message off the queue, the integer pointed to by
+.IR flagsp
+should be set to MSG_ANY and the integer pointed to by
+.IR bandp
+should be set to 0. On return, if the message retrieved was a
+high-priority message, the integer pointed to by
+.IR flagsp
+shall be set to MSG_HIPRI and the integer pointed to by
+.IR bandp
+shall be set to 0. Otherwise, the integer pointed to by
+.IR flagsp
+shall be set to MSG_BAND and the integer pointed to by
+.IR bandp
+shall be set to the priority band of the message.
+.P
+If O_NONBLOCK is not set,
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+and
+\fIgetpmsg\fR()
+shall block until a message of the type specified by
+.IR flagsp
+is available at the front of the STREAM head read queue. If O_NONBLOCK
+is set and a message of the specified type is not present at the front
+of the read queue,
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+and
+\fIgetpmsg\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EAGAIN] .
+.P
+If a hangup occurs on the STREAM from which messages are retrieved,
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+and
+\fIgetpmsg\fR()
+shall continue to operate normally, as described above, until the
+STREAM head read queue is empty. Thereafter, they shall return 0 in the
+.IR len
+members of
+.IR ctlptr
+and
+.IR dataptr .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+and
+\fIgetpmsg\fR()
+shall return a non-negative value. A value of 0 indicates that a full
+message was read successfully. A return value of MORECTL indicates
+that more control
+information is waiting for retrieval. A return value of MOREDATA
+indicates that more data is waiting for retrieval. A return value of
+the bitwise-logical OR of MORECTL and MOREDATA indicates that both
+types of information remain. Subsequent
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+and
+\fIgetpmsg\fR()
+calls shall retrieve the remainder of the message. However, if a message
+of higher priority has come in on the STREAM head read queue, the next
+call to
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+or
+\fIgetpmsg\fR()
+shall retrieve that higher-priority message before retrieving the
+remainder of the previous message.
+.P
+If the high priority control part of the message is consumed, the
+message shall be placed back on the queue as a normal message of band
+0. Subsequent
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+and
+\fIgetpmsg\fR()
+calls shall retrieve the remainder of the message. If, however, a
+priority message arrives or already exists on the STREAM head, the
+subsequent call to
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+or
+\fIgetpmsg\fR()
+shall retrieve the higher-priority message before retrieving the
+remainder of the message that was put back.
+.P
+Upon failure,
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+and
+\fIgetpmsg\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+and
+\fIgetpmsg\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The O_NONBLOCK flag is set and no messages are available.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid file descriptor open for reading.
+.TP
+.BR EBADMSG
+The queued message to be read is not valid for
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+or
+\fIgetpmsg\fR()
+or a pending file descriptor is at the STREAM head.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was caught during
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+or
+\fIgetpmsg\fR().
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+An illegal value was specified by
+.IR flagsp ,
+or the STREAM or multiplexer referenced by
+.IR fildes
+is linked (directly or indirectly) downstream from a multiplexer.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSTR
+A STREAM is not associated with
+.IR fildes .
+.P
+In addition,
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+and
+\fIgetpmsg\fR()
+shall fail if the STREAM head had processed an asynchronous error
+before the call. In this case, the value of
+.IR errno
+does not reflect the result of
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+or
+\fIgetpmsg\fR()
+but reflects the prior error.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Getting Any Message"
+.P
+In the following example, the value of
+.IR fd
+is assumed to refer to an open STREAMS file. The call to
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+retrieves any available message on the associated STREAM-head read
+queue, returning control and data information to the buffers pointed to
+by
+.IR ctrlbuf
+and
+.IR databuf ,
+respectively.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stropts.h>
+\&...
+int fd;
+char ctrlbuf[128];
+char databuf[512];
+struct strbuf ctrl;
+struct strbuf data;
+int flags = 0;
+int ret;
+.P
+ctrl.buf = ctrlbuf;
+ctrl.maxlen = sizeof(ctrlbuf);
+.P
+data.buf = databuf;
+data.maxlen = sizeof(databuf);
+.P
+ret = getmsg (fd, &ctrl, &data, &flags);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Getting the First Message off the Queue"
+.P
+In the following example, the call to
+\fIgetpmsg\fR()
+retrieves the first available message on the associated STREAM-head
+read queue.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stropts.h>
+\&...
+.P
+int fd;
+char ctrlbuf[128];
+char databuf[512];
+struct strbuf ctrl;
+struct strbuf data;
+int band = 0;
+int flags = MSG_ANY;
+int ret;
+.P
+ctrl.buf = ctrlbuf;
+ctrl.maxlen = sizeof(ctrlbuf);
+.P
+data.buf = databuf;
+data.maxlen = sizeof(databuf);
+.P
+ret = getpmsg (fd, &ctrl, &data, &band, &flags);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+and
+\fIgetpmsg\fR()
+functions may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.6" ", " "STREAMS",
+.IR "\fIpoll\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stropts.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getnameinfo.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getnameinfo.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..14f21fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getnameinfo.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,234 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETNAMEINFO "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getnameinfo
+\(em get name information
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+#include <netdb.h>
+.P
+int getnameinfo(const struct sockaddr *restrict \fIsa\fP, socklen_t \fIsalen\fP,
+    char *restrict \fInode\fP, socklen_t \fInodelen\fP, char *restrict \fIservice\fP,
+    socklen_t \fIservicelen\fP, int \fIflags\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetnameinfo\fR()
+function shall translate a socket address to a node name and service
+location, all of which are defined as in
+.IR "\fIfreeaddrinfo\fR\^(\|)".
+.P
+The
+.IR sa
+argument points to a socket address structure to be translated. The
+.IR salen
+argument contains the length of the address pointed to by
+.IR sa .
+.P
+If the socket address structure contains an IPv4-mapped IPv6 address or
+an IPv4-compatible IPv6 address, the implementation shall extract the
+embedded IPv4 address and lookup the node name for that IPv4 address.
+.P
+If the address is the IPv6 unspecified address (\c
+.BR \(dq::\(dq ),
+a lookup shall not be performed and the behavior shall be the same as
+when the node's name cannot be located.
+.P
+If the
+.IR node
+argument is non-NULL and the
+.IR nodelen
+argument is non-zero, then the
+.IR node
+argument points to a buffer able to contain up to
+.IR nodelen
+bytes that receives the node name as a null-terminated string. If the
+.IR node
+argument is NULL or the
+.IR nodelen
+argument is zero, the node name shall not be returned. If the node's
+name cannot be located, the numeric form of the address contained
+in the socket address structure pointed to by the
+.IR sa
+argument is returned instead of its name.
+.P
+If the
+.IR service
+argument is non-NULL and the
+.IR servicelen
+argument is non-zero, then the
+.IR service
+argument points to a buffer able to contain up to
+.IR servicelen
+bytes that receives the service name as a null-terminated string.
+If the
+.IR service
+argument is NULL or the
+.IR servicelen
+argument is zero, the service name shall not be returned. If the
+service's name cannot be located, the numeric form of the service
+address (for example, its port number) shall be returned instead of
+its name.
+.P
+The
+.IR flags
+argument is a flag that changes the default actions of the function. By
+default the fully-qualified domain name (FQDN) for the
+host shall be returned, but:
+.IP " *" 4
+If the flag bit NI_NOFQDN is set, only the node name portion of the
+FQDN shall be returned for local hosts.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the flag bit NI_NUMERICHOST is set, the numeric form of the address
+contained in the socket address structure pointed to by the
+.IR sa
+argument shall be returned instead of its name.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the flag bit NI_NAMEREQD is set, an error shall be returned if the
+host's name cannot be located.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the flag bit NI_NUMERICSERV is set, the numeric form of the service
+address shall be returned (for example, its port number) instead of its
+name.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the flag bit NI_NUMERICSCOPE is set, the numeric form of the scope
+identifier shall be returned (for example, interface index) instead of
+its name. This flag shall be ignored if the
+.IR sa
+argument is not an IPv6 address.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the flag bit NI_DGRAM is set, this indicates that the service is a
+datagram service (SOCK_DGRAM). The default behavior shall assume that
+the service is a stream service (SOCK_STREAM).
+.TP 10
+.BR Notes:
+.RS 10 
+.IP " 1." 4
+The two NI_NUMERICxxx flags are required to support the
+.BR \(min
+flag that many commands provide.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The NI_DGRAM flag is required for the few AF_INET and AF_INET6 port
+numbers (for example, [512,514]) that represent different services for
+UDP and TCP.
+.RE
+.P
+.P
+The
+\fIgetnameinfo\fR()
+function shall be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+A zero return value for
+\fIgetnameinfo\fR()
+indicates successful completion; a non-zero return value indicates
+failure. The possible values for the failures are listed in the
+ERRORS section.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgetnameinfo\fR()
+shall return the
+.IR node
+and
+.IR service
+names, if requested, in the buffers provided. The returned names are
+always null-terminated strings.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIgetnameinfo\fR()
+function shall fail and return the corresponding value if:
+.IP [EAI_AGAIN] 12
+The name could not be resolved at this time. Future attempts may
+succeed.
+.IP [EAI_BADFLAGS] 12
+.br
+The
+.IR flags
+had an invalid value.
+.IP [EAI_FAIL] 12
+A non-recoverable error occurred.
+.IP [EAI_FAMILY] 12
+The address family was not recognized or the address length was invalid
+for the specified family.
+.IP [EAI_MEMORY] 12
+There was a memory allocation failure.
+.IP [EAI_NONAME] 12
+The name does not resolve for the supplied parameters.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+NI_NAMEREQD is set and the host's name cannot be located, or both
+.IR nodename
+and
+.IR servname
+were null.
+.RE
+.IP [EAI_OVERFLOW] 12
+.br
+An argument buffer overflowed. The buffer pointed to by the
+.IR node
+argument or the
+.IR service
+argument was too small.
+.IP [EAI_SYSTEM] 12
+A system error occurred. The error code can be found in
+.IR errno .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If the returned values are to be used as part of any further name
+resolution (for example, passed to
+\fIgetaddrinfo\fR()),
+applications should provide buffers large enough to store any result
+possible on the system.
+.P
+Given the IPv4-mapped IPv6 address
+.BR \(dq::ffff:1.2.3.4\(dq ,
+the implementation performs a lookup as if the socket address structure
+contains the IPv4 address
+.BR \(dq1.2.3.4\(dq .
+.P
+The IPv6 unspecified address (\c
+.BR \(dq::\(dq )
+and the IPv6 loopback address (\c
+.BR \(dq::1\(dq )
+are not IPv4-compatible addresses.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIendservent\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfreeaddrinfo\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgai_strerror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIinet_ntop\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<netdb.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getnetbyaddr.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getnetbyaddr.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c7ab1ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getnetbyaddr.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETNETBYADDR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getnetbyaddr,
+getnetbyname,
+getnetent
+\(em network database functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <netdb.h>
+.P
+struct netent *getnetbyaddr(uint32_t \fInet\fP, int \fItype\fP);
+struct netent *getnetbyname(const char *\fIname\fP);
+struct netent *getnetent(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIendnetent\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getopt.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getopt.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4abec74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getopt.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,445 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETOPT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getopt,
+optarg,
+opterr,
+optind,
+optopt
+\(em command option parsing
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int getopt(int \fIargc\fP, char * const \fIargv\fP[], const char *\fIoptstring\fP);
+extern char *optarg;
+extern int opterr, optind, optopt;
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+function is a command-line parser that shall follow Utility Syntax
+Guidelines 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, and 10 in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines".
+.P
+The parameters
+.IR argc
+and
+.IR argv
+are the argument count and argument array as passed to
+\fImain\fR()
+(see
+\fIexec\fR()).
+The argument
+.IR optstring
+is a string of recognized option characters; if a character is followed
+by a
+<colon>,
+the option takes an argument. All option characters allowed by Utility
+Syntax Guideline 3 are allowed in
+.IR optstring .
+The implementation may accept other characters as an extension.
+.P
+The variable
+.IR optind
+is the index of the next element of the
+.IR argv [\^]
+vector to be processed. It shall be initialized to 1 by the system, and
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+shall update it when it finishes with each element of
+.IR argv [\|].
+If the application sets
+.IR optind
+to zero before calling
+\fIgetopt\fR(),
+the behavior is unspecified. When an element of
+.IR argv [\|]
+contains multiple option characters, it is unspecified how
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+determines which options have already been processed.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+function shall return the next option character (if one is found) from
+.IR argv
+that matches a character in
+.IR optstring ,
+if there is one that matches. If the option takes an argument,
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+shall set the variable
+.IR optarg
+to point to the option-argument as follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If the option was the last character in the string pointed to by an
+element of
+.IR argv ,
+then
+.IR optarg
+shall contain the next element of
+.IR argv ,
+and
+.IR optind
+shall be incremented by 2. If the resulting value of
+.IR optind
+is greater than
+.IR argc ,
+this indicates a missing option-argument, and
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+shall return an error indication.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Otherwise,
+.IR optarg
+shall point to the string following the option character in that
+element of
+.IR argv ,
+and
+.IR optind
+shall be incremented by 1.
+.P
+If, when
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+is called:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ \fIargv\fP[optind]  \fRis a null pointer\fP
+*\fIargv\fP[optind]  \fRis not the character\fP \(mi
+ \fIargv\fP[optind]  \fRpoints to the string\fP "\(mi"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 without changing
+.IR optind .
+If:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIargv\fP[optind]   \fRpoints to the string\fP "\(mi\|\(mi"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 after incrementing
+.IR optind .
+.P
+If
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+encounters an option character that is not contained in
+.IR optstring ,
+it shall return the
+<question-mark>
+(\c
+.BR '?' )
+character. If it detects a missing option-argument, it shall return the
+<colon>
+character (\c
+.BR ':' )
+if the first character of
+.IR optstring
+was a
+<colon>,
+or a
+<question-mark>
+character (\c
+.BR '?' )
+otherwise. In either case,
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+shall set the variable
+.IR optopt
+to the option character that caused the error. If the application has
+not set the variable
+.IR opterr
+to 0 and the first character of
+.IR optstring
+is not a
+<colon>,
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+shall also print a diagnostic message to
+.IR stderr
+in the format specified for the
+.IR getopts
+utility.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+function shall return the next option character specified on the command
+line.
+.P
+A
+<colon>
+(\c
+.BR ':' )
+shall be returned if
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+detects a missing argument and the first character of
+.IR optstring
+was a
+<colon>
+(\c
+.BR ':' ).
+.P
+A
+<question-mark>
+(\c
+.BR '?' )
+shall be returned if
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+encounters an option character not in
+.IR optstring
+or detects a missing argument and the first character of
+.IR optstring
+was not a
+<colon>
+(\c
+.BR ':' ).
+.P
+Otherwise,
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 when all command line options are parsed.
+.SH ERRORS
+If the application has not set the variable
+.IR opterr
+to 0, the first character of
+.IR optstring
+is not a
+<colon>,
+and a write error occurs while
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+is printing a diagnostic message to
+.IR stderr ,
+then the error indicator for
+.IR stderr
+shall be set; but
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+shall still succeed and the value of
+.IR errno
+after
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+is unspecified.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Parsing Command Line Options"
+.P
+The following code fragment shows how you might process the arguments
+for a utility that can take the mutually-exclusive options
+.IR a
+and
+.IR b
+and the options
+.IR f
+and
+.IR o ,
+both of which require arguments:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int
+main(int argc, char *argv[ ])
+{
+    int c;
+    int bflg = 0, aflg = 0, errflg = 0;
+    char *ifile;
+    char *ofile;
+    . . .
+    while ((c = getopt(argc, argv, ":abf:o:")) != -1) {
+        switch(c) {
+        case 'a':
+            if (bflg)
+                errflg++;
+            else
+                aflg++;
+            break;
+        case 'b':
+            if (aflg)
+                errflg++;
+            else
+                bflg++;
+            break;
+        case 'f':
+            ifile = optarg;
+            break;
+        case 'o':
+            ofile = optarg;
+            break;
+        case ':':       /* -f or -o without operand */
+            fprintf(stderr,
+                "Option -%c requires an operand\en", optopt);
+            errflg++;
+            break;
+        case '?':
+            fprintf(stderr,
+                "Unrecognized option: '-%c'\en", optopt);
+            errflg++;
+        }
+    }
+    if (errflg) {
+        fprintf(stderr, "usage: . . . ");
+        exit(2);
+    }
+    for ( ; optind < argc; optind++) {
+        if (access(argv[optind], R_OK)) {
+    . . .
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This code accepts any of the following as equivalent:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+cmd \(miao arg path path
+cmd \(mia \(mio arg path path
+cmd \(mio arg \(mia path path
+cmd \(mia \(mio arg \(mi\|\(mi path path
+cmd \(mia \(mioarg path path
+cmd \(miaoarg path path
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Selecting Options from the Command Line"
+.P
+The following example selects the type of database routines the user
+wants to use based on the
+.IR Options
+argument.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <string.h>
+\&...
+const char *Options = "hdbtl";
+\&...
+int dbtype, c;
+char *st;
+\&...
+dbtype = 0;
+while ((c = getopt(argc, argv, Options)) != \(mi1) {
+    if ((st = strchr(Options, c)) != NULL) {
+        dbtype = st - Options;
+        break;
+    }
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+function is only required to support option characters included in
+Utility Syntax Guideline 3. Many historical implementations of
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+support other characters as options. This is an allowed extension, but
+applications that use extensions are not maximally portable. Note that
+support for multi-byte option characters is only possible when such
+characters can be represented as type
+.BR int .
+.P
+While
+.IR ferror ( stderr )
+may be used to detect failures to write a diagnostic to
+.IR stderr
+when
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+returns
+.BR '?' ,
+the value of
+.IR errno
+is unspecified in such a condition. Applications desiring more control
+over handling write failures should set
+.IR opterr
+to 0 and independently perform output to
+.IR stderr ,
+rather than relying on
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+to do the output.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR optopt
+variable represents historical practice and allows the application to
+obtain the identity of the invalid option.
+.P
+The description has been written to make it clear that
+\fIgetopt\fR(),
+like the
+.IR getopts
+utility, deals with option-arguments whether separated from the option
+by
+<blank>
+characters or not. Note that the requirements on
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+and
+.IR getopts
+are more stringent than the Utility Syntax Guidelines.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+function shall return \(mi1, rather than EOF, so that
+.IR <stdio.h> 
+is not required.
+.P
+The special significance of a
+<colon>
+as the first character of
+.IR optstring
+makes
+\fIgetopt\fR()
+consistent with the
+.IR getopts
+utility. It allows an application to make a distinction between a
+missing argument and an incorrect option letter without having to
+examine the option letter. It is true that a missing argument can only
+be detected in one case, but that is a case that has to be considered.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 12.2" ", " "Utility Syntax Guidelines",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.P
+The Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIgetopts\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpeername.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpeername.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..399c22e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpeername.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETPEERNAME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getpeername
+\(em get the name of the peer socket
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+.P
+int getpeername(int \fIsocket\fP, struct sockaddr *restrict \fIaddress\fP,
+    socklen_t *restrict \fIaddress_len\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetpeername\fR()
+function shall retrieve the peer address of the specified socket,
+store this address in the
+.BR sockaddr
+structure pointed to by the
+.IR address
+argument, and store the length of this address in the object pointed
+to by the
+.IR address_len
+argument.
+.P
+The
+.IR address_len
+argument points to a
+.BR socklen_t
+object which on input specifies the length of the supplied
+.BR sockaddr
+structure, and on output specifies the length of the stored address.
+If the actual length of the address is greater than the length of the
+supplied
+.BR sockaddr
+structure, the stored address shall be truncated.
+.P
+If the protocol permits connections by unbound clients, and the peer is
+not bound, then the value stored in the object pointed to by
+.IR address
+is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned. Otherwise, \(mi1 shall
+be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIgetpeername\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR socket
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The socket has been shut down.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTCONN
+The socket is not connected or otherwise has not had the peer
+pre-specified.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSOCK
+The
+.IR socket
+argument does not refer to a socket.
+.TP
+.BR EOPNOTSUPP
+The operation is not supported for the socket protocol.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetpeername\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOBUFS
+Insufficient resources were available in the system to complete the
+call.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIaccept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIbind\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetsockname\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.br
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpgid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpgid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..43e6db2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpgid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETPGID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getpgid
+\(em get the process group ID for a process
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+pid_t getpgid(pid_t \fIpid\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetpgid\fR()
+function shall return the process group ID of the process whose process
+ID is equal to
+.IR pid .
+If
+.IR pid
+is equal to 0,
+\fIgetpgid\fR()
+shall return the process group ID of the calling process.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgetpgid\fR()
+shall return a process group ID. Otherwise, it shall return
+(\fBpid_t\fP)\(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIgetpgid\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The process whose process ID is equal to
+.IR pid
+is not in the same session as the calling process, and the
+implementation does not allow access to the process group ID of that
+process from the calling process.
+.TP
+.BR ESRCH
+There is no process with a process ID equal to
+.IR pid .
+.P
+The
+\fIgetpgid\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR pid
+argument is invalid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpgrp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetsid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetpgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpgrp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpgrp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a2da4c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpgrp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETPGRP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getpgrp
+\(em get the process group ID of the calling process
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+pid_t getpgrp(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetpgrp\fR()
+function shall return the process group ID of the calling process.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIgetpgrp\fR()
+function shall always be successful and no return value is reserved
+to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+4.3 BSD provides a
+\fIgetpgrp\fR()
+function that returns the process group ID
+for a specified process. Although this function supports job
+control, all
+known job control shells always specify the calling
+process with this function. Thus, the simpler System V
+\fIgetpgrp\fR()
+suffices, and the added complexity of the 4.3 BSD
+\fIgetpgrp\fR()
+is provided by the XSI extension
+\fIgetpgid\fR().
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetppid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetpgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6f81d0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETPID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getpid
+\(em get the process ID
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+pid_t getpid(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetpid\fR()
+function shall return the process ID of the calling process.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIgetpid\fR()
+function shall always be successful and no return value is reserved to
+indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpgrp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetppid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImkdtemp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetpgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpmsg.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpmsg.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7f0b0a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpmsg.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETPMSG "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getpmsg
+\(em receive next message from a STREAMS file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stropts.h>
+.P
+int getpmsg(int \fIfildes\fP, struct strbuf *restrict \fIctlptr\fP,
+    struct strbuf *restrict \fIdataptr\fP, int *restrict \fIbandp\fP,
+    int *restrict \fIflagsp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIgetmsg\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getppid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getppid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5cdcab7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getppid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETPPID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getppid
+\(em get the parent process ID
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+pid_t getppid(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetppid\fR()
+function shall return the parent process ID of the calling process.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIgetppid\fR()
+function shall always be successful and no return value is reserved to
+indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpgrp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetpgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpriority.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpriority.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..247d18a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpriority.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,235 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETPRIORITY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getpriority,
+setpriority
+\(em get and set the nice value
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/resource.h>
+.P
+int getpriority(int \fIwhich\fP, id_t \fIwho\fP);
+int setpriority(int \fIwhich\fP, id_t \fIwho\fP, int \fIvalue\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetpriority\fR()
+function shall obtain the nice value of a process, process group, or
+user. The
+\fIsetpriority\fR()
+function shall set the nice value of a process, process group, or user
+to
+.IR value +\c
+{NZERO}.
+.P
+Target processes are specified by the values of the
+.IR which
+and
+.IR who
+arguments. The
+.IR which
+argument may be one of the following values: PRIO_PROCESS, PRIO_PGRP,
+or PRIO_USER, indicating that the
+.IR who
+argument
+is to be interpreted as a process ID, a process group ID, or an
+effective user ID, respectively. A 0 value for the
+.IR who
+argument specifies the current process, process group, or user.
+.P
+The nice value set with
+\fIsetpriority\fR()
+shall be applied to the process. If the process is multi-threaded,
+the nice value shall affect all system scope threads in the process.
+.P
+If more than one process is specified,
+\fIgetpriority\fR()
+shall return value
+{NZERO}
+less than the lowest nice value pertaining to any of the specified
+processes, and
+\fIsetpriority\fR()
+shall set the nice values of all of the specified processes to
+.IR value +\c
+{NZERO}.
+.P
+The default nice value is
+{NZERO};
+lower nice values shall cause more favorable scheduling. While the
+range of valid nice values is [0,{NZERO}*2\(mi1], implementations may
+enforce more restrictive limits. If
+.IR value +\c
+{NZERO}
+is less than the system's lowest supported nice value,
+\fIsetpriority\fR()
+shall set the nice value to the lowest supported value; if
+.IR value +\c
+{NZERO}
+is greater than the system's highest supported nice value,
+\fIsetpriority\fR()
+shall set the nice value to the highest supported value.
+.P
+Only a process with appropriate privileges can lower its nice value.
+.P
+Any processes or threads using SCHED_FIFO or SCHED_RR shall be
+unaffected by a call to
+\fIsetpriority\fR().
+This is not considered an error. A process which subsequently reverts
+to SCHED_OTHER need not have its priority affected by such a
+\fIsetpriority\fR()
+call.
+.P
+The effect of changing the nice value may vary depending on the
+process-scheduling algorithm in effect.
+.P
+Since
+\fIgetpriority\fR()
+can return the value \(mi1 upon successful completion, it is necessary to
+set
+.IR errno
+to 0 prior to a call to
+\fIgetpriority\fR().
+If
+\fIgetpriority\fR()
+returns the value \(mi1, then
+.IR errno
+can be checked to see if an error occurred or if the value is a
+legitimate nice value.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgetpriority\fR()
+shall return an integer in the range \(mi{NZERO} to
+{NZERO}\(mi1.
+Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsetpriority\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.br
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIgetpriority\fR()
+and
+\fIsetpriority\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ESRCH
+No process could be located using the
+.IR which
+and
+.IR who
+argument values specified.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR which
+argument was not recognized, or the value of the
+.IR who
+argument is not a valid process ID, process group ID, or user ID.
+.P
+In addition,
+\fIsetpriority\fR()
+may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+A process was located, but neither the real nor effective user ID of
+the executing process match the effective user ID of the process whose
+nice value is being changed.
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+A request was made to change the nice value to a lower numeric value
+and the current process does not have appropriate privileges.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Using getpriority(\|)"
+.P
+The following example returns the current scheduling priority for the
+process ID returned by the call to
+\fIgetpid\fR().
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/resource.h>
+\&...
+int which = PRIO_PROCESS;
+id_t pid;
+int ret;
+.P
+pid = getpid();
+ret = getpriority(which, pid);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Using setpriority(\|)"
+.P
+The following example sets the priority for the current process ID to
+\(mi20.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/resource.h>
+\&...
+int which = PRIO_PROCESS;
+id_t pid;
+int priority = -20;
+int ret;
+.P
+pid = getpid();
+ret = setpriority(which, pid, priority);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIgetpriority\fR()
+and
+\fIsetpriority\fR()
+functions work with an offset nice value (nice value \(mi{NZERO}). The
+nice value is in the range [0,2*{NZERO} \(mi1], while the return value
+for
+\fIgetpriority\fR()
+and the third parameter for
+\fIsetpriority\fR()
+are in the range [\(mi{NZERO},{NZERO} \(mi1].
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fInice\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_get_priority_max\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_setscheduler\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_resource.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getprotobyname.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getprotobyname.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..05d135b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getprotobyname.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETPROTOBYNAME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getprotobyname,
+getprotobynumber,
+getprotent
+\(em network protocol database functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <netdb.h>
+.P
+struct protoent *getprotobyname(const char *\fIname\fP);
+struct protoent *getprotobynumber(int \fIproto\fP);
+struct protoent *getprotoent(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIendprotoent\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpwent.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpwent.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f46fe7d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpwent.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETPWENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getpwent
+\(em get user database entry
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pwd.h>
+.P
+struct passwd *getpwent(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIendpwent\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpwnam.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpwnam.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5d47101
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpwnam.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,241 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETPWNAM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getpwnam,
+getpwnam_r
+\(em search user database for a name
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pwd.h>
+.P
+struct passwd *getpwnam(const char *\fIname\fP);
+int getpwnam_r(const char *\fIname\fP, struct passwd *\fIpwd\fP, char *\fIbuffer\fP,
+    size_t \fIbufsize\fP, struct passwd **\fIresult\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetpwnam\fR()
+function shall search the user database for an entry with a matching
+.IR name .
+.P
+The
+\fIgetpwnam\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.P
+Applications wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0 before calling
+\fIgetpwnam\fR().
+If
+\fIgetpwnam\fR()
+returns a null pointer and
+.IR errno
+is non-zero, an error occurred.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetpwnam_r\fR()
+function shall update the
+.BR passwd
+structure pointed to by
+.IR pwd
+and store a pointer to that structure at the location pointed to by
+.IR result .
+The structure shall contain an entry from the user database with a
+matching
+.IR name .
+Storage referenced by the structure is allocated from the memory
+provided with the
+.IR buffer
+parameter, which is
+.IR bufsize
+bytes in size. A call to
+.IR sysconf (_SC_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX)
+returns either \(mi1 without changing
+.IR errno
+or an initial value suggested for the size of this buffer.
+A null pointer shall be returned at the location pointed to by
+.IR result
+on error or if the requested entry is not found.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIgetpwnam\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to a
+.BR "struct passwd"
+with the structure as defined in
+.IR <pwd.h> 
+with a matching entry if found. A null pointer shall be returned if the
+requested entry is not found, or an error occurs. On error,
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.P
+The application shall not modify the structure to which the return
+value points, nor any storage areas pointed to by pointers within the
+structure. The returned pointer, and pointers within the structure,
+might be invalidated or the structure or the storage areas might be
+overwritten by a subsequent call to
+\fIgetpwent\fR(),
+\fIgetpwnam\fR(),
+or
+\fIgetpwuid\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIgetpwnam_r\fR()
+function shall return zero on success or if the requested entry
+was not found and no error has occurred. If an error has
+occurred, an error number shall be returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error has occurred.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was caught during
+\fIgetpwnam\fR().
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+The maximum allowable number of files is currently open in the system.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetpwnam_r\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+Insufficient storage was supplied via
+.IR buffer
+and
+.IR bufsize
+to contain the data to be referenced by the resulting
+.BR passwd
+structure.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Note that
+.IR sysconf (_SC_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX)
+may return \(mi1 if there is no hard limit on the size of the buffer
+needed to store all the groups returned. This example shows how an
+application can allocate a buffer of sufficient size to work with
+\fIgetpwnam_r\fR().
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+long int initlen = sysconf(_SC_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX);
+size_t len;
+if (initlen =\|= \(mi1)
+    /* Default initial length. */
+    len = 1024;
+else
+    len = (size_t) initlen;
+struct passwd result;
+struct passwd *resultp;
+char *buffer = malloc(len);
+if (buffer =\|= NULL)
+    ...handle error...
+int e;
+while ((e = getpwnam_r("someuser", &result, buffer, len, &resultp))
+        =\|= ERANGE)
+    {
+    size_t newlen = 2 * len;
+    if (newlen < len)
+        ...handle error...
+    len = newlen;
+    char *newbuffer = realloc(buffer, len);
+    if (newbuffer =\|= NULL)
+        ...handle error...
+    buffer = newbuffer;
+    }
+if (e != 0)
+    ...handle error...
+free (buffer);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Getting an Entry for the Login Name"
+.P
+The following example uses the
+\fIgetlogin\fR()
+function to return the name of the user who logged in; this information
+is passed to the
+\fIgetpwnam\fR()
+function to get the user database entry for that user.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <pwd.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+\&...
+char *lgn;
+struct passwd *pw;
+\&...
+if ((lgn = getlogin()) == NULL || (pw = getpwnam(lgn)) == NULL) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "Get of user information failed.\en"); exit(1);
+}
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Three names associated with the current process can be determined:
+.IR getpwuid (\c
+\fIgeteuid\fR())
+returns the name associated with the effective user ID of the process;
+\fIgetlogin\fR()
+returns the name associated with the current login activity; and
+.IR getpwuid (\c
+\fIgetuid\fR())
+returns the name associated with the real user ID of the process.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetpwnam_r\fR()
+function is thread-safe and returns values in a user-supplied buffer
+instead of possibly using a static data area that may be overwritten by
+each call.
+.P
+Portable applications should take into account that it is usual
+for an implementation to return \(mi1 from
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+indicating that there is no maximum for _SC_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetpwuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pwd.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpwuid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpwuid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e333a04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getpwuid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,290 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETPWUID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getpwuid,
+getpwuid_r
+\(em search user database for a user ID
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pwd.h>
+.P
+struct passwd *getpwuid(uid_t \fIuid\fP);
+int getpwuid_r(uid_t \fIuid\fP, struct passwd *\fIpwd\fP, char *\fIbuffer\fP,
+    size_t \fIbufsize\fP, struct passwd **\fIresult\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetpwuid\fR()
+function shall search the user database for an entry with a matching
+.IR uid .
+.P
+The
+\fIgetpwuid\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.P
+Applications wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0 before calling
+\fIgetpwuid\fR().
+If
+\fIgetpwuid\fR()
+returns a null pointer and
+.IR errno
+is set to non-zero, an error occurred.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetpwuid_r\fR()
+function shall update the
+.BR passwd
+structure pointed to by
+.IR pwd
+and store a pointer to that structure at the location pointed to by
+.IR result .
+The structure shall contain an entry from the user database with a
+matching
+.IR uid .
+Storage referenced by the structure is allocated from the memory
+provided with the
+.IR buffer
+parameter, which is
+.IR bufsize
+bytes in size. A call to
+.IR sysconf (_SC_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX)
+returns either \(mi1 without changing
+.IR errno
+or an initial value suggested for the size of this buffer.
+A null pointer shall be returned at the location pointed to by
+.IR result
+on error or if the requested entry is not found.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIgetpwuid\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to a
+.BR "struct passwd"
+with the structure as defined in
+.IR <pwd.h> 
+with a matching entry if found. A null pointer shall be returned if the
+requested entry is not found, or an error occurs. On error,
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.P
+The application shall not modify the structure to which the return
+value points, nor any storage areas pointed to by pointers within the
+structure. The returned pointer, and pointers within the structure,
+might be invalidated or the structure or the storage areas might be
+overwritten by a subsequent call to
+\fIgetpwent\fR(),
+\fIgetpwnam\fR(),
+or
+\fIgetpwuid\fR().
+.P
+If successful, the
+\fIgetpwuid_r\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error has occurred.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was caught during
+\fIgetpwuid\fR().
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+The maximum allowable number of files is currently open in the system.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetpwuid_r\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+Insufficient storage was supplied via
+.IR buffer
+and
+.IR bufsize
+to contain the data to be referenced by the resulting
+.BR passwd
+structure.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Note that
+.IR sysconf (_SC_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX)
+may return \(mi1 if there is no hard limit on the size of the buffer
+needed to store all the groups returned. This example shows how an
+application can allocate a buffer of sufficient size to work with
+\fIgetpwuid_r\fR().
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+long int initlen = sysconf(_SC_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX);
+size_t len;
+if (initlen =\|= \(mi1)
+    /* Default initial length. */
+    len = 1024;
+else
+    len = (size_t) initlen;
+struct passwd result;
+struct passwd *resultp;
+char *buffer = malloc(len);
+if (buffer =\|= NULL)
+    ...handle error...
+int e;
+while ((e = getpwuid_r(42, &result, buffer, len, &resultp)) =\|= ERANGE)
+    {
+    size_t newlen = 2 * len;
+    if (newlen < len)
+        ...handle error...
+    len = newlen;
+    char *newbuffer = realloc(buffer, len);
+    if (newbuffer =\|= NULL)
+        ...handle error...
+    buffer = newbuffer;
+    }
+if (e != 0)
+    ...handle error...
+free (buffer);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Getting an Entry for the Root User"
+.P
+The following example gets the user database entry for the user with
+user ID 0 (root).
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <pwd.h>
+\&...
+uid_t id = 0;
+struct passwd *pwd;
+.P
+pwd = getpwuid(id);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Finding the Name for the Effective User ID"
+.P
+The following example defines
+.IR pws
+as a pointer to a structure of type
+.BR passwd ,
+which is used to store the structure pointer returned by the call to
+the
+\fIgetpwuid\fR()
+function. The
+\fIgeteuid\fR()
+function shall return the effective user ID of the calling process;
+this is used as the search criteria for the
+\fIgetpwuid\fR()
+function. The call to
+\fIgetpwuid\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the structure containing that user ID value.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <pwd.h>
+\&...
+struct passwd *pws;
+pws = getpwuid(geteuid());
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Finding an Entry in the User Database"
+.P
+The following example uses
+\fIgetpwuid\fR()
+to search the user database for a user ID that was previously stored in
+a
+.BR stat
+structure, then prints out the user name if it is found. If the user
+is not found, the program prints the numeric value of the user ID for
+the entry.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <pwd.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+struct stat statbuf;
+struct passwd *pwd;
+\&...
+if ((pwd = getpwuid(statbuf.st_uid)) != NULL)
+    printf(" %-8.8s", pwd->pw_name);
+else
+    printf(" %-8d", statbuf.st_uid);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Three names associated with the current process can be determined:
+.IR getpwuid (\c
+\fIgeteuid\fR())
+returns the name associated with the effective user ID of the process;
+\fIgetlogin\fR()
+returns the name associated with the current login activity; and
+.IR getpwuid (\c
+\fIgetuid\fR())
+returns the name associated with the real user ID of the process.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetpwuid_r\fR()
+function is thread-safe and returns values in a user-supplied buffer
+instead of possibly using a static data area that may be overwritten by
+each call.
+.P
+Portable applications should take into account that it is usual
+for an implementation to return \(mi1 from
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+indicating that there is no maximum for _SC_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetpwnam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgeteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetlogin\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pwd.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getrlimit.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getrlimit.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8ced3f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getrlimit.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,250 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETRLIMIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getrlimit,
+setrlimit
+\(em control maximum resource consumption
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/resource.h>
+.P
+int getrlimit(int \fIresource\fP, struct rlimit *\fIrlp\fP);
+int setrlimit(int \fIresource\fP, const struct rlimit *\fIrlp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetrlimit\fR()
+function shall get, and the
+\fIsetrlimit\fR()
+function shall set, limits on the consumption of a variety of
+resources.
+.P
+Each call to either
+\fIgetrlimit\fR()
+or
+\fIsetrlimit\fR()
+identifies a specific resource to be operated upon as well as a
+resource limit. A resource limit is represented by an
+.BR rlimit
+structure. The
+.IR rlim_cur
+member specifies the current or soft limit and the
+.IR rlim_max
+member specifies the maximum or hard limit. Soft limits may be changed
+by a process to any value that is less than or equal to the hard
+limit. A process may (irreversibly) lower its hard limit to any value
+that is greater than or equal to the soft limit. Only a process with
+appropriate privileges can raise a hard limit. Both hard and soft
+limits can be changed in a single call to
+\fIsetrlimit\fR()
+subject to the constraints described above.
+.P
+The value RLIM_INFINITY, defined in
+.IR <sys/resource.h> ,
+shall be considered to be larger than any other limit value. If a
+call to
+\fIgetrlimit\fR()
+returns RLIM_INFINITY for a resource, it means the implementation shall
+not enforce limits on that resource. Specifying RLIM_INFINITY as any
+resource limit value on a successful call to
+\fIsetrlimit\fR()
+shall inhibit enforcement of that resource limit.
+.P
+The following resources are defined:
+.IP RLIMIT_CORE 14
+This is the maximum size of a
+.BR core
+file, in bytes, that may be created by a process. A limit of 0 shall
+prevent the creation of a
+.BR core
+file. If this limit is exceeded, the writing of a
+.BR core
+file shall terminate at this size.
+.IP RLIMIT_CPU 14
+This is the maximum amount of CPU time, in seconds, used by a process.
+If this limit is exceeded, SIGXCPU shall be generated for the process. If
+the process is catching or ignoring SIGXCPU, or all threads belonging
+to that process are blocking SIGXCPU, the behavior is unspecified.
+.IP RLIMIT_DATA 14
+This is the maximum size of a data segment of the process, in bytes.
+If this limit is exceeded, the
+\fImalloc\fR()
+function shall fail with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [ENOMEM] .
+.IP RLIMIT_FSIZE 14
+This is the maximum size of a file, in bytes, that may be created by a
+process. If a write or truncate operation would cause this limit to be
+exceeded, SIGXFSZ shall be generated for the thread. If the thread is
+blocking, or
+the process is catching or ignoring SIGXFSZ, continued attempts to
+increase the size of a file from end-of-file to beyond the limit
+shall fail with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [EFBIG] .
+.IP RLIMIT_NOFILE 14
+This is a number one greater than the maximum value that the system may
+assign to a newly-created descriptor. If this limit is exceeded,
+functions that allocate a file descriptor shall fail with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [EMFILE] .
+This limit constrains the number of file descriptors that a process may
+allocate.
+.IP RLIMIT_STACK 14
+This is the maximum size of the initial thread's stack, in bytes. The
+implementation does not automatically grow the stack beyond this
+limit. If this limit is exceeded, SIGSEGV shall be generated for the
+thread. If the thread is blocking SIGSEGV, or the process is ignoring
+or catching SIGSEGV and has not made arrangements to use an alternate
+stack, the disposition of SIGSEGV shall be set to SIG_DFL before it is
+generated.
+.IP RLIMIT_AS 14
+This is the maximum size of total available memory of the process, in
+bytes. If this limit is exceeded, the
+\fImalloc\fR()
+and
+\fImmap\fR()
+functions shall fail with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [ENOMEM] .
+In addition, the automatic stack growth fails with the effects outlined
+above.
+.P
+When using the
+\fIgetrlimit\fR()
+function, if a resource limit can be represented correctly in an object
+of type
+.BR rlim_t ,
+then its representation is returned; otherwise, if the value of the
+resource limit is equal to that of the corresponding saved hard limit,
+the value returned shall be RLIM_SAVED_MAX; otherwise, the value
+returned shall be RLIM_SAVED_CUR.
+.P
+When using the
+\fIsetrlimit\fR()
+function, if the requested new limit is RLIM_INFINITY, the new limit
+shall be ``no limit''; otherwise, if the
+requested new limit is RLIM_SAVED_MAX, the new limit shall be the
+corresponding saved hard limit; otherwise, if the requested new limit
+is RLIM_SAVED_CUR, the new limit shall be the corresponding saved soft
+limit; otherwise, the new limit shall be the requested value. In
+addition, if the corresponding saved limit can be represented correctly
+in an object of type
+.BR rlim_t
+then it shall be overwritten with the new limit.
+.P
+The result of setting a limit to RLIM_SAVED_MAX or RLIM_SAVED_CUR is
+unspecified unless a previous call to
+\fIgetrlimit\fR()
+returned that value as the soft or hard limit for the corresponding
+resource limit.
+.P
+The determination of whether a limit can be correctly represented in an
+object of type
+.BR rlim_t
+is implementation-defined. For example, some implementations permit a
+limit whose value is greater than RLIM_INFINITY and others do not.
+.P
+The
+.IR exec
+family of functions shall cause resource limits to be saved.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgetrlimit\fR()
+and
+\fIsetrlimit\fR()
+shall return 0. Otherwise, these functions shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIgetrlimit\fR()
+and
+\fIsetrlimit\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+An invalid
+.IR resource
+was specified; or in a
+\fIsetrlimit\fR()
+call, the new
+.IR rlim_cur
+exceeds the new
+.IR rlim_max .
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The limit specified to
+\fIsetrlimit\fR()
+would have raised the maximum limit value, and the calling process does
+not have appropriate privileges.
+.P
+The
+\fIsetrlimit\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The limit specified cannot be lowered because current usage is already
+higher than the limit.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If a process attempts to set the hard limit or soft limit for
+RLIMIT_NOFILE to less than the value of
+{_POSIX_OPEN_MAX}
+from
+.IR <limits.h> ,
+unexpected behavior may occur.
+.P
+If a process attempts to set the hard limit or soft limit for
+RLIMIT_NOFILE to less than the highest currently open file descriptor
++1, unexpected behavior may occur.
+.SH RATIONALE
+It should be noted that RLIMIT_STACK applies ``at least'' to the stack
+of the initial thread in the process, and not to the sum of all the
+stacks in the process, as that would be very limiting unless the value
+is so big as to provide no value at all with a single thread.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImalloc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaltstack\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIulimit\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stropts.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_resource.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getrusage.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getrusage.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5635a6f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getrusage.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETRUSAGE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getrusage
+\(em get information about resource utilization
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/resource.h>
+.P
+int getrusage(int \fIwho\fP, struct rusage *\fIr_usage\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetrusage\fR()
+function shall provide measures of the resources used by the current
+process or its terminated and waited-for child processes. If the value
+of the
+.IR who
+argument is RUSAGE_SELF, information shall be returned about resources
+used by the current process. If the value of the
+.IR who
+argument is RUSAGE_CHILDREN,
+information shall be returned about resources used by the terminated and
+waited-for children of the current process. If the child is never
+waited for (for example, if the parent has SA_NOCLDWAIT set or sets
+SIGCHLD to SIG_IGN), the resource
+information for the child process is discarded and not included in the
+resource information provided by
+\fIgetrusage\fR().
+.P
+The
+.IR r_usage
+argument is a pointer to an object of type
+.BR "struct rusage"
+in which the returned information is stored.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgetrusage\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIgetrusage\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR who
+argument is not valid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Using getrusage(\|)"
+.P
+The following example returns information about the resources used by
+the current process.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/resource.h>
+\&...
+int who = RUSAGE_SELF;
+struct rusage usage;
+int ret;
+.P
+ret = getrusage(who, &usage);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItimes\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_resource.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/gets.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/gets.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d97dfda
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/gets.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+gets
+\(em get a string from a
+.IR stdin
+stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+char *gets(char *\fIs\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIgets\fR()
+function shall read bytes from the standard input stream,
+.IR stdin ,
+into the array pointed to by
+.IR s ,
+until a
+<newline>
+is read or an end-of-file condition is encountered. Any
+<newline>
+shall be discarded and a null byte shall be placed immediately
+after the last byte read into the array.
+.P
+The
+\fIgets\fR()
+function may mark the last data access timestamp of
+the file associated with
+.IR stream
+for update. The last data access timestamp shall be
+marked for update by the first successful execution of
+\fIfgetc\fR(),
+\fIfgets\fR(),
+\fIfread\fR(),
+\fIfscanf\fR(),
+\fIgetc\fR(),
+\fIgetchar\fR(),
+\fIgetdelim\fR(),
+\fIgetline\fR(),
+\fIgets\fR(),
+or
+\fIscanf\fR()
+using
+.IR stream
+that returns data not supplied by a prior call to
+\fIungetc\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgets\fR()
+shall return
+.IR s .
+If the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set, or if the stream
+is at end-of-file, the end-of-file indicator for the
+stream shall be set and
+\fIgets\fR()
+shall return a null pointer. If a read error occurs, the error indicator
+for the stream shall be set,
+\fIgets\fR()
+shall return a null pointer,
+and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfgetc\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Reading a line that overflows the array pointed to by
+.IR s
+results in undefined behavior. The use of
+\fIfgets\fR()
+is recommended.
+.P
+Since the user cannot specify the length of the buffer passed to
+\fIgets\fR(),
+use of this function is discouraged. The length of the string read is
+unlimited. It is possible to overflow this buffer in such a way as to
+cause applications to fail, or possible system security violations.
+.P
+Applications should use the
+\fIfgets\fR()
+function instead of the obsolescent
+\fIgets\fR()
+function.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The standard developers decided to mark the
+\fIgets\fR()
+function as obsolescent even though it is in the ISO\ C standard due to the
+possibility of buffer overflow.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIgets\fR()
+function may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfeof\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIferror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfgets\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getservbyname.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getservbyname.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2fe3564
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getservbyname.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETSERVBYNAME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getservbyname,
+getservbyport,
+getservent
+\(em network services database functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <netdb.h>
+.P
+struct servent *getservbyname(const char *\fIname\fP, const char *\fIproto\fP);
+struct servent *getservbyport(int \fIport\fP, const char *\fIproto\fP);
+struct servent *getservent(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIendservent\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getsid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getsid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..752cc06
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getsid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETSID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getsid
+\(em get the process group ID of a session leader
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+pid_t getsid(pid_t \fIpid\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetsid\fR()
+function shall obtain the process group ID of the process that is the
+session leader of the process specified by
+.IR pid .
+If
+.IR pid
+is (\fBpid_t\fR)0, it specifies the calling process.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgetsid\fR()
+shall return the process group ID of the session leader of the specified
+process. Otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIgetsid\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The process specified by
+.IR pid
+is not in the same session as the calling process, and the
+implementation does not allow access to the process group ID of the
+session leader of that process from the calling process.
+.TP
+.BR ESRCH
+There is no process with a process ID equal to
+.IR pid .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetpgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getsockname.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getsockname.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c2530fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getsockname.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETSOCKNAME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getsockname
+\(em get the socket name
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+.P
+int getsockname(int \fIsocket\fP, struct sockaddr *restrict \fIaddress\fP,
+    socklen_t *restrict \fIaddress_len\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetsockname\fR()
+function shall retrieve the locally-bound name of the specified socket,
+store this address in the
+.BR sockaddr
+structure pointed to by the
+.IR address
+argument, and store the length of this address in the object pointed
+to by the
+.IR address_len
+argument.
+.P
+The
+.IR address_len
+argument points to a
+.BR socklen_t
+object which on input specifies the length of the supplied
+.BR sockaddr
+structure, and on output specifies the length of the stored address.
+If the actual length of the address is greater than the length of the
+supplied
+.BR sockaddr
+structure, the stored address shall be truncated.
+.P
+If the socket has not been bound to a local name, the value stored in
+the object pointed to by
+.IR address
+is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned, the
+.IR address
+argument shall point to the address of the socket, and the
+.IR address_len
+argument shall point to the length of the address. Otherwise, \(mi1
+shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIgetsockname\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR socket
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSOCK
+The
+.IR socket
+argument does not refer to a socket.
+.TP
+.BR EOPNOTSUPP
+The operation is not supported for this socket's protocol.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetsockname\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The socket has been shut down.
+.TP
+.BR ENOBUFS
+Insufficient resources were available in the system to complete the
+function.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIaccept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIbind\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpeername\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.br
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getsockopt.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getsockopt.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0266a12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getsockopt.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETSOCKOPT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getsockopt
+\(em get the socket options
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+.P
+int getsockopt(int \fIsocket\fP, int \fIlevel\fP, int \fIoption_name,\fP
+    void *restrict \fIoption_value\fP, socklen_t *restrict \fIoption_len\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetsockopt\fR()
+function manipulates options associated with a socket.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetsockopt\fR()
+function shall retrieve the value for the option specified by the
+.IR option_name
+argument for the socket specified by the
+.IR socket
+argument. If the size of the option value is greater than
+.IR option_len ,
+the value stored in the object pointed to by the
+.IR option_value
+argument shall be silently truncated. Otherwise, the object pointed to
+by the
+.IR option_len
+argument shall be modified to indicate the actual length of the value.
+.P
+The
+.IR level
+argument specifies the protocol level at which the option resides. To
+retrieve options at the socket level, specify the
+.IR level
+argument as SOL_SOCKET. To retrieve options at other levels, supply the
+appropriate level identifier for the protocol controlling the option.
+For example, to indicate that an option is interpreted by the TCP
+(Transmission Control Protocol), set
+.IR level
+to IPPROTO_TCP as defined in the
+.IR <netinet/in.h> 
+header.
+.P
+The socket in use may require the process to have appropriate
+privileges to use the
+\fIgetsockopt\fR()
+function.
+.P
+The
+.IR option_name
+argument specifies a single option to be retrieved. It can be one of
+the socket-level options defined in
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+and described in
+.IR "Section 2.10.16" ", " "Use of Options".
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgetsockopt\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIgetsockopt\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR socket
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The specified option is invalid at the specified socket level.
+.TP
+.BR ENOPROTOOPT
+.br
+The option is not supported by the protocol.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSOCK
+The
+.IR socket
+argument does not refer to a socket.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetsockopt\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+The calling process does not have appropriate privileges.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The socket has been shut down.
+.TP
+.BR ENOBUFS
+Insufficient resources are available in the system to complete the
+function.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.10.16" ", " "Use of Options",
+.IR "\fIbind\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIendprotoent\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsockopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<netinet_in.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getsubopt.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getsubopt.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3cff22e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getsubopt.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,296 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETSUBOPT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getsubopt
+\(em parse suboption arguments from a string
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+int getsubopt(char **\fIoptionp\fP, char * const *\fIkeylistp\fP, char **\fIvaluep\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetsubopt\fR()
+function shall parse suboption arguments in a flag argument. Such
+options often result from the use of
+\fIgetopt\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIgetsubopt\fR()
+argument
+.IR optionp
+is a pointer to a pointer to the option argument string. The suboption
+arguments shall be separated by
+<comma>
+characters and each may consist of either a single token, or a token-value
+pair separated by an
+<equals-sign>.
+.P
+The
+.IR keylistp
+argument shall be a pointer to a vector of strings. The end of the
+vector is identified by a null pointer. Each entry in the vector is one
+of the possible tokens that might be found in *\fIoptionp\fP. Since
+<comma>
+characters delimit suboption arguments in
+.IR optionp ,
+they should not appear in any of the strings pointed to by
+.IR keylistp .
+Similarly, because an
+<equals-sign>
+separates a token from its value, the application should not include an
+<equals-sign>
+in any of the strings pointed to by
+.IR keylistp .
+The
+\fIgetsubopt\fR()
+function shall not modify the
+.IR keylistp
+vector.
+.P
+The
+.IR valuep
+argument is the address of a value string pointer.
+.P
+If a
+<comma>
+appears in
+.IR optionp ,
+it shall be interpreted as a suboption separator. After
+<comma>
+characters have been processed, if there are one or more
+<equals-sign>
+characters in a suboption string, the first
+<equals-sign>
+in any suboption string shall be interpreted as a separator between a
+token and a value. Subsequent
+<equals-sign>
+characters in a suboption string shall be interpreted as part of the
+value.
+.P
+If the string at *\fIoptionp\fP contains only one suboption argument
+(equivalently, no
+<comma>
+characters),
+\fIgetsubopt\fR()
+shall update *\fIoptionp\fP to point to the null character at the end of
+the string. Otherwise, it shall isolate the suboption argument by
+replacing the
+<comma>
+separator with a null character, and shall update *\fIoptionp\fP to point
+to the start of the next suboption argument. If the suboption argument
+has an associated value (equivalently, contains an
+<equals-sign>),
+\fIgetsubopt\fR()
+shall update *\fIvaluep\fP to point to the value's first character.
+Otherwise, it shall set *\fIvaluep\fP to a null pointer. The calling
+application may use this information to determine whether the presence
+or absence of a value for the suboption is an error.
+.P
+Additionally, when
+\fIgetsubopt\fR()
+fails to match the suboption argument with a token in the
+.IR keylistp
+array, the calling application should decide if this is an error, or if
+the unrecognized option should be processed in another way.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIgetsubopt\fR()
+function shall return the index of the matched token string, or \(mi1
+if no token strings were matched.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Parsing Suboptions"
+.P
+The following example uses the
+\fIgetsubopt\fR()
+function to parse a
+.IR value
+argument in the
+.IR optarg
+external variable returned by a call to
+\fIgetopt\fR().
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int do_all;
+const char *type;
+int read_size;
+int write_size;
+int read_only;
+.P
+enum
+{
+    RO_OPTION = 0,
+    RW_OPTION,
+    READ_SIZE_OPTION,
+    WRITE_SIZE_OPTION
+};
+.P
+const char *mount_opts[] =
+{
+    [RO_OPTION] = "ro",
+    [RW_OPTION] = "rw",
+    [READ_SIZE_OPTION] = "rsize",
+    [WRITE_SIZE_OPTION] = "wsize",
+    NULL
+};
+.P
+int
+main(int argc, char *argv[])
+{
+    char *subopts, *value;
+    int opt;
+.P
+    while ((opt = getopt(argc, argv, "at:o:")) != -1)
+        switch(opt)
+            {
+            case 'a':
+                do_all = 1;
+                break;
+            case 't':
+                type = optarg;
+                break;
+            case 'o':
+                subopts = optarg;
+                while (*subopts != '\0')
+                {
+                    char *saved = subopts;
+                    switch(getsubopt(&subopts, (char **)mount_opts,
+                        &value))
+                    {
+                    case RO_OPTION:
+                        read_only = 1;
+                        break;
+                    case RW_OPTION:
+                        read_only = 0;
+                        break;
+                    case READ_SIZE_OPTION:
+                        if (value == NULL)
+                            abort();
+                        read_size = atoi(value);
+                        break;
+                    case WRITE_SIZE_OPTION:
+                        if (value == NULL)
+                            abort();
+                        write_size = atoi(value);
+                        break;
+                    default:
+                        /* Unknown suboption. */
+                        printf("Unknown suboption `%s'\en", saved);
+                        abort();
+                    }
+                }
+                break;
+            default:
+                abort();
+            }
+.P
+    /* Do the real work. */
+.P
+    return 0;
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the above example is invoked with:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+program -o ro,rsize=512
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+then after option parsing, the variable
+.IR do_all
+will be 0,
+.IR type
+will be a null pointer,
+.IR read_size
+will be 512,
+.IR write_size
+will be 0, and
+.IR read_only
+will be 1. If it is invoked with:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+program -o oops
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+it will print:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+"Unknown suboption `oops'"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+before aborting.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The value of *\fIvaluep\fR when
+\fIgetsubopt\fR()
+returns \(mi1 is unspecified. Historical implementations provide various
+incompatible extensions to allow an application to access the suboption
+text that was not found in the
+.IR keylistp
+array.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR keylistp
+argument of
+\fIgetsubopt\fR()
+is typed as
+.BR "char * const *"
+to match historical practice. However, the standard is clear that
+implementations will not modify either the array or the strings contained
+in the array, as if the argument had been typed
+.BR "const char * const *" .
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetopt\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/gettimeofday.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/gettimeofday.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b0a449a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/gettimeofday.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETTIMEOFDAY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+gettimeofday
+\(em get the date and time
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/time.h>
+.P
+int gettimeofday(struct timeval *restrict \fItp\fP, void *restrict \fItzp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgettimeofday\fR()
+function shall obtain the current time, expressed as seconds and
+microseconds since the Epoch, and store it in the
+.BR timeval
+structure pointed to by
+.IR tp .
+The resolution of the system clock is unspecified.
+.P
+If
+.IR tzp
+is not a null pointer, the behavior is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIgettimeofday\fR()
+function shall return 0 and no value shall be reserved to indicate
+an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications should use the
+\fIclock_gettime\fR()
+function instead of the obsolescent
+\fIgettimeofday\fR()
+function.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIgettimeofday\fR()
+function may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIclock_getres\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIctime\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getuid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getuid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6fafbf9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getuid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETUID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getuid
+\(em get a real user ID
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+uid_t getuid(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgetuid\fR()
+function shall return the real user ID of the calling process.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIgetuid\fR()
+function shall always be successful and no return value is reserved to
+indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Setting the Effective User ID to the Real User ID"
+.P
+The following example sets the effective user ID and the real user ID
+of the current process to the real user ID of the caller.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+\&...
+setreuid(getuid(), getuid());
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetegid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgeteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetegid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIseteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetregid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetreuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetuid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getutxent.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getutxent.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e2d55de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getutxent.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETUTXENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getutxent,
+getutxid,
+getutxline
+\(em get user accounting database entries
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <utmpx.h>
+.P
+struct utmpx *getutxent(void);
+struct utmpx *getutxid(const struct utmpx *\fIid\fP);
+struct utmpx *getutxline(const struct utmpx *\fIline\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIendutxent\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getwc.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getwc.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2024fb8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getwc.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETWC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getwc
+\(em get a wide character from a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wint_t getwc(FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetwc\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIfgetwc\fR(),
+except that if it is implemented as a macro it may evaluate
+.IR stream
+more than once, so the argument should never be an expression with
+side-effects.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfgetwc\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfgetwc\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since it may be implemented as a macro,
+\fIgetwc\fR()
+may treat incorrectly a
+.IR stream
+argument with side-effects. In particular,
+\fIgetwc\fR(*\fIf\fR\(pl\(pl) does not necessarily work as expected.
+Therefore, use of this function is not recommended;
+\fIfgetwc\fR()
+should be used instead.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfgetwc\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getwchar.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getwchar.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9096e17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/getwchar.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GETWCHAR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+getwchar
+\(em get a wide character from a
+.IR stdin
+stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wint_t getwchar(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIgetwchar\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to \fIgetwc\fP(\fIstdin\fP).
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfgetwc\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfgetwc\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If the
+.BR wint_t
+value returned by
+\fIgetwchar\fR()
+is stored into a variable of type
+.BR wchar_t
+and then compared against the
+.BR wint_t
+macro WEOF, the result may be incorrect. Only the
+.BR wint_t
+type is guaranteed to be able to represent any wide character and
+WEOF.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfgetwc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetwc\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/glob.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/glob.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ad08152
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/glob.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,448 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GLOB "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+glob,
+globfree
+\(em generate pathnames matching a pattern
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <glob.h>
+.P
+int glob(const char *restrict \fIpattern\fP, int \fIflags\fP,
+    int(*\fIerrfunc\fP)(const char *\fIepath\fP, int \fIeerrno\fP),
+    glob_t *restrict \fIpglob\fP);
+void globfree(glob_t *\fIpglob\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIglob\fR()
+function is a pathname generator that shall implement the rules
+defined in the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.13" ", " "Pattern Matching Notation",
+with optional support for rule 3 in the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.13.3" ", " "Patterns Used for Filename Expansion".
+.P
+The structure type
+.BR glob_t
+is defined in
+.IR <glob.h> 
+and includes at least the following members:
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB | cB
+lw(1.25i)B | lw(1.25i)I | lw(2.5i).
+Member Type!Member Name!Description
+_
+size_t!gl_pathc!Count of paths matched by \fIpattern\fP.
+char **!gl_pathv!Pointer to a list of matched pathnames.
+size_t!gl_offs!T{
+Slots to reserve at the beginning of \fIgl_pathv\fP.
+T}
+.TE
+.P
+The argument
+.IR pattern
+is a pointer to a pathname pattern to be expanded. The
+\fIglob\fR()
+function shall match all accessible pathnames against this pattern and
+develop a list of all pathnames that match. In order to have access to
+a pathname,
+\fIglob\fR()
+requires search permission on every component of a path except the
+last, and read permission on each directory of any filename component
+of
+.IR pattern
+that contains any of the following special characters:
+.BR '*' ,
+.BR '?' ,
+and
+.BR '[' .
+.P
+The
+\fIglob\fR()
+function shall store the number of matched pathnames into
+\fIpglob\fP\->\fIgl_pathc\fP and a pointer to a list of pointers to
+pathnames into \fIpglob\fP\->\fIgl_pathv\fP. The pathnames shall be in
+sort order as defined by the current setting of the
+.IR LC_COLLATE
+category; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 7.3.2" ", " "LC_COLLATE".
+The first pointer after the last pathname shall be a null pointer. If
+the pattern does not match any pathnames, the returned number of matched
+paths is set to 0, and the contents of \fIpglob\fP\->\fIgl_pathv\fP
+are implementation-defined.
+.P
+It is the caller's responsibility to create the structure pointed to by
+.IR pglob .
+The
+\fIglob\fR()
+function shall allocate other space as needed, including the memory
+pointed to by
+.IR gl_pathv .
+The
+\fIglobfree\fR()
+function shall free any space associated with
+.IR pglob
+from a previous call to
+\fIglob\fR().
+.P
+The
+.IR flags
+argument is used to control the behavior of
+\fIglob\fR().
+The value of
+.IR flags
+is a bitwise-inclusive OR of zero or more of the following
+constants, which are defined in
+.IR <glob.h> :
+.IP GLOB_APPEND 14
+Append pathnames generated to the ones from a previous call to
+\fIglob\fR().
+.IP GLOB_DOOFFS 14
+Make use of \fIpglob\fP\->\fIgl_offs\fP. If this flag is set,
+\fIpglob\fP\->\fIgl_offs\fP is used to specify how many null pointers
+to add to the beginning of \fIpglob\fP\->\fIgl_pathv\fP. In other
+words, \fIpglob\fP\->\fIgl_pathv\fP shall point to
+\fIpglob\fP\->\fIgl_offs\fP null pointers, followed by
+\fIpglob\fP\->\fIgl_pathc\fP pathname pointers, followed by a null
+pointer.
+.IP GLOB_ERR 14
+Cause
+\fIglob\fR()
+to return when it encounters a directory that it cannot open or read.
+Ordinarily,
+\fIglob\fR()
+continues to find matches.
+.IP GLOB_MARK 14
+Each pathname that is a directory that matches
+.IR pattern
+shall have a
+<slash>
+appended.
+.IP GLOB_NOCHECK 14
+Supports rule 3 in the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.13.3" ", " "Patterns Used for Filename Expansion".
+If
+.IR pattern
+does not match any pathname, then
+\fIglob\fR()
+shall return a list consisting of only
+.IR pattern ,
+and the number of matched pathnames is 1.
+.IP GLOB_NOESCAPE 14
+Disable backslash escaping.
+.IP GLOB_NOSORT 14
+Ordinarily,
+\fIglob\fR()
+sorts the matching pathnames according to the current setting of the
+.IR LC_COLLATE
+category; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 7.3.2" ", " "LC_COLLATE".
+When this flag is used, the order of pathnames returned is unspecified.
+.P
+The GLOB_APPEND
+flag can be used to append a new set of pathnames to those found in a
+previous call to
+\fIglob\fR().
+The following rules apply to applications when two or more calls to
+\fIglob\fR()
+are made with the same value of
+.IR pglob
+and without intervening calls to
+\fIglobfree\fR():
+.IP " 1." 4
+The first such call shall not set GLOB_APPEND. All subsequent calls
+shall set it.
+.IP " 2." 4
+All the calls shall set GLOB_DOOFFS, or all shall not set it.
+.IP " 3." 4
+After the second call, \fIpglob\fP\->\fIgl_pathv\fP points to a list
+containing the following:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+Zero or more null pointers, as specified by GLOB_DOOFFS and
+\fIpglob\fP\->\fIgl_offs\fP.
+.IP " b." 4
+Pointers to the pathnames that were in the
+\fIpglob\fP\->\fIgl_pathv\fP list before the call, in the same order
+as before.
+.IP " c." 4
+Pointers to the new pathnames generated by the second call, in the
+specified order.
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+The count returned in \fIpglob\fP\->\fIgl_pathc\fP shall be the total
+number of pathnames from the two calls.
+.IP " 5." 4
+The application can change any of the fields after a call to
+\fIglob\fR().
+If it does, the application shall reset them to the original value
+before a subsequent call, using the same
+.IR pglob
+value, to
+\fIglobfree\fR()
+or
+\fIglob\fR()
+with the GLOB_APPEND flag.
+.P
+If, during the search, a directory is encountered that cannot be opened
+or read and
+.IR errfunc
+is not a null pointer,
+\fIglob\fR()
+calls
+\fI(\fR()*errfunc )
+with two arguments:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The
+.IR epath
+argument is a pointer to the path that failed.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The
+.IR eerrno
+argument is the value of
+.IR errno
+from the failure, as set by
+\fIopendir\fR(),
+\fIreaddir\fR(),
+or
+\fIstat\fR().
+(Other values may be used to report other errors not explicitly
+documented for those functions.)
+.P
+If
+\fI(\fR()*errfunc )
+is called and returns non-zero, or if the GLOB_ERR flag is set in
+.IR flags ,
+\fIglob\fR()
+shall stop the scan and return GLOB_ABORTED after setting
+.IR gl_pathc
+and
+.IR gl_pathv
+in
+.IR pglob
+to reflect the paths already scanned. If GLOB_ERR is not set and
+either
+.IR errfunc
+is a null pointer or
+\fI(\fR()*errfunc )
+returns 0, the error shall be ignored.
+.P
+The
+\fIglob\fR()
+function shall not fail because of large files.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIglob\fR()
+shall return 0. The argument \fIpglob\fP\->\fIgl_pathc\fP shall
+return the number of matched pathnames and the argument
+\fIpglob\fP\->\fIgl_pathv\fP shall contain a pointer to a
+null-terminated list of matched and sorted pathnames. However, if
+\fIpglob\fP\->\fIgl_pathc\fP is 0, the content of
+\fIpglob\fP\->\fIgl_pathv\fP is undefined.
+.P
+The
+\fIglobfree\fR()
+function shall not return a value.
+.P
+If
+\fIglob\fR()
+terminates due to an error, it shall return one of the non-zero
+constants defined in
+.IR <glob.h> .
+The arguments \fIpglob\fP\->\fIgl_pathc\fP and
+\fIpglob\fP\->\fIgl_pathv\fP are still set as defined above.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIglob\fR()
+function shall fail and return the corresponding value if:
+.IP GLOB_ABORTED 14
+The scan was stopped because GLOB_ERR was set or
+\fI(\fR()*errfunc )
+returned non-zero.
+.IP GLOB_NOMATCH 14
+The pattern does not match any existing pathname, and GLOB_NOCHECK was
+not set in flags.
+.IP GLOB_NOSPACE 14
+An attempt to allocate memory failed.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+One use of the GLOB_DOOFFS flag is by applications that
+build an argument list for use with
+\fIexecv\fR(),
+\fIexecve\fR(),
+or
+\fIexecvp\fR().
+Suppose, for example, that an application wants to do the equivalent of:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ls -l *.c
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+but for some reason:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+system("ls -l *.c")
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+is not acceptable. The application could obtain approximately the same
+result using the sequence:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+globbuf.gl_offs = 2;
+glob("*.c", GLOB_DOOFFS, NULL, &globbuf);
+globbuf.gl_pathv[0] = "ls";
+globbuf.gl_pathv[1] = "-l";
+execvp("ls", &globbuf.gl_pathv[0]);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Using the same example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ls -l *.c *.h
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+could be approximately simulated using GLOB_APPEND as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+globbuf.gl_offs = 2;
+glob("*.c", GLOB_DOOFFS, NULL, &globbuf);
+glob("*.h", GLOB_DOOFFS|GLOB_APPEND, NULL, &globbuf);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+This function is not provided for the purpose of enabling utilities to
+perform pathname expansion on their arguments, as this operation is
+performed by the shell, and utilities are explicitly not expected to
+redo this. Instead, it is provided for applications that need to do
+pathname expansion on strings obtained from other sources, such as a
+pattern typed by a user or read from a file.
+.P
+If a utility needs to see if a pathname matches a given pattern, it can
+use
+\fIfnmatch\fR().
+.P
+Note that
+.IR gl_pathc
+and
+.IR gl_pathv
+have meaning even if
+\fIglob\fR()
+fails. This allows
+\fIglob\fR()
+to report partial results in the event of an error. However, if
+.IR gl_pathc
+is 0,
+.IR gl_pathv
+is unspecified even if
+\fIglob\fR()
+did not return an error.
+.P
+The GLOB_NOCHECK option could be used when an application wants to
+expand a pathname if wildcards are specified, but wants to treat the
+pattern as just a string otherwise. The
+.IR sh
+utility might use this for option-arguments, for example.
+.P
+The new pathnames generated by a subsequent call with GLOB_APPEND are
+not sorted together with the previous pathnames. This mirrors the way
+that the shell handles pathname expansion when multiple expansions are
+done on a command line.
+.P
+Applications that need tilde and parameter expansion should use
+\fIwordexp\fR().
+.SH RATIONALE
+It was claimed that the GLOB_DOOFFS flag is unnecessary because it
+could be simulated using:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+new = (char **)malloc((n + pglob->gl_pathc + 1)
+       * sizeof(char *));
+(void) memcpy(new+n, pglob->gl_pathv,
+       pglob->gl_pathc * sizeof(char *));
+(void) memset(new, 0, n * sizeof(char *));
+free(pglob->gl_pathv);
+pglob->gl_pathv = new;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+However, this assumes that the memory pointed to by
+.IR gl_pathv
+is a block that was separately created using
+\fImalloc\fR().
+This is not necessarily the case. An application should make no
+assumptions about how the memory referenced by fields in
+.IR pglob
+was allocated. It might have been obtained from
+\fImalloc\fR()
+in a large chunk and then carved up within
+\fIglob\fR(),
+or it might have been created using a different memory allocator. It
+is not the intent of the standard developers to specify or imply how
+the memory used by
+\fIglob\fR()
+is managed.
+.P
+The GLOB_APPEND flag would be used when an application wants to expand
+several different patterns into a single list.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfdopendir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfnmatch\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfstatat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIreaddir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "Section 2.6" ", " "Word Expansions"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 7.3.2" ", " "LC_COLLATE",
+.IR "\fB<glob.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/gmtime.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/gmtime.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9943ae8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/gmtime.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GMTIME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+gmtime,
+gmtime_r
+\(em convert a time value to a broken-down UTC time
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+struct tm *gmtime(const time_t *\fItimer\fP);
+struct tm *gmtime_r(const time_t *restrict \fItimer\fP,
+    struct tm *restrict \fIresult\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIgmtime\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIgmtime\fR()
+function shall convert the time in seconds since the Epoch pointed to by
+.IR timer
+into a broken-down time, expressed as Coordinated Universal Time
+(UTC).
+.P
+The relationship between a time in seconds since the Epoch used as an
+argument to
+\fIgmtime\fR()
+and the
+.BR tm
+structure (defined in the
+.IR <time.h> 
+header) is that the result shall be as specified in the expression
+given in the definition of seconds since the Epoch (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.15" ", " "Seconds Since the Epoch"),
+where the names in the structure and in the expression correspond.
+.P
+The same relationship shall apply for
+\fIgmtime_r\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIgmtime\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.P
+The
+\fIasctime\fR(),
+\fIctime\fR(),
+\fIgmtime\fR(),
+and
+\fIlocaltime\fR()
+functions shall return values in one of two static objects: a
+broken-down time structure and an array of type
+.BR char .
+Execution of any of the functions may overwrite the information
+returned in either of these objects by any of the other functions.
+.P
+The
+\fIgmtime_r\fR()
+function shall convert the time in seconds since the Epoch pointed to by
+.IR timer
+into a broken-down time expressed as Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
+The broken-down time is stored in the structure referred to by
+.IR result .
+The
+\fIgmtime_r\fR()
+function shall also return the address of the same structure.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIgmtime\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to a
+.BR "struct tm" .
+If an error is detected,
+\fIgmtime\fR()
+shall return a null pointer
+and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgmtime_r\fR()
+shall return the address of the structure pointed to by the argument
+.IR result .
+If an error is detected,
+\fIgmtime_r\fR()
+shall return a null pointer and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIgmtime\fR()
+and
+\fIgmtime_r\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The result cannot be represented.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIgmtime_r\fR()
+function is thread-safe and returns values in a user-supplied buffer
+instead of possibly using a static data area that may be overwritten by
+each call.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIasctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdifftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlocaltime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImktime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrptime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIutime\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.15" ", " "Seconds Since the Epoch",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/grantpt.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/grantpt.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..227e71d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/grantpt.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+'\" et
+.TH GRANTPT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+grantpt
+\(em grant access to the slave pseudo-terminal device
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+int grantpt(int \fIfildes\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIgrantpt\fR()
+function shall change the mode and ownership of the slave pseudo-terminal
+device associated with its master pseudo-terminal counterpart. The
+.IR fildes
+argument is a file descriptor that refers to a master
+pseudo-terminal device. The user ID of the slave shall be set to the real
+UID of the calling process and the group ID shall be set to an unspecified
+group ID. The permission mode of the slave pseudo-terminal shall be set to
+readable and writable by the owner, and writable by the group.
+.P
+The behavior of the
+\fIgrantpt\fR()
+function is unspecified if the application has installed a signal
+handler to catch SIGCHLD signals.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIgrantpt\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIgrantpt\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid open file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not associated with a master pseudo-terminal device.
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+The corresponding slave pseudo-terminal device could not be accessed.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+See the RATIONALE section for
+.IR "\fIposix_openpt\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_openpt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIptsname\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunlockpt\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/hcreate.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/hcreate.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f989f19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/hcreate.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,211 @@
+'\" et
+.TH HCREATE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+hcreate,
+hdestroy,
+hsearch
+\(em manage hash search table
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <search.h>
+.P
+int hcreate(size_t \fInel\fP);
+void hdestroy(void);
+ENTRY *hsearch(ENTRY \fIitem\fP, ACTION \fIaction\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIhcreate\fR(),
+\fIhdestroy\fR(),
+and
+\fIhsearch\fR()
+functions shall manage hash search tables.
+.P
+The
+\fIhcreate\fR()
+function shall allocate sufficient space for the table, and the
+application shall ensure it is called before
+\fIhsearch\fR()
+is used. The
+.IR nel
+argument is an estimate of the maximum number of entries that the table
+shall contain. This number may be adjusted upward by the algorithm in
+order to obtain certain mathematically favorable circumstances.
+.P
+The
+\fIhdestroy\fR()
+function shall dispose of the search table, and may be followed by
+another call to
+\fIhcreate\fR().
+After the call to
+\fIhdestroy\fR(),
+the data can no longer be considered accessible.
+.P
+The
+\fIhsearch\fR()
+function is a hash-table search routine. It shall return a pointer into a
+hash table indicating the location at which an entry can be found. The
+.IR item
+argument is a structure of type
+.BR ENTRY
+(defined in the
+.IR <search.h> 
+header) containing two pointers:
+.IR item.key
+points to the comparison key (a
+.BR "char *" ),
+and
+.IR item.data
+(a
+.BR "void *" )
+points to any other data to be associated with that key. The
+comparison function used by
+\fIhsearch\fR()
+is
+\fIstrcmp\fR().
+The
+.IR action
+argument is a member of an enumeration type
+.BR ACTION
+indicating the disposition of the entry if it cannot be found in the
+table. ENTER indicates that the item should be inserted in the table
+at an appropriate point. FIND indicates that no entry should be made.
+Unsuccessful resolution is indicated by the return of a null pointer.
+.P
+These functions need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIhcreate\fR()
+function shall return 0 if it cannot allocate sufficient space for the
+table; otherwise, it shall return non-zero.
+.P
+The
+\fIhdestroy\fR()
+function shall not return a value.
+.P
+The
+\fIhsearch\fR()
+function shall return a null pointer if either the action is FIND and
+the item could not be found or the action is ENTER and the table is
+full.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIhcreate\fR()
+and
+\fIhsearch\fR()
+functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient storage space is available.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+The following example reads in strings followed by two numbers and
+stores them in a hash table, discarding duplicates. It then reads in
+strings and finds the matching entry in the hash table and prints it
+out.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <search.h>
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+struct info {        /* This is the info stored in the table */
+    int age, room;   /* other than the key. */
+};
+.P
+#define NUM_EMPL    5000    /* # of elements in search table. */
+.P
+int main(void)
+{
+    char string_space[NUM_EMPL*20];   /* Space to store strings. */
+    struct info info_space[NUM_EMPL]; /* Space to store employee info. */
+    char *str_ptr = string_space;     /* Next space in string_space. */
+    struct info *info_ptr = info_space;
+                                      /* Next space in info_space. */
+    ENTRY item;
+    ENTRY *found_item; /* Name to look for in table. */
+    char name_to_find[30];
+.P
+    int i = 0;
+.P
+    /* Create table; no error checking is performed. */
+    (void) hcreate(NUM_EMPL);
+    while (scanf("%s%d%d", str_ptr, &info_ptr\(mi>age,
+           &info_ptr\(mi>room) != EOF && i++ < NUM_EMPL) {
+.P
+        /* Put information in structure, and structure in item. */
+        item.key = str_ptr;
+        item.data = info_ptr;
+        str_ptr += strlen(str_ptr) + 1;
+        info_ptr++;
+.P
+        /* Put item into table. */
+        (void) hsearch(item, ENTER);
+    }
+.P
+    /* Access table. */
+    item.key = name_to_find;
+    while (scanf("%s", item.key) != EOF) {
+        if ((found_item = hsearch(item, FIND)) != NULL) {
+.P
+            /* If item is in the table. */
+            (void)printf("found %s, age = %d, room = %d\en",
+                found_item\(mi>key,
+                ((struct info *)found_item\(mi>data)\(mi>age,
+                ((struct info *)found_item\(mi>data)\(mi>room);
+        } else
+            (void)printf("no such employee %s\en", name_to_find);
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIhcreate\fR()
+and
+\fIhsearch\fR()
+functions may use
+\fImalloc\fR()
+to allocate space.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIbsearch\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlsearch\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImalloc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrcmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItdelete\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<search.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/htonl.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/htonl.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cb78329
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/htonl.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+'\" et
+.TH HTONL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+htonl,
+htons,
+ntohl,
+ntohs
+\(em convert values between host and network byte order
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <arpa/inet.h>
+.P
+uint32_t htonl(uint32_t \fIhostlong\fP);
+uint16_t htons(uint16_t \fIhostshort\fP);
+uint32_t ntohl(uint32_t \fInetlong\fP);
+uint16_t ntohs(uint16_t \fInetshort\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These functions shall convert 16-bit and 32-bit quantities between
+network byte order and host byte order.
+.P
+On some implementations, these functions are defined as macros.
+.P
+The
+.BR uint32_t
+and
+.BR uint16_t
+types are defined in
+.IR <inttypes.h> .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIhtonl\fR()
+and
+\fIhtons\fR()
+functions shall return the argument value converted from host to
+network byte order.
+.P
+The
+\fIntohl\fR()
+and
+\fIntohs\fR()
+functions shall return the argument value converted from network to
+host byte order.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+These functions are most often used in conjunction with IPv4 addresses
+and ports as returned by
+\fIgethostent\fR()
+and
+\fIgetservent\fR().
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIendhostent\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIendservent\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<arpa_inet.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<inttypes.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/hypot.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/hypot.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ac67427
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/hypot.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+'\" et
+.TH HYPOT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+hypot,
+hypotf,
+hypotl
+\(em Euclidean distance function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double hypot(double \fIx\fP, double \fIy\fP);
+float hypotf(float \fIx\fP, float \fIy\fP);
+long double hypotl(long double \fIx\fP, long double \fIy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the value of the square root of
+.IR x \s-3\u2\d\s+3+\c
+.IR y \s-3\u2\d\s+3
+without undue overflow or underflow.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the length of
+the hypotenuse of a right-angled triangle with sides of length
+.IR x
+and
+.IR y .
+.P
+If the correct value would cause overflow, a range error shall occur
+and
+\fIhypot\fR(),
+\fIhypotf\fR(),
+and
+\fIhypotl\fR()
+shall return the value of the macro HUGE_VAL, HUGE_VALF, and HUGE_VALL,
+respectively.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+or
+.IR y
+is \(+-Inf, +Inf shall be returned (even if one of
+.IR x
+or
+.IR y
+is NaN).
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+or
+.IR y
+is NaN, and the other is not \(+-Inf, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If both arguments are subnormal and the correct result is subnormal,
+a range error may occur and the correct result shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result overflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the overflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result underflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+See the EXAMPLES section in
+\fIatan2\fR().
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+\fIhypot\fR(\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR), \fIhypot\fR(\fIy\fR,\fIx\fR), and
+\fIhypot\fR(\fIx\fR, \(mi\fIy\fR) are equivalent.
+.P
+\fIhypot\fR(\fIx\fR, \(+-0) is equivalent to \fIfabs\fR(\fIx\fR).
+.P
+Underflow only happens when both
+.IR x
+and
+.IR y
+are subnormal and the (inexact) result is also subnormal.
+.P
+These functions take precautions against overflow during intermediate
+steps of the computation.
+.P
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIatan2\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsqrt\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iconv.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iconv.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7c14b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iconv.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,235 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ICONV "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+iconv
+\(em codeset conversion function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <iconv.h>
+.P
+size_t iconv(iconv_t \fIcd\fP, char **restrict \fIinbuf\fP,
+    size_t *restrict \fIinbytesleft\fP, char **restrict \fIoutbuf\fP,
+    size_t *restrict \fIoutbytesleft\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIiconv\fR()
+function shall convert the sequence of characters from one codeset,
+in the array specified by
+.IR inbuf ,
+into a sequence of corresponding characters in another codeset, in the
+array specified by
+.IR outbuf .
+The codesets are those specified in the
+\fIiconv_open\fR()
+call that returned the conversion descriptor,
+.IR cd .
+The
+.IR inbuf
+argument points to a variable that points to the first character in the
+input buffer and
+.IR inbytesleft
+indicates the number of bytes to the end of the buffer to be
+converted. The
+.IR outbuf
+argument points to a variable that points to the first available byte
+in the output buffer and
+.IR outbytesleft
+indicates the number of the available bytes to the end of the buffer.
+.P
+For state-dependent encodings, the conversion descriptor
+.IR cd
+is placed into its initial shift state by a call for which
+.IR inbuf
+is a null pointer, or for which
+.IR inbuf
+points to a null pointer. When
+\fIiconv\fR()
+is called in this way, and if
+.IR outbuf
+is not a null pointer or a pointer to a null pointer, and
+.IR outbytesleft
+points to a positive value,
+\fIiconv\fR()
+shall place, into the output buffer, the byte sequence to change the
+output buffer to its initial shift state. If the output buffer is not
+large enough to hold the entire reset sequence,
+\fIiconv\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [E2BIG] .
+Subsequent calls with
+.IR inbuf
+as other than a null pointer or a pointer to a null pointer cause the
+conversion to take place from the current state of the conversion
+descriptor.
+.P
+If a sequence of input bytes does not form a valid character in the
+specified codeset, conversion shall stop after the previous
+successfully converted character. If the input buffer ends with an
+incomplete character or shift sequence, conversion shall stop after the
+previous successfully converted bytes. If the output buffer is not
+large enough to hold the entire converted input, conversion shall stop
+just prior to the input bytes that would cause the output buffer to
+overflow. The variable pointed to by
+.IR inbuf
+shall be updated to point to the byte following the last byte
+successfully used in the conversion. The value pointed to by
+.IR inbytesleft
+shall be decremented to reflect the number of bytes still not converted
+in the input buffer. The variable pointed to by
+.IR outbuf
+shall be updated to point to the byte following the last byte of
+converted output data. The value pointed to by
+.IR outbytesleft
+shall be decremented to reflect the number of bytes still available in
+the output buffer. For state-dependent encodings, the conversion
+descriptor shall be updated
+to reflect the shift state in effect at the end of the last
+successfully converted byte sequence.
+.P
+If
+\fIiconv\fR()
+encounters a character in the input buffer that is valid, but for which
+an identical character does not exist in the target codeset,
+\fIiconv\fR()
+shall perform an implementation-defined conversion on this character.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIiconv\fR()
+function shall update the variables pointed to by the arguments to
+reflect the extent of the conversion and return the number of
+non-identical conversions performed. If the entire string in the input
+buffer is converted, the value pointed to by
+.IR inbytesleft
+shall be 0. If the input conversion is stopped due to any conditions
+mentioned above, the value pointed to by
+.IR inbytesleft
+shall be non-zero and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the condition. If an error occurs,
+\fIiconv\fR()
+shall return (\fBsize_t\fP)\(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIiconv\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EILSEQ
+Input conversion stopped due to an input byte that does not belong to
+the input codeset.
+.TP
+.BR E2BIG
+Input conversion stopped due to lack of space in the output buffer.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+Input conversion stopped due to an incomplete character or shift
+sequence at the end of the input buffer.
+.P
+The
+\fIiconv\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR cd
+argument is not a valid open conversion descriptor.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR inbuf
+argument indirectly points to the memory area which contains the
+conversion input data. The
+.IR outbuf
+argument indirectly points to the memory area which is to contain the
+result of the conversion. The objects indirectly pointed to by
+.IR inbuf
+and
+.IR outbuf
+are not restricted to containing data that is directly representable in
+the ISO\ C standard language
+.BR char
+data type. The type of
+.IR inbuf
+and
+.IR outbuf ,
+.BR "char **" ,
+does not imply that the objects pointed to are interpreted as
+null-terminated C strings or arrays of characters. Any interpretation
+of a byte sequence that represents a character in a given character set
+encoding scheme is done internally within the codeset converters. For
+example, the area pointed to indirectly by
+.IR inbuf
+and/or
+.IR outbuf
+can contain all zero octets that are not interpreted as string
+terminators but as coded character data according to the respective
+codeset encoding scheme. The type of the data (\c
+.BR char ,
+.BR short ,
+.BR long ,
+and so on) read or stored in the objects is not specified, but may be
+inferred for both the input and output data by the converters
+determined by the
+.IR fromcode
+and
+.IR tocode
+arguments of
+\fIiconv_open\fR().
+.P
+Regardless of the data type inferred by the converter, the size of the
+remaining space in both input and output objects (the
+.IR intbytesleft
+and
+.IR outbytesleft
+arguments) is always measured in bytes.
+.P
+For implementations that support the conversion of state-dependent
+encodings, the conversion descriptor must be able to accurately reflect
+the shift-state in effect at the end of the last successful
+conversion. It is not required that the conversion descriptor itself
+be updated, which would require it to be a pointer type. Thus,
+implementations are free to implement the descriptor as a handle (other
+than a pointer type) by which the conversion information can be
+accessed and updated.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIiconv_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiconv_close\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbsrtowcs\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<iconv.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iconv_close.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iconv_close.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dd04975
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iconv_close.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ICONV_CLOSE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+iconv_close
+\(em codeset conversion deallocation function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <iconv.h>
+.P
+int iconv_close(iconv_t \fIcd\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIiconv_close\fR()
+function shall deallocate the conversion descriptor
+.IR cd
+and all other associated resources allocated by
+\fIiconv_open\fR().
+.P
+If a file descriptor is used to implement the type
+.BR iconv_t ,
+that file descriptor shall be closed.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned; otherwise, \(mi1 shall
+be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIiconv_close\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The conversion descriptor is invalid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIiconv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiconv_open\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<iconv.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iconv_open.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iconv_open.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f6d5536
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iconv_open.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ICONV_OPEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+iconv_open
+\(em codeset conversion allocation function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <iconv.h>
+.P
+iconv_t iconv_open(const char *\fItocode\fP, const char *\fIfromcode\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIiconv_open\fR()
+function shall return a conversion descriptor
+that describes a conversion from the codeset specified by the string
+pointed to by the
+.IR fromcode
+argument to the codeset specified by the string pointed to by the
+.IR tocode
+argument. For state-dependent encodings, the conversion descriptor
+shall be in a codeset-dependent initial shift state, ready for
+immediate use with
+\fIiconv\fR().
+.P
+Settings of
+.IR fromcode
+and
+.IR tocode
+and their permitted combinations are implementation-defined.
+.P
+A conversion descriptor shall remain valid until it is closed by
+\fIiconv_close\fR()
+or an implicit close.
+.P
+If a file descriptor is used to implement conversion descriptors, the
+FD_CLOEXEC flag shall be set; see
+.IR <fcntl.h> .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIiconv_open\fR()
+shall return a conversion descriptor for use on subsequent calls to
+\fIiconv\fR().
+Otherwise,
+\fIiconv_open\fR()
+shall return (\fBiconv_t\fP)\(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIiconv_open\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+Too many files are currently open in the system.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient storage space is available.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The conversion specified by
+.IR fromcode
+and
+.IR tocode
+is not supported by the implementation.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Some implementations of
+\fIiconv_open\fR()
+use
+\fImalloc\fR()
+to allocate space for internal buffer areas. The
+\fIiconv_open\fR()
+function may fail if there is insufficient storage space to accommodate
+these buffers.
+.P
+Conforming applications must assume that conversion descriptors are not
+valid after a call to one of the
+.IR exec
+functions.
+.P
+Application developers should consult the system documentation to
+determine the supported codesets and their naming schemes.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIiconv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiconv_close\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fcntl.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<iconv.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/if_freenameindex.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/if_freenameindex.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d04be2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/if_freenameindex.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+'\" et
+.TH IF_FREENAMEINDEX "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+if_freenameindex
+\(em free memory allocated by if_nameindex
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <net/if.h>
+.P
+void if_freenameindex(struct if_nameindex *\fIptr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIif_freenameindex\fR()
+function shall free the memory allocated by
+\fIif_nameindex\fR().
+The
+.IR ptr
+argument shall be a pointer that was returned by
+\fIif_nameindex\fR().
+After
+\fIif_freenameindex\fR()
+has been called, the application shall not use the array of which
+.IR ptr
+is the address.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+None.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetsockopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIif_indextoname\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIif_nameindex\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIif_nametoindex\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsockopt\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<net_if.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/if_indextoname.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/if_indextoname.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eb34a00
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/if_indextoname.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+'\" et
+.TH IF_INDEXTONAME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+if_indextoname
+\(em map a network interface index to its corresponding name
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <net/if.h>
+.P
+char *if_indextoname(unsigned \fIifindex\fP, char *\fIifname\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIif_indextoname\fR()
+function shall map an interface index to its corresponding name.
+.P
+When this function is called,
+.IR ifname
+shall point to a buffer of at least
+{IF_NAMESIZE}
+bytes. The function shall place in this buffer the name of the interface
+with index
+.IR ifindex .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If
+.IR ifindex
+is an interface index, then the function shall return the value supplied in
+.IR ifname ,
+which points to a buffer now containing the interface name. Otherwise,
+the function shall return a null pointer and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIif_indextoname\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+The interface does not exist.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetsockopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIif_freenameindex\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIif_nameindex\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIif_nametoindex\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsockopt\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<net_if.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/if_nameindex.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/if_nameindex.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..36b3b2c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/if_nameindex.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+'\" et
+.TH IF_NAMEINDEX "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+if_nameindex
+\(em return all network interface names and indexes
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <net/if.h>
+.P
+struct if_nameindex *\fIif_nameindex\fP(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIif_nameindex\fR()
+function shall return an array of
+.IR if_nameindex
+structures, one structure per interface. The end of the array is
+indicated by a structure with an
+.IR if_index
+field of zero and an
+.IR if_name
+field of NULL.
+.P
+Applications should call
+\fIif_freenameindex\fR()
+to release the memory that may be dynamically allocated by this
+function, after they have finished using it.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+An array of structures identifying local interfaces. A null pointer is
+returned upon an error, with
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIif_nameindex\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOBUFS
+Insufficient resources are available to complete the function.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetsockopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIif_freenameindex\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIif_indextoname\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIif_nametoindex\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsockopt\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<net_if.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/if_nametoindex.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/if_nametoindex.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5b44d03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/if_nametoindex.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+'\" et
+.TH IF_NAMETOINDEX "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+if_nametoindex
+\(em map a network interface name to its corresponding index
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <net/if.h>
+.P
+unsigned if_nametoindex(const char *\fIifname\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIif_nametoindex\fR()
+function shall return the interface index corresponding to name
+.IR ifname .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The corresponding index if
+.IR ifname
+is the name of an interface; otherwise, zero.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetsockopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIif_freenameindex\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIif_indextoname\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIif_nameindex\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsockopt\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<net_if.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ilogb.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ilogb.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..386ce58
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ilogb.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,193 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ILOGB "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.EQ
+delim $$
+.EN
+.SH NAME
+ilogb,
+ilogbf,
+ilogbl
+\(em return an unbiased exponent
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+int ilogb(double \fIx\fP);
+int ilogbf(float \fIx\fP);
+int ilogbl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall return the exponent part of their argument
+.IR x .
+Formally, the return value is the integral part of $log sub{r}|x|$ as a
+signed integral value, for non-zero
+.IR x ,
+where
+.IR r
+is the radix of the machine's floating-point arithmetic, which is the
+value of FLT_RADIX defined in
+.IR <float.h> .
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the exponent
+part of
+.IR x
+as a signed integer value. They are equivalent to calling the
+corresponding
+\fIlogb\fR()
+function and casting the returned value to type
+.BR int .
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is 0, the value FP_ILOGB0 shall be returned.
+On XSI-conformant systems, a domain error shall occur;
+.br
+otherwise, a
+domain
+error may occur.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-Inf, the value
+{INT_MAX}
+shall be returned.
+On XSI-conformant systems, a domain error shall occur;
+.br
+otherwise, a
+domain
+error may occur.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is a NaN, the value FP_ILOGBNAN shall be returned.
+On XSI-conformant systems, a domain error shall occur;
+.br
+otherwise, a
+domain
+error may occur.
+.P
+If the correct value is greater than
+{INT_MAX},
+a domain error shall occur and
+an unspecified value shall be returned.
+On XSI-conformant systems, a domain error shall occur and
+{INT_MAX}
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If the correct value is less than
+{INT_MIN},
+a domain error shall occur and
+an unspecified value shall be returned.
+On XSI-conformant systems, a domain error shall occur and
+{INT_MIN}
+shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The correct value is not representable as an integer.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+The
+.IR x
+argument is zero, NaN, or \(+-Inf.
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The
+.IR x
+argument is zero, NaN, or \(+-Inf.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The errors come from taking the expected floating-point value and
+converting it to
+.BR int ,
+which is an invalid operation in IEEE\ Std\ 754\(hy1985 (since overflow, infinity, and
+NaN are not representable in a type
+.BR int ),
+so should be a domain error.
+.P
+There are no known implementations that overflow. For overflow to
+happen,
+{INT_MAX}
+must be less than LDBL_MAX_EXP*\fIlog2\fP(FLT_RADIX) or
+{INT_MIN}
+must be greater than LDBL_MIN_EXP*\fIlog2\fP(FLT_RADIX) if subnormals
+are not supported, or
+{INT_MIN}
+must be greater than (LDBL_MIN_EXP-LDBL_MANT_DIG)*\fIlog2\fP(FLT_RADIX)
+if subnormals are supported.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlogb\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIscalbln\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<float.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/imaxabs.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/imaxabs.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a78a412
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/imaxabs.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+'\" et
+.TH IMAXABS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+imaxabs
+\(em return absolute value
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <inttypes.h>
+.P
+intmax_t imaxabs(intmax_t \fIj\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIimaxabs\fR()
+function shall compute the absolute value of an integer
+.IR j .
+If the result cannot be represented, the behavior is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIimaxabs\fR()
+function shall return the absolute value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The absolute value of the most negative number cannot be represented in
+two's complement.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIimaxdiv\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<inttypes.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/imaxdiv.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/imaxdiv.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c5bc147
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/imaxdiv.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+'\" et
+.TH IMAXDIV "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+imaxdiv
+\(em return quotient and remainder
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <inttypes.h>
+.P
+imaxdiv_t imaxdiv(intmax_t \fInumer\fP, intmax_t \fIdenom\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIimaxdiv\fR()
+function shall compute \fInumer\fR\ /\ \fIdenom\fR and
+\fInumer\fR\ %\ \fIdenom\fR in a single operation.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIimaxdiv\fR()
+function shall return a structure of type
+.BR imaxdiv_t ,
+comprising both the quotient and the remainder. The structure shall
+contain (in either order) the members
+.IR quot
+(the quotient) and
+.IR rem
+(the remainder), each of which has type
+.BR intmax_t .
+.P
+If either part of the result cannot be represented, the behavior is
+undefined.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIimaxabs\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<inttypes.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/inet_addr.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/inet_addr.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..565770e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/inet_addr.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+'\" et
+.TH INET_ADDR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+inet_addr,
+inet_ntoa
+\(em IPv4 address manipulation
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <arpa/inet.h>
+.P
+in_addr_t inet_addr(const char *\fIcp\fP);
+char *inet_ntoa(struct in_addr \fIin\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIinet_addr\fR()
+function shall convert the string pointed to by
+.IR cp ,
+in the standard IPv4 dotted decimal notation, to an integer value
+suitable for use as an Internet address.
+.P
+The
+\fIinet_ntoa\fR()
+function shall convert the Internet host address specified by
+.IR in
+to a string in the Internet standard dot notation.
+.P
+The
+\fIinet_ntoa\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.P
+All Internet addresses shall be returned in network order (bytes
+ordered from left to right).
+.P
+Values specified using IPv4 dotted decimal notation take one of the
+following forms:
+.IP "\fRa.b.c.d\fP" 10
+When four parts are specified, each shall be interpreted as a byte of
+data and assigned, from left to right, to the four bytes of an Internet
+address.
+.IP "\fRa.b.c\fP" 10
+When a three-part address is specified, the last part shall be
+interpreted as a 16-bit quantity and placed in the rightmost two bytes
+of the network address. This makes the three-part address format
+convenient for specifying Class B network addresses as
+.BR \(dq128.net.host\(dq .
+.IP "\fRa.b\fP" 10
+When a two-part address is supplied, the last part shall be interpreted
+as a 24-bit quantity and placed in the rightmost three bytes of the
+network address. This makes the two-part address format convenient for
+specifying Class A network addresses as
+.BR \(dqnet.host\(dq .
+.IP "\fRa\fP" 10
+When only one part is given, the value shall be stored directly in the
+network address without any byte rearrangement.
+.P
+All numbers supplied as parts in IPv4 dotted decimal notation may be
+decimal, octal, or hexadecimal, as specified in the ISO\ C standard (that is, a
+leading 0x or 0X implies hexadecimal; otherwise, a leading
+.BR '0' 
+implies octal; otherwise, the number is interpreted as decimal).
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIinet_addr\fR()
+shall return the Internet address. Otherwise, it shall return (\c
+.BR in_addr_t )(\(mi1).
+.P
+The
+\fIinet_ntoa\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to the network address in Internet
+standard dot notation.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The return value of
+\fIinet_ntoa\fR()
+may point to static data that may be overwritten by subsequent calls to
+\fIinet_ntoa\fR().
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIendhostent\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIendnetent\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<arpa_inet.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/inet_ntop.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/inet_ntop.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f1d1adc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/inet_ntop.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,200 @@
+'\" et
+.TH INET_NTOP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+inet_ntop,
+inet_pton
+\(em convert IPv4 and IPv6 addresses between binary and text form
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <arpa/inet.h>
+.P
+const char *inet_ntop(int \fIaf\fP, const void *restrict \fIsrc\fP,
+    char *restrict \fIdst\fP, socklen_t \fIsize\fP);
+int inet_pton(int \fIaf\fP, const char *restrict \fIsrc\fP, void *restrict \fIdst\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIinet_ntop\fR()
+function shall convert a numeric address into a text string suitable
+for presentation. The
+.IR af
+argument shall specify the family of the address. This can be AF_INET
+or AF_INET6.
+The
+.IR src
+argument points to a buffer holding an IPv4 address if the
+.IR af
+argument is AF_INET,
+or an IPv6 address if the
+.IR af
+argument is AF_INET6;
+the address must be in network byte order. The
+.IR dst
+argument points to a buffer where the function stores the resulting
+text string; it shall not be NULL. The
+.IR size
+argument specifies the size of this buffer, which shall be large enough
+to hold the text string (INET_ADDRSTRLEN characters for IPv4,
+INET6_ADDRSTRLEN characters for IPv6).
+.P
+The
+\fIinet_pton\fR()
+function shall convert an address in its standard text presentation
+form into its numeric binary form. The
+.IR af
+argument shall specify the family of the address. The AF_INET
+and AF_INET6
+address families shall be supported. The
+.IR src
+argument points to the string being passed in. The
+.IR dst
+argument points to a buffer into which the function stores the numeric
+address; this shall be large enough to hold the numeric address (32 bits
+for AF_INET,
+128 bits for AF_INET6).
+.P
+If the
+.IR af
+argument of
+\fIinet_pton\fR()
+is AF_INET, the
+.IR src
+string shall be in the standard IPv4 dotted-decimal form:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.BR \(dqddd\(dq 
+is a one to three digit decimal number between 0 and 255 (see
+.IR "\fIinet_addr\fR\^(\|)").
+The
+\fIinet_pton\fR()
+function does not accept other formats (such as the octal numbers,
+hexadecimal numbers, and fewer than four numbers that
+\fIinet_addr\fR()
+accepts).
+.P
+If the
+.IR af
+argument of
+\fIinet_pton\fR()
+is AF_INET6, the
+.IR src
+string shall be in one of the following standard IPv6 text forms:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The preferred form is
+.BR \(dqx:x:x:x:x:x:x:x\(dq ,
+where the
+.BR 'x' s
+are the hexadecimal values of the eight 16-bit pieces of the address.
+Leading zeros in individual fields can be omitted, but there shall be at
+least one numeral in every field.
+.IP " 2." 4
+A string of contiguous zero fields in the preferred form can be shown
+as
+.BR \(dq::\(dq .
+The
+.BR \(dq::\(dq 
+can only appear once in an address. Unspecified addresses (\c
+.BR \(dq0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0\(dq )
+may be represented simply as
+.BR \(dq::\(dq .
+.IP " 3." 4
+A third form that is sometimes more convenient when dealing with a
+mixed environment of IPv4 and IPv6 nodes is
+.BR \(dqx:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d\(dq ,
+where the
+.BR 'x' s
+are the hexadecimal values of the six high-order 16-bit pieces of the
+address, and the
+.BR 'd' s
+are the decimal values of the four low-order 8-bit pieces of the
+address (standard IPv4 representation).
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+A more extensive description of the standard representations of IPv6
+addresses can be found in RFC\ 2373.
+.P
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIinet_ntop\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to the buffer containing the text
+string if the conversion succeeds, and NULL otherwise, and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.P
+The
+\fIinet_pton\fR()
+function shall return 1 if the conversion succeeds, with the address
+pointed to by
+.IR dst
+in network byte order. It shall return 0 if the input is not a valid
+IPv4 dotted-decimal string
+or a valid IPv6 address string,
+or \(mi1 with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [EAFNOSUPPORT] 
+if the
+.IR af
+argument is unknown.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIinet_ntop\fR()
+and
+\fIinet_pton\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAFNOSUPPORT
+.br
+The
+.IR af
+argument is invalid.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+The size of the
+\fIinet_ntop\fR()
+result buffer is inadequate.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<arpa_inet.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/initstate.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/initstate.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..99559c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/initstate.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,189 @@
+'\" et
+.TH INITSTATE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+initstate,
+random,
+setstate,
+srandom
+\(em pseudo-random number functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+char *initstate(unsigned \fIseed\fP, char *\fIstate\fP, size_t \fIsize\fP);
+long random(void);
+char *setstate(char *\fIstate\fP);
+void srandom(unsigned \fIseed\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIrandom\fR()
+function shall use a non-linear additive feedback random-number
+generator employing a default state array size of 31
+.BR long
+integers to return successive pseudo-random numbers in the range from 0
+to 2\u\s-331\s+3\d\(mi1. The period of this random-number generator is
+approximately 16 x (2\s-3\u31\d\s+3\(mi\fR1). The size of the state
+array determines the period of the random-number generator. Increasing
+the state array size shall increase the period.
+.P
+With 256 bytes of state information, the period of the random-number
+generator shall be greater than 2\s-3\u69\d\s+3.
+.P
+Like
+\fIrand\fR(),
+\fIrandom\fR()
+shall produce by default a sequence of numbers that can be duplicated
+by calling
+\fIsrandom\fR()
+with 1 as the seed.
+.P
+The
+\fIsrandom\fR()
+function shall initialize the current state array using the value of
+.IR seed .
+.P
+The
+\fIinitstate\fR()
+and
+\fIsetstate\fR()
+functions handle restarting and changing random-number generators. The
+\fIinitstate\fR()
+function allows a state array, pointed to by the
+.IR state
+argument, to be initialized for future use. The
+.IR size
+argument, which specifies the size in bytes of the state array, shall
+be used by
+\fIinitstate\fR()
+to decide what type of random-number generator to use; the larger the
+state array, the more random the numbers. Values for the amount of
+state information are 8, 32, 64, 128, and 256 bytes. Other values
+greater than 8 bytes are rounded down to the nearest one of these
+values. If
+\fIinitstate\fR()
+is called with 8\(<=\fIsize\fR<32, then
+\fIrandom\fR()
+shall use a simple linear congruential random number generator. The
+.IR seed
+argument specifies a starting point for the random-number sequence and
+provides for restarting at the same point. The
+\fIinitstate\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to the previous state information array.
+.P
+If
+\fIinitstate\fR()
+has not been called, then
+\fIrandom\fR()
+shall behave as though
+\fIinitstate\fR()
+had been called with
+.IR seed =1
+and
+.IR size =128.
+.P
+Once a state has been initialized,
+\fIsetstate\fR()
+allows switching between state arrays. The array defined by the
+.IR state
+argument shall be used for further random-number generation until
+\fIinitstate\fR()
+is called or
+\fIsetstate\fR()
+is called again. The
+\fIsetstate\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to the previous state array.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If
+\fIinitstate\fR()
+is called with
+.IR size
+less than 8, it shall return NULL.
+.P
+The
+\fIrandom\fR()
+function shall return the generated pseudo-random number.
+.P
+The
+\fIsrandom\fR()
+function shall not return a value.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIinitstate\fR()
+and
+\fIsetstate\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the previous state array; otherwise, a null
+pointer shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+After initialization, a state array can be restarted at a different
+point in one of two ways:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The
+\fIinitstate\fR()
+function can be used, with the desired seed, state array, and size of
+the array.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The
+\fIsetstate\fR()
+function, with the desired state, can be used, followed by
+\fIsrandom\fR()
+with the desired seed. The advantage of using both of these functions
+is that the size of the state array does not have to be saved once it
+is initialized.
+.P
+Although some implementations of
+\fIrandom\fR()
+have written messages to standard error, such implementations do not
+conform to POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+Issue 5 restored the historical behavior of this function.
+.P
+Threaded applications should use
+\fIerand48\fR(),
+\fInrand48\fR(),
+or
+\fIjrand48\fR()
+instead of
+\fIrandom\fR()
+when an independent random number sequence in multiple threads is
+required.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIdrand48\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrand\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/insque.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/insque.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..81fd05b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/insque.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,214 @@
+'\" et
+.TH INSQUE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+insque,
+remque
+\(em insert or remove an element in a queue
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <search.h>
+.P
+void insque(void *\fIelement\fP, void *\fIpred\fP);
+void remque(void *\fIelement\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIinsque\fR()
+and
+\fIremque\fR()
+functions shall manipulate queues built from doubly-linked lists.
+The queue can be either circular or linear. An application using
+\fIinsque\fR()
+or
+\fIremque\fR()
+shall ensure it defines a structure in which the first two members of
+the structure are pointers to the same type of structure, and any
+further members are application-specific. The first member of the
+structure is a forward pointer to the next entry in the queue. The
+second member is a backward pointer to the previous entry in the queue.
+If the queue is linear, the queue is terminated with null pointers. The
+names of the structure and of the pointer members are not subject to
+any special restriction.
+.P
+The
+\fIinsque\fR()
+function shall insert the element pointed to by
+.IR element
+into a queue immediately after the element pointed to by
+.IR pred .
+.P
+The
+\fIremque\fR()
+function shall remove the element pointed to by
+.IR element
+from a queue.
+.P
+If the queue is to be used as a linear list, invoking
+\fIinsque\fP(&\fIelement\fP, NULL), where
+.IR element
+is the initial element of the queue, shall initialize the forward
+and backward pointers of
+.IR element
+to null pointers.
+.P
+If the queue is to be used as a circular list, the application shall
+ensure it initializes the forward pointer and the backward pointer of
+the initial element of the queue to the element's own address.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIinsque\fR()
+and
+\fIremque\fR()
+functions do not return a value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Creating a Linear Linked List"
+.P
+The following example creates a linear linked list.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <search.h>
+\&...
+struct myque element1;
+struct myque element2;
+.P
+char *data1 = "DATA1";
+char *data2 = "DATA2";
+\&...
+element1.data = data1;
+element2.data = data2;
+.P
+insque (&element1, NULL);
+insque (&element2, &element1);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Creating a Circular Linked List"
+.P
+The following example creates a circular linked list.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <search.h>
+\&...
+struct myque element1;
+struct myque element2;
+.P
+char *data1 = "DATA1";
+char *data2 = "DATA2";
+\&...
+element1.data = data1;
+element2.data = data2;
+.P
+element1.fwd = &element1;
+element1.bck = &element1;
+.P
+insque (&element2, &element1);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Removing an Element"
+.P
+The following example removes the element pointed to by
+.IR element1 .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <search.h>
+\&...
+struct myque element1;
+\&...
+remque (&element1);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The historical implementations of these functions described the
+arguments as being of type
+.BR "struct qelem *"
+rather than as being of type
+.BR "void *"
+as defined here. In those implementations,
+.BR "struct qelem"
+was commonly defined in
+.IR <search.h> 
+as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+struct qelem {
+    struct qelem  *q_forw;
+    struct qelem  *q_back;
+};
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Applications using these functions, however, were never able to use
+this structure directly since it provided no room for the actual data
+contained in the elements. Most applications defined structures that
+contained the two pointers as the initial elements and also provided
+space for, or pointers to, the object's data. Applications that used
+these functions to update more than one type of table also had the
+problem of specifying two or more different structures with the same
+name, if they literally used
+.BR "struct qelem"
+as specified.
+.P
+As described here, the implementations were actually expecting a
+structure type where the first two members were forward and backward
+pointers to structures. With C compilers that didn't provide function
+prototypes, applications used structures as specified in the
+DESCRIPTION above and the compiler did what the application expected.
+.P
+If this method had been carried forward with an ISO\ C standard compiler and the
+historical function prototype, most applications would have to be
+modified to cast pointers to the structures actually used to be
+pointers to
+.BR "struct qelem"
+to avoid compilation warnings. By specifying
+.BR "void *"
+as the argument type, applications do not need to change (unless
+they specifically referenced
+.BR "struct qelem"
+and depended on it being defined in
+.IR <search.h> ).
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<search.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ioctl.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ioctl.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..122712e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ioctl.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,1214 @@
+'\" et
+.TH IOCTL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ioctl
+\(em control a STREAMS device (\fBSTREAMS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stropts.h>
+.P
+int ioctl(int \fIfildes\fP, int \fIrequest\fP, ... /* arg */);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function shall perform a variety of control functions on STREAMS
+devices. For non-STREAMS devices, the functions performed by this call
+are unspecified. The
+.IR request
+argument and an optional third argument (with varying type) shall be
+passed to and interpreted by the appropriate part of the STREAM
+associated with
+.IR fildes .
+.P
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is an open file descriptor that refers to a device.
+.P
+The
+.IR request
+argument selects the control function to be performed and shall
+depend on the STREAMS device being addressed.
+.P
+The
+.IR arg
+argument represents additional information that is needed by this
+specific STREAMS device to perform the requested function. The type of
+.IR arg
+depends upon the particular control request, but it shall be either an
+integer or a pointer to a device-specific data structure.
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+commands applicable to STREAMS, their arguments, and error conditions
+that apply to each individual command are described below.
+.P
+The following
+\fIioctl\fR()
+commands, with error values indicated, are applicable to all STREAMS
+files:
+.IP I_PUSH 12
+Pushes the module whose name is pointed to by
+.IR arg
+onto the top of the current STREAM, just below the STREAM head. It then
+calls the
+\fIopen\fR()
+function of the newly-pushed module.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_PUSH command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+Invalid module name.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+Open function of new module failed.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+Hangup received on
+.IR fildes .
+.RE
+.IP I_POP 12
+Removes the module just below the STREAM head of the STREAM pointed to
+by
+.IR fildes .
+The
+.IR arg
+argument should be 0 in an I_POP request.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_POP command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+No module present in the STREAM.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+Hangup received on
+.IR fildes .
+.RE
+.IP I_LOOK 12
+Retrieves the name of the module just below the STREAM head of the
+STREAM pointed to by
+.IR fildes ,
+and places it in a character string pointed to by
+.IR arg .
+The buffer pointed to by
+.IR arg
+should be at least FMNAMESZ+1
+bytes long, where FMNAMESZ is defined in
+.IR <stropts.h> .
+.RS 12 
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_LOOK command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+No module present in the STREAM.
+.RE
+.IP I_FLUSH 12
+Flushes read and/or write queues, depending on the value of
+.IR arg .
+Valid
+.IR arg
+values are:
+.RS 12 
+.IP FLUSHR 12
+Flush all read queues.
+.IP FLUSHW 12
+Flush all write queues.
+.IP FLUSHRW 12
+Flush all read and all write queues.
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_FLUSH command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+Invalid
+.IR arg
+value.
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN " or " ENOSR
+.br
+Unable to allocate buffers for flush message.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+Hangup received on
+.IR fildes .
+.RE
+.IP I_FLUSHBAND 12
+Flushes a particular band of messages. The
+.IR arg
+argument points to a
+.BR bandinfo
+structure. The
+.IR bi_flag
+member may be one of FLUSHR, FLUSHW, or FLUSHRW as described above. The
+.IR bi_pri
+member determines the priority band to be flushed.
+.IP I_SETSIG 12
+Requests that the STREAMS implementation send the SIGPOLL signal to the
+calling process when a particular event has occurred on
+the STREAM associated with
+.IR fildes .
+I_SETSIG supports an asynchronous processing capability in STREAMS. The
+value of
+.IR arg
+is a bitmask that specifies the events for which the process should be
+signaled. It is the bitwise-inclusive OR of any combination of the
+following constants:
+.RS 12 
+.IP S_RDNORM 12
+A normal (priority band set to 0) message has arrived at the head of a
+STREAM head read queue. A signal shall be generated even if the message
+is of zero length.
+.IP S_RDBAND 12
+A message with a non-zero priority band has arrived at the head of a
+STREAM head read queue. A signal shall be generated even if the message
+is of zero length.
+.IP S_INPUT 12
+A message, other than a high-priority message, has arrived at the head
+of a STREAM head read queue. A signal shall be generated even if the
+message is of zero length.
+.IP S_HIPRI 12
+A high-priority message is present on a STREAM head read queue. A
+signal shall be generated even if the message is of zero length.
+.IP S_OUTPUT 12
+The write queue for normal data (priority band 0) just below the STREAM
+head is no longer full. This notifies the process that there is room
+on the queue for sending (or writing) normal data downstream.
+.IP S_WRNORM 12
+Equivalent to S_OUTPUT.
+.IP S_WRBAND 12
+The write queue for a non-zero priority band just below the STREAM head
+is no longer full. This notifies the process that there is room on the
+queue for sending (or writing) priority data downstream.
+.IP S_MSG 12
+A STREAMS signal message that contains the SIGPOLL signal has reached
+the front of the STREAM head read queue.
+.IP S_ERROR 12
+Notification of an error condition has reached the STREAM head.
+.IP S_HANGUP 12
+Notification of a hangup has reached the STREAM head.
+.IP S_BANDURG 12
+When used in conjunction with S_RDBAND, SIGURG is generated instead of
+SIGPOLL when a priority message reaches the front of the STREAM head
+read queue.
+.P
+If
+.IR arg
+is 0, the calling process shall be unregistered and shall not receive
+further SIGPOLL signals for the stream associated with
+.IR fildes .
+.P
+Processes that wish to receive SIGPOLL signals shall ensure that they
+explicitly register to receive them using I_SETSIG. If several
+processes register to receive this
+signal for the same event on the same STREAM, each process shall be
+signaled when the event occurs.
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_SETSIG command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR arg
+is invalid.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR arg
+is 0 and the calling process is not registered to receive
+the SIGPOLL signal.
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+There were insufficient resources to store the signal request.
+.RE
+.IP I_GETSIG 12
+Returns the events for which the calling process is currently
+registered to be sent a SIGPOLL signal. The events are returned as a
+bitmask in an
+.BR int
+pointed to by
+.IR arg ,
+where the events are those specified in the description of
+I_SETSIG above.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_GETSIG command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+Process is not registered to receive the SIGPOLL signal.
+.RE
+.IP I_FIND 12
+Compares the names of all modules currently present in the STREAM to
+the name pointed to by
+.IR arg ,
+and returns 1 if the named module is present in the STREAM, or returns
+0 if the named module is not present.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_FIND command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+.IR arg
+does not contain a valid module name.
+.RE
+.IP I_PEEK 12
+Retrieves the information in the first message on the STREAM head read
+queue without taking the message off the queue. It is analogous to
+\fIgetmsg\fR()
+except that this command does not remove the message from the queue.
+The
+.IR arg
+argument points to a
+.BR strpeek
+structure.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+The application shall ensure that the
+.IR maxlen
+member in the
+.BR ctlbuf
+and
+.BR "databuf strbuf"
+structures is set to the number of bytes of control information and/or
+data information, respectively, to retrieve. The
+.IR flags
+member may be marked RS_HIPRI or 0, as described by
+\fIgetmsg\fR().
+If the process sets
+.IR flags
+to RS_HIPRI, for example, I_PEEK shall only look for a high-priority
+message on the STREAM head read queue.
+.P
+I_PEEK returns 1 if a message was retrieved, and returns 0 if no
+message was found on the STREAM head read queue, or if the RS_HIPRI
+flag was set in
+.IR flags
+and a high-priority message was not present on the STREAM head read
+queue. It does not wait for a message to arrive. On return,
+.BR ctlbuf
+specifies information in the control buffer,
+.BR databuf
+specifies information in the data buffer, and
+.IR flags
+contains the value RS_HIPRI or 0.
+.RE
+.IP I_SRDOPT 12
+Sets the read mode using the value of the argument
+.IR arg .
+Read modes are described in
+\fIread\fR().
+Valid
+.IR arg
+flags are:
+.RS 12 
+.IP RNORM 12
+Byte-stream mode, the default.
+.IP RMSGD 12
+Message-discard mode.
+.IP RMSGN 12
+Message-nondiscard mode.
+.P
+The bitwise-inclusive OR of RMSGD and RMSGN shall return
+.BR [EINVAL] .
+The bitwise-inclusive OR of RNORM and either RMSGD or RMSGN shall
+result in the other flag overriding RNORM which is the default.
+.P
+In addition, treatment of control messages by the STREAM head may be
+changed by setting any of the following flags in
+.IR arg :
+.IP RPROTNORM 12
+Fail
+\fIread\fR()
+with
+.BR [EBADMSG] 
+if a message containing a control part is at the front of the
+STREAM head read queue.
+.IP RPROTDAT 12
+Deliver the control part of a message as data when a process issues a
+\fIread\fR().
+.IP RPROTDIS 12
+Discard the control part of a message, delivering any data portion,
+when a process issues a
+\fIread\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_SRDOPT command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR arg
+argument is not valid.
+.RE
+.IP I_GRDOPT 12
+Returns the current read mode setting, as described above, in an
+.BR int
+pointed to by the argument
+.IR arg .
+Read modes are described in
+\fIread\fR().
+.IP I_NREAD 12
+Counts the number of data bytes in the data part of the first message
+on the STREAM head read queue and places this value in the
+.BR int
+pointed to by
+.IR arg .
+The return value for the command shall be the number of messages on the
+STREAM head read queue. For example, if 0 is returned in
+.IR arg ,
+but the
+\fIioctl\fR()
+return value is greater than 0, this indicates that a zero-length
+message is next on the queue.
+.IP I_FDINSERT 12
+Creates a message from specified buffer(s), adds information about
+another STREAM, and sends the message downstream. The message contains
+a control part and an optional data part. The data and control parts to
+be sent are distinguished by placement in separate buffers, as
+described below. The
+.IR arg
+argument points to a
+.BR strfdinsert
+structure.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+The application shall ensure that the
+.IR len
+member in the
+.BR "ctlbuf strbuf"
+structure is set to the size of a
+.BR t_uscalar_t
+plus the number of bytes of control information to be sent with the
+message. The
+.IR fildes
+member specifies the file descriptor of the other STREAM, and the
+.IR offset
+member, which must be suitably aligned for use as a
+.BR t_uscalar_t ,
+specifies the offset from the start of the control buffer where
+I_FDINSERT shall store a
+.BR t_uscalar_t
+whose interpretation is specific to the STREAM end. The application
+shall ensure that the
+.IR len
+member in the
+.BR "databuf strbuf"
+structure is set to the number of bytes of data information to be sent
+with the message, or to 0 if no data part is to be sent.
+.P
+The
+.IR flags
+member specifies the type of message to be created. A normal message is
+created if
+.IR flags
+is set to 0, and a high-priority message is created if
+.IR flags
+is set to RS_HIPRI. For non-priority messages, I_FDINSERT shall block if
+the STREAM write queue is full due to internal flow control conditions.
+For priority messages, I_FDINSERT does not block on this condition. For
+non-priority messages, I_FDINSERT does not block when the write queue
+is full and O_NONBLOCK is set. Instead, it fails and sets
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EAGAIN] .
+.P
+I_FDINSERT also blocks, unless prevented by lack of internal resources,
+waiting for the availability of message blocks in the STREAM,
+regardless of priority or whether O_NONBLOCK has been specified. No
+partial message is sent.
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_FDINSERT command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+A non-priority message is specified, the O_NONBLOCK flag is set, and
+the STREAM write queue is full due to internal flow control
+conditions.
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN " or " ENOSR
+.br
+Buffers cannot be allocated for the message that is to be created.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+One of the following:
+.RS 12 
+.IP -- 4
+The
+.IR fildes
+member of the
+.BR strfdinsert
+structure is not a valid, open STREAM file descriptor.
+.IP -- 4
+The size of a
+.BR t_uscalar_t
+plus
+.IR offset
+is greater than the
+.IR len
+member for the buffer specified through
+.BR ctlbuf .
+.IP -- 4
+The
+.IR offset
+member does not specify a properly-aligned location in the data buffer.
+.IP -- 4
+An undefined value is stored in
+.IR flags .
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+Hangup received on the STREAM identified by either the
+.IR fildes
+argument or the
+.IR fildes
+member of the
+.BR strfdinsert
+structure.
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+The
+.IR len
+member for the buffer specified through
+.BR databuf
+does not fall within the range specified by the maximum and minimum
+packet sizes of the topmost STREAM module; or the
+.IR len
+member for the buffer specified through
+.BR databuf
+is larger than the maximum configured size of the data part of a
+message; or the
+.IR len
+member for the buffer specified through
+.BR ctlbuf
+is larger than the maximum configured size of the control part of a
+message.
+.RE
+.IP I_STR 12
+Constructs an internal STREAMS
+\fIioctl\fR()
+message from the data pointed to by
+.IR arg ,
+and sends that message downstream.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+This mechanism is provided to send
+\fIioctl\fR()
+requests to downstream modules and drivers. It allows information to be
+sent with
+\fIioctl\fR(),
+and returns to the process any information sent upstream by the
+downstream recipient. I_STR shall block until the system responds with
+either a positive or negative acknowledgement message, or until the
+request times out after some period of time. If the request times out,
+it shall fail with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [ETIME] .
+.P
+At most, one I_STR can be active on a STREAM. Further I_STR calls shall
+block until the active I_STR completes at the STREAM head. The default
+timeout interval for these requests is 15 seconds. The O_NONBLOCK flag
+has no effect on this call.
+.P
+To send requests downstream, the application shall ensure that
+.IR arg
+points to a
+.BR strioctl
+structure.
+.P
+The
+.IR ic_cmd
+member is the internal
+\fIioctl\fR()
+command intended for a downstream module or driver and
+.IR ic_timout
+is the number of seconds (\(mi1=infinite, 0=use
+implementation-defined timeout interval, >0=as specified) an I_STR
+request shall wait for acknowledgement before timing out.
+.IR ic_len
+is the number of bytes in the data argument, and
+.IR ic_dp
+is a pointer to the data argument. The
+.IR ic_len
+member has two uses: on input, it contains the length of the data
+argument passed in, and on return from the command, it contains the
+number of bytes being returned to the process (the buffer pointed to by
+.IR ic_dp
+should be large enough to contain the maximum amount of data that any
+module or the driver in the STREAM can return).
+.P
+The STREAM head shall convert the information pointed to by the
+.BR strioctl
+structure to an internal
+\fIioctl\fR()
+command message and send it downstream.
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_STR command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN " or " ENOSR
+.br
+Unable to allocate buffers for the
+\fIioctl\fR()
+message.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR ic_len
+member is less than 0 or larger than the maximum configured size of the
+data part of a message, or
+.IR ic_timout
+is less than \(mi1.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+Hangup received on
+.IR fildes .
+.TP
+.BR ETIME
+A downstream
+\fIioctl\fR()
+timed out before acknowledgement was received.
+.P
+An I_STR can also fail while waiting for an acknowledgement if a
+message indicating an error or a hangup is received at the STREAM head.
+In addition, an error code can be returned in the positive or negative
+acknowledgement message, in the event the
+\fIioctl\fR()
+command sent downstream fails. For these cases, I_STR shall fail with
+.IR errno
+set to the value in the message.
+.RE
+.IP I_SWROPT 12
+Sets the write mode using the value of the argument
+.IR arg .
+Valid bit settings for
+.IR arg
+are:
+.RS 12 
+.IP SNDZERO 12
+Send a zero-length message downstream when a
+\fIwrite\fR()
+of 0 bytes occurs. To not send a zero-length message when a
+\fIwrite\fR()
+of 0 bytes occurs, the application shall ensure that this bit is not
+set in
+.IR arg
+(for example,
+.IR arg
+would be set to 0).
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_SWROPT command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+.IR arg
+is not the above value.
+.RE
+.IP I_GWROPT 12
+Returns the current write mode setting, as described above, in the
+.BR int
+that is pointed to by the argument
+.IR arg .
+.IP I_SENDFD 12
+Creates a new reference to the open file description associated with
+the file descriptor
+.IR arg ,
+and writes a message on the STREAMS-based pipe
+.IR fildes
+containing this reference, together with the user ID and group ID of
+the calling process.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_SENDFD command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The sending STREAM is unable to allocate a message block to contain the
+file pointer; or the read queue of the receiving STREAM head is full
+and cannot accept the message sent by I_SENDFD.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR arg
+argument is not a valid, open file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not connected to a STREAM pipe.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+Hangup received on
+.IR fildes .
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_SENDFD command may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR arg
+argument is equal to the
+.IR fildes
+argument.
+.RE
+.IP I_RECVFD 12
+Retrieves the reference to an open file description from a message
+written to a STREAMS-based pipe using the I_SENDFD command, and
+allocates a new file descriptor in the calling process that refers to
+this open file description. The
+.IR arg
+argument is a pointer to a
+.BR strrecvfd
+data structure as defined in
+.IR <stropts.h> .
+.RS 12 
+.P
+The
+.IR fd
+member is a file descriptor. The
+.IR uid
+and
+.IR gid
+members are the effective user ID and effective group ID, respectively,
+of the sending process.
+.P
+If O_NONBLOCK is not set, I_RECVFD shall block until a message is
+present at the STREAM head. If O_NONBLOCK is set, I_RECVFD shall fail
+with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [EAGAIN] 
+if no message is present at the STREAM head.
+.P
+If the message at the STREAM head is a message sent by an I_SENDFD, a
+new file
+descriptor shall be allocated for the open file descriptor referenced
+in the message. The new file descriptor is placed in the
+.IR fd
+member of the
+.BR strrecvfd
+structure pointed to by
+.IR arg .
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_RECVFD command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+A message is not present at the STREAM head read queue and the
+O_NONBLOCK flag is set.
+.TP
+.BR EBADMSG
+The message at the STREAM head read queue is not a message containing a
+passed file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+Hangup received on
+.IR fildes .
+.RE
+.IP I_LIST 12
+Allows the process to list all the module names on the STREAM, up to
+and including the topmost driver name. If
+.IR arg
+is a null pointer, the return value shall be the number of modules,
+including the driver, that are on the STREAM pointed to by
+.IR fildes .
+This lets the process allocate enough space for the module names.
+Otherwise, it should point to a
+.BR str_list
+structure.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+The
+.IR sl_nmods
+member indicates the number of entries the process has allocated in the
+array. Upon return, the
+.IR sl_modlist
+member of the
+.BR str_list
+structure shall contain the list of module names, and the number of
+entries that have been filled into the
+.IR sl_modlist
+array is found in the
+.IR sl_nmods
+member (the number includes the number of modules including the
+driver). The return value from
+\fIioctl\fR()
+shall be 0. The entries are filled in starting at the top of the STREAM
+and continuing downstream until either the end of the STREAM is
+reached, or the number of requested modules (\c
+.IR sl_nmods )
+is satisfied.
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_LIST command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR sl_nmods
+member is less than 1.
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN " or " ENOSR
+.br
+Unable to allocate buffers.
+.RE
+.IP I_ATMARK 12
+Allows the process to see if the message at the head of the STREAM head
+read queue is marked by some module downstream. The
+.IR arg
+argument determines how the checking is done when there may be multiple
+marked messages on the STREAM head read queue. It may take on the
+following values:
+.RS 12 
+.IP ANYMARK 12
+Check if the message is marked.
+.IP LASTMARK 12
+Check if the message is the last one marked on the queue.
+.P
+The bitwise-inclusive OR of the flags ANYMARK and LASTMARK is permitted.
+.P
+The return value shall be 1 if the mark condition is satisfied;
+otherwise, the value shall be 0.
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_ATMARK command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+Invalid
+.IR arg
+value.
+.RE
+.IP I_CKBAND 12
+Checks if the message of a given priority band exists on the STREAM
+head read queue. This shall return 1 if a message of the given priority
+exists, 0 if no such message exists, or \(mi1 on error.
+.IR arg
+should be of type
+.BR int .
+.RS 12 
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_CKBAND command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+Invalid
+.IR arg
+value.
+.RE
+.IP I_GETBAND 12
+Returns the priority band of the first message on the STREAM head read
+queue in the integer referenced by
+.IR arg .
+.RS 12 
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_GETBAND command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENODATA
+No message on the STREAM head read queue.
+.RE
+.IP I_CANPUT 12
+Checks if a certain band is writable.
+.IR arg
+is set to the priority band in question. The return value shall be 0 if
+the band is flow-controlled, 1 if the band is writable, or \(mi1 on
+error.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_CANPUT command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+Invalid
+.IR arg
+value.
+.RE
+.IP I_SETCLTIME 12
+This request allows the process to set the time the STREAM head shall
+delay when a STREAM is closing and there is data on the write queues.
+Before closing each module or driver, if there is data on its write
+queue, the STREAM head shall delay for the specified amount of time to
+allow the data to drain. If, after the delay, data is still present, it
+shall be flushed. The
+.IR arg
+argument is a pointer to an integer specifying the number of
+milliseconds to delay, rounded up to the nearest valid value. If
+I_SETCLTIME is not performed on a STREAM, an implementation-defined
+default timeout interval is used.
+.br
+.RS 12 
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_SETCLTIME command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+Invalid
+.IR arg
+value.
+.RE
+.IP I_GETCLTIME 12
+Returns the close time delay in the integer pointed to by
+.IR arg .
+.SS "Multiplexed STREAMS Configurations"
+.P
+The following commands are used for connecting and disconnecting
+multiplexed STREAMS configurations. These commands use an
+implementation-defined default timeout interval.
+.IP I_LINK 12
+Connects two STREAMs, where
+.IR fildes
+is the file descriptor of the STREAM connected to the multiplexing
+driver, and
+.IR arg
+is the file descriptor of the STREAM connected to another driver. The
+STREAM designated by
+.IR arg
+is connected below the multiplexing driver. I_LINK requires the
+multiplexing driver to send an acknowledgement message to the STREAM
+head regarding the connection. This call shall return a multiplexer ID
+number (an identifier used to disconnect the multiplexer; see I_UNLINK)
+on success, and \(mi1 on failure.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_LINK command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+Hangup received on
+.IR fildes .
+.TP
+.BR ETIME
+Timeout before acknowledgement message was received at STREAM head.
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN " or " ENOSR
+.br
+Unable to allocate STREAMS storage to perform the I_LINK.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR arg
+argument is not a valid, open file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument does not support multiplexing; or
+.IR arg
+is not a STREAM or is already connected downstream from a multiplexer;
+or the specified I_LINK operation would connect the STREAM head in more
+than one place in the multiplexed STREAM.
+.P
+An I_LINK can also fail while waiting for the multiplexing driver to
+acknowledge the request, if a message indicating an error or a hangup
+is received at the STREAM head of
+.IR fildes .
+In addition, an error code can be returned in the positive or negative
+acknowledgement message. For these cases, I_LINK fails with
+.IR errno
+set to the value in the message.
+.RE
+.IP I_UNLINK 12
+Disconnects the two STREAMs specified by
+.IR fildes
+and
+.IR arg .
+.IR fildes
+is the file descriptor of the STREAM connected to the multiplexing
+driver. The
+.IR arg
+argument is the multiplexer ID number that was returned by the I_LINK
+\fIioctl\fR()
+command when a STREAM was connected downstream from the multiplexing
+driver. If
+.IR arg
+is MUXID_ALL, then all STREAMs that were connected to
+.IR fildes
+shall be disconnected. As in I_LINK, this command requires
+acknowledgement.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_UNLINK command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+Hangup received on
+.IR fildes .
+.TP
+.BR ETIME
+Timeout before acknowledgement message was received at STREAM head.
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN " or " ENOSR
+.br
+Unable to allocate buffers for the acknowledgement message.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+Invalid multiplexer ID number.
+.P
+An I_UNLINK can also fail while waiting for the multiplexing driver to
+acknowledge the request if a message indicating an error or a hangup is
+received at the STREAM head of
+.IR fildes .
+In addition, an error code can be returned in the positive or negative
+acknowledgement message. For these cases, I_UNLINK shall fail with
+.IR errno
+set to the value in the message.
+.RE
+.IP I_PLINK 12
+Creates a
+.IR "persistent connection"
+between two STREAMs, where
+.IR fildes
+is the file descriptor of the STREAM connected to the multiplexing
+driver, and
+.IR arg
+is the file descriptor of the STREAM connected to another driver. This
+call shall create a persistent connection which can exist even if the
+file descriptor
+.IR fildes
+associated with the upper STREAM to the multiplexing driver is closed.
+The STREAM designated by
+.IR arg
+gets connected via a persistent connection below the multiplexing
+driver. I_PLINK requires the multiplexing driver to send an
+acknowledgement message to the STREAM head. This call shall return a
+multiplexer ID number (an identifier that may be used to disconnect the
+multiplexer; see I_PUNLINK) on success, and \(mi1 on failure.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_PLINK command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+Hangup received on
+.IR fildes .
+.TP
+.BR ETIME
+Timeout before acknowledgement message was received at STREAM head.
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN " or " ENOSR
+.br
+Unable to allocate STREAMS storage to perform the I_PLINK.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR arg
+argument is not a valid, open file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument does not support multiplexing; or
+.IR arg
+is not a STREAM or is already connected downstream from a multiplexer;
+or the specified I_PLINK operation would connect the STREAM head in
+more than one place in the multiplexed STREAM.
+.P
+An I_PLINK can also fail while waiting for the multiplexing driver to
+acknowledge the request, if a message indicating an error or a hangup
+is received at the STREAM head of
+.IR fildes .
+In addition, an error code can be returned in the positive or negative
+acknowledgement message. For these cases, I_PLINK shall fail with
+.IR errno
+set to the value in the message.
+.RE
+.IP I_PUNLINK 12
+Disconnects the two STREAMs specified by
+.IR fildes
+and
+.IR arg
+from a persistent connection. The
+.IR fildes
+argument is the file descriptor of the STREAM connected to the
+multiplexing driver. The
+.IR arg
+argument is the multiplexer ID number that was returned by the I_PLINK
+\fIioctl\fR()
+command when a STREAM was connected downstream from the multiplexing
+driver. If
+.IR arg
+is MUXID_ALL, then all STREAMs which are persistent connections
+to
+.IR fildes
+shall be disconnected. As in I_PLINK, this command requires the
+multiplexing driver to acknowledge the request.
+.br
+.RS 12 
+.P
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function with the I_PUNLINK command shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+Hangup received on
+.IR fildes .
+.TP
+.BR ETIME
+Timeout before acknowledgement message was received at STREAM head.
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN " or " ENOSR
+.br
+Unable to allocate buffers for the acknowledgement message.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+Invalid multiplexer ID number.
+.P
+An I_PUNLINK can also fail while waiting for the multiplexing driver to
+acknowledge the request if a message indicating an error or a hangup is
+received at the STREAM head of
+.IR fildes .
+In addition, an error code can be returned in the positive or negative
+acknowledgement message. For these cases, I_PUNLINK shall fail with
+.IR errno
+set to the value in the message.
+.RE
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIioctl\fR()
+shall return a value other than \(mi1 that depends upon the STREAMS device
+control function. Otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+Under the following general conditions,
+\fIioctl\fR()
+shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid open file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was caught during the
+\fIioctl\fR()
+operation.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The STREAM or multiplexer referenced by
+.IR fildes
+is linked (directly or indirectly) downstream from a multiplexer.
+.P
+If an underlying device driver detects an error, then
+\fIioctl\fR()
+shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR request
+or
+.IR arg
+argument is not valid for this device.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+Some physical I/O error has occurred.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTTY
+The file associated with the
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a STREAMS device that accepts control functions.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+The
+.IR request
+and
+.IR arg
+arguments are valid for this device driver, but the service requested
+cannot be performed on this particular sub-device.
+.TP
+.BR ENODEV
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument refers to a valid STREAMS device, but the corresponding device
+driver does not support the
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function.
+.P
+If a STREAM is connected downstream from a multiplexer, any
+\fIioctl\fR()
+command except I_UNLINK and I_PUNLINK shall set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EINVAL] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The implementation-defined timeout interval for STREAMS has
+historically been 15 seconds.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.6" ", " "STREAMS",
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpipe\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpoll\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stropts.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isalnum.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isalnum.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2ca7a96
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isalnum.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISALNUM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+isalnum,
+isalnum_l
+\(em test for an alphanumeric character
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ctype.h>
+.P
+int isalnum(int \fIc\fP);
+int isalnum_l(int \fIc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIisalnum\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIisalnum\fR()
+and
+\fIisalnum_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR c
+is a character of class
+.BR alpha
+or
+.BR digit
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR c
+argument is an
+.BR int ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is representable as an
+.BR "unsigned char"
+or equal to the value of the macro EOF. If the argument has any other
+value, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIisalnum_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIisalnum\fR()
+and
+\fIisalnum_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR c
+is an alphanumeric character; otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisblank\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiscntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIispunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<ctype.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isalpha.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isalpha.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c750350
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isalpha.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISALPHA "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+isalpha,
+isalpha_l
+\(em test for an alphabetic character
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ctype.h>
+.P
+int isalpha(int \fIc\fP);
+int isalpha_l(int \fIc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIisalpha\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIisalpha\fR()
+and
+\fIisalpha_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR c
+is a character of class
+.BR alpha
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR c
+argument is an
+.BR int ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is representable as an
+.BR "unsigned char"
+or equal to the value of the macro EOF. If the argument has any other
+value, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIisalpha_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIisalpha\fR()
+and
+\fIisalpha_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR c
+is an alphabetic character; otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisblank\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiscntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIispunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<ctype.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isascii.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isascii.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..844a2d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isascii.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISASCII "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+isascii
+\(em test for a 7-bit US-ASCII character
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ctype.h>
+.P
+int isascii(int \fIc\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIisascii\fR()
+function shall test whether
+.IR c
+is a 7-bit US-ASCII character code.
+.P
+The
+\fIisascii\fR()
+function is defined on all integer values.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIisascii\fR()
+function shall return non-zero if
+.IR c
+is a 7-bit US-ASCII character code between 0 and octal 0177 inclusive;
+otherwise, it shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIisascii\fR()
+function cannot be used portably in a localized application.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIisascii\fR()
+function may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<ctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isastream.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isastream.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..649c0fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isastream.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISASTREAM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+isastream
+\(em test a file descriptor (\fBSTREAMS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stropts.h>
+.P
+int isastream(int \fIfildes\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIisastream\fR()
+function shall test whether
+.IR fildes ,
+an open file descriptor, is associated with a STREAMS-based file.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIisastream\fR()
+shall return 1 if
+.IR fildes
+refers to a STREAMS-based file and 0 if not. Otherwise,
+\fIisastream\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIisastream\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid open file descriptor.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIisastream\fR()
+function may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stropts.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isatty.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isatty.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..babe7dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isatty.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISATTY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+isatty
+\(em test for a terminal device
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int isatty(int \fIfildes\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIisatty\fR()
+function shall test whether
+.IR fildes ,
+an open file descriptor, is associated with a terminal device.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIisatty\fR()
+function shall return 1 if
+.IR fildes
+is associated with a terminal; otherwise, it shall return 0 and may set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIisatty\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid open file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTTY
+The file associated with the
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a terminal.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIisatty\fR()
+function does not necessarily indicate that a human being is available
+for interaction via
+.IR fildes .
+It is quite possible that non-terminal devices are connected to the
+communications line.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isblank.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isblank.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..91ac531
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isblank.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISBLANK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+isblank,
+isblank_l
+\(em test for a blank character
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ctype.h>
+.P
+int isblank(int \fIc\fP);
+int isblank_l(int \fIc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIisblank\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIisblank\fR()
+and
+\fIisblank_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR c
+is a character of class
+.BR blank
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR c
+argument is a type
+.BR int ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a character
+representable as an
+.BR "unsigned char"
+or equal to the value of the macro EOF. If the argument has any other
+value, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIisblank_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIisblank\fR()
+and
+\fIisblank_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR c
+is a
+<blank>;
+otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiscntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIispunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<ctype.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iscntrl.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iscntrl.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b5ebc3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iscntrl.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISCNTRL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+iscntrl,
+iscntrl_l
+\(em test for a control character
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ctype.h>
+.P
+int iscntrl(int \fIc\fP);
+int iscntrl_l(int \fIc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIiscntrl\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIiscntrl\fR()
+and
+\fIiscntrl_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR c
+is a character of class
+.BR cntrl
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR c
+argument is a type
+.BR int ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a character
+representable as an
+.BR "unsigned char"
+or equal to the value of the macro EOF. If the argument has any other
+value, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIiscntrl_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIiscntrl\fR()
+and
+\fIiscntrl_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR c
+is a control character; otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisblank\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIispunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<ctype.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isdigit.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isdigit.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..96fa995
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isdigit.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISDIGIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+isdigit,
+isdigit_l
+\(em test for a decimal digit
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ctype.h>
+.P
+int isdigit(int \fIc\fP);
+int isdigit_l(int \fIc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIisdigit\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIisdigit\fR()
+and
+\fIisdigit_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR c
+is a character of class
+.BR digit
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR c
+argument is an
+.BR int ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a character
+representable as an
+.BR "unsigned char"
+or equal to the value of the macro EOF. If the argument has any other
+value, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIisdigit_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIisdigit\fR()
+and
+\fIisdigit_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR c
+is a decimal digit; otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisblank\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiscntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIispunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisxdigit\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<ctype.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isfinite.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isfinite.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7ffed3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isfinite.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISFINITE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+isfinite
+\(em test for finite value
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+int isfinite(real-floating \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIisfinite\fR()
+macro shall determine whether its argument has a finite value (zero,
+subnormal, or normal, and not infinite or NaN). First, an argument
+represented in a format wider than its semantic type is converted to
+its semantic type. Then determination is based on the type of the
+argument.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIisfinite\fR()
+macro shall return a non-zero value if and only if its argument has a
+finite value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfpclassify\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisinf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnormal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsignbit\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isgraph.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isgraph.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f9f03ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isgraph.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISGRAPH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+isgraph,
+isgraph_l
+\(em test for a visible character
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ctype.h>
+.P
+int isgraph(int \fIc\fP);
+int isgraph_l(int \fIc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIisgraph\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIisgraph\fR()
+and
+\fIisgraph_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR c
+is a character of class
+.BR graph
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR c
+argument is an
+.BR int ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a character
+representable as an
+.BR "unsigned char"
+or equal to the value of the macro EOF. If the argument has any other
+value, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIisgraph_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIisgraph\fR()
+and
+\fIisgraph_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR c
+is a character with a visible representation; otherwise, they shall
+return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisblank\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiscntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIispunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<ctype.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isgreater.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isgreater.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..609d49e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isgreater.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISGREATER "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+isgreater
+\(em test if x greater than y
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+int isgreater(real-floating \fIx\fP, real-floating \fIy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIisgreater\fR()
+macro shall determine whether its first argument is greater than its
+second argument. The value of
+.IR isgreater (\c
+.IR x ,
+.IR y )
+shall be equal to (\fIx\fR)\ >\ (\fIy\fR); however, unlike
+(\fIx\fR)\ >\ (\fIy\fR),
+.IR isgreater (\c
+.IR x ,
+.IR y )
+shall not raise the invalid floating-point exception when
+.IR x
+and
+.IR y
+are unordered.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIisgreater\fR()
+macro shall return the value of (\fIx\fR)\ >\ (\fIy\fR).
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+or
+.IR y
+is NaN, 0 shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The relational and equality operators support the usual mathematical
+relationships between numeric values. For any ordered pair of numeric
+values, exactly one of the relationships (less, greater, and equal) is
+true. Relational operators may raise the invalid floating-point
+exception when argument values are NaNs. For a NaN and a numeric value,
+or for two NaNs, just the unordered relationship is true. This macro
+is a quiet (non-floating-point exception raising) version of a
+relational operator. It facilitates writing efficient code that
+accounts for NaNs without suffering the invalid floating-point
+exception. In the SYNOPSIS section,
+.BR real-floating
+indicates that the argument shall be an expression of
+.BR real-floating
+type.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisgreaterequal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisless\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislessequal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislessgreater\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisunordered\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isgreaterequal.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isgreaterequal.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee329ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isgreaterequal.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISGREATEREQUAL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+isgreaterequal
+\(em test if x is greater than or equal to y
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+int isgreaterequal(real-floating \fIx\fP, real-floating \fIy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIisgreaterequal\fR()
+macro shall determine whether its first argument is greater than or
+equal to its second argument. The value of
+.IR isgreaterequal (\c
+.IR x ,
+.IR y )
+shall be equal to (\fIx\fR)\ \(>=\ (\fIy\fR); however, unlike
+(\fIx\fR)\ \(>=\ (\fIy\fR),
+.IR isgreaterequal (\c
+.IR x ,
+.IR y )
+shall not raise the invalid floating-point exception when
+.IR x
+and
+.IR y
+are unordered.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIisgreaterequal\fR()
+macro shall return the value of (\fIx\fR)\ \(>=\ (\fIy\fR).
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+or
+.IR y
+is NaN, 0 shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The relational and equality operators support the usual mathematical
+relationships between numeric values. For any ordered pair of numeric
+values, exactly one of the relationships (less, greater, and equal) is
+true. Relational operators may raise the invalid floating-point
+exception when argument values are NaNs. For a NaN and a numeric value,
+or for two NaNs, just the unordered relationship is true. This macro
+is a quiet (non-floating-point exception raising) version of a
+relational operator. It facilitates writing efficient code that
+accounts for NaNs without suffering the invalid floating-point
+exception. In the SYNOPSIS section,
+.BR real-floating
+indicates that the argument shall be an expression of
+.BR real-floating
+type.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisgreater\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisless\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislessequal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislessgreater\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisunordered\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isinf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isinf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..67dff48
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isinf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISINF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+isinf
+\(em test for infinity
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+int isinf(real-floating \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIisinf\fR()
+macro shall determine whether its argument value is an infinity
+(positive or negative). First, an argument represented in a format
+wider than its semantic type is converted to its semantic type. Then
+determination is based on the type of the argument.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIisinf\fR()
+macro shall return a non-zero value if and only if its argument has an
+infinite value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfpclassify\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisfinite\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnormal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsignbit\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isless.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isless.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..76e857e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isless.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISLESS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+isless
+\(em test if x is less than y
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+int isless(real-floating \fIx\fP, real-floating \fIy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIisless\fR()
+macro shall determine whether its first argument is less than its
+second argument. The value of
+.IR isless (\c
+.IR x ,
+.IR y )
+shall be equal to (\fIx\fR)\ <\ (\fIy\fR); however, unlike
+(\fIx\fR)\ <\ (\fIy\fR),
+.IR isless (\c
+.IR x ,
+.IR y )
+shall not raise the invalid floating-point exception when
+.IR x
+and
+.IR y
+are unordered.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIisless\fR()
+macro shall return the value of (\fIx\fR)\ <\ (\fIy\fR).
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+or
+.IR y
+is NaN, 0 shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The relational and equality operators support the usual mathematical
+relationships between numeric values. For any ordered pair of numeric
+values, exactly one of the relationships (less, greater, and equal) is
+true. Relational operators may raise the invalid floating-point
+exception when argument values are NaNs. For a NaN and a numeric value,
+or for two NaNs, just the unordered relationship is true. This macro
+is a quiet (non-floating-point exception raising) version of a
+relational operator. It facilitates writing efficient code that
+accounts for NaNs without suffering the invalid floating-point
+exception. In the SYNOPSIS section,
+.BR real-floating
+indicates that the argument shall be an expression of
+.BR real-floating
+type.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisgreater\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisgreaterequal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislessequal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislessgreater\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisunordered\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/islessequal.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/islessequal.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0b30c95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/islessequal.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISLESSEQUAL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+islessequal
+\(em test if x is less than or equal to y
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+int islessequal(real-floating \fIx\fP, real-floating \fIy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIislessequal\fR()
+macro shall determine whether its first argument is less than or equal
+to its second argument. The value of
+.IR islessequal (\c
+.IR x ,
+.IR y )
+shall be equal to (\fIx\fR)\ <=\ (\fIy\fR); however, unlike
+(\fIx\fR)\ <=\ (\fIy\fR),
+.IR islessequal (\c
+.IR x ,
+.IR y )
+shall not raise the invalid floating-point exception when
+.IR x
+and
+.IR y
+are unordered.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIislessequal\fR()
+macro shall return the value of (\fIx\fR)\ <=\ (\fIy\fR).
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+or
+.IR y
+is NaN, 0 shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The relational and equality operators support the usual mathematical
+relationships between numeric values. For any ordered pair of numeric
+values, exactly one of the relationships (less, greater, and equal) is
+true. Relational operators may raise the invalid floating-point
+exception when argument values are NaNs. For a NaN and a numeric value,
+or for two NaNs, just the unordered relationship is true. This macro
+is a quiet (non-floating-point exception raising) version of a
+relational operator. It facilitates writing efficient code that
+accounts for NaNs without suffering the invalid floating-point
+exception. In the SYNOPSIS section,
+.BR real-floating
+indicates that the argument shall be an expression of
+.BR real-floating
+type.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisgreater\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisgreaterequal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisless\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislessgreater\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisunordered\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/islessgreater.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/islessgreater.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e7b953d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/islessgreater.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISLESSGREATER "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+islessgreater
+\(em test if x is less than or greater than y
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+int islessgreater(real-floating \fIx\fP, real-floating \fIy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIislessgreater\fR()
+macro shall determine whether its first argument is less than or
+greater than its second argument. The
+.IR islessgreater (\c
+.IR x ,
+.IR y )
+macro is similar to
+(\fIx\fR)\ <\ (\fIy\fR)\ ||\ (\fIx\fR)\ >\ (\fIy\fR); however,
+.IR islessgreater (\c
+.IR x ,
+.IR y )
+shall not raise the invalid floating-point exception when
+.IR x
+and
+.IR y
+are unordered (nor shall it evaluate
+.IR x
+and
+.IR y
+twice).
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIislessgreater\fR()
+macro shall return the value of
+(\fIx\fR)\ <\ (\fIy\fR)\ ||\ (\fIx\fR)\ >\ (\fIy\fR).
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+or
+.IR y
+is NaN, 0 shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The relational and equality operators support the usual mathematical
+relationships between numeric values. For any ordered pair of numeric
+values, exactly one of the relationships (less, greater, and equal) is
+true. Relational operators may raise the invalid floating-point
+exception when argument values are NaNs. For a NaN and a numeric value,
+or for two NaNs, just the unordered relationship is true. This macro
+is a quiet (non-floating-point exception raising) version of a
+relational operator. It facilitates writing efficient code that
+accounts for NaNs without suffering the invalid floating-point
+exception. In the SYNOPSIS section,
+.BR real-floating
+indicates that the argument shall be an expression of
+.BR real-floating
+type.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisgreater\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisgreaterequal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisless\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislessequal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisunordered\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/islower.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/islower.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..97efc15
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/islower.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISLOWER "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+islower,
+islower_l
+\(em test for a lowercase letter
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ctype.h>
+.P
+int islower(int \fIc\fP);
+int islower_l(int \fIc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIislower\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIislower\fR()
+and
+\fIislower_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR c
+is a character of class
+.BR lower
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR c
+argument is an
+.BR int ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a character
+representable as an
+.BR "unsigned char"
+or equal to the value of the macro EOF. If the argument has any other
+value, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIislower_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIislower\fR()
+and
+\fIislower_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR c
+is a lowercase letter; otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Testing for a Lowercase Letter"
+.P
+Two examples follow, the first using
+\fIislower\fR(),
+the second using multiple concurrent locales and
+\fIislower_l\fR().
+.P
+The examples test whether the value is a lowercase letter,
+based on the current locale, then use it as part of a key value.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+/* Example 1 -- using islower() */
+#include <ctype.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <locale.h>
+\&...
+char *keystr;
+int elementlen, len;
+unsigned char c;
+\&...
+setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
+\&...
+len = 0;
+while (len < elementlen) {
+    c = (unsigned char) (rand() % 256);
+\&...
+    if (islower(c))
+        keystr[len++] = c;
+    }
+\&...
+.P
+/* Example 2 -- using islower_l() */
+#include <ctype.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <locale.h>
+\&...
+char *keystr;
+int elementlen, len;
+unsigned char c;
+\&...
+locale_t loc = newlocale (LC_ALL_MASK, "", (locale_t) 0);
+\&...
+len = 0;
+while (len < elementlen) {
+    c = (unsigned char) (rand() % 256);
+\&...
+    if (islower_l(c, loc))
+        keystr[len++] = c;
+    }
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisblank\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiscntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIispunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<ctype.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isnan.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isnan.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9c56483
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isnan.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISNAN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+isnan
+\(em test for a NaN
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+int isnan(real-floating \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIisnan\fR()
+macro shall determine whether its argument value is a NaN. First, an
+argument represented in a format wider than its semantic type is
+converted to its semantic type. Then determination is based on the type
+of the argument.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIisnan\fR()
+macro shall return a non-zero value if and only if its argument has a
+NaN value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfpclassify\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisfinite\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisinf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnormal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsignbit\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isnormal.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isnormal.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7d874d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isnormal.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISNORMAL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+isnormal
+\(em test for a normal value
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+int isnormal(real-floating \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIisnormal\fR()
+macro shall determine whether its argument value is normal (neither
+zero, subnormal, infinite, nor NaN). First, an argument represented in
+a format wider than its semantic type is converted to its semantic
+type. Then determination is based on the type of the argument.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIisnormal\fR()
+macro shall return a non-zero value if and only if its argument has a
+normal value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfpclassify\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisfinite\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisinf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsignbit\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isprint.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isprint.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9953947
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isprint.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISPRINT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+isprint,
+isprint_l
+\(em test for a printable character
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ctype.h>
+.P
+int isprint(int \fIc\fP);
+int isprint_l(int \fIc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIisprint\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIisprint\fR()
+and
+\fIisprint_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR c
+is a character of class
+.BR print
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR c
+argument is an
+.BR int ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a character
+representable as an
+.BR "unsigned char"
+or equal to the value of the macro EOF. If the argument has any other
+value, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIisprint_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIisprint\fR()
+and
+\fIisprint_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR c
+is a printable character; otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisblank\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiscntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIispunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<ctype.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ispunct.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ispunct.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e65e349
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ispunct.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISPUNCT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ispunct,
+ispunct_l
+\(em test for a punctuation character
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ctype.h>
+.P
+int ispunct(int \fIc\fP);
+int ispunct_l(int \fIc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIispunct\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIispunct\fR()
+and
+\fIispunct_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR c
+is a character of class
+.BR punct
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR c
+argument is an
+.BR int ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a character
+representable as an
+.BR "unsigned char"
+or equal to the value of the macro EOF. If the argument has any other
+value, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIispunct_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIispunct\fR()
+and
+\fIispunct_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR c
+is a punctuation character; otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisblank\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiscntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<ctype.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isspace.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isspace.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7cb6c43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isspace.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISSPACE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+isspace,
+isspace_l
+\(em test for a white-space character
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ctype.h>
+.P
+int isspace(int \fIc\fP);
+int isspace_l(int \fIc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIisspace\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIisspace\fR()
+and
+\fIisspace_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR c
+is a character of class
+.BR space
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR c
+argument is an
+.BR int ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a character
+representable as an
+.BR "unsigned char"
+or equal to the value of the macro EOF. If the argument has any other
+value, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIisspace_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIisspace\fR()
+and
+\fIisspace_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR c
+is a white-space character; otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiscntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIispunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<ctype.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isunordered.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isunordered.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..959a93a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isunordered.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISUNORDERED "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+isunordered
+\(em test if arguments are unordered
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+int isunordered(real-floating \fIx\fP, real-floating \fIy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIisunordered\fR()
+macro shall determine whether its arguments are unordered.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIisunordered\fR()
+macro shall return 1 if its arguments are unordered, and 0 otherwise.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+or
+.IR y
+is NaN, 1 shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The relational and equality operators support the usual mathematical
+relationships between numeric values. For any ordered pair of numeric
+values, exactly one of the relationships (less, greater, and equal) is
+true. Relational operators may raise the invalid floating-point
+exception when argument values are NaNs. For a NaN and a numeric value,
+or for two NaNs, just the unordered relationship is true. This macro
+is a quiet (non-floating-point exception raising) version of a
+relational operator. It facilitates writing efficient code that
+accounts for NaNs without suffering the invalid floating-point
+exception. In the SYNOPSIS section,
+.BR real-floating
+indicates that the argument shall be an expression of
+.BR real-floating
+type.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisgreater\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisgreaterequal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisless\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislessequal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislessgreater\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isupper.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isupper.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..be0e50c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isupper.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISUPPER "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+isupper,
+isupper_l
+\(em test for an uppercase letter
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ctype.h>
+.P
+int isupper(int \fIc\fP);
+int isupper_l(int \fIc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIisupper\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIisupper\fR()
+and
+\fIisupper_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR c
+is a character of class
+.BR upper
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR c
+argument is an
+.BR int ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a character
+representable as an
+.BR "unsigned char"
+or equal to the value of the macro EOF. If the argument has any other
+value, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIisupper_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIisupper\fR()
+and
+\fIisupper_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR c
+is an uppercase letter; otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisblank\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiscntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIispunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<ctype.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswalnum.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswalnum.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..20bb894
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswalnum.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISWALNUM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+iswalnum,
+iswalnum_l
+\(em test for an alphanumeric wide-character code
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wctype.h>
+.P
+int iswalnum(wint_t \fIwc\fP);
+int iswalnum_l(wint_t \fIwc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIiswalnum\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIiswalnum\fR()
+and
+\fIiswalnum_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR wc
+is a wide-character code representing a character of class
+.BR alpha
+or
+.BR digit
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR wc
+argument is a
+.BR wint_t ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a wide-character
+code corresponding to a valid character in the current locale, or
+equal to the value of the macro WEOF. If the argument has any other
+value, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIiswalnum_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIiswalnum\fR()
+and
+\fIiswalnum_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR wc
+is an alphanumeric wide-character code; otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIiswalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswcntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswctype\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswlower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswpunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswalpha.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswalpha.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a39c3a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswalpha.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISWALPHA "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+iswalpha,
+iswalpha_l
+\(em test for an alphabetic wide-character code
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wctype.h>
+.P
+int iswalpha(wint_t \fIwc\fP);
+int iswalpha_l(wint_t \fIwc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIiswalpha\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIiswalpha\fR()
+and
+\fIiswalpha_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR wc
+is a wide-character code representing a character of class
+.BR alpha
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR wc
+argument is a
+.BR wint_t ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a wide-character
+code corresponding to a valid character in the current locale, or
+equal to the value of the macro WEOF. If the argument has any other
+value, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIiswalpha_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIiswalpha\fR()
+and
+\fIiswalpha_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR wc
+is an alphabetic wide-character code; otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIiswalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswcntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswctype\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswlower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswpunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswblank.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswblank.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2b29770
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswblank.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISWBLANK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+iswblank,
+iswblank_l
+\(em test for a blank wide-character code
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wctype.h>
+.P
+int iswblank(wint_t \fIwc\fP);
+int iswblank_l(wint_t \fIwc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIiswblank\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIiswblank\fR()
+and
+\fIiswblank\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR wc
+is a wide-character code representing a character of class
+.BR blank
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR wc
+argument is a
+.BR wint_t ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a wide-character
+code corresponding to a valid character in the current locale, or equal
+to the value of the macro WEOF. If the argument has any other value,
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIiswblank_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIiswblank\fR()
+and
+\fIiswblank_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR wc
+is a blank wide-character code; otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIiswalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswcntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswctype\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswlower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswpunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswcntrl.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswcntrl.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aaba885
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswcntrl.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISWCNTRL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+iswcntrl,
+iswcntrl_l
+\(em test for a control wide-character code
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wctype.h>
+.P
+int iswcntrl(wint_t \fIwc\fP);
+int iswcntrl_l(wint_t \fIwc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIiswcntrl\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIiswcntrl\fR()
+and
+\fIiswcntrl_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR wc
+is a wide-character code representing a character of class
+.BR cntrl
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR wc
+argument is a
+.BR wint_t ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a wide-character
+code corresponding to a valid character in the current locale, or equal
+to the value of the macro WEOF. If the argument has any other value,
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIiswcntrl_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIiswcntrl\fR()
+and
+\fIiswcntrl_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR wc
+is a control wide-character code; otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIiswalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswctype\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswlower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswpunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswctype.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswctype.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2d83a4b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswctype.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,188 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISWCTYPE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+iswctype,
+iswctype_l
+\(em test character for a specified class
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wctype.h>
+.P
+int iswctype(wint_t \fIwc\fP, wctype_t \fIcharclass\fP);
+int iswctype_l(wint_t \fIwc\fP, wctype_t \fIcharclass\fP,
+    locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIiswctype\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIiswctype\fR()
+and
+\fIiswctype_l\fR()
+functions shall determine whether the wide-character code
+.IR wc
+has the character class
+.IR charclass ,
+returning true or false. The
+\fIiswctype\fR()
+and
+\fIiswctype_l\fR()
+functions are defined on WEOF and wide-character codes corresponding to
+the valid character encodings in the current locale, or
+in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively. If the
+.IR wc
+argument is not in the domain of the function, the result is undefined.
+If the value of
+.IR charclass
+is invalid (that is, not obtained by a call to
+\fIwctype\fR()
+or
+.IR charclass
+is invalidated by a subsequent call to
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+that has affected category
+.IR LC_CTYPE )
+the result is unspecified.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIiswctype_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIiswctype\fR()
+and
+\fIiswctype_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero (true) if and only if
+.IR wc
+has the property described by
+.IR charclass .
+If
+.IR charclass
+is 0, these functions shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Testing for a Valid Character"
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <wctype.h>
+\&...
+int yes_or_no;
+wint_t wc;
+wctype_t valid_class;
+\&...
+if ((valid_class=wctype("vowel")) == (wctype_t)0)
+    /* Invalid character class. */
+yes_or_no=iswctype(wc,valid_class);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The twelve strings
+.BR \(dqalnum\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqalpha\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqblank\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqcntrl\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqdigit\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqgraph\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqlower\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqprint\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqpunct\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqspace\(dq ,
+.BR \(dqupper\(dq ,
+and
+.BR \(dqxdigit\(dq 
+are reserved for the standard character classes. In the table below,
+the functions in the left column are equivalent to the functions in the
+right column.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+iswalnum(\fIwc\fP)            iswctype(\fIwc\fP, wctype("alnum"))
+iswalnum_l(\fIwc\fP, \fIlocale\fP)  iswctype_l(\fIwc\fP, wctype("alnum"), \fIlocale\fP)
+iswalpha(\fIwc\fP)            iswctype(\fIwc\fP, wctype("alpha"))
+iswalpha_l(\fIwc\fP, \fIlocale\fP)  iswctype_l(\fIwc\fP, wctype("alpha"), \fIlocale\fP)
+iswblank(\fIwc\fP)            iswctype(\fIwc\fP, wctype("blank"))
+iswblank_l(\fIwc\fP, \fIlocale\fP)  iswctype_l(\fIwc\fP, wctype("blank"), \fIlocale\fP)
+iswcntrl(\fIwc\fP)            iswctype(\fIwc\fP, wctype("cntrl"))
+iswcntrl_l(\fIwc\fP, \fIlocale\fP)  iswctype_l(\fIwc\fP, wctype("cntrl"), \fIlocale\fP)
+iswdigit(\fIwc\fP)            iswctype(\fIwc\fP, wctype("digit"))
+iswdigit_l(\fIwc\fP, \fIlocale\fP)  iswctype_l(\fIwc\fP, wctype("digit"), \fIlocale\fP)
+iswgraph(\fIwc\fP)            iswctype(\fIwc\fP, wctype("graph"))
+iswgraph_l(\fIwc\fP, \fIlocale\fP)  iswctype_l(\fIwc\fP, wctype("graph"), \fIlocale\fP)
+iswlower(\fIwc\fP)            iswctype(\fIwc\fP, wctype("lower"))
+iswlower_l(\fIwc\fP, \fIlocale\fP)  iswctype_l(\fIwc\fP, wctype("lower"), \fIlocale\fP)
+iswprint(\fIwc\fP)            iswctype(\fIwc\fP, wctype("print"))
+iswprint_l(\fIwc\fP, \fIlocale\fP)  iswctype_l(\fIwc\fP, wctype("print"), \fIlocale\fP)
+iswpunct(\fIwc\fP)            iswctype(\fIwc\fP, wctype("punct"))
+iswpunct_l(\fIwc\fP, \fIlocale\fP)  iswctype_l(\fIwc\fP, wctype("punct"), \fIlocale\fP)
+iswspace(\fIwc\fP)            iswctype(\fIwc\fP, wctype("space"))
+iswspace_l(\fIwc\fP, \fIlocale\fP)  iswctype_l(\fIwc\fP, wctype("space"), \fIlocale\fP)
+iswupper(\fIwc\fP)            iswctype(\fIwc\fP, wctype("upper"))
+iswupper_l(\fIwc\fP, \fIlocale\fP)  iswctype_l(\fIwc\fP, wctype("upper"), \fIlocale\fP)
+iswxdigit(\fIwc\fP)           iswctype(\fIwc\fP, wctype("xdigit"))
+iswxdigit_l(\fIwc\fP, \fIlocale\fP) iswctype_l(\fIwc\fP, wctype("xdigit"), \fIlocale\fP)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIiswalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswcntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswlower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswpunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwctype\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswdigit.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswdigit.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5e6a646
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswdigit.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISWDIGIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+iswdigit,
+iswdigit_l
+\(em test for a decimal digit wide-character code
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wctype.h>
+.P
+int iswdigit(wint_t \fIwc\fP);
+int iswdigit_l(wint_t \fIwc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIiswdigit\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIiswdigit\fR()
+and
+\fIiswdigit_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR wc
+is a wide-character code representing a character of class
+.BR digit
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR wc
+argument is a
+.BR wint_t ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a wide-character
+code corresponding to a valid character in the current locale, or equal
+to the value of the macro WEOF. If the argument has any other value,
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIiswdigit_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIiswdigit\fR()
+and
+\fIiswdigit_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR wc
+is a decimal digit wide-character code; otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIiswalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswcntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswctype\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswlower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswpunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswgraph.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswgraph.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..15850fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswgraph.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISWGRAPH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+iswgraph,
+iswgraph_l
+\(em test for a visible wide-character code
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wctype.h>
+.P
+int iswgraph(wint_t \fIwc\fP);
+int iswgraph_l(wint_t \fIwc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIiswgraph\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIiswgraph\fR()
+and
+\fIiswgraph_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR wc
+is a wide-character code representing a character of class
+.BR graph
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR wc
+argument is a
+.BR wint_t ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a wide-character
+code corresponding to a valid character in the current locale, or equal
+to the value of the macro WEOF. If the argument has any other value,
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIiswgraph_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIiswgraph\fR()
+and
+\fIiswgraph_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR wc
+is a wide-character code with a visible representation; otherwise, they
+shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIiswalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswcntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswctype\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswlower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswpunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswlower.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswlower.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..47dca63
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswlower.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISWLOWER "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+iswlower,
+iswlower_l
+\(em test for a lowercase letter wide-character code
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wctype.h>
+.P
+int iswlower(wint_t \fIwc\fP);
+int iswlower_l(wint_t \fIwc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIiswlower\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIiswlower\fR()
+and
+\fIiswlower_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR wc
+is a wide-character code representing a character of class
+.BR lower
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR wc
+argument is a
+.BR wint_t ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a wide-character
+code corresponding to a valid character in the current locale, or equal
+to the value of the macro WEOF. If the argument has any other value,
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIiswlower_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIiswlower\fR()
+and
+\fIiswlower_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR wc
+is a lowercase letter wide-character code; otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIiswalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswcntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswctype\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswpunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"1
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswprint.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswprint.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..68234d5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswprint.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISWPRINT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+iswprint,
+iswprint_l
+\(em test for a printable wide-character code
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wctype.h>
+.P
+int iswprint(wint_t \fIwc\fP);
+int iswprint_l(wint_t \fIwc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIiswprint\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIiswprint\fR()
+and
+\fIiswprint_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR wc
+is a wide-character code representing a character of class
+.BR print
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR wc
+argument is a
+.BR wint_t ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a wide-character
+code corresponding to a valid character in the current locale, or equal
+to the value of the macro WEOF. If the argument has any other value,
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIiswprint_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIiswprint\fR()
+and
+\fIiswprint_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR wc
+is a printable wide-character code; otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIiswalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswcntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswctype\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswlower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswpunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswpunct.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswpunct.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cc52b7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswpunct.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISWPUNCT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+iswpunct,
+iswpunct_l
+\(em test for a punctuation wide-character code
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wctype.h>
+.P
+int iswpunct(wint_t \fIwc\fP);
+int iswpunct_l(wint_t \fIwc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIiswpunct\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIiswpunct\fR()
+and
+\fIiswpunct_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR wc
+is a wide-character code representing a character of class
+.BR punct
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR wc
+argument is a
+.BR wint_t ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a wide-character
+code corresponding to a valid character in the current locale, or equal
+to the value of the macro WEOF. If the argument has any other value,
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIiswpunct_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIiswpunct\fR()
+and
+\fIiswpunct_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR wc
+is a punctuation wide-character code; otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIiswalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswcntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswctype\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswlower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswspace.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswspace.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..098bd49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswspace.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISWSPACE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+iswspace,
+iswspace_l
+\(em test for a white-space wide-character code
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wctype.h>
+.P
+int iswspace(wint_t \fIwc\fP);
+int iswspace_l(wint_t \fIwc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIiswspace\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIiswspace\fR()
+and
+\fIiswspace_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR wc
+is a wide-character code representing a character of class
+.BR space
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR wc
+argument is a
+.BR wint_t ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a wide-character
+code corresponding to a valid character in the current locale, or equal
+to the value of the macro WEOF. If the argument has any other value,
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIiswspace_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIiswspace\fR()
+and
+\fIiswspace_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR wc
+is a white-space wide-character code; otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIiswalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswcntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswctype\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswlower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswpunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswupper.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswupper.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..625be1a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswupper.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISWUPPER "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+iswupper,
+iswupper_l
+\(em test for an uppercase letter wide-character code
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wctype.h>
+.P
+int iswupper(wint_t \fIwc\fP);
+int iswupper_l(wint_t \fIwc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIiswupper\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIiswupper\fR()
+and
+\fIiswupper_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR wc
+is a wide-character code representing a character of class
+.BR upper
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR wc
+argument is a
+.BR wint_t ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a wide-character
+code corresponding to a valid character in the current locale, or equal
+to the value of the macro WEOF. If the argument has any other value,
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIiswupper_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIiswupper\fR()
+and
+\fIiswupper_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR wc
+is an uppercase letter wide-character code; otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIiswalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswcntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswctype\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswlower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswpunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswxdigit.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswxdigit.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..98d59c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/iswxdigit.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISWXDIGIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+iswxdigit,
+iswxdigit_l
+\(em test for a hexadecimal digit wide-character code
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wctype.h>
+.P
+int iswxdigit(wint_t \fIwc\fP);
+int iswxdigit_l(wint_t \fIwc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIiswxdigit\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIiswxdigit\fR()
+and
+\fIiswxdigit_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR wc
+is a wide-character code representing a character of class
+.BR xdigit
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR wc
+argument is a
+.BR wint_t ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a wide-character
+code corresponding to a valid character in the current locale, or equal
+to the value of the macro WEOF. If the argument has any other value,
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIiswxdigit_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIiswxdigit\fR()
+and
+\fIiswxdigit_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR wc
+is a hexadecimal digit wide-character code; otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIiswalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswcntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswctype\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswlower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswpunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isxdigit.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isxdigit.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8ac1b15
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/isxdigit.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ISXDIGIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+isxdigit,
+isxdigit_l
+\(em test for a hexadecimal digit
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ctype.h>
+.P
+int isxdigit(int \fIc\fP);
+int isxdigit_l(int \fIc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIisxdigit\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIisxdigit\fR()
+and
+\fIisxdigit_l\fR()
+functions shall test whether
+.IR c
+is a character of class
+.BR xdigit
+in the current locale,
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale".
+.P
+The
+.IR c
+argument is an
+.BR int ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a character
+representable as an
+.BR "unsigned char"
+or equal to the value of the macro EOF. If the argument has any other
+value, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIisxdigit_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIisxdigit\fR()
+and
+\fIisxdigit_l\fR()
+functions shall return non-zero if
+.IR c
+is a hexadecimal digit; otherwise, they shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+To ensure applications portability, especially across natural
+languages, only these functions and the functions in the reference pages
+listed in the SEE ALSO section should be used for character classification.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisblank\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiscntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIispunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisupper\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<ctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/j0.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/j0.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c038be0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/j0.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+'\" et
+.TH J0 "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+j0,
+j1,
+jn
+\(em Bessel functions of the first kind
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double j0(double \fIx\fP);
+double j1(double \fIx\fP);
+double jn(int \fIn\fP, double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIj0\fR(),
+\fIj1\fR(),
+and
+\fIjn\fR()
+functions shall compute Bessel functions of
+.IR x
+of the first kind of orders 0, 1, and
+.IR n ,
+respectively.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the relevant
+Bessel value of
+.IR x
+of the first kind.
+.P
+If the
+.IR x
+argument is too large in magnitude, or the correct result would cause
+underflow, 0 shall be returned and a range error may occur.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+was too large in magnitude, or an underflow occurred.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.P
+No other errors shall occur.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIy0\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/jrand48.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/jrand48.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..745ecf1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/jrand48.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH JRAND48 "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+jrand48
+\(em generate a uniformly distributed pseudo-random long signed integer
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+long jrand48(unsigned short \fIxsubi\fR[3]);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIdrand48\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/kill.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/kill.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bf47e0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/kill.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,287 @@
+'\" et
+.TH KILL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+kill
+\(em send a signal to a process or a group of processes
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int kill(pid_t \fIpid\fP, int \fIsig\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIkill\fR()
+function shall send a signal to a process or a group of processes
+specified by
+.IR pid .
+The signal to be sent is specified by
+.IR sig
+and is either one from the list given in
+.IR <signal.h> 
+or 0. If
+.IR sig
+is 0 (the null signal), error checking is performed but no signal is
+actually sent. The null signal can be used to check the validity of
+.IR pid .
+.P
+For a process to have permission to send a signal to a process
+designated by
+.IR pid ,
+unless the sending process has appropriate privileges, the real or
+effective user ID of the sending process shall match the real or saved
+set-user-ID of the receiving process.
+.P
+If
+.IR pid
+is greater than 0,
+.IR sig
+shall be sent to the process whose process ID is equal to
+.IR pid .
+.P
+If
+.IR pid
+is 0,
+.IR sig
+shall be sent to all processes (excluding an unspecified set of system
+processes) whose process group ID is equal to the process group ID of
+the sender, and for which the process has permission to send a signal.
+.P
+If
+.IR pid
+is \(mi1,
+.IR sig
+shall be sent to all processes (excluding an unspecified set of system
+processes) for which the process has permission to send that signal.
+.P
+If
+.IR pid
+is negative, but not \(mi1,
+.IR sig
+shall be sent to all processes (excluding an unspecified set of system
+processes) whose process group ID is equal to the absolute value of
+.IR pid ,
+and for which the process has permission to send a signal.
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR pid
+causes
+.IR sig
+to be generated for the sending process, and if
+.IR sig
+is not blocked for the calling thread and if no other thread has
+.IR sig
+unblocked or is waiting in a
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+function for
+.IR sig ,
+either
+.IR sig
+or at least one pending unblocked signal shall be delivered to the
+sending thread before
+\fIkill\fR()
+returns.
+.P
+The user ID tests described above shall not be applied when sending
+SIGCONT to a process that is a member of the same session as the
+sending process.
+.P
+An implementation that provides extended security controls may impose
+further implementation-defined restrictions on the sending of
+signals, including the null signal. In particular, the system may deny
+the existence of some or all of the processes specified by
+.IR pid .
+.P
+The
+\fIkill\fR()
+function is successful if the process has permission to send
+.IR sig
+to any of the processes specified by
+.IR pid .
+If
+\fIkill\fR()
+fails, no signal shall be sent.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned. Otherwise, \(mi1
+shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIkill\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR sig
+argument is an invalid or unsupported signal number.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The process does not have permission to send the signal to any
+receiving process.
+.TP
+.BR ESRCH
+No process or process group can be found corresponding to that
+specified by
+.IR pid .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The semantics for permission checking for
+\fIkill\fR()
+differed between System V and most other implementations, such as
+Version 7 or
+4.3 BSD. The semantics chosen for this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 agree with System V.
+Specifically, a set-user-ID
+process cannot protect itself against signals (or at least not against
+SIGKILL)
+unless it changes its real user ID.
+This choice allows the user who starts an application to send it
+signals even if it changes its effective user ID.
+The other semantics give more power to an application that wants to
+protect itself from the user who ran it.
+.P
+Some implementations provide semantic extensions to the
+\fIkill\fR()
+function when the absolute value of
+.IR pid
+is greater than some maximum, or otherwise special, value. Negative
+values are a flag to
+\fIkill\fR().
+Since most implementations return
+.BR [ESRCH] 
+in this case, this behavior is not included in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, although
+a conforming implementation could provide such an extension.
+.P
+The unspecified processes to which a signal cannot be sent
+may include the scheduler or
+.IR init .
+.P
+There was initially strong sentiment to specify that, if
+.IR pid
+specifies that a signal be sent to the calling process and that signal
+is not blocked, that signal would be delivered before
+\fIkill\fR()
+returns. This would permit a process to call
+\fIkill\fR()
+and be guaranteed that the call never return. However, historical
+implementations that provide only the
+\fIsignal\fR()
+function make only the weaker guarantee in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, because they
+only deliver one signal each time a process enters the kernel.
+Modifications to such implementations to support the
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+function generally require entry to the kernel following return from a
+signal-catching function, in order to restore the signal mask. Such
+modifications have the effect of satisfying the stronger requirement,
+at least when
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+is used, but not necessarily when
+\fIsignal\fR()
+is used. The standard developers considered making the
+stronger requirement except when
+\fIsignal\fR()
+is used, but felt this would be unnecessarily complex. Implementors
+are encouraged to meet the stronger requirement whenever possible. In
+practice, the weaker requirement is the same, except in the rare case
+when two signals arrive during a very short window. This reasoning
+also applies to a similar requirement for
+\fIsigprocmask\fR().
+.P
+In 4.2 BSD, the SIGCONT
+signal can be sent to any descendant process regardless of user-ID
+security checks.
+This allows a job control shell to continue a job even if processes in
+the
+job have altered their user IDs (as in the
+.IR su
+command). In keeping with the addition of the concept of sessions,
+similar functionality is provided by allowing the SIGCONT
+signal to be sent to any process in the same session regardless of user
+ID security checks. This is less restrictive than BSD in the sense
+that ancestor processes (in the same session) can now be the recipient.
+It is more restrictive than BSD in the sense that descendant processes
+that form new sessions are now subject to the user ID checks. A similar
+relaxation of security is not necessary for the other job control
+signals since those signals are typically sent by the terminal driver
+in recognition of special characters being typed; the terminal driver
+bypasses all security checks.
+.P
+In secure implementations, a process may be restricted
+from sending a signal to a process having a different security label.
+In order to prevent the existence or nonexistence of a process from
+being used as a covert channel,
+such processes should appear nonexistent to the sender; that is,
+.BR [ESRCH] 
+should be returned, rather than
+.BR [EPERM] ,
+if
+.IR pid
+refers only to such processes.
+.P
+Existing implementations vary on the result of a
+\fIkill\fR()
+with
+.IR pid
+indicating an inactive process (a terminated process that has not been
+waited for by its parent). Some indicate success on such a call
+(subject to permission checking), while others give an error of
+.BR [ESRCH] .
+Since the definition of process lifetime in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+covers inactive processes, the
+.BR [ESRCH] 
+error as described is inappropriate in this case. In particular, this
+means that an application cannot have a parent process check for
+termination of a particular child with
+\fIkill\fR().
+(Usually this is done with the null signal; this can be done reliably
+with
+\fIwaitpid\fR().)
+.P
+There is some belief that the name
+\fIkill\fR()
+is misleading, since the function is not always intended to cause
+process termination. However, the name is common to all historical
+implementations, and any change would be in conflict with the goal of
+minimal changes to existing application code.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetpid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIraise\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigqueue\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/killpg.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/killpg.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b578f59
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/killpg.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+'\" et
+.TH KILLPG "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+killpg
+\(em send a signal to a process group
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int killpg(pid_t \fIpgrp\fP, int \fIsig\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIkillpg\fR()
+function shall send the signal specified by
+.IR sig
+to the process group specified by
+.IR pgrp .
+.P
+If
+.IR pgrp
+is greater than 1, \fIkillpg\fP(\fIpgrp\fP,\ \fIsig\fR) shall be
+equivalent to \fIkill\fP(\(mi\fIpgrp\fP,\ \fIsig\fR). If
+.IR pgrp
+is less than or equal to 1, the behavior of
+\fIkillpg\fR()
+is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Sending a Signal to All Other Members of a Process Group"
+.P
+The following example shows how the calling process could send a signal
+to all other members of its process group. To prevent itself from
+receiving the signal it first makes itself immune to the signal by
+ignoring it.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <signal.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+\&...
+    if (signal(SIGUSR1, SIG_IGN) == SIG_ERR)
+        /* Handle error */;
+.P
+    if (killpg(getpgrp(), SIGUSR1) == \(mi1)
+        /* Handle error */;"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetpgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIraise\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/l64a.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/l64a.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0f5e77f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/l64a.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH L64A "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+l64a
+\(em convert a 32-bit integer to a radix-64 ASCII string
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+char *l64a(long \fIvalue\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIa64l\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/labs.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/labs.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f7f92ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/labs.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LABS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+labs,
+llabs
+\(em return a long integer absolute value
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+long labs(long \fIi\fP);
+long long llabs(long long \fIi\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIlabs\fR()
+function shall compute the absolute value of the
+.BR long
+integer operand
+.IR i .
+The
+\fIllabs\fR()
+function shall compute the absolute value of the
+.BR "long long"
+integer operand
+.IR i .
+If the result cannot be represented, the behavior is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIlabs\fR()
+function shall return the absolute value of the
+.BR long
+integer operand.
+.P
+The
+\fIllabs\fR()
+function shall return the absolute value of the
+.BR "long long"
+integer operand.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIabs\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lchown.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lchown.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9528113
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lchown.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,174 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LCHOWN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+lchown
+\(em change the owner and group of a symbolic link
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int lchown(const char *\fIpath\fP, uid_t \fIowner\fP, gid_t \fIgroup\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIlchown\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIchown\fR(),
+except in the case where the named file is a symbolic link. In this
+case,
+\fIlchown\fR()
+shall change the ownership of the symbolic link file itself, while
+\fIchown\fR()
+changes the ownership of the file or directory to which the symbolic
+link refers.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIlchown\fR()
+shall return 0. Otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIlchown\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied on a component of the path prefix of
+.IR path .
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The owner or group ID is not a value supported by the implementation.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR path
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory, or the
+.IR path
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file
+that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The effective user ID does not match the owner of the file and the
+process does not have appropriate privileges.
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+The file resides on a read-only file system.
+.P
+The
+\fIlchown\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while reading or writing to the file system.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was caught during execution of the function.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Changing the Current Owner of a File"
+.P
+The following example shows how to change the ownership of the symbolic
+link named
+.BR /modules/pass1
+to the user ID associated with ``jones'' and the group ID associated
+with ``cnd''.
+.P
+The numeric value for the user ID is obtained by using the
+\fIgetpwnam\fR()
+function. The numeric value for the group ID is obtained by using the
+\fIgetgrnam\fR()
+function.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <pwd.h>
+#include <grp.h>
+.P
+struct passwd *pwd;
+struct group  *grp;
+char          *path = "/modules/pass1";
+\&...
+pwd = getpwnam("jones");
+grp = getgrnam("cnd");
+lchown(path, pwd->pw_uid, grp->gr_gid);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On implementations which support symbolic links as directory entries
+rather than files,
+\fIlchown\fR()
+may fail.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIchown\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsymlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lcong48.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lcong48.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..123c84c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lcong48.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LCONG48 "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+lcong48
+\(em seed a uniformly distributed pseudo-random signed long
+integer generator
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+void lcong48(unsigned short \fIparam\fP[7]);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIdrand48\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ldexp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ldexp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9355f53
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ldexp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LDEXP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ldexp,
+ldexpf,
+ldexpl
+\(em load exponent of a floating-point number
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double ldexp(double \fIx\fP, int \fIexp\fP);
+float ldexpf(float \fIx\fP, int \fIexp\fP);
+long double ldexpl(long double \fIx\fP, int \fIexp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the quantity
+\fIx\fR\ *\ 2\u\s-3\fIexp\fR\s+3\d.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return
+.IR x
+multiplied by 2, raised to the power
+.IR exp .
+.P
+If these functions would cause overflow, a range error shall occur and
+\fIldexp\fR(),
+\fIldexpf\fR(),
+and
+\fIldexpl\fR()
+shall return \(+-HUGE_VAL, \(+-HUGE_VALF, and \(+-HUGE_VALL (according
+to the sign of
+.IR x ),
+respectively.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow,
+and is not representable,
+a range error may occur, and
+\fIldexp\fR(),
+\fIldexpf\fR(),
+and
+\fIldexpl\fR()
+shall return
+0.0, or
+(if IEC 60559 Floating-Point is not supported) an implementation-defined
+value no greater in magnitude than DBL_MIN, FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN,
+respectively.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0 or \(+-Inf,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR exp
+is 0,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow, and is representable, a
+range error may occur and the correct value shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result overflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the overflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result underflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfrexp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ldiv.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ldiv.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..986e658
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ldiv.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LDIV "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ldiv,
+lldiv
+\(em compute quotient and remainder of a long division
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+ldiv_t ldiv(long \fInumer\fP, long \fIdenom\fP);
+lldiv_t lldiv(long long \fInumer\fP, long long \fIdenom\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the quotient and remainder of the
+division of the numerator
+.IR numer
+by the denominator
+.IR denom .
+If the division is inexact, the resulting quotient is the
+.BR long
+integer (for the
+\fIldiv\fR()
+function) or
+.BR "long long"
+integer (for the
+\fIlldiv\fR()
+function) of lesser magnitude that is the nearest to the algebraic
+quotient. If the result cannot be represented, the behavior is
+undefined; otherwise, \fIquot\fP\ *\ \fIdenom\fP+\fIrem\fP shall equal
+.IR numer .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIldiv\fR()
+function shall return a structure of type
+.BR ldiv_t ,
+comprising both the quotient and the remainder. The structure shall
+include the following members, in any order:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+long   quot;    /* Quotient */
+long   rem;     /* Remainder */
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+\fIlldiv\fR()
+function shall return a structure of type
+.BR lldiv_t ,
+comprising both the quotient and the remainder. The structure shall
+include the following members, in any order:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+long long   quot;    /* Quotient */
+long long   rem;     /* Remainder */
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIdiv\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lfind.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lfind.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..37b088b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lfind.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LFIND "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+lfind
+\(em find entry in a linear search table
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <search.h>
+.P
+void *lfind(const void *\fIkey\fP, const void *\fIbase\fP, size_t *\fInelp\fP,
+    size_t \fIwidth\fP, int (*\fIcompar\fP)(const void *, const void *));
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIlsearch\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lgamma.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lgamma.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1714bb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lgamma.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LGAMMA "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.EQ
+delim $$
+.EN
+.SH NAME
+lgamma,
+lgammaf,
+lgammal,
+signgam
+\(em log gamma function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double lgamma(double \fIx\fP);
+float lgammaf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double lgammal(long double \fIx\fP);
+extern int signgam;
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute
+$log_ e" " \(br \(*G ( ^ x ) \(br$
+where $\(*G ( ^ x )$ is defined as
+$int from 0 to inf e"^" " "{ - t } t"^" " "{ x - 1 } dt$.
+The argument
+.IR x
+need not be a non-positive integer ($\(*G( ^ x )$ is defined over
+the reals, except the non-positive integers).
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, \(miInf, or a negative integer, the value of
+.IR signgam
+is unspecified.
+.P
+These functions need not be thread-safe.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the
+logarithmic gamma of
+.IR x .
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is a non-positive integer, a pole error shall occur and
+\fIlgamma\fR(),
+\fIlgammaf\fR(),
+and
+\fIlgammal\fR()
+shall return +HUGE_VAL, +HUGE_VALF, and +HUGE_VALL, respectively.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause overflow, a range error shall occur
+and
+\fIlgamma\fR(),
+\fIlgammaf\fR(),
+and
+\fIlgammal\fR()
+shall return \(+-HUGE_VAL, \(+-HUGE_VALF, and \(+-HUGE_VALL (having the
+same sign as the correct value), respectively.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is 1 or 2, +0 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-Inf, +Inf shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Pole\ Error" 12
+The
+.IR x
+argument is a negative integer or zero.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the divide-by-zero floating-point exception shall be
+raised.
+.RE
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result overflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the overflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/link.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/link.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba58b85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/link.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,437 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LINK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+link, linkat
+\(em link one file to another file relative to two directory
+file descriptors
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int link(const char *\fIpath1\fP, const char *\fIpath2\fP);
+int linkat(int \fIfd1\fP, const char *\fIpath1\fP, int \fIfd2\fP,
+    const char *\fIpath2\fP, int \fIflag\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIlink\fR()
+function shall create a new link (directory entry) for the existing file,
+.IR path1 .
+.P
+The
+.IR path1
+argument points to a pathname naming an existing file. The
+.IR path2
+argument points to a pathname naming the new directory entry to be
+created. The
+\fIlink\fR()
+function shall atomically create a new link for the existing file and
+the link count of the file shall be incremented by one.
+.P
+If
+.IR path1
+names a directory,
+\fIlink\fR()
+shall fail unless the process has appropriate privileges and the
+implementation supports using
+\fIlink\fR()
+on directories.
+.P
+If
+.IR path1
+names a symbolic link, it is implementation-defined whether
+\fIlink\fR()
+follows the symbolic link, or creates a new link to the symbolic
+link itself.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIlink\fR()
+shall mark for update the last file status change timestamp of the
+file. Also, the last data modification and last file status change
+timestamps of the directory that contains the new entry shall be marked
+for update.
+.P
+If
+\fIlink\fR()
+fails, no link shall be created and the link count of the file shall
+remain unchanged.
+.P
+The implementation may require that the calling process has permission
+to access the existing file.
+.P
+The
+\fIlinkat\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIlink\fR()
+function except that symbolic links shall be handled as specified by
+the value of
+.IR flag
+(see below) and except in the case where either
+.IR path1
+or
+.IR path2
+or both are relative paths. In this case a relative path
+.IR path1
+is interpreted relative to the directory associated with the file
+descriptor
+.IR fd1
+instead of the current working directory and similarly for
+.IR path2
+and the file descriptor
+.IR fd2 .
+If the file descriptor was opened without O_SEARCH, the function
+shall check whether directory searches are permitted using the current
+permissions of the directory underlying the file descriptor. If the
+file descriptor was opened with O_SEARCH, the function shall not perform
+the check.
+.P
+Values for
+.IR flag
+are constructed by a bitwise-inclusive OR of flags from the following
+list, defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> :
+.IP AT_SYMLINK_FOLLOW 6
+.br
+If
+.IR path1
+names a symbolic link, a new link for the target of the symbolic link
+is created.
+.P
+If
+\fIlinkat\fR()
+is passed the special value AT_FDCWD in the
+.IR fd1
+or
+.IR fd2
+parameter, the current working directory shall be used for the respective
+.IR path
+argument. If both
+.IR fd1
+and
+.IR fd2
+have value AT_FDCWD, the behavior shall be identical to a call to
+\fIlink\fR(),
+except that symbolic links shall be handled as specified by the value of
+.IR flag .
+.P
+If the AT_SYMLINK_FOLLOW flag is clear in the
+.IR flag
+argument and the
+.IR path1
+argument names a symbolic link, a new link is created for the symbolic
+link
+.IR path1
+and not its target.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return 0. Otherwise,
+these functions shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.br
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+A component of either path prefix denies search permission, or the
+requested link requires writing in a directory that denies write
+permission, or the calling process does not have permission to access
+the existing file and this is required by the implementation.
+.TP
+.BR EEXIST
+The
+.IR path2
+argument resolves to an existing directory entry or refers to a symbolic
+link.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path1
+or
+.IR path2
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR EMLINK
+The number of links to the file named by
+.IR path1
+would exceed
+{LINK_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of either path prefix does not exist; the file named by
+.IR path1
+does not exist; or
+.IR path1
+or
+.IR path2
+points to an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+The directory to contain the link cannot be extended.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of either path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory, or the
+.IR path1
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file
+that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory, or the
+.IR path1
+argument names an existing non-directory file and the
+.IR path2
+argument names a nonexistent file, contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character, and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The file named by
+.IR path1
+is a directory and either the calling process does not have appropriate
+privileges or the implementation prohibits using
+\fIlink\fR()
+on directories.
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+The requested link requires writing in a directory on a read-only file
+system.
+.TP
+.BR EXDEV
+The link named by
+.IR path2
+and the file named by
+.IR path1
+are on different file systems and the implementation does not support
+links between file systems.
+.TP
+.BR EXDEV
+.IR path1
+refers to a named STREAM.
+.P
+The
+\fIlinkat\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR path1
+or
+.IR path2
+argument does not specify an absolute path and the
+.IR fd1
+or
+.IR fd2
+argument, respectively, is neither AT_FDCWD nor a valid file descriptor
+open for reading or searching.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+The
+.IR path1
+or
+.IR path2
+argument is not an absolute path and
+.IR fd1
+or
+.IR fd2 ,
+respectively, is a file descriptor associated with a non-directory file.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path1
+or
+.IR path2
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIlinkat\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR flag
+argument is not valid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Creating a Link to a File"
+.P
+The following example shows how to create a link to a file named
+.BR /home/cnd/mod1
+by creating a new directory entry named
+.BR /modules/pass1 .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+char *path1 = "/home/cnd/mod1";
+char *path2 = "/modules/pass1";
+int   status;
+\&...
+status = link (path1, path2);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Creating a Link to a File Within a Program"
+.P
+In the following program example, the
+\fIlink\fR()
+function links the
+.BR /etc/passwd
+file (defined as
+.BR PASSWDFILE )
+to a file named
+.BR /etc/opasswd
+(defined as
+.BR SAVEFILE ),
+which is used to save the current password file. Then, after removing
+the current password file (defined as
+.BR PASSWDFILE ),
+the new password file is saved as the current password file using the
+\fIlink\fR()
+function again.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+#define LOCKFILE "/etc/ptmp"
+#define PASSWDFILE "/etc/passwd"
+#define SAVEFILE "/etc/opasswd"
+\&...
+/* Save current password file */
+link (PASSWDFILE, SAVEFILE);
+.P
+/* Remove current password file. */
+unlink (PASSWDFILE);
+.P
+/* Save new password file as current password file. */
+link (LOCKFILE,PASSWDFILE);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Some implementations do allow links between file systems.
+.P
+If
+.IR path1
+refers to a symbolic link, application developers should use
+\fIlinkat\fR()
+with appropriate flags to select whether or not the symbolic link should
+be resolved.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Linking to a directory is restricted to the superuser
+in most historical implementations because this capability may produce
+loops in the file hierarchy or otherwise corrupt the file system. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+continues that philosophy by prohibiting
+\fIlink\fR()
+and
+\fIunlink\fR()
+from doing this. Other functions could do it if the implementor designed
+such an extension.
+.P
+Some historical implementations allow linking of files on different file
+systems. Wording was added to explicitly allow this optional behavior.
+.P
+The exception for cross-file system links is intended to apply only to
+links that are programmatically indistinguishable from ``hard'' links.
+.P
+The purpose of the
+\fIlinkat\fR()
+function is to link files in directories other than the current working
+directory without exposure to race conditions. Any part of the path of
+a file could be changed in parallel to a call to
+\fIlink\fR(),
+resulting in unspecified behavior. By opening a file descriptor for the
+directory of both the existing file and the target location and using the
+\fIlinkat\fR()
+function it can be guaranteed that the both filenames are in the desired
+directories.
+.P
+The AT_SYMLINK_FOLLOW flag allows for implementing both common behaviors
+of the
+\fIlink\fR()
+function. The POSIX specification requires that if
+.IR path1
+is a symbolic link, a new link for the target of the symbolic link is
+created. Many systems by default or as an alternative provide a mechanism
+to avoid the implicit symbolic link lookup and create a new link for
+the symbolic link itself.
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard specified only the
+\fIlink\fR()
+function, and required it to behave like
+\fIlinkat\fR()
+with the AT_SYMLINK_FOLLOW flag. However, historical practice from SVR4
+and Linux kernels had
+\fIlink\fR()
+behaving like
+\fIlinkat\fR()
+with no flags, and many systems that attempted to provide a conforming
+\fIlink\fR()
+function did so in a way that was rarely used, and when it was used
+did not conform to the standard (e.g., by not being atomic, or by
+dereferencing the symbolic link incorrectly). Since applications could
+not rely on
+\fIlink\fR()
+following links in practice, the
+\fIlinkat\fR()
+function was added taking a flag to specify the desired behavior
+for the application.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIrename\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsymlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fcntl.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lio_listio.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lio_listio.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5d0dd3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lio_listio.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,354 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LIO_LISTIO "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+lio_listio
+\(em list directed I/O
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <aio.h>
+.P
+int lio_listio(int \fImode\fP, struct aiocb *restrict const \fIlist\fP[restrict],
+    int \fInent\fP, struct sigevent *restrict \fIsig\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIlio_listio\fR()
+function shall initiate a list of I/O requests with a single
+function call.
+.P
+The
+.IR mode
+argument takes one of the values LIO_WAIT or LIO_NOWAIT declared in
+.IR <aio.h> 
+and determines whether the function returns when the I/O operations
+have been completed, or as soon as the operations have been queued. If
+the
+.IR mode
+argument is LIO_WAIT, the function shall wait until all I/O is
+complete and the
+.IR sig
+argument shall be ignored.
+.P
+If the
+.IR mode
+argument is LIO_NOWAIT, the function shall return immediately, and
+asynchronous notification shall occur, according to the
+.IR sig
+argument, when all the I/O operations complete. If
+.IR sig
+is NULL, then no asynchronous notification shall occur. If
+.IR sig
+is not NULL, asynchronous notification occurs as specified in
+.IR "Section 2.4.1" ", " "Signal Generation and Delivery"
+when all the requests in
+.IR list
+have completed.
+.P
+The I/O requests enumerated by
+.IR list
+are submitted in an unspecified order.
+.P
+The
+.IR list
+argument is an array of pointers to
+.BR aiocb
+structures. The array contains
+.IR nent
+elements. The array may contain NULL elements, which shall be ignored.
+.P
+If the buffer pointed to by
+.IR list
+or the
+.BR aiocb
+structures pointed to by the elements of the array
+.IR list
+become illegal addresses before all asynchronous I/O completed and, if
+necessary, the notification is sent, then the behavior is undefined. If
+the buffers pointed to by the
+.IR aio_buf
+member of the
+.BR aiocb
+structure pointed to by the elements of the array
+.IR list
+become illegal addresses prior to the asynchronous I/O associated with
+that
+.BR aiocb
+structure being completed, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The
+.IR aio_lio_opcode
+field of each
+.BR aiocb
+structure specifies the operation to be performed. The supported
+operations are LIO_READ, LIO_WRITE, and LIO_NOP;
+these symbols are defined in
+.IR <aio.h> .
+The LIO_NOP operation causes the list entry to be ignored. If the
+.IR aio_lio_opcode
+element is equal to LIO_READ, then an I/O operation is submitted as if
+by a call to
+\fIaio_read\fR()
+with the
+.IR aiocbp
+equal to the address of the
+.BR aiocb
+structure. If the
+.IR aio_lio_opcode
+element is equal to LIO_WRITE, then an I/O operation is submitted as if
+by a call to
+\fIaio_write\fR()
+with the
+.IR aiocbp
+equal to the address of the
+.BR aiocb
+structure.
+.P
+The
+.IR aio_fildes
+member specifies the file descriptor on which the operation is to be
+performed.
+.P
+The
+.IR aio_buf
+member specifies the address of the buffer to or from which the data is
+transferred.
+.P
+The
+.IR aio_nbytes
+member specifies the number of bytes of data to be transferred.
+.P
+The members of the
+.BR aiocb
+structure further describe the I/O operation to be performed, in a
+manner identical to that of the corresponding
+.BR aiocb
+structure when used by the
+\fIaio_read\fR()
+and
+\fIaio_write\fR()
+functions.
+.P
+The
+.IR nent
+argument specifies how many elements are members of the list; that is,
+the length of the array.
+.P
+The behavior of this function is altered according to the definitions
+of synchronized I/O data integrity completion and synchronized I/O file
+integrity completion if synchronized I/O is enabled on the file
+associated with
+.IR aio_fildes .
+.P
+For regular files, no data transfer shall occur past the offset maximum
+established in the open file description associated with
+\fIaiocbp\fR\->\fIaio_fildes\fR.
+.P
+If \fIsig\fR\->\fIsigev_notify\fR is SIGEV_THREAD and
+\fIsig\fR\->\fIsigev_notify_attributes\fR is a non-null pointer and the
+block pointed to by this pointer becomes an illegal address prior to
+all asynchronous I/O being completed, then the behavior is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the
+.IR mode
+argument has the value LIO_NOWAIT, the
+\fIlio_listio\fR()
+function shall return the value zero if the I/O operations are
+successfully queued; otherwise, the function shall return the value
+\(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.P
+If the
+.IR mode
+argument has the value LIO_WAIT, the
+\fIlio_listio\fR()
+function shall return the value zero when all the indicated I/O has
+completed successfully. Otherwise,
+\fIlio_listio\fR()
+shall return a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.P
+In either case, the return value only indicates the success or failure
+of the
+\fIlio_listio\fR()
+call itself, not the status of the individual I/O requests. In some
+cases one or more of the I/O requests contained in the list may fail.
+Failure of an individual request does not prevent completion of any
+other individual request. To determine the outcome of each I/O
+request, the application shall examine the error status associated with
+each
+.BR aiocb
+control block. The error statuses so returned are identical to those
+returned as the result of an
+\fIaio_read\fR()
+or
+\fIaio_write\fR()
+function.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIlio_listio\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The resources necessary to queue all the I/O requests were not
+available. The application may check the error status for each
+.BR aiocb
+to determine the individual request(s) that failed.
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The number of entries indicated by
+.IR nent
+would cause the system-wide limit
+{AIO_MAX}
+to be exceeded.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR mode
+argument is not a proper value, or the value of
+.IR nent
+was greater than
+{AIO_LISTIO_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was delivered while waiting for all I/O requests to complete
+during an LIO_WAIT operation. Note that, since each I/O operation
+invoked by
+\fIlio_listio\fR()
+may possibly provoke a signal when it completes, this error return may
+be caused by the completion of one (or more) of the very I/O operations
+being awaited. Outstanding I/O requests are not canceled, and the
+application shall examine each list element to determine whether the
+request was initiated, canceled, or completed.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+One or more of the individual I/O operations failed. The application
+may check the error status for each
+.BR aiocb
+structure to determine the individual request(s) that failed.
+.P
+In addition to the errors returned by the
+\fIlio_listio\fR()
+function, if the
+\fIlio_listio\fR()
+function succeeds or fails with errors of
+.BR [EAGAIN] ,
+.BR [EINTR] ,
+or
+.BR [EIO] ,
+then some of the I/O specified by the list may have been initiated. If
+the
+\fIlio_listio\fR()
+function fails with an error code other than
+.BR [EAGAIN] ,
+.BR [EINTR] ,
+or
+.BR [EIO] ,
+no operations from the list shall have been initiated. The I/O operation
+indicated by each list element can encounter errors specific to the
+individual read or write function being performed. In this event, the
+error status for each
+.BR aiocb
+control block contains the associated error code. The error codes that
+can be set are the same as would be set by a
+\fIread\fR()
+or
+\fIwrite\fR()
+function, with the following additional error codes possible:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The requested I/O operation was not queued due to resource limitations.
+.TP
+.BR ECANCELED
+The requested I/O was canceled before the I/O completed due to an
+explicit
+\fIaio_cancel\fR()
+request.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+The \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_lio_opcode\fP is LIO_WRITE, the file is a
+regular file, \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_nbytes\fP is greater than 0, and
+the \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_offset\fP is greater than or equal to the
+offset maximum in the open file description associated with
+\fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_fildes\fP.
+.TP
+.BR EINPROGRESS
+The requested I/O is in progress.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_lio_opcode\fP is LIO_READ, the file is a
+regular file, \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_nbytes\fP is greater than 0, and
+the \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_offset\fP is before the end-of-file and is
+greater than or equal to the offset maximum in the open file
+description associated with \fIaiocbp\fP\->\fIaio_fildes\fP.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Although it may appear that there are inconsistencies in the specified
+circumstances for error codes, the
+.BR [EIO] 
+error condition applies when any circumstance relating to an individual
+operation makes that operation fail. This might be due to a badly
+formulated request (for example, the
+.IR aio_lio_opcode
+field is invalid, and
+\fIaio_error\fR()
+returns
+.BR [EINVAL] )
+or might arise from application behavior (for example, the file
+descriptor is closed before the operation is initiated, and
+\fIaio_error\fR()
+returns
+.BR [EBADF] ).
+.P
+The limitation on the set of error codes returned when operations from
+the list shall have been initiated enables applications to know when
+operations have been started and whether
+\fIaio_error\fR()
+is valid for a specific operation.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIaio_read\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_write\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_error\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_return\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIaio_cancel\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlseek\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<aio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/listen.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/listen.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..15196c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/listen.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LISTEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+listen
+\(em listen for socket connections and limit the queue of incoming
+connections
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+.P
+int listen(int \fIsocket\fP, int \fIbacklog\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIlisten\fR()
+function shall mark a connection-mode socket, specified by the
+.IR socket
+argument, as accepting connections.
+.P
+The
+.IR backlog
+argument provides a hint to the implementation which the implementation
+shall use to limit the number of outstanding connections in the
+socket's listen queue. Implementations may impose a limit on
+.IR backlog
+and silently reduce the specified value. Normally, a larger
+.IR backlog
+argument value shall result in a larger or equal length of the listen
+queue. Implementations shall support values of
+.IR backlog
+up to SOMAXCONN, defined in
+.IR <sys/socket.h> .
+.P
+The implementation may include incomplete connections in its listen
+queue. The limits on the number of incomplete connections and completed
+connections queued may be different.
+.P
+The implementation may have an upper limit on the length of the listen
+queue\(emeither global or per accepting socket. If
+.IR backlog
+exceeds this limit, the length of the listen queue is set to the
+limit.
+.P
+If
+\fIlisten\fR()
+is called with a
+.IR backlog
+argument value that is less than 0, the function behaves as if it had
+been called with a
+.IR backlog
+argument value of 0.
+.P
+A
+.IR backlog
+argument of 0 may allow the socket to accept connections, in which case
+the length of the listen queue may be set to an
+implementation-defined minimum value.
+.P
+The socket in use may require the process to have appropriate
+privileges to use the
+\fIlisten\fR()
+function.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completions,
+\fIlisten\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIlisten\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR socket
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EDESTADDRREQ
+.br
+The socket is not bound to a local address, and the protocol does not
+support listening on an unbound socket.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR socket
+is already connected.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSOCK
+The
+.IR socket
+argument does not refer to a socket.
+.TP
+.BR EOPNOTSUPP
+The socket protocol does not support
+\fIlisten\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIlisten\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+The calling process does not have appropriate privileges.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR socket
+has been shut down.
+.TP
+.BR ENOBUFS
+Insufficient resources are available in the system to complete the
+call.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIaccept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIconnect\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/llabs.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/llabs.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2752bfc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/llabs.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LLABS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+llabs
+\(em return a long integer absolute value
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+long long llabs(long long \fIi\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIlabs\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lldiv.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lldiv.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4aa646d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lldiv.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LLDIV "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+lldiv
+\(em compute quotient and remainder of a long division
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+lldiv_t lldiv(long long \fInumer\fP, long long \fIdenom\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIldiv\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/llrint.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/llrint.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..94eaa85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/llrint.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,147 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LLRINT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+llrint,
+llrintf,
+llrintl
+\(em round to the nearest integer value using current rounding direction
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+long long llrint(double \fIx\fP);
+long long llrintf(float \fIx\fP);
+long long llrintl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall round their argument to the nearest integer
+value, rounding according to the current rounding direction.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the rounded
+integer value.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a domain error shall occur, and an unspecified value is
+returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is +Inf, a domain error shall occur and an unspecified value is
+returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(miInf, a domain error shall occur and an unspecified value is
+returned.
+.P
+If the correct value is positive and too large to represent as a
+.BR "long long" ,
+an unspecified value shall be returned.
+On systems that support the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option,
+a domain error shall occur;
+otherwise, a
+domain
+error may occur.
+.P
+If the correct value is negative and too large to represent as a
+.BR "long long" ,
+an unspecified value shall be returned.
+On systems that support the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option,
+a domain error shall occur;
+otherwise, a
+domain
+error may occur.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The
+.IR x
+argument is NaN or \(+-Inf, or the correct value is not representable
+as an integer.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The correct value is not representable as an integer.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+These functions provide floating-to-integer conversions. They round
+according to the current rounding direction. If the rounded value is
+outside the range of the return type, the numeric result is unspecified
+and the invalid floating-point exception is raised. When they raise no
+other floating-point exception and the result differs from the
+argument, they raise the inexact floating-point exception.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlrint\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/llround.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/llround.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0c04972
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/llround.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LLROUND "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+llround,
+llroundf,
+llroundl
+\(em round to nearest integer value
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+long long llround(double \fIx\fP);
+long long llroundf(float \fIx\fP);
+long long llroundl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall round their argument to the nearest integer
+value, rounding halfway cases away from zero, regardless of the current
+rounding direction.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the rounded
+integer value.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a domain error shall occur, and an unspecified value is
+returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is +Inf, a domain error shall occur and an unspecified value is
+returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(miInf, a domain error shall occur and an unspecified value is
+returned.
+.P
+If the correct value is positive and too large to represent as a
+.BR "long long" ,
+an unspecified value shall be returned.
+On systems that support the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option, a domain
+error shall occur;
+otherwise, a
+domain
+error may occur.
+.P
+If the correct value is negative and too large to represent as a
+.BR "long long" ,
+an unspecified value shall be returned.
+On systems that support the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option, a domain
+error shall occur;
+otherwise, a
+domain
+error may occur.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The
+.IR x
+argument is NaN or \(+-Inf, or the correct value is not representable
+as an integer.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The correct value is not representable as an integer.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+These functions differ from the
+\fIllrint\fR()
+functions in that the default rounding direction for the
+\fIllround\fR()
+functions round halfway cases away from zero and need not raise the
+inexact floating-point exception for non-integer arguments that round
+to within the range of the return type.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlround\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/localeconv.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/localeconv.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..61fbb0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/localeconv.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,362 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LOCALECONV "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+localeconv
+\(em return locale-specific information
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <locale.h>
+.P
+struct lconv *localeconv(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIlocaleconv\fR()
+function shall set the components of an object with the type
+.BR "struct lconv"
+with the values appropriate for the formatting of numeric quantities
+(monetary and otherwise) according to the rules of the current locale.
+.P
+The members of the structure with type
+.BR "char *"
+are pointers to strings, any of which (except
+.BR decimal_point )
+can point to
+.BR \(dq\^\(dq ,
+to indicate that the value is not available in the current locale or is
+of zero length. The members with type
+.BR char
+are non-negative numbers, any of which can be
+{CHAR_MAX}
+to indicate that the value is not available in the current locale.
+.P
+The members include the following:
+.IP "\fBchar\ *decimal_point\fP" 6
+.br
+The radix character used to format non-monetary quantities.
+.IP "\fBchar\ *thousands_sep\fP" 6
+.br
+The character used to separate groups of digits before the
+decimal-point character in formatted non-monetary quantities.
+.IP "\fBchar\ *grouping\fP" 6
+.br
+A string whose elements taken as one-byte integer values indicate the
+size of each group of digits in formatted non-monetary quantities.
+.IP "\fBchar\ *int_curr_symbol\fP" 6
+.br
+The international currency symbol applicable to the current locale.
+The first three characters contain the alphabetic international
+currency symbol in accordance with those specified in the ISO\ 4217:\|2001 standard. The
+fourth character (immediately preceding the null byte) is the character
+used to separate the international currency symbol from the monetary
+quantity.
+.IP "\fBchar\ *currency_symbol\fP" 6
+.br
+The local currency symbol applicable to the current locale.
+.IP "\fBchar\ *mon_decimal_point\fP" 6
+.br
+The radix character used to format monetary quantities.
+.IP "\fBchar\ *mon_thousands_sep\fP" 6
+.br
+The separator for groups of digits before the decimal-point in
+formatted monetary quantities.
+.IP "\fBchar\ *mon_grouping\fP" 6
+.br
+A string whose elements taken as one-byte integer values indicate the
+size of each group of digits in formatted monetary quantities.
+.IP "\fBchar\ *positive_sign\fP" 6
+.br
+The string used to indicate a non-negative valued formatted monetary
+quantity.
+.IP "\fBchar\ *negative_sign\fP" 6
+.br
+The string used to indicate a negative valued formatted monetary
+quantity.
+.IP "\fBchar\ int_frac_digits\fP" 6
+.br
+The number of fractional digits (those after the decimal-point) to be
+displayed in an internationally formatted monetary quantity.
+.IP "\fBchar\ frac_digits\fP" 6
+.br
+The number of fractional digits (those after the decimal-point) to be
+displayed in a formatted monetary quantity.
+.IP "\fBchar\ p_cs_precedes\fP" 6
+.br
+Set to 1 if the
+.BR currency_symbol
+precedes the value for a non-negative formatted monetary quantity. Set
+to 0 if the symbol succeeds the value.
+.IP "\fBchar\ p_sep_by_space\fP" 6
+.br
+Set to a value indicating the separation of the
+.BR currency_symbol ,
+the sign string, and the value for a non-negative formatted monetary
+quantity.
+.IP "\fBchar\ n_cs_precedes\fP" 6
+.br
+Set to 1 if the
+.BR currency_symbol
+precedes the value for a negative formatted monetary quantity. Set
+to 0 if the symbol succeeds the value.
+.IP "\fBchar\ n_sep_by_space\fP" 6
+.br
+Set to a value indicating the separation of the
+.BR currency_symbol ,
+the sign string, and the value for a negative formatted monetary
+quantity.
+.IP "\fBchar\ p_sign_posn\fP" 6
+.br
+Set to a value indicating the positioning of the
+.BR positive_sign
+for a non-negative formatted monetary quantity.
+.IP "\fBchar\ n_sign_posn\fP" 6
+.br
+Set to a value indicating the positioning of the
+.BR negative_sign
+for a negative formatted monetary quantity.
+.IP "\fBchar\ int_p_cs_precedes\fP" 6
+.br
+Set to 1 or 0 if the
+.BR int_curr_symbol
+respectively precedes or succeeds the value for a non-negative
+internationally formatted monetary quantity.
+.IP "\fBchar\ int_n_cs_precedes\fP" 6
+.br
+Set to 1 or 0 if the
+.BR int_curr_symbol
+respectively precedes or succeeds the value for a negative
+internationally formatted monetary quantity.
+.IP "\fBchar\ int_p_sep_by_space\fP" 6
+.br
+Set to a value indicating the separation of the
+.BR int_curr_symbol ,
+the sign string, and the value for a non-negative internationally
+formatted monetary quantity.
+.IP "\fBchar\ int_n_sep_by_space\fP" 6
+.br
+Set to a value indicating the separation of the
+.BR int_curr_symbol ,
+the sign string, and the value for a negative internationally formatted
+monetary quantity.
+.IP "\fBchar\ int_p_sign_posn\fP" 6
+.br
+Set to a value indicating the positioning of the
+.BR positive_sign
+for a non-negative internationally formatted monetary quantity.
+.IP "\fBchar\ int_n_sign_posn\fP" 6
+.br
+Set to a value indicating the positioning of the
+.BR negative_sign
+for a negative internationally formatted monetary quantity.
+.P
+The elements of
+.BR grouping
+and
+.BR mon_grouping
+are interpreted according to the following:
+.IP {CHAR_MAX} 12
+No further grouping is to be performed.
+.IP 0 12
+The previous element is to be repeatedly used for the remainder of the
+digits.
+.IP "\fIother\fP" 12
+The integer value is the number of digits that comprise the current
+group. The next element is examined to determine the size of the next
+group of digits before the current group.
+.P
+The values of
+.BR p_sep_by_space ,
+.BR n_sep_by_space ,
+.BR int_p_sep_by_space ,
+and
+.BR int_n_sep_by_space
+are interpreted according to the following:
+.IP 0 6
+No space separates the currency symbol and value.
+.IP 1 6
+If the currency symbol and sign string are adjacent, a space separates
+them from the value; otherwise, a space separates the currency symbol
+from the value.
+.IP 2 6
+If the currency symbol and sign string are adjacent, a space separates
+them; otherwise, a space separates the sign string from the value.
+.P
+For
+.BR int_p_sep_by_space
+and
+.BR int_n_sep_by_space ,
+the fourth character of
+.BR int_curr_symbol
+is used instead of a space.
+.P
+The values of
+.BR p_sign_posn ,
+.BR n_sign_posn ,
+.BR int_p_sign_posn ,
+and
+.BR int_n_sign_posn
+are interpreted according to the following:
+.IP 0 6
+Parentheses surround the quantity and
+.BR currency_symbol
+or
+.BR int_curr_symbol .
+.IP 1 6
+The sign string precedes the quantity and
+.BR currency_symbol
+or
+.BR int_curr_symbol .
+.IP 2 6
+The sign string succeeds the quantity and
+.BR currency_symbol
+or
+.BR int_curr_symbol .
+.IP 3 6
+The sign string immediately precedes the
+.BR currency_symbol
+or
+.BR int_curr_symbol .
+.IP 4 6
+The sign string immediately succeeds the
+.BR currency_symbol
+or
+.BR int_curr_symbol .
+.P
+The implementation shall behave as if no function in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 calls
+\fIlocaleconv\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIlocaleconv\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIlocaleconv\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to the filled-in object. The application
+shall not modify the structure to which the return value points,
+nor any storage areas pointed to by pointers within the structure. The
+returned pointer, and pointers within the structure, might be
+invalidated or
+the structure
+or the storage areas
+might be overwritten by a subsequent call to
+\fIlocaleconv\fR().
+In addition,
+the returned pointer, and pointers within the structure, might be
+invalidated or
+the structure
+or the storage areas
+might be overwritten by subsequent calls to
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+with the categories LC_ALL, LC_MONETARY, or LC_NUMERIC,
+or by calls to
+\fIuselocale\fR()
+which change the categories LC_MONETARY or LC_NUMERIC.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The following table illustrates the rules which may be used by four
+countries to format monetary quantities.
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB | cB | cB
+l | l | l | l.
+Country!Positive Format!Negative Format!International Format
+_
+Italy!\(eu.1.230!\(mi\(eu.1.230!EUR.1.230
+Netherlands!\(eu 1.234,56!\(eu \(mi1.234,56!EUR 1.234,56
+Norway!kr1.234,56!kr1.234,56\(mi!NOK 1.234,56
+Switzerland!SFrs.1,234.56!SFrs.1,234.56C!CHF 1,234.56
+.TE
+.P
+For these four countries, the respective values for the monetary
+members of the structure returned by
+\fIlocaleconv\fR()
+are:
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB | cB | cB | cB
+lb | cf5 | cf5 | cf5 | cf5.
+!Italy!Netherlands!Norway!Switzerland
+_
+int_curr_symbol!"EUR."!"EUR "!"NOK "!"CHF "
+currency_symbol!"\(eu."!"\(eu"!"kr"!"SFrs."
+mon_decimal_point!""!","!","!"."
+mon_thousands_sep!"."!"."!"."!","
+mon_grouping!"\e3"!"\e3"!"\e3"!"\e3"
+positive_sign!""!""!""!""
+negative_sign!"-"!"-"!"-"!"C"
+int_frac_digits!0!2!2!2
+frac_digits!0!2!2!2
+p_cs_precedes!1!1!1!1
+p_sep_by_space!0!1!0!0
+n_cs_precedes!1!1!1!1
+n_sep_by_space!0!1!0!0
+p_sign_posn!1!1!1!1
+n_sign_posn!1!4!2!2
+int_p_cs_precedes!1!1!1!1
+int_n_cs_precedes!1!1!1!1
+int_p_sep_by_space!0!0!0!0
+int_n_sep_by_space!0!0!0!0
+int_p_sign_posn!1!1!1!1
+int_n_sign_posn!1!4!4!2
+.TE
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfprintf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfscanf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisascii\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fInl_langinfo\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrcat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrchr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrcmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrcoll\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrcpy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrlen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrpbrk\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrspn\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrtok\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrxfrm\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrtod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<langinfo.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/localtime.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/localtime.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3459412
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/localtime.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,276 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LOCALTIME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+localtime,
+localtime_r
+\(em convert a time value to a broken-down local time
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+struct tm *localtime(const time_t *\fItimer\fP);
+struct tm *localtime_r(const time_t *restrict \fItimer\fP,
+    struct tm *restrict \fIresult\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIlocaltime\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIlocaltime\fR()
+function shall convert the time in seconds since the Epoch pointed
+to by
+.IR timer
+into a broken-down time, expressed as a local time. The function
+corrects for the timezone and any seasonal time adjustments.
+Local timezone information is used as though
+\fIlocaltime\fR()
+calls
+\fItzset\fR().
+.P
+The relationship between a time in seconds since the Epoch used as an
+argument to
+\fIlocaltime\fR()
+and the
+.BR tm
+structure (defined in the
+.IR <time.h> 
+header) is that the result shall be as specified in the expression
+given in the definition of seconds since the Epoch (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.15" ", " "Seconds Since the Epoch")
+corrected for timezone and any seasonal time adjustments, where the
+names in the structure and in the expression correspond.
+.P
+The same relationship shall apply for
+\fIlocaltime_r\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIlocaltime\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.P
+The
+\fIasctime\fR(),
+\fIctime\fR(),
+\fIgmtime\fR(),
+and
+\fIlocaltime\fR()
+functions shall return values in one of two static objects: a
+broken-down time structure and an array of type
+.BR char .
+Execution of any of the functions may overwrite the information
+returned in either of these objects by any of the other functions.
+.P
+The
+\fIlocaltime_r\fR()
+function shall convert the time in seconds since the Epoch pointed
+to by
+.IR timer
+into a broken-down time stored in the structure to which
+.IR result
+points. The
+\fIlocaltime_r\fR()
+function shall also return a pointer to that same structure.
+.P
+Unlike
+\fIlocaltime\fR(),
+the
+\fIlocaltime_r\fR()
+function is not required to set
+.IR tzname .
+If
+\fIlocaltime_r\fR()
+does not set
+.IR tzname ,
+it shall not set
+.IR daylight
+and shall not set
+.IR timezone .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIlocaltime\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to the broken-down time structure.
+If an error is detected,
+\fIlocaltime\fR()
+shall return a null pointer
+and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIlocaltime_r\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the structure pointed to by the argument
+.IR result .
+If an error is detected,
+\fIlocaltime_r\fR()
+shall return a null pointer and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIlocaltime\fR()
+and
+\fIlocaltime_r\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The result cannot be represented.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Getting the Local Date and Time"
+.P
+The following example uses the
+\fItime\fR()
+function to calculate the time elapsed, in seconds, since January 1,
+1970 0:00 UTC (the Epoch),
+\fIlocaltime\fR()
+to convert that value to a broken-down time, and
+\fIasctime\fR()
+to convert the broken-down time values into a printable string.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+int main(void)
+{
+    time_t result;
+.P
+    result = time(NULL);
+    printf("%s%ju secs since the Epoch\en",
+        asctime(localtime(&result)),
+            (uintmax_t)result);
+    return(0);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This example writes the current time to
+.IR stdout
+in a form like this:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+Wed Jun 26 10:32:15 1996
+835810335 secs since the Epoch
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Getting the Modification Time for a File"
+.P
+The following example prints the last data modification timestamp
+in the local timezone for a given file.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <time.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+int
+print_file_time(const char *pathname)
+{
+    struct stat statbuf;
+    struct tm *tm;
+    char timestr[BUFSIZ];
+.P
+    if(stat(pathname, &statbuf) =\|= \(mi1)
+        return \(mi1;
+    if((tm = localtime(&statbuf.st_mtime)) =\|= NULL)
+        return \(mi1;
+    if(strftime(timestr, sizeof(timestr), "%Y-%m-%d %H:%M:%S", tm) =\|= 0)
+        return \(mi1;
+    printf("%s: %s.%09ld\en", pathname, timestr, statbuf.st_mtim.tv_nsec);
+    return 0;
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Timing an Event"
+.P
+The following example gets the current time, converts it to a string
+using
+\fIlocaltime\fR()
+and
+\fIasctime\fR(),
+and prints it to standard output using
+\fIfputs\fR().
+It then prints the number of minutes to an event being timed.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <time.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+time_t now;
+int minutes_to_event;
+\&...
+time(&now);
+printf("The time is ");
+fputs(asctime(localtime(&now)), stdout);
+printf("There are still %d minutes to the event.\en",
+    minutes_to_event);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIlocaltime_r\fR()
+function is thread-safe and returns values in a user-supplied buffer
+instead of possibly using a static data area that may be overwritten by
+each call.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIasctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdifftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetdate\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgmtime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImktime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrptime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItzset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIutime\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.15" ", " "Seconds Since the Epoch",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lockf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lockf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..870fb59
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lockf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,291 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LOCKF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+lockf
+\(em record locking on files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int lockf(int \fIfildes\fP, int \fIfunction\fP, off_t \fIsize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIlockf\fR()
+function shall lock sections of a file with advisory-mode locks. Calls
+to
+\fIlockf\fR()
+from threads in other processes which attempt to lock the locked file
+section shall either return an error value or block until the section
+becomes unlocked. All the locks for a process are removed when the
+process terminates. Record locking with
+\fIlockf\fR()
+shall be supported for regular files and may be supported for other
+files.
+.P
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is an open file descriptor. To establish a lock with this
+function, the file descriptor shall be opened with write-only
+permission (O_WRONLY) or with read/write permission (O_RDWR).
+.P
+The
+.IR function
+argument is a control value which specifies the action to be taken. The
+permissible values for
+.IR function
+are defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+as follows:
+.TS
+box tab(!) center;
+cB | cB
+l | l.
+Function!Description
+_
+F_ULOCK!Unlock locked sections.
+F_LOCK!Lock a section for exclusive use.
+F_TLOCK!Test and lock a section for exclusive use.
+F_TEST!Test a section for locks by other processes.
+.TE
+.P
+F_TEST shall detect if a lock by another process is present on the
+specified section.
+.P
+F_LOCK and F_TLOCK shall both lock a section of a file if the section
+is available.
+.P
+F_ULOCK shall remove locks from a section of the file.
+.P
+The
+.IR size
+argument is the number of contiguous bytes to be locked or unlocked.
+The section to be locked or unlocked starts at the current offset in
+the file and extends forward for a positive size or backward for a
+negative size (the preceding bytes up to but not including the current
+offset). If
+.IR size
+is 0, the section from the current offset through the largest possible
+file offset shall be locked (that is, from the current offset through
+the present or any future end-of-file). An area need not be allocated
+to the file to be locked because locks may exist past the end-of-file.
+.P
+The sections locked with F_LOCK or F_TLOCK may, in whole or in part,
+contain or be contained by a previously locked section for the same
+process. When this occurs, or if adjacent locked sections would occur,
+the sections shall be combined into a single locked section. If the
+request would cause the number of locks to exceed a system-imposed
+limit, the request shall fail.
+.P
+F_LOCK and F_TLOCK requests differ only by the action taken if the
+section is not available. F_LOCK shall block the calling thread until
+the section is available. F_TLOCK shall cause the function to fail if
+the section is already locked by another process.
+.P
+File locks shall be released on first close by the locking process of
+any file descriptor for the file.
+.P
+F_ULOCK requests may release (wholly or in part) one or more locked
+sections controlled by the process. Locked sections shall be unlocked
+starting at the current file offset through
+.IR size
+bytes or to the end-of-file if
+.IR size
+is (\fBoff_t\fR)0. When all of a locked section is not released (that
+is, when the beginning or end of the area to be unlocked falls within a
+locked section), the remaining portions of that section shall remain
+locked by the process. Releasing the center portion of a locked section
+shall cause the remaining locked beginning and end portions to become two
+separate locked sections. If the request would cause the number of
+locks in the system to exceed a system-imposed limit, the request
+shall fail.
+.P
+A potential for deadlock occurs if the threads of a process controlling
+a locked section are blocked by accessing a locked section of
+another process. If the system detects that deadlock would occur,
+\fIlockf\fR()
+shall fail with an
+.BR [EDEADLK] 
+error.
+.P
+The interaction between
+\fIfcntl\fR()
+and
+\fIlockf\fR()
+locks is unspecified.
+.P
+Blocking on a section shall be interrupted by any signal.
+.P
+An F_ULOCK request in which
+.IR size
+is non-zero and the offset of the last byte of the requested section is
+the maximum value for an object of type
+.BR off_t ,
+when the process has an existing lock in which
+.IR size
+is 0 and which includes the last byte of the requested section, shall be
+treated as a request to unlock from the start of the requested section
+with a size equal to 0. Otherwise, an F_ULOCK request shall attempt to
+unlock only the requested section.
+.P
+Attempting to lock a section of a file that is associated with a
+buffered stream produces unspecified results.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIlockf\fR()
+shall return 0. Otherwise, it shall return \(mi1, set
+.IR errno
+to indicate an error, and existing locks shall not be changed.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIlockf\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid open file descriptor; or
+.IR function
+is F_LOCK or F_TLOCK and
+.IR fildes
+is not a valid file descriptor open for writing.
+.TP
+.BR EACCES " or " EAGAIN
+.br
+The
+.IR function
+argument is F_TLOCK or F_TEST and the section is already locked by
+another process.
+.TP
+.BR EDEADLK
+The
+.IR function
+argument is F_LOCK and a deadlock is detected.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was caught during execution of the function.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR function
+argument is not one of F_LOCK, F_TLOCK, F_TEST, or F_ULOCK; or
+.IR size
+plus the current file offset is less than 0.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The offset of the first, or if
+.IR size
+is not 0 then the last, byte in the requested section cannot be
+represented correctly in an object of type
+.BR off_t .
+.P
+The
+\fIlockf\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The
+.IR function
+argument is F_LOCK or F_TLOCK and the file is mapped with
+\fImmap\fR().
+.TP
+.BR EDEADLK " or " ENOLCK
+.br
+The
+.IR function
+argument is F_LOCK, F_TLOCK, or F_ULOCK, and the request would cause
+the number of locks to exceed a system-imposed limit.
+.TP
+.BR EOPNOTSUPP " or " EINVAL
+.br
+The implementation does not support the locking of files of the type
+indicated by the
+.IR fildes
+argument.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Locking a Portion of a File"
+.P
+In the following example, a file named
+.BR /home/cnd/mod1
+is being modified. Other processes that use locking are prevented from
+changing it during this process. Only the first 10\|000 bytes are
+locked, and the lock call fails if another process has any part of this
+area locked already.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int fildes;
+int status;
+\&...
+fildes = open("/home/cnd/mod1", O_RDWR);
+status = lockf(fildes, F_TLOCK, (off_t)10000);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Record-locking should not be used in combination with the
+\fIfopen\fR(),
+\fIfread\fR(),
+\fIfwrite\fR(),
+and other
+.IR stdio
+functions. Instead, the more primitive, non-buffered functions (such as
+\fIopen\fR())
+should be used. Unexpected results may occur in processes that do
+buffering in the user address space. The process may later read/write
+data which is/was locked. The
+.IR stdio
+functions are the most common source of unexpected buffering.
+.P
+The
+\fIalarm\fR()
+function may be used to provide a timeout facility in applications
+requiring it.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIalarm\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcreat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImmap\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/log.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/log.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0d68316
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/log.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LOG "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+log,
+logf,
+logl
+\(em natural logarithm function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double log(double \fIx\fP);
+float logf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double logl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the natural logarithm of their argument
+.IR x ,
+log\d\s-3\fIe\fR\s+3\u(\fIx\fR).
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the natural
+logarithm of
+.IR x .
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0, a pole error shall occur and
+\fIlog\fR(),
+\fIlogf\fR(),
+and
+\fIlogl\fR()
+shall return \(miHUGE_VAL, \(miHUGE_VALF, and \(miHUGE_VALL,
+respectively.
+.P
+For finite values of
+.IR x
+that are less than 0,
+or if
+.IR x
+is \(miInf,
+a domain error shall occur, and
+either a NaN (if supported), or
+an implementation-defined value shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is 1, +0 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is +Inf,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The finite value of
+.IR x
+is negative,
+or
+.IR x
+is \(miInf.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.IP "Pole\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is zero.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the divide-by-zero floating-point exception shall be
+raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlog10\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlog1p\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/log10.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/log10.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..502f3be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/log10.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LOG10 "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+log10,
+log10f,
+log10l
+\(em base 10 logarithm function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double log10(double \fIx\fP);
+float log10f(float \fIx\fP);
+long double log10l(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the base 10 logarithm of their argument
+.IR x ,
+log\d\s-310\s+3\u(\fIx\fR).
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the base 10
+logarithm of
+.IR x .
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0, a pole error shall occur and
+\fIlog10\fR(),
+\fIlog10f\fR(),
+and
+\fIlog10l\fR()
+shall return \(miHUGE_VAL, \(miHUGE_VALF, and \(miHUGE_VALL,
+respectively.
+.P
+For finite values of
+.IR x
+that are less than 0,
+or if
+.IR x
+is \(miInf,
+a domain error shall occur, and
+either a NaN (if supported), or
+an implementation-defined value shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is 1, +0 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is +Inf, +Inf shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The finite value of
+.IR x
+is negative,
+or
+.IR x
+is \(miInf.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.IP "Pole\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is zero.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the divide-by-zero floating-point exception shall be
+raised.
+.RE
+.P
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlog\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpow\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/log1p.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/log1p.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b8a2e13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/log1p.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,177 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LOG1P "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+log1p,
+log1pf,
+log1pl
+\(em compute a natural logarithm
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double log1p(double \fIx\fP);
+float log1pf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double log1pl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute log\d\s-3e\s+3\u(1.0 + \fIx\fP).
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the natural
+logarithm of 1.0 +
+.IR x .
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(mi1, a pole error shall occur and
+\fIlog1p\fR(),
+\fIlog1pf\fR(),
+and
+\fIlog1pl\fR()
+shall return \(miHUGE_VAL, \(miHUGE_VALF, and \(miHUGE_VALL,
+respectively.
+.P
+For finite values of
+.IR x
+that are less than \(mi1,
+or if
+.IR x
+is \(miInf,
+a domain error shall occur, and
+either a NaN (if supported), or
+an implementation-defined value shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0, or +Inf,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is subnormal, a range error may occur
+.br
+and
+.IR x
+should be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is not returned,
+\fIlog1p\fR(),
+\fIlog1pf\fR(),
+and
+\fIlog1pl\fR()
+shall return an implementation-defined value no greater in magnitude
+than DBL_MIN, FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN, respectively.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The finite value of
+.IR x
+is less than \(mi1,
+or
+.IR x
+is \(miInf.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.IP "Pole\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is \(mi1.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the divide-by-zero floating-point exception shall be
+raised.
+.RE
+.br
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is subnormal.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlog\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/log2.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/log2.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2f20c80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/log2.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,148 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LOG2 "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+log2,
+log2f,
+log2l
+\(em compute base 2 logarithm functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double log2(double \fIx\fP);
+float log2f(float \fIx\fP);
+long double log2l(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the base 2 logarithm of their argument
+.IR x ,
+log\s-3\d2\u\s+3(\fIx\fR).
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the base 2
+logarithm of
+.IR x .
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0, a pole error shall occur and
+\fIlog2\fR(),
+\fIlog2f\fR(),
+and
+\fIlog2l\fR()
+shall return \(miHUGE_VAL, \(miHUGE_VALF, and \(miHUGE_VALL,
+respectively.
+.P
+For finite values of
+.IR x
+that are less than 0,
+or if
+.IR x
+is \(miInf,
+a domain error shall occur, and
+either a NaN (if supported), or
+an implementation-defined value shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is 1, +0 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is +Inf,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The finite value of
+.IR x
+is less than zero,
+or
+.IR x
+is \(miInf.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.IP "Pole\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is zero.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the divide-by-zero floating-point exception shall be
+raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlog\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/logb.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/logb.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1f26022
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/logb.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LOGB "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+logb,
+logbf,
+logbl
+\(em radix-independent exponent
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double logb(double \fIx\fP);
+float logbf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double logbl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the exponent of
+.IR x ,
+which is the integral part of log\fI\d\s-3r\s+3\u\fR
+|\|\fIx\fR\||, as a signed floating-point value, for non-zero
+.IR x ,
+where
+.IR r
+is the radix of the machine's floating-point arithmetic, which is the
+value of FLT_RADIX defined in the
+.IR <float.h> 
+header.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is subnormal it is treated as though it were normalized; thus for
+finite positive
+.IR x :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+1 <= \fIx\fP * FLT_RADIX\s-3\u\(milogb(x)\d\s+3 < FLT_RADIX
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the exponent
+of
+.IR x .
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0,
+\fIlogb\fR(),
+\fIlogbf\fR(),
+and
+\fIlogbl\fR()
+shall return \(miHUGE_VAL, \(miHUGE_VALF, and \(miHUGE_VALL,
+respectively.
+.P
+On systems that support the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option, a pole
+error shall occur;
+.br
+otherwise, a
+pole
+error may occur.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-Inf, +Inf shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Pole\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is \(+-0.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the divide-by-zero floating-point exception shall be
+raised.
+.RE
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Pole\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is 0.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the divide-by-zero floating-point exception shall be
+raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIilogb\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIscalbln\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<float.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/logf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/logf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..700bfb4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/logf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LOGF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+logf,
+logl
+\(em natural logarithm function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+float logf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double logl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIlog\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/longjmp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/longjmp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1b5b180
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/longjmp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LONGJMP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+longjmp
+\(em non-local goto
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <setjmp.h>
+.P
+void longjmp(jmp_buf \fIenv\fP, int \fIval\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+function shall restore the environment saved by the most recent
+invocation of
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+in the same process, with the corresponding
+.BR jmp_buf
+argument. If the most recent invocation of
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+with the corresponding
+.BR jmp_buf
+occurred in another thread, or if there is no such invocation, or if
+the function containing the invocation of
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+has terminated execution in the interim, or if the invocation of
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+was within the scope of an identifier with variably modified type and
+execution has left that scope in the interim, the behavior is undefined.
+It is unspecified whether
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+restores the signal mask, leaves the signal mask unchanged, or restores
+it to its value at the time
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+was called.
+.P
+All accessible objects have values, and all other components of the
+abstract machine have state (for example, floating-point status flags
+and open files), as of the time
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+was called, except that the values of objects of automatic storage
+duration are unspecified if they meet all the following conditions:
+.IP " *" 4
+They are local to the function containing the corresponding
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+invocation.
+.IP " *" 4
+They do not have volatile-qualified type.
+.IP " *" 4
+They are changed between the
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+invocation and
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+call.
+.P
+As it bypasses the usual function call and return mechanisms,
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+shall execute correctly in contexts of interrupts, signals, and any
+of their associated functions. However, if
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+is invoked from a nested signal handler (that is, from a function
+invoked as a result of a signal raised during the handling of another
+signal), the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The effect of a call to
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+where initialization of the
+.BR jmp_buf
+structure was not performed in the calling thread is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+After
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+is completed, program execution continues as if the corresponding
+invocation of
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+had just returned the value specified by
+.IR val .
+The
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+function shall not cause
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+to return 0; if
+.IR val
+is 0,
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+shall return 1.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications whose behavior depends on the value of the signal mask
+should not use
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+and
+\fIsetjmp\fR(),
+since their effect on the signal mask is unspecified, but should
+instead use the
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR()
+and
+\fIsigsetjmp\fR()
+functions (which can save and restore the signal mask under application
+control).
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsetjmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsiglongjmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigsetjmp\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<setjmp.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lrand48.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lrand48.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..10759b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lrand48.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LRAND48 "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+lrand48
+\(em generate uniformly distributed pseudo-random non-negative
+long integers
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+long lrand48(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIdrand48\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lrint.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lrint.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..74b5aec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lrint.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,147 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LRINT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+lrint,
+lrintf,
+lrintl
+\(em round to nearest integer value using current rounding direction
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+long lrint(double \fIx\fP);
+long lrintf(float \fIx\fP);
+long lrintl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall round their argument to the nearest integer
+value, rounding according to the current rounding direction.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the rounded
+integer value.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a domain error shall occur and an unspecified value is
+returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is +Inf, a domain error shall occur and an unspecified value is
+returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(miInf, a domain error shall occur and an unspecified value is
+returned.
+.P
+If the correct value is positive and too large to represent as a
+.BR long ,
+an unspecified value shall be returned.
+On systems that support the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option, a domain
+error shall occur;
+otherwise, a
+domain
+error may occur.
+.P
+If the correct value is negative and too large to represent as a
+.BR long ,
+an unspecified value shall be returned.
+On systems that support the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option, a domain
+error shall occur;
+otherwise, a
+domain
+error may occur.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The
+.IR x
+argument is NaN or \(+-Inf, or the correct value is not representable
+as an integer.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The correct value is not representable as an integer.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+These functions provide floating-to-integer conversions. They round
+according to the current rounding direction. If the rounded value is
+outside the range of the return type, the numeric result is unspecified
+and the invalid floating-point exception is raised. When they raise no
+other floating-point exception and the result differs from the
+argument, they raise the inexact floating-point exception.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIllrint\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lround.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lround.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ed2259a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lround.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LROUND "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+lround,
+lroundf,
+lroundl
+\(em round to nearest integer value
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+long lround(double \fIx\fP);
+long lroundf(float \fIx\fP);
+long lroundl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall round their argument to the nearest integer
+value, rounding halfway cases away from zero, regardless of the current
+rounding direction.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the rounded
+integer value.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a domain error shall occur and an unspecified value is
+returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is +Inf, a domain error shall occur and an unspecified value is
+returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(miInf, a domain error shall occur and an unspecified value is
+returned.
+.P
+If the correct value is positive and too large to represent as a
+.BR long ,
+an unspecified value shall be returned.
+On systems that support the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option, a domain
+shall occur;
+otherwise, a
+domain
+error may occur.
+.P
+If the correct value is negative and too large to represent as a
+.BR long ,
+an unspecified value shall be returned.
+On systems that support the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option, a domain
+shall occur;
+otherwise, a
+domain
+error may occur.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The
+.IR x
+argument is NaN or \(+-Inf, or the correct value is not representable
+as an integer.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The correct value is not representable as an integer.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+These functions differ from the
+\fIlrint\fR()
+functions in the default rounding direction, with the
+\fIlround\fR()
+functions rounding halfway cases away from zero and needing not to
+raise the inexact floating-point exception for non-integer arguments
+that round to within the range of the return type.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIllround\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lsearch.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lsearch.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a4d8838
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lsearch.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,154 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LSEARCH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+lsearch,
+lfind
+\(em linear search and update
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <search.h>
+.P
+void *lsearch(const void *\fIkey\fP, void *\fIbase\fP, size_t *\fInelp\fP, size_t \fIwidth\fP,
+    int (*\fIcompar\fP)(const void *, const void *));
+void *lfind(const void *\fIkey\fP, const void *\fIbase\fP, size_t *\fInelp\fP,
+    size_t width, int (*\fIcompar\fP)(const void *, const void *));
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIlsearch\fR()
+function shall linearly search the table and return a pointer into the
+table for the matching entry. If the entry does not occur, it shall be
+added at the end of the table. The
+.IR key
+argument points to the entry to be sought in the table. The
+.IR base
+argument points to the first element in the table. The
+.IR width
+argument is the size of an element in bytes. The
+.IR nelp
+argument points to an integer containing the current number of elements
+in the table. The integer to which
+.IR nelp
+points shall be incremented if the entry is added to the table. The
+.IR compar
+argument points to a comparison function which the application shall
+supply (for example,
+\fIstrcmp\fR()).
+It is called with two arguments that point to the elements being
+compared. The application shall ensure that the function returns 0
+if the elements are equal, and non-zero otherwise.
+.P
+The
+\fIlfind\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIlsearch\fR(),
+except that if the entry is not found, it is not added to the table.
+Instead, a null pointer is returned.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the searched for entry is found, both
+\fIlsearch\fR()
+and
+\fIlfind\fR()
+shall return a pointer to it. Otherwise,
+\fIlfind\fR()
+shall return a null pointer and
+\fIlsearch\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the newly added element.
+.P
+Both functions shall return a null pointer in case of error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+.SS "Storing Strings in a Table"
+.P
+This fragment reads in less than or equal to TABSIZE
+strings of length less than or equal to ELSIZE and stores them in a
+table, eliminating duplicates.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <search.h>
+.P
+#define TABSIZE 50
+#define ELSIZE 120
+.P
+\&...
+    char line[ELSIZE], tab[TABSIZE][ELSIZE];
+    size_t nel = 0;
+    ...
+    while (fgets(line, ELSIZE, stdin) != NULL && nel < TABSIZE)
+        (void) lsearch(line, tab, &nel,
+            ELSIZE, (int (*)(const void *, const void *)) strcmp);
+    ...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Finding a Matching Entry"
+.P
+The following example finds any line that reads
+.BR \(dqThis is a test.\(dq .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <search.h>
+#include <string.h>
+\&...
+char line[ELSIZE], tab[TABSIZE][ELSIZE];
+size_t nel = 0;
+char *findline;
+void *entry;
+.P
+findline = "This is a test.\en";
+.P
+entry = lfind(findline, tab, &nel, ELSIZE, (
+    int (*)(const void *, const void *)) strcmp);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The comparison function need not compare every byte, so arbitrary
+data may be contained in the elements in addition to the values
+being compared.
+.P
+Undefined results can occur if there is not enough room in the table to
+add a new item.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIhcreate\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItdelete\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<search.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lseek.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lseek.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..38d3bd5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lseek.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,183 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LSEEK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+lseek
+\(em move the read/write file offset
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+off_t lseek(int \fIfildes\fP, off_t \fIoffset\fP, int \fIwhence\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIlseek\fR()
+function shall set the file offset for the open file description
+associated with the file descriptor
+.IR fildes,
+as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR whence
+is SEEK_SET, the file offset shall be set to
+.IR offset
+bytes.
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR whence
+is SEEK_CUR, the file offset shall be set to its current location plus
+.IR offset .
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR whence
+is SEEK_END, the file offset shall be set to the size of the file plus
+.IR offset .
+.P
+The symbolic constants SEEK_SET, SEEK_CUR, and SEEK_END
+are defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> .
+.P
+The behavior of
+\fIlseek\fR()
+on devices which are incapable of seeking is implementation-defined.
+The value of the file offset associated with such a device is
+undefined.
+.P
+The
+\fIlseek\fR()
+function shall allow the file offset to be set beyond the end of the
+existing data in the file. If data is later written at this point,
+subsequent reads of data in the gap shall return bytes with the value 0
+until data is actually written into the gap.
+.P
+The
+\fIlseek\fR()
+function shall not, by itself, extend the size of a file.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a shared memory object, the result of the
+\fIlseek\fR()
+function is unspecified.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a typed memory object, the result of the
+\fIlseek\fR()
+function is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the resulting offset, as measured in bytes
+from the beginning of the file, shall be returned. Otherwise, \(mi1
+shall be returned,
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error, and the file offset shall remain
+unchanged.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIlseek\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not an open file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR whence
+argument is not a proper value, or the resulting file offset would be
+negative for a regular file, block special file, or directory.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The resulting file offset would be a value which cannot be represented
+correctly in an object of type
+.BR off_t .
+.TP
+.BR ESPIPE
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is associated with a pipe, FIFO, or socket.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The ISO\ C standard includes the functions
+\fIfgetpos\fR()
+and
+\fIfsetpos\fR(),
+which work on very large files by use of a special positioning type.
+.P
+Although
+\fIlseek\fR()
+may position the file offset beyond the end of the file, this function
+does not itself extend the size of the file. While the only function
+in POSIX.1\(hy2008 that may directly extend the size of the file is
+\fIwrite\fR(),
+\fItruncate\fR(),
+and
+\fIftruncate\fR(),
+several functions originally derived from the ISO\ C standard, such as
+\fIfwrite\fR(),
+\fIfprintf\fR(),
+and so on, may do so (by causing calls on
+\fIwrite\fR()).
+.P
+An invalid file offset that would cause
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+to be returned may be both implementation-defined and
+device-dependent (for example, memory may have few invalid values). A
+negative file offset may be valid for some devices in some
+implementations.
+.P
+The POSIX.1\(hy1990 standard did not specifically prohibit
+\fIlseek\fR()
+from returning a negative offset. Therefore, an application was
+required to clear
+.IR errno
+prior to the call and check
+.IR errno
+upon return to determine whether a return value of (\c
+.BR off_t )\(mi1
+is a negative offset or an indication of an error condition. The
+standard developers did not wish to require this action on the part of
+a conforming application, and chose to require that
+.IR errno
+be set to
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+when the resulting file offset would be negative for a regular file,
+block special file, or directory.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lstat.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lstat.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fdfee8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/lstat.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH LSTAT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+lstat
+\(em get file status
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+int lstat(const char *restrict \fIpath\fP, struct stat *restrict \fIbuf\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfstatat\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/malloc.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/malloc.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f9c0f1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/malloc.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MALLOC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+malloc
+\(em a memory allocator
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+void *malloc(size_t \fIsize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fImalloc\fR()
+function shall allocate unused space for an object whose size in
+bytes is specified by
+.IR size
+and whose value is unspecified.
+.P
+The order and contiguity of storage allocated by successive calls to
+\fImalloc\fR()
+is unspecified. The pointer returned if the allocation succeeds shall
+be suitably aligned so that it may be assigned to a pointer to any type
+of object and then used to access such an object in the space allocated
+(until the space is explicitly freed or reallocated). Each such
+allocation shall yield a pointer to an object disjoint from any other
+object. The pointer returned points to the start (lowest byte address)
+of the allocated space. If the space cannot be allocated, a null
+pointer shall be returned. If the size of the space requested is 0, the
+behavior is implementation-defined: the value returned shall be either
+a null pointer or a unique pointer.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion with
+.IR size
+not equal to 0,
+\fImalloc\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the allocated space. If
+.IR size
+is 0, either a null pointer or a unique pointer that can be
+successfully passed to
+\fIfree\fR()
+shall be returned. Otherwise, it shall return a null pointer
+and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImalloc\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient storage space is available.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcalloc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfree\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetrlimit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_memalign\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrealloc\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mblen.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mblen.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3361050
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mblen.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MBLEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mblen
+\(em get number of bytes in a character
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+int mblen(const char *\fIs\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+If
+.IR s
+is not a null pointer,
+\fImblen\fR()
+shall determine the number of bytes constituting the character
+pointed to by
+.IR s .
+Except that the shift state of
+\fImbtowc\fR()
+is not affected, it shall be equivalent to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+mbtowc((wchar_t *)0, \fIs\fP, \fIn\fP);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The implementation shall behave as if no function defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+calls
+\fImblen\fR().
+.P
+The behavior of this function is affected by the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category of the current locale. For a state-dependent encoding, this
+function shall be placed into its initial state by a call for which its
+character pointer argument,
+.IR s ,
+is a null pointer. Subsequent calls with
+.IR s
+as other than a null pointer shall cause the internal state of the
+function to be altered as necessary. A call with
+.IR s
+as a null pointer shall cause this function to return a non-zero value
+if encodings have state dependency, and 0 otherwise. If the
+implementation employs special bytes to change the shift state, these
+bytes shall not produce separate wide-character codes, but shall be
+grouped with an adjacent character. Changing the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category causes the shift state of this function to be unspecified.
+.P
+The
+\fImblen\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If
+.IR s
+is a null pointer,
+\fImblen\fR()
+shall return a non-zero or 0 value, if character encodings,
+respectively, do or do not have state-dependent encodings. If
+.IR s
+is not a null pointer,
+\fImblen\fR()
+shall either return 0 (if
+.IR s
+points to the null byte), or return the number of bytes that
+constitute the character (if the next
+.IR n
+or fewer bytes form a valid character), or return \(mi1 (if they do
+not form a valid character)
+and may set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+In no case shall the value returned be greater than
+.IR n
+or the value of the
+{MB_CUR_MAX}
+macro.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImblen\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EILSEQ
+An invalid character sequence is detected.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImbtowc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbstowcs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwctomb\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcstombs\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mbrlen.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mbrlen.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..166e1f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mbrlen.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MBRLEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mbrlen
+\(em get number of bytes in a character (restartable)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+size_t mbrlen(const char *restrict \fIs\fP, size_t \fIn\fP,
+    mbstate_t *restrict \fIps\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+If
+.IR s
+is not a null pointer,
+\fImbrlen\fR()
+shall determine the number of bytes constituting the character pointed
+to by
+.IR s .
+It shall be equivalent to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+mbstate_t internal;
+mbrtowc(NULL, s, n, ps != NULL ? ps : &internal);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.IR ps
+is a null pointer, the
+\fImbrlen\fR()
+function shall use its own internal
+.BR mbstate_t
+object, which is initialized at program start-up to the initial
+conversion state. Otherwise, the
+.BR mbstate_t
+object pointed to by
+.IR ps
+shall be used to completely describe the current conversion state of
+the associated character sequence. The implementation shall behave as
+if no function defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 calls
+\fImbrlen\fR().
+.P
+The behavior of this function is affected by the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category of the current locale.
+.P
+The
+\fImbrlen\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe if called with a NULL
+.IR ps
+argument.
+.P
+The
+\fImbrlen\fR()
+function shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fImbrlen\fR()
+function shall return the first of the following that applies:
+.IP 0 12
+If the next
+.IR n
+or fewer bytes complete the character that corresponds to the null
+wide character.
+.IP "\fIpositive\fP" 12
+If the next
+.IR n
+or fewer bytes complete a valid character; the value returned shall
+be the number of bytes that complete the character.
+.IP "(\fBsize_t\fP)\(mi2" 12
+If the next
+.IR n
+bytes contribute to an incomplete but potentially valid character, and
+all
+.IR n
+bytes have been processed. When
+.IR n
+has at least the value of the
+{MB_CUR_MAX}
+macro, this case can only occur if
+.IR s
+points at a sequence of redundant shift sequences (for implementations
+with state-dependent encodings).
+.IP "(\fBsize_t\fP)\(mi1" 12
+If an encoding error occurs, in which case the next
+.IR n
+or fewer bytes do not contribute to a complete and valid character. In
+this case,
+.BR [EILSEQ] 
+shall be stored in
+.IR errno
+and the conversion state is undefined.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImbrlen\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EILSEQ
+An invalid character sequence is detected.
+.P
+The
+\fImbrlen\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+.IR ps
+points to an object that contains an invalid conversion state.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImbsinit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbrtowc\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mbrtowc.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mbrtowc.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4bc37de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mbrtowc.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,180 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MBRTOWC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mbrtowc
+\(em convert a character to a wide-character code (restartable)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+size_t mbrtowc(wchar_t *restrict \fIpwc\fP, const char *restrict \fIs\fP,
+    size_t \fIn\fP, mbstate_t *restrict \fIps\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+If
+.IR s
+is a null pointer, the
+\fImbrtowc\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the call:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+mbrtowc(NULL, "", 1, ps)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In this case, the values of the arguments
+.IR pwc
+and
+.IR n
+are ignored.
+.P
+If
+.IR s
+is not a null pointer, the
+\fImbrtowc\fR()
+function shall inspect at most
+.IR n
+bytes beginning at the byte pointed to by
+.IR s
+to determine the number of bytes needed to complete the next character
+(including any shift sequences). If the function determines that the
+next character is completed, it shall determine the value of the
+corresponding wide character and then, if
+.IR pwc
+is not a null pointer, shall store that value in the object pointed to by
+.IR pwc .
+If the corresponding wide character is the null wide character, the
+resulting state described shall be the initial conversion state.
+.P
+If
+.IR ps
+is a null pointer, the
+\fImbrtowc\fR()
+function shall use its own internal
+.BR mbstate_t
+object, which shall be initialized at program start-up to the initial
+conversion state. Otherwise, the
+.BR mbstate_t
+object pointed to by
+.IR ps
+shall be used to completely describe the current conversion state of
+the associated character sequence. The implementation shall behave as
+if no function defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 calls
+\fImbrtowc\fR().
+.P
+The behavior of this function is affected by the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category of the current locale.
+.P
+The
+\fImbrtowc\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe if called with a NULL
+.IR ps
+argument.
+.P
+The
+\fImbrtowc\fR()
+function shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fImbrtowc\fR()
+function shall return the first of the following that applies:
+.IP 0 12
+If the next
+.IR n
+or fewer bytes complete the character that corresponds to the null wide
+character (which is the value stored).
+.IP "between 1 and \fIn\fR inclusive" 12
+.br
+If the next
+.IR n
+or fewer bytes complete a valid character (which is the value stored);
+the value returned shall be the number of bytes that complete the
+character.
+.IP "(\fBsize_t\fP)\(mi2" 12
+If the next
+.IR n
+bytes contribute to an incomplete but potentially valid character, and
+all
+.IR n
+bytes have been processed (no value is stored). When
+.IR n
+has at least the value of the
+{MB_CUR_MAX}
+macro, this case can only occur if
+.IR s
+points at a sequence of redundant shift sequences (for implementations
+with state-dependent encodings).
+.IP "(\fBsize_t\fP)\(mi1" 12
+If an encoding error occurs, in which case the next
+.IR n
+or fewer bytes do not contribute to a complete and valid character (no
+value is stored). In this case,
+.BR [EILSEQ] 
+shall be stored in
+.IR errno
+and the conversion state is undefined.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImbrtowc\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EILSEQ
+An invalid character sequence is detected.
+.P
+The
+\fImbrtowc\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+.IR ps
+points to an object that contains an invalid conversion state.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImbsinit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbsrtowcs\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mbsinit.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mbsinit.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fc02d2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mbsinit.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MBSINIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mbsinit
+\(em determine conversion object status
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int mbsinit(const mbstate_t *\fIps\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+If
+.IR ps
+is not a null pointer, the
+\fImbsinit\fR()
+function shall determine whether the object pointed to by
+.IR ps
+describes an initial conversion state.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fImbsinit\fR()
+function shall return non-zero if
+.IR ps
+is a null pointer, or if the pointed-to object describes an initial
+conversion state; otherwise, it shall return zero.
+.P
+If an
+.BR mbstate_t
+object is altered by any of the functions described as ``restartable'',
+and is then used with a different character sequence, or in the other
+conversion direction, or with a different
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category setting than on earlier function calls, the behavior is undefined.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.BR mbstate_t
+object is used to describe the current conversion state from a
+particular character sequence to a wide-character sequence (or \fIvice
+versa\fP) under the rules of a particular setting of the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category of the current locale.
+.P
+The initial conversion state corresponds, for a conversion in either
+direction, to the beginning of a new character sequence in the initial
+shift state. A zero valued
+.BR mbstate_t
+object is at least one way to describe an initial conversion state. A
+zero valued
+.BR mbstate_t
+object can be used to initiate conversion involving any character
+sequence, in any
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category setting.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImbrlen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbrtowc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbsrtowcs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcrtomb\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcsrtombs\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mbsrtowcs.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mbsrtowcs.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c9afaca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mbsrtowcs.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,168 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MBSRTOWCS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mbsnrtowcs, mbsrtowcs
+\(em convert a character string to a wide-character string (restartable)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+size_t mbsnrtowcs(wchar_t *restrict \fIdst\fP, const char **restrict \fIsrc\fP,
+    size_t \fInmc\fP, size_t \fIlen\fP, mbstate_t *restrict \fIps\fP);
+size_t mbsrtowcs(wchar_t *restrict \fIdst\fP, const char **restrict \fIsrc\fP,
+    size_t \fIlen\fP, mbstate_t *restrict \fIps\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fImbsrtowcs\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fImbsrtowcs\fR()
+function shall convert a sequence of characters, beginning in the
+conversion state described by the object pointed to by
+.IR ps ,
+from the array indirectly pointed to by
+.IR src
+into a sequence of corresponding wide characters. If
+.IR dst
+is not a null pointer, the converted characters shall be stored into
+the array pointed to by
+.IR dst .
+Conversion continues up to and including a terminating null character,
+which shall also be stored. Conversion shall stop early in either of
+the following cases:
+.IP " *" 4
+A sequence of bytes is encountered that does not form a valid character.
+.IP " *" 4
+.IR len
+codes have been stored into the array pointed to by
+.IR dst
+(and
+.IR dst
+is not a null pointer).
+.P
+Each conversion shall take place as if by a call to the
+\fImbrtowc\fR()
+function.
+.P
+If
+.IR dst
+is not a null pointer, the pointer object pointed to by
+.IR src
+shall be assigned either a null pointer (if conversion stopped due to
+reaching a terminating null character) or the address just past the
+last character converted (if any). If conversion stopped due to
+reaching a terminating null character, and if
+.IR dst
+is not a null pointer, the resulting state described shall be the
+initial conversion state.
+.P
+If
+.IR ps
+is a null pointer, the
+\fImbsrtowcs\fR()
+function shall use its own internal
+.BR mbstate_t
+object, which is initialized at program start-up to the initial
+conversion state. Otherwise, the
+.BR mbstate_t
+object pointed to by
+.IR ps
+shall be used to completely describe the current conversion state of
+the associated character sequence.
+.P
+The
+\fImbsnrtowcs\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fImbsrtowcs\fR()
+function, except that the conversion of characters pointed to by
+.IR src
+is limited to at most
+.IR nmc
+bytes (the size of the input buffer).
+.P
+The behavior of these functions shall be affected by the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category of the current locale.
+.P
+The implementation shall behave as if no function defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+calls these functions.
+.P
+The
+\fImbsnrtowcs\fR()
+and
+\fImbsrtowcs\fR()
+functions need not be thread-safe if called with a NULL
+.IR ps
+argument.
+.P
+The
+\fImbsrtowcs\fR()
+function shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the input conversion encounters a sequence of bytes that do not form
+a valid character, an encoding error occurs. In this case, these
+functions shall store the value of the macro
+.BR [EILSEQ] 
+in
+.IR errno
+and shall return (\fBsize_t\fP)\(mi1; the conversion state is undefined.
+Otherwise, these functions shall return the number of characters
+successfully converted, not including the terminating null (if any).
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EILSEQ
+An invalid character sequence is detected.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+.IR ps
+points to an object that contains an invalid conversion state.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIiconv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbrtowc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbsinit\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mbstowcs.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mbstowcs.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0c8c54d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mbstowcs.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MBSTOWCS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mbstowcs
+\(em convert a character string to a wide-character string
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+size_t mbstowcs(wchar_t *restrict \fIpwcs\fP, const char *restrict \fIs\fP,
+    size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fImbstowcs\fR()
+function shall convert a sequence of characters that begins in the
+initial shift state from the array pointed to by
+.IR s
+into a sequence of corresponding wide-character codes and shall store
+not more than
+.IR n
+wide-character codes into the array pointed to by
+.IR pwcs .
+No characters that follow a null byte (which is converted into a
+wide-character code with value 0) shall be examined or converted. Each
+character shall be converted as if by a call to
+\fImbtowc\fR(),
+except that the shift state of
+\fImbtowc\fR()
+is not affected.
+.P
+No more than
+.IR n
+elements shall be modified in the array pointed to by
+.IR pwcs .
+If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
+undefined.
+.P
+The behavior of this function shall be affected by the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category of the current locale.
+If
+.IR pwcs
+is a null pointer,
+\fImbstowcs\fR()
+shall return the length required to convert the entire array regardless
+of the value of
+.IR n ,
+but no values are stored.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If an invalid character is encountered,
+\fImbstowcs\fR()
+shall return (\fBsize_t\fP)\(mi1
+and shall set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.P
+Otherwise,
+\fImbstowcs\fR()
+shall return the number of the array elements modified
+(or required if
+.IR pwcs
+is null),
+not including a terminating 0 code, if any. The array shall
+not be zero-terminated if the value returned is
+.IR n .
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImbstowcs\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EILSEQ
+An invalid byte sequence is detected.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImblen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbtowc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwctomb\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcstombs\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mbtowc.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mbtowc.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b1488cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mbtowc.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MBTOWC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mbtowc
+\(em convert a character to a wide-character code
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+int mbtowc(wchar_t *restrict \fIpwc\fP, const char *restrict \fIs\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+If
+.IR s
+is not a null pointer,
+\fImbtowc\fR()
+shall determine the number of bytes that constitute the character
+pointed to by
+.IR s .
+It shall then determine the wide-character code for the value of type
+.BR wchar_t
+that corresponds to that character. (The value of the wide-character
+code corresponding to the null byte is 0.) If the character is valid
+and
+.IR pwc
+is not a null pointer,
+\fImbtowc\fR()
+shall store the wide-character code in the object pointed to by
+.IR pwc .
+.P
+The behavior of this function is affected by the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category of the current locale. For a state-dependent encoding, this
+function is placed into its initial state by a call for which its
+character pointer argument,
+.IR s ,
+is a null pointer. Subsequent calls with
+.IR s
+as other than a null pointer shall cause the internal state of the
+function to be altered as necessary. A call with
+.IR s
+as a null pointer shall cause this function to return a non-zero value
+if encodings have state dependency, and 0 otherwise. If the
+implementation employs special bytes to change the shift state, these
+bytes shall not produce separate wide-character codes, but shall be
+grouped with an adjacent character. Changing the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category causes the shift state of this function to be unspecified. At
+most
+.IR n
+bytes of the array pointed to by
+.IR s
+shall be examined.
+.P
+The implementation shall behave as if no function defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 calls
+\fImbtowc\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fImbtowc\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If
+.IR s
+is a null pointer,
+\fImbtowc\fR()
+shall return a non-zero or 0 value, if character encodings, respectively,
+do or do not have state-dependent encodings. If
+.IR s
+is not a null pointer,
+\fImbtowc\fR()
+shall either return 0 (if
+.IR s
+points to the null byte), or return the number of bytes that constitute
+the converted character (if the next
+.IR n
+or fewer bytes form a valid character), or return \(mi1
+and shall set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error
+(if they do not form a valid character).
+.P
+In no case shall the value returned be greater than
+.IR n
+or the value of the
+{MB_CUR_MAX}
+macro.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImbtowc\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EILSEQ
+An invalid character sequence is detected.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImblen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbstowcs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwctomb\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcstombs\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/memccpy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/memccpy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e286dc3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/memccpy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MEMCCPY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+memccpy
+\(em copy bytes in memory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+void *memccpy(void *restrict \fIs1\fP, const void *restrict \fIs2\fP,
+    int \fIc\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImemccpy\fR()
+function shall copy bytes from memory area
+.IR s2
+into
+.IR s1 ,
+stopping after the first occurrence of byte
+.IR c
+(converted to an
+.BR "unsigned char" )
+is copied, or after
+.IR n
+bytes are copied, whichever comes first. If copying takes place
+between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fImemccpy\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to the byte after the copy of
+.IR c
+in
+.IR s1 ,
+or a null pointer if
+.IR c
+was not found in the first
+.IR n
+bytes of
+.IR s2 .
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fImemccpy\fR()
+function does not check for the overflow of the receiving memory area.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/memchr.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/memchr.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5cf2c49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/memchr.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MEMCHR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+memchr
+\(em find byte in memory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+void *memchr(const void *\fIs\fP, int \fIc\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fImemchr\fR()
+function shall locate the first occurrence of
+.IR c
+(converted to an
+.BR "unsigned char" )
+in the initial
+.IR n
+bytes (each interpreted as
+.BR "unsigned char" )
+pointed to by
+.IR s .
+.P
+Implementations shall behave as if they read the memory byte by byte
+from the beginning of the bytes pointed to by
+.IR s
+and stop at the first occurrence of
+.IR c
+(if it is found in the initial
+.IR n
+bytes).
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fImemchr\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to the located byte, or a null pointer
+if the byte is not found.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/memcmp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/memcmp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..283b6a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/memcmp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MEMCMP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+memcmp
+\(em compare bytes in memory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+int memcmp(const void *\fIs1\fP, const void *\fIs2\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fImemcmp\fR()
+function shall compare the first
+.IR n
+bytes (each interpreted as
+.BR "unsigned char" )
+of the object pointed to by
+.IR s1
+to the first
+.IR n
+bytes of the object pointed to by
+.IR s2 .
+.P
+The sign of a non-zero return value shall be determined by the sign of
+the difference between the values of the first pair of bytes (both
+interpreted as type
+.BR "unsigned char" )
+that differ in the objects being compared.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fImemcmp\fR()
+function shall return an integer greater than, equal to, or less than
+0, if the object pointed to by
+.IR s1
+is greater than, equal to, or less than the object pointed to by
+.IR s2 ,
+respectively.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/memcpy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/memcpy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1cfb70f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/memcpy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MEMCPY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+memcpy
+\(em copy bytes in memory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+void *memcpy(void *restrict \fIs1\fP, const void *restrict \fIs2\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fImemcpy\fR()
+function shall copy
+.IR n
+bytes from the object pointed to by
+.IR s2
+into the object pointed to by
+.IR s1 .
+If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
+undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fImemcpy\fR()
+function shall return
+.IR s1 ;
+no return value is reserved to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fImemcpy\fR()
+function does not check for the overflow of the receiving memory
+area.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/memmove.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/memmove.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..05275f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/memmove.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MEMMOVE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+memmove
+\(em copy bytes in memory with overlapping areas
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+void *memmove(void *\fIs1\fP, const void *\fIs2\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fImemmove\fR()
+function shall copy
+.IR n
+bytes from the object pointed to by
+.IR s2
+into the object pointed to by
+.IR s1 .
+Copying takes place as if the
+.IR n
+bytes from the object pointed to by
+.IR s2
+are first copied into a temporary array of
+.IR n
+bytes that does not overlap the objects pointed to by
+.IR s1
+and
+.IR s2 ,
+and then the
+.IR n
+bytes from the temporary array are copied into the object pointed to by
+.IR s1 .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fImemmove\fR()
+function shall return
+.IR s1 ;
+no return value is reserved to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/memset.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/memset.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d6fb0e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/memset.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MEMSET "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+memset
+\(em set bytes in memory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+void *memset(void *\fIs\fP, int \fIc\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fImemset\fR()
+function shall copy
+.IR c
+(converted to an
+.BR "unsigned char" )
+into each of the first
+.IR n
+bytes of the object pointed to by
+.IR s .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fImemset\fR()
+function shall return
+.IR s ;
+no return value is reserved to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mkdir.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mkdir.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3eafad1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mkdir.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,250 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MKDIR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mkdir, mkdirat
+\(em make a directory relative to directory file descriptor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+int mkdir(const char *\fIpath\fP, mode_t \fImode\fP);
+int mkdirat(int \fIfd\fP, const char *\fIpath\fP, mode_t \fImode\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImkdir\fR()
+function shall create a new directory with name
+.IR path .
+The file permission bits of the new directory shall be initialized from
+.IR mode .
+These file permission bits of the
+.IR mode
+argument shall be modified by the process' file creation mask.
+.P
+When bits in
+.IR mode
+other than the file permission bits are set, the meaning of these
+additional bits is implementation-defined.
+.P
+The directory's user ID shall be set to the process' effective user ID.
+The directory's group ID shall be set to the group ID of the parent
+directory or to the effective group ID of the process. Implementations
+shall provide a way to initialize the directory's group ID to the group
+ID of the parent directory. Implementations may, but need not, provide
+an implementation-defined way to initialize the directory's group ID to
+the effective group ID of the calling process.
+.P
+The newly created directory shall be an empty directory.
+.P
+If
+.IR path
+names a symbolic link,
+\fImkdir\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EEXIST] .
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fImkdir\fR()
+shall mark for update the last data access, last data modification,
+and last file status change timestamps of the directory. Also, the last
+data modification and last file status change timestamps of the directory
+that contains the new entry shall be marked for update.
+.P
+The
+\fImkdirat\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fImkdir\fR()
+function except in the case where
+.IR path
+specifies a relative path. In this case the newly created directory is
+created relative to the directory associated with the file descriptor
+.IR fd
+instead of the current working directory. If the file descriptor was
+opened without O_SEARCH, the function shall check whether directory
+searches are permitted using the current permissions of the directory
+underlying the file descriptor. If the file descriptor was opened with
+O_SEARCH, the function shall not perform the check.
+.P
+If
+\fImkdirat\fR()
+is passed the special value AT_FDCWD in the
+.IR fd
+parameter, the current working directory shall be used and the behavior
+shall be identical to a call to
+\fImkdir\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return 0.
+Otherwise, these functions shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error. If \(mi1 is returned, no directory shall be created.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied on a component of the path prefix, or write
+permission is denied on the parent directory of the directory to be
+created.
+.TP
+.BR EEXIST
+The named file exists.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR EMLINK
+The link count of the parent directory would exceed
+{LINK_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of the path prefix specified by
+.IR path
+does not name an existing directory or
+.IR path
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+The file system does not contain enough space to hold the contents of
+the new directory or to extend the parent directory of the new
+directory.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+The parent directory resides on a read-only file system.
+.P
+In addition, the
+\fImkdirat\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR path
+argument does not specify an absolute path and the
+.IR fd
+argument is neither AT_FDCWD nor a valid file descriptor open for reading
+or searching.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+The
+.IR path
+argument is not an absolute path and
+.IR fd
+is a file descriptor associated with a non-directory file.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Creating a Directory"
+.P
+The following example shows how to create a directory named
+.BR /home/cnd/mod1 ,
+with read/write/search permissions for owner and group, and with
+read/search permissions for others.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+int status;
+\&...
+status = mkdir("/home/cnd/mod1", S_IRWXU | S_IRWXG | S_IROTH | S_IXOTH);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fImkdir\fR()
+function originated in 4.2 BSD and was added to System V in Release 3.0.
+.P
+4.3 BSD detects
+.BR [ENAMETOOLONG] .
+.P
+The POSIX.1\(hy1990 standard required that the group ID of a newly created directory be
+set to the group ID of its parent directory or to the effective group
+ID of the creating process. FIPS 151\(hy2 required that implementations provide
+a way to have the group ID be set to the group ID of the containing
+directory, but did not prohibit implementations also supporting a way
+to set the group ID to the effective group ID of the creating process.
+Conforming applications should not assume which group ID will be used. If
+it matters, an application can use
+\fIchown\fR()
+to set the group ID after the directory is created, or determine under
+what conditions the implementation will set the desired group ID.
+.P
+The purpose of the
+\fImkdirat\fR()
+function is to create a directory in directories other than the
+current working directory without exposure to race conditions. Any part
+of the path of a file could be changed in parallel to the call to
+\fImkdir\fR(),
+resulting in unspecified behavior. By opening a file descriptor for
+the target directory and using the
+\fImkdirat\fR()
+function it can be guaranteed that the newly created directory is
+located relative to the desired directory.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImkdtemp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImknod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIumask\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mkdtemp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mkdtemp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0a6b2bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mkdtemp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,215 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MKDTEMP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mkdtemp, mkstemp
+\(em create a unique directory or file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+char *mkdtemp(char *\fItemplate\fP);
+int mkstemp(char *\fItemplate\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImkdtemp\fR()
+function uses the contents of
+.IR template
+to construct a unique directory name. The string provided in
+.IR template
+shall be a pathname ending with six trailing
+.BR 'X' s.
+The
+\fImkdtemp\fR()
+function shall replace each
+.BR 'X' 
+with a character from the portable filename character set. The
+characters are chosen such that the resulting name does not duplicate
+the name of an existing file at the time of a call to
+\fImkdtemp\fR().
+The unique directory name is used to attempt to create the directory
+using mode 0700 as modified by the file creation mask.
+.P
+The
+\fImkstemp\fR()
+function shall replace the contents of the string pointed to by
+.IR template
+by a unique pathname, and return a file descriptor for the file open
+for reading and writing. The
+\fImkstemp\fR()
+function shall create the file, and obtain a file descriptor for it,
+as if by a call to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+open(pathname, O_RDWR|O_CREAT|O_EXCL, S_IRUSR|S_IWUSR)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The function thus prevents any possible race condition between testing
+whether the file exists and opening it for use. The string in
+.IR template
+should look like a pathname with six trailing
+.BR 'X' s;
+\fImkstemp\fR()
+replaces each
+.BR 'X' 
+with a character from the portable filename character set. The
+characters are chosen such that the resulting name does not duplicate
+the name of an existing file at the time of a call to
+\fImkstemp\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fImkdtemp\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to the string containing the directory
+name if it was created. Otherwise, it shall return a null pointer and
+shall set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.P
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fImkstemp\fR()
+function shall return an open file descriptor. Otherwise, it shall
+return \(mi1 if no suitable file could be created.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImkdtemp\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied on a component of the path prefix, or write
+permission is denied on the parent directory of the directory to be
+created.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The string pointed to by
+.IR template
+does not end in
+.BR \(dqXXXXXX\(dq .
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+path of the directory to be created.
+.TP
+.BR EMLINK
+The link count of the parent directory would exceed
+{LINK_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of the path prefix specified by the
+.IR template
+argument does not name an existing directory.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+The file system does not contain enough space to hold the contents of
+the new directory or to extend the parent directory of the new
+directory.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+The parent directory resides on a read-only file system.
+.P
+The
+\fImkdtemp\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the path of the
+directory to be created.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.P
+The error conditions for the
+\fImkstemp\fR()
+function are defined in
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Generating a Pathname"
+.P
+The following example creates a file with a 10-character name beginning
+with the characters
+.BR \(dqfile\(dq 
+and opens the file for reading and writing. The value returned as the
+value of
+.IR fd
+is a file descriptor that identifies the file.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdlib.h>
+\&...
+char template[] = "/tmp/fileXXXXXX";
+int fd;
+.P
+fd = mkstemp(template);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+It is possible to run out of letters.
+.P
+The
+\fImkdtemp\fR()
+and
+\fImkstemp\fR()
+functions need not check to determine whether the filename part of
+.IR template
+exceeds the maximum allowable filename length.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetpid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImkdir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItmpfile\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItmpnam\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mkfifo.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mkfifo.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2f7917b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mkfifo.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,273 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MKFIFO "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mkfifo, mkfifoat
+\(em make a FIFO special file relative to directory file descriptor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+int mkfifo(const char *\fIpath\fP, mode_t \fImode\fP);
+int mkfifoat(int \fIfd\fP, const char *\fIpath\fP, mode_t \fImode\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImkfifo\fR()
+function shall create a new FIFO special file named by the pathname
+pointed to by
+.IR path .
+The file permission bits of the new FIFO shall be initialized from
+.IR mode .
+The file permission bits of the
+.IR mode
+argument shall be modified by the process' file creation mask.
+.P
+When bits in
+.IR mode
+other than the file permission bits are set, the effect is
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+If
+.IR path
+names a symbolic link,
+\fImkfifo\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EEXIST] .
+.P
+The FIFO's user ID shall be set to the process' effective user ID. The
+FIFO's group ID shall be set to the group ID of the parent directory or
+to the effective group ID of the process. Implementations shall provide
+a way to initialize the FIFO's group ID to the group ID of the parent
+directory. Implementations may, but need not, provide an
+implementation-defined way to initialize the FIFO's group ID to the
+effective group ID of the calling process.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fImkfifo\fR()
+shall mark for update the last data access, last data modification,
+and last file status change timestamps of the file. Also, the last
+data modification and last file status change timestamps of the directory
+that contains the new entry shall be marked for update.
+.P
+The
+\fImkfifoat\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fImkfifo\fR()
+function except in the case where
+.IR path
+specifies a relative path. In this case the newly created FIFO is
+created relative to the directory associated with the file descriptor
+.IR fd
+instead of the current working directory. If the file descriptor was
+opened without O_SEARCH, the function shall check whether directory
+searches are permitted using the current permissions of the directory
+underlying the file descriptor. If the file descriptor was opened with
+O_SEARCH, the function shall not perform the check.
+.P
+If
+\fImkfifoat\fR()
+is passed the special value AT_FDCWD in the
+.IR fd
+parameter, the current working directory shall be used and the behavior
+shall be identical to a call to
+\fImkfifo\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return 0.
+Otherwise, these functions shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error. If \(mi1 is returned, no FIFO shall be created.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+A component of the path prefix denies search permission, or write
+permission is denied on the parent directory of the FIFO to be
+created.
+.TP
+.BR EEXIST
+The named file already exists.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of the path prefix of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR path
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT " or " ENOTDIR
+.br
+The
+.IR path
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters. If
+.IR path
+names an existing file, an
+.BR [ENOENT] 
+error shall not occur.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+The directory that would contain the new file cannot be extended or the
+file system is out of file-allocation resources.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+The named file resides on a read-only file system.
+.P
+The
+\fImkfifoat\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+.IR fd
+was not opened with O_SEARCH and the permissions of the directory
+underlying
+.IR fd
+do not permit directory searches.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR path
+argument does not specify an absolute path and the
+.IR fd
+argument is neither AT_FDCWD nor a valid file descriptor open
+for reading or searching.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+The
+.IR path
+argument is not an absolute path and
+.IR fd
+is a file descriptor associated with a non-directory file.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Creating a FIFO File"
+.P
+The following example shows how to create a FIFO file named
+.BR /home/cnd/mod_done ,
+with read/write permissions for owner, and with read permissions for
+group and others.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+int status;
+\&...
+status = mkfifo("/home/cnd/mod_done", S_IWUSR | S_IRUSR |
+    S_IRGRP | S_IROTH);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The syntax of this function is intended to maintain compatibility with
+historical implementations of
+\fImknod\fR().
+The latter function was included in the 1984 /usr/group standard but only for use in
+creating FIFO special files. The
+\fImknod\fR()
+function was originally excluded from the POSIX.1\(hy1988 standard as
+implementation-defined and replaced by
+\fImkdir\fR()
+and
+\fImkfifo\fR().
+The
+\fImknod\fR()
+function is now included for alignment with the Single UNIX Specification.
+.P
+The POSIX.1\(hy1990 standard required that the group ID of a newly created FIFO be
+set to the group ID of its parent directory or to the effective group
+ID of the creating process. FIPS 151\(hy2 required that implementations provide
+a way to have the group ID be set to the group ID of the containing
+directory, but did not prohibit implementations also supporting a way
+to set the group ID to the effective group ID of the creating process.
+Conforming applications should not assume which group ID will be used. If
+it matters, an application can use
+\fIchown\fR()
+to set the group ID after the FIFO is created, or determine under
+what conditions the implementation will set the desired group ID.
+.P
+The purpose of the
+\fImkfifoat\fR()
+function is to create a FIFO special file in directories other than
+the current working directory without exposure to race conditions. Any
+part of the path of a file could be changed in parallel to a call to
+\fImkfifo\fR(),
+resulting in unspecified behavior. By opening a file descriptor for
+the target directory and using the
+\fImkfifoat\fR()
+function it can be guaranteed that the newly created FIFO is located
+relative to the desired directory.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImknod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIumask\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mknod.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mknod.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e05d447
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mknod.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,336 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MKNOD "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mknod, mknodat
+\(em make directory, special file, or regular file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+int mknod(const char *\fIpath\fP, mode_t \fImode\fP, dev_t \fIdev\fP);
+int mknodat(int \fIfd\fP, const char *\fIpath\fP, mode_t \fImode\fP, dev_t \fIdev\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImknod\fR()
+function shall create a new file named by the pathname to which the
+argument
+.IR path
+points.
+.P
+The file type for
+.IR path
+is OR'ed into the
+.IR mode
+argument, and the application shall select one of the following
+symbolic constants:
+.TS
+tab(!) box center;
+cB | cB
+lw(1i) | lw(3i).
+Name!Description
+_
+S_IFIFO!FIFO-special
+S_IFCHR!Character-special (non-portable)
+S_IFDIR!Directory (non-portable)
+S_IFBLK!Block-special (non-portable)
+S_IFREG!Regular (non-portable)
+.TE
+.P
+The only portable use of
+\fImknod\fR()
+is to create a FIFO-special file. If
+.IR mode
+is not S_IFIFO or
+.IR dev
+is not 0, the behavior of
+\fImknod\fR()
+is unspecified.
+.P
+The permissions for the new file are OR'ed into the
+.IR mode
+argument, and may be selected from any combination of the following
+symbolic constants:
+.TS
+tab(!) box center;
+cB | cB
+lw(1i) | lw(3i).
+Name!Description
+_
+S_ISUID!Set user ID on execution.
+S_ISGID!Set group ID on execution.
+S_IRWXU!Read, write, or execute (search) by owner.
+S_IRUSR!Read by owner.
+S_IWUSR!Write by owner.
+S_IXUSR!Execute (search) by owner.
+S_IRWXG!Read, write, or execute (search) by group.
+S_IRGRP!Read by group.
+S_IWGRP!Write by group.
+S_IXGRP!Execute (search) by group.
+S_IRWXO!Read, write, or execute (search) by others.
+S_IROTH!Read by others.
+S_IWOTH!Write by others.
+S_IXOTH!Execute (search) by others.
+S_ISVTX!On directories, restricted deletion flag.
+.TE
+.P
+The user ID of the file shall be initialized to the effective user ID
+of the process. The group ID of the file shall be initialized to either
+the effective group ID of the process or the group ID of the parent
+directory. Implementations shall provide a way to initialize the file's
+group ID to the group ID of the parent directory. Implementations may,
+but need not, provide an implementation-defined way to initialize the
+file's group ID to the effective group ID of the calling process. The
+owner, group, and other permission bits of
+.IR mode
+shall be modified by the file mode creation mask of the process. The
+\fImknod\fR()
+function shall clear each bit whose corresponding bit in the file mode
+creation mask of the process is set.
+.P
+If
+.IR path
+names a symbolic link,
+\fImknod\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EEXIST] .
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fImknod\fR()
+shall mark for update the last data access, last data modification,
+and last file status change timestamps of the file. Also, the last
+data modification and last file status change timestamps of the directory
+that contains the new entry shall be marked for update.
+.P
+Only a process with appropriate privileges may invoke
+\fImknod\fR()
+for file types other than FIFO-special.
+.P
+The
+\fImknodat\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fImknod\fR()
+function except in the case where
+.IR path
+specifies a relative path. In this case the newly created
+directory, special file, or regular file is located relative to the
+directory associated with the file descriptor
+.IR fd
+instead of the current working directory. If the file descriptor was
+opened without O_SEARCH, the function shall check whether directory
+searches are permitted using the current permissions of the directory
+underlying the file descriptor. If the file descriptor was opened with
+O_SEARCH, the function shall not perform the check.
+.P
+If
+\fImknodat\fR()
+is passed the special value AT_FDCWD in the
+.IR fd
+parameter, the current working directory shall be used and the behavior
+shall be identical to a call to
+\fImknod\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return 0.
+Otherwise, these functions shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error. If \(mi1 is returned, the new file shall
+not be created.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+A component of the path prefix denies search permission, or write
+permission is denied on the parent directory.
+.TP
+.BR EEXIST
+The named file exists.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+An invalid argument exists.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while accessing the file system.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of the path prefix of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR path
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT " or " ENOTDIR
+.br
+The
+.IR path
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters. If
+.IR path
+names an existing file, an
+.BR [ENOENT] 
+error shall not occur.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+The directory that would contain the new file cannot be extended or the
+file system is out of file allocation resources.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The invoking process does not have appropriate privileges and the
+file type is not FIFO-special.
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+The directory in which the file is to be created is located on a
+read-only file system.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fImknodat\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+.IR fd
+was not opened with O_SEARCH and the permissions of the directory
+underlying
+.IR fd
+do not permit directory searches.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR path
+argument does not specify an absolute path and the
+.IR fd
+argument is neither AT_FDCWD nor a valid file descriptor open
+for reading or searching.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+The
+.IR path
+argument is not an absolute path and
+.IR fd
+is a file descriptor associated with a non-directory file.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Creating a FIFO Special File"
+.P
+The following example shows how to create a FIFO special file named
+.BR /home/cnd/mod_done ,
+with read/write permissions for owner, and with read permissions for
+group and others.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+dev_t dev;
+int   status;
+\&...
+status  = mknod("/home/cnd/mod_done", S_IFIFO | S_IWUSR |
+    S_IRUSR | S_IRGRP | S_IROTH, dev);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fImkfifo\fR()
+function is preferred over this function for making FIFO special files.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The POSIX.1\(hy1990 standard required that the group ID of a newly created file be
+set to the group ID of its parent directory or to the effective group
+ID of the creating process. FIPS 151\(hy2 required that implementations provide
+a way to have the group ID be set to the group ID of the containing
+directory, but did not prohibit implementations also supporting a way
+to set the group ID to the effective group ID of the creating process.
+Conforming applications should not assume which group ID will be used. If
+it matters, an application can use
+\fIchown\fR()
+to set the group ID after the file is created, or determine under
+what conditions the implementation will set the desired group ID.
+.P
+The purpose of the
+\fImknodat\fR()
+function is to create directories, special files, or regular files in
+directories other than the current working directory without exposure
+to race conditions. Any part of the path of a file could be changed in
+parallel to a call to
+\fImknod\fR(),
+resulting in unspecified behavior. By opening a file descriptor for
+the target directory and using the
+\fImknodat\fR()
+function it can be guaranteed that the newly created directory, special
+file, or regular file is located relative to the desired directory.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcreat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfstatat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImkdir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImkfifo\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIumask\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mkstemp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mkstemp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..64d0fa6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mkstemp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MKSTEMP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mkstemp
+\(em create a unique directory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+int mkstemp(char *\fItemplate\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fImkdtemp\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mktime.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mktime.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f8f673a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mktime.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,175 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MKTIME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mktime
+\(em convert broken-down time into time since the Epoch
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+time_t mktime(struct tm *\fItimeptr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fImktime\fR()
+function shall convert the broken-down time, expressed as local time,
+in the structure pointed to by
+.IR timeptr ,
+into a time since the Epoch value with the same encoding as that of the
+values returned by
+\fItime\fR().
+The original values of the
+.IR tm_wday
+and
+.IR tm_yday
+components of the structure are ignored, and the original values
+of the other components are not restricted to the ranges
+described in
+.IR <time.h> .
+.P
+A positive or 0 value for
+.IR tm_isdst
+shall cause
+\fImktime\fR()
+to presume initially that Daylight Savings Time, respectively, is or is
+not in effect for the specified time. A negative value for
+.IR tm_isdst
+shall cause
+\fImktime\fR()
+to attempt to determine whether Daylight Savings Time is in effect for
+the specified time.
+.P
+Local timezone information shall be set as though
+\fImktime\fR()
+called
+\fItzset\fR().
+.P
+The relationship between the
+.BR tm
+structure (defined in the
+.IR <time.h> 
+header) and the time in seconds since the Epoch is that the result
+shall be as specified in the expression given in the definition of
+seconds since the Epoch (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.15" ", " "Seconds Since the Epoch")
+corrected for timezone and any seasonal time adjustments, where the
+names in the structure and in the expression correspond.
+.P
+Upon successful completion, the values of the
+.IR tm_wday
+and
+.IR tm_yday
+components of the structure shall be set appropriately, and the other
+components are set to represent the specified time since the Epoch, but
+with their values forced to the ranges indicated in the
+.IR <time.h> 
+entry; the final value of
+.IR tm_mday
+shall not be set until
+.IR tm_mon
+and
+.IR tm_year
+are determined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fImktime\fR()
+function shall return the specified time since the Epoch encoded as
+a value of type
+.BR time_t .
+If the time since the Epoch cannot be represented, the function shall
+return the value (\fBtime_t\fP)\(mi1
+and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImktime\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The result cannot be represented.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+What day of the week is July 4, 2001?
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+struct tm time_str;
+.P
+char daybuf[20];
+.P
+int main(void)
+{
+    time_str.tm_year = 2001 \(em 1900;
+    time_str.tm_mon = 7 \(em 1;
+    time_str.tm_mday = 4;
+    time_str.tm_hour = 0;
+    time_str.tm_min = 0;
+    time_str.tm_sec = 1;
+    time_str.tm_isdst = \(mi1;
+    if (mktime(&time_str) == -1)
+        (void)puts("-unknown-");
+    else {
+        (void)strftime(daybuf, sizeof(daybuf), "%A", &time_str);
+        (void)puts(daybuf);
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIasctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdifftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgmtime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlocaltime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrptime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItzset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIutime\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.15" ", " "Seconds Since the Epoch",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mlock.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mlock.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2eb4888
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mlock.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,168 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MLOCK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mlock,
+munlock
+\(em lock or unlock a range of process address space
+(\fBREALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/mman.h>
+.P
+int mlock(const void *\fIaddr\fP, size_t \fIlen\fP);
+int munlock(const void *\fIaddr\fP, size_t \fIlen\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImlock\fR()
+function shall cause those whole pages containing any part of the
+address space of the process starting at address
+.IR addr
+and continuing for
+.IR len
+bytes to be memory-resident until unlocked or until the process exits
+or
+.IR exec s
+another process image. The implementation may require that
+.IR addr
+be a multiple of
+{PAGESIZE}.
+.P
+The
+\fImunlock\fR()
+function shall unlock those whole pages containing any part of the
+address space of the process starting at address
+.IR addr
+and continuing for
+.IR len
+bytes, regardless of how many times
+\fImlock\fR()
+has been called by the process for any of the pages in the specified
+range. The implementation may require that
+.IR addr
+be a multiple of
+{PAGESIZE}.
+.P
+If any of the pages in the range specified to a call to
+\fImunlock\fR()
+are also mapped into the address spaces of other processes, any locks
+established on those pages by another process are unaffected by the
+call of this process to
+\fImunlock\fR().
+If any of the pages in the range specified by a call to
+\fImunlock\fR()
+are also mapped into other portions of the address space of the calling
+process outside the range specified, any locks established on those
+pages via the other mappings are also unaffected by this call.
+.P
+Upon successful return from
+\fImlock\fR(),
+pages in the specified range shall be locked and memory-resident. Upon
+successful return from
+\fImunlock\fR(),
+pages in the specified range shall be unlocked with respect to the
+address space of the process. Memory residency of unlocked pages is
+unspecified.
+.P
+Appropriate privileges are required to lock process memory with
+\fImlock\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fImlock\fR()
+and
+\fImunlock\fR()
+functions shall return a value of zero. Otherwise, no change is made to
+any locks in the address space of the process, and the function shall
+return a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImlock\fR()
+and
+\fImunlock\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Some or all of the address range specified by the
+.IR addr
+and
+.IR len
+arguments does not correspond to valid mapped pages in the address
+space of the process.
+.P
+The
+\fImlock\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+Some or all of the memory identified by the operation could not be
+locked when the call was made.
+.P
+The
+\fImlock\fR()
+and
+\fImunlock\fR()
+functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR addr
+argument is not a multiple of
+{PAGESIZE}.
+.P
+The
+\fImlock\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Locking the pages mapped by the specified range would exceed an
+implementation-defined limit on the amount of memory that the process
+may lock.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The calling process does not have appropriate privileges to perform
+the requested operation.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImlockall\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImunmap\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_mman.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mlockall.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mlockall.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..df4158a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mlockall.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MLOCKALL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mlockall,
+munlockall
+\(em lock/unlock the address space of a process
+(\fBREALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/mman.h>
+.P
+int mlockall(int \fIflags\fP);
+int munlockall(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImlockall\fR()
+function shall cause all of the pages mapped by the address space of a
+process to be memory-resident until unlocked or until the process exits
+or
+.IR exec s
+another process image. The
+.IR flags
+argument determines whether the pages to be locked are those currently
+mapped by the address space of the process, those that are mapped
+in the future, or both. The
+.IR flags
+argument is constructed from the bitwise-inclusive OR of one or more
+of the following symbolic constants, defined in
+.IR <sys/mman.h> :
+.IP MCL_CURRENT 12
+Lock all of the pages currently mapped into the address space of the
+process.
+.IP MCL_FUTURE 12
+Lock all of the pages that become mapped into the address space of the
+process in the future, when those mappings are established.
+.P
+If MCL_FUTURE is specified, and the automatic locking of future
+mappings eventually causes the amount of locked memory to exceed the
+amount of available physical memory or any other
+implementation-defined limit, the behavior is
+implementation-defined. The manner in which the implementation
+informs the application of these situations is also
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+The
+\fImunlockall\fR()
+function shall unlock all currently mapped pages of the address space
+of the process. Any pages that become mapped into the address space of
+the process after a call to
+\fImunlockall\fR()
+shall not be locked, unless there is an intervening call to
+\fImlockall\fR()
+specifying MCL_FUTURE or a subsequent call to
+\fImlockall\fR()
+specifying MCL_CURRENT. If pages mapped into the address space of the
+process are also mapped into the address spaces of other processes and
+are locked by those processes, the locks established by the other
+processes shall be unaffected by a call by this process to
+\fImunlockall\fR().
+.P
+Upon successful return from the
+\fImlockall\fR()
+function that specifies MCL_CURRENT, all currently mapped pages of the
+address space of the process shall be memory-resident and locked.
+Upon return from the
+\fImunlockall\fR()
+function, all currently mapped pages of the address space of the process
+shall be unlocked with respect to the address space of the process.
+The memory residency of unlocked pages is unspecified.
+.P
+Appropriate privileges are required to lock process memory with
+\fImlockall\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fImlockall\fR()
+function shall return a value of zero. Otherwise, no additional memory
+shall be locked, and the function shall return a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error. The effect of failure of
+\fImlockall\fR()
+on previously existing locks in the address space is unspecified.
+.P
+If it is supported by the implementation, the
+\fImunlockall\fR()
+function shall always return a value of zero. Otherwise, the function
+shall return a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImlockall\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+Some or all of the memory identified by the operation could not be
+locked when the call was made.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR flags
+argument is zero, or includes unimplemented flags.
+.P
+The
+\fImlockall\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Locking all of the pages currently mapped into the address space of the
+process would exceed an implementation-defined limit on the amount of
+memory that the process may lock.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The calling process does not have appropriate privileges to perform
+the requested operation.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImunmap\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_mman.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mmap.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mmap.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a065f5c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mmap.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,729 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MMAP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mmap
+\(em map pages of memory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/mman.h>
+.P
+void *mmap(void *\fIaddr\fP, size_t \fIlen\fP, int \fIprot\fP, int \fIflags\fP,
+    int \fIfildes\fP, off_t \fIoff\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImmap\fR()
+function shall establish a mapping between an address space
+of a process and a memory object.
+.P
+The
+\fImmap\fR()
+function shall be supported for the following memory objects:
+.IP " *" 4
+Regular files
+.IP " *" 4
+Shared memory objects
+.IP " *" 4
+Typed memory objects
+.P
+Support for any other type of file is unspecified.
+.P
+The format of the call is as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+\fIpa\fR=\fImmap\fR(\fIaddr\fP, \fIlen\fP, \fIprot\fP, \fIflags\fP, \fIfildes\fP, \fIoff\fP);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+\fImmap\fR()
+function shall establish a mapping between the address space of the
+process at an address
+.IR pa
+for
+.IR len
+bytes to the memory object represented by the file descriptor
+.IR fildes
+at offset
+.IR off
+for
+.IR len
+bytes. The value of
+.IR pa
+is an implementation-defined function of the parameter
+.IR addr
+and the values of
+.IR flags ,
+further described below. A successful
+\fImmap\fR()
+call shall return
+.IR pa
+as its result. The address range starting at
+.IR pa
+and continuing for
+.IR len
+bytes shall be legitimate for the possible (not necessarily current)
+address space of the process. The range of bytes starting at
+.IR off
+and continuing for
+.IR len
+bytes shall be legitimate for the possible (not necessarily current)
+offsets in the memory object represented by
+.IR fildes .
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+represents a typed memory object opened with either the
+POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE flag or the POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE_CONTIG
+flag, the memory object to be mapped
+shall be that portion of the typed memory object allocated by the
+implementation as specified below. In this case, if
+.IR off
+is non-zero, the behavior of
+\fImmap\fR()
+is undefined. If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a valid typed memory object that is not accessible from the
+calling process,
+\fImmap\fR()
+shall fail.
+.P
+The mapping established by
+\fImmap\fR()
+shall replace any previous mappings for those whole pages containing
+any part of the address space of the process starting at
+.IR pa
+and continuing for
+.IR len
+bytes.
+.P
+If the size of the mapped file changes after the call to
+\fImmap\fR()
+as a result of some other operation on the mapped file, the effect of
+references to portions of the mapped region that correspond to added or
+removed portions of the file is unspecified.
+.P
+If
+.IR len
+is zero,
+\fImmap\fR()
+shall fail and no mapping shall be established.
+.P
+The parameter
+.IR prot
+determines whether read, write, execute, or some combination of
+accesses are permitted to the data being mapped. The
+.IR prot
+shall be either PROT_NONE
+or the bitwise-inclusive OR of one or more of the other flags in
+the following table, defined in the
+.IR <sys/mman.h> 
+header.
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB
+lw(1.5i) | lw(2i).
+Symbolic Constant!Description
+_
+PROT_READ!Data can be read.
+PROT_WRITE!Data can be written.
+PROT_EXEC!Data can be executed.
+PROT_NONE!Data cannot be accessed.
+.TE
+.P
+If an implementation cannot support the combination of access types
+specified by
+.IR prot ,
+the call to
+\fImmap\fR()
+shall fail.
+.P
+An implementation may permit accesses other than those specified by
+.IR prot ;
+however, the implementation shall not permit a write to succeed
+where PROT_WRITE has not been set and shall not permit any access where
+PROT_NONE alone has been set. The implementation shall support at least
+the following values of
+.IR prot :
+PROT_NONE, PROT_READ, PROT_WRITE, and the bitwise-inclusive OR of
+PROT_READ and PROT_WRITE. The file descriptor
+.IR fildes
+shall have been opened with read permission, regardless of the
+protection options specified. If PROT_WRITE is specified, the
+application shall ensure that it has opened the file descriptor
+.IR fildes
+with write permission unless MAP_PRIVATE is specified in the
+.IR flags
+parameter as described below.
+.P
+The parameter
+.IR flags
+provides other information about the handling of the mapped data.
+The value of
+.IR flags
+is the bitwise-inclusive OR of these options, defined in
+.IR <sys/mman.h> :
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB
+lw(1.5i) | lw(2i).
+Symbolic Constant!Description
+_
+MAP_SHARED!Changes are shared.
+MAP_PRIVATE!Changes are private.
+MAP_FIXED!Interpret \fIaddr\fP exactly.
+.TE
+.P
+It is implementation-defined whether MAP_FIXED shall be supported.
+MAP_FIXED shall be supported on XSI-conformant systems.
+.P
+MAP_SHARED and MAP_PRIVATE describe the disposition of write references
+to the memory object. If MAP_SHARED is specified, write references
+shall change the underlying object. If MAP_PRIVATE is specified,
+modifications to the mapped data by the calling process shall be visible
+only to the calling process and shall not change the underlying object.
+It is unspecified whether modifications to the underlying object done
+after the MAP_PRIVATE mapping is established are visible through the
+MAP_PRIVATE mapping. Either MAP_SHARED or MAP_PRIVATE can be
+specified, but not both. The mapping type is retained across
+\fIfork\fR().
+.P
+The state of synchronization objects such as mutexes, semaphores,
+barriers, and conditional variables placed in shared memory mapped with
+MAP_SHARED becomes undefined when the last region in any process
+containing the synchronization object is unmapped.
+.P
+When
+.IR fildes
+represents a typed memory object opened with either the
+POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE flag or the
+POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE_CONTIG flag,
+\fImmap\fR()
+shall, if there are enough resources available, map
+.IR len
+bytes allocated from the corresponding typed memory object which were
+not previously allocated to any process in any processor that may
+access that typed memory object. If there are not enough resources
+available, the function shall fail. If
+.IR fildes
+represents a typed memory object opened with the
+POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE_CONTIG flag, these allocated bytes shall be
+contiguous within the typed memory object. If
+.IR fildes
+represents a typed memory object opened with the
+POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE flag, these allocated bytes may be composed of
+non-contiguous fragments within the typed memory object. If
+.IR fildes
+represents a typed memory object opened with neither the
+POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE_CONTIG flag nor the POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE
+flag,
+.IR len
+bytes starting at offset
+.IR off
+within the typed memory object are mapped, exactly as when mapping a
+file or shared memory object. In this case, if two processes map an
+area of typed memory using the same
+.IR off
+and
+.IR len
+values and using file descriptors that refer to the same memory pool
+(either from the same port or from a different port), both processes
+shall map the same region of storage.
+.P
+When MAP_FIXED is set in the
+.IR flags
+argument, the implementation is informed that the value of
+.IR pa
+shall be
+.IR addr ,
+exactly. If MAP_FIXED is set,
+\fImmap\fR()
+may return MAP_FAILED and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EINVAL] .
+If a MAP_FIXED request is successful, the mapping established by
+\fImmap\fR()
+replaces any previous mappings for the pages in the range
+[\fIpa\fP,\fIpa\fP+\fIlen\fR) of the process.
+.P
+When MAP_FIXED is not set, the implementation uses
+.IR addr
+in an implementation-defined manner to arrive at
+.IR pa .
+The
+.IR pa
+so chosen shall be an area of the address space that the implementation
+deems suitable for a mapping of
+.IR len
+bytes to the file. All implementations interpret an
+.IR addr
+value of 0 as granting the implementation complete freedom in selecting
+.IR pa ,
+subject to constraints described below. A non-zero value of
+.IR addr
+is taken to be a suggestion of a process address near which the mapping
+should be placed. When the implementation selects a value for
+.IR pa ,
+it never places a mapping at address 0, nor does it replace any extant
+mapping.
+.P
+If MAP_FIXED is specified and
+.IR addr
+is non-zero, it shall have the same remainder as the
+.IR off
+parameter, modulo the page size as returned by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+when passed _SC_PAGESIZE or _SC_PAGE_SIZE. The implementation may
+require that off is a multiple of the page size. If MAP_FIXED is
+specified, the implementation may require that
+.IR addr
+is a multiple of the page size. The system performs mapping operations
+over whole pages. Thus, while the parameter
+.IR len
+need not meet a size or alignment constraint, the system shall include,
+in any mapping operation, any partial page specified by the address
+range starting at
+.IR pa
+and continuing for
+.IR len
+bytes.
+.P
+The system shall always zero-fill any partial page at the end of an
+object. Further, the system shall never write out any modified
+portions of the last page of an object which are beyond its end.
+References within the address range starting at
+.IR pa
+and continuing for
+.IR len
+bytes to whole pages following the end of an object shall result in
+delivery of a SIGBUS signal.
+.P
+An implementation may generate SIGBUS signals when a reference would
+cause an error in the mapped object, such as out-of-space condition.
+.P
+The
+\fImmap\fR()
+function shall add an extra reference to the file associated with the
+file descriptor
+.IR fildes
+which is not removed by a subsequent
+\fIclose\fR()
+on that file descriptor. This reference shall be removed when there are
+no more mappings to the file.
+.P
+The last data access timestamp of the mapped file may be marked for
+update at any time between the
+\fImmap\fR()
+call and the corresponding
+\fImunmap\fR()
+call. The initial read or write reference to a mapped region shall cause
+the file's last data access timestamp to be marked for update if it has
+not already been marked for update.
+.P
+The last data modification and last file status change timestamps
+of a file that is mapped with MAP_SHARED and PROT_WRITE shall be
+marked
+for update at some point in the interval between a write reference to
+the mapped region and the next call to
+\fImsync\fR()
+with MS_ASYNC or MS_SYNC for that portion of the file by any process.
+If there is no such call and if the underlying file is modified
+as a result of a write reference, then these timestamps shall be marked
+for update at some time after the write reference.
+.P
+There may be implementation-defined limits on the number of memory
+regions that can be mapped (per process or per system).
+.P
+If such a limit is imposed, whether the number of memory regions that
+can be mapped by a process is decreased by the use of
+\fIshmat\fR()
+is implementation-defined.
+.P
+If
+\fImmap\fR()
+fails for reasons other than
+.BR [EBADF] ,
+.BR [EINVAL] ,
+or
+.BR [ENOTSUP] ,
+some of the mappings in the address range starting at
+.IR addr
+and continuing for
+.IR len
+bytes may have been unmapped.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fImmap\fR()
+function shall return the address at which the mapping was placed (\c
+.IR pa );
+otherwise, it shall return a value of MAP_FAILED and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error. The symbol MAP_FAILED is defined in the
+.IR <sys/mman.h> 
+header. No successful return from
+\fImmap\fR()
+shall return the value MAP_FAILED.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImmap\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not open for read, regardless of the protection specified,
+or
+.IR fildes
+is not open for write and PROT_WRITE was specified for a MAP_SHARED
+type mapping.
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The mapping could not be locked in memory, if required by
+\fImlockall\fR(),
+due to a lack of resources.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid open file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR len
+is zero.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR flags
+is invalid (neither MAP_PRIVATE nor MAP_SHARED is set).
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+The number of mapped regions would exceed an implementation-defined
+limit (per process or per system).
+.TP
+.BR ENODEV
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument refers to a file whose type is not supported by
+\fImmap\fR().
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+MAP_FIXED was specified, and the range
+[\fIaddr\fP,\fIaddr\fP+\fIlen\fR) exceeds that allowed for the
+address space of a process; or, if MAP_FIXED was not specified and
+there is insufficient room in the address space to effect the mapping.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+The mapping could not be locked in memory, if required by
+\fImlockall\fR(),
+because it would require more space than the system is able to supply.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Not enough unallocated memory resources remain in the typed memory
+object designated by
+.IR fildes
+to allocate
+.IR len
+bytes.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSUP
+MAP_FIXED or MAP_PRIVATE was specified in the
+.IR flags
+argument and the implementation does not support this functionality.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+The implementation does not support the combination of accesses
+requested in the
+.IR prot
+argument.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+Addresses in the range [\fIoff\fP,\fIoff\fP+\fIlen\fR) are invalid
+for the object specified by
+.IR fildes .
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+MAP_FIXED was specified in
+.IR flags
+and the combination of
+.IR addr ,
+.IR len ,
+and
+.IR off
+is invalid for the object specified by
+.IR fildes .
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument refers to a typed memory object that is not accessible from
+the calling process.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The file is a regular file and the value of
+.IR off
+plus
+.IR len
+exceeds the offset maximum established in the open file description
+associated with
+.IR fildes .
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fImmap\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR addr
+argument (if MAP_FIXED was specified) or
+.IR off
+is not a multiple of the page size as returned by
+\fIsysconf\fR(),
+or is considered invalid by the implementation.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Use of
+\fImmap\fR()
+may reduce the amount of memory available to other memory allocation
+functions.
+.P
+Use of MAP_FIXED may result in unspecified behavior in further use of
+\fImalloc\fR()
+and
+\fIshmat\fR().
+The use of MAP_FIXED is discouraged, as it may prevent an
+implementation from making the most effective use of resources. Most
+implementations require that
+.IR off
+and
+.IR addr
+are multiples of the page size as returned by
+\fIsysconf\fR().
+.P
+The application must ensure correct synchronization when using
+\fImmap\fR()
+in conjunction with any other file access method, such as
+\fIread\fR()
+and
+\fIwrite\fR(),
+standard input/output, and
+\fIshmat\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fImmap\fR()
+function allows access to resources via address space manipulations,
+instead of
+\fIread\fR()/\c
+\fIwrite\fR().
+Once a file is mapped, all a process has to do to access it is use the
+data at the address to which the file was mapped. So, using
+pseudo-code to illustrate the way in which an existing program might be
+changed to use
+\fImmap\fR(),
+the following:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fildes = open(...)
+lseek(fildes, some_offset)
+read(fildes, buf, len)
+/* Use data in buf. */
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+becomes:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+fildes = open(...)
+address = mmap(0, len, PROT_READ, MAP_PRIVATE, fildes, some_offset)
+/* Use data at address. */
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+After considering several other alternatives, it was decided to adopt
+the
+\fImmap\fR()
+definition found in SVR4 for mapping memory objects into process
+address spaces. The SVR4 definition is minimal, in that it describes
+only what has been built, and what appears to be necessary for a
+general and portable mapping facility.
+.P
+Note that while
+\fImmap\fR()
+was first designed for mapping files, it is actually a general-purpose
+mapping facility. It can be used to map any appropriate object, such
+as memory, files, devices, and so on, into the address space of a
+process.
+.P
+When a mapping is established, it is possible that the implementation
+may need to map more than is requested into the address space of the
+process because of hardware requirements. An application, however,
+cannot count on this behavior. Implementations that do not use a paged
+architecture may simply allocate a common memory region and return the
+address of it; such implementations probably do not allocate any more
+than is necessary. References past the end of the requested area are
+unspecified.
+.P
+If an application requests a mapping that would overlay existing
+mappings in the process, it might be desirable that an implementation
+detect this and inform the application. However, the default, portable
+(not MAP_FIXED)
+operation does not overlay existing mappings. On the other hand, if the
+program specifies a fixed address mapping (which requires some
+implementation knowledge to determine a suitable address, if the
+function is supported at all), then the program is presumed to be
+successfully managing its own address space and should be trusted when
+it asks to map over existing data structures. Furthermore, it is also
+desirable to make as few system calls as possible, and it might be
+considered onerous to require an
+\fImunmap\fR()
+before an
+\fImmap\fR()
+to the same address range. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 specifies that the new mappings
+replace any existing mappings, following existing practice in this
+regard.
+.P
+It is not expected that all hardware implementations are able to
+support all combinations of permissions at all addresses.
+Implementations are required to disallow write
+access to mappings without write permission and to disallow access to
+mappings without any access permission. Other than these restrictions,
+implementations may allow access types other than those requested by
+the application. For example, if the application requests only
+PROT_WRITE, the implementation may also allow read access. A call to
+\fImmap\fR()
+fails if the implementation cannot support allowing all the access
+requested by the application. For example, some implementations
+cannot support a request for both write access and execute access
+simultaneously. All implementations must support requests for no access,
+read access, write access, and both read and write access. Strictly
+conforming code must only rely on the required checks. These restrictions
+allow for portability across a wide range of hardware.
+.P
+The MAP_FIXED address treatment is likely to fail for non-page-aligned
+values and for certain architecture-dependent address ranges.
+Conforming implementations cannot count on being able to choose address
+values for MAP_FIXED without utilizing non-portable,
+implementation-defined knowledge. Nonetheless, MAP_FIXED is provided
+as a standard interface conforming to existing practice for utilizing
+such knowledge when it is available.
+.P
+Similarly, in order to allow implementations that do not support
+virtual addresses, support for directly specifying any mapping
+addresses via MAP_FIXED is not required and thus a conforming
+application may not count on it.
+.P
+The MAP_PRIVATE
+function can be implemented efficiently when memory protection hardware
+is available. When such hardware is not available, implementations can
+implement such ``mappings''
+by simply making a real copy of the relevant data into process private
+memory, though this tends to behave similarly to
+\fIread\fR().
+.P
+The function has been defined to allow for many different models of
+using shared memory. However, all uses are not equally portable across
+all machine architectures. In particular, the
+\fImmap\fR()
+function allows the system as well as the application to specify the
+address at which to map a specific region of a memory object. The most
+portable way to use the function is always to let the system choose
+the address, specifying NULL as the value for the argument
+.IR addr
+and not to specify MAP_FIXED.
+.P
+If it is intended that a particular region of a memory object be mapped
+at the same address in a group of processes (on machines where this is
+even possible), then MAP_FIXED can be used to pass in the desired
+mapping address. The system can still be used to choose the desired
+address if the first such mapping is made without specifying MAP_FIXED,
+and then the resulting mapping address can be passed to subsequent
+processes for them to pass in via MAP_FIXED. The availability of a
+specific address range cannot be guaranteed, in general.
+.P
+The
+\fImmap\fR()
+function can be used to map a region of memory that is larger than the
+current size of the object. Memory access within the mapping but
+beyond the current end of the underlying objects may result in SIGBUS
+signals being sent to the process. The reason for this is that the
+size of the object can be manipulated by other processes and can change
+at any moment. The implementation should tell the application that a
+memory reference is outside the object where this can be detected;
+otherwise, written data may be lost and read data may not reflect
+actual data in the object.
+.P
+Note that references beyond the end of the object do not extend the
+object as the new end cannot be determined precisely by most virtual
+memory hardware. Instead, the size can be directly manipulated by
+\fIftruncate\fR().
+.P
+Process memory locking does apply to shared memory regions, and the
+MEMLOCK_FUTURE argument to
+\fImlockall\fR()
+can be relied upon to cause new shared memory regions to be
+automatically locked.
+.P
+Existing implementations of
+\fImmap\fR()
+return the value \(mi1 when unsuccessful. Since the casting of this
+value to type
+.BR "void *"
+cannot be guaranteed by the ISO\ C standard to be distinct from a successful
+value, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defines the symbol MAP_FAILED,
+which a conforming implementation does not return as the result of a
+successful call.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlockf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsync\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImunmap\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImprotect\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_typed_mem_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_mman.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/modf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/modf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..52c31d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/modf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MODF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+modf,
+modff,
+modfl
+\(em decompose a floating-point number
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double modf(double \fIx\fP, double *\fIiptr\fP);
+float modff(float \fIvalue\fP, float *\fIiptr\fP);
+long double modfl(long double \fIvalue\fP, long double *\fIiptr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall break the argument
+.IR x
+into integral and fractional parts, each of which has the same sign as
+the argument. It stores the integral part as a
+.BR double
+(for the
+\fImodf\fR()
+function), a
+.BR float
+(for the
+\fImodff\fR()
+function), or a
+.BR "long double"
+(for the
+\fImodfl\fR()
+function), in the object pointed to by
+.IR iptr .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the signed
+fractional part of
+.IR x .
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned, and *\fIiptr\fP shall be set to a
+NaN.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-Inf, \(+-0 shall be returned, and *\fIiptr\fP shall be set to
+\(+-Inf.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fImodf\fR()
+function computes the function result and *\fIiptr\fP such that:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+a = modf(x, iptr) ;
+x == a+*iptr ;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+allowing for the usual floating-point inaccuracies.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfrexp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIldexp\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mprotect.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mprotect.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3b4ad01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mprotect.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MPROTECT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mprotect
+\(em set protection of memory mapping
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/mman.h>
+.P
+int mprotect(void *\fIaddr\fP, size_t \fIlen\fP, int \fIprot\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImprotect\fR()
+function shall change the access protections to be that specified by
+.IR prot
+for those whole pages containing any part of the address space of the
+process starting at address
+.IR addr
+and continuing for
+.IR len
+bytes. The parameter
+.IR prot
+determines whether read, write, execute, or some combination of
+accesses are permitted to the data being mapped. The
+.IR prot
+argument should be either PROT_NONE or the bitwise-inclusive OR of one
+or more of PROT_READ, PROT_WRITE, and PROT_EXEC.
+.P
+If an implementation cannot support the combination of access types
+specified by
+.IR prot ,
+the call to
+\fImprotect\fR()
+shall fail.
+.P
+An implementation may permit accesses other than those specified by
+.IR prot ;
+however, no implementation shall permit a write to succeed where
+PROT_WRITE has not been set or shall permit any access where PROT_NONE
+alone has been set. Implementations shall support at least the
+following values of
+.IR prot :
+PROT_NONE, PROT_READ, PROT_WRITE, and the bitwise-inclusive OR of
+PROT_READ and PROT_WRITE. If PROT_WRITE is specified, the application
+shall ensure that it has opened the mapped objects in the specified
+address range with write permission, unless MAP_PRIVATE
+was specified in the original mapping, regardless of whether the file
+descriptors used to map the objects have since been closed.
+.P
+The implementation may require that
+.IR addr
+be a multiple of the page size as returned by
+\fIsysconf\fR().
+.P
+The behavior of this function is unspecified if the mapping was not
+established by a call to
+\fImmap\fR().
+.P
+When
+\fImprotect\fR()
+fails for reasons other than
+.BR [EINVAL] ,
+the protections on some of the pages in the range
+[\fIaddr\fP,\fIaddr\fP+\fIlen\fR) may have been changed.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fImprotect\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImprotect\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+The
+.IR prot
+argument specifies a protection that violates the access permission the
+process has to the underlying memory object.
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The
+.IR prot
+argument specifies PROT_WRITE over a MAP_PRIVATE mapping and there are
+insufficient memory resources to reserve for locking the private page.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Addresses in the range [\fIaddr\fP,\fIaddr\fP+\fIlen\fR) are invalid
+for the address space of a process, or specify one or more pages which
+are not mapped.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+The
+.IR prot
+argument specifies PROT_WRITE on a MAP_PRIVATE mapping, and it would
+require more space than the system is able to supply for locking the
+private pages, if required.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSUP
+The implementation does not support the combination of accesses
+requested in the
+.IR prot
+argument.
+.P
+The
+\fImprotect\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR addr
+argument is not a multiple of the page size as returned by
+\fIsysconf\fR().
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Most implementations require that
+.IR addr
+is a multiple of the page size as returned by
+\fIsysconf\fR().
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImmap\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_mman.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_close.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_close.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6d979e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_close.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MQ_CLOSE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mq_close
+\(em close a message queue
+(\fBREALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <mqueue.h>
+.P
+int mq_close(mqd_t \fImqdes\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImq_close\fR()
+function shall remove the association between the message queue
+descriptor,
+.IR mqdes ,
+and its message queue. The results of using this message queue
+descriptor after successful return from this
+\fImq_close\fR(),
+and until the return of this message queue descriptor from a subsequent
+\fImq_open\fR(),
+are undefined.
+.P
+If the process has successfully attached a notification request to the
+message queue via this
+.IR mqdes ,
+this attachment shall be removed, and the message queue is available
+for another process to attach for notification.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fImq_close\fR()
+function shall return a value of zero; otherwise, the function shall
+return a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImq_close\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR mqdes
+argument is not a valid message queue descriptor.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImq_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_unlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgrcv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgsnd\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<mqueue.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_getattr.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_getattr.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b6399a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_getattr.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MQ_GETATTR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mq_getattr
+\(em get message queue attributes
+(\fBREALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <mqueue.h>
+.P
+int mq_getattr(mqd_t \fImqdes\fP, struct mq_attr *\fImqstat\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImq_getattr\fR()
+function shall obtain status information and attributes of the message
+queue and the open message queue description associated with the
+message queue descriptor.
+.P
+The
+.IR mqdes
+argument specifies a message queue descriptor.
+.P
+The results shall be returned in the
+.BR mq_attr
+structure referenced by the
+.IR mqstat
+argument.
+.P
+Upon return, the following members shall have the values associated
+with the open message queue description as set when the message queue
+was opened and as modified by subsequent
+\fImq_setattr\fR()
+calls:
+.IR mq_flags .
+.P
+The following attributes of the message queue shall be returned as set
+at message queue creation:
+.IR mq_maxmsg ,
+.IR mq_msgsize .
+.P
+Upon return, the following members within the
+.BR mq_attr
+structure referenced by the
+.IR mqstat
+argument shall be set to the current state of the message queue:
+.IP "\fImq_curmsgs\fP" 10
+The number of messages currently on the queue.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fImq_getattr\fR()
+function shall return zero. Otherwise, the function shall return
+\(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImq_getattr\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR mqdes
+argument is not a valid message queue descriptor.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+See
+.IR "\fImq_notify\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImq_notify\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_send\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_setattr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgrcv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgsnd\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<mqueue.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_notify.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_notify.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f0895d5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_notify.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,196 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MQ_NOTIFY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mq_notify
+\(em notify process that a message is available
+(\fBREALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <mqueue.h>
+.P
+int mq_notify(mqd_t \fImqdes\fP, const struct sigevent *\fInotification\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+If the argument
+.IR notification
+is not NULL, this function shall register the calling process to be
+notified of message arrival at an empty message queue associated with
+the specified message queue descriptor,
+.IR mqdes .
+The notification specified by the
+.IR notification
+argument shall be sent to the process when the message queue transitions
+from empty to non-empty. At any time, only one process may be
+registered for notification by a message queue. If the calling process
+or any other process has already registered for notification of message
+arrival at the specified message queue, subsequent attempts to register
+for that message queue shall fail.
+.P
+If
+.IR notification
+is NULL and the process is currently registered for notification by the
+specified message queue, the existing registration shall be removed.
+.P
+When the notification is sent to the registered process, its
+registration shall be removed. The message queue shall then be available
+for registration.
+.P
+If a process has registered for notification of message arrival at a
+message queue and some thread is blocked in
+\fImq_receive\fR()
+or
+\fImq_timedreceive\fR()
+waiting to receive a message when a message arrives at the queue, the
+arriving message shall satisfy the appropriate
+\fImq_receive\fR()
+or
+\fImq_timedreceive\fR(),
+respectively. The resulting behavior is as if the message queue remains
+empty, and no notification shall be sent.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fImq_notify\fR()
+function shall return a value of zero; otherwise, the function shall
+return a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImq_notify\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR mqdes
+argument is not a valid message queue descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EBUSY
+A process is already registered for notification by the message queue.
+.P
+The
+\fImq_notify\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR notification
+argument is NULL and the process is currently not registered.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following program registers a notification request for the message
+queue named in its command-line argument. Notification is performed
+by creating a thread. The thread executes a function which reads one
+message from the queue and then terminates the process.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <pthread.h>
+#include <mqueue.h>
+#include <assert.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+static void                     /* Thread start function */
+tfunc(union sigval sv)
+{
+    struct mq_attr attr;
+    ssize_t nr;
+    void *buf;
+    mqd_t mqdes = *((mqd_t *) sv.sival_ptr);
+.P
+    /* Determine maximum msg size; allocate buffer to receive msg */
+.P
+    if (mq_getattr(mqdes, &attr) == -1) {
+        perror("mq_getattr");
+        exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+    }
+    buf = malloc(attr.mq_msgsize);
+.P
+    if (buf == NULL) {
+        perror("malloc");
+        exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+    }
+.P
+    nr = mq_receive(mqdes, buf, attr.mq_msgsize, NULL);
+    if (nr == -1) {
+        perror("mq_receive");
+        exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+    }
+.P
+    printf("Read %ld bytes from message queue\en", (long) nr);
+    free(buf);
+    exit(EXIT_SUCCESS);         /* Terminate the process */
+}
+.P
+int
+main(int argc, char *argv[])
+{
+    mqd_t mqdes;
+    struct sigevent not;
+.P
+    assert(argc == 2);
+.P
+    mqdes = mq_open(argv[1], O_RDONLY);
+    if (mqdes == (mqd_t) -1) {
+        perror("mq_open");
+        exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+    }
+.P
+    not.sigev_notify = SIGEV_THREAD;
+    not.sigev_notify_function = tfunc;
+    not.sigev_notify_attributes = NULL;
+    not.sigev_value.sival_ptr = &mqdes;   /* Arg. to thread func. */
+    if (mq_notify(mqdes, &not) == -1) {
+        perror("mq_notify");
+        exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+    }
+.P
+    pause();    /* Process will be terminated by thread function */
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImq_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_send\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_receive\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgrcv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgsnd\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<mqueue.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_open.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_open.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4c610bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_open.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,317 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MQ_OPEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mq_open
+\(em open a message queue
+(\fBREALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <mqueue.h>
+.P
+mqd_t mq_open(const char *\fIname\fP, int \fIoflag\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImq_open\fR()
+function shall establish the connection between a process and a message
+queue with a message queue descriptor. It shall create an open message
+queue description that refers to the message queue, and a message queue
+descriptor that refers to that open message queue description. The
+message queue descriptor is used by other functions to refer to that
+message queue. The
+.IR name
+argument points to a string naming a message queue. It is unspecified
+whether the name appears in the file system and is visible to other
+functions that take pathnames as arguments. The
+.IR name
+argument conforms to the construction rules for a pathname, except that
+the interpretation of
+<slash>
+characters other than the leading
+<slash>
+character in
+.IR name
+is implementation-defined, and that the length limits for the
+.IR name
+argument are implementation-defined and need not be the same as the
+pathname limits
+{PATH_MAX}
+and
+{NAME_MAX}.
+If
+.IR name
+begins with the
+<slash>
+character, then processes calling
+\fImq_open\fR()
+with the same value of
+.IR name
+shall refer to the same message queue object, as long as that name
+has not been removed. If
+.IR name
+does not begin with the
+<slash>
+character, the effect is implementation-defined. If the
+.IR name
+argument is not the name of an existing message queue and creation is
+not requested,
+\fImq_open\fR()
+shall fail and return an error.
+.P
+A message queue descriptor may be implemented using a file
+descriptor, in which case applications can open up to at least
+{OPEN_MAX}
+file and message queues.
+.P
+The
+.IR oflag
+argument requests the desired receive and/or send access to the message
+queue. The requested access permission to receive messages or send
+messages shall be granted if the calling process would be granted read
+or write access, respectively, to an equivalently protected file.
+.P
+The value of
+.IR oflag
+is the bitwise-inclusive OR of values from the following list.
+Applications shall specify exactly one of the first three values
+(access modes) below in the value of
+.IR oflag :
+.IP O_RDONLY 12
+Open the message queue for receiving messages. The process can use the
+returned message queue descriptor with
+\fImq_receive\fR(),
+but not
+\fImq_send\fR().
+A message queue may be open multiple times in the same or different
+processes for receiving messages.
+.IP O_WRONLY 12
+Open the queue for sending messages. The process can use the returned
+message queue descriptor with
+\fImq_send\fR()
+but not
+\fImq_receive\fR().
+A message queue may be open multiple times in the same or different
+processes for sending messages.
+.IP O_RDWR 12
+Open the queue for both receiving and sending messages. The process
+can use any of the functions allowed for O_RDONLY and O_WRONLY. A
+message queue may be open multiple times in the same or different
+processes for sending messages.
+.P
+Any combination of the remaining flags may be specified in the value of
+.IR oflag :
+.IP O_CREAT 12
+Create a message queue. It requires two additional arguments:
+.IR mode ,
+which shall be of type
+.BR mode_t ,
+and
+.IR attr ,
+which shall be a pointer to an
+.BR mq_attr
+structure. If the pathname
+.IR name
+has already been used to create a message queue that still exists, then
+this flag shall have no effect, except as noted under O_EXCL.
+Otherwise, a message queue shall be created without any messages in
+it. The user ID of the message queue shall be set to the effective
+user ID of the process. The group ID of the message queue shall be
+set to the effective group ID of the process; however, if the
+.IR name
+argument is visible in the file system, the group ID may be set
+to the group ID of the containing directory. When bits in
+.IR mode
+other than the file permission bits are specified, the effect is
+unspecified. If
+.IR attr
+is NULL, the message queue shall be created with implementation-defined
+default message queue attributes. If
+.IR attr
+is non-NULL and the calling process has appropriate privileges on
+.IR name ,
+the message queue
+.IR mq_maxmsg
+and
+.IR mq_msgsize
+attributes shall be set to the values of the corresponding members in the
+.BR mq_attr
+structure referred to by
+.IR attr .
+The values of the
+.IR mq_flags
+and
+.IR mq_curmsgs
+members of the
+.BR mq_attr
+structure shall be ignored. If
+.IR attr
+is non-NULL, but the calling process does not have appropriate
+privileges on
+.IR name ,
+the
+\fImq_open\fR()
+function shall fail and return an error without creating the message
+queue.
+.IP O_EXCL 12
+If O_EXCL and O_CREAT are set,
+\fImq_open\fR()
+shall fail if the message queue
+.IR name
+exists. The check for the existence of the message queue and the
+creation of the message queue if it does not exist shall be atomic with
+respect to other threads executing
+\fImq_open\fR()
+naming the same
+.IR name
+with O_EXCL and O_CREAT set. If O_EXCL is set and O_CREAT is not set,
+the result is undefined.
+.IP O_NONBLOCK 12
+Determines whether an
+\fImq_send\fR()
+or
+\fImq_receive\fR()
+waits for resources or messages that are not currently available, or
+fails with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [EAGAIN] ;
+see
+.IR "\fImq_send\fR\^(\|)"
+and
+.IR "\fImq_receive\fR\^(\|)"
+for details.
+.P
+The
+\fImq_open\fR()
+function does not add or remove messages from the queue.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the function shall return a message queue
+descriptor; otherwise, the function shall return (\fBmqd_t\fP)\(mi1
+and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImq_open\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+The message queue exists and the permissions specified by
+.IR oflag
+are denied, or the message queue does not exist and permission to
+create the message queue is denied.
+.TP
+.BR EEXIST
+O_CREAT and O_EXCL are set and the named message queue already exists.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fImq_open\fR()
+function was interrupted by a signal.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+\fImq_open\fR()
+function is not supported for the given name.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+O_CREAT was specified in
+.IR oflag ,
+the value of
+.IR attr
+is not NULL, and either
+.IR mq_maxmsg
+or
+.IR mq_msgsize
+was less than or equal to zero.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+Too many message queue descriptors or file descriptors are currently in
+use by this process.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+Too many message queues are currently open in the system.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+O_CREAT is not set and the named message queue does not exist.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+There is insufficient space for the creation of the new message queue.
+.br
+.P
+If any of the following conditions occur, the
+\fImq_open\fR()
+function may return (\c
+.BR mqd_t )\(mi1
+and set
+.IR errno
+to the corresponding value.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of the
+.IR name
+argument exceeds
+{_POSIX_PATH_MAX}
+on systems that do not support the XSI option
+or exceeds
+{_XOPEN_PATH_MAX}
+on XSI systems,
+or has a pathname component that is longer than
+{_POSIX_NAME_MAX}
+on systems that do not support the XSI option
+or longer than
+{_XOPEN_NAME_MAX}
+on XSI systems.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+A future version might require the
+\fImq_open\fR()
+and
+\fImq_unlink\fR()
+functions to have semantics similar to normal file system operations.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImq_close\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_getattr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_receive\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_send\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_setattr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_unlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgrcv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgsnd\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<mqueue.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_receive.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_receive.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..71624f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_receive.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,201 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MQ_RECEIVE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mq_receive,
+mq_timedreceive
+\(em receive a message from a message queue (\fBREALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <mqueue.h>
+.P
+ssize_t mq_receive(mqd_t \fImqdes\fP, char *\fImsg_ptr\fP, size_t \fImsg_len\fP,
+    unsigned *\fImsg_prio\fP);
+.P
+#include <mqueue.h>
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+ssize_t mq_timedreceive(mqd_t \fImqdes\fP, char *restrict \fImsg_ptr\fP,
+    size_t \fImsg_len\fP, unsigned *restrict \fImsg_prio\fP,
+    const struct timespec *restrict \fIabstime\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImq_receive\fR()
+function shall receive the oldest of the highest priority
+message(s) from the message queue specified by
+.IR mqdes .
+If the size of the buffer in bytes, specified by the
+.IR msg_len
+argument, is less than the
+.IR mq_msgsize
+attribute of the message queue, the function shall fail and return an
+error. Otherwise, the selected message shall be removed from the queue
+and copied to the buffer pointed to by the
+.IR msg_ptr
+argument.
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR msg_len
+is greater than
+{SSIZE_MAX},
+the result is implementation-defined.
+.P
+If the argument
+.IR msg_prio
+is not NULL, the priority of the selected message shall be stored in the
+location referenced by
+.IR msg_prio .
+.P
+If the specified message queue is empty and O_NONBLOCK
+is not set in the message queue description associated with
+.IR mqdes ,
+\fImq_receive\fR()
+shall block until a message is enqueued on the message queue or until
+\fImq_receive\fR()
+is interrupted by a signal. If more than one thread is waiting to
+receive a message when a message arrives at an empty queue and the
+Priority Scheduling option is supported, then the thread of highest
+priority that has been waiting the longest shall be selected to receive
+the message. Otherwise, it is unspecified which waiting thread receives
+the message. If the specified message queue is empty and O_NONBLOCK is
+set in the message queue description associated with
+.IR mqdes ,
+no message shall be removed from the queue, and
+\fImq_receive\fR()
+shall return an error.
+.P
+The
+\fImq_timedreceive\fR()
+function shall receive the oldest of the highest priority messages
+from the message queue specified by
+.IR mqdes
+as described for the
+\fImq_receive\fR()
+function. However, if O_NONBLOCK was not specified when the message
+queue was opened via the
+\fImq_open\fR()
+function, and no message exists on the queue to satisfy the receive,
+the wait for such a message shall be terminated when the specified
+timeout expires. If O_NONBLOCK is set, this function is equivalent to
+\fImq_receive\fR().
+.P
+The timeout expires when the absolute time specified by
+.IR abstime
+passes, as measured by the clock on which timeouts are based (that is,
+when the value of that clock equals or exceeds
+.IR abstime ),
+or if the absolute time specified by
+.IR abstime
+has already been passed at the time of the call.
+.P
+The timeout shall be based on the CLOCK_REALTIME clock.
+The resolution of the timeout shall be the resolution of the clock on
+which it is based. The
+.IR timespec
+argument is defined in the
+.IR <time.h> 
+header.
+.P
+Under no circumstance shall the operation fail with a timeout if a
+message can be removed from the message queue immediately. The validity
+of the
+.IR abstime
+parameter need not be checked if a message can be removed from the
+message queue immediately.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fImq_receive\fR()
+and
+\fImq_timedreceive\fR()
+functions shall return the length of the selected message in bytes and
+the message shall be removed from the queue. Otherwise, no message
+shall be removed from the queue, the functions shall return a value of
+\(mi1, and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+O_NONBLOCK was set in the message description associated with
+.IR mqdes ,
+and the specified message queue is empty.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR mqdes
+argument is not a valid message queue descriptor open for reading.
+.TP
+.BR EMSGSIZE
+The specified message buffer size,
+.IR msg_len ,
+is less than the message size attribute of the message queue.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fImq_receive\fR()
+or
+\fImq_timedreceive\fR()
+operation was interrupted by a signal.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The process or thread would have blocked, and the
+.IR abstime
+parameter specified a nanoseconds field value less than zero or greater
+than or equal to 1\|000 million.
+.TP
+.BR ETIMEDOUT
+The O_NONBLOCK flag was not set when the message queue was opened, but
+no message arrived on the queue before the specified timeout expired.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADMSG
+The implementation has detected a data corruption problem with the
+message.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImq_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_send\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgrcv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgsnd\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItime\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<mqueue.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_send.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_send.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eb430cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_send.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,210 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MQ_SEND "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mq_send,
+mq_timedsend
+\(em send a message to a message queue (\fBREALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <mqueue.h>
+.P
+int mq_send(mqd_t \fImqdes\fP, const char *\fImsg_ptr\fP, size_t \fImsg_len\fP,
+    unsigned \fImsg_prio\fP);
+.P
+#include <mqueue.h>
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+int mq_timedsend(mqd_t \fImqdes\fP, const char *\fImsg_ptr\fP, size_t \fImsg_len\fP,
+    unsigned \fImsg_prio\fP, const struct timespec *\fIabstime\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImq_send\fR()
+function shall add the message pointed to by the argument
+.IR msg_ptr
+to the message queue specified by
+.IR mqdes .
+The
+.IR msg_len
+argument specifies the length of the message, in bytes, pointed to by
+.IR msg_ptr .
+The value of
+.IR msg_len
+shall be less than or equal to the
+.IR mq_msgsize
+attribute of the message queue, or
+\fImq_send\fR()
+shall fail.
+.P
+If the specified message queue is not full,
+\fImq_send\fR()
+shall behave as if the message is inserted into the message queue at
+the position indicated by the
+.IR msg_prio
+argument. A message with a larger numeric value of
+.IR msg_prio
+shall be inserted before messages with lower values of
+.IR msg_prio .
+A message shall be inserted after other messages in the queue, if any,
+with equal
+.IR msg_prio .
+The value of
+.IR msg_prio
+shall be less than
+{MQ_PRIO_MAX}.
+.P
+If the specified message queue is full and O_NONBLOCK
+is not set in the message queue description associated with
+.IR mqdes ,
+\fImq_send\fR()
+shall block until space becomes available to enqueue the message, or
+until
+\fImq_send\fR()
+is interrupted by a signal. If more than one thread is waiting to send
+when space becomes available in the message queue and the Priority
+Scheduling option is supported, then the thread of the highest priority
+that has been waiting the longest shall be unblocked to send its
+message. Otherwise, it is unspecified which waiting thread is
+unblocked. If the specified message queue is full and O_NONBLOCK is
+set in the message queue description associated with
+.IR mqdes ,
+the message shall not be queued and
+\fImq_send\fR()
+shall return an error.
+.P
+The
+\fImq_timedsend\fR()
+function shall add a message to the message queue specified by
+.IR mqdes
+in the manner defined for the
+\fImq_send\fR()
+function. However, if the specified message queue is full and
+O_NONBLOCK is not set in the message queue description associated with
+.IR mqdes ,
+the wait for sufficient room in the queue shall be terminated when the
+specified timeout expires. If O_NONBLOCK is set in the message queue
+description, this function shall be equivalent to
+\fImq_send\fR().
+.P
+The timeout shall expire when the absolute time specified by
+.IR abstime
+passes, as measured by the clock on which timeouts are based (that is,
+when the value of that clock equals or exceeds
+.IR abstime ),
+or if the absolute time specified by
+.IR abstime
+has already been passed at the time of the call.
+.P
+The timeout shall be based on the CLOCK_REALTIME clock.
+The resolution of the timeout shall be the resolution of the clock on
+which it is based. The
+.IR timespec
+argument is defined in the
+.IR <time.h> 
+header.
+.P
+Under no circumstance shall the operation fail with a timeout if there
+is sufficient room in the queue to add the message immediately. The
+validity of the
+.IR abstime
+parameter need not be checked when there is sufficient room in the
+queue.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fImq_send\fR()
+and
+\fImq_timedsend\fR()
+functions shall return a value of zero. Otherwise, no message shall be
+enqueued, the functions shall return \(mi1, and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImq_send\fR()
+and
+\fImq_timedsend\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The O_NONBLOCK flag is set in the message queue description associated
+with
+.IR mqdes ,
+and the specified message queue is full.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR mqdes
+argument is not a valid message queue descriptor open for writing.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal interrupted the call to
+\fImq_send\fR()
+or
+\fImq_timedsend\fR().
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR msg_prio
+was outside the valid range.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The process or thread would have blocked, and the
+.IR abstime
+parameter specified a nanoseconds field value less than zero or greater
+than or equal to 1\|000 million.
+.TP
+.BR EMSGSIZE
+The specified message length,
+.IR msg_len ,
+exceeds the message size attribute of the message queue.
+.TP
+.BR ETIMEDOUT
+The O_NONBLOCK flag was not set when the message queue was opened, but
+the timeout expired before the message could be added to the queue.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The value of the symbol
+{MQ_PRIO_MAX}
+limits the number of priority levels supported by the application.
+Message priorities range from 0 to
+{MQ_PRIO_MAX}\(mi1.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImq_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_receive\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_setattr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItime\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<mqueue.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_setattr.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_setattr.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7d3e311
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_setattr.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MQ_SETATTR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mq_setattr
+\(em set message queue attributes
+(\fBREALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <mqueue.h>
+.P
+int mq_setattr(mqd_t \fImqdes\fP, const struct mq_attr *restrict \fImqstat\fP,
+    struct mq_attr *restrict \fIomqstat\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImq_setattr\fR()
+function shall set attributes associated with the open message queue
+description referenced by the message queue descriptor specified by
+.IR mqdes .
+.P
+The message queue attributes corresponding to the following members
+defined in the
+.BR mq_attr
+structure shall be set to the specified values upon successful
+completion of
+\fImq_setattr\fR():
+.IP "\fImq_flags\fP" 12
+The value of this member is the bitwise-logical OR of zero or more of
+O_NONBLOCK and any implementation-defined flags.
+.P
+The values of the
+.IR mq_maxmsg ,
+.IR mq_msgsize ,
+and
+.IR mq_curmsgs
+members of the
+.BR mq_attr
+structure shall be ignored by
+\fImq_setattr\fR().
+.P
+If
+.IR omqstat
+is non-NULL, the
+\fImq_setattr\fR()
+function shall store, in the location referenced by
+.IR omqstat ,
+the previous message queue attributes and the current queue status.
+These values shall be the same as would be returned by a call to
+\fImq_getattr\fR()
+at that point.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the function shall return a value of zero
+and the attributes of the message queue shall have been changed as
+specified.
+.P
+Otherwise, the message queue attributes shall be unchanged, and the
+function shall return a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImq_setattr\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR mqdes
+argument is not a valid message queue descriptor.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImq_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_send\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgrcv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgsnd\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<mqueue.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_timedreceive.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_timedreceive.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..02f351c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_timedreceive.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MQ_TIMEDRECEIVE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mq_timedreceive
+\(em receive a message from a message queue
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <mqueue.h>
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+ssize_t mq_timedreceive(mqd_t \fImqdes\fP, char *restrict \fImsg_ptr\fP,
+    size_t \fImsg_len\fP, unsigned *restrict \fImsg_prio\fP,
+    const struct timespec *restrict \fIabstime\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fImq_receive\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_timedsend.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_timedsend.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..483c3e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_timedsend.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MQ_TIMEDSEND "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mq_timedsend
+\(em send a message to a message queue
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <mqueue.h>
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+int mq_timedsend(mqd_t \fImqdes\fP, const char *\fImsg_ptr\fP, size_t \fImsg_len\fP,
+    unsigned \fImsg_prio\fP, const struct timespec *\fIabstime\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fImq_send\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_unlink.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_unlink.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c3c5efb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mq_unlink.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,127 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MQ_UNLINK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mq_unlink
+\(em remove a message queue
+(\fBREALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <mqueue.h>
+.P
+int mq_unlink(const char *\fIname\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImq_unlink\fR()
+function shall remove the message queue named by the string name.
+If one or more processes have the message queue open when
+\fImq_unlink\fR()
+is called, destruction of the message queue shall be postponed until
+all references to the message queue have been closed. However, the
+\fImq_unlink\fR()
+call need not block until all references have been closed; it may return
+immediately.
+.P
+After a successful call to
+\fImq_unlink\fR(),
+reuse of the name shall subsequently cause
+\fImq_open\fR()
+to behave as if no message queue of this name exists (that is,
+\fImq_open\fR()
+will fail if O_CREAT is not set, or will create a new message queue if
+O_CREAT is set).
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the function shall return a value of zero.
+Otherwise, the named message queue shall be unchanged by this function
+call, and the function shall return a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImq_unlink\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Permission is denied to unlink the named message queue.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+The named message queue does not exist.
+.P
+The
+\fImq_unlink\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of the
+.IR name
+argument exceeds
+{_POSIX_PATH_MAX}
+on systems that do not support the XSI option
+or exceeds
+{_XOPEN_PATH_MAX}
+on XSI systems,
+or has a pathname component that is longer than
+{_POSIX_NAME_MAX}
+on systems that do not support the XSI option
+or longer than
+{_XOPEN_NAME_MAX}
+on XSI systems.
+A call to
+\fImq_unlink\fR()
+with a
+.IR name
+argument that contains the same message queue name as was previously
+used in a successful
+\fImq_open\fR()
+call shall not give an
+.BR [ENAMETOOLONG] 
+error.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+A future version might require the
+\fImq_open\fR()
+and
+\fImq_unlink\fR()
+functions to have semantics similar to normal file system operations.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImq_close\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgrcv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgsnd\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<mqueue.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mrand48.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mrand48.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f295641
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/mrand48.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MRAND48 "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+mrand48
+\(em generate uniformly distributed pseudo-random signed long integers
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+long mrand48(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIdrand48\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/msgctl.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/msgctl.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..558b1b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/msgctl.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,188 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MSGCTL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+msgctl
+\(em XSI message control operations
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/msg.h>
+.P
+int msgctl(int \fImsqid\fP, int \fIcmd\fP, struct msqid_ds *\fIbuf\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImsgctl\fR()
+function operates on XSI message queues (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.225" ", " "Message Queue").
+It is unspecified whether this function interoperates with the
+realtime interprocess communication facilities defined in
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime".
+.P
+The
+\fImsgctl\fR()
+function shall provide message control operations as specified by
+.IR cmd .
+The following values for
+.IR cmd ,
+and the message control operations they specify, are:
+.IP IPC_STAT 12
+Place the current value of each member of the
+.BR msqid_ds
+data structure associated with
+.IR msqid
+into the structure pointed to by
+.IR buf .
+The contents of this structure are defined in
+.IR <sys/msg.h> .
+.IP IPC_SET 12
+Set the value of the following members of the
+.BR msqid_ds
+data structure associated with
+.IR msqid
+to the corresponding value found in the structure pointed to by
+.IR buf :
+.RS 12 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+msg_perm.uid
+msg_perm.gid
+msg_perm.mode
+msg_qbytes
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Also, the
+.IR msg_ctime
+timestamp shall be set to the current time, as described in
+.IR "Section 2.7.1" ", " "IPC General Description".
+.P
+IPC_SET can only be executed by a process with appropriate privileges
+or that has an effective user ID equal to the value of
+.BR msg_perm.cuid
+or
+.BR msg_perm.uid
+in the
+.BR msqid_ds
+data structure associated with
+.IR msqid .
+Only a process with appropriate privileges can raise the value of
+.BR msg_qbytes .
+.RE
+.IP IPC_RMID 12
+Remove the message queue identifier specified by
+.IR msqid
+from the system and destroy the message queue and
+.BR msqid_ds
+data structure associated with it. IPC_RMD can only be executed by a
+process with appropriate privileges or one that has an effective user
+ID equal to the value of
+.BR msg_perm.cuid
+or
+.BR msg_perm.uid
+in the
+.BR msqid_ds
+data structure associated with
+.IR msqid .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fImsgctl\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImsgctl\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+The argument
+.IR cmd
+is IPC_STAT and the calling process does not have read permission; see
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication".
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR msqid
+is not a valid message queue identifier; or the value of
+.IR cmd
+is not a valid command.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The argument
+.IR cmd
+is IPC_RMID or IPC_SET
+and the effective user ID of the calling process is not equal to that
+of a process with appropriate privileges and it is not equal to the
+value of
+.BR msg_perm.cuid
+or
+.BR msg_perm.uid
+in the data structure associated with
+.IR msqid .
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The argument
+.IR cmd
+is IPC_SET, an attempt is being made to increase to the value of
+.BR msg_qbytes ,
+and the effective user ID of the calling process does not have
+appropriate privileges.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The POSIX Realtime Extension defines alternative interfaces for interprocess communication
+(IPC). Application developers who need to use IPC should design their
+applications so that modules using the IPC routines described in
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication"
+can be easily modified to use the alternative interfaces.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication",
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime",
+.IR "\fImq_close\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_getattr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_notify\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_receive\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_send\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_setattr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_unlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgrcv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgsnd\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.225" ", " "Message Queue",
+.IR "\fB<sys_msg.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/msgget.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/msgget.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a3ccdd6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/msgget.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MSGGET "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+msgget
+\(em get the XSI message queue identifier
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/msg.h>
+.P
+int msgget(key_t \fIkey\fP, int \fImsgflg\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImsgget\fR()
+function operates on XSI message queues (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.225" ", " "Message Queue").
+It is unspecified whether this function interoperates with the
+realtime interprocess communication facilities defined in
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime".
+.P
+The
+\fImsgget\fR()
+function shall return the message queue identifier associated with the
+argument
+.IR key .
+.P
+A message queue identifier, associated message queue, and data
+structure (see
+.IR <sys/msg.h> ),
+shall be created for the argument
+.IR key
+if one of the following is true:
+.IP " *" 4
+The argument
+.IR key
+is equal to IPC_PRIVATE.
+.IP " *" 4
+The argument
+.IR key
+does not already have a message queue identifier associated with it,
+and (\fImsgflg\fP & IPC_CREAT) is non-zero.
+.P
+Upon creation, the data structure associated with the new message queue
+identifier shall be initialized as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+.BR msg_perm.cuid ,
+.BR msg_perm.uid ,
+.BR msg_perm.cgid ,
+and
+.BR msg_perm.gid
+shall be set to the effective user ID and effective group ID,
+respectively, of the calling process.
+.IP " *" 4
+The low-order 9 bits of
+.BR msg_perm.mode
+shall be set to the low-order 9 bits of
+.IR msgflg .
+.IP " *" 4
+.BR msg_qnum ,
+.BR msg_lspid ,
+.BR msg_lrpid ,
+.BR msg_stime ,
+and
+.BR msg_rtime
+shall be set to 0.
+.IP " *" 4
+.BR msg_ctime
+shall be set to the current time, as described in
+.IR "Section 2.7.1" ", " "IPC General Description".
+.IP " *" 4
+.BR msg_qbytes
+shall be set to the system limit.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fImsgget\fR()
+shall return a non-negative integer, namely a message queue identifier.
+Otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImsgget\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+A message queue identifier exists for the argument
+.IR key ,
+but operation permission as specified by the low-order 9 bits of
+.IR msgflg
+would not be granted; see
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication".
+.TP
+.BR EEXIST
+A message queue identifier exists for the argument
+.IR key
+but ((\fImsgflg\fP & IPC_CREAT) && (\fImsgflg\fP & IPC_EXCL)) is
+non-zero.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A message queue identifier does not exist for the argument
+.IR key
+and (\fImsgflg\fP & IPC_CREAT) is 0.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+A message queue identifier is to be created but the system-imposed
+limit on the maximum number of allowed message queue identifiers
+system-wide would be exceeded.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The POSIX Realtime Extension defines alternative interfaces for interprocess communication
+(IPC). Application developers who need to use IPC should design their
+applications so that modules using the IPC routines described in
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication"
+can be easily modified to use the alternative interfaces.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication",
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime",
+.IR "\fIftok\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_close\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_getattr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_notify\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_receive\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_send\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_setattr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_unlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgrcv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgsnd\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.225" ", " "Message Queue",
+.IR "\fB<sys_msg.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/msgrcv.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/msgrcv.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef29b1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/msgrcv.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,272 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MSGRCV "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+msgrcv
+\(em XSI message receive operation
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/msg.h>
+.P
+ssize_t msgrcv(int \fImsqid\fP, void *\fImsgp\fP, size_t \fImsgsz\fP, long \fImsgtyp\fP,
+    int \fImsgflg\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImsgrcv\fR()
+function operates on XSI message queues (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.225" ", " "Message Queue").
+It is unspecified whether this function interoperates with the
+realtime interprocess communication facilities defined in
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime".
+.P
+The
+\fImsgrcv\fR()
+function shall read a message from the queue associated with the message
+queue identifier specified by
+.IR msqid
+and place it in the user-defined buffer pointed to by
+.IR msgp .
+.P
+The application shall ensure that the argument
+.IR msgp
+points to a user-defined buffer that contains first a field of type
+.BR long
+specifying the type of the message, and then a data portion that holds
+the data bytes of the message. The structure below is an example of
+what this user-defined buffer might look like:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+struct mymsg {
+    long    mtype;     /* Message type. */
+    char    mtext[1];  /* Message text. */
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The structure member
+.IR mtype
+is the received message's type as specified by the sending process.
+.P
+The structure member
+.IR mtext
+is the text of the message.
+.P
+The argument
+.IR msgsz
+specifies the size in bytes of
+.IR mtext .
+The received message shall be truncated to
+.IR msgsz
+bytes if it is larger than
+.IR msgsz
+and (\fImsgflg\fP & MSG_NOERROR) is non-zero.
+The truncated part of the message shall be lost and no indication of
+the truncation shall be given to the calling process.
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR msgsz
+is greater than
+{SSIZE_MAX},
+the result is implementation-defined.
+.P
+The argument
+.IR msgtyp
+specifies the type of message requested as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR msgtyp
+is 0, the first message on the queue shall be received.
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR msgtyp
+is greater than 0, the first message of type
+.IR msgtyp
+shall be received.
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR msgtyp
+is less than 0, the first message of the lowest type that is less than
+or equal to the absolute value of
+.IR msgtyp
+shall be received.
+.P
+The argument
+.IR msgflg
+specifies the action to be taken if a message of the desired type is
+not on the queue. These are as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+If (\fImsgflg\fP & IPC_NOWAIT)
+is non-zero, the calling thread shall return immediately with a return
+value of \(mi1 and
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [ENOMSG] .
+.IP " *" 4
+If (\fImsgflg\fP & IPC_NOWAIT) is 0, the calling thread shall suspend
+execution until one of the following occurs:
+.RS 4 
+.IP -- 4
+A message of the desired type is placed on the queue.
+.IP -- 4
+The message queue identifier
+.IR msqid
+is removed from the system; when this occurs,
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EIDRM] 
+and \(mi1 shall be returned.
+.IP -- 4
+The calling thread receives a signal that is to be caught; in this case
+a message is not received and the calling thread resumes execution in
+the manner prescribed in
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)".
+.RE
+.P
+Upon successful completion, the following actions are taken with
+respect to the data structure associated with
+.IR msqid :
+.IP " *" 4
+.BR msg_qnum
+shall be decremented by 1.
+.IP " *" 4
+.BR msg_lrpid
+shall be set to the process ID of the calling process.
+.IP " *" 4
+.BR msg_rtime
+shall be set to the current time, as described in
+.IR "Section 2.7.1" ", " "IPC General Description".
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fImsgrcv\fR()
+shall return a value equal to the number of bytes actually placed
+into the buffer
+.IR mtext .
+Otherwise, no message shall be received,
+\fImsgrcv\fR()
+shall return \(mi1, and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImsgrcv\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR E2BIG
+The value of
+.IR mtext
+is greater than
+.IR msgsz
+and (\fImsgflg\fP & MSG_NOERROR) is 0.
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Operation permission is denied to the calling process; see
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication".
+.TP
+.BR EIDRM
+The message queue identifier
+.IR msqid
+is removed from the system.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fImsgrcv\fR()
+function was interrupted by a signal.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+.IR msqid
+is not a valid message queue identifier.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMSG
+The queue does not contain a message of the desired type and
+(\fImsgflg\fP & IPC_NOWAIT) is non-zero.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Receiving a Message"
+.P
+The following example receives the first message on the queue (based on
+the value of the
+.IR msgtyp
+argument, 0). The queue is identified by the
+.IR msqid
+argument (assuming that the value has previously been set). This call
+specifies that an error should be reported if no message is available,
+but not if the message is too large. The message size is calculated
+directly using the
+.IR sizeof
+operator.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/msg.h>
+\&...
+int result;
+int msqid;
+struct message {
+    long type;
+    char text[20];
+} msg;
+long msgtyp = 0;
+\&...
+result = msgrcv(msqid, (void *) &msg, sizeof(msg.text),
+         msgtyp, MSG_NOERROR | IPC_NOWAIT);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The POSIX Realtime Extension defines alternative interfaces for interprocess communication
+(IPC). Application developers who need to use IPC should design their
+applications so that modules using the IPC routines described in
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication"
+can be easily modified to use the alternative interfaces.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication",
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime",
+.IR "\fImq_close\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_getattr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_notify\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_receive\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_send\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_setattr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_unlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgsnd\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.225" ", " "Message Queue",
+.IR "\fB<sys_msg.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/msgsnd.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/msgsnd.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8c1c5b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/msgsnd.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,239 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MSGSND "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+msgsnd
+\(em XSI message send operation
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/msg.h>
+.P
+int msgsnd(int \fImsqid\fP, const void *\fImsgp\fP, size_t \fImsgsz\fP, int \fImsgflg\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImsgsnd\fR()
+function operates on XSI message queues (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.225" ", " "Message Queue").
+It is unspecified whether this function interoperates with the
+realtime interprocess communication facilities defined in
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime".
+.P
+The
+\fImsgsnd\fR()
+function shall send a message to the queue associated with the
+message queue identifier specified by
+.IR msqid .
+.P
+The application shall ensure that the argument
+.IR msgp
+points to a user-defined buffer that contains first a field of type
+.BR long
+specifying the type of the message, and then a data portion that holds
+the data bytes of the message. The structure below is an example of
+what this user-defined buffer might look like:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+struct mymsg {
+    long   mtype;       /* Message type. */
+    char   mtext[1];    /* Message text. */
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The structure member
+.IR mtype
+is a non-zero positive type
+.BR long
+that can be used by the receiving process for message selection.
+.P
+The structure member
+.IR mtext
+is any text of length
+.IR msgsz
+bytes. The argument
+.IR msgsz
+can range from 0 to a system-imposed maximum.
+.P
+The argument
+.IR msgflg
+specifies the action to be taken if one or more of the following is
+true:
+.IP " *" 4
+The number of bytes already on the queue is equal to
+.BR msg_qbytes ;
+see
+.IR <sys/msg.h> .
+.IP " *" 4
+The total number of messages on all queues system-wide is equal to the
+system-imposed limit.
+.P
+These actions are as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+If (\fImsgflg\fP & IPC_NOWAIT)
+is non-zero, the message shall not be sent and the calling thread
+shall return immediately.
+.IP " *" 4
+If (\fImsgflg\fP & IPC_NOWAIT) is 0, the calling thread shall suspend
+execution until one of the following occurs:
+.RS 4 
+.IP -- 4
+The condition responsible for the suspension no longer exists, in which
+case the message is sent.
+.IP -- 4
+The message queue identifier
+.IR msqid
+is removed from the system; when this occurs,
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EIDRM] 
+and \(mi1 shall be returned.
+.IP -- 4
+The calling thread receives a signal that is to be caught; in this case
+the message is not sent and the calling thread resumes execution in the
+manner prescribed in
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)".
+.RE
+.br
+.P
+Upon successful completion, the following actions are taken with
+respect to the data structure associated with
+.IR msqid ;
+see
+.IR <sys/msg.h> :
+.IP " *" 4
+.BR msg_qnum
+shall be incremented by 1.
+.IP " *" 4
+.BR msg_lspid
+shall be set to the process ID of the calling process.
+.IP " *" 4
+.BR msg_stime
+shall be set to the current time, as described in
+.IR "Section 2.7.1" ", " "IPC General Description".
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fImsgsnd\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, no message shall be sent,
+\fImsgsnd\fR()
+shall return \(mi1, and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImsgsnd\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Operation permission is denied to the calling process; see
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication".
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The message cannot be sent for one of the reasons cited above and
+(\fImsgflg\fP & IPC_NOWAIT) is non-zero.
+.TP
+.BR EIDRM
+The message queue identifier
+.IR msqid
+is removed from the system.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fImsgsnd\fR()
+function was interrupted by a signal.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR msqid
+is not a valid message queue identifier, or the value of
+.IR mtype
+is less than 1; or the value of
+.IR msgsz
+is greater than the system-imposed limit.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Sending a Message"
+.P
+The following example sends a message to the queue identified by the
+.IR msqid
+argument (assuming that value has previously been set). This call
+specifies that an error should be reported if no message is available.
+The message size is calculated directly using the
+.IR sizeof
+operator.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/msg.h>
+\&...
+int result;
+int msqid;
+struct message {
+    long type;
+    char text[20];
+} msg;
+.P
+msg.type = 1;
+strcpy(msg.text, "This is message 1");
+\&...
+result = msgsnd(msqid, (void *) &msg, sizeof(msg.text), IPC_NOWAIT);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The POSIX Realtime Extension defines alternative interfaces for interprocess communication
+(IPC). Application developers who need to use IPC should design their
+applications so that modules using the IPC routines described in
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication"
+can be easily modified to use the alternative interfaces.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication",
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime",
+.IR "\fImq_close\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_getattr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_notify\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_receive\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_send\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_setattr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_unlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsgrcv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.225" ", " "Message Queue",
+.IR "\fB<sys_msg.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/msync.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/msync.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..833a4ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/msync.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,191 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MSYNC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+msync
+\(em synchronize memory with physical storage
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/mman.h>
+.P
+int msync(void *\fIaddr\fP, size_t \fIlen\fP, int \fIflags\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImsync\fR()
+function shall write all modified data to permanent storage locations,
+if any, in those whole pages containing any part of the address space of
+the process starting at address
+.IR addr
+and continuing for
+.IR len
+bytes. If no such storage exists,
+\fImsync\fR()
+need not have any effect. If requested, the
+\fImsync\fR()
+function shall then invalidate cached copies of data.
+.P
+The implementation may require that
+.IR addr
+be a multiple of the page size as returned by
+\fIsysconf\fR().
+.P
+For mappings to files, the
+\fImsync\fR()
+function shall ensure that all write operations are completed as
+defined for synchronized I/O data integrity completion. It is
+unspecified whether the implementation also writes out other file
+attributes. When the
+\fImsync\fR()
+function is called on MAP_PRIVATE mappings, any modified data shall
+not be written to the underlying object and shall not cause such data
+to be made visible to other processes. It is unspecified whether data
+in MAP_PRIVATE mappings has any permanent storage locations.
+The effect of
+\fImsync\fR()
+on a shared memory object or a typed memory object is unspecified.
+The behavior of this function is unspecified if the mapping was not
+established by a call to
+\fImmap\fR().
+.P
+The
+.IR flags
+argument is constructed from the bitwise-inclusive OR of one or more of
+the following flags defined in the
+.IR <sys/mman.h> 
+header:
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB
+lw(1.5i) | lw(2i).
+Symbolic Constant!Description
+_
+MS_ASYNC!Perform asynchronous writes.
+MS_SYNC!Perform synchronous writes.
+MS_INVALIDATE!Invalidate cached data.
+.TE
+.P
+When MS_ASYNC is specified,
+\fImsync\fR()
+shall return immediately once all the write operations are initiated or
+queued for servicing; when MS_SYNC is specified,
+\fImsync\fR()
+shall not return until all write operations are completed as defined for
+synchronized I/O data integrity completion. Either MS_ASYNC or MS_SYNC
+shall be specified, but not both.
+.P
+When MS_INVALIDATE is specified,
+\fImsync\fR()
+shall invalidate all cached copies of mapped data that are inconsistent
+with the permanent storage locations such that subsequent references
+shall obtain data that was consistent with the permanent storage
+locations sometime between the call to
+\fImsync\fR()
+and the first subsequent memory reference to the data.
+.P
+If
+\fImsync\fR()
+causes any write to a file, the file's last data modification and
+last file status change timestamps shall be marked for update.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fImsync\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImsync\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBUSY
+Some or all of the addresses in the range starting at
+.IR addr
+and continuing for
+.IR len
+bytes are locked, and MS_INVALIDATE is specified.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR flags
+is invalid.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+The addresses in the range starting at
+.IR addr
+and continuing for
+.IR len
+bytes are outside the range allowed for the address space of a process
+or specify one or more pages that are not mapped.
+.P
+The
+\fImsync\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR addr
+is not a multiple of the page size as returned by
+\fIsysconf\fR().
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fImsync\fR()
+function is only supported if the Synchronized Input and Output
+option is supported, and thus need not be available on all implementations.
+.P
+The
+\fImsync\fR()
+function should be used by programs that require a memory object to be
+in a known state; for example, in building transaction facilities.
+.P
+Normal system activity can cause pages to be written to disk.
+Therefore, there are no guarantees that
+\fImsync\fR()
+is the only control over when pages are or are not written to disk.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fImsync\fR()
+function writes out data in a mapped region to the permanent
+storage for the underlying object. The call to
+\fImsync\fR()
+ensures data integrity of the file.
+.P
+After the data is written out, any cached data may be invalidated if
+the MS_INVALIDATE
+flag was specified. This is useful on systems that do not support
+read/write consistency.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImmap\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_mman.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/munlock.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/munlock.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fbb27e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/munlock.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MUNLOCK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+munlock
+\(em unlock a range of process address space
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/mman.h>
+.P
+int munlock(const void *\fIaddr\fP, size_t \fIlen\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fImlock\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/munlockall.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/munlockall.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b746eda
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/munlockall.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MUNLOCKALL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+munlockall
+\(em unlock the address space of a process
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/mman.h>
+.P
+int munlockall(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fImlockall\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/munmap.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/munmap.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e737a96
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/munmap.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+'\" et
+.TH MUNMAP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+munmap
+\(em unmap pages of memory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/mman.h>
+.P
+int munmap(void *\fIaddr\fP, size_t \fIlen\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fImunmap\fR()
+function shall remove any mappings for those entire pages containing
+any part of the address space of the process starting at
+.IR addr
+and continuing for
+.IR len
+bytes. Further references to these pages shall result in the
+generation of a SIGSEGV signal to the process.
+If there are no mappings in the specified address range, then
+\fImunmap\fR()
+has no effect.
+.P
+The implementation may require that
+.IR addr
+be a multiple of the page size as returned by
+\fIsysconf\fR().
+.P
+If a mapping to be removed was private, any modifications made in this
+address range shall be discarded.
+.P
+Any memory locks (see
+.IR "\fImlock\fR\^(\|)"
+and
+.IR "\fImlockall\fR\^(\|)")
+associated with this address range shall be removed, as if by an
+appropriate call to
+\fImunlock\fR().
+.P
+If a mapping removed from a typed memory object causes the
+corresponding address range of the memory pool to be inaccessible by
+any process in the system except through allocatable mappings (that is,
+mappings of typed memory objects opened with the
+POSIX_TYPED_MEM_MAP_ALLOCATABLE flag), then that range of the memory
+pool shall become deallocated and may become available to satisfy
+future typed memory allocation requests.
+.P
+A mapping removed from a typed memory object opened with the
+POSIX_TYPED_MEM_MAP_ALLOCATABLE flag shall not affect in any way the
+availability of that typed memory for allocation.
+.P
+The behavior of this function is unspecified if the mapping was not
+established by a call to
+\fImmap\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fImunmap\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fImunmap\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+Addresses in the range [\fIaddr\fP,\fIaddr\fP+\fIlen\fR) are outside
+the valid range for the address space of a process.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR len
+argument is 0.
+.P
+The
+\fImunmap\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR addr
+argument is not a multiple of the page size as returned by
+\fIsysconf\fR().
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fImunmap\fR()
+function corresponds to SVR4, just as the
+\fImmap\fR()
+function does.
+.P
+It is possible that an application has applied process memory locking
+to a region that contains shared memory. If this has occurred, the
+\fImunmap\fR()
+call ignores those locks and, if necessary, causes those locks to be
+removed.
+.P
+Most implementations require that
+.IR addr
+is a multiple of the page size as returned by
+\fIsysconf\fR().
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImlockall\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImmap\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_typed_mem_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_mman.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nan.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nan.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a287256
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nan.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+'\" et
+.TH NAN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+nan,
+nanf,
+nanl
+\(em return quiet NaN
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double nan(const char *\fItagp\fP);
+float nanf(const char *\fItagp\fP);
+long double nanl(const char *\fItagp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The function call \fInan\fR("\fIn-char-sequence\fR") shall be
+equivalent to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+strtod("NAN(\fIn-char-sequence\fP)", (char **) NULL);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The function call \fInan\fR("\|") shall be equivalent to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+strtod("NAN()", (char **) NULL)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If
+.IR tagp
+does not point to an
+.IR n -\c
+.BR char
+sequence or an empty string, the function call shall be equivalent to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+strtod("NAN", (char **) NULL)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Function calls to
+\fInanf\fR()
+and
+\fInanl\fR()
+are equivalent to the corresponding function calls to
+\fIstrtof\fR()
+and
+\fIstrtold\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return a quiet NaN, if available, with content
+indicated through
+.IR tagp .
+.P
+If the implementation does not support quiet NaNs, these functions
+shall return zero.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrtod\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nanosleep.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nanosleep.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5d03044
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nanosleep.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+'\" et
+.TH NANOSLEEP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+nanosleep
+\(em high resolution sleep
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+int nanosleep(const struct timespec *\fIrqtp\fP, struct timespec *\fIrmtp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fInanosleep\fR()
+function shall cause the current thread to be suspended from execution
+until either the time interval specified by the
+.IR rqtp
+argument has elapsed or a signal is delivered to the calling thread,
+and its action is to invoke a signal-catching function or to terminate
+the process. The suspension time may be longer than requested because
+the argument value is rounded up to an integer multiple of the sleep
+resolution or because of the scheduling of other activity by the
+system. But, except for the case of being interrupted by a signal, the
+suspension time shall not be less than the time specified by
+.IR rqtp ,
+as measured by the system clock CLOCK_REALTIME.
+.P
+The use of the
+\fInanosleep\fR()
+function has no effect on the action or blockage of any signal.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the
+\fInanosleep\fR()
+function returns because the requested time has elapsed, its return
+value shall be zero.
+.P
+If the
+\fInanosleep\fR()
+function returns because it has been interrupted by a signal, it
+shall return a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the interruption. If the
+.IR rmtp
+argument is non-NULL, the
+.BR timespec
+structure referenced by it is updated to contain the amount of time
+remaining in the interval (the requested time minus the time actually
+slept). The
+.IR rqtp
+and
+.IR rmtp
+arguments may point to the same object. If the
+.IR rmtp
+argument is NULL, the remaining time is not returned.
+.P
+If
+\fInanosleep\fR()
+fails, it shall return a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fInanosleep\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fInanosleep\fR()
+function was interrupted by a signal.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR rqtp
+argument specified a nanosecond value less than zero or greater than or
+equal to 1\|000 million.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+It is common to suspend execution of a thread for an interval in order
+to poll the status of a non-interrupting function. A large number of
+actual needs can be met with a simple extension to
+\fIsleep\fR()
+that provides finer resolution.
+.P
+In the POSIX.1\(hy1990 standard and SVR4, it is possible to implement such a routine,
+but the frequency of wakeup is limited by the resolution of the
+\fIalarm\fR()
+and
+\fIsleep\fR()
+functions. In 4.3 BSD, it is possible to write such a routine using
+no static storage and reserving no system facilities. Although it is
+possible to write a function with similar functionality to
+\fIsleep\fR()
+using the remainder of the
+.IR timer_* (\|)
+functions, such a function requires the use of signals and the
+reservation of some signal number. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that
+\fInanosleep\fR()
+be non-intrusive of the signals function.
+.P
+The
+\fInanosleep\fR()
+function shall return a value of 0 on success and \(mi1 on failure or if
+interrupted. This latter case is different from
+\fIsleep\fR().
+This was done because the remaining time is returned via an argument
+structure pointer,
+.IR rmtp ,
+instead of as the return value.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIclock_nanosleep\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsleep\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nearbyint.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nearbyint.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a913672
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nearbyint.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+'\" et
+.TH NEARBYINT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+nearbyint,
+nearbyintf,
+nearbyintl
+\(em floating-point rounding functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double nearbyint(double \fIx\fP);
+float nearbyintf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double nearbyintl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall round their argument to an integer value in
+floating-point format, using the current rounding direction and without
+raising the inexact floating-point exception.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the rounded
+integer value.
+The result shall have the same sign as
+.IR x .
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0, \(+-0 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-Inf,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The integral value returned by these functions need not be expressible
+as an
+.BR intmax_t .
+The return value should be tested before assigning it to an integer
+type to avoid the undefined results of an integer overflow.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/newlocale.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/newlocale.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..32b1fe8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/newlocale.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,267 @@
+'\" et
+.TH NEWLOCALE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+newlocale
+\(em create or modify a locale object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <locale.h>
+.P
+locale_t newlocale(int \fIcategory_mask\fP, const char *\fIlocale\fP,
+    locale_t \fIbase\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fInewlocale\fR()
+function shall create a new locale object or modify an existing one.
+If the
+.IR base
+argument is (\c
+.BR locale_t )0,
+a new locale object shall be created. It is unspecified whether the
+locale object pointed to by
+.IR base
+shall be modified, or freed and a new locale object created.
+.P
+The
+.IR category_mask
+argument specifies the locale categories to be set or modified.
+Values for
+.IR category_mask
+shall be constructed by a bitwise-inclusive OR of the symbolic
+constants
+.IR LC_CTYPE_MASK ,
+.IR LC_NUMERIC_MASK ,
+.IR LC_TIME_MASK ,
+.IR LC_COLLATE_MASK ,
+.IR LC_MONETARY_MASK ,
+and
+.IR LC_MESSAGES_MASK ,
+or any of the other implementation-defined
+.IR LC_*_MASK
+values defined in
+.IR <locale.h> .
+.P
+For each category with the corresponding bit set in
+.IR category_mask
+the data from the locale named by
+.IR locale
+shall be used. In the case of modifying an existing locale object, the
+data from the locale named by
+.IR locale
+shall replace the existing data within the locale object. If a completely
+new locale object is created, the data for all sections not requested by
+.IR category_mask
+shall be taken from the default locale.
+.P
+The following preset values of
+.IR locale
+are defined for all settings of
+.IR category_mask :
+.IP "\&\(dqPOSIX\(dq" 12
+Specifies the minimal environment for C-language translation called
+the POSIX locale.
+.IP "\&\(dqC\(dq" 12
+Equivalent to
+.BR \(dqPOSIX\(dq .
+.IP "\&\(dq\|\(dq" 12
+Specifies an implementation-defined native environment. This corresponds
+to the value of the associated environment variables,
+.IR LC_*
+and
+.IR LANG ;
+see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale"
+and
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables".
+.P
+If the
+.IR base
+argument is not (\c
+.BR locale_t )0
+and the
+\fInewlocale\fR()
+function call succeeds, the contents of
+.IR base
+are unspecified. Applications shall ensure that they stop using
+.IR base
+as a locale object before calling
+\fInewlocale\fR().
+If the function call fails and the
+.IR base
+argument is not (\c
+.BR locale_t )0,
+the contents of
+.IR base
+shall remain valid and unchanged.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR base
+argument is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE, or is not a
+valid locale object handle and is not (\c
+.BR locale_t )0.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fInewlocale\fR()
+function shall return a handle which the caller may use on subsequent
+calls to
+\fIduplocale\fR(),
+\fIfreelocale\fR(),
+and other functions taking a
+.BR locale_t
+argument.
+.P
+Upon failure, the
+\fInewlocale\fR()
+function shall return (\c
+.BR locale_t )0
+and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fInewlocale\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+There is not enough memory available to create the locale object or
+load the locale data.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR category_mask
+contains a bit that does not correspond to a valid category.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+For any of the categories in
+.IR category_mask ,
+the locale data is not available.
+.P
+The
+\fInewlocale\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR locale
+argument is not a valid string pointer.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Constructing a Locale Object from Different Locales"
+.P
+The following example shows the construction of a locale where the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category data comes from a locale
+.IR loc1
+and the
+.IR LC_TIME
+category data from a locale
+.IR tok2 :
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <locale.h>
+\&...
+locale_t loc, new_loc;
+.P
+/* Get the "loc1" data. */
+.P
+loc = newlocale (LC_CTYPE_MASK, "loc1", (locale_t)0);
+if (loc == (locale_t) 0)
+    abort ();
+.P
+/* Get the "loc2" data. */
+.P
+new_loc = newlocale (LC_TIME_MASK, "loc2", loc);
+if (new_loc != (locale_t) 0)
+    /* We don t abort if this fails. In this case this
+       simply used to unchanged locale object. */
+    loc = new_loc;
+.P
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Freeing up a Locale Object"
+.P
+The following example shows a code fragment to free a locale object
+created by
+\fInewlocale\fR():
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <locale.h>
+\&...
+.P
+/* Every locale object allocated with newlocale() should be
+ * freed using freelocale():
+ */
+.P
+locale_t loc;
+.P
+/* Get the locale. */
+.P
+loc = newlocale (LC_CTYPE_MASK | LC_TIME_MASK, "locname", (locale_t)0);
+.P
+/* ... Use the locale object ... */
+\&...
+.P
+/* Free the locale object resources. */
+freelocale (loc);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Handles for locale objects created by the
+\fInewlocale\fR()
+function should either be released by a corresponding call to
+\fIfreelocale\fR(),
+or be used as a base locale to another
+\fInewlocale\fR()
+call.
+.P
+The special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE must not be passed for the
+.IR base
+argument, even when returned by the
+\fIuselocale\fR()
+function.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIduplocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfreelocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nextafter.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nextafter.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ce9758a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nextafter.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,196 @@
+'\" et
+.TH NEXTAFTER "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+nextafter,
+nextafterf,
+nextafterl,
+nexttoward,
+nexttowardf,
+nexttowardl
+\(em next representable floating-point number
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double nextafter(double \fIx\fP, double \fIy\fP);
+float nextafterf(float \fIx\fP, float \fIy\fP);
+long double nextafterl(long double \fIx\fP, long double \fIy\fP);
+double nexttoward(double \fIx\fP, long double \fIy\fP);
+float nexttowardf(float \fIx\fP, long double \fIy\fP);
+long double nexttowardl(long double \fIx\fP, long double \fIy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fInextafter\fR(),
+\fInextafterf\fR(),
+and
+\fInextafterl\fR()
+functions shall compute the next representable floating-point value
+following
+.IR x
+in the direction of
+.IR y .
+Thus, if
+.IR y
+is less than
+.IR x ,
+\fInextafter\fR()
+shall return the largest representable floating-point number less than
+.IR x .
+The
+\fInextafter\fR(),
+\fInextafterf\fR(),
+and
+\fInextafterl\fR()
+functions shall return
+.IR y
+if
+.IR x
+equals
+.IR y .
+.P
+The
+\fInexttoward\fR(),
+\fInexttowardf\fR(),
+and
+\fInexttowardl\fR()
+functions shall be equivalent to the corresponding
+\fInextafter\fR()
+functions, except that the second parameter shall have type
+.BR "long double"
+and the functions shall return
+.IR y
+converted to the type of the function if
+.IR x
+equals
+.IR y .
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the next
+representable floating-point value following
+.IR x
+in the direction of
+.IR y .
+.P
+If
+.IR x ==\c
+.IR y ,
+.IR y
+(of the type
+.IR x )
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is finite and the correct function value would overflow, a range error
+shall occur and \(+-HUGE_VAL, \(+-HUGE_VALF, and \(+-HUGE_VALL (with
+the same sign as
+.IR x )
+shall be returned as appropriate for the return type of the function.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+or
+.IR y
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x !=\c
+.IR y
+and the correct function value is subnormal, zero, or underflows,
+a range error shall occur, and
+.br
+the correct function value (if representable) or
+.br
+0.0 shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The correct value overflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the overflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The correct value is subnormal or underflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.P
+When
+.IR <tgmath.h> 
+is included, note that the return type of
+\fInextafter\fR()
+depends on the generic typing deduced from both arguments, while the
+return type of
+\fInexttoward\fR()
+depends only on the generic typing of the first argument.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<tgmath.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nftw.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nftw.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c571f1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nftw.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,358 @@
+'\" et
+.TH NFTW "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+nftw
+\(em walk a file tree
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ftw.h>
+.P
+int nftw(const char *\fIpath\fP, int (*\fIfn\fP)(const char *,
+    const struct stat *, int, struct FTW *), int \fIfd_limit\fP, int \fIflags\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fInftw\fR()
+function shall recursively descend the directory hierarchy rooted in
+.IR path .
+The
+\fInftw\fR()
+function has a similar effect to
+\fIftw\fR()
+except that it takes an additional argument
+.IR flags ,
+which is a bitwise-inclusive OR of zero or more of the following flags:
+.IP FTW_CHDIR 12
+If set,
+\fInftw\fR()
+shall change the current working directory to each directory as it
+reports files in that directory. If clear,
+\fInftw\fR()
+shall not change the current working directory.
+.IP FTW_DEPTH 12
+If set,
+\fInftw\fR()
+shall report all files in a directory before reporting the directory
+itself. If clear,
+\fInftw\fR()
+shall report any directory before reporting the files in that directory.
+.IP FTW_MOUNT 12
+If set,
+\fInftw\fR()
+shall only report files in the same file system as
+.IR path .
+If clear,
+\fInftw\fR()
+shall report all files encountered during the walk.
+.IP FTW_PHYS 12
+If set,
+\fInftw\fR()
+shall perform a physical walk and shall not follow symbolic links.
+.P
+If FTW_PHYS is clear and FTW_DEPTH is set,
+\fInftw\fR()
+shall follow links instead of reporting them, but shall not report any
+directory that would be a descendant of itself. If FTW_PHYS is clear
+and FTW_DEPTH is clear,
+\fInftw\fR()
+shall follow links instead of reporting them, but shall not report the
+contents of any directory that would be a descendant of itself.
+.P
+At each file it encounters,
+\fInftw\fR()
+shall call the user-supplied function
+.IR fn
+with four arguments:
+.IP " *" 4
+The first argument is the pathname of the object.
+.IP " *" 4
+The second argument is a pointer to the
+.BR stat
+buffer containing information on the object, filled in as if
+\fIfstatat\fR(),
+\fIstat\fR(),
+or
+\fIlstat\fR()
+had been called to retrieve the information.
+.IP " *" 4
+The third argument is an integer giving additional information. Its
+value is one of the following:
+.RS 4 
+.IP FTW_D 10
+The object is a directory.
+.IP FTW_DNR 10
+The object is a directory that cannot be read. The
+.IR fn
+function shall not be called for any of its descendants.
+.IP FTW_DP 10
+The object is a directory and subdirectories have been visited. (This
+condition shall only occur if the FTW_DEPTH flag is included in
+.IR flags .)
+.IP FTW_F 10
+The object is a non-directory file.
+.IP FTW_NS 10
+The
+\fIstat\fR()
+function failed on the object because of lack of appropriate
+permission. The
+.BR stat
+buffer passed to
+.IR fn
+is undefined. Failure of
+\fIstat\fR()
+for any other reason is considered an error and
+\fInftw\fR()
+shall return \(mi1.
+.IP FTW_SL 10
+The object is a symbolic link. (This condition shall only occur if the
+FTW_PHYS flag is included in
+.IR flags .)
+.IP FTW_SLN 10
+The object is a symbolic link that does not name an existing file.
+(This condition shall only occur if the FTW_PHYS flag is not included in
+.IR flags .)
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+The fourth argument is a pointer to an
+.BR FTW
+structure.
+The value of
+.BR base
+is the offset of the object's filename in the pathname passed as the
+first argument to
+.IR fn .
+The value of
+.BR level
+indicates depth relative to the root of the walk, where the root level
+is 0.
+.P
+The results are unspecified if the application-supplied
+.IR fn
+function does not preserve the current working directory.
+.P
+The argument
+.IR fd_limit
+sets the maximum number of file descriptors that shall be used by
+\fInftw\fR()
+while traversing the file tree. At most one file descriptor shall be
+used for each directory level.
+.P
+The
+\fInftw\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fInftw\fR()
+function shall continue until the first of the following conditions
+occurs:
+.IP " *" 4
+An invocation of
+.IR fn
+shall return a non-zero value, in which case
+\fInftw\fR()
+shall return that value.
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+\fInftw\fR()
+function detects an error other than
+.BR [EACCES] 
+(see FTW_DNR and FTW_NS above),
+in which case
+\fInftw\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.IP " *" 4
+The tree is exhausted, in which case
+\fInftw\fR()
+shall return 0.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fInftw\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied for any component of
+.IR path
+or read permission is denied for
+.IR path ,
+or
+.IR fn
+returns \(mi1 and does not reset
+.IR errno .
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR path
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of
+.IR path
+names an existing file that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link
+to a directory.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+A field in the
+.BR stat
+structure cannot be represented correctly in the current programming
+environment for one or more files found in the file hierarchy.
+.P
+The
+\fInftw\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+Too many files are currently open in the system.
+.P
+In addition,
+.IR errno
+may be set if the function pointed to by
+.IR fn
+causes
+.IR errno
+to be set.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following program traverses the directory tree under the path named
+in its first command-line argument, or under the current directory if
+no argument is supplied. It displays various information about each
+file. The second command-line argument can be used to specify characters
+that control the value assigned to the
+.IR flags
+argument when calling
+\fInftw\fR().
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <ftw.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+.P
+static int
+display_info(const char *fpath, const struct stat *sb,
+    int tflag, struct FTW *ftwbuf)
+{
+    printf("%-3s %2d %7jd   %-40s %d %s\en",
+        (tflag == FTW_D) ?   "d"   : (tflag == FTW_DNR) ? "dnr" :
+        (tflag == FTW_DP) ?  "dp"  : (tflag == FTW_F) ?
+            (S_ISBLK(sb->st_mode) ? "f b" :
+             S_ISCHR(sb->st_mode) ? "f c" :
+             S_ISFIFO(sb->st_mode) ? "f p" :
+             S_ISREG(sb->st_mode) ? "f r" :
+             S_ISSOCK(sb->st_mode) ? "f s" : "f ?") :
+        (tflag == FTW_NS) ?  "ns"  : (tflag == FTW_SL) ?  "sl" :
+        (tflag == FTW_SLN) ? "sln" : "?",
+        ftwbuf->level, (intmax_t) sb->st_size,
+        fpath, ftwbuf->base, fpath + ftwbuf->base);
+    return 0;           /* To tell nftw() to continue */
+}
+.P
+int
+main(int argc, char *argv[])
+{
+    int flags = 0;
+.P
+    if (argc > 2 && strchr(argv[2], 'd') != NULL)
+        flags |= FTW_DEPTH;
+    if (argc > 2 && strchr(argv[2], 'p') != NULL)
+        flags |= FTW_PHYS;
+.P
+    if (nftw((argc < 2) ? "." : argv[1], display_info, 20, flags) == -1)
+    {
+        perror("nftw");
+        exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+    }
+.P
+    exit(EXIT_SUCCESS);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fInftw\fR()
+function may allocate dynamic storage during its operation. If
+\fInftw\fR()
+is forcibly terminated, such as by
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+or
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR()
+being executed by the function pointed to by
+.IR fn
+or an interrupt routine,
+\fInftw\fR()
+does not have a chance to free that storage, so it remains permanently
+allocated. A safe way to handle interrupts is to store the fact that an
+interrupt has occurred, and arrange to have the function pointed to by
+.IR fn
+return a non-zero value at its next invocation.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfdopendir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfstatat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIreaddir\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<ftw.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nice.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nice.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..76e04c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nice.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,122 @@
+'\" et
+.TH NICE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+nice
+\(em change the nice value of a process
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int nice(int \fIincr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fInice\fR()
+function shall add the value of
+.IR incr
+to the nice value of the calling process. A nice value of a process is
+a non-negative number for which a more positive value shall result in
+less favorable scheduling.
+.P
+A maximum nice value of 2*{NZERO}\(mi1 and a minimum nice value of 0
+shall be imposed by the system. Requests for values above or below
+these limits shall result in the nice value being set to the
+corresponding limit. Only a process with appropriate privileges can
+lower the nice value.
+.P
+Calling the
+\fInice\fR()
+function has no effect on the priority of processes or threads with
+policy SCHED_FIFO or SCHED_RR.
+The effect on processes or threads with other scheduling policies is
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+The nice value set with
+\fInice\fR()
+shall be applied to the process. If the process is multi-threaded,
+the nice value shall affect all system scope threads in the process.
+.P
+As \(mi1 is a permissible return value in a successful situation, an
+application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0, then call
+\fInice\fR(),
+and if it returns \(mi1, check to see whether
+.IR errno
+is non-zero.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fInice\fR()
+shall return the new nice value \(mi{NZERO}.
+Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned, the nice value of the process
+shall not be changed, and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fInice\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The
+.IR incr
+argument is negative and the calling process does not have appropriate
+privileges.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Changing the Nice Value"
+.P
+The following example adds the value of the
+.IR incr
+argument, \(mi20, to the nice value of the calling process.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+\&...
+int incr = -20;
+int ret;
+.P
+ret = nice(incr);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIgetpriority\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<limits.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nl_langinfo.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nl_langinfo.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f98b5c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nl_langinfo.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,205 @@
+'\" et
+.TH NL_LANGINFO "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+nl_langinfo,
+nl_langinfo_l
+\(em language information
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <langinfo.h>
+.P
+char *nl_langinfo(nl_item \fIitem\fP);
+char *nl_langinfo_l(nl_item \fIitem\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fInl_langinfo\fR()
+and
+\fInl_langinfo_l\fR()
+functions shall return a pointer to a string containing information
+relevant to the particular language or cultural area defined in the
+current locale, or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively (see
+.IR <langinfo.h> ).
+The manifest constant names and values of
+.IR item
+are defined in
+.IR <langinfo.h> .
+For example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+nl_langinfo(ABDAY_1)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would return a pointer to the string
+.BR \(dqDom\(dq 
+if the identified language was Portuguese, and
+.BR \(dqSun\(dq 
+if the identified language was English.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+nl_langinfo_l(ABDAY_1, loc)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+would return a pointer to the string
+.BR \(dqDom\(dq 
+if the identified language of the locale represented by
+.IR loc
+was Portuguese, and
+.BR \(dqSun\(dq 
+if the identified language of the locale represented by
+.IR loc
+was English.
+.P
+The
+\fInl_langinfo\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fInl_langinfo_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+In a locale where
+.IR langinfo
+data is not defined, these functions shall return a pointer to the
+corresponding string in the POSIX locale. In all locales, these functions
+shall return a pointer to an empty string if
+.IR item
+contains an invalid setting.
+.P
+The application shall not modify the string returned. The pointer
+returned by
+\fInl_langinfo\fR()
+might be invalidated or the string content might be overwritten by a
+subsequent call to
+\fInl_langinfo\fR()
+in any thread or to
+\fInl_langinfo_l\fR()
+in the same thread or the initial thread, by subsequent calls to
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+with a category corresponding to the category of
+.IR item
+(see
+.IR <langinfo.h> )
+or the category LC_ALL, or by subsequent calls to
+\fIuselocale\fR()
+which change the category corresponding to the category of
+.IR item .
+The pointer returned by
+\fInl_langinfo_l\fR()
+might be invalidated or the string content might be overwritten by a
+subsequent call to
+\fInl_langinfo_l\fR()
+in the same thread or to
+\fInl_langinfo\fR()
+in any thread, or by subsequent calls to
+\fIfreelocale\fR()
+or
+\fInewlocale\fR()
+which free or modify the locale object that was passed to
+\fInl_langinfo_l\fR().
+.SH "ERRORS"
+No errors are defined.
+.br
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Getting Date and Time Formatting Information"
+.P
+The following example returns a pointer to a string containing date and
+time formatting information, as defined in the
+.IR LC_TIME
+category of the current locale.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <time.h>
+#include <langinfo.h>
+\&...
+strftime(datestring, sizeof(datestring), nl_langinfo(D_T_FMT), tm);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The array pointed to by the return value should not be modified by the
+program, but may be modified by further calls to these functions.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The possible interactions between internal data used by
+\fInl_langinfo\fR()
+and
+\fInl_langinfo_l\fR()
+are complicated by the fact that
+\fInl_langinfo_l\fR()
+must be thread-safe but
+\fInl_langinfo\fR()
+need not be. The various implementation choices are:
+.IP " 1." 4
+\fInl_langinfo_l\fR()
+and
+\fInl_langinfo\fR()
+use separate buffers, or at least one of them does not use an internal
+string buffer. In this case there are no interactions.
+.IP " 2." 4
+\fInl_langinfo_l\fR()
+and
+\fInl_langinfo\fR()
+share an internal per-thread buffer. There can be interactions, but
+only in the same thread.
+.IP " 3." 4
+\fInl_langinfo_l\fR()
+uses an internal per-thread buffer, and
+\fInl_langinfo\fR()
+uses (in all threads) the same buffer that
+\fInl_langinfo_l\fR()
+uses in the initial thread. There can be interactions, but only when
+\fInl_langinfo_l\fR()
+is called in the initial thread.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<langinfo.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<nl_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nrand48.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nrand48.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..62ad737
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/nrand48.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH NRAND48 "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+nrand48
+\(em generate uniformly distributed pseudo-random non-negative long integers
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+long nrand48(unsigned short \fIxsubi\fP[3]);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIdrand48\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ntohl.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ntohl.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c7ca169
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ntohl.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH NTOHL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ntohl,
+ntohs
+\(em convert values between host and network byte order
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <arpa/inet.h>
+.P
+uint32_t ntohl(uint32_t \fInetlong\fP);
+uint16_t ntohs(uint16_t \fInetshort\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIhtonl\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/open.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/open.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f56a01b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/open.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,779 @@
+'\" et
+.TH OPEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+open, openat
+\(em open file relative to directory file descriptor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+.P
+int open(const char *\fIpath\fP, int \fIoflag\fP, ...);
+int openat(int \fIfd\fP, const char *\fIpath\fP, int \fIoflag\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIopen\fR()
+function shall establish the connection between a file and a file
+descriptor. It shall create an open file description that refers to a
+file and a file descriptor that refers to that open file description.
+The file descriptor is used by other I/O functions to refer to that
+file. The
+.IR path
+argument points to a pathname naming the file.
+.P
+The
+\fIopen\fR()
+function shall return a file descriptor for the named file that is the
+lowest file descriptor not currently open for that process. The open
+file description is new, and therefore the file descriptor shall not
+share it with any other process in the
+system. The FD_CLOEXEC file descriptor flag associated with the new
+file descriptor shall be cleared unless the O_CLOEXEC flag is set in
+.IR oflag .
+.P
+The file offset used to mark the current position within the file shall
+be set to the beginning of the file.
+.P
+The file status flags and file access modes of the open file
+description shall be set according to the value of
+.IR oflag .
+.P
+Values for
+.IR oflag
+are constructed by a bitwise-inclusive OR of flags from the following
+list, defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> .
+Applications shall specify exactly one of the first five values
+(file access modes) below in the value of
+.IR oflag :
+.IP O_EXEC 14
+Open for execute only (non-directory files). The result is unspecified
+if this flag is applied to a directory.
+.IP O_RDONLY 14
+Open for reading only.
+.IP O_RDWR 14
+Open for reading and writing. The result is undefined if this flag is
+applied to a FIFO.
+.IP O_SEARCH 14
+Open directory for search only. The result is unspecified if this flag
+is applied to a non-directory file.
+.IP O_WRONLY 14
+Open for writing only.
+.P
+Any combination of the following may be used:
+.IP O_APPEND 14
+If set, the file offset shall be set to the end of the file prior
+to each write.
+.IP O_CLOEXEC 14
+If set, the FD_CLOEXEC flag for the new file descriptor shall be set.
+.IP O_CREAT 14
+If the file exists, this flag has no effect except as noted under O_EXCL
+below. Otherwise, the file shall be created; the user ID of the file shall
+be set to the effective user ID of the process; the group ID of the file
+shall be set to the group ID of the file's parent directory or to the
+effective group ID of the process; and the access permission bits (see
+.IR <sys/stat.h> )
+of the file mode shall be set to the value of the argument following the
+.IR oflag
+argument taken as type
+.BR mode_t
+modified as follows: a bitwise AND is performed on the file-mode bits
+and the corresponding bits in the complement of the process' file mode
+creation mask. Thus, all bits in the file mode whose corresponding bit
+in the file mode creation mask is set are cleared. When bits other than
+the file permission bits are set, the effect is unspecified. The argument
+following the
+.IR oflag
+argument does not affect whether the file is open for reading, writing,
+or for both. Implementations shall provide a way to initialize the file's
+group ID to the group ID of the parent directory. Implementations may,
+but need not, provide an implementation-defined way to initialize the
+file's group ID to the effective group ID of the calling process.
+.IP O_DIRECTORY 14
+If
+.IR path
+resolves to a non-directory file, fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [ENOTDIR] .
+.IP O_DSYNC 14
+Write I/O operations on the file descriptor shall complete as defined
+by synchronized I/O data integrity completion.
+.IP O_EXCL 14
+If O_CREAT and O_EXCL are set,
+\fIopen\fR()
+shall fail if the file exists. The check for the existence of the file
+and the creation of the file if it does not exist shall be atomic with
+respect to other threads executing
+\fIopen\fR()
+naming the same filename in the same directory with O_EXCL and O_CREAT
+set. If O_EXCL and O_CREAT are set, and
+.IR path
+names a symbolic link,
+\fIopen\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EEXIST] ,
+regardless of the contents of the symbolic link. If O_EXCL is set and
+O_CREAT is not set, the result is undefined.
+.IP O_NOCTTY 14
+If set and
+.IR path
+identifies a terminal device,
+\fIopen\fR()
+shall not cause the terminal device to become the controlling terminal
+for the process. If
+.IR path
+does not identify a terminal device, O_NOCTTY shall be ignored.
+.IP O_NOFOLLOW 14
+If
+.IR path
+names a symbolic link, fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [ELOOP] .
+.IP O_NONBLOCK 14
+When opening a FIFO with O_RDONLY or O_WRONLY set:
+.RS 14 
+.IP " *" 4
+If O_NONBLOCK is set, an
+\fIopen\fR()
+for reading-only shall return without delay. An
+\fIopen\fR()
+for writing-only shall return an error if no process currently has the
+file open for reading.
+.IP " *" 4
+If O_NONBLOCK is clear, an
+\fIopen\fR()
+for reading-only shall block the calling thread until a thread opens
+the file for writing. An
+\fIopen\fR()
+for writing-only shall block the calling thread until a thread opens
+the file for reading.
+.P
+When opening a block special or character special file that supports
+non-blocking opens:
+.IP " *" 4
+If O_NONBLOCK is set, the
+\fIopen\fR()
+function shall return without blocking for the device to be ready or
+available. Subsequent behavior of the device is device-specific.
+.IP " *" 4
+If O_NONBLOCK is clear, the
+\fIopen\fR()
+function shall block the calling thread until the device is ready or
+available before returning.
+.P
+Otherwise, the O_NONBLOCK flag shall not cause an error, but it is
+unspecified whether the file status flags will include the O_NONBLOCK
+flag.
+.RE
+.IP O_RSYNC 14
+Read I/O operations on the file descriptor shall complete at the same
+level of integrity as specified by the O_DSYNC and
+O_SYNC flags. If both O_DSYNC and O_RSYNC are set in
+.IR oflag ,
+all I/O operations on the file descriptor shall complete as defined by
+synchronized I/O data integrity completion. If both O_SYNC and O_RSYNC
+are set in flags, all I/O operations on the file descriptor shall
+complete as defined by synchronized I/O file integrity completion.
+.IP O_SYNC 14
+Write I/O operations on the file descriptor shall complete as defined
+by synchronized I/O file integrity completion.
+.RS 14 
+.P
+The O_SYNC flag shall be supported for regular files, even if the
+Synchronized Input and Output option is not supported.
+.RE
+.IP O_TRUNC 14
+If the file exists and is a regular file, and the file is successfully
+opened O_RDWR or O_WRONLY, its length shall be truncated to 0, and
+the mode and owner shall be unchanged. It shall have no effect on FIFO
+special files or terminal device files. Its effect on other file types
+is implementation-defined. The result of using O_TRUNC without either
+O_RDWR or O_WRONLY is undefined.
+.IP O_TTY_INIT 14
+If
+.IR path
+identifies a terminal device other than a pseudo-terminal, the device
+is not already open in any process, and either O_TTY_INIT is set in
+.IR oflag
+or O_TTY_INIT has the value zero,
+\fIopen\fR()
+shall set any non-standard
+.BR termios
+structure terminal parameters to a state that provides conforming
+behavior; see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 11.2" ", " "Parameters that Can be Set".
+It is unspecified whether O_TTY_INIT has any effect if the device is
+already open in any process. If
+.IR path
+identifies the slave side of a pseudo-terminal that is not already open
+in any process,
+\fIopen\fR()
+shall set any non-standard
+.BR termios
+structure terminal parameters to a state that provides conforming
+behavior, regardless of whether O_TTY_INIT is set. If
+.IR path
+does not identify a terminal device, O_TTY_INIT shall be ignored.
+.P
+If O_CREAT is set and the file did not previously exist, upon successful
+completion,
+\fIopen\fR()
+shall mark for update the last data access, last data modification,
+and last file status change timestamps of the file and the last data
+modification and last file status change timestamps of the parent
+directory.
+.P
+If O_TRUNC is set and the file did previously exist, upon successful
+completion,
+\fIopen\fR()
+shall mark for update the last data modification and last file status
+change timestamps of the file.
+.P
+If both the O_SYNC and O_DSYNC flags are set, the effect is as if only
+the O_SYNC flag was set.
+.P
+If
+.IR path
+refers to a STREAMS file,
+.IR oflag
+may be constructed from O_NONBLOCK OR'ed with either O_RDONLY, O_WRONLY,
+or O_RDWR. Other flag values are not applicable to STREAMS devices and
+shall have no effect on them. The value O_NONBLOCK affects the operation
+of STREAMS drivers and certain functions applied to file descriptors
+associated with STREAMS files. For STREAMS drivers, the implementation
+of O_NONBLOCK is device-specific.
+.P
+The application shall ensure that it specifies the O_TTY_INIT flag on the
+first open of a terminal device since system boot or since the device
+was closed by the process that last had it open. The application need
+not specify the O_TTY_INIT flag when opening pseudo-terminals.
+If
+.IR path
+names the master side of a pseudo-terminal device, then it is unspecified
+whether
+\fIopen\fR()
+locks the slave side so that it cannot be opened. Conforming applications
+shall call
+\fIunlockpt\fR()
+before opening the slave side.
+.P
+The largest value that can be represented correctly in an object of type
+.BR off_t
+shall be established as the offset maximum in the open file description.
+.P
+The
+\fIopenat\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIopen\fR()
+function except in the case where
+.IR path
+specifies a relative path. In this case the file to be opened is
+determined relative to the directory associated with the file descriptor
+.IR fd
+instead of the current working directory. If the file descriptor was
+opened without O_SEARCH, the function shall check whether directory
+searches are permitted using the current permissions of the directory
+underlying the file descriptor. If the file descriptor was opened with
+O_SEARCH, the function shall not perform the check.
+.P
+The
+.IR oflag
+parameter and the optional fourth parameter correspond exactly to the
+parameters of
+\fIopen\fR().
+.P
+If
+\fIopenat\fR()
+is passed the special value AT_FDCWD in the
+.IR fd
+parameter, the current working directory shall be used and the behavior
+shall be identical to a call to
+\fIopen\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall open the file and
+return a non-negative integer representing the lowest numbered unused
+file descriptor. Otherwise, these functions shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error. If \(mi1 is returned, no files shall be created
+or modified.
+.br
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied on a component of the path prefix, or the
+file exists and the permissions specified by
+.IR oflag
+are denied, or the file does not exist and write permission is denied
+for the parent directory of the file to be created, or O_TRUNC is
+specified and write permission is denied.
+.TP
+.BR EEXIST
+O_CREAT and O_EXCL are set, and the named file exists.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was caught during
+\fIopen\fR().
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The implementation does not support synchronized I/O for this file.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+The
+.IR path
+argument names a STREAMS file and a hangup or error occurred during the
+\fIopen\fR().
+.TP
+.BR EISDIR
+The named file is a directory and
+.IR oflag
+includes O_WRONLY or O_RDWR.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument, or O_NOFOLLOW was specified and the
+.IR path
+argument names a symbolic link.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+The maximum allowable number of files is currently open in the system.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+O_CREAT is not set and a component of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file, or O_CREAT is set and a component of
+the path prefix of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file, or
+.IR path
+points to an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT " or " ENOTDIR
+.br
+O_CREAT is set, and the
+.IR path
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters. If
+.IR path
+names an existing file, an
+.BR [ENOENT] 
+error shall not occur.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSR
+The
+.IR path
+argument names a STREAMS-based file and the system is unable to
+allocate a STREAM.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+The directory or file system that would contain the new file cannot be
+expanded, the file does not exist, and O_CREAT is specified.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory; or O_CREAT and O_EXCL
+are not specified, the
+.IR path
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters, and the last pathname component names an existing file that
+is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory; or O_DIRECTORY
+was specified and the
+.IR path
+argument resolves to a non-directory file.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+O_NONBLOCK is set, the named file is a FIFO, O_WRONLY is set, and no
+process has the file open for reading.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+The named file is a character special or block special file, and the
+device associated with this special file does not exist.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The named file is a regular file and the size of the file cannot be
+represented correctly in an object of type
+.BR off_t .
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+The named file resides on a read-only file system and either O_WRONLY,
+O_RDWR, O_CREAT (if the file does not exist), or O_TRUNC is set in the
+.IR oflag
+argument.
+.P
+The
+\fIopenat\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+.IR fd
+was not opened with O_SEARCH and the permissions of the directory
+underlying
+.IR fd
+do not permit directory searches.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR path
+argument does not specify an absolute path and the
+.IR fd
+argument is neither AT_FDCWD nor a valid file descriptor open for
+reading or searching.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+The
+.IR path
+argument is not an absolute path and
+.IR fd
+is a file descriptor associated with a non-directory file.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The
+.IR path
+argument names the slave side of a pseudo-terminal device that is locked.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR oflag
+argument is not valid.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+The
+.IR path
+argument names a STREAMS file and the system is unable to allocate
+resources.
+.TP
+.BR ETXTBSY
+The file is a pure procedure (shared text) file that is being executed
+and
+.IR oflag
+is O_WRONLY or O_RDWR.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Opening a File for Writing by the Owner"
+.P
+The following example opens the file
+.BR /tmp/file ,
+either by creating it (if it does not already exist), or by truncating
+its length to 0 (if it does exist). In the former case, if the call
+creates a new file, the access permission bits in the file mode of the
+file are set to permit reading and writing by the owner, and to permit
+reading only by group members and others.
+.P
+If the call to
+\fIopen\fR()
+is successful, the file is opened for writing.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <fcntl.h>
+\&...
+int fd;
+mode_t mode = S_IRUSR | S_IWUSR | S_IRGRP | S_IROTH;
+char *pathname = "/tmp/file";
+\&...
+fd = open(pathname, O_WRONLY | O_CREAT | O_TRUNC, mode);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Opening a File Using an Existence Check"
+.P
+The following example uses the
+\fIopen\fR()
+function to try to create the
+.BR LOCKFILE
+file and open it for writing. Since the
+\fIopen\fR()
+function specifies the O_EXCL flag, the call fails if the file already
+exists. In that case, the program assumes that someone else is updating
+the password file and exits.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+#define LOCKFILE "/etc/ptmp"
+\&...
+int pfd; /* Integer for file descriptor returned by open() call. */
+\&...
+if ((pfd = open(LOCKFILE, O_WRONLY | O_CREAT | O_EXCL,
+    S_IRUSR | S_IWUSR | S_IRGRP | S_IROTH)) == -1)
+{
+    fprintf(stderr, "Cannot open /etc/ptmp. Try again later.\en");
+    exit(1);
+}
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Opening a File for Writing"
+.P
+The following example opens a file for writing, creating the file if it
+does not already exist. If the file does exist, the system truncates
+the file to zero bytes.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+#define LOCKFILE "/etc/ptmp"
+\&...
+int pfd;
+char pathname[PATH_MAX+1];
+\&...
+if ((pfd = open(pathname, O_WRONLY | O_CREAT | O_TRUNC,
+    S_IRUSR | S_IWUSR | S_IRGRP | S_IROTH)) == -1)
+{
+    perror("Cannot open output file\en"); exit(1);
+}
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not require that terminal parameters be automatically set to
+any state on first open, nor that they be reset after the last close. It
+is possible for a non-conforming application to leave a terminal device
+in a state where the next process to use that device finds it in a
+non-conforming state, but has no way of determining this. To ensure
+that the device is set to a conforming initial state, applications which
+perform a first open of a terminal (other than a pseudo-terminal) should
+do so using the O_TTY_INIT flag to set the parameters associated with
+the terminal to a conforming state.
+.P
+Except as specified in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, the flags allowed in
+.IR oflag
+are not mutually-exclusive and any number of them may be used
+simultaneously. Not all combinations of flags make sense. For example,
+using O_SEARCH | O_CREAT will successfully open a pre-existing directory
+for searching, but if there is no existing file by that name, then
+it is unspecified whether a regular file will be created. Likewise,
+if a non-directory file descriptor is successfully returned, it is
+unspecified whether that descriptor will have execute permissions as if
+by O_EXEC (note that it is unspecified whether O_EXEC and O_SEARCH have
+the same value).
+.SH RATIONALE
+Some implementations permit opening FIFOs with O_RDWR. Since FIFOs could
+be implemented in other ways, and since two file descriptors can be used
+to the same effect, this possibility is left as undefined.
+.P
+See
+.IR "\fIgetgroups\fR\^(\|)"
+about the group of a newly created file.
+.P
+The use of
+\fIopen\fR()
+to create a regular file is preferable to the use of
+\fIcreat\fR(),
+because the latter is redundant and included only for historical
+reasons.
+.P
+The use of the O_TRUNC flag on FIFOs and directories (pipes cannot be
+\fIopen\fR()-ed)
+must be permissible without unexpected side-effects (for example,
+\fIcreat\fR()
+on a FIFO must not remove data). Since terminal special files might have
+type-ahead data stored in the buffer, O_TRUNC should not affect their
+content, particularly if a program that normally opens a regular file
+should open the current controlling terminal instead. Other file types,
+particularly implementation-defined ones, are left implementation-defined.
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 permits
+.BR [EACCES] 
+to be returned for conditions other than those explicitly listed.
+.P
+The O_NOCTTY flag was added to allow applications to avoid unintentionally
+acquiring a controlling terminal as a side-effect of opening a terminal
+file. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not specify how a controlling terminal is acquired,
+but it allows an implementation to provide this on
+\fIopen\fR()
+if the O_NOCTTY flag is not set and other conditions specified in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface"
+are met.
+.P
+In historical implementations the value of O_RDONLY is zero. Because of
+that, it is not possible to detect the presence of O_RDONLY and another
+option. Future implementations should encode O_RDONLY and O_WRONLY as
+bit flags so that:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+O_RDONLY | O_WRONLY == O_RDWR
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+O_EXEC and O_SEARCH are specified as two of the five file access modes.
+Since O_EXEC does not apply to directories, and O_SEARCH only applies
+to directories, their values need not be distinct. Since O_RDONLY
+has historically had the value zero, implementations are not able to
+distinguish between O_SEARCH and O_SEARCH | O_RDONLY, and similarly
+for O_EXEC.
+.P
+In general, the
+\fIopen\fR()
+function follows the symbolic link if
+.IR path
+names a symbolic link. However, the
+\fIopen\fR()
+function, when called with O_CREAT and O_EXCL, is required to fail with
+.BR [EEXIST] 
+if
+.IR path
+names an existing symbolic link, even if the symbolic link refers
+to a nonexistent file. This behavior is required so that privileged
+applications can create a new file in a known location without the
+possibility that a symbolic link might cause the file to be created in
+a different location.
+.P
+For example, a privileged application that must create a file with a
+predictable name in a user-writable directory, such as the user's home
+directory, could be compromised if the user creates a symbolic link
+with that name that refers to a nonexistent file in a system
+directory. If the user can influence the contents of a file, the user
+could compromise the system by creating a new system configuration or
+spool file that would then be interpreted by the system. The test for a
+symbolic link which refers to a nonexisting file must be atomic with
+the creation of a new file.
+.P
+In addition, the
+\fIopen\fR()
+function refuses to open non-directories if the O_DIRECTORY flag is
+set. This avoids race conditions whereby a user might compromise the
+system by substituting a hard link to a sensitive file (e.g., a device
+or a FIFO) while a privileged application is running, where opening a
+file even for read access might have undesirable side-effects.
+.P
+In addition, the
+\fIopen\fR()
+function does not follow symbolic links if the O_NOFOLLOW flag is set.
+This avoids race conditions whereby a user might compromise the system
+by substituting a symbolic link to a sensitive file (e.g., a device)
+while a privileged application is running, where opening a file even
+for read access might have undesirable side-effects.
+.P
+The POSIX.1\(hy1990 standard required that the group ID of a newly created file be set to
+the group ID of its parent directory or to the effective group ID of
+the creating process. FIPS 151\(hy2 required that implementations provide a way
+to have the group ID be set to the group ID of the containing
+directory, but did not prohibit implementations also supporting a way
+to set the group ID to the effective group ID of the creating process.
+Conforming applications should not assume which group ID will be used. If
+it matters, an application can use
+\fIchown\fR()
+to set the group ID after the file is created, or determine under what
+conditions the implementation will set the desired group ID.
+.P
+The purpose of the
+\fIopenat\fR()
+function is to enable opening files in directories other than the
+current working directory without exposure to race conditions. Any part
+of the path of a file could be changed in parallel to a call to
+\fIopen\fR(),
+resulting in unspecified behavior. By opening a file descriptor for
+the target directory and using the
+\fIopenat\fR()
+function it can be guaranteed that the opened file is located relative
+to the desired directory. Some implementations use the
+\fIopenat\fR()
+function for other purposes as well. In some cases, if the
+.IR oflag
+parameter has the O_XATTR bit set, the returned file descriptor provides
+access to extended attributes. This functionality is not standardized
+here.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcreat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdirfd\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfdopendir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlseek\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImkdtemp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImknod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsymlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIumask\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunlockpt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+.IR "\fB<fcntl.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/open_memstream.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/open_memstream.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7e1a648
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/open_memstream.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,189 @@
+'\" et
+.TH OPEN_MEMSTREAM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+open_memstream, open_wmemstream
+\(em open a dynamic memory buffer stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+FILE *open_memstream(char **\fIbufp\fP, size_t *\fIsizep\fP);
+.P
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+FILE *open_wmemstream(wchar_t **\fIbufp\fP, size_t *\fIsizep\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIopen_memstream\fR()
+and
+\fIopen_wmemstream\fR()
+functions shall create an I/O stream associated with a dynamically
+allocated memory buffer. The stream shall be opened for writing and
+shall be seekable.
+.P
+The stream associated with a call to
+\fIopen_memstream\fR()
+shall be byte-oriented.
+.P
+The stream associated with a call to
+\fIopen_wmemstream\fR()
+shall be wide-oriented.
+.P
+The stream shall maintain a current position in the allocated buffer
+and a current buffer length. The position shall be initially set to
+zero (the start of the buffer). Each write to the stream shall start at
+the current position and move this position by the number of
+successfully written bytes for
+\fIopen_memstream\fR()
+or the number of successfully written wide characters for
+\fIopen_wmemstream\fR().
+The length shall be initially set to zero. If a write moves the
+position to a value larger than the current length, the current length
+shall be set to this position. In this case a null character for
+\fIopen_memstream\fR()
+or a null wide character for
+\fIopen_wmemstream\fR()
+shall be appended to the current buffer. For both functions the
+terminating null is not included in the calculation of the buffer
+length.
+.P
+After a successful
+\fIfflush\fR()
+or
+\fIfclose\fR(),
+the pointer referenced by
+.IR bufp
+shall contain the address of the buffer, and the variable pointed to by
+.IR sizep
+shall contain the smaller of the current buffer length and the
+number of bytes for
+\fIopen_memstream\fR(),
+or the number of wide characters for
+\fIopen_wmemstream\fR(),
+between the beginning of the buffer and the current file position indicator.
+.P
+After a successful
+\fIfflush\fR()
+the pointer referenced by
+.IR bufp
+and the variable referenced by
+.IR sizep
+remain valid only until the next write operation on the stream or a
+call to
+\fIfclose\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return a pointer to
+the object controlling the stream. Otherwise, a null pointer shall be
+returned, and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+.IR bufp
+or
+.IR sizep
+are NULL.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+{FOPEN_MAX}
+streams are currently open in the calling process.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Memory for the stream or the buffer could not be allocated.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+int
+main (void)
+{
+    FILE *stream;
+    char *buf;
+    size_t len;
+    off_t eob;
+.P
+    stream = open_memstream (&buf, &len);
+    if (stream == NULL)
+        /* handle error */ ;
+    fprintf (stream, "hello my world");
+    fflush (stream);
+    printf ("buf=%s, len=%zu\en", buf, len);
+    eob = ftello(stream);
+    fseeko (stream, 0, SEEK_SET);
+    fprintf (stream, "good-bye");
+    fseeko (stream, eob, SEEK_SET);
+    fclose (stream);
+    printf ("buf=%s, len=%zu\en", buf, len);
+    free (buf);
+    return 0;
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This program produces the following output:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+buf=hello my world, len=14
+buf=good-bye world, len=14
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The buffer created by these functions should be freed by the
+application after closing the stream, by means of a call to
+\fIfree\fR().
+.SH RATIONALE
+These functions are similar to
+\fIfmemopen\fR()
+except that the memory is always allocated dynamically by the function,
+and the stream is opened only for output.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfdopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfflush\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfmemopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfree\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfreopen\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/openat.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/openat.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a2c718d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/openat.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH OPENAT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+openat
+\(em open file relative to directory file descriptor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <fcntl.h>
+.P
+int openat(int \fIfd\fP, const char *\fIpath\fP, int \fIoflag\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/opendir.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/opendir.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1eaac54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/opendir.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH OPENDIR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+opendir
+\(em open directory associated with file descriptor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <dirent.h>
+.P
+DIR *opendir(const char *\fIdirname\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfdopendir\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/openlog.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/openlog.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7a14430
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/openlog.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH OPENLOG "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+openlog
+\(em open a connection to the logging facility
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <syslog.h>
+.P
+void openlog(const char *\fIident\fP, int \fIlogopt\fP, int \fIfacility\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIcloselog\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/optarg.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/optarg.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba63b21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/optarg.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+'\" et
+.TH OPTARG "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+optarg,
+opterr,
+optind,
+optopt
+\(em options parsing variables
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+extern char *optarg;
+extern int opterr, optind, optopt;
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIgetopt\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pathconf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pathconf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ab1759c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pathconf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PATHCONF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pathconf
+\(em get configurable pathname variables
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+long pathconf(const char *\fIpath\fP, int \fIname\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfpathconf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pause.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pause.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cbbeb51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pause.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PAUSE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pause
+\(em suspend the thread until a signal is received
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int pause(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpause\fR()
+function shall suspend the calling thread until delivery of a signal
+whose action is either to execute a signal-catching function or to
+terminate the process.
+.P
+If the action is to terminate the process,
+\fIpause\fR()
+shall not return.
+.P
+If the action is to execute a signal-catching function,
+\fIpause\fR()
+shall return after the signal-catching function returns.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Since
+\fIpause\fR()
+suspends thread execution indefinitely unless interrupted by a signal,
+there is no successful completion return value. A value of \(mi1 shall
+be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpause\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal is caught by the calling process and control is returned from
+the signal-catching function.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Many common uses of
+\fIpause\fR()
+have timing windows. The scenario involves checking a condition
+related to a signal and, if the signal has not occurred, calling
+\fIpause\fR().
+When the signal occurs between the check and the call to
+\fIpause\fR(),
+the process often blocks indefinitely. The
+\fIsigprocmask\fR()
+and
+\fIsigsuspend\fR()
+functions can be used to avoid this type of problem.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsigsuspend\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pclose.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pclose.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b764d57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pclose.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,221 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PCLOSE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pclose
+\(em close a pipe stream to or from a process
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int pclose(FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpclose\fR()
+function shall close a stream that was opened by
+\fIpopen\fR(),
+wait for the command to terminate, and return the termination status
+of the process that was running the command language interpreter.
+However, if a call caused the termination status to be unavailable to
+\fIpclose\fR(),
+then
+\fIpclose\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [ECHILD] 
+to report this situation. This can happen if the application calls one
+of the following functions:
+.IP " *" 4
+\fIwait\fR()
+.IP " *" 4
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+with a
+.IR pid
+argument less than or equal to 0 or equal to the process ID of the
+command line interpreter
+.IP " *" 4
+Any other function not defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 that could do one of the above
+.P
+In any case,
+\fIpclose\fR()
+shall not return before the child process created by
+\fIpopen\fR()
+has terminated.
+.P
+If the command language interpreter cannot be executed, the child
+termination status returned by
+\fIpclose\fR()
+shall be as if the command language interpreter terminated using
+.IR exit (127)
+or
+.IR _exit (127).
+.P
+The
+\fIpclose\fR()
+function shall not affect the termination status of any child of the
+calling process other than the one created by
+\fIpopen\fR()
+for the associated stream.
+.P
+If the argument
+.IR stream
+to
+\fIpclose\fR()
+is not a pointer to a stream created by
+\fIpopen\fR(),
+the result of
+\fIpclose\fR()
+is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful return,
+\fIpclose\fR()
+shall return the termination status of the command language
+interpreter. Otherwise,
+\fIpclose\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpclose\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ECHILD
+The status of the child process could not be obtained, as described
+above.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+There is a requirement that
+\fIpclose\fR()
+not return before the child process terminates. This is intended to
+disallow implementations that return
+.BR [EINTR] 
+if a signal is received while waiting. If
+\fIpclose\fR()
+returned before the child terminated, there would be no way for the
+application to discover which child used to be associated with the
+stream, and it could not do the cleanup itself.
+.P
+If the stream pointed to by
+.IR stream
+was not created by
+\fIpopen\fR(),
+historical implementations of
+\fIpclose\fR()
+return \(mi1 without setting
+.IR errno .
+To avoid requiring
+\fIpclose\fR()
+to set
+.IR errno
+in this case, POSIX.1\(hy2008 makes the behavior unspecified. An application
+should not use
+\fIpclose\fR()
+to close any stream that was not created by
+\fIpopen\fR().
+.P
+Some historical implementations of
+\fIpclose\fR()
+either block or ignore the signals SIGINT, SIGQUIT, and SIGHUP while
+waiting for the child process to terminate. Since this behavior is not
+described for the
+\fIpclose\fR()
+function in POSIX.1\(hy2008, such implementations are not conforming. Also, some
+historical implementations return
+.BR [EINTR] 
+if a signal is received, even though the child process has not
+terminated. Such implementations are also considered non-conforming.
+.P
+Consider, for example, an application that uses:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+popen("command", "r")
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+to start
+.IR command ,
+which is part of the same application. The parent writes a prompt to
+its standard output (presumably the terminal) and then reads from the
+\fIpopen\fR()ed
+stream. The child reads the response from the user, does some
+transformation on the response (pathname expansion, perhaps) and
+writes the result to its standard output. The parent process reads the
+result from the pipe, does something with it, and prints another
+prompt. The cycle repeats. Assuming that both processes do appropriate
+buffer flushing, this would be expected to work.
+.P
+To conform to POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+\fIpclose\fR()
+must use
+\fIwaitpid\fR(),
+or some similar function, instead of
+\fIwait\fR().
+.P
+The code sample below illustrates how the
+\fIpclose\fR()
+function might be implemented on a system conforming to POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int pclose(FILE *stream)
+{
+    int stat;
+    pid_t pid;
+.P
+    pid = <pid for process created for stream by popen()>
+    (void) fclose(stream);
+    while (waitpid(pid, &stat, 0) == -1) {
+        if (errno != EINTR){
+            stat = -1;
+            break;
+        }
+    }
+    return(stat);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/perror.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/perror.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..820f09c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/perror.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PERROR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+perror
+\(em write error messages to standard error
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+void perror(const char *\fIs\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIperror\fR()
+function shall map the error number accessed through the symbol
+.IR errno
+to a language-dependent error message, which shall be written to the
+standard error stream as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+First (if
+.IR s
+is not a null pointer and the character pointed to by
+.IR s
+is not the null byte), the string pointed to by
+.IR s
+followed by a
+<colon>
+and a
+<space>.
+.IP " *" 4
+Then an error message string followed by a
+<newline>.
+.P
+The contents of the error message strings shall be the same as those
+returned by
+\fIstrerror\fR()
+with argument
+.IR errno .
+.P
+The
+\fIperror\fR()
+function shall mark for update the last data modification and last file
+status change timestamps of the file associated with the standard error
+stream at some time between its successful completion and
+\fIexit\fR(),
+\fIabort\fR(),
+or the completion of
+\fIfflush\fR()
+or
+\fIfclose\fR()
+on
+.IR stderr .
+.P
+The
+\fIperror\fR()
+function shall not change the orientation of the standard error stream.
+.P
+On error,
+\fIperror\fR()
+shall set the error indicator for the stream to which
+.IR stderr
+points, and shall set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.P
+Since no value is returned, an application wishing to check for error
+situations should call
+.IR clearerr ( stderr )
+before calling
+\fIperror\fR(),
+then if
+.IR ferror ( stderr )
+returns non-zero, the value of
+.IR errno
+indicates which error occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIperror\fR()
+function shall not return a value.
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfputc\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Printing an Error Message for a Function"
+.P
+The following example replaces
+.IR bufptr
+with a buffer that is the necessary size. If an error occurs, the
+\fIperror\fR()
+function prints a message and the program exits.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+\&...
+char *bufptr;
+size_t szbuf;
+\&...
+if ((bufptr = malloc(szbuf)) == NULL) {
+    perror("malloc"); exit(2);
+}
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Application writers may prefer to use alternative interfaces instead of
+\fIperror\fR(),
+such as
+\fIstrerror_r\fR()
+in combination with
+\fIfprintf\fR().
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfprintf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfputc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpsiginfo\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrerror\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pipe.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pipe.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b31b682
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pipe.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PIPE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pipe
+\(em create an interprocess channel
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int pipe(int \fIfildes\fP[2]);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpipe\fR()
+function shall create a pipe and place two file descriptors, one
+each into the arguments
+.IR fildes [0]
+and
+.IR fildes [1],
+that refer to the open file descriptions for the read and write ends of
+the pipe. Their integer values shall be the two lowest available at the
+time of the
+\fIpipe\fR()
+call. The O_NONBLOCK and FD_CLOEXEC flags shall be clear on both file
+descriptors. (The
+\fIfcntl\fR()
+function can be used to set both these flags.)
+.P
+Data can be written to the file descriptor
+.IR fildes [1]
+and read from the file descriptor
+.IR fildes [0].
+A read on the file descriptor
+.IR fildes [0]
+shall access data written to the file descriptor
+.IR fildes [1]
+on a first-in-first-out basis. It is unspecified whether
+.IR fildes [0]
+is also open for writing and whether
+.IR fildes [1]
+is also open for reading.
+.P
+A process has the pipe open for reading (correspondingly writing) if it
+has a file descriptor open that refers to the read end,
+.IR fildes [0]
+(write end,
+.IR fildes [1]).
+.P
+The pipe's user ID shall be set to the effective user ID of the
+calling process.
+.P
+The pipe's group ID shall be set to the effective group ID of the
+calling process.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIpipe\fR()
+shall mark for update the last data access, last data modification,
+and last file status change timestamps of the pipe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned; otherwise, \(mi1 shall
+be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpipe\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All, or all but one, of the file descriptors available to the process
+are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+The number of simultaneously open files in the system would exceed a
+system-imposed limit.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Using a Pipe to Pass Data Between a Parent Process and a Child Process"
+.P
+The following example demonstrates the use of a pipe to transfer data
+between a parent process and a child process. Error handling is
+excluded, but otherwise this code demonstrates good practice when using
+pipes: after the
+\fIfork\fR()
+the two processes close the unused ends of the pipe before they
+commence transferring data.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+\&...
+.P
+int fildes[2];
+const int BSIZE = 100;
+char buf[BSIZE];
+ssize_t nbytes;
+int status;
+.P
+status = pipe(fildes);
+if (status == \(mi1 ) {
+    /* an error occurred */
+    ...
+}
+.P
+switch (fork()) {
+case \(mi1: /* Handle error */
+    break;
+.P
+case 0:  /* Child - reads from pipe */
+    close(fildes[1]);                       /* Write end is unused */
+    nbytes = read(fildes[0], buf, BSIZE);   /* Get data from pipe */
+    /* At this point, a further read would see end of file ... */
+    close(fildes[0]);                       /* Finished with pipe */
+    exit(EXIT_SUCCESS);
+.P
+default:  /* Parent - writes to pipe */
+    close(fildes[0]);                       /* Read end is unused */
+    write(fildes[1], "Hello world\en", 12);  /* Write data on pipe */
+    close(fildes[1]);                       /* Child will see EOF */
+    exit(EXIT_SUCCESS);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The wording carefully avoids using the verb ``to open'' in order to
+avoid any implication of use of
+\fIopen\fR();
+see also
+\fIwrite\fR().
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fcntl.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/poll.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/poll.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..796e431
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/poll.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,388 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POLL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+poll
+\(em input/output multiplexing
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <poll.h>
+.P
+int poll(struct pollfd \fIfds\fP[], nfds_t \fInfds\fP, int \fItimeout\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpoll\fR()
+function provides applications with a mechanism for multiplexing
+input/output over a set of file descriptors. For each member of the
+array pointed to by
+.IR fds ,
+\fIpoll\fR()
+shall examine the given file descriptor for the event(s) specified in
+.IR events .
+The number of
+.BR pollfd
+structures in the
+.IR fds
+array is specified by
+.IR nfds .
+The
+\fIpoll\fR()
+function shall identify those file descriptors on which an application
+can read or write data, or on which certain events have occurred.
+.P
+The
+.IR fds
+argument specifies the file descriptors to be examined
+and the events of interest for each file descriptor. It is a pointer to
+an array with one member for each open file descriptor of interest. The
+array's members are
+.BR pollfd
+structures within which
+.IR fd
+specifies an open file descriptor and
+.IR events
+and
+.IR revents
+are bitmasks constructed by OR'ing a combination of the following event
+flags:
+.IP POLLIN 12
+Data other than high-priority data may be read without blocking.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+For STREAMS, this flag is set in
+.IR revents
+even if the message is of zero length. This flag shall be equivalent
+to POLLRDNORM | POLLRDBAND.
+.RE
+.IP POLLRDNORM 12
+Normal data may be read without blocking.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+For STREAMS, data on priority band 0 may be read without blocking. This
+flag is set in
+.IR revents
+even if the message is of zero length.
+.RE
+.IP POLLRDBAND 12
+Priority data may be read without blocking.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+For STREAMS, data on priority bands greater than 0 may be read without
+blocking. This flag is set in
+.IR revents
+even if the message is of zero length.
+.RE
+.IP POLLPRI 12
+High-priority data may be read without blocking.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+For STREAMS, this flag is set in
+.IR revents
+even if the message is of zero length.
+.RE
+.IP POLLOUT 12
+Normal data may be written without blocking.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+For STREAMS, data on priority band 0 may be written without blocking.
+.RE
+.IP POLLWRNORM 12
+Equivalent to POLLOUT.
+.IP POLLWRBAND 12
+Priority data may be written.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+For STREAMS, data on priority bands greater than 0 may be written
+without blocking. If any priority band has been written to on this
+STREAM, this event only examines bands that have been written
+to at least once.
+.RE
+.IP POLLERR 12
+An error has occurred on the device or stream. This flag is only valid
+in the
+.IR revents
+bitmask; it shall be ignored in the
+.IR events
+member.
+.IP POLLHUP 12
+A device has been disconnected, or a pipe or FIFO has been closed by the
+last process that had it open for writing. Once set, the hangup state of a
+FIFO shall persist until some process opens the FIFO for writing or until
+all read-only file descriptors for the FIFO are closed. This event and
+POLLOUT are mutually-exclusive; a stream can never be writable if a hangup
+has occurred. However, this event and POLLIN, POLLRDNORM, POLLRDBAND,
+or POLLPRI are not mutually-exclusive. This flag is only valid in the
+.IR revents
+bitmask; it shall be ignored in the
+.IR events
+member.
+.IP POLLNVAL 12
+The specified
+.IR fd
+value is invalid. This flag is only valid in the
+.IR revents
+member; it shall ignored in the
+.IR events
+member.
+.P
+The significance and semantics of normal, priority, and high-priority
+data are file and device-specific.
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR fd
+is less than 0,
+.IR events
+shall be ignored, and
+.IR revents
+shall be set to 0 in that entry on return from
+\fIpoll\fR().
+.P
+In each
+.BR pollfd
+structure,
+\fIpoll\fR()
+shall clear the
+.IR revents
+member, except that where the application requested a report on a
+condition by setting one of the bits of
+.IR events
+listed above,
+\fIpoll\fR()
+shall set the corresponding bit in
+.IR revents
+if the requested condition is true. In addition,
+\fIpoll\fR()
+shall set the POLLHUP, POLLERR, and POLLNVAL flag in
+.IR revents
+if the condition is true, even if the application did not set the
+corresponding bit in
+.IR events .
+.P
+If none of the defined events have occurred on any selected file
+descriptor,
+\fIpoll\fR()
+shall wait at least
+.IR timeout
+milliseconds for an event to occur on any of the selected file
+descriptors. If the value of
+.IR timeout
+is 0,
+\fIpoll\fR()
+shall return immediately. If the value of
+.IR timeout
+is \(mi1,
+\fIpoll\fR()
+shall block until a requested event occurs or until the call is
+interrupted.
+.P
+Implementations may place limitations on the granularity of timeout
+intervals. If the requested timeout interval requires a finer
+granularity than the implementation supports, the actual timeout
+interval shall be rounded up to the next supported value.
+.P
+The
+\fIpoll\fR()
+function shall not be affected by the O_NONBLOCK flag.
+.P
+The
+\fIpoll\fR()
+function shall support regular files, terminal and pseudo-terminal
+devices, FIFOs, pipes, sockets and
+STREAMS-based files.
+The behavior of
+\fIpoll\fR()
+on elements of
+.IR fds
+that refer to other types of file is unspecified.
+.P
+Regular files shall always poll TRUE for reading and writing.
+.P
+A file descriptor for a socket that is listening for connections shall
+indicate that it is ready for reading, once connections are available.
+A file descriptor for a socket that is connecting asynchronously shall
+indicate that it is ready for writing, once a connection has been
+established.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIpoll\fR()
+shall return a non-negative value. A positive value indicates the total
+number of file descriptors that have been selected (that is, file
+descriptors for which the
+.IR revents
+member is non-zero). A value of 0 indicates that the call timed out and
+no file descriptors have been selected. Upon failure,
+\fIpoll\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpoll\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The allocation of internal data structures failed but a subsequent
+request may succeed.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was caught during
+\fIpoll\fR().
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR nfds
+argument is greater than
+{OPEN_MAX},
+or one of the
+.IR fd
+members refers to a STREAM or multiplexer that is linked (directly or
+indirectly) downstream from a multiplexer.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Checking for Events on a Stream"
+.P
+The following example opens a pair of STREAMS devices and then waits
+for either one to become writable. This example proceeds as follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Sets the
+.IR timeout
+parameter to 500 milliseconds.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Opens the STREAMS devices
+.BR /dev/dev0
+and
+.BR /dev/dev1 ,
+and then polls them, specifying POLLOUT and POLLWRBAND as the events of
+interest.
+.RS 4 
+.P
+The STREAMS device names
+.BR /dev/dev0
+and
+.BR /dev/dev1
+are only examples of how STREAMS devices can be named; STREAMS naming
+conventions may vary among systems conforming to the POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+Uses the
+.IR ret
+variable to determine whether an event has occurred on either of the
+two STREAMS. The
+\fIpoll\fR()
+function is given 500 milliseconds to wait for an event to occur (if it
+has not occurred prior to the
+\fIpoll\fR()
+call).
+.IP " 4." 4
+Checks the returned value of
+.IR ret .
+If a positive value is returned, one of the following can be done:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+Priority data can be written to the open STREAM on priority bands
+greater than 0, because the POLLWRBAND event occurred on the open
+STREAM (\c
+.IR fds [0]
+or
+.IR fds [1]).
+.IP " b." 4
+Data can be written to the open STREAM on priority-band 0, because the
+POLLOUT event occurred on the open STREAM (\c
+.IR fds [0]
+or
+.IR fds [1]).
+.RE
+.IP " 5." 4
+If the returned value is not a positive value, permission to write data
+to the open STREAM (on any priority band) is denied.
+.IP " 6." 4
+If the POLLHUP event occurs on the open STREAM (\c
+.IR fds [0]
+or
+.IR fds [1]),
+the device on the open STREAM has disconnected.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stropts.h>
+#include <poll.h>
+\&...
+struct pollfd fds[2];
+int timeout_msecs = 500;
+int ret;
+    int i;
+.P
+/* Open STREAMS device. */
+fds[0].fd = open("/dev/dev0", ...);
+fds[1].fd = open("/dev/dev1", ...);
+fds[0].events = POLLOUT | POLLWRBAND;
+fds[1].events = POLLOUT | POLLWRBAND;
+.P
+ret = poll(fds, 2, timeout_msecs);
+.P
+if (ret > 0) {
+    /* An event on one of the fds has occurred. */
+    for (i=0; i<2; i++) {
+        if (fds[i].revents & POLLWRBAND) {
+        /* Priority data may be written on device number i. */
+\&...
+        }
+        if (fds[i].revents & POLLOUT) {
+        /* Data may be written on device number i. */
+\&...
+        }
+        if (fds[i].revents & POLLHUP) {
+        /* A hangup has occurred on device number i. */
+\&...
+        }
+    }
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The POLLHUP event does not occur for FIFOs just because the FIFO is not
+open for writing. It only occurs when the FIFO is closed by the last
+writer and persists until some process opens the FIFO for writing or
+until all read-only file descriptors for the FIFO are closed.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.6" ", " "STREAMS",
+.IR "\fIgetmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpselect\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<poll.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stropts.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/popen.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/popen.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5d6f2cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/popen.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,312 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POPEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+popen
+\(em initiate pipe streams to or from a process
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+FILE *popen(const char *\fIcommand\fP, const char *\fImode\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpopen\fR()
+function shall execute the command specified by the string
+.IR command .
+It shall create a pipe between the calling program and the executed
+command, and shall return a pointer to a stream that can be used to
+either read from or write to the pipe.
+.P
+The environment of the executed command shall be as if a child process
+were created within the
+\fIpopen\fR()
+call using the
+\fIfork\fR()
+function, and the child invoked the
+.IR sh
+utility using the call:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+execl(\fIshell path\fP, "sh", "-c", \fIcommand\fP, (char *)0);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR "shell path"
+is an unspecified pathname for the
+.IR sh
+utility.
+.P
+The
+\fIpopen\fR()
+function shall ensure that any streams from previous
+\fIpopen\fR()
+calls that remain open in the parent process are closed in the new
+child process.
+.P
+The
+.IR mode
+argument to
+\fIpopen\fR()
+is a string that specifies I/O mode:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If
+.IR mode
+is
+.IR r ,
+when the child process is started, its file descriptor STDOUT_FILENO
+shall be the writable end of the pipe, and the file descriptor
+\fIfileno\fR(\fIstream\fR) in the calling process, where
+.IR stream
+is the stream pointer returned by
+\fIpopen\fR(),
+shall be the readable end of the pipe.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If
+.IR mode
+is
+.IR w ,
+when the child process is started its file descriptor STDIN_FILENO
+shall be the readable end of the pipe, and the file descriptor
+\fIfileno\fR(\fIstream\fR) in the calling process, where
+.IR stream
+is the stream pointer returned by
+\fIpopen\fR(),
+shall be the writable end of the pipe.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If
+.IR mode
+is any other value, the result is unspecified.
+.P
+After
+\fIpopen\fR(),
+both the parent and the child process shall be capable of executing
+independently before either terminates.
+.P
+Pipe streams are byte-oriented.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIpopen\fR()
+shall return a pointer to an open stream that can be used to read
+or write to the pipe. Otherwise, it shall return a null pointer and
+may set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpopen\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+{STREAM_MAX}
+streams are currently open in the calling process.
+.P
+The
+\fIpopen\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+{FOPEN_MAX}
+streams are currently open in the calling process.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR mode
+argument is invalid.
+.P
+The
+\fIpopen\fR()
+function may also set
+.IR errno
+values as described by
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)"
+or
+.IR "\fIpipe\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Using popen(\|) to Obtain a List of Files from the ls Utility"
+.P
+The following example demonstrates the use of
+\fIpopen\fR()
+and
+\fIpclose\fR()
+to execute the command
+.IR ls *
+in order to obtain a list of files in the current directory:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+.P
+FILE *fp;
+int status;
+char path[PATH_MAX];
+.P
+fp = popen("ls *", "r");
+if (fp == NULL)
+    /* Handle error */;
+.P
+while (fgets(path, PATH_MAX, fp) != NULL)
+    printf("%s", path);
+.P
+status = pclose(fp);
+if (status == \(mi1) {
+    /* Error reported by pclose() */
+    ...
+} else {
+    /* Use macros described under wait() to inspect `status' in order
+       to determine success/failure of command executed by popen() */
+    ...
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since open files are shared, a mode
+.IR r
+command can be used as an input filter and a mode
+.IR w
+command as an output filter.
+.P
+Buffered reading before opening an input filter may leave the standard
+input of that filter mispositioned. Similar problems with an output
+filter may be prevented by careful buffer flushing; for example, with
+.IR "\fIfflush\fR\^(\|)".
+.P
+A stream opened by
+\fIpopen\fR()
+should be closed by
+\fIpclose\fR().
+.P
+The behavior of
+\fIpopen\fR()
+is specified for values of
+.IR mode
+of
+.IR r
+and
+.IR w .
+Other modes such as
+.IR rb
+and
+.IR wb
+might be supported by specific implementations, but these would not be
+portable features. Note that historical implementations of
+\fIpopen\fR()
+only check to see if the first character of
+.IR mode
+is
+.IR r .
+Thus, a
+.IR mode
+of
+.IR "robert the robot"
+would be treated as
+.IR mode
+.IR r ,
+and a
+.IR mode
+of
+.IR "anything else"
+would be treated as
+.IR mode
+.IR w .
+.P
+If the application calls
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+or
+\fIwaitid\fR()
+with a
+.IR pid
+argument greater than 0, and it still has a stream that was called with
+\fIpopen\fR()
+open, it must ensure that
+.IR pid
+does not refer to the process started by
+\fIpopen\fR().
+.P
+To determine whether or not the environment specified in the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 is
+present, use the function call:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sysconf(_SC_2_VERSION)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+(See
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)").
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIpopen\fR()
+function should not be used by programs that have set user (or group)
+ID privileges. The
+\fIfork\fR()
+and
+.IR exec
+family of functions (except
+\fIexeclp\fR()
+and
+\fIexecvp\fR()),
+should be used instead. This prevents any unforeseen manipulation of
+the environment of the user that could cause execution of commands not
+anticipated by the calling program.
+.P
+If the original and
+\fIpopen\fR()ed
+processes both intend to read or write or read and write a common file,
+and either will be using FILE-type C functions (\c
+\fIfread\fR(),
+\fIfwrite\fR(),
+and so on), the rules for sharing file handles must be observed (see
+.IR "Section 2.5.1" ", " "Interaction of File Descriptors and Standard I/O Streams").
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpipe\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsystem\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwaitid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.P
+The Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIsh\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_fadvise.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_fadvise.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bc6b3fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_fadvise.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_FADVISE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_fadvise
+\(em file advisory information
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <fcntl.h>
+.P
+int posix_fadvise(int \fIfd\fP, off_t \fIoffset\fP, off_t \fIlen\fP, int \fIadvice\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_fadvise\fR()
+function shall advise the implementation on the expected behavior
+of the application with respect to the data in the file associated with
+the open file descriptor,
+.IR fd ,
+starting at
+.IR offset
+and continuing for
+.IR len
+bytes. The specified range need not currently exist in the file. If
+.IR len
+is zero, all data following
+.IR offset
+is specified. The implementation may use this information to optimize
+handling of the specified data. The
+\fIposix_fadvise\fR()
+function shall have no effect on the semantics of other operations on
+the specified data, although it may affect the performance of other
+operations.
+.P
+The advice to be applied to the data is specified by the
+.IR advice
+parameter and may be one of the following values:
+.IP POSIX_FADV_NORMAL 6
+.br
+Specifies that the application has no advice to give on its behavior
+with respect to the specified data. It is the default characteristic if
+no advice is given for an open file.
+.IP POSIX_FADV_SEQUENTIAL 6
+.br
+Specifies that the application expects to access the specified data
+sequentially from lower offsets to higher offsets.
+.IP POSIX_FADV_RANDOM 6
+.br
+Specifies that the application expects to access the specified data in
+a random order.
+.IP POSIX_FADV_WILLNEED 6
+.br
+Specifies that the application expects to access the specified data in
+the near future.
+.IP POSIX_FADV_DONTNEED 6
+.br
+Specifies that the application expects that it will not access the
+specified data in the near future.
+.IP POSIX_FADV_NOREUSE 6
+.br
+Specifies that the application expects to access the specified data
+once and then not reuse it thereafter.
+.P
+These values are defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIposix_fadvise\fR()
+shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to
+indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIposix_fadvise\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fd
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR advice
+is invalid, or the value of
+.IR len
+is less than zero.
+.TP
+.BR ESPIPE
+The
+.IR fd
+argument is associated with a pipe or FIFO.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIposix_fadvise\fR()
+function is part of the Advisory Information option and need not be
+provided on all implementations.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIposix_madvise\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fcntl.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_fallocate.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_fallocate.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f4fde58
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_fallocate.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,160 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_FALLOCATE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_fallocate
+\(em file space control
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <fcntl.h>
+.P
+int posix_fallocate(int \fIfd\fP, off_t \fIoffset\fP, off_t \fIlen\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_fallocate\fR()
+function shall ensure that any required storage for regular file data
+starting at
+.IR offset
+and continuing for
+.IR len
+bytes is allocated on the file system storage media. If
+\fIposix_fallocate\fR()
+returns successfully, subsequent writes to the specified file data
+shall not fail due to the lack of free space on the file system storage
+media.
+.P
+If the
+.IR offset +\c
+.IR len
+is beyond the current file size, then
+\fIposix_fallocate\fR()
+shall adjust the file size to
+.IR offset +\c
+.IR len .
+Otherwise, the file size shall not be changed.
+.P
+It is implementation-defined whether a previous
+\fIposix_fadvise\fR()
+call influences allocation strategy.
+.P
+Space allocated via
+\fIposix_fallocate\fR()
+shall be freed by a successful call to
+\fIcreat\fR()
+or
+\fIopen\fR()
+that truncates the size of the file. Space allocated via
+\fIposix_fallocate\fR()
+may be freed by a successful call to
+\fIftruncate\fR()
+that reduces the file size to a size smaller than
+.IR offset +\c
+.IR len .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIposix_fallocate\fR()
+shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to
+indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIposix_fallocate\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fd
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fd
+argument references a file that was opened without write permission.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+The value of
+.IR offset +\c
+.IR len
+is greater than the maximum file size.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was caught during execution.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR len
+argument is less than zero, or the
+.IR offset
+argument is less than zero, or the underlying file system does not
+support this operation.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to a file system.
+.TP
+.BR ENODEV
+The
+.IR fd
+argument does not refer to a regular file.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+There is insufficient free space remaining on the file system storage
+media.
+.TP
+.BR ESPIPE
+The
+.IR fd
+argument is associated with a pipe or FIFO.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_fallocate\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR len
+argument is zero.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIposix_fallocate\fR()
+function is part of the Advisory Information option and need not be
+provided on all implementations.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcreat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIftruncate\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fcntl.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_madvise.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_madvise.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6a78275
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_madvise.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_MADVISE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_madvise
+\(em memory advisory information and alignment control
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/mman.h>
+.P
+int posix_madvise(void *\fIaddr\fP, size_t \fIlen\fP, int \fIadvice\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_madvise\fR()
+function shall advise the implementation on the expected behavior of
+the application with respect to the data in the memory starting at
+address
+.IR addr ,
+and continuing for
+.IR len
+bytes. The implementation may use this information to optimize handling
+of the specified data. The
+\fIposix_madvise\fR()
+function shall have no effect on the semantics of access to memory in
+the specified range, although it may affect the performance of access.
+.P
+The implementation may require that
+.IR addr
+be a multiple of the page size, which is the value returned by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+when the name value _SC_PAGESIZE is used.
+.P
+The advice to be applied to the memory range is specified by the
+.IR advice
+parameter and may be one of the following values:
+.IP POSIX_MADV_NORMAL 6
+.br
+Specifies that the application has no advice to give on its behavior
+with respect to the specified range. It is the default characteristic
+if no advice is given for a range of memory.
+.IP POSIX_MADV_SEQUENTIAL 6
+.br
+Specifies that the application expects to access the specified range
+sequentially from lower addresses to higher addresses.
+.IP POSIX_MADV_RANDOM 6
+.br
+Specifies that the application expects to access the specified range in
+a random order.
+.IP POSIX_MADV_WILLNEED 6
+.br
+Specifies that the application expects to access the specified range in
+the near future.
+.IP POSIX_MADV_DONTNEED 6
+.br
+Specifies that the application expects that it will not access the
+specified range in the near future.
+.P
+These values are defined in the
+.IR <sys/mman.h> 
+header.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIposix_madvise\fR()
+shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to
+indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIposix_madvise\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR advice
+is invalid.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Addresses in the range starting at
+.IR addr
+and continuing for
+.IR len
+bytes are partly or completely outside the range allowed for the
+address space of the calling process.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_madvise\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR addr
+is not a multiple of the value returned by
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+when the name value _SC_PAGESIZE is used.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR len
+is zero.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIposix_madvise\fR()
+function is part of the Advisory Information option and need not be
+provided on all implementations.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImmap\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_fadvise\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_mman.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_mem_offset.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_mem_offset.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f4b3884
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_mem_offset.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_MEM_OFFSET "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_mem_offset
+\(em find offset and length of a mapped typed memory block
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/mman.h>
+.P
+int posix_mem_offset(const void *restrict \fIaddr\fP, size_t \fIlen\fP,
+    off_t *restrict \fIoff\fP, size_t *restrict \fIcontig_len\fP,
+    int *restrict \fIfildes\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_mem_offset\fR()
+function shall return in the variable pointed to by
+.IR off
+a value that identifies the offset (or location), within a memory
+object, of the memory block currently mapped at
+.IR addr .
+The function shall return in the variable pointed to by
+.IR fildes ,
+the descriptor used (via
+\fImmap\fR())
+to establish the mapping which contains
+.IR addr .
+If that descriptor was closed since the mapping was established, the
+returned value of
+.IR fildes
+shall be \(mi1. The
+.IR len
+argument specifies the length of the block of the memory object the
+user wishes the offset for; upon return, the value pointed to by
+.IR contig_len
+shall equal either
+.IR len ,
+or the length of the largest contiguous block of the memory object that
+is currently mapped to the calling process starting at
+.IR addr ,
+whichever is smaller.
+.P
+If the memory object mapped at
+.IR addr
+is a typed memory object, then if the
+.IR off
+and
+.IR contig_len
+values obtained by calling
+\fIposix_mem_offset\fR()
+are used in a call to
+\fImmap\fR()
+with a file descriptor that refers to the same memory pool as
+.IR fildes
+(either through the same port or through a different port), and that
+was opened with neither the POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE nor the
+POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE_CONTIG flag,
+the typed memory area that is mapped shall be exactly the same area
+that was mapped at
+.IR addr
+in the address space of the process that called
+\fIposix_mem_offset\fR().
+.P
+If the memory object specified by
+.IR fildes
+is not a typed memory object, then the behavior of this function is
+implementation-defined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIposix_mem_offset\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, the corresponding error status
+value shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIposix_mem_offset\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+The process has not mapped a memory object supported by this function
+at the given address
+.IR addr .
+.P
+This function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImmap\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_typed_mem_open\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_mman.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_memalign.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_memalign.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..605e086
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_memalign.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_MEMALIGN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_memalign
+\(em aligned memory allocation
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+int posix_memalign(void **\fImemptr\fP, size_t \fIalignment\fP, size_t \fIsize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_memalign\fR()
+function shall allocate
+.IR size
+bytes aligned on a boundary specified by
+.IR alignment ,
+and shall return a pointer to the allocated memory in
+.IR memptr .
+The value of
+.IR alignment
+shall be a power of two multiple of
+.IR sizeof (\c
+.BR "void *" ).
+.P
+Upon successful completion, the value pointed to by
+.IR memptr
+shall be a multiple of
+.IR alignment .
+.P
+If the size of the space requested is 0, the behavior is
+implementation-defined; the value returned in
+.IR memptr
+shall be either a null pointer or a unique pointer.
+.P
+The
+\fIfree\fR()
+function shall deallocate memory that has previously been allocated by
+\fIposix_memalign\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIposix_memalign\fR()
+shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to
+indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIposix_memalign\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the alignment parameter is not a power of two multiple of
+.IR sizeof (\c
+.BR "void *" ).
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+There is insufficient memory available with the requested alignment.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIposix_memalign\fR()
+function is part of the Advisory Information option and need not be
+provided on all implementations.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfree\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImalloc\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_openpt.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_openpt.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..24668b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_openpt.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,172 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_OPENPT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_openpt
+\(em open a pseudo-terminal device
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+.P
+int posix_openpt(int \fIoflag\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_openpt\fR()
+function shall establish a connection between a master device for a
+pseudo-terminal and a file descriptor. The file descriptor is used by
+other I/O functions that refer to that pseudo-terminal.
+.P
+The file status flags and file access modes of the open file
+description shall be set according to the value of
+.IR oflag .
+.P
+Values for
+.IR oflag
+are constructed by a bitwise-inclusive OR of flags from the following
+list, defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> :
+.IP O_RDWR 12
+Open for reading and writing.
+.IP O_NOCTTY 12
+If set
+\fIposix_openpt\fR()
+shall not cause the terminal device to become the controlling terminal
+for the process.
+.P
+The behavior of other values for the
+.IR oflag
+argument is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIposix_openpt\fR()
+function shall open a master pseudo-terminal device and return a
+non-negative integer representing the lowest numbered unused file
+descriptor. Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIposix_openpt\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+The maximum allowable number of files is currently open in the system.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_openpt\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR oflag
+is not valid.
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+Out of pseudo-terminal resources.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSR
+Out of STREAMS resources.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Opening a Pseudo-Terminal and Returning the Name of the Slave Device and a File Descriptor"
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int masterfd, slavefd;
+char *slavedevice;
+.P
+masterfd = posix_openpt(O_RDWR|O_NOCTTY);
+.P
+if (masterfd == -1
+    || grantpt (masterfd) == -1
+    || unlockpt (masterfd) == -1
+    || (slavedevice = ptsname (masterfd)) == NULL)
+    return -1;
+.P
+printf("slave device is: %s\en", slavedevice);
+.P
+slavefd = open(slavedevice, O_RDWR|O_NOCTTY);
+if (slavefd < 0)
+    return -1;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+This function is a method for portably obtaining a file descriptor of a
+master terminal device for a pseudo-terminal. The
+\fIgrantpt\fR()
+and
+\fIptsname\fR()
+functions can be used to manipulate mode and ownership permissions, and
+to obtain the name of the slave device, respectively.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The standard developers considered the matter of adding a special
+device for cloning master pseudo-terminals: the
+.BR /dev/ptmx
+device. However, consensus could not be reached, and it was felt that
+adding a new function would permit other implementations. The
+\fIposix_openpt\fR()
+function is designed to complement the
+\fIgrantpt\fR(),
+\fIptsname\fR(),
+and
+\fIunlockpt\fR()
+functions.
+.P
+On implementations supporting the
+.BR /dev/ptmx
+clone device, opening the master device of a pseudo-terminal is simply:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+mfdp = open("/dev/ptmx", oflag );
+if (mfdp < 0)
+    return -1;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgrantpt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIptsname\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunlockpt\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fcntl.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawn.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawn.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e71ca14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawn.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,932 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_SPAWN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_spawn,
+posix_spawnp
+\(em spawn a process
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <spawn.h>
+.P
+int posix_spawn(pid_t *restrict \fIpid\fP, const char *restrict \fIpath\fP,
+    const posix_spawn_file_actions_t *\fIfile_actions\fP,
+    const posix_spawnattr_t *restrict \fIattrp\fP,
+    char *const \fIargv\fP[restrict], char *const \fIenvp\fP[restrict]);
+int posix_spawnp(pid_t *restrict \fIpid\fP, const char *restrict \fIfile\fP,
+    const posix_spawn_file_actions_t *\fIfile_actions\fP,
+    const posix_spawnattr_t *restrict \fIattrp\fP,
+    char *const \fIargv\fP[restrict], char *const \fIenvp\fP[restrict]);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+functions shall create a new process (child process) from the specified
+process image. The new process image shall be constructed from a regular
+executable file called the new process image file.
+.P
+When a C program is executed as the result of this call, it shall be
+entered as a C-language function call as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int main(int \fIargc\fP, char *\fIargv\fP[]);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR argc
+is the argument count and
+.IR argv
+is an array of character pointers to the arguments themselves. In
+addition, the following variable:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+extern char **environ;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+shall be initialized as a pointer to an array of character pointers to
+the environment strings.
+.P
+The argument
+.IR argv
+is an array of character pointers to null-terminated strings. The last
+member of this array shall be a null pointer and is not
+counted in
+.IR argc .
+These strings constitute the argument list available to the new process
+image. The value in
+.IR argv [0]
+should point to a filename string that is associated with the process
+image being started by the
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+function.
+.P
+The argument
+.IR envp
+is an array of character pointers to null-terminated strings. These
+strings constitute the environment for the new process image. The
+environment array is terminated by a null pointer.
+.P
+The number of bytes available for the combined argument
+and environment lists of the child process is
+{ARG_MAX}.
+The implementation shall specify in the system documentation (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Conformance")
+whether any list overhead, such as length words, null
+terminators, pointers, or alignment bytes, is included in this total.
+.P
+The
+.IR path
+argument to
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+is a pathname that identifies the new process image file to execute.
+.P
+The
+.IR file
+parameter to
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+shall be used to construct a pathname that identifies the new process
+image file. If the
+.IR file
+parameter contains a
+<slash>
+character, the
+.IR file
+parameter shall be used as the pathname for the new process image
+file. Otherwise, the path prefix for this file shall be obtained by a
+search of the directories passed as the environment variable
+.IR PATH
+(see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables").
+If this environment variable is not defined, the results of the search
+are implementation-defined.
+.P
+If
+.IR file_actions
+is a null pointer, then file descriptors open in the calling process
+shall remain open in the child process, except for those whose
+close-on-\c
+.IR exec
+flag FD_CLOEXEC is set (see
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)").
+For those file descriptors that remain open, all attributes of the
+corresponding open file descriptions, including file locks (see
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)"),
+shall remain unchanged.
+.P
+If
+.IR file_actions
+is not NULL, then the file descriptors open in the child process shall
+be those open in the calling process as modified by the spawn file
+actions object pointed to by
+.IR file_actions
+and the FD_CLOEXEC flag of each remaining open file descriptor after
+the spawn file actions have been processed. The effective order of
+processing the spawn file actions shall be:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The set of open file descriptors for the child process shall initially
+be the same set as is open for the calling process. All attributes of
+the corresponding open file descriptions, including file locks (see
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)"),
+shall remain unchanged.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The signal mask, signal default actions, and the effective user and
+group IDs for the child process shall be changed as specified in the
+attributes object referenced by
+.IR attrp .
+.IP " 3." 4
+The file actions specified by the spawn file actions object shall be
+performed in the order in which they were added to the spawn file
+actions object.
+.IP " 4." 4
+Any file descriptor that has its FD_CLOEXEC flag set (see
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)")
+shall be closed.
+.P
+If file descriptor 0, 1, or 2 would otherwise be closed in the new
+process image created by
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR(),
+implementations may open an unspecified file for the file descriptor in
+the new process image. If a standard utility or a conforming application
+is executed with file descriptor 0 not open for reading or with file
+descriptor 1 or 2 not open for writing, the environment in which the
+utility or application is executed shall be deemed non-conforming, and
+consequently the utility or application might not behave as described
+in this standard.
+.P
+The
+.BR posix_spawnattr_t
+spawn attributes object type is defined in
+.IR <spawn.h> .
+It shall contain at least the attributes defined below.
+.P
+If the POSIX_SPAWN_SETPGROUP flag is set in the
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute
+of the object referenced by
+.IR attrp ,
+and the
+.IR spawn-pgroup
+attribute of the same object is non-zero, then the child's process
+group shall be as specified in the
+.IR spawn-pgroup
+attribute of the object referenced by
+.IR attrp .
+.P
+As a special case, if the POSIX_SPAWN_SETPGROUP flag is set in the
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute of the object referenced by
+.IR attrp ,
+and the
+.IR spawn-pgroup
+attribute of the same object is set to zero, then the child shall be in
+a new process group with a process group ID equal to its process ID.
+.P
+If the POSIX_SPAWN_SETPGROUP flag is not set in the
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute of the object referenced by
+.IR attrp ,
+the new child process shall inherit the parent's process group.
+.P
+If the POSIX_SPAWN_SETSCHEDPARAM flag is set in the
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute of the object referenced by
+.IR attrp ,
+but POSIX_SPAWN_SETSCHEDULER is not set, the new process image shall
+initially have the scheduling policy of the calling process with the
+scheduling parameters specified in the
+.IR spawn-schedparam
+attribute of the object referenced by
+.IR attrp .
+.P
+If the POSIX_SPAWN_SETSCHEDULER flag is set in the
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute of the object referenced by
+.IR attrp
+(regardless of the setting of the POSIX_SPAWN_SETSCHEDPARAM flag), the
+new process image shall initially have the scheduling policy specified
+in the
+.IR spawn-schedpolicy
+attribute of the object referenced by
+.IR attrp
+and the scheduling parameters specified in the
+.IR spawn-schedparam
+attribute of the same object.
+.P
+The POSIX_SPAWN_RESETIDS flag in the
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute of the object referenced by
+.IR attrp
+governs the effective user ID of the child process. If this flag is
+not set, the child process shall inherit the effective user ID of the
+parent process. If this flag is set, the effective user ID of the child
+process shall be reset to the parent's real user ID. In either case,
+if the set-user-ID mode bit of the new process image file is set, the
+effective user ID of the child process shall become that file's owner
+ID before the new process image begins execution.
+.P
+The POSIX_SPAWN_RESETIDS flag in the
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute of the object referenced by
+.IR attrp
+also governs the effective group ID of the child process. If this flag
+is not set, the child process shall inherit the effective group ID of the
+parent process. If this flag is set, the effective group ID of the child
+process shall be reset to the parent's real group ID. In either case,
+if the set-group-ID mode bit of the new process image file is set, the
+effective group ID of the child process shall become that file's group
+ID before the new process image begins execution.
+.P
+If the POSIX_SPAWN_SETSIGMASK flag is set in the
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute of the object referenced by
+.IR attrp ,
+the child process shall initially have the signal mask specified in the
+.IR spawn-sigmask
+attribute of the object referenced by
+.IR attrp .
+.P
+If the POSIX_SPAWN_SETSIGDEF flag is set in the
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute of the object referenced by
+.IR attrp ,
+the signals specified in the
+.IR spawn-sigdefault
+attribute of the same object shall be set to their default actions in
+the child process. Signals set to the default action in the parent
+process shall be set to the default action in the child process.
+.P
+Signals set to be caught by the calling process shall be set to the
+default action in the child process.
+.P
+Except for SIGCHLD, signals set to be ignored by the calling process
+image shall be set to be ignored by the child process, unless otherwise
+specified by the POSIX_SPAWN_SETSIGDEF flag being set in the
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute of the object referenced by
+.IR attrp
+and the signals being indicated in the
+.IR spawn-sigdefault
+attribute of the object referenced by
+.IR attrp .
+.P
+If the SIGCHLD signal is set to be ignored by the calling process, it
+is unspecified whether the SIGCHLD signal is set to be ignored or to
+the default action in the child process, unless otherwise specified by
+the POSIX_SPAWN_SETSIGDEF flag being set in the
+.IR spawn_flags
+attribute of the object referenced by
+.IR attrp
+and the SIGCHLD signal being indicated in the
+.IR spawn_sigdefault
+attribute of the object referenced by
+.IR attrp .
+.P
+If the value of the
+.IR attrp
+pointer is NULL, then the default values are used.
+.P
+All process attributes, other than those influenced by the attributes
+set in the object referenced by
+.IR attrp
+as specified above or by the file descriptor manipulations specified in
+.IR file_actions ,
+shall appear in the new process image as though
+\fIfork\fR()
+had been called to create a child process and then a member of the
+.IR exec
+family of functions had been called by the child process to execute the
+new process image.
+.P
+It is implementation-defined whether the fork handlers are run when
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+is called.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+shall return the process ID of the child process to the parent process,
+in the variable pointed to by a non-NULL
+.IR pid
+argument, and shall return zero as the function return value.
+Otherwise, no child process shall be created, the value stored into the
+variable pointed to by a non-NULL
+.IR pid
+is unspecified, and an error number shall be returned as the function
+return value to indicate the error. If the
+.IR pid
+argument is a null pointer, the process ID of the child is not returned
+to the caller.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value specified by
+.IR file_actions
+or
+.IR attrp
+is invalid.
+.P
+If this error occurs after the calling process successfully returns
+from the
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+function, the child process may exit with exit status 127.
+.P
+If
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+fail for any of the reasons that would cause
+\fIfork\fR()
+or one of the
+.IR exec
+family of functions to fail, an error value shall be returned as
+described by
+\fIfork\fR()
+and
+.IR exec ,
+respectively (or, if the error occurs after the calling process
+successfully returns, the child process shall exit with exit status 127).
+.P
+If POSIX_SPAWN_SETPGROUP is set in the
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute of the object referenced by
+.IR attrp ,
+and
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+fails while changing the child's process group, an error value shall be
+returned as described by
+\fIsetpgid\fR()
+(or, if the error occurs after the calling process successfully
+returns, the child process shall exit with exit status 127).
+.P
+If POSIX_SPAWN_SETSCHEDPARAM is set and POSIX_SPAWN_SETSCHEDULER is not
+set in the
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute of the object referenced by
+.IR attrp ,
+then if
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+fails for any of the reasons that would cause
+\fIsched_setparam\fR()
+to fail, an error value shall be returned as described by
+\fIsched_setparam\fR()
+(or, if the error occurs after the calling process successfully
+returns, the child process shall exit with exit status 127).
+.P
+If POSIX_SPAWN_SETSCHEDULER is set in the
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute of the object referenced by
+.IR attrp ,
+and if
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+fails for any of the reasons that would cause
+\fIsched_setscheduler\fR()
+to fail, an error value shall be returned as described by
+\fIsched_setscheduler\fR()
+(or, if the error occurs after the calling process successfully
+returns, the child process shall exit with exit status 127).
+.P
+If the
+.IR file_actions
+argument is not NULL, and specifies any
+.IR close ,
+.IR dup2 ,
+or
+.IR open
+actions to be performed, and if
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+fails for any of the reasons that would cause
+\fIclose\fR(),
+\fIdup2\fR(),
+or
+\fIopen\fR()
+to fail, an error value shall be returned as described by
+\fIclose\fR(),
+\fIdup2\fR(),
+and
+\fIopen\fR(),
+respectively (or, if the error occurs after the calling process
+successfully returns, the child process shall exit with exit status
+127). An open file action may, by itself, result in any of the errors
+described by
+\fIclose\fR()
+or
+\fIdup2\fR(),
+in addition to those described by
+\fIopen\fR().
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+These functions are part of the Spawn option and need not be
+provided on all implementations.
+.P
+See also the APPLICATION USAGE section for
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^".
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+function and its close relation
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+have been introduced to overcome the following perceived difficulties
+with
+\fIfork\fR():
+the
+\fIfork\fR()
+function is difficult or impossible to implement without swapping or
+dynamic address translation.
+.IP " *" 4
+Swapping is generally too slow for a realtime environment.
+.IP " *" 4
+Dynamic address translation is not available everywhere that POSIX
+might be useful.
+.IP " *" 4
+Processes are too useful to simply option out of POSIX whenever it must
+run without address translation or other MMU services.
+.P
+Thus, POSIX needs process creation and file execution primitives that
+can be efficiently implemented without address translation or other MMU
+services.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+function is implementable as a library routine, but both
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+are designed as kernel operations. Also, although they may be an
+efficient replacement for many
+\fIfork\fR()/\c
+.IR exec
+pairs, their goal is to provide useful process creation primitives for
+systems that have difficulty with
+\fIfork\fR(),
+not to provide drop-in replacements for
+\fIfork\fR()/\c
+.IR exec .
+.P
+This view of the role of
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+influenced the design of their API. It does not attempt to provide the
+full functionality of
+\fIfork\fR()/\c
+.IR exec
+in which arbitrary user-specified operations of any sort are permitted
+between the creation of the child process and the execution of the new
+process image; any attempt to reach that level would need to provide a
+programming language as parameters. Instead,
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+are process creation primitives like the
+.IR Start_Process
+and
+.IR Start_Process_Search
+Ada language bindings package
+.IR POSIX_Process_Primitives
+and also like those in many operating systems that are not UNIX
+systems, but with some POSIX-specific additions.
+.P
+To achieve its coverage goals,
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+have control of six types of inheritance: file descriptors, process
+group ID, user and group ID, signal mask, scheduling, and whether each
+signal ignored in the parent will remain ignored in the child, or be
+reset to its default action in the child.
+.P
+Control of file descriptors is required to allow an independently
+written child process image to access data streams opened by and even
+generated or read by the parent process without being specifically
+coded to know which parent files and file descriptors are to be used.
+Control of the process group ID is required to control how the
+job control of the child process relates to that of the parent.
+.P
+Control of the signal mask and signal defaulting is sufficient to
+support the implementation of
+\fIsystem\fR().
+Although support for
+\fIsystem\fR()
+is not explicitly one of the goals for
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR(),
+it is covered under the ``at least 50%'' coverage goal.
+.P
+The intention is that the normal file descriptor inheritance across
+\fIfork\fR(),
+the subsequent effect of the specified spawn file actions, and the
+normal file descriptor inheritance across one of the
+.IR exec
+family of functions should fully specify open file inheritance. The
+implementation need make no decisions regarding the set of open file
+descriptors when the child process image begins execution, those
+decisions having already been made by the caller and expressed as the
+set of open file descriptors and their FD_CLOEXEC flags at the time of
+the call and the spawn file actions object specified in the call. We
+have been assured that in cases where the POSIX
+.IR Start_Process
+Ada primitives have been implemented in a library, this method of
+controlling file descriptor inheritance may be implemented very easily.
+.P
+We can identify several problems with
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR(),
+but there does not appear to be a solution that introduces fewer
+problems. Environment modification for child process attributes not
+specifiable via the
+.IR attrp
+or
+.IR file_actions
+arguments must be done in the parent process, and since the parent
+generally wants to save its context, it is more costly than similar
+functionality with
+\fIfork\fR()/\c
+.IR exec .
+It is also complicated to modify the environment of a multi-threaded
+process temporarily, since all threads must agree when it is safe for
+the environment to be changed. However, this cost is only borne by
+those invocations of
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+that use the additional functionality. Since extensive modifications
+are not the usual case, and are particularly unlikely in time-critical
+code, keeping much of the environment control out of
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+is appropriate design.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+functions do not have all the power of
+\fIfork\fR()/\c
+.IR exec .
+This is to be expected. The
+\fIfork\fR()
+function is a wonderfully powerful operation. We do not expect to
+duplicate its functionality in a simple, fast function with no special
+hardware requirements. It is worth noting that
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+are very similar to the process creation operations on many operating
+systems that are not UNIX systems.
+.SS "Requirements"
+.P
+The requirements for
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+are:
+.IP " *" 4
+They must be implementable without an MMU or unusual hardware.
+.IP " *" 4
+They must be compatible with existing POSIX standards.
+.P
+Additional goals are:
+.IP " *" 4
+They should be efficiently implementable.
+.IP " *" 4
+They should be able to replace at least 50% of typical executions of
+\fIfork\fR().
+.IP " *" 4
+A system with
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+and without
+\fIfork\fR()
+should be useful, at least for realtime applications.
+.IP " *" 4
+A system with
+\fIfork\fR()
+and the
+.IR exec
+family should be able to implement
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+as library routines.
+.SS "Two-Syntax"
+.P
+POSIX
+.IR exec
+has several calling sequences with approximately the same
+functionality. These appear to be required for compatibility with
+existing practice. Since the existing practice for the
+.IR posix_spawn* (\|)
+functions is otherwise substantially unlike POSIX, we feel that
+simplicity outweighs compatibility. There are, therefore, only two
+names for the
+.IR posix_spawn* (\|)
+functions.
+.P
+The parameter list does not differ between
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR();
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+interprets the second parameter more elaborately than
+\fIposix_spawn\fR().
+.SS "Compatibility with POSIX.5 (Ada)"
+.P
+The
+.IR Start_Process
+and
+.IR Start_Process_Search
+procedures from the
+.IR POSIX_Process_Primitives
+package from the Ada language binding to POSIX.1 encapsulate
+\fIfork\fR()
+and
+.IR exec
+functionality in a manner similar to that of
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR().
+Originally, in keeping with our simplicity goal, the standard
+developers had limited the capabilities of
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+to a subset of the capabilities of
+.IR Start_Process
+and
+.IR Start_Process_Search ;
+certain non-default capabilities were not supported. However, based on
+suggestions by the ballot group to improve file descriptor mapping or
+drop it, and on the advice of an Ada Language Bindings working group
+member, the standard developers decided that
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+should be sufficiently powerful to implement
+.IR Start_Process
+and
+.IR Start_Process_Search .
+The rationale is that if the Ada language binding to such a primitive
+had already been approved as an IEEE standard, there can be little
+justification for not approving the functionally-equivalent parts of a
+C binding. The only three capabilities provided by
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+that are not provided by
+.IR Start_Process
+and
+.IR Start_Process_Search
+are optionally specifying the child's process group ID, the set of
+signals to be reset to default signal handling in the child process,
+and the child's scheduling policy and parameters.
+.P
+For the Ada language binding for
+.IR Start_Process
+to be implemented with
+\fIposix_spawn\fR(),
+that binding would need to explicitly pass an empty signal mask and the
+parent's environment to
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+whenever the caller of
+.IR Start_Process
+allowed these arguments to default, since
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+does not provide such defaults. The ability of
+.IR Start_Process
+to mask user-specified signals during its execution is functionally
+unique to the Ada language binding and must be dealt with in the
+binding separately from the call to
+\fIposix_spawn\fR().
+.SS "Process Group"
+.P
+The process group inheritance field can be used to join the child
+process with an existing process group. By assigning a value of zero to
+the
+.IR spawn-pgroup
+attribute of the object referenced by
+.IR attrp ,
+the
+\fIsetpgid\fR()
+mechanism will place the child process in a new process group.
+.SS "Threads"
+.P
+Without the
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+functions, systems without address translation can still use threads to
+give an abstraction of concurrency. In many cases, thread creation
+suffices, but it is not always a good substitute. The
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+functions are considerably ``heavier'' than thread creation. Processes
+have several important attributes that threads do not. Even without
+address translation, a process may have base-and-bound memory
+protection. Each process has a process environment including security
+attributes and file capabilities, and powerful scheduling attributes.
+Processes abstract the behavior of non-uniform-memory-architecture
+multi-processors better than threads, and they are more convenient to
+use for activities that are not closely linked.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+functions may not bring support for multiple processes to every
+configuration. Process creation is not the only piece of operating
+system support required to support multiple processes. The total cost
+of support for multiple processes may be quite high in some
+circumstances. Existing practice shows that support for multiple
+processes is uncommon and threads are common among ``tiny kernels''.
+There should, therefore, probably continue to be AEPs for operating
+systems with only one process.
+.SS "Asynchronous Error Notification"
+.P
+A library implementation of
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+may not be able to detect all possible errors before it forks the child
+process. POSIX.1\(hy2008 provides for an error indication returned from a child
+process which could not successfully complete the spawn operation via a
+special exit status which may be detected using the status value
+returned by
+\fIwait\fR(),
+\fIwaitid\fR(),
+and
+\fIwaitpid\fR().
+.P
+The
+.IR stat_val
+interface and the macros used to interpret it are not well suited to
+the purpose of returning API errors, but they are the only path
+available to a library implementation. Thus, an implementation may
+cause the child process to exit with exit status 127 for any error
+detected during the spawn process after the
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+function has successfully returned.
+.P
+The standard developers had proposed using two additional macros to
+interpret
+.IR stat_val .
+The first, WIFSPAWNFAIL, would have detected a status that indicated
+that the child exited because of an error detected during the
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+operations rather than during actual execution of the child process
+image; the second, WSPAWNERRNO, would have extracted the error value if
+WIFSPAWNFAIL indicated a failure. Unfortunately, the ballot group
+strongly opposed this because it would make a library implementation of
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+dependent on kernel modifications to
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+to be able to embed special information in
+.IR stat_val
+to indicate a spawn failure.
+.P
+The 8 bits of child process exit status that are guaranteed by POSIX.1\(hy2008 to
+be accessible to the waiting parent process are insufficient to
+disambiguate a spawn error from any other kind of error that may be
+returned by an arbitrary process image. No other bits of the exit
+status are required to be visible in
+.IR stat_val ,
+so these macros could not be strictly implemented at the library level.
+Reserving an exit status of 127 for such spawn errors is consistent
+with the use of this value by
+\fIsystem\fR()
+and
+\fIpopen\fR()
+to signal failures in these operations that occur after the function
+has returned but before a shell is able to execute. The exit status of
+127 does not uniquely identify this class of error, nor does it provide
+any detailed information on the nature of the failure. Note that a
+kernel implementation of
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+is permitted (and encouraged) to return any possible error as the
+function value, thus providing more detailed failure information to the
+parent process.
+.P
+Thus, no special macros are available to isolate asynchronous
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+errors. Instead, errors detected by the
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+operations in the context of the child process before the new process
+image executes are reported by setting the child's exit status to 127.
+The calling process may use the WIFEXITED and WEXITSTATUS macros on the
+.IR stat_val
+stored by the
+\fIwait\fR()
+or
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+functions to detect spawn failures to the extent that other status
+values with which the child process image may exit (before the parent
+can conclusively determine that the child process image has begun
+execution) are distinct from exit status 127.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIalarm\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfstatat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_addclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_adddup2\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigdefault\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getflags\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getpgroup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedpolicy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigmask\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_setparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_setscheduler\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetpgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItimes\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwaitid\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "\fB<spawn.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawn_file_actions_addclose.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawn_file_actions_addclose.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d72ee5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawn_file_actions_addclose.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,328 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_SPAWN_FILE_ACTIONS_ADDCLOSE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_spawn_file_actions_addclose,
+posix_spawn_file_actions_addopen
+\(em add close or open action to spawn file actions object
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <spawn.h>
+.P
+int posix_spawn_file_actions_addclose(posix_spawn_file_actions_t
+    *\fIfile_actions\fP, int \fIfildes\fP);
+int posix_spawn_file_actions_addopen(posix_spawn_file_actions_t
+    *restrict \fIfile_actions\fP, int \fIfildes\fP,
+    const char *restrict \fIpath\fP, int \fIoflag\fP, mode_t \fImode\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These functions shall add or delete a close or open action to a
+spawn file actions object.
+.P
+A spawn file actions object is of type
+.BR posix_spawn_file_actions_t
+(defined in
+.IR <spawn.h> )
+and is used to specify a series of actions to be performed by a
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+operation in order to arrive at the set of open file descriptors for
+the child process given the set of open file descriptors of the parent.
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not define comparison or assignment operators for the type
+.BR posix_spawn_file_actions_t .
+.P
+A spawn file actions object, when passed to
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR(),
+shall specify how the set of open file descriptors in the calling
+process is transformed into a set of potentially open file descriptors
+for the spawned process. This transformation shall be as if the
+specified sequence of actions was performed exactly once, in the
+context of the spawned process (prior to execution of the new process
+image), in the order in which the actions were added to the object;
+additionally, when the new process image is executed, any file
+descriptor (from this new set) which has its FD_CLOEXEC
+flag set shall be closed (see
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn\fR\^(\|)").
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_addclose\fR()
+function shall add a
+.IR close
+action to the object referenced by
+.IR file_actions
+that shall cause the file descriptor
+.IR fildes
+to be closed (as if
+.IR close (\c
+.IR fildes )
+had been called) when a new process is spawned using this file actions
+object.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_addopen\fR()
+function shall add an
+.IR open
+action to the object referenced by
+.IR file_actions
+that shall cause the file named by
+.IR path
+to be opened (as if
+.IR open (\c
+.IR path ,
+.IR oflag ,
+.IR mode )
+had been called, and the returned file descriptor, if not
+.IR fildes ,
+had been changed to
+.IR fildes )
+when a new process is spawned using this file actions object. If
+.IR fildes
+was already an open file descriptor, it shall be closed before the new
+file is opened.
+.P
+The string described by
+.IR path
+shall be copied by the
+\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_addopen\fR()
+function.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return zero;
+otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_addopen\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The value specified by
+.IR fildes
+is negative or greater than or equal to
+{OPEN_MAX}.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_addclose\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The value specified by
+.IR fildes
+is negative.
+.br
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value specified by
+.IR file_actions
+is invalid.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory exists to add to the spawn file actions object.
+.P
+It shall not be considered an error for the
+.IR fildes
+argument passed to these functions to specify a file descriptor for
+which the specified operation could not be performed at the time of the
+call. Any such error will be detected when the associated file actions
+object is later used during a
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+operation.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+These functions are part of the Spawn option and need not be provided
+on all implementations.
+.P
+Implementations may use file descriptors that must be inherited into
+child processes for the child process to remain conforming, such as for
+message catalog or tracing purposes. Therefore, an application that calls
+\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_addclose\fR()
+with an arbitrary integer risks non-conforming behavior, and this
+function can only portably be used to close file descriptor values that
+the application has obtained through explicit actions, or for the three
+file descriptors corresponding to the standard file streams. In order
+to avoid a race condition of leaking an unintended file descriptor
+into a child process, an application should consider opening all file
+descriptors with the FD_CLOEXEC bit set unless the file descriptor is
+intended to be inherited across
+.IR exec .
+.SH RATIONALE
+A spawn file actions object may be initialized to contain an ordered
+sequence of
+\fIclose\fR(),
+\fIdup2\fR(),
+and
+\fIopen\fR()
+operations to be used by
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+to arrive at the set of open file descriptors inherited by the spawned
+process from the set of open file descriptors in the parent at the time
+of the
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+call. It had been suggested that the
+\fIclose\fR()
+and
+\fIdup2\fR()
+operations alone are sufficient to rearrange file descriptors, and that
+files which need to be opened for use by the spawned process can be
+handled either by having the calling process open them before the
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+call (and close them after), or by passing pathnames to the spawned
+process (in
+.IR argv )
+so that it may open them itself. The standard developers recommend that
+applications use one of these two methods when practical, since
+detailed error status on a failed open operation is always available to
+the application this way. However, the standard developers feel that
+allowing a spawn file actions object to specify open operations is
+still appropriate because:
+.IP " 1." 4
+It is consistent with equivalent POSIX.5 (Ada) functionality.
+.IP " 2." 4
+It supports the I/O redirection paradigm commonly employed by POSIX
+programs designed to be invoked from a shell. When such a program is
+the child process, it may not be designed to open files on its own.
+.IP " 3." 4
+It allows file opens that might otherwise fail or violate file
+ownership/access rights if executed by the parent process.
+.P
+Regarding 2. above, note that the spawn open file action provides to
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+the same capability that the shell redirection operators provide to
+\fIsystem\fR(),
+only without the intervening execution of a shell; for example:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+system ("myprog <file1 3<file2");
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Regarding 3. above, note that if the calling process needs to open one
+or more files for access by the spawned process, but has insufficient
+spare file descriptors, then the open action is necessary to allow the
+\fIopen\fR()
+to occur in the context of the child process after other file
+descriptors have been closed (that must remain open in the parent).
+.P
+Additionally, if a parent is executed from a file having a
+``set-user-id'' mode bit set and the POSIX_SPAWN_RESETIDS flag is set
+in the spawn attributes, a file created within the parent process will
+(possibly incorrectly) have the parent's effective user ID as its
+owner, whereas a file created via an
+\fIopen\fR()
+action during
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+will have the parent's real ID as its owner; and an open by the parent
+process may successfully open a file to which the real user should not
+have access or fail to open a file to which the real user should have
+access.
+.SS "File Descriptor Mapping"
+.P
+The standard developers had originally proposed using an array which
+specified the mapping of child file descriptors back to those of the
+parent. It was pointed out by the ballot group that it is not possible
+to reshuffle file descriptors arbitrarily in a library implementation
+of
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+without provision for one or more spare file descriptor entries (which
+simply may not be available). Such an array requires that an
+implementation develop a complex strategy to achieve the desired
+mapping without inadvertently closing the wrong file descriptor at the
+wrong time.
+.P
+It was noted by a member of the Ada Language Bindings working group
+that the approved Ada Language
+.IR Start_Process
+family of POSIX process primitives use a caller-specified set of file
+actions to alter the normal
+\fIfork\fR()/\c
+.IR exec
+semantics for inheritance of file descriptors in a very flexible way,
+yet no such problems exist because the burden of determining how to
+achieve the final file descriptor mapping is completely on the
+application. Furthermore, although the file actions interface appears
+frightening at first glance, it is actually quite simple to implement
+in either a library or the kernel.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_addclose\fR()
+function is not required to check whether the file descriptor is less than
+{OPEN_MAX}
+because on some implementations
+{OPEN_MAX}
+reflects the RLIMIT_NOFILE soft limit and therefore calling
+\fIsetrlimit\fR()
+to reduce this limit can result in an
+{OPEN_MAX}
+value less than or equal to an already open file descriptor.
+Applications need to be able to close such file descriptors on spawn.
+On implementations where
+{OPEN_MAX}
+does not change, it is recommended that
+\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_addclose\fR()
+should return
+.BR [EBADF] 
+if
+.IR fildes
+is greater than or equal to
+{OPEN_MAX}.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_adddup2\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_destroy\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<spawn.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawn_file_actions_adddup2.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawn_file_actions_adddup2.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..80e6de3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawn_file_actions_adddup2.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_SPAWN_FILE_ACTIONS_ADDDUP2 "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_spawn_file_actions_adddup2
+\(em add dup2 action to spawn file actions object
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <spawn.h>
+.P
+int posix_spawn_file_actions_adddup2(posix_spawn_file_actions_t
+    *\fIfile_actions\fP, int \fIfildes\fP, int \fInewfildes\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_adddup2\fR()
+function shall add a
+\fIdup2\fR()
+action to the object referenced by
+.IR file_actions
+that shall cause the file descriptor
+.IR fildes
+to be duplicated as
+.IR newfildes
+(as if
+.IR dup2 (\c
+.IR fildes ,
+.IR newfildes )
+had been called) when a new process is spawned using this file actions
+object.
+.P
+A spawn file actions object is as defined in
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_addclose\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_adddup2\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_adddup2\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The value specified by
+.IR fildes
+or
+.IR newfildes
+is negative or greater than or equal to
+{OPEN_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory exists to add to the spawn file actions object.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_adddup2\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value specified by
+.IR file_actions
+is invalid.
+.P
+It shall not be considered an error for the
+.IR fildes
+argument passed to the
+\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_adddup2\fR()
+function to specify a file descriptor for which the specified operation
+could not be performed at the time of the call. Any such error will be
+detected when the associated file actions object is later used during a
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+operation.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_adddup2\fR()
+function is part of the Spawn option and need not be
+provided on all implementations.
+.P
+Implementations may use file descriptors that must be inherited into
+child processes for the child process to remain conforming, such as for
+message catalog or tracing purposes. Therefore, an application that calls
+\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_adddup2\fR()
+with an arbitrary integer for
+.IR newfildes
+risks non-conforming behavior, and this function can only portably be
+used to overwrite file descriptor values that the application has obtained
+through explicit actions, or for the three file descriptors corresponding
+to the standard file streams. In order to avoid a race condition of
+leaking an unintended file descriptor into a child process, an application
+should consider opening all file descriptors with the FD_CLOEXEC bit
+set unless the file descriptor is intended to be inherited across
+.IR exec .
+.SH RATIONALE
+Refer to the RATIONALE section in
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_addclose\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIdup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_addclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_destroy\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<spawn.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawn_file_actions_addopen.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawn_file_actions_addopen.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e7657f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawn_file_actions_addopen.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_SPAWN_FILE_ACTIONS_ADDOPEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_spawn_file_actions_addopen
+\(em add open action to spawn file actions object
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <spawn.h>
+.P
+int posix_spawn_file_actions_addopen(posix_spawn_file_actions_t
+    *restrict \fIfile_actions\fP, int \fIfildes\fP,
+    const char *restrict \fIpath\fP, int \fIoflag\fP, mode_t \fImode\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_addclose\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawn_file_actions_destroy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawn_file_actions_destroy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0039435
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawn_file_actions_destroy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_SPAWN_FILE_ACTIONS_DESTROY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_spawn_file_actions_destroy,
+posix_spawn_file_actions_init
+\(em destroy and initialize spawn file actions object
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <spawn.h>
+.P
+int posix_spawn_file_actions_destroy(posix_spawn_file_actions_t
+    *\fIfile_actions\fP);
+int posix_spawn_file_actions_init(posix_spawn_file_actions_t
+    *\fIfile_actions\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_destroy\fR()
+function shall destroy the object referenced by
+.IR file_actions ;
+the object becomes, in effect, uninitialized. An implementation may
+cause
+\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_destroy\fR()
+to set the object referenced by
+.IR file_actions
+to an invalid value. A destroyed spawn file actions object can be
+reinitialized using
+\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_init\fR();
+the results of otherwise referencing the object after it has been
+destroyed are undefined.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_init\fR()
+function shall initialize the object referenced by
+.IR file_actions
+to contain no file actions for
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+to perform.
+.P
+A spawn file actions object is as defined in
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_addclose\fR\^(\|)".
+.P
+The effect of initializing an already initialized spawn file actions
+object is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return zero;
+otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_init\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory exists to initialize the spawn file actions object.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_destroy\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value specified by
+.IR file_actions
+is invalid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+These functions are part of the Spawn option and need not be
+provided on all implementations.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Refer to the RATIONALE section in
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_addclose\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn_file_actions_addclose\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<spawn.h>\fP"
+.br
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_destroy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_destroy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4643049
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_destroy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_SPAWNATTR_DESTROY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_spawnattr_destroy,
+posix_spawnattr_init
+\(em destroy and initialize spawn attributes object
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <spawn.h>
+.P
+int posix_spawnattr_destroy(posix_spawnattr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+int posix_spawnattr_init(posix_spawnattr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_destroy\fR()
+function shall destroy a spawn attributes object. A destroyed
+.IR attr
+attributes object can be reinitialized using
+\fIposix_spawnattr_init\fR();
+the results of otherwise referencing the object after it
+has been destroyed are undefined. An implementation may cause
+\fIposix_spawnattr_destroy\fR()
+to set the object referenced by
+.IR attr
+to an invalid value.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_init\fR()
+function shall initialize a spawn attributes object
+.IR attr
+with the default value for all of the individual attributes used by the
+implementation. Results are undefined if
+\fIposix_spawnattr_init\fR()
+is called specifying an already initialized
+.IR attr
+attributes object.
+.P
+A spawn attributes object is of type
+.BR posix_spawnattr_t
+(defined in
+.IR <spawn.h> )
+and is used to specify the inheritance of process attributes across a
+spawn operation. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not define comparison or assignment
+operators for the type
+.BR posix_spawnattr_t .
+.P
+Each implementation shall document the individual attributes it uses
+and their default values unless these values are defined by POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+Attributes not defined by POSIX.1\(hy2008, their default values, and the names of
+the associated functions to get and set those attribute values are
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+The resulting spawn attributes object (possibly modified by setting
+individual attribute values), is used to modify the behavior of
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR().
+After a spawn attributes object has been used to spawn a process by a
+call to a
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR(),
+any function affecting the attributes object (including destruction)
+shall not affect any process that has been spawned in this way.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIposix_spawnattr_destroy\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_spawnattr_init\fR()
+shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to
+indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_init\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory exists to initialize the spawn attributes object.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_destroy\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value specified by attr is invalid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+These functions are part of the Spawn option and need not be
+provided on all implementations.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The original spawn interface proposed in POSIX.1\(hy2008 defined the attributes
+that specify the inheritance of process attributes across a spawn
+operation as a structure. In order to be able to separate optional
+individual attributes under their appropriate options (that is, the
+.IR spawn-schedparam
+and
+.IR spawn-schedpolicy
+attributes depending upon the Process Scheduling option), and also for
+extensibility and consistency with the newer POSIX interfaces, the
+attributes interface has been changed to an opaque data type. This
+interface now consists of the type
+.BR posix_spawnattr_t ,
+representing a spawn attributes object, together with associated
+functions to initialize or destroy the attributes object, and to set or
+get each individual attribute. Although the new object-oriented
+interface is more verbose than the original structure, it is simple to
+use, more extensible, and easy to implement.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigdefault\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getflags\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getpgroup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedpolicy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigmask\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<spawn.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_getflags.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_getflags.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e8c2f62
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_getflags.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_SPAWNATTR_GETFLAGS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_spawnattr_getflags,
+posix_spawnattr_setflags
+\(em get and set the spawn-flags attribute of a spawn attributes object
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <spawn.h>
+.P
+int posix_spawnattr_getflags(const posix_spawnattr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    short *restrict \fIflags\fP);
+int posix_spawnattr_setflags(posix_spawnattr_t *\fIattr\fP, short \fIflags\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_getflags\fR()
+function shall obtain the value of the
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute from the attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_setflags\fR()
+function shall set the
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute in an initialized attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+.P
+The
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute is used to indicate which process attributes are to be
+changed in the new process image when invoking
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR().
+It is the bitwise-inclusive OR of zero or more of the following flags:
+.P
+.nf
+POSIX_SPAWN_RESETIDS
+POSIX_SPAWN_SETPGROUP
+POSIX_SPAWN_SETSIGDEF
+POSIX_SPAWN_SETSIGMASK
+POSIX_SPAWN_SETSCHEDPARAM
+POSIX_SPAWN_SETSCHEDULER
+.fi
+.P
+These flags are defined in
+.IR <spawn.h> .
+The default value of this attribute shall be as if no flags were set.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIposix_spawnattr_getflags\fR()
+shall return zero and store the value of the
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute of
+.IR attr
+into the object referenced by the
+.IR flags
+parameter; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate the
+error.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIposix_spawnattr_setflags\fR()
+shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to
+indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value specified by
+.IR attr
+is invalid.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_setflags\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the attribute being set is not valid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+These functions are part of the Spawn option and need not be
+provided on all implementations.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigdefault\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getpgroup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedpolicy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigmask\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<spawn.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_getpgroup.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_getpgroup.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..536077a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_getpgroup.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_SPAWNATTR_GETPGROUP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_spawnattr_getpgroup,
+posix_spawnattr_setpgroup
+\(em get and set the spawn-pgroup attribute of a spawn attributes object
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <spawn.h>
+.P
+int posix_spawnattr_getpgroup(const posix_spawnattr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    pid_t *restrict \fIpgroup\fP);
+int posix_spawnattr_setpgroup(posix_spawnattr_t *\fIattr\fP, pid_t \fIpgroup\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_getpgroup\fR()
+function shall obtain the value of the
+.IR spawn-pgroup
+attribute from the attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_setpgroup\fR()
+function shall set the
+.IR spawn-pgroup
+attribute in an initialized attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+.P
+The
+.IR spawn-pgroup
+attribute represents the process group to be joined by the new process
+image in a spawn operation (if POSIX_SPAWN_SETPGROUP is set in the
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute). The default value of this attribute shall be zero.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIposix_spawnattr_getpgroup\fR()
+shall return zero and store the value of the
+.IR spawn-pgroup
+attribute of
+.IR attr
+into the object referenced by the
+.IR pgroup
+parameter; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate the
+error.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIposix_spawnattr_setpgroup\fR()
+shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to
+indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value specified by
+.IR attr
+is invalid.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_setpgroup\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the attribute being set is not valid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+These functions are part of the Spawn option and need not be
+provided on all implementations.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigdefault\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getflags\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedpolicy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigmask\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<spawn.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_getschedparam.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_getschedparam.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..74c0412
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_getschedparam.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_SPAWNATTR_GETSCHEDPARAM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_spawnattr_getschedparam,
+posix_spawnattr_setschedparam
+\(em get and set the spawn-schedparam attribute of a spawn attributes object
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <spawn.h>
+#include <sched.h>
+.P
+int posix_spawnattr_getschedparam(const posix_spawnattr_t
+    *restrict \fIattr\fP, struct sched_param *restrict \fIschedparam\fP);
+int posix_spawnattr_setschedparam(posix_spawnattr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    const struct sched_param *restrict \fIschedparam\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedparam\fR()
+function shall obtain the value of the
+.IR spawn-schedparam
+attribute from the attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_setschedparam\fR()
+function shall set the
+.IR spawn-schedparam
+attribute in an initialized attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+.P
+The
+.IR spawn-schedparam
+attribute represents the scheduling parameters to be assigned to the
+new process image in a spawn operation (if POSIX_SPAWN_SETSCHEDULER or
+POSIX_SPAWN_SETSCHEDPARAM is set
+in the
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute). The default value of this attribute is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedparam\fR()
+shall return zero and store the value of the
+.IR spawn-schedparam
+attribute of
+.IR attr
+into the object referenced by the
+.IR schedparam
+parameter; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate the
+error.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIposix_spawnattr_setschedparam\fR()
+shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to
+indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value specified by
+.IR attr
+is invalid.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_setschedparam\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the attribute being set is not valid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+These functions are part of the Spawn and Process Scheduling options
+and need not be provided on all implementations.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigdefault\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getflags\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getpgroup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedpolicy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigmask\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sched.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<spawn.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_getschedpolicy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_getschedpolicy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8f1262c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_getschedpolicy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_SPAWNATTR_GETSCHEDPOLICY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_spawnattr_getschedpolicy,
+posix_spawnattr_setschedpolicy
+\(em get and set the spawn-schedpolicy attribute of a spawn attributes object
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <spawn.h>
+#include <sched.h>
+.P
+int posix_spawnattr_getschedpolicy(const posix_spawnattr_t
+    *restrict \fIattr\fP, int *restrict \fIschedpolicy\fP);
+int posix_spawnattr_setschedpolicy(posix_spawnattr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIschedpolicy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedpolicy\fR()
+function shall obtain the value of the
+.IR spawn-schedpolicy
+attribute from the attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_setschedpolicy\fR()
+function shall set the
+.IR spawn-schedpolicy
+attribute in an initialized attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+.P
+The
+.IR spawn-schedpolicy
+attribute represents the scheduling policy to be assigned to the new
+process image in a spawn operation (if POSIX_SPAWN_SETSCHEDULER is set
+in the
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute). The default value of this attribute is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedpolicy\fR()
+shall return zero and store the value of the
+.IR spawn-schedpolicy
+attribute of
+.IR attr
+into the object referenced by the
+.IR schedpolicy
+parameter; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate the
+error.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIposix_spawnattr_setschedpolicy\fR()
+shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to
+indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value specified by
+.IR attr
+is invalid.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_setschedpolicy\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the attribute being set is not valid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+These functions are part of the Spawn and Process Scheduling options
+and need not be provided on all implementations.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigdefault\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getflags\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getpgroup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigmask\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sched.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<spawn.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_getsigdefault.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_getsigdefault.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6aef458
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_getsigdefault.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_SPAWNATTR_GETSIGDEFAULT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_spawnattr_getsigdefault,
+posix_spawnattr_setsigdefault
+\(em get and set the spawn-sigdefault attribute of a spawn attributes object
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+#include <spawn.h>
+.P
+int posix_spawnattr_getsigdefault(const posix_spawnattr_t
+    *restrict \fIattr\fP, sigset_t *restrict \fIsigdefault\fP);
+int posix_spawnattr_setsigdefault(posix_spawnattr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    const sigset_t *restrict \fIsigdefault\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigdefault\fR()
+function shall obtain the value of the
+.IR spawn-sigdefault
+attribute from the attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_setsigdefault\fR()
+function shall set the
+.IR spawn-sigdefault
+attribute in an initialized attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+.P
+The
+.IR spawn-sigdefault
+attribute represents the set of signals to be forced to default signal
+handling in the new process image (if POSIX_SPAWN_SETSIGDEF is set in
+the
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute) by a spawn operation. The default value of this attribute
+shall be an empty signal set.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigdefault\fR()
+shall return zero and store the value of the
+.IR spawn-sigdefault
+attribute of
+.IR attr
+into the object referenced by the
+.IR sigdefault
+parameter; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate the
+error.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIposix_spawnattr_setsigdefault\fR()
+shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to
+indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value specified by
+.IR attr
+is invalid.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_setsigdefault\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the attribute being set is not valid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+These functions are part of the Spawn option and need not be
+provided on all implementations.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getflags\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getpgroup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedpolicy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigmask\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<spawn.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_getsigmask.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_getsigmask.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0a43b27
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_getsigmask.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_SPAWNATTR_GETSIGMASK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_spawnattr_getsigmask,
+posix_spawnattr_setsigmask
+\(em get and set the spawn-sigmask attribute of a spawn attributes object
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+#include <spawn.h>
+.P
+int posix_spawnattr_getsigmask(const posix_spawnattr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    sigset_t *restrict \fIsigmask\fP);
+int posix_spawnattr_setsigmask(posix_spawnattr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    const sigset_t *restrict \fIsigmask\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigmask\fR()
+function shall obtain the value of the
+.IR spawn-sigmask
+attribute from the attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_setsigmask\fR()
+function shall set the
+.IR spawn-sigmask
+attribute in an initialized attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+.P
+The
+.IR spawn-sigmask
+attribute represents the signal mask in effect in the new process image
+of a spawn operation (if POSIX_SPAWN_SETSIGMASK is set in the
+.IR spawn-flags
+attribute). The default value of this attribute is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigmask\fR()
+shall return zero and store the value of the
+.IR spawn-sigmask
+attribute of
+.IR attr
+into the object referenced by the
+.IR sigmask
+parameter; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate the
+error.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIposix_spawnattr_setsigmask\fR()
+shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to
+indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value specified by
+.IR attr
+is invalid.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_spawnattr_setsigmask\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the attribute being set is not valid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+These functions are part of the Spawn option and need not be
+provided on all implementations.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigdefault\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getflags\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getpgroup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedpolicy\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<spawn.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_init.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_init.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a088a07
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_init.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_SPAWNATTR_INIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_spawnattr_init
+\(em initialize the spawn attributes object
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <spawn.h>
+.P
+int posix_spawnattr_init(posix_spawnattr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_setflags.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_setflags.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..43afdb4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_setflags.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_SPAWNATTR_SETFLAGS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_spawnattr_setflags
+\(em set the spawn-flags attribute of a spawn attributes object
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <spawn.h>
+.P
+int posix_spawnattr_setflags(posix_spawnattr_t *\fIattr\fP, short \fIflags\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getflags\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_setpgroup.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_setpgroup.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cac176e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_setpgroup.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_SPAWNATTR_SETPGROUP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_spawnattr_setpgroup
+\(em set the spawn-pgroup attribute of a spawn attributes object
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <spawn.h>
+.P
+int posix_spawnattr_setpgroup(posix_spawnattr_t *\fIattr\fP, pid_t \fIpgroup\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getpgroup\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_setschedparam.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_setschedparam.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e90734c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_setschedparam.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_SPAWNATTR_SETSCHEDPARAM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_spawnattr_setschedparam
+\(em set the spawn-schedparam attribute of a spawn attributes object
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sched.h>
+#include <spawn.h>
+.P
+int posix_spawnattr_setschedparam(posix_spawnattr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    const struct sched_param *restrict \fIschedparam\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedparam\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_setschedpolicy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_setschedpolicy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7aed806
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_setschedpolicy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_SPAWNATTR_SETSCHEDPOLICY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_spawnattr_setschedpolicy
+\(em set the spawn-schedpolicy attribute of a spawn attributes object
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sched.h>
+#include <spawn.h>
+.P
+int posix_spawnattr_setschedpolicy(posix_spawnattr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIschedpolicy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getschedpolicy\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_setsigdefault.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_setsigdefault.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c239cec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_setsigdefault.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_SPAWNATTR_SETSIGDEFAULT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_spawnattr_setsigdefault
+\(em set the spawn-sigdefault attribute of a spawn attributes object
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+#include <spawn.h>
+.P
+int posix_spawnattr_setsigdefault(posix_spawnattr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    const sigset_t *restrict \fIsigdefault\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigdefault\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_setsigmask.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_setsigmask.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..585a103
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnattr_setsigmask.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_SPAWNATTR_SETSIGMASK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_spawnattr_setsigmask
+\(em set the spawn-sigmask attribute of a spawn attributes object
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+#include <spawn.h>
+.P
+int posix_spawnattr_setsigmask(posix_spawnattr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    const sigset_t *restrict \fIsigmask\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_spawnattr_getsigmask\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..13db80e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_spawnp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_SPAWNP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_spawnp
+\(em spawn a process
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <spawn.h>
+.P
+int posix_spawnp(pid_t *restrict \fIpid\fP, const char *restrict \fIfile\fP,
+    const posix_spawn_file_actions_t *\fIfile_actions\fP,
+    const posix_spawnattr_t *restrict \fIattrp\fP,
+    char *const \fIargv\fP[restrict], char *const \fIenvp\fP[restrict]);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_spawn\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_destroy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_destroy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a17d322
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_destroy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_ATTR_DESTROY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_attr_destroy,
+posix_trace_attr_init
+\(em destroy and initialize the trace stream attributes object
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_attr_destroy(trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+int posix_trace_attr_init(trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_destroy\fR()
+function shall destroy an initialized trace attributes object.
+A destroyed
+.IR attr
+attributes object can be reinitialized using
+\fIposix_trace_attr_init\fR();
+the results of otherwise referencing the object after it
+has been destroyed are undefined.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_init\fR()
+function shall initialize a trace attributes object
+.IR attr
+with the default value for all of the individual attributes used by a
+given implementation. The read-only
+.IR generation-version
+and
+.IR clock-resolution
+attributes of the newly initialized trace attributes object shall be
+set to their appropriate values (see
+.IR "Section 2.11.1.2" ", " "posix_trace_status_info Structure").
+.P
+Results are undefined if
+\fIposix_trace_attr_init\fR()
+is called specifying an already initialized
+.IR attr
+attributes object.
+.P
+Implementations may add extensions to the trace attributes object
+structure as permitted in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Conformance".
+.P
+The resulting attributes object (possibly modified by setting
+individual attributes values), when used by
+\fIposix_trace_create\fR(),
+defines the attributes of the trace stream created. A single
+attributes object can be used in multiple calls to
+\fIposix_trace_create\fR().
+After one or more trace streams have been created using an attributes
+object, any function affecting that attributes object, including
+destruction, shall not affect any trace stream previously created. An
+initialized attributes object also serves to receive the attributes of
+an existing trace stream or trace log when calling the
+\fIposix_trace_get_attr\fR()
+function.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return a value of
+zero. Otherwise, they shall return the corresponding error number.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_destroy\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR attr
+is invalid.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_init\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory exists to initialize the trace attributes object.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_destroy\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_trace_attr_init\fR()
+functions may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_get_attr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuname\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<trace.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_getclockres.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_getclockres.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0806982
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_getclockres.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_ATTR_GETCLOCKRES "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_attr_getclockres,
+posix_trace_attr_getcreatetime,
+posix_trace_attr_getgenversion,
+posix_trace_attr_getname,
+posix_trace_attr_setname
+\(em retrieve and set information about a trace stream
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_attr_getclockres(const trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    struct timespec *\fIresolution\fP);
+int posix_trace_attr_getcreatetime(const trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    struct timespec *\fIcreatetime\fP);
+.P
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_attr_getgenversion(const trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    char *\fIgenversion\fP);
+int posix_trace_attr_getname(const trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    char *\fItracename\fP);
+int posix_trace_attr_setname(trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    const char *\fItracename\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getclockres\fR()
+function shall copy the clock resolution of the clock used to generate
+timestamps from the
+.IR clock-resolution
+attribute of the attributes object pointed to by the
+.IR attr
+argument into the structure pointed to by the
+.IR resolution
+argument.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getcreatetime\fR()
+function shall copy the trace stream creation time from the
+.IR creation-time
+attribute of the attributes object pointed to by the
+.IR attr
+argument into the structure pointed to by the
+.IR createtime
+argument. The
+.IR creation-time
+attribute shall represent the time of creation of the trace stream.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getgenversion\fR()
+function shall copy the string containing version information from the
+.IR generation-version
+attribute of the attributes object pointed to by the
+.IR attr
+argument into the string pointed to by the
+.IR genversion
+argument. The
+.IR genversion
+argument shall be the address of a character array which can store at
+least
+{TRACE_NAME_MAX}
+characters.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getname\fR()
+function shall copy the string containing the trace name from the
+.IR trace-name
+attribute of the attributes object pointed to by the
+.IR attr
+argument into the string pointed to by the
+.IR tracename
+argument. The
+.IR tracename
+argument shall be the address of a character array which can store at
+least
+{TRACE_NAME_MAX}
+characters.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_setname\fR()
+function shall set the name in the
+.IR trace-name
+attribute of the attributes object pointed to by the
+.IR attr
+argument, using the trace name string supplied by the
+.IR tracename
+argument. If the supplied string contains more than
+{TRACE_NAME_MAX}
+characters, the name copied into the
+.IR trace-name
+attribute may be truncated to one less than the length of
+{TRACE_NAME_MAX}
+characters. The default value is a null string.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return a value of
+zero. Otherwise, they shall return the corresponding error number.
+.P
+If successful, the
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getclockres\fR()
+function stores the
+.IR clock-resolution
+attribute value in the object pointed to by
+.IR resolution .
+Otherwise, the content of this object is unspecified.
+.P
+If successful, the
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getcreatetime\fR()
+function stores the trace stream creation time in the object pointed to
+by
+.IR createtime .
+Otherwise, the content of this object is unspecified.
+.P
+If successful, the
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getgenversion\fR()
+function stores the trace version information in the string pointed to
+by
+.IR genversion .
+Otherwise, the content of this string is unspecified.
+.P
+If successful, the
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getname\fR()
+function stores the trace name in the string pointed to by
+.IR tracename .
+Otherwise, the content of this string is unspecified.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getclockres\fR(),
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getcreatetime\fR(),
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getgenversion\fR(),
+and
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getname\fR()
+functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value specified by one of the arguments is invalid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getclockres\fR(),
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getcreatetime\fR(),
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getgenversion\fR(),
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getname\fR(),
+and
+\fIposix_trace_attr_setname\fR()
+functions may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_attr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_get_attr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuname\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<trace.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_getinherited.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_getinherited.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ed4c3a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_getinherited.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,277 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_ATTR_GETINHERITED "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+.ad l
+posix_trace_attr_getinherited,
+posix_trace_attr_getlogfullpolicy,
+posix_trace_attr_getstreamfullpolicy,
+posix_trace_attr_setinherited,
+posix_trace_attr_setlogfullpolicy,
+posix_trace_attr_setstreamfullpolicy
+\(em retrieve and set the behavior of a trace stream
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.ad b
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_attr_getinherited(const trace_attr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    int *restrict \fIinheritancepolicy\fP);
+int posix_trace_attr_getlogfullpolicy(const trace_attr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    int *restrict \fIlogpolicy\fP);
+int posix_trace_attr_getstreamfullpolicy(const trace_attr_t *restrict
+    \fIattr\fP, int *restrict \fIstreampolicy\fP);
+int posix_trace_attr_setinherited(trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIinheritancepolicy\fP);
+int posix_trace_attr_setlogfullpolicy(trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIlogpolicy\fP);
+int posix_trace_attr_setstreamfullpolicy(trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIstreampolicy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getinherited\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_trace_attr_setinherited\fR()
+functions, respectively, shall get and set the inheritance policy
+stored in the
+.IR inheritance
+attribute for traced processes across the
+\fIfork\fR()
+and
+\fIspawn\fR()
+operations. The
+.IR inheritance
+attribute of the attributes object pointed to by the
+.IR attr
+argument shall be set to one of the following values defined by
+manifest constants in the
+.IR <trace.h> 
+header:
+.IP POSIX_TRACE_CLOSE_FOR_CHILD 6
+.br
+After a
+\fIfork\fR()
+or
+\fIspawn\fR()
+operation, the child shall not be traced, and tracing of the parent
+shall continue.
+.IP POSIX_TRACE_INHERITED 6
+.br
+After a
+\fIfork\fR()
+or
+\fIspawn\fR()
+operation, if the parent is being traced, its child shall be
+concurrently traced using the same trace stream.
+.P
+The default value for the
+.IR inheritance
+attribute is POSIX_TRACE_CLOSE_FOR_CHILD.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getlogfullpolicy\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_trace_attr_setlogfullpolicy\fR()
+functions, respectively, shall get and set the trace log full policy
+stored in the
+.IR log-full-policy
+attribute of the attributes object pointed to by the
+.IR attr
+argument.
+.P
+The
+.IR log-full-policy
+attribute shall be set to one of the following values defined by
+manifest constants in the
+.IR <trace.h> 
+header:
+.IP POSIX_TRACE_LOOP 6
+.br
+The trace log shall loop until the associated trace stream is stopped.
+This policy means that when the trace log gets full, the file system
+shall reuse the resources allocated to the oldest trace events that
+were recorded. In this way, the trace log will always contain the most
+recent trace events flushed.
+.IP POSIX_TRACE_UNTIL_FULL 6
+.br
+The trace stream shall be flushed to the trace log until the trace log
+is full. This condition can be deduced from the
+.IR posix_log_full_status
+member status (see the
+.BR posix_trace_status_info
+structure defined in
+.IR <trace.h> ).
+The last recorded trace event shall be the POSIX_TRACE_STOP trace event.
+.IP POSIX_TRACE_APPEND 6
+.br
+The associated trace stream shall be flushed to the trace log without
+log size limitation. If the application specifies POSIX_TRACE_APPEND,
+the implementation shall ignore the
+.IR log-max-size
+attribute.
+.P
+The default value for the
+.IR log-full-policy
+attribute is POSIX_TRACE_LOOP.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getstreamfullpolicy\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_trace_attr_setstreamfullpolicy\fR()
+functions, respectively, shall get and set the trace stream full policy
+stored in the
+.IR stream-full-policy
+attribute of the attributes object pointed to by the
+.IR attr
+argument.
+.P
+The
+.IR stream-full-policy
+attribute shall be set to one of the following values defined by
+manifest constants in the
+.IR <trace.h> 
+header:
+.IP POSIX_TRACE_LOOP 6
+.br
+The trace stream shall loop until explicitly stopped by the
+\fIposix_trace_stop\fR()
+function. This policy means that when the trace stream is full, the
+trace system shall reuse the resources allocated to the oldest trace
+events recorded. In this way, the trace stream will always contain the
+most recent trace events recorded.
+.IP POSIX_TRACE_UNTIL_FULL 6
+.br
+The trace stream will run until the trace stream resources are
+exhausted. Then the trace stream will stop. This condition can be
+deduced from
+.IR posix_stream_status
+and
+.IR posix_stream_full_status
+(see the
+.BR posix_trace_status_info
+structure defined in
+.IR <trace.h> ).
+When this trace stream is read, a POSIX_TRACE_STOP trace
+event shall be reported after reporting the last recorded trace event.
+The trace system shall reuse the resources allocated to any trace
+events already reported\(emsee the
+\fIposix_trace_getnext_event\fR(),
+\fIposix_trace_trygetnext_event\fR(),
+and
+\fIposix_trace_timedgetnext_event\fR()
+functions\(emor already flushed for an active trace stream with log if
+the Trace Log option is supported; see the
+\fIposix_trace_flush\fR()
+function. The trace system shall restart the trace stream when it is
+empty and may restart it sooner. A POSIX_TRACE_START trace event shall
+be reported before reporting the next recorded trace event.
+.IP POSIX_TRACE_FLUSH 6
+.br
+If the Trace Log option is supported, this policy is identical to the
+POSIX_TRACE_UNTIL_FULL trace stream full policy except that the trace
+stream shall be flushed regularly as if
+\fIposix_trace_flush\fR()
+had been explicitly called. Defining this policy for an active trace
+stream without log shall be invalid.
+.P
+The default value for the
+.IR stream-full-policy
+attribute shall be POSIX_TRACE_LOOP for an active trace stream without
+log.
+.P
+If the Trace Log option is supported, the default value for the
+.IR stream-full-policy
+attribute shall be POSIX_TRACE_FLUSH for an active trace stream with
+log.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return a value of
+zero. Otherwise, they shall return the corresponding error number.
+.P
+If successful, the
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getinherited\fR()
+function shall store the
+.IR inheritance
+attribute value in the object pointed to by
+.IR inheritancepolicy .
+Otherwise, the content of this object is undefined.
+.P
+If successful, the
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getlogfullpolicy\fR()
+function shall store the
+.IR log-full-policy
+attribute value in the object pointed to by
+.IR logpolicy .
+Otherwise, the content of this object is undefined.
+.P
+If successful, the
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getstreamfullpolicy\fR()
+function shall store the
+.IR stream-full-policy
+attribute value in the object pointed to by
+.IR streampolicy .
+Otherwise, the content of this object is undefined.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value specified by at least one of the arguments is invalid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The following functions:
+.sp
+.RS
+.nf
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getinherited\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getlogfullpolicy\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getstreamfullpolicy\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_attr_setinherited\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_attr_setlogfullpolicy\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_attr_setstreamfullpolicy\fR()
+.fi
+.RE
+.P
+may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_attr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_get_attr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_getnext_event\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_start\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<trace.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_getlogsize.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_getlogsize.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..35eb2ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_getlogsize.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,265 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_ATTR_GETLOGSIZE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+.ad l
+posix_trace_attr_getlogsize,
+posix_trace_attr_getmaxdatasize,
+posix_trace_attr_getmaxsystemeventsize,
+posix_trace_attr_getmaxusereventsize,
+posix_trace_attr_getstreamsize,
+posix_trace_attr_setlogsize,
+posix_trace_attr_setmaxdatasize,
+posix_trace_attr_setstreamsize
+\(em retrieve and set trace stream size attributes
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.ad b
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_attr_getlogsize(const trace_attr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    size_t *restrict \fIlogsize\fP);
+int posix_trace_attr_getmaxdatasize(const trace_attr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    size_t *restrict \fImaxdatasize\fP);
+int posix_trace_attr_getmaxsystemeventsize(
+    const trace_attr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    size_t *restrict \fIeventsize\fP);
+int posix_trace_attr_getmaxusereventsize(
+    const trace_attr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    size_t \fIdata_len\fP, size_t *restrict \fIeventsize\fP);
+int posix_trace_attr_getstreamsize(const trace_attr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    size_t *restrict \fIstreamsize\fP);
+int posix_trace_attr_setlogsize(trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    size_t \fIlogsize\fP);
+int posix_trace_attr_setmaxdatasize(trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    size_t \fImaxdatasize\fP);
+int posix_trace_attr_setstreamsize(trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    size_t \fIstreamsize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getlogsize\fR()
+function shall copy the log size, in bytes, from the
+.IR log-max-size
+attribute of the attributes object pointed to by the
+.IR attr
+argument into the variable pointed to by the
+.IR logsize
+argument. This log size is the maximum total of bytes that shall be
+allocated for system and user trace events in the trace log. The
+default value for the
+.IR log-max-size
+attribute is implementation-defined.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_setlogsize\fR()
+function shall set the maximum allowed size, in bytes, in the
+.IR log-max-size
+attribute of the attributes object pointed to by the
+.IR attr
+argument, using the size value supplied by the
+.IR logsize
+argument.
+.P
+The trace log size shall be used if the
+.IR log-full-policy
+attribute is set to POSIX_TRACE_LOOP or POSIX_TRACE_UNTIL_FULL. If the
+.IR log-full-policy
+attribute is set to POSIX_TRACE_APPEND, the implementation shall ignore
+the
+.IR log-max-size
+attribute.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getmaxdatasize\fR()
+function shall copy the maximum user trace event data size, in bytes,
+from the
+.IR max-data-size
+attribute of the attributes object pointed to by the
+.IR attr
+argument into the variable pointed to by the
+.IR maxdatasize
+argument. The default value for the
+.IR max-data-size
+attribute is implementation-defined.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getmaxsystemeventsize\fR()
+function shall calculate the maximum memory size, in bytes, required to
+store a single system trace event. This value is calculated for the
+trace stream attributes object pointed to by the
+.IR attr
+argument and is returned in the variable pointed to by the
+.IR eventsize
+argument.
+.P
+The values returned as the maximum memory sizes of the user and system
+trace events shall be such that if the sum of the maximum memory sizes
+of a set of the trace events that may be recorded in a trace stream is
+less than or equal to the
+.IR stream-min-size
+attribute of that trace stream, the system provides the necessary
+resources for recording all those trace events, without loss.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getmaxusereventsize\fR()
+function shall calculate the maximum memory size, in bytes, required to
+store a single user trace event generated by a call to
+\fIposix_trace_event\fR()
+with a
+.IR data_len
+parameter equal to the
+.IR data_len
+value specified in this call. This value is calculated for the trace
+stream attributes object pointed to by the
+.IR attr
+argument and is returned in the variable pointed to by the
+.IR eventsize
+argument.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getstreamsize\fR()
+function shall copy the stream size, in bytes, from the
+.IR stream-min-size
+attribute of the attributes object pointed to by the
+.IR attr
+argument into the variable pointed to by the
+.IR streamsize
+argument.
+.P
+This stream size is the current total memory size reserved for system
+and user trace events in the trace stream. The default value for the
+.IR stream-min-size
+attribute is implementation-defined. The stream size refers to memory
+used to store trace event records. Other stream data (for example,
+trace attribute values) shall not be included in this size.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_setmaxdatasize\fR()
+function shall set the maximum allowed size, in bytes, in the
+.IR max-data-size
+attribute of the attributes object pointed to by the
+.IR attr
+argument, using the size value supplied by the
+.IR maxdatasize
+argument. This maximum size is the maximum allowed size for the user
+data argument which may be passed to
+\fIposix_trace_event\fR().
+The implementation shall be allowed to truncate data passed to
+.IR trace_user_event
+which is longer than
+.IR maxdatasize .
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_setstreamsize\fR()
+function shall set the minimum allowed size, in bytes, in the
+.IR stream-min-size
+attribute of the attributes object pointed to by the
+.IR attr
+argument, using the size value supplied by the
+.IR streamsize
+argument.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return a value of
+zero. Otherwise, they shall return the corresponding error number.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getlogsize\fR()
+function stores the maximum trace log allowed size in the object
+pointed to by
+.IR logsize ,
+if successful.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getmaxdatasize\fR()
+function stores the maximum trace event record memory size in the
+object pointed to by
+.IR maxdatasize ,
+if successful.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getmaxsystemeventsize\fR()
+function stores the maximum memory size to store a single system trace
+event in the object pointed to by
+.IR eventsize ,
+if successful.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getmaxusereventsize\fR()
+function stores the maximum memory size to store a single user trace
+event in the object pointed to by
+.IR eventsize ,
+if successful.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getstreamsize\fR()
+function stores the maximum trace stream allowed size in the object
+pointed to by
+.IR streamsize ,
+if successful.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value specified by one of the arguments is invalid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The following functions:
+.sp
+.RS
+.nf
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getlogsize\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getmaxdatasize\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getmaxsystemeventsize\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getmaxusereventsize\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_attr_getstreamsize\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_attr_setlogsize\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_attr_setmaxdatasize\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_attr_setstreamsize\fR()
+.fi
+.RE
+.P
+may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_attr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_event\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_get_attr\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<trace.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_getname.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_getname.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c18693e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_getname.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_ATTR_GETNAME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_attr_getname
+\(em retrieve and set information about a trace stream
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_attr_getname(const trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    char *\fItracename\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_attr_getclockres\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_getstreamfullpolicy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_getstreamfullpolicy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..24a7b0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_getstreamfullpolicy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_ATTR_GETSTREAMFULLPOLICY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_attr_getstreamfullpolicy
+\(em retrieve and set the behavior of a trace stream
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_attr_getstreamfullpolicy(const trace_attr_t *restrict
+    \fIattr\fP, int *restrict \fIstreampolicy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_attr_getinherited\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_getstreamsize.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_getstreamsize.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..97dccee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_getstreamsize.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_ATTR_GETSTREAMSIZE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_attr_getstreamsize
+\(em retrieve and set trace stream size attributes
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_attr_getstreamsize(const trace_attr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    size_t *restrict \fIstreamsize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_attr_getlogsize\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_init.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_init.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9603b4f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_init.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_ATTR_INIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_attr_init
+\(em initialize the trace stream attributes object
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_attr_init(trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_attr_destroy\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_setinherited.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_setinherited.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ac33c81
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_setinherited.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_ATTR_SETINHERITED "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_attr_setinherited,
+posix_trace_attr_setlogfullpolicy
+\(em retrieve and set the behavior of a trace stream
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_attr_setinherited(trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIinheritancepolicy\fP);
+int posix_trace_attr_setlogfullpolicy(trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIlogpolicy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_attr_getinherited\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_setlogsize.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_setlogsize.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c5b7ab1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_setlogsize.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_ATTR_SETLOGSIZE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_attr_setlogsize,
+posix_trace_attr_setmaxdatasize
+\(em retrieve and set trace stream size attributes
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_attr_setlogsize(trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    size_t \fIlogsize\fP);
+int posix_trace_attr_setmaxdatasize(trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    size_t \fImaxdatasize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_attr_getlogsize\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_setname.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_setname.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..23b93fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_setname.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_ATTR_SETNAME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_attr_setname
+\(em retrieve and set information about a trace stream
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_attr_setname(trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    const char *\fItracename\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_attr_getclockres\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_setstreamfullpolicy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_setstreamfullpolicy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..81c52aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_setstreamfullpolicy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_ATTR_SETSTREAMFULLPOLICY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_attr_setstreamfullpolicy
+\(em retrieve and set the behavior of a trace stream
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_attr_setstreamfullpolicy(trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIstreampolicy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_attr_getinherited\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_setstreamsize.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_setstreamsize.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d08dec9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_attr_setstreamsize.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_ATTR_SETSTREAMSIZE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_attr_setstreamsize
+\(em retrieve and set trace stream size attributes
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_attr_setstreamsize(trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    size_t \fIstreamsize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_attr_getlogsize\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_clear.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_clear.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..37669b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_clear.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_CLEAR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_clear
+\(em clear trace stream and trace log
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_clear(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_trace_clear\fR()
+function shall reinitialize the trace stream identified by the argument
+.IR trid
+as if it were returning from the
+\fIposix_trace_create\fR()
+function, except that the same allocated resources shall be reused, the
+mapping of trace event type identifiers to trace event names shall be
+unchanged, and the trace stream status shall remain unchanged (that is,
+if it was running, it remains running and if it was suspended, it
+remains suspended).
+.P
+All trace events in the trace stream recorded before the call to
+\fIposix_trace_clear\fR()
+shall be lost. The
+.IR posix_stream_full_status
+status shall be set to POSIX_TRACE_NOT_FULL.
+There is no guarantee that all trace events that occurred during the
+\fIposix_trace_clear\fR()
+call are recorded; the behavior with respect to trace points that may
+occur during this call is unspecified.
+.P
+If the Trace Log option is supported and the trace stream has been
+created with a log, the
+\fIposix_trace_clear\fR()
+function shall reinitialize the trace stream with the same behavior as
+if the trace stream was created without the log, plus it shall
+reinitialize the trace log associated with the trace stream identified
+by the argument
+.IR trid
+as if it were returning from the
+\fIposix_trace_create_withlog\fR()
+function, except that the same allocated resources, for the trace log,
+may be reused and the associated trace stream status remains unchanged.
+The first trace event recorded in the trace log after the call to
+\fIposix_trace_clear\fR()
+shall be the same as the first trace event recorded in the active trace
+stream after the call to
+\fIposix_trace_clear\fR().
+The
+.IR posix_log_full_status
+status shall be set to POSIX_TRACE_NOT_FULL. There is no guarantee
+that all trace events that occurred during the
+\fIposix_trace_clear\fR()
+call are recorded in the trace log; the behavior with respect to trace
+points that may occur during this call is unspecified. If the log full
+policy is POSIX_TRACE_APPEND, the effect of a call to this function is
+unspecified for the trace log associated with the trace stream
+identified by the
+.IR trid
+argument.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIposix_trace_clear\fR()
+function shall return a value of zero. Otherwise, it shall return the
+corresponding error number.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIposix_trace_clear\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR trid
+argument does not correspond to an active trace stream.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIposix_trace_clear\fR()
+function may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_attr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_get_attr\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<trace.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_close.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_close.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..30d87d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_close.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_CLOSE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_close,
+posix_trace_open,
+posix_trace_rewind
+\(em trace log management
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_close(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP);
+int posix_trace_open(int \fIfile_desc\fP, trace_id_t *\fItrid\fP);
+int posix_trace_rewind(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_trace_close\fR()
+function shall deallocate the trace log identifier indicated by
+.IR trid ,
+and all of its associated resources. If there is no valid trace log
+pointed to by the
+.IR trid ,
+this function shall fail.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_open\fR()
+function shall allocate the necessary resources and establish the
+connection between a trace log identified by the
+.IR file_desc
+argument and a trace stream identifier identified by the object pointed
+to by the
+.IR trid
+argument. The
+.IR file_desc
+argument should be a valid open file descriptor that corresponds to a
+trace log. The
+.IR file_desc
+argument shall be open for reading. The current trace event timestamp,
+which specifies the timestamp of the trace event that will be read by
+the next call to
+\fIposix_trace_getnext_event\fR(),
+shall be set to the timestamp of the oldest trace event recorded in the
+trace log identified by
+.IR trid .
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_open\fR()
+function shall return a trace stream identifier in the variable
+pointed to by the
+.IR trid
+argument, that may only be used by the following functions:
+.TS
+tab(!);
+l l.
+T{
+.nf
+\fIposix_trace_close\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_equal\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_get_name\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_eventtypelist_getnext_id\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_eventtypelist_rewind\fR()
+T}!T{
+.nf
+\fIposix_trace_get_attr\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_get_status\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_getnext_event\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_rewind\fR()
+.fi
+T}
+.TE
+.P
+In particular, notice that the operations normally used by a trace
+controller process, such as
+\fIposix_trace_start\fR(),
+\fIposix_trace_stop\fR(),
+or
+\fIposix_trace_shutdown\fR(),
+cannot be invoked using the trace stream identifier returned by the
+\fIposix_trace_open\fR()
+function.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_rewind\fR()
+function shall reset the current trace event timestamp, which specifies
+the timestamp of the trace event that will be read by the next call to
+\fIposix_trace_getnext_event\fR(),
+to the timestamp of the oldest trace event recorded in the trace log
+identified by
+.IR trid .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return a value of
+zero. Otherwise, they shall return the corresponding error number.
+.P
+If successful, the
+\fIposix_trace_open\fR()
+function stores the trace stream identifier value in the object pointed
+to by
+.IR trid .
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIposix_trace_open\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The operation was interrupted by a signal and thus no trace log was
+opened.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The object pointed to by
+.IR file_desc
+does not correspond to a valid trace log.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_close\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_trace_rewind\fR()
+functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The object pointed to by
+.IR trid
+does not correspond to a valid trace log.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIposix_trace_close\fR(),
+\fIposix_trace_open\fR(),
+and
+\fIposix_trace_rewind\fR()
+functions may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_get_attr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_get_filter\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_getnext_event\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<trace.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_create.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_create.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5426601
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_create.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,450 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_CREATE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_create,
+posix_trace_create_withlog,
+posix_trace_flush,
+posix_trace_shutdown
+\(em trace stream initialization, flush, and shutdown from a process
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_create(pid_t \fIpid\fP,
+    const trace_attr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    trace_id_t *restrict \fItrid\fP);
+int posix_trace_create_withlog(pid_t \fIpid\fP,
+    const trace_attr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP, int \fIfile_desc\fP,
+    trace_id_t *restrict \fItrid\fP);
+int posix_trace_flush(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP);
+int posix_trace_shutdown(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_trace_create\fR()
+function shall create an active trace stream. It allocates all the
+resources needed by the trace stream being created for tracing the
+process specified by
+.IR pid
+in accordance with the
+.IR attr
+argument. The
+.IR attr
+argument represents the initial attributes of the trace stream and
+shall have been initialized by the function
+\fIposix_trace_attr_init\fR()
+prior to the
+\fIposix_trace_create\fR()
+call. If the argument
+.IR attr
+is NULL, the default attributes shall be used. The
+.IR attr
+attributes object shall be manipulated through a set of functions
+described in the
+.IR posix_trace_attr
+family of functions. If the attributes of the object pointed to by
+.IR attr
+are modified later, the attributes of the trace stream shall not be
+affected. The
+.IR creation-time
+attribute of the newly created trace stream shall be set to the value
+of the system clock, if the Timers option is not supported, or to the
+value of the CLOCK_REALTIME clock, if the Timers option is supported.
+.P
+The
+.IR pid
+argument represents the target process to be traced. If the process
+executing this function does not have appropriate privileges to trace
+the process identified by
+.IR pid ,
+an error shall be returned. If the
+.IR pid
+argument is zero, the calling process shall be traced.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_create\fR()
+function shall store the trace stream identifier of the new trace
+stream in the object pointed to by the
+.IR trid
+argument. This trace stream identifier shall be used in subsequent
+calls to control tracing. The
+.IR trid
+argument may only be used by the following functions:
+.TS
+tab(!);
+l l.
+T{
+.nf
+\fIposix_trace_clear\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_equal\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_get_name\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_eventtypelist_getnext_id\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_eventtypelist_rewind\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_get_attr\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_get_status\fR()
+T}!T{
+.nf
+\fIposix_trace_getnext_event\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_shutdown\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_start\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_stop\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_timedgetnext_event\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_trid_eventid_open\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_trygetnext_event\fR()
+.fi
+T}
+.TE
+.P
+If the Trace Event Filter option is supported, the following additional
+functions may use the
+.IR trid
+argument:
+.TS
+tab(!);
+l l.
+T{
+\fIposix_trace_get_filter\fR()
+T}!T{
+\fIposix_trace_set_filter\fR()
+T}
+.TE
+.P
+In particular, notice that the operations normally used by a trace
+analyzer process, such as
+\fIposix_trace_rewind\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_trace_close\fR(),
+cannot be invoked using the trace stream identifier returned by the
+\fIposix_trace_create\fR()
+function.
+.P
+A trace stream shall be created in a suspended state.
+If the Trace Event Filter option is supported, its trace event type
+filter shall be empty.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_create\fR()
+function may be called multiple times from the same or different
+processes, with the system-wide limit indicated by the runtime
+invariant value
+{TRACE_SYS_MAX},
+which has the minimum value
+{_POSIX_TRACE_SYS_MAX}.
+.P
+The trace stream identifier returned by the
+\fIposix_trace_create\fR()
+function in the argument pointed to by
+.IR trid
+is valid only in the process that made the function call. If it is
+used from another process, that is a child process, in functions
+defined in POSIX.1\(hy2008, these functions shall return with the error
+.BR [EINVAL] .
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_create_withlog\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIposix_trace_create\fR(),
+except that it associates a trace log with this stream. The
+.IR file_desc
+argument shall be the file descriptor designating the trace log
+destination. The function shall fail if this file descriptor refers to
+a file with a file type that is not compatible with the log policy
+associated with the trace log. The list of the appropriate file types
+that are compatible with each log policy is implementation-defined.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_create_withlog\fR()
+function shall return in the parameter pointed to by
+.IR trid
+the trace stream identifier, which uniquely identifies the newly
+created trace stream, and shall be used in subsequent calls to control
+tracing. The
+.IR trid
+argument may only be used by the following functions:
+.TS
+tab(!);
+l l.
+T{
+.nf
+\fIposix_trace_clear\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_equal\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_get_name\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_eventtypelist_getnext_id\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_eventtypelist_rewind\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_flush\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_get_attr\fR()
+T}!T{
+.nf
+\fIposix_trace_get_status\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_getnext_event\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_shutdown\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_start\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_stop\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_timedgetnext_event\fR()
+\fIposix_trace_trid_eventid_open\fR()
+.fi
+T}
+.TE
+.P
+If the Trace Event Filter option is supported, the following additional
+functions may use the
+.IR trid
+argument:
+.TS
+tab(!);
+l l.
+T{
+\fIposix_trace_get_filter\fR()
+T}!T{
+\fIposix_trace_set_filter\fR()
+T}
+.TE
+.P
+In particular, notice that the operations normally used by a trace
+analyzer process, such as
+\fIposix_trace_rewind\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_trace_close\fR(),
+cannot be invoked using the trace stream identifier returned by the
+\fIposix_trace_create_withlog\fR()
+function.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_flush\fR()
+function shall initiate a flush operation which copies the contents of
+the trace stream identified by the argument
+.IR trid
+into the trace log associated with the trace stream at the creation
+time. If no trace log has been associated with the trace stream
+pointed to by
+.IR trid ,
+this function shall return an error. The termination of the flush
+operation can be polled by the
+\fIposix_trace_get_status\fR()
+function. During the flush operation, it shall be possible to trace
+new trace events up to the point when the trace stream becomes full.
+After flushing is completed, the space used by the flushed trace events
+shall be available for tracing new trace events.
+.P
+If flushing the trace stream causes the resulting trace log to become
+full, the trace log full policy shall be applied. If the trace
+.IR log-full-policy
+attribute is set, the following occurs:
+.IP POSIX_TRACE_UNTIL_FULL 6
+.br
+The trace events that have not yet been flushed shall be discarded.
+.IP POSIX_TRACE_LOOP 6
+.br
+The trace events that have not yet been flushed shall be written to the
+beginning of the trace log, overwriting previous trace events stored
+there.
+.IP POSIX_TRACE_APPEND 6
+.br
+The trace events that have not yet been flushed shall be appended to the
+trace log.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_shutdown\fR()
+function shall stop the tracing of trace events in the trace stream
+identified by
+.IR trid ,
+as if
+\fIposix_trace_stop\fR()
+had been invoked. The
+\fIposix_trace_shutdown\fR()
+function shall free all the resources associated with the trace
+stream.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_shutdown\fR()
+function shall not return until all the resources associated with the
+trace stream have been freed. When the
+\fIposix_trace_shutdown\fR()
+function returns, the
+.IR trid
+argument becomes an invalid trace stream identifier. A call to this
+function shall unconditionally deallocate the resources regardless of
+whether all trace events have been retrieved by the analyzer process.
+Any thread blocked on one of the
+\fItrace_getnext_event\fR()
+functions (which specified this
+.IR trid )
+before this call is unblocked with the error
+.BR [EINVAL] .
+.P
+If the process exits, invokes a member of the
+.IR exec
+family of functions, or is terminated, the trace streams that the
+process had created and that have not yet been shut down, shall be
+automatically shut down as if an explicit call were made to the
+\fIposix_trace_shutdown\fR()
+function.
+.P
+For an active trace stream with log, when the
+\fIposix_trace_shutdown\fR()
+function is called, all trace events that have not yet been flushed to
+the trace log shall be flushed, as in the
+\fIposix_trace_flush\fR()
+function, and the trace log shall be closed.
+.P
+When a trace log is closed, all the information that may be retrieved
+later from the trace log through the trace interface shall have been
+written to the trace log. This information includes the trace
+attributes, the list of trace event types (with the mapping between
+trace event names and trace event type identifiers), and the trace
+status.
+.P
+In addition, unspecified information shall be written to the trace
+log to allow detection of a valid trace log during the
+\fIposix_trace_open\fR()
+operation.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_shutdown\fR()
+function shall not return until all trace events have been flushed.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return a value of
+zero. Otherwise, they shall return the corresponding error number.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_create\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_trace_create_withlog\fR()
+functions store the trace stream identifier value in the object
+pointed to by
+.IR trid ,
+if successful.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIposix_trace_create\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_trace_create_withlog\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+No more trace streams can be started now.
+{TRACE_SYS_MAX}
+has been exceeded.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The operation was interrupted by a signal. No trace stream was
+created.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+One or more of the trace parameters specified by the
+.IR attr
+parameter is invalid.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+The implementation does not currently have sufficient memory to create
+the trace stream with the specified parameters.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The caller does not have appropriate privileges to trace the process
+specified by
+.IR pid .
+.TP
+.BR ESRCH
+The
+.IR pid
+argument does not refer to an existing process.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_create_withlog\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR file_desc
+argument is not a valid file descriptor open for writing.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR file_desc
+argument refers to a file with a file type that does not support the
+log policy associated with the trace log.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+No space left on device. The device corresponding to the argument
+.IR file_desc
+does not contain the space required to create this trace log.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_flush\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_trace_shutdown\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR trid
+argument does not correspond to an active trace stream with log.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+The trace log file has attempted to exceed an implementation-defined
+maximum file size.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+No space left on device.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIposix_trace_create\fR(),
+\fIposix_trace_create_withlog\fR(),
+\fIposix_trace_flush\fR(),
+and
+\fIposix_trace_shutdown\fR()
+functions may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIclock_getres\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_attr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_clear\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_close\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_eventid_equal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_eventtypelist_getnext_id\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_get_attr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_get_filter\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_getnext_event\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_start\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_start\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItime\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<trace.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_event.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_event.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2210a16
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_event.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,178 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_EVENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_event,
+posix_trace_eventid_open
+\(em trace functions for instrumenting application code
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+void posix_trace_event(trace_event_id_t \fIevent_id\fP,
+    const void *restrict \fIdata_ptr\fP, size_t \fIdata_len\fP);
+int posix_trace_eventid_open(const char *restrict \fIevent_name\fP,
+    trace_event_id_t *restrict \fIevent_id\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_trace_event\fR()
+function shall record the
+.IR event_id
+and the user data pointed to by
+.IR data_ptr
+in the trace stream into which the calling process is being traced and
+in which
+.IR event_id
+is not filtered out. If the total size of the user trace event data
+represented by
+.IR data_len
+is not greater than the declared maximum size for user trace event
+data, then the
+.IR truncation-status
+attribute of the trace event recorded is POSIX_TRACE_NOT_TRUNCATED.
+Otherwise, the user trace event data is truncated to this declared
+maximum size and the
+.IR truncation-status
+attribute of the trace event recorded is POSIX_TRACE_TRUNCATED_RECORD.
+.P
+If there is no trace stream created for the process or if the created
+trace stream is not running, or if the trace event specified by
+.IR event_id
+is filtered out in the trace stream, the
+\fIposix_trace_event\fR()
+function shall have no effect.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_open\fR()
+function shall associate a user trace event name with a trace
+event type identifier for the calling process. The trace event name is
+the string pointed to by the argument
+.IR event_name .
+It shall have a maximum of
+{TRACE_EVENT_NAME_MAX}
+characters (which has the minimum value
+{_POSIX_TRACE_EVENT_NAME_MAX}).
+The number of user trace event type identifiers that can be defined for
+any given process is limited by the maximum value
+{TRACE_USER_EVENT_MAX},
+which has the minimum value
+{POSIX_TRACE_USER_EVENT_MAX}.
+.P
+If the Trace Inherit option is not supported, the
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_open\fR()
+function shall associate the user trace event name pointed to by the
+.IR event_name
+argument with a trace event type identifier that is unique for the
+traced process, and is returned in the variable pointed to by the
+.IR event_id
+argument. If the user trace event name has already been mapped for the
+traced process, then the previously assigned trace event type
+identifier shall be returned. If the per-process user trace event name
+limit represented by
+{TRACE_USER_EVENT_MAX}
+has been reached, the pre-defined POSIX_TRACE_UNNAMED_USEREVENT (see
+.IR "Table 2-7" ", " "Trace Option: User Trace Event")
+user trace event shall be returned.
+.P
+If the Trace Inherit option is supported, the
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_open\fR()
+function shall associate the user trace event name pointed to by the
+.IR event_name
+argument with a trace event type identifier that is unique for all the
+processes being traced in this same trace stream, and is returned in
+the variable pointed to by the
+.IR event_id
+argument. If the user trace event name has already been mapped for the
+traced processes, then the previously assigned trace event type
+identifier shall be returned. If the per-process user trace event name
+limit represented by
+{TRACE_USER_EVENT_MAX}
+has been reached, the pre-defined POSIX_TRACE_UNNAMED_USEREVENT (\c
+.IR "Table 2-7" ", " "Trace Option: User Trace Event")
+user trace event shall be returned.
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+The above procedure, together with the fact that multiple processes can
+only be traced into the same trace stream by inheritance, ensure that
+all the processes that are traced into a trace stream have the same
+mapping of trace event names to trace event type identifiers.
+.P
+.P
+If there is no trace stream created, the
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_open\fR()
+function shall store this information for future trace streams created
+for this process.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+No return value is defined for the
+\fIposix_trace_event\fR()
+function.
+.P
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_open\fR()
+function shall return a value of zero. Otherwise, it shall return the
+corresponding error number. The
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_open\fR()
+function stores the trace event type identifier value in the object
+pointed to by
+.IR event_id ,
+if successful.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_open\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The size of the name pointed to by the
+.IR event_name
+argument was longer than the implementation-defined value
+{TRACE_EVENT_NAME_MAX}.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIposix_trace_event\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_open\fR()
+functions may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Table 2-7" ", " "Trace Option: User Trace Event",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_eventid_equal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_start\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<trace.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_eventid_equal.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_eventid_equal.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..959708c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_eventid_equal.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,225 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_EVENTID_EQUAL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_eventid_equal,
+posix_trace_eventid_get_name,
+posix_trace_trid_eventid_open
+\(em manipulate the trace event type identifier
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_eventid_equal(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP, trace_event_id_t \fIevent1\fP,
+    trace_event_id_t \fIevent2\fP);
+int posix_trace_eventid_get_name(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP,
+    trace_event_id_t \fIevent\fP, char *\fIevent_name\fP);
+int posix_trace_trid_eventid_open(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP,
+    const char *restrict \fIevent_name\fP,
+    trace_event_id_t *restrict \fIevent\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_equal\fR()
+function shall compare the trace event type identifiers
+.IR event1
+and
+.IR event2
+from the same trace stream or the same trace log identified by the
+.IR trid
+argument. If the trace event type identifiers
+.IR event1
+and
+.IR event2
+are from different trace streams, the return value shall be
+unspecified.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_get_name\fR()
+function shall return, in the argument pointed to by
+.IR event_name ,
+the trace event name associated with the trace event type identifier
+identified by the argument
+.IR event ,
+for the trace stream or for the trace log identified by the
+.IR trid
+argument. The name of the trace event shall have a maximum of
+{TRACE_EVENT_NAME_MAX}
+characters (which has the minimum value
+{_POSIX_TRACE_EVENT_NAME_MAX}).
+Successive calls to this function with the same trace event type
+identifier and the same trace stream identifier shall return the same
+event name.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_trid_eventid_open\fR()
+function shall associate a user trace event name with a trace
+event type identifier for a given trace stream. The trace stream is
+identified by the
+.IR trid
+argument, and it shall be an active trace stream. The trace event name
+is the string pointed to by the argument
+.IR event_name .
+It shall have a maximum of
+{TRACE_EVENT_NAME_MAX}
+characters (which has the minimum value
+{_POSIX_TRACE_EVENT_NAME_MAX}).
+The number of user trace event type identifiers that can be defined for
+any given process is limited by the maximum value
+{TRACE_USER_EVENT_MAX},
+which has the minimum value
+{_POSIX_TRACE_USER_EVENT_MAX}.
+.P
+If the Trace Inherit option is not supported, the
+\fIposix_trace_trid_eventid_open\fR()
+function shall associate the user trace event name pointed to by the
+.IR event_name
+argument with a trace event type identifier that is unique for the
+process being traced in the trace stream identified by the
+.IR trid
+argument, and is returned in the variable pointed to by the
+.IR event
+argument. If the user trace event name has already been mapped for the
+traced process, then the previously assigned trace event type
+identifier shall be returned. If the per-process user trace event name
+limit represented by
+{TRACE_USER_EVENT_MAX}
+has been reached, the pre-defined POSIX_TRACE_UNNAMED_USEREVENT (see
+.IR "Table 2-7" ", " "Trace Option: User Trace Event")
+user trace event shall be returned.
+.P
+If the Trace Inherit option is supported, the
+\fIposix_trace_trid_eventid_open\fR()
+function shall associate the user trace event name pointed to by the
+.IR event_name
+argument with a trace event type identifier that is unique for all the
+processes being traced in the trace stream identified by the
+.IR trid
+argument, and is returned in the variable pointed to by the
+.IR event
+argument. If the user trace event name has already been mapped for the
+traced processes, then the previously assigned trace event type
+identifier shall be returned. If the per-process user trace event name
+limit represented by
+{TRACE_USER_EVENT_MAX}
+has been reached, the pre-defined POSIX_TRACE_UNNAMED_USEREVENT (see
+.IR "Table 2-7" ", " "Trace Option: User Trace Event")
+user trace event shall be returned.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_get_name\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_trace_trid_eventid_open\fR()
+functions shall return a value of zero. Otherwise, they shall return
+the corresponding error number.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_equal\fR()
+function shall return a non-zero value if
+.IR event1
+and
+.IR event2
+are equal; otherwise, a value of zero shall be returned. No errors are
+defined. If either
+.IR event1
+or
+.IR event2
+are not valid trace event type identifiers for the trace stream
+specified by
+.IR trid
+or if the
+.IR trid
+is invalid, the behavior shall be unspecified.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_get_name\fR()
+function stores the trace event name value in the object pointed to by
+.IR event_name ,
+if successful.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_trid_eventid_open\fR()
+function stores the trace event type identifier value in the object
+pointed to by
+.IR event ,
+if successful.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_get_name\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_trace_trid_eventid_open\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR trid
+argument was not a valid trace stream identifier.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_trid_eventid_open\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The size of the name pointed to by the
+.IR event_name
+argument was longer than the implementation-defined value
+{TRACE_EVENT_NAME_MAX}.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_get_name\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The trace event type identifier
+.IR event
+was not associated with any name.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_equal\fR(),
+\fIposix_trace_eventid_get_name\fR(),
+and
+\fIposix_trace_trid_eventid_open\fR()
+functions may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "Table 2-7" ", " "Trace Option: User Trace Event",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_event\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_getnext_event\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<trace.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_eventid_open.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_eventid_open.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1f95039
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_eventid_open.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_EVENTID_OPEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_eventid_open
+\(em trace functions for instrumenting application code
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_eventid_open(const char *restrict \fIevent_name\fP,
+    trace_event_id_t *restrict \fIevent_id\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_event\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_eventset_add.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_eventset_add.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..90598e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_eventset_add.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,155 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_EVENTSET_ADD "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+.ad l
+posix_trace_eventset_add,
+posix_trace_eventset_del,
+posix_trace_eventset_empty,
+posix_trace_eventset_fill,
+posix_trace_eventset_ismember
+\(em manipulate trace event type sets
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.ad b
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_eventset_add(trace_event_id_t \fIevent_id\fP,
+    trace_event_set_t *\fIset\fP);
+int posix_trace_eventset_del(trace_event_id_t \fIevent_id\fP,
+    trace_event_set_t *\fIset\fP);
+int posix_trace_eventset_empty(trace_event_set_t *\fIset\fP);
+int posix_trace_eventset_fill(trace_event_set_t *\fIset\fP, int \fIwhat\fP);
+int posix_trace_eventset_ismember(trace_event_id_t \fIevent_id\fP,
+    const trace_event_set_t *restrict \fIset\fP, int *restrict \fIismember\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These primitives manipulate sets of trace event types. They operate on
+data objects addressable by the application, not on the current trace
+event filter of any trace stream.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_eventset_add\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_trace_eventset_del\fR()
+functions, respectively, shall add or delete the individual trace event
+type specified by the value of the argument
+.IR event_id
+to or from the trace event type set pointed to by the argument
+.IR set .
+Adding a trace event type already in the set or deleting a trace event
+type not in the set shall not be considered an error.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_eventset_empty\fR()
+function shall initialize the trace event type set pointed to by the
+.IR set
+argument such that all trace event types defined, both system and user,
+shall be excluded from the set.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_eventset_fill\fR()
+function shall initialize the trace event type set pointed to by the
+argument
+.IR set ,
+such that the set of trace event types defined by the argument
+.IR what
+shall be included in the set. The value of the argument
+.IR what
+shall consist of one of the following values, as defined in the
+.IR <trace.h> 
+header:
+.IP POSIX_TRACE_WOPID_EVENTS 6
+.br
+All the process-independent implementation-defined system trace event
+types are included in the set.
+.IP POSIX_TRACE_SYSTEM_EVENTS 6
+.br
+All the implementation-defined system trace event types are included in
+the set, as are those defined in POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.IP POSIX_TRACE_ALL_EVENTS 6
+.br
+All trace event types defined, both system and user, are included in
+the set.
+.P
+Applications shall call either
+\fIposix_trace_eventset_empty\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_trace_eventset_fill\fR()
+at least once for each object of type
+.BR trace_event_set_t
+prior to any other use of that object. If such an object is not
+initialized in this way, but is nonetheless supplied as an argument to
+any of the
+\fIposix_trace_eventset_add\fR(),
+\fIposix_trace_eventset_del\fR(),
+or
+\fIposix_trace_eventset_ismember\fR()
+functions, the results are undefined.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_eventset_ismember\fR()
+function shall test whether the trace event type specified by the value
+of the argument
+.IR event_id
+is a member of the set pointed to by the argument
+.IR set .
+The value returned in the object pointed to by
+.IR ismember
+argument is zero if the trace event type identifier is not a member of
+the set and a value different from zero if it is a member of the set.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return a value of
+zero. Otherwise, they shall return the corresponding error number.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of one of the arguments is invalid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIposix_trace_eventset_add\fR(),
+\fIposix_trace_eventset_del\fR(),
+\fIposix_trace_eventset_empty\fR(),
+\fIposix_trace_eventset_fill\fR(),
+and
+\fIposix_trace_eventset_ismember\fR()
+functions may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_eventid_equal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_get_filter\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<trace.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_eventtypelist_getnext_id.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_eventtypelist_getnext_id.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bb2340a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_eventtypelist_getnext_id.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_EVENTTYPELIST_GETNEXT_ID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_eventtypelist_getnext_id,
+posix_trace_eventtypelist_rewind
+\(em iterate over a mapping of trace event types
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_eventtypelist_getnext_id(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP,
+    trace_event_id_t *restrict \fIevent\fP, int *restrict \fIunavailable\fP);
+int posix_trace_eventtypelist_rewind(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The first time
+\fIposix_trace_eventtypelist_getnext_id\fR()
+is called, the function shall return in the variable pointed to by
+.IR event
+the first trace event type identifier of the list of trace events of
+the trace stream identified by the
+.IR trid
+argument. Successive calls to
+\fIposix_trace_eventtypelist_getnext_id\fR()
+return in the variable pointed to by
+.IR event
+the next trace event type identifier in that same list. Each time a
+trace event type identifier is successfully written into the variable
+pointed to by the
+.IR event
+argument, the variable pointed to by the
+.IR unavailable
+argument shall be set to zero. When no more trace event type
+identifiers are available, and so none is returned, the variable
+pointed to by the
+.IR unavailable
+argument shall be set to a value different from zero.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_eventtypelist_rewind\fR()
+function shall reset the next trace event type identifier to be read to
+the first trace event type identifier from the list of trace events
+used in the trace stream identified by
+.IR trid .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return a value of
+zero. Otherwise, they shall return the corresponding error number.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_eventtypelist_getnext_id\fR()
+function stores the trace event type identifier value in the object
+pointed to by
+.IR event ,
+if successful.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR trid
+argument was not a valid trace stream identifier.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIposix_trace_eventtypelist_getnext_id\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_trace_eventtypelist_rewind\fR()
+functions may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_event\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_eventid_equal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_getnext_event\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<trace.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_flush.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_flush.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..023c4cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_flush.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_FLUSH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_flush
+\(em trace stream flush from a process
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_flush(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_create\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_get_attr.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_get_attr.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2ad5e72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_get_attr.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,138 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_GET_ATTR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_get_attr,
+posix_trace_get_status
+\(em retrieve the trace attributes or trace status
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_get_attr(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP, trace_attr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+int posix_trace_get_status(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP,
+    struct posix_trace_status_info *\fIstatusinfo\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_trace_get_attr\fR()
+function shall copy the attributes of the active trace stream
+identified by
+.IR trid
+into the object pointed to by the
+.IR attr
+argument.
+If the Trace Log option is supported,
+.IR trid
+may represent a pre-recorded trace log.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_get_status\fR()
+function shall return, in the structure pointed to by the
+.IR statusinfo
+argument, the current trace status for the trace stream identified by
+the
+.IR trid
+argument. These status values returned in the structure pointed to by
+.IR statusinfo
+shall have been appropriately read to ensure that the returned values
+are consistent.
+If the Trace Log option is supported and the
+.IR trid
+argument refers to a pre-recorded trace stream, the status shall be the
+status of the completed trace stream.
+.P
+Each time the
+\fIposix_trace_get_status\fR()
+function is used, the overrun status of the trace stream shall be reset
+to POSIX_TRACE_NO_OVERRUN
+immediately after the call completes.
+If the Trace Log option is supported, the
+\fIposix_trace_get_status\fR()
+function shall behave the same as when the option is not supported
+except for the following differences:
+.IP " *" 4
+If the
+.IR trid
+argument refers to a trace stream with log, each time the
+\fIposix_trace_get_status\fR()
+function is used, the log overrun status of the trace stream shall be
+reset to POSIX_TRACE_NO_OVERRUN and the
+.IR flush_error
+status shall be reset to zero immediately after the call completes.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the
+.IR trid
+argument refers to a pre-recorded trace stream, the status returned
+shall be the status of the completed trace stream and the status values
+of the trace stream shall not be reset.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return a value of
+zero. Otherwise, they shall return the corresponding error number.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_get_attr\fR()
+function stores the trace attributes in the object pointed to by
+.IR attr ,
+if successful.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_get_status\fR()
+function stores the trace status in the object pointed to by
+.IR statusinfo ,
+if successful.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The trace stream argument
+.IR trid
+does not correspond to a valid active trace stream or a valid trace
+log.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIposix_trace_get_attr\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_trace_get_status\fR()
+functions may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_attr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_close\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_create\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<trace.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_get_filter.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_get_filter.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1e92c37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_get_filter.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_GET_FILTER "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_get_filter,
+posix_trace_set_filter
+\(em retrieve and set the filter of an initialized trace stream
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_get_filter(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP, trace_event_set_t *\fIset\fP);
+int posix_trace_set_filter(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP,
+    const trace_event_set_t *\fIset\fP, int \fIhow\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_trace_get_filter\fR()
+function shall retrieve, into the argument pointed to by
+.IR set ,
+the actual trace event filter from the trace stream specified by
+.IR trid .
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_set_filter\fR()
+function shall change the set of filtered trace event types after a
+trace stream identified by the
+.IR trid
+argument is created. This function may be called prior to starting the
+trace stream, or while the trace stream is active. By default, if no
+call is made to
+\fIposix_trace_set_filter\fR(),
+all trace events shall be recorded (that is, none of the trace event
+types are filtered out).
+.P
+If this function is called while the trace is in progress, a special
+system trace event, POSIX_TRACE_FILTER,
+shall be recorded in the trace indicating both the old and the new sets
+of filtered trace event types (see
+.IR "Table 2-4" ", " "Trace and Trace Event Filter Options: System Trace Events"
+and
+.IR "Table 2-6" ", " "Trace" ", " "Trace Log" ", " "and Trace Event Filter Options: System Trace Events").
+.P
+If the
+\fIposix_trace_set_filter\fR()
+function is interrupted by a signal, an error shall be returned and the
+filter shall not be changed. In this case, the state of the trace
+stream shall not be changed.
+.P
+The value of the argument
+.IR how
+indicates the manner in which the set is to be changed and shall have
+one of the following values, as defined in the
+.IR <trace.h> 
+header:
+.IP POSIX_TRACE_SET_EVENTSET 6
+.br
+The resulting set of trace event types to be filtered shall be the
+trace event type set pointed to by the argument
+.IR set .
+.IP POSIX_TRACE_ADD_EVENTSET 6
+.br
+The resulting set of trace event types to be filtered shall be the
+union of the current set and the trace event type set pointed to by the
+argument
+.IR set .
+.IP POSIX_TRACE_SUB_EVENTSET 6
+.br
+The resulting set of trace event types to be filtered shall be all
+trace event types in the current set that are not in the set pointed to
+by the argument
+.IR set ;
+that is, remove each element of the specified set from the current
+filter.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return a value of
+zero. Otherwise, they shall return the corresponding error number.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_get_filter\fR()
+function stores the set of filtered trace event types in
+.IR set ,
+if successful.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR trid
+argument does not correspond to an active trace stream or the value of
+the argument pointed to by
+.IR set
+is invalid.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The operation was interrupted by a signal.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIposix_trace_get_filter\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_trace_set_filter\fR()
+functions may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "Table 2-4" ", " "Trace and Trace Event Filter Options: System Trace Events",
+.IR "Table 2-6" ", " "Trace" ", " "Trace Log" ", " "and Trace Event Filter Options: System Trace Events",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_eventset_add\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<trace.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_get_status.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_get_status.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..df67bdd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_get_status.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_GET_STATUS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_get_status
+\(em retrieve the trace status
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_get_status(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP,
+    struct posix_trace_status_info *\fIstatusinfo\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_get_attr\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_getnext_event.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_getnext_event.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..581ed23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_getnext_event.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,265 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_GETNEXT_EVENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_getnext_event,
+posix_trace_timedgetnext_event,
+posix_trace_trygetnext_event
+\(em retrieve a trace event
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_getnext_event(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP,
+    struct posix_trace_event_info *restrict \fIevent\fP,
+    void *restrict \fIdata\fP, size_t \fInum_bytes\fP,
+    size_t *restrict \fIdata_len\fP, int *restrict \fIunavailable\fP);
+int posix_trace_timedgetnext_event(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP,
+    struct posix_trace_event_info *restrict \fIevent\fP,
+    void *restrict \fIdata\fP, size_t \fInum_bytes\fP,
+    size_t *restrict \fIdata_len\fP, int *restrict \fIunavailable\fP,
+    const struct timespec *restrict \fIabstime\fP);
+int posix_trace_trygetnext_event(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP,
+    struct posix_trace_event_info *restrict \fIevent\fP,
+    void *restrict \fIdata\fP, size_t \fInum_bytes\fP,
+    size_t *restrict \fIdata_len\fP, int *restrict \fIunavailable\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_trace_getnext_event\fR()
+function shall report a recorded trace event either from an
+active trace stream without log
+or a pre-recorded trace stream identified by the
+.IR trid
+argument.
+The
+\fIposix_trace_trygetnext_event\fR()
+function shall report a recorded trace event from an active
+trace stream without log identified by the
+.IR trid
+argument.
+.P
+The trace event information associated with the recorded trace event
+shall be copied by the function into the structure pointed to by the
+argument
+.IR event
+and the data associated with the trace event shall be copied into the
+buffer pointed to by the
+.IR data
+argument.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_getnext_event\fR()
+function shall block if the
+.IR trid
+argument identifies an active trace stream and there is currently no
+trace event ready to be retrieved. When returning, if a recorded trace
+event was reported, the variable pointed to by the
+.IR unavailable
+argument shall be set to zero. Otherwise, the variable pointed to by
+the
+.IR unavailable
+argument shall be set to a value different from zero.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_timedgetnext_event\fR()
+function shall attempt to get another trace event from an active trace
+stream without log, as in the
+\fIposix_trace_getnext_event\fR()
+function. However, if no trace event is available from the trace
+stream, the implied wait shall be terminated when the timeout specified
+by the argument
+.IR abstime
+expires, and the function shall return the error
+.BR [ETIMEDOUT] .
+.P
+The timeout shall expire when the absolute time specified by
+.IR abstime
+passes, as measured by the clock upon which timeouts are based (that
+is, when the value of that clock equals or exceeds
+.IR abstime ),
+or if the absolute time specified by
+.IR abstime
+has already passed at the time of the call.
+.P
+The timeout shall be based on the CLOCK_REALTIME clock.
+The resolution of the timeout shall be the resolution of the clock
+on which it is based. The
+.BR timespec
+data type is defined in the
+.IR <time.h> 
+header.
+.P
+Under no circumstance shall the function fail with a timeout if a trace
+event is immediately available from the trace stream. The validity of
+the
+.IR abstime
+argument need not be checked if a trace event is immediately available
+from the trace stream.
+.P
+The behavior of this function for a pre-recorded trace stream is
+unspecified.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_trygetnext_event\fR()
+function shall not block.
+This function shall return an error if the
+.IR trid
+argument identifies a pre-recorded trace stream.
+If a recorded trace event was reported, the variable pointed to by the
+.IR unavailable
+argument shall be set to zero. Otherwise, if no trace event was
+reported, the variable pointed to by the
+.IR unavailable
+argument shall be set to a value different from zero.
+.P
+The argument
+.IR num_bytes
+shall be the size of the buffer pointed to by the
+.IR data
+argument. The argument
+.IR data_len
+reports to the application the length in bytes of the data record just
+transferred. If
+.IR num_bytes
+is greater than or equal to the size of the data associated with the
+trace event pointed to by the
+.IR event
+argument, all the recorded data shall be transferred. In this case,
+the
+.IR truncation-status
+member of the trace event structure shall be either
+POSIX_TRACE_NOT_TRUNCATED,
+if the trace event data was recorded without truncation while tracing,
+or POSIX_TRACE_TRUNCATED_RECORD,
+if the trace event data was truncated when it was recorded. If the
+.IR num_bytes
+argument is less than the length of recorded trace event data, the data
+transferred shall be truncated to a length of
+.IR num_bytes ,
+the value stored in the variable pointed to by
+.IR data_len
+shall be equal to
+.IR num_bytes ,
+and the
+.IR truncation-status
+member of the
+.IR event
+structure argument shall be set to POSIX_TRACE_TRUNCATED_READ
+(see the
+.BR posix_trace_event_info
+structure defined in
+.IR <trace.h> ).
+.P
+The report of a trace event shall be sequential starting from the
+oldest recorded trace event. Trace events shall be reported in the
+order in which they were generated, up to an implementation-defined
+time resolution that causes the ordering of trace events occurring very
+close to each other to be unknown. Once reported, a trace event cannot
+be reported again from an active trace stream. Once a trace event is
+reported from an active trace stream without log, the trace stream
+shall make the resources associated with that trace event available to
+record future generated trace events.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return a value of
+zero. Otherwise, they shall return the corresponding error number.
+.P
+If successful, these functions store:
+.IP " *" 4
+The recorded trace event in the object pointed to by
+.IR event
+.IP " *" 4
+The trace event information associated with the recorded trace event in
+the object pointed to by
+.IR data
+.IP " *" 4
+The length of this trace event information in the object pointed to by
+.IR data_len
+.IP " *" 4
+The value of zero in the object pointed to by
+.IR unavailable
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The trace stream identifier argument
+.IR trid
+is invalid.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_getnext_event\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_trace_timedgetnext_event\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The operation was interrupted by a signal, and so the call had no
+effect.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_trygetnext_event\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The trace stream identifier argument
+.IR trid
+does not correspond to an active trace stream.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_trace_timedgetnext_event\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+There is no trace event immediately available from the trace stream,
+and the
+.IR timeout
+argument is invalid.
+.TP
+.BR ETIMEDOUT
+No trace event was available from the trace stream before the specified
+timeout
+.IR timeout
+expired.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+These functions may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_close\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_create\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<trace.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_open.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_open.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..651daa6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_open.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_OPEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_open,
+posix_trace_rewind
+\(em trace log management
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_open(int \fIfile_desc\fP, trace_id_t *\fItrid\fP);
+int posix_trace_rewind(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_close\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_set_filter.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_set_filter.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..100175c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_set_filter.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_SET_FILTER "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_set_filter
+\(em set filter of an initialized trace stream
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_set_filter(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP,
+    const trace_event_set_t *\fIset\fP, int \fIhow\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_get_filter\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_shutdown.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_shutdown.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..834f182
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_shutdown.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_SHUTDOWN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_shutdown
+\(em trace stream shutdown from a process
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_shutdown(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_create\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_start.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_start.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4f7b14a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_start.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_START "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_start,
+posix_trace_stop
+\(em trace start and stop
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_start(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP);
+int posix_trace_stop (trace_id_t \fItrid\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_trace_start\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_trace_stop\fR()
+functions, respectively, shall start and stop the trace stream
+identified by the argument
+.IR trid .
+.P
+The effect of calling the
+\fIposix_trace_start\fR()
+function shall be recorded in the trace stream as the POSIX_TRACE_START
+system trace event and the status of the trace stream shall become
+POSIX_TRACE_RUNNING.
+If the trace stream is in progress when this function is called, the
+POSIX_TRACE_START
+system trace event shall not be recorded and the trace stream shall
+continue to run. If the trace stream is full, the POSIX_TRACE_START
+system trace event shall not be recorded and the status of the trace
+stream shall not be changed.
+.P
+The effect of calling the
+\fIposix_trace_stop\fR()
+function shall be recorded in the trace stream as the POSIX_TRACE_STOP
+system trace event and the status of the trace stream shall become
+POSIX_TRACE_SUSPENDED.
+If the trace stream is suspended when this function is called, the
+POSIX_TRACE_STOP system trace event shall not be recorded and the trace
+stream shall remain suspended. If the trace stream is full, the
+POSIX_TRACE_STOP system trace event shall not be recorded and the
+status of the trace stream shall not be changed.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return a value of
+zero. Otherwise, they shall return the corresponding error number.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the argument
+.IR trid
+does not correspond to an active trace stream and thus no trace stream
+was started or stopped.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The operation was interrupted by a signal and thus the trace stream was
+not necessarily started or stopped.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIposix_trace_start\fR()
+and
+\fIposix_trace_stop\fR()
+functions may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_create\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<trace.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_timedgetnext_event.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_timedgetnext_event.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7d37ac6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_timedgetnext_event.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_TIMEDGETNEXT_EVENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_timedgetnext_event
+\(em retrieve a trace event
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_timedgetnext_event(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP,
+    struct posix_trace_event_info *restrict \fIevent\fP,
+    void *restrict \fIdata\fP, size_t \fInum_bytes\fP,
+    size_t *restrict \fIdata_len\fP, int *restrict \fIunavailable\fP,
+    const struct timespec *restrict \fIabstime\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_getnext_event\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_trid_eventid_open.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_trid_eventid_open.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1021014
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_trid_eventid_open.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_TRID_EVENTID_OPEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_trid_eventid_open
+\(em open a trace event type identifier
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_trid_eventid_open(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP,
+    const char *restrict \fIevent_name\fP,
+    trace_event_id_t *restrict \fIevent\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_eventid_equal\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_trygetnext_event.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_trygetnext_event.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6e55b78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_trace_trygetnext_event.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TRACE_TRYGETNEXT_EVENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_trace_trygetnext_event
+\(em retrieve a trace event
+(\fBTRACING\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <trace.h>
+.P
+int posix_trace_trygetnext_event(trace_id_t \fItrid\fP,
+    struct posix_trace_event_info *restrict \fIevent\fP,
+    void *restrict \fIdata\fP, size_t \fInum_bytes\fP,
+    size_t *restrict \fIdata_len\fP, int *restrict \fIunavailable\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIposix_trace_getnext_event\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_typed_mem_get_info.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_typed_mem_get_info.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..218ffbb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_typed_mem_get_info.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TYPED_MEM_GET_INFO "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_typed_mem_get_info
+\(em query typed memory information
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/mman.h>
+.P
+int posix_typed_mem_get_info(int \fIfildes\fP,
+    struct posix_typed_mem_info *\fIinfo\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_typed_mem_get_info\fR()
+function shall return, in the
+.IR posix_tmi_length
+field of the
+.BR posix_typed_mem_info
+structure pointed to by
+.IR info ,
+the maximum length which may be successfully allocated by the typed
+memory object designated by
+.IR fildes .
+This maximum length shall take into account the flag
+POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE or POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE_CONTIG specified
+when the typed memory object represented by
+.IR fildes
+was opened. The maximum length is dynamic; therefore, the value
+returned is valid only while the current mapping of the corresponding
+typed memory pool remains unchanged.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+represents a typed memory object opened with neither the
+POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE flag nor the POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE_CONTIG
+flag specified, the returned value of \fIinfo\fR->\fIposix_tmi_length\fR
+is unspecified.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_typed_mem_get_info\fR()
+function may return additional implementation-defined information in
+other fields of the
+.BR posix_typed_mem_info
+structure pointed to by
+.IR info .
+.P
+If the memory object specified by
+.IR fildes
+is not a typed memory object, then the behavior of this function is
+undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIposix_typed_mem_get_info\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, the corresponding error status
+value shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIposix_typed_mem_get_info\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid open file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR ENODEV
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not connected to a memory object supported by this
+function.
+.P
+This function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+An application that needs to allocate a block of typed memory with
+length dependent upon the amount of memory currently available must
+either query the typed memory object to obtain the amount available, or
+repeatedly invoke
+\fImmap\fR()
+attempting to guess an appropriate length. While the latter method is
+existing practice with
+\fImalloc\fR(),
+it is awkward and imprecise. The
+\fIposix_typed_mem_get_info\fR()
+function allows an application to immediately determine available
+memory. This is particularly important for typed memory objects that
+may in some cases be scarce resources. Note that when a typed memory
+pool is a shared resource, some form of mutual-exclusion or
+synchronization may be required while typed memory is being queried and
+allocated to prevent race conditions.
+.P
+The existing
+\fIfstat\fR()
+function is not suitable for this purpose. We realize that
+implementations may wish to provide other attributes of typed memory
+objects (for example, alignment requirements, page size, and so on).
+The
+\fIfstat\fR()
+function returns a structure which is not extensible and, furthermore,
+contains substantial information that is inappropriate for typed memory
+objects.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfstat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImmap\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_typed_mem_open\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_mman.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_typed_mem_open.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_typed_mem_open.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8b27a8f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/posix_typed_mem_open.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,275 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POSIX_TYPED_MEM_OPEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+posix_typed_mem_open
+\(em open a typed memory object
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/mman.h>
+.P
+int posix_typed_mem_open(const char *\fIname\fP, int \fIoflag\fP, int \fItflag\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIposix_typed_mem_open\fR()
+function shall establish a connection between the typed memory object
+specified by the string pointed to by
+.IR name
+and a file descriptor. It shall create an open file description that
+refers to the typed memory object and a file descriptor that refers to
+that open file description. The file descriptor is used by other functions
+to refer to that typed memory object. It is unspecified whether the name
+appears in the file system and is visible to other functions that take
+pathnames as arguments. The
+.IR name
+argument conforms to the construction rules for a pathname, except that
+the interpretation of
+<slash>
+characters other than the leading
+<slash>
+character in
+.IR name
+is implementation-defined, and that the length limits for the
+.IR name
+argument are implementation-defined and need not be the same as the
+pathname limits
+{PATH_MAX}
+and
+{NAME_MAX}.
+If
+.IR name
+begins with the
+<slash>
+character, then processes calling
+\fIposix_typed_mem_open\fR()
+with the same value of
+.IR name
+shall refer to the same typed memory object. If
+.IR name
+does not begin with the
+<slash>
+character, the effect is implementation-defined.
+.P
+Each typed memory object supported in a system shall be identified by a name
+which specifies not only its associated typed memory pool, but also the
+path or port by which it is accessed. That is, the same typed memory
+pool accessed via several different ports shall have several different
+corresponding names. The binding between names and typed memory objects
+is established in an implementation-defined manner. Unlike shared
+memory objects, there is no way within POSIX.1\(hy2008 for a program to create a
+typed memory object.
+.P
+The value of
+.IR tflag
+shall determine how the typed memory object behaves when subsequently
+mapped by calls to
+\fImmap\fR().
+At most, one of the following flags defined in
+.IR <sys/mman.h> 
+may be specified:
+.IP POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE 6
+.br
+Allocate on
+\fImmap\fR().
+.IP POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE_CONTIG 6
+.br
+Allocate contiguously on
+\fImmap\fR().
+.IP POSIX_TYPED_MEM_MAP_ALLOCATABLE 6
+.br
+Map on
+\fImmap\fR(),
+without affecting allocatability.
+.P
+If
+.IR tflag
+has the flag POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE specified, any subsequent call to
+\fImmap\fR()
+using the returned file descriptor shall result in allocation and
+mapping of typed memory from the specified typed memory pool. The
+allocated memory may be a contiguous previously unallocated area of the
+typed memory pool or several non-contiguous previously unallocated
+areas (mapped to a contiguous portion of the process address space). If
+.IR tflag
+has the flag POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE_CONTIG specified, any subsequent
+call to
+\fImmap\fR()
+using the returned file descriptor shall result in allocation and
+mapping of a single contiguous previously unallocated area of the typed
+memory pool (also mapped to a contiguous portion of the process address
+space). If
+.IR tflag
+has none of the flags POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE or
+POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE_CONTIG specified, any subsequent call to
+\fImmap\fR()
+using the returned file descriptor shall map an application-chosen area
+from the specified typed memory pool such that this mapped area becomes
+unavailable for allocation until unmapped by all processes. If
+.IR tflag
+has the flag POSIX_TYPED_MEM_MAP_ALLOCATABLE specified, any subsequent
+call to
+\fImmap\fR()
+using the returned file descriptor shall map an application-chosen area
+from the specified typed memory pool without an effect on the
+availability of that area for allocation; that is, mapping such an
+object leaves each byte of the mapped area unallocated if it was
+unallocated prior to the mapping or allocated if it was allocated prior
+to the mapping. Appropriate privileges to specify the
+POSIX_TYPED_MEM_MAP_ALLOCATABLE flag are implementation-defined.
+.P
+If successful,
+\fIposix_typed_mem_open\fR()
+shall return a file descriptor for the typed memory object that is the
+lowest numbered file descriptor not currently open for that process.
+The open file description is new, and therefore the file descriptor
+shall not share it with any other processes. It is unspecified whether
+the file offset is set. The FD_CLOEXEC file descriptor flag associated
+with the new file descriptor shall be cleared.
+.P
+The behavior of
+\fImsync\fR(),
+\fIftruncate\fR(),
+and all file operations other than
+\fImmap\fR(),
+\fIposix_mem_offset\fR(),
+\fIposix_typed_mem_get_info\fR(),
+\fIfstat\fR(),
+\fIdup\fR(),
+\fIdup2\fR(),
+and
+\fIclose\fR(),
+is unspecified when passed a file descriptor connected to a typed
+memory object by this function.
+.P
+The file status flags of the open file description shall be set
+according to the value of
+.IR oflag .
+Applications shall specify exactly one of the three access mode values
+described below and defined in the
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+header, as the value of
+.IR oflag .
+.IP O_RDONLY 12
+Open for read access only.
+.IP O_WRONLY 12
+Open for write access only.
+.IP O_RDWR 12
+Open for read or write access.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIposix_typed_mem_open\fR()
+function shall return a non-negative integer representing the lowest
+numbered unused file descriptor. Otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and
+set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIposix_typed_mem_open\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+The typed memory object exists and the permissions specified by
+.IR oflag
+are denied.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fIposix_typed_mem_open\fR()
+operation was interrupted by a signal.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+.ad l
+The flags specified in
+.IR tflag
+are invalid (more than one of POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE,
+POSIX_TYPED_MEM_ALLOCATE_CONTIG, or POSIX_TYPED_MEM_MAP_ALLOCATABLE is
+specified).
+.ad b
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+Too many file descriptors are currently open in the system.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+The named typed memory object does not exist.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The caller lacks appropriate privileges to specify the
+POSIX_TYPED_MEM_MAP_ALLOCATABLE flag in the
+.IR tflag
+argument.
+.P
+The
+\fIposix_typed_mem_open\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of the
+.IR name
+argument exceeds
+{_POSIX_PATH_MAX}
+on systems that do not support the XSI option
+or exceeds
+{_XOPEN_PATH_MAX}
+on XSI systems,
+or has a pathname component that is longer than
+{_POSIX_NAME_MAX}
+on systems that do not support the XSI option
+or longer than
+{_XOPEN_NAME_MAX}
+on XSI systems.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfstat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIftruncate\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImmap\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImsync\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_mem_offset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_typed_mem_get_info\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIumask\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fcntl.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_mman.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pow.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pow.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e91ba28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pow.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,315 @@
+'\" et
+.TH POW "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pow,
+powf,
+powl
+\(em power function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double pow(double \fIx\fP, double \fIy\fP);
+float powf(float \fIx\fP, float \fIy\fP);
+long double powl(long double \fIx\fP, long double \fIy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the value of
+.IR x
+raised to the power
+.IR y ,
+.IR x\u\s-3y\s+3\d .
+If
+.IR x
+is negative, the application shall ensure that
+.IR y
+is an integer value.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the value of
+.IR x
+raised to the power
+.IR y .
+.P
+For finite values of
+.IR x
+< 0, and finite non-integer values of
+.IR y ,
+a domain error shall occur and
+either a NaN (if representable), or
+an implementation-defined value shall be returned.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause overflow, a range error shall occur
+and
+\fIpow\fR(),
+\fIpowf\fR(),
+and
+\fIpowl\fR()
+shall return \(+-HUGE_VAL, \(+-HUGE_VALF, and \(+-HUGE_VALL,
+respectively, with the same sign as the correct value of the function.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow,
+and is not representable,
+a range error may occur, and
+\fIpow\fR(),
+\fIpowf\fR(),
+and
+\fIpowl\fR()
+shall return
+0.0, or
+(if IEC 60559 Floating-Point is not supported) an implementation-defined
+value no greater in magnitude than DBL_MIN, FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN,
+respectively.
+.P
+For
+.IR y
+< 0, if
+.IR x
+is zero, a
+pole
+error may occur and
+\fIpow\fR(),
+\fIpowf\fR(),
+and
+\fIpowl\fR()
+shall return \(+-HUGE_VAL, \(+-HUGE_VALF, and \(+-HUGE_VALL, respectively.
+On systems that support the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option, if
+.IR x
+is \(+-0, a pole error shall occur and
+\fIpow\fR(),
+\fIpowf\fR(),
+and
+\fIpowl\fR()
+shall return \(+-HUGE_VAL, \(+-HUGE_VALF, and \(+-HUGE_VALL, respectively
+if
+.IR y
+is an odd integer, or HUGE_VAL, HUGE_VALF, and HUGE_VALL, respectively if
+.IR y
+is not an odd integer.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+or
+.IR y
+is a NaN, a NaN shall be returned (unless specified elsewhere in this
+description).
+.P
+For any value of
+.IR y
+(including NaN), if
+.IR x
+is +1, 1.0 shall be returned.
+.P
+For any value of
+.IR x
+(including NaN), if
+.IR y
+is \(+-0, 1.0 shall be returned.
+.P
+For any odd integer value of
+.IR y
+> 0, if
+.IR x
+is \(+-0, \(+-0 shall be returned.
+.P
+For
+.IR y
+> 0 and not an odd integer, if
+.IR x
+is \(+-0, +0 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(mi1, and
+.IR y
+is \(+-Inf, 1.0 shall be returned.
+.P
+For |\fIx\fP| < 1, if
+.IR y
+is \(miInf, +Inf shall be returned.
+.P
+For |\fIx\fP| > 1, if
+.IR y
+is \(miInf, +0 shall be returned.
+.P
+For |\fIx\fP| < 1, if
+.IR y
+is +Inf, +0 shall be returned.
+.P
+For |\fIx\fP| > 1, if
+.IR y
+is +Inf, +Inf shall be returned.
+.P
+For
+.IR y
+an odd integer < 0, if
+.IR x
+is \(miInf, \(mi0 shall be returned.
+.P
+For
+.IR y
+< 0 and not an odd integer, if
+.IR x
+is \(miInf, +0 shall be returned.
+.P
+For
+.IR y
+an odd integer > 0, if
+.IR x
+is \(miInf, \(miInf shall be returned.
+.P
+For
+.IR y
+> 0 and not an odd integer, if
+.IR x
+is \(miInf, +Inf shall be returned.
+.P
+For
+.IR y
+< 0, if
+.IR x
+is +Inf, +0 shall be returned.
+.P
+For
+.IR y
+> 0, if
+.IR x
+is +Inf, +Inf shall be returned.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow, and is representable, a
+range error may occur and the correct value shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is negative and
+.IR y
+is a finite non-integer.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.IP "Pole\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is zero and
+.IR y
+is negative.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the divide-by-zero floating-point exception shall be
+raised.
+.RE
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result overflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the overflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Pole\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is zero and
+.IR y
+is negative.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the divide-by-zero floating-point exception shall be
+raised.
+.RE
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result underflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pread.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pread.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8f6ff64
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pread.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PREAD "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pread
+\(em read from a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+ssize_t pread(int \fIfildes\fP, void *\fIbuf\fP, size_t \fInbyte\fP, off_t \fIoffset\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/printf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/printf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..743c4be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/printf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PRINTF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+printf
+\(em print formatted output
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int printf(const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfprintf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pselect.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pselect.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5a74faa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pselect.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,504 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PSELECT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pselect,
+select
+\(em synchronous I/O multiplexing
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/select.h>
+.P
+int pselect(int \fInfds\fP, fd_set *restrict \fIreadfds\fP,
+    fd_set *restrict \fIwritefds\fP, fd_set *restrict \fIerrorfds\fP,
+    const struct timespec *restrict \fItimeout\fP,
+    const sigset_t *restrict \fIsigmask\fP);
+int select(int \fInfds\fP, fd_set *restrict \fIreadfds\fP,
+    fd_set *restrict \fIwritefds\fP, fd_set *restrict \fIerrorfds\fP,
+    struct timeval *restrict \fItimeout\fP);
+void FD_CLR(int \fIfd\fP, fd_set *\fIfdset\fP);
+int FD_ISSET(int \fIfd\fP, fd_set *\fIfdset\fP);
+void FD_SET(int \fIfd\fP, fd_set *\fIfdset\fP);
+void FD_ZERO(fd_set *\fIfdset\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpselect\fR()
+function shall examine the file descriptor sets whose addresses are
+passed in the
+.IR readfds ,
+.IR writefds ,
+and
+.IR errorfds
+parameters to see whether some of their descriptors are ready for reading,
+are ready for writing, or have an exceptional condition pending,
+respectively.
+.P
+The
+\fIselect\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIpselect\fR()
+function, except as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+For the
+\fIselect\fR()
+function, the timeout period is given in seconds and microseconds in an
+argument of type
+.BR "struct timeval" ,
+whereas for the
+\fIpselect\fR()
+function the timeout period is given in seconds and nanoseconds in an
+argument of type
+.BR "struct timespec" .
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+\fIselect\fR()
+function has no
+.IR sigmask
+argument; it shall behave as
+\fIpselect\fR()
+does when
+.IR sigmask
+is a null pointer.
+.IP " *" 4
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIselect\fR()
+function may modify the object pointed to by the
+.IR timeout
+argument.
+.P
+The
+\fIpselect\fR()
+and
+\fIselect\fR()
+functions shall support regular files, terminal and pseudo-terminal
+devices,
+STREAMS-based files,
+FIFOs, pipes, and sockets. The behavior of
+\fIpselect\fR()
+and
+\fIselect\fR()
+on file descriptors that refer to other types of file is unspecified.
+.P
+The
+.IR nfds
+argument specifies the range of descriptors to be tested. The first
+.IR nfds
+descriptors shall be checked in each set; that is, the descriptors from
+zero through
+.IR nfds \(mi1
+in the descriptor sets shall be examined.
+.P
+If the
+.IR readfds
+argument is not a null pointer, it points to an object of type
+.BR fd_set
+that on input specifies the file descriptors to be checked for being
+ready to read, and on output indicates which file descriptors are ready
+to read.
+.P
+If the
+.IR writefds
+argument is not a null pointer, it points to an object of type
+.BR fd_set
+that on input specifies the file descriptors to be checked for being
+ready to write, and on output indicates which file descriptors are
+ready to write.
+.P
+If the
+.IR errorfds
+argument is not a null pointer, it points to an object of type
+.BR fd_set
+that on input specifies the file descriptors to be checked for error
+conditions pending, and on output indicates which file descriptors have
+error conditions pending.
+.P
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIpselect\fR()
+or
+\fIselect\fR()
+function shall modify the objects pointed to by the
+.IR readfds ,
+.IR writefds ,
+and
+.IR errorfds
+arguments to indicate which file descriptors are ready for reading,
+ready for writing, or have an error condition pending, respectively,
+and shall return the total number of ready descriptors in all the
+output sets. For each file descriptor less than
+.IR nfds ,
+the corresponding bit shall be set upon successful completion if it
+was set on input and the associated condition is true for that file
+descriptor.
+.P
+If none of the selected descriptors are ready for the requested
+operation, the
+\fIpselect\fR()
+or
+\fIselect\fR()
+function shall block until at least one of the requested operations
+becomes ready, until the
+.IR timeout
+occurs, or until interrupted by a signal.
+The
+.IR timeout
+parameter controls how long the
+\fIpselect\fR()
+or
+\fIselect\fR()
+function shall take before timing out. If the
+.IR timeout
+parameter is not a null pointer, it specifies a maximum interval to
+wait for the selection to complete. If the specified time interval
+expires without any requested operation becoming ready, the function
+shall return. If the
+.IR timeout
+parameter is a null pointer, then the call to
+\fIpselect\fR()
+or
+\fIselect\fR()
+shall block indefinitely until at least one descriptor meets the
+specified criteria. To effect a poll, the
+.IR timeout
+parameter should not be a null pointer, and should point to a
+zero-valued
+.BR timespec
+structure.
+.P
+The use of a timeout does not affect any pending timers set up by
+\fIalarm\fR()
+or
+\fIsetitimer\fR().
+.P
+Implementations may place limitations on the maximum timeout interval
+supported. All implementations shall support a maximum timeout interval
+of at least 31 days. If the
+.IR timeout
+argument specifies a timeout interval greater than the
+implementation-defined maximum value, the maximum value shall be used
+as the actual timeout value. Implementations may also place limitations
+on the granularity of timeout intervals. If the requested timeout
+interval requires a finer granularity than the implementation supports,
+the actual timeout interval shall be rounded up to the next supported
+value.
+.P
+If
+.IR sigmask
+is not a null pointer, then the
+\fIpselect\fR()
+function shall replace the signal mask of the caller by the set of
+signals pointed to by
+.IR sigmask
+before examining the descriptors, and shall restore the signal mask of
+the calling thread before returning.
+.P
+A descriptor shall be considered ready for reading when a call to an
+input function with O_NONBLOCK clear would not block, whether or not
+the function would transfer data successfully. (The function might
+return data, an end-of-file indication, or an error other than one
+indicating that it is blocked, and in each of these cases the
+descriptor shall be considered ready for reading.)
+.P
+A descriptor shall be considered ready for writing when a call to an
+output function with O_NONBLOCK clear would not block, whether or not
+the function would transfer data successfully.
+.P
+If a socket has a pending error, it shall be considered to have an
+exceptional condition pending. Otherwise, what constitutes an
+exceptional condition is file type-specific. For a file descriptor for
+use with a socket, it is protocol-specific except as noted below. For
+other file types it is implementation-defined. If the operation is
+meaningless for a particular file type,
+\fIpselect\fR()
+or
+\fIselect\fR()
+shall indicate that the descriptor is ready for read or write
+operations, and shall indicate that the descriptor has no exceptional
+condition pending.
+.P
+If a descriptor refers to a socket, the implied input function is the
+\fIrecvmsg\fR()
+function with parameters requesting normal and ancillary data, such
+that the presence of either type shall cause the socket to be marked as
+readable. The presence of out-of-band data shall be checked if the
+socket option SO_OOBINLINE has been enabled, as out-of-band data is
+enqueued with normal data. If the socket is currently listening, then
+it shall be marked as readable if an incoming connection request has
+been received, and a call to the
+\fIaccept\fR()
+function shall complete without blocking.
+.P
+If a descriptor refers to a socket, the implied output function is the
+\fIsendmsg\fR()
+function supplying an amount of normal data equal to the current value
+of the SO_SNDLOWAT option for the socket. If a non-blocking call to
+the
+\fIconnect\fR()
+function has been made for a socket, and the connection attempt has
+either succeeded or failed leaving a pending error, the socket shall be
+marked as writable.
+.P
+A socket shall be considered to have an exceptional condition pending
+if a receive operation with O_NONBLOCK clear for the open file
+description and with the MSG_OOB flag set would return out-of-band data
+without blocking. (It is protocol-specific whether the MSG_OOB flag
+would be used to read out-of-band data.) A socket shall also be
+considered to have an exceptional condition pending if an out-of-band
+data mark is present in the receive queue. Other circumstances under
+which a socket may be considered to have an exceptional condition
+pending are protocol-specific and implementation-defined.
+.P
+If the
+.IR readfds ,
+.IR writefds ,
+and
+.IR errorfds
+arguments are all null pointers and the
+.IR timeout
+argument is not a null pointer, the
+\fIpselect\fR()
+or
+\fIselect\fR()
+function shall block for the time specified, or until interrupted by
+a signal. If the
+.IR readfds ,
+.IR writefds ,
+and
+.IR errorfds
+arguments are all null pointers and the
+.IR timeout
+argument is a null pointer, the
+\fIpselect\fR()
+or
+\fIselect\fR()
+function shall block until interrupted by a signal.
+.P
+File descriptors associated with regular files shall always select true
+for ready to read, ready to write, and error conditions.
+.P
+On failure, the objects pointed to by the
+.IR readfds ,
+.IR writefds ,
+and
+.IR errorfds
+arguments shall not be modified. If the timeout interval expires
+without the specified condition being true for any of the specified
+file descriptors, the objects pointed to by the
+.IR readfds ,
+.IR writefds ,
+and
+.IR errorfds
+arguments shall have all bits set to 0.
+.P
+File descriptor masks of type
+.BR fd_set
+can be initialized and tested with
+\fIFD_CLR\fR(),
+\fIFD_ISSET\fR(),
+\fIFD_SET\fR(),
+and
+\fIFD_ZERO\fR().
+It is unspecified whether each of these is a macro or a function. If a
+macro definition is suppressed in order to access an actual function,
+or a program defines an external identifier with any of these names,
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+\fIFD_CLR\fR(\fIfd\fR, \fIfdsetp\fR) shall remove the file descriptor
+.IR fd
+from the set pointed to by
+.IR fdsetp .
+If
+.IR fd
+is not a member of this set, there shall be no effect on the set, nor
+will an error be returned.
+.P
+\fIFD_ISSET\fR(\fIfd\fR, \fIfdsetp\fR) shall evaluate to non-zero if
+the file descriptor
+.IR fd
+is a member of the set pointed to by
+.IR fdsetp ,
+and shall evaluate to zero otherwise.
+.P
+\fIFD_SET\fR(\fIfd\fR, \fIfdsetp\fR) shall add the file descriptor
+.IR fd
+to the set pointed to by
+.IR fdsetp .
+If the file descriptor
+.IR fd
+is already in this set, there shall be no effect on the set, nor will
+an error be returned.
+.P
+\fIFD_ZERO\fR(\fIfdsetp\fR) shall initialize the descriptor set pointed
+to by
+.IR fdsetp
+to the null set. No error is returned if the set is not empty at the
+time
+\fIFD_ZERO\fR()
+is invoked.
+.P
+The behavior of these macros is undefined if the
+.IR fd
+argument is less than 0 or greater than or equal to FD_SETSIZE, or if
+.IR fd
+is not a valid file descriptor, or if any of the arguments are
+expressions with side-effects.
+.P
+If a thread gets canceled during a
+\fIpselect\fR()
+call, the signal mask in effect when executing the registered cleanup
+functions is either the original signal mask or the signal mask
+installed as part of the
+\fIpselect\fR()
+call.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIpselect\fR()
+and
+\fIselect\fR()
+functions shall return the total number of bits set in the bit masks.
+Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned, and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.P
+\fIFD_CLR\fR(),
+\fIFD_SET\fR(),
+and
+\fIFD_ZERO\fR()
+do not return a value.
+\fIFD_ISSET\fR()
+shall return a non-zero value if the bit for the file descriptor
+.IR fd
+is set in the file descriptor set pointed to by
+.IR fdset ,
+and 0 otherwise.
+.SH ERRORS
+Under the following conditions,
+\fIpselect\fR()
+and
+\fIselect\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+One or more of the file descriptor sets specified a file descriptor
+that is not a valid open file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The function was interrupted before any of the selected events occurred
+and before the timeout interval expired.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If SA_RESTART has been set for the interrupting signal, it is
+implementation-defined whether the function restarts or returns with
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.RE
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+An invalid timeout interval was specified.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR nfds
+argument is less than 0 or greater than FD_SETSIZE.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+One of the specified file descriptors refers to a STREAM or multiplexer
+that is linked (directly or indirectly) downstream from a multiplexer.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+In earlier versions of the Single UNIX Specification, the
+\fIselect\fR()
+function was defined in the
+.IR <sys/time.h> 
+header. This is now changed to
+.IR <sys/select.h> .
+The rationale for this change was as follows: the introduction of the
+\fIpselect\fR()
+function included the
+.IR <sys/select.h> 
+header and the
+.IR <sys/select.h> 
+header defines all the related definitions for the
+\fIpselect\fR()
+and
+\fIselect\fR()
+functions. Backwards-compatibility to existing XSI implementations is
+handled by allowing
+.IR <sys/time.h> 
+to include
+.IR <sys/select.h> .
+.P
+Code which wants to avoid the ambiguity of the signal mask for thread
+cancellation handlers can install an additional cancellation handler
+which resets the signal mask to the expected value.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void cleanup(void *arg)
+{
+    sigset_t *ss = (sigset_t *) arg;
+    pthread_sigmask(SIG_SETMASK, ss, NULL);
+}
+.P
+int call_pselect(int nfds, fd_set *readfds, fd_set *writefds,
+    fd_set errorfds, const struct timespec *timeout,
+    const sigset_t *sigmask)
+{
+    sigset_t oldmask;
+    int result;
+    pthread_sigmask(SIG_SETMASK, NULL, &oldmask);
+    pthread_cleanup_push(cleanup, &oldmask);
+    result = pselect(nfds, readfds, writefds, errorfds, timeout, sigmask);
+    pthread_cleanup_pop(0);
+    return result;
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIaccept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIalarm\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIconnect\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetitimer\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpoll\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecvmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsendmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_select.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/psiginfo.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/psiginfo.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..723d9cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/psiginfo.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,175 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PSIGINFO "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+psiginfo, psignal
+\(em print signal information to standard error
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+void psiginfo(const siginfo_t *\fIpinfo\fP, const char *\fImessage\fP);
+void psignal(int \fIsignum\fP, const char *\fImessage\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpsiginfo\fR()
+and
+\fIpsignal\fR()
+functions shall print a message out on
+.IR stderr
+associated with a signal number. If
+.IR message
+is not null and is not the empty string, then the string pointed to by
+the
+.IR message
+argument shall be printed first, followed by a
+<colon>,
+a
+<space>,
+and the signal description string indicated by
+.IR signum ,
+or by the signal associated with
+.IR pinfo .
+If the
+.IR message
+argument is null or points to an empty string, then only the signal
+description shall be printed. For
+\fIpsiginfo\fR(),
+the argument
+.IR pinfo
+references a valid
+.BR siginfo_t
+structure. For
+\fIpsignal\fR(),
+if
+.IR signum
+is not a valid signal number, the behavior is implementation-defined.
+.P
+The
+\fIpsiginfo\fR()
+and
+\fIpsignal\fR()
+functions shall not change the orientation of the standard error stream.
+.P
+The
+\fIpsiginfo\fR()
+and
+\fIpsignal\fR()
+functions shall mark for update the last data modification and last file
+status change timestamps of the file associated with the standard error
+stream at some time between their successful completion and
+\fIexit\fR(),
+\fIabort\fR(),
+or the completion of
+\fIfflush\fR()
+or
+\fIfclose\fR()
+on
+.IR stderr .
+.P
+The
+\fIpsiginfo\fR()
+and
+\fIpsignal\fR()
+functions shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.P
+On error, the
+\fIpsiginfo\fR()
+and
+\fIpsignal\fR()
+functions shall set the error indicator for the stream to which
+.IR stderr
+points, and shall set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.P
+Since no value is returned, an application wishing to check for error
+situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0, then call
+\fIpsiginfo\fR()
+or
+\fIpsignal\fR(),
+then check
+.IR errno .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall not return a value.
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfputc\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+As an alternative to setting
+.IR errno
+to zero before the call and checking if it is non-zero afterwards,
+applications can use
+\fIferror\fR()
+to detect whether
+\fIpsiginfo\fR()
+or
+\fIpsignal\fR()
+encountered an error.
+.P
+An application wishing to use this method to check for error situations
+should call
+.IR clearerr ( stderr )
+before calling
+\fIpsiginfo\fR()
+or
+\fIpsignal\fR(),
+then if
+.IR ferror ( stderr )
+returns non-zero, the value of
+.IR errno
+indicates which error occurred.
+.SH RATIONALE
+System V historically has
+\fIpsignal\fR()
+and
+\fIpsiginfo\fR()
+in
+.IR <siginfo.h> .
+However, the
+.IR <siginfo.h> 
+header is not specified in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, and the type
+.BR siginfo_t
+is defined in
+.IR <signal.h> .
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfputc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIperror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrsignal\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_atfork.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_atfork.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..20dafcb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_atfork.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,237 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_ATFORK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_atfork
+\(em register fork handlers
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_atfork(void (*\fIprepare\fP)(void), void (*\fIparent\fP)(void),
+    void (*\fIchild\fP)(void));
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_atfork\fR()
+function shall declare fork handlers to be called before and after
+\fIfork\fR(),
+in the context of the thread that called
+\fIfork\fR().
+The
+.IR prepare
+fork handler shall be called before
+\fIfork\fR()
+processing commences. The
+.IR parent
+fork handle shall be called after
+\fIfork\fR()
+processing completes in the parent process. The
+.IR child
+fork handler shall be called after
+\fIfork\fR()
+processing completes in the child process. If no handling is desired
+at one or more of these three points, the corresponding fork handler
+address(es) may be set to NULL.
+.P
+The order of calls to
+\fIpthread_atfork\fR()
+is significant. The
+.IR parent
+and
+.IR child
+fork handlers shall be called in the order in which they were
+established by calls to
+\fIpthread_atfork\fR().
+The
+.IR prepare
+fork handlers shall be called in the opposite order.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIpthread_atfork\fR()
+shall return a value of zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_atfork\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient table space exists to record the fork handler addresses.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_atfork\fR()
+function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+There are at least two serious problems with the semantics of
+\fIfork\fR()
+in a multi-threaded program. One problem has to do with state (for
+example, memory) covered by mutexes. Consider the case where one
+thread has a mutex locked and the state covered by that mutex is
+inconsistent while another thread calls
+\fIfork\fR().
+In the child, the mutex is in the locked state (locked by a nonexistent
+thread and thus can never be unlocked). Having the child simply
+reinitialize the mutex is unsatisfactory since this approach does not
+resolve the question about how to correct or otherwise deal with the
+inconsistent state in the child.
+.P
+It is suggested that programs that use
+\fIfork\fR()
+call an
+.IR exec
+function very soon afterwards in the child process, thus resetting all
+states. In the meantime, only a short list of async-signal-safe
+library routines are promised to be available.
+.P
+Unfortunately, this solution does not address the needs of
+multi-threaded libraries. Application programs may not be aware that a
+multi-threaded library is in use, and they feel free to call any number
+of library routines between the
+\fIfork\fR()
+and
+.IR exec
+calls, just as they always have. Indeed, they may be extant
+single-threaded programs and cannot, therefore, be expected to obey new
+restrictions imposed by the threads library.
+.P
+On the other hand, the multi-threaded library needs a way to protect
+its internal state during
+\fIfork\fR()
+in case it is re-entered later in the child process. The problem
+arises especially in multi-threaded I/O libraries, which are almost
+sure to be invoked between the
+\fIfork\fR()
+and
+.IR exec
+calls to effect I/O redirection. The solution may require locking
+mutex variables during
+\fIfork\fR(),
+or it may entail simply resetting the state in the child after the
+\fIfork\fR()
+processing completes.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_atfork\fR()
+function was intended to provide multi-threaded libraries with a means
+to protect themselves from innocent application programs that call
+\fIfork\fR(),
+and to provide multi-threaded application programs with a standard
+mechanism for protecting themselves from
+\fIfork\fR()
+calls in a library routine or the application itself.
+.P
+The expected usage was that the prepare handler would acquire all mutex
+locks and the other two fork handlers would release them.
+.P
+For example, an application could have supplied a prepare routine that
+acquires the necessary mutexes the library maintains and supplied child
+and parent routines that release those mutexes, thus ensuring that the
+child would have got a consistent snapshot of the state of the library
+(and that no mutexes would have been left stranded). This is good in
+theory, but in reality not practical. Each and every mutex and lock
+in the process must be located and locked. Every component of a program
+including third-party components must participate and they must agree who
+is responsible for which mutex or lock. This is especially problematic
+for mutexes and locks in dynamically allocated memory. All mutexes and
+locks internal to the implementation must be locked, too. This possibly
+delays the thread calling
+\fIfork\fR()
+for a long time or even indefinitely since uses of these synchronization
+objects may not be under control of the application. A final problem
+to mention here is the problem of locking streams. At least the streams
+under control of the system (like
+.IR stdin ,
+.IR stdout ,
+.IR stderr )
+must be protected by locking the stream with
+\fIflockfile\fR().
+But the application itself could have done that, possibly in the same
+thread calling
+\fIfork\fR().
+In this case, the process will deadlock.
+.P
+Alternatively, some libraries might have been able to supply just a
+.IR child
+routine that reinitializes the mutexes in the library and all associated
+states to some known value (for example, what it was when the image
+was originally executed). This approach is not possible, though,
+because implementations are allowed to fail
+.IR *_init (\|)
+and
+.IR *_destroy (\|)
+calls for mutexes and locks if the mutex or lock is still locked. In
+this case, the
+.IR child
+routine is not able to reinitialize the mutexes and locks.
+.P
+When
+\fIfork\fR()
+is called, only the calling thread is duplicated in the child process.
+Synchronization variables remain in the same state in the child as they
+were in the parent at the time
+\fIfork\fR()
+was called. Thus, for example, mutex locks may be held by threads that
+no longer exist in the child process, and any associated states may
+be inconsistent. The intention was that the parent process could have
+avoided this by explicit code that acquires and releases locks critical
+to the child via
+\fIpthread_atfork\fR().
+In addition, any critical threads would have needed to be recreated and
+reinitialized to the proper state in the child (also via
+\fIpthread_atfork\fR()).
+.P
+A higher-level package may acquire locks on its own data structures
+before invoking lower-level packages. Under this scenario, the order
+specified for fork handler calls allows a simple rule of initialization
+for avoiding package deadlock: a package initializes all packages on
+which it depends before it calls the
+\fIpthread_atfork\fR()
+function for itself.
+.P
+As explained, there is no suitable solution for functionality which
+requires non-atomic operations to be protected through mutexes and
+locks. This is why the POSIX.1 standard since the 1996 release requires
+that the child process after
+\fIfork\fR()
+in a multi-threaded process only calls async-signal-safe interfaces.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIatexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_destroy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_destroy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..430cfb6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_destroy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,237 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_ATTR_DESTROY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_attr_destroy,
+pthread_attr_init
+\(em destroy and initialize the thread attributes object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_attr_destroy(pthread_attr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+int pthread_attr_init(pthread_attr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_destroy\fR()
+function shall destroy a thread attributes object. An implementation
+may cause
+\fIpthread_attr_destroy\fR()
+to set
+.IR attr
+to an implementation-defined invalid value. A destroyed
+.IR attr
+attributes object can be reinitialized using
+\fIpthread_attr_init\fR();
+the results of otherwise referencing the object after it
+has been destroyed are undefined.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_init\fR()
+function shall initialize a thread attributes object
+.IR attr
+with the default value for all of the individual attributes used by a
+given implementation.
+.P
+The resulting attributes object (possibly modified by setting
+individual attribute values) when used by
+\fIpthread_create\fR()
+defines the attributes of the thread created. A single attributes
+object can be used in multiple simultaneous calls to
+\fIpthread_create\fR().
+Results are undefined if
+\fIpthread_attr_init\fR()
+is called specifying an already initialized
+.IR attr
+attributes object.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_attr_destroy\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized thread attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIpthread_attr_destroy\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_attr_init\fR()
+shall return a value of 0; otherwise, an error number shall be returned
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_init\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory exists to initialize the thread attributes object.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Attributes objects are provided for threads, mutexes, and condition
+variables as a mechanism to support probable future standardization in
+these areas without requiring that the function itself be changed.
+.P
+Attributes objects provide clean isolation of the configurable aspects
+of threads. For example, ``stack size''
+is an important attribute of a thread, but it cannot be expressed
+portably. When porting a threaded program, stack sizes often need to
+be adjusted. The use of attributes objects can help by allowing the
+changes to be isolated in a single place, rather than being spread
+across every instance of thread creation.
+.P
+Attributes objects can be used to set up ``classes' of threads with
+similar attributes; for example, ``threads with large stacks and high
+priority'' or ``threads with minimal stacks''. These classes can be
+defined in a single place and then referenced wherever threads need to
+be created. Changes to ``class'' decisions become straightforward, and
+detailed analysis of each
+\fIpthread_create\fR()
+call is not required.
+.P
+The attributes objects are defined as opaque types as an aid to
+extensibility. If these objects had been specified as structures,
+adding new attributes would force recompilation of all multi-threaded
+programs when the attributes objects are extended; this might not be
+possible if different program components were supplied by different
+vendors.
+.P
+Additionally, opaque attributes objects present opportunities for
+improving performance. Argument validity can be checked once when
+attributes are set, rather than each time a thread is created.
+Implementations often need to cache kernel objects that are expensive
+to create. Opaque attributes objects provide an efficient mechanism to
+detect when cached objects become invalid due to attribute changes.
+.P
+Since assignment is not necessarily defined on a given opaque type,
+implementation-defined default values cannot be defined in a portable
+way. The solution to this problem is to allow attributes objects to be
+initialized dynamically by attributes object initialization functions,
+so that default values can be supplied automatically by the
+implementation.
+.P
+The following proposal was provided as a suggested alternative to the
+supplied attributes:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Maintain the style of passing a parameter formed by the
+bitwise-inclusive OR of flags to the initialization routines (\c
+\fIpthread_create\fR(),
+\fIpthread_mutex_init\fR(),
+\fIpthread_cond_init\fR()).
+The parameter containing the flags should be an opaque type for
+extensibility. If no flags are set in the parameter, then the objects
+are created with default characteristics. An implementation may
+specify implementation-defined flag values and associated behavior.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If further specialization of mutexes and condition variables is
+necessary, implementations may specify additional procedures that
+operate on the
+.BR pthread_mutex_t
+and
+.BR pthread_cond_t
+objects (instead of on attributes objects).
+.P
+The difficulties with this solution are:
+.IP " 1." 4
+A bitmask is not opaque if bits have to be set into bitvector
+attributes objects using explicitly-coded bitwise-inclusive OR
+operations. If the set of options exceeds an
+.BR int ,
+application programmers need to know the location of each bit. If bits
+are set or read by encapsulation (that is, get and set functions), then
+the bitmask is merely an implementation of attributes objects as
+currently defined and should not be exposed to the programmer.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Many attributes are not Boolean or very small integral values. For
+example, scheduling policy may be placed in 3-bit or 4-bit, but
+priority requires 5-bit or more, thereby taking up at least 8 bits out
+of a possible 16 bits on machines with 16-bit integers. Because of
+this, the bitmask can only reasonably control whether particular
+attributes are set or not, and it cannot serve as the repository of the
+value itself. The value needs to be specified as a function parameter
+(which is non-extensible), or by setting a structure field (which is
+non-opaque), or by get and set functions (making the bitmask a
+redundant addition to the attributes objects).
+.P
+Stack size is defined as an optional attribute because the very notion
+of a stack is inherently machine-dependent. Some implementations may
+not be able to change the size of the stack, for example, and others
+may not need to because stack pages may be discontiguous and can be
+allocated and released on demand.
+.P
+The attribute mechanism has been designed in large measure for
+extensibility. Future extensions to the attribute mechanism or to any
+attributes object defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 has to be done with care so
+as not to affect binary-compatibility.
+.P
+Attributes objects, even if allocated by means of dynamic allocation
+functions such as
+\fImalloc\fR(),
+may have their size fixed at compile time. This means, for example, a
+\fIpthread_create\fR()
+in an implementation with extensions to
+.BR pthread_attr_t
+cannot look beyond the area that the binary application assumes is
+valid. This suggests that implementations should maintain a size field
+in the attributes object, as well as possibly version information, if
+extensions in different directions (possibly by different vendors) are
+to be accommodated.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_attr_destroy\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized thread attributes object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_attr_init\fR()
+refers to an already initialized thread attributes object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EBUSY] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getstacksize\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getdetachstate\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_create\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getdetachstate.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getdetachstate.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9a04312
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getdetachstate.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_ATTR_GETDETACHSTATE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+.ad l
+pthread_attr_getdetachstate,
+pthread_attr_setdetachstate
+\(em get and set the detachstate attribute
+.ad b
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_attr_getdetachstate(const pthread_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int *\fIdetachstate\fP);
+int pthread_attr_setdetachstate(pthread_attr_t *\fIattr\fP, int \fIdetachstate\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.IR detachstate
+attribute controls whether the thread is created in a detached state.
+If the thread is created detached, then use of the ID of the newly
+created thread by the
+\fIpthread_detach\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+function is an error.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_getdetachstate\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_attr_setdetachstate\fR()
+functions, respectively, shall get and set the
+.IR detachstate
+attribute in the
+.IR attr
+object.
+.P
+For
+\fIpthread_attr_getdetachstate\fR(),
+.IR detachstate
+shall be set to either PTHREAD_CREATE_DETACHED or
+PTHREAD_CREATE_JOINABLE.
+.P
+For
+\fIpthread_attr_setdetachstate\fR(),
+the application shall set
+.IR detachstate
+to either PTHREAD_CREATE_DETACHED or PTHREAD_CREATE_JOINABLE.
+.P
+A value of PTHREAD_CREATE_DETACHED shall cause all threads created with
+.IR attr
+to be in the detached state, whereas using a value of
+PTHREAD_CREATE_JOINABLE shall cause all threads created with
+.IR attr
+to be in the joinable state. The default value of the
+.IR detachstate
+attribute shall be PTHREAD_CREATE_JOINABLE.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_attr_getdetachstate\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_attr_setdetachstate\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized thread attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIpthread_attr_getdetachstate\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_attr_setdetachstate\fR()
+shall return a value of 0; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_getdetachstate\fR()
+function stores the value of the
+.IR detachstate
+attribute in
+.IR detachstate
+if successful.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_setdetachstate\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR detachstate
+was not valid
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Retrieving the detachstate Attribute"
+.P
+This example shows how to obtain the
+.IR detachstate
+attribute of a thread attribute object.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+pthread_attr_t thread_attr;
+int            detachstate;
+int            rc;
+.P
+/* code initializing thread_attr */
+\&...
+.P
+rc = pthread_attr_getdetachstate (&thread_attr, &detachstate);
+if (rc!=0) {
+    /* handle error */
+    ...
+}
+else {
+    /* legal values for detachstate are:
+     * PTHREAD_CREATE_DETACHED or PTHREAD_CREATE_JOINABLE
+     */
+     ...
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_attr_getdetachstate\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_attr_setdetachstate\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized thread attributes object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getstacksize\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_create\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getguardsize.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getguardsize.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..21bde70
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getguardsize.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,215 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_ATTR_GETGUARDSIZE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+.ad l
+pthread_attr_getguardsize,
+pthread_attr_setguardsize
+\(em get and set the thread guardsize attribute
+.ad b
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_attr_getguardsize(const pthread_attr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    size_t *restrict \fIguardsize\fP);
+int pthread_attr_setguardsize(pthread_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    size_t \fIguardsize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_getguardsize\fR()
+function shall get the
+.IR guardsize
+attribute in the
+.IR attr
+object. This attribute shall be returned in the
+.IR guardsize
+parameter.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_setguardsize\fR()
+function shall set the
+.IR guardsize
+attribute in the
+.IR attr
+object. The new value of this attribute shall be obtained from the
+.IR guardsize
+parameter. If
+.IR guardsize
+is zero, a guard area shall not be provided for threads created with
+.IR attr .
+If
+.IR guardsize
+is greater than zero, a guard area of at least size
+.IR guardsize
+bytes shall be provided for each thread created with
+.IR attr .
+.P
+The
+.IR guardsize
+attribute controls the size of the guard area for the created thread's
+stack. The
+.IR guardsize
+attribute provides protection against overflow of the stack pointer. If
+a thread's stack is created with guard protection, the implementation
+allocates extra memory at the overflow end of the stack as a buffer
+against stack overflow of the stack pointer. If an application
+overflows into this buffer an error shall result (possibly in a SIGSEGV
+signal being delivered to the thread).
+.P
+A conforming implementation may round up the value contained in
+.IR guardsize
+to a multiple of the configurable system variable
+{PAGESIZE}
+(see
+.IR <sys/mman.h> ).
+If an implementation rounds up the value of
+.IR guardsize
+to a multiple of
+{PAGESIZE},
+a call to
+\fIpthread_attr_getguardsize\fR()
+specifying
+.IR attr
+shall store in the
+.IR guardsize
+parameter the guard size specified by the previous
+\fIpthread_attr_setguardsize\fR()
+function call.
+.P
+The default value of the
+.IR guardsize
+attribute is implementation-defined.
+.P
+If the
+.IR stackaddr
+attribute has been set (that is, the caller is allocating and managing
+its own thread stacks), the
+.IR guardsize
+attribute shall be ignored and no protection shall be provided by the
+implementation. It is the responsibility of the application to manage
+stack overflow along with stack allocation and management in this
+case.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_attr_getguardsize\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_attr_setguardsize\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized thread attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_attr_getguardsize\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_attr_setguardsize\fR()
+functions shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The parameter
+.IR guardsize
+is invalid.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Retrieving the guardsize Attribute"
+.P
+This example shows how to obtain the
+.IR guardsize
+attribute of a thread attribute object.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+pthread_attr_t thread_attr;
+size_t  guardsize;
+int     rc;
+.P
+/* code initializing thread_attr */
+\&...
+.P
+rc = pthread_attr_getguardsize (&thread_attr, &guardsize);
+if (rc != 0)  {
+    /* handle error */
+    ...
+}
+else {
+    if (guardsize > 0) {
+    /* a guard area of at least guardsize bytes is provided */
+    ...
+    }
+    else {
+    /* no guard area provided */
+    ...
+    }
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR guardsize
+attribute is provided to the application for two reasons:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Overflow protection can potentially result in wasted system resources.
+An application that creates a large number of threads, and which knows
+its threads never overflow their stack, can save system resources by
+turning off guard areas.
+.IP " 2." 4
+When threads allocate large data structures on the stack, large guard
+areas may be needed to detect stack overflow.
+.P
+The default size of the guard area is left implementation-defined
+since on systems supporting very large page sizes, the overhead
+might be substantial if at least one guard page is required by default.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_attr_getguardsize\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_attr_setguardsize\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized thread attributes object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_mman.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getinheritsched.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getinheritsched.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4dfc74c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getinheritsched.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_ATTR_GETINHERITSCHED "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_attr_getinheritsched,
+pthread_attr_setinheritsched
+\(em get and set the inheritsched attribute
+(\fBREALTIME THREADS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_attr_getinheritsched(const pthread_attr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    int *restrict \fIinheritsched\fP);
+int pthread_attr_setinheritsched(pthread_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIinheritsched\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_getinheritsched\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_attr_setinheritsched\fR()
+functions, respectively, shall get and set the
+.IR inheritsched
+attribute in the
+.IR attr
+argument.
+.P
+When the attributes objects are used by
+\fIpthread_create\fR(),
+the
+.IR inheritsched
+attribute determines how the other scheduling attributes of the created
+thread shall be set.
+.P
+The supported values of
+.IR inheritsched
+shall be:
+.IP PTHREAD_INHERIT_SCHED 6
+.br
+Specifies that the thread scheduling attributes shall be inherited from
+the creating thread, and the scheduling attributes in this
+.IR attr
+argument shall be ignored.
+.IP PTHREAD_EXPLICIT_SCHED 6
+.br
+Specifies that the thread scheduling attributes shall be set to the
+corresponding values from this attributes object.
+.P
+The symbols PTHREAD_INHERIT_SCHED and PTHREAD_EXPLICIT_SCHED are
+defined in the
+.IR <pthread.h> 
+header.
+.P
+The following thread scheduling attributes defined by POSIX.1\(hy2008 are
+affected by the
+.IR inheritsched
+attribute: scheduling policy (\c
+.IR schedpolicy ),
+scheduling parameters (\c
+.IR schedparam ),
+and scheduling contention scope (\c
+.IR contentionscope ).
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_attr_getinheritsched\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_attr_setinheritsched\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized thread attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_attr_getinheritsched\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_attr_setinheritsched\fR()
+functions shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_setinheritsched\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSUP
+An attempt was made to set the attribute to an unsupported value.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_setinheritsched\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR inheritsched
+is not valid.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+After these attributes have been set, a thread can be created with the
+specified attributes using
+\fIpthread_create\fR().
+Using these routines does not affect the current running thread.
+.P
+See
+.IR "Section 2.9.4" ", " "Thread Scheduling"
+for further details on thread scheduling attributes and their default
+settings.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_attr_getinheritsched\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_attr_setinheritsched\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized thread attributes object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getscope\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getschedpolicy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getschedparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_create\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sched.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getschedparam.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getschedparam.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d7e14e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getschedparam.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_ATTR_GETSCHEDPARAM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_attr_getschedparam,
+pthread_attr_setschedparam
+\(em get and set the schedparam attribute
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_attr_getschedparam(const pthread_attr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    struct sched_param *restrict \fIparam\fP);
+int pthread_attr_setschedparam(pthread_attr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    const struct sched_param *restrict \fIparam\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_getschedparam\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_attr_setschedparam\fR()
+functions, respectively, shall get and set the scheduling parameter
+attributes in the
+.IR attr
+argument. The contents of the
+.IR param
+structure are defined in the
+.IR <sched.h> 
+header. For the SCHED_FIFO and SCHED_RR policies,
+the only required member of
+.IR param
+is
+.IR sched_priority .
+.P
+For the SCHED_SPORADIC policy, the required members of the
+.IR param
+structure are
+.IR sched_priority ,
+.IR sched_ss_low_priority ,
+.IR sched_ss_repl_period ,
+.IR sched_ss_init_budget ,
+and
+.IR sched_ss_max_repl .
+The specified
+.IR sched_ss_repl_period
+must be greater than or equal to the specified
+.IR sched_ss_init_budget
+for the function to succeed; if it is not, then the function shall
+fail. The value of
+.IR sched_ss_max_repl
+shall be within the inclusive range [1,\c
+{SS_REPL_MAX}]
+for the function to succeed; if not, the function shall fail.
+It is unspecified whether the
+.IR sched_ss_repl_period
+and
+.IR sched_ss_init_budget
+values are stored as provided by this function or are rounded to
+align with the resolution of the clock being used.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_attr_getschedparam\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_attr_setschedparam\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized thread attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_attr_getschedparam\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_attr_setschedparam\fR()
+functions shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_setschedparam\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSUP
+An attempt was made to set the attribute to an unsupported value.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_setschedparam\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR param
+is not valid.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+After these attributes have been set, a thread can be created with the
+specified attributes using
+\fIpthread_create\fR().
+Using these routines does not affect the current running thread.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_attr_getschedparam\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_attr_setschedparam\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized thread attributes object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getscope\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getinheritsched\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getschedpolicy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_create\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sched.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getschedpolicy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getschedpolicy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..044f606
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getschedpolicy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_ATTR_GETSCHEDPOLICY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_attr_getschedpolicy,
+pthread_attr_setschedpolicy
+\(em get and set the schedpolicy attribute
+(\fBREALTIME THREADS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_attr_getschedpolicy(const pthread_attr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    int *restrict \fIpolicy\fP);
+int pthread_attr_setschedpolicy(pthread_attr_t *\fIattr\fP, int \fIpolicy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_getschedpolicy\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_attr_setschedpolicy\fR()
+functions, respectively, shall get and set the
+.IR schedpolicy
+attribute in the
+.IR attr
+argument.
+.P
+The supported values of
+.IR policy
+shall include SCHED_FIFO, SCHED_RR, and SCHED_OTHER,
+which are defined in the
+.IR <sched.h> 
+header. When threads executing with the scheduling policy SCHED_FIFO,
+SCHED_RR,
+or SCHED_SPORADIC
+are waiting on a mutex, they shall acquire the mutex in priority order
+when the mutex is unlocked.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_attr_getschedpolicy\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_attr_setschedpolicy\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized thread attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_attr_getschedpolicy\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_attr_setschedpolicy\fR()
+functions shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_setschedpolicy\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSUP
+An attempt was made to set the attribute to an unsupported value.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_setschedpolicy\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR policy
+is not valid.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+After these attributes have been set, a thread can be created with the
+specified attributes using
+\fIpthread_create\fR().
+Using these routines does not affect the current running thread.
+.P
+See
+.IR "Section 2.9.4" ", " "Thread Scheduling"
+for further details on thread scheduling attributes and their
+default settings.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_attr_getschedpolicy\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_attr_setschedpolicy\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized thread attributes object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getscope\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getinheritsched\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getschedparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_create\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sched.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getscope.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getscope.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f003b5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getscope.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_ATTR_GETSCOPE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_attr_getscope,
+pthread_attr_setscope
+\(em get and set the contentionscope attribute
+(\fBREALTIME THREADS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_attr_getscope(const pthread_attr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    int *restrict \fIcontentionscope\fP);
+int pthread_attr_setscope(pthread_attr_t *\fIattr\fP, int \fIcontentionscope\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_getscope\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_attr_setscope\fR()
+functions, respectively, shall get and set the
+.IR contentionscope
+attribute in the
+.IR attr
+object.
+.P
+The
+.IR contentionscope
+attribute may have the values PTHREAD_SCOPE_SYSTEM,
+signifying system scheduling contention scope, or
+PTHREAD_SCOPE_PROCESS,
+signifying process scheduling contention scope. The symbols
+PTHREAD_SCOPE_SYSTEM and PTHREAD_SCOPE_PROCESS are defined in the
+.IR <pthread.h> 
+header.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_attr_getscope\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_attr_setscope\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized thread attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_attr_getscope\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_attr_setscope\fR()
+functions shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_setscope\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSUP
+An attempt was made to set the attribute to an unsupported value.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_setscope\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR contentionscope
+is not valid.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+After these attributes have been set, a thread can be created with the
+specified attributes using
+\fIpthread_create\fR().
+Using these routines does not affect the current running thread.
+.P
+See
+.IR "Section 2.9.4" ", " "Thread Scheduling"
+for further details on thread scheduling attributes and their default
+settings.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_attr_getscope\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_attr_setscope\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized thread attributes object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getinheritsched\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getschedpolicy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getschedparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_create\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sched.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getstack.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getstack.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d545375
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getstack.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,201 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_ATTR_GETSTACK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_attr_getstack,
+pthread_attr_setstack
+\(em get and set stack attributes
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_attr_getstack(const pthread_attr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    void **restrict \fIstackaddr\fP, size_t *restrict \fIstacksize\fP);
+int pthread_attr_setstack(pthread_attr_t *\fIattr\fP, void *\fIstackaddr\fP,
+    size_t \fIstacksize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_getstack\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_attr_setstack\fR()
+functions, respectively, shall get and set the thread creation stack
+attributes
+.IR stackaddr
+and
+.IR stacksize
+in the
+.IR attr
+object.
+.P
+The stack attributes specify the area of storage to be used for the
+created thread's stack. The base (lowest addressable byte) of the
+storage shall be
+.IR stackaddr ,
+and the size of the storage shall be
+.IR stacksize
+bytes. The
+.IR stacksize
+shall be at least
+{PTHREAD_STACK_MIN}.
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_setstack\fR()
+function may fail with
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+if
+.IR stackaddr
+does not meet implementation-defined alignment requirements.
+All pages within the stack described by
+.IR stackaddr
+and
+.IR stacksize
+shall be both readable and writable by the thread.
+.P
+If the
+\fIpthread_attr_getstack\fR()
+function is called before the
+.IR stackaddr
+attribute has been set, the behavior is unspecified.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_attr_getstack\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_attr_setstack\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized thread attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return a value of 0;
+otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate the error.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_getstack\fR()
+function shall store the stack attribute values in
+.IR stackaddr
+and
+.IR stacksize
+if successful.
+.SH ERRORS
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_setstack\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR stacksize
+is less than
+{PTHREAD_STACK_MIN}
+or exceeds an implementation-defined limit.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_setstack\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR stackaddr
+does not have proper alignment to be used as a stack, or ((\c
+.BR "char *" )\c
+.IR stackaddr
++
+.IR stacksize )
+lacks proper alignment.
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+The stack page(s) described by
+.IR stackaddr
+and
+.IR stacksize
+are not both readable and writable by the thread.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+These functions are appropriate for use by applications in an
+environment where the stack for a thread must be placed in some
+particular region of memory.
+.P
+While it might seem that an application could detect stack overflow by
+providing a protected page outside the specified stack region, this
+cannot be done portably. Implementations are free to place the thread's
+initial stack pointer anywhere within the specified region to
+accommodate the machine's stack pointer behavior and allocation
+requirements. Furthermore, on some architectures, such as the IA\(hy64,
+``overflow'' might mean that two separate stack pointers allocated
+within the region will overlap somewhere in the middle of the region.
+.P
+After a successful call to
+\fIpthread_attr_setstack\fR(),
+the storage area specified by the
+.IR stackaddr
+parameter is under the control of the implementation, as described in
+.IR "Section 2.9.8" ", " "Use of Application-Managed Thread Stacks".
+.P
+The specification of the
+.IR stackaddr
+attribute presents several ambiguities that make portable use of these
+functions impossible. For example, the standard allows implementations
+to impose arbitrary alignment requirements on
+.IR stackaddr .
+Applications cannot assume that a buffer obtained from
+\fImalloc\fR()
+is suitably aligned. Note that although the
+.IR stacksize
+value passed to
+\fIpthread_attr_setstack\fR()
+must satisfy alignment requirements, the same is not true for
+\fIpthread_attr_setstacksize\fR()
+where the implementation must increase the specified size if
+necessary to achieve the proper alignment.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_attr_getstack\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_attr_setstack\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized thread attributes object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getdetachstate\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getstacksize\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_create\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<limits.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getstacksize.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getstacksize.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bd1427d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_getstacksize.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_ATTR_GETSTACKSIZE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+.ad l
+pthread_attr_getstacksize,
+pthread_attr_setstacksize
+\(em get and set the stacksize attribute
+.ad b
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_attr_getstacksize(const pthread_attr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    size_t *restrict \fIstacksize\fP);
+int pthread_attr_setstacksize(pthread_attr_t *\fIattr\fP, size_t \fIstacksize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_getstacksize\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_attr_setstacksize\fR()
+functions, respectively, shall get and set the thread creation
+.IR stacksize
+attribute in the
+.IR attr
+object.
+.P
+The
+.IR stacksize
+attribute shall define the minimum stack size (in bytes) allocated
+for the created threads stack.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_attr_getstacksize\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_attr_setstacksize\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized thread attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIpthread_attr_getstacksize\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_attr_setstacksize\fR()
+shall return a value of 0; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_getstacksize\fR()
+function stores the
+.IR stacksize
+attribute value in
+.IR stacksize
+if successful.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_attr_setstacksize\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR stacksize
+is less than
+{PTHREAD_STACK_MIN}
+or exceeds a system-imposed limit.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_attr_getstacksize\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_attr_setstacksize\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized thread attributes object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getdetachstate\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_create\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<limits.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_init.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_init.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a15e4a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_init.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_ATTR_INIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_attr_init
+\(em initialize the thread attributes object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_attr_init(pthread_attr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_destroy\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setdetachstate.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setdetachstate.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..51bc552
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setdetachstate.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_ATTR_SETDETACHSTATE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_attr_setdetachstate
+\(em set the detachstate attribute
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_attr_setdetachstate(pthread_attr_t *\fIattr\fP, int \fIdetachstate\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getdetachstate\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setguardsize.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setguardsize.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9c07af5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setguardsize.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_ATTR_SETGUARDSIZE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_attr_setguardsize
+\(em set the thread guardsize attribute
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_attr_setguardsize(pthread_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    size_t \fIguardsize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getguardsize\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setinheritsched.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setinheritsched.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f259b7a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setinheritsched.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_ATTR_SETINHERITSCHED "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_attr_setinheritsched
+\(em set the inheritsched attribute
+(\fBREALTIME THREADS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_attr_setinheritsched(pthread_attr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIinheritsched\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getinheritsched\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setschedparam.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setschedparam.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dfb4fe9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setschedparam.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_ATTR_SETSCHEDPARAM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_attr_setschedparam
+\(em set the schedparam attribute
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_attr_setschedparam(pthread_attr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    const struct sched_param *restrict \fIparam\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getschedparam\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setschedpolicy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setschedpolicy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3f9e446
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setschedpolicy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_ATTR_SETSCHEDPOLICY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_attr_setschedpolicy
+\(em set the schedpolicy attribute
+(\fBREALTIME THREADS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_attr_setschedpolicy(pthread_attr_t *\fIattr\fP, int \fIpolicy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getschedpolicy\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setscope.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setscope.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..721f267
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setscope.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_ATTR_SETSCOPE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_attr_setscope
+\(em set the contentionscope attribute
+(\fBREALTIME THREADS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_attr_setscope(pthread_attr_t *\fIattr\fP, int \fIcontentionscope\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getscope\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setstack.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setstack.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a6ef250
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setstack.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_ATTR_SETSTACK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_attr_setstack
+\(em set the stack attribute
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_attr_setstack(pthread_attr_t *\fIattr\fP, void *\fIstackaddr\fP,
+    size_t \fIstacksize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getstack\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setstacksize.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setstacksize.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..676ac3e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_attr_setstacksize.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_ATTR_SETSTACKSIZE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_attr_setstacksize
+\(em set the stacksize attribute
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_attr_setstacksize(pthread_attr_t *\fIattr\fP, size_t \fIstacksize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_getstacksize\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_barrier_destroy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_barrier_destroy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..124b447
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_barrier_destroy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,168 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_BARRIER_DESTROY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_barrier_destroy,
+pthread_barrier_init
+\(em destroy and initialize a barrier object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_barrier_destroy(pthread_barrier_t *\fIbarrier\fP);
+int pthread_barrier_init(pthread_barrier_t *restrict \fIbarrier\fP,
+    const pthread_barrierattr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP, unsigned \fIcount\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_barrier_destroy\fR()
+function shall destroy the barrier referenced by
+.IR barrier
+and release any resources used by the barrier. The effect of
+subsequent use of the barrier is undefined until the barrier is
+reinitialized by another call to
+\fIpthread_barrier_init\fR().
+An implementation may use this function to set
+.IR barrier
+to an invalid value. The results are undefined if
+\fIpthread_barrier_destroy\fR()
+is called when any thread is blocked on the barrier, or if this
+function is called with an uninitialized barrier.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_barrier_init\fR()
+function shall allocate any resources required to use the barrier
+referenced by
+.IR barrier
+and shall initialize the barrier with attributes referenced by
+.IR attr .
+If
+.IR attr
+is NULL, the default barrier attributes shall be used; the effect is
+the same as passing the address of a default barrier attributes
+object. The results are undefined if
+\fIpthread_barrier_init\fR()
+is called when any thread is blocked on the barrier (that is, has not
+returned from the
+\fIpthread_barrier_wait\fR()
+call). The results are undefined if a barrier is used without first
+being initialized. The results are undefined if
+\fIpthread_barrier_init\fR()
+is called specifying an already initialized barrier.
+.P
+The
+.IR count
+argument specifies the number of threads that must call
+\fIpthread_barrier_wait\fR()
+before any of them successfully return from the call. The value
+specified by
+.IR count
+must be greater than zero.
+.P
+If the
+\fIpthread_barrier_init\fR()
+function fails, the barrier shall not be initialized and the contents
+of
+.IR barrier
+are undefined.
+.P
+Only the object referenced by
+.IR barrier
+may be used for performing synchronization. The result of referring to
+copies of that object in calls to
+\fIpthread_barrier_destroy\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_barrier_wait\fR()
+is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return zero;
+otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_barrier_init\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The system lacks the necessary resources to initialize another barrier.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value specified by
+.IR count
+is equal to zero.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory exists to initialize the barrier.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR barrier
+argument to
+\fIpthread_barrier_destroy\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized barrier object, it is recommended that
+the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_barrier_init\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized barrier attributes object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR barrier
+argument to
+\fIpthread_barrier_destroy\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_barrier_init\fR()
+refers to a barrier that is in use (for example, in a
+\fIpthread_barrier_wait\fR()
+call) by another thread, or detects that the value specified by the
+.IR barrier
+argument to
+\fIpthread_barrier_init\fR()
+refers to an already initialized barrier object, it is recommended
+that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EBUSY] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_barrier_wait\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_barrier_wait.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_barrier_wait.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..48735fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_barrier_wait.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_BARRIER_WAIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_barrier_wait
+\(em synchronize at a barrier
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_barrier_wait(pthread_barrier_t *\fIbarrier\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_barrier_wait\fR()
+function shall synchronize participating threads at the barrier
+referenced by
+.IR barrier .
+The calling thread shall block until the required number of
+threads have called
+\fIpthread_barrier_wait\fR()
+specifying the barrier.
+.P
+When the required number of threads have called
+\fIpthread_barrier_wait\fR()
+specifying the barrier, the constant PTHREAD_BARRIER_SERIAL_THREAD
+shall be returned to one unspecified thread and zero shall be returned
+to each of the remaining threads. At this point, the barrier shall be
+reset to the state it had as a result of the most recent
+\fIpthread_barrier_init\fR()
+function that referenced it.
+.P
+The constant PTHREAD_BARRIER_SERIAL_THREAD is defined in
+.IR <pthread.h> 
+and its value shall be distinct from any other value returned by
+\fIpthread_barrier_wait\fR().
+.P
+The results are undefined if this function is called with an
+uninitialized barrier.
+.P
+If a signal is delivered to a thread blocked on a barrier, upon return
+from the signal handler the thread shall resume waiting at the barrier
+if the barrier wait has not completed (that is, if the required number
+of threads have not arrived at the barrier during the execution of the
+signal handler); otherwise, the thread shall continue as normal from
+the completed barrier wait. Until the thread in the signal handler
+returns from it, it is unspecified whether other threads may proceed
+past the barrier once they have all reached it.
+.P
+A thread that has blocked on a barrier shall not prevent any unblocked
+thread that is eligible to use the same processing resources from
+eventually making forward progress in its execution. Eligibility for
+processing resources shall be determined by the scheduling policy.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIpthread_barrier_wait\fR()
+function shall return PTHREAD_BARRIER_SERIAL_THREAD for a single
+(arbitrary) thread synchronized at the barrier and zero for each of the
+other threads. Otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate
+the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+This function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications using this function may be subject to priority inversion,
+as discussed in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.287" ", " "Priority Inversion".
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR barrier
+argument to
+\fIpthread_barrier_wait\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized barrier object, it is recommended
+that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_barrier_destroy\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.287" ", " "Priority Inversion",
+.IR "Section 4.11" ", " "Memory Synchronization",
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_barrierattr_destroy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_barrierattr_destroy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b83baf9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_barrierattr_destroy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_BARRIERATTR_DESTROY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_barrierattr_destroy,
+pthread_barrierattr_init
+\(em destroy and initialize the barrier attributes object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_barrierattr_destroy(pthread_barrierattr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+int pthread_barrierattr_init(pthread_barrierattr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_barrierattr_destroy\fR()
+function shall destroy a barrier attributes object. A destroyed
+.IR attr
+attributes object can be reinitialized using
+\fIpthread_barrierattr_init\fR();
+the results of otherwise referencing the object after it
+has been destroyed are undefined. An implementation may cause
+\fIpthread_barrierattr_destroy\fR()
+to set the object referenced by
+.IR attr
+to an invalid value.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_barrierattr_init\fR()
+function shall initialize a barrier attributes object
+.IR attr
+with the default value for all of the attributes defined by the
+implementation.
+.P
+If
+\fIpthread_barrierattr_init\fR()
+is called specifying an already initialized
+.IR attr
+attributes object, the results are undefined.
+.P
+After a barrier attributes object has been used to initialize one or
+more barriers, any function affecting the attributes object (including
+destruction) shall not affect any previously initialized barrier.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_barrierattr_destroy\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized barrier attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_barrierattr_destroy\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_barrierattr_init\fR()
+functions shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_barrierattr_init\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory exists to initialize the barrier attributes
+object.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_barrierattr_destroy\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized barrier attributes object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_barrierattr_getpshared\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_barrierattr_getpshared.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_barrierattr_getpshared.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3592976
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_barrierattr_getpshared.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_BARRIERATTR_GETPSHARED "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_barrierattr_getpshared,
+pthread_barrierattr_setpshared
+\(em get and set the process-shared attribute of the barrier
+attributes object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_barrierattr_getpshared(const pthread_barrierattr_t
+    *restrict \fIattr\fP, int *restrict \fIpshared\fP);
+int pthread_barrierattr_setpshared(pthread_barrierattr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIpshared\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_barrierattr_getpshared\fR()
+function shall obtain the value of the
+.IR process-shared
+attribute from the attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+The
+\fIpthread_barrierattr_setpshared\fR()
+function shall set the
+.IR process-shared
+attribute in an initialized attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+.P
+The
+.IR process-shared
+attribute is set to PTHREAD_PROCESS_SHARED to
+permit a barrier to be operated upon by any thread that has access to
+the memory where the barrier is allocated. If the
+.IR process-shared
+attribute is PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE, the barrier shall only be
+operated upon by
+threads created within the same process as the thread that initialized
+the barrier; if threads of different processes attempt to operate on
+such a barrier, the behavior is undefined. The default value of the
+attribute shall be PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE. Both constants
+PTHREAD_PROCESS_SHARED and PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE are defined in
+.IR <pthread.h> .
+.P
+Additional attributes, their default values, and the names of the
+associated functions to get and set those attribute values are
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_barrierattr_getpshared\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_barrierattr_setpshared\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized barrier attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_barrierattr_getpshared\fR()
+function shall return zero and store the value of the
+.IR process-shared
+attribute of
+.IR attr
+into the object referenced by the
+.IR pshared
+parameter. Otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate
+the error.
+.P
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_barrierattr_setpshared\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_barrierattr_setpshared\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The new value specified for the
+.IR process-shared
+attribute is not one of the legal values PTHREAD_PROCESS_SHARED
+or PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIpthread_barrierattr_getpshared\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_barrierattr_setpshared\fR()
+functions are part of the Thread Process-Shared Synchronization
+option and need not be provided on all implementations.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_barrierattr_getpshared\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_barrierattr_setpshared\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized barrier attributes object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_barrier_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_barrierattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_barrierattr_init.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_barrierattr_init.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e9ac123
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_barrierattr_init.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_BARRIERATTR_INIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_barrierattr_init
+\(em initialize the barrier attributes object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_barrierattr_init(pthread_barrierattr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_barrierattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_barrierattr_setpshared.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_barrierattr_setpshared.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7f853cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_barrierattr_setpshared.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_BARRIERATTR_SETPSHARED "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_barrierattr_setpshared
+\(em set the process-shared attribute of the barrier attributes object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_barrierattr_setpshared(pthread_barrierattr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIpshared\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_barrierattr_getpshared\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_cancel.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_cancel.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2b417a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_cancel.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_CANCEL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_cancel
+\(em cancel execution of a thread
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_cancel(pthread_t \fIthread\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_cancel\fR()
+function shall request that
+.IR thread
+be canceled. The target thread's cancelability state and type
+determines when the cancellation takes effect. When the cancellation
+is acted on, the cancellation cleanup handlers for
+.IR thread
+shall be called. When the last cancellation cleanup handler returns,
+the thread-specific data destructor functions shall be called for
+.IR thread .
+When the last destructor function returns,
+.IR thread
+shall be terminated.
+.P
+The cancellation processing in the target thread shall run
+asynchronously with respect to the calling thread returning from
+\fIpthread_cancel\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_cancel\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_cancel\fR()
+function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Two alternative functions were considered for sending the cancellation
+notification to a thread. One would be to define a new SIGCANCEL
+signal that had the cancellation semantics when delivered; the other was
+to define the new
+\fIpthread_cancel\fR()
+function, which would trigger the cancellation semantics.
+.P
+The advantage of a new signal was that so much of the delivery criteria
+were identical to that used when trying to deliver a signal that making
+cancellation notification a signal was seen as consistent. Indeed, many
+implementations implement cancellation using a special signal. On the
+other hand, there would be no signal functions that could be used with
+this signal except
+\fIpthread_kill\fR(),
+and the behavior of the delivered cancellation signal would be unlike
+any previously existing defined signal.
+.P
+The benefits of a special function include the recognition that this
+signal would be defined because of the similar delivery criteria and
+that this is the only common behavior between a cancellation request and
+a signal. In addition, the cancellation delivery mechanism does not
+have to be implemented as a signal. There are also strong, if not
+stronger, parallels with language exception mechanisms than with
+signals that are potentially obscured if the delivery mechanism is
+visibly closer to signals.
+.P
+In the end, it was considered that as there were so many exceptions to
+the use of the new signal with existing signals functions it
+would be misleading. A special function has resolved this problem.
+This function was carefully defined so that an implementation wishing
+to provide the cancellation functions on top of signals could do so.
+The special function also means that implementations are not obliged
+to implement cancellation with signals.
+.P
+If an implementation detects use of a thread ID after the end of its
+lifetime, it is recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [ESRCH] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_exit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_join\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_setcancelstate\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_cleanup_pop.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_cleanup_pop.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..19c80c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_cleanup_pop.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,335 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_CLEANUP_POP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_cleanup_pop,
+pthread_cleanup_push
+\(em establish cancellation handlers
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+void pthread_cleanup_pop(int \fIexecute\fP);
+void pthread_cleanup_push(void (*\fIroutine\fP)(void*), void *\fIarg\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_cleanup_pop\fR()
+function shall remove the routine at the top of the calling thread's
+cancellation cleanup stack and optionally invoke it (if
+.IR execute
+is non-zero).
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_cleanup_push\fR()
+function shall push the specified cancellation cleanup handler
+.IR routine
+onto the calling thread's cancellation cleanup stack. The cancellation
+cleanup handler shall be popped from the cancellation cleanup stack and
+invoked with the argument
+.IR arg
+when:
+.IP " *" 4
+The thread exits (that is, calls
+\fIpthread_exit\fR()).
+.IP " *" 4
+The thread acts upon a cancellation request.
+.IP " *" 4
+The thread calls
+\fIpthread_cleanup_pop\fR()
+with a non-zero
+.IR execute
+argument.
+.P
+These functions may be implemented as macros. The application shall
+ensure that they appear as statements, and in pairs within the same
+lexical scope (that is, the
+\fIpthread_cleanup_push\fR()
+macro may be thought to expand to a token list whose first token is
+.BR '{' 
+with
+\fIpthread_cleanup_pop\fR()
+expanding to a token list whose last token is the corresponding
+.BR '}' ).
+.P
+The effect of calling
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+or
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR()
+is undefined if there have been any calls to
+\fIpthread_cleanup_push\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cleanup_pop\fR()
+made without the matching call since the jump buffer was filled. The
+effect of calling
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+or
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR()
+from inside a cancellation cleanup handler is also undefined unless the
+jump buffer was also filled in the cancellation cleanup handler.
+.P
+The effect of the use of
+.BR return ,
+.BR break ,
+.BR continue ,
+and
+.BR goto
+to prematurely leave a code block described by a pair of
+\fIpthread_cleanup_push\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_cleanup_pop\fR()
+functions calls is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIpthread_cleanup_push\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_cleanup_pop\fR()
+functions shall not return a value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following is an example using thread primitives to implement a
+cancelable, writers-priority read-write lock:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+typedef struct {
+    pthread_mutex_t lock;
+    pthread_cond_t rcond,
+        wcond;
+    int lock_count; /* < 0 .. Held by writer. */
+                    /* > 0 .. Held by lock_count readers. */
+                    /* = 0 .. Held by nobody. */
+    int waiting_writers; /* Count of waiting writers. */
+} rwlock;
+.P
+void
+waiting_reader_cleanup(void *arg)
+{
+    rwlock *l;
+.P
+    l = (rwlock *) arg;
+    pthread_mutex_unlock(&l->lock);
+}
+.P
+void
+lock_for_read(rwlock *l)
+{
+    pthread_mutex_lock(&l->lock);
+    pthread_cleanup_push(waiting_reader_cleanup, l);
+    while ((l->lock_count < 0) || (l->waiting_writers != 0))
+        pthread_cond_wait(&l->rcond, &l->lock);
+    l->lock_count++;
+   /*
+    * Note the pthread_cleanup_pop executes
+    * waiting_reader_cleanup.
+    */
+    pthread_cleanup_pop(1);
+}
+.P
+void
+release_read_lock(rwlock *l)
+{
+    pthread_mutex_lock(&l->lock);
+    if (-\|-l->lock_count == 0)
+        pthread_cond_signal(&l->wcond);
+    pthread_mutex_unlock(&l->lock);
+}
+.P
+void
+waiting_writer_cleanup(void *arg)
+{
+    rwlock *l;
+.P
+    l = (rwlock *) arg;
+    if ((-\|-l->waiting_writers == 0) && (l->lock_count >= 0)) {
+       /*
+        * This only happens if we have been canceled. If the
+        * lock is not held by a writer, there may be readers who
+        * were blocked because waiting_writers was positive; they
+        * can now be unblocked.
+        */
+        pthread_cond_broadcast(&l->rcond);
+    }
+    pthread_mutex_unlock(&l->lock);
+}
+.P
+void
+lock_for_write(rwlock *l)
+{
+    pthread_mutex_lock(&l->lock);
+    l->waiting_writers++;
+    pthread_cleanup_push(waiting_writer_cleanup, l);
+    while (l->lock_count != 0)
+        pthread_cond_wait(&l->wcond, &l->lock);
+    l->lock_count = \(mi1;
+   /*
+    * Note the pthread_cleanup_pop executes
+    * waiting_writer_cleanup.
+    */
+    pthread_cleanup_pop(1);
+}
+.P
+void
+release_write_lock(rwlock *l)
+{
+    pthread_mutex_lock(&l->lock);
+    l->lock_count = 0;
+    if (l->waiting_writers == 0)
+        pthread_cond_broadcast(&l->rcond);
+    else
+        pthread_cond_signal(&l->wcond);
+    pthread_mutex_unlock(&l->lock);
+}
+.P
+/*
+ * This function is called to initialize the read/write lock.
+ */
+void
+initialize_rwlock(rwlock *l)
+{
+    pthread_mutex_init(&l->lock, pthread_mutexattr_default);
+    pthread_cond_init(&l->wcond, pthread_condattr_default);
+    pthread_cond_init(&l->rcond, pthread_condattr_default);
+    l->lock_count = 0;
+    l->waiting_writers = 0;
+}
+.P
+reader_thread()
+{
+    lock_for_read(&lock);
+    pthread_cleanup_push(release_read_lock, &lock);
+   /*
+    * Thread has read lock.
+    */
+    pthread_cleanup_pop(1);
+}
+.P
+writer_thread()
+{
+    lock_for_write(&lock);
+    pthread_cleanup_push(release_write_lock, &lock);
+   /*
+    * Thread has write lock.
+    */
+pthread_cleanup_pop(1);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The two routines that push and pop cancellation cleanup handlers,
+\fIpthread_cleanup_push\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_cleanup_pop\fR(),
+can be thought of as left and right-parentheses. They always need to
+be matched.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The restriction that the two routines that push and pop
+cancellation cleanup handlers,
+\fIpthread_cleanup_push\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_cleanup_pop\fR(),
+have to appear in the same lexical scope allows for efficient macro or
+compiler implementations and efficient storage management. A sample
+implementation of these routines as macros might look like this:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#define pthread_cleanup_push(rtn,arg) { \e
+    struct _pthread_handler_rec __cleanup_handler, **__head; \e
+    __cleanup_handler.rtn = rtn; \e
+    __cleanup_handler.arg = arg; \e
+    (void) pthread_getspecific(_pthread_handler_key, &__head); \e
+    __cleanup_handler.next = *__head; \e
+    *__head = &__cleanup_handler;
+.P
+#define pthread_cleanup_pop(ex) \e
+    *__head = __cleanup_handler.next; \e
+    if (ex) (*__cleanup_handler.rtn)(__cleanup_handler.arg); \e
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+A more ambitious implementation of these routines might do even better
+by allowing the compiler to note that the
+cancellation cleanup handler is a constant and can be expanded inline.
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 currently leaves unspecified the effect of calling
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+from a signal handler executing in a POSIX System Interfaces function.
+If an implementation wants to allow this and give the programmer
+reasonable behavior, the
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+function has to call all cancellation cleanup handlers that have been
+pushed but not popped since the time
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+was called.
+.P
+Consider a multi-threaded function called by a thread that uses
+signals. If a signal were delivered to a signal handler during the
+operation of
+\fIqsort\fR()
+and that handler were to call
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+(which, in turn, did
+.IR not
+call the cancellation cleanup handlers) the helper threads created by
+the
+\fIqsort\fR()
+function would not be canceled. Instead, they would continue to execute
+and write into the argument array even though the array might have been
+popped off the stack.
+.P
+Note that the specified cleanup handling mechanism is especially tied
+to the C language and, while the requirement for a uniform mechanism
+for expressing cleanup is language-independent, the mechanism used in
+other languages may be quite different. In addition, this mechanism is
+really only necessary due to the lack of a real exception mechanism in
+the C language, which would be the ideal solution.
+.P
+There is no notion of a cancellation cleanup-safe function. If an
+application has no cancellation points in its signal handlers, blocks
+any signal whose handler may have cancellation points while calling
+async-unsafe functions, or disables cancellation while calling
+async-unsafe functions, all functions may be safely called from
+cancellation cleanup routines.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_cancel\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_setcancelstate\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_cond_broadcast.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_cond_broadcast.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dd92468
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_cond_broadcast.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,238 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_COND_BROADCAST "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_cond_broadcast,
+pthread_cond_signal
+\(em broadcast or signal a condition
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_cond_broadcast(pthread_cond_t *\fIcond\fP);
+int pthread_cond_signal(pthread_cond_t *\fIcond\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These functions shall unblock threads blocked on a condition variable.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_cond_broadcast\fR()
+function shall unblock all threads currently blocked on the specified
+condition variable
+.IR cond .
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_cond_signal\fR()
+function shall unblock at least one of the threads that are blocked
+on the specified condition variable
+.IR cond
+(if any threads are blocked on
+.IR cond ).
+.P
+If more than one thread is blocked on a condition variable, the
+scheduling policy shall determine the order in which threads are
+unblocked. When each thread unblocked as a result of a
+\fIpthread_cond_broadcast\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_signal\fR()
+returns from its call to
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR(),
+the thread shall own the mutex with which it called
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR().
+The thread(s) that are unblocked shall contend for the mutex according
+to the scheduling policy (if applicable), and as if each had called
+\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_cond_broadcast\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_signal\fR()
+functions may be called by a thread whether or not it currently owns
+the mutex that threads calling
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+have associated with the condition variable during their waits;
+however, if predictable scheduling behavior is required, then that
+mutex shall be locked by the thread calling
+\fIpthread_cond_broadcast\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_signal\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_cond_broadcast\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_cond_signal\fR()
+functions shall have no effect if there are no threads currently
+blocked on
+.IR cond .
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR cond
+argument to
+\fIpthread_cond_broadcast\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_signal\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized condition variable.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_cond_broadcast\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_cond_signal\fR()
+functions shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIpthread_cond_broadcast\fR()
+function is used whenever the shared-variable state has been changed in
+a way that more than one thread can proceed with its task. Consider a
+single producer/multiple consumer problem, where the producer can
+insert multiple items on a list that is accessed one item at a time by
+the consumers. By calling the
+\fIpthread_cond_broadcast\fR()
+function, the producer would notify all consumers that might be
+waiting, and thereby the application would receive more throughput on a
+multi-processor. In addition,
+\fIpthread_cond_broadcast\fR()
+makes it easier to implement a read-write lock. The
+\fIpthread_cond_broadcast\fR()
+function is needed in order to wake up all waiting readers when a
+writer releases its lock. Finally, the two-phase commit algorithm can
+use this broadcast function to notify all clients of an impending
+transaction commit.
+.P
+It is not safe to use the
+\fIpthread_cond_signal\fR()
+function in a signal handler that is invoked asynchronously. Even if
+it were safe, there would still be a race between the test of the
+Boolean
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR()
+that could not be efficiently eliminated.
+.P
+Mutexes and condition variables are thus not suitable for releasing a
+waiting thread by signaling from code running in a signal handler.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR cond
+argument to
+\fIpthread_cond_broadcast\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_signal\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized condition variable, it is recommended
+that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SS "Multiple Awakenings by Condition Signal"
+.P
+On a multi-processor, it may be impossible for an implementation of
+\fIpthread_cond_signal\fR()
+to avoid the unblocking of more than one thread blocked on a condition
+variable. For example, consider the following partial implementation
+of
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_cond_signal\fR(),
+executed by two threads in the order given. One thread is trying to
+wait on the condition variable, another is concurrently executing
+\fIpthread_cond_signal\fR(),
+while a third thread is already waiting.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+pthread_cond_wait(mutex, cond):
+    value = cond->value; /* 1 */
+    pthread_mutex_unlock(mutex); /* 2 */
+    pthread_mutex_lock(cond->mutex); /* 10 */
+    if (value == cond->value) { /* 11 */
+        me->next_cond = cond->waiter;
+        cond->waiter = me;
+        pthread_mutex_unlock(cond->mutex);
+        unable_to_run(me);
+    } else
+        pthread_mutex_unlock(cond->mutex); /* 12 */
+    pthread_mutex_lock(mutex); /* 13 */
+.P
+pthread_cond_signal(cond):
+    pthread_mutex_lock(cond->mutex); /* 3 */
+    cond->value++; /* 4 */
+    if (cond->waiter) { /* 5 */
+        sleeper = cond->waiter; /* 6 */
+        cond->waiter = sleeper->next_cond; /* 7 */
+        able_to_run(sleeper); /* 8 */
+    }
+    pthread_mutex_unlock(cond->mutex); /* 9 */
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The effect is that more than one thread can return from its call to
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+as a result of one call to
+\fIpthread_cond_signal\fR().
+This effect is called ``spurious wakeup''.
+Note that the situation is self-correcting in that the number of
+threads that are so awakened is finite; for example, the next thread to
+call
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR()
+after the sequence of events above blocks.
+.P
+While this problem could be resolved, the loss of efficiency for a
+fringe condition that occurs only rarely is unacceptable, especially
+given that one has to check the predicate associated with a condition
+variable anyway. Correcting this problem would unnecessarily reduce
+the degree of concurrency in this basic building block for all
+higher-level synchronization operations.
+.P
+An added benefit of allowing spurious wakeups is that applications are
+forced to code a predicate-testing-loop around the condition wait.
+This also makes the application tolerate superfluous condition
+broadcasts or signals on the same condition variable that may be coded
+in some other part of the application. The resulting applications are
+thus more robust. Therefore, POSIX.1\(hy2008 explicitly documents that
+spurious wakeups may occur.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_cond_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.11" ", " "Memory Synchronization",
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_cond_destroy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_cond_destroy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ec8e263
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_cond_destroy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,236 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_COND_DESTROY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_cond_destroy,
+pthread_cond_init
+\(em destroy and initialize condition variables
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_cond_destroy(pthread_cond_t *\fIcond\fP);
+int pthread_cond_init(pthread_cond_t *restrict \fIcond\fP,
+    const pthread_condattr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP);
+pthread_cond_t \fIcond\fP = PTHREAD_COND_INITIALIZER;
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_cond_destroy\fR()
+function shall destroy the given condition variable specified by
+.IR cond ;
+the object becomes, in effect, uninitialized. An implementation may
+cause
+\fIpthread_cond_destroy\fR()
+to set the object referenced by
+.IR cond
+to an invalid value. A destroyed condition variable object can be
+reinitialized using
+\fIpthread_cond_init\fR();
+the results of otherwise referencing the object after it has been
+destroyed are undefined.
+.P
+It shall be safe to destroy an initialized condition variable upon which
+no threads are currently blocked. Attempting to destroy a condition
+variable upon which other threads are currently blocked results in
+undefined behavior.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_cond_init\fR()
+function shall initialize the condition variable referenced by
+.IR cond
+with attributes referenced by
+.IR attr .
+If
+.IR attr
+is NULL, the default condition variable attributes shall be used; the
+effect is the same as passing the address of a default condition
+variable attributes object. Upon successful initialization, the state
+of the condition variable shall become initialized.
+.P
+Only
+.IR cond
+itself may be used for performing synchronization. The result of
+referring to copies of
+.IR cond
+in calls to
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR(),
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR(),
+\fIpthread_cond_signal\fR(),
+\fIpthread_cond_broadcast\fR(),
+and
+\fIpthread_cond_destroy\fR()
+is undefined.
+.P
+Attempting to initialize an already initialized condition variable
+results in undefined behavior.
+.P
+In cases where default condition variable attributes are appropriate,
+the macro PTHREAD_COND_INITIALIZER can be used to initialize condition
+variables. The effect shall be equivalent to dynamic initialization by
+a call to
+\fIpthread_cond_init\fR()
+with parameter
+.IR attr
+specified as NULL, except that no error checks are performed.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR cond
+argument to
+\fIpthread_cond_destroy\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized condition variable.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_cond_init\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized condition variable attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_cond_destroy\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_cond_init\fR()
+functions shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_cond_init\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The system lacked the necessary resources (other than memory) to
+initialize another condition variable.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory exists to initialize the condition variable.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+A condition variable can be destroyed immediately after all the threads
+that are blocked on it are awakened. For example, consider the
+following code:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+struct list {
+    pthread_mutex_t lm;
+    ...
+}
+.P
+struct elt {
+    key k;
+    int busy;
+    pthread_cond_t notbusy;
+    ...
+}
+.P
+/* Find a list element and reserve it. */
+struct elt *
+list_find(struct list *lp, key k)
+{
+    struct elt *ep;
+.P
+    pthread_mutex_lock(&lp->lm);
+    while ((ep = find_elt(l, k) != NULL) && ep->busy)
+        pthread_cond_wait(&ep->notbusy, &lp->lm);
+    if (ep != NULL)
+        ep->busy = 1;
+    pthread_mutex_unlock(&lp->lm);
+    return(ep);
+}
+.P
+delete_elt(struct list *lp, struct elt *ep)
+{
+    pthread_mutex_lock(&lp->lm);
+    assert(ep->busy);
+    ... remove ep from list ...
+    ep->busy = 0;  /* Paranoid. */
+(A) pthread_cond_broadcast(&ep->notbusy);
+    pthread_mutex_unlock(&lp->lm);
+(B) pthread_cond_destroy(&rp->notbusy);
+    free(ep);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In this example, the condition variable and its list element may be
+freed (line B) immediately after all threads waiting for it are
+awakened (line A), since the mutex and the code ensure that no other
+thread can touch the element to be deleted.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR cond
+argument to
+\fIpthread_cond_destroy\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized condition variable, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR cond
+argument to
+\fIpthread_cond_destroy\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_init\fR()
+refers to a condition variable that is in use (for example, in a
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR()
+call) by another thread, or detects that the value specified by the
+.IR cond
+argument to
+\fIpthread_cond_init\fR()
+refers to an already initialized condition variable, it is recommended
+that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EBUSY] 
+error.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_cond_init\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized condition variable attributes object,
+it is recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.P
+See also
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_cond_broadcast\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_cond_signal.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_cond_signal.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c9af451
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_cond_signal.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_COND_SIGNAL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_cond_signal
+\(em signal a condition
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_cond_signal(pthread_cond_t *\fIcond\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_cond_broadcast\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_cond_timedwait.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_cond_timedwait.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8dc4ba4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_cond_timedwait.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,459 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_COND_TIMEDWAIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_cond_timedwait,
+pthread_cond_wait
+\(em wait on a condition
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_cond_timedwait(pthread_cond_t *restrict \fIcond\fP,
+    pthread_mutex_t *restrict \fImutex\fP,
+    const struct timespec *restrict \fIabstime\fP);
+int pthread_cond_wait(pthread_cond_t *restrict \fIcond\fP,
+    pthread_mutex_t *restrict \fImutex\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR()
+functions shall block on a condition variable. The application shall
+ensure that these functions are called with
+.IR mutex
+locked by the calling thread; otherwise, an error (for
+PTHREAD_MUTEX_ERRORCHECK and robust mutexes) or undefined behavior
+(for other mutexes) results.
+.P
+These functions atomically release
+.IR mutex
+and cause the calling thread to block on the condition variable
+.IR cond ;
+atomically here means ``atomically with respect to access by another
+thread to the mutex and then the condition variable''. That is, if
+another thread is able to acquire the mutex after the about-to-block
+thread has released it, then a subsequent call to
+\fIpthread_cond_broadcast\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_signal\fR()
+in that thread shall behave as if it were issued after the
+about-to-block thread has blocked.
+.P
+Upon successful return, the mutex shall have been locked and shall be
+owned by the calling thread. If
+.IR mutex
+is a robust mutex where an owner terminated while holding the lock and
+the state is recoverable, the mutex shall be acquired even though the
+function returns an error code.
+.P
+When using condition variables there is always a Boolean predicate
+involving shared variables associated with each condition wait that is
+true if the thread should proceed. Spurious wakeups from the
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR()
+functions may occur. Since the return from
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR()
+does not imply anything about the value of this predicate, the
+predicate should be re-evaluated upon such return.
+.P
+When a thread waits on a condition variable, having specified a
+particular mutex to either the
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+or the
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR()
+operation, a dynamic binding is formed between that mutex and condition
+variable that remains in effect as long as at least one thread is
+blocked on the condition variable. During this time, the effect of an
+attempt by any thread to wait on that condition variable using a
+different mutex is undefined. Once all waiting threads have been
+unblocked (as by the
+\fIpthread_cond_broadcast\fR()
+operation), the next wait operation on that condition variable shall
+form a new dynamic binding with the mutex specified by that wait
+operation. Even though the dynamic binding between condition variable
+and mutex may be removed or replaced between the time a thread is
+unblocked from a wait on the condition variable and the time that it
+returns to the caller or begins cancellation cleanup, the unblocked
+thread shall always re-acquire the mutex specified in the condition
+wait operation call from which it is returning.
+.P
+A condition wait (whether timed or not) is a cancellation point. When
+the cancelability type of a thread is set to PTHREAD_CANCEL_DEFERRED,
+a side-effect of acting upon a cancellation request while in a
+condition wait is that the mutex is (in effect) re-acquired before
+calling the first cancellation cleanup handler. The effect is as if
+the thread were unblocked, allowed to execute up to the point of
+returning from the call to
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR(),
+but at that point notices the cancellation request and instead of
+returning to the caller of
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR(),
+starts the thread cancellation activities, which includes calling
+cancellation cleanup handlers.
+.P
+A thread that has been unblocked because it has been canceled while
+blocked in a call to
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR()
+shall not consume any condition signal that may be directed concurrently
+at the condition variable if there are other threads blocked on the
+condition variable.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR(),
+except that an error is returned if the absolute time specified by
+.IR abstime
+passes (that is, system time equals or exceeds
+.IR abstime )
+before the condition
+.IR cond
+is signaled or broadcasted, or if the absolute time specified by
+.IR abstime
+has already been passed at the time of the call. When such timeouts
+occur,
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+shall nonetheless release and re-acquire the mutex referenced by
+.IR mutex ,
+and may consume a condition signal directed concurrently at the condition
+variable.
+.P
+The condition variable shall have a clock attribute which specifies
+the clock that shall be used to measure the time specified by the
+.IR abstime
+argument. The
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+function is also a cancellation point.
+.P
+If a signal is delivered to a thread waiting for a condition variable,
+upon return from the signal handler the thread resumes waiting for the
+condition variable as if it was not interrupted, or it shall return
+zero due to spurious wakeup.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR cond
+or
+.IR mutex
+argument to these functions does not refer to an initialized
+condition variable or an initialized mutex object, respectively.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Except in the case of
+.BR [ETIMEDOUT] ,
+all these error checks shall act as if they were performed immediately
+at the beginning of processing for the function and shall cause an
+error return, in effect, prior to modifying the state of the mutex
+specified by
+.IR mutex
+or the condition variable specified by
+.IR cond .
+.P
+Upon successful completion, a value of zero shall be returned; otherwise,
+an error number shall be returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOTRECOVERABLE
+.br
+The state protected by the mutex is not recoverable.
+.TP
+.BR EOWNERDEAD
+.br
+The mutex is a robust mutex and the process containing the previous
+owning thread terminated while holding the mutex lock. The mutex lock
+shall be acquired by the calling thread and it is up to the new owner
+to make the state consistent.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The mutex type is PTHREAD_MUTEX_ERRORCHECK or the mutex
+is a robust mutex, and the current thread does not own the mutex.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ETIMEDOUT
+The time specified by
+.IR abstime
+to
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+has passed.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR abstime
+argument specified a nanosecond value less than zero or greater than
+or equal to 1000 million.
+.br
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EOWNERDEAD
+.br
+The mutex is a robust mutex and the previous owning thread terminated
+while holding the mutex lock. The mutex lock shall be acquired by the
+calling thread and it is up to the new owner to make the state consistent.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications that have assumed that non-zero return values are errors
+will need updating for use with robust mutexes, since a valid return
+for a thread acquiring a mutex which is protecting a currently
+inconsistent state is
+.BR [EOWNERDEAD] .
+Applications that do not check the error returns, due to ruling out the
+possibility of such errors arising, should not use robust mutexes. If
+an application is supposed to work with normal and robust mutexes, it
+should check all return values for error conditions and if necessary
+take appropriate action.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR cond
+argument to
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized condition variable, or detects that
+the value specified by the
+.IR mutex
+argument to
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized mutex object, it is recommended
+that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SS "Condition Wait Semantics"
+.P
+It is important to note that when
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+return without error, the associated predicate may still be false.
+Similarly, when
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+returns with the timeout error, the associated predicate may be true
+due to an unavoidable race between the expiration of the timeout and
+the predicate state change.
+.P
+The application needs to recheck the predicate on any return because it
+cannot be sure there is another thread waiting on the thread to handle
+the signal, and if there is not then the signal is lost. The burden is
+on the application to check the predicate.
+.P
+Some implementations, particularly on a multi-processor, may sometimes
+cause multiple threads to wake up when the condition variable is
+signaled simultaneously on different processors.
+.P
+In general, whenever a condition wait returns, the thread has to
+re-evaluate the predicate associated with the condition wait to
+determine whether it can safely proceed, should wait again, or should
+declare a timeout. A return from the wait does not imply that the
+associated predicate is either true or false.
+.P
+It is thus recommended that a condition wait be enclosed in the
+equivalent of a ``while loop'' that checks the predicate.
+.SS "Timed Wait Semantics"
+.P
+An absolute time measure was chosen for specifying the timeout
+parameter for two reasons. First, a relative time measure can be
+easily implemented on top of a function that specifies absolute time,
+but there is a race condition associated with specifying an absolute
+timeout on top of a function that specifies relative timeouts. For
+example, assume that
+\fIclock_gettime\fR()
+returns the current time and
+\fIcond_relative_timed_wait\fR()
+uses relative timeouts:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+clock_gettime(CLOCK_REALTIME, &now)
+reltime = sleep_til_this_absolute_time -now;
+cond_relative_timed_wait(c, m, &reltime);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the thread is preempted between the first statement and the last
+statement,
+the thread blocks for too long. Blocking, however, is irrelevant if an
+absolute timeout is used. An absolute timeout also need not be
+recomputed if it is used multiple times in a loop, such as that
+enclosing a condition wait.
+.P
+For cases when the system clock is advanced discontinuously by an
+operator, it is expected that implementations process any timed wait
+expiring at an intervening time as if that time had actually occurred.
+.SS "Cancellation and Condition Wait"
+.P
+A condition wait, whether timed or not, is a cancellation point. That
+is, the functions
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+are points where a pending (or concurrent) cancellation request is
+noticed. The reason for this is that an indefinite wait is possible at
+these points\(emwhatever event is being waited for, even if the program
+is totally correct, might never occur; for example, some input data
+being awaited might never be sent. By making condition wait a
+cancellation point, the thread can be canceled and perform its
+cancellation cleanup handler even though it may be stuck in some
+indefinite wait.
+.P
+A side-effect of acting on a cancellation request while a thread is
+blocked on a condition variable is to re-acquire the mutex before
+calling any of the cancellation cleanup handlers. This is done in order
+to ensure that the cancellation cleanup handler is executed in the same
+state as the critical code that lies both before and after the call to
+the condition wait function. This rule is also required when
+interfacing to POSIX threads from languages, such as Ada or C++, which
+may choose to map cancellation onto a language exception; this rule
+ensures that each exception handler guarding a critical section can
+always safely depend upon the fact that the associated mutex has
+already been locked regardless of exactly where within the critical
+section the exception was raised. Without this rule, there would not be
+a uniform rule that exception handlers could follow regarding the lock,
+and so coding would become very cumbersome.
+.P
+Therefore, since
+.IR some
+statement has to be made regarding the state of the lock when a
+cancellation is delivered during a wait, a definition has been chosen
+that makes application coding most convenient and error free.
+.P
+When acting on a cancellation request while a thread is blocked on a
+condition variable, the implementation is required to ensure that the
+thread does not consume any condition signals directed at that
+condition variable if there are any other threads waiting on that
+condition variable. This rule is specified in order to avoid deadlock
+conditions that could occur if these two independent requests (one
+acting on a thread and the other acting on the condition variable) were
+not processed independently.
+.SS "Performance of Mutexes and Condition Variables"
+.P
+Mutexes are expected to be locked only for a few instructions. This
+practice is almost automatically enforced by the desire of programmers
+to avoid long serial regions of execution (which would reduce total
+effective parallelism).
+.P
+When using mutexes and condition variables, one tries to ensure that
+the usual case is to lock the mutex, access shared data, and unlock the
+mutex. Waiting on a condition variable should be a relatively rare
+situation. For example, when implementing a read-write lock, code
+that acquires a read-lock typically needs only to increment the count
+of readers (under mutual-exclusion) and return. The calling thread
+would actually wait on the condition variable only when there is
+already an active writer. So the efficiency of a synchronization
+operation is bounded by the cost of mutex lock/unlock and not by
+condition wait. Note that in the usual case there is no context
+switch.
+.P
+This is not to say that the efficiency of condition waiting is
+unimportant. Since there needs to be at least one context switch per
+Ada rendezvous, the efficiency of waiting on a condition variable is
+important. The cost of waiting on a condition variable should be
+little more than the minimal cost for a context switch plus the time to
+unlock and lock the mutex.
+.SS "Features of Mutexes and Condition Variables"
+.P
+It had been suggested that the mutex acquisition and release be
+decoupled from condition wait. This was rejected because it is the
+combined nature of the operation that, in fact, facilitates realtime
+implementations. Those implementations can atomically move a
+high-priority thread between the condition variable and the mutex in a
+manner that is transparent to the caller. This can prevent extra
+context switches and provide more deterministic acquisition of a mutex
+when the waiting thread is signaled. Thus, fairness and priority
+issues can be dealt with directly by the scheduling discipline.
+Furthermore, the current condition wait operation matches existing
+practice.
+.SS "Scheduling Behavior of Mutexes and Condition Variables"
+.P
+Synchronization primitives that attempt to interfere with scheduling
+policy by specifying an ordering rule are considered undesirable.
+Threads waiting on mutexes and condition variables are selected to
+proceed in an order dependent upon the scheduling policy rather than in
+some fixed order (for example, FIFO or priority). Thus, the scheduling
+policy determines which thread(s) are awakened and allowed to proceed.
+.SS "Timed Condition Wait"
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+function allows an application to give up waiting for a particular
+condition after a given amount of time. An example of its use
+follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(void) pthread_mutex_lock(&t.mn);
+    t.waiters++;
+    clock_gettime(CLOCK_REALTIME, &ts);
+    ts.tv_sec += 5;
+    rc = 0;
+    while (! mypredicate(&t) && rc == 0)
+        rc = pthread_cond_timedwait(&t.cond, &t.mn, &ts);
+    t.waiters-\|-;
+    if (rc == 0 || mypredicate(&t))
+        setmystate(&t);
+(void) pthread_mutex_unlock(&t.mn);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+By making the timeout parameter absolute, it does not need to be
+recomputed each time the program checks its blocking predicate. If the
+timeout was relative, it would have to be recomputed before each call.
+This would be especially difficult since such code would need to take
+into account the possibility of extra wakeups that result from extra
+broadcasts or signals on the condition variable that occur before
+either the predicate is true or the timeout is due.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_cond_broadcast\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.11" ", " "Memory Synchronization",
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_condattr_destroy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_condattr_destroy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ff58ec9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_condattr_destroy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_CONDATTR_DESTROY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_condattr_destroy,
+pthread_condattr_init
+\(em destroy and initialize the condition variable attributes object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_condattr_destroy(pthread_condattr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+int pthread_condattr_init(pthread_condattr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_condattr_destroy\fR()
+function shall destroy a condition variable attributes object; the
+object becomes, in effect, uninitialized. An implementation may cause
+\fIpthread_condattr_destroy\fR()
+to set the object referenced by
+.IR attr
+to an invalid value. A destroyed
+.IR attr
+attributes object can be reinitialized using
+\fIpthread_condattr_init\fR();
+the results of otherwise referencing the object after it
+has been destroyed are undefined.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_condattr_init\fR()
+function shall initialize a condition variable attributes object
+.IR attr
+with the default value for all of the attributes defined by the
+implementation.
+.P
+Results are undefined if
+\fIpthread_condattr_init\fR()
+is called specifying an already initialized
+.IR attr
+attributes object.
+.P
+After a condition variable attributes object has been used to
+initialize one or more condition variables, any function affecting the
+attributes object (including destruction) shall not affect any
+previously initialized condition variables.
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires two attributes, the
+.IR clock
+attribute and the
+.IR process-shared
+attribute.
+.P
+Additional attributes, their default values, and the names of the
+associated functions to get and set those attribute values are
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_condattr_destroy\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized condition variable attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_condattr_destroy\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_condattr_init\fR()
+functions shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_condattr_init\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory exists to initialize the condition variable
+attributes object.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+A
+.IR process-shared
+attribute has been defined for condition variables for the same reason
+it has been defined for mutexes.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_condattr_destroy\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized condition variable attributes object,
+it is recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.P
+See also
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_destroy\fR\^(\|)"
+and
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_cond_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_condattr_getpshared\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_condattr_getclock.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_condattr_getclock.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..40d71ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_condattr_getclock.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_CONDATTR_GETCLOCK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_condattr_getclock,
+pthread_condattr_setclock
+\(em get and set the clock selection condition variable attribute
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_condattr_getclock(const pthread_condattr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    clockid_t *restrict \fIclock_id\fP);
+int pthread_condattr_setclock(pthread_condattr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    clockid_t \fIclock_id\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_condattr_getclock\fR()
+function shall obtain the value of the
+.IR clock
+attribute from the attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_condattr_setclock\fR()
+function shall set the
+.IR clock
+attribute in an initialized attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+If
+\fIpthread_condattr_setclock\fR()
+is called with a
+.IR clock_id
+argument that refers to a CPU-time clock, the call shall fail.
+.P
+The
+.IR clock
+attribute is the clock ID of the clock that shall be used to
+measure the timeout service of
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR().
+The default value of the
+.IR clock
+attribute shall refer to the system clock.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_condattr_getclock\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_condattr_setclock\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized condition variable attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_condattr_getclock\fR()
+function shall return zero and store the value of the clock attribute
+of
+.IR attr
+into the object referenced by the
+.IR clock_id
+argument. Otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate the
+error.
+.P
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_condattr_setclock\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_condattr_setclock\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value specified by
+.IR clock_id
+does not refer to a known clock, or is a CPU-time clock.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_condattr_getclock\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_condattr_setclock\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized condition variable attributes object,
+it is recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_cond_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_condattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_condattr_getpshared\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_condattr_getpshared.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_condattr_getpshared.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9fa1907
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_condattr_getpshared.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_CONDATTR_GETPSHARED "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_condattr_getpshared,
+pthread_condattr_setpshared
+\(em get and set the process-shared condition variable attributes
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_condattr_getpshared(const pthread_condattr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    int *restrict \fIpshared\fP);
+int pthread_condattr_setpshared(pthread_condattr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIpshared\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_condattr_getpshared\fR()
+function shall obtain the value of the
+.IR process-shared
+attribute from the attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_condattr_setpshared\fR()
+function shall set the
+.IR process-shared
+attribute in an initialized attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+.P
+The
+.IR process-shared
+attribute is set to PTHREAD_PROCESS_SHARED
+to permit a condition variable to be operated upon by any thread that
+has access to the memory where the condition variable is allocated,
+even if the condition variable is allocated in memory that is shared by
+multiple processes. If the
+.IR process-shared
+attribute is PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE, the condition variable
+shall only be operated upon by threads created within the same process
+as the thread that initialized the condition variable; if threads of
+differing processes attempt to operate on such a condition variable,
+the behavior is undefined. The default value of the attribute is
+PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_condattr_getpshared\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_condattr_setpshared\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized condition variable attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_condattr_setpshared\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.P
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_condattr_getpshared\fR()
+function shall return zero and store the value of the
+.IR process-shared
+attribute of
+.IR attr
+into the object referenced by the
+.IR pshared
+parameter. Otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate the
+error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_condattr_setpshared\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The new value specified for the attribute is outside the range of legal
+values for that attribute.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_condattr_getpshared\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_condattr_setpshared\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized condition variable attributes object,
+it is recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_cond_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_condattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_condattr_init.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_condattr_init.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a6d63fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_condattr_init.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_CONDATTR_INIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_condattr_init
+\(em initialize the condition variable attributes object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_condattr_init(pthread_condattr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_condattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_condattr_setclock.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_condattr_setclock.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b68bbc0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_condattr_setclock.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_CONDATTR_SETCLOCK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_condattr_setclock
+\(em set the clock selection condition variable attribute
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_condattr_setclock(pthread_condattr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    clockid_t \fIclock_id\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_condattr_getclock\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_condattr_setpshared.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_condattr_setpshared.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c2f85a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_condattr_setpshared.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_CONDATTR_SETPSHARED "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_condattr_setpshared
+\(em set the process-shared condition variable attribute
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_condattr_setpshared(pthread_condattr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIpshared\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_condattr_getpshared\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_create.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_create.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..69bec24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_create.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,234 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_CREATE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_create
+\(em thread creation
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_create(pthread_t *restrict \fIthread\fP,
+    const pthread_attr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    void *(*\fIstart_routine\fP)(void*), void *restrict \fIarg\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_create\fR()
+function shall create a new thread, with attributes specified by
+.IR attr ,
+within a process. If
+.IR attr
+is NULL, the default attributes shall be used. If the attributes
+specified by
+.IR attr
+are modified later, the thread's attributes shall not be affected.
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIpthread_create\fR()
+shall store the ID of the created thread in the location referenced by
+.IR thread .
+.P
+The thread is created executing
+.IR start_routine
+with
+.IR arg
+as its sole argument. If the
+.IR start_routine
+returns, the effect shall be as if there was an implicit call to
+\fIpthread_exit\fR()
+using the return value of
+.IR start_routine
+as the exit status. Note that the thread in which
+\fImain\fR()
+was originally invoked differs from this. When it returns from
+\fImain\fR(),
+the effect shall be as if there was an implicit call to
+\fIexit\fR()
+using the return value of
+\fImain\fR()
+as the exit status.
+.P
+The signal state of the new thread shall be initialized as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+The signal mask shall be inherited from the creating thread.
+.IP " *" 4
+The set of signals pending for the new thread shall be empty.
+.P
+The thread-local current locale
+and the alternate stack
+shall not be inherited.
+.P
+The floating-point environment shall be inherited from the creating
+thread.
+.P
+If
+\fIpthread_create\fR()
+fails, no new thread is created and the contents of the location
+referenced by
+.IR thread
+are undefined.
+.P
+If _POSIX_THREAD_CPUTIME is defined, the new thread shall have a
+CPU-time clock accessible, and the initial value of this clock shall
+be set to zero.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_create\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized thread attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_create\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_create\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The system lacked the necessary resources to create another thread, or
+the system-imposed limit on the total number of threads in a process
+{PTHREAD_THREADS_MAX}
+would be exceeded.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The caller does not have appropriate privileges to set the required
+scheduling parameters or scheduling policy.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_create\fR()
+function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+There is no requirement on the implementation that the ID of the
+created thread be available before the newly created thread starts
+executing. The calling thread can obtain the ID of the created thread
+through the return value of the
+\fIpthread_create\fR()
+function, and the newly created thread can obtain its ID by a call to
+\fIpthread_self\fR().
+.SH RATIONALE
+A suggested alternative to
+\fIpthread_create\fR()
+would be to define two separate operations: create and start. Some
+applications would find such behavior more natural. Ada, in
+particular, separates the ``creation'' of a task from its
+``activation''.
+.P
+Splitting the operation was rejected by the standard developers for
+many reasons:
+.IP " *" 4
+The number of calls required to start a thread would increase from one
+to two and thus place an additional burden on applications that do not
+require the additional synchronization. The second call, however,
+could be avoided by the additional complication of a start-up state
+attribute.
+.IP " *" 4
+An extra state would be introduced: ``created but not started''. This
+would require the standard to specify the behavior of the thread
+operations when the target has not yet started executing.
+.IP " *" 4
+For those applications that require such behavior, it is possible to
+simulate the two separate steps with the facilities that are currently
+provided. The
+\fIstart_routine\fR()
+can synchronize by waiting on a condition variable that is signaled by
+the start operation.
+.P
+An Ada implementor can choose to create the thread at either of two
+points in the Ada program: when the task object is created, or when
+the task is activated (generally at a ``begin''). If the first
+approach is adopted, the
+\fIstart_routine\fR()
+needs to wait on a condition variable to receive the order to begin
+``activation''. The second approach requires no such condition
+variable or extra synchronization. In either approach, a separate Ada
+task control block would need to be created when the task object is
+created to hold rendezvous queues, and so on.
+.P
+An extension of the preceding model would be to allow the state of the
+thread to be modified between the create and start. This would allow
+the thread attributes object to be eliminated. This has been rejected
+because:
+.IP " *" 4
+All state in the thread attributes object has to be able to be set for
+the thread. This would require the definition of functions to modify
+thread attributes. There would be no reduction in the number of
+function calls required to set up the thread. In fact, for an
+application that creates all threads using identical attributes, the
+number of function calls required to set up the threads would be
+dramatically increased. Use of a thread attributes object permits the
+application to make one set of attribute setting function calls.
+Otherwise, the set of attribute setting function calls needs to be made
+for each thread creation.
+.IP " *" 4
+Depending on the implementation architecture, functions to set thread
+state would require kernel calls, or for other implementation reasons
+would not be able to be implemented as macros, thereby increasing the
+cost of thread creation.
+.IP " *" 4
+The ability for applications to segregate threads by class would be
+lost.
+.P
+Another suggested alternative uses a model similar to that for process
+creation, such as ``thread fork''. The fork semantics would provide
+more flexibility and the ``create'' function can be implemented simply
+by doing a thread fork followed immediately by a call to the desired
+``start routine'' for the thread. This alternative has these
+problems:
+.IP " *" 4
+For many implementations, the entire stack of the calling thread would
+need to be duplicated, since in many architectures there is no way to
+determine the size of the calling frame.
+.IP " *" 4
+Efficiency is reduced since at least some part of the stack has to be
+copied, even though in most cases the thread never needs the copied
+context, since it merely calls the desired start routine.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_create\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized thread attributes object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_exit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_join\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.11" ", " "Memory Synchronization",
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_detach.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_detach.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6d37157
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_detach.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_DETACH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_detach
+\(em detach a thread
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_detach(pthread_t \fIthread\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_detach\fR()
+function shall indicate to the implementation that storage for the
+thread
+.IR thread
+can be reclaimed when that thread terminates. If
+.IR thread
+has not terminated,
+\fIpthread_detach\fR()
+shall not cause it to terminate.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR thread
+argument to
+\fIpthread_detach\fR()
+does not refer to a joinable thread.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the call succeeds,
+\fIpthread_detach\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to
+indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_detach\fR()
+function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_detach\fR()
+functions should eventually be called for every thread that is created
+so that storage associated with the thread may be reclaimed.
+.P
+It has been suggested that a ``detach'' function is not necessary; the
+.IR detachstate
+thread creation attribute is sufficient, since a thread need never be
+dynamically detached. However, need arises in at least two cases:
+.IP " 1." 4
+In a cancellation handler for a
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+it is nearly essential to have a
+\fIpthread_detach\fR()
+function in order to detach the thread on which
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+was waiting. Without it, it would be necessary to have the handler do
+another
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+to attempt to detach the thread, which would both delay the cancellation
+processing for an unbounded period and introduce a new call to
+\fIpthread_join\fR(),
+which might itself need a cancellation handler. A dynamic detach is
+nearly essential in this case.
+.IP " 2." 4
+In order to detach the ``initial thread'' (as may be desirable in
+processes that set up server threads).
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR thread
+argument to
+\fIpthread_detach\fR()
+does not refer to a joinable thread, it is recommended that the
+function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.P
+If an implementation detects use of a thread ID after the end of its
+lifetime, it is recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [ESRCH] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_join\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_equal.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_equal.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a3ff5f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_equal.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_EQUAL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_equal
+\(em compare thread IDs
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_equal(pthread_t \fIt1\fP, pthread_t \fIt2\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This function shall compare the thread IDs
+.IR t1
+and
+.IR t2 .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIpthread_equal\fR()
+function shall return a non-zero value if
+.IR t1
+and
+.IR t2
+are equal; otherwise, zero shall be returned.
+.P
+If either
+.IR t1
+or
+.IR t2
+are not valid thread IDs, the behavior is undefined.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_equal\fR()
+function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Implementations may choose to define a
+thread ID as a structure. This allows additional flexibility and
+robustness over using an
+.BR int .
+For example, a thread ID could include a sequence number that allows
+detection of ``dangling IDs'' (copies of a thread ID that has been
+detached). Since the C language does not support comparison on
+structure types, the
+\fIpthread_equal\fR()
+function is provided to compare thread IDs.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_self\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_exit.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_exit.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..afad1a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_exit.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,127 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_EXIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_exit
+\(em thread termination
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+void pthread_exit(void *\fIvalue_ptr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_exit\fR()
+function shall terminate the calling thread and make the value
+.IR value_ptr
+available to any successful join with the terminating thread. Any
+cancellation cleanup handlers that have been pushed and not yet popped
+shall be popped in the reverse order that they were pushed and then
+executed. After all cancellation cleanup handlers have been executed,
+if the thread has any thread-specific data, appropriate destructor
+functions shall be called in an unspecified order. Thread termination
+does not release any application visible process resources, including,
+but not limited to, mutexes and file descriptors, nor does it perform
+any process-level cleanup actions, including, but not limited to,
+calling any
+\fIatexit\fR()
+routines that may exist.
+.P
+An implicit call to
+\fIpthread_exit\fR()
+is made when a thread other than the thread in which
+\fImain\fR()
+was first invoked returns from the start routine that was used to
+create it. The function's return value shall serve as the thread's
+exit status.
+.P
+The behavior of
+\fIpthread_exit\fR()
+is undefined if called from a cancellation cleanup handler or
+destructor function that was invoked as a result of either an implicit
+or explicit call to
+\fIpthread_exit\fR().
+.P
+After a thread has terminated, the result of access to local (auto)
+variables of the thread is undefined. Thus, references to local
+variables of the exiting thread should not be used for the
+\fIpthread_exit\fR()
+.IR value_ptr
+parameter value.
+.P
+The process shall exit with an exit status of 0 after the last thread
+has been terminated. The behavior shall be as if the implementation
+called
+\fIexit\fR()
+with a zero argument at thread termination time.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIpthread_exit\fR()
+function cannot return to its caller.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The normal mechanism by which a thread terminates is to return from the
+routine that was specified in the
+\fIpthread_create\fR()
+call that started it. The
+\fIpthread_exit\fR()
+function provides the capability for a thread to terminate without
+requiring a return from the start routine of that thread, thereby
+providing a function analogous to
+\fIexit\fR().
+.P
+Regardless of the method of thread termination, any
+cancellation cleanup handlers that have been pushed and not yet popped
+are executed, and the destructors for any existing thread-specific data
+are executed. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that cancellation cleanup handlers be
+popped and called in order. After all cancellation cleanup handlers have
+been executed, thread-specific data destructors are called, in an
+unspecified order, for each item of thread-specific data that exists in
+the thread. This ordering is necessary because cancellation cleanup
+handlers may rely on thread-specific data.
+.P
+As the meaning of the status is determined by the application (except
+when the thread has been canceled, in which case it is
+PTHREAD_CANCELED),
+the implementation has no idea what an illegal status value is, which
+is why no address error checking is done.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_join\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_getconcurrency.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_getconcurrency.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4a1c9bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_getconcurrency.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_GETCONCURRENCY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_getconcurrency,
+pthread_setconcurrency
+\(em get and set the level of concurrency
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_getconcurrency(void);
+int pthread_setconcurrency(int \fInew_level\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Unbound threads in a process may or may not be required to be
+simultaneously active. By default, the threads implementation ensures
+that a sufficient number of threads are active so that the process can
+continue to make progress. While this conserves system resources, it
+may not produce the most effective level of concurrency.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_setconcurrency\fR()
+function allows an application to inform the threads implementation of
+its desired concurrency level,
+.IR new_level .
+The actual level of concurrency provided by the implementation as a
+result of this function call is unspecified.
+.P
+If
+.IR new_level
+is zero, it causes the implementation to maintain the concurrency level
+at its discretion as if
+\fIpthread_setconcurrency\fR()
+had never been called.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_getconcurrency\fR()
+function shall return the value set by a previous call to the
+\fIpthread_setconcurrency\fR()
+function. If the
+\fIpthread_setconcurrency\fR()
+function was not previously called, this function shall return zero to
+indicate that the implementation is maintaining the concurrency level.
+.P
+A call to
+\fIpthread_setconcurrency\fR()
+shall inform the implementation of its desired concurrency level.
+The implementation shall use this as a hint, not a requirement.
+.P
+If an implementation does not support multiplexing of user threads on
+top of several kernel-scheduled entities, the
+\fIpthread_setconcurrency\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_getconcurrency\fR()
+functions are provided for source code compatibility but they shall
+have no effect when called. To maintain the function semantics, the
+.IR new_level
+parameter is saved when
+\fIpthread_setconcurrency\fR()
+is called so that a subsequent call to
+\fIpthread_getconcurrency\fR()
+shall return the same value.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_setconcurrency\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_getconcurrency\fR()
+function shall always return the concurrency level set by a previous
+call to
+\fIpthread_setconcurrency\fR().
+If the
+\fIpthread_setconcurrency\fR()
+function has never been called,
+\fIpthread_getconcurrency\fR()
+shall return zero.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_setconcurrency\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value specified by
+.IR new_level
+is negative.
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The value specified by
+.IR new_level
+would cause a system resource to be exceeded.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_setconcurrency\fR()
+function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Application developers should note that an implementation can always
+ignore any calls to
+\fIpthread_setconcurrency\fR()
+and return a constant for
+\fIpthread_getconcurrency\fR().
+For this reason, it is not recommended that portable applications
+use this function.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+These functions may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_getcpuclockid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_getcpuclockid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..37bd8d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_getcpuclockid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_GETCPUCLOCKID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_getcpuclockid
+\(em access a thread CPU-time clock
+(\fBADVANCED REALTIME THREADS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+int pthread_getcpuclockid(pthread_t \fIthread_id\fP, clockid_t *\fIclock_id\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_getcpuclockid\fR()
+function shall return in
+.IR clock_id
+the clock ID of the CPU-time clock of the thread specified by
+.IR thread_id ,
+if the thread specified by
+.IR thread_id
+exists.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIpthread_getcpuclockid\fR()
+shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to
+indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIpthread_getcpuclockid\fR()
+function is part of the Thread CPU-Time Clocks option and need not be
+provided on all implementations.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects use of a thread ID after the end of its
+lifetime, it is recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [ESRCH] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIclock_getcpuclockid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclock_getres\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItimer_create\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_getschedparam.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_getschedparam.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1d36dd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_getschedparam.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,193 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_GETSCHEDPARAM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_getschedparam,
+pthread_setschedparam
+\(em dynamic thread scheduling parameters access
+(\fBREALTIME THREADS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_getschedparam(pthread_t \fIthread\fP, int *restrict \fIpolicy\fP,
+    struct sched_param *restrict \fIparam\fP);
+int pthread_setschedparam(pthread_t \fIthread\fP, int \fIpolicy\fP,
+    const struct sched_param *\fIparam\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_getschedparam\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_setschedparam\fR()
+functions shall, respectively, get and set the scheduling policy and
+parameters of individual threads within a multi-threaded process to be
+retrieved and set. For SCHED_FIFO and SCHED_RR,
+the only required member of the
+.BR sched_param
+structure is the priority
+.IR sched_priority .
+For SCHED_OTHER,
+the affected scheduling parameters are implementation-defined.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_getschedparam\fR()
+function shall retrieve the scheduling policy and scheduling parameters
+for the thread whose thread ID is given by
+.IR thread
+and shall store those values in
+.IR policy
+and
+.IR param ,
+respectively. The priority value returned from
+\fIpthread_getschedparam\fR()
+shall be the value specified by the most recent
+\fIpthread_setschedparam\fR(),
+\fIpthread_setschedprio\fR(),
+or
+\fIpthread_create\fR()
+call affecting the target thread. It shall not reflect any temporary
+adjustments to its priority as a result of any priority inheritance or
+ceiling functions. The
+\fIpthread_setschedparam\fR()
+function shall set the scheduling policy and associated scheduling
+parameters for the thread whose thread ID is given by
+.IR thread
+to the policy and associated parameters provided in
+.IR policy
+and
+.IR param ,
+respectively.
+.P
+The
+.IR policy
+parameter may have the value SCHED_OTHER, SCHED_FIFO, or SCHED_RR. The
+scheduling parameters for the SCHED_OTHER policy are
+implementation-defined. The SCHED_FIFO and SCHED_RR policies shall
+have a single scheduling parameter,
+.IR priority .
+.P
+If _POSIX_THREAD_SPORADIC_SERVER is defined, then the
+.IR policy
+argument may have the value SCHED_SPORADIC, with the exception for the
+\fIpthread_setschedparam\fR()
+function that if the scheduling policy was not SCHED_SPORADIC at the
+time of the call, it is implementation-defined whether the function
+is supported; in other words, the implementation need not allow the
+application to dynamically change the scheduling policy to
+SCHED_SPORADIC. The sporadic server scheduling policy has the
+associated parameters
+.IR sched_ss_low_priority ,
+.IR sched_ss_repl_period ,
+.IR sched_ss_init_budget ,
+.IR sched_priority ,
+and
+.IR sched_ss_max_repl .
+The specified
+.IR sched_ss_repl_period
+shall be greater than or equal to the specified
+.IR sched_ss_init_budget
+for the function to succeed; if it is not, then the function shall
+fail. The value of
+.IR sched_ss_max_repl
+shall be within the inclusive range [1,\c
+{SS_REPL_MAX}]
+for the function to succeed; if not, the function shall fail.
+It is unspecified whether the
+.IR sched_ss_repl_period
+and
+.IR sched_ss_init_budget
+values are stored as provided by this function or are rounded to
+align with the resolution of the clock being used.
+.P
+If the
+\fIpthread_setschedparam\fR()
+function fails, the scheduling parameters shall not be changed
+for the target thread.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_getschedparam\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_setschedparam\fR()
+functions shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_setschedparam\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSUP
+An attempt was made to set the policy or scheduling parameters to an
+unsupported value.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSUP
+An attempt was made to dynamically change the scheduling policy to
+SCHED_SPORADIC, and the implementation does not support this change.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_setschedparam\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value specified by
+.IR policy
+or one of the scheduling parameters associated with the scheduling
+policy
+.IR policy
+is invalid.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The caller does not have appropriate privileges to set either the
+scheduling parameters or the scheduling policy of the specified
+thread.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The implementation does not allow the application to modify
+one of the parameters to the value specified.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects use of a thread ID after the end of its
+lifetime, it is recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [ESRCH] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_setschedprio\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_getparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_getscheduler\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sched.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_getspecific.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_getspecific.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e8d6b4c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_getspecific.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_GETSPECIFIC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_getspecific,
+pthread_setspecific
+\(em thread-specific data management
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+void *pthread_getspecific(pthread_key_t \fIkey\fP);
+int pthread_setspecific(pthread_key_t \fIkey\fP, const void *\fIvalue\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_getspecific\fR()
+function shall return the value currently bound to the specified
+.IR key
+on behalf of the calling thread.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_setspecific\fR()
+function shall associate a thread-specific
+.IR value
+with a
+.IR key
+obtained via a previous call to
+\fIpthread_key_create\fR().
+Different threads may bind different values to the same key. These
+values are typically pointers to blocks of dynamically allocated memory
+that have been reserved for use by the calling thread.
+.P
+The effect of calling
+\fIpthread_getspecific\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_setspecific\fR()
+with a
+.IR key
+value not obtained from
+\fIpthread_key_create\fR()
+or after
+.IR key
+has been deleted with
+\fIpthread_key_delete\fR()
+is undefined.
+.P
+Both
+\fIpthread_getspecific\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_setspecific\fR()
+may be called from a thread-specific data destructor function. A call
+to
+\fIpthread_getspecific\fR()
+for the thread-specific data key being destroyed shall return the value
+NULL, unless the value is changed (after the destructor starts) by a
+call to
+\fIpthread_setspecific\fR().
+Calling
+\fIpthread_setspecific\fR()
+from a thread-specific data destructor routine may result either in lost
+storage (after at least PTHREAD_DESTRUCTOR_ITERATIONS attempts at
+destruction) or in an infinite loop.
+.P
+Both functions may be implemented as macros.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIpthread_getspecific\fR()
+function shall return the thread-specific data value associated
+with the given
+.IR key .
+If no thread-specific data value is associated with
+.IR key ,
+then the value NULL shall be returned.
+.P
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_setspecific\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are returned from
+\fIpthread_getspecific\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_setspecific\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory exists to associate the non-NULL value with the key.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_setspecific\fR()
+function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Performance and ease-of-use of
+\fIpthread_getspecific\fR()
+are critical for functions that rely on maintaining state in
+thread-specific data. Since no errors are required to be detected by
+it, and since the only error that could be detected is the use of an
+invalid key, the function to
+\fIpthread_getspecific\fR()
+has been designed to favor speed and simplicity over error reporting.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR key
+argument to
+\fIpthread_setspecific\fR()
+does not refer to a a key value obtained from
+\fIpthread_key_create\fR()
+or refers to a key that has been deleted with
+\fIpthread_key_delete\fR(),
+it is recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_key_create\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_join.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_join.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5ba8bf3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_join.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,230 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_JOIN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_join
+\(em wait for thread termination
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_join(pthread_t \fIthread\fP, void **\fIvalue_ptr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+function shall suspend execution of the calling thread until the target
+.IR thread
+terminates, unless the target
+.IR thread
+has already terminated. On return from a successful
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+call with a non-NULL
+.IR value_ptr
+argument, the value passed to
+\fIpthread_exit\fR()
+by the terminating thread shall be made available in the location
+referenced by
+.IR value_ptr .
+When a
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+returns successfully, the target thread has been terminated. The
+results of multiple simultaneous calls to
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+specifying the same target thread are undefined. If the thread calling
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+is canceled, then the target thread shall not be detached.
+.P
+It is unspecified whether a thread that has exited but remains unjoined
+counts against
+{PTHREAD_THREADS_MAX}.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR thread
+argument to
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+does not refer to a joinable thread.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR thread
+argument to
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+refers to the calling thread.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EDEADLK
+A deadlock was detected.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+An example of thread creation and deletion follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+typedef struct {
+    int *ar;
+    long n;
+} subarray;
+.P
+void *
+incer(void *arg)
+{
+    long i;
+.P
+    for (i = 0; i < ((subarray *)arg)->n; i++)
+        ((subarray *)arg)->ar[i]++;
+}
+.P
+int main(void)
+{
+    int        ar[1000000];
+    pthread_t  th1, th2;
+    subarray   sb1, sb2;
+.P
+    sb1.ar = &ar[0];
+    sb1.n  = 500000;
+    (void) pthread_create(&th1, NULL, incer, &sb1);
+.P
+    sb2.ar = &ar[500000];
+    sb2.n  = 500000;
+    (void) pthread_create(&th2, NULL, incer, &sb2);
+.P
+    (void) pthread_join(th1, NULL);
+    (void) pthread_join(th2, NULL);
+    return 0;
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+function is a convenience that has proven useful in multi-threaded
+applications. It is true that a programmer could simulate this
+function if it were not provided by passing extra state as part of the
+argument to the
+\fIstart_routine\fR().
+The terminating thread would set a flag to indicate termination and
+broadcast a condition that is part of that state; a joining thread
+would wait on that condition variable. While such a technique would
+allow a thread to wait on more complex conditions (for example, waiting
+for multiple threads to terminate), waiting on individual thread
+termination is considered widely useful. Also, including the
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+function in no way precludes a programmer from coding such complex
+waits. Thus, while not a primitive, including
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 was considered valuable.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+function provides a simple mechanism allowing an application to wait
+for a thread to terminate. After the thread terminates, the
+application may then choose to clean up resources that were used by the
+thread. For instance, after
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+returns, any application-provided stack storage could be reclaimed.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_detach\fR()
+function should eventually be called for every thread that is created
+with the
+.IR detachstate
+attribute set to PTHREAD_CREATE_JOINABLE
+so that storage associated with the thread may be reclaimed.
+.P
+The interaction between
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+and cancellation is well-defined for the following reasons:
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+function, like all other non-async-cancel-safe functions, can only be
+called with
+deferred cancelability type.
+.IP " *" 4
+Cancellation cannot occur in the disabled cancelability state.
+.P
+Thus, only the default cancelability state need be considered. As
+specified, either the
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+call is canceled, or it succeeds, but not both. The difference is
+obvious to the application, since either a cancellation handler is run
+or
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+returns. There are no race conditions since
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+was called in the deferred cancelability state.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR thread
+argument to
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+does not refer to a joinable thread, it is recommended that the
+function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR thread
+argument to
+\fIpthread_join\fR()
+refers to the calling thread, it is recommended that the function
+should fail and report an
+.BR [EDEADLK] 
+error.
+.P
+If an implementation detects use of a thread ID after the end of its
+lifetime, it is recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [ESRCH] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.11" ", " "Memory Synchronization",
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_key_create.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_key_create.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9fd2bc8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_key_create.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,261 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_KEY_CREATE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_key_create
+\(em thread-specific data key creation
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_key_create(pthread_key_t *\fIkey\fP, void (*\fIdestructor\fP)(void*));
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_key_create\fR()
+function shall create a thread-specific data key visible to all threads
+in the process. Key values provided by
+\fIpthread_key_create\fR()
+are opaque objects used to locate thread-specific data. Although the
+same key value may be used by different threads, the values bound to
+the key by
+\fIpthread_setspecific\fR()
+are maintained on a per-thread basis and persist for the life of the
+calling thread.
+.P
+Upon key creation, the value NULL shall be associated with the new key
+in all active threads. Upon thread creation, the value NULL shall be
+associated with all defined keys in the new thread.
+.P
+An optional destructor function may be associated with each key value.
+At thread exit, if a key value has a non-NULL destructor pointer, and
+the thread has a non-NULL value associated with that key, the value of
+the key is set to NULL, and then the function pointed to is called with
+the previously associated value as its sole argument. The order of
+destructor calls is unspecified if more than one destructor exists for
+a thread when it exits.
+.P
+If, after all the destructors have been called for all non-NULL values
+with associated destructors, there are still some non-NULL values with
+associated destructors, then the process is repeated. If, after at
+least
+{PTHREAD_DESTRUCTOR_ITERATIONS}
+iterations of destructor calls for outstanding non-NULL values, there
+are still some non-NULL values with associated destructors,
+implementations may stop calling destructors, or they may continue
+calling destructors until no non-NULL values with associated
+destructors exist, even though this might result in an infinite loop.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_key_create\fR()
+function shall store the newly created key value at *\fIkey\fP and
+shall return zero. Otherwise, an error number shall be returned to
+indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_key_create\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The system lacked the necessary resources to create another
+thread-specific data key, or the system-imposed limit on the total
+number of keys per process
+{PTHREAD_KEYS_MAX}
+has been exceeded.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory exists to create the key.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_key_create\fR()
+function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The following example demonstrates a function that initializes a
+thread-specific data key when it is first called, and associates a
+thread-specific object with each calling thread, initializing this
+object when necessary.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+static pthread_key_t key;
+static pthread_once_t key_once = PTHREAD_ONCE_INIT;
+.P
+static void
+make_key()
+{
+    (void) pthread_key_create(&key, NULL);
+}
+.P
+func()
+{
+    void *ptr;
+.P
+    (void) pthread_once(&key_once, make_key);
+    if ((ptr = pthread_getspecific(key)) == NULL) {
+        ptr = malloc(OBJECT_SIZE);
+        ...
+        (void) pthread_setspecific(key, ptr);
+    }
+    ...
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Note that the key has to be initialized before
+\fIpthread_getspecific\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_setspecific\fR()
+can be used. The
+\fIpthread_key_create\fR()
+call could either be explicitly made in a module initialization
+routine, or it can be done implicitly by the first call to a module as
+in this example. Any attempt to use the key before it is initialized
+is a programming error, making the code below incorrect.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+static pthread_key_t key;
+.P
+func()
+{
+    void *ptr;
+.P
+   /* KEY NOT INITIALIZED!!!  THIS WON'T WORK!!! */
+    if ((ptr = pthread_getspecific(key)) == NULL &&
+        pthread_setspecific(key, NULL) != 0) {
+        pthread_key_create(&key, NULL);
+        ...
+    }
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.br
+.SH RATIONALE
+.SS "Destructor Functions"
+.P
+Normally, the value bound to a key on behalf of a particular thread is
+a pointer to storage allocated dynamically on behalf of the calling
+thread. The destructor functions specified with
+\fIpthread_key_create\fR()
+are intended to be used to free this storage when the thread exits.
+Thread
+cancellation cleanup handlers cannot be used for this purpose because
+thread-specific data may persist outside the lexical scope in which the
+cancellation cleanup handlers operate.
+.P
+If the value associated with a key needs to be updated during the
+lifetime of the thread, it may be necessary to release the storage
+associated with the old value before the new value is bound. Although
+the
+\fIpthread_setspecific\fR()
+function could do this automatically, this feature is not needed often
+enough to justify the added complexity. Instead, the programmer is
+responsible for freeing the stale storage:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+pthread_getspecific(key, &old);
+new = allocate();
+destructor(old);
+pthread_setspecific(key, new);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+The above example could leak storage if run with asynchronous
+cancellation enabled. No such problems occur in the default cancellation
+state if no cancellation points occur between the get and set.
+.P
+.P
+There is no notion of a destructor-safe function. If an application
+does not call
+\fIpthread_exit\fR()
+from a signal handler, or if it blocks any signal whose handler may
+call
+\fIpthread_exit\fR()
+while calling async-unsafe functions, all functions may be safely
+called from destructors.
+.SS "Non-Idempotent Data Key Creation"
+.P
+There were requests to make
+\fIpthread_key_create\fR()
+idempotent with respect to a given
+.IR key
+address parameter. This would allow applications to call
+\fIpthread_key_create\fR()
+multiple times for a given
+.IR key
+address and be guaranteed that only one key would be created. Doing so
+would require the key value to be previously initialized (possibly at
+compile time) to a known null value and would require that implicit
+mutual-exclusion be performed based on the address and contents of the
+.IR key
+parameter in order to guarantee that exactly one key would be created.
+.P
+Unfortunately, the implicit mutual-exclusion would not be limited to
+only
+\fIpthread_key_create\fR().
+On many implementations, implicit mutual-exclusion would also have to
+be performed by
+\fIpthread_getspecific\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_setspecific\fR()
+in order to guard against using incompletely stored or not-yet-visible
+key values. This could significantly increase the cost of important
+operations, particularly
+\fIpthread_getspecific\fR().
+.P
+Thus, this proposal was rejected. The
+\fIpthread_key_create\fR()
+function performs no implicit synchronization. It is the
+responsibility of the programmer to ensure that it is called exactly
+once per key before use of the key. Several straightforward mechanisms
+can already be used to accomplish this, including calling explicit
+module initialization functions, using mutexes, and using
+\fIpthread_once\fR().
+This places no significant burden on the programmer, introduces no
+possibly confusing \fIad hoc\fP implicit synchronization mechanism, and
+potentially allows commonly used thread-specific data operations to be
+more efficient.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_getspecific\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_key_delete\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_key_delete.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_key_delete.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4eca083
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_key_delete.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_KEY_DELETE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_key_delete
+\(em thread-specific data key deletion
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_key_delete(pthread_key_t \fIkey\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_key_delete\fR()
+function shall delete a thread-specific data key previously returned by
+\fIpthread_key_create\fR().
+The thread-specific data values associated with
+.IR key
+need not be NULL at the time
+\fIpthread_key_delete\fR()
+is called. It is the responsibility of the application to free any
+application storage or perform any cleanup actions for data structures
+related to the deleted key or associated thread-specific data in any
+threads; this cleanup can be done either before or after
+\fIpthread_key_delete\fR()
+is called. Any attempt to use
+.IR key
+following the call to
+\fIpthread_key_delete\fR()
+results in undefined behavior.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_key_delete\fR()
+function shall be callable from within destructor functions. No
+destructor functions shall be invoked by
+\fIpthread_key_delete\fR().
+Any destructor function that may have been associated with
+.IR key
+shall no longer be called upon thread exit.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_key_delete\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_key_delete\fR()
+function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+A thread-specific data key deletion function has been included in order
+to allow the resources associated with an unused thread-specific data
+key to be freed. Unused thread-specific data keys can arise, among
+other scenarios, when a dynamically loaded module that allocated a key
+is unloaded.
+.P
+Conforming applications are responsible for performing any cleanup
+actions needed for data structures associated with the key to be
+deleted, including data referenced by thread-specific data values. No
+such cleanup is done by
+\fIpthread_key_delete\fR().
+In particular, destructor functions are not called. There are several
+reasons for this division of responsibility:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The associated destructor functions used to free thread-specific data
+at thread exit time are only guaranteed to work correctly when called
+in the thread that allocated the thread-specific data. (Destructors
+themselves may utilize thread-specific data.) Thus, they cannot be used
+to free thread-specific data in other threads at key deletion time.
+Attempting to have them called by other threads at key deletion time
+would require other threads to be asynchronously interrupted. But
+since interrupted threads could be in an arbitrary state, including
+holding locks necessary for the destructor to run, this approach would
+fail. In general, there is no safe mechanism whereby an implementation
+could free thread-specific data at key deletion time.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Even if there were a means of safely freeing thread-specific data
+associated with keys to be deleted, doing so would require that
+implementations be able to enumerate the threads with non-NULL data and
+potentially keep them from creating more thread-specific data while the
+key deletion is occurring. This special case could cause extra
+synchronization in the normal case, which would otherwise be
+unnecessary.
+.P
+For an application to know that it is safe to delete a key, it has to
+know that all the threads that might potentially ever use the key do
+not attempt to use it again. For example, it could know this if all
+the client threads have called a cleanup procedure declaring that they
+are through with the module that is being shut down, perhaps by setting
+a reference count to zero.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR key
+argument to
+\fIpthread_key_delete\fR()
+does not refer to a a key value obtained from
+\fIpthread_key_create\fR()
+or refers to a key that has been deleted with
+\fIpthread_key_delete\fR(),
+it is recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_key_create\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_kill.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_kill.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fa06e14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_kill.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_KILL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_kill
+\(em send a signal to a thread
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int pthread_kill(pthread_t \fIthread\fP, int \fIsig\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_kill\fR()
+function shall request that a signal be delivered to the specified
+thread.
+.P
+As in
+\fIkill\fR(),
+if
+.IR sig
+is zero, error checking shall be performed but no signal shall
+actually be sent.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the function shall return a value of zero.
+Otherwise, the function shall return an error number. If the
+\fIpthread_kill\fR()
+function fails, no signal shall be sent.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_kill\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR sig
+argument is an invalid or unsupported signal number.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_kill\fR()
+function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIpthread_kill\fR()
+function provides a mechanism for asynchronously directing a signal at
+a thread in the calling process. This could be used, for example, by
+one thread to affect broadcast delivery of a signal to a set of
+threads.
+.P
+Note that
+\fIpthread_kill\fR()
+only causes the signal to be handled in the context of the given
+thread; the signal action (termination or stopping) affects the
+process as a whole.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects use of a thread ID after the end of its
+lifetime, it is recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [ESRCH] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_self\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIraise\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_consistent.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_consistent.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..177bbd9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_consistent.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_MUTEX_CONSISTENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_mutex_consistent \(em
+mark state protected by robust mutex as consistent
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_mutex_consistent(pthread_mutex_t *\fImutex\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+If
+.IR mutex
+is a robust mutex in an inconsistent state, the
+\fIpthread_mutex_consistent\fR()
+function can be used to mark the state protected by the mutex
+referenced by
+.IR mutex
+as consistent again.
+.P
+If an owner of a robust mutex terminates while holding the mutex, the
+mutex becomes inconsistent and the next thread that acquires the mutex
+lock shall be notified of the state by the return value
+.BR [EOWNERDEAD] .
+In this case, the mutex does not become normally usable again until the
+state is marked consistent.
+.P
+If the thread which acquired the mutex lock with the return value
+.BR [EOWNERDEAD] 
+terminates before calling either
+\fIpthread_mutex_consistent\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_mutex_unlock\fR(),
+the next thread that acquires the mutex lock shall be notified about
+the state of the mutex by the return value
+.BR [EOWNERDEAD] .
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR mutex
+argument to
+\fIpthread_mutex_consistent\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized mutex.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIpthread_mutex_consistent\fR()
+function shall return zero. Otherwise, an error value shall be returned
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_mutex_consistent\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The mutex object referenced by
+.IR mutex
+is not robust or does not protect an inconsistent state.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIpthread_mutex_consistent\fR()
+function is only responsible for notifying the implementation that the
+state protected by the mutex has been recovered and that normal
+operations with the mutex can be resumed. It is the responsibility of
+the application to recover the state so it can be reused. If the
+application is not able to perform the recovery, it can notify the
+implementation that the situation is unrecoverable by a call to
+\fIpthread_mutex_unlock\fR()
+without a prior call to
+\fIpthread_mutex_consistent\fR(),
+in which case subsequent threads that attempt to lock the mutex will
+fail to acquire the lock and be returned
+.BR [ENOTRECOVERABLE] .
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR mutex
+argument to
+\fIpthread_mutex_consistent\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized mutex, it is recommended that the
+function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutexattr_getrobust\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_destroy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_destroy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c8b22d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_destroy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,455 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_MUTEX_DESTROY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_mutex_destroy,
+pthread_mutex_init
+\(em destroy and initialize a mutex
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_mutex_destroy(pthread_mutex_t *\fImutex\fP);
+int pthread_mutex_init(pthread_mutex_t *restrict \fImutex\fP,
+    const pthread_mutexattr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP);
+pthread_mutex_t \fImutex\fP = PTHREAD_MUTEX_INITIALIZER;
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR()
+function shall destroy the mutex object referenced by
+.IR mutex ;
+the mutex object becomes, in effect, uninitialized. An implementation
+may cause
+\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR()
+to set the object referenced by
+.IR mutex
+to an invalid value.
+.P
+A destroyed mutex object can be reinitialized using
+\fIpthread_mutex_init\fR();
+the results of otherwise referencing the object after it has been
+destroyed are undefined.
+.P
+It shall be safe to destroy an initialized mutex that is unlocked.
+Attempting to destroy a locked mutex or a mutex that is referenced
+(for example, while being used in a
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR())
+by another thread results in undefined behavior.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_mutex_init\fR()
+function shall initialize the mutex referenced by
+.IR mutex
+with attributes specified by
+.IR attr .
+If
+.IR attr
+is NULL, the default mutex attributes are used; the effect shall be the
+same as passing the address of a default mutex attributes object. Upon
+successful initialization, the state of the mutex becomes initialized
+and unlocked.
+.P
+Only
+.IR mutex
+itself may be used for performing synchronization. The result of
+referring to copies of
+.IR mutex
+in calls to
+\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR(),
+\fIpthread_mutex_trylock\fR(),
+\fIpthread_mutex_unlock\fR(),
+and
+\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR()
+is undefined.
+.P
+Attempting to initialize an already initialized mutex results in
+undefined behavior.
+.P
+In cases where default mutex attributes are appropriate, the macro
+PTHREAD_MUTEX_INITIALIZER can be used to initialize mutexes. The
+effect shall be equivalent to dynamic initialization by a call to
+\fIpthread_mutex_init\fR()
+with parameter
+.IR attr
+specified as NULL, except that no error checks are performed.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR mutex
+argument to
+\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized mutex.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_mutex_init\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized mutex attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_mutex_init\fR()
+functions shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_mutex_init\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The system lacked the necessary resources (other than memory) to
+initialize another mutex.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory exists to initialize the mutex.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The caller does not have the privilege to perform the operation.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_mutex_init\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr
+has the robust mutex attribute set without the process-shared attribute
+being set.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR mutex
+argument to
+\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized mutex, it is recommended that the
+function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR mutex
+argument to
+\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_mutex_init\fR()
+refers to a locked mutex or a mutex that is referenced (for example,
+while being used in a
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR())
+by another thread, or detects that the value specified by the
+.IR mutex
+argument to
+\fIpthread_mutex_init\fR()
+refers to an already initialized mutex, it is recommended that the
+function should fail and report an
+.BR [EBUSY] 
+error.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_mutex_init\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized mutex attributes object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SS "Alternate Implementations Possible"
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 supports several alternative implementations of mutexes.
+An implementation may store the lock directly in the object of type
+.BR pthread_mutex_t .
+Alternatively, an implementation may store the lock in the heap and
+merely store a pointer, handle, or unique ID in the mutex object.
+Either implementation has advantages or may be required on certain
+hardware configurations. So that portable code can be written that is
+invariant to this choice, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not define assignment or
+equality for this type, and it uses the term ``initialize'' to
+reinforce the (more restrictive) notion that the lock may actually
+reside in the mutex object itself.
+.P
+Note that this precludes an over-specification of the type of the mutex
+or condition variable and motivates the opaqueness of the type.
+.P
+An implementation is permitted, but not required, to have
+\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR()
+store an illegal value into the mutex. This may help detect erroneous
+programs that try to lock (or otherwise reference) a mutex that has
+already been destroyed.
+.SS "Tradeoff Between Error Checks and Performance Supported"
+.P
+Many error conditions that can occur are not required to be detected by
+the implementation in order to let implementations trade off performance
+\fIversus\fR degree of error checking according to the needs of their
+specific applications and execution environment. As a general rule,
+conditions caused by the system (such as insufficient memory) are required
+to be detected, but conditions caused by an erroneously coded application
+(such as failing to provide adequate synchronization to prevent a mutex
+from being deleted while in use) are specified to result in undefined
+behavior.
+.P
+A wide range of implementations is thus made possible. For example, an
+implementation intended for application debugging may implement all of
+the error checks, but an implementation running a single, provably
+correct application under very tight performance constraints in an
+embedded computer might implement minimal checks. An implementation
+might even be provided in two versions, similar to the options that
+compilers provide: a full-checking, but slower version; and a
+limited-checking, but faster version. To forbid this optionality would
+be a disservice to users.
+.P
+By carefully limiting the use of ``undefined behavior'' only to things
+that an erroneous (badly coded) application might do, and by defining
+that resource-not-available errors are mandatory, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 ensures that
+a fully-conforming application is portable across the full range of
+implementations, while not forcing all implementations to add overhead
+to check for numerous things that a correct program never does. When the
+behavior is undefined, no error number is specified to be returned on
+implementations that do detect the condition. This is because undefined
+behavior means \fIanything\fR can happen, which includes returning
+with any value (which might happen to be a valid, but different, error
+number). However, since the error number might be useful to application
+developers when diagnosing problems during application development, a
+recommendation is made in rationale that implementors should return a
+particular error number if their implementation does detect the condition.
+.SS "Why No Limits are Defined"
+.P
+Defining symbols for the maximum number of mutexes and condition
+variables was considered but rejected because the number of these
+objects may change dynamically. Furthermore, many implementations
+place these objects into application memory; thus, there is no explicit
+maximum.
+.SS "Static Initializers for Mutexes and Condition Variables"
+.P
+Providing for static initialization of statically allocated
+synchronization objects allows modules with private static
+synchronization variables to avoid runtime initialization tests and
+overhead. Furthermore, it simplifies the coding of self-initializing
+modules. Such modules are common in C libraries, where for various
+reasons the design calls for self-initialization instead of requiring
+an explicit module initialization function to be called. An example
+use of static initialization follows.
+.P
+Without static initialization, a self-initializing routine
+\fIfoo\fR()
+might look as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+static pthread_once_t foo_once = PTHREAD_ONCE_INIT;
+static pthread_mutex_t foo_mutex;
+.P
+void foo_init()
+{
+    pthread_mutex_init(&foo_mutex, NULL);
+}
+.P
+void foo()
+{
+    pthread_once(&foo_once, foo_init);
+    pthread_mutex_lock(&foo_mutex);
+   /* Do work. */
+    pthread_mutex_unlock(&foo_mutex);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+With static initialization, the same routine could be coded as
+follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+static pthread_mutex_t foo_mutex = PTHREAD_MUTEX_INITIALIZER;
+.P
+void foo()
+{
+    pthread_mutex_lock(&foo_mutex);
+   /* Do work. */
+    pthread_mutex_unlock(&foo_mutex);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Note that the static initialization both eliminates the need for the
+initialization test inside
+\fIpthread_once\fR()
+and the fetch of &\fIfoo_mutex\fP to learn the address to be passed to
+\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_mutex_unlock\fR().
+.P
+Thus, the C code written to initialize static objects is simpler on all
+systems and is also faster on a large class of systems; those where the
+(entire) synchronization object can be stored in application memory.
+.P
+Yet the locking performance question is likely to be raised for
+machines that require mutexes to be allocated out of special memory.
+Such machines actually have to have mutexes and possibly condition
+variables contain pointers to the actual hardware locks. For static
+initialization to work on such machines,
+\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR()
+also has to test whether or not the pointer to the actual lock has been
+allocated. If it has not,
+\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR()
+has to initialize it before use. The reservation of such resources can
+be made when the program is loaded, and hence return codes have not
+been added to mutex locking and condition variable waiting to indicate
+failure to complete initialization.
+.P
+This runtime test in
+\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR()
+would at first seem to be extra work; an extra test is required to see
+whether the pointer has been initialized. On most machines this would
+actually be implemented as a fetch of the pointer, testing the pointer
+against zero, and then using the pointer if it has already been
+initialized. While the test might seem to add extra work, the extra
+effort of testing a register is usually negligible since no extra
+memory references are actually done. As more and more machines provide
+caches, the real expenses are memory references, not instructions
+executed.
+.P
+Alternatively, depending on the machine architecture, there are often
+ways to eliminate
+.IR all
+overhead in the most important case: on the lock operations that occur
+.IR after
+the lock has been initialized. This can be done by shifting more
+overhead to the less frequent operation: initialization. Since
+out-of-line mutex allocation also means that an address has to be
+dereferenced to find the actual lock, one technique that is widely
+applicable is to have static initialization store a bogus value for
+that address; in particular, an address that causes a machine fault to
+occur. When such a fault occurs upon the first attempt to lock such a
+mutex, validity checks can be done, and then the correct address for
+the actual lock can be filled in. Subsequent lock operations incur no
+extra overhead since they do not ``fault''. This is merely one
+technique that can be used to support static initialization, while not
+adversely affecting the performance of lock acquisition. No doubt
+there are other techniques that are highly machine-dependent.
+.P
+The locking overhead for machines doing out-of-line mutex allocation is
+thus similar for modules being implicitly initialized, where it is
+improved for those doing mutex allocation entirely inline. The inline
+case is thus made much faster, and the out-of-line case is not
+significantly worse.
+.P
+Besides the issue of locking performance for such machines, a concern
+is raised that it is possible that threads would serialize contending
+for initialization locks when attempting to finish initializing
+statically allocated mutexes. (Such finishing would typically involve
+taking an internal lock, allocating a structure, storing a pointer to
+the structure in the mutex, and releasing the internal lock.) First,
+many implementations would reduce such serialization by hashing on the
+mutex address. Second, such serialization can only occur a bounded
+number of times. In particular, it can happen at most as many times as
+there are statically allocated synchronization objects. Dynamically
+allocated objects would still be initialized via
+\fIpthread_mutex_init\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_init\fR().
+.P
+Finally, if none of the above optimization techniques for out-of-line
+allocation yields sufficient performance for an application on some
+implementation, the application can avoid static initialization
+altogether by explicitly initializing all synchronization objects with
+the corresponding
+.IR pthread_*_init (\|)
+functions, which are supported by all implementations. An
+implementation can also document the tradeoffs and advise which
+initialization technique is more efficient for that particular
+implementation.
+.SS "Destroying Mutexes"
+.P
+A mutex can be destroyed immediately after it is unlocked. For
+example, consider the following code:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+struct obj {
+pthread_mutex_t om;
+    int refcnt;
+    ...
+};
+.P
+obj_done(struct obj *op)
+{
+    pthread_mutex_lock(&op->om);
+    if (-\|-op->refcnt == 0) {
+        pthread_mutex_unlock(&op->om);
+(A)     pthread_mutex_destroy(&op->om);
+(B)     free(op);
+    } else
+(C)     pthread_mutex_unlock(&op->om);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In this case
+.IR obj
+is reference counted and
+\fIobj_done\fR()
+is called whenever a reference to the object is dropped.
+Implementations are required to allow an object to be destroyed and
+freed and potentially unmapped (for example, lines A and B) immediately
+after the object is unlocked (line C).
+.SS "Robust Mutexes"
+.P
+Implementations are required to provide robust mutexes
+for mutexes with the process-shared attribute set to
+PTHREAD_PROCESS_SHARED. Implementations are allowed, but not required,
+to provide robust mutexes when the process-shared attribute is set to
+PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_getprioceiling\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutexattr_getrobust\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_timedlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutexattr_getpshared\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_getprioceiling.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_getprioceiling.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..03093eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_getprioceiling.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_MUTEX_GETPRIOCEILING "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_mutex_getprioceiling,
+pthread_mutex_setprioceiling
+\(em get and set the priority ceiling of a mutex
+(\fBREALTIME THREADS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_mutex_getprioceiling(const pthread_mutex_t *restrict \fImutex\fP,
+    int *restrict \fIprioceiling\fP);
+int pthread_mutex_setprioceiling(pthread_mutex_t *restrict \fImutex\fP,
+    int \fIprioceiling\fP, int *restrict \fIold_ceiling\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_mutex_getprioceiling\fR()
+function shall return the current priority ceiling of the mutex.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_mutex_setprioceiling\fR()
+function shall attempt to lock the mutex as if by a call to
+\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR(),
+except that the process of locking the mutex need not adhere to the
+priority protect protocol. On acquiring the mutex it shall change the
+mutex's priority ceiling and then release the mutex as if by a call to
+\fIpthread_mutex_unlock\fR().
+When the change is successful, the previous value of the priority ceiling
+shall be returned in
+.IR old_ceiling .
+.P
+If the
+\fIpthread_mutex_setprioceiling\fR()
+function fails, the mutex priority ceiling shall not be changed.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_mutex_getprioceiling\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_mutex_setprioceiling\fR()
+functions shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The protocol attribute of
+.IR mutex
+is PTHREAD_PRIO_NONE.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The implementation requires appropriate privileges to perform the
+operation and the caller does not have appropriate privileges.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_mutex_setprioceiling\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The mutex could not be acquired because the maximum number of recursive
+locks for
+.IR mutex
+has been exceeded.
+.TP
+.BR EDEADLK
+The mutex type is PTHREAD_MUTEX_ERRORCHECK and the current
+thread already owns the mutex.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The mutex was created with the protocol attribute having the value
+PTHREAD_PRIO_PROTECT and the calling thread's priority is higher than
+the mutex's current priority ceiling, and the implementation adheres to
+the priority protect protocol in the process of locking the mutex.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTRECOVERABLE
+.br
+The mutex is a robust mutex and the state protected by the mutex is
+not recoverable.
+.TP
+.BR EOWNERDEAD
+.br
+The mutex is a robust mutex and the process containing the previous
+owning thread terminated while holding the mutex lock. The mutex lock
+shall be acquired by the calling thread and it is up to the new owner
+to make the state consistent (see
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR\^(\|)").
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_mutex_setprioceiling\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EDEADLK
+A deadlock condition was detected.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The priority requested by
+.IR prioceiling
+is out of range.
+.TP
+.BR EOWNERDEAD
+.br
+The mutex is a robust mutex and the previous owning thread terminated
+while holding the mutex lock. The mutex lock shall be acquired by the
+calling thread and it is up to the new owner to make the state
+consistent (see
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR\^(\|)").
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_timedlock\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_init.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_init.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d898454
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_init.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_MUTEX_INIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_mutex_init
+\(em destroy and initialize a mutex
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_mutex_init(pthread_mutex_t *restrict \fImutex\fP,
+    const pthread_mutexattr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP);
+pthread_mutex_t \fImutex\fP = PTHREAD_MUTEX_INITIALIZER;
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_lock.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_lock.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a453a0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_lock.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,309 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_MUTEX_LOCK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_mutex_lock,
+pthread_mutex_trylock,
+pthread_mutex_unlock
+\(em lock and unlock a mutex
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_mutex_lock(pthread_mutex_t *\fImutex\fP);
+int pthread_mutex_trylock(pthread_mutex_t *\fImutex\fP);
+int pthread_mutex_unlock(pthread_mutex_t *\fImutex\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The mutex object referenced by
+.IR mutex
+shall be locked by a call to
+\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR()
+that returns zero or
+.BR [EOWNERDEAD] .
+If the mutex is already locked by another thread, the calling thread
+shall block until the mutex becomes available. This operation shall
+return with the mutex object referenced by
+.IR mutex
+in the locked state with the calling thread as its owner. If a thread
+attempts to relock a mutex that it has already locked,
+\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR()
+shall behave as described in the
+.BR Relock
+column of the following table. If a thread attempts to unlock a mutex
+that it has not locked or a mutex which is unlocked,
+\fIpthread_mutex_unlock\fR()
+shall behave as described in the
+.BR "Unlock When Not Owner"
+column of the following table.
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB | cB | cB
+l | l | l | l.
+Mutex Type!Robustness!Relock!Unlock When Not Owner
+_
+NORMAL!non-robust!deadlock!undefined behavior
+_
+NORMAL!robust!deadlock!error returned
+_
+ERRORCHECK!either!error returned!error returned
+_
+RECURSIVE!either!recursive!error returned
+!!(see below)
+_
+DEFAULT!non-robust!undefined!undefined behavior\s-2\(dg\s+2
+!!behavior\s-2\(dg\s+2
+_
+DEFAULT!robust!undefined!error returned
+!!behavior\s-2\(dg\s+2
+.TE
+.IP "\(dg" 6
+If the mutex type is PTHREAD_MUTEX_DEFAULT, the behavior of
+\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR()
+may correspond to one of the three other standard mutex types as described
+in the table above. If it does not correspond to one of those three,
+the behavior is undefined for the cases marked \(dg.
+.P
+Where the table indicates recursive behavior, the mutex shall maintain
+the concept of a lock count. When a thread successfully acquires a
+mutex for the first time, the lock count shall be set to one. Every
+time a thread relocks this mutex, the lock count shall be incremented
+by one. Each time the thread unlocks the mutex, the lock count shall be
+decremented by one. When the lock count reaches zero, the mutex shall
+become available for other threads to acquire.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_mutex_trylock\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR(),
+except that if the mutex object referenced by
+.IR mutex
+is currently locked (by any thread, including the current thread), the
+call shall return immediately. If the mutex type is
+PTHREAD_MUTEX_RECURSIVE and the mutex is currently owned by the
+calling thread, the mutex lock count shall be incremented by one and
+the
+\fIpthread_mutex_trylock\fR()
+function shall immediately return success.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_mutex_unlock\fR()
+function shall release the mutex object referenced by
+.IR mutex .
+The manner in which a mutex is released is dependent upon the mutex's type
+attribute. If there are threads blocked on the mutex object referenced by
+.IR mutex
+when
+\fIpthread_mutex_unlock\fR()
+is called, resulting in the mutex becoming available, the scheduling
+policy shall determine which thread shall acquire the mutex.
+.P
+(In the case of PTHREAD_MUTEX_RECURSIVE mutexes, the mutex shall become
+available when the count reaches zero and the calling thread no longer
+has any locks on this mutex.)
+.P
+If a signal is delivered to a thread waiting for a mutex, upon return
+from the signal handler the thread shall resume waiting for the mutex
+as if it was not interrupted.
+.P
+If
+.IR mutex
+is a robust mutex and the process containing the owning thread
+terminated while holding the mutex lock, a call to
+\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR()
+shall return the error value
+.BR [EOWNERDEAD] .
+If
+.IR mutex
+is a robust mutex and the owning thread terminated while holding the
+mutex lock, a call to
+\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR()
+may return the error value
+.BR [EOWNERDEAD] 
+even if the process in which the owning thread resides has not
+terminated. In these cases, the mutex is locked by the thread but the
+state it protects is marked as inconsistent. The application should
+ensure that the state is made consistent for reuse and when that is
+complete call
+\fIpthread_mutex_consistent\fR().
+If the application is unable to recover the state, it should unlock the
+mutex without a prior call to
+\fIpthread_mutex_consistent\fR(),
+after which the mutex is marked permanently unusable.
+.P
+If
+.IR mutex
+does not refer to an initialized mutex object, the behavior of
+\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR(),
+\fIpthread_mutex_trylock\fR(),
+and
+\fIpthread_mutex_unlock\fR()
+is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR(),
+\fIpthread_mutex_trylock\fR(),
+and
+\fIpthread_mutex_unlock\fR()
+functions shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_mutex_trylock\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The mutex could not be acquired because the maximum number of recursive
+locks for
+.IR mutex
+has been exceeded.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR mutex
+was created with the protocol attribute having the value
+PTHREAD_PRIO_PROTECT
+and the calling thread's priority is higher than the mutex's current
+priority ceiling.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTRECOVERABLE
+.br
+The state protected by the mutex is not recoverable.
+.TP
+.BR EOWNERDEAD
+.br
+The mutex is a robust mutex and the process containing the previous
+owning thread terminated while holding the mutex lock. The mutex lock
+shall be acquired by the calling thread and it is up to the new owner
+to make the state consistent.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EDEADLK
+The mutex type is PTHREAD_MUTEX_ERRORCHECK and the current
+thread already owns the mutex.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_mutex_trylock\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBUSY
+The
+.IR mutex
+could not be acquired because it was already locked.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_mutex_unlock\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The mutex type is PTHREAD_MUTEX_ERRORCHECK or PTHREAD_MUTEX_RECURSIVE,
+or the mutex is a robust mutex, and the current thread does not own
+the mutex.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_mutex_trylock\fR()
+functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EOWNERDEAD
+.br
+The mutex is a robust mutex and the previous owning thread terminated
+while holding the mutex lock. The mutex lock shall be acquired by the
+calling thread and it is up to the new owner to make the state consistent.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EDEADLK
+A deadlock condition was detected.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications that have assumed that non-zero return values are errors
+will need updating for use with robust mutexes, since a valid return
+for a thread acquiring a mutex which is protecting a currently
+inconsistent state is
+.BR [EOWNERDEAD] .
+Applications that do not check the error returns, due to ruling out the
+possibility of such errors arising, should not use robust mutexes. If
+an application is supposed to work with normal and robust mutexes it
+should check all return values for error conditions and if necessary
+take appropriate action.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Mutex objects are intended to serve as a low-level primitive from which
+other thread synchronization functions can be built. As such, the
+implementation of mutexes should be as efficient as possible, and this
+has ramifications on the features available at the interface.
+.P
+The mutex functions and the particular default settings of the mutex
+attributes have been motivated by the desire to not preclude fast,
+inlined implementations of mutex locking and unlocking.
+.P
+Since most attributes only need to be checked when a thread is going to
+be blocked, the use of attributes does not slow the (common)
+mutex-locking case.
+.P
+Likewise, while being able to extract the thread ID of the owner of a
+mutex might be desirable, it would require storing the current thread
+ID when each mutex is locked, and this could incur unacceptable levels
+of overhead. Similar arguments apply to a
+.IR mutex_tryunlock
+operation.
+.P
+For further rationale on the extended mutex types, see the Rationale (Informative) volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Threads Extensions".
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR mutex
+argument does not refer to an initialized mutex object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_consistent\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_timedlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutexattr_getrobust\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.11" ", " "Memory Synchronization",
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_setprioceiling.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_setprioceiling.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..53ae3ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_setprioceiling.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_MUTEX_SETPRIOCEILING "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_mutex_setprioceiling
+\(em change the priority ceiling of a mutex
+(\fBREALTIME THREADS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_mutex_setprioceiling(pthread_mutex_t *restrict \fImutex\fP,
+    int \fIprioceiling\fP, int *restrict \fIold_ceiling\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_getprioceiling\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_timedlock.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_timedlock.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4c1b9cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_timedlock.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,195 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_MUTEX_TIMEDLOCK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_mutex_timedlock
+\(em lock a mutex
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+int pthread_mutex_timedlock(pthread_mutex_t *restrict \fImutex\fP,
+    const struct timespec *restrict \fIabstime\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_mutex_timedlock\fR()
+function shall lock the mutex object referenced by
+.IR mutex .
+If the mutex is already locked, the calling thread shall block
+until the mutex becomes available as in the
+\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR()
+function. If the mutex cannot be locked without waiting for another
+thread to unlock the mutex, this wait shall be terminated when the
+specified timeout expires.
+.P
+The timeout shall expire when the absolute time specified by
+.IR abstime
+passes, as measured by the clock on which timeouts are based (that is,
+when the value of that clock equals or exceeds
+.IR abstime ),
+or if the absolute time specified by
+.IR abstime
+has already been passed at the time of the call.
+.P
+The timeout shall be based on the CLOCK_REALTIME clock.
+The resolution of the timeout shall be the resolution of the clock on
+which it is based. The
+.BR timespec
+data type is defined in the
+.IR <time.h> 
+header.
+.P
+Under no circumstance shall the function fail with a timeout if the
+mutex can be locked immediately. The validity of the
+.IR abstime
+parameter need not be checked if the mutex can be locked immediately.
+.P
+As a consequence of the priority inheritance rules (for mutexes
+initialized with the PRIO_INHERIT protocol), if a timed mutex wait is
+terminated
+because its timeout expires, the priority of the owner of the mutex
+shall be adjusted as necessary to reflect the fact that this thread is
+no longer among the threads waiting for the mutex.
+.P
+If
+.IR mutex
+is a robust mutex and the process containing the owning thread
+terminated while holding the mutex lock, a call to
+\fIpthread_mutex_timedlock\fR()
+shall return the error value
+.BR [EOWNERDEAD] .
+If
+.IR mutex
+is a robust mutex and the owning thread terminated while holding the
+mutex lock, a call to
+\fIpthread_mutex_timedlock\fR()
+may return the error value
+.BR [EOWNERDEAD] 
+even if the process in which the owning thread resides has not
+terminated. In these cases, the mutex is locked by the thread but the
+state it protects is marked as inconsistent. The application should
+ensure that the state is made consistent for reuse and when that is
+complete call
+\fIpthread_mutex_consistent\fR().
+If the application is unable to recover the state, it should unlock the
+mutex without a prior call to
+\fIpthread_mutex_consistent\fR(),
+after which the mutex is marked permanently unusable.
+.P
+If
+.IR mutex
+does not refer to an initialized mutex object, the behavior is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_mutex_timedlock\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_mutex_timedlock\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The mutex could not be acquired because the maximum number of recursive
+locks for
+.IR mutex
+has been exceeded.
+.TP
+.BR EDEADLK
+The mutex type is PTHREAD_MUTEX_ERRORCHECK and the current
+thread already owns the mutex.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The mutex was created with the protocol attribute having the value
+PTHREAD_PRIO_PROTECT and the calling thread's priority is higher than
+the mutex' current priority ceiling.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The process or thread would have blocked, and the
+.IR abstime
+parameter specified a nanoseconds field value less than zero or greater
+than or equal to 1\|000 million.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTRECOVERABLE
+.br
+The state protected by the mutex is not recoverable.
+.TP
+.BR EOWNERDEAD
+.br
+The mutex is a robust mutex and the process containing the previous
+owning thread terminated while holding the mutex lock. The mutex lock
+shall be acquired by the calling thread and it is up to the new owner
+to make the state consistent.
+.TP
+.BR ETIMEDOUT
+The mutex could not be locked before the specified timeout expired.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_mutex_timedlock\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EDEADLK
+A deadlock condition was detected.
+.TP
+.BR EOWNERDEAD
+.br
+The mutex is a robust mutex and the previous owning thread terminated
+while holding the mutex lock. The mutex lock shall be acquired by the
+calling thread and it is up to the new owner to make the state consistent.
+.P
+This function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications that have assumed that non-zero return values are errors
+will need updating for use with robust mutexes, since a valid return
+for a thread acquiring a mutex which is protecting a currently
+inconsistent state is
+.BR [EOWNERDEAD] .
+Applications that do not check the error returns, due to ruling out the
+possibility of such errors arising, should not use robust mutexes. If
+an application is supposed to work with normal and robust mutexes, it
+should check all return values for error conditions and if necessary
+take appropriate action.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItime\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.11" ", " "Memory Synchronization",
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_trylock.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_trylock.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fcdf1c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutex_trylock.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_MUTEX_TRYLOCK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_mutex_trylock,
+pthread_mutex_unlock
+\(em lock and unlock a mutex
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_mutex_trylock(pthread_mutex_t *\fImutex\fP);
+int pthread_mutex_unlock(pthread_mutex_t *\fImutex\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_destroy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_destroy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1c6bdc9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_destroy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,364 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_MUTEXATTR_DESTROY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_mutexattr_destroy,
+pthread_mutexattr_init
+\(em destroy and initialize the mutex attributes object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_mutexattr_destroy(pthread_mutexattr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+int pthread_mutexattr_init(pthread_mutexattr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_destroy\fR()
+function shall destroy a mutex attributes object; the object becomes,
+in effect, uninitialized. An implementation may cause
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_destroy\fR()
+to set the object referenced by
+.IR attr
+to an invalid value.
+.P
+A destroyed
+.IR attr
+attributes object can be reinitialized using
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_init\fR();
+the results of otherwise referencing the object after it
+has been destroyed are undefined.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_init\fR()
+function shall initialize a mutex attributes object
+.IR attr
+with the default value for all of the attributes defined by the
+implementation.
+.P
+Results are undefined if
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_init\fR()
+is called specifying an already initialized
+.IR attr
+attributes object.
+.P
+After a mutex attributes object has been used to initialize one or more
+mutexes, any function affecting the attributes object (including
+destruction) shall not affect any previously initialized mutexes.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_destroy\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized mutex attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_destroy\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_init\fR()
+shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to
+indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_init\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory exists to initialize the mutex attributes object.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_destroy\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized mutex attributes object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.P
+See
+.IR "\fIpthread_attr_destroy\fR\^(\|)"
+for a general explanation of attributes. Attributes objects allow
+implementations to experiment with useful extensions and permit
+extension of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 without changing the existing functions. Thus, they
+provide for future extensibility of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 and reduce the temptation to
+standardize prematurely on semantics that are not yet widely
+implemented or understood.
+.P
+Examples of possible additional mutex attributes that have been
+discussed are
+.IR spin_only ,
+.IR limited_spin ,
+.IR no_spin ,
+.IR recursive ,
+and
+.IR metered .
+(To explain what the latter attributes might mean: recursive mutexes
+would allow for multiple re-locking by the current owner; metered
+mutexes would transparently keep records of queue length, wait time,
+and so on.) Since there is not yet wide agreement on the usefulness of
+these resulting from shared implementation and usage experience, they
+are not yet specified in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. Mutex attributes objects,
+however, make it possible to test out these concepts for possible
+standardization at a later time.
+.SS "Mutex Attributes and Performance"
+.P
+Care has been taken to ensure that the default values of the mutex
+attributes have been defined such that mutexes initialized with the
+defaults have simple enough semantics so that the locking and unlocking
+can be done with the equivalent of a test-and-set instruction (plus
+possibly a few other basic instructions).
+.P
+There is at least one implementation method that can be used to reduce
+the cost of testing at lock-time if a mutex has non-default
+attributes. One such method that an implementation can employ (and
+this can be made fully transparent to fully conforming POSIX
+applications) is to secretly pre-lock any mutexes that are initialized
+to non-default attributes. Any later attempt to lock such a mutex
+causes the implementation to branch to the ``slow path'' as if the
+mutex were unavailable; then, on the slow path, the implementation can
+do the ``real work'' to lock a non-default mutex. The underlying
+unlock operation is more complicated since the implementation never
+really wants to release the pre-lock on this kind of mutex. This
+illustrates that, depending on the hardware, there may be certain
+optimizations that can be used so that whatever mutex attributes are
+considered ``most frequently used'' can be processed most efficiently.
+.SS "Process Shared Memory and Synchronization"
+.P
+The existence of memory mapping functions in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 leads to the
+possibility that an application may allocate the synchronization
+objects from this section in memory that is accessed by multiple
+processes (and therefore, by threads of multiple processes).
+.P
+In order to permit such usage, while at the same time keeping the usual
+case (that is, usage within a single process) efficient, a
+.IR process-shared
+option has been defined.
+.P
+If an implementation supports the _POSIX_THREAD_PROCESS_SHARED
+option, then the
+.IR process-shared
+attribute can be used to indicate that mutexes or condition variables
+may be accessed by threads of multiple processes.
+.P
+The default setting of PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE
+has been chosen for the
+.IR process-shared
+attribute so that the most efficient forms of these synchronization
+objects are created by default.
+.P
+Synchronization variables that are initialized with the
+PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE
+.IR process-shared
+attribute may only be operated on by threads in the process that
+initialized them. Synchronization variables that are initialized with
+the PTHREAD_PROCESS_SHARED
+.IR process-shared
+attribute may be operated on by any thread in any process that has
+access to it. In particular, these processes may exist beyond the
+lifetime of the initializing process. For example, the following code
+implements a simple counting semaphore in a mapped file that may be
+used by many processes.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+/* sem.h */
+struct semaphore {
+    pthread_mutex_t lock;
+    pthread_cond_t nonzero;
+    unsigned count;
+};
+typedef struct semaphore semaphore_t;
+.P
+semaphore_t *semaphore_create(char *semaphore_name);
+semaphore_t *semaphore_open(char *semaphore_name);
+void semaphore_post(semaphore_t *semap);
+void semaphore_wait(semaphore_t *semap);
+void semaphore_close(semaphore_t *semap);
+.P
+/* sem.c */
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <sys/mman.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <pthread.h>
+#include "sem.h"
+.P
+semaphore_t *
+semaphore_create(char *semaphore_name)
+{
+int fd;
+    semaphore_t *semap;
+    pthread_mutexattr_t psharedm;
+    pthread_condattr_t psharedc;
+.P
+    fd = open(semaphore_name, O_RDWR | O_CREAT | O_EXCL, 0666);
+    if (fd < 0)
+        return (NULL);
+    (void) ftruncate(fd, sizeof(semaphore_t));
+    (void) pthread_mutexattr_init(&psharedm);
+    (void) pthread_mutexattr_setpshared(&psharedm,
+        PTHREAD_PROCESS_SHARED);
+    (void) pthread_condattr_init(&psharedc);
+    (void) pthread_condattr_setpshared(&psharedc,
+        PTHREAD_PROCESS_SHARED);
+    semap = (semaphore_t *) mmap(NULL, sizeof(semaphore_t),
+            PROT_READ | PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED,
+            fd, 0);
+    close (fd);
+    (void) pthread_mutex_init(&semap->lock, &psharedm);
+    (void) pthread_cond_init(&semap->nonzero, &psharedc);
+    semap->count = 0;
+    return (semap);
+}
+.P
+semaphore_t *
+semaphore_open(char *semaphore_name)
+{
+    int fd;
+    semaphore_t *semap;
+.P
+    fd = open(semaphore_name, O_RDWR, 0666);
+    if (fd < 0)
+        return (NULL);
+    semap = (semaphore_t *) mmap(NULL, sizeof(semaphore_t),
+            PROT_READ | PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED,
+            fd, 0);
+    close (fd);
+    return (semap);
+}
+.P
+void
+semaphore_post(semaphore_t *semap)
+{
+    pthread_mutex_lock(&semap->lock);
+    if (semap->count == 0)
+        pthread_cond_signal(&semapx->nonzero);
+    semap->count++;
+    pthread_mutex_unlock(&semap->lock);
+}
+.P
+void
+semaphore_wait(semaphore_t *semap)
+{
+    pthread_mutex_lock(&semap->lock);
+    while (semap->count == 0)
+        pthread_cond_wait(&semap->nonzero, &semap->lock);
+    semap->count-\|-;
+    pthread_mutex_unlock(&semap->lock);
+}
+.P
+void
+semaphore_close(semaphore_t *semap)
+{
+    munmap((void *) semap, sizeof(semaphore_t));
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following code is for three separate processes that create, post,
+and wait on a semaphore in the file
+.BR /tmp/semaphore .
+Once the file is created, the post and wait programs increment and
+decrement the counting semaphore (waiting and waking as required) even
+though they did not initialize the semaphore.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+/* create.c */
+#include "pthread.h"
+#include "sem.h"
+.P
+int
+main()
+{
+    semaphore_t *semap;
+.P
+    semap = semaphore_create("/tmp/semaphore");
+    if (semap == NULL)
+        exit(1);
+    semaphore_close(semap);
+    return (0);
+}
+.P
+/* post */
+#include "pthread.h"
+#include "sem.h"
+.P
+int
+main()
+{
+    semaphore_t *semap;
+.P
+    semap = semaphore_open("/tmp/semaphore");
+    if (semap == NULL)
+        exit(1);
+    semaphore_post(semap);
+    semaphore_close(semap);
+    return (0);
+}
+.P
+/* wait */
+#include "pthread.h"
+#include "sem.h"
+.P
+int
+main()
+{
+    semaphore_t *semap;
+.P
+    semap = semaphore_open("/tmp/semaphore");
+    if (semap == NULL)
+        exit(1);
+    semaphore_wait(semap);
+    semaphore_close(semap);
+    return (0);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_cond_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_getprioceiling.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_getprioceiling.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..12b41f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_getprioceiling.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_MUTEXATTR_GETPRIOCEILING "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_mutexattr_getprioceiling,
+pthread_mutexattr_setprioceiling
+\(em get and set the prioceiling attribute of the mutex attributes object
+(\fBREALTIME THREADS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_mutexattr_getprioceiling(const pthread_mutexattr_t
+    *restrict \fIattr\fP, int *restrict \fIprioceiling\fP);
+int pthread_mutexattr_setprioceiling(pthread_mutexattr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIprioceiling\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_getprioceiling\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_setprioceiling\fR()
+functions, respectively, shall get and set the priority ceiling
+attribute of a mutex attributes object pointed to by
+.IR attr
+which was previously created by the function
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_init\fR().
+.P
+The
+.IR prioceiling
+attribute contains the priority ceiling of initialized mutexes. The
+values of
+.IR prioceiling
+are within the maximum range of priorities defined by SCHED_FIFO.
+.P
+The
+.IR prioceiling
+attribute defines the priority ceiling of initialized mutexes, which is
+the minimum priority level at which the critical section guarded by the
+mutex is executed. In order to avoid priority inversion, the priority
+ceiling of the mutex shall be set to a priority higher than or equal to
+the highest priority of all the threads that may lock that mutex. The
+values of
+.IR prioceiling
+are within the maximum range of priorities defined under the SCHED_FIFO
+scheduling policy.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_getprioceiling\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_setprioceiling\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized mutex attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_getprioceiling\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_setprioceiling\fR()
+functions shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value specified by
+.IR prioceiling
+is invalid.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The caller does not have the privilege to perform the operation.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_getprioceiling\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_setprioceiling\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized mutex attributes object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_cond_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_getprotocol.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_getprotocol.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d3ab83c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_getprotocol.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,197 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_MUTEXATTR_GETPROTOCOL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_mutexattr_getprotocol,
+pthread_mutexattr_setprotocol
+\(em get and set the protocol attribute of the mutex attributes object
+(\fBREALTIME THREADS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_mutexattr_getprotocol(const pthread_mutexattr_t
+    *restrict \fIattr\fP, int *restrict \fIprotocol\fP);
+int pthread_mutexattr_setprotocol(pthread_mutexattr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIprotocol\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_getprotocol\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_setprotocol\fR()
+functions, respectively, shall get and set the protocol attribute of
+a mutex attributes object pointed to by
+.IR attr
+which was previously created by the function
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_init\fR().
+.P
+The
+.IR protocol
+attribute defines the protocol to be followed in utilizing mutexes.
+The value of
+.IR protocol
+may be one of:
+.P
+.nf
+PTHREAD_PRIO_INHERIT
+PTHREAD_PRIO_NONE
+PTHREAD_PRIO_PROTECT
+.fi
+.P
+which are defined in the
+.IR <pthread.h> 
+header. The default value of the attribute shall be PTHREAD_PRIO_NONE.
+.P
+When a thread owns a mutex with the PTHREAD_PRIO_NONE
+.IR protocol
+attribute, its priority and scheduling shall not be affected by
+its mutex ownership.
+.P
+When a thread is blocking higher priority threads because of owning one
+or more robust mutexes with the PTHREAD_PRIO_INHERIT
+.IR protocol
+attribute, it shall execute at the higher of its priority or the priority
+of the highest priority thread waiting on any of the robust mutexes
+owned by this thread and initialized with this protocol.
+.P
+When a thread is blocking higher priority threads because of owning one
+or more non-robust mutexes with the PTHREAD_PRIO_INHERIT
+.IR protocol
+attribute, it shall execute at the higher of its priority or the priority
+of the highest priority thread waiting on any of the non-robust mutexes
+owned by this thread and initialized with this protocol.
+.P
+When a thread owns one or more robust mutexes initialized with the
+PTHREAD_PRIO_PROTECT protocol, it shall execute at the higher of its
+priority or the highest of the priority ceilings of all the robust mutexes
+owned by this thread and initialized with this attribute, regardless of
+whether other threads are blocked on any of these robust mutexes or not.
+.P
+When a thread owns one or more non-robust mutexes initialized with the
+PTHREAD_PRIO_PROTECT protocol, it shall execute at the higher of its
+priority or the highest of the priority ceilings of all the non-robust
+mutexes owned by this thread and initialized with this attribute,
+regardless of whether other threads are blocked on any of these non-robust
+mutexes or not.
+.P
+While a thread is holding a mutex which has been initialized with the
+PTHREAD_PRIO_INHERIT or PTHREAD_PRIO_PROTECT protocol attributes, it
+shall not be subject to being moved to the tail of the scheduling queue
+at its priority in the event that its original priority is changed,
+such as by a call to
+\fIsched_setparam\fR().
+Likewise, when a thread unlocks a mutex that has been initialized with
+the PTHREAD_PRIO_INHERIT or PTHREAD_PRIO_PROTECT protocol attributes,
+it shall not be subject to being moved to the tail of the scheduling
+queue at its priority in the event that its original priority is
+changed.
+.P
+If a thread simultaneously owns several mutexes initialized with
+different protocols, it shall execute at the highest of the priorities
+that it would have obtained by each of these protocols.
+.P
+When a thread makes a call to
+\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR(),
+the mutex was initialized with the protocol attribute having the value
+PTHREAD_PRIO_INHERIT, when the calling thread is blocked because the
+mutex is owned by another thread, that owner thread shall inherit the
+priority level of the calling thread as long as it continues to own the
+mutex. The implementation shall update its execution priority to the
+maximum of its assigned priority and all its inherited priorities.
+Furthermore, if this owner thread itself becomes blocked on another
+mutex with the
+.IR protocol
+attribute having the value PTHREAD_PRIO_INHERIT, the same priority
+inheritance effect shall be propagated to this other owner thread,
+in a recursive manner.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_getprotocol\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_setprotocol\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized mutex attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_getprotocol\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_setprotocol\fR()
+functions shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_setprotocol\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSUP
+The value specified by
+.IR protocol
+is an unsupported value.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_getprotocol\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_setprotocol\fR()
+functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value specified by
+.IR protocol
+is invalid.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The caller does not have the privilege to perform the operation.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_getprotocol\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_setprotocol\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized mutex attributes object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_cond_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_getpshared.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_getpshared.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1c2d107
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_getpshared.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_MUTEXATTR_GETPSHARED "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_mutexattr_getpshared,
+pthread_mutexattr_setpshared
+\(em get and set the process-shared attribute
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_mutexattr_getpshared(const pthread_mutexattr_t
+    *restrict \fIattr\fP, int *restrict \fIpshared\fP);
+int pthread_mutexattr_setpshared(pthread_mutexattr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIpshared\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_getpshared\fR()
+function shall obtain the value of the
+.IR process-shared
+attribute from the attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_setpshared\fR()
+function shall set the
+.IR process-shared
+attribute in an initialized attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+.P
+The
+.IR process-shared
+attribute is set to PTHREAD_PROCESS_SHARED to permit a mutex
+to be operated upon by any thread that has access to the memory where
+the mutex is allocated, even if the mutex is allocated in memory that
+is shared by multiple processes. If the
+.IR process-shared
+attribute is PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE, the mutex shall only be operated
+upon by threads created within the same process as the thread that
+initialized the mutex; if threads of differing processes attempt to
+operate on such a mutex, the behavior is undefined. The default value
+of the attribute shall be PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_getpshared\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_setpshared\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized mutex attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_setpshared\fR()
+shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to
+indicate the error.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_getpshared\fR()
+shall return zero and store the value of the
+.IR process-shared
+attribute of
+.IR attr
+into the object referenced by the
+.IR pshared
+parameter. Otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate
+the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_setpshared\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The new value specified for the attribute is outside the range of legal
+values for that attribute.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_getpshared\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_setpshared\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized mutex attributes object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_cond_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutexattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_getrobust.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_getrobust.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5196d9c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_getrobust.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,160 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_MUTEXATTR_GETROBUST "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_mutexattr_getrobust,
+pthread_mutexattr_setrobust
+\(em get and set the mutex robust attribute
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_mutexattr_getrobust(const pthread_mutexattr_t *restrict
+    \fIattr\fP, int *restrict \fIrobust\fP);
+int pthread_mutexattr_setrobust(pthread_mutexattr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIrobust\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_getrobust\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_setrobust\fR()
+functions, respectively, shall get and set the mutex
+.IR robust
+attribute. This attribute is set in the
+.IR robust
+parameter. Valid values for
+.IR robust
+include:
+.IP PTHREAD_MUTEX_STALLED 6
+.br
+No special actions are taken if the owner of the mutex is terminated
+while holding the mutex lock. This can lead to deadlocks if no other
+thread can unlock the mutex.
+.br
+This is the default value.
+.IP PTHREAD_MUTEX_ROBUST 6
+.br
+If the process containing the owning thread of a robust mutex
+terminates while holding the mutex lock, the next thread that acquires
+the mutex shall be notified about the termination by the return value
+.BR [EOWNERDEAD] 
+from the locking function. If the owning thread of a robust mutex
+terminates while holding the mutex lock, the next thread that acquires
+the mutex may be notified about the termination by the return value
+.BR [EOWNERDEAD] .
+The notified thread can then attempt to mark the state protected by the
+mutex as consistent again by a call to
+\fIpthread_mutex_consistent\fR().
+After a subsequent successful call to
+\fIpthread_mutex_unlock\fR(),
+the mutex lock shall be released and can be used normally by other
+threads. If the mutex is unlocked without a call to
+\fIpthread_mutex_consistent\fR(),
+it shall be in a permanently unusable state and all attempts to lock
+the mutex shall fail with the error
+.BR [ENOTRECOVERABLE] .
+The only permissible operation on such a mutex is
+\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR().
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_getrobust\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_setrobust\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized mutex attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_getrobust\fR()
+function shall return zero and store the value of the
+.IR robust
+attribute of
+.IR attr
+into the object referenced by the
+.IR robust
+parameter. Otherwise, an error value shall be returned to indicate the
+error. If successful, the
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_setrobust\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_setrobust\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR robust
+is invalid.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The actions required to make the state protected by the mutex
+consistent again are solely dependent on the application. If it is not
+possible to make the state of a mutex consistent, robust mutexes can be
+used to notify this situation by calling
+\fIpthread_mutex_unlock\fR()
+without a prior call to
+\fIpthread_mutex_consistent\fR().
+.P
+If the state is declared inconsistent by calling
+\fIpthread_mutex_unlock\fR()
+without a prior call to
+\fIpthread_mutex_consistent\fR(),
+a possible approach could be to destroy the mutex and then reinitialize
+it. However, it should be noted that this is possible only in certain
+situations where the state protected by the mutex has to be
+reinitialized and coordination achieved with other threads blocked on
+the mutex, because otherwise a call to a locking function with a
+reference to a mutex object invalidated by a call to
+\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR()
+results in undefined behavior.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_getrobust\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_setrobust\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized mutex attributes object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_consistent\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_gettype.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_gettype.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..778792d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_gettype.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_MUTEXATTR_GETTYPE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_mutexattr_gettype,
+pthread_mutexattr_settype
+\(em get and set the mutex type attribute
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_mutexattr_gettype(const pthread_mutexattr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP,
+    int *restrict \fItype\fP);
+int pthread_mutexattr_settype(pthread_mutexattr_t *\fIattr\fP, int \fItype\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_gettype\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_settype\fR()
+functions, respectively, shall get and set the mutex
+.IR type
+attribute. This attribute is set in the
+.IR type
+parameter to these functions. The default value of the
+.IR type
+attribute is PTHREAD_MUTEX_DEFAULT.
+.P
+The type of mutex is contained in the
+.IR type
+attribute of the mutex attributes. Valid mutex types include:
+.sp
+.RS
+PTHREAD_MUTEX_NORMAL
+PTHREAD_MUTEX_ERRORCHECK
+PTHREAD_MUTEX_RECURSIVE
+PTHREAD_MUTEX_DEFAULT
+.RE
+.P
+The mutex type affects the behavior of calls which lock and unlock the
+mutex. See
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR\^(\|)"
+for details. An implementation may map PTHREAD_MUTEX_DEFAULT to one of
+the other mutex types.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_gettype\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_settype\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized mutex attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_gettype\fR()
+function shall return zero and store the value of the
+.IR type
+attribute of
+.IR attr
+into the object referenced by the
+.IR type
+parameter. Otherwise, an error shall be returned to indicate the error.
+.P
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_settype\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_settype\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value
+.IR type
+is invalid.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+It is advised that an application should not use a
+PTHREAD_MUTEX_RECURSIVE mutex with condition variables
+because the implicit unlock performed for a
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_cond_wait\fR()
+may not actually release the mutex (if it had been locked multiple
+times). If this happens, no other thread can satisfy the condition of
+the predicate.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_gettype\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_mutexattr_settype\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized mutex attributes object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutex_lock\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_init.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_init.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8af996b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_init.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_MUTEXATTR_INIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_mutexattr_init
+\(em initialize the mutex attributes object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_mutexattr_init(pthread_mutexattr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutexattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_setprioceiling.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_setprioceiling.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e70d436
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_setprioceiling.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_MUTEXATTR_SETPRIOCEILING "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_mutexattr_setprioceiling
+\(em set the prioceiling attribute of the mutex attributes object
+(\fBREALTIME THREADS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_mutexattr_setprioceiling(pthread_mutexattr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIprioceiling\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutexattr_getprioceiling\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_setprotocol.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_setprotocol.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dccf9a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_setprotocol.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_MUTEXATTR_SETPROTOCOL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_mutexattr_setprotocol
+\(em set the protocol attribute of the mutex attributes object
+(\fBREALTIME THREADS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_mutexattr_setprotocol(pthread_mutexattr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIprotocol\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutexattr_getprotocol\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_setpshared.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_setpshared.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d89560e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_setpshared.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_MUTEXATTR_SETPSHARED "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_mutexattr_setpshared
+\(em set the process-shared attribute
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_mutexattr_setpshared(pthread_mutexattr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIpshared\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutexattr_getpshared\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_setrobust.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_setrobust.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f889f91
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_setrobust.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_MUTEXATTR_SETROBUST "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_mutexattr_setrobust
+\(em get and set the mutex robust attribute
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_mutexattr_setrobust(pthread_mutexattr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIrobust\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutexattr_getrobust\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_settype.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_settype.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..332df5c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_mutexattr_settype.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_MUTEXATTR_SETTYPE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_mutexattr_settype
+\(em set the mutex type attribute
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_mutexattr_settype(pthread_mutexattr_t *\fIattr\fP, int \fItype\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_mutexattr_gettype\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_once.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_once.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..316b1e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_once.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,175 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_ONCE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_once
+\(em dynamic package initialization
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_once(pthread_once_t *\fIonce_control\fP,
+    void (*\fIinit_routine\fP)(void));
+pthread_once_t \fIonce_control\fP = PTHREAD_ONCE_INIT;
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The first call to
+\fIpthread_once\fR()
+by any thread in a process, with a given
+.IR once_control ,
+shall call the
+.IR init_routine
+with no arguments. Subsequent calls of
+\fIpthread_once\fR()
+with the same
+.IR once_control
+shall not call the
+.IR init_routine .
+On return from
+\fIpthread_once\fR(),
+.IR init_routine
+shall have completed. The
+.IR once_control
+parameter shall determine whether the associated initialization
+routine has been called.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_once\fR()
+function is not a cancellation point. However, if
+.IR init_routine
+is a cancellation point and is canceled, the effect on
+.IR once_control
+shall be as if
+\fIpthread_once\fR()
+was never called.
+.P
+The constant PTHREAD_ONCE_INIT is defined in the
+.IR <pthread.h> 
+header.
+.P
+The behavior of
+\fIpthread_once\fR()
+is undefined if
+.IR once_control
+has automatic storage duration or is not initialized by
+PTHREAD_ONCE_INIT.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIpthread_once\fR()
+shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be returned to
+indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_once\fR()
+function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Some C libraries are designed for dynamic initialization. That is, the
+global initialization for the library is performed when the first
+procedure in the library is called. In a single-threaded program, this
+is normally implemented using a static variable whose value is checked
+on entry to a routine, as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+static int random_is_initialized = 0;
+extern int initialize_random();
+.P
+int random_function()
+{
+    if (random_is_initialized == 0) {
+        initialize_random();
+        random_is_initialized = 1;
+    }
+    ... /* Operations performed after initialization. */
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+To keep the same structure in a multi-threaded program, a new primitive
+is needed. Otherwise, library initialization has to be accomplished by
+an explicit call to a library-exported initialization function prior to
+any use of the library.
+.P
+For dynamic library initialization in a multi-threaded process, a
+simple initialization flag is not sufficient; the flag needs to be
+protected against modification by multiple threads simultaneously
+calling into the library. Protecting the flag requires the use of a
+mutex; however, mutexes have to be initialized before they are used.
+Ensuring that the mutex is only initialized once requires a recursive
+solution to this problem.
+.P
+The use of
+\fIpthread_once\fR()
+not only supplies an implementation-guaranteed means of dynamic
+initialization, it provides an aid to the reliable construction of
+multi-threaded and realtime systems. The preceding example then
+becomes:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <pthread.h>
+static pthread_once_t random_is_initialized = PTHREAD_ONCE_INIT;
+extern int initialize_random();
+.P
+int random_function()
+{
+    (void) pthread_once(&random_is_initialized, initialize_random);
+    ... /* Operations performed after initialization. */
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Note that a
+.BR pthread_once_t
+cannot be an array because some compilers do not accept the construct
+\fB&<array_name>\fP.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR once_control
+argument to
+\fIpthread_once\fR()
+does not refer to a
+.BR pthread_once_t
+object initialized by PTHREAD_ONCE_INIT, it is recommended that the
+function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..acc1dd4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,195 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_RWLOCK_DESTROY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_rwlock_destroy,
+pthread_rwlock_init
+\(em destroy and initialize a read-write lock object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_rwlock_destroy(pthread_rwlock_t *\fIrwlock\fP);
+int pthread_rwlock_init(pthread_rwlock_t *restrict \fIrwlock\fP,
+    const pthread_rwlockattr_t *restrict \fIattr\fP);
+pthread_rwlock_t \fIrwlock\fR = PTHREAD_RWLOCK_INITIALIZER;
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_destroy\fR()
+function shall destroy the read-write lock object referenced by
+.IR rwlock
+and release any resources used by the lock. The effect of subsequent
+use of the lock is undefined until the lock is reinitialized by
+another call to
+\fIpthread_rwlock_init\fR().
+An implementation may cause
+\fIpthread_rwlock_destroy\fR()
+to set the object referenced by
+.IR rwlock
+to an invalid value. Results are undefined if
+\fIpthread_rwlock_destroy\fR()
+is called when any thread holds
+.IR rwlock .
+Attempting to destroy an uninitialized read-write lock results in
+undefined behavior.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_init\fR()
+function shall allocate any resources required to use the read-write
+lock referenced by
+.IR rwlock
+and initializes the lock to an unlocked state with attributes
+referenced by
+.IR attr .
+If
+.IR attr
+is NULL, the default read-write lock attributes shall be used; the
+effect is the same as passing the address of a default read-write lock
+attributes object. Once initialized, the lock can be used any number of
+times without being reinitialized. Results are undefined if
+\fIpthread_rwlock_init\fR()
+is called specifying an already initialized read-write lock. Results
+are undefined if a read-write lock is used without first being
+initialized.
+.P
+If the
+\fIpthread_rwlock_init\fR()
+function fails,
+.IR rwlock
+shall not be initialized and the contents of
+.IR rwlock
+are undefined.
+.P
+Only the object referenced by
+.IR rwlock
+may be used for performing synchronization. The result of referring to
+copies of that object in calls to
+\fIpthread_rwlock_destroy\fR(),
+\fIpthread_rwlock_rdlock\fR(),
+\fIpthread_rwlock_timedrdlock\fR(),
+\fIpthread_rwlock_timedwrlock\fR(),
+\fIpthread_rwlock_tryrdlock\fR(),
+\fIpthread_rwlock_trywrlock\fR(),
+\fIpthread_rwlock_unlock\fR(),
+or
+\fIpthread_rwlock_wrlock\fR()
+is undefined.
+.P
+In cases where default read-write lock attributes are appropriate, the
+macro PTHREAD_RWLOCK_INITIALIZER can be used to initialize read-write
+locks. The effect shall be equivalent to dynamic initialization by a
+call to
+\fIpthread_rwlock_init\fR()
+with the
+.IR attr
+parameter specified as NULL, except that no error checks are performed.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_rwlock_init\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized read-write lock attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_rwlock_destroy\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_rwlock_init\fR()
+functions shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_init\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The system lacked the necessary resources (other than memory) to
+initialize another read-write lock.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory exists to initialize the read-write lock.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The caller does not have the privilege to perform the operation.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications using these and related read-write lock functions may be
+subject to priority inversion, as discussed in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.287" ", " "Priority Inversion".
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR rwlock
+argument to
+\fIpthread_rwlock_destroy\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized read-write lock object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_rwlockr_init\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized read-write lock attributes object,
+it is recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR rwlock
+argument to
+\fIpthread_rwlock_destroy\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_rwlock_init\fR()
+refers to a locked read-write lock object, or detects that the value
+specified by the
+.IR rwlock
+argument to
+\fIpthread_rwlock_init\fR()
+refers to an already initialized read-write lock object, it is recommended
+that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EBUSY] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_rdlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_timedrdlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_timedwrlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_trywrlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_unlock\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.287" ", " "Priority Inversion",
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_rdlock.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_rdlock.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6aa04e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_rdlock.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,182 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_RWLOCK_RDLOCK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_rwlock_rdlock,
+pthread_rwlock_tryrdlock
+\(em lock a read-write lock object for reading
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_rwlock_rdlock(pthread_rwlock_t *\fIrwlock\fP);
+int pthread_rwlock_tryrdlock(pthread_rwlock_t *\fIrwlock\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_rdlock\fR()
+function shall apply a read lock to the read-write lock referenced by
+.IR rwlock .
+The calling thread acquires the read lock if a writer does not hold the
+lock and there are no writers blocked on the lock.
+.P
+If the Thread Execution Scheduling option is supported, and the threads
+involved in the lock are executing with the scheduling policies
+SCHED_FIFO or SCHED_RR, the calling thread shall
+not acquire the lock if a writer holds the lock or if writers of higher
+or equal priority are blocked on the lock; otherwise, the calling
+thread shall acquire the lock.
+.P
+If the Thread Execution Scheduling option is supported, and the
+threads involved in the lock are executing with the SCHED_SPORADIC
+scheduling policy, the calling thread shall not acquire the lock if a
+writer holds the lock or if writers of higher or equal priority are
+blocked on the lock; otherwise, the calling thread shall acquire the
+lock.
+.P
+If the Thread Execution Scheduling option is not supported, it is
+implementation-defined whether the calling thread acquires the lock
+when a writer does not hold the lock and there are writers blocked on
+the lock. If a writer holds the lock, the calling thread shall not
+acquire the read lock. If the read lock is not acquired, the calling
+thread shall block until it can acquire the lock. The calling thread
+may deadlock if at the time the call is made it holds a write lock.
+.P
+A thread may hold multiple concurrent read locks on
+.IR rwlock
+(that is, successfully call the
+\fIpthread_rwlock_rdlock\fR()
+function
+.IR n
+times). If so, the application shall ensure that the thread performs
+matching unlocks (that is, it calls the
+\fIpthread_rwlock_unlock\fR()
+function
+.IR n
+times).
+.P
+The maximum number of simultaneous read locks that an implementation
+guarantees can be applied to a read-write lock shall be
+implementation-defined. The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_rdlock\fR()
+function may fail if this maximum would be exceeded.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_tryrdlock\fR()
+function shall apply a read lock as in the
+\fIpthread_rwlock_rdlock\fR()
+function, with the exception that the function shall fail if the
+equivalent
+\fIpthread_rwlock_rdlock\fR()
+call would have blocked the calling thread. In no case shall the
+\fIpthread_rwlock_tryrdlock\fR()
+function ever block; it always either acquires the lock or fails and
+returns immediately.
+.P
+Results are undefined if any of these functions are called with an
+uninitialized read-write lock.
+.P
+If a signal is delivered to a thread waiting for a read-write lock for
+reading, upon return from the signal handler the thread resumes waiting
+for the read-write lock for reading as if it was not interrupted.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_rwlock_rdlock\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_tryrdlock\fR()
+function shall return zero if the lock for reading on the read-write
+lock object referenced by
+.IR rwlock
+is acquired. Otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate
+the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_tryrdlock\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBUSY
+The read-write lock could not be acquired for reading because a writer
+holds the lock or a writer with the appropriate priority was blocked on it.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_rdlock\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_rwlock_tryrdlock\fR()
+functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The read lock could not be acquired because the maximum number of read
+locks for
+.IR rwlock
+has been exceeded.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_rdlock\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EDEADLK
+A deadlock condition was detected or the current thread already owns
+the read-write lock for writing.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications using these functions may be subject to priority inversion,
+as discussed in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.287" ", " "Priority Inversion".
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR rwlock
+argument to
+\fIpthread_rwlock_rdlock\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_rwlock_tryrdlock\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized read-write lock object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_timedrdlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_timedwrlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_trywrlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_unlock\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.287" ", " "Priority Inversion",
+.IR "Section 4.11" ", " "Memory Synchronization",
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_timedrdlock.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_timedrdlock.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5ad394f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_timedrdlock.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,148 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_RWLOCK_TIMEDRDLOCK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_rwlock_timedrdlock
+\(em lock a read-write lock for reading
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+int pthread_rwlock_timedrdlock(pthread_rwlock_t *restrict \fIrwlock\fP,
+    const struct timespec *restrict \fIabstime\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_timedrdlock\fR()
+function shall apply a read lock to the read-write lock referenced by
+.IR rwlock
+as in the
+\fIpthread_rwlock_rdlock\fR()
+function. However, if the lock cannot be acquired without waiting for
+other threads to unlock the lock, this wait shall be terminated when
+the specified timeout expires. The timeout shall expire when the
+absolute time specified by
+.IR abstime
+passes, as measured by the clock on which timeouts are based (that is,
+when the value of that clock equals or exceeds
+.IR abstime ),
+or if the absolute time specified by
+.IR abstime
+has already been passed at the time of the call.
+.P
+The timeout shall be based on the CLOCK_REALTIME clock.
+The resolution of the timeout shall be the resolution of the
+CLOCK_REALTIME clock. The
+.BR timespec
+data type is defined in the
+.IR <time.h> 
+header. Under no circumstances shall the function fail with a timeout
+if the lock can be acquired immediately. The validity of the
+.IR abstime
+parameter need not be checked if the lock can be immediately acquired.
+.P
+If a signal that causes a signal handler to be executed is delivered to
+a thread blocked on a read-write lock via a call to
+\fIpthread_rwlock_timedrdlock\fR(),
+upon return from the signal handler the thread shall resume waiting for
+the lock as if it was not interrupted.
+.P
+The calling thread may deadlock if at the time the call is made it
+holds a write lock on
+.IR rwlock .
+The results are undefined if this function is called with an
+uninitialized read-write lock.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_timedrdlock\fR()
+function shall return zero if the lock for reading on the read-write
+lock object referenced by
+.IR rwlock
+is acquired. Otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate
+the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_timedrdlock\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ETIMEDOUT
+The lock could not be acquired before the specified timeout expired.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_timedrdlock\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The read lock could not be acquired because the maximum number of read
+locks for lock would be exceeded.
+.TP
+.BR EDEADLK
+A deadlock condition was detected or the calling thread already holds a
+write lock on
+.IR rwlock .
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR abstime
+nanosecond value is less than zero or greater than or equal to 1\|000
+million.
+.P
+This function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications using this function may be subject to priority inversion,
+as discussed in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.287" ", " "Priority Inversion".
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR rwlock
+argument to
+\fIpthread_rwlock_timedrdlock\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized read-write lock object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_rdlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_timedwrlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_trywrlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_unlock\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.287" ", " "Priority Inversion",
+.IR "Section 4.11" ", " "Memory Synchronization",
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_timedwrlock.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_timedwrlock.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3cc9dbe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_timedwrlock.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_RWLOCK_TIMEDWRLOCK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_rwlock_timedwrlock
+\(em lock a read-write lock for writing
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+int pthread_rwlock_timedwrlock(pthread_rwlock_t *restrict \fIrwlock\fP,
+    const struct timespec *restrict \fIabstime\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_timedwrlock\fR()
+function shall apply a write lock to the read-write lock referenced by
+.IR rwlock
+as in the
+\fIpthread_rwlock_wrlock\fR()
+function. However, if the lock cannot be acquired without waiting for
+other threads to unlock the lock, this wait shall be terminated when
+the specified timeout expires. The timeout shall expire when the
+absolute time specified by
+.IR abstime
+passes, as measured by the clock on which timeouts are based (that is,
+when the value of that clock equals or exceeds
+.IR abstime ),
+or if the absolute time specified by
+.IR abstime
+has already been passed at the time of the call.
+.P
+The timeout shall be based on the CLOCK_REALTIME clock.
+The resolution of the timeout shall be the resolution of the
+CLOCK_REALTIME clock. The
+.BR timespec
+data type is defined in the
+.IR <time.h> 
+header. Under no circumstances shall the function fail with a timeout
+if the lock can be acquired immediately. The validity of the
+.IR abstime
+parameter need not be checked if the lock can be immediately acquired.
+.P
+If a signal that causes a signal handler to be executed is delivered to
+a thread blocked on a read-write lock via a call to
+\fIpthread_rwlock_timedwrlock\fR(),
+upon return from the signal handler the thread shall resume waiting for
+the lock as if it was not interrupted.
+.P
+The calling thread may deadlock if at the time the call is made it
+holds the read-write lock. The results are undefined if this function
+is called with an uninitialized read-write lock.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_timedwrlock\fR()
+function shall return zero if the lock for writing on the read-write
+lock object referenced by
+.IR rwlock
+is acquired. Otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate
+the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_timedwrlock\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ETIMEDOUT
+The lock could not be acquired before the specified timeout expired.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_timedwrlock\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EDEADLK
+A deadlock condition was detected or the calling thread already holds the
+.IR rwlock .
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR abstime
+nanosecond value is less than zero or greater than or equal to 1\|000
+million.
+.P
+This function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications using this function may be subject to priority inversion,
+as discussed in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.287" ", " "Priority Inversion".
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR rwlock
+argument to
+\fIpthread_rwlock_timedwrlock\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized read-write lock object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_rdlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_timedrdlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_trywrlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_unlock\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.287" ", " "Priority Inversion",
+.IR "Section 4.11" ", " "Memory Synchronization",
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_tryrdlock.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_tryrdlock.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef9a3b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_tryrdlock.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_RWLOCK_TRYRDLOCK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_rwlock_tryrdlock
+\(em lock a read-write lock object for reading
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_rwlock_tryrdlock(pthread_rwlock_t *\fIrwlock\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_rdlock\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_trywrlock.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_trywrlock.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..30313d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_trywrlock.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_RWLOCK_TRYWRLOCK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_rwlock_trywrlock,
+pthread_rwlock_wrlock
+\(em lock a read-write lock object for writing
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_rwlock_trywrlock(pthread_rwlock_t *\fIrwlock\fP);
+int pthread_rwlock_wrlock(pthread_rwlock_t *\fIrwlock\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_trywrlock\fR()
+function shall apply a write lock like the
+\fIpthread_rwlock_wrlock\fR()
+function, with the exception that the function shall fail if any thread
+currently holds
+.IR rwlock
+(for reading or writing).
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_wrlock\fR()
+function shall apply a write lock to the read-write lock referenced by
+.IR rwlock .
+The calling thread acquires the write lock if no other thread (reader
+or writer) holds the read-write lock
+.IR rwlock .
+Otherwise, the thread shall block until it can acquire the lock. The
+calling thread may deadlock if at the time the call is made it holds
+the read-write lock (whether a read or write lock).
+.P
+Implementations may favor writers over readers to avoid
+writer starvation.
+.P
+Results are undefined if any of these functions are called with an
+uninitialized read-write lock.
+.P
+If a signal is delivered to a thread waiting for a read-write lock for
+writing, upon return from the signal handler the thread resumes waiting
+for the read-write lock for writing as if it was not interrupted.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_trywrlock\fR()
+function shall return zero if the lock for writing on the read-write
+lock object referenced by
+.IR rwlock
+is acquired. Otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate
+the error.
+.P
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_rwlock_wrlock\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_trywrlock\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBUSY
+The read-write lock could not be acquired for writing because it was
+already locked for reading or writing.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_wrlock\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EDEADLK
+A deadlock condition was detected or the current thread already owns
+the read-write lock for writing or reading.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications using these functions may be subject to priority inversion,
+as discussed in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.287" ", " "Priority Inversion".
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR rwlock
+argument to
+\fIpthread_rwlock_trywrlock\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_rwlock_wrlock\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized read-write lock object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_rdlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_timedrdlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_timedwrlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_unlock\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.287" ", " "Priority Inversion",
+.IR "Section 4.11" ", " "Memory Synchronization",
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_unlock.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_unlock.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5583dc5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_unlock.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_RWLOCK_UNLOCK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_rwlock_unlock
+\(em unlock a read-write lock object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_rwlock_unlock(pthread_rwlock_t *\fIrwlock\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_unlock\fR()
+function shall release a lock held on the read-write lock object
+referenced by
+.IR rwlock .
+Results are undefined if the read-write lock
+.IR rwlock
+is not held by the calling thread.
+.P
+If this function is called to release a read lock from the read-write
+lock object and there are other read locks currently held on this
+read-write lock object, the read-write lock object remains in the read
+locked state. If this function releases the last read lock for this
+read-write lock object, the read-write lock object shall be put in the
+unlocked state with no owners.
+.P
+If this function is called to release a write lock for this read-write
+lock object, the read-write lock object shall be put in the unlocked
+state.
+.P
+If there are threads blocked on the lock when it becomes available, the
+scheduling policy shall determine which thread(s) shall acquire the
+lock.
+If the Thread Execution Scheduling option is supported, when threads
+executing with the scheduling policies SCHED_FIFO, SCHED_RR, or
+SCHED_SPORADIC are waiting on the lock, they shall acquire the lock in
+priority order when the lock becomes available. For equal priority
+threads, write locks shall take precedence over read locks.
+If the Thread Execution Scheduling option is not supported, it is
+implementation-defined whether write locks take precedence over read
+locks.
+.P
+Results are undefined if this function is called with an uninitialized
+read-write lock.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_rwlock_unlock\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlock_unlock\fR()
+function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR rwlock
+argument to
+\fIpthread_rwlock_unlock\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized read-write lock object, it is
+recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR rwlock
+argument to
+\fIpthread_rwlock_unlock\fR()
+refers to a read-write lock object for which the current thread does
+not hold a lock, it is recommended that the function should fail
+and report an
+.BR [EPERM] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_rdlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_timedrdlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_timedwrlock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_trywrlock\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.11" ", " "Memory Synchronization",
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_wrlock.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_wrlock.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c6a2940
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlock_wrlock.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_RWLOCK_WRLOCK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_rwlock_wrlock
+\(em lock a read-write lock object for writing
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_rwlock_wrlock(pthread_rwlock_t *\fIrwlock\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_trywrlock\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..330812b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_RWLOCKATTR_DESTROY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_rwlockattr_destroy,
+pthread_rwlockattr_init
+\(em destroy and initialize the read-write lock attributes object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_rwlockattr_destroy(pthread_rwlockattr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+int pthread_rwlockattr_init(pthread_rwlockattr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlockattr_destroy\fR()
+function shall destroy a read-write lock attributes object. A destroyed
+.IR attr
+attributes object can be reinitialized using
+\fIpthread_rwlockattr_init\fR();
+the results of otherwise referencing the object after it
+has been destroyed are undefined. An implementation may cause
+\fIpthread_rwlockattr_destroy\fR()
+to set the object referenced by
+.IR attr
+to an invalid value.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlockattr_init\fR()
+function shall initialize a read-write lock attributes object
+.IR attr
+with the default value for all of the attributes defined by the
+implementation.
+.P
+Results are undefined if
+\fIpthread_rwlockattr_init\fR()
+is called specifying an already initialized
+.IR attr
+attributes object.
+.P
+After a read-write lock attributes object has been used to initialize
+one or more read-write locks, any function affecting the attributes
+object (including destruction) shall not affect any previously
+initialized read-write locks.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_rwlockattr_destroy\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized read-write lock attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_rwlockattr_destroy\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_rwlockattr_init\fR()
+functions shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlockattr_init\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory exists to initialize the read-write lock attributes
+object.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_rwlockattr_destroy\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized read-write lock attributes object,
+it is recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlockattr_getpshared\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlockattr_getpshared.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlockattr_getpshared.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aae565c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlockattr_getpshared.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_RWLOCKATTR_GETPSHARED "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_rwlockattr_getpshared,
+pthread_rwlockattr_setpshared
+\(em get and set the process-shared attribute of the read-write lock
+attributes object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_rwlockattr_getpshared(const pthread_rwlockattr_t
+    *restrict \fIattr\fP, int *restrict \fIpshared\fP);
+int pthread_rwlockattr_setpshared(pthread_rwlockattr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIpshared\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlockattr_getpshared\fR()
+function shall obtain the value of the
+.IR process-shared
+attribute from the initialized attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlockattr_setpshared\fR()
+function shall set the
+.IR process-shared
+attribute in an initialized attributes object referenced by
+.IR attr .
+.P
+The
+.IR process-shared
+attribute shall be set to PTHREAD_PROCESS_SHARED to
+permit a read-write lock to be operated upon by any thread that has
+access to the memory where the read-write lock is allocated, even if
+the read-write lock is allocated in memory that is shared by multiple
+processes. If the
+.IR process-shared
+attribute is PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE, the
+read-write lock shall only be operated upon by threads created within
+the same process as the thread that initialized the read-write lock; if
+threads of differing processes attempt to operate on such a read-write
+lock, the behavior is undefined. The default value of the
+.IR process-shared
+attribute shall be PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE.
+.P
+Additional attributes, their default values, and the names of the
+associated functions to get and set those attribute values are
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the value specified by the
+.IR attr
+argument to
+\fIpthread_rwlockattr_getpshared\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_rwlockattr_setpshared\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized read-write lock attributes object.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIpthread_rwlockattr_getpshared\fR()
+function shall return zero and store the value of the
+.IR process-shared
+attribute of
+.IR attr
+into the object referenced by the
+.IR pshared
+parameter. Otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate the
+error.
+.P
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_rwlockattr_setpshared\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_rwlockattr_setpshared\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The new value specified for the attribute is outside the range of legal
+values for that attribute.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlock_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlockattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlockattr_init.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlockattr_init.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..31736b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlockattr_init.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_RWLOCKATTR_INIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_rwlockattr_init
+\(em initialize the read-write lock attributes object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_rwlockattr_init(pthread_rwlockattr_t *\fIattr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlockattr_destroy\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlockattr_setpshared.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlockattr_setpshared.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..929fbac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_rwlockattr_setpshared.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_RWLOCKATTR_SETPSHARED "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_rwlockattr_setpshared
+\(em set the process-shared attribute of the read-write lock
+attributes object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_rwlockattr_setpshared(pthread_rwlockattr_t *\fIattr\fP,
+    int \fIpshared\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_rwlockattr_getpshared\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_self.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_self.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d63a03b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_self.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_SELF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_self
+\(em get the calling thread ID
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+pthread_t pthread_self(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_self\fR()
+function shall return the thread ID of the calling thread.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIpthread_self\fR()
+function shall always be successful and no return value is
+reserved to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIpthread_self\fR()
+function provides a capability similar to the
+\fIgetpid\fR()
+function for processes and the rationale is the same: the creation
+call does not provide the thread ID to the created thread.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_create\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_equal\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_setcancelstate.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_setcancelstate.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c7663d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_setcancelstate.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_SETCANCELSTATE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_setcancelstate,
+pthread_setcanceltype,
+pthread_testcancel
+\(em set cancelability state
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_setcancelstate(int \fIstate\fP, int *\fIoldstate\fP);
+int pthread_setcanceltype(int \fItype\fP, int *\fIoldtype\fP);
+void pthread_testcancel(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_setcancelstate\fR()
+function shall atomically both set the calling thread's cancelability
+state to the indicated
+.IR state
+and return the previous cancelability state at the location referenced
+by
+.IR oldstate .
+Legal values for
+.IR state
+are PTHREAD_CANCEL_ENABLE and PTHREAD_CANCEL_DISABLE.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_setcanceltype\fR()
+function shall atomically both set the calling thread's cancelability
+type to the indicated
+.IR type
+and return the previous cancelability type at the location referenced
+by
+.IR oldtype .
+Legal values for
+.IR type
+are PTHREAD_CANCEL_DEFERRED and PTHREAD_CANCEL_ASYNCHRONOUS.
+.P
+The cancelability state and type of any newly created threads,
+including the thread in which
+\fImain\fR()
+was first invoked, shall be PTHREAD_CANCEL_ENABLE and
+PTHREAD_CANCEL_DEFERRED respectively.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_testcancel\fR()
+function shall create a cancellation point in the calling thread. The
+\fIpthread_testcancel\fR()
+function shall have no effect if cancelability is disabled.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_setcancelstate\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_setcanceltype\fR()
+functions shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_setcancelstate\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The specified state is not PTHREAD_CANCEL_ENABLE or
+PTHREAD_CANCEL_DISABLE.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_setcanceltype\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The specified type is not PTHREAD_CANCEL_DEFERRED or
+PTHREAD_CANCEL_ASYNCHRONOUS.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIpthread_setcancelstate\fR()
+and
+\fIpthread_setcanceltype\fR()
+functions control the points at which a thread may be
+asynchronously canceled. For cancellation control to be usable in
+modular fashion, some rules need to be followed.
+.P
+An object can be considered to be a generalization of a procedure. It
+is a set of procedures and global variables written as a unit and
+called by clients not known by the object. Objects may depend on other
+objects.
+.P
+First, cancelability should only be disabled on entry to an object,
+never explicitly enabled. On exit from an object, the
+cancelability state should always be restored to its value on entry to
+the object.
+.P
+This follows from a modularity argument: if the client of an object
+(or the client of an object that uses that object) has disabled
+cancelability, it is because the client does not want to be concerned
+about cleaning up if the thread is canceled while executing some
+sequence of actions. If an object is called in such a state and it
+enables cancelability and a cancellation request is pending for that
+thread, then the thread is canceled, contrary to the wish of the client
+that disabled.
+.P
+Second, the
+cancelability type may be explicitly set to either
+.IR deferred
+or
+.IR asynchronous
+upon entry to an object. But as with the cancelability state, on exit
+from an object the cancelability type should always be restored to its
+value on entry to the object.
+.P
+Finally, only functions that are cancel-safe
+may be called from a thread that is asynchronously cancelable.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_cancel\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_setconcurrency.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_setconcurrency.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8b517b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_setconcurrency.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_SETCONCURRENCY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_setconcurrency
+\(em set the level of concurrency
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_setconcurrency(int \fInew_level\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_getconcurrency\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_setschedparam.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_setschedparam.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d59b83b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_setschedparam.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_SETSCHEDPARAM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_setschedparam
+\(em dynamic thread scheduling parameters access
+(\fBREALTIME THREADS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_setschedparam(pthread_t \fIthread\fP, int \fIpolicy\fP,
+    const struct sched_param *\fIparam\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_getschedparam\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_setschedprio.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_setschedprio.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5b936ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_setschedprio.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_SETSCHEDPRIO "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_setschedprio
+\(em dynamic thread scheduling parameters access
+(\fBREALTIME THREADS\fR)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_setschedprio(pthread_t \fIthread\fP, int \fIprio\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_setschedprio\fR()
+function shall set the scheduling priority for the thread whose thread
+ID is given by
+.IR thread
+to the value given by
+.IR prio .
+See
+.IR "Scheduling Policies"
+for a description on how this function call affects the ordering of the
+thread in the thread list for its new priority.
+.P
+If the
+\fIpthread_setschedprio\fR()
+function fails, the scheduling priority of the target thread shall not
+be changed.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIpthread_setschedprio\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_setschedprio\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR prio
+is invalid for the scheduling policy of the specified thread.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The caller does not have appropriate privileges to set the scheduling
+priority of the specified thread.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_setschedprio\fR()
+function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIpthread_setschedprio\fR()
+function provides a way for an application to temporarily raise its
+priority and then lower it again, without having the undesired
+side-effect of yielding to other threads of the same priority. This is
+necessary if the application is to implement its own strategies for
+bounding priority inversion, such as priority inheritance or priority
+ceilings. This capability is especially important if the implementation
+does not support the Thread Priority Protection or Thread Priority
+Inheritance options, but even if those options are supported it is
+needed if the application is to bound priority inheritance for other
+resources, such as semaphores.
+.P
+The standard developers considered that while it might be preferable
+conceptually to solve this problem by modifying the specification of
+\fIpthread_setschedparam\fR(),
+it was too late to make such a change, as there may be implementations
+that would need to be changed. Therefore, this new function was
+introduced.
+.P
+If an implementation detects use of a thread ID after the end of its
+lifetime, it is recommended that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [ESRCH] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Scheduling Policies",
+.IR "\fIpthread_getschedparam\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_setspecific.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_setspecific.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3ea1e51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_setspecific.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_SETSPECIFIC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_setspecific
+\(em thread-specific data management
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_setspecific(pthread_key_t \fIkey\fP, const void *\fIvalue\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_getspecific\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_sigmask.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_sigmask.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7c70fb4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_sigmask.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,248 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_SIGMASK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_sigmask,
+sigprocmask
+\(em examine and change blocked signals
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int pthread_sigmask(int \fIhow\fP, const sigset_t *restrict \fIset\fP,
+    sigset_t *restrict \fIoset\fP);
+int sigprocmask(int \fIhow\fP, const sigset_t *restrict \fIset\fP,
+    sigset_t *restrict \fIoset\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_sigmask\fR()
+function shall examine or change (or both) the calling thread's
+signal mask, regardless of the number of threads in the process. The
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIsigprocmask\fR(),
+without the restriction that the call be made in a single-threaded
+process.
+.P
+In a single-threaded process, the
+\fIsigprocmask\fR()
+function shall examine or change (or both) the signal mask of the
+calling thread.
+.P
+If the argument
+.IR set
+is not a null pointer, it points to a set of signals to be used to
+change the currently blocked set.
+.P
+The argument
+.IR how
+indicates the way in which the set is changed, and the application
+shall ensure it consists of one of the following values:
+.IP SIG_BLOCK 12
+The resulting set shall be the union of the current set and the signal
+set pointed to by
+.IR set .
+.IP SIG_SETMASK 12
+The resulting set shall be the signal set pointed to by
+.IR set .
+.IP SIG_UNBLOCK 12
+The resulting set shall be the intersection of the current set and the
+complement of the signal set pointed to by
+.IR set .
+.P
+If the argument
+.IR oset
+is not a null pointer, the previous mask shall be stored in the location
+pointed to by
+.IR oset .
+If
+.IR set
+is a null pointer, the value of the argument
+.IR how
+is not significant and the thread's signal mask shall be unchanged;
+thus the call can be used to enquire about currently blocked signals.
+.P
+If there are any pending unblocked signals after the call to
+\fIsigprocmask\fR(),
+at least one of those signals shall be delivered before the call to
+\fIsigprocmask\fR()
+returns.
+.P
+It is not possible to block those signals which cannot be ignored.
+This shall be enforced by the system without causing an error to be
+indicated.
+.P
+If any of the SIGFPE, SIGILL, SIGSEGV, or SIGBUS
+signals are generated while they are blocked, the result is undefined,
+unless the signal was generated by the action of another process, or by
+one of the functions
+\fIkill\fR(),
+\fIpthread_kill\fR(),
+\fIraise\fR(),
+or
+\fIsigqueue\fR().
+.P
+If
+\fIsigprocmask\fR()
+fails, the thread's signal mask shall not be changed.
+.P
+The use of the
+\fIsigprocmask\fR()
+function is unspecified in a multi-threaded process.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion
+\fIpthread_sigmask\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, it shall return the corresponding error
+number.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsigprocmask\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned,
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error, and the signal mask of the process
+shall be unchanged.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_sigmask\fR()
+and
+\fIsigprocmask\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR how
+argument is not equal to one of the defined values.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_sigmask\fR()
+function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Signaling in a Multi-Threaded Process"
+.P
+This example shows the use of
+\fIpthread_sigmask\fR()
+in order to deal with signals in a multi-threaded process. It provides
+a fairly general framework that could be easily adapted/extended.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <pthread.h>
+#include <signal.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+\&...
+.P
+static sigset_t   signal_mask;  /* signals to block         */
+.P
+int main (int argc, char *argv[])
+{
+    pthread_t  sig_thr_id;      /* signal handler thread ID */
+    int        rc;              /* return code              */
+.P
+    sigemptyset (&signal_mask);
+    sigaddset (&signal_mask, SIGINT);
+    sigaddset (&signal_mask, SIGTERM);
+    rc = pthread_sigmask (SIG_BLOCK, &signal_mask, NULL);
+    if (rc != 0) {
+        /* handle error */
+        ...
+    }
+    /* any newly created threads inherit the signal mask */
+.P
+    rc = pthread_create (&sig_thr_id, NULL, signal_thread, NULL);
+    if (rc != 0) {
+        /* handle error */
+        ...
+    }
+.P
+    /* APPLICATION CODE */
+    ...
+}
+.P
+void *signal_thread (void *arg)
+{
+    int       sig_caught;    /* signal caught       */
+    int       rc;            /* returned code       */
+.P
+    rc = sigwait (&signal_mask, &sig_caught);
+    if (rc != 0) {
+        /* handle error */
+    }
+    switch (sig_caught)
+    {
+    case SIGINT:     /* process SIGINT  */
+        ...
+        break;
+    case SIGTERM:    /* process SIGTERM */
+        ...
+        break;
+    default:         /* should normally not happen */
+        fprintf (stderr, "\enUnexpected signal %d\en", sig_caught);
+        break;
+    }
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+When a thread's signal mask is changed in a signal-catching function
+that is installed by
+\fIsigaction\fR(),
+the restoration of the signal mask on return from the signal-catching
+function overrides that change (see
+\fIsigaction\fR()).
+If the signal-catching function was installed with
+\fIsignal\fR(),
+it is unspecified whether this occurs.
+.P
+See
+\fIkill\fR()
+for a discussion of the requirement on delivery of signals.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaddset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigdelset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigemptyset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigfillset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigismember\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigpending\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigqueue\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigsuspend\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_spin_destroy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_spin_destroy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6b74c45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_spin_destroy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,155 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_SPIN_DESTROY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_spin_destroy,
+pthread_spin_init
+\(em destroy or initialize a spin lock object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_spin_destroy(pthread_spinlock_t *\fIlock\fP);
+int pthread_spin_init(pthread_spinlock_t *\fIlock\fP, int \fIpshared\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_spin_destroy\fR()
+function shall destroy the spin lock referenced by
+.IR lock
+and release any resources used by the lock. The effect of subsequent
+use of the lock is undefined until the lock is reinitialized by another
+call to
+\fIpthread_spin_init\fR().
+The results are undefined if
+\fIpthread_spin_destroy\fR()
+is called when a thread holds the lock, or if this function is called
+with an uninitialized thread spin lock.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_spin_init\fR()
+function shall allocate any resources required to use the spin lock
+referenced by
+.IR lock
+and initialize the lock to an unlocked state.
+.P
+If the Thread Process-Shared Synchronization option is supported and
+the value of
+.IR pshared
+is PTHREAD_PROCESS_SHARED, the implementation
+shall permit the spin lock to be operated upon by any thread that has
+access to the memory where the spin lock is allocated, even if it is
+allocated in memory that is shared by multiple processes.
+.P
+If the Thread Process-Shared Synchronization option is supported and
+the value of
+.IR pshared
+is PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE,
+or if the option is not supported, the spin lock shall only be operated
+upon by threads created within the same process as the thread that
+initialized the spin lock. If threads of differing processes attempt to
+operate on such a spin lock, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The results are undefined if
+\fIpthread_spin_init\fR()
+is called specifying an already initialized spin lock. The results are
+undefined if a spin lock is used without first being initialized.
+.P
+If the
+\fIpthread_spin_init\fR()
+function fails, the lock is not initialized and the contents of
+.IR lock
+are undefined.
+.P
+Only the object referenced by
+.IR lock
+may be used for performing synchronization.
+.P
+The result of referring to copies of that object in calls to
+\fIpthread_spin_destroy\fR(),
+\fIpthread_spin_lock\fR(),
+\fIpthread_spin_trylock\fR(),
+or
+\fIpthread_spin_unlock\fR()
+is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return zero;
+otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_spin_init\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The system lacks the necessary resources to initialize another spin
+lock.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory exists to initialize the lock.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR lock
+argument to
+\fIpthread_spin_destroy\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized spin lock object, it is recommended
+that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR lock
+argument to
+\fIpthread_spin_destroy\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_spin_init\fR()
+refers to a locked spin lock object, or detects that the value specified
+by the
+.IR lock
+argument to
+\fIpthread_spin_init\fR()
+refers to an already initialized spin lock object, it is recommended
+that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EBUSY] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIpthread_spin_lock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_spin_unlock\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_spin_lock.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_spin_lock.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8daf932
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_spin_lock.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_SPIN_LOCK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_spin_lock,
+pthread_spin_trylock
+\(em lock a spin lock object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_spin_lock(pthread_spinlock_t *\fIlock\fP);
+int pthread_spin_trylock(pthread_spinlock_t *\fIlock\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_spin_lock\fR()
+function shall lock the spin lock referenced by
+.IR lock .
+The calling thread shall acquire the lock if it is not held by another
+thread. Otherwise, the thread shall spin (that is, shall not return
+from the
+\fIpthread_spin_lock\fR()
+call) until the lock becomes available. The results are undefined if
+the calling thread holds the lock at the time the call is made. The
+\fIpthread_spin_trylock\fR()
+function shall lock the spin lock referenced by
+.IR lock
+if it is not held by any thread. Otherwise, the function shall fail.
+.P
+The results are undefined if any of these functions is called with an
+uninitialized spin lock.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return zero;
+otherwise, an error number shall be returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIpthread_spin_lock\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EDEADLK
+A deadlock condition was detected.
+.P
+The
+\fIpthread_spin_trylock\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBUSY
+A thread currently holds the lock.
+.P
+These functions shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications using this function may be subject to priority inversion,
+as discussed in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.287" ", " "Priority Inversion".
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR lock
+argument to
+\fIpthread_spin_lock\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_spin_trylock\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized spin lock object, it is recommended
+that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR lock
+argument to
+\fIpthread_spin_lock\fR()
+refers to a spin lock object for which the calling thread already
+holds the lock, it is recommended that the function should fail
+and report an
+.BR [EDEADLK] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_spin_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_spin_unlock\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.287" ", " "Priority Inversion",
+.IR "Section 4.11" ", " "Memory Synchronization",
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_spin_unlock.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_spin_unlock.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d0c4c9e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_spin_unlock.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_SPIN_UNLOCK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_spin_unlock
+\(em unlock a spin lock object
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+int pthread_spin_unlock(pthread_spinlock_t *\fIlock\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIpthread_spin_unlock\fR()
+function shall release the spin lock referenced by
+.IR lock
+which was locked via the
+\fIpthread_spin_lock\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_spin_trylock\fR()
+functions.
+.P
+The results are undefined if the lock is not held by the
+calling thread.
+.P
+If there are threads spinning on the lock when
+\fIpthread_spin_unlock\fR()
+is called, the lock becomes available and an unspecified spinning
+thread shall acquire the lock.
+.P
+The results are undefined if this function is called with an
+uninitialized thread spin lock.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIpthread_spin_unlock\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+This function shall not return an error code of
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR lock
+argument to
+\fIpthread_spin_unlock\fR()
+does not refer to an initialized spin lock object, it is recommended
+that the function should fail and report an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error.
+.P
+If an implementation detects that the value specified by the
+.IR lock
+argument to
+\fIpthread_spin_unlock\fR()
+refers to a spin lock object for which the current thread does not
+hold the lock, it is recommended that the function should fail
+and report an
+.BR [EPERM] 
+error.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_spin_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_spin_lock\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.11" ", " "Memory Synchronization",
+.IR "\fB<pthread.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_testcancel.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_testcancel.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..14e255c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pthread_testcancel.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTHREAD_TESTCANCEL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pthread_testcancel
+\(em set cancelability state
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pthread.h>
+.P
+void pthread_testcancel(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_setcancelstate\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ptsname.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ptsname.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e3032bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ptsname.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PTSNAME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ptsname
+\(em get name of the slave pseudo-terminal device
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+char *ptsname(int \fIfildes\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIptsname\fR()
+function shall return the name of the slave pseudo-terminal device
+associated with a master pseudo-terminal device. The
+.IR fildes
+argument is a file descriptor that refers to the master device. The
+\fIptsname\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to a string containing the pathname
+of the corresponding slave device.
+.P
+The
+\fIptsname\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIptsname\fR()
+shall return a pointer to a string which is the name of the
+pseudo-terminal slave device. Upon failure,
+\fIptsname\fR()
+shall return a null pointer. This could occur if
+.IR fildes
+is an invalid file descriptor or if the slave device name does not
+exist in the file system.
+.P
+The application shall not modify the string returned. The returned
+pointer might be invalidated or the string content might be overwritten
+by a subsequent call to
+\fIptsname\fR().
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+See the RATIONALE section for
+.IR "\fIposix_openpt\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgrantpt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_openpt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIttyname\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunlockpt\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putc.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putc.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..de09fc5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putc.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PUTC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+putc
+\(em put a byte on a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int putc(int \fIc\fP, FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIputc\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIfputc\fR(),
+except that if it is implemented as a macro it may evaluate
+.IR stream
+more than once, so the argument should never be an expression with
+side-effects.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfputc\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfputc\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since it may be implemented as a macro,
+\fIputc\fR()
+may treat a
+.IR stream
+argument with side-effects incorrectly. In particular,
+\fIputc\fP(\fIc\fP,*\fIf\fP++) does not necessarily work correctly.
+Therefore, use of this function is not recommended in such situations;
+\fIfputc\fR()
+should be used instead.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfputc\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putc_unlocked.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putc_unlocked.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f4db2ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putc_unlocked.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PUTC_UNLOCKED "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+putc_unlocked
+\(em stdio with explicit client locking
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int putc_unlocked(int \fIc\fP, FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIgetc_unlocked\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putchar.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putchar.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7a59c4c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putchar.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PUTCHAR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+putchar
+\(em put a byte on a stdout stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int putchar(int \fIc\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The function call
+.IR putchar ( c )
+shall be equivalent to \fIputc\fP(\fIc\fP,\fIstdout\fP).
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfputc\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfputc\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIputc\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putchar_unlocked.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putchar_unlocked.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..97e28b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putchar_unlocked.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PUTCHAR_UNLOCKED "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+putchar_unlocked
+\(em stdio with explicit client locking
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int putchar_unlocked(int \fIc\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIgetc_unlocked\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putenv.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putenv.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6b2b177
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putenv.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PUTENV "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+putenv
+\(em change or add a value to an environment
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+int putenv(char *\fIstring\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIputenv\fR()
+function shall use the
+.IR string
+argument to set environment variable values. The
+.IR string
+argument should point to a string of the form "\c
+.IR name =\c
+.IR value \c
+\&".
+The
+\fIputenv\fR()
+function shall make the value of the environment variable
+.IR name
+equal to
+.IR value
+by altering an existing variable or creating a new one. In either
+case, the string pointed to by
+.IR string
+shall become part of the environment, so altering the string shall
+change the environment.
+.P
+The
+\fIputenv\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIputenv\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, it shall return a non-zero value and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIputenv\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory was available.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Changing the Value of an Environment Variable"
+.P
+The following example changes the value of the
+.IR HOME
+environment variable to the value
+.BR /usr/home .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdlib.h>
+\&...
+static char *var = "HOME=/usr/home";
+int ret;
+.P
+ret = putenv(var);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIputenv\fR()
+function manipulates the environment pointed to by
+.IR environ ,
+and can be used in conjunction with
+\fIgetenv\fR().
+.P
+See
+\fIexec\fR()
+for restrictions on changing the environment in multi-threaded
+applications.
+.P
+This routine may use
+\fImalloc\fR()
+to enlarge the environment.
+.P
+A potential error is to call
+\fIputenv\fR()
+with an automatic variable as the argument, then return from the
+calling function while
+.IR string
+is still part of the environment.
+.P
+Although the space used by
+.IR string
+is no longer used once a new string which defines
+.IR name
+is passed to
+\fIputenv\fR(),
+if any thread in the application has used
+\fIgetenv\fR()
+to retrieve a pointer to this variable, it should not be freed by calling
+\fIfree\fR().
+If the changed environment variable is one known by the system (such as
+the locale environment variables) the application should never free the
+buffer used by earlier calls to
+\fIputenv\fR()
+for the same variable.
+.P
+The
+\fIsetenv\fR()
+function is preferred over this function. One reason is that
+\fIputenv\fR()
+is optional and therefore less portable. Another is that using
+\fIputenv\fR()
+can slow down environment searches, as explained in the RATIONALE
+section for
+.IR "\fIgetenv\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH RATIONALE
+Refer to the RATIONALE section in
+.IR "\fIsetenv\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfree\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetenv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImalloc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetenv\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putmsg.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putmsg.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ff4ec56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putmsg.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,361 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PUTMSG "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+putmsg,
+putpmsg
+\(em send a message on a STREAM (\fBSTREAMS\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stropts.h>
+.P
+int putmsg(int \fIfildes\fP, const struct strbuf *\fIctlptr\fP,
+    const struct strbuf *\fIdataptr\fP, int \fIflags\fP);
+int putpmsg(int \fIfildes\fP, const struct strbuf *\fIctlptr\fP,
+    const struct strbuf *\fIdataptr\fP, int \fIband\fP, int \fIflags\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIputmsg\fR()
+function shall create a message from a process buffer(s) and send the
+message to a STREAMS file. The message may contain either a data part,
+a control part, or both. The data and control parts are distinguished
+by placement in separate buffers, as described below. The semantics of
+each part are defined by the STREAMS module that receives the message.
+.P
+The
+\fIputpmsg\fR()
+function is equivalent to
+\fIputmsg\fR(),
+except that the process can send messages in different priority bands.
+Except where noted, all requirements on
+\fIputmsg\fR()
+also pertain to
+\fIputpmsg\fR().
+.P
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument specifies a file descriptor referencing an open STREAM. The
+.IR ctlptr
+and
+.IR dataptr
+arguments each point to a
+.BR strbuf
+structure.
+.P
+The
+.IR ctlptr
+argument points to the structure describing the control part, if any,
+to be included in the message. The
+.IR buf
+member in the
+.BR strbuf
+structure points to the buffer where the control information resides,
+and the
+.IR len
+member indicates the number of bytes to be sent. The
+.IR maxlen
+member is not used by
+\fIputmsg\fR().
+In a similar manner, the argument
+.IR dataptr
+specifies the data, if any, to be included in the message. The
+.IR flags
+argument indicates what type of message should be sent and is described
+further below.
+.P
+To send the data part of a message, the application shall ensure that
+.IR dataptr
+is not a null pointer and the
+.IR len
+member of
+.IR dataptr
+is 0 or greater. To send the control part of a message, the application
+shall ensure that the corresponding values are set for
+.IR ctlptr .
+No data (control) part shall be sent if either
+.IR dataptr (\c
+.IR ctlptr )
+is a null pointer or the
+.IR len
+member of
+.IR dataptr (\c
+.IR ctlptr )
+is set to \(mi1.
+.P
+For
+\fIputmsg\fR(),
+if a control part is specified and
+.IR flags
+is set to RS_HIPRI, a high
+priority message shall be sent. If no control part is specified, and
+.IR flags
+is set to RS_HIPRI,
+\fIputmsg\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EINVAL] .
+If
+.IR flags
+is set to 0, a normal message (priority band equal to 0) shall be sent.
+If a control part and data part are not specified and
+.IR flags
+is set to 0, no message shall be sent and 0 shall be returned.
+.P
+For
+\fIputpmsg\fR(),
+the flags are different. The
+.IR flags
+argument is a bitmask with the following mutually-exclusive flags
+defined: MSG_HIPRI and MSG_BAND. If
+.IR flags
+is set to 0,
+\fIputpmsg\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EINVAL] .
+If a control part is specified and
+.IR flags
+is set to MSG_HIPRI and
+.IR band
+is set to 0, a high-priority message shall be sent. If
+.IR flags
+is set to MSG_HIPRI and either no control part is specified or
+.IR band
+is set to a non-zero value,
+\fIputpmsg\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EINVAL] .
+If
+.IR flags
+is set to MSG_BAND, then a message shall be sent in the priority band
+specified by
+.IR band .
+If a control part and data part are not specified and
+.IR flags
+is set to MSG_BAND, no message shall be sent and 0 shall be returned.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIputmsg\fR()
+function shall block if the STREAM write queue is full due to internal
+flow control conditions, with the following exceptions:
+.IP " *" 4
+For high-priority messages,
+\fIputmsg\fR()
+shall not block on this condition and continues processing the message.
+.IP " *" 4
+For other messages,
+\fIputmsg\fR()
+shall not block but shall fail when the write queue is full and
+O_NONBLOCK is set.
+.P
+The
+\fIputmsg\fR()
+function shall also block, unless prevented by lack of internal
+resources, while waiting for the availability of message blocks in the
+STREAM, regardless of priority or whether O_NONBLOCK has been
+specified. No partial message shall be sent.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIputmsg\fR()
+and
+\fIputpmsg\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, they shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIputmsg\fR()
+and
+\fIputpmsg\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+A non-priority message was specified, the O_NONBLOCK flag is set, and
+the STREAM write queue is full due to internal flow control conditions;
+or buffers could not be allocated for the message that was to be
+created.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+.IR fildes
+is not a valid file descriptor open for writing.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was caught during
+\fIputmsg\fR().
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+An undefined value is specified in
+.IR flags ,
+or
+.IR flags
+is set to RS_HIPRI or MSG_HIPRI and no control part is supplied, or the
+STREAM or multiplexer referenced by
+.IR fildes
+is linked (directly or indirectly) downstream from a multiplexer, or
+.IR flags
+is set to MSG_HIPRI and
+.IR band
+is non-zero (for
+\fIputpmsg\fR()
+only).
+.TP
+.BR ENOSR
+Buffers could not be allocated for the message that was to be created
+due to insufficient STREAMS memory resources.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSTR
+A STREAM is not associated with
+.IR fildes .
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+A hangup condition was generated downstream for the specified STREAM.
+.TP
+.BR EPIPE " or " EIO
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument refers to a STREAMS-based pipe and the other end of the pipe
+is closed. A SIGPIPE signal is generated for the calling thread.
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+The size of the data part of the message does not fall within the range
+specified by the maximum and minimum packet sizes of the topmost STREAM
+module. This value is also returned if the control part of the message
+is larger than the maximum configured size of the control part of a
+message, or if the data part of a message is larger than the maximum
+configured size of the data part of a message.
+.P
+In addition,
+\fIputmsg\fR()
+and
+\fIputpmsg\fR()
+shall fail if the STREAM head had processed an asynchronous error
+before the call. In this case, the value of
+.IR errno
+does not reflect the result of
+\fIputmsg\fR()
+or
+\fIputpmsg\fR(),
+but reflects the prior error.
+.br
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Sending a High-Priority Message"
+.P
+The value of
+.IR fd
+is assumed to refer to an open STREAMS file. This call to
+\fIputmsg\fR()
+does the following:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Creates a high-priority message with a control part and a data part,
+using the buffers pointed to by
+.IR ctrlbuf
+and
+.IR databuf ,
+respectively.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Sends the message to the STREAMS file identified by
+.IR fd .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stropts.h>
+#include <string.h>
+\&...
+int fd;
+char *ctrlbuf = "This is the control part";
+char *databuf = "This is the data part";
+struct strbuf ctrl;
+struct strbuf data;
+int ret;
+.P
+ctrl.buf = ctrlbuf;
+ctrl.len = strlen(ctrlbuf);
+.P
+data.buf = databuf;
+data.len = strlen(databuf);
+.P
+ret = putmsg(fd, &ctrl, &data, MSG_HIPRI);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Using putpmsg(\|)"
+.P
+This example has the same effect as the previous example. In this
+example, however, the
+\fIputpmsg\fR()
+function creates and sends the message to the STREAMS file.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stropts.h>
+#include <string.h>
+\&...
+int fd;
+char *ctrlbuf = "This is the control part";
+char *databuf = "This is the data part";
+struct strbuf ctrl;
+struct strbuf data;
+int ret;
+.P
+ctrl.buf = ctrlbuf;
+ctrl.len = strlen(ctrlbuf);
+.P
+data.buf = databuf;
+data.len = strlen(databuf);
+.P
+ret = putpmsg(fd, &ctrl, &data, 0, MSG_HIPRI);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIputmsg\fR()
+and
+\fIputpmsg\fR()
+functions may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.6" ", " "STREAMS",
+.IR "\fIgetmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpoll\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stropts.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/puts.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/puts.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..df4434a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/puts.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PUTS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+puts
+\(em put a string on standard output
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int puts(const char *\fIs\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIputs\fR()
+function shall write the string pointed to by
+.IR s ,
+followed by a
+<newline>,
+to the standard output stream
+.IR stdout .
+The terminating null byte shall not be written.
+.P
+The last data modification and last file status change timestamps
+of the file shall be marked for update between the successful
+execution of
+\fIputs\fR()
+and the next successful completion of a call to
+\fIfflush\fR()
+or
+\fIfclose\fR()
+on the same stream or a call to
+\fIexit\fR()
+or
+\fIabort\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIputs\fR()
+shall return a non-negative number. Otherwise, it shall return EOF,
+shall set an error indicator for the stream,
+and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfputc\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Printing to Standard Output"
+.P
+The following example gets the current time, converts it to a string
+using
+\fIlocaltime\fR()
+and
+\fIasctime\fR(),
+and prints it to standard output using
+\fIputs\fR().
+It then prints the number of minutes to an event for which it is
+waiting.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <time.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+time_t now;
+int minutes_to_event;
+\&...
+time(&now);
+printf("The time is ");
+puts(asctime(localtime(&now)));
+printf("There are %d minutes to the event.\en",
+    minutes_to_event);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIputs\fR()
+function appends a
+<newline>,
+while
+\fIfputs\fR()
+does not.
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that successful completion simply return a non-negative
+integer. There are at least three known different implementation
+conventions for this requirement:
+.IP " *" 4
+Return a constant value.
+.IP " *" 4
+Return the last character written.
+.IP " *" 4
+Return the number of bytes written. Note that this implementation
+convention cannot be adhered to for strings longer than
+{INT_MAX}
+bytes as the value would not be representable in the return type of the
+function. For backwards compatibility, implementations can return the
+number of bytes for strings of up to
+{INT_MAX}
+bytes, and return
+{INT_MAX}
+for all longer strings.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfputs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputc\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pututxline.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pututxline.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ac93ce1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pututxline.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PUTUTXLINE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pututxline
+\(em put an entry into the user accounting database
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <utmpx.h>
+.P
+struct utmpx *pututxline(const struct utmpx *\fIutmpx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIendutxent\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putwc.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putwc.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5b52e09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putwc.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PUTWC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+putwc
+\(em put a wide character on a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wint_t putwc(wchar_t \fIwc\fP, FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIputwc\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIfputwc\fR(),
+except that if it is implemented as a macro it may evaluate
+.IR stream
+more than once, so the argument should never be an expression with
+side-effects.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfputwc\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfputwc\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since it may be implemented as a macro,
+\fIputwc\fR()
+may treat a
+.IR stream
+argument with side-effects incorrectly. In particular,
+\fIputwc\fP(\fIwc\fP,*\fIf\fP++) need not work correctly. Therefore,
+use of this function is not recommended;
+\fIfputwc\fR()
+should be used instead.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfputwc\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putwchar.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putwchar.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4ad1398
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/putwchar.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PUTWCHAR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+putwchar
+\(em put a wide character on a stdout stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wint_t putwchar(wchar_t \fIwc\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The function call
+.IR putwchar ( wc )
+shall be equivalent to \fIputwc\fP(\fIwc\fP,\fIstdout\fP).
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfputwc\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfputwc\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfputwc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputwc\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pwrite.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pwrite.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0713f73
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/pwrite.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH PWRITE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pwrite
+\(em write on a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+ssize_t pwrite(int \fIfildes\fP, const void *\fIbuf\fP, size_t \fInbyte\fP,
+    off_t \fIoffset\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/qsort.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/qsort.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eeeaf94
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/qsort.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+'\" et
+.TH QSORT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+qsort
+\(em sort a table of data
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+void qsort(void *\fIbase\fP, size_t \fInel\fP, size_t \fIwidth\fP,
+    int (*\fIcompar\fP)(const void *, const void *));
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIqsort\fR()
+function shall sort an array of
+.IR nel
+objects, the initial element of which is pointed to by
+.IR base .
+The size of each object, in bytes, is specified by the
+.IR width
+argument. If the
+.IR nel
+argument has the value zero, the comparison function pointed to by
+.IR compar
+shall not be called and no rearrangement shall take place.
+.P
+The application shall ensure that the comparison function pointed to by
+.IR compar
+does not alter the contents of the array. The implementation may
+reorder elements of the array between calls to the comparison function,
+but shall not alter the contents of any individual element.
+.P
+When the same objects (consisting of width bytes, irrespective of their
+current positions in the array) are passed more than once to the
+comparison function, the results shall be consistent with one another.
+That is, they shall define a total ordering on the array.
+.P
+The contents of the array shall be sorted in ascending order according
+to a comparison function. The
+.IR compar
+argument is a pointer to the comparison function, which is called with
+two arguments that point to the elements being compared. The
+application shall ensure that the function returns an integer less
+than, equal to, or greater than 0, if the first argument is considered
+respectively less than, equal to, or greater than the second. If two
+members compare as equal, their order in the sorted array is
+unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIqsort\fR()
+function shall not return a value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The comparison function need not compare every byte, so arbitrary data
+may be contained in the elements in addition to the values being
+compared.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The requirement that each argument (hereafter referred to as
+.IR p)
+to the comparison function is a pointer to elements of the array
+implies that for every call, for each argument separately, all of the
+following expressions are non-zero:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+((char *)p \(mi (char *)base) % width == 0
+(char *)p >= (char *)base
+(char *)p < (char *)base + nel * width
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIalphasort\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/raise.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/raise.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..03a87e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/raise.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+'\" et
+.TH RAISE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+raise
+\(em send a signal to the executing process
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int raise(int \fIsig\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIraise\fR()
+function shall send the signal
+.IR sig
+to the executing
+thread or process.
+If a signal handler is called, the
+\fIraise\fR()
+function shall not return until after the signal handler does.
+.P
+The effect of the
+\fIraise\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to calling:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+pthread_kill(pthread_self(), sig);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned. Otherwise, a
+non-zero value shall be returned
+and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIraise\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR sig
+argument is an invalid signal number.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The term ``thread'' is an extension to the ISO\ C standard.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/rand.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/rand.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ca9234b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/rand.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,225 @@
+'\" et
+.TH RAND "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+rand,
+rand_r,
+srand
+\(em pseudo-random number generator
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+int rand(void);
+int rand_r(unsigned *\fIseed\fP);
+void srand(unsigned \fIseed\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIrand\fR()
+and
+\fIsrand\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIrand\fR()
+function shall compute a sequence of pseudo-random integers in the
+range [0,\c
+{RAND_MAX}]
+with a period of at least 2\u\s-332\s0\d.
+.P
+The
+\fIrand\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.P
+The
+\fIrand_r\fR()
+function shall compute a sequence of pseudo-random integers in
+the range [0,\c
+{RAND_MAX}].
+(The value of the
+{RAND_MAX}
+macro shall be at least 32\|767.)
+.P
+If
+\fIrand_r\fR()
+is called with the same initial value for the object pointed to by
+.IR seed
+and that object is not modified between successive returns and calls to
+\fIrand_r\fR(),
+the same sequence shall be generated.
+.P
+The
+\fIsrand\fR()
+function uses the argument as a seed for a new sequence of
+pseudo-random numbers to be returned by subsequent calls to
+\fIrand\fR().
+If
+\fIsrand\fR()
+is then called with the same seed value, the sequence of pseudo-random
+numbers shall be repeated. If
+\fIrand\fR()
+is called before any calls to
+\fIsrand\fR()
+are made, the same sequence shall be generated as when
+\fIsrand\fR()
+is first called with a seed value of 1.
+.P
+The implementation shall behave as if no function defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+calls
+\fIrand\fR()
+or
+\fIsrand\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIrand\fR()
+function shall return the next pseudo-random number in the sequence.
+.P
+The
+\fIrand_r\fR()
+function shall return a pseudo-random integer.
+.P
+The
+\fIsrand\fR()
+function shall not return a value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Generating a Pseudo-Random Number Sequence"
+.P
+The following example demonstrates how to generate a sequence of
+pseudo-random numbers.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+\&...
+    long count, i;
+    char *keystr;
+    int elementlen, len;
+    char c;
+\&...
+/* Initial random number generator. */
+    srand(1);
+.P
+    /* Create keys using only lowercase characters */
+    len = 0;
+    for (i=0; i<count; i++) {
+        while (len < elementlen) {
+            c = (char) (rand() % 128);
+            if (islower(c))
+                keystr[len++] = c;
+        }
+.P
+        keystr[len] = '\e0';
+        printf("%s Element%0*ld\en", keystr, elementlen, i);
+        len = 0;
+    }
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Generating the Same Sequence on Different Machines"
+.P
+The following code defines a pair of functions that could be
+incorporated into applications wishing to ensure that the same sequence
+of numbers is generated across different machines.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+static unsigned long next = 1;
+int myrand(void)  /* RAND_MAX assumed to be 32767. */
+{
+    next = next * 1103515245 + 12345;
+    return((unsigned)(next/65536) % 32768);
+}
+.P
+void mysrand(unsigned seed)
+{
+    next = seed;
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIdrand48\fR()
+function provides a much more elaborate random number generator.
+.P
+The limitations on the amount of state that can be carried between one
+function call and another mean the
+\fIrand_r\fR()
+function can never be implemented in a way which satisfies all of the
+requirements on a pseudo-random number generator. Therefore this
+function should be avoided whenever non-trivial requirements (including
+safety) have to be fulfilled.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The ISO\ C standard
+\fIrand\fR()
+and
+\fIsrand\fR()
+functions allow per-process pseudo-random streams shared by all
+threads. Those two functions need not change, but there
+has to be mutual-exclusion that prevents interference between two
+threads concurrently accessing the random number generator.
+.P
+With regard to
+\fIrand\fR(),
+there are two different behaviors that may be wanted in a multi-threaded
+program:
+.IP " 1." 4
+A single per-process sequence of pseudo-random numbers that is shared
+by all threads that call
+\fIrand\fR()
+.IP " 2." 4
+A different sequence of pseudo-random numbers for each thread that
+calls
+\fIrand\fR()
+.P
+This is provided by the modified thread-safe function based on whether
+the seed value is global to the entire process or local to each
+thread.
+.P
+This does not address the known deficiencies of the
+\fIrand\fR()
+function implementations, which have been approached by maintaining
+more state. In effect, this specifies new thread-safe forms of a
+deficient function.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIrand_r\fR()
+function may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIdrand48\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/random.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/random.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3dfd9ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/random.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH RANDOM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+random
+\(em generate pseudo-random number
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+long random(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIinitstate\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/read.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/read.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d411ce5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/read.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,626 @@
+'\" et
+.TH READ "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pread,
+read
+\(em read from a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+ssize_t pread(int \fIfildes\fP, void *\fIbuf\fP, size_t \fInbyte\fP, off_t \fIoffset\fR);
+ssize_t read(int \fIfildes\fP, void *\fIbuf\fP, size_t \fInbyte\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIread\fR()
+function shall attempt to read
+.IR nbyte
+bytes from the file associated with the open file descriptor,
+.IR fildes ,
+into the buffer pointed to by
+.IR buf .
+The behavior of multiple concurrent reads on the same pipe, FIFO, or
+terminal device is unspecified.
+.P
+Before any action described below is taken, and if
+.IR nbyte
+is zero, the
+\fIread\fR()
+function may detect and return errors as described below. In the
+absence of errors, or if error detection is not performed, the
+\fIread\fR()
+function shall return zero and have no other results.
+.P
+On files that support seeking (for example, a regular file), the
+\fIread\fR()
+shall start at a position in the file given by the file offset
+associated with
+.IR fildes .
+The file offset shall be incremented by the number of bytes
+actually read.
+.P
+Files that do not support seeking\(emfor example, terminals\(emalways
+read from the current position. The value of a file offset associated
+with such a file is undefined.
+.P
+No data transfer shall occur past the current end-of-file. If the
+starting position is at or after the end-of-file, 0 shall be returned.
+If the file refers to a device special file, the result of subsequent
+\fIread\fR()
+requests is implementation-defined.
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR nbyte
+is greater than
+{SSIZE_MAX},
+the result is implementation-defined.
+.P
+When attempting to read from an empty pipe or FIFO:
+.IP " *" 4
+If no process has the pipe open for writing,
+\fIread\fR()
+shall return 0 to indicate end-of-file.
+.IP " *" 4
+If some process has the pipe open for writing and O_NONBLOCK is set,
+\fIread\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EAGAIN] .
+.IP " *" 4
+If some process has the pipe open for writing and O_NONBLOCK is clear,
+\fIread\fR()
+shall block the calling thread until some data is written or the pipe
+is closed by all processes that had the pipe open for writing.
+.P
+When attempting to read a file (other than a pipe or FIFO) that
+supports non-blocking reads and has no data currently available:
+.IP " *" 4
+If O_NONBLOCK is set,
+\fIread\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EAGAIN] .
+.IP " *" 4
+If O_NONBLOCK is clear,
+\fIread\fR()
+shall block the calling thread until some data becomes available.
+.IP " *" 4
+The use of the O_NONBLOCK flag has no effect if there is some data
+available.
+.P
+The
+\fIread\fR()
+function reads data previously written to a file. If any portion of a
+regular file prior to the end-of-file has not been written,
+\fIread\fR()
+shall return bytes with value 0. For example,
+\fIlseek\fR()
+allows the file offset to be set beyond the end of existing data in the
+file. If data is later written at this point, subsequent reads in the
+gap between the previous end of data and the newly written data shall
+return bytes with value 0 until data is written into the gap.
+.P
+Upon successful completion, where
+.IR nbyte
+is greater than 0,
+\fIread\fR()
+shall mark for update the last data access timestamp
+of the file, and shall return the number of bytes read.
+This number shall never be greater than
+.IR nbyte .
+The value returned may be less than
+.IR nbyte
+if the number of bytes left in the file is less than
+.IR nbyte ,
+if the
+\fIread\fR()
+request was interrupted by a signal, or if the file is a pipe or FIFO
+or special file and has fewer than
+.IR nbyte
+bytes immediately available for reading. For example, a
+\fIread\fR()
+from a file associated with a terminal may return one typed line of
+data.
+.P
+If a
+\fIread\fR()
+is interrupted by a signal before it reads any data, it shall return
+\(mi1 with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.P
+If a
+\fIread\fR()
+is interrupted by a signal after it has successfully read some data, it
+shall return the number of bytes read.
+.P
+For regular files, no data transfer shall occur past the offset maximum
+established in the open file description associated with
+.IR fildes .
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a socket,
+\fIread\fR()
+shall be equivalent to
+\fIrecv\fR()
+with no flags set.
+.P
+If the O_DSYNC and O_RSYNC bits have been set,
+read I/O operations on the file descriptor shall complete as defined by
+synchronized I/O data integrity completion. If the O_SYNC and O_RSYNC
+bits have been set, read I/O operations on the file descriptor shall
+complete as defined by synchronized I/O file integrity completion.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a shared memory object, the result of the
+\fIread\fR()
+function is unspecified.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a typed memory object, the result of the
+\fIread\fR()
+function is unspecified.
+.P
+A
+\fIread\fR()
+from a STREAMS file can read data in three different modes:
+\fIbyte-stream\fP mode, \fImessage-nondiscard\fP mode, and
+\fImessage-discard\fP mode. The default shall be byte-stream mode.
+This can be changed using the I_SRDOPT
+\fIioctl\fR()
+request, and can be tested with I_GRDOPT
+\fIioctl\fR().
+In byte-stream mode,
+\fIread\fR()
+shall retrieve data from the STREAM until as many bytes as were
+requested are
+transferred, or until there is no more data to be retrieved.
+Byte-stream mode ignores message boundaries.
+.P
+In STREAMS message-nondiscard mode,
+\fIread\fR()
+shall retrieve data until as many bytes as were requested are
+transferred, or until a message boundary is reached. If
+\fIread\fR()
+does not retrieve all the data in a message, the remaining data shall
+be left on the STREAM, and can be retrieved by the next
+\fIread\fR()
+call. Message-discard mode also retrieves data until as many bytes as
+were requested are transferred, or a message boundary is reached.
+However, unread data remaining in a message after the
+\fIread\fR()
+returns shall be discarded, and shall not be available for a subsequent
+\fIread\fR(),
+\fIgetmsg\fR(),
+or
+\fIgetpmsg\fR()
+call.
+.P
+How
+\fIread\fR()
+handles zero-byte STREAMS messages is determined by the current read
+mode setting. In byte-stream mode,
+\fIread\fR()
+shall accept data until it has read
+.IR nbyte
+bytes, or until there is no more data to read, or until a zero-byte
+message block is encountered. The
+\fIread\fR()
+function shall then return the number of bytes read, and place the
+zero-byte message back on the STREAM to be retrieved by the next
+\fIread\fR(),
+\fIgetmsg\fR(),
+or
+\fIgetpmsg\fR().
+In message-nondiscard mode or message-discard mode, a zero-byte message
+shall return 0 and the message shall be removed from the STREAM. When a
+zero-byte message is read as the first message on a STREAM, the message
+shall be removed from the STREAM and 0 shall be returned, regardless of
+the read mode.
+.P
+A
+\fIread\fR()
+from a STREAMS file shall return the data in the message at the front
+of the STREAM head read queue, regardless of the priority band of the
+message.
+.P
+By default, STREAMs are in control-normal mode, in which a
+\fIread\fR()
+from a STREAMS file can only process messages that contain a data part
+but do not contain a control part. The
+\fIread\fR()
+shall fail if a message containing a control part is encountered at the
+STREAM head. This default action can be changed by placing the STREAM
+in either control-data mode or control-discard mode with the I_SRDOPT
+\fIioctl\fR()
+command. In control-data mode,
+\fIread\fR()
+shall convert any control part to data and pass it to the application
+before passing any data part originally present in the same message.
+In control-discard mode,
+\fIread\fR()
+shall discard message control parts but return to the process any data
+part in the message.
+.P
+In addition,
+\fIread\fR()
+shall fail if the STREAM head had processed an asynchronous error
+before the call. In this case, the value of
+.IR errno
+shall not reflect the result of
+\fIread\fR(),
+but reflect the prior error. If a hangup occurs on the STREAM being
+read,
+\fIread\fR()
+shall continue to operate normally until the STREAM head read queue is
+empty. Thereafter, it shall return 0.
+.P
+The
+\fIpread\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIread\fR(),
+except that it shall read from a given position in the file without
+changing the file pointer. The first three arguments to
+\fIpread\fR()
+are the same as
+\fIread\fR()
+with the addition of a fourth argument
+.IR offset
+for the desired position inside the file. An attempt to perform a
+\fIpread\fR()
+on a file that is incapable of seeking shall result in an error.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return a non-negative
+integer indicating the number of bytes actually read. Otherwise, the
+functions shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The file is neither a pipe, nor a FIFO, nor a socket, the O_NONBLOCK
+flag is set for the file descriptor, and the thread would be delayed
+in the read operation.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid file descriptor open for reading.
+.TP
+.BR EBADMSG
+The file is a STREAM file that is set to control-normal mode and the
+message waiting to be read includes a control part.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The read operation was terminated due to the receipt of a signal, and
+no data was transferred.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The STREAM or multiplexer referenced by
+.IR fildes
+is linked (directly or indirectly) downstream from a multiplexer.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+The process is a member of a background process group attempting to read
+from its controlling terminal, and either the calling thread is blocking
+SIGTTIN or the process is ignoring SIGTTIN or the process group of the
+process is orphaned. This error may also be generated for
+implementation-defined reasons.
+.TP
+.BR EISDIR
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument refers to a directory and the implementation
+does not allow the directory to be read using
+\fIread\fR()
+or
+\fIpread\fR().
+The
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+function should be used instead.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The file is a regular file,
+.IR nbyte
+is greater than 0, the starting position is before the end-of-file, and
+the starting position is greater than or equal to the offset maximum
+established in the open file description associated with
+.IR fildes .
+.P
+The
+\fIpread\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The file is a regular file or block special file, and the
+.IR offset
+argument is negative. The file pointer shall remain unchanged.
+.TP
+.BR ESPIPE
+The file is a pipe, FIFO, or socket.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIread\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The file is a pipe or FIFO, the O_NONBLOCK flag is set for the file
+descriptor, and the thread would be delayed in the read operation.
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN " or " EWOULDBLOCK
+.br
+The file is a socket, the O_NONBLOCK flag is set for the file
+descriptor, and the thread would be delayed in the read operation.
+.TP
+.BR ECONNRESET
+A read was attempted on a socket and the connection was forcibly closed
+by its peer.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTCONN
+A read was attempted on a socket that is not connected.
+.TP
+.BR ETIMEDOUT
+A read was attempted on a socket and a transmission timeout occurred.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+A physical I/O error has occurred.
+.TP
+.BR ENOBUFS
+Insufficient resources were available in the system to perform the
+operation.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory was available to fulfill the request.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+A request was made of a nonexistent device, or the request was outside
+the capabilities of the device.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Reading Data into a Buffer"
+.P
+The following example reads data from the file associated with the file
+descriptor
+.IR fd
+into the buffer pointed to by
+.IR buf .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+\&...
+char buf[20];
+size_t nbytes;
+ssize_t bytes_read;
+int fd;
+\&...
+nbytes = sizeof(buf);
+bytes_read = read(fd, buf, nbytes);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not specify the value of the file offset after an
+error is returned; there are too many cases. For programming errors,
+such as
+.BR [EBADF] ,
+the concept is meaningless since no file is involved. For errors that
+are detected immediately, such as
+.BR [EAGAIN] ,
+clearly the pointer should not change. After an interrupt or hardware
+error, however, an updated value would be very useful and is the
+behavior of many implementations.
+.P
+Note that a
+\fIread\fR()
+of zero bytes does not modify the last data access timestamp. A
+\fIread\fR()
+that requests more than zero bytes, but returns zero, is required
+to modify the last data access timestamp.
+.P
+Implementations are allowed, but not required, to perform error
+checking for
+\fIread\fR()
+requests of zero bytes.
+.SS "Input and Output"
+.P
+The use of I/O with large byte counts has always presented problems.
+Ideas such as
+\fIlread\fR()
+and
+\fIlwrite\fR()
+(using and returning
+.BR long s)
+were considered at one time. The current solution is to use abstract
+types on the ISO\ C standard function to
+\fIread\fR()
+and
+\fIwrite\fR().
+The abstract types can be declared so that existing functions work, but
+can also be declared so that larger types can be represented in future
+implementations. It is presumed that whatever constraints limit the
+maximum range of
+.BR size_t
+also limit portable I/O requests to the same range. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 also limits
+the range further by requiring that the byte count be limited so that a
+signed return value remains meaningful. Since the return type is also a
+(signed) abstract type, the byte count can be defined by the
+implementation to be larger than an
+.BR int
+can hold.
+.P
+The standard developers considered adding atomicity requirements to a
+pipe or FIFO, but recognized that due to the nature of pipes and FIFOs
+there could be no guarantee of atomicity of reads of
+{PIPE_BUF}
+or any other size that would be an aid to applications portability.
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that no action be taken for
+\fIread\fR()
+or
+\fIwrite\fR()
+when
+.IR nbyte
+is zero. This is not intended to take precedence over detection of
+errors (such as invalid buffer pointers or file descriptors). This is
+consistent with the rest of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, but the phrasing here could be
+misread to require detection of the zero case before any other errors.
+A value of zero is to be considered a correct value, for which the
+semantics are a no-op.
+.P
+I/O is intended to be atomic to ordinary files and pipes and FIFOs.
+Atomic means that all the bytes from a single operation that
+started out together end up together, without interleaving from other
+I/O operations. It is a known attribute of terminals that this is not
+honored, and terminals are explicitly (and implicitly permanently)
+excepted, making the behavior unspecified. The behavior for other
+device types is also left unspecified, but the wording is intended to
+imply that future standards might choose to specify atomicity (or not).
+.P
+There were recommendations to add format parameters to
+\fIread\fR()
+and
+\fIwrite\fR()
+in order to handle networked transfers among heterogeneous file system
+and base hardware types. Such a facility may be required for support by
+the OSI presentation of layer services. However, it was determined that
+this should correspond with similar C-language facilities, and that is
+beyond the scope of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. The concept was suggested to the developers
+of the ISO\ C standard for their consideration as a possible area for future
+work.
+.P
+In 4.3 BSD, a
+\fIread\fR()
+or
+\fIwrite\fR()
+that is interrupted by a signal before transferring any data does not
+by default return an
+.BR [EINTR] 
+error, but is restarted. In 4.2 BSD,
+4.3 BSD,
+and the Eighth Edition, there is an additional function,
+\fIselect\fR(),
+whose purpose is to pause until specified activity (data to read, space
+to write, and so on) is detected on specified file descriptors. It is
+common in applications written for those systems for
+\fIselect\fR()
+to be used before
+\fIread\fR()
+in situations (such as keyboard input) where interruption of I/O due to
+a signal is desired.
+.P
+The issue of which files or file types are interruptible is considered
+an implementation design issue. This is often affected primarily by
+hardware and reliability issues.
+.P
+There are no references to actions taken following an ``unrecoverable
+error''. It is considered beyond the scope of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 to describe what
+happens in the case of hardware errors.
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard allowed two very different behaviors
+with regard to the handling of interrupts. In order to minimize the
+resulting confusion, it was decided that POSIX.1\(hy2008 should support only one
+of these behaviors. Historical practice on AT&T-derived systems was to
+have
+\fIread\fR()
+and
+\fIwrite\fR()
+return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EINTR] 
+when interrupted after some, but not all, of the data requested had
+been transferred. However, the US Department of Commerce FIPS 151\(hy1 and
+FIPS 151\(hy2 require the historical BSD behavior, in which
+\fIread\fR()
+and
+\fIwrite\fR()
+return the number of bytes actually transferred before the interrupt.
+If \(mi1 is returned when any data is transferred, it is difficult to
+recover from the error on a seekable device and impossible on a
+non-seekable device. Most new implementations support this behavior.
+The behavior required by POSIX.1\(hy2008 is to return the number of bytes
+transferred.
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not specify when an implementation that buffers
+\fIread\fR()s
+actually moves the data into the user-supplied buffer, so an
+implementation may choose to do this at the latest possible moment.
+Therefore, an interrupt arriving earlier may not cause
+\fIread\fR()
+to return a partial byte count, but rather to return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.P
+Consideration was also given to combining the two previous options, and
+setting
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EINTR] 
+while returning a short count. However, not only is there no existing
+practice that implements this, it is also contradictory to the idea
+that when
+.IR errno
+is set, the function responsible shall return \(mi1.
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 intentionally does not specify any
+\fIpread\fR()
+errors related to pipes, FIFOs, and sockets other than
+.BR [ESPIPE] .
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIioctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlseek\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpipe\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIreadv\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+.IR "\fB<stropts.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_uio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/readdir.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/readdir.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4456a2a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/readdir.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,373 @@
+'\" et
+.TH READDIR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+readdir,
+readdir_r
+\(em read a directory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <dirent.h>
+.P
+struct dirent *readdir(DIR *\fIdirp\fP);
+int readdir_r(DIR *restrict \fIdirp\fP, struct dirent *restrict \fIentry\fP,
+    struct dirent **restrict \fIresult\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The type
+.BR DIR ,
+which is defined in the
+.IR <dirent.h> 
+header, represents a
+.IR "directory stream" ,
+which is an ordered sequence of all the directory entries in a
+particular directory. Directory entries represent files; files may be
+removed from a directory or added to a directory asynchronously to the
+operation of
+\fIreaddir\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to a structure representing the
+directory entry at the current position in the directory stream
+specified by the argument
+.IR dirp ,
+and position the directory stream at the next entry. It shall return a
+null pointer upon reaching the end of the directory stream. The
+structure
+.BR dirent
+defined in the
+.IR <dirent.h> 
+header describes a directory entry. The value of the structure's
+.IR d_ino
+member shall be set to the file serial number of the file named by the
+.IR d_name
+member. If the
+.IR d_name
+member names a symbolic link, the value of the
+.IR d_ino
+member shall be set to the file serial number of the symbolic link itself.
+.P
+The
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+function shall not return directory entries containing empty names. If
+entries for dot or dot-dot exist, one entry shall be returned for dot
+and one entry shall be returned for dot-dot; otherwise, they shall not
+be returned.
+.P
+The application shall not modify the structure to which the return
+value of
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+points, nor any storage areas pointed to by pointers within the
+structure. The returned pointer, and pointers within the structure,
+might be invalidated or the structure or the storage areas might be
+overwritten by a subsequent call to
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+on the same directory stream. They shall not be affected by a call to
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+on a different directory stream.
+.P
+If a file is removed from or added to the directory after the most
+recent call to
+\fIopendir\fR()
+or
+\fIrewinddir\fR(),
+whether a subsequent call to
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+returns an entry for that file is unspecified.
+.P
+The
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+function may buffer several directory entries per actual read
+operation;
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+shall mark for update the last data access timestamp
+of the directory each time the directory is actually read.
+.P
+After a call to
+\fIfork\fR(),
+either the parent or child (but not both) may continue processing the
+directory stream using
+\fIreaddir\fR(),
+\fIrewinddir\fR(),
+or
+\fIseekdir\fR().
+If both the parent and child processes use these functions, the result
+is undefined.
+.P
+The
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.P
+Applications wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0 before calling
+\fIreaddir\fR().
+If
+.IR errno
+is set to non-zero on return, an error occurred.
+.P
+The
+\fIreaddir_r\fR()
+function shall initialize the
+.BR dirent
+structure referenced by
+.IR entry
+to represent the directory entry at the current position in the
+directory stream referred to by
+.IR dirp ,
+store a pointer to this structure at the location referenced by
+.IR result ,
+and position the directory stream at the next entry.
+.P
+The storage pointed to by
+.IR entry
+shall be large enough for a
+.BR dirent
+with an array of
+.BR char
+.IR d_name
+members containing at least
+{NAME_MAX}+1
+elements.
+.P
+Upon successful return, the pointer returned at *\fIresult\fP shall have
+the same value as the argument
+.IR entry .
+Upon reaching the end of the directory stream, this pointer shall
+have the value NULL.
+.P
+The
+\fIreaddir_r\fR()
+function shall not return directory entries containing empty names.
+.P
+If a file is removed from or added to the directory after the most
+recent call to
+\fIopendir\fR()
+or
+\fIrewinddir\fR(),
+whether a subsequent call to
+\fIreaddir_r\fR()
+returns an entry for that file is unspecified.
+.P
+The
+\fIreaddir_r\fR()
+function may buffer several directory entries per actual read
+operation;
+\fIreaddir_r\fR()
+shall mark for update the last data access timestamp of the directory
+each time the directory is actually read.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+shall return a pointer to an object of type
+.BR "struct dirent" .
+When an error is encountered, a null pointer shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error. When the end of the directory is
+encountered, a null pointer shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+is not changed.
+.P
+If successful, the
+\fIreaddir_r\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+One of the values in the structure to be returned cannot be represented
+correctly.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR dirp
+argument does not refer to an open directory stream.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+The current position of the directory stream is invalid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+The following sample program searches the current directory for
+each of the arguments supplied on the command line.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <dirent.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+static void lookup(const char *arg)
+{
+    DIR *dirp;
+    struct dirent *dp;
+.P
+    if ((dirp = opendir(".")) == NULL) {
+        perror("couldn't open '.'");
+        return;
+    }
+.P
+    do {
+        errno = 0;
+        if ((dp = readdir(dirp)) != NULL) {
+            if (strcmp(dp->d_name, arg) != 0)
+                continue;
+.P
+            (void) printf("found %s\en", arg);
+            (void) closedir(dirp);
+                return;
+.P
+        }
+    } while (dp != NULL);
+.P
+    if (errno != 0)
+        perror("error reading directory");
+    else
+        (void) printf("failed to find %s\en", arg);
+    (void) closedir(dirp);
+    return;
+}
+.P
+int main(int argc, char *argv[])
+{
+    int i;
+    for (i = 1; i < argc; i++)
+        lookup(argv[i]);
+    return (0);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+function should be used in conjunction with
+\fIopendir\fR(),
+\fIclosedir\fR(),
+and
+\fIrewinddir\fR()
+to examine the contents of the directory.
+.P
+The
+\fIreaddir_r\fR()
+function is thread-safe and shall return values in a user-supplied
+buffer instead of possibly using a static data area that may be
+overwritten by each call.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The returned value of
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+merely \fIrepresents\fP a directory entry. No equivalence should be
+inferred.
+.P
+Historical implementations of
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+obtain multiple directory entries on a single read operation, which
+permits subsequent
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+operations to operate from the buffered information. Any wording that
+required each successful
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+operation to mark the directory last data access timestamp
+for update would disallow such historical performance-oriented
+implementations.
+.P
+When returning a directory entry for the root of a mounted file system,
+some historical implementations of
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+returned the file serial number of the underlying mount point, rather
+than of the root of the mounted file system. This behavior is considered
+to be a bug, since the underlying file serial number has no significance
+to applications.
+.P
+Since
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+returns NULL
+when it detects an error and when the end of the directory is
+encountered, an application that needs to tell the difference must set
+.IR errno
+to zero before the call and check it if NULL is returned.
+Since the function must not change
+.IR errno
+in the second case and must set it to a non-zero value in the first
+case, a zero
+.IR errno
+after a call returning NULL indicates end-of-directory; otherwise, an
+error.
+.P
+Routines to deal with this problem more directly were proposed:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int derror (\fIdirp\fP)
+DIR *\fIdirp\fP;
+.P
+void clearderr (\fIdirp\fP)
+DIR *\fIdirp\fP;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The first would indicate whether an error had occurred, and the second
+would clear the error indication. The simpler method involving
+.IR errno
+was adopted instead by requiring that
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+not change
+.IR errno
+when end-of-directory is encountered.
+.P
+An error or signal indicating that a directory has changed while open
+was considered but rejected.
+.P
+The thread-safe version of the directory reading function returns
+values in a user-supplied buffer instead of possibly using a static
+data area that may be overwritten by each call. Either the
+{NAME_MAX}
+compile-time constant or the corresponding
+\fIpathconf\fR()
+option can be used to determine the maximum sizes of returned
+pathnames.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIclosedir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdirfd\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfdopendir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfstatat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrewinddir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsymlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<dirent.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/readlink.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/readlink.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bdf98f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/readlink.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,255 @@
+'\" et
+.TH READLINK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+readlink, readlinkat
+\(em read the contents of a symbolic link
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+ssize_t readlink(const char *restrict \fIpath\fP, char *restrict \fIbuf\fP,
+    size_t \fIbufsize\fP);
+ssize_t readlinkat(int \fIfd\fP, const char *restrict \fIpath\fP,
+    char *restrict \fIbuf\fP, size_t \fIbufsize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIreadlink\fR()
+function shall place the contents of the symbolic link referred to by
+.IR path
+in the buffer
+.IR buf
+which has size
+.IR bufsize .
+If the number of bytes in the symbolic link is less than
+.IR bufsize ,
+the contents of the remainder of
+.IR buf
+are unspecified. If the
+.IR buf
+argument is not large enough to contain the link content, the first
+.IR bufsize
+bytes shall be placed in
+.IR buf .
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR bufsize
+is greater than
+{SSIZE_MAX},
+the result is implementation-defined.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIreadlink\fR()
+shall mark for update the last data access timestamp of the symbolic
+link.
+.P
+The
+\fIreadlinkat\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIreadlink\fR()
+function except in the case where
+.IR path
+specifies a relative path. In this case the symbolic link whose content
+is read is relative to the directory associated with the file
+descriptor
+.IR fd
+instead of the current working directory. If the file descriptor was
+opened without O_SEARCH, the function shall check whether directory
+searches are permitted using the current permissions of the directory
+underlying the file descriptor. If the file descriptor was opened with
+O_SEARCH, the function shall not perform the check.
+.P
+If
+\fIreadlinkat\fR()
+is passed the special value AT_FDCWD in the
+.IR fd
+parameter, the current working directory shall be used and the behavior
+shall be identical to a call to
+\fIreadlink\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the count of
+bytes placed in the buffer. Otherwise, these functions shall return a
+value of \(mi1, leave the buffer unchanged, and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied for a component of the path prefix of
+.IR path .
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR path
+argument names a file that is not a symbolic link.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while reading from the file system.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR path
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory, or the
+.IR path
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file that
+is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIreadlinkat\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+.IR fd
+was not opened with O_SEARCH and the permissions of the directory
+underlying
+.IR fd
+do not permit directory searches.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR path
+argument does not specify an absolute path and the
+.IR fd
+argument is neither AT_FDCWD nor a valid file descriptor open for reading
+or searching.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+The
+.IR path
+argument is not an absolute path and
+.IR fd
+is a file descriptor associated with a non-directory file.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Reading the Name of a Symbolic Link"
+.P
+The following example shows how to read the name of a symbolic link
+named
+.BR /modules/pass1 .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+char buf[1024];
+ssize_t len;
+\&...
+if ((len = readlink("/modules/pass1", buf, sizeof(buf)-1)) != -1)
+    buf[len] = '\e0';
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Conforming applications should not assume that the returned contents of
+the symbolic link are null-terminated.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The type associated with
+.IR bufsiz
+is a
+.BR size_t
+in order to be consistent with both the ISO\ C standard and the definition of
+\fIread\fR().
+The behavior specified for
+\fIreadlink\fR()
+when
+.IR bufsiz
+is zero represents historical practice. For this case, the standard
+developers considered a change whereby
+\fIreadlink\fR()
+would return the number of non-null bytes contained in the symbolic
+link with the buffer
+.IR buf
+remaining unchanged; however, since the
+.BR stat
+structure member
+.IR st_size
+value can be used to determine the size of buffer necessary to contain
+the contents of the symbolic link as returned by
+\fIreadlink\fR(),
+this proposal was rejected, and the historical practice retained.
+.P
+The purpose of the
+\fIreadlinkat\fR()
+function is to read the content of symbolic links in directories other
+than the current working directory without exposure to race conditions.
+Any part of the path of a file could be changed in parallel to a call
+to
+\fIreadlink\fR(),
+resulting in unspecified behavior. By opening a file descriptor for
+the target directory and using the
+\fIreadlinkat\fR()
+function it can be guaranteed that the symbolic link read is located
+relative to the desired directory.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfstatat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsymlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/readv.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/readv.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a700b02
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/readv.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+'\" et
+.TH READV "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+readv
+\(em read a vector
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/uio.h>
+.P
+ssize_t readv(int \fIfildes\fP, const struct iovec *\fIiov\fP, int \fIiovcnt\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIreadv\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIread\fR(),
+except as described below. The
+\fIreadv\fR()
+function shall place the input data into the
+.IR iovcnt
+buffers specified by the members of the
+.IR iov
+array:
+.IR iov [0],
+.IR iov [1],
+\&.\|.\|.,
+.IR iov [\c
+.IR iovcnt \(mi1].
+The
+.IR iovcnt
+argument is valid if greater than 0 and less than or equal to
+{IOV_MAX}.
+.P
+Each
+.IR iovec
+entry specifies the base address and length of an area
+in memory where data should be placed. The
+\fIreadv\fR()
+function shall always fill an area completely before proceeding
+to the next.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIreadv\fR()
+shall mark for update the last data access timestamp of the file.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)".
+.P
+In addition, the
+\fIreadv\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The sum of the
+.IR iov_len
+values in the
+.IR iov
+array overflowed an
+.BR ssize_t .
+.P
+The
+\fIreadv\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR iovcnt
+argument was less than or equal to 0, or greater than
+{IOV_MAX}.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Reading Data into an Array"
+.P
+The following example reads data from the file associated with the file
+descriptor
+.IR fd
+into the buffers specified by members of the
+.IR iov
+array.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/uio.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+\&...
+ssize_t bytes_read;
+int fd;
+char buf0[20];
+char buf1[30];
+char buf2[40];
+int iovcnt;
+struct iovec iov[3];
+.P
+iov[0].iov_base = buf0;
+iov[0].iov_len = sizeof(buf0);
+iov[1].iov_base = buf1;
+iov[1].iov_len = sizeof(buf1);
+iov[2].iov_base = buf2;
+iov[2].iov_len = sizeof(buf2);
+\&...
+iovcnt = sizeof(iov) / sizeof(struct iovec);
+.P
+bytes_read = readv(fd, iov, iovcnt);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwritev\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_uio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/realloc.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/realloc.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2eedf89
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/realloc.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,176 @@
+'\" et
+.TH REALLOC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+realloc
+\(em memory reallocator
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+void *realloc(void *\fIptr\fP, size_t \fIsize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIrealloc\fR()
+function shall deallocate the old object pointed to by
+.IR ptr
+and return a pointer to a new object that has the size specified by
+.IR size .
+The contents of the new object shall be the same as that of the old
+object prior to deallocation, up to the lesser of the new and old
+sizes. Any bytes in the new object beyond the size of the old object
+have indeterminate values. If the size of the space requested is zero,
+the behavior shall be implementation-defined: either a null pointer is
+returned, or the behavior shall be as if the size were some non-zero
+value, except that the returned pointer shall not be used to access
+an object. If the space cannot be allocated, the object shall remain
+unchanged.
+.P
+If
+.IR ptr
+is a null pointer,
+\fIrealloc\fR()
+shall be equivalent to
+\fImalloc\fR()
+for the specified size.
+.P
+If
+.IR ptr
+does not match a pointer returned earlier by
+\fIcalloc\fR(),
+\fImalloc\fR(),
+or
+\fIrealloc\fR()
+or if the space has previously been deallocated by a call to
+\fIfree\fR()
+or
+\fIrealloc\fR(),
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The order and contiguity of storage allocated by successive calls to
+\fIrealloc\fR()
+is unspecified. The pointer returned if the allocation succeeds shall
+be suitably aligned so that it may be assigned to a pointer to any type
+of object and then used to access such an object in the space allocated
+(until the space is explicitly freed or reallocated). Each such
+allocation shall yield a pointer to an object disjoint from any other
+object. The pointer returned shall point to the start (lowest byte
+address) of the allocated space. If the space cannot be allocated, a
+null pointer shall be returned.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIrealloc\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the (possibly moved) allocated space. If
+.IR size
+is 0, either:
+.IP " *" 4
+A null pointer shall be returned
+and
+.IR errno
+set to an implementation-defined value.
+.IP " *" 4
+A unique pointer that can be successfully passed to
+\fIfree\fR()
+shall be returned, and the memory object pointed to by
+.IR ptr
+shall be freed. The application shall ensure that the pointer is not
+used to access an object.
+.P
+If there is not enough available memory,
+\fIrealloc\fR()
+shall return a null pointer
+and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [ENOMEM] .
+If
+\fIrealloc\fR()
+returns a null pointer
+and
+.IR errno
+has been set to
+.BR [ENOMEM] ,
+the memory referenced by
+.IR ptr
+shall not be changed.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIrealloc\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory is available.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The description of
+\fIrealloc\fR()
+has been modified from previous versions of this standard to align
+with the ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1999 standard. Previous versions explicitly permitted a call to
+.IR realloc \c
+(\fIp\fI, 0) to free the space pointed to by
+.IR p
+and return a null pointer. While this behavior could be interpreted as
+permitted by this version of the standard, the C language committee have
+indicated that this interpretation is incorrect. Applications should
+assume that if
+\fIrealloc\fR()
+returns a null pointer, the space pointed to by
+.IR p
+has not been freed. Since this could lead to double-frees, implementations
+should also set
+.IR errno
+if a null pointer actually indicates a failure, and applications should
+only free the space if
+.IR errno
+was changed.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+This standard defers to the ISO\ C standard. While that standard currently has
+language that might permit
+.IR realloc \c
+(\fIp\fI, 0), where
+.IR p
+is not a null pointer, to free
+.IR p
+while still returning a null pointer, the committee responsible for that
+standard is considering clarifying the language to explicitly prohibit
+that alternative.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcalloc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfree\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImalloc\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/realpath.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/realpath.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6a0c902
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/realpath.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,254 @@
+'\" et
+.TH REALPATH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+realpath
+\(em resolve a pathname
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+char *realpath(const char *restrict \fIfile_name\fP,
+    char *restrict \fIresolved_name\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIrealpath\fR()
+function shall derive, from the pathname pointed to by
+.IR file_name ,
+an absolute pathname that resolves to the same directory entry, whose
+resolution does not involve
+.BR '.' ,
+.BR '..' ,
+or symbolic links. If
+.IR resolved_name
+is a null pointer, the generated pathname shall be stored as a
+null-terminated string in a buffer allocated as if by a call to
+\fImalloc\fR().
+Otherwise, if
+{PATH_MAX}
+is defined as a constant in the
+.IR <limits.h> 
+header, then the generated pathname shall be stored as a null-terminated
+string, up to a maximum of
+{PATH_MAX}
+bytes, in the buffer pointed to by
+.IR resolved_name .
+.P
+If
+.IR resolved_name
+is not a null pointer and
+{PATH_MAX}
+is not defined as a constant in the
+.IR <limits.h> 
+header, the behavior is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIrealpath\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the buffer containing the resolved name.
+Otherwise,
+\fIrealpath\fR()
+shall return a null pointer and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.P
+If the
+.IR resolved_name
+argument is a null pointer, the pointer returned by
+\fIrealpath\fR()
+can be passed to
+\fIfree\fR().
+.P
+If the
+.IR resolved_name
+argument is not a null pointer and the
+\fIrealpath\fR()
+function fails, the contents of the buffer pointed to by
+.IR resolved_name
+are undefined.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIrealpath\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission was denied for a component of the path prefix of
+.IR file_name .
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR file_name
+argument is a null pointer.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An error occurred while reading from the file system.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR file_name
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR file_name
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR file_name
+points to an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory, or the
+.IR file_name
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file that
+is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIrealpath\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+The
+.IR file_name
+argument does not begin with a
+<slash>
+and none of the symbolic links (if any) processed during pathname
+resolution of
+.IR file_name
+had contents that began with a
+<slash>,
+and either search permission was denied for the current directory or
+read or search permission was denied for a directory above the current
+directory in the file hierarchy.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR file_name
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient storage space is available.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Generating an Absolute Pathname"
+.P
+The following example generates an absolute pathname for the file
+identified by the
+.IR symlinkpath
+argument. The generated pathname is stored in the buffer pointed to by
+.IR actualpath .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdlib.h>
+\&...
+char *symlinkpath = "/tmp/symlink/file";
+char *actualpath;
+.P
+actualpath = realpath(symlinkpath, NULL);
+if (actualpath != NULL)
+{
+    ... use actualpath ...
+.P
+    free(actualpath);
+}
+else
+{
+    ... handle error ...
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+For functions that allocate memory as if by
+\fImalloc\fR(),
+the application should release such memory when it is no longer
+required by a call to
+\fIfree\fR().
+For
+\fIrealpath\fR(),
+this is the return value.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Since
+\fIrealpath\fR()
+has no
+.IR length
+argument, if
+{PATH_MAX}
+is not defined as a constant in
+.IR <limits.h> ,
+applications have no way of determining how large a buffer they need
+to allocate for it to be safe to pass to
+\fIrealpath\fR().
+A
+{PATH_MAX}
+value obtained from a prior
+\fIpathconf\fR()
+call is out-of-date by the time
+\fIrealpath\fR()
+is called. Hence the only reliable way to use
+\fIrealpath\fR()
+when
+{PATH_MAX}
+is not defined in
+.IR <limits.h> 
+is to pass a null pointer for
+.IR resolved_name
+so that
+\fIrealpath\fR()
+will allocate a buffer of the necessary size.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfpathconf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfree\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetcwd\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<limits.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/recv.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/recv.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9ec4726
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/recv.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,220 @@
+'\" et
+.TH RECV "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+recv
+\(em receive a message from a connected socket
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+.P
+ssize_t recv(int \fIsocket\fP, void *\fIbuffer\fP, size_t \fIlength\fP, int \fIflags\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIrecv\fR()
+function shall receive a message from a connection-mode or
+connectionless-mode socket. It is normally used with connected sockets
+because it does not permit the application to retrieve the source
+address of received data.
+.P
+The
+\fIrecv\fR()
+function takes the following arguments:
+.IP "\fIsocket\fR" 10
+Specifies the socket file descriptor.
+.IP "\fIbuffer\fR" 10
+Points to a buffer where the message should be stored.
+.IP "\fIlength\fR" 10
+Specifies the length in bytes of the buffer pointed to by the
+.IR buffer
+argument.
+.IP "\fIflags\fR" 10
+Specifies the type of message reception. Values of this argument are
+formed by logically OR'ing zero or more of the following values:
+.RS 10 
+.IP MSG_PEEK 12
+Peeks at an incoming message. The data is treated as unread and the
+next
+\fIrecv\fR()
+or similar function shall still return this data.
+.IP MSG_OOB 12
+Requests out-of-band data. The significance and semantics of
+out-of-band data are protocol-specific.
+.IP MSG_WAITALL 12
+On SOCK_STREAM sockets this requests that the function block until the
+full amount of data can be returned. The function may return the
+smaller amount of data if the socket is a message-based socket, if a
+signal is caught, if the connection is terminated, if MSG_PEEK was
+specified, or if an error is pending for the socket.
+.RE
+.P
+The
+\fIrecv\fR()
+function shall return the length of the message written to the buffer
+pointed to by the
+.IR buffer
+argument. For message-based sockets, such as SOCK_DGRAM and
+SOCK_SEQPACKET, the entire message shall be read in a single operation.
+If a message is too long to fit in the supplied buffer, and MSG_PEEK is
+not set in the
+.IR flags
+argument, the excess bytes shall be discarded. For stream-based
+sockets, such as SOCK_STREAM, message boundaries shall be ignored. In
+this case, data shall be returned to the user as soon as it becomes
+available, and no data shall be discarded.
+.P
+If the MSG_WAITALL flag is not set, data shall be returned only up to
+the end of the first message.
+.P
+If no messages are available at the socket and O_NONBLOCK is not set on
+the socket's file descriptor,
+\fIrecv\fR()
+shall block until a message arrives. If no messages are available at
+the socket and O_NONBLOCK is set on the socket's file descriptor,
+\fIrecv\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EAGAIN] 
+or
+.BR [EWOULDBLOCK] .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIrecv\fR()
+shall return the length of the message in bytes. If no messages are
+available to be received and the peer has performed an orderly
+shutdown,
+\fIrecv\fR()
+shall return 0. Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIrecv\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN " or " EWOULDBLOCK
+.br
+The socket's file descriptor is marked O_NONBLOCK and no data is
+waiting to be received; or MSG_OOB is set and no out-of-band data is
+available and either the socket's file descriptor is marked O_NONBLOCK
+or the socket does not support blocking to await out-of-band data.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR socket
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR ECONNRESET
+A connection was forcibly closed by a peer.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fIrecv\fR()
+function was interrupted by a signal that was caught, before any data
+was available.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The MSG_OOB flag is set and no out-of-band data is available.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTCONN
+A receive is attempted on a connection-mode socket that is not
+connected.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSOCK
+The
+.IR socket
+argument does not refer to a socket.
+.TP
+.BR EOPNOTSUPP
+The specified flags are not supported for this socket type or
+protocol.
+.TP
+.BR ETIMEDOUT
+The connection timed out during connection establishment, or due to a
+transmission timeout on active connection.
+.P
+The
+\fIrecv\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to the file
+system.
+.TP
+.BR ENOBUFS
+Insufficient resources were available in the system to perform the
+operation.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory was available to fulfill the request.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIrecv\fR()
+function is equivalent to
+\fIrecvfrom\fR()
+with null pointer
+.IR address
+and
+.IR address_len
+arguments, and to
+\fIread\fR()
+if the
+.IR socket
+argument refers to a socket and the
+.IR flags
+argument is 0.
+.P
+The
+\fIselect\fR()
+and
+\fIpoll\fR()
+functions can be used to determine when data is available to be
+received.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpoll\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpselect\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecvmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecvfrom\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsend\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsendmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsendto\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshutdown\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/recvfrom.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/recvfrom.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1323ba8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/recvfrom.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,243 @@
+'\" et
+.TH RECVFROM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+recvfrom
+\(em receive a message from a socket
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+.P
+ssize_t recvfrom(int \fIsocket\fP, void *restrict \fIbuffer\fP, size_t \fIlength\fP,
+    int \fIflags\fP, struct sockaddr *restrict \fIaddress\fP,
+    socklen_t *restrict \fIaddress_len\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIrecvfrom\fR()
+function shall receive a message from a connection-mode or
+connectionless-mode socket. It is normally used with
+connectionless-mode sockets because it permits the application to
+retrieve the source address of received data.
+.P
+The
+\fIrecvfrom\fR()
+function takes the following arguments:
+.IP "\fIsocket\fR" 12
+Specifies the socket file descriptor.
+.IP "\fIbuffer\fR" 12
+Points to the buffer where the message should be stored.
+.IP "\fIlength\fR" 12
+Specifies the length in bytes of the buffer pointed to by the
+.IR buffer
+argument.
+.IP "\fIflags\fR" 12
+Specifies the type of message reception. Values of this argument are
+formed by logically OR'ing zero or more of the following values:
+.RS 12 
+.IP MSG_PEEK 12
+Peeks at an incoming message. The data is treated as unread and the
+next
+\fIrecvfrom\fR()
+or similar function shall still return this data.
+.IP MSG_OOB 12
+Requests out-of-band data. The significance and semantics of
+out-of-band data are protocol-specific.
+.IP MSG_WAITALL 12
+On SOCK_STREAM sockets this requests that the function block until the
+full amount of data can be returned. The function may return the
+smaller amount of data if the socket is a message-based socket, if a
+signal is caught, if the connection is terminated, if MSG_PEEK was
+specified, or if an error is pending for the socket.
+.RE
+.IP "\fIaddress\fR" 12
+A null pointer, or points to a
+.BR sockaddr
+structure in which the sending address is to be stored. The length and
+format of the address depend on the address family of the socket.
+.IP "\fIaddress_len\fR" 12
+Either a null pointer, if
+.IR address
+is a null pointer, or a pointer to a
+.BR socklen_t
+object which on input specifies the length of the supplied
+.BR sockaddr
+structure, and on output specifies the length of the stored address.
+.P
+The
+\fIrecvfrom\fR()
+function shall return the length of the message written to the buffer
+pointed to by the
+.IR buffer
+argument. For message-based sockets, such as
+SOCK_RAW,
+SOCK_DGRAM, and SOCK_SEQPACKET, the entire message shall be read in a
+single operation. If a message is too long to fit in the supplied
+buffer, and MSG_PEEK is not set in the
+.IR flags
+argument, the excess bytes shall be discarded. For stream-based
+sockets, such as SOCK_STREAM, message boundaries shall be ignored. In
+this case, data shall be returned to the user as soon as it becomes
+available, and no data shall be discarded.
+.P
+If the MSG_WAITALL flag is not set, data shall be returned only up to
+the end of the first message.
+.P
+Not all protocols provide the source address for messages. If the
+.IR address
+argument is not a null pointer and the protocol provides the source
+address of messages, the source address of the received message shall
+be stored in the
+.BR sockaddr
+structure pointed to by the
+.IR address
+argument, and the length of this address shall be stored in the object
+pointed to by the
+.IR address_len
+argument.
+.P
+If the actual length of the address is greater than the length of the
+supplied
+.BR sockaddr
+structure, the stored address shall be truncated.
+.P
+If the
+.IR address
+argument is not a null pointer and the protocol does not provide the
+source address of messages, the value stored in the object pointed to
+by
+.IR address
+is unspecified.
+.P
+If no messages are available at the socket and O_NONBLOCK is not set on
+the socket's file descriptor,
+\fIrecvfrom\fR()
+shall block until a message arrives. If no messages are available at
+the socket and O_NONBLOCK is set on the socket's file descriptor,
+\fIrecvfrom\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EAGAIN] 
+or
+.BR [EWOULDBLOCK] .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIrecvfrom\fR()
+shall return the length of the message in bytes. If no messages are
+available to be received and the peer has performed an orderly
+shutdown,
+\fIrecvfrom\fR()
+shall return 0. Otherwise, the function shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIrecvfrom\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN " or " EWOULDBLOCK
+.br
+The socket's file descriptor is marked O_NONBLOCK and no data is
+waiting to be received; or MSG_OOB is set and no out-of-band data is
+available and either the socket's file descriptor is marked O_NONBLOCK
+or the socket does not support blocking to await out-of-band data.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR socket
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR ECONNRESET
+A connection was forcibly closed by a peer.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal interrupted
+\fIrecvfrom\fR()
+before any data was available.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The MSG_OOB flag is set and no out-of-band data is available.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTCONN
+A receive is attempted on a connection-mode socket that is not connected.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSOCK
+The
+.IR socket
+argument does not refer to a socket.
+.TP
+.BR EOPNOTSUPP
+The specified flags are not supported for this socket type.
+.TP
+.BR ETIMEDOUT
+The connection timed out during connection establishment, or due to a
+transmission timeout on active connection.
+.P
+The
+\fIrecvfrom\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to the file
+system.
+.TP
+.BR ENOBUFS
+Insufficient resources were available in the system to perform the
+operation.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory was available to fulfill the request.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIselect\fR()
+and
+\fIpoll\fR()
+functions can be used to determine when data is available to be
+received.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpoll\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpselect\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecvmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsend\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsendmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsendto\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshutdown\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/recvmsg.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/recvmsg.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..855481b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/recvmsg.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,278 @@
+'\" et
+.TH RECVMSG "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+recvmsg
+\(em receive a message from a socket
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+.P
+ssize_t recvmsg(int \fIsocket\fP, struct msghdr *\fImessage\fP, int \fIflags\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIrecvmsg\fR()
+function shall receive a message from a connection-mode or
+connectionless-mode socket. It is normally used with
+connectionless-mode sockets because it permits the application to
+retrieve the source address of received data.
+.P
+The
+\fIrecvmsg\fR()
+function takes the following arguments:
+.IP "\fIsocket\fR" 12
+Specifies the socket file descriptor.
+.IP "\fImessage\fR" 12
+Points to a
+.BR msghdr
+structure, containing both the buffer to store the source address and
+the buffers for the incoming message. The length and format of the
+address depend on the address family of the socket. The
+.IR msg_flags
+member is ignored on input, but may contain meaningful values on
+output.
+.IP "\fIflags\fR" 12
+Specifies the type of message reception. Values of this argument are
+formed by logically OR'ing zero or more of the following values:
+.RS 12 
+.IP MSG_OOB 12
+Requests out-of-band data. The significance and semantics of
+out-of-band data are protocol-specific.
+.IP MSG_PEEK 12
+Peeks at the incoming message.
+.IP MSG_WAITALL 12
+On SOCK_STREAM sockets this requests that the function block until the
+full amount of data can be returned. The function may return the
+smaller amount of data if the socket is a message-based socket, if a
+signal is caught, if the connection is terminated, if MSG_PEEK was
+specified, or if an error is pending for the socket.
+.RE
+.P
+The
+\fIrecvmsg\fR()
+function shall receive messages from unconnected or connected
+sockets and shall return the length of the message.
+.P
+The
+\fIrecvmsg\fR()
+function shall return the total length of the message. For
+message-based sockets, such as SOCK_DGRAM and SOCK_SEQPACKET, the
+entire message shall be read in a single operation. If a message is too
+long to fit in the supplied buffers, and MSG_PEEK is not set in the
+.IR flags
+argument, the excess bytes shall be discarded, and MSG_TRUNC shall be
+set in the
+.IR msg_flags
+member of the
+.BR msghdr
+structure. For stream-based sockets, such as SOCK_STREAM, message
+boundaries shall be ignored. In this case, data shall be returned to
+the user as soon as it becomes available, and no data shall be
+discarded.
+.P
+If the MSG_WAITALL flag is not set, data shall be returned only up to
+the end of the first message.
+.P
+If no messages are available at the socket and O_NONBLOCK is not set on
+the socket's file descriptor,
+\fIrecvmsg\fR()
+shall block until a message arrives. If no messages are available at
+the socket and O_NONBLOCK is set on the socket's file descriptor, the
+\fIrecvmsg\fR()
+function shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EAGAIN] 
+or
+.BR [EWOULDBLOCK] .
+.P
+In the
+.BR msghdr
+structure, the
+.IR msg_name
+member may be a null pointer if the source address is not required.
+Otherwise, if the socket is unconnected, the
+.IR msg_name
+member points to a
+.BR sockaddr
+structure in which the source address is to be stored, and the
+.IR msg_namelen
+member on input specifies the length of the supplied
+.BR sockaddr
+structure and on output specifies the length of the stored address.
+If the actual length of the address is greater than the length of the
+supplied
+.BR sockaddr
+structure, the stored address shall be truncated. If the socket is
+connected, the
+.IR msg_name
+and
+.IR msg_namelen
+members shall be ignored. The
+.IR msg_iov
+and
+.IR msg_iovlen
+fields are used to specify where the received data shall be stored.
+The
+.IR msg_iov
+member points to an array of
+.BR iovec
+structures; the
+.IR msg_iovlen
+member shall be set to the dimension of this array. In each
+.BR iovec
+structure, the
+.IR iov_base
+field specifies a storage area and the
+.IR iov_len
+field gives its size in bytes. Each storage area indicated by
+.IR msg_iov
+is filled with received data in turn until all of the received data is
+stored or all of the areas have been filled.
+.P
+Upon successful completion, the
+.IR msg_flags
+member of the message header shall be the bitwise-inclusive OR of all
+of the following flags that indicate conditions detected for the
+received message:
+.IP MSG_EOR 12
+End-of-record was received (if supported by the protocol).
+.IP MSG_OOB 12
+Out-of-band data was received.
+.IP MSG_TRUNC 12
+Normal data was truncated.
+.IP MSG_CTRUNC 12
+Control data was truncated.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIrecvmsg\fR()
+shall return the length of the message in bytes. If no messages are
+available to be received and the peer has performed an orderly
+shutdown,
+\fIrecvmsg\fR()
+shall return 0. Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIrecvmsg\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN " or " EWOULDBLOCK
+.br
+The socket's file descriptor is marked O_NONBLOCK and no data is
+waiting to be received; or MSG_OOB is set and no out-of-band data is
+available and either the socket's file descriptor is marked O_NONBLOCK
+or the socket does not support blocking to await out-of-band data.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR socket
+argument is not a valid open file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR ECONNRESET
+A connection was forcibly closed by a peer.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+This function was interrupted by a signal before any data was
+available.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The sum of the
+.IR iov_len
+values overflows a
+.BR ssize_t ,
+or the MSG_OOB flag is set and no out-of-band data is available.
+.TP
+.BR EMSGSIZE
+The
+.IR msg_iovlen
+member of the
+.BR msghdr
+structure pointed to by
+.IR message
+is less than or equal to 0, or is greater than
+{IOV_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTCONN
+A receive is attempted on a connection-mode socket that is not
+connected.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSOCK
+The
+.IR socket
+argument does not refer to a socket.
+.TP
+.BR EOPNOTSUPP
+The specified flags are not supported for this socket type.
+.TP
+.BR ETIMEDOUT
+The connection timed out during connection establishment, or due to a
+transmission timeout on active connection.
+.P
+The
+\fIrecvmsg\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to the file
+system.
+.TP
+.BR ENOBUFS
+Insufficient resources were available in the system to perform the
+operation.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory was available to fulfill the request.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIselect\fR()
+and
+\fIpoll\fR()
+functions can be used to determine when data is available to be
+received.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpoll\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpselect\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecvfrom\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsend\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsendmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsendto\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshutdown\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/regcomp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/regcomp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..06466af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/regcomp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,873 @@
+'\" et
+.TH REGCOMP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+regcomp,
+regerror,
+regexec,
+regfree
+\(em regular expression matching
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <regex.h>
+.P
+int regcomp(regex_t *restrict \fIpreg\fP, const char *restrict \fIpattern\fP,
+    int \fIcflags\fP);
+size_t regerror(int \fIerrcode\fP, const regex_t *restrict \fIpreg\fP,
+    char *restrict \fIerrbuf\fP, size_t \fIerrbuf_size\fP);
+int regexec(const regex_t *restrict \fIpreg\fP, const char *restrict \fIstring\fP,
+    size_t \fInmatch\fP, regmatch_t \fIpmatch\fP[restrict], int \fIeflags\fP);
+void regfree(regex_t *\fIpreg\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+These functions interpret
+.IR basic
+and
+.IR extended
+regular expressions as described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 9" ", " "Regular Expressions".
+.P
+The
+.BR regex_t
+structure is defined in
+.IR <regex.h> 
+and contains at least the following member:
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB | cB
+lw(1.25i)B | lw(1.25i)I | lw(2.5i).
+Member Type!Member Name!Description
+_
+size_t!re_nsub!T{
+Number of parenthesized subexpressions.
+T}
+.TE
+.P
+The
+.BR regmatch_t
+structure is defined in
+.IR <regex.h> 
+and contains at least the following members:
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB | cB
+lw(1.25i)B | lw(1.25i)I | lw(2.5i).
+Member Type!Member Name!Description
+_
+regoff_t!rm_so!T{
+Byte offset from start of \fIstring\fP to start of substring.
+T}
+regoff_t!rm_eo!T{
+Byte offset from start of
+.IR string
+of the first character after the end of substring.
+T}
+.TE
+.P
+The
+\fIregcomp\fR()
+function shall compile the regular expression contained in the string
+pointed to by the
+.IR pattern
+argument and place the results in the structure pointed to by
+.IR preg .
+The
+.IR cflags
+argument is the bitwise-inclusive OR of zero or more of the following
+flags, which are defined in the
+.IR <regex.h> 
+header:
+.IP REG_EXTENDED 14
+Use Extended Regular Expressions.
+.IP REG_ICASE 14
+Ignore case in match (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 9" ", " "Regular Expressions").
+.IP REG_NOSUB 14
+Report only success/fail in
+\fIregexec\fR().
+.IP REG_NEWLINE 14
+Change the handling of
+<newline>
+characters, as described in the text.
+.P
+The default regular expression type for
+.IR pattern
+is a Basic Regular Expression. The application can specify Extended
+Regular Expressions using the REG_EXTENDED
+.IR cflags
+flag.
+.P
+If the REG_NOSUB flag was not set in
+.IR cflags ,
+then
+\fIregcomp\fR()
+shall set
+.IR re_nsub
+to the number of parenthesized subexpressions (delimited by
+.BR \(dq\e(\e)\(dq 
+in basic regular expressions or
+.BR \(dq(\|)\(dq 
+in extended regular expressions) found in
+.IR pattern .
+.P
+The
+\fIregexec\fR()
+function compares the null-terminated string specified by
+.IR string
+with the compiled regular expression
+.IR preg
+initialized by a previous call to
+\fIregcomp\fR().
+If it finds a match,
+\fIregexec\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, it shall return non-zero indicating either
+no match or an error. The
+.IR eflags
+argument is the bitwise-inclusive OR of zero or more of the following
+flags, which are defined in the
+.IR <regex.h> 
+header:
+.IP REG_NOTBOL 14
+The first character of the string pointed to by
+.IR string
+is not the beginning of the line. Therefore, the
+<circumflex>
+character
+(\c
+.BR '^' ),
+when taken as a special character, shall not match the beginning of
+.IR string .
+.IP REG_NOTEOL 14
+The last character of the string pointed to by
+.IR string
+is not the end of the line. Therefore, the
+<dollar-sign>
+(\c
+.BR '$' ),
+when taken as a special character, shall not match the end of
+.IR string .
+.P
+If
+.IR nmatch
+is 0 or REG_NOSUB was set in the
+.IR cflags
+argument to
+\fIregcomp\fR(),
+then
+\fIregexec\fR()
+shall ignore the
+.IR pmatch
+argument. Otherwise, the application shall ensure that the
+.IR pmatch
+argument points to an array with at least
+.IR nmatch
+elements, and
+\fIregexec\fR()
+shall fill in the elements of that array with offsets of the substrings
+of
+.IR string
+that correspond to the parenthesized subexpressions of
+.IR pattern :
+.IR pmatch [\c
+.IR i ].\c
+.IR rm_so
+shall be the byte offset of the beginning and
+.IR pmatch [\c
+.IR i ].\c
+.IR rm_eo
+shall be one greater than the byte offset of the end of substring
+.IR i .
+(Subexpression
+.IR i
+begins at the
+.IR i th
+matched open parenthesis, counting from 1.) Offsets in
+.IR pmatch [0]
+identify the substring that corresponds to the entire regular
+expression. Unused elements of
+.IR pmatch
+up to
+.IR pmatch [\c
+.IR nmatch \(mi1]
+shall be filled with \(mi1. If there are more than
+.IR nmatch
+subexpressions in
+.IR pattern
+(\c
+.IR pattern
+itself counts as a subexpression), then
+\fIregexec\fR()
+shall still do the match, but shall record only the first
+.IR nmatch
+substrings.
+.P
+When matching a basic or extended regular expression, any given
+parenthesized subexpression of
+.IR pattern
+might participate in the match of several different substrings of
+.IR string ,
+or it might not match any substring even though the pattern as a whole
+did match. The following rules shall be used to determine which
+substrings to report in
+.IR pmatch
+when matching regular expressions:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If subexpression
+.IR i
+in a regular expression is not contained within another subexpression,
+and it participated in the match several times, then the byte offsets
+in
+.IR pmatch [\c
+.IR i ]
+shall delimit the last such match.
+.IP " 2." 4
+If subexpression
+.IR i
+is not contained within another subexpression, and it did not
+participate in an otherwise successful match, the byte offsets in
+.IR pmatch [\c
+.IR i ]
+shall be \(mi1. A subexpression does not participate in the match when:
+.sp
+.RS
+.BR '*' 
+or
+.BR \(dq\e{\e}\(dq 
+appears immediately after the subexpression in a basic regular
+expression, or
+.BR '*' ,
+.BR '?' ,
+or
+.BR \(dq{\|}\(dq 
+appears immediately after the subexpression in an extended regular
+expression, and the subexpression did not match (matched 0 times)
+.RE
+.RS 4 
+.P
+or:
+.sp
+.RS
+.BR '|' 
+is used in an extended regular expression to select this subexpression
+or another, and the other subexpression matched.
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 3." 4
+If subexpression
+.IR i
+is contained within another subexpression
+.IR j ,
+and
+.IR i
+is not contained within any other subexpression that is contained
+within
+.IR j ,
+and a match of subexpression
+.IR j
+is reported in
+.IR pmatch [\c
+.IR j ],
+then the match or non-match of subexpression
+.IR i
+reported in
+.IR pmatch [\c
+.IR i ]
+shall be as described in 1. and 2. above, but within the substring
+reported in
+.IR pmatch [\c
+.IR j ]
+rather than the whole string. The offsets in
+.IR pmatch [\c
+.IR i ]
+are still relative to the start of
+.IR string .
+.IP " 4." 4
+If subexpression
+.IR i
+is contained in subexpression
+.IR j ,
+and the byte offsets in
+.IR pmatch [\c
+.IR j ]
+are \(mi1, then the pointers in
+.IR pmatch [\c
+.IR i ]
+shall also be \(mi1.
+.IP " 5." 4
+If subexpression
+.IR i
+matched a zero-length string, then both byte offsets in
+.IR pmatch [\c
+.IR i ]
+shall be the byte offset of the character or null terminator
+immediately following the zero-length string.
+.P
+If, when
+\fIregexec\fR()
+is called, the locale is different from when the regular expression was
+compiled, the result is undefined.
+.P
+If REG_NEWLINE is not set in
+.IR cflags ,
+then a
+<newline>
+in
+.IR pattern
+or
+.IR string
+shall be treated as an ordinary character. If REG_NEWLINE is set, then
+<newline>
+shall be treated as an ordinary character except as follows:
+.IP " 1." 4
+A
+<newline>
+in
+.IR string
+shall not be matched by a
+<period>
+outside a bracket expression or by any form of a non-matching list
+(see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 9" ", " "Regular Expressions").
+.IP " 2." 4
+A
+<circumflex>
+(\c
+.BR '^' )
+in
+.IR pattern ,
+when used to specify expression anchoring (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 9.3.8" ", " "BRE Expression Anchoring"),
+shall match the zero-length string immediately after a
+<newline>
+in
+.IR string ,
+regardless of the setting of REG_NOTBOL.
+.IP " 3." 4
+A
+<dollar-sign>
+(\c
+.BR '$' )
+in
+.IR pattern ,
+when used to specify expression anchoring, shall match the zero-length
+string immediately before a
+<newline>
+in
+.IR string ,
+regardless of the setting of REG_NOTEOL.
+.P
+The
+\fIregfree\fR()
+function frees any memory allocated by
+\fIregcomp\fR()
+associated with
+.IR preg .
+.P
+The following constants are defined as the minimum set of error return
+values, although other errors listed as implementation extensions in
+.IR <regex.h> 
+are possible:
+.IP REG_BADBR 14
+Content of
+.BR \(dq\e{\e}\(dq 
+invalid: not a number, number too large, more than two numbers, first
+larger than second.
+.IP REG_BADPAT 14
+Invalid regular expression.
+.IP REG_BADRPT 14
+.BR '?' ,
+.BR '*' ,
+or
+.BR '+' 
+not preceded by valid regular expression.
+.IP REG_EBRACE 14
+.BR \(dq\e{\e}\(dq 
+imbalance.
+.IP REG_EBRACK 14
+.BR \(dq[]\(dq 
+imbalance.
+.IP REG_ECOLLATE 14
+Invalid collating element referenced.
+.IP REG_ECTYPE 14
+Invalid character class type referenced.
+.IP REG_EESCAPE 14
+Trailing
+<backslash>
+character in pattern.
+.IP REG_EPAREN 14
+.BR \(dq\e(\e)\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dq()\(dq 
+imbalance.
+.IP REG_ERANGE 14
+Invalid endpoint in range expression.
+.IP REG_ESPACE 14
+Out of memory.
+.IP REG_ESUBREG 14
+Number in
+.BR \(dq\edigit\(dq 
+invalid or in error.
+.IP REG_NOMATCH 14
+\fIregexec\fR()
+failed to match.
+.P
+If more than one error occurs in processing a function call, any one
+of the possible constants may be returned, as the order of detection is
+unspecified.
+.P
+The
+\fIregerror\fR()
+function provides a mapping from error codes returned by
+\fIregcomp\fR()
+and
+\fIregexec\fR()
+to unspecified printable strings. It generates a string corresponding
+to the value of the
+.IR errcode
+argument, which the application shall ensure is the last non-zero value
+returned by
+\fIregcomp\fR()
+or
+\fIregexec\fR()
+with the given value of
+.IR preg .
+If
+.IR errcode
+is not such a value, the content of the generated string is unspecified.
+.P
+If
+.IR preg
+is a null pointer, but
+.IR errcode
+is a value returned by a previous call to
+\fIregexec\fR()
+or
+\fIregcomp\fR(),
+the
+\fIregerror\fR()
+still generates an error string corresponding to the value of
+.IR errcode ,
+but it might not be as detailed under some implementations.
+.P
+If the
+.IR errbuf_size
+argument is not 0,
+\fIregerror\fR()
+shall place the generated string into the buffer of size
+.IR errbuf_size
+bytes pointed to by
+.IR errbuf .
+If the string (including the terminating null) cannot fit in the
+buffer,
+\fIregerror\fR()
+shall truncate the string and null-terminate the result.
+.P
+If
+.IR errbuf_size
+is 0,
+\fIregerror\fR()
+shall ignore the
+.IR errbuf
+argument, and return the size of the buffer needed to hold the
+generated string.
+.P
+If the
+.IR preg
+argument to
+\fIregexec\fR()
+or
+\fIregfree\fR()
+is not a compiled regular expression returned by
+\fIregcomp\fR(),
+the result is undefined. A
+.IR preg
+is no longer treated as a compiled regular expression after it is given
+to
+\fIregfree\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIregcomp\fR()
+function shall return 0. Otherwise, it shall return an integer value
+indicating an error as described in
+.IR <regex.h> ,
+and the content of
+.IR preg
+is undefined. If a code is returned, the interpretation shall be as
+given in
+.IR <regex.h> .
+.P
+If
+\fIregcomp\fR()
+detects an invalid RE, it may return REG_BADPAT, or it may return one
+of the error codes that more precisely describes the error.
+.P
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIregexec\fR()
+function shall return 0. Otherwise, it shall return REG_NOMATCH to
+indicate no match.
+.P
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIregerror\fR()
+function shall return the number of bytes needed to hold the entire
+generated string, including the null termination. If the return value
+is greater than
+.IR errbuf_size ,
+the string returned in the buffer pointed to by
+.IR errbuf
+has been truncated.
+.P
+The
+\fIregfree\fR()
+function shall not return a value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <regex.h>
+.P
+/*
+ * Match string against the extended regular expression in
+ * pattern, treating errors as no match.
+ *
+ * Return 1 for match, 0 for no match.
+ */
+.P
+int
+match(const char *string, char *pattern)
+{
+    int    status;
+    regex_t    re;
+.P
+    if (regcomp(&re, pattern, REG_EXTENDED|REG_NOSUB) != 0) {
+        return(0);      /* Report error. */
+    }
+    status = regexec(&re, string, (size_t) 0, NULL, 0);
+    regfree(&re);
+    if (status != 0) {
+        return(0);      /* Report error. */
+    }
+    return(1);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following demonstrates how the REG_NOTBOL flag could be used with
+\fIregexec\fR()
+to find all substrings in a line that match a pattern supplied by a user.
+(For simplicity of the example, very little error checking is done.)
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(void) regcomp (&re, pattern, 0);
+/* This call to regexec() finds the first match on the line. */
+error = regexec (&re, &buffer[0], 1, &pm, 0);
+while (error == 0) {  /* While matches found. */
+    /* Substring found between pm.rm_so and pm.rm_eo. */
+    /* This call to regexec() finds the next match. */
+    error = regexec (&re, buffer + pm.rm_eo, 1, &pm, REG_NOTBOL);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+An application could use:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+regerror(code,preg,(char *)NULL,(size_t)0)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+to find out how big a buffer is needed for the generated string,
+\fImalloc\fR()
+a buffer to hold the string, and then call
+\fIregerror\fR()
+again to get the string. Alternatively, it could allocate a fixed,
+static buffer that is big enough to hold most strings, and then use
+\fImalloc\fR()
+to allocate a larger buffer if it finds that this is too small.
+.P
+To match a pattern as described in the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.13" ", " "Pattern Matching Notation",
+use the
+\fIfnmatch\fR()
+function.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIregexec\fR()
+function must fill in all
+.IR nmatch
+elements of
+.IR pmatch ,
+where
+.IR nmatch
+and
+.IR pmatch
+are supplied by the application, even if some elements of
+.IR pmatch
+do not correspond to subexpressions in
+.IR pattern .
+The application developer should note that there is probably no reason
+for using a value of
+.IR nmatch
+that is larger than
+.IR preg \(mi>\c
+.IR re_nsub +1.
+.P
+The REG_NEWLINE flag supports a use of RE matching that is needed in
+some applications like text editors. In such applications, the user
+supplies an RE asking the application to find a line that matches the
+given expression. An anchor in such an RE anchors at the beginning or
+end of any line. Such an application can pass a sequence of
+<newline>-separated
+lines to
+\fIregexec\fR()
+as a single long string and specify REG_NEWLINE to
+\fIregcomp\fR()
+to get the desired behavior. The application must ensure that there are
+no explicit
+<newline>
+characters in
+.IR pattern
+if it wants to ensure that any match occurs entirely within a single
+line.
+.P
+The REG_NEWLINE flag affects the behavior of
+\fIregexec\fR(),
+but it is in the
+.IR cflags
+parameter to
+\fIregcomp\fR()
+to allow flexibility of implementation. Some implementations will want
+to generate the same compiled RE in
+\fIregcomp\fR()
+regardless of the setting of REG_NEWLINE and have
+\fIregexec\fR()
+handle anchors differently based on the setting of the flag. Other
+implementations will generate different compiled REs based on the
+REG_NEWLINE.
+.P
+The REG_ICASE flag supports the operations taken by the
+.IR grep
+.BR \(mii
+option and the historical implementations of
+.IR ex
+and
+.IR vi .
+Including this flag will make it easier for application code to be
+written that does the same thing as these utilities.
+.P
+The substrings reported in
+.IR pmatch [\|]
+are defined using offsets from the start of the string rather than
+pointers. This allows type-safe access to both constant and non-constant
+strings.
+.P
+The type
+.BR regoff_t
+is used for the elements of
+.IR pmatch [\|]
+to ensure that the application can represent large arrays in memory
+(important for an application conforming to the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008).
+.P
+The 1992 edition of this standard required
+.BR regoff_t
+to be at least as wide as
+.BR off_t ,
+to facilitate future extensions in which the string to be searched is
+taken from a file. However, these future extensions have not appeared.
+The requirement rules out popular implementations with 32-bit
+.BR regoff_t
+and 64-bit
+.BR off_t ,
+so it has been removed.
+.P
+The standard developers rejected the inclusion of a
+\fIregsub\fR()
+function that would be used to do substitutions for a matched RE. While
+such a routine would be useful to some applications, its utility would
+be much more limited than the matching function described here. Both RE
+parsing and substitution are possible to implement without support
+other than that required by the ISO\ C standard, but matching is much more
+complex than substituting. The only difficult part of substitution,
+given the information supplied by
+\fIregexec\fR(),
+is finding the next character in a string when there can be multi-byte
+characters. That is a much larger issue, and one that needs a more
+general solution.
+.P
+The
+.IR errno
+variable has not been used for error returns to avoid filling the
+.IR errno
+name space for this feature.
+.P
+The interface is defined so that the matched substrings
+.IR rm_sp
+and
+.IR rm_ep
+are in a separate
+.BR regmatch_t
+structure instead of in
+.BR regex_t .
+This allows a single compiled RE to be used simultaneously in several
+contexts; in
+\fImain\fR()
+and a signal handler, perhaps, or in multiple threads of lightweight
+processes. (The
+.IR preg
+argument to
+\fIregexec\fR()
+is declared with type
+.BR const ,
+so the implementation is not permitted to use the structure to store
+intermediate results.) It also allows an application to request an
+arbitrary number of substrings from an RE. The number of
+subexpressions in the RE is reported in
+.IR re_nsub
+in
+.IR preg .
+With this change to
+\fIregexec\fR(),
+consideration was given to dropping the REG_NOSUB flag since the user
+can now specify this with a zero
+.IR nmatch
+argument to
+\fIregexec\fR().
+However, keeping REG_NOSUB allows an implementation to use a different
+(perhaps more efficient) algorithm if it knows in
+\fIregcomp\fR()
+that no subexpressions need be reported. The implementation is only
+required to fill in
+.IR pmatch
+if
+.IR nmatch
+is not zero and if REG_NOSUB is not specified. Note that the
+.BR size_t
+type, as defined in the ISO\ C standard, is unsigned, so the description of
+\fIregexec\fR()
+does not need to address negative values of
+.IR nmatch .
+.P
+REG_NOTBOL was added to allow an application to do repeated searches
+for the same pattern in a line. If the pattern contains a
+<circumflex>
+character that should match the beginning of a line, then the pattern
+should only match when matched against the beginning of the line.
+Without the REG_NOTBOL flag, the application could rewrite the
+expression for subsequent matches, but in the general case this would
+require parsing the expression. The need for REG_NOTEOL is not as
+clear; it was added for symmetry.
+.P
+The addition of the
+\fIregerror\fR()
+function addresses the historical need for conforming application
+programs to have access to error information more than ``Function
+failed to compile/match your RE for unknown reasons''.
+.P
+This interface provides for two different methods of dealing with error
+conditions. The specific error codes (REG_EBRACE, for example), defined
+in
+.IR <regex.h> ,
+allow an application to recover from an error if it is so able. Many
+applications, especially those that use patterns supplied by a user,
+will not try to deal with specific error cases, but will just use
+\fIregerror\fR()
+to obtain a human-readable error message to present to the user.
+.P
+The
+\fIregerror\fR()
+function uses a scheme similar to
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+to deal with the problem of allocating memory to hold the generated
+string. The scheme used by
+\fIstrerror\fR()
+in the ISO\ C standard was considered unacceptable since it creates difficulties
+for multi-threaded applications.
+.P
+The
+.IR preg
+argument is provided to
+\fIregerror\fR()
+to allow an implementation to generate a more descriptive message than
+would be possible with
+.IR errcode
+alone. An implementation might, for example, save the character offset
+of the offending character of the pattern in a field of
+.IR preg ,
+and then include that in the generated message string. The
+implementation may also ignore
+.IR preg .
+.P
+A REG_FILENAME flag was considered, but omitted. This flag caused
+\fIregexec\fR()
+to match patterns as described in the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.13" ", " "Pattern Matching Notation"
+instead of REs. This service is now provided by the
+\fIfnmatch\fR()
+function.
+.P
+Notice that there is a difference in philosophy between the ISO\ POSIX\(hy2:\|1993 standard and
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 in how to handle a ``bad'' regular expression. The ISO\ POSIX\(hy2:\|1993 standard says
+that many bad constructs ``produce undefined results'', or that
+``the interpretation is undefined''. POSIX.1\(hy2008, however, says that the
+interpretation of such REs is unspecified. The term ``undefined'' means
+that the action by the application is an error, of similar severity
+to passing a bad pointer to a function.
+.P
+The
+\fIregcomp\fR()
+and
+\fIregexec\fR()
+functions are required to accept any null-terminated string as the
+.IR pattern
+argument. If the meaning of the string is ``undefined'', the behavior
+of the function is ``unspecified''. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not specify how the
+functions will interpret the pattern; they might return error codes, or
+they might do pattern matching in some completely unexpected way, but
+they should not do something like abort the process.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfnmatch\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIglob\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 9" ", " "Regular Expressions",
+.IR "\fB<regex.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.P
+The Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.13" ", " "Pattern Matching Notation"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/remainder.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/remainder.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..70a121e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/remainder.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+'\" et
+.TH REMAINDER "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+remainder,
+remainderf,
+remainderl
+\(em remainder function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double remainder(double \fIx\fP, double \fIy\fP);
+float remainderf(float \fIx\fP, float \fIy\fP);
+long double remainderl(long double \fIx\fP, long double \fIy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall return the floating-point remainder
+.IR r =\c
+.IR x \(mi\c
+.IR ny
+when
+.IR y
+is non-zero. The value
+.IR n
+is the integral value nearest the exact value
+.IR x /\c
+.IR y .
+When |\|\fIn\fR\(mi\fIx\fR/\fIy\fR\||=\(12, the value
+.IR n
+is chosen to be even.
+.P
+The behavior of
+\fIremainder\fR()
+shall be independent of the rounding mode.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the
+floating-point remainder
+.IR r =\c
+.IR x \(mi\c
+.IR ny
+when
+.IR y
+is non-zero.
+.P
+On systems that do not support the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option, if
+.IR y
+is zero, it is implementation-defined whether a domain error occurs or
+zero is returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+or
+.IR y
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is infinite or
+.IR y
+is 0 and the other is non-NaN, a domain error shall occur, and a NaN
+shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The
+.IR x
+argument is \(+-Inf, or the
+.IR y
+argument is \(+-0 and the other argument is non-NaN.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The
+.IR y
+argument is zero.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIabs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdiv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIldiv\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/remove.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/remove.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a06a78e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/remove.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+'\" et
+.TH REMOVE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+remove
+\(em remove a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int remove(const char *\fIpath\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIremove\fR()
+function shall cause the file named by the pathname pointed to by
+.IR path
+to be no longer accessible by that name. A subsequent attempt to open
+that file using that name shall fail, unless it is created anew.
+.P
+If
+.IR path
+does not name a directory, \fIremove\fP(\fIpath\fP) shall be equivalent
+to \fIunlink\fP(\fIpath\fP).
+.P
+If
+.IR path
+names a directory, \fIremove\fP(\fIpath\fP) shall be equivalent to
+\fIrmdir\fP(\fIpath\fP).
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIrmdir\fR\^(\|)"
+or
+.IR "\fIunlink\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIrmdir\fR\^(\|)"
+or
+.IR "\fIunlink\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Removing Access to a File"
+.P
+The following example shows how to remove access to a file named
+.BR /home/cnd/old_mods .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int status;
+\&...
+status = remove("/home/cnd/old_mods");
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIrmdir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/remque.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/remque.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3cc5221
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/remque.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH REMQUE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+remque
+\(em remove an element from a queue
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <search.h>
+.P
+void remque(void *\fIelement\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIinsque\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/remquo.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/remquo.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..54b48fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/remquo.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+'\" et
+.TH REMQUO "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+remquo,
+remquof,
+remquol
+\(em remainder functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double remquo(double \fIx\fP, double \fIy\fP, int *\fIquo\fP);
+float remquof(float \fIx\fP, float \fIy\fP, int *\fIquo\fP);
+long double remquol(long double \fIx\fP, long double \fIy\fP, int *\fIquo\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIremquo\fR(),
+\fIremquof\fR(),
+and
+\fIremquol\fR()
+functions shall compute the same remainder as the
+\fIremainder\fR(),
+\fIremainderf\fR(),
+and
+\fIremainderl\fR()
+functions, respectively. In the object pointed to by
+.IR quo ,
+they store a value whose sign is the sign of
+.IR x /\c
+.IR y
+and whose magnitude is congruent modulo 2\fI\s-3\un\d\s+3\fR to the
+magnitude of the integral quotient of
+.IR x /\c
+.IR y ,
+where
+.IR n
+is an implementation-defined integer greater than or equal to 3. If
+.IR y
+is zero, the value stored in the object pointed to by
+.IR quo
+is unspecified.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return
+.IR x
+REM
+.IR y .
+.P
+On systems that do not support the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option, if
+.IR y
+is zero, it is implementation-defined whether a domain error occurs or
+zero is returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+or
+.IR y
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-Inf or
+.IR y
+is zero and the other argument is non-NaN, a domain error shall occur,
+and a NaN shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The
+.IR x
+argument is \(+-Inf, or the
+.IR y
+argument is \(+-0 and the other argument is non-NaN.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The
+.IR y
+argument is zero.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+These functions are intended for implementing argument reductions which
+can exploit a few low-order bits of the quotient. Note that
+.IR x
+may be so large in magnitude relative to
+.IR y
+that an exact representation of the quotient is not practical.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIremainder\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/rename.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/rename.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c189d77
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/rename.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,549 @@
+'\" et
+.TH RENAME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+rename, renameat
+\(em rename file relative to directory file descriptor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int rename(const char *\fIold\fP, const char *\fInew\fP);
+int renameat(int \fIoldfd\fP, const char *\fIold\fP, int \fInewfd\fP,
+    const char *\fInew\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIrename\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIrename\fR()
+function shall change the name of a file. The
+.IR old
+argument points to the pathname of the file to be renamed. The
+.IR new
+argument points to the new pathname of the file.
+If the
+.IR new
+argument does not resolve to an existing directory entry for a file of
+type directory and the
+.IR new
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters after all symbolic links have been processed,
+\fIrename\fR()
+shall fail.
+.P
+If either the
+.IR old
+or
+.IR new
+argument names a symbolic link,
+\fIrename\fR()
+shall operate on the symbolic link itself, and shall not resolve the
+last component of the argument. If the
+.IR old
+argument and the
+.IR new
+argument resolve to either the same existing directory entry or different
+directory entries for the same existing file,
+\fIrename\fR()
+shall return successfully and perform no other action.
+.P
+If the
+.IR old
+argument points to the pathname of a file that is not a directory, the
+.IR new
+argument shall not point to the pathname of a directory. If the link
+named by the
+.IR new
+argument exists, it shall be removed and
+.IR old
+renamed to
+.IR new .
+In this case, a link named
+.IR new
+shall remain visible to other processes throughout the renaming operation
+and refer either to the file referred to by
+.IR new
+or
+.IR old
+before the operation began. Write access permission is required for
+both the directory containing
+.IR old
+and the directory containing
+.IR new .
+.P
+If the
+.IR old
+argument points to the pathname of a directory, the
+.IR new
+argument shall not point to the pathname of a file that is not a
+directory. If the directory named by the
+.IR new
+argument exists, it shall be removed and
+.IR old
+renamed to
+.IR new .
+In this case, a link named
+.IR new
+shall exist throughout the renaming operation and shall refer either to
+the directory referred to by
+.IR new
+or
+.IR old
+before the operation began. If
+.IR new
+names an existing directory, it shall be required to be an empty
+directory.
+.P
+If either
+.IR pathname
+argument refers to a path whose final component is either dot or
+dot-dot,
+\fIrename\fR()
+shall fail.
+.P
+If the
+.IR old
+argument points to a pathname of a symbolic link, the symbolic link
+shall be renamed. If the
+.IR new
+argument points to a pathname of a symbolic link, the symbolic link
+shall be removed.
+.P
+The
+.IR old
+pathname shall not name an ancestor directory of the
+.IR new
+pathname. Write access permission is required for the directory containing
+.IR old
+and the directory containing
+.IR new .
+If the
+.IR old
+argument points to the pathname of a directory, write access permission
+may be required for the directory named by
+.IR old ,
+and, if it exists, the directory named by
+.IR new .
+.P
+If the link named by the
+.IR new
+argument exists and the file's link count becomes 0 when it is removed
+and no process has the file open, the space occupied by the file shall
+be freed and the file shall no longer be accessible. If one or more
+processes have the file open when the last link is removed, the link
+shall be removed before
+\fIrename\fR()
+returns, but the removal of the file contents shall be postponed until
+all references to the file are closed.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIrename\fR()
+shall mark for update the last data modification and last file status
+change timestamps of the parent directory of each file.
+.P
+If the
+\fIrename\fR()
+function fails for any reason other than
+.BR [EIO] ,
+any file named by
+.IR new
+shall be unaffected.
+.P
+The
+\fIrenameat\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIrename\fR()
+function except in the case where either
+.IR old
+or
+.IR new
+specifies a relative path. If
+.IR old
+is a relative path, the file to be renamed is located relative to the
+directory associated with the file descriptor
+.IR oldfd
+instead of the current working directory. If
+.IR new
+is a relative path, the same happens only relative to the directory
+associated with
+.IR newfd .
+If the file descriptor was opened without O_SEARCH, the function
+shall check whether directory searches are permitted using the current
+permissions of the directory underlying the file descriptor. If the
+file descriptor was opened with O_SEARCH, the function shall not perform
+the check.
+.P
+If
+\fIrenameat\fR()
+is passed the special value AT_FDCWD in the
+.IR oldfd
+or
+.IR newfd
+parameter, the current working directory shall be used in the
+determination of the file for the respective
+.IR path
+parameter.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIrename\fR()
+function shall return 0. Otherwise, it shall return \(mi1,
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error,
+and neither the file named by
+.IR old
+nor the file named by
+.IR new
+shall be changed or created.
+.P
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIrenameat\fR()
+function shall return 0. Otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIrename\fR()
+and
+\fIrenameat\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+A component of either path prefix denies search permission; or one of
+the directories containing
+.IR old
+or
+.IR new
+denies write permissions; or, write permission is required and is
+denied for a directory pointed to by the
+.IR old
+or
+.IR new
+arguments.
+.TP
+.BR EBUSY
+The directory named by
+.IR old
+or
+.IR new
+is currently in use by the system or another process, and the
+implementation considers this an error.
+.IP "[EEXIST]\ or\ [ENOTEMPTY]" 12
+.br
+The link named by
+.IR new
+is a directory that is not an empty directory.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR old
+pathname names an ancestor directory of the
+.IR new
+pathname, or either pathname argument contains a final component that
+is dot or dot-dot.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+A physical I/O error has occurred.
+.TP
+.BR EISDIR
+The
+.IR new
+argument points to a directory and the
+.IR old
+argument points to a file that is not a directory.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR EMLINK
+The file named by
+.IR old
+is a directory, and the link count of the parent directory of
+.IR new
+would exceed
+{LINK_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+The link named by
+.IR old
+does not name an existing file, a component of the path prefix of
+.IR new
+does not exist, or either
+.IR old
+or
+.IR new
+points to an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+The directory that would contain
+.IR new
+cannot be extended.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of either path prefix names an existing file that is
+neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory; or the
+.IR old
+argument names a directory and the
+.IR new
+argument names a non-directory file; or the
+.IR old
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file that
+is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory; or the
+.IR old
+argument names an existing non-directory file and the
+.IR new
+argument names a nonexistent file, contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character, and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters; or the
+.IR new
+argument names an existing non-directory file, contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character, and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM " or " EACCES
+.br
+The S_ISVTX flag is set on the directory containing the file referred
+to by
+.IR old
+and the process does not satisfy the criteria specified in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.2" ", " "Directory Protection"
+with respect to
+.IR old ;
+or
+.IR new
+refers to an existing file, the S_ISVTX flag is set on the directory
+containing this file, and the process does not satisfy the criteria
+specified in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.2" ", " "Directory Protection"
+with respect to this file.
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+The requested operation requires writing in a directory on a read-only
+file system.
+.TP
+.BR EXDEV
+The links named by
+.IR new
+and
+.IR old
+are on different file systems and the implementation does not support
+links between file systems.
+.P
+In addition, the
+\fIrenameat\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+.IR oldfd
+or
+.IR newfd
+was not opened with O_SEARCH and the permissions of the directory
+underlying
+.IR oldfd
+or
+.IR newfd
+respectively do not permit directory searches.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR old
+argument does not specify an absolute path and the
+.IR oldfd
+argument is neither AT_FDCWD nor a valid file descriptor open for
+reading or searching, or the
+.IR new
+argument does not specify an absolute path and the
+.IR newfd
+argument is neither AT_FDCWD nor a valid file descriptor open
+for reading or searching.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+The
+.IR old
+or
+.IR new
+argument is not an absolute path and
+.IR oldfd
+or
+.IR newfd ,
+respectively, is a file descriptor associated with a non-directory file.
+.P
+The
+\fIrename\fR()
+and
+\fIrenameat\fR()
+functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBUSY
+The file named by the
+.IR old
+or
+.IR new
+arguments is a named STREAM.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ETXTBSY
+The file named by
+.IR new
+exists and is the last directory entry to a pure procedure (shared text)
+file that is being executed.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Renaming a File"
+.P
+The following example shows how to rename a file named
+.BR /home/cnd/mod1
+to
+.BR /home/cnd/mod2 .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int status;
+\&...
+status = rename("/home/cnd/mod1", "/home/cnd/mod2");
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Some implementations mark for update the last file status change timestamp
+of renamed files and some do not. Applications which make use of the
+last file status change timestamp may behave differently with respect
+to renamed files unless they are designed to allow for either behavior.
+.SH RATIONALE
+This
+\fIrename\fR()
+function is equivalent for regular files to that defined by the ISO\ C standard.
+Its inclusion here expands that definition to include actions on
+directories and specifies behavior when the
+.IR new
+parameter names a file that already exists. That specification
+requires that the action of the function be atomic.
+.P
+One of the reasons for introducing this function was to have a means of
+renaming directories while permitting implementations to prohibit the
+use of
+\fIlink\fR()
+and
+\fIunlink\fR()
+with directories, thus constraining links to directories to those made by
+\fImkdir\fR().
+.P
+The specification that if
+.IR old
+and
+.IR new
+refer to the same file is intended to guarantee that:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+rename("x", "x");
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+does not remove the file.
+.P
+Renaming dot or dot-dot is prohibited in order to prevent cyclical file
+system paths.
+.P
+See also the descriptions of
+.BR [ENOTEMPTY] 
+and
+.BR [ENAMETOOLONG] 
+in
+\fIrmdir\fR()
+and
+.BR [EBUSY] 
+in
+\fIunlink\fR().
+For a discussion of
+.BR [EXDEV] ,
+see
+\fIlink\fR().
+.P
+The purpose of the
+\fIrenameat\fR()
+function is to rename files in directories other than the current
+working directory without exposure to race conditions. Any part of the
+path of a file could be changed in parallel to a call to
+\fIrename\fR(),
+resulting in unspecified behavior. By opening file descriptors for the
+source and target directories and using the
+\fIrenameat\fR()
+function it can be guaranteed that that renamed file is located correctly
+and the resulting file is in the desired directory.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrmdir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsymlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.2" ", " "Directory Protection",
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/rewind.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/rewind.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8ab54b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/rewind.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+'\" et
+.TH REWIND "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+rewind
+\(em reset the file position indicator in a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+void rewind(FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The call:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+rewind(stream)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+shall be equivalent to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(void) fseek(stream, 0L, SEEK_SET)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+except that
+\fIrewind\fR()
+shall also clear the error indicator.
+.P
+Since
+\fIrewind\fR()
+does not return a value, an application wishing to detect errors should
+clear
+.IR errno ,
+then call
+\fIrewind\fR(),
+and if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero, assume an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIrewind\fR()
+function shall not return a value.
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfseek\fR\^(\|)"
+with the exception of
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+which does not apply.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfseek\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/rewinddir.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/rewinddir.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ca2f2dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/rewinddir.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+'\" et
+.TH REWINDDIR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+rewinddir
+\(em reset the position of a directory stream to the beginning
+of a directory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <dirent.h>
+.P
+void rewinddir(DIR *\fIdirp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIrewinddir\fR()
+function shall reset the position of the directory stream to which
+.IR dirp
+refers to the beginning of the directory. It shall also cause the
+directory stream to refer to the current state of the corresponding
+directory, as a call to
+\fIopendir\fR()
+would have done. If
+.IR dirp
+does not refer to a directory stream, the effect is undefined.
+.P
+After a call to the
+\fIfork\fR()
+function, either the parent or child (but not both) may continue
+processing the directory stream using
+\fIreaddir\fR(),
+\fIrewinddir\fR(),
+or
+\fIseekdir\fR().
+If both the parent and child processes use these functions, the result
+is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIrewinddir\fR()
+function shall not return a value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIrewinddir\fR()
+function should be used in conjunction with
+\fIopendir\fR(),
+\fIreaddir\fR(),
+and
+\fIclosedir\fR()
+to examine the contents of the directory. This method is recommended
+for portability.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIclosedir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfdopendir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIreaddir\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<dirent.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/rint.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/rint.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4a97551
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/rint.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+'\" et
+.TH RINT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+rint,
+rintf,
+rintl
+\(em round-to-nearest integral value
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double rint(double \fIx\fP);
+float rintf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double rintl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall return the integral value (represented as a
+.BR double )
+nearest
+.IR x
+in the direction of the current rounding mode. The current rounding
+mode is implementation-defined.
+.P
+If the current rounding mode rounds toward negative infinity, then
+\fIrint\fR()
+shall be equivalent to
+.IR "\fIfloor\fR\^(\|)".
+If the current rounding mode rounds toward positive infinity, then
+\fIrint\fR()
+shall be equivalent to
+.IR "\fIceil\fR\^(\|)".
+If the current rounding mode rounds towards zero, then
+\fIrint\fR()
+shall be equivalent to
+.IR "\fItrunc\fR\^(\|)".
+If the current rounding mode rounds towards nearest, then
+\fIrint\fR()
+differs from
+.IR "\fIround\fR\^(\|)"
+in that halfway cases are rounded to even rather than away from zero.
+.P
+These functions differ from the
+\fInearbyint\fR(),
+\fInearbyintf\fR(),
+and
+\fInearbyintl\fR()
+functions only in that they may raise the inexact floating-point
+exception if the result differs in value from the argument.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the integer
+(represented as a double precision number) nearest
+.IR x
+in the direction of the current rounding mode.
+The result shall have the same sign as
+.IR x .
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0 or \(+-Inf,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The integral value returned by these functions need not be expressible
+as an
+.BR intmax_t .
+The return value should be tested before assigning it to an integer type
+to avoid the undefined results of an integer overflow.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIabs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIceil\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfloor\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fInearbyint\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/rmdir.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/rmdir.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..614afa0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/rmdir.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,267 @@
+'\" et
+.TH RMDIR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+rmdir
+\(em remove a directory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int rmdir(const char *\fIpath\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIrmdir\fR()
+function shall remove a directory whose name is given by
+.IR path .
+The directory shall be removed only if it is an empty directory.
+.P
+If the directory is the root directory or the current working directory
+of any process, it is unspecified whether the function succeeds, or
+whether it shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EBUSY] .
+.P
+If
+.IR path
+names a symbolic link, then
+\fIrmdir\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [ENOTDIR] .
+.P
+If the
+.IR path
+argument refers to a path whose final component is either dot or
+dot-dot,
+\fIrmdir\fR()
+shall fail.
+.P
+If the directory's link count becomes 0 and no process has the
+directory open, the space occupied by the directory shall be freed and
+the directory shall no longer be accessible. If one or more processes
+have the directory open when the last link is removed, the dot and
+dot-dot entries, if present, shall be removed before
+\fIrmdir\fR()
+returns and no new entries may be created in the directory, but the
+directory shall not be removed until all references to the directory
+are closed.
+.P
+If the directory is not an empty directory,
+\fIrmdir\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EEXIST] 
+or
+.BR [ENOTEMPTY] .
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIrmdir\fR()
+shall mark for update the last data modification and last file status
+change timestamps of the parent directory.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the function
+\fIrmdir\fR()
+shall return 0. Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned, and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error. If \(mi1 is returned, the named
+directory shall not be changed.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIrmdir\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied on a component of the path prefix, or write
+permission is denied on the parent directory of the directory to be
+removed.
+.TP
+.BR EBUSY
+The directory to be removed is currently in use by the system or
+some process and the implementation considers this to be an error.
+.IP "[EEXIST]\ or\ [ENOTEMPTY]" 12
+.br
+The
+.IR path
+argument names a directory that is not an empty directory, or there are
+hard links to the directory other than dot or a single entry in
+dot-dot.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR path
+argument contains a last component that is dot.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+A physical I/O error has occurred.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file, or the
+.IR path
+argument names a nonexistent directory or points to an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of
+.IR path
+names an existing file that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link
+to a directory.
+.IP "[EPERM]\ or\ [EACCES]" 12
+.br
+The S_ISVTX flag is set on the directory containing the file referred
+to by the
+.IR path
+argument and the process does not satisfy the criteria specified in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.2" ", " "Directory Protection".
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+The directory entry to be removed resides on a read-only file system.
+.P
+The
+\fIrmdir\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Removing a Directory"
+.P
+The following example shows how to remove a directory named
+.BR /home/cnd/mod1 .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int status;
+\&...
+status = rmdir("/home/cnd/mod1");
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIrmdir\fR()
+and
+\fIrename\fR()
+functions originated in 4.2 BSD, and they used
+.BR [ENOTEMPTY] 
+for the condition when the directory to be removed does not exist or
+.IR new
+already exists. When the 1984 /usr/group standard was published, it contained
+.BR [EEXIST] 
+instead. When these functions were adopted into System V, the
+1984 /usr/group standard was used as a reference. Therefore, several existing applications
+and implementations support/use both forms, and no agreement could be
+reached on either value. All implementations are required to supply
+both
+.BR [EEXIST] 
+and
+.BR [ENOTEMPTY] 
+in
+.IR <errno.h> 
+with distinct values, so that applications can use both values in
+C-language
+.BR case
+statements.
+.P
+The meaning of deleting
+.IR pathname \c
+.BR /dot
+is unclear, because the name of the file (directory) in the parent
+directory to be removed is not clear, particularly in the presence of
+multiple links to a directory.
+.P
+The POSIX.1\(hy1990 standard was silent with regard to the behavior of
+\fIrmdir\fR()
+when there are multiple hard links to the directory being removed. The
+requirement to set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EEXIST] 
+or
+.BR [ENOTEMPTY] 
+clarifies the behavior in this case.
+.P
+If the current working directory of the process is being removed, that
+should be an allowed error.
+.P
+Virtually all existing implementations detect
+.BR [ENOTEMPTY] 
+or the case of dot-dot. The text in
+.IR "Section 2.3" ", " "Error Numbers"
+about returning any one of the possible errors permits that behavior to
+continue. The
+.BR [ELOOP] 
+error may be returned if more than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links are encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.3" ", " "Error Numbers",
+.IR "\fImkdir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIremove\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrename\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.2" ", " "Directory Protection",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/round.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/round.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..70cbb2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/round.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ROUND "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+round,
+roundf,
+roundl
+\(em round to the nearest integer value in a floating-point format
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double round(double \fIx\fP);
+float roundf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double roundl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall round their argument to the nearest integer value
+in floating-point format, rounding halfway cases away from zero,
+regardless of the current rounding direction.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the rounded
+integer value.
+The result shall have the same sign as
+.IR x .
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0 or \(+-Inf,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The integral value returned by these functions need not be expressible
+as an
+.BR intmax_t .
+The return value should be tested before assigning it to an integer
+type to avoid the undefined results of an integer overflow.
+.P
+These functions may raise the inexact floating-point exception if the
+result differs in value from the argument.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/scalbln.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/scalbln.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bb6684c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/scalbln.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,172 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SCALBLN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+scalbln,
+scalblnf,
+scalblnl,
+scalbn,
+scalbnf,
+scalbnl
+\(em compute exponent using FLT_RADIX
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double scalbln(double \fIx\fP, long \fIn\fP);
+float scalblnf(float \fIx\fP, long \fIn\fP);
+long double scalblnl(long double \fIx\fP, long \fIn\fP);
+double scalbn(double \fIx\fP, int \fIn\fP);
+float scalbnf(float \fIx\fP, int \fIn\fP);
+long double scalbnl(long double \fIx\fP, int \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute \fIx\fR\ *\ FLT_RADIX\fI\s-3\un\d\s+3\fR
+efficiently, not normally by computing FLT_RADIX\fI\s-3\un\d\s+3\fR
+explicitly.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return
+\fIx\fR\ *\ FLT_RADIX\fI\s-3\un\d\s+3\fR.
+.P
+If the result would cause overflow, a range error shall occur and these
+functions shall return \(+-HUGE_VAL, \(+-HUGE_VALF, and \(+-HUGE_VALL
+(according to the sign of
+.IR x )
+as appropriate for the return type of the function.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow,
+and is not representable,
+a range error may occur, and
+\fIscalbln\fR(),
+\fIscalblnf\fR(),
+\fIscalblnl\fR(),
+\fIscalbn\fR(),
+\fIscalbnf\fR(),
+and
+\fIscalbnl\fR()
+shall return
+0.0, or
+(if IEC 60559 Floating-Point is not supported) an implementation-defined
+value no greater in magnitude than DBL_MIN, FLT_MIN, LDBL_MIN, DBL_MIN,
+FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN, respectively.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0 or \(+-Inf,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR n
+is 0,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow, and is representable, a
+range error may occur and the correct value shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result overflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the overflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.br
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result underflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+These functions are named so as to avoid conflicting with the
+historical definition of the
+.IR scalb (\|)
+function from the Single UNIX Specification. The difference is that the
+.IR scalb (\|)
+function has a second argument of
+.BR double
+instead of
+.BR int .
+The
+.IR scalb (\|)
+function is not part of the ISO\ C standard. The three functions whose second
+type is
+.BR long
+are provided because the factor required to scale from the smallest
+positive floating-point value to the largest finite one, on many
+implementations, is too large to represent in the minimum-width
+.BR int
+format.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/scandir.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/scandir.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9b74e5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/scandir.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SCANDIR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+scandir
+\(em scan a directory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <dirent.h>
+.P
+int scandir(const char *\fIdir\fP, struct dirent ***\fInamelist\fP,
+    int (*\fIsel\fP)(const struct dirent *),
+    int (*\fIcompar\fP)(const struct dirent **, const struct dirent **));
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIalphasort\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/scanf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/scanf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..489ae6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/scanf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SCANF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+scanf
+\(em convert formatted input
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int scanf(const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfscanf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sched_get_priority_max.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sched_get_priority_max.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a13261a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sched_get_priority_max.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SCHED_GET_PRIORITY_MAX "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sched_get_priority_max,
+sched_get_priority_min
+\(em get priority limits
+(\fBREALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sched.h>
+.P
+int sched_get_priority_max(int \fIpolicy\fP);
+int sched_get_priority_min(int \fIpolicy\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsched_get_priority_max\fR()
+and
+\fIsched_get_priority_min\fR()
+functions shall return the appropriate maximum or minimum,
+respectively, for the scheduling policy specified by
+.IR policy .
+.P
+The value of
+.IR policy
+shall be one of the scheduling policy values defined in
+.IR <sched.h> .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIsched_get_priority_max\fR()
+and
+\fIsched_get_priority_min\fR()
+functions shall return the appropriate maximum or minimum values,
+respectively. If unsuccessful, they shall return a value of \(mi1 and
+set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsched_get_priority_max\fR()
+and
+\fIsched_get_priority_min\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR policy
+parameter does not represent a defined scheduling policy.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIsched_getparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_setparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_getscheduler\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_rr_get_interval\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_setscheduler\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sched.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sched_getparam.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sched_getparam.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..50c354f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sched_getparam.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SCHED_GETPARAM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sched_getparam
+\(em get scheduling parameters
+(\fBREALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sched.h>
+.P
+int sched_getparam(pid_t \fIpid\fP, struct sched_param *\fIparam\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsched_getparam\fR()
+function shall return the scheduling parameters of a process specified by
+.IR pid
+in the
+.BR sched_param
+structure pointed to by
+.IR param .
+.P
+If a process specified by
+.IR pid
+exists, and if the calling process has permission, the scheduling
+parameters for the process whose process ID is equal to
+.IR pid
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR pid
+is zero, the scheduling parameters for the calling process shall be
+returned. The behavior of the
+\fIsched_getparam\fR()
+function is unspecified if the value of
+.IR pid
+is negative.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIsched_getparam\fR()
+function shall return zero. If the call to
+\fIsched_getparam\fR()
+is unsuccessful, the function shall return a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsched_getparam\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The requesting process does not have permission to obtain the
+scheduling parameters of the specified process.
+.TP
+.BR ESRCH
+No process can be found corresponding to that specified by
+.IR pid .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsched_getscheduler\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_setparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_setscheduler\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sched.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sched_getscheduler.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sched_getscheduler.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ff248f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sched_getscheduler.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SCHED_GETSCHEDULER "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sched_getscheduler
+\(em get scheduling policy
+(\fBREALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sched.h>
+.P
+int sched_getscheduler(pid_t \fIpid\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsched_getscheduler\fR()
+function shall return the scheduling policy of the process specified by
+.IR pid .
+If the value of
+.IR pid
+is negative, the behavior of the
+\fIsched_getscheduler\fR()
+function is unspecified.
+.P
+The values that can be returned by
+\fIsched_getscheduler\fR()
+are defined in the
+.IR <sched.h> 
+header.
+.P
+If a process specified by
+.IR pid
+exists, and if the calling process has permission, the scheduling
+policy shall be returned for the process whose process ID is equal to
+.IR pid .
+.P
+If
+.IR pid
+is zero, the scheduling policy shall be returned for the calling process.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIsched_getscheduler\fR()
+function shall return the scheduling policy of the specified process.
+If unsuccessful, the function shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsched_getscheduler\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The requesting process does not have permission to determine the
+scheduling policy of the specified process.
+.TP
+.BR ESRCH
+No process can be found corresponding to that specified by
+.IR pid .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsched_getparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_setparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_setscheduler\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sched.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sched_rr_get_interval.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sched_rr_get_interval.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..494a867
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sched_rr_get_interval.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SCHED_RR_GET_INTERVAL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sched_rr_get_interval
+\(em get execution time limits
+(\fBREALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sched.h>
+.P
+int sched_rr_get_interval(pid_t \fIpid\fP, struct timespec *\fIinterval\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsched_rr_get_interval\fR()
+function shall update the
+.BR timespec
+structure referenced by the
+.IR interval
+argument to contain the current execution time limit (that is, time
+quantum) for the process specified by
+.IR pid .
+If
+.IR pid
+is zero, the current execution time limit for the calling process
+shall be returned.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIsched_rr_get_interval\fR()
+function shall return zero. Otherwise, it shall return a value of
+\(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsched_rr_get_interval\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ESRCH
+No process can be found corresponding to that specified by
+.IR pid .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIsched_getparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_get_priority_max\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_getscheduler\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_setparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_setscheduler\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sched.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sched_setparam.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sched_setparam.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f3056d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sched_setparam.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,157 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SCHED_SETPARAM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sched_setparam
+\(em set scheduling parameters
+(\fBREALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sched.h>
+.P
+int sched_setparam(pid_t \fIpid\fP, const struct sched_param *\fIparam\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsched_setparam\fR()
+function shall set the scheduling parameters of the process specified by
+.IR pid
+to the values specified by the
+.BR sched_param
+structure pointed to by
+.IR param .
+The value of the
+.IR sched_priority
+member in the
+.BR sched_param
+structure shall be any integer within the inclusive priority range for
+the current scheduling policy of the process specified by
+.IR pid .
+Higher numerical values for the priority represent higher priorities.
+If the value of
+.IR pid
+is negative, the behavior of the
+\fIsched_setparam\fR()
+function is unspecified.
+.P
+If a process specified by
+.IR pid
+exists, and if the calling process has permission, the scheduling
+parameters shall be set for the process whose process ID is equal to
+.IR pid .
+.P
+If
+.IR pid
+is zero, the scheduling parameters shall be set for the calling process.
+.P
+The conditions under which one process has permission to change the
+scheduling parameters of another process are implementation-defined.
+.P
+Implementations may require the requesting process to have appropriate
+privileges to set its own scheduling parameters or those of another
+process.
+.P
+See
+.IR "Scheduling Policies"
+for a description on how this function affects the scheduling of
+the threads within the target process.
+.P
+If the current scheduling policy for the target process is not
+SCHED_FIFO, SCHED_RR,
+or SCHED_SPORADIC,
+the result is implementation-defined; this case includes the
+SCHED_OTHER policy.
+.P
+The specified
+.IR sched_ss_repl_period
+shall be greater than or equal to the specified
+.IR sched_ss_init_budget
+for the function to succeed; if it is not, then the function shall
+fail.
+.P
+The value of
+.IR sched_ss_max_repl
+shall be within the inclusive range [1,{SS_REPL_MAX}] for the function
+to succeed; if not, the function shall fail. It is unspecified whether the
+.IR sched_ss_repl_period
+and
+.IR sched_ss_init_budget
+values are stored as provided by this function or are rounded to
+align with the resolution of the clock being used.
+.P
+This function is not atomic with respect to other threads in the
+process. Threads may continue to execute while this function call is in
+the process of changing the scheduling policy for the underlying
+kernel-scheduled entities used by the process contention scope
+threads.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIsched_setparam\fR()
+function shall return zero.
+.P
+If the call to
+\fIsched_setparam\fR()
+is unsuccessful, the priority shall remain unchanged, and the function
+shall return a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsched_setparam\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+One or more of the requested scheduling parameters is outside the range
+defined for the scheduling policy of the specified
+.IR pid .
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The requesting process does not have permission to set the scheduling
+parameters for the specified process, or does not have appropriate
+privileges to invoke
+\fIsched_setparam\fR().
+.TP
+.BR ESRCH
+No process can be found corresponding to that specified by
+.IR pid .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Scheduling Policies",
+.IR "\fIsched_getparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_getscheduler\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_setscheduler\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sched.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sched_setscheduler.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sched_setscheduler.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2d6bf0a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sched_setscheduler.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,182 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SCHED_SETSCHEDULER "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sched_setscheduler
+\(em set scheduling policy and parameters
+(\fBREALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sched.h>
+.P
+int sched_setscheduler(pid_t \fIpid\fP, int \fIpolicy\fP,
+    const struct sched_param *\fIparam\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsched_setscheduler\fR()
+function shall set the scheduling policy and scheduling parameters
+of the process specified by
+.IR pid
+to
+.IR policy
+and the parameters specified in the
+.BR sched_param
+structure pointed to by
+.IR param ,
+respectively. The value of the
+.IR sched_priority
+member in the
+.BR sched_param
+structure shall be any integer within the inclusive priority range
+for the scheduling policy specified by
+.IR policy .
+If the value of
+.IR pid
+is negative, the behavior of the
+\fIsched_setscheduler\fR()
+function is unspecified.
+.P
+The possible values for the
+.IR policy
+parameter are defined in the
+.IR <sched.h> 
+header.
+.P
+If a process specified by
+.IR pid
+exists, and if the calling process has permission, the scheduling
+policy and scheduling parameters shall be set for the process whose
+process ID is equal to
+.IR pid .
+.P
+If
+.IR pid
+is zero, the scheduling policy and scheduling parameters shall be
+set for the calling process.
+.P
+The conditions under which one process has appropriate privileges to
+change the scheduling parameters of another process are
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+Implementations may require that the requesting process have permission
+to set its own scheduling parameters or those of another process.
+Additionally, implementation-defined restrictions may apply as to the
+appropriate privileges required to set the scheduling
+policy of the process, or the scheduling policy of another process,
+to a particular value.
+.P
+The
+\fIsched_setscheduler\fR()
+function shall be considered successful if it succeeds in setting the
+scheduling policy and scheduling parameters of the process specified by
+.IR pid
+to the values specified by
+.IR policy
+and the structure pointed to by
+.IR param ,
+respectively.
+.P
+See
+.IR "Scheduling Policies"
+for a description on how this function affects the scheduling of the
+threads within the target process.
+.P
+If the current scheduling policy for the target process is not
+SCHED_FIFO, SCHED_RR,
+or SCHED_SPORADIC,
+the result is implementation-defined; this case includes the
+SCHED_OTHER policy.
+.P
+The specified
+.IR sched_ss_repl_period
+shall be greater than or equal to the specified
+.IR sched_ss_init_budget
+for the function to succeed; if it is not, then the function shall
+fail.
+.P
+The value of
+.IR sched_ss_max_repl
+shall be within the inclusive range [1,{SS_REPL_MAX}] for the function
+to succeed; if not, the function shall fail. It is unspecified whether the
+.IR sched_ss_repl_period
+and
+.IR sched_ss_init_budget
+values are stored as provided by this function or are rounded to
+align with the resolution of the clock being used.
+.P
+This function is not atomic with respect to other threads in the
+process. Threads may continue to execute while this function call is in
+the process of changing the scheduling policy and associated scheduling
+parameters for the underlying kernel-scheduled entities used by the
+process contention scope threads.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the function shall return the former
+scheduling policy of the specified process. If the
+\fIsched_setscheduler\fR()
+function fails to complete successfully, the policy and scheduling
+parameters shall remain unchanged, and the function shall return a
+value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsched_setscheduler\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR policy
+parameter is invalid, or one or more of the parameters contained in
+.IR param
+is outside the valid range for the specified scheduling policy.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The requesting process does not have permission to set either or both
+of the scheduling parameters or the scheduling policy of the specified
+process.
+.TP
+.BR ESRCH
+No process can be found corresponding to that specified by
+.IR pid .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Scheduling Policies",
+.IR "\fIsched_getparam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_getscheduler\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsched_setparam\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sched.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sched_yield.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sched_yield.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..affc53c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sched_yield.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SCHED_YIELD "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sched_yield
+\(em yield the processor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sched.h>
+.P
+int sched_yield(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsched_yield\fR()
+function shall force the running thread to relinquish the processor
+until it again becomes the head of its thread list. It takes no arguments.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIsched_yield\fR()
+function shall return 0 if it completes successfully; otherwise, it
+shall return a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The conceptual model for scheduling semantics in POSIX.1\(hy2008 defines
+a set of thread lists. This set of thread lists is always present
+regardless of the scheduling options supported by the system. On a
+system where the Process Scheduling option is not supported, portable
+applications should not make any assumptions regarding whether threads
+from other processes will be on the same thread list.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sched.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/seed48.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/seed48.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..876b529
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/seed48.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SEED48 "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+seed48
+\(em seed a uniformly distributed pseudo-random non-negative
+long integer generator
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+unsigned short *seed48(unsigned short \fIseed16v\fP[3]);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIdrand48\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/seekdir.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/seekdir.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5428a14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/seekdir.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SEEKDIR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+seekdir
+\(em set the position of a directory stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <dirent.h>
+.P
+void seekdir(DIR *\fIdirp\fP, long \fIloc\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIseekdir\fR()
+function shall set the position of the next
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+operation on the directory stream specified by
+.IR dirp
+to the position specified by
+.IR loc .
+The value of
+.IR loc
+should have been returned from an earlier call to
+\fItelldir\fR()
+using the same directory stream. The new position reverts to the one
+associated with the directory stream when
+\fItelldir\fR()
+was performed.
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR loc
+was not obtained from an earlier call to
+\fItelldir\fR(),
+or if a call to
+\fIrewinddir\fR()
+occurred between the call to
+\fItelldir\fR()
+and the call to
+\fIseekdir\fR(),
+the results of subsequent calls to
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+are unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIseekdir\fR()
+function shall not return a value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The original standard developers perceived that there were restrictions
+on the use of the
+\fIseekdir\fR()
+and
+\fItelldir\fR()
+functions related to implementation details, and for that reason these
+functions need not be supported on all POSIX-conforming systems. They
+are required on implementations supporting the XSI option.
+.P
+One of the perceived problems of implementation is that returning to a
+given point in a directory is quite difficult to describe formally, in
+spite of its intuitive appeal, when systems that use B-trees, hashing
+functions, or other similar mechanisms to order their directories are
+considered. The definition of
+\fIseekdir\fR()
+and
+\fItelldir\fR()
+does not specify whether, when using these interfaces, a given
+directory entry will be seen at all, or more than once.
+.P
+On systems not supporting these functions, their capability can
+sometimes be accomplished by saving a filename found by
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+and later using
+\fIrewinddir\fR()
+and a loop on
+\fIreaddir\fR()
+to relocate the position from which the filename was saved.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfdopendir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIreaddir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItelldir\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<dirent.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/select.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/select.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f63c3ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/select.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SELECT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+select
+\(em synchronous I/O multiplexing
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/select.h>
+.P
+int select(int \fInfds\fP, fd_set *restrict \fIreadfds\fP,
+    fd_set *restrict \fIwritefds\fP, fd_set *restrict \fIerrorfds\fP,
+    struct timeval *restrict \fItimeout\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpselect\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_close.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_close.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e7c0e31
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_close.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SEM_CLOSE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sem_close
+\(em close a named semaphore
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <semaphore.h>
+.P
+int sem_close(sem_t *\fIsem\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsem_close\fR()
+function shall indicate that the calling process is finished using
+the named semaphore indicated by
+.IR sem .
+The effects of calling
+\fIsem_close\fR()
+for an unnamed semaphore (one created by
+\fIsem_init\fR())
+are undefined. The
+\fIsem_close\fR()
+function shall deallocate (that is, make available for reuse by a
+subsequent
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+by this process) any system resources allocated by the system for use
+by this process for this semaphore. The effect of subsequent use of the
+semaphore indicated by
+.IR sem
+by this process is undefined. If the semaphore has not been removed
+with a successful call to
+\fIsem_unlink\fR(),
+then
+\fIsem_close\fR()
+has no effect on the state of the semaphore. If the
+\fIsem_unlink\fR()
+function has been successfully invoked for
+.IR name
+after the most recent call to
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+with O_CREAT for this semaphore,
+then when all processes that have opened the semaphore close it, the
+semaphore is no longer accessible.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, a value of zero shall be returned.
+Otherwise, a value of \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsem_close\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR sem
+argument is not a valid semaphore descriptor.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsemctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemop\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_init\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_unlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<semaphore.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_destroy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_destroy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0f54616
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_destroy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SEM_DESTROY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sem_destroy
+\(em destroy an unnamed semaphore
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <semaphore.h>
+.P
+int sem_destroy(sem_t *\fIsem\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsem_destroy\fR()
+function shall destroy the unnamed semaphore indicated by
+.IR sem .
+Only a semaphore that was created using
+\fIsem_init\fR()
+may be destroyed using
+\fIsem_destroy\fR();
+the effect of calling
+\fIsem_destroy\fR()
+with a named semaphore is undefined. The effect of subsequent use of
+the semaphore
+.IR sem
+is undefined until
+.IR sem
+is reinitialized by another call to
+\fIsem_init\fR().
+.P
+It is safe to destroy an initialized semaphore upon which no threads
+are currently blocked. The effect of destroying a semaphore upon which
+other threads are currently blocked is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, a value of zero shall be returned. Otherwise,
+a value of \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsem_destroy\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR sem
+argument is not a valid semaphore.
+.TP
+.BR EBUSY
+There are currently processes blocked on the semaphore.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsemctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemop\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_init\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_open\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<semaphore.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_getvalue.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_getvalue.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bd5f1b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_getvalue.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SEM_GETVALUE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sem_getvalue
+\(em get the value of a semaphore
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <semaphore.h>
+.P
+int sem_getvalue(sem_t *restrict \fIsem\fP, int *restrict \fIsval\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsem_getvalue\fR()
+function shall update the location referenced by the
+.IR sval
+argument to have the value of the semaphore referenced by
+.IR sem
+without affecting the state of the semaphore. The updated value
+represents an actual semaphore value that occurred at some unspecified
+time during the call, but it need not be the actual value of the
+semaphore when it is returned to the calling process.
+.P
+If
+.IR sem
+is locked, then the object to which
+.IR sval
+points shall either be set to zero or to a negative number whose
+absolute value represents the number of processes waiting for the
+semaphore at some unspecified time during the call.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIsem_getvalue\fR()
+function shall return a value of zero. Otherwise, it shall return
+a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsem_getvalue\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR sem
+argument does not refer to a valid semaphore.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsemctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemop\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_post\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_timedwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_trywait\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<semaphore.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_init.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_init.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cc2445c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_init.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SEM_INIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sem_init
+\(em initialize an unnamed semaphore
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <semaphore.h>
+.P
+int sem_init(sem_t *\fIsem\fP, int \fIpshared\fP, unsigned \fIvalue\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsem_init\fR()
+function shall initialize the unnamed semaphore referred to by
+.IR sem .
+The value of the initialized semaphore shall be
+.IR value .
+Following a successful call to
+\fIsem_init\fR(),
+the semaphore may be used in subsequent calls to
+\fIsem_wait\fR(),
+\fIsem_timedwait\fR(),
+\fIsem_trywait\fR(),
+\fIsem_post\fR(),
+and
+\fIsem_destroy\fR().
+This semaphore shall remain usable until the semaphore is destroyed.
+.P
+If the
+.IR pshared
+argument has a non-zero value, then the semaphore is shared between
+processes; in this case, any process that can access the semaphore
+.IR sem
+can use
+.IR sem
+for performing
+\fIsem_wait\fR(),
+\fIsem_timedwait\fR(),
+\fIsem_trywait\fR(),
+\fIsem_post\fR(),
+and
+\fIsem_destroy\fR()
+operations.
+.P
+Only
+.IR sem
+itself may be used for performing synchronization. The result of
+referring to copies of
+.IR sem
+in calls to
+\fIsem_wait\fR(),
+\fIsem_timedwait\fR(),
+\fIsem_trywait\fR(),
+\fIsem_post\fR(),
+and
+\fIsem_destroy\fR()
+is undefined.
+.P
+If the
+.IR pshared
+argument is zero, then the semaphore is shared between threads of the
+process; any thread in this process can use
+.IR sem
+for performing
+\fIsem_wait\fR(),
+\fIsem_timedwait\fR(),
+\fIsem_trywait\fR(),
+\fIsem_post\fR(),
+and
+\fIsem_destroy\fR()
+operations. The use of the semaphore by threads other than those
+created in the same process is undefined.
+.P
+Attempting to initialize an already initialized semaphore results in
+undefined behavior.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIsem_init\fR()
+function shall initialize the semaphore in
+.IR sem
+and return 0. Otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsem_init\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR value
+argument exceeds
+{SEM_VALUE_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+A resource required to initialize the semaphore has been exhausted, or
+the limit on semaphores (\c
+{SEM_NSEMS_MAX})
+has been reached.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The process lacks appropriate privileges to initialize the
+semaphore.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsem_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_post\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_timedwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_trywait\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<semaphore.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_open.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_open.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ece10ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_open.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,296 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SEM_OPEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sem_open
+\(em initialize and open a named semaphore
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <semaphore.h>
+.P
+sem_t *sem_open(const char *\fIname\fP, int \fIoflag\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+function shall establish a connection between a named semaphore
+and a process. Following a call to
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+with semaphore name
+.IR name ,
+the process may reference the semaphore associated with
+.IR name
+using the address returned from the call. This semaphore may be used
+in subsequent calls to
+\fIsem_wait\fR(),
+\fIsem_timedwait\fR(),
+\fIsem_trywait\fR(),
+\fIsem_post\fR(),
+and
+\fIsem_close\fR().
+The semaphore remains usable by this process until the semaphore is
+closed by a successful call to
+\fIsem_close\fR(),
+\fI_exit\fR(),
+or one of the
+.IR exec
+functions.
+.P
+The
+.IR oflag
+argument controls whether the semaphore is created or merely accessed
+by the call to
+\fIsem_open\fR().
+The following flag bits may be set in
+.IR oflag :
+.IP O_CREAT 10
+This flag is used to create a semaphore if it does not already exist.
+If O_CREAT is set and the semaphore already exists, then O_CREAT has no
+effect, except as noted under O_EXCL. Otherwise,
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+creates a named semaphore. The O_CREAT flag requires a third and a
+fourth argument:
+.IR mode ,
+which is of type
+.BR mode_t ,
+and
+.IR value ,
+which is of type
+.BR unsigned .
+The semaphore is created with an initial value of
+.IR value .
+Valid initial values for semaphores are less than or equal to
+{SEM_VALUE_MAX}.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+The user ID of the semaphore shall be set to the effective user ID of
+the process. The group ID of the semaphore shall be set to the effective
+group ID of the process; however, if the
+.IR name
+argument is visible in the file system, the group ID may be set to
+the group ID of the containing directory. The permission bits of the
+semaphore are set to the value of the
+.IR mode
+argument except those set in the file mode creation mask of the
+process. When bits in
+.IR mode
+other than the file permission bits are specified, the effect is
+unspecified.
+.P
+After the semaphore named
+.IR name
+has been created by
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+with the O_CREAT flag, other processes can connect to the semaphore by
+calling
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+with the same value of
+.IR name .
+.RE
+.IP O_EXCL 10
+If O_EXCL and O_CREAT are set,
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+fails if the semaphore
+.IR name
+exists. The check for the existence of the semaphore and the creation
+of the semaphore if it does not exist are atomic with respect to other
+processes executing
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+with O_EXCL and O_CREAT set. If O_EXCL is set and O_CREAT is not set,
+the effect is undefined.
+.RS 10 
+.P
+If flags other than O_CREAT and O_EXCL are specified in the
+.IR oflag
+parameter, the effect is unspecified.
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR name
+argument points to a string naming a semaphore object. It is
+unspecified whether the name appears in the file system and is visible
+to functions that take pathnames as arguments. The
+.IR name
+argument conforms to the construction rules for a pathname, except
+that the interpretation of
+<slash>
+characters other than the leading
+<slash>
+character in
+.IR name
+is implementation-defined, and that the length limits for the
+.IR name
+argument are implementation-defined and need not be the same as
+the pathname limits
+{PATH_MAX}
+and
+{NAME_MAX}.
+If
+.IR name
+begins with the
+<slash>
+character, then processes calling
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+with the same value of
+.IR name
+shall refer to the same semaphore object, as long as that name has not
+been removed. If
+.IR name
+does not begin with the
+<slash>
+character, the effect is implementation-defined.
+.P
+If a process makes multiple successful calls to
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+with the same value for
+.IR name ,
+the same semaphore address shall be returned for each such successful
+call, provided that there have been no calls to
+\fIsem_unlink\fR()
+for this semaphore, and at least one previous successful
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+call for this semaphore has not been matched with a
+\fIsem_close\fR()
+call.
+.P
+References to copies of the semaphore produce undefined results.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+function shall return the address of the semaphore. Otherwise, it
+shall return a value of SEM_FAILED and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error. The symbol SEM_FAILED is defined in the
+.IR <semaphore.h> 
+header. No successful return from
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+shall return the value SEM_FAILED.
+.SH ERRORS
+If any of the following conditions occur, the
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+function shall return SEM_FAILED and set
+.IR errno
+to the corresponding value:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+The named semaphore exists and the permissions specified by
+.IR oflag
+are denied, or the named semaphore does not exist and permission to
+create the named semaphore is denied.
+.TP
+.BR EEXIST
+O_CREAT and O_EXCL are set and the named semaphore already exists.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+operation was interrupted by a signal.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+operation is not supported for the given name, or O_CREAT was specified
+in
+.IR oflag
+and
+.IR value
+was greater than
+{SEM_VALUE_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+Too many semaphore descriptors or file descriptors are currently in use
+by this process.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+Too many semaphores are currently open in the system.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+O_CREAT is not set and the named semaphore does not exist.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+There is insufficient memory for the creation of the new named
+semaphore.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+There is insufficient space on a storage device for the creation of the
+new named semaphore.
+.P
+If any of the following conditions occur, the
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+function may return SEM_FAILED and set
+.IR errno
+to the corresponding value:
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of the
+.IR name
+argument exceeds
+{_POSIX_PATH_MAX}
+on systems that do not support the XSI option
+or exceeds
+{_XOPEN_PATH_MAX}
+on XSI systems,
+or has a pathname component that is longer than
+{_POSIX_NAME_MAX}
+on systems that do not support the XSI option
+or longer than
+{_XOPEN_NAME_MAX}
+on XSI systems.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Early drafts required an error return value of \(mi1 with the type
+.BR "sem_t *"
+for the
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+function, which is not guaranteed to be portable across
+implementations. The revised text provides the symbolic error code
+SEM_FAILED to eliminate the type conflict.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+A future version might require the
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+and
+\fIsem_unlink\fR()
+functions to have semantics similar to normal file system operations.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIsemctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemop\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_close\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_post\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_timedwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_trywait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_unlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<semaphore.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_post.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_post.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f731e7d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_post.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SEM_POST "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sem_post
+\(em unlock a semaphore
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <semaphore.h>
+.P
+int sem_post(sem_t *\fIsem\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsem_post\fR()
+function shall unlock the semaphore referenced by
+.IR sem
+by performing a semaphore unlock operation on that semaphore.
+.P
+If the semaphore value resulting from this operation is positive, then
+no threads were blocked waiting for the semaphore to become unlocked;
+the semaphore value is simply incremented.
+.P
+If the value of the semaphore resulting from this operation is zero,
+then one of the threads blocked waiting for the semaphore shall be
+allowed to return successfully from its call to
+\fIsem_wait\fR().
+If the Process Scheduling option is supported, the thread to be
+unblocked shall be chosen in a manner appropriate to the scheduling
+policies and parameters in effect for the blocked threads. In the case
+of the schedulers SCHED_FIFO and SCHED_RR,
+the highest priority waiting thread shall be unblocked, and if there is
+more than one highest priority thread blocked waiting for the
+semaphore, then the highest priority thread that has been waiting the
+longest shall be unblocked. If the Process Scheduling option is not
+defined, the choice of a thread to unblock is unspecified.
+.P
+If the Process Sporadic Server option is supported, and the scheduling
+policy is SCHED_SPORADIC, the semantics are as per SCHED_FIFO above.
+.P
+The
+\fIsem_post\fR()
+function shall be async-signal-safe and may be invoked from a
+signal-catching function.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fIsem_post\fR()
+function shall return zero; otherwise, the function shall return \(mi1
+and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsem_post\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR sem
+argument does not refer to a valid semaphore.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+See
+.IR "\fIsem_timedwait\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsemctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemop\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_timedwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_trywait\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.11" ", " "Memory Synchronization",
+.IR "\fB<semaphore.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_timedwait.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_timedwait.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee894bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_timedwait.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,231 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SEM_TIMEDWAIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sem_timedwait
+\(em lock a semaphore
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <semaphore.h>
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+int sem_timedwait(sem_t *restrict \fIsem\fP,
+    const struct timespec *restrict \fIabstime\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsem_timedwait\fR()
+function shall lock the semaphore referenced by
+.IR sem
+as in the
+\fIsem_wait\fR()
+function. However, if the semaphore cannot be locked without waiting
+for another process or thread to unlock the semaphore by performing a
+\fIsem_post\fR()
+function, this wait shall be terminated when the specified timeout
+expires.
+.P
+The timeout shall expire when the absolute time specified by
+.IR abstime
+passes, as measured by the clock on which timeouts are based (that is,
+when the value of that clock equals or exceeds
+.IR abstime ),
+or if the absolute time specified by
+.IR abstime
+has already been passed at the time of the call.
+.P
+The timeout shall be based on the CLOCK_REALTIME clock.
+The resolution of the timeout shall be the resolution of the
+clock on which it is based. The
+.BR timespec
+data type is defined as a structure in the
+.IR <time.h> 
+header.
+.P
+Under no circumstance shall the function fail with a timeout if the
+semaphore can be locked immediately. The validity of the
+.IR abstime
+need not be checked if the semaphore can be locked immediately.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIsem_timedwait\fR()
+function shall return zero if the calling process successfully
+performed the semaphore lock operation on the semaphore designated by
+.IR sem .
+If the call was unsuccessful, the state of the semaphore shall be
+unchanged, and the function shall return a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsem_timedwait\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The process or thread would have blocked, and the
+.IR abstime
+parameter specified a nanoseconds field value less than zero or greater
+than or equal to 1\|000 million.
+.TP
+.BR ETIMEDOUT
+The semaphore could not be locked before the specified timeout expired.
+.P
+The
+\fIsem_timedwait\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EDEADLK
+A deadlock condition was detected.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal interrupted this function.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR sem
+argument does not refer to a valid semaphore.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The program shown below operates on an unnamed semaphore. The program
+expects two command-line arguments. The first argument specifies a
+seconds value that is used to set an alarm timer to generate a SIGALRM
+signal. This handler performs a
+.IR sem_post (3)
+to increment the semaphore that is being waited on in
+\fImain\fR()
+using
+\fIsem_timedwait\fR().
+The second command-line argument specifies the length of the timeout,
+in seconds, for
+\fIsem_timedwait\fR().
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <semaphore.h>
+#include <time.h>
+#include <assert.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+sem_t sem;
+.P
+static void
+handler(int sig)
+{
+    int sav_errno = errno;
+    static const char info_msg[] = "sem_post() from handler\en";
+    write(STDOUT_FILENO, info_msg, sizeof info_msg - 1);
+    if (sem_post(&sem) == -1) {
+        static const char err_msg[] = "sem_post() failed\en";
+        write(STDERR_FILENO, err_msg, sizeof err_msg - 1);
+        _exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+    }
+    errno = sav_errno;
+}
+.P
+int
+main(int argc, char *argv[])
+{
+    struct sigaction sa;
+    struct timespec ts;
+    int s;
+.P
+    if (argc != 3) {
+        fprintf(stderr, "Usage: %s <alarm-secs> <wait-secs>\en",
+            argv[0]);
+        exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+    }
+.P
+    if (sem_init(&sem, 0, 0) == -1) {
+        perror("sem_init");
+        exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+    }
+.P
+    /* Establish SIGALRM handler; set alarm timer using argv[1] */
+.P
+    sa.sa_handler = handler;
+    sigemptyset(&sa.sa_mask);
+    sa.sa_flags = 0;
+    if (sigaction(SIGALRM, &sa, NULL) == -1) {
+        perror("sigaction");
+        exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+    }
+.P
+    alarm(atoi(argv[1]));
+.P
+    /* Calculate relative interval as current time plus
+       number of seconds given argv[2] */
+.P
+    if (clock_gettime(CLOCK_REALTIME, &ts) == -1) {
+        perror("clock_gettime");
+        exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+    }
+    ts.tv_sec += atoi(argv[2]);
+.P
+    printf("main() about to call sem_timedwait()\en");
+    while ((s = sem_timedwait(&sem, &ts)) == -1 && errno == EINTR)
+        continue;       /* Restart if interrupted by handler */
+.P
+    /* Check what happened */
+.P
+    if (s == -1) {
+        if (errno == ETIMEDOUT)
+            printf("sem_timedwait() timed out\en");
+        else
+            perror("sem_timedwait");
+    } else
+        printf("sem_timedwait() succeeded\en");
+.P
+    exit((s == 0) ? EXIT_SUCCESS : EXIT_FAILURE);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications using these functions may be subject to priority
+inversion, as discussed in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.287" ", " "Priority Inversion".
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsem_post\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_trywait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemop\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItime\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.287" ", " "Priority Inversion",
+.IR "\fB<semaphore.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_trywait.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_trywait.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5dfbf15
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_trywait.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,127 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SEM_TRYWAIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sem_trywait,
+sem_wait
+\(em lock a semaphore
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <semaphore.h>
+.P
+int sem_trywait(sem_t *\fIsem\fP);
+int sem_wait(sem_t *\fIsem\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsem_trywait\fR()
+function shall lock the semaphore referenced by
+.IR sem
+only if the semaphore is currently not locked; that is, if the
+semaphore value is currently positive. Otherwise, it shall not lock
+the semaphore.
+.P
+The
+\fIsem_wait\fR()
+function shall lock the semaphore referenced by
+.IR sem
+by performing a semaphore lock operation on that semaphore. If the
+semaphore value is currently zero, then the calling thread shall not
+return from the call to
+\fIsem_wait\fR()
+until it either locks the semaphore or the call is interrupted by a
+signal.
+.P
+Upon successful return, the state of the semaphore shall be locked and
+shall remain locked until the
+\fIsem_post\fR()
+function is executed and returns successfully.
+.P
+The
+\fIsem_wait\fR()
+function is interruptible by the delivery of a signal.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIsem_trywait\fR()
+and
+\fIsem_wait\fR()
+functions shall return zero if the calling process successfully
+performed the semaphore lock operation on the semaphore designated by
+.IR sem .
+If the call was unsuccessful, the state of the semaphore shall be
+unchanged, and the function shall return a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsem_trywait\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The semaphore was already locked, so it cannot be immediately locked by
+the
+\fIsem_trywait\fR()
+operation.
+.P
+The
+\fIsem_trywait\fR()
+and
+\fIsem_wait\fR()
+functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EDEADLK
+A deadlock condition was detected.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal interrupted this function.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR sem
+argument does not refer to a valid semaphore.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications using these functions may be subject to priority inversion,
+as discussed in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.287" ", " "Priority Inversion".
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsemctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemop\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_post\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_timedwait\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.287" ", " "Priority Inversion",
+.IR "Section 4.11" ", " "Memory Synchronization",
+.IR "\fB<semaphore.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_unlink.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_unlink.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4e14310
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_unlink.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SEM_UNLINK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sem_unlink
+\(em remove a named semaphore
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <semaphore.h>
+.P
+int sem_unlink(const char *\fIname\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsem_unlink\fR()
+function shall remove the semaphore named by the string
+.IR name .
+If the semaphore named by
+.IR name
+is currently referenced by other processes, then
+\fIsem_unlink\fR()
+shall have no effect on the state of the semaphore. If one or more
+processes have the semaphore open when
+\fIsem_unlink\fR()
+is called, destruction of the semaphore is postponed until all
+references to the semaphore have been destroyed by calls to
+\fIsem_close\fR(),
+\fI_exit\fR(),
+or
+.IR exec .
+Calls to
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+to recreate or reconnect to the semaphore refer to a new semaphore
+after
+\fIsem_unlink\fR()
+is called. The
+\fIsem_unlink\fR()
+call shall not block until all references have been destroyed; it
+shall return immediately.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIsem_unlink\fR()
+function shall return a value of 0. Otherwise, the semaphore shall not
+be changed and the function shall return a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsem_unlink\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Permission is denied to unlink the named semaphore.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+The named semaphore does not exist.
+.P
+The
+\fIsem_unlink\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of the
+.IR name
+argument exceeds
+{_POSIX_PATH_MAX}
+on systems that do not support the XSI option
+or exceeds
+{_XOPEN_PATH_MAX}
+on XSI systems,
+or has a pathname component that is longer than
+{_POSIX_NAME_MAX}
+on systems that do not support the XSI option
+or longer than
+{_XOPEN_NAME_MAX}
+on XSI systems.
+A call to
+\fIsem_unlink\fR()
+with a
+.IR name
+argument that contains the same semaphore name as was previously used
+in a successful
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+call shall not give an
+.BR [ENAMETOOLONG] 
+error.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+A future version might require the
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+and
+\fIsem_unlink\fR()
+functions to have semantics similar to normal file system operations.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsemctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemop\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_close\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_open\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<semaphore.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_wait.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_wait.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0346657
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sem_wait.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SEM_WAIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sem_wait
+\(em lock a semaphore
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <semaphore.h>
+.P
+int sem_wait(sem_t *\fIsem\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIsem_trywait\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/semctl.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/semctl.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c71c238
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/semctl.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,336 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SEMCTL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+semctl
+\(em XSI semaphore control operations
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include\ <sys/sem.h>
+.P
+int semctl(int \fIsemid\fP, int \fIsemnum\fP, int \fIcmd\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsemctl\fR()
+function operates on XSI semaphores (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.16" ", " "Semaphore").
+It is unspecified whether this function interoperates with the
+realtime interprocess communication facilities defined in
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime".
+.P
+The
+\fIsemctl\fR()
+function provides a variety of semaphore control operations as
+specified by
+.IR cmd .
+The fourth argument is optional and depends upon the operation
+requested. If required, it is of type
+.BR "union semun" ,
+which the application shall explicitly declare:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+union semun {
+    int val;
+    struct semid_ds *buf;
+    unsigned short  *array;
+} arg;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The following semaphore control operations as specified by
+.IR cmd
+are executed with respect to the semaphore specified by
+.IR semid
+and
+.IR semnum .
+The level of permission required for each operation is shown with each
+command; see
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication".
+The symbolic names for the values of
+.IR cmd
+are defined in the
+.IR <sys/sem.h> 
+header:
+.IP GETVAL 12
+Return the value of
+.IR semval ;
+see
+.IR <sys/sem.h> .
+Requires read permission.
+.IP SETVAL 12
+Set the value of
+.IR semval
+to
+.IR arg.val ,
+where
+.IR arg
+is the value of the fourth argument to
+\fIsemctl\fR().
+When this command is successfully executed, the
+.IR semadj
+value corresponding to the specified semaphore in all processes is
+cleared. Also, the
+.IR sem_ctime
+timestamp shall be set to the current time, as described in
+.IR "Section 2.7.1" ", " "IPC General Description".
+Requires alter permission; see
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication".
+.IP GETPID 12
+Return the value of
+.IR sempid .
+Requires read permission.
+.IP GETNCNT 12
+Return the value of
+.IR semncnt .
+Requires read permission.
+.IP GETZCNT 12
+Return the value of
+.IR semzcnt .
+Requires read permission.
+.P
+The following values of
+.IR cmd
+operate on each
+.IR semval
+in the set of semaphores:
+.IP GETALL 12
+Return the value of
+.IR semval
+for each semaphore in the semaphore set and place into the array
+pointed to by
+.IR arg.array ,
+where
+.IR arg
+is the fourth argument to
+\fIsemctl\fR().
+Requires read permission.
+.IP SETALL 12
+Set the value of
+.IR semval
+for each semaphore in the semaphore set according to the array pointed
+to by
+.IR arg.array ,
+where
+.IR arg
+is the fourth argument to
+\fIsemctl\fR().
+When this command is successfully executed, the
+.IR semadj
+values corresponding to each specified semaphore in all processes are
+cleared. Also, the
+.IR sem_ctime
+timestamp shall be set to the current time, as described in
+.IR "Section 2.7.1" ", " "IPC General Description".
+Requires alter permission.
+.br
+.P
+The following values of
+.IR cmd
+are also available:
+.IP IPC_STAT 12
+Place the current value of each member of the
+.BR semid_ds
+data structure associated with
+.IR semid
+into the structure pointed to by
+.IR arg.buf ,
+where
+.IR arg
+is the fourth argument to
+\fIsemctl\fR().
+The contents of this structure are defined in
+.IR <sys/sem.h> .
+Requires read permission.
+.IP IPC_SET 12
+Set the value of the following members of the
+.BR semid_ds
+data structure associated with
+.IR semid
+to the corresponding value found in the structure pointed to by
+.IR arg.buf ,
+where
+.IR arg
+is the fourth argument to
+\fIsemctl\fR():
+.RS 12 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+sem_perm.uid
+sem_perm.gid
+sem_perm.mode
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The mode bits specified in
+.IR "Section 2.7.1" ", " "IPC General Description"
+are copied into the corresponding bits of the
+.IR sem_perm.mode
+associated with
+.IR semid .
+The stored values of any other bits are unspecified. The
+.IR sem_ctime
+timestamp shall be set to the current time, as described in
+.IR "Section 2.7.1" ", " "IPC General Description".
+.P
+This command can only be executed by a process that has an effective
+user ID equal to either that of a process with appropriate privileges
+or to the value of
+.IR sem_perm.cuid
+or
+.IR sem_perm.uid
+in the
+.BR semid_ds
+data structure associated with
+.IR semid .
+.RE
+.IP IPC_RMID 12
+Remove the semaphore identifier specified by
+.IR semid
+from the system and destroy the set of semaphores and
+.BR semid_ds
+data structure associated with it. This command can only be executed
+by a process that has an effective user ID equal to either that of a
+process with appropriate privileges or to the value of
+.IR sem_perm.cuid
+or
+.IR sem_perm.uid
+in the
+.BR semid_ds
+data structure associated with
+.IR semid .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the value returned by
+\fIsemctl\fR()
+depends on
+.IR cmd
+as follows:
+.IP GETVAL 12
+The value of
+.IR semval .
+.IP GETPID 12
+The value of
+.IR sempid .
+.IP GETNCNT 12
+The value of
+.IR semncnt .
+.IP GETZCNT 12
+The value of
+.IR semzcnt .
+.IP "All others" 12
+0.
+.P
+Otherwise,
+\fIsemctl\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsemctl\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Operation permission is denied to the calling process; see
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication".
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR semid
+is not a valid semaphore identifier, or the value of
+.IR semnum
+is less than 0 or greater than or equal to
+.IR sem_nsems ,
+or the value of
+.IR cmd
+is not a valid command.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The argument
+.IR cmd
+is equal to IPC_RMID or IPC_SET
+and the effective user ID of the calling process is not equal to that
+of a process with appropriate privileges and it is not equal to the
+value of
+.IR sem_perm.cuid
+or
+.IR sem_perm.uid
+in the data structure associated with
+.IR semid .
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+The argument
+.IR cmd
+is equal to SETVAL or SETALL and the value to which
+.IR semval
+is to be set is greater than the system-imposed maximum.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIsemop\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The fourth parameter in the SYNOPSIS section is now specified as
+.BR \(dq...\(dq 
+in order to avoid a clash with the ISO\ C standard when referring to the union
+.IR semun
+(as defined in Issue 3) and for backwards-compatibility.
+.P
+The POSIX Realtime Extension defines alternative interfaces for interprocess
+communication. Application developers who need to use IPC should
+design their applications so that modules using the IPC routines
+described in
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication"
+can be easily modified to use the alternative interfaces.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication",
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime",
+.IR "\fIsemget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemop\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_close\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_getvalue\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_init\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_post\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_trywait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_unlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.16" ", " "Semaphore",
+.IR "\fB<sys_sem.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/semget.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/semget.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7c15c14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/semget.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,196 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SEMGET "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+semget
+\(em get set of XSI semaphores
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/sem.h>
+.P
+int semget(key_t \fIkey\fP, int \fInsems\fP, int \fIsemflg\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsemget\fR()
+function operates on XSI semaphores (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.16" ", " "Semaphore").
+It is unspecified whether this function interoperates with the
+realtime interprocess communication facilities defined in
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime".
+.P
+The
+\fIsemget\fR()
+function shall return the semaphore identifier associated with
+.IR key .
+.P
+A semaphore identifier with its associated
+.BR semid_ds
+data structure and its associated set of
+.IR nsems
+semaphores (see
+.IR <sys/sem.h> )
+is created for
+.IR key
+if one of the following is true:
+.IP " *" 4
+The argument
+.IR key
+is equal to IPC_PRIVATE.
+.IP " *" 4
+The argument
+.IR key
+does not already have a semaphore identifier associated with it and
+(\fIsemflg\fP &IPC_CREAT) is non-zero.
+.P
+Upon creation, the
+.BR semid_ds
+data structure associated with the new semaphore identifier is
+initialized as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+In the operation permissions structure
+.IR sem_perm.cuid ,
+.IR sem_perm.uid ,
+.IR sem_perm.cgid ,
+and
+.IR sem_perm.gid
+shall be set to the effective user ID and effective group ID,
+respectively, of the calling process.
+.IP " *" 4
+The low-order 9 bits of
+.IR sem_perm.mode
+shall be set to the low-order 9 bits of
+.IR semflg .
+.IP " *" 4
+The variable
+.IR sem_nsems
+shall be set to the value of
+.IR nsems .
+.IP " *" 4
+The variable
+.IR sem_otime
+shall be set to 0 and
+.IR sem_ctime
+shall be set to the current time, as described in
+.IR "Section 2.7.1" ", " "IPC General Description".
+.IP " *" 4
+The data structure associated with each semaphore in the set need not
+be initialized. The
+\fIsemctl\fR()
+function with the command SETVAL or SETALL
+can be used to initialize each semaphore.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsemget\fR()
+shall return a non-negative integer, namely a semaphore identifier;
+otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsemget\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+A semaphore identifier exists for
+.IR key ,
+but operation permission as specified by the low-order 9 bits of
+.IR semflg
+would not be granted; see
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication".
+.TP
+.BR EEXIST
+A semaphore identifier exists for the argument
+.IR key
+but ((\fIsemflg\fP &IPC_CREAT) &&(\fIsemflg\fP &IPC_EXCL))
+is non-zero.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR nsems
+is either less than or equal to 0 or greater than the system-imposed
+limit, or a semaphore identifier exists for the argument
+.IR key ,
+but the number of semaphores in the set associated with it is less than
+.IR nsems
+and
+.IR nsems
+is not equal to 0.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A semaphore identifier does not exist for the argument
+.IR key
+and (\fIsemflg\fP &IPC_CREAT) is equal to 0.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+A semaphore identifier is to be created but the system-imposed limit on
+the maximum number of allowed semaphores system-wide would be
+exceeded.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIsemop\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The POSIX Realtime Extension defines alternative interfaces for interprocess
+communication. Application developers who need to use IPC should
+design their applications so that modules using the IPC routines
+described in
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication"
+can be easily modified to use the alternative interfaces.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+A future version may require that the value of the
+.IR semval ,
+.IR sempid ,
+.IR semncnt ,
+and
+.IR semzcnt
+members of all semaphores in a semaphore set be initialized to zero when
+a call to
+\fIsemget\fR()
+creates a semaphore set. Many semaphore implementations already do this
+and it greatly simplifies what an application must do to initialize a
+semaphore set.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication",
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime",
+.IR "\fIftok\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemop\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_close\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_getvalue\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_init\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_post\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_trywait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_unlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.16" ", " "Semaphore",
+.IR "\fB<sys_sem.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/semop.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/semop.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e07ba49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/semop.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,480 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SEMOP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+semop
+\(em XSI semaphore operations
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/sem.h>
+.P
+int semop(int \fIsemid\fP, struct sembuf *\fIsops\fP, size_t \fInsops\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsemop\fR()
+function operates on XSI semaphores (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.16" ", " "Semaphore").
+It is unspecified whether this function interoperates with the
+realtime interprocess communication facilities defined in
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime".
+.P
+The
+\fIsemop\fR()
+function shall perform atomically a user-defined array of semaphore
+operations in array order on the set of semaphores associated with the
+semaphore identifier specified by the argument
+.IR semid .
+.P
+The argument
+.IR sops
+is a pointer to a user-defined array of semaphore operation
+structures. The implementation shall not modify elements of this array
+unless the application uses implementation-defined extensions.
+.P
+The argument
+.IR nsops
+is the number of such structures in the array.
+.P
+Each structure,
+.BR sembuf ,
+includes the following members:
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB | cB
+lw(1.25i)B | lw(1.25i)I | lw(2.5i).
+Member Type!Member Name!Description
+_
+unsigned short!sem_num!Semaphore number.
+short!sem_op!Semaphore operation.
+short!sem_flg!Operation flags.
+.TE
+.P
+Each semaphore operation specified by
+.IR sem_op
+is performed on the corresponding semaphore specified by
+.IR semid
+and
+.IR sem_num .
+.P
+The variable
+.IR sem_op
+specifies one of three semaphore operations:
+.IP " 1." 4
+If
+.IR sem_op
+is a negative integer and the calling process has alter permission, one
+of the following shall occur:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR semval (see
+.IR <sys/sem.h> )
+is greater than or equal to the absolute value of
+.IR sem_op ,
+the absolute value of
+.IR sem_op
+is subtracted from
+.IR semval .
+Also, if (\fIsem_flg\fP &SEM_UNDO) is non-zero, the absolute value of
+.IR sem_op
+shall be added to the
+.IR semadj
+value of the calling process for the specified semaphore.
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR semval
+is less than the absolute value of
+.IR sem_op
+and (\fIsem_flg\fP &IPC_NOWAIT) is non-zero,
+\fIsemop\fR()
+shall return immediately.
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR semval
+is less than the absolute value of
+.IR sem_op
+and (\fIsem_flg\fP &IPC_NOWAIT) is 0,
+\fIsemop\fR()
+shall increment the
+.IR semncnt
+associated with the specified semaphore and suspend execution of the
+calling thread until one of the following conditions occurs:
+.RS 4 
+.IP -- 4
+The value of
+.IR semval
+becomes greater than or equal to the absolute value of
+.IR sem_op .
+When this occurs, the value of
+.IR semncnt
+associated with the specified semaphore shall be decremented, the
+absolute value of
+.IR sem_op
+shall be subtracted from
+.IR semval
+and, if (\fIsem_flg\fP &SEM_UNDO) is non-zero, the absolute value of
+.IR sem_op
+shall be added to the
+.IR semadj
+value of the calling process for the specified semaphore.
+.IP -- 4
+The
+.IR semid
+for which the calling thread is awaiting action is removed from the
+system. When this occurs,
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EIDRM] 
+and \(mi1 shall be returned.
+.IP -- 4
+The calling thread receives a signal that is to be caught. When this
+occurs, the value of
+.IR semncnt
+associated with the specified semaphore shall be decremented, and the
+calling thread shall resume execution in the manner prescribed in
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)".
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP " 2." 4
+If
+.IR sem_op
+is a positive integer and the calling process has alter permission, the
+value of
+.IR sem_op
+shall be added to
+.IR semval
+and, if (\fIsem_flg\fP &SEM_UNDO) is non-zero, the value of
+.IR sem_op
+shall be subtracted from the
+.IR semadj
+value of the calling process for the specified semaphore.
+.IP " 3." 4
+If
+.IR sem_op
+is 0 and the calling process has read permission, one of the following
+shall occur:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR semval
+is 0,
+\fIsemop\fR()
+shall return immediately.
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR semval
+is non-zero and (\fIsem_flg\fP &IPC_NOWAIT) is non-zero,
+\fIsemop\fR()
+shall return immediately.
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR semval
+is non-zero and (\fIsem_flg\fP &IPC_NOWAIT) is 0,
+\fIsemop\fR()
+shall increment the
+.IR semzcnt
+associated with the specified semaphore and suspend execution of the
+calling thread until one of the following occurs:
+.RS 4 
+.IP -- 4
+The value of
+.IR semval
+becomes 0, at which time the value of
+.IR semzcnt
+associated with the specified semaphore shall be decremented.
+.IP -- 4
+The
+.IR semid
+for which the calling thread is awaiting action is removed from the
+system. When this occurs,
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EIDRM] 
+and \(mi1 shall be returned.
+.IP -- 4
+The calling thread receives a signal that is to be caught. When this
+occurs, the value of
+.IR semzcnt
+associated with the specified semaphore shall be decremented, and the
+calling thread shall resume execution in the manner prescribed in
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)".
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+Upon successful completion, the value of
+.IR sempid
+for each semaphore specified in the array pointed to by
+.IR sops
+shall be set to the process ID of the calling process. Also, the
+.IR sem_otime
+timestamp shall be set to the current time, as described in
+.IR "Section 2.7.1" ", " "IPC General Description".
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsemop\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsemop\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR E2BIG
+The value of
+.IR nsops
+is greater than the system-imposed maximum.
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Operation permission is denied to the calling process; see
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication".
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The operation would result in suspension of the calling process but
+(\fIsem_flg\fP &IPC_NOWAIT) is non-zero.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+The value of
+.IR sem_num
+is greater than or equal to the number of semaphores in the set
+associated with
+.IR semid .
+.TP
+.BR EIDRM
+The semaphore identifier
+.IR semid
+is removed from the system.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fIsemop\fR()
+function was interrupted by a signal.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR semid
+is not a valid semaphore identifier, or the number of individual
+semaphores for which the calling process requests a SEM_UNDO would
+exceed the system-imposed limit.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+The limit on the number of individual processes requesting a SEM_UNDO
+would be exceeded.
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+An operation would cause a
+.IR semval
+to overflow the system-imposed limit, or an operation would cause a
+.IR semadj
+value to overflow the system-imposed limit.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Setting Values in Semaphores"
+.P
+The following example sets the values of the two semaphores associated
+with the
+.IR semid
+identifier to the values contained in the
+.IR sb
+array.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/sem.h>
+\&...
+int semid;
+struct sembuf sb[2];
+int nsops = 2;
+int result;
+.P
+/* Code to initialize semid. */
+\&...
+.P
+/* Adjust value of semaphore in the semaphore array semid. */
+sb[0].sem_num = 0;
+sb[0].sem_op = -1;
+sb[0].sem_flg = SEM_UNDO | IPC_NOWAIT;
+sb[1].sem_num = 1;
+sb[1].sem_op = 1;
+sb[1].sem_flg = 0;
+.P
+result = semop(semid, sb, nsops);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Creating a Semaphore Identifier"
+.P
+The following example gets a unique semaphore key using the
+\fIftok\fR()
+function, then gets a semaphore ID associated with that key using the
+\fIsemget\fR()
+function (the first call also tests to make sure the semaphore exists).
+If the semaphore does not exist, the program creates it, as shown by
+the second call to
+\fIsemget\fR().
+In creating the semaphore for the queuing process, the program
+attempts to create one semaphore with read/write permission for all. It
+also uses the IPC_EXCL flag, which forces
+\fIsemget\fR()
+to fail if the semaphore already exists.
+.P
+After creating the semaphore, the program uses calls to
+\fIsemctl\fR()
+and
+\fIsemop\fR()
+to initialize it to the values in the
+.IR sbuf
+array. The number of processes that can execute concurrently without
+queuing is initially set to 2. The final call to
+\fIsemget\fR()
+creates a semaphore identifier that can be used later in the program.
+.P
+Processes that obtain
+.IR semid
+without creating it check that
+.IR sem_otime
+is non-zero, to ensure that the creating process has completed the
+\fIsemop\fR()
+initialization.
+.P
+The final call to
+\fIsemop\fR()
+acquires the semaphore and waits until it is free; the SEM_UNDO option
+releases the semaphore when the process exits, waiting until there are
+less than two processes running concurrently.
+.br
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <sys/sem.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+\&...
+key_t semkey;
+int semid;
+struct sembuf sbuf;
+union semun {
+    int val;
+    struct semid_ds *buf;
+    unsigned short *array;
+} arg;
+struct semid_ds ds;
+\&...
+/* Get unique key for semaphore. */
+if ((semkey = ftok("/tmp", 'a')) == (key_t) -1) {
+    perror("IPC error: ftok"); exit(1);
+}
+.P
+/* Get semaphore ID associated with this key. */
+if ((semid = semget(semkey, 0, 0)) == -1) {
+.P
+    /* Semaphore does not exist - Create. */
+    if ((semid = semget(semkey, 1, IPC_CREAT | IPC_EXCL | S_IRUSR |
+        S_IWUSR | S_IRGRP | S_IWGRP | S_IROTH | S_IWOTH)) != -1)
+    {
+        /* Initialize the semaphore. */
+        arg.val = 0;
+        sbuf.sem_num = 0;
+        sbuf.sem_op = 2;  /* This is the number of runs without queuing. */
+        sbuf.sem_flg = 0;
+        if (semctl(semid, 0, SETVAL, arg) == -1
+            || semop(semid, &sbuf, 1) == -1) {
+            perror("IPC error: semop"); exit(1);
+        }
+    }
+    else if (errno == EEXIST) {
+        if ((semid = semget(semkey, 0, 0)) == -1) {
+            perror("IPC error 1: semget"); exit(1);
+        }
+        goto check_init;
+    }
+    else {
+        perror("IPC error 2: semget"); exit(1);
+    }
+}
+else
+{
+    /* Check that semid has completed initialization. */
+    /* An application can use a retry loop at this point rather than
+       exiting. */
+    check_init:
+    arg.buf = &ds;
+    if (semctl(semid, 0, IPC_STAT, arg) < 0) {
+        perror("IPC error 3: semctl"); exit(1);
+    }
+    if (ds.sem_otime == 0) {
+        perror("IPC error 4: semctl"); exit(1);
+    }
+}
+\&...
+sbuf.sem_num = 0;
+sbuf.sem_op = -1;
+sbuf.sem_flg = SEM_UNDO;
+if (semop(semid, &sbuf, 1) == -1) {
+    perror("IPC Error: semop"); exit(1);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The POSIX Realtime Extension defines alternative interfaces for interprocess
+communication. Application developers who need to use IPC should
+design their applications so that modules using the IPC routines
+described in
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication"
+can be easily modified to use the alternative interfaces.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication",
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_close\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_destroy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_getvalue\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_init\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_post\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_trywait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_unlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.16" ", " "Semaphore",
+.IR "\fB<sys_ipc.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_sem.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/send.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/send.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a38fae1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/send.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,224 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SEND "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+send
+\(em send a message on a socket
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+.P
+ssize_t send(int \fIsocket\fP, const void *\fIbuffer\fP, size_t \fIlength\fP, int \fIflags\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsend\fR()
+function shall initiate transmission of a message from the specified
+socket to its peer. The
+\fIsend\fR()
+function shall send a message only when the socket is connected. If
+the socket is a connectionless-mode socket, the message shall be sent
+to the pre-specified peer address.
+.P
+The
+\fIsend\fR()
+function takes the following arguments:
+.IP "\fIsocket\fR" 12
+Specifies the socket file descriptor.
+.IP "\fIbuffer\fR" 12
+Points to the buffer containing the message to send.
+.IP "\fIlength\fR" 12
+Specifies the length of the message in bytes.
+.IP "\fIflags\fR" 12
+Specifies the type of message transmission. Values of this argument are
+formed by logically OR'ing zero or more of the following flags:
+.RS 12 
+.IP MSG_EOR 14
+Terminates a record (if supported by the protocol).
+.IP MSG_OOB 14
+Sends out-of-band data on sockets that support out-of-band
+communications. The significance and semantics of out-of-band data are
+protocol-specific.
+.IP MSG_NOSIGNAL 14
+Requests not to send the SIGPIPE signal if an attempt to send is made
+on a stream-oriented socket that is no longer connected. The
+.BR [EPIPE] 
+error shall still be returned.
+.RE
+.P
+The length of the message to be sent is specified by the
+.IR length
+argument. If the message is too long to pass through the underlying
+protocol,
+\fIsend\fR()
+shall fail and no data shall be transmitted.
+.P
+Successful completion of a call to
+\fIsend\fR()
+does not guarantee delivery of the message. A return value of \(mi1
+indicates only locally-detected errors.
+.P
+If space is not available at the sending socket to hold the message to
+be transmitted, and the socket file descriptor does not have O_NONBLOCK
+set,
+\fIsend\fR()
+shall block until space is available. If space is not available at the
+sending socket to hold the message to be transmitted, and the socket
+file descriptor does have O_NONBLOCK set,
+\fIsend\fR()
+shall fail. The
+\fIselect\fR()
+and
+\fIpoll\fR()
+functions can be used to determine when it is possible to send more
+data.
+.P
+The socket in use may require the process to have appropriate
+privileges to use the
+\fIsend\fR()
+function.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsend\fR()
+shall return the number of bytes sent. Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be
+returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsend\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN " or " EWOULDBLOCK
+.br
+The socket's file descriptor is marked O_NONBLOCK and the requested
+operation would block.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR socket
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR ECONNRESET
+A connection was forcibly closed by a peer.
+.TP
+.BR EDESTADDRREQ
+.br
+The socket is not connection-mode and no peer address is set.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal interrupted
+\fIsend\fR()
+before any data was transmitted.
+.TP
+.BR EMSGSIZE
+The message is too large to be sent all at once, as the socket requires.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTCONN
+The socket is not connected.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSOCK
+The
+.IR socket
+argument does not refer to a socket.
+.TP
+.BR EOPNOTSUPP
+The
+.IR socket
+argument is associated with a socket that does not support one or more
+of the values set in
+.IR flags .
+.TP
+.BR EPIPE
+The socket is shut down for writing, or the socket is connection-mode
+and is no longer connected. In the latter case, and if the socket is of
+type SOCK_STREAM or SOCK_SEQPACKET and the MSG_NOSIGNAL flag is not set,
+the SIGPIPE signal is generated to the calling thread.
+.P
+The
+\fIsend\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+The calling process does not have appropriate privileges.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to the file system.
+.TP
+.BR ENETDOWN
+The local network interface used to reach the destination is down.
+.TP
+.BR ENETUNREACH
+.br
+No route to the network is present.
+.TP
+.BR ENOBUFS
+Insufficient resources were available in the system to perform the
+operation.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If the
+.IR socket
+argument refers to a connection-mode socket, the
+\fIsend\fR()
+function is equivalent to
+\fIsendto\fR()
+(with any value for the
+.IR dest_addr
+and
+.IR dest_len
+arguments, as they are ignored in this case). If the
+.IR socket
+argument refers to a socket and the
+.IR flags
+argument is 0, the
+\fIsend\fR()
+function is equivalent to
+\fIwrite\fR().
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIconnect\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetsockopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpoll\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpselect\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecvfrom\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecvmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsendmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsendto\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsockopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshutdown\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sendmsg.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sendmsg.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c826fe0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sendmsg.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,323 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SENDMSG "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sendmsg
+\(em send a message on a socket using a message structure
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+.P
+ssize_t sendmsg(int \fIsocket\fP, const struct msghdr *\fImessage\fP, int \fIflags\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsendmsg\fR()
+function shall send a message through a connection-mode or
+connectionless-mode socket. If the socket is a connectionless-mode
+socket, the message shall be sent to the address specified by
+.BR msghdr
+if no pre-specified peer address has been set. If a peer address has
+been pre-specified, either the message shall be sent to the address
+specified in
+.BR msghdr
+(overriding the pre-specified peer address), or the function shall
+return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EISCONN] .
+If the socket is connection-mode, the destination address in
+.BR msghdr
+shall be ignored.
+.P
+The
+\fIsendmsg\fR()
+function takes the following arguments:
+.IP "\fIsocket\fR" 12
+Specifies the socket file descriptor.
+.IP "\fImessage\fR" 12
+Points to a
+.BR msghdr
+structure, containing both the destination address and the buffers for
+the outgoing message. The length and format of the address depend on
+the address family of the socket. The
+.IR msg_flags
+member is ignored.
+.IP "\fIflags\fR" 12
+Specifies the type of message transmission. The application may
+specify 0 or the following flag:
+.RS 12 
+.IP MSG_EOR 14
+Terminates a record (if supported by the protocol).
+.IP MSG_OOB 14
+Sends out-of-band data on sockets that support out-of-bound data. The
+significance and semantics of out-of-band data are protocol-specific.
+.IP MSG_NOSIGNAL 14
+Requests not to send the SIGPIPE signal if an attempt to send is made
+on a stream-oriented socket that is no longer connected. The
+.BR [EPIPE] 
+error shall still be returned.
+.RE
+.P
+The
+.IR msg_iov
+and
+.IR msg_iovlen
+fields of
+.IR message
+specify zero or more buffers containing the data to be sent.
+.IR msg_iov
+points to an array of
+.BR iovec
+structures;
+.IR msg_iovlen
+shall be set to the dimension of this array. In each
+.BR iovec
+structure, the
+.IR iov_base
+field specifies a storage area and the
+.IR iov_len
+field gives its size in bytes. Some of these sizes can be zero. The
+data from each storage area indicated by
+.IR msg_iov
+is sent in turn.
+.P
+Successful completion of a call to
+\fIsendmsg\fR()
+does not guarantee delivery of the message. A return value of \(mi1
+indicates only locally-detected errors.
+.P
+If space is not available at the sending socket to hold the message to
+be transmitted and the socket file descriptor does not have O_NONBLOCK
+set, the
+\fIsendmsg\fR()
+function shall block until space is available. If space is not
+available at the sending socket to hold the message to be transmitted
+and the socket file descriptor does have O_NONBLOCK set, the
+\fIsendmsg\fR()
+function shall fail.
+.P
+If the socket protocol supports broadcast and the specified address is
+a broadcast address for the socket protocol,
+\fIsendmsg\fR()
+shall fail if the SO_BROADCAST option is not set for the socket.
+.P
+The socket in use may require the process to have appropriate
+privileges to use the
+\fIsendmsg\fR()
+function.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsendmsg\fR()
+shall return the number of bytes sent. Otherwise, \(mi1 shall
+be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsendmsg\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN " or " EWOULDBLOCK
+.br
+The socket's file descriptor is marked O_NONBLOCK and the requested
+operation would block.
+.TP
+.BR EAFNOSUPPORT
+.br
+Addresses in the specified address family cannot be used with this
+socket.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR socket
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR ECONNRESET
+A connection was forcibly closed by a peer.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal interrupted
+\fIsendmsg\fR()
+before any data was transmitted.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The sum of the
+.IR iov_len
+values overflows an
+.BR ssize_t .
+.TP
+.BR EMSGSIZE
+The message is too large to be sent all at once (as the socket
+requires), or the
+.IR msg_iovlen
+member of the
+.BR msghdr
+structure pointed to by
+.IR message
+is less than or equal to 0 or is greater than
+{IOV_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTCONN
+The socket is connection-mode but is not connected.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSOCK
+The
+.IR socket
+argument does not refer to a socket.
+.TP
+.BR EOPNOTSUPP
+The
+.IR socket
+argument is associated with a socket that does not support one or more
+of the values set in
+.IR flags .
+.TP
+.BR EPIPE
+The socket is shut down for writing, or the socket is connection-mode
+and is no longer connected. In the latter case, and if the socket is of
+type SOCK_STREAM or SOCK_SEQPACKET and the MSG_NOSIGNAL flag is not set,
+the SIGPIPE signal is generated to the calling thread.
+.P
+If the address family of the socket is AF_UNIX, then
+\fIsendmsg\fR()
+shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to the file
+system.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+pathname in the socket address.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of the pathname does not name an existing file or the path
+name is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix of the pathname in the socket address
+names an existing file that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link
+to a directory, or the pathname in the socket address contains at least
+one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file that
+is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIsendmsg\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied for a component of the path prefix; or
+write access to the named socket is denied.
+.TP
+.BR EDESTADDRREQ
+.br
+The socket is not connection-mode and does not have its peer address
+set, and no destination address was specified.
+.TP
+.BR EHOSTUNREACH
+.br
+The destination host cannot be reached (probably because the host is
+down or a remote router cannot reach it).
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to the file system.
+.TP
+.BR EISCONN
+A destination address was specified and the socket is already
+connected.
+.TP
+.BR ENETDOWN
+The local network interface used to reach the destination is down.
+.TP
+.BR ENETUNREACH
+.br
+No route to the network is present.
+.TP
+.BR ENOBUFS
+Insufficient resources were available in the system to perform the
+operation.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory was available to fulfill the request.
+.P
+If the address family of the socket is AF_UNIX, then
+\fIsendmsg\fR()
+may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the pathname in
+the socket address.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+Done.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIselect\fR()
+and
+\fIpoll\fR()
+functions can be used to determine when it is possible to send more
+data.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetsockopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpoll\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpselect\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecvfrom\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecvmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsend\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsendto\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsockopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshutdown\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sendto.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sendto.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1ce82ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sendto.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,314 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SENDTO "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sendto
+\(em send a message on a socket
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+.P
+ssize_t sendto(int \fIsocket\fP, const void *\fImessage\fP, size_t \fIlength\fP,
+    int \fIflags\fP, const struct sockaddr *\fIdest_addr\fP,
+    socklen_t \fIdest_len\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsendto\fR()
+function shall send a message through a connection-mode or
+connectionless-mode socket.
+.P
+If the socket is a connectionless-mode socket, the message shall be sent
+to the address specified by
+.IR dest_addr
+if no pre-specified peer address has been set. If a peer address has
+been pre-specified, either the message shall be sent to the address
+specified by
+.IR dest_addr
+(overriding the pre-specified peer address), or the function shall
+return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EISCONN] .
+.P
+If the socket is connection-mode,
+.IR dest_addr
+shall be ignored.
+.P
+The
+\fIsendto\fR()
+function takes the following arguments:
+.IP "\fIsocket\fR" 12
+Specifies the socket file descriptor.
+.IP "\fImessage\fR" 12
+Points to a buffer containing the message to be sent.
+.IP "\fIlength\fR" 12
+Specifies the size of the message in bytes.
+.IP "\fIflags\fR" 12
+Specifies the type of message transmission. Values of this argument
+are formed by logically OR'ing zero or more of the following flags:
+.RS 12 
+.IP MSG_EOR 14
+Terminates a record (if supported by the protocol).
+.IP MSG_OOB 14
+Sends out-of-band data on sockets that support out-of-band data. The
+significance and semantics of out-of-band data are protocol-specific.
+.IP MSG_NOSIGNAL 14
+Requests not to send the SIGPIPE signal if an attempt to send is made
+on a stream-oriented socket that is no longer connected. The
+.BR [EPIPE] 
+error shall still be returned.
+.RE
+.IP "\fIdest_addr\fR" 12
+Points to a
+.BR sockaddr
+structure containing the destination address. The length and format of
+the address depend on the address family of the socket.
+.IP "\fIdest_len\fR" 12
+Specifies the length of the
+.BR sockaddr
+structure pointed to by the
+.IR dest_addr
+argument.
+.P
+If the socket protocol supports broadcast and the specified address is
+a broadcast address for the socket protocol,
+\fIsendto\fR()
+shall fail if the SO_BROADCAST option is not set for the socket.
+.P
+The
+.IR dest_addr
+argument specifies the address of the target.
+.P
+The
+.IR length
+argument specifies the length of the message.
+.P
+Successful completion of a call to
+\fIsendto\fR()
+does not guarantee delivery of the message. A return value of \(mi1
+indicates only locally-detected errors.
+.P
+If space is not available at the sending socket to hold the message to
+be transmitted and the socket file descriptor does not have O_NONBLOCK
+set,
+\fIsendto\fR()
+shall block until space is available. If space is not available at the
+sending socket to hold the message to be transmitted and the socket
+file descriptor does have O_NONBLOCK set,
+\fIsendto\fR()
+shall fail.
+.br
+.P
+The socket in use may require the process to have appropriate
+privileges to use the
+\fIsendto\fR()
+function.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsendto\fR()
+shall return the number of bytes sent. Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be
+returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsendto\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAFNOSUPPORT
+.br
+Addresses in the specified address family cannot be used with this
+socket.
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN " or " EWOULDBLOCK
+.br
+The socket's file descriptor is marked O_NONBLOCK and the requested
+operation would block.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR socket
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR ECONNRESET
+A connection was forcibly closed by a peer.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal interrupted
+\fIsendto\fR()
+before any data was transmitted.
+.TP
+.BR EMSGSIZE
+The message is too large to be sent all at once, as the socket
+requires.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTCONN
+The socket is connection-mode but is not connected.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSOCK
+The
+.IR socket
+argument does not refer to a socket.
+.TP
+.BR EOPNOTSUPP
+The
+.IR socket
+argument is associated with a socket that does not support one or more
+of the values set in
+.IR flags .
+.TP
+.BR EPIPE
+The socket is shut down for writing, or the socket is connection-mode
+and is no longer connected. In the latter case, and if the socket is of
+type SOCK_STREAM or SOCK_SEQPACKET and the MSG_NOSIGNAL flag is not set,
+the SIGPIPE signal is generated to the calling thread.
+.P
+If the address family of the socket is AF_UNIX, then
+\fIsendto\fR()
+shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to the file
+system.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+pathname in the socket address.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of the pathname does not name an existing file or the
+pathname is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix of the pathname in the socket address
+names an existing file that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link
+to a directory, or the pathname in the socket address contains at
+least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file that
+is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIsendto\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied for a component of the path prefix; or
+write access to the named socket is denied.
+.TP
+.BR EDESTADDRREQ
+.br
+The socket is not connection-mode and does not have its peer address
+set, and no destination address was specified.
+.TP
+.BR EHOSTUNREACH
+.br
+The destination host cannot be reached (probably because the host is
+down or a remote router cannot reach it).
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR dest_len
+argument is not a valid length for the address family.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to the file
+system.
+.TP
+.BR EISCONN
+A destination address was specified and the socket is already
+connected.
+.TP
+.BR ENETDOWN
+The local network interface used to reach the destination is down.
+.TP
+.BR ENETUNREACH
+.br
+No route to the network is present.
+.TP
+.BR ENOBUFS
+Insufficient resources were available in the system to perform the
+operation.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory was available to fulfill the request.
+.P
+If the address family of the socket is AF_UNIX, then
+\fIsendto\fR()
+may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the pathname in
+the socket address.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIselect\fR()
+and
+\fIpoll\fR()
+functions can be used to determine when it is possible to send more
+data.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetsockopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpoll\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpselect\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecvfrom\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecvmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsend\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsendmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsockopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshutdown\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setbuf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setbuf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..32fb1a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setbuf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETBUF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setbuf
+\(em assign buffering to a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+void setbuf(FILE *restrict \fIstream\fP, char *restrict \fIbuf\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+Except that it returns no value, the function call:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+setbuf(stream, buf)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+shall be equivalent to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+setvbuf(stream, buf, _IOFBF, BUFSIZ)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+if
+.IR buf
+is not a null pointer, or to:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+setvbuf(stream, buf, _IONBF, BUFSIZ)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+if
+.IR buf
+is a null pointer.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIsetbuf\fR()
+function shall not return a value.
+.SH ERRORS
+Although the
+\fIsetvbuf\fR()
+interface may set
+.IR errno
+in defined ways, the value of
+.IR errno
+after a call to
+\fIsetbuf\fR()
+is unspecified.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+A common source of error is allocating buffer space as an ``automatic''
+variable in a code block, and then failing to close the stream in the
+same block.
+.P
+With
+\fIsetbuf\fR(),
+allocating a buffer of BUFSIZ bytes does not necessarily imply that all
+of BUFSIZ bytes are used for the buffer area.
+.P
+Since
+.IR errno
+is not required to be unchanged on success, in order to correctly detect
+and possibly recover from errors, applications should use
+\fIsetvbuf\fR()
+instead of
+\fIsetbuf\fR().
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetvbuf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setegid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setegid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6a388ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setegid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETEGID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setegid
+\(em set the effective group ID
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int setegid(gid_t \fIgid\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+If
+.IR gid
+is equal to the real group ID or the saved set-group-ID, or if the
+process has appropriate privileges,
+\fIsetegid\fR()
+shall set the effective group ID of the calling process to
+.IR gid ;
+the real group ID, saved set-group-ID, and any supplementary group IDs
+shall remain unchanged.
+.P
+The
+\fIsetegid\fR()
+function shall not affect the supplementary group list in any way.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned; otherwise, \(mi1 shall
+be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsetegid\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR gid
+argument is invalid and is not supported by the implementation.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The process does not have appropriate privileges and
+.IR gid
+does not match the real group ID or the saved set-group-ID.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Refer to the RATIONALE section in
+.IR "\fIsetuid\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIgetegid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgeteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIseteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetregid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetreuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetuid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setenv.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setenv.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..180025e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setenv.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETENV "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setenv
+\(em add or change environment variable
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+int setenv(const char *\fIenvname\fP, const char *\fIenvval\fP, int \fIoverwrite\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsetenv\fR()
+function shall update or add a variable in the environment of the
+calling process. The
+.IR envname
+argument points to a string containing the name of an environment
+variable to be added or altered. The environment variable shall be set
+to the value to which
+.IR envval
+points. The function shall fail if
+.IR envname
+points to a string which contains an
+.BR '=' 
+character. If the environment variable named by
+.IR envname
+already exists and the value of
+.IR overwrite
+is non-zero, the function shall return success and the environment
+shall be updated. If the environment variable named by
+.IR envname
+already exists and the value of
+.IR overwrite
+is zero, the function shall return success and the environment shall
+remain unchanged.
+.P
+The
+\fIsetenv\fR()
+function shall update the list of pointers to which
+.IR environ
+points.
+.P
+The strings described by
+.IR envname
+and
+.IR envval
+are copied by this function.
+.P
+The
+\fIsetenv\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, zero shall be returned. Otherwise, \(mi1
+shall be returned,
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error, and the environment shall be unchanged.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsetenv\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR envname
+argument points to an empty string or points to a string containing an
+.BR '=' 
+character.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory was available to add a variable or its value to the
+environment.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+See
+\fIexec\fR()
+for restrictions on changing the environment in multi-threaded
+applications.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Unanticipated results may occur if
+\fIsetenv\fR()
+changes the external variable
+.IR environ .
+In particular, if the optional
+.IR envp
+argument to
+\fImain\fR()
+is present, it is not changed, and thus may point to an obsolete copy
+of the environment (as may any other copy of
+.IR environ ).
+However, other than the aforementioned restriction, the standard
+developers intended that the traditional method of walking through
+the environment by way of the
+.IR environ
+pointer must be supported.
+.P
+It was decided that
+\fIsetenv\fR()
+should be required by this version because it addresses a piece of
+missing functionality, and does not impose a significant burden on the
+implementor.
+.P
+There was considerable debate as to whether the System V
+\fIputenv\fR()
+function or the BSD
+\fIsetenv\fR()
+function should be required as a mandatory function. The
+\fIsetenv\fR()
+function was chosen because it permitted the implementation of the
+\fIunsetenv\fR()
+function to delete environmental variables, without specifying an
+additional interface. The
+\fIputenv\fR()
+function is available as part of the XSI option.
+.P
+The standard developers considered requiring that
+\fIsetenv\fR()
+indicate an error when a call to it would result in exceeding
+{ARG_MAX}.
+The requirement was rejected since the condition might be temporary,
+with the application eventually reducing the environment size. The
+ultimate success or failure depends on the size at the time of a call
+to
+.IR exec ,
+which returns an indication of this error condition.
+.P
+See also the RATIONALE section in
+.IR "\fIgetenv\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIgetenv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputenv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunsetenv\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/seteuid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/seteuid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..af9f09e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/seteuid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETEUID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+seteuid
+\(em set effective user ID
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int seteuid(uid_t \fIuid\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+If
+.IR uid
+is equal to the real user ID or the saved set-user-ID, or if the
+process has appropriate privileges,
+\fIseteuid\fR()
+shall set the effective user ID of the calling process to
+.IR uid ;
+the real user ID and saved set-user-ID shall remain unchanged.
+.P
+The
+\fIseteuid\fR()
+function shall not affect the supplementary group list in any way.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned; otherwise, \(mi1 shall
+be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIseteuid\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR uid
+argument is invalid and is not supported by the implementation.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The process does not have appropriate privileges and
+.IR uid
+does not match the real user ID or the saved set-user-ID.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Refer to the RATIONALE section in
+.IR "\fIsetuid\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIgetegid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgeteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetegid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetregid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetreuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetuid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setgid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setgid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9223c8d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setgid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETGID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setgid
+\(em set-group-ID
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int setgid(gid_t \fIgid\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+If the process has appropriate privileges,
+\fIsetgid\fR()
+shall set the real group ID, effective group ID, and the saved
+set-group-ID of the calling process to
+.IR gid .
+.P
+If the process does not have appropriate privileges, but
+.IR gid
+is equal to the real group ID or the saved set-group-ID,
+\fIsetgid\fR()
+shall set the effective group ID to
+.IR gid ;
+the real group ID and saved set-group-ID shall remain unchanged.
+.P
+The
+\fIsetgid\fR()
+function shall not affect the supplementary group list in any way.
+.P
+Any supplementary group IDs of the calling process shall remain
+unchanged.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 is returned. Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be
+returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsetgid\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR gid
+argument is invalid and is not supported by the implementation.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The process does not have appropriate privileges and
+.IR gid
+does not match the real group ID or the saved set-group-ID.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Refer to the RATIONALE section in
+.IR "\fIsetuid\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIgetegid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgeteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetegid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIseteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetregid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetreuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetuid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setgrent.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setgrent.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f993735
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setgrent.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETGRENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setgrent
+\(em reset the group database to the first entry
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <grp.h>
+.P
+void setgrent(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIendgrent\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sethostent.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sethostent.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9e35f60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sethostent.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETHOSTENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sethostent
+\(em network host database functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <netdb.h>
+.P
+void sethostent(int \fIstayopen\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIendhostent\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setitimer.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setitimer.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..59d19b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setitimer.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETITIMER "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setitimer
+\(em set the value of an interval timer
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/time.h>
+.P
+int setitimer(int \fIwhich\fP, const struct itimerval *restrict \fIvalue\fP,
+    struct itimerval *restrict \fIovalue\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIgetitimer\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setjmp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setjmp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ca5b6f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setjmp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETJMP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setjmp
+\(em set jump point for a non-local goto
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <setjmp.h>
+.P
+int setjmp(jmp_buf \fIenv\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+A call to
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+shall save the calling environment in its
+.IR env
+argument for later use by
+\fIlongjmp\fR().
+.P
+It is unspecified whether
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+is a macro or a function. If a macro definition is suppressed in order
+to access an actual function, or a program defines an external
+identifier with the name
+.IR setjmp ,
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+An application shall ensure that an invocation of
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+appears in one of the following contexts only:
+.IP " *" 4
+The entire controlling expression of a selection or iteration
+statement
+.IP " *" 4
+One operand of a relational or equality operator with the other operand
+an integral constant expression, with the resulting expression being
+the entire controlling expression of a selection or iteration statement
+.IP " *" 4
+The operand of a unary
+.BR '!' 
+operator with the resulting expression being the entire controlling
+expression of a selection or iteration
+.IP " *" 4
+The entire expression of an expression statement (possibly cast to
+.BR void )
+.P
+If the invocation appears in any other context, the behavior is
+undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the return is from a direct invocation,
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+shall return 0. If the return is from a call to
+\fIlongjmp\fR(),
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+shall return a non-zero value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+In general,
+\fIsigsetjmp\fR()
+is more useful in dealing with errors and interrupts encountered in a
+low-level subroutine of a program.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIlongjmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigsetjmp\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<setjmp.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setkey.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setkey.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3aa615c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setkey.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETKEY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setkey
+\(em set encoding key
+(\fBCRYPT\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+void setkey(const char *\fIkey\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsetkey\fR()
+function provides access to an implementation-defined encoding
+algorithm. The argument of
+\fIsetkey\fR()
+is an array of length 64 bytes containing only the bytes with numerical
+value of 0 and 1. If this string is divided into groups of 8, the
+low-order bit in each group is ignored; this gives a 56-bit key which
+is used by the algorithm. This is the key that shall be used with the
+algorithm to encode a string
+.IR block
+passed to
+\fIencrypt\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIsetkey\fR()
+function shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful. An application wishing to check for error situations
+should set
+.IR errno
+to 0 before calling
+\fIsetkey\fR().
+If
+.IR errno
+is non-zero on return, an error has occurred.
+.P
+The
+\fIsetkey\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+No values are returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsetkey\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOSYS
+The functionality is not supported on this implementation.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Decoding need not be implemented in all environments. This is related
+to government restrictions in some countries on encryption and
+decryption routines. Historical practice has been to ship a different
+version of the encryption library without the decryption feature in the
+routines supplied. Thus the exported version of
+\fIencrypt\fR()
+does encoding but not decoding.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcrypt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIencrypt\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setlocale.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setlocale.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bb4f94d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setlocale.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,441 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETLOCALE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setlocale
+\(em set program locale
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <locale.h>
+.P
+char *setlocale(int \fIcategory\fP, const char *\fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+function selects the appropriate piece of the global locale, as specified
+by the
+.IR category
+and
+.IR locale
+arguments, and can be used to change or query the entire global locale
+or portions thereof. The value LC_ALL for
+.IR category
+names the entire global locale; other values for
+.IR category
+name only a part of the global locale:
+.IP LC_COLLATE 12
+Affects the behavior of regular expressions and the collation
+functions.
+.IP LC_CTYPE 12
+Affects the behavior of regular expressions, character classification,
+character conversion functions, and wide-character functions.
+.IP LC_MESSAGES 12
+Affects the affirmative and negative response expressions returned by
+\fInl_langinfo\fR()
+and the way message catalogs are located. It may also affect the
+behavior of functions that return or write message strings.
+.IP LC_MONETARY 12
+Affects the behavior of functions that handle monetary values.
+.IP LC_NUMERIC 12
+Affects the behavior of functions that handle numeric values.
+.IP LC_TIME 12
+Affects the behavior of the time conversion functions.
+.P
+The
+.IR locale
+argument is a pointer to a character string containing the required
+setting of
+.IR category .
+The contents of this string are implementation-defined. In addition,
+the following preset values of
+.IR locale
+are defined for all settings of
+.IR category :
+.IP "\&\(dqPOSIX\(dq" 12
+Specifies the minimal environment for C-language translation called the
+POSIX locale. The POSIX locale is the default global locale at entry to
+\fImain\fR().
+.IP "\&\(dqC\(dq" 12
+Equivalent to
+.BR \(dqPOSIX\(dq .
+.IP "\&\(dq\|\(dq" 12
+Specifies an implementation-defined native environment.
+The determination of the name of the new locale for the specified
+category depends on the value of the associated environment
+variables,
+.IR LC_*
+and
+.IR LANG ;
+see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale"
+and
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables".
+.IP "A\ null\ pointer" 12
+Directs
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+to query the current global locale setting and return the name
+of the locale if
+.IR category
+is not LC_ALL, or a string which encodes the locale name(s) for all of
+the individual categories if
+.IR category
+is LC_ALL.
+.P
+Setting all of the categories of the global locale is similar to
+successively setting each individual category of the global locale, except
+that all error checking is done before any actions are performed. To
+set all the categories of the global locale,
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+can be invoked as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In this case,
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+shall first verify that the values of all the environment variables it
+needs according to the precedence rules (described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables")
+indicate supported locales. If the value of any of these environment
+variable searches yields a locale that is not supported (and non-null),
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+shall return a null pointer and the global locale shall not be changed. If
+all environment variables name supported locales,
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+shall proceed as if it had been called for each category, using the
+appropriate value from the associated environment variable or from the
+implementation-defined default if there is no such value.
+.P
+The global locale established using
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+shall only be used in threads for which no current locale has been
+set using
+\fIuselocale\fR()
+or whose current locale has been set to the global locale using
+.IR uselocale (LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE) .
+.P
+The implementation shall behave as if no function defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 calls
+\fIsetlocale\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+shall return the string associated with the specified category for the
+new locale. Otherwise,
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+shall return a null pointer and the global locale shall not be changed.
+.P
+A null pointer for
+.IR locale
+shall cause
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+to return a pointer to the string associated with the specified
+.IR category
+for the current global locale. The global locale shall not be changed.
+.P
+The string returned by
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+is such that a subsequent call with that string and its associated
+.IR category
+shall restore that part of the global locale. The application shall
+not modify the string returned.
+The returned string pointer might be invalidated or
+the string content might be overwritten by a subsequent call to
+\fIsetlocale\fR().
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The following code illustrates how a program can initialize the
+international environment for one language, while selectively modifying
+the global locale such that regular expressions and string operations
+can be applied to text recorded in a different language:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+setlocale(LC_ALL, "De");
+setlocale(LC_COLLATE, "Fr@dict");
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Internationalized programs can initiate language operation according
+to environment variable settings (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 8.2" ", " "Internationalization Variables")
+by calling
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Changing the setting of
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+has no effect on catalogs that have already been opened by calls to
+\fIcatopen\fR().
+.P
+In order to make use of different locale settings while multiple
+threads are running, applications should use
+\fIuselocale\fR()
+in preference to
+\fIsetlocale\fR().
+.SH RATIONALE
+References to the international environment or locale in the following
+text relate to the global locale for the process. This can be overridden
+for individual threads using
+\fIuselocale\fR().
+.P
+The ISO\ C standard
+defines a collection of functions to support internationalization.
+One of the most significant aspects of these functions is a facility
+to set and query the \fIinternational environment\fP.
+The international environment is a repository of information that
+affects the behavior of certain functionality, namely:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Character handling
+.IP " 2." 4
+Collating
+.IP " 3." 4
+Date/time formatting
+.IP " 4." 4
+Numeric editing
+.IP " 5." 4
+Monetary formatting
+.IP " 6." 4
+Messaging
+.P
+The
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+function provides the application developer with the ability to set all
+or portions, called \fIcategories\fP, of the international environment.
+These categories correspond to the areas of functionality mentioned
+above. The syntax for
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+is as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+char *setlocale(int \fIcategory\fP, const char *\fIlocale\fP);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR category
+is the name of one of following categories, namely:
+.sp
+.RS
+LC_COLLATE
+LC_CTYPE
+LC_MESSAGES
+LC_MONETARY
+LC_NUMERIC
+LC_TIME
+.RE
+.P
+In addition, a special value called LC_ALL
+directs
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+to set all categories.
+.P
+There are two primary uses of
+\fIsetlocale\fR():
+.IP " 1." 4
+Querying the international environment to find out what it is set to
+.IP " 2." 4
+Setting the international environment, or
+.IR locale ,
+to a specific value
+.P
+The behavior of
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+in these two areas is described below. Since it is difficult to
+describe the behavior in words, examples are used to illustrate the
+behavior of specific uses.
+.P
+To query the international environment,
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+is invoked with a specific category and the null pointer as the
+locale. The null pointer is a special directive to
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+that tells it to query rather than set the international environment.
+The following syntax is used to query the name of the international
+environment:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+setlocale({LC_ALL, LC_COLLATE, LC_CTYPE, LC_MESSAGES, LC_MONETARY, \e
+    LC_NUMERIC, LC_TIME},(char *) NULL);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+function shall return the string corresponding to the current
+international environment. This value may be used by a subsequent call to
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+to reset the international environment to this value. However, it
+should be noted that the return value from
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+may be a pointer to a static area within the function and is not
+guaranteed to remain unchanged (that is, it may be modified by a
+subsequent call to
+\fIsetlocale\fR()).
+Therefore, if the purpose of calling
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+is to save the value of the current international environment so it can
+be changed and reset later, the return value should be copied to an
+array of
+.BR char
+in the calling program.
+.P
+There are three ways to set the international environment with
+\fIsetlocale\fR():
+.IP "\fIsetlocale\fP(\fIcategory\fP,\ \fIstring\fP)" 6
+.br
+This usage sets a specific
+.IR category
+in the international environment to a specific value corresponding to
+the value of the
+.IR string .
+A specific example is provided below:
+.RS 6 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+setlocale(LC_ALL, "fr_FR.ISO-8859-1");
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+In this example, all categories of the international environment are
+set to the locale corresponding to the string
+.BR \(dqfr_FR.ISO-8859-1\(dq ,
+or to the French language as spoken in France using the ISO/IEC\ 8859\(hy1:\|1998 standard codeset.
+.P
+If the string does not correspond to a valid locale,
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+shall return a null pointer and the international environment is not
+changed. Otherwise,
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+shall return the name of the locale just set.
+.RE
+.IP "\&\fIsetlocale\fP(\fIcategory\fP,\ \(dqC\(dq)" 6
+.br
+The ISO\ C standard states that one locale must exist on all conforming
+implementations. The name of the locale is C and corresponds to a
+minimal international environment needed to support the C programming
+language.
+.IP "\&\fIsetlocale\fP(\fIcategory\fP,\ \(dq\^\(dq)" 6
+.br
+This sets a specific category to an implementation-defined default.
+This corresponds to the value of the environment variables.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "\fIcatopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfprintf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfscanf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisblank\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiscntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIislower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIispunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswalnum\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswblank\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswcntrl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswctype\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswgraph\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswlower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswprint\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswpunct\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisxdigit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlocaleconv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImblen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbstowcs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbtowc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fInl_langinfo\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIperror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpsiginfo\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrcoll\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrerror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrfmon\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrsignal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrtod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrxfrm\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItolower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItoupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItowlower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItowupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcscoll\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcstod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcstombs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcsxfrm\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwctomb\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "\fB<langinfo.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setlogmask.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setlogmask.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8968918
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setlogmask.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETLOGMASK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setlogmask
+\(em set the log priority mask
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <syslog.h>
+.P
+int setlogmask(int \fImaskpri\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIcloselog\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setnetent.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setnetent.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a85c2a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setnetent.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETNETENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setnetent \(em network database function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <netdb.h>
+.P
+void setnetent(int \fIstayopen\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIendnetent\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setpgid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setpgid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c50508c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setpgid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,201 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETPGID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setpgid
+\(em set process group ID for job control
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int setpgid(pid_t \fIpid\fP, pid_t \fIpgid\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsetpgid\fR()
+function shall either join an existing process group or create a
+new process group within the session of the calling process.
+.P
+The process group ID of a session leader shall not change.
+.P
+Upon successful completion, the process group ID of the process with
+a process ID that matches
+.IR pid
+shall be set to
+.IR pgid .
+.P
+As a special case, if
+.IR pid
+is 0, the process ID of the calling process shall be used. Also, if
+.IR pgid
+is 0, the process ID of the indicated process shall be used.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsetpgid\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsetpgid\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+The value of the
+.IR pid
+argument matches the process ID of a child process of the calling
+process and the child process has successfully executed one of the
+.IR exec
+functions.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR pgid
+argument is less than 0, or is not a value supported by the
+implementation.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The process indicated by the
+.IR pid
+argument is a session leader.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The value of the
+.IR pid
+argument matches the process ID of a child process of the calling
+process and the child process is not in the same session as the calling
+process.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The value of the
+.IR pgid
+argument is valid but does not match the process ID of the process
+indicated by the
+.IR pid
+argument and there is no process with a process group ID that matches
+the value of the
+.IR pgid
+argument in the same session as the calling process.
+.TP
+.BR ESRCH
+The value of the
+.IR pid
+argument does not match the process ID of the calling process or of a
+child process of the calling process.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIsetpgid\fR()
+function shall group processes together for the purpose of
+signaling, placement in foreground or background,
+and other job control actions.
+.P
+The
+\fIsetpgid\fR()
+function is similar to the
+\fIsetpgrp\fR()
+function of 4.2 BSD, except that 4.2 BSD allowed the specified new process
+group to assume any value. This presents certain security problems and
+is more
+flexible than necessary to support job control.
+.P
+To provide tighter security,
+\fIsetpgid\fR()
+only allows the calling process to join a process group already in use
+inside its session or create a new process group
+whose process group ID was equal to its process ID.
+.P
+When a job control shell spawns a new job, the processes in the
+job must be placed into a new process group via
+\fIsetpgid\fR().
+There are two timing constraints involved in this action:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The new process must be placed in the new process group before the
+appropriate program is launched via one of the
+.IR exec
+functions.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The new process must be placed in the new process group before the
+shell can correctly send signals to the new process group.
+.P
+To address these constraints, the following actions are performed. The
+new processes call
+\fIsetpgid\fR()
+to alter their own process groups after
+\fIfork\fR()
+but before
+.IR exec .
+This satisfies the first constraint. Under 4.3 BSD, the second
+constraint is satisfied by the synchronization property of
+.IR vfork (\|);
+that is, the shell is suspended until the child has completed the
+.IR exec ,
+thus ensuring that the child has completed the
+\fIsetpgid\fR().
+A new version of
+\fIfork\fR()
+with this same synchronization property was considered, but it was
+decided instead to merely allow the parent shell process to adjust the
+process group of its child processes via
+\fIsetpgid\fR().
+Both timing constraints are now satisfied by having both the parent
+shell and the child attempt to adjust the process group of the child
+process; it does not matter which succeeds first.
+.P
+Since it would be confusing to an application to have its process
+group change after it began executing (that is, after
+.IR exec ),
+and because the child process would already have adjusted its process
+group before this, the
+.BR [EACCES] 
+error was added to disallow this.
+.P
+One non-obvious use of
+\fIsetpgid\fR()
+is to allow a job control shell to return itself to its original
+process group (the one in effect when the job control shell was
+executed). A job control shell does this before returning control back
+to its parent when it is terminating or suspending itself as a way of
+restoring its job control ``state'' back to what its parent would
+expect. (Note that the original process group of the job control shell
+typically matches the process group of its parent, but this is not
+necessarily always the case.)
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIgetpgrp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItcsetpgrp\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setpgrp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setpgrp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..29367c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setpgrp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETPGRP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setpgrp
+\(em set the process group ID
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+pid_t setpgrp(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+If the calling process is not already a session leader,
+\fIsetpgrp\fR()
+sets the process group ID of the calling process to the process ID of
+the calling process. If
+\fIsetpgrp\fR()
+creates a new session, then the new session has no controlling
+terminal.
+.P
+The
+\fIsetpgrp\fR()
+function has no effect when the calling process is a session leader.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon completion,
+\fIsetpgrp\fR()
+shall return the process group ID.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+It is unspecified whether this function behaves as
+.IR setpgid (0,0)
+or
+\fIsetsid\fR()
+unless the process is already a session leader. Therefore, applications
+are encouraged to use
+\fIsetpgid\fR()
+or
+\fIsetsid\fR()
+as appropriate.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIsetpgrp\fR()
+function may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetpid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetsid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetpgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setpriority.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setpriority.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d7e1b59
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setpriority.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETPRIORITY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setpriority
+\(em set the nice value
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/resource.h>
+.P
+int setpriority(int \fIwhich\fP, id_t \fIwho\fP, int \fInice\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIgetpriority\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setprotoent.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setprotoent.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..53c5e7a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setprotoent.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETPROTOENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setprotoent
+\(em network protocol database functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <netdb.h>
+.P
+void setprotoent(int \fIstayopen\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIendprotoent\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setpwent.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setpwent.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..958cbe1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setpwent.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETPWENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setpwent
+\(em user database function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <pwd.h>
+.P
+void setpwent(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIendpwent\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setregid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setregid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..29fe9e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setregid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETREGID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setregid
+\(em set real and effective group IDs
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int setregid(gid_t \fIrgid\fP, gid_t \fIegid\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsetregid\fR()
+function shall set the real and effective group IDs of the calling
+process.
+.P
+If
+.IR rgid
+is \(mi1, the real group ID shall not be changed; if
+.IR egid
+is \(mi1, the effective group ID shall not be changed.
+.P
+The real and effective group IDs may be set to different values in the
+same call.
+.P
+Only a process with appropriate privileges can set the real group ID
+and the effective group ID to any valid value.
+.P
+A non-privileged process can set either the real group ID to the saved
+set-group-ID from one of the
+.IR exec
+family of functions, or the effective group ID to the saved
+set-group-ID or the real group ID.
+.P
+If the real group ID is being set (\c
+.IR rgid
+is not \(mi1), or the effective group ID is being set to a value not
+equal to the real group ID, then the saved set-group-ID of the current
+process shall be set equal to the new effective group ID.
+.P
+Any supplementary group IDs of the calling process remain unchanged.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned. Otherwise, \(mi1
+shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error, and neither of the group IDs are changed.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsetregid\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR rgid
+or
+.IR egid
+argument is invalid or out-of-range.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The process does not have appropriate privileges and a change other
+than changing the real group ID to the saved set-group-ID, or changing
+the effective group ID to the real group ID or the saved set-group-ID,
+was requested.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If a non-privileged set-group-ID process sets its effective group ID to
+its real group ID, it can only set its effective group ID back to the
+previous value if
+.IR rgid
+was \(mi1 in the
+\fIsetregid\fR()
+call, since the saved-group-ID is not changed in that case. If
+.IR rgid
+was equal to the real group ID in the
+\fIsetregid\fR()
+call, then the saved set-group-ID will also have been changed to the
+real user ID.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Earlier versions of this standard did not specify whether the saved
+set-group-ID was affected by
+\fIsetregid\fR()
+calls. This version specifies common existing practice that constitutes an
+important security feature. The ability to set both the effective group
+ID and saved set-group-ID to be the same as the real group ID means that
+any security weakness in code that is executed after that point cannot
+result in malicious code being executed with the previous effective
+group ID. Privileged applications could already do this using just
+\fIsetgid\fR(),
+but for non-privileged applications the only standard method available
+is to use this feature of
+\fIsetregid\fR().
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIgetegid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgeteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetegid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIseteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetreuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetuid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setreuid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setreuid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6d7982f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setreuid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETREUID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setreuid
+\(em set real and effective user IDs
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int setreuid(uid_t \fIruid\fP, uid_t \fIeuid\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsetreuid\fR()
+function shall set the real and effective user IDs of the current
+process to the values specified by the
+.IR ruid
+and
+.IR euid
+arguments. If
+.IR ruid
+or
+.IR euid
+is \(mi1, the corresponding effective or real user ID of the current
+process shall be left unchanged.
+.P
+A process with appropriate privileges can set either ID to any value.
+An unprivileged process can only set the effective user ID if the
+.IR euid
+argument is equal to either the real, effective, or saved user ID of
+the process.
+.P
+If the real user ID is being set (\c
+.IR ruid
+is not \(mi1), or the effective user ID is being set to a value not
+equal to the real user ID, then the saved set-user-ID of the current
+process shall be set equal to the new effective user ID.
+.P
+It is unspecified whether a process without appropriate privileges is
+permitted to change the real user ID to match the current effective user
+ID or saved set-user-ID of the process.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned. Otherwise, \(mi1
+shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsetreuid\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR ruid
+or
+.IR euid
+argument is invalid or out-of-range.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The current process does not have appropriate privileges, and either an
+attempt was made to change the effective user ID to a value other than
+the real user ID or the saved set-user-ID or an attempt was made to
+change the real user ID to a value not permitted by the
+implementation.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Setting the Effective User ID to the Real User ID"
+.P
+The following example sets the effective user ID of the calling process
+to the real user ID, so that files created later will be owned by the
+current user. It also sets the saved set-user-ID to the real user ID,
+so any future attempt to set the effective user ID back to its previous
+value will fail.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+\&...
+setreuid(getuid(), getuid());
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Earlier versions of this standard did not specify whether the saved
+set-user-ID was affected by
+\fIsetreuid\fR()
+calls. This version specifies common existing practice that constitutes
+an important security feature. The ability to set both the effective user
+ID and saved set-user-ID to be the same as the real user ID means that
+any security weakness in code that is executed after that point cannot
+result in malicious code being executed with the previous effective user
+ID. Privileged applications could already do this using just
+\fIsetuid\fR(),
+but for non-privileged applications the only standard method available
+is to use this feature of
+\fIsetreuid\fR().
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetegid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgeteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetegid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIseteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetregid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetuid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setrlimit.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setrlimit.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..00c2a17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setrlimit.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETRLIMIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setrlimit
+\(em control maximum resource consumption
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/resource.h>
+.P
+int setrlimit(int \fIresource\fP, const struct rlimit *\fIrlp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIgetrlimit\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setservent.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setservent.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..df868c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setservent.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETSERVENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setservent
+\(em network services database functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <netdb.h>
+.P
+void setservent(int \fIstayopen\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIendservent\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setsid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setsid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4eb4e0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setsid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETSID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setsid
+\(em create session and set process group ID
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+pid_t setsid(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsetsid\fR()
+function shall create a new session, if the calling process is not a
+process group leader. Upon return the calling process shall be the
+session leader of this new session, shall be the process group leader
+of a new process group, and shall have no controlling terminal. The
+process group ID of the calling process shall be set equal to the
+process ID of the calling process. The calling process shall be the
+only process in the new process group and the only process in the new
+session.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsetsid\fR()
+shall return the value of the new process group ID of the calling
+process. Otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsetsid\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The calling process is already a process group leader, or the process
+group ID of a process other than the calling process matches the
+process ID of the calling process.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIsetsid\fR()
+function is similar to the
+\fIsetpgrp\fR()
+function of System V.
+System V, without job control, groups processes into
+process groups and creates new process groups via
+\fIsetpgrp\fR();
+only one process group may be part of a login session.
+.P
+Job control allows multiple process groups within a login session. In
+order to limit job control actions so that they can only affect
+processes in the same login session, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 adds the concept of a
+session that is created via
+\fIsetsid\fR().
+The
+\fIsetsid\fR()
+function also creates the initial process group contained in the
+session. Additional process groups can be created via the
+\fIsetpgid\fR()
+function. A System V process group would correspond to a POSIX System
+Interfaces session containing a single POSIX process group. Note that
+this function requires that the calling process not be a process group
+leader. The usual way to ensure this is true is to create a new process
+with
+\fIfork\fR()
+and have it call
+\fIsetsid\fR().
+The
+\fIfork\fR()
+function guarantees that the process ID of the new process does not
+match any existing process group ID.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetsid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetpgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetpgrp\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setsockopt.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setsockopt.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cff6e9f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setsockopt.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,165 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETSOCKOPT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setsockopt
+\(em set the socket options
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+.P
+int setsockopt(int \fIsocket\fP, int \fIlevel\fP, int \fIoption_name\fP,
+    const void *\fIoption_value\fP, socklen_t \fIoption_len\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsetsockopt\fR()
+function shall set the option specified by the
+.IR option_name
+argument, at the protocol level specified by the
+.IR level
+argument, to the value pointed to by the
+.IR option_value
+argument for the socket associated with the file descriptor specified
+by the
+.IR socket
+argument.
+.P
+The
+.IR level
+argument specifies the protocol level at which the option resides. To
+set options at the socket level, specify the
+.IR level
+argument as SOL_SOCKET. To set options at other levels, supply the
+appropriate
+.IR level
+identifier for the protocol controlling the option. For example, to
+indicate that an option is interpreted by the TCP (Transport Control
+Protocol), set
+.IR level
+to IPPROTO_TCP as defined in the
+.IR <netinet/in.h> 
+header.
+.P
+The
+.IR option_name
+argument specifies a single option to set. It can be one of the
+socket-level options defined in
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+and described in
+.IR "Section 2.10.16" ", " "Use of Options".
+If
+.IR option_name
+is equal to SO_RCVTIMEO or SO_SNDTIMEO and the implementation supports
+setting the option, it is unspecified whether the
+.BR "struct timeval"
+pointed to by
+.IR option_value
+is stored as provided by this function or is rounded up to align with
+the resolution of the clock being used. If
+\fIsetsockopt\fR()
+is called with
+.IR option_name
+equal to SO_ACCEPTCONN, SO_ERROR, or SO_TYPE, the behavior is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsetsockopt\fR()
+shall return 0. Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsetsockopt\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR socket
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EDOM
+The send and receive timeout values are too big to fit into the timeout
+fields in the socket structure.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The specified option is invalid at the specified socket level or the
+socket has been shut down.
+.TP
+.BR EISCONN
+The socket is already connected, and a specified option cannot be set
+while the socket is connected.
+.TP
+.BR ENOPROTOOPT
+.br
+The option is not supported by the protocol.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSOCK
+The
+.IR socket
+argument does not refer to a socket.
+.P
+The
+\fIsetsockopt\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+There was insufficient memory available for the operation to complete.
+.TP
+.BR ENOBUFS
+Insufficient resources are available in the system to complete the
+call.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIsetsockopt\fR()
+function provides an application program with the means to control
+socket behavior. An application program can use
+\fIsetsockopt\fR()
+to allocate buffer space, control timeouts, or permit socket data
+broadcasts. The
+.IR <sys/socket.h> 
+header defines the socket-level options available to
+\fIsetsockopt\fR().
+.P
+Options may exist at multiple protocol levels. The SO_ options are
+always present at the uppermost socket level.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.10" ", " "Sockets",
+.IR "\fIbind\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIendprotoent\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetsockopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<netinet_in.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setstate.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setstate.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c3e0fae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setstate.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETSTATE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setstate
+\(em switch pseudo-random number generator state arrays
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+char *setstate(char *\fIstate\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIinitstate\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setuid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setuid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4bdd011
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setuid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,255 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETUID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setuid
+\(em set user ID
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int setuid(uid_t \fIuid\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+If the process has appropriate privileges,
+\fIsetuid\fR()
+shall set the real user ID, effective user ID, and the saved
+set-user-ID of the calling process to
+.IR uid .
+.P
+If the process does not have appropriate privileges, but
+.IR uid
+is equal to the real user ID or the saved set-user-ID,
+\fIsetuid\fR()
+shall set the effective user ID to
+.IR uid ;
+the real user ID and saved set-user-ID shall remain unchanged.
+.P
+The
+\fIsetuid\fR()
+function shall not affect the supplementary group list in any way.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned. Otherwise, \(mi1
+shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsetuid\fR()
+function shall fail, return \(mi1, and set
+.IR errno
+to the corresponding value if one or more of the following are true:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR uid
+argument is invalid and not supported by the implementation.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The process does not have appropriate privileges and
+.IR uid
+does not match the real user ID or the saved set-user-ID.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The various behaviors of the
+\fIsetuid\fR()
+and
+\fIsetgid\fR()
+functions when called by non-privileged processes reflect the behavior
+of different historical implementations. For portability, it is
+recommended that new non-privileged applications use the
+\fIseteuid\fR()
+and
+\fIsetegid\fR()
+functions instead.
+.P
+The saved set-user-ID capability allows a program to regain the
+effective user ID established at the last
+.IR exec
+call. Similarly, the saved set-group-ID capability allows a program to
+regain the effective group ID established at the last
+.IR exec
+call. These capabilities are derived from System V. Without them, a
+program might have to run as superuser in order to perform the same
+functions, because superuser can write on the user's files. This is a
+problem because such a program can write on any user's files, and so
+must be carefully written to emulate the permissions of the calling
+process properly. In System V, these capabilities have traditionally
+been implemented only via the
+\fIsetuid\fR()
+and
+\fIsetgid\fR()
+functions for non-privileged processes. The fact that the behavior of
+those functions was different for privileged processes made them
+difficult to use. The POSIX.1\(hy1990 standard defined the
+\fIsetuid\fR()
+function to behave differently for privileged and unprivileged users.
+When the caller had appropriate privileges, the function set the real
+user ID, effective user ID, and saved set-user ID of the calling process
+on implementations that supported it. When the caller did not have
+appropriate privileges, the function set only the effective user ID,
+subject to permission checks. The former use is generally needed for
+utilities like
+.IR login
+and
+.IR su ,
+which are not conforming applications and thus outside the scope of
+POSIX.1\(hy2008. These utilities wish to change the user ID irrevocably to a new
+value, generally that of an unprivileged user. The latter use is needed
+for conforming applications that are installed with the set-user-ID bit
+and need to perform operations using the real user ID.
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 augments the latter functionality with a mandatory feature named
+_POSIX_SAVED_IDS. This feature permits a set-user-ID application to
+switch its effective user ID back and forth between the values of its
+.IR exec -time
+real user ID and effective user ID. Unfortunately, the POSIX.1\(hy1990 standard did not
+permit a conforming application using this feature to work properly when
+it happened to be executed with (implementation-defined)
+appropriate privileges. Furthermore, the application did not even have a
+means to tell whether it had this privilege. Since the saved
+set-user-ID feature is quite desirable for applications, as evidenced
+by the fact that NIST required it in FIPS 151\(hy2, it has been mandated by
+POSIX.1\(hy2008. However, there are implementors who have been reluctant to
+support it given the limitation described above.
+.P
+The 4.3BSD system handles the problem by supporting separate
+functions:
+\fIsetuid\fR()
+(which always sets both the real and effective user IDs, like
+\fIsetuid\fR()
+in POSIX.1\(hy2008 for privileged users), and
+\fIseteuid\fR()
+(which always sets just the effective user ID, like
+\fIsetuid\fR()
+in POSIX.1\(hy2008 for non-privileged users). This separation of functionality
+into distinct functions seems desirable. 4.3BSD does not support the
+saved set-user-ID feature. It supports similar functionality of
+switching the effective user ID back and forth via
+\fIsetreuid\fR(),
+which permits reversing the real and effective user IDs. This model
+seems less desirable than the saved set-user-ID because the real user
+ID changes as a side-effect. The current 4.4BSD includes saved
+effective IDs and uses them for
+\fIseteuid\fR()
+and
+\fIsetegid\fR()
+as described above. The
+\fIsetreuid\fR()
+and
+\fIsetregid\fR()
+functions will be deprecated or removed.
+.P
+The solution here is:
+.IP " *" 4
+Require that all implementations support the functionality of the saved
+set-user-ID, which is set by the
+.IR exec
+functions and by privileged calls to
+\fIsetuid\fR().
+.IP " *" 4
+Add the
+\fIseteuid\fR()
+and
+\fIsetegid\fR()
+functions as portable alternatives to
+\fIsetuid\fR()
+and
+\fIsetgid\fR()
+for non-privileged and privileged processes.
+.P
+Historical systems have provided two mechanisms for a set-user-ID
+process to change its effective user ID to be the same as its real user
+ID in such a way that it could return to the original effective user
+ID: the use of the
+\fIsetuid\fR()
+function in the presence of a saved set-user-ID, or the use of the BSD
+\fIsetreuid\fR()
+function, which was able to swap the real and effective user IDs. The
+changes included in POSIX.1\(hy2008 provide a new mechanism using
+\fIseteuid\fR()
+in conjunction with a saved set-user-ID. Thus, all implementations with
+the new
+\fIseteuid\fR()
+mechanism will have a saved set-user-ID for each process, and most of
+the behavior controlled by _POSIX_SAVED_IDS has been changed
+to agree with the case where the option was defined. The
+\fIkill\fR()
+function is an exception. Implementors of the new
+\fIseteuid\fR()
+mechanism will generally be required to maintain compatibility with the
+older mechanisms previously supported by their systems. However,
+compatibility with this use of
+\fIsetreuid\fR()
+and with the _POSIX_SAVED_IDS behavior of
+\fIkill\fR()
+is unfortunately complicated. If an implementation with a saved
+set-user-ID allows a process to use
+\fIsetreuid\fR()
+to swap its real and effective user IDs, but were to leave the saved
+set-user-ID unmodified, the process would then have an effective user
+ID equal to the original real user ID, and both real and saved
+set-user-ID would be equal to the original effective user ID. In that
+state, the real user would be unable to kill the process, even though
+the effective user ID of the process matches that of the real user, if
+the
+\fIkill\fR()
+behavior of _POSIX_SAVED_IDS was used. This is obviously not
+acceptable. The alternative choice, which is used in at least one
+implementation, is to change the saved set-user-ID to the effective
+user ID during most calls to
+\fIsetreuid\fR().
+The standard developers considered that alternative to be less correct
+than the retention of the old behavior of
+\fIkill\fR()
+in such systems. Current conforming applications shall accommodate
+either behavior from
+\fIkill\fR(),
+and there appears to be no strong reason for
+\fIkill\fR()
+to check the saved set-user-ID rather than the effective user ID.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIgetegid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgeteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetegid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIseteuid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetregid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetreuid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setutxent.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setutxent.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d0cc57e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setutxent.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETUTXENT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setutxent
+\(em reset the user accounting database to the first entry
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <utmpx.h>
+.P
+void setutxent(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIendutxent\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setvbuf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setvbuf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ab401c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/setvbuf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SETVBUF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+setvbuf
+\(em assign buffering to a stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int setvbuf(FILE *restrict \fIstream\fP, char *restrict \fIbuf\fP, int \fItype\fP,
+    size_t \fIsize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIsetvbuf\fR()
+function may be used after the stream pointed to by
+.IR stream
+is associated with an open file but before any other operation
+(other than an unsuccessful call to
+\fIsetvbuf\fR())
+is performed on the stream. The argument
+.IR type
+determines how
+.IR stream
+shall be buffered, as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+{_IOFBF} shall cause input/output to be fully buffered.
+.IP " *" 4
+{_IOLBF} shall cause input/output to be line buffered.
+.IP " *" 4
+{_IONBF} shall cause input/output to be unbuffered.
+.P
+If
+.IR buf
+is not a null pointer, the array it points to may be used instead of a
+buffer allocated by
+\fIsetvbuf\fR()
+and the argument
+.IR size
+specifies the size of the array; otherwise,
+.IR size
+may determine the size of a buffer allocated by the
+\fIsetvbuf\fR()
+function. The contents of the array at any time are unspecified.
+.P
+For information about streams, see
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams".
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsetvbuf\fR()
+shall return 0. Otherwise, it shall return a non-zero value if an
+invalid value is given for
+.IR type
+or if the request cannot be honored,
+and may set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsetvbuf\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The file descriptor underlying
+.IR stream
+is not valid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+A common source of error is allocating buffer space as an ``automatic''
+variable in a code block, and then failing to close the stream in the
+same block.
+.P
+With
+\fIsetvbuf\fR(),
+allocating a buffer of
+.IR size
+bytes does not necessarily imply that all of
+.IR size
+bytes are used for the buffer area.
+.P
+Applications should note that many implementations only provide line
+buffering on input from terminal devices.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetbuf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/shm_open.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/shm_open.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7857174
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/shm_open.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,400 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SHM_OPEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+shm_open
+\(em open a shared memory object
+(\fBREALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/mman.h>
+.P
+int shm_open(const char *\fIname\fP, int \fIoflag\fP, mode_t \fImode\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+function shall establish a connection between a shared memory object
+and a file descriptor. It shall create an open file description that
+refers to the shared memory object and a file descriptor that refers to
+that open file description. The file descriptor is used by other
+functions to refer to that shared memory object. The
+.IR name
+argument points to a string naming a shared memory object. It is
+unspecified whether the name appears in the file system and is visible
+to other functions that take pathnames as arguments. The
+.IR name
+argument conforms to the construction rules for a pathname, except that
+the interpretation of
+<slash>
+characters other than the leading
+<slash>
+character in
+.IR name
+is implementation-defined, and that the length limits for the
+.IR name
+argument are implementation-defined and need not be the same as the
+pathname limits
+{PATH_MAX}
+and
+{NAME_MAX}.
+If
+.IR name
+begins with the
+<slash>
+character, then processes calling
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+with the same value of
+.IR name
+refer to the same shared memory object, as long as that name has not
+been removed. If
+.IR name
+does not begin with the
+<slash>
+character, the effect is implementation-defined.
+.P
+If successful,
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+shall return a file descriptor for the shared memory object that is the
+lowest numbered file descriptor not currently open for that process.
+The open file description is new, and therefore the file descriptor
+does not share it with any other processes. It is unspecified whether
+the file offset is set. The FD_CLOEXEC
+file descriptor flag associated with the new file descriptor is set.
+.P
+The file status flags and file access modes of the open file
+description are according to the value of
+.IR oflag .
+The
+.IR oflag
+argument is the bitwise-inclusive OR of the following flags defined in
+the
+.IR <fcntl.h> 
+header. Applications specify exactly one of the first two values
+(access modes) below in the value of
+.IR oflag :
+.IP O_RDONLY 12
+Open for read access only.
+.IP O_RDWR 12
+Open for read or write access.
+.P
+Any combination of the remaining flags may be specified in the value of
+.IR oflag :
+.IP O_CREAT 12
+If the shared memory object exists, this flag has no effect, except
+as noted under O_EXCL below. Otherwise, the shared memory object is
+created. The user ID of the shared memory object shall be set to the
+effective user ID of the process. The group ID of the shared memory object
+shall be set to the effective group ID of the process; however, if the
+.IR name
+argument is visible in the file system, the group ID may be set to the
+group ID of the containing directory. The permission bits of the shared
+memory object shall be set to the value of the
+.IR mode
+argument except those set in the file mode creation mask of the
+process. When bits in
+.IR mode
+other than the file permission bits are set, the effect is
+unspecified. The
+.IR mode
+argument does not affect whether the shared memory object is opened for
+reading, for writing, or for both. The shared memory object has a size
+of zero.
+.IP O_EXCL 12
+If O_EXCL and O_CREAT are set,
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+fails if the shared memory object exists. The check for the existence
+of the shared memory object and the creation of the object if it does
+not exist is atomic with respect to other processes executing
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+naming the same shared memory object with O_EXCL and O_CREAT set. If
+O_EXCL is set and O_CREAT is not set, the result is undefined.
+.IP O_TRUNC 12
+If the shared memory object exists, and it is successfully opened
+O_RDWR, the object shall be truncated to zero length and the mode and
+owner shall be unchanged by this function call. The result of using
+O_TRUNC with O_RDONLY is undefined.
+.P
+When a shared memory object is created, the state of the shared memory
+object, including all data associated with the shared memory object,
+persists until the shared memory object is unlinked and all other
+references are gone. It is unspecified whether the name and shared
+memory object state remain valid after a system reboot.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+function shall return a non-negative integer representing the lowest
+numbered unused file descriptor. Otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and
+set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+The shared memory object exists and the permissions specified by
+.IR oflag
+are denied, or the shared memory object does not exist and permission
+to create the shared memory object is denied, or O_TRUNC is specified
+and write permission is denied.
+.TP
+.BR EEXIST
+O_CREAT and O_EXCL are set and
+the named shared memory object already exists.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+operation was interrupted by a signal.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+operation is not supported for the given name.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+Too many shared memory objects are currently open in the system.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+O_CREAT is not set and the named shared memory object does not exist.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+There is insufficient space for the creation of the new shared memory
+object.
+.P
+The
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of the
+.IR name
+argument exceeds
+{_POSIX_PATH_MAX}
+on systems that do not support the XSI option
+or exceeds
+{_XOPEN_PATH_MAX}
+on XSI systems,
+or has a pathname component that is longer than
+{_POSIX_NAME_MAX}
+on systems that do not support the XSI option
+or longer than
+{_XOPEN_NAME_MAX}
+on XSI systems.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Creating and Mapping a Shared Memory Object"
+.P
+The following code segment demonstrates the use of
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+to create a shared memory object which is then sized using
+\fIftruncate\fR()
+before being mapped into the process address space using
+\fImmap\fR():
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <sys/mman.h>
+\&...
+.P
+#define MAX_LEN 10000
+struct region {        /* Defines "structure" of shared memory */
+    int len;
+    char buf[MAX_LEN];
+};
+struct region *rptr;
+int fd;
+.P
+/* Create shared memory object and set its size */
+.P
+fd = shm_open("/myregion", O_CREAT | O_RDWR, S_IRUSR | S_IWUSR);
+if (fd == \(mi1)
+    /* Handle error */;
+.P
+if (ftruncate(fd, sizeof(struct region)) == \(mi1)
+    /* Handle error */;
+.P
+/* Map shared memory object */
+.P
+rptr = mmap(NULL, sizeof(struct region),
+       PROT_READ | PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED, fd, 0);
+if (rptr == MAP_FAILED)
+    /* Handle error */;
+.P
+/* Now we can refer to mapped region using fields of rptr;
+   for example, rptr->len */
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+When the Memory Mapped Files option is supported, the normal
+\fIopen\fR()
+call is used to obtain a descriptor to a file to be mapped according to
+existing practice with
+\fImmap\fR().
+When the Shared Memory Objects option is supported, the
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+function shall obtain a descriptor to the shared memory object
+to be mapped.
+.P
+There is ample precedent for having a file descriptor represent several
+types of objects. In the POSIX.1\(hy1990 standard, a file descriptor can represent a
+file, a pipe, a FIFO, a tty, or a directory. Many implementations
+simply have an operations vector, which is indexed by the file
+descriptor type and does very different operations. Note that in some
+cases the file descriptor passed to generic operations on file
+descriptors is returned by
+\fIopen\fR()
+or
+\fIcreat\fR()
+and in some cases returned by alternate functions, such as
+\fIpipe\fR().
+The latter technique is used by
+\fIshm_open\fR().
+.P
+Note that such shared memory objects can actually be implemented as
+mapped files. In both cases, the size can be set after the open using
+\fIftruncate\fR().
+The
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+function itself does not create a shared object of a specified size
+because this would duplicate an extant function that set the size of
+an object referenced by a file descriptor.
+.P
+On implementations where memory objects are implemented using the
+existing file system, the
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+function may be implemented using a macro that invokes
+\fIopen\fR(),
+and the
+\fIshm_unlink\fR()
+function may be implemented using a macro that invokes
+\fIunlink\fR().
+.P
+For implementations without a permanent file system, the definition of
+the name of the memory objects is allowed not to survive a system
+reboot. Note that this allows systems with a permanent file system to
+implement memory objects as data structures internal to the
+implementation as well.
+.P
+On implementations that choose to implement memory objects using memory
+directly, a
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+followed by an
+\fIftruncate\fR()
+and
+\fIclose\fR()
+can be used to preallocate a shared memory area and to set the size of
+that preallocation. This may be necessary for systems without virtual
+memory hardware support in order to ensure that the memory is
+contiguous.
+.P
+The set of valid open flags to
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+was restricted to O_RDONLY, O_RDWR, O_CREAT, and O_TRUNC
+because these could be easily implemented on most memory mapping
+systems. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 is silent on the results if the implementation
+cannot supply the requested file access because of
+implementation-defined reasons, including hardware ones.
+.P
+The error conditions
+.BR [EACCES] 
+and
+.BR [ENOTSUP] 
+are provided to inform the application that the implementation cannot
+complete a request.
+.P
+.BR [EACCES] 
+indicates for implementation-defined reasons, probably
+hardware-related, that the implementation cannot comply with a
+requested mode because it conflicts with another requested mode. An
+example might be that an application desires to open a memory object
+two times, mapping different areas with different access modes. If the
+implementation cannot map a single area into a process space in two
+places, which would be required if different access modes were required
+for the two areas, then the implementation may inform the application
+at the time of the second open.
+.P
+.BR [ENOTSUP] 
+indicates for implementation-defined reasons, probably
+hardware-related, that the implementation cannot comply with a
+requested mode at all. An example would be that the hardware of the
+implementation cannot support write-only shared memory areas.
+.P
+On all implementations, it may be desirable to restrict the location of
+the memory objects to specific file systems for performance (such as a
+RAM disk) or implementation-defined reasons (shared memory supported
+directly only on certain file systems). The
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+function may be used to enforce these restrictions. There are a number
+of methods available to the application to determine an appropriate
+name of the file or the location of an appropriate directory. One way
+is from the environment via
+\fIgetenv\fR().
+Another would be from a configuration file.
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 specifies that memory objects have initial contents of
+zero when created. This is consistent with current behavior for both
+files and newly allocated memory. For those implementations that use
+physical memory, it would be possible that such implementations could
+simply use available memory and give it to the process uninitialized.
+This, however, is not consistent with standard behavior for the
+uninitialized data area, the stack, and of course, files. Finally, it
+is highly desirable to set the allocated memory to zero for security
+reasons. Thus, initializing memory objects to zero is required.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+A future version might require the
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+and
+\fIshm_unlink\fR()
+functions to have semantics similar to normal file system operations.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImmap\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmdt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshm_unlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIumask\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<fcntl.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_mman.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/shm_unlink.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/shm_unlink.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6d19b3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/shm_unlink.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SHM_UNLINK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+shm_unlink
+\(em remove a shared memory object
+(\fBREALTIME\fP)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/mman.h>
+.P
+int shm_unlink(const char *\fIname\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIshm_unlink\fR()
+function shall remove the name of the shared memory object named
+by the string pointed to by
+.IR name .
+.P
+If one or more references to the shared memory object exist when the
+object is unlinked, the name shall be removed before
+\fIshm_unlink\fR()
+returns, but the removal of the memory object contents shall be postponed
+until all open and map references to the shared memory object have been
+removed.
+.P
+Even if the object continues to exist after the last
+\fIshm_unlink\fR(),
+reuse of the name shall subsequently cause
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+to behave as if no shared memory object of this name exists (that is,
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+will fail if O_CREAT is not set, or will create a new shared memory
+object if O_CREAT is set).
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, a value of zero shall be returned.
+Otherwise, a value of \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error. If \(mi1 is returned, the named shared
+memory object shall not be changed by this function call.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIshm_unlink\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Permission is denied to unlink the named shared memory object.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+The named shared memory object does not exist.
+.P
+The
+\fIshm_unlink\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of the
+.IR name
+argument exceeds
+{_POSIX_PATH_MAX}
+on systems that do not support the XSI option
+or exceeds
+{_XOPEN_PATH_MAX}
+on XSI systems,
+or has a pathname component that is longer than
+{_POSIX_NAME_MAX}
+on systems that do not support the XSI option
+or longer than
+{_XOPEN_NAME_MAX}
+on XSI systems.
+A call to
+\fIshm_unlink\fR()
+with a
+.IR name
+argument that contains the same shared memory object name as was
+previously used in a successful
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+call shall not give an
+.BR [ENAMETOOLONG] 
+error.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Names of memory objects that were allocated with
+\fIopen\fR()
+are deleted with
+\fIunlink\fR()
+in the usual fashion. Names of memory objects that were allocated with
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+are deleted with
+\fIshm_unlink\fR().
+Note that the actual memory object is not destroyed until the
+last close and unmap on it have occurred if it was already in use.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+A future version might require the
+\fIshm_open\fR()
+and
+\fIshm_unlink\fR()
+functions to have semantics similar to normal file system operations.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImmap\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImunmap\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmdt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshm_open\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_mman.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/shmat.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/shmat.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..99855ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/shmat.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SHMAT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+shmat
+\(em XSI shared memory attach operation
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/shm.h>
+.P
+void *shmat(int \fIshmid\fP, const void *\fIshmaddr\fP, int \fIshmflg\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIshmat\fR()
+function operates on XSI shared memory (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.342" ", " "Shared Memory Object").
+It is unspecified whether this function interoperates with the
+realtime interprocess communication facilities defined in
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime".
+.P
+The
+\fIshmat\fR()
+function attaches the shared memory segment associated with the shared
+memory identifier specified by
+.IR shmid
+to the address space of the calling process. The segment is attached
+at the address specified by one of the following criteria:
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR shmaddr
+is a null pointer, the segment is attached at the first available
+address as selected by the system.
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR shmaddr
+is not a null pointer and (\fIshmflg\fP &SHM_RND)
+is non-zero, the segment is attached at the address given by
+(\fIshmaddr\fP \(mi((\fIuintptr_t\fP)\fIshmaddr\fP %SHMLBA)). The
+character
+.BR '%' 
+is the C-language remainder operator.
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR shmaddr
+is not a null pointer and (\fIshmflg\fP &SHM_RND) is 0, the segment is
+attached at the address given by
+.IR shmaddr .
+.IP " *" 4
+The segment is attached for reading if (\fIshmflg\fP &SHM_RDONLY)
+is non-zero and the calling process has read permission; otherwise, if
+it is 0 and the calling process has read and write permission, the
+segment is attached for reading and writing.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIshmat\fR()
+shall increment the value of
+.IR shm_nattch
+in the data structure associated with the shared memory ID of the
+attached shared memory segment and return the segment's start address.
+Also, the
+.IR shm_atime
+timestamp shall be set to the current time, as described in
+.IR "Section 2.7.1" ", " "IPC General Description".
+.P
+Otherwise, the shared memory segment shall not be attached,
+\fIshmat\fR()
+shall return \(mi1, and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIshmat\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Operation permission is denied to the calling process; see
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication".
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR shmid
+is not a valid shared memory identifier, the
+.IR shmaddr
+is not a null pointer, and the value of
+(\fIshmaddr\fP \(mi((\fIuintptr_t\fP)\fIshmaddr\fP %SHMLBA))
+is an illegal address for attaching shared memory; or the
+.IR shmaddr
+is not a null pointer, (\fIshmflg\fP &SHM_RND) is 0, and the value of
+.IR shmaddr
+is an illegal address for attaching shared memory.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+The number of shared memory segments attached to the calling process
+would exceed the system-imposed limit.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+The available data space is not large enough to accommodate the shared
+memory segment.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The POSIX Realtime Extension defines alternative interfaces for interprocess
+communication. Application developers who need to use IPC should
+design their applications so that modules using the IPC routines
+described in
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication"
+can be easily modified to use the alternative interfaces.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication",
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmdt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshm_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshm_unlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.342" ", " "Shared Memory Object",
+.IR "\fB<sys_shm.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/shmctl.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/shmctl.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..18de0ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/shmctl.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SHMCTL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+shmctl
+\(em XSI shared memory control operations
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/shm.h>
+.P
+int shmctl(int \fIshmid\fP, int \fIcmd\fP, struct shmid_ds *\fIbuf\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIshmctl\fR()
+function operates on XSI shared memory (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.342" ", " "Shared Memory Object").
+It is unspecified whether this function interoperates with the
+realtime interprocess communication facilities defined in
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime".
+.P
+The
+\fIshmctl\fR()
+function provides a variety of shared memory control operations as
+specified by
+.IR cmd .
+The following values for
+.IR cmd
+are available:
+.IP IPC_STAT 12
+Place the current value of each member of the
+.BR shmid_ds
+data structure associated with
+.IR shmid
+into the structure pointed to by
+.IR buf .
+The contents of the structure are defined in
+.IR <sys/shm.h> .
+.IP IPC_SET 12
+Set the value of the following members of the
+.BR shmid_ds
+data structure associated with
+.IR shmid
+to the corresponding value found in the structure pointed to by
+.IR buf :
+.RS 12 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+shm_perm.uid
+shm_perm.gid
+shm_perm.mode    \fRLow-order nine bits.\fP
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Also, the
+.IR shm_ctime
+timestamp shall be set to the current time, as described in
+.IR "Section 2.7.1" ", " "IPC General Description".
+.P
+IPC_SET can only be executed by a process that has an effective user ID
+equal to either that of a process with appropriate privileges or to the
+value of
+.IR shm_perm.cuid
+or
+.IR shm_perm.uid
+in the
+.BR shmid_ds
+data structure associated with
+.IR shmid .
+.RE
+.IP IPC_RMID 12
+Remove the shared memory identifier specified by
+.IR shmid
+from the system and destroy the shared memory segment and
+.BR shmid_ds
+data structure associated with it. IPC_RMID can only be executed by a
+process that has an effective user ID equal to either that of a process
+with appropriate privileges or to the value of
+.IR shm_perm.cuid
+or
+.IR shm_perm.uid
+in the
+.BR shmid_ds
+data structure associated with
+.IR shmid .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIshmctl\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIshmctl\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+The argument
+.IR cmd
+is equal to IPC_STAT and the calling process does not have read
+permission; see
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication".
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR shmid
+is not a valid shared memory identifier, or the value of
+.IR cmd
+is not a valid command.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The argument
+.IR cmd
+is equal to IPC_RMID or IPC_SET and the effective user ID of the
+calling process is not equal to that of a process with appropriate
+privileges and it is not equal to the value of
+.IR shm_perm.cuid
+or
+.IR shm_perm.uid
+in the data structure associated with
+.IR shmid .
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIshmctl\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The
+.IR cmd
+argument is IPC_STAT and the
+.IR gid
+or
+.IR uid
+value is too large to be stored in the structure pointed to by the
+.IR buf
+argument.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The POSIX Realtime Extension defines alternative interfaces for interprocess
+communication. Application developers who need to use IPC should
+design their applications so that modules using the IPC routines
+described in
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication"
+can be easily modified to use the alternative interfaces.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication",
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime",
+.IR "\fIshmat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmdt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshm_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshm_unlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.342" ", " "Shared Memory Object",
+.IR "\fB<sys_shm.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/shmdt.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/shmdt.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0ad0c16
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/shmdt.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SHMDT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+shmdt
+\(em XSI shared memory detach operation
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/shm.h>
+.P
+int shmdt(const void *\fIshmaddr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIshmdt\fR()
+function operates on XSI shared memory (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.342" ", " "Shared Memory Object").
+It is unspecified whether this function interoperates with the
+realtime interprocess communication facilities defined in
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime".
+.P
+The
+\fIshmdt\fR()
+function detaches the shared memory segment located at the address
+specified by
+.IR shmaddr
+from the address space of the calling process.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIshmdt\fR()
+shall decrement the value of
+.IR shm_nattch
+in the data structure associated with the shared memory ID of the
+attached shared memory segment and return 0. Also, the
+.IR shm_dtime
+timestamp shall be set to the current time, as described in
+.IR "Section 2.7.1" ", " "IPC General Description".
+.P
+Otherwise, the shared memory segment shall not be detached,
+\fIshmdt\fR()
+shall return \(mi1, and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIshmdt\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR shmaddr
+is not the data segment start address of a shared memory segment.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The POSIX Realtime Extension defines alternative interfaces for interprocess
+communication. Application developers who need to use IPC should
+design their applications so that modules using the IPC routines
+described in
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication"
+can be easily modified to use the alternative interfaces.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication",
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshm_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshm_unlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.342" ", " "Shared Memory Object",
+.IR "\fB<sys_shm.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/shmget.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/shmget.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ca1281e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/shmget.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,183 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SHMGET "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+shmget
+\(em get an XSI shared memory segment
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/shm.h>
+.P
+int shmget(key_t \fIkey\fP, size_t \fIsize\fP, int \fIshmflg\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIshmget\fR()
+function operates on XSI shared memory (see the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.342" ", " "Shared Memory Object").
+It is unspecified whether this function interoperates with the
+realtime interprocess communication facilities defined in
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime".
+.P
+The
+\fIshmget\fR()
+function shall return the shared memory identifier associated with
+.IR key .
+.P
+A shared memory identifier, associated data structure, and shared
+memory segment of at least
+.IR size
+bytes (see
+.IR <sys/shm.h> )
+are created for
+.IR key
+if one of the following is true:
+.IP " *" 4
+The argument
+.IR key
+is equal to IPC_PRIVATE.
+.IP " *" 4
+The argument
+.IR key
+does not already have a shared memory identifier associated with it and
+(\fIshmflg\fP &IPC_CREAT) is non-zero.
+.P
+Upon creation, the data structure associated with the new shared memory
+identifier shall be initialized as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+The values of
+.IR shm_perm.cuid ,
+.IR shm_perm.uid ,
+.IR shm_perm.cgid ,
+and
+.IR shm_perm.gid
+are set to the effective user ID and effective group ID,
+respectively, of the calling process.
+.IP " *" 4
+The low-order nine bits of
+.IR shm_perm.mode
+are set to the low-order nine bits of
+.IR shmflg .
+.IP " *" 4
+The value of
+.IR shm_segsz
+is set to the value of
+.IR size .
+.IP " *" 4
+The values of
+.IR shm_lpid ,
+.IR shm_nattch ,
+.IR shm_atime ,
+and
+.IR shm_dtime
+are set to 0.
+.IP " *" 4
+The value of
+.IR shm_ctime
+is set to the current time, as described in
+.IR "Section 2.7.1" ", " "IPC General Description".
+.P
+When the shared memory segment is created, it shall be initialized
+with all zero values.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIshmget\fR()
+shall return a non-negative integer, namely a shared memory identifier;
+otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIshmget\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+A shared memory identifier exists for
+.IR key
+but operation permission as specified by the low-order nine bits of
+.IR shmflg
+would not be granted; see
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication".
+.TP
+.BR EEXIST
+A shared memory identifier exists for the argument
+.IR key
+but (\fIshmflg\fR &IPC_CREAT) &&(\fIshmflg\fR &IPC_EXCL) is non-zero.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+A shared memory segment is to be created and the value of size is
+less than the system-imposed minimum or greater than the
+system-imposed maximum.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+No shared memory segment is to be created and a shared memory
+segment exists for
+.IR key
+but the size of the segment associated with it is less than
+.IR size .
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A shared memory identifier does not exist for the argument
+.IR key
+and (\fIshmflg\fP &IPC_CREAT) is 0.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+A shared memory identifier and associated shared memory segment shall
+be created, but the amount of available physical memory is not
+sufficient to fill the request.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+A shared memory identifier is to be created, but the system-imposed
+limit on the maximum number of allowed shared memory identifiers
+system-wide would be exceeded.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The POSIX Realtime Extension defines alternative interfaces for interprocess
+communication. Application developers who need to use IPC should
+design their applications so that modules using the IPC routines
+described in
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication"
+can be easily modified to use the alternative interfaces.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.7" ", " "XSI Interprocess Communication",
+.IR "Section 2.8" ", " "Realtime",
+.IR "\fIftok\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmctl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshmdt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshm_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshm_unlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.342" ", " "Shared Memory Object",
+.IR "\fB<sys_shm.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/shutdown.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/shutdown.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2fe1a0f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/shutdown.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SHUTDOWN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+shutdown
+\(em shut down socket send and receive operations
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+.P
+int shutdown(int \fIsocket\fP, int \fIhow\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIshutdown\fR()
+function shall cause all or part of a full-duplex connection on the
+socket associated with the file descriptor
+.IR socket
+to be shut down.
+.P
+The
+\fIshutdown\fR()
+function takes the following arguments:
+.IP "\fIsocket\fR" 12
+Specifies the file descriptor of the socket.
+.IP "\fIhow\fR" 12
+Specifies the type of shutdown. The values are as follows:
+.RS 12 
+.IP SHUT_RD 12
+Disables further receive operations.
+.IP SHUT_WR 12
+Disables further send operations.
+.IP SHUT_RDWR 12
+Disables further send and receive operations.
+.RE
+.P
+The
+\fIshutdown\fR()
+function disables subsequent send and/or receive operations on a
+socket, depending on the value of the
+.IR how
+argument.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIshutdown\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIshutdown\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR socket
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR how
+argument is invalid.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTCONN
+The socket is not connected.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSOCK
+The
+.IR socket
+argument does not refer to a socket.
+.P
+The
+\fIshutdown\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOBUFS
+Insufficient resources were available in the system to perform the
+operation.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetsockopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpselect\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecvfrom\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecvmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsend\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsendto\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsockopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigaction.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigaction.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5d68eb2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigaction.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,676 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGACTION "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sigaction
+\(em examine and change a signal action
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int sigaction(int \fIsig\fP, const struct sigaction *restrict \fIact\fP,
+    struct sigaction *restrict \fIoact\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+function allows the calling process to examine and/or specify the
+action to be associated with a specific signal. The argument
+.IR sig
+specifies the signal; acceptable values are defined in
+.IR <signal.h> .
+.P
+The structure
+.BR sigaction ,
+used to describe an action to be taken, is defined in the
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header to include at least the following members:
+.ad l
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB | cB
+lw(1.5i)B | lw(1.25i)I | lw(2.5i).
+Member Type!Member Name!Description
+_
+void(*) (int)!sa_handler!T{
+Pointer to a signal-catching function or one of the macros
+SIG_IGN or SIG_DFL.
+T}
+sigset_t!sa_mask!T{
+Additional set of signals to be blocked during execution of
+signal-catching function.
+T}
+int!sa_flags!T{
+Special flags to affect behavior of signal.
+T}
+T{
+void(*) (int,
+.br
+\0\0siginfo_t *, void *)
+T}!sa_sigaction!Pointer to a signal-catching function.
+.TE
+.ad b
+.P
+The storage occupied by
+.IR sa_handler
+and
+.IR sa_sigaction
+may overlap, and a conforming application shall not use both
+simultaneously.
+.P
+If the argument
+.IR act
+is not a null pointer, it points to a structure specifying the action
+to be associated with the specified signal. If the argument
+.IR oact
+is not a null pointer, the action previously associated with the signal
+is stored in the location pointed to by the argument
+.IR oact .
+If the argument
+.IR act
+is a null pointer, signal handling is unchanged; thus, the call can be
+used to enquire about the current handling of a given signal. The
+SIGKILL and SIGSTOP signals shall not be added to the signal
+mask using this mechanism; this restriction shall be enforced by the
+system without causing an error to be indicated.
+.P
+If the SA_SIGINFO flag (see below) is cleared in the
+.IR sa_flags
+field of the
+.BR sigaction
+structure, the
+.IR sa_handler
+field identifies the action to be associated with the specified signal.
+If the SA_SIGINFO flag is set in the
+.IR sa_flags
+field, the
+.IR sa_sigaction
+field specifies a signal-catching function.
+.P
+The
+.IR sa_flags
+field can be used to modify the behavior of the specified signal.
+.P
+The following flags, defined in the
+.IR <signal.h> 
+header, can be set in
+.IR sa_flags :
+.IP SA_NOCLDSTOP 14
+Do not generate SIGCHLD when children stop
+or stopped children continue.
+.RS 14 
+.P
+If
+.IR sig
+is SIGCHLD and the SA_NOCLDSTOP flag is not set in
+.IR sa_flags ,
+and the implementation supports the SIGCHLD signal, then a SIGCHLD
+signal shall be generated for the calling process whenever any of its
+child processes stop
+and a SIGCHLD signal may be generated for the calling
+process whenever any of its stopped child processes are continued.
+If
+.IR sig
+is SIGCHLD and the SA_NOCLDSTOP flag is set in
+.IR sa_flags ,
+then the implementation shall not generate a SIGCHLD signal in this
+way.
+.RE
+.IP SA_ONSTACK 14
+If set and an alternate signal stack has been declared with
+\fIsigaltstack\fR(),
+the signal shall be delivered to the calling process on that stack.
+Otherwise, the signal shall be delivered on the current stack.
+.IP SA_RESETHAND 14
+If set, the disposition of the signal shall be reset to SIG_DFL and the
+SA_SIGINFO flag shall be cleared on entry to the signal handler.
+.RS 14 
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+SIGILL and SIGTRAP cannot be automatically reset when delivered; the
+system silently enforces this restriction.
+.P
+Otherwise, the disposition of the signal shall not be modified on entry
+to the signal handler.
+.P
+In addition, if this flag is set,
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+may behave as if the SA_NODEFER flag were also set.
+.RE
+.IP SA_RESTART 14
+This flag affects the behavior of interruptible functions; that is,
+those specified to fail with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [EINTR] .
+If set, and a function specified as interruptible is interrupted by
+this signal, the function shall restart and shall not fail with
+.BR [EINTR] 
+unless otherwise specified. If an interruptible function which uses a
+timeout is restarted, the duration of the timeout following the restart
+is set to an unspecified value that does not exceed the original
+timeout value. If the flag is not set, interruptible functions
+interrupted by this signal shall fail with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.IP SA_SIGINFO 14
+If cleared and the signal is caught, the signal-catching function
+shall be entered as:
+.RS 14 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void func(int \fIsigno\fP);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR signo
+is the only argument to the signal-catching function. In this case, the
+application shall use the
+.IR sa_handler
+member to describe the signal-catching function and the application
+shall not modify the
+.IR sa_sigaction
+member.
+.P
+If SA_SIGINFO is set and the signal is caught, the signal-catching
+function shall be entered as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void func(int \fIsigno\fP, siginfo_t *\fIinfo\fP, void *\fIcontext\fP);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where two additional arguments are passed to the signal-catching
+function. The second argument shall point to an object of type
+.BR siginfo_t
+explaining the reason why the signal was generated; the third argument
+can be cast to a pointer to an object of type
+.BR ucontext_t
+to refer to the receiving thread's context that was interrupted when
+the signal was delivered. In this case, the application shall use the
+.IR sa_sigaction
+member to describe the signal-catching function and the application
+shall not modify the
+.IR sa_handler
+member.
+.P
+The
+.IR si_signo
+member contains the system-generated signal number.
+.P
+The
+.IR si_errno
+member may contain implementation-defined additional error
+information; if non-zero, it contains an error number identifying the
+condition that caused the signal to be generated.
+.P
+The
+.IR si_code
+member contains a code identifying the cause of the signal, as
+described in
+.IR "Section 2.4.3" ", " "Signal Actions".
+.RE
+.IP SA_NOCLDWAIT 14
+If set, and
+.IR sig
+equals SIGCHLD, child processes of the calling processes shall not
+be transformed into zombie processes when they terminate. If the calling
+process subsequently waits for its children, and the process has no
+unwaited-for children that were transformed into zombie processes, it
+shall block until all of its children terminate, and
+\fIwait\fR(),
+\fIwaitid\fR(),
+and
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [ECHILD] .
+Otherwise, terminating child processes shall be transformed into zombie
+processes, unless SIGCHLD is set to SIG_IGN.
+.IP SA_NODEFER 14
+If set and
+.IR sig
+is caught,
+.IR sig
+shall not be added to the thread's signal mask on entry to the signal
+handler unless it is included in
+.IR sa_mask .
+Otherwise,
+.IR sig
+shall always be added to the thread's signal mask on entry to the
+signal handler.
+.P
+When a signal is caught by a signal-catching function installed by
+\fIsigaction\fR(),
+a new signal mask is calculated and installed for the duration of the
+signal-catching function (or until a call to either
+\fIsigprocmask\fR()
+or
+\fIsigsuspend\fR()
+is made). This mask is formed by taking the union of the current
+signal mask and the value of the
+.IR sa_mask
+for the signal being delivered, and unless SA_NODEFER or
+SA_RESETHAND is set,
+then including the signal being delivered. If and when the user's
+signal handler returns normally, the original signal mask is restored.
+.P
+Once an action is installed for a specific signal, it shall remain
+installed until another action is explicitly requested (by another
+call to
+\fIsigaction\fR()),
+until the SA_RESETHAND flag causes resetting of the handler,
+or until one of the
+.IR exec
+functions is called.
+.P
+If the previous action for
+.IR sig
+had been established by
+\fIsignal\fR(),
+the values of the fields returned in the structure pointed to by
+.IR oact
+are unspecified, and in particular
+.IR oact ->\c
+.IR sa_handler
+is not necessarily the same value passed to
+\fIsignal\fR().
+However, if a pointer to the same structure or a copy thereof is passed
+to a subsequent call to
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+via the
+.IR act
+argument, handling of the signal shall be as if the original call to
+\fIsignal\fR()
+were repeated.
+.P
+If
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+fails, no new signal handler is installed.
+.P
+It is unspecified whether an attempt to set the action for a signal
+that cannot be caught or ignored to SIG_DFL is ignored or causes an
+error to be returned with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [EINVAL] .
+.P
+If SA_SIGINFO is not set in
+.IR sa_flags ,
+then the disposition of subsequent occurrences of
+.IR sig
+when it is already pending is implementation-defined; the
+signal-catching function shall be invoked with a single argument.
+If SA_SIGINFO is set in
+.IR sa_flags ,
+then subsequent occurrences of
+.IR sig
+generated by
+\fIsigqueue\fR()
+or as a result of any signal-generating function that supports the
+specification of an application-defined value (when
+.IR sig
+is already pending) shall be queued in FIFO order until delivered or
+accepted; the signal-catching function shall be invoked with three
+arguments. The application specified value is passed to the
+signal-catching function as the
+.IR si_value
+member of the
+.BR siginfo_t
+structure.
+.P
+The result of the use of
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+and a
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+function concurrently within a process on the same signal is
+unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned,
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error, and no new signal-catching function
+shall be installed.
+.br
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR sig
+argument is not a valid signal number or an attempt is made to catch a
+signal that cannot be caught or ignore a signal that cannot be ignored.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSUP
+The SA_SIGINFO bit flag is set in the
+.IR sa_flags
+field of the
+.BR sigaction
+structure.
+.P
+The
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+An attempt was made to set the action to SIG_DFL for a signal that
+cannot be caught or ignored (or both).
+.P
+In addition, the
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+function may fail if the SA_SIGINFO flag is set in the
+.IR sa_flags
+field of the
+.BR sigaction
+structure for a signal not in the range SIGRTMIN to SIGRTMAX.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Establishing a Signal Handler"
+.P
+The following example demonstrates the use of
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+to establish a handler for the SIGINT signal.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+static void handler(int signum)
+{
+    /* Take appropriate actions for signal delivery */
+}
+.P
+int main()
+{
+    struct sigaction sa;
+.P
+    sa.sa_handler = handler;
+    sigemptyset(&sa.sa_mask);
+    sa.sa_flags = SA_RESTART; /* Restart functions if
+                                 interrupted by handler */
+    if (sigaction(SIGINT, &sa, NULL) == \(mi1)
+        /* Handle error */;
+.P
+    /* Further code */
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+function supersedes the
+\fIsignal\fR()
+function, and should be used in preference. In particular,
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+and
+\fIsignal\fR()
+should not be used in the same process to control the same signal.
+The behavior of async-signal-safe functions, as defined in their
+respective DESCRIPTION sections, is as specified by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, regardless
+of invocation from a signal-catching function. This is the only intended
+meaning of the statement that async-signal-safe functions may be used in
+signal-catching functions without restrictions. Applications must still
+consider all effects of such functions on such things as data structures,
+files, and process state. In particular, application developers need
+to consider the restrictions on interactions when interrupting
+\fIsleep\fR()
+and interactions among multiple handles for a file description. The
+fact that any specific function is listed as async-signal-safe does not
+necessarily mean that invocation of that function from a
+signal-catching function is recommended.
+.P
+In order to prevent errors arising from interrupting non-async-signal-safe
+function calls, applications should protect calls to these functions
+either by blocking the appropriate signals or through the use of some
+programmatic semaphore (see
+.IR "\fIsemget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_init\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_open\fR\^(\|)",
+and so on). Note in particular that even the ``safe'' functions may
+modify
+.IR errno ;
+the signal-catching function, if not executing as an independent
+thread, should save and restore its value in order to avoid the
+possibility that delivery of a signal in between an error return
+from a function that sets
+.IR errno
+and the subsequent examination of
+.IR errno
+could result in the signal-catching function changing the value of
+.IR errno .
+Naturally, the same principles apply to the async-signal-safety of
+application routines and asynchronous data access. Note that
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+and
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR()
+are not in the list of async-signal-safe functions. This is because
+the code executing after
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+and
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR()
+can call any unsafe functions with the same danger as calling those
+unsafe functions directly from the signal handler. Applications that
+use
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+and
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR()
+from within signal handlers require rigorous protection in order to be
+portable. Many of the other functions that are excluded from the list
+are traditionally implemented using either
+\fImalloc\fR()
+or
+\fIfree\fR()
+functions or the standard I/O library, both of which traditionally
+use data structures in a non-async-signal-safe manner. Since any
+combination of different functions using a common data structure can
+cause async-signal-safety problems, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not define the behavior
+when any unsafe function is called in a signal handler that interrupts
+an unsafe function.
+.P
+Usually, the signal is executed on the stack that was in effect before
+the signal was delivered. An alternate stack may be specified to
+receive a subset of the signals being caught.
+.P
+When the signal handler returns, the receiving thread resumes
+execution at the point it was interrupted unless the signal handler
+makes other arrangements. If
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+or
+\fI_longjmp\fR()
+is used to leave the signal handler, then the signal mask must be
+explicitly restored.
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defines the third argument of a signal handling function when
+SA_SIGINFO is set as a
+.BR "void *"
+instead of a
+.BR "ucontext_t *" ,
+but without requiring type checking. New applications should
+explicitly cast the third argument of the signal handling function to
+.BR "ucontext_t *" .
+.P
+The BSD optional four argument signal handling function is not
+supported by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. The BSD declaration would be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void handler(int \fIsig\fP, int \fIcode\fP, struct sigcontext *\fIscp\fP,
+    char *\fIaddr\fP);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR sig
+is the signal number,
+.IR code
+is additional information on certain signals,
+.IR scp
+is a pointer to the
+.BR sigcontext
+structure, and
+.IR addr
+is additional address information. Much the same information is
+available in the objects pointed to by the second argument of the
+signal handler specified when SA_SIGINFO is set.
+.P
+Since the
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+function is allowed but not required to set SA_NODEFER when the
+application sets the SA_RESETHAND flag, applications which depend on the
+SA_RESETHAND functionality for the newly installed signal handler must
+always explicitly set SA_NODEFER when they set SA_RESETHAND in order to
+be portable.
+.P
+See also the rationale for Realtime Signal Generation and Delivery in
+the Rationale (Informative) volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section B.2.4.2" ", " "Signal Generation and Delivery".
+.SH RATIONALE
+Although this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that signals that cannot be ignored
+shall not be added to the signal mask when a signal-catching function
+is entered, there is no explicit requirement that subsequent calls to
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+reflect this in the information returned in the
+.IR oact
+argument. In other words, if SIGKILL
+is included in the
+.IR sa_mask
+field of
+.IR act ,
+it is unspecified whether or not a subsequent call to
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+returns with SIGKILL included in the
+.IR sa_mask
+field of
+.IR oact .
+.P
+The SA_NOCLDSTOP
+flag, when supplied in the
+.IR act ->\c
+.IR sa_flags
+parameter, allows overloading SIGCHLD with the System V
+semantics that each SIGCLD
+signal indicates a single terminated child. Most conforming applications
+that catch SIGCHLD are expected to install signal-catching functions
+that repeatedly call the
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+function with the WNOHANG
+flag set, acting on each child for which status is returned, until
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+returns zero. If stopped children are not of interest, the use of the
+SA_NOCLDSTOP
+flag can prevent the overhead from invoking the signal-catching routine
+when they stop.
+.P
+Some historical implementations also define other mechanisms for
+stopping processes, such as the
+\fIptrace\fR()
+function. These implementations usually do not generate a SIGCHLD
+signal when processes stop due to this mechanism; however, that is
+beyond the scope of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that calls to
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+that supply a NULL
+.IR act
+argument succeed, even in the case of signals that cannot be caught or
+ignored (that is, SIGKILL
+or SIGSTOP).
+The System V
+\fIsignal\fR()
+and BSD
+\fIsigvec\fR()
+functions return
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+in these cases and, in this respect, their behavior varies from
+\fIsigaction\fR().
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+properly save and restore a signal action set up by the ISO\ C standard
+\fIsignal\fR()
+function. However, there is no guarantee that the reverse is true, nor
+could there be given the greater amount of information conveyed by the
+.BR sigaction
+structure. Because of this, applications should avoid using both
+functions for the same signal in the same process. Since this cannot
+always be avoided in case of general-purpose library routines, they
+should always be implemented with
+\fIsigaction\fR().
+.P
+It was intended that the
+\fIsignal\fR()
+function should be implementable as a library routine using
+\fIsigaction\fR().
+.P
+The POSIX Realtime Extension extends the
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+function as specified by the POSIX.1\(hy1990 standard to allow the application to request
+on a per-signal basis via an additional signal action flag that the
+extra parameters, including the application-defined signal value, if
+any, be passed to the signal-catching function.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.4" ", " "Signal Concepts",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIkill\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fI_longjmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlongjmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_sigmask\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIraise\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsemget\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_init\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaddset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaltstack\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigdelset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigemptyset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigfillset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigismember\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsignal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigsuspend\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwaitid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigaddset.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigaddset.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..367b4c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigaddset.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGADDSET "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sigaddset
+\(em add a signal to a signal set
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int sigaddset(sigset_t *\fIset\fP, int \fIsigno\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsigaddset\fR()
+function adds the individual signal specified by the
+.IR signo
+to the signal set pointed to by
+.IR set .
+.P
+Applications shall call either
+\fIsigemptyset\fR()
+or
+\fIsigfillset\fR()
+at least once for each object of type
+.BR sigset_t
+prior to any other use of that object. If such an object is not
+initialized in this way, but is nonetheless supplied as an argument to
+any of
+\fIpthread_sigmask\fR(),
+\fIsigaction\fR(),
+\fIsigaddset\fR(),
+\fIsigdelset\fR(),
+\fIsigismember\fR(),
+\fIsigpending\fR(),
+\fIsigprocmask\fR(),
+\fIsigsuspend\fR(),
+\fIsigtimedwait\fR(),
+\fIsigwait\fR(),
+or
+\fIsigwaitinfo\fR(),
+the results are undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsigaddset\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsigaddset\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR signo
+argument is an invalid or unsupported signal number.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.4" ", " "Signal Concepts",
+.IR "\fIpthread_sigmask\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigdelset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigemptyset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigfillset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigismember\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigpending\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigsuspend\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigaltstack.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigaltstack.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5e7574f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigaltstack.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,181 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGALTSTACK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sigaltstack
+\(em set and get signal alternate stack context
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int sigaltstack(const stack_t *restrict \fIss\fP, stack_t *restrict \fIoss\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsigaltstack\fR()
+function allows a process to define and examine the state of an
+alternate stack for signal handlers for the current thread. Signals
+that have been explicitly declared to execute on the alternate stack
+shall be delivered on the alternate stack.
+.P
+If
+.IR ss
+is not a null pointer, it points to a
+.BR stack_t
+structure that specifies the alternate signal stack that shall take
+effect upon return from
+\fIsigaltstack\fR().
+The
+.IR ss_flags
+member specifies the new stack state. If it is set to SS_DISABLE, the
+stack is disabled and
+.IR ss_sp
+and
+.IR ss_size
+are ignored. Otherwise, the stack shall be enabled, and the
+.IR ss_sp
+and
+.IR ss_size
+members specify the new address and size of the stack.
+.P
+The range of addresses starting at
+.IR ss_sp
+up to but not including
+.IR ss_sp +\c
+.IR ss_size
+is available to the implementation for use as the stack. This function
+makes no assumptions regarding which end is the stack base and in which
+direction the stack grows as items are pushed.
+.P
+If
+.IR oss
+is not a null pointer, upon successful completion it shall point to a
+.BR stack_t
+structure that specifies the alternate signal stack that was in effect
+prior to the call to
+\fIsigaltstack\fR().
+The
+.IR ss_sp
+and
+.IR ss_size
+members specify the address and size of that stack. The
+.IR ss_flags
+member specifies the stack's state, and may contain one of the
+following values:
+.IP SS_ONSTACK 12
+The process is currently executing on the alternate signal stack.
+Attempts to modify the alternate signal stack while the process is
+executing on it fail. This flag shall not be modified by processes.
+.IP SS_DISABLE 12
+The alternate signal stack is currently disabled.
+.P
+The value SIGSTKSZ is a system default specifying the number of bytes
+that would be used to cover the usual case when manually allocating an
+alternate stack area. The value MINSIGSTKSZ is defined to be the
+minimum stack size for
+a signal handler. In computing an alternate stack size, a program
+should add that amount to its stack requirements to allow for the
+system implementation overhead. The constants SS_ONSTACK, SS_DISABLE,
+SIGSTKSZ, and MINSIGSTKSZ are
+defined in
+.IR <signal.h> .
+.P
+After a successful call to one of the
+.IR exec
+functions, there are no alternate signal stacks in the new process
+image.
+.P
+In some implementations, a signal (whether or not indicated to execute
+on the alternate stack) shall always execute on the alternate stack if
+it is delivered while another signal is being caught using the
+alternate stack.
+.P
+Use of this function by library threads that are not bound to
+kernel-scheduled entities results in undefined behavior.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsigaltstack\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsigaltstack\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR ss
+argument is not a null pointer, and the
+.IR ss_flags
+member pointed to by
+.IR ss
+contains flags other than SS_DISABLE.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+The size of the alternate stack area is less than MINSIGSTKSZ.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+An attempt was made to modify an active stack.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Allocating Memory for an Alternate Stack"
+.P
+The following example illustrates a method for allocating memory for an
+alternate stack.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <signal.h>
+\&...
+if ((sigstk.ss_sp = malloc(SIGSTKSZ)) == NULL)
+    /* Error return. */
+sigstk.ss_size = SIGSTKSZ;
+sigstk.ss_flags = 0;
+if (sigaltstack(&sigstk,(stack_t *)0) < 0)
+    perror("sigaltstack");
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On some implementations, stack space is automatically extended as
+needed. On those implementations, automatic extension is typically not
+available for an alternate stack. If the stack overflows, the
+behavior is undefined.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.4" ", " "Signal Concepts",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigsetjmp\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigdelset.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigdelset.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..14817a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigdelset.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGDELSET "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sigdelset
+\(em delete a signal from a signal set
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int sigdelset(sigset_t *\fIset\fP, int \fIsigno\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsigdelset\fR()
+function deletes the individual signal specified by
+.IR signo
+from the signal set pointed to by
+.IR set .
+.P
+Applications should call either
+\fIsigemptyset\fR()
+or
+\fIsigfillset\fR()
+at least once for each object of type
+.BR sigset_t
+prior to any other use of that object. If such an object is not
+initialized in this way, but is nonetheless supplied as an argument to
+any of
+\fIpthread_sigmask\fR(),
+\fIsigaction\fR(),
+\fIsigaddset\fR(),
+\fIsigdelset\fR(),
+\fIsigismember\fR(),
+\fIsigpending\fR(),
+\fIsigprocmask\fR(),
+\fIsigsuspend\fR(),
+\fIsigtimedwait\fR(),
+\fIsigwait\fR(),
+or
+\fIsigwaitinfo\fR(),
+the results are undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsigdelset\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsigdelset\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR signo
+argument is not a valid signal number, or is an unsupported signal
+number.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.4" ", " "Signal Concepts",
+.IR "\fIpthread_sigmask\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaddset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigemptyset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigfillset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigismember\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigpending\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigsuspend\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigemptyset.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigemptyset.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6e0cd07
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigemptyset.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGEMPTYSET "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sigemptyset
+\(em initialize and empty a signal set
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int sigemptyset(sigset_t *\fIset\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsigemptyset\fR()
+function initializes the signal set pointed to by
+.IR set ,
+such that all signals defined in POSIX.1\(hy2008 are excluded.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsigemptyset\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The implementation of the
+\fIsigemptyset\fR()
+(or
+\fIsigfillset\fR())
+function could quite trivially clear (or set) all the bits in the
+signal set. Alternatively, it would be reasonable to initialize part
+of the structure, such as a version field, to permit
+binary-compatibility between releases where the size of the set
+varies. For such reasons, either
+\fIsigemptyset\fR()
+or
+\fIsigfillset\fR()
+must be called prior to any other use of the signal set, even if such
+use is read-only (for example, as an argument to
+\fIsigpending\fR()).
+This function is not intended for dynamic allocation.
+.P
+The
+\fIsigfillset\fR()
+and
+\fIsigemptyset\fR()
+functions require that the resulting signal set include (or exclude)
+all the signals defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. Although it is outside the scope of
+\&this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 to place this requirement on signals that are implemented as
+extensions, it is recommended that implementation-defined signals
+also be affected by these functions. However, there may be a good
+reason for a particular signal not to be affected. For example,
+blocking or ignoring an implementation-defined signal may have
+undesirable side-effects, whereas the default action for that signal is
+harmless. In such a case, it would be preferable for such a signal to
+be excluded from the signal set returned by
+\fIsigfillset\fR().
+.P
+In early proposals there was no distinction between invalid and
+unsupported signals (the names of optional signals that were not
+supported by an implementation were not defined by that
+implementation). The
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error was thus specified as a required error for invalid signals. With
+that distinction, it is not necessary to require implementations of
+these functions to determine whether an optional signal is actually
+supported, as that could have a significant performance impact for
+little value. The error could have been required for invalid signals
+and optional for unsupported signals, but this seemed unnecessarily
+complex. Thus, the error is optional in both cases.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.ad l
+.IR "Section 2.4" ", " "Signal Concepts",
+.IR "\fIpthread_sigmask\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaddset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigdelset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigfillset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigismember\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigpending\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigsuspend\fR\^(\|)"
+.ad b
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigfillset.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigfillset.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..72016b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigfillset.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGFILLSET "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sigfillset
+\(em initialize and fill a signal set
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int sigfillset(sigset_t *\fIset\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsigfillset\fR()
+function shall initialize the signal set pointed to by
+.IR set ,
+such that all signals defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 are included.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsigfillset\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIsigemptyset\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.4" ", " "Signal Concepts",
+.IR "\fIpthread_sigmask\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaddset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigdelset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigemptyset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigismember\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigpending\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigsuspend\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sighold.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sighold.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2812e82
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sighold.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,255 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGHOLD "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sighold,
+sigignore,
+sigpause,
+sigrelse,
+sigset
+\(em signal management
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int sighold(int \fIsig\fP);
+int sigignore(int \fIsig\fP);
+int sigpause(int \fIsig\fP);
+int sigrelse(int \fIsig\fP);
+void (*sigset(int \fIsig\fP, void (*\fIdisp\fP)(int)))(int);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Use of any of these functions is unspecified in a multi-threaded
+process.
+.P
+The
+\fIsighold\fR(),
+\fIsigignore\fR(),
+\fIsigpause\fR(),
+\fIsigrelse\fR(),
+and
+\fIsigset\fR()
+functions provide simplified signal management.
+.P
+The
+\fIsigset\fR()
+function shall modify signal dispositions. The
+.IR sig
+argument specifies the signal, which may be any signal except SIGKILL
+and SIGSTOP. The
+.IR disp
+argument specifies the signal's disposition, which may be SIG_DFL,
+SIG_IGN, or the address of a signal handler. If
+\fIsigset\fR()
+is used, and
+.IR disp
+is the address of a signal handler, the system shall add
+.IR sig
+to the signal mask of the calling process before executing the signal
+handler; when the signal handler returns, the system shall restore the
+signal mask of the calling process to its state prior to the delivery
+of the signal. In addition, if
+\fIsigset\fR()
+is used, and
+.IR disp
+is equal to SIG_HOLD,
+.IR sig
+shall be added to the
+signal mask of the calling process and
+.IR sig 's
+disposition shall remain unchanged. If
+\fIsigset\fR()
+is used, and
+.IR disp
+is not equal to SIG_HOLD,
+.IR sig
+shall be removed from the signal mask of the calling process.
+.P
+The
+\fIsighold\fR()
+function shall add
+.IR sig
+to the signal mask of the calling process.
+.P
+The
+\fIsigrelse\fR()
+function shall remove
+.IR sig
+from the signal mask of the calling process.
+.P
+The
+\fIsigignore\fR()
+function shall set the disposition of
+.IR sig
+to SIG_IGN.
+.P
+The
+\fIsigpause\fR()
+function shall remove
+.IR sig
+from the signal mask of the calling process and suspend the calling process
+until a signal is received. The
+\fIsigpause\fR()
+function shall restore the signal mask of the process to its original
+state before returning.
+.P
+If the action for the SIGCHLD signal is set to SIG_IGN, child processes
+of the
+calling processes shall not be transformed into zombie processes when
+they terminate. If the calling process subsequently waits for its
+children, and the process has no unwaited-for children that were
+transformed into zombie processes, it shall block until all of its
+children terminate, and
+\fIwait\fR(),
+\fIwaitid\fR(),
+and
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [ECHILD] .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsigset\fR()
+shall return SIG_HOLD if the signal had been blocked and the signal's
+previous disposition if it had not been blocked. Otherwise, SIG_ERR
+shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.P
+The
+\fIsigpause\fR()
+function shall suspend execution of the thread until a signal is
+received, whereupon it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.P
+For all other functions, upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned.
+Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR sig
+argument is an illegal signal number.
+.P
+The
+\fIsigset\fR()
+and
+\fIsigignore\fR()
+functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+An attempt is made to catch a signal that cannot be caught, or to
+ignore a signal that cannot be ignored.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+function provides a more comprehensive and reliable mechanism for
+controlling signals; new applications should use the
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+function instead of the obsolescent
+\fIsigset\fR()
+function.
+.P
+The
+\fIsighold\fR()
+function, in conjunction with
+\fIsigrelse\fR()
+or
+\fIsigpause\fR(),
+may be used to establish critical regions of code that require the
+delivery of a signal to be temporarily deferred. For broader
+portability, the
+\fIpthread_sigmask\fR()
+or
+\fIsigprocmask\fR()
+functions should be used instead of the obsolescent
+\fIsighold\fR()
+and
+\fIsigrelse\fR()
+functions.
+.P
+For broader portability, the
+\fIsigsuspend\fR()
+function should be used instead of the obsolescent
+\fIsigpause\fR()
+function.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Each of these historic functions has a direct analog in the other
+functions which are required to be per-thread and thread-safe (aside
+from
+\fIsigprocmask\fR(),
+which is replaced by
+\fIpthread_sigmask\fR()).
+The
+\fIsigset\fR()
+function can be implemented as a simple wrapper for
+\fIsigaction\fR().
+The
+\fIsighold\fR()
+function is equivalent to
+\fIsigprocmask\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_sigmask\fR()
+with SIG_BLOCK set. The
+\fIsigignore\fR()
+function is equivalent to
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+with SIG_IGN set. The
+\fIsigpause\fR()
+function is equivalent to
+\fIsigsuspend\fR().
+The
+\fIsigrelse\fR()
+function is equivalent to
+\fIsigprocmask\fR()
+or
+\fIpthread_sigmask\fR()
+with SIG_UNBLOCK set.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+These functions may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.4" ", " "Signal Concepts",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIpause\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_sigmask\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsignal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigsuspend\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwaitid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/siginterrupt.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/siginterrupt.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..78b25c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/siginterrupt.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGINTERRUPT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+siginterrupt
+\(em allow signals to interrupt functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int siginterrupt(int \fIsig\fP, int \fIflag\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsiginterrupt\fR()
+function shall change the restart behavior when a function is
+interrupted by the specified signal. The function
+\fIsiginterrupt\fP(\fIsig\fP, \fIflag\fP) has an effect as if
+implemented as:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int siginterrupt(int sig, int flag) {
+    int ret;
+    struct sigaction act;
+.P
+    (void) sigaction(sig, NULL, &act);
+    if (flag)
+        act.sa_flags &= ~SA_RESTART;
+    else
+        act.sa_flags |= SA_RESTART;
+    ret = sigaction(sig, &act, NULL);
+    return ret;
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsiginterrupt\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsiginterrupt\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR sig
+argument is not a valid signal number.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIsiginterrupt\fR()
+function supports programs written to historical system interfaces.
+Applications should use the
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+with the SA_RESTART flag instead of the obsolescent
+\fIsiginterrupt\fR()
+function.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.4" ", " "Signal Concepts",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigismember.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigismember.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..55faf9f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigismember.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGISMEMBER "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sigismember
+\(em test for a signal in a signal set
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int sigismember(const sigset_t *\fIset\fP, int \fIsigno\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsigismember\fR()
+function shall test whether the signal specified by
+.IR signo
+is a member of the set pointed to by
+.IR set .
+.P
+Applications should call either
+\fIsigemptyset\fR()
+or
+\fIsigfillset\fR()
+at least once for each object of type
+.BR sigset_t
+prior to any other use of that object. If such an object is not
+initialized in this way, but is nonetheless supplied as an argument to
+any of
+\fIpthread_sigmask\fR(),
+\fIsigaction\fR(),
+\fIsigaddset\fR(),
+\fIsigdelset\fR(),
+\fIsigismember\fR(),
+\fIsigpending\fR(),
+\fIsigprocmask\fR(),
+\fIsigsuspend\fR(),
+\fIsigtimedwait\fR(),
+\fIsigwait\fR(),
+or
+\fIsigwaitinfo\fR(),
+the results are undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsigismember\fR()
+shall return 1 if the specified signal is a member of the specified set,
+or 0 if it is not. Otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsigismember\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR signo
+argument is not a valid signal number, or is an unsupported signal
+number.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.4" ", " "Signal Concepts",
+.IR "\fIpthread_sigmask\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaddset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigdelset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigfillset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigemptyset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigpending\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigsuspend\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/siglongjmp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/siglongjmp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a69f582
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/siglongjmp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGLONGJMP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+siglongjmp
+\(em non-local goto with signal handling
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <setjmp.h>
+.P
+void siglongjmp(sigjmp_buf \fIenv\fP, int \fIval\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+function, except as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+References to
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+shall be equivalent to
+\fIsigsetjmp\fR().
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR()
+function shall restore the saved signal mask if and only if the
+.IR env
+argument was initialized by a call to
+\fIsigsetjmp\fR()
+with a non-zero
+.IR savemask
+argument.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+After
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR()
+is completed, program execution shall continue as if the corresponding
+invocation of
+\fIsigsetjmp\fR()
+had just returned the value specified by
+.IR val .
+The
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR()
+function shall not cause
+\fIsigsetjmp\fR()
+to return 0; if
+.IR val
+is 0,
+\fIsigsetjmp\fR()
+shall return the value 1.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The distinction between
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+or
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+and
+\fIsigsetjmp\fR()
+or
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR()
+is only significant for programs which use
+\fIsigaction\fR(),
+\fIsigprocmask\fR(),
+or
+\fIsigsuspend\fR().
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIlongjmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_sigmask\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetjmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigsetjmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigsuspend\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<setjmp.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/signal.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/signal.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8a25dff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/signal.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,218 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGNAL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+signal
+\(em signal management
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+void (*signal(int \fIsig\fP, void (*\fIfunc\fP)(int)))(int);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+Use of this function is unspecified in a multi-threaded process.
+.P
+The
+\fIsignal\fR()
+function chooses one of three ways in which receipt of the signal
+number
+.IR sig
+is to be subsequently handled. If the value of
+.IR func
+is SIG_DFL, default handling for that signal shall occur.
+If the value of
+.IR func
+is SIG_IGN, the signal shall be ignored.
+Otherwise, the application shall ensure that
+.IR func
+points to a function to be called when that signal occurs. An
+invocation of such a function because of a signal, or (recursively) of
+any further functions called by that invocation (other than functions
+in the standard library), is called a ``signal handler''.
+.P
+When a signal occurs, and
+.IR func
+points to a function, it is implementation-defined whether the
+equivalent of a:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+signal(\fIsig\fP, SIG_DFL);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+is executed or the implementation prevents some implementation-defined
+set of signals (at least including
+.IR sig )
+from occurring until the current signal handling has completed. (If the
+value of
+.IR sig
+is SIGILL, the implementation may alternatively define that no action
+is taken.) Next the equivalent of:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(*func)(sig);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+is executed. If and when the function returns, if the value of
+.IR sig
+was SIGFPE, SIGILL, or SIGSEGV or any other implementation-defined
+value corresponding to
+a computational exception, the behavior is undefined. Otherwise, the
+program shall resume execution at the point it was interrupted. The
+ISO\ C standard places a restriction on applications relating to the use of
+\fIraise\fR()
+from signal handlers.
+This restriction does not apply to POSIX applications, as POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires
+\fIraise\fR()
+to be async-signal-safe (see
+.IR "Section 2.4.3" ", " "Signal Actions").
+.P
+If the process is multi-threaded,
+or if the process is single-threaded and a signal handler is
+executed other than as the result of:
+.IP " *" 4
+The process calling
+\fIabort\fR(),
+\fIraise\fR(),
+\fIkill\fR(),
+\fIpthread_kill\fR(),
+or
+\fIsigqueue\fR()
+to generate a signal that is not blocked
+.IP " *" 4
+A pending signal being unblocked and being delivered before the call
+that unblocked it returns
+.P
+the behavior is undefined if the signal handler refers to any object
+other than
+.IR errno
+with static storage duration other than by assigning a value to an
+object declared as
+.BR "volatile sig_atomic_t" ,
+or if the signal handler calls any function defined in this standard
+other than
+one of the functions listed in
+.IR "Section 2.4" ", " "Signal Concepts".
+.P
+At program start-up, the equivalent of:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+signal(\fIsig\fP, SIG_IGN);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+is executed for some signals, and the equivalent of:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+signal(\fIsig\fP, SIG_DFL);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+is executed for all other signals
+(see
+.IR exec ).
+.P
+The
+\fIsignal\fR()
+function shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the request can be honored,
+\fIsignal\fR()
+shall return the value of
+.IR func
+for the most recent call to
+\fIsignal\fR()
+for the specified signal
+.IR sig .
+Otherwise, SIG_ERR shall be returned and a positive value shall
+be stored in
+.IR errno .
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsignal\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR sig
+argument is not a valid signal number or an attempt is made to catch a
+signal that cannot be caught or ignore a signal that cannot be
+ignored.
+.P
+The
+\fIsignal\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+An attempt was made to set the action to SIG_DFL for a signal that
+cannot be caught or ignored (or both).
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+function provides a more comprehensive and reliable mechanism for
+controlling signals; new applications should use
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+rather than
+\fIsignal\fR().
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.4" ", " "Signal Concepts",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIpause\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIraise\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigsuspend\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwaitid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/signbit.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/signbit.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..889a631
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/signbit.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGNBIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+signbit
+\(em test sign
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+int signbit(real-floating \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIsignbit\fR()
+macro shall determine whether the sign of its argument value is
+negative. NaNs, zeros, and infinities have a sign bit.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIsignbit\fR()
+macro shall return a non-zero value if and only if the sign of its
+argument value is negative.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfpclassify\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisfinite\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisinf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnormal\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/signgam.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/signgam.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3ac9cb5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/signgam.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGNGAM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+signgam
+\(em log gamma function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+extern int signgam;
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIlgamma\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigpause.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigpause.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..727f324
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigpause.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGPAUSE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sigpause
+\(em remove a signal from the signal mask and suspend the thread
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int sigpause(int \fIsig\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIsighold\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigpending.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigpending.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9a1d63a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigpending.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGPENDING "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sigpending
+\(em examine pending signals
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int sigpending(sigset_t *\fIset\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsigpending\fR()
+function shall store, in the location referenced by the
+.IR set
+argument, the set of signals that are blocked from delivery to the
+calling thread and that are pending on the process or the calling
+thread.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsigpending\fR()
+shall return 0; otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIpthread_sigmask\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaddset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigdelset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigemptyset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigfillset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigismember\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigprocmask.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigprocmask.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5b5e70d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigprocmask.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGPROCMASK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sigprocmask
+\(em examine and change blocked signals
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int sigprocmask(int \fIhow\fP, const sigset_t *restrict \fIset\fP,
+    sigset_t *restrict \fIoset\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIpthread_sigmask\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigqueue.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigqueue.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b3dd2b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigqueue.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,188 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGQUEUE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sigqueue
+\(em queue a signal to a process
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int sigqueue(pid_t \fIpid\fP, int \fIsigno\fP, const union sigval \fIvalue\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsigqueue\fR()
+function shall cause the signal specified by
+.IR signo
+to be sent with the value specified by
+.IR value
+to the process specified by
+.IR pid .
+If
+.IR signo
+is zero (the null signal), error checking is performed but no signal is
+actually sent. The null signal can be used to check the validity of
+.IR pid .
+.P
+The conditions required for a process to have permission to queue a
+signal to another process are the same as for the
+\fIkill\fR()
+function.
+.P
+The
+\fIsigqueue\fR()
+function shall return immediately. If SA_SIGINFO is set for
+.IR signo
+and if the resources were available to queue the signal, the signal
+shall be queued and sent to the receiving process. If SA_SIGINFO is not
+set for
+.IR signo ,
+then
+.IR signo
+shall be sent at least once to the receiving process; it is unspecified
+whether
+.IR value
+shall be sent to the receiving process as a result of this call.
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR pid
+causes
+.IR signo
+to be generated for the sending process, and if
+.IR signo
+is not blocked for the calling thread and if no other thread has
+.IR signo
+unblocked or is waiting in a
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+function for
+.IR signo ,
+either
+.IR signo
+or at least the pending, unblocked signal shall be delivered to the
+calling thread before the
+\fIsigqueue\fR()
+function returns. Should any multiple pending signals in the range
+SIGRTMIN to
+SIGRTMAX be selected for delivery, it shall be the lowest numbered one.
+The selection order between realtime and non-realtime signals, or
+between multiple pending non-realtime signals, is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the specified signal shall have been
+queued, and the
+\fIsigqueue\fR()
+function shall return a value of zero. Otherwise, the function shall
+return a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsigqueue\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+No resources are available to queue the signal. The process has already
+queued
+{SIGQUEUE_MAX}
+signals that are still pending at the receiver(s), or a system-wide
+resource limit has been exceeded.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR signo
+argument is an invalid or unsupported signal number.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The process does not have appropriate privileges to send the signal
+to the receiving process.
+.TP
+.BR ESRCH
+The process
+.IR pid
+does not exist.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIsigqueue\fR()
+function allows an application to queue a realtime signal to itself or
+to another process, specifying the application-defined value. This is
+common practice in realtime applications on existing realtime systems.
+It was felt that specifying another function in the
+.IR sig .\|.\|.
+name space already carved out for signals was preferable to extending
+the interface to
+\fIkill\fR().
+.P
+Such a function became necessary when the put/get event function of
+the message queues was removed. It should be noted that the
+\fIsigqueue\fR()
+function implies reduced performance in a security-conscious
+implementation as the access permissions between the sender and
+receiver have to be checked on each send when the
+.IR pid
+is resolved into a target process. Such access checks were necessary
+only at message queue open in the previous interface.
+.P
+The standard developers required that
+\fIsigqueue\fR()
+have the same semantics with respect to the null signal as
+\fIkill\fR(),
+and that the same permission checking be used. But because of the
+difficulty of implementing the ``broadcast'' semantic of
+\fIkill\fR()
+(for example, to process groups) and the interaction with resource
+allocation, this semantic was not adopted. The
+\fIsigqueue\fR()
+function queues a signal to a single process specified by the
+.IR pid
+argument.
+.P
+The
+\fIsigqueue\fR()
+function can fail if the system has insufficient resources to queue the
+signal. An explicit limit on the number of queued signals that a
+process could send was introduced. While the limit is ``per-sender'',
+\&this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not specify that the resources be part of the state
+of the sender. This would require either that the sender be maintained
+after exit until all signals that it had sent to other processes were
+handled or that all such signals that had not yet been acted upon be
+removed from the queue(s) of the receivers. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not
+preclude this behavior, but an implementation that allocated queuing
+resources from a system-wide pool (with per-sender limits) and that
+leaves queued signals pending after the sender exits is also
+permitted.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.8.1" ", " "Realtime Signals"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigrelse.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigrelse.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..49d3192
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigrelse.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGRELSE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sigrelse,
+sigset
+\(em signal management
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int sigrelse(int \fIsig\fP);
+void (*sigset(int \fIsig\fP, void (*\fIdisp\fP)(int)))(int);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIsighold\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigsetjmp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigsetjmp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a1882fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigsetjmp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,155 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGSETJMP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sigsetjmp
+\(em set jump point for a non-local goto
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <setjmp.h>
+.P
+int sigsetjmp(sigjmp_buf \fIenv\fP, int \fIsavemask\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsigsetjmp\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+function, except as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+References to
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+are equivalent to
+\fIsigsetjmp\fR().
+.IP " *" 4
+References to
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+are equivalent to
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR().
+.IP " *" 4
+If the value of the
+.IR savemask
+argument is not 0,
+\fIsigsetjmp\fR()
+shall also save the current signal mask of the calling thread as part
+of the calling environment.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the return is from a successful direct invocation,
+\fIsigsetjmp\fR()
+shall return 0. If the return is from a call to
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR(),
+\fIsigsetjmp\fR()
+shall return a non-zero value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The distinction between
+\fIsetjmp\fR()/\c
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+and
+\fIsigsetjmp\fR()/\c
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR()
+is only significant for programs which use
+\fIsigaction\fR(),
+\fIsigprocmask\fR(),
+or
+\fIsigsuspend\fR().
+.P
+Note that since this function is defined in terms of
+\fIsetjmp\fR(),
+if
+.IR savemask
+is zero, it is unspecified whether the signal mask is saved.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The ISO\ C standard specifies various restrictions on the usage of the
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+macro in order to permit implementors to recognize the name in the
+compiler and not implement an actual function. These same restrictions
+apply to the
+\fIsigsetjmp\fR()
+macro.
+.P
+There are processors that cannot easily support these calls, but this
+was not considered a sufficient reason to exclude them.
+.P
+4.2 BSD, 4.3 BSD, and XSI-conformant systems provide functions named
+\fI_setjmp\fR()
+and
+\fI_longjmp\fR()
+that, together with
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+and
+\fIlongjmp\fR(),
+provide the same functionality as
+\fIsigsetjmp\fR()
+and
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR().
+On those systems,
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+and
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+save and restore signal masks, while
+\fI_setjmp\fR()
+and
+\fI_longjmp\fR()
+do not. On System V Release 3
+and in corresponding issues of the SVID,
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+and
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+are explicitly defined not to save and restore signal masks. In order
+to permit existing practice in both cases, the relation of
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+and
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+to signal masks is not specified, and a new set of functions is defined
+instead.
+.P
+The
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+and
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR()
+functions operate as in the previous issue provided the matching
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+or
+\fIsigsetjmp\fR()
+has been performed in the same thread. Non-local jumps into contexts
+saved by other threads would be at best a questionable practice and
+were not considered worthy of standardization.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpthread_sigmask\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsiglongjmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsignal\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigsuspend\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<setjmp.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigsuspend.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigsuspend.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..22efe90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigsuspend.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGSUSPEND "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sigsuspend
+\(em wait for a signal
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int sigsuspend(const sigset_t *\fIsigmask\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsigsuspend\fR()
+function shall replace the current signal mask of the calling thread
+with the set of signals pointed to by
+.IR sigmask
+and then suspend the thread until delivery of a signal whose action is
+either to execute a signal-catching function or to terminate the
+process. This shall not cause any other signals that may have been
+pending on the process to become pending on the thread.
+.P
+If the action is to terminate the process then
+\fIsigsuspend\fR()
+shall never return. If the action is to execute a signal-catching
+function, then
+\fIsigsuspend\fR()
+shall return after the signal-catching function returns, with the
+signal mask restored to the set that existed prior to the
+\fIsigsuspend\fR()
+call.
+.P
+It is not possible to block signals that cannot be ignored. This is
+enforced by the system without causing an error to be indicated.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Since
+\fIsigsuspend\fR()
+suspends thread execution indefinitely, there is no successful
+completion return value. If a return occurs, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsigsuspend\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal is caught by the calling process and control is returned from
+the signal-catching function.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Normally, at the beginning of a critical code section, a specified set
+of signals is blocked using the
+\fIsigprocmask\fR()
+function. When the thread has completed the critical section and
+needs to wait for the previously blocked signal(s), it pauses by
+calling
+\fIsigsuspend\fR()
+with the mask that was returned by the
+\fIsigprocmask\fR()
+call.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Code which wants to avoid the ambiguity of the signal mask for thread
+cancellation handlers can install an additional cancellation handler
+which resets the signal mask to the expected value.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+void cleanup(void *arg)
+{
+    sigset_t *ss = (sigset_t *) arg;
+    pthread_sigmask(SIG_SETMASK, ss, NULL);
+}
+.P
+int call_sigsuspend(const sigset_t *mask)
+{
+    sigset_t oldmask;
+    int result;
+    pthread_sigmask(SIG_SETMASK, NULL, &oldmask);
+    pthread_cleanup_push(cleanup, &oldmask);
+    result = sigsuspend(sigmask);
+    pthread_cleanup_pop(0);
+    return result;
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.4" ", " "Signal Concepts",
+.IR "\fIpause\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaddset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigdelset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigemptyset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigfillset\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigtimedwait.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigtimedwait.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f0ecfd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigtimedwait.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,366 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGTIMEDWAIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sigtimedwait,
+sigwaitinfo
+\(em wait for queued signals
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int sigtimedwait(const sigset_t *restrict \fIset\fP,
+    siginfo_t *restrict \fIinfo\fP,
+    const struct timespec *restrict \fItimeout\fP);
+int sigwaitinfo(const sigset_t *restrict \fIset\fP,
+    siginfo_t *restrict \fIinfo\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsigtimedwait\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIsigwaitinfo\fR()
+except that if none of the signals specified by
+.IR set
+are pending,
+\fIsigtimedwait\fR()
+shall wait for the time interval specified in the
+.BR timespec
+structure referenced by
+.IR timeout .
+If the
+.BR timespec
+structure pointed to by
+.IR timeout
+is zero-valued and if none of the signals specified by
+.IR set
+are pending, then
+\fIsigtimedwait\fR()
+shall return immediately with an error. If
+.IR timeout
+is the null pointer, the behavior is unspecified.
+If the Monotonic Clock option is supported, the CLOCK_MONOTONIC clock
+shall be used to measure the time interval specified by the
+.IR timeout
+argument.
+.P
+The
+\fIsigwaitinfo\fR()
+function selects the pending signal from the set specified by
+.IR set .
+Should any of multiple pending signals in the range SIGRTMIN to
+SIGRTMAX be selected,
+it shall be the lowest numbered one. The selection order between
+realtime and non-realtime signals, or between multiple pending
+non-realtime signals, is unspecified. If no signal in
+.IR set
+is pending at the time of the call, the calling thread shall be
+suspended until one or more signals in
+.IR set
+become pending or until it is interrupted by an unblocked, caught
+signal.
+.P
+The
+\fIsigwaitinfo\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+function if the
+.IR info
+argument is NULL. If the
+.IR info
+argument is non-NULL, the
+\fIsigwaitinfo\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIsigwait\fR(),
+except that the selected signal number shall be stored in the
+.IR si_signo
+member, and the cause of the signal shall be stored in the
+.IR si_code
+member. If any value is queued to the selected signal, the first such
+queued value shall be dequeued and, if the
+.IR info
+argument is non-NULL, the value shall be stored in the
+.IR si_value
+member of
+.IR info .
+The system resource used to queue the signal shall be released and
+returned to the system for other use. If no value is queued, the
+content of the
+.IR si_value
+member is undefined. If no further signals are queued for the selected
+signal, the pending indication for that signal shall be reset.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion (that is, one of the signals specified by
+.IR set
+is pending or is generated)
+\fIsigwaitinfo\fR()
+and
+\fIsigtimedwait\fR()
+shall return the selected signal number. Otherwise, the function shall
+return a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsigtimedwait\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+No signal specified by
+.IR set
+was generated within the specified timeout period.
+.P
+The
+\fIsigtimedwait\fR()
+and
+\fIsigwaitinfo\fR()
+functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The wait was interrupted by an unblocked, caught signal. It shall be
+documented in system documentation whether this error causes these
+functions to fail.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIsigtimedwait\fR()
+function may also fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR timeout
+argument specified a
+.IR tv_nsec
+value less than zero or greater than or equal to 1\|000 million.
+.P
+An implementation should only check for this error if no signal is
+pending in
+.IR set
+and it is necessary to wait.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIsigtimedwait\fR()
+function times out and returns an
+.BR [EAGAIN] 
+error. Application developers should note that this is inconsistent
+with other functions such as
+\fIpthread_cond_timedwait\fR()
+that return
+.BR [ETIMEDOUT] .
+.P
+Note that in order to ensure that generated signals are queued and signal
+values passed to
+\fIsigqueue\fR()
+are available in
+.IR si_value ,
+applications which use
+\fIsigwaitinfo\fR()
+or
+\fIsigtimedwait\fR()
+need to set the SA_SIGINFO flag for each signal in the set (see
+.IR "Section 2.4" ", " "Signal Concepts").
+This means setting each signal to be handled by a three-argument
+signal-catching function, even if the handler will never be called.
+It is not possible (portably) to set a signal handler to SIG_DFL while
+setting the SA_SIGINFO flag, because assigning to the
+.IR sa_handler
+member of
+.BR "struct sigaction"
+instead of the
+.IR sa_sigaction
+member would result in undefined behavior, and SIG_DFL need not be
+assignment-compatible with
+.IR sa_sigaction .
+Even if an assignment of SIG_DFL to
+.IR sa_sigaction
+is accepted by the compiler, the implementation need not treat this value
+as special\(emit could just be taken as the address of a signal-catching
+function.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Existing programming practice on realtime systems uses the ability to
+pause waiting for a selected set of events and handle the first event
+that occurs in-line instead of in a signal-handling function. This
+allows applications to be written in an event-directed style similar to
+a state machine. This style of programming is useful for largescale
+transaction processing in which the overall throughput of an
+application and the ability to clearly track states are more important
+than the ability to minimize the response time of individual event
+handling.
+.P
+It is possible to construct a signal-waiting macro function out of the
+realtime signal function mechanism defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. However, such a
+macro has to include the definition of a generalized handler for all
+signals to be waited on. A significant portion of the overhead of
+handler processing can be avoided if the signal-waiting function is
+provided by the kernel. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 therefore provides two signal-waiting
+functions\(emone that waits indefinitely and one with a timeout\(emas
+part of the overall realtime signal function specification.
+.P
+The specification of a function with a timeout allows an application
+to be written that can be broken out of a wait after a set period of
+time if no event has occurred. It was argued that setting a timer
+event before the wait and recognizing the timer event in the wait would
+also implement the same functionality, but at a lower performance
+level. Because of the performance degradation associated with the
+user-level specification of a timer event and the subsequent
+cancellation of that timer event after the wait completes for a valid
+event, and the complexity associated with handling potential race
+conditions associated with the user-level method, the separate
+function has been included.
+.P
+Note that the semantics of the
+\fIsigwaitinfo\fR()
+function are nearly identical to that of the
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+function defined by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008. The only difference is that
+\fIsigwaitinfo\fR()
+returns the queued signal value in the
+.IR value
+argument. The return of the queued value is required so that
+applications can differentiate between multiple events queued to the
+same signal number.
+.P
+The two distinct functions are being maintained because some
+implementations may choose to implement the POSIX Threads Extension functions and not
+implement the queued signals extensions. Note, though, that
+\fIsigwaitinfo\fR()
+does not return the queued value if the
+.IR value
+argument is NULL, so the POSIX Threads Extension
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+function can be implemented as a macro on
+\fIsigwaitinfo\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIsigtimedwait\fR()
+function was separated from the
+\fIsigwaitinfo\fR()
+function to address concerns regarding the overloading of the
+.IR timeout
+pointer to indicate indefinite wait (no timeout), timed wait, and
+immediate return, and concerns regarding consistency with other
+functions where the conditional and timed waits were separate
+functions from the pure blocking function. The semantics of
+\fIsigtimedwait\fR()
+are specified such that
+\fIsigwaitinfo\fR()
+could be implemented as a macro with a null pointer for
+.IR timeout .
+.P
+The
+.IR sigwait
+functions provide a synchronous mechanism for threads to wait for
+asynchronously-generated signals. One important question was how many
+threads that are suspended in a call to a
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+function for a signal should return from the call when the signal is
+sent. Four choices were considered:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Return an error for multiple simultaneous calls to
+.IR sigwait
+functions for the same signal.
+.IP " 2." 4
+One or more threads return.
+.IP " 3." 4
+All waiting threads return.
+.IP " 4." 4
+Exactly one thread returns.
+.P
+Prohibiting multiple calls to
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+for the same signal was felt to be overly restrictive. The ``one or
+more'' behavior made implementation of conforming packages easy at the
+expense of forcing POSIX threads clients to protect against multiple
+simultaneous calls to
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+in application code in order to achieve predictable behavior. There
+was concern that the ``all waiting threads'' behavior would result in
+``signal broadcast storms'', consuming excessive CPU resources by
+replicating the signals in the general case. Furthermore, no
+convincing examples could be presented that delivery to all was either
+simpler or more powerful than delivery to one.
+.P
+Thus, the consensus was that exactly one thread that was suspended in a
+call to a
+.IR sigwait
+function for a signal should return when that signal occurs. This is
+not an onerous restriction as:
+.IP " *" 4
+A multi-way signal wait can be built from the single-way wait.
+.IP " *" 4
+Signals should only be handled by application-level code, as library
+routines cannot guess what the application wants to do with signals
+generated for the entire process.
+.IP " *" 4
+Applications can thus arrange for a single thread to wait for any given
+signal and call any needed routines upon its arrival.
+.P
+In an application that is using signals for interprocess communication,
+signal processing is typically done in one place. Alternatively, if
+the signal is being caught so that process cleanup can be done, the
+signal handler thread can call separate process cleanup routines for
+each portion of the application. Since the application main line
+started each portion of the application, it is at the right abstraction
+level to tell each portion of the application to clean up.
+.P
+Certainly, there exist programming styles where it is logical to
+consider waiting for a single signal in multiple threads. A simple
+\fIsigwait_multiple\fR()
+routine can be constructed to achieve this goal. A possible
+implementation would be to have each
+\fIsigwait_multiple\fR()
+caller registered as having expressed interest in a set of signals.
+The caller then waits on a thread-specific condition variable. A
+single server thread calls a
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+function on the union of all registered signals. When the
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+function returns, the appropriate state is set and condition variables
+are broadcast. New
+\fIsigwait_multiple\fR()
+callers may cause the pending
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+call to be canceled and reissued in order to update the set of signals
+being waited for.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.4" ", " "Signal Concepts",
+.IR "Section 2.8.1" ", " "Realtime Signals",
+.IR "\fIpause\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_sigmask\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigpending\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigsuspend\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigwait\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigwait.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigwait.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1fe7ad5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigwait.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGWAIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sigwait
+\(em wait for queued signals
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int sigwait(const sigset_t *restrict \fIset\fP, int *restrict \fIsig\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+function shall select a pending signal from
+.IR set ,
+atomically clear it from the system's set of pending signals, and
+return that signal number in the location referenced by
+.IR sig .
+If prior to the call to
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+there are multiple pending instances of a single signal number, it is
+implementation-defined whether upon successful return there are any
+remaining pending signals for that signal number.
+If the implementation supports queued signals and there are multiple
+signals queued for the signal number selected, the first such queued
+signal shall cause a return from
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+and the remainder shall remain queued. If no signal in
+.IR set
+is pending at the time of the call, the thread shall be suspended
+until one or more becomes pending. The signals defined by
+.IR set
+shall have been blocked at the time of the call to
+\fIsigwait\fR();
+otherwise, the behavior is undefined. The effect of
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+on the signal actions for the signals in
+.IR set
+is unspecified.
+.P
+If more than one thread is using
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+to wait for the same signal, no more than one of these threads shall
+return from
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+with the signal number. If more than a single thread is blocked in
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+for a signal when that signal is generated for the process, it is
+unspecified which of the waiting threads returns from
+\fIsigwait\fR().
+If the signal is generated for a specific thread, as by
+\fIpthread_kill\fR(),
+only that thread shall return.
+.P
+Should any of the multiple pending signals in the range SIGRTMIN to
+SIGRTMAX be selected, it shall be the lowest numbered one. The
+selection order between realtime and non-realtime signals, or between
+multiple pending non-realtime signals, is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+shall store the signal number of the received signal at the location
+referenced by
+.IR sig
+and return zero. Otherwise, an error number shall be returned to
+indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR set
+argument contains an invalid or unsupported signal number.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+To provide a convenient way for a thread to wait for a signal, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+provides the
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+function. For most cases where a thread has to wait for a signal, the
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+function should be quite convenient, efficient, and adequate.
+.P
+However, requests were made for a lower-level primitive than
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+and for semaphores that could be used by threads. After some
+consideration, threads were allowed to use semaphores and
+\fIsem_post\fR()
+was defined to be async-signal-safe.
+.P
+In summary, when it is necessary for code run in response to an
+asynchronous signal to notify a thread,
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+should be used to handle the signal. Alternatively, if the
+implementation provides semaphores, they also can be used, either
+following
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+or from within a signal handling routine previously registered with
+\fIsigaction\fR().
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.4" ", " "Signal Concepts",
+.IR "Section 2.8.1" ", " "Realtime Signals",
+.IR "\fIpause\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_sigmask\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigpending\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigsuspend\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigtimedwait\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigwaitinfo.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigwaitinfo.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cb4cd78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sigwaitinfo.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIGWAITINFO "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sigwaitinfo
+\(em wait for queued signals
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+.P
+int sigwaitinfo(const sigset_t *restrict \fIset\fP, siginfo_t *restrict \fIinfo\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIsigtimedwait\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sin.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sin.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..53a0a97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sin.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,160 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SIN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sin,
+sinf,
+sinl
+\(em sine function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double sin(double \fIx\fP);
+float sinf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double sinl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the sine of their argument
+.IR x ,
+measured in radians.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the sine of
+.IR x .
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is subnormal, a range error may occur
+.br
+and
+.IR x
+should be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is not returned,
+\fIsin\fR(),
+\fIsinf\fR(),
+and
+\fIsinl\fR()
+shall return an implementation-defined value no greater in magnitude
+than DBL_MIN, FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN, respectively.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-Inf, a domain error shall occur, and a NaN shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The
+.IR x
+argument is \(+-Inf.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is subnormal
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Taking the Sine of a 45-Degree Angle"
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <math.h>
+\&...
+double radians = 45.0 * M_PI / 180;
+double result;
+\&...
+result = sin(radians);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+These functions may lose accuracy when their argument is near a
+multiple of \(*p or is far from 0.0.
+.P
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIasin\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sinh.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sinh.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4137556
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sinh.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SINH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sinh,
+sinhf,
+sinhl
+\(em hyperbolic sine functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double sinh(double \fIx\fP);
+float sinhf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double sinhl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the hyperbolic sine of their argument
+.IR x .
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the hyperbolic
+sine of
+.IR x .
+.P
+If the result would cause an overflow, a range error shall occur and
+\(+-HUGE_VAL, \(+-HUGE_VALF, and \(+-HUGE_VALL (with the same sign as
+.IR x )
+shall be returned as appropriate for the type of the function.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0 or \(+-Inf,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is subnormal, a range error may occur
+.br
+and
+.IR x
+should be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is not returned,
+\fIsinh\fR(),
+\fIsinhf\fR(),
+and
+\fIsinhl\fR()
+shall return an implementation-defined value no greater in magnitude
+than DBL_MIN, FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN, respectively.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result would cause an overflow.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the overflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The value
+.IR x
+is subnormal.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIasinh\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcosh\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItanh\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sinl.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sinl.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1872e03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sinl.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SINL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sinl
+\(em sine function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+long double sinl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIsin\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sleep.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sleep.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..467d9d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sleep.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,224 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SLEEP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sleep
+\(em suspend execution for an interval of time
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+unsigned sleep(unsigned \fIseconds\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsleep\fR()
+function shall cause the calling thread to be suspended from execution
+until either the number of realtime seconds specified by the argument
+.IR seconds
+has elapsed or a signal is delivered to the calling thread and its
+action is to invoke a signal-catching function or to terminate the
+process. The suspension time may be longer than requested due to the
+scheduling of other activity by the system.
+.P
+If a SIGALRM signal is generated for the calling process during
+execution of
+\fIsleep\fR()
+and if the SIGALRM signal is being ignored or blocked from delivery, it
+is unspecified whether
+\fIsleep\fR()
+returns when the SIGALRM signal is scheduled. If the signal is being
+blocked, it is also unspecified whether it remains pending after
+\fIsleep\fR()
+returns or it is discarded.
+.P
+If a SIGALRM signal is generated for the calling process during
+execution of
+\fIsleep\fR(),
+except as a result of a prior call to
+\fIalarm\fR(),
+and if the SIGALRM signal is not being ignored or blocked from
+delivery, it is unspecified whether that signal has any effect other
+than causing
+\fIsleep\fR()
+to return.
+.P
+If a signal-catching function interrupts
+\fIsleep\fR()
+and examines or changes either the time a SIGALRM is scheduled to be
+generated, the action associated with the SIGALRM signal, or whether
+the SIGALRM signal is blocked from delivery, the results are
+unspecified.
+.P
+If a signal-catching function interrupts
+\fIsleep\fR()
+and calls
+\fIsiglongjmp\fR()
+or
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+to restore an environment saved prior to the
+\fIsleep\fR()
+call, the action associated with the SIGALRM signal and the time at
+which a SIGALRM signal is scheduled to be generated are unspecified.
+It is also unspecified whether the SIGALRM signal is blocked, unless
+the signal mask of the process is restored as part of the environment.
+.P
+Interactions between
+\fIsleep\fR()
+and
+\fIsetitimer\fR()
+are unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If
+\fIsleep\fR()
+returns because the requested time has elapsed, the value returned
+shall be 0. If
+\fIsleep\fR()
+returns due to delivery of a signal, the return value shall be
+the ``unslept'' amount (the requested time minus the time actually
+slept) in seconds.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+There are two general approaches to the implementation of the
+\fIsleep\fR()
+function. One is to use the
+\fIalarm\fR()
+function to schedule a SIGALRM
+signal and then suspend the calling thread waiting for that signal. The
+other is to implement an independent facility. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 permits either
+approach.
+.P
+In order to comply with the requirement that no primitive shall change
+a process attribute unless explicitly described by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, an
+implementation using SIGALRM must carefully take into account any
+SIGALRM signal scheduled by previous
+\fIalarm\fR()
+calls, the action previously established for SIGALRM, and whether
+SIGALRM was blocked. If a SIGALRM has been scheduled before the
+\fIsleep\fR()
+would ordinarily complete, the
+\fIsleep\fR()
+must be shortened to that time and a SIGALRM generated (possibly
+simulated by direct invocation of the signal-catching function) before
+\fIsleep\fR()
+returns. If a SIGALRM has been scheduled after the
+\fIsleep\fR()
+would ordinarily complete, it must be rescheduled for the same time
+before
+\fIsleep\fR()
+returns. The action and blocking for SIGALRM must be saved and
+restored.
+.P
+Historical implementations often implement the SIGALRM-based version
+using
+\fIalarm\fR()
+and
+\fIpause\fR().
+One such implementation is prone to infinite hangups, as described in
+.IR "\fIpause\fR\^(\|)".
+Another such implementation uses the C-language
+\fIsetjmp\fR()
+and
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+functions to avoid that window. That implementation introduces a
+different problem: when the SIGALRM signal interrupts a signal-catching
+function installed by the user to catch a different signal, the
+\fIlongjmp\fR()
+aborts that signal-catching function. An implementation based on
+\fIsigprocmask\fR(),
+\fIalarm\fR(),
+and
+\fIsigsuspend\fR()
+can avoid these problems.
+.P
+Despite all reasonable care, there are several very subtle, but
+detectable and unavoidable, differences between the two types of
+implementations. These are the cases mentioned in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 where
+some other activity relating to SIGALRM takes place, and the results
+are stated to be unspecified. All of these cases are sufficiently
+unusual as not to be of concern to most applications.
+.P
+See also the discussion of the term
+.IR realtime
+in
+.IR "\fIalarm\fR\^(\|)".
+.P
+Since
+\fIsleep\fR()
+can be implemented using
+\fIalarm\fR(),
+the discussion about alarms occurring early under
+\fIalarm\fR()
+applies to
+\fIsleep\fR()
+as well.
+.P
+Application developers should note that the type of the argument
+.IR seconds
+and the return value of
+\fIsleep\fR()
+is
+.BR unsigned .
+That means that a Strictly Conforming POSIX System Interfaces
+Application
+cannot pass a value greater than the minimum guaranteed value for
+{UINT_MAX},
+which the ISO\ C standard sets as 65\|535, and any application passing a larger
+value is restricting its portability. A different type was considered,
+but historical implementations, including those with a 16-bit
+.BR int
+type, consistently use either
+.BR unsigned
+or
+.BR int .
+.P
+Scheduling delays may cause the process to return from the
+\fIsleep\fR()
+function significantly after the requested time. In such cases, the
+return value should be set to zero, since the formula (requested time
+minus the time actually spent) yields a negative number and
+\fIsleep\fR()
+returns an
+.BR unsigned .
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIalarm\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetitimer\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fInanosleep\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpause\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigaction\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsigsetjmp\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/snprintf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/snprintf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..58d1182
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/snprintf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SNPRINTF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+snprintf
+\(em print formatted output
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int snprintf(char *restrict \fIs\fP, size_t \fIn\fP,
+    const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfprintf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sockatmark.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sockatmark.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..26b231d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sockatmark.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SOCKATMARK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sockatmark
+\(em determine whether a socket is at the out-of-band mark
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+.P
+int sockatmark(int \fIs\fR);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsockatmark\fR()
+function shall determine whether the socket specified by the descriptor
+.IR s
+is at the out-of-band data mark (see
+.IR "Section 2.10.12" ", " "Socket Out-of-Band Data State").
+If the protocol for the socket supports out-of-band data by marking the
+stream with an out-of-band data mark, the
+\fIsockatmark\fR()
+function shall return 1 when all data preceding the mark has been read
+and the out-of-band data mark is the first element in the receive
+queue. The
+\fIsockatmark\fR()
+function shall not remove the mark from the stream.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIsockatmark\fR()
+function shall return a value indicating whether the socket is at an
+out-of-band data mark. If the protocol has marked the data stream and
+all data preceding the mark has been read, the return value shall be 1;
+if there is no mark, or if data precedes the mark in the receive queue,
+the
+\fIsockatmark\fR()
+function shall return 0. Otherwise, it shall return a value of \(mi1
+and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsockatmark\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR s
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTTY
+The file associated with the
+.IR s
+argument is not a socket.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The use of this function between receive operations allows an
+application to determine which received data precedes the out-of-band
+data and which follows the out-of-band data.
+.P
+There is an inherent race condition in the use of this function. On an
+empty receive queue, the current read of the location might well be at
+the ``mark'', but the system has no way of knowing that the next data
+segment that will arrive from the network will carry the mark, and
+\fIsockatmark\fR()
+will return false, and the next read operation will silently consume
+the mark.
+.P
+Hence, this function can only be used reliably when the application
+already knows that the out-of-band data has been seen by the system or
+that it is known that there is data waiting to be read at the socket
+(via SIGURG or
+\fIselect\fR()).
+See
+.IR "Section 2.10.11" ", " "Socket Receive Queue",
+.IR "Section 2.10.12" ", " "Socket Out-of-Band Data State",
+.IR "Section 2.10.14" ", " "Signals",
+and
+\fIpselect\fR()
+for details.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIsockatmark\fR()
+function replaces the historical SIOCATMARK command to
+\fIioctl\fR()
+which implemented the same functionality on many implementations. Using
+a wrapper function follows the adopted conventions to avoid specifying
+commands to the
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function, other than those now included to support XSI STREAMS. The
+\fIsockatmark\fR()
+function could be implemented as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/ioctl.h>
+.P
+int sockatmark(int s)
+{
+    int val;
+    if (ioctl(s,SIOCATMARK,&val)==\(mi1)
+        return(\(mi1);
+    return(val);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The use of
+.BR [ENOTTY] 
+to indicate an incorrect descriptor type matches the historical
+behavior of SIOCATMARK.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.10.12" ", " "Socket Out-of-Band Data State",
+.IR "\fIpselect\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecvmsg\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/socket.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/socket.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..da1fc88
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/socket.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,182 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SOCKET "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+socket
+\(em create an endpoint for communication
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+.P
+int socket(int \fIdomain\fP, int \fItype\fP, int \fIprotocol\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsocket\fR()
+function shall create an unbound socket in a communications domain, and
+return a file descriptor that can be used in later function calls that
+operate on sockets.
+.P
+The
+\fIsocket\fR()
+function takes the following arguments:
+.IP "\fIdomain\fR" 12
+Specifies the communications domain in which a socket is to be
+created.
+.IP "\fItype\fR" 12
+Specifies the type of socket to be created.
+.IP "\fIprotocol\fR" 12
+Specifies a particular protocol to be used with the socket. Specifying
+a
+.IR protocol
+of 0 causes
+\fIsocket\fR()
+to use an unspecified default protocol appropriate for the requested
+socket type.
+.P
+The
+.IR domain
+argument specifies the address family used in the communications
+domain. The address families supported by the system are
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+Symbolic constants that can be used for the domain argument are defined
+in the
+.IR <sys/socket.h> 
+header.
+.P
+The
+.IR type
+argument specifies the socket type, which determines the semantics of
+communication over the socket. The following socket types are defined;
+implementations may specify additional socket types:
+.IP SOCK_STREAM 12
+Provides sequenced, reliable, bidirectional, connection-mode byte
+streams, and may provide a transmission mechanism for out-of-band
+data.
+.IP SOCK_DGRAM 12
+Provides datagrams, which are connectionless-mode, unreliable messages
+of fixed maximum length.
+.IP SOCK_SEQPACKET 12
+.br
+Provides sequenced, reliable, bidirectional, connection-mode
+transmission paths for records. A record can be sent using one or more
+output operations and received using one or more input operations, but
+a single operation never transfers part of more than one record. Record
+boundaries are visible to the receiver via the MSG_EOR flag.
+.P
+If the
+.IR protocol
+argument is non-zero, it shall specify a protocol that is supported by
+the address family. If the
+.IR protocol
+argument is zero, the default protocol for this address family and type
+shall be used. The protocols supported by the system are
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+The process may need to have appropriate privileges to use the
+\fIsocket\fR()
+function or to create some sockets.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsocket\fR()
+shall return a non-negative integer, the socket file descriptor.
+Otherwise, a value of \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.br
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsocket\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAFNOSUPPORT
+.br
+The implementation does not support the specified address family.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+No more file descriptors are available for the system.
+.TP
+.BR EPROTONOSUPPORT
+.br
+The protocol is not supported by the address family, or the protocol is
+not supported by the implementation.
+.TP
+.BR EPROTOTYPE
+The socket type is not supported by the protocol.
+.P
+The
+\fIsocket\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+The process does not have appropriate privileges.
+.TP
+.BR ENOBUFS
+Insufficient resources were available in the system to perform the
+operation.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory was available to fulfill the request.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The documentation for specific address families specifies which
+protocols each address family supports. The documentation for specific
+protocols specifies which socket types each protocol supports.
+.P
+The application can determine whether an address family is supported by
+trying to create a socket with
+.IR domain
+set to the protocol in question.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIaccept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIbind\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIconnect\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetsockname\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetsockopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlisten\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecvfrom\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrecvmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsend\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsendmsg\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetsockopt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIshutdown\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsocketpair\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<netinet_in.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/socketpair.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/socketpair.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8b3ddef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/socketpair.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,170 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SOCKETPAIR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+socketpair
+\(em create a pair of connected sockets
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+.P
+int socketpair(int \fIdomain\fP, int \fItype\fP, int \fIprotocol\fP,
+    int \fIsocket_vector\fP[2]);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsocketpair\fR()
+function shall create an unbound pair of connected sockets in a
+specified
+.IR domain ,
+of a specified
+.IR type ,
+under the protocol optionally specified by the
+.IR protocol
+argument. The two sockets shall be identical. The file descriptors
+used in referencing the created sockets shall be returned in
+.IR socket_vector [0]
+and
+.IR socket_vector [1].
+.P
+The
+\fIsocketpair\fR()
+function takes the following arguments:
+.IP "\fIdomain\fR" 12
+Specifies the communications domain in which the sockets are to be
+created.
+.IP "\fItype\fR" 12
+Specifies the type of sockets to be created.
+.IP "\fIprotocol\fR" 12
+Specifies a particular protocol to be used with the sockets.
+Specifying a
+.IR protocol
+of 0 causes
+\fIsocketpair\fR()
+to use an unspecified default protocol appropriate for the requested
+socket type.
+.IP "\fIsocket_vector\fR" 12
+Specifies a 2-integer array to hold the file descriptors of the created
+socket pair.
+.P
+The
+.IR type
+argument specifies the socket type, which determines the semantics of
+communications over the socket. The following socket types are defined;
+implementations may specify additional socket types:
+.IP SOCK_STREAM 14
+Provides sequenced, reliable, bidirectional, connection-mode byte
+streams, and may provide a transmission mechanism for out-of-band
+data.
+.IP SOCK_DGRAM 14
+Provides datagrams, which are connectionless-mode, unreliable messages
+of fixed maximum length.
+.IP SOCK_SEQPACKET 14
+Provides sequenced, reliable, bidirectional, connection-mode
+transmission paths for records. A record can be sent using one or more
+output operations and received using one or more input operations, but
+a single operation never transfers part of more than one record. Record
+boundaries are visible to the receiver via the MSG_EOR flag.
+.P
+If the
+.IR protocol
+argument is non-zero, it shall specify a protocol that is supported by
+the address family. If the
+.IR protocol
+argument is zero, the default protocol for this address family and type
+shall be used. The protocols supported by the system are
+implementation-defined.
+.P
+The process may need to have appropriate privileges to use the
+\fIsocketpair\fR()
+function or to create some sockets.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, this function shall return 0; otherwise,
+\(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsocketpair\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAFNOSUPPORT
+.br
+The implementation does not support the specified address family.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All, or all but one, of the file descriptors available to the
+process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+No more file descriptors are available for the system.
+.TP
+.BR EOPNOTSUPP
+The specified protocol does not permit creation of socket pairs.
+.TP
+.BR EPROTONOSUPPORT
+.br
+The protocol is not supported by the address family, or the protocol is
+not supported by the implementation.
+.TP
+.BR EPROTOTYPE
+The socket type is not supported by the protocol.
+.P
+The
+\fIsocketpair\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+The process does not have appropriate privileges.
+.TP
+.BR ENOBUFS
+Insufficient resources were available in the system to perform the
+operation.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient memory was available to fulfill the request.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The documentation for specific address families specifies which
+protocols each address family supports. The documentation for specific
+protocols specifies which socket types each protocol supports.
+.P
+The
+\fIsocketpair\fR()
+function is used primarily with UNIX domain sockets and need not be
+supported for other domains.
+.SH "RATIONALE"
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsocket\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_socket.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sprintf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sprintf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..72c9e14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sprintf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SPRINTF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sprintf
+\(em print formatted output
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int sprintf(char *restrict \fIs\fP, const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfprintf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sqrt.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sqrt.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f1a8c3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sqrt.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SQRT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.EQ
+delim $$
+.EN
+.SH NAME
+sqrt,
+sqrtf,
+sqrtl
+\(em square root function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double sqrt(double \fIx\fP);
+float sqrtf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double sqrtl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the square root of their argument
+.IR x ,
+$sqrt {x}$.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the square
+root of
+.IR x .
+.P
+For finite values of
+.IR x
+< \(mi0, a domain error shall occur, and
+either a NaN (if supported), or
+an implementation-defined value shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0 or +Inf,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(miInf, a domain error shall occur, and a NaN shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The finite value of
+.IR x
+is < \(mi0,
+or
+.IR x
+is \(miInf.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Taking the Square Root of 9.0"
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <math.h>
+\&...
+double x = 9.0;
+double result;
+\&...
+result = sqrt(x);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/srand.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/srand.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1d03553
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/srand.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SRAND "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+srand
+\(em pseudo-random number generator
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+void srand(unsigned \fIseed\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIrand\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/srand48.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/srand48.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e645ce7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/srand48.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SRAND48 "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+srand48
+\(em seed the uniformly distributed double-precision pseudo-random
+number generator
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+void srand48(long \fIseedval\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIdrand48\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/srandom.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/srandom.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..26a0b0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/srandom.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SRANDOM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+srandom
+\(em seed pseudo-random number generator
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+void srandom(unsigned \fIseed\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIinitstate\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sscanf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sscanf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..117c217
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sscanf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SSCANF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sscanf
+\(em convert formatted input
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int sscanf(const char *restrict \fIs\fP, const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfscanf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/stat.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/stat.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5f7a2b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/stat.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STAT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+stat
+\(em get file status
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+int stat(const char *restrict \fIpath\fP, struct stat *restrict \fIbuf\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfstatat\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/statvfs.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/statvfs.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..429e2d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/statvfs.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STATVFS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+statvfs
+\(em get file system information
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/statvfs.h>
+.P
+int statvfs(const char *restrict \fIpath\fP, struct statvfs *restrict \fIbuf\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfstatvfs\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/stdin.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/stdin.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f89bc60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/stdin.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STDIN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+stderr,
+stdin,
+stdout
+\(em standard I/O streams
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+extern FILE *stderr, *stdin, *stdout;
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+A file with associated buffering is called a
+.IR stream
+and is declared to be a pointer to a defined type
+.BR FILE .
+The
+\fIfopen\fR()
+function shall create certain descriptive data for a stream and return
+a pointer to designate the stream in all further transactions. Normally,
+there are three open streams with constant pointers declared in the
+.IR <stdio.h> 
+header and associated with the standard open files.
+.P
+At program start-up, three streams shall be predefined and need not
+be opened explicitly:
+.IR "standard input"
+(for reading conventional input),
+.IR "standard output"
+(for writing conventional output), and
+.IR "standard error"
+(for writing diagnostic output). When opened, the standard error
+stream is not fully buffered; the standard input and standard output
+streams are fully buffered if and only if the stream can be determined
+not to refer to an interactive device.
+.P
+The following symbolic values in
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+define the file descriptors that shall be associated with the C-language
+.IR stdin ,
+.IR stdout ,
+and
+.IR stderr
+when the application is started:
+.IP STDIN_FILENO 14
+Standard input value,
+.IR stdin .
+Its value is 0.
+.IP STDOUT_FILENO 14
+Standard output value,
+.IR stdout .
+Its value is 1.
+.IP STDERR_FILENO 14
+Standard error value,
+.IR stderr .
+Its value is 2.
+.P
+The
+.IR stderr
+stream is expected to be open for reading and writing.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+None.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeof\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIferror\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfileno\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfprintf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfscanf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfseek\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgets\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIputs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetbuf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetvbuf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItmpfile\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIungetc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIvfprintf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/stpcpy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/stpcpy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..08ae046
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/stpcpy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STPCPY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+stpcpy
+\(em copy a string and return a pointer to the end of the result
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+char *stpcpy(char *restrict \fIs1\fP, const char *restrict \fIs2\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIstrcpy\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/stpncpy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/stpncpy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..13c37a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/stpncpy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STPNCPY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+stpncpy
+\(em copy fixed length string, returning a pointer to the array end
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+char *stpncpy(char *restrict \fIs1\fP, const char *restrict \fIs2\fP, size_t \fIsize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIstrncpy\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strcasecmp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strcasecmp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1f23c8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strcasecmp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRCASECMP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strcasecmp,
+strcasecmp_l,
+strncasecmp,
+strncasecmp_l
+\(em case-insensitive string comparisons
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <strings.h>
+.P
+int strcasecmp(const char *\fIs1\fP, const char *\fIs2\fP);
+int strcasecmp_l(const char *\fIs1\fP, const char *\fIs2\fP,
+    locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+int strncasecmp(const char *\fIs1\fP, const char *\fIs2\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+int strncasecmp_l(const char *\fIs1\fP, const char *\fIs2\fP,
+    size_t \fIn\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIstrcasecmp\fR()
+and
+\fIstrcasecmp_l\fR()
+functions shall compare, while ignoring differences in case, the
+string pointed to by
+.IR s1
+to the string pointed to by
+.IR s2 .
+The
+\fIstrncasecmp\fR()
+and
+\fIstrncasecmp_l\fR()
+functions shall compare, while ignoring differences in case, not more
+than
+.IR n
+bytes from the string pointed to by
+.IR s1
+to the string pointed to by
+.IR s2 .
+.P
+The
+\fIstrcasecmp\fR()
+and
+\fIstrncasecmp\fR()
+functions use the current locale to determine the case of the characters.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrcasecmp_l\fR()
+and
+\fIstrncasecmp_l\fR()
+functions use the locale represented by
+.IR locale
+to determine the case of the characters.
+.P
+When the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category of the locale being used is from the POSIX locale, these
+functions shall behave as if the strings had been converted to lowercase
+and then a byte comparison performed. Otherwise, the results are
+unspecified.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIstrcasecmp_l\fR()
+or
+\fIstrncasecmp_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon completion,
+\fIstrcasecmp\fR()
+and
+\fIstrcasecmp_l\fR()
+shall return an integer greater than, equal to, or less than 0, if the
+string pointed to by
+.IR s1
+is, ignoring case, greater than, equal to, or less than the string
+pointed to by
+.IR s2 ,
+respectively.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIstrncasecmp\fR()
+and
+\fIstrncasecmp_l\fR()
+shall return an integer greater than, equal to, or less than 0, if the
+possibly null-terminated array pointed to by
+.IR s1
+is, ignoring case, greater than, equal to, or less than the possibly
+null-terminated array pointed to by
+.IR s2 ,
+respectively.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwcscasecmp\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<strings.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strcat.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strcat.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8f0a8d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strcat.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRCAT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strcat
+\(em concatenate two strings
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+char *strcat(char *restrict \fIs1\fP, const char *restrict \fIs2\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrcat\fR()
+function shall append a copy of the string pointed to by
+.IR s2
+(including the terminating NUL character) to the end of the string pointed
+to by
+.IR s1 .
+The initial byte of
+.IR s2
+overwrites the NUL character at the end of
+.IR s1 .
+If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
+undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIstrcat\fR()
+function shall return
+.IR s1 ;
+no return value is reserved to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+This version is aligned with the ISO\ C standard; this does not affect
+compatibility with XPG3 applications. Reliable error detection by this
+function was never guaranteed.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrncat\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strchr.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strchr.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3add32f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strchr.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRCHR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strchr
+\(em string scanning operation
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+char *strchr(const char *\fIs\fP, int \fIc\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrchr\fR()
+function shall locate the first occurrence of
+.IR c
+(converted to a
+.BR char )
+in the string pointed to by
+.IR s .
+The terminating NUL character is considered to be part of the string.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon completion,
+\fIstrchr\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the byte, or a null pointer if the byte
+was not found.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrrchr\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strcmp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strcmp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8f67c8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strcmp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRCMP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strcmp
+\(em compare two strings
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+int strcmp(const char *\fIs1\fP, const char *\fIs2\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrcmp\fR()
+function shall compare the string pointed to by
+.IR s1
+to the string pointed to by
+.IR s2 .
+.P
+The sign of a non-zero return value shall be determined by the sign of
+the difference between the values of the first pair of bytes (both
+interpreted as type
+.BR "unsigned char" )
+that differ in the strings being compared.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon completion,
+\fIstrcmp\fR()
+shall return an integer greater than, equal to, or less than 0, if the
+string pointed to by
+.IR s1
+is greater than, equal to, or less than the string pointed to by
+.IR s2 ,
+respectively.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Checking a Password Entry"
+.P
+The following example compares the information read from standard input
+to the value of the name of the user entry. If the
+\fIstrcmp\fR()
+function returns 0 (indicating a match), a further check will be made
+to see if the user entered the proper old password. The
+\fIcrypt\fR()
+function shall encrypt the old password entered by the user, using
+the value of the encrypted password in the
+.BR passwd
+structure as the salt. If this value matches the value of the encrypted
+.BR passwd
+in the structure, the entered password
+.IR oldpasswd
+is the correct user's password. Finally, the program encrypts the new
+password so that it can store the information in the
+.BR passwd
+structure.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <string.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+int valid_change;
+struct passwd *p;
+char user[100];
+char oldpasswd[100];
+char newpasswd[100];
+char savepasswd[100];
+\&...
+if (strcmp(p->pw_name, user) == 0) {
+    if (strcmp(p->pw_passwd, crypt(oldpasswd, p->pw_passwd)) == 0) {
+        strcpy(savepasswd, crypt(newpasswd, user));
+        p->pw_passwd = savepasswd;
+        valid_change = 1;
+    }
+    else {
+        fprintf(stderr, "Old password is not valid\en");
+    }
+}
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrncmp\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strcoll.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strcoll.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7c7b896
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strcoll.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,170 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRCOLL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strcoll,
+strcoll_l
+\(em string comparison using collating information
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+int strcoll(const char *\fIs1\fP, const char *\fIs2\fP);
+int strcoll_l(const char *\fIs1\fP, const char *\fIs2\fP,
+    locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIstrcoll\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrcoll\fR()
+and
+\fIstrcoll_l\fR()
+functions shall compare the string pointed to by
+.IR s1
+to the string pointed to by
+.IR s2 ,
+both interpreted as appropriate to the
+.IR LC_COLLATE
+category of the current locale,
+or of the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrcoll\fR()
+and
+\fIstrcoll_l\fR()
+functions shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.P
+Since no return value is reserved to indicate an error, an
+application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0, then call
+\fIstrcoll\fR(),
+or
+\fIstrcoll_l\fR()
+then check
+.IR errno .
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIstrcoll_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIstrcoll\fR()
+shall return an integer greater than, equal to, or less than
+0, according to whether the string pointed to by
+.IR s1
+is greater than, equal to, or less than the string pointed to by
+.IR s2
+when both are interpreted as appropriate to the current locale.
+On error,
+\fIstrcoll\fR()
+may set
+.IR errno ,
+but no return value is reserved to indicate an error.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIstrcoll_l\fR()
+shall return an integer greater than, equal to, or less than 0,
+according to whether the string pointed to by
+.IR s1
+is greater than, equal to, or less than the string pointed to by
+.IR s2
+when both are interpreted as appropriate to the locale represented by
+.IR locale .
+On error,
+\fIstrcoll_l\fR()
+may set
+.IR errno ,
+but no return value is reserved to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR s1
+or
+.IR s2
+arguments contain characters outside the domain of the collating
+sequence.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Comparing Nodes"
+.P
+The following example uses an application-defined function,
+\fInode_compare\fR(),
+to compare two nodes based on an alphabetical ordering of the
+.IR string
+field.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <string.h>
+\&...
+struct node { /* These are stored in the table. */
+    char *string;
+    int length;
+};
+\&...
+int node_compare(const void *node1, const void *node2)
+{
+    return strcoll(((const struct node *)node1)->string,
+        ((const struct node *)node2)->string);
+}
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIstrxfrm\fR()
+and
+\fIstrcmp\fR()
+functions should be used for sorting large lists.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIalphasort\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrcmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrxfrm\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strcpy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strcpy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6e0c352
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strcpy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,178 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRCPY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+stpcpy, strcpy
+\(em copy a string and return a pointer to the end of the result
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+char *stpcpy(char *restrict \fIs1\fP, const char *restrict \fIs2\fP);
+char *strcpy(char *restrict \fIs1\fP, const char *restrict \fIs2\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIstrcpy\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIstpcpy\fR()
+and
+\fIstrcpy\fR()
+functions shall copy the string pointed to by
+.IR s2
+(including the terminating NUL character) into the array pointed to by
+.IR s1 .
+.P
+If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
+undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIstpcpy\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to the terminating NUL character copied
+into the
+.IR s1
+buffer.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrcpy\fR()
+function shall return
+.IR s1 .
+.P
+No return values are reserved to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Construction of a Multi-Part Message in a Single Buffer"
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int
+main (void)
+{
+    char buffer [10];
+    char *name = buffer;
+.P
+    name = stpcpy (stpcpy (stpcpy (name, "ice"),"-"), "cream");
+    puts (buffer);
+    return 0;
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Initializing a String"
+.P
+The following example copies the string
+.BR \(dq----------\(dq 
+into the
+.IR permstring
+variable.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <string.h>
+\&...
+static char permstring[11];
+\&...
+strcpy(permstring, "----------");
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Storing a Key and Data"
+.P
+The following example allocates space for a key using
+\fImalloc\fR()
+then uses
+\fIstrcpy\fR()
+to place the key there. Then it allocates space for data using
+\fImalloc\fR(),
+and uses
+\fIstrcpy\fR()
+to place data there. (The user-defined function
+\fIdbfree\fR()
+frees memory previously allocated to an array of type
+.BR "struct element *" .)
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+/* Structure used to read data and store it. */
+struct element {
+    char *key;
+    char *data;
+};
+.P
+struct element *tbl, *curtbl;
+char *key, *data;
+int count;
+\&...
+void dbfree(struct element *, int);
+\&...
+if ((curtbl->key = malloc(strlen(key) + 1)) == NULL) {
+    perror("malloc"); dbfree(tbl, count); return NULL;
+}
+strcpy(curtbl->key, key);
+.P
+if ((curtbl->data = malloc(strlen(data) + 1)) == NULL) {
+    perror("malloc"); free(curtbl->key); dbfree(tbl, count); return NULL;
+}
+strcpy(curtbl->data, data);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Character movement is performed differently in different
+implementations. Thus, overlapping moves may yield surprises.
+.P
+This version is aligned with the ISO\ C standard; this does not affect
+compatibility with XPG3 applications. Reliable error detection by this
+function was never guaranteed.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrncpy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcscpy\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strcspn.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strcspn.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cf87337
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strcspn.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRCSPN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strcspn
+\(em get the length of a complementary substring
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+size_t strcspn(const char *\fIs1\fP, const char *\fIs2\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrcspn\fR()
+function shall compute the length (in bytes) of the maximum initial
+segment of the string pointed to by
+.IR s1
+which consists entirely of bytes
+.IR not
+from the string pointed to by
+.IR s2 .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIstrcspn\fR()
+function shall return the length of the computed segment of the string
+pointed to by
+.IR s1 ;
+no return value is reserved to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrspn\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strdup.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strdup.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f2009c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strdup.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRDUP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strdup, strndup
+\(em duplicate a specific number of bytes from a string
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+char *strdup(const char *\fIs\fP);
+char *strndup(const char *\fIs\fP, size_t \fIsize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIstrdup\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to a new string, which is a duplicate
+of the string pointed to by
+.IR s .
+The returned pointer can be passed to
+\fIfree\fR().
+A null pointer is returned if the new string cannot be created.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrndup\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIstrdup\fR()
+function, duplicating the provided
+.IR s
+in a new block of memory allocated as if by using
+\fImalloc\fR(),
+with the exception being that
+\fIstrndup\fR()
+copies at most
+.IR size
+plus one bytes into the newly allocated memory, terminating the new
+string with a NUL character. If the length of
+.IR s
+is larger than
+.IR size ,
+only
+.IR size
+bytes shall be duplicated. If
+.IR size
+is larger than the length of
+.IR s ,
+all bytes in
+.IR s
+shall be copied into the new memory buffer, including the terminating
+NUL character. The newly created string shall always be properly
+terminated.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIstrdup\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to a new string on success. Otherwise,
+it shall return a null pointer and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.P
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIstrndup\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to the newly allocated memory
+containing the duplicated string. Otherwise, it shall return a null
+pointer and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Storage space available is insufficient.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+For functions that allocate memory as if by
+\fImalloc\fR(),
+the application should release such memory when it is no longer
+required by a call to
+\fIfree\fR().
+For
+\fIstrdup\fR()
+and
+\fIstrndup\fR(),
+this is the return value.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfree\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcsdup\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strerror.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strerror.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..815b318
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strerror.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,307 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRERROR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strerror,
+strerror_l,
+strerror_r
+\(em get error message string
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+char *strerror(int \fIerrnum\fR);
+char *strerror_l(int \fIerrnum\fR, locale_t \fIlocale\fR);
+int strerror_r(int \fIerrnum\fR, char *\fIstrerrbuf\fR, size_t \fIbuflen\fR);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIstrerror\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrerror\fR()
+function shall map the error number in
+.IR errnum
+to a locale-dependent error message string and shall return a pointer
+to it. Typically, the values for
+.IR errnum
+come from
+.IR errno ,
+but
+\fIstrerror\fR()
+shall map any value of type
+.BR int
+to a message.
+.P
+The application shall not modify the string returned.
+The returned string pointer might be invalidated or
+the string content might be overwritten by a subsequent call to
+\fIstrerror\fR(),
+or by a subsequent call to
+\fIstrerror_l\fR()
+in the same thread.
+.P
+The string may be overwritten by a subsequent call to
+\fIstrerror_l\fR()
+in the same thread.
+.P
+The contents of the error message strings returned by
+\fIstrerror\fR()
+should be determined by the setting of the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+category in the current locale.
+.P
+The implementation shall behave as if no function defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+calls
+\fIstrerror\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIstrerror\fR()
+and
+\fIstrerror_l\fR()
+functions shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.P
+Since no return value is reserved to indicate an error of
+\fIstrerror\fR(),
+an application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0, then call
+\fIstrerror\fR(),
+then check
+.IR errno .
+Similarly, since
+\fIstrerror_l\fR()
+is required to return a string for some errors, an application wishing
+to check for all error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0, then call
+\fIstrerror_l\fR(),
+then check
+.IR errno .
+.P
+The
+\fIstrerror\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrerror_l\fR()
+function shall map the error number in
+.IR errnum
+to a locale-dependent error message string in the locale represented by
+.IR locale
+and shall return a pointer to it.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrerror_r\fR()
+function shall map the error number in
+.IR errnum
+to a locale-dependent error message string and shall return the string
+in the buffer pointed to by
+.IR strerrbuf ,
+with length
+.IR buflen .
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR errnum
+is a valid error number, the message string shall indicate what error
+occurred; if the value of
+.IR errnum
+is zero, the message string shall either be an empty string or
+indicate that no error occurred; otherwise, if these functions complete
+successfully, the message string shall indicate that an unknown error
+occurred.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIstrerror_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon completion, whether successful or not,
+\fIstrerror\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the generated message string.
+On error
+.IR errno
+may be set, but no return value is reserved to indicate an error.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIstrerror_l\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the generated message string. If
+.IR errnum
+is not a valid error number,
+.IR errno
+may be set to
+.BR [EINVAL] ,
+but a pointer to a message string shall still be returned. If any other
+error occurs,
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error and a null pointer shall be
+returned.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIstrerror_r\fR()
+shall return 0. Otherwise, an error number shall be returned to
+indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR errnum
+is neither a valid error number nor zero.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrerror_r\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+Insufficient storage was supplied via
+.IR strerrbuf
+and
+.IR buflen
+to contain the generated message string.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Historically in some implementations, calls to
+\fIperror\fR()
+would overwrite the string that the pointer returned by
+\fIstrerror\fR()
+points to. Such implementations did not conform to the ISO\ C standard; however,
+application developers should be aware of this behavior if they wish
+their applications to be portable to such implementations.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIstrerror_l\fR()
+function is required to be thread-safe, thereby eliminating the
+need for an equivalent to the
+\fIstrerror_r\fR()
+function.
+.P
+Earlier versions of this standard did not explicitly require that the
+error message strings returned by
+\fIstrerror\fR()
+and
+\fIstrerror_r\fR()
+provide any information about the error. This version of the standard
+requires a meaningful message for any successful completion.
+.P
+Since no return value is reserved to indicate a
+\fIstrerror\fR()
+error, but all calls (whether successful or not) must return a pointer
+to a message string, on error
+\fIstrerror\fR()
+can return a pointer to an empty string or a pointer to a meaningful
+string that can be printed.
+.P
+Note that the
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error condition is a may fail error. If an invalid error number is
+supplied as the value of
+.IR errnum ,
+applications should be prepared to handle any of the following:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Error (with no meaningful message):
+.IR errno
+is set to
+.BR [EINVAL] ,
+the return value is a pointer to an empty string.
+.IP " 2." 4
+Successful completion:
+.IR errno
+is unchanged and the return value points to a string like
+.BR \(dqunknown error\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dqerror number xxx\(dq 
+(where
+.IR xxx
+is the value of
+.IR errnum ).
+.IP " 3." 4
+Combination of #1 and #2:
+.IR errno
+is set to
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+and the return value points to a string like
+.BR \(dqunknown error\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dqerror number xxx\(dq 
+(where
+.IR xxx
+is the value of
+.IR errnum ).
+Since applications frequently use the return value of
+\fIstrerror\fR()
+as an argument to functions like
+\fIfprintf\fR()
+(without checking the return value) and since applications have no way
+to parse an error message string to determine whether
+.IR errnum
+represents a valid error number, implementations are encouraged to
+implement #3. Similarly, implementations are encouraged to have
+\fIstrerror_r\fR()
+return
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+and put a string like
+.BR \(dqunknown error\(dq 
+or
+.BR \(dqerror number xxx\(dq 
+in the buffer pointed to by
+.IR strerrbuf
+when the value of
+.IR errnum
+is not a valid error number.
+.P
+Some applications rely on being able to set
+.IR errno
+to 0 before calling a function with no reserved value to indicate an
+error, then call
+.IR strerror ( errno )
+afterwards to detect whether an error occurred (because
+.IR errno
+changed) or to indicate success (because
+.IR errno
+remained zero). This usage pattern requires that
+.IR strerror (0)
+succeed with useful results. Previous versions of the standard did not
+specify the behavior when
+.IR errnum
+is zero.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIperror\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strfmon.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strfmon.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cbd1796
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strfmon.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,326 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRFMON "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strfmon,
+strfmon_l
+\(em convert monetary value to a string
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <monetary.h>
+.P
+ssize_t strfmon(char *restrict \fIs\fP, size_t \fImaxsize\fP,
+    const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+ssize_t strfmon_l(char *restrict \fIs\fP, size_t \fImaxsize\fP,
+    locale_t \fIlocale\fP, const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIstrfmon\fR()
+function shall place characters into the array pointed to by
+.IR s
+as controlled by the string pointed to by
+.IR format .
+No more than
+.IR maxsize
+bytes are placed into the array.
+.P
+The format is a character string, beginning and ending in its
+initial state, if any, that contains two types of objects:
+\fIplain characters\fP,
+which are simply copied to the output stream, and \fIconversion
+specifications\fP,
+each of which shall result in the fetching of zero or more arguments
+which are converted and formatted. The results are undefined if there
+are insufficient arguments for the format. If the format is exhausted
+while arguments remain, the excess arguments are simply ignored.
+.P
+The application shall ensure that a conversion specification consists
+of the following sequence:
+.IP " *" 4
+A
+.BR '%' 
+character
+.IP " *" 4
+Optional flags
+.IP " *" 4
+Optional field width
+.IP " *" 4
+Optional left precision
+.IP " *" 4
+Optional right precision
+.IP " *" 4
+A required conversion specifier character that determines the
+conversion to be performed
+.P
+The
+\fIstrfmon_l\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIstrfmon\fR()
+function, except that the locale data used is from the
+locale represented by
+.IR locale .
+.SS Flags
+.P
+One or more of the following optional flags can be specified to control
+the conversion:
+.IP "\fR=\fIf\fR" 8
+An
+.BR '=' 
+followed by a single character
+.IR f
+which is used as the numeric fill character. In order to work with
+precision or width counts, the fill character shall be a single byte
+character; if not, the behavior is undefined. The default numeric fill
+character is the
+<space>.
+This flag does not affect field width filling which always uses the
+<space>.
+This flag is ignored unless a left precision (see below) is specified.
+.IP "\fR^\fR" 8
+Do not format the currency amount with grouping characters. The
+default is to insert the grouping characters if defined for the current
+locale.
+.IP "\fR+\fR\ or\ \fR(\fR" 8
+Specify the style of representing positive and negative currency
+amounts. Only one of
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '(' 
+may be specified. If
+.BR '+' 
+is specified, the locale's equivalent of
+.BR '+' 
+and
+.BR '\(mi' 
+are used (for example, in many locales, the empty string if positive and
+.BR '\(mi' 
+if negative). If
+.BR '(' 
+is specified, negative amounts are enclosed within parentheses. If
+neither flag is specified, the
+.BR '+' 
+style is used.
+.IP "\fR!\fR" 8
+Suppress the currency symbol from the output conversion.
+.IP "\fR\(mi\fR" 8
+Specify the alignment. If this flag is present the result of the
+conversion is left-justified (padded to the right) rather than
+right-justified. This flag shall be ignored unless a field width (see
+below) is specified.
+.SS "Field Width"
+.IP "\fIw\fP" 8
+A decimal digit string
+.IR w
+specifying a minimum field width in bytes in which the result of the
+conversion is right-justified (or left-justified if the flag
+.BR '\(mi' 
+is specified). The default is 0.
+.SS "Left Precision"
+.IP "\fR#\fIn\fR" 8
+A
+.BR '#' 
+followed by a decimal digit string
+.IR n
+specifying a maximum number of digits expected to be formatted to the
+left of the radix character. This option can be used to keep the
+formatted output from multiple calls to the
+\fIstrfmon\fR()
+function aligned in the same columns. It can also be used to fill
+unused positions with a special character as in
+.BR \(dq$***123.45\(dq .
+This option causes an amount to be formatted as if it has the number of
+digits specified by
+.IR n .
+If more than
+.IR n
+digit positions are required, this conversion specification is ignored.
+Digit positions in excess of those actually required are filled with
+the numeric fill character (see the \fR=\fIf\fR flag above).
+.RS 8 
+.P
+If grouping has not been suppressed with the
+.BR '^' 
+flag, and it is defined for the current locale, grouping separators are
+inserted before the fill characters (if any) are added. Grouping
+separators are not applied to fill characters even if the fill
+character is a digit.
+.P
+To ensure alignment, any characters appearing before or after the
+number in the formatted output such as currency or sign symbols are
+padded as necessary with
+<space>
+characters to make their positive and negative formats an equal length.
+.RE
+.SS "Right Precision"
+.IP "\fR.\fIp\fR" 8
+A
+<period>
+followed by a decimal digit string
+.IR p
+specifying the number of digits after the radix character. If the
+value of the right precision
+.IR p
+is 0, no radix character appears. If a right precision is not
+included, a default specified by the current locale is used. The
+amount being formatted is rounded to the specified number of digits
+prior to formatting.
+.SS "Conversion Specifier Characters"
+.P
+The conversion specifier characters and their meanings are:
+.IP "\fRi\fP" 8
+The
+.BR double
+argument is formatted according to the locale's international currency
+format (for example, in the US: USD 1,234.56). If the argument is
+\(+-Inf or NaN, the result of the conversion is unspecified.
+.IP "\fRn\fP" 8
+The
+.BR double
+argument is formatted according to the locale's national currency
+format (for example, in the US: $1,234.56). If the argument is
+\(+-Inf or NaN, the result of the conversion is unspecified.
+.IP "\fR%\fP" 8
+Convert to a
+.BR '%' ;
+no argument is converted. The entire conversion specification shall be
+.BR %% .
+.SS "Locale Information"
+.P
+The
+.IR LC_MONETARY
+category of the current locale affects the behavior of this function
+including the monetary radix character (which may be different from the
+numeric radix character affected by the
+.IR LC_NUMERIC
+category), the grouping separator, the currency symbols, and formats.
+The international currency symbol should be conformant with the ISO\ 4217:\|2001 standard.
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR maxsize
+is greater than
+{SSIZE_MAX},
+the result is implementation-defined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIstrfmon_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the total number of resulting bytes including the terminating null
+byte is not more than
+.IR maxsize ,
+these functions shall return the number of bytes placed into the array
+pointed to by
+.IR s ,
+not including the terminating NUL character. Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be
+returned, the contents of the array are unspecified, and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR E2BIG
+Conversion stopped due to lack of space in the buffer.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+Given a locale for the US and the values 123.45, \(mi123.45, and
+3456.781, the following output might be produced. Square brackets (\c
+.BR \(dq[\|]\(dq )
+are used in this example to delimit the output.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+%n         [$123.45]         \fRDefault formatting\fP
+           [-$123.45]
+           [$3,456.78]
+.P
+%11n       [    $123.45]     \fRRight align within an 11-character field\fP
+           [   -$123.45]
+           [  $3,456.78]
+.P
+%#5n       [ $   123.45]     \fRAligned columns for values up to 99\|999\fP
+           [-$   123.45]
+           [ $ 3,456.78]
+.P
+%=*#5n     [ $***123.45]     \fRSpecify a fill character\fP
+           [-$***123.45]
+           [ $*3,456.78]
+.P
+%=0#5n     [ $000123.45]     \fRFill characters do not use grouping\fP
+           [-$000123.45]     \fReven if the fill character is a digit\fP
+           [ $03,456.78]
+.P
+%^#5n      [ $  123.45]      \fRDisable the grouping separator\fP
+           [-$  123.45]
+           [ $ 3456.78]
+.P
+%^#5.0n    [ $  123]         \fRRound off to whole units\fP
+           [-$  123]
+           [ $ 3457]
+.P
+%^#5.4n    [ $  123.4500]    \fRIncrease the precision\fP
+           [-$  123.4500]
+           [ $ 3456.7810]
+.P
+%(#5n      [ $   123.45 ]    \fRUse an alternative pos/neg style\fP
+           [($   123.45)]
+           [ $ 3,456.78 ]
+.P
+%!(#5n     [    123.45 ]     \fRDisable the currency symbol\fP
+           [(   123.45)]
+           [  3,456.78 ]
+.P
+%-14#5.4n  [ $   123.4500 ]  \fRLeft-justify the output\fP
+           [-$   123.4500 ]
+           [ $ 3,456.7810 ]
+.P
+%14#5.4n   [  $   123.4500]  \fRCorresponding right-justified output\fP
+           [ -$   123.4500]
+           [  $ 3,456.7810]
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+See also the EXAMPLES section in
+\fIfprintf\fR().
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+Lowercase conversion characters are reserved for future standards use
+and uppercase for implementation-defined use.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfprintf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlocaleconv\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<monetary.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strftime.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strftime.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c74625c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strftime.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,996 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRFTIME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strftime,
+strftime_l
+\(em convert date and time to a string
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+size_t strftime(char *restrict \fIs\fP, size_t \fImaxsize\fP,
+    const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, const struct tm *restrict \fItimeptr\fP);
+size_t strftime_l(char *restrict \fIs\fP, size_t \fImaxsize\fP,
+    const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, const struct tm *restrict \fItimeptr\fP,
+    locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIstrftime\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+function shall place bytes into the array pointed to by
+.IR s
+as controlled by the string pointed to by
+.IR format .
+The format is a character string, beginning and ending in its initial
+shift state, if any. The format string consists of zero or more conversion
+specifications and ordinary characters.
+.P
+Each conversion specification is introduced by the
+.BR '%' 
+character after which the following appear in sequence:
+.IP " *" 4
+An optional flag:
+.RS 4 
+.IP "\fR0\fR" 6
+The zero character (\c
+.BR '0' ),
+which specifies that the character used as the padding character is
+.BR '0' ,
+.IP "\fR+\fR" 6
+The
+<plus-sign>
+character (\c
+.BR '+' ),
+which specifies that the character used as the padding character is
+.BR '0' ,
+and that if and only if the field being produced consumes more than four
+bytes to represent a year (for
+.BR %F ,
+.BR %G ,
+or
+.BR %Y )
+or more than two bytes to represent the year divided by 100 (for
+.BR %C )
+then a leading
+<plus-sign>
+character shall be included if the year being processed is greater than
+or equal to zero or a leading minus-sign character (\c
+.BR '\(mi' )
+shall be included if the year is less than zero.
+.P
+The default padding character is unspecified.
+.RE
+.IP " *" 4
+An optional minimum field width. If the converted value, including
+any leading
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+sign, has fewer bytes than the minimum field width and the padding
+character is not the NUL character, the output shall be padded on the left
+(after any leading
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+sign) with the padding character.
+.IP " *" 4
+An optional
+.BR E
+or
+.BR O
+modifier.
+.IP " *" 4
+A terminating conversion specifier character that indicates the type of
+conversion to be applied.
+.P
+The results are unspecified if more than one flag character is specified,
+a flag character is specified without a minimum field width; a minimum
+field width is specified without a flag character; a modifier is specified
+with a flag or with a minimum field width; or if a minimum field width
+is specified for any conversion specifier other than
+.BR C ,
+.BR F ,
+.BR G ,
+or
+.BR Y .
+.P
+All ordinary characters (including the terminating NUL character)
+are copied unchanged into the array. If copying takes place between
+objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined. No more than maxsize
+bytes are placed into the array. Each conversion specifier is replaced by
+appropriate characters as described in the following list. The appropriate
+characters are determined using the
+.IR LC_TIME
+category of the current locale and by the values of zero or more members
+of the broken-down time structure pointed to by
+.IR timeptr ,
+as specified in brackets in the description. If any of the specified
+values are outside the normal range, the characters stored are
+unspecified.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrftime_l\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+function, except that the locale data used is from the
+locale represented by
+.IR locale .
+.P
+Local timezone information is used as though
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+called
+\fItzset\fR().
+.P
+The following conversion specifiers shall be supported:
+.IP "\fRa\fR" 8
+Replaced by the locale's abbreviated weekday name. [\c
+.IR tm_wday ]
+.IP "\fRA\fR" 8
+Replaced by the locale's full weekday name. [\c
+.IR tm_wday ]
+.IP "\fRb\fR" 8
+Replaced by the locale's abbreviated month name. [\c
+.IR tm_mon ]
+.IP "\fRB\fR" 8
+Replaced by the locale's full month name. [\c
+.IR tm_mon ]
+.IP "\fRc\fR" 8
+Replaced by the locale's appropriate date and time representation.
+(See the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR <time.h> .)
+.IP "\fRC\fR" 8
+Replaced by the year divided by 100 and truncated to an integer,
+as a decimal number. [\c
+.IR tm_year ]
+.RS 8 
+.P
+If a minimum field width is not specified, the number of characters
+placed into the array pointed to by
+.IR s
+will be the number of digits in the year divided by 100 or two, whichever
+is greater.
+If a minimum field width is specified, the number of characters placed
+into the array pointed to by
+.IR s
+will be the number of digits in the year divided by 100 or the minimum
+field width, whichever is greater.
+.RE
+.IP "\fRd\fR" 8
+Replaced by the day of the month as a decimal number [01,31]. [\c
+.IR tm_mday ]
+.IP "\fRD\fR" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR %m /\c
+.BR %d /\c
+.BR %y .
+[\c
+.IR tm_mon ,
+.IR tm_mday ,
+.IR tm_year ]
+.IP "\fRe\fR" 8
+Replaced by the day of the month as a decimal number [1,31];
+a single digit is preceded by a space. [\c
+.IR tm_mday ]
+.IP "\fRF\fR" 8
+Equivalent to %\*!+4\*?Y-%m-%d if no flag and no minimum field width
+are specified. [\c
+.IR tm_year ,
+.IR tm_mon ,
+.IR tm_mday ]
+.RS 8 
+.P
+If a minimum field width of
+.IR x
+is specified, the year shall be output as if by the
+.BR Y
+specifier (described below) with whatever flag was given and a minimum
+field width of
+.IR x \(mi6.
+If
+.IR x
+is less than 6, the behavior shall be as if
+.IR x
+equalled 6.
+.P
+If the minimum field width is specified to be 10, and the year is
+four digits long, then the output string produced will match the
+ISO\ 8601:\|2004 standard subclause 4.1.2.2 complete representation, extended format date
+representation of a specific day. If a + flag is specified, a minimum
+field width of
+.IR x
+is specified, and
+.IR x \(mi7
+bytes are sufficient to hold the digits of the year (not including any
+needed sign character), then the output will match the ISO\ 8601:\|2004 standard subclause
+4.1.2.4 complete representation, expanded format date representation of
+a specific day.
+.RE
+.IP "\fRg\fR" 8
+Replaced by the last 2 digits of the week-based year (see below)
+as a decimal number [00,99]. [\c
+.IR tm_year ,
+.IR tm_wday ,
+.IR tm_yday ]
+.IP "\fRG\fR" 8
+Replaced by the week-based year (see below) as a decimal number
+(for example, 1977). [\c
+.IR tm_year ,
+.IR tm_wday ,
+.IR tm_yday ]
+.RS 8 
+.P
+If a minimum field width is specified, the number of characters placed
+into the array pointed to by
+.IR s
+will be the number of digits and leading sign characters (if any) in
+the year, or the minimum field width, whichever is greater.
+.RE
+.IP "\fRh\fR" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR %b .
+[\c
+.IR tm_mon ]
+.IP "\fRH\fR" 8
+Replaced by the hour (24-hour clock) as a decimal number [00,23]. [\c
+.IR tm_hour ]
+.IP "\fRI\fR" 8
+Replaced by the hour (12-hour clock) as a decimal number [01,12]. [\c
+.IR tm_hour ]
+.IP "\fRj\fR" 8
+Replaced by the day of the year as a decimal number [001,366]. [\c
+.IR tm_yday ]
+.IP "\fRm\fR" 8
+Replaced by the month as a decimal number [01,12]. [\c
+.IR tm_mon ]
+.IP "\fRM\fR" 8
+Replaced by the minute as a decimal number [00,59]. [\c
+.IR tm_min ]
+.IP "\fRn\fR" 8
+Replaced by a
+<newline>.
+.IP "\fRp\fR" 8
+Replaced by the locale's equivalent of either a.m. or p.m. [\c
+.IR tm_hour ]
+.IP "\fRr\fR" 8
+Replaced by the time in a.m. and p.m. notation;
+in the POSIX locale this shall be equivalent to
+.BR %I :\c
+.BR %M :\c
+.BR %S
+.BR %p .
+[\c
+.IR tm_hour ,
+.IR tm_min ,
+.IR tm_sec ]
+.IP "\fRR\fR" 8
+Replaced by the time in 24-hour notation (\c
+.BR %H :\c
+.BR %M ).
+[\c
+.IR tm_hour ,
+.IR tm_min ]
+.IP "\fRS\fR" 8
+Replaced by the second as a decimal number [00,60]. [\c
+.IR tm_sec ]
+.IP "\fRt\fR" 8
+Replaced by a
+<tab>.
+.IP "\fRT\fR" 8
+Replaced by the time (\c
+.BR %H :\c
+.BR %M :\c
+.BR %S ).
+[\c
+.IR tm_hour ,
+.IR tm_min ,
+.IR tm_sec ]
+.IP "\fRu\fR" 8
+Replaced by the weekday as a decimal number [1,7], with 1 representing
+Monday. [\c
+.IR tm_wday ]
+.IP "\fRU\fR" 8
+Replaced by the week number of the year as a decimal number [00,53].
+The first Sunday of January is the first day of week 1; days in the
+new year before this are in week 0. [\c
+.IR tm_year ,
+.IR tm_wday ,
+.IR tm_yday ]
+.IP "\fRV\fR" 8
+Replaced by the week number of the year (Monday as the first day of the
+week) as a decimal number [01,53]. If the week containing 1 January
+has four or more days in the new year, then it is considered week 1.
+Otherwise, it is the last week of the previous year, and the next week
+is week 1. Both January 4th and the first Thursday of January are
+always in week 1. [\c
+.IR tm_year ,
+.IR tm_wday ,
+.IR tm_yday ]
+.IP "\fRw\fR" 8
+Replaced by the weekday as a decimal number [0,6], with 0 representing
+Sunday. [\c
+.IR tm_wday ]
+.IP "\fRW\fR" 8
+Replaced by the week number of the year as a decimal number [00,53].
+The first Monday of January is the first day of week 1; days in the new
+year before this are in week 0. [\c
+.IR tm_year ,
+.IR tm_wday ,
+.IR tm_yday ]
+.IP "\fRx\fR" 8
+Replaced by the locale's appropriate date representation. (See
+the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR <time.h> .)
+.IP "\fRX\fR" 8
+Replaced by the locale's appropriate time representation. (See
+the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR <time.h> .)
+.IP "\fRy\fR" 8
+Replaced by the last two digits of the year as a decimal number
+[00,99]. [\c
+.IR tm_year ]
+.IP "\fRY\fR" 8
+Replaced by the year as a decimal number (for example, 1997). [\c
+.IR tm_year ]
+.RS 8 
+.P
+If a minimum field width is specified, the number of characters placed
+into the array pointed to by
+.IR s
+will be the number of digits and leading sign characters (if any) in
+the year, or the minimum field width, whichever is greater.
+.RE
+.IP "\fRz\fR" 8
+Replaced by the offset from UTC in the ISO\ 8601:\|2004 standard format (\c
+.BR +hhmm
+or
+.BR \(mihhmm ),
+or by no characters if no timezone is determinable. For example,
+.BR \(dq\(mi0430\(dq 
+means 4 hours 30 minutes behind UTC (west of Greenwich).
+If
+.IR tm_isdst
+is zero, the standard time offset is used. If
+.IR tm_isdst
+is greater than zero, the daylight savings time offset is used. If
+.IR tm_isdst
+is negative, no characters are returned.
+[\c
+.IR tm_isdst ]
+.IP "\fRZ\fR" 8
+Replaced by the timezone name or abbreviation, or by no bytes if no
+timezone information exists. [\c
+.IR tm_isdst ]
+.IP "\fR%\fR" 8
+Replaced by
+.BR % .
+.P
+If a conversion specification does not correspond to any of the above,
+the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+If a
+.BR "struct tm"
+broken-down time structure is created by
+\fIlocaltime\fR()
+or
+\fIlocaltime_r\fR(),
+or modified by
+\fImktime\fR(),
+and the value of
+.IR TZ
+is subsequently modified, the results of the
+.BR %Z
+and
+.BR %z
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+conversion specifiers are undefined, when
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+is called with such a broken-down time structure.
+.P
+If a
+.BR "struct tm"
+broken-down time structure is created or modified by
+\fIgmtime\fR()
+or
+\fIgmtime_r\fR(),
+it is unspecified whether the result of the
+.BR %Z
+and
+.BR %z
+conversion specifiers shall refer to UTC or the current local timezone,
+when
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+is called with such a broken-down time structure.
+.SS "Modified Conversion Specifiers"
+.P
+Some conversion specifiers can be modified by the
+.BR E
+or
+.BR O
+modifier characters to indicate that an alternative format or
+specification should be used rather than the one normally used by the
+unmodified conversion specifier. If the alternative format or
+specification does not exist for the current locale (see ERA in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 7.3.5" ", " "LC_TIME"),
+the behavior shall be as if the unmodified conversion
+specification were used.
+.IP "\fR%Ec\fR" 8
+Replaced by the locale's alternative appropriate date and time
+representation.
+.IP "\fR%EC\fR" 8
+Replaced by the name of the base year (period) in the locale's
+alternative representation.
+.IP "\fR%Ex\fR" 8
+Replaced by the locale's alternative date representation.
+.IP "\fR%EX\fR" 8
+Replaced by the locale's alternative time representation.
+.IP "\fR%Ey\fR" 8
+Replaced by the offset from
+.BR %EC
+(year only) in the locale's alternative representation.
+.IP "\fR%EY\fR" 8
+Replaced by the full alternative year representation.
+.IP "\fR%Od\fR" 8
+Replaced by the day of the month, using the locale's alternative
+numeric symbols, filled as needed with leading zeros if there is any
+alternative symbol for zero; otherwise, with leading
+<space>
+characters.
+.IP "\fR%Oe\fR" 8
+Replaced by the day of the month, using the locale's alternative
+numeric symbols, filled as needed with leading
+<space>
+characters.
+.IP "\fR%OH\fR" 8
+Replaced by the hour (24-hour clock) using the locale's alternative
+numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%OI\fR" 8
+Replaced by the hour (12-hour clock) using the locale's alternative
+numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%Om\fR" 8
+Replaced by the month using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%OM\fR" 8
+Replaced by the minutes using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%OS\fR" 8
+Replaced by the seconds using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%Ou\fR" 8
+Replaced by the weekday as a number in the locale's alternative
+representation (Monday=1).
+.IP "\fR%OU\fR" 8
+Replaced by the week number of the year (Sunday as the first day of the
+week, rules corresponding to
+.BR %U )
+using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%OV\fR" 8
+Replaced by the week number of the year (Monday as the first day of the
+week, rules corresponding to
+.BR %V )
+using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%Ow\fR" 8
+Replaced by the number of the weekday (Sunday=0) using the locale's
+alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%OW\fR" 8
+Replaced by the week number of the year (Monday as the first day of the
+week) using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%Oy\fR" 8
+Replaced by the year (offset from
+.BR %C )
+using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.P
+.BR %g ,
+.BR %G ,
+and
+.BR %V
+give values according to the ISO\ 8601:\|2004 standard week-based year. In this system,
+weeks begin on a Monday and week 1 of the year is the week that
+includes January 4th, which is also the week that includes the first
+Thursday of the year, and is also the first week that contains at least
+four days in the year. If the first Monday of January is the 2nd, 3rd,
+or 4th, the preceding days are part of the last week of the preceding
+year; thus, for Saturday 2nd January 1999,
+.BR %G
+is replaced by 1998 and
+.BR %V
+is replaced by 53. If December 29th, 30th, or 31st is a Monday, it and
+any following days are part of week 1 of the following year. Thus, for
+Tuesday 30th December 1997,
+.BR %G
+is replaced by 1998 and
+.BR %V
+is replaced by 01.
+.P
+If a conversion specifier is not one of the above, the behavior is
+undefined.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIstrftime_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the total number of resulting bytes including the terminating null
+byte is not more than
+.IR maxsize ,
+these functions shall return the number of bytes placed into the array
+pointed to by
+.IR s ,
+not including the terminating NUL character. Otherwise, 0 shall be returned
+and the contents of the array are unspecified.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Getting a Localized Date String"
+.P
+The following example first sets the locale to the user's default. The
+locale information will be used in the
+\fInl_langinfo\fR()
+and
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+functions. The
+\fInl_langinfo\fR()
+function returns the localized date string which specifies how the date
+is laid out. The
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+function takes this information and, using the
+.BR tm
+structure for values, places the date and time information into
+.IR datestring .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <time.h>
+#include <locale.h>
+#include <langinfo.h>
+\&...
+struct tm *tm;
+char datestring[256];
+\&...
+setlocale (LC_ALL, "");
+\&...
+strftime (datestring, sizeof(datestring), nl_langinfo (D_T_FMT), tm);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The range of values for
+.BR %S
+is [00,60] rather than [00,59] to allow for the occasional leap
+second.
+.P
+Some of the conversion specifications are duplicates of others. They
+are included for compatibility with
+\fInl_cxtime\fR()
+and
+\fInl_ascxtime\fR(),
+which were published in Issue 2.
+.P
+The
+.BR %C ,
+.BR %F ,
+.BR %G ,
+and
+.BR %Y
+format specifiers in
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+always print full values, but the
+\fIstrptime\fR()
+.BR %C ,
+.BR %F ,
+and
+.BR %Y
+format specifiers only scan two digits (assumed to be the first two
+digits of a four-digit year) for
+.BR %C
+and four digits (assumed to be the entire (four-digit) year) for
+.BR %F
+and
+.BR %Y .
+This mimics the behavior of
+\fIprintf\fR()
+and
+\fIscanf\fR();
+that is:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+printf("%2d", x = 1000);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+prints
+.BR \(dq1000\(dq ,
+but:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+scanf(%2d", &x);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+when given
+.BR \(dq1000\(dq 
+as input will only store 10 in
+.IR x ).
+Applications using extended ranges of years must be sure that the number
+of digits specified for scanning years with
+\fIstrptime\fR()
+matches the number of digits that will actually be present in the input
+stream. Historic implementations of the
+.BR %Y
+conversion specification (with no flags and no minimum field width)
+produced different output formats. Some always produced at least four
+digits (with 0 fill for years from 0 through 999) while others only
+produced the number of digits present in the year (with no fill and no
+padding). These two forms can be produced with the
+.BR '0' 
+flag and a minimum field width options using the conversions
+specifications
+.BR %04Y
+and
+.BR %01Y ,
+respectively.
+.P
+In the past, the C and POSIX standards specified that
+.BR %F
+produced an ISO\ 8601:\|2004 standard date format, but didn't specify which one. For
+years in the range [0001,9999], POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires that the output
+produced match the ISO\ 8601:\|2004 standard complete representation extended format
+(YYYY-MM-DD) and for years outside of this range produce output
+that matches the ISO\ 8601:\|2004 standard expanded representation extended format
+(<+/-><Underline>Y</Underline>YYYY-MM-DD). To fully meet ISO\ 8601:\|2004 standard
+requirements, the producer and consumer must agree on a date format that
+has a specific number of bytes reserved to hold the characters used to
+represent the years that is sufficiently large to hold all values that
+will be shared. For example, the
+.BR %+13F
+conversion specification will produce output matching the format
+.BR \(dq<+/->YYYYYY-MM-DD\(dq 
+(a leading
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+sign; a six-digit, 0-filled year; a
+.BR '\(mi' ;
+a two-digit, leading 0-filled month; another
+.BR '\(mi' ;
+and the two-digit, leading 0-filled day within the month).
+.P
+Note that if the year being printed is greater than 9999, the resulting
+string from the unadorned
+.BR %F
+conversion specifications will not conform to the ISO\ 8601:\|2004 standard extended format,
+complete representation for a date and will instead be an extended format,
+expanded representation (presumably without the required agreement
+between the date's producer and consumer).
+.P
+In the C locale, the
+.BR E
+and
+.BR O
+modifiers are ignored and the replacement strings for the following
+specifiers are:
+.IP "\fR%a\fR" 8
+The first three characters of
+.BR %A .
+.IP "\fR%A\fR" 8
+One of Sunday, Monday, .\|.\|., Saturday.
+.IP "\fR%b\fR" 8
+The first three characters of
+.BR %B .
+.IP "\fR%B\fR" 8
+One of January, February, .\|.\|., December.
+.IP "\fR%c\fR" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR %a
+.BR %b
+.BR %e
+.BR %T
+.BR %Y .
+.IP "\fR%p\fR" 8
+One of AM or PM.
+.IP "\fR%r\fR" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR %I :\c
+.BR %M :\c
+.BR %S
+.BR %p .
+.IP "\fR%x\fR" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR %m /\c
+.BR %d /\c
+.BR %y .
+.IP "\fR%X\fR" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR %T .
+.IP "\fR%Z\fR" 8
+Implementation-defined.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.BR %Y
+conversion specification to
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+was frequently assumed to be a four-digit year, but the ISO\ C standard does not
+specify that
+.BR %Y
+is restricted to any subset of allowed values from the
+.IR tm_year
+field. Similarly, the
+.BR %C
+conversion specification was assumed to be a two-digit field and the
+first part of the output from the
+.BR %F
+conversion specification was assumed to be a four-digit field. With
+.IR tm_year
+being a signed 32 or more-bit
+.BR int
+and with many current implementations supporting 64-bit
+.BR time_t
+types in one or more programming environments, these assumptions are
+clearly wrong.
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 now allows the format specifications
+.BR %0xC ,
+.BR %0xF ,
+.BR %0xG ,
+and
+.BR %0xY
+(where
+.BR 'x' 
+is a string of decimal digits used to specify printing and scanning of a
+string of
+.IR x
+decimal digits) with leading zero fill characters. Allowing applications
+to set the field width enables them to agree on the number of digits
+to be printed and scanned in the ISO\ 8601:\|2004 standard expanded representation of a
+year (for
+.BR %F ,
+.BR %G ,
+and
+.BR %Y )
+or all but the last two digits of the year (for
+.BR %C ).
+This is based on a feature in some versions of GNU
+.BR libc 's
+\fIstrftime\fR().
+The GNU version allows specifying space, zero, or no-fill characters in
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+format strings, but does not allow any flags to be specified in
+\fIstrptime\fR()
+format strings. These implementations also allow these flags to be
+specified for any numeric field. POSIX.1\(hy2008 only requires the zero fill flag
+(\c
+.BR '0' )
+and only requires that it be recognized when processing
+.BR %C ,
+.BR %F ,
+.BR %G ,
+and
+.BR %Y
+specifications when a minimum field width is also specified. The
+.BR '0' 
+flag is the only flag needed to produce and scan the ISO\ 8601:\|2004 standard
+year fields using the extended format forms. POSIX.1\(hy2008 also allows
+applications to specify the same flag and field width specifiers to be
+used in both
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+and
+\fIstrptime\fR()
+format strings for symmetry. Systems may provide other flag characters
+and may accept flags in conjunction with conversion specifiers other than
+.BR %C ,
+.BR %F ,
+.BR %G ,
+and
+.BR %Y ;
+but portable applications cannot depend on such extensions.
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 now also allows the format specifications
+.BR %+xC ,
+.BR %+xF ,
+.BR %+xG ,
+and
+.BR %+xY
+(where
+.BR 'x' 
+is a string of decimal digits used to specify printing and scanning of
+a string of
+.BR 'x' 
+decimal digits) with leading zero fill characters and a leading
+.BR '+' 
+sign character if the year being converted is more than four digits
+or a minimum field width is specified that allows room for more than
+four digits for the year. This allows date providers and consumers to
+agree on a specific number of digits to represent a year as required by
+the ISO\ 8601:\|2004 standard expanded representation formats. The expanded representation
+formats all require the year to begin with a leading
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+sign.
+(All of these specifiers can also provide a leading
+.BR '\(mi' 
+sign for negative years. Since negative years and the year 0 don't fit
+well with the Gregorian or Julian calendars, the normal ranges of dates
+start with year 1. The ISO\ C standard allows
+.IR tm_year
+to assume values corresponding to years before year 1, but the use of
+such years provided unspecified results.)
+.P
+Some earlier version of this standard specified that applications wanting
+to use
+\fIstrptime\fR()
+to scan dates and times printed by
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+should provide non-digit characters between fields to separate years
+from months and days. It also supported
+.BR %F
+to print and scan the ISO\ 8601:\|2004 standard extended format, complete representation date
+for years 1 through 9999 (i.e., YYYY-MM-DD). However, many applications
+were written to print (using
+\fIstrftime\fR())
+and scan (using
+\fIstrptime\fR())
+dates written using the basic format complete representation
+(four-digit years) and truncated representation (two-digit years)
+specified by the ISO\ 8601:\|2004 standard representation of dates and times which do not
+have any separation characters between fields. The ISO\ 8601:\|2004 standard also specifies
+basic format expanded representation where the creator and consumer of
+these fields agree beforehand to represent years as leading zero-filled
+strings of an agreed length of more than four digits to represent a year
+(again with no separation characters when year, month, and day are all
+displayed). Applications producing and consuming expanded representations
+are encouraged to use the
+.BR '+' 
+flag and an appropriate maximum field width to scan the year including
+the leading sign. Note that even without the
+.BR '+' 
+flag, years less than zero may be represented with a leading
+minus-sign for
+.BR %F ,
+.BR %G , and
+.BR %Y
+conversion specifications. Using negative years results in unspecified
+behavior.
+.P
+If a format specification
+.BR %+xF
+with the field width
+.IR x
+greater than 11 is specified and the width is large enough to display
+the full year, the output string produced will match the ISO\ 8601:\|2004 standard
+subclause 4.1.2.4 expanded representation, extended format date
+representation for a specific day. (For years in the range [1,99\|999],
+.BR %+12F
+is sufficient for an agreed five-digit year with a leading sign using
+the ISO\ 8601:\|2004 standard expanded representation, extended format for a specific day
+.BR \(dq<+/->YYYYY-MM-DD\(dq .)
+Note also that years less than 0 may produce a leading minus-sign (\c
+.BR '\(mi' )
+when using
+.BR %Y
+or
+.BR %C
+whether or not the
+.BR '0' 
+or
+.BR '+' 
+flags are used.
+.P
+The difference between the
+.BR '0' 
+flag and the
+.BR '+' 
+flag is whether the leading
+.BR '+' 
+character will be provided for years >9999 as required for the ISO\ 8601:\|2004 standard
+extended representation format containing a year. For example:
+.TS
+box center tab(!);
+cB | cB | cB | cB
+cB | cB | cB | cB
+l | lf5 | l | l.
+!!\fIstrftime\fP(\^)!\fIstrptime\fP(\^)
+Year!Conversion Specification!Output!Scan Back
+_
+1970!%Y!1970!1970
+_
+1970!%+4Y!1970!1970
+_
+27!%Y!27 or 0027!27
+_
+270!%Y!270 or 0270!270
+_
+270!%+4Y!0270!270
+_
+17!%C%y!0017!17
+_
+270!%C%y!0270!270
+_
+12345!%Y!12345!1234*
+_
+12345!%+4Y!+12345!123*
+_
+12345!%05Y!12345!12345
+_
+270!%+5Y \fRor\fP %+3C%y!+0270!270
+_
+12345!%+5Y \fRor\fP %+3C%y!+12345!1234*
+_
+12345!%06Y \fRor\fP %04C%y!012345!12345
+_
+12345!%+6Y \fRor\fP %+4C%y!+12345!12345
+_
+123456!%08Y \fRor\fP %06C%y!00123456!123456
+_
+123456!%+8Y \fRor\fP %+6C%y!+0123456!123456
+.TE
+.P
+In the cases above marked with a * in the
+\fIstrptime\fR()
+scan back field, the implied or specified number of characters scanned by
+\fIstrptime\fR()
+was less than the number of characters output by
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+using the same format; so the remaining digits of the year were dropped
+when the output date produced by
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+was scanned back in by
+\fIstrptime\fR().
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIasctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdifftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetdate\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgmtime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlocaltime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImktime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrptime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItzset\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIutime\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 7.3.5" ", " "LC_TIME",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strlen.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strlen.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ca0ce28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strlen.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRLEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strlen, strnlen
+\(em get length of fixed size string
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+size_t strlen(const char *\fIs\fP);
+size_t strnlen(const char *\fIs\fP, size_t \fImaxlen\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIstrlen\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrlen\fR()
+function shall compute the number of bytes in the string to which
+.IR s
+points, not including the terminating NUL character.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrnlen\fR()
+function shall compute the smaller of the number of bytes in the array
+to which
+.IR s
+points, not including the terminating NUL character, or the value of the
+.IR maxlen
+argument. The
+\fIstrnlen\fR()
+function shall never examine more than
+.IR maxlen
+bytes of the array pointed to by
+.IR s .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIstrlen\fR()
+function shall return the length of
+.IR s ;
+no return value shall be reserved to indicate an error.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrnlen\fR()
+function shall return an integer containing the smaller of either the
+length of the string pointed to by
+.IR s
+or
+.IR maxlen .
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Getting String Lengths"
+.P
+The following example sets the maximum length of
+.IR key
+and
+.IR data
+by using
+\fIstrlen\fR()
+to get the lengths of those strings.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <string.h>
+\&...
+struct element {
+    char *key;
+    char *data;
+};
+\&...
+char *key, *data;
+int len;
+.P
+*keylength = *datalength = 0;
+\&...
+if ((len = strlen(key)) > *keylength)
+    *keylength = len;
+if ((len = strlen(data)) > *datalength)
+    *datalength = len;
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwcslen\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strncasecmp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strncasecmp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f21e972
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strncasecmp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRNCASECMP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strncasecmp,
+strncasecmp_l
+\(em case-insensitive string comparisons
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <strings.h>
+.P
+int strncasecmp(const char *\fIs1\fP, const char *\fIs2\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+int strncasecmp_l(const char *\fIs1\fP, const char *\fIs2\fP,
+    size_t \fIn\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIstrcasecmp\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strncat.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strncat.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..59b6b93
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strncat.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRNCAT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strncat
+\(em concatenate a string with part of another
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+char *strncat(char *restrict \fIs1\fP, const char *restrict \fIs2\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrncat\fR()
+function shall append not more than
+.IR n
+bytes (a NUL character and bytes that follow it are not appended)
+from the array pointed to by
+.IR s2
+to the end of the string pointed to by
+.IR s1 .
+The initial byte of
+.IR s2
+overwrites the NUL character at the end of
+.IR s1 .
+A terminating NUL character is always appended to the result. If copying
+takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIstrncat\fR()
+function shall return
+.IR s1 ;
+no return value shall be reserved to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrcat\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strncmp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strncmp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a354df2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strncmp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRNCMP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strncmp
+\(em compare part of two strings
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+int strncmp(const char *\fIs1\fP, const char *\fIs2\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrncmp\fR()
+function shall compare not more than
+.IR n
+bytes (bytes that follow a NUL character are not compared) from the array
+pointed to by
+.IR s1
+to the array pointed to by
+.IR s2 .
+.P
+The sign of a non-zero return value is determined by the sign of the
+difference between the values of the first pair of bytes (both
+interpreted as type
+.BR "unsigned char" )
+that differ in the strings being compared.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIstrncmp\fR()
+shall return an integer greater than, equal to, or less than 0, if the
+possibly null-terminated array pointed to by
+.IR s1
+is greater than, equal to, or less than the possibly null-terminated
+array pointed to by
+.IR s2
+respectively.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrcmp\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strncpy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strncpy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..014b76e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strncpy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRNCPY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+stpncpy, strncpy
+\(em copy fixed length string, returning a pointer to the array end
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+char *stpncpy(char *restrict \fIs1\fP, const char *restrict \fIs2\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+char *strncpy(char *restrict \fIs1\fP, const char *restrict \fIs2\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIstrncpy\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIstpncpy\fR()
+and
+\fIstrncpy\fR()
+functions shall copy not more than
+.IR n
+bytes (bytes that follow a NUL character are not copied) from the array
+pointed to by
+.IR s2
+to the array pointed to by
+.IR s1 .
+.P
+If the array pointed to by
+.IR s2
+is a string that is shorter than
+.IR n
+bytes, NUL characters shall be appended to the copy in the array
+pointed to by
+.IR s1 ,
+until
+.IR n
+bytes in all are written.
+.P
+If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
+undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If a NUL character is written to the destination, the
+\fIstpncpy\fR()
+function shall return the address of the first such NUL character.
+Otherwise, it shall return
+.IR &s1 [ n ].
+.P
+The
+\fIstrncpy\fR()
+function shall return
+.IR s1 .
+.P
+No return values are reserved to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications must provide the space in
+.IR s1
+for the
+.IR n
+bytes to be transferred, as well as ensure that the
+.IR s2
+and
+.IR s1
+arrays do not overlap.
+.P
+Character movement is performed differently in different
+implementations. Thus, overlapping moves may yield surprises.
+.P
+If there is no NUL character byte in the first
+.IR n
+bytes of the array pointed to by
+.IR s2 ,
+the result is not null-terminated.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrcpy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcsncpy\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strndup.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strndup.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..395a927
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strndup.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRNDUP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strndup
+\(em duplicate a specific number of bytes from a string
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+char *strndup(const char *\fIs\fP, size_t \fIsize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIstrdup\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strnlen.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strnlen.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1d3f09a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strnlen.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRNLEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strnlen
+\(em get length of fixed size string
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+size_t strnlen(const char *\fIs\fP, size_t \fImaxlen\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIstrlen\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strpbrk.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strpbrk.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8b6775a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strpbrk.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRPBRK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strpbrk
+\(em scan a string for a byte
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+char *strpbrk(const char *\fIs1\fP, const char *\fIs2\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrpbrk\fR()
+function shall locate the first occurrence in the string pointed to by
+.IR s1
+of any byte from the string pointed to by
+.IR s2 .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIstrpbrk\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the byte or a null pointer if no byte from
+.IR s2
+occurs in
+.IR s1 .
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrchr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrrchr\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strptime.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strptime.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cfcf6cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strptime.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,442 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRPTIME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strptime
+\(em date and time conversion
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+char *strptime(const char *restrict \fIbuf\fP, const char *restrict \fIformat\fP,
+    struct tm *restrict \fItm\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIstrptime\fR()
+function shall convert the character string pointed to by
+.IR buf
+to values which are stored in the
+.BR tm
+structure pointed to by
+.IR tm ,
+using the format specified by
+.IR format .
+.P
+The format is composed of zero or more directives. Each directive is
+composed of one of the following: one or more white-space characters
+(as specified by
+\fIisspace\fR());
+an ordinary character (neither
+.BR '%' 
+nor a white-space character); or a conversion specification.
+.P
+Each conversion specification is introduced by the
+.BR '%' 
+character after which the following appear in sequence:
+.IP " *" 4
+An optional flag, the zero character (\c
+.BR '0' )
+or the
+<plus-sign>
+character (\c
+.BR '+' ),
+which is ignored.
+.IP " *" 4
+An optional field width. If a field width is specified, it shall be
+interpreted as a string of decimal digits that will determine the maximum
+number of bytes converted for the conversion rather than the number of
+bytes specified below in the description of the conversion specifiers.
+.IP " *" 4
+An optional
+.BR E
+or
+.BR O
+modifier.
+.IP " *" 4
+A terminating conversion specifier character that indicates the type of
+conversion to be applied.
+.P
+The conversions are determined using the
+.IR LC_TIME
+category of the current locale. The application shall ensure that
+there is white-space or other non-alphanumeric characters between any
+two conversion specifications unless all of the adjacent conversion
+specifications convert a known, fixed number of characters. In the
+following list, the maximum number of characters scanned (excluding the
+one matching the next directive) is as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+If a maximum field width is specified, then that number
+.IP " *" 4
+Otherwise, the pattern
+.BR \(dq{x}\(dq 
+indicates that the maximum is
+.IR x
+.IP " *" 4
+Otherwise, the pattern
+.BR \(dq[x,y]\(dq 
+indicates that the value shall fall within the range given (both bounds
+being inclusive), and the maximum number of characters scanned shall be
+the maximum required to represent any value in the range without leading
+zeros and without a leading
+<plus-sign>
+.P
+The following conversion specifiers are supported.
+.P
+The results are unspecified if a modifier is specified with a flag or
+with a minimum field width, or if a field width is specified for any
+conversion specifier other than
+.BR C ,
+.BR F ,
+or
+.BR Y .
+.IP "\fRa\fR" 8
+The day of the week, using the locale's weekday names; either the
+abbreviated or full name may be specified.
+.IP "\fRA\fR" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR %a .
+.IP "\fRb\fR" 8
+The month, using the locale's month names; either the abbreviated or
+full name may be specified.
+.IP "\fRB\fR" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR %b .
+.IP "\fRc\fR" 8
+Replaced by the locale's appropriate date and time representation.
+.IP "\fRC\fR" 8
+All but the last two digits of the year {2}; leading zeros shall be
+permitted but shall not be required. A leading
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+character shall be permitted before any leading zeros but shall not
+be required.
+.IP "\fRd\fR" 8
+The day of the month [01,31]; leading zeros shall be permitted but shall
+not be required.
+.IP "\fRD\fR" 8
+The date as
+.BR %m /\c
+.BR %d /\c
+.BR %y .
+.IP "\fRe\fR" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR %d .
+.IP "\fRh\fR" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR %b .
+.IP "\fRH\fR" 8
+The hour (24-hour clock) [00,23]; leading zeros shall be permitted but
+shall not be required.
+.IP "\fRI\fR" 8
+The hour (12-hour clock) [01,12]; leading zeros shall be permitted but
+shall not be required.
+.IP "\fRj\fR" 8
+The day number of the year [001,366]; leading zeros shall be permitted
+but shall not be required.
+.IP "\fRm\fR" 8
+The month number [01,12]; leading zeros shall be permitted but shall
+not be required.
+.IP "\fRM\fR" 8
+The minute [00,59]; leading zeros shall be permitted but shall not
+be required.
+.IP "\fRn\fR" 8
+Any white space.
+.IP "\fRp\fR" 8
+The locale's equivalent of a.m. or p.m.
+.IP "\fRr\fR" 8
+12-hour clock time using the AM/PM notation if
+.BR t_fmt_ampm
+is not an empty string in the
+.IR LC_TIME
+portion of the current locale; in the POSIX locale, this shall
+be equivalent to
+.BR %I :\c
+.BR %M :\c
+.BR %S
+.BR %p .
+.IP "\fRR\fR" 8
+The time as
+.BR %H :\c
+.BR %M .
+.IP "\fRS\fR" 8
+The seconds [00,60]; leading zeros shall be permitted but shall
+not be required.
+.IP "\fRt\fR" 8
+Any white space.
+.IP "\fRT\fR" 8
+The time as
+.BR %H :\c
+.BR %M :\c
+.BR %S .
+.IP "\fRU\fR" 8
+The week number of the year (Sunday as the first day of the week) as a
+decimal number [00,53]; leading zeros shall be permitted but shall
+not be required.
+.IP "\fRw\fR" 8
+The weekday as a decimal number [0,6], with 0 representing Sunday.
+.IP "\fRW\fR" 8
+The week number of the year (Monday as the first day of the week) as a
+decimal number [00,53]; leading zeros shall be permitted but shall
+not be required.
+.IP "\fRx\fR" 8
+The date, using the locale's date format.
+.IP "\fRX\fR" 8
+The time, using the locale's time format.
+.IP "\fRy\fR" 8
+The last two digits of the year. When
+.IR format
+contains neither a
+.BR C
+conversion specifier nor a
+.BR Y
+conversion specifier, values in the range [69,99] shall refer to years
+1969 to 1999 inclusive and values in the range [00,68] shall refer to
+years 2000 to 2068 inclusive; leading zeros shall be permitted but shall
+not be required. A leading
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+character shall be permitted before any leading zeros but shall not
+be required.
+.RS 8 
+.TP 10
+.BR Note:
+It is expected that in a future version of this standard the default
+century inferred from a 2-digit year will change. (This would apply
+to all commands accepting a 2-digit year as input.)
+.P
+.RE
+.IP "\fRY\fR" 8
+The full year {4}; leading zeros shall be permitted but shall
+not be required. A leading
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+character shall be permitted before any leading zeros but shall not
+be required.
+.IP "\fR%\fP" 8
+Replaced by
+.BR % .
+.SS "Modified Conversion Specifiers"
+.P
+Some conversion specifiers can be modified by the
+.BR E
+and
+.BR O
+modifier characters to indicate that an alternative format or
+specification should be used rather than the one normally used by the
+unmodified conversion specifier. If the alternative format or
+specification does not exist in the current locale, the behavior shall
+be as if the unmodified conversion specification were used.
+.IP "\fR%Ec\fR" 8
+The locale's alternative appropriate date and time representation.
+.IP "\fR%EC\fR" 8
+The name of the base year (period) in the locale's alternative
+representation.
+.IP "\fR%Ex\fR" 8
+The locale's alternative date representation.
+.IP "\fR%EX\fR" 8
+The locale's alternative time representation.
+.IP "\fR%Ey\fR" 8
+The offset from
+.BR %EC
+(year only) in the locale's alternative representation.
+.IP "\fR%EY\fR" 8
+The full alternative year representation.
+.IP "\fR%Od\fR" 8
+The day of the month using the locale's alternative numeric symbols;
+leading zeros shall be permitted but shall not be required.
+.IP "\fR%Oe\fR" 8
+Equivalent to
+.BR %Od .
+.IP "\fR%OH\fR" 8
+The hour (24-hour clock) using the locale's alternative numeric
+symbols.
+.IP "\fR%OI\fR" 8
+The hour (12-hour clock) using the locale's alternative numeric
+symbols.
+.IP "\fR%Om\fR" 8
+The month using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%OM\fR" 8
+The minutes using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%OS\fR" 8
+The seconds using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%OU\fR" 8
+The week number of the year (Sunday as the first day of the week) using
+the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%Ow\fR" 8
+The number of the weekday (Sunday=0) using the locale's alternative
+numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%OW\fR" 8
+The week number of the year (Monday as the first day of the week) using
+the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.IP "\fR%Oy\fR" 8
+The year (offset from
+.BR %C )
+using the locale's alternative numeric symbols.
+.P
+A conversion specification composed of white-space characters is
+executed by scanning input up to the first character that is not
+white-space (which remains unscanned), or until no more characters can
+be scanned.
+.P
+A conversion specification that is an ordinary character is executed by
+scanning the next character from the buffer. If the character scanned
+from the buffer differs from the one comprising the directive, the
+directive fails, and the differing and subsequent characters remain
+unscanned.
+.P
+A series of conversion specifications composed of
+.BR %n ,
+.BR %t ,
+white-space characters, or any combination is executed by scanning up
+to the first character that is not white space (which remains
+unscanned), or until no more characters can be scanned.
+.P
+Any other conversion specification is executed by scanning characters
+until a character matching the next directive is scanned, or until no
+more characters can be scanned. These characters, except the one
+matching the next directive, are then compared to the locale values
+associated with the conversion specifier. If a match is found, values
+for the appropriate
+.BR tm
+structure members are set to values corresponding to the locale
+information. Case is ignored when matching items in
+.IR buf
+such as month or weekday names. If no match is found,
+\fIstrptime\fR()
+fails and no more characters are scanned.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIstrptime\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the character following the last character
+parsed. Otherwise, a null pointer shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Convert a Data-Plus-Time String to Broken-Down Time and Then into Seconds"
+.P
+The following example demonstrates the use of
+\fIstrptime\fR()
+to convert a string into broken-down time. The broken-down time is then
+converted into seconds since the Epoch using
+\fImktime\fR().
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <time.h>
+\&...
+.P
+struct tm tm;
+time_t t;
+.P
+if (strptime("6 Dec 2001 12:33:45", "%d %b %Y %H:%M:%S", &tm) == NULL)
+    /* Handle error */;
+.P
+printf("year: %d; month: %d; day: %d;\en",
+        tm.tm_year, tm.tm_mon, tm.tm_mday);
+printf("hour: %d; minute: %d; second: %d\en",
+        tm.tm_hour, tm.tm_min, tm.tm_sec);
+printf("week day: %d; year day: %d\en", tm.tm_wday, tm.tm_yday);
+.P
+tm.tm_isdst = \(mi1;      /* Not set by strptime(); tells mktime()
+                          to determine whether daylight saving time
+                          is in effect */
+t = mktime(&tm);
+if (t == \(mi1)
+    /* Handle error */;
+printf("seconds since the Epoch: %ld\en", (long) t);"
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Several ``equivalent to'' formats and the special processing of
+white-space characters are provided in order to ease the use of
+identical
+.IR format
+strings for
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+and
+\fIstrptime\fR().
+.P
+It should be noted that dates constructed by the
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+function with the
+.BR %Y
+or
+.BR %C%y
+conversion specifiers may have values larger than 9\|999. If the
+\fIstrptime\fR()
+function is used to read such values using
+.BR %C%y
+or
+.BR %Y ,
+the year values will be truncated to four digits. Applications should use
+.BR %+ \c
+.IR w \c
+.BR %y
+or
+.BR %+ \c
+.IR x \c
+.BR Y
+with
+.IR w
+and
+.IR x
+set large enough to contain the full value of any years that will be
+printed or scanned.
+.P
+See also the APPLICATION USAGE section in
+.IR "\fIstrftime\fR\^(\|)".
+.P
+It is unspecified whether multiple calls to
+\fIstrptime\fR()
+using the same
+.BR tm
+structure will update the current contents of the structure or
+overwrite all contents of the structure. Conforming applications
+should make a single call to
+\fIstrptime\fR()
+with a format and all data needed to completely specify the date and
+time being converted.
+.SH RATIONALE
+See the RATIONALE section for
+.IR "\fIstrftime\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfprintf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfscanf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItime\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strrchr.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strrchr.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4f46b23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strrchr.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRRCHR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strrchr
+\(em string scanning operation
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+char *strrchr(const char *\fIs\fP, int \fIc\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrrchr\fR()
+function shall locate the last occurrence of
+.IR c
+(converted to a
+.BR char )
+in the string pointed to by
+.IR s .
+The terminating NUL character is considered to be part of the string.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIstrrchr\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the byte or a null pointer if
+.IR c
+does not occur in the string.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Finding the Base Name of a File"
+.P
+The following example uses
+\fIstrrchr\fR()
+to get a pointer to the base name of a file. The
+\fIstrrchr\fR()
+function searches backwards through the name of the file to find the
+last
+.BR '/' 
+character in
+.IR name .
+This pointer (plus one) will point to the base name of the file.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <string.h>
+\&...
+const char *name;
+char *basename;
+\&...
+basename = strrchr(name, '/') + 1;
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrchr\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strsignal.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strsignal.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4896279
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strsignal.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRSIGNAL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strsignal
+\(em get name of signal
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+char *strsignal(int \fIsignum\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIstrsignal\fR()
+function shall map the signal number in
+.IR signum
+to an implementation-defined string and shall return a pointer to it.
+It shall use the same set of messages as the
+\fIpsignal\fR()
+function.
+.P
+The application shall not modify the string returned. The returned
+pointer might be invalidated or the string content might be overwritten
+by a subsequent call to
+\fIstrsignal\fR()
+or
+\fIsetlocale\fR().
+.P
+The contents of the message strings returned by
+\fIstrsignal\fR()
+should be determined by the setting of the
+.IR LC_MESSAGES
+category in the current locale.
+.P
+The implementation shall behave as if no function defined in this
+standard calls
+\fIstrsignal\fR().
+.P
+Since no return value is reserved to indicate an error, an application
+wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0, then call
+\fIstrsignal\fR(),
+then check
+.IR errno .
+.P
+The
+\fIstrsignal\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIstrsignal\fR()
+shall return a pointer to a string. Otherwise, if
+.IR signum
+is not a valid signal number, the return value is unspecified.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+If
+.IR signum
+is not a valid signal number, some implementations return NULL, while
+for others the
+\fIstrsignal\fR()
+function returns a pointer to a string containing an unspecified
+message denoting an unknown signal. POSIX.1\(hy2008 leaves this return
+value unspecified.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIpsiginfo\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strspn.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strspn.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..02f2561
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strspn.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRSPN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strspn
+\(em get length of a substring
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+size_t strspn(const char *\fIs1\fP, const char *\fIs2\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrspn\fR()
+function shall compute the length (in bytes) of the maximum initial
+segment of the string pointed to by
+.IR s1
+which consists entirely of bytes from the string pointed to by
+.IR s2 .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIstrspn\fR()
+function shall return the computed length; no return value is reserved
+to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrcspn\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strstr.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strstr.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..df547ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strstr.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRSTR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strstr
+\(em find a substring
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+char *strstr(const char *\fIs1\fP, const char *\fIs2\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrstr\fR()
+function shall locate the first occurrence in the string pointed to by
+.IR s1
+of the sequence of bytes (excluding the terminating NUL character) in the
+string pointed to by
+.IR s2 .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIstrstr\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the located string or a null pointer if the
+string is not found.
+.P
+If
+.IR s2
+points to a string with zero length, the function shall return
+.IR s1 .
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrchr\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtod.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtod.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..421c17c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtod.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,341 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRTOD "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strtod,
+strtof,
+strtold
+\(em convert a string to a double-precision number
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+double strtod(const char *restrict \fInptr\fP, char **restrict \fIendptr\fP);
+float strtof(const char *restrict \fInptr\fP, char **restrict \fIendptr\fP);
+long double strtold(const char *restrict \fInptr\fP, char **restrict \fIendptr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall convert the initial portion of the string pointed
+to by
+.IR nptr
+to
+.BR double ,
+.BR float ,
+and
+.BR "long double"
+representation, respectively. First, they decompose the input string
+into three parts:
+.IP " 1." 4
+An initial, possibly empty, sequence of white-space characters (as
+specified by
+\fIisspace\fR())
+.IP " 2." 4
+A subject sequence interpreted as a floating-point constant or
+representing infinity or NaN
+.IP " 3." 4
+A final string of one or more unrecognized characters, including the
+terminating NUL character of the input string
+.P
+Then they shall attempt to convert the subject sequence to a
+floating-point number, and return the result.
+.P
+The expected form of the subject sequence is an optional
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+sign, then one of the following:
+.IP " *" 4
+A non-empty sequence of decimal digits optionally containing a radix
+character; then an optional exponent part consisting of the character
+.BR 'e' 
+or the character
+.BR 'E' ,
+optionally followed by a
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+character, and then followed by one or more decimal digits
+.IP " *" 4
+A 0x or 0X, then a non-empty sequence of hexadecimal digits optionally
+containing a radix character; then an optional binary exponent part
+consisting of the character
+.BR 'p' 
+or the character
+.BR 'P' ,
+optionally followed by a
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+character, and then followed by one or more decimal digits
+.IP " *" 4
+One of INF or INFINITY, ignoring case
+.IP " *" 4
+One of NAN or NAN(\fIn-char-sequence\s-3\dopt\u\s+3\fR), ignoring case in
+the NAN part, where:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+n-char-sequence:
+    digit
+    nondigit
+    n-char-sequence digit
+    n-char-sequence nondigit
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of
+the input string, starting with the first non-white-space character,
+that is of the expected form. The subject sequence contains no
+characters if the input string is not of the expected form.
+.P
+If the subject sequence has the expected form for a floating-point
+number, the sequence of characters starting with the first digit or the
+decimal-point character (whichever occurs first) shall be interpreted
+as a floating constant of the C language, except that the radix
+character shall be used in place of a period, and that if neither an
+exponent part nor a radix character appears in a decimal floating-point
+number, or if a binary exponent part does not appear in a hexadecimal
+floating-point number, an exponent part of the appropriate type with
+value zero is assumed to follow the last digit in the string. If the
+subject sequence begins with a minus-sign, the sequence shall be
+interpreted as negated. A character sequence INF or INFINITY shall be
+interpreted as an infinity, if representable in the return type, else
+as if it were a floating constant that is too large for the range of
+the return type. A character sequence NAN or
+NAN(\fIn-char-sequence\s-3\dopt\u\s+3\fR) shall be interpreted as a
+quiet NaN, if supported in the return type, else as if it were a
+subject sequence part that does not have the expected form; the meaning
+of the \fIn\fR-char sequences is implementation-defined. A pointer to
+the final string is stored in the object pointed to by
+.IR endptr ,
+provided that
+.IR endptr
+is not a null pointer.
+.P
+If the subject sequence has the hexadecimal form and FLT_RADIX is a
+power of 2, the value resulting from the conversion is correctly
+rounded.
+.P
+The radix character is defined in the current locale (category
+.IR LC_NUMERIC ).
+In the POSIX locale, or in a locale where the radix character is not
+defined, the radix character shall default to a
+<period>
+(\c
+.BR '.' ).
+.P
+In other than the C
+or POSIX
+locales, other implementation-defined subject sequences may be
+accepted.
+.P
+If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no
+conversion shall be performed; the value of
+.IR nptr
+is stored in the object pointed to by
+.IR endptr ,
+provided that
+.IR endptr
+is not a null pointer.
+.P
+These functions shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.P
+Since 0 is returned on error and is also a valid return on success,
+an application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0, then call
+\fIstrtod\fR(),
+\fIstrtof\fR(),
+or
+\fIstrtold\fR(),
+then check
+.IR errno .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the converted
+value. If no conversion could be performed, 0 shall be returned, and
+.IR errno
+may be set to
+.BR [EINVAL] .
+.P
+If the correct value is outside the range of representable values,
+\(+-HUGE_VAL, \(+-HUGE_VALF, or \(+-HUGE_VALL shall be returned
+(according to the sign of the value), and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+.P
+If the correct value would cause an underflow, a value whose magnitude
+is no greater than the smallest normalized positive number in the
+return type shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+The value to be returned would cause overflow
+or underflow.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+No conversion could be performed.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If the subject sequence has the hexadecimal form and FLT_RADIX is not a
+power of 2, and the result is not exactly representable, the result
+should be one of the two numbers in the appropriate internal format
+that are adjacent to the hexadecimal floating source value, with the
+extra stipulation that the error should have a correct sign for the
+current rounding direction.
+.P
+If the subject sequence has the decimal form and at most DECIMAL_DIG
+(defined in
+.IR <float.h> )
+significant digits, the result should be correctly rounded. If the
+subject sequence
+.IR D
+has the decimal form and more than DECIMAL_DIG significant digits,
+consider the two bounding, adjacent decimal strings
+.IR L
+and
+.IR U ,
+both having DECIMAL_DIG significant digits, such that the values of
+.IR L ,
+.IR D ,
+and
+.IR U
+satisfy
+.IR L
+<=
+.IR D
+<=
+.IR U .
+The result should be one of the (equal or adjacent) values that would
+be obtained by correctly rounding
+.IR L
+and
+.IR U
+according to the current rounding direction, with the extra stipulation
+that the error with respect to
+.IR D
+should have a correct sign for the current rounding direction.
+.P
+The changes to
+\fIstrtod\fR()
+introduced by the ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1999 standard can alter the behavior of well-formed
+applications complying with the ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1990 standard and thus earlier versions of
+this standard. One such example would be:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int
+what_kind_of_number (char *s)
+{
+    char *endp;
+    double d;
+    long l;
+.P
+    d = strtod(s, &endp);
+    if (s != endp && *endp == `\e0')
+        printf("It's a float with value %g\en", d);
+    else
+    {
+        l = strtol(s, &endp, 0);
+        if (s != endp && *endp == `\e0')
+            printf("It's an integer with value %ld\en", 1);
+        else
+            return 1;
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+If the function is called with:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+what_kind_of_number ("0x10")
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+an ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1990 standard-compliant library will result in the function printing:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+It's an integer with value 16
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+With the ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1999 standard, the result is:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+It's a float with value 16
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The change in behavior is due to the inclusion of floating-point
+numbers in hexadecimal notation without requiring that either a decimal
+point or the binary exponent be present.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfscanf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlocaleconv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrtol\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<float.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtoimax.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtoimax.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c26cad2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtoimax.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRTOIMAX "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strtoimax,
+strtoumax
+\(em convert string to integer type
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <inttypes.h>
+.P
+intmax_t strtoimax(const char *restrict \fInptr\fP, char **restrict \fIendptr\fP,
+    int \fIbase\fP);
+uintmax_t strtoumax(const char *restrict \fInptr\fP, char **restrict \fIendptr\fP,
+    int \fIbase\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall be equivalent to the
+\fIstrtol\fR(),
+\fIstrtoll\fR(),
+\fIstrtoul\fR(),
+and
+\fIstrtoull\fR()
+functions, except that the initial portion of the string shall be
+converted to
+.BR intmax_t
+and
+.BR uintmax_t
+representation, respectively.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the converted value, if any.
+.P
+If no conversion could be performed, zero shall be returned
+and
+.IR errno
+may be set to
+.BR [EINVAL] .
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR base
+is not supported, 0 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EINVAL] .
+.P
+If the correct value is outside the range of representable values,
+{INTMAX_MAX},
+{INTMAX_MIN},
+or
+{UINTMAX_MAX}
+shall be returned (according to the return type and sign of the value,
+if any), and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR base
+is not supported.
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+The value to be returned is not representable.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+No conversion could be performed.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since the value of
+.IR *endptr
+is unspecified if the value of
+.IR base
+is not supported, applications should either ensure that
+.IR base
+has a supported value (0 or between 2 and 36) before the call, or check
+for an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error before examining
+.IR *endptr .
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrtol\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrtoul\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<inttypes.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtok.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtok.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..531e309
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtok.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,241 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRTOK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strtok,
+strtok_r
+\(em split string into tokens
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+char *strtok(char *restrict \fIs1\fP, const char *restrict \fIs2\fP);
+char *strtok_r(char *restrict \fIs\fP, const char *restrict \fIsep\fP,
+    char **restrict \fIlasts\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIstrtok\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+A sequence of calls to
+\fIstrtok\fR()
+breaks the string pointed to by
+.IR s1
+into a sequence of tokens, each of which is delimited by a byte from
+the string pointed to by
+.IR s2 .
+The first call in the sequence has
+.IR s1
+as its first argument, and is followed by calls with a null pointer as
+their first argument. The separator string pointed to by
+.IR s2
+may be different from call to call.
+.P
+The first call in the sequence searches the string pointed to by
+.IR s1
+for the first byte that is
+.IR not
+contained in the current separator string pointed to by
+.IR s2 .
+If no such byte is found, then there are no tokens in the string
+pointed to by
+.IR s1
+and
+\fIstrtok\fR()
+shall return a null pointer. If such a byte is found, it is the
+start of the first token.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrtok\fR()
+function then searches from there for a byte that
+.IR is
+contained in the current separator string. If no such byte is found,
+the current token extends to the end of the string pointed to by
+.IR s1 ,
+and subsequent searches for a token shall return a null pointer. If
+such a byte is found, it is overwritten by a NUL character, which
+terminates the current token. The
+\fIstrtok\fR()
+function saves a pointer to the following byte, from which the next
+search for a token shall start.
+.P
+Each subsequent call, with a null pointer as the value of the first
+argument, starts searching from the saved pointer and behaves as
+described above.
+.P
+The implementation shall behave as if no function defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+calls
+\fIstrtok\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIstrtok\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrtok_r\fR()
+function considers the null-terminated string
+.IR s
+as a sequence of zero or more text tokens separated by spans of one or
+more characters from the separator string
+.IR sep .
+The argument
+.IR lasts
+points to a user-provided pointer which points to stored information
+necessary for
+\fIstrtok_r\fR()
+to continue scanning the same string.
+.P
+In the first call to
+\fIstrtok_r\fR(),
+.IR s
+points to a null-terminated string,
+.IR sep
+to a null-terminated string of separator characters, and the value
+pointed to by
+.IR lasts
+is ignored. The
+\fIstrtok_r\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to the first character of the first
+token, write a null character into
+.IR s
+immediately following the returned token, and update the pointer to
+which
+.IR lasts
+points.
+.P
+In subsequent calls,
+.IR s
+is a null pointer and
+.IR lasts
+shall be unchanged from the previous call so that subsequent calls
+shall move through the string
+.IR s ,
+returning successive tokens until no tokens remain. The separator
+string
+.IR sep
+may be different from call to call. When no token remains in
+.IR s ,
+a null pointer shall be returned.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIstrtok\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the first byte of a token. Otherwise,
+if there is no token,
+\fIstrtok\fR()
+shall return a null pointer.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrtok_r\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to the token found, or a null pointer
+when no token is found.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Searching for Word Separators"
+.P
+The following example searches for tokens separated by
+<space>
+characters.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <string.h>
+\&...
+char *token;
+char line[] = "LINE TO BE SEPARATED";
+char *search = " ";
+.P
+/* Token will point to "LINE". */
+token = strtok(line, search);
+.P
+/* Token will point to "TO". */
+token = strtok(NULL, search);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Find First two Fields in a Buffer"
+.P
+The following example uses
+\fIstrtok\fR()
+to find two character strings (a key and data associated with that key)
+separated by any combination of
+<space>,
+<tab>,
+or
+<newline>
+characters at the start of the array of characters pointed to by
+.IR buffer .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <string.h>
+\&...
+char    *buffer;
+\&...
+struct element {
+    char *key;
+    char *data;
+} e;
+\&...
+// Load the buffer...
+\&...
+// Get the key and its data...
+e.key = strtok(buffer, " \et\en");
+e.data = strtok(NULL, " \et\en");
+// Process the rest of the contents of the buffer...
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIstrtok_r\fR()
+function is thread-safe and stores its state in a user-supplied buffer
+instead of possibly using a static data area that may be overwritten
+by an unrelated call from another thread.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIstrtok\fR()
+function searches for a separator string within a larger string. It
+returns a pointer to the last substring between separator strings.
+This function uses static storage to keep track of the current string
+position between calls. The new function,
+\fIstrtok_r\fR(),
+takes an additional argument,
+.IR lasts ,
+to keep track of the current position in the string.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtol.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtol.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ad1dc2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtol.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,244 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRTOL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strtol,
+strtoll
+\(em convert a string to a long integer
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+long strtol(const char *restrict \fIstr\fP, char **restrict \fIendptr\fP, int \fIbase\fP);
+long long strtoll(const char *restrict \fIstr\fP, char **restrict \fIendptr\fP,
+    int \fIbase\fP)
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall convert the initial portion of the string pointed
+to by
+.IR str
+to a type
+.BR "long"
+and
+.BR "long long"
+representation, respectively. First, they decompose the input string
+into three parts:
+.IP " 1." 4
+An initial, possibly empty, sequence of white-space characters (as
+specified by
+\fIisspace\fR())
+.IP " 2." 4
+A subject sequence interpreted as an integer represented in some radix
+determined by the value of
+.IR base
+.IP " 3." 4
+A final string of one or more unrecognized characters, including
+the terminating NUL character of the input string.
+.P
+Then they shall attempt to convert the subject sequence to an
+integer, and return the result.
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR base
+is 0, the expected form of the subject sequence is that of a decimal
+constant, octal constant, or hexadecimal constant, any of which may be
+preceded by a
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+sign. A decimal constant begins with a non-zero digit, and consists of
+a sequence of decimal digits. An octal constant consists of the prefix
+.BR '0' 
+optionally followed by a sequence of the digits
+.BR '0' 
+to
+.BR '7' 
+only. A hexadecimal constant consists of the prefix 0x or 0X followed
+by a sequence of the decimal digits and letters
+.BR 'a' 
+(or
+.BR 'A' )
+to
+.BR 'f' 
+(or
+.BR 'F' )
+with values 10 to 15 respectively.
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR base
+is between 2 and 36, the expected form of the subject sequence is a
+sequence of letters and digits representing an integer with the radix
+specified by
+.IR base ,
+optionally preceded by a
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+sign. The letters from
+.BR 'a' 
+(or
+.BR 'A' )
+to
+.BR 'z' 
+(or
+.BR 'Z' )
+inclusive are ascribed the values 10 to 35; only letters whose ascribed
+values are less than that of
+.IR base
+are permitted. If the value of
+.IR base
+is 16, the characters 0x or 0X may optionally precede the sequence of
+letters and digits, following the sign if present.
+.P
+The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of
+the input string, starting with the first non-white-space character
+that is of the expected form. The subject sequence shall contain no
+characters if the input string is empty or consists entirely of
+white-space characters, or if the first non-white-space character is
+other than a sign or a permissible letter or digit.
+.P
+If the subject sequence has the expected form and the value of
+.IR base
+is 0, the sequence of characters starting with the first digit shall be
+interpreted as an integer constant. If the subject sequence has the
+expected form and the value of
+.IR base
+is between 2 and 36, it shall be used as the base for conversion,
+ascribing to each letter its value as given above. If the subject
+sequence begins with a minus-sign, the value resulting from the
+conversion shall be negated. A pointer to the final string shall be
+stored in the object pointed to by
+.IR endptr ,
+provided that
+.IR endptr
+is not a null pointer.
+.P
+In other than the C
+or POSIX
+locales, other implementation-defined subject sequences may be
+accepted.
+.P
+If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no
+conversion is performed; the value of
+.IR str
+shall be stored in the object pointed to by
+.IR endptr ,
+provided that
+.IR endptr
+is not a null pointer.
+.P
+These functions shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.P
+Since 0,
+{LONG_MIN}
+or
+{LLONG_MIN},
+and
+{LONG_MAX}
+or
+{LLONG_MAX}
+are returned on error and are also valid returns on success, an
+application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0, then call
+\fIstrtol\fR()
+or
+\fIstrtoll\fR(),
+then check
+.IR errno .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the converted
+value, if any. If no conversion could be performed, 0 shall be returned
+and
+.IR errno
+may be set to
+.BR [EINVAL] .
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR base
+is not supported, 0 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EINVAL] .
+.P
+If the correct value is outside the range of representable values,
+{LONG_MIN},
+{LONG_MAX},
+{LLONG_MIN},
+or
+{LLONG_MAX}
+shall be returned (according to the sign of the value), and
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR base
+is not supported.
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+The value to be returned is not representable.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+No conversion could be performed.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since the value of
+.IR *endptr
+is unspecified if the value of
+.IR base
+is not supported, applications should either ensure that
+.IR base
+has a supported value (0 or between 2 and 36) before the call, or check
+for an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error before examining
+.IR *endptr .
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfscanf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrtod\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtold.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtold.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6e53bf1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtold.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRTOLD "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strtold
+\(em convert a string to a double-precision number
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+long double strtold(const char *restrict \fInptr\fP, char **restrict \fIendptr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIstrtod\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtoll.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtoll.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fa41797
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtoll.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRTOLL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strtoll
+\(em convert a string to a long integer
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+long long strtoll(const char *restrict \fIstr\fP, char **restrict \fIendptr\fP,
+    int \fIbase\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIstrtol\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtoul.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtoul.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cf88249
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtoul.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,240 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRTOUL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strtoul,
+strtoull
+\(em convert a string to an unsigned long
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+unsigned long strtoul(const char *restrict \fIstr\fP,
+    char **restrict \fIendptr\fP, int \fIbase\fP);
+unsigned long long strtoull(const char *restrict \fIstr\fP,
+    char **restrict \fIendptr\fP, int \fIbase\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall convert the initial portion of the string pointed
+to by
+.IR str
+to a type
+.BR "unsigned long"
+and
+.BR "unsigned long long"
+representation, respectively. First, they decompose the input string
+into three parts:
+.IP " 1." 4
+An initial, possibly empty, sequence of white-space characters (as
+specified by
+\fIisspace\fR())
+.IP " 2." 4
+A subject sequence interpreted as an integer represented in some radix
+determined by the value of
+.IR base
+.IP " 3." 4
+A final string of one or more unrecognized characters, including
+the terminating NUL character of the input string
+.P
+Then they shall attempt to convert the subject sequence to an
+unsigned integer, and return the result.
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR base
+is 0, the expected form of the subject sequence is that of a decimal
+constant, octal constant, or hexadecimal constant, any of which may be
+preceded by a
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+sign. A decimal constant begins with a non-zero digit, and consists of
+a sequence of decimal digits. An octal constant consists of the prefix
+.BR '0' 
+optionally followed by a sequence of the digits
+.BR '0' 
+to
+.BR '7' 
+only. A hexadecimal constant consists of the prefix 0x or 0X followed
+by a sequence of the decimal digits and letters
+.BR 'a' 
+(or
+.BR 'A' )
+to
+.BR 'f' 
+(or
+.BR 'F' )
+with values 10 to 15 respectively.
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR base
+is between 2 and 36, the expected form of the subject sequence is a
+sequence of letters and digits representing an integer with the radix
+specified by
+.IR base ,
+optionally preceded by a
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+sign. The letters from
+.BR 'a' 
+(or
+.BR 'A' )
+to
+.BR 'z' 
+(or
+.BR 'Z' )
+inclusive are ascribed the values 10 to 35; only letters whose ascribed
+values are less than that of
+.IR base
+are permitted. If the value of
+.IR base
+is 16, the characters 0x or 0X may optionally precede the sequence of
+letters and digits, following the sign if present.
+.P
+The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of
+the input string, starting with the first non-white-space character
+that is of the expected form. The subject sequence shall contain no
+characters if the input string is empty or consists entirely of
+white-space characters, or if the first non-white-space character is
+other than a sign or a permissible letter or digit.
+.P
+If the subject sequence has the expected form and the value of
+.IR base
+is 0, the sequence of characters starting with the first digit shall be
+interpreted as an integer constant. If the subject sequence has the
+expected form and the value of
+.IR base
+is between 2 and 36, it shall be used as the base for conversion,
+ascribing to each letter its value as given above. If the subject
+sequence begins with a minus-sign, the value resulting from the
+conversion shall be negated. A pointer to the final string shall be
+stored in the object pointed to by
+.IR endptr ,
+provided that
+.IR endptr
+is not a null pointer.
+.P
+In other than the C
+or POSIX
+locales, other implementation-defined subject sequences may be
+accepted.
+.P
+If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no
+conversion shall be performed; the value of
+.IR str
+shall be stored in the object pointed to by
+.IR endptr ,
+provided that
+.IR endptr
+is not a null pointer.
+.P
+These functions shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.P
+Since 0,
+{ULONG_MAX},
+and
+{ULLONG_MAX}
+are returned on error and are also valid returns on success, an
+application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0, then call
+\fIstrtoul\fR()
+or
+\fIstrtoull\fR(),
+then check
+.IR errno .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the converted
+value, if any. If no conversion could be performed, 0 shall be returned
+and
+.IR errno
+may be set to
+.BR [EINVAL] .
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR base
+is not supported, 0 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EINVAL] .
+.P
+If the correct value is outside the range of representable values,
+{ULONG_MAX}
+or
+{ULLONG_MAX}
+shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR base
+is not supported.
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+The value to be returned is not representable.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+No conversion could be performed.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since the value of
+.IR *endptr
+is unspecified if the value of
+.IR base
+is not supported, applications should either ensure that
+.IR base
+has a supported value (0 or between 2 and 36) before the call, or check
+for an
+.BR [EINVAL] 
+error before examining
+.IR *endptr .
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfscanf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrtod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrtol\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtoumax.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtoumax.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7942019
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strtoumax.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRTOUMAX "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strtoumax
+\(em convert a string to an integer type
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <inttypes.h>
+.P
+uintmax_t strtoumax(const char *restrict \fInptr\fP, char **restrict \fIendptr\fP,
+    int \fIbase\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIstrtoimax\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strxfrm.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strxfrm.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..687197b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/strxfrm.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,154 @@
+'\" et
+.TH STRXFRM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+strxfrm,
+strxfrm_l
+\(em string transformation
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <string.h>
+.P
+size_t strxfrm(char *restrict \fIs1\fP, const char *restrict \fIs2\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+size_t strxfrm_l(char *restrict \fIs1\fP, const char *restrict \fIs2\fP,
+    size_t \fIn\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIstrxfrm\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrxfrm\fR()
+and
+\fIstrxfrm_l\fR()
+functions shall transform the string pointed to by
+.IR s2
+and place the resulting string into the array pointed to by
+.IR s1 .
+The transformation is such that if
+\fIstrcmp\fR()
+is applied to two transformed strings, it shall return a value greater
+than, equal to, or less than 0, corresponding to the result of
+\fIstrcoll\fR()
+or
+\fIstrcoll_l\fR(),
+respectively, applied to the same two original strings
+with the same locale.
+No more than
+.IR n
+bytes are placed into the resulting array pointed to by
+.IR s1 ,
+including the terminating NUL character. If
+.IR n
+is 0,
+.IR s1
+is permitted to be a null pointer. If copying takes place between
+objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The
+\fIstrxfrm\fR()
+and
+\fIstrxfrm_l\fR()
+functions shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.P
+Since no return value is reserved to indicate an error, an
+application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0, then call
+\fIstrxfrm\fR()
+or
+\fIstrxfrm_l\fR(),
+then check
+.IR errno .
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIstrxfrm_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIstrxfrm\fR()
+and
+\fIstrxfrm_l\fR()
+shall return the length of the transformed string (not including the
+terminating NUL character). If the value returned is
+.IR n
+or more, the contents of the array pointed to by
+.IR s1
+are unspecified.
+.P
+On error,
+\fIstrxfrm\fR()
+and
+\fIstrxfrm_l\fR()
+may set
+.IR errno
+but no return value is reserved to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The string pointed to by the
+.IR s2
+argument contains characters outside the domain of the collating
+sequence.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The transformation function is such that two transformed strings can be
+ordered by
+\fIstrcmp\fR()
+as appropriate to collating sequence information in the
+current locale (category
+.IR LC_COLLATE ).
+.P
+The fact that when
+.IR n
+is 0
+.IR s1
+is permitted to be a null pointer is useful to determine the size of
+the
+.IR s1
+array prior to making the transformation.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrcmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrcoll\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<string.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/swab.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/swab.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..14ce430
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/swab.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SWAB "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+swab
+\(em swap bytes
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+void swab(const void *restrict \fIsrc\fP, void *restrict \fIdest\fP,
+    ssize_t \fInbytes\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIswab\fR()
+function shall copy
+.IR nbytes
+bytes, which are pointed to by
+.IR src ,
+to the object pointed to by
+.IR dest ,
+exchanging adjacent bytes. The
+.IR nbytes
+argument should be even. If
+.IR nbytes
+is odd,
+\fIswab\fR()
+copies and exchanges
+.IR nbytes \(mi1
+bytes and the disposition of the last byte is unspecified. If copying
+takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
+If
+.IR nbytes
+is negative,
+\fIswab\fR()
+does nothing.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+None.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/swprintf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/swprintf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee0fd20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/swprintf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SWPRINTF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+swprintf
+\(em print formatted wide-character output
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int swprintf(wchar_t *restrict \fIws\fP, size_t \fIn\fP,
+    const wchar_t *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfwprintf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/swscanf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/swscanf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..91d0333
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/swscanf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SWSCANF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+swscanf
+\(em convert formatted wide-character input
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int swscanf(const wchar_t *restrict \fIws\fP,
+    const wchar_t *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfwscanf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/symlink.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/symlink.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c5979e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/symlink.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,264 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SYMLINK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+symlink, symlinkat
+\(em make a symbolic link relative to directory file descriptor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int symlink(const char *\fIpath1\fP, const char *\fIpath2\fP);
+int symlinkat(const char *\fIpath1\fP, int \fIfd\fP, const char *\fIpath2\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsymlink\fR()
+function shall create a symbolic link called
+.IR path2
+that contains the string pointed to by
+.IR path1
+(\c
+.IR path2
+is the name of the symbolic link created,
+.IR path1
+is the string contained in the symbolic link).
+.P
+The string pointed to by
+.IR path1
+shall be treated only as a character string and shall not be validated
+as a pathname.
+.P
+If the
+\fIsymlink\fR()
+function fails for any reason other than
+.BR [EIO] ,
+any file named by
+.IR path2
+shall be unaffected.
+.P
+If
+.IR path2
+names a symbolic link,
+\fIsymlink\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EEXIST] .
+.P
+The symbolic link's user ID shall be set to the process' effective
+user ID. The symbolic link's group ID shall be set to the group
+ID of the parent directory or to the effective group ID of the
+process. Implementations shall provide a way to initialize the symbolic
+link's group ID to the group ID of the parent directory. Implementations
+may, but need not, provide an implementation-defined way to initialize the
+symbolic link's group ID to the effective group ID of the calling process.
+.P
+The values of the file mode bits for the created symbolic link are
+unspecified. All interfaces specified by POSIX.1\(hy2008 shall behave as if the
+contents of symbolic links can always be read, except that the value of
+the file mode bits returned in the
+.IR st_mode
+field of the
+.BR stat
+structure is unspecified.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIsymlink\fR()
+shall mark for update the last data access, last data modification,
+and last file status change timestamps of the symbolic link. Also,
+the last data modification and last file status change timestamps of
+the directory that contains the new entry shall be marked for update.
+.P
+The
+\fIsymlinkat\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIsymlink\fR()
+function except in the case where
+.IR path2
+specifies a relative path. In this case the symbolic link is created
+relative to the directory associated with the file descriptor
+.IR fd
+instead of the current working directory. If the file descriptor was
+opened without O_SEARCH, the function shall check whether directory
+searches are permitted using the current permissions of the directory
+underlying the file descriptor. If the file descriptor was opened with
+O_SEARCH, the function shall not perform the check.
+.P
+If
+\fIsymlinkat\fR()
+is passed the special value AT_FDCWD in the
+.IR fd
+parameter, the current working directory shall be used and the behavior
+shall be identical to a call to
+\fIsymlink\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return 0.
+Otherwise, these functions shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Write permission is denied in the directory where the symbolic link is
+being created, or search permission is denied for a component of the
+path prefix of
+.IR path2 .
+.TP
+.BR EEXIST
+The
+.IR path2
+argument names an existing file.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurs while reading from or writing to the file system.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path2
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of the pathname specified by the
+.IR path2
+argument is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}
+or the length of the
+.IR path1
+argument is longer than
+{SYMLINK_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of the path prefix of
+.IR path2
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR path2
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+The directory in which the entry for the new symbolic link is being
+placed cannot be extended because no space is left on the file system
+containing the directory, or the new symbolic link cannot be created
+because no space is left on the file system which shall contain the
+link, or the file system is out of file-allocation resources.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix of
+.IR path2
+names an existing file that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link
+to a directory.
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+The new symbolic link would reside on a read-only file system.
+.P
+The
+\fIsymlinkat\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+.IR fd
+was not opened with O_SEARCH and the permissions of the directory
+underlying
+.IR fd
+do not permit directory searches.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR path2
+argument does not specify an absolute path and the
+.IR fd
+argument is neither AT_FDCWD nor a valid file descriptor open for reading
+or searching.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+The
+.IR path2
+argument is not an absolute path and
+.IR fd
+is a file descriptor associated with a non-directory file.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path2
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of the
+.IR path2
+argument exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link in the
+.IR path2
+argument produced an intermediate result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Like a hard link, a symbolic link allows a file to have multiple
+logical names. The presence of a hard link guarantees the existence of
+a file, even after the original name has been removed. A symbolic link
+provides no such assurance; in fact, the file named by the
+.IR path1
+argument need not exist when the link is created. A symbolic link can
+cross file system boundaries.
+.P
+Normal permission checks are made on each component of the symbolic
+link pathname during its resolution.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The purpose of the
+\fIsymlinkat\fR()
+function is to create symbolic links in directories other than the
+current working directory without exposure to race conditions. Any part
+of the path of a file could be changed in parallel to a call to
+\fIsymlink\fR(),
+resulting in unspecified behavior. By opening a file descriptor for
+the target directory and using the
+\fIsymlinkat\fR()
+function it can be guaranteed that the created symbolic link is located
+relative to the desired directory.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfdopendir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfstatat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlchown\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIreadlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrename\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sync.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sync.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6cae26f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sync.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SYNC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sync
+\(em schedule file system updates
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+void sync(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsync\fR()
+function shall cause all information in memory that updates file
+systems to be scheduled for writing out to all file systems.
+.P
+The writing, although scheduled, is not necessarily complete upon
+return from
+\fIsync\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIsync\fR()
+function shall not return a value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfsync\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sysconf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sysconf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8e693bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/sysconf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,358 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SYSCONF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+sysconf
+\(em get configurable system variables
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+long sysconf(int \fIname\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+function provides a method for the application to determine the current
+value of a configurable system limit or option (\c
+.IR variable ).
+The implementation shall support all of the variables listed in the
+following table and may support others.
+.P
+The
+.IR name
+argument represents the system variable to be queried. The following
+table lists the minimal set of system variables from
+.IR <limits.h> 
+or
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+that can be returned by
+\fIsysconf\fR(),
+and the symbolic constants defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+that are the corresponding values used for
+.IR name .
+.ad l
+.TS
+box center tab(@);
+cB | cB
+lw(2.7i)1e | le.
+Variable@Value of Name
+_
+{AIO_LISTIO_MAX}@_SC_AIO_LISTIO_MAX
+{AIO_MAX}@_SC_AIO_MAX
+{AIO_PRIO_DELTA_MAX}@_SC_AIO_PRIO_DELTA_MAX
+{ARG_MAX}@_SC_ARG_MAX
+{ATEXIT_MAX}@_SC_ATEXIT_MAX
+{BC_BASE_MAX}@_SC_BC_BASE_MAX
+{BC_DIM_MAX}@_SC_BC_DIM_MAX
+{BC_SCALE_MAX}@_SC_BC_SCALE_MAX
+{BC_STRING_MAX}@_SC_BC_STRING_MAX
+{CHILD_MAX}@_SC_CHILD_MAX
+Clock ticks/second@_SC_CLK_TCK
+{COLL_WEIGHTS_MAX}@_SC_COLL_WEIGHTS_MAX
+{DELAYTIMER_MAX}@_SC_DELAYTIMER_MAX
+{EXPR_NEST_MAX}@_SC_EXPR_NEST_MAX
+{HOST_NAME_MAX}@_SC_HOST_NAME_MAX
+{IOV_MAX}@_SC_IOV_MAX
+{LINE_MAX}@_SC_LINE_MAX
+{LOGIN_NAME_MAX}@_SC_LOGIN_NAME_MAX
+{NGROUPS_MAX}@_SC_NGROUPS_MAX
+Initial size of \fIgetgrgid_r\fP\^(\|) and@_SC_GETGR_R_SIZE_MAX
+\fIgetgrnam_r\fP\^(\|) data buffers
+Initial size of \fIgetpwuid_r\fP\^(\|) and@_SC_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX
+\fIgetpwnam_r\fP\^(\|) data buffers
+{MQ_OPEN_MAX}@_SC_MQ_OPEN_MAX
+{MQ_PRIO_MAX}@_SC_MQ_PRIO_MAX
+{OPEN_MAX}@_SC_OPEN_MAX
+_POSIX_ADVISORY_INFO@_SC_ADVISORY_INFO
+_POSIX_BARRIERS@_SC_BARRIERS
+_POSIX_ASYNCHRONOUS_IO@_SC_ASYNCHRONOUS_IO
+_POSIX_CLOCK_SELECTION@_SC_CLOCK_SELECTION
+_POSIX_CPUTIME@_SC_CPUTIME
+_POSIX_FSYNC@_SC_FSYNC
+_POSIX_IPV6@_SC_IPV6
+_POSIX_JOB_CONTROL@_SC_JOB_CONTROL
+_POSIX_MAPPED_FILES@_SC_MAPPED_FILES
+_POSIX_MEMLOCK@_SC_MEMLOCK
+_POSIX_MEMLOCK_RANGE@_SC_MEMLOCK_RANGE
+_POSIX_MEMORY_PROTECTION@_SC_MEMORY_PROTECTION
+_POSIX_MESSAGE_PASSING@_SC_MESSAGE_PASSING
+_POSIX_MONOTONIC_CLOCK@_SC_MONOTONIC_CLOCK
+_POSIX_PRIORITIZED_IO@_SC_PRIORITIZED_IO
+_POSIX_PRIORITY_SCHEDULING@_SC_PRIORITY_SCHEDULING
+_POSIX_RAW_SOCKETS@_SC_RAW_SOCKETS
+_POSIX_READER_WRITER_LOCKS@_SC_READER_WRITER_LOCKS
+_POSIX_REALTIME_SIGNALS@_SC_REALTIME_SIGNALS
+_POSIX_REGEXP@_SC_REGEXP
+_POSIX_SAVED_IDS@_SC_SAVED_IDS
+_POSIX_SEMAPHORES@_SC_SEMAPHORES
+_POSIX_SHARED_MEMORY_OBJECTS@_SC_SHARED_MEMORY_OBJECTS
+_POSIX_SHELL@_SC_SHELL
+_POSIX_SPAWN@_SC_SPAWN
+_POSIX_SPIN_LOCKS@_SC_SPIN_LOCKS
+_POSIX_SPORADIC_SERVER@_SC_SPORADIC_SERVER
+_POSIX_SS_REPL_MAX@_SC_SS_REPL_MAX
+_POSIX_SYNCHRONIZED_IO@_SC_SYNCHRONIZED_IO
+_POSIX_THREAD_ATTR_STACKADDR@_SC_THREAD_ATTR_STACKADDR
+_POSIX_THREAD_ATTR_STACKSIZE@_SC_THREAD_ATTR_STACKSIZE
+_POSIX_THREAD_CPUTIME@_SC_THREAD_CPUTIME
+_POSIX_THREAD_PRIO_INHERIT@_SC_THREAD_PRIO_INHERIT
+_POSIX_THREAD_PRIO_PROTECT@_SC_THREAD_PRIO_PROTECT
+_POSIX_THREAD_PRIORITY_SCHEDULING@_SC_THREAD_PRIORITY_SCHEDULING
+_POSIX_THREAD_PROCESS_SHARED@_SC_THREAD_PROCESS_SHARED
+_POSIX_THREAD_ROBUST_PRIO_INHERIT@_SC_THREAD_ROBUST_PRIO_INHERIT
+_POSIX_THREAD_ROBUST_PRIO_PROTECT@_SC_THREAD_ROBUST_PRIO_PROTECT
+_POSIX_THREAD_SAFE_FUNCTIONS@_SC_THREAD_SAFE_FUNCTIONS
+_POSIX_THREAD_SPORADIC_SERVER@_SC_THREAD_SPORADIC_SERVER
+_POSIX_THREADS@_SC_THREADS
+_POSIX_TIMEOUTS@_SC_TIMEOUTS
+_POSIX_TIMERS@_SC_TIMERS
+_POSIX_TRACE@_SC_TRACE
+_POSIX_TRACE_EVENT_FILTER@_SC_TRACE_EVENT_FILTER
+_POSIX_TRACE_EVENT_NAME_MAX@_SC_TRACE_EVENT_NAME_MAX
+_POSIX_TRACE_INHERIT@_SC_TRACE_INHERIT
+_POSIX_TRACE_LOG@_SC_TRACE_LOG
+_POSIX_TRACE_NAME_MAX@_SC_TRACE_NAME_MAX
+_POSIX_TRACE_SYS_MAX@_SC_TRACE_SYS_MAX
+_POSIX_TRACE_USER_EVENT_MAX@_SC_TRACE_USER_EVENT_MAX
+_POSIX_TYPED_MEMORY_OBJECTS@_SC_TYPED_MEMORY_OBJECTS
+_POSIX_VERSION@_SC_VERSION
+_POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFF32@_SC_V7_ILP32_OFF32
+_POSIX_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG@_SC_V7_ILP32_OFFBIG
+_POSIX_V7_LP64_OFF64@_SC_V7_LP64_OFF64
+_POSIX_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG@_SC_V7_LPBIG_OFFBIG
+.TE
+.ad l
+.TS
+box center tab(@);
+cB | cB
+lw(2.6i)1e | le.
+Variable@Value of Name
+_
+_POSIX_V6_ILP32_OFF32@_SC_V6_ILP32_OFF32
+_POSIX_V6_ILP32_OFFBIG@_SC_V6_ILP32_OFFBIG
+_POSIX_V6_LP64_OFF64@_SC_V6_LP64_OFF64
+_POSIX_V6_LPBIG_OFFBIG@_SC_V6_LPBIG_OFFBIG
+_POSIX2_C_BIND@_SC_2_C_BIND
+_POSIX2_C_DEV@_SC_2_C_DEV
+_POSIX2_CHAR_TERM@_SC_2_CHAR_TERM
+_POSIX2_FORT_DEV@_SC_2_FORT_DEV
+_POSIX2_FORT_RUN@_SC_2_FORT_RUN
+_POSIX2_LOCALEDEF@_SC_2_LOCALEDEF
+_POSIX2_PBS@_SC_2_PBS
+_POSIX2_PBS_ACCOUNTING@_SC_2_PBS_ACCOUNTING
+_POSIX2_PBS_CHECKPOINT@_SC_2_PBS_CHECKPOINT
+_POSIX2_PBS_LOCATE@_SC_2_PBS_LOCATE
+_POSIX2_PBS_MESSAGE@_SC_2_PBS_MESSAGE
+_POSIX2_PBS_TRACK@_SC_2_PBS_TRACK
+_POSIX2_SW_DEV@_SC_2_SW_DEV
+_POSIX2_UPE@_SC_2_UPE
+_POSIX2_VERSION@_SC_2_VERSION
+{PAGE_SIZE}@_SC_PAGE_SIZE
+{PAGESIZE}@_SC_PAGESIZE
+{PTHREAD_DESTRUCTOR_ITERATIONS}@_SC_THREAD_DESTRUCTOR_ITERATIONS
+{PTHREAD_KEYS_MAX}@_SC_THREAD_KEYS_MAX
+{PTHREAD_STACK_MIN}@_SC_THREAD_STACK_MIN
+{PTHREAD_THREADS_MAX}@_SC_THREAD_THREADS_MAX
+{RE_DUP_MAX}@_SC_RE_DUP_MAX
+{RTSIG_MAX}@_SC_RTSIG_MAX
+{SEM_NSEMS_MAX}@_SC_SEM_NSEMS_MAX
+{SEM_VALUE_MAX}@_SC_SEM_VALUE_MAX
+{SIGQUEUE_MAX}@_SC_SIGQUEUE_MAX
+{STREAM_MAX}@_SC_STREAM_MAX
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}@_SC_SYMLOOP_MAX
+{TIMER_MAX}@_SC_TIMER_MAX
+{TTY_NAME_MAX}@_SC_TTY_NAME_MAX
+{TZNAME_MAX}@_SC_TZNAME_MAX
+_XOPEN_CRYPT@_SC_XOPEN_CRYPT
+_XOPEN_ENH_I18N@_SC_XOPEN_ENH_I18N
+_XOPEN_REALTIME@_SC_XOPEN_REALTIME
+_XOPEN_REALTIME_THREADS@_SC_XOPEN_REALTIME_THREADS
+_XOPEN_SHM@_SC_XOPEN_SHM
+_XOPEN_STREAMS@_SC_XOPEN_STREAMS
+_XOPEN_UNIX@_SC_XOPEN_UNIX
+_XOPEN_UUCP@_SC_XOPEN_UUCP
+_XOPEN_VERSION@_SC_XOPEN_VERSION
+.TE
+.ad b
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If
+.IR name
+is an invalid value,
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error. If the variable corresponding to
+.IR name
+is described in
+.IR <limits.h> 
+as a maximum or minimum value and the variable has no limit,
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 without changing the value of
+.IR errno .
+Note that indefinite limits do not imply infinite limits; see
+.IR <limits.h> .
+.P
+Otherwise,
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+shall return the current variable value on the system. The value
+returned shall not be more restrictive than the corresponding value
+described to the application when it was compiled with the
+implementation's
+.IR <limits.h> 
+or
+.IR <unistd.h> .
+The value shall not change during the lifetime of the calling process,
+except that \fIsysconf\fP(_SC_OPEN_MAX) may return different values
+before and after a call to
+\fIsetrlimit\fR()
+which changes the RLIMIT_NOFILE soft limit.
+.P
+If the variable corresponding to
+.IR name
+is dependent on an unsupported option, the results are unspecified.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR name
+argument is invalid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+As \(mi1 is a permissible return value in a successful situation, an
+application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0, then call
+\fIsysconf\fR(),
+and, if it returns \(mi1, check to see if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero.
+.P
+Application developers should check whether an option, such as
+_POSIX_TRACE, is supported prior to obtaining and using values for
+related variables, such as _POSIX_TRACE_NAME_MAX.
+.SH RATIONALE
+This functionality was added in response to requirements of application
+developers and of system vendors who deal with many international
+system configurations. It is closely related to
+\fIpathconf\fR()
+and
+\fIfpathconf\fR().
+.P
+Although a conforming application can run on all systems by never
+demanding more resources than the minimum values published in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, it
+is useful for that application to be able to use the actual value for
+the quantity of a resource available on any given system. To do this,
+the application makes use of the value of a symbolic constant in
+.IR <limits.h> 
+or
+.IR <unistd.h> .
+.P
+However, once compiled, the application must still be able to cope if
+the amount of resource available is increased. To that end, an
+application may need a means of determining the quantity of a resource,
+or the presence of an option, at execution time.
+.P
+Two examples are offered:
+.IP " 1." 4
+Applications may wish to act differently on systems with or without job
+control.
+Applications vendors who wish to distribute only a single binary
+package to all instances of a computer architecture would be forced to
+assume job control is never available if it were to rely solely on the
+.IR <unistd.h> 
+value published in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.IP " 2." 4
+International applications vendors occasionally require knowledge of
+the number of clock ticks per second.
+Without these facilities, they would be required to either distribute
+their applications partially in source form or to have 50 Hz and 60 Hz
+versions for the various countries in which they operate.
+.P
+It is the knowledge that many applications are actually distributed
+widely in executable form that leads to this facility. If limited to
+the most restrictive values in the headers, such applications would
+have to be prepared to accept the most limited environments offered by
+the smallest microcomputers. Although this is entirely portable, there
+was a consensus that they should be able to take advantage of the
+facilities offered by large systems, without the restrictions
+associated with source and object distributions.
+.P
+During the discussions of this feature, it was pointed out that it is
+almost always possible for an application to discern what a value might
+be at runtime by suitably testing the various functions themselves.
+And, in any event, it could always be written to adequately deal with
+error returns from the various functions. In the end, it was felt that
+this imposed an unreasonable level of complication and sophistication
+on the application developer.
+.P
+This runtime facility is not meant to provide ever-changing values
+that applications have to check multiple times. The values are seen as
+changing no more frequently than once per system initialization, such
+as by a system administrator or operator with an automatic
+configuration program. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 specifies that they shall not change
+within the lifetime of the process.
+.P
+Some values apply to the system overall and others vary at the file
+system or directory level. The latter are described in
+.IR "\fIfpathconf\fR\^(\|)".
+.P
+Note that all values returned must be expressible as integers. String
+values were considered, but the additional flexibility of this approach
+was rejected due to its added complexity of implementation and use.
+.P
+Some values, such as
+{PATH_MAX},
+are sometimes so large that they must not be used to, say, allocate
+arrays. The
+\fIsysconf\fR()
+function returns a negative value to show that this symbolic constant
+is not even defined in this case.
+.P
+Similar to
+\fIpathconf\fR(),
+this permits the implementation not to have a limit. When one resource
+is infinite, returning an error indicating that some other resource
+limit has been reached is conforming behavior.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIconfstr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfpathconf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<limits.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.P
+The Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIgetconf\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/syslog.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/syslog.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c51b55c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/syslog.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SYSLOG "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+syslog
+\(em log a message
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <syslog.h>
+.P
+void syslog(int \fIpriority\fP, const char *\fImessage\fP, ... /* \fIargument\fP */);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIcloselog\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/system.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/system.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9275c56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/system.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,459 @@
+'\" et
+.TH SYSTEM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+system
+\(em issue a command
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+int system(const char *\fIcommand\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+If
+.IR command
+is a null pointer, the
+\fIsystem\fR()
+function shall determine whether the host environment has a command
+processor. If
+.IR command
+is not a null pointer, the
+\fIsystem\fR()
+function shall pass the string pointed to by
+.IR command
+to that command processor to be executed in an implementation-defined
+manner; this might then cause the program calling
+\fIsystem\fR()
+to behave in a non-conforming manner or to terminate.
+.P
+The
+\fIsystem\fR()
+function shall behave as if a child process were created using
+\fIfork\fR(),
+and the child process invoked the
+.IR sh
+utility using
+\fIexecl\fR()
+as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+execl(<\fIshell path\fP>, "sh", "-c", \fIcommand\fP, (char *)0);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where <\fIshell path\fP> is an unspecified pathname for the
+.IR sh
+utility. It is unspecified whether the handlers registered with
+\fIpthread_atfork\fR()
+are called as part of the creation of the child process.
+.P
+The
+\fIsystem\fR()
+function shall ignore the SIGINT and SIGQUIT signals, and shall
+block the SIGCHLD
+signal, while waiting for the command to terminate. If this might
+cause the application to miss a signal that would have killed it, then
+the application should examine the return value from
+\fIsystem\fR()
+and take whatever action is appropriate to the application if the
+command terminated due to receipt of a signal.
+.P
+The
+\fIsystem\fR()
+function shall not affect the termination status of any child of the
+calling processes other than the process or processes it itself
+creates.
+.P
+The
+\fIsystem\fR()
+function shall not return until the child process has terminated.
+.P
+The
+\fIsystem\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If
+.IR command
+is a null pointer,
+\fIsystem\fR()
+shall return non-zero to indicate that a command processor is
+available, or zero if none is available.
+The
+\fIsystem\fR()
+function shall always return non-zero when
+.IR command
+is NULL.
+.P
+If
+.IR command
+is not a null pointer,
+\fIsystem\fR()
+shall return the termination status of the command language interpreter
+in the format specified by
+\fIwaitpid\fR().
+The termination status shall be as defined for the
+.IR sh
+utility; otherwise, the termination status is unspecified. If some
+error prevents the command language interpreter from executing after
+the child process is created, the return value from
+\fIsystem\fR()
+shall be as if the command language interpreter had terminated using
+.IR exit (127)
+or
+.IR _exit (127).
+If a child process cannot be created, or if the termination status for
+the command language interpreter cannot be obtained,
+\fIsystem\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIsystem\fR()
+function may set
+.IR errno
+values as described by
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)".
+.br
+.P
+In addition,
+\fIsystem\fR()
+may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ECHILD
+The status of the child process created by
+\fIsystem\fR()
+is no longer available.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If the return value of
+\fIsystem\fR()
+is not \(mi1, its value can be decoded through the use of the macros
+described in
+.IR <sys/wait.h> .
+For convenience, these macros are also provided in
+.IR <stdlib.h> .
+.P
+Note that, while
+\fIsystem\fR()
+must ignore SIGINT and SIGQUIT and block SIGCHLD while waiting for the
+child to terminate, the handling of signals in the executed command is
+as specified by
+\fIfork\fR()
+and
+.IR exec .
+For example, if SIGINT is being caught or is set to SIG_DFL when
+\fIsystem\fR()
+is called, then the child is started with SIGINT handling set to
+SIG_DFL.
+.P
+Ignoring SIGINT and SIGQUIT in the parent process prevents coordination
+problems (two processes reading from the same terminal, for example)
+when the executed command ignores or catches one of the signals. It is
+also usually the correct action when the user has given a command to
+the application to be executed synchronously (as in the
+.BR '!' 
+command in many interactive applications). In either case, the signal
+should be delivered only to the child process, not to the application
+itself. There is one situation where ignoring the signals might have
+less than the desired effect. This is when the application uses
+\fIsystem\fR()
+to perform some task invisible to the user. If the user typed the
+interrupt character (\c
+.BR \(dq^C\(dq ,
+for example) while
+\fIsystem\fR()
+is being used in this way, one would expect the application to be
+killed, but only the executed command is killed. Applications that use
+\fIsystem\fR()
+in this way should carefully check the return status from
+\fIsystem\fR()
+to see if the executed command was successful, and should take
+appropriate action when the command fails.
+.P
+Blocking SIGCHLD while waiting for the child to terminate prevents the
+application from catching the signal and obtaining status from
+\fIsystem\fR()'s
+child process before
+\fIsystem\fR()
+can get the status itself.
+.P
+The context in which the utility is ultimately executed may differ from
+that in which
+\fIsystem\fR()
+was called. For example, file descriptors that have the FD_CLOEXEC
+flag set are closed, and the process ID and parent process ID are
+different. Also, if the executed utility changes its environment
+variables or its current working directory, that change is not
+reflected in the caller's context.
+.P
+There is no defined way for an application to find the specific path
+for the shell. However,
+\fIconfstr\fR()
+can provide a value for
+.IR PATH
+that is guaranteed to find the
+.IR sh
+utility.
+.P
+Using the
+\fIsystem\fR()
+function in more than one thread in a process or when the SIGCHLD
+signal is being manipulated by more than one thread in a process may
+produce unexpected results.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fIsystem\fR()
+function should not be used by programs that have set user (or group)
+ID privileges. The
+\fIfork\fR()
+and
+.IR exec
+family of functions (except
+\fIexeclp\fR()
+and
+\fIexecvp\fR()),
+should be used instead. This prevents any unforeseen manipulation of
+the environment of the user that could cause execution of commands not
+anticipated by the calling program.
+.P
+There are three levels of specification for the
+\fIsystem\fR()
+function. The ISO\ C standard gives the most basic. It requires that the function
+exists, and defines a way for an application to query whether a command
+language interpreter exists. It says nothing about the command language
+or the environment in which the command is interpreted.
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 places additional restrictions on
+\fIsystem\fR().
+It requires that if there is a command language interpreter, the
+environment must be as specified by
+\fIfork\fR()
+and
+.IR exec .
+This ensures, for example, that close-on-\c
+.IR exec
+works, that file locks are not inherited, and that the process ID is
+different. It also specifies the return value from
+\fIsystem\fR()
+when the command line can be run, thus giving the application some
+information about the command's completion status.
+.P
+Finally, POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires the command to be interpreted as in the shell
+command language defined in the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.P
+Note that,
+.IR system (NULL)
+is required to return non-zero, indicating that there is a command
+language interpreter. At first glance, this would seem to conflict with
+the ISO\ C standard which allows
+.IR system (NULL)
+to return zero. There is no conflict, however. A system must have a
+command language interpreter, and is non-conforming if none is present.
+It is therefore permissible for the
+\fIsystem\fR()
+function on such a system to implement the behavior specified by the
+ISO\ C standard as long as it is understood that the implementation does not
+conform to POSIX.1\(hy2008 if
+.IR system (NULL)
+returns zero.
+.P
+It was explicitly decided that when
+.IR command
+is NULL,
+\fIsystem\fR()
+should not be required to check to make sure that the command language
+interpreter actually exists with the correct mode, that there are
+enough processes to execute it, and so on. The call
+.IR system (NULL)
+could, theoretically, check for such problems as too many existing
+child processes, and return zero. However, it would be inappropriate to
+return zero due to such a (presumably) transient condition. If some
+condition exists that is not under the control of this application and
+that would cause any
+\fIsystem\fR()
+call to fail, that system has been rendered non-conforming.
+.P
+Early drafts required, or allowed,
+\fIsystem\fR()
+to return with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [EINTR] 
+if it was interrupted with a signal. This error return was removed, and
+a requirement that
+\fIsystem\fR()
+not return until the child has terminated was added. This means that if
+a
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+call in
+\fIsystem\fR()
+exits with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [EINTR] ,
+\fIsystem\fR()
+must reissue the
+\fIwaitpid\fR().
+This change was made for two reasons:
+.IP " 1." 4
+There is no way for an application to clean up if
+\fIsystem\fR()
+returns
+.BR [EINTR] ,
+short of calling
+\fIwait\fR(),
+and that could have the undesirable effect of returning the status of
+children other than the one started by
+\fIsystem\fR().
+.IP " 2." 4
+While it might require a change in some historical implementations,
+those implementations already have to be changed because they use
+\fIwait\fR()
+instead of
+\fIwaitpid\fR().
+.P
+Note that if the application is catching SIGCHLD signals, it will
+receive such a signal before a successful
+\fIsystem\fR()
+call returns.
+.P
+To conform to POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+\fIsystem\fR()
+must use
+\fIwaitpid\fR(),
+or some similar function, instead of
+\fIwait\fR().
+.P
+The following code sample illustrates how
+\fIsystem\fR()
+might be implemented on an implementation conforming to POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <signal.h>
+int system(const char *cmd)
+{
+    int stat;
+    pid_t pid;
+    struct sigaction sa, savintr, savequit;
+    sigset_t saveblock;
+    if (cmd == NULL)
+        return(1);
+    sa.sa_handler = SIG_IGN;
+    sigemptyset(&sa.sa_mask);
+    sa.sa_flags = 0;
+    sigemptyset(&savintr.sa_mask);
+    sigemptyset(&savequit.sa_mask);
+    sigaction(SIGINT, &sa, &savintr);
+    sigaction(SIGQUIT, &sa, &savequit);
+    sigaddset(&sa.sa_mask, SIGCHLD);
+    sigprocmask(SIG_BLOCK, &sa.sa_mask, &saveblock);
+    if ((pid = fork()) == 0) {
+        sigaction(SIGINT, &savintr, (struct sigaction *)0);
+        sigaction(SIGQUIT, &savequit, (struct sigaction *)0);
+        sigprocmask(SIG_SETMASK, &saveblock, (sigset_t *)0);
+        execl("/bin/sh", "sh", "-c", cmd, (char *)0);
+        _exit(127);
+    }
+    if (pid == -1) {
+        stat = -1; /* errno comes from fork() */
+    } else {
+        while (waitpid(pid, &stat, 0) == -1) {
+            if (errno != EINTR){
+                stat = -1;
+                break;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+    sigaction(SIGINT, &savintr, (struct sigaction *)0);
+    sigaction(SIGQUIT, &savequit, (struct sigaction *)0);
+    sigprocmask(SIG_SETMASK, &saveblock, (sigset_t *)0);
+    return(stat);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+Note that, while a particular implementation of
+\fIsystem\fR()
+(such as the one above) can assume a particular path for the shell,
+such a path is not necessarily valid on another system. The above
+example is not portable, and is not intended to be.
+.P
+One reviewer suggested that an implementation of
+\fIsystem\fR()
+might want to use an environment variable such as
+.IR SHELL
+to determine which command interpreter to use. The supposed
+implementation would use the default command interpreter if the one
+specified by the environment variable was not available. This would
+allow a user, when using an application that prompts for command lines
+to be processed using
+\fIsystem\fR(),
+to specify a different command interpreter. Such an implementation is
+discouraged. If the alternate command interpreter did not follow the
+command line syntax specified in the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, then changing
+.IR SHELL
+would render
+\fIsystem\fR()
+non-conforming. This would affect applications that expected the
+specified behavior from
+\fIsystem\fR(),
+and since the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not mention that
+.IR SHELL
+affects
+\fIsystem\fR(),
+the application would not know that it needed to unset
+.IR SHELL .
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIpipe\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpthread_atfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<limits.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_wait.h>\fP"
+.P
+The Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fIsh\fR\^"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tan.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tan.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..29c43ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tan.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,206 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TAN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tan,
+tanf,
+tanl
+\(em tangent function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double tan(double \fIx\fP);
+float tanf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double tanl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the tangent of their argument
+.IR x ,
+measured in radians.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the tangent of
+.IR x .
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow,
+and is not representable,
+a range error may occur, and
+\fItan\fR(),
+\fItanf\fR(),
+and
+\fItanl\fR()
+shall return
+0.0, or
+(if IEC 60559 Floating-Point is not supported) an implementation-defined
+value no greater in magnitude than DBL_MIN, FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN,
+respectively.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is subnormal, a range error may occur
+.br
+and
+.IR x
+should be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is not returned,
+\fItan\fR(),
+\fItanf\fR(),
+and
+\fItanl\fR()
+shall return an implementation-defined value no greater in magnitude
+than DBL_MIN, FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN, respectively.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-Inf, a domain error shall occur, and either a NaN (if
+supported), or an implementation-defined value shall be returned.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow, and is representable,
+a range error may occur and the correct value shall be returned.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause overflow, a range error shall occur
+and
+\fItan\fR(),
+\fItanf\fR(),
+and
+\fItanl\fR()
+shall return \(+-HUGE_VAL, \(+-HUGE_VALF, and \(+-HUGE_VALL,
+respectively, with the same sign as the correct value of the function.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is \(+-Inf.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result overflows
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the overflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.br
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result underflows,
+or the value of
+.IR x
+is subnormal.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Taking the Tangent of a 45-Degree Angle"
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <math.h>
+\&...
+double radians = 45.0 * M_PI / 180;
+double result;
+\&...
+result = tan (radians);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+There are no known floating-point representations such that for a
+normal argument,
+.IR tan (\c
+.IR x )
+is either overflow or underflow.
+.P
+These functions may lose accuracy when their argument is near a
+multiple of \(*p/2 or is far from 0.0.
+.P
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIatan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tanh.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tanh.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..53cd05e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tanh.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TANH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tanh,
+tanhf,
+tanhl
+\(em hyperbolic tangent functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double tanh(double \fIx\fP);
+float tanhf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double tanhl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the hyperbolic tangent of their argument
+.IR x .
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the hyperbolic
+tangent of
+.IR x .
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-Inf, \(+-1 shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is subnormal, a range error may occur
+.br
+and
+.IR x
+should be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is not returned,
+\fItanh\fR(),
+\fItanhf\fR(),
+and
+\fItanhl\fR()
+shall return an implementation-defined value no greater in magnitude
+than DBL_MIN, FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN, respectively.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is subnormal.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIatanh\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItan\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tanl.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tanl.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5adf18c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tanl.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TANL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tanl
+\(em tangent function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+long double tanl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fItan\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcdrain.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcdrain.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..67cfe28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcdrain.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TCDRAIN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tcdrain
+\(em wait for transmission of output
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <termios.h>
+.P
+int tcdrain(int \fIfildes\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fItcdrain\fR()
+function shall block until all output written to the object referred
+to by
+.IR fildes
+is transmitted. The
+.IR fildes
+argument is an open file descriptor associated with a terminal.
+.P
+Any attempts to use
+\fItcdrain\fR()
+from a process which is a member of a background process group on a
+.IR fildes
+associated with its controlling terminal, shall cause the process group
+to be sent a SIGTTOU signal.
+If the calling thread is blocking SIGTTOU signals or the process is
+ignoring SIGTTOU signals, the process shall be allowed to perform the
+operation, and no signal is sent.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned. Otherwise, \(mi1
+shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fItcdrain\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal interrupted
+\fItcdrain\fR().
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+The process group of the writing process is orphaned, the calling thread
+is not blocking SIGTTOU, and the process is not ignoring SIGTTOU.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTTY
+The file associated with
+.IR fildes
+is not a terminal.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fItcflush\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+.IR "\fB<termios.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcflow.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcflow.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f3737a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcflow.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TCFLOW "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tcflow
+\(em suspend or restart the transmission or reception of data
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <termios.h>
+.P
+int tcflow(int \fIfildes\fP, int \fIaction\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fItcflow\fR()
+function shall suspend or restart transmission or reception of data on
+the object referred to by
+.IR fildes ,
+depending on the value of
+.IR action .
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is an open file descriptor associated with a terminal.
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR action
+is TCOOFF, output shall be suspended.
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR action
+is TCOON, suspended output shall be restarted.
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR action
+is TCIOFF and
+.IR fildes
+refers to a terminal device, the system shall transmit a STOP character,
+which is intended to cause the terminal device to stop transmitting data
+to the system. If
+.IR fildes
+is associated with a pseudo-terminal, the STOP character need not be
+transmitted.
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR action
+is TCION and
+.IR fildes
+refers to a terminal device, the system shall transmit a START character,
+which is intended to cause the terminal device to start transmitting
+data to the system. If
+.IR fildes
+is associated with a pseudo-terminal, the START character need not be
+transmitted.
+.P
+The default on the opening of a terminal file is that neither its input
+nor its output are suspended.
+.P
+Attempts to use
+\fItcflow\fR()
+from a process which is a member of a background process group on a
+.IR fildes
+associated with its controlling terminal, shall cause the process group
+to be sent a SIGTTOU signal.
+If the calling thread is blocking SIGTTOU signals or the process is
+ignoring SIGTTOU signals, the process shall be allowed to perform the
+operation, and no signal is sent.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned. Otherwise, \(mi1
+shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fItcflow\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR action
+argument is not a supported value.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+The process group of the writing process is orphaned, the calling thread
+is not blocking SIGTTOU, and the process is not ignoring SIGTTOU.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTTY
+The file associated with
+.IR fildes
+is not a terminal.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fItcsendbreak\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+.IR "\fB<termios.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcflush.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcflush.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..641344c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcflush.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TCFLUSH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tcflush
+\(em flush non-transmitted output data, non-read input data, or both
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <termios.h>
+.P
+int tcflush(int \fIfildes\fP, int \fIqueue_selector\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Upon successful completion,
+\fItcflush\fR()
+shall discard data written to the object referred to by
+.IR fildes
+(an open file descriptor associated with a terminal) but not
+transmitted, or data received but not read, depending on the value of
+.IR queue_selector :
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR queue_selector
+is TCIFLUSH, it shall flush data received but not read.
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR queue_selector
+is TCOFLUSH, it shall flush data written but not transmitted.
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR queue_selector
+is TCIOFLUSH, it shall flush both data received but not read and data
+written but not transmitted.
+.P
+Attempts to use
+\fItcflush\fR()
+from a process which is a member of a background process group on a
+.IR fildes
+associated with its controlling terminal shall cause the process group
+to be sent a SIGTTOU signal.
+If the calling thread is blocking SIGTTOU signals or the process is
+ignoring SIGTTOU signals, the process shall be allowed to perform the
+operation, and no signal is sent.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned. Otherwise, \(mi1
+shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fItcflush\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR queue_selector
+argument is not a supported value.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+The process group of the writing process is orphaned, the calling thread
+is not blocking SIGTTOU, and the process is not ignoring SIGTTOU.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTTY
+The file associated with
+.IR fildes
+is not a terminal.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fItcdrain\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+.IR "\fB<termios.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcgetattr.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcgetattr.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6510980
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcgetattr.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TCGETATTR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tcgetattr
+\(em get the parameters associated with the terminal
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <termios.h>
+.P
+int tcgetattr(int \fIfildes\fP, struct termios *\fItermios_p\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fItcgetattr\fR()
+function shall get the parameters associated with the terminal referred
+to by
+.IR fildes
+and store them in the
+.BR termios
+structure referenced by
+.IR termios_p .
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is an open file descriptor associated with a terminal.
+.P
+The
+.IR termios_p
+argument is a pointer to a
+.BR termios
+structure.
+.P
+The
+\fItcgetattr\fR()
+operation is allowed from any process.
+.P
+If the terminal device supports different input and output baud rates,
+the baud rates stored in the
+.BR termios
+structure returned by
+\fItcgetattr\fR()
+shall reflect the actual baud rates, even if they are equal. If
+differing baud rates are not supported, the rate returned as the output
+baud rate shall be the actual baud rate. If the terminal device does
+not support split baud rates, the input baud rate stored in the
+.BR termios
+structure shall be the output rate (as one of the symbolic values).
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned. Otherwise, \(mi1
+shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fItcgetattr\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTTY
+The file associated with
+.IR fildes
+is not a terminal.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Care must be taken when changing the terminal attributes. Applications
+should always do a
+\fItcgetattr\fR(),
+save the
+.BR termios
+structure values returned, and then do a
+\fItcsetattr\fR(),
+changing only the necessary fields. The application should use the
+values saved from the
+\fItcgetattr\fR()
+to reset the terminal state whenever it is done with the terminal.
+This is necessary because terminal attributes apply to the underlying
+port and not to each individual open instance; that is, all processes
+that have used the terminal see the latest attribute changes.
+.P
+A program that uses these functions should be written to catch all
+signals and take other appropriate actions to ensure that when the
+program terminates, whether planned or not, the terminal device's state
+is restored to its original state.
+.P
+Existing practice dealing with error returns when only part of a
+request can be honored is based on calls to the
+\fIioctl\fR()
+function. In historical BSD and System V implementations,
+the corresponding
+\fIioctl\fR()
+returns zero if the requested actions were semantically correct, even
+if some of the requested changes could not be made. Many existing
+applications assume this behavior and would no longer work correctly if
+the return value were changed from zero to \(mi1 in this case.
+.P
+Note that either specification has a problem. When zero is returned,
+it implies everything succeeded even if some of the changes were not
+made. When \(mi1 is returned, it implies everything failed even though
+some of the changes were made.
+.P
+Applications that need all of the requested changes made to work
+properly should follow
+\fItcsetattr\fR()
+with a call to
+\fItcgetattr\fR()
+and compare the appropriate field values.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fItcsetattr\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+.IR "\fB<termios.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcgetpgrp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcgetpgrp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c6ee6ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcgetpgrp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TCGETPGRP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tcgetpgrp
+\(em get the foreground process group ID
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+pid_t tcgetpgrp(int \fIfildes\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fItcgetpgrp\fR()
+function shall return the value of the process group ID of the
+foreground process group associated with the terminal.
+.P
+If there is no foreground process group,
+\fItcgetpgrp\fR()
+shall return a value greater than 1 that does not match the process
+group ID of any existing process group.
+.P
+The
+\fItcgetpgrp\fR()
+function is allowed from a process that is a member of a background
+process group; however, the information may be subsequently changed by
+a process that is a member of a foreground process group.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fItcgetpgrp\fR()
+shall return the value of the process group ID of the foreground
+process associated with the terminal. Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be
+returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fItcgetpgrp\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTTY
+The calling process does not have a controlling terminal, or the file
+is not the controlling terminal.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsetsid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetpgid\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItcsetpgrp\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcgetsid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcgetsid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f770558
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcgetsid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TCGETSID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tcgetsid
+\(em get the process group ID for the session leader for the
+controlling terminal
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <termios.h>
+.P
+pid_t tcgetsid(int \fIfildes\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fItcgetsid\fR()
+function shall obtain the process group ID of the session for which the
+terminal specified by
+.IR fildes
+is the controlling terminal.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fItcgetsid\fR()
+shall return the process group ID of the session associated with the
+terminal. Otherwise, a value of \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fItcgetsid\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTTY
+The calling process does not have a controlling terminal, or the file
+is not the controlling terminal.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<termios.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcsendbreak.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcsendbreak.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..48a2da8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcsendbreak.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TCSENDBREAK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tcsendbreak
+\(em send a break for a specific duration
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <termios.h>
+.P
+int tcsendbreak(int \fIfildes\fP, int \fIduration\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+If the terminal is using asynchronous serial data transmission,
+\fItcsendbreak\fR()
+shall cause transmission of a continuous stream of zero-valued bits for
+a specific duration. If
+.IR duration
+is 0, it shall cause transmission of zero-valued bits for at least 0.25
+seconds, and not more than 0.5 seconds. If
+.IR duration
+is not 0, it shall send zero-valued bits for an
+implementation-defined period of time.
+.P
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is an open file descriptor associated with a terminal.
+.P
+If the terminal is not using asynchronous serial data transmission, it
+is implementation-defined whether
+\fItcsendbreak\fR()
+sends data to generate a break condition or returns without taking any
+action.
+.P
+Attempts to use
+\fItcsendbreak\fR()
+from a process which is a member of a background process group on a
+.IR fildes
+associated with its controlling terminal shall cause the process group
+to be sent a SIGTTOU signal.
+If the calling thread is blocking SIGTTOU signals or the process is
+ignoring SIGTTOU signals, the process shall be allowed to perform the
+operation, and no signal is sent.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned. Otherwise, \(mi1 shall
+be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fItcsendbreak\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+The process group of the writing process is orphaned, the calling thread
+is not blocking SIGTTOU, and the process is not ignoring SIGTTOU.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTTY
+The file associated with
+.IR fildes
+is not a terminal.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+.IR "\fB<termios.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcsetattr.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcsetattr.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..014383b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcsetattr.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,240 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TCSETATTR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tcsetattr
+\(em set the parameters associated with the terminal
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <termios.h>
+.P
+int tcsetattr(int \fIfildes\fP, int \fIoptional_actions\fP,
+    const struct termios *\fItermios_p\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fItcsetattr\fR()
+function shall set the parameters associated with the terminal referred
+to by the open file descriptor
+.IR fildes
+(an open file descriptor associated with a terminal) from the
+.BR termios
+structure referenced by
+.IR termios_p
+as follows:
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR optional_actions
+is TCSANOW, the change shall occur immediately.
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR optional_actions
+is TCSADRAIN, the change shall occur after all output written to
+.IR fildes
+is transmitted. This function should be used when changing parameters
+that affect output.
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR optional_actions
+is TCSAFLUSH, the change shall occur after all output written to
+.IR fildes
+is transmitted, and all input so far received but not read shall be
+discarded before the change is made.
+.P
+If the output baud rate stored in the
+.BR termios
+structure pointed to by
+.IR termios_p
+is the zero baud rate, B0, the modem control lines shall no longer
+be asserted. Normally, this shall disconnect the line.
+.P
+If the input baud rate stored in the
+.BR termios
+structure pointed to by
+.IR termios_p
+is 0, the input baud rate given to the hardware is the same as the
+output baud rate stored in the
+.BR termios
+structure.
+.P
+The
+\fItcsetattr\fR()
+function shall return successfully if it was able to perform any of the
+requested actions, even if some of the requested actions could not be
+performed. It shall set all the attributes that the implementation
+supports as requested and leave all the attributes not supported by
+the implementation unchanged. If no part of the request can be honored,
+it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EINVAL] .
+If the input and output baud rates differ and are a combination that is
+not supported, neither baud rate shall be changed. A subsequent call to
+\fItcgetattr\fR()
+shall return the actual state of the terminal device (reflecting both
+the changes made and not made in the previous
+\fItcsetattr\fR()
+call). The
+\fItcsetattr\fR()
+function shall not change the values found in the
+.BR termios
+structure under any circumstances.
+.P
+The effect of
+\fItcsetattr\fR()
+is undefined if the value of the
+.BR termios
+structure pointed to by
+.IR termios_p
+was not derived from the result of a call to
+\fItcgetattr\fR()
+on
+.IR fildes ;
+an application should modify only fields and flags defined by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+between the call to
+\fItcgetattr\fR()
+and
+\fItcsetattr\fR(),
+leaving all other fields and flags unmodified.
+.P
+No actions defined by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, other than a call to
+\fItcsetattr\fR(),
+a close of the last file descriptor in the system associated with this
+terminal device, or an open of the first file descriptor in the system
+associated with this terminal device (using the O_TTY_INIT flag if it
+is non-zero and the device is not a pseudo-terminal), shall cause any
+of the terminal attributes defined by this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 to change.
+.P
+If
+\fItcsetattr\fR()
+is called from a process which is a member of a background process
+group on a
+.IR fildes
+associated with its controlling terminal:
+.IP " *" 4
+If the calling thread is blocking SIGTTOU signals or the process is
+ignoring SIGTTOU signals, the operation completes normally and no signal
+is sent.
+.IP " *" 4
+Otherwise, a SIGTTOU signal shall be sent to the process group.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned. Otherwise,
+\(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fItcsetattr\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal interrupted
+\fItcsetattr\fR().
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR optional_actions
+argument is not a supported value, or an attempt was made to change an
+attribute represented in the
+.BR termios
+structure to an unsupported value.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+The process group of the writing process is orphaned, the calling thread
+is not blocking SIGTTOU, and the process is not ignoring SIGTTOU.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTTY
+The file associated with
+.IR fildes
+is not a terminal.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If trying to change baud rates, applications should call
+\fItcsetattr\fR()
+then call
+\fItcgetattr\fR()
+in order to determine what baud rates were actually selected.
+.P
+In general, there are two reasons for an application to change the
+parameters associated with a terminal device:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The device already has working parameter settings but the application
+needs a different behavior, such as non-canonical mode instead of
+canonical mode. The application sets (or clears) only a few flags or
+.IR c_cc [\^]
+values. Typically, the terminal device in this case is either the
+controlling terminal for the process or a pseudo-terminal.
+.IP " 2." 4
+The device is a modem or similar piece of equipment connected by a serial
+line, and it was not open before the application opened it. In this case,
+the application needs to initialize all of the parameter settings ``from
+scratch''. However, since the
+.BR termios
+structure may include both standard and non-standard parameters, the
+application cannot just initialize the whole structure in an arbitrary
+way (e.g., using
+\fImemset\fR())
+as this may cause some of the non-standard parameters to be set
+incorrectly, resulting in non-conforming behavior of the terminal
+device. Conversely, the application cannot just set the standard
+parameters, assuming that the non-standard parameters will already have
+suitable values, as the device might previously have been used with
+non-conforming parameter settings (and some implementations retain the
+settings from one use to the next). The solution is to open the terminal
+device using the O_TTY_INIT flag to initialize the terminal device to
+have conforming parameter settings, obtain those settings using
+\fItcgetattr\fR(),
+and then set all of the standard parameters to the desired settings.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fItcsetattr\fR()
+function can be interrupted in the following situations:
+.IP " *" 4
+It is interrupted while waiting for output to drain.
+.IP " *" 4
+It is called from a process in a background process group and SIGTTOU
+is caught.
+.P
+See also the RATIONALE section in
+.IR "\fItcgetattr\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+Using an input baud rate of 0 to set the input rate equal to the output
+rate may not necessarily be supported in a future version of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcfgetispeed\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItcgetattr\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 11" ", " "General Terminal Interface",
+.IR "\fB<termios.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcsetpgrp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcsetpgrp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e20cc00
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tcsetpgrp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TCSETPGRP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tcsetpgrp
+\(em set the foreground process group ID
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int tcsetpgrp(int \fIfildes\fP, pid_t \fIpgid_id\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+If the process has a controlling terminal,
+\fItcsetpgrp\fR()
+shall set the foreground process group ID associated with the terminal
+to
+.IR pgid_id .
+The application shall ensure that the file associated with
+.IR fildes
+is the controlling terminal of the calling process and the controlling
+terminal is currently associated with the session of the calling
+process. The application shall ensure that the value of
+.IR pgid_id
+matches a process group ID of a process in the same session as the
+calling process.
+.P
+Attempts to use
+\fItcsetpgrp\fR()
+from a process which is a member of a background process group on a
+.IR fildes
+associated with its controlling terminal shall cause the process group
+to be sent a SIGTTOU signal. If the calling thread is blocking SIGTTOU
+signals or the process is ignoring SIGTTOU signals, the process shall
+be allowed to perform the operation, and no signal is sent.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned. Otherwise, \(mi1
+shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fItcsetpgrp\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+This implementation does not support the value in the
+.IR pgid_id
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+The process group of the writing process is orphaned, the calling thread
+is not blocking SIGTTOU, and the process is not ignoring SIGTTOU.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTTY
+The calling process does not have a controlling terminal, or the file
+is not the controlling terminal, or the controlling terminal is no
+longer associated with the session of the calling process.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The value of
+.IR pgid_id
+is a value supported by the implementation, but does not match the
+process group ID of a process in the same session as the calling
+process.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fItcgetpgrp\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tdelete.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tdelete.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..507a3ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tdelete.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,319 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TDELETE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tdelete,
+tfind,
+tsearch,
+twalk
+\(em manage a binary search tree
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <search.h>
+.P
+void *tdelete(const void *restrict \fIkey\fP, void **restrict \fIrootp\fP,
+    int(*\fIcompar\fP)(const void *, const void *));
+void *tfind(const void *\fIkey\fP, void *const *\fIrootp\fP,
+    int(*\fIcompar\fP)(const void *, const void *));
+void *tsearch(const void *\fIkey\fP, void **\fIrootp\fP,
+    int (*\fIcompar\fP)(const void *, const void *));
+void twalk(const void *\fIroot\fP,
+    void (*\fIaction\fP)(const void *, VISIT, int));
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fItdelete\fR(),
+\fItfind\fR(),
+\fItsearch\fR(),
+and
+\fItwalk\fR()
+functions manipulate binary search trees. Comparisons are made with a
+user-supplied routine, the address of which is passed as the
+.IR compar
+argument. This routine is called with two arguments, which are the
+pointers to the elements being compared. The application shall ensure
+that the user-supplied routine returns an integer less than, equal to,
+or greater than 0, according to whether the first argument is to be
+considered less than, equal to, or greater than the second argument.
+The comparison function need not compare every byte, so arbitrary data
+may be contained in the elements in addition to the values being
+compared.
+.P
+The
+\fItsearch\fR()
+function shall build and access the tree. The
+.IR key
+argument is a pointer to an element to be accessed or stored. If there
+is a node in the tree whose element is equal to the value pointed to by
+.IR key ,
+a pointer to this found node shall be returned. Otherwise, the value
+pointed to by
+.IR key
+shall be inserted (that is, a new node is created and the value of
+.IR key
+is copied to this node), and a pointer to this node returned. Only
+pointers are copied, so the application shall ensure that the calling
+routine stores the data. The
+.IR rootp
+argument points to a variable that points to the root node of the
+tree. A null pointer value for the variable pointed to by
+.IR rootp
+denotes an empty tree; in this case, the variable shall be set to point
+to the node which shall be at the root of the new tree.
+.P
+Like
+\fItsearch\fR(),
+\fItfind\fR()
+shall search for a node in the tree, returning a pointer to it if found.
+However, if it is not found,
+\fItfind\fR()
+shall return a null pointer. The arguments for
+\fItfind\fR()
+are the same as for
+\fItsearch\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fItdelete\fR()
+function shall delete a node from a binary search tree. The arguments
+are the same as for
+\fItsearch\fR().
+The variable pointed to by
+.IR rootp
+shall be changed if the deleted node was the root of the tree. The
+\fItdelete\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to the parent of the deleted node, or
+an unspecified non-null pointer if the deleted node was the root node,
+or a null pointer if the node is not found.
+.P
+If
+\fItsearch\fR()
+adds an element to a tree, or
+\fItdelete\fR()
+successfully deletes an element from a tree, the concurrent use of
+that tree in another thread, or use of pointers produced by a previous
+call to
+\fItfind\fR()
+or
+\fItsearch\fR(),
+produces undefined results.
+.P
+The
+\fItwalk\fR()
+function shall traverse a binary search tree. The
+.IR root
+argument is a pointer to the root node of the tree to be traversed.
+(Any node in a tree may be used as the root for a walk below that
+node.) The argument
+.IR action
+is the name of a routine to be invoked at each node. This routine is,
+in turn, called with three arguments. The first argument shall be the
+address of the node being visited. The structure pointed to by this
+argument is unspecified and shall not be modified by the application,
+but it shall be possible to cast a pointer-to-node into a
+pointer-to-pointer-to-element to access the element stored in the node.
+The second argument shall be a value from an enumeration data type:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+typedef enum { preorder, postorder, endorder, leaf } VISIT;
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+(defined in
+.IR <search.h> ),
+depending on whether this is the first, second, or third time that the
+node is visited (during a depth-first, left-to-right traversal of the
+tree), or whether the node is a leaf. The third argument shall be
+the level of the node in the tree, with the root being level 0.
+.P
+If the calling function alters the pointer to the root, the result is
+undefined.
+.P
+If the functions pointed to by
+.IR action
+or
+.IR compar
+(for any of these binary search functions) change the tree, the results
+are undefined.
+.P
+These functions are thread-safe only as long as multiple threads
+do not access the same tree.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the node is found, both
+\fItsearch\fR()
+and
+\fItfind\fR()
+shall return a pointer to it. If not,
+\fItfind\fR()
+shall return a null pointer, and
+\fItsearch\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the inserted item.
+.P
+A null pointer shall be returned by
+\fItsearch\fR()
+if there is not enough space available to create a new node.
+.P
+A null pointer shall be returned by
+\fItdelete\fR(),
+\fItfind\fR(),
+and
+\fItsearch\fR()
+if
+.IR rootp
+is a null pointer on entry.
+.P
+The
+\fItdelete\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to the parent of the deleted node, or
+an unspecified non-null pointer if the deleted node was the root node,
+or a null pointer if the node is not found.
+.P
+The
+\fItwalk\fR()
+function shall not return a value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+The following code reads in strings and stores structures containing a
+pointer to each string and a count of its length. It then walks the
+tree, printing out the stored strings and their lengths in alphabetical
+order.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <search.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+#define STRSZ    10000
+#define NODSZ    500
+.P
+struct node {      /* Pointers to these are stored in the tree. */
+    char    *string;
+    int     length;
+};
+.P
+char   string_space[STRSZ];  /* Space to store strings. */
+struct node nodes[NODSZ];    /* Nodes to store. */
+void  *root = NULL;          /* This points to the root. */
+.P
+int main(int argc, char *argv[])
+{
+    char   *strptr = string_space;
+    struct node    *nodeptr = nodes;
+    void   print_node(const void *, VISIT, int);
+    int    i = 0, node_compare(const void *, const void *);
+.P
+    while (gets(strptr) != NULL && i++ < NODSZ)  {
+        /* Set node. */
+        nodeptr\(mi>string = strptr;
+        nodeptr\(mi>length = strlen(strptr);
+        /* Put node into the tree. */
+        (void) tsearch((void *)nodeptr, (void **)&root,
+            node_compare);
+        /* Adjust pointers, so we do not overwrite tree. */
+        strptr += nodeptr\(mi>length + 1;
+        nodeptr++;
+    }
+    twalk(root, print_node);
+    return 0;
+}
+.P
+/*
+ *  This routine compares two nodes, based on an
+ *  alphabetical ordering of the string field.
+ */
+int
+node_compare(const void *node1, const void *node2)
+{
+    return strcmp(((const struct node *) node1)\(mi>string,
+        ((const struct node *) node2)\(mi>string);
+}
+.P
+/*
+ *  This routine prints out a node, the second time
+ *  twalk encounters it or if it is a leaf.
+ */
+void
+print_node(const void *ptr, VISIT order, int level)
+{
+    const struct node *p = *(const struct node **) ptr;
+.P
+    if (order == postorder \(or\(or order == leaf)  {
+        (void) printf("string = %s,  length = %d\en",
+            p->string, p->length);
+    }
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+.IR root
+argument to
+\fItwalk\fR()
+is one level of indirection less than the
+.IR rootp
+arguments to
+\fItdelete\fR()
+and
+\fItsearch\fR().
+.P
+There are two nomenclatures used to refer to the order in which tree
+nodes are visited. The
+\fItsearch\fR()
+function uses \fBpreorder\fP, \fBpostorder\fP, and \fBendorder\fP to
+refer respectively to visiting a node before any of its children, after
+its left child and before its right, and after both its children. The
+alternative nomenclature uses \fBpreorder\fP, \fBinorder\fP, and
+\fBpostorder\fP to refer to the same visits, which could result in some
+confusion over the meaning of \fBpostorder\fP.
+.P
+Since the return value of
+\fItdelete\fR()
+is an unspecified non-null pointer in the case that the root of the tree
+has been deleted, applications should only use the return value of
+\fItdelete\fR()
+as indication of success or failure and should not assume it can be
+dereferenced. Some implementations in this case will return a pointer to
+the new root of the tree (or to an empty tree if the deleted root node
+was the only node in the tree); other implementations return arbitrary
+non-null pointers.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIhcreate\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlsearch\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<search.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/telldir.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/telldir.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9e7e3b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/telldir.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TELLDIR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+telldir
+\(em current location of a named directory stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <dirent.h>
+.P
+long telldir(DIR *\fIdirp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fItelldir\fR()
+function shall obtain the current location associated with the
+directory stream specified by
+.IR dirp .
+.P
+If the most recent operation on the directory stream was a
+\fIseekdir\fR(),
+the directory position returned from the
+\fItelldir\fR()
+shall be the same as that supplied as a
+.IR loc
+argument for
+\fIseekdir\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fItelldir\fR()
+shall return the current location of the specified directory stream.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfdopendir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIreaddir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIseekdir\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<dirent.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tempnam.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tempnam.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1b9c18e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tempnam.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,148 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TEMPNAM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tempnam
+\(em create a name for a temporary file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+char *tempnam(const char *\fIdir\fP, const char *\fIpfx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fItempnam\fR()
+function shall generate a pathname that may be used for a temporary
+file.
+.P
+The
+\fItempnam\fR()
+function allows the user to control the choice of a directory. The
+.IR dir
+argument points to the name of the directory in which the file is to be
+created. If
+.IR dir
+is a null pointer or points to a string which is not a name for an
+appropriate directory, the path prefix defined as P_tmpdir in the
+.IR <stdio.h> 
+header shall be used. If that directory is not accessible, an
+implementation-defined directory may be used.
+.P
+Many applications prefer their temporary files to have certain initial
+letter sequences in their names. The
+.IR pfx
+argument should be used for this. This argument may be a null pointer
+or point to a string of up to five bytes to be used as the beginning of
+the filename.
+.P
+Some implementations of
+\fItempnam\fR()
+may use
+\fItmpnam\fR()
+internally. On such implementations, if called more than
+{TMP_MAX}
+times in a single process, the behavior is implementation-defined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fItempnam\fR()
+shall allocate space for a string, put the generated pathname in that
+space, and return a pointer to it. The pointer shall be suitable for
+use in a subsequent call to
+\fIfree\fR().
+Otherwise, it shall return a null pointer and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fItempnam\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient storage space is available.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Generating a Pathname"
+.P
+The following example generates a pathname for a temporary file in
+directory
+.BR /tmp ,
+with the prefix
+.IR file .
+After the pathname has been created, the call to
+\fIfree\fR()
+deallocates the space used to store the pathname.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+\&...
+const char *directory = "/tmp";
+const char *fileprefix = "file";
+char *file;
+.P
+file = tempnam(directory, fileprefix);
+free(file);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+This function only creates pathnames. It is the application's
+responsibility to create and remove the files. Between the time a
+pathname is created and the file is opened, it is possible for some
+other process to create a file with the same name. Applications may
+find
+\fItmpfile\fR()
+more useful.
+.P
+Applications should use the
+\fItmpfile\fR(),
+\fImkdtemp\fR(),
+or
+\fImkstemp\fR()
+functions instead of the obsolescent
+\fItempnam\fR()
+function.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fItempnam\fR()
+function may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfree\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImkdtemp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItmpfile\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItmpnam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tfind.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tfind.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..21761dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tfind.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TFIND "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tfind
+\(em search binary search tree
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <search.h>
+.P
+void *tfind(const void *\fIkey\fP, void *const *\fIrootp\fP,
+    int (*\fIcompar\fP)(const void *, const void *));
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fItdelete\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tgamma.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tgamma.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d49a6bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tgamma.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,244 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TGAMMA "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tgamma,
+tgammaf,
+tgammal
+\(em compute gamma(\|) function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double tgamma(double \fIx\fP);
+float tgammaf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double tgammal(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall compute the
+.IR gamma
+function of
+.IR x .
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return
+.IR Gamma (\c
+.IR x ).
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is a negative integer, a
+domain
+error may occur and either a NaN (if supported) or an
+implementation-defined value shall be returned.
+On systems that support the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option, a domain
+error shall occur and a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0,
+\fItgamma\fR(),
+\fItgammaf\fR(),
+and
+\fItgammal\fR()
+shall return \(+-HUGE_VAL, \(+-HUGE_VALF, and \(+-HUGE_VALL,
+respectively.
+On systems that support the IEC 60559 Floating-Point option, a pole
+error shall occur;
+otherwise, a
+pole
+error may occur.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause overflow, a range error shall occur
+and
+\fItgamma\fR(),
+\fItgammaf\fR(),
+and
+\fItgammal\fR()
+shall return \(+-HUGE_VAL, \(+-HUGE_VALF, or \(+-HUGE_VALL,
+respectively, with the same sign as the correct value of the function.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow,
+and is not representable,
+a range error may occur, and
+\fItgamma\fR(),
+\fItgammaf\fR(),
+and
+\fItgammal\fR()
+shall return
+0.0, or
+(if IEC 60559 Floating-Point is not supported) an implementation-defined
+value no greater in magnitude than DBL_MIN, FLT_MIN, and LDBL_MIN,
+respectively.
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow, and is representable,
+a range error may occur and the correct value shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is +Inf,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(miInf, a domain error shall occur, and a NaN shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is a negative integer, or
+.IR x
+is \(miInf.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.IP "Pole\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is zero.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the divide-by-zero floating-point exception shall be
+raised.
+.br
+.RE
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The value overflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the overflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is a negative integer.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.IP "Pole\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is zero.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the divide-by-zero floating-point exception shall be
+raised.
+.RE
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The result underflows.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT)
+is non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+For IEEE\ Std\ 754\(hy1985
+.BR double ,
+overflow happens when 0 < \fIx\fP < 1/DBL_MAX, and 171.7 < \fIx\fP.
+.P
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+This function is named
+\fItgamma\fR()
+in order to avoid conflicts with the historical
+.IR gamma (\|)
+and
+\fIlgamma\fR()
+functions.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+It is possible that the error response for a negative integer argument
+may be changed to a pole error and a return value of \(+-Inf.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlgamma\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/time.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/time.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cf2569d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/time.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,207 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TIME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+time
+\(em get time
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+time_t time(time_t *\fItloc\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fItime\fR()
+function shall return the value of time
+in seconds since the Epoch.
+.P
+The
+.IR tloc
+argument points to an area where the return value is also stored. If
+.IR tloc
+is a null pointer, no value is stored.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fItime\fR()
+shall return the value of time. Otherwise, (\fBtime_t\fP)\(mi1 shall be
+returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fItime\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The number of seconds since the Epoch will not fit in an object of type
+.BR time_t .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Getting the Current Time"
+.P
+The following example uses the
+\fItime\fR()
+function to calculate the time elapsed, in seconds, since the Epoch,
+\fIlocaltime\fR()
+to convert that value to a broken-down time, and
+\fIasctime\fR()
+to convert the broken-down time values into a printable string.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+int main(void)
+{
+time_t result;
+.P
+    result = time(NULL);
+    printf("%s%ju secs since the Epoch\en",
+        asctime(localtime(&result)),
+            (uintmax_t)result);
+    return(0);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+This example writes the current time to
+.IR stdout
+in a form like this:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+Wed Jun 26 10:32:15 1996
+835810335 secs since the Epoch
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Timing an Event"
+.P
+The following example gets the current time, prints it out in the
+user's format, and prints the number of minutes to an event being
+timed.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <time.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+time_t now;
+int minutes_to_event;
+\&...
+time(&now);
+minutes_to_event = ...;
+printf("The time is ");
+puts(asctime(localtime(&now)));
+printf("There are %d minutes to the event.\en",
+    minutes_to_event);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+\fItime\fR()
+function returns a value in seconds while
+\fIclock_gettime\fR()
+and
+\fIgettimeofday\fR()
+return a
+.BR "struct timespec"
+(seconds and nanoseconds) and
+.BR "struct timeval"
+(seconds and microseconds), respectively, and are therefore capable of
+returning more precise times. The
+\fItimes\fR()
+function is also capable of more precision than
+\fItime\fR()
+as it returns a value in clock ticks, although it returns the elapsed time
+since an arbitrary point such as system boot time, not since the epoch.
+.P
+Implementations in which
+.BR time_t
+is a 32-bit signed integer (many historical implementations) fail in
+the year 2038. POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not address this problem. However, the use
+of the
+.BR time_t
+type is mandated in order to ease the eventual fix.
+.P
+On some systems the
+\fItime\fR()
+function is implemented using a system call that does not return an
+error condition in addition to the return value. On these systems it is
+impossible to differentiate between valid and invalid return values and
+hence overflow conditions cannot be reliably detected.
+.P
+The use of the
+.IR <time.h> 
+header instead of
+.IR <sys/types.h> 
+allows compatibility with the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+Many historical implementations (including Version 7) and the 1984 /usr/group standard use
+.BR long
+instead of
+.BR time_t .
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 uses the latter type in order to agree with the ISO\ C standard.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+In a future version of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.BR time_t
+is likely to be required to be capable of representing times far in the
+future. Whether this will be mandated as a 64-bit type or a requirement
+that a specific date in the future be representable (for example, 10000
+AD) is not yet determined. Systems purchased after the approval of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+should be evaluated to determine whether their lifetime will extend
+past 2038.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIasctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclock\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIclock_getres\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdifftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfutimens\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgettimeofday\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgmtime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlocaltime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImktime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrftime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrptime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItimes\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIutime\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/timer_create.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/timer_create.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b0e7cb6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/timer_create.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,263 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TIMER_CREATE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+timer_create
+\(em create a per-process timer
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <signal.h>
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+int timer_create(clockid_t \fIclockid\fP, struct sigevent *restrict \fIevp\fP,
+    timer_t *restrict \fItimerid\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fItimer_create\fR()
+function shall create a per-process timer using the specified clock,
+.IR clock_id ,
+as the timing base. The
+\fItimer_create\fR()
+function shall return, in the location referenced by
+.IR timerid ,
+a timer ID of type
+.BR timer_t
+used to identify the timer in timer requests. This timer ID shall be
+unique within the calling process until the timer is deleted. The
+particular clock,
+.IR clock_id ,
+is defined in
+.IR <time.h> .
+The timer whose ID is returned shall be in a disarmed state upon return
+from
+\fItimer_create\fR().
+.P
+The
+.IR evp
+argument, if non-NULL, points to a
+.BR sigevent
+structure. This structure, allocated by the application, defines the
+asynchronous notification to occur as specified in
+.IR "Section 2.4.1" ", " "Signal Generation and Delivery"
+when the timer expires. If the
+.IR evp
+argument is NULL, the effect is as if the
+.IR evp
+argument pointed to a
+.BR sigevent
+structure with the
+.IR sigev_notify
+member having the value SIGEV_SIGNAL, the
+.IR sigev_signo
+having a default signal number, and the
+.IR sigev_value
+member having the value of the timer ID.
+.P
+Each implementation shall define a set of clocks that can be used as
+timing bases for per-process timers. All implementations shall support a
+.IR clock_id
+of CLOCK_REALTIME.
+If the Monotonic Clock option is supported, implementations shall
+support a
+.IR clock_id
+of CLOCK_MONOTONIC.
+.P
+Per-process timers shall not be inherited by a child process across a
+\fIfork\fR()
+and shall be disarmed and deleted by an
+.IR exec .
+.P
+If _POSIX_CPUTIME is defined, implementations shall support
+.IR clock_id
+values representing the CPU-time clock of the calling process.
+.P
+If _POSIX_THREAD_CPUTIME is defined, implementations shall support
+.IR clock_id
+values representing the CPU-time clock of the calling thread.
+.P
+It is implementation-defined whether a
+\fItimer_create\fR()
+function will succeed if the value defined by
+.IR clock_id
+corresponds to the CPU-time clock of a process or thread different from
+the process or thread invoking the function.
+.P
+If \fIevp\fR\->\fIsigev_sigev_notify\fR is SIGEV_THREAD and
+\fIsev\fR\->\fIsigev_notify_attributes\fR is not NULL, if the attribute
+pointed to by \fIsev\fR\->\fIsigev_notify_attributes\fR has a thread
+stack address specified by a call to
+\fIpthread_attr_setstack\fR(),
+the results are unspecified if the signal is generated more than once.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the call succeeds,
+\fItimer_create\fR()
+shall return zero and update the location referenced by
+.IR timerid
+to a
+.BR timer_t ,
+which can be passed to the per-process timer calls. If an error
+occurs, the function shall return a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error. The value of
+.IR timerid
+is undefined if an error occurs.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fItimer_create\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The system lacks sufficient signal queuing resources to honor the
+request.
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The calling process has already created all of the timers it is allowed
+by this implementation.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The specified clock ID is not defined.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTSUP
+The implementation does not support the creation of a timer attached to
+the CPU-time clock that is specified by
+.IR clock_id
+and associated with a process or thread different from the process or
+thread invoking
+\fItimer_create\fR().
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If a timer is created which has \fIevp\fR\->\fIsigev_sigev_notify\fR
+set to SIGEV_THREAD and the attribute pointed to by
+\fIevp\fR\->\fIsigev_notify_attributes\fR has a thread stack address
+specified by a call to
+\fIpthread_attr_setstack\fR(),
+the memory dedicated as a thread stack cannot be recovered. The reason
+for this is that the threads created in response to a timer expiration
+are created detached, or in an unspecified way if the thread
+attribute's
+.IR detachstate
+is PTHREAD_CREATE_JOINABLE. In neither case is it valid to call
+\fIpthread_join\fR(),
+which makes it impossible to determine the lifetime of the created
+thread which thus means the stack memory cannot be reused.
+.br
+.SH RATIONALE
+.SS "Periodic Timer Overrun and Resource Allocation"
+.P
+The specified timer facilities may deliver realtime signals (that is,
+queued signals) on implementations that support this option. Since
+realtime applications cannot afford to lose notifications of
+asynchronous events, like timer expirations or asynchronous I/O
+completions, it must be possible to ensure that sufficient resources
+exist to deliver the signal when the event occurs. In general, this is
+not a difficulty because there is a one-to-one correspondence between a
+request and a subsequent signal generation. If the request cannot
+allocate the signal delivery resources, it can fail the call with an
+.BR [EAGAIN] 
+error.
+.P
+Periodic timers are a special case. A single request can generate an
+unspecified number of signals. This is not a problem if the
+requesting process can service the signals as fast as they are
+generated, thus making the signal delivery resources available for
+delivery of subsequent periodic timer expiration signals. But, in
+general, this cannot be assured\(emprocessing of periodic timer signals
+may ``overrun''; that is, subsequent periodic timer expirations may
+occur before the currently pending signal has been delivered.
+.P
+Also, for signals, according to the POSIX.1\(hy1990 standard, if subsequent occurrences of
+a pending signal are generated, it is implementation-defined whether
+a signal is delivered for each occurrence. This is not adequate for
+some realtime applications. So a mechanism is required to allow
+applications to detect how many timer expirations were delayed without
+requiring an indefinite amount of system resources to store the delayed
+expirations.
+.P
+The specified facilities provide for an overrun count. The overrun
+count is defined as the number of extra timer expirations that occurred
+between the time a timer expiration signal is generated and the time
+the signal is delivered. The signal-catching function, if it is
+concerned with overruns, can retrieve this count on entry. With this
+method, a periodic timer only needs one ``signal queuing resource''
+that can be allocated at the time of the
+\fItimer_create\fR()
+function call.
+.P
+A function is defined to retrieve the overrun count so that an
+application need not allocate static storage to contain the count, and
+an implementation need not update this storage asynchronously on timer
+expirations. But, for some high-frequency periodic applications, the
+overhead of an additional system call on each timer expiration may be
+prohibitive. The functions, as defined, permit an implementation to
+maintain the overrun count in user space, associated with the
+.IR timerid .
+The
+\fItimer_getoverrun\fR()
+function can then be implemented as a macro that uses the
+.IR timerid
+argument (which may just be a pointer to a user space structure
+containing the counter) to locate the overrun count with no system call
+overhead. Other implementations, less concerned with this class of
+applications, can avoid the asynchronous update of user space by
+maintaining the count in a system structure at the cost of the extra
+system call to obtain it.
+.SS "Timer Expiration Signal Parameters"
+.P
+The Realtime Signals Extension option supports an application-specific
+datum that is delivered to the extended signal handler. This value is
+explicitly specified by the application, along with the signal number
+to be delivered, in a
+.BR sigevent
+structure. The type of the application-defined value can be either an
+integer constant or a pointer. This explicit specification of the
+value, as opposed to always sending the
+timer ID, was selected based on existing practice.
+.P
+It is common practice for realtime applications (on non-POSIX systems
+or realtime extended POSIX systems) to use the parameters of event
+handlers as the case label of a switch statement or as a pointer to an
+application-defined data structure. Since
+.IR timer_id s
+are dynamically allocated by the
+\fItimer_create\fR()
+function, they can be used for neither of these functions without
+additional application overhead in the signal handler; for example, to
+search an array of saved timer IDs to associate the ID with a constant
+or application data structure.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIclock_getres\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItimer_delete\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItimer_getoverrun\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/timer_delete.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/timer_delete.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..125c23f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/timer_delete.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TIMER_DELETE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+timer_delete
+\(em delete a per-process timer
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+int timer_delete(timer_t \fItimerid\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fItimer_delete\fR()
+function deletes the specified timer,
+.IR timerid ,
+previously created by the
+\fItimer_create\fR()
+function. If the timer is armed when
+\fItimer_delete\fR()
+is called, the behavior shall be as if the timer is automatically
+disarmed before removal. The disposition of pending signals for the
+deleted timer is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fItimer_delete\fR()
+function shall return a value of zero. Otherwise, the function shall
+return a value of \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fItimer_delete\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The timer ID specified by
+.IR timerid
+is not a valid timer ID.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fItimer_create\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/timer_getoverrun.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/timer_getoverrun.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d2835f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/timer_getoverrun.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,256 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TIMER_GETOVERRUN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+timer_getoverrun,
+timer_gettime,
+timer_settime
+\(em per-process timers
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+int timer_getoverrun(timer_t \fItimerid\fP);
+int timer_gettime(timer_t \fItimerid\fP, struct itimerspec *\fIvalue\fP);
+int timer_settime(timer_t \fItimerid\fP, int \fIflags\fP,
+    const struct itimerspec *restrict \fIvalue\fP,
+    struct itimerspec *restrict \fIovalue\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fItimer_gettime\fR()
+function shall store the amount of time until the specified timer,
+.IR timerid ,
+expires and the reload value of the timer into the space pointed to by
+the
+.IR value
+argument. The
+.IR it_value
+member of this structure shall contain the amount of time before the timer
+expires, or zero if the timer is disarmed. This value is returned as
+the interval until timer expiration, even if the timer was armed with
+absolute time. The
+.IR it_interval
+member of
+.IR value
+shall contain the reload value last set by
+\fItimer_settime\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fItimer_settime\fR()
+function shall set the time until the next expiration of the timer
+specified by
+.IR timerid
+from the
+.IR it_value
+member of the
+.IR value
+argument and arm the timer if the
+.IR it_value
+member of
+.IR value
+is non-zero. If the specified timer was already armed when
+\fItimer_settime\fR()
+is called, this call shall reset the time until next expiration to the
+.IR value
+specified. If the
+.IR it_value
+member of
+.IR value
+is zero, the timer shall be disarmed. The effect of disarming or
+resetting a timer with pending expiration notifications is unspecified.
+.P
+If the flag TIMER_ABSTIME is not set in the argument
+.IR flags ,
+\fItimer_settime\fR()
+shall behave as if the time until next expiration is set to be equal
+to the interval specified by the
+.IR it_value
+member of
+.IR value .
+That is, the timer shall expire in
+.IR it_value
+nanoseconds from when the call is made. If the flag TIMER_ABSTIME is
+set in the argument
+.IR flags ,
+\fItimer_settime\fR()
+shall behave as if the time until next expiration is set to be equal
+to the difference between the absolute time specified by the
+.IR it_value
+member of
+.IR value
+and the current value of the clock associated with
+.IR timerid .
+That is, the timer shall expire when the clock reaches the value
+specified by the
+.IR it_value
+member of
+.IR value .
+If the specified time has already passed, the function shall succeed
+and the expiration notification shall be made.
+.P
+The reload value of the timer shall be set to the value specified by the
+.IR it_interval
+member of
+.IR value .
+When a timer is armed with a non-zero
+.IR it_interval ,
+a periodic (or repetitive) timer is specified.
+.P
+Time values that are between two consecutive non-negative integer
+multiples of the resolution of the specified timer shall be rounded up
+to the larger multiple of the resolution. Quantization error shall not
+cause the timer to expire earlier than the rounded time value.
+.P
+If the argument
+.IR ovalue
+is not NULL, the
+\fItimer_settime\fR()
+function shall store, in the location referenced by
+.IR ovalue ,
+a value representing the previous amount of time before the timer would
+have expired, or zero if the timer was disarmed, together with the
+previous timer reload value. Timers shall not expire before their
+scheduled time.
+.P
+Only a single signal shall be queued to the process for a given timer
+at any point in time. When a timer for which a signal is still pending
+expires, no signal shall be queued, and a timer overrun shall occur.
+When a timer expiration signal is delivered to or accepted by a
+process, the
+\fItimer_getoverrun\fR()
+function shall return the timer expiration overrun count for the
+specified timer. The overrun count returned contains the number of
+extra timer expirations that occurred between the time the signal was
+generated (queued) and when it was delivered or accepted, up to but not
+including an implementation-defined maximum of
+{DELAYTIMER_MAX}.
+If the number of such extra expirations is greater than or equal to
+{DELAYTIMER_MAX},
+then the overrun count shall be set to
+{DELAYTIMER_MAX}.
+The value returned by
+\fItimer_getoverrun\fR()
+shall apply to the most recent expiration signal delivery or acceptance
+for the timer. If no expiration signal has been delivered for the timer,
+the return value of
+\fItimer_getoverrun\fR()
+is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the
+\fItimer_getoverrun\fR()
+function succeeds, it shall return the timer expiration overrun count
+as explained above.
+.P
+If the
+\fItimer_gettime\fR()
+or
+\fItimer_settime\fR()
+functions succeed, a value of 0 shall be returned.
+.P
+If an error occurs for any of these functions, the value \(mi1 shall be
+returned, and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fItimer_settime\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+A
+.IR value
+structure specified a nanosecond value less than zero or greater than
+or equal to 1\|000 million, and the
+.IR it_value
+member of that structure did not specify zero seconds and nanoseconds.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR timerid
+argument does not correspond to an ID returned by
+\fItimer_create\fR()
+but not yet deleted by
+\fItimer_delete\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fItimer_settime\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR it_interval
+member of
+.IR value
+is not zero and the timer was created with notification by creation of
+a new thread (\c
+.IR sigev_sigev_notify
+was SIGEV_THREAD) and a fixed stack address has been set in the thread
+attribute pointed to by
+.IR sigev_notify_attributes .
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Using fixed stack addresses is problematic when timer expiration is
+signaled by the creation of a new thread. Since it cannot be assumed
+that the thread created for one expiration is finished before the next
+expiration of the timer, it could happen that two threads use the same
+memory as a stack at the same time. This is invalid and produces
+undefined results.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Practical clocks tick at a finite rate, with rates of 100 hertz and
+1\|000 hertz being common. The inverse of this tick rate is the clock
+resolution, also called the clock granularity, which in either case is
+expressed as a time duration, being 10 milliseconds and 1 millisecond
+respectively for these common rates. The granularity of practical
+clocks implies that if one reads a given clock twice in rapid
+succession, one may get the same time value twice; and that timers must
+wait for the next clock tick after the theoretical expiration time, to
+ensure that a timer never returns too soon. Note also that the
+granularity of the clock may be significantly coarser than the
+resolution of the data format used to set and get time and interval
+values. Also note that some implementations may choose to adjust time
+and/or interval values to exactly match the ticks of the underlying
+clock.
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defines functions that allow an application to determine
+the implementation-supported resolution for the clocks and requires an
+implementation to document the resolution supported for timers and
+\fInanosleep\fR()
+if they differ from the supported clock resolution. This is more of a
+procurement issue than a runtime application issue.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIclock_getres\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItimer_create\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/times.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/times.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9d5754b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/times.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,206 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TIMES "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+times
+\(em get process and waited-for child process times
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/times.h>
+.P
+clock_t times(struct tms *\fIbuffer\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fItimes\fR()
+function shall fill the
+.BR tms
+structure pointed to by
+.IR buffer
+with time-accounting information. The
+.BR tms
+structure is defined in
+.IR <sys/times.h> .
+.P
+All times are measured in terms of the number of clock ticks used.
+.P
+The times of a terminated child process shall be included in the
+.IR tms_cutime
+and
+.IR tms_cstime
+elements of the parent when
+\fIwait\fR(),
+\fIwaitid\fR(),
+or
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+returns the process ID of this terminated child. If a child process
+has not waited for its children, their times shall not be included in
+its times.
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+.IR tms_utime
+structure member is the CPU time charged for the execution of user
+instructions of the calling process.
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+.IR tms_stime
+structure member is the CPU time charged for execution by the system on
+behalf of the calling process.
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+.IR tms_cutime
+structure member is the sum of the
+.IR tms_utime
+and
+.IR tms_cutime
+times of the child processes.
+.IP " *" 4
+The
+.IR tms_cstime
+structure member is the sum of the
+.IR tms_stime
+and
+.IR tms_cstime
+times of the child processes.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fItimes\fR()
+shall return the elapsed real time, in clock ticks, since an arbitrary
+point in the past (for example, system start-up time). This point does
+not change from one invocation of
+\fItimes\fR()
+within the process to another. The return value may overflow the
+possible range of type
+.BR clock_t .
+If
+\fItimes\fR()
+fails, (\fBclock_t\fR)\(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Timing a Database Lookup"
+.P
+The following example defines two functions,
+\fIstart_clock\fR()
+and
+\fIend_clock\fR(),
+that are used to time a lookup. It also defines variables of type
+.BR clock_t
+and
+.BR tms
+to measure the duration of transactions. The
+\fIstart_clock\fR()
+function saves the beginning times given by the
+\fItimes\fR()
+function. The
+\fIend_clock\fR()
+function gets the ending times and prints the difference between the
+two times.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/times.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+void start_clock(void);
+void end_clock(char *msg);
+\&...
+static clock_t st_time;
+static clock_t en_time;
+static struct tms st_cpu;
+static struct tms en_cpu;
+\&...
+void
+start_clock()
+{
+    st_time = times(&st_cpu);
+}
+.P
+/* This example assumes that the result of each subtraction
+   is within the range of values that can be represented in
+   an integer type. */
+void
+end_clock(char *msg)
+{
+    en_time = times(&en_cpu);
+.P
+    fputs(msg,stdout);
+    printf("Real Time: %jd, User Time %jd, System Time %jd\en",
+        (intmax_t)(en_time - st_time),
+        (intmax_t)(en_cpu.tms_utime - st_cpu.tms_utime),
+        (intmax_t)(en_cpu.tms_stime - st_cpu.tms_stime));
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications should use \fIsysconf\fP(_SC_CLK_TCK)
+to determine the number of clock ticks per second as it may vary from
+system to system.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The accuracy of the times reported is intentionally left unspecified to
+allow implementations flexibility in design, from uniprocessor to
+multi-processor networks.
+.P
+The inclusion of times of child processes is recursive, so that a
+parent process may collect the total times of all of its descendants.
+But the times of a child are only added to those of its parent when its
+parent successfully waits on the child. Thus, it is not guaranteed
+that a parent process can always see the total times of all its
+descendants; see also the discussion of the term ``realtime'' in
+.IR "\fIalarm\fR\^(\|)".
+.P
+If the type
+.BR clock_t
+is defined to be a signed 32-bit integer, it overflows in somewhat more
+than a year if there are 60 clock ticks per second,
+or less than a year if there are 100. There are individual systems
+that run continuously for longer than that. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 permits an
+implementation to make the reference point for the returned value be
+the start-up time of the process, rather than system start-up time.
+.P
+The term ``charge'' in this context has nothing to do with billing
+for services. The operating system accounts for time used in this
+way. That information must be correct, regardless of how that
+information is used.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIalarm\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsysconf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwaitid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_times.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/timezone.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/timezone.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..75869fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/timezone.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TIMEZONE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+timezone
+\(em difference from UTC and local standard time
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+extern long timezone;
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fItzset\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tmpfile.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tmpfile.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..df140db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tmpfile.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TMPFILE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tmpfile
+\(em create a temporary file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+FILE *tmpfile(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fItmpfile\fR()
+function shall create a temporary file and open a corresponding
+stream. The file shall be automatically deleted when all references
+to the file are closed. The file is opened as in
+\fIfopen\fR()
+for update (\fIw\fP+), except that implementations may restrict the
+permissions, either by clearing the file mode bits or setting them
+to the value S_IRUSR | S_IWUSR.
+.P
+In some implementations, a permanent file may be left behind if
+the process calling
+\fItmpfile\fR()
+is killed while it is processing a call to
+\fItmpfile\fR().
+.P
+An error message may be written to standard error if the stream cannot
+be opened.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fItmpfile\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the stream of the file that is created.
+Otherwise, it shall return a null pointer
+and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fItmpfile\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was caught during
+\fItmpfile\fR().
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+All file descriptors available to the process are currently open.
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+{STREAM_MAX}
+streams are currently open in the calling process.
+.TP
+.BR ENFILE
+The maximum allowable number of files is currently open in the system.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+The directory or file system which would contain the new file cannot be
+expanded.
+.TP
+.BR EOVERFLOW
+The file is a regular file and the size of the file cannot be
+represented correctly in an object of type
+.BR off_t .
+.P
+The
+\fItmpfile\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EMFILE
+{FOPEN_MAX}
+streams are currently open in the calling process.
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Insufficient storage space is available.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Creating a Temporary File"
+.P
+The following example creates a temporary file for update, and returns
+a pointer to a stream for the created file in the
+.IR fp
+variable.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+FILE *fp;
+.P
+fp = tmpfile ();
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+It should be possible to open at least
+{TMP_MAX}
+temporary files during the lifetime of the program (this limit may be
+shared with
+\fItmpnam\fR())
+and there should be no limit on the number simultaneously open other
+than this limit and any limit on the number of open file descriptors
+or streams (\c
+{OPEN_MAX},
+{FOPEN_MAX},
+{STREAM_MAX}).
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImkdtemp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItmpnam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tmpnam.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tmpnam.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3978390
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tmpnam.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TMPNAM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tmpnam
+\(em create a name for a temporary file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+char *tmpnam(char *\fIs\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fItmpnam\fR()
+function shall generate a string that is a valid pathname that does not
+name an existing file. The function is potentially capable of generating
+{TMP_MAX}
+different strings, but any or all of them may already be in use by
+existing files and thus not be suitable return values.
+.P
+The
+\fItmpnam\fR()
+function generates a different string each time it is called from the
+same process, up to
+{TMP_MAX}
+times. If it is called more than
+{TMP_MAX}
+times, the behavior is implementation-defined.
+.P
+The implementation shall behave as if no function defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+except
+\fItempnam\fR(),
+calls
+\fItmpnam\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fItmpnam\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe if called with a NULL parameter.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fItmpnam\fR()
+shall return a pointer to a string. If no suitable string can be
+generated, the
+\fItmpnam\fR()
+function shall return a null pointer.
+.P
+If the argument
+.IR s
+is a null pointer,
+\fItmpnam\fR()
+shall leave its result in an internal static object and return a
+pointer to that object. Subsequent calls to
+\fItmpnam\fR()
+may modify the same object. If the argument
+.IR s
+is not a null pointer, it is presumed to point to an array of at least
+L_tmpnam
+.BR char s;
+\fItmpnam\fR()
+shall write its result in that array and shall return the argument
+as its value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Generating a Pathname"
+.P
+The following example generates a unique pathname and stores it in the
+array pointed to by
+.IR ptr .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+\&...
+char pathname[L_tmpnam+1];
+char *ptr;
+.P
+ptr = tmpnam(pathname);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+This function only creates pathnames. It is the application's
+responsibility to create and remove the files.
+.P
+Between the time a pathname is created and the file is opened, it is
+possible for some other process to create a file with the same name.
+Applications may find
+\fItmpfile\fR()
+more useful.
+.P
+Applications should use the
+\fItmpfile\fR(),
+\fImkstemp\fR(),
+or
+\fImkdtemp\fR()
+functions instead of the obsolescent
+\fItmpnam\fR()
+function.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fItmpnam\fR()
+function may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImkdtemp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItempnam\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItmpfile\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIunlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/toascii.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/toascii.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..968abd8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/toascii.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TOASCII "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+toascii
+\(em translate an integer to a 7-bit ASCII character
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ctype.h>
+.P
+int toascii(int \fIc\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fItoascii\fR()
+function shall convert its argument into a 7-bit ASCII character.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fItoascii\fR()
+function shall return the value (\fIc\fP &0x7f).
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are returned.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fItoascii\fR()
+function cannot be used portably in a localized application.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fItoascii\fR()
+function may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIisascii\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<ctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tolower.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tolower.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2a60c6e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tolower.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TOLOWER "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tolower,
+tolower_l
+\(em transliterate uppercase characters to lowercase
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ctype.h>
+.P
+int tolower(int \fIc\fP);
+int tolower_l(int \fIc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fItolower\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fItolower\fR()
+and
+\fItolower_l\fR()
+functions have as a domain a type
+.BR int ,
+the value of which is representable as an
+.BR "unsigned char"
+or the value of EOF. If the argument has any other value, the behavior
+is undefined. If the argument of
+\fItolower\fR()
+or
+\fItolower_l\fR()
+represents an uppercase letter, and there exists a corresponding
+lowercase letter as defined by character type information in the current
+locale
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively (category
+.IR LC_CTYPE ),
+the result shall be the corresponding lowercase letter. All other
+arguments in the domain are returned unchanged.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fItolower_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fItolower\fR()
+and
+\fItolower_l\fR()
+functions shall return the lowercase letter corresponding to the
+argument passed; otherwise, they shall return the argument unchanged.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<ctype.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/toupper.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/toupper.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fbe3281
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/toupper.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TOUPPER "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+toupper,
+toupper_l
+\(em transliterate lowercase characters to uppercase
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ctype.h>
+.P
+int toupper(int \fIc\fP);
+int toupper_l(int \fIc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fItoupper\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fItoupper\fR()
+and
+\fItoupper_l\fR()
+functions have as a domain a type
+.BR int ,
+the value of which is representable as an
+.BR "unsigned char"
+or the value of EOF. If the argument has any other value, the behavior
+is undefined.
+.P
+If the argument of
+\fItoupper\fR()
+or
+\fItoupper_l\fR()
+represents a lowercase letter, and there exists a corresponding
+uppercase letter as defined by character type information in the current
+locale
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively (category
+.IR LC_CTYPE ),
+the result shall be the corresponding uppercase letter.
+.P
+All other arguments in the domain are returned unchanged.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fItoupper_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fItoupper\fR()
+and
+\fItoupper_l\fR()
+shall return the uppercase letter corresponding to the argument
+passed; otherwise, they shall return the argument unchanged.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<ctype.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/towctrans.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/towctrans.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8fbd912
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/towctrans.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,155 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TOWCTRANS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+towctrans,
+towctrans_l
+\(em wide-character transliteration
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wctype.h>
+.P
+wint_t towctrans(wint_t \fIwc\fP, wctrans_t \fIdesc\fP);
+wint_t towctrans_l(wint_t \fIwc\fP, wctrans_t \fIdesc\fP,
+    locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fItowctrans\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fItowctrans\fR()
+and
+\fItowctrans_l\fR()
+functions shall transliterate the wide-character code
+.IR wc
+using the mapping described by
+.IR desc .
+.P
+The current setting of the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category in the current locale
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively, should be the same as during the call to
+\fIwctrans\fR()
+or
+\fIwctrans_l\fR()
+that returned the value
+.IR desc .
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR desc
+is invalid (that is, not obtained by a call to
+\fIwctrans\fR()
+or
+.IR desc
+is invalidated by a subsequent call to
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+that has affected category
+.IR LC_CTYPE ),
+the result is unspecified.
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR desc
+is invalid (that is, not obtained by a call to
+\fIwctrans_l\fR()
+with the same locale object
+.IR locale )
+the result is unspecified.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0 before calling
+\fItowctrans\fR()
+or
+\fItowctrans_l\fR().
+.P
+If
+.IR errno
+is non-zero on return, an error has occurred.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fItowctrans_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If successful, the
+\fItowctrans\fR()
+and
+\fItowctrans_l\fR()
+functions shall return the mapped value of
+.IR wc
+using the mapping described by
+.IR desc .
+Otherwise, they shall return
+.IR wc
+unchanged.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+.IR desc
+contains an invalid transliteration descriptor.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The strings
+.BR \(dqtolower\(dq 
+and
+.BR \(dqtoupper\(dq 
+are reserved for the standard mapping names. In the table below, the
+functions in the left column are equivalent to the functions in the
+right column.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+towlower(\fIwc\fP)            towctrans(\fIwc\fP, wctrans("tolower"))
+towlower_l(\fIwc\fP, \fIlocale\fP)  towctrans_l(\fIwc\fP, wctrans("tolower"), \fIlocale\fP)
+towupper(\fIwc\fP)            towctrans(\fIwc\fP, wctrans("toupper"))
+towupper_l(\fIwc\fP, \fIlocale\fP)  towctrans_l(\fIwc\fP, wctrans("toupper"), \fIlocale\fP)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fItowlower\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fItowupper\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwctrans\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/towlower.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/towlower.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8dff90b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/towlower.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TOWLOWER "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+towlower,
+towlower_l
+\(em transliterate uppercase wide-character code to lowercase
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wctype.h>
+.P
+wint_t towlower(wint_t \fIwc\fP);
+wint_t towlower_l(wint_t \fIwc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fItowlower\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fItowlower\fR()
+and
+\fItowlower_l\fR()
+functions have as a domain a type
+.BR wint_t ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a character
+representable as a
+.BR wchar_t ,
+and a wide-character code corresponding to a valid character in the
+current locale or the value of WEOF.
+If the argument has any other value, the behavior is undefined.
+If the argument of
+\fItowlower\fR()
+or
+\fItowlower_l\fR()
+represents an uppercase wide-character code, and there exists a
+corresponding lowercase wide-character code as defined by character
+type information in the current locale
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively (category
+.IR LC_CTYPE ),
+the result shall be the corresponding lowercase wide-character code.
+All other arguments in the domain are returned unchanged.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fItowlower_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fItowlower\fR()
+and
+\fItowlower_l\fR()
+functions shall return the lowercase letter corresponding to the
+argument passed; otherwise, they shall return the argument unchanged.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/towupper.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/towupper.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..93fd334
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/towupper.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TOWUPPER "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+towupper,
+towupper_l
+\(em transliterate lowercase wide-character code to uppercase
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wctype.h>
+.P
+wint_t towupper(wint_t \fIwc\fP);
+wint_t towupper_l(wint_t \fIwc\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fItowupper\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fItowupper\fR()
+and
+\fItowupper_l\fR()
+functions have as a domain a type
+.BR wint_t ,
+the value of which the application shall ensure is a character
+representable as a
+.BR wchar_t ,
+and a wide-character code corresponding to a valid character in the
+current locale or the value of WEOF.
+If the argument has any other value, the behavior is undefined.
+If the argument of
+\fItowupper\fR()
+or
+\fItowupper_l\fR()
+represents a lowercase wide-character code, and there exists a
+corresponding uppercase wide-character code as defined by character
+type information in the current locale
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively (category
+.IR LC_CTYPE ),
+the result shall be the corresponding uppercase wide-character code.
+All other arguments in the domain are returned unchanged.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fItowupper_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fItowupper\fR()
+and
+\fItowupper_l\fR()
+functions shall return the uppercase letter corresponding to the
+argument passed. Otherwise, they shall return the argument unchanged.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIuselocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/trunc.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/trunc.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3a7d42a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/trunc.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TRUNC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+trunc,
+truncf,
+truncl
+\(em round to truncated integer value
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double trunc(double \fIx\fP);
+float truncf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double truncl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall round their argument to the integer value, in
+floating format, nearest to but no larger in magnitude than the
+argument.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the truncated
+integer value.
+.br \" without this, margin code is on the line above
+The result shall have the same sign as
+.IR x .
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, a NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is \(+-0 or \(+-Inf,
+.IR x
+shall be returned.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The integral value returned by these functions need not be expressible
+as an
+.BR intmax_t .
+The return value should be tested before assigning it to an integer type
+to avoid the undefined results of an integer overflow.
+.P
+These functions may raise the inexact floating-point exception if the
+result differs in value from the argument.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/truncate.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/truncate.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fe2b406
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/truncate.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TRUNCATE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+truncate
+\(em truncate a file to a specified length
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int truncate(const char *\fIpath\fP, off_t \fIlength\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fItruncate\fR()
+function shall cause the regular file named by
+.IR path
+to have a size which shall be equal to
+.IR length
+bytes.
+.P
+If the file previously was larger than
+.IR length ,
+the extra data is discarded. If the file was previously shorter than
+.IR length ,
+its size is increased, and the extended area appears as if it were
+zero-filled.
+.P
+The application shall ensure that the process has write permission for
+the file.
+.P
+If the request would cause the file size to exceed the soft file size
+limit for the process, the request shall fail and the implementation
+shall generate the SIGXFSZ signal for the process.
+.P
+The
+\fItruncate\fR()
+function shall not modify the file offset for any open file descriptions
+associated with the file. Upon successful completion, if the file size
+is changed,
+\fItruncate\fR()
+shall mark for update the last data modification and last file status
+change timestamps of the file, and the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits of the
+file mode may be cleared.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fItruncate\fR()
+shall return 0. Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned, and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fItruncate\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+A signal was caught during execution.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR length
+argument was less than 0.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG " or " EINVAL
+.br
+The
+.IR length
+argument was greater than the maximum file size.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to a file system.
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+A component of the path prefix denies search permission, or write
+permission is denied on the file.
+.TP
+.BR EISDIR
+The named file is a directory.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR path
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory, or the
+.IR path
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file
+that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+The named file resides on a read-only file system.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fItruncate\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/truncf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/truncf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7c9eb84
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/truncf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TRUNCF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+truncf,
+truncl
+\(em round to truncated integer value
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+float truncf(float \fIx\fP);
+long double truncl(long double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fItrunc\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tsearch.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tsearch.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..13a9a5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tsearch.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TSEARCH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+tsearch
+\(em search a binary search tree
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <search.h>
+.P
+void *tsearch(const void *\fIkey\fP, void **\fIrootp\fP,
+    int (*\fIcompar\fP)(const void *, const void *));
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fItdelete\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ttyname.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ttyname.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2c52d8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ttyname.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TTYNAME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ttyname,
+ttyname_r
+\(em find the pathname of a terminal
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+char *ttyname(int \fIfildes\fP);
+int ttyname_r(int \fIfildes\fP, char *\fIname\fP, size_t \fInamesize\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIttyname\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to a string containing a null-terminated
+pathname of the terminal associated with file descriptor
+.IR fildes .
+The application shall not modify the string returned. The returned
+pointer might be invalidated or the string content might be overwritten
+by a subsequent call to
+\fIttyname\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIttyname\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.P
+The
+\fIttyname_r\fR()
+function shall store the null-terminated pathname of the terminal
+associated with the file descriptor
+.IR fildes
+in the character array referenced by
+.IR name .
+The array is
+.IR namesize
+characters long and should have space for the name and the terminating
+null character. The maximum length of the terminal name shall be
+{TTY_NAME_MAX}.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIttyname\fR()
+shall return a pointer to a string. Otherwise, a null pointer shall
+be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.P
+If successful, the
+\fIttyname_r\fR()
+function shall return zero. Otherwise, an error number shall be
+returned to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIttyname\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTTY
+The file associated with the
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a terminal.
+.P
+The
+\fIttyname_r\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid file descriptor.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTTY
+The file associated with the
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a terminal.
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+The value of
+.IR namesize
+is smaller than the length of the string to be returned including the
+terminating null character.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The term ``terminal'' is used instead of the historical term
+``terminal device'' in order to avoid a reference to an undefined
+term.
+.P
+The thread-safe version places the terminal name in a user-supplied
+buffer and returns a non-zero value if it fails. The non-thread-safe
+version may return the name in a static data area that may be
+overwritten by each call.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/twalk.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/twalk.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cabe490
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/twalk.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TWALK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+twalk
+\(em traverse a binary search tree
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <search.h>
+.P
+void twalk(const void *\fIroot\fP,
+    void (*\fIaction\fP)(const void *, VISIT, int ));
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fItdelete\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tzset.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tzset.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..104167b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/tzset.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+'\" et
+.TH TZSET "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+daylight,
+timezone,
+tzname,
+tzset
+\(em set timezone conversion information
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <time.h>
+.P
+extern int daylight;
+extern long timezone;
+extern char *tzname[2];
+void tzset(void);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fItzset\fR()
+function shall use the value of the environment variable
+.IR TZ
+to set time conversion information used by
+.IR "\fIctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlocaltime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImktime\fR\^(\|)",
+and
+.IR "\fIstrftime\fR\^(\|)".
+If
+.IR TZ
+is absent from the environment, implementation-defined default
+timezone information shall be used.
+.P
+The
+\fItzset\fR()
+function shall set the external variable
+.IR tzname
+as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+tzname[0] = "\fIstd\fP";
+tzname[1] = "\fIdst\fP";
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR std
+and
+.IR dst
+are as described in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables".
+.P
+The
+\fItzset\fR()
+function also shall set the external variable
+.IR daylight
+to 0 if Daylight Savings Time conversions should never be applied for
+the timezone in use; otherwise, non-zero. The external variable
+.IR timezone
+shall be set to the difference, in seconds, between Coordinated
+Universal Time (UTC) and local standard time.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fItzset\fR()
+function shall not return a value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Example
+.IR TZ
+variables and their timezone differences are given in the table below:
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cI | cI
+lw(1i) | lw(1i).
+TZ!timezone
+_
+EST5EDT!5*60*60
+GMT0!0*60*60
+JST-9!\(mi9*60*60
+MET-1MEST!\(mi1*60*60
+MST7MDT!7*60*60
+PST8PDT!8*60*60
+.TE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIctime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlocaltime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImktime\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrftime\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 8" ", " "Environment Variables",
+.IR "\fB<time.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ulimit.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ulimit.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..37e1eb2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ulimit.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+'\" et
+.TH ULIMIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ulimit
+\(em get and set process limits
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <ulimit.h>
+.P
+long ulimit(int \fIcmd\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIulimit\fR()
+function shall control process limits. The process limits that can be
+controlled by this function include the maximum size of a single file
+that can be written (this is equivalent to using
+\fIsetrlimit\fR()
+with RLIMIT_FSIZE). The
+.IR cmd
+values, defined in
+.IR <ulimit.h> ,
+include:
+.IP UL_GETFSIZE 12
+Return the file size limit (RLIMIT_FSIZE) of the process. The limit
+shall be in units of 512-byte blocks and shall be inherited by child
+processes. Files of any size can be read. The return value shall be the
+integer part of the soft file size limit divided by 512. If the result
+cannot be represented as a
+.BR long ,
+the result is unspecified.
+.IP UL_SETFSIZE 12
+Set the file size limit for output operations of the process to the
+value of the second argument, taken as a
+.BR long ,
+multiplied by 512. If the result would overflow an
+.BR rlim_t ,
+the actual value set is unspecified. Any process may decrease its own
+limit, but only a process with appropriate privileges may increase the
+limit. The return value shall be the integer part of the new file size
+limit divided by 512.
+.P
+The
+\fIulimit\fR()
+function shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.P
+As all return values are permissible in a successful situation, an
+application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0, then call
+\fIulimit\fR(),
+and, if it returns \(mi1, check to see if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIulimit\fR()
+shall return the value of the requested limit. Otherwise, \(mi1
+shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIulimit\fR()
+function shall fail and the limit shall be unchanged if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR cmd
+argument is not valid.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+A process not having appropriate privileges attempts to increase its
+file size limit.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since the
+\fIulimit\fR()
+function uses type
+.BR long
+rather than
+.BR rlim_t ,
+this function is not sufficient for file sizes on many current systems.
+Applications should use the
+\fIgetrlimit\fR()
+or
+\fIsetrlimit\fR()
+functions instead of the obsolescent
+\fIulimit\fR()
+function.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIulimit\fR()
+function may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIgetrlimit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<ulimit.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/umask.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/umask.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6505edf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/umask.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UMASK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+umask
+\(em set and get the file mode creation mask
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+mode_t umask(mode_t \fIcmask\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIumask\fR()
+function shall set the file mode creation mask of the process to
+.IR cmask
+and return the previous value of the mask. Only the file permission
+bits of
+.IR cmask
+(see
+.IR <sys/stat.h> )
+are used; the meaning of the other bits is implementation-defined.
+.P
+The file mode creation mask of the process is used to turn off
+permission bits in the
+.IR mode
+argument supplied during calls to the following functions:
+.IP " *" 4
+\fIopen\fR(),
+\fIopenat\fR(),
+\fIcreat\fR(),
+\fImkdir\fR(),
+\fImkdirat\fR(),
+\fImkfifo\fR(),
+and
+\fImkfifoat\fR()
+.IP " *" 4
+\fImknod\fR(),
+\fImknodat\fR()
+.IP " *" 4
+\fImq_open\fR()
+.IP " *" 4
+\fIsem_open\fR()
+.P
+Bit positions that are set in
+.IR cmask
+are cleared in the mode of the created file.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The file permission bits in the value returned by
+\fIumask\fR()
+shall be the previous value of the file mode creation mask. The state
+of any other bits in that value is unspecified, except that a
+subsequent call to
+\fIumask\fR()
+with the returned value as
+.IR cmask
+shall leave the state of the mask the same as its state before the
+first call, including any unspecified use of those bits.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Unsigned argument and return types for
+\fIumask\fR()
+were proposed. The return type and the argument were both changed to
+.BR mode_t .
+.P
+Historical implementations have made use of additional bits in
+.IR cmask
+for their implementation-defined purposes. The addition of the text
+that the meaning of other bits of the field is implementation-defined
+permits these implementations to conform to this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIcreat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fImkdir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImkfifo\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImknod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImq_open\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsem_open\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/uname.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/uname.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f55c537
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/uname.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,122 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UNAME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+uname
+\(em get the name of the current system
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/utsname.h>
+.P
+int uname(struct utsname *\fIname\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIuname\fR()
+function shall store information identifying the current system in the
+structure pointed to by
+.IR name .
+.P
+The
+\fIuname\fR()
+function uses the
+.BR utsname
+structure defined in
+.IR <sys/utsname.h> .
+.P
+The
+\fIuname\fR()
+function shall return a string naming the current system in the
+character array
+.IR sysname .
+Similarly,
+.IR nodename
+shall contain the name of this node within an implementation-defined
+communications network. The arrays
+.IR release
+and
+.IR version
+shall further identify the operating system. The array
+.IR machine
+shall contain a name that identifies the hardware that the system
+is running on.
+.P
+The format of each member is implementation-defined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, a non-negative value shall be returned.
+Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The inclusion of the
+.IR nodename
+member in this structure does not imply that it is sufficient
+information for interfacing to communications networks.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The values of the structure members are not constrained to have any
+relation to the version of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 implemented in the operating
+system. An application should instead depend on _POSIX_VERSION
+and related constants defined in
+.IR <unistd.h> .
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not define the sizes of the members of the structure
+and permits them to be of different sizes, although most
+implementations define them all to be the same size: eight bytes plus
+one byte for the string terminator. That size for
+.IR nodename
+is not enough for use with many networks.
+.P
+The
+\fIuname\fR()
+function originated in System III, System V, and related
+implementations,
+and it does not exist in Version 7 or
+4.3 BSD. The values it returns are set at system compile time in those
+historical implementations.
+.P
+4.3 BSD has
+\fIgethostname\fR()
+and
+\fIgethostid\fR(),
+which return a symbolic name and a numeric value, respectively. There
+are related
+\fIsethostname\fR()
+and
+\fIsethostid\fR()
+functions that are used to set the values the other two functions
+return. The former functions are included in this specification, the
+latter are not.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_utsname.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ungetc.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ungetc.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2cbd874
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ungetc.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UNGETC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ungetc
+\(em push byte back into input stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int ungetc(int \fIc\fP, FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIungetc\fR()
+function shall push the byte specified by
+.IR c
+(converted to an
+.BR "unsigned char" )
+back onto the input stream pointed to by
+.IR stream .
+The pushed-back bytes shall be returned by subsequent reads on that
+stream in the reverse order of their pushing. A successful intervening
+call (with the stream pointed to by
+.IR stream )
+to a file-positioning function (\c
+\fIfseek\fR(),
+\c
+\fIfseeko\fR(),
+\fIfsetpos\fR(),
+or
+\fIrewind\fR())
+or
+\fIfflush\fR()
+shall discard any pushed-back bytes for the stream. The external
+storage corresponding to the stream shall be unchanged.
+.P
+One byte of push-back shall be provided. If
+\fIungetc\fR()
+is called too many times on the same stream without an intervening read
+or file-positioning operation on that stream, the operation may fail.
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR c
+equals that of the macro EOF, the operation shall fail and the input
+stream shall be left unchanged.
+.P
+A successful call to
+\fIungetc\fR()
+shall clear the end-of-file indicator for the stream. The value of the
+file-position indicator for the stream after all pushed-back bytes have
+been read, or discarded by calling
+\fIfseek\fR(),
+\fIfseeko\fR(),
+\fIfsetpos\fR(),
+or
+\fIrewind\fR()
+(but not
+\fIfflush\fR()),
+shall be the same as it was before the bytes were pushed back. The
+file-position indicator is decremented by each successful call to
+\fIungetc\fR();
+if its value was 0 before a call, its value is unspecified after the call.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIungetc\fR()
+shall return the byte pushed back after conversion. Otherwise, it
+shall return EOF.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfseek\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfsetpos\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrewind\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetbuf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ungetwc.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ungetwc.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a1c1d57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/ungetwc.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UNGETWC "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+ungetwc
+\(em push wide-character code back into the input stream
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wint_t ungetwc(wint_t \fIwc\fP, FILE *\fIstream\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIungetwc\fR()
+function shall push the character corresponding to the wide-character
+code specified by
+.IR wc
+back onto the input stream pointed to by
+.IR stream .
+The pushed-back characters shall be returned by subsequent reads on that
+stream in the reverse order of their pushing. A successful intervening
+call (with the stream pointed to by
+.IR stream )
+to a file-positioning function (\c
+\fIfseek\fR(),
+\c
+\fIfseeko\fR(),
+\fIfsetpos\fR(),
+or
+\fIrewind\fR())
+or
+\fIfflush\fR()
+shall discard any pushed-back characters for the stream. The external
+storage corresponding to the stream is unchanged.
+.P
+At least one character of push-back shall be provided. If
+\fIungetwc\fR()
+is called too many times on the same stream without an intervening read
+or file-positioning operation on that stream, the operation may fail.
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR wc
+equals that of the macro WEOF, the operation shall fail and the input
+stream shall be left unchanged.
+.P
+A successful call to
+\fIungetwc\fR()
+shall clear the end-of-file indicator for the stream. The value of the
+file-position indicator for the stream after all pushed-back characters
+have been read, or discarded by calling
+\fIfseek\fR(),
+\c
+\fIfseeko\fR(),
+\fIfsetpos\fR(),
+or
+\fIrewind\fR()
+(but not
+\fIfflush\fR()),
+shall be the same as it was before the characters were pushed back. The
+file-position indicator is decremented (by one or more) by each successful
+call to
+\fIungetwc\fR();
+if its value was 0 before a call, its value is unspecified after the call.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIungetwc\fR()
+shall return the wide-character code corresponding to the pushed-back
+character. Otherwise, it shall return WEOF.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIungetwc\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EILSEQ
+An invalid character sequence is detected, or a wide-character code
+does not correspond to a valid character.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfseek\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfsetpos\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrewind\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetbuf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/unlink.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/unlink.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0154c29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/unlink.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,449 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UNLINK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+unlink, unlinkat
+\(em remove a directory entry relative to directory file descriptor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+int unlink(const char *\fIpath\fP);
+int unlinkat(int \fIfd\fP, const char *\fIpath\fP, int \fIflag\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIunlink\fR()
+function shall remove a link to a file. If
+.IR path
+names a symbolic link,
+\fIunlink\fR()
+shall remove the symbolic link named by
+.IR path
+and shall not affect any file or directory named by the contents of the
+symbolic link. Otherwise,
+\fIunlink\fR()
+shall remove the link named by the pathname pointed to by
+.IR path
+and shall decrement the link count of the file referenced by the link.
+.P
+When the file's link count becomes 0 and no process has the file open,
+the space occupied by the file shall be freed and the file shall no
+longer be accessible. If one or more processes have the file open when
+the last link is removed, the link shall be removed before
+\fIunlink\fR()
+returns, but the removal of the file contents shall be postponed until
+all references to the file are closed.
+.P
+The
+.IR path
+argument shall not name a directory unless the process has appropriate
+privileges and the implementation supports using
+\fIunlink\fR()
+on directories.
+.P
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIunlink\fR()
+shall mark for update the last data modification and last file status
+change timestamps of the parent directory. Also, if the file's link
+count is not 0, the last file status change timestamp of the file shall
+be marked for update.
+.P
+The
+\fIunlinkat\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIunlink\fR()
+or
+\fIrmdir\fR()
+function except in the case where
+.IR path
+specifies a relative path. In this case the directory entry to be
+removed is determined relative to the directory associated with the
+file descriptor
+.IR fd
+instead of the current working directory. If the file descriptor was
+opened without O_SEARCH, the function shall check whether directory
+searches are permitted using the current permissions of the directory
+underlying the file descriptor. If the file descriptor was opened with
+O_SEARCH, the function shall not perform the check.
+.P
+Values for
+.IR flag
+are constructed by a bitwise-inclusive OR of flags from the following
+list, defined in
+.IR <fcntl.h> :
+.IP AT_REMOVEDIR 6
+.br
+Remove the directory entry specified by
+.IR fd
+and
+.IR path
+as a directory, not a normal file.
+.P
+If
+\fIunlinkat\fR()
+is passed the special value AT_FDCWD in the
+.IR fd
+parameter, the current working directory shall be used and the behavior
+shall be identical to a call to
+\fIunlink\fR()
+or
+\fIrmdir\fR()
+respectively, depending on whether or not the AT_REMOVEDIR bit is set in
+.IR flag .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return 0. Otherwise,
+these functions shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error. If \(mi1 is returned, the named file shall not
+be changed.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail and shall not unlink the file if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied for a component of the path prefix, or
+write permission is denied on the directory containing the directory
+entry to be removed.
+.TP
+.BR EBUSY
+The file named by the
+.IR path
+argument cannot be unlinked because it is being used by the system or
+another process and the implementation considers this an error.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR path
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory, or the
+.IR path
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file
+that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The file named by
+.IR path
+is a directory, and either the calling process does not have
+appropriate privileges, or the implementation prohibits using
+\fIunlink\fR()
+on directories.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM " or " EACCES
+.br
+The S_ISVTX flag is set on the directory containing the file referred
+to by the
+.IR path
+argument and the process does not satisfy the criteria specified in the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.2" ", " "Directory Protection".
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+The directory entry to be unlinked is part of a read-only file system.
+.P
+The
+\fIunlinkat\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+.IR fd
+was not opened with O_SEARCH and the permissions of the directory
+underlying
+.IR fd
+do not permit directory searches.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR path
+argument does not specify an absolute path and the
+.IR fd
+argument is neither AT_FDCWD nor a valid file descriptor open for reading
+or searching.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+The
+.IR path
+argument is not an absolute path and
+.IR fd
+is a file descriptor associated with a non-directory file.
+.TP
+.BR EEXIST " or " ENOTEMPTY
+.br
+The
+.IR flag
+parameter has the AT_REMOVEDIR bit set and the
+.IR path
+argument names a directory that is not an empty directory, or there are
+hard links to the directory other than dot or a single entry in dot-dot.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+The
+.IR flag
+parameter has the AT_REMOVEDIR bit set and
+.IR path
+does not name a directory.
+.P
+These functions may fail and not unlink the file if:
+.TP
+.BR EBUSY
+The file named by
+.IR path
+is a named STREAM.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ETXTBSY
+The entry to be unlinked is the last directory entry to a pure
+procedure (shared text) file that is being executed.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIunlinkat\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of the
+.IR flag
+argument is not valid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Removing a Link to a File"
+.P
+The following example shows how to remove a link to a file named
+.BR /home/cnd/mod1
+by removing the entry named
+.BR /modules/pass1 .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+char *path = "/modules/pass1";
+int   status;
+\&...
+status = unlink(path);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Checking for an Error"
+.P
+The following example fragment creates a temporary password lock file
+named
+.BR LOCKFILE ,
+which is defined as
+.BR /etc/ptmp ,
+and gets a file descriptor for it. If the file cannot be opened for
+writing,
+\fIunlink\fR()
+is used to remove the link between the file descriptor and
+.BR LOCKFILE .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+#define LOCKFILE "/etc/ptmp"
+.P
+int pfd;  /* Integer for file descriptor returned by open call. */
+FILE *fpfd;  /* File pointer for use in putpwent(). */
+\&...
+/* Open password Lock file. If it exists, this is an error. */
+if ((pfd = open(LOCKFILE, O_WRONLY| O_CREAT | O_EXCL, S_IRUSR
+    | S_IWUSR | S_IRGRP | S_IROTH)) == -1)  {
+    fprintf(stderr, "Cannot open /etc/ptmp. Try again later.\en");
+    exit(1);
+}
+.P
+/* Lock file created; proceed with fdopen of lock file so that
+   putpwent() can be used.
+ */
+if ((fpfd = fdopen(pfd, "w")) == NULL) {
+    close(pfd);
+    unlink(LOCKFILE);
+    exit(1);
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Replacing Files"
+.P
+The following example fragment uses
+\fIunlink\fR()
+to discard links to files, so that they can be replaced with new
+versions of the files. The first call removes the link to
+.BR LOCKFILE
+if an error occurs. Successive calls remove the links to
+.BR SAVEFILE
+and
+.BR PASSWDFILE
+so that new links can be created, then removes the link to
+.BR LOCKFILE
+when it is no longer needed.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+#define LOCKFILE "/etc/ptmp"
+#define PASSWDFILE "/etc/passwd"
+#define SAVEFILE "/etc/opasswd"
+\&...
+/* If no change was made, assume error and leave passwd unchanged. */
+if (!valid_change) {
+    fprintf(stderr, "Could not change password for user %s\en", user);
+    unlink(LOCKFILE);
+    exit(1);
+}
+.P
+/* Change permissions on new password file. */
+chmod(LOCKFILE, S_IRUSR | S_IRGRP | S_IROTH);
+.P
+/* Remove saved password file. */
+unlink(SAVEFILE);
+.P
+/* Save current password file. */
+link(PASSWDFILE, SAVEFILE);
+.P
+/* Remove current password file. */
+unlink(PASSWDFILE);
+.P
+/* Save new password file as current password file. */
+link(LOCKFILE,PASSWDFILE);
+.P
+/* Remove lock file. */
+unlink(LOCKFILE);
+.P
+exit(0);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications should use
+\fIrmdir\fR()
+to remove a directory.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Unlinking a directory is restricted to the superuser
+in many historical implementations for reasons given in
+\fIlink\fR()
+(see also
+\fIrename\fR()).
+.P
+The meaning of
+.BR [EBUSY] 
+in historical implementations is ``mount point busy''. Since this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does
+not cover the system administration concepts of mounting and unmounting,
+the description of the error was changed to ``resource busy''. (This
+meaning is used by some device drivers when a second process tries to
+open an exclusive use device.) The wording is also intended to allow
+implementations to refuse to remove a directory if it is the root or
+current working directory of any process.
+.P
+The standard developers reviewed TR 24715\(hy2006 and noted that
+LSB-conforming implementations may return
+.BR [EISDIR] 
+instead of
+.BR [EPERM] 
+when unlinking a directory. A change to permit this behavior by
+changing the requirement for
+.BR [EPERM] 
+to
+.BR [EPERM] 
+or
+.BR [EISDIR] 
+was considered, but decided against since it would break existing
+strictly conforming and conforming applications. Applications written
+for portability to both POSIX.1\(hy2008 and the LSB should be prepared to
+handle either error code.
+.P
+The purpose of the
+\fIunlinkat\fR()
+function is to remove directory entries in directories other than the
+current working directory without exposure to race conditions. Any part
+of the path of a file could be changed in parallel to a call to
+\fIunlink\fR(),
+resulting in unspecified behavior. By opening a file descriptor for
+the target directory and using the
+\fIunlinkat\fR()
+function it can be guaranteed that the removed directory entry is
+located relative to the desired directory.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIclose\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlink\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIremove\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrename\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIrmdir\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsymlink\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.2" ", " "Directory Protection",
+.IR "\fB<fcntl.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/unlockpt.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/unlockpt.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..89347e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/unlockpt.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UNLOCKPT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+unlockpt
+\(em unlock a pseudo-terminal master/slave pair
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+int unlockpt(int \fIfildes\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIunlockpt\fR()
+function shall unlock the slave pseudo-terminal device associated with
+the master to which
+.IR fildes
+refers.
+.P
+Conforming applications shall ensure that they call
+\fIunlockpt\fR()
+before opening the slave side of a pseudo-terminal device.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIunlockpt\fR()
+shall return 0. Otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIunlockpt\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a file descriptor open for writing.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not associated with a master pseudo-terminal device.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+See the RATIONALE section for
+.IR "\fIposix_openpt\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgrantpt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIposix_openpt\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIptsname\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/unsetenv.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/unsetenv.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..423674d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/unsetenv.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UNSETENV "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+unsetenv
+\(em remove an environment variable
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+int unsetenv(const char *\fIname\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIunsetenv\fR()
+function shall remove an environment variable from the environment
+of the calling process. The
+.IR name
+argument points to a string, which is the name of the variable to be
+removed. The named argument shall not contain an
+.BR '=' 
+character. If the named variable does not exist in the current
+environment, the environment shall be unchanged and the function is
+considered to have completed successfully.
+.P
+The
+\fIunsetenv\fR()
+function shall update the list of pointers to which
+.IR environ
+points.
+.P
+The
+\fIunsetenv\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, zero shall be returned. Otherwise, \(mi1
+shall be returned,
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error, and the environment shall be unchanged.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIunsetenv\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR name
+argument points to an empty string, or points to a
+string containing an
+.BR '=' 
+character.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Refer to the RATIONALE section in
+.IR "\fIsetenv\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIgetenv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetenv\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_types.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/uselocale.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/uselocale.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c4f1832
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/uselocale.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+'\" et
+.TH USELOCALE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+uselocale
+\(em use locale in current thread
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <locale.h>
+.P
+locale_t uselocale(locale_t \fInewloc\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIuselocale\fR()
+function shall set the current locale for the current thread to the
+locale represented by
+.IR newloc .
+.P
+The value for the
+.IR newloc
+argument shall be one of the following:
+.IP " 1." 4
+A value returned by the
+\fInewlocale\fR()
+or
+\fIduplocale\fR()
+functions
+.IP " 2." 4
+The special locale object descriptor LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE
+.IP " 3." 4
+(\c
+.BR locale_t )0
+.P
+Once the
+\fIuselocale\fR()
+function has been called to install a thread-local locale, the behavior
+of every interface using data from the current locale shall be affected
+for the calling thread. The current locale for other threads shall
+remain unchanged.
+.P
+If the
+.IR newloc
+argument is (\c
+.BR locale_t )0,
+the object returned is the current locale or LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE if there
+has been no previous call to
+\fIuselocale\fR()
+for the current thread.
+.P
+If the
+.IR newloc
+argument is LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE, the thread shall use the global locale
+determined by the
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+function.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIuselocale\fR()
+function shall return the locale handle from the previous call for the
+current thread, or LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE if there was no such previous call.
+Otherwise,
+\fIuselocale\fR()
+shall return (\c
+.BR locale_t )0
+and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIuselocale\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+.IR locale
+is not a valid locale object.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Unlike the
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+function, the
+\fIuselocale\fR()
+function does not allow replacing some locale categories
+only. Applications that need to install a locale which differs only in
+a few categories must use
+\fInewlocale\fR()
+to change a locale object equivalent to the currently used locale and
+install it.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIduplocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfreelocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fInewlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<locale.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/utime.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/utime.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..560bfa6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/utime.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,202 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UTIME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+utime
+\(em set file access and modification times
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <utime.h>
+.P
+int utime(const char *\fIpath\fP, const struct utimbuf *\fItimes\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIutime\fR()
+function shall set the access and modification times of the file named
+by the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.P
+If
+.IR times
+is a null pointer, the access and modification times of the file shall
+be set to the current time. The effective user ID of the process shall
+match the owner of the file, or the process has write permission to the
+file or has appropriate privileges, to use
+\fIutime\fR()
+in this manner.
+.P
+If
+.IR times
+is not a null pointer,
+.IR times
+shall be interpreted as a pointer to a
+.BR utimbuf
+structure and the access and modification times shall be set to the
+values contained in the designated structure. Only a process with
+the effective user ID equal to the user ID of the file or a process with
+appropriate privileges may use
+\fIutime\fR()
+this way.
+.P
+The
+.BR utimbuf
+structure is defined in the
+.IR <utime.h> 
+header. The times in the structure
+.BR utimbuf
+are measured in seconds since the Epoch.
+.P
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIutime\fR()
+function shall mark the last file status change timestamp
+for update; see
+.IR <sys/stat.h> .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, 0 shall be returned. Otherwise, \(mi1
+shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate the error, and the file times shall not be
+affected.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIutime\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+Search permission is denied by a component of the path prefix; or the
+.IR times
+argument is a null pointer and the effective user ID of the process
+does not match the owner of the file, the process does not have write
+permission for the file, and the process does not have appropriate
+privileges.
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+A loop exists in symbolic links encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a component of a pathname is longer than
+{NAME_MAX}.
+.TP
+.BR ENOENT
+A component of
+.IR path
+does not name an existing file or
+.IR path
+is an empty string.
+.TP
+.BR ENOTDIR
+A component of the path prefix names an existing file that is neither
+a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory, or the
+.IR path
+argument contains at least one non-\c
+<slash>
+character and ends with one or more trailing
+<slash>
+characters and the last pathname component names an existing file
+that is neither a directory nor a symbolic link to a directory.
+.TP
+.BR EPERM
+The
+.IR times
+argument is not a null pointer and the effective user ID of the calling
+process does not match the owner of the file and the calling process
+does not have appropriate privileges.
+.TP
+.BR EROFS
+The file system containing the file is read-only.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIutime\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ELOOP
+More than
+{SYMLOOP_MAX}
+symbolic links were encountered during resolution of the
+.IR path
+argument.
+.TP
+.BR ENAMETOOLONG
+.br
+The length of a pathname exceeds
+{PATH_MAX},
+or pathname resolution of a symbolic link produced an intermediate
+result with a length that exceeds
+{PATH_MAX}.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Since the
+.BR utimbuf
+structure only contains
+.BR time_t
+variables and is not accurate to fractions of a second,
+applications should use the
+\fIutimensat\fR()
+function instead of the obsolescent
+\fIutime\fR()
+function.
+.SH RATIONALE
+The
+.IR actime
+structure member must be present so that an application may set it,
+even though an implementation may ignore it and not change the last data
+access timestamp on the file. If an application intends to leave one of
+the times of a file unchanged while changing the other, it should use
+\fIstat\fR()
+or
+\fIfstat\fR()
+to retrieve the file's
+.IR st_atim
+and
+.IR st_mtim
+parameters, set
+.IR actime
+and
+.IR modtime
+in the buffer, and change one of them before making the
+\fIutime\fR()
+call.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+The
+\fIutime\fR()
+function may be removed in a future version.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfstat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfstatat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfutimens\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<sys_stat.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<utime.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/utimensat.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/utimensat.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5835dda
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/utimensat.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+'\" et
+.TH UTIMENSAT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+utimensat, utimes
+\(em set file access and modification times relative to directory
+file descriptor
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+.P
+int utimensat(int \fIfd\fP, const char *\fIpath\fP, const struct timespec \fItimes\fP[2],
+    int \fIflag\fP);
+.P
+#include <sys/time.h>
+.P
+int utimes(const char *\fIpath\fP, const struct timeval \fItimes\fP[2]);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfutimens\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/va_arg.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/va_arg.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6344919
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/va_arg.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+'\" et
+.TH VA_ARG "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+va_arg,
+va_copy,
+va_end,
+va_start
+\(em handle variable argument list
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdarg.h>
+.P
+\fItype\fP va_arg(va_list \fIap\fP, \fItype\fP);
+void va_copy(va_list \fIdest\fP, va_list \fIsrc\fP);
+void va_end(va_list \fIap\fP);
+void va_start(va_list \fIap\fP, \fIargN\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to the Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdarg.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vfprintf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vfprintf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef797dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vfprintf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+'\" et
+.TH VFPRINTF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+vdprintf,
+vfprintf,
+vprintf,
+vsnprintf,
+vsprintf
+\(em format output of a stdarg argument list
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdarg.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int vdprintf(int \fIfildes\fR, const char *restrict \fIformat\fR, va_list \fIap\fR);
+int vfprintf(FILE *restrict \fIstream\fP, const char *restrict \fIformat\fP,
+    va_list \fIap\fP);
+int vprintf(const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, va_list \fIap\fP);
+int vsnprintf(char *restrict \fIs\fP, size_t \fIn\fP, const char *restrict \fIformat\fP,
+    va_list \fIap\fP);
+int vsprintf(char *restrict \fIs\fP, const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, va_list \fIap\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIvdprintf\fR(),
+\fIvfprintf\fR(),
+\fIvprintf\fR(),
+\fIvsnprintf\fR(),
+and
+\fIvsprintf\fR()
+functions shall be equivalent to the \&
+\fIdprintf\fR(),
+\fIfprintf\fR(),
+\fIprintf\fR(),
+\fIsnprintf\fR(),
+and
+\fIsprintf\fR()
+functions respectively, except that instead of being called with a
+variable number of arguments, they are called with an argument list as
+defined by
+.IR <stdarg.h> .
+.P
+These functions shall not invoke the
+.IR va_end
+macro. As these functions invoke the
+.IR va_arg
+macro, the value of
+.IR ap
+after the return is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfprintf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfprintf\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications using these functions should call \fIva_end\fP(\fIap\fP)
+afterwards to clean up.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfprintf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdarg.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vfscanf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vfscanf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..07b125a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vfscanf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+'\" et
+.TH VFSCANF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+vfscanf,
+vscanf,
+vsscanf
+\(em format input of a stdarg argument list
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdarg.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int vfscanf(FILE *restrict \fIstream\fP, const char *restrict \fIformat\fP,
+    va_list \fIarg\fP);
+int vscanf(const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, va_list \fIarg\fP);
+int vsscanf(const char *restrict \fIs\fP, const char *restrict \fIformat\fP,
+    va_list \fIarg\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIvscanf\fR(),
+\fIvfscanf\fR(),
+and
+\fIvsscanf\fR()
+functions shall be equivalent to the
+\fIscanf\fR(),
+\fIfscanf\fR(),
+and
+\fIsscanf\fR()
+functions, respectively, except that instead of being called with a
+variable number of arguments, they are called with an argument list as
+defined in the
+.IR <stdarg.h> 
+header. These functions shall not invoke the
+.IR va_end
+macro. As these functions invoke the
+.IR va_arg
+macro, the value of
+.IR ap
+after the return is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfscanf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfscanf\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications using these functions should call
+.IR va_end (\c
+.IR ap )
+afterwards to clean up.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfscanf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdarg.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vfwprintf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vfwprintf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..54f8890
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vfwprintf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+'\" et
+.TH VFWPRINTF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+vfwprintf,
+vswprintf,
+vwprintf
+\(em wide-character formatted output of a stdarg argument list
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdarg.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int vfwprintf(FILE *restrict \fIstream\fP, const wchar_t *restrict \fIformat\fP,
+    va_list \fIarg\fP);
+int vswprintf(wchar_t *restrict \fIws\fP, size_t \fIn\fP,
+    const wchar_t *restrict \fIformat\fP, va_list \fIarg\fP);
+int vwprintf(const wchar_t *restrict \fIformat\fP, va_list \fIarg\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIvfwprintf\fR(),
+\fIvswprintf\fR(),
+and
+\fIvwprintf\fR()
+functions shall be equivalent to
+\fIfwprintf\fR(),
+\fIswprintf\fR(),
+and
+\fIwprintf\fR()
+respectively, except that instead of being called with a variable
+number of arguments, they are called with an argument list as defined
+by
+.IR <stdarg.h> .
+.P
+These functions shall not invoke the
+.IR va_end
+macro. However, as these functions do invoke the
+.IR va_arg
+macro, the value of
+.IR ap
+after the return is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfwprintf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfwprintf\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications using these functions should call \fIva_end\fP(\fIap\fP)
+afterwards to clean up.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfwprintf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdarg.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vfwscanf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vfwscanf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c6ffb59
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vfwscanf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+'\" et
+.TH VFWSCANF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+vfwscanf,
+vswscanf,
+vwscanf
+\(em wide-character formatted input of a stdarg argument list
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdarg.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int vfwscanf(FILE *restrict \fIstream\fP, const wchar_t *restrict \fIformat\fP,
+    va_list \fIarg\fP);
+int vswscanf(const wchar_t *restrict \fIws\fP, const wchar_t *restrict \fIformat\fP,
+    va_list \fIarg\fP);
+int vwscanf(const wchar_t *restrict \fIformat\fP, va_list \fIarg\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIvfwscanf\fR(),
+\fIvswscanf\fR(),
+and
+\fIvwscanf\fR()
+functions shall be equivalent to the
+\fIfwscanf\fR(),
+\fIswscanf\fR(),
+and
+\fIwscanf\fR()
+functions, respectively, except that instead of being called with a
+variable number of arguments, they are called with an argument list as
+defined in the
+.IR <stdarg.h> 
+header. These functions shall not invoke the
+.IR va_end
+macro. As these functions invoke the
+.IR va_arg
+macro, the value of
+.IR ap
+after the return is unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfwscanf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfwscanf\fR\^(\|)".
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Applications using these functions should call
+.IR va_end (\c
+.IR ap )
+afterwards to clean up.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "Section 2.5" ", " "Standard I/O Streams",
+.IR "\fIfwscanf\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdarg.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vprintf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vprintf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a5825ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vprintf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH VPRINTF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+vprintf
+\(em format the output of a stdarg argument list
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdarg.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int vprintf(const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, va_list \fIap\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIvfprintf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vscanf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vscanf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7f5d18d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vscanf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH VSCANF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+vscanf
+\(em format input of a stdarg argument list
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdarg.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int vscanf(const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, va_list \fIarg\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIvfscanf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vsnprintf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vsnprintf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fef936d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vsnprintf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+'\" et
+.TH VSNPRINTF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+vsnprintf,
+vsprintf
+\(em format output of a stdarg argument list
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdarg.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int vsnprintf(char *restrict \fIs\fP, size_t \fIn\fP,
+    const char *restrict \fIformat\fP, va_list \fIap\fP);
+int vsprintf(char *restrict \fIs\fP, const char *restrict \fIformat\fP,
+    va_list \fIap\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIvfprintf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vsscanf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vsscanf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1218042
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vsscanf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH VSSCANF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+vsscanf
+\(em format input of a stdarg argument list
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdarg.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+.P
+int vsscanf(const char *restrict \fIs\fP, const char *restrict \fIformat\fP,
+    va_list \fIarg\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIvfscanf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vswprintf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vswprintf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9c28214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vswprintf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+'\" et
+.TH VSWPRINTF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+vswprintf
+\(em wide-character formatted output of a stdarg argument list
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdarg.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int vswprintf(wchar_t *restrict \fIws\fP, size_t \fIn\fP,
+    const wchar_t *restrict \fIformat\fP, va_list \fIarg\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIvfwprintf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vswscanf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vswscanf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..72045d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vswscanf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+'\" et
+.TH VSWSCANF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+vswscanf
+\(em wide-character formatted input of a stdarg argument list
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdarg.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int vswscanf(const wchar_t *restrict \fIws\fP, const wchar_t *restrict \fIformat\fP,
+    va_list \fIarg\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIvfwscanf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vwprintf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vwprintf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d525110
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vwprintf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH VWPRINTF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+vwprintf
+\(em wide-character formatted output of a stdarg argument list
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdarg.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int vwprintf(const wchar_t *restrict \fIformat\fP, va_list \fIarg\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIvfwprintf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vwscanf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vwscanf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..939a3f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/vwscanf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH VWSCANF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+vwscanf
+\(em wide-character formatted input of a stdarg argument list
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdarg.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int vwscanf(const wchar_t *restrict \fIformat\fP, va_list \fIarg\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIvfwscanf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wait.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wait.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d14b60c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wait.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,892 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WAIT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wait,
+waitpid
+\(em wait for a child process to stop or terminate
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/wait.h>
+.P
+pid_t wait(int *\fIstat_loc\fP);
+pid_t waitpid(pid_t \fIpid\fP, int *\fIstat_loc\fP, int \fIoptions\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIwait\fR()
+and
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+functions shall obtain status information pertaining to one of the
+caller's child processes. Various options permit status information to
+be obtained for child processes that have terminated or stopped. If
+status information is available for two or more child processes, the
+order in which their status is reported is unspecified.
+.P
+The
+\fIwait\fR()
+function shall suspend execution of the calling thread until status
+information for one of the terminated child processes of the calling
+process is available, or until delivery of a signal whose action is
+either to execute a signal-catching function or to terminate the
+process. If more than one thread is suspended in
+\fIwait\fR()
+or
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+awaiting termination of the same process, exactly one thread shall
+return the process status at the time of the target process
+termination. If status information is available prior to the call to
+\fIwait\fR(),
+return shall be immediate.
+.P
+The
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIwait\fR()
+if the
+.IR pid
+argument is (\fBpid_t\fP)\(mi1 and the
+.IR options
+argument is 0. Otherwise, its behavior shall be modified by the values
+of the
+.IR pid
+and
+.IR options
+arguments.
+.P
+The
+.IR pid
+argument specifies a set of child processes for which
+.IR status
+is requested. The
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+function shall only return the status of a child process from this set:
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR pid
+is equal to (\fBpid_t\fP)\(mi1,
+.IR status
+is requested for any child process. In this respect,
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+is then equivalent to
+\fIwait\fR().
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR pid
+is greater than 0, it specifies the process ID of a single child
+process for which
+.IR status
+is requested.
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR pid
+is 0,
+.IR status
+is requested for any child process whose process group ID is equal to
+that of the calling process.
+.IP " *" 4
+If
+.IR pid
+is less than (\fBpid_t\fP)\(mi1,
+.IR status
+is requested for any child process whose process group ID is equal to
+the absolute value of
+.IR pid .
+.P
+The
+.IR options
+argument is constructed from the bitwise-inclusive OR of zero or more
+of the following flags, defined in the
+.IR <sys/wait.h> 
+header:
+.IP WCONTINUED 12
+The
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+function shall report the status of any continued child process
+specified by
+.IR pid
+whose status has not been reported since it continued from a job
+control stop.
+.IP WNOHANG 12
+The
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+function shall not suspend execution of the calling thread if
+.IR status
+is not immediately available for one of the child processes specified
+by
+.IR pid .
+.IP WUNTRACED 12
+The status of any child processes specified by
+.IR pid
+that are stopped, and whose status has not yet been reported since they
+stopped, shall also be reported to the requesting process.
+.P
+If the calling process has SA_NOCLDWAIT set or has SIGCHLD set to
+SIG_IGN,
+and the process has no unwaited-for children that were transformed into
+zombie processes, the calling thread shall block until all of the
+children of the process containing the calling thread terminate, and
+\fIwait\fR()
+and
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+shall fail and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [ECHILD] .
+.P
+If
+\fIwait\fR()
+or
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+return because the status of a child process is available, these
+functions shall return a value equal to the process ID of the child
+process. In this case, if the value of the argument
+.IR stat_loc
+is not a null pointer, information shall be stored in the location
+pointed to by
+.IR stat_loc .
+The value stored at the location pointed to by
+.IR stat_loc
+shall be 0 if and only if the status returned is from a terminated
+child process that terminated by one of the following means:
+.IP " 1." 4
+The process returned 0 from
+\fImain\fR().
+.IP " 2." 4
+The process called
+\fI_exit\fR()
+or
+\fIexit\fR()
+with a
+.IR status
+argument of 0.
+.IP " 3." 4
+The process was terminated because the last thread in the process
+terminated.
+.P
+Regardless of its value, this information may be
+interpreted using the following macros, which are defined in
+.IR <sys/wait.h> 
+and evaluate to integral expressions; the
+.IR stat_val
+argument is the integer value pointed to by
+.IR stat_loc .
+.IP "WIFEXITED(\fIstat_val\fP)" 6
+.br
+Evaluates to a non-zero value if
+.IR status
+was returned for a child process that terminated normally.
+.IP "WEXITSTATUS(\fIstat_val\fP)" 6
+.br
+If the value of WIFEXITED(\fIstat_val\fP) is non-zero, this macro
+evaluates to the low-order 8 bits of the
+.IR status
+argument that the child process passed to
+\fI_exit\fR()
+or
+\fIexit\fR(),
+or the value the child process returned from
+\fImain\fR().
+.IP "WIFSIGNALED(\fIstat_val\fP)" 6
+.br
+Evaluates to a non-zero value if
+.IR status
+was returned for a child process that terminated due to the receipt of
+a signal that was not caught (see
+.IR <signal.h> ).
+.IP "WTERMSIG(\fIstat_val\fP)" 6
+.br
+If the value of WIFSIGNALED(\fIstat_val\fP) is non-zero, this macro
+evaluates to the number of the signal that caused the termination of
+the child process.
+.IP "WIFSTOPPED(\fIstat_val\fP)" 6
+.br
+Evaluates to a non-zero value if
+.IR status
+was returned for a child process that is currently stopped.
+.IP "WSTOPSIG(\fIstat_val\fP)" 6
+.br
+If the value of WIFSTOPPED(\fIstat_val\fP) is non-zero, this macro
+evaluates to the number of the signal that caused the child process to
+stop.
+.IP "WIFCONTINUED(\fIstat_val\fP)" 6
+.br
+Evaluates to a non-zero value if
+.IR status
+was returned for a child process that has continued from a job control
+stop.
+.P
+It is unspecified whether the
+.IR status
+value returned by calls to
+\fIwait\fR()
+or
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+for processes created by
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+can indicate a WIFSTOPPED(\fIstat_val\fP) before subsequent calls to
+\fIwait\fR()
+or
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+indicate WIFEXITED(\fIstat_val\fP) as the result of an error detected
+before the new process image starts executing.
+.P
+It is unspecified whether the
+.IR status
+value returned by calls to
+\fIwait\fR()
+or
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+for processes created by
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+can indicate a WIFSIGNALED(\fIstat_val\fP) if a signal is sent to the
+parent's process group after
+\fIposix_spawn\fR()
+or
+\fIposix_spawnp\fR()
+is called.
+.P
+If the information pointed to by
+.IR stat_loc
+was stored by a call to
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+that specified the WUNTRACED flag
+and did not specify the WCONTINUED flag,
+exactly one of the macros WIFEXITED(*\fIstat_loc\fR),
+WIFSIGNALED(*\fIstat_loc\fR), and WIFSTOPPED(*\fIstat_loc\fR)
+shall evaluate to a non-zero value.
+.P
+If the information pointed to by
+.IR stat_loc
+was stored by a call to
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+that specified the WUNTRACED
+and WCONTINUED
+flags, exactly one of the macros WIFEXITED(*\fIstat_loc\fR),
+WIFSIGNALED(*\fIstat_loc\fR), WIFSTOPPED(*\fIstat_loc\fR),
+and WIFCONTINUED(*\fIstat_loc\fR)
+shall evaluate to a non-zero value.
+.P
+If the information pointed to by
+.IR stat_loc
+was stored by a call to
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+that did not specify the WUNTRACED
+or WCONTINUED
+flags, or by a call to the
+\fIwait\fR()
+function, exactly one of the macros WIFEXITED(*\fIstat_loc\fR) and
+WIFSIGNALED(*\fIstat_loc\fR) shall evaluate to a non-zero value.
+.P
+If the information pointed to by
+.IR stat_loc
+was stored by a call to
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+that did not specify the WUNTRACED flag
+and specified the WCONTINUED flag,
+or by a call to the
+\fIwait\fR()
+function, exactly one of the macros WIFEXITED(*\fIstat_loc\fR),
+WIFSIGNALED(*\fIstat_loc\fR),
+and WIFCONTINUED(*\fIstat_loc\fR)
+shall evaluate to a non-zero value.
+.P
+If _POSIX_REALTIME_SIGNALS is defined, and the implementation queues
+the SIGCHLD signal, then if
+\fIwait\fR()
+or
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+returns because the status of a child process is available, any pending
+SIGCHLD signal associated with the process ID of the child process
+shall be discarded. Any other pending SIGCHLD signals shall remain
+pending.
+.P
+Otherwise, if SIGCHLD is blocked, if
+\fIwait\fR()
+or
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+return because the status of a child process is available, any pending
+SIGCHLD signal shall be cleared unless the status of another child
+process is available.
+.P
+For all other conditions, it is unspecified whether child
+.IR status
+will be available when a SIGCHLD signal is delivered.
+.P
+There may be additional implementation-defined circumstances under
+which
+\fIwait\fR()
+or
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+report
+.IR status .
+This shall not occur unless the calling process or one of its child
+processes explicitly makes use of a non-standard extension. In these
+cases the interpretation of the reported
+.IR status
+is implementation-defined.
+.P
+If a parent process terminates without waiting for all of its child
+processes to terminate, the remaining child processes shall be assigned
+a new parent process ID corresponding to an implementation-defined
+system process.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If
+\fIwait\fR()
+or
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+returns because the status of a child process is available, these
+functions shall return a value equal to the process ID of the child
+process for which
+.IR status
+is reported. If
+\fIwait\fR()
+or
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+returns due to the delivery of a signal to the calling process, \(mi1
+shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [EINTR] .
+If
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+was invoked with WNOHANG set in
+.IR options ,
+it has at least one child process specified by
+.IR pid
+for which
+.IR status
+is not available, and
+.IR status
+is not available for any process specified by
+.IR pid ,
+0 is returned. Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned, and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIwait\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ECHILD
+The calling process has no existing unwaited-for child processes.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The function was interrupted by a signal. The value of the location
+pointed to by
+.IR stat_loc
+is undefined.
+.P
+The
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ECHILD
+The process specified by
+.IR pid
+does not exist or is not a child of the calling process, or the process
+group specified by
+.IR pid
+does not exist or does not have any member process that is a child of
+the calling process.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The function was interrupted by a signal. The value of the location
+pointed to by
+.IR stat_loc
+is undefined.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR options
+argument is not valid.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Waiting for a Child Process and then Checking its Status"
+.P
+The following example demonstrates the use of
+\fIwaitpid\fR(),
+\fIfork\fR(),
+and the macros used to interpret the status value returned by
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+(and
+\fIwait\fR()).
+The code segment creates a child process which does some unspecified
+work. Meanwhile the parent loops performing calls to
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+to monitor the status of the child. The loop terminates when child
+termination is detected.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <sys/wait.h>
+\&...
+.P
+pid_t child_pid, wpid;
+int status;
+.P
+child_pid = fork();
+if (child_pid == \(mi1) {      /* fork() failed */
+    perror("fork");
+    exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+}
+.P
+if (child_pid == 0) {       /* This is the child */
+    /* Child does some work and then terminates */
+    ...
+.P
+} else {                    /* This is the parent */
+    do {
+        wpid = waitpid(child_pid, &status, WUNTRACED
+#ifdef WCONTINUED       /* Not all implementations support this */
+        | WCONTINUED
+#endif
+        );
+        if (wpid == \(mi1) {
+            perror("waitpid");
+            exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+        }
+.P
+        if (WIFEXITED(status)) {
+            printf("child exited, status=%d\en", WEXITSTATUS(status));
+.P
+        } else if (WIFSIGNALED(status)) {
+            printf("child killed (signal %d)\en", WTERMSIG(status));
+.P
+        } else if (WIFSTOPPED(status)) {
+            printf("child stopped (signal %d)\en", WSTOPSIG(status));
+.P
+#ifdef WIFCONTINUED     /* Not all implementations support this */
+        } else if (WIFCONTINUED(status)) {
+            printf("child continued\en");
+#endif
+        } else {    /* Non-standard case -- may never happen */
+            printf("Unexpected status (0x%x)\en", status);
+        }
+    } while (!WIFEXITED(status) && !WIFSIGNALED(status));
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SS "Waiting for a Child Process in a Signal Handler for SIGCHLD"
+.P
+The following example demonstrates how to use
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+in a signal handler for SIGCHLD without passing \(mi1 as the
+.IR pid
+argument. (See the APPLICATION USAGE section below for the reasons
+why passing a
+.IR pid
+of \(mi1 is not recommended.) The method used here relies on the
+standard behavior of
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+when SIGCHLD is blocked. On historical non-conforming systems, the
+status of some child processes might not be reported.
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <signal.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/wait.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+#define CHILDREN 10
+.P
+static void
+handle_sigchld(int signum, siginfo_t *sinfo, void *unused)
+{
+    int sav_errno = errno;
+    int status;
+.P
+    /*
+     * Obtain status information for the child which
+     * caused the SIGCHLD signal and write its exit code
+     * to stdout.
+    */
+    if (sinfo->si_code != CLD_EXITED)
+    {
+        static char msg[] = "wrong si_code\en";
+        write(2, msg, sizeof msg \(mi 1);
+    }
+    else if (waitpid(sinfo->si_pid, &status, 0) =\|= \(mi1)
+    {
+        static char msg[] = "waitpid() failed\en";
+        write(2, msg, sizeof msg \(mi 1);
+    }
+    else if (!WIFEXITED(status))
+    {
+        static char msg[] = "WIFEXITED was false\en";
+        write(2, msg, sizeof msg \(mi 1);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        int code = WEXITSTATUS(status);
+        char buf[2];
+        buf[0] = '0' + code;
+        buf[1] = '\en';
+        write(1, buf, 2);
+    }
+    errno = sav_errno;
+}
+.P
+int
+main(void)
+{
+    int i;
+    pid_t pid;
+    struct sigaction sa;
+.P
+    sa.sa_flags = SA_SIGINFO;
+    sa.sa_sigaction = handle_sigchld;
+    sigemptyset(&sa.sa_mask);
+    if (sigaction(SIGCHLD, &sa, NULL) =\|= \(mi1)
+    {
+        perror("sigaction");
+        exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+    }
+.P
+    for (i = 0; i < CHILDREN; i++)
+    {
+        switch (pid = fork())
+        {
+        case \(mi1:
+            perror("fork");
+            exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+        case 0:
+            sleep(2);
+            _exit(i);
+        }
+    }
+.P
+    /* Wait for all the SIGCHLD signals, then terminate on SIGALRM */
+    alarm(3);
+    for (;;)
+        pause();
+.P
+    return 0; /* NOTREACHED */
+}
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Calls to
+\fIwait\fR()
+will collect information about any child process. This may result in
+interactions with other interfaces that may be waiting for their own
+children (such as by use of
+\fIsystem\fR()).
+For this and other reasons it is recommended that portable applications
+not use
+\fIwait\fR(),
+but instead use
+\fIwaitpid\fR().
+For these same reasons, the use of
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+with a
+.IR pid
+argument of \(mi1, and the use of
+\fIwaitid\fR()
+with the
+.IR idtype
+argument set to P_ALL, are also not recommended for portable applications.
+.SH RATIONALE
+A call to the
+\fIwait\fR()
+or
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+function only returns
+.IR status
+on an immediate child process of the calling process; that is, a child
+that was produced by a single
+\fIfork\fR()
+call (perhaps followed by an
+.IR exec
+or other function calls) from the parent. If a child produces
+grandchildren by further use of
+\fIfork\fR(),
+none of those grandchildren nor any of their descendants affect the
+behavior of a
+\fIwait\fR()
+from the original parent process. Nothing in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 prevents an
+implementation from providing extensions that permit a process to get
+.IR status
+from a grandchild or any other process, but a process that does not use
+such extensions must be guaranteed to see
+.IR status
+from only its direct children.
+.P
+The
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+function is provided for three reasons:
+.IP " 1." 4
+To support job control
+.IP " 2." 4
+To permit a non-blocking version of the
+\fIwait\fR()
+function
+.IP " 3." 4
+To permit a library routine, such as
+\fIsystem\fR()
+or
+\fIpclose\fR(),
+to wait for its children without interfering with other terminated
+children for which the process has not waited
+.P
+The first two of these facilities are based on the
+.IR wait3 (\|)
+function provided by 4.3 BSD. The function uses the
+.IR options
+argument, which is equivalent to an argument to
+.IR wait3 (\|).
+The WUNTRACED
+flag is used only in conjunction with job control on systems supporting
+job control. Its name comes from 4.3 BSD
+and refers to the fact that there are two types of stopped processes in
+that implementation: processes being traced via the
+\fIptrace\fR()
+debugging facility and (untraced) processes stopped by job control
+signals. Since
+\fIptrace\fR()
+is not part of this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008, only the second type is relevant. The name
+WUNTRACED was retained because its usage is the same, even though the
+name is not intuitively meaningful in this context.
+.P
+The third reason for the
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+function is to permit independent sections of a process to spawn and
+wait for children without interfering with each other. For example,
+the following problem occurs in developing a portable shell, or command
+interpreter:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+stream = popen("/bin/true");
+(void) system("sleep 100");
+(void) pclose(stream);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+On all historical implementations, the final
+\fIpclose\fR()
+fails to reap the
+\fIwait\fR()
+.IR status
+of the
+\fIpopen\fR().
+.P
+The status values are retrieved by macros, rather than given as
+specific bit encodings as they are in most historical implementations
+(and thus expected by existing programs). This was necessary to
+eliminate a limitation on the number of signals an implementation can
+support that was inherent in the traditional encodings. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+does require that a
+.IR status
+value of zero corresponds to a process calling
+.IR _exit (0),
+as this is the most common encoding expected by existing programs.
+Some of the macro names were adopted from 4.3 BSD.
+.P
+These macros syntactically operate on an arbitrary integer value. The
+behavior is undefined unless that value is one stored by a successful
+call to
+\fIwait\fR()
+or
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+in the location pointed to by the
+.IR stat_loc
+argument. An early proposal attempted to make this clearer by specifying
+each argument as *\fIstat_loc\fP rather than
+.IR stat_val .
+However, that did not follow the conventions of other specifications in
+\&this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 or traditional usage. It also could have implied that the
+argument to the macro must literally be *\fIstat_loc\fP; in fact, that
+value can be stored or passed as an argument to other functions before
+being interpreted by these macros.
+.P
+The extension that affects
+\fIwait\fR()
+and
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+and is common in historical implementations is the
+\fIptrace\fR()
+function. It is called by a child process and causes that child to
+stop and return a
+.IR status
+that appears identical to the
+.IR status
+indicated by WIFSTOPPED.
+The
+.IR status
+of
+\fIptrace\fR()
+children is traditionally returned regardless of the WUNTRACED
+flag (or by the
+\fIwait\fR()
+function). Most applications do not need to concern themselves with
+such extensions because they have control over what extensions they or
+their children use. However, applications, such as command
+interpreters, that invoke arbitrary processes may see this behavior
+when those arbitrary processes misuse such extensions.
+.P
+Implementations that support
+.BR core
+file creation or other implementation-defined actions on termination
+of some processes traditionally provide a bit in the
+.IR status
+returned by
+\fIwait\fR()
+to indicate that such actions have occurred.
+.P
+Allowing the
+\fIwait\fR()
+family of functions to discard a pending SIGCHLD signal that is
+associated with a successfully waited-for child process puts them into
+the
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+and
+\fIsigwaitinfo\fR()
+category with respect to SIGCHLD.
+.P
+This definition allows implementations to treat a pending SIGCHLD
+signal as accepted by the process in
+\fIwait\fR(),
+with the same meaning of ``accepted'' as when that word is applied to
+the
+\fIsigwait\fR()
+family of functions.
+.P
+Allowing the
+\fIwait\fR()
+family of functions to behave this way permits an implementation to be
+able to deal precisely with SIGCHLD signals.
+.P
+In particular, an implementation that does accept (discard) the SIGCHLD
+signal can make the following guarantees regardless of the queuing
+depth of signals in general (the list of waitable children can hold the
+SIGCHLD queue):
+.IP " 1." 4
+If a SIGCHLD signal handler is established via
+\fIsigaction\fR()
+without the SA_RESETHAND flag, SIGCHLD signals can be accurately
+counted; that is, exactly one SIGCHLD signal will be delivered to or
+accepted by the process for every child process that terminates.
+.IP " 2." 4
+A single
+\fIwait\fR()
+issued from a SIGCHLD signal handler can be guaranteed to return
+immediately with status information for a child process.
+.IP " 3." 4
+When SA_SIGINFO is requested, the SIGCHLD signal handler can be
+guaranteed to receive a non-null pointer to a
+.BR siginfo_t
+structure that describes a child process for which a wait via
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+or
+\fIwaitid\fR()
+will not block or fail.
+.IP " 4." 4
+The
+\fIsystem\fR()
+function will not cause the SIGCHLD handler of a process to be
+called as a result of the
+\fIfork\fR()/\c
+.IR exec
+executed within
+\fIsystem\fR()
+because
+\fIsystem\fR()
+will accept the SIGCHLD signal when it performs a
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+for its child process. This is a desirable behavior of
+\fIsystem\fR()
+so that it can be used in a library without causing side-effects to the
+application linked with the library.
+.P
+An implementation that does not permit the
+\fIwait\fR()
+family of functions to accept (discard) a pending SIGCHLD signal
+associated with a successfully waited-for child, cannot make the
+guarantees described above for the following reasons:
+.IP "Guarantee #1" 6
+.br
+Although it might be assumed that reliable queuing of all SIGCHLD
+signals generated by the system can make this guarantee, the
+counter-example is the case of a process that blocks SIGCHLD and
+performs an indefinite loop of
+\fIfork\fR()/\c
+\fIwait\fR()
+operations. If the implementation supports queued signals, then
+eventually the system will run out of memory for the queue. The
+guarantee cannot be made because there must be some limit to the depth
+of queuing.
+.IP "Guarantees #2 and #3" 6
+.br
+These cannot be guaranteed unless the
+\fIwait\fR()
+family of functions accepts the SIGCHLD signal. Otherwise, a
+\fIfork\fR()/\c
+\fIwait\fR()
+executed while SIGCHLD is blocked (as in the
+\fIsystem\fR()
+function) will result in an invocation of the handler when SIGCHLD is
+unblocked, after the process has disappeared.
+.IP "Guarantee #4" 6
+.br
+Although possible to make this guarantee,
+\fIsystem\fR()
+would have to set the SIGCHLD handler to SIG_DFL so that the SIGCHLD
+signal generated by its
+\fIfork\fR()
+would be discarded (the SIGCHLD default action is to be ignored), then
+restore it to its previous setting. This would have the undesirable
+side-effect of discarding all SIGCHLD signals pending to the process.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfork\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsystem\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwaitid\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.11" ", " "Memory Synchronization",
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_wait.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/waitid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/waitid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..555fbf6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/waitid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,212 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WAITID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+waitid
+\(em wait for a child process to change state
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/wait.h>
+.P
+int waitid(idtype_t \fIidtype\fP, id_t \fIid\fP, siginfo_t *\fIinfop\fP, int \fIoptions\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIwaitid\fR()
+function shall suspend the calling thread until one child of the
+process containing the calling thread changes state. It records the
+current state of a child in the structure pointed to by
+.IR infop .
+The fields of the structure pointed to by
+.IR infop
+are filled in as described for the SIGCHLD signal in
+.IR <signal.h> .
+If a child process changed state prior to the call to
+\fIwaitid\fR(),
+\fIwaitid\fR()
+shall return immediately. If more than one thread is suspended in
+\fIwait\fR(),
+\fIwaitid\fR(),
+or
+\fIwaitpid\fR()
+waiting for termination of the same process, exactly one thread shall
+return the process status at the time of the target process termination.
+.P
+The
+.IR idtype
+and
+.IR id
+arguments are used to specify which children
+\fIwaitid\fR()
+waits for.
+.P
+If
+.IR idtype
+is P_PID,
+\fIwaitid\fR()
+shall wait for the child with a process ID equal to
+(\fBpid_t\fP)\fIid\fR.
+.P
+If
+.IR idtype
+is P_PGID,
+\fIwaitid\fR()
+shall wait for any child with a process group ID equal to
+(\fBpid_t\fP)\fIid\fR.
+.P
+If
+.IR idtype
+is P_ALL,
+\fIwaitid\fR()
+shall wait for any children and
+.IR id
+is ignored.
+.P
+The
+.IR options
+argument is used to specify which state changes
+\fIwaitid\fR()
+shall wait for. It is formed by OR'ing together the following flags:
+.IP WCONTINUED 12
+Status shall be returned for any continued child process whose status
+either has not been reported since it continued from a job control stop
+or has been reported only by calls to
+\fIwaitid\fR()
+with the WNOWAIT flag set.
+.IP WEXITED 12
+Wait for processes that have exited.
+.IP WNOHANG 12
+Do not hang if no status is available; return immediately.
+.IP WNOWAIT 12
+Keep the process whose status is returned in
+.IR infop
+in a waitable state. This shall not affect the state of the process; the
+process may be waited for again after this call completes.
+.IP WSTOPPED 12
+Status shall be returned for any child that has stopped upon receipt of
+a signal, and whose status either has not been reported since it stopped
+or has been reported only by calls to
+\fIwaitid\fR()
+with the WNOWAIT flag set.
+.P
+Applications shall specify at least one of the flags WEXITED, WSTOPPED,
+or WCONTINUED to be OR'ed in with the
+.IR options
+argument.
+.P
+The application shall ensure that the
+.IR infop
+argument points to a
+.BR siginfo_t
+structure. If
+\fIwaitid\fR()
+returns because a child process was found that satisfied the conditions
+indicated by the arguments
+.IR idtype
+and
+.IR options ,
+then the structure pointed to by
+.IR infop
+shall be filled in by the system with the status of the process; the
+.IR si_signo
+member shall be set equal to SIGCHLD.
+If
+\fIwaitid\fR()
+returns because WNOHANG was specified and status is not available for
+any process specified by
+.IR idtype
+and
+.IR id ,
+then the
+.IR si_signo
+and
+.IR si_pid
+members of the structure pointed to by
+.IR infop
+shall be set to zero and the values of other members of the structure
+are unspecified.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If WNOHANG was specified and status is not available for any process
+specified by
+.IR idtype
+and
+.IR id ,
+0 shall be returned. If
+\fIwaitid\fR()
+returns due to the change of state of one of its children, 0 shall be
+returned. Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIwaitid\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ECHILD
+The calling process has no existing unwaited-for child processes.
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The
+\fIwaitid\fR()
+function was interrupted by a signal.
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+An invalid value was specified for
+.IR options ,
+or
+.IR idtype
+and
+.IR id
+specify an invalid set of processes.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+Calls to
+\fIwaitid\fR()
+with
+.IR idtype
+equal to P_ALL will collect information about any child process. This
+may result in interactions with other interfaces that may be waiting
+for their own children (such as by use of
+\fIsystem\fR()).
+For this reason it is recommended that portable applications not use
+\fIwaitid\fR()
+with idtype of P_ALL. See also APPLICATION USAGE for
+\fIwait\fR().
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIexit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<signal.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_wait.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/waitpid.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/waitpid.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3849009
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/waitpid.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WAITPID "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+waitpid
+\(em wait for a child process to stop or terminate
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/wait.h>
+.P
+pid_t waitpid(pid_t \fIpid\fP, int *\fIstat_loc\fP, int \fIoptions\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIwait\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcpcpy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcpcpy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fecc385
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcpcpy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCPCPY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcpcpy
+\(em copy a wide-character string, returning a pointer to its end
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wchar_t *wcpcpy(wchar_t *restrict \fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *restrict \fIws2\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIwcscpy\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcpncpy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcpncpy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f497d1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcpncpy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCPNCPY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcpncpy
+\(em copy a fixed-size wide-character string, returning a pointer
+to its end
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wchar_t *wcpncpy(wchar_t restrict *\fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *restrict \fIws2\fP,
+    size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIwcsncpy\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcrtomb.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcrtomb.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6af7974
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcrtomb.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCRTOMB "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcrtomb
+\(em convert a wide-character code to a character (restartable)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+size_t wcrtomb(char *restrict \fIs\fP, wchar_t \fIwc\fP, mbstate_t *restrict \fIps\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+If
+.IR s
+is a null pointer, the
+\fIwcrtomb\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the call:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+wcrtomb(\fIbuf\fP, L'\e0', \fIps\fP)
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+where
+.IR buf
+is an internal buffer.
+.P
+If
+.IR s
+is not a null pointer, the
+\fIwcrtomb\fR()
+function shall determine the number of bytes needed to represent the
+character that corresponds to the wide character given by
+.IR wc
+(including any shift sequences), and store the resulting bytes in the
+array whose first element is pointed to by
+.IR s .
+At most
+{MB_CUR_MAX}
+bytes are stored. If
+.IR wc
+is a null wide character, a null byte shall be stored, preceded by any
+shift sequence needed to restore the initial shift state. The resulting
+state described shall be the initial conversion state.
+.P
+If
+.IR ps
+is a null pointer, the
+\fIwcrtomb\fR()
+function shall use its own internal
+.BR mbstate_t
+object, which is initialized at program start-up to the initial
+conversion state. Otherwise, the
+.BR mbstate_t
+object pointed to by
+.IR ps
+shall be used to completely describe the current conversion state of
+the associated character sequence. The implementation shall behave as
+if no function defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 calls
+\fIwcrtomb\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIwcrtomb\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe if called with a NULL
+.IR ps
+argument.
+.P
+The behavior of this function shall be affected by the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category of the current locale.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcrtomb\fR()
+function shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIwcrtomb\fR()
+function shall return the number of bytes stored in the array object
+(including any shift sequences). When
+.IR wc
+is not a valid wide character, an encoding error shall occur. In this
+case, the function shall store the value of the macro
+.BR [EILSEQ] 
+in
+.IR errno
+and shall return (\fBsize_t\fP)\(mi1; the conversion state shall be
+undefined.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIwcrtomb\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EILSEQ
+An invalid wide-character code is detected.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcrtomb\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+.IR ps
+points to an object that contains an invalid conversion state.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImbsinit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcsrtombs\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcscasecmp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcscasecmp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4362bf2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcscasecmp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSCASECMP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcscasecmp,
+wcscasecmp_l,
+wcsncasecmp,
+wcsncasecmp_l
+\(em case-insensitive wide-character string comparison
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int wcscasecmp(const wchar_t *\fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *\fIws2\fP);
+int wcscasecmp_l(const wchar_t *\fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *\fIws2\fP,
+    locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+int wcsncasecmp(const wchar_t *\fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *\fIws2\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+int wcsncasecmp_l(const wchar_t *\fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *\fIws2\fP,
+    size_t \fIn\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIwcscasecmp\fR()
+and
+\fIwcsncasecmp\fR()
+functions are the wide-character equivalent of the
+\fIstrcasecmp\fR()
+and
+\fIstrncasecmp\fR()
+functions, respectively.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcscasecmp\fR()
+and
+\fIwcscasecmp_l\fR()
+functions shall compare, while ignoring differences in case, the
+wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws1
+to the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws2 .
+.P
+The
+\fIwcsncasecmp\fR()
+and
+\fIwcsncasecmp_l\fR()
+functions shall compare, while ignoring differences in case, not more
+than
+.IR n
+wide-characters from the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws1
+to the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws2 .
+.P
+The
+\fIwcscasecmp\fR()
+and
+\fIwcsncasecmp\fR()
+functions use the current locale to determine the case of the wide
+characters.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcscasecmp_l\fR()
+and
+\fIwcsncasecmp_l\fR()
+functions use the locale represented by
+.IR locale
+to determine the case of the wide characters.
+.P
+When the
+.IR LC_CTIME
+category of the locale being used is from the POSIX locale, these
+functions shall behave as if the wide-character strings had been converted
+to lowercase and then a comparison of wide-character codes performed.
+Otherwise, the results are unspecified.
+.P
+The information for
+\fIwcscasecmp_l\fR()
+and
+\fIwcsncasecmp_l\fR()
+about the case of the characters comes from the locale represented by
+.IR locale .
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIwcscasecmp_l\fR()
+or
+\fIwcsncasecmp_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon completion, the
+\fIwcscasecmp\fR()
+and
+\fIwcscasecmp_l\fR()
+functions shall return an integer greater than, equal to, or less than 0
+if the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws1
+is, ignoring case, greater than, equal to, or less than the
+wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws2 ,
+respectively.
+.P
+Upon completion, the
+\fIwcsncasecmp\fR()
+and
+\fIwcsncasecmp_l\fR()
+functions shall return an integer greater than, equal to, or less than 0
+if the possibly null wide-character terminated string pointed to by
+.IR ws1
+is, ignoring case, greater than, equal to, or less than the possibly
+null wide-character terminated string pointed to by
+.IR ws2 ,
+respectively.
+.P
+No return values are reserved to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrcasecmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcscmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcsncmp\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcscat.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcscat.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3474716
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcscat.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSCAT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcscat
+\(em concatenate two wide-character strings
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wchar_t *wcscat(wchar_t *restrict \fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *restrict \fIws2\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcscat\fR()
+function shall append a copy of the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws2
+(including the terminating null wide-character code) to the end of the
+wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws1 .
+The initial wide-character code of
+.IR ws2
+shall overwrite the null wide-character code at the end of
+.IR ws1 .
+If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
+undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIwcscat\fR()
+function shall return
+.IR ws1 ;
+no return value is reserved to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwcsncat\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcschr.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcschr.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..30c60ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcschr.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSCHR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcschr
+\(em wide-character string scanning operation
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wchar_t *wcschr(const wchar_t *\fIws\fP, wchar_t \fIwc\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcschr\fR()
+function shall locate the first occurrence of
+.IR wc
+in the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws .
+The application shall ensure that the value of
+.IR wc
+is a character representable as a type
+.BR wchar_t
+and a wide-character code corresponding to a valid character in the
+current locale. The terminating null wide-character code is considered
+to be part of the wide-character string.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon completion,
+\fIwcschr\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the wide-character code, or a null pointer if
+the wide-character code is not found.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwcsrchr\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcscmp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcscmp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..53cdbee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcscmp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSCMP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcscmp
+\(em compare two wide-character strings
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int wcscmp(const wchar_t *\fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *\fIws2\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcscmp\fR()
+function shall compare the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws1
+to the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws2 .
+.P
+The sign of a non-zero return value shall be determined by the sign of
+the difference between the values of the first pair of wide-character
+codes that differ in the objects being compared.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon completion,
+\fIwcscmp\fR()
+shall return an integer greater than, equal to, or less than 0, if the
+wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws1
+is greater than, equal to, or less than the wide-character string
+pointed to by
+.IR ws2 ,
+respectively.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwcscasecmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcsncmp\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcscoll.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcscoll.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..43614a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcscoll.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSCOLL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcscoll,
+wcscoll_l
+\(em wide-character string comparison using collating information
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int wcscoll(const wchar_t *\fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *\fIws2\fP);
+int wcscoll_l(const wchar_t *\fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *\fIws2\fP,
+    locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIwcscoll\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcscoll\fR()
+and
+\fIwcscoll_l\fR()
+functions shall compare the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws1
+to the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws2 ,
+both interpreted as appropriate to the
+.IR LC_COLLATE
+category of the current locale,
+or the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcscoll\fR()
+and
+\fIwcscoll_l\fR()
+functions shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0 before calling
+\fIwcscoll\fR()
+or
+\fIwcscoll_l\fR().
+If
+.IR errno
+is non-zero on return, an error has occurred.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIwcscoll_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIwcscoll\fR()
+and
+\fIwcscoll_l\fR()
+shall return an integer greater than, equal to, or less than 0,
+according to whether the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws1
+is greater than, equal to, or less than the wide-character string
+pointed to by
+.IR ws2 ,
+when both are interpreted as appropriate to the current locale,
+or to the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively. On error,
+\fIwcscoll\fR()
+and
+\fIwcscoll_l\fR()
+shall set
+.IR errno ,
+but no return value is reserved to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR ws1
+or
+.IR ws2
+arguments contain wide-character codes outside the domain of the
+collating sequence.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIwcsxfrm\fR()
+and
+\fIwcscmp\fR()
+functions should be used for sorting large lists.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwcscmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcsxfrm\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcscpy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcscpy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0b021b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcscpy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSCPY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcpcpy, wcscpy
+\(em copy a wide-character string, returning a pointer to its end
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wchar_t *wcpcpy(wchar_t *restrict \fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *restrict \fIws2\fP);
+wchar_t *wcscpy(wchar_t *restrict \fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *restrict \fIws2\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIwcscpy\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcpcpy\fR()
+and
+\fIwcscpy\fR()
+functions shall copy the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws2
+(including the terminating null wide-character code) into the array
+pointed to by
+.IR ws1 .
+.P
+The application shall ensure that there is room for at least
+.IR wcslen (\c
+.IR ws2 )\(pl1
+wide characters in the
+.IR ws1
+array, and that the
+.IR ws2
+and
+.IR ws1
+arrays do not overlap.
+.P
+If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
+undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIwcpcpy\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to the terminating null wide-character
+code copied into the
+.IR ws1
+buffer.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcscpy\fR()
+function shall return
+.IR ws1 .
+.P
+No return values are reserved to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrcpy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcsdup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcsncpy\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcscspn.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcscspn.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2c39fd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcscspn.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSCSPN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcscspn
+\(em get the length of a complementary wide substring
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+size_t wcscspn(const wchar_t *\fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *\fIws2\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcscspn\fR()
+function shall compute the length (in wide characters) of the maximum
+initial segment of the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws1
+which consists entirely of wide-character codes
+.IR not
+from the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws2 .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIwcscspn\fR()
+function shall return the length of the initial substring of
+.IR ws1 ;
+no return value is reserved to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwcsspn\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsdup.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsdup.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..efd9ce2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsdup.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSDUP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcsdup
+\(em duplicate a wide-character string
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wchar_t *wcsdup(const wchar_t *\fIstring\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIwcsdup\fR()
+function is the wide-character equivalent of the
+\fIstrdup\fR()
+function.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcsdup\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to a new wide-character string,
+allocated as if by a call to
+\fImalloc\fR(),
+which is the duplicate of the wide-character string
+.IR string .
+The returned pointer can be passed to
+\fIfree\fR().
+A null pointer is returned if the new wide-character string cannot be
+created.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIwcsdup\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to the newly allocated wide-character
+string. Otherwise, it shall return a null pointer and set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIwcsdup\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ENOMEM
+Memory large enough for the duplicate string could not be allocated.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+For functions that allocate memory as if by
+\fImalloc\fR(),
+the application should release such memory when it is no longer
+required by a call to
+\fIfree\fR().
+For
+\fIwcsdup\fR(),
+this is the return value.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfree\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIstrdup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcscpy\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsftime.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsftime.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d4d557b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsftime.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSFTIME "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcsftime
+\(em convert date and time to a wide-character string
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+size_t wcsftime(wchar_t *restrict \fIwcs\fP, size_t \fImaxsize\fP,
+    const wchar_t *restrict \fIformat\fP, const struct tm *restrict \fItimeptr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcsftime\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIstrftime\fR()
+function, except that:
+.IP " *" 4
+The argument
+.IR wcs
+points to the initial element of an array of wide characters into which
+the generated output is to be placed.
+.IP " *" 4
+The argument
+.IR maxsize
+indicates the maximum number of wide characters to be placed in the
+output array.
+.IP " *" 4
+The argument
+.IR format
+is a wide-character string and the conversion specifications are
+replaced by corresponding sequences of wide characters.
+.IP " *" 4
+The return value indicates the number of wide characters placed in the
+output array.
+.P
+If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
+undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If the total number of resulting wide-character codes including the
+terminating null wide-character code is no more than
+.IR maxsize ,
+\fIwcsftime\fR()
+shall return the number of wide-character codes placed into the array
+pointed to by
+.IR wcs ,
+not including the terminating null wide-character code. Otherwise,
+zero is returned and the contents of the array are unspecified.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrftime\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcslen.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcslen.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f15b173
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcslen.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSLEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcslen, wcsnlen
+\(em get length of a fixed-sized wide-character string
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+size_t wcslen(const wchar_t *\fIws\fP);
+size_t wcsnlen(const wchar_t *\fIws\fP, size_t \fImaxlen\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIwcslen\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcslen\fR()
+function shall compute the number of wide-character codes in the
+wide-character string to which
+.IR ws
+points, not including the terminating null wide-character code.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcsnlen\fR()
+function shall compute the smaller of the number of wide characters in
+the string to which
+.IR ws
+points, not including the terminating null wide-character code, and the
+value of
+.IR maxlen .
+The
+\fIwcsnlen\fR()
+function shall never examine more than the first
+.IR maxlen
+characters of the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIwcslen\fR()
+function shall return the length of
+.IR ws .
+.P
+The
+\fIwcsnlen\fR()
+function shall return an integer containing the smaller of either the
+length of the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws
+or
+.IR maxlen .
+.P
+No return values are reserved to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrlen\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsncasecmp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsncasecmp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e77728f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsncasecmp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSNCASECMP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcsncasecmp,
+wcsncasecmp_l
+\(em case-insensitive wide-character string comparison
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int wcsncasecmp(const wchar_t *\fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *\fIws2\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+int wcsncasecmp_l(const wchar_t *\fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *\fIws2\fP,
+    size_t \fIn\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIwcscasecmp\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsncat.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsncat.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef2324f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsncat.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSNCAT "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcsncat
+\(em concatenate a wide-character string with part of another
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wchar_t *wcsncat(wchar_t *restrict \fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *restrict \fIws2\fP,
+    size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcsncat\fR()
+function shall append not more than
+.IR n
+wide-character codes (a null wide-character code and wide-character
+codes that follow it are not appended) from the array pointed to by
+.IR ws2
+to the end of the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws1 .
+The initial wide-character code of
+.IR ws2
+shall overwrite the null wide-character code at the end of
+.IR ws1 .
+A terminating null wide-character code shall always be appended to the
+result. If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the
+behavior is undefined.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIwcsncat\fR()
+function shall return
+.IR ws1 ;
+no return value is reserved to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwcscat\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsncmp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsncmp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0517cab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsncmp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSNCMP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcsncmp
+\(em compare part of two wide-character strings
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int wcsncmp(const wchar_t *\fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *\fIws2\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcsncmp\fR()
+function shall compare not more than
+.IR n
+wide-character codes (wide-character codes that follow a null
+wide-character code are not compared) from the array pointed to by
+.IR ws1
+to the array pointed to by
+.IR ws2 .
+.P
+The sign of a non-zero return value shall be determined by the sign of
+the difference between the values of the first pair of wide-character
+codes that differ in the objects being compared.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIwcsncmp\fR()
+shall return an integer greater than, equal to, or less than 0, if the
+possibly null-terminated array pointed to by
+.IR ws1
+is greater than, equal to, or less than the possibly null-terminated
+array pointed to by
+.IR ws2 ,
+respectively.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwcscasecmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcscmp\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsncpy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsncpy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d5b6383
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsncpy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSNCPY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcpncpy, wcsncpy
+\(em copy a fixed-size wide-character string, returning a pointer
+to its end
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wchar_t *wcpncpy(wchar_t restrict *\fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *restrict \fIws2\fP,
+    size_t \fIn\fP);
+wchar_t *wcsncpy(wchar_t *restrict \fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *restrict \fIws2\fP,
+    size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIwcsncpy\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcpncpy\fR()
+and
+\fIwcsncpy\fR()
+functions shall copy not more than
+.IR n
+wide-character codes (wide-character codes that follow a null
+wide-character code are not copied) from the array pointed to by
+.IR ws2
+to the array pointed to by
+.IR ws1 .
+If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
+undefined.
+.P
+If the array pointed to by
+.IR ws2
+is a wide-character string that is shorter than
+.IR n
+wide-character codes, null wide-character codes shall be appended to
+the copy in the array pointed to by
+.IR ws1 ,
+until
+.IR n
+wide-character codes in all are written.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If any null wide-character codes were written into the
+destination, the
+\fIwcpncpy\fR()
+function shall return the address of the first such null wide-character
+code. Otherwise, it shall return
+.IR &ws1 [ n ].
+.P
+The
+\fIwcsncpy\fR()
+function shall return
+.IR ws1 .
+.P
+No return values are reserved to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If there is no null wide-character code in the first
+.IR n
+wide-character codes of the array pointed to by
+.IR ws2 ,
+the result is not null-terminated.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIstrncpy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcscpy\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsnlen.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsnlen.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fdd919d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsnlen.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSNLEN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcsnlen
+\(em get length of a fixed-sized wide-character string
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+size_t wcsnlen(const wchar_t *\fIws\fP, size_t \fImaxlen\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIwcslen\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsnrtombs.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsnrtombs.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..51895d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsnrtombs.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSNRTOMBS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcsnrtombs
+\(em convert wide-character string to multi-byte string
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+size_t wcsnrtombs(char *restrict \fIdst\fP, const wchar_t **restrict \fIsrc\fP,
+    size_t \fInwc\fP, size_t \fIlen\fP, mbstate_t *restrict \fIps\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIwcsrtombs\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcspbrk.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcspbrk.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e2f8723
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcspbrk.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSPBRK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcspbrk
+\(em scan a wide-character string for a wide-character code
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wchar_t *wcspbrk(const wchar_t *\fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *\fIws2\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcspbrk\fR()
+function shall locate the first occurrence in the wide-character string
+pointed to by
+.IR ws1
+of any wide-character code from the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws2 .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIwcspbrk\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the wide-character code or a null pointer if
+no wide-character code from
+.IR ws2
+occurs in
+.IR ws1 .
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwcschr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcsrchr\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsrchr.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsrchr.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5b7ed7a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsrchr.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSRCHR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcsrchr
+\(em wide-character string scanning operation
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wchar_t *wcsrchr(const wchar_t *\fIws\fP, wchar_t \fIwc\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcsrchr\fR()
+function shall locate the last occurrence of
+.IR wc
+in the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws .
+The application shall ensure that the value of
+.IR wc
+is a character representable as a type
+.BR wchar_t
+and a wide-character code corresponding to a valid character in the
+current locale. The terminating null wide-character code shall be
+considered to be part of the wide-character string.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIwcsrchr\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the wide-character code or a null pointer if
+.IR wc
+does not occur in the wide-character string.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwcschr\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsrtombs.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsrtombs.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..99fd761
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsrtombs.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,165 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSRTOMBS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcsnrtombs, wcsrtombs
+\(em convert a wide-character string to a character string (restartable)
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+size_t wcsnrtombs(char *restrict \fIdst\fP, const wchar_t **restrict \fIsrc\fP,
+    size_t \fInwc\fP, size_t \fIlen\fP, mbstate_t *restrict \fIps\fP);
+size_t wcsrtombs(char *restrict \fIdst\fP, const wchar_t **restrict \fIsrc\fP,
+    size_t \fIlen\fP, mbstate_t *restrict \fIps\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIwcsrtombs\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcsrtombs\fR()
+function shall convert a sequence of wide characters from the array
+indirectly pointed to by
+.IR src
+into a sequence of corresponding characters, beginning in the
+conversion state described by the object pointed to by
+.IR ps .
+If
+.IR dst
+is not a null pointer, the converted characters shall then be
+stored into the array pointed to by
+.IR dst .
+Conversion continues up to and including a terminating null wide
+character, which shall also be stored. Conversion shall stop
+earlier in the following cases:
+.IP " *" 4
+When a code is reached that does not correspond to a valid character
+.IP " *" 4
+When the next character would exceed the limit of
+.IR len
+total bytes to be stored in the array pointed to by
+.IR dst
+(and
+.IR dst
+is not a null pointer)
+.P
+Each conversion shall take place as if by a call to the
+\fIwcrtomb\fR()
+function.
+.P
+If
+.IR dst
+is not a null pointer, the pointer object pointed to by
+.IR src
+shall be assigned either a null pointer (if conversion stopped due to
+reaching a terminating null wide character) or the address just past
+the last wide character converted (if any). If conversion stopped due
+to reaching a terminating null wide character, the resulting state
+described shall be the initial conversion state.
+.P
+If
+.IR ps
+is a null pointer, the
+\fIwcsrtombs\fR()
+function shall use its own internal
+.BR mbstate_t
+object, which is initialized at program start-up to the initial
+conversion state. Otherwise, the
+.BR mbstate_t
+object pointed to by
+.IR ps
+shall be used to completely describe the current conversion state of
+the associated character sequence.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcsnrtombs\fR()
+and
+\fIwcsrtombs\fR()
+functions need not be thread-safe if called with a NULL
+.IR ps
+argument.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcsnrtombs\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to the
+\fIwcsrtombs\fR()
+function, except that the conversion is limited to the first
+.IR nwc
+wide characters.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcsrtombs\fR()
+function shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.P
+The behavior of these functions shall be affected by the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category of the current locale.
+.P
+The implementation shall behave as if no function defined in System Interfaces volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+calls these functions.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If conversion stops because a code is reached that does not correspond
+to a valid character, an encoding error occurs. In this case, these
+functions shall store the value of the macro
+.BR [EILSEQ] 
+in
+.IR errno
+and return (\fBsize_t\fP)\(mi1; the conversion state is undefined.
+Otherwise, these functions shall return the number of bytes in the
+resulting character sequence, not including the terminating null (if any).
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EILSEQ
+A wide-character code does not correspond to a valid character.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+.IR ps
+points to an object that contains an invalid conversion state.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImbsinit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcrtomb\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsspn.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsspn.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..034dad3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsspn.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSSPN "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcsspn
+\(em get the length of a wide substring
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+size_t wcsspn(const wchar_t *\fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *\fIws2\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcsspn\fR()
+function shall compute the length (in wide characters) of the
+maximum initial segment of the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws1
+which consists entirely of wide-character codes from the wide-character
+string pointed to by
+.IR ws2 .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIwcsspn\fR()
+function shall return the length of the initial substring of
+.IR ws1 ;
+no return value is reserved to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwcscspn\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsstr.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsstr.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8bd8b60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsstr.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSSTR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcsstr
+\(em find a wide-character substring
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wchar_t *wcsstr(const wchar_t *restrict \fIws1\fP,
+    const wchar_t *restrict \fIws2\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcsstr\fR()
+function shall locate the first occurrence in the wide-character string
+pointed to by
+.IR ws1
+of the sequence of wide characters (excluding the terminating null wide
+character) in the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws2 .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIwcsstr\fR()
+shall return a pointer to the located wide-character string, or a null
+pointer if the wide-character string is not found.
+.P
+If
+.IR ws2
+points to a wide-character string with zero length, the function
+shall return
+.IR ws1 .
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwcschr\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstod.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstod.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a52ac29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstod.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,267 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSTOD "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcstod,
+wcstof,
+wcstold
+\(em convert a wide-character string to a double-precision number
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+double wcstod(const wchar_t *restrict \fInptr\fP, wchar_t **restrict \fIendptr\fP);
+float wcstof(const wchar_t *restrict \fInptr\fP, wchar_t **restrict \fIendptr\fP);
+long double wcstold(const wchar_t *restrict \fInptr\fP,
+    wchar_t **restrict \fIendptr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall convert the initial portion of the wide-character
+string pointed to by
+.IR nptr
+to
+.BR double ,
+.BR float ,
+and
+.BR "long double"
+representation, respectively. First, they shall decompose the input
+wide-character string into three parts:
+.IP " 1." 4
+An initial, possibly empty, sequence of white-space wide-character
+codes (as specified by
+\fIiswspace\fR())
+.IP " 2." 4
+A subject sequence interpreted as a floating-point constant or
+representing infinity or NaN
+.IP " 3." 4
+A final wide-character string of one or more unrecognized wide-character
+codes, including the terminating null wide-character code of the input
+wide-character string
+.P
+Then they shall attempt to convert the subject sequence to a
+floating-point number, and return the result.
+.P
+The expected form of the subject sequence is an optional
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+sign, then one of the following:
+.IP " *" 4
+A non-empty sequence of decimal digits optionally containing a radix
+character; then an optional exponent part consisting of the wide
+character
+.BR 'e' 
+or the wide character
+.BR 'E' ,
+optionally followed by a
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+wide character, and then followed by one or more decimal digits
+.IP " *" 4
+A 0x or 0X, then a non-empty sequence of hexadecimal digits optionally
+containing a radix character; then an optional binary exponent part
+consisting of the wide character
+.BR 'p' 
+or the wide character
+.BR 'P' ,
+optionally followed by a
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+wide character, and then followed by one or more decimal digits
+.IP " *" 4
+One of INF or INFINITY, or any other wide string equivalent except for
+case
+.IP " *" 4
+One of NAN or NAN(\fIn-wchar-sequence\s-3\dopt\u\s+3\fR), or any other
+wide string ignoring case in the NAN part, where:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+n-wchar-sequence:
+    digit
+    nondigit
+    n-wchar-sequence digit
+    n-wchar-sequence nondigit
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of
+the input wide string, starting with the first non-white-space wide
+character, that is of the expected form. The subject sequence contains
+no wide characters if the input wide string is not of the expected
+form.
+.P
+If the subject sequence has the expected form for a floating-point
+number, the sequence of wide characters starting with the first digit
+or the radix character (whichever occurs first) shall be interpreted as
+a floating constant according to the rules of the C language, except
+that the radix character shall be used in place of a period, and that
+if neither an exponent part nor a radix character appears in a decimal
+floating-point number, or if a binary exponent part does not appear in
+a hexadecimal floating-point number, an exponent part of the
+appropriate type with value zero shall be assumed to follow the last
+digit in the string. If the subject sequence begins with a minus-sign,
+the sequence shall be interpreted as negated. A wide-character sequence
+INF or INFINITY shall be interpreted as an infinity, if representable
+in the return type, else as if it were a floating constant that is too
+large for the range of the return type. A wide-character sequence NAN
+or NAN(\fIn-wchar-sequence\s-3\dopt\u\s+3\fR) shall be interpreted as a
+quiet NaN, if supported in the return type, else as if it were a
+subject sequence part that does not have the expected form; the meaning
+of the \fIn\fP-wchar sequences is implementation-defined. A pointer to
+the final wide string shall be stored in the object pointed to by
+.IR endptr ,
+provided that
+.IR endptr
+is not a null pointer.
+.P
+If the subject sequence has the hexadecimal form and FLT_RADIX is a
+power of 2, the conversion shall be rounded in an
+implementation-defined manner.
+.P
+The radix character shall be as defined in the current locale
+(category
+.IR LC_NUMERIC ).
+In the POSIX locale, or in a locale where the radix character is not
+defined, the radix character shall default to a
+<period>
+(\c
+.BR '.' ).
+.P
+In other than the C
+or POSIX
+locales, other implementation-defined subject sequences may be
+accepted.
+.P
+If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no
+conversion shall be performed; the value of
+.IR nptr
+shall be stored in the object pointed to by
+.IR endptr ,
+provided that
+.IR endptr
+is not a null pointer.
+.P
+These functions shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.P
+Since 0 is returned on error and is also a valid return on success,
+an application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0, then call
+\fIwcstod\fR(),
+\fIwcstof\fR(),
+or
+\fIwcstold\fR(),
+then check
+.IR errno .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the converted
+value. If no conversion could be performed, 0 shall be returned
+and
+.IR errno
+may be set to
+.BR [EINVAL] .
+.P
+If the correct value is outside the range of representable values,
+\(+-HUGE_VAL, \(+-HUGE_VALF, or \(+-HUGE_VALL shall be returned
+(according to the sign of the value), and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+.P
+If the correct value would cause underflow, a value whose magnitude is
+no greater than the smallest normalized positive number in the return
+type shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIwcstod\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+The value to be returned would cause overflow or underflow.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcstod\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+No conversion could be performed.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+If the subject sequence has the hexadecimal form and FLT_RADIX is not a
+power of 2, and the result is not exactly representable, the result
+should be one of the two numbers in the appropriate internal format
+that are adjacent to the hexadecimal floating source value, with the
+extra stipulation that the error should have a correct sign for the
+current rounding direction.
+.P
+If the subject sequence has the decimal form and at most DECIMAL_DIG
+(defined in
+.IR <float.h> )
+significant digits, the result should be correctly rounded. If the
+subject sequence \fID\fP has the decimal form and more than DECIMAL_DIG
+significant digits, consider the two bounding, adjacent decimal strings
+\fIL\fP and \fIU\fP, both having DECIMAL_DIG significant digits, such
+that the values of \fIL\fP, \fID\fP, and \fIU\fP satisfy
+.BR \(dqL <= D <= U\(dq .
+The result should be one of the (equal or adjacent) values that would
+be obtained by correctly rounding \fIL\fP and \fIU\fP according to the
+current rounding direction, with the extra stipulation that the error
+with respect to \fID\fP should have a correct sign for the current
+rounding direction.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfscanf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswspace\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlocaleconv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIsetlocale\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcstol\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 7" ", " "Locale",
+.IR "\fB<float.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstoimax.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstoimax.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8800679
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstoimax.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSTOIMAX "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcstoimax,
+wcstoumax
+\(em convert a wide-character string to an integer type
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <inttypes.h>
+.P
+intmax_t wcstoimax(const wchar_t *restrict \fInptr\fP,
+    wchar_t **restrict \fIendptr\fP, int \fIbase\fP);
+uintmax_t wcstoumax(const wchar_t *restrict \fInptr\fP,
+    wchar_t **restrict \fIendptr\fP, int \fIbase\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall be equivalent to the
+\fIwcstol\fR(),
+\fIwcstoll\fR(),
+\fIwcstoul\fR(),
+and
+\fIwcstoull\fR()
+functions, respectively, except that the initial portion of the wide
+string shall be converted to
+.BR intmax_t
+and
+.BR uintmax_t
+representation, respectively.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+These functions shall return the converted value, if any.
+.P
+If no conversion could be performed, zero shall be returned. If the
+correct value is outside the range of representable values,
+{INTMAX_MAX},
+{INTMAX_MIN},
+or
+{UINTMAX_MAX}
+shall be returned (according to the return type and sign of the value,
+if any), and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR base
+is not supported.
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+The value to be returned is not representable.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+No conversion could be performed.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwcstol\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcstoul\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<inttypes.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stddef.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstok.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstok.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f3d34d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstok.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,122 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSTOK "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcstok
+\(em split a wide-character string into tokens
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wchar_t *wcstok(wchar_t *restrict \fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *restrict \fIws2\fP,
+    wchar_t **restrict \fIptr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+A sequence of calls to
+\fIwcstok\fR()
+shall break the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws1
+into a sequence of tokens, each of which shall be delimited by a
+wide-character code from the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws2 .
+The
+.IR ptr
+argument points to a caller-provided
+.BR wchar_t
+pointer into which the
+\fIwcstok\fR()
+function shall store information necessary for it to continue
+scanning the same wide-character string.
+.P
+The first call in the sequence has
+.IR ws1
+as its first argument, and is followed by calls with a null pointer as
+their first argument. The separator string pointed to by
+.IR ws2
+may be different from call to call.
+.P
+The first call in the sequence shall search the wide-character string
+pointed to by
+.IR ws1
+for the first wide-character code that is
+.IR not
+contained in the current separator string pointed to by
+.IR ws2 .
+If no such wide-character code is found, then there are no tokens in
+the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws1
+and
+\fIwcstok\fR()
+shall return a null pointer. If such a wide-character code is found,
+it shall be the start of the first token.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcstok\fR()
+function shall then search from there for a wide-character code that
+.IR is
+contained in the current separator string. If no such wide-character
+code is found, the current token extends to the end of the
+wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws1 ,
+and subsequent searches for a token shall return a null pointer. If
+such a wide-character code is found, it shall be overwritten by a null
+wide character, which terminates the current token. The
+\fIwcstok\fR()
+function shall save a pointer to the following wide-character code,
+from which the next search for a token shall start.
+.P
+Each subsequent call, with a null pointer as the value of the first
+argument, shall start searching from the saved pointer and behave as
+described above.
+.P
+The implementation shall behave as if no function calls
+\fIwcstok\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIwcstok\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to the first wide-character code of a
+token. Otherwise, if there is no token,
+\fIwcstok\fR()
+shall return a null pointer.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstol.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstol.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3b9befb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstol.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,229 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSTOL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcstol,
+wcstoll
+\(em convert a wide-character string to a long integer
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+long wcstol(const wchar_t *restrict \fInptr\fP, wchar_t **restrict \fIendptr\fP,
+    int \fIbase\fP);
+long long wcstoll(const wchar_t *restrict \fInptr\fP,
+    wchar_t **restrict \fIendptr\fP, int \fIbase\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+These functions shall convert the initial portion of the wide-character
+string pointed to by
+.IR nptr
+to
+.BR long
+and
+.BR "long long" ,
+respectively. First, they shall decompose the input string into three
+parts:
+.IP " 1." 4
+An initial, possibly empty, sequence of white-space wide-character
+codes (as specified by
+\fIiswspace\fR())
+.IP " 2." 4
+A subject sequence interpreted as an integer represented in some radix
+determined by the value of
+.IR base
+.IP " 3." 4
+A final wide-character string of one or more unrecognized
+wide-character codes, including the terminating null wide-character
+code of the input wide-character string
+.P
+Then they shall attempt to convert the subject sequence to an
+integer, and return the result.
+.P
+If
+.IR base
+is 0, the expected form of the subject sequence is that of a decimal
+constant, octal constant, or hexadecimal constant, any of which may be
+preceded by a
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+sign. A decimal constant begins with a non-zero digit, and consists of
+a sequence of decimal digits. An octal constant consists of the prefix
+.BR '0' 
+optionally followed by a sequence of the digits
+.BR '0' 
+to
+.BR '7' 
+only. A hexadecimal constant consists of the prefix 0x or 0X followed
+by a sequence of the decimal digits and letters
+.BR 'a' 
+(or
+.BR 'A' )
+to
+.BR 'f' 
+(or
+.BR 'F' )
+with values 10 to 15 respectively.
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR base
+is between 2 and 36, the expected form of the subject sequence is a
+sequence of letters and digits representing an integer with the radix
+specified by
+.IR base ,
+optionally preceded by a
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+sign, but not including an integer suffix. The letters from
+.BR 'a' 
+(or
+.BR 'A' )
+to
+.BR 'z' 
+(or
+.BR 'Z' )
+inclusive are ascribed the values 10 to 35; only letters whose ascribed
+values are less than that of
+.IR base
+shall be permitted. If the value of
+.IR base
+is 16, the wide-character code representations of 0x or 0X may
+optionally precede the sequence of letters and digits, following the
+sign if present.
+.P
+The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of
+the input wide-character string, starting with the first
+non-white-space wide-character code that is of the expected form. The
+subject sequence contains no wide-character codes if the input
+wide-character string is empty or consists entirely of white-space
+wide-character code, or if the first non-white-space wide-character
+code is other than a sign or a permissible letter or digit.
+.P
+If the subject sequence has the expected form and
+.IR base
+is 0, the sequence of wide-character codes starting with the first
+digit shall be interpreted as an integer constant. If the subject
+sequence has the expected form and the value of
+.IR base
+is between 2 and 36, it shall be used as the base for conversion,
+ascribing to each letter its value as given above. If the subject
+sequence begins with a minus-sign, the value resulting from the
+conversion shall be negated. A pointer to the final wide-character
+string shall be stored in the object pointed to by
+.IR endptr ,
+provided that
+.IR endptr
+is not a null pointer.
+.P
+In other than the C
+or POSIX
+locales, other implementation-defined subject sequences may be
+accepted.
+.P
+If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no
+conversion shall be performed; the value of
+.IR nptr
+shall be stored in the object pointed to by
+.IR endptr ,
+provided that
+.IR endptr
+is not a null pointer.
+.P
+These functions shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.P
+Since 0,
+{LONG_MIN}
+or
+{LLONG_MIN}
+and
+{LONG_MAX}
+or
+{LLONG_MAX}
+are returned on error and are also valid returns on success, an
+application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0, then call
+\fIwcstol\fR()
+or
+\fIwcstoll\fR(),
+then check
+.IR errno .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the converted
+value, if any. If no conversion could be performed, 0 shall be returned
+and
+.IR errno
+may be set to indicate the error.
+If the correct value is outside the range of representable values,
+{LONG_MIN},
+{LONG_MAX},
+{LLONG_MIN},
+or
+{LLONG_MAX}
+shall be returned (according to the sign of the value), and
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR base
+is not supported.
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+The value to be returned is not representable.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+No conversion could be performed.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfscanf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcstod\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstold.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstold.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..19047ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstold.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSTOLD "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcstold
+\(em convert a wide-character string to a double-precision number
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+long double wcstold(const wchar_t *restrict \fInptr\fP,
+    wchar_t **restrict \fIendptr\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIwcstod\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstoll.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstoll.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1c49609
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstoll.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSTOLL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcstoll
+\(em convert a wide-character string to a long integer
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+long long wcstoll(const wchar_t *restrict \fInptr\fP,
+    wchar_t **restrict \fIendptr\fP, int \fIbase\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIwcstol\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstombs.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstombs.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f893097
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstombs.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSTOMBS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcstombs
+\(em convert a wide-character string to a character string
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+size_t wcstombs(char *restrict \fIs\fP, const wchar_t *restrict \fIpwcs\fP,
+    size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcstombs\fR()
+function shall convert the sequence of wide-character codes that are
+in the array pointed to by
+.IR pwcs
+into a sequence of characters that begins in the initial shift state
+and store these characters into the array pointed to by
+.IR s ,
+stopping if a character would exceed the limit of
+.IR n
+total bytes or if a null byte is stored. Each wide-character code
+shall be converted as if by a call to
+\fIwctomb\fR(),
+except that the shift state of
+\fIwctomb\fR()
+shall not be affected.
+.P
+The behavior of this function shall be affected by the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category of the current locale.
+.P
+No more than
+.IR n
+bytes shall be modified in the array pointed to by
+.IR s .
+If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
+undefined.
+If
+.IR s
+is a null pointer,
+\fIwcstombs\fR()
+shall return the length required to convert the entire array
+regardless of the value of
+.IR n ,
+but no values are stored.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If a wide-character code is encountered that does not correspond to a
+valid character (of one or more bytes each),
+\fIwcstombs\fR()
+shall return (\fBsize_t\fP)\(mi1. Otherwise,
+\fIwcstombs\fR()
+shall return the number of bytes stored in the character array, not
+including any terminating null byte. The array shall not be
+null-terminated if the value returned is
+.IR n .
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIwcstombs\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EILSEQ
+A wide-character code does not correspond to a valid character.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImblen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbtowc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbstowcs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwctomb\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstoul.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstoul.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee0d510
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstoul.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,231 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSTOUL "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcstoul,
+wcstoull
+\(em convert a wide-character string to an unsigned long
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+unsigned long wcstoul(const wchar_t *restrict \fInptr\fP,
+    wchar_t **restrict \fIendptr\fP, int \fIbase\fP);
+unsigned long long wcstoull(const wchar_t *restrict \fInptr\fP,
+    wchar_t **restrict \fIendptr\fP, int \fIbase\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcstoul\fR()
+and
+\fIwcstoull\fR()
+functions shall convert the initial portion of the wide-character
+string pointed to by
+.IR nptr
+to
+.BR "unsigned long"
+and
+.BR "unsigned long long"
+representation, respectively. First, they shall decompose the input
+wide-character string into three parts:
+.IP " 1." 4
+An initial, possibly empty, sequence of white-space wide-character
+codes (as specified by
+\fIiswspace\fR())
+.IP " 2." 4
+A subject sequence interpreted as an integer represented in some radix
+determined by the value of
+.IR base
+.IP " 3." 4
+A final wide-character string of one or more unrecognized
+wide-character codes, including the terminating null wide-character
+code of the input wide-character string
+.P
+Then they shall attempt to convert the subject sequence to an
+unsigned integer, and return the result.
+.P
+If
+.IR base
+is 0, the expected form of the subject sequence is that of a decimal
+constant, octal constant, or hexadecimal constant, any of which may be
+preceded by a
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+sign. A decimal constant begins with a non-zero digit, and consists of
+a sequence of decimal digits. An octal constant consists of the prefix
+.BR '0' 
+optionally followed by a sequence of the digits
+.BR '0' 
+to
+.BR '7' 
+only. A hexadecimal constant consists of the prefix 0x or 0X followed
+by a sequence of the decimal digits and letters
+.BR 'a' 
+(or
+.BR 'A' )
+to
+.BR 'f' 
+(or
+.BR 'F' )
+with values 10 to 15 respectively.
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR base
+is between 2 and 36, the expected form of the subject sequence is a
+sequence of letters and digits representing an integer with the radix
+specified by
+.IR base ,
+optionally preceded by a
+.BR '+' 
+or
+.BR '\(mi' 
+sign, but not including an integer suffix. The letters from
+.BR 'a' 
+(or
+.BR 'A' )
+to
+.BR 'z' 
+(or
+.BR 'Z' )
+inclusive are ascribed the values 10 to 35; only letters whose ascribed
+values are less than that of
+.IR base
+shall be permitted. If the value of
+.IR base
+is 16, the wide-character codes 0x or 0X may optionally precede the
+sequence of letters and digits, following the sign if present.
+.P
+The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of
+the input wide-character string, starting with the first wide-character
+code that is not white space and is of the expected form. The subject
+sequence contains no wide-character codes if the input wide-character
+string is empty or consists entirely of white-space wide-character
+codes, or if the first wide-character code that is not white space is
+other than a sign or a permissible letter or digit.
+.P
+If the subject sequence has the expected form and
+.IR base
+is 0, the sequence of wide-character codes starting with the first
+digit shall be interpreted as an integer constant. If the subject
+sequence has the expected form and the value of
+.IR base
+is between 2 and 36, it shall be used as the base for conversion,
+ascribing to each letter its value as given above. If the subject
+sequence begins with a minus-sign, the value resulting from the
+conversion shall be negated. A pointer to the final wide-character
+string shall be stored in the object pointed to by
+.IR endptr ,
+provided that
+.IR endptr
+is not a null pointer.
+.P
+In other than the C
+or POSIX
+locales, other implementation-defined subject sequences may be
+accepted.
+.P
+If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no
+conversion shall be performed; the value of
+.IR nptr
+shall be stored in the object pointed to by
+.IR endptr ,
+provided that
+.IR endptr
+is not a null pointer.
+.P
+These functions shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.P
+Since 0,
+{ULONG_MAX},
+and
+{ULLONG_MAX}
+are returned on error and 0 is also a valid return on success, an
+application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0, then call
+\fIwcstoul\fR()
+or
+\fIwcstoull\fR(),
+then check
+.IR errno .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, the
+\fIwcstoul\fR()
+and
+\fIwcstoull\fR()
+functions shall return the converted value, if any. If no conversion
+could be performed, 0 shall be returned
+and
+.IR errno
+may be set to indicate the error.
+If the correct value is outside the range of representable values,
+{ULONG_MAX}
+or
+{ULLONG_MAX}
+respectively shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The value of
+.IR base
+is not supported.
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+The value to be returned is not representable.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+No conversion could be performed.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfscanf\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIiswalpha\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcstod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcstol\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstoumax.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstoumax.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6e999b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcstoumax.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSTOUMAX "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcstoumax
+\(em convert a wide-character string to an integer type
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <inttypes.h>
+.P
+uintmax_t wcstoumax(const wchar_t *restrict \fInptr\fP,
+    wchar_t **restrict \fIendptr\fP, int \fIbase\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIwcstoimax\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcswidth.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcswidth.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1195140
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcswidth.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSWIDTH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcswidth
+\(em number of column positions of a wide-character string
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int wcswidth(const wchar_t *\fIpwcs\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIwcswidth\fR()
+function shall determine the number of column positions required for
+.IR n
+wide-character codes (or fewer than
+.IR n
+wide-character codes if a null wide-character code is encountered
+before
+.IR n
+wide-character codes are exhausted) in the string pointed to by
+.IR pwcs .
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIwcswidth\fR()
+function either shall return 0 (if
+.IR pwcs
+points to a null wide-character code), or return the number of column
+positions to be occupied by the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR pwcs ,
+or return \(mi1 (if any of the first
+.IR n
+wide-character codes in the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR pwcs
+is not a printable wide-character code).
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+This function was removed from the final ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1990/Amendment 1:\|1995 (E), and the return value
+for a non-printable wide character is not specified.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwcwidth\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 3.103" ", " "Column Position",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsxfrm.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsxfrm.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eee5259
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcsxfrm.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCSXFRM "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcsxfrm,
+wcsxfrm_l
+\(em wide-character string transformation
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+size_t wcsxfrm(wchar_t *restrict \fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *restrict \fIws2\fP,
+    size_t \fIn\fP);
+size_t wcsxfrm_l(wchar_t *restrict \fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *restrict \fIws2\fP,
+    size_t \fIn\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIwcsxfrm\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcsxfrm\fR()
+and
+\fIwcsxfrm_l\fR()
+functions shall transform the wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws2
+and place the resulting wide-character string into the array pointed to
+by
+.IR ws1 .
+The transformation shall be such that if
+\fIwcscmp\fR()
+is applied to two transformed wide strings, it shall return a value
+greater than, equal to, or less than 0, corresponding to the result of
+\fIwcscoll\fR()
+and
+\fIwcscoll_l\fR()
+applied to the same two original wide-character strings, and the same
+.IR LC_COLLATE
+category of the current locale
+or the locale object
+.IR locale ,
+respectively. No more than
+.IR n
+wide-character codes shall be placed into the resulting array pointed
+to by
+.IR ws1 ,
+including the terminating null wide-character code. If
+.IR n
+is 0,
+.IR ws1
+is permitted to be a null pointer. If copying takes place between
+objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
+.P
+The
+\fIwcsxfrm\fR()
+and
+\fIwcsxfrm_l\fR()
+functions shall not change the setting of
+.IR errno
+if successful.
+.P
+Since no return value is reserved to indicate an error, an
+application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to 0, then call
+\fIwcsxfrm\fR()
+or
+\fIwcsxfrm_l\fR(),
+then check
+.IR errno .
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIwcsxfrm_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIwcsxfrm\fR()
+and
+\fIwcsxfrm_l\fR()
+functions shall return the length of the transformed wide-character
+string (not including the terminating null wide-character code). If the
+value returned is
+.IR n
+or more, the contents of the array pointed to by
+.IR ws1
+are unspecified.
+.P
+On error, the
+\fIwcsxfrm\fR()
+and
+\fIwcsxfrm_l\fR()
+functions may set
+.IR errno ,
+but no return value is reserved to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The wide-character string pointed to by
+.IR ws2
+contains wide-character codes outside the domain of the collating
+sequence.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The transformation function is such that two transformed wide-character
+strings can be ordered by
+\fIwcscmp\fR()
+as appropriate to collating sequence information in the current locale
+(category
+.IR LC_COLLATE ).
+.P
+The fact that when
+.IR n
+is 0
+.IR ws1
+is permitted to be a null pointer is useful to determine the size of
+the
+.IR ws1
+array prior to making the transformation.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwcscmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcscoll\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wctob.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wctob.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9943bc7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wctob.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCTOB "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wctob
+\(em wide-character to single-byte conversion
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int wctob(wint_t \fIc\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwctob\fR()
+function shall determine whether
+.IR c
+corresponds to a member of the extended character set whose character
+representation is a single byte when in the initial shift state.
+.P
+The behavior of this function shall be affected by the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category of the current locale.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIwctob\fR()
+function shall return EOF if
+.IR c
+does not correspond to a character with length one in the initial shift
+state. Otherwise, it shall return the single-byte representation of
+that character as an
+.BR "unsigned char"
+converted to
+.BR int .
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIbtowc\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wctomb.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wctomb.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d24da98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wctomb.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,127 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCTOMB "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wctomb
+\(em convert a wide-character code to a character
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdlib.h>
+.P
+int wctomb(char *\fIs\fP, wchar_t \fIwchar\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwctomb\fR()
+function shall determine the number of bytes needed to represent the
+character corresponding to the wide-character code whose value is
+.IR wchar
+(including any change in the shift state). It shall store the character
+representation (possibly multiple bytes and any special bytes to change
+shift state) in the array object pointed to by
+.IR s
+(if
+.IR s
+is not a null pointer). At most
+{MB_CUR_MAX}
+bytes shall be stored. If
+.IR wchar
+is 0, a null byte shall be stored, preceded by any shift sequence
+needed to restore the initial shift state, and
+\fIwctomb\fR()
+shall be left in the initial shift state.
+.P
+The behavior of this function is affected by the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category of the current locale. For a state-dependent encoding, this
+function shall be placed into its initial state by a call for which its
+character pointer argument,
+.IR s ,
+is a null pointer. Subsequent calls with
+.IR s
+as other than a null pointer shall cause the internal state of the
+function to be altered as necessary. A call with
+.IR s
+as a null pointer shall cause this function to return a non-zero value
+if encodings have state dependency, and 0 otherwise. Changing the
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category causes the shift state of this function to be unspecified.
+.P
+The
+\fIwctomb\fR()
+function need not be thread-safe.
+.P
+The implementation shall behave as if no function defined in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008
+calls
+\fIwctomb\fR().
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+If
+.IR s
+is a null pointer,
+\fIwctomb\fR()
+shall return a non-zero or 0 value, if character encodings,
+respectively, do or do not have state-dependent encodings. If
+.IR s
+is not a null pointer,
+\fIwctomb\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 if the value of
+.IR wchar
+does not correspond to a valid character, or return the number of
+bytes that constitute the character corresponding to the value of
+.IR wchar .
+.P
+In no case shall the value returned be greater than the value of the
+{MB_CUR_MAX}
+macro.
+.SH ERRORS
+The
+\fIwctomb\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EILSEQ
+An invalid wide-character code is detected.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fImblen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbtowc\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fImbstowcs\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwcstombs\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<stdlib.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wctrans.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wctrans.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1a5313c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wctrans.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCTRANS "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wctrans,
+wctrans_l
+\(em define character mapping
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wctype.h>
+.P
+wctrans_t wctrans(const char *\fIcharclass\fP);
+wctrans_t wctrans_l(const char *\fIcharclass\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIwctrans\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwctrans\fR()
+and
+\fIwctrans_l\fR()
+functions are defined for valid character mapping names identified
+in the current locale. The
+.IR charclass
+is a string identifying a generic character mapping name for which
+codeset-specific information is required. The following character
+mapping names are defined in all locales:
+.BR tolower
+and
+.BR toupper .
+.P
+These functions shall return a value of type
+.BR wctrans_t ,
+which can be used as the second argument to subsequent calls of
+\fItowctrans\fR()
+and
+\fItowctrans_l\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIwctrans\fR()
+and
+\fIwctrans_l\fR()
+functions shall determine values of
+.BR wctrans_t
+according to the rules of the coded character set defined by character
+mapping information in the current locale
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively (category
+.IR LC_CTYPE ).
+.P
+The values returned by
+\fIwctrans\fR()
+shall be valid until a call to
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+that modifies the category
+.IR LC_CTYPE .
+.P
+The values returned by
+\fIwctrans_l\fR()
+shall be valid only in calls to
+\fItowctrans_l\fR()
+with a locale represented by
+.IR locale
+with the same
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category value.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIwctrans_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIwctrans\fR()
+and
+\fIwctrans_l\fR()
+functions shall return 0 and may set
+.IR errno
+to indicate the error if the given character mapping name is not valid
+for the current locale (category
+.IR LC_CTYPE );
+otherwise, they shall return a non-zero object of type
+.BR wctrans_t
+that can be used in calls to
+\fItowctrans\fR()
+and
+\fItowctrans_l\fR().
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The character mapping name pointed to by
+.IR charclass
+is not valid in the current locale.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fItowctrans\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wctype.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wctype.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7aed3fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wctype.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,166 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCTYPE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wctype,
+wctype_l
+\(em define character class
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wctype.h>
+.P
+wctype_t wctype(const char *\fIproperty\fP);
+wctype_t wctype_l(const char *\fIproperty\fP, locale_t \fIlocale\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+For
+\fIwctype\fR():
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwctype\fR()
+and
+\fIwctype_l\fR()
+functions are defined for valid character class names as defined
+in the current locale
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively.
+.P
+The
+.IR property
+argument is a string identifying a generic character class for which
+codeset-specific type information is required. The following character
+class names shall be defined in all locales:
+.sp
+.RS
+.TS
+tab(!);
+lB lB lB.
+T{
+.nf
+alnum
+alpha
+blank
+cntrl
+T}!T{
+.nf
+digit
+graph
+lower
+print
+T}!T{
+.nf
+punct
+space
+upper
+xdigit
+.fi
+T}
+.TE
+.RE
+.P
+Additional character class names defined in the locale definition file
+(category
+.IR LC_CTYPE )
+can also be specified.
+.P
+These functions shall return a value of type
+.BR wctype_t ,
+which can be used as the second argument to subsequent calls of
+\fIiswctype\fR()
+and
+\fIiswctype_l\fR().
+.P
+The
+\fIwctype\fR()
+and
+\fIwctype_l\fR()
+functions shall determine values of
+.BR wctype_t
+according to the rules of the coded character set defined by character
+type information in the current locale
+or in the locale represented by
+.IR locale ,
+respectively (category
+.IR LC_CTYPE ).
+.P
+The values returned by
+\fIwctype\fR()
+shall be valid until a call to
+\fIsetlocale\fR()
+that modifies the category
+.IR LC_CTYPE .
+.P
+The values returned by
+\fIwctype_l\fR()
+shall be valid only in calls to
+\fIiswctype_l\fR()
+with a locale represented by
+.IR locale
+with the same
+.IR LC_CTYPE
+category value.
+.P
+The behavior is undefined if the
+.IR locale
+argument to
+\fIwctype_l\fR()
+is the special locale object LC_GLOBAL_LOCALE or is not a valid locale
+object handle.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIwctype\fR()
+and
+\fIwctype_l\fR()
+functions shall return 0 if the given character class name is not
+valid for the current locale (category
+.IR LC_CTYPE );
+otherwise, they shall return an object of type
+.BR wctype_t
+that can be used in calls to
+\fIiswctype\fR()
+and
+\fIiswctype_l\fR().
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIiswctype\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wctype.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcwidth.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcwidth.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7424201
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wcwidth.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WCWIDTH "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wcwidth
+\(em number of column positions of a wide-character code
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int wcwidth(wchar_t \fIwc\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIwcwidth\fR()
+function shall determine the number of column positions required for
+the wide character
+.IR wc .
+The application shall ensure that the value of
+.IR wc
+is a character representable as a
+.BR wchar_t ,
+and is a wide-character code corresponding to a valid character in
+the current locale.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIwcwidth\fR()
+function shall either return 0 (if
+.IR wc
+is a null wide-character code), or return the number of column
+positions to be occupied by the wide-character code
+.IR wc ,
+or return \(mi1 (if
+.IR wc
+does not correspond to a printable wide-character code).
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+This function was removed from the final ISO/IEC\ 9899:\|1990/Amendment 1:\|1995 (E), and the return value
+for a non-printable wide character is not specified.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwcswidth\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wmemchr.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wmemchr.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ab27e57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wmemchr.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WMEMCHR "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wmemchr
+\(em find a wide character in memory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wchar_t *wmemchr(const wchar_t *\fIws\fP, wchar_t \fIwc\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwmemchr\fR()
+function shall locate the first occurrence of
+.IR wc
+in the initial
+.IR n
+wide characters of the object pointed to by
+.IR ws .
+This function shall not be affected by locale and all
+.BR wchar_t
+values shall be treated identically. The null wide character and
+.BR wchar_t
+values not corresponding to valid characters shall not be treated
+specially.
+.P
+If
+.IR n
+is zero, the application shall ensure that
+.IR ws
+is a valid pointer and the function behaves as if no valid
+occurrence of
+.IR wc
+is found.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIwmemchr\fR()
+function shall return a pointer to the located wide character, or a null
+pointer if the wide character does not occur in the object.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwmemcmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwmemcpy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwmemmove\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwmemset\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wmemcmp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wmemcmp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6b86191
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wmemcmp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WMEMCMP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wmemcmp
+\(em compare wide characters in memory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int wmemcmp(const wchar_t *\fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *\fIws2\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwmemcmp\fR()
+function shall compare the first
+.IR n
+wide characters of the object pointed to by
+.IR ws1
+to the first
+.IR n
+wide characters of the object pointed to by
+.IR ws2 .
+This function shall not be affected by locale and all
+.BR wchar_t
+values shall be treated identically. The null wide character and
+.BR wchar_t
+values not corresponding to valid characters shall not be treated
+specially.
+.P
+If
+.IR n
+is zero, the application shall ensure that
+.IR ws1
+and
+.IR ws2
+are valid pointers, and the function shall behave as if the two
+objects compare equal.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIwmemcmp\fR()
+function shall return an integer greater than, equal to, or less than
+zero, respectively, as the object pointed to by
+.IR ws1
+is greater than, equal to, or less than the object pointed to by
+.IR ws2 .
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwmemchr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwmemcpy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwmemmove\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwmemset\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wmemcpy.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wmemcpy.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3648a74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wmemcpy.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WMEMCPY "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wmemcpy
+\(em copy wide characters in memory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wchar_t *wmemcpy(wchar_t *restrict \fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *restrict \fIws2\fP,
+    size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwmemcpy\fR()
+function shall copy
+.IR n
+wide characters from the object pointed to by
+.IR ws2
+to the object pointed to by
+.IR ws1 .
+This function shall not be affected by locale and all
+.BR wchar_t
+values shall be treated identically. The null wide character and
+.BR wchar_t
+values not corresponding to valid characters shall not be treated
+specially.
+.P
+If
+.IR n
+is zero, the application shall ensure that
+.IR ws1
+and
+.IR ws2
+are valid pointers, and the function shall copy zero wide characters.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIwmemcpy\fR()
+function shall return the value of
+.IR ws1 .
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwmemchr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwmemcmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwmemmove\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwmemset\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wmemmove.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wmemmove.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..66d26e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wmemmove.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WMEMMOVE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wmemmove
+\(em copy wide characters in memory with overlapping areas
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wchar_t *wmemmove(wchar_t *\fIws1\fP, const wchar_t *\fIws2\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwmemmove\fR()
+function shall copy
+.IR n
+wide characters from the object pointed to by
+.IR ws2
+to the object pointed to by
+.IR ws1 .
+Copying shall take place as if the
+.IR n
+wide characters from the object pointed to by
+.IR ws2
+are first copied into a temporary array of
+.IR n
+wide characters that does not overlap the objects pointed to by
+.IR ws1
+or
+.IR ws2 ,
+and then the
+.IR n
+wide characters from the temporary array are copied into the object
+pointed to by
+.IR ws1 .
+.P
+This function shall not be affected by locale and all
+.BR wchar_t
+values shall be treated identically. The null wide character and
+.BR wchar_t
+values not corresponding to valid characters shall not be treated
+specially.
+.P
+If
+.IR n
+is zero, the application shall ensure that
+.IR ws1
+and
+.IR ws2
+are valid pointers, and the function shall copy zero wide characters.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIwmemmove\fR()
+function shall return the value of
+.IR ws1 .
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwmemchr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwmemcmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwmemcpy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwmemset\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wmemset.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wmemset.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c359e82
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wmemset.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WMEMSET "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wmemset
+\(em set wide characters in memory
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+wchar_t *wmemset(wchar_t *\fIws\fP, wchar_t \fIwc\fP, size_t \fIn\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The functionality described on this reference page is aligned with the
+ISO\ C standard. Any conflict between the requirements described here and the
+ISO\ C standard is unintentional. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 defers to the ISO\ C standard.
+.P
+The
+\fIwmemset\fR()
+function shall copy the value of
+.IR wc
+into each of the first
+.IR n
+wide characters of the object pointed to by
+.IR ws .
+This function shall not be affected by locale and all
+.BR wchar_t
+values shall be treated identically. The null wide character and
+.BR wchar_t
+values not corresponding to valid characters shall not be treated
+specially.
+.P
+If
+.IR n
+is zero, the application shall ensure that
+.IR ws
+is a valid pointer, and the function shall copy zero wide characters.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+The
+\fIwmemset\fR()
+functions shall return the value of
+.IR ws .
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIwmemchr\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwmemcmp\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwmemcpy\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwmemmove\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wchar.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wordexp.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wordexp.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..96090a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wordexp.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,489 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WORDEXP "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wordexp,
+wordfree
+\(em perform word expansions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <wordexp.h>
+.P
+int wordexp(const char *restrict \fIwords\fP, wordexp_t *restrict \fIpwordexp\fP,
+    int \fIflags\fP);
+void wordfree(wordexp_t *\fIpwordexp\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+function shall perform word expansions as described in the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.6" ", " "Word Expansions",
+subject to quoting as described in the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.2" ", " "Quoting",
+and place the list of expanded words into the structure pointed to by
+.IR pwordexp .
+.P
+The
+.IR words
+argument is a pointer to a string containing one or more words to be
+expanded. The expansions shall be the same as would be performed by the
+command line interpreter if
+.IR words
+were the part of a command line representing the arguments to a
+utility. Therefore, the application shall ensure that
+.IR words
+does not contain an unquoted
+<newline>
+character or any of the unquoted shell special characters
+.BR '|' ,
+.BR '&' ,
+.BR ';' ,
+.BR '<' ,
+.BR '>' 
+except in the context of command substitution as specified in the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.6.3" ", " "Command Substitution".
+It also shall not contain unquoted parentheses or braces, except
+in the context of command or variable substitution. The application
+shall ensure that every member of
+.IR words
+which it expects to have expanded by
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+does not contain an unquoted initial comment character. The application
+shall also ensure that any words which it intends to be ignored
+(because they begin or continue a comment) are deleted from
+.IR words .
+If the argument
+.IR words
+contains an unquoted comment character (\c
+<number-sign>)
+that is the beginning of a token,
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+shall either treat the comment character as a regular character, or
+interpret it as a comment indicator and ignore the remainder of
+.IR words .
+.P
+The structure type
+.BR wordexp_t
+is defined in the
+.IR <wordexp.h> 
+header and includes at least the following members:
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB | cB | cB
+lw(1.25i)B | lw(1.25i)I | lw(2.5i).
+Member Type!Member Name!Description
+_
+size_t!we_wordc!Count of words matched by \fIwords\fP.
+char **!we_wordv!Pointer to list of expanded words.
+size_t!we_offs!T{
+Slots to reserve at the beginning of \fIpwordexp\fP\->\fIwe_wordv\fR.
+T}
+.TE
+.P
+The
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+function shall store the number of generated words into
+\fIpwordexp\fP\->\fIwe_wordc\fP and a pointer to a list of pointers to
+words in \fIpwordexp\fP\->\fIwe_wordv\fP. Each individual field created
+during field splitting (see the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.6.5" ", " "Field Splitting")
+or pathname expansion (see the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.6.6" ", " "Pathname Expansion")
+shall be a separate word in the \fIpwordexp\fP\->\fIwe_wordv\fP
+list. The words shall be in order as described in the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.6" ", " "Word Expansions".
+The first pointer after the last word pointer shall be a null pointer.
+The expansion of special parameters described in the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.5.2" ", " "Special Parameters"
+is unspecified.
+.P
+It is the caller's responsibility to allocate the storage pointed to by
+.IR pwordexp .
+The
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+function shall allocate other space as needed, including memory
+pointed to by \fIpwordexp\fP\->\fIwe_wordv\fP. The
+\fIwordfree\fR()
+function frees any memory associated with
+.IR pwordexp
+from a previous call to
+\fIwordexp\fR().
+.P
+The
+.IR flags
+argument is used to control the behavior of
+\fIwordexp\fR().
+The value of
+.IR flags
+is the bitwise-inclusive OR of zero or more of the following constants,
+which are defined in
+.IR <wordexp.h> :
+.IP WRDE_APPEND 14
+Append words generated to the ones from a previous call to
+\fIwordexp\fR().
+.IP WRDE_DOOFFS 14
+Make use of \fIpwordexp\fP\->\fIwe_offs\fP. If this flag is set,
+\fIpwordexp\fP\->\fIwe_offs\fP is used to specify how many null
+pointers to add to the beginning of \fIpwordexp\fP\->\fIwe_wordv\fP.
+In other words, \fIpwordexp\fP\->\fIwe_wordv\fP shall point to
+\fIpwordexp\fP\->\fIwe_offs\fP null pointers, followed by
+\fIpwordexp\fP\->\fIwe_wordc\fP word pointers, followed by a null
+pointer.
+.IP WRDE_NOCMD 14
+If the implementation supports the utilities defined in the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+fail if command substitution, as specified in the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 2.6.3" ", " "Command Substitution",
+is requested.
+.IP WRDE_REUSE 14
+The
+.IR pwordexp
+argument was passed to a previous successful call to
+\fIwordexp\fR(),
+and has not been passed to
+\fIwordfree\fR().
+The result shall be the same as if the application had called
+\fIwordfree\fR()
+and then called
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+without WRDE_REUSE.
+.IP WRDE_SHOWERR 14
+Do not redirect
+.IR stderr
+to
+.BR /dev/null .
+.IP WRDE_UNDEF 14
+Report error on an attempt to expand an undefined shell variable.
+.P
+The WRDE_APPEND flag can be used to append a new set of words to those
+generated by a previous call to
+\fIwordexp\fR().
+The following rules apply to applications when two or more calls to
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+are made with the same value of
+.IR pwordexp
+and without intervening calls to
+\fIwordfree\fR():
+.IP " 1." 4
+The first such call shall not set WRDE_APPEND. All subsequent calls
+shall set it.
+.IP " 2." 4
+All of the calls shall set WRDE_DOOFFS, or all shall not set it.
+.IP " 3." 4
+After the second and each subsequent call,
+\fIpwordexp\fP\->\fIwe_wordv\fP shall point to a list containing the
+following:
+.RS 4 
+.IP " a." 4
+Zero or more null pointers, as specified by WRDE_DOOFFS and
+\fIpwordexp\fP\->\fIwe_offs\fP
+.IP " b." 4
+Pointers to the words that were in the \fIpwordexp\fP\->\fIwe_wordv\fP
+list before the call, in the same order as before
+.IP " c." 4
+Pointers to the new words generated by the latest call, in the
+specified order
+.RE
+.IP " 4." 4
+The count returned in \fIpwordexp\fP\->\fIwe_wordc\fP shall be the
+total number of words from all of the calls.
+.IP " 5." 4
+The application can change any of the fields after a call to
+\fIwordexp\fR(),
+but if it does it shall reset them to the original value before a
+subsequent call, using the same
+.IR pwordexp
+value, to
+\fIwordfree\fR()
+or
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+with the WRDE_APPEND or WRDE_REUSE flag.
+.P
+If the implementation supports the utilities defined in the Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+and
+.IR words
+contains an unquoted character\(em\c
+<newline>,
+.BR '|' ,
+.BR '&' ,
+.BR ';' ,
+.BR '<' ,
+.BR '>' ,
+.BR '(' ,
+.BR ')' ,
+.BR '{' ,
+.BR '}' \(em\c
+in an inappropriate context,
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+shall fail, and the number of expanded words shall be 0.
+.P
+Unless WRDE_SHOWERR is set in
+.IR flags ,
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+shall redirect
+.IR stderr
+to
+.BR /dev/null
+for any utilities executed as a result of command substitution while
+expanding
+.IR words .
+If WRDE_SHOWERR is set,
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+may write messages to
+.IR stderr
+if syntax errors are detected while expanding
+.IR words ;
+however, it is unspecified whether any write errors encountered while
+outputting such messages will affect the
+.IR stderr
+error indicator or the value of
+.IR errno .
+.P
+The application shall ensure that if WRDE_DOOFFS is set, then
+\fIpwordexp\fP\->\fIwe_offs\fP has the same value for each
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+call and
+\fIwordfree\fR()
+call using a given
+.IR pwordexp .
+.br
+.P
+The following constants are defined as error return values:
+.IP WRDE_BADCHAR 14
+One of the unquoted characters\(em\c
+<newline>,
+.BR '|' ,
+.BR '&' ,
+.BR ';' ,
+.BR '<' ,
+.BR '>' ,
+.BR '(' ,
+.BR ')' ,
+.BR '{' ,
+.BR '}' \(em\c
+appears in
+.IR words
+in an inappropriate context.
+.IP WRDE_BADVAL 14
+Reference to undefined shell variable when WRDE_UNDEF is set in
+.IR flags .
+.IP WRDE_CMDSUB 14
+Command substitution requested when WRDE_NOCMD was set in
+.IR flags .
+.IP WRDE_NOSPACE 14
+Attempt to allocate memory failed.
+.IP WRDE_SYNTAX 14
+Shell syntax error, such as unbalanced parentheses or unterminated
+string.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+shall return 0. Otherwise, a non-zero value, as described in
+.IR <wordexp.h> ,
+shall be returned to indicate an error. If
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+returns the value WRDE_NOSPACE, then \fIpwordexp\fP\->\fIwe_wordc\fP
+and \fIpwordexp\fP\->\fIwe_wordv\fP shall be updated to reflect any
+words that were successfully expanded. In other cases, they shall not
+be modified.
+.P
+The
+\fIwordfree\fR()
+function shall not return a value.
+.SH ERRORS
+No errors are defined.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+The
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+function is intended to be used by an application that wants to do all
+of the shell's expansions on a word or words obtained from a user. For
+example, if the application prompts for a pathname (or list of
+pathnames) and then uses
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+to process the input, the user could respond with anything that would
+be valid as input to the shell.
+.P
+The WRDE_NOCMD flag is provided for applications that, for security or
+other reasons, want to prevent a user from executing shell commands.
+Disallowing unquoted shell special characters also prevents unwanted
+side-effects, such as executing a command or writing a file.
+.P
+POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not require the
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+function to be thread-safe if passed an expression referencing an
+environment variable while any other thread is concurrently modifying
+any environment variable; see
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^".
+.P
+Even though the WRDE_SHOWERR flag allows the implementation to write
+messages to
+.IR stderr
+during command substitution or syntax errors, this standard does not
+provide any way to detect write failures during the output of such
+messages.
+.SH RATIONALE
+This function was included as an alternative to
+\fIglob\fR().
+There had been continuing controversy over exactly what features should
+be included in
+\fIglob\fR().
+It is hoped that by providing
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+(which provides all of the shell word expansions, but which may be slow
+to execute) and
+\fIglob\fR()
+(which is faster, but which only performs pathname expansion, without
+tilde or parameter expansion) this will satisfy the majority of
+applications.
+.P
+While
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+could be implemented entirely as a library routine, it is expected that
+most implementations run a shell in a subprocess to do the expansion.
+.P
+Two different approaches have been proposed for how the required
+information might be presented to the shell and the results returned.
+They are presented here as examples.
+.P
+One proposal is to extend the
+.IR echo
+utility by adding a
+.BR \(miq
+option. This option would cause
+.IR echo
+to add a
+<backslash>
+before each
+<backslash>
+and
+<blank>
+that occurs within an argument. The
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+function could then invoke the shell as follows:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+(void) strcpy(buffer, "echo -q");
+(void) strcat(buffer, \fIwords\fP);
+if ((flags & WRDE_SHOWERR) == 0)
+    (void) strcat(buffer, "2>/dev/null");
+f = popen(buffer, "r");
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+The
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+function would read the resulting output, remove unquoted
+<backslash>
+characters, and break into words at unquoted
+<blank>
+characters. If the WRDE_NOCMD flag was set,
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+would have to scan
+.IR words
+before starting the subshell to make sure that there would be no
+command substitution. In any case, it would have to scan
+.IR words
+for unquoted special characters.
+.P
+Another proposal is to add the following options to
+.IR sh :
+.IP "\fB\(miw\fP\ \fIwordlist\fR" 6
+.br
+This option provides a wordlist expansion service to applications. The
+words in
+.IR wordlist
+shall be expanded and the following written to standard output:
+.RS 6 
+.IP " 1." 4
+The count of the number of words after expansion, in decimal, followed
+by a null byte
+.IP " 2." 4
+The number of bytes needed to represent the expanded words (not
+including null separators), in decimal, followed by a null byte
+.IP " 3." 4
+The expanded words, each terminated by a null byte
+.P
+If an error is encountered during word expansion,
+.IR sh
+exits with a non-zero status after writing the former to report any
+words successfully expanded
+.RE
+.IP "\fB\(miP\fP" 6
+Run in ``protected'' mode. If specified with the
+.BR \(miw
+option, no command substitution shall be performed.
+.P
+With these options,
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+could be implemented fairly simply by creating a subprocess using
+\fIfork\fR()
+and executing
+.IR sh
+using the line:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+execl(<\fIshell path\fP>, "sh", "-P", "-w", \fIwords\fP, (char *)0);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+after directing standard error to
+.BR /dev/null .
+.P
+It seemed objectionable for a library routine to write messages to
+standard error, unless explicitly requested, so
+\fIwordexp\fR()
+is required to redirect standard error to
+.BR /dev/null
+to ensure that no messages are generated, even for commands executed
+for command substitution. The WRDE_SHOWERR flag can be specified to
+request that error messages be written.
+.P
+The WRDE_REUSE flag allows the implementation to avoid the expense of
+freeing and reallocating memory, if that is possible. A minimal
+implementation can call
+\fIwordfree\fR()
+when WRDE_REUSE is set.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIexec\fR\^",
+.IR "\fIfnmatch\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIglob\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<wordexp.h>\fP"
+.P
+The Shell and Utilities volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Chapter 2" ", " "Shell Command Language"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wprintf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wprintf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..85a89a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wprintf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WPRINTF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wprintf
+\(em print formatted wide-character output
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int wprintf(const wchar_t *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfwprintf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/write.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/write.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5a07dd4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/write.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,735 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WRITE "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+pwrite,
+write
+\(em write on a file
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <unistd.h>
+.P
+ssize_t pwrite(int \fIfildes\fP, const void *\fIbuf\fP, size_t \fInbyte\fP,
+    off_t \fIoffset\fP);
+ssize_t write(int \fIfildes\fP, const void *\fIbuf\fP, size_t \fInbyte\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIwrite\fR()
+function shall attempt to write
+.IR nbyte
+bytes from the buffer pointed to by
+.IR buf
+to the file associated with the open file descriptor,
+.IR fildes .
+.P
+Before any action described below is taken, and if
+.IR nbyte
+is zero and the file is a regular file, the
+\fIwrite\fR()
+function may detect and return errors as described below. In the
+absence of errors, or if error detection is not performed, the
+\fIwrite\fR()
+function shall return zero and have no other results. If
+.IR nbyte
+is zero and the file is not a regular file, the results are
+unspecified.
+.P
+On a regular file or other file capable of seeking, the actual writing
+of data shall proceed from the position in the file indicated by the
+file offset associated with
+.IR fildes .
+Before successful return from
+\fIwrite\fR(),
+the file offset shall be incremented by the number of bytes actually
+written. On a regular file, if the position of the last byte written
+is greater than or equal to the length of the file,
+the length of the file shall be set to this position plus one.
+.P
+On a file not capable of seeking, writing shall always take place
+starting at the current position. The value of a file offset associated
+with such a device is undefined.
+.P
+If the O_APPEND flag of the file status flags is set,
+the file offset shall be set to the end of the file prior to each write
+and no intervening file modification operation shall occur between
+changing the file offset and the write operation.
+.P
+If a
+\fIwrite\fR()
+requests that more bytes be written than there is room for (for
+example,
+the file size limit of the process or
+the physical end of a medium), only as many bytes as there is room for
+shall be written. For example, suppose there is space for 20 bytes more
+in a file before reaching a limit. A write of 512 bytes will return
+20. The next write of a non-zero number of bytes would give a failure
+return (except as noted below).
+.P
+If the request would cause the file size to exceed the soft file size
+limit for the process and there is no room for any bytes to be written,
+the request shall fail and the implementation shall generate the
+SIGXFSZ signal for the thread.
+.P
+If
+\fIwrite\fR()
+is interrupted by a signal before it writes any data, it shall
+return \(mi1 with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [EINTR] .
+.P
+If
+\fIwrite\fR()
+is interrupted by a signal after it successfully writes some data, it
+shall return the number of bytes written.
+.P
+If the value of
+.IR nbyte
+is greater than
+{SSIZE_MAX},
+the result is implementation-defined.
+.P
+After a
+\fIwrite\fR()
+to a regular file has successfully returned:
+.IP " *" 4
+Any successful
+\fIread\fR()
+from each byte position in the file that was modified by that write
+shall return the data specified by the
+\fIwrite\fR()
+for that position until such byte positions are again modified.
+.IP " *" 4
+Any subsequent successful
+\fIwrite\fR()
+to the same byte position in the file shall overwrite that file data.
+.br
+.P
+Write requests to a pipe or FIFO shall be handled in the same way
+as a regular file with the following exceptions:
+.IP " *" 4
+There is no file offset associated with a pipe, hence each write
+request shall append to the end of the pipe.
+.IP " *" 4
+Write requests of
+{PIPE_BUF}
+bytes or less shall not be interleaved with data from other processes
+doing writes on the same pipe. Writes of greater than
+{PIPE_BUF}
+bytes may have data interleaved, on arbitrary boundaries, with writes
+by other processes, whether or not the O_NONBLOCK flag of the file
+status flags is set.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the O_NONBLOCK flag is clear, a write request may cause the thread
+to block, but on normal completion it shall return
+.IR nbyte .
+.IP " *" 4
+If the O_NONBLOCK flag is set,
+\fIwrite\fR()
+requests shall be handled differently, in the following ways:
+.RS 4 
+.IP -- 4
+The
+\fIwrite\fR()
+function shall not block the thread.
+.IP -- 4
+A write request for
+{PIPE_BUF}
+or fewer bytes shall have the following effect: if there is sufficient
+space available in the pipe,
+\fIwrite\fR()
+shall transfer all the data and return the number of bytes requested.
+Otherwise,
+\fIwrite\fR()
+shall transfer no data and return \(mi1 with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [EAGAIN] .
+.IP -- 4
+A write request for more than
+{PIPE_BUF}
+bytes shall cause one of the following:
+.RS 4 
+.IP -- 4
+When at least one byte can be written, transfer what it can and return
+the number of bytes written. When all data previously written to the
+pipe is read, it shall transfer at least
+{PIPE_BUF}
+bytes.
+.IP -- 4
+When no data can be written, transfer no data, and return \(mi1 with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [EAGAIN] .
+.RE
+.RE
+.P
+When attempting to write to a file descriptor (other than a pipe or
+FIFO) that supports non-blocking writes and cannot accept the data
+immediately:
+.IP " *" 4
+If the O_NONBLOCK flag is clear,
+\fIwrite\fR()
+shall block the calling thread until the data can be accepted.
+.IP " *" 4
+If the O_NONBLOCK flag is set,
+\fIwrite\fR()
+shall not block the thread. If some data can be written without
+blocking the thread,
+\fIwrite\fR()
+shall write what it can and return the number of bytes written.
+Otherwise, it shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EAGAIN] .
+.P
+Upon successful completion, where
+.IR nbyte
+is greater than 0,
+\fIwrite\fR()
+shall mark for update the last data modification and last file
+status change timestamps of the file, and if the file is a regular file,
+the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits of the file mode may be cleared.
+.P
+For regular files, no data transfer shall occur past the offset maximum
+established in the open file description associated with
+.IR fildes .
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a socket,
+\fIwrite\fR()
+shall be equivalent to
+\fIsend\fR()
+with no flags set.
+.P
+If the O_DSYNC bit has been set,
+write I/O operations on the file descriptor shall complete as defined
+by synchronized I/O data integrity completion.
+.P
+If the O_SYNC bit has been set, write I/O operations on the file
+descriptor shall complete as defined by synchronized I/O file
+integrity completion.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a shared memory object, the result of the
+\fIwrite\fR()
+function is unspecified.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a typed memory object, the result of the
+\fIwrite\fR()
+function is unspecified.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a STREAM, the operation of
+\fIwrite\fR()
+shall be determined by the values of the minimum and maximum
+.IR nbyte
+range (packet size) accepted by the STREAM. These values are determined
+by the topmost STREAM module. If
+.IR nbyte
+falls within the packet size range,
+.IR nbyte
+bytes shall be written. If
+.IR nbyte
+does not fall within the range and the minimum packet size value is 0,
+\fIwrite\fR()
+shall break the buffer into maximum packet size segments prior to
+sending the data downstream (the last segment may contain less than the
+maximum packet size). If
+.IR nbyte
+does not fall within the range and the minimum value is non-zero,
+\fIwrite\fR()
+shall fail with
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+Writing a zero-length buffer (\c
+.IR nbyte
+is 0) to a STREAMS device sends 0 bytes with 0 returned. However,
+writing a zero-length buffer to a STREAMS-based pipe or FIFO sends no
+message and 0 is returned. The process may issue I_SWROPT
+\fIioctl\fR()
+to enable zero-length messages to be sent across the pipe or FIFO.
+.P
+When writing to a STREAM, data messages are created with a priority
+band of 0. When writing to a STREAM that is not a pipe or FIFO:
+.IP " *" 4
+If O_NONBLOCK is clear, and the STREAM cannot accept data (the STREAM
+write queue is full due to internal flow control conditions),
+\fIwrite\fR()
+shall block until data can be accepted.
+.IP " *" 4
+If O_NONBLOCK is set and the STREAM cannot accept data,
+\fIwrite\fR()
+shall return \(mi1 and set
+.IR errno
+to
+.BR [EAGAIN] .
+.IP " *" 4
+If O_NONBLOCK is set and part of the buffer has been written while a
+condition in which the STREAM cannot accept additional data occurs,
+\fIwrite\fR()
+shall terminate and return the number of bytes written.
+.P
+In addition,
+\fIwrite\fR()
+shall fail if the STREAM head has processed an asynchronous error
+before the call. In this case, the value of
+.IR errno
+does not reflect the result of
+\fIwrite\fR(),
+but reflects the prior error.
+.P
+The
+\fIpwrite\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIwrite\fR(),
+except that it writes into a given position and does not change the
+file offset (regardless of whether O_APPEND is set). The first three
+arguments to
+\fIpwrite\fR()
+are the same as
+\fIwrite\fR()
+with the addition of a fourth argument
+.IR offset
+for the desired position inside the file. An attempt to perform a
+\fIpwrite\fR()
+on a file that is incapable of seeking shall result in an error.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the number of
+bytes actually written to the file associated with
+.IR fildes .
+This number shall never be greater than
+.IR nbyte .
+Otherwise, \(mi1 shall be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to indicate the error.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The file is neither a pipe, nor a FIFO, nor a socket, the O_NONBLOCK flag
+is set for the file descriptor, and the thread would be delayed in the
+\fIwrite\fR()
+operation.
+.TP
+.BR EBADF
+The
+.IR fildes
+argument is not a valid file descriptor open for writing.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+An attempt was made to write a file that exceeds the
+implementation-defined maximum file size
+or the file size limit of the process,
+and there was no room for any bytes to be written.
+.TP
+.BR EFBIG
+The file is a regular file,
+.IR nbyte
+is greater than 0, and the starting position is greater than or equal
+to the offset maximum established in the open file description
+associated with
+.IR fildes .
+.TP
+.BR EINTR
+The write operation was terminated due to the receipt of a signal, and
+no data was transferred.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+The process is a member of a background process group attempting to
+write to its controlling terminal, TOSTOP is set, the calling thread
+is not blocking SIGTTOU, the process is not ignoring SIGTTOU,
+and the process group of the process is orphaned. This error may also
+be returned under implementation-defined conditions.
+.TP
+.BR ENOSPC
+There was no free space remaining on the device containing the file.
+.TP
+.BR ERANGE
+The transfer request size was outside the range supported by the
+STREAMS file associated with
+.IR fildes .
+.P
+The
+\fIpwrite\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The file is a regular file or block special file, and the
+.IR offset
+argument is negative. The file pointer shall remain unchanged.
+.TP
+.BR ESPIPE
+The file is a pipe, FIFO, or socket.
+.P
+The
+\fIwrite\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN
+The file is a pipe or FIFO, the O_NONBLOCK flag is set for the file
+descriptor, and the thread would be delayed in the write operation.
+.TP
+.BR EAGAIN " or " EWOULDBLOCK
+.br
+The file is a socket, the O_NONBLOCK flag is set for the file
+descriptor, and the thread would be delayed in the write operation.
+.TP
+.BR ECONNRESET
+A write was attempted on a socket that is not connected.
+.TP
+.BR EPIPE
+An attempt is made to write to a pipe or FIFO that is not open for
+reading by any process, or that only has one end open. A SIGPIPE signal
+shall also be sent to the thread.
+.TP
+.BR EPIPE
+A write was attempted on a socket that is shut down for writing, or is
+no longer connected. In the latter case, if the socket is of type
+SOCK_STREAM, a SIGPIPE signal shall also be sent to the thread.
+.P
+These functions may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The STREAM or multiplexer referenced by
+.IR fildes
+is linked (directly or indirectly) downstream from a multiplexer.
+.TP
+.BR EIO
+A physical I/O error has occurred.
+.TP
+.BR ENOBUFS
+Insufficient resources were available in the system to perform the
+operation.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+A request was made of a nonexistent device, or the request was outside
+the capabilities of the device.
+.TP
+.BR ENXIO
+A hangup occurred on the STREAM being written to.
+.P
+A write to a STREAMS file may fail if an error message has been
+received at the STREAM head. In this case,
+.IR errno
+is set to the value included in the error message.
+.br
+.P
+The
+\fIwrite\fR()
+function may fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EACCES
+A write was attempted on a socket and the calling
+process does not have appropriate privileges.
+.TP
+.BR ENETDOWN
+A write was attempted on a socket and the local network interface used
+to reach the destination is down.
+.TP
+.BR ENETUNREACH
+.br
+A write was attempted on a socket and no route to the network is
+present.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Writing from a Buffer"
+.P
+The following example writes data from the buffer pointed to by
+.IR buf
+to the file associated with the file descriptor
+.IR fd .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <string.h>
+\&...
+char buf[20];
+size_t nbytes;
+ssize_t bytes_written;
+int fd;
+\&...
+strcpy(buf, "This is a test\en");
+nbytes = strlen(buf);
+.P
+bytes_written = write(fd, buf, nbytes);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+See also the RATIONALE section in
+\fIread\fR().
+.P
+An attempt to write to a pipe or FIFO has several major
+characteristics:
+.IP " *" 4
+\fIAtomic/non-atomic\fP: A write is atomic if the whole amount written
+in one operation is not interleaved with data from any other process.
+This is useful when there are multiple writers sending data to a single
+reader. Applications need to know how large a write request can be
+expected to be performed atomically. This maximum is called
+{PIPE_BUF}.
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not say whether write requests for more than
+{PIPE_BUF}
+bytes are atomic, but requires that writes of
+{PIPE_BUF}
+or fewer bytes shall be atomic.
+.IP " *" 4
+\fIBlocking/immediate\fP: Blocking is only possible with O_NONBLOCK
+clear. If there is enough space for all the data requested to be
+written immediately, the implementation should do so. Otherwise, the
+calling thread may block; that is, pause until enough space is
+available for writing. The effective size of a pipe or FIFO (the
+maximum amount that can be written in one operation without blocking)
+may vary dynamically, depending on the implementation, so it is not
+possible to specify a fixed value for it.
+.IP " *" 4
+\fIComplete/partial/deferred\fP: A write request:
+.RS 4 
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+int fildes;
+size_t nbyte;
+ssize_t ret;
+char *buf;
+.P
+ret = write(fildes, buf, nbyte);
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.P
+may return:
+.IP Complete 10
+\fIret\fP=\fInbyte\fP
+.IP Partial 10
+\fIret\fP<\fInbyte\fP
+.RS 10 
+.P
+This shall never happen if
+.IR nbyte \(<=\c
+{PIPE_BUF}.
+If it does happen (with
+.IR nbyte >\c
+{PIPE_BUF}),
+\&this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not guarantee atomicity, even if
+.IR ret \(<=\c
+{PIPE_BUF},
+because atomicity is guaranteed according to the amount
+.IR requested ,
+not the amount
+.IR written .
+.RE
+.IP Deferred: 10
+\fIret\fP=\(mi1, \fIerrno\fP=[EAGAIN]
+.RS 10 
+.P
+This error indicates that a later request may succeed. It does not
+indicate that it
+.IR shall
+succeed, even if
+.IR nbyte \(<=\c
+{PIPE_BUF},
+because if no process reads from the pipe or FIFO, the write never
+succeeds. An application could usefully count the number of times
+.BR [EAGAIN] 
+is caused by a particular value of
+.IR nbyte >\c
+{PIPE_BUF}
+and perhaps do later writes with a smaller value, on the assumption
+that the effective size of the pipe may have decreased.
+.RE
+.P
+Partial and deferred writes are only possible with O_NONBLOCK set.
+.RE
+.P
+The relations of these properties are shown in the following tables:
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB s s s
+cB | cB cB c
+l1 | lw(1.25i)1 lw(1.25i)1 lw(1.25i).
+Write to a Pipe or FIFO with O_NONBLOCK \fIclear\fP
+_
+Immediately Writable:!None!Some!\fInbyte\fP
+_
+\fInbyte\fP\(<={PIPE_BUF}!Atomic blocking!Atomic blocking!Atomic immediate
+!\fInbyte\fP!\fInbyte\fP!\fInbyte\fP
+_
+\fInbyte\fP>{PIPE_BUF}!Blocking \fInbyte\fP!Blocking \fInbyte\fP!Blocking \fInbyte\fP
+.TE
+.P
+If the O_NONBLOCK flag is clear, a write request shall block if the
+amount writable immediately is less than that requested. If the flag is
+set (by
+\fIfcntl\fR()),
+a write request shall never block.
+.TS
+center box tab(!);
+cB s s s
+cB | cB cB c
+l1 | lw(1.25i)1 lw(1.25i)1 lw(1.25i).
+Write to a Pipe or FIFO with O_NONBLOCK \fIset\fP
+_
+Immediately Writable:!None!Some!\fInbyte\fP
+_
+\fInbyte\fP\(<={PIPE_BUF}!\(mi1, [EAGAIN]!\(mi1, [EAGAIN]!Atomic \fInbyte\fP
+_
+\fInbyte\fP>{PIPE_BUF}!\(mi1, [EAGAIN]!<\fInbyte\fP or \(mi1,!\(<=\fInbyte\fP or \(mi1,
+!![EAGAIN]![EAGAIN]
+.TE
+.P
+There is no exception regarding partial writes when O_NONBLOCK is set.
+With the exception of writing to an empty pipe, this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not specify
+exactly when a partial write is performed since that would require
+specifying internal details of the implementation. Every application
+should be prepared to handle partial writes when O_NONBLOCK is set and
+the requested amount is greater than
+{PIPE_BUF},
+just as every application should be prepared to handle partial writes
+on other kinds of file descriptors.
+.P
+The intent of forcing writing at least one byte if any can be written
+is to assure that each write makes progress if there is any room in the
+pipe. If the pipe is empty,
+{PIPE_BUF}
+bytes must be written; if not, at least some progress must have been
+made.
+.P
+Where this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 requires \(mi1 to be returned and
+.IR errno
+set to
+.BR [EAGAIN] ,
+most historical implementations return zero (with the O_NDELAY
+flag set, which is the historical predecessor of O_NONBLOCK, but is not
+itself in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008). The error indications in this volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 were chosen so that an
+application can distinguish these cases from end-of-file. While
+\fIwrite\fR()
+cannot receive an indication of end-of-file,
+\fIread\fR()
+can, and the two functions have similar return values. Also, some
+existing systems (for example, Eighth Edition) permit a write of zero
+bytes to
+mean that the reader should get an end-of-file indication; for those
+systems, a return value of zero from
+\fIwrite\fR()
+indicates a successful write of an end-of-file indication.
+.P
+Implementations are allowed, but not required, to perform error
+checking for
+\fIwrite\fR()
+requests of zero bytes.
+.P
+The concept of a
+{PIPE_MAX}
+limit (indicating the maximum number of bytes that can be written to a
+pipe in a single operation) was considered, but rejected, because this
+concept would unnecessarily limit application writing.
+.P
+See also the discussion of O_NONBLOCK in
+\fIread\fR().
+.P
+Writes can be serialized with respect to other reads and writes. If a
+\fIread\fR()
+of file data can be proven (by any means) to occur after a
+\fIwrite\fR()
+of the data, it must reflect that
+\fIwrite\fR(),
+even if the calls are made by different processes. A similar
+requirement applies to multiple write operations to the same file
+position. This is needed to guarantee the propagation of data from
+\fIwrite\fR()
+calls to subsequent
+\fIread\fR()
+calls. This requirement is particularly significant for networked file
+systems, where some caching schemes violate these semantics.
+.P
+Note that this is specified in terms of
+\fIread\fR()
+and
+\fIwrite\fR().
+The XSI extensions
+\fIreadv\fR()
+and
+\fIwritev\fR()
+also obey these semantics. A new ``high-performance'' write
+analog that did not follow these serialization requirements would also
+be permitted by this wording. This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 is also silent about any effects of
+application-level caching (such as that done by
+.IR stdio ).
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not specify the value of the file offset after an error is
+returned; there are too many cases. For programming errors, such as
+.BR [EBADF] ,
+the concept is meaningless since no file is involved. For errors that
+are detected immediately, such as
+.BR [EAGAIN] ,
+clearly the pointer should not change. After an interrupt or hardware
+error, however, an updated value would be very useful and is the
+behavior of many implementations.
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 does not specify behavior of concurrent writes to a file from
+multiple processes. Applications should use some form of concurrency
+control.
+.P
+This volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008 intentionally does not specify any
+\fIpwrite\fR()
+errors related to pipes, FIFOs, and sockets other than
+.BR [ESPIPE] .
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIchmod\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIcreat\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIdup\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfcntl\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIgetrlimit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIlseek\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIopen\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIpipe\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIread\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIulimit\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwritev\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<limits.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<stropts.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_uio.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<unistd.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/writev.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/writev.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e16e7f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/writev.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WRITEV "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+writev
+\(em write a vector
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <sys/uio.h>
+.P
+ssize_t writev(int \fIfildes\fP, const struct iovec *\fIiov\fP, int \fIiovcnt\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIwritev\fR()
+function shall be equivalent to
+\fIwrite\fR(),
+except as described below. The
+\fIwritev\fR()
+function shall gather output data from the
+.IR iovcnt
+buffers specified by the members of the
+.IR iov
+array:
+.IR iov [0],
+.IR iov [1],
+\&.\|.\|., \fIiov\fR[\fIiovcnt\fR\(mi1].
+The
+.IR iovcnt
+argument is valid if greater than 0 and less than or equal to
+{IOV_MAX},
+as defined in
+.IR <limits.h> .
+.P
+Each
+.IR iovec
+entry specifies the base address and length of an area in memory from
+which data should be written. The
+\fIwritev\fR()
+function shall always write a complete area before proceeding to the
+next.
+.P
+If
+.IR fildes
+refers to a regular file and all of the
+.IR iov_len
+members in the array pointed to by
+.IR iov
+are 0,
+\fIwritev\fR()
+shall return 0 and have no other effect. For other file types, the
+behavior is unspecified.
+.P
+If the sum of the
+.IR iov_len
+values is greater than
+{SSIZE_MAX},
+the operation shall fail and no data shall be transferred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion,
+\fIwritev\fR()
+shall return the number of bytes actually written. Otherwise, it shall
+return a value of \(mi1, the file-pointer shall remain unchanged, and
+.IR errno
+shall be set to indicate an error.
+.SH ERRORS
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)".
+.P
+In addition, the
+\fIwritev\fR()
+function shall fail if:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The sum of the
+.IR iov_len
+values in the
+.IR iov
+array would overflow an
+.BR ssize_t .
+.P
+The
+\fIwritev\fR()
+function may fail and set
+.IR errno
+to:
+.TP
+.BR EINVAL
+The
+.IR iovcnt
+argument was less than or equal to 0, or greater than
+{IOV_MAX}.
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.SS "Writing Data from an Array"
+.P
+The following example writes data from the buffers specified by members
+of the
+.IR iov
+array to the file associated with the file descriptor
+.IR fd .
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.nf
+\fB
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/uio.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+\&...
+ssize_t bytes_written;
+int fd;
+char *buf0 = "short string\en";
+char *buf1 = "This is a longer string\en";
+char *buf2 = "This is the longest string in this example\en";
+int iovcnt;
+struct iovec iov[3];
+.P
+iov[0].iov_base = buf0;
+iov[0].iov_len = strlen(buf0);
+iov[1].iov_base = buf1;
+iov[1].iov_len = strlen(buf1);
+iov[2].iov_base = buf2;
+iov[2].iov_len = strlen(buf2);
+\&...
+iovcnt = sizeof(iov) / sizeof(struct iovec);
+.P
+bytes_written = writev(fd, iov, iovcnt);
+\&...
+.fi \fR
+.P
+.RE
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+None.
+.SH RATIONALE
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIreadv\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIwrite\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "\fB<limits.h>\fP",
+.IR "\fB<sys_uio.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wscanf.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wscanf.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1cc0b3e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/wscanf.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\" et
+.TH WSCANF "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+wscanf
+\(em convert formatted wide-character input
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <wchar.h>
+.P
+int wscanf(const wchar_t *restrict \fIformat\fP, ...);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Refer to
+.IR "\fIfwscanf\fR\^(\|)".
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .
diff --git a/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/y0.3p b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/y0.3p
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..470a1ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man-pages-posix-2013/man3p/y0.3p
@@ -0,0 +1,162 @@
+'\" et
+.TH Y0 "3P" 2013 "IEEE/The Open Group" "POSIX Programmer's Manual"
+.SH PROLOG
+This manual page is part of the POSIX Programmer's Manual.
+The Linux implementation of this interface may differ (consult
+the corresponding Linux manual page for details of Linux behavior),
+or the interface may not be implemented on Linux.
+
+.SH NAME
+y0,
+y1,
+yn
+\(em Bessel functions of the second kind
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.LP
+.nf
+#include <math.h>
+.P
+double y0(double \fIx\fP);
+double y1(double \fIx\fP);
+double yn(int \fIn\fP, double \fIx\fP);
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+\fIy0\fR(),
+\fIy1\fR(),
+and
+\fIyn\fR()
+functions shall compute Bessel functions of
+.IR x
+of the second kind of orders 0, 1, and
+.IR n ,
+respectively.
+.P
+An application wishing to check for error situations should set
+.IR errno
+to zero and call
+.IR feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT)
+before calling these functions. On return, if
+.IR errno
+is non-zero or \fIfetestexcept\fR(FE_INVALID | FE_DIVBYZERO |
+FE_OVERFLOW | FE_UNDERFLOW) is non-zero, an error has occurred.
+.SH "RETURN VALUE"
+Upon successful completion, these functions shall return the relevant
+Bessel value of
+.IR x
+of the second kind.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is NaN, NaN shall be returned.
+.P
+If the
+.IR x
+argument to these functions is negative, \(miHUGE_VAL or NaN shall be
+returned, and a domain error may occur.
+.P
+If
+.IR x
+is 0.0, \(miHUGE_VAL shall be returned and a pole error may occur.
+.P
+If the correct result would cause underflow, 0.0 shall be returned and
+a range error may occur.
+.P
+If the correct result would cause overflow, \(miHUGE_VAL or 0.0 shall
+be returned and a range error may occur.
+.SH ERRORS
+These functions may fail if:
+.IP "Domain\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is negative.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [EDOM] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the invalid floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.IP "Pole\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is zero.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the divide-by-zero floating-point exception shall be
+raised.
+.RE
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The correct result would cause overflow.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the overflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.IP "Range\ Error" 12
+The value of
+.IR x
+is too large in magnitude, or the correct result would cause
+underflow.
+.RS 12 
+.P
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) is
+non-zero, then
+.IR errno
+shall be set to
+.BR [ERANGE] .
+If the integer expression (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) is
+non-zero, then the underflow floating-point exception shall be raised.
+.RE
+.LP
+.IR "The following sections are informative."
+.SH EXAMPLES
+None.
+.SH "APPLICATION USAGE"
+On error, the expressions (\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERRNO) and
+(\fImath_errhandling\fR & MATH_ERREXCEPT) are independent of each
+other, but at least one of them must be non-zero.
+.SH RATIONALE
+None.
+.SH "FUTURE DIRECTIONS"
+None.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.IR "\fIfeclearexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIfetestexcept\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIisnan\fR\^(\|)",
+.IR "\fIj0\fR\^(\|)"
+.P
+The Base Definitions volume of POSIX.1\(hy2008,
+.IR "Section 4.19" ", " "Treatment of Error Conditions for Mathematical Functions",
+.IR "\fB<math.h>\fP"
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form
+from IEEE Std 1003.1, 2013 Edition, Standard for Information Technology
+-- Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), The Open Group Base
+Specifications Issue 7, Copyright (C) 2013 by the Institute of
+Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc and The Open Group.
+(This is POSIX.1-2008 with the 2013 Technical Corrigendum 1 applied.) In the
+event of any discrepancy between this version and the original IEEE and
+The Open Group Standard, the original IEEE and The Open Group Standard
+is the referee document. The original Standard can be obtained online at
+http://www.unix.org/online.html .
+
+Any typographical or formatting errors that appear
+in this page are most likely
+to have been introduced during the conversion of the source files to
+man page format. To report such errors, see
+https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/reporting_bugs.html .